




























































Lx -Libris -A*. 

ArTHUR IiNCOLN PEALE 







•ei. V OI ^ 








* 










# 




































































































* 




























































/b 


















< 






































































































































’ 















































































































■ 















































































































































































































































































































































































































































p 












































* 




' 









. 1 












• ' 


* * 


































* 

•• 





































SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 
Bulletin 30 


HANDBOOK 

OF 

AMERICAN INDIANS 

NORTH OF MEXICO 


EDITED BY 

FREDERICK WEBB HODGE 


IN TWO PARTS 

PART 1 



WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
(Fourth impression, September, 1912) 








LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL 


Smithsonian Institution, 

Bureau of American Ethnology, 

Washington , D. C ., July 1 , 1905 . 

Sir: I have the honor to submit herewith the manuscript of Bulletin 
30 of the Bureau of American Ethnology, entitled u Handbook of 
American Indians,” which has been in preparation for a number of 
years and has been completed for publication under the editorship 
of Mr F. W. Hodge. The Handbook contains a descriptive list of 
the stocks, confederacies, tribes, tribal divisions, and settlements north 
of Mexico, accompanied with the various names by which these have 
been known, together with biographies of Indians of note, sketches of 
their history, archeology, manners, arts, customs, and institutions, and 
the aboriginal words incorporated into the English language. 

Respectfully, 

W. H. Holmes, Chief. 

The Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, 

Washington , D. C. 

in 




r 




4 









V 


/ 



PREFACE 


During the early exploration and settlement of North America, a 
multitude of Indian tribes were encountered, having diverse customs 
and languages. Lack of knowledge of the aborigines and of their lan¬ 
guages led to man 3 ^ curious errors on the part of the early explorers and 
settlers: names were applied to the Indians that had no relation what¬ 
ever to their aboriginal names; sometimes nicknames were bestowed, 
owing perhaps to personal characteristics, fancied or real; sometimes 
tribes came to be known by names given by other tribes, which were 
often opprobrious; frequently the designation by which a tribal group 
was known to itself was employed, and as such names are oftentimes 
unpronounceable by alien tongues and unrepresentable by civilized 
alphabets, the result was a sorry corruption, varying according as the 
sounds were impressed on Spanish, English, French, Dutch, German, 
Russian, or Swedish ears. Sometimes, again, bands of a single tribe 
were given distinctive tribal names, while clans and gentes were often 
regarded as independent autonomous groups to which separate tribal 
designations likewise were applied. Consequently, in the literature 
relating to the American Indians, which is practically coextensive with 
the literature of the first three centuries of the New World, thousands 
of such names are recorded, the significance and application of which 
are to be understood only after much study. 

The need of a comprehensive work on the subject has been felt ever 
since scientific interest in the Indians was first aroused. Manj r lists of 
tribes have been published, but the scientific student, as well as the 
general reader, until the present time has been practically without the 
means of knowing any more about a given confederacy, tribe, clan, or 
settlement of Indians than was to be gleaned from casual references 
to it. 

The work of which this Handbook is an outgrowth had its inception 
as earl} T as 1873, when Prof. Otis T. Mason, now of the United States 
National Museum, began the preparation of a list of the tribal names 
mentioned in the vast literature pertaining to the Indians, and in due 
time several thousand names were recorded, with references to the 
works in which they appear. The work was continued by him until 
after the establishment of the Bureau, when other duties compelled its 
suspension. Later the task was assigned to Col. Garrick Mallery, who, 
however, soon abandoned it for investigations in a field which proved 


v 




VI 


PREFACE 


to be his life work, namely, the pictography and sign language 
of the American Indians. Meanwhile Mr James Mooney was engaged 
in compiling a similar list of tribes, with their synonymy, classified 
chiefly on a geographic basis and covering the entire Western Hemi¬ 
sphere—a work begun in 1873 and continued for twelve years before 
either he or the members of the Bureau of American Ethnology knew 
of the labors of each other in this field. 

Soon after the organization of the Bureau in 1879 , the work of record¬ 
ing a tribal synonymy was formally assigned to Mr Henry W. Henshaw. 
Up to this time a complete linguistic classification of the tribes north 
of Mexico, particularly in the West and Northwest, was not possible, 
since sufficient data had not been gathered for determining their lin¬ 
guistic affinities. Mr Henshaw soon perceived that a linguistic classi¬ 
fication of the Indian tribes, a work long contemplated by Major 
Powell, must precede and form the basis for a tribal synonymy, and to 
him, therefore, as a necessary preliminary, was intrusted the supervision 
of such a linguistic classification. By 1885 the Bureau’s researches in 
this direction had reached a stage that warranted the grouping of prac¬ 
tically all the known tribes by linguistic stocks. This classification 
is published in the Seventh Annual Report of the Bureau, and on it is 
based, with few exceptions, the present Handbook. 

Immediately on the completion of the linguistic classification, the 
entire force of the Bureau, under Mr Henshaw’s immediate direction, 
was assigned to the work that had now grown into a Dictionary and 
Synonymy of the Indian Tribes North of Mexico. As his special field 
Mr Henshaw devoted attention to several of the Californian stocks, 
and to those of the North Pacific coast, north of Oregon, including 
the Eskimo. To Mr Mooney were given the great and historically 
important Algonquian and Iroquoian families, and through his wide 
general knowledge of Indian history and customs he rendered aid in 
many other directions. A list of Linguistic Families of the Indian 
Tribes North of Mexico, with Provisional List of the Principal Tribal 
Names and Synonyms (55 pp., octavo), was at once printed for use by 
the collaborators of the Bureau in connection with the complete com¬ 
pilation, and although the list does not include the Californian tribes, 
it proved of great service in the earlier stages of the work. The 
2,500 tribal names and synonyms appearing in this list were taken 
chiefly from Mr Mooney’s manuscript; the linguistic classification was 
the result of the work that the Bureau had been conducting under 
Mr Henshaw’s supervision. 

Rev. J. Owen Dorsey assumed charge of the work on the Siouan, 
Caddoan, and Athapascan stocks; Dr W. J. Hoffman, under the per¬ 
sonal direction of Major Powell, devoted his energies to the Shoshonean 
family, and Mr Jeremiah Curtin, by reason of his familiarity' with a 
number of the Californian tribes, rendered direct aid to Mr Henshaw 


PREFACE 


VII 


in that field. Dr Albert S. Gatschet employed his time and long 
experience in the preparation of the material pertaining to the Musk- 
hogean tribes of southeastern United States, the Yuman tribes of the 
lower Colorado drainage and of Lower California, and various smaller 
linguistic groups. To Col. Garrick Mallery were assigned the French 
authors bearing on the general subject. With such aid the work 
received a pronounced impetus, and before the close of 1885 a large 
body of additional material had been recorded. Four years later the 
elaboration of the material pertaining to the Yuman, Piman, Keresan, 
Tanoan, and Zuhian stocks of the extreme Southwest was placed in 
charge of Mr F. W. Hodge, who brought it to completion. 

The work was continued under Mr Henshaw’s supervision until, in 
1893, ill health compelled his abandonment of the task. This is the 
more to be regretted as Mr Henshaw had in course of preparation a 
classification and nomenclature of the minor divisions of the linguistic 
stocks, which is essential to a proper presentation and a clear under¬ 
standing of the subject. After Mr Henshaw’s relinquishment of the 
work, Mr Hodge was given entire charge of it. But other official 
duties of members of the staff prevented the Handbook as a whole 
from making marked progress until 1899, when Dr Cyrus Thomas 
was intrusted with the task of revising the recorded material bearing 
on the Algonquian, Siouan, and Muskhogean families. 

In 1902 the work on the Handbook was again systematically taken 
up, at the instance of Secretary Langley, who detailed Mr Hodge, at 
that time connected immediately with the Smithsonian Institution, to 
undertake its general editorial supervision. The scope of the subject- 
matter was enlarged to include the relations between the aborigines and 
the Government; their archeology, manners, customs, arts, and indus¬ 
tries; brief biographies of Indians of note; and words of aboriginal 
origin that have found their wa}^ into the English language. It was 
proposed also to include Indian names that are purely geographic, but 
by reason of the vast number of these it was subsequently deemed advis¬ 
able to embod}^ them eventually in an independent work. Moreover, it 
was provided that the work should be illustrated as adequately as time 
and the illustrative material available would admit, a feature not orig¬ 
inally contemplated. To fully cover this vast field at the present time 
is impossible, by reason of the fact that research among the native 
tribes, notwithstanding the extensive and important work that has 
been accomplished in recent years, has not advanced far beyond the 
first stage, even when is taken into account the sum of knowledge 
derived from the researches of the Bureau and of other institutions, 
as well as of individuals. 

The lack of completeness of our present knowledge of the tribes was, 
perhaps, never better shown than when an attempt was made to carry 
out the enlarged plan of the Handbook. With its limited force the 


VIII 


PREFACE 


Bureau could scarcely hope to cover the entire range of the subject 
within a reasonable time; consequently various specialists not directly 
connected with the Bureau were invited to assist—an invitation that was 
accepted in a manner most gratifying. It is owing to the generous 
aid of these students that a work so complete as the Handbook is 
intended to be was made possible, and to them the Bureau owes its deep 
appreciation. That the Handbook has many imperfections there is no 
doubt, but it is hoped that in future editions the weak points may be 
strengthened and the gaps filled, until, as researches among the tribes 
are continued, the compilation will eventually represent a complete 
summary of existing knowledge respecting the aborigines of northern 
America. 

The scope of the Handbook is as comprehensive as its function neces¬ 
sitates. It treats of all the tribes north of Mexico, including the Eskimo, 
and those tribes south of the boundary more or less affiliated with those 
in the United States. It has been the aim to give a brief description of 
every linguistic stock, confederac}^ tribe, subtribe or tribal division, 
and settlement known to history or even to tradition, as well as the origin 
and derivation of every name treated, whenever such is known, and to 
record under each every form of the name and every other appellation 
that could be learned. These synonyms, in alphabetic order, are assem¬ 
bled as cross references in Part 2. 

Under the tribal descriptions a brief account of the ethnic relations 
of the tribe, its history, its location at various periods, statistics of 
population, etc., are included. Accompanying each s}mon 3 T m (the 
earliest known date always being given) a reference to the authority 
is noted, and these references form practically a bibliography of the 
tribe for those who desire to pursue the subject further. It is not 
claimed that every spelling of every tribal name that occurs in print is 
given, but it is believed that a sufficient number of forms is recorded 
to enable the student to identify practically every name by which any 
group of Indians has been known, as well as to trace the origin of 
many of the terms that have been incorporated into our geographic 
nomenclature. 

In many instances the treatises are satisfactorily illustrated; in 
others, much necessarily has been left to a future edition in order 
that the present publication may not be further delayed. The work 
of illustration was intrusted largely to Mr De Lancey Gill. 

The contributors to Part 1, in addition to those who have rendered 
valued assistance by affording information, correcting proofs, and in 
other ways, are as follows, the names being arranged in the alphabet¬ 
ical order of the initials attached to the signed articles: 

A. C. F. Alice C. Fletcher of Washington. 

A. F. C. Alexander F. Chamberlain of Clark University. 

A. H. A. Hrdlicka of the United States National Museum. 


PREFACE 


IX 


A. L. D. 

A. L. K. 

A. S. G. 

C. M. F. 

C. T. 

E. G. E. 

E. L. H. 

F. B. 

F. H. 

F. H. C. 

F. V. C. 

F. W. H. 

G. A. D. 
G. B. G. 

G. F. 

G. P. M. 

H. E. B. 
H. W. H. 
J. C. 

J. D. M. 

J. H. D. 

J. M. 

J. McL. 

J. N. B. H 
J. O. D. 

J. R. S. 

J. W. F. 

L. F. 

M. E. G. 
M. K. S. 

O. T. M. 

P. E. B. 

P. E. G. 
R. B. D. 

R. H. L. 

S. A. B. 

S. C. 

S. M. B. 
W. E. 

W. H. 

W. H. H. 
W. J. 

W. M. 


Anna L. Dawes of Pittsfield, Mass. 

A. L. Kroeber of the University of California. 

Albert S. Gatschet, formerly of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 
Cora M. Folsom of the Hampton Normal and Agricultural Institute, 
Hampton, Va. 

Cyrus Thomas of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

Elaine Goodale Eastman of Amherst, Mass. 

Edgar L. Hewett of Washington. 

Franz Boas of Columbia University. 

Frank Huntington, formerly of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

The late Frank Hamilton Cushing of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 
F. V. Coville of the United States Department of Agriculture. 

F. W. Hodge of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

George A. Dorsey of the Field Museum of Natural History. 

George Bird Grinnell of New York. 

Gerard Fowke of Saint Louis. 

George P. Merrill of the United States National Museum. 

Herbert E. Bolton of the University of Texas. 

Henry W. Henshaw, formerly of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 
The late Jeremiah Curtin of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

Joseph D. McGuire of Washington. 

Josiah H. Dortch of the Office of Indian Affairs. 

James Mooney of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

James McLaughlin of the Office of Indian Affairs. 

J. N. B. Hewitt of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

The late J. Owen Dorsey of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

John R. Swan ton of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

J. Walter Fewkes of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

Livingston Farrand of Columbia University. 

Merrill E. Gates of the Board of Indian Commissioners. 

M. K. Sniffen of the Indian Rights Association. 

Otis T. Mason of the United States National Museum. 

Paul Edmond Beckwith of the United States National Museum. 

P. E. Goddard of the University of California. 

Roland B. Dixon of Harvard University. 

Robert H. Lowie of New York. 

S. A. Barrett of the University of California. 

Stewart Culin of the Brooklyn Institute Museum. 

S. M. Brosius of the Indian Rights Association. 

Wilberforce Eames of the New York Public Library. 

Walter Hough of the United States National Museum. 

William H. Holmes of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

William Jones of the Field Museum of Natural History. 

The late Washington Matthews, United States Army. 


Bureau of American Ethnology, 

December , 1906. 


F. W. Hodge. 



HANDBOOK OF THE INDIANS 


A ANETUN. An extinct village of the 
Tututni, a Pacific Athapascan group 
formerly living on the Oregon coast. 

‘ A'a-ne'-tun.—Dorsey in Journ. Am. Folk-lore, in, 


236, 1890. 

Aatsosni (‘ narrow gorge ’). A Navaho 
clan. 

Aatsosni.—Matthews, Navaho Legends. 30, 1897. 

Ababco. An eastern Algonquian tribe 
or subtribe. Although mentioned in the 
original records of 1741 (Bacon, Laws of 
Maryland, 1765) in connection with the 
Hutsawaps and Tequassimoes as a dis¬ 
tinct tribe, they were probably only a 
division of the Choptank. This name is 
not mentioned in John Smith’s narrative 


of his exploration of Chesapeake bay. 
The band lived on Choptank r., Md., and 
in 1741 the Colonial government con¬ 
firmed them in the possession of their 
lands on the s. side of that stream, in Dor¬ 
chester co., near Secretary cr. By 1837 
the entire tribe to which they belonged 
had dwindled to a few individuals of 
mixed Indian and African blood. ( j. m. ) 
Ababeves.—Bozman, Hist. Maryland, I, 115, 1837. 

Abascal. A Diegueno rancheria near 
San Diego, s. Cal.—Ortega (1795) quoted 
by Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i, 253, 1886. 

Abuscal.—Ibid. Aguscal.—Ibid. 

Abayoa. A Tequesta village at the s. 
extremity of Florida pen., mentioned in 
connection with the expedition of Ponce 
de Leon (1512).—Barcia, Ensayo, 2,1723. 

Abbatotine (‘bighorn people’). A Na- 
hane tribe living in upper Pelly, Mac¬ 
millan, and Stewart r. valleys, Yukon T. 
Abbato-tena'.— Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 32, 
1877. Abba-to-tenah. —Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
271, 1870. Abbato-tinneh.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, 
in, 587,1882. Affats-tena.— Ibid., 1 ,145 (misprint). 
Ah-bah-to din-ne. —Hardisty in Smithson. Rep. 
1866, 311, 1872. Ambahtawoot. —Prichard, Phys. 
Hist., V, 377,1847. Ambah-tawut-dinni. —Latham in 
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1856 (trans. ‘ moun¬ 
tain sheep men’). Amba-ta-ut’ tine. —Richard¬ 
son, Arct. Exped., II, 7,1851. Am-ba-ta-ut’ tine. — 
Petitot, Diet. D6n0 Dindji6, xx, 1876. Ambataw- 
woot. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 28, 1852. Am- 
bawtamoot. —Ibid., ill, 525, 1853. Ambawtawhoot- 
dinneh.— Franklin, Narr., ii, 84, 1824. Ambawta- 
whoot Tinneh. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, v, 640,1882. 
Ambawtawoot. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., II, 19, 1836. Ambawtowhoot. —Balbi, Atlas 
Ethnog., 821,1826. Mountain Sheep Men. —Latham 
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1856. Sheep In¬ 
dians.— Franklin, Narr., ii, 84, 1824. Sheep Peo¬ 
ple. —Richardson, op. cit. 

Abbigadasset. An Abnaki sachem whose 
residence was on the coast of Maine near 
the mouth of Kennebec r. He conveyed 
tracts of land to Englishmen conjointly 


with Kennebis. In 1667 he deeded Sw r ans 
id. to Humphrev Davv.—Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. 3, 101, 1837. 

Abechiu (a Tewa onomatope represent¬ 
ing the screech of an owl.—E. L. Hew- 
ett). A prehistoric Tewa pueblo at a 
place called La Puente, on a bluff close to 
the s. bank of Bio Chama, 3 m. s. e. of the 
present town of Abiquiu, Rio Arriba co., 
N. Mex.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
iv, 56, 58, 1892. 

Abe-chiu. —Bandelier, op. cit., 39 (aboriginal 
name). Oj-po-re-ge. —Ibid., 58 (Santa Clara name: 
‘place where metates are made rough.’) 

Abercronk. A former (Potawatomi?) 
village on L. Michigan, in n. e. Porter 
co., Ind.—Hough, map in Indiana Geol. 
Rep. for 1882-3, 1883. 

Aberginian. A collective term used 
by the early settlers on Massachusetts 
bay for the tribes to the northward. 
Johnson, in 1654, says they consisted of 
the “Massachuset,” “Wippanap,” and 
“Tarratines.” The name may be a cor¬ 
ruption of Abnaki, or a misspelling for 
“aborigines.” The Wippanap are evi¬ 
dently the Abnaki, while the Tarratines 
are the same Indians, or a part of them. 

(J. M.) 

Abarginny.— Johnson (1628) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., n, 66, 1814. Abergeny. —Williams 
(1643), ibid., 1st s., Ill, 204, 1794. Aberginians.— 
Wood (1634) quoted by Schoolcraft, Pers. Mem., 
644,1851. Aberieney. —Levett (1628) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 3d s., VIII, 174, 1843. Aborginny,— 
Humphrey’s Acc’t, 281, 1730 (incorrectly quoting 
Johnson, 1628). 

Abihka. One of the oldest of the Upper 
Creek towns; exact location unknowm, 
but it was near upper Coosa r., Ala. 
Abacoes. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 462, 1885. 
Abchas.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 
79, 1854 (probably a misprint of Abekas). Abe- 
caes. —Coxe, Carolana, 25, 1741. Abecas.— Ibid., 
map. Abecka.— Romans, Florida, 309,1775. Abei- 
cas. —Alcedo, Dice. Geogr&fica, I, 3, 1786. Abei- 
kas. —P6nicaut (1708) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
n. s., 1,101,1869. Abekas.— Bossu (1759), Travels in 
Louisiana, I, 229, 1771. Abicas. —La Harpe (1703) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 29,1851. Abi’hka. — 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1 ,124,1884. Abikas. — 
La Harpe (1707) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 
36, 1851. Abikaws. —Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car., 
94, 1874. Albikas.— La Harpe (1714) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., hi, 43, 1851. Apiscas.— Williams, 
Florida, 75, 1837 (same?). Au-be-cuh. —Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch of Creek Country, 42, 1848. 
Aubocoes.— Macomb (1802) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. AfL, i, 680, 1832. Becaes.— Coxe, Carolana, 
25, 1741. Beicas.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
125,1884. Obekaws. —Von der Reck in Urlsperger, 
Ausfiihrliche Nachricht von den Saltzburgischen 
Emigranten, 871, 1735. Obika.— Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., 1 ,125,1884. Sak’hutka.—Gatschet, in- 

1 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-1 




2 


ABIHKA 


ABNAKI 


lB. A. E. 


formation (symbolic name, sig. ‘door,’ as the 
town was situated at the n. limits of the Creek 
country, and thus defended it against hostile 
inroads). 

Abihka. A town of the Creek Nation 
on the s. side of North fork of Canadian 
r., Tp. 11 n., R. 8 e., Ind. T. 

Abi’hka. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185,1888. 
Arbeka.— U. S. P. O. Guide, 366, 1904. 

Abikudshi ( ‘ Little Abihka’). A former 
Upper Creek town in n. Talladega co., 
Ala., on the right bank of Tallahatchee 
cr., 5 m. e. of Coosa r. It was settled 
by Oakfuskee Indians and some of the 
Natchez. Bartram (1775) states that 
the inhabitants spoke a dialect of Chick¬ 
asaw, which could have been true of' 
only a part. 

Abacooches.— Bartram, Travels, 461, 1791. Aba- 
couchees. —U. S. Ind. Treaties (1797), 68, 1837. 
Abbacoochees. —Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Abecoche. —Jefferys, Am. 
Atlas, 5, 1776. Abecochi. —Alcedo, Dice. Geog., I, 
3, 1786. Abecoochee.— U. S. Ind. Treaties (1814), 
162, 1837. Abecothee. —Lattr6, Carte des Etats- 
Unis, 1784. Abecouechis. —Baudry de Lozi5res, 
Voy. Louisiane, 241,1802. Abucbochu. —H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 315, 1836. Arbic- 
coochee.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 
301,1836. Au-ba-coo-che.— Hawkins (1814) in Am. 
State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 837, 1832. Au-be-coo- 
che. —Hawkins (1798-99),Sketch, 41, 1848. 

Abikudshi. A town of the Creek Nation 
on Deep fork of Canadian r., above Ocmul- 
gee, Ind. T. 

Abi’hkudshi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., II, 185, 
1888. 

Abiquiu (from Abechiu, q. v. ). A pueblo 
founded by the Spaniards prior to 1747 
at the site of the prehistoric Tewa pueblo 
of Fejiu, on the Rio Chama, Rio Arriba 
co., N. Mex. In Aug., 1747, it was raided 
by the Ute, who killed a number of the 
inhabitants and compelled its abandon¬ 
ment. It was resettled soon afterward, 
and in 1748 contained 20 families, but, 
owing to further depredations by the Ute 
and Navaho, was again abandoned, and 
in 1754 reoccupied. In 1765 the settle¬ 
ment (the mission name of which was 
Santa Rosa, later changed to Santo 
Tomas) contained 166 persons, and in the 
vicinity were 612 others. In 1779 the 
pueblo had 851 inhabitants, and at least 
as early as 1794 it was peopled in part by 
Genizaros, or Indian captives and fugi¬ 
tives, chiefly Hopi, whom the Spaniards 
had rescued or purchased. In 1808 Abi¬ 
quiu contained 122 Indians and 1,816 
whites and mestizos. The town was 
thoroughly Mexicanized by 1854. See 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 280, 1889; 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 54, 
1892. (f. w. h. ) 

Abequin.— Kern in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 39, 
1854. Abicu. —Arrowsmith, Map of N. A., 1795, 
ed. 1814. Abicui.— Humboldt, Atlas Nouv. Es- 
pagne, carte 1, 1811. Abiguin.— Ward in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1867, 210, 1868. Abiquico.— Lane (1854) 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689, 1855. Abi- 
quieu.— Escudero, Noticias Nuevo-M6x., 14, 1849. 
Abiquin.— Hezio (1797-98) in Meline, Two Thou¬ 
sand Miles, 260, 1867. Abiquxri, —Miihlenpfordt, 
Mejico, II, 533, 1844. Abiquiu.— Ms. of 1750 cited 
by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 174, 1890. 
Abricu.— Pike, Exped., map, 1810. Abuquin.— 


Johnston in Emory, Recoil., 569, 1848. Albi- 
quin. —Simpson, Rep., 2, 1850. Aluquia.— Busc.h- 
mann, N. Mex., 245, 1858. Jo-so-ge. —Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 54, 1892 (Tewa name; 
from Jo-so, their name for the Hopi, because 
most of the inhabitants were of that tribe). 
Santa Rosa de Abiquiu. —Dominguez y Escalante 
(1776) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 2d s., I, 378, 1854. San 
Tomas de Abiquiu —Ward in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 
213,1868. Santo Tomas de Abicui. —Orozco y Berra 
in Anales Minis. Fom., VI, 255,1882. Santo Tomas 
de Abiquiu. —Alencaster (1805) in Meline, Two 
Thousand Miles, 212, 1867. Sta Rosa Abiquiu. — 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 252, 1889. 

Abittibi ( abita , ‘half,’ ‘middle/ ‘in¬ 
termediate’; bi, a secondary stem refer¬ 
ring to a state or condition, here alluding 
to water; -</, a locative suffix: hence ‘half- 
way-across water,’ referring to the situa¬ 
tion of Abittibi lake.—W. Jones). A little 
known Algonkin band whose habitat has 
been the shores of Abittibi lake, Ont. 
The first recorded notice of them is in the 
Jesuit Relation for 1640. It is said in the 
Relation of 1660 that the Iroquois had 
warred upon them and two other tribes 
of the same locality. Du Lhut (1684) 
includes them in the list of nations of the 
region n. of L. Superior whose trade it 
was desirable should be turned from the 
English of Hudson bay to the French. 
Chauvignerie (1736) seems to connect 
this tribe, estimated at 140 warriors, with 
the Tetes de Boule. He mentions as 
totems the partridge and the eagle. They 
were reported by the Canadian Indian 
Office to number 450 in 1878, after which 
date they are not officially mentioned. 
(. 1 . m. c. t. ) 

Abbetikis. —Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind.Tribes, 111 ,556,1853. Abbitibbes.— Keane 
in Stanford, Compendium, 498, 1878. Abitibis. — 
Harris, Voy. and Trav., 1 , map, 1705. Abittibbes. — 
Walch, map, 1805. Abittibis. —Chauvignerie (1736) 
in N. Y. Doc. Hist., ix, 1054, 1855. Outabitibek. — 
Jesuit Rel. 1660, in, 12, 1858. Outabytibis. —Bac- 
queville de la Potherie, 11 , 49, 1753. Outatibes. — 
Harris, Voy. and Trav., 1 , map, 1705. Tabitibis.— 
Du Lhut (1684) in Margry, D6c., Vi, 51, 1886. Ta- 
bittibis.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. Hist., 
ix, 1053, 1855. Tabittikis.— Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ill, 555, 1853. Tibitibis. —Hennepin, New 
Disc., map, 1698. 

Abmoctac. A former Costanoan village 
connected with Dolores mission, San Fran¬ 
cisco, Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 
18, 1861. 

Abnaki. ( Wdbundki, from wdbun, a 
term associated with ‘light,’ ‘white,’ and 
refers to the morning and the east; aki 
‘earth,’ ‘land’; hence Wdbundki is an 
inanimate singular term signifying ‘east- 
land,’ or ‘morning-land,’ the elements 
referring to animate dwellers of the east 
being wanting.—Jones). A name used 
by the English and French of the colonial 
period to designate an Algonquian con¬ 
federacy centering in the present state of 
Maine, and by the Algonquian tribes to 
include all those of their own stock resi¬ 
dent on the Atlantic seaboard, more par¬ 
ticularly the “Abnaki” in the Nand the 
Delawares in the s. More recently it has 
been applied also to the emigrant Oneida, 


BULL. 30] 


ABNAKI 


3 


Stockbridges, and Munsee about Green 
bay, Wis. By the Puritans they were 
generally called Tarrateens, a term appar¬ 
ently obtained from the southern New 
England tribes; and though that is the 
general conclusion of modern authorities, 
there is some doubt as to the aboriginal 
origin of this term. In later times, after 
the main body of the Abnaki had re¬ 
moved to Canada, the name was applied 
more especially to the Penobscot tribe. 
The Iroquois called them Owenunga, 
which seems to be merely a modification 
of Abnaki, or Abnaqui, the name applied 
by the French and used by most modern 
writers. The form Openango has been 
used more especially to designate the 
eastern tribes. Maurault (Hist, des 
Aben., 2,1866) says: “Some English au¬ 
thors have called these savages Waba- 
noaks, ‘those of the east’; this is the 
reason they are called ‘Abenakis’ by some 
among us. This name was given them 
because they were toward the east with 
reference to the Narragansetts.” 

Ethnic relations .—In his tentative ar¬ 
rangement Brinton (Len. Leg., 11, 1885) 
brings into one group the Nascapee, Mic- 
mac, Malecite, Etchimin, and Abnaki, 
but this is more of a geographic than a 
linguistic grouping. Vetromile (Abnakis, 
20, 1866), following other authors, says 
that we should ‘ ‘ embrace under this term 
all the tribes of the Algic [Algonquian] 
family, who occupy or have occupied the 
e. or n. e. shore of North America; thus, 
all the Indians of the seashores, from 
Virginia to Nova Scotia, were Abnaki.” 
Maurault gives the following as the prin¬ 
cipal tribes of the Abnaki confederacy: 
Kanibesinnoaks (Norridgewock in part; 
see Kennebec and Norridgewock)', Pat- 
suikets (Sokoki in part); Sokouakiaks 
(Sokoki); N urhantsuaks (Norridgewock); 
Pentagoets (Penobscot); Etemankiaks 
(Etchimin); Ouarastegouiaks (Malecite), 
the name Abnaki being applied in the 
restricted sense to the Indians of Kenne¬ 
bec r. All these tribes spoke substantially 
the same language, the chief dialectal 
differences being between the Etchimin 
and the other tribes of the group. The 
Etchimin, who formed a subgroup of the 
Abnaki confederacy, included the Passa- 
maquoddy and Malecite. Linguistically 
the Abnaki do not appear to be more 
closely related to the Micmac than to the 
Delaware group, and Dr William Jones 
finds the Abnaki closely related to the 
central Algonquian languages. In cus¬ 
toms and beliefs they are more nearly 
related to the Micmac, and their ethnic 
relations appear to be with the tribes n. 
of the St Lawrence. 

History .—The history of the Abnaki 
may be said to begin with Verrazano’s 
visit in 1524. The mythical accounts of 


Norumbega (q. v.) of the early writers 
and navigators finally dwindled to a 
village of a few bark-covered huts under 
the name Agguncia, situated near the 
mouth of Penobscot r., in the country of 
the Abnaki. In 1604 Champlain ascended 
the Penobscot to the vicinity of the pres¬ 
ent Bangor, and met the “lord” of No¬ 
rumbega, doubtless an Abnaki chief. 
From that time the Abnaki formed an 
important factor in the history of the 
region now embraced in thestate of Maine. 
From the time of their discovery until 
their partial withdrawal to Canada they 
occupied the general region from the St 
Johns to the Saco; but the earliest English 
accounts indicate that about 1605-20 the 
s. w. part of the coast of Maine was occu¬ 
pied by other Indians, whose chief seat 
was near Pemaquid, and who were at war 
with the Abnaki, or Tarrateen, as the 
English termed them, who were more to 
the n; but these other tribes were finally 
conquered by the Abnaki and probably 



GROUP OF ABNAKI (PASSAMAQUODDY) 


absorbed by them. Who these Indians 
were is unknown. The Abnaki formed 
an early attachment for the French, 
chiefly through the influence of their 
missionaries, and carried on an almost 
constant war with the English until the 
fall of the French power in America. 
The accounts of these struggles during 
the settlement of Maine are familiar 
episodes in American history. As the 
whites encroached on them the Abnaki 
gradually withdrew to Canada and settled 
chiefly at Becancour and Sillery, the 
latter being afterward abandoned by 
them for St Francis, near Pierreville, 
Quebec. The Penobscot, Passamaquoddy, 
and Malecite, however, remained in t%eir 
ancient homes, and in 1749 the Penobscot, 
as the leading tribe, made peace with the 
English, accepting fixed bounds. Since 
that period the different tribes have 
gradually dwindled into insignificance. 
The descendants of those who emigrated 






4 


ABNAKI 


[B. A. E. 


from Maine, together with remnants of 
other New England tribes, are now at 
St Francis and Becancour, in Quebec, 
where, under the name of Abnaki, they 
numbered 395 in 1903. At the same 
time the Malecite, or Amalicite, were 
numbered at 801 in several villages in 
New Brunswick and Quebec, with about 
625 Penobscot and Passamaquoddy in 
Maine. The present Penobscot say they 
number between 300 and 400, while the 
Passamaquoddy claim as many as 800 
souls. 

Customs and beliefs .—According to the 
writers on early Maine, the Abnaki were 
more gentle in manners and more docile 
than their western congeners. Yet they 
were implacable enemies and, as Maurault 
states, watched for opportunities of re¬ 
venge, as did other Indians. Notwith¬ 
standing Vetromile’s statement to the 
contrary, if Maurault’s assertion (Hist. 
Abenakis, 25, 1866) applies to this tribe, 
as seems evident, they, like most other 
tribes, were guilty of torturing their pris¬ 
oners, except in the case of females, who 
were kindly treated. Although relying 
for subsistence to a large extent on hunt¬ 
ing, and still more on fishing, maize was 
an important article of diet, especially in 
winter. Sagard states that in his day 
they cultivated the soil in the manner of 
the Huron. They used the rejected and 
superfluous fish to fertilize their fields, 
one or two fish being placed near the roots 
of the plant. Their houses or wigwams 
were conical in form and covered with 
birch-bark or with woven mats, and sev¬ 
eral families occupied a single dwelling. 
Their villages were, in some cases at least, 
inclosed with palisades. Each village had 
its council house of considerable size, 
oblong in form and roofed with bark; 
and similar structures were used by the 
males of the village who preferred to 
club together in social fellowship. Po¬ 
lygamy was practised but little, and 
the marriage ceremony was of the sim¬ 
plest character; presents were offered, 
and on their acceptance marriage was 
consummated. Each tribe had a war 
chief, and also a civil chief whose duty it 
was to preserve order, though this was 
accomplished through advice rather than 
by command. They had two councils, 
the grand and the general. The former, 
consisting of the chiefs and two men from 
each family, determined matters that 
were of great importance to the tribe, 
and pronounced sentence of death on 
those deserving that punishment. The 
general council, composed of all the tribe, 
including males and females, decided 
questions relating to war. The Abnaki 
believed in the immortality of the soul. 
Their chief deities were Kechi Niwaskw 
and Machi Niwaskw, representing, re¬ 


spectively, the good and the evil; the for¬ 
mer, they believed, resided on an island 
in the Atlantic; Machi Niwaskw was the 
more powerful. According to Maurault 
they believed that the first man and 
woman were created out of a stone, but 
that Kechi Niwaskw, not being satisfied 
with these, destroyed them and created 
two more out of wood, from whom the 
Indians are descended. They buried 
their dead in graves excavated in the soil. 

Tribal divisions .—The tribes included 
in the confederacy as noted by Maurault 
have already been given. In a letter 
sent by the Abnaki in 1721 to the gov¬ 
ernor of New England their divisions are 
given as follows: Narantsouuk (Norridge- 
wock), Pentugouet (Penobscot), Nara- 
kamigou (Rocameca), Anmissoukanti 
(Amaseconti), Muanbissek, Pegouakki 
(Pequawket, Me.), Medoktek (Medoc- 
tec), Kwapahag, Pesmokanti (Passama¬ 
quoddy), Arsikantegou (Arosagunta- 
cook), Ouanwinak (Wewenoc, s. edge of 
N. H.). The following is a full list of 
Abnaki tribes: Accominta, Amaseconti, 
Arosaguntacook, Etchimin, Malecite, 
Missiassik, Norridgewock (the Abnaki 
in the most limited sense), Passama¬ 
quoddy, Penobscot, Pequawket, Roca¬ 
meca, Sokoki, and Wewenoc. The bands 
residing on St Croix and St Johns rs. 
spoke a different dialect from those to 
the southward, and were known collect¬ 
ively as Etchimin. They are now known 
as Passamaquoddy and Malecite. Al¬ 
though really a part of the Abnaki, they 
were frequently classed as a distinct body, 
while on the other hand the Pennacook 
tribes, although distinct from the Abnaki, 
were often classed with them on account 
of their connection during the Indian 
wars and after their removal to Canada. 
According to Morgan they had fourteen 
gentes: 1, Mals'-sum, Wolf; 2, Pis-suh 7 , 
Black Wildcat; 3, Ah-weh 7 -soos, Bear; 
4, Skooke, Snake; 5, Ah-lunk-soo, Spotted 
Animal; 6, Ta-ma/-kwa, Beaver; 7, Ma- 
guh-le-boo 7 , Caribou; 8, Ka-biLh 7 -seh, 
Sturgeon; 9, Moos-kw&-suh 7 , Muskrat; 10, 
K’-che-ga-gong 7 -go, Pigeon Hawk; 11, 
Meh-ko-a 7 , Squirrel; 12, Che-gwa 7 -lis, 
Spotted Frog; 13, Koos-koo 7 , Crane; 14, 
Ma-da 7 -weh-soos, Porcupine. According 
to Chauvignerie their principal totems 
were the pigeon and the bear, while they 
also had the partridge, beaver, and otter 
totems. 

The Abnaki villages, so far as their 
names have been recorded, were Amase¬ 
conti, Ammoncongan, Aquadocta (?), 
Arosaguntacook, Asnela, Aucocisco, Bag- 
aduce, Becancour, Calais (Passama¬ 
quoddy! Gunasquamekook (Passama¬ 
quoddy), Imnarkuan (Passamaquoddy), 
Kennebec, Ketangheanycke, Lincoln 
Island, Masherosqueck, Mattawamkeag 


BULL. 30] 


ABNAKI 


5 


(Penobscot), Mattinacook (Penobscot), 
Mecadacut, Medoctec (Malecite), Mee- 
combe, Missiassik (Missiassik), Moratig- 
gon (?), Moshoquen, Muanbissek (?), 
Muscongus, Negas, Negusset (?), Nor- 
ridgewoek, Norumbega, Okpaak (Male¬ 
cite), Olamon (Penobscot), Old Town 
(Penobscot), Ossaghrage, Ouwerage, 
Pasharanack, Passadumkeag (Penob¬ 
scot), Passamaquoddy (village?), Pau- 
huntanuc, Pemaquid, Penobscot, Pequaw- 
ket, Pocopassum, Precaute, Rocameca, 
Sabino, Sagadahoc, Sainte Anne (Male¬ 
cite), St Francis, Satquin, Sebaik (Passa¬ 
maquoddy), Segocket, Segotago, Sillery, 
Sokoki (village?), Taconnet, Tobique 
(Malecite), Unyjaware, Viger (Malecite), 
Wabigganus, Waccogo, Wewenoc (vil¬ 
lage?). (j. M. C. T.) 

Abanakees.—Ross, Fur Hunters, 1,98, 1855. Aban- 
akis.—Doc. of 1755 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
342,1858. Abanaquis.—Report of 1821, Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 2d s., X, 127,1823. Abanaquois.—Vetro- 
mile in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 214, 1859 (old 
form). Abenaguis.—La Potherie, Hist. Am., i, 199, 
1753. Abenaka.—Ibid. Abena'kes.—Boyd, Ind. 
Local Names, 1, 1885. Abenakias.—Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 125, 1816. Abenakis.—Du Lhut 
(1679) in Margry, Decouvertes, vi, 22, 1886 (men¬ 
tioned as distinct from the Openagos). Aben- 
a'kiss.—Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 1, 1885. Aben- 
akkis.—Jefferys, French Dominions, pt. I, map, 
118,1761. Abenaques.—Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 

I, 139, 1824. Ab«naquioicts.—Champlain (1632), 
(Euvres, v, pt. 2, 214, 1870. Abenaquiois.—-Chain- 
plain (1632), (Euvres, V, pt. 2, 233, 1870. Abena- 
quioue.—Sagard (1636), Canada, iv, 889, 1866. 
Abenaquis.—French document (1651) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 5, 1855 (the same form is used 
for the Delawares by Maximilian, Travels, 35, 
1843). Abenati.—Hennepin, Cont. of New Disc., 
95, 1698. Abenequas.—Hoyt, Antiquarian Re¬ 
searches, 90, 1824. Abenquois.—Hind, Labrador 
Pen., i, 5,1863. Abernaquis.—Perkins and Peck, 
Annals of the West, 680,1850. Abinaqui.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 174,1857. Abinohkie.—Dalton 
(1783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s„ x, 123, 1809. 
Abnakis.—Vetromile in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., 
Vi, 208, 1859. Abnaquies.—Willis in Maine Hist. 
Soc. Coll., iv, 95, 1856. Abnaquiois.—Jesuit Rela¬ 
tion, 1639, 25, 1858. Abnaquis.—Historical Mag., 
2d s., i, 61, 1867. Abnaquois.—Vetromile in Maine 
Hist. Soc. Coll., VI, 214, 1859. Abnaquotii.—Du 
Creux, map (1660) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 
210, 1859. Abnasque.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 26, 
1866 (possible French form). Abnekais.—Albany 
conference (1754) in N. Y. Doc. C<>1. Hist., vi, 
886,1855. Abonakies.—Croghan (1765) in Monthly 
Am. Jour. Geol., 272, 1831. Abonnekee.—Allen 
in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 515, 1831. Agua- 
noxgi.—Gatschet, Cherokee MS., B. A. E., 1881 
(Cherokee name for one Delaware; plural, An&- 
guanoxgi). Akotsakannha.—Cuoq in Brinton, 
Lenape Leg., 255, 1885 (Iroquois name: ‘for¬ 
eigner’). Ak8anake.—Le Jeune (1641) in Jes. 
Rel., i, 72, 1858 (Huron pronunciation of Waba- 
naki or Abanaki, ‘east land’). Albenaquioue.— 
Sagard (1636), Canada, iv, 889,1866. Albenaquis.— 
Du Pratz in Drake, Book of Inds., bk. iv, 40,1848. 
Alnanbai.—Vassal in Can. Ind. Aflf. 1884, 27, 1885 
(own name: ‘Indians’ or ‘men’). Anagonges.— 
Bayard (1689)in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 621, 1853. 
Anaguanoxgi.—Gatschet, Cherokee MS., B. A. E., 
1881 (Cherokee name for the Delawares; see 
Aguanoxgi above). Annogonges.—Ba.vard (1689) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 611, 1853. Anogon- 
gaars.—Livingston (1730) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
v, 912,1855. A-pa-nax'-ke.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 

II, 1884 (given as Choctaw name for the Pawnee, 
but really for the Delawares). Aquannaque.— 
Sagard (1626), Voyage du Hurons, pt. 2, Diet., 
“nations,” 1865 (Huron pronunciation; qu=b of 
‘Abnaki’ or ‘ Wabanaki,’and applied by them to 


the ‘Algoumequin’ or Algonkin). Aubinaukee.— 
Jones, Ojebway Inds., 178, 1861. Bashabas.— 
Gorges (1658) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, 62, 1847 
(plural form of the name or title of the ruling 
chief about Pemaquid; used by Gorges as the 
name of his tribe). Benaquis.—Gatschet, Caugh- 
nawaga MS., B. A. E., 1882 (name used by 
French Canadians). Cannon-gageh-ronnons. - 
Lamberville (1684) in Doc. Hist. N. Y., I, 142, 
1849 (Mohawk name). Eastlanders.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, m, 353, 1853 (given as mean¬ 
ing of ‘Wabanakis’). Moassones.—Popham(1607) 
in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 357, 1857 (Latin 
form, from Moasson, Mawooshen, or Moasham, 
used by early English writers for the Abnaki 
country. Ballard, U. S. Coast Survey Rep. 252, 
1871, thinks it is the Penobscot word* Maweshe- 
nook, ‘berry place’). Moassons.—Willis (?) in 
Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 359, 1857 (from Pop- 
ham’s form, Moassones). Narankamigdok epitsik 
arenanbak,— Vetromile, Abnakis, 23, 1866 (‘men 
living on the high shores of the river’: given 
as collective term used by Abnaki to designate 
all their villages; real meaning‘villages of the 
Narankamigdog’). Natio Euporum.—Du Creux, 
map (1660) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 211, 
1859 (misprint of the following). Natio Lu- 
porum.—Same in Vetromile, Abnakis, 21, 1866 
(‘wolf nation’). Natsagana.—Gatschet, Caugh- 
nawagaMS., B. A. E., 1*82 JCaughnawaga name; 
singular, Ruts&gana). O-ben-aki.—O. T. Mason, 
oral information, 1903 (name as pronounced by 
a native). Obenaquiouoit.—Champlain (1629), 
CEuvres, v, pt. 2, 196, 1870. Obinacks.—Clinton 
(1745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 276, 1855. 
Obunegos.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 196, 1855 
(=Delaw r ares). Olinacks.—Clinton (1745) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 281, 1855 (misprint). Ona- 
gongues.—Bellomont (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., iv. 834, 1854. Onagonque.—Schuyler (1693), 
ibid., 64. Onagunga.—Colden (1727) quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 174, 1857. Ona- 
gungees.—Johnson (1750) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., VI, 592,1855. Onconntehocks. —La Montagne 
(1664), ibid., xm, 378, 1881 (same?). Ondiakes.— 
Albany treaty (1664;, ibid., ill, 68, 1853. One- 
jages.—Document of 1664, ibid., xm, 389, 1881 
(same?). Onnagonges.—Bayard (1689), ibid., hi, 
621, 1853. Onnagongues.—Document of 1688, 
ibid., 565, 1853. Onnagongwe.—Bellomont (1700), 
ibid., iv, 758, 1854 (used as the Iroquois name 
of one of the Abnaki villages). Onnagonques.— 
Schuyler (1687), ibid.,m, 482,1853. Onnogonges.— 
Ft Orange conference (1664), ibid., xm, 379, 
1881. Onnogongwaes.—Schuyler (1701), ibid., iv, 
836,1854. Onnongonges.—Bayard (1689), ibid., Ill, 
611, 1853. Onoconcquehagas.—Sehelluyne (1663), 
ibid., XIII, 309, 1881. Onoganges.—Dareth (1664), 
ibid., 381. Onogongoes.—Schuyler (1724) in Hist. 
Mag., 1st s., x, 116, 1866. Onogonguas.—Stoddert 
(1753) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 780, 1855. 
Onogungos.—Governor of Canada (1695), ibid., 
iv, 120, 1854. Onokonquehaga.—Ft Orange con¬ 
ference (1663), ibid., xm, 298,1881. Onongongues.— 
Bayard (1689), ibid., ill, 621, 1853. Openadyo.— 
Williamson in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ix, 92, 
1846. Openagi.—Sanford, U. S., cxxiv, 1819. 
Openagos.—Du Lhut (1679) in Margry, D£c., 
Vi, 22, 1886. Openangos.—La Hontan, New Voy., 
i, 230, 1703 (sometimes used specifically for the 
Passamaquoddy). 0-po-nagh-ke.—H. R. Rep.299, 
44th Cong.. 1st sess., 1, 1876 (Delawares). Oppen- 
ago.—Cadillac (1703) in Margry, D6c., v, 304, 
1883 (‘Oppenago ou Loups,’ near Detroit, prob¬ 
ably the Delawares). O-puh-nar'-ke.—Morgan, 
Consanguinity and Affinity, 289, 1871 (‘people 
of the east’: the Delawares). Ouabenakiouek.— 
Champlain (1629), (Euvres, v, pt. 2, note, 196, 
1870. 8abenakis.—Lusignan (1749) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vi, 519, 1855. Ouabenaquis.—La Salle 
(1683) in Margry, D6c., II, 363, *1877. Ouabna- 
quia.—Ibid., 11 , 157, 1877 (used in collective 
sense). Oubenakis.—Chauvignerie (1736) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 553, 1853. 8bena- 
kis.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 1052,1855. Owenagungas.—Colden (1727), 
Five Nat., 95, 1747 (so called by Iroquois). 
Owenagunges.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 99, 
1816. Owenagungies,—Maeauley, N. Y., II, 174, 


G 


ABO-ABRADING IMPLEMENTS 


[b. a. e. 


1829. Owenungas,—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 
513, 1853 (Iroquois name for the Abnaki, Mic- 
inac, etc.). Panaxki.—Gatschet, Tonkawe and 
Caddo MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Caddo name 
for Delawares). Pen'ikis.—Hewitt, oral infor¬ 
mation, 1886 (Tuscarora name for Abnaki 
living with the Tuscarora). Skacewanilom.— 
Vassal in Can. Ind. Aff., 28, 1885 (so called by 
Iroquois). Taranteens.—Shea, Mississippi Val., 
165,1852. Tarateens.—Barstow, Hist. NewHamp., 
13,1853. Tarenteens.—Godfrey, in Maine Hist. Soc. 
Coll., vil, 99, 1876. Tarentines.—Mourt (1622) in 
Mass. Hist.Soc. Coll.,2ds.,ix,57,1822. Tarentins.— 
Bradford (1650?) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., in, 
104,1856. Tarranteeris.—Hist. Mag., 1st s., x, 116, 
1866 (misprint). Tarrantens.—Levett (1628) in 
Maine Hist. Soc. Coll.,ll, 93, 1847. Tarrantines.— 
Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 117, 
1837. Tarrateens. —Smith (1631) in Maine Hist.Soc. 
Coll., vn, 101,1876. Tarratines.—Wonder-working 
Providence (1654) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., n, 
66,1814. Tarratins.—Keane in Stanford, Compen., 
537, 1878. Tarrenteenes.—Wood (1639) in Barton, 
New Views, xix, 1798. Tarrenteens.—Richardson, 
Arctic Exp., II, 38, 1851. Tarrentens.—Levett 
(1628) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vm, 175,1843. 
Tarrentines.— Smith (1629) Virginia, n, 192, reprint 
1819. Terentines.—Smith (1631) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 3d s., Ill, 22, 1833. Terentynes.—Smith 
(1616), ibid., vi, 131, 1837. Unagoungas.—Salis¬ 
bury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 519,1881. 
Vnnagoungos.—Brockhols (1678) in Maine Hist. 
Soc. Coll., v, 31, 1857 (old style). Wabanackies, — 
McKennev, Memoirs and Travels, i, 81, 1846. 
Wabanakees.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 304,1853 
(used collectively). Wabanakis.—Ibid., hi, 353, 
note, 1853. Wabamka.—Dorsey, MS. (pegiha Diet., 
B. A. E., 1878 (Omaha and Ponka name for Dela¬ 
wares). Wabanike.—Dorsey, MS. Kansas vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name for Delawares). 
Wabanoaks.—Maurault, Hist, des Aben., 2, 1866 
(English form). Wabanocky.—McKenney (1827) 
in McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, hi, 134,1854 
(used for emigrant Oneida, Munsee, and Stock- 
bridges at Green bay, Wis.). Wabenakies.—Ken¬ 
dall, Travels, ill, 61,1809. Wabenaki senobe.— Gat¬ 
schet, Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobscot 
name). Wabenauki.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 97, 1854 (applied by other Indians to 
those of Hudson r.). Wab-na-ki.—Hist. Mag., 1st 
s., IV, 180, 1860. Wampum-makers.—Gale, Upper 
Miss., 166, 1867 (said to be the French name for 
the Delawares in 1666;_evidently a corruption of 
Wapanachki). Wanbanaghi.—Vetromile, Abna- 
kis, 19, 1866 (proper form). Wanbanaghi.—Ibid., 
27 (proper form, the first an being strongly nasal). 
Wanbanaki.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 27-42, 1866 

(proper form; an in first syllable strongly nasal). 
Wanbanakkie.—Kidder in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., 
vi, 231, 1859 (given as a correct form). Wanb-na- 
ghi.—Vetromile in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 214, 
1859. Wapanachk.—Heckewelder quoted by Vet¬ 
romile, Abnakis, 23,1866 (given by Heckewelder 
forDelawares). Wapanachki.—Barton, New Views, 
xxvii, 1798 (name given to Delawares by western 
tribes). Wapanaki.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 27-42, 
1866 (Delaware form). Wapa'na‘ki a .—Wm. Jones, 
inf’n, 1905 (sing. anim. form of the name in Sauk, 
Fox, and Kickapoo; Wdpana'kihqgi, pi. anim. 
form). Wapanakihak.—Gatschet, Sac and Fox 
MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Fox name forDelawares; sin¬ 
gular, W&pan&ki). Wapanaxki ha-akon.—Gat¬ 
schet, Tonkawe and Caddo MS. vocab., B. A. E., 

1884 (Tonkawa name for Delaware man). Wapa- 
nends.— Rafinesque, Am. Nations, I, 147, 1836. 
Wapaniq'kyu. —Dorsey, MS. Osage vocab., B. A. 
E., 1883 (Osage name for Delawares). Wapen- 
acki.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 51, 1872 
(applied to all the eastern tribes). Wappen- 
ackie.— Ibid., 355 (used either for Delawares or 
for Wappingers). Wappenos.— Ibid., 51 (applied 
to all eastern tribes). Wa-pu-nah-kP.— Grayson, 
MS. Creek vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name ap¬ 
plied to the Delawares). Wau-ba-na-kees.— Wis 
Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 182, 1868 (Stockbridges and 
Oneidas at Green bay, Wis.). Waub-un-uk-eeg.— 
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 32 

1885 (Chippewa name for Delawares). Waw-, 
bunukkeeg.—Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 (Ottawa 


name for Stockbridge Indians in Wisconsin). 
W’Banankee.—Kidder in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., 
vi, 244,1859 (name used by themselves, as nearly 
as can be represented in English, accenting last 
syllable). Whippanaps.—Humphrey, Acct., 281, 
1730 (after Johnson). Wippanaps.—Johnson (1654) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., n, 66, 1814 (men¬ 
tioned as part of the “Abarginny men” and 
distinct from the “Tarratines”). Wo-a-pa- 
nach-ki. — Macauley, N. Y., II, 164, 1829 (used as 
synonymous with Lenni Lenape for tribes of 
eastern Pennsylvania, New Jersey, New York, 
Delaware, and Connecticut). Wobanaki.—Kid¬ 
der in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., VI, 243, 1859 (title of 
spelling book of 1830). 

Abo ( A-bo A former pueblo of the 
Tompiros division of the Piros, on the Ar¬ 
royo del Empedradillo, about 25 m. e. of 
the Rio Grande and 20 m. s. of Manzano, 
in Valencia co., N. Mex. Whether the 
pueblo was built on both sides of the 
arroyo, or whether there were two pue¬ 
blos successively occupied, has not been 
determined. It was first mentioned in 
1598 by Juan de Onate; it became the 
seat of the mission of San Gregorio, 
founded in 1629 by Fray Francisco de 
Acevedo, who erected a large church and 
monastery, the walls of which are still 
standing, and died there Aug. 1, 164-4. 
Tenabo and Tabira were the visitas of 
Abo mission. Considering the ruins now 
on both banks of the arroyo as those of 
a single pueblo, the population during 
the early mission period was probably 
2,000. Owing to Apache depredations 
many of the inhabitants fled to El Paso 
as early as 1671, and prior to the Pueblo 
insurrection of 1680 the village was en¬ 
tirely abandoned for the same cause. The 
Piros of Senecu del Sur claim to be the 
last descendants of the Abo people. See 
Vetancurt (1697), Cronica, 325, repr. 1871; 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 270, 
1892; Abert in Emory, Recon., 488, 
1848. (f. w. h. ) 

Abbo.— Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 114, 1871. 
Abio.—Abert in Emory, Reconnoissance, 490,1848. 
Abo.—Onate, op. cit., 123. Ako.—Simpson in 
Smithson, Rep. 1869, map, 1872 (misprint). Avo.— 
Wislizenus, Memoir, 24,1848. San Gregorio Abbo.— 
Vetancurt, Crbnica, 325, repr. 1871. S. Gregoio de 
Abo.— Senex, map, 1710 (misprint). S. Gregoria.— 
Giissefeld, Charte America, 1797 (wronglv located 
on Rio Grande). S. Gregorio de Abo.—De l’lsle, 
Carte Mexique et Floride, 1703. Sf Gregory.— 
Kitchin, Map N. A., 1787. 

Abon. See Pone. 

Aboreachic. A small Tarahumare pueblo 
not far from Norogachic, in Chihuahua, 
Mexico. The name is apparently a cor¬ 
ruption of aoreachic ‘ where there is moun¬ 
tain cedar,’ but should not be con¬ 
founded with that of the village of 
Aoreachic.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. ’ 

Abrading Implements. In shaping their 
numerous implements, utensils, and orna¬ 
ments of stone, wood, bone, shell, and 
metal, the native tribes were largely de¬ 
pendent on abrading implements, of 
which there are many varieties. Of first 
importance are grinding stones and whet¬ 
stones of more or less gritty rock, while 


BULL. :«)] 


ABRAHAM-ACCOMAC 


7 


less effectual are potsherds and rasp-like 
surfaces, such as that of the skin of the 
dogfish. Of the same general class are all 
sawing, drilling, and scraping tools and 
devices, which are described under sepa¬ 
rate heads. The smoothing and polish¬ 
ing implements into which the grinding 
stones imperceptibly grade are also sepa¬ 
rately treated. The small¬ 
er grinding stones were 
held in the hand, and were 
usually unshaped frag¬ 
ments, the arrowshaft rub- 
abrading stone, new ber and the slender ne- 
; E iTmcHE3.) NGTH ’ P hri . te whetstone of the 
Eskimo being exceptions. 
The larger ones were slabs, bowlders, or 
fragments, which rested on the ground or 
were held in the lap 
while in use. In many 
localities exposed sur¬ 
faces of rock in place arro wshaft Rubber, 
were utilized, and these California, (length, 

as well as the movable 
varieties are often covered with the 
grooves produced by the grinding work. 
These markings range from narrow, shal¬ 



WHETSTONE OF NEPHRITE, ESKIMO. (LENGTH, 5 INCHES.) 





Grinoing Stone, Tennessee 
(length, ai inches) 


low lines, produced by shaping pointed 
objects, to broad channels made in shap¬ 
ing large imple¬ 
ments and uten¬ 
sils. Reference 
to the various 
forms of abrad¬ 
ing implements 
is made in nu¬ 
merous works 
and articles 
treating of the 
technology of the native tribes. The 
more important of these are cited under 
Archeology , Bonework , Stonework , Shell- 
work. (w. H. H.) 

Abraham, also called Little Abraham. 
A Mohawk chief of considerable orator¬ 
ical power who succeeded the so-called 
King Hendrick after the battle of L. 
George in 1755, in which the latter was 
killed. He espoused the English cause 
in the American Revolution, but was of a 
pacific character. He was present at the 
last meeting of the Mohawk with the 
American commissioners at Albany in 
Sept., 1775, after which he drops from no¬ 
tice. He was succeeded by Brant, (c. t. ) 
Absayruc. A Costanoan village men¬ 
tioned as formerly connected with the 
mission of San Juan Bautista, Cal.— 


Engelhard!, Franciscans in Cal., 398, 
1897. 

Absentee. A division of the Shawnee 
who about 1845 left the rest of the tribe, 
then in Kansas, and removed to Ind. T. 
In 1904 they numbered 459, under the 
Shawnee school superintendent in Okla¬ 
homa. (j. M.) 

Ginetewi Sawanogi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS., 
B. A. E., 1879 (so called sometimes by the other 
Shawnee; Ginet6wi is derived from the name 
of Canadian r., on which they live). Pepua- 
hapftski Sawanogi.— Ibid. (‘ Away -from- here 
Shawnee,’ commonly so called by the other 
Shawnee). 

Acacafui. Mentioned by Juan de Onate 
(Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871), in connec¬ 
tion with Puaray, apparently as a pueblo 
of the Tigua of New Mexico in 1598. 

Acacagua. An unidentified pueblo of 
New Mexico in 1598.—Onate (1598) in 
Doc. Ined., xvi, 103, 1871. 

Acacbin. A Papago rancheria in s. 
Arizona; pop. 47 in 1865.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
135, 1865. 

Acadialite. A reddish chabazite (Dana, 
Text-book of Mineral.,458,1898), so called 
from Acadia, an early and still a literary 
name of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick; 
a latinization, helped out by analogy with 
the classical Arcadia, of a word formed 
by the early French explorers on the 
basis of a suffix of many place names, 
which in the Micmac dialect of Algon- 
quian signifies ‘where a thing is plenti¬ 
ful.’ The lite represents the Greek /L0o?, 
stone, (a. f. c.) 

Acapachiqui. An unidentified town in 
s. Georgia, visited by De Soto in March, 
1540.—Biedma in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
ii, 99, 1850. 

Capachiqui. —Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, 
op. cit., 137. 

Accohanoc. A tribe of the Powhatan 
confederacy that formerly lived on the 
river of the same name, in Accomac and 
Northampton cos., Va. They had 40 
warriors in 1608. Their principal village 
bore the name of the tribe. They be¬ 
came mixed with negroes in later times, 
and the remnant was driven off at the 
time of the Nat Turner insurrection, 
about 1833. (j. m.) 

Accahanock.— Herrman, map (1670) in Maps to 
Accompany the Rep’t of the Com’rs on the 
B’nd’ry Line bet. Va. and Md., 1873. Acco- 
hanock. —Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 41, 1849. 
Accotronacks. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 
1816. Acohanock.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, 120, 
repr. 1819. Aquohanock. —Ibid., II, 61. Occa- 
hanock. —Beverly, Virginia, 199, 1722. Ochahan- 
nanke.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 62, 1849. 

Accomac. (According to Trumbull the 
word means ‘the other-side place,’ or 
‘on-the-other-side-of-water place.’ In 
the Massachuset language oakome or 
akawine means ‘beyond’; and ac, aki, 
or ahki in various "Algonquian dialects 
means ‘land.’ According to Dr Wm. 
Jones (inf’n, 1905) the term is probably 
akin to the Chippewa tigaming, ‘ the other 





8 


ACCOMINTA—ACHILIGOUAN 


[b. a. e. 


shore,’ and to the Sauk, Fox, and Kicka- 
poo ug&maMg *, ing in the one case and -gi 
in the other being variations of the same 
suffix expressing ‘place where’). A tribe 
of the Powhatan confederacy of Virginia 
that formerly lived in Accomac and 
Northampton cos., e. of Chesapeake bay, 
and according to Jefferson their principal 
village, which bore the tribal name, was 
about Cheriton, on Cherrystone inlet, 
Northampton co. In 1608 they had 80 
warriors. As they declined in numbers 
and importance they lost their tribal 
identity, and the name became applied to 
all the Indians e. of Chesapeake bay. Up 
to 1812 they held their lands in common 
and were known under the names of Ac- 
comacs, living chiefly in upper Accomac 
co., and Gingaskins (see Gangasco), living 
near Eastville, Northampton co. They 
had become much mixed with negroes, 
and in the Nat Turner insurrection, about 
1833, were treated as such and driven off. 
(j. m. ) 

Accawmacke.— Smith (1629), Va., I, 133, repr. 
1819. Accomack. —Ibid., 120. Accowmack. —Ibid., 
map. Acomack.— Ibid., II, 61. Acomak.— Drake, 
Book of Indians, v, 1848. 

Accominta (possibly related to the Chip¬ 
pewa akukumigak, a locative expression 
referring to the place where land and 
water meet, hence, specifically, ‘shore,’ 
‘shore-line.’—Wm. Jones. The name 
was given by the Indians to York r.). 
A small tribe or band of the Pennacook 
confederacy, commonly called Agamen- 
ticus or Accominticus, that occupied a 
village of the same name at or near the 
site of the present York, York co., Me., 
to which the name “Boston” was given 
on some early maps. Capt. John Smith 
(Virginia, n, 183, repr. 1819) says that 
the people of this place were allied to 
those immediately n. of them, and were 
subject to the bashabees of Penobscot, 
which would seem to place them in the 
Abnaki confederacy, though they are 
now generally and apparently correctly 
included in the Pennacook confederacy. 
Schoolcraft (Ind. Tribes, v, 222, 1856) 
includes this area in the Pennacook do¬ 
minion. Under what name the Acco¬ 
minta people were subsequently recog¬ 
nized is not known, (j. m. c. t. ) 

Accomentas. —Hoyt, Antiquarian Res., 90, 1824. 
Accomintas.— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s, I, 149, 1806. Accominticus. —Smith 
(1616), ibid., 3d s., VI, 97, 1837. Accomintycus.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, n, 195, repr. 1819. Ac- 
comynticus. —Ibid., 183. Agamenticus —Ballard in 
CoastSurv. Rep., 246,1871. An-ghem-ak-ti-koos. — 
Ibid, (given as proper name). 

Acconoc. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, situated between 
Chickahominy and Pamunkey rs., New 
Kent co., Va.—Smith (1629), Virginia, 
i, map, repr. 1819. 

Accoqueck (probably cognate with Chip¬ 
pewa a kukwag, ‘whirlpool,’ or‘turn in 


the bend’ of a river or road.—Wm. 
Jones). A Powhatan village, situate in 
1608 on Rappahannock r., above Seco- 
bec, Caroline co., Va.—Smith (1629), 
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Accossuwinck (possibly cognate with 
the Chippewa a kosowing, ‘ point where 
the tail and body meet’; or with akosink , 
‘as far up as the place rises. ’—W m. J ones). 
A Powhatan village, existing in 1608 on 
Pamunkey r., King William co., Va.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Acela. A small village in w. central 
Florida, visited by De Soto in 1539. 
Ocilla r. derives its name from the place. 
See Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n, 129, 1850. 

Achasta. A former village of the Rum- 
sen division of the Costanoan family, on 
the spot now occupied by the town 
of Monterey, Cal. The Rumsen were 
sometimes called Achastliens from the 
name of this settlement.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Achiesta. —Taylor, ibid. 

Acheha. A Timucua phratry which in¬ 
cluded the Hiyaraba, Cayahasomi, Efaca, 
Hobatinequasi, and Chehelu clans.— 
Pareja (1612-14) quoted byGatschetin 
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 492,1878. 

Achepabecha (‘prairie dog’). A Crow 
band. 

Ache-pa-be'-cha.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 
Rich Prairie Dog. —Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 144, 1851. 

Achigan ( u'shigun , sing. anim. noun.— 
Wm. Jones). A French-Canadian name 
of the small-mouthed black bass ( Mi - 
cropterus dolomieu), occasionally found in 
English writings. The word is old in 
French, Hennepin using it in 1688. Ashi- 
gan is the name of this fish in Chippewa 
and closely related Algonquian dialects. 
(a. f. c.) 

Acbiligouan. A tribe or band living be¬ 
tween 1640 and 1670 on the n. shore of L. 
Huron, about the mouth of French r. 
and westward nearly to Sault Ste Marie. 
In 1670 they were attached to the mission 
at the Sault. In the Jesuit Relation of 
1640 their position is given on the n. shore 
of L. Huron, at the mouth of French r. 
The Amikwa are mentioned in the same 
connection as residing on this stream. 
In the Relation of 1658 they appear to be 
placed farther n. on the river, and it is 
stated that they traded with the Cree. 
In the Relation of 1670 they are said to 
have been attached to the mission of 
Sault Ste Marie, but only as going there 
to fish. It is probable that they were a 
Chippewa or a Nipissing band. (j. m. 
c. T.) 

Achiligouans. —Heriot, Travels, 194, 1807. Achili- 
goiiiane.— Jesuit Rel., 1670, 79, 1858. Acbiri- 

gouans.— Ibid., 1646. 81. Archirigouan.— Ibid., 

1643, 61, 1858. Atchiligoiian.— Ibid., 1640, 34, 1858. 


BULL. 30] 


ACHILLA-ACOLAPISSA 


9 


Achilla. A Costanoan village of Santa 
Cruz mission, Santa Cruz co., Cal., in 
1819.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5,1860. 

Achillimo. A Chumashan village for¬ 
merly existing near Santa In6s mission, 
Santa Barbara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Achois. A native place in Encina val¬ 
ley, s. Cal., at which the mission of San 
Fernando was established, Sept. 8, 1797. 

Achoic Comihavit. —Coues, Garc£s Diary, 266,1900. 
Achois. —Ibid. 

Achomawi (from adzuma , or achdrna, 
‘river.’—Dixon). A division of the 
Shastan family formerly occupying the 
Pit r. country of n. e. Cal., except Burney, 
Dixie, and Hat cr. valleys, which were 
inhabited by the Atsugewi. A principal 
village was near Fallriver Mills, Shasta 
co. The languages of the Achomawi and 
the Atsugewi, while unquestionably re¬ 
lated, are strikingly unlike. The term 
Achomawi was also employed by Powers 
to denote all the Indians of the Palaihni- 
han family of Powell, popularly known 
as Pit River Indians. See Shastan Family. 

Achomawes. —Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 412, 
1874. A-cho-ma'-wi.— Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., in, 267,1877. Adzumawi. —Curtin, Ilmawi 
vocab., B. A. E., 1889. Ko'm-maidum. —Dixon, 
inf’n, 1904 (‘snow people’: Maidu name). 
Shawash.— Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (Yuki name for 
the Achomawi taken to Round Valley res.). 

Achougoula (probably ‘pipe people,’ 
from Choctaw ashunga, ‘pipe’). One of 
the 9 villages constituting the Natchez 
confederacy in 1699.—Iberville in Mar- 
gry, Dec., iv, 179, 1880. 

Achpoan. See Pone. 

Achsinnink (cognate with the Chip¬ 
pewa akusining, ‘at the place of rough 
rock,’ meaning a place where many 
bowlders lie scattered about, or a rocky 
place hard to travel through.—Wm. 
Jones). A village of the Unalachtigo 
Delawares existing about 1770 on Hock¬ 
ing r., Ohio.—Hecke welder in Trans. Am. 
Philos. Soc., iv, 390, 1834. 

Achusi. The port on the n. coast of 
the Gulf of Mexico, within the Muskho- 
gean area, in which the fleet of De Soto 
wintered in 1539-40. It took its name 
from a neighboring town and is com¬ 
monly identified with Pensacola bay. 
Achusi.— Garcilasso de la Vega, Fla., 299, 1723. 
Achusse. —Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 682, note, 1881. 
Achussi.— Ibid., 334. Acusy.— Margry, D6c., iv, 
310,1880. Chuse.— Biedma (1540) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 102, 1850. Ochus.— Gentleman of 
Elvas (1557), ibid., 136. Ocus.— Ibid., 145. 

Achyarachki ( Ach-ya-rach'-kl; ‘where 
there is an old man,’ in allusion to a 
stone pinnacle resembling a human 
form). A Tarahumare rancheria 16 m. 
s. of Rekorichic, Chihuahua, Mexico, 
about lat. 27° 5', long. 106° 45 7 .—Lum- 
holtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Ackia. A Chickasaw village in n. Mis¬ 
sissippi, attacked by the French and 


Choctaw in 1736.—Gayarrc, Louisiana, 
i, 480, 1851. 

Aclutoy. A village supposed to be of the 
Patwin division of the Copehan family 
which formerly lived in Napa and Yolo 
cos., Cal. Its inhabitants concluded a 
treaty with Gov. Vallejo in 1836.—Ban¬ 
croft, Hist. Cal., iv, 71, 1886. 

Acnagis. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Acochis (evidently from the Wichita 
ha-kwi-chis, ‘metal,’ interpreted ‘gold’ 
by the Spaniards). Given by an Indian 
nicknamed “Turk,” q. v., as the name 
for gold in the language of the people of 
Quivira or Harahey, identified as the 
Wichita and Pawnee, respectively. By 
misinterpretation the name has been 
given to Quivira itself. See Castaneda 
and Jaramillo in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 493, 
510, 1896; Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 
226, 1869; Hodge in Brower, Harahey, 
70, 1899. (f. w. h.) 

Acolapissa. An indefinite group, of 
Choctaw lineage, formerly living on L. 
Ponchartrain, about the coast lagoons, 
and on the Mississippi, in Louisiana. 
Early French writers derived the name 
from the Choctaw hdklo pisa , ‘those who 
listen and see.’ Allen Wright, governor 
of the Choctaw nation, suggests okla pisa, 

‘ those who look out for people’; that is, 
watchmen, guardians, spies, which prob¬ 
ably refers to their position, where they 
could observe entrance into or departure 
from the lake and river. The name 
appears to have been made by early 
authors to include several tribes, the 
Bayogoula, Mugulasha, and others. Ac¬ 
cording to Iberville the Acolapissa had 7 
towns; but one of their villages was occu¬ 
pied by the Tangiboa, who appear to have 
been a different tribe. The Acolapissa 
are said to have suffered severely from an 
epidemic about 1700, and Iberville says 
they united with the Mugulasha; if so, 
they must have been included in those 
massacred by the Bayogoula, but this is 
rendered doubtful by the statement of 
Penicaut (French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i, 
144, 1869) that in 1718 the Colapissa, who 
inhabited the n. shore of L. Ponchartrain, 
removed to the Mississippi and settled 13 
leagues above New' Orleans, (c. t. ) 

Aqueloa pissas.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 1, 162, 
1761. Aquelon Pissas. —Bossu (1751). Travels, 1 ,34, 
1771. Aquelou pissas. — Du Pratz, Hist. La., ii, 
219, 1758. Calopissas.— P6nicaut (1713) in Mar¬ 
gry, D6c., v, 507,1883. Cenepisa.— La Salle, ibid., 
i, 564, 1875. Colapessas.— Gravier in Shea, Early 
Voy., 159, 1861. Colapissas.— Penicaut (1699) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i, 38, 1869. Coli- 
pasa.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Collapissas.— 
Bossu (1751), Travels, I, 34, 1771. Coulapissas.— 
Sauvole (1700) in Margry, D£c., iv, 462, 1880. 
Equinipichas.— Sauvole in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
in, 225,1851. Goulapissas.— B. des Lozteres, Yoy. 


10 


ACOLT-A COMA 


[b. a. b. 


a, la Le., 242,1802. Kinipissa.— Tonti in Margry, 
D6c., i, 604, 1875. Kolapissas.— Gravier (1700) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., II, 88, 1875. Nipissa.— 
Iberville in Margry, D6e., iv, 101, 1880. Pinis- 
caSi _S a uvole (1700) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
in, 235,1851 (probably the same), auenipisa.— La 
Salle in Margry, D6c., I, 564,1875. auinipisas.— 
French, Hist. Coll. La.,n, 23, 1875. Quinipissa.— 
Tonti (1682), ibid., I, 63,1846. Quiniquissa.— Hen¬ 
nepin (1680), ibid., 206. Quinnipissas. —La Me- 
lairie (1682), ibid., n, 50,1875. 

Acoli. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. Ined., 
xvi, 114,1871) as a pueblo of New Mexico 
in 1598. Probably situated in the Salinas, 
in the vicinity of Abo, and in all proba¬ 
bility a Tigua or Piros village. 

Acoma (from the native name Akdrne , 
‘people of the white rock,’ now com¬ 
monly pronounced A'-ko-ma. Their 
name for their town is A'ko). A tribe 
and pueblo of the Keresan family, the 
latter situate on a rock mesa, or penol, 
357 ft. in height, about 60 m. w. of the 
Rio Grande, in Valencia co., N. Mex. 
Acoma is mentioned as early as 1539 by 
Fray Marcos de Niza, under the name 
Acus, a corruption of Hakukia, the Zuni 
name of the pueblo; but it was first 
visited the following year by members 
of Coronado’s army, who recorded the 
name as Acuco. The strength of the po¬ 
sition of the village, which has the dis¬ 
tinction of being the oldest inhabited 
settlement in the United States, is re¬ 
marked by the early Spanish chroniclers, 
who estimated its houses at 200 and its 
warriors at the same number. Antonio 
de Espejo also visited Acoma in 1583, 
designating it by the name under which 
it is now known, attributing to it the ex¬ 
aggerated population of 6,000, and men¬ 
tioning its dizzy trail cut in the rock and 
its cultivated fields “two leagues away,” 
probably those still tilled at Acomita 
(Tichuna) and Pueblito (Titsiap), their 
two summer, or farming, villages, 15 m. 
distant. Juan de Onate, the colonizer of 
New Mexico, visited Acoma in 1598, 
when, during his governorship, Fray 
Andres Corchado was assigned a mission 
field which included that pueblo, but no 
mission was actually established there at 
so early a date. The Acoma had been 
hostile to the surrounding village tribes 
during this period, and as early as 1540 
are mentioned as “feared by the whole 
country round about.” Juan de Zaldi- 
var, of Onate’s force, visited Acoma in 
Dec., 1598, with 30 men; they were sur¬ 
prised by the Indians, who killed 14 of 
the Spaniards outright, including Zal- 
divar and 2 other captains, and caused 
4 others to leap over the cliff, 3 of whom 
were miraculously saved. In Jan., 1599, 
an avenging party of 70 Spaniards were 
dispatched under Zaldivar’s brother Vi¬ 
cente, who, after a battle which lasted 
3 days, succeeded in killing half the tribe 
of about 3,000 and in partly burning the 
town. The first missionary labor per¬ 


formed at Acoma was by Fray Geronimo 
deZarate-Salmeron, prior to 1629; butFray 
Juan Ramirez, who went to Acoma in the 
spring of 1629, and remained there many 
years, was its first permanent missionary 
and the builder of the first church, which 
was replaced in or after 1699 by the pres¬ 
ent great structure of adobe. The Aco¬ 
ma participated in the general Pueblo 
revolt against the Spaniards in 1680 (see 
Pueblos), killing their missionary, Fray 
Lucas Maldonado; but, largely on account 
of their isolation and the inaccessibility 
of their village site, they were not so se¬ 
verely dealt with by the Spaniards as 
were most of the more easterly pueblos. 



ACOMA MAN 

An attempt was made to reconquer the 
village by Gov. Vargas in Aug., 1696, but 
he succeeded only in destroying their 
crops and in capturing 5 warriors. The 
villagersheld out until July 6, 1699, when 
they submitted to Gov. Cubero, who 
changed the name of the pueblo from San 
Estevan de Acoma to San Pedro; but the 
former name was subsequently restored 
and is still retained. The population of 
Acoma dwindled from about 1,500 at the 
beginning of the revolt to 1,052 in 1760. 
In 1782 the mission was reduced to a 
visita of Laguna, and by the close of the 
century its population was only a few 
more than 800. The present (1902) 
number is 566. The Acoma are agricul- 





BULL. 30] 


ACOMITA-ACOOMEMECK 


11 


turists, cultivating by irrigation corn, 
wheat, melons, calabashes, etc., and rais¬ 
ing sheep, goats, horses, and donkeys. 
In prehistoric and early historic times 
they had flocks of domesticated turkeys. 
They are expert potters, but now do lit¬ 
tle or no weaving. The villages which 
they traditionally occupied after leaving 
Shipapu, their mythical place of origin 
in the n., were Kashkachuti, Washpa- 
shuka, Kuchtya, Tsiama, Tapitsiama, and 
Katzimo (q. v.), or the Enchanted mesa. 
Heashko wa and Kowina were also pueblos 
occupied by Acoma clans in prehistoric 
times. The following are the clans of the 
tribe, those marked by an asterisk be¬ 
ing extinct: Tsits (Water), Kochinish 
(Yellow corn), Kukanish (Red corn), 
*Kuishkosh (Blue corn), * Kuishtiti 
(Brown corn), Kusesh (White corn), 
Tyami (Eagle), Shawiti (Parrot), Osaeh 
(Sun), Shask (Road-runner), Hapanyi 
(Oak), Shquwi (Rattlesnake), Kuwhaia 
(Bear), Tsina (Turkey), Tanyi (Cala¬ 
bash), Kurts (Antelope), Huwaka(Sky), 
*Moshaich (Buffalo), *Haka (Fire), Sii 
(Ant). The land grant of the tribe, made 
by Spain and confirmed by the United 
States, comprises 95,792 acres. See Win- 
ship, CoronadoExped., 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896; Espejo (1583) in Doc. Ined. de In- 
dias, xv, 100, 151, 1871; Villagran, Hist. 
Nueva Mexico, 1610, repr. 1900; Vetan- 
curt, Cronica, and Menologia, repr. 1871; 
Bandelier, (1) Hist. Introd., 1881, (2) 
Contributions, 1890, (3) Final Report, 
1890-92; Bancroft, Hist. Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 1889; Lummis, Land of Poco 
Tiempo, 1893; Hodge, (1) Katzimo the 
Enchanted, 1898, (2) Ascent of the En¬ 
chanted Mesa, 1898. (f. w. h. ) 

Aacus. —Barcia, Ensayo, 21.1723. Abucios. —Duro, 
Don Diego de Penalosa, 23,1382 (the Acus of Niza). 
Acmaat.— Evans (1888) in Compte Rendu Cong. 
Int. Am., vii, 229, 1890. A-co.— Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, pt. 1, 132, 1890 (or Aco¬ 
ma). Acogiya.— Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 
102, 1871 (from Zuni name Hakukia). Acoma.— 
Espejo (1583), ibid., xv, 116,1871. Acoma. —Onate 
(1598), ibid., xvi, 127, 1871. Acoman. —Hakluyt, 
Voy., 469, 1600 (or Acoma; citing Espejo, 1583). 
Acomas. — Alcedo, Die. Geog., II, 523, 549, 1787 
(“pueblo de Acomas”). Acome. —MS.of 1764 in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 304, 1853. Acomen- 
ses.— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 145, 1889. 
Acomeses.— Villagran, Hist. Nueva Mexico, 158, 
1610. Acomo. —Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Con- 
quista, 169, 1742. Acona. —Emory, Recon., 133, 
1848. Aconia.— Ward in Ind. Atf. Rep. 1864, 191, 
1865. Acquia. —Benavides (1630) misquoted in 
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th ser., xxvii, 307, 1851. 
Acu. —Ogilby, America, 392,1671. Acuca. —Ramu- 
sio, Nav. et Viaggi, in, 1, 1565. Acucans. —Whip¬ 
ple in Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3,90,1856. Acuco. — 
Castaneda (1540) in Winship, Coronado Exped., 
519, 1896. Acucu.— Coronado (1540), ibid., 560. 
Acus.— Nica (1539) in Hakluyt, Voy., in, 440. 
1600. Acux.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Conq., 
Ill, 1742. Ago. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
i, 14, 1881 (proper Queres name). Ah-co.— Lum¬ 
mis, Land of Poco Tiempo, 63,1893. Ah-ko.— Lum¬ 
mis, Man Who Married the Moon, 207, 1894. 
A'ikoka. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 30, 1891 
(Hopi name of pueblo). Aioma. —Linschoten, 
Descrip, de l’Am6rique, 336, map, 1638. Aiomo. — 
Ogilby, America, map, 1671. Ako. —Loew (1875) 


in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 339, 345, 1879. 
Akokovi.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 145, 1905 
(Hopi name of pueblo). Ako-ma. —Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 173, 1890 (tribal name). 
Akome. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (own 
name; ‘people of the white rock’). Alcuco. — 
Barcia, Ensayo, 21,1723. Alomas. —Mota-Padilla, 
Hist, de la Conq., 515, 1742 (probably the same). 
A-qo. —Bandelier in Mag. West. Hist., 668, Sept., 
1886 (native name of pueblo). Aquia.— Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776 (doubtless the same, but 
he locates also San Estevan de Acoma). Atla- 
chaco.— Mota-Padilla (1742), op. cit., 159. Coco. — 
Alvarado (1540) in Winship, Coronado Exped., 
594, 1896. Hab-koo-kee-ah.— Domenech, Des. N. 
A., ii, 53, 1860. Hacu.— Bandelier in Mag. West. 
Hist., 668, Sept., 1886 (Navaho name of pueblo). 
Hacuqua. —Bandelier, Gilded Man, 149,1893 (given 
as Zuni name of pueblo; should be Hakukia). 
Ha-cu-quin.— Bandelier in Mag. West. Hist., 668, 
Sept., 1886 (Zuiii name of pueblo). Hacus. —Nica 
(1539) cited by Coronado (1540) in Doc. Ined., xiv, 
322,1870 (same as Nina’s Acus). Hah-koo-kee-ah. — 
Eaton quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 220, 
1854 (Zuni name of pueblo). Hak-koo-kee-ah.— 
Simpson in Smithson. Rep. 1869, 333, 1871. Ha- 
ku. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 173, 1890 
(given as Zuni name of pueblo). Ha-ku Kue. — 
Ibid., hi, pt. 1, 132, 1890 (improperly given as 
Zuiii name of pueblo). Ha-kus. —Ibid., v, 173, 
1890 (Navaho name of pueblo; see Hacu, above). 
Penol, —Alcedo, Die. Geog., iv, 149,1788 (so named 
from the mesa). Peiioles.— Perea, Verdadera 
Rel., 3, 1632. Quebec of the Southwest. —Lummis, 
Land of Poco Tiempo, 57,1893. Queres Gibraltar. — 
Ibid., 57. San Esteban de Acoma.— Vetancurt, 
Teatro Mex.. hi, 319, 1871 (mission name). San 
Esteban de Asoma.— Orozco y Berra in Anales 
Minis. Fom., vi, 255, 1882 (misprint s for c). 
San Pedro. — Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
221, 1889 (mission name after July, 1699). 
S. Estevan de Acoma. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 
1776. S. Estevau de Acama. —Brion de la Tour, 
map PAm6r., 1779 (misprint). St Estevan.— 
Kitchin, map N. A. (1783) in Raynal, Indies, vi, 
1788. S‘ Estevan Acoma. —De l’Isle, Carte Mex. et 
Floride, 1703. St Estevan Queres. —Ibid., Atlas 
Nouveau, map 60,1733. Suco. —Galvano (1563) in 
Hakluyt Soc. Pub., xxx, 227,1862 (misquoting Ac¬ 
uco, of Coronado; also applied to Cicuic = Pecos). 
Ti’lawehuide. —Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1885 (Isleta name of the people; pi. Ti’lawehun). 
Ti’lawei. —Ibid. (Isleta name; compare Tuthla- 
huay). Tu‘hlawa£. —Hodge, field-notes, B. A. E., 
1895 (Sandia name; probably refers to a tree or 
plant). Tu'Tdawe. —Ibid. (Isleta name). Tiila- 
wei. —Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1885 (another Isleta name). Tuthea-uay. —Ban¬ 
delier, Gilded Man, 211, 1893 (Tigua name of 
pueblo). Tuthla-huay. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, iv, 235,1892 (Tigua name). Tuth-lanay. — 
Bandelier, Gilded Man, 149, 1893 (misprint n for 
?i). Vacus. —Nica, Relation, in Ramusio, Nav. 
et Viaggi, hi, 357, 1565. Vsacus. —Ibid. Yacoo. — 
Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 115, 1871 (Span¬ 
ish y Acco = ‘and Acco’). Yaco. —Columbus 
Memorial Vol., 155, 1893 (misprint of Onate’s 
“ Yacco”). 

Acomita. An Acoma summer village 
about 15 m. n. of the pueblo of Acoma, 
near McCartys station on the Santa Fe 
Pacific railroad, Valencia co., N. Mex. 
Aconista.—Pullen in Harper’s Weekly, 594, Aug. 
2, 1890. Tichuna.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 
1895 (native name). 

Aconchi. An Opata pueblo on the e. 
bank of Rio Sonora, about lat. 29° 45 / , 
n. w. Mexico. It was the seat of the Span¬ 
ish mission of San Pedro, founded in 
1639. Pop. 580 in 1678, 285 in 1730. 
(Orozco y Berra, Geog., 344, 1864.) 

San Pedro Aconchi.—Zapata (1678) quoted by 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 246, 1884. 

Acoomemeck. A town, perhaps Nip- 
muc, in e. Massachusetts in the 17th cen- 


12 


ACOTI—ADAI 


[B. A. E. 


tury.—Winthrop (1638) in Drake, Book 
of Inds., bk. n, 27, 1848. 

Acoti. A locality, apparently Indian, 
on a w. branch of the Rio Grande, w. of 
Taos, in n. N. Mex., and indicated as the 
‘ ‘ birth place of Montezuma’ ’ on an Indian 
map reproduced in Whipple, Pac. R. R. 
Rep., hi, pt. 3, 10, 1856. See Shipapu- 
lima. 

Acota.—Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 202, 1867. 
Acoti.— Whipple, op. cit. 

Acous. The principal village of the 
Chaicclesaht, situate on Battle bay, 
Ououkinish inlet, w. coast of Vancouver 
id.—Can. Ind. Aff, 264, 1902. 

Acpactaniche. A town, probably Musk- 
hogean, located on De 1’Isle’s map of 
1703 on the headwaters of Coosa r., Ala. 

Acquack (possibly related to the Chip¬ 
pewa a kwa kwdyag , a locative term ex¬ 
pressing the line between cover and open; 
its particular sense is ‘ at the edge of the 
woods,’ the point of view being from the 
open; the idea of woods is expressed by 
the secondary stem -a k-. —Wra, Jones). 
A village of the Powhatan confederacy 
of Virginia in 1608, on the n. bank of 
Rappahannock r., Richmond co. —Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Atquacke.—Ibid., II, 91. 

Acquaskac. A village situated in 1608 
on the w. bank of Patuxent r., St Marys 
co., Md. The word may be related to 
Aquascogoc and Weckquaesgoek. 
Acquaseack.—Bozman, Hist. Md., I, 141, 1837. 
Acquaskack.—Smith (1620), Virginia, I, map, repr. 
1819. 

Acquera. An Utina tribe or band in n. 
Florida.—Laudonniere (1564) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i, 243, 1869. 

Acuera.—Garcilasso de la Vega. Florida, 47, 1723. 
Aequeya.—Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723 (given as the 
cacique’s name). 

Acquintanacsuak. A tribe or subtribe 
which Capt. John Smith (Virginia, i, 
118, 1629; Arber ed., 53, 1884) locates 
on the w. bank of Patuxent r., St Mary’s 
co., Md. They were near to and in 
friendship with the Patuxent and Mat- 
tapanient, the 3 tribes numbering 200 
warriors. The principal village bore the 
tribal name and is supposed by Bozman 
to have been situated at the mouth of 
a small creek about 2\ m. above Cole’s 
inspection house. Smith describes them 
as “the most civill to give entertaine- 
ment.” Although this people had their 
werowance, or chief, it is doubtful whether 
they formed a distinct tribe; it is not 
impossible that they were a band or divi¬ 
sion of the Patuxent. A number of local 
names mentioned by early writers as 
those of Indian tribes of Maryland sub¬ 
sequently dropped from notice without 
indication of the extinction of the peo¬ 
ple, very likely because subsequent and 
more correct information showed that 
these referred merely to divisions of well- 
known tribes, (j. m. c. t. ) 


Ac-quin-a-iiack-au-acks.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 168, 
1829. Acquintanacks«ah. —Bozman, Hist. Md., I, 
140, 1837. Acquintanacksuak.— Smith (1629), Va., 
i, 118, repr. 1819. Acquintanacsuck. —Ibid., map. 
Acquintunachsuah. —Bozman, Hist. Md., n, 467, 
1837. Acquitanases.— De Laet, Hist, du Nouv. 
Monde, 85, 1640. 

Actinolite. A variety of amphibolite 
much used for implements by the ancient 
Pueblos of Arizona and New Mexico. It 
occurs in small bodies in connection with 
various crystalline formations, especially 
serpentine, and is much diversified in 
color, the mottlings of various hues of 
red, yellow, green, and gray giving very 
pleasing effects. Analysis shows silica, 
60; magnesia, 21; lime, 14; specific grav¬ 
ity, 3ta3.1. Illustrations are given by 
Nordenskiold, Cliff Dwellers, 1893; Put¬ 
nam in Surv. W. 100th Merid., vii, 1879; 
Wilson in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1896, 1898. 
(w. H. H.) 

Acubadaos. A tribe known to Cabeza 
de Vaca (Smith transl., 84, 1851) during 
his sojourn in Texas, 1527-34, as living 
“in the rear” of or more inland than the 
Atayos (Toho). 

Acuragna. A former Gabrieleno vil¬ 
lage in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a place 
later called La Presa.—Ried (1852) quoted 
by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 

Acushnet. A village of Praying Indians 
in 1698, probably about Acushnet, Bristol 
co., Mass. “Acchusnutt ’ ’ is said to have 
been the Indian name of New Bedford.— 
Rawson and Danforth (1698) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s,, x, 129-134, 1809. 

Acyum. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Adac. A Cochimi rancheria belonging 
to Santa Gertrudis mission, e. side of 
Lower California, about lat. 27° 58L— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Jan. 17, 1862. 

Adai. A tribe of the Caddo confeder¬ 
acy, speaking a dialect closely related to 
that of the Kadohadacho, Ilainai, and 
Anadarko. The mission of San Miguel 
de Linares was founded among them in 
1716; it was destroyed by the French, with 
Natchitoch and Caddo allies, in 1719, but 
was restored in 1721 and the presidio of 
Nuestra Sefiora del Pilar de los Adaes 
established. When Iberville ascended 
Red r. of Louisiana in 1699 he heard of the 
Adai and called them Natao, stating that 
their village was on the river near that of 
the Yatasi. According to La Harpe (1719) 
the tribe was very useful to the French 
traders and explorers, particularly when 
making portages. At that time the vil¬ 
lages of the Adai extended from Red r. 
southward beyond the Sabine, in Texas, 
known in the 18th century as Rio de los 
Adais. The trail which from ancient 
times had connected the Adai villages 
became the noted “contraband trail” 


BULL. 30] 


ADARIO-ADIRONDACK 


13 


over which traders and travelers jour¬ 
neyed between the French and Spanish 
provinces, and one of the villages was a 
station on the road between the French 
fort at Natchitoches and the Spanish fort 
at San Antonio. As the villages of the 
tribe were scattered over a territory one 
portion of which was under the control 
of the French and the other under that of 
the Spaniards, the Indians were subjected 
to all the adverse influences of the white 
race and suffered from their wars and 
from the new diseases and intoxicants 
which they introduced, so that by 1778 
they were reported by Mezieres (Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 661, 1886) as al¬ 
most exterminated. About 1792,14 fami¬ 
lies of the tribe, together with a number 
of Mexicans, emigrated to a region s. of 
San Antonio de Bejar, but they soon 
melted away and were lost among other 
Indians. Those who remained numbered 
about 100. In 1805 Sibley reported a 
small settlement of these Indians on Lac 
Macdon, near an affluent of Red r.; it 
contained only 20 men, but a larger num¬ 
ber of women. This Adai remnant 
had never left their ancient locality, but 
they had not escaped the vicissitudes of 
their kindred. In 1715 Domingo Ramon, 
with a company of Franciscans, traversed 
the Adai territory and started settle¬ 
ments. In 1716 the mission of San Miguel 
de Linares was founded among them, and 
there were Adai also in the mission of San 
Francisco de los Tejas, established in 1690. 
About 1735 a military post called Nuestra 
Senora del Pilar was added, and 5 
years later this garrison became the Pre¬ 
sidio de los Adayes. Later, when the 
country was districted for the jurisdic¬ 
tion of Indians, the Adai tribe was placed 
under the division having its official head- 
quartersatNacogdoches. In all essentials 
of living and ceremony they resembled 
the other Caddo, by whom the remnant 
was finally absorbed. (a. c. f. ) 

Adaes. —Rivera, Diario, leg. 2,602, 1736. Adaes.— 
Bollaert in J. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ir, 265, 1850. 
Adage.— Tanner,Nar.,327,1830. Adahi.— Latham, 
Elem. Comp. Philol., 467,1862. Ada'-i. —Mooney, 
Caddo MS., B. A. E., 1891. Adaices.— Ann. de la 
Prop, de la Foi, in, 508,1828. Adaics.— Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 125, 1816. Adaies.— P6nicaut 
(1701) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s. I, 73, 1869. 
Adaihe.— Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol.,469,1862. 
Adais. — Mota-Padilla (1742), Hist, de la Conq., 
177, 1870. Adaisses.— Bollaert in J. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., n, 280, 1850. Adaize.— Sibley, Hist. 

Sketches, 67, 1806. Adayes.— La Harpe (1719) in 
Margry, D£c., VI, 303, 1886. Adays.— La Harpe in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 47, 1851. Addaise.— 
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., n, 
24, 1814. Addaize.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 
81, 1814. Addees.— U. S. Ind. Treaties, 465, 1826. 
Addies.— Clark and Cass (1829) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 596, 1853. Adees.— Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., 499, 1878. Adeyches.— 
Martin, Hist. La., i, 202, 1827. Adiais.— Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Adoses. —Villa-Senor, 
Theatro Am., n, 329, 1748. Adyes.— Pike, Exped., 
277, 1810. Andayes.— Baudry des Lozteres, Voy. 
Louisiane, 241, 1802. Atayos.— Cabe^a de Vaca 
(1529), Smith transl., 121, 1871. Atoyos.— Davis, 


Span. Conq., N. Mex., 82,1869. Azadyze. —Wood¬ 
ward, Reminis., 78,1859. Hadai. —Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., I, 43, 1884. Hadaies. —Doc. of 18th 
century quoted by Smith, Cabe^a de Vaca, 127, 
note, 1871. Natao.— Iberville (1699) in Margry, 
D6c., iv, 178, 1880. 

Adario. ATionontatechief, known also 
as Kondiaronk, Sastaretsi, and The Rat. 
He had a high reputation for bravery and 
sagacity, and was courted by the French, 
who made a treaty with him in 1688 by 
which he agreed to lead an expedition 
against the Iroquois, his hereditary ene¬ 
mies. Starting out for the war with a 
picked band, he was surprised to hear, on 
reaching Cataracouy, that the French 
were negotiating peace with the Iroquois, 
who were about to send envoys to Mont¬ 
real with hostages from each tribe. Con¬ 
cealing his surprise and chagrin, he 
secretly determined to intercept the em¬ 
bassy. Departing as though to return 
to his own country in compliance with 
the admonition of the French comman¬ 
dant, he placed his men in ambush and 
made prisoners of the members of the 
Iroquois mission, telling the chief of the 
embassy that the French had commis¬ 
sioned him to surprise and destroy the 
party. Keeping only one prisoner to 
answer for the death of a Huron who 
was killed in the fight, he set the others 
free, saying that he hoped they would 
repay the French for their treachery. 
Taking his captive to Michilimackinac, 
he delivered him over to the French com¬ 
mander, who put him to death, having 
no knowledge of the arrangement of 
peace. He then released a captive Iro¬ 
quois whom he had long held at his village 
that he might return to inform his people 
of the act of the French commander. 
An expedition of 1,200 Iroquois fell upon 
Montreal Aug. 25, 1689, when the French 
felt secure in the anticipation of peace, 
slew hundreds of the settlers and burned 
and sacked the place. Other posts were 
abandoned by the French, and only the 
excellent fortifications of others saved 
them from being driven out of the country. 
Adario led a delegation of Huron chiefs 
who went to Montreal to conclude a 
peace, and while there he died, Aug. 1, 
1701, and was buried by the French with 
military honors. (f. h. ) 

Adirondack (Mohawk: Hatiron't&ks , 
‘they eat trees’, a name given in allusion 
to the eating of the bark of trees in time 
of famine.—Hewitt). The Algonquian 
tribes n. of the St Lawrence with which 
the Iroquois were acquainted, particu¬ 
larly those along Ottawa and St Maurice 
rs., who were afterward settled at Three 
Rivers and Oka, Quebec. Jefferys in 
1761 seems to apply the term to the Chip¬ 
pewa. (j. M.) 

Adirondacs. —Barton, New Views, xxxviii, 1798. 
Adirondacks. —Garangula (1684) quoted by Wil¬ 
liams, Vermont, I, 504, 1809. Adirondaks.— Ho- 
mann heirs map, 1756. Adirondax,— Livingston 


14 


ADJUITSUPPA-ADOBE 


[B. A. E. 


(1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 899, 1854. Adi- 
rontak.— Vetromile, Abnakis,51,1866. Adisonkas. 
—Martin, North Carolina, I, 76, 1829. Adnon- 
decks.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, hi, 79, 
1854. Arundacs.— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., Vil, 582, 1856. Arundax. —Ft Johnson 
conference (1756), ibid., 233. Honanduk.— Coxe, 
Carolana, map, 1741 (on e. shore of L. Hu¬ 
ron; same?). Iroondocks. —Carver, Travels, 120, 
1778. Latilentasks.— King, Jour, to Arctic Ocean, 
I, 11, 1836 (at Oka). Orendakes. —Martin, North 
Carolina, n, 65,1829. Orondacks, —Johnson (1751) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 729,1855. Orondocks. — 
Stoddart (1750), ibid., 582 (at Oka). Orondoes.— 
Imlay, Western Ter., 292,1797. Oroondoks.— Stod¬ 
dart (1753) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 780, 1855. 
Oroonducks. —Lindesay (1749), ibid., 538. Orun- 
dacks. —Dinwiddie (1754), ibid., 827. Raron- 
daks.— Vater, Mithridates, pt. 3, sec. 3, 309, 1816. 
Ratiruntaks. —Gatschet,Caughnawaga MS., B. A. 
E., 1882 (Mohawk name; sing. Raruntaks). 
Rondax.— Glen (1699) in N. Y.Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 
559, 1854. Rondaxe. —Von der Donck (1656) in 
N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., i, 209,1841. 

Adjuitsnppa. An Eskimo settlement 
and Danish trading station in s. w. Green¬ 
land, lat. 60° 21'. —Meddelelser om 
Gronland, xvi, map, 1896. 

Siidprbven.— Koldewey, German Arct. Exped., 
182,1874. Sydprbven.— Meddelelser om Gronland, 
xvi, map, 1896. 

Adlet. A fabulous people that the 
Eskimo believe to be descended from a 
dog. A woman married a red dog and 
bore five dogs, which she cast adrift 
in a boat, and also five children of mon¬ 
strous shape. The dogs reached the other 
side of the ocean and begot the white 
people. The monsters engendered the 
Adlet, terrible beings, identified by the 
Labrador Eskimo with the Indians, of 
whom they formerly lived in dread, also 
by the Eskimo of the western shores of 
Hudson bay, who, however, called this 
misbegotten and bloodthirsty race Er- 
qigdlit. The Eskimo of Greenland and 
Baffin land, having no Indian neighbors, 
pictured the tribe of monsters with hu¬ 
man heads, arms, and trunks joined to the 
hind legs of dogs. See Boas (1) in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can., v., sec. 2, 35,1888; (2) in 
6th Rep. B. A. E., 640, 1888. 

Adla.— Boas in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., op. cit. 
(sing, form of Adlat). Adlahsuin.— Stein in Peter- 
manns Mitt., no. 9, map, 1902. Adlat.— Boas, op. 
cit. Adlet.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 640, 1888. 
Erqiglit.— Ibid. 

Adobe (a word traceable to an Egyptian 
hieroglyph signifying ‘brick,’thence to 
Arabic at-tob, cil-tob, whence the Spanish 
adobar , ‘to daub,’ ‘to plaster’; adopted 
in the United States from Mexico). 
Large sun-dried bricks, much used by the 
Pueblo Indians of New Mexico in build¬ 
ing houses and garden walls. The pro¬ 
cess of molding adobes in a wooden frame 
was not employed by the aborigines of 
the United States before the advent of 
the Spaniards in the 16th century. In 
1540 the Pueblo method of preparing 
the material and of erecting masonry, 
when stone was not available, is thus de¬ 
scribed by Castaneda (14th Rep. B. A. E., 
520, 1896): “They gather a great pile of 
twigs of thyme [sagebrush] and sedge 


grass and set it afire, and when it is half 
coals and ashes they throw a quantity of 
dirt and water on it and mix it all 
together. They make round balls of 
this, which they use instead of stones 
after they are dry, fixing them with the 
same mixture, which comes to be like a 
stiff clay.” After the introduction of 
wheat by the Spaniards the straw crushed 
by the hoofs of horses in stamping out 
the grain on a threshing floor was sub¬ 
stituted by the Indians for the charred 
brush. The character of much of the 
soil of the arid region is such that no for¬ 
eign admixture, excepting the straw, is 
required. A requisite of adobe-making 
is a good supply of water; conse- 
sequently the industry is conducted gen¬ 
erally on the banks of streams, near 
which pueblos are usually built. When 
molded, the adobes are set on edge to 
dry, slanted slightly to shed rain. Adobes 
vary in size, but are generally about 18 
in. long, 8 to 10 in. wide, and 4 to 6 in. 
thick. In setting them in walls mortar 
of the same material is used, as is the 
case with stone masonry. In the S. W., 
where the average precipitation is not 
great, structures built of adobes last 
indefinitely with reasonable repair, the 
greatest amount of disintegration being 
at the base of the walls during seasons of 
rain, although prolonged sand storms 
also erode the surfaces. For the sake of 
appearance, as well as to aid in protect¬ 
ing it against weathering, adobe masonry 
is usually plastered (the Indian women 
using their hands as trowels), when it 
presents a pleasing appearance, varying 
in color from gray to a rich reddish 
brown, according to the color of the 
earth of which the plaster is made. 
The interior walls and likewise also the 
borders of the windows and doors are 
sometimes whitewashed with gypsum. 
Away from streams, as at Acoma, stone 
is usually employed for house masonry; 
but a noteworthy exception is the im¬ 
mense adobe church at this pueblo, built 
by the Indians about 1699, under the 
direction of the Spanish fathers, of mate¬ 
rial carried from the plain below, the 
summit of the Acoma mesa being bare 
rock. Another kind of earth-masonry in 
the arid region is that known as pise. 
This was made by erecting a double frame¬ 
work of poles, wattled with reeds or 
grass, forming two parallel surfaces as 
far apart as the desired thickness of the 
wall, and into the enclosed space adobe 
grout was rammed. In the celebrated 
ruin of Casa Grande (q. v.) the frame¬ 
work was evidently built about 5 ft. long 
and 3 or 4 ft. wide, and when the grout 
became dry the frame was moved side¬ 
ways or upward to receive the next 
course (see Mindeleff in 13th Rep. B. 



BULL. 30] 


ADOEETTE-ADOPTION 


15 


A. E. 309, 1896; Cushing, ibid., 360). 
Houses constructed of adobes are very 
comfortable, being warm in winter and 
cool in summer. For this reason, and 
owing to the availability and cheapness 
of the material, adobe forms an impor¬ 
tant factor in the domestic economy of 
both white and Indian inhabitants of the 
S. W. (f. w. h.) 

Adoeette (ado ‘tree/ e-et ‘great/ te per¬ 
sonal suffix: ‘Big Tree’). A Kiowa 
chief, born about 1845. In consequence 
of Custer’s vigorous campaign on the 
Washita in the fall of 1868 the Kiowa 
and confederated tribes had been com¬ 
pelled to come in upon their reservation, 
in what is now s. w. Oklahoma, but still 
kept up frequent raids into Texas not¬ 
withstanding the establishment of Ft 



ADOEETTE (kIOWa) 


Sill in their midst. In May, 1871, a 
large party of warriors led by Satanta 
(properly Set-t‘ain-te, White Bear), q. v., 
and accompanied by Satank (properly 
Set-angya, Sitting Bear), q. v., and Big 
Tree, attacked a wagon train, killing 7 
men and taking 41 mules. For their 
part in this deed, which they openly 
avowed, the three chiefs named were 
arrested at Ft Sill to stand trial in Texas. 
Setiingya made resistance and was killed 
by the guard. The other two were 
confined in the Texas penitentiary 
until Oct., 1873, when they were released 
on promise of good behavior of their tribe. 
Satanta was subsequently rearrested 
and committed suicide in prison. Dur¬ 
ing the latter part of the outbreak of 
1874-75 Big Tree, with other chiefs be¬ 
lieved to be secretly hostile, were con¬ 
fined as prisoners at Ft Sill. Since that 


time the tribe has remained at peace. 
Big Tree is still living upon his allotment 
on the former reservation and is now a 
professed Christian. See Mooney, Cal¬ 
endar Hist. Kiowa Inds., 17th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1898. 

Adoption. An almost universal politi¬ 
cal and social institution which originally 
dealt only with persons but later with 
families, clans or gentes, bands, and 
tribes. It had its beginnings far back in 
the history of primitive society and, after 
passing through many forms and losing 
much ceremonial garb, appears to-day in 
the civilized institution of naturalization. 
In the primitive mind the fundamental 
motive underlying adoption was to defeat 
the evil purpose of death to remove a 
member of the kinship group by actually 
replacing in person the lost or dead mem¬ 
ber. In primitive philosophy, birth and 
death are the results of magic power; 
birth increases and death decreases the 
orenda (q. v.) of the clan or family of the 
group affected. In order to preserve that 
magic power intact, society, by the exer¬ 
cise of constructive orenda, resuscitates the 
dead in the person of another in whom is 
embodied the blood and person of the 
dead. As the diminution of the number of 
the kindred was regarded as having been 
caused by magic power—by the orenda of 
some hostile agency—so the prevention 
or reparation of that loss must be accom¬ 
plished by a like power, manifested in 
ritualistic liturgy and ceremonial. From 
the view pointof the primitive mind adop¬ 
tion serves to change, by a fiction of law, 
the personality as well as the political 
status of the adopted person. For ex¬ 
ample, there were captured two white 
persons (sisters) by the Seneca, and in¬ 
stead of both being adopted into one clan, 
one was adopted by the Deer and the 
other by the Heron clan, and thus the 
blood of the two sisters was changed by 
the rite of adoption in such wise that 
their children could intermarry. Fur¬ 
thermore, to satisfy the underlying con¬ 
cept of the rite, the adopted person must 
be brought into one of the strains of 
kinship in order to define the standing 
of such person in the community, and 
the kinship name which the person re¬ 
ceives declares his relation to all other 
persons in the family group; that is to 
say, should the adopted person be named 
son rather than uncle by the adopter, his 
status in the community would differ ac¬ 
cordingly. From the political adoption 
of the Tuscarora by the Five Nations, 
about 1726, it is evident that tribes, fam¬ 
ilies, clans, and groups of people could 
be adopted like persons. A fictitious age 
might be conferred upon the person 
adopted, since age largely governed the 
rights, duties,, and. position of persons in. 





16 


ADORNMENT 


[B. A. £. 


the community. In this wise, by the ac¬ 
tion of the constituted authorities, the age 
of an adopted group was fixed and its 
social and political importance thereby 
determined. Owing to the peculiar cir¬ 
cumstances of the expulsion of the Tus- 
carora from North Carolina it was deemed 
best by the Five Nations, in view of their 
relation to the Colonies at that time, to 
give an asylum to the Tuscarora simply 
by means of the institution of adoption 
rather than by the political recognition 
of the Tuscarora as a member of the 
League. Therefore the Oneida made a 
motion in the federal council of the Five 
Nations that they adopt the Tuscarora as 
a nursling still swathed to the cradle- 
board. This having prevailed, the Five 
Nations, by the spokesman of the Oneida, 
said: “We have set up for ourselves a 
cradle-board in the extended house,” 
that is, in the dominions of the League. 
After due probation the Tuscarora, by 
separate resolutions of the council, on 
separate motions of the Oneida, were 
made successively a boy, a young man, 
a man, an assistant to the official woman 
cooks, a warrior, and lastly a peer, hav¬ 
ing the right of chiefship in the council 
on an equal footing with the chiefs of the 
other tribes. From this it is seen that a 
tribe or other group of people may be 
adopted upon any one of several planes 
of political growth, corresponding to the 
various ages of human growth. This 
seems to explain the problem of the al¬ 
leged subjugation and degradation of the 
Delawares by the Iroquois, which is said 
to have been enacted in open council. 
When it is understood that the Five Na¬ 
tions adopted the Delaware tribe as men 
assistants to the official cooks of the 
League it becomes clear that no taint of 
slavery and degradation was designed to 
be given by the act. It merely made the 
Delawares probationary heirs to citizen¬ 
ship in the League, and citizenship would 
be conferred upon them after suitable 
tutelage. In this they were treated with 
much greater consideration than were 
the Tuscarora, who are of the language 
and lineage of the Five Nations. The 
Delawares were not adopted as warriors 
or chiefs, but as assistant cooks; neither 
w r ere they adopted, like the Tuscarora, as 
infants, but as men whose duty it was to 
assist the women whose official function 
was to cook for the people at public as¬ 
semblies. Their office was hence well 
exemplified by the possession of a corn 
pestle, a hoe, and petticoats. This fact, 
misunderstood, perhaps intentionally 
misrepresented, seems to explain the 
mystery concerningthe “making women” 
of the Delawares. This kind of adoption 
was virtually a state of probation, which 
could be made long or short. 


The adoption of a chief’s son by a fel¬ 
low chief, customary in some of the 
tribes of the N. W. coast, differs in mo¬ 
tive and effect from that defined above, 
w T hich concerns persons alien to the 
tribe, upon whom it confers citizen¬ 
ship in the clan, gens, and tribe, as this 
deals only with intratribal persons for 
the purpose of conferring some degree of 
honor upon them rather than citizenship 
and political authority. 

The Iroquois, in order to recruit the 
great losses incurred in their many wars, 
put into systematic practice the adoption 
not only of individuals but also of entire 
clans and tribes. The Tutelo, the Saponi, 
the Nanticoke, and other tribes and por¬ 
tions of tribes were forced to incorporate 
with the several tribes of the Iroquois 
confederation by formal adoption. 

After the Pequot war the Narragan- 
set adopted a large body of the Pequot. 
The Chickasaw adopted a section of the 
Natchez, and the Uchee were incorpo¬ 
rated with the Creeks. In the various 
accounts of the American Indian tribes 
references to formal adoption and incor¬ 
poration of one people by another are 
abundant. It is natural that formal 
adoption as a definite institution was 
most in vogue wherever the clan and 
gentile systems were more or less fully 
developed. ( j. n. b. h. ) 

Adornment. The motive of personal 
adornment, aside from the desire to 
appear attractive, seems to have been to 
mark individual, tribal, or ceremonial 
distinction. The use of paint on the face, 
hair, and body, both in color and design, 
generally had reference to individual or 
clan beliefs, or it indicated relationship 
or personal bereavement, or was an act 
of courtesy. It was always employed in 
ceremonies, religious and secular, and 
was an accompaniment of gala dress 
donned to honor a guest or to celebrate 
an occasion. The face of the dead was 
frequently painted in accordance with 
tribal or religious symbolism. The prac¬ 
tice of painting was widespread and was 
observed by both sexes. Paint was also 
put on the faces of adults and children 
as a protection against wind and sun. 
Plucking the hair from the face and body 
was generally practised. Deformation, 
as head flattening, and tattooing, accord¬ 
ing to some writers, were personal embel¬ 
lishments. Fats were used to beautify 
the hair and to ceremonially anoint the 
face and body. Sweet grass and seeds, 
as those of the columbine, served as per¬ 
fume. 

Ear ornaments were a mark of family 
thrift, wealth, or distinction, and indi¬ 
cated honor shown to the wearer by his 
kindred. Ceremonies, occasionally re¬ 
ligious in character, some of which seem 


BULL. 30] 


ADORNMENT 


17 


to relate to sacrificial rites, usually at¬ 
tended the boring of the ear. Each per¬ 
foration cost the parent of 
the child or the kindred of the 
adult gifts of a 
standard value, 
and sometimes 
these perfora¬ 
tions extended 
round the entire 
rim of the ear. 

The pendants 
seminole ear we re of haliotis 

ORNAMENTS or other vaJued 

shell, or were made of metal 
or bone, or were long woven 
bands of dentalium which 
reached nearly to the waist. 

Labrets were used by the 
Eskimo, the n. Pacific coast 
tribes, and some of the 
Gulf coast Indians. Among 
some the labret was worn 
only by men, in some by 
women, and w T here worn by 
both sexes it was of two dif¬ 
ferent styles. At puberty an 
incision was made in the 
lip or at the corner of the 
mouth, and a slender pin 
was inserted, which was re¬ 
placed by larger ones until 
the opening could admit a pendant of denta- 
stud of the size desired. LIUM ANDABAL0NE 
The Eskimo, when travel- SHELL 
ing, removed his labret to prevent freez¬ 
ing of the lip, but inserted it when en- 



LABRETS, WESTERN ESKIMO. (NELSON) 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-2 


tering a village. Among some of the 
northern and southern tribes the septum 
of the nose was pierced, and feathers, 
bark, or rings were inserted. 



ESKIMO GIRL WITH NOSE-RING 


Elaborate ornamentation of garments 
was reserved for the gala dress. The 
Eskimo combined bits of fur of different 
colors and quality in a pleasing pattern 
for trimming their garments, and lishskin 
dyed in brilliant colors and the plumage 
of birds were also used for the same pur¬ 
pose. Outer garments w r ere made of 
the breasts of sea birds skilfully joined 
together. Among the inland tribes the 
earlier designs for porcupine and feather 
quillwork were reproduced later in beads 
of European manufacture. Feathers were 
widely used to decorate the robes and 
garments of warriors and other distin¬ 
guished persons, and were woven into 
mantles by the cliff-dwellers and by 
tribes formerly living near the Gulf of 
Mexico. Among the Plains Indians the 
milk teeth of the elk were the most 
costly of adornments. They were fast¬ 
ened in rows on a wmman’s tunic, giving 
the garment a value of several hundred 
dollars. 

Headbands, armlets, bracelets, belts, 
necklaces, and garters, of metal, seeds, 


SILVER BRACELETS, HAIDA. (nIBLACk) 

embroidered buckskin, peculiar pelts, or 
woven fiber, had their practical use, but 






































18 


ADORNMENT 


[B. a. e. 


were made decorative, and often were 
symbolic. Archeological testimony shows 
that sea-shell beads, worn as necklaces or 
woven into belts, were widely used, and 
they probably found their way into the 



CROW WOMAN WITH ELK-TOOTH DRESS 


interior through barter or as ceremonial. 
or friendly gifts. Wampum belts figured 
largely in the official transactions be¬ 
tween the early settlers and the eastern 
tribes. Disks cut from the conch shell 
were worn as ornaments and were also 
offered in certain religious rites; they 
ranked among the northern tribes as did 
the turquoise among the people of the 
S. W. With the Plains Indians a neck¬ 
lace of bear’s claws marked the man of 
distinction. The headdress varied in dif¬ 
ferent parts of the country and was gen¬ 
erally significant of a man’s kinship, 
ceremonial office, rank, or totemic de- 



CHILKAT CEREMONIAL ROBE. (niBLACk) 


pendence, as was also the ornamentation 
upon his weapons and his shield. 

In the S. W. blankets bordered with 
a design woven in colors were used on 
ceremonial occasions, and with the broad 


belts, white robes, and fringed sashes worn 
at marriage are interesting specimens of 
weaving and color treatment. The bril¬ 
liant Navaho blankets with their cosmic 
symbols are well known. The most re¬ 
markable example of the native weaver’s 
skill is the ceremonial blanket and apron 
of the Chilkat tribe of Alaska; it is made 
of the wool of the mountain goat, dyed 
black, yellow, and green with native 
dyes over a warp of cedar-bark strings. 
A design of elaborate totemic forms cov¬ 
ered the entire space within the border 
lines, and the ends and lower edge were 
heavily fringed. According to Boas these 
garments probably originated among the 
Tsimshian. In the buffalo country 
women ' seldom ornamented their 'own 
robes, but embroidered those worn by 
men. Sometimes a man painted his 
robe in accordance with a dream, or pic¬ 
tured upon it a yearly record of his own 



SIHASAPA (bLACKFOOT SIOUx) COSTUME 


deeds or. of The prominent events of the 
tribe. Women wore the buffalo robe 
differently from the men, who gathered 







BULL. 30] 


ADORNMENT 


19 



it about the person in a way that empha¬ 
sized their action or the expression of 
emotion. 

It was common for a tribe to have its 
peculiar cut and decoration of the moc¬ 
casin, so that a man’s tribe was pro¬ 
claimed by his foot gear. The war shirt 
was frequently painted to represent the 
wearer’s prayer, having the design on 
the.back for protection and one on the 
breast for victory. The shirt was occa¬ 
sionally decorated with a fringe of human 
hair, locks being generally contributed 
by female relatives; it rarely displayed 
war trophies. The most imposing article 
of the warrior’s regalia was the bonnet 
with its crown of golden-eagle feathers. 
Before the introduction of the horse the 
flap at the back rarely extended below 
the ’waist, but when the warriors got to 
be mounted “the spine,” with its ruff of 
feathers, was so lengthened as to equal or 
exceed the height of the man. Song and 
ceremony accompanied the making of a 
war bonnet by warriors of the tribe, and 
a war honor was recounted upon each 
feather before it was placed in position. 
A bonnet could not be made without the 
consent of warriors, and it stood as a 


HOPI MAIDEN. (JAMES) 

record of tribal valor as well as a distinc¬ 
tion granted to a man by his fellow 
tribesmen. 

The gala and ceremonial dress of the 
Pueblo tribes of the S. W., of those for¬ 


merly dwelling on the plains, and of those 
of the Pacific coast, was replete with 
ornamentation which, either in design or 
material, suggested rites or past experi¬ 
ences and thus kept alive beliefs and his¬ 
toric memories among the people. Such 


HUPA GIRL IN GALA DRESS. (GODDARD) 

were the woman’s dress of the Yurok of 
California; the fringe of the skirt was 
wrapped with the same vegetal materials 
as she used in her basketry, and her 
apron was an elaborate network of the 
same on which depended strands of shells 
with pendants cut from the abalone. In 
the same connection may be mentioned 
the manner of dressing the hair of a Hopi 
maiden; the whorl on each side of her 
head symbolizes the flower of the squash, 
a sacred emblem of the tribe. The horses 
of warriors were often painted to indicate 
the dreams or the war experiences of 
their riders. Accouterments were some¬ 
times elaborately ornamented. 

Consult Abbott, Prim. Indus., 1881; 
Beauchamp (1) in Bull. N. Y. State Mus., 
no. 41, 1901, (2) ibid., no. 73, 1903; Boas 









20 


ADSHUSHEER-AGAIHTIKARA 


[B. a. b. 


(1) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 1897, (2) in 
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Anthr. i, pt. 
l, 1898; Dali in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 1884; 
Fewkesinl9thRep. B. A. E.,1900; Fletch¬ 
er in Pubs. Peabody Mus.; Matthews (1) 
in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, 1903, (2) 
in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 1884; Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1900; Moorehead, Prehist. 
Impls., 1900; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1899; Putnam in Peabody Mus. Rep., 
in, no. 2, 1882; Voth in Am. Anthrop., 
ii, 1900; Wissler in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xviii, pt. 3,1904. See Art, Artificial 
Head Deformation, Beadwork, Clothing, 
Dyes and Pigments, Featherwork, Hairdress¬ 
ing, Labrets, Painting, Ornament, Quill- 
work:, Shellwork, Tattooing, (a. c. f.) 

Adshusheer. A tribe associated with 
the Eno and Shakori in North Carolina 
in 1701. Mooney (Bull. 22, B. A. E., 1894) 
says: “It is doubtful if they, at least the 
Eno and Shoccoree, w T ereof Siouan stock, 
as they seem to have differed in physique 
and habit from their neighbors; but as 
nothing is left of their language, and as 
their alliances w T ere all with Siouan tribes, 
they can not well be discriminated. ,, 
There is but a single mention of the 
Adshusheer. Lawson (1701) tells of 
“the Shoccorie Indians, mixed with the 
Enoe and those of the nation of the 
Adshusheer, ruled by Enoe Will, a Sho- 
corrie, ’ ’ the latter residing at Adshusheer, 
14 m. from Achonechy, and ruling as 
far w. as Haw, or Reatkin, r. (Hist. 
Carolina, 96, 97, 1860). The village of 
the 3 tribes was called Adshusheer, 
which Mooney locates near the present 
town of Hillsboro, Durham co., N. C. 
Nothing is known of their subsequent 
history. The Adshusheer were probably 
absorbed by one of the tribes with which 
they were associated, (c. t. ) 

Adzes. Cutting, scraping, or gouging 
implements in prehistoric and early his¬ 
toric times, made usually of stone, but 
not infrequently of shell, bone, or cop¬ 
per. Iron and steel are much used by 



the tribes at the present day. The blade 
resembles that of a celt, although often 
somewhat curved by chippingor by grind¬ 
ing at the proper angle to make it most 
effectual. Some are grooved for hafting, 
after the manner of the grooved ax, but 
the groove does not extend over the flat 
face against which the handle is fastened. 


The hafting takes various forms accord¬ 
ing to the shape and size of the blade. 
The adz is primarily a wood-working 
tool, but it serves also for scraping, as in 
the dressing of skins and in other arts, 
and, no doubt also on occasion, for digging. 
The edge of the primitive adz was prob¬ 
ably not sharp enough to make it effec¬ 
tual in working wood save in connection 
with the process of charring. The dis¬ 
tribution of this implement was very gen¬ 
eral over the area north of Mexico, but it 
probably reached its highest develop¬ 
ment and specialization among the wood¬ 



working tribes of the n. Pacific coast. 
The scraper and the gouge have many 
uses in common with the adz. 

For various examples of the adz, an¬ 
cient and modern, consult Beauchamp 
in Bull. N. Y. State Mus., no. 18, 1897; 
Fowke in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; 
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Mur¬ 
doch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson 
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Niblaek in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Rau in Smith- 
son. Cont., xxii, 1876. (w. h. h. g. f.) 

Aegakotcheising ( AegakotchUsing ). —An 
Ottawa village in Michigan in 1851.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 478, 1851. 

Aepjin (Dutch for ‘little ape’). A 
Mahican village, known as Aepjin’s 
castle, from the name of the resident 
chief, situated in the 17th century at or 
near Schodac, Rensselaer co., N. Y.— 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 86, 1872. 

Aestaca. A Costanoan rancheria con¬ 
nected with Santa Cruz mission, Cal., in 
1819.—Olbez quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Afegua (‘bird island ’). An island off 
the w. coast of Lower California, about 
lat. 31°, on which was once a Cochimi 
rancheria.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., n, 436, 
1757. 

Afognak. A Kaniagmiut settlement 
consisting of 3 villages on Afognak id., s. 
of Cook inlet, Alaska (Bruce, Alaska, 
map, 1895). Pop. 339 in 1880, 409 in 
1890, 307 in 1900. 

Agacay. A former Timuquanan town 
on St Johns r., Florida, about 150 m. 
from the mouth.—Fontaneda (1565) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., 2d s., 264, 1875. 

Agaihtikara (‘fish-eaters’). A divi¬ 
sion of the Paviotso living in 1866 in the 
vicinity of Walker r. and lake and Car- 


BULL. 30] 


AGAIVANUNA—AGENCY SYSTEM 


21 


son r. and lake, Nev. They were under 
Chief Oderie and numbered about 1,500. 
A-gai-du-ka.— Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E.,1881. 
Aga'ih-tika'ra.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1051, 
18%. A'-gai-ti-kut-teh.— Powers. Inds. W., Nev., 
MS., B. A. E., 1876. Ahgy-tecitteh.— Powers in 
Smithson. Rep. 1876, 452, 1877. Ahgyweit.— Ibid. 
Ocki Pah-TJtes.— Campbell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 113, 
1870. Ocki-Pi-TItes.— Ibid., 119,1866. Octi.— Ibid. 
Walker River Pi-Utes.— Ibid. 

Agaivanuna ( A-gai-va-nu'-na). A Pavi¬ 
otso division formerly living at Summit 
lake, w. Nevada.—Powell, Paviotso MS., 
B. A. E., 1881. 

Agamagus. See Moxus. 

Aganustata. See Oconostota. 

Agate. See Chalcedony. 

Agawam (‘fish-curing [place]’.—Hew¬ 
itt). A name of frequent occurrence in 
s. New England and on Long Island, and 
by which was designated at least 3 Indian 
villages or tribes in Massachusetts. 

The most important was at Ipswich, 
Essex co., Mass. The site was sold by the 
chief in 1638. Its jurisdiction included the 
land on Newbury r., and the tribe was a 
part of the Pennacook confederacy. It 
was almost extinct in 1658, but as late as 
1726 there were still 3 families living near 
Wigwam hill. 

The second tribe or band of that name 
had its chief town on Long hill, near 
Springfield, Hampden co., Mass. Spring- 
field was sold in 1635 and the Indian town 
was in existence in 1675. This tribe was 
commonly classed with the Pocomtuc. 

The third was about Wareham, Ply¬ 
mouth co., Mass., the site of which was 
sold in 1655. It was probably subject to 
the Wampanoag, but joined in the plot 
against the English in 1621. (j. m.) 

Agawaam.—Records (1672) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., IV, 86, 1816. Agawam.—Pynchon (1663) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 308,1881. Agawom.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 174, repr. 1819. Aga- 
womes.—Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., I, 149,1806; Aggawam.—Smith (1616), ibid., 
3d s., VI, 97, 1837. Aggawom.—Smith (1629), Vir¬ 
ginia, ii, 177, repr. 1819. Agissawamg.-^Iohnson 
(1654) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., II, 66, 1814. 
Agowaun.—Williams (1638), ibid., 4th s., vi, 248, 
1863. Agowaywam.—Mount (1622), ibid., 1st s., 
vin, 262, 1802. Aguwom.—Underhill (1638), ibid., 
3d s., VI, 1, 1837. Angawom.—New Eng. Mem. 
quoted by Drake, Ind. Wars, 95, note, 1825. An- 
goum.—Mourt (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
2d s., ix, 37, 1822. Anguum.—Ibid. Augawam.— 
Dee in Smith (1629), Virginia, n, 235, repr. 1819. 
Augawoam.—Smith (1631) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
3d s., in, 22, 1833. Augoam.—Smith (1616), ibid., 
Vi, 97, 1837. Augoan.—Smith (1629), Virginia, n, 
193, repr. 1819. Auguan.—Smith (1631) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ill, 37,1833. 

Agawano ( A-ga / -wa-no). A prehistoric 
pueblo of the Nambe, situated in the 
mountains about 7 m. e. of the Rio 
Grande, on Rio Santa Cruz, lat. 36°, New 
Mexico.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
iv, 84, 1892. 

A-ga Uo-no.— Bandelier, op. cit. 

Agawesh. A Modoc settlement and 
camping place on Lower Klamath lake, 
n. Cal., and on Hot cr. The name is 
primarily that of Lower Klamath lake, 
and the people of the settlement were 
called Agaweshkni. (l. f. ) 


Agawesh.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 
I, xxxii, 1890. Agaweshkni.—Ibid., 19 (‘people of 
Ag&wesh’). Agaweshni.—Ibid. Aka-ush.—Ibid., 
16. Aka-uskni.—Ibid., 19. Hot creek Indians.— 
Meacham, Wigwam and Warpath, 577,1875. Ok- 
kowish.— Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep., 121, 1864 (said 
erroneously to be the Modoc name for them¬ 
selves) . 

Agdluitsok. An Eskimo village and 
Danish post in s. w. Greenland, lat. 60° 
31'.—MeddelelseromGronland, xvi, map, 
1896. 

Lichtenau.—Koldewey, German Arct. Exped., 
182, 1874. 

Agency System. Indian affairs are con¬ 
ducted under the administrative bureau 
in Washington by local Indian agents. 
This agency system was gradually devel¬ 
oped to meet the various exigencies aris¬ 
ing from the rapid displacement of Indian 
tribes by white settlers. 

History .—During the colonial period 
the spread of trade brought a large num¬ 
ber of tribes in contact with the French 
and the English, and each nation strove 
to make allies among the natives. Their 
rivalry led to the French and Indian war, 
and its effects were felt as late as the first 
half of the 19th century. When the Rev¬ 
olution began the attitude of the Indians 
became a matter of importance, and plans 
were speedily devised to secure their 
friendship for the colonists and to thwart 
English influence. One of the means 
employed was the appointment of 
agents to reside among the tribes liv¬ 
ing near the settlements. These men 
were charged to watch the movements of 
the Indians and through the mainte¬ 
nance of trade to secure their good will 
toward the colonists. As the war went 
on the western trading posts of the Brit¬ 
ish became military camps, which drew 
the colonial troops into a hitherto un¬ 
known country. Conditions arose which 
necessitated new methods for the control 
of Indians, and in 1786 Congress, to 
which the Articles of Confederation gave 
exclusive right and power to manage 
Indian affairs, established two districts— 
a northern district, to include all tribes 
n. of Ohio r. and w. of Hudson r., and a 
southern district, to include all tribes s. 
of Ohio r. A bonded superintendent 
was placed over each, and power was 
given to him to appoint two bonded depu¬ 
ties. Every tribe within these districts 
laid claim to a definite tract as its own 
territory, and these tribal districts came 
to be recognized as tribal lands. The 
old trading posts became in time indus¬ 
trial centers, and the Indians were 
called on to cede the adjoining lands. 
The right of way from one post to an¬ 
other was next acquired. As settlers 
advanced more land was secured, and so 
rapidly were the tribes constrained to 
move westward that it became necessary 
to recast the districts established in 1786. 
The plan of districting the country under 
bonded officers was continued, but on a 


22 


AGENCY SYSTEM 


[b. a. e. 


new basis—that of tribal holdings, or, as 
they came to be called, reservations, 
which weVe grouped geographically into 
superintendencies, each presided over by 
a bonded superintendent, who was di¬ 
rectly responsible to the Commissioner 
of Indian Affairs at Washington. The 
reservations were in charge of bonded 
agents, who reported to the district su¬ 
perintendents. This plan continued in 
force until about the middle of the 19th 
century, when the office of superintend¬ 
ent was abolished and agents became 
directly responsible to the Commissioner. 
For more than 80 years the office of agent 
had been almost exclusively filled by ci¬ 
vilians. The powers of the agents had ex¬ 
panded until both life and property were 
subject to their dictum. While many 
men filled the difficult position with 
honor and labored unselfishly for the 
welfare of the Indians, others abused 
their trust and brought discredit upon the 
service. President Grant, in 1868-69, 
sought to remedy this evil by the appoint¬ 
ment of army officers as Indian agents, 
but Congress, in 1870, prohibited “the 
employment of army officers in any civil 
capacity.” The President then appealed 
to the religious denominations to suggest 
candidates for Indian agencies, and to 
facilitate this arrangement the reserva¬ 
tions were apportioned among the vari¬ 
ous denominations. The plan led to the 
amelioration of the service through the 
concentration of the attention of religious 
bodies upon particular tribes, thus awak¬ 
ening an intelligent interest in their wel¬ 
fare. About this time commissioners 
were appointed to visit and report on the 
various tribes, and in this way many 
facts and conditions hitherto unknown 
were brought to the knowledge of the 
Government authorities and the public. 
As a result new forces were evoked in 
behalf of the natives. Industrial schools 
were multiplied both on and off the res¬ 
ervations; Indians became agency em¬ 
ployees; lands were allotted in severalty; 
and through citizenship legal rights were 
secured. These radical changes, brought 
about within the two decades following 
1873, led up to the act of Mar. 3, 1893, 
which permits the abolishment of agen¬ 
cies, where conditions are suitable, giv¬ 
ing to the bonded superintendent of the 
reservation school the power to act as 
agent in the transaction of business be¬ 
tween the United States Government and 
the tribe. 

Administrative department .—The adop¬ 
tion of the Constitution in 1789 brought 
about changes in the administration of 
Indian affairs at Washington. On the 
organization of the War Department the 
management of the Indians passed from 
a standing committee of Congress to the 


Secretary of War. By the act of Mar. 1, 
1793, the President was authorized to 
appoint “temporary agents to reside 
among the Indians. ’ 1 The act of Apr. 16, 
1818, inaugurated the present policy: the 
President nominates and the Senate ap¬ 
proves the appointment of all Indian 
agents. The office of Indian Commis¬ 
sioner was created by the act of Congress 
of July 9, 1832, and by an act of June 30, 
1834, the office of Indian Affairs was 
created. On the institution of the De¬ 
partment of the Interior, in accordance 
with the act of Mar. 3, 1849, the office 
of Indian Affairs was transferred from the 
War Department to the Interior Depart¬ 
ment, where it still remains. 

Congress established the office of in¬ 
spector by the act of Feb. 14, 1873. 
There are 5 inspectors, nominated by the 
President and confirmed by the Senate. 
They hold their office for 4 years and 
report directly to the Secretary of the 
Interior. They are charged with the 
duty of visiting and reporting on agen¬ 
cies, and have power to suspend an agent 
or employee and to enforce laws with the 
aid of the United States district attor¬ 
ney. The salary is $2,500, with neces¬ 
sary traveling expenses. In 1879 Con¬ 
gress provided for special agents. These 
are appointed by the Secretary of the 
Interior. Their duties are similar to 
those of the inspectors, but they may be 
required to take charge of agencies, and 
are bonded sufficiently for that purpose. 
They report direct to the Commissioner 
of Indian Affairs. The salary is $2,000. 
Special agents are also detailed by the 
Indian Bureau to investigate special mat¬ 
ters or to transact special business. Spe¬ 
cial allotting agents, w'hose duties are to 
allot, on specified reservations, the land 
in severalty to the Indians, are appointed 
by the President. The inspectors and 
special agents are the intermediaries 
between the Indian Bureau at Washing¬ 
ton and its field organization. 

Field organization .—The Indian agent 
holds his office for 4 years or until his 
successor is appointed and qualified. He 
must give a bond with not fewer than two 
sureties, and the several sums in which 
the sureties justify must aggregate at least 
double the penalty of the bond. If re¬ 
quired, an agent shall perform the duties of 
two agencies for one salary, and he shall 
not depart from the limits of his agency 
without permission (see U. S. Stat. L., 
xxn, 87; xvm, 147; iv, 736). Cessions 
of lands by the tribes to the United States 
were always made for a consideration, to 
be paid to the Indians in money or mer¬ 
chandise. Most of these payments ex¬ 
tended over a series of years, and the dis¬ 
bursing of them devolved on the agent. 
He was also charged with the preservation 


BULL. 30] 


AGENCY SYSTEM 


23 


of order on the reservation, the removal 
from the Indian country of all persons 
found therein contrary to law, the over¬ 
sight of employees, the protection of the 
rights of the Indians in the matter of 
trade, the suppression of the traffic in in¬ 
toxicating liquors, the investigation of 
depredation claims, the protection of 
the Indians on their land held in sever¬ 
alty, the care of all Government prop¬ 
erty, the care of agency stock, the proper 
receipt and distribution of all supplies 
received, the disbursement of money re¬ 
ceived, and the supervision of schools 
(see U. S. Stat. L., iv, 564, 732, 736, 
738; x, 701; xi, 80, 169; xii, 427; xm, 
29; xviii, 449; xix, 244, 293; xxm, 94). 
In addition to the correspondence and 
other clerical work incident to the cur¬ 
rent business of his office, each agent is 
required to keep a book of itemized 
expenditures of every kind, with a record 
of all contracts, together with receipts of 
money from all sources, of which a true 
transcript is to be forwarded quarterly to 
the Commissioner of Indian Affairs (see 
U. S. Stat. L., xviii, 451). The salaries 
of Indian agents range from $1,000 to 
$3,000 per annum. The employees un¬ 
der the agent are clerks, interpreters, 
police, farmers, carpenters, blacksmiths, 
millers, butchers, teamsters, herders, la¬ 
borers, watchmen, engineers, and physi¬ 
cians, besides the school employees. A 
large proportion of these employees are 
provided in accordance with treaty stipu¬ 
lations. The salaries range from $200 to 
$1,200 per annum. 

Interpreters .—This class of employees 
stood between the Indian and the white 
race, between the tribe and the Govern¬ 
ment, and have exercised a far-reaching in- 
fluenceonlndianaffairs. Thetranslations 
of these men were the sole means by which 
the two races understood or misunder¬ 
stood each other. Until recently most 
interpreters picked .up colloquial English 
from trappers, traders, and other adven¬ 
turers in the Indian country. They were 
generally mixed-bloods whose knowledge 
of the language and the culture of both the 
white and the Indian races was necessarily 
limited. It was impossible for them, with 
the best intentions, to render the dignified 
and thoughtful speech of the Indian into 
adequate English, and thus they gravely 
prejudiced the reputation of the native’s 
mental capacity. The agency interpre¬ 
ter received his salary from the Gov¬ 
ernment through the agent, and, as was 
natural, he generally strove to make him¬ 
self acceptable to that officer. His posi¬ 
tion was a responsible and trying one, 
since questions frequently arose between 
the Indians and the agent which de¬ 
manded courage, prudence, and unswerv¬ 
ing honesty on the part of the interpreter, 


who was the mouthpiece of both parties. 
Of late years the spread of English among 
the younger people through the medium 
of the schools, while it has not done 
away with the official interpreter, has 
lessened his difficulties and, at the same 
time, diminished the power he once held. 

Indian police .—This force was author¬ 
ized by act of Congress of May 27, 1878. 
Its duties are to preserve order on the res¬ 
ervation, to prevent illegal liquor traffic 
and arrest offenders in this matter, to act 
as guards when rations are issued and an¬ 
nuities paid, to take charge of and pro¬ 
tect at all times Government property, to 
restore lost or stolen property to its right¬ 
ful owners, to drive out timber thieves 
and other trespassers, to return truant 
pupils to school, and to make arrests for 
disorderly conduct and other offenses. 
Such a force is organized at all the agen¬ 
cies, and the faithfulness of the Indian 
police in the discharge of their duties is 
well attested. The pay is from $10 to $15 
a month, usually also with a small house 
and extra rations. 

Annuities .—Although the right of emi¬ 
nent domain over all territories of the 
United States is vested in the Govern¬ 
ment, still the Indians’ “right of occu¬ 
pancy” has always been recognized. 
The indemnity paid by the United 
States to the Indians when these made 
cessions of land was intended to extin¬ 
guish this right. These payments were 
made in money or merchandise, or both. 
The entire amount to be paid to a tribe 
was placed to its credit in the United 
States Treasury. In some instances only 
the interest on this sum was paid an¬ 
nually to the tribe; in other cases the 
principal was extinguished by a stated 
annual payment. These annuities (an¬ 
nual payments under treaty obligations) 
had to be voted each year by Congress 
and were distinct from the sums appro¬ 
priated as special gratuities to be used for 
cases of peculiar need. During the early 
part of the 19th century cash annuities 
were handed over by the agents to the 
chief, who receipted for the money and 
distributed it among the tribe, but for the 
last fifty years or more an enrolment of 
the tribe has been made by the agent 
prior to each payment, and the money 
has been divided pro rata and receipted 
for individually. 

A large proportion of the payments 
made to Indians was originally in mer¬ 
chandise. This mode of payment was 
abused, and inured to the advantage of 
white manufacturers and traders, but was 
injurious to the tribe, as it tended to kill 
all native industries and helped toward 
the general demoralization of the Indian. 
Payments in goods are now made only in 
cases where an isolated situation or other 


24 


AGGAVACAAMANC-AGRICULTURE 


[B. A. M 


conditions make this method suited to 
the ir terests of the Indians. 

Rations. —These were a part of the mer¬ 
chandise payments. They were at first 
urged upon the tribes in order to keep 
them confined within the reservations 
instead of wandering in the pursuit of 
game. After the destruction of the buf¬ 
falo herds the beef ration became a neces¬ 
sity to the Plains Indians until they were 
able to raise their own stock. Except in 
a few instances, where treaties still re¬ 
quire this method of payment, rations 
are not now issued unless great poverty 
or some disaster makes it necessary. 

A movement is now on foot for the 
division of all tribal money held in the 
United States Treasury, an arrangement 
that would do away with many disad¬ 
vantages that are connected with pay¬ 
ments in annuities and rations. 

See Governmental Policy, Reservations, 
Treaties. (a. c. p. ) 

Aggavacaamanc (‘arroyo of the 
gulls’ (?)). A rancheria, probably Co- 
chimi, connected with Purfsima (Cade- 
gomo) mission, w. Lower California, in 
the 18th centurv.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., v, 189, 1857. 

Aggey. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 113, 1871) as a pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in 
the Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, e. of 
the Rio Grande, and in all probability 
occupied at that time by the Tigua or the 
Piros. 

Agiukchuk. A Kaialigamiut village 
opposite the s. shore of Nelson id., Alas¬ 
ka; pop. 35 in 1880, 81 in 1890. 

Agiukchugumut. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. Ighiakchaghamiut. —11th Census, 
Alaska, 110, 1893. 

Agivavik. A Nushagagmiut village on 
Nusliagak r., Alaska; pop. 52 in 1880, 
30 in 1890. 

Agivarik. —Post route map, 1903. Agivavik. — 
Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. 

Aglemiut. An Eskimo tribe inhabit¬ 
ing the n. w. coast of Alaska from the 
mouth of Nushagak r. s. w. to the valley 
of the Ugashik, extending e. to the high¬ 
lands (Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 19, 
1877). They numbered only 767 in 1890. 
They dwell on the coast, hunting the 
walrus and occasionally putting out to 
sea in pursuit of whales. Although 
Christians, they retain their native be¬ 
liefs and customs, resembling their neigh¬ 
bors in dress, except that they use rein¬ 
deer skins for winter garments. They 
carve ivory as skilfully as the northern 
tribes. Subdivisions are the Kiatagmiut, 
Ugagogmiut, and Ugashigmiut. The vil¬ 
lages are Igagik, Ikak, Kingiak, Paug- 
wik, Ugashik, and Unangashik. 

Achkugmjuten. —H olmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 4,1855 
(applied to Aglemiut and Kaniagmiut by the 
people of Norton sd.) Aglahmutes. —Elliott, 
Cond. Aff. in Alaska, 29,1874. Aglaxtana. —Doros- 
chin in Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874 


(Knaiakhotana name). Aglegmguten.—Holm- 
berg, Ethnol. Skizz., 4, 1855. Aglegmiut.—Wor- 
man quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 19, 
1877. Aglemut.— Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 
29, 1874. Agolegmiut.— Turner quoted by pall, 
op. cit., 19. Agolegmutes. —Latham (1845) in J. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 183, 1848. Agolemuten. — 
Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 121, 1839. Agool- 
mutes.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. in Alaska, 29, 1874. 
Aguljmjuten. — Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 5, 1855. 
Agulmuten.— Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 122, 1839. 
Dog-drivers.— Petroff, 10th Census Alaska, 164, 
1884. Oglemut.— Dali, op. eit., 19. Oglemutes. — 
Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 267, 1869. O'gulmut.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 19, 1877. Sewer- 
nowskije.— Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 
1874(‘northerner’: Russian name). Svernofftsi.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 19,1877. Tchouktchi 
americani,— Balbi quoted by Dali, ibid. Tindi 
suxtana. —Dawydof quoted by Radloff, Worterb. 

d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874 (Kinai name). Tuntu sux¬ 
tana. —Doroschin quoted,ibid. Tyndysiukhtana, — 
Petroff, Alaska, 164, 1884. 

Aglutok. An Eskimo settlement in 
s. w. Greenland. Ruins found there are 
supposed to be those of former Norse set¬ 
tlers.—Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 18, 
1767. 

Agomekelenanak. An Eskimo village 
in the Kuskokwim district, Alaska. Pop. 
15 in 1890. 

Ahgomekhelanaghamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 

164, 1893. 

Agomiut (‘ people of the weather side ’). 
A tribe of Eskimo inhabiting a region of 
n. Baffin land bordering on Lancaster 
sd. y consisting of two subtribes—the 
Tununirusirmiut in the w., about Admi¬ 
ralty inlet, and the Tununirmiut in the 

e. , about Eclipse sd. They hunt the 
narwhal and the white whale in Eclipse 
sd., and in search of seals sometimes 
cross the ice on sledges to North Devon, 
there coming in contact with the natives 
of Ellesmere land. 

Agreements. See Governmental Policy, 
Reservations, Treaties. 

Agriculture. An opinion long prevailed 
in the minds of the people that the In¬ 
dians n. of Mexico were, previous to and 
at the time Europeans began to settle 
that part of the continent, virtually 
nomads, having no fixed abodes, and 
hence practising agriculture to a very 
limited extent. Why this opinion has 
been entertained by the masses, who 
have learned it from tales and traditions 
of Indian life and warfare as they have 
been since the establishment of European 
colonies, can be readily understood, but 
why writers who have had access to the 
older records should thus speak of them 
is not easily explained, when these rec¬ 
ords, speaking of the temperate regions, 
almost without exception notice the fact 
that the Indians were generally found, 
from the border of the western plains to 
the Atlantic, dwelling in settled villages 
and cultivating the soil. De Soto found all 
the tribes that he visited, from the Florida 
peninsula to the western part of Arkan¬ 
sas, cultivating maize and various other 
food plants. The early voyagers found 
the same thing true along the Atlantic 


bull. 30] 


AGRICULTURE 


25 


from Florida to Massachusetts. Capt. 
John Smith and his Jamestown colony, 
indeed all the early colonies, depended 
at first very largely for subsistence on the 
products of Indian cultivation. Jacques 
Cartier, the first European who ascended 
the St Lawrence, found the Indians of 
Hochelaga (Montreal id.) cultivating the 
soil. “They have,” he remarks, “good 
and large fields of corn.” Champlain 
and other early French explorers testify 
to the large reliance of the Iroquois on 
the cultivation of the soil for subsistence. 
La Salle and his companions observed 
the Indians of Illinois, and thence south¬ 
ward along the Mississippi, cultivating 
and to a large extent subsisting on maize. 

Sagard, an eyewitness of what he re¬ 
ports, says, in speaking of the agriculture 
of the Hurons in 1623-26, that they dug 
a round place at every 2 feet or less, where 
they planted in the month of May in each 
hole nine or ten grains of corn which 
they had previously selected, culled, and 
soaked for several days in water. And 
every year they thus planted their corn 
in the same places and spots, which they 
renovated with their small wooden shov¬ 
els. He indicates the height of the corn 
by the statement that he lost his way 
quicker in these fields than in the prairies 
or forests (Hist, du Canada, i, 265-266, 
1636, repr. 1866). 

Indian corn, the great American cereal, 
“was found in cultivation from the south¬ 
ern extremity of Chile to the 50th parallel 
of n. latitude” (Brinton, Mythsof theNew 
World, 22, 1868). “All the nations who 
inhabit from the sea as far as the Illinois, 
and even farther, carefully cultivate the 
maize corn, which they make their prin¬ 
cipal subsistence” (Du Pratz, Hist. La., 
ii, 239, 1763). “The whole of the tribes 
situated in the Mississippi valley, in 
Ohio, and the lakes reaching on both 
sides of the Alleghenies, quite to Massa¬ 
chusetts and other parts of New England, 
cultivated Indian corn. It was the staple 
product” (Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 80, 
1851). 

The great length of the period previous 
to the discovery during which maize had 
been in cultivation is proved by its differ¬ 
entiation into varieties, of which there 
were four in Virginia; by the fact that 
charred corn and impressions of corn on 
burnt clay have been found in the mounds 
and in the ruins of prehistoric pueblos in 
the S. W.; by the Delaware tradition (see 
Walam Olum); and by the fact that the 
builders of the oldest mounds must have 
been tillers of the soil. 

Some idea of the extent of the cultiva¬ 
tion of maize by some of the tribes may 
be gained from the following estimates: 
The amount of corn (plobably in the ear) 
of the Iroquois destroyed by Denonville 


in 1687 was estimated at 1,000,000 bushels 
(Charlevoix, Hist. Nouv. Fr., n, 355,1744; 
also Doc. Hist. N. Y., i, 238, 1849). Ac¬ 
cording to Tonti, who accompanied the 
expedition, they were engaged seven days 
in cutting up the corn of 4 villages. Gen. 
Sullivan, in his expedition into the Iro¬ 
quois country, destroyed 160,000 bushels 
of corn and cut down the Indian orchards; 
in one orchard alone 1,500 apple trees 
were destroyed (Hist. N. Y. During the 
Revolutionary War, ii, 334, 1879). Gen. 
Wayne, writing from Grand Glaize in 
1794, says: “The margins of these beauti¬ 
ful rivers—the Miami of the Lake and the 
An Glaize—appear like one continuous 
village for a number of miles, both above 
and below this place; nor have I ever 
before beheld such immense fields of 



PUEBLO CORN PLANTING 


corn in any part of America from Canada 
to Florida” (Manypenny, Ind. Wards, 
84, 1880). 

If we are indebted to the Indians for 
maize, without which the peopling of 
America would probably have been de¬ 
layed for a century, it is also from them 
that the whites learned the methods of 
planting, storing, and using it. The ordi¬ 
nary corncribs, set on posts, are copies 
of those in use among the Indians, which 
Lawson described in 1701 (Hist. Car., 35, 
repr. 1860). 

Beans, squashes, pumpkins, sweet pota¬ 
toes, tobacco, gourds, and the sunflower 
were also cultivated to some extent, espe¬ 
cially in what are now the southern states. 
According to Beverly (Hist. Va., 125-128, 
1722), the Indians had two varieties of 
sweet potatoes. Marquette, speaking of 
the Illinois Indians, says that in addi- 



AGRICULTURE 


[b. a. e. 


26 


tion to maize, ‘ ‘ they also sow beans and 
melons, which are excellent, especially 
those with a red seed. Their squashes 
are not of the best; they dry them in 
the sun to eat in the winter and spring” 
(Voy. and Discov., in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., iv, 33, 1852). 

The foregoing applies chiefly to the 
region e. of the Rocky mts., but the 
native population of the section now em¬ 
braced in New Mexico and Arizona not 
only cultivated the soil, but relied on 
agriculture to a large extent for subsist¬ 
ence. No corn was raised or agriculture 
practised anywhere on the Pacific slope 
n. of the lower Rio Colorado, but frequent 
mention is made by the chroniclers of 
Coronado’s expedition to New Mexico of 
the general cultivation of maize by the In¬ 
dians of that section, and also of the cul¬ 
tivation of cotton. It is stated in the 
Relacion del Suceso (Winship in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 575, 1896) that those who 
lived near the Rio Grande raised cotton, 
but the others did not. The writer, 
speaking of the Rio Grande valley, adds: 
“There is much corn here.” 

‘ ‘ From the earliest information we have 
of these nations [the Pueblo Indians] 
they are known to have been tillers of 
the soil, and though the implements 
used and their methods of cultivation 
were both simple and primitive, cotton, 
corn, wheat [after its introduction], 
beans, with many varieties of fruits were 
raised in abundance” (Bancroft, Nat. 
Rac., i, 538,1882). Chile and onions are 
extensively cultivated by the Pueblo 
tribes, as also are grapes and peaches, but 
these latter, like wheat, were introduced 
by the Spaniards. 

The Indians of New Mexico and Ari¬ 
zona had learned the art of irrigating 
their fields before the appearance of the 
white man on the continent. This is 
shown not only by the statements of early 
explorers, but by the still existing re¬ 
mains of their ditches. “In the valleys 
of the Salado and Gila, in s. Arizona, 
however, casual observation is sufficient 
to demonstrate that the ancient inhabi¬ 
tants engaged in agriculture by artificial 
irrigation to a vast extent. . . . Judg¬ 
ing from the remains of extensive ancient 
works of irrigation, many of which may 
still be seen passing through tracts culti¬ 
vated to-day as well as across densely 
wooded stretches considerably beyond 
the present nonirrigated area, it is safe 
to say that the principal canals constructed 
and used by the ancient inhabitants of 
the Salado valley controlled the irriga¬ 
tion of at least 250,000 acres” (Hodge 
in Am. Anthrop., July, 1893). Remains 
of ancient irrigating ditches and canals 
are also found elsewhere in these terri¬ 
tories. 


The sunflower was cultivated to a limi¬ 
ted extent both by the Indians of the 
Atlantic slope and those of the Pueblo 
region for its seeds, which were eaten 
after being parched and ground into 
meal between two stones. The limits of 
the cultivation of tobacco at the time of 
the discovery has not yet been well de¬ 
fined. That it was cultivated to some 
extent on the Atlantic side is known; 
it was used aboriginally all over Cali¬ 
fornia, and indeed a plant called tobacco 
by the natives was cultivated as far n. as 
Yakutat bay, Alaska. 

Although it has been stated that the 
Indians did not use fertilizers, there is 
evidence that they did. The Plymouth 
colonists were told by the Indians to add 
fish to the old grounds (Bradford, Hist. 
Plym. Plant., Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th 
s., in, 100,1856). It is also stated that the 
Iroquois manured their land. Lescarbot 
says the Armouchiquois, Virginia Indians, 
and others “enrich their fields with shells 
and fish.” The implements they used 

cultivating 
the ground 
are described 
as “ wooden 
howes” and 
“spades made 
of hard wood.” 
“Florida In¬ 
dians dig their ground with an instru¬ 
ment of wood fashioned like a broad 
mattock,” “use hoes made of shoulder 
blades of animals fixed on staves,” “use 
the shoulder blade of a deer or a tortoise 
shell,sharp¬ 
ened upon 
a stone and 
fastened to 
a stick, in¬ 
stead of a 

hoe - ” “a IMPLEMENT OF 8HELL, FLORIDA 

piece of wood, 3 inches broad, bent at 
one end and fastened to a long handle 
sufficed them to free the land from weeds 
and turn it up lightly.” Mention is also 



Hoe, from an Engraving in De Bry, 
Sixteenth Century 




Flint Spade, Middle Mis¬ 
sissippi Valley 


Flint hoe, Middle Mis¬ 
sissippi Valley 



made of shells used as digging imple¬ 
ments, and Moore and Cushing have 
found in Florida many large conchs that 
had served this purpose. 





HI LL. 30] 


AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENTS-AGUA FRESCA 


27 


Such are some of the earlier statements 
in regard to the agricultural implements 
used by the Indians; however, certain 
stone implements have been found in vast 
numbers which are generally conceded to 
have been used in breaking the soil. Of 
these the most characteristic are the hoes 
and spades of the middle Mississippi 
valley. 

Formerly the field work was generally 
done by the women. Hariot (Hakluyt, 
Voy., hi, 329,1810) says, “The women, 
with short pickers or parers (because they 
use them sitting) of a foot long, and about 
5 inches in breadth, do only break the 
upper part of the ground to raise up the 
weeds, grass, and old stubs or cornstalks 
with their roots.” It was a general cus¬ 
tom to burn over the ground before plant¬ 
ing in order to free it from weeds and 
rubbish. In the forest region patches 
were cleared by girdling the trees, thus 
causing them to die, and afterward burn¬ 
ing them down. 

Though the Indians as a rule have been 
somewhat slow in adopting the plants 
and methods introduced by the whites, 
this has not been wholly because of their 
dislike of labor, but in some cases has 
been due largely to their removals by the 
Government and to the unproductiveness 
of the soil of many of the reservations 
assigned them. Where tribes or portions 
of tribes, as parts of the Cherokee and 
Iroquois, were allowed to remain in their 
original territory, they were not slow in 
bringing into use the introduced plants 
and farming methods of the whites, the 
fruit trees, livestock, plows, etc. 

According to the Report of the Com¬ 
missioner of Indian Affairs for 1904 the 
following is a summary of the agricultural 
industries of the Indians, exclusive of the 
Five Civilized Tribes, during that year: 


Land cultivated. 


....acres 

365,469 

Land broken. 


44 

30,644 

Land under fence (1903). 



1,836,245 

Fencing built. 


_rods 

269,578 

Families living on and 

cultivating 


lands in severalty. 



10,846 

Crops raised: 

Wheat. 


.bushels 

750,788 

Oats and barley. 


(4 * 

1,246,960 

Corn. 


44 

949,815 

Vegetables. 


“ 

606,023 

Flax. 


44 

26,290 

Hay. 



405,627 

Miscellaneous products 

of 

Indian 


labor: 

Butter made. 


. pounds 

157,057 

Lumber sawed. 


.feet 

5,563,000 

Timber marketed. 


44 

107,032,000 

Wood cut. 



118,493 

Stock owned by Indians: 
Horses, mules, and burros.. 


295,466 

Cattle. 



497,611 

Swine. 



40,898 

Sheep . 



792,620 

Goats. 



135,417 

Domestic fowls. 



267,574 


Freight transported by Indians with 

their own teams . .*..pounds 23,717,000 

Amount earned by such freighting .. $113,641 


Value of products of Indian labor sold 
by Indians: 

To Government. $456,026 

Otherwise. $1,878,462 

Roads made.miles 570 

Roads repaired. “ 3,045 

Days’ labor expended on roads. 125,813 

Much additional information regarding 
agriculture among the Indians may be 
found in the Annual Reports of the Bureau 
of American Ethnology. See also Food , 
Gourds, Irrigation, Maize, Tobacco, Wild 
Rice, etc., and for agricultural imple¬ 
ments see Hoes, Implements and Utensils, 
Spades, (c. t.) 

Agtism. Mentioned as a Costanoan 
village near Santa Cruz mission, Cal., in 
1819.—Olbez quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Agua Caliente (Span.: ‘ warm water ’). 
A small Cahuilla division on the head¬ 
waters of San Luis Rey r., s. Cal., form¬ 
ing one linguistic group with the Kawia, 
Luiseno, and Juaneno. Villages: Gupa 
and Wilakal. The people of Wilakal are 
included in Los Coyotes res. (see Pacha- 
wal). By decision of the U. S. Supreme 
Court the title of the Indians in the other 
village and in several small Diegueno 
rancherias, collectively better known as 
“Warner’s Ranch Indians,” was dis¬ 
proved, and under act of Congress of 
May 27, 1902, a tract was added to Pala 
res., and these and neighboring Indians 
were removed thereto in 1903 (Ind. Aff. 
Reps., 1902, 1903). At that time they 
aggregated about 300. 

Agua Caliente.— Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. Hekwach.— 
Ibid, (so called by Dieguefios of San Felipe). 
Warner’s Ranch Indians.— Popular name for in¬ 
habitants of Gupa and some Diegueno rancherias 
in the neighborhood. Xagua'tc. —Boas in Proc. 
Am. Asso. Adv. Sci., xliv, 261,1895 (so called by 
Dieguefios of Tekumak). 

Aguacay. A large village, probably be¬ 
longing to a division of a southern Cad- 
doan tribe, formerly in the vicinity of 
Washita r., Ark., where salt was man¬ 
ufactured both for home consumption 
and for trade. It was visited by the De- 
Soto expedition in 1542. See Gentl. of 
Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
ii, 194, 1850; Hakluyt Soc. Pub., 197, 
1851; Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, 810, 
1705. (a. c. F.) 

Aguachacha. The Yavapai name of a 
tribe, evidently Yuman, living on the 
lower Colorado in Arizona or California 
in the 18th century.—Garces (1776), 
Diary, 404, 1900. 

Aquachacha.—Jos6 Cortez (1799) quoted in Pac. 
R. R. Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 126, 1856. 

Agua Escondida (Span.: ‘hidden wa¬ 
ter’). Apparently a Pima or Papago 
rancheria s. w. of Tubac, s. Arizona, in 
1774.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 389, 
1889. 

Agua Fresca (Span.: ‘freshwater’). A 
Timuquanan district in n. Florida about 
the year 1600.—Pareja (1614), Arte Tim., 
xxi, 1886. 





























28 


AGUA FRIA-AHAPOPKA 


[b. a. e. 


Agua Fria (Span.: ‘cold water’). A 
village, probably Pirnan, on Gila River 
res.,s. Arizona; pop. 527 in 1863. Bailey 
makes the pop. 770 in 1858, and Browne 
gives it as 533 in 1869. 

Agua Rias.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863 
(misprint). Aqua Baiz.— Browne, Apache Coun¬ 
try, 290, 1869. Arizo del Aqua. —Bailey in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 208, 1858. 

Aguama. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa In6s mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 
18, 1861. 

Agua Nueva (Span.: ‘new water’). A 
former pueblo, doubtless of the Piros, on 
the Rio Grande between Socorro and 
Sevilleta, N. Mex. It was apparently 
abandoned shortly before Gov. Otermin’s 
second visit in 1681, during the Pueblo 
revolt,—Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 
313, 1869. 

Aguaquiri. An Indian village, prob¬ 
ably in central N. Car. or n. e. Ga., visited 
by Juan Pardo in 1565.—Yandera (1567) 
in Smith, Coll. Docs. Fla., i, 17,1857. 

Agua Salada (Span.: ‘salt water’). A 
Navaho division in 1799, mentioned as a 
village by Cortez (Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, 
pt, 3, 119, 1856). As the Navaho are not 
villagers, the Thodhokongzhi (Saline 
water, or Bitter water) clan was prob¬ 
ably intended. 

Agua Salada. A district in Florida 
where one of the various Timuquanan 
dialects was spoken.—Pareja (1614), Arte 
Tim., 88, 1886. 

AguasCalientes (Span.: ‘warmwaters’). 
A province with 3 towns visited by Coro¬ 
nado in 1541; identified by J. H. Simp¬ 
son with the Jemez ruins at Jemez Hot 
Springs, near the head of Jemez r., San¬ 
doval co., N. Mex. 

Aguas Calientes.— Castaneda (1596) in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 525, 1896. Aquas-Calientes. —Castaneda 
(1596) misquoted by Ternaux-Compans, Voy.,ix, 
182, 1838. Oji Caliente. —Bell in J. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., N. s., i, 262, 1869 (misprint). 

Aguastayas. A tribe, possibly Coahuil- 
tecan, mentioned by Rivera (Diario, leg. 
1,994, 2,602, 1736) in connection with the 
Mesquites and Payayas, as residing s. s.e. 
of San Antonio presidio, Tex. The three 
tribes mentioned numbered 250 people. 

Aguile. A town in n. Florida, visited 
by DeSoto in 1539, possibly in the neigh¬ 
borhood of Ocilla r.—Biedma in Smith, 
Coll. Docs. Fla., i,48,1857. 

Aguin. A Chumashan village w. of the 
Shuku village at Ventura, Ventura co., 
Cal., in 1542; placed by Taylor (Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863) on the beach of 
Las Llagas. 

Agulakpak. An Eskimo village near 
Kuskokwim r., Alaska. Pop. 19 in 1890. 

Ahgulakhpaghamiut.— llth Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. 

Aguliak. A Kuskwogmiut village on 
the e. shore of Kuskokwim bay, Alaska. 
Pop. 120 in 1880, 94 in 1890. 


Aguliagamiut. —llth Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Aguliagamute.— Petroff, Rep. onAlaska, map, 1884. 
Aguligamute. —Petroff, ibid., 17. 

Agulok. A former Aleut village on l T n- 
alaska id., Alaska.—Coxe, Russ. Discov., 
159, 1787. 

Agulukpuk. An Eskimo village in the 
Nushagak district, Alaska; pop. 22 in 
1890. 

Agulukpukmiut. —llth Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Agumak. A Kuskwogmiut village in 
Alaska; pop. 41 in 1890.—llth Census, 
Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Ahachik (‘ moving lodges’). A Crow 
band. 

Ah-lia-chick. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 

Lodges charged upon. —Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 144, 1851. 

Ahadzooas. The principal village of the 
Oiaht, on Diana id., w. coast of Vancou¬ 
ver id.—Can. Ind. Aff., 263, 1902. 

Ahaharopirnopa. A division or band of 
the Crows. 

Ahah-ar-ro'-pir-no-pah. —Lewis and Clark, Disc., 
41, 1806. 

Ahahpitape ( aali'-pun ‘blood,’ tuppe 
‘people’: ‘bloody band’). A division 
of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika. 
Ah-ah'-pi-ta-pe. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171, 1877. 
Ah'-pai-tup-iks. —Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. A'-pe-tup-i. —Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo.Val., 264, 1862. Bloody Piedgans. — 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 1851. 

Ahahswinnis. The principal village of 
the Opitchesaht, on the e. bank of So- 
mass r., Vancouver id.—Can. Ind. Aff., 
263, 1902. 

Ahahweh (a'hawe, ‘a swan.’—Win. 
Jones). A phratry of the Chippewa. 
According to Morgan it is the Duck gens 
of the tribe. 

A-auh-wauh. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83,1850. 
Ah-ah-wai. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 304, 1853. 
Ah-ah-wauk. —Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Colfl., 
v, 44, 1885. Ah-ah'-weh. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 
1877. Ah-auh-wauh. —Ramsey in Ind Aff. Rep., 
91, 1850. Ah-auh-wauh-ug. —Warren in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 87, 1885 (plural). Ahawh- 
wauk. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 142, 1852. 

Ahalakalgi (from ciha ‘sweet potato’, 
algi ‘people’). One of the 20 Creek 
clans. 

Ah'-ah.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Ahala- 
xalgi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884. 

Ahantchuyuk. A division of the Kala- 
pooian family on and about Pudding r., 
an e. tributary of the Willamette, empty¬ 
ing into it about 10 m. s. of Oregon City, 
Oreg. 

Ahandshiyuk. —Gatschet, Calapooya MS. vocab., 
B. A. E. (own name). Ahandshuyuk amim. — 
Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Lakmiut 
name). Ahantchuyuk amim,— Gatschet, Attalati 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1877 (so called by the Cala¬ 
pooya proper). French Prairie Indians. —So called 
by early settlers. Pudding River Indians. —So 
called by various authors. 

Ahapchingas. A former Gabrieleno 
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., be¬ 
tween Los Angeles and San Juan Capis¬ 
trano.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11, 
1860. 

Ahapopka (‘eating the ahi,’ or bog 
potato). A former Seminole town, prob- 


BULL. 30 | 


AHASIMUS-AHOUERHOPIHEIM . 


29 


ably on or near the lake of the same 
name and near the head of Ocklawaha r., 
n. central Florida. 

Ahapapka.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 
1st, sess., 27, 1826. Ahapopka.— Bell in Morse, 
Rep. to Sec. War, 306, 1822. Hapapka.— Jesup 
(1837) in H. R. Doc. 78, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 65, 
1838. 

Ahasimus (possibly related to the Chip¬ 
pewa animush, ‘dog’; the Sauk, Fox, and 
Kickapoo word for dog is unemd a , and for 
a puppy, unemoha a , but when the word 
becomes the name of a boy of the Wolf 
gens, it assumes another form of the 
diminutive, unimds a . —W. Jones). A 
village in n. New Jersey in 1655, probably 
of the Unami Delawares (N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiii, 55, 1881). As the name of a 
later white settlement the word occurs in 
a number of forms. 

Ahchawat. A summer village of the 
Makah at C. Flattery, Wash.—Swan in 
Smithson. Cont., xvi, 6, 1870. 

Hatch-ah-wat. —Gibbs, MS. 248, B. A. E. 

Ahdik (udt'k, ‘caribou’—W. Jones). 
A gens of the Chippew^a, often translated 
‘ reindeer.’ 

Addick.— Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44, 
1885. Ad-dik.— Tanner, Narrative, 314,1830. Ad- 
dik'. —Morgan, Ane. Soc., 166, 1877. Atik'.— 
Gatschetjfde Tomazin, Indian informant. 

Ahealt. A Koluschan division in the 
neighborhood of Pt Stew r art, Alaska. 
The name can not be identified, but a 
clan called Hehlqoan, q. v., now living 
at Wrangell, formerly occupied this 
region, (j. r. s.) 

A-he-alt. —Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Ahi- 
alt.— Petroff in Tenth Census, Alaska, 36, 1884 
(quoted from a Hudson Bay Co. census taken in 
1839). Port Stuart Indians. —Kane, op. cit. 

Ahehouen. A former village or tribe 
between Matagorda bay and Maligne 
(Coloradd) r., Tex. The name was told 
to Joutel in 1687 by the Ebahamo In¬ 
dians, who lived in that region, and prob¬ 
ably applied to a tribe or division closely 
affiliated to the Karankawa. Tribes be¬ 
longing to the Tonkawan family also 
roamed in this vicinity, and those of the 
Caddoan family sometimes visited the 
country. See Gatschet in Peabody Mu¬ 
seum Papers, i, 35, 46, 1891. (a. c. f. ) 

Ahehoen.— Joutel (1687) in French. Hist. Coll. 
La., i, 137, 1846. Ahehoenes.— Barcia, Ensayo, 
271, 1723. Ahehouen.— Jontel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., ill, 288, 1878. Ahekouen.— Joutel (1687) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 152, 1846. 

Ahkaiksumiks. A subtribe or gens of 
the Kainah. 

Ah-kaik'-sum-iks. —Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. 

Ahkaipokaks ( ah-kai-tm' ‘ many ' ,po-ka / 
‘child’: ‘ many children.’—Grinnell). A 
subtribe or gens of the Kainah. 

Ah -kai'-po-kaks. —Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. 

Ahkaiyikokakiniks (‘ white breasts ’). 
A band or gens of the Piegan. 
Ah-kai-yi-ko-ka'-kin-iks. —Grinnell, Blackfoot 
Lodge Tales, 209, 1892. Kai'-it-ko-ki'-ki-naks. — 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264, 1862. 

Ahkotashiks (‘many beasts [horses]’). 
A subtribe or gens of the Kainah. 


Ahk-o'-tash-iks.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
209, 1892. 

Ahkwonistsists (‘many lodge poles’). 
A subtribe or gens of the Kainah. 
Ah-kwo'-nis-tsists.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. 

Ahlunksoo (‘ spotted animal ’). A gens 
of the Abnaki. 

Ah-lunk'-soo.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. 
w Ahmeekkwun - eninnewug 1 (Chippewa: 
UmVJcuwVnlnlw ug , ‘beaver people’). A 
tribe living, according to Tanner (Narr., 
316, 1830), among the Fall Indians, by 
which name beseems to mean the Atsina 
or, possibly, the Amikwa. 

Ahmik (‘ beaver ’). A gens of the Chip¬ 
pewa. 

Ah-meek.—Tanner, Narrative, 314, 1830. Ah- 
mik'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166,1877. Amik.—War¬ 
ren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 45,1885. TJmi‘k.— 
Jones, inf n, 1905 (correct form). 

Ahnahanamete (supposed to indicate 
some animal). A Hidatsa band, regarded 
by Matthews as possibly the same as the 
Amahami. 

AK-nah-ha-na'-me-te.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 
1877. 

Ahome. (Buelna says the aboriginal 
name is Jaomeme, ‘where the man ran.’ 
In Cahita, lio-me means ‘to inhabit,’ 
‘to live,’ and in Nahuatl ahome might 
be derived from ail water, orne two, ‘ two 
waters,’ referring to the ocean tide which 
ascends the river to this point; but after 
all the word may be of Vacoregue origin.) 
A subdivision of the Cahita, speaking 
the Vacoregue dialect, and the name of 
its pueblo, situated 4 leagues above the 
mouth of Rio del Fuerte, n. w. Sinaloa, 
Mexico. The tradition exists among 
them that they came from the n. ; in 
that country they fixed paradise and the 
dwelling place of the souls of their dead. 
They were of agreeable disposition and of 
larger size than the other inhabitants of 
the river valley. They are said to have 
uttered cries and lamentations for their 
dead during one entire year, for an hour 
at sunrise and another at sunset. Al¬ 
though speaking the same language as 
the inhabitants of a number of neighbor¬ 
ing pueblos, the Ahome formed a dis¬ 
tinct organization. The pueblo of Ahome 
became the center of the Batucari settle¬ 
ment under the Jesuit missionaries. 
(f. w. ii.) 

Ahome.—Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 1726. Hoomi.—Doc. Hist. Mex., quoted 
by Buelna, Peregr. Aztecas, 123,1892. Jaomeme.— 
Buelna, ibid. Omi.—Hardy. Trav. in Mex., 438, 
1829. 

Ahosulga. A former Seminole town 5 
m. s. of New Mickasuky towm, probably 
in Lafayette co., Fla.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 
74 (1823), 19th Cong., 27, 1826. 

Ahouerhopihein (probably a combina¬ 
tion of Ahouergomahe and Kemahopi- 
hein of Joutel’s list; see Margry, Dec., 
hi, 288, 289,1878). A village or possibly 
two villages in Texas. The people are 
mentioned by Joutel as living in 1687 be- 


30 


AHOUSAHT-AHTEN A 


[B. A. E. 


tween Matagorda bay and Maligne (Colo¬ 
rado) r., Tex. The region was inhabited 
by Karankawan tribes, and the name was 
given by the Ebahamo, who were probably 
closely affiliated to that group. See Gat- 
schet, Karankawa Indians, 35, 46, 1891. 
(a. c. p.) 

Abonerhopiheim. —Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. 
Coll, La., I, 152, 1846. Ahonerhopiheim.— Ibid., 
137. Ahouerhopiheim. —Shea, note in Charlevoix, 
New France, IV, 78, 1870. 

Ahousaht. A Nootka tribe about Clay- 
oquotsd., w. coast of Vancouver id.; pop. 
273 in 1902. Their principal village is 
Mahktosis. (j. r. s.) 

Ahhousaht.— Can. Ind. Aff., 188, 1883. Ahosett.— 
Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 56, 1870. Ahou¬ 
saht.— Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 1868. Ahouset.— 
Mayne, Brit. Col., 251, 1862. Ahowartz.— Arm¬ 
strong, Oreg., 136, 1857. Ahowsaht.— Powell in 
7th Rep. B. A. E., 130,1891. Ah-owz-arts.— Jewitt, 
Narr., 36, 1849. Arhosett. —Swan, MS., B. A. E. 
Asonsaht, —Can. Ind. Aff., 7, 1872. 

Ahoyabe. A small town, possibly Musk- 
hogean, subject to the Hoya, and lying be¬ 
tween them and the Coosa, on the coast 
of s. S. C., in 1567.—Vandera in Smith, 
Coll. Docs. Fla., i, 16, 1857. 

Ahpakosea (‘ buzzard ’). A gens of the 
Miami. 

Ah-pa'-kose-e-a. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877. 

Ahseponna (‘raccoon’). A gens of the 
Miami. 

Ah-se-pon'-na. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877. 

A'sepuna.— Wm. Jones, inf’n., 1905 (Sauk, Fox, 
and Kickapoo form). 

Ahtena (* ice people ’). An Athapascan 
tribe occupying the basin of Copper r., 
Alaska. Their permanent villages are 
situated 100 m. or more from the sea, on 
Copper r., the mouth of which Nagaieff 
discovered in 1781. An expedition in 
1796 under Samoylof failed on account 
of the hostility of the natives, as did a 
second under Lastochkin in 1798, and 
one under Klimoffsky in 1819. Gregorief 
in 1844 renewed the attempt with like 
result. In 1848 Serebrdnnikof ventured 
up the river, but his disregard for the 
natives cost the lives of himself and 3 of 
his party (Dali, Alaska, 343, 1877). Dali 
met a trading party of Ahtena in 1874 at 
Port Etches, and in 1882 a trader named 
Holt ascended the river as far as Taral, 
but on a subsequent visit was murdered 
by the natives. Lieut. Abercrombie in 
1884 explored a part of the river, and in 
the following year Lieut. Allen made an 
extended exploration, visiting the Ahtena 
villages on Copper r. and its chief tribu¬ 
taries. The natives strongly resemble 
the Koyukukhotana in appearance, the 
men being tall, straight, of good phy¬ 
sique, with clear olive complexion, arched 
eyebrows, beardless faces, and long, 
straight, black hair, worn loose or in a sin¬ 
gle scalp-lock. Petroff (10th Census, Alas¬ 
ka, 164, 1884) states that prior to 1880 the 
women had never been seen by any white 
man who lived to describe them. On 
account of the hostile nature of these 


people but little is known of their cus¬ 
toms and beliefs. Their clothing ordi¬ 
narily consists of two garments, trousers 
and boots forming one, a parka the 
other. The clothing is decorated with 
beads or, more commonly, with fringe 
and porcupine quills, since beads are used 
in trade with the tribes on Tanana r. 
They have a cap of skin detached from 
the parka. The chief occupation of the 
men is hunting and fishing, supplemented 
by a yearly trading trip as middlemen 
between the coast tribes and those of the 
interior. In visiting the coast they travel 
in large skin-covered boats purchased 
from traders or from the coast tribes. 
The chief articles of trade are beads, 
cotton prints, and tobacco, which are 
exchanged for furs and copper. Their 
chief weapon is the bow and arrow, 
although a few old-fashioned guns are 
occasionally found. The men have both 
nose and ears pierced, the women the 
latter only. The houses are of two kinds, 
permanent, for use in winter, and tem¬ 
porary, used only as shelters during hunt¬ 
ing trips. To the permanent dwellings 
are attached subterranean bath-rooms, in 
which steam is created by pouring water 
on red-hot stones. They live in small 
villages, of one or two houses; the head¬ 
man is called a tyone , and his near rela¬ 
tives, the next in rank, are called skillies. 
There is usually a shaman in every vil¬ 
lage, and slaves of varying degrees of 
servitude are kept. Polygamy is prac¬ 
tised to a limited extent; it is said that 
the women are treated with very little 
consideration and valued in proportion 
to their ability to work (Allen, Rep. on 
Alaska, 266, 1887). According to Allen 
(ibid., 259) the Ahtena are divided into 
two branches: those on Copper r., from 
its mouth to Tazlina r., and on Chitina 
r. and its branches he calls the Midnusky; 
those above the Tazlina, Tatlatan. Pe¬ 
troff in 1880 stated that the Ahtena did 
not number more than 300. Allen in 
1885 gave the entire number of natives on 
the river and its branches as 366, of whom 
128 were men, 98 women, and 140 chil¬ 
dren, distributed as follows: On Chitina 
r. and its branches, 30; on Tazlina r. and 
lake, 20; on Copper r., between Taral 
and the Tazlina, 209; Tatlatans, 117. 
According to Hoffman (MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1882) the tribe consists of six divi¬ 
sions: Ikherkhamut, Kangikhlukhmut, 
Kulushut, Shukhtutakhlit, Vikhit, and 
he includes also the Kulchana. The 
census of 1890 makes the total number of 
Ahtena 142, consisting of 89 males and 53 
females. Their villages are: Alaganik, 
Batzulnetas, Liebestag, Miduuski, Ska- 
talis, Skolai, Slana, Titlogat, Toral. (f.h. ) 
Ah-tena.— Dali, Alaska, 429, 1870 (own name). 
Ahtna-khotana.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 164, 
1884. Artez-kutchi, —Richardson, Arct. Exped., 


HULL. 30 ] 


AHU AMHOUE-AIS 


31 


i, 397, 1851. Artez-kutshi.— Latham, Nat. Races 
Russ. Emp., 293, 1854. Artez-Kuttchin. —Petitot, 
Diet. Den6-Dind j i£, xx, 1876. Atakhtans. —Erruan 
quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 34, 1877. 
Atenas. —Harmon, Journ., 190, 1820. Athnaer. — 
Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 7,1855. Atnachtjaner.— 
Erman, Archiv, VII, 128,1849. Atnaer.— Richard¬ 
son, Arct. Exped., I, 402, 1851. Atnahs.— Pinart 
in Rev. de Philol. et d’Ethnol., no. 2, 1, 1875. 
Atnans.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 362, 
1891. Atnas.— Scouler in Journ. Geog. Soc. Lond., 
I, 218, 1841. Atnatana. —Allen, Rep., 62, 1887. 
Atnatena. —11th Census, Alaska, 67, 1893. Atnax- 
thynne.— Pinart, Sur les Atnahs, 1, 1875. Copper 
Indians.— Mahoney in Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1869, 575, 
1870. Copper River Indians. —Colver, ibid., 535. 
Intsi Dindjich.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es¬ 
claves, 165,1891 (‘men of iron’: Kutchin name). 
Ketschetnaer.— Wrangell, quoted by Baer and 
Helmersen, Beitrage, i, 98,1839 (‘ ice people ’: Rus¬ 
sian name). Kolshma. —Dali, Alaska, 429,1870 (so 
called by Russians). Madnussky.— Mahoney in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869,575,1870 (corruption of Russian 
Miednovski , from miednaia, ‘copper,’ the name 
given to the river). Maidnorskie. —Elliott, Cond. 
Aff. Alaska, 29, 1874. Mednoftsi.— Hoffman, MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (‘Copper r. people’: Russian 
name). Mednovtze. —11th Census, Alaska, 156,1893. 
Midnooskies. —Allen,Rep.,22,1887 (Russian name). 
Midnovtsi.— Ibid., 128 (Russian name). Mied- 
noffskoi. —Worman quoted by Dali in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., I, 34, 1877. Miednofskie.— Pinart in 
Rev.de Philol. et d’Ethnol., no.2,1,1875. Minoo- 
sky.— Allen, Rep., 128, 1887. Minusky.— Ibid. 
Nehannes.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 525, 
1878. Nehaunee. —Dali, Alaska, 429,1870. Nehau- 
nee Indians. —Ross, MS. map quoted by Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 34, 1877 (Yellowknife or). 
Neine Katlene.— Doroschin in Radloff, Worterbuch 
d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874 (own name). Onossky.— 
Mahony in Sen. Ex. Doc. 68, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 
19, 1870. Otno-khotana. —Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 164, 1884 (so-called by Knaiakhotana). 
Otnox tana. —Dawydow quoted by Radloff, Wor¬ 
terbuch d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874. Utunx tana.— Do¬ 
roschin, ibid. Yellowknife Indians. —Ross, MS. 
map cited by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 34, 
1877 (Nehauneeor; socalledby English). Yullit.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 165, 1884 (Ugalak- 
miut name). 

Ahuamhoue. A former Chumashan 
village near Santa Ines mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal.—TavlorinCal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Ahuanga. A Luiseno settlement, con¬ 
sisting of 2 villages, about 30 m. from 
the coast, lat. 33°, 25', in San Diego co., 
Cal.—Hayes ( ca . 1850) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, i, 460, 1882. 

Ahulka ( A-hul-qa ). A village of the 
Ntlakyapamuk, on Fraser r., British Co¬ 
lumbia, just below Siska; pop. 5 in 1897, 
the last time the name appears. 

Ahulqa.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 
1899. Halaha.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1885, 196 (prob¬ 
ably the same). 

Ahwaste. A division of the Costanoan 
family formerly living near San Francisco 
bay, Cal., and connected with Dolores 
mission. 

Aguasajuchium.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 
1861 (Aguasa and' Juchium [Uchium] com¬ 
bined). Aguasto. —Ibid. Ah-wash-tes. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 506, 1852. Ahwastes. — 
Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 79, 1854. 
Apuasto.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Habasto. —Ibid. 

Ahwehsoos (‘bear’). A gens of the Ab- 
naki. 

Ah-weK'-soos.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. 

Awasos.— J. D. Prince, inf’n, 1905 (modern St 
Francis Abnaki form). 


Aiachagiuk. A Chnagmiut village on 
the right bank of the Yukon, near the 
head of the delta. 

Aiachagiuk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 
Ayachaghayuk. —Coast Surv. map, 1898. 

Aiacheruk. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage near C. Nome, Alaska; pop. 60 in 
1880. 

Ahyoksekawik.— llth Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 
Aiacheruk.— Jackson, Reindeer in Alaska, map, 
1894. Ayacheruk.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 59, 
1880. 

Aiaktalik. A Kaniagmiut village on 
one of the Goose ids. near Kodiak, Alas¬ 
ka; pop. 101 in 1880, 106 in 1890. 

Aiakhatalik.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Aiaktalik. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
1901. Anayachtalik.— Sauer, Exped., 1802. Ayak- 
talik. —llth Census, Alaska, 163, 1893. Ayakhta- 
lik. —Petroff, op. cit., 29. 

Aiapai. Mentioned by Powers (Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., iii, 370,1877) as a division 
of the Yokuts at Soda Spring, on Tule r., 
Cal., but it is merely the name of a local¬ 
ity at which the Yaudanchi or perhaps 
other divisions once lived, (a. l. k.) 

Aicatum. A Maricopa rancheria on the 
RioGila, Ariz., in 1744..—Sedelmair(1774) 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
366, 1889.' 

Aigspaluma (Shahaptian: ‘ people of the 
chipmunks’). The Klamath, Modoc, 
Shoshoni, and Paiute living on Klamath 
res. and its vicinity in Oregon.—Gatschet 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. i, xxxiii, 
1890. 

Aigspalo. —Gatschet, ibid, (abbreviated form). 
Aikspalu. —Ibid. I-uke-spi-ule. —Huntington in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 466, 1865. 

Aika. A former Shasta village near 
Hamburg Bar, on Klamath r., Siskiyou 
co., Cal. (r. b. d.) 

Ika. —Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 18§4, 120, 1865. 

Aimgua. A former Chnagmiut village 
near the mouth of Yukon r., Alaska.— 
Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., 
xxi, map, 1850. 

Aingshi (‘bear’). A Zuni clan. 
Ain'shi-kwe.— Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368, 
1896 (kwe = ‘people ’). Ahjshi-kwe. —Ibid., 386. 
An-shi-i-que. —Stevenson in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
541, 1887. 

Ainslie Creek. A band of Ntlakyapa¬ 
muk on Fraser r., above Spuzzum, Brit. 
Col.—Can. Ind. Aff., 79, 1878. 

Aiodjus ( *ai n odjus , ‘all fat [meat]’). 
A Skittagetan town on the w. side, of the 
mouth of Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte 
ids. It was occupied by the Aokeawai 
before they moved to Alaska.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Ais. A rude tribe of unknown affinity 
formerly occupying the e. coast of Florida, 
from about Cape Canaveral s. to about 
Santa Lucia inlet, or about the present 
Brevard co. They planted nothing, but 
subsisted entirely on fish and wild fruits, 
and were more or less subject to the 
Calusa. (j. m.) 

Ais.— De Canzo Rep. (1600) in Brooks Coll. M$., 
Lib. Cong. Ais.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
12, 1884. Aisa.— Romans, Florida, i, 281,1775 (the 


32 


AISIKSTUKIKS 


AKANEKUNIK 


[B. A. E. 


lagoon). Ays.— Mexia Report (1586) in Brooks 
Coll. MS., Lib. Cong. Chaas. —Peniere (1821) as 
quoted by Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822. 
Chiaas. —Peniere, ibid., 150. Chias.— Peniere, 
ibid., 149. Is.— Barcia, Ensayo, 95, 1723. Jece. — 
Dickenson (1699), Narr., 47,1803. Ys.— Fairbanks, 
Florida, 175, 1871. 

Aisikstukiks (‘ biters ’). A band of the 
Siksika. 

Ai-sik'-stuk-iks.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. 

Aitacomanes. Mentioned with the Oto- 
comanes as a people occupying a province 
that had been visited by the Dutch 
and “where the abundance of gold and 
silver is such that all the vessels for their 
use are of silver, and in some cases of 
gold.” The locality is not given, and 
the province is probably as imaginary as 
the expedition in connection with which 
it is mentioned. See Freytas, Exped. of 
Penalosa (1662), Sheatransl., 67, 1882. 

Aivilik ( ‘having walrus’). An Eskimo 
village on Repulse bay, Franklin dish, 
Brit. Am., the principal winter settle¬ 
ment of the Aivilirmiut.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 449, 1888. 

A'-wee-lik. —McClintock, Voy. of Fox, 163, 1881. 
Ay-wee-lik. —Lyons, Priv. Journ., 161, 1825. 
Eiwili. —Klutschak, Unter d. Eskimo, map, 48,1881. 
Iwillichs. —Gilder, Schwatka’s Search, 294, 1881. 
Iwillie, —Ibid., 304. Iwillik. —Ibid., 18L 

Aivilirmiut (‘people of the walrus 
place’) . A Central Eskimo tribe on the n. 
shores of Hudson bay from Chesterfield 
inlet to Fox channel, among whom Rae so¬ 
journed in 1846-47, C. F. Hall in 1864-69, 
and Schwatka in 1877-79. They kill 
deer, muskoxen, seal, walrus, trout, and 
salmon, caching a part of the meat and 
blubber, which before winter they bring 
to one of their central settlements. Their 
chief villagesare Akugdlit, Aivilik, Iglulik, 
Maluksilak, Nuvung, Pikuliak, Ugluriak, 
Ukusiksalik; summer villages are Inugsu- 
lik, Kariak, Naujan, Pitiktaujang.—Boas 
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 445, 1888. 

Ahaknanelet. —Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnol. 
Am., hi, xi, 1876 (so called by the Chiglit of 
Liverpool bay: sig. ‘women’). A-hak-nan-helet. — 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., I, 362, 1851. Ahaknan- 
helik. —Richardson, Polar Regions, 300, 1861. 
Ahwhacknanhelett. —Franklin, Journey to Polar 
Sea, n, 42,1824. Aivillirmiut. —Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., 445, 1888. Eivillinmiut. —Boas in Trans. 
Anthrop. Soc. Wash., in, 102, 1885. Eiwillik.— 
Boas in Zeitschr. Ges. f. Erdk., 226, 1883. 

Aivino. A division of the Nevome in 
a pueblo of the same name on the w. 
tributary of the Rio Yaqui, lat. 29°, s. 
central Sonora, Mexico. The inhabi¬ 
tants spoke a dialect differing somewhat 
from the Nevome proper, and their cus¬ 
toms were similar to those of the Sisibo- 
tari. 

Aibina.— Balbi quoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
352, 1864. Aibinos,— Kino et al. (1694) in Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 399, 1856. Aivino. —Ribas, 
Hist. Trium. Sa. Fee, 370, 1645. Aybino, —Kino 
et al., op. cit. 

Aiwanat ( Aiwanat, pi. of Aiwan). The 
Chukchi name for the Yuit Eskimo re¬ 
siding at and near the vicinity of Indian 
point, n. e. Siberia, as distinguished from 
those who speak the dialect of the vil¬ 


lage of Nabukak on East cape and that 
of CherinaknearC. Ulakhpen.—Bogoras, 
Chukchee, 20, 1904. 

Aiyaho (a red-topped plant). A Zuni 
clan, by tradition originally a part of the 
Asa people who afterward became Hopi. 
Aiwahokwe.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 606, 
1900. Aiyaho-kwe.— Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. 
E., 368, 1896 (kwe = ‘people’). Aiyahokwi.— 
Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th Rep.B. A. E., 30-31, 
1891. Olla-jocue.— Cushing misquoted by Don¬ 
aldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 88, 1893 (incorrectly 
given as “Blue seed grass ” people). Petaa- 
kwe.— Ibid., 386 (former name). 

Aiyansh (‘eternal bloom.’—Dorsey). 
A mission village on the lower course 
of Nass r., British Columbia, founded in 
1871, its inhabitants being drawn from 
Niska villages. Pop. 133 in 1901. 

Aiyansh. —Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 1889. Aiyaush.— 
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897 (misprint). 

Akachumas. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Ines mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Gatschet in Chief Eng. 
Rep., pt. hi, 553, 1876. 

Akachwa (‘pine grove’). ATarahumare 
rancheria near Palanquo, Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Akaitchis. A tribe said to have resided 
on Columbia r. not far from the mouth 
of the Umatilla, in Oregon (Nouv. Ann. 
des Voy., x, 78, 1821). Their location 
would indicate a Shahaptian division, 
but they can not be identified. 

Akaitsuk. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage about Santa Intis mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal. 

A-kai't-suk.—Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Akak. An Eskimo settlement in the 
Nushagak district, Alaska, of only 9 peo¬ 
ple in 1890. 

Akakhpuk.—11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Akamnik. A tribe of the Upper K utenai 
living around Ft Steele and the mission 
of St Eugene on upper Kootenai r., Brit. 
Col. 

Aqk’amnik.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
10, 1889. Aqk'a'mnik.—Chamberlain in 8th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 6, 1892. 

Akanaquint (‘green river’). AUte divi¬ 
sion formerly living on Green r., Utah, 
belonging probably to the Yampa. 

Akanaquint.— Beckwith in Pac. R. R. Rep., II, 61, 

1855. Chaguaguanos.— Escudero, Not. Nuevo M6x., 
83, 1849. Changuaguanes. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
59, 1864 (given as Faraon Apache). Green river 
band.— Cummings in Ind. Aff. Rep., 153, 1866. 
Green river Utahs.— Beckwith in Pac. R. R. Rep., 
n, 61, 1855. Sabaguanas. —Dominguez and Esca¬ 
lante (1776) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 2a s., I, 537, 1854. 
Sabuagana Gutas.— Escalante (1776) misquoted by 
Harry in Simpson, Rep. of Explor. across Utah 
in 1859, 494, 1876. Sabuaganas.— Dominguez and 
Escalante, op. cit., 421. Saguaguana. —Escudero, 
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 231, 1834. Yutas 
sabuaganas.— Dominguez and Escalante (1776) in 
Doc. Hist. Mex., 2a s'., I, 415, 1854. Zaguaganas.— 
Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, pt. 3, 120, 

1856. Zaguaguas.—Villa Sefior, Theatro Am., n, 
413, 1748. 

Akanekunik (‘ Indians on a river ’). A 
tribe of the Upper Kutenai on Kootenai 
r. at the Tobacco plains, Brit. Col. 
Aqk’anequnik.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 10, 1889. Aqk’anequ'nik. —Chamberlain in 
8th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 6, 1892. Tobacco 


BULL. 30] 


AKASQUY-AKPALIUT 


33 


Plains Kootanie.— Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. 
Vocabs., 124 b, 1884. Tobacco Plains Kootenay.— 
Chamberlain, op. cit., table opp. 41. Yaket-ahno- 
klatak-makanay.— Tolmie and Dawson, op. cit. 
Ya'k’et aqkinuqtle'et aqkts’ma'kinik. —Chamber- 
lain, op. cit., 6 (‘Indians of the Tobacco plains,’ 
from ya'k’et tobacco, aqkinuqtle'et plain, 
aqkts'ma'kinik Indians). 

Akasquy. An extinct tribe, probably 
Caddoan, visited by La Salle in Jan., 
1687, when its people resided between 
the Palaquesson and the Penoy in the 
vicinity of Brazos r., Tex. They made 
cloth of buffalo wool and mantles deco¬ 
rated with bird feathers and the “hair 
of animals of every color.” See Cavelier 
in Shea, Early Voy., 39,1861. (a. c. f.) 

Akatlik. A Yuit village on Plover bay, 
Siberia. 

Akatlak.— Krause in Deutsche Geogr. Blatter, y, 
80, map, 1882. Akatlik.— Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Akawenchaka (Onondaga: A-ka-wZ n ch- 
hd-kd ). A small band that formerly 
lived in North Carolina, now numbering 
about 20 individuals, incorporated with 
the Tuscarora in New York. They are 
not regarded as true Tuscarora.—Hewitt, 
Onondaga MS., B. A. E., 1888. 

Kauwetsaka.— Cusick (1825) quoted byMacauley, 
N. Y., n, 178,1829 (mentioned as a settlement in 
N.C.). Kauwetseka.— Cusick, Sketches Six Na¬ 
tions, 34,1828. 

Akawiruchic (‘ place of much fungus ’). 
A Tarahumare rancheria near Palanquo, 
Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Akchadak-kochkond. A coast village 
of the Malemiut in Alaska.—Zagoskin 
in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 
1850. 

Akerninak. A settlement of East Green¬ 
land Eskimo on Sermilik fiord; pop. 12 
in 1884.—Holm, Ethnol. Skizze af Ang- 
magsalikerne, 14, 1887. 

Akgulurigiglak. An Eskimo village in 
the Nushagak district, Alaska; pop. 61 in 
1890.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. 

Akhiok. A Kaniagmiut village on Ali- 
tak bay, Kodiak id., Alaska; pop. 114 in 
1880, slightly more than 100 in 1900. 

Achiok. —Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 142,1855. 
Akhiok.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. 
Alitak.—11th Census, Alaska, 5, 1893. Kaschjuk- 
wagmjut.—Holmberg, op. cit. Kashukvagmiut.— 
Russ. Am. Co., map, 1849. Oohaiack.—Lisianski, 
Voy. (1805), quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
1901. TJhaiak.— Baker, ibid. 

Akiachak. A Kuskwogmiut village on 
Kuskokwim r., Alaska; pop. 43 in 1890, 
165 in 1900. 

Akiakchagmiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Akiatshagamut.— Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 

Akiak. A Kuskwogmiut village on 
Kuskokwim r., 30 m. above Bethel; pop. 
175 in 1880, 97 in 1890. 

Ackiagmute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, map, 1884. 
Akiagamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 104,1893. Aki- 
agamute. —Hallock in Nat. Geog. Mag., ix, 1898. 
Akiagmut. —Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Akkiagamute.— Petroff, 
op. cit., 53. Akkiagmute.— Ibid., 17. 

Akiskenukinik (‘ people of the two 
lakes’). A tribe of the Upper Kutenai 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-3 


living on the Columbia lakes, having 
their chief settlement at Windermere, 
Brit. Col. They numbered 72 in 1902. 

Akiskinookaniks.—Wilson in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., 304, 1866. AqkiskanukEnik.—Boas in 5th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 1889. Aqki'sk-Enu'- 
kinik.—Chamberlain in 8th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 6, 1892. Columbia Lakes.—Ibid., 7. 

Akiyenik ( Aqkiye'nik , ‘people of the 
leggings ’). A tribe of the Upper Kutenai 
living on L. Pend d’Oreille, Idaho.— 
Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 
1889. 

Aklut (‘ provisions ’). A Kuskwogmiut 
village on Kuskokwim r. at the mouth 
of the Eek, Alaska; pop. 162 in 1880, 106 
in 1890. 

Ahguliagamut.—11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Aklukwagamut.—Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Akooligamute.— Petroff, 
Rep. on Alaska, 17,1884; Nelson (1878) quoted by 
Baker, op. cit. 

Akmiut. A Kuskwogmiut village on 
Kuskokwim r., 10 m. above Kolmakof, 
Alaska. 

Akmute.—petroff, 10th Census, Alaska,map, 1884. 

Akol {A'kol). An organization among 
the Pima, apparently gentile, belonging 
to the Suwuki Ohimal; or Red Ants, 
phratral group.—Russell, Pima MS., 
B. A. E., 313, 1903. 

Akonapi (possibly related to the Chip¬ 
pewa a kunabdwisl , ‘ he is good at getting 
game ’; - nap - is a secondary stem refer¬ 
ring to a human person. Another form 
is o’kuwinlrti; Inlnl refers to ‘man.’— 
Wm. Jones). A people mentioned in the 
ancient Walam Olum record of the Dela¬ 
wares (Brinton, Len&pe Legends, 190, 
231, 1885), with whom they fought dur¬ 
ing their migrations. Brinton, who iden¬ 
tifies them with the Akowini of the same 
tradition, thinks it probable that they 
lived immediately n. of Ohio r. in Ohio or 
Indiana. He regards Akowini as “corre¬ 
spondent” with Sinako, and Towakon 
with Towako; the latter he identifies 
with the Ottawa, called by the Delawares 
Taway. If this identification be correct, it 
is likely that the Akonapi were the Sinago 
branch of the Ottawa, (c. t. ) 

Ahkonapi.—Walam Olum (1833) in Brinton, Len- 
ftpe Leg., 190,1885. Akhonapi.—Ibid. Akowini.— 
Ibid., 198. 

Akonye (‘people of the canyon’). An 
Apache band at San Carlos agency and 
Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881; probably coor¬ 
dinate with the Khonagani clan of the 
Navaho.—Bourke in Journ. Am. Folk- 
Lore, hi, 111, 1890. 

Nar-go'-des-giz'-zen.—White, Apache Names of 
Ind. Tribes, MS., B. A. E. 

Akorninarmiut. A village of the south¬ 
ern group of East Greenland Eskimo, be¬ 
tween lat. 63° and 64°; pop., with three 
other villages, 135.—Rink in Geog. Blat¬ 
ter, viii, 346, 1886. 

Akpaliut. A Kaviagmiut village w. of 
Golofnin bay, on Norton sd., Alaska; pos¬ 
sibly the same as Chiukak. 

Acpalliut.—W. U. Tel. map, 1867, cited by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 


34 


AKPAN 


ALACRANES 


[b. a. e. 


Akpan (‘auks’). An Ita Eskimo set¬ 
tlement on Saunders id., n. Greenland. 
The name is applied to many bird cliffs 
in e. Arctic America. 

Akbat.—Hayes, Arct. Boat Journ., 241,1854. Akpa- 
ni.—Peary, My Arct. Jour., 80, 1893. 

Aktayatsalgi. One of the 20 Creek 
clans.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
155, 1884. 

Aktese. A village of the Kyuquot on 
Village id., Kyuquot sd., w. coast of 
Vancouver id.—Can. Ind. Aff., 264, 1902. 

Akuch. The extinct Ivy clan of the 
Sia. 

A'kiich-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 

1896 (Mno=‘people’). 

Akuchiny. A former Pima village s. w. 
of Maricopa station, s. Arizona.—Rus¬ 
sell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902. Cf. 
Aquitun. 

Akudnirmiut (‘people of the interven¬ 
ing country’). An Eskimo tribe of e. 
Baffin land, on the shore of Home bay 
and northward. They migrate between 
their various stations, in winter as well 
as in summer, in search of deer, bear, 
seal, walrus, and salmon, having ceased 
to capture whales from the floe edge 
since the advent of whaling ships; 
pop. 83 in 1883 (Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., 440, 1888). Their winter set¬ 
tlements are not permanent. Their vil¬ 
lages and camping places are: Arbaktung, 
Avaudjelling, Ekalualuin, Ijelirtung, Ip- 
iutelling, Karmakdjuin, Kaudjukdjuak, 
Kivitung, Niakonaujang, Nudlung, Sir- 
miling. 

Akugdlit. A village of the Aivilirmiut 
at the s. end of the Gulf of Boothia, on 
Committee bay.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. 
E., 445, 1888. 

Akuli. An Iglulirmiut village on the 
isthmus of Melville peninsula; pop. 50. 
Ac-cool-le.—Ross, Sec. Voy., 316, 1835. Acculee.— 
Ibid., map facing p. 262. Ackoolee.—Ibid., 254. 
Akkoolee.— Parry, Sec. Voy., 449,1824. 

Akuliak. An Akuliarmiut winter vil¬ 
lage on the n. shore of Hudson str., where 
there was an American whaling station; 
pop. 200. 

Akuliaq.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Akuliarmiut (‘people of the point be¬ 
tween two large bays’). An Eskimo tribe 
settled on the n. shore of Hudson strait 
(Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 421, 1888). 
They go to Amakdjuak through White 
Bear sd. to hunt, wdiere they meet the 
Nugumiut. 

Akkolear.—Gilder, Sclnvatka’s Search, 181, 1881. 
Akudliarmiut.—Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. 
Wash., in, 96, 1885. Akuliak-Eskimos,—Boas in 
Petermanns Mitt., 68, 1885. 

Akuliukpak (‘many provisions’). A 
Nushagagmiut Eskimo settlement on Pa- 
miek lake, Alaska; pop. 83 in 1880. 
Akuliakhpuk.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 17. 1884. 

Akulivikchuk. A Nushagagmiut village 
on Nushagak r., Alaska; pop. 72 in 1880. 
Akulvikchuk.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska. 17, 1884. 

Akun (‘ distant ’). A former Aleut vil¬ 
lage on a small island of the same name 


between Unalaska and Unimak, Aleutian 
group, Alaska; pop. 55 in 1880. The 
inhabitants have deserted it for Akutan. 
Akoon.—Schwatka, Mil. Recon. in Alaska, 360, 

1885. 

Akuninak (d'Jcuni ‘bone,’ -naw e ‘towm,’ 
‘country,’ -Jc * ‘ place where’: ‘at the bone 
place’). A group of Sauk and Foxes who 
lived together in a village near where 
some huge bones, probably of a mastodon, 
lay imbedded in the ground.—Wm. .Tones, 
inf’n, 1905. 

Ah-kuh'-ne-nak.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877 
(given as the Bone gens). 

Akutan. An Aleut village on a small 
island of the same name adjacent to Un¬ 
alaska, Alaska; pop. 65 in 1880, 80 in 
1890. 

Akutanskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, II, 203, 1840. 

Akvetskoe (‘lake town’). A summer 
village of the Huna division of the Kolu- 
schan family, on Lituya bay, Alaska; 
pop. 200 in 1835.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, 
ii, pt. 3, 29, 1840. 

Ahkvaystkie.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227, 
1875 (from Veniaminoff). Akwetz. —Holmberg, 
Ethnol. Skizz., map, 1855. 

Akwech. A Wichita subtribe.—J. O. 
Dorsey, inf’n, 1892. 

Ala (‘horn’). A phratry of the Hopi, 
consisting of the .Horn, Deer, Antelope, 
Elk, and probabiy other clans. They 
claim to have come from a place in s. 
Utah called Tokonabi, and after their 
arrival in Tusayan joined the Lengya 
(Flute) phratry, forming the Ala-Lengya 
group.—Few T kes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
583, 587, 1901. 

Ala. The Horn clan of the Hopi.— 
Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 1901. 

Aaltu.—Voth, Trad, of the Hopi, 38, 1905—Ala 
wiiiwu.—Fewkes, op. cit. {winwQ,— clan). 

Alabaster. See Gypsum. 

Alachua. A former Seminole town in 
what is now Alachua co., Fla. It was 
settled by Creeks from Oconee, on Oco¬ 
nee r., Ga., about 1710. The name w as 
subsequently extended so as to cover other 
small villages in the district, which col¬ 
lectively are frequently mentioned as a 
tribe, whose principal town was Cus¬ 
co wfllla. The Alachua Indians offered 
lively resistance to the encroachments of 
the wdiite colonists in 1812-18 and took a 
prominent part in the Seminole war of 
1835-42. (a. s. g. h. w. h.) 

Alachees.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, it, 32, 1852. 
A-lack-a-way-talofa.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, 306,1822. Alacua.— Romans, Florida, I, 280, 
1775. Aulochawan Indians.—Hawkins (1812) in 
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 813, 1832. Au-lot- 
che-wau.—Hawkins (1799). Sketch, 25,1848. Each' 
aways.—Seagrove (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. 
Aff., 1,378,1832. Lackaway.—Brown (1793), ibid., 
374. Latchione. —Brinton, Florida Penin., 145, 
1859. Latchivue.—Peniere in Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, 311, 1822. Lotchnoay.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, vi, 360, 1857. Lotchway towns.—Flint, Ind. 
Wars, 173, 1833. Sotchaway.—Seagrove, op. cit., 

Alacranes (Span.: ‘ scorpions ’). A part 
of the Apache formerly living in Sonora, 
Mexico, but according to Taylor (Cal. 


BULL. 30] 


ALAOUPUSYUEN-ALAWAHKU 


35 


Farmer, June 13, 1862) roaming, with 
other bands from Texas, to the Rio Colo¬ 
rado and n. of Gila r. in Ariz. and N. 
Mex. They were apparently a part of 
the Chiricahua. 

Alacupusyuen. A former Chumashan 
village near Purisima mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Alafiers ( ala= ‘ buckeye tree ’). A Semi¬ 
nole town near Alafia r., an affluent of 
Tampa bay, Fla. Its inhabitants, few in 
number, appear to have been led by Chief 
Alligator, and the “Alligators” may 
have been the same people. They took 
part in the Seminole war of 1835-42. 
(h. w. h.) 

Alafia.—Drake, Ind. Chron., 209,1836. Alafiers.— 
Drake, Bk. of Inds., bk. 4, 77, 1848. 

Alaganik. An Ahtena and Ugalakmiut 
village near the mouth of Copper r., 
Alaska. Pop. in 1880, with Eyak, 117; 
in 1890, 48. Serebrenikof visited the vil¬ 
lage in 1848, but Allen in 1885 found it 
on what he supposed to be a new site. 
Alaganik.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, map, 
1877. Alaganuk.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 
1884. Alagnak.—Serebrenikof quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Anahanuk. —Alien, ibid. 
Lookta-ek.—11th Census, Alaska, 161,1893. 

Alaho-ateuna (‘those of the southern¬ 
most ’). A phratry embracing the Tona- 
shi (Badger) and Aiyaho (Red-topped- 
shrub) clans of the Zuni. —Cushing, inf n, 
1891. 

Alahulapas. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Ines mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Gatschet in Chief Eng. 
Rep., pt. 3, 553, 1876. 

Ala-Iengya (‘horn-flute’). A phra- 
tral group of the Hopi, consisting of the 
Ala (Horn) and Lengya (Flute) clans. 
Ala-Lenya.—Fewkesin 19tli Rep. B. A. E.,583,1901. 

Alali. A former Chumashan village on 
Santa Cruz id., off the coast of California. 
A-la'-li.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Alameda (Span.: ‘ cottonwood grove ’). 
A ruined pueblo on the e. side of the 
Rio Grande, about 10 m. above Albu¬ 
querque, Bernalillo co., N. Mex. It was 
occupied by theTigua until 1681, and was 
formerly on the bank of the river, but is 
now a mile from it, owing to changes in 
the course of the stream (Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 88,1884). It was the 
seat of a Spanish mission, with 300 inhab¬ 
itants about 1660-68, and a church ded¬ 
icated to Santa Ana which w T as doubt¬ 
less destroyed in the Pueblo revolt of 1680- 
96 (Vetancurt (1697), Teatro Mex., hi, 
311,1871). The settlement was afterward 
reestablished as a mission visita of Albu¬ 
querque. (f. w. h. ) 

Alamada. - Abert in Emory, Recon., map, 1848. 
Alameda de Mora.—Villa Senor, Theatro Am., pt. 
2,415,1748. Alemada.—Abert in Emory Recon., 
464, 1848. Alemeda. —Gallegas (1844) misquoted, 
ibid., 479. 

Alamillo. (Span.: ‘littlecottonwood’). 
A former pueblo of the Piros on the Rio 
Grandeaboutl2 m. n. of Socorro, N. Mex., 


the seat of a Franciscan mission, estab¬ 
lished early in the 17th century, which 
contained a church dedicated to Santa 
Ana. The in habitants did not participate 
in the Pueblo revolt of 1680, and most of 
them joined.the Spaniards in their flight 
to El Paso, Chihuahua. In the following 
year, however, on the return of Gov. 
Otermin, the remaining inhabitants of 
the pueblo fled, whereupon the village 
was destroyed by the Spaniards. The 
population in 1680 was 300. See Vetan¬ 
curt (1697), Teatro Mex., in, 310, repr. 
1871; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
239, 1892. (f. w. h.) 

Alamingo. A village of hostile Dela¬ 
wares (?) in 1754, probably on Susque¬ 
hanna r., Pa.; possibly the people of Al- 
lemoebi, the “king” of the Delawares, 
who lived at Shamokin about 1750 
(Drake Trag. Wild., 153,1841). 

Alamo. See San Antonio de Valero. 

Alamo Bonito (Span.: ‘beautiful cot¬ 
tonwood’). A small settlement of Mis¬ 
sion Indians on Torres res., 75 m. from 
Mission Tule River agency, s. Cal. 

Alimo Bonita.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 170, 1904. Alimo 
Bonito.—Ibid., 175, 1902. 

Alamos (Span.: ‘cottonwoods’). A 
pueblo of the Eudeve division of the 
Opata, the seat of a Spanish mission estab¬ 
lished in 1629; situated on a small tribu¬ 
tary of the Rio Sonora, in Sonora, Mex¬ 
ico. Pop. 165 in 1678, 45 in 1730 (Rivera 
quoted by Bancroft, Mex. No. States, i, 
513, 1884). 

Asuncion Alamos.—Zapata (1678) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, op. cit., 246. Los Alamos.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 344, 1864. 

Alamos. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Sobaipuri, on Rio Santa Cruz, s. 
Ariz.; visited and so named by Father 
Kino about 1697.—Bernal (1697) quoted 
by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 356, 1889. 

Alamucha. A former Choctaw town in 
Kemper co., Miss., 10 m. from Succar- 
nooche cr., an affluent of Tombigbee r. 
Allamutcha Old Town.—Gatschet, Creek Migr 
Leg., I, 109,1884. 

Alapaha. A former Seminole town in 
Hamilton co., Fla., on Allapaha r. It 
was once under Chief Okmulgee, who 
died before 1820. (h. w. ii.) 

A-la-pa-ha-tolafa.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, 306, 1822. 

Alaskaite. A mineral, according to 
Dana (Text-book Mineral., 420, 1888), so 
called from having been found in the 
Alaska mine, Poughkeepsie gulch, Colo.; 
primarily from Alaska , the name of the 
territory of the United States, and the 
English suffix -He. Alaska, according to 
Dali, is derived from Alakshak , or AId- 
yeksa, signifying ‘ mainland,’ the term by 
which the Eskimo of Unalaska id. desig¬ 
nated the continental land of n. w. Amer¬ 
ica. (a. f. c.) 

Alawahku. The Elk clan of the Pecos 
tribe of New Mexico.—Hewett in Am. 
Anthrop., vi, 431, 1904. 


36 


ALBERDOZIA-ALEUT 


[B. a. e. 


Alberdozia. A province of Florida, prob¬ 
ably Timuquanan.—Linschoten, Descr. 
de l’Am., 6, 1638. 

Albivi. Given by Vater (Mith., pt. 3, 
sec. 3, 347, 1816) as a division of the Illi¬ 
nois, but that is doubtful. The name is 
wrongfully attributed to Hervas. 

Alcalde (Span.: a mayor of a town who 
also administers justice). A Papago vil¬ 
lage, probably in Pima co., s. Ariz.; pop. 
250 in 1860.—Poston in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1863, 385, 1864. 

Alcasb. A former Chumashan village 
at La Goleta, or, as stated by a Santa 
Barbara Indian, on Moore’s ranch, near 
Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Alcax.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 
Al-ka-a/c.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Alchedoma. A former Yuman tribe 
which, according to Father Garces, spoke 
the same language as the Yuma proper, 
and hence belonged to the same closely 
related Yuman division as the Yuma, 
Maricopa, and Mohave. As early as 
1604-05 Juan de Onate found them in 8 
rancherias (the northernmost with 2,000 
people in 160 houses) below the mouth 
of the Gila on the Rio Colorado, but by 
1762 (Rudo Ensayo, 130, 1894) they occu¬ 
pied the left bank of the Colorado be¬ 
tween the Gila and Bill Williams fork, 
and by Garces’ time (1776) their ran¬ 
cherias were scattered along the Colorado 
in Arizona and California, beginning 
about 38 m. below Bill Williams fork and 
extending the same distance downstream 
(Garc6s, Diary, 423-428, 450, 1900). At 
the latter date they were said to number 
2,500, and while well disposed toward 
other surrounding tribes, regarded the 
Yuma and Mohave as enemies. Garces 
says of them: “These Jalchedun [Alche¬ 
doma] Indians are the least dressed, not 
only in such goods as they themselves 
possess, but also in such as they trade 
with the Jamajabs [Mohave], Genigue- 
ches [Serranos], Cocomaricopas [Mari¬ 
copa], Yabipais [Yavapai], and Moquis 
[Hopi], obtaining from these last mantas, 
girdles, and a coarse kind of cloth ( sayal ), 
in exchange for cotton. ’ ’ This statement 
is doubtless an error, as the Alchedoma 
raised no cotton, while the Hopi were 
the chief cultivators of this plant in the 
entire S. W. According to Kroeber the 
Alchedoma were absorbed by the Mari¬ 
copa, whom they joined before fleeing 
from the Rio Colorado before the Mohave. 
Asumpcion, Lagrimas de San Pedro, San 
Antonio, and Santa Coleta have been 
mentioned as rancherias. (f. w. h.) 

Achedomas.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., II, 185, 1759. 
Alchedomes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Dec. 6,1861. 
Alchedum.—Garces (1775-6), Diary, 488, 1900. 
Alchedumas.—Consag (1746) quoted by Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, 1 ,588,1882. Alchidomas.—Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., i, 48, 1786. Algodomes.—Heintzelman 
(1853) in H. R., Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 42, 1857 
(seems to be local name here). Algodones.— 
Blake in Pac. R. R. Rep., v, 112, 1856. Algodon- 


nes.— Derby, Colorado R., map, 1852. Chidumas.— 
Garc6s (after Escalante, 1775), Diary (1775-76), 474, 
1900. Halchedoma.—Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), 
Rel., in Land of Sunshine, 106, Jan., 1900. Hal- 
chedumas.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 156, 348, 
1889. Halchidhoma. —A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 
(Mohave name). Hudcoadamas.—Rudo Ensayo 
(1762), 24,1863 (probably the same). Hudcoadan.— 
Rudo Ensayo (1762), Guiteras transl., 130, 1894. 
Hudcoadanes.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,353,1864. 
Jakechedunes.—Hinton, Handbook to Ariz., 28, 
1878. Jalchedon.—Arricivita (1792) quoted by 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 100, 1890. 
Jalchedum.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 38, 1864, (mis¬ 
quoting Garc6s). Jalchedunes.— Garc6s (1775-76), 
Diary, 308, 1900. Talchedon.—Forbes, Hist. Cal., 
162, 1839 (misprint). Talchedums.—Domenech, 
Deserts, I, 444, 1860. Yalchedunes.—Pac. R. R. 
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 124, 1856. 

Alcoz. A former village of the Kalin- 
daruk division of the Costanoan family 
in California.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 20, 1860. 

Aleksashkina. A former Kaniagmiut 
Eskimo settlement on Wood id. in St. 
Paul harbor, Kodiak id., Alaska. 
Aleksashkina.—Tebenkof quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1901 (called a Chiniak settlement). 
Tanignag-miut. — Russ. Am. Co. map quoted by 
Baker, ibid, (called an Aleut settlement). 

Aleta. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. 

Aleytac.—Ibid. 

Aleut. A branch of the Esquimauan 
family inhabiting the Aleutian ids. and 
the n. side of Alaska pen., w. of Ugashik r. 
The origin of the term is obscure. A 
reasonable supposition is given by Engel 
(quoted by Dali in Smithson. Contrib., 
xxii, 1878) that Aliut is identical with 
the Chukchi word aliat, ‘island.’ The 
early Russian explorers of Kamchatka 
heard from the Chukchi of islanders, 
aliuit, beyond the main Asian shore, by 
which the Chukchi meant the Diomede 
islanders; but when the Russians found 
people on the Aleutian ids. they supposed 
them to be those referred to by the 
Chukchi and called them by the Chukchi 
name, and the Chukchi often adopt the 
Russian name, Aleut, for themselves, 
though asserting that it is not their own. 
According to Dali, Unung'un, ‘people,’ is 
the generic term which the Aleut apply 
to themselves, it being probably a form 
of the Eskimo Innuin, plural of Inung , 
Inuk. 

It is stated by various authorities that 
the Aleut differ markedly from the Es¬ 
kimo in character and mental ability as 
well as in many practices. According to 
Dali the Aleut possess greater intellect¬ 
ual capacity than the Eskimo, but are far 
inferior in personal independence, and 
while the Aleuts’ physiognomy differs 
somewhat from that of the typical Es¬ 
kimo, individuals are often seen who 
can not be distinguished from ordinary 
Innuit. Notwithstanding the differences, 
there is no doubt that the Aleut are 
an aberrant offshoot from the great 
Esquimauan stock, and that however 


rDLL. 30] 


ALEXANDROVSK-ALGIC 


37 


great their distinguishing traits these 
have resulted in the lapse of time from 
their insular position and peculiar en¬ 
vironment. Dali considers the evidence 
from the shell heaps conclusive as to 
the identity with the continental Es¬ 
kimo of the early inhabitants of the 
islands as regards implements and weap¬ 
ons. The testimony afforded by language 
seems to be equally conclusive, though 
perhaps less evident. The Aleut lan¬ 
guage, though differing greatly from the 
dialects of the mainland, possesses many 
words whose roots are common to the 
Eskimo tongues. The Aleut are divided, 
chiefly on dialectal grounds, into Un- 
alaskans, who inhabit the Fox ids., the 
w. part of Alaska pen., and the Shu- 
magin ids., and Atkans who inhabit the 
Andreanof, Rat, and Near ids. When 
first visited by the Russians the Aleutian 
ids. had a much larger population than 
at present. As compared with the main¬ 
land Eskimo and the Indians the Aleut 
are now unwarlike and docile, though 
they fought well when first discovered, 
but had only darts against the Russian 
firearms and were consequently soon 
overpowered, and they speedily came 
under the absolute power of the Russian 
traders, who treated them with great 
cruelty and brutality. This treatment 
had the effect of reducing them, it is said, 
to 10 per cent of their original number, 
and the survivors were held in a condition 
of slavery. Later, in 1794-1818, the Rus¬ 
sian Government interfered to regulate 
the relations between traders and natives 
with the result of somewhat ameliorat¬ 
ing their condition. In 1824 the mis¬ 
sionary Veniaminoff began his labors, and 
to hm is largely due most of the im¬ 
provement, moral and mental. Through 
his exertions and those of his colabor¬ 
ers of the Greek church all the Aleut 
were Christianized and to some extent 
educated. 

The population of the Aleutian ids., 
which before the arrival of the Russians 
was by their own tradition 25,000 (which 
estimate, judging by the great number of 
their village sites, Dali does not think 
excessive), in 1834, according to Veniami¬ 
noff, was 2,247, of whom 1,497 belonged 
to the e. or Unalaskan division and 750 
to the w. or Atkan division. Accord¬ 
ing to Father Shaiesnekov there were 
about 1,400 on the Aleutian ids. in 1848. 
After the epidemic of smallpox in that 
year some 900 were left. In 1874 Dali 
estimated the population at 2,005, includ¬ 
ing mixed bloods. According to the cen¬ 
sus of 1890 there were 968 Aleut and 734 
mixed-bloods, total 1,702; in 1900 the 
statistics of the previous decade were 
repeated. 

The following are Aleut villages: Aku- 


tan, Attu, Avatanak, Belkofski, Biorka, 
Chernofski, Eider, Iliuliuk, Kashiga, 
Korovinski, Makushin, Mashik, Mor- 
zhovoi, Nateekin, Nazan, Nikolaief, Nik¬ 
olski, Pavlof, Pogromni, Popof, St George, 
St Paul, Sannak, Unga, Vossnessenski. 
The following villages no longer exist: 
Agulok, Akun, Alitak, Artelnof, Beaver, 
Chaliuknak, Ikolga, Imagnee, Itchadak, 
Kalekhta, Kutchlok, Riechesni, Seredka, 
Sisaguk, Takamitka, Tigalda, Totchikala, 
Tulik, Ugamitzi, Uknodok, Unalga, Ve- 
selofski. The following ruined places 
have been discovered on a single island, 
Agattu, now uninhabited: Agonakagna, 
Atkulik, Atkigyin, Hachimuk, Hamnu- 
lik, Hanilik, Hapkug, Higtiguk, Hilk- 
suk, Ibin, Imik, Iptugik, Isituchi, Ka- 
kuguk, Kamuksusik, Kaslukug, Kig- 
sitatok, Kikchik, Kikun, Kimituk, Ki- 
tak,. Kuptagok, Magtok, Mukugnuk, 
Navisok, Riechesni, Siksatok, Sunik, 
Ugiatok, Ugtikun, Ugtumuk, Ukashik. 
Aleouteans.— Drake, Bk. of Inds., bk. I, 16, 1848. 
Aleuten.—Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 7, 1855. 
Aleuts.—Dali in Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., iv, 35, 
1873. Aleyut.—Coxe, Russ. Disc., 219,1787. Alla- 
yume.—Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 553,1877 
(Olamentke name). Cagatsky.—Mahoney (1869) 
in Senate Ex. Doc. 68, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 19, 
1870 (‘ easterners ’: Russianized form of Aleut 
name). Kagataya-Koung’ns.—Humboldt, New 
Spain, n, 346, 1822 (own name: ‘ men of the east’; 
refers only to the Aleut living e. of Umnak 
str. in contradistinction to the tribes w. of it.— 
Dali, inf’n, 1905). Kataghayekiki. — Coxe, Russ. 
Disc., I, 219, 1787. Khagan'-taya-khun'-khin.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 22,1877 (sig. ‘ east¬ 
ern people’). K^agantaiahountin.—Pinart in 
M6m. Soc. Ethnol. Paris, xi, 157, 1872 (name of 
natives of Shumagin ids. and of Aleut of Alaska 
pen: ‘men of the east’). Oonangan.—Veniami¬ 
noff quoted by Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 146, 
1884. Taiahounhins.—Pinart in M6m. Soc. Ethnol. 
Paris, xi, 158, 1872 (own name: ‘men’). Takha- 
yuna.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 146, 1884 
(Knaiakhotana name). Taxeju-na.—Davidof in 
Radloff, Worterb., d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874. Tax- 
emna.—Doroschin in Radloff, Worterb., d. Kinai- 
Spr., 29, 1874 (Knaiakhotana name). Tiyakh'u- 
nin.—Pinart, op. cit. Unangan.—Applegate in 
11th Census, Alaska, 85, 1893. U-nung'un.—Dali 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 22, 1877 (own national 
name). 

Alexandrovsk. A Kaniagmiut village 
and trading post on Graham harbor, 
Alaska; pop. 88 in 1880, 107 in 1890. 

Alexandrousk.—Post route map, 1903. Alexan¬ 
drovsk.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. 
English Bay.—11th Census, Alaska, 163,1893. Port 
Graham.—Ibid., 68. 

Alexeief. A Chnagmiut village in the 
Yukon delta, Alaska; pop. 16 in 1880. 

Alexeiefs Odinotchka.—Petroff, 10th Census, 
Alaska, 12,1884 (‘Alexeief’s trading post’). 

Algic. A term applied by H. R. School¬ 
craft to the Algonquian tribes and lan¬ 
guages, and used occasionally by other 
writers since his time. Algique is em¬ 
ployed by some Canadian French essay¬ 
ists. Schoolcraft himself (Ind. Tribes, v, 
536,1855) includes the term in his list of 
words of Indian origin. The word seems 
to be formed arbitrarily from Alg, a part 
of Algonkin, and the English adjectival 
termination ic. (a. f. c.) 


38 


ALGONKIAN'—ALGONQUIAN FAMILY 


[b. a. e. 


Algonkian. A geological term used to 
designate an important series of rocks 
lying between the Archean and the Pale¬ 
ozoic systems. These rocks are most 
prominent in the region of L. Superior, a 
characteristic territory of the Indians of 
the Algonquian family, whence the name. 
Geologists speak of the “Algonkian pe¬ 
riod.” (a. f. c.) 

Algonkin (a name hitherto variously 
and erroneously interpreted, but Hewitt 
suggests that it is probably from (Micmac) 
algoomeaJcing, or algoomaking, ‘ at the 
place of spearing fish and eels [from the 
bow of a canoe] ’). A term applied origi¬ 
nally to the Weskarini, a small Algon¬ 
quian tribe formerly living on the present 
Gatineau r., a tributary of Ottawa r., e. 
of the present city of Ottawa, in Quebec. 
Later the name was used to include also 
the Amikwa, Kichesipirini, Keinouche, 
Kishkakon, Maskasinik, Matawachkirini, 
Missisauga, Michacondibi, Nikikouek, 
Ononchataronon, Oskemanitigou, Ouaso- 
uarini, Outaouakamigouk, Outchougai, 
Pawating, Sagaiguninini, and Sagnitao- 
uigama. French writers sometimes 
called the Montagnais encountered along 
the lower St Lawrence the Lower Algon- 
quins, because they spoke the same lan¬ 
guage; and the ethnic stock and family of 
languages has been named from the Algon¬ 
kin, who formed a close alliance with the 
French at the first settlement of Canada 
and received their help against the 
Iroquois. The latter, however, afterward 
procured firearms and soon forced the 
Algonkin to abandon the St Lawrence 
region. Some of the bands on Ottawa r. 
fled w. to Mackinaw and into Michigan, 
where they consolidated and became 
known under the modern name of Ot¬ 
tawa. The others fled to the n. and e., 
beyond reach of the Iroquois, but gradu¬ 
ally found their way back and reoccupied 
the country. Their chief gathering place 
and mission station was at Three Rivers 
in Quebec. Nothing is known of their 
social organization. The bands now rec¬ 
ognized as Algonkin, with their population 
in 1900, are as follows. In Ottawa: Golden 
Lake, 86; North Renfrew, 286; Gib¬ 
son (Iroquois in part), 123. In Quebec: 
River Desert, 393; Temiscaming, 203; 
Lake of Two Mountains (Iroquois in 
part), 447; total, 1,536. As late as 1894 
the Canadian Indian Office included as 
Algonkin also 1,679 “stragglers” in Pon¬ 
tiac, Ottawa co., Champlain, and St Mau¬ 
rice, in Quebec, but these are omitted 
from subsequent reports. In 1884 there 
were 3,874 Algonkin in Quebec province 
and in e. Ontario, including the Temis¬ 
caming. Following are the Algonkin vil¬ 
lages, so far as they are known to have 
been recorded: Cape Magdalen, Egan, 
Hartwell, Isle aux Tourtes (Kichesipirini 


and Nipissing), Rouge River, Tangouaen 
(Algonkin and Huron), (j. m. c. t.) 
Abnaki.—For forms of this word as applied to the 
Algonkin, see Abnaki. Akwanake.—Breboeuf 
quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 207, 1854. 
Alagonkins.—Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am. 
Jour. Geol., 272, 1831. Algokin.—McKenzie 
quoted by Tanner, Narr., 332,1830. Algomeequin.— 
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, i, 306, 1851. Algome- 
quins.—Ibid., v, 38, 1855. Algommequin.— Cham¬ 
plain (1632), (Euv., V, pt. 2, 193, 1870. Algom- 
quins.—Sagard (1636), Canada, I, 247, 1866. Al- 
goncains.—Hennepin, New Disc., 95,1698. Algon- 
gins.—Tracy (1667) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 

153.1853. Algonguin.—Morse, N. Am., 238, 1776. 
Algonic Indians.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 38, 
1851. Algonkins.—Hennepin (1683) in Harris, 
Voy. and Trav., n, 916, 1705. Algonmequin.— 
Martin in Bressani, Rel. Abr6g£e, 319, 1653. Algo- 
novins.—Alcedo, Die. Geog., v, 120, 1789. Algon- 
quains.—Jes. Rel. 1653, 3, 1858. Algonquens.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 358, 1852. Algon¬ 
quin.—Jes. Rel. 1632, 14, 1858. Algoomenquini.— 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 500, 1878. Algo- 
quins.—Lewis and Clark, Trav., I, map, 1817. Al- 
goquois.—Audouard, Far West, 207, 1869. Algou- 
inquins.—Gorges (1658) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
ir, 67,1847. Algoumekins.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., II, 24, 1836. Algoumequini.—De Laet 
(1633) quoted by Vater, Mithridates, pt. 3, sec. 
3, 404, 1816. Algoumequins.—Champlain (1603), 
(Euv., ii, 8, 1870. Algumenquini.—Kingsley, 
Standard Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 147, 1883. Alincon- 
guins.—Nicolls (1666) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i-l, 

147.1853. Alkonkins.—Hutchins (1778) quoted by 
Jefferson, Notes, 141,1825. Alquequin.—Lloyd iu 
Jour. Anthrop. Inst. G. B., IV, 44, 1875. Alten- 
kins.—Clinton (1745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 
281, 1855 (misprint). Attenkins.—Clinton (1745), 
ibid., 276. 

Algonquian Family (adapted from the 
name of the Algonkin tribe). A lin¬ 
guistic stock which formerly occupied a 
more extended area than any other in 
North America. Their territory reached 
from the e. shore of Newfoundland to 
the Rocky mts. and from Churchill r. to 
Pamlico sd. The e. parts of this territory 
were separated by an area occupied by Iro- 
quoian tribes. On the e. Algonquian 
tribes skirted the Atlantic coast from 
Newfoundland to Neuse r.; on the s. they 
touched on the territories of the eastern 
Siouan, southern Iroquoian, and the 
Muskhogean families; on the w. they bor¬ 
dered on the Siouan area; on the n. iv. on 
the Kitunahan and Athapascan; in labra¬ 
dor they came into contact with the Es¬ 
kimo; in Newfoundland they surrounded 
on three sides the Beothuk. The Chey¬ 
enne and Arapaho moved from the main 
body and drifted out into the plains. 
Although there is a general agreement as 
to the peoples which should be included 
in this family, information in regard to the 
numerous dialects is too limited to justify 
an attempt to give a strict linguistic clas¬ 
sification; the data are in fact so mea¬ 
ger in many instances as to leave it 
doubtful whether certain bodies were 
confederacies, tribes, bands, or clans, es¬ 
pecially bodies which have become ex¬ 
tinct or can not be identified, since early 
writers have frequently designated set¬ 
tlements or bands of the same tribe as 
distinct tribes. As in the case of all In¬ 
dians, travelers, observing part of a tribe 


BULL. 30 ] 


ALGONQUIAN FAMILY 


39 


settled at one place and part at another, 
have frequently taken them for different 
peoples, and have dignified single vil¬ 
lages, settlements, or bands with the title 
“tribe’’ or “nation, ’’ named from the 
locality or the chief. It is generally im¬ 
possible to discriminate between tribes 
and villages throughout the greater part 
of New England and along the Atlantic 
coast, for the Indians there seem to have 
been grouped into small communities, 
each taking its name from the principal 
village of the group or from a neighboring 
stream or other natural feature. W hether 
these were subordinate to some real tribal 
authority or of equal rank and interde¬ 
pendent, although still allied, it is im¬ 
possible in many instances to deter¬ 
mine. Since true tribal organization is 
found among the better known branches 
and can be traced in several instances in 
the eastern division, it is presumed that 
it was general. A geographic classifica¬ 
tion of the Algonquian tribes follows: 

Western division, comprising three 
groups dwelling along the e. slope of the 
Rocky mts: Blackfoot confederacy, com¬ 
posed of the Siksika, Kainah, and Piegan; 
Arapaho and Cheyenne. 

Northern division, the most extensive 
one, stretching from the extreme n. w. 
of the Algonquian area to the extreme 
e., chiefly n. of the St Lawrence and the 
great lakes, including several groups 
which, on account of insufficient knowl¬ 
edge of their linguistic relations, can only 
partially be outlined: Chippewa group, 
embracing the Cree (?), Ottawa, Chip¬ 
pewa, and Missisauga; Algonkin group, 
comprising the Nipissing, Temiscaming, 
Abittibi, and Algonkin. 

Northeastern division, embracing the 
tribes inhabiting e. Quebec, the Mari¬ 
time Provinces, and e. Maine: the Mon- 
tagnais group, composed of the Nascapee, 
Montagnais, Mistassin, Bersiamite, and 
Papinachois; Abnaki group, comprising 
the Micmac, Malecite, Passamaquoddy, 
Arosaguntacook, Sokoki, Penobscot, and 
Norridgew T ock. 

Central division, including groups that 
resided in Wisconsin, Illinois, Indiana, 
Michigan, and Ohio: Menominee; the 
Sauk group, includingthe Sauk, Fox, and 
Kickapoo; Mascouten; Potawatomi; Illi¬ 
nois branch of the Miami group, com¬ 
prising the Peoria, Kaskaskia, Cahokia, 
Tamaroa,and Michigamea; Miamibranch, 
composed of the Miami, Piankashaw, and 
Wea. 

Eastern division, embracing all the 
Algonquian tribes that lived along the 
Atlantic coast s. of the Abnaki and in¬ 
cluding several confederacies and groups, 
as the Pennacook, Massachuset, Wam- 
panoag, Narraganset, Nipmuc, Montauk, 
Mohegan, Mahican, Wappinger, Dela¬ 


wares, Shawnee, Nanticoke, Conoy, Pow¬ 
hatan, and Pamlico. 

As the early settlements of the French, 
Dutch, and English were all within the 
territory of the eastern members of the 
family, they w r ere the first aborigines 
n. of the Gulf of Mexico to feel the 
blighting effect of contact with a superior 
race. As a rule the relations of the 
French with the Algonquian tribes were 
friendly, the Foxes being the only tribe 
against whom they waged war. The 
English settlements were often engaged 
in border wars with their Algonquian 
neighbors, who, continually pressed far¬ 
ther tow T ard the interior by the advancing 
white immigration, kept up for a time a 
futile struggle for the possession of their 
territory. The eastern tribes, from 
Maine to Carolina, w r ere defeated and 
their tribal organization was broken up. 
Some withdrew to Canada, others crossed 
the mountains into the Ohio valley, while 
a few bands were located on reservations 
by the whites only to dwindle and ulti¬ 
mately become extinct. Of many of the 
smaller tribes of New England, Virginia, 
and other eastern states there are no liv¬ 
ing representatives. Even the languages 
of some are known only by a few words 
mentioned by early historians, while 
some tribes are known only by name. 
The Abnaki and others who fled into 
Canada settled along the St Lawrence 
under the protection of the French, 
whose active allies they became in all the 
subsequent wars with the English down 
to the fall of the French power in Canada. 
Those who crossed the Allegheny mts. 
into the Ohio valley, together with the 
Wyandot and the native Algonquian 
tribes of that region, formed themselves 
into a loose confederacy, allied first with 
the French and afterward with the Eng¬ 
lish against the advancing settlements 
with the declared purpose of preserving 
the Ohio r. as the Indian boundary. 
Wayne’s victory in 1794 put an end to the 
struggle, and at the treaty of Greenville in 
1795 the Indians acknowledged their de¬ 
feat and made the first cession of land w. 
of the Ohio. Tecumseh and his brother, 
Ellskw r atawa, instigated by British in¬ 
triguers, again aroused the western tribes 
against the United States a few years later, 
but the disastrous defeat at Tippecanoe in 
1811 and the death of their leader broke 
the spirit of the Indians. In 1815 those 
who had taken part against the United 
States during the War of 1812 made peace 
with the Government; then began the 
series of treaties by which, within thirty 
years, most of the Indians of this region 
ceded their lands and removed w. of the 
Mississippi. 

A factor which contributed greatly to 
the decline of the Algonquian ascendency 


40 


ALGONQUIAN FAMILY 


[b. a. e. 


was the power of the Iroquoian confed¬ 
eracy, which by the beginning of the 
17th century had developed a power 
destined to make them the scourge of 
the other Indian population from the 
Atlantic to the Mississippi and from 
Ottawa r. in Canada to the Tennessee. 
After destroying the Huron and the Erie, 
they turned their power chiefly against 
the Algonquian tribes, and ere long Ohio 
and Indiana were nearly deserted, only 
a few villages of Miami remaining here 
and there in the northern portion. The 
region s. and w. they made a desert, 
clearing of native inhabitants the whole 
country within 500 m. of their seats. 
The Algonquian tribes fled before them 
to the region of the upper lakes and the 
banks of the Mississippi, and only when 
the French had guaranteed them protec¬ 
tion against their deadly foes did they 
venture to turn back toward the e. 

The central Algonquians are tall, aver¬ 
aging about 173 cm.; they have the typ¬ 
ical Indian nose, heavy and prominent, 
somewhat hooked in men, flatter in 
women; their cheek bones are heavy; 
the head among the tribes of the great 
lakes is very large and almost brachyce- 
phalic, but showing considerable varia¬ 
tion; the face is very large. The type of 
the Atlantic coast Algonquians can hardly 
be determined from living individuals, as 
no full-bloods survive, but skulls found 
in old burial grounds show that they 
were tall, their faces not quite so broad, 
the heads much more elongate and re¬ 
markably high, resembling in this respect 
the Eskimo and suggesting the possibility 
that on the New England coast there may 
have been some mixture with that type. 
The Cheyenne and Arapaho are even 
taller than the central Algonquians; their 
faces are larger, their heads more elon¬ 
gate. It is worthy of remark that in the 
region in which the mound builders’ re¬ 
man 3 are found, rounded heads pre¬ 
vail hu., and the present population of the 
region are also more round-headed, per¬ 
haps suggesting fusion of blood (Boas, 
inf’n, 1905). See Anatomy, Physiology. 

The religious beliefs of the eastern Al¬ 
gonquian tribes were similar in their lead¬ 
ing features. Their myths are numerous. 
Theirdeities, or manitus, including objects 
animate and inanimate, were many, but 
the chief culture hero, he to whom the 
creation and control of the world were 
ascribed, was substantially the same in 
character, although known by various 
names, among different tribes. As Man- 
ibozho, or Michabo, among the Chippewa 
and other lake tribes, he was usually 
identified as a fabulous great rabbit, 
bearing some relation to the sun; and 
this identification with the great rabbit 
appears to have prevailed among other 


tribes, being found as far s. as Maryland. 
Brinton (Hero Myths, 1882) believes 
this mythological animal to have been 
merely a symbol of light, adopted be¬ 
cause of the similarity between the 
Algonquian words for rabbit and light. 
Among the Siksika this chief beneficent 
deity was known as Napiw, among the 
Abnaki as Ketchiniwesk, among the 
New England tribes as Kiehtan, Woo- 
nand, Cautantowit, etc. He it was who 
created the world by magic power, peo¬ 
pled it with game and the other ani¬ 
mals, taught his favorite people the arts 
of the chase, and gave them corn and 
beans. But this deity was distinguished 
more for his magical powers and his 
ability to overcome opposition by trick¬ 
ery, deception, and falsehood than for 
benevolent qualities. The objects of 
nature were deities to them, as the sun, 
the moon, fire, trees, lakes, and the va¬ 
rious animals. Respect was also paid to 
the four cardinal points. There was a 
general belief in a soul, shade, or immor¬ 
tal spiritual nature not only in man but 
in animals and all other things, and in 
a spiritual abode to which this soul went 
after the death of the body, and in which 
the occupations and enjoyments were 
supposed to be similar to those of this 
life. Priests, or conjurers, called by the 
whites medicine-men, played an impor¬ 
tant part in their social, political, and 
religious systems. They were supposed 
to possess influence with spirits or other 
agencies, which they could bring to their 
aid in prying into the future, inflicting 
or curing disease, etc. 

Among the tribes from s. New England 
to Carolina, including especially the Mo- 
hegan, Delawares, the people of the 
Powhatan confederacy, and the Chippe¬ 
wa, descent was reckoned in the female 
line; among the Potawatomi, Abnaki, 
Blackfeet, and probably most of the 
northern tribes, in the male line. Within 
recent times descent has been paternal 
also among the Menominee, Sauk and 
Fox, Illinois, Kickapoo, and Shawnee, 
and, although it has been stated that it 
was anciently maternal, there is no satis¬ 
factory proof of this. The Cree, Arapaho, 
and Cheyenne are without clans or gentes. 
The gens or clan was usually governed by 
a chief, who in some cases was installed 
by the heads of other clans or gentes. 
The tribe also had its chief, usually se¬ 
lected from a particular clan or gens, 
though the manner of choosing a chief 
and the authority vested in him varied 
somewhat in the different tribes. This 
was the peace chief, whose authority was 
not absolute, and who had no part in 
the declaration of war or in carrying it 
on, the leader in the campaign being one 
who had acquired a right to the posi- 


BULL. 30 ] 


ALGONQUIAN FAMILY 


41 


tion by noted deeds and skill. In some 
tribes the title of chief was hereditary, 
and the distinction between a peace chief 
and a war chief was not observed. The 
chief’s powers among some tribes, as the 
Miami, were greater than in others. The 
government was directed in weighty mat¬ 
ters by a council, consisting of the chiefs 
of the clans or gentes of the tribe. It 
was by their authority that tribal war 
was undertaken, peace concluded, terri¬ 
tory sold, etc. 

The Algonquian tribes were mainly 
sedentary and agricultural, probably the 
only exceptions being those of the cold 
regions of Canada and the Siksika of the 
plains. The Chippewa did not formerly 
cultivate the soil. Maize was the staple 
Indian food product, but the tribes of 
the region of the great lakes, particularly 
the Menominee, made extensive use of 
wild rice. The Powhatan tribes raised 
enough maize to supply not only their 
own wants but those of the Virginia 
colonists for some years after the found¬ 
ing of Jamestown, and the New England 
colonists were more than once relieved 
from hunger by corn raised by the na¬ 
tives. In 1792 Wayne’s army found a 
continuous plantation along the entire 
length of the Maumee from Ft Wayne 
to L. Erie. Although depending chiefly 
on hunting and fishing for subsistence, 
the New England tribes cultivated large 
quantities of maize, beans, pumpkins, 
and tobacco. It is said they under¬ 
stood the advantage of fertilizing, using 
fish, shells, and ashes for this purpose. 
The tools they used in preparing the 
ground and in cultivation were usually 
wooden spades or hoes, the latter being 
made by fastening to a stick, as a handle, 
a shell, the shoulder blade of an animal, or 
a tortoise shell. It was from the Algon¬ 
quian tribes that the whites first learned 
to make hominy, succotash, samp, maple 
sugar, johnnycake, etc. Gookin, in 1674, 
thus describes the method of preparing 
food among the Indians of Massachusetts: 
“Their food is generally boiled maize, 
or Indian corn, mixed with kidney beans, 
or sometimes without. Also, they fre¬ 
quently boil in this pottage fish and flesh 
of all sorts, either new taken or dried, 
as shad, eels, alewives, or a kind of her¬ 
ring, or any other sort of fish. But they 
dry mostly those sorts before mentioned. 
These they cut in pieces, bones and all, 
and boil them in the aforesaid pottage. 
I have wondered many times that they 
were not in danger of being choked with 
fish bones; but they are so dexterous in 
separating the bones from the fish in 
their eating thereof that they are in no 
hazard. Also, they boil in this frumenty 
all sorts of flesh they take in hunting, 
as venison, beaver, bear’s flesh, moose, 


otters, raccoons, etc., cutting this flesh 
in small pieces and boiling it as afore¬ 
said. Also, they mix with the said pot¬ 
tage several sorts of roots, as Jerusalem 
artichokes, and groundnuts, and other 
roots, and pompions, and squashes, and 
also several sorts of nuts or masts, as oak 
acorns, chestnuts, and walnuts; these 
husked and dried and powdered, they 
thicken their pottage therewith. Also, 
sometimes, they beat their maize into 
meal and sift it through a basket made for 
that purpose. With this meal they make 
bread, baking it in the ashes, covering the 
dough with leaves. Sometimes they make 
of their meal a small sort of cakes and boil 
them. They make also a certain sort of 
meal of parched maize. This meal they 
call ‘nckahe.’” Their pots were made 
of clay, somewhat egg-shaped; their 
dishes, spoons, and ladles of wood; their 
water pails of birch bark, doubled up 
so as to make them four-cornered, with 
a handle. They also had baskets of va¬ 
rious sizes in which they placed their 
provisions; these were made of rushes, 
stalks, corn husks, grass, and bark, often 
ornamented with colored figures of ani¬ 
mals. Mats woven of bark and rushes, 
dressed deerskins, feather garments, and 
utensils of wood, stone, and horn are 
mentioned by explorers. Fish were taken 
with hooks, spears, and nets, in canoes 
and along the shore, on the sea and in 
the ponds and rivers. They captured 
without much trouble all the smaller 
kinds of fish, and, in their canoes, often 
dragged sturgeon with nets stoutly made 
of Canada hemp (De Forest, Hist. Inds. 
Conn., 1853). Canoes used for fishing 
were of two kinds—one of birch bark, 
very light, but liable to overset; the other 
made from the trunk of a large tree. 
Their clothing was composed chiefly of 
the skins of animals, tanned until soft 
and pliable, and was sometimes orna¬ 
mented with paint and beads made from 
shells. Occasionally they decked them¬ 
selves with mantles made of feathers 
overlapping each other as on the back of 
the fowl. The dress of the women con¬ 
sisted usually of two articles, a leather 
shirt, or undergarment, ornamented with 
fringe, and a skirt of the same material 
fastened round the waist with a belt and 
reaching nearly to the feet. The legs 
were protected, especially in the winter, 
with leggings, and the feet with mocca¬ 
sins of soft dressed leather, often embroid¬ 
ered with wampum. The men usually 
covered the lower part of the body with 
a breech-cloth, and often wore a skin 
mantle thrown over one shoulder. The 
women dressed their hair in a thick 
heavy plait which fell down the neck, 
and sometimes ornamented their heads 
with bands decorated with wampum 


42 


ALGONQUIAN FAMILY 


[B. a. e. 


or with a small cap. Higginson (New 
England’s Plantation, 1629) says: “Their 
hair is usually cut before, leaving one 
lock longer than the rest.” The men 
went bareheaded, with their hair fan¬ 
tastically trimmed, each according to 
his own fancy. One would shave it 
on one side and leave it long on the 
other; another left an unshaved strip, 
2 or 3 in. wide, running from the fore¬ 
head to the nape of the neck. 

The typical Algonquian lodge of the 
woods and lakes was oval, and the conical 
lodge, made of sheets of birch-bark, also 
occurred. The Mohegan, and to some ex¬ 
tent, the Virginia Indians, constructed long 
communal houses which accommodated a 
number of families. The dwellings in the 
N. were sometimes built of logs, while those 
in the S. and parts of the W. were con¬ 
structed of saplings fixed in the ground, 
bent over at the top, and covered with 
movable matting, thus forming a long, 
round-roofed house. The Delawares and 
some other eastern tribes, preferring to 
live separately, built smaller dwellings. 
The manner of construction among the 
Delawares is thus described by Zeisber- 
ger: “They peel trees, abounding with 
sap, such as lime trees, etc., then cutting 
the bark into pieces of 2 or 3 yards in 
length, they lay heavy stones upon 
them, that they may become flat and 
even in drying. The frame of the hut is 
made by driving poles into the ground 
and strengthening them by cross beams. 
This framework is covered, both within 
and without, with the above-mentioned 
pieces of bark, fastened very tight with 
bast or twigs of hickory, which are re¬ 
markably tough. The roof runs up to a 
ridge, and is covered in the same manner. 
These huts have one opening in the roof 
to let out the smoke and one in the side 
for an entrance. The door is made of a 
large piece of bark without either bolt or 
lock, a stick leaning against the outside 
being a sign that nobody is at home. 
The light enters by small openings fur¬ 
nished with sliding shutters.” The cov¬ 
ering was sometimes rushes or long reed 
grass. The houses of the Illinois are de¬ 
scribed by Hennepin as being “made 
like long arbors” and covered with 
double mats of flat flags. Those of the 
Chippewa and the Plains tribes were cir¬ 
cular or conical, a framework covered with 
bark among the former, a frame of mov¬ 
able poles covered with dressed skins 
among the latter. The villages, especially 
along the Atlantic coast, were frequently 
surrounded with stockades of tall, stout 
stakes firmly set in the ground. A num¬ 
ber of the western Algonquian towns are 
described by early explorers as fortified 
or as surrounded with palisades. 

In no other tribes n. of Mexico was 
picture writing developed to the advanced 


stage that it reached among the Delawares 
and the Chippewa. The figures were 
scratched or painted on pieces of bark or on 
slabs of wood. Some of the tribes, especi¬ 
ally the Ottawa, were great traders, acting 
as chief middlemen between the more dis¬ 
tant Indians and the early French settle¬ 
ments. Some of the interior tribes of 
Illinois and Wisconsin made but little use 
of thecanoe,travelingalmostalways afoot; 
while others who lived along the upper 
lakes and the Atlantic coast were expert 
canoemen. The canoes of the upper lakes 
were of birch-bark, strengthened on the 
inside with ribs or knees. The more 
solid and substantial boat of Virginia and 
the western rivers was the dugout, made 
from the trunk of a large tree. The man¬ 
ufacture of pottery, though the product 
was small, except in one or two tribes, 
w r as widespread. Judged by the number 
of vessels found in the graves of the re¬ 
gions occupied by the Shawnee, this tribe 
carried on the manufacture to a greater 
extent than any other. The usual method 
of burial w r as in graves, each clan or gens 
having its own cemetery. The mortuary 
ceremonies among the eastern and central 
tribes w r ere substantially as described by 
Zeisberger. Immediately after death the 
corpse w r as arrayed in the deceased’s best 
clothing and decked with the chief orna¬ 
ments worn in life, sometimes having the 
face and shirt painted red, then laid on 
a mat or skin in the middle of the hut, 
and the arms and personal effects were 
placed about it. After sunset, and also 
before daybreak, the female relations and 
friends assembled around the body to 
mourn over it. The grave was dug gen¬ 
erally by old women; inside it was 
lined with bark, and when the corpse was 
placed in it. 4 sticks were laid across, 
and a covering of bark was placed over 
these; then the grave was filled with earth. 
An earlier custom was to place in the 
grave the personal effects or those indic¬ 
ative of the character and occupation of 
the deceased, as w r ell as food, cooking uten¬ 
sils, etc. Usually the body was placed 
horizontally, though among some of the 
western tribes, as the Foxes, it was some¬ 
times buried in a sitting posture. It was 
the custom of probably most of the tribes 
to light fires on the grave for four nights 
after burial. The Illinois, Chippewa, and 
some of the extreme western tribes fre¬ 
quently practised tree or scaffold burial. 
The bodies of the chiefs of the Powhatan 
confederacy were stripped of the flesh 
and the skeletons w r ere placed on scaf¬ 
folds in a charnel house. The Ottawa 
usually placed the body for a short time 
on a scaffold near the grave previous to 
burial. The Shawnee, and possibly one 
or more of the southern Illinois tribes, 
were accustomed to bury their dead in 
box-shaped sepulchers made of undressed 


bull. 301 ALGONQUINS OF PORTAGE DE PRAIRIE-ALIBAMU. 


43 


stone slabs. The Nanticoke, and some of 
the western tribes, after temporary burial 
in the ground or exposure on scaffolds, 
removed the flesh and reinterred the 
skeletons. 

The eastern Algonquian tribes probably 
equaled the Iroquois in bravery, intelli¬ 
gence, and physical powers, but lacked 
their constancy, solidity of character, 
and capability of organization, and do 
not appear to have appreciated the power 
and influence they might have wielded 
by combination. The alliances between 
tribes were generally temporary and 
without real cohesion. There seems, in¬ 
deed, to have been some element in their 
character which rendered them incapa¬ 
ble of combining in large bodies, even 
against a common enemy. Some of their 
great chieftains, as Philip, Pontiac, and 
Tecumseh, attempted at different periods 
to unite the kindred tribes in an effort 
to resist the advance of the white race; 
but each in turn found that a single great 
defeat disheartened his followers and 
rendered all his efforts fruitless, and the 
former two fell by the hands of deserters 
from their own ranks. The Virginia 
tribes, under the able guidance of Pow¬ 
hatan and Opechancanough, formed an 
exception to the general rule. They 
presented a united front to the whites, 
and resisted for years every step of their 
advance until the Indians were practically 
exterminated. From the close of the 
Revolution to the treaty of Greenville 
(1795) the tribes of the Ohio valley also 
made a desperate stand against the Amer¬ 
icans, but in this they had the encour¬ 
agement, if not the more active support, 
of the British in Canada as well as of other 
Indians. In individual character many 
of the Algonquian chiefs rank high, and 
Tecumseh stands out prominently as one 
of the noblest figures in Indian history. 

The present number of the Algonquian 
family is about 90,000, of whom about 
40,000 are in the United States and 50,000 
in Canada. The largest tribes are the 
Chippewa and theCree. (j. m. c. t. ) 

>Algonkin-Lenape.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., II, 23. 305, 1836. Berghaus (1845), 
Phvsik. Atlas, map 17,1848. Ibid., 1852. >Aleon- 
quin.-Bancroft, Hist. U. S., nr, 237, 1840. Prich¬ 
ard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 381, 1847 (follows 
Gallatinl. >Algonkins.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Ethnol. Soc., ii. pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. _ Gallatin in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853. >Algon- 
kin.—Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3, 55, 
1856. Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 232, 
1862 (treats only of Crees, Blackfeet, Shyennes). 
Hale in Am. Antiq., 112, April, 1883 (treated with 
reference to migration). <Algonkin.—Latham 
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 1856 (adds to Galla¬ 
tin’s list of 1836 the Bethuck, Shyenne. Blackfoot, 
and Arrapaho). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860 (as 
in preceding). Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 
447, 1862. <Algonquin.—Keane in Stanford, 
Compend., Cent, and S. Am., 460, 465,1878 (list in¬ 
cludes the Maquas, an Iroquois tribe). >Saskat- 
schwainer.—Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17,1848 
(probably designates the Arapaho). >Arapa- 
hoes. —Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. 


x Algonkin und Beothuk,—Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, 
map 72,1887. 

Algonquins of Portage de Prairie. A 
Chippewa band formerly living near L. 
of the Woods and e. of it in Manitoba. 
They removed before 1804 to the Red r. 
country through persuasions of the trad¬ 
ers.—Lewis and Clark, Disc., 55, 1806. 

Alibamu (said to be from the Choctaw 
alba ayamule, ‘I open or clear the thick¬ 
et’). A Muskhogean tribe of the Creek 
confederacy that formerly dwelt in s. Ala¬ 
bama. It is clear that the Alibamu and 
Koasati were closely related, the language 
of the two being practically identical. 
When first found by the whites the 
home of the tribe was on Alabama r. a 
short distance below the junction of the 
Coosa and Tallapoosa. Their early his¬ 
tory, owing to confusion in the use of the 
name, is uncertain, but according to tra¬ 
dition they had migrated from a westerly 
locality. In the Creek legend, as given 
by Gatschet, they are mentioned, under 
the name Atilamas, as one of 4 tribes con¬ 
tending for the honor of being considered 
the most ancient and valorous. The 
chroniclers of De Soto’s expedition in 
1541 locate the “province” or “town” 
of Alibamo a short distance n. w. of the 
Chicasa, in n. w. or central Mississippi. 
According to the Gentleman of Elvas they 
found a strongly fortified town, named 
Ullibahali, on Alabama or lower Coosa r. 
Coxe (French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 235, 
1850) says that below the Coza, or Coussa, 
on the same river, are the Ullibalies, 
or Olibahalies, according to the French 
the Allibamons. The identification with 
the Ullibahali would be complete if this 
statement could be accepted, but Gatschet 
is inclined to doubt its correctness. The 
history of the tribe recommences with the 
appearance of the French in Mobile bay in 
1701-02. Bienville found “on the banks 
and many adjacent islands, places aban¬ 
doned by the savages on account of war 
with the Conchaques [Conshac] and Ali- 
bamons” (Hamilton, Colon. Mobile, 41, 
1897). The French soon became involved 
in war with the tribe, who, joining the 
Cherokee, Abihka, and Catawba in 1708, 
descended Alabama r. to attack Ft Louis 
and the Mobile Indians in that vicinity, 
but retired after burning some villages. 
In 1713 the French established Ft Tou¬ 
louse in their country to hold them in 
check and to protect French traders. 
The site of the fort was occupied in 1812 by 
Ft Jackson. After the cession in 1763 by 
France to Great Britain the fort was 
abandoned, and at that time a part of the 
tribe removed to the banks of the Mis¬ 
sissippi and established a village 60 m. 
above New Orleans. This band num¬ 
bered about 120, including 30 warriors. 
Subsequently the tribe removed to w. 
Louisiana, and in 1890 some were still 


44 


ALTBAMU-ALLAKAWEAH 


[b. a. e. 


living in Calcasieu parish, others in the 
Creek Nation in Indian T., and a party 
of about 200 in Polk co., Tex. 

Little has been recorded in regard to 
the character and customs of the Ali¬ 
bamu, but that they were warlike in dis¬ 
position is evident from their early his¬ 
tory. One singular custom mentioned 
by Penicaut seems to apply to the Ali- 
bamu as well as to the Mobile Indians. 
They caused their children, both boys 
and girls, to pass in array at a certain 
festival and receive a flogging of such 
severity as to draw blood, after which 
they were lectured by one or more of the 
elders. Hawkins states: “They did not 
conform to the customs of the Creeks, 
and the Creek law for the punishment of 
adultery was not known among them. 
They cultivated the soil to some extent 
and had some hogs, horses, and cattle. 
Though hospitable, it was their custom 
when a white person visited them, as 
soon as he had eaten, what was left was 
thrown away and everything which had 
been used [by the white person] was 
washed. ’ ’ The 4 Alibamu towns situated 
on Alabama r. are given by Hawkins 
(Sketch of Creek country, 1799) as Kan- 
chati, Tawosa, Pawokti, and Atagi. 
Others give Nitahauritz as one of the 
four. (a. s. g. c. t. ) 

Aibamos. —Barcia, Ensayo, 313, 1723. Ala. —H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 310, 1836 (probably an 
abbreviation.) Alabama. —Bartram, Travels, 463, 
1791. Ala Bamer.— Weatherford (1793) in Am. 
State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 385,1832. Albamas. —N. C. 
Col. Records (1721), II, 422, 1886. Alebamah.— 
Charlevoix, New France,vi, 25,1872. Alebamons.— 
Bondinot, Star in West, 125, 1816. Alibam.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. 
Alibamas. —Nuttal 1, Journal, 287,1821. Alibamies. — 
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., 
152, 1814. Alibamo. —French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 
104, 1850. Alibamons. —Dumont, La., I, 134, 1753. 
Alibamous.— Smyth, Tour in U. S., I, 348, 1784. 
Alibamus. —Brackenridge, Views of La., 82,1814. 
Alibanio. —Smith, Coll. Docs. Hist. Florida, i, 56, 

1857. Alibanons. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 156, 

1858. Alimamu. —Gentleman of Elvas (1539) in 
Hakluyt Soc. Pubs., ix, 87, 1851. Allibama. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Allibamis.— Sibley, 
Hist. Sketches, 81,1806. Allibamons. —Bossu (1758), 
Travels La., I, 219,1771. Allibamous. —Coxe, Caro- 
lana, 24, 1741. Atilamas. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., ii, 13, 1888 (Creek name). Aybamos. — 
Barcia, Ensayo, 333,1723. Ewemalas. —Coxe, Caro- 
lana, 25, 1741. Habbamalas. —Spotswood (1720) in 
N. C. Col. Records, ii, 383, 1886. Halbama.— Vau- 
gonay, map of America, Nancy, 1778. Holbamas. — 
Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car., 97, 1874. Limanu. — 
Ranjel (1541) in Bourne, Narr. De Soto, ii, 136, 
1904. Ma'-mo a n -ya-di. —Dorsey, Biloxi MS. Diet., 
B. A. E., 1892 (Biloxi name). Ma'-mo ha»-ya. 
Ibid, (anotherBiloxi name). Ma'-mo ha-ya n -di'. — 
Ibid, (another Biloxi name). Oke-choy-atte. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 266,1851. Olibahalies. — 
Coxe, Carolana, 24,1741. (See Ullibahali.) 

Alibamu. A town of the Creek Nation, 
on the n. fork of Canadian r., Ind. T.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 1888. 

Alican. A former Chumashan village 
at Canada Maria Ignacio, near Santa 
Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 24, 1863. 


Alimacani. A Timuquanan village on 
the Florida coast, n. of St Johns r., in 1565. 
Alimacani.—Fontaneda in Ternaux-Compans, 
Voy., xx, 24, 1863. Alimacany.—French, Hist. 
Coll. La., 2d s., 264,1875. Allicamany.—Bassanier, 
Histoire Notable, 57,1586. Allimacany.—Laudon- 
ni6re in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 257, 1869. 
Halianacani.—Gourgues quoted in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., 2d s., 275, 1875. Halmacanir.—Laudon- 
niere, ibid., n. s., 349, 1869. 

Alimibegouek^ (probably cognate with 
the Chippewa Unlmlbigog , ‘they that live 
by the river’.—Wm. Jones). Mentioned 
as one of the four divisions of the 
Cree, living on L. Alimibeg (Nipigon?), 
which discharges into L. Superior, Onta¬ 
rio. Creuxius places them immediately 
n. of the lake, near the s. end of Hudson 
bay. What part of the Cree of modern 
times these include is not determinable. 
(j. m. c. t. ) 

Alimibegoueci.—Creuxius, map New France, 1664. 
Kilistinons Alimibegouek.—Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858. 

Alipconk (‘place of elms’). A village 
of the Wecquaesgeeks on the site of Tar- 
rytown, Westchester co., N. Y. It was 
burned by the Hutch in 1644. 

Alipconck.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 78, 
1872 (‘place of elms’). Alipkonck,—Von der 
Donck (1656) quoted, ibid., 72. 

Alipoti. Apparently a pueblo of the 
Queres in New Mexico in 1598.—Ohate 
(1598) in Hoc. Ined., xvi, 114, 1871. 

Alizway. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Ines mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Alkali Lake. A Shuswap village or 
band near Fraser r. and opposite the mouth 
of Chilcotin r., Brit. Col.; pop. 158 in 1902. 

Alkakalilkes.—Brit. Col. Map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 
1872 (probably identical). Alkali Lake.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 269, 1902. 

Alkehatchee. A former Upper Creek 
town on Tallapoosa r., Ala. 
Alkehatchee.—Brahm (18th cent.) quoted by Gat¬ 
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 214, 1888. Elkatcha.— 
Robin, Voy., ii, map, 1888. 

Alki. The motto on the official seal of 
the State of Washington, taken from alki 
in the Chinook jargon, which signifies ‘ by- 
and-by’,‘in the future’, ‘soon’. Theword 
came into the jargon from the Chinook 
proper, a dialect of the Chinookan stock, 
in which it has a like meaning, (a. f. c. ) 

Alkunwea ( A'WunweE , ‘lower cor¬ 
ner’). A subdivision of the Laalaksen- 
taio, a Kwakiutl gens.—Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1895, 332, 1897. 

Allagasomeda. A Chimmesyan village 
on upper Skeena r., British Columbia.— 
Hownie in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi, 
253, 1861. 

Allakaweah {Al-la-kd'-we-dh, ‘Paunch 
Indians ’). The name applied by a tribe 
which Lewis and Clark (Trav.,25, Lond., 
1807) located on Yellowstone and Big¬ 
horn rs., Mont., with 800 warriors and 
2,300 souls. This is exactly the country 
occupied at the same time by the Crows, 
and although these latter are mentioned 


BULL. 30] 


ALLAPATA-ALTAMAHA 


45 


as distinct, it is probable that they were 
meant, or perhaps a Crow band, more par¬ 
ticularly as the Crows are known to their 
cousins, the Hidatsa, q. v.,as the “people 
who refused the paunch.” The name 
seems not to have reference to the Gros- 
ventres, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Al-la-ka-we-ah.— Lewis (1805) quoted by Coues, 
Lewis and Clark Exped., I, 199, 1893. ' Gens de 
Panse.— Ibid, (given as their French name). 
Panneh.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. x, 1848 (misprint 
for Paunch). Paunch (Indians). —Lewis quoted 
by Coues, op. cit., I, 199, 1893. Ponch Indians. — 
Prescott quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 
251, 1853. 

Allapata. An unidentified town for¬ 
merly on Hillsboro r., e. Fla.—Brion de 
la Tour, War map, 1782. 

Allaquippa . A Delaware woman sachem 
of this name lived in 1755 near the 
mouth of Youghiogheny r., Allegheny 
co., Pa., and there may have been there 
a small Delaware settlement known by 
her name. (j. m. ) 

Allaquippas,— La Tour, map, 1779. Alleguipes.— 
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Allequippe. — 
Lattr£, U. S. map, 1784. 

Alle. A pueblo of New Mexico in 1598, 
doubtless situated in the Salinas in the 
vicinity of Abo, and evidently occupied 
by the Tigua or the Piros.—Onate (1598) 
in Doc. Inf?d., xvi, 114, 1871. 

Alleghany Indians. A geographical 
group, comprising Delawares and Shaw¬ 
nee, residing on Alleghany r. in the 
18th century.—Rupp (1756), Northamp¬ 
ton, etc., 106, 1845. 

Allegany Indians.— Post (1758), Journ., 147, repr. 
1867. Allegheny.— Lotter, map, about 1770. Alli- 
gany. —Homann Heirs, map, 1756. Attegheny. — 
Esna-uts and Rapilly, map, 1777 (misprint). 

Allh. A body of Salish e. of Che- 
manis lake, Vancouver id.—Brit. Col. 
map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. 

Alligator. A former Seminole town in 
Suwannee co., Fla. 

Alligator Hole.— Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799. Al¬ 
ligator Indians. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 360, 
1857. 

Alloc. A Chumashan village w. of 
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven¬ 
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542 (Cabri- 
llo, Narr., 1542, in Smith, Coll. Doc., 
181, 1857). Placed by Taylor on the 
rancho Orteaga, near the beach. 

Alloouloanshaw. A town on the head¬ 
waters of Pearl r., Neosho co., Miss., 
occupied by the Oklafalaya Choctaw.— 
West Fla. map, ca. 1772. 

Allu. The Antelope clan of the Pecos 
tribe of New Mexico.—Hewett in Am. 
Anthrop., vi, 431, 1904. 

Almotu. A Paloos village on the N. 
bank of Snake r., about 30 m. above the 
mouth of Palouse r., Wash.—Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 735, 1896. 

Alouko. A former Seminole town on 
the e. side of St Marks r., 20 m. n. 
of St Marks, Wakulla co., Fla.—H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 27, 1826. 


Alpincha. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near the center of the present town 
of Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Al-pin-tca.— Henshaw, Santa Barbara MS. vocab., 
B. A. E , 1884. 

Alpowna. A former Nez Perce village 
at the mouth of a creek that flows into 
Snake r. from the n., below Lewiston, 
Idaho. At this point the people mixed 
with the Paloos, hence more than one 
language was spoken in the village. 
(a. c. f.) 

Alpawa. —Gatschet, Nez Perc6 MS., B. A. E., 1878 
(given as the village name, but really the name 
of the creek). Elpawawe.— Ibid. 

Alsea (corruption of Aid', the aborigi¬ 
nal name). A Yakonan tribe formerly 
occupying a small territory at and about 
the mouth of Alsea r., w. Oreg. Little is 
known of the early history of the tribe, 
of which there are now only a dozen sur¬ 
vivors on the Siletz res., Oreg. Ac¬ 
cording to Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229,1890) the following are the former 
Alsea villages: Kutauwa, Kyamaisu, 
Tachuwit, Kaukhwan, Yukhais, Kakh- 
tshanwaish, Shiuwauk, Khlokh waiyutslu, 
Mekumtk, n. of Alsea r. ; Yahach, Chi- 
ink, Kauhuk, Kwulisit, Kwamk, Skha- 
khwaiyutslu, Khlimkwaish, Kalbusht, 
Panit, Thlekushauk, and Thlekuhweyuk, 
on the s. side of the river. Milhau (in 
letter to Gibbs) gave Neahumtuk as an 
Alsea village at the mouth of Alsea r., 
which has not been identified. See Far- 
rand in Am. Anthrop., iii, 240, 1901. 
(l. F.) 

Alcea. —Sikes in Ind. Aff. Rep., 215,1860. Aleya. — 
Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
255,1841. Alsea.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 229,1890. Alseya.— Duflot de Mofras, Explor., 
n, 104, 1844. Al-si'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 229, 1890 (own name). Alsiias. —Duflot 
de Mofras, Explor., ii, 335,1844. Alsi'-me pinne. — 
Dorsey, MS. Naltunne tflnne vocab., B. A. E., 1884 
(Naltunne name). Alsiya. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 253, 
1877. Ku-nis' *unne. —Dorsey, MS. Chasta Costa 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chastacosta name). Pa- 
ifan amim. —Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 105 
(Lakmiutname). Sini'-te-ll tunne. —Dorsey, MS. 
Naltffnnetffnne vocab., B. A^E., 1884 (‘ flatheads’: 
Naltunne name). Tcha ya*o amin.— Gatschet, 
op. cit. (Lakmiutname). Tehayesatlu. —Gatschet, 
MS. Nestucca vocab., B. A. E. (Nestucca name). 
Ulseah. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 118,1814. 

Altahmo. A division of the Costanoan 
family formerly living on San Francisco 
bay, Cal., and connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco. 

Al-tah-mos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, n, 506, 1852. 
Altajumi.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Altajumo.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 452, 1874. 
Altatmos. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
82, 1856. 

Altamaha. A ‘ ‘ province ’ ’ in e. Georgia 
in 1540, mentioned in the narratives of 
De Soto’s expedition. The name is pre¬ 
served in Altamaha r. The word seems 
to be of Timucua origin, the last part, 
-paha, signifying ‘ town,’ ‘ home. ’ (J. m. ) 

Alatamahas, —Baudry des LoziOres, Voy. La., 241, 
1802. Altamaca. —Gentleman of Elvas in Hakluyt 
Soc. Pubs.,IX, 49,1851. Altamaha. —La Harpe(1707) 
in French,Hist. Coll. La., iii, 36,1851. Altapaha.— 


46 


ALTAR 


[B. a. e. 


Biedma (1540) in Smith, Coll. Doc. Fla., 50,1857. 
Attapaha.—Biedma (1544) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., ii, 100,1850. Ilatamaa.—De l’lsle, map (1707) 
in Winsor, Hist. America, II, 294, 1886. 

Altar. Using the term in its broadest 
sense, an altar, on which sacrifices were 
made or offerings laid or around which 
some other act of worship was performed, 
was a feature of the performance of every 
ceremony of the American Indians. Some 
of these altars are so simple that their 
nature is not easily apprehended: an ex¬ 
cavation in the earth, a pile of rocks, a 



SIA ALTAR. (M. C. STEVENSON) 

fire, a buffalo skull serving the purpose. 
Others, presenting a complex assemblage 
of parts, are definitely recognizable as 
altars and in some cases resemble in form 
the altars of civilized people, for exam¬ 
ple, those of the Hopi and the Sia. The 
altar, on account of its universal distribu¬ 
tion, thus renders important aid to the 
comparative study of religions. The ef¬ 
fect of the altar is to localize the worship 
and to furnish a place where the wor¬ 
shiper can convey to the deity his offer¬ 
ing and prayers. Altar-shrines are often 
placed by springs, rivers, caves, rocks, 
or trees on mountains and near spots 
which certain deities are supposed to 
inhabit, in the belief that the roads of 
these deities extend from these localities. 
In pursuance of a like idea the Haida de¬ 
posit certain offerings in the sea, and 
many tribes throw offerings into springs, 
lakes, and rivers. Some of the tempo¬ 
rary altars of the eastern and southern 
Indians, so far as may be learned from 
the illustrations of early writers, consisted 
of an oval or circular palisade of carved 
stakes surrounding an area in the center 
of which was a fire or a mat on which 
were laid various symbolic cult apparatus. 
Lafitau (Moeurs des Sauvages, n, 327,1724) 
regards as a fire altar the pipe in the calu¬ 
met ceremony of the Illinois described by 
Marquette. Such altars are more primi¬ 
tive than the temporary altars erected for 
the celebration of a ritual or a portion 
of a ritual, and the distinction should 


be noted. In this connection the cloud¬ 
blowing tubes and pipes of the ancient 
and modern Pueblos may also be men¬ 
tioned. The widespread connection of 
fire with the altar is an important fact. 
The disposition of logs in cruciform pat¬ 
tern for the kindling of new fire by the 
Creeks suggests an altar. Interesting ex¬ 
amples of the use of fire in ceremony are 
the Iroquois white-dog rite and the night 
chant of the Navaho. Among the Sik- 
sika every tent contains an altar—a small 
excavation in the earth—where sweet 
gum is burned daily (Wissler). Prehis¬ 
toric altars consisting of blocks of fire- 
hardened clay or, in rare cases, boxes of 
stone form the essential characteristic of 
many mounds and belong to the class of 
fire altars (Thomas, Putnam, Moorehead, 
Mills, Fowke). Among the altars that 
survive in the ceremonies of tribes of the 
United States may be cited the fire 
altar of the Kwakiutl cannibal ceremony 
(Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895); the 
holy place of the Pawnee Hako ceremony 
(Fletcher in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,36,1904); 
the altars of the Sioux (Fletcher in 
16th Rep. Peabody Mus., 1883); the sun- 
dance altar of the Arapaho (Dorsey in 
Field Columb. Mus. Pub., no. 75, pl. lxi, 
1903); and altars of various ceremonies 
of the Navaho (Matthews in 5th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1887; Stevenson in 8th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1891), the Zuni (Stevenson in 23d 
Rep. B. A. E., 1905), and the Hopi 
(Fewkes in recent reports B. A. E., and 
articles in Am. Anthrop. and Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore; Dorsey and Yoth in Field Col. 
Mus. Pubs.). Temporary altars are char¬ 
acteristic of the Pueblos and consist, as in 
the flute ceremony, for example, of a rere- 
dos formed of one horizontal and two ver¬ 
tical slats painted with symbols of rain 
and clouds, lightning, corn, cult figures, 



animals, etc. In front of the reredos stand 
figurines, sticks representing corn, the 
tiponi, or palladium bundle, flower 
mounds, netted gourds, ears of corn, fig¬ 
ures of birds, and a row of eagle feathers. 
Connected with the altar are bowls; bas¬ 
kets, rattles, prayer-sticks, pipes, stone 
implements, and other paraphernalia, 
and a characteristic feature of some of 
them is the dry-painting. During the 
progress of some ceremonies a direction 
altar, or cloud altar, consisting of a medi- 

























































bull. 30] 


ALTININ-AMALAHTA 


47 


cine bowl surrounded with ears of corn 
pointed toward the cardinal points, is 
temporarily used. The construction of 
the altar, the rites performed before it, and 
its destruction form interesting features 
of Hopi ceremonies and date back to an¬ 
cient times. Numerous shrine altars are 
mentioned, some near, others distant 
from, the present pueblos, and many have 
been observed which were the worship¬ 
ing places of inhabitants of the ancient 
pueblos, (w. h. ) 

Altinin (from Altau, the native name 
of a place in their territory). A Yokuts 
tribe formerly living near the upper end 
of the Tulare basin, Cal. They are said 
to have ranged as far s. as Kern r. A 
few survivors now reside on Tide River 
res. They may be the same as the Paleu- 
yaini. (a. l. k.) 

Aluenchi. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Aluik. A former Eskimo village on 
the e. coast of Greenland, about lat. 64° 
15'; pop. 130 in 1829.—Graah, Exped., 
map, 1837. 

Aluk. An Eskimo settlement in s. e. 
Greenland, lat. 60° 10'.— Meddelelser om 
Gronland, xxv, map, 1902. 

Alwathalama. A former Chumashan 
village at the marsh of Goleta, near Santa 
Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 24, 1863. 

Allvatalama. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874. 
Alwaththalam.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,1860. 
Aswalthatans. —Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., pt. 
3, 553, 1876. 

Alyeupkigna. A former Gabrieleho 
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a 
place later called Santa Anita. 

Aleupkigna. —Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Jan. 11, 1861. Almpquig-na.— Ried 
misquoted by Hoffman in Bull. Essex Inst., 
XVII, 2, 1885. 

Amacahuri. Mentioned as a clan of 
the Apohola phratry of the Timucua.— 
Pareja ( ca . 1612) quoted by Gatschet in 
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvn, 492, 1878. 

Amahami (ama ‘land/ Miami, ‘broken’: 
‘mountainous country’). A former dis¬ 
tinct Siouan tribe, long since incorporated 
with the Hidatsa; also the name of their 
village. Along with the Hidasta they 
claimed to have formerly constituted one 
tribe with the Crows. Their language, 
however, indicated closest affinity with 
the Hidatsa, differing but slightly from 
it, although they occupied a separate vil¬ 
lage and long maintained separate tribal 
organization. They were recognized as a 
distinct tribe by Lewis and Clark in 1804, 
but had practically lost their identity 30 
years later. In Lewis and Clark’s time 
their village was at the mouth of Knife r., 
N. Dak., and was one of three, the other 
two being Hidatsa, which for many years 
stood on the banks of that stream. Their 


strength was estimated at 50 warriors. 
After the epidemic of 1837 all or the 
greater part of the survivors joined the 
Hidatsa and were merged with that tribe. 
Lewis and Clark state that they had been 
a numerous and prosperous agricultural 
tribe which once divided the upper Mis¬ 
souri valley, w. of the Dakota group, with 
the Arikara, Mandan, and Hidatsa, the 
remains of the old towns of these four 
tribes being visible on every prairie ter¬ 
race along the river for 600 miles. The 
remnants of all four were found by Mat¬ 
thews (Ethnog. Hidatsa, 13, 1877) at Fort 
Berthold, numbering fewer than 2,500. 
Ahahawa. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 522,1853. 
Ahahaway. —Ibid., 250. Ahnahaways, —Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., I, 115, 1814. Ahwahawas. — 
Brown, West. Gaz., 212, 1817. Ahwahaways. — 
Lewisaad Clark, Exped., ii, 452,1814. Ah-wah-ha- 
way. —Lewis and Clark, Disc., 25, 1806. Ama¬ 
hami, —Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 15, 1877. 
Amasi. —Ibid., 36 (‘earthen lodges’: Crow name). 
A-ma'-te-wat-se'.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Val., 402, 1862. A ma tiha mi. —Matthews, 
Ethnog. Hidatsa, 133, 1877. Anhawas. —McKen- 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 80, 1854. Anna- 
hawas. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 
ii, 125, 1836. Arwacahwas. —Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., I, 120, 1814. Arwachaon. —Ibid., map. 
Awachawi. —Maximilian, Travels, 178, 1843. 
A-wa-ha-was. —Schermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., 
2d s., II, 35, 1814. A-waha-ways.— Brackenridge, 
Views of La., 85, 1815. Corneille. —Balbi, Atlas 
Ethnog., 56, 1826. Gens des Soulier. —Lewis and 
Clark, Disc., 25, 1806. Les Souliers. —Maximilian, 
Travels, 323, 1843. Mahaha. —Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., I, 130, 1814. Maharhar.— Lewis and 
Clark, Coues ed., I, 183, 1893. Mahawha. —Max¬ 
imilian, Travels, 335, 1843. Mattasoons.— Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., 521, 1878. Sauliers. — 
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., 
ii, 35, 1814 (misprint). Shoe Indians. —Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., I, 130, 1814. Soulier Noir. —Ibid. 
(French: ‘black shoe’). Watasoons. —Gass, Jour¬ 
nal, 59,1807. Watersoons.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, i, 220, 1904. Wattasoons.— Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., 1,130,1814 (so called by the Man- 
dan). Wetersoon. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
Cones ed., I, 204, note, 1893. 

Amaikiara. A former Karok village on 
the w. bank of Klamath r., at the rapids 
a mile or two below’ the mouth of Salmon 
r., n. w. Cal. Though not a large village, 
it was of importance because an annual 
salmon ceremony and the jumping dance 
were held here. Together with most of 
the villages near the mouth of the Salmon 
it w 7 as burned by the w 7 hites in the sum¬ 
mer of 1852. (a. l. k.) 

A-mi-ke-ar-rum.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 
1860. Eh-nek. —Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iii, 151,1853. Enek.— Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 
(Yurok name of the lower part of the village). 
Ihnek.— Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 236, 1855. 
In-neck.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 164, 1853. Mik-iara. —Gibbs, 
MS. Misc., B. A. E., 1852. Tumitl.— Kroeber, inf’n, 
1903 (Yurok name for the upper part of the vil¬ 
lage). 

Amakalli. A former Lower Creek town 
established by Indians from Chiaha town 
on Amakalli cr., the main branch of 
Kitchofuni cr., an affluent of Flint r., 
Ga. It had 60 warriors in 1799. (a.s. g. ) 

Au-muc-cul-le.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 64, 1848. 

Amalahta. A Chickasaw 7 town in n. 
Mississippi, which, according to Adair 


48 


AMALGUA-AMERICAN HORSE 


[b. a. e. 


(Hist. Inds., 354,1775), stood at some dis¬ 
tance from the other Chickasaw towns. 
They met the French there in a sanguin¬ 
ary battle during the first Chickasaw war 
of 1736. (a. s. g.) 

Melattaw.—Romans, East and West Fla., 63, 1776. 

Amalgua ( ‘island of the mists’). An 
island off the w. coast of Lower California, 
about lat. 30°, on which was a Cochimi 
rancheria.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., ii, 437, 
1757. 

Huamalgua. —Clavigero quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Jan. 17, 1862. 

Amani-ini (‘mescal corner’). A ranch¬ 
eria, probably Cochimi, connected with 
Purfsima mission, Lower California, in 
the 18th century. 

Amani ini.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Amaseconti (‘abundance of small fish’ 
[herring]). A small division of the Ab- 
naki formerly residing in part at Farm¬ 
ington falls, on Sandy r., Franklin co., 
Me., and partly near the present New 
Sharon, a few miles distant. They took 
part with the other Abnaki in the early 
Indian wars against the English and 
joined in the treaty made at Portsmouth, 
N. H., in 1713. Some of them lingered 
in their old homes until about 1797, when 
the last family removed to St Francis, 
lower Canada, where they retained their 
distinctive name until 1809. ( j. m. ) 

Amasaconticook.—Ballard in U. S. Coast Surv. 
Rep., 251,1871 (givenasthecorrectnameof Sandy 
r). Amasacontoog.—Portsmouth treaty (1713) in 
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., VI, 250,1859. Amasaguanteg.— 
Gyles (1726), ibid., m, 357, 1853. Amasconly.— 
Niles (1761?) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 247, 
1837. Amascontie.—Niles (1761?), ibid., 4th s., V, 
335, 1861. Amasconty.—Penhallow (1726) in N. H. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 21, 1824. Amasecontee.—Ibid., 
82. Amassacanty.—Niles (1761?) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 246,1837. Amassaconty.—Pen¬ 
hallow, op. cit. Amosequonty.—Map of 1719 cited 
by Ballard in U. S. Coast Survey Rep., 251, 1871. 
Ahmesoukkanti.—Rasies quoted by Ballard, ibid. 
Anmessukkantti.—Rasies (1722) quoted by Vetro- 
mile, Abnakis, 23-27, 1866. Anmiss8kanti.— 

Abnaki letter (1721) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 
s., vin, 262-3, 1819. Aumesoukkantti.—Rasies in 
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., IV, 102,1856. Meesee Contee.— 
Allen, ibid., 31 (trans. ‘herring plr.ce’). Meesu- 
contu.—Willis, ibid., 105. 

Amatidatahi. A former Hidatsa village 
on or near Knife r., N. Dak. 

A ma ti da ta hi.—Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 133, 
1877. A ma ti natahi.—Ibid. 

Amatiha. A former Hidatsa village on 
the s. bank of Knife r., half a mile above 
its mouth, in N. Dak. 

Amatiha.—Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol., 35, 38, 
1877. Awatichai-Echpou.—Maximilian, Voy. dans 
Pint, de l’Am., in, 2, 1843. Awatichay.—Maxi¬ 
milian, Trav., 178, 1843. 

Amatpan. A former Chitimacha vil¬ 
lage on Bayou Gris, in St Marys parish, 
La., 3 m. e. of Charenton, on the shore of 
Grand lake. 

Amatpan namu.—Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop. 
Soc. Wash., ii, 151,1883 (ndmu~ l village ’). 

Amaxa. A pueblo of New Mexico in 
1598, doubtless situated in the Salinas in 
the vicinity of Abo, and evidently occu¬ 
pied by Tigua or Piros.—Onate (1598) in 
Doc. In4d., xvi, 114, 1871. 



Amber Beads, Alaska (1-2) 


Amaye. A town and province visited 
by the De Soto expedition in 1542; situ¬ 
ated probably in extreme s. w. Arkan¬ 
sas.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n, 195, 1850. 

Amay.—Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, 810,1705. 

Amber. A fossilized vegetable resin 
occurring in small quantities in the more 
recent geological formations in many 
parts of the continent. So far as known 
it was little used by the aborigines, ex¬ 
cepting the Eskimo of 
Alaska, who valued it 
for beads and other 
small ornaments. 
These people obtained 
it from the alluvium of 
the Yukon delta and 
from the Tertiary for¬ 
mations of the Fox ids. Murdoch (9th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1892) illustrates a string of 
four small amber beads obtained from the 
Pt Barrow Eskimo. See also Kunz, Gems 
and Precious Stones, 1890. (w. h. h.) 

Amdowapuskiyapi (‘ those who lay meat 
on their shoulders to dry it during the 
hunt’). A Sisseton band or subtribe.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897. 

Amediche. A tribe, probably Caddoan, 
that lived about 68 leagues w. of Natchi¬ 
toches, in e. Texas. La Harpe stated that 
in 1714-16 they were at war with the 
Natchitoches, and that the Spaniards had 
established a settlement among them a 
few years previously, but soon aban¬ 
doned it. (a. c. f. ) 

Amedichez.— La Harpe (1719) in Margry, D6c., VI, 

266, 1886. 


Amen (A’men). A village or a group of 
3 adjacent villages of the Yurok on the 
coast 6 m. n. of the mouth of Klamath 
r., Cal., their northernmost habitation. 
(a. l. k.) 

Amerdlok (‘the smaller one,’ referring 
generally to a bay near a larger one). An 
Eskimo village in w. Greenland, lat. 67°.— 
Nansen, First Crossing, map, 1890. 

American Horse. An Oglala Sioux chief, 
known in his tribe as Wasechun-tashunka. 


He was probably the son or nephew of 
the American Horse who went out with 
Sitting Bull in the Sioux war and was 
killed at Slim buttes, S. Dak., Sept. 29, 
1875. As speaker for the tribe he signed 
the treaty secured by the Crook commis¬ 
sion in 1887, by which the Sioux reserva¬ 
tion in Dakota was reduced by one-half. 
Nearly half the tribe objected to the ces¬ 
sion, alleging that the promises of the 
commissioners could not be depended on, 
and the malcontents, excited by the mes¬ 
sianic craze that had recently reached the 
Sioux and by the killing of Sitting Bull, 
its chief exponent among them, in 1890, 
withdrew from the council and prepared 
to fight the Government. The expected 
benefits of the treaty proved illusory. 


BULL. 30] 


AMERIND-AMINOYA 


49 


While the tribe were gathered at the 
agency to treat with the commissioners, 
their great herds of cattle destroyed their 
growing crops and were subsequently 
stolen. The signers expected that the 
rations of beef that had been cut off by 
the Government would be restored, and 
the agent began to issue the extra rations. 
In the following year, when drought had 
ruined the new crop, authority to increase 
the rations having been withheld, they 
were reduced at the most unseasonable 
time. The Sioux were actually starving 
when the malcontents took their arms 
and went out to the bad-lands to dance 
themselves into the exalted state neces¬ 
sary for the final struggle with the whites. 
American Horse and other friendlies in¬ 
duced them to submit, and the episode 
would have been concluded without fur¬ 
ther bloodshed had not acollision occurred 
between some raw troops and Big Foot’s 
band after its surrender. In 1891 Ameri¬ 
can Horse headed the delegation from 
Pine Ridge to Washington, composed of 
leaders of both the friendly and the lately 
hostile party, and the conferences resulted 
in the issue of living rations and in fairer 
treatment of the Sioux, (f. h.) 

Amerind. A word composed of the 
first syllables of “American Indian,” 
suggested in 1899 by an American lexi¬ 
cographer as a substitute for the inap¬ 
propriate terms used to designate the 
race of man inhabiting the New World 
before its occupancy by Europeans. 
The convenience of such derivatives as 
Amerindic, Amerindize, Amerindian, 
proto-Amerind, pre-Amerindic, pseudo- 
Amerind, etc., argues in favor of the new 
word. The introduction of “Amerind” 
was urged by the late Maj. J. W. Powell, 
and it has the support of several anthro¬ 
pologists. A plea by Dr W J McGee for 
its general adoption appeared in 1900 in 
the Journal of the Anthropological In¬ 
stitute of Great Britain. The use of 
“Amerind” at the International Con¬ 
gress of Americanists in New York, Oct., 
1902, occasioned a discussion (Science, 
n. s., xvi, 892, 1902) in which it was sup¬ 
ported by some and attacked by others. 
The name, nevertheless, has found its 
way into both scientific and popular litera¬ 
ture. (a. f. c.) 

Ametzilhacaamanc (‘ mouth of the sandy 
arroyo’). A rancheria, probably Coch- 
imi, connected with Purfsima mission, 
Lower California, in the 18th century.— 
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 190, 1857. 

Amicoa. Mentioned by Coxe (Carolana, 
14, 1741) as a tribe on the Honabanou, 
an imaginary river entering the Missis¬ 
sippi from the w., 15 leagues above the 
mouth of the Ohio. It is probably an 
imaginary tribe. 


Amikwa (from amik, ‘beaver’). An 
Algonquian tribe found by the French on 
the n. shore of L. Huron, opposite Mani- 
toulin id., where they were located in the 
Jesuit Relations at various dates up to 
1672. Bacqueville de la Potherie (Hist. 
Am. Sept., 1753) says that they and the 
Nipissing once inhabited the shores of 
L. Nipissing, and that they rendered 
themselves masters of all the other na¬ 
tions in those quarters until disease made 
great havoc among them and the Iroquois 
compelled the remainder of the tribe to 
betake themselves, some to the French 
settlements, others to L. Superior and to 
Green bay of L. Michigan. In 1740 a 
remnant had retired to Manitoulin id. 
Chauvignerie, writing in 1736, says of the 
Nipissing: ‘‘ The armorial bearings of this 
nation are, the heron for the Achague or 
Heron tribe, the beaver for the Ame- 
ko8es [Amikwa], the birch for the Bark 
tribe. ’ ’ The reference may possibly be to 
a gens only of the Nipissing and not to the 
Amikwa tribe, yet the evidently close re¬ 
lation between the latter and the Nipis¬ 
sing justifies the belief that the -writer 
alluded to the Amikwa as known to his¬ 
tory. They claimed in 1673 to be allies 
of the Nipissing. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Amehouest.—Heriot, Travels, 197, 1807. Ame- 
ko8es.—Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 1053,1855. Amicawaes.—Boyd, Ind. Local 
Names,3,1885. Amicois.—Doc. of 1693 in N.Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 566,1855. Amicoues.—Jes. Rel. 1671, 
25,1858. Amicoures.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 79,1858. Ami- 
cours.—Heriot,Trav.,194,1807. Amic-ways.—Boyd, 
Ind. Local Names, 3, 1885. Amihouis.— Colden 
(1727), Five Nations, 86,1747. Amikois. —N.Y. Doc. 
Col.Hist.,IX, 722,1855. Amikones.—McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1854. Amikoiiai.— Jes. 
Rel. 1640, 34, 1858. Amikouas.—Perrot (ca. 1700), 
M<$m., 20,1864. Amikouek.—Jes. Rel. 1648, 62,1858. 
Amikoues.—Gallinee (1669-70) in Margry, D6c., i, 
162,1875. a Mikouest. —La Potherie, Hist. P Am6r., 
n, 48, 1753 (misprint). Amikouest.—Ibid., 58. 
Amikouets.—Neill in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 403, 
1885. Atnikouis.—Jeflferys, Fr. Dorns., pt. 1,47,1761. 
Amikouys.—Charlevoix (1743), Voy.. ii, 47, 1761. 
Beaver (Indians).—Shea, Catholic Missions, 366, 
1855. Castor.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
III, 81, 1854. Naiz Percez.—Jes. Rel. 1636, 92, 1858. 
Nation du Castor.—Ibid. Nation of the Beaver.— 
Jefferys, French Dorns. Am., pt, 1,47, 1761. Neds- 
percez.—Jes. Rel. 1657, 11, 1858. Nez-Perces.— 
Charlevoix, Hist. New France, Shea ed., in, 130, 
1872. Nez Percez.—Ibid., 119. Omikoues.— Rasies 
(ca. 1723) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vm, 251, 
1819. Ounikanes.—Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 554, 1853 (misprint.) 

Amilcou. Mentioned by Iberville in 
connection with the Biioxi, Moctobi, 
Huma, Paskagula, etc., as a small tribe 
e. of the lower Mississippi in 1699 (Mar¬ 
gry, Dec., iv, 155,1880); not identified. 

Aminoya. A province or village, possi¬ 
bly Siouan, situated in 1542 on the w. 
bank of the Mississippi, probably a short 
distance below the mouth of Arkansas r. 
It was here the remnant of De Soto’s fol¬ 
lowers, under the leadership of Moscoso, 
embarked for Mexico (Garcilasso de la 
Vega, Florida, 222, 1723). The people 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-4 



50 


AMITOK-AMUSEMENTS 


[B. A. E. 


were probably related to the Natchez or 
the Tunica. 

Aminoia.— La Salle (1679) in Margry, D6c., II, 41, 
1877. Daminoia.— Hennepin (1683), Shea trans., 
163,1880. Minoia. —Coxe, Carolana, 22,1741. Mi- 
noya.— Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 206, 1850. 

Amitok (‘narrow’). A winter settlement 
of the Amitormiut on the e. coast of Mel¬ 
ville peninsula. 

Amitigoke. —Gilder, Schwatka’s Search, 181,1881. 
Amitioke.— Parry, Second Voy., 206, 1824. Amit- 
tioke, —Ibid., map, 197. Amitoq. —Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. Amityook.— Lyon, Pri¬ 
vate Jour., 406, 1825. 

Amitormiut (‘inhabitants of the nar¬ 
row place.’—Boas). An Eskimo tribe on 
the e. coast of Melville penin. Their 
principal village is Amitok, from which 
they take their name.—Gilder, Schwat¬ 
ka’s Search, 181, 1881. 

Amivik. An Angmagsalingmiut settle¬ 
ment on Angmagsalik fiord, e. Green¬ 
land.—Holm, Ethnol. Skizze af Angmag- 
salikerne, 14, 1887. 

Ammoncongan. A village, probably be¬ 
longing to the Abnaki, on the n. e. side of 
Presumpscot r., at Saccarappa falls, Cum¬ 
berland co., Me.—Deed of 1657 in Me. 
Hist, Soc. Coll., i, 118, 1865. 

Aumoughcawgen.— Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 3d s., VI, 97, 1837. Aumuckcawgen. —Ibid., 
117. Aumughcawgen. —Smith (1631), ibid., Ill, 22, 
1833. 

Amo. A pueblo of the province of 
Atripuy in the region of the lower part 
of the Rio Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.— 
Onate (1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 115,1871. 

Amolomol ( Amd'lomdl ). A former Chu- 
mashan village at the old wharf at Santa 
Barbara, Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Amonces. A tribe or division, presum¬ 
ably of the Yokuts, said to have lived on 
San Joaquin r., Cal., in 1854.—Henley in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 512, 1854. 

Amonokoa. A band of the Illinois 
about 1680.—Hennepin, New Disc., 310, 
1698. 

Amanakoa.— La Salle (1680) quoted in Hist. Mag., 
1st s., V, 197, 1861. 

Amoque. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on Gila r., s. Ariz.—Sedelmair (1744) 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
366, 1889. 

Amoskeag (namos ‘small fish,’ kkig ‘to 
take’: ‘one takes small fish’). A small 
tribe or band of the Pennacook confed¬ 
eracy, living about 1675 in a village of 
the same name at Amoskeag falls, on Mer- 
rimac r., in Hillsboro co., N. H. This 
village was the residence of Wannalanset, 
head chief of the Pennacook confederacy, 
son of Passaconnaway. 

Amoskeag.— Hulbbard (1680) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., v, 32, 1815. Naamhok. —Gookin (1677) 
in Trans. Am. Antiq, Soc., it, 462, 1836. Naam- 
keeks.— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 
s., i, 149, 1806. Namaoskeags. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 221,1855. Namaschaug.— Owaneco (1700) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 614,1854. Namaske.— 
Eliot (ca. 1650) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 
IV, 123,1834. Namekeake. —Gookin (1677) quoted 
by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2,115,1848 (near Chelms¬ 


ford, Mass.; same?). Namkeake —Gookin (1677) in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 518, 1836 (same?). 

Ampalamuyu. A Lakmiut band near 
Luckiamute r., Oreg.—Gatschet, Lakmiut 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1877. 

Ampishtna. The Lakmiut name of a 
band of the Calapooya proper, resid¬ 
ing e. of upper Willamette r., Oreg.— 
Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Amu (AmxV). The Ant clan of the 
Pecos tribe of New Mexico.—Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895. 

Amulet. See Fetish. 

Amusaya. Mentioned as a Timucua 
clan of the Apohola phratry.—Pareja 
(ca. 1612) quoted by Gatschet in Am. 
Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 492, 1878. 

Amusements. When not bound down 
by stern necessity, the Indian at home 
was occupied much of the time with 
dancing, feasting, gaming, and story-tell¬ 
ing. Though most of the dances were 
religious or otherwise ceremonial in 
character, there were some which had 
no other purpose than that of social 
pleasure. They might take place in the 
day or the night, be general or confined 
to particular societies, and usually were 
accompanied with the drum or other 
musical instrument to accentuate the 
song. The rattle was perhaps invariably 
used only in ceremonial dances. Many 
dances were of pantomimic or dramatic 
character, and the Eskimo had regular 
pantomime plays, though evidently due 
to Indian influence. The giving of pres¬ 
ents was often a feature of the dance, as 
was betting of all athletic contests and 
ordinary games. The amusements of the 
Eskimo and extreme northern tribes were 
chiefly athletic, such as racing, wrestling, 
throwing of heavy stones, and tossing in a 
blanket. From Hudson bay to the Gulf 
of Mexico, and from the Atlantic to the 
border of the plains, the great athletic 
game was the ball play, now adopted 
among civilized games under the name 
of lacrosse. In the N. it was played with 
one racket, and in the S. with two. Ath¬ 
letes were regularly trained for this game, 
and competitions were frequently in¬ 
tertribal. The wheel-and-stick game in 
one form or another was well-nigh uni¬ 
versal. As played in the E. one gamester 
rolled forward a stone disk, or wheel, 
while his opponent slid after it a stick 
curved at one end in such a wav that the 
wheel, when it fell to the ground, rested 
within the crook of the stick. On the 
plains and in the S. W. a wooden wheel, 
frequently netted, took the place of the 
stone disk. Like most Indian institu¬ 
tions, the game often had a symbolic sig¬ 
nificance in connection with a sun myth. 
A sacred variant of the game was played 
by the priests for divinatory purposes, or 
even as a sort of votive ceremony to pro¬ 
cure the recovery of a patient. Target 


BULL. 30] 


AMUSHUNGKWA-ANADARKO 


51 


practice with arrows, knives, or hatchets, 
thrown from the hand, as well as with the 
bow or rifle, was also universal among 
the warriors and boys of the various 
tribes. The gaming arrow's were of 
special design and ornamentation, and 
the game itself had often a symbolic 
purpose. Horse races, frequently inter¬ 
tribal, were prominent amusements, 
especially on the plains, during the warm 
season, and foot races, often elaborately 
ceremonial in character, were common 
among the sedentary agricultural tribes, 
particularly the Pueblos and the Wichita. 

Games resembling dice and hunt-the- 
button were found everywhere and were 
played by both sexes alike, particularly 
in the tipi or the wigwam during the long 
winter nights. The dice, or their equiva¬ 
lents, were of stone, bone, fruit seeds, 
shell, wood, or reed, variously shaped and 
marked. They were thrown from the 
hand or from a small basket or wooden 
bowl. One form, the awl game, confined 
to the women, was played around a 
blanket, which had various tally marks 
along the border for marking the prog¬ 
ress of the game. The hunt-the-button 
games were usually accompanied with 
songs and rhythmic movements of the 
hands and body, intended to confuse the 
parties whose task was to guess the loca¬ 
tion of the button. Investigations by 
Culin show a close correspondence be¬ 
tween these Indian games and those of 
China, Japan, Korea, and northern Asia. 

Special women’s games were shinny, 
football, and the deer-foot game, be¬ 
sides the awl game already noted. In 
football the main object was to keep the 
ball in the air as long as possible by kick¬ 
ing it upward. The deer-foot game was 
played, sometimes also by men, with a 
number of perforated bones from a deer’s 
foot, strung upon a beaded cord, having a 
needle at one end. The purpose was to 
toss the bones in such a way as to catch 
a particular one upon the end of the 
needle. 

Among the children there were target 
shooting, stilts, slings, and tops for the 
boys, and buckskin dolls and playing- 
house for the girls, with “wolf” or 
“catcher,” and various forfeit plays, in¬ 
cluding a breath-holding test. Cats’-cra- 
dles, or string figures, as well as shuttle¬ 
cocks and buzzes, were common. As 
among civilized nations, the children 
found the greatest delight in imitating 
the occupations of the elders. Numerous 
references to amusements among the va¬ 
rious tribes may be found throughout the 
annual reports of the Bureau of American 
Ethnology. Consult especially Games of 
the American Indians, by Stewart Culin, 
24th Rep. B. A. E., 1905. See Ball play , 
Dance , Games, (j. m. ) 


Amushungkwa. A former pueblo of the 
Jemez on a mesa w. of the Hot Springs, 
about 12 m. n of Jemez pueblo, N. 
Mex. It was abandoned prior to the 
revolt of 1680. See Patoqua. 

Amo-shium-qua.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
ill, pt. 1, 127, 1890. Amo-xium-qua. —Bandelier 
(1888) in Proc. Internat. Cong. Am., vii, 452, 1890. 
Amoxunqua.— Z&rate-Salmeron ( ca . 1629) in Land 
of Sunshine, 183, Feb., 1900. Amoxunque.— Ban¬ 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, pt. 1, 127,1890. 
Amushungkwa.— Hodge, field-notes, B. A. E., 1895. 

Amutaja. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Ana. The Tobacco clan of the Zuni. 
Ana-kwe.— Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368, 1896 
(kwe=‘ people’). 

Ana. A village of 70 Papago in 1865, 
probably in Pima co., s. Ariz.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 135, 1865. 

Anacbuc. A Chumashan village w. of 
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven¬ 
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542.—Ca- 
brillo (1542) in Smith, Coll. Doc. Fla., 
181,1857. 

Anacarck, —Cabrillo quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. Anacbue.— Ibid. 

Anacharaqua. A village in Florida, 
subject to Utina, chief of the Timucua, in 
1564. The De Bry map places it e. of 
lower St Johns r. 

Anacharaqua.— Laudonniere (1564) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. Anachatagua. — 
Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723. Onachaquara.— De Bry, 
map (1591) in Le Moyne, Narr., Appleton trans., 
1875 (transposed?). 

Anachorema. A village visited by La 
Salle in 1687. According to Douay (Shea, 
Discov. Miss., 210, 1852) it was on the 
“first Cane r.” n. e. of LaSalle’s Ft St 
Louis on St Bernard (Matagorda) bay, 
Texas. Thwaites (Hennepin, New Dis¬ 
cov., ii, 420, 1903) regards the stream as 
probably the Rio Colorado of Texas. 

Anacoac. A Chumashan village be¬ 
tween Goletaand Pt Conception, Cal., in 
1542.—Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Coll. Doc. 
Fla., 189, 1857. 

Almacoac.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17,1863.— 
Anacoat.— Cabrillo, op. cit., 183. 

Anacot. A Chumashan village between 
Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal., in 1542 
(Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Coll. Doc., 183, 
1857); evidently distinct from Anacoat. 

Anadarko (from Nada'ko , their own 
name). A tribe of the Caddo confederacy 
whose dialect was spoken by the Kado- 
hadacho, Hainai, and Adai. The earliest 
mention of the people is in the relation of 
Biedma (1544), who writes that Moscoso in 
1542 led his men during their southward 
march through a province that lay e. of 
the Anadarko. The territory occupied 
by the tribe was s. w. of the Kadohadacho. 
Their villages were scattered along Trin¬ 
ity and Brazos rs., Tex., higher up than 
those of the Hainai, and do not seem to 
have been visited so early as theirs by the 
French. A Spanish mission was estab- 


52 


ANAGNAK-ANALCO 


[B. A. E. 


lished among the Anadarko early in the 
18th century, but was soon abandoned. 
La Harpe reached an Anadarko village in 
1719, and was kindly received. The peo¬ 
ple shared in the general friendliness for 
the French. Duringthecontentionsof the 
latter with the Spaniards and later with 
the English, throughout the 18th century, 
the Anadarko suffered greatly. They be¬ 
came embroiled in tribal wars; their vil¬ 
lages were abandoned; and those who 
survived the havoc of war and the new 
diseases brought into the country by the 
white people were forced to seek shelter 
and safety with their kindred toward the 
n. e. In 1812 a village of 40 men and 200 
souls was reported on Sabine r. The Ana¬ 
darko lived in villages, having fixed habi¬ 
tations similar to those of the other tribes 
of the Caddo confederacy, to whom they 
w r ere evidently also similar in customs, 
beliefs, and clan organization. Nothing 
is known definitely of the subdivisions 
of the tribe, but that such existed is prob¬ 
able from the fact that the people were 
scattered over a considerable territory and 
lived in a number of villages. They are 
now incorporated with the Caddo on the 
allotted Wichita res. in Oklahoma. The 
town of Anadarko perpetuates the tribal 
name. (a. c. f. ) 

Ah mau dah kas. —Parker (1855) quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 682, 1855. Ah-nan- 
dah-kas. —Parker, Texas, 213,1856. Ahnaudahkas. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 712, 1855. Ahnauda- 
kas. —Keane in Stanford, Comp., 499,1878. Aman- 
daicoes. —Neighbors in H. R. Doc. 100, 29th Cong., 
2d sess., 3, 1847. Ana-da-ca. —Sen., Ex.Conf. Doc. 

13, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 1, 1846. Anadaghcoes.— 
Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 
7, 1869. Anadahcoe.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,184, 1857. 
An-a-dah-has. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 518, 
1851. An-a-dah-kas. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 28, 1848. 
Anadahkoes. —Ibid., 177. Anadahkos. —Ibid.,1856, 

14, 1857. Anadakas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 
686, 1857. An-a-dak-has. —Marcy quoted by 
Schoolcraft, ibid., v, 712, 1855. Anadakkas. — 
Ibid. Anadako.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 43, 

1884. Anadako’s. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 
460,1885 (name of agency). Anadaku. —Gatschet, 
Caddo and Yatassi MS., 42, B. A. E. Anadarcos. — 
Bollaert in Ethnol. Soc. Lond. Journ., ii, 283,1850. 
Anadarko. —Dorsey, Caddo MS., B. A. E., 1882. 
Anadarko's. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 460, 

1885. Anadogheos. —Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 
40th Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1869. Anadorkoes. —H. R. 
Rep. 82. 44th Cong., 2d sess., 2, 1877. An-ah-dah- 
koes. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 267, 1860. An-ah-dah- 
kos. —Ibid., 310. Anahdakas. —Marcy, Army Life, 
171, 1866. Anandarkoes. —Smithson. Misc. Coll., 
II, 49, 1862. Andaicos. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 261, 1851. 
Andarcos. —Latham, Essays, 401, 1860. And-dai- 
coes. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 263,1851. Anduico. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 403, 1853. Annadahkoes. — 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 367, 1855. Anna-darcoes. — 
Ibid., 1849, 33, 1850. Anndggho’s. —Alvord (1868) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 9, 1869. 
An-no-dar-coes. - Butler and Lewis (1846) in H. 
R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 7,1847. Madaha.— 
Schoolcraft., Ind. Tribes, VI, 686, 1857. Mon- 
daque.— Philippeaux, Map of Eng. Col., 1781 
(misprint). Nadaco.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., ii, 410, 1878. Nadacoc. —Jefferys (1763), 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Nadacoe.— De l’Isle, 
map in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 294, 1886. Nada- 
cogs. —Mezi5res (1778) quoted by Bancroft. 
No. Mex. States. I, 661, 1886. Nadaho. —Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, D6c., ill, 409, 1878. Nada'ko.— 
Mooney, MS. Caddo notes, B. A. E., 1891. 


Nadako’s.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 374, 
1885. Nadaku.— Gatschet, Caddo and Yatassi 
MS., 65, B. A. E. Nadaku hayanu. —Gatschet, 
Caddo MS., B. A. E. (Caddo name). Na- 
datcho.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., Ill, 409, 
1878 (probably the Anadarko). Nadocogs. —Morfi 
quoted by Charlevoix, New Fr., iv, 80, 1870. 
Nandacaho.— Biedma in Hakluyt Soc. Pubs., ix, 
197, 1851. Nandako. —Latham, Essays, 402, 1860. 
Nandakoes.— P6nicaut (1701) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n. s., I, 73, 1869. Nandaquees. —Scher- 
merhorn (1812)in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2ds., ii, 24,1814. 
Nandaquies.— Brown, Gaz., 214, 1817. Nando- 
quies. —Ibid., 215. Narako’s. —ten Kate, Reizen 
in N. Am., 374,1885. Naudacho. —Biedma (1544) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 108,1850. Nau-do-ques.— 
Brackenridge, Views of La., 81,1815. Nondacao.— 
Gentl. of Elvas (1539) in Hakluyt Soc. Pubs., ix, 
135, 1851. Nondaco.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., ill, 409, 1878. Nondaque.— Jefferys (1763), 
Am. Atlas, map 5. 1776. Onadahkos. —Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 903, 1846. Onadaicas.— Butler and Lewis 
(1846) in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 4,1847. 
Onadakoes, —Ind. Aff. Rep., 894,1846. Unatagua. — 
Latham, Varieties of Man, 350, 1850. ITnatagu- 
ous.— Le Branche (1839) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 14, 32d 
Cong., 2d sess., 27, 1853. Unataquas.— Bonnell, 
Texas, 140, 1840. 

Anagnak. An Eskimo village of the 
Nushegagmiut on Wood r., Alaska; pop. 
87 in 1880.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. 

Anaknak.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 47, 1884. 

Anagok. An Eskimo village of the 
Kuskwogmiut tribe, Alaska, on the coast 
near C. Avinof; pop. 75 in 1880. 

Anogogmute. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. Anogokmute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 54, 
1884. 

Anaham. A band of the Tsilkotin, 
numbering 216 in 1901, occupying a val¬ 
ley near Chilcotin r., 60 m. from its 
mouth in British Columbia.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 162, 1902. 

Amahim.— Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 1889. Anahem.— 
Ibid., 415, 1898. Anahim.— Ibid., 314, 1892. Ana- 
him’s tribe. —Ibid., 190, 1884. 

Anakwaikona. An outcast element for¬ 
merly existing among the Zuni who were 
the servants, if not in many cases the 
slaves, of the intramural or city popula¬ 
tion.—Cushing in Proc. Internat. Cong. 
Am., vn, 176, 1890. 

A-wa-na-kwai-k’ya-ko-na.— Cushing, ibid. 

Analao. A tribe, possibly Caddoan, 
formerly residing on Washita r., Ark. 
Deputies from the Analao and Tanico 
(Tonica) came to the village of Cahayno- 
houa in 1687, when Joutel and the other 
survivors of La Salle’s party were there 
while on their way from the Red r. of 
Louisiana to the Mississippi. See Joutel 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 172, 1846; 
Douav quoted by Shea, Discov. Miss. 
Val., 223, 1903. (a. c. f.) 

Analac. —Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. 

Analco. A prehistoric pueblo of the 
Tewa at the place where there is now 
the so-called “ oldest house,” adjacent to 
San Miguel chapel, in Santa Fe, N. Mex. 
According to Bandelier this name was 
first applied in the 18th century. Ritch 
(N. Mex., 153, 196, 1885) asserts that 
the house referred to formed part of the 
old pueblo, and that two of the old wom¬ 
en then living therein claimed to be 



BULL. 301 


ANAMAS-ANATOMY 


53 


lineal descendants of the original occu¬ 
pants (p. 113). Bandelier, however, in¬ 
clines to the opinion (Arch. Inst. Papers, 
i, 19, 1881; iv, 89, 1892) that the struc¬ 
ture dates from Spanish times, a belief 
substantiated by E. L. Hewett, in 1902, 
when the building was partly dismantled 
and found to be of Spanish construction, 
excepting about 18 inches of the founda¬ 
tion walls which were of Pueblo work. 

Anamas. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Anamic. A former rancheria, probably 
Papago, visited by Father Kino in 1701; 
situated in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, between 
Busanic and Sonoita. See Bibiana. 

Sta Ana Anamic.— Kino (1701) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, I, 497,1884. 

Anamiewatigong (‘ at the tree of prayer, ’ 
i. e., the cross, from a large wooden cross 
planted by one of the early missionaries 
on the bluff where the village now 
stands.—Kelton). An Ottawa village in 
Emmet co., lower Michigan. It is called 
La Croix by the French, and Cross Village 
by the Americans, both conveying the 
same idea as the Indian name. 

Cross Village.— Detroit treaty (1855) in U. S. 

Ind. Treaties, 614, 1873. La Croix. —Shea, Cath. 
Miss., 390, 1855. 

Anamis. A village visited by La Salle 
in 1686 on his first journey from Ft St 
Louis, on Matagorda bay, Tex., to search 
overland for the Mississippi, and again in 
1687 on his last journey northward. The 
people seem to have lived in the vicinity 
of the Caddoan tribes, but their ethnic 
relationship is uncertain. See Cavelier 
in Shea, Early Voy., 40, 1861. Of. Ara- 
nama, Cotonam. (a. c. f.) 

Anames.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 2,602,1736. 

Anamon. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Anarnisok (‘having smell [of walrus 
dung]’; old dialect). A former Eskimo 
village in e. Greenland, about lat. 63° 
10'; pop. 20 in 1829.—Graah, Exped., 
map, 1837. 

Anarnitung (‘having smell [of walrus 
dung] ’). A winter village of the Kingua 
branch of Okomiut in Baffin land at the 
head of Cumberland sd. (Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888); pop. 43 in 
1883. 

Annanatook.— Howgate, Cruise of Florence, 33, 
1877. Annanetoote.— Wareham in Jour.Geog. Soc. 
Lond., xii, 24, 1842. 

Anasitch. A Kusan village or tribe on 
the s. side of Coos bay, coast of Oregon.— 
Milhau, MS. Coos Bay vocab., B. A. E. 

Hau-nay-setch. —Milhau, MS. Letter to Gibbs, B. 
A. E. (Haunaysetch and Melukitz are names 
given to Coos bay). 

Anaskenoans. A village of the Powha¬ 
tan confederacy of Virginia, situated in 
1608 on Rappahannock r., in the present 


Caroline co.—Smith (1629), Virginia, 
map, repr. 1819. 

Anatichapko ( An&ti-ch&pko ‘long thick¬ 
et’). A former Creek village on a n. trib¬ 
utary of Hillabee cr., a branch of Talla¬ 
poosa r., Ala. A battle occurred there 
during the Creek or Red Stick war, Jan. 
24, 18l4.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
126, 1884. 

Anati tchapko.— Gatschet, op. cit., i, 126, 1884. 
Au-net-te chap-co. —Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 43, 
1848. Enitachopko. —Pickett, Hist Ala., ii, 330, 
1851. Enotochopco.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 
371, 1857. Enotochopko. —Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 
4, 59, 1848. Long Swamp. —Gatschet, op. cit. 

Anatomy. While the American Indians 
show many minor and even some im¬ 
portant physical variations, and can be 
separated into several physical types, 
they present throughout the continent so 
many features in common that they may 
properly be regarded as one great race, 
admitting of a general anatomical de¬ 
scription. The Eskimo form a distinct 
sub-race of the Mongolo-Malay and must 
be treated separately. 

The Indian, in many of his anatomical 
characters, stands between the white and 
the negro. His skin is of various shades 
of brown, tinged in youth, particularly 
in the cheeks, with the red of the circu¬ 
lating blood. The term “red Indian” 
is a misnomer. Very dark individuals of 
a hue approaching chocolate or even the 
color of some negroes are found in more 
primitive tribes, especially in the S. and 
among the old men, who often went 
nearly naked. Most women and school 
children or others who wear clothing and 
live a more civilized life are lighter in 
color. Prolonged exposure to the ele¬ 
ments tends, as with whites, to darken 
the skin. The darkest parts of the skin 
are ordinarily the back of the hands, 
wrists, and neck, the axilse, nipples, 
perineal regions, and the exposed parts 
of the feet. A newborn infant is of vary¬ 
ing degrees of dusky red. 

The color of the hair is generally black, 
with the luster and slight bluish or 
brownish tinge that occurs among whites, 
not the dull grayish black of the Afri¬ 
can negro. With many individuals of 
all ages above early childhood who go 
much with bare head the hair becomes 
partly bleached, especially superficially, 
turning to a rusty hue. 

The color of the eyes varies from hazel- 
brown to dark brown. The sclera in the 
young is bluish; in adults, especially the 
old, dirty-yellowish. The iris is often 
surrounded with a narrow but clearly 
marked ring. 

The skin appears to be slightly thicker 
than that of the whites. The normal 
corrugations on the back of the hand and 
wrist are from childhood decidedly more 
pronounced in Indians of both sexes. 


54 


ANATOMY 


[B. A. E. 


The hair of the head is straight, almost 
circular in cross-section, slightly coarser 
than in the average white, rather abun¬ 
dant and -long. The range of variation 
in natural length is from 40 to 100 cm., or 
18 in. to 36 in. Most male Indians would 
have a slight to moderate mustache and 
some beard on the chin if they allowed 
the hair to grow; but side whiskers in 
many are absent, or nearly so. Both 
mustache and chin beard are scarcer and 
coarser than with the whites, straight, 
of the same black as the hair, and in 
length 4 to 7 cm., or 1£ in. to in. 
The hair in the axillae and on the pubis 
is moderate in quantity, in some instances 
nearly absent, and on the rest of the body 
hairs are shorter and less abundant than 
with the average white person. The 
nails are dull bluish in hue and moder¬ 
ately tough. 

The face is well rounded and agreeable 
in childhood, interesting and occasionally 
handsome during adolescence and earlier 
adult life, and agreeable but much 
wrinkled in old age. The forehead in 
adults with undeformed skulls is some¬ 
what low and in males slopes slightly 
backward. The eyebrows, where not 
plucked, are frequently connected by 
sparser hair above the nose. The eye¬ 
lashes are moderately thick and long. 
The apertures of the eyes are slightly 
oblique, the outer canthi, especially the 
right one, being the higher. In children 
the fold called Mongolic is general, but 
not excessive. The root of the nose is 
usually depressed, as in most whites. 
The size and shape of the nose vary 
much, but it is commonly slightly 
shorter at the base and relatively wider 
than in whites, with an aquiline bridge 
predominating in men. In many men 
the point of the nose is lower than the 
base of the septum, the distal length 
exceeding the proximal. This peculiarity 
is especially frequent in some tribes. In 
women the nasal depression is wider and 
oftener shallower, and the bridge lower. 
Thin noses are not found. The lips are 
well formed and, barring individual 
exceptions, about as thick as in average 
w r hites. Prognathism is greater than in 
whites. The malars are in both sexes 
somewhat large and prominent; this 
becomes especially apparent in old age 
when much of the adipose tissue below 
them is gone. The chin often appears 
less prominent than in whites, but this 
effect is due to the greater alveolar pro¬ 
trusion. The ears are well formed and 
of good size, occasionally somewhat thick. 
The neck is of fair dimensions, never 
very long or thin. 

The body as a rule is of good propor¬ 
tions, symmetrical, and, except in old age, 
straight and w T ell nourished. The chest 


is of ample size, especially in men. The 
abdomen, which in children is often 
rather large, retains but slight fulness 
in later life. The pelvis, on account of 
the ample chest, appears somewhat small, 
but is not so by actual measurement. 
The spinal curves are only moderate, as 
are the size and prominence of the but¬ 
tocks. The thighs are rather shapely; 
the calves are usually smaller than in 
whites. The upper limbs are of good 
shape and medium musculature. The 
feet and hands are well molded and in 
many tribes smaller than they ordi¬ 
narily are in whites. The toes are rather 
short, and, where the people walk much 
barefoot or in sandals, show more or less 
separation. The proximal parts of the 
second and third toes are often confluent. 
In the more sedentary tribes the women, 
and occasionally also the men, are in¬ 
clined to corpulence. The breasts of 
women are of medium size; in the child¬ 
less the conical form predominates; the 
nipple and areola are more pronounced 
than in whites; in later life the breasts 
become small and flaccid. The genital 
organs do not differ essentially from those 
of the whites. 

The Indian skull is, on the average, 
slightly smaller than that of whites of 
equal height. Cranial capacity in men 
ranges from 1,300 to 1,500 c. c.; in women 
from about 1,150 to 1,350 c. c. The 
frontal region in men is often low and 
sloping, the sagittal region elevated, the 
occipital region marked with moderate 
ridges and, in the dolichocephalic, pro¬ 
truding. Sutures are mostly less serrated 
than in whites; metopism, except in some 
localities, is rare, and occipital division is 
uncommon, while malar division is very 
rare and parietal division extremely so. 
Intercalated bones are few in undeformed 
crania; in deformed crania they are more 
numerous. The glabella, supraorbital 
ridges, and mastoids in male skulls are 
well-developed and sometimes heavy; in 
women they are small or of medium size. 
The nasal bridge is occasionally low, the 
nasal spine smaller than in whites; the 
lower borders of the nasal aperture are 
not often sharp, but nasal gutters are 
rare; subnasal fossae are rather common. 
Orbits are of fair volume, approaching 
the quadrilateral, with angles rounded. 
Malars are often large, submalar depres¬ 
sions medium or shallow. The upper 
alveolar process, and occasionally also the 
lower, shows in both sexes a degree of 
prognathism greater than the average in 
whites, but less than in the negro. The 
protrusion on the whole is somewhat 
greater in the females. The face is meso- 
or ortho-gnathic. The lower jaw varies 
greatly. The chin is of moderate promi¬ 
nence, occasionally high, sometimes 


bull. 30 ] 


ANATOMY 


55 


square in form. The prominence of the 
angles in full-grown males is not infre¬ 
quently pronounced. 

As to base structures, the foramen mag¬ 
num is seldom large, and its position and 
inclination are very nearly the same as 
in whites; the styloid process is mostly 
smaller than in whites and not infre¬ 
quently rudimentary; petrous portions 
on the average are less depressed below 
the level of neighboring parts than in 
w T hites; anterior lacerated foramina are 
smaller; the palate is well formed and 
fairly spacious, mostly parabolic, occa¬ 
sionally U-shaped. 

The teeth are of moderate size; upper 
incisors are ventrally concave, shovel¬ 
shaped; canines not excessive; molars 
much as in whites; third molars rarely 
absent when adult life is reached. The 
usual cuspidory formula, though varia¬ 
tions are numerous, is 4, 4, 3, above; 
5, 5, irregular, below. A supernumerary 
conical dental element appears with some 
frequency in the upper jaw between, in 
front of, or behind the middle permanent 
incisors. 

The bones of the vertebral column, the 
ribs, sternum, clavicles, and the smaller 
bones of the upper and lower limbs pre¬ 
sent many marks of minor importance. 
The pelvis is well formed, moderately 
spacious, approaching the European in 
shape. The humerus is rather flat, at 
times very much so; the fossa in 31 
per cent is perforated; but vestiges of 
a supracondyloid process are much rarer 
than in whites. The humero-radial in¬ 
dex of maximum frequency in adult males 
is 77 to 80 (in whites 71 to 75); humero- 
femoral index, 71 to 75 (in whites 70 to 
74). The femur is quite flat below the 
tuberosities; the tibia, often flat (platyc- 
nemic). 

Of the brain and other soft organs but 
little is known. Two adult male Apache 
brains, collected by Dr W. Matthews 
and now preserved in the U. S. National 
Museum, weighed after removal 1,191 
and 1,304 grams, respectively. Both 
show good gyration. 

The Eskimo differs anatomically from 
the Indian in many important features. 
His hair and eyes are similar in shade, 
though the eyes are more obliquely set; 
but his skin color on the whole is lighter, 
being yellowish or light brown, with a 
pronounced redness of the face. The 
Eskimo skull is high, normally scaphoid, 
and usually spacious. The face is large 
and flat, and the nasal bones are narrower 
than in any other people. The bones of 
the body are usuallv strong. There is 
less flattening of the shaft of the humerus, 
of the upper part of the shaft of the femur, 
and of the tibia. The superior border of 
the scapula shows often an angular in¬ 
stead of a curved outline. 


In anthropometric differentiation the 
native tribes n. of Mexico are primarily 
separable into Indians and Eskimo. Some 
of the adjacent Indian tribes show Es¬ 
kimo admixture. 

The Indians among themselves vary 
considerably in stature, in form of the 
head and face, and of the orbits, the 
nose, and the nasal aperture. Low 
stature, from 160 to 165 cm. in males, 
is found among some of the Califor¬ 
nian tribes (as the Yuki of Round 
Valley agency), many of the Pueblos, 
and some of the tribes of the N. W. 
coast, as the Salish of Harrison lake 
and Thompson r., and others. Among 
the Tigua, Tewa, Apache, Navaho, Co¬ 
manche, northern Ute, Paiute, and Sho- 
shoni, among the majority of Califor¬ 
nia, Washington, and Oregon tribes, and 
among the eastern Cherokee, Chick¬ 
asaw, Kiowa, and Iowa the height in 
male adults ranges between 165 and 170 
cm., while among the Yuma, Mohave, 
Maricopa, Pima, Nez Perc4s, Sioux, 
Crows, Winnebago, Cheyenne, Arapaho, 
Iroquois, Osage, Chippewa, and eastern 
Algonquians the prevalent stature of 
adult men is from 170 to 175 cm. The 
range of variation in the majority of 
tribes and in both sexes is within 30 
cm. The stature does not regularly 
follow the geographic or climatic fea¬ 
tures, nor does it agree wholly with 
the distribution of the other principal 
physical characteristics. The women are 
on the average about 12.5 cm. shorter 
than the men; the difference is greater 
among the tall than among the short 
tribes. 

The distribution of the Indians accord¬ 
ing to cephalic index is of much interest. 
Excluding tribes that are known to be 
much mixed, there are found in the 
territory n. of Mexico all the three prin¬ 
cipal classes of cranial form, namely, 
dolicho-, brachy-, and meso-cephalic. 
Among the extremely dolichocephalic 
were the Delawares and the southern 
Utah cliff-dwellers. Moderate dolicho- 
cephaly, with occasional extreme forms, 
was and is very prevalent, being found 
in the Algonquian and the majority of 
the Siouan and Plains tribes and among 
the Siksika, Shoshoni, some Pueblos 
(e. g., Taos), and the Pima. Pure bra- 
chycephaly existed in Florida, and pre¬ 
vailed in the mound region and among 
the ancient Pueblos. It is best repre¬ 
sented to-day among the Apache, Wala- 
pai, Havasupai, Nez Pereas, Harrison lake 
Salish, Osage, and Wichita, and in a less 
degree among the Hopi, Zufii, most of the 
Rio Grande Pueblos, Navaho, Mohave, 
Yuma, California Mission Indians, Co¬ 
manche, Winnebago, many of the north¬ 
western tribes, and Seminole. Mesoceph- 
aly existed principally among the Cali- 


56 


ANATOMY-ANCHOR STONES 


[B. A. E. 


fornia Indians, the Cherokee, and some of 
the Sioux and Iroquois. There are numer¬ 
ous tribes in North America about whose 
cephalic form there is still much uncer¬ 
tainty on account of the prevailing head 
deformation. As to the height of the 
head, which must naturally be considered 
in connection with the cephalic index, 
fair uniformity is found. In the Apache 
the head is rather low, among most other 
tribes it is moderate. 

The form of the face is generally allied, 
as among other peoples, to the form of 
the head, being relatively narrow in nar¬ 
row heads and broad in the brachyce¬ 
phalic. Orbits show variations, but the 
prevalent form is mesoseme. The nose 
and the nasal aperture are generally 
mesorhinic; the principal exception to 
this is found on the w. coast, especially 
in California, where a relatively narrow 
nose (leptorhinic) was common. The 
projection of the upper alveolar region 
is almost uniformly mesognathic. 

The Eskimo range in height from short 
to medium, with long and high head, rela¬ 
tively broad flat face, high orbits, and 
narrow nose, showing alveolar progna¬ 
thism like the Indians. 

Consult Morton, (1) Crania Americana, 
1839, (2) Distinctive characteristics, 1844; 
Retzius, Om foramen af hufvudets ben- 
stomme, 1847; Meigs, Observations, 1866; 
Gould, Investigations, 1869; Wyman, (1) 
Observations on crania, 1871, (2) Fresh 
water shell mounds, 1875; Verneau, Le 
bassin suivant les sexes, 1875; Eleventh 
and Twelfth Reps. Peabody Museum, 
1878; Quatrefages and Hamy, Crania eth- 
nica, 1878-79; Flower, Catalogue of speci¬ 
mens, 1879; Carr, (1) Observations on cra¬ 
nia from Tennessee, 1878, (2) Measure¬ 
ments of crania from California, 1880, (3) 
Observations oncrania from Santa Barbara 
Ids., 1879, (4) Notes on crania of New 
England Indians, 1880; Otis, List of speci¬ 
mens, 1880; Langdon, Madisonville pre¬ 
historic cemetery, 1881; Chudzinsky, Sur 
les trois encephales des Esquimaux, 1881; 
Virchow (1) in Beitrage zur Craniologie 
der Insulaner von der Westktiste Norda- 
merikas, 1889, (2) Crania Ethnica Amer¬ 
icana, 1892; ten Kate, Somatological 
Observations, 1892; Matthews and Wort- 
man, Human bones of Hemenway collec¬ 
tion, 1891; Boas, (1) Zur anthropologie 
der nordamerikanischen Indianer, 1895, 
(2) A. J. Stone’s measurements of natives 
of the N. W., 1901, (3) Anthropometri- 
cal observations on Mission Indians, 1896; 
Boas and Farrand, Physical characteris¬ 
tics of tribes of British Columbia, 1899; 
Allen, Crania from mounds of St. John’s 
r., Fla., 1896; Sergi, Crani esquimesi, 
1901; Duckworth, Contribution to Eskimo 
craniology, 1900; Hrdlicka, (1) An Es¬ 
kimo brain, 1901, (2) The crania of Tren¬ 


ton, N. J., 1902, (3) The Lansing skeleton, 

1903, (4) Notes on the Indians of Sonora, 

1904, (5) Contributions to physical anthro¬ 
pology of Cal., 1905; Spitzka, Contribu¬ 
tions to encephalic anatomy of races, 1902; 
Tocher, Note on measurements of Eskimo, 
1902; Matiegka, Schadel und Skelette 
von Santa Rosa, 1904. See Artificial 
head deformation , Physiology. (a. h.) 


Ana wan. See Annawan. 

Anpalagresses. A small tribe mentioned 
by Milfort (M6moire, 106, 1802) as resid¬ 
ing w. of Mississippi r. and near the Ka- 
kias (Cahokia) in 1782. 

Ancavistis. A division of the Faraon 
Apache.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,1864. 

Ancestor worship. See Mythology , Reli¬ 
gion. 

Anchguhlsn (‘ town they abandoned ’). 
The chief town of the Auk, situated op¬ 
posite the n. end of Douglas id., Alaska.— 
Swanton, field notes, 1904. 


Ak! an.—Swanton, op. cit.(‘lake town’). Ak’an.— 
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. AntcgExtsu.— 
Swanton, op. cit. 

Anchin. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Anchor stones. The native tribes n. of 
Mexico used bark and skin boats, dug- 
outs, and, in the extreme S. W. and on the 
California coast, balsas; and in the use 
of these frail craft for purposes of travel, 
transportation, fishing, hunting, and war¬ 
fare, the necessity for some means of 
anchorage was felt. In shallow waters 
with soft bottoms poles were often used; 
but of most general availability were 
stones that could be secured with a line 
and dropped from the vessel at any point. 
Commonly the stones thus used were 
simply bowlders or 
fragments of rock of 
proper weight, but 
in some cases the 
form was modified 
to facilitate attach¬ 
ment of the cord. 

A simple encir¬ 
cling groove, mere 
notches in the mar¬ 
gins, or a rude per- 
foration, sufficed 
for the purpose; the 
former treatment gave to the utensil the 
appearance of a grooved hammer. In¬ 
deed, it probably often happened that 
these anchor stones were used as hammers 
or as mauls or sledges for heavy work when 
occasion required. It is observed also 
that some specimens have served as mor¬ 
tars or anvil stones, and no doubt also for 
grindingand shapingimplementsof stone. 
Stones of all available varieties were used, 
and the weight, so far as observed, rarely 
exceeds 40 or 50 pounds. The grooves 



ANCHOR STONE, ILLINOIS RIVER 
(DIAMETER 12 IN.) 


BULL. 301 


ANCHU-ANGMALORTUK 


57 


or marginal notches were usually rudely 
pecked or chipped; but some show care¬ 
ful treatment, and in a number of cases a 
part or the whole of the surface of the 
stone has been worked 
down, probably for safety 
and convenience in han¬ 
dling, and in some cases 
as a result of the habit of 
reducing articles in com- anchor stone in use 
mon use to symmetrical by chippewa (121-2 
and somewhat artistic in long) 
shapes. Snyder records one case of the 
discovery of an anchor stone in an Indian 
grave. These stones are still used by In¬ 
dians as well as by white people. Consult 
Snyder in Smithson. Rep. 1887, 1889; Rau 
in Smithson. Cont., xxv, 1884. (w. h. h. ) 

Anchu. A Cochimi rancheria of San 
Juan de Londo mission, Lower Califor¬ 
nia.—Picolo in Stocklein, Neue Welt- 
Bott, no. 72, 36, 1792. 

Andacaminos (Span.: ‘wanderers/ 
probably referring to their roving char¬ 
acter). One of the tribes of w. Texas, 
some at least of whose people were neo¬ 
phytes of the mission of San Jose y San 
Miguel de Aguayo.—Texas State Ar¬ 
chives, Nov., 1790. 

Andeguale. A Niska town inhabited 
by two Chimmesyan families, the Lak- 
seel of the Raven clan and the Gitgigenih 
of the Wolf clan.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. 
W. Tribes, 48-49, 1895. 

Anderson Lake. A band of Upper Lil- 
looet on a lake of the same name in 
British Columbia (Can. Ind. Aff., 415, 
1898); pop. 66 in 1902. 

Anderson’s Town. A former Delaware 
village on the s. side of White r., about 
the present Anderson, Madison co., Ind. 
(Hough, map in Ind. Geol. Rep., 1883). 
Named from the principal chief of the 
Delawares of Indiana about 1810-20. 

Andesite. An eruptive rock, varying 
from light gray of several hues to black, 
belonging to the Tertiary and post-Ter¬ 
tiary lavas, and much used by the Indians 
for implements and utensils. It was 
shaped mainly by the pecking and grind¬ 
ing processes. Its distribution is very 
wide, especially in the W. (w. 11 . h.) 

Andiata. A former Huron village in 
Ontario.—Jes. Rel. of 1636, hi, 1858. 

Andiatae.—Jes. Rel. of 1637, 134, 1858. 

Andreafski. A Chnagmiut village on 
the n. bank of the Yukon, Alaska, 5 m. 
above the former redoubt of that name, 
for the murder of whose inmates in 1855 
the Russians wreaked such vengeance 
that the river natives never again molested 
the whites. Pop. 14 in 1880; 10 in 1890. 

Andreaffsky.—Dali, Alaska, 119, 1870. Andreaf- 
sky.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Andreiev- 
sky.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. An- 
dreivsky.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Andshankualth. The Lakmiut name of 
a Yamel band 011 a w. tributary of the 


Willamette, in Oregon.—Gatschet, Cala- 
pooya MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Andshimmampak. The Lakmiut name 
of a Yamel band on Yamhill cr., Ore¬ 
gon.—Gatschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Anegado (Span, ‘overflowed/ referring 
to the country). A tribe of which Cabeza 
de Vaca heard while in Texas in 1529-34. 
They lived not far from the Yguases. 
Anagados.—Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 66,1851. 
Anegados.—Ibid., 114, ed. 1871. Lanegados.— 
Ibid., 112. 

Anejue. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Anijue.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 459, 1874. 

Anektettim ( AnExte't’tim , ‘stony little 
hollow ’). A village of the Lytton band 
of Ntlakyapamuk, situate on the e. side 
of Fraser r., 3 m. above Lytton, British 
Columbia.—Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., 11 , 172, 1900. 

Anelo. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo settle¬ 
ment at Port Clarence, Alaska.—11th 
Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Anemuk. An Unaligmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Anvik r., Alaska.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 
12, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 25, 1871. 

Anepo (‘buffalo rising up.’—Hayden). 
A division of the Kainah tribe of the 
Siksika. 

A-ne'-po.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171, 1878 (said to be 
the name of an extinct animal). I-ni'-po-i.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264,1862. 

Angakok. A magician or conjurer 
among the Eskimo, the word for shaman 
in the eastern Eskimo dialects, now much 
used especially in American anthropo¬ 
logical literature. (a. f. c.) 

Angmagsalingmiut (‘ with-capelins peo¬ 
ple.’—Boas). A tribe of Eskimo on the 
e. coast of Greenland, between lat. 65° 
and 68°, inhabiting the fiords of Ang- 
magsalik, Sermilik, and Sermiligak. 
According to Rink the total population 
was 413 in 1886. A Danish mission and 
commercial station on Angmagsalic fiord 
is the most northerly inhabited place on 
the e. coast. Each Angmagsalingmiut 
village consists of a single house, which 
has room for 8 or 10 families. Holm 
(Ethnol. Skizz. af Anmagsalikerne, 1887) 
names 8 villages on the fiord, with a total 
population of 225. Notwithstanding their 
isolation the people, according to Nansen 
(First Crossing of Greenland, 1 ,211,1890), 
are among the most vigorous of the Es¬ 
kimo. 

Angmagsalink. — Rink in Geog. Blatt., VIII, 350, 
1886. 

Angmalook (Eskimo name). A species 
of salmon (Salmo nitidus) found in the 
lakes of Boothia.—Rep. U. S. Fish Com., 
122, 1872-73. 

Angmalortuk (‘the round one’). A 
Netehilirmiut winter village on the w. 
coast of Boothia bay, Canada. 

Angmalortoq. —Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 



58 


ANGNOVCH AK-ANNA WAN 


[b. a. e. 


Angnovchak. An Eskimo village in the 
Nushagak district, Alaska; pop. 16 in 1890. 

Angnovchamiut.—11th Census, Alaska, 164,1893. 

Angoutenc. A former Huron village 
situated between Wenrio and Ossossane, 
about 2 m. from the latter place, in On¬ 
tario. 

Angoutenc.—Jes. Rel. for 1638,34,1858. Ang8iens — 
Ibid., 1636, 116 (misprint). Ang8tenc.—Ibid., 35. 

Angun. A Hutsnuwu village n. of 
Hood bay, Admiralty id., Alaska; pop. 
420 in 1880. The greater part of the peo¬ 
ple have since removed to Killisnoo, a fish¬ 
ing village established by the whites. 

Angoon.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
in, pi. vii, 1903. Angun.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 
105, 1885. Augoon,— Petroff, Tenth Census, 

Alaska, 32,1884. 

Angwassag. A Chippewa village near 
St Charles, Saginaw co., Mich., with per¬ 
haps 50 inhabitants in 1894. 

Angwassag.—Smith quoted by Mason in Nat. Mus. 
Rep. 1902,385,1904. Angwasug.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 
1905 (sig. ‘snags floating in the water’). 

Angwusi. The Raven clan of the Ka- 
china phratry of the Hopi. 

Ang-wush-a. —Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi 
Ceremonies, 175, 1902 (Crow clan). Aiiwuci 
wiiiwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 
( wifiwu— ‘ clan ’). An-wu'-si wiin-wii. —Fewkes in 
Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 1894 (wiin-wii— 1 clan’). 
TJn-wu'-si.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 

Anibiminanisibiwininiwak. (‘ Pembina 
(cranberry) river men,’ from nibirriina 
‘high-bush cranberry/ sibiw ‘river,’ ini- 
niwak ‘men’). A Chippewa band liv¬ 
ing on Pembina r. in extreme n. Min¬ 
nesota and the adjacent part of Manitoba. 
They removed from Sandy lake, Minn., 
to that region about 1807, at the solici¬ 
tation of the Northwest Fur Company.— 
Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A. E. 

Chippewas of Pembena River.—Lewis, Travels, 
178, 1809. Pembina band.—Events in Ind. Hist., 
suppl., 613, 1841. 

Anicam. A Papago rancheria, probably 
in Pima co., s. Ariz.; pop. 96 in 1858.— 
Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858. 

Anilco. A village, probably Quapaw, 
presumably on the s. side of Arkansas r., 
and said to contain 5,000 people when 
visited by Be Soto’s army in 1542. 

Anicoyanque.—Biedma (1544) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 107, 1850. Anilco,—Garcilasso de la 
Vega, Florida, 201, 1723. Anileos.—Rafinesque, 
introd. Marshall, Ky., i, 34, 1824. Ilicos.—Ibid., 
36. Nilco.—Gentleman of Elvas (1557).quoted by 
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 184, 1850. 

Anilukhtakpak. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil¬ 
lage on Innoko r., Alaska; pop. 170 in 
1844. 

Anilukhtakkak.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. Am., 
map, 1844. 

Animas (Span, ‘souls’). An Apache 
settlement, apparently near Gila r., Ariz., 
in 1769.—Anzain Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
ii, 114, 1856. 

Animikite. An impure massive mineral, 
according to Dana (Text-book Mineral., 
420, 1888) supposed to be a silver anti- 
monide, found at Silver islet, L. Superior; 
derived from Animiki, a local place name 
which in the Chippewa and closely re¬ 


lated Algonquian dialects signifies ‘thun¬ 
der.’ (a. f. c.) 

Animism. See Religion. 

Animpayamo. A former village of the 
Kalindaruk, a division of the Costanoan 
Indians, connected with San Carlos mis¬ 
sion, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 
20, 1860. 

Aniyak. A village of the Nunatogmiut 
Eskimo on the Arctic coast just n. of 
Kotzebue sd., Alaska; pop. 25 in 1880. 

Aniyak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Ani- 
yakh.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 4,1884 ; 

Ankachagmiut. A local subdivision of 
the Chnagmiut Eskimo living on Yukon 
r. above Andreafski, Alaska. 

Angechag'emut. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
17, 1877. 

Ankachak. A Chnagmiut village, the 
home of the Ankachagmiut, on the right 
bank of the lower Yukon, Alaska; per¬ 
haps identical with Kenunimik. 
Ankachagamuk.—Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 
42d Cong., 1st sess., 25, 1871. Ankatchag-miout. — 
Zagoskin in Nouv, Ann. Voy., 5th ser., xxi, 
map, 1850. Ankatschagmiut.—Holmberg. Ethnol. 
Skizz., map, 1855. Ankochagamuk.—Post route 
map, 1903. 

Ankakehittan (‘people of the house in 
the middle of the valley’). A Kolusch- 
an division at Killisnoo, Alaska, belonging 
to the Raven clan; they are said to have 
separated from the Deshitan on account 
of some domestic trouble. 

Am-khark-hit-ton.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., Ill, pi. vii, 1903. Anq!a'ke hit tan.— 
Swanton, field notes. B. A. E., 1904. Nanch- 
agetan.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1886. Qla'ke- 
tan.—Swanton, op. cit. 

Anlik. A Kaviagmiut village on Go- 
lofnin bay, Alaska. 

Anlygmjuten.—Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 6,1855. 

Annaooka. A Tuscarora town in North 
Carolina at the beginning of the 18th cen¬ 
tury. 

Anna Ooka.— Lawson ( ca. 1701), Hist.Car., 383,1860. 

Annapolis. One of the 7 districts of the 
territory of the Micmac, as recognized 
by themselves. It includes the s. w. 
part of Nova Scotia.—Rand, First Mic¬ 
mac Reading Book, 81, 1875. 

Annas. An unidentified tribe men¬ 
tioned by Rivera (Diario y Derrotero, 
leg. 2,602, 1736) as living in s. Tex. 

Anna wan. A Wampanoag sachem, the 
chief captain and counselor of Philip, 
who under that chief’s father had won a 
reputation for prowess in wars with many 
different tribes. When King Philip fell 
Annawan rallied the warriors and safely 
extricated them from the swamp where 
they were surrounded. Afterward he 
ranged through the woods, harrying the 
settlers of Swansea and Plymouth, until 
Capt. Benjamin Church raised a new ex¬ 
pedition to hunt the Indians as long as 
there was one of them in the woods. Some 
were captured by Capt. Church’s Indian 
scouts, but Annawan eluded pursuit, never 
camping twice in the same spot. Having 
learned from a captive where the old 


BULL. 30] 


ANNE-ANTIQUITY 


50 


chief was, Church went with his Indian 
soldiers and only one white companion to 
capture him. When he reached the re¬ 
treat, a rocky hill in the middle of a 
swamp, he sent the captives forward to 
divert the attention of Annawan’s peo¬ 
ple. Church and his scouts then stole 
up, the noise they made being drowned 
by the sound of a pestle with which a 
woman was pounding corn, and jumped 
to the place where the arms were stacked. 
Annawan and his chief counselors, thus 
surprised and ignorant of the fewness 
of their assailants, gave themselves up 
and were bound. The fighting men, who 
were encamped near by, surrendered 
when they were told that the place was 
surrounded by English soldiers. Anna- 
wan brought the wampum belts and 
other regalia of King Philip, which he 
gave to Capt. Church as his conqueror, 
who had now overcome the last company 
that stood out against the English. An¬ 
nawan’s captor interceded to have his 
life spared, but the authorities at Ply¬ 
mouth, extracting from him a confession 
that he had put to death several English 
prisoners, some of them with torture, 
beheaded him in 1676 while Capt. Church 
was absent, (f. h.) 

Anne. See Queen Anne. 

Annugamok. A Nushagagmiut village 
on an e. tributary of Nushagak r., Alaska; 
pop. 214 in 1880. 

Annugannok.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 
1884. Annuganok.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. Anoogamok.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 
49, 1884. 

Annuities. See Agency System. 

Anoatok (‘ windy ’). An Ita settlement 
at C. Inglefield, n. Greenland, the north¬ 
ernmost human habitation, lat. 78° 31'. 

Anatoak.—Markham in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
129, 1866. Anoreto’.—Stein in Petermann’s Mit- 
theil., ix, map, 1902. Aunatok.—Kane, Arctic Ex- 
plor., ii, 107,1866. Rensselaer Harbor.—Ibid., 1,12. 

Anoginajin ( anog ‘on both sides,’ i- 
prefix, na- ‘with feet,’ zing ‘to stand 
erect’: ‘he stands on both sides’). A 
band of the Wakpaatonwedan division 
of the Mdewakanton, named from its 
chief. 

A-nog-i-na jin.—Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858. 
He-stands-both-sides. —Ibid. 

Anoixi. A village or division, probably 
of a southern Caddoan tribe, formerly 
situated near the Hot Springs country of 
Arkansas. Through this region De Soto’s 
troops passed in the winter of 1541 on 
their way toward the place where De 
Soto later met his death. See Gentleman 
of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., ii, 182, 1850. Cf. Annocchy, a syn¬ 
onym of Biloxi, (a. c. f. ) 

Anonatea. A Huron village situated a 
league from Ihonatiria, in Ontario in 
1637.—Jesuit Relation for 1637,143, 1858. 

Anenatea. —Ibid., 141. Anonatra.— Ibid., 166 (mis¬ 
print). 


Anoritok (‘without wind’). An Es¬ 
kimo settlement in e. Greenland, lat. 61° 
45'.—Meddelelser omGronland, xxv, 23, 
1902. 

Aneretek.— Ausland, 162, 1886. 

Anouala. According to Le Moyne (De 
Bry, map, 1591) a village in 1564 on a w. 
branch of St Johns r., Fla.‘, in the territory 
occupied generally by tribes of the Timu- 
quanan family. 

Novola.—Jeffreys, Am, Atlas, 24,1776. 

Anovok. A Magemiut Eskimo village 
on a small river n. of Kuskokwim bay, 
Alaska; pop. 15 in 1890. 

Annovokhamiut.—11th Census, Alaska, 109,1893. 

Anpanenikashika (‘those who became 
human beings by the aid of the elk ’). A 
Quapaw division. 

A n 'pa n e'nikaci'jpi.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
230,1897. Elk gens.— Ibid, 229. O n phu n enikaci^a.— 
Ibid. 

Ansactoy. A village, probably of a 
art of the Patwin division of the Cope- 
an family which formerly lived in Napa 
and Yolo cos., Cal. It concluded a treaty 
of peace with Gov. Vallejo in 1836.—Ban¬ 
croft, Hist. Cal., iv, 71, 1886. 

Ansaime. A village, said to have been 
Costanoan, in California; situated in the 
mountains 25 m. e. of the Mutsun, whom 
the inhabitants of this village attacked in 
1799-1800.—Engelhardt, Franciscans in 
Cal., 397, 1897. 

Absayme.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Nov. 23, 1860. 
Ansaxmas. —Ibid. 

Anskowinis ( AnskouHnls, ‘ narrow nose- 
bridge’). A local band of the Chey¬ 
enne, taking its name from a former 
chief, (j. m.) 

Antap. A former Chumashan village 
at the mill near San Pedro, Ventura co., 
Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Antigonishe. Mentioned as an Indian 
settlement on a river of the same name 
which rises in a lake near the coast of the 
Strait of Canso,in “theprovince and col¬ 
ony of New Scotland.” It was probably 
on or near the site of the present Antigo¬ 
nishe, in Antigonishe co., Nova Scotia, 
and perhaps belonged to the Micmac. 
Artigoniche.—Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 161, 1786. 

Antiquity. The antiquity of man on 
the American continent is a subject of 
interest to the student of the aborigines 
as well as to the historian of the human 
race, and the various problems that arise 
with respect to it in the region n. of Mex¬ 
ico are receiving much scientific atten¬ 
tion. As the tribes were without a sys¬ 
tem of writing available to scholars, 
knowledge of events that transpired be¬ 
fore the Columbian discovery is limited 
to the rather indefinite testimony fur¬ 
nished by tradition, by the more defi¬ 
nite but as yet fragmentary evidences of 
archeology, and by the internal evidence 
of general ethnological phenomena. The 
fact that the American Indians have ac- 


60 


ANTIQUITY 


[B. a. e. 


quired such marked physical characteris¬ 
tics as to be regarded as a separate race 
of very considerable homogeneity from 
Alaska to Patagonia, is regarded as indi¬ 
cating a long and complete separation 
from their parental peoples. Similarly, 
the existence in America of numerous cul¬ 
ture groups, measurably distinct one from 
another in language, social customs, reli¬ 
gion, technology, and esthetics, is thought 
to indicate a long and more or less exclu¬ 
sive occupancy of independent areas. 
But as a criterion of age the testimony 
thus furnished lacks definiteness, since to 
one mind it may signify a short time, 
while to another it may suggest a very 
long period. Native historical records of 
even the most advanced tribes are hardly 
more to be relied on than tradition, and 
they prove of little service in determin¬ 
ing the duration of occupancy of the con¬ 
tinent by the race, or even in tracing the 
more recent course of events connected 
with the historic peoples. No one can 
speak with assurance, on the authority of 
either tradition or history, of events dat¬ 
ing farther back than a few hundred years. 
Archeology, however, can furnish definite 
data with respect to antiquity; and, aided 
by geology and biology, this science is 
furnishing results of great value, although 
some of the greater problems encountered 
remain still unsolved, and must so remain 
indefinitely. During the first centuries 
of European occupancy of the continent, 
belief in the derivation of the native 
tribes from some Old World people in 
comparatively recent times was very gen¬ 
eral, and indeed the fallacy has not yet 
been entirely extinguished. This view 
was based on the apparently solid foun¬ 
dation of the Mosaic record and chronol¬ 
ogy as determined by Usher, and many 
works have been written in the attempt 
to determine the particular people from 
which the American tribes sprang. (See 
Popular Fallacies , and for various refer¬ 
ences consult Bancroft, Native Races, 
v, 1886; Winsor, Narrative and Critical 
History, i, 1884). The results of re¬ 
searches into the prehistoric archeology 
of the eastern continent during the last 
century, however, have cleared away 
the Usherian interpretation of events 
and established the fact of the great an¬ 
tiquity of man in the world. Later, in¬ 
vestigations in America were taken up, 
and the conclusion was reached that the 
course of primitive history had been 
about the same on both continents. Ob¬ 
servations that seemed to substantiate 
this conclusion were soon forthcoming 
and were readily accepted; but a more 
critical examination of the testimony 
shows its shortcomings and tends to hold 
final determinations in abeyance. It is 
clear that traces of early man are not so 


plentiful in America as in Europe, and 
investigations have proceeded with pain¬ 
ful slowness and much halting along the 
various lines of research. Attempts have 
been made to establish a chronology of 
events in various ways, but without defi¬ 
nite result. The magnitude of the work 
accomplished in the building of mounds 
and other earthworks has been empha¬ 
sized, the time requisite for the growth and 
decay upon these works of a succession of 
forests has been computed (see Mounds). 
The vast accumulations of midden depos¬ 
its and the fact that the strata composing 
them seem to indicate a succession of oc¬ 
cupancies by tribes of gradually advanc¬ 
ing culture, beginning in savagery and 
ending in w r ell-advanced barbarism, have 
impressed themselves on chronologists 
(see Shell-heaps). Striking physiographic 
mutations, such as changes of level and 
the consequent retreat or advance of the 
sea and changes in river courses since man 
began to dwell along their shores, have 
been carefully considered. Modifications 
of particular species of mollusks between 
the time of their first use on the shell- 
heap sites and the present time, and the 
development in one or more cases of new 
varieties, suggest very considerable antiq¬ 
uity. But the highest estimate of elapsed 
time based on these evidences does not 
exceed a few thousand years. Dali, after 
carefully weighing the evidence collected 
by himself in Alaska, reached the conclu¬ 
sion that the earliest midden deposits of 
the Aleutian ids. are probably as much 
as 3,000 years old. Going beyond this 
limit, the geological chronology must be 
appealed to, and we find no criteria by 
means of which calculations can be made 
in years until we reach the close of the 
Glacial epoch, which, according to those 
who venture to make estimates based on 
the erosion of river channels, was, in the 
states that border the St Lawrence basin, 
not more than 8,000 or 10,000 years ago 
(Winchell). Within this period, which 
in middle North America may properly 
be designated post-Glacial, there have 
been reported numerous traces of man so 
associated with the deposits of that time 
as to make them measurably valuable in 
chronological studies; but these evidences 
come within the province of the geologist 
rather than of the archeologist, and find¬ 
ings not subjected to critical examination 
by geologists having special training in 
the particular field may well be placed 
in the doubtful category. 

Post-Glacial rivers, in cutting their 
channels through the various deposits 
to their present level, have in some 
cases left a succession of flood-plain ter¬ 
races in which remains of man and his 
works are embedded. These terraces af¬ 
ford rather imperfect means of subdivid- 


DULL. 30] 


ANTIQUITY 


61 


ing post-Glacial time, but under discrimi¬ 
nating observation may be expected to 
furnish valuable data to the chronQlogist. 
The river terraces at Trenton, N. J., for ex¬ 
ample, formed largely of gravel accumu¬ 
lated at the period when the southern 
margin of the ice sheet was retreating 
northward beyond the Delaware valley, 
have been the subject of careful and pro¬ 
longed in vestigation. At the points where 
traces of man have been reported the sec¬ 
tion of these deposits shows generally be¬ 
neath the soil a few feet of superficial 
sands of uncertain age, passing down 
rather abruptly into a more or less uni¬ 
form deposit of coarse gravel that reaches 
in places a depth of 30 feet or more. 
On and near the surface are found vil¬ 
lage sites and other traces of occupancy 
by the Indian tribes. Beneath the soil, 
extending throughout the sand layers, 
stone implements and the refuse of 
implement-making occur; but the testi¬ 
mony of these finds can have little value 
in chronology, since the age of the de¬ 
posits inclosing them remains in doubt. 
From the Glacial gravels proper there 
has been recovered a single object to 
which weight as evidence of human pres¬ 
ence during their accumulation is at¬ 
tached; this is a tubular bone, regarded 
as part of a human femur and said to 
show glacial striae and traces of human 
workmanship, found at a depth of 21 feet. 
On this object the claim for the Glacial 
antiquity of man in the Delaware valley 
and on the Atlantic slope practically rests 
(Putnam, Mercer, Wright, Abbott, Hrd- 
licka, Holmes). Other finds e. of the 
Alleghenies lacking scientific verification 
furnish no reliable index of time. In 
a post-Glaeial terrace on the s. shore 
of Lake Ontario the remains of a hearth 
were discovered at a depth of 22 feet 
by Mr Tomlinson in digging a well, ap¬ 
parently indicating early aboriginal oc¬ 
cupancy of the St Lawrence basin (Gil¬ 
bert). From the Glacial or immediately 
post-Glacial deposits of Ohio a number 
of articles of human workmanship have 
been reported: A grooved ax from a 
well 22 feet beneath the surface, near 
New London (Claypole); a chipped ob¬ 
ject of waster type at Newcomerstown, 
at a depth of 16 feet in Glacial gravels 
(Wright, Holmes); chipped stones in 
gravels, one at Madison ville at a depth of 
8 feet, and another at Loveland at a depth 
of 30 feet (Metz, Putnam, Wright, 
Holmes). At Little Falls, Minn., flood- 
plain deposits of sand and gravel are 
found to contain many artificial objects of 
quartz. This flood plain is believed by 
some to have been finally abandoned by 
the Mississippi well back toward the close 
of the Glacial period in the valley 
(Brower, Winchell, Upham), but that 


these finds warrant definite conclusions 
as to time is seriously questioned by 
Chamberlin. In a Missouri r. bench near 
Lansing, Rans., portions of a human 
skeleton were recently found at a depth 
of 20 feet, but geologists are not agreed 
as to the age of the formation (see Lan¬ 
sing Man). At Clayton, Mo., in a de¬ 
posit believed to belong to the loess, at a 
depth of 14 feet, a well-finished grooved 
ax was found (Peterson). In the Basin 
Range region between the Rocky mts. and 
the Sierras, two discoveries that seem to 
bear on the antiquity of human occupancy 
have been reported: In a silt deposit in 
Walker r. valley, Nev., believed to be of 
Glacial age, an obsidian implement was 
obtained at a depth of 25 feet (McGee); 
at Nampa, Idaho, a clay image is reported 
to have been brought up by a sand pump 
from a depth of 320 feet in alternating 
beds of clay and quicksand underlying a 
lava flow of late Tertiary or early Glacial 
age (Wright, Emmons; see Nampa Im¬ 
age) . Questions are raised by a number 
of geologists respecting the value of these 
finds (McGee). The most extraordinary 
discoveries of human remains in connec¬ 
tion with geological formations are those 
from the auriferous gravels of California 
(Whitney, Holmes). These finds are nu¬ 
merous and are reported from many local¬ 
ities and from deposits covering a wide 
range of time. So convincing did the evi¬ 
dence appear to Whitney, state geologist 
of California from 1860 to 1874, that he 
accepted without hesitation the conclu¬ 
sion that man had occupied the auriferous 
gravel region during pre-Glacial time, and 
other students of the subject still regard 
the testimony as convincing; but consid¬ 
eration of the extraordinary nature of the 
conclusions dependent on this evidence 
should cause even the most sanguine ad¬ 
vocate of great human antiquity in Amer¬ 
ica to hesitate (see Calaveras Man ). Geolo¬ 
gists are practically agreed that the grav¬ 
els from which someat least of the relics of 
man are said to come are of Tertiary age. 
These relics represent a polished-stone 
culture corresponding closely to that of 
the modern tribes of the Pacific slope. 
Thus, man in America must have passed 
through the savage and well into the 
barbarous stage while the hypothetical 
earliest representative of the human race 
in the Old World, Pithecanthropus erectus 
of Dubois, was still running wild in the 
forests of Java, a half-regenerate Simian. 
Furthermore, the acceptance of the aurif¬ 
erous-gravel testimony makes it necessary 
to place the presence of man in America 
far back toward the beginning of the Ter¬ 
tiary age, a period to be reckoned not in 
tens but in hundreds of thousands of 
years. (See Smithson. Rep. for 1899.) 
These and other equally striking consid- 


62 


ANTIQUITY-ANVIK 


[b. a. e. 


erations suggest the wisdom of formulating 
conclusions with the utmost caution. 

Caves and rock shelters representing 
various periods and offering dwelling 
places to the tribes that have come and 
gone, may reasonably be expected to con¬ 
tain traces of the peoples of all periods of 
occupancy; but the deposits forming their 
floors, with few exceptions, have not 
been very fully examined, and up to the 
present time have furnished no very 
tangible evidence of the presence of men 
beyond the limited period of the Ameri¬ 
can Indian as known to us. The Uni¬ 
versity of California has conducted exca¬ 
vations in a cave in the n. part of the 
state, and the discovery of bones that 
appear to have been shaped by human 
hands, associated with fossil fauna that 
probably represent early Glacial times, 
has been reported (Sinclair); but the re¬ 
sult is not decisive. The apparent ab¬ 
sence or dearth of ancient human remains 
in the caves of the country furnishes one 
of the strongest reasons for critically ex¬ 
amining all testimony bearing on antiq¬ 
uity about which reasonable doubt can 
be raised. It is incredible that primitive 
man should have inhabited a country of 
caverns for ages without resorting at 
some period to their hospitable shelter; 
but research in this field is hardly begun, 
and evidence of a more conclusive nature 
may yet be forthcoming. 

In view of the extent of the researches 
carried on in various fields with the object 
of adducing evidence on which to base a 
scheme of human chronology in America, 
decisive results are surprisingly meager, 
and the finds so far made, reputed to 
represent a vast period of time stretching 
forward from the middle Tertiary to the 
present, are characterized by so many de¬ 
fects of observation and record and so 
many apparent incongruities, biological, 
geological, and cultural, that the task of 
the chronologist is still largely before him. 

For archeological investigations and 
scientific discussion relating to the an¬ 
tiquity of man within the limits of the 
United States, see Abbott (1) in Proc. 
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,xxm, 1888, (2) in 
Proc. A. A. A. S., xxxvii, 1888; Allen, 
Prehist. World, 1885; Bancroft, Native 
Races, iv, 1882; Becker in Bull. Geol. 
Soc. Am., ii, 1891; Blake in Jour. Geol., 
vii, no. 7, 1899; Brower, Memoirs, v, 
1902; Chamberlin (1) in Jour. Geol., x, 
no. 7, 1902, (2) in The Dial, 1892; Clay- 
pole in Am. Geol., xvm, 1896; Dali (1) in 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1899, (2) in 
Cont. N. Am. Ethnol., i, 1877; Emmons 
in Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxiv, 
1889; Farrand, Basis of Am. Hist., 1904; 
Foster, Prehist. Races, 1878; Fowke, 
Archeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; Gilbert in Am. 
Anthrop., n, 1889; Haynes in Winsor, 


Narr. and Crit. Hist. Am., i, 1889; 
Holmes (1) in Rep. Smithson. Inst. 1899, 
1901, (2) ibid. 1902, 1903, (3) in Jour. 
Geol., i, nos. 1, 2, 1893, (4) in Am. Geol., 
xi, no. 4, 1893, (5) in Science, Nov. 25, 
1892, and Jan. 25, 1893; Hrdlicka (1) in 
Am. Anthrop., n. s., v, no. 2, 1903, (2) in 
Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvi,. 1902; 
Kummel in Proc. A. A. A. S'., xlvi, 1897; 
Lapham in Smithson. Cont., vn, 1855; 
Lewis, ibid., xxix, 1880; McGee (1) in 
Am. Anthrop., ii, no. 4, 1889; v, no. 4, 
1892; vi, no. 1, 1893, (2) in Pop. Sci. 
Mo., Nov., 1888, (3) in Am. Antiq., 
xiii, no. 7, 1891; Mercer (1) in Proc. A. 
A. A. S., xlvi, 1897, (2) in Am. Nat., 
xxvn, 1893, (3) in Pubs. Univ. of Pa., 
vi, 1897; Morse in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
xxxiii, 1884; Munro, Archaeol. and False 
Antiq., 1905; Nadaillac, Prehist. America, 
1884; Peterson in Records of Past, ii, pt. 
1,1903; Powell in The Forum, 1890; Put¬ 
nam (1) in Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 
xxi, 1881—83; xxm, 1885-88, (2) in Pea¬ 
body Mus. Reps., ix-xxxvii, 1876-1904, 
(3) in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlvi, 1897, (4) 
in Rep. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 1899, 1900; 
Salisbury (1) in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlvi, 
1897, (2) in Science, Dec. 31,1897; Shaler 
in Peabody Mus. Rep., ii, no. 1, 1877; 
Sinclair ‘in Pub. Univ. Cal., ii, no. 1, 
1904; Skertchley in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 
xvii, 1888; Squier and Davis, Smithson. 
Cont., i, 1848; Thomas (1) Hist. N. Am., 
ii, 1904, (2) in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 1894, 
(3) Introd. Study of N. Am. Arch., 1903; 
Upham in Science, Aug., 1902; Whitney, 
Auriferous Gravels of the Sierra Nevada, 
1879; Williston in Science, Aug., 1902; 
Winchell (1) in Am. Geol., Sept., 1902, 
(2) in Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., xiv, 1903; 
Wright, (1) Man and the Glacial Period, 
1895, (2) Ice Age, 1889, (3) in Pop. Sci. 
Mo., May, 1893, (4) in Proc. Boston Soc. 
Nat. Hist., xxm, 1888, (5) in Rec. of the 
Past, ii, 1903; iv, 1905; Wyman in Mem. 
Peabody Acad. Sci., i, no. 4, 1875. 

The progress of opinion and research 
relating to the origin, antiquity, and early 
history of the American tribes is recorded 
in a vast body of literature fully cited, 
until within recent years, by Bancroft in 
Native Races, iv, 1882, and Haynes in 
Winsor’s Narrative and Critical History, 
i, 1884. (w. h. h.) 

Antler. See Bone-work. 

Anu. The Red-ant clan of the Ala 
(Horn) phratry of the Hopi. 

An-namu.—Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 37, 1905. 
A'-nii wiin-wu.—Fewkes in Am. Antnrop., vii, 
401,1894 (mm-«m=‘clan’). 

Anuenes ( Anue'nes ). A gens of the 
Nanaimo.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes, 32, 1889. 

Anvik. A Kaiyuhkhotana village at 
the junction of Anvik and Yukon rs., 
Alaska. Pop. in 1844, 120; in 1880, 95; 


BULL. 30] 


ANVILS-APACHE 


63 


in 1890, 100 natives and 91 whites; in 
1900, 166. An Episcopal mission and 
school were established there in 1887. 

Anvic. —Whymper, Alaska, 265, 1869. Anvig.— 
Zagoskin quoted by Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 
37, 1884. Anvik.—Petroff, ibid., 12. 

Anvils. Primitive workers in metal 
were dependent on anvil stones in shap¬ 
ing their implements, utensils, and orna¬ 
ments. Anvils were probably not espe¬ 
cially shaped for the purpose, but con¬ 
sisted of bowlders or other natural masses 
of stone, fixed or movable, selected ac¬ 
cording to their fitness for the particular 
purpose for which they were employed. 
Few of these utensils have been identi¬ 
fied, however, and the types most utilized 
by the tribes are left to conjecture. The 
worker in stone also sometimes used a 
solid rock body on which to break and 
roughly shape masses of flint and other 
stone. These are found on many sites 
where stone was quarried and wholly or 
partially worked into shape, the upper 
surface showing the marks of rough usage, 
while fragments of stone left by the work¬ 
men are scattered about, (w. h. h.) 

Anyukwinu. A ruined pueblo of the 
Jemez, situated n. of the present Jemez 
pueblo, n. central N. Mex. 

Anu-quil-i-gui.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, pt. 2, 207, 1892. Anyukwinu.—Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895. 

Aogitunai ( z Ao-gitAna/-i, ‘Masset inlet 
gituns’). A Masset subdivision residing 
in the town of Yaku, opposite North id., 
and deriving their name from Masset in¬ 
let, Queen Charlotte ids., British Colum¬ 
bia.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905. 

Aogni. A former Chumashan village in 
Venturaco., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
July 24, 1863. 

Aokeawai (^Ao-qe'awa-i, ‘those born in 
the inlet’). A division of the Raven 
clan of the Skittagetan family which re¬ 
ceived its name from Masset inlet, Queen 
Charlotte ids., British Columbia, where 
these people formerly lived. Part of 
them, at least, were settled for a time at 
Dadens, whence all finally went to Alaska. 
There were two subdivisions: Hling- 
wainaashadai and Taolnaashadai.—Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 272, 1905. 

Kao-ke'-owai.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 22, 
1898. Keo Haade.—Harrison in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can., sec. II, 125, 1895. 

Aondironon. A branch of the Neutrals 
whose territory bordered on that of the 
Huron in w. Ontario. In 1648, owing to 
an alleged breach of neutrality, the chief 
town of this tribe was sacked by 300 Iro¬ 
quois, mainly Seneca, who killed a large 
number of its inhabitants and carried 
away many others in captivity.—Jes. 
Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858. 

Ahondihronnons.—Jes. Rel. for 1656, 34,1858. Aon- 
dironnons.—Jes. Rel. for 1648, 49, 1858. Ondi- 
ronon.—Ibid., in, index, 1858. 

Aopomufe. A former Maricopa ranche- 
ria on Rio Gila, s. w. Arizona.— Sedel- 


mair (1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Aoreachic (‘where there is mountain 
cedar ’). A small rancheria of the Tara- 
11 um are, not far from Norogachic, Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico. Also called Agorichic; 
distinct from Aboreachic.—Lumholtz, 
inf n; 1894. 

Aostlanlnagai {*Ao shlan Inaga'i, ‘Mas¬ 
set inlet rear-town people’). A local 
subdivision of the Raven clan of the 
Skittagetan family. Masset inlet gave 
them the separate name.—Swan ton, Cont. 
Haida, 271, 1905. 

Stl’EngE la' nas.— Boas, T2th Rep. N. W Tribes, 
22, 1898. 

Aoyakulnagai ( f, Ao yd' ku Inaga'i, ‘mid¬ 
dle town people of Masset inlet’). A 
branch of the Yakulanas division of the 
Raven clan of the Skittagetan family, 
which received the name from Masset 
inlet, where its town stood.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 271, 1905. 

G-anyakoilnagai.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 
23,1898 (probably amisprintfor Gauyakoilnagai, 
its name in the Skidegate dialect). Ou yaku 
Ilnige.— Harrison in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 125, 
1895. 

Apache (probably from dpachu , ‘en¬ 
emy,’ the Zuni name for the Navaho, 
who were designated “Apaches de Na- 
baju” by the early Spaniards in New 
Mexico). A number of tribes forming 
the most southerly group of the Athapas¬ 
can family. The name has been applied 
also to some unrelated Yuman tribes, as 
the Apache Mohave (Yavapai) and 
Apache Yuma. The Apache call them¬ 
selves N’de, Dine, Tlnde, or Inde, ‘people.’ 
(See Athapascan .) 

They were evidently not so numerous 
about the beginning of the 17th century 
as in recent times, their numbers appar¬ 
ently having been increased by captives 
from other tribes, particularly the Pue¬ 
blos, Pima, Papago, and other peaceful 
Indians, as well as from the settle¬ 
ments of northern Mexico that were 
gradually established within the territory 
raided by them, although recent meas¬ 
urements by Hrdlicka seem to indicate 
unusual freedom from foreign admix¬ 
ture. They were first mentioned as 
Apaches by Onate in 1598, although Cor¬ 
onado, in 1541, met the Querechos (the 
Vaqueros of Benavides, and probably the 
Jicarillas and Mescaleros of modern 
times) on the plains of e. N. Mex. and w. 
Tex.; but there is no evidence that the 
Apache reached so far w. as Arizona until 
after the middle of the 16th century. 
From the time of the Spanish colonization 
of New Mexico until within twenty years 
they have been noted for their warlike 
disposition, raiding white and Indian 
settlements alike, extending their dep¬ 
redations as far southward as Jalisco, 
Mexico. No group of tribes has caused 


64 


APACHE 


[B. a. e. 


greater confusion to writers, from the fact 
that the popular names of the tribes are 
derived from some local or temporary hab¬ 
itat, owing to their shifting propensities, 
or were given by the Spaniards on ac¬ 
count of some tribal characteristic; hence 
some of the common names of apparently 
different Apache tribes or bands are syn¬ 
onymous, or practically so; again, as em¬ 
ployed by some writers, a name may 
include much more or much less than 
when employed by others. Although 
most of the Apache have been hostile 
since they have been known to history, 
the most serious modern outbreaks have 
been attributed to mismanagement on the 
part of civil authorities. The most im¬ 
portant recent hostilities were those of the 
Chiricahua under Cochise, and later Vic- 
torio, who, together with 500 Mimbrenos, 
Mogollones, and Mescaleros, were as¬ 
signed, about 1870, to the Ojo Caliente 
reserve in w. N. Mex. Cochise, who had 
repeatedly refused to be confined within 
reservation limits, fled with his band, but 
returned in 1871, at which time 1,200 to 
1,900 Apache were on the reservation. 
Complaints from neighboring settlers 
caused their removal to Tularosa, 60 m. 
to the n. w., but 1,000 fled to the Mesca- 
lero reserve on Pecos r., while Cochise 
went out on another raid. Efforts of the 
military agent in 1873 to compel the res¬ 
toration of some stolen cattle caused the 
rest, numbering 700, again to decamp, 
but they were soon captured. In com¬ 
pliance with the wishes of the Indians, 
they were returned to Ojo Caliente in 
1874. Soon afterward Cochise died, and 
the Indians began to show such interest 
in agriculture that by 1875 there were 
1,700 Apache at Ojo Caliente, and no 
depredations were reported. In the fol¬ 
lowing year the Chiricahua res. in Arizona 
was abolished, and 325 of the Indians 
were removed to the San Carlos agency; 
others joined their kindred at Ojo 
Caliente, while some either remained 
on the mountains of their old reserva¬ 
tion or fled across the Mexican border. 
This removal of Indians from their an¬ 
cestral homes was in pursuance of a 
policy of concentration, which was tested 
in the Chiricahua removal in Arizona. In 
April, 1877, Geronimo and other chiefs, 
with the remnant of the band left on the 
old reservation, and evidently the Mexi¬ 
can refugees, began depredations in s. 
Arizona and n. Chihuahua, but in May 
433 were captured and returned to San 
Carlos. At the same time the policy was 
applied to the Ojo Caliente Apache of 
New Mexico, who were making good 
progress in civilized pursuits; but when 
the plan was put in action only 450 of 
2,000 Indians were found, the remainder 
forming into predatory bands under Vic- 


torio. In September 300 Chiricahua, 
mainly of the Ojo Caliente band, escaped 
from San Carlos, but surrendered after 
many engagements. These were returned 
to Ojo Caliente, but they soon ran off 
again. In February, 1878, Victorio sur¬ 
rendered in the hope that he and his 
people might remain on their former 
reservation, but another attempt was 
made to force the Indians to go to San 
Carlos, with the same result. In June 
the fugitives again appeared at the Mes- 
calero agency, and arrangements were at 
last made for them to settle there; but, as 
the local authorities found indictments 
against Victorio and others, charging 
them with murder and robbery, this 
chief, with his few immediate followers 
and some Mescaleros, fled from the reser¬ 
vation and resumed marauding. A call 
was made for an increased force of mili¬ 
tary, but in the skirmishes in which they 
were engaged the Chiricahua met with 
remarkable success, while 70 settlers were 
murdered during a single raid. Victorio 
was joined before April, 1880, by 350 
Mescaleros and Chiricahua refugees from 
Mexico, and the repeated raids which 
followed struck terror to the inhabitants 
of New Mexico, Arizona, and Chihuahua. 
On April 13 1,000 troops arrived, and 
their number was later greatly aug¬ 
mented. Victorio’s band was frequently 
encountered by superior forces, and 
although supported during most of the 
time by only 250 or 300 fighting men, 
this warrior usually inflicted severer 
punishment than he suffered. In these 
raids 200 citizens of New Mexico, and as 
many more of Mexico, were killed. At 
one time the band was virtually sur¬ 
rounded by a force of more than 2,000 
cavalry and several hundred Indian 
scouts, but Victorio eluded capture and 
fled across the Mexican border, where 
he continued his bloody campaign. 
Pressed on both sides of the international 
boundary, and at times harassed by 
United States and Mexican troops com¬ 
bined, Victorio finally suffered severe 
losses and his band became divided. In 
October, 1880, Mexican troops encoun¬ 
tered Victorio’s party, comprising 100 
warriors, with 400 women and children, 
at Tres Castillos; the Indians were sur¬ 
rounded and attacked in the evening, the 
fight continuing throughout the night; 
in the morning the ammunition of the 
Indians became exhausted, but although 
rapidly losing strength, the remnant re¬ 
fused to surrender until Victorio, who 
had been wounded several times, finally 
fell dead. This disaster to the Indians 
did not quell their hostility. Victorio 
was succeeded by Nana, who collected 
the divided force, received reenforce¬ 
ments from the Mescaleros and the San 


BULL. 30] 


APACHE 


65 


Carlos Chiricahua, and between July, 
1881, and April, 1882, continued the raids 
across the border until he was again 
driven back in Chihuahua. While these 
hostilities were in progress in New Mex¬ 
ico and Chihuahua the Chiricahua of San 
Carlos were striking terror to the settle¬ 
ments of Arizona. In 1880 Juh and Ge- 
ronimo w'ith 108 followers were captured 
and returned to San Carlos. In 1881 
trouble arose among the White Moun¬ 
tain Coyoteros on Cibicu cr., owing to a 
medicine-man named Nakaidoklini (q. v.), 
who pretended power to revive the dead. 
After paying him liberally for his services, 
his adherents awaited the resurrection 
until August, when Nakaidoklini avowed 
that his incantations failed because of the 
presence of whites. Since affairs were as¬ 
suming a serious aspect, the arrest of the 
prophet was ordered; he surrendered 
quietly, but as the troops were making 
camp the scouts and other Indians opened 
fire on them. After a sharp fight Nakai¬ 
doklini was killed and his adherents w ? ere 
repulsed. Skirmishes continued the next 
day, but the troops were reenforced, and 
the Indians soon surrendered in small 
bands. Two chiefs, known as George 
and Bonito, who had not been engaged 
in the White Mountain troubles, surren¬ 
dered to Gen. Wilcox on Sept. 25 at 
Camp Thomas, but were paroled. On 
Sept. 30 Col. Riddle was sent to bring 
these chiefs and their bands back to 
Camp Thomas, but they became alarmed 
and fled to the Chiricahua, 74 of whom 
left the reserve, and, crossing the Mexi¬ 
can border, took refuge with the late 
Victorio’s band in Chihuahua. In the 
same year Nana made one of his bloody 
raids across the line, and in September 
Juh and Nahchi, with a party of Chirica¬ 
hua, again fled from the reservation, and 
were forced by the troops into Mexico, 
where, in April, 1882, they were joined 
by Geronimo and the rest of the hostile 
Chiricahua of San Carlos, with Loco and 
his Ojo Caliente band. The depredations 
committed in n. Chihuahua under Geron¬ 
imo and other leaders were perhaps even 
more serious than those within the limits 
of the United States. In March, 1883, 
Chato with 26 followers made a dash into 
New Mexico, murdering a dozen persons. 
Meanwhile the white settlers on the 
upper Gila consumed so much of the 
water of that stream as to threaten the 
Indian crops; then coal was discovered 
on the reservation, which brought an in¬ 
flux of miners, and an investigation by 
the Federal grand jury of Arizona on Oct. 
24, 1882, charged the mismanagement of 
Indian affairs on San Carlos res. to local 
civil authorities. 

Gen. G. II. Crook having been reassigned 
to the command, in 1882 induced about 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-5 


1,500 of the hostiles to return to the reser¬ 
vation and subsist by their own exertions. 
The others, about three-fourths of the 
tribe, refused to settle down to reservation 
life and repeatedly went on the warpath; 
when promptly followed by Crook they 
would surrender and agree to peace, but 
would soon break their promises. To this 
officer had been assigned the task of bring¬ 
ing the raiding Apache to terms in co¬ 
operating with the Mexican trQops of 
Sonora and Chihuahua. In May, 1883, 
Crook crossed the boundary to the head¬ 
waters of the Rio Yaqui with 50 troops 
and 163 Apache scouts; on the 13th the 
camp of Chato and Bonito was discovered 
and attacked with some loss to the Indians. 
Through two captives employed as emis¬ 
saries, communication was soon had with 
the others, and by May 29 354 Chiri¬ 
cahua had surrendered. On July 7 the 
War Department assumed police control 
of the San Carlos res., and on Sept. 1 
the Apache were placed under the sole 
charge of Crook, who began to train them 
in the w r ays of civilization, with such suc¬ 
cess that in 1884 over 4,000 tons of grain, 
vegetables, and fruits were harvested. 
In Feb., 1885, Crook’s powers were cur¬ 
tailed, an act that led to conflict of au¬ 
thority between the civil and military offi¬ 
cers, and before matters could be adjusted 
half the Chiricahua left the reservation in 
May and fled to their favorite haunts. 
Troops and Apache scouts were again sent 
forward, and many skirmishes took place, 
but the Indians were wary, and again 
Arizona and New Mexico w r ere thrown 
into a state of excitement and dread by 
raids across the American border, re¬ 
sulting in the murder of 73 white people 
and many friendly Apache. In Jan., 
1886, the American camp under Capt. 
Crawford was attacked through misun¬ 
derstanding by Mexican irregular Indian 
troops, resulting in Crawford’s death. 
By the following March the Apache 
became tired of the war and asked for a 
parley, which Crook granted as formerly, 
but before the time for the actual sur¬ 
render of the entire force arrived the 
wily Geronimo changed his mind and 
with his immediate band again fled be¬ 
yond reach. His escape led to censure of 
Crook’s policy; he was consequently re¬ 
lieved at his own request in April, and 
to Gen. Nelson A. Miles w r as assigned 
the completion of the task. Geronimo 
and his band finally surrendered Sept. 4, 
1886, and with numerous friendly Apache 
were sent to Florida as prisoners. They 
were later taken to Mt Vernon, Ala., 
thence to Ft Sill, Okla., where they have 
made progress toward civilization. Some 
of the hostiles were never captured, but 
remained in the mountains, and as late 
as Nov., 1900, manifested their hostile 


APACHE 


[b. a. e. 


66 


character by an attack on Mormon set¬ 
tlers in Chihuahua. Apache hostility in 
Arizona and New Mexico, however, has 
entirely ceased. (See Hodge in Encyc. 
Brit., “Indians,” 1902.) 

Being a nomadic people, the Apache 
practised agriculture only to a limited ex¬ 
tent before their permanent establishment 
on reservations. They subsisted chiefly 
on the products of the chase and on roots 
(especially that of the maguey) and ber¬ 
ries. Although fish and bear were found 
in abundance in their country they were 
not eaten, being tabued as food. They 
had few arts, but the women attained 
high skill in making baskets. Their 
dwellings were shelters of brush, which 
were easily erected by the women and 
were well adapted to their arid environ¬ 
ment and constant shifting. In phys¬ 
ical appearance the Apache vary greatly, 
but are rather above the medium 
height. They are good talkers, are not 
readily deceived, and are honest in pro¬ 
tecting property placed in their care, 
although they formerly obtained their 
chief support from plunder seized in 
their forays. 

The Apache are divided into a num¬ 
ber of tribal groups which have been so 
differently named and defined that it 
is sometimes difficult to determine to 
which branch writers refer. The most 
commonly accepted divisions are the 
Querechos or Vaqueros, consisting of the 
Mescaleros, Jicarillas, Faraones, Llaneros, 
and probably the Lipan; the Chiricahua; 
the Pinalenos; theCoyoteros, comprising 
the White Mountain and Pinal divi¬ 
sions; the Arivaipa; the Gila Apache, 
including the Gilenos, Mimbrenos, and 
Mogollones; andtheTontos. The present 
official designation of the divisions, with 
their population in 1903, is as follows: 
White Mountain Apache (comprising the 
Arivaipa, Tsiltaden or Chilion, Chirica¬ 
hua, Coyoteros, Mimbrenos, Mogollones, 
Finals, “San Carlos,” and Tontos), under 
Ft Apache agency, 2,058; Apache con¬ 
sisting of the same divisions as above, 
under San Carlos agency, 2,275; Apache 
at Angora, Ariz., 38; Jicarillas under 
school superintendent in New Mexico, 
782; Mescaleros under Mescalero agency, 
N. Mex., 464; Chiricahua at Ft Sill, 
Okla., 298; Kiowa Apache, under Kiowa 
agency, Okla., 156. Besides these there 
Avere 19 Lipan in n. av. Chihuahua, some 
of the survi\ r ors of a tribe which, owing 
to their hostility, was almost destroyed, 
chiefly by Mexican Kickapoo cooperating 
with Mexican troops. This remnant was 
removed from Zaragoza, Coahuila, to 
Chihuahua in Oct., 1903, and a year later 
were brought to the U. S. and placed 
under the Mescalero agency in New Mex¬ 
ico. Until 1904 there lived with the 


Apache of Arizona a number of Indians 
of Yuman stock, particularly “Mohave 
Apache,” or Yavapai, but these are now 
mostly established at old Camp McDow¬ 
ell. The forays and conquests of the 
Apache resulted in the absorption of a 
large foreign element, Piman, Yuman, 
and Spanish, although captives were 
treated with disrespect and marriages 
with them broke clan ties. The Pinal 
Coyoteros, and evidently also the Jica¬ 
rillas, had some admixture of Pueblo 
blood. The Tontos (q. v.) were largely 
of mixed blood according to Corbusier, 
but Hrdlicka’s observations show them 
to be pure Apache. Tribes or bands 
known- or supposed to be Apache, but 
not otherwise identifiable, are the follow¬ 
ing: Alacranes, Animas, Bissarhar, Cha- 
falote, Cocoyes, Colina, Doestoe, Goolkiz- 
zen, Janos, Jocomes, Tejua, Tremblers, 
Zillgaw. 

The Apache are divided into many 
clans which, however, are not totemic 
and they usually take their names from 
the natural features of localities, never 
from animals. Like clans of different 
Apache tribes recognize their affiliation. 
The Juniper clan found by Bourke among 
the White Mountain Apache at San Carlos 
agency and Ft Apache (Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 112, 1890), called by them Yogo- 
yekayden, reappears as Chokonni among 
the Chiricahua and as Yagoyecayn among 
the Pinal Coyoteros. The White Moun¬ 
tain Apache have a clan called Destchin 
(Red Paint), which is correlated to the 
Chie clan of the Chiricahua and appears 
to have separated from the Satchin (Red 
Rock) clan, both being represented among 
the Navaho by the Dhestshini (Red 
Streak). The Carrizo clan, Klokada- 
kaydn, of San Carlos agency and Ft 
Apache is the Klugaducayn (Arrow 
Reed) of the Pinal Coyoteros. Tutzose, 
the Water clan of the Pinal Coyoteros, 
is found also among the White Moun¬ 
tain Apache, who have a Walnut clan, 
called Chiltneyadnaye, as the Pinal Co- 
yotero have one called Chisnedinadi- 
naye. Natootzuzn (Point of Mountain), a 
clan at San Carlos agency, corresponds to 
Nagosugn, a Pinal Coyotero clan. Tizses- 
sinaye (Little Cottonwood Jungle of the 
former) seems to have divided into the 
clans Titsessinaye of the Pinal Coyotero, 
of the same signification, and Destcheti- 
naye (Tree in a Spring of Water). Kay- 
hatin is the name of the Willow clan 
among both, and the Navaho have one, 
called Kai. Tzisequittzillan (Twin Peaks) 
of the White Mountain Apache, Tziltadin 
(Mountain Slope) of the Pinal Coyotero, 
and Navaho Dsilanothilni (Encircled 
Mountain), and Tsayiskidhni (Sage-brush 
Hill), are supposed by Bourke to have 
had a common origin. And there are 


BULL. 30] 


APACHES DEL PERRILLO-APALACHEE 


67 


many others traceable in the various 
Apache divisions and in the Navaho. 
Ai-a'-ta. —Henshaw, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 
(Panamint name). Apacci.— Clavijero, Storia 

della Cal., I, 29, 1789. Apachas.— Hardy, Trav. in 
Mex., 438, 1829. Apache.— Benavides, Memorial, 
50, 1630. Apacherian,— Bigelowin Pac. R.R. Rep., 
IV, 7, 1856. Apaches. —Onate (1598) in Doc. IntkL, 
xvi, 114, 1871. Apachis.— Humboldt, Kingd. N. 
Sp., ii, 271, 1811. Apachu.— N. Y. Nation, xlii, 
397, May 13, 1886. Apaci. —Clavigero, Storia della 
Cal., map, 1789. Apades.— Onate (1598) in Doc. 
In6d., xvi, 114, 303, 1871 (misprint). Apaehe.— 
Beckwith in Pac. R. R. Rep., n, 28, 1855 (mis- 
print). A-pa-huache. —Thomas, Yuma vocab., 
B. A. E., 1868 (Yuma name). Apatch.— Latham 
(1853) in Proc. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., VI, 74, 1854. 
Apatches.— Derbanne (1717) in Margry, D6c., vi, 
206, 1886. Apats. —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Seri 
name). Apatschees.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, v, 
641,1882. Apatsh.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 105, 1856. Apedes. —Columbus Mem. Vol., 
155, 1893 (misprint). Apiches. —Onate (1599) in 
Doc. In6d., xvi, 308, 1871 (misprint). Apichi. — 
Espejo misquoted by Bourke, On the Border 
with Crook, 122, 1891. Apoches.— Perea, Segunda 
Rel., 4, 1633. Appachees.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 593, 
1837. Appaches.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 110,1806. 
Appeches. —Schermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., ii, 
29, 1814. A-pwa'-tci. —Dorsey, MS. Kansa vocab., 
B. A. E., 1883 (Kansaform). Atokuwe. —ten Kate, 
Synonymie, 10, 1884 (Kiowa name). Awatch. — 
Ibid., 8 (Ute name). Awatche. —Ibid. Awp. — 
Grossman, Pima and Papago vocab., B. A. E., 1871 
(Pima name). Chah'-shm.— Whipple, Pac. R. R. 
Rep., ill, pt. 3, 89, 1856 (Santo Domingo Keres 
name). Chishye'. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 
1895(Lagunaname). Ha-ma-kaba-mitekwa-dig. — 
Corbusier, MS. Mojave vocab., B. A. E., 1885 
(Mohavename: ‘faraway Mohaves’). H’iwana. — 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895(Taos name: ‘filthy 
people’). Igihua'-a. —Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., m, 86, 
1886 (Havasupai name). Inde. —Bourke in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 1889 (own name!. Jaro- 
soma.— Kino (1700) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th ser., I, 
346, 1856 (Pima name). Mountain Comanche. — 
Yoakum, Hist. Texas, I, map, 1855. Muxtsuhin- 
tan. —Gatschet, MS. Cheyenne vocab., B. A. E. 
(Cheyenne name). N’day. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, in, 175, 1890 (original tribal name). 
’Nde.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 196, 1885 (a 
form of Tinneh: ‘ people’). N’De. —Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 259, 1890. Oop. —ten Kate, 
Reizen in N. Am.. 26,1885 (Papago name). Op.— 
Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., iii, 86, 1886 (Pima name). 
Orp.— Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 94, 1856 
(Pima name). Paches. —Parker, Jour., 32, 1840. 
Patchisagi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS., B. A. E. 
(Shawnee name). Petchisagi. — Ibid, (alterna¬ 
tive Shawnee form). Poanin. — Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia and Isleta name). 
P'onin. — Gatschet, MS. Isleta vocab. (Isleta 
name). Red Apaches. —Vargas (1692) transliter¬ 
ated by Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 371, 1869. 
Shis-Inday. —Cremony, Life among Apaches, 243, 
1868 (‘men of the woods’: so called by them¬ 
selves because their winter quarters are always 
located amidst forests). Ta-ashi. —Gatschet, Co¬ 
manche MS., B. A. E. (Comanche name for 
Apache in general: ‘ turned up,’ referring to their 
moccasins). Tagui. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1081, 1896 (old Kiowa name). Tagukeresh.— 
Hodge, Pueblo MS. notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Pecos 
name; see Querecho). Tashin. —Mooney in 17th 
Rep., B: A. E., 245, 1898 (Comanche name). 
Taxkahe.— Gatschet, MS. Arapaho vocab. (Arap- 
aho name; cf. Tha'kahin£'na , ‘saw-fiddle men,’ 
under Kiowa Apache). ThaH-a-i-nin'. —Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 326, 1862 (‘people 
who play on bone instruments,’ that is, a pair 
of buffalo ribs, one notched, over which the 
other is rubbed: Arapaho name). Tinde.— Bourke 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 1889 (‘people’: 
own name). Tinna'-ash.— Gatschet, MS. Wichita 
vocab.,B. A. E., (Wichitaname: cf. Glna l s under 
Kiowa Apache). Tokuwe.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 


10,1884 (Kiowaname). Tshishe. —Ibid., 7 (Laguna 
name). Utce-ci-nyu-muh. —Fewkes in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, v, 33, 1892 (Hopi name). TJtsaamu- 
Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 59, 1905 (Hopi 
name). Xa-he'-ta-no’. —Gatschet, inf’n, 1891 
(Cheyenne name: ‘those who tie their hair 
back’). Yapaches. —Robin, Voy. a la Louisiane, 
hi, 14,1807. Yostjeeme.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. 
Am., 259, 1885 (Hopi name). Yotche-eme. —ten 
Kate, Synonymie, 7, 1884 (Hopi name). Yu- 
lttcemo. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 35, 1891 
(Hopi name). Yute-shay. —Bourke, Moquis of 
Ariz., 118, 1884 (Hopi name). 

Apaches del Perrillo (Span.: ‘Apaches 
of the little dog’). A band of Apache 
occupying, in the 16th and 17th centuries, 
the region of the Jornada del Muerto, 
near the Rio Grande, in s. N. Mex., where 
a spring was found by a dog, thus saving 
the Spaniards much suffering from thirst. 
They were probably a part of the Mesca- 
leros or of the Mimbrenos of later date. 
(f. w. h. ) 

Apaches del perillo. —De l’Isle, map Am. Sept., 
1700. Apaches del Perrillo.— Benavides, Memo¬ 
rial, 14, 1630. Apaches de Peryllo. —Linschoten, 
Desc. de l’Am., map 1, 1638. 

Apaches del Quartelejo. A band of 
Jicarillas which in the 17th and 18th cen¬ 
turies resided in the valley of Beaver cr., 
Scott co., Kans. The district was called 
Quartelejo by Juan Uribarri, who on tak¬ 
ing possession in 1706 named it the prov¬ 
ince of San Luis, giving the name Santo 
Domingo to the Indian rancheria. See 
Quartelejo. (f. w. h.) 

Apaches del Cuartelejo. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, III, 181, 1890. Apaches del Quartelejo. — 
Rivera (1736), quoted by Bandelier, op. cit., v, 184, 
1890. Apaches of Cuartelejo. —Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 286, 1889. 

Apaches Mansos(Span.: ‘tame Apaches’). 
An Apache band of Arizona consisting of 
100 persons (Browne, Apache Country, 
291, 1869). Apparently so called by the 
Mexicans in contradistinction to the more 
warlike Apache. 

Apahiachak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village in the Kuskok wim district, Alaska; 
pop. 91 in 1890. 

Apahiachamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164. 1893 
(here referring to the inhabitants). 

Apalachee. One of the principal native 
tribes of Florida, formerly holding the 
region n. of the bay now called by the 
name, from about the neighborhood of 
Pensacola e. to Ocilla r. The chief towns 
were about the present Tallahassee and 
St Marks. They were of Muskhogean 
stock, and linguistically more nearly re¬ 
lated to the Choctaw than to the Creeks. 
The name is of uncertain etymology, but 
is believed by Gatschet to be from the 
Choctaw A'palachi, signifying ‘(people) 
on the other side.’ The Apalachee were 
visited by the expeditions under Narvaez 
in 1528 and DeSoto in 1539, and the lat¬ 
ter made their country his winter head¬ 
quarters on account of its abundant re¬ 
sources for subsistence. The people were 
agricultural, industrious and prosperous, 
and noted above all the surrounding 


68 


APALACHICOL 4 


[B. A. E. 


tribes for their fighting qualities, of which 
the Spanish adventurers had good proof. 
They continued resistance to the Spanish 
occupancy until after the year 1600, but 
were finally subdued and Christianized, 
their country becoming the most import¬ 
ant center of missionary effort in Florida 
next to the St Augustine (Timucua) dis¬ 
trict. In 1655 they had 8 considerable 
towns, each with a Franciscan mission, 
besides smaller settlements, and a total 
population of 6,000 to 8,000. Their pros¬ 
perity continued until about the year 
1700, when they began to suffer from the 
raids by the wild Creek tribes to the n., 
instigated by the English government of 
Carolina, the Apalachee themselves being 
strongly in the Spanish interest. These 
attacks culminated in the year 1703, when 
a powerful expedition under Gov. Moore 
of Carolina, consisting of a company of 
white troops with a thousand armed sav¬ 
age allies of various tribes, invaded the 
Apalachee country, destroyed the towns 
and missions, with their fields and orange 
groves, killed the Spanish garrison com¬ 
mander and more than 200 Apalachee 
warriors, and carried off 1,400 of the tribe 
into slavery. Another expedition about 
a year later ravaged the neighboring ter¬ 
ritory and completed the destruction. 
The remnants of the Apalachee became 
fugitives among the friendly tribes or fled 
for protection to the French at Mobile, 
and although an effort was made by one 
of the Christian chiefs in 1718 to gather 
some of them into new mission villages 
(Soledad and San Luis) near Pensacola, 
the result was only temporarily success¬ 
ful. A part of the deported Apalachee 
were colonized by the Carolina govern¬ 
ment on Savannah r., at a settlement 
known as Palachoocla (Palachi-okla), or 
Apalachicola, but were finally merged 
into the Creeks. Those who settled under 
French protection near Mobile crossed 
the Mississippi into Louisiana after the 
cession of Florida to England in 1763, and 
continued to preserve their name and 
identity as late, at least, as 1804, when 14 
families were still living on Bayou Rapide. 
Among the principal Apalachee towns or 
mission settlements of certain identifica¬ 
tion are Apalachee (1528-39 and later, 
believed to have been near the present 
Tallahassee), Ayavalla, Ivitaehuco, San 
Marcos, San Juan, Santa Cruz, San Luis 
(1718), and Nuestra Senorade la Soledad 
(1718). Consult Barcia, Ensayo, 1723; 
Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 1806; Shea, Cath¬ 
olic Missions, 1855; Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Legend, i, 1884. (j. m.) 

Abalache. —Fontaneda (ra. 1559) in I)oc. In6d., v, 
537,1866. Abalachi.— Fontaneda in Ternaux Corn- 
pans, xx, 19,1841. Abolachi.— French, Hist. Coll., 
li, 256, 1875. Apahlahche. —Brinton, Florida, 92, 
1859. Apalaccium. —Morelli, Fasti Novi Orbis, 20, 
1776. Apalacha.— Quesada (1792) in Am. State 


Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 303, 1832. Apalache.—Biedma 
(1544) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 47, 1857. Apa- 
lachen. —Cabeza de Vaca (1528), Smith trans., 35, 
1871. Apalachia.— Linschoten, Description de 
l’Amer., 6, 1638. Apalachians.— Harris, Voy. and 
Trav., ii, 275, 1706. Apalachias.— McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80,1854. Apalachinos.— Bar¬ 
cia, Ensayo, 329, 1723. Apalachins. —Jefferys, Fr. 
Dorns. Am., pt. 1, 161, 1761. Apalachis. —Rafin- 
esque, in trod, to Marshall, Ky., I, 23,1824. Apa- 
lachita. —Hervas, Idea dell’ Uni verso, xvii, 90, 
1784 (name of language). Apalachites.— Old- 
mixon, Brit. Emp., II, 229,1708. Apalans. —Rafin- 
esque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 23, 1824 (gen¬ 
eral term, used for several unrelated tribes). 
Apalatchees. —Rivers, Hist. S. C., 94, 1856. Apa- 
latchia.— Carroll, Hist, Coll. S. C., II, 575, 1836. 
Apalatchy. —Coxe, Carolana, 22, 1741. Apalatci. — 
De Bry, Brev. Narr., II, map, 1591. Apalchen. — 
Mercator, map (1569), quoted in Maine Hist. Coll., 
i, 392, 1869. Apalehen. —Rafinesque in introd. to 
Marshall, Ky., I, 23, 1824. Apallachian Indians. — 
Mills, S. C., 222, 1826. Apelash. —Woodward, 
Reminiscences, 79, 1859. Apeolatei. —Brinton, 

Florida, 92,1859. Apilaches. —Woodward, op. cit., 
25. Apilashs. —Ibid., 39. Apolacka. —Holden 
(1707) in N. C. Col. Records, i, 664, 1886. Apo- 
lashe. — Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 585, 1853. 
Appalaches. —Dumont, La., I, 134, 1753. Appala¬ 
chians. —Mills, S. C., 107, 1826. Appalachites. — 
Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 79, 1844. 
Appalachos. —Boudinot, Star in West, 125, 1816. 
Appallatcy. —French, Hist. Coll., ii, 256, 1875. Ap- 
pallatta. —Brinton, Florida, 92, 1859. Appela- 
thas.— Moll, map in Humphreys, Hist. Acct., 1730. 
Appellachee. —Humphreys, Hist. Acct., 98, 1730. 
Asphalashe. —Clarke and Cass in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117, 
20th Cong., 100, 1829. Palache. —Cabeza de Vaca 
(1527), Smith trans.. 25, 1871. Palachees. —Coxe, 
Carolana, 22, map, 1741. Palatcy.— French, Hist. 
Coll., ii, 256,1875. Palaxy. —Brinton, Florida, 92, 
1859. Peluches. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 641, 
1856. Tlapans. —Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, 
Ky., i, 23,1824 (given as an “Apalahan” prov¬ 
ince). Valachi.— Fontaneda in Doc. Ined., v, 
538, 1866. 

Apalachicola (possibly ‘people on the 
other side’). A Hitchiti town formerly 
situate on the w. bank of lower Chatta¬ 
hoochee r., Ala., a short distance below 
Chiaha, nearly opposite the present Co¬ 
lumbus, Ga. Formerly one of the most 
important Hitchiti settlements, it had lost 
its importance by 1799. It was a peace 
town and received the name Talua-lilako , 
‘great town.’ Bartram states that about 
1750 it was moved up the river, and that 
the people spoke the Hitchiti dialect. In 
the abbreviated form Palatchukla the 
name is applied to part of Chattahoo¬ 
chee r. below the junction with Flint r. 
Hodgson (introd. to Hawkins, Sketch) 
states that “ Palachookla,” the capital of 
the confederacy, was a very ancient Uchee 
town, but this statement may be due to 
confusion with the later Apalachicola 
(q. v.) on Savannah r., S. C. The name 
Apalachicola was also frequently used by 
both Spaniards and French in the 18th 
century to include all the Lower Creeks 
then settled on Chattahoochee r. (j. m.) 

Apalachecolo.—Barcia (1718). Ensayo Cron., 336, 
1723. Apalachicoloes.—Archdale in Carroll, Hist. 
Coll. S. C., n, 107, 1707. Apalachicoly.—Iberville 
(1701) in Margry, D£c., iv, 594, 1880. Apalachi- 
coulys.—Ibid.,551. Apalachoocla.—U.S.Ind.Treat. 
(1814), 162,1837. Apalachucla.—Bartram, Travels, 
387, 1791. Apalatchukla.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 68,1884. Apalatchy-Cola.—Coxe, Carolana, 
29,1741. Appalachicolas,—Gallatin, Arch. Am., 96, 


1U LL. 30] 


APALAOHrOOLA—APOHOLA 


09 


1836. Conchaques.— Iberville in Margry, D£c., 
iv. 591, 1880. English Indians.— Arehdale in Car- 
roll, Hist. Coll. S. C., II, 107, 1707. Italua ‘lako.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 145, 1884 (‘great 
town’: popular Creek name). Pahlachocolo.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. Pah-lo- 
cho-ko-los.— Drake, Bk. Inds., iv, 94, 1848. Pala- 
chicolas. —Jefferys, French Dom., map, 134, 1761. 
Palachocalas. —Stevens, Hist. Ga., 117,1847. Pala- 
choocla. —Hodgson in Hawkins, Sketch (1799), 
17, 1848. Pa-la-chooc-le. —Hawkins, ibid., 65. 
Palachuckolas.— McCall, Hist. Georgia, i, 363,1811. 
Palachuola.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Parachuctaus. —Boudinot, 
Star in West, 128, 1816. Paracpoocla. —Hodgson 
in Hawkins, Sketch, 17, 1848. Polachucolas. — 
Drake, Bk. of Inds., 29, 1848. Poollachuchlaw. — 
Moll, map in Humphreys, Hist. Acct., 1730. 
Tallawa Thlucco. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 

1837. Tal-lo-wau thlucco. —Hawkins, Sketch (1799), 
65, 1848. Talua ‘lako, —Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 145, 1884. Tolowarch. —H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 
24th Cong. 308, 1836. Tolowar thlocco. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. 

Apalachicola. A town on Savannah r., 
in what is now Hampton co., S. C., where 
was settled a remnant of the Apalachee 
from the towns about Apalachee bay, 
which were carried thither as captives 
when the tribe was destroyed by Gov. 
Moore in 1703. (a. s. g.) 

Apalou. An unidentified village near 
the mouth of St Johns r., Fla., in 1564.— 
Laudonniere in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
n. s., 315, 1869. 

Appalou.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., map, 1591. 

Apangasi. A former Mi wok village on 
Tuolumne r., Tuolumne co., Cal. 
Apangape.— McKee et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32a Cong., spec, sess., 74, 1853 (misprint). 
Apangasi. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
81,1856. Apangasse.— Barbour et al. (1851) in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 70, 1853. 
A-pang-assi. —Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Apoung-o-sse. — 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 222, 1851. Ap-yang-ape. —Barbour 
(1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 
252, 1853 (misprint). 

Apannow. See Epanow. 

Apap ( A'pap) . A social division of the 
Pima, belonging to the Stoamohimal, 
or White Ants, phratral group.—Russell, 
Pima MS., B. A. E., 313, 1903. 

Apaqssos (‘deer’). A subphratry or 
gens of the Menominee.—Hoffman in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. 1, 42, 1896. 

Apatai (‘a covering,’ from apatayas, 
‘ I cover’). A former subordinate village 
of the Lower Creek town Kasihta, on a 
creek 20 m. e. of Chattahoochee r., Ga., 
probably on the site of the present town 
of Upatoie, on a creek of the same name 
in Muscogee co., Ga. 

Au-put-tau-e.— Hawkins, Sketch (1799), 59, 1848. 

Apatsiltlizhihi (‘ black [tlizhi] Apache’). 
A division of the Jicarilla Apache who 
claim the district of Mora, N. Mex., as 
their former home. (j. m. ) 
Apa'tsil-tli-zhi'hi.— Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 
1897. 

Apeche. A Luiseno village w. of San 
Luis Rey mission, San Diego co., Cal. 
Apeche.— Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 29, 
1883. La Piche.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902, 175, 1903. 

Apena. A pueblo of New Mexico in 
1598; doubtless situated in the Salinas, 


in the vicinity of Abo, and occupied by 
the Tigua or the Piros.—Onate (1598) in 
Doc. Incd., xvi, 114, 1871. 

Aperger. The Yurok name of a Karok 
village on the w. bank of Klamath r., sev¬ 
eral miles below Orleans Bar, said to con¬ 
sist of 10 houses in 1852. (a. l. k. ) 

Sogorem.— Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (said to be the 
Karok name). 

Apewantanka (ape ‘leaf,’ ‘tin,’ apehin 
‘mane,’ tangka ‘large’: ‘large manes 
[of horses]’). A division of the Brule 
Sioux. 

Apewan tanka. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 
1897. Apewa n -tahka. —Ibid. 

Apichi. A “family” or division of the 
Cuyuhasomi phratry of the Timucua.— 
Pareja ( ca . 1612) quoted by Gatschet in 
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvn, 492, 1878. 

Apikaiyiks (‘ skunks ’). A division of 
the Kainah and of the Piegan. 

Ah-pe-ki'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171,1877 (Kainah). 
Ah-pe-ki'-e. —Ibid. (Riegan). Ap'-i-kai-yiks. — 
Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 209, 1892 (Kai¬ 
nah and Piegan). A-pi-kai'-ylks. —Hayden, Eth- 
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264, 1862 (Piegan). 

Apil. A Costanoan village, containing 
neophytes in 1819 according to Friar 
Olbez; situated near the mission of Santa 
Cruz, Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer. Apr. 
5, 1860. 

Apish, Apisha. See Pishaug. 

Apishamore. A saddle blanket, made 
of buffalo-calf skins, used on the great 
prairies (Bartlett, Diet. Americanisms, 
15, 1877). An impossible derivation of 
this word from the French empechement 
has been suggested. Meaning and form 
make it evident that the term is a cor¬ 
ruption of apishimon, which in the Chip¬ 
pewa and closely related dialects of 
Algonquian signifies ‘ anything to lie 
down upon.’ (a. f. c.) 

Apishaug. See Pishaug. 

Apistonga. An unidentified tribe ap¬ 
parently in n. Ala.; marked on Mar¬ 
quette’s map of 1673 (Shea, Discov., 268, 
1852). 

Aplache. Given as the name of a band 
and its village on upper Tuolumme r., 
Tuolumne co., Cal., in 1850. According 
to Adam Johnson (Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 407, 1854) the people could 
not speak the Miwok language; neverthe¬ 
less, judging by their location and the 
bands with which they are mentioned, it 
is probable that they belonged to the 
Moquelumnan family. 

Ap-la-che. —Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 252, 1853. 

Apohola (‘buzzard’). A Timucua 
phratry which included the Nuculaha, 
Nuculahaqus, Nuculaharuqui, Chorofa, 
Usinaca, Ayahanisino, Napoya, Amaca- 
huri, Hauenayo, and Amusaya clans. 
They were prohibited from marrying 
among themselves.—Pareja (ca. 1612) 
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., xvii, 492, 1878. 


70 


APOHOLYTHAS—AQUADOCTA 


r B. A. E. 


Apoholythas. A Creek town in Indian 
Ter., 10 m. from the n. fork of Canadian 
r.—Raines (1838) in H. R. Doc. 219, 
27th Cong., 3d sess., 110,1843. 

Apokak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage near the mouth of Kuskokwim r., 
Alaska; pop. 94 in 1880, 210 in 1890. 

Ahpokagamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Apokachamute.— Hallock in Nat. Geog. Mag., 88, 
1898. Apokagmute.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 
153, 1884. 

Aponitre. A pueblo of the province of 
Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.—Onate (1598) 
in Doc. In£d., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Apontigoumy. An Ottawa village, at¬ 
tacked by the Seneca in 1670.—Courcelles 
(1670) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 788, 
1855. 

Apoon. A Chnagmiut village on Apoon 
pass, the n. mouth of Yukon r., Alaska. 
Aphoon.— Post-route map, 1903. 

Aposon. See Opossum. 

Apoya. The extinct Sky clan of the 
Zuni. 

Apoya-kwe. —Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368, 
1896 {kwe= l people’ ). 

Apozolco. A former pueblo of the Col- 
otlan division of the Cora and the seat of 
a mission, situated on the Rio Colotlan, 
a tributary of the Rio Grande de Santiago, 
Jalisco, Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
280, 1864. 

Appeelatat. A Montagnais village on 
thes. coast of Labrador.—Stearns, Labra¬ 
dor, 271, 1884. 

Appoans. See Pone. 

Appocant. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608 on the n. bank of 
Chickahotniny r., New Kent co., Va.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, map, repr. 1819. 

Appomattoc. A tribe of the Powhatan 
confederacy formerly living on lower Ap¬ 
pomattox r., Va. They had 60 warriors 
in 1608, and were of some importance as 
late as 1671, but were extinct by 1722. 
Their principal village, which bore the 
same name and was on the site of Ber¬ 
muda Hundred, Prince George co., was 
burned by the English in 1611. Appo- 
matox was also one of the terms applied 
to the Matchotic, a later combination of 
remnants of the same confederacy. 

(J. M.) 

Apamatica.— Percy n Purchas, Pilgrimes, iv,1,688, 
1626. Apamaticks. —Lawson (1701), Hist. Carolina, 
163, 1860. Apamatuck. —Smith quoted by Drake, 
Bk.Inds.,bk.4,10,1848. Apamatuk. —Smith (1629), 
Virginia, il, 12, repr. 1819. Apomatock. —Batts 
(1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 193, 1853. Ap- 
pamatox. —Beverly, Virginia, 199, 1722. Appamat- 
tocs. —Jefferson, Notes, 179,1801. Appamattucks.— 
Strachey (1612 ?), Virginia, vi, 35, 1849. Appa- 
matucks. —Smith (1629),Virginia, 1,116, repr. 1819. 
Appomatocks. —Macauley, N. Y., II, 166, 1829. 
Appomattake. —Doc. of 1643 in N. C. Col. Rec., I, 
17, 1886. Appomatuck. —Doc. of 1728, ibid., ii, 784, 
1886. Appomotacks. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 
125, 1816. 

Apukasasocha ( apoka=‘ settlement’). A 
former Seminole town of which Enehe- 
mathlochee was chief in 1823, situated 20 


m. w.-of the head of St Johns r., centra? 
Fla.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 74, 19th Cong., 27, 
1826. 

Apuki (A / pukt). A social divison of 
the Pima, belonging to the Stoamohimal, 
or White Ants,phratral group.—Russell, 
Pima MS., B. A. E., 313, 1903. 

Aputitek. A ruined Eskimo village in 
e. Greenland, lat. 67° 47 / .—Meddelelser 
om Gronland, xxvii, map, 1902. 

Aputosikainah (‘northern Bloods’). A 
band of the Kainah division of the Sik- 
sika. 

Ap -ut'-o-si-kai-nah. —Grinnell, Blaekfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. 

Apyu. The Yurok name of the north¬ 
ern part of the important Karok village 
of Katimin, on Klamath r., Cal., a mile 
above the mouth of the Salmon, (a.l.k. ) 

Aqbirsiarbing (‘a lookout for whales’). 
A winter settlement of Nugumiut at C. 
True, Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., 422, 1888. 

Aquacalecuen. A Timuquanan village 
near Suwannee r., n. w. Fla., visited by 
De Soto in 1539.—Biedma (1544) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 98, 1850. 

Caliquen.— Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, op. 
cit., 131. 

Aquackanonk (from ach-quoa-k-kan- 
nonk, ‘a place in a rapid stream where 
fishing is done with a bush-net. ’—Nelson). 
A division of the Unarm Delawares 
which occupied lands on Passaic r., N. J., 
and a considerable territory in the in¬ 
terior, including the tract known as Dun¬ 
dee, in Passaic, just below the Dundee 
dam, in 1678. In 1679 the name was used 
to describe a tract in Saddle River town¬ 
ship, Bergen co., as well as to designate 
“the old territory, which included all of 
Paterson s. of the Passaic r., and the city 
of Paterson.” The Aquackanonk sold 
lands in 1676 and 1679. See Nelson and 
Ruttenber, below. 

Achquegenonck.— Doc. of 1714 quoted by Nelson, 
Inds. N. J., 122, 1894. Achquickenoungh. —Doc. of 
1696, ibid. Achquickenunck.— Doc. of 1698, ibid. 
Achquickenunk.— Doc. of 1696, ibid. Achquika- 
nuncque.— Doc. of 1698, ibid. Ackquekenon.— Doc. 
of 1679, ibid. Acquackanonk,— Ruttenber, Tribes 
Hudson R., 91, 1872. Acquicanunck. — Doc. of 
1692 quoted by Nelson, op. cit. Acquiggenonck. — 
Doc. of 1693, ibid. Acquikanong.— Doc. of 1706, 
ibid. Amakaraongky.— DeLaet (ca. 1633) in N. Y. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., I, 315,1841 (same?). Aquach- 
onongue. —Doc. of 1696 quoted by Nelson, op. cit. 
Aquackanonks. —De Laet, op. cit. Aquaninoncke. — 
Doc. of 1683 quoted by Nelson, op. cit. Aquaqua- 
nuncke. —Doc. of 1684, ibid. Aqueckenonge. —Doc. 
of 1696, ibid. Aqueckkonunque. —Doc. of 1698, ibid. 
Aquegnonke.— Doc. of 1679, ibid. Aqueyquinunke — 
Doc. of 1682, ibid. Aquickanucke. —Doc. of 1678, 
ibid. Aquickanunke. —Doc. of 1685, ibid. Aquoe- 
chononque. —Doc. of 1698, ibid. Hackquickanon.— 
Doc. of 1694, ibid. Hacquickenunk.— Doc. of 1696, 
ibid. Haghquagenonck.— Doc. of 1736, ibid. 
Haquequenunck.— De Laet, op. cit. Haquicquee- 
nock. —Doc. of 1678, ibid. Hockquackanonk.— Doc. 
of 1707, ibid. Hockquackonong. — Ibid. Hock- 
quecanung.— Doc. of 1683, ibid. Hockquekanung.— 
Doc. of 1680, ibid. Hockquickanon. — Doc. of 
1693, ibid. 

Aquadocta. The dwelling place of “a 
tribe of Indians” in 1690, living westward 


MILL. SO] 


AQITASCOGOC 


ARAHASOMI 


71 


from Casco and Saco, Me., and seemingly- 
allied with the Abnaki.—Niles (ca. 1761) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 217,1837. 

Aquascogoc. An Algonquian village on 
the coast of Hyde co., N. C., at the time 
of the first visit of the English. It was 
burned by them in 1585. 

Agnascoga.—Martin, N. C., I, 30, 1829. Aguasco- 
sack.—Bozman, Maryland, i, 60, 1837. Aquasco¬ 
goc.—Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia, I, 86, 
repr. 1819. Aquascogoke.—Stracliey (ca. 1612), 
Virginia, 145,1849. Aquoscojos.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, vi, 93, 1857. Aqusoogock.—Dutch map 
(1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. 

Aquebogue (the word suggests the Chip¬ 
pewa akupiyag, a locative term referring 
to the place where land and water meet; 
it has the meaning ‘shore,’ but the spe¬ 
cific use is for ‘ the edge of the water, ’ the 
point of view being from the land; a ku 
refers to the ‘ end,’ ‘ edge, ’ pi to ‘ wa¬ 
ter.’—Wm. Jones). A village, probably 
of the Corchaug, about the year 1650, on 
a creek entering the n. side of Great 
Peconic bay, Long Island (Ruttenber; 
Thompson). In 1905 R. N. Penny (in 
Rec. of Past, iv, 223,1905) discovered the 
remains of an ancient village “ of 12-wig¬ 
wam size” in a thick wood near Aque¬ 
bogue, inland from Peconic bay, w. of the 
w. branch of Steeple Church cr. and be¬ 
tween that stream and a large tributary 
of Peconic r. These may be the remains 
of the ancient Aquebogue. 

Accopogue.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 365, 
1872. Aquebogue.—Thompson, Long Id., 181,1839. 

Aquetnet ( aquetn-et , ‘at an island.’— 
Trumbull). A village in 1655 at Skau- 
ton neck, Sandwich tp., Barnstable co., 
Mass., under chief Ackanootus, in the 
territory of the Nauset. The word 
seems to be the same as Aquidneck 
(Quidnick), R I., which Trumbull thinks 
means ‘place at the end of the hill,’ com¬ 
pounded from ukque-adene-auke; or pos¬ 
sibly ‘place beyond the hill,’ ogque-adene- 
auke. Mentioned by a writer of 1815 in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., iv, 293, 
1816. (j. m.) 

Aqui. A former Maricopa rancheria on 
the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz.—Sedelmair 
(1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 366, 1889. 

Aquicabo. A pueblo of the province of 
Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.—Onate (1598) 
in Doc. In£d., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Aquicato.—Onate misquoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 135, 1889. 

Aquile. A village in n. w. Fla. on the 
border of the Apalachee territory, visited 
by De Soto in 1539. —Biedma (1544) in 
French, Hist. Coll., ir, 98, 1850. 

Aquimundurech. A former Maricopa 
rancheria on the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz.— 
Sedelmair (1744) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Aquimuri (probably from Pima akimurl, 
‘river’). A rancheria of one of the 


Piman tribes, probably Papago, visited 
by Father Kino about 1700; situated in 
Sonora, on the headwaters of the Rio 
Altar, just s. of the Arizona boundary. 
It was later a visita of the mission of 
Guevavi. Consult Rudo Ensayo (1763), 
150, 1863; Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 360, 1889. 

Akimuri.—Kino, map (1701) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74,1726. Aquimuricuca.—Cancio (1768) 
in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., n, 270, 1856. S. Ber¬ 
nardo Aquimuri.—Kino quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 501, 1884. 

Aquinsa. Mentioned by Onate in 1598 
as one of 6 villages occupied by the 
Zuiii in New Mexico. In the opinion of 
Bandelier (Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 338, 
1892) it is identical with Pinawan, a 
now ruined pueblo 1J m. s. w. of Zuni 
pueblo. Cushing (in Millstone, ix, 55, 
1884) regarded Ketehina, 15 m. s. w. of 
Zuni, as the probable Aquinsa of the 
Spaniards, and in 1888 (Internat. Cong. 
Amer., vii, 156, 1890) the same authority 
gave Kwakina in connection with Pina¬ 
wan as the pueblo to which Onate referred. 

Aquitun ( Akuchiny , ‘creek mouth’— 
Russell). A former Pima rancheria 5 
m. w. of Picacho, on the border of the 
sink of Rio Santa Cruz, s. Ariz., visited 
by Father Garc6s in 1775. It was aban¬ 
doned about the beginning of the 19th 
century. A few Mexican families have 
occupied its vicinity for many years. 
The present Pima claim that it was a vil¬ 
lage of their forefathers. 

Akutciny.—Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902 
(Pimaname; tc—ch). Aquitun.—Arricivita, Cr6n. 
Ser&f., n, 416,1792. Bajio de Aquituno.—Anza and 
Font (1780) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 392. 1889. Equituni.—Garc6s (1776), Diary, 
65, 1900. 

Aquixo. A town visited by De Soto’s 
army in 1541, situated on the w. bank of 
the Mississippi, not far from the mouth 
of St Francis r., Ark., and perhaps be¬ 
longing to the Quapaw. (Gentl. of Elvas, 
1557, quoted in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
ii, 169, 1850.) 

Aquouena. An unidentified town w. of 
upper St Johns r., Fla., in 1565.—De Bry, 
Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. 

Aracuchi. An unidentified village ap¬ 
parently in n. w. S. C., visited by Juan 
Pardo in 1565.—Vandera (1567) in Smith, 
Colec. Docs. Fla., i, 17, 1857. 

Arauchi.—Vandera, op. cit. 

Aragaritka. The name given by the 
Iroquois to the tribes, including the Huron 
and Tionontati, which they drove out 
from the peninsula between L. Huron 
and L. Erie and from lower Michigan.— 
Iroquois deed (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., iv, 908, 1854. 

Arahasomi (‘bear gens,’ from am ‘black 
bear, ’ hasomi ‘ family ’). A Timucua clan 
of the Chulufichi phratry.—Pareja (ca. 
1612) quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., xvii, 492, 1878. 


72 


ARAM AY' 


ARAPAHO 


[ B. A. E. 


Aramay. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Aranama. A small agricultural tribe 
formerly living on and near the s. coast 
of Texas; later they were settled for a 
time at the mission of Espiritu Santo de 
Zuniga, opposite the present Goliad, 
where some Karankawa Indians were 
also neophytes. It is reported that they 
had previously suffered from an attack 
by the Karankawa. Morse located them 
in 1822 on San Antonio r. and estimated 
them at 125 souls. In 1834 Escudero 
(Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 231) spoke 
of them as follows: “The same coast 
and its islands are inhabited by the 
Curancalmases and Jaranames Indians, 
fugitives from the missions. The larger 
portion have lately settled in the new 
mission of Nuestra Sefiora del Refugio, 
and to-day very few rebellious families re¬ 
main, so that the injuries caused by these 
cowardly but cruel Indians have ceased.” 
As a tribe the Aranama were extinct by 
1843. (a. c. f.) 

Anames. —Rivera, Diario y Derrot., leg. 2,602,1736. 
Aranamas. —Thrall, Hist. Texas, 446, 1879. Ara- 
names. —Rivera, op. cit. Arrenamuses. —Morse, 
Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822. Aurananeans. —Bou- 
dinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816. Hazanames.— 
Robin, Voy. 4 la Louisiane, in, 14, 1807. Jara¬ 
names. —Escudero, Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 231, 
1834. Juranames. —Morfi quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 631, 1886. Xaramenes.— Bollaert 
in Ethnol. Soc. Lond. Jour., ii, 265, 280, 1850. 
Xaranames. —Texas State Archives, MS. no. 83, 
1791 92. 

Aranca. The name of two Pima vil¬ 
lages in s. Ariz., one with 208 inhabi¬ 
tants in 1858, the other with 991.—Bailey 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858. 

Aranimokw. The Yurok name of a 
Karok village near Red Cap cr., an 
affluent of Klamath r., Cal. (a. l. k.) 

Arapaho. An important Plains tribe of 
the great Algonquian family, closely asso¬ 
ciated with the Cheyenne for at least a 
century past. They call themselves Inu- 
naina , about equivalent to ‘our people.’ 
The name by which they are commonly 
known is of uncertain derivation, but it 
may possibly be, as Dunbar suggests, 
from the Pawnee tirapihu or larapihu, 
‘trader.’ By the Sioux and Cheyenne 
they are called “Blue-sky men” or 
“ Cloud men,” the reason for which is 
unknown. 

According to the tradition of the Arap¬ 
aho they were once a sedentary, agricul¬ 
tural people, living far to the n. e. of their 
more recent habitat, apparently about 
the Red r. valley of n. Minn. From 
this point they moved s. w. across the 
Missouri, apparently about the same 
time that the Cheyenne (q. v.) moved 
out from Minnesota, although the date 
of the formation of the permanent alli¬ 
ance between the two tribes is uncertain. 


The Atsina (q. v.), afterward associated 
with the Siksika, appear to have sepa¬ 
rated from the parent tribe and moved 
off toward the n. after their emergence 
into the plains. The division into North¬ 
ern and Southern Arapaho is largely 
geographic, originating within the last 
century, and made permanent by the 
placing of the two bands on different res¬ 
ervations. The Northern Arapaho, in 
Wyoming, are considered the nucleus or 
mother tribe and retain the sacred tribal 
articles, viz, a tubular pipe, one ear of 
corn, and a turtle figurine, all of stone. 

Since they crossed the Missouri the drift 
of the Arapaho, as of the Cheyenne and 
Sioux, has been w. and s., the Northern 
Arapaho making lodges on tin 1 edge of 



ARAPAHO MAN 


the mountains about the head of the 
North Platte, while the Southern Arap¬ 
aho continued down toward the Arkan¬ 
sas. About the year 1840 they made 
peace with the Sioux, Kiowa, and Co¬ 
manche, but were always at war with the 
Shoshoni, Ute, and Pawnee until they 
were confined upon reservations, while 
generally maintaining a friendly attitude 
toward the whites. By the treaty of 
Medicine Lodge in 1867 the Southern 
Arapaho, together with the Southern 
Cheyenne, were placed upon a reserva¬ 
tion in Oklahoma, which was thrown 
open to white settlement in 1892, the 
Indians at the same time receiving allot¬ 
ments in severalty, with the rights of 
American citizenship. The Northern 
Arapaho were assigned to their present 







HULL. 30] 


ARAPAHO 


73 


reservation on Wind r. in Wyoming in 
1870, after having made peace with their 
hereditary enemies, the Shoshoni, living 
upon the same reservation. The Atsina 
division, usually regarded as a distinct 
tribe, is associated with the Assiniboin on 
Ft Belknap res. in Montana. They 
numbered, respectively, 889, 859, and 535 
in 1904, a total of 2,283, as against a total 
of 2,638 ten years earlier. 

As a people the Arapaho are brave, but 
kindly and accommodating, and much 
given to ceremonial observances. The 
annual sun dance is their greatest tribal 
ceremony, and they were active propa¬ 
gators of the ghost-dance religion (q. v.) 
a few years ago. In arts and home life, 
until within a few years past, they were 
a typical Plains tribe. They bury their 
dead in the ground, unlike the Cheyenne 
and Sioux, who deposit them upon scaf¬ 
folds or on the surface of the ground in 
boxes. They have the military organiza¬ 
tion common to most of the Plains tribes 
(see Military societies), and have no trace 
of the clan system. 

They recognize among themselves five 
main divisions, each speaking a different 
dialect and apparently representing as 
many originally distinct but cognate 
tribes, viz: 

(1) Nakasin<Vna,Baachin6na, or North¬ 
ern Arapaho. Nakasin6na, ‘ sagebrush 
men,’ is the name used by themselves. 
Baachingna, ‘red willow men (?),’ is 
the name by which they were com¬ 
monly known to the rest of the tribe. 
The Kiowa distinguished them as Ta- 
gviiko, ‘sagebrush people,’ a translation 
of their proper name. They keep the 
sacred tribal articles, and are considered 
the nucleus or mother tribe of the Arap¬ 
aho, being indicated in the sign language 
(q. v.) by tlie sign for “mother people.’’ 

(2) Na\vun6na, ‘southern men,’ or 
Southern Arapaho, called Nawathtn6ha, 
‘ southerners,’ by the Northern Arapaho. 
The Kiowa know them as Ahayadal, the 
(plural) name given to the wild plum. 
The sign for them is made by rubbing the 
index finger against the side of the nose. 

(3) Aa'nin&na, HitunSna, Atsina, or 
Gros Ventres of the Prairie. The first 
name, said to mean ‘white clay people,’ 
is that by which they call themselves. 
Ilitun&na, or HitunSnina, ‘ begging men,’ 

‘ beggars,’ or more exactly ‘spongers,’ is 
the name by which they are called by the 
other Arapaho. The same idea is in¬ 
tended to be conveyed by the tribal sign, 
which has commonly been interpreted as 
‘ big bellies,’ whence the name Gros Ven¬ 
tres applied to them by the French Cana¬ 
dians. In this way they have been by 
some writers confused wfith the Hidatsa, 
the Gros Ventres of the Missouri. See 
Atsina. 


(4) Basawunena, ‘ wood-lodge people,’ 
or, possibly, ‘ big lodge people.’ These, 
according to tradition, were formerly a 
distinct tribe and at war with the Arap¬ 
aho, but have been incorporated for at 
least 150 years. Their dialect is said to 
have differed considerably from the other 
Arapaho dialects. There are still about 
50 of this lineage among the Northern 
Arapaho, and perhaps a few with the 
other two main divisions. 

(5) Hanahawun&na (‘rock men’— 
Kroeber) or Aanu / nhaw&. These, like 
the Basawunfina, lived with the Northern 
Arapaho, but are now practically extinct. 

The two main divisions, Northern and 
Southern, are subdivided into several 
local bands, as follows: (a) Forks of 
the River Men, (b) Bad Pipes, and (c) 
Greasy Faces, among the Northern Arap¬ 
aho; (d) Waquithi, bad faces, (e) Aqa- 
thin£/na, pleasant men, (f) Gawunena, 
Blackfeet, said to be of Siksika admix¬ 
ture; (g) Haqihana, wolves, (h) Sasi'i- 
baithi, looking up, or looking around, 
i. e., watchers. 

Consult Mooney, Ghost Dance Religion, 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., n, 1896; Clark, Ind. 
Sign Language, 1885; Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; Kroeber, The 
Arapaho, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xvnr, 1900; Dorsey and Kroeber, Tradi¬ 
tions of the Arapaho, Field Columb. Mus. 
Pubs., Anthrop. ser., v, 1903; Dorsey, 
Arapaho Sun Dance, ibid., iv, 1903. 

(.T. M.) 

Aarapahoes. —Blackmore, quoting Whitfield (1855) 
in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 315,1869. Ahya'to. — 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Kiowa 
name). Anapaho. —Garrard, Wahtoyah, 119, 1850 
(given as Cheyenne form). A'nipahu.— Gatschet, 
Kaw vocab., B. A. E., 1878 (Kansa name). 
Ano's-anyotskano. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
953, 1896 (Kichai name). Arapahas. —Drake, Bk. 
Inds., vi, 1848. Arapahays.— Ross, Adventures, 
232,1849. Arapaho. —Ruxton, Adventures, 220, 
1818. Arapahoos. —Mitchell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 59, 
1812. Arapakata. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
953, 1896 (Crow name, from ‘Arapaho’). Arapha- 
hoe.— Wyeth in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 219, 
1851. Araphas. —Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., II, 279,1850. Araphoes. —Ibid. Arapohaes. — 
Audouard, Far West, 182, 1869. Arapoho. —Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 321,1862. Ar- 
apohose. —Ibid., 402 (Crow name). Arbapaoes. — 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 40, 1864. Arepahas. —Cass 
(1834) iii Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 609, 1853. 
Aripahoes. —Hildreth, Dragoon Campaigns, 153, 
1836. Aripohoes. —Ind. Aff. Rep., app., 241, 1846. 
Ar-rah-pa-hoo. —Lewis and Clark, Travels, 15,1807 
(wrongly applied by them to a body of Pawnee). 
Arrapahas.— Ind. Aft. Rep., 594, 1837. Arrapaho. — 
Long, Exp. Rocky Mts., II, 192,1823. Arrapahoes. — 
Dougherty (1837) in H. R. Doc. 276, 25th Cong., 
2d sess., 16, 1838. Arrapaoes. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Ethnol. Soc., ir, cix, 1848. Arraphas. —Am. 
Pioneer, I, 257,1842. Arraphoes.— Bollaert in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 265, 1850. Arrapohoes, — 
Cumming in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 34th Cong., 1st 
sess., 13,1856. Arrepahas.— -Porter (1829) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, 111,596,1853. Arripahoes. —Fitz¬ 
patrick in Ind. Aff. Rep., 74,1851. Arspahas.— Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 425, 1842. A'-ya-to. —ten Kate, Synon- 
ymie, 10, 1884 (Kiowa name). Betidee.— Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Kiowa Apache 
name). Big Bead.—Bradbury, Travels, 124,1817. 


74 


ARASTE-ARCHEOLOGY 


[b. a. e. 


Chariticas. —Doe. of 1828 in Soc. Geogr. Hex., 265, 
1870 (see SarUika, below). Detseka'yaa. —Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Caddo name: 
‘dog eaters’). Dog-eaters.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. 
Lib., pt. 6,153,1883. Eirichtih-Aruchpahga. —Maxi¬ 
milian, op. cit., ii, 213 (Hidatsa name, German 
form). E-tah-leh.— Long, Exp. Rocky Mts., II, 
192, 1823 (Hidatsa name: ‘bison-path Indians’ 
cf. adi, path; mite, bison—Matthews]). Gens 
es vacb.— Clark (1804) in Lewis and Clark Jour¬ 
nals, 1 ,190,1904 (given as synonymous with “ Kun 
na-nar-wesh ”; the name is the French for ‘ buffalo 
people’). Hitaniwo'iv. —Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 953,1896 (Cheyenne name: ‘ cloud men ’ or 
‘sky men’). Hi-tan-ne-wo'-i-e. —ten Kate, Syn- 
onymie, 8, 1884 (Cheyenne name: ‘people with 
teats,' peuple aux tetons, mistaking the ‘mother’ 
sign; the name means ‘ cloud men ’). Inuna-ina. — 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (tribal 
name: ‘our people’). Ita-Iddi. —Maximilian, 

Travels, n, 284,1839-1841 (Hidatsa name). I-tun- 
i-wo.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Pliilol. Mo. Val., 290, 
1860 (Cheyenne name: ‘ shy-men ’, for ‘ sky men ’). 
Kaninahoic. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 
1896 (Chippewa name). Kaninahoich.— Senate 
Ex. Doc. no. 72, 20th Cong., 104, 1829. Kanina/- 
vish.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896. 
Komseka-Ki'nahyup.— Ibid., 954 (‘men of the 
worn-out leggings’: former Kiowa name). Kun 
na-nar-wesh. —Clark (1804) in Lewis and Clark 
Journals. I, 190, 1904 (given as synonymous with 
“Gens des vach”). Lapahogi. —Gatschet, MS. 
Shawnee vocab., B. A. E., 1879-80 (Shawnee name; 
singular, Lapaho). Mahpiyato. —Riggs, Dakota 
Diet., 2d ed., 305, 1890 (Sioux name). Maphpi- 
yato. —Cook, MS. Yankton vocab., B. A. E., 1882 
(Yankton name). Maqpi'&to. —Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A.E., 954,1896 (‘ blue cloud’: Sioux name). 
Nia/rhari's-kurikiwa/shuski, — Ibid. (Wichita 
name). Rapahos. —De Smet, Missions, 253, 1848 
(Garrard, Wahtoyah, 120, 1850, gives this as the 
Spanish name for them). Rappaho. —Long, Exp. 
Rocky Mts., II, 192, 1823. Sani'ti'ka. —Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 954, 1896 (Pawnee name, from 
the Comanche name). Saretika. —Ibid, (‘dog 
eaters’: Comanche and Shoshoni name). Sare¬ 
tika. —Ibid. (Wichita name, from the Comanche 
name). Saritch-ka-e.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 8, 
1884 (Southern Ute name). Sa-ritc'-ka-e.— Ibid. 
(Ute name). Sa-ri-te'-ka.— Ibid., 9 (Comanche 
and Caddo name). Sarritehca. —Rejon quoted in 
Pimentel, Cuadro Descr., ii, 347, 1865 (given as 
Comanche division). Schaha/. —Maximilian, 
Travels, n, 247,1841 (Arikara name, German form; 
seemingly an error for Cheyenne). Seraticks. — 
Burnet (1847) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 239, 
1853. Seratics. —Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., ii, 265, 1850. Sharetikeh.— Burton, City of 
the Saints, 176, 1861 (Shoshoni name). Tocani- 
nambiches. —Perrin du Lac, Voy. Louisianes, 260, 
1805 (seemingly the Arapaho). 

Araste. An Iroquoian village in 1535 on 
or near St Lawrence r., below the site of 
Quebec.—Cartier (1545), Bref Recit, 32, 
1863. 

Arathcoon. See Raccoon. 

Arawakan Colony. In addition to the 
many proofs of constant communication 
between the tribes of Florida and those 
of the West Indian ids. from the earliest 
period, it is definitely known that a colony 
of Indians from Cuba, in quest of the 
same mythic fountain of youth for which 
Ponce de Leon afterward searched, landed 
on the s. w. coast of Florida, within the 
territory of the Calusa (q. v.), about the 
period of the discovery of America, and 
that they were held as prisoners by the 
chief of that tribe and formed into a set¬ 
tlement whose people kept their separate 
identity as late at least as 1570. This tra¬ 
dition of a wonderful spring or stream 


upon the mainland of Florida or on one 
of the adjacent Bahama ids. was common 
to all the tribes of the larger islands as far 
south as Porto Rico, and it is probable 
that more than one party of islanders made 
a similar attempt. According to Brinton 
and other investigators the Indians of 
Cuba, as well as of the Bahamas and the 
larger islands, were of the great Arawakan 
stock, which extends in South America 
as far as s. Brazil and Bolivia. For the 
Cuban settlement in Florida see Fonta- 
neda, Memoir, Smith trans, 1854; Barcia, 
Ensayo, introd., 1723; Herrera, Hist. 
Gen., i, 1720. (j. m.) 

Arbadaos. A tribe that Cabeza de Vaca 
(Smith trails., 76, 1851) met during his 
sojourn in Texas (1527-34) in the vicinity 
of the Avavares. He describes the people 
as “lank and iveak,” owing to scarcity 
of food; and although they seem to have 
lived in a fertile country they did not 
cultivate the soil. Their ethnic relations 
are not known. 

Acubadaos. —Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 84,1851. 
Arbadaos.—Ibid., 76. Arbadoes.—Harris, Voy. and 
Trav., i, 803, 1705. 

Arbaktung. A subdivision of the Akud- 
nirmiut; they winter generally on C. 
Bisson, Home bay, Baffin land.—Boas in 
Deutsche Geog. Bliitt., viii, 34, 1885. 

Archeology. Archeological researches 
are applied to the elucidation of three 
principal departments of inquiry: (1) The 
liistory of the race and the sub-races; (2) 
the history of the separate families, tribes, 
and inferior social groups; (3) the history 
of culture in its multifarious forms. Ques¬ 
tions of origin and antiquity are necessa¬ 
rily considered in connection with inves¬ 
tigations in each of these departments. In 
the present article all that call be included 
is a brief review" of the salient features of 
the archeology of northern America. 

In no part of America are there re¬ 
mains of man or his w r orks clearly in¬ 
dicating the presence of peoples distinct 
from the Indian and the Eskimo, or hav¬ 
ing culture markedly different in kind 
and degree from those characterizing the 
aborigines of historic times. Archeolog¬ 
ical researches serve to carry the story of 
the tribes and their culture back indefi¬ 
nitely into the past, although the record 
furnished by the various classes of remains 
growls rapidly less legible as w T e pass be¬ 
yond the few w’ell-illumined pages of the 
historic period. It is now known that 
the sedentary condition prevailed among 
the aborigines to a much larger extent 
than has been generally supposed. The 
more advanced nations of Middle and 
South America have been practically sta¬ 
tionary for long periods, as indicated by 
the magnitude of their architectural 
achievements, and even such primitive 
groups as the Iroquois, Algonquians, and 


BULL. 30] 


ARCHEOLOGY 


75 


others of northern America have occupied 
their general historic habitat for unnum¬ 
bered generations. The prehistoric re¬ 
mains of the various regions thus pertain 
in large measure to the ancestors of the 
historic occupants, and the record is thus 
much more simple than that of prehis¬ 
toric Europe. 

Within the area of the United States 
pre-Columbian progress was greatest in 
two principal regions: (1) The Mississippi 
valley, including portions of the South¬ 
ern states farther eastward, and (2) the 
Pueblo country, comprising New Mexico, 
Arizona, and parts of Colorado, Utah, 
and Texas. The first-mentioned area is 
characterized by remains of extensive 
fixed works, such as mounds and fortifi¬ 
cations; the second by its ruined pueblos 
of stone and adobe. In the remainder of 
the area, as on the Atlantic and Pacific 
slopes and in the regions of the Great 
Lakes, the n. Rocky mts., and the Great 
Basin, there is comparatively little save 
minor movable relics and kitchen deposits 
to mark earlier occupancy. The fixed 
works which occur in the first-mentioned 
region are very numerous, and are ex¬ 
tremely important to the student of na¬ 
tive history. In the Mississippi valley 
and the Southern states these works con¬ 
sist of mounds of diversified shapes, built 
mainly of earth and devoted to a variety 
of purposes, such as dwelling, observation, 
defense, burial, and ceremony. Some of 
these are of great size, as the Cahokia 
mound (q. v.) m Illinois, and the Etowah 
mound (q. v.) in Georgia, which compare 
well in bulk with the great pyramids of 
middle America. There are also fortifica¬ 
tions and inclosures of extremely varied 
form and, in many instances, of great ex¬ 
tent. These are well illustrated by Ft 
Ancient (q. v.), Warren co., Ohio, and the 
earthworks at Newark, Ohio (q. v.). The 
animal-shaped mounds, occurring princi¬ 
pally in the Ohio and upper Mississippi 
valleys, are a striking variety of these re¬ 
mains. Well-known examples are the 
Serpent mound (q. v.), Adams co., Ohio, 
and the so-called Elephant mound (q. v.), 
Grant co., Wis. The materials used in 
these structures include earth, clay, sand, 
and, along the coast, shells. Stone en¬ 
tered into the construction where it was 
readily available, but rarely as well- 
built walls or as masonry. These works 
indicate the former presence in the region 
of a numerous sedentary population rely¬ 
ing mainly on agriculture for subsistence. 
It is now known, as a result of the more 
recent archeological investigations, that 
these people, often called the “Mound- 
builders,” were no other than Indians, 
and in some cases at least the ancestors 
of tribes occupying the general region 
within historic times. (See Fortifications, 
Mounds .) 


In the Pueblo region the fixed works 
consist of villages and dwellings of stone, 
and, in the southern Pueblo area, of adobe. 
Of unusual interest are the cliff-dwellings, 
built of stone in rifts and shelters in the 
canyon walls and along the faces of the 
table-lands or excavated in friable cliffs. 
The advanced condition of the earlier 
occupants of the region is indicated not 
only by these remains but by the pres¬ 
ence of traces of extensive irrigating 
ditches. A careful study of these various 
remains, including the skeletal parts, 
demonstrates the fact that they pertain 
in large measure to the ancestors of the 
present occupants of the Pueblo towns 
and that no antecedent distinct people or 
culture can be differentiated. (See Casa 
Grande , Cliff-dwellings, Irrigation, Pueblos .) 

In the districts lying outside of the areas 
referred to above are encountered occa¬ 
sional burial mounds and earthworks, as 
well as countless refuse deposits marking 
occupied sites. The most notable of the 
latter are the shell mounds of the Atlantic 
and Pacific shore lines, which offer a rich 
reward for the labors of the archeologist. 
(See Shell-heaps.) 

Among fixed works of somewhat wide 
distribution are the quarries where flint, 
soapstone, mica, quartzite, obsidian, and 
other varieties of stone were obtained 
for the manufacture of implements and 
utensils. Such are the extensive work¬ 
ings at Flint Ridge, Ohio; Hot Springs, 
Ark.; and Mill Creek, Ill., the sites 
being marked by numerous pittings sur¬ 
rounded with the refuse of manufacture. 
Their lesson is a most instructive one, 
demonstrating especially the great enter¬ 
prise and perseverance of the tribes. 
There are also numerous copper mines in 
theL. Superior region, marked by excava¬ 
tions of no great depth but of surprising 
extent, indicating the fulness of the 
native awakening to the advantages of 
metal in the arts. (See Mines and Quar¬ 
ries. ) Caverns formerly occupied by the 
tribes also contain deposits of refuse, and 
their walls display numerous examples of 
pictography. In connection with fixed 
works may also be mentioned the petro- 
glyphs, or rock inscriptions, found in 
nearly every part of the country. These 
give little aid, however, to the study of 
aboriginal history, since they can not be 
interpreted, save in rare cases where 
tradition has kept the significance alive. 
(See Pictographs .) 

Knowledge of native history in post- 
Columbian as well as in pre-Columbian 
times is greatly enhanced by a study of 
the minor remains and relics—the im¬ 
plements, utensils, ornaments, ceremonial 
and diversional objects and appliances— 
great numbers of which are now pre¬ 
served in our museums. (See Arte and 
Industries, Stone-work, Bone-ivork, Shell- 


ARCHEOLOGY 


[ B. A. E. 


76 


work, Wood-work, Metal-work, Pottery, 
Problematical Objects, Weaving.) 

A study of the archeological remains 
contained in the area n. of the Rio Grande 
as a whole supplements the knowledge 
gained by investigations among the living 
tribes in such a way as to enable us not 
only to prolong the vista of many tribal 
histories butto outline, tentatively at least, 
the native general history somewhat as 
follows: An occupancy of the various re¬ 
gions in very early times by tribes of low 
culture; a gradual advance in arts and in¬ 
dustries, especially in favorable localities, 
resulting in many cases in fully sedentary 
habits, an artificial basis of subsistence, 
and the successful practice of many arts 
and industries, such as agriculture, archi¬ 
tecture, sculpture, pottery, weaving, and 
metallurgy—accomplishments character¬ 
izing a well-advanced stage of barbarism, 
as defined by Morgan; while in the less 
favored regions, comprising perhaps 
three-fourths of the area of the United 
States and a larger proportion of the 
British possessions, the more primitive 
hunter-fisher stage mainly persisted down 
to historic times. (See Agriculture, Arts 
and Industries, Fishing, Hunting .) 

Efforts have been made to distinguish 
definite stages of culture progress in 
America corresponding to those estab¬ 
lished in Europe, but there appears to be 
no very close correspondence. The use 
of stone was universal among the tribes, 
and chipped and polished implements 
appear to have been employed at all 
periods and by peoples of every stage of 
culture, although the polishing processes 
seem to have grown relatively more im¬ 
portant with advancing culture, being 
capable of producing art works of the 
higher grades, while flaking processes are 
not. Some of the more advanced tribes 
of the S. were making marked headway 
in the use of metals, but the culture was 
everywhere essentially that of polished 
stone. (S ee Stone-work, Metal-work.) 

The antiquity of man in America has 
been much discussed in recent years, but 
as yet it is not fully agreed that any great 
antiquity is established. Geological for¬ 
mations in the United States, reaching 
well back toward the close of the Glacial 
period, possibly ten thousand years, are 
found to include remains of man and his 
arts; but beyond this time the traces are 
so meager and elements of doubt so 
numerous that conservative students hesi¬ 
tate to accept the evidence as satisfactory. 
(See Antiquity, Calaveras Man, Lansing 
Man, Cares and, Rock-shelters.) 

The literature of the northern arche¬ 
ology is very extensive and can not be 
cited here save in outline. Worthy of 
particular mention are publications by 
(1) Government Departments. U. S. 


Interior Dept.: Reps. Survey of Terri¬ 
tories, with papers by Bessels, Holmes, 
Jackson; Contributions to N. Am. Eth¬ 
nology, papers by Dali, Powers, Rau, 
and others. U. S. War Dept.: Reps, of 
Surveys, papers by Abbott, Ewbank, 
Loew, Putnam, Schumacher, Yarrow, and 
others. Education Department, Toronto, 
Canada: Reps, of Minister of Education, 
papers by Boyle, Hunter, Laid law, and 
others. (2) Institutions: Smithsonian 
Institution Annual Reports, Contribu¬ 
tions to Knowledge, Miscellaneous Col¬ 
lections, containing articles by Abbott, 
Dali, Fewkes, Holmes, Jones, Lapham, 
Rau, Squier and Davis, Whittlesey, Wil¬ 
son, and others (see published list); 
National Museum Reports, Proceedings, 
Bulletins, containing papers by Holmes, 
Hough, Mason, McGuire, Wilson, anil 
others (see published list); Bureau of 
American Ethnology Reports, Bulletins, 
containing articles by Cushing, Dali, 
Fewkes, Fowke, Henshaw, Holmes, 
Mindeleff, Thomas, and others (see 
list under article Bureau of American 
Ethnology ); Peabody Museum Reports, 
Memoirs, Archeol. and Ethnol. Papers, 
containing articles by Abbott, Putnam, 
Willoughby, Wyman, and others; Ameri¬ 
can Museum of Natural History, Mem¬ 
oirs, Bulletins, containing articles by 
Hrdlicka, Smith, and others (see pub¬ 
lished list); Museum of Arts and Science 
University of Pennsylvania, Publications, 
containing articles by Abbott, Culin, 
Mercer, and others; Field Columbian 
Museum, Publications, containing papers 
by Dorsey, Phillips, and others; N. Y. 
State Museum Reports; University of 
the State of New York, Bulletins, con- 
containing papers by Beauchamp; Uni¬ 
versity of California, Publications, con¬ 
taining papers by Sinclair and others. 
(3) Academies, Societies, and Associa¬ 
tions: Academy of Natural Sciences of 
Phila., Journal, with numerous mem¬ 
oirs by Moore; American Ethnological 
Society, Transactions, with papers by 
Schoolcraft, Troost, and others; Daven¬ 
port Academy of Science, Proceedings, 
with papers by Farquharson, Holmes, 
and others; American Association for 
the Advancement of Science, Proceed¬ 
ings, with numerous papers; Archaeolog¬ 
ical Institute of America, Papers, con¬ 
taining articles by Bandelier and others; 
National History Society of New Bruns¬ 
wick, Bulletins; International Congress of 
Americanists; Washington Anthropolog¬ 
ical Society; Wyoming Historical and 
Geological Society; Ohio Archaeological 
and Historical Society; Canadian Insti¬ 
tute; American Antiquarian Society; Bos¬ 
ton Society of Natural History. (4) Peri¬ 
odicals: American Geologist; American 
Journal of Science and Art; American An- 


HULL. 30] 


ARCHITECTURE 


77 


thropologist; American Antiquarian; The 
Archeologist; Popular Science Monthly; 
Science; American Journal of Science; 
American Naturalist; Journal of Geology. 
(5) Separate individual publications: 
Abbott, Primitive Industry, 1881; Allen, 
Prehist. World, 1885; Bancroft, Native 
Races, 1882; Brower, Memoirs of Explora¬ 
tions, 1898-1903; Clark, Prehist. Remains, 
1876; Dellenbaugh, North Americans of 
Yesterday, 1901; Fewkes, Journal of 
American Ethnology and Archeology, 
i-iv, 1891-94; Foster, Prehist. Races, 1878; 
Fowke, Archeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; Jones, 

(1) Monumental Remains of Georgia, 
1861, (2) Antiquities of the Southern 
Indians, 1873; McLean, Mound Builders, 
1879; Moorehead, (1) Prehistoric Imple¬ 
ments, 1900, (2) Fort Ancient, 1890, (3) 
Primitive Man in Ohio, 1892; Morgan, 
League of Iroquois, 1854, 1904; Munro, 
Archeology and False Antiquities, 1905; 
Nadaillae, Prehist. Am., 1884; Nordens- 
kiold, Cliff Dwellers of the Mesa Yerde, 
1893; Read and Whittlesey in Ohio Cen¬ 
tennial Rep., 1877; Schoolcraft, Indian 
Tribes, vols. i-iv, 1851-57; Short, North 
Americans of Antiquity, 1880; Starr, First 
Steps in Human Progress, 1895; Squier, 
Antiquities of New' York and the West, 
1851; Terry, Sculp. Anthr. Ape Heads, 
1891; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn., 1897; 
Warden, Recherches sur les antiquit6s 
de l’Amer. Sept., 1827. Wilson, Prehis¬ 
toric Man, 1862; Winsor, Narrative and 
Critical History of America, i, 1884; 
Wright, Man and the Glacial Period, 
1895. For archeological bibliography of 
Ontario, Canada, see 9th Archeological 
Report of Minister of Education, Ontario, 
1897. (w. h. h.) 

Architecture. The simple constructions 
of the tribes n. of Mexico, although al¬ 
most exclusively practical in their pur¬ 
pose, serve to illustrate many of the ini¬ 
tial steps in the evolution of architecture; 
they are hence worthy of careful consider¬ 
ation by the student of culture history. 
Various branches of the building arts are 
treated separately under appropriate 
heads (see Adobe, Cliff-dwellings, Earth- 
lodge, Fortifications, Grass-lodge, Habita¬ 
tions, Kivas, Mounds, Pile-dwellings, Pue¬ 
blos, Tipis), but as these topics are there 
considered mainly in their ethnologic as¬ 
pects, they will here be briefly treated as 
products of environment and as illustra¬ 
tions of the manner in which beginnings 
are made and the higher architectural 
forms are evolved. The kind and char¬ 
acter of the buildings in a given district 
or region depend on a number of condi¬ 
tions, namely: («) The capacity, habits, 
and characteristics of the people; (b) the 
cultural and especially the social status of 
the particular peoples; (c) the influence 
of neighboring cultures; (d) the physi¬ 


ography of the district occupied; (e) the 
resources, animal, vegetal, and mineral, 
and especially the building materials 
available within the area; (/) climate. 
These in the main are the determining 
factors in the art development of all peo¬ 
ples in all times, and may be referred to 
somewhat at length. 

(1) In these studies it is necessary that 
the man himself and especially his men¬ 
tal capacities and characteristics should 
be considered as essential elements of the 
environment, since he is not only the 
product, as is his culture, of present and 
past environments, but is the primary 
dynamic factor in all culture develop¬ 
ment. 

(2) The culture status of the people— 
the particular stage of their religious, so¬ 
cial, technical, and esthetic development:— 
goes far tow r ard determining the charac¬ 
ter of their buildings. The manner in 
w hich social status determines the char¬ 
acter of habitations is dw'elt on by Mor¬ 
gan (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iv, 1881)^ to the 
apparent exclusion of other criteria. 
Within the area n. of Mexico the various 
phases characterizing the culture of nu¬ 
merous tribes and groups of tribes are 
marked by more or less distinctive habi¬ 
tations. People of the low'est social 
grade are content with nature’s cano¬ 
pies—the sky, the forest, and the over¬ 
hanging rocks—or construct simple 
shelters of brush or bark for protec¬ 
tion against sun, w ind, and rain. Some 
build lodges of skins and mats, so 
light that they may be (arried from 
place to place as the food quest or the 
pressure of foes requires; while others, 
higher in the scale, construct strong 
houses of timber or build fortress-like 
pueblos of hewn stone or adobe. Along 
with the succession of steps in culture 
progress there goes progressive differen¬ 
tiation of use. The less advanced tribes 
have only the dwelling, while the more 
cultured have, in addition, fortifications, 
temples, civic structures, tombs, storage 
houses, observation towers, dams, canals, 
reservoirs, shelters for domestic animals, 
and various constructions employed in 
transportation. Social customs and re¬ 
ligion play each a part in the results ac¬ 
complished, the one acting on the habi¬ 
tation and the other giving rise to a sepa¬ 
rate and most important branch of the 
building arts. 

(3) The building arts of the tribes n. 
of Mexico have been little affected by 
outside influence. In the N. there is 
only a limited contact with the Siberian 
tribes, w r hich have littletogive; and in the 
S. nearly a thousand miles separate the 
tribes of ours, border from the semicivil- 
ized Indians of central Mexico. Soslowly 
did intertribal influence act within the 


78 


ARCHITECTURE 


[b. a. e. 


area here included, and so fully does en¬ 
vironment control culture, that in many 
cases where the conditions have remained 
reasonably stable distinct styles of build¬ 
ing exist almost side by side, and have 
so existed from time immemorial. 

(4) It is apparent at a glance that the 
physiographic characters of a country ex¬ 
ercise strong influence on aboriginal 
building arts, and at the same time have 
much to do with the trend of culture in 
general and with results finally achieved 
in civilization. Dwellings on the open 
plains necessarily differ from those in the 
mountains, those of a country of forests 
from those of an arid region, and those 
of rich alluvial bottoms from those of the 
land of plateaus and cliffs. Even the 
characteristics of the particular site im¬ 
press themselves strongly on the build¬ 
ings and the building group. 

(5) In any area the natural resources 
have much to do with determining the 
economic status of the people and, ac¬ 
cording as they are favorable or unfa¬ 
vorable, foster or discourage progress in 
the arts. The building materials availa¬ 
ble to a people exercise a profound influ¬ 
ence on the building arts. The presence 
of plentiful, easily quarried stone, well 
adapted to building purposes, permits and 
encourages rapid development of these 
arts, while its absence may seriously re¬ 
tard their development, and in fact may 
be accountable for the backward condi¬ 
tion of a people not only in this activity 
but in the w T hole range of its activities. 
The highest development is not possible 
without stone, which alone of the mate¬ 
rials available to uncivilized man for 
building purposes is sufficiently perma¬ 
nent to permit the cumulative growth 
necessary to the evolution of the higher 
forms of the art of architecture. 

(6) Climate is an element of the high¬ 
est significance in the history of building. 
In warm, arid districts shelter is not often 
a necessity, and a primitive people may 
have no buildings worthy of the name; 
but in the far N. carefully constructed 
dwellings are essential to life. The hab¬ 
itations of an arid region naturally differ 
from those of a region where moisture 
prevails. 

The conditions thus outlined have op¬ 
erated in the various culture areas n. of 
the Rio Grande to produce the diversi¬ 
fied results observed; and these results 
may now be passed briefly in review. 
Among the most clearly defined and char¬ 
acteristic of these environments are (1) 
the Arctic area, (2) the North Pacific 
area, (3) the middle Pacific area, (4) the 
arid region of the S. W., (5) the Basin 
range and Rocky mtn. highlands, (6) the 
Mississippi lowlands and the middle S., 

(7) the woodlands of the N. and E., and 


(8) the Gulf coast and Florida. Within 
some of these the conditions are practi¬ 
cally uniform over vast areas, and the re¬ 
sults are uniform in proportion, w'hile in 
others conditions are greatly diversified, 
numerous more or less distinct styles of 
house construction having developed al¬ 
most side by side. As with the larger 
areas, each inferior division displays re- 



EARTH-COVERED HOUSE, WESTERN ESKIMO. (MURDOCH) 


suits due to the local conditions. It may 
be observed that of the various condition¬ 
ing agencies of environment one may 
dominate in one district and another in 
another district, but with our present 
imperfect knowledge of the facts in a ma¬ 
jority of cases the full analysis of condi¬ 
tions and effects is not yet possible. 

It is not to be expected that the build- 



SECTION OF HOUSE, WESTERN ESKIMO. (MURDOCH) 


ing arts can flourish within the Arctic 
circle. Along the many thousands of 
miles of n. shore line agriculture is out 
of the question. Wood is known only 
as it drifts from the s. along the icy 
shores, and save for the presence of 
oil-producing animals of the sea primi¬ 
tive man could not exist. Snow, ice, 
stone, bones of animals, and driftwood 



PLAN OF HOUSE, WESTERN ESKIMO. (MURDOCH) 


are the materials available for building, 
and these are utilized for dwellings and 
storage places according to the require¬ 
ments and capacities of the tribes. The 
house is depressed beneath the surface of 
the ground, partly, perhaps, better to 
withstand the cold, and partly, no doubt, 
because of the lack of necessary timbers 
to build walls and span the space re- 

































BULL. 30] 


ARCHITECTURE 


79 



quired above ground. The large winter 
houses are entered by a long underground 
passage, the low walls of which are 
constructed of whale bones, stones, or 
timbers, while the house has a frame¬ 
work of timbers or whale-ribs covered 
with earth. The ground-plan and inte¬ 
rior arrangement are simple, but well per¬ 
fected, and remarkably uniform over the 
vast extent of the Arctic shore line. The 
snow house is particularly a product of 
the N. Snow and ice, available for the 
greater part of the year, are utilized in 
the construction of dwellings unique on 
the face of the earth. These are built 
of blocks of compacted snow held in po¬ 
sition, not by utilizing any of the ordinary 
principles of construction, but by permit¬ 
ting the blocks to crystallize by freezing 
into a solid dome of ice—so solid that the 
key block may be omitted for a window 
or for the passage of smoke without dan¬ 
ger to the structure. This house lasts 
during the winter, and in the summer 


SNOW-HOUSE, HUDSON BAY ESKIMO. ("TURNER) 

melts away. The summer houses are 
mere shelters of driftwood or bones cov¬ 
ered with skins. There is no opportunity 
for esthetic display in such houses as 
these, and clever as the Eskimo are in 
their minor art work, it is not likely that 
esthetic effect in their buildings, interior 
or exterior, ever received serious consid¬ 
ers tion. The people do not lack in ability 
and industry, but the environment re¬ 
stricts constructive effort to the barest 
necessities of existence and effectually 
blocks the way to higher development. 
Their place in the culture ladder is by no 
means at the lowest rung, but it is far 
from the highest. 

The houses of the N. W. coast derive 
their character largely from the vast for¬ 
ests of yellow cedar, which the enter¬ 
prising people were strong enough to 
master and utilize. They are substantial 
and roomy structures, and indicate on 
the part of the builders decided ability 
in planning and remarkable enterprise 
in execution. They mark the highest 
achievement of the native tribes in wood 
construction that has been observed. 
The genius of this people applied to 
building with stone in a stone environ¬ 
ment might well have placed them 


among the foremost builders in America. 
Vast labor was expended in getting out 
the huge trunks, in hewing the planks, 
posts, and beams, in carving the house 
and totem poles, and in erecting the 


HOUSES OF NORTHWEST COAST TRIBES. HIGHEST EXAMPLES OF 
WOOD CONSTRUCTION. (niBLACk) 


constructions. It is indeed a matter of 
regret that the genius of such a people 
should be expended upon a material of 
which no trace is left, save in museums, 
after the lapse of a few generations. 

The contrast, cjue to differences in en- 


massive structures. The facade, with its 
mythological paintings and huge her¬ 
aldic columns, is distinctly impressive. 
In early days the fortified towns, de¬ 
scribed by Vancouver and other pioneer 
explorers, were striking and important 


CLIFF HOUSE, MESA VERDE, COLORADO. HIGHEST TYPE OF 
Stone Construction 





















80 


ARCHITECTURE 


[b. a. e. 


vironment, between the buildings of the 
N. W. coast and those of the Pueblo re¬ 
gion is most striking. With greater abil¬ 
ity, perhaps, than the Pueblos, the north¬ 
ern peoples labored under the disadvan¬ 
tage of employing materials that rapidly 
decay, while 
with the Pueblos 
the results of the 
skill and effort 
of one genera¬ 
tion were sup¬ 
plemented by 
those of the 
next, and the 
cumulative re¬ 
sult was the 
great pueblo. 

The lot of the 
Pueblo tribes 
fell in the midst 
of a vast region 
of cliffs and plateaus, where the means of 
subsistence admitted of the growth of large 
communities and where the ready-quar¬ 
ried stone, with scarcity of wood, led inevi¬ 
tably to the building of houses of masonry. 
The defensive motive being present, it di¬ 
rected the genius of the people toward con¬ 
tinued and united effort, and the dwelling 
group became a great stronghold. Cumu¬ 
lative results encouraged cumulative 
effort; stronger and stronger walls were 
built, and story grew on story. The art of 
the stone mason was mastered, the stones 
were hewn and laid in diversified courses 
for effect, door and window openings 
were accurately and symmetrically 
framed with cut stone and spanned with 
lintels of stone and wood, and towers of 
picturesque outline in picturesque situa¬ 
tions, now often in ruins, offer suggestions 
of the feudal castles of the Old World. 
(See Cliff-dwellings , Pueblos.) 

Standing quite alone among the build¬ 
ing achievements of the tribes n. of Mex¬ 
ico are the works of the ancient mound¬ 
building Indians of the Mississippi valley 
and the Southern states. Earthworks, 
grand in proportions and varied in char¬ 
acter, remain as a partial and imperfect 
index of the extent and nature of the 
architecture of these people. The great 
embankments probably inclosed thriv¬ 
ing villages, and the truncated pyramids 
must have supported temples or other 
important structures. But these, built no 
doubt of wood or bark, have wholly dis¬ 
appeared. The nearest approach to per¬ 
manent house construction observed in e. 
United States is found in the clay-covered 
wattle-work walls of the more southerly 
tribes (Thomas; Adair). The people had 
acquired only partial mastery of the build¬ 
ing materials within their environment. 
Earth, sand, and clay, indestructible and 
always at hand, were utilized for the sub¬ 


structures and embankments, and the 
cumulative growth gave massive and en¬ 
during results, but the superstructures 
were of materials difficult to utilize in an 
effective manner by a stone-age people 
and, being subject to rapid decay, were 
not cumulative. 
Had the envi¬ 
ronment fur¬ 
nished to this 
4'roup of vigor¬ 
ous and talented 
tribes the mate¬ 
rials for adobe 
cement or plen¬ 
tiful deposits of 
readily quarried 
stone, the re¬ 
sults might have 
been very differ¬ 
ent: the mound- 
builders’ culture 
and the mound-building people might 
have been no mean factor in the Ameri¬ 
can nation to-day. 

The primitive habitations of the Pa¬ 
cific slope from the Straits of Fuca to the 
Gulf of California afford a most instruct¬ 
ive lesson. In the N. the vigorous tribes 
had risen to the task of utilizing the vast 
forests, but in the S. the improvident and 
enervated natives were little short of 
homeless wanderers. In the N. the 
roomy communal dwellings of the Co¬ 
lumbia valley, described by Lewis and 
Clark, were found, while to the S. one 
passes through varied environments 
where timber and earth, rocks and caves, 
rushes, bark, grass, and brush in turn 



MOKELUMNE CEREMONIAL HOUSE, CALIFORNIA. (SANTA 
FE RY.) 


played their part in the very primitive 
house-making achievements of the 
strangely diversified tribesmen. 

In the highlands of the Great Divide 
and in the vast inland basins of the N. 
the building arts did not flourish, and 
houses of bark, grass, reeds, the skins of 
animals, and rough timbers covered with 
earth gave only necessary shelter from 
winter blasts. In the whole expanse of 
the forest-covered E. the palisaded for- 





















BULL. 30 ] 


ARCHITECTURE 


81 




tural details are utilized freely for pur¬ 
poses of embellishment. A people that 
could carve wood and stone and could 
decorate pottery and weave baskets of 
admirable pattern could not mold the 
unwieldy elements of the building into 
esthetic form. But esthetic suggestions 
and features did not pass entirely unap¬ 
preciated. Some of the lower types of 
structures, such as the grass lodge and 
the mat house, partaking of textile tech¬ 
nique, were characterized by elements of 
symmetry, grace, and rhythmic repeti¬ 
tion of details. The wooden house of 


simple pile dwellings set in the shallow 
waters were all that the conditions of 
existence in a mild climate required. 


tress and the long-house of the Iroquois, 
in use at the beginning of the historical 
period, mark the highest limit in the 
building arts. On the Gulf coast the 


TIPI OF PLAINS TRIBES; SHOSHONI. MADE OF SKINS OR 
CLOTH 


Method of Construction of the Iroquois 
Long-house 


It is probably useless to speculate on 
what might have been in store for the 
native builders had they been permitted 
to continue unmolested throughout the 
ages. The stone- 
builders had the 
most promising 
outlook, but they 
were still in 
the elementary 
stages of the arts 
of construction. 

They had not 
tnade the one 
essential step to¬ 
ward great build¬ 
ing—the discov¬ 
ery of the means 
of covering large 
spaces without 
the use of wood. 

Although they 
were acquainted 
with many essential elements of construc¬ 
tion, they had devised neither the offset 
span of stone nor the keystone arch. 

In none of these areas had the tribes 
reached the stage in the building arts 
where constructive features or architec¬ 


GRASS LODGE, WICHITA. EMBELLISHED CONSTRUCTION. (moONEy) 

See Boas, Dorsey, 


MAT HOUSE, CAROLINA INDIANS. (AFTER JOHN WHITE, 

OF THE ROANOKE COLONY, 158s) 

the N. W. had massiveness of form and 
boldness of outline, and the sculptured 
and painted details lent much esthetic 
interest; while in the arid region the 
stone-builders had introduced a number 
of features to relieve the monotony of 
walls and to add to the pleasing effect of 
the interiors. In these things the native 
mind certainly took some pleasure, but 
probably little thought was given to ar¬ 
chitectural effect as this is known to the 
more civilized 
tribes, such as 
the Maya of Yu¬ 
catan, who spent 
a vast amount of 
time and energy 
on the purely 
decorative fea¬ 
tures of their 
stone buildings. 

Numerous au¬ 
thors dwell more 
or less on the 
buildings of the 
tribes n. of Mex¬ 
ico, but only the 
more important 
publications will 
here be cited. 
Fewkes, Hoffman, 


the Mindeleffs, Nelson, Mrs Stevenson, 
Thomas, and Turner in various Reports, 
B. A. E. ; Adair, Hist. Amer. Inds., 1775; 
Bandelier, various reports in Papers Arch. 
Inst. Am., 1881-92; Beauchamp, Iroquois 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-6 





















82 


ARDECO-ARENDAHRONON 


[b. a. e. 


Trail, 1892; Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1895, 1897; Catlin, N. Am. Inds., 1841, 
1866; Dawson in Proc. and Trans. Royal 
Soc. Can., ix, 1891; De Bry, Collectiones 
Peregrinationum, 1590-1628; Dellen- 
baugh, North Americans of Yesterday, 
1901; Du Pratz, Hist. Louisiane, hi, 1758; 
Eells in Smithson. Rep. 1887, 1889; Fos¬ 
ter, Prehist. Races, 1878; Goddard in 
Univ. Cal. Pubs., i, no. 1, 1903; Hariot, 
Narr. First Plant. Virginia, repr. 1893; 
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., vn, no. 3, 
1905; Jackson in Metropol. Mag., xxn, 
no. 3, 1905; Lewis and Clark, Exped. 
(1804-06), Coues ed., 1893; MacLean 
Mound Builders, 1879; Moore, various 
memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1894-1905; Morgan in Cont. N. Am. 
Ethnol., iv, 1881; Morice in Trans. Can. 
Inst., iv, 1895; Niblack in Nat. Mus. 


n. w. of them. The women are supposed 
to be of ordinary stature. They hunt in 
kaiaks and provide for their husbands, 
who are covered with hair and are so tiny 
that they carry them about in their 
hoods.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 640, 
1888. 

Areitorae. A Papago village s. of So- 
norita, Sonora, Mexico.—Box, Adven¬ 
tures, 262, 1869. 

Arekw. A Yurok village on the coast 
at the mouth of Redwood cr., n. w. Cal. 
The town of Orick, 2 m. up the stream, 
takes its name therefrom, (a. l. k.) 
Oruk.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 139, 
1853. 

Arenal (Span.: ‘sandy ground,’ ‘des¬ 
ert’). A village, presumably Piman, on 
the Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., Ariz.; 
pop. 557 in 1860 (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 



MASONRY WALL, ANCIENT PUEBLO, NEW MEXICO. ELEMENTARY EMBELLISHMENT 


Rep. 1888, 1890; Nordenskiold, Cliff 
Dwellers of the Mesa Verde, 1893; Pow¬ 
ers in Cont. N. Am. Ethnol.,' hi, 1877; 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-vi, 1851—57; 
Smith, Hist. Va., repr. 1819; Squier, 
Antiq. N. Y. and West, 1851; Squier and 
Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 1848; Starr, 
First Steps in Human Progress, 1895; 
Swan in Smithson. Cont., x.xi, 1874; 
Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 
1900; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn., 1897. 
See Habitations, (w. h. h.) 

Ardeco. A small tribe or village, prob¬ 
ably Caddoan, indefinitely described as 
on a s. w. branch of Arkansas r. in the 
18th century.—La Harpe (1719) in Mar- 
gry, Dec., vi, 299, 1886. 

Adero.—La Harpe, op. cit. Ardeco.—Beaurain in 
Margry, op. cit. (mentioned with the Touacaro= 
Tawakoni). 

Ardnainiq. A mythical people believed 
by the Central Eskimo to live far to the 


June 19, 1863), and 616 in 1869 (Browne, 
Apache Country, 290, 1869). 

Arendahronon (‘ rock people ’). One of 
the four chief tribes of the Huron, having 
the most easterly situation and claiming 
to be the first allies of the French, who 
founded among them the missions of St 
Jean Baptiste, St Joachim, and Ste Elisa¬ 
beth. In 1639 they were said to have 
been resident of the Huron country for 
about 50 years. In 1649, on the political 
destruction and expulsion of the Huron 
tribes by the Iroquois, the inhabitants of 
St Jean Baptiste submitted in a body to 
the Seneca, who adopted them. They 
constituted the Stone, or Rock, tribe of 
the Huron. See Jesuit Relation for 1639, 
40,1858.. (j. n. b. h.) 

Ahrenda.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 182, 1855. Ahrendah- 
ronons.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 522, 1853. 
Ahrendaronons.—Jes. Bel. for 1640, 61,1858. Aren- 
da.—Charlevoix (1635), New France, ii, 72, 1872. 








BULL. 30] 


ARENDAONATIA-ARIKARA 


83 


Arendacronons.—Jes. Rel. for 1641,67, 1858. Aren- 
daehronons.—Ibid., 83. Arendaenhronons.—Jes. 
Rel. for 1642, 82, 1858. Arendarhononons.—Jes. 
Rel. for 1635, 24, 1858. Arendaronnons,—Jes. Rel. 
for 1644,99,1858. Arendaronons.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 
90, 1858. Arendarrhonons.—Jes. Rel. for 1637, 109, 
1858. Arendoronnon.— Jes. Rel. for 1636, 123, 1858. 
Avendahs.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6,154, 
1883. Enarhonon.—Sagard, Gr. Voy., I, 79, 1865. 
Nation d’ Atironta.—Ibid. Nation de la Roche.— 
Jes. Rel., in, index, 1858. Nation du Rocher.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1657, 23, 1858. Renarhonon.—Sagard, 
Hist, du Can., I, 234, 1865. 

Arendaonatia. A Huron village in On¬ 
tario about 1640.—Jes. Rel. for 1637, 159, 
1858. 

Anendaonactia.—Ibid., 165. 

Arente. A Huron village in Ontario 
about 1640.—Jes. Rel. for 1637,150, 1858. 

Argillite (slate). This material, which 
is much diversified in character, was in 
very general use by the tribes n. of 
Mexico for the manufacture of utensils, 
implements, and ornaments, and for 
carvings in general. The typical slates, 
characterized by their decided foliate 
structure, were used to some extent 
for implements; but the more massive 
varieties, such as the greenish striped 
slates of the Eastern states, the argillite 
of New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and the 
states to the s., and the black slate of 
the N. W. coast were usually preferred 
for polished implements and carvings. 
Argillite was much used by the tribes of 
the Delaware and Susquehanna valleys, 
and an ancient quarry of this material, 
situated at Point Pleasant, Pa., has been 
described by Mercer (see Mines and Quar¬ 
ries) . Material from this and other quar¬ 
ries in the Appalachian region was used 
mainly for flaked implements, including 
leaf-shaped blades, knives, and arrow and 
spear heads, and these are widely dis¬ 
tributed over the Middle Atlantic states. 
The fine-grained greenish and striped 
slates of the Eastern and Middle states 
and Canada were extensively used in the 
manufacture of several varieties of ob¬ 
jects of somewhat problematic use, in¬ 
cluding so-called banner-stones, bird- 
stones, and perforated tablets. It is 
probable that, like the green agates and 
jadeites of Mexico, some varieties of this 
stone had special significance with the 
native tribes. The tribes of the N. W. 
coast employ a fine-grained slate in their 
very artistic carvings, which the Haida 
obtain chiefly from deposits on Slate 
or., Queen Charlotte ids. This slate has 
the desirable qualities of being soft and 
easily carved when freshly quarried, and 
of growing harder with time. It is 
black and takes an excellent polish 
(Niblack). See Sculpture and Carving , 
Totem-poles. 

References to the use of argillite and 
slate occur in many w orks relating to eth¬ 
nologic and archeologic subjects, but are 
not sufficiently important to be given in 


full. Worthy of special mention are Ab¬ 
bott, Prim. Industry, 1881; Holmes in 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Mercer in Pubs. 
Univ. Penn., vi, 1897; Niblack in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Rau in Smithson. 
Rep. 1872, 1873; Squier and Davis in 
Smithson. Cont., i, 1848. (w. h. h. ) 

Arhau. A village or tribe formerly 
between Matagorda bay and Colorado r., 
Texas; mentioned to Joutel in 1687 by 
the Ebahamo Indians. The region w r as 
the domain of the Karankawan tribes, 
with whom the Arhau people were possi¬ 
bly affiliated. See Gatschet, Karankawa 
Inds., Peabody Mus. Papers, i, 35, 46, 
1891. (a. c. f.) 

Arhan.—Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
I, 137, 1846. Arhau.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c. 
ill, 288, 1878. 

Aribaiba. A former rancheria of the 
Sobaipuri, on the Rio San Pedro, not far 
from its junction with the Gila, in s. Ari¬ 
zona. It w r as visited by Father Kino 
about 1697. See Arivaipa. 

Aribabia.—De l’lsle, Map Am., 1703. S. Pantaleon 
Aribaiba.—Kino (1697) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Hex. States, I, 265, 1884. 

Aridian. A term applied to the early 
occupants of the desert region of the 
S. W., particularly of s. Arizona, whose 
culture, as exemplified by their art and 
other remains, was similar to that of the 
Zuni.—Cushing in Proc. Int. Cong. Am., 
vii, 157, 1890. See Pueblos. 

Original Pueblo.—Ibid. Shiwian.—Ibid, (so called 
from the similarity in the “Aridian” and the 
Shiwi or Zuni cultures). 

Arikara (Skidi: ariki ‘horn,’ referring 
to the former custom of w r earing the hair 
w T ith two pieces of bone standing up like 
horns on each side of the crest; ra, pi. 
ending). A tribe forming the northern 
group of the Caddoan linguistic family. 
In language they differ only dialectically 
from the Pawnee. 

When the Arikara left the body of 
their kindred in the S. W. they were asso¬ 
ciated with the Skidi, one of the tribes 
of the Pawnee confederacy. Tradition 
and history indicate that at some point 
in the broad Missouri valley the Skidi 
and Arikara parted, the former settling 
on Loup r., Neb., the latter continuing 
n. e. , building on the bluffs of the Missouri 
the villages of which traces have been 
noted nearly as far s. as Omaha. In their 
northward movement they encountered 
members of the Siouan family making 
their way westward. Wars ensued, with 
intervals of peace and even of alliance 
between the tribes. When the w r hite 
race reached the Missouri they found the 
region inhabited by Siouan "tribes, who 
said that the old village sites had once 
been occupied by the Arikara. In 1770 
French traders established relations with 
the Arikara, below r Cheyenne r., on the 
Missouri. Lewis and Clark met the 
tribe 35 years later, reduced in num- 


84 


ARIKARA 


[B. a. e. 


bers and living in three villages between 
Grand and Cannonball rs., Dak. By 1851 
they had moved up to the vicinity of 
Heart r. It is not probable that this 
rapid rate of movement obtained during 
migrations prior to the settlement of the 
Atlantic coast by the English. The 
steady westward pressure of the colonists, 
together with their policy of fomenting 
intertribal wars, caused the continual dis¬ 
placement of many native communities, 
a condition that bore heavily on the 
semisedentary tribes, like the Arikara, 
who lived in villages and cultivated the 
soil. Almost continuous warfare with ag¬ 
gressive tribes, together with the ravages 
of smallpox during the latter half of the 



RUSHING BEAR—ARIKARA 


18th and the beginning of the 19th cen¬ 
turies, nearly exterminated some of their 
villages. The weakened survivors con¬ 
solidated to form new, necessarily com¬ 
posite villages, so that much of their an¬ 
cient organization was greatly modified or 
ceased to exist. It was during this period 
of stress that the Arikara became close 
neighbors and, finally, allies of the Man- 
dan and Hidatsa. In 1804, when Lewis 
and Clark visited the Arikara, they were 
disposed to be friendly to the United 
States, but, owing to intrigues incident 
to the rivalry between trading companies, 
which brought suffering to the Indians, 
they became hostile. In 1823 the Arikara 
attacked an American trader’s boats, kill¬ 


ing 13 men and wounding others. This 
led to a conflict with the United States ; 
but peace was finally concluded. In con¬ 
sequence of these troubles and the fail¬ 
ure of crops for 2 successive years the 
tribe abandoned their villages on the 
Missouri and joined the Skidi on Loup 
r., Neb., where they remained 2 years; 
but the animosity which the Arikara dis¬ 
played toward the white race made them 
dangerous and unwelcome neighbors, so 
that they were requested to go back to 
the Missouri. They did so, and there 
they have remained ever since. Under 
their first treaty, in 1825, they acknowl¬ 
edged the supremacy of the National 
Government over the land and the people, 
agreed to trade only with American citi¬ 
zens, whose life and property they were 
pledged to protect, and to refer all diffi¬ 
culties for final settlement to the United 
States. After the close of the Mexican 
war a commission was sent by the Gov¬ 
ernment to define the territories claimed 
by the tribes living n. of Mexico, between 
the Missouri and the Rocky mts. In the 
treaty made at Ft Laramie, in 1851, with 
the Arikara, Mandan, and Hidatsa, the 
land claimed by these tribes is described 
as lying w. of the Missouri, from Heart 
r., N. Dak., to the Yellowstone, and up the 
latter to the mouth of Powder r., Mont.; 
thence s. e. to the headwaters of the 
Little Missouri in Wyoming, and skirt¬ 
ing the Black hills to the head of Heart 
r. and down that stream to its junction 
with the Missouri. Owing to the non¬ 
ratification of this treaty, the landed rights 
of the Arikara remained unsettled until 
1880, when, by Executive order, their 
present reservation was set apart; this in- 
cludesthe tradingpost, established in 1845, 
and named for Bartholomew Berthold, a 
Tyrolese, one of the founders of the Amer¬ 
ican Fur Company. The Arikara, Man- 
dan, and Hidatsa together share this land, 
and are frequently spoken of, from the 
name of their reservation, as Ft Berthold 
Indians. In accordance with the act of 
Feb. 8, 1887, the Arikara received allot¬ 
ments of land in severalty, and, on ap¬ 
proval of the allotments by the Secretary 
of the Interior, July 10,1900, they became 
citizens of the United States and subject 
to the laws of North Dakota. An indus¬ 
trial boarding school and 3 day schools 
are maintained by the Government on 
Ft Berthold res. A mission board¬ 
ing school and a church are supported 
by the Congregational Board of Mis¬ 
sions. In 1804 Lewis and Clark gave 
the population of the Arikara as 2,600, 
of whom more than 600 were warriors. 
In 1871 the tribe numbered 1,650; by 
1888 they were reduced to 500, and the 
census of 1904 gives the population as 380. 
As far back as their traditions go the Ari- 








BULL. 30 ] 


ARIKARA 


85 


kara have cultivated the soil, depending 
for their staple food supply on crops of 
corn, beans, squashes, and pumpkins. 
In the sign language the Arikara are des¬ 
ignated as “corn eaters,’’ the movement 
of the hand simulating the act of gnawing 
the kernels of corn from the cob. They 
preserved the seed of a peculiar kind of 
small-eared corn, said to be very nutri¬ 
tious and much liked. It is also said that 
the seed corn was kept tied in a skin and 
hung up in the lodge near the fireplace, 
and when the time for planting came 
only those kernels showing signs of ger¬ 
mination were used. The Arikara bar¬ 
tered corn with the Cheyenne and other 
tribes for buffalo robes, skins, and meat, 
and exchanged these with the traders for 
cloth, cooking utensils, guns, etc. Early 
dealings with the traders were carried on 
by the women. The Arikara hunted the 
buffalo in winter, returning to their village 
in the early spring, where they spent the 
time before planting in dressing the pelts. 
Their fish supply was obtained by means 
of basket traps. They were expert swim¬ 
mers, and ventured to capture buffaloes 
that were disabled in the water as the 
herd was crossing the river. Their wood 
supply was obtained from the river; when 
the ice broke up in the spring the Indians 
leaped on the cakes, attached cords to 
the trees that were whirling down the 
rapid current, and hauled them ashore. 
Men, women, and the older children en¬ 
gaged in this exciting work, and although 
they sometimes fell and were swept down¬ 
stream, their dexterity and courage gen¬ 
erally prevented serious accident. Their 
boats were made of a single buffalo skin 
stretched, hair side in, over a frame of 
willows bent round like a basket and 
tied to a hoop 3 or 4 feet in diameter. 
The boat could easily be transported by 
a woman and, according to Hayden, 
“would carry 3 men across the Mis¬ 
souri with tolerable safety.” Before the 
coming of traders the Arikara made their 
cooking utensils of pottery; mortars for 
pounding corn were made with much labor 
from stone; hoes were fashioned from the 
shoulder-blades of the buffalo and the elk; 
spoons were shaped from the horns of the 
buffalo and the mountain sheep; brooms 
and brushes were made of stiff, coarse 
grass; knives were chipped from flint, and 
spears and arrowheads from horn and flint; 
for splitting wood, wedges of horn w T ere 
used. Whistles were constructed to imi¬ 
tate the bleat of the antelope or the call 
of the elk, and served as decoys; pop¬ 
guns and other toys were contrived for 
the children and flageolets for the amuse¬ 
ment of young men. Garments were 
embroidered with dyed porcupine quills; 
dentalium shells from the Pacific were 
prized as ornaments. Matthews and 


others mention the skill of the Arikara 
in melting glass and pouring it into molds 
to form ornaments; they disposed of the 
highly colored beads furnished by the 
traders in this manner. They have pre¬ 
served in their basketry a weave that has 
been identified with one practised by for¬ 
mer tribes in Louisiana—a probable sur¬ 
vival of the method learned when with 
their kindred in the far S. W. The Ari¬ 
kara w r ere equally tenacious of their lan¬ 
guage, although next-door neighbors of 
Siouan tribes for more than a century, 
living on terms of intimacy and inter¬ 
marrying to a great extent. Matthews 
says "that almost every member of each 
tribe understands the language of the 
other tribes, yet speaks his own most 
fluently, hence it is not uncommon to hear 
a dialogue carried on in two tongues. 
Until recently the Arikara adhered to 
their ancient form of dwellings, erecting, 
at the cost of great labor, earth lodges that 
were generally grouped about an open 
space in the center of the village, often 
quite close together, and usually occupied 
by 2 or 3 families. Each village gener¬ 
ally contained a lodge of unusual size, 
in w T hich ceremonies, dances, and other 
festivities took place. The religious cere¬ 
monies, in which each subtribe or village 
had its special part, bound the people 
together by common beliefs, traditions, 
teachings, and supplications that centered 
around the desire for long life, food, and 
safety. In 1835 Maximilian of Wied 
noticed that the hunters did not load on 
their horses the meat obtained by the 
chase, but carried it on their heads and 
backs, often so transporting it from a 
great distance. The man who could 
carry the heaviest burden sometimes gave 
his meat to the poor, in deference to their 
traditional teaching that “the Lord of 
life told the Arikara that if they gave to 
the poor in this manner, and laid burdens 
on themselves, they would be successful 
in all their undertakings.” In the series 
of rites, which began in the early spring 
when the thunder first sounded, corn 
held a prominent place. The ear was 
used as an emblem and w r as addressed as 
“Mother.” Some of these ceremonial 
ears of corn had been preserved for gen¬ 
erations and w r ere treasured with rever¬ 
ent care. Offerings were made, rituals 
sung, and feasts held when the ceremo¬ 
nies took place. Rites were observed when 
the maize was planted, at certain stages 
of its grow’th, and w r hen it w r as harvested. 
Ceremonially associated with maize were 
other sacred objects, which w r ere kept in 
a special case or shrine. Among these 
were the skins of certain birds of cosmic 
significance, also 7 gourd rattles that 
marked the movements of the seasons. 
Elaborate rituals and ceremonies attended 


86 


ARIKARA 


ARITUTOC 


[b. A. E. 


the opening of this shrine and the exhi¬ 
bition of its contents, which were sym¬ 
bolic of the forces that make and keep 
all things alive and fruitful. Aside from 
these ceremonies there were other quasi¬ 
religious gatherings in which feats of 
jugglery were performed, for the An¬ 
kara, like their kindred the Pawnee, 
were noted for their skill in legerdemain. 
The dead were placed in a sitting posture, 
wrapped in skins, and buried in mound 
graves. The property, except such per¬ 
sonal belongings as w^ere interred with 
the body, was distributed among the 
kindred, the family tracing descent 
through the mother. A collection of 
Ankara traditions, by G. A. Dorsey, has 
been published by the Carnegie Institu¬ 
tion (1903). 

The Ankara were a loosely organized 
confederacy of subtribes, each of which 
had its separate village and distinctive 
name. Few of these names have been 
preserved. Lewis and Clark (Exped., i, 
97, 1814) mention Lahoocat, a village 
occupied in 1797, but abandoned about 
1800. How many subtribes were includ¬ 
ed in the confederacy can not now be de¬ 
termined. Lewis and Clark speak of the 
Arikara as the remnant of 10 powerful 
Pawnee tribes, living in 1804 in 3 villages. 
The inroads of disease and war have so re¬ 
duced the tribe that little now remains 
of their former divisions. The following 
names were noted during the middle 
of the last century: Hachepiriinu (‘young 
dogs’), Hia (‘band of Cree’), Hosuk- 
haunu (‘foolishdogs’), Hosukhaunukare- 
rihu (‘little foolish dogs’), Sukhutit 
(‘blackmouths’), Kaka (‘band of Crows’), 
Okos (‘band of bulls’), Paushuk (‘band 
of cut-throats’). Some of these may re¬ 
fer to military and other societies; others 
seem to be nicknames, as “Cut-throats.” 

(a. c. f.) 

A da ka' da ho.—Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 125, 
1877 (Hidatsaname). Ah-pen-ope-say.—Anon. MS. 
Crow vocab., B. A. E. (Crow name). Ai-dlk'-a-da- 
hu.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 294, 1886 
( = ‘people, of the flowing hair’). Ankora.—Ind. 
Aff.Rep.,63,1851. A-pan-to'-pse.—Hayden,Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val.,402,1862 (Crow name). Ara- 
caris.—Gass, Voy., 400, 1810. Araka'daho.—Mat¬ 
thews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 125,1877 (Hidatsa name). 
Archarees.— Morgan in No. Am. Rev., 493, 1869. 
Aricaras.—Beaurain (ca . 1720) in Margry, D6c., 
Vi, 289, 1886. Aricarees.—Saxton quoted by 
Stevens, Rep. on Pac. R. R., 239,1854. Aricarie.— 
Schermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., n, 34,1814. 
Aricaris.—Gass, Jour., 48, 1807. Aricas.—Carte 
des Poss. Ang., 1777. Ariccarees.—Culbertson in 
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 115, 1851. Aricharay.—Sen. 
Doc. 47, 16th Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1820. Arichard.— 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st sess., 63, 1832. 
Arickara.—Clark and Cass in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117, 
20th Cong., 2d sess., 99, 1829. A-rick-a-ra-one.— 
Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., u, lxxxiv, 1823 
(Hidatsa name). Arickaraws.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 
94, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 13, 1856. Arickare.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 297, 1835. Arickarees.—Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 403, 1836. Arickera.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 245, 
1846. A-rlk'-a-hu.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., 294, 1886 (Hidatsa form). Arikara.— 

Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 13, 1877 (Mandan 


name). A'-rl-ka'-ra.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., 294, 1886 (abbreviation of the Man- 
dan Ai-dlk'-a-da-hu). Ankare.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
247, 1877. Arik'-are.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., 294, 1886 (name of Hidatsa ori¬ 
gin). Arikarees.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
533, 1878. Arikari.—Burton, City of Saints, 119, 
1861. Arikera.— Sen.Ex.Doc.90,22d Cong., lstsess., 
29, 1832. Arikkaras.—Maximilian, Trav., 143, 
1843. Arrekaras.—McCoy, Ann. Reg., 52, 1836. 
Arricara.—La Harpe (1719) in Margry, D6c., vi, 293, 
1886. Arricarees.—Warren (1855), Nebr. and Dak., 
50, 1875. Arrickaraws.—Dougherty (1837) in H. R. 
Doc. 276,25th Cong., 2d sess., 16,1838. Arrickaree.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,67,1857. Arrickora.—Webb. Al- 
towan, i, 83, 1846. Arriekaris.—Domenech, Des. 
N.Am., I, map, 1860. Auricara.—U. S. Ind. Treaties, 
447, 1837. Aurickarees.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
i, 523, 1851. Biccarees.—Domenech, Des. N. Am., 
i, 431,1860. Black Pawnee.—Prichard, Phys. Hist. 
Mankind, v, 408, 1847 (applying properly to the 
Wichita; the Black-bear Pawnee of the Omaha). 
Corn Eaters.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 
130,1851 (given as their own name). Eokoros.— 
Lahontan, New Voy., I, 110, 1703. Eskoros.—La- 
hontan, misquoted by Schoolcraft,Trav., viii, 1821. 
Ka'-nan-in.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val.,326,1862(Arapahoname: ‘peopleAvhosejaws 
break in pieces’). Kees.—Terry in Rep. Sec. War, 
pt 1, 35,1869 (misprint). Kicaras.—Lewis, Trav., 
15, 1809 (misprint), la Ree.—Lewis and Clark, 
Disc., 22, 1806. Okoro.—Lahontan, New Vov., i, 
120, 1703. O-no'-ni-o.—Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862 (Cheyenne name). 
Padani.—For forms of this name as applied to the 
Arikara, see Pawnee. Pa')i(i u -d£za. —Dorsey, MS. 
(pegiha Diet., B. A. E., 1878 (Omaha and Ponka 
name: ‘Sand Pawnee’). Panis ricaras.—Jefferys, 
Fr. Dom. Am., pt. 1, 143, 1761. Panyi puda.—Dor¬ 
sey, MS. Tciwere vocab., B. A. E., 1879 (Iowa, Oto, 
and Missouri name: ‘Sand Pawnee’). Pawnee- 
Rikasree.—Nuttall, Jour., 81, 1821. Pucaras.— 
Alegre, Hist. Comp. Jesus, 1,336,1841. Racres.— 
Lewis, Trav., 15,1809. Recars.—Ibid. Ree.—Pow¬ 
ell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 60,1891. Re-ka-ras.—Bon¬ 
ner, Life of Beckwourth,255, 1856. Re-ke-rahs.— 
Ibid., 162. Rhea.—Hallam in Beach, Ind. Misc., 
134, 1877. Ric'-aras.—Perrin du Lac, Voy. Louisi- 
ane, 257,1850. Ricaree.—Snelling, Tales of Trav., 
35, 1830. Ricaries.—Domenech, Des. N. Am., I, 
443,1860. Ricaris.—Gass, Jour., 82,1810. Ricars.— 
Lewis and Clark, Disc., 24,1806. Ric-ca-ras.—Hun¬ 
ter, Captivity, 87,1823. Riccaree.—Boiler, Among 
Inds. in the Far West, 210, 1868. Riccarrees.— 
Catlin, O-kee-pa, 40,1867. Richara.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 
90, 22d Cong., 1st sess., 12,1832. Rickaras.—Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 30, 1806. Rickarees.—Gass, 
Jour., 48, 1807. Rickerees.—Ibid., 53. Rickrees.— 
Ibid., 48. Ricora.—Boudinot, Star in West, 128, 
1816. Rikaras.—Irving, Astoria, 199,1849. Rik- 
kara.—Maximilian, Trav., 167, 1843. Ris.—Ibid, 
(so called by the Canadians). Sa-nish'.—Hav- 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val,, 356, 1862, 
Satrahe.— Balbi, Atl. Ethnog., 54, 1826. S’quies'- 
tshi.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 371, 
1886 (Salish name). Starrahe.—Bradbury, Trav., 
iii, 1817. Star-rah-he'.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 
22,1806 (own name). Ta-nish'.—Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 356,1862 (‘ the people’: own 
name). Tsa'-nish.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., 294,1886. Wakinas.—Hildreth, Dragoon Cam¬ 
paigns, 164. 1836 (probably the same). Wa-zi'- 
ya-ta Pa-da'-niij.— Cook, MS. Yankton vocab., 
B. A. E., 184, 1882 (‘northern Pawnee’: Yank¬ 
ton name). 

Ariswaniski. A Chnagmiut village on 
the right bank of the lower Yukon, 
Alaska.—Coast Surv. map, 1899. 

Aritutoc. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the n. side of Rio Gila at or near the 
present Oatman flat and the great bend of 
the river, in s. Arizona. It was visited by 
Father Sedelmair in 1744, and by Anza, 
Font, and Garc£s in 1775. 

Aritoac. —Garc£s, Diary, 117, 1900, Aritutoc.— 
Sedelmair cited by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 


bull. 30] ARIVACA- 

366, 1889. Rinconada.— Anza and Font (1780), 
ibid., 392. 

Arivaca. A former Piman village w. of 
Tubac, s. Ariz., dating from prior to 1733. 
It was abandoned during the Pima revolt 
of 1751, before which time it was a visita 
of the mission of Guevavi. (Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 385-6, 1889.) 

Aribac.—Anon. rep. (1777) in Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Hex., 385,1889. Aribaca.—Rudo Ensayo (1763), 
161, 1863. 

Arivaipa (Nevome Pima: aarivapa, 

‘ girls,’possibly applied to these people 
on account of some unmanly act). An 
Apache tribe that formerly made its 
home in the canyon of Arivaipa cr., a 
tributary of the Rio San Pedro, s. Ariz., 
although like the Chiricahua and other 
Apache of Arizona they raided far south¬ 
ward and were reputed to have laid 
waste every town in n. Mexico as far as 
the Gila prior to the Gadsden purchase in 
1853, and with having exterminated the 
Sobaipuri, a Piman tribe, in the latter 
part of the 18th century. In 1863 a com¬ 
pany of California volunteers, aided by 
some friendly Apache, at Old Camp Grant, 
on the San Pedro, attacked an Arivaipa 
rancheria at the head of the canyon, kill¬ 
ing 58 of the 70 inhabitants, men, women, 
and children—the women and children 
being slain by the friendly Indians, the 
men by the Californians—in revenge for 
their atrocities. After this loss they sued 
for peace, and their depredations practical¬ 
ly ceased. About 1872 they were removed 
to San Carlos agency, where, with the 
Pinalenos, apparently their nearest kin¬ 
dred, they numbered 1,051 in 1874. Of 
this number, however, the Arivaipa 
formed a very small part. The remnant 
of the tribe is now under San Carlos and 
Ft Apache agencies on the White Moun¬ 
tain res., but its population is not sep¬ 
arately enumerated, (f. w. h. ) 

Apache Arivapah.—Hoffman in 10th Rep. Hayden 
Surv., 461, 1878. Araivapa.—White, MS. Hist. 
Apaches, B. A. E., 1875. Aravaipa.—Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1873, 342, 1874. Aravapa.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1871, 54,1872. Aravapai.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 246,1877. 
Aravapa Piiials.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 54, 1872. 
Aravipais.—Keane in Stanford,Compend.,501,1878. 
Aribaipa.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 306, 1877. Aribapais.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1875. Arivapa.—Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 292,1886. Arivapa Apaches.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
141, 1868. Arivapais.—Haines, Am. Ind., 135,1888. 
Arivaypa Apaches.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 3, 1872. 
Arrivapis,—Colyer (1871) quoted in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
299,1886. Avipa Apache.—Palmer, Pinella and 
Avipa MS. voeab., B. A. E. 

Arivechi. A pueblo of the Jova and the 
seat of a Spanish mission founded in 1627; 
situated in e. Sonora, Mexico, about lat. 
29° KF. Pop. 466 in 1678, 118 in 1730. 
It is no longer an Indian settlement. 
Aribechi.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 56, 
1890. Arivetzi.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 345, 1864. 
San Francisco Javier Arivechi.—Zapata (1678) 
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 245,1884. 

Ariziochic. A Tarahumare settlement 
on the e. bank of one of the upper tribu¬ 
taries of Rio Yaqui, lat. 28° 25', long. 107°, 


ARROKISA 87 

Chihuahua, Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 323, 1864. 

Arizonac (prob. ‘small springs’ or ‘few 
springs’). Evidently a former Papago 
rancheria situated between Guevavi and 
Saric, in Sonora, Mexico, just below the 
present s. boundary of Arizona, not far 
from the site of Nogales. In 1736-41 
the finding in its vicinity of some balls of 
native silver of fabulous size caused a 
large influx of treasure seekers, and 
through the fame that the place thus 
temporarily acquired, its name, in the 
form Arizona, was later applied to the 
entire country thereabout, and, when 
New Mexico was divided, was adopted 
as the name of the new Territory. In 
1764-67 Arizonac was a visita of the mis¬ 
sion of Saric, on the upper waters of 
Rio Altar, Sonora. See Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 362, 371, 1889. (f. w. h.) 

Arizpe (according to Bandelier a cor¬ 
rupted abbreviation of Huc-aritz-pa, the 
native name, while Hardy says it is from 
the Opata aripa, ‘ the great congrega¬ 
tion of ants’). A former Opata pueblo 
on Rio Sonora, about lat. 30° 25', Sonora, 
Mexico. It became the seat of a Spanish 
mission in 1648, and was afterward the 
capital of the state, but its importance as 
a town decreased after the removal of the 
capital to Ures, in 1832, and subsequent 
Apache depredations. Arizpe is identical 
with the Arispa of Castaneda and the 
Ispa of Jaramillo, visited by Coronado in 
1540. The population of the mission was 
416 in 1678, 316 in 1730, and 359 in 1777 
(Doc. Hist. Mex., 4t’n ser., i, 469, 1856, 
and authors quoted below). It is no 
longer an Indian town. There are ruins 
n. w. of the village, (f. w. h. ) 

Aripa.—Hardy, Trav. in Mex., 442, 1829 (Opata 
name: ‘the great congregation of ants’). Arispa.— 
Castaneda (1540) in 14th Rep. B. A. E. 515,1896. 
Arispe.—Kino (1696) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th ser., 
1,265,1856. Asuncion Arizpe.—Zapata (1678) quoted 
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 246,1884. Guaga- 
rispa.—Castaneda (1540) in Ternaux-Compans, 
Voy., ix, 158, 1838. Huc-aritz-pa.—Bandelier, 
Gilded Man, 175, 1893 (Opata name). Ispa.— 
Jaramillo (1540) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 585, 1896. 
Nuestra Senora de la Asuncion Arizpe.—Orozco v 
Berra, Geog., 343, 1864 (mission name). 

Arkansite. A variety of the mineral 
brookite, so called from having been dis¬ 
covered at Magnet Cove, Ark. (Dana, 
Text-book Mineralogy, 278, 1888); from 
the place and ethnic name Arkansas and 
the English suffix -ite. (a. f. c. ) 

Arkokisa. A people formerly living in 
villages chiefly along lower Trinity r., 
Tex. The Spanish presidio of San Agus- 
tin de Ahumada was founded among 
them in 1756, and 50 TJascaltec families 
from s. Mexico were settled there, but 
the post was abandoned in 1772. They 
were allied with the Aranama and the 
A ttacapa, and were on friendly terms also 
with the Bidai, but their linguistic affin¬ 
ity is not known. According to Sibley 


88 


ARKSUTITE—ARMOR 


[b. a. e. 


they numbered about 80 men in 1760-70 
and subsisted principally on shellfish and 
fruits, and in 1805 their principal town 
was on the w. side of Colorado r. of Texas, 
about 200 m. s. w. of Nacogdoches. They 
had another village n. of this, between 
the Neches and the Sabine, nearer the 
coast than the villages of the Adai. 
Sibley speaks of the Arkokisa as migra¬ 
tory, but they could not always have been 
entitled to that characterization. It is 
probable that, owing to the conditions 
incident to the intrusion of the white 
race, the people became demoralized; 
their tribal relations were broken up, 
their numbers decimated by disease, and 
the remnant of them was finally scat¬ 
tered and disorganized. Of their habits 
very little is known; their language seems 
to have been distinct from that of their 
neighbors, with whom they conversed by 
signs, (a. c. f.) 

Accocesaws.—Lewis, Travels, 191, 1809. Accocke- 
saws.—Fisher, Int. Acc., 201,1812. Accokesaus.— 
Brackenridge, Views of La., 81, 1814. Accoke- 
saws.—Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 71, 1806. Aco-ke- 
sas.—Brackenridge, op. cit., 87. Acossesaws.— 
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. 
Arkokisa.—Yoakum, Hist. Tex., map, 1855. En- 
quisacoes.—Clarke in Tex. Hist. Assn. Quar., ix, 
53, 1905. Horcaquisacs.—MS. of, 1770 quoted by 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 656, 1886. Horcon- 
citos.—Bancroft, ibid., 643. Aorcoquisa.—Tex. 
State archives, Aug. 26,1756. Horcoquisaes.—Doc. 
of 1793 in Tex. State archives. Naquizcoza.— 
Gentl. of Elvas quoted by Shea, Early Voy., 149, 
1861 (same?). Ocosaus.— Soc. Geog. Mex., Bui., 
266, 1870. Orcoquisa.—Doc. of 1805 in Tex. State 
archives. Orcoquisacs.—MeziSres (1778) quoted by 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 661, 1886. Orco- 
quizas.—Doc. of 1791 in Tex. State archives. 
Orquisaco.—Yoakum, Hist. Tex., I, 49, 1855. Ox- 
quoquiras.—Robin, Voy. a la Louisiane, in, 14, 
1807. 

Arksutite. According to Dana (Text¬ 
book Mineralogy, 265, 1888) a fluorine 
mineral whose exact nature is not yet 
known, named from the Eskimo Arlcsut, 
a fiord in Greenland where it was discov¬ 
ered. (a. f. c.) 

Arlagnuk. An Iglulirmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage near Melville pen., on Iglulik id., 
lat. 69° IV 33 /7 .—Parry, Second Voy., 
355, 1824. 

Arliaktung. An Eskimo village of the 
Akudnirmiut, n. of Home bay, e. Baffin 
land.—Boas in Deutsch. Geog. Blatt., viii, 
34, 1885. 

Armor. Shields and body armor appear 
to have been in more or less general use 
among the Indian tribes n. of Mexico. 
The Eskimo are said not to employ the 
shield, but it was in use among the tribes 
of the plains, the S. W., and British Colum¬ 
bia, and occasionally among the Iroquois 
and other eastern Indians. The Plains 
Indians made their shields of buffalo hide, 
covered with buckskin or elk skin; others 
used basketry (Pueblo), cedar rods (Nav- 
aho), osiers or bark (Virginia Indians, 
Iroquois). With the exception of a sort 
of oblong armor-shield 4 to 5 ft. long, made 


of elk hide by the Ntlakyapamuk (Teit in 
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Anthrop. ser., 
i, 1900), the Indian shield is circular. The 
decoration of the shield, the ceremonies 
connected with its acquisition, its use in 
ritual, etc., constitute important chapters 
in the art and religion of the aborigines. 
The shield ceremony of the Hopi and the 
heraldry of the shield among the Kiowa 
have respectively been specially studied 
by Dr J. Walter Fewkes and Mr James 
Mooney of the Bureau of American Eth¬ 
nology. Helmets and head defenses are 
found among some of the tribes of the 
North Pacific coast, and are often orna¬ 
mented with the crest of the owner. North 
of Mexico body armor presents at least 
five types: Rows of overlapping plates of 
ivory, bone, and, since contact with the 
whites, iron (Eskimo, Chukchi); twined 
wooden slats (N. W. coast, Shasta, Iro¬ 
quois, Virginia Indians); twined wooden 
rods (Aleut, N. W. coast, Columbia r. 
tribes, Klamath, Hupa, Iroquois, Pow¬ 
hatan, etc.); bands of skin arranged in 
telescoping fashion 
(Chukchi); coats, 
etc., of hardened hide 
(Tlingit, Haida, Chi¬ 
nook, Hupa, Sho- 
shoni, Navaho, Paw¬ 
nee, Mohawk, etc.). 

The ivory plate ar¬ 
mor is believed by 
Boas to be an imita¬ 
tion of the iron armor 
of the Chukchi, and 
the other plate armor 
may also be of n. e. 

Asiatic (Japanese) body armor of wood; tungit 
origin. The presence 
of the buffalo in the Mississippi region, 
and of the elk, moose, etc., in other parts 
of the country, had much to do with the 
nature of armor. The data concerning 
armor among the Indians are summarized 
by Hough (Primitive American Armor, 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1893, 625-651). One sort 
of defensive armor did the early English 
adventurers in Virginia good service on 
one occasion. At the suggestion of Mosco 
and the friendly Indians, Capt. John 
Smith, when fighting a tribe on the Ches¬ 
apeake, made use of the “ Massawomek 
targets,” or shields (Smith, Va., i. 185, 
1819; Holmes in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 18, 
1896). These the English set “aboutthe 
forepart of our Boat, like a forecastle, 
from whence we securely beat back the 
Salvages from off the plaine without any 
hurt. ’ * And so, protected by ‘ ‘ these light 
Targets (which are made of little small 
sticks woven betwixt strings of their 
hempe, but so firmly that no arrow can 
possibly pierce them), ” the English drove 
back the enemy. In general, it may be 
said that the shield and lance were used 







BULL. 80] 


ARMOUCHIQUOIS—AROSAGUNT AOOOK 


89 


chiefly by the equestrian tribes of the 
open country, while body armor, with the 
knife and tomahawk, were more in favor 
with those of the timber and coast region. 
See Shields, (a. f. c. ) 

Armouchiquois (apparently a French cor- 
corruption of Alemousiski, ‘ land of the lit¬ 
tle dog,’ from allum ‘dog/ ousis diminu¬ 
tive, ac or auk ‘land/ “ for there were 
many little dogs in the prairies of this terri¬ 
tory.”—Maurault). The name given by 
the Abnaki to the country of the Indians 
of the New England coast s. of Saco r., Me. 
Williamson (Hist. Maine, i, 477, 1832) 
says they were the Marechites (Malecite) 
of St Johns r., but Champlain, who vis¬ 
ited the Armouchiquois country, says that 
it lies beyond, that is, s. of, Choiiacoet 
(Sokoki), and that the language differed 
from that of the Souriquois (Micmac) and 
the Etchimin. Laverdiere affirms that 
“the French called Almouchiquois sev¬ 
eral peoples or tribes that the English 
included under the term Massachusetts.” 
According to Parkinan (Jesuits in N. Am., 
xxi, 1867) the term included the Algon- 
quian tribes of New England—Mohegan, 
Pequot, Massachuset, Narraganset, and 
others “in a chronic state of war with the 
tribes of New Brunswick and Nova Sco¬ 
tia.” (c. T.) 

Allemouchicois. —Champlain ( ca . 1635), (Euvres, v, 
pt., 2, 33, 1870. Almauchicois.— Vetromile, Abna- 
kis, 50, 1866. Almonchiguois. —Champlain (1616), 
(Euvres, IV, 73,1870. Almouchicoisen.— Dutch map 
of 1616in N. Y. Col. Doc. 1,1856. Almouchiquois. — 
Maurault, Hist. Abenakis, 4, 1866. Almouchi- 
quoise. —Champlain (1605), (Euvres, in, 62, 1870. 
Armouchicois. —Champlain (1603), ibid., n, 58, 
1870. Armouchiquois. —Jes. Rel. for 1611, 33, 1858. 
Armuciceses. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 158,1786. 

Arocoum. See Raccoon. 

Arontaen (‘it is a lying log.’—Hewitt). 
A Huron village situated near Pt. Cock- 
burn, on the n. shore of Nattawasaga bay, 
Ontario, in 1636.—Jesuit Relation for 1636, 
133, 1858. 

Arosaguntacook. A tribe of the Abnaki 
confederacy, formerly living in Androscog¬ 
gin co., Me. Their village, which bore the 
same name, was on Androscoggin r., prob¬ 
ably near Lewiston. The various names 
used indiscriminately for the tribe and the 
river may be resolved into the forms Am- 
moscoggin and Arosaguntacook, which 
have received different interpretations, all 
seeming to refer to the presence of fish in 
the stream. The nameseemstohavebeen 
used only for the part of the river in An¬ 
droscoggin co. between the falls near Jay 
and those near Lewiston. The present 
name was obtained by changing the first 
part of the word to Andros in compliment 
to Gov. Andros. The Arosaguntacook 
lived on the edge of the first English settle- 
mentsin Maine, and consequently suffered 
much in the various Indian w T ars, in which 
they took a prominent part from 1675 until 
their removal to Canada. Their town was 


burned by the English in 1690. As the 
settlements pushed into the interior the 
Wawenoc, at the mouth of the river, 
moved up and joined the Arosaguntacook, 
and at a later period the combined tribes 
moved still farther up and joined the 
Rocameca. These movements led to 
much confusion in the statements of 
writers, as the united tribes were com¬ 
monly knowm by the name of the lead¬ 
ing one, the Arosaguntacook or Andros¬ 
coggin. These tribes, together with the 
Pigwacket, removed to St Francis, Canada, 
soon after the defeat of the Pequawket by 
Love well in 1725. Here the Arosagun¬ 
tacook were still the principal tribe and 
their dialect (Abnaki) was adopted by 
all the inhabitants of the village, who 
were frequently known collectively as 
Arosaguntacook. (j. m.) 

Adgecantehook. —Doc. of 1709 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., V, 86,1855. Alsigantegwi. —Gatschet, Penob¬ 
scot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobscot name for the 
St Francis Indians; pi. Alsigant£gwiak). Ama- 
rascoggin.— Stoughton (1695) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 613, 1855. Amarascogin.— La Potherie, 
Hist. Am., iv, 40, 1753. Amarescoggin. —Trum¬ 
bull, Conn., ii, 77, 1818. Amariscoggins. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, V, 223, 1855. Amaroscoggen. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 108, 1848. Amasagunti- 
cook. —True in N. Y. Hist. Mag., 238, 1864. Amer- 
ascogen. —Pike (1690) in Drake, Ind. Wars, 152, 
1825. Amerescogin. —Douglass, Summary, I, 185, 
1755. Ameriscoggins. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., II, 32, 1836. Amerriscoggin.— Maine 
Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 357, 1853. Amircankanne. — 
Vaudreuil (1721) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 904, 
1855. Amireaneau. —Doc. of 1693 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ix, 571, 1855 (misprint). Ammarascog- 
gin.— George town treaty (1717) in Maine Hist. Soc. 
Coll., VI, 261,1859. Ammarescoggin. —SameinN.H. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., II, 242, 1827. Ammascoggen. — 
Church (1690) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 
271, 1861. Amonoscoggan. —Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 
3, 104, 1848. Amonoscoggin.— Mather, Magnalia 
(1702) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 150,1848. 
Amoscongen. —Sagadahoc treaty (1690) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 1,113,1825. Amresscoggin. — 
Casco conference (1727) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., 

II, 261,1827. Anasaguntacooks. —Sullivan in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., IX, 210, 1804. Anasagunta- 
kook. —Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Anasagunti- 
cooks.— Williamson in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
475, 1855. Anasuguntakook. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ill, 527,1853. Androscoggins. —Sullivan in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., IX, 210, 1804. An- 
moughcawgen. —Smith (1629), Virginia, II, 177, 
repr. 1819. Annirkakan. —La Potherie, Hist. Am., 

III, 189, 1753. Aresaguntacooks. —Colman (1726) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi, 115, 1800. 
Arisaguntacooks.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 152, 
1848. Arosagantakuk. —Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 500, 1878. Arosaguntacook. —Drake, Trag. 
Wild., 144, 1841. Arosaguntakuk. —Vater, Mith- 
ridates, pt. 3, sec. 3, 390, 1816. Arouseguntecook. — 
Douglass, Summary, I, 185, 1755. Arrasagunta- 
cook. —Falmouth conf. (1727) in Maine Hist. Soc. 
Coll., Ill, 438, 1853. Arreaguntecooks. —Falmouth 
treaty report (1726), ibid., 386. Arreguntenocks. — 
Penhallow (1726) in N. II. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 129, 
1824. Arreraguntecook. —Falmouth treaty report, 
op. cit. Arreruguntenocks. —Niles (ca. 1761) in 
Mass. Hist.Soc.Coll., 4th s.,v,365,1861. Arresagon- 
tacook.— Casco conf. (1727) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
II, 261, 1827. Arresaguntacooks. -Falmouth conf. 
report (1727) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., in, 413, 
1853. Arresaguntecook. —Falmouth treaty report 
(1726), ibid., 386-390. Arreseguntecook. —Ibid. 
Arreseguntoocook. —Falmouth treaty journal 
(1749), ibid., IV, 157, 1856. Arresuguntoocooks. — 
Ibid., 155. Arseguntecokes. —Document of 1764 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 641,1856. Arsikanteg8. — 



90 


AROtfGHCOND—ARROWHEADS 


tB. A. £, 


French letter (1721) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 
s., Vin, 262, 1819. Arunseguntekooks.—La Tour, 
map, 1779. Aruseguntekooks.—Jefferys, French 
Dom., pt. 1, map, 1761. Assagunticook.—Record 
(1755) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vn, 186, 1876. 
Ersegontegog.—Gyles (1726), ibid., ill, 357, 1853. 
Massakiga.—Purohas (1625), ibid., V, 156,1857. 

Aroughcond, Aroughcun. See Raccoon. 

Arpik. An Eskimo village in w. Green¬ 
land, lat. 73°.—Meddelelser om Gron- 
land, viii, map, 1889. 

Arrohattoc (cf. Delaware aUahattek, 
‘empty,’ ‘all gone.’—Heckewelder). A 
tribe of the Powhatan confederacy, form¬ 
erly living in Henrico co., Va. They had 
30 warriors in 1608. Their chief village, 
of the same name, was on James r., 12m. 
below the falls at Richmond, on the spot 
where Henrico was built in 1611. (j. m. ) 

Arrohateck.—Smith (1629), Virginia, I, 142, repr. 
1819. Arrohattock.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 7, 
1848. Arrowhatocks.—Smith, op. cit., I, 116. Ar- 
rowhatoes.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816. 
Arsahattock. —Smith, op. cit., II, 10. Irrohatock. — 
Ibid., i, 117. 

Arrowheads. The separate tips or points 
of arrow-shafts. Among the Indian tribes 



STONE ARROWHEADS, EASTERN FORMS. (ABOUT 1-2) 


many were made of flint and other varie¬ 
ties of stone, as well as bone, horn, antler, 
shell, wood, and copper. Copper was 
much used by such tribes as were able to 
obtain a supply from the L. Superior region 
and to some extent by those of British 
Columbia and Alaska. Iron has largely 
taken the place of these materials since 
the coming of the whites. In stone im¬ 
plements of this class the only line of dis¬ 


tinction between arrowheads and spear¬ 
heads is that of size. Very few flint 
arrowheads are as much as 2 inches long, 
and these are quite slender; thick or 
strong ones are much shorter. Solid 
flesh, being almost as resistant as soft 
rubber, could not be penetrated by a 
large pro¬ 
jectile un¬ 
less it 
were pro¬ 
pelled by 
greater 
power 
than can 
be ob¬ 
tained 
from a 
bow with¬ 
out artifi¬ 
cial aid which is not at the command of a 
savage. The shape of thestone arrowhead 
among the Indian tribes is usually triangu¬ 
lar or pointed-oval, though some have 
very slender blades with expanding base. 
Many of them are notched. These were set 
in a slot in the end of the shaft and tied 
with sinew, rawhide, or cord, which passed 
through the notches. Those without 
notches were secured by the cord passing 
over and under the angle at the base in a 
figure-8 fashion. It is said that war ar¬ 
rows often had the head loosely attached, 
so that it would 
remain in the 
wound when the 
shaft was with¬ 
drawn, while 
the hunting 
point was firmly 
secured in order 
that the arrow 
might be recov- 
ered entire. 

Glue, gum, and 
cement were 
used in some sec¬ 
tions for fixing 
the point or for 
rendering the 
fastening more 
secure. The ac¬ 
companying dia¬ 
gram will ex¬ 
plain the differ¬ 
ent terms used with reference to the 
completed arrow head. A specimen which 
has the end rounded or squared instead 
of pointed is known as a “bunt.” As 
a rule both faces are worked off equally 
so as to bring the edge opposite the middle 
plane of the blade, though it is sometimes 
a little on one side. For the greater 
part these seem to be redressed ordinary 
spearheads, knives, or arrowheads whose 
points have been broken off, though some 
appear to have been originally made in 


.■O 





Arrowhead nomenclature, (a, Point; 
b, Edge; c, Face; d, bevel; e, 
Blade; /, tang; g, Stem; h, Base; 
i, Notch; k, Neck; m, Barb or 
Shoulder) 











BULL. 30] 


ARROWS, BOWS, AND QUIVERS 


91 


this form. A few are smooth or polished 
at the ends, as if used for knives or scrap¬ 
ers; but most of them have no marks of 
use except occasionally such as would re¬ 
sult from being shot or struck against a 
hard substance. It is probable that their 
purpose was to stun birds or small game, 
in order to secure the pelt or plumage free 
from cuts or blood stain. They are rela¬ 
tively few in number, though widely dis¬ 
tributed in area. The Eskimo employ 
arrowheads of stone of usual forms. 

Consult Abbott (1) Prim. Indus., 1881, 
(2) in Surv. W. 100th Merid., vn, 1879; 
Beauchamp in Bull. N. Y. State Mus., 
no. 16, 1897, and no. 50, 1902; Fowke in 
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Moorehead, ^re- 
hist. Impls., 1900; Morgan, League of the 
Iroquois, 1904; Nordenskiold, Cliff Dwell¬ 
ers of Mesa Verde, 1893; Rau in Smithson. 
Cont., xxn, 1876; Wilson in Rep. Nat, 
Mus. 1897,1899; the Reports of the Smith¬ 
sonian Inst. ; the Am. Anthropologist; the 
Am. Antiquarian; the Archaeologist; the 
Antiquarian, (g. f. w. h. h. ) 

Arrows, Bows, and Quivers. The bow 
and arrow was the most useful and uni¬ 



versal weapon and implement of the 
chase possessed by the Indians n. of 
Mexico for striking or piercing distant 
objects. 

Arrows.—A complete Indian arrow is 
made up of si x parts: Head, shaft, foreshaft, 
shaftment, feathering, and nock. These 
differ in material, form, measurement, 


decoration, and assemblage, according to 
individuals, locality, and tribe. Arrow¬ 
heads have three parts: Body, tang, and 
barbs. There are two kinds of arrow¬ 
heads, the blunt and the sharp. Blunt 
heads are for stunning, being top-shaped. 
The Ute, Paiute, and others tied short 
sticks crosswise on the end of the shafts 
of boys’ arrows for killing birds. Sharp 



TYPES OF ARROWHEADS 


arrowheads are of two classes, the lance¬ 
olate, which can be withdrawn, and the 
sagittate, intended for holding game or 
for rankling in the wound. The former 
are used on hunting, the latter on war or 
retrieving arrows. In the S. W. a sharp¬ 
ened foreshaftof hard wood serves for the 
head. Arctic and N. W. coast arrows 
have heads of ivory, bone, wood, or cop¬ 
per, as well as of stone; elsewhere they are 
more generally of stone, chipped or pol¬ 
ished. Many of the arrowheads from 
those two areas are either two-pronged, 
three-pronged, or harpoon-shaped. The 
head is attached to the shaft or foreshaft by 
lashing with sinew, by riveting, or with 
gum. Among the Eskimo the barbed 
head of bone is stuck loosely into a socket 
on the shaft, so that this will come out 
and the head rankle in the wound. The 
barbs of the ordinary chipped head are 
usually alike on both sides, but in the 
long examples from ivory, bone, or wood 
the barbing is either bilateral or uni¬ 
lateral, one-barbed or many-barbed, alike 
on the two sides or different. In addition 
to their use in hunting and in war, arrows 
are commonly used in games and cere¬ 
monies. Among certain Hopi priesthoods 
arrowheads are tied to bandoleers as or¬ 
naments, and among the Zuni they are 
frequently attached to fetishes. 

Arrowshafts of the simplest kind are 
reeds, canes, or stems of wood. In the 
Arctic region they are made of driftwood 
or are bits of bone lashed together, and 
are rather short, owing to the scarcity of 
material. The foreshaft is a piece of 
ivory, bone, or heavy wood. Among the 
Eskimo foreshafts are of bone or ivory on 
wooden shafts; in California, of hard 
wood on shafts of pithy or other light 
wood; from California across the conti¬ 
nent to Florida, of hard wood on cane 

























92 


ARROWS, BOWS, AND QUIVERS 


[b. a. e. 


shafts. The shaftments in most arrows 
are plain; but on the W. coast they are 



USE OF ARROWSHAFT STRAIGHTENER; SHOSHONI (eLLIOTt) 



Ivory Arrowshaft Straight- 
ener; Eskimo, (length, 

3 IN.) 


painted with stripes for identification. 
The Plains Indians and the Jicarillas cut 
shallow grooves lengthwise down their 
arrowshafts, called “lightning marks,” 
or “ blood grooves,” and also are said by 
Indians to keep the shaft- from warping 
(Fletcher) or to direct the flight. The 
feathering is an important feature in the 
Indian arrow, differing in the species of 
birds, the kind and number of feathers 
and in their form, 
length, and manner 
of setting. As to the 
number of feathers, 
arrows are either 
without feathering, 
two-feathered, or 
three-feathered. As to form, feathers are 
whole, as among most of the Eskimo and 
some S. W. tribes, or halved or notched 
on the edges. In length they vary from 
the very short feathering on S. W. arrows, 
with long reed shafts and heavy fore¬ 
shafts, to the long feath¬ 
ering on Plains arrows, 
with their short shafts of 
hard wood. The feath¬ 
ers are set on the shaft- 
ment either flat or radi¬ 
ating; the ends are lashed 
with sinew, straight or 
doubled under, and the 
middles are either free or glued down. In 
some arrows there is a slight rifling, due 
perhaps to the twist needed to make a tight 
lit, though it is not said that this feature is 
intentional. The nocks of arrows, the 
part containing the notch for the string, 
are, in the Arctic, flat; in the S., where 
reed shafts "were employed, cylindrical; 
and in localities where the shafts were 
cut, bulbous. Besides its use as a piercing 



Stone Arrowshaft Rub¬ 
ber; Massachusetts, 
(length, 4 1-2 IN.) 



sandstone Arrowshaft Rub¬ 
ber; Indian Grave, British 
Columbia. (h. i. Smith) 


or striking projectile, special forms of the 
arrow were employed as a toy, in gaming, 
in divining, in rain¬ 
making, in ceremony, 
in symbolism, and in 
miniature forms with 
prayer-sticks. The 
modulus in arrow¬ 
making was each 
man’s arm. The 
manufacture of ar¬ 
rows was usually at¬ 
tended with much 
ceremony. 

The utmost flight, 
the certainty of aim, 
and the piercing pow¬ 
er of Indian arrows 
are not known, and stories about them 
are greatly exaggerated. The hunter or 
warrior got as near to his victim as possi¬ 
ble. In shooting he drew his right hand 
to his ear. His bow register scarcely ex¬ 
ceeded 60 pounds, yet arrows are said 
to have gone quite through the 
body of a buffalo (Wilson in Rep. 
Nat." Mus. for 1897, 811-988). 

Bows.—The bows of the 
North Americans are quite 
as interesting as their ar¬ 
rows. The varied envi¬ 
ronments quickened the 
inventive faculty and pro¬ 
duced several varieties. 
They are distinguished by 
the materials and the 
parts, which are known as 
back, belly, wings, grip, 
nocks, and string. The 
varieties are as follow: 
(1) Self-bow, made of one 
piece; (2) compound bow, 
of several pieces of wood, 
bone, or horn lashed to¬ 
gether; (3) sinew-backed 
bow, a bow of driftwood or 
other brittle wood, rein¬ 
forced with cord of sinew 
wrapped many times 
about it lengthwise, from 
wing to wing; (4) sinew- 
lined bow, a self-bow, the 
back of which is further 
strengthened with sinew 
glued on. In some cases 
bows were decorated in 
colors. 

The varieties character- 
S;:: izing the culture areas are 
(boas); b, sinew- distinguished as follow: 
lined bow, navaho 1 . Arctic .—Compound 
1 mason) bows in the E., very 

clumsy, owing to scarcity of material; 
the grip may be of wood, the wings 
of whale’s ribs or bits of wood from 
whalers. In the W. excellent sinew- 



Types of Bows. 




























BULL. 30] 


ARROWS, BOWS, AND QUIVERS 


93 


backed bows were made on bodies of 
driftwood. Asiatic influence is apparent 
in them. (See Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
399-669, 1884; Murdoch in 9th Rep. 
B. A. E., 133-61-7, 1887, and Rep. Nat. 
Mus. for 1884, 307-316.) 

2. Northern Athapascan. —Long, straight 
bows of willow or birch, with wooden 
wrist-guards projecting from the belly. 

3. St Lawrence and Eastern United 
States. —Self-bows of ash, second-growth 
hickory, osage orange (bois d’arc), oak, 
or other hard wood. 

4. Gulf States. —Long bows, rectangu¬ 
lar in section, of walnut or other hard 
wood. 

5. Rocky mts. —(1) Self-bow of osage 
orange or other hard wood; (2) a com¬ 
pound bow of several strips of buffalo 
horn lashed together and strengthened. 

6. North Pacific coast. —Bows with 
rounded grip and flat wings, usually 
made of yew or cedar. 

7. Fraser-Columbia region. —Similar to 
No. 6, but with wings much shorter and 
the nocks curved sharply outward. 

8. Interior basin. —A long slender stick 
of rude form; many are strengthened by 
means of a sinew lining on the back and 
cross wrappings. 

9. California. —Like No. 7, but neatly 
lined with sinew and often prettily deco¬ 
rated. 

10. Southwest. —Like No. 8, but seldom 
sinew-lined (Navaho). Small painted 
bows are used much in ceremony, espe¬ 
cially by the Pueblos, who deposit them 
in shrines. In the s. part of this area 
long cottonwood bows with cross lashing 
are employed by Yuman and Piman 
tribes. The Jicarillas make a cupid’s 
bow, strengthened with bands of sinew 
wrapping. 

The bows e. of the Rockies have little 
distinction of parts, but the w. Eskimo 
and Pacific slope varieties have flat wings, 
and the former shows connection with 
Asia. The nocks are in some tribes alike, 
but among the Plains Indians the lower 
nock is cut in at one side only. Bow¬ 
strings are of sinew cord tied at one end 
and looped at the other. 

Wrist-guard. —When the bowman’s 
left arm was exposed he wore a wrist- 
guard of hide or other suitable material 
to break the blow of the released string. 
Wrist-guards were also decorated for cere¬ 
monial purposes. 

Arrow release. —Arrow release is the 
way of holding the nock and letting loose 
the arrow in shooting. Morse describes 
four methods among the tribes N. of Mex¬ 
ico, the first three being Indian: (1) Pri¬ 
mary release, in which the nock is held 
between the thumb and the first joint of 
the forefinger; (2) secondary release, in 


which the middle and the ring fingers 
are laid inside of the string; (3) tertiary 
release, in which the nock is held be¬ 
tween the ends of the forefinger and the 
middle finger, while the first three fin¬ 
gers are hooked on the string; (4) the 
Mediterranean method, confined to the 
Eskimo, whose arrows have a flat nock, 
in which the string is drawn with the 
tips of the first, second, and third fingers, 
the nock being lightly held between the 
first and the second fingers. Morse finds 




Primary Arrow Release 




that among the North American tribes, 
the Navaho, Chippewa, Micmac, and Pe¬ 
nobscot used the primary release; the 
Ottawa, Chippewa, and Zuni the second¬ 
ary; the Omaha, Arapaho, Cheyenne, 
Assiniboin, Comanche, Crows, Siksika, 
and some Navaho, the tertiary. 

Quivers. —The form of the quiver de¬ 
pended on the size of the bow and ar¬ 
rows; the materials, determined by the 
region, are skin or wood. Sealskin quiv¬ 
ers are used in the Arctic region; beauti¬ 
fully decorated examples of deerskin are 
common in Canada, also e. of the Rock¬ 
ies and in the Interior basin. On the 
Pacific coast cedar quivers are employed 
by the canoe-using tribes, and others 
make them of skins of the otter, moun¬ 
tain lion, or coyote. 

In addition to the works cited under 
the subject Arrowheads , consult Cushing 
(1) in Proc. A. A. A. S., xliv, 1896, (2) 
in Am. Anthrop., vm, 1895; Culin, Am. 
Indian Games, 24th Rep. B. A. E., 1905; 
Mason, N. Am. Bows, Arrows, and Quiv- 








94 


ARROYO GRANDE-ART 


t B. A. E. 


ers, in Rep. Smithson. Inst. 1893, 1894; 
Murdoch, Study of Eskimo Bows, Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1884, 1885; Morse, Arrow Re¬ 
lease, in Bull. Essex Inst., 1885; Arrows 
and Arrow-makers, in Am. Anthrop., 45- 
74, 1891; also various Reports of the Bu¬ 
reau of American Ethnology, (o. t. m. ) 

Arroyo Grande. A Pima settlement in 
s. Arizona with 110 inhabitants in 1858. 

Del Arroyo Grande. —Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 
1858. 

Arseek. A tribe living in 1608 in the 
vicinity of the Sarapinagh, Nause, and 
Nanticoke (Smith, Hist. Va., i, 175, 
repr. 1819). They are not noted on 
Smith’s map, but the Nause and Nanti¬ 
coke are, by which their location is in¬ 
dicated as on Nanticoke r., in Dorches¬ 
ter or Wicomico co., Md. (j. m.) 

Aroeck. — Bozman, Maryland, 1 ,12,1837 (misprint). 
Arsek. — Purchas (1625), Pilgrimes, iv, 1713. 

Arsuk. An Eskimo village in s. Green¬ 
land, w. of Cape Farewell, lat. 61°.— 
Nansen, First Crossing of Greenland, 
map, 1890. 

Art. The term ‘ ‘ art ’ ’ is sometimes ap¬ 
plied to the whole range of man’s cultural 
activities, but as here employed it is in¬ 
tended to refer only to those elements of 
the arts which in the higher stages of cul¬ 
ture come fully within the realm of taste 
and culminate in the ornamental and 
fine arts (see Ornament ). Among primi¬ 
tive peoples many of these esthetic ele¬ 
ments originate in religious symbolism. 
Among the tribes n. of Mexico such 
elements are exceedingly varied and im¬ 
portant, and extend in some degree to 
all branches of the arts in which plastic 
graphic, sculptural, constructional, and 
associative processes are applicable, as 
well as to the embellishment of the hu¬ 
man person. These symbolic elements 
consist very largely of natural forms, es¬ 
pecially of men and beasts, and of such 
natural phenomena as the sun, stars, 
lightning, and rain; and their introduc¬ 
tion is probably due largely to the general 
belief that symbols carry with them some¬ 
thing of the essence, something of the 
mystic influende of the beings and poten¬ 
cies which they are assumed to represent. 
In their introduction into art, however, 
these symbols are subject to esthetic in¬ 
fluence and supervision, and are thus 
properly classed as embellishments. In 
use they are modified in form by the va¬ 
rious conventionalizing agencies of tech¬ 
nique, and a multitude of variants arise 
which connect with and shade into the 
great body of purely conventional deco¬ 
ration. Not infrequently, it is believed, 
the purely conventional designs originat¬ 
ing in the esthetic impulse receive sym¬ 
bolic interpretations, giving rise to still 
greater complexity. Entering into the 
arts and subject to similar influences are 
also many ideographic signs and repre¬ 


sentations which contribute to embellish¬ 
ment and to the development of purely 
esthetic phases of art. These elements, 
largely pictographic, contribute not only 
to the growth of the fine art, painting, 
but equally to the development of the 
recording art, writing. The place occu¬ 
pied by the religious, ideographic, and 
simply esthetic elements in the various 
arts of the northern tribes may be briefly 
reviewed: 

(1) The building arts, employed in 
constructing dwellings, places of worship, 
etc., as practised n. of Mexico, although 
generally primitive, embody various re¬ 
ligious and esthetic elements in their non- 
essential elaborations. As a rule, these 
are not evolved from the constructive fea¬ 
tures of the art, nor are they expressed 
in terms of construction. The primitive 
builder of houses depends mainly on 
the arts of the sculptor and the painter 
for his embellishments. Among Pueblo 
tribes, for example, conventional figures 
and animals are painted on the walls of 
the kivas, and on their floors elaborate 
symbolic figures and religious personages 
are represented in dry-painting (q. v.); at 
the same time nonsignificant pictorial sub¬ 
jects, as well as purely decorative designs, 
occur now and then on the interior walls, 
and the latter are worked out in crude pat¬ 
terns in the stonework of the exterior. 
Though the buildings themselves present 
many interesting features of form and pro¬ 
portion, construction has not been brought 
to any considerable degree under the super¬ 
vision of taste. The dwellings of primitive 
tribes in various parts of the country, con¬ 
structed of reeds, grass, sod, bark, mats, 
and the like, are by no means devoid of 
that comeliness which results from care¬ 
ful construction, but they show few defi¬ 
nite traces of the influence of either sym¬ 
bolism or the esthetic idea. The skin tipis 
of the Plains tribes present tempting sur¬ 
faces to the artist, and are frequently taste¬ 
fully adorned with heraldic and religious 
symbols and with graphic designs painted 
in brilliant colors, while the grass lodge 
is embellished by emphasizing certain 
constructive features in rhythmic order, 
after the manner of basketry. The 
houses of the N. W. coast tribes, built 
wholly of wood, are furnished within 
with carved and painted pillars, whose 
main function is practical, since they 
serve to support the roof, while the to¬ 
tem-poles and mortuary columns outside, 
still more elaborately embellished, are 
essentially emblematic. The walls both 
within and without are often covered 
with brilliantly colored designs embody¬ 
ing mythologic conceptions. Although 
these structures depend for their effect 
largely on the work of the sculptor and 
the painter, they show decided archi- 


BULL. 30] 


ART 


95 


tectural promise, and suggest the possibil¬ 
ities of higher development and final es¬ 
thetic control, as in the great architectu¬ 
ral styles of the Old World. ( See Archi¬ 
tecture, Dry-painting, Habitations.) 

(2) Theartof sculpture, which includes 
also carving, had its birth, no doubt, in 
the fashioning of implements, utensils, 
ornaments, and sacred objects; and em¬ 
bellishments, symbolic and esthetic, 
which were at first entirely subordinate, 
were gradually introduced as culture ad¬ 
vanced, and among some of the north¬ 
ern tribes acquired great prominence. 
The sculpture elaborations consist of life 
elements, such as men and beasts, exe¬ 
cuted in relief and in the round, and hav¬ 
ing an esthetic as well as a religious func¬ 
tion. This strong sculptural tendency is 
well illustrated by the stone pipes, orna¬ 
ments, and images of the mound-builders 
of the Mississippi valley, the carvings of 
the pile-dwellers of Florida, the masks, 
utensils, and totem poles of the N. W. 
coast tribes, and the spirited ivory carv¬ 
ings of the Eskimo. Sculpture, the fine 
art, is but a higher phase of these ele¬ 
mentary manifestations of the esthetic. 
(See Sculpture and Carving.) 

(3) The plastic art was practised with 
much skill by all the more advanced 
American tribes. North of Mexico the 
potter’s art had made exceptional progress 
in two great specialization areas—the 
Pueblo country of the S. W. and the 
Mississippi valley—and symbolic ele¬ 
ments, derived mainly from the animal 
kingdom, were freely introduced, not 
only as modifications of the fundamental 
shapes of vases, but as embellishments 
variously and tastefully applied. The 
supervision of taste extended also to the 
simple forms of vases, the outlines being 
in many cases highly pleasing even to 
persons of culture. (See Pottery .) 

(4) Closely allied with the plastic art is 
the metallurgic art, which had made 
sufficient progress among the tribes n. of 
Mexico to display traces of the strong 
aboriginal bent for the esthetic. From 
the mounds of Ohio, especially from the 
Chillicothe district, many implements, 
ornaments, and symbolic objects of cop¬ 
per have been obtained, certain highly 
conventional ornamental figures in sheet- 
copper being especially noteworthy. 
From mounds of the Etowah group, in 
Georgia, numerous repouss6 images exe¬ 
cuted in sheet-copper have been recovered 
which, as illustrations of artistic as well 
as of mechanical achievement, take prece¬ 
dence over most other aboriginal works 
n. of Mexico. (See Copper, Metal-work.) 

(5) The textile art, which for present 
urposes may be regarded as including, 
esides weaving proper, the arts of bas¬ 
ketry, needlework, beadwork, quillwork, 


featherwork, etc., as practised by the 
northern tribes, abounds in both sym¬ 
bolic and purely decorative elements of 
embellishment. The former have their 
origin, as in the other arts, in mythology, 
and the latter arise mainly from the tech¬ 
nical features of the art itself. No branch 
of art practised by the primitive tribes 
calls so constantly for the exercise of taste 
as does this, and probably none has con¬ 
tributed so greatly to the development of 
the purely geometric phases of decorative 
art. Illustrations may be found in the 
weaving of the Pueblo and Navaho tribes 
of the arid region and the Chilkat of the 
N. W., in the basketry of numerous tribes 
of the far W. and S. W., and in the bead- 
work, quillwork, embroidery, and feather- 
work of tribes of the great plains, the up¬ 
per Mississippi valley, and the region of 
the great lakes. (See Basketry, Beadwork, 
Featherwork, Needlework, Quillwork, Weav¬ 
ing.) 

(6) Primitive phases of the art of paint¬ 
ing and other related branches, such as 
engraving and tattooing, appear in the 
handiwork of all of the northern tribes. 
Colors were employed in decorating the 
human body, in embellishing manufac¬ 
tured articles of all kinds, and in ideo¬ 
graphic delineations on bark, skins, rock 
surfaces, etc. A branch of much impor¬ 
tance was, and is, the decoration of earth¬ 
enware, as among the Pueblo tribes; and 
allied to this was the painting of masks and 
other carvings, as among the Haida and 
Kwakiutlof the N. W., and the painting of 
skins, as among the Plains tribes. In only 
a few cases had considerable progress been 
made in pictorial art; perspective, light and 
shade, and portraiture were unknown. 
Engraving and stamping were favorite 
means of decorating pottery among the 
ancient tribes of e. United States, and 
tattooing was common among many 
tribes. (S ez Adornment, Dry-painting, En¬ 
graving, Painting, Pictographs, Pottery, 
Tattooing.) 

Besides those branches of art in which 
taste manifests itself in elaborations of 
color, form, proportion, and arrangement 
there are other arts coming less within 
the range of the practical and having a cor¬ 
respondingly greater proportion of the 
symbolic and esthetic elements, namely, 
music, poetry, and drama. All of these 
have their root deep down in the substrata 
of human culture, and they take a promi¬ 
nent place in the ceremonial and esthetic 
life of the primitive tribesmen. (See Dra¬ 
matic representations, Music, Poetry.) 

For papers dealing with the primitive 
art of the northern tribes, see various re¬ 
ports of the Bureau of American Ethnol¬ 
ogy, the U. S. National Museum, and the 
Smithsonian Institution; publications of 
the Peabody Museum, the American Mu- 


96 


ARTELNOF-ARTIFICIAL HEAD DEFORMATION 


[b. a. e. 


seum of Natural History, the Field Colum¬ 
bian Museum, the Uni versity of California, 
and the Annual Archeological Reports of 
Ontario. Consult also the American An¬ 
thropologist; the American Antiquarian; 
the Journal of American Folk-lore; Bal¬ 
four, Evolution of Decorative Art, 1893; 
Boas in Pop. Sci. Month., Oct., 1903; 
Haddon, Evolution of Art, 1895; Dellen- 
baugh, North Americans of Yesterday, 
1901; and the various works cited under 
the articles above referred to. (w. h. h.) 

Artelnof. A former Aleut village and 
Russian post on Akun id., Alaska; pop. 
32 in 1834. 

Artaylnovskoi.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 
1875. Arteljnowskoje.—Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 
map, 142, 1855. Artelnovskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zap- 
iski, II, 202, 1840. 

Arthur, Mark. A full-blood Nez Perce, 
born in 1873. His mother being captured 
with Chief Joseph’s band in 1877, Mark 
became a wanderer among strange tribes 
until about 1880, when he found his way 
back to the Nez Perce res., Idaho, where 
he entered the mission school of Miss 
McBeth and soon began to prepare for 
the ministry. When the Nez Perc6 cap¬ 
tives sent to the Indian Territory were 
returned to their northern home, Mark 
found his mother among them and cared 
for her until her death. About 1900 he was 
ordained by the Walla Walla presbytery 
and became pastor, at Lapwai, Idaho, of 
the oldest Presbyterian church w. of the 
Rocky mts., in which charge he has met 
with excellent success. In 1905 he was 
elected delegate to represent both whites 
and Indians at the general assembly of the 
Presbyterian church, (a. c. f.) 

Artificial Head Deformation. Deforma¬ 
tions of the human head have been 
known since the 
writings of He¬ 
rodotus. They 
are divisible into 
two main classes, 
those of patho¬ 
logical and those 
of mechanical or 
artificial origin. 
The latter, with 
which this ar¬ 
ticle is alone con- 

Chinook woman with Child in Head- cgmed are again 
deforming cradle. (catl,n) . divifflbie mto un¬ 
intentional and intentional deformations. 
One or the other of these varieties of 
mechanical deformation has been found 
among numerous primitive peoples, as the 
ancient Avars and Krimeans, some Tur¬ 
komans, Malays, Africans, etc., as well 
as among some civilized peoples, as the 
French and Wends, in different parts of the 
Old World, and both varieties existed from 
prehistoric through historic time to the 
present among a number of Indian tribes 
throughout the Western hemisphere. Un¬ 


intentional mechanical deformations of 
the h ead present but one important, widely 
distributed form, that of occipital compres¬ 
sion, which results from prolonged con¬ 
tact of the occiput of the infant with a re¬ 
sistant head support in the cradleboard. 



Intentional deformations, in all parts of 
the world and in all periods, present 
two important forms only. In the first of 
these, the flat-head form, the forehead is 
flattened by means of a board or a variety 
of cushion, while the parietes of the head 
undergo compensatory expansion. In 
the second form, known as macrocepha¬ 
lous, conical, Aymara, Toulousian, etc., 
the pressure of bandages, or of a series 
of small cushions, applied about the 
head, passing over the frontal region 
and under the occiput, produces a more 
or less conical, truncated, bag-like, or 
irregular deformity, characterized by low 
forehead, narrow parietes, often with a 
depression just behind the frontal bone, 
and a protruding occiput. All of these 
forms present numerous individual varia¬ 
tions, some of which are sometimes im¬ 
properly described as separate types of 
deformation. 

Among the Indians n. of Mexico there 
are numerous tribes in which no head 
deformation exists and apparently has 
never existed. Among these are included 
many of the Athapascan and Californian 
peoples, all of the Algonquian, Shosho- 
nean (except the Iiopi), and Eskimo 
tribes, and most of the Indians of the 
great plains. Unintentional occipital 
compression is observable among nearly 
all the southwestern tribes, and it once 
extended over most of the United States 







BULL. 30] 


ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 


97 


(excepting Florida) s. of the range of the 
tribes above mentioned. It also exists 
in ancient skulls found in some parts of 
the N. W. coast. 

Both forms of intentional deformation 
are found in North America. Their geo¬ 
graphical distribution is well define I and 
limited, suggesting a comparatively late 
introduction from more southerly peo¬ 
ples. The flat-head variety existed in 
two widely separated foci, one among the 
Natchez and in a few other localities along 
the northeast coast of the Gulf of Mexico, 
and the other on the N. W. coast from s. 
Oregon as far n. as s. Vancouver id., but 
chiefly w. of the Cascades, along Colum¬ 
bia r. The Aymara variety existed, and 
still exists, only on and near the n. w. 
extremity of Vancouver id. 

The motives of intentional deformation 
among the Indians, so far as known, are 
the same as those that lead to similar 
practices elsewhere; the custom has be¬ 
come fixed through long practice, hence 
is considered one of propriety and duty, 
and the result is regarded as a mark of 
distinction and superiority. 

The effects of the various deformations 
on brain function and growth, as well as 
on the health of the individual, are ap¬ 
parently insignificant. The tribes that 
practise it show no indication of greater 
mortality at any age than those among 
which it does not exist, nor do they show 
a larger percentage of imbeciles, or of in¬ 
sane or neuropathic individuals. The 
deformation, once acquired, persists 
throughout life, the skull and brain com¬ 
pensating for the compression by aug¬ 
mented extension in directions of least 
resistance. No hereditary effect is per¬ 
ceptible. The custom of head deforma¬ 
tion among the Indians, on the whole, is 
gradually decreasing, and the indications 
are that in a few generations it will have 
ceased to exist. 

Consult Morton, Crania Americana, 
1839; Gosse, Essai sur les deformations 
artificielles du cr&ne, 1855; Lunier, De¬ 
formations artificielles du crane, Diet, de 
M4dic. et de Chirurg., x, 1869; Broca, 
Sur la deformation Toulousaine du cr&ne, 
1872; Lenhossek, Die kunstlichen Scha- 
delverbildungen, 1881; Topinard, Elem. 
d’anthrop. gener., 739, 1885; Briiss, Bei- 
triige z. Kenntnissd. kunstlichen Schadel- 
verbildungen, 1887; Porter, Notes on 
Artificial Deformation of Children, Rep. 
Nat. Mus., 1889; Bancroft, Native Races, 
i, 180, 226, et seq., 1874; Hrdlicka, Head 
deformation among the Klamath, Am. 
Anthrop, vii, no. 2, 360, 1905; Catlin, 
North American Indians, i-ii, 1841. See 
Flatheads. (a. h. ) 

Arts and Industries. The arts and in¬ 
dustries of the North American aborig¬ 
ines, including all artificial methods of 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-7 


making things or of doing work, were nu¬ 
merous and diversified, since they were 
not limited in purpose to the material con¬ 
ditions of life; a technic was developed-to 
gratify the esthetic sense, and art was an¬ 
cillary to social and ceremonial institutions 
and was employed in inscribing speech on 
hide, bark, or stone, in records of tribal 
lore, and in the service of religion. 
Many activities too, existed, not so much 
in the service of these for their own sake 
as for others. After the coming of the 
whites, arts and industries in places were 
greatly improved, multiplied in number, 
and rendered more complex by the intro¬ 
duction of metallurgy, domestic animals, 
mechanical devices, and more efficient 
engineering. Great difficulties embarrass 
the student in deciding whether some of 
the early crude inventions were aboriginal 
or introduced. 

The arts and industries of the Indians 
were called forth and developed for utiliz¬ 
ing the mineral, vegetal, and animal prod¬ 
ucts of nature, and they were modified 
by the environmental wants and re¬ 
sources of every place. Gravity, buoy¬ 
ancy, and elasticity were employed me¬ 
chanically, and the production of fire 
with the drill and by percussion was 
also practised. The preservation of fire 
and its utilization in many ways were 
also known. Dogs were made beasts of 
burden and of traction, but neither beast 
nor wind nor water turned a wheel n. of 
Mexico in pre-Columbian times. The 
savages were just on the borders of ma¬ 
chinery, having the reciprocating two- 
hand drill, the bow and strap drills, and 
the continuous-motion spindle. 

Industrial activities were of five kinds: 

(1) Going to nature for her bounty, the 
primary or exploiting arts and industries; 

(2) working up materials for use, the sec¬ 
ondary or intermediary arts and indus¬ 
tries, called also shaping arts or manufac¬ 
tures; (3) transporting or traveling de¬ 
vices; (4) the mechanism of exchange; 
(5) the using up or enjoyment of finished 
products, the ultimate arts and industries, 
or consumption. The products of one art 
or industry were often the material or 
apparatus of another, and many tools 
could be employed in more than one; for 
example, the flint arrowhead or blade 
could be used for both killing and skin¬ 
ning a buffalo. Some arts or industries 
were practised by men, some by women, 
others by both sexes. They had their 
seasons and their etiquette, their cere¬ 
monies and their tabus. 

Stone craft .—This embraces all the op¬ 
erations, tools, and apparatus employed 
in gathering and quarrying minerals and 
working them into paints, tools, imple¬ 
ments, and utensils, or into ornaments and 
sculptures, from the rudest to such as ex* 


98 


ARTS AND INDUSTRIES 


[B. A. E. 


hibit the best expressions in fine art. 
Another branch is the gathering of stone 
for building. 

Water industry. —This includes activi¬ 
ties and inventions concerned in finding, 
carrying, storing, and heating water, and 
in irrigation, also, far more important 
than any of these, the making of vessels 
for plying on the water, which was the 
mother of many arts. The absence of the 
larger beasts of burden and the accom¬ 
modating waterways together stimulated 
the perfecting of various boats to suit 
particular regions. 

Earth work. —To this belong gathering, 
carrying, and using the soil for construc¬ 
tion purposes, excavating cellars, build¬ 
ing sod and snow houses, and digging 
ditches. The Arctic permanent houses 
were made of earth and sod, the tem¬ 
porary ones of snow cut in blocks, which 
were laid in spiral courses to form low 
domes. The Eskimo were especially in¬ 
genious in solving the mechanical prob¬ 
lems presented by their environment of 
ice. The St Lawrence, Atlantic, and 
Canadian tribes undertook no earth-build¬ 
ing that required skill; but those of the 
Mississippi valley, the Gulf states, and 
the far S. W., in their mounds and earth¬ 
works developed engineering and cooper¬ 
ative ability of no mean order. In some 
cases millions of cubic feet of earth were 
built up into geometric forms, the mate¬ 
rial often having been borne long dis¬ 
tances by men and women. The tribes 
of the Pacific coast lived in partly subter¬ 
ranean houses. The Pueblo tribes were 
skilful in laying out and digging irrigat¬ 
ing ditches and in the builder’s art, erect¬ 
ing houses and walls of stones, pise, or 
adobe. Some remains of stone structures 
show much taste in arrangement. 

Ceramic art. —This industry includes all 
operations in plastic materials. The Arc¬ 
tic tribes in the extreme W., which lack 
proper stone, kneaded with their fingers 
lumps of clay mixed with blood and hair 
into rude lamps and cooking vessels, but 
in the zone of intense cold besides the 
ruder form there was no pottery. The 
tribes of Canada and of the n. tier of states 
w. of L. Superior and those of the Pacific 
slope worked little in clay; but the Indi¬ 
ans of the Atlantic slope, of the Missis¬ 
sippi valley, and especially of the S. W. 
knew how to gather and mix clay and 
form it into pottery, much of which has 
great artistic merit. This industry was 
quite generally woman’s work, and each 
region shows separate types of form and 
decoration. 

Metal craft. —This included mining, 
grinding of ores and paint, rubbing, cold- 
hammering, engraving, embossing, and 
overlaying with plates. The metals were 
copper, hematite and meteoric iron, lead 


in the form of galena, and nugget gold 
and mica. No smelting was done. 

Wood craft. —Here belongs the felling of 
trees with stone axes and fire. The soft¬ 
est woods, such as pine, cedar, poplar, and 
cypress, were chosen for canoes, house 
frames, totem poles, and other large ob¬ 
jects. The stems of smaller trees were 
used also for many purposes. Driftwood 
was wrought into bows by the Eskimo. 
As there were no saws, trunks were split 
and hewn into single planks on the N. 
Pacific coast. Immense communal dwell¬ 
ings of cedar were there erected, the tim¬ 
bers being moved by rude mechanical ap¬ 
pliances and set in place with ropes and 
skids.' The carving on house posts, totem 
poles, and household furniture was often 
admirable. In the S. W. underground 
stems were carved into objects of use and 
ceremony. 

Root craft. —Practised for food, basketry, 
textiles, dyes, fish-poisoning, medicine, 
etc. Serving the purposes of wood, the 
roots of plants developed a number of 
special arts and industries. 

Fiber craft. —Far more important than 
roots for textile purposes, the stems, 
leaves, and inner and outer bark of 
plants and the tissues of animals, having 
each its special qualities, engendered a 
whole series of arts. Some of these mate¬ 
rials were used for siding and roofing 
houses; others yielded shredded fiber, 
yarn, string, and rope; and some were 
employed in furniture, clothing, food re¬ 
ceptacles, and utensils. Cotton was ex¬ 
tensively cultivated in the S. W. 

Seed craft. —The harvesting of berries, 
acorns and other nuts, and grain and oth¬ 
er seeds developed primitive methods of 
gathering, carrying, milling, storing, cook¬ 
ing, and serving, with innumerable ob¬ 
servances of days and seasons, and multi¬ 
farious ceremony and lore. 

Not content with merely taking from 
the hand of nature, the Indians were 
primitive agriculturists. In gathering 
roots they first unconsciously stirred the 
soil and stimulated better growth. They 
planted gourds in favored places, and re¬ 
turned in autumn to harvest the crops. 
Maize was regularly planted on ground 
cleared with the help of fire and was 
cultivated with sharpened sticks and hoes 
of bone, shell, and stone. Tobacco was 
cultivated by many tribes, some of which 
planted nothing else. 

Animal industries. —Arts and industries 
depending on the animal kingdom in¬ 
clude primarily hunting, fishing, trap¬ 
ping, and domestication. (See Hunting .) 
The secondary arts involve cooking and 
otherwise preparing food; the bvitchering 
and skinning of animals, skin-dressing in 
all its forms; cutting garments, tents, 
boats, and hundreds of smaller articles 


BULL. 30] 


ARTS AND INDUSTRIES-ASA 


99 


and sewing them with sinew and other 
thread; working claws, horn, bone, teeth, 
and shell into things of use, ornaments, 
and money; and work in feathers, quills, 
and hair. These industries went far be¬ 
yond the daily routine and drudgery 
connected with dress, costume, recepta¬ 
cles, and apparatus of travel and trans¬ 
portation. Pictographs were drawn on 
specially prepared hides; drums and other 
musical instruments were made of skins 
and membranes; for gorgeous headdresses 
and robes of ceremony the rarest and finest 

roducts of animals were requisite; em- 

roiderers everywhere most skilfully used 
quills and feathers, and sometimes grass 
and roots. 

Evolution of arts .—Much was gathered 
from nature for immediate use or con¬ 
sumption, but the North Americans were 
skilful in secondary arts, becoming man¬ 
ufacturers when nature did not supply 
their demands. They built a different 
kind of house in each environment—in 
one place snow domes and underground 
dwellings, in another houses of pun¬ 
cheons hewn from the giant cedar, and 
in other regions conical tents made of 
hides of animals, pole arbors covered 
with matting or with cane, and houses of 
sods or grass laid on a framework of logs. 
The invention of house furniture and uten¬ 
sils, such as cooking vessels of stone, pot¬ 
tery, or vegetal material, vessels of clay, 
basketry, worked bark or hide for serv¬ 
ing food, and bedding, developed the 
tanner, the seamstress, the potter, the 
wood-worker, the painter, the dyer, and 
the stonecutter. The need of clothing the 
body also offered employment to some of 
these and gave rise to other industries. 
The methods of preparing food were bak¬ 
ing in pits, roasting, and boiling; little in¬ 
vention was necessary therein,but utensils 
and apparatus for getting and transport¬ 
ing food materials had to be devised. 
These demands developed the canoe- 
maker and the sled-builder, the fabricator 
of weapons, the stone-worker, the wood¬ 
worker, the carvers of bone and ivory, 
the skilful basket-maker, the weaver, 
the netter, and the makers of rope and 
babiche. These arts were not finely 
specialized; one person would be skilful 
in several. The workshop was under 
the open sky, and the patterns of the 
industrial workers were carried in their 
minds. 

The arts and industries associated with 
the use and consumption of industrial 
products were not specially differentiated. 
Tools, utensils, and implements were 
worn out in the using. There was also 
some going about, traffic, and luxury, 
and these developed demands for higher 
grades of industry. The Eskimo had fur 
suits that they would not wear in hunting; 


all the deer-chasing tribes had their gala 
dress for festal occasions, ceremony, and 
worship, upon which much time and skill 
were expended; the southern and western 
tribes wove marvelously fine and elegant 
robes of hemp, goat’s hair, rabbit skin 
in strips, and skins of birds. The artisans 
of both sexes were instinct with the es¬ 
thetic impulse; in one region they were 
devoted to quillwork, those of the next 
area to carving wood and slate; the ones 
living across the mountains produced 
whole costumes adorned with bead work; 
the tribes of the central area erected elab¬ 
orate earthworks; workers on the Pacific 
coast made matchless basketry; those of 
the S. W. modeled and decorated pottery 
in an endless variety of shapes and colored 
designs. The Indians n. of Mexico were 
generally well advanced in the simpler 
handicrafts, but had nowhere attempted 
massive stone architecture. 

Consult the Annual Reports and Bulle¬ 
tins of the Bureau of American Ethnology, 
which are replete with information re¬ 
garding Indian arts and industries. See 
also Bancroft, Native Races, i-v, 1886; 
Boas in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xv, 
1901; Dellenbaugh, North Americans of 
Yesterday, 1901; Goddard, Life and Cul¬ 
ture of the Hupa, 1903; Hoffman in Nat. 
Mus. Rep. 1895, 739, 1897; Holmes (1) in 
Smithson. Rep. 1901, 501, 1903; (2) in 
Am. Anthrop., hi, 684, 1901; Hough (1) 
in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1888, 531, 1890; (2) 
ibid., 1889, 395, 1891; McGuire, ibid., 
1894, 623, 1896; Mason, (1) ibid., 1889, 
553, 1891; (2) ibid., 1890, 411, 1891; (3) 
ibid., 1894, 237,1896; (4) ibid., 1897, 725, 
1901; (5) ibid., 1902, 171, 1904; (6) in 
Am. Anthrop., i, 45, 1899; Moore, Mc¬ 
Guire, Willoughby, Moorehead, et al., 
ibid., v, 27, 1903; Niblack in Nat. Mus. 
Rep. 1888, 1890; Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., hi, 1877; Rau (1) in Smithson. 
Rep. 1863; (2) in Smithson. Cont. Knowl., 
xxv, 1885; Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., 
vn, nos. 3, 4, 1905; Wilson in Nat. Mus. 
Rep. 1897,1899; Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, 
i-vi, 1851-57; also the Memoirs and Bul¬ 
letins of the American Museum of Nat¬ 
ural History, and the Memoirs and Papers 
of the Peabody Museum. See also the 
articles on the subjects of the various in¬ 
dividual arts and industries and the 
works thereunder cited, (o. t. m. ) 

Arnkhwa (‘ cow buffalo ’). A gens of the 
Oto and of the Iowa. The subgentes of 
the latter are Chedtokhanye, Chedtoyine, 
Cheposhkeyine, Cheyinye. 

Ah'-ro-wha.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877 (Oto). 
A-ru-qwa.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897 
(Oto). A'-ru-qwa.— Ibid., 239, (Iowa). Cow Buf¬ 
falo.— Morgan, op. cit. (Oto). 

Asa (‘tansy mustard’). A phratral 
organization of the Hopi, comprising the 
Chakwaina (Black Earth kachina), Asa 


100 


ASA-ASHIVAK 


[B. A. E. 


(Tansy mustard), Kwingyap (Oak), H os- 
boa (Chapparal cock), Posiwu (Magpie), 
Chisro (Snow bunting), Puchkohu 
(Boomerang hunting-stick), and Pisha 
(Field-mouse) clans. In early days this 
people lived near Abiquiu, in the Chama 
r. region of New Mexico, at a village called 
Kaekibi, and stopped successively at the 
pueblos of Santo Domingo, Laguna, 
Acoma, and Zuni before reaching Tusa- 
yan, some of their families remaining at 
each of these pueblos, except Acoma. 
At Zuni their descendants form the 
Aiyaho clan. On reaching Tusayan the 
Posiwu, Puchkohu, and Pisha clans set¬ 
tled with the Hopi Badger clan at 
Awatobi, the remainder of the group 
continuing to and settling first at Coyote 
spring near the e. side of Walpi mesa, 
under the gap, and afterward on the mesa 
at the site of the modern Hano. This 
village the Asa afterward abandoned, on 
account of drought and disease, and went 
to Canyon de Chelly, about 70 m. n. e. 
of Walpi, in the territory of the Navaho, 
to which tribe many of their women were 
given, whose descendants constitute a 
numerous clan known among the Navaho 
as Kinaani (High-standinghouse). Here 
the Asa lost their language, and here they 
planted peach trees in the lowlands; but 
a quarrel with the Navaho caused their 
return to Hano, at which pueblo the 
Tewa, from the Rio Grande, in the mean¬ 
time had settled. This was probably be¬ 
tween 1700 and 1710. The Asa were 
taken to Walpi and given a strip of 
ground on the e. edge of the mesa, where 
they constructed their dwellings, but 
a number of them afterward removed 
with some of the Lizard and Bear people 
to Sichumovi. See the works cited be¬ 
low, also Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
610,1900; Mindeleff, ibid., 639. (f.w. h. ) 

Asa.—Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
30-31,1891. Asanyumu.—Ibid, {nyu-mu = ‘ phra- 
try’).—Tca'-kwai-na nyu-mu.—Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894 {nyH-rriu^' phratry’; like¬ 
wise called A'-sa-nyti-mO). 

Asa. The Tansy Mustard clan of the 
Asa phratry of the Hopi. 

A'-sa.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 
As-wun-wii.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 
1894 ( wiin-wii = ‘ clan ’). 

Asahani. One of the 7 clans of the 
Cherokee. The name can not be inter¬ 
preted, but it may have archaic connec¬ 
tion with sa l kani , sa'kanigel , ‘blue.’ It 
does not refer to cutting of the ears, as 
has been asserted, (j. m.) 

A-sa-ha'-ni.—Mooney, Cherokee MS. vocab., 
B. A.E.,1885 (Cherokeeform; pi., A'-ni'-s£-M'-nl). 
Nesonee.—Haywood, Tenn., 276,1823. 

Asao. An unidentified town, probably 
on Wassau id., Ga. A mission was 
established there about 1592 by Spanish 
Franciscans, but it was destroyed by the 
natives in their revolt against the mis¬ 


sionaries in 1597. See Shea, Cath. Miss., 
66, 1855. 

Asapalaga. A former Seminole village 
located on some maps on the e. bank of 
St Marks r., Fla., below Yapalaga. Tay¬ 
lor’s war map places it, probably cor¬ 
rectly, on theE. bank of Apalachicola r., 
in Gadsden co., where Appalaga now is. 

Asapalaga.—Jefferys, French Dom. Am.. I, map, 
135, 1761. Aspalaga.—Roberts, Fla., 14, 1763. 

Ascahcutoner. Mentioned by Balbi 
(Atlas Ethnog., 33, 1826) as a tribe be¬ 
longing to his Sioux-Osage family, appa¬ 
rently associating them with the Teton. 
Not identified. The final part of the 
term suggests Kutenai. 

Aseakum. A Samish village in n. w. 
Washington.—Gibbs, Clallam and Lum- 
mi, 38, 1863. 

Aseik (Ase'ix). One of the three 
Bellacoola towns of the Talio division at 
the head of South Bentinck arm, British 
Columbia.—Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., ii, 49, 1898. 

A'seQ.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 3, 1891. 

Asenane ( AsE'ncine ). A former Bella¬ 
coola town on Bellacoola r., British 
Columbia.—Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes, 3, 1891. 

Ashamomuck. Probably a Corchaug vil¬ 
lage whose name was later attached to a 
white settlement on its site in Suffolk co., 
Long id., N. Y.—Thompson, Long Id., 
181, 1839. 

Ashbochia. A band or division of the 
Crows. 

Ash-bot-chee-ah.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 
Treacherous lodges.—Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 144, 1851. 

Ashe gen. A Yurok village on the coast 
of California, 5 or 6 m. s. of the mouth 
of Klamath r. (a. l. k.) 

Osse-gon.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 
133, 1859. 

Ashihi (‘salt’). A Navaho clan. 
Acihi.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
104, 1890. Acihi^ine.—Ibid. Asihi.—Matthews, 
Navaho Legends, 30, 1897. Asihidme*.—Ibid. 

Ashimuit (from ashim , ‘a spring,’ in 
the Nauset dialect). A village in 1674 
at a large spring in Barnstable co., Mass., 
near the junction of Falmouth, Mashpee, 
and Sandwich townships. It probably 
belonged to the Nauset. (j. m. ) 
Ashimuit.—Bourne (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st ser., i, 197,1806. Shumuit.—Ibid. 

Ashinadea (‘ lost lodges ’). A band or 
division of the Crows. 

Ah-shin'-na-de'-ah.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 

Ashipak (‘in the basket’). A Karok 
village on Klamath r., a few miles above 
the mouth of Salmon r., in Siskiyou co., 
n. w. Cal. 

Hakh-kutsor.—Kroeber, inf n, 1904 (Yurokname). 

Ashipoo. An unidentified village on a 
stream between Edisto and Com bah ee r., 
S. C., about 12 m. from the coast.—Brion 
de la Tour, map U. S., 1784. 

Ashivak. A Kaniagmiut village near 
C. Douglas, Alaska; pop. 46 in 1880.— 
Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 28, 1884. 


fet’LL. SO] 


ASHKANENA—ASPINET 


101 


Ashkanena (‘Blackfoot lodges’). A 
band of the Crows. 

Ash-kane'-na. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 

Ashkum. A Potawatomi village, named 
from its chief, on the n. side of Eel r., 
about Denver, Miami co., Ind. The res¬ 
ervation, including the village, was sold in 
1836. (j. m. ) 

Ashnola. A body of Okinagan in s. w. 
British Columbia; pop. 54 in 1901.—Can. 
Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. 2, 166. 

Ashukhuma (‘ red grass ’). A Chickasaw 
town mentioned by Romans (East and 
West Fla., 63,1775). It was probably in 
Pontotoc or Dallas co., Miss. 

Asidahech. A Wichita subtribe.—J. 0. 
Dorsey, inf’n, 1881; Mooney, inf n, 1902. 

Ci-da'-hetc.— Dorsey, op. cit. (pron. Shi-da'-hetch, 
or She-dar'haitch)'. 

Asilao. A Kelatl town on lower Fraser 
r., above Yale, British Columbia. 

Asila'o.— Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894. 

Asimina. The American papaw (Asim- 
ina triloba). In Louisianian and Canadian 
French the word assiminier or asiminier, 
papaw tree, first occurs in the latter part 
of the 17th century, and it is through this 
source that the term has entered English. 
The origin is from the Illinois or some 
closely related dialect of Algonquian. 
Trumbull (Am. Philol. Assoc., 25, 1872) 
considers that the “ older form,” racemina, 
used in 1712 by Father Marest, is etymo¬ 
logically more correct, representing the 
Illinois rassimina, from rassi, ‘divided 
lengthwise in equal parts’; mina, plural 
of min, ‘seed,’ ‘fruit,’ ‘berry.’ (a. f. c.) 

Asimu. A Chumashan village w. of 
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaventura), 
Ventura co., Cal., in 1542.—Cabrillo (1542) 
in Smith, Colec. Doc., 181, 1857. 

Asisufuunuk. A Karok village on Kla¬ 
math r. at Happy Camp, at the mouth of 
Indian cr., n. w. Cal. (a. l. k.) 

As-sif-soof-tish-e-ram.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Mar. 23, 1860. 

Asiuhuil. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Ines mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Askakep. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, near Pam unkey r., 
in New Kentco., Va.—Smith (1629), Va., 
i, map, repr. 1819. 

Askimimkansen. A village, perhaps con¬ 
nected with the Nanticoke, formerly on 
an upper e. branch of Pocomoke r., prob¬ 
ably in Worcester co., Md.—Herrman, 
map (1670) in Rep. on Boundary Line 
between Va. and Md., 1873. 

Askinuk. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Hooper bay, near C. Romanzoff, 
Alaska; pop. 175 in 1880, 138 in 1890. 

Askeenac.— Hooper, Cruise of Corwin, 6, 1880. 
Askinaghamiut. —11th Census Rep. on Alaska, 164, 
1893. Askinak.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 54, 
1884. Askinuk.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. 


Asko. An Ikogmiut village on the 
right bank of the Yukon, below Anvik, 
Alaska; pop. 30 in 1880. 

Askhomute.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899 (the people). 

Asnela. A small island in Penobscot 
r., Me., occupied by the Penobscot. The 
name is derived from that of an Indian 
called Assen or Ossen.—Gatschet, Pe¬ 
nobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Asomoches. A division of the New 
Jersey Delawares formerly living on the e. 
bank of Delaware r., between Salem and 
Camden. In 1648 they were estimated 
at 100 warriors. 

Asomoches.—Evelin (1648) in Proud, Pa., I, 113, 
1797. Asoomaches.—Sanford, U. S., cxlvi, 1819. 

Asopo. A former village on the Georgia 
coast, possibly on St Catherines id., the 
site of a Spanish Franciscan mission de¬ 
stroyed in the Indian revolt of 1597. 

Aspasniagan. A former village of the 
Chalones, of the Costanoan family, near 
Soledad mission, Monterey co., Cal. 
Aspasniaga.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,1860. 
Aspasniagan.—Ibid. Aspasniaquan.—Ibid. Aspas- 
niaques.—Galiano, Relac. del Sutil y Mexicana, 
164, 1802. 

Aspenquid. An Abnaki of Agamenti- 
cus, Me., forming a curious figure in New 
England tradition. He is said to have 
been born toward the end of the 16th 
century and converted to Christianity, to 
have preached it to the Indians, traveled 
much, and died among his own people 
at the age of about 100 years. Up to 
1775-76 Aspenquid’s day was celebrated 
in Halifax, Nova Scotia, by a clam din¬ 
ner. He is said to be buried on 
the slope of Mt Agamenticus, where he 
is reported to have appeared in 1682. 
He is thought by some to be identical 
with Passaconaway. In Drake’s New 
England Legends there is a poem, “St 
Aspenquid,” by John Albee. See Am. 
Notes and Queries, ii, 1889. (a. f. c.) 

Asphaltum. See Cement. 

Aspinet. A sachem of Nauset on C. Cod, 
Mass. He was known to the Plymouth 
colonists as early as 1621, and is noted 
chiefly for his unwavering friendship for 
the English. He kindly treated and re¬ 
turned to his parents a white boy who 
had lost his way in the woods and w as 
found by some of Aspinet’s people. In 
the winter of 1622, when Thomas Wes¬ 
ton’s men saw famine staring them in the 
face, and the Plymouth people were but 
little better off, Aspinet and his people 
came to their relief with corn and beans. 
It w r as his firm stand in favor of peace 
with the colonists, and his self-restraint 
w T hen provoked almost beyond forbear¬ 
ance by Standish’s hasty temper, that pre¬ 
served the friendly relations of the sur¬ 
rounding Indians w T ith the Plymouth 
colony during its early years. He was, 
however, finally driven into the swamps 


102 


ASSABAOCH-ASSINIBOIN 


[B. A. B. 


by threats of attacks by the English, and 
died in his unhealthful hiding place 
probably in 1623. (c. t.) 

Assabaoch. A band, probably of the 
Assiniboin or Chippewa, in the vicinity of 
Rainy lake, Ontario, in 1874; pop. 152.— 
Can. Ind. Rep., 85, 1875. 

Assacomoco. A village about 1610, 
probably near Patuxent r., Md. (Pory 
in Smith (1629), Virginia, n, 63, repr. 
1819). The name is Algonquian and con¬ 
tains the word comoco, ‘house,’ common 
in names of Virginia settlements. 

Assacombuit. An Abnaki (“Tarra- 
tine”) chief who appeared in history 
about 1696. He was a faithful adherent 
of the French and rendered important 
aid to Iberville and Montigny in the re¬ 
duction of Ft St Johns, N. B., Nov. 30, 
1696. With two other chiefs and a few 
French soldiers Assacombuit attacked the 
fort at Casco, Me., in 1703, then defended 
by Capt. March, which was saved by the 
timely arrival of an English vessel. He 
assisted the French in 1704-5 in their 
attempt to drive out the English who 
had established themselves in Newfound¬ 
land, and in 1706 visited France, where 
he became known to Charlevoix and was 
received by Louis XIV, who knighted 
him and presented him an elegant sword, 
after boasting that he had slain with his 
own hand 150 of the King’s enemies in 
New England (Penhallow, Ind. Wars, 
40, 1726). Assacombuit returned from 
France in 1707 and in the following year 
was present with the French in their at¬ 
tack on Haverhill, Mass. After leaving 
New England he was with the St. Francis 
Indians. He died in 1727. Assacombuit 
is sometimes mentioned under the name 
Nescambioiiit, and in one instance as Old 
Escambuit. (c. t.) 

Assameekg. A village in 1698, proba¬ 
bly near Dartmouth, Bristol co., Mass., in 
Wampanoag territory. Mentioned in 
connection with Acushnet and Assa- 
wompset by Rawson and Dan forth (1698) 
in Mass.Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 129-134, 
1809. 

Assaomeck. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, situated about Al¬ 
exandria, Va.—Smith (1629), Virginia, 
i, map, repr. 1819. 

Assapan. A dictionary name for the 
flying squirrel (Sciuropterus volucella), 
spelt also assaphan, evidently cognate with 
Chippewa d'sipim, Sauk and Fox a'se- 
pdn a , ‘raccoon.’ (a. f. c. w. j.) 

Assawompset. A village existing as late 
as 1674 in Middleborough tp., Ply¬ 
mouth co., Mass, probably within Wam¬ 
panoag territory. 

Assawampsit.— Rawson and Danforth (1698) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1sts., X, 129-134,1809. Assa- 
wanupsit. —Ibid. Assoowamsoo. —Bourne (1674), 
ibid., i, 198, 1806. Assowamsett.— Records (1671) 
quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 20,1848. 


Assegun (probably from Chippewa 
u'sliigtin ‘black bass.’—W. J.). A tradi¬ 
tional tribe said to have occupied the 
region about Mackinaw and Sault Ste Ma¬ 
rie on the first coming of the Ottawa and 
Chippewa, and to have been driven by 
them southward through lower Michigan. 
They are said, and apparently correctly, 
to have been either connected w T ith the 
Mascoutens or identical with that tribe, 
and to have made the bone deposits in 
n. Michigan. See Mascoutens. (j. m. ) 
Asseguns.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 202-4,1857. 
Assigunaick.—Brinton, Lenape Legend, 228, 1885. 
Assigunaigs.—Schoolcraft, op. cit., I, 191, 1851. 
Bone Indians.—Ibid., 307. 

Asseheholar, Asseola. See Osceola. 

Assilanapi ( ‘ yellow or green leaf tree ’). 
A former Creek town, a branch of 
Okchayi (q. v.), in Alabama. There is 
a township of the same name in the 
Creek Nation, Okla.—Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., i, 128, 1884. 

Arselarnaby.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong.,250, 
1836. Ossalonida.—Ibid., 325. 

Assi-luputski. See Black drink. 

Assiminehkon. By the treaty of Prai¬ 
rie du Chien in 1829 the Ottawa, Pota- 
watomi, and Chippewa reserved “one 
section at the village of the As-sim-in-eh- 
Kon, or Paw-paw T Grove.” Probably a 
Potawatomi village in Lee co., Ill.—Prai¬ 
rie du Chien treaty (1829) in U. S. Ind. 
Treaties, 163, 1873. 

Assiminier. See Asimina. 

Assinapi (Chippewa: ilsi'napa , ‘stone 
person.’—W. J.). A people, mentioned 
in the Walam Olum (Brinton, Lenape, 190, 
1885), with whom the Delaw r ares fought 
during their migration toward the e. 
Assinipi.—Rafinesque, Am. Nations, 1 ,146,1836. 

Assiniboin (Chippewa: H / sin i ‘stone,’ 
Wpwawa ‘he cooks by roasting’: ‘one 
w T ho cooks by the use of stones.’—W. J.). 
A large Siouan tribe, originally constitut¬ 
ing a part of the Yanktonai. Their sepa- < 
ration from the parent stem, to judge by 
the slight dialectal difference in the lan¬ 
guage, could not have greatly preceded the 
appearance of the whites, but it must 
have taken place before 1640, as the Jesuit 
Relation for that year mentions the As¬ 
siniboin as distinct. The Relation of 
1658 places them in the vicinity of L. 
Alimibeg, between L. Superior and Hud¬ 
son bay. On Jeffery s’ map of 1762 this 
name is applied to L. Nipigon, and on 
De 1’Isle’s map of 1703 to Rainy lake. 
From a tradition found in the widely 
scattered bodies of the tribe and heard 
by the first Europeans who visited the 
Dakota, the Assiniboin appear to have 
separated from their ancestral stem while 
the latter resided somewhere in the region 
about the headwaters of the Mississippi, 
whence they moved northward and joined 
the Cree. It is probable that they first 
settled about Lake of the Woods, then 


BULL. 30] 


ASSINIBOIN 


103 


drifted northwestward to the region 
about L. Winnipeg, where they were liv¬ 
ing as early as 1670, and were thus lo¬ 
cated on Lahontan’s map of 1691. Chau- 
vignerie (1736) place them in the same 



RED DOG—ASSINIBOIN 


region. Dobbs (Hudson Bay, 1744) lo¬ 
cated one division of the Assiniboin some 
distance n. w. of L. Winnipeg and the 
other immediately w. of an unidentified 
lake placed n. of L. Winnipeg. These 
divisions he distinguishes as Assiniboin 
of the Meadows and Assiniboin of the 
Woods. In 1775 Henry found the tribe 
scattered along Saskatchewan and Assini- 
boine rs., from the forest limit well up to 
the headwaters of the former, and this 
region, between the Sioux on the s. and 
the Siksika on the w., was the country 
over -which they continued to range 
until gathered on reservations. Hayden 
(Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Yal., 1862) 
limits their range at that time as fol¬ 
lows: “The Northern Assiniboins roam 
over the country from the w. banks of 
the Saskatchewan and Assiniboin rs., in 
a w. direction to the Woody mts., n. and 
w. amongst some of the small outliers of 
the Rocky mts. e. of the Missouri, and on 
the banks of the small lakes frequently 
met with on the plains in that district. 
They consist of 250 or 300 lodges. The 
remainder of the tribe, now [1856] re¬ 
duced to 250 lodges, occupy the dis¬ 
trict defined as follows: Commencing at 
the mouth of the White Earth r. on the 
e., extending up that river to and as far 
beyond its source as the Grand Coulee 
and the head of La Riviere aux Souris, 


thence n. w. along the Coteau de Prairie, 
or divide, as far as the beginning of the 
Cypress mts., on the n. fork of Milk r., 
down that river to its junction with the 
Missouri, thence down the Missouri to 
White Earth r., the starting point. Until 
the year 1838 the tribe still numbered 
from 1,000 to 1,200 lodges, trading on the 
Missouri, when the smallpox reduced 
them to less than 400 lodges. They were 
also surrounded by large and hostile 
tribes, who continually made war upon 
them, and in this way their number was 
diminished, though at the present time 
they are slowly on the increase. ’ ’ 

From the time they separated from the 
parent stem and joined the Cree until 
brought under control of the whites, they 
were almost constantly at war with the 
Dakota. As they have lived since the 
appearance of the whites in the N. W. 
almost wholly on the plains, without per¬ 
manent villages, moving from place to 
place in search of food, their history has 
been one of conflict with surrounding 
tribes. 

Physically the Assiniboin do not differ 
materially from the other Sioux. The 
men dress their hair in various forms; it 
is seldom cut, but as it grows is twisted 
into small locks or tails, and frequently 
false hair is added to lengthen the twist. 
It sometimes reaches the ground, but is 



ASSINIBOIN WOMAN 


generally wound in a coil on top of the 
head. Their dress, tents, and customs 
generally are similar to those of the Plains 
Cree, but they observe more decorum in 
camp and are more cleanly, and their 














104 


ASSINIBOIN 


t B. A. fi. 


hospitality is noted by most traders who 
have visited them. Polygamy is com¬ 
mon. While the buffalo abounded their 
principal occupation consisted in making 
pemmican, which they bartered to the 
whites for liquor, tobacco, powder, balls, 
knives, etc. Dogs are said to have been 
sacrificed to their deities. According to 
Alexander Henry, if death happened in 
winter at a distance from the burial 
ground of the family, the body was car¬ 
ried along during their journeying and 
placed on a scaffold, out of reach of dogs 
and beasts of prey, at their stopping 
places. Arrived at the burial place, the 
corpse was deposited in a sitting posture 
in a circular grave about 5 feet deep, 
lined with bark or skins; it was then 
covered with bark, over which logs were 
placed, and these in turn were covered 
with earth. 

The names of their bands or divisions, 
as given by different writers, vary con¬ 
siderably, owing to the loose organiza¬ 
tion and wandering habit of the tribe. 
Lewis and Clark mention as divisions in 
1805: (1) Menatopa (Otaopabine of Max¬ 
imilian), Gens de Feuilles [for filles] 
(itscheabine), Big Devils (Watopach- 
nato), Oseegah, and another the name 
of which is not stated. The whole peo¬ 
ple were divided into the northern and 
southern and into the forest and prairie 
bands. Maximilian (Trav., 194, 1843) 
names their gentes as follows: (1) Itsche¬ 
abine (gens des filles); (2) Jatonabine 
(gens des roches);' (3) Otopachgnato 
(gens du large); (4) Otaopabine (gensdes 
canots); (5) Tschantoga (gens des bois); 
(6) Watopachnato (gens de l’age); (7) 
Tanintauei (gens des osayes); (8) Chabin 
(gens des montagnes). A band men¬ 
tioned by Hayden (op. cit., 387), the 
Minishinakato, has not been identified 
with any named by Maximilian. Henry 
(Jour., ii, 522-523, 1897) enumerated 11 
bands in 1808, of which the Red River, 
Rabbit, Eagle Hills, Saskatchewan, Foot, 
and Swampy Ground Assiniboin, and 
Those-who - have - water-for-themselves- 
onlycan not be positively identified. This 
last may be Hayden’s Minishinakato. 
Other divisions mentioned, chiefly geo¬ 
graphical, are: Assiniboin of the Mead¬ 
ows, Turtle Mountain Sioux, Wawaseeas- 
son, and Assabaoch (?). The only Assin- 
iboin village mentioned in print is Pas- 
quayah. 

Porter (1829) estimated the Assiniboin 
population at 8,000; Drake at 10,000 be¬ 
fore the smallpox epidemic of 1836, dur¬ 
ing which 4,000 of them perished. Galla¬ 
tin (1836) placed the number at 6,000; the 
U. S. Indian Report of 1843, at 7,000. In 
1890 they numbered 3,008; in 1904, 2,600. 

The Assiniboin now (1904) living in 


the United States are in Montana, 699 
under Ft Belknap agency and 535 under 
Ft Peck agency; total, 1,234. In Can¬ 
ada there were in 1902 the Mosquito 
and Bears Heads’ and Lean Man’s bands 
at Battleford agency, 78; Joseph’s band 
of 147, Paul’s of 147, and 5 orphans at Ed¬ 
monton agency; C'arry-the-Kettle band 
under Assiniboin agency, 210; Pheasant 
Rump’s band, originally 69, and Ocean 
Man’s, 68 in number, at Moose mtn.; 
and the bands on Stony res., Alberta, 
661; total, 1,371. See Powell in 7th Rep. 
B. A. E., Ill, 1891; McGee, Siouan In¬ 
dians, 15th Rep. B. A. E., 157, 1897; 
Dorsey, Siouan Sociology, ibid., 213; 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
1862. ' (j. m. c. t. ) 

Apinulboines. —Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., v, 
246, 1876 (misprint). Arsenipoitis.— Barcia, En- 
sayo, 238, 1723. Arsenipoits,— McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Asinbols. —Trum¬ 
bull, Ind. Wars, 185, 1851. Asiniboels. —Anville, 
Am. Sept, map, 1756. Asiniboines.— Morgan in 
N. Am. Rev., 44, Jan., 1870. Asi'-ni-bwa". —Am. 
Natur., 829, Oct., 1882 (wrongly given as Dorsey’s 
spelling). Asinibwanak. —Cuoq, Lex. de la Lan- 
gue Algonquine, 77,1886. A-si-ni-poi'-tuk. —Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol., 381, 1862 (Cree and 
Chippewa name). Asinipovales. —Barcia, Ensayo, 
176, 1723. As-ne-boines. —Bonner, Life of Beck- 
wourth,158,1856. Asseenaboine, —Franklin,Journ. 
Polar Sea, 168, 1824. Asseeneepoytuck.— Ibid., 55 
(Cree name). Asselibois. —Doc. of 1683 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 798,1855. Assenepoils. —Henne¬ 
pin, New Discov., map, 1698. Asseniboines. —Per¬ 
rin, Voy. dans les Louisianes, 263, 1805. Asseni- 
boualak.—Du Lhut (1678) in Margry, D6c., Vi, 21, 
1886. Assenipoels.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 1055, 1855. Assenipoils. — 
Hennepin, New Discov., map, 1698. Assenipoua- 
lacs.— Hennepin quoted by Shea, Disc., 131, 
1852 (trans. ‘stone warriors’). Assenipoualak.— 
Shea, ibid., note. Assenipouals. —Radout (1710) 
in Margry, De*c., VI, 14,1886. Assenipouel.— Ibid., 
11. Assenipoulacs. — Hennepin misquoted by 
Neill, Hist. Minn., 134, 1858. Assenipoulaes.— 
Hennepin (1680) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 212, 
1846. Assenipoulaks. —Du Lhut (1678) in Margry, 
D£c., vi, 22,1886. Assenipouvals. —Coxe, Carolana, 
43,1741. Assenipovals.— Alcedo,Dict. Geog.,iv,557, 
1788. Assenniboins. —Schoolcraft, Trav., 245,1821. 
Assenpoels. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., index, 289,1861. 
Assilibouels.— Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c., 
iv, 600,1880. Assimpouals. —Lahontan, New Voy., 
i, 231, 1703. Assinaboes. —Smith, Bouquet’s Ex- 
ped., 69, 1766. Assinaboil. —Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 125, 1816. Assinaboine. —Ind. AfL Rep.,498, 
1839. Assinaboins.— Ibid., 297, 1835. Assina- 
bwoines.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 99,1855. As- 
sineboes.— Hutchins (1765), ibid., Ill, 556,1853. As- 
sineboin. —Brackenridge, Views of La., 79, 1815. 
Assineboines.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., I, map, 
1851. Assinebwannuk.— Jones, Ojebway Inds., 

178,1861. Assinepoel.— Chauvignerie (1736) quoted 
by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 556, 1853. Assine- 
poils.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 
380, 1862. Assinepoins. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1849, 70,1850. Assinepotuc. —Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 
55, 1826. Assinepoualaos. —Coxe, Carolana, 43, 
1741. Assiniboelle.— Beauharnois and Hoequart 
(1731) in Margry, D6c., VI, 568, 1886. Assini- 
boels.— Frontenac (1695), ibid., V, 63,1883. Assini- 
boesi.— Capellini, Ricordi, 185,1867. Assiniboile. — 
Vaudreuil and Bf»gon (1716) in Margry, D6c.,vi, 
496,1886. Assiniboils. —Carver, Travels, map, 1778. 
Assiniboines.— West, Jour., 86,1824. Assiniboins. — 
Gass, Jour., 69, 1807. Assinibois.— Denonville 
(1685) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 286, 1855. As- 
siniboleses. —Alcedo, Dice. Geog.,l, 165,1786. As- 
siniboualas.— Perrot in Minn. Hist. Coll., ii, pt. 2, 
24,1864. Assinibouane. —Pachot (1722) in Margry 


HULL. 80] 


ASSlNlBOtN OF THE PLAINS—ASTAKIWl 


105 


Dec., VI, 517, 1886. Assinibouels.—Vaudreuil 
(1720), ibid., 510. Assinibouets.—Du Chesneau 
(1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 153, 1855. As- 
siniboiiles.—Perrot, M6m.,91,1864. Assinib’wans.— 
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 77,1850. Assini- 
poals.—Proc. verb. (1671) in Margry, D6c., I, 97, 
1876. Assinipocls.—Du Lhut (1678), ibid., VI, 19, 
1886. Assinipoile.—Vaudreuil and B6gon (1716), 
ibid., 500. Assinipoileu.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 
55,1826. Assinipoils.—Le Sueur (1700) in Mar¬ 
gry, D6c.,Vl, 82, 1886. Assiniponiels.—Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 123, 1836. Assinipo- 
tuc.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 501,1878. As- 
sinipoual.—Lahontan, New Voy., 1,207,1703. As- 
sinipoiialac.—Jes. Rel., 1667, III, 23, 1858. Assini- 
poualaks.—Ibid., 21, 1658. Assinipoiiars.—Ibid., 
1670,92. Assinipoulac.—Du Lhut (1684) in Margry, 
D6c., VI, 51, 1886. Assinipour.—Le Jeune in Jes. 
Rel., 1640, ill, 35,1858. Assinipovals.—Harris, Coll. 
Voy. and Trav., ii, map, 1705. Assini-poytuk.— 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., 51, 1851. Assinipwa- 
nak.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Chippewa name). 
Assinnaboin.—Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Assinna- 
boines.—Ibid. Assinneboin.—Tanner, Nar., 50, 
1830. Assinnee-Poetuc.—Me.Hist.Soc.Coll., Vi, 270, 
1859. Assinnibains.—Lewis and Clark, Disc., 23, 
1806. Assinniboan.—Coues, Lewis and Clark Ex¬ 
ped., i, 193, note, 1893 (Chippewa name). Assinni- 
boine.—Hind, Labr. Pen., II, 148,1863. Assinniboine 
Sioux.—Can. Ind. Rep., 77, 1880. Assinniboins.— 
Lewis and Clark, Disc., 30,1806. Assinopoils.—La 
Harpe (1700) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 27,1851. 
Assinpouele,—Anon. Carte de l’Am. S6pt., Paris, 
n. d. Assinpoulac.—Bowles, map of Am., after 
1750. Assinpouls.—Lahontan, quoted by Ram¬ 
sey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 72, 1849. Ausinabwaun.— 
Parker, Minn. Handb., 13, 1857. Chiripinons.— 
Perrot (1721) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, pt. 2, 24, 
1864. Essinaboin.—Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st 
sess., 64,1832. E-tans-ke-pa-se-qua.—Long, Exped. 
Rocky Mts., ii, lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name, from 
i-ta-ha-tski, ‘longarrows’). Fish-eaters,—Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 381, 1862 (Hohe or; 
Dakota name). Guerriers de la Roche.—Perrot, 
M<*m., 232, 1864. Guerriers de pierre.—Jes. Rel., 
1658, hi, 21, 1858. Haha.—Coues, Pike’s Exped., i, 
348, 1895. Ho-ha.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 123, 1836 (‘ rebel’: sometimes applied by 
other Sioux tribes). Hohays.—Snelling, Tales of 
N. W., 21, 1830. Hohe.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. 
A.E.,222,1897 (Dakotaname: 'rebels’). Ho'-he.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 381, 1862 
(trails, ‘fish-eaters’). Hoheh.—Williamson in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 296, 1872. Ho-he'-i-o.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862 
(Cheyenne name). Hoh-hays.—Ramsey in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 48,1872. Indiens-Pierre.—Balbi, 
Atlas Ethnog., 55, 1826. Issati.—Henry, Travels, 
286, 1809 (erroneous identification for Santee). 
Left hand.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep, 1850, 
143,1851 (translation of the French name of their 
chief). Mantopanatos.—Keane in Stanford, Com¬ 
pend., 470,1878. Nacota.—Maximilian, Trav., 193, 
1843 (own name, same as Dakota: ‘our people’). 
Nation of the great Water.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 
20, 1744. Osinipoilles.—Henry, Trav., 273, 1809. 
Ossineboine.—Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 
178, note 58, 1893. Ossiniboine.—Ibid., 59. Ossno- 
bians.—Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., ill, 24, 1794. Sioux 
of the Rocks.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 77, 1850. 
Stone.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 1878. 
Stone Indians.—Fisher, New Trav., 172, 1812. 
Stone Roasters.—Tanner, Nar., 51, 1830. Stone 
Sioux.—Lewis and Clark, Disc., 46,1806. Stoney.— 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 1878. Stoney 
Indians.—Can. Ind. Rep., 80,1880. Stonies.—Inf’n 
of Chas. N. Bell, of Winnipeg, Manitoba, 1886 
(the common name used by English in Canada). 
Thickwood.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 
1878 (applied to the Assiniboin of the Rocky 
mts.). Tlu'tlama'rcka.— Chamberlain, inf’n, 1903 
(‘cutthroats’: Kutenai name). Ussinebwoinug.— 
Tanner, Nar., 316,1830 (Chippewa name). Weep¬ 
ers.—Henry, Trav., 286, 1809. 

Assiniboin of the Plains. A division of 
the Assiniboin described by Dobbs (Hud¬ 
son Bay, 35, 1744) as distinguished from 
that portion of the tribe living in the 


wooded country. On his map they are 
located w. of L. Winnipeg. De Smet 
(Miss, de l’Oregon, 104, 106, 1848) esti¬ 
mated them at 300 lodges, and in the 
English edition of his work (Oregon 
Miss., 156, 1847) the number given is 600 
lodges. He says they hunt over the 
great plains between the Saskatchewan, 
Red, Missouri, and Yellowstone rs., and 
as compared with the Assiniboin of the 
woods “are more expert in thieving, 
greater topers, and are perpetually at 
war,” but that in general the men are 
more robust and of commanding stature. 
They include the Itscheabine, Wato- 
achnato, Otaopabine, and Jatonabine. 

ssiniboels of the South.—Jeffcrys, French Dom. 
in Am., pt. I, map, 1741. Assiniboins des Plaines.— 
Smet, Miss, de l’Oregon, 104, 1848. Assinibouels 
of the Meadows.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 35, 1744. 
Plain Assineboins.—Hind, Red River Exped., II, 
152, 1860. 

Assonet. A river and village in Bristol 
co., Mass., and probably the name of a 
former Indian village in the vicinity. 
Schoolcraft (Ind. Tribes, i, 117, 1851) 
uses the name “ Assonets” to denote the 
probable Indian authors of the inscrip¬ 
tions on Dighton rock. (j. m.) 

Assuapmusban. A Montagnais mission 
founded by the Jesuits in 1661 about 300 
m. up Saguenay r., Quebec, probably at 
the entrance of Ashuapmouchouan r. into 
L. St John. A trading post of the same 
name was on that river in 1832.—Hind, 
Labrador, ii, 25, 26, 38, 1863. 

Assumption. A mission established in 
1728 at the Wyandot village near the 
present city of Detroit, Mich., and re¬ 
moved soon afterward to the opposite 
shore. It continued until 1781.—Shea, 
Oath. Miss., 202, 1855. 

Assunpink (‘at the stone stream’). A 
division of the Delawares formerly on 
Stony cr., on the Delaware, near Trenton. 
Probably from the Indian name of Stony 
cr. (j. m. ) 

Assanpinks.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 
1816. Asseinpinks.—Sanford, U. S., cxlvii, 1819. 
Assunpink.—Proud, Pa., II, 294, 1798. Stony Creek 
Indians.—Ibid. 

Assunta. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Assuti. A small Nez Perce band for¬ 
merly living on Assuti cr., Idaho. They 
joined Chief Joseph in the Nez Perce 
war of 1877.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Assuweska. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608 on the n. bank of 
the Rappahannock, in King George co., 
Ya.—Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 
1819. 

Astakiwi (es-tci-ke/, ‘hot spring.’— 
Powers). A Shastan village near Canby, 
in Warm Springs valley, Modoc co., Cai., 
whose people were described by Pow- 


106 


ASTIALAKWA-ATANUS 


[b. a. e. 


ers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 267, 1877) 
as most miserable and squalid, having 
been brutalized not only by their scanty 
and inferior diet, but also by the loss of 
their comeliest maidens and best young 
men, who were carried off into slavery 
by the Modoc. 

Astakaywas.—Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 412, 
1874. Astakywich.—Ibid. Astaqkewa.—Curtin, 
MS. Ilmawi vocab., B. A. E., 1889. Es-ta-ke'- 
wach.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., t m, 267, 
1877. Hot Spring Valley Indians.—Ibid, (includes 
also the Hantewa). 

Astialakwa. A former pueblo of the 
Jemez, on the summit of a mesa that 
separates San Diego and Guadelupe can¬ 
yons at their mouths. It was probably 
the seat of the Franciscan mission of San 
Juan, established early in the 17th cen¬ 
tury. Distinct from Ostyalakwa. 
Asht-ia-la-qua. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers. 
Ill, 126,1890. Ash-tyal-a-qua.— Ibid., IV, 206, 1892. 
Asht-ya-laqua. —Bandelier in Proc. Cong. Internat. 
Am., vil, 452, 1890. Astialakwa.—Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895. Ateyala-keokva.—Loew in 
Wheeler Survey Rep., vii, 343,1879. 

Astina. A village in n. Florida in 1564, 
subject to Utina, head chief of the Tim- 
ucua (Laudonniere in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., n. s., 298, 1869). De Bry’s map 
(1590) places it w. of St Johns r. 

Astouregamigoukh. Mentioned as one 
of the small tribes n. of St Lawrence r. 
(Jes. Rel. 1643, iii, 38, 1858). Probably 
a Montagnais band or settlement about 
the headwaters of Saguenay or St Mau¬ 
rice r. 

Asumpcion. A group of Alchedoma 
rancherias on or near the Rio Colorado, 
in California, more than 50 m. below the 
mouth of Bill Williams fork. They were 
visited and so named by Fray Francisco 
Garc6s in 1776.—Garc£s, Diary, 426,1900. 

Asystarca. A former Costanoan village 
of central California attached to the mis¬ 
sion of San Juan Bautista.—Engelhardt, 
Franciscans in Cal., 398, 1897. 

Ataakut. A village of the Tolowa for¬ 
merly situated on the coast of n. Cal.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 236, 
1890. 

A'-ta-a-kut'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 
236, 1890 (Tutu name). A'-ta-a-kut'-ti.—Ibid. 
(Tutu name). A-ta-ke-te tun'-ne.— Dorsey, MS. 
Chetco vocab., B. A. E., 1884. Ni-yaiik'-ta-ke'-te 
te'-ne.—Dorsey, MS. Smith R. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. Yah-mh-kahs.—Hamilton, MS. Hay-narg- 
ger vocab., B. A. E. Yantuckets.—Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 445, 1874. Yatuckets.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Yau-tuck-ets.'—Ibid., Apr. 
12,1861. Yon-tocketts.—Hamilton, MS. Hay-narg- 
ger vocab., B A. E. 

Ataakwe (‘seed people’). A people 
encountered by the Zuni before reaching 
their final residing place at Zuni, N. Mex. 
They joined the Seed clan of the Zuni, 
whose descendants constitute the present 
Taakwe, or Corn clan, of that tribe.— 
Cushing in The Millstone, ix, 2, 23, 1884. 

A'-ta-a.—Cushing, ibid. 

Ata-culculla. See Attakullakulla. 

Atagi. One of the 4 Alibamu towns for¬ 
merly situated in what is now Autauga co., 


Ala., extending 2 m. along the w. bank 
of Alabama r., a short distance w. of 
the present Montgomery. Autaugaville, 
Autauga cr., and Autauga co. are named 
after it. Hawkins (1798) speaks of it as 
a small village 4 m. below Pawokti, and 
says that the people have little inter¬ 
course with the whites but are hospitable. 
Schooler (Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 
578, 1854) states that it contained 54 
families in 1832. (a. s. g. ) 

At-tau-gee,—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 36, 1848. 
Autallga.— Sen. Ex. Doc.425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 
331, 1836. Autauga.—Campbell (1836) in H. R. 
Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20,1838. Autobas.— 
Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 
1855, Dumplin Town.—Woodward, Reminis¬ 
cences, 12, 1859. 

Atalans. . An imaginary prehistoric 
civilized race of North America (Rafin- 
esque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 23, 
1824); probably based on the Atlantis 
fable. 

Atamasco lily. The name of a plant 
(Amaryllis atamasco ), defined by Bart¬ 
lett (Diet, of Americanisms, 20, 1877) 
“ as a small one-flowered lily, held in like 
esteem, in Virginia and North Carolina, 
with the daisy in England.” Parkinson 
(Paradisus, 87, 1629) says that “the In¬ 
dians in Virginia do call it Attamusco.” 
Gerard (Sun, N. Y., July 30, 1895) states 
that the word means ‘ stained with red,’ 
in reference to the color of the flowers. 
In this case the chief component would 
be the Algonquian radical misk, signi¬ 
fying ‘red.’ (a. f. c.) 

* Atana (Ata'na). A Haida town on 
House, or Atana, id., e. coast of Moresby 
id., Queen Charlotte group, British Colum¬ 
bia. According to Skidegate legend, 
House id. was the second to appear above 
the waters of the flood. At that time 
there was sitting upon it a woman w T ho 
became the ancestress of the Tadjilanas. 
The Kagialskegawai also considered her 
as their “grandmother,” although saying 
that they were not descended directly 
from her but from some people who 
drifted ashore at the same place in a 
cockleshell. The town was occupied by 
the Tadjilanas. As the name does not 
occur in John Work’s list, it would seem 
to have been abandoned prior to 1836- 
41.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Atanekerdluk. An Eskimo settlement 
on Nugsuak pen., w. Greenland.—Peary, 
My Arct. Jour., 208, 1893. 

Atangime. A settlement of Eskimo in 
e. Greenland.—Meddelelser om Grdn- 
land, xxv, 24, 1902. 

Atanumlema. A small Shahaptian tribe 
living on Yakima res., on Atanum cr v 
Wash. They are said to speak a dia¬ 
lect closely related to the Yakima and 
Klikitat.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
738, 1896. 

Atanus ( *ata'nAS , ‘bilge-water’). A 
Skittagetan town, occupied by the Do- 


BULL. 30] 


ATARONCHRONON-ATEPtTA 


107 


gitunai, on the n. e. coast of Hippa id., 
British Columbia—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
281, 1905. 

Ataronchronon. One of the minor 
tribes of the Huron confederation, among 
whom the Jesuit mission of Sainte Marie 
was established.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 61, 
1858. 

Andoouanchronon.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858. 
Andowanchronon.—Jes. Rel.,index, 1858. Atacon- 
chronons.—Jes. Rel. for 1637,114,1858. Ataronch.— 
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 154, 1883. 

Atarpe. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal. 

Atarpe.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Oturbe.—Ibid. TJturpe.—Ibid. 

Atasi (Creek: a't&ssa, ‘ warclub.’—Gat- 
schet). An ancient Upper Creek town on 
the s. side of Tallapoosa r., in Macon co., 
Ala., adjoining Calibee cr., 5 m. above 
Huhliwahli town. In 1766 it contained 
about 43 warriors, and when seen by 
Hawkins, about 1799, it was a poor, 
miserable-looking place. On Nov. 29, 
1813, a battle was fought there between 
the Creeks and Jackson’s troops. The 
name was later applied to a town in the 
Creek Nation, Indian Ter., the people of 
which are called Atasalgi. See Jefferys, 
French Dom. Am., 135, map, 1761; Bar- 
tram, Trav., 454, 1791; Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., i, 128, 1884; n, 185, 1888. 

Allasis.—Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799 (errone¬ 
ously placed on the Chattahoochee). Altasse.— 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 260, 1816. Atases.— 
Jefferys, French Dom., 1 , 134, map. 1761. Atasi. — 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Legend, I, 128, 1884. 
Atassi.—Ibid. Atesi.—Ibid. (in Indian Ter.). 
Attases.—Roberts, Florida, 13, 1763. Attasis.— 
Phelipeau, Carte G6n6rale, 1783. Attasse.—Bar- 
tram, Travels, 448, 1791. Autisees.—Woodward, 
Reminiscences, 24, 1859. Autossee.—Drake, Ind. 
Chron., 198, 1836. Aut-tos-se.—Hawkins (1799), 
Sketch, 31, 1848. Auttotsee.— Hawkins (1813) in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 849, 1832. Citasees.— 
Romans, Florida, I, 280, 1775. Gitases.—Jefferys, 
French Dom. Am., i, 134, map, 1761 (mislocated, 
but probably the same). Olasse.—Bartram, Voy., 
I, map, 1799. Otasee.—Thomas (1793) in Am. 
State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 407, 1832. Otasse.— Bar¬ 
tram, Travels, 394, 461,1791. Otisee.—Carley (1835) 
in H. R. Doc. 452, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 75, 1838. 
Otissee.—Ibid., 31. Otoseen.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 
24th Cong., 1st sess., 131,1836. Ottasees.—U. S. Ind. 
Treat. (1797), 70, 1837. Ottersea.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 
425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 152, 1836. Ottesa.— 
Campbell (1836) in II. R. Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d 
sess., 20,1838. Ottessa.— Crawford (1836), ibid., 24. 
Ottisse.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. 
Ottissee.—Wyse (1836) in H. R. Doc. 63, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 63,1838. 

Atastagonies. An unidentified tribe 
mentioned by Rivera (Diario y Derro- 
tero, leg. 2,602,1736) as formerly living in 
s. Texas. 

Atchaluk. An Eskimo village in the 
Ivuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 39 in 
1890. 

Atchalugumiut.—11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1890 
(the inhabitants). 

Atchatchakangouen (from atchitchak, 
‘crane’). The principal division of the 
Miami. On account of the hostility of the 
Illinois they removed w. of the Missis¬ 
sippi, where they were attacked by the 


Sioux, and they afterward settled near the 
Jesuit mission at Green Bay, and moved 
thence into Illinois and Indiana with the 
rest of the tribe. In 1736 Chauvignerie 
gave the crane as one of the two leading 
Miami totems, (j. m. ) 

Atchatchakangouen.—Perrot ( ca . 1721) M6moire, 
222, 1864. AtchatchaKangouen.—Jes. Rel., LVIll, 
40, 1899. Chacakengua.—Coxe, Carolana, map, 
1741. Chachakingua.—Ibid., 12. La Grue.—La 
Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c., II, 216, 1877. Miamis 
de la Grue.—Perrot, op. cit., 154. Outichacouk.— 
Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Outitchakouk.—Jesuit 
Rel., 1658, 21, 1858. Tchatchakigoa.—La Salle 
(1680) in Margry, D6c., ii, 216, 1877. Tchatcha- 
king.—Ibid. (1683), 320. Tchidiiakoiiingoues.— 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., ii, 261, 
1753. Tchiduakouongues.—Baqueville de la Poth¬ 
erie misquoted by Shea in Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
in, 134, 1856. 

Atchaterakangouen. An Algonquian 
tribe or band living in the interior of 
Wisconsin in 1672, near the Mascouten 
and Kickapoo. 

AtchateraKangouen.—Jes. Rel., LVIII, 40, 1899. 

Atchialgi (atchi ‘maize,’ dlgi ‘people’). 
One of the twenty Creek clans. 

Atchialgi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr.Leg., 1 ,155,1884. 

Atchinaalgi (‘cedar grove people’). A 
former small village of the Upper Creeks, 
on a tributary of Tallapoosa r., probably in 
Tallapoosa co., Ala. It was their north¬ 
ernmost settlement in the 18th century, 
and was destroyed by Gen. White, Nov. 
13,1813. (a. s. g.) 

A tchina-algi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 128, 
1884. Au-che-nau-ul-gau.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch 
of Creek country, 47, 1848. Genalga.—Pickett, 
Hist. Ala., n, 299,*1851. 

Atchinahatchi (‘ cedar creek ’). A for¬ 
mer branch settlement of the Upper 
Creek village of Kailaidshi, on a small 
stream of the same name, a tributary of 
the Tallapoosa, probably in Coosa co., 
Ala. (a. s. g. ) 

Ahcharalar.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st 
sess.. 322, 1836 (a doubtful synonym). Atchina 
Hatchi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 128, 1884. 
Au-che-nau-hat-che.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 49, 
1848. 

Atchitchiken (AtcVtctkEn, sig. doubtful, 
or Nkaitu'sus, ‘ reaches the top of the brow 
or low steep,’ because the trail here passes 
on top of a bench and enters Spapiam 
valley). A village of the Spences Bridge 
band of the Ntlakyapamuk on the n. side 
of Thompson r., 3 m. back in the moun¬ 
tains from Spences Bridge, British Colum¬ 
bia.—Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
ii, 173, 1900. 

Ateacari. A branch of the Cora divi¬ 
sion of the Piman family on the Rio de 
Nayarit, or Rio de San Pedro, in Jalisco, 
Mexico. 

Ateacari.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Atea- 
kari.—Pimentel, Lenguas de Mex., ii, 83, 1865. 
Ateanaca.—Orozco y Berra, op. cit. (name of lan¬ 
guage). 

Atepua. A pueblo of the province of 
Atripuy, in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.—Onate (1598) 
in Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Atepira.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 135, 1889 
(misprint). 


108 


Al'FALATt—ATHAPASCAN FAMILY 


tfi. A. E. 


Atfalati ( Atfdlati ). A division of the 
Kalapooian family whose earliest seats, 
so far as can be ascertained, were the 
plains of the same name, the hills about 
Forest Grove, and the shores and vicin¬ 
ity of Wappato lake, Oreg.; and they are 
said to have extended as far as the site 
of Portland. They are now on Grande 
Ronde res. and number about 20. The 
Atfalati have long given up their native 
customs and little is known of their 
mode of life. Their language, however, 
has been studied by Gatschet, and our 
chief knowledge of the Kalapooian 
tongue is from this dialect. The follow¬ 
ing were the Atfalati bands as ascer¬ 
tained by Gatschet in 1877: Chacham- 
bitmanchal, Chachanim, Chachemewa, 
Chachif, Chachimahiyuk, Chachimewa, 
Chachokwith, Chagindueftei, Chahelim, 
Chakeipi, Chakutpaliu, Chalal, Chalawai, 
Chamampit, Chapanaghtin, Chapokele, 
Chapungathpi Chatagithl, Chatagshish, 
Chatakuin, Chatamnei, Chatilkuei, Cha- 
wayed. (l. f. ) 

Atfalati.—Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xii, 
212, 1899. Fallatahs.—Slocum in H. R. Rep. 101, 
25th Cong., 3d sess., 42,1839. Fallatrahs.—Slocum 
in Sen. Doc. 24, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 15, 1838. 
Follaties.—Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 569, 
1846. Jualati.—Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., viii, 
256, 1882. Snalatine.—Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 172,1850. Sualatine.— 
Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. Tualati.—Gat¬ 
schet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xii, 212, 1899. Tua- 
latims.—Taylor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 40th Cong., 
spec, sess., 27, 1867. Tualatin.—Palmer in Ind. 
A if. Rep., 260, 1854. Tuality.—Tolmie in Trans. 
Oreg. Pion. Assn., 32, 1884. Tuhwalati.—Hale in 
U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 569, 1846. Turlitan. — 
Huntington in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867,62,1868. Twala- 
ties.— Ind. Aif. Rep., 221, 1861. Twalaty.—Pres, 
mess., Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1852. 
Twalites.—Ind. Aif. Rep. 1864, 503, 1865. Twal- 
lalty.—Ibid., 205, 1851. Twaltatines.—Meek in 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10,1848. 
Wapato Lake.—McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 184, 
1887. Wapatu.—Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
IV, 143,1891. Wapatu Lake.—Gatschet in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., II, pt. 1, xlvi, 1890. Wapeto.—Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 492,1897. Wapoto Lake.—McClane in Ind. 
Aif. Rep.,269,1889. Wappato.—Smith in Ind. Aif. 
Rep., 56, 1875. Wappatoo.—Victor in Overland 
Mo., vii, 346, 1871. Wapto.—Meacham, Wigwam 
and Warpath, 117,1875. 

Athabasca (Forest Cree: alhap ‘in suc¬ 
cession/ -askaw ‘grass,’ ‘reeds’; hence 
‘grass or reeds here and there. ’—Hewitt). 
A northern Athapascan tribe, from which 
the stock name is derived, residing around 
Athabasca lake, Northwest Ter., Canada. 
Ross (MS., B. A. E.) regards them as a 
part of the Chipewyan proper. They do 
not differ essentially from neighboring 
Athapascan tribes. In 1902 (Can. Ind. 
Aff., 84, 1902) 326 were enumerated at 
Ft Chipewyan. 

Arabaskaw.—Lacombe, Diet, des Cris, 1874 
(“Athabasca” Cree name). Athabaskans.—Peti- 
tot, Diet. Dene-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Athapascow.— 
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Athapuscow.—Hearne, 
Journ. N. Ocean, 177,1795. Ayabaskau.—Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E. (Creename). Kkpay-tpele-Ottine.— 
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891 
(‘people of the willow floor,’ i. e., of Ft Chipe¬ 


wyan). Kkpest’ayle-kke ottine.—Petitot, Diet. 
Den£-Dindji6, xx, 1876 (‘people of the poplar 
floor’). Yeta-Ottine.—Petitot, Autour, op. cit. 
(‘people from above’). 

Athapascan Family. The most widely 
distributed of all the Indian linguistic 
families of North America, formerly ex¬ 
tending over parts of the continent from 
the Arctic coast far into n. Mexico, from 
the Pacific to Hudson bay at the n., and 
from the Rio Colorado to the mouth of 
the Rio Grande at the s.—a territory ex¬ 
tending for more than 40° of latitude and 
75° of longitude. 

The languages which compose the Atha¬ 
pascan family are plainly related to each 
other and, because of certain peculiari¬ 
ties, stand out from the other American 
languages with considerable distinctness. 
Phonetically they are rendered harsh and 
difficult for European ears because of 
series of guttural sounds, many continu¬ 
ants, and frequent checks and aspirations. 
Morphologically they are marked by a 
sentence verb of considerable complexity, 
due largely to many decayed prefixes and 
to various changes of the root to indicate 
the number and character of the subject 
and object. Between the various lan¬ 
guages much regular phonetic change, 
especially of vowels, appears, and while 
certain words are found to be common, 
each language, independently of the 
others, has formed many nouns by com¬ 
position and transformed the structure 
of its verbs. The wide differences in 
physical type and culture and the differ¬ 
ences in language point to a long separa¬ 
tion of the family, certainly covering 
many centuries. Geographically it con¬ 
sists of three divisions: Northern, Pacific, 
and Southern. 

The Northern division, known as the 
Tinneh, or D6n6, the name they apply to 
themselves, consists of three groups: The 
eastern, the northwestern, the southwest¬ 
ern. The eastern group occupies a vast 
extent of continuous territory, bounded 
on the e. by the Rocky mts. and lower 
Mackenzie r., on the s. by the watershed 
between the Athabasca and lower Peace 
rs., Athabasca lake, and Churchill r. To 
the e. and n. a narrow but continuous 
strip of Eskimo territory bars them from 
Hudson bay and the Arctic ocean. Their 
neighbors on the s. are members of the 
Algonquian family. This group seems to 
constitute a culture area of its own, 
rather uniform and somew T hat limited on 
its material side. Very little is known 
of the folklore and religion of the people 
of this region. The principal tribes are 
the Tatsanottine or Yellowknives, e. of 
Yellowknife r., the Thlingchadinne or 
Dogribs, between Great Slave and Great 
Bear lakes; on Mackenzie r., beginning 


BULL. 30] 


ATHAPASCAN FAMILY 


109 


at the n., the Kawchodinneh or Hares, 
and the Etchaottine or Slaves; the 
Chipewyan on Slave r., the Tsattine or 
Beavers on Peace r.; and some 500 m. to 
the s. beyond the area outlined, the 
Sarsi, a small tribe allied with their 
Algonquian neighbors, the Siksika. The 
northwestern group occupies the interior 
of Alaska and adjacent portions of British 
territory as far as the Rocky mts. The 
shore lands to the n. and w. are held by 
the Eskimo, except at Cook inlet and 
Copper r. The people seem to have been 
too much occupied with the severe strug¬ 
gle with the elements for a bare existence 
to have developed much material culture. 
They are usually distinguished into three 
principal divisions: The Kutchin of Por¬ 
cupine and Tanana rs.,the middle course 
of the Yukon, and the lower Mackenzie 
(where they are often spoken of as 
Louchoux); the Ahtena of Copper r.; 
and the Khotana of the lower Yukon, 
Koyukuk r., and Cook inlet. The south¬ 
western group occupies the mountainous 
interior of British America from the 
upper Yukon to lat. 51° 3CK, with the 
Rocky mts. for their e. barrier, and with 
the Skittagetan, Koluschan, Chimmes- 
yan, and Wakashan families between 
them and the Pacific. Their s. neighbors 
are the Salish. They are said to show con¬ 
siderable variety of physical appearance, 
culture, and language. The tribes com¬ 
posing this group are, according to Morice, 
beginning at the n., the Nahane; the 
Sekani; the Babine (Nataotin), on the 
shores of a lake bearing that name; the 
Carriers (Takulli), who occupy the terri¬ 
tory from Stuart lake southward to Alex¬ 
andria on Fraser r., and the Chilcotin 
(Tsilkotin), who live in the valley of the 
river to which they have given their 
name. 

The Pacific division consisted formerly 
of a small band in Washington and of 
many villages in a strip of nearly contin¬ 
uous territory about 400 m. in length, 
beginning at the valley of Umpqua r. in 
Oregon and extending toward the s. along 
the coast and Coast Range mts. to the 
headwaters of Eel r. in California. Their 
territory w r as cut through at one point 
by the Yurok on Klamath r. These vil¬ 
lages were in many cases separated by 
low but rugged mountains, and were sur¬ 
rounded by, and here and there sur¬ 
rounded, the small stocks characteristic 
of the region. The culture throughout 
this territory was by no means uniform, 
partly on account of the great differences 
between the conditions of life on the sea- 
coast and those of inland mountain val¬ 
leys, and partly because there was little 
intercourse between the river valleys of 
the region. For the greater part, in lan¬ 
guage there was a gradual transition 


through intermediate dialects from one 
end of the region to the other. There 
were probably 5 of these dialects which 
were mutually unintelligible. There were 
no tribes in this region, but groups of 
villages which sometimes joined in a raid 
against a common enemy and where the 
same dialect was spoken. The following 
dialectic groups made up this division: 
The Kwalhioqua in Washington; the 
Umpqua and Coquille (Mishikhwutme- 
tunne), formerly on rivers of these names; 
the Taltushtuntude, Chastacosta, and 
Tututunne on Rogue r. and its tributa¬ 
ries, and the Chetco on Chetco r. in Ore¬ 
gon; the Tolowa on Smith r. and about 
Crescent City; the Hupa and Tlelding on 
the lower portion of Trinity r.; the Chi- 
lula and Whilkut on Redwood cr.; the 
Mattole on the river of that name; the 
Sinkyone, Lassik, and Kuneste in the 
valley of Eel r., in California. But few 
of the members of this division now re¬ 
main. The Oregon portion has been on 
the Siletz and Grande Ronde res. for 
many years; those of California still re¬ 
side near their ancient homes. 

The Southern division held sway over 
a vast area in the S. W., including most 
of Arizona and New Mexico, the s. por¬ 
tion of Utah and Colorado, the w. bor¬ 
ders of Kansas and Texas, and the n. part 
of Mexico to lat. 25°. Their principal 
neighbors were the members of the Sho- 
shonean family and the various Pueblo 
tribes in the region. So far as is known 
the language and culture of this division 
are quite uniform. The peoples compos¬ 
ing it are the Navaho s. of San Juan r. in 
n. e. Arizona and n. w. New Mexico, the 
Apache (really a group of tribes) on all 
sides of the Navaho except the n. , and the 
Lipan formerly in w. Texas but now living 
with the Mescaleros in New Mexico. 

Not included in the three divisions de¬ 
scribed above are the Kiowa Apache, a 
small band which has maintained its 
own language while living on intimate 
terms with the Kiowa. They seem never 
to have been connected with the South¬ 
ern division, but appear to have come 
from the n. many years ago. 

The tendency of the members of this 
family to adopt the culture of neighbor¬ 
ing peoples is so marked that it is diffi¬ 
cult to determine and describe any dis¬ 
tinctive Athapascan culture or, indeed, to 
say whether such a culture ever existed. 
Thus, the tribes of the extreme N., espe¬ 
cially in Alaska, had assimilated many of 
the customs and arts of the Eskimo, the 
Takulli had adopted the social organiza¬ 
tion and much of the mythology of the 
Tsimshian, the western Nahane had 
adopted the culture of the Tlingit, the 
Tsilkotin that of the Salish, while the 
Sarsi and Beavers possessed much in com- 


110 


ATHAPASCAN FAMILY 


[b. a. e. 


mon with their Algonquian neighbors to 
the s. and e. Passing to the Pacific 
group, practically no difference is found 
between the culture which they presented 
and that of the surrounding tribes of 
other stocks, and it is evident that the 
social organization and many of the rites 
and ceremonies of the Navaho, and even 
of the Apache, were due to Pueblo influ¬ 
ences. Although in this respect the 
Athapascan resembles the Salishan and 
Shoshonean families, its pliability and 
adaptability appear to have been much 
greater, a fact noted by missionaries 
among the northern Athapascans up to 
the present day. 

If a true Athapascan culture may be 
said to have existed anywhere, it was 
among the eastern tribes of the Northern 
group, such as the Chipewyan, Kaw- 
chodinne, Stuichamukh, Tatsanottine, 
and Thlingchadinne, although differing 
comparatively little from that of the 
northernmost Algonquian tribes and the 
neighboring Eskimo. Although recog¬ 
nizing a certain individuality, these tribes 
had little coherence, and were subdi¬ 
vided into family groups or loose bands, 
without clans or gentes, which recog¬ 
nized a kind of patriarchal government 
and descent. Perhaps the strongest au¬ 
thority was that exercised by the leader 
of a hunting party, the difference be¬ 
tween success and failure on such a quest 
being frequently the difference between 
the existence or extinction of a band. 

Clothing was made of deerskins in the 
hair, and the lodges of deer or caribou 
skins, sometimes replaced by bark far¬ 
ther s. Their food consisted of caribou, 
deer, moose, musk-ox, and buffalo, to¬ 
gether with smaller animals, such as the 
beaver and hare, various kinds of birds, 
and several varieties of fish found in the 
numerous lakes and rivers. They killed 
deer by driving them into an angle formed 
by two converging rows of stakes, where 
they were shot by hunters lying in wait. 
The man was complete master in his own 
lodge, his wife being entirely subservient 
and assuming the most laborious duties. 
Infanticide, especially of female children, 
was common, but had its excuse in the 
hard life these people were obliged to 
undergo. In summer transportation was 
effected in birch-bark canoes; in winter 
the dogs carried most of the household 
goods, except in so far as they were as¬ 
sisted by the women, and on the barren 
grounds they were provided with sledges. 
The bodies of the dead were placed on 
the ground, covered with bark and sur¬ 
rounded by palings, except in the case of 
noted men, whose bodies were placed in 
boxes on the branches of trees. Shamans 
existed, and their sayings were of much 
influence with some of the people, but 


religion does not seem to have exerted as 
strong an influence as in most other parts 
of America. At the same time they had 
absolute faith in the necessity and effi¬ 
cacy of certain charms which they tied 
to their fishing hooks and nets. Nearly 
all have now been Christianized by Ro¬ 
man Catholic missionaries and seem to 
be devout converts. For an account of 
the culture of the remaining Athapascan 
tribes, see the special articles under the 
tribal names and articles dealing with 
other tribes in the same localities. 

For the Northern division of Athapas¬ 
cans see Hearne, Travels, 1795; the nu¬ 
merous writings of Emile Petitot; Morice 
(1) in Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, (2) 
Trans. Canadian Inst., and elsewhere; 
Richardson, Arct. Searching Exped., 
1851; Bancroft, Native Races, i, 1886; 
Russell, Explor. Far North, 1898; Hard¬ 
esty and Jones in Smithson. Rep., 1866, 
1872. For the Pacific division: Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 1877; God¬ 
dard in Pubs. Univ. Cal., i, 1903. For the 
Southern division: Matthews (1) in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1887, (2) Memoirs Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., vr, Anthrop. v, 1902, 
(3) Navaho Legends, 1897; Bourke (1) 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 1890, (2) in 
9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892. 

In the synonymy which follows the 
names are not always to be accepted as 
true equivalents. The Northern Atha¬ 
pascan or D4n6 are usually meant. 

(p. E. G. j. r. s.) 

Adene.—Petitot, Diet. D6n6-Dindji6, xix, 1876 
(Kawchodinne name). Arabasca.—Petitot in 
Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 641, 1883. Arathapes- 
coas.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816. 
Athabasca.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 38, 1874. 
Athabascan. - Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 1,1851. 
Athapaccas.—Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 401,1853. Athapaches.—Petitot, Autour du lac 
des Esclaves, 98, 1891. Athapascan.—Turner in 
Pac.R. R. Rep., in, pt.3,84,1856. Athapascas.—Gal¬ 
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 17,1836. Athap- 
asques.—Kingsley, Standard Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 147, 
1883. Ayabasca.—Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., 641, 1883. Chepewyan.—Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., II, 1, 1851. Chepevans.—Pritchard, Phys. 
Hist. Man., v, 375,1847. Chippewyan.—Dali, Alas¬ 
ka, 428,1870. Dane.—Petitot, Diet. D&n6-Dindji6, 
xix, 1876. Danites.—Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 99, 1891. Dendjye.—Petitot. MS. B. A. 
E., 1865 (used by Kutchin). Dene.—Petitot. Au¬ 
tour du lac des Esclaves, 363,1891 (used by Chipe¬ 
wyan). Dene-Dindjie.—Petitot, Diet. Langue 
D6n6-Dindji6, passim, 1876. Deneh-Dindschieh.— 
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6,143, 1883. Di- 
nais.—Cox. Columbia R., 11,374,1831. Dindjie.— 
Petitot, Diet. D6n6-Dindji4,xix, 1876 (used byTuk- 
kuthkutchin). Dindjitch.— Ibid, (usedby Kutch- 
akutchin). Dine.—Morice in Proc. Can. Inst., 3d 
s., vii, 113, 1889 (used by Etagottine). Dinne. — 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 512,1878. Dinnee.— 
Cox, Columbia R., n, 374,1831. Dinneh.—Frank¬ 
lin, Nar., I, 241, 1824. Dinni.—Rafinesque, Am. 
Nations, 1 ,146,1836. Dnaine. —Petitot, Diet. Den£- 
DindjiS, xix, 1876 (used by Knaiakhotana). 
’Dtinne.—Richardson, Arct. Exped., II, 1, 1851. 
Dune.—Morice in Proc. Can. Inst., 3d s., vii, 
113,1889 (used by Thlingchadinne). Gunana.— 
Swanton, inf’n (Tlingitname: 4 strange people’). 
Irkpeleit'.—Petitot, Diet. D6nADindji6, xix, 1876 
(Eskimo name: ‘larvae of lice’). Itynai.—Dali 


BULL. 30] 


ATI-ATLANTIS 


111 


in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, pt.1,25, 1877 (misprint) 
Kenaians.—Halleck (1868) quoted bv Petroff, 10th 
Census, Alaska, 40, 1884. Kenaizer.— Holmberg 
quoted by Dali, Alaska, 428, 1870. Northern.— 
Schouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lend., xr, 
218, 1841 (partial synonym). Tanai.—Zagoskin 
quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
i, 25, 1877. Tannai.—Corbusier in Am. Antiq., 
276, 1886. Tede.—Dorsey, MS. Applegate Cr. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (used by Dakubetede). 
Tene.—Dorsey, MS. Smith R. vocab., B. A. E.. 
1884 (used by Tolowa). Tennai.— Corbusier in 
Am. Antiq., 276, 1886. Thnaina.—Holmberg 
quoted by Dali, Alaska, 428, 1870, Thynne.—Pin- 
art in Rev. de Philol. et d’Ethnol., no. 2, 1, 
1875. Tinai.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th 
s., xxi, 226, 1850. Tinnatte.—Wilson in Rep. 
on N. W. Tribes Can., 11, 1888 (used by Sarsi). 
Tinne.—Richardson, Arct. Exped., n, 1,1851. Tin- 
neh.—Hardisty in Smithson. Rep. 1866,303, 1872. 
Tinney.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 539, 1878. 
Toene.—Morice in Proc. Can. Inst., 3d s., vii, 
113,1889 (used by Takulli). Toeni.—Ibid, (used by 
Tsilkotin). Ttynai.—Zagoskin, quoted by Schott 
in Erman, Archiv., vii, 480, 1849. Ttynai-chota- 
na.—Zagoskin quoted by Bancroft, Nat. Races, 
ill, 589, 1882. Ttynnai.—Zagoskin (1842) quoted 
by Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. Tude.— 
Dorsey, MS. Galice Creek vocab., B. A. E., 1884 
(used by Taltushtuntude). Tumeh. —Butler, Wild 
N. Land, 127, 1873. Tunne.—Dorsey, MS. Tutu 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (used by Tututunne). Wa- 
basca. —Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc , 641,1883. 

Ati. A former Papago rancheria, vis¬ 
ited by Kino about 1697-99, and the seat 
of a mission established about that date; 
situated on the w. bank of Rio Altar, be¬ 
tween Uquitoa and Tubutama, just s. of 
the Arizona boundary. Pop. 56 in 1730. 
The mission was evidently abandoned 
within the following 40 years, as Garc£s 
(Diary, 1775-76, 455, 1900) speaks of Ati 
as a favorable site for one. Not to be 
confounded with San Francisco Ati. 

(f. w. h. ) 

Addi.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, map, 1759. At.— 
Font, map (1777), in Coues, Garc6s Diary, i, 1900. 
Ati.—Font, map (1777), in Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 393,1889. Atic.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347, 
1864. Axi.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 303, 1759. 
Siete Principes Ati.—Rivera (1730) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 514,1884. 

Atiahigui. A former Maricopa ranche¬ 
ria on the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz.—Sedel- 
mair (1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Atica. An unidentified pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598.—Onate (1598) in Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 103, 1871. 

Atiga. A village formerly on the w. 
bank of Allegheny r., below French cr., 
according to Beilin’s map, 1755. It may 
have belonged to the Delawares or the 
Mingo. Marked distinct from Attigua, 
q. v. (j. m. ) 

Atisawaian. See Savoyan. 

Atka (native name of the largest of the 
Andreanof ids., called Atchu by Coxe, 
Atchka by Cook in 1778, and by various 
writers Atchgi, Atchka, and Alcha, ac¬ 
cording to Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
1901). One of the two dialectic divisions 
of the Aleut, occupying Andreanof, Rat, 
and Near ids. (Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 
1855). The Atka are great hunters of 
the sea otter, and the furs they sold dur¬ 
ing the Russian occupancy made them 


wealthy. About half of them learned to 
read and write their own language, of 
which Russian missionaries made a gram¬ 
mar. With Christianity and civilization 
the Russians introduced alcohol, for 
which the natives developed an inordi¬ 
nate craving, making their own liquor, 
after the importation of spirits was for¬ 
bidden, by fermenting sugar and flour. 
Their diet of fish and occasional water- 
fowl is supplemented by bread, tea, and 
other imported articles that have become 
indispensable. The native dress, consist¬ 
ing of a long tight-sleeved coat of fur or 
bird skins, overlapping boots that reached 
above the knee, has been generally dis¬ 
carded for European clothing* though 
they still wear in wet weather a water¬ 
proof shirt of intestines obtained from 
the sea-lion. All are now Christianized, 
and nearly all live in houses furnished 
with ordinary things of civilization.— 
Schwatka, Mil. Recon., Compil. of Ex- 
plor. in Alaska, 358, 1900. 

Andrejanouschen Aleuten.—Holmberg, Ethnol. 
Skizz., 8, 1855. Atchaer.—Ibid. Atkan.—Dali, 
Alaska, 386, 1870. Atkhas.—Keane in Stanford, 
Compend., 502, 1878. Kighigufi.—Coxe, Russian 
Disc., 219, 1787. Kigikhkhun.—Dali in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., i, 22, 1877 (sig. ‘northermvestern 
people’). Namikh'-hun’.—Ibid. (sig. ‘western 
people’). Nihouhins.—Pinart in M6m. Soc. Eth¬ 
nol. Paris, xi, 157, 1872. Nikhu-khnin.—Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., op. cit. 

Atkigyin. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Atkulik. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Atlalko. A Hahuamis village at the 
head of Wakeman sd., British Columbia. 
A-tl-al-ko.— Dawson in Can. Geolog. Surv., map, 
1888. 

Atlantis. The theory of the lost island 
of Atlantis can be traced back to the 
Timseus of Plato. It was mentioned by 
many subsequent ancient historians, some 
of whom considered it a myth while 
others believed it to be true. The dis¬ 
covery of America revived interest in the 
subject, and by many theorists the con¬ 
tinent itself was believed to be the lost 
island, while others, as the Abbe Brasseur 
de Bourbourg (Quatre Lettres sur le 
M6xique, 1868; Manuscrit Troano, i, 
1869) held that Atlantis was the exten¬ 
sion of America which stretched from 
Central America and Mexico far into the 
Atlantic, the Canaries, Madeiras, and 
Azores being the only remnants which 
were not submerged. Rafinesque (Ameri¬ 
can Nations, 1836) devotes a chapter to 
the subject of the Atlantes. He finds 
three routes by which the ancient nations 
of the Eastern and Western hemispheres 
could communicate, namely, the north¬ 
ern, tropical, and southern paths, “ with¬ 
out taking into account the probable con¬ 
nection of North America with Asia and 


112 


ATLATL-ATRAKWAYE 


[B. A. E. 


many islands in the Atlantic.” His ar¬ 
gument, if such it can be called, is inco¬ 
herent and fantastic in the extreme. The 
theorv is probably better known to 
Americans through the writings of Don¬ 
nelly ( Atlantis, the Antediluvian World), 
who undertakes to prove the case by 
modern scientific methods, and locates 
the Atlantis of Plato as an island opposite 
the mouth of the Mediterranean, a rem¬ 
nant of the lost continent. The mere 
statement of a few of the postulates which 
Donnelly endeavors to prove is a suffi¬ 
cient characterization, if not refutation, 
of his theory: 

(1) That Atlantis was the region where 
man first rose from a state of barbarism 
to civilization. (2) That its inhabi¬ 
tants became, in the course of ages, 
a populous and mighty nation, from 
whose overflowings the shores of the Gulf 
of Mexico, the Mississippi r., the Amazon, 
the Pacific coast of South America, the 
Mediterranean, the w. coast of Europe 
and Africa, the Baltic, the Black sea, and 
the Caspian were populated by civilized na¬ 
tions. (3) That it was the true antediluvian 
world; the Garden of Eden; the Gardens 
of the Hesperides; the Elysian Fields; 
the Gardens of Alcinous; the Mesam- 
phalos; the Olympos; the Asgard of the 
traditions of the ancient nations, repre¬ 
senting a universal memory of a great 
land where early mankind dwelt for 
ages in peace and happiness. (4) That 
the oldest colony formed by the At- 
lanteans was probably in Egypt, whose 
civilization was a reproduction of that 
of the Atlantic island. (5) That the 
Phenician alphabet, parent of all European 
alphabets, was derived from an Atlantis 
alphabet, which was also conveyed from 
Atlantis to the Mayas of Central America. 

(6) That Atlantis was the original seat 
of the Aryan or Indo-European family of 
nations, as well as of the Semitic peoples, 
and possibly also of the Turanian races. 

(7) That Atlantis perished in a terrible 
convulsion of nature, in which the whole 
island sank into the ocean with nearly 
all its inhabitants. (3) That a few per¬ 
sons escaped in sh;, s and on rafts, and 
carried to the nations e. and w. the 
tidings of the appalling catastrophe, 
which has survived to our own time in 
the Flood and Deluge legends of the dif- 
erent nations of the old and new worlds. 

Among modern scholars there are very 
few who regard Atlantis in any other 
light than as a myth. See Winsor, Nar¬ 
rative and Critical History of America, i, 
141,1884, for an excellent summary of the 
subject and for many references to the 
literature. The term Atlantic (ocean) is 
not derived from Atlantis, but from the 
Atlas mts. in n. Africa. (h. w. h. ) 

Atlatl. See Throwing stick. 


Atlklaktl ( Alqla’xL). A Bellacoola vil¬ 
lage where the present mission is situ¬ 
ated, on the n. side of Bellacoola r., near 
its mouth, British Columbia. It was one 
of the 8 villages called Nuhalk.—Boas in 
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 48, 1898. 

Atlkuma ( A-tl-kuma) . A Tlauitsis village 
on the n. side of Cracroft id., Brit. Col.— 
Dawson in Can. Geol. Surv., map, 1887. 

Atnik. A village of the Sidarumiut 
Eskimo near Pt Belcher, Alaska; pop. 
34 in 1890. 

Ataniek.—Tikhmenief (1861^ quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Atinikq.—Zagoskin, 
Descr. Russ. Poss. Am., pt. 1, 74, 1847. Atnik.— 
Baker, op. cit. Attanak.-11th Census, Alaska, 
map, 1893. A'tune.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. 
A. E., 44, 1892. Kuik.— Zagoskin, op. cit. 

Atnuk. An Eskimo village of the 
Kaviagmiut tribe at Darby cape, Alaska; 
pop. 20 in 1880, 34 in 1890. 

Atnikmioute.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann.Voy., 5th 
s., xxi, map, 1850. Atnikmut.—Zagoskin, Descr. 
Russ. Poss. Am., pt. I, 73, 1847. Atnuk.—Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Atoko. The extinct Crane clan of the 
Chua (Snake) phratry of the Hopi. 

A-to-co.—Bourke, Snake Dance, 117,1884. Atoko 
winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 1901 
(win-wtl— ‘clan’).—A'-to-ko wun-wii.—Fewkes in 
Am. Anthrop., Vii, 403, 1894 ( wun-wii — clan). 

Atotarho. See Wathatotarho. 

Atotonilco (from Nahuatl: atl ‘water,’ 
totonilli ‘warm.’—Buelna). A former 
Tepehuane pueblo in lat. 25° 30', long. 
107°, e. Sinaloa, Mexico. It was the seat 
of the mission of San Juan. 

San Juan Atotonilco.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 
1864. 

Atotonilco. A former Tepehuane pueblo 
in* lat. 24° 35', long. 104° 10', s. e. Du¬ 
rango, Mexico. It was the seat of the 
mission of San Andres. 

San Andres Atotonilco.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
318, 1864. 

Atquanachuke. A tribe or band residing 
early in the 17th century in s. or cen¬ 
tral New r Jersey. All references to them 
are indefinite. Smith, who did not visit 
them, says they were on the seacoast 
beyond the mountains northward from 
Chesapeake bay, and spoke a language 
different from that of the Powhatan, 
Conestoga, Tocwogh, and Cuscarawaoc. 
Most of the early authorities put them in 
the same general locality, but Shea, evi¬ 
dently misled by the order in which Smith 
associates this name with names of e. shore 
tribes, says they lived in 1633 on the e. 
shore of Maryland and were allies of the 
Conestoga. ( j. m. ) 

Aquaauchuques.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
501, 1878. Aquamachukes.— Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., 1,1856. Aquamachuques.—De Laet, 
Novus Orbis, 72, 1633. Aquanachukes.—Dutch 
map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. 
Atquanachuck.—Simons in Smith (1629), Virginia, 
I, 183, repr. 1819. Atquanachukes.—Ibid.,120. At- 
quanachuks. —Ibid.,183. Atquanahuckes.—De Laet, 
Hist. Nouv. Monde, 93, 1640. Atquinachunks.— 
Shea, Cath. Miss., 486,1855. 

Atrakwaye (probably ‘at the place of 
the sun,’ or ‘ south ’). A palisaded town 
of the Conestoga, situated in 1608 on the 


BULL. 30] 


ATRIPUY-ATSUGEWI 


113 


e. side of Susquehanna r., below the forks 
at Northumberland, in Northumberland 
co., Pa. Probably identical with the 
Quadroque of Smith’s map of Virginia, 
whereon it is placed from information 
derived by Smith directly from the Sus¬ 
quehanna (Conestoga). The Journal of 
the Jesuits for 1651-52 states that during 
the winter of 1652 this town was taken 
by 1,000 Iroquois warriors who, with a 
loss of 130 men, carried away 500 or 600 
captives, chiefly men. Atrakwaye was 
the seat of the Akhrakouaeronon, a divi¬ 
sion of the Conestoga, (j. n. b. h. ) 
Akrakwae.— Jes. Rel., Thwaites’ ed., xxxvi, 248, 
note, 49,1899. Atra‘K8ae. —Ibid., Jour, for 1650- 
51,140. Atra‘kwae. —Ibid.,141. Atra'KSa^. —Ibid., 
XXXVII, 110, 1899. Atra'kwa.e.— Ibid., 111. Quad- 
roque. —Smith (ca . 1608), Va., map,repr. 1884. 

Atripuy. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 114-116, 1871) in 1598 as a 
province containing 42 pueblos in the 
region of the lower Rio Grande, N. Mex. 
The name was probably derived from 
that of a village of the n. branch of 
the Jumano. The first pueblo of this 
province, journeying northward, was 
Trenaquel; the second Qualacu, both of 
which Bandelier identifies as villages of 
the Piros who occupied the Rio Grande 
valley from below Isleta to San Marcial, 
N. Mex. It may therefore be inferred 
that Atripuy was the name applied to the 
country inhabited at that time by the 
Piros. (f. iv. h.) 

Atripuy. A large pueblo of the Jumano 
of New Mexico in 1598.—Onate (1598) 
in Doc. Ined., xvi, 114, 1871. 

Atselits. An insignificant Chilliwack 
settlement in s. British Columbia, with 
only 2 adults in 1902. 

Aitckelich.— Can. Ind. Aff., 357,1895. Aitchelitz.— 
Ibid., 413,1898. Assyletch. —Ibid., 78,1878. Assy- 
litch.— Ibid., 316,1880. Assylitlh.— Brit. Col. Map, 
Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. Atchelity. —Can. Ind. 
Aff., 276, 1894. A'tsElits.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol. 
Surv. Can., 4, 1902. 

Atsep. A Yurok village on lower Kla¬ 
math r.,5m. below the mouth of Trinity 
r., n. Cal. 

Atsepar. The uppermost village of the 
Yurok on Klamath r., Cal., situated at 
the mouth of Bluff or., 6 m. above the 
junction of Trinity r. 

Atshuk. A Yaquina village on the s. 
side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 

A'-tcuk. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, x,229,1890. 

Atsina (Biackfoot: at-se'-na, said to 
mean ‘gutpeople.’—Grinnell. Cf. Aa'ni- 
nSna, under Arapaho). A detached 
branch of the Arapaho (q. v.), at one 
time associated with the Blackfeet, but 
now with the Assiniboin under Ft Belk¬ 
nap agency, Mont., where in 1904 they 
numbered 535, steadily decreasing. They 
called themselves Aa/ninSna, said to mean 
‘white clay people,’ but are known to 
the other Arapaho as HitunSna, ‘beg¬ 
gars,’ or ‘spongers,’ whence the tribal 
sign, commonly but incorrectly rendered 


‘belly people,’ or ‘big bellies,’ the Gros 
Ventres of the French Canadians and now 
their popular name. The Atsina are not 
prominent in history, and in most re¬ 
spects are regarded by the Arapaho proper 
as inferior to them. They have been con¬ 
stantly confused with the Hidatsa, or 
Gros Ventres of the Missouri, (j. m.) 

Aa'ninena. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 955, 
1896. Acapatos. —Duflot de Mofras, Explor., n, 
341, 1844 (a similar name is also applied to 
the Arapaho). Achena. —De Smet, Missions, 253, 
note, 1848. Ahahnelins. —Morgan, Systems of 
Consang., 226, 1871. Ahnenin.— Latham, Essays, 
276, 1860. Ahni-ninn.— Maximilian, Travels, I, 
530,1839. A-lan-sar.— Lewis and Clark, Travels, 56, 
1806. 4 lesar ' —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 470, 
1878. A-re-tear-o-pan-ga. —Long, Exped. Rocky 
Mts.,n, lxxxiv, 1823(Hidatsaname). At-se'-na.— 
Grinnell, inf’n, 1905 (Biackfoot name, said to 
mean ‘gut people’). Atsina. —Latham in Proc. 
Philol. Soc. Lond., VI, 86, 1854. Azana.— Maxi¬ 
milian, Travels, i, 530, 1839 (Siksika name, 
German form). Bahwetego-weninnewug. —Tan¬ 
ner, Narr., 63, 1830 (‘fall people’: Chippewa 
name). Bahwetig. —Ibid., 64. Bot-k'in'ago. — 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 955, 1896 (‘belly 
men’). Bowwetegoweninnewug. —Tanner, op. 
cit., 315 (Ottawa name). Bowwetig.— Ibid., 
83. E-ta-ni-o.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 290, 1862 (‘people:’ one Cheyenne name 
for them, the other and more common being 
Histuitanio). Fall Indians. —Umfreville (1790) 
in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., Vi, 270, 1859. Gros 
ventre of the Fort prairie. —Long, Exped. Rocky 
Mts., ii, lxxxiv, 1823. Gros Ventres. —See under 
that name. Gros Ventres des Plaines. —De Smet, 
Missions, 253, note, 1848. Gros Ventres des Prai¬ 
ries. —Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., ii. 36, 1814 (French name). Gros 
Ventres of the Falls. —Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 62,1856. Gros Ventres of the Prairie. — 
Brackenridge, Views of La., 79,1815. Grosventres 
of the Prairie. —McCoy, Ann. Reg. Ind. Aff., 
47, 1836. Hahtz-nai koon. —Henry, MS. vocab., 
1808 (Siksika name). His-tu-i'-ta-ni-o. —Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862 (Cheyenne 
name: etanio= ‘people’). Hitu'nena. —Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 955, 1896 (‘begging men’: 
Arapaho name). Hitunenina. —Ibid. Minetares of 
the Prairie. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., 
ii, 21, 1848 (by confusion with “GrosVentres”). 
Minitares of the Prairie.— Latham in Proc. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., VI, 85, 1854. Minnetarees of Fort 
de Prairie. —Lewis and Clark, Trav., I, 131, 1814. 
Minnetarees of the Plains. —Ibid. Minnetarees of 
the Prairie. —Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 344, 1862 Minnitarees of Fort de Prairie. — 
Lewis and lark, quoted by Hayden, ibid., 
422, Pawaustic-eythin-yoowuc. —Franklin, Journ. 
Polar Sea, 169, 1824. Paw-is-tick I-e-ne-wuck. — 
Harmon, Jour., 78, 1820. Pawistucienemuk. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., x, 1848. Pawistuck-Ienewuck. — 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 332, 1822. Prairie 
Grossventres. —Gass, Jour., 245, 1807. Rapid In¬ 
dians. —Harmon, Jour., 78, 1820. Sa'pani.— 

Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 955,1896 (‘ bellies ’: 
Shoshoni name). Sku'tani.— Ibid. (Sioux name). 
To-i-nin'-a. —Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 326, 1862 (‘ people that beg’: Arapaho 
name for Hitffngna). 

Atsina-Algo. An adjective invented by 
Schoolcraft (Ind. Tribes, i, 198, 1853) to 
describe the confederate Atsina and Sik¬ 
sika. 

Atsmitl (Chihalis name for Shoalwater 
bay). Chinookan divisions living around 
Shoal water bay, Wash.—Boas, field notes. 
Arts-milsh.—Swan, N. W. Coast, 210, 1857. Kar- 
wee-wee.—Ibid. Shoalwater Bay Indians.—Ford 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 341, 1858. 

Atsugewi. A Shastan tribe formerly re¬ 
siding in Hat Creek, Burney, and Dixie 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-8 



114 


ATTACAPA 


[B. A. E. 


valleys, Cal. Their language is quite di¬ 
vergent from that of the Achomawi, from 
whom they regard themselves as distinct. 
Very few of them survive, (r. b. d. ) 

Adwanuqdji.—Curtin, MS. Ilmawi vocab., B. A. 
E., 1889 (Ilmawi name). Atsugei.—Powell in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., xxxvii, 1888. Atsuge'wi.—Dixon, 
inf’n, 1905. Chenoya.—Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A. 
E., 1885 (Yana name). Chenoyana.— Ibid. Chu- 
noiyana.— Dixon, inf’n, 1903 (Yana name). Hat 
Creek Indians.—Hanson in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1862, 
311, 1863. Tcunoiyana.—Dixon, inf’n, 1903 (Yana 
name; fc=ch). 

Attacapa (Choctaw: liatak ‘man,’ apa 
‘eats,’ hence ‘cannibal’: a name applied 
by the Choctaw and their congeners to 
different tribes inhabiting s. w. La. and s. 
and s. e. Tex.; see Cannibalism). A tribe 
forming the Attacapan linguistic family, 
a remnant of which early in the 19th 
century occupied as its chief habitat the 
Middle or Prien lake in Calcasieu parish, 
La. It is learned from Hutchins (Geog. 
U. S., 1784) that “the village de Skun- 
nemoke or Tuckapas” stood on Vermil¬ 
ion r., and that their church was on the 
w. side of the Tage (Bayou Teche). The 
Attacapa country extended formerly to 
the coast in s. w. Louisiana, and their 
primitive domain was outlined in the 
popular name of the Old Attacapa or 
Tuckapa country, still in use, which com¬ 
prised St Landry, St Mary, Iberia, St 
Martin, Fayette, Vermilion, and, later, 
Calcasieu and Vernon parishes; in fact 
all the country between Bed, Sabine, and 
Vermilion rs. and the Gulf (Dennett, 
Louisiana, 1876). Charlevoix states that 
in 1731 some Attacapa with some Hasi 
nai and Spaniards aided the French com¬ 
mander, Saint Denys, against the Nat¬ 
chez. P6nicaut (Margry, Dec., v, 440) 
says that at the close of 1703 two of the 
three Frenchmen whom Bienville sent by 
way of the Madeline r. to discover what 
nations dwelt in that region, returned and 
reported that they had been more than 
100 leagues inland and had found 7 dif¬ 
ferent nations, and that among the last, 
one of their comrades had been killed and 
eaten by the savages, who were anthropo¬ 
phagous. This nation was called Attacapa. 
In notes accompanying his Attacapa vo¬ 
cabulary Duralde says that they speak 
of a deluge which engulfed men, ani¬ 
mals, and the land, when only those 
who dwelt on a highland escaped; 
he also says that according to their law 
a man ceases to bear his own name as 
soon as his wife bears a child to him, 
after which he is called the father of such 
and such a child, but that if the child 
dies the father again assumes his own 
name. Duralde also asserts that the 
women alone were charged with the la¬ 
bors of the field and of the household, 
and that the mounds were erected by the 
women under the supervision of the 
chiefs for the purpose of giving their 


lodges a higher situation than those of 
other chiefs. Milfort (Mem., 92, 1802), 
who visited St Bernard bay in 1784, be¬ 
lieved that the tribe came originally from 
Mexico. He was hospitably received by 
a band which he found bucanning meat 
beside a lake, 4 days’ march w. of the 
bay; and from the chief, who was not an 
Attacapa, but a Jesuit, speaking French, he 
learned that 180, nearly half the Attacapa 
tribe, were there, thus indicating that at 
that time the tribe numbered more than 
360 persons; that they had a custom of 
dividing themselves into two or three 
bodies for the purpose of hunting buf¬ 
falo, which in the spring went to the w. 
and in the autumn descended into these 
latitudes; that they killed them with 
bows and arrow r s, their youth being very 
skilful in this hunt; that these animals 
were in great numbers and as tame as 
domestic cattle, for “we have great care 
not to frighten them;” that when the 
buffaloes w r ere on the prairie or in the 
forest the Attacapa camped near them 
“to accustom them to seeing us.” Sib¬ 
ley (Hist. Sketches, 82, 1806) described 
their village as situated “about 20 m. w. 
of the Attakapa church, toward Quelque- 
shoe;” their men numbered about 50, 
but some Tonica and Huma who had in¬ 
termarried with the Attacapa made them 
altogether about 80. Sibley adds: “They 
are peaceable and friendly to everybody; 
labor, occasionally for the white inhabit¬ 
ants; raise their own corn; have cattle 
and hogs. They were at or near where 
they now live, when that part of the coun¬ 
try was first discovered by the French.” 
In 1885 Gatschet visited the section for¬ 
merly inhabited by the Attacapa, and 
after much search discovered one man 
and two women at Lake Charles, Calca¬ 
sieu parish, La., and another woman 
living 10 m. to the s.; he also heard of 5 
other women then scattered in w. Texas; 
these are thought to be the only survivors 
of the tribe, (j. n. b. h.) 

Atacapas.— Berquin-Duvallon, Trav. in La. and 
Fla., 97, 1806. Atac-Apas.—Le Page du Pratz, 
Hist. Louisiane, II, 231, 1758. Atacapaz.—Mez- 
i6res (1778) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, 
i, 661, 1886. Atac-assas. — Jefferys, French Dom., 
I, 163, 1761. Atakapas.—Robin, Voy., map, 1807. 
Attacapacas.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 502, 
1878. Attacapas.— Brown in West. Gazetteer, 
152, 1817. Attacappa.—Hutchins, Hist. Nar., 43, 
1784. Attakapas. —P6nicaut (1703) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 87, 1869. Attakapo.—Lewis, 
Trav., 193, 1809. Attaquapas.—Butel-Dumont, 

M6m. sur la Louisiane, 1,134, 1753. Attencapas.— 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, 76, 1848. 
Attuckapas.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 35,1857. 
Hattahappas.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 81,1854. Hattakappas.—Romans, Hist. Fla., I, 
101,1775. Man eaters. —P6nicaut (1703) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s,, 87, 1869. Skunnemoke.— 
Hutchins (1784) in Imlay, West. Ter., 421,1797. 
Takapo ishak.—Gatschet, Attakapa MS.,B. A. E., 
(adopted from whites; with ishak ‘people’). 
Tuckapas.—Hutchins (1784) in Imlay, West. Ter., 
421,1797. Tuckapaus.—Ker, Trav., 300,1816. Tuk- 
pa'-ha n -ya-di.—Dorsey, Biloxi MS. Diet., B. A. E., 


PULL. 30] 


ATTACAPAN FAMILY-ATTIGNAWANTAN 


115 


1892 (Biloxi name). Yuk’ hiti ishak.—Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E. (own name: ‘our people’). 

Attacapan Family. A linguistic family 
consisting solely of the Attacapa tribe, 
although there is linguistic evidence of 
at least two dialects. Under this name 
were formerly comprised several bands 
settled in s. La. and n. e. Tex. Although 
this designation was given them by their 
Choctaw neighbors on the e. , these bands, 
with one or two exceptions, do not appear 
in history under any other general name. 
Formerly the Karankawa and several 
other tribes were included with the Atta¬ 
capa, but the vocabularies of Martin Du- 
ralde and of Gatschet show that the At¬ 
tacapa language is distinct from all oth¬ 
ers. Investigations by Gatschet in Cal¬ 
casieu parish, La., in 1885, show that 
there were at least two dialects of this 
family spoken at the beginning of the 
19th century—an eastern dialect, repre¬ 
sented in the vocabulary of Duralde, re¬ 
corded in 1802, and a western dialect, 
spoken on the 3 lakes forming the outlet 
of Calcasieu r. See Powell in 7th Rep. 
B. A. E., 56, 1891. v 

Attakullaculla {AtcL'-gtiCktiW , from dtd / 
‘w T ood,’ ghtk&W a verb implying that 
something long is leaning, without suffi¬ 
cient support, against some other ob¬ 
ject; hence ‘ Leaning wood.’—Mooney). 
A noted Cherokee chief, born about 1700, 
known to the whites as Little Carpenter 
(Little Cornplanter, by mistake, in Hay¬ 
wood). The first notice of him is as one 
of the delegation taken to England by Sir 
Alexander Cumming in 1730. It is stated 
that he was made second in authority un¬ 
der Oconostota in 1738. He was present 
at the conference with Gov. Glenn, of 
South Carolina, in July, 1753, where he 
was the chief speaker in behalf of the In¬ 
dians, but asserted that he had not su¬ 
preme authority, the consent of Oconos¬ 
tota, the war chief, being necessary for 
final action. Through his influence a 
treaty of peace was arranged with Gov. 
Glenn in 1755, by which a large cession 
of territory was made to the King of Eng¬ 
land; and it was also through his instru¬ 
mentality that Ft Dobbs was built, in the 
year following, about 20 m. w. of the pres¬ 
ent Salisbury, N. C. When Ft Loudon, 
on Little Tennessee r., Tenn., was cap¬ 
tured by the Indians in 1760, and most of 
the garrison and refugees were massacred, 
Capt. Stuart, who had escaped the toma¬ 
hawk, was escorted safely to Virginia by 
Attakullaculla, who purchased him from 
his Indian captor, giving to the latter, 
as ransom, his rifle, clothes, and every¬ 
thing he had with him. It was again 
through, the influence of Attakullaculla 
that the treaty of Charleston was signed 
in 1761, and that Stuart, after peace had 


been restored, was received by the Chero¬ 
kee as the British agent for the southern 
tribes; yet notwithstanding his friend¬ 
ship for Stuart, who remained a steadfast 
loyalist in the Revolution, and the fact 
that a large majority of the Cherokee es¬ 
poused the British cause, Attakullaculla 
raised a force of 500 native warriors which 
he offered to the Americans. He is de¬ 
scribed by William Bartram (Travels, 482, 
1792), who visited him in 1776, as “ a man of 
remarkably small stature, slender and of a 
delicate frame, the only instance I saw in 
the nation, but he is a man of superior 
abilities.” Although he had become 
sedate, dignified, and somewhat taciturn 
in maturer years, Logan (Hist. Upper 
So. Car., i, 490, 515, 1859) says that in 
his younger days he was fond of the bot¬ 
tle and often inebriate. The date of his 
death has not been recorded, but it was 
probably about 1780. See Moonev in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1900. 

Attamtuck. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, situated between the 
Chickahominy and Pamunkey rs., in New 
Kent co., Va.—Smith (1629), Virginia, 
r, map, repr. 1819. 

Attamusco. See Atamasco. 

Attaock. A Conestoga village existing 
in 1608 w. of Susquehanna r., probably in 
what is now York co., Pa.—Smith (1608), 
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Attapulgas (Creek: atap’halgi, ‘dog¬ 
wood grove’). A former Seminole town 
on a branch of Oklokonee or Yellow- 
water r., Fla. A town of the name is 
now in Decatur co., Ga. 

Taphulgee.—Roberts, Florida, 1763. Top-hulga.— 
Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 307, 1822. Top- 
kegalga.—Ibid., 306. Topkelake.—Peni6re, ibid. 
Tuphulga.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 
27, 1826. 

Attenmiut. A division of the Malemiut 
Eskimo whose chief village is Atten, near 
the source of Buckland r., Alaska. 
Attenmut.—Dali, Alaska, 284, 1870. At'tenmut.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 16,1877. 

Attenok. A Sidarumiut Eskimo village 
on Seahorse ids., Alaska. 

Attenokamiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 162,1893. 

Attignawantan (Huron: hati ‘they,’ 
annionnil 71 ‘bear’: ‘ bear people’). One 
of the largest tribes of the Huron confed¬ 
eracy, comprising about half the Huron 
population, formerly living on Nottawas- 
aga bay, Ontario. In 1638 they were set¬ 
tled in 14 towns and villages (Jes. Rel. 
1638, 38, 1858). The Jesuit missions of 
St Joseph and La Conception were es¬ 
tablished among them. (j. n. b. h. ) 
Atignaoiiantan.—Jes. Rel. for 1642, 61,1858. Atin- 
gyahointan.—Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., IV, 1866. 
Atingyahoulan.—Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Atin- 
niaoenten.—Jes. Rel. for 1649, 12, 1858. Atin- 
nia8enten.—Jes. Rel. for 1644, 77, 1858. Atinouaen- 
tans.—Champlain (1618), CEuvres,' IV, 140, 1870. 
Attignaoouentan.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 
6,154,1883. Attigna8antan. —Jes. Rel. for 1639, 50, 


116 


ATTIGNEENONGNAHAC-ATUAMI 


[b. a. e. 


1858. Attignaouentan.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 61,1858. 
Attigiiawantan.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 204, 
1854. Attignouaatitans.—Champlain (1616), CEu- 
vres, IV, 58, 1870. Attigouantan.—Ibid. (1632), 
V, pt. 1, 247, 1870. Attigouantines.—Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., ii, 174, 1786. Attigouautan.—Champlain 
(1615), op. cit., IV, 23,1870. Bear nation.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, lil,544,1853. Nation del’Ours.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1632, 14,1858. Nation des Ours.—Jes. 
Rel. for 1636, 81, 1858. 

Attigneenongnahac. One of the four 
tribes of the Huron confederation, living 
on L. Simcoe, Ontario, s. e. of the others. 
In 1624 they were said to have 3 villages. 
The Jesuit mission of St Joseph was estab¬ 
lished among them. 

Altignenonghac.—Jes. Rel. for 1636, 123, 1858. 
Atigagnongueha.—Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., iv, 
234, 1866 (Huron name). Atignenongach.—Jes. 
Rel. for 1637,127,1858. Atignenonghac.—Ibid., 109. 
Atingueennonnihak.—Jes. Rel. for 1644, 87, 1858. 
Attigneenongnahac.—Jes. Rel. for 1639, 50, 1858. 
Attigneenongnahac.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 
204, 1854. Attigueenongnahac.—Jes. Rel. for 1638, 
42, 1858. Attiguenongha.—Jes. Rel. for 1635, 28, 
1858. Attingneenongnahac.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 73, 
1858. Attingueenongnahac.—Jes. Rel. for 1641, 67, 
1858. Attinquenongnahac.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 61, 
1858. Attiquenongnah.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. 
Hist., pt. 6, 154, 1883. Attiquenongnahai.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, III, 544,1853. Nation d’Entaua- 
que.— Sagard, Gr. Voy., 79, 1865. 

Attikamegue (Chippewa: iidik ‘cari¬ 
bou,’ mag ‘fish’: ‘whitefish.’—W. J.). 
A band of the Montagnais residing, when 
first known, in Quebec province, n. of the 
St Maurice basin (Jes. Rel. 1636,37,1858), 
and accustomed to ascend the St Lawrence 
to trade with the French. Charlevoix 
says their chief residence was on a lake 
connected with the St Maurice. They 
were so harassed by the attacks of the 
Iroquois that a part at least fled to the 
vicinity of Tadoussac. They were so 
nearly destroyed by smallpox in 1670 that 
they became extinct as a tribe. They 
were esteemed by the missionaries as a 
quiet, inoffensive people, readily disposed 
to receive religious instruction, (j. m. ) 
Altihamaguez,— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
III, 81, 1854. Altikamek, —Hervas quoted by 
Vater, Mithridates, pt. 3, sec. 3, 347,1816. Altika- 
meques.— Charlevoix (1743), Voy., i, 152, 1766. 
Atikamegues.— Jes. Rel. for 1643, 8, 1858. Atte- 
kamek.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., n, 39, 1851. 
Attibamegues.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 
1816. Atticameoets.— La Tour, map, 1779. Atti- 
cameouecs.— Beilin, map, 1755. Atticamiques.— 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 502, 1878. Attica- 
moets.— La Tour, map, 1784. Attikamegouek.— Jes. 
Rel. for 1643, 38, 1858. Attikamegs.— La Tour, 
map, 1784. Attikameguekhi. —Jes. Rel. 1636, 37, 
1858. Attikamegues. —Jes. Rel. 1637, 82, 1858. 
Attikamek.— Lahontan, New Voy, I, 230, 1703. 
Attikameques.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 161, 1836. 
Attikamigues. —Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Atti- 
kouetz.— Jefferys, French Dorns., pt. I, map, 1761. 
Outakouamiouek.— Jes. Rel. 1640, 12, 1858. Outa- 
kouamiwek.— Jes. Rel., in, index, 1858. Poissons 
blancs.— Jes. Rel. 1639, 19, 1858. White Fish In¬ 
dians.— Winsor, Cartier to Frontenac, 171, 1894. 

Attikiriniouetch (udt kivininiwiig ‘ cari¬ 
bou people.’—W. J.). A Montagnais 
tribe formerly living northward from 
Manicouagan lake, Quebec. 

Attiklriniouetchs.—Beilin, map, 1755. Attikoulri- 
niouetz.—La Tour, map, 1779. Gens du Caribon.— 
La Tour, map, 1784 (misprint). Gens du Caribou.— 
Beilin, map, 1755. Les Caribou,—Lotter, map, ca. 


Attique. A village, probably of the 
Seneca, that stood in 1749 on the present 
site of Kittanning, Pa. 

Attigne.—CGoron (1749) in Margry, D6c., vi, 685, 
1886. Attigua.—Beilin, map, 1755. Attique.— 
CGoron in Margry, op. cit., 693. 

Attoughcomoco (Algonquian: atik ‘deer,’ 
komoko ‘house,’ hence ‘deer enclosure’). 
An unidentified village of one of the Al¬ 
gonquian tribes, situated, about 1608, 
probably near Patuxent r., Md. Not 
given by Capt. John Smith nor marked 
on his map. Mentioned by Pory in Smith 
(1629), Virginia, ii, 62, repr. 1819. 

Attu (native name, variously written 
At, Atako, Ataka, Attak, Attou, and 
Otma by' explorers). An Atka Aleut 
settlement at Chichagof harbor, Attu id., 
the westernmost of the Aleutians, 173° 
e. from Greenwich. Pop. 107 in 1880; 
101 in 1890. Once very prosperous, the 
settlement has decayed owing to the 
radual disappearance of the sea otter, 
ttoo.—Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., 179, 1886. Chi- 
chagov.—Schvvatka, Mil. Recon. Alaska, 359,1900. 

Attucks, Crispus. An Indian-negro half- 
blood of Framingham, Mass., near Bos¬ 
ton, noted as the leader and first person 
slain in the Boston massacre of Mar. 
5, 1770, the first hostile encounter be¬ 
tween the Americans and the British 
troops, and therefore regarded by histo¬ 
rians as the opening fight of the great 
Revolutionary struggle. In consequence 
of the resistance of the people of Boston 
to the enforcement of the recent tax laws 
a detachment of British troops had been 
stationed in the town, to the great irrita¬ 
tion of the citizens. On Mar. 5 this feel¬ 
ing culminated in an attack on the troops, 
in front of the old State House, by a crowd 
made up largely of sailors, and said to have 
been led by Attucks, although this asser¬ 
tion has been denied by some. The 
troops retaliated by firing into the party, 
killing four men, of whom Attucks was 
the first to fall. A monument to his mem¬ 
ory was erected in Boston Common by the 
commonwealth of Massachusetts in 1888. 
Although the facts in regard to his per¬ 
sonality are disputed, the evidence goes 
to show that Attucks was a sailor, almost a 
giant in stature, the son of a negro father 
and an Indian mother of Framingham, 
or the neighboring village of Natick, 
formerly the principal Indian mission 
settlement of Massachusetts. The name 
Attucks, derived from his mother, ap¬ 
pears to be the Natick (Massachuset) 
ahtuk, or attuks, ‘small deer.’ See G. 
Bancroft, Hist. U. S.; Appleton’s Ency- 
clop. Am. Biog.; Am. Hist. Rec., i, Nov., 
1872. (j. m. ) 

Atuami. A Shastan tribe formerly liv¬ 
ing in Big valley, Lassen co., Cal. 
A-tu-a'-mih.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
267, 1877. Hamefcutellies.—Powers in Overland 
Mo., xii, 412,1874. Ha-mef-kut'-tel-li.—Powersin 


BULL. 30] 


ATUYAMA-AVAR 117 


Cont. N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 267,1877. Tuqteumi.— Cur¬ 
tin, MS. Ilmawi vocab., B. A. E., 1889 (Ilmawi 
name). 

Atuyama. A pueblo of New Mexico in 
1598; doubtless situated in the Salinas, 
in the vicinity of Abo, and evidently oc¬ 
cupied by the Tigua or the Piros.—Onate 
(1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 114, 1871. 

Auarkat. A settlement of East Green¬ 
land Eskimo, lat. 59°.->-Meddelelser om 
Gronland, xxv, map, 1902. 

Aubbeenaubbee ( Wdbanaba, ‘ morning 
person, ’ a mythic being.—W. J.). A Pot- 
awatomi chief of this name occupied a 
village, commonly known as Aubbee¬ 
naubbee’s village, on a reservation in the 
present Aubbeenaubbee tp., in Fulton co., 
Ind. The tract was sold by the treaty of 
Tippecanoe r. in 1836. Other forms of the 
name are Aubbanaubba, Aubbanaubbee, 
Aubeenaubee, Aubinaubee. (j. m.) 

Aubomesk (probably ‘white beaver’). 
A village of the Powhatan confederacy, 
in 1608, on the n. bank of the Rappa¬ 
hannock, in Richmond co., Ya.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Aucheucaula. A former Creek town 
situated on the e. bank of Coosa r., in the 
extreme n. w. corner of Coosa co., Ala.— 
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Ala. map, 
1900. 

Ancocisco. The name of the territory 
about Casco bay and Presum pscot r., in the 
area now included in Cumberland co., Me. 
It was also sometimes applied to those 
Abnaki Indians by whom it was occu¬ 
pied. Since the section was settled at an 
early date by the whites, the name soon 
dropped out of use as applied to the In¬ 
dians, or rather it was changed to 
“ Casco,” but this was a mere local desig¬ 
nation, not a tribal distinction, as the In¬ 
dians referred to were Abnaki. The proper 
form of the word is given by Willis as 
LJh-kos-is-co, ‘crane’ or ‘heron,’ the first 
syllable being guttural. These birds still 
frequent the bay. It is said by Willis to 
have been the Indian name of Falmouth 
(Portland), Me. 

Ancocisco.—Smith (1629), Virginia, II, 177, repr. 
1819 (misprint). Aucasisco.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ill, 545, 1853. Aucocisco.—Smith (1629), 
Virginia, II, 193, repr. 1819. Aucosisco.—Drake, 
Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Casco.—Sullivan in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 210, 1804 (“Casco Indians”). 
Quack.—Levett (1628) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d 
s., viii, 168,1843 (same?). Uh-kos-is-co.—Willis in 
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 31, 1831, repr. 1858. 

Au Glaize. Mentioned by Drake (Bk. 
Inds., bk. 5,63,1848) as if a Delaware vil¬ 
lage on the s. w. [s. e.] branch of the 
Miami of the Lake (Maumee r.), Ohio. 

Augpalartok (‘ the red one,’ designating 
a cliff.—Boas). An Eskimo village in w. 
Greenland, lat. 72° 53 7 .—Meddelelser om 
Gronland, viii, map, 1889. 

Augustine. A rancheria and reserva¬ 
tion of 615 acres of desert land occupied 
by Mission Indians; situated 75 m. from 


the Mission Tule River agency, s. Cal.— 
Rep. Ind. Aff., 175, 1902. 

Auk. A Koluschan tribe on Stephens 
passage, Douglas and Admiralty ids., 
Alaska; pop. 640 in 1880-81, 279 in 1890. 
Their chief town was called Anchguhlsu. 
The other settlements mentioned by 
Petroff were probably summer camps. 
One such camp was Tsantikihin, now 
called Juneau. The social divisions are 
Tlenedi and Wushketan. (j. r. s.) 
Ahkootskie.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227, 1875 
(transliterated from Veniaminoff). Ak-kon.— 
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. Akutskoe.—Ve¬ 
niaminoff, Zapiski, II, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Armos.— 
Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 309,1868 (probably misprint 
for Awks). Auke.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 
1859. Auke-qwan.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., ill, 233,1903. Awks.—Halleck in Rep. 
Sec. War, pt. 1,38,1868. 

Aukardneling. A village of the Talir- 
pingmiut division of the Okomiut Eskimo 
on the w. side of Cumberland sd. 
Auqardneling.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map,1888. 

Aukpatuk (‘red’). A Suhinimiut Es¬ 
kimo village onUngava bay, Labrador.— 
Hind, Lab. Pen., ii, map, 1863. 

Aukumbumsk. A Pequot village in the 
center of their country and the residence 
of their chief before the coming of the 
English, in 1636; probably in New Lon¬ 
don co., Conn. 

Aukumbumsk.—Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn.; 7, 
1881 (Mohegan form). Awcumbucks.—Ibid. (Nar- 
raganset form). 

Aulintac. A Costanoan village at Santa 
Cruz mission, Cal. The name has been 
taken for a dialectic division of the Costa¬ 
noan family. 

Aureuapeugh. A village of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on Rappahan¬ 
nock r., in Essex co., Va.—Smith (1629), 
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Auriferous gravel man. See Calaveras 
Man. 

Ausion. A former Chumashan village 
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 
18, 1861. 

Aute. An Apalachee (?) town on the 
coast of Apalachee bay, Fla., first visited 
by Narvaez in 1528. It has been identi¬ 
fied in location with St Marks. 

Ante.—French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 246, 1875 (mis¬ 
print). Aute.—Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 38, 
1871 (Smith identifies it with Ochete). Autia.— 
Linscnoten,Desc.de l’Am6r., 6,1638. Haute.—Gal¬ 
latin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, lvi, 1848. 

Autiamque. The town, possibly Cad- 
doan, where De Soto’s troops went into 
winter quarters in 1541-42. It had an 
abundance of maize and provisions, and 
lay on the same river as Cayas, appar¬ 
ently Arkansas r. 

Autiamque.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 181, 1850. Utiangue.— Rafinesque, 
introd. Marshall, Ky., I, 35, 1824. TJtianque.— 
Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 683, 1881. Vicanque,— 
Biedma in French, op. cit.., 107. Viranque.— 
Biedma in Smith, Collec. Docs. Fla., 61, 1857. 
Vtiangue.—Garcilasso de la Vega, Fla., 193,1723. 

Avak. A Yuit Eskimo village near Cape 
Chukotsky, n. e. Siberia; pop. 101 in 16 


118 


AVATANAK-AWANI 


[B. A. E. 


houses about 1895; 98 in 12 houses in 
1901. The people are of the Aiwan di¬ 
vision. 

Agvan.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 
A'vak.—Bogoras, Chukchee, 29, 1904 (Eskimo 
name). Awan.—KrauseinDeutscheGeog. Blatter, 
v, 80, map, 1882 (Chukchi name for Eskimo about 
Indian pt). Eu'nmun.—Bogoras, op. cit. (Chukchi 
name). 

Avatanak. An Aleut village on a small 
island of the same name, between Una- 
laska and Unimak ids., Alaska; pop. 19 
in 1880. 

Aiaialgutak.—Krenitzin and Levashef (1768), 
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Avata¬ 
nak.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 22,1884. Avata- 
nakskoi.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875. 
Avatanovskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, 203,1840. 
Awatanak.—Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 152, 
1855. 

Avaudjelling. A summer settlement of 
Akudnirmiut Eskimo at the n. end of 
Home bay, Baffin land.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Avavares. A former tribe of Texas, 
possibly Caddoan, which lived ‘‘ behind ’’ 
the Quintoles toward the interior, and to 
which Cabeza de Vaca, in 1527-34, fled 
from the Mariames. Their language was 
different from that of the Mariames, 
although they understood the latter. 
They bartered bones, which the Mariames 
ground and used for food, and also traded 
in bows. While staying with the Ava¬ 
vares Cabeza de Vaca and his companion 
became noted for their successful treat¬ 
ment of the sick. The people seem to 
have been kindly disposed and different 
in habits from the coast tribes, (a. c. f. ) 
Ananares.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, 803, 1705. 
Anavares.—Linschoten, Desc. de l’Am6rique, 6, 
1638. Avaraes.—Cabeca de Vaca (1534) quoted by 
Barcia, Ensayo, 13,1723. Avares.—Herrera, Hist. 
Gen.,dec.v,94,1725. Avavares.—CabezadeVaca, 
Smith trans., 58,84,1851. Chavavares. —Cabeza de 
Vaca, Smith trans., 137, 1871. 

Avendaughbough. A former village, 
probably of the Sewee, in South Carolina 
in 1701.—Lawson, Hist. Car., 24, 1860. 

Avnulik. A Chnagmiut village in the 
Yukon district, Alaska; pop. 30 in 1890. 
Avnuligmiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. 

Avolabac. A rancheria, probably Co- 
chimi, connected with Purfsima mission, 
Lower California, about lat. 26° 20'.— 
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Avoyelles (probably ‘people of the 
rocks’). A tribe spoken of in the 18th 
century as one of the nations of the Red 
r., having their villages near its mouth, 
within what is now Avoyelles parish, 
La. They probably belonged to the 
Natchez group of the Muskhogean family, 
representing a body that had remained 
near the ancient habitat of its kindred. 
The country occupied by the Avoyelles 
was fertile and intersected by lakes and 
bayous, one of the latter being still called 
by their name. The tribe lived in vil¬ 
lages, cultivated maize and vegetables, 
and practised the arts common to the 


tribes of the Gulf region. Nothing defi¬ 
nite is known of their beliefs and cere¬ 
monies. Like their neighbors, they had 
come into possession of horses, which 
they bred, and later they obtained cattle, 
for Du Pratz mentions that they sold 
horses, cows, and oxen to the French 
settlers of Louisiana. During the general 
displacement of the tribes throughout the 
Gulf states, w hich began in the 18th cen¬ 
tury, the Avoyelles country proved to be 
attractive. The Biloxi settled there and 
other tribes entered and took possession. 
Under the influences incident to the 
advent of the white race the Avoyelles 
mingled with the newcomers, but through 
the ravages of wars and new diseases the 
tribe was soon reduced in numbers. 
Before the close of the century their vil¬ 
lages and their tribal organization melted 
aw ay, their language became extinct, and 
the few survivors were lost in the float¬ 
ing Indian population. In 1805, accord¬ 
ing to Sibley, the tribe had become re¬ 
duced to two or three women, (a. c. f.) 
Ajouelles.—Homann, Indise Occidentals, map, ea. 
1740. Aouayeilles.—Margry, D6c.,Vl,230,1886. Avo- 
gall.—Schermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 
s., II, 26, 1812. Avovelles.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 
1776. Avoyall.—Brackenridge, Views of La., 83, 
1814. Avoyellas.—Dumont, La., I, 134,1753. Avo¬ 
yelles.—Sibley (1805) in Am. State Papers, iv, 725, 
1832. Avoyels.—Jefferys, French Dom. Am., i, 
165,1761. 

Awaitlala (‘ those inside the inlet ’). A 
Kw’akiutl tribe on Knight inlet, Brit. Col. 
Their town is called Kwatsi. 

A'wa-irala.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895,332,1897. 
Aswae'LEla.—Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
V, pt. 1, 122, 1902. Oughtella.—Brit. Col. map, 
Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872 (given as name of town). 


Awalokaksaksi (‘at the little island’). 
A Klamath settlement on Williamson r., 
s. w. Oreg.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., ii, pt. 1, xxix, 1890. 

Awani. A division of the Miw r ok living 
in Yosemite valley, Mariposa co., Cal. 
Powers states that the name Yosemite is a 
distorted form of the Miwok uzumaiti, 
‘grizzly bear,’ a term never used by the 
Indians to designate the valley itself or any 
part of it. Awani, the name applied by 
the natives of the valley, w as the principal 
village, which by extension was given to 
the whole valley and its inhabitants, who 
occupied it w r hen snow permitted. The 
Awani had 9 villages, containing 450 peo¬ 
ple, when the wffiites first came, and they 
seem to have had a larger number at an 
earlier period. At present the popula¬ 
tion is unknown, but small. Their vil¬ 
lages were Awani, Hokokwito, Kumaini, 
Lesamaiti, Macheto, Notomidula, and 
Wahaka. (h. w. h.) 

Ahwahnachee.—Hittell, Yosemite, 42, 1868. Ah- 
wahnechee.—Ibid.,35. Awalache.— Johnston(1851) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 22,1852. 
f McKee et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 

4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 74,1853. Awanee.—Pow- 
^?A n ,9^; rland . Monthly, x, 333,1874. Oosemite.— 
Hittell, Yosemite, 35,1868. Oosoomite.—Ibid., 36. 


BULL. 30] 


AWASH—AWATOBI 


119 


Sosemiteiz.— Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 399, 
1858. Sosemity. —Ibid., 252, 1856. Ya-seem-ne.— 
Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 32d Cong., spec, sess., 
256, 1853. Yoamity. —Hittell, Yosemite, 42, 1868. 
Yohamite. —Ibid. Yosahmittis. —Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Yo-sem-a-te.— Wessells 
(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 
30, 1857. Yosemetos. —Barbour (1851) in'Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 61, 1853. Yo-sem- 
ety.— Johnston in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 
222, 1854. Yosemites. —Tayloc in Cal. Farmer, 
Dec. 7, 1860. Yosimities. —Ind. Com’rs (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 88,1853. 
Yosoomite. —Hittell, Yosemite, 36,1868. 

Awash (‘ buffalo ’). A Tonkawa clan or 
gens.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1884. 

Awashlaurk. A former Chumashan 
village near Santa In6s mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal. 

A-wac-la'-urk. —Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Awashonks. The woman chief of Se- 
conet, R. I., whose fame obscured that 
of Tolony, her husband (Drake, Inds. of 
N. Am., 249, 1880). Her name is signed 


until 1680, when, in the Pueblo rebellion, 
which began in August, the Awatobi 
missionary, Father Figueroa, was mur¬ 
dered. At this time the Awatobi people 
numbered 800. Henceforward no Span¬ 
ish priests were established among the 
Hopi, although in 1700 Father Garay- 
coechea visited Awatobi, where he bap¬ 
tized 73 natives, but was unsuccessful in 
his attempt to reestablish missions among 
them. In November of the same year, 
owing to the friendly feeling which the 
Awatobi are said to have had for the 
Spanish friars, their kindred, especially 
of Walpi and Mashongnovi, joined in 
an attack on Awatobi at night, setting fire 
to the pueblo, killing many of its inhabi¬ 
tants, including all the men, and carrying 
off women and children to the other 
pueblos, chiefly to Mashongnovi, Walpi, 
and Oraibi. Awatobi was never again in- 



RUINS OF AWATOBI AND ITS MISSION. (v. MINDELEFf) 


to the Plymouth agreement of 1671. She 
was drawn into King Philip’s war in sup¬ 
port of that chief, but afterward made 
her peace with the English. One of her 
sons is said to have studied Latin in prep¬ 
aration for college, but succumbed to the 
palsy, (a. f. c. ) 

Awata. The Bow clan of the Hopi. 
Aoat. —Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 
283, 1903. A-wa'-ta.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., 
vii, 367, 1894. Awata winwu. —Fewkes in 19th 
Rep. B. A.E.. 584,1900 ( unnwH, = ‘clan’). A-wata 
wun-wu. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404,1894. 

Awatobi (‘high place of the bow,’ re¬ 
ferring to the Bow people). A former 
pueblo of the Plopi on a mesa about 9 m. 
s. e. of Walpi, n. e. Ariz. It was one of 
the original villages of the province of 
Tusayan of the early Spaniards, being 
visited by Tobar and Cardenas of Coro¬ 
nado’s expedition in 1540, by Espejo in 
1583, and by Onate in 1598.. It became 
the seat of the Franciscan mission of San 
Bernardino in 1629, under Father Porras, 
who was poisoned by the Hopi in 1633.; 
but the endeavor to Christianize the Hopi 
at this and other pueblos was continued 


habited. The w'alls of the old Spanish 
church are still partly standing. See 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891; 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., Oct., 1893; 
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 592 et 
seq., 1898. (f. w. h.) 

Aguato. —Espejo (1583) in Doc. In6d., xv, 120,182, 
1871. Aguatobi.— Doc. of 1584 cited by Bande- 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 15, 1881; Vetan- 
curt (1693), Menolog. Fran., 275, 1871. Agua- 
tubi.— Ayeta (1680) quoted by Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 369,1892. Aguatuby. — Jef- 
ferys, Am. Atlas, map 5,1776. Aguatuvi.— Busch- 
mann, Neu-Mexico, 231, 1858. Aguatuya.— Ban¬ 
delier in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., in, 85, 1892 
(misquoting Onate following). Aguatuyba.— 
Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 137, 1871 (erro¬ 
neously given as name of chief). Aguitobi.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 115, 1890. 
Ahuato.— Hakluyt (1600), Voy., 470, 1810. Ahu- 
atu. —Bandelier in Aren. Inst. Papers, m, 115, 
135,1890. Ahuatuyba.— Ibid., 109, and IV, 368,1892. 
Ahuzto.— Hakluyt (1600), Voy., repr. 1891. Ah- 
wat-tenna. —Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 195, 1884. 
Aoatovi. —Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 47, 1905. 
Aquatasi.— Walch, Charte America, 1805. Aqua- 
tubi. —Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 368, 1869. 
Atabi-hogandi.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 84, 1884 
(Navaho name). Aua-tu-ui. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 368, 1892. A-wa-te-u.— Cushing 
in Atl. Monthly, 367, Sept., 1882. A-wa'-to;bi.— 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., v, 10,1892. Awatubi.— 






120 


AWAUSEE-AWLUHL 


[B. a. e. 


Bourke, op. cit., 91. A wat u i. —Cushing in 4th 
Rep. B. A. E., 493, 1886. A wat u ians.— Ibid., 494. 
San Bernahdino de Ahuatobi.— Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, IV, 369,1892 (misprint). San Bernardi- 
no.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., Vi, 394, 1894. San 
Bernardino de Aguatuvi. —Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 349,1889. San Bernardino de Ahuatobi.— Ve- 
tancurt (1693), Teatro Mex., ill, 321, 1871. S. Ber¬ 
nardo de Aguatuvi. —Vargas (1692) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 201,1889. Talla-Hogan.— 
Mindeleff, quoted by Powell, 4th Rep. B. A. E., 
xxxix, 1886 (‘singing house’: Navaho name). 
Talla-hogandi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, 368, 1892. Tally-hogan.— Powell, 3d Rep. B. 
A. E., xxi, 1884. Tolli-Hogandi.— Bourke, Moquis 
of Ariz., 84,1884. Zagnato.— Brackenridge, Early 
Span. Discov., 19, 1857. Zaguate.— Prince,. N. 
Mex., 34, 1883. Zaguato.— Espejo (1583) in Hak¬ 
luyt, Voy., 463, 470, 1810. Zuguato.— Hinton, 
Handbook to Ariz., 388, 1878. 

Awausee (awasisi, ‘bullhead,’ a fish). A 
Chippewa phratry or gens. According to 
Warren a phratry including all the fish 
gentes of the Chippewa. According to 
Morgan and Tomazin it is a gens in it¬ 
self. Cf. Ouasouarini. 

Ah-wah-sis'-sa. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. 
Ah-wa-sis-se. —Tanner,Narr., 315,1830(‘smallcat¬ 
fish’; given by Tanner as a gens; headds: “some¬ 
times they call the people of this totem ‘those 
who carry their young,' from the habits of the 
small catfish”). Awassissin. —Gatschet, Ojibwa 
MS., B. A. E., 1882. A-waus-e.— Warren in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 44, 1885. A-waus-e-wug.— 
Ibid., 87. A-waus-is-ee. —Ramseyinlnd. Aff. Rep., 
91, 1850. 

Awenanish. See Ouananiche. 

Awhawhilashmu. A former Chuma- 
shan village on the coast between Pt 
Conception and Santa Barbara, Cal., in 
the locality now called Punta Capitan. 
A-wha-whi-lac'-mu. —Henshaw, Buenaventura 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Awhut. A Diegueno rancheria in n. 
Lower Cal. whose inhabitants spoke the 
Hataam dialect.—Gatschet, Yuma Spr., 
107, 1886. 

Awighsaghroone. A tribe, probably 
Algonquian, that lived about the upper 
great lakes and which sent a friendly 
message to the Seneca in 1715. Perhaps 
identical with the Assisagigroone, or Mis- 
sisauga. 

Awighsaghroene. —Livingston (1715) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., V, 446, 1855. Awighsaghroone. —Ibid. 

Awigna. A former Gabrieleno ranche¬ 
ria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a place 
later called La Puenta. 

Awigna.— Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Awiz-na.— Ried quoted by 
Hoffman in Bull. Essex Inst., xvii, 2,1885. 

Awls. The aboriginal American awl is 
a sharpened stick, bone, stone, or piece 
of metal, used as a perforator in sewing. 
It was universal among Indians from the 
earliest times, and is one of the familiar 
archeologic objects recovered from exca¬ 
vations in prehistoric sites. For tempo¬ 
rary use awls were improvised from 
splinters of flint, wood, and bone, cac¬ 
tus spines, agave needles, thorns, etc. 
Before the introduction of iron, bone was 
the most serviceable material. Rude 
awls, formed by grinding to a point a 
long-bone or sliver of bone, are frequently 
encountered in graves and on the sites of 


early habitations, and with them may be 
found others that are elaborately finished 
and decorated with carving and etching. 
Perhaps most Indians preferred deer bone 
as a material for awls, but bear and tur¬ 
key bones and antler were also exten¬ 
sively employed, those of turkey bone 
being especially common in New Mex¬ 
ico. The fibula of the deer merely 
needed sharpening to produce the tool, 
while the articular extremity formed a 
convenient and ornamental handle. 
Ivory from the walrus, narwhal, and fos¬ 
sil elephant was valued for making awls 
in regions where it could be procured. 
Awls of chipped or ground stone, shell, 
hard wood, and copper have been found 
on ancient sites. Awls of bone or of wood 
were not usually hafted, but stone and 
copper awls were often mounted and per¬ 
haps served also for drills (q. v.). The 
modern awl of iron is always hafted with 
wood, bone, dried tendon or gristle, 
or horn, and the hafts are often carved, 
painted, or otherwise decorated. 

The awl was used to make perforations 
through which thread of sinew or other 
sewing material was passed when skins 
for moccasins, clothing, tents, etc., were 
sewed, and in quillwork, beadwork, and 
basketwork. Other uses for awls were for 
making holes for pegs in woodwork, as a 
gauge in canoe-making, for shredding 
sinew, for graving, etc. Various awl-like 
implements that were used by the In¬ 
dians in weaving and making pottery, as 
pins for robes, as head-scratchers, pipe- 
picks, blood pins for closing wounds in 
game to save the blood, marrow-extract¬ 
ors, forks, corn-huskers, etc., have some¬ 
times been classed as awls. The Alaskan 
Eskimo have an awl with a small barb 
near the end which was used like a cro¬ 
chet hook. 

The awl was so indispensable in every¬ 
day work that it was usually carried on 
the person, and many kinds of sheaths 
and cases were made for holding it. 
These were formed from joints of cane 
or hollow bones, or wrought out of bone, 
wood, metal, or leather, and were orna¬ 
mented by etching, carving, or painting, 
or with beadwork, quillwork, or other 
decorative devices. See Drills and Drill¬ 
ing , Needles. 

Consult Stephen, The Navajo Shoe¬ 
maker, Proc. Nat. Mus., xi, 131, 1888; pa¬ 
pers in Reps. B. A. E. by Nelson, Mur¬ 
doch, Boas, Turner, Hoffman, and 
Fewkes; and Mason, Basketry, Rep. Nat. 
Mus., 1902. (w. h.) 

Awluhl (d'Whl). A clan of Taos pueblo, 
New Mexico. The meaning of the name 
is indefinite, but it is said to bear some 
reference to transformation from human 
beings into animals.—Hodge, field notes, 
B. A. E., 1899. 


BULL. 30] 


AXACAN-AXES 


121 


Axacan. A place in Virginia, some¬ 
where w. from Chesapeake bay, at 37° 
or 37° 3(K, in which the Spaniards at¬ 
tempted to establish a Jesuit mission in 
1570. Through the treachery of their 
Indian guide, brother of the chief of the 
tribe, the entire party of missionaries, 7 
in number, was massacred and the tem¬ 
porary mission building destroyed. Two 
years later Menendez revenged their 
death by hanging 8 of the principal mur¬ 
derers. (j. M.) 

Aixacan.— Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 660, 1881. 
Axacan.— Barcia, Ensayo, 142, 1723. 

Axauti. A pueblo of New 7 Mexico in 
1598; doubtless situated in the Salinas, in 
the vicinity of Abo, and evidently occu¬ 
pied by the Tigua or the Piros.—Onate 
(1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 114, 1871. 
Axanti.— Columbus Memorial Vol., 155,1893 (mis¬ 
print). 

Axes. The grooved ax takes a promi¬ 
nent place among the stone implements 
used by the northern tribes. The normal 
form is that of a thick wedge, with rounded 
angles and an encircling 
groove near the top for 
securing the handle; but 
there is great variation 
from the average. Usu¬ 
ally the implement is 
made of some hard, tough 
stone, as trap, granite, 
syenite, greenstone, or 
hematite, where such can 
be procured; but when 
these are not available 
softer material is utilized, 
as sandstone or slate. 

Copper axes are of rare 
occurrence. Among the 
stone specimens there is 
a very wide range in 
size, the largest weigh¬ 
ing upward of 30 pounds 
and the smallest scarcely an ounce. As 
these extreme sizes could serve no eco¬ 
nomic purpose, they were probably for 
ceremonial use; the smaller may have been 
amulets or talismans. The majority range 
from 1 pound to 6 pounds, which mark 
close to the limits of utility. As a rule the 
groove is at a right angle to the longer 
axis, though sometimes it is oblique, and 
it may extend entirely or only partially 
around the ax. In the latter case it is 
alw r ays one of the narrow 7 sides that is left 
without a groove, and this is frequently 
flattened or hollowed to accommodate the 
handle better. Ordinarily the complete 
or entire groove is pecked in a ridge encir¬ 
cling the ax, leaving a protuberance 
above and below, w 7 hile the partial groove 
is sunken in the body of the implement. 
Axes with two or more grooves are rare 
excepting in the Pueblo country, where 
multiple grooves are common. The haft 
was placed parallel with the blade and 


was usually a withe doubled around the 
groove and fastened securely with cords 
or rawhide, but heavier T-shape sticks 
were sometimes used, the top of the T 
being set against the 
flattened or hollow 7 side 
of the implement and 
firmly lashed. Axes 
with holes drilled for 
the insertion of a handle 
are common in Europe, 
but this method of haft- 
ing w 7 as of very rare 
occurrence among the 
American aborigines. 

When not made from 
bowlders closely ap¬ 
proximating in shape 
the desired implement, 
the ax was roughed out by chipping and 
was reduced to the desired shape by peck¬ 
ing with a hard stone and by grinding. 
Axes of rude shape, made by flaking a 
flattish bowlder along one end and break¬ 
ing notches in the sides for hafting, are 
found in some sections. Axes are w r ell 
distributed over the country wherever 
good material is readily available, ex¬ 
cepting in the Pacific states, British Co¬ 
lumbia, and Alaska, w 7 here specimens are 
exceedingly rare. Few are found in 
Florida, and although plentiful in the 
mound region are seldom found in 
mounds. The shapes vary with the 
different regions, examples from the 
Atlantic slope, for example, being quite 
unlike those of the Pueblo country. 

It is probable that the ax served vari¬ 
ous purposes in the arts, and especially in 
war and in the chase. Numerous badly 
fractured specimens are found in the soap¬ 
stone quarries of e. United States, w 7 here 
they were used for cutting out masses of 
this rock. The grooved ax is said to have 
been used in felling trees and in cutting 
them up, but it is manifestly not well 
suited for such work; it w r ould serve, 
however, to assist in cutting w 7 ood in 
conjunction with charring. The hafted 
stone ax passed immediately out of use 
on the introduction by Europeans of 
the iron ax, which w r as the first and 
most obviously useful tool that the 
Indians saw in the hands of the white 
man. 

See Abbott, Prim. Indust., 1881; Fowke 
(1) in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896, (2) Arch. 
Hist. Ohio, 1902; Holmes in 15th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1897; Jones, Antiq. So. Inds., 1873; 
Jones in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 1876; 
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Put¬ 
nam in Surv. W. 100th Merid., vii, 1879; 
Squier and Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 
1848; Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 1883; 
Thruston, Antiq. Tenn., 1897; Wilson in 
Smithson. Reps. 1887 and 1888. 

(g. f. w. h. h.) 



Ax with Simple Groove; 

DI8TRICT OF COLUMBIA 
(LENGTH, 7 IN.) 



Ax with Diagonal Groove 
And Lateral Ridges; 
Tennessee 



122 


AXILLE-AZQUELTAN 


[B. A. E. 


Axille. A former fortified village of 50 
houses in n. w. Florida., visited by De Soto 
in 1539. It was on a river, doubtless the 
one which still retains the name Ocilla. 
The same root may appear in the name 
of the province, Uzachil. It was on the 
frontier of the territory of the Apalachee 
tribe. 

Asila.—French, Hist. Coll. La., 2d s., 255, 1875. 
Axille.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 134,1850. Ochile.—Garcilasso de la 
Vega, Florida, 51,1723. 

Axion (‘the muddy place/ from assiscu 
‘mud’). A division of the New Jersey 
Delawares, formerly living on the e. bank 
of Delaware r., between Rancocas cr. and 
the present Trenton. In 1648 they were 
one of the largest tribes on the river, 
being estimated at 200 warriors. Brinton 
thinks the name may be a corruption of 
Assiscunk, the name of a creek above 
Burlington. See Evelin (1648) in Proud, 
Pa., i, 113, 1797. 

Axol. A Tewa pueblo in New Mexico 
in 1598.—Onate (1598) in Doc. Ined., 
xvi, 116, 1871. 

Axoytre. —Onate, ibid., 102 (probably the same). 

Ayabaskawininiwug. A division of the 
Cree (q. v.), commonly known as Wood 
Cree. 

Ayahanisino. A clan of the Apohola 
phratry of the Timucua.—Pareja ( ca . 
1612) quoted by Gatschet in Am. Philos. 
Soc. Proc., xvn, 492, 1878. 

Ayak. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo village 
on Sledge id., Alaska. 

Ahyak. —11th Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Ayanabi (‘ iron wood ’). A former Choc¬ 
taw village on Yannubbee cr., 2 m. above 
its confluence with Petickfa, about 8 m. 
s. w. of Dekalb, Kemper co., Miss. Ac¬ 
cording to tradition it was the scene of a 
conflict between the Creeks and the 
Choctaw in the 18th century, and being 
a neutral town was selected as the place 
for negotiating peace. In 1811 the town 
was visited by Ellskwatawa, the Shawnee 
Prophet, in the interest of Tecumtha, and 
2 years later a band of about 30 of its 
warriors joined the Creeks in the British 
cause. 

Aianabe. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 36, 1786. Aya- 
nabe. —D’Anville, map (1732), in Miss. Hist. Soc. 
Pub., ill, 367,1900. Ayanabi.— West Fla. map, ca. 
1772. Iyanabi.— Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Pub., 
op. cit., 368 (given as proper Choctaw form). 
Yanabi.— Ibid, (alternative form). Yannubbee 
Town.— Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc. Pub., 77, 1899. 
Yanubbee. —Ibid. 

Ayanamon. A village formerly situated, 
according to old maps, on a lake about 
the sources of Tuscarawas r., Ohio. 

Ayanamon. —Lattr6, map, 1784. Ayououtou.— 
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. 

Ayanemo. See Ninigret. 

Aya valla. An i m portant Apalachee (or 
Timacua?) town and mission about 1700. 
It was destroyed by the.English and their 
Indian allies under Gov. Moore in 1704, 
or, according to Shea, in the later inva¬ 
sion of 1706. Fairbanks locates it “near 


the St Mark’s r.,” w. Fla., while Shea in¬ 
correctly makes it a town of the Atimucas 
(Timucua) on Apalachicola r. (j. m. ) 
Ayavala.— Jefferys, French Dorn. Am., map, 135, 
1761. Ayavalla.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 74,1855. Aya- 
ville.— Carroll, Hist. Coll. S. C., II, 574,1836. 

Ay cate. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz.—Sedelmair 
(1744) quoted bv Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 366, 1889/ 

Aychini. An unidentified pueblo in 
New Mexico in 1598.—Onate (1598) in 
Doc. Ined., xvi, 103, 1871. 

Aymay. A village in e. Georgia, visited 
by De Soto in 1540 and called by the Span¬ 
iards Socorro, ‘Relief.’—Gentl. of Elvas 
(1557), Hakluyt trans., 54, 1851. 

Ayotl. A Yurok village 1 m. above 
the mouth of Blue cr., on Klamath r., n. 
Cal. 

Oiyotl. —Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 138, 
1853. 

Ayqui. A pueblo of the province of 
Atripuy, in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598 (Onate, 1598, 
in Doc. In6d., xvi, 115, 1871). Proba¬ 
bly the same as the pueblo at Ayquiyn, 
attributed by the same authority (p. 102) 
to the “Trios.” 

Ayquiyu.— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 136, 1889 
(misprint). 

Azavay. A former Timuquanan village 
on St Johns r., Fla., 50 or 60 leagues 
upstream.—Fontaneda (ca. 1570) in Ter- 
naux-Compans, Voy., xx, 35, 1841. 

Azcapotzalco (Nahuatl name). Proba¬ 
bly an ancient settlement of the Tepe- 
cano or of a related tribe, but occupied 
since the early part of the 18th century 
by Tlaxcaltecs originally introduced by 
the Spaniards for defense against the 
Chichimecs; situated about 10 m. e. of 
Bolanos, in Jalisco, Mexico.—Hrdlicka 
in Am. Anthrop., v, 425, 1903. 

Aziagmiut. The inhabitants of Sledge 
or Aziak id., Alaska, a subdivision of the 
Kaviagmiut, numbering 67 in 1890.— 
11th Census, Alaska, 154, 1893. 

Aziagmut. —Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. Am., pt. I, 
73, 1847. 

Aziak. The village of the Aziagmiut 
on Sledge id., near C. Nome, Alaska; 
pop. 50 in 1880.—Petroff, 10th Census, 
' Alaska, 11, 1884. 

Aziavik. A town of the Chingigmiut 
Eskimo near C. Peirce, Alaska; pop. 90 
in 1890. 

Aziavigamut. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. Aziavigamute. —Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 
yin, map, 1884. Aziavigiokhamiut. —Schanz in 
11th Census, Alaska, 93, 1893. 

Azqueltan (Nahuatl: ‘where there are 
small ants,’ referring to the former num¬ 
erous population). The most important 
Tepecano settlement, consisting of about 
40 dwellings, situated on the Rio de 
Bolanos, about lat. 22° 12 r , long. 104°, 
Jalisco, Mexico. In 1902 a Mexican 
trader was permitted to settle among 
them for the first time. 


BULL. 30] 


AZUCSAGNA-BACADEGUAOHI 


123 


Alquestan. —Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., n, 16, 
map, 123, 1902 (popular name, properly pro¬ 
nounced Asqueltan). Askeltan;— Hrdlicka in 
Am. Anthrop., V, 387, 1903. Ki-dagh-ra.— Ibid., 
420 (Tepecano name). San Lorenzo.— Ibid., 410 
(early Spanish name). Totonaltam.— Lumholtz, 
op. cit. (Tepecano name: same meaning). 

Azucsagna. A former Gabrieleno ranch - 
eria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at the locality- 
now called Azusa.—Hoffman in Bull. 
Essex Inst., xvii, 2, 1885. 

Asucsagna. —Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Azucsagna. —Ried quoted 
by Hoffman in Bull. Essex Inst., xvii, 2,1885. 

Baada. A former Makah village on 
Neah bay, Wash. According to Swan it 
was abandoned in 1863, its inhabitants 
moving to Neah. 

Baada.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 2, 1870. 
Behda.— Gibbs, MS. no. 248, B. A. E. 

Babacomero. A former rancheria, prob¬ 
ably of the Papago, on the w. branch of 
Rio San Pedro, between Tombstone and 
Camp Huachuca, s. Ariz.—Box, Adven¬ 
tures, 322, 1869. 

Babasaqui. A ruined village, probably 
of the Papago, 3 m. above Imuris, be¬ 
tween Cocospera and Magdalena, Sonora, 
Mexico. 

Babasaqui.— Kino (1706) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, 1,501,1884. Babesagui. —Box, Adven¬ 
tures, 278,1869. 

Babbyduclone. See Nakaidoklini. 

Babesakundiba, Babesigaundibay. See 

Curly Head. 

Babiacora. A pueblo of the Teguima 
Opata and the seat of a Spanish mission 
established in 1639; situated on the Rio 
Sonora, Sonora, Mexico, 110 m. s. of the 
Arizona boundary; pop. 445 in 1678, 294 
in 1730. 

Babiacora. —Kino, map (1702), in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Babicori.— Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 343, 1864. Batacora.— Escudero, Noticias 
Sonora y Sinaloa, 101,1849 (probably the same). 
Batacosa.— Cancio (1767) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
II, 224, 1856 (probably the same). Baviacora.— 
Davila, Sonora Hist., 317,1894. Concepcion Babia¬ 
cora. —Zapata (1678) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. 
States, I, 246, 1884. Concepcion Babicora. —Rivera 
(1730), ibid., 514. Purisima de Babicora.— Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 343,1864. 

Babiche. A thong of skin, particularly 
of eel skin. The word is derived through 
Canadian French, in which the term is 
old, occurring in Hennepin (1688), from 
one of the eastern dialects of Algonquian. 
The original source is probably the old 
Micmac ababich, ‘cord,’ ‘thread’ (Lescar- 
bot, Hist. Nouv. France, 666, 1612). A 
cognate word is the Chippewa assababish, 
‘thread.’ For the manufacture and use 
of babiche, see Rawhide, (a. f. c.) 

Babine (‘big lips’). A branch of the 
Takulli comprising, according to Morice 
(Trans. Can. Inst., 27, 1893), the Natao- 
tin, the Babine proper, and the Hwotso- 
tenne tribes living about, Babine lake, 
British Columbia, with a total population 
of 610 in 7 villages. The name was given 
to them by French Canadians frorn the 
custom of wearing labrets, copied from 
the Chimmesyan; and indeed their entire 


culture was greatly affected by that of the 
coast tribes. 

Babisi. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Sobaipuri, at the s. boundary of 
Arizona, near Suamca, of which it was a 
visita. 

Sta Cruz Babisi.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 371, 
1889. 

Babispe (from babipa, ‘the point where 
the river takes a new course.’—Hardy). 
An Opata pueblo and the seat of a Spanish 
mission founded in 1645; situated on an 
e. branch of Rio de Babispe, in n. e. 
Sonora, Mexico, near the Chihuahua 
boundary. Pop. 402 in 1678, 566 in 1730. 
The town was destroyed by an earthquake 
in May, 1887. (f. w. h. ) 

Babispe.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343,1864. Bapis- 
pes.—Ribas (1645) quoted in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
in, 58, 1890 (referring to the inhabitants). S. 
Miguel Babispe.—Zapata (1678) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 246, 1884. S. Miguel de 
Vavispe.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 1,444,1736. 

Baborigame. A former Tepehuane pue¬ 
blo, situated in a plain 1£ m. in diameter, 
in lat. 26° 40', long. 107°, s. w. Chihuahua, 
Mexico. The settlement is now Mexican- 
ized, but it is surrounded by Tepehuane 
rancherias. 

Baborigame.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864. 
Baborigami.—Lumholtz in Scribner’s Mag., xvi, 
303, Sept., 1894. Vawulile.—Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mex., i, 420,1902 (‘where there is a large fig tree ’: 
native name). 

Babuyagui. A pueblo founded in 1670 
by Father Alvaro Flores de la Sierra with 
some converted Varohio of Yecarome; 
situated on or near the headwaters of the 
upper Rio Fuerte, in n. Sinaloa, Mexico. 
It was given a resident priest in 1673, but 
on the death of Sierra in that year it soon 
became a mere visita of the mission of 
Taro (Tara), whence many of the con¬ 
verts removed 3 years later.—Bancroft, 
No. Mex. States, 247, 1886. 

Baca (abbr. of bacapa, ‘reed grass.’— 
Buelna). A Mayo settlement near the 
e. bank of Rio del Fuerte, about lat. 26° 
5(K, in the northernmost corner of Sina¬ 
loa, Mexico. 

Baca.—Hardy (1829) quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 608,1882. Bacabachi.—Hrdlicka in Am. 
Anthrop.,vi,59,1904(probablythesame). Vaca.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 332,1864. 

Bacaburiachic. A Tarahumare settle¬ 
ment of Chihuahua, Mexico; definite lo¬ 
cality unknown.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
323, 1864. 

Bacadeguacbi. A Coguinachi Opata 
pueblo and the seat of a Spanish mission 
founded in 1645; situated on the Rio de 
Batepito, or Babispe, in e. Sonora, Mexico; 
pop. 370 in 1678, 272 in 1730. In 1884, 
when visited by Bandelier, it contained 
about 500 Mexicans and Mexicanized In¬ 
dians, but the town was much neglected 
and dilapidated on account of Apache 
depredations. 

Bacadeguachi.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 1,444, 1736. 
Bacadeguatzi.—Ribas (1764) quoted by Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 508, 1892. Baca de 
Huachi.—Hamilton, Mexican Handbook, 47,1883. 


124 


BACANORA 


BAGADUCE 


f B. A. E. 


Bacatu de Guachi. —Mange ( ca . 1700) quoted by 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 233, 1884. San Luis 
Bacadeguachi.— Rivera (1730), ibid., 514. San Luis 
Gonzaga de Bacadeguatzi. —Doc. of 1764 quoted by 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, 56,^1890. S. 
Luis Gonzaga Bacadeguachi. —Zapata (1678), ibid., 
246. 

Bacanora. A pueblo of the Eudeve di¬ 
vision of the Opata and the seat of a 
Spanish mission founded in 1627; situated 
in e. Sonora, Mexico, on Rio Batepito, 
lat. 29° 1(K, long. 109°. Pop. 253 in 1678, 
116 in 1730. 

Bacanora. —Rivera (1730) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 513, 1884. Basacora. —Allegre 
quoted by Bancroft, ibid., 523 (probably the same). 
S. Ignacio Bacanora. —Zapata (1678). ibid., 245. 

Bacanuchi. A rancheria, apparently of 
the Opata, on the e. bank of the Rio 
Sonora, Sonora, Mexico, in lat. 30° 40'. 
It was visited by Father Kino in Oct., 
1706, and was the seat of a mission with 
266 inhabitants in 1777 (Doc. Hist. Mex., 
4th s., i, app., 1856). Distinct from Ba- 
cuachi. 

Bacanuchi. —Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Real de Bacanuchi. —Kino 
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 501, 1884. 

Bacapa (said by Buelna to signify ‘reed 
grass’ ( carrizo ), but the term bctc, or vac, 
in Pima signifies ‘ house, ’ ‘ ruined house ’). 
A Papago rancheria in n. w. Sonora, Mex¬ 
ico, located slightly s. e. of Carrizal on 
the map of Father Kino (1701), by whom 
it was visited in 1700, and by Anza and 
Font in 1776. Not to be confounded with 
Matape in any of its various forms, but 
identical with the later Quitobac in lat. 
31° 40', long. 112° 45 / . (f. w. h.) 

Quitobac.— Font, map (1777) in Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. M., 393, 1889. San Louis de Bacapa, —Venegas, 
Hist. Cal., II, 176, 1759. San Luis Bacupa. —Ban¬ 
croft, op. cit., 359. San Luis Beltran de Bacapa. — 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 123, 1890. 
S. Ludlov de Bacapa. —Kino, map (1702) in Stock- 
lein, Neue Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. S. Luis Bacapa. — 
Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, op. cit., 360.—S. 
Luis de Bacapa. —Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, map, 
1759. S. Luis Quitobac. —Anza and Font (1774) 
quoted by Bancroft, op. cit., 393. St. Ludlovic de 
Vacapa. —Bandelier, op. cit., 122. 

Bachipkwasi (a species of lizard). A 
clan of the Lizard (Earth or Sand) phra- 
try of the Hopi. 

Ba-tci'p-kwa-si. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
39, 1891. 

Backhook. One of the small tribes for¬ 
merly living on lower Pedee r. and its 
branches in South Carolina. Almost 
nothing is known of it. With the Hook 
tribe they are mentioned by Lawson as 
foes of the Santee and as living in 1701 
about the mouth of Winyah bay, S. C. 

(.1. M.) 

Backhook.— Lawson (1714), Hist. Car., 45, 1860. 
Back Hook.— Rivers, Hist. S. C., 35, 1856. Black 
Hook. —Ibid., 36. 

Bacoburito. A rancheria, apparently 
occupied by one of the Cahita tribes of 
the Piman family, situated on the Rio 
Petatlan, or Rio Sinaloa, in lat. 26°, n. w. 
Sinaloa, Mexico. Christianized early in 
17th century, the natives rebelled about 
1604 and burned their church, but the up¬ 


rising was soon quelled by Gov. Hurtaide 
who put the leading rebels to death and 
compelled the others to rebuild the 
edifice.—Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 
213, 1886. 

Bacuachi. A former pueblo of the Tegui- 
ma Opata and the seat of a Spanish mission 
founded in 1650; situated on the head¬ 
waters of the Rio Sonora, in Sonora, Mex¬ 
ico, below latitude 31°. It still existed as 
a mission in 1777 (Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
i, app., 1856). Pop. 195 in 1678, and 51 
in 1730, but Bartlett (Personal Narr., i, 
278, 1854) found it almost depopulated in 

1851. 

Bacatzi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 530, 
1892 (misprint). Bacoachi. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
343, 1864. Bacoaiz. —Ibid. Bacoatzi. —Rudo En- 
sayo (1763), 160, 1863. Bacouiz. —Rivera (1730) 
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, 514, 1884. 
Bacuachi.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Biquache. —Hrdlicka in Am. 
Anthrop., vi, 72, 1904. S, Miguel Bacuachi. —Za¬ 
pata (1678) quoted by Baneroit, op. cit., 246. 

Bacuancos. A Pima rancheria visited 
by Father Kino about 1697; situated 7 
leagues s. of the mission of Guevavi in 
Pimeria Alta, n. w. Sonora, Mexico. 
Probably the later Buena vista. See Qui- 
quiborica. 

Bacuancos. —Bernal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. M., 356, 1889. Bacuanos.—Mange, 
ibid., 356. S. Antonio(l). —Ibid. S. Luis Bacuan¬ 
cos. —Ibid., 358. 

Bacum. A Yaqui settlement on the s. 
bank of the lower Rio Yaqui, s. w. So¬ 
nora, Mexico, with an estimated popula¬ 
tion of 4,000 in 1849. 

Bacum.— Velasco, Noticias de Sonora, 84, 1850. 
Bahium.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 355, 1864. Santa 
Cruz Bacum. —Ibid. 

Bacuvia. Mentioned as an early settle¬ 
ment apparently within the province of 
Apalachee, Fla. 

Bacutia. —Barcia, Ensayo, 339, 1723. Bacuvia.— 
Ibid., 336. 

Bad Arms. A Brule band.—Culbertson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. 

Badeuachi. A former Opata village, 
now in ruins, a short distance w. of Rio 
Sonora, about lat. 30°, near Huepaca and 
Aconchi, n. central Sonora, Mexico.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 71, 
1890. 

Badwisha. A Mariposan tribe on Ka- 
weah r., Cal., said to have lived near the 
Wikchamni. Mentioned by Hoffman in 
1886 as formerly on Kaweah r., but then 
at Title agency. 

Badwis'ha.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxill, 301, 1886. Balwisha. —Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. 
Pal-wish-a.— Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 255,1853. Pat-wish-a. —Johnston 
(1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 23, 

1852. Pol-we-sha. —Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 32, 1857. 

Bagaduce. The name of the peninsula 
in Hancock co., Me., on which Castine 
is situated. Purchas mentions Chebegna- 
dose (n should probably be u) as a town 
in 1602-1609 on Penobscot r. in Abnaki 
territory, with 30 houses and 90 men, 
which may be connected with the more 


BULL. 30] 


BAGIOPA-BAGS AND POUCHES 


125 


modern name. It is also, according to 
Willis (Coll. Me. Hist. Soc., iv, 103, 1856), 
under the form Abagadusset (from a 
sachem of that name), the name of a 
tributary of the Kennebec. It is intro¬ 
duced here for the reason that Sullivan 
(Hist. Me., 95, 1795) applies the name, 
under the plural form Abagadusets, to 
a body of Indians which, in 1649, resided 
in this immediate section. Vetromile, 
however, says: “We are sure there was 
no Indian village at Castine, called at 
present Bagaduce, a corruption for 
mcitchibignadusek, - water bad to drink.’ ” 
Ballard (Rep. U. S. Coast Surv., 1868, 
248) gives as the full form matche-be-gua- 
toos, ‘bad bay,’ referring to a part of Cas¬ 
tine harbor, and this is the meaning 
commonly given. Rasies gives bagadcis- 
sek as meaning ‘to shine.’ Dr William 
Jones suggests that the Chippewa pagudd- 
sink, ‘windward side,’ may be a related 
term. 

Abagadusets.—Sullivan, Hist. Maine, 95, 1795. 
Chebegnadose.—Purchas (1625) quoted in Maine 
Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 156, 1857. 

Bagiopa. A tribe of whom Fray Fran¬ 
cisco Garces (Diary, 1900) heard in 1776, 
at which time they lived n. of the Rio 
Colorado, where they are located on 
Font’s map of 1777. The fact that Padre 
Eusebio Kino, while near the mouth of 
the Rio Colorado in 1701, heard of them 
from other Indians and placed them on the 
gulf coast of Lower California on his map 
of that date, has created the impression 
that the Bagiopa were one of the Lower 
Colorado Yuman tribes; but because they 
were never actually seen in this locality 
by the Jesuit and Franciscan missionaries 
of the period, they are regarded as prob¬ 
ably having belonged to the Shoshonean 
family. The name is apparently of Pi- 
man origin ( opa , ‘people’), (f. w. h.) 
Acquiora. —Garc6s (1775-6), Diary, 489, 1900 (ap¬ 
parently a misprint of Baquiova). Bagiopas.— 
Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, map, 1759. Bagopas.— 
Giissefeld, map, 1797. Bajiopas.—Venegas, Hist. 
Cal., ii, 171,1759. Baquioba.—Garc6s (1776), Diary, 
405-6, 1900. Baquiova.—Ibid., 444. Raguapuis.— 
Mayer, Mexico, n, 38,1853 (possibly intended for 
Baguiopas). 

Bagoache. Given by La Chesnaye in 
1697 (Margry, D4c., vi, 6, 1886) as the 
name of a country about the n. shore of 
L. Superior, with a people of the same 
name numbering from 200 to 300 men. 

Bags and Pouches. Many varieties of 
bags and pouches were made by the Indi¬ 
ans of the United States and were used for 
a great number of purposes. The costume 
of the aborigines was universally desti¬ 
tute of pockets, and various pouches 
served in their stead. On occasion arti¬ 
cles were tucked away in the clothing or 
were tied up in bits of cloth or skin. 
The blanket also served at times for a 
bag, and among the Eskimo the woman’s 
coat was enlarged over the shoulders and 


at the back to form a pouch for carrying 
the baby. The pouch was a receptacle 
of flexible material for containing vari¬ 
ous objects and substances of personal 
use or ceremony, and was generally an 
adjunct of costume. The bag, larger and 
simpler, was used for the gathering, trans¬ 
portation, and storage of game and other 
food. The material was tawed leather of 
various kinds, tanned leather, rawhide, 
fur skins, skins of birds; the bladder, 
stomach or pericardium of animals; corcl 
of babiche, buckskin or wool, hair, bark, 
fiber, grass, and the like; basketry, cloth, 
beadwork, etc. Rectangular or oval 
pouches were made with a flap or a gath¬ 
ering-string and with a thong, cord, or 
strap for attaching them at the shoulder 
or to the belt. The Eskimo had pouches 
with a flap that could be wrapped many 
times around and secured by means of 
a string and an ivory fastener. The 
Zuni use, among others, crescent-shaped 
pouches into the horns of which objects 
are thrust through a central opening. 
Bags showed less variety of form. They 
were square or oblong, deep or shallow, 
flat or cylindrical. Many of these were 
provided with a shoulder band, many 
with a carrying-strap and a forehead 
band. The Eskimo bag was provided 
with an ivory handle, which was fre¬ 
quently decorated with etching. Small 
pouches were used for holding toilet arti¬ 
cles, paint, medicine, tobacco, pipes, am¬ 
munition, trinkets, sewing tools, fetishes, 
sacred meal, etc. Large pouches or bags, 
such as the bandoleer pouch of the Chip¬ 
pewa, held smaller pouches and articles 
for personal use. 

Bags were made for containing articles 
to be packed on horses, frequently joined 
together like saddlebags. The tribes of 
the far N. made use of large sleeping bags 
of fur. Most bags and pouches were orna¬ 
mented, and in very few other belong¬ 
ings of the Indian were displayed such 
fertility of invention and such skill in 
the execution of the decorative and sym¬ 
bolic designs. Skin pouches, elaborately 
ornamented with beadwork, quillwork, 
pigments, and dyes, were made by various 
tribes. Decorated bags and wallets of 
skin are characteristic of the Aleut, Salish, 
Nez Pereas, the northern Athapascan and 
Algonquian tribes, and the Plains Indi¬ 
ans. Bags of textiles and basketry are 
similarly diversified. Especially note¬ 
worthy are the muskemoots of the 
Thlingchadinne, made of babiche, the 
bags of the Nez Perces, made of apocynum 
fiber and corn-husks, the woven hunting 
bags of northern woodland tribes, and the 
painted rawhide pouches and bags of the 
tribes of the great plains. 

Consult Mason (1) Aboriginal Ameri¬ 
can Basketry, Rep. Nat. Mus., 1902,1904, 


126 


BAGUACAT-BAKING STONES 


[B. A. E. 


(2) Primitive Travel and Transportation, 
ibid., 1894, 1896; Boas, Holmes, Hoff¬ 
man, Nelson, and Turner, in Reports of 
the B. A. E.; Kroeber, The Arapaho, Bull. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvm, 1902; Boas in 
Jour. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., iv, no. 3, 
suppl., 1904; Willoughby in Am. An- 
throp., vn, nos. 1, 4, 1905; Teit in Mem. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., i, no. 4, 1900; Lum- 
holtz, Unknown Mexico, 1902. (w. h. ) 

Baguacat. An unidentified pueblo of 
New Mexico in 1598.—Onate (1598) in 
Doc. Ined., xvi, 103, 1871. 

Baguiburisac. A rancheria, probably 
Maricopa, visited by Kino and Mange in 
•1699; apparently near the Rio Gila in 
s. w. Ariz.—Mange (1699) quoted by 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 358, 1889. 

Bagwanageshig. See Hole-in-the-day. 

Bahacecha. A tribe visited by Onate in 
1604, at which time it resided on the 
Rio Colorado in Arizona, between Bill 
Williams fork and the Gila. Their lan¬ 
guage was described as being almost the 
same as that of the Mohave, whose ter¬ 
ritory adjoined theirs on the n. and with 
whom they were friendly. Their houses 
were low, of wood covered with earth. 
They are not identifiable with any pres¬ 
ent Yuman tribe, although they occupied 
in Onate’s time that part of the Rio Col¬ 
orado valley inhabited by the Alche- 
doma in 1776. See Zarate - Salmeron 
( ca . 1629) in Land of Sunshine, 105, 
Jan., 1900; Garces (1775-76), Diary, 1900; 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, 110, 
1890. (f. w. h. ) 

Bahekhube. A village occupied by the 
Kansa after they left the mouth of Big 
Blue r., near a mountain s. of Kansas r., 
Kans. 

Bahe'qube.—Dorsey, MS. Kansas vocab., B. A. E., 
1882. 

Bahohata (‘lodge’). A Hidatsa band. 
Matthews says it may be Maohati. 
Ba-ho-Ha'-ta.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 

Baicadeat. A former rancheria, evi¬ 
dently of the Sobaipuri, on Rio San Pedro, 
s. Ariz.; it was visited by Father Kino 
about 1697, and became a visita of the 
mission of Suamca about 1760-67. 
Baicadeat.—Mange (1697) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz, and N. Mex., 358, 1889. S, Pablo Baibcat.— 
Bancroft, ibid., 371. 

Baidarka. The sealskin boat of the 
Alaskan Eskimo. The Russian adapta¬ 
tion of joaithak, or paithalik, in the Kaniag- 
miut dialect, applied to a three-paddle 
boat of this kind. (a. f. c.) 

Baimena (possibly from bahime, pi. of 
bahi, ‘a species of locust,’ la ‘continu¬ 
ance,’ ‘habit,’ hence‘a place where locusts 
habitually live.’—Buelna). A former 
small tribe and pueblo, evidently Piman, 
6 leagues s. e. of San Jos6 del Toro, Sina¬ 
loa, Mexico. According to Zapata the 
people spoke a dialect related to that of 
the Zoe, who lived next to them on the 


n. in 1678. These two tribes traditionally 
came with the Ahome from the n. They 
are now extinct. 

Baimena. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 336,1864. Santa 
Catalina Baimena.— Ibid., 333. Santa Catalina de 
Baitrena.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., in, 396, 1857. 

Baipia. A former settlement of either 
the Soba or the Papago proper, situated 
slightly n. w. of Caborca, probably on the 
Rio Altar, n. w. Sonora, Mexico. 

Aribaipia.— Anza (1774) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 389, 1889. Aribaycpia.— Font, 
map (1777), ibid., 393. Arivac. —Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 347, 1864 (probably the same). Baipia.— 
Kino, map (1701), in Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
360, 1889. SanEdvardo de Baipia.— Venegas, Hist. 
Cal., II, 176, 1759. S. Eduard de Baipia. —Kino, 
map (1702) 'in Stocklein, Neue Welt-Bott, 74, 
1726. S. Eduardo.— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. M., 359, 
1889. S. Eduardo Baipia. —Kino (1701) quoted by 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 495, 1884. S. 
Eduardo de Aribacpia. —Anza and Font (1776) 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. M., 393, 1889. 
S. Edward. —Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, map, 1759. 

Bajfo (Span.: ‘shoal,’ ‘sand-bank’). Ar 
Papago settlement with 150 inhabitants 
in 1858. 

Del Bajio.— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Hep., 208, 1858. 

Bakihon (‘gash themselves with 
knives’). A band of the Upper Yank- 
tonai Sioux. 

Bakiho n . —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897. 
Bakihoij. —Ibid. 

Baking stones. A name applied to a 
numerous class of prehistoric stone relics 
found principally on 
inhabited sites in s. 

California. They 
are flattish, often 
rudely rectangular 
or somewhat oval 
plates, sometimes 
convex beneath and 
slightly concave 
above, and rare spec¬ 
imens have Obscure prehistoric Baking Plate; 
rims. Usually they California (i-io) 
are made of soapstone, and often show 
traces of use over fire. They rarely ex¬ 
ceed a foot in length, are somewhat less 
in width, and perhaps an inch in average 
thickness. The characteristic feature of 
these plates is a roughly made perforation 
at the middle of one end, giving the ap¬ 
pearance of a huge pendant ornament. 
This perforation served, no doubt, to aid 
in handling the plate while hot. Some 
of these objects may have been boiling 
stones to be heated in the fire and sus¬ 
pended in a pot or basket of water for 
cooking purposes. This utensil passes 
imperceptibly into certain ladle-like 
forms, and these again into dippers, cups, 
bowls, and globular ollas in turn, the 
whole group forming part of the culinary 
outfit. A remarkable ladle-like object of 
gray diorite was obtained from the aurif¬ 
erous gravels 16 feet below the surface in 
Placer co., Cal. It is superior in make to 
other kindred obj ects. The baki ng stones 





BULL. 30] 


BALCONY HOUSE-BAMOA 


127 


of the Pueblo Indians, employed in mak¬ 
ing the wafer bread, are smooth, oblong 
slabs set over the fireplace. See Abbott 
in Surveys West of the 100th Merid., vn, 



HOPI BAKING STONE. (mINDELEFf) 


1879; Cushing, Zuni Breadstuff, in Mill¬ 
stone, Nov. 1884; Holmes in Smithson. 
Rep. 1899, 1901; Mindeleff in 8th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1891. (w. h. h.) 

Balcony House. A cliff house, compris¬ 
ing about 25 rooms, situated in Ruin can¬ 
yon, Mesa Verde, s. Colo. It derives its 
name from a shelf or balcony which ex¬ 
tends along the front of two of the houses, 
resting on the projecting floor beams. 
See H. R. Rep. 3703, 58th Cong., 3d sess., 
1905. 

Bald Eagle’s Nest. A Delaware (?) vil¬ 
lage, taking its name from the chief, Bald 
Eagle, formerly on the right bank of Bald 
Eagle cr., near the present Milesburg, 
Center co., Pa. It is marked on La Tour’s 
map of 1784 and described by Day, Penn¬ 
sylvania, 201, 1843. 

Ballokai Pomo (‘Oat valley people.’— 
Powers). A subtribe or division of the 
Pomo, formerly living in Potter valley, 
Mendocino co., Cal. 

Bal-lo' Kai Po-mo.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
111,155,1877. PoamPomo. —Ibid., 156. Pomapoma.— 
Kroeber, inf’n, 1903. Poma pomo.— Ibid. Po- 
mas.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 144,1853. Pome Pomos. —Pow¬ 
ers in Overland Mo., ix, 504, 1872. Pone 
Pomos.— Hittell, Hist. Cal., I, 730, 1885. 

Ball play. The common designation of 
a man’s game, formerly the favorite ath¬ 
letic game of all the eastern tribes from 
Hudson bay to the Gulf. It was found 
also in California and perhaps elsewhere 
on the Pacific coast, but was generally 
superseded in the W. by some form of 
shinny. It was played with a small ball 
of deerskin stuffed with hair or moss, or 
a spherical block of wood, and with 1 or 
2 netted rackets, somewhat resembling 
tennis rackets. Two goals were set up at 
a distance of several hundred yards from 
each other, and the object of each party 
was to drive the ball under the goal of the 
opposing party by means of the racket 
without touching it with the hand. After 
picking up the ball with the racket, how¬ 
ever, the player might run with it in his 


hand until he could throw it again. In 
the N. the ball was manipulated with a 
single racket, but in the S. the player 
used a pair, catching the ball between 
them. Two settlements or two tribes 
generally played against each other, the 
players numbering from 8 or 10 up to 
hundreds on a side, and high stakes were 
wagered on the result. Preceding and 
accompanying the game there was much 
ceremonial of dancing, fasting, bleeding, 
anointing, and prayer under the direction 
of the medicine-men. The allied tribes 
used this game as a stratagem to obtain 
entrance to Ft Mackinaw in 1764. Numer¬ 
ous places bearing the name of Ball Play 
give evidence of its old popularity among 
the former tribes of 
the Gulf states, who 
have carried it with 
them to their pres¬ 
ent homes in In¬ 
dian Ter., where it 
is still kept up with 
the old ceremonial 
and enthusiasm. 

Shorn of its cere¬ 
monial accompani¬ 
ments it has been 
adopted by the Ca¬ 
nadians as their na¬ 
tional game under 
the name of la 
crosse , and by the 
Louisiana French 
creoles as raquette. 

The Indians of 
many tribes played 
other games of ball, noteworthy among 
which is the kicked ball of the Tarahu- 
mare, which, it is said, gave the name to 
the tribe. Consult Adair, Hist. Am. 
Inds., 1775; Bartram, Trav., 1792; Catlin, 
N. A. Inds., 1841; Mooney, Cherokee 
Ball Play, Am. Anthrop., in, 1890; Culin, 
Games of N. Am. Inds., in 24th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1905. Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mexico, 1902. See Games, (j. m.) 

Balsa. See Boats. 

Bamoa (ba ‘water,’ moa ‘ear’ or ‘spike’ 

(of corn): ‘ spike in the water ’; or prefer¬ 
ably ba, and maioa ‘ bank’: ‘on the bank 
of the river.’—Buelna). According to 
Orozco y Berra, a pueblo “founded by 
the Pima who came with Cabeza de Vaca 
and his companions on that famous ex¬ 
pedition which gave rise to the story of 
the Queen of Quiviraandthe Seven Cities. 
Settled on the shore of the river [Sina¬ 
loa] , they received in after times a goodly 
number of their compatriots who, drawn 
by the fame of the missionaries before 
the latter reached their country, placed 
themselves in the way of receiving Chris¬ 
tianity. They speak the Pima and gen¬ 
erally the Mexican, being also well ac¬ 
customed to the Castilian tongue.” 



Rackets, etc., Used in Ball Play. 
a , Iroquois; b , PASSAMAQUODDY; 
c, Chippewa; d , Cherokee 









128 


BAMOM-BANNER STONES 


[B. A. E. 


Bamoa.—Cabeza de Vaca, Rel. (1529), Smith 
trans., 225, 1871. Baymoa.—Alegre, Hist. Comp. 
Jesus, I, 340, 1841. La Concepcion Bamoa.—Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 333, 1864. 

Bamom (‘ salt water ’). A former Maidu 
village at the site of the present Shingle, 
Eldorado co., Cal. (r. b. d.) 

Banamichi. A pueblo of the Teguima 
Opata and the seat of a Spanish mission 
in 1639; situated below Arizpe, on the 
Rio Sonora, Sonora, Mexico; pop. 338 
in 1678, 127 in 1730. Not to be con¬ 
founded with Remedios, q. v. 

Banamiche.—Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., VI, 72, 
1904. Banamichi.—Rivera (1730) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, I, 514, 1884. Banamitzi.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343, 1864. Nuestra Seiiora 
de los Remedios de Beramitzi.—Ibid. Remedios 
Banamichi.—Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., in, 372, 1857. 

Band that Don’t Cook. A band of Yank¬ 


ton Sioux under Smutty Bear (Matosa- 
hitchiay).—Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. 

Band that Eats no Geese. A band of 
Yankton Sioux under Padaniapapi.— 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 
1851. 

Band that Wishes the Life. A band of 
Yanktonai Sioux of which Black Catfish 
was the principal chief in 1856.—H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 130, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 7,1856. 

Bankalachi (Yokuts name). A small 
Shoshonean tribe on upper Deer cr., 
which drains into Tulare lake, s. Cal. 

With the Tubatulabal they 
form one of the four major 
linguistic divisions of the 
family. Their own name is 
unknown, (a. l. k.) 
Bo n galaatshi.—Hoffman in Proc. 
Am. Philos. Soc., xxm, 301, 1886. 

Banner stones. A name 
applied to a group of pre¬ 
historic objects of polished 
stone, which, for lack of defi¬ 
nite information as to their 
use, are assigned to the prob¬ 
lematical class (see Problem¬ 
atical objects ). Their form is 
exceedingly varied, but cer¬ 
tain fundamental features of 
their shape are practically 
unvarying, and are of such a 
nature as to suggest the use 
of the term ‘ ‘ banner stones ’’ 
in classifying them. These 
features are the axial perfo¬ 
rations and the extension of 

Sioux Ceremonial the body OI* midrib into tWO 

wing-like projections. Of 
the various forms the most 
typical is that which suggests 
a two-bladed ax, the blades 
passing on the one hand from the type in to 
pick-like points, and on the other into 
broad wings, suggesting those of the bird or 
butterfly. The name ‘ ‘ butterfly stones ’ ’' 
is sometimes applied to the latter variety. 
In some of their features these stones are 


Wand, Suggesting 
Manner of using 
Banner Stones, 
(mooney) 


related to pierced tablets, and in others, 
respectively, to boat stones, bird stones, 
spade stones, tubes (see articles on these 
several topics), and plat¬ 
form pipes, and there 
can be little doubt that 
all of these classes of ob¬ 
jects were related to one 
another in symbolism 
or use. Nothing is defi¬ 
nitely known, however, 
of the particular signifi- GREENST0NE;l0WA h-«) 
cance attached to them, or of the manner 
of their use, save by inference from their 
form and the known customs of the 
tribes. It appears probable, from the 
presence’ of the perforations, that they 




were mounted for use on a staff, on a 
handle as a ceremonial weapon, or on the 
stem of a calumet, but the appearance of 
similar winged forms as parts of the head¬ 



dress in sheet-copper figures from Georgia 
mounds (see Copper) suggests connection 
with the headdress. 

These objects are usually made of varie¬ 
ties of stone selected for their fine 
grain and pleasing color, and are 
carefully shaped and finished. In 
Florida, and perhaps elsewhere, 
examples made of shell are found. 

The perforation is cylindrical, 
and is bored with great precision 
longitudinally through the thick 
portion or midrib, which may Quartzite; 
symbolically represent the body l N0l v ANA 
of a bird. Numerous unfinished ' 1 * 6 
specimens are found, some of which, partly 
bored, show the depressed ring and ele¬ 
vated core that result from the use of the 
tubular drill. They are found in burial 
mounds and on formerly inhabited sites 
generally, and were probably as a class 
the outgrowth of the remarkable culture 
development which accompanied and 
resulted in the construction of the great 
earthworks of the Mississippi valley. 









BULL. 30] 


BANNOCK 


129 



For record of discovery and illustra¬ 
tions of banner stones see especially Boyle, 

Trim. Man in Ontario, 1895; __ 

Fowke (1) in 13th Rep. B. 

A. E., 1896, (2) Archseol. 

Hist. Ohio, 1902; Moore, 
various memoirs in Jour. 

Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,1894- 
1905; Moorehead, Prehist. 

Impls., 1900; Rau in Smith- 
son. Cont., xn, 1876; Read, 

Rep. Ohio Centen. Man¬ 
agers, 1877; Squier and 
Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 1848; Thomas 
in 1.2th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (\v. h. h. ) 

Bannock (from Pancdti, their own name). 
A Shoshonean tribe whose habitat pre¬ 
vious to being gathered on reservations 
can not be definitely outlined. There 
were two geographic divisions, but refer- 


Relateo Form with 
Single Wing and 
Oval Perforation . 
Banded Slate; 
Michigan (1-6) 





WASTAWANA—BAN NOCK 


ences to the Bannock do not always 
note this distinction. The home of the 
chief division appears to have been s. e. 
Idaho, whence they ranged into w. Wyo¬ 
ming. The country actually claimed 
by the chief of this southern division, 
which seems to have been recognized by 
the treaty of Ft Bridger, July 3,1868, lay 
between lat. 42° and 45°, and between 
long. 113° and the main chain of the 
Rocky mts. It separated the Wihinasht 
Shoshoni of w. Idaho from the so-called 
Washaki band of Shoshoni of w. Wyoming. 
They were found in this region in 1859, 
and they asserted that this had been 
their home in the past. Bridger (Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 363, 1859) had known them in 
this region as early as 1829. Bonneville 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-9 


found them in 1833 on Portneuf r., imme¬ 
diately n. of the present Ft Hall res. 
Many of this division affiliated with 
the Washaki Shoshoni, and by 1859 had 
extensively intermarried with them. Ft 
Hall res. was set apart by Executive 
order in 1869, and 600 Bannock, in addi¬ 
tion to a large number of Shoshoni, con¬ 
sented to remain upon it. Most of them 
soon wandered away, however, and as late 
as 1874 an appropriation was made to en¬ 
able the Bannock and Shoshoni scattered 
in s. e. Idaho to be moved to the reserva¬ 
tion. The Bannock at Ft Hall were said 
to number 422 in 1885. The northern 
division was found by Gov. Stevens in 
1853 (Pac. R, R. Rep., i, 329, 1855) living 
on Salmon r. in e. Idaho. Lewis and 
Clark, who passed through the country 
of this n. division in 1805, may have in¬ 
cluded them under the general term Sho¬ 
shoni, unless, as is most likely, these are 
the Broken Moccasin Indians they men¬ 
tion (Expd., Coues ed., n, 523,1893). In 
all probability these Salmon River Ban¬ 
nock had recently crossed the mountains 
from the eastward owing to pressure of 
the Siksika, since they claimed as their 
territory s. w. Montana, including the 
rich areas in which are situated Virginia 
City, Bozeman, and other towns (Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 289, 1869). Stevens (1853) 
states that they had been more than deci¬ 
mated by the ravages of smallpox and 
the inroads of the Siksika. It is proba¬ 
ble that at no distant time in the past, 
perhaps before they had acquired horses, 
the various groups of the entire Bannock 
tribe were united in one locality in s. e. 
Idaho, where they were neighbors of the 
Shoshoni proper, but their language is 
divergent from the latter. The Bannock 
were a widely roving tribe, a character¬ 
istic which favored their dispersal and 
separation into groups. Both the men 
and the women are well developed; and 
although Shoshonean in language, in 
physical characters the Bannock resem¬ 
ble more closely the Shahaptian Nez 
Perces than other Shoshonean Indians. 
Kroeber reports that the language of the 
Fort Hall Bannock connects them closer 
with the IIte than with any other Sho¬ 
shonean tribe. At the same time Powell 
and Mooney report that the tribes of w. 
Nevada consider the Bannock very nearly 
related to themselves. 

The loss of hunting lands, the diminu¬ 
tion of the bison herds, and the failure of 
the Government to render timely relief 
led to a Bannock outbreak in 1877-8, the 
trouble having been of long standing. 
During the exciting times of the Nez Perc6 
war the Bannock were forced to remain on 
their inhospitable reservation, to face the 
continued encroachment of the whites, 
and to subsist on goods provided from an 










130 


BANTAM-BARK 


[B. a. e. 


appropriation amounting to cents per 
capita per diem. During the summer a 
drunken Indian of the tribe shot and 
wounded two teamsters; the excitement 
and bitter feeling caused by hisarrest, Nov. 
23, 1877, resulted in the killing of an 
agency employee. Troops were called for, 
and the murderer was pursued, captured, 
tried, and executed. This episode so in¬ 
creased the excitement of the Indians 
that, fearing what was assumed to be 
threatening demonstrations, the troops 
surrounded and captured two Bannock 
camps in Jan., 1878; but most of the In¬ 
dians were afterward released. On ac¬ 
count of insufficient food the Bannock 
left the reservation in the spring and went 
to Camas prairie, where they killed sev¬ 
eral settlers. A vigorous campaign under 
Gen. Howard resulted in the capture of 
about 1,000 of them in August, and the 
outbreak came to an end after a fight on 
Sept. 5, at Clark’s ford, where 20 Bannock 
lodges were attacked and all the women 
and children killed. 

Bridger states that when he first knew 
them (about 1829) the southern Bannock 
numbered 1,200 lodges, indicating a popu¬ 
lation of about 8,000. In 1869 they were 
estimated as not exceeding 500, and this 
number was probably an overestimate as 
their lodges numbered but 50, indicating a 
population of about 350. In 1901 the tribe 
numbered 513, so intermixed, however, 
with the Shoshoni that no attempt is made 
to enumerate them separately. All the 
Bannock except 92 under Lemhi agency 
are gathered on Ft Hall res., Idaho. Prac¬ 
tically nothing is known of the former 
organization of the Bannock or of their 
divisions. The names of four divisions 
were obtained by Hoffman, and a fifth is 
given by Schoolcraft. These are Kut- 
shundika, or Buffalo-eaters; Penointi- 
kara, or Honey-eaters; Shohopanaiti, or 
Cottonwood Bannock; Yambadika, or 
Root-eaters; Waradika, or Rye-grass- 
seed-eaters. (h. w. h. c. tJ 

Banac.—Smet, Letters, 129,1843. Ban-acks.—For¬ 
ney in Ind. Aff. Rep., 213, 1858. Banai'ti.—Hoff¬ 
man in Proc. Am. Philos. Soe., xxm, 298, 1886 
(Shoshoni name). Banani.—Gatschet, Chippewa 
MS., B. A. E. (Chippewa name). Ban-at-tees.— 
Ross, Fur Hunters, I, 249, 1855. Banax.—Mullan 
in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 329,1855. Bannach Snakes.— 
Wallen in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 36th Cong., 1st sess., 
223, 1860. Bannacks.—Irving, Rocky Mts., I, 71, 
1837. Banneck.—Ibid., 159. Ban'-ni-ta.—Stuart, 
Montana, 25, 1865. Bonacks.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, vi, 697, 1857. Bonak.—Farnham, Travels, 
76, 1843. Bonarch Diggers.—Meek in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10,1848. Bonarchs.— 
Ibid. Bonarks.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 1, 31st Cong., 2d 
sess., 198, 1850. Bonnacks. — Dennison in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 371,1857. Bonnaks.—Hale, Ethnog. and Phi- 
lol., 218,1846. Bonnax.—Parker, Jour., map, 1842. 
Bonochs.— Prichard, Phys. Hist., v, 430,1847. Boo- 
nacks.—Irving, Astoria, map, 1849. Broken-Moc¬ 
casin.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 330,1842 (prob¬ 
ably the Bannock). Diggers.—Many authors. 
Moccasin-with-Holes. —Lewis and Clark, op. cit. 
Ogoize.— Giorda, Calispel Diet., I, 439, 1877 (Calis- 
pel name). Panack,—Townsend, Nar., 75, 1839. 


Panai'ti.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxm, 299 1886 (own name). Panak.—Gebow, 
Snake Vocab., B. A. E. (Shoshoni name). Pan- 
asht.—Hale, op. cit. Pannacks.—Lander in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 42,36th Cong., 1st sess. ,121,1860. Pannah. — 
Ibid. Pannakees.—Ibid. Paunaques. — Wyeth 
(1848) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 206, 1851. 
Pohas.—Robertson (1846) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 9, 1848. Ponacks.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind.Tribes, vi, 697, 1857. Ponashita.—Ibid., I, 521, 
1853. Ponashta.—Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 
31st Cong., 1st sess., 169,1850. Ponishta Bonacks.— 
Schoolcraft, op. cit., vi, 701, 1857. Piin-ish.— 
Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, lxxix, 1823 (Sho¬ 
shoni name). Punashly,—Fremont, Geog. Mem. 
Upper Cal., map, 1848. Pun-naks.—Bonner, Life 
of Beckwourth, 93, 1856. Robber Indians.—Ross, 
Fur Hunters, 1,249,1855. Tannockes. —Audouard, 
Far West, 182, 1869. Ush-ke-we-ah.—Crow MS. 
vocab., B. A. E. (Crow name). 

Bantam. According to Trumbull, a for¬ 
mer village at Litchfield, Litchfield co., 
Conn. Part of the Indians there were 
converted by the Moravian missionaries 
about 1742-45, and followed them to Beth¬ 
lehem, Pa., where many died, and the 
remnant returned to Scaticook, in Kent 
co., Conn. 

Bantom.—Trumbull, Conn., II, 82, 1818. 

Bantas. A village of the Cholovone 
e. of the San Joaquin and n. of the Tuol¬ 
umne r., Cal.—Pinart, Cholovone MS., 
B. A. E., 1880. 

» Baqueachic ( baka ‘bamboo reed,’ chik 
‘place of.’—Lumholtz). A Tarahumare 
settlement on or near the Rio Conchos, 
lat. 27° 40', long. 106° 50 / , Chihuahua, 
Mexico. 

Baqueachic.—Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., I, 320, 
1902. Baquiachic. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323,1864. 

Baquiarichic. A Tarahumare settle¬ 
ment on or near a branch of the s. tribu¬ 
tary of the Rio Conchos, lat. 26° 55 7 , long. 
106° 30 / , Chihuahua, Mexico.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 322, 1864. 

Baquigopa (bciqui-go ‘cane’; Buelnasays 
the name means ‘plain of the canes’). 
A former Opata village on the upper 
Yaqui, locally known as the Rio Babispe, 
e. of Guachinera, n. e. Sonora, Mexico. 
Its abandonment was the result of attacks 
by Indians of w. Chihuahua, the inhab¬ 
itants finally settling at Guachinera. 
See Batesopa. ( f. w. h. ) 

Bacayopa.—Buelna, Pereg. Aztecas, 123, 1892. 
Baquigopa.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., in, 59, 
64, 1890; IV, 518, 1892. 

Bar-du-de-clenny. See Nakaidoklini. 

Bark. Among the resources of nature 
utilized by the tribes of North America 
bark was of prime importance. It was 
stripped from trees at the right season by 
hacking all around and taking it off iii 
sheets of desired length. The inner bark 
of cedar, elm, and other trees was in some 
localities torn into strips, shredded, 
twisted, and spun or woven. The bark of 
wild flax (Apocynum) and the Asclepias 
were made into "soft textiles. Bark had 
a multitude of functions. In connection 
with the most important of wants, the 
necessity for food, it supplied many tribes 
with an article of diet in the spring, their 


BULL. 30] 


BARK 


131 




Eskimo Bark Basket with Buckskin Top 
and Draw-string, (turner) 


period of greatest need. The name Adi¬ 
rondack, signifying ‘they eat trees,’ was 
applied by the Mohawk to certain Al- 
gonquian tribes of Canada in allusion to 
their custom of 
eating bark. 
The N. Pacific 
and some S. W. 
tribes made 
cakes of the soft 
inner bark of 
thehemlockand 
spruce; those 
living about the 
great lakes 
chewed that of 
the slippery 
elm, while many 
Indians chewed 
the gum that ex¬ 
uded from trees. 
Drink was made from bark by the Arap- 
aho, Winnebago, and Mescaleros. Wil¬ 
low bark and other kinds were smoked 
in pipes with or in¬ 
stead of tobacco, 
and the juices of 
barks were em¬ 
ployed in medi¬ 
cine. 

For gathering, 
carrying, garner¬ 
ing, preparing, 
and serving food, 
bark of birch, elm, 
pine, and other 
trees was so handy 
as to discourage the 
potter’s art among nonsedentary tribes. 
It was wrought into yarn, twine, rope, 
wallets, baskets, mats, canoes, cooking 
pots for hot stones, dishes for serving, ves¬ 
sels for storing, and many textile utensils 
connected with 
the consumption 
of food in ordi¬ 
nary and in so¬ 
cial life. Both 
men and women 
were food gath¬ 
erers, and thus 
both sexes were 
refined through 
this material; 
but preparing 
and serving were 
women’s arts, 
and here bark 
aided in devel¬ 
oping their skill 
and intelligence. 

Habitations in Canada, e. United States, 
and s. e. Alaska often had roofs and sides 
of bark, whole or prepared. The conical 
house, near kin of the tipi, was fre¬ 
quently covered with this material. Mat¬ 
ting was made use of for floors, beds, and 


partitions. Trays and boxes, receptacles 
of myriad shapes, could be formed by 
merely bending large sheets and sewing or 


Menominee Bark Bucket, 
(hoffman) 


CHIPPEWA BIRCH-BARK WINNOWING TRAY. 


simply tying the joints. Bast could be 
pounded and woven into robes and blan¬ 
kets. The Canadian and Alaskan tribes 


HOFFMAN 


CEREMONIAL USE OF BARK 

Collar; Kwakiutl. 
(boas) 


CHIPPEWA BARK HOUSE. (gILFILLAn) 


CHIPPEWA FETISH CASE OF BARK. 

carried their children in cradles of birch 
bark, while on the Pacific coast infants 
were borne in wooden cradles or baskets 
of woven bark on beds of the bast shredded, 
their foreheads being of¬ 
ten flattened by means of 
pads of the same material. 

In the S. W. the baby- 
board had a cover of mat¬ 
ting. Among the Iro¬ 
quois the dead were 
buried in coffins of bark. 

Clothing of bark was 
made chiefly from the in¬ 
ner portion, which was 
stripped into ribbons, as 
for petticoats in the S. W., 
shredded and fringed, as 
in the cedar-bark coun¬ 
try, where it was also woven into garments, 
or twisted for the warp in weaving articles 
of dress, with woof from other materials. 
Dyes were derived from bark and certain 
kinds also lent 
themselves to 
embroidery with 
quills and over¬ 
laying in bas¬ 
ketry. Bark was 
also the material 
of slow-matches 
and torches, 
served as pad¬ 
ding for the car¬ 
rier’s head and 
back and as his 
wrapping mate¬ 
rial, and fur¬ 
nished strings, 
ropes, and bags 
for his wooden 
canoes. The hunter made all sorts of 
apparatus from bark, even his bow¬ 
string. The fisher wrought implements 
out of it and poisoned fish with its 
juices. The beginnings of writing in some 
localities were favored by bark, and car- 












132 


BARNARD-BASKETRY 


[B. A. E. 


tography, winter counts, medical formu¬ 
las, and tribal history were inscribed 
thereon. Finally it comes into the service 
of ceremony and religion. Such a series 
of masks and dance regalia as Boas and 
others found 
among the 
K waki ut 1 illus¬ 
trates how 
obligingly 
bark lends 
itself to coop¬ 
erative activi¬ 
ties, whether 
inamusement, 
social func¬ 
tions, or ado ra¬ 
tion of the 
spirit world. 

There are also 
rites connected 
with gathering 
and working 
bark. See 
Boas in Nat. 

Mus. Rep. 

•1895, 1897; in 
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; 
Holmesin 3d and 13th Reps. B. A.E., 1884, 
1896; Jenks in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1900; - * 

Jones in Smithson. 



Ceremonial Collar of Bark; Kwakiutl. 
(boas) 



CEREMONIAL HEAD RINGS OF BARK ; KWAKIUTL. (boas) 


son (1) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1887, 1889, (2) 
ibid., 1894, 1896, (3) ibid., 1902, 1904; 
Niblack, ibid, 1888, 1890; Turner in 11th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (o. t. m.) 

Barnard. See Tirnpoochee Barnard. 

Barrancas {Las Barrancas, Span.: ‘the 
ravines ’). Formerly a small village, ap¬ 
parently of the Biros, on the Rio Grande, 
near Socorro, N. Mex; evidently aban¬ 
doned during the Pueblo revolt of 1680. 

La Barrancas.—Kitchin, map N. A., 1787. Las 
Barancas.—D’Anville, map N. A., Bolton’s ed., 
1752. Las Barrancas.—Davis, Span. Conq. New 
Mex., 314, 1869. 

Basalt. A widely variable class of lavas 
of a prevailing dark color and, in the com¬ 
pact varieties, with a dull eonchoidal frac¬ 
ture. The rock is often more or less pu- 
miceous and scoriaceous. The larger su¬ 
perficial flows of the W. are often known 
as “the lava beds.” The basalts occur in 
large bodies in many parts of the coun¬ 
try, especially in the far W., and were 
extensively used by the aborigines for im¬ 
plements and utensils, (w. n. n.) 


Basaseachic. A Tarahumare settlement 
of Chihuahua, Mexico; definite locality 
unknown.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 
1864. 

Basawunena {Bd / sawune'na, ‘wood- 
lodge men’). Formerly a distinct though 
cognate tribe that made war on the Arap- 
aho (q. v.), but with whom they have 
been incorporated for 150 years. About 
100 are still recognized in the northern 
and a few in the southern group.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 955, 1896. 

Basdecheshni (‘ those who do not split 
the buffalo ’). A band or division of the 
Sisseton Sioux. 

Basdece-sni.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 
1897. Basdetce-cni.—Ibid. 

Baserac (‘place where the water is 
seen,’ because up to this point the river 
is so deep among the mountains that in 
most places it is invisible.—Rudo Ensa- 
yo). An Opata pueblo, and the seat of 
a Spanish mission founded in 1645, on an 
e. branch of Rio de Batepito, a tributary 
of the Yaqui, in n. e. Sonora, Mexico. 
Population 399 in 1678, 839 in 1730. 
There are many descendants of the Opata 
in the modern town, but only a few of 
them speak their native tongue. ( f.w. h. ) 
Bacerac.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343, 1864. Base¬ 
rac.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 527,1892. 
Baseraca.—Mange ( ca . 1700) quoted by Bancroft, 
No. Mex. States, I, 233, 1884. Santa Maria Bace- 
raca.—Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., Ill, 
366, 1857. Santa Maria Vaseraca.—Rudo Ensayo 
(1762), Guiteras transl., 217, 1894. Sta Maria de 
Uasaraca.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 1,444, 1736. Vace- 
raca.—Kino et al. in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 
401, 1856. 

Basigochic (‘sandbank,’ ‘flat’). A 
Tarahumare rancheria near Achyarachki, 
Chihuahua, Mexico.—Cubas, Mexico, 74, 
1876. 

Basiroa. A Nevome division, doubtless 
in s. central Sonora, Mexico; definite lo¬ 
cality unknown. The name is probably 
that of their settlement.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 58, 1864. 

Basketry. Basketry, including wat¬ 
tling, matting, and bagging, may be de¬ 
fined as the primi¬ 
tive textile art. Its 
materials include 
nearly the whole 
series of North 
American textile 
plants, and the In¬ 
dian women ex¬ 
plored the tribal 
habitat for the best. 

Constant digging in 
the same favorite iroquois woman weaving a bas- 
spot for roots and KET - ^ FR0M LAFITAu) 
the clearing away of useless plants about 
the chosen stems constituted a species of 
primitive agriculture. They knew the 
time and seasons for gathering, how to 
harvest, dry, preserve, and prepare the 
tough and pliable parts for use and to re¬ 
ject the brittle, and in what way to com- 











BULL. 30 ] 


BASKETRY 


133 


bine different plants with a view to the 
union of beauty and strength in the prod¬ 
uct. The tools and apparatus of the bas¬ 
ket maker, who 
was nearly al ways 
a woman, were 
most skilful fin¬ 
gers, aided by lin¬ 
ger nails for gauge, 
teeth for a third 
hand or for nip¬ 
pers, astone knife, 
a bone awl, and 
polishers of shell 
or gritty stone. 

She knew a multitudeof dyes, and in some 
instances the bark was chewed and the 
splint drawn between the lips. In later 



Three-Strand braiding 



y h i 


CROSS-SECTIONS OF VARIETIES OF COILED BASKETRY. a, 
COILED, WITHOJT FOUNDATION I b, SIMPLE INTERLOCKING 

coils; c, single-rod foundation; d, two-rod founda¬ 
tion; e, ROD-AND-SPLINT FOUNDATION; /, TWO-ROD-AND- 
SPLINT FOUNDATION; y, THREE-ROD FOUNDATION; h, 3PLINT 

foundation; i, grass-coil foundation 

times knives, awls, scissors, and other 
utensils and tools of steel were added. 
In its technic basketry is divided into two 
species—woven and coiled. Woven bas¬ 





Hupa Food Tray (1-9) 


ketry has warp and weft, and leads up to 
loom work in softer materials. Of this 
species there are the following varieties: 
Checker- 
work, in 
which the 
warp and 
weft pass 
over and 
underone 
another 

singly and are indistinguishable; twilled 
work, in which each element of the weft 
passes over and then under two or more 
warp elements, producing by varying 
width and 
color an end : 
less variety 
of effects; 
wickerwork, 
in which the 
warp of one 
larger or two 
or more 
smaller ele¬ 
ments is in¬ 
flexible, and 
the bending 

is done in hopi willow tray (i-io) 

the weft; 

wrapped work, wherein the warp is not 
flexed, and the weft in passing a warp 
element is wrapped once around it, varied 
by drawing both warp and weft tight so 
as to form half of 
a square knot; 
twined work, in 
which the warp is 
not bent and the 
weft is made up of 
two or more ele¬ 
ments, one of them 
passing behind each 
warp element as the 
weaving progresses. 

Of this last variety 
there are many styles—plain twined, 
twilled twined, crossed or divided warp 
with twined work, wrapped, or bird-cage 
weaving, three-strand twining after sev¬ 
eral methods, 
and three-strand 
braid . 
basketry 
weaving, 
ing, and 


Coiled 
is not 
but sew- 
leads up 
to point lace. The 
work is done by 

sewing or whip- , . 

• • hupa Carrying Basket V1-20 ) 

ping together, in 

a flat or ascending coil, a continuous 
foundation of rod, splint, shredded fiber, 
or grass, and it receives various names 
from the kinds of foundation employed 
and the manner of applying the stitches; 
or the sewing may form genuine lace 
work of interlocking stitches without 


Hupa Storage Basket (1-24) 








134 


BASKETRY 


[b. a. e. 


foundation. In coiled work in which a 
foundation is used the interlocking stitch¬ 
es pass either above, through, or quite 
under the foundation, 
there are the following 
varieties: Coiled wmrk 
without foundation; 
simple interlocking 
coils with foundation; 
single-rod foundation; 
two-rod foundation; 
rod-and-splint founda¬ 
tion; two-rod-and- 
splint foundation; 
three-rod foundation; 
splint foundation; 
grass-coil foundation; 
and Fuegian stitches, 
identical with the buttonhole stitch. By 
using choice materials, or by adding pitch 
or other resinous substance, baskets were 


Of coiled basketry 



Hupa Gathering Basket, 16 

fNCHES HIGH 






fir h 

FORMS OF BASKETRY WEAVING. a, CHECKER; b TWILLED; c, 

wicker; d, wrapped; e, twined; /, cross-warp twined, 

g, WRAPPED TWINED; h, IMBRICATE 


made water-tight for holding or carrying 
water for cooking. 

The chief use of baskets is as recep¬ 
tacles, hence every activity of the In¬ 
dians was associated with this art. Basket 
work was employed, moreover, in fences, 
game drives, weirs, houses, shields, cloth¬ 


ing, cradles, for harvesting, and for the 
disposal of the dead. This art is inter¬ 
esting, not only on account of the tech¬ 
nical processes employed, the great deli¬ 
cacy of technic, and the infinite number 
of purposes that it serves, but on account 
of the ornamentation, which is effected 
by dyeing, using materials of different 
colors, overlaying, beading, and plaiting, 
besides great variety in form and technic. 
This is always added in connection with 
the weaving or 
sewing, and is fur¬ 
ther increased 
with decorative 
beads, shells, and 
feathers. In 
forms basketry 
varies from flat 
wattling, as in 
gambling and 
bread plaques, 
through trays, 
bowls, pots, cones, 
jars, and cylin¬ 
ders, to the ex¬ 
quisite California 
art work. The 
geometric forms of decussations and 
stitches gave a mosaic or conventional ap¬ 
pearance to all decoration. The motives 
in ornamentation were various. No doubt 
a sense for beauty in articles of use and a 
desire to awaken admiration and envy in 
others were uppermost. Imitation of 
pretty objects in nature, such as snake 
skins, and designs used by other tribes, 
w'ere naturally suggested. Such designs 
pass over into the realms of symbolism 
and religion. This is now alive and in 
full vigor among 
the Hopi of Ari¬ 
zona. The Indian 
women have left 
the best witness of 
what they could 
do in handiwork 
and expression in 
their basketry. 

In e. United States 
almost all of the 
old-fashioned 
methods of basket 
making have 
passed away, but 
by taking impressions of pottery Holmes 
has been able to reconstruct the ancient 
processes, showing that they did not 
differ in the least from those now extant 
in the tribes w. of the Rocky mts. In 
the southern states the existence of plia¬ 
ble cane made possible twilled weaving, 
which may still be found among the 
Cherokee and the tribes of Louisiana. 
The Athapascan tribes in the interior of 
Alaska made coiled basketry from the 
roots of evergreen trees. The Eskimo 




Paiute Gathering Basket (1-12) 























BULL. 30] 


BASONOPA-BATISTA 


135 


about Bering str. manufactured both 
woven mattings and wallets and coiled 
basketry of pliable grass. The Aleutian 
islanders are now among the most refined 
artisans in twined work. South of them 
the Tlingit and the Haida also prac¬ 
tise twined work only. 

From British Colum¬ 
bia, beginning with the 
Salishan tribes, south¬ 
ward to the borders of 
Mexico, the greatest 
variety of basket mak¬ 
ing in every style of 
weaving is practised. 

Consult Mason, Abo¬ 
riginal American Bas¬ 
ketry,-Rep. Nat. Mus. Twined Basket with Deer- 
1902, 1904, and the bib- skin top and draw-string 

liography therein; also 1-4 

Barrett in Am. Anthrop., vn, no. 4, 1905; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, 
pt. i, 1902; Kroeber inIJniv. Cal. Publ., n, 
1905; Goddard, ibid; Willoughby in Am. 
Anthrop., vii, no. 1, 1905. See Art, Arts 
and Industries , Weaving, (o. t. m. ) 

Basonopa. A Tepehuane pueblo in the 
Sierra Madre, on the headwaters of the Rio 
del Fuerte, s. w. Chihuahua, Mexico.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864. 

Basosuma. A rancheria, seemingly of 
the Sobaipuri, 12 Sp. leagues e. of the mis¬ 
sion of Suamca, probably in the vicinity 
of the s. boundary of Arizona, s. of Ft 
Huachuca; visited by Kino and Mange in 
1697. 

San Joaquin de Basosuma. —Kino (1697) in Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 276, 1856. S. Joaquin.— Ber¬ 
nal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
356,1889. 

Basotutcan. Apparently a former ran¬ 
cheria of the Papago, visited by Kino in 
1701; situated on the Rio Salado, 28 m. 
below Sonoita, n. w. Sonora, Mexico. 

Basotucan.— Kino (1701) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 495, 1886. J. Jose Ramos Ayodsu- 
dao. —Ibid. 

Basque influence. The Basque fisher¬ 
men who frequented the fishing grounds 
of the n. e. Atlantic in the 16th and 
17th centuries influenced to some ex¬ 
tent the Indians of New r France and 
Acadia. But such influence was only of 
a temporary character, and the relations 
of the Indians w r ith the Basques were 
only such as naturally came from the 
industry pursued by the latter. Les- 
carbot (Hist. Nouv. France, 695, 1612) 
states that a sort of jargon had arisen 
between the French and Basque fisher¬ 
men and traders and the Indians, in 
which ‘ ‘ a good deal of Basque was mixed, ’ ’ 
but does not give examples of it. (See 
Reade, The Basques in North America, in 
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, 1888, sec, ii, pp. 
21-39.) Attempts have been made to 
detect pre-Columbian influences through 
alleged lexical and other resemblances 



between Basque and Indian languages, 
but without success, (a. f. c.) 

Bastita. A Huichol rancheria and re¬ 
ligious place, containing a temple; situ¬ 
ated about 12 m. s. w. of San Andres 
Coamiata, q. v.—Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mex., hi, 16, 72, map, 1902. 

Baston. La Salle in 1681 speaks of the 
Indians of Baston, by which he means 
those adjacent to Boston and that part of 
New England.—La Salle (1681) in Mar- 
gry, D6c., n, 148, 1877. 

Batacosa. A Mayo settlement on a 
small independent stream w. of the Rio 
de los Cedros, an arm of the Rio Mayo, 
s. w. Sonora, Mexico. 

San Bartolome Batacosa. —Orozco y Berra, Geosr., 
356, 1864. ’ 

Batawat. A division of the Wishosk 
formerly living about the lower course of 
Mad r., n. w. Cal. In 1851 McKee said 
of them: “This band has been permitted 
to live at their present rancheria only 
upon condition that they confine them¬ 
selves to the immediate neighborhood of 
the mouth of the river, and not come 
into the town.” 

Mad river Indians.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 155, 1853. Pat-a-wat.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 96, 1877. 

Batepito (‘ where the water turns ’ (Rudo 
Ensayo), doubtless in allusion to the bend 
of the river). An Opata pueblo in n. w. 
Sonora, Mexico, about lat. 31°, on the 
upper waters of the Rio Babispe, a tribu¬ 
tary of the Rio Yaqui. 

Batepito.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343,1864. Vate- 
pito.— Rudo Ensayo (1762), Guiteras trans., 219, 
1894. 


Batequi (‘a well.’—Buelna). Appar¬ 
ently a rancheria of the Soba or the Papago 
proper; placed e. of the Rio Altar in n. w. 
Sonora, Mexico, on early Spanish maps, 
as that of Kino (1701) in Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, i, 499,1884. Not to be con¬ 
founded with the Tadeo Baqui of the 
Maricopa, which bears also a similar 
name. (f. w. h.) 

Batesopa. A former Opata village on 
the Rio Babispe, e. of Guachinera, in 
n. e. Sonora, Mexico. Repeatedly at¬ 
tacked by Indians from Chihuahua, it 
was abandoned, its inhabitants finally 
settling at Guachinera.—Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Pap., iii, 59, 1890; iv, 519, 
1892. See Baquigopa. 

Bat House. A ruined pueblo of the 
Hopi, probably so named from its hav¬ 
ing been built and occupied by the 
Bat clan; situated on the n. w. side of 
Jeditoh valley, n. e. Ariz., on part of 
the mesa occupied by the Horn House. 
See 8th Rep. B. A. E., 52, 1891. 

Batista (Span.: Bautista ?) Mentioned 
as one of the former two principal vil¬ 
lages of the Koasati, on lower Trinity r., 
Tex.—Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., ii, 282, 1850. 




136 


BATNI-BATZA 


[b. a. e. 


Batni (a gourd vessel in which sacred 
water is carried; also the name of a 
spring where sacrificial offerings are de¬ 
posited.—Fewkes). According to Ste¬ 
phen the site of the first pueblo built by 
the Snake people of the Hopi; situated 
in Tusayan, n. e. Ariz., but the exact 
location is known only to the Indians. 
It is held as a place of votive offerings 
during the ceremony of the Snake dance. 

Batni.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 18. 1891. 

Baton Rouge (French transl. of Choctaw 
itu-uma ‘red pole.’—Gatschet). A point 
on the high banks of the Mississippi, in 
Louisiana, at which the natives planted 
a painted pole to mark the boundary be¬ 
tween the Bayogoula below and the Hu- 
ma who extended for 30 leagues above. 
See Penicaut in Margry, D6c., v, 395,1883. 
The place is now occupied by the capital 
of Louisiana. See Red Stick. 

Batons. As emblems of authority or 
rank, batons were in common use among 



HAIDA BATON REPRESENTING EAGLE AND BEAVER. (nIBLACk) 


the more advanced northern tribes, and 
probably the most conspicuous modern 



representatives are the carved wooden 
batons of the Haida and other northwest¬ 
ern tribes. Here they are 
carried in the hands of chiefs, 
shamans, and song leaders on 
state occasions, and are per¬ 
mitted only to such person¬ 
ages. Weapons of various 
kinds were similarly used and 
probably had kindred signifi¬ 
cance. In prehistoric times 
long knives of stone, master¬ 
pieces of the chipping art, 
seem to have been a favorite 
form of ceremonial weapon, 
and their use still continues 
among some of the Pacific 
slope tribes, especially in Cali¬ 
fornia. Batons used in mark¬ 
ing time are probably without 
particular significance as em¬ 
blems. Among the K wakiutl 
and other tribes the club- 
shaped batons, carved to rep¬ 
resent various animals, are BAT0N 0F p INT . 
used by the leaders in cere- (thruston)"* ’ 
monial dances and serve for 
beating time. Consult Boas in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1895, 1897; Goddard in Publ. Univ. 


Cal., i, no. i, 1903; Niblack in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1888, 1890; Powers in Cont. N. A. 



KWAKIUTL BATON REPRESENTING A SEA-LION. (bOAs) 


Etlinol., hi, 1877; Rust and Kroeber in 
Am. Anthrop., vn, no. 4,1905. See Clubs, 
Knives, (w. h. n.) 



Batture aux Fievres (French: ‘ Malarial 
flat’). One of four Dakota (probably 
Mdewakantonwan) villages near St Pe¬ 
ters, Minn., in 1826.—Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., i, 442, 1872. 

Batucari (batuhue ‘river,’ cciri ‘house’: 
‘ houses in the river ’; or batui ‘ dove, ’ and 
can: ‘dove houses.’—Buelna). A sub¬ 
division of the Cahita, speaking the Va- 
coregue dialect and formerly subsisting 
by hunting in the vicinity of a large la¬ 
goon 3 leagues from A home, n. Sinaloa, 
Mexico. They afterward united with 
the Ahome people under the Jesuit mis¬ 
sionaries and abandoned their wandering 
life.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58,322, 1864. 
Batuearis.—Century Cyclopedia, 1894 (misprint). 

Batuco (‘shallow water.’—Och). A 
former pueblo of the Eudeve division of 
the Opata, on the Rio Oposura, a w. 
branch of the Rio Yaqui, a league n. of 
Santa Maria Batuco, about lat. 29° 
3(F, Sonora, Mexico. It became the seat 
of the Jesuit mission of San Javier 
about 1629. Pop. 480 in 1678, 188 in 
1730. 

San Javier de Batuco.—Zapata (1678) in Doc. 
Hist. Hex., 4th s., Ill, 357, 1857. S. Francisco 
Javier Batuco.—Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 246, 
1886. Vatuco.—Och (1756),Nachrichten, i, 72,1809. 

Batuco. A former pueblo of the Opata 
on the Rio Oposura, a w. tributary of the 
Yaqui, 8 leagues, e. of San Jose Matape, 
in Sonora, Mexico. It was apparently 
the Batuco that was visited by Coronado’s 
army in 1540-42, and was the seat of the 
Jesuit mission of Santa Marfa founded 
in 1629. Population 428 in 1678, 212 in 
1730. 

Asuncion Batuco.—Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 
246, 1884. Batuco.—Castaneda (1596) in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 537, 1896. Santa Maria Batuco.—Zapata 
(1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., ill, 356, 1857. 
Sta Maria Tepuspe.—Doc. of 1730 cited by Ban¬ 
croft, op. cit., 513 (same?). 

Batza. A Koyukukhotana village on 
Batza r., Alaska, long. 154°. 

Batzakakat.—Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 123,1877. 



























BULL. 30] 


BATZtJLNETAS-BEADWORR 


137 


Batzulnetas. An Ahtena village near 
upper Copper r., where the trail starts 
for Tanana r., Alaska; lat. 62° 58', long. 
145° 22' (post route map, 1903). Pop. 31 
men, 10 women, and 15 children in 1885. 

Batzulneta's village.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 121 
1887. 

Bauka. A former Maidu village on the 
right bank of Feather r., near Gridley, 
Butte co., Cal. (r. b. d. ) 

Bogas. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 124, 1850. Boka. —Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,ill, 282,1877. Booku. —Curtin, 
MS. vocab., B. A. E. 1885. 

Bawiranachiki (‘ red water place ’). A 
Tarahumare rancheria in Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf n, 1894. 

Bayberry wax. A product of the bav- 
berry, or wax myrtle ( Myrica cerifera), 
the method of extracting which was 
learned from the Indians by the New 
England colonists whose descendants 
probably still use it. It was esteemed 
for the manufacture of candles and tal¬ 
low on account of its fragrance. See 
Rasies in Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc., 2d ser., 
vin, 252,1819; Alice Morse Earle, Customs 
and Fashions of Old New England, 126, 
1893. (a. f. c.) 

Bay du Noc. A Chippewa (?) band 
mentioned in the Detroit treaty of 1855 
(U. S. Ind. Treaties, 614, 1873). They 
probably lived on Noquet bay of L. 
Michigan, in upper Michigan. 

Bayogoula(Choctaw: Bayuk-oklci ‘bayou 
people’). A Muskhogeantribe which in 
1700 lived with the Mugulasha in a village 
on the w. bank of the Mississippi, about 64 
leagues above its mouth and 30 leagues 
below the Huma town. Lemoyne d’ Iber¬ 
ville (Margry, Dec., iv, 170-172, 1880) 
gives a brief description of their village, 
which he says contained 2 temples and 107 
cabins; that a fire was kept constantly 
burning in the temples, and near the 
door were kept many figures of animals, 
as the bear, wolf, birds, and in particular 
the choucoiiacha, or opossum, which ap¬ 
peared to be a chief deity or image to 
which offerings were made. At this time 
they numbered 206 to 250 men, probably 
including the Mugulasha. Not long after 
the Bayogoula almost exterminated the 
Mugulasha as the result of a dispute be¬ 
tween the chiefs of the two tribes, but 
the former soon fell victims to a similar 
act of treachery, since having received the 
Tonica into their village in 1706, they 
were surprised and almost all massacred 
by their perfidious guests (La Harpe, 
Jour. Hist. La., 98, 1831). Smallpox 
destroyed most of the remainder, so 
that by 1721 not a family was known to 
exist, (a. s. g. c. t. ) 

Babayoulas. — Baudry desLozi^res, Voy., 241, 1802. 
Baiagoulas. —de Sauvole (1700) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ill, 224-240, 1851. Baiougoula.— Gravier 
(1701) in Shea, Early Voyages, 150,159,1861. Baya- 
gola.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Bayagoubas.— 
Jefferys, French Dom. Am., I, 147, 1761. Baya- 
goulas.— d’Iberville in French, Hist. Coll. La., 


n, 67,1875. Baya-Ogoulas.— Penicaut (1703), ibid., 
n. s., i, 85, note, 1869. Bayogola. —Coxs, Caro¬ 
lana, 7,1741. Bayogoulas.— d’Iberville in Margry, 
D6c., iv, 169, 1880. Bayonne Ogoulas. —Jefferys, 
French, Dom. Am., 1 , 164,1761. Bayouc Agoulas.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80,1854. Bay¬ 
ouc Ogoulas.— Le Page du Pratz., La., I, 271,1774. 
Bayuglas. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 641, 1856. 

Bayou. A sluggish stream forming the 
inlet or outlet of a lake or bay, or con¬ 
necting two bodies of water or a branch 
of a river flowing through a delta. The 
generally accepted etymology from the 
French boyau ‘gut’, is wrong (Chamber- 
lain in Nation, lix, 381, 1894). Accord¬ 
ing to Gatschet (Creek Migr., Leg., i, 113, 
1884) the Choctaw word for a smaller 
river, or a river forming part of a delta, 
is bayuk , and the word comes into Eng¬ 
lish through the French, from this or a 
closely related Muskhogean dialect. The 
same word appears in another form in the 
bogue of such Louisiana and Mississippi 
place-names as Boguechito, Boguefalala, 
Boguelusa, representing in a French form 
the contracted bok, from bdyuk. (a. f. c. ) 

Bayou Chicot (Creole French: chicot, 

‘snag, ’ ‘tree-stump’). A former Choctaw 
village s. of Cheneyville, St Landry par¬ 
ish, La. 

Bayacchito. —d’Iberville (1699) in Margry, D6c., 
IV, 155, 1880. Bayou Chico. —Claiborne (1808) in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 755, 1832. 

Bayu. A former Maidu village at Sandy 
gulch, Butte co., Cal. It was located by 
Powers on Feather r., and there may 
possibly have been a second village of 
the same name at that place, (r. b. d. ) 
Bai'-yu.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 282, 
1877. Bayu.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 100.1891. 
Biyous.— Powers in Overland Mo., xn, 420,1874. 

Bazhi. An Ikogmiut village on the 
Yukon at the upper mouth of Innoko r., 
Alaska. 

Bazhigagat.— Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 

Beadwork. Attractive and precious 
objects, perforated usually through the 
middle and strung for various purposes, 
constitute a class of ornaments univer¬ 
sally esteemed, which the Indians of 
North America did not fail to develop. 
Akin to beads, and scarcely separable 
from them, were objects from the same 
materials called pendants. They were 
perforated near the end or edge and hung 
on the person or on garments. All were 
made from mineral, vegetal, or animal 
substances, and after the discovery the 
introduction of beads of glass and porce ¬ 
lain, as well as that of metal tools for mak¬ 
ing the old varieties, greatly multiplied 
their employment. Mineral substances 
showing pretty colored or brilliant sur¬ 
faces, from which beads were made, were 
copper, hematite, all kinds of quartz, ser¬ 
pentine, magnetite, slate, soapstone, tur¬ 
quoise, encrinite sections, pottery, and, in 
later times, silver and other metals, porce¬ 
lain, and glass. They were of many sizes 
and shapes. Among vegetal substances 


138 


BEADWORK 


[b. a. e. 


seeds and, especially along the southern 
tier of states from Florida to California, 
nuts were widely used for beads, and here 
and there stems and roots of pretty or 
scented plants were cut into sections for 
the same purpose. But far the largest 
share of beads were made from animal 
materials—shell, bone, horn, teeth, claws, 
and ivory. Beads of marine or fresh¬ 
water shells were made by grinding off the 
apex, as in the case of dentalium, or the 
unchanged shells of bivalves were merely 
perforated near the hinge. Pearls were 
bored through the middle, and shells 
were cut into disks, cylinders, spheres, 
spindles, etc. In places the columellse of 
large conchs were removed and pierced 
through the long diameter for stringing. 
Bone beads were usually cylinders pro¬ 
duced by cutting sections of various 
lengths from the thigh or other parts of 




vertebrate skeletons. When the wall of 
the bone was thick the ends were ground 
to give a spherical form. The milk teeth 
of the elk, the canine teeth of the bear, 
and the incisors of rodents were highly 
valued, and in later times the incisors of 
the horse were worn. The beaks of the 
puffin, the talons of rapacious birds, and 
bears’ claws were wrought into ceremonial 
dress and paraphernalia. A great deal of 
taste and manual skill were developed in 
selecting the materials, and in cutting, 
grinding, and rolling them into shape and 
uniform size, as well as in polishing and 
perforating substances, some of them very 
hard, as jasper. Many of the cylinders are 
several inches long. The tribes of n. w. 
California wrap dentalia with snake skin 
glued on in strips, while the Porno and 
their neighbors make large cylinders of a 
baked mineral (Kroeber). 


The general uses to which beads were 
put are legion. They were tied in the 
hair, worn singly or in strings from the 
ears, on the neck, arms, wrist, waist, and 
lower limbs, or were attached to bark and 
wooden vessels, matting, basketry, and 
other textiles. They were woven into 
fabrics or wrought into network, their 
varied and bright colors not only enhanc¬ 
ing beauty but lending themselves to her¬ 
aldry. Glass beads thus woven produce 
effects like those of cathedral glass. Again, 
they were embroidered on every part of 
ceremonial costume, sometimes entirely 
covering headdress, coat, regalia, leggings, 
or moccasins, and on all sorts of recep¬ 
tacles. The old-time technic and de¬ 
signs of quillwork are closely imitated. 
They were largely employed as gifts and 
as money, also as tokens and in records 
of hunts or of important events, such as 
treaties. They were conspicuous acces¬ 
sories in the councils of war and peace, in 
the conventional expression of tribal 
symbolism, and in traditional story-tell¬ 
ing, and were offered in worship. They 
were regarded as insignia of functions, 
and were buried, often in vast quantities, 
with the dead. 

In each of the ethnic areas of North 
America nature provided tractable and 
attractive material to the bead-maker. 
In the Arctic region it was walrus ivory 
and the glossy teeth of mammals. They 
served not only for personal adornment, 
but were hung to all sorts of skin recep¬ 
tacles and inlaid upon the surfaces of 
those made of wood and soft stone. The 
Danes brought glass to the eastern Eski¬ 
mo, the whalers to the central, and the 
Russians to the western tribes. In the St 
Lawrence-Atlantic area whole shells were 
strung, and cylinders, disks, and spindles 
were cut from the valves of the clam ( Ve¬ 
nus mercenaria). InVirginiaacheapkind, 
called roanoke, were made from oyster 
shells. In the N. small white and pur¬ 
ple cylinders, called wampum, served for 
ornament and were used in elaborate 
treaty belts and as a money standard, also 
flat disks an inch or more in width being 
bored through their long diameters. The 
Cherokee name for beads and money is 
the same. Subsequently imitated by the 
colonists, these beads received a fixed 
value. The mound-builders and other 
tribes of the Mississippi valley and the 
Gulf states used pearls and beads of shell, 
seeds, and rolled copper. Canine teeth 
of the elk w T ere most highly esteemed, 
recently being worth 50 cents to $1 each. 
They were carefully saved, and a garment 
covered with them was valued at as much 
as $600 or $800. The modern tribes also 
used the teeth of rodents, the claws of bears 
and carnivores, and the dewclaws of rumi¬ 
nants. Nuts and berries were univer- 





















































































































BULL. 30] 


BEAR RIVER-BEJUITUUY 


139 


sally strung and worn, and the Mandan 
and other Missouri r. tribes pounded and 
melted glass and molded it into beads. 
After the colonization cradles and articles 
of skin were profusely covered with bead- 
work replete with symbolism. The Yu- 
kon-Mackenzie tribes were most skilful 
in quillwork, but later decked their gar¬ 
ments and other useful things with glass 
beads. All along the Pacific slope den- 
talium, abalone, and clam shells fur¬ 
nish the most valuable materials. The 
length of the wrought bead represented a 
certain amount of work and established 
the money value. The price of dentalium 
shells increased rapidly after a certain 
length was exceeded. These beads were 
decorated with grass, skin, and feathers 
to enhance their worth. The California 
coast tribes and the ancient peoples of 
Santa Barbara ids. were rich in the little 
flat-shell disks as well as the stone drill, 
and they knew how to reduce them to 
uniform diameter by rolling long strings 
of them between slabs or through grooves 
in sandstone. The tribes of the n. part 
of the interior basin were not well sup¬ 
plied with bead material, but early 
made the acquaintance of the trader. A 
series of Ute costumes made before the 
advent of glass shows much pretty deco¬ 
ration in dewclaws, bits of goat and sheep 
horn, and perforated seeds. The Pueblo 
Indians string the yellow capsules of Sola- 
num, sections of woody stems of plants, 
seashells, turquoise and other varieties 
of bright-colored stones, of which they 
have great store. The Hyde Expedition 
found more than 30,000 turquoise beads in 
a single room at Pueblo Bonito, N. Mex. 
The Huichol, with colored beads of glass, 
using wax as an adhesive, make pretty 
mosaic figures on gourds, carved images 
of wood, etc. 

Consult Beauchamp in Bull. N. Y. State 
Mus., no. 73, 1903; Catlin, N. A. Inds., 
1841; Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896; Mason in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1899, 485- 
510, 1901; Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Hidatsa, 18, 1877; Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1899; Holmes, Annals, i, 271, 
1829; Sumner, Hist. Am. Currency, 4, 8, 
1874; Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 
1877; Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, 1902; 
Pepper in Am. Anthrop., vii, no. 2,1905. 
See Adornment, Art, Arts and Industries, 
Basketry, Copper, Quillwork, Shellwork, 
Turquoise, Wampum, and articles on the 
various raw materials mentioned above 
as having been used for beads, (o. t. m.) 

Bear River. A tribe mentioned by 
Lawson (N. C., 383, 1860) as living in 
North Carolina in 1701, and having then 
a single village, Raudauquaquank, with 
50 warriors. According to Hawks (Hist. 
N. C., 1858-59) they lived in Craven co., 
probably on a branch of the Neuse. 


Beaubassin. A (Micmac?) mission es¬ 
tablished by the French in the 17th cen¬ 
tury.—Shea, Discov. Miss. Val., 86, 1852. 

Beauport. A village established in 1650 
in Quebec co., Canada, by fugitive Huron, 
who removed in the next year to the 
island of Orleans.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 
196, 1855. 

Beaver. A former Aleut village on 
Unalaska, Aleutian ids.; pop. 41 in 1834. 
Bobrovo.— Sarichef (1792) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1901 (= ‘sea otter’). Bobrovskoe. — 
Veniaminoff, Zapiski, n,202, 1840. Bobrovskoi.— 
Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875. Uguiug.— 
Baker, op. cit. (native name). 

Beaver Island Indians. A Chippewa 
band formerly residing on the Beaver 
ids. of Michigan, at the outlet of L. 
Michigan.—Washington treaty (1836) in 
U. S. Ind. Treaties, 607, 1873. 

Beaversville. A Delaware settlement 
in 1856 near the junction of Boggy cr. 
and Canadian r. in Indian Territory.— 
Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, 18, 1856. 

Beavertown. A mixed village, iden¬ 
tical with Sawcunk (q. v.), situated in 
1766 on the e side of the extreme e. 
head branch of Hocking r., at or near 
the present Beavertown, in Morgan co., 
Ohio. Beaver, or King Beaver, was at 
that time chief of the Unami tribe of 
Delawares. See Tamaque. 

Beaver Town.— Hutchins map in Bouquet, Exped., 
1766. King Beaver’s Town.— Bouquet, ibid., 67. 

Becancour. A village on St Lawrence 
r., in Quebec province, settled by Ab- 
naki who removed from Maine in 1713 
when that state was ceded to England 
by the treaty of Utrecht. In 1736 they 
were estimated at about 300; in 1858 
they numbered 172, with French admix¬ 
ture, and in 1884 they were reduced to 
39, but in 1902 numbered 51. They are 
members of the Roman Catholic church. 

(j. M.) 

Bacandee.— King, Jour, to Arctic Ocean,1,11,1886 
(incorrectly given as an Iroquois village at Lake 
of Two Mountains, but distinct from “ K&ngs&tar- 
kee”). Beauancourt. —Vaudreuil (1710) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 849, 1855. Bepancour.— Vau¬ 
dreuil (1724) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 240,1859. 
Becancourians.— Rasies (1724) trans. in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., VIII, 246,1819. Becancourt.— 
Vaudreuil (1721) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 904, 
1855. Becquancourt. —La Tour, map, 1784. Bec- 
quencourt. —Ibid., 1782. Becuncourt. —Clinton 
H.745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 281, 1855. 
Bekancourt. —DeLancey (1754) in Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 216, 1872. Besanpon.— Chau- 
vignerie (1736) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 553,1853. 

Bece. An abandoned village of the 
Koskimo, 6 m. e. of Koprino harbor, in 
n. Quatsino ad., Vancouver id. 

Bece.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 7,1888. 

Beds. See Furniture. 

Beech Creek. A former Seminole town 
on Beech cr., Fla., settled by Chiaha In¬ 
dians from lower Chattahoochee r., Ga.; 
exact location unknown.—Bell in Morse, 
Rep. to Sec. War, 308, 1822. 

Bejuituuy (‘village of the rainbow’). 
A former pueblo of the Tigua near the s. 


140 


BEKU-BELLA BELLA 


[b. a. e. 


limit of their habitat, on the Rio Grande, 
at the present Los Lunas, N. Mex. 

Be-jui Tu-uy.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
nr, 130, 1890. Be-juij Tu-aij.— Bandelier in Jour. 
Am. Eth. and Arch., ill, 61,1892. Be-Jui Tu-ay.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, IV, 218, 1892. 
Be-juy Tu-ay.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Eth. and 
Arch., op. cit. San Clemente.— Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 219, 1892. Village of the B,ain- 
bow.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., 
op. cit. 

Beku {Be'-leu ). Given by Powers (Cont, 
N. A.Ethnol., iii, 393,1877) as the name of 
a tribe related to the Paiute, but identified 
by Kroeber (inf’n, 1903) as a form of 
Bekiu, the Yokuts name of a locality on 
Poso cr., Cal., within the territory of the 
Paleuyami Yokuts. 

Beldom. A Missisauga village in On¬ 
tario in 1855.—Jones, Ojebway Inds., 
229, 1861. 

Belen. A village on the w. bank of the 
Rio Grande in Valencia co., N. Mex., 
and the seat of the Spanish mission of 
Nuestra Senora, with 107 inhabitants in 
1805 and 133 in 1809. Like Abiquiu and 
Tome it was apparently established as a 
refuge for Genizaros, or redeemed captive 
Indians, of whom a few were at Belen in 
1766. It is nowa “Mexican” settlement. 
The ruins of the old Spanish church may 
still be traced, (f. w. h.) 

Belem. —Alencaster (1805) quoted by Prince, N. 
Mex., 231, 1883. Belen.— Moi'se in Kan. Cy. Rev., 
481, Dec. 1881. Neustra Senora de Belem. —Alen¬ 
caster (1805) quoted by Meline, Two Thousand 
Miles, 212,1867 (misprint). N. S. de Belem. —Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, I, 599,1882 (after Meline). N, 
S. de Belen.— Alencaster (1805) quoted by Prince, 
N. Mex., 37, 1883. Nuestra Senora de la Belen.— 
Ward in Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1867,213,1868. Belue.— 
Ibid., 210 (misprint). 

Belen. A settlement of the Yaqui, in¬ 
cluding some members of the Seri and 
Guayma tribes, on the n. bank of Yaqui 
r., about 20 m. above its mouth, in s. 
Sonora, Mexico. It was the seat of an 
important mission founded about 1678, 
and in 1849 its population was estimated 
at 3,000. 

Belem.— Velasco in Bol. Soc. Mex. Geog. Estad., 
vm, 226, 1860. Belen.— Velasco, Noticias de So¬ 
nora, 84, 1850. Nuestra Senora de Belem.— Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 355, 1864. Nuestra Senora de 
Belen.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
ill, 379, 1857. 

Belkofski (Russian: Bielkovskoie , ‘squir¬ 
rel village’). An Aleut village near the 
end of Alaska pen.; pop. 102 in 1833, 268 
in 1880, 185 in 1890, 147 in 1900. 

Bailkovskoe.— Veniaminof, Zapiski, II, 203, 1840. 
Belkovsky.— Schwatka, Mil. Recon. Alaska, 116, 
1885. Bellkovskoi.— Elliott, Cond. Aff., Alaska, 
225, 1875. Bjelkowskoje.— Holmberg, Ethnol. 
Skizz., map, 142, 1855. 

Bellabella (an Indian corruption of Mil- 
bank taken back into English). The pop¬ 
ular name of an important Kwakiutl 
tribe living on Milbank sd., Brit. Col. 
Their septs or subtribes are Kokaitk, 
Oetlitk, and Oealitk. The following clans 
are given: Wikoktenok (Eagle), Koete- 
nok (Raven), Halhaiktenok (Killer- 
whale). Pop. 330 in 1901. 


The language spoken by this tribe and 
shared also by the Kitamat, Kitlope, 
China Hat, and Wikeno Indians is a pe¬ 
culiar dialect of Kwakiutl, called Heil- 
tsuk from the native name of the Bella- 



BELLABELLA MAN. (am. MuS. NAT. HIST. ) 


bella. These tribes resemble each other 
furthermore in having a system of clans 
with descent through the mother—de¬ 
rived probably from their northern neigh- 



BELLABELLA woman, (am. Mus. Nat Hist. ) 


bors—while the Bellacoolaand Kwakiutl 
to the s. have paternal descent. An¬ 
ciently the Bellabella were very warlike, 
a character largely attributable to the 
fact that they were flanked on one side 









BULL. 30] 


BELLACOOLA-BEOTHUKAN FAMILY 


141 


by the Tsimshian of Kittizoo and on the 
other by the Bellacoola, while war par¬ 
ties of Haida from the Queen Charlotte 
ids. were constantly raiding their coasts. 
For this reason, perhaps, the peculiar se¬ 
cret societies of the n. w. coast, the most 
important of which evidently had their 
origin in war customs, first arose among 
them. When voyagers first began fre¬ 
quenting the n. Pacific coast, Milbank id., 
which offers one of the few good open¬ 
ings into the inner ship channel to 
Alaska, was often visited, and its inhab¬ 
itants were therefore among the first to 
be modified by European contact. To¬ 
gether with the other Heiltsuk tribes 
they have now been Christianized by 
Protestant missionaries, and most of their 
ancient culture and ritual have been 
abandoned, (j. r. s. ) 

Belbellahs.— Dunn, Oregon Ter., 183, 1845. Bella- 
Bella.— Can. Ind. AfL, 361, 1897. Elk-la'sumH.— 
Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 9,1889 (Bel¬ 
lacoola name). Haeeltruk, —Scouler in Jour. 
Geog. Soc. Lond., I, 224, 1841. Haeeltsuk.— 

Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 233, 
1848. Haeeltz. —Latham, ibid., 164. Haeeltzuk.— 
Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., i, 223, 1841. 
Haeetsuk.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
61, 1856. Haeltzuk. —Latham in Jour. Ethnol. 
Soc. Lond., i, 155, 1848. Hailtsa. —Hale in U. S. 
Expl. Expd., vr, 221,1816. Hailtzuk.— Tolmie and 
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 117 b, 1884. Ha-ilt- 
zukh. —Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 145, 1877. 
He'iltsuk. —Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 
1887. He'iltsuq.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 
328 (own name). Hiletsuck. —Can. Ind. AfL. 252, 
1891. Hiletsuk.— Ibid.,191,1883. Iletsuck.— Powell, 
ibid., 122,1880. Ilet Suck.— Ibid., 315. Millbank 
Indians.— Dunn, Hist. Oreg., 271, 1844. Millbank 
Sound Indians. —Ibid., 358. Witsta. —Tolmie and 
Dawson, op. cit. (Chimmesyan name). Wut- 
sta'.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 9, 1889. 

Bellacoola ( Bi'lxula ). A coast Salish 
tribe, or rather aggregation of tribes, on n. 
and s. Bentinckarm, Dean inlet, and Bel¬ 
lacoola r., Brit. Col. This name is that 
given them by the Kwakiutl, there being 
no native designation for the entire peo¬ 
ple. They form the northernmost divi¬ 
sion of the Salishan stock, from the re¬ 
maining tribes of which they are sepa¬ 
rated by the Tsilkotin and the Kwakiutl. 
In the Canadian reports on Indian af¬ 
fairs the name is restricted by the separa¬ 
tion of the Tallion (see Talio ) and the 
Kinisquit (people of Dean inlet), the 
whole being called the Tallion nation. 
The population in 1902 was 311. The 
chief divisions mentioned are the Kinis¬ 
quit, Noothlakimish, and Nulialk. The 
gentes of the Bellacoola without reference 
to the tribal divisions are: Hamtsit, Ialos- 
timot, Kookotlane, *6moen, Spatsatlt, 
Tlakaumoot, Tumkoaakyas. The follow¬ 
ing are mentioned as gentes of the Nuhalk 
division: Keltakkaua, Potlas, Siatlhelaak, 
Spukpukolemk, and Tokoais. The Bel¬ 
lacoola villages (chiefly after Boas) are: 
Aseik, Asenane, Atlklaktl, Koapk, Koatl- 
na, Komkutis, Noutchaoff, Nuiku, Nuka- 
akmats, Nukits, Nusatsem, Nuskek, Nus- 


kelst, Nutltleik, Osmakmiketlp, Peisela, 
Sakta, Satsk, Selkuta, Senktl, Setlia, 
Slaaktl, Snutele, Snutlelatl, Sotstl, 
Stskeitl, Stuik, Talio, Tkeiktskune, 
Tskoakkane, Tsomootl. (j. r. s.) 
Belhoola.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 267,1877. 
Bellacoola.— Can. Ind. AfL, 315, 1880. Bellagh- 
choolas.— Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 267, 1844. Bella- 
hoola.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1855. 
Bell-houla. —Mayne, Brit. Col., 146, 1862. Belli- 
choola.— Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 
234,1848. Bilhoola.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 122 b, 1884. Billechoola. —Scouler in 
Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., I, 224, 1841. Billikula.— 
Gibbs quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
241, 1877. Bilqula. —7th Rep. N. W. Tribes of 
Can., 2, 1891. Bi'lxula. —Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
for 1895, 320. Ilghi'mi. —Tolmie and Dawson 
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 122 b, 1884. Tallion Nation.— 
Can. Ind. AfL, 417, 1898. 

Bells. Metal bells were in common use 
in middle America in pre-Columbian 
times, but they are rarely found n. of the 
Rio Grande, either in possession of the 
tribes or on ancient sites; but bells were 
certainly known to the Pueblos and pos¬ 
sibly to the mound-builders before the 
arrival of the whites. The 
rattle made of shells of vari¬ 
ous kinds or modeled in clay 
passed naturally into the bell 
as soon as metal or other par¬ 
ticularly resonant materials 
wereavailable fortheirmanu- 

facture. Occasionally copper COPPER BELL FROM 
bells with stone tinklers are a Tennessee 
found on ancient sites in New ( t ° H om A sS 1 

Mexico and Arizona, where 
examples in baked clay are also found; 
these are usually quite small and are of the 
hawk-bell or sleigh-bell type, and doubt¬ 
less served as pendant ornaments. Rare 
examples of copper bells have been col¬ 
lected in the southern states, but it is not 
certain that they were of local origin, since 
many specimens must have reached Flor¬ 
ida from Mexico and Central America in 
early Columbian times; and it is well 
known that bells of copper or bronze 
were employed in trade with the tribes 
by the English colonists, numerous ex¬ 
amples of which have been obtained from 
mounds and burial places. 

Consult Fewkes (1) in 17th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1898, (2) in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 1903; 
Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 1903; 
Moore in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1894-1905; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 
1894. See Copper, (w. h. h.) 

Beothukan Family (from the tribal or 
group name Beothuk , which probably 
signifies ‘man,’ or ‘human being,’ but 
was employed by Europeans to mean ‘ In¬ 
dian,’ or ‘Red Indian’; in the latter case 
because the Beothuk colored themselves 
and tinted their utensils and arms with 
red ocher). So far as known only a single 
tribe, called Beothuk, which inhabited 
the island of Newfoundland when first dis¬ 
covered, constituted this family, although 



142 


BEOTHUKAN FAMILY-BERLIN TABLET 


[B. a. e. 


existing vocabularies indicate marked dia¬ 
lectic differences. At first the Beothuk 
were classified either as Eskimauan or as 
Algonquian, but now, largely through the 
researches of Gatschet, it is deemed best 
to regard them as constituting a distinct 
linguistic stock. It is probable that in 1497 
Beothukan people were met by Sebastian 
Cabotwhen hediscovered Newfoundland, 
as he states that he met people “painted 
with red ocher/’ which is a marked char¬ 
acteristic of the Beothuk of later observ¬ 
ers. Whitbourne (Chappell, Voy. to New¬ 
foundland, 1818), who visited Newfound¬ 
land in 1622, stated that the dwelling places 
of these Indians were in the n. and w. parts 
of the island, adding that ‘ ‘ in war they use 
bows and arrows, spears, darts, clubs, and 
slings.” The extinction of the Beothuk 
was due chiefly to the bitter hostility of 
the French and to Micmac invasion from 
Nova Scotia at the beginning of the 
18th century, the Micmac settling in 
w. Newfoundland as hunters and fish¬ 
ermen. For a time these dwelt in am¬ 
ity with the Beothuk, but in 1770, quar¬ 
rels having arisen, a destructive bat¬ 
tle was fought between the two peoples 
at the n. end of Grand Pond. The Beo¬ 
thuk, however, lived on friendly terms 
with the Naskapi, or Labrador Montag- 
nais, and the two peoples visited and 
traded with each other. Exasperated by 
the petty depredations of these tribes, the 
French, in the middle of the 18th cen¬ 
tury, offered a rew r ard for every head of 
a Beothuk Indian. To gain this reward 
and to obtain the valuable furs they 
possessed, the more numerous Micmac 
hunted and gradually exterminated them 
as an independent people. The English 
treated the Beothuk with much less 
rigor; indeed, in 1810 Sir Thomas Duck¬ 
worth issued a proclamation for their pro¬ 
tection. The banks of the River of Ex¬ 
ploits and its tributuaries appear to have 
been their last inhabited territory. 

De Laet(NovusOrbis, 34,1633) describes 
these Newfoundland Indians as follows: 
“ The height of the body is medium, the 
hair black, the face broad, the nose flat, 
and the eyes large; all the males are 
beardless, and both sexes tint not only 
their skin but also their garments with a 
kind of red color. And they dwell in 
certain conical lodges and low' huts of 
sticks set in a circle and joined together 
in the roof. Being nomadic, they fre¬ 
quently change their habitations. They 
had a kind of cake made with eggs and 
baked in the sun, and a sort of pudding, 
stuffed in gut, and composed of seal’s fat, 
livers, eggs, and other ingredients.” He 
describes also their peculiar crescent¬ 
shaped birch-bark canoes, which had 
sharp keels, requiring much ballast to 
keep them from overturning; these were 
not more than 20 feet in length and they 


could bear at most 5 persons. Remains 
of their lodges, 30 to 40 feet in circumfer¬ 
ence and constructed by forming a slender 
frame of poles overspread with birch bark, 
are still traceable. They had both sum¬ 
mer and winter dwellings, the latter often 
accommodating about 20 people each. 
Jukes (Excursions, 1842) describes their 
deer fences or deer stockades of trees, 
which often extended for 30 miles along 
a river. They employed pits or caches 
for storing food, and used the steam bath 
in huts covered with skins and heated 
with hot stones. Some of the charac¬ 
teristics in which the Beothuk differed 
from most other Indians were a marked 
lightness of skin color, the use of trenches 
in their lodges for sleeping berths, the 
peculiar form of their canoes, the non¬ 
domestication of the dog, and the dearth 
of evidence of pottery making. Bonny- 
castle (Newfoundland in 1842) states that 
the Beothuk used the inner bark of Pinus 
balsamifera as food, while Lloyd (Jour. 
Anthrop. Inst., iv, 1875) mentions the fact 
that they obtained fire by igniting the 
down of the bluejay from sparks produced 
by striking together two pieces of iron 
pyrites. Peyton, cited by Lloyd, declares 
that the sun was the chief object of their 
worship. Carmack’s expedition, conduct¬ 
ed in behalf of the Beothic Society for the 
Civilization of the Native Savages, in 1827, 
failed to find a single individual of this 
once prominent tribe, although the island 
was crossed centrally in the search. As 
they were on good terms with the Nas¬ 
kapi of Labrador, they perhaps crossed 
the strait of Belle Isle and became incor¬ 
porated with them. ( j. n. b. h. a. s. g. ) 
Beathook.—Leigh quoted by Lloyd in Jour. 
Anthrop. Inst., iv,38,1875. Behathook.— Gatschet 
in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 410, 1885 (quoting older 
form). Beothics.—Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 
IV, 33, 1875. Beothik.—Gatschet, op. cit. (quoting 
old form). Beoths.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 47,1866. 
Beothucs.—Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, 21, 

1875. Beothues.—Jour. Anthrop. Inst.,IV, pi.facing 
p. 26,1875. Beothugs.—Ibid., V, pi. facing p. 223, 

1876. Beothuk. —Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
408, 1885. Bethuck.—Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 58, 1856. Boeothick. —Mac Dougall in 
Trans. Canad. Inst., II, 98, 1890-91. Boeothuk.— 
Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 410,1885 (quot¬ 
ing older form). Good-night Indians.—Lloyd, 
following blunder of Latham, in Jour. Anthrop. 
Inst., v, 229,1876. Macquaejeet.—Gatschet in Proc. 
Am. Philos. Soc., 410, Oct., 1885 (Micmac name: 
‘red man,’ evidently a transl. of the European 
‘Red Indian’). Red Indians of Newfoundland.— 
Cartwright (1768) quoted by Lloyd in Jour. 
Anthrop. Inst., IV, 22,1875. Shawatharott.—King 
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 410, 
1885 (= ‘ Red Indian man ’). Shawdtharut. —Ibid. 
Ulnohah.—Latham quoted by Gatschet, ibid., 411 
(Abnaki name). Ulno mequaegit.—Ibid, (said to 
be the Micmac name, sig. ‘red man,’ butevidently 
a trader’s or fisherman’s rendering of the Euro¬ 
pean ‘ Red Indians’). 

Beowawa. Incorrectly given as the 
name of a Hopi village; it seems to be 
the name of a man. 

Beowawa.—Beadle, Western Wilds, 227, 1878. 
Beowawe.—Beadle, Undeveloped West, 676,1873, 

Berlin tablet. See Notched plates. 


BULL. 30] 


BERSIAMITE—BIBLE TRANSLATIONS 


143 


Bersiamite. One of the small Algon- 
quian tribes composing the eastern group 
of the Montagnais, inhabiting the banks 
of Bersimis r., which enters St Lawrence 
r. near the gulf. These Indians became 
known to the French at an early date, 
and being of a peaceable and tractable 
disposition, were soon brought under the 
influence of the missionaries. They were 
accustomed to assemble once a year with 
cognate tribes at Tadoussac for the pur¬ 
pose of trade, but these have melted away 
under the influence of civilization. A 
trading post called Bersimis, at the mouth 
of Bersimis r., had in 1902 some 465 In¬ 
dians attached to it, but whether any of 
them were Bersiamite is not stated, (j. m. ) 
Baisimetes. — McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 79, 1854. Bersamis.—Stearns, Labrador, 263, 

1884. Bersiamites.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 34, 1858. 
Bersiamits.—Hind, Labrador Penin., r, 125, 1863. 
Bersiamitts.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 81, 1854. Bertiamistes.—Iroquois treaty (1665) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 122, 1853. Bertiam- 
ites.— Memoir of 1706, ibid., IX, 786, 1855. Beth- 
siamits.—Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., 38, 1880. Betsiam- 
ites.—Le Clercq quoted by Champlain (1632), 
(Euvres, IV, 105,1870. Betsiamits.—Can. Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1884, pt 1, 185, 1885. Bussenmeus.—McKen¬ 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 81,1854. Notre Dame 
de Betsiamits.—Boucher in Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 
for 1884, pt. 1, 36,1885 (mission name). Oubestami- 
ouek.—Jes. Rel. for 1643, 38, 1858. Oumamiois.— 
Albanel (1670) quoted by Hind, Labrador Penin.. 
i, 126,1863. Oumamioucks.—McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854. Oumamiwek.—Hind, 
Labrador Penin., i, 224,1863. 

Besheu (bi]l u ‘lynx’). A gens of the 
Chippewa. 

Be-sheu.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44, 

1885. Pe-zhew.—Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 
(trans. ‘wild cat’). Pishiu.— Gatschet, Ojibwa 
MS., B. A. E., 1882. 

Beshow. The black candle-fish (Ano- 
plopoma fimbria) of the Puget sd. region; 
from bishowk, in the Makah dialect of the 
Wakashan stock. (a. f. c.) 

Bethel. An Eskimo mission, founded 
in 1886 by Moravian brethren from Penn¬ 
sylvania, on Kuskokwim r., close to 
Mumtrelek, Alaska. Pop. 20 in 1890. 

Bethlehem. A Moravian settlement es¬ 
tablished in 1740 at the present Bethle¬ 
hem, Northampton co., Pa. Although a 
white settlement, the Moravians drew to¬ 
ward it many of the Indians, and in 1746 
the Mahican converts from Shecomeco 
resided there for a short time before set¬ 
tling at Friedenshuetten. (j. m.) 

Betonukeengainubejig ( Pi‘tona‘kingkain- 
upichig, ‘they who live in the neighbor¬ 
hood of [L. Superior on the s.].’—W. J.). 
An important division of the Chippewa 
living in n. Wisconsin, between L. Su¬ 
perior and Mississippi r. The Munom- 
i n ikasheenhug, W ahsuahgune winine wug, 
and Lac Court Oreilles Chippewa are 
incorporated with them. Their principal 
villages were at Desert lake (Vieux Des¬ 
ert), Flambeau lake, Pelican lake, Lac 
Court Oreilles, Lac Chetec, Pukwaawun, 
and Mononimikau lake. (J. m.) 


Be-ton-auk-an-ub-yig.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
85, 1850. Be-ton-uk-eeng-ain-ub-e-jig. —Warren in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 38 1885. Pi‘tona‘king- 
kainapitcig.— W. Jones, inf’n,.1905 (correct form). 

Betty’s Neck. A place in Middleboro, 
Plymouth co., Mass., w^here 8 Indian 
families lived in 1793, and took its name 
from an Indian woman (Drake, Bk. Inds., 
bk. 3,10,1848). The people seem to have 
been Nemasket and subject to the Wam- 
panoag. (j. m.) 

Biara. A subdivision or settlement of 
the Tehueco, formerly on the lower Rio 
Fuerte or the Fuerte-Mayo divide, n. w. 
Sinaloa, Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
58, 1864. 

Biauswah ( payaswa , ‘dried,’ as when 
meat is hung over fire until smoked and 
dried; it may also refer to meat hung on 
a pole to dry in the sun.—W. J.). A Chip¬ 
pewa chief, also known as Byianswa, son 
of Biauswah, a leading man of the Loon 
gens which resided on the s. shore of L. 
Superior, 40 m. w. of La Pointe, n. w. Wis. 
He was taken prisoner by the Fox In¬ 
dians when a boy, but was saved from 
torture and death by his father, who 
became a voluntary substitute. After the 
death of his father he moved with his 
people to Fond du Lac. Being made 
chief he led the warriors of various bands 
in an expedition against the Sioux of 
Sandy lake and succeeded in driving the 
latter from their village, and later the 
Sioux were forced to abandon their vil¬ 
lages on Cass and Winnipeg lakes and 
their stronghold on Leech lake, whence 
they moved westward to the headwaters 
of Minnesota r. The Chippewa under 
Biauswah were those who settled in the 
country of the upper Mississippi about 
1768 (Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 222, 1885). 
The date of his death is not recorded, but 
it probably occurred not long after the 
date named. (c. t. ) 

Bibiana. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Papago, in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, 
between Busanic and Sonoita, near (or 
possibly identical with) Anamic. It was 
visited by Kino in 1702. 

Sta Bibiana.— Kino (1706) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 502,1886. 

Bible translations. The Bible has been 
printed in part or in whole in 32 Indian 
languages n. of Mexico. In 18 one or 
more portions have been printed; in 9 
others the New Testament or more has 
appeared; and in 5 languages, namely, the 
Massachuset, Cree, Labrador Eskimo, 
Santee Dakota, and Tukkuthkutchin, the 
whole Bible is in print. 

The Norwegian missionaries, Hans and 
Paul Egede, were the first to translate 
any part of the Bible into Greenland 
Eskimo, their version of the New Testa¬ 
ment being printed in part in 1744, and 
as a whole in 1766. A revision of this 


144 


BIBLE TRANSLATIONS 


[B. a. e. 


translation, by Otto Fabricius, was twice 
printed before the close of the 18th cen¬ 
tury; and in 1822 the Moravian Brethren 
brought out a new translation, which ran 
through several editions. Nearly three- 
quarters of the Old Testament was printed 
in the same language between 1822 and 
1836, when the work was discontinued. 
In Labrador Eskimo the earliest printed 
Bible text was the Harmony of the Gos¬ 
pels, which appeared in 1800. This was 
followed by the Gospel of St John in 
1810, the complete New Testament in 
1840, and all of the Old Testament be¬ 
tween 1834 and 1867. In other Eskimo 
languages there were printed: In Labrador 
Eskimo some New Testament extracts in 
1878 and the Four Gospels in 1897, trans¬ 
lated by E. J. Peck; in the Aleutian 
Unalaska dialect, with adaptation also to 
the Atka dialect, John Veniaminoff’s 
translation of St Matthew’s Gospel in 
1848; and in Kaniagmiut, Elias Tishnoff’s 
translation of the same Gospel, also in 1848. 

Four languages of the Athapascan fam¬ 
ily have been provided with Bible trans¬ 
lations. The Gospels were translated by 
Robert McDonald and printed in the 
Tukkutlikutchin language of Mackenzie 
r. in 1874, and the whole Bible in 1898. 
In the Chipewyan Archdeacon Kirkby’s 
translation of the Gospels appeared in 
1878 and the whole New Testament in 
1881; in the Etchareottine, Kirkby’s trans¬ 
lation of St John’s Gospel in 1870, and 
Bishop Bompas’s of the New Testament 
between 1883 and 1891; and in the Tsat- 
tine, A. C. Garrioch’s version of St Mark’s 
Gospel in 1886. 

Translations have been made into 13 
languages of the Algonquian family. In 
the Cree, William Mason’s work com¬ 
prises several editions of the Gospel of 
St John made between 1851 and 1857, 
the complete New Testament in 1859, 
and the whole Bible in 1861-62. Arch¬ 
deacon Hunter’s version of three of the 
Gospels in the same language appeared 
in 1853-55 (reprinted in 1876-77). Bishop 
Horden’s Four Gospels in Cree was 
printed in 1859, and his complete New r 
Testament in 1876. In the Abnaki, St 
Mark’s Gospel, translated by Wzokhi- 
lain, was printed in 1844; in the Micmac, 
beginning with the printing of St Mat¬ 
thew’s Gospel in 1853, Mr Rand con¬ 
tinued at work until the whole New 
Testament was published in 1871-75, 
besides the books of Genesis, Exodus, 
and the Psalms; and in the Malecite, St 
John’s Gospel, also translated by Rand, 
came out in 1870. The Massachuset lan¬ 
guage, which comes next in geographical 
order, was the first North American In¬ 
dian language into which any Bible trans¬ 
lation was made; John Eliot began his 


Natick version in 1653 and finished it 
in 1661-63, with a revised edition in 
1680-85. In 1709 Experience Mayhevv 
published his translation, in the Wampa- 
noag dialect of Martha’s Vineyard, of 
the Psalms and St John’s Gospel. In 
the Delaware, Dencke’s translation of the 
Epistles of St John was printed in 1818, 
Zeisberger’s Harmony of the Gospels in 
1821, and Luckenbach’s Scripture Narra¬ 
tives in 1838. In Chippewa, the earliest 
translations were those of the Gospels of 
St Matthew and St John, by Peter and 
John Jones, printed in 1829-31. There 
are three complete translations of the 
New Testament in this language: One 
by Edwin James in 1833, another by 
Henry Blatchford in 1844 (reprinted in 
1856 and 1875), and a third by F. A. 
O’Meara in 1854 (reprinted in 1874). 
O’Meara also translated the Psalms (1856) 
and the Pentateuch (1861), and McDonald 
translated the Twelve Minor Prophets 
(1874). In the Shawnee language, St 
Matthew’s Gospel, by Johnston Lykins, 
was printed in 1836 and a revision in 
1842, and St John’s Gospel, by Francis 
Barker, in 1846. In the Ottawa, Meeker’s 
translation of St Matthew and St John 
appeared in 1841-44; in the Potawatomi, 
St Matthew and the Acts, by Lykins, in 
1844; in the Siksika, St Matthew, by 
Tims, in 1890; in the Arapaho, St Luke, 
by Roberts, in 1903; and in the Cheyenne, 
the Gospels of St Luke and St John by 
Petter, who has published also some other 
portions of the Bible. 

Three languages of thelroquoian family 
possess parts of the Bible. In Mohawk, 
extracts from the Bible were printed as 
early as 1715; the Gospel of St Mark, 
by Brant, in 1787; and St John, by Nor¬ 
ton, in 1805. Between 1827 and 1836 
the rest of the New Testament was trans¬ 
lated by H. A. Hill, W. Hess, and J. A. 
Wilkes, and the whole was printed in 
successive parts. A new version of the 
Gospels, by Chief Onasakenrat, was 
printed in 1880. The only part of the 
Old Testament in Mohawk is Isaiah, 
printed in 1839. In the Seneca language, 
St Luke, by Harris, was printed in 1829, 
and the Four Gospels, by Asher Wright, 
in 1874. In the Cherokee language St 
Matthew’s Gospel was translated by 
S. A. Worcester and printed in 1829, the 
other Gospels and the Epistles following, 
until the complete New Testament was 
issued in 1860. Genesis and Exodus, 
also by Worcester, were printed in 1856 
and 1853, respectively, besides some por¬ 
tions of the Psalms, Proverbs, and Isaiah. 

The two languages of the Muskhogean 
family that come into our record are the 
Choctaw and the Creek. In Choctaw, 
three of the Gospels, translated by Al- 


BULL. 30] 


BICAM-BIDAI 


145 


fred Wright, were printed as early as 
1831, and the complete New Testament, 
by Wright and Byington, in 1848. The 
Pentateuch, the historical books of the Old 
Testament, and the Psalms, by Wright, 
Byington, and Edwards, came out between 
1852 and 1886. In Creek, St John’s Gos¬ 
pel, translated by Davis and Lykins, was 
printed in 1835; another version, by 
Buckner, in 1860; and the whole New 
Testament, by Mrs Robertson and others, 
between 1875 and 1887; and Genesis and 
the Psalms, by the same, in 1893-96. 

Only two languages of the Siouan fam¬ 
ily, the Santee Dakota and the Mandan, 
are represented in scriptural translations. 
Portions of the Bible were translated into 
the former by Renville and printed as 
early as 1839; the whole New Testament, 
by Riggs and others, was published in 
1865; the Old Testament, by Williamson 
and Riggs, was finished in 1877; and a re¬ 
vised edition of the complete Bible was 
issued in 1880. A small volume of 
hymns and scriptural selections, trans¬ 
lated into Mandan by Rev. C. F. Hall, 
was published in 1905. 

The Caddoan language is represented 
by a small volume of Bible translations 
and hymns in Arikara, by Rev. C. F. 
Hall (1900; 2ded., enlarged, 1905). 

In the Nez Perce language, of the Sha- 
haptian family, St Matthew’s Gospel, by 
Spalding, was twice printed (in 1845 and 
1871); and St John, by Ainslie, appeared 
in 1876. In the Kwakiutl language, of 
the Wakashan family, A. J. Hall’s trans¬ 
lation of the Gospels of St Matthew and 
St John came out in 1882-84 and the Acts 
in 1897. In the Tsimshian language, of 
the Chimmesyan family, the Four Gos¬ 
pels, translated by William Duncan, were 
printed in 1885—89; and in the Niska lan¬ 
guage J. B. McCullagh began work on 
the Gospels in 1894. In the Haida lan¬ 
guage, of the Skittagetan family, trans¬ 
lations of three of the Gospels and of the 
Acts, by Charles Harrison and J. H. Keen, 
were printed in 1891-97. 

Consult the various bibliographies of 
Indian languages, by J. C. Pilling, pub¬ 
lished as bulletins by the Bureau of Amer¬ 
ican Ethnology. See Books in Indian 
languages , Dictionaries , Eliot Bible, Peri¬ 
odicals . (w. e. ) 

Bicam. A Yaqui settlement on the s. 
bank of the lower Rio Yaqui, s. w. Sono¬ 
ra, Mexico, with an estimated population 
of 9,000 in 1849. 

Bicam.—Velasco, Noticias de Sonora, 84, 1850. 
Bican.—Miihlenpfordt quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 608, 1882. Santisima Trinidad Vicam.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 355, 1864 (or Bicam). 

Bichechic. A Tarahumare settlement 
on the headwaters of the Rio Conchos, 
lat. 28° 10 7 , long. 107° 10', Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 
1864. 


Bidai (Caddo for ‘brushwood,’ proba¬ 
bly referring to the peculiar growth char¬ 
acteristic of the region). An extinct tribe, 
supposed to have belonged to the Caddoan 
stock, whose villages were scattered over 
a wide territory, but principally about 
Trinity r., Texas, while some were as far n. 
as the Neches or beyond. A creek empty¬ 
ing into Trinity r. between Walker and 
Madison cos., Tex., bears the name of 
the tribe, as did also, according to La 
Harpe, a small bay on the coast sr. of 
Matagorda bay. A number of geographic 
names derived from this tribe survive in 
the region. The tribal tradition of the 
Bidai is that they were the oldest inhabi¬ 
tants of the country where they dwelt. 
This belief may have strengthened 
tribal pride, for although the Bidai 
were surrounded by tribes belonging 
to the Caddo confederacy, the people 
long kept their independence. They 
were neighbors of the Arkokisa, who 
lived on lower Trinity r. and may have 
been their allies, for according to LaHarpe 
(1721) they were on friendly terms with 
that tribe while they were at war with 
the people dwelling on Matagorda bay. 
During the latter part of the 18th cen¬ 
tury the Bidai were reported to be 
the chief intermediaries between the 
French and the Apache in the trade 
in firearms; later they suffered from 
the political disturbances incident to 
the controversy between the Spaniards 
and the French, as w r ell as from inter¬ 
tribal wars and the introduction of 
new diseases. As a result remnants 
of different villages combined and the 
olden tribal organization was broken up. 
Little is known of their customs and 
beliefs. They lived in fixed habita¬ 
tions, cultivated the soil, hunted the 
buffalo, which ranged through their ter¬ 
ritory, and were said by Sibley in 
1805 to have had “an excellent charac¬ 
ter for honesty and punctuality.” At 
that time they numbered about 100, but 
in 1776-7 an epidemic carried off nearly 
half their number. About the middle 
of the 19th century a remnant of the 
Bidai were living in a small village 12 
m. from Montgomery, Tex., cultivating 
maize, serving as cotton pickers, and 
bearing faithful allegiance to the Texans. 
The women were still skilled in bas¬ 
ketry of “curious designs and great 
variety.” They appear to have re¬ 
mained in Montgomery and Harris cos., 
Texas, until they died out. (a. c. f. ) 

Badies.—Ker, Travels, 122, 1816. Beadeyes.—Ed¬ 
ward, Hist.Tex., 92, 1836. Bedais.—French,Hist. 
Coll. La., II, 11, 1875. Beddies.—Brackenridge, 
ViewsofLa.,81,1815. Bedees.— Ibid., 87. Bedies.— 
Sibley(1805),Hist.Sketches,71,1806. Bidais.—Rob¬ 
in, Voy. Louisiane, in, 14, 1807. Bidaises.—Soc. 
Mex. Geog., 266,1870. Biday.—Doc. of 1719-21 in 
Margry, D6c. VI, 341, 1886. Bidayes.—La Harpe 
(ca. 1721), ibid., 341. Bidias.— Latham in Trans. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-10 


146 


bidamarek 


BIG KETTLE 


[B A. E. 


Philol. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Quasmigdo.— Ker, 
Trav., 122, 1816 (given as their own name). 
Redais.— Foote,Texas, i, 299,1841. Spring Creeks.— 
Ibid Vidaes. —MeziSres (1778) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, I, 661 1886. Vidais.— 
French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 11,1875 Vidays.-Doc. 
503 (1791-92) in Texas State archives. Vivais.— 
Doc. of Aug. 26,1756, ibid. 

Bidamarek. An indefinite division of 
the Pomo of California, the name being 
applied by the Pomo of upper Clear lake 
to the inhabitants of the region w. of them 
on Russian r., as distinguished from the 
Danomarek, or hill people, of the same 
region. Gibbs, in 1851, mentioned the 
Bedahmarek as living with the Shanel- 
kayain a valley apparently at the sourceof 
the e. fork of Russian r.; and McKee, in 
the same year, gave the Medamarec, said 
to number 150, as inhabiting with the 
Chanetkai the hills dividing the Waters 
of Clear lake from Eel (sic) r. (a. l. k. ) 

Bedah-marek.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 109,1853. Me-dama-rec.— McKee (1851) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,32d Cong., spec, sess., 136,1853. 

Big Bill. A Paiute chief. He led the 
Indians who aided the notorious Mormon 
John D. Lee in the Mountain Meadow 
massacre in s. w. Utah on Sept. 11, 1857. 


Big Canoe. A Kalispel war chief who 
acquired considerable notoriety as a 
leader in battle. He was born in 1799 
and died in 1882 at the Flathead agency, 
Mont. (c.t.) 

Big Chief. An Osage village 4 m. from 
the Mission in Ind. T. in 1850; pop. 300. 

Big-chief.—Smet, West. Missions, 355,1863. 

Big Cypress Swamp. A Seminole set¬ 
tlement, with 73 inhabitants in 1880, sit¬ 
uated in the “Devil’s Garden” on the n. 
edge of Big Cypress swamp, 15 to 20 m. 
s. w. of L. Okeechobee, Monroe co., 
Fla.—MacCauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
478, 1887. 

Big Foot (Si-tanka). A Hunkpapa 
Sioux chief, of the Cheyenne River res., 
S. Dak., leader of the band of about 300 
men, women, and children who fled from 
the reservation after the killing of Sitting 
Bull in the autumn of 1890, intending to 
join the hostiles in the Bad-lands. They 
were intercepted by troops on Wounded 
Knee cr. and surrendered, but in at¬ 
tempting to disarm the Indians a conflict 
was precipitated, resulting in an engage¬ 
ment in which almost the entire band, 
including Big Foot, was exterminated, 
Dec. 29, 1890. See Moonev in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896. 

Big Hammock. The most populous 
Seminole settlement in central Florida in 
1821; situated n. of Tampa bay, probably 
in Hillsboro co.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to 
Sec. War, 307,1822. 

Big-island (translation of the native 
name Am&ye'l-e'gwa ). A former Chero¬ 
kee settlement on Little Tennessee r., at 
Big island, a short distance below the 
mouth of the Tellico, in Monroe co., 


Tenn.; not to be confounded with Long- 

island town below Chattanooga.—Mooney 

in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508, 1900. 

Amaye'l-e'gwa. —Mooney, op. cit. Big Island.- 
Royce in 5th Rep. B A. E., map, 1887 Mia a- 
qu0 .—Timberlake, Memoir, map, 1762. nua 
que. —Bartram, Travels, 372,1792. 

Big Jim. The popular name of a noted 
full-blood Shawnee leader, known among 
his people as Wapameepto, ‘Gives light 
as he walks.’ His English name was 
originally Dick Jim, corrupted into Big 
Jim He was born on the Sabine res., 
Texas, in 1834, and in 1872 became chief 
of the Kispicothaband, commonly known 
as Big Jim’s band of Absentee Shawnee. 
Big Jim was of illustrious lineage, his 
grandfather being Tecumseh and his 
fatVipr nnfa of the signers of the S&m 



BIG JIM (SHAWNEE) 

Houston treaty” between the Cherokee 
and affiliated tribes and the Republic of 
Texas, Feb. 23, 1836. He was probably 
the most conservative member of his 
tribe. In the full aboriginal belief that 
the earth was his mother and that she 
must not be wounded by tilling of the 
soil, he refused until the last to receive 
the allotments of land that had been 
forced upon his band in Oklahoma, and 
used every means to overcome the en¬ 
croachments of civilization. For the 
purpose of finding a place where his peo¬ 
ple would be free from molestation, he 
went to Mexico in 1900, and while there 
was stricken with smallpox in August, 
and died. He was succeeded by his only 
son, Tonomo, who is now (1905) about 
30 years of age. 

Big Kettle. See Sonojowauga. 





BULL. 30] 


BIG MOUTH-BILOXI 


147 


Big Mouth. A chief of the Brul6 Sioux, 
though an Oglala by descent. A contem¬ 
porary of Spotted Tail, and as highly re¬ 
garded by his tribe for his manly and 
warlike qualities as the latter, though of 
less historical note. He is spoken of 
(Ind. Aff. Rep., 316, 1869) as one of the 
principal chiefs at Whetstone agency on 
the Missouri, where most of the Brule 
and Oglala bands had gathered. The 
stand taken by Big Mouth in reference to 
the relations of the Sioux with the whites 
caused him to gain steadily in influence 
and power. Spotted Tail, having visited 
Washington and other cities, where he 
was much feted, returned with changed 
views as to the Indian policy, a fact 
seized upon by Big Mouth to disparage his 
rival. Realizing that the tide was turn¬ 
ing against him, Spotted Tail, in 1873 or 
1874, called at the lodgeof Big Mouth, who 
on appearing at the entrance was seized 
by tw r o warriors and held by them while 
Spotted Tail shot him dead. (c. t. ) 

Big-mush. A noted western Cherokee, 
known to the whites also as Hard-mush 
and among his people as GatuiVwa'li 
(‘ bread made into balls or lumps ’), killed 
by the Texans in 1839.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1900. See Bowl. 

Big Neck. See Mocinahonga. 

Big Bock. A point on Shiawassee r., 
in lower Michigan, at which in 1820 the 
Chippewa had a reservation.—Saginaw 
treaty (1820) in U. S. Ind. Treaties, 142, 
1873. 

Big Swamp Indians. A name applied 
to Seminole, principally of the Mikasuki 
division, near Miccosukee lake, Leon co., 
Fla.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
ii, 157, 1854. 

Long Swamp Indians. —Ibid. 

Big Tree. See Adoeette. 

Big White. See ShahaJca. 

Bihi Konlo. One of the 5 hamlets com¬ 
posing the Choctaw town of Imongal- 
asha.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
vi, 432, 1902. 

Biktasatetuse (‘very bad lodges’: a 
Crow name). A subtribe or band of the 
Crows or of some neighboring tribe; ap¬ 
parently the same as Ashiapkawi. 

A-shi-ap'-ka-wi.— Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Val., 402, 1862. Bik-ta'-sa-te-tu'-se.— Ibid. 

Biloxi (a Muskhogean corruption of 
Taneks, their own name). . A small 
Siouan tribe formerly living in s. Mis¬ 
sissippi, now nearly or quite extinct. 
The Biloxi were supposed to belong to 
the Muskhogean stock until Gatschet vis¬ 
ited the survivors of the tribe in Louisi¬ 
ana in 1886 and found that many of the 
words bore strong resemblance to those in 
Siouan languages, a determination fully 
substantiated in 1882 by J. Owen Dorsey. 
To what particular group of the Siouan 
family the tribe is to be assigned has not 


been determined; but it is probable that 
the closest affinity is with Dorsey’sDhegi- 
ha group, so called. The first direct notice 
of the Biloxi is that by Iberville, who 
found them in 1699 about Biloxi bay,, on 
the gulf coast of Mississippi, in connection 
with two other small tribes, the Paska- 
gula and Moctobi, the three together 
numbering only about 20 cabins (Margry, 
Dec., iv, 195, 1880). The Biloxi removed 
to the w. shore of Mobile bay in 1702. 
In 1761 Jefferys spoke of them as having 
been n. e. of Cat id., and of their subse¬ 
quent removal to the n. w. of Pearl r. 
Hutchins, in 1784, mentions a Biloxi vil¬ 
lage on the w. side of the Mississippi, a 
little below the Paskagula, containing 
30 warriors. According to Sibley (1805) 
a part of the Biloxi came with some 
French, from near Pensacola, about 1763, 
and settled first in Avoyelles parish, La., 
on Red r., whence they “moved higher 
up to Rapide Bayou, and from thence to 
the mouth of Rigula de Bondieu, a divi¬ 
sion of Red r., about 40 m. below Natehi- 
toch, where they now live, and are reduced 
to about 30 in number. ’ ’ Berguin-Duval- 
lon (1806) mentions them as in two vil¬ 
lages, one on Red r., 19 leagues from the 
Mississippi, the other on a lake called 
Avoyelles. He also refers to some as being 
wanderers on Crocodile bayou. School¬ 
craft said they numbered 55 in 1825. In 
1828 (Bui. Soc. Mex. Geog., 1870) there 
were 20 families of the tribe on the e. bank 
of Neches r., Tex. Porter, in 1829 (School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 596), gave the num¬ 
ber as 65 living with the Caddo, Paska¬ 
gula, and other small tribes on Red r., 
near the Texas frontier, and in 1846 But¬ 
ler and Lewis found a Biloxi camp on 
Little r., a tributary of the Brazos in 
Texas, about two days’ journey from the 
latter stream. After this little was heard 
of them until 1886. According to Gat¬ 
schet there were in that year a few Biloxi 
among the Choctaw and Caddo, but he 
visited only those in Avoyelles parish, 
La. In 1892 Dorsey found about a dozen 
of the tribe near Lecompte, Rapides 
parish, La., but none remained at Avo¬ 
yelles. From the terms they used and 
information obtained Dorsey concluded 
that prior to the coming of the w r hites the 
men wore the breech cloth, a belt, leggings, 
moccasins, and garters, and wrapped 
around the body a skin robe. Feather 
headdresses and necklaces of bone, and 
of the bills of a long-legged redbird (fla¬ 
mingo?) were worn, as also were nose¬ 
rings and earrings. The dwellings of the 
people resembled those found among the 
northern tribes of the same family, one 
kind similar to the low tent of the Osage 
and Winnebago, the other like the high 
tent of the Dakota, Omaha, and others. 
It is said they formerly made pottery. 


148 


BIORKA-BIRD-STONES 


[b. a. e. 


They made wooden bowls, horn and bone 
implements, and baskets. Tattooing was 
practised to a limited extent. Descent 
was through the female line, and there 
was an elaborate system of kinship. The 
charge of cannibalism was made against 
them by one or two other tribes; this, 
however, is probably incorrect. Dor¬ 
sey recorded the following clan names: 
Itaanyadi, Ontianyadi, and Nakhotod- 
hanyadi. See Dorsey in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
xlii', 267,1893; Mooney, Siouan Tribes of 
the East, Bull. 22, B. A. E., 1894; McGee 
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897, and the au¬ 
thorities cited below. 

Ananis.— Doe. of 1699 in French, Hist. Coll., II, 99, 
1875. Anaxis.— Margry. D6c., IV, 113, 1880. An- 
nocchy.— Iberville (1699) in Margry, D6c., IV, 172. 
1880. Baluxa. —Brown, West. Gazett., 133, 1817, 
Baluxie.— Woodward, Remin., 25,1859. Belochy. — 
Neill, Hist. Minn., 173, 1858. Belocse.— Bull. Soc. 
Mex. Geog., 267, 1870. Beloxi.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 72, 
20th Cong., 104, 1829. Beluxis.— Doc. of 1764 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 641, 1856. Beluxy.— 
Biog. and Hist. Mem. N. W. La., 526, 1890. 
Bilexes.— Berquin-Duvallon, Trav. in La., 97, 
1806. Billoxie, —Ex. Doc. 21, 18th Cong., 2d 
sess., 5, 1825. Billoxis.— Butel-Dumont, Louisi- 
ane, i, 134, 1753. Bilocchi.— Gravier (1701) in 
French, Hist. Coll., ii, 88, 1875. Bilocchy.— Iber¬ 
ville (1699) in Margry, D6c., iv, 172, 1880. Bil- 
0 CC i. —Ibid.,473. Biloccis. —Ibid. Bilochy, —Ibid. 
184. Bilocohi. —Coxe, Carolana, 31, 1741. Bilo- 
cohy.— Ibid., 30. Biloui.— Berquin-D u v al 1 on , 
Trav. in La., 91, 1806. Biloxi. —Sauvole (1700) in 
Margry, D6c., iv, 451, 1880. Biloxis. —Penicaut 
(1699) in French, Hist. Coll., n. s., 38, 1869. Bil- 
oxy.— Iberville(1700) in Margry, D6c., iv, 425,1880. 
Bilusi.— Michler in Rep. Sec. War, 32, 1850. Bil- 
uxi. —Michler (1849) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 67, 31st 
Cong., 1st sess., 5,1850. Binuxsh. —Gatschet, Caddo 
and Yatassi MS., B. A. E., 66 (Caddo name). 
Binu'xshi. —Ibid., 73. Blu'-kci. —Dorsey, inf’n, 
1881 (Caddo name). B’luksi. —Gatschet, MS., 
B. A. E., 1886 (Choctaw name). Bolixes. —Parker 
(1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 702,1855. Bo- 
lixies.— Schoolcraft, ibid., iv, 561,1854. Boluxas. — 
Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 80, 1806. Boluxes. —Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., 503, 1878. Boluxie. —But¬ 
ler and Lewis (1846) in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 
2d sess., 3, 1847. Boluxies. —Bonnell, Texas, 140, 
1840. Paluxies.— Parker (1854) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 702, 1855. Baluxsies. —Parker, Un¬ 
explored Texas, 221,1856. Poluksalgi.— Gatschet, 
Creek MS., B. A. E. (Creek name). Poutoucsis. — 
Berquin-Duvallon, Trav. in La., 94, 1806 (mis¬ 
print). Taneksay n a. — Llorseyin Proc. A. A. A. S., 
xlii , 267, 1893 (ow T n name; varients are Tanlks 
amjadi , Tanlks ham/adi, ‘ first people ’). 

Biorka (Swed.: Bjork 6. = Birch id.). 
An Aleut village on Biorka id. near Una- 
laska, Alaska. Pop. 44 in 1831, 140 in 
1880, 57 in 1890. 

Borka.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 20, 1884. 
Saydankooskoi. —Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 
1875 (from Siginak, written “Sithanak” by Sauer, 
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 190i; Aleut 
name of the island, sig. ‘curled’). Sedankov- 
skoe.— Veniaminof, Zapiski, ii, 203, 1840. Sida- 
nak. —Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 1855. Si- 
dankin. —Sauer quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1901. TJgiu-ug.—Veniaminof quoted by 
Baker, ibid, (own name). 

Birch River. A local name applied to 
the Maskegon (Swampy Cree) res., near 
lower Saskatchewan r., Saskatchewan, 
Canada, and to the Indians gathered on 
it.—Can. Ind. Aff., passim. 

Bird-stones. A name given to a class of 
prehistoric stone objects of undetermined 


purpose, usually resembling or remotely 
suggesting the form of a bird. In many 
cases the resemblance is so slight that 
without the aid of a series of specimens, 
grading downward from the more real¬ 
istic bird representations through succes¬ 
sive simplifications, the life form would 
not be suggested. In its simplest form 
the body is an almost featureless bar 
of polished stone. Again, the ends are 
curved upward, giving a saddle shape; but 
usually the head, tail, and eyes are differ¬ 
entiated, and in 
the more graphic 
forms the tail is 
expanded and 
turned upward 
to balance the 
head. The most 
remarkable fea¬ 
ture is the pair of 
projecting knobs, 
often on rather 
slender stems, 
representing the 
eyes, giving some¬ 
what the effect of 
a horned animal. 

These objects are 
most plentiful in 
the Ohio valley 
and around the 
great lakes, and 
occur sparingly in 
the S. and to the 
westward beyond 
the Mississippi. 

Although many 
kinds of stone 
were used in their 
manufacture, the 
favorite material 
was a banded 
slate which oc¬ 
curs over a wide 
area in the North¬ 
ern states and in 
Canada. The 







l 


f 

bihd-shaped Stones, a , Epidote; 
Ohio (i-s). b , Banded Slate; 
New York (1-4). c, Banded 

Slate; Pennsylvania, d , Argil¬ 
lite; Ohio (1-4). e, banded 

Slate; Ontario (1 -3). /, Bar¬ 

like Form; Banded Slate; Ohio 
(i-s) 


are shaped wit 
much care, being 
symmetrical and 
highly polished. 

The under side is flat or slightly concave, 
and there are two perforations at the ex¬ 
tremities of the base intended to serve in 
attaching the figure to the surface of some 
object, as a tablet, a pipe stem, a flute, ora 
staff or baton, or to some part of the cos¬ 
tume, or to the hair. There is good reason 
to believe that these and the various re¬ 
lated objects—banner stones, boat-stones, 
etc.—had kindred uses in religious cere¬ 
mony or magic (see Problematical objects). 
Gillman (Smithson Rep. 1873, 1874) was 
informed by an aged Chippewa “that in 
olden time these ornaments were worn on 
the heads of Indian women, but only after 











BULL. 30] 


BIRDWOMAN 


BLACKBIRD 


149 


marriage,” and suggests that the bird- 
stones may have symbolized the brooding 
bird. Abbott (Primitive Industry, 370) 
published a statement originating with Dr 
E. Stirling, of Cleveland, Ohio, that “such 
bird effigies, made of wood, have been no¬ 
ticed among the Ottawa of Grand Trav¬ 
erse bay, Mich., fastened to the top of 
the heads of women as an indication that 
they are pregnant.” The probability, 
however, is that these bird-stones were 
used or worn by the men rather than by 
the women, and Cushing’s theory that 
they were attached to a plate and fixed to 
the hair is plausible. 

See Abbott, Primitive Industry, 1881; 
Beauchamp in Bull. N. Y. State Mus., 
1897; Boyle in Rep. Minister of Educa¬ 
tion, Ontario, 1895; Fowke (1) in 13th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896, (2) Archaeol. Hist. 
Ohio, 1902; Gillman in Rep. Smithson. 
Inst. 1873, 1874; Moorehead, (1) Bird- 
stone Ceremonial, 1899; (2) Prehist. 
Impls., 1900, (3) in Am. Anthrop., n, 
1900; Rau in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 1876; 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-vi, 1851-56; 
Squier and Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 
1848. (w. h. h.) 

Birdwoman. See Sacagmvea. 

Bis. A Chumashan village w. of Pue¬ 
blo de las Canoas (San Buenaventura), 
Ventura co., Cal., in 1542.—Cabrillo 
(1542) in Smith, Col. Docs. Fla., 181,1857. 

Bisani. A Pima settlement 8 leagues s. 
w. of Caborca, in the present Sonora, 
Mexico, of which it was a visita in Span¬ 
ish colonial times. Pop. 178 in 1730. 

Bisani.— RudoEnsayo(1762), 152,1863. JesusMarxa 
Basani. —Doc.of 1730 quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. 
States, I, 514, 1886. 

Bishkon. One of the towns forming 
the noted “Sixtowns” of the Choctaw, 
situated a few miles from the present 
Garlandsville, in the n. part of Jasper 
co., Miss. 

Bishkon.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 109,1884. 
Bishkun Tamaha.— Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
I, 382,1901. 

Bissarhar (‘Indians with many bri¬ 
dles ’). A division of the Apache under 
chiefs Goodegoya and Santos in 1873- 
75.—White, Apache Names of Indian 
Tribes, MS., B. A. E. 

Bissasha ( Bissa-cisha , ‘blackberries are 
ripe there). A former Choctaw town on 
the w. side of Little Rock cr., Newton 
co., Ga. Judging from the stone imple¬ 
ments and other debris lying scattered 
over its site, the town covered an area of 
about 10 acres, making it a rather small 
town as Choctaw towns were generally 
built.—Brown in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
vi, 442, 1902. 

Bishapa.— Romans, Florida, map, 1772 (probably 
identical). 

Bistchonigottine. A division of the 
Etchaottine on Bistcho lake, Mackenzie 
Ter., Canada. 


Bes-tchonhi-Gottine. —Petitot, Autour du Lac des 
Esclaves, 339,1891. 

Bithahotshi (Navaho: ‘red place on 
top,’ referring to the color of the sand¬ 
stone rocks; the second h = German ch.) 
The name of a mesa, and, by extension, 
of a valley in which a trading store is 
situated, about half-way between Hol¬ 
brook and the Hopi villages in n. e. Ari¬ 
zona. The name is sometimes employed 
to designate a group of ancient pueblo 
ruins in and near the valley. 
Biddahoochee.— Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 
326, 1903. Bitahotsi. —Matthews, Navaho Le¬ 
gends, 153, 1897 (correct Navaho name: < = th, 
h = German ch, s = sh). 

Bithani (‘folded arms’). A Navaho 
clan. 

Bifa'ni. —Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
103,1890(f=th). Bita'ni,—Matthews., Navaho Leg¬ 
ends, 30, 1897 (t=th). 

Bitumen. See Boats, Cement. 

Black Beaver. A Delaware guide, born 
at the present site of Belleville, Ill., in 
1806; died at Anadarko, Okla., May 8, 
1880. He was present as interpreter at 



BLACK BEAVER (DELAWARE) 


the earliest conference with the Co¬ 
manche, Kiowa, and Wichita tribes, held 
by Col. Richard Dodge on upper Red r. in 
1834, and from then until the close of his 
days his services were constantly required 
by the Government and were invaluable 
to military and scientific explorers of the 
plains and the Rocky mts. In nearly ev¬ 
ery one of the early transcontinental ex¬ 
peditions he was the most intelligent and 
most trusted guide and scout. 

Blackbird. A Chippewa village, com¬ 
monly known as Black Bird’s town from 




150 


BLACKBIRD-BLACK HAWK 


[ B. A. B. 


a chief of that name, which formerly 
existed on Tittibawassee r., Saginaw co., 
lower Michigan, on a reservation sold in 
1837. (j.m.) 

Blackbird (Mukatapenaise). A Pota- 
watomi chief who lived in the early part 
of the 19th century. He was conspicuous 
at the massacre of the garrison at Ft 
Dearborn, Chicago, in Aug., 1812. 

Black Bob. The chief of a Shawnee 
band, originally a part of the Hatha- 
wekela division of the Shawnee, q. v. 
About the year 1826 they separated from 
their kindred, then living in e. Missouri 
on land granted to them about 1793 by 
Baron Carondelet, near Cape Girardeau, 
then in Spanish territory, and removed 
to Kansas, where, by treaty with their 
chief, Black Bob, in 1854, they were given 
rights on the Shawnee res. in that state. 
Under Black Bob’s leadership they re¬ 
fused to remove with the rest of the tribe 
to Indian Ter. in 1868, but are now 
incorporated with them, either in the 
Cherokee Nation or with the Absentee 
Shawnee. See Shawnee , and consult 
Halbert in Gulf States Hist. Mag., i, no. 
6,1903. (j.m.) 

Black Dog. An Osage village, named 
from its chief, 60 m. from the Mission, in 
Indian Ter., in 1850; pop. 400.— Smet, 
West. Miss, and Missionaries, 355, 1863. 

Black drink (“Carolinatea” ; Catawba 
yaupon; Creek dssi-luputski , ‘small leaves,’ 
commonly abbreviated dm). A decoc¬ 
tion, so named by British traders from 
its color, made by boiling leaves of 
the Ilex cassine in water. It was em¬ 
ployed by the 
tribes of the 
Gulf states and 
adjacent re¬ 
gion as “medi¬ 
cine” for cere¬ 
monial purifi- 
fication. It 
was a power¬ 
ful agent for 
the produc¬ 
tion of the 
nervous state 
and disordered imagination necessary to 
“spiritual” power. Hall (Rep.Nat. Mus., 
218, 1885) says that among the Creeks 
the liquid was prepared and drank before 
councils in order, as they believed, to in¬ 
vigorate the mind and body and prepare 
for thought and debate. It was also used 
in the great “ busk ” or annual green-eorn 
thanksgiving. The action of the drink in 
strong infusion is purgative, vomitive, and 
diuretic, and it was long thought that this 
was the only effect, but recent investiga¬ 
tion has shown that the plant contains 
caffeine, the leaves yielding a beverage 
with stimulating qualities like tea and 
coffee, and that excessive indulgence 



Preparing Black Drink, (lafitau, 17*3) 


produces similar nervous disturbance. 
The plant was held in great esteem by the 
southern Indians, and the leaves were 
collected with care and formed an article 
of trade among the tribes (Griffith, Med. 
Bot., 1847). The leaves and tender shoots 
were gathered, dried, roasted, and stored 
in baskets until needed. According to 
Gatschet the Creeks made three potions 
from cassine of differing strength for 
different uses. In its preparation the 
leaves having been roasted in a pot, 
were added to water and boiled. Be¬ 
fore drinking, the Indians agitated the 
tea to make it frothy. Tea made 
from the Ilex cassine is still sometimes 
used by white people in localities where 
the shrub grows. Personal names re¬ 
ferring to the black-drink ceremony 
were very common, especially among 
the Creeks and Seminole. The name 
of Osceola (q. v.), the noted Seminole 
chief, is properly Asi-yahOla, ‘Black- 
drink Singer.’ The drink was called 
dssi-luputski by the Creeks. C. C. 
Jones (Tomochichi, 118, 1868) calls the 
drink “foskey.” See Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., n, 56, 1888, and works 
therein cited; Hale, Ilex Cassine, Bull. 
14, Div. Botany, U. S. Dept. Agricul¬ 
ture, 1891; Speck in Am. Anthr., ix, 292, 
1907. (w. h.) 

Black Fox ( IndU ). A principal chief 
of the Cherokee who, under the treaty 
of Jan. 7, 1806, by which the Cherokee 
ceded nearly 7,000 sq. m. of their lands 
in Tennessee and Alabama, was given a 
life annuity of $100. He was then an old 
man. In 1810, as a member of the na¬ 
tional council of his tribe, he signed an 
enactment formally abolishing the cus¬ 
tom of clan revenge hitherto universal 
among the tribes, thus taking an impor¬ 
tant step toward civilization.—Mooney 
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 87, 1900. 

Black Hawk ( Ma l ‘katawimeshekd i kd a , 
from ma'katdwi ‘it is black, mishi ‘big,’ 
ka‘ka a ‘chest,’ the name referring to the 
description of a bird, or sparrow hawk.— 
W. J.). A subordinate chief of the Sauk 
and Fox Indians and leader in the Black 
Hawk war of 1832. He was born at the 
Sauk village at the mouth of Rock r., Ill., 
in 1767, and belonged to the Thunder 
gens of the Sauk tribe. When only 15 
years of age he distinguished himself in 
war; and before he was 17, at the head 
of a war party of voung men, he attacked 
an Osage camp of 100 persons and came 
away safely with the scalp of a warrior. 
The next party that he led out, however, 
he brought to a deserted village, on ac¬ 
count of which all except 5 of his party 
left him; but with these he kept on and 
brought away 2 scalps with which to 
efface his disgrace. At the age of 19 he 
led 200 Sauk and Foxes in a desperate 



HULL. 30] 


BLACK HAWK 


151 


engagement with an equal number of 
Osage, destroying half of his opponents, 
killing 5 men and a woman with his own 
hands. In a subsequent raid on the 
Cherokee his party killed 28, with a loss 
of but 7; but among the latter was his own 
father, who was guardian of the tribal 
medicine, hence Black Hawk refrained 
from war during the 5 years following 
and endeavored to acquire greater super¬ 
natural power. At the end of that time 
he went against the Osage, destroyed a 
camp of 40 lodges, with the exception of 
2 women, and himself slew 9 persons. 
On a subsequent expedition against the 
Cherokee in revenge for his father’s 
death he found only 5 enemies, 4 men 
and a woman. The latter he carried off, 
but the men he released, deeming it no 
honor to kill so few. 

On the outbreak of the war of 1812 
Black Hawk, with most of his people, 
joined the British and fought for them 
throughout, committing many depreda¬ 
tions on the border settlements. After¬ 
ward, in opposition to the head chief, 
Keokuk, who cultivated American friend¬ 
ship, he was leader of the British sympa¬ 
thizers who traded at Malden in prefer¬ 
ence to St Louis. 

By treaty of Nov. 3, 1804, concluded at 
St Louis, the Sauk and Foxes had agreed 
to surrender all their lands on the e. side 
of the Mississippi, but had been left un¬ 
disturbed until the.country should be 
thrown open to settlement. After the 
conclusion of the war of 1812, however, 
the stream of settlers pushed westward 
once more and began to pour into the 
old Sauk and Fox territory. Keokuk 
and the majority of his people, bowing 
to the inevitable, soon moved across the 
Mississippi into the present Iowa, but 
Black Ilawk declined to leave, maintain¬ 
ing that when he had signed the treaty 
of St Louis he had been deceived re¬ 
garding its terms. At the same time he 
entered into negotiations with the Win¬ 
nebago, Potawatomi, and Kickapoo to 
enlist them in concerted opposition to the 
aggressions of the whites. 

By the spring of 1831 so much friction 
had'taken place between the settlers and 
Indians that Gov. Reynolds, of Illinois, 
was induced to call out the militia. Gen. 
Gaines, desiring to avoid the expense of 
a demonstration, summoned Black Hawk 
and his friends to a convention at Ft 
Armstrong, but a violent scene followed 
and the convention came to nothing. 
On June 15 the militia left their camp at 
Rushville and marched upon Black 
Hawk’s village. Finding that Black 
Hawk and his people had effected their 
escape shortly before, they burned the 
lodges. Immediately afterward Gaines 
demanded that all the hostile warriors 


should present themselves for a peace 
talk, and on June 30 Black Hawk and 27 
of his followers signed a treaty with Gov. 
Reynolds by which they agreed to abstain 
from further hostilities and retire to the 
farther side of the Mississippi. 

During the following winter Black 
Hawk, like his great Shawnee predeces¬ 
sor, Tecumseh, sent emissaries in all 
directions to win various tribes to his 
interest, and is said to have endeavored, 
though unsuccessfully, to destroy the au¬ 
thority of his own head chief, Keokuk, 
or commit him to a war against the 
whites. On Apr. 1,1832, Gen. Atkinson 
received orders to demand from the Sauk 
and Foxes the chief members of a band 
who had massacred some Menominee the 



BLACK HAWK. (AFTER CATLIn) 


year before. Arriving at the rapids of 
Des Moines r. on the 10th, he found that 
Black Hawk had recrossed the Missis¬ 
sippi 4 days previously at the head of a 
band estimated at 2,000, of whom more 
than 500 were warriors. Again the mili¬ 
tia were called out, while Atkinson sent 
word to warn the settlers, and collected 
all the regular troops available. 

Meantime Black Hawk proceeded up 
Rock r., expecting that he would be 
joined by the Winnebago and Potawat¬ 
omi, but only a few small bands re¬ 
sponded. Regiments of militia were by 
this time pushing up in pursuit of him, 
but they were poorly disciplined and 
unused to Indian warfare, while jealousy 
existed among the commanders. Two 
brigades under Isaiah Stillman, which 
had pushed on in close pursuit, were met 
by 3 Indians bearing a nag of truce; but, 
other Indians showing themselves near 
by, treachery was feared, and in the con- 




152 


BLACK HAWK-BLACK KETTLE 


[B. a. e. 


fusion one of the bearers of the flag was 
shot down. A general but disorderly 
pursuit of the remainder ensued, when 
the pursuers were suddenly fallen upon 
by Black Hawk at the head of 40 warriors 
and driven from the field (May 14, 1832) 
in a disgraceful rout. Black Hawk now 
let loose his followers against the frontier 
settlements, many of which were burned 
and their occupants slain, but although 
able to cut off small bands of Indians the 
militia and regulars were for some time 
able to do little in retaliation. On June 
24 Black Hawk made an attack on Ap¬ 
ple River fort, but was repulsed, and 
on the day following defeated Maj. De¬ 
ment’ s battalion, though with heavy loss 
to his own side. On July 21, however, 
while trying to cross to the w. side of 
Wisconsin r. he was overtaken by volun¬ 
teers under Gen. James D. Henry and 
crushingly defeated with a loss of 68 
killed and many more wounded. With 
the remainder of his force he retreated 
to the Mississippi, which he reached at 
the mouth of Bad Axe r., and was about 
to cross when intercepted by the steamer 
Warrior , which shelled his camp. The 
following day, Aug. 3, the pursuing 
troops under Atkinson came up with his 
band and after a desperate struggle 
killed or drove into the river more than 
150, while 40 were captured. Most of 
those who reached the other side were 
subsequently cut off by the Sioux. 
Black Hawk and his principal warrior, 
Nahpope, escaped, however, to the north¬ 
ward, whither they were followed and 
captured by some Winnebago. Black 
Hawk was then sent E. and confined 
for more than a month at Fortress Mon¬ 
roe, Va., when he was taken on tour 
through the principal E. cities, every¬ 
where proving an object of the greatest 
interest. In 1837 he accompanied Keo¬ 
kuk on a second trip to the E., after 
which he settled on Des Moines r. near 
Iowaville, dying there Oct. 3, 1838. His 
remains, which had been placed upon the 
surface of the ground dressed in a mili¬ 
tary uniform presented by Gen. Jackson, 
accompanied by a sword also presented 
by Jackson, a cane given by Henry Clay, 
and medals from Jackson, John Quincy 
Adams, and the city of Boston, were stolen 
in July, 1839, and carried away to St 
Louis, where the body was cleaned and 
the bones sent to Quincy, Ill., for articu¬ 
lation. On protest being made by Gov. 
Lucas of the territory of Iowa, the bones 
were restored, but the sons of Black 
Hawk, being satisfied to let them stay in 
the governor’s office, they remained there 
for some time and were later removed to 
the collections of the Burlington Geolog¬ 
ical and Historical Society, where they 
were destroyed in 1855 when the building 


containing them was burned. See Auto¬ 
biography of Ma-ka-tai-me-she-kia-kiak, 
edited by J. B. Patterson, 1882, a life by 
Snelling, and The Black Hawk War, by 
Frank E. Stevens. (j. R. s.) 

Black Hawk. A village marked on 
Royce’s map (First Rep. B. A. E., 1881) 
about Mount Auburn, Shelby co., Ind., 
on land sold in 1818. Probably a Del¬ 
aware settlement. (j. m.) 

Black Hoof. See Catahecassa. 

Black Indians. Mentioned by Bonte- 
mantel and Van Baerlein 1656 (N, Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., i, 588, 1856). They and 
“the Southern Indians, called Minquas,” 
are spoken of as bringing furs to trade 
with the Dutch on Schuylkill r. Pos¬ 
sibly the Nanticoke, who were said to be 
darker than their neighbors, (j. m.) 

Black Kettle. An Onondaga chief, 
called by the French ChaudHre Noire. 
When in the first French war the gov¬ 
ernor in Montreal sent one of his officers 
with 300 men to attack the Iroquois at 
Niagara, Black Kettle, with 80 warriors, 
gave the invaders a long running fight, 
from which the latter were the chief suf¬ 
ferers, although his force was in the end 
wiped out. In the following season he laid 
waste the French settlements in w. Can¬ 
ada. In 1691 the Iroquois planned the 
destruction of the French settlements and 
trading posts w. of Montreal. Their 
plans were revealed to the French com¬ 
mander by captive Indian women w r ho 
escaped, and after the defeat of the ex¬ 
peditions the French destroyed parties 
that w r ere encamped in their hered¬ 
itary hunting grounds between the 
Ottawa and St Lawrence rs. Black 
Kettle retaliated by killing Indians who 
traded with Montreal and the French 
escort sent to guard them. On July 15, 
1692, he attacked Montreal and carried off 
many prisoners, w r ho were retaken by a 
pursuing party; and in the same season he 
attacked the party of de Lusignan and 
killed the leader. In 1697 he arranged a 
peace w r ith the French, but before it was 
concluded he w T as murdered by some 
Algonkin while hunting near Cattarau¬ 
gus, although he had notified the French 
commander at the fort of the peace ne¬ 
gotiations. 

Black Kettle. A Cheyenne chief and 
famous w r arrior whose village on Sand 
cr., Colo., w r as attacked by a force of 
Colorado militia under Col. Chivington 
in 1864 and a large number of innocent 
men, women, and children massacred 
and their bodies mutilated. Black Kettle 
had come in by direction of Gov. Evans, 
of Colorado, and surrendered to Maj. 
Wynkoop, U. S. A., wdio had promised 
him protection (Ind. Aff. Rep., 1865, and 
Condition of Indian Tribes, Rep. Joint 
Spec. Com., 1865). On Nov. 27, 1868, 


HULL. 30] 


BLACK LEG’S VILLAGE-BLANKETS 


153 


United States troops under command of 
Gen. P. H. Sheridan attacked Black Ket¬ 
tle’s village on the Washita, and de¬ 
stroyed it, Black Kettle being killed in 
the fight. He was a brother of Gentle 
Horse. (g. b. g.) 

Black Leg’s Village. A former Iroquois 
settlement, situated on the n. bank of 
Conemaugh r., in s. e. Armstrong co., 
Pa.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
clx, 1900. 

Black Lodges. According to Grinnell 
(Soc. Org. Cheyennes, 144, 1905), a local 
designation for a part of the Northern 
Cheyenne. 

Black Muscogees. A term applied to 40 
to 60 Indians at Parras, Coahuila, Mexico, 
at the close of 1861. To what particular 
branch of the Creeks these refugees be¬ 
longed is not known.—Rep. Mex. Bndy. 
Comm., 410, 1873. 

Blacksnake ( Thaonawyuthe , ‘needle or 
awl breaker ’). A chief, about the close 
of the 18th century, of the Seneca Indians, 
who lived on their reservation along the 
Alleghany r. in Cattaraugus co., N. Y. 
H is residence was a mile above the vil¬ 
lage of Cold Spring. The date of his 
birth is not known, but is supposed to 
have been about 1760, as it is stated that 
in 1856 he had reached the age of 96 years. 
He was present on the English side at the 
battle of Oriskany, N. Y., in 1777, and it 
is said that he participated in the Wyo¬ 
ming massacre of 1778, but he fought on 
the American side in the battle of Ft 
George, N. Y., Aug. 17, 1813. He died 
in 1859. (c. t.) 

Black-tailed Deers. A Hidatsa band or 
secret order.—Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 143, 1851. 

Black Thunder (also called Makatanan- 
amaki, from ma'kata ‘black,’ nenemekl a 
‘thunder.’—W. J.). A Fox chief. He 
was the patriarch of the tribe when, at a 
council held at Portage, Wis., in July, 
1815, he replied to charges of breach of 
treaties and of hostile intentions, made by 
the American commissioners, with a burst 
of indignant eloquence, claiming the pro¬ 
tection of the Government for his tribe, 
that, having smoked the peace pipe, had 
remained faithful throughout the war, 
and respect also for their title to ancestral 
lands. He signed the treaty at St Louis 
on Sept. 14, 1815.—Drake, Bk. Inds., 631, 
1880. 

Black Tiger. A Dakota band of 22 
lodges, named from its chief; one of the 
bands not brought into Ft Peck agency 
in 1872.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 96, 4?d Cong., 
3d sess., 15, 1873. 

Black Tortoise. A mythical tribe alleged 
to have lived in the Mississippi valley and 
to have been conquered and driven away 
by the Elk Indians. —Pidgeon, Traditions 
of Decoodah, 162, 1858. 


Blaesedael (Danish: ‘windy valley’). 
An Eskimo village and Danish post on 
Disko bay, w. Greenland, containing 120 
people.—Mrs Peary, Journ., 14, 1893. 

Blanchard’s Fork. By the treaty of Mau¬ 
mee Rapids, in 1819, a part of the Ottawa 
living in Ohio were given a reservation on 
Blanchard’s fork of the Auglaize, in Ohio, 
and became known officially as the Ottawa 
of Blanchard’s Fork. They sold their 
land in 1831 and removed to Kansas, and 
later to Indian Territory, where, with 
some others of the same tribe, they num¬ 
bered 179 in 1904. 

Ottawas of Blanchard’s Creek. —Greenville treaty 
(1795) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 1033, 1873. Ottawas of 
Blanchard’s Fork. —Present official name. 

Blankets. In the popular mind the 
North American Indian is everywhere 
associated with the robe or the blanket. 
The former was the whole hide of a large 
mammal made soft and pliable by much 
dressing; or pelts of foxes, wolves, and 
such creatures were sewed together; or 
bird, rabbit, or other tender skins were 
cut into ribbons, which were twisted or 
woven. The latter were manufactured 
by basketry processes from wool, hair, fur, 
feathers, down, bark, cotton, etc., and 
had many and various functions. They 
were worn like a toga as protection from 
the weather, and, in the best examples, 
were conspicuous in wedding and other 
ceremonies; in the night they were both 
bed and covering; for the home they 
served for hangings, partitions, doors, 
awnings, or sunshades; the women dried 
fruit on them, made vehicles and cradles 
of them for their babies, and receptacles 
for a thousand things and burdens; they 
even then exhausted their patience and 
skill upon them, producing their finest 
art work in weaving and embroidery; 
finally, the blanket became a standard 
of value and a primitive mechanism of 
commerce. 

In s. e. Alaska originated what is popu¬ 
larly called the Chilkat blanket—a mar¬ 
vel of spinning, weaving, fringing, and 
mythic designs. The apparatus for this 
seems inadequate. The woman hangs 
her warp of mountain goat’s wool mixed 
with shredded cedar bast from a horizon¬ 
tal bar. The long ends are made into 
balls and covered with membrane to keep 
them clean. Weft is not even wound on 
a stick for shuttle, nor is there even the 
rudest harness or batten. The details of 
the great mythic design are carefully 
wrought in by the woman in twined 
weaving at the same time that a dainty 
lacework is produced on the selvage. 
The process ends with a long heavy fringe 
from the unused warp. Farther south¬ 
ward on the N. W. coast cedar bast finely 
shredded served for the weaving of soft 
blankets, which were neatly trimmed 
with fur. 


154 


BLANKETS 


[b. a. ft 


The Nez Perc6s and other tribes in the 
Fraser-Columbia area were extremely 
skillful in producing a heavy and taste¬ 
fully decorated blanket in twined weav¬ 
ing from mountain goat’s hair with warp 
of vegetal fiber, and among the Atlan¬ 
tic and Pacific coast tribes generally 
soft barks, wild hemp, rabbit skins, the 
down of birds, and the plumes of feathers 
were put to the same use. Blankets of 
cords wound with feathers were pro¬ 
duced, not only by the Pueblos and cliff- 
dwellers but quite extensively in the E. 
as well as in the N. W. These were all 
woven with the simplest possible appa¬ 
ratus and by purely aboriginal technical 
processes. They were the groundwork 
of great skill and taste and much my¬ 
thology, and were decorated with strips 
of fur, fringes, tassels, pendants, bead- 
work, featherwork, and native money. 
After the advent of the whites the blan¬ 
ket leaped into sudden prominence with 
tribes that had no weaving and had 
previously worn robes, the preparation 
of which was most exhausting. The 
European was not slow in observing a 
widespread want and in supplying the 
demand. When furs became scarcer blan¬ 
kets were in greater demand everywhere 
as articles of trade and standards of value. 
Indeed, in 1831 a home plant was estab¬ 
lished in Buffalo for the manufacture of 
what was called the Mackinaw blanket. 
The delegations visiting Washington dur¬ 
ing the 19th century wore this article 
conspicuously, and in our system of edu¬ 
cating them, those tribes that were. un¬ 
willing to adopt modern dress were called 
“ blanket Indians.” In art the drapery 
and colors have had a fascination for 
portrait painters, while in citizen’s gar¬ 
ments the red man ceases to be pictur¬ 
esque. 

In the S. W. the coming of Spaniards 
had a still more romantic association with 
the blanket. Perhaps as early as the 
16th century the Navaho, in affiliation 
with certain Pueblo tribes, received sheep 
and looms from the conquerors. These 
were the promise of all that is wrapped 
in the words “Navaho blanket.” The 
yarn for the finest was procured by un¬ 
raveling the Spanish bay eta, a sort of 
baize, and the specimens from this ma¬ 
terial now command high prices. For 
coarser work the Navaho sheared their 
own sheep, washed the wool, colored it 
with their native dyes, and spun it on 
rude spindles consisting of a straight 
stick with a flat disk of wood for a fly¬ 
wheel. This coarse and uneven yarn 
was set up in their regular but primitive 
loom, with harness for shifting the warp, 
a straight rod for shuttle, a fork of wood 
for adjusting the weft, and a separate 
batten of the same material for beating it 


home. Only the hands of the weavei 
managed all the parts of the operation 
with phenomenal patience and skill, pro- 
during those marvelous creations which 
are guarded among the most precious 
treasures of aboriginal workmanship. 
The popularity of this work proved its 
worst enemy. Through the influence of 
traders and greatly increased demands 
for blankets the art has deteriorated. 
Native products were imitated by ma¬ 
chinery. To the Indians were brought 
modern dyes, cotton warp, factory yarns 
and worsted, and utterly depraved pat¬ 
terns, in place of native wool, bayeta, 
and their own designs so full of pathos 
and beauty.' At present a reformation in 
such matters is being encouraged, both 
by the Government and by benevolent 
organizations, for the purpose of restoring 
the old art. In this connection should 
be mentioned the interesting variety of 
effects produced in the Indian blankets 
by simple native contrivances. There 
are all the technical styles of native hand¬ 
work superadded to the machine work 
of the loom, including coiled, twined, and 
braided technic. Two-faced fabrics are 
produced, having intricate patterns en¬ 
tirely different on the two sides. Differ¬ 
ent Pueblos had their fancies in blankets. 
Among these must not be overlooked the 
white cotton wedding blanket of the Hopi, 
ceremonially woven by the groom for his 
bride, afterward embroidered with sym¬ 
bolic designs, and at death wrapped about 
her body in preparation for the last rites. 
In the same tribe large embroidered 
cotton blankets are worn by woman im¬ 
personators in several ceremonies; also a 
small shoulder blanket in white, dark 
blue, and red, forming part of woman’s 
“full dress” as well as a ceremonial gar¬ 
ment. From this list should not be 
omitted the great variety of Navaho prod¬ 
ucts, commencing with the cheap and 
ubiquitous saddle paddings, personal 
wrappings, house furnishings, and ending 
in competitions with the world’s artistry. 
There were also the dark embroidered 
and white embroidered blanket of Na¬ 
vaho legend. They also wove blankets 
with broad bars of white and black 
called “chief’s pattern,” to be worn by 
the head-men. The Zuni, too, wove a 
blanket for their priest-chiefs. But they, 
as well as the Hopi, had plenty of the 
serviceable kinds, of cotton and of wool, 
which they made into skirts and tunics; 
coarse kinds likewise for domestic use, 
robes of rabbit skin, and finer work for 
ceremony. The Pima and Maricopa have 
abandoned the art lately, but their con¬ 
geners—the Yaqui, Tarahumare, Mayo, 
and Opata—weave characteristic styles. 

Consult Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 
1897; Hodge in Am. Anthrop., vm, no. 


DULL. 30] 


BLEWMOUJHS—BOALKEA 


155 


3, 1895; Holmes in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896; Matthews (1) in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 
1884, (2) Navaho Legends, 1897; Pepper- 
in Everybody’s Mag., Jan. 1902; Stephen 
in Am. Anthrop., vi, no. 4, 1893; Voth 
in Am. Anthrop., n, no. 2, 1900. See 
Adornment , Clothing , Dyes and Pigments , 
Receptacles , Weaving, (o. t. m. w. h.) 

Blewmouths. Mentioned in a Georgia 
tract of 1740 (Force Tracts, i, 3, 1836) ap¬ 
parently as a tribe w. of the Choctaw. 
“According to the French Indians [Choc¬ 
taw] there is a large city where a blue- 
lipped people live, of whom they have 
often heard it said that if any one tries to 
kill them he becomes insane” (Brinton, 
Nat. Leg. Chahta-Muskokee Tribes, 10, 
1870). Nothing further isknown of them. 

Bloody Knife. A famous Arikara war¬ 
rior and chief, who was long in the Gov¬ 
ernment service. His father was a Hunk- 
papa Sioux and his mother an Arikara. 
He was born on the Hunkpapa res., 
N. Dak., but as he approached manhood 
his mother determined to return to her 
people and he accompanied her. Prior 
to the building of the Northern Pacific 
R. R. the mail for Ft Stevenson, N. Dak., 
and other Missouri r. points, was carried 
overland from Ft Totten. The high 
country e. of the Missouri was at that time 
a hunting ground for hostile Sioux who 
had been driven w. from Minnesota 
after the massacre of 1862, and so often 
were the mail carriers on this route killed 
that it became difficult to find anyone to 
carry the mails. Bloody Knife under¬ 
took the task, and traversing the country 
with Indian caution almost always got 
the mail through on time. Soon after 
the establishment of Ft Abraham Lin¬ 
coln, N. Dak., a number of Arikara scouts 
were engaged for service at the post, and 
of these Bloody Knife was the chief. He 
was with Gen. Stanley on the Yellow¬ 
stone expedition of 1873 and took part 
in the fighting of that trip; he also accom¬ 
panied Custer to the Black-hills in 1874, 
and was one of the scouts with Custer and 
Terry’s expedition in 1876. On the day 
of the Custer fight he was with the other 
scouts with Reno’s command, took part 
in the effort made by them to check the 
Indians who were charging Reno’s force 
while crossing Reno cr., and was killed 
there, fighting bravely. (g. b. g:) 

Blount Indians. A Seminole band, num¬ 
bering 43, under John Blunt, or Blount, 
for whom a reserve, 2 by 4 m. on Apa¬ 
lachicola r., Fla., was established in 1823 
by the Moultrie Creek treaty (U. S. Ind. 
Treaties, 307,1837). They went to lower 
Chattahoochee r., Ala., before the Semi¬ 
nole war of 1835-42, and after it removed 
with the Alibamu to Polk co., Tex., where 
28 of them survived in 1870 (Ind. Aff. 
Rep,, 327* 1870). 


Blunt Indians.—Ibid. 

Blowgun. A dart-shooting weapon, con¬ 
sisting of a long tube of cane or wood from 
which little darts are discharged by blow¬ 
ing with the mouth. The darts are slen¬ 
der splints or weed stems, pointed at one 
end and wrapped at the butt with cotton, 
thistle down, or other soft material. This 
implement was common in the more 
southerly parts of the United States, the 
habitat of the fishing cane of which it 
was made. The Cherokee, Iroquois, and 
Muskhogean tribes made use of it. In 



PORTION OF CANE BLOWGUN AND THISTLE-DOWN DART; 
CHEROKEE 


the National Museum is an example from 
Louisiana made of four cane stems lashed 
together side by side. The Cherokee, 
who call the little darts by the same 
name as that of the thistle, gather the 
heads of thistles at the proper season and 
pack them together in the form of a wheel 
which they hang in their houses to be 
made into darts (Mooney). The north¬ 
ern Iroquois substituted elder stalks for 
cane (Hewitt). The Hopi, in certain 
ceremonies, blow feathers to the cardinal 
points through tubes of cane (Fewkes). 

(O. T. M. ) 

Bluejacket ( Weyapiersenwah) . An in¬ 
fluential Shawnee chief, born probably 
about'the middle of the 18th century. 
He was noted chiefly as the principal 
leader of the Indian forces in the battle 
with Gen. Wayne of Aug. 20, 1794, at 
Presque Isle, Ohio. In the fight with Gen. 
Harmer in 1790 he was associated in 
command with Little Turtle, but in the 
battle with Wayne Bluejacket assumed 
chief control, as Little Turtle w T as opposed 
to further warring and urged the accept¬ 
ance of the offers of peace, but was over¬ 
ruled by Bluejacket. After the defeat of 
the Indians, Bluejacket was present at 
the conference at Greenville, Ohio, and 
signed the treaty of 1795 made with Wayne 
at that place. He also signed the treaty 
of Ft Industry, Ohio, July 4,1805. It is 
probable that he died soon after this 
date, as there is no further notice of him. 
Later descendants of the same name con¬ 
tinue to be influential leaders in the tribe 
in the W. (c. t.) 

Boalkea. A Porno village, speaking the 
northern dialect, in Scott valley, w. of up¬ 
per Clear lake, Cal. Gibbs, in 1851, gave 
them, under the name Moalkai, as one 
of the Clear lake groups, w. of the lake, 
with a population of 45. (a. l. k. ) 

Moal-kai.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 109,1853. 






156 


BOARD OF INDIAN COMMISSIONERS-BOATS 


[b. a. e. 


Board of Indian Commissioners. See 

United States Board of Indian Commission¬ 
ers. 

Boat Harbor. A Micmac village near 
Pietou, Nova Scotia.—Can. Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1880, 46, 1881. 

Boats. Under this general term are 
included various kinds of water craft used 
throughout North America wherever 
waters favored. The Eskimo have two 
forms—the man’s boat ( lzaiak , Russian 
baidarka) and the woman’s boat ( umiak , 
Russian baidarra) —made by stretching 
a covering of seal hide over a framework 
of whale ribs or of driftwood. The 



ESKIMO KAIAK. (MURDOCH) 


umiak, or woman’s boat, is an open scow 
with little modification of bow and stern, 
propelled with large oars and a sail made 
of intestines; but the man’s boat is one 
of the most effective devices for water 
travel in the world. The man sits in a 
small hatch, and, in the lighter forms, 
when his water-tight jacket is lashed to 
the gunwale he is practically shut in, so 
that though the water may pass entirely 
over him, scarcely a drop enters the craft. 
He moves himself through the water by 



ESKIMO UMIAK. ("TURNER) 


means of a paddle, in most cases a double 
one. 

Immediately in touch with the skin- 
boat countries all around the Arctic, from 
Labrador to Kodiak in Alaska and south¬ 
ward to the line of the white birch, east¬ 
ward of the Rocky mts., and including the 
country of the great lakes, existed the 
birch-bark canoe. With framework of 
light spruce wood, the covering or sheath¬ 
ing of bits of tough bark sewed together 



HUDSON BAY BIRCH-BARK CANOE. (TURNER) 


and made water-tight by means of melted 
pitch, these boats are interesting subjects 
of study, as the exigencies of travel and 
portage, the quality of the material, and 
traditional ideas produce different forms 


in different areas. Near the mouth of the 
Yukon, where the water is sometimes tur¬ 
bulent, the canoe is pointed at both ends 
and partly decked over. On the e. side of 



CHIPPEWA DUGOUT. (hOFFMAn) 


Canada the bow and the stern of the 
canoe are greatly rounded up. A curious 
form has been reported by travelers 
among the 'Beothuk of Newfoundland. 
On the Kootenai, and all over the pla¬ 
teaus of British Columbia and n. Wash¬ 
ington, the Asiatic form, monitor-shaped, 
pointed at either end under the water, is 
made from pine bark instead of birch 
bark. 

From the n. boundary of the United 
States, at least from the streams empty - 



TLINGIT DUGOUT WITH PAINTED DESIGNS. (swan) 


ing into the St Lawrence southward 
along the Atlantic slope, dugout canoes, 
or pirogues, were the instruments of navi¬ 
gation. On the Missouri r. and elsewhere 
a small tub-shaped craft of willow frame 
covered with rawhide, with no division 
of bow or stern, locally known as the bull- 
boat, was used by Sioux, Mandan, An¬ 
kara, and Hidatsa women for carrying 
their goods down or across the rivers. It 
was so light that when one was emptied a 



BALSA OF TULE GRASS, PYRAMID LAKE, NEVADA. (POWERS) 


woman could take it on her back and make 
her way across the land. On the w. coast, 
from MtSt Elias southward to Eel r., Cal., 
excellent dugout canoes were made from 
giant cedar and other light woods, some 
of them nearly 100 ft. long. The multi¬ 
tude of islands off the n. coast rendered 
it possible for the natives to pass from 
one to the other, and thus they were in¬ 
duced to invent seagoing canoes of fine 
quality. Here also from tribe to tribe 
the forms differ somewhat as to the shape 
of the bow and stern and the ornamenta¬ 
tion. On the California coast and navi- 





















BULL. 30] 


BOAT-STONES-BCEIJF 


157 


gable streams n. of C. Mendocino, well- 
made wooden dugout canoes were used; 
wooden canoes, made chiefly of planks 
lashed together and calked, were used 
in the Santa Barbara id. region; both 
were important elements in influencing 
the culture of the people of these sections. 
Everywhere else in California, barring 
the occasional use of corracles and rafts 
of logs, transportation by water was con¬ 
ducted by means of balsas, consisting of 
rushes tied in bundles, generally, if not 
always, with more or less approximation 
to a boat of cigar shape. In certain spots 
in California, as on Clear lake among the 
Porno and Tulare lake among the Yokuts, 
these tule balsas were important factors 
in native life; elsewhere in the state 
much less so (Kroeber). On the lower 
Rio Colorado and in s. central California 
the Indians made immense corracle-like 
baskets, called by the Spaniards coritas, 
which were coated with bitumen or other 
waterproofing and used for fording the 
streams, laden with both passengers and 
merchandise. 

Consult Boas, The Central Eskimo, 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1888; Coues, Garces Diary, 
1900; Hoffman, The Menomini Indians, 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Murdoch, Eth¬ 
nological Results of the Point Barrow Ex¬ 
pedition, 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nel¬ 
son, The Eskimo about Bering Strait, 
18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Niblack, The 
Coast Indians of Southern Alaska and 
Northern British Columbia, Rep. Nat. 
Mus., 1888; Powers inCont. N. A. Ethnol., 
hi, 1877; Simms in Am. Anthrop., vi, 
191, 1904; Winship in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
407,1896. See Commerce , Furdrade, Trails 
and Trade routes, Travel. (o. t. m. ) 

Boat-stones. Prehistoric objects of pol¬ 
ished stone having somewhat the shape 
of a canoe, the use of which is unknown. 
Some have straight 
parallel sides and 
square ends; in oth¬ 
ers the sides con¬ 
verge to a blunt 
point. A vertical 
section cut length¬ 
wise of either is 
approximately tri¬ 
angular, the long 
face is more or less 
hollow, and there is 
usually a perfora¬ 
tion near each end; 
some have a groove 
on the outer or convex side, apparently to 
receive a cord passed through the holes. 
Sometimes there is a keel-like projection 
in which this groove is cut. It is sur¬ 
mised that they were employed as charms 
or talismans and carried about the person. 
They are found sparingly in most of the 
states e. of the Mississippi r. as well as 


in Canada. Those in the Northern 
states are made principally of slate, in 
the S. and W. steatite is most common, 
but other varieties of stone were used. 
In form some of these 
objects approach the 
plummets (q.v.) and are 
perforated at one end 
for suspension; others 
approximate the cones 
and hemispheres (q. v.). Analogous 
objects are found on the Pacific coast, 
some of which are manifestly modeled 
after the native canoe while others resem¬ 
ble the boat-stones of the E., although 
often perforated at one end for suspen¬ 
sion. See Problematical objects. 

ConsultFowke(l)inl3thRep. B. A. E., 
1896, (2) Archseol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; 
Moorehead (1) Prehist. Impls., 1902, 
(2) The Bird-stone Ceremonial, 1899; 
Moore, various memoirs in Jour. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Rau in Smith- 
son. Cont., xxii, 1876. (g. f. w. h. h.) 

Bobbydoklinny. See Nakaidoklini. 

Bocachee. See Tomochichi. 

Boca del Arroyo (Span.: ‘ mouth of the 
gulch’). A Papago village, probably in 
Pima co., s. Ariz., with 70 inhabitants in 
1858. 

La Boco del Arroyo.—Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 
1858. 

Bocherete. The name of a village given 
to Joutel in 1687 by an Ebahamo Indian 
and described as being n. or n. w. of the 
Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. The re¬ 
gion designated was at that time occupied 
chiefly by Caddoan tribes. The village 
can not be definitely classified. SeeGat- 
schet, Karankawalnds.,46,1891. (a. c. f. ) 
Bocrettes.—Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., I, 138,1846. Tserabocherete.—Joutel (1687) in 
Margry, D6c., m, 289, 1878 (= Tsera and Boch¬ 
erete combined). Tserabocretes.—Joutel (1687) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 152, 1846. 

Bocootawwonauke (‘fire people’?). A 
tribe mentioned by Powhatan in 1607 as 
living n. w. of the falls of James r. at 
Richmond, Va., in the highland country, 
and as being workers of copper and other 
metals (Strachey, Hist. Va., 27, 1849). 

Bocootawwanaukes.—Strachey.op. cit.,27. Bocoo- 
tawwonaukes. —Ibid. Bocootawwonough. —Ibid.,49. 
Bocootowwonocks.—Ibid., 27. Pocoughtaonack.— 
Smith,Works, 25,1884. Pocoughtronack.—Ibid., 20. 

Bocoyna ( oc6 ‘pine,’ ina ‘drips,’ hence 
‘turpentine.’—Lumholtz). A pueblo of 
civilized Tarahumare on the e. slope of 
the Sierra Madre, in lat. 28° 25', long. 
107° 15 7 , w. Chihuahua, Mexico. 

Bocoyna.—Lumholtz in Scribner’s Mag., xvi, 32, 
1894. Ocoina.—Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., i, 134, 
1902 (aboriginal name). 

Bodkins. See Awls, Needles. 

Boeuf, Nation du. Mentioned in the 
Jesuit Relation of 1662 as a tribe against 
which the Iroquois that year sent out an 
expedition. The name signifies ‘Buf¬ 
falo Nation,’ but to what people it refers 
is unknown; it may have designated 



b 


BOAT-STONE OF CHLORITE; TEN¬ 
NESSEE (i-s). a, Side; b, 
BOTTOM 






158 


BOGAN-BOMAZEEN 


I.B. A. E. 


either the Buffalo clan or gens of some 
tribe or one of the buffalo-hunting tribes 
oftheW. (j. m.) 

Bogan. A marshy cove by a stream; 
called also bogan hole (Ganong in Proc. 
and Trans. Hoy. Soc. Can., 209, 1896). 
In a letter (Apr. 8, 1903) Ganong says 
further: “A word very much used by 
guides and others who go into the New 
Brunswick woods is bogan , a still creek 
or bay branching from a stream. Ex¬ 
actly the same thing the Indians call a 
pokologan .” He thinks bogan , like logan, 
probably the common name in Maine 
for the same thing, a corruption of poko¬ 
logan. Both words, Ganong notes, are 
in good local use and occur in articles 
on sporting, etc. It is possible that 
“bogan hole” maybe a folk etymologiz¬ 
ing of pokologan. In the Chippewa lan¬ 
guage a marsh or bog is toHogun. 

(a. f. c.) 

Boguechito (‘big bayou’). A Choctaw 
band formerly residing in Neshoba co., 
Miss., in a district known by the same 
name.—Gatschet, CreekMigr. Leg., i, 108, 
1884. 

Bogue Chittos.— Claiborne (1843) in Sen. Doc. 168, 
28th Cong., 1st sess., 91, 1844. 

Bogue Toocolo Chitto (Bok tuklo chitto 
‘two big bayous’). A former Choctaw 
town, which derived its name from its 
location at the confluence of Running 
Tiger and Sukenatcha crs., about 4 m. 
n. w. of De Kalb, Kemper co., Miss.— 
Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 424, 
1902. 

Bohnapobatin. ( Bohnapo-batin , ‘western 
many houses’). The name applied by 
the Porno living in the region of Clear 
lake, Cal., to those living along the upper 
course of Russian r.—Gibbs (1851) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 110, 1853. 

Bokea. A former Porno village situ¬ 
ated in what is known as Rancheria val¬ 
ley, on the headwaters of Navarro r., 
Mendocino co., Cal. (a. l. k. s. a. b. ) 
Boch-heaf.— Gibbs .in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 112, 1853. 

Bokninuwad (in part from bo k, ‘tofind’). 
AY okuts tribe former 1 y on Deer cr., Tulare 
co., Cal. They ceded lands to the United 
States by treaty of May 30,1851, and went 
on a reservation on Kings r. ( a. l. k. ) 
Go-ke-nim-nons.— Wessells(1853)in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 32, 1857. Noches Paginoas.— 
Garc6s (1776), Diary, 288, 1900. Po-ken-well.— 
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1900. Po-ken- 
welle.— Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., 
spec, sess., 255, 1853. Pokoninos.— Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, i, 456, 1874. Po-kon-wel-lo. —Johnston in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st session, 23, 1852. 

Bokonghelas. See Buckongahelas. 

Bolas. Span.: ‘balls’). A hunting 
weapon consisting of two or more balls 
of heavy material attached to the end of 
a cord by means of shorter cords. The 
type weapon is that used by the tribes 
of the pampas of South America to en¬ 


tangle the legs of animals. The only 
weapon of this character found in North 
America is that used by the western Es¬ 
kimo for hunting birds, especially water- 
fowl. It consists of from 4 to 10 blocks, 
or shaped pieces of bone or ivory, about 
the size of a walnut, each attached to a 
sinew or rawhide cord 24 to 30 in. long, 
and gathered and secured to a short 
handle made of grass stems or feathers, 
forming a grip. In throwing 
the bolas it is swung around 
the head once or twice, then 
released like a sling. During 
the first part of their course 
the balls remain bunched, but 
when they lose speed or come 
in contact with an object they 
diverge and entangle. In the 
hands of the Eskimo the 
weapon is effectual at 40 to 50 
yds. The bolas is analogous 
to the slungshot, to the casse- 
tete of the Plains Indians, 
and to the cast-net of s. e. Asia. Zuni 
children have a toy which resembles the 
bolas. Consult Murdoch in 9th Rep. 
B. A. E., 245, 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., 134, 1899. (w. h.) 

Bolbone. A subdivision of the Cholovone, 
the northernmost group of the Mariposan 
family, residing e. of San Joaquin r. and 
n. of Tuolumne r., Cal. (a. l. k.) 
Bolbon. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Bolbones. —Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 51, 
1821. Bulbones. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 453, 
1874 (misquoted from Chamisso). Pulpenes.— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Pulpones.— 
Ibid. Volvon. —Ibid., Oct. 18,1861. 

Boleck.—See Bowlegs. 

Bolinas. A name formerly applied to 
the people living in the region of Bolinas 
bay, s. of Pt Reyes, Marin co., Cal. Tay¬ 
lor (Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860) gives 
Bollanos, an incorrect spelling of Bolinas, 
as the name of a small division of the 
Olamentke (Moquelumnan stock) for¬ 
merly “near Bollenos bay, Tamales bay, 
Punto de los Reyes, and probably as far 
up as Bodega bay.” (s. a. b. ) 

Bolshoigor. A Koyukukhotana village 
on Yukon r., 25 m. above the mouth of 
Koyulsuk r., Alaska.—Petroff (1880), 
10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. 
Bolshoiger.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901 
(After Petroff). 

Bomazeen. A chief or sachem of the 
Kennebec tribe whose residence was at 
Norridgewock, Kennebec r., Me., the an¬ 
cient capital or principal village of the 
tribe. He is mentioned as early as 1693 
and is known to have died in 1724. 
He made a treaty with Gov. Phips in 
1693; went to the fortatPemaquid, Me., in 
1694 under a flag of truce, and was treacher¬ 
ously seized and cast into prison in Bos¬ 
ton. After his release he waged war for 
a time on the settlements, attacking 



Eskimo Bird Bo¬ 
las. (Mur¬ 
doch) 


BULL. 30] 


BONES-BONE-WORK 


159 


Chelmsford, Sudbury, and other towns in 
Massachusetts in 1706, and Saco, Me., 
in 1710. A treaty of peace to which 
his name was signed was made at Ports¬ 
mouth, N. H., July 13, 1713. He was 
killed by a party under Capt. Moulton 
near Taconnet, Me.,- in 1724; about the 
same time his family at Norridgewock 
was fired upon, his daughter being killed 
and his wife taken prisoner. (c. t. ) 

Bones. See Anatomy. 

Bone-work. The use of bone and re¬ 
lated materials, including antler, ivory, 
horn, whalebone, turtle-shell, and the 
teeth, hoofs, beaks, and claws of many crea¬ 
tures, was almost universal among indian 
tribes. The hardness and toughness of 
these materials made them desirable for 
many kinds of implements and utensils, 
and their pleasing color and capacity for 
high polish caused them to be valued for 
personal ornaments. Since both man 
and beasts of various kinds have an im¬ 
portant place in aboriginal mythology, it 
is to be expected that in numerous in¬ 
stances their bones had a special sacred 
significance and use, as when, for example, 
the skulls and paws of small animals were 
used for mixing medicine. 

Not uncommonly the small bones, 
teeth, and claws of various animals, the 
beaks of birds, etc., were strung as beads, 
were perforated or grooved to be hung as 
pendant ornaments or rattles, or were 
sewed on garments or other objects of 
use. These uses are illustrated in the 
necklaces of crab claws and the puffin 
beak ceremonial armlets of the Eskimo, 
by the bear-tooth necklaces of many of 
the tribes, by the elk tusk embellish¬ 
ments of the buckskin costumes of the 
women among the Plains Indians, and 
by the small carved bone pendants at¬ 
tached to the edge of the garments of 
the ancient Beothuk (see Adornment). 
Teeth and small bones, such as the meta- 
carpals of the deer, as well as worked bone 
disks and lozenges, were used as dice in 
playing games of chance, and gaming 
sticks of many varieties were made of 
bone. In precolonial times bone had to 
be cut, carved, and engraved with imple¬ 
ments of stone, such as knives, scrapers, 
saws, gravers, drills, and grinding stones, 
and with some of the tribes the primitive 
methods still prevail. Although indis¬ 
pensable to primitive tribes everywhere, 
this material occupies a place of excep¬ 
tional importance in the far N. beyond 
the limits of forest growth, where the only 
available wood is brought oversea from 
distant shores by winds and currents. 
The Eskimo have the bones of the whale, 
seal, walrus, bear, wolf, moose, reindeer, 
muskox, and a wild sheep, and the antlers 
of the moose and deer, the horns of the 
sheep and ox, the teeth of the bear, wolf, 


and reindeer, the ivory of the walrus 
and narwhal, fossil ivory, the whalebone 
of the right-whale, and the bones of the 
smaller quadrupeds and various birds, 
and their skill in shaping them and adapt¬ 
ing them to their needs in the rigorous 
arctic environment is truly remarkable. 
The larger bones, as the ribs of the whale, 
are employed in constructing houses, 
caches, and shelters; for ribs of boats, 
runners for sleds, and plates for armor 
(Nelson). Bone, ivory, and antler were 
utilized for bows, arrows, spears, har¬ 
poons, knives, scrapers, picks, flint-flak¬ 
ing implements, clubs, boxes, and a 
great variety of appliances and tackle 
employed in rigging boats, in fishing, 
in hunting, in transportation, in pre¬ 
paring the product of the chase for 
consumption; for weaving, netting, and 
sewing implements, household utensils, 
tobacco pipes, gaming implements, toys, 
dolls, fetishes, amulets, and artistic 
carvings of many kinds. Personal orna¬ 
ments and toilet articles of bone and 
kindred materials are more numerous in 
Alaska, where beads, pendants, hair¬ 
pins, combs, labrets, belt clasps, belt 
ornaments of reindeer teeth, etc., are 
largely made and ingeniously applied. 
The artistic work of these northern 
peoples is shown in their extremely 
clever carvings in ivorv and their engrav¬ 
ings of various ornamental and pictorial 
designs upon objects of use and ornament, 
but there seems to be sufficient ground 
for the opinion that these particular 
phases of their art are largely of recent 
development and are due to association 
with white men and as a result of the 
acquisition of metal tools and perhaps 
also to some extent to contact with Indian 
tribes which in their turn have been 
influenced by the whites. The wide 
range and vast numbers of the objects of 
art shaped from these materials by the 
arctic peoples of the present period will 
be more fully appreciated by reference 
to the works of Boas, Murdoch, Nelson, 
and Turner, in the annual reports of the 
Bureau of American Ethnology, and by 
a visit to the ethnologic museums. 

Bone and the allied substances have 
been and are favorite materials with the 
tribes of the Pac fic coast. The uten¬ 
sils, implements, ornaments, and to- 
temic and symbolic carvings of the N. W. 
coast tribes are often admirable and dis¬ 
play esthetic appreciation of a high order 
( Niblack, Boas). Their carvings in bone, 
ivory, and antler, often inlaid with aba- 
lone, and the graceful and elaborately 
carved cups, ladles, and spoons of horn, 
are especially noteworthy. The art of 
the tribes of the Frazer basin and the 
Pacific slope s. of Puget sd. is much 
more primitive though bone was in 


160 


BONFOUCA-BOOKS IN INDIAN LANGUAGES 


t B. A. E. 


general use for implements, utensils, 
musical instruments, gaming articles, 
and ornaments (Abbott, Goddard, Pow¬ 
ers, Smith), great numbers being pre¬ 
served in our museums. Many of the 
tribes of the arid region, the great divide, 
the Mississippi valley, and the E. still 
employ bone, horn, antler, and turtle- 
shell to a large extent, but metal has 
largely usurped their place, especially for 
implements, hence finds from village sites, 
cemeteries, and burial mounds must be 
depended on largely for knowledge of the 
aboriginal bone-work of these regions. 
The ancient Pueblos inlaid some of their 
implements and ornaments of bone with 
bits of turquoise and other bright stones 
(Fewkes, Pepper). Among the tribes of 
many sections bones of deer and the 
larger birds were used for flutes and 
whistles, and shells of turtles for rattles, 
and the latter were often made also of 
beaks of birds and hoofs and dewclaws 
of deer and other animals, or by attach¬ 
ing these articles to parts of the costume, 
or to bands for the wrists and ankles. 
Champlain illustrates a game drive in 
which the drivers appear to be beating 
with bones upon clavicles of some large 
animal, and among the Plains tribes and 
the Pueblos a sort of saw-fiddle in which 
sometimes a scapula is drawn over a 
notched stick, or over another scapula, 
for keeping time in ceremonial dances, is 
employed. The mounds of the Missis¬ 
sippi and Ohio valleys and the Southern 
states have yielded a wide range of ob¬ 
jects, both useful and ornamental. Of the 
former class, awls, fish-hooks, pins, arrow- 
points, cutting tools made of beaver 
teeth, and scraping tools are the most 
important. Of the latter class, beads, 
pendants, gorgets, pins, wristlets, etc., 
are worthy of note. There are also bone 
whistles and flutes, engraved batons, and 
various carvings that would seem rather 
to be totemic and symbolic than simply 
useful or ornamental; horns of the buf¬ 
falo and mountain sheep were made into 
dippers and cups, and were also, as were 
the antlers of deer, utilized in head¬ 
dresses by the ancient as well as by the 
present peoples. The scapulse of large 
animals formed convenient hoe blades 
and as such were probably universally 
employed by the native agriculturists. 
A novel use of bones is that of plating 
them with copper, illustrated by the 
plated jawbone of a wolf obtained by 
Moore from a Florida mound. In the 
wonderful collection of objects from the 
Hopewell mound, near Chillicothe, Ohio, 
is a human femur engraved with intri¬ 
cate and finely executed symbolic figures 
(Putnam and Willoughby). 

The literature of this topic is volumi¬ 
nous; though much scattered, and is em¬ 


bodied mainly in reports on field re¬ 
searches published by the Smithsonian 
Institution, the National Museum, the 
Bureau of American Ethnology, the 
Reports of the Minister of Education, 
Ontario, the leading museums and acade¬ 
mies, and in works of a more general 
nature, such as Moorehead’s Prehistoric 
Implements and Fowke’s Archaeological 
History of Ohio. (w. h. h. ) 

Bonfouca. A former Muskhogean set¬ 
tlement, a short distance n. of L. Pont- 
chartrain, La. 

Bonifoucas.— Baudry des Lozteres, Voy. Louisiane, 
241,1802. 

Bonne Esperance. A Montagnais settle¬ 
ment on the islands and mainland at the 
mouth of Esquimaux r., on the s. coast of 
Labrador. Some Nascapee are probably 
there also.—Stearns, Labrador, 264, 293, 
1884. 

Bonostac. Mentioned as a Pima settle¬ 
ment on the upper Rio Santa Cruz, below 
Tucson, Ariz., in 1764; but from the loca¬ 
tion it would seem more likely that it was 
a Papago rancheria. 

Bonostac. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347, 1864. 
Bonostao.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
472, 1892. 

Booadasha (‘ fish-catchers ’). A band of 
the Crows. 

Boo-a-da'-sha. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159,1877. 

Booctolooee. A former Choctaw village 
pertaining to the “Sixtowns,” situated 
on Boguetulukusi cr., a w. affluent of 
Chicasawhay r., probably in Jasper co., 
Miss.—W. Fla. map, ca. 1775. 

Books in Indian languages. In addi¬ 
tion to dictionaries, versions of the Bible 
and the Prayer Book, whole and in part, 
Bible stories complete and summarized, 
catechisms, and cognate works, the litera¬ 
ture translated into Indian languages 
embraces some interesting volumes. In 
Greenlandic Eskimo there is an abridged 
version of Stoud-Platon’s Geography, by 
E. A. Wandall (1848); a translation of 
Thomas a Kempis’ Imitation of Christ, 
by Paul Egede (1787, revised 1824); a 
History of the World, by C. E. Janssen 
(1861), and another by S. P. Klein- 
schmidt (1859). Peter Kragh’s transla¬ 
tions of Ingemann’s Voices in the Wilder¬ 
ness, and The High Game, Krumma- 
cher’s Parables and Feast Book, the Life 
of Hans Egede, and other books circu¬ 
lated in manuscript. In the Labrador 
dialect a geography, by A. F. Eisner, was 
published in 1880. Under the title Malipiya 
ekta oicimani ya, 1 Sky to traveling he 
went,’ Rev. S. R. Riggs published in 1857 a 
translation of Bunyan’s Pilgrim’s Progress 
into the Dakota language of the Siouan 
stock. This same book was translated 
into Cree by Archbishop Vincent (1886), 
and into Cheyenne by Rev. R. Petter 
(1904). In 1879 Rev. D. W. Ilemans pub¬ 
lished a Santee version of Rev. R. New- 


i$ull. 30] 


BOOMERANGS 


BOSOM WORTH 


161 


ton’s The King’s Highway. Into the Mas- 
sachuset dialect of the Algonquian stock 
Rev. Joh n El iot translated i n 1664 Baxter’s 
Call to the Unconverted, in 1665 Bayly’s 
Practice of Piety, about 1687 the Rev. W. 
Perkins’ Six Principles of Religion, and 
in 1689 Shepard’s Sincere Convert. A 
Geography for Beginners was published 
in Chippewa in 1840, and in Santee Da¬ 
kota in 1876. In 1839 the Rev. C. A. 
Goodrich’s Child’s Book of the Creation 
was translated into Choctaw by the Rev. 
L. S. Williams. The civilized tribes of 
Indian Territory, with the aid of the 
Cherokee and adapted alphabets, have 
published many laws, text-books, etc., in 
the native languages. 

Exclusive of occasional texts, more or 
less brief, in native languages, to be found 
in the periodical literature of anthropol¬ 
ogy, in ethnological and linguistic mono¬ 
graphs, books of travel and description, 
etc., there is accumulating a considerable 
literature of texts by accredited men of 
science and other competent observers. 
The Cliimmesyan stock is represented by 
Boas’ TsimshianTexts (Bull. 27, B. A. E., 
1902); the Chinookan by Boas’ Chinook 
Texts (Bull. 20, B. A. E., 1904), and Kath- 
lamet Texts (Bull. 26,1901); the Salishan 
by Teit and Boas’ Traditions of the 
Thompson River Indians (1898); the 
Wakashan (Kwakiutl-Nootka) by Boas 
and Hunt’s Kwakiutl Texts (Mem. Am. 
Mils. Nat. Ilist., 1902-05); the Skittagetan 
by Swanton’s Ilaida Texts (Bull. 29, B. 
A. E., 1905); the Athapascan by God¬ 
dard’s HupaTexts(Publ. Univ. Cal., Am. 
Arclueol. and Ethnol., i, 1904), and his 
Morphology of the 11 upa Language (1905) 
perhaps belongs here also, likewise Mat¬ 
thews’ Navaho Legends (1897) and The 
Night Chant (1902); theSiouan by Riggs’ 
Dakota Grammar, Texts, and Ethnogra¬ 
phy (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ix, 1893), 
Dorsey’s (Pegiha Language (Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., vi, 1890), Omaha and Ponka 
Letters (Bull. 11, B. A. E., 1891), and 
Osage Traditions (6th Rep. B. A. E., 
1888); the Iroquoian by Mooney’s Sacred 
Eormulas of the Cherokee (7th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1891), Hewitt’s Iroquoian Cosmol¬ 
ogy (21st Rep. B. A. E., 1903), and Hale’s 
Iroquois Book of Bites( 1883)—the second 
records cosmologic mvths, the last the 
great national ritual of the northern Iro¬ 
quois. The Algonquian is represented 
by scattered texts rather than by books, 
although there are to be mentioned 
Brinton’s Lenape and Their Legends 
(1885), which contains the text of the 
Wulum Olum, and the (Tee and Siksika 
Legends in Petitot’s Traditions Indiermes 
du Canada Nord-ouest (1887j, the scat¬ 
tered texts in the works of Schoolcraft, 
Hoffman, etc.; the Eskimo best by the 
texts in Boas’ Eskimo of Baffin Land and 


Hudson Bay (Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xv, 1901), and other writings on the 
Eskimo, Thalbitzer’s Phonetical Study of 
the Eskimo Language (1904), and Bar- 
num’s Grammatical Fundamentals of the 
Innuit Language (1901), the last relating 
to the Tununa dialect of Alaska. The 
monographs of Miss Alice C. Fletcher on 
the ceremonies of the Pawnee (22d Rep. 
B. A. E., 1903), of James Mooney on the 
Ghost Dance Religion (14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1896), the numerous monographs of 
Dr Franz Boas on the Bellacoola, the 
Kwakiutl, etc., contain much textual, 
material. The manuscript collection of 
the Bureau of American Ethnology is 
rich in texts of myths, legends, etc. As 
a whole, the body of linguistic material, 
here briefly noticed, is of increasing mag¬ 
nitude and value. The literature in the 
Chinook jargon also furnishes some 
titles, e. g., the stenographic periodical 
Kamloops IVawa, by Father Le Jeune, 
who is also the author of several pamph¬ 
lets. Worthy of mention is Rev. Myron 
Eells’ Hymns in the Chinook Jargon 
Language (1878-89), which is not merely 
a translation of English verse. See Bible 
transla t Ions, Dictionaries, Periodica Is. 

(a. f. c.) 

Boomerangs. See Rabbit sticks. 

Boothroyd. A body of Ntlakyapamuk 
Indians of Salishan stock on Fraser r., 
Brit. Col. The name seems to have been 
employed to include the towns of Spaim, 
Kimus, Tzaumuk, Suk, and Nkattsim. 
Pop. 159 in 1902 (Can'. Ind. Aff. for 
1902, 238). 

Borego (‘sheep’). An ancient settle¬ 
ment of the Tepecano, now in ruins, situ¬ 
ated on the e. bank of the Rio de 
Bolanos, approachable from Monte Es¬ 
cobedo, in Jalisco, Mexico. There is a 
native tradition that its people warred 
against those of Azqueltan after the first 
coming of the Spaniards.—Hrdlicka in 
Am. Anthrop., v. 409, 1903. 

Boring. See Drills and Drilling, Shell- 
work, Stone-work. 

Borrados (Span.: ‘ painted in stripes or 
blotches’). A tribe which, according to 
Orozco y Berra (Geog., 300, 308, 1864), 
formerly resided in Tamaulipas, Nuevo 
Leon, and Coahuila, n. Mexico. There 
is evidence that the tribe or a portion of 
it lived at one time in Texas, as the same 
authority (p. 382) says that the country of 
the lower Lipan Indians joined on the e. 
that of the Karankawa and Borrados in 
the province of Texas. The relationship 
of this tribe to the Coahuiltecan group is 
expressly affirmed by Bartolome Garcia. 

Bosomworth, Mary, A noted Creek 
Indian woman, also known as Mary 
Mathews and Mary Musgrove, who cre¬ 
ated much trouble for the Georgia colonial 
government about 1752, nearly rousing 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-11 


162 BOSTON INDIAN CITIZENSHIP COMMITTEE-BOUDINOT [b. a. b. 


the Creek confederacy to war against the 
English. She seems to have been of high 
standing among her own people, being 
closely related to leading chiefs both of 
the Upper and Lower Creeks, possessed 
of unusual intelligence and knowledge of 
English, for which reason, and to secure 
her good will, Oglethorpe, the founder of 
the colony, made her his interpreter and 
negotiator with the Indians at a salary 
of $500 per year. About 1749 she mar¬ 
ried her third white husband, the Rev. 
Thomas Bosom worth, who, by reason of 
his Indian marriage, was given a com¬ 
mission from the colony of South Caro¬ 
lina as agent among the Creeks, and 
within a few months had nearly pre¬ 
cipitated civil war among the Indians 
and rebellion among the licensed traders. 
Being deeply in debt, he instigated his 
wife to assume the title of “Empress of 
the Creek Nation,” and to make personal 
claim, first to the islands of Ossabaw, St 
Catharine, and Sapelo, on the Georgia 
coast, and afterward to a large territory 
on the mainland. Notifying Gov. Ogle¬ 
thorpe that she was coming to claim her 
own, she raised a large body of armed 
Creeks and marched against Savannah. 
The town was put in position for defense 
and a troop of cavalry met the Indians 
outside and obliged them to lay down 
their arms before entering. The proces¬ 
sion was headed by Bosomworth in full 
canonical robes, with his “queen” by his 
side, followed by the chiefs in order of 
rank, with their warriors. They were 
received with a military salute and a 
council followed, lasting several days, 
during which the Indians managed to 
regain possession of their arms, and a 
massacre seemed imminent, which was 
averted by the seizure of Mary and her 
husband, who were held in prison until 
they made suitable apologies and promises 
of good behavior, the troops and citizens 
remaining under arms until the danger 
was over, when the Indians were dis¬ 
missed with presents. Nothing is re¬ 
corded of her later career. See Appleton’s 
Cyclopaedia of Am. Biog.; various histo¬ 
ries of Georgia; Bosom worth’s MS. Jour., 
1752, in archives B. A. E. (j. m. ) 

Boston Indian Citizenship Committee. 
An association for the protection of the 
rights of Indians; organized in 1879 on 
the occasion of the forcible removal of 
the Ponca. The tribe returned to their 
old home in South Dakota from the 
reservation in Indian Territory. Chief 
Standing Bear, released on a writ of ha¬ 
beas corpus, went to Boston, and, on 
the plea that most of the signatures in 
favor of removal were fraudulent, enlisted 
the sympathy of Hon. John D. Long, then 
governor of Massachusetts, and other or¬ 
ganizers of this committee, who finally 


secured the rescission of the edict and the 
restoration of the Dakota reservation. The 
committee undertook next to secure citi¬ 
zenship for Indians on the basis of the 
payment of taxes, a principle that was 
finally denied by the United States Su¬ 
preme Court. When the Dawes bill 
granting land in severalty and citizenship 
was enacted, the committee devoted its 
attention to securing honest allotment. 
Since the organization of the Indian 
Rights Association in Philadelphia the 
Boston committee has confined itself to 
securing fair allotments of fertile lands, 
with adequate water supply, protecting 
homesteads, and especially to defending 
and generally promoting the interests of 
the more progressive bands of tribes that 
were backward in taking allotments. To 
safeguard the rights of such and prevent 
the sale or lease of the best Indian lands 
to whites at nominal prices, the com¬ 
mittee has sought to obtain the dismissal 
of corrupt Government agents and in¬ 
spectors whenever such were detected. 
Joshua W. Davis is chairman and J. S. 
Lockwood secretary (43 Federal st., 
Boston, Mass.). 

Bottles. See Pottery , Receptacles. 

Boucfouca. A former Choctaw town 
on the headwaters of Pearl r., Miss. 
Bouc-fouca. —Jefferys, French Dom. Am., I, 135, 
map, 1761. Bouc-fuca.— LattrtS, map U. S., 1784. 
Bouk-fuka.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 562, 1854. 

Boudinot, Elias (native name Gdld- 
gi'na , ‘ male deer ’ or ‘ turkey ’). A Cher¬ 
okee Indian, educated in the foreign mis¬ 
sion school at Cornwall, Conn., founded 
by the American Board of Commissioners 
for Foreign Missions, which he entered 
with two other Cherokee youths in 1818 
at the instance of the philanthropist 
whose name he was allowed to adopt. 
In 1827 the Cherokee council formally 
resolved to establish a national paper, and 
the following year the Cherokee Phoenix 
appeared under Boudinot’s editorship. 
After a precarious existence of 6 years, 
however, the paper was discontinued, and 
not resumed until after the removal of 
the Cherokee to Indian Ter., when its 
place was finally taken by the Cherokee 
Advocate , established in i844. In 1833 
Boudinot wrote “Poor Sarah; or, the 
Indian Woman,” in Cherokee characters, 
published at New Echota by the United 
Brethren’s Missionary Society, another 
edition of which was printed at Park 
Hill in 1843; and from 1823 to the time 
of his death he was joint translator with 
Rev. S. A. Worcester of a number of the 
Gospels, some of which passed through 
several editions. Boudinot joined an 
insignificant minority of his people in 
support of the Ridge treaty and the sub¬ 
sequent treaty of New Echota, by the 
terms of which the Cherokee Nation sur- 


BULL. 30] 


BOU8COUTTON 


BOWLEGS. 


163 


rendered its lands and removed to Indian 
Ter. This attitude made him so unpopu¬ 
lar that on June 22,1839, he was set upon 
and murdered, although not with the 
knowledge or connivance of the tribal 
officers. See Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1900; Pilling, Bibliography of the 
Iroquoian Languages, Bull. B. A. E., 1888. 

Bouscoutton. The northernmost divi¬ 
sion of the Cree, living in 1658-71 about 
the s. shores of Hudson bay. According 
to Dr William Jones the Chippewa refer 
to the northernmost dwelling place of the 
Cree as Ininiwitoskwuning, ‘at the man’s 
elbow,’ and Antawat-otoskwuning, ‘they 
dwell at the elbow.’ This antawat is 
probably the term usually prefixed, in 
one form or another, to the name Bous¬ 
coutton. 

Ataouabouscatouek. —Jes.Rel.,1658, 21,1868. Outao- 
uoisbouscottous.— Tailhan, Perrot, 293, note, 1864. 
Outaouois, Bouscouttous. —Prise de possession 
(1671) in Margry, D6c., i, 97, 1875 (comma evi¬ 
dently Inserted by mistake). 

Boutte Station. A village in St Charles 
parish, La., at which lived a camp of 
Choctaw who manufactured cane bas¬ 
ketry and gathered the okra which was 
ground into gumbo file.—Harris, La. 
Products, 203, 1881. 

Bowl, The (a translation of his native 
name, Diwa /( tt), also called Col. Bowles. 
A noted Cherokee chief and leader of one 
of the first bands to establish themselves 
permanently on the w. side of the Mis¬ 
sissippi. At the head of some hostile 
Cherokee from the Chickamauga towns 
he massacred all of the male members of 
a party of emigrants at Muscle shoals in 
Tennessee r. in 1794, after which he re¬ 
tired up St. Francis r. on the w. side of 
the Mississippi, and, his act being dis¬ 
owned by the Cherokee council, who 
offered to assist in his arrest, he remained 
in that region until after the cession of 
Louisiana Territory to the United States. 
About 1824 so much dissatisfaction was 
caused by delay in adjusting the boun¬ 
daries of the territory of the Western 
Cherokee in Arkansas and the withhold¬ 
ing of their annuities that a party headed 
by Bowl crossed Sabine r. into Texas, 
where they were joined by bodies of 
refugees from a number of other eastern 
tribes and began negotiations with the 
Mexican government for a tract of land 
on Angelina, Neches, and Trinity rs., but 
were interrupted by the outbreak of the 
Texan war for independence in 1835. 
Houston, w r ho had long been a friend of 
the Cherokee, entered into a treaty to 
assign them certain lands along Angelina 
r., but it was rejected by the Texas senate 
in 1837, and Houston’s successor, Lamar, 
declared his intention to drive all the 
Indians from Texas. On the plea that 
they were entering into a conspiracy with 
the Mexican inhabitants, a commission, 


supported by several regiments of troops, 
was sent to the Cherokee town on Ange¬ 
lina r. to demand that they remove at 
once across the border. On their refusal 
they were attacked, July 15-16,1839, and 
defeated in two engagements, Bowl and his 
assistant chief, Hard-mush, being among 
the many killed. See Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1900. (j. r. s.) 



Bowlder outlines. Certain outline sur¬ 
face figures, probably of Siouan origin, 
usually formed of bowlders a foot or less in 
diameter, though a few consisted of buffalo 
bones. The name “bowlder mosaics’’ 
was first applied to 
them by Todd. Ac¬ 
cording to Lewis, 
structures of this 
type have been found 
from w. Iowa and Ne¬ 
braska to Manitoba, 
and from w. Minne¬ 
sota through North 
and South Dakota to 
Montana; but they 
appear to be, or rather 
to have been, more bowlder outline representing 

frequent in South length is ft. (thomas) 
•Dakota than in any 
other section. These remains consist of 
animal, human, and other figures out¬ 
lined upon the surface of the ground, 
usually on elevated sites, the human, 
turtle, and serpent figures being by far 
the most numerous. In Dakota the out¬ 
lines are generally accompanied with 
small stone circles, known to be old 
tipi sites. In some instances long lines 
of bowlders or buffalo bones and small 
stone cairns have been found associated 
with them or occurring in their immedi¬ 
ate neighborhood. Like the bowlder 
oi roles these are more or less embedded 


in the ground, but this does not necessa¬ 
rily indicate great antiquity; indeed, 
their frequent association with tipi cir¬ 
cles seems to denote that they are com¬ 
paratively recent. The accompanying 
turtle figure illustrates the type. Among 
the Crows of Montana a bowlder outline 
figure is made in the form of a woman to 
commemorate the unfaithfulness of a wife. 

Consult Lewis in Am. Anthrop., n, 
Apr., 1889, iii, July, 1890; Simms, ibid., 
n. s., v, 374, 1903; Thomas in 12th Rep. 
B. A. E., 534,1894; Todd in Am. Natural¬ 
ist, Jan., 1884. (c. t.) 

Bowlegs (probably corrupted from Bo- 
lek). An inferior Seminole chief who 
was brought temporarily into notice in 
1812 during the Indian war on the Geor¬ 
gia frontier. When early in that year 
King Paine, also a Seminole chief, at the 
head of sundry bands of Seminole and 
negroes, started on a mission of blood and 
plunder, Bowlegs joined him. A small 
force under Capt. Williams was met and 




164 


BOWLEGS TOWN-BOXES AND CHESTS 


[b. a. e. 


defeated Sept. 11. Their force being 
considerably increased, they soon there¬ 
after marched from the Alachua towns 
to attack Gen. Neuman, who had been 
sent against them with orders to destroy 
their towns. After 4 severe charges in 
which King Paine was killed and Bow¬ 
legs wounded, the Indians were driven 
back. With this occurrence Bowlegs 
drops from history, though he probably 
lived several years longer. In a docu¬ 
ment exhibited in the trial of Arbuthnott 
and Ambrister his name is signed Bo- 
leck. (c. t.) 

Bowlegs Town. A former Seminole 
town on Suwannee r., w. Fla.; named 
after an influential Seminole chief early 
in the 19th century.—Woodward, Rem¬ 
iniscences, 153, 1859. 

Bowles, Colonel, see Bowl, The. 

Bowls. With the Indian the bowl 
serves a multitude of purposes: it is as¬ 
sociated with the supply of his simplest 
needs as well as with his religion. The 
materials employed in making bowls are 
stone, especially soapstone, horn, bone, 
shell, skin, wood, and bark. Bowls are 
often adapted natural forms, as shells, 
gourds, and concretions, either unmodi-* 
fled or more or less fully remodeled; and 
basket bowls are used by many tribes. 
The use of bowls in the preparation and 
serving of food is treated under Dishes 
(q. v.). Bowls are also used in primitive 
agriculture for gathering, winnowing, 
drying, and roasting seeds, and in con¬ 
nection with milling. With many tribes 
bowls are made from large knots, being hol¬ 
lowed out with fire and the knife. In Texas 
and Indian Territory plate-like bowls 
were made from the wood of the pecan 
tree, while poplar, oak, and other woods 
furnished others. Some bowls designed 
for practical use are no larger than drink¬ 
ing cups, while others, made by or for 
children as toys, are not much larger than 
a thimble. Some of the smaller ones, 
used for mixing medicine, had a small 
projection from the edge which served as 
a handle, while the typical Pueblo medi¬ 
cine bowl has terraced edges symbolizing 
rain clouds, a basket-like handle, and 
painted figures of sacred water animals, 
such as the tadpole and the frog. The 
most ancient permanent cooking utensil 
of the Plains tribes was a bowl made by 
hollowing out a stone. The Blackfeet 
and Cheyenne say that in very early 
times they boiled their meat in bowls 
made of some kind of soft stone. The 
Omaha and others had excellent wooden 
bowls, the standard of beauty being sym¬ 
metry of outline and the grain of the 
gnarled roots from which they were made. 
Among many Indians bowls were used 
in games of chance and divination, 
in certain ceremonies of the Wahpeton 


and Sisseton Sioux and of other tribes a 
game w T as played with plum-stone dice 
thrown from a wooden bowl, in the mak¬ 
ing of which great skill and care were 
exercised. In some cases the kind of 
wood was prescribed. Bowls that had 
been long in use for these games acquired 
a polish and color unattainable by art, 
and were prized as tribal possessions. 
The Micmac accorded supernatural pow¬ 
ers to certain of their bowls, and thought 
that water standing over night in gaming 
bowls would reveal by its appearance 
past, present, and future events.' Some 
bowls were supposed to have mysterious 
powers which would affect the person 
eating or.drinking from them. Bowls 
and trays of basketry were used by the 
Sioux, Cheyenne, Arapaho, and other 
Plains tribes, though not by the Siksika, 
in the familiar seed game. These appear 
to be the only baskets made by these 
tribes (Grinned). 

Among the Pueblo tribes the pottery 
bowl, like the basket-bowl drum of the 
Navaho and the Panamint, is frequently 
a cult vessel employed in religious cere¬ 
monies, the medicine bowl with its nature 
symbols and the sacred meal bowl fur¬ 
nishing familiar examples. Such vessels 
are sacrificed to springs or are deposited 
in shrines and caves. The ancient Hopi 
evidently regarded the concave of the 
bowl as the vault of the sky, and pictured 
on it stars, birds, and celestial beings. 
The food bowls in animal forms, like 
those of the N. W. coast, were apparently 
associated primarily with the nourish¬ 
ment derived from animals. Wooden 
bowls used for religious purposes were 
often decorated by the Plains tribes with 
incised figures of sacred animals, whose 
supposed spiritual power had relation 
to the uses of the vessel; and like expla¬ 
nation may be made of the life-form 
decorations sculptured and modeled in 
relief and engraved and painted on bowls 
of many tribes, ancient and modern. See 
Basketry, Dishes, Food, Games, Pottery, 
Receptacles. 

Bows. See Arrows. 

Boxelder Indians. A branch of the 
Shoshoni formerly in n. w. Utah.—Lynde 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 42, 36th Cong., 1st sess., 
38, 1860. 

Boxes and Chests. The distribution of 
tribes using boxes and chests illustrates 
in a striking manner the effect of environ¬ 
ment on arts and customs. Thus wood¬ 
land tribes made boxes of suitable tim¬ 
ber, and the culmination of their manu¬ 
facture is found among the tribes of the 
N. W. coast. The Eskimo had a great 
variety of small boxes of bone, wood, 
whalebone, and ivory, and displayed 
extraordinary skill and inventiveness in 
their manufacture. This was in large 


BULL. 30] 


BRAIN-BRIGHT EYES 


165 



measure due to their damp and freezing 
environment, in which, though wood was 
scarce, boxes were better than pouches 
for keeping the contents dry. It ap¬ 
pears that to the introduction of tobacco, 
percussion caps, and powder is due the 
great number 
of small boxes 
manufactured 
by the Eskimo, 
although they 
had previously 
many boxes for 
trinkets, lance- 
heads, tinder, 
etc. Eskimo 
boxes are pro- 
v i d e d with 
cords for fasten¬ 
ing them to the 

person to pre- ,V0RY Box F0R SMALL articles; Eskimo; 
" , ! • \, i-3. (Murdoch) 

vent loss m the 


snow. Boxes and chests, being difficult 
of transportation even on water, must be 
looked for chiefly among sedentary tribes 
living in a wooded country. Tribes that 
moved freely about stored and transported 
their goods in bags, rawhide cases, and 
basket wallets. Boxes and chests of wood 
are practically 
u n known 
among the 
Plains tribes, 
which had 
abundant 
skins of large 
animals out of 
which to make 

receptacles for wooden Box for whaling amulet; Eskimo; 

their posses- (murdoch) 

sions, and the horse and the dog as pack 
and draft animals. Some of the Plains 
tribes, however, made box-like cases or 
trunks of rawhide similar in shape to the 
birch-bark boxes of the eastern tribes, 




HOUSEHOLD CHESTS WITH CARVED AND PAINTED DESIGNS; 
HAIDA; 1-18. (nIBLACk) 


and the Sfoux made plume boxes of 
wood. Objects and materials that could 
be injured by crushing or by damp¬ 
ness usually required a box, the most 
widespread use of which was for the stor¬ 
ing of feathers. The Plains tribes and 
some others made parfleches, or cases of 
rawhide, almost as rigid as a wooden box, 
for headdresses, arrows, etc.; the Pima, 
Papago, and Mohave made basket cases 
for feathers; and the Pueblos employed a 


box, usually excavated from a single piece 
of cottonwood, solely for holding the 
feathers used in ceremonies. The Yurok 
of California made a cylindrical wooden 
box in two sections for storing valuables. 
The eastern woodland tribes made boxes 
of birch bark. The N. W. coast tribes as 
far s. as Washington made large chests 
of wood for storing 
food, clothing, etc.; 
for cooking, for rip¬ 
ening salmon eggs, 
for the interment 

of the dead, for wooden box for feathers; hopi; 
drums and other 1 ' 18 - STEVEN80N ) 
uses, and these were usually decorated 
with carving or painting, or both. These 
tribes also made long boxes as quivers for 
arrows, but smaller boxes were not so 
common among them as among the Es¬ 
kimo. 

Consult Boas, Decorative Art of the 
Indians of the North Pacific Coast, Bull. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ix, no. 10, 1897; 
Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xviii, pt. 1, 1902; Nelson, Eskimo about 
Bering Strait, 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; 
Niblack, Coast Indians, Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1888, 1890; Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. 
E., 1883; Swan, Indians of Cape Flattery, 
Smithson. Cont., xvi, 1870; Swanton in 
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., v, pt. 1, 1905. 
See Bags and pouches, Basketry, Parfleche, 
Receptacles, Wood-work, etc. (w. h.) 

Brain. See Anatomy. 

Brant, Joseph. See Thayendanegea. 

Breastworks. See Fortifications. 

Brfeche-dent. See Broken Tooth. 

Breech-cloth. See Child life, Clothing. 

Bridge River Indians. A band of Upper 
Lillooet occupying the village of Kanlax, 
on Bridge r., which flows into the upper 
Eraser above Lillooet, Brit. Col.; pop. 
108 in 1902.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 72, 
1902. 

Briertown. A former Cherokee settle¬ 
ment on Nantahala r., about the mouth 
of Briertown cr., in Macon co., N. C.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 524,1900. 

Kanu'gulayl.—Mooney, ibid, (‘brier place’). 
Kanu'gu lun'yi.—Ibid. See Nantahala. 

Bright Eyes. True name, Susette La 
Flesche. The eldest child of Eshtamaza, 
or Joseph La Flesche, a former head-chief 
of the Omaha. She was born in Nebraska 
about 1850 and attended the Presbyterian 
mission school on the Omaha res. 
Through the interest of one of her teach¬ 
ers, Susette was sent to a private school 
in Elizabeth, N. J., where she made rapid 
progress in her studies. After her return 
home she taught in a Government day 
school on the Omaha res. and exercised a 
stimulating influence on the young people 
of the tribe. In 1877-78 the Ponca were 
forcibly removed to Indian Territory from 




















BRITISH BAND-BRULE 


[b. a. e. 


1<*>6 


their home on Niobrara r., S. Dak. Not 
long afterward Susette accompanied her 
father to Indian Territory, where he went 
to render such help as he could to his sick 
and dying relatives among the Ponca. 
The heroic determination of the Ponca 
chief, Standing Bear, to lead his band back 
to their northern home; their sufferings 
during their march of more than 600 m.; 
his arrest and imprisonment; and, after 
a sharp legal struggle, his release by 
habeas corpus, in accordance with Judge 
Dundy’s decision that “an Indian is a 
person” (U. S. v. Crook, 5 Dillon, 453), 
led to steps being taken by a committee of 
citizens to bring the matter of Indian re¬ 
movals before the public. Arrangements 
were made to have Standing Bear, accom¬ 
panied by Susette La Flesche and her 
brother, visit the principal cities of the 
United States under the direction of Mr 
T. Ii. Tibbies, and tell the story of the 
Ponca removal. The name “Bright 
Eyes” was given Susette, and under that 
cognomen she entered upon her public 
work. Her clear exposition of the case, 
her eloquent appeals for humanity toward 
her race, her grace and dignity of diction 
and bearing aroused the interest of the 
thousands who listened to her. As a re¬ 
sult, a request was urged on the Govern¬ 
ment that there be no more removals 
of tribes, and this request has been re¬ 
spected when practicable. In 1881 Bright 
Eyes married Mr T. H. Tibbies. Later 
she and her husband visited England 
and Scotland, where she made a number 
of addresses. After her return to this 
country she lived in Lincoln, Neb., and 
maintained activity with her pen until 
her death in 1902. (a. c. f.) 

British Band. A former band of the 
Sauk and Foxes. See Sauk. 

Broken Arrows. A hunting band of 
Sioux found on the Platte by Sage (Scenes 
in Rocky Mts., 68, 1846); possibly the 
Cazazhita. 

Broken Tooth. The son of Biauswah 
and chief of the Sandy Lake Chippewa, 
also referred to as Kadewabedas and Cat- 
awatabeta (strictly Ma'kadew&bidis, from 
makade ‘black,’ wdbidis ‘tooth’), and by 
the French Breche-dent. He is spoken of 
as a little boy in 1763, and is mentioned 
in 1805 by Lieut. Z. M. Pike, who be¬ 
stowed on him a medal and a flag, and 
according to whom his band at that time 
numbered but 45 men. Broken Tooth 
was one of the signers of the treaty of 
Prairie du Chien, Aug. 19, 1825; his 
death occurred in 1828. His daughter 
was the wife of Ermatinger, a British 
trader. (c. t. ) 

Brotherton. The name of two distinct 
bands, each formed of remnants of various 
Algonquiantribes. The best-known band 
was composed of individuals of the Ma- 


hican, Wappinger, Mohegan, Pequot, 
Narraganset, etc., of Connecticut and 
Rhode Island, and of the Montauk and 
others from Long Island, who settled in 
1788 on land given them by the Oneida 
at the present Marshall, Oneida co., N. Y., 
near the settlement then occupied by the 
Stockbridges. Those of New England 
were mainly from Farmington, Stoning- 
ton, Groton, Mohegan, and Niantic 
(Lyme), in Connecticut, and from Charles¬ 
town in Rhode Island. They all went 
under the leadership of Samson Occum, 
the Indian minister, and on arriving in 
Oneida co. called their settlement Broth¬ 
erton. As their dialects were different 
they adopted the English language. They 
numbered 250 in 1791. In 1833 they re¬ 
moved to Wisconsin with the Oneida and 
Stockbridges and settled on the e. side of 
Winnebago lake, in Calumet co., where 
t h ey soon after abandoned thei r tri bal re la- 
tions and became citizens, together with 
the other emigrant tribes settled near 
Green Bay. They are cal led W apanach ki, 
“eastern people,” by the neighboring 
Algonquian tribes. 

The other band of that name was com¬ 
posed of Raritan and other divisions of the 
Delawares who, according to Ruttenber 
(Tribes Hudson River, 293, 1872), occu¬ 
pied a reservation called Brotherton, in 
Burlington co., N. J., until 1802, when 
they accepted an invitation to unite with 
the Stockbridges and Brothertons then 
living in Oneida co., N. Y. In 1832 they 
sold their last rights in New Jersey. They 
were then reduced to about 40 souls and 
were officially recognized as Delawares 
and claimed territory s. of the Raritan as 
their ancient home. Their descendants 
are probably to be found among the 
Stockbridges in Wisconsin. (j. m.) 
Brotherton.—Ft Schuyler treaty (1788) quoted by 
Hall, N. W. States, 66, 1849. Brothertown.—Kirk¬ 
land (1795) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., iv, 
67-93, 1795. Nieh'tken.—J. N. B. Hewitt, inf’n, 
1886 (‘they two are brothers’: Tuscarora name). 
Wapanachki.—See Abnaki. 

Brownstown. A former Wyandot vil¬ 
lage in Wayne co., Mich., included in a 
reservation of about 2,000 acres granted to 
the Wyandot, Feb. 28, 1809, and ceded 
to the United States by treatv of Sept. 20, 
1818. 

Brule (‘burned,’ the French translation 
of Sichdngxu, ‘burnt thighs/ their own 
name, of indefinite origin). A subtribe 
of the Teton division of the great Dakota 
tribe. They are mentioned by Lewis 
and Clark (1804) as the Tetons of the 
Burnt Woods, numbering about 300 men, 
“who rove on both sides of the Missouri, 
White, and Teton rs.” In 1806 they 
were on the e. side of the Missouri from 
the mouth of the White to Teton r. 
Hayden (Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val¬ 
ley, 372, 1862) describes the country 


BULL. 301 


BRULE 


inhabited by them in 1856 as on the 
headwaters of the White and Niobrara, 
extending down these rivers about half 
their length, Teton r. forming the n. 
limit. He also says they were for a num¬ 
ber of years headed by a chief named 



TWO STRIKES—BRULE SIOUX 

Makatozaza, very friendly to the whites, 
who by uniformly good management and 
just government kept his people in order, 
regulated their hunts, and usually avoided 
placing them in the starving situations 
incident to bands led by less judicious 
chiefs. They were good hunters, usually 
well clothed and supplied with meat, and 
had comfortable lodges and a large num¬ 
ber of horses. They varied their occupa¬ 
tions by hunting buffalo, catching wild 
horses, and making war expeditions 
against the Arikara, then stationed on the 
Platte, or the Pawnee, lower down on that 
river. Every summer excursions were 
made by the young men into the Platte 
and Arkansas country in quest of wild 
horses, which abounded there at that 
time. After emigrants to California and 
Oregon began to pass through the Dakota 
country, the Brules suffered more from 
diseases introduced by them than any 
other division of the tribe, being nearest 


167 

io the trail. The treaty of Apr. 29, 1868, 
between the Sioux bands and the Gov¬ 
ernment was in a large degree brought 
about through the exertions of Swift 
Bear, a Brule chief. Nevertheless, it 
was about this time or shortly after that 
a band of Bruits took part in the attack on 
Maj. Forsyth on Republican r. Hayden 
gives 150 as the number of their lodges in 
1856. In 1890 the Upper Brules on Rose¬ 
bud res., S. I)ak., numbered 3,245; the 
Lower Brules at Crowcreek and Lower 
Brule agency, S. Dak., 1,026. Their pres¬ 
ent number as distinct from the other 
Teton is not given. 

The group is divided geographicallv 
into the Kheyatawichasha or Upper 
Brul4s, the Kutawichasha or Lower 
Bruits, and the Brules of the Platte. 



WIFE OF SPOTTED TAIL—BRUlS SIOUX 


The subdivisions are given by different 
authorities as follows: 

Lewis and Clark (I)iscov., 34, 1806): 1 
Esahateaketarpar (Isanyati?), 2 War- 
chinktarhe, 3 Choketartowomb (Choka- 
towela), 4 Ozash (see Wazhazha), 5Mene- 
sharne (see Minisala). 

In 1880 Tatankawakan, a Brul6, gave to 
J. O. Dorsey the names of 13 bands of the 
Brules, Upper and Lower: 1 Iyakoza, 2 










168 


BRULES OF THE PLATTE-BUENA VISTA 


[b. a. e. 


Chokatowela, 3 Shiyotanka, 4 Homna, 
5 Shiyosubula, 6 Kanghiyuha, 7 Pispizawi- 
chasha, 8 Waleghaunwohan, 9 Wach- 
eunpa, 10 Shawala, 11 Ihanktonwan, 12 
Nakhpakhpa, 13 Apewantanka. 

Rev. W. J. Cleveland (MS. list, 1884) 
enumerates the modern divisions as: 1 
Sichanghu, 2 Kakegha, 3 (a) Hinhan- 
shunwapa, (b) Shungkahanapin, 4 Hihak- 
anhanhanwin, 5 Hunkuwanicha, 6 Minis- 
kuyakichun, 7 (a) Kiyuksa, ( b ) Tiglabu, 
8 Wacheunpa, 9 Waglukhe, 10 Isanyati, 
11 Wagmezayuha, 12 (a) Waleghaonwo- 
han, (b) Wakhna, 13 Oglalaichichagha, 14 
Tiyochesli, 15 Wazhazha, 16 Ieskachin- 
cha, 17 Ohenonpa, 18 Okaghawichasha. 

The Brules of the Platte, not included 
in the above lists, are a part of the Brules 
(Stanley in Poole, Among the Sioux, 232, 
1881) formerly connected with Whetstone 
agency, S. Dak. (j. o. d. c. t. ) 

Babarole.—Gass, Jour., 49, 1807. Bois brule'.— 
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 21,1806 (name applied 
by the French and commonly used by the whites; 
sig. ‘ burnt wood’). bois Ruley.—Clark, MS. co¬ 
dex, quoted by Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., I, 
101, note, 1893. Broule Sioux.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, V, 494, 1855. Brucellares.—InA Aff. Rep., 
296,1846 (probably the Brules). Brule Dakotas.— 
Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., map, 1862. 
Brulees.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 295, 1855. Brule- 
Sioux.—Smithson. Misc. Col., xiv, 19, 1878. Brul- 
ies.—Hoffman (1854) in H. R. Doc. 36, 33d Cong., 
2d sess., 3, 1855. Burned.—Smet, Letters, 37, 1843. 
Burnt Hip Brule.—Robinson, Letter to Dorsey, 
B. A. E., 1879. Burnt Thighs.—Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862. Burnt-woods.— 
Ruxton, Life in Far West, 111, 1849. Ceet- 
shongos.—Corliss, Dak. vocab., 106, 1874. Checher 
E, ee ,_Clark, MS. codex, quoted by Coues, Lewis 
and Clark Exped., i, 101, note, 1893. Ishango.— 
Brackett in Smithson. Rep.,.466, 1876. Se-cang'- 
cos.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 371, 
1862. Sicaqgu.—Riggs, Dakota Gram, and Diet, 
xvi, 1852 (‘ burnt thighs’: own name). Sicaugu. — 
Hind, Red River Exped., ii, 154, 1860. Sichan- 
g US . —Warren, Dacota Country, 16,1856. Si-chan - 
koo. — Jackson (1877) quoted by Donaldson in 
Nat. Mus. Rep. 1885, 62,1886. Sitcan-xu.—Coues, 
Lewis and Clark Exped., I, 130, 1893. Tetans 
of the Burnt Woods.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1849, 85, 1850. Teton (Bois brule).—Lewis and 
Clark, Discov., 34,1806. Teton (Bois rule).—Amer. 
St. Paps., IV, 714,1832. Tetons (Boisbrule').—Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 21,1806. Tetons Brules.—Farn- 
ham, Trav., 32, 1843. Tetons of the Boise Brule.— 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., 1,146,1814. Tetons of 
the Burnedwood.—M’Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis 
and Clark, 1 ,148,1842. Tetons of the Burnt-Wood.— 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, map, 1814. Wo-ni-to'- 
na-his.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
290, 1862 (Cheyenne name). Yankton.—Clark, 
MS. codex, quoted by Coues, Lewis and Clark 
Exped., i, 101, note, 1893. 

Brules of the Platte. A part of the Brul6 
Sioux formerly connected with Whet¬ 
stone agency, S. Dak. Stanley in Boole, 
Among the Sioux, app., 232, 1881. 

Bruneau Shoshoni. A band of Wihi- 
nasht Shoshoni formerly living on Bru¬ 
neau cr., s. e. Idaho.; pop. 300 m 1868.— 
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 201, 1868.- 

Bruno’s Village. A former village in San 
Diego co., Cal., said to be Luiseno, but 
possibly Diegueno or Agua Caliente.— 
Hayes quoted by Bancroft, Nat. Races, 
i, 460, 1882. 


Brushes. See Painting. 

Buckaloon. A former Iroquois village 
on the n. side of Allegheny r., Warren 
co., Pa., above the mouth of Oil cr., near 
the site of the present town of Irvine. It 
was destroyed by Col. Brodhead of the 
Continental troops in 1779. 

Baccaloons.—Giissefeld, map, 1784. Baccatoons.— 
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Baccatous.— 
Lattrti, U. S. map, 1784. Buckaloon.—Day, Penn., 
653, 1843. Buckaloons.—Butterfield, Washington- 
Irvine Corr., 43, 1882. Buffaloons.—Letter, map, 
ca.1770. Buffler’sTown.—Homann Heirs’map,1756. 
Gachimantiagon.—Beilin, map, 1755. Kachuida- 
gon.—Marshall in Mag. Am. Hist., II, 139 (= ‘cut 
or broken reed’). Hachiriodagon.—Joncaire 
(1749) in Margry, D6c., VI, 675, 1886. Paille Cou¬ 
pee.—Ibid. 

Bucker Woman’s Town. A former Semi¬ 
nole settlement e. of Big Hammock town, 
near Long swamp, central Fla.—Bell in 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 307, 1822. 

Buckongahelas (‘ breaker in pieces ’). A 
Delaware chief who lived during the Rev¬ 
olutionary period; born in the first half of 
the 18th century. He was the son of We- 
wandochwalend, apparently a chief of a 
Delaware band in Ohio. Buckongahelas 
became the head warrior of all the Dela¬ 
ware Indians then residing on Miami and 
White rs. Although he took part with 
the English against the colonists, he does 
not appear to have been cruel to non- 
combatants; and Drake (Biog. and Hist. 
Inds., 63, 1837) says he was not only a 
great, but a noble warrior, who took 
no delight in shedding blood. The 
conduct of the English at the battle of 
Presque Isle, Ohio, in 1794, so disgusted 
him that his sympathies were diverted to 
the United States. He was present at Ft 
McIntosh, where Beaver, Pa., now stands, 
when the treaty of 1785 was made, but 
his name is not among the signers. He 
was a signer, however, of the treaty of 
Greenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 1795; of Ft. 
Wayne, Ind., June 7, 1803, and of Vin¬ 
cennes, Ind., Aug. 18, 1804. Soon after 
signing the last his death occurred, proba¬ 
bly in the same year. His name appears 
in print in various forms. (c. t. ) 

Buckskin. See Skin-dressing. 

Buckstown. A Delaware (?) village 
marked onRoyce’smap (1stRep. B. A. E., 
1881) as on the s. e. side of White r., about 
3 m. e. of Anderson, Madison co., Ind., 
on land sold in 1818. See Kiktheswemud. 

Buena Vista (Span.: ‘pleasant view’). 
A descriptive name applied to one or more 
Shoshonean or Mariposan tribes living on 
Buena Vista lake, in the lower Kern r. 
drainage, California. By treaty of June 10, 
1851, these tribes reserved a tract between 
Tejon pass and Kern r. and ceded the re¬ 
mainder of their land to the United 
States. See Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853. 

Buena Vista. A prehistoric pueblo ruin 
on a high bluff near Solomonsville, on 
Gila r., a few miles n. e. of San Jose, Gra- 


BULL. 30] 


BUENA VISTA-BUFFALO 


169 


' 


ham co., s. e. Ariz. It is probably the ruin 
which gave the name Pueblo Viejo (q. v.) 
to this part of Gila valley.—Fewkes in 
22d Rep. B. A. E., 172, 1904. 

Pueblo Viejo.— Bandelier quoted in Arch. Inst. 
Rep., v, 44, 1884. 

Buena Vista. A pueblo of the Nevome 
on the Rio Yaqui, about lat. 28°, in So¬ 
nora, Mexico.—Orozco v Berra, Geog., 
351, 1864. 

Buesanet. Mentioned in connection 
with Choinoc (Choinok) as a rancheria 
n. of Kern r., Cal., in 1775-76. It evi¬ 
dently belonged to the Mariposan family 
and lay in the vicinity of Visalia, Tulare 
co. See Garces, Diary, 289, 1900. 

Buffalo. Remains of the. early species 
of the bison are found from Alaska to 
Georgia, but the range of the present type 
(Bison americanus) was chiefly between 
the Rocky and Allegheny mts. While 
traces of the buffalo have been found as 
far e. as Cavetow n, Md., and there is doc¬ 
umentary evi¬ 
dence that the 
animal ranged 
almost if not 
quite to the 
Georgia coast, 
the lack of re¬ 
mains in the 
shell-heaps of 
the Atlantic 
shore seems to 
indicate its ab- 
sence gener¬ 
ally from that 
region, a 1 - 
though it w r as 
not unknown 
to some of the 
tribes living 
on the rivers. 

The first au¬ 
thentic knowledge of the bison or buf¬ 
falo by a European was that gained 
about 1530 by Alvar Nunez Cabeza de 
Vaca, who described the animal living 
in freedom on the plains of Texas. At 
that time the herds ranged from below 
the Rio Grande in Mexico n. w. through 
what is now e. New Mexico, Utah, Ore¬ 
gon, Washington, and British Columbia; 
thence crossing the mountains to Great 
Slave lake they roamed the valleys 
of Saskatchewan and Red rs., keeping 
to the w. of L. Winnipeg and L. Superior 
and s. of L. Michigan and L. Erie to the 
vicinity of Niagara; there turning south¬ 
ward to w. Pennsylvania and cross¬ 
ing the Alleghenies they spread over the 
w. portion of Maryland, Virginia, North 
Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, and 
n. Mississippi and Louisiana. All the 
tribes within this range depended largely 
on the buffalo for food and clothing, and 
this dependence, with the influence of 



THE BUFFALO OF GOMARA, 155+ 


the habits of the animal, profoundly af¬ 
fected tribal customs and religious rites. 
This is more clearly seen in the tribes w. of 
the Mississippi, where the people were in 
constant contact with the buffalo during 
the summer and winter migrations of the 
great northern and southern herds. These 
great herds were composed of innumera¬ 
ble smaller ones of a few thousand each, 
for the buffalo was never solitary except 
by accident. This habit affected the 
manner of hunting and led to the organ¬ 
ization of hunting parties under a leader 
and to the establishment of rules to insure 
an equal chance to every member of the 
party. 

Early writers say that among the tribes 
e. of the Missouri the hunting party, 
dividing into four parts, closed the se¬ 
lected herd in a square, then, firing the 
prairie grass, pressed in upon the herd, 
w r hich, being hedged by flame, was 
slaughtered. The accuracy of this state¬ 
ment is ques¬ 
tioned by Indi¬ 
ans, for, they 
say, the only 
time the grass 
would burn 
well was in the 
autumn, and at 
that time the 
animal w r as 
hunted for the 
pelt as much 
as for food, and 
fire would in¬ 
jure the fur. 
Fire was some¬ 
times used in 
the autumn to 
drive the deer 
fromtheprairie 
into the woods. 

In the N. pens were built of tree 
trunks lashed together and braced on the 
outside, into which the herds were driven 
and there killed. Sometimes, as on the 
upper Mississippi, a hunter disguised in a 
buffalo skin acted as a decoy, leading the 
herd to a precipice w T here many were 
killed by the headlong plunge. Upon 
the plains of Kansas and Nebraska the 
hunters formed a circle around the herd 
and then, rushing in, shot the animals 
with arrows. 

The annual summer hunting party gen¬ 
erally consisted of the entire tribe. As the 
main supply of meat and pelts was to be 
obtained, religious rites w r ere observed 
throughout the time. “Still hunting” 
was forbidden under penalty of flogging, 
and if a man slipped away to hunt for 
himself, thereby scattering a herd and 
causing loss to the tribe, he was punished, 
sometimes even to death. These severe 
regulations w T ere in force during the tribal 









170 


BUKONGEHELAS 


BULLROARER 


[b. a. e. 


or ceremonial hunt. This hunt occurred 
in June, July, and August, when the ani¬ 
mals were fat and the hair thin, the flesh 
being then in the best condition for food 
and the pelts easiest to dress on both sides 
for the making of clothing, shields, packs, 
bags, ropes, snowshoes, tent and boat 
covers. The meat was cut into thin sheets 
and strips and hung upon a framework of 
poles to dry in'the sun. When fully 
“jerked ” it was folded up and put into 
parfleche packs to keep for winter use. 
A cow was estimated to yield about 45 
pounds of dried meat and 50 pounds of 
pemmican, besides the marrow, which 
was preserved in bladder skins, and the 
tallow, which was poured into skin bags. 
The sinew of the animal furnished bow¬ 
strings, thread for sewing, and fiber for 
ropes. The horns were made into spoons 
and drinking vessels, and the tips were 
used for cupping purposes; the buffalo 
horn was also worn as insignia of office. 
The hair of the buffalo was woven into 
reatas, belts, and personal ornaments. 
The dried droppings of the animal, known 
among plainsmen as “buffalo chips,” 
were valuable as fuel. 

Tribal regulations controlled the cut¬ 
ting up of the animal and the distribution 
of the parts. The skin and certain parts 
of the carcass belonged to the man who 
had slain the buffalo; the remainder was 
divided according to fixed rules among 
the helpers, which afforded an opportu¬ 
nity to the poor and disabled to procure 
food. Butchering was generally done by 
men on the field, each man’s-portion be¬ 
ing taken to his tent and given to the 
women as their property. 

The buffalo was hunted in the winter 
by small, independent but organized par¬ 
ties, not subject to the ceremonial exac¬ 
tions of the tribal hunt. The pelts se¬ 
cured at this time were for bedding and 
for garments of extra weight and warmth. 
The texture of the buffalo hide did not 
admit of fine dressing, hence was used for 
coarse clothing, moccasins, tent covers, 
parfleche cases, and other articles. The 
hide of the heifer killed in the fall or 
early winter made the finest robe. 

The buffalo was supposed to be the 
instructor of doctors who dealt with 
the treatment of wounds, teaching them 
in dreams where to find healing plants 
and the manner of their use. The mul¬ 
tifarious benefits derived from the animal 
brought the buffalo into close touch with 
the people: It figured as a gentile totem, 
its appearance and movements were re¬ 
ferred to in gentile names, its habits gave 
designations to the months, and it be¬ 
came the symbol of the leader and the 
type of long life and plenty; ceremonies 
w r ere held in its honor, myths recounted its 
creation, and its folktales delighted old and 


young. The practical extinction of the 
buffalo with the last quarter of the 19th 
century gave a deathblow to the ancient 
culture of thetribeslivingwithin its range. 

Consult Allen in Mem. Geol. Survey of 
Kentucky, i, pt. n, 1876; Chittenden, Fur 
Trade, 1902; Hornaday in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1887, 1889; Relation of Alvar Nunez Ca- 
be^ade Vaca, B. Smith trans., 1871; Win- 
ship, Coronado Expedition, 14th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1896. (a. c. f.) 

Bukongehelas. See Buckongahelas. 

Buldam. A former Porno village on 
the n. bank of Big r. and e. of Mendocino, 
Mendocino co., Cal. (s. a. b. ) 

Bul'-dam Po'-mo.— Powers in Oont. N. A. Ethnol., 
ill, 155, 1877. 

Buli. The'Butterfly clan of the Hopi. 
Boli. —Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Buli win- 
wu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,584,1900 (win- 
wli=‘clan’). Bu'-li wiin-wii. —Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop., vii, 405, 1894. Povoli.— Voth, Hopi 
Proper Names, 102,1905. 

Buli. The Butterfly phratry of the Hopi. 

Bu-li'-nya-mu.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., VI, 367, 
1893 (nya-mii,=‘ people’). 

Buliso. The Evening Primrose clan of 
the Honani (Badger) phratry of the 
Hopi. 

Bu-li'-so. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 

Bulitzequa. A former pueblo of the 
Jemez, in New Mexico, the exact site of 
w r hich is not known.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 207, 1892. 

Bull Dog Sioux. A Teton Dakota divi¬ 
sion-on Rosebud res., S. Dak.—Donaldson 
in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1885, 63, 1886. 

Bullets Town. Marked on Hutchin’s 
map in Bouquet’s Exped., 1766, as in 
Coshocton co., Ohio, on both sides of 
Muskingum r., about half way between 
Walhonding r. and Tomstown. Probably 
a Delaware village. 

Bullroarer. An instrument for pro¬ 
ducing rhythmic sound, consisting of a 
narrow, usually rectangular slat of wood, 
from about 6 in. to 2 ft. long and £ in. to 2 
in. wide, suspended by one end to a cord, 
the latter often being provided with a 
wooden handle. The bullroarer, which 
is often painted with symbolic designs, is 
whirled rapidly with a uniform motion 
about the head, and the pulsation of the 
air against the slat gives a characteristic 
whizzing or roaring sound. The instru¬ 
ment has also been called whizzer, whiz¬ 
zing stick, lightning stick, and rhombus, 
and its use was quite general. In North 
America it has been found among the 
Eskimo, Kwakiutl, Arapaho, and most 
western tribes, including the Navaho, 
Apache, Ute, the central Californian 
tribes (where, among the Porno, it is 
nearly 2 ft. long),Pueblos, and in the an¬ 
cient cliff-dwellings. The Hopi, who re¬ 
gard the bullroarer as a prayer-stick of 
the thunder and its whizzing noise as 
representing the wind that accompanies 
thunderstorms, make the tablet portion 


BULL. 30] 


BULLS-BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 


171 


from a piece of lightning-riven wood and 
measure the length of the string from the 
heart to the tips of the fingers of the out¬ 
stretched right hand (Fewkes). The 
Navaho make the bullroarer of the same 
material, but regard 
it as representing the 
voice of the thunder- 
bird, whose figure 
they often paint upon 
it, the eyes being in- 
dicated by inset 
pieces of turquoise 
(Culin). Bourkewas 
led to believe that 
the rhombus of the 
Apache was made by 
the medicine men 
from the wood of pine 
or fir that had been 
struck by lightning 
on the mountain tops. 

Apache, Hopi, and 
Zunibullroarers bear 
lightning symbols, 
and while in the 
semi-arid region the 
implement is used to invoke clouds, 
lightning, and rain, and to warn the initi¬ 
ated that rites are being performed, in 
the humid area it is used to implore the 
wind to bring fair weather. The bull- 
roarer is a sacred implement, associated 
with rain, wind, and lightning, and among 
the Kwakiutl, according to Boas, with 
ghosts. By some tribes it retains this 
sacred character, but among others it has 
degenerated into a child’s toy, for which 
use its European antitype also survives 
among civilized nations. 

Consult Bourke, Medicine-men of the 
Apache, 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Fewkes, 
Tusayan Snake Ceremonies, 16th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1897; Haddon, Study of Man, 
219, 1898; Lang, Custom and Myth, 39, 
1885; Mooney, Ghost Dance Religion, 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Murdoch in 9th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1892; Schmeltz in Verh. d. Ve- 
reins f. naturw. Unterhaltung zu Ham¬ 
burg, ix, 92, 1896. (w. h. ) 

Bulls. A Hidatsa band or society; 
mentioned by Culbertson (Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 143, 1851) as a clan. For a similar 
society among the Piegan, see Stumiks. 

Bulltown. A Shawnee or Mingo vil¬ 
lage of 5 families on Little Kanawha r., 
W. Va.; destroyed by whites in 1772.— 
Kaufmann, W. Penn., 180, 1851. 

Buokongahelas. See Buckongahelas. 

Buquibava. A former Pima rancheria 
of Sonora, Mexico, visited by Kino about 
1697-99; situated on San Ignacio r., below 
San Ignacio (of which mission it was sub¬ 
sequently a visita), at the site of the 
present town of Magdalena. Pop. 63 in 
1730, probably including some Tepoca. 

(f. w. h.) 


Magdalena.—Doc. of 1730 quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, 1,494,514,1884. Magdalena de Buvuiba- 
va.— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. M., 358,1889 (quoting 
Mange, 1699). Santa Madalena.—Hardy, Travels, 
422, 1829. Santa Magdalena de Buquibava.—Kino 
(1694) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th ser., I, 248, 1856. 
S[anta] M[aria] Magdalen.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., 
r, map, 1759. S. Magdalena.—Kino, map (1701) 
in Bancroft, Ariz. and N. M., 360,1889. 

Bureau of American Ethnology. The 
Bureau of (American) Ethnology was 
organized in 1879 and was placed by Con¬ 
gress under the supervision of the Smith¬ 
sonian Institution. It was directed that 
all the archives, records, and materials 
relating to the Indian tribes collected by 
the Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region 
under the auspices of the Interior Depart¬ 
ment should be transferred to the Insti¬ 
tution for use by the Bureau. Prof. 
Spencer F. Baird, Secretary of the Insti¬ 
tution, recognizing the great value of Maj. 
J. W. Powell’s services in initiating re¬ 
searches among the western tribes, 
selected him as the person best qualified 
to organize and conduct the work. 

The National Government had already 
recognized the importance of researches 
among the tribes. As early as 1795 the 
Secretary of War appointed Leonard S. 
Shaw deputy agent to the Cherokee with 
instructions to study their language and 
home life and to collect materials for 
an Indian history. President Jefferson, 
who planned the Lewis and Clark expedi¬ 
tion of 1804-06, “for the purpose of ex¬ 
tending the internal commerce of the 
United States,” especially stipulated, in 
his instructions to Lewis, the observa¬ 
tions on the native tribes that should be 
made by the expedition for the use of 
the Government. These were to include 
their names and numbers; the extent and 
limits of their possessions; their relations 
with other tribes or nations; their lan¬ 
guage, traditions, and monuments; their 
ordinary occupations in agriculture, fish¬ 
ing, hunting, war, arts, and the imple¬ 
ments for these; their food, clothing, and 
domestic accommodations; the diseases 
prevalent among them and the remedies 
they use; moral and physical circum¬ 
stances which distinguish them from 
known tribes; peculiarities in their laws, 
customs, and dispositions; and articles of 
commerce they may need or furnish, and 
to what extent; “and considering the in¬ 
terest which every nation has in extend¬ 
ing and strengthening the authority of 
reason and justice among the people 
around them, it will be useful to acquire 
what knowledge you can of the state of 
morality, religion, and information 
among them, as it may better enable 
those who endeavor to civilize and in¬ 
struct them to adapt their measures to 
the existing notions and practices of those 
on whom they are to operate.” During 
much of his life Jefferson, like Albert 



apache Bullroarer; Length 
7 Inches, (bourke) 




172 


BUREAU 0F AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 


[b. a. e. ** 


Gallatin later on, manifested his deep in¬ 
terest in the ethnology of the American 
tribes by publishing accounts of his ob¬ 
servations that are of extreme value 
to-day. In 1820 Rev. Jedidiah Morse 
was commissioned by the President to 
make a tour for the purpose of “ascer¬ 
taining, for the use of the Government, 
the actual state of the Indian tribes 
of our country.’’ The Government also 
aided the publication of Schoolcraft’s 
voluminous work on the Indians. The 
various War Department expeditions 
and surveys had reported on the tribes 
and monuments 
encountered in 
the W.; the 
Hayden Survey 
of the Territo¬ 
ries had exam¬ 
ined and de¬ 
scribed many of 
the cliff-dwell¬ 
ings and pue¬ 
blos, and had 
published pa- 
personthetribes 
of the Missis¬ 
sippi valley, and 
Maj. Powell, as 
chief of the Sur¬ 
vey of the Rocky 
Mountain Re¬ 
gion, had ac¬ 
complished im¬ 
portant work 
among thetribes 
of the Rio Colo¬ 
rado drainage in 
connection with 
his geological 
and geographic¬ 
al researches, 
and had com¬ 
menced a series 
of publications 
known as Con¬ 
tributions to 
North American 
Ethnology. The 
Smithsonian In¬ 
stitution had al¬ 
so taken an ac¬ 
tive part in the publication of the results 
of researches undertaken by private stu¬ 
dents. The first volume of its Contribu¬ 
tions to Knowledge is The Ancient Monu¬ 
ments of the Mississippi Valley, by Squier 
and Davis, and up to the founding of the 
Bureau of Ethnology the Institution had 
issued upward of 600 papers on ethnology 
and archeology. These early researches 
had taken a wide range, but in a some¬ 
what unsystematic way, and Maj. Powell, 
on taking charge of the Bureau, began 
the task of classifying the subject-matter 
of the entire aboriginal field and the 


selection of those subjects that seemed to 
require immediate attention. There were 
numerous problems of a practical nature 
to be dealt with, and at the same time 
many less strictly practical but none the 
less important problems to be considered. 
Some of the practical questions were 
readily approached, but in the main they 
were so involved with the more strictly 
scientific questions that the two could not 
be considered separately. 

From its inception the Government has 
had before it problems arising from the 
presence within its domain, as dependent 
wards, of more 
than 300,000.ab- 
origines. In the 
main the diffi¬ 
culties encoun¬ 
tered in solving 
these problems 
arose from a lack 
of knowledge of 
the distribution, 
numbers, rela¬ 
tionships, and 
languages of the 
tribes, and a real 
appreciation of 
their character, 
culture status, 
needs, and possi¬ 
bilities. It was 
recognized that 
a knowledge of 
these elements 
lies at the very 
foundation of in¬ 
telligent admin¬ 
istration, and 
thus one of the 
important ob¬ 
jects in organiz- 
ingtheBureau of 
Ethnology was 
that of obtaining 
such knowledge 
of the tribes as 
would enable 
the several 
branches of the 
Government to 
know and ap¬ 
preciate the aboriginal population, and 
that at the same time would enable the 
people generally to give intelligent ad¬ 
ministration sympathetic support. An 
essential step in this great work was that 
of locating the tribes and classifying them 
in such manner as to make it possible to 
assemble them in harmonious groups, 
based on relationship of blood, language, 
customs, beliefs, and grades of culture. It 
was found that within the area with which 
the nation has to deal there are spoken 
some 500 Indian languages, as distinct from 
one another as French is from English, and 



J. W. POWELL, FOUNDER AND DIRECTOR OF THE BUREAU OF AMERICAN 
ETHNOLOGY 




BULL. 30] 


BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 


173 


that these languages are grouped in more 
than 50 linguistic families. It was found, 
further, that in connection with the dif¬ 
ferences in language there are many other 
distinctions requiring attention. Tribes 
allied in language are often allied also in 
capacity, habits, tastes, social organiza¬ 
tion, religion, arts, and industries, and it 
was plain that a satisfactory investigation 
of the tribes required a systematic study 
of all of these conditions. It was not 
attempted, however, to cover the whole 
field in detail. When sufficient progress 
had been made in the classification of the 
tribes, certain groups were selected as 
types, and investigations among them 
were so pursued as to yield results appli¬ 
cable in large measure to all. Up to the 
present time much progress has been 
made and a deeper insight has been gained 
into the inner life and character of the 
native people, and thus, in a large sense, 
of primitive peoples generally, than had 
been reached before in the world’s his¬ 
tory. Many of the results of these re¬ 
searches have already been published 
and are in the hands of all civilized 
nations. 

Some of the more directly practical re¬ 
sults accomplished may be briefly men¬ 
tioned: (1) A study of the relations, 
location, and numbers of the tribes, and 
their classification into groups or families, 
based on affinity in language—a necessary 
basis for dealing with the tribes practi¬ 
cally or scientifically; (2) a study of the 
numerous sociologic, religious, and in¬ 
dustrial problems involved, an acquaint¬ 
ance with which is essential to the 
intelligent management of the tribes in 
adjusting them to the requirements of 
civilization; (3) a history of the relations 
of the Indian and white races embodied 
in a volume on land cessions; (4) investi¬ 
gations into the physiology, medical 
practices, and sanitation of a people who 
suffer keenly from imperfect adaptation 
to the new conditions imposed on them; 

(5) the preparation of bibliographies em¬ 
bodying all works relating to the tribes; 

(6) a study of their industrial and eco¬ 
nomic resources; (7) a study of the an¬ 
tiquities of the country with a view to 
their record and preservation; and (8) a 
handbook of the tribes, embodying, in 
condensed form, the accumulated infor¬ 
mation of many years. 

The more strictly scientific results re¬ 
late to every department of anthropologic 
research—physical, psychological, lin¬ 
guistic, sociologic, religious, technic, and 
esthetic—and are embodied in numerous 
papers published i-n the reports, contribu¬ 
tions, and bulletins; and the general re¬ 
sults in each of these departments, com¬ 


piled and collated by the highest available 
authorities, have now begun to appear in 
the form of handbooks. 

Maj. Powell, director, died Sept. 23, 
1902, and on Oct. 11 W. H. Holmes was 
appointed to succeed him, with the title 
of chief. In addition to the chief the 
scientific staff of the Bureau comprises 
(1906) 7 ethnologists, an illustrator, an 
editor, a librarian, and 7 other employees. 
Besides the regular scientific members 
of the Bureau there are numerous asso¬ 
ciates or collaborators, including many 
of the best-known ethnologists of the 
country, who contribute papers or who 
engage at intervals in research work 
under the Bureau’s auspices. The li¬ 
brary contains about 12,000 volumes 
and 7,000 pamphlets, accumulated largely 
through exchange of publications. There 
are about 1,600 linguistic manuscripts, 
and 15,000 photographic negatives illus¬ 
trating the aborigines and their activities. 

The publications consist of Contribu¬ 
tions to North American Ethnology, An¬ 
nual Reports, Bulletins, Introductions, 
and Miscellaneous Publications. The 
series of contributions was begun by the 
Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region 
before the organization of the Bureau, 3 
volumes having been completed, and 
was discontinued after 8 volumes had 
been issued. Twenty-three annual re¬ 
ports, comprising 28 volumes, 30 bulle¬ 
tins (including the present Handbook), 4 
introductions, and 6 miscellaneous pub¬ 
lications have appeared. The present 
edition of the annual reports and bulle¬ 
tins is 9,850 copies, of which the Senate 
receives 1,500, the House of Representa¬ 
tives 3,000, and the Bureau 3,500 copies. 
Of the Bureau edition 500 are distributed 
by the Smithsonian Institution. From 
the remaining 1,850 copies are drawn the 
personal copies of members of Congress, 
and 500 for distribution to Government 
libraries and other libraries throughout 
the country, as designated by Congress; 
the remainder are sold by the Superin¬ 
tendent of Documents, Government Print¬ 
ing Office. With the exception of the few 
disposed of by the Superintendent of 
Documents, the publications are distrib¬ 
uted free of charge; the popular demand 
for them is so great, however, that the 
editions are soon exhausted. The quota 
allowed the Bureau is distributed to 
libraries, to institutions of learning, and 
to collaborators and others engaged in 
anthropologic research or in teaching. 
The publications are as follows: 

Contributions to North American Eth¬ 
nology.— Published in part under the auspices 
of the Department of the Interior, U. S. Geo¬ 
graphical and Geological Survey of the Rocky 
Mountain Region, J, W. Powell in charge. Vols. 
i-vii and ix. 


174 


BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 


[B. a. e. 


Vol. i, 1877: 

Part i.—Tribes of the extreme Northwest, by 
W. H. Dali. 

On the distribution and nomenclature of 
the native tribes of Alaska and the adja¬ 
cent territory. 

On succession in the shell-heaps of the 
Aleutian islands. 

On the origin of the Innuit. 

Appendix to part i. Linguistics. 

Notes on the natives of Alaska, by J. Furu- 
helm. 

Terms of relationship used by the Innuit: a 
series obtained from natives of Cumber- 
' land inlet, by W. H. Dali. 

Vocabularies, t>y George Gibbs and W. H. 
Dali. 

Note on the use of numerals among the 
T’sim si-an', by George Gibbs. 

Part II. Tribes of western Washington and 
northwestern Oregon, by George Gibbs. 
Appendix to part n. Linguistics. 
Vocabularies, by George Gibbs, Wm. F. 

Tolmie, and G. Mengarini. 

Dictionary of the Niskwalli, by George 
Gibbs. 

Vol. ii, 1890: 

The Klamath Indians of southwestern Oregon, 
by Albert Samuel Gatschet. Two parts. 

Vol. in, 1877: 

Tribes of California, by Stephen Powers. 
Appendix. Linguistics, edited by J. W. 
Powell. 

Vol. iv, 1881: 

Houses and house-life of the American aborig¬ 
ines, by Lewis H. Morgan. 

Vol. v, 1882: 

Observations on cup-shaped and other lapida- 
rian sculptures in the Old World and in 
America, by Charles Rau. 

On prehistoric trephining and cranial amulets, 
by Robert Fletcher. 

A study of the manuscript Troano, by Cyrus 
Thomas, with an introduction by D. G. 
Brin ton. 

Vol. vi, 1890: 

The (fegiha language, by J. Owen Dorsey. 

Vol. vn, 1890: 

A Dakota-English dictionary, by Stephen R. 
Riggs, edited by J. Owen Dorsey. 

Vol. viii: 

[Not issued]. 

Vol. ix, 1893: 

Dakota grammar, texts, and ethnography, by 
Stephen R. Riggs, edited by J. Owen Dorsey. 
Annual Reports op the Bureau of (Ameri¬ 
can) Ethnology to the Secretary of the 
Smithsonian Institution. 23 vols. roy. 8°. 
First Report (1879-80), 1881. 

Report of the Director. 

On the evolution of language, as exhibited 
in the specialization of the grammatic processes; 
the differentiation of the parts of speech, and 
the integration of the sentence; from a study of 
Indian languages, by J. W. Powell. 

Sketch of the mythology of the North American 
Indians, by J. W. Powell. 

Wyandot government: A short study of tribal 
society, by ,T. W. Powell. 

On limitations to the use of some anthropologic 
data, by J. W. Powell. 

A further contribution to the study of the mor¬ 
tuary customs of the North American Indians, by 
H. C. Yarrow. 

Studies in Central American picture-writing, 
by Edward S. Holden. 

Cessions of land by Indian tribes to the United 
States: Illustrated by those in the State of In¬ 
diana, by C. C. Royce. 

Sign language among North American Indians, 
compared with that among other peoples and 
deaf-mutes, by Garrick Mallery. 

Catalogue of linguistic manuscripts in the 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology, by J. C. 
Pilling. 

Illustration of the method of recording Indian 
languages. From the manuscripts of J. Owen 
Dorsey, A. S, Gatschet, and S. R. Riggs. 


Second Report (1880-81), 1883. 

Report of the Director. 

Zuni fetiches, by F. H. Cushing. 

Myths of the Iroquois, by Erminnie A. Smith. 

Animal carvings from mounds of the Mississippi 
valley, by H. W. Henshaw. 

Navajo silversmiths, by Washington Matthews. 

Art in shell of the ancient Americans, by W. 
H. Holmes. 

Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained 
from the Indians of New Mexico and Arizona in 
1879, by James Stevenson. 

Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained 
from the Indians of New Mexico in 1880, by James 
Stevenson. 

Third Report (1881-82), 1884. 

Report of the Director (including On activital 
similarities). 

Notes on certain Maya and Mexican manu¬ 
scripts, by Cyrus Thomas. 

On masks, labrets, and certain aboriginal cus¬ 
toms, by W. H. Dali. 

Omaha sociology, by J. Owen Dorsey. 

Navajo weavers, by Washington Matthews. 

Prehistoric textile fabrics of the United States, 
derived from impressions on pottery, by W. H. 
Holmes. 

Illustrated catalogue of a portion of the collec¬ 
tions made by the Bureau of Ethnology during 
the field season of 1881, by W. H. Holmes. 

Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained 
from the pueblos of Zuni, N. Mex., and Wolpi, 
Ariz., in 1881, by James Stevenson. 

Fourth Report (1882-83), 1886. 

Report of the Director. 

Dictographs of the North American Indians. 
A preliminary paper, by Garrick Mallery. 

Pottery of the ancient Pueblos, by W. H. 
Holmes. 

Ancient pottery of the Mississippi valley, by 
W. H. Holmes. 

Origin and development of form and ornament 
in ceramic art, by W. H. Holmes. 

A study of Pueblo pottery as illustrative of Zuni 
culture growth, by F. H. Cushing. 

Fifth Report (1883-84), 1887. 

Report of the Director. 

Burial mounds of the northern sections of the 
United States, by Cyrus Thomas. 

The Cherokee Nation of Indians: A narrative 
of their official relations with the Colonial and 
Federal Governments, by C. C. Royce. 

The mountain chant: A Navajo ceremony, by 
Washington Matthews. 

The Seminole Indians of Florida, by Clay 
MacCauley. 

The religious life of the Zuni child, by Matilda 
C. Stevenson. 

Sixth Report (1884-85), 1888. 

Report of the Director. 

Ancient art of the province of Chiriqui, Colom¬ 
bia, by W. H. Holmes. 

A study of the textile art in its relation to the 
development of form and ornament, by W. H. 
Holmes. 

Aids to the study of the Maya codices, by Cyrus 
Thomas. 

Osage traditions, by J. Owen Dorsey. 

The central Eskimo, by Franz Boas. 

Seventh Report (1885-86), 1891. 

Report of the Director. 

Indian linguistic families of America north of 
Mexico, by J. W. Powell. 

The Mide'wiwin or “grand medicine society ” 
of the Ojibwa, by W. J. Hoffman. 

The sacred formulas of the Cherokees, by James 
Mooney. 

Eighth Report (1886-87), 1891. 

Report of the Director. 

A study of Pueblo architecture: Tusayan and 
Cibola, by Victor Mindeleff. 

Ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical 
sand painting of the Navajo Indians, bv James 
Stevenson. 

Ninth Report (1887-88) 1892. 

Report of the Director. 

Ethnological results of the Point Barrow expe¬ 
dition, by John Murdoch. 


DULL. 30] 


BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 


175 


The medicine-men of the Apache, by John G. 
Bourke. 

Tenth Report (1888-89), 1893. 

Report of the Director. 

Picture writing of the American Indians, by 
Garrick Mallery. 

Eleventh Report (1889-90), 1894. 

Report of the Director. 

The Sia, by Matilda C. Stevenson. 

Ethnology of the Ungava district, Hudson bay 
territory, by Lucien M. Turner. 

A study of Siouan cults, by J. Owen Dorsey. 

Twelfth Report (1890-91), 1894. 

Report of the Director. 

Reportonthemound explorationsof the Bureau 
of Ethnology, bv Cyrus Thomas. 

Thirteenth Report (1891-92), 1896. 

Report of the Director. 

Prehistoric textile art of eastern United States, 
by W. H. Holmes. 

Stone art, by Gerard Fowke. 

Aboriginal remains in Verde valley, Arizona, 
by Cosmos Mindeleff. 

Omaha dwellings, furniture, and implements, 
by J. Owen Dorsey. 

Casa Grande ruin, by Cosmos Mindeleff. 

Outlines of Zuni creation myths, by F. H. 
Cushing. 

Fourteenth Report (1892-93), 1896. 

Report of the Director. 

The Menomini Indians, by Walter J. Hoffman. 

The Coronado expedition, 1540-42, by G. P. 
Win ship. 

The Ghost-dance religion and the Sioux out¬ 
break of 1890, by James Moonev. 

Fifteenth Report (1893-94), 1897. 

Report of the Director (including On regimen¬ 
tation). 

Stone implements of the Potomac-Chesapeake 
tidewater province, by W. H. Holmes. 

The Siouan Indians: A preliminary sketch, by 
W J McGee. 

Siouan sociology: A posthumous paper, by 
J. Owen Dorsey. 

Tusayan katcinas, by J. Walter Fewkes. 

The "repair of Casa Grande ruin, Arizona, in 
1891, by Cosmos Mindeleff. 

Sixteenth Report (1894-95), 1897. 

Report of the Director, and list of publications 
of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

Primitive trephining in Peru, by M. A. Muniz 
and W J McGee. 

The cliff ruins of Canyon de Chelly, Arizona, 
by Cosmos Mindeleff. 

Day symbols of the Maya year, by Cyrus 
Thomas. 

Tusayan snake ceremonies,by J. Walter Fewkes. 

Seventeenth Report (1895-96), 1898. 

Report of the Director, and list of publications 
of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 

The Seri Indians, by W J McGee, with Com¬ 
parative lexicology, by J. N. B. Hewitt. 

Calendar history of the Kiowa Indians, by 
James Mooney. 

Navaho houses, by Cosmos Mindeleff. 

Archeological expedition to Arizona in 1895, by 
J. Walter Fewkes. 

Eighteenth Report (1896-97), 1899. 

Report of the Director. 

The Eskimo about Bering strait, by E. W. 
Nelson. 

Indian land cessions in the United States, com¬ 
piled by C. C. Royce, with an introduction by 
Cyrus Thomas. 

Nineteenth Report (1897-98), 1900. 

Report of the Director (including Esthetology, 
or the science of activities designed to give 
pleasure). 

Myths of the Cherokee, by James Mooney. 

Tusayan migration traditions, by J. Walter 
Fewkes. 

Localization of Tusayan clans, by Cosmos 
Mindeleff. 

Mounds in northern Honduras, by Thomas 
Gann. ' 

Mayan calendar systems, by Cyrus Thomas. 

Primitive numbers, by W J McGee. 

Numeral systems of Mexico and Central Amer¬ 
ica, by Cyrus Thomas. 


Tusayan flute and snake ceremonies, by J. 
Walter Fewkes. 

The wild-rice gatherers of the upper lakes, a 
study in American primitive economics, by A. E. 
»J 0 n ks. 

Twentieth Report (1898-99) 1903. 

Report of the Director (including Technology, 
or the science of industries; Sociology, or the 
science of institutions; Philology, or the science 
of activities designed for expression; Sophiology, 
or the science of activities designed to give in¬ 
struction; List of publications of the Bureau of 
American Ethnology). 

Aboriginal pottery of the eastern United States, 
by W. H. Holmes. 

Twenty-first Report (1899-1900), 1903. 

Report of the Director. 

Hopi katcinas, drawn by native artists, by 
J. Walter Fewkes. 

Iroquois cosmogony, by J. N. B. Hewitt. 

Twenty-second Report (1900-01), 1903. 

Report of the Acting Director. 

Two summers’ work in pueblo ruins, by J. 
Walter Fewkes. 

Mayan calendar systems—II, by Cyrus Thomas. 

The Hako, a Pawnee ceremony," by Alice C. 
Fletcher. 

Twenty-third Report (1901-02), 1904. 

Report of the Acting Director. 

The Zuni Indians, by Matilda C. Stevenson. 

Twenty-fourth Report (1902-03), 1905. 

Report of the Chief. 

American Indian games, by Stewart Culin. 

Bulletins.—T hirty volumes, 8°. 

(1) Bibliography of the Eskimo language, by 
J. C. Pilling, 1887. 

(2) Perforated stones from California, by II. W. 
Henshaw, 1887. 

(3) The use of gold and other metals among 
the ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui, Isthmus of 
Darien, by W. H. Holmes, 1887. 

(4) Work in mound exploration of the Bureau 
of Ethnology, by Cyrus Thomas, 1887. 

(5) Bibliography of the Siouan languages, by 
J. C. Pilling, 1887. 

(6) Bibliography of the Iroquoian languages, 
by J. C. Pilling, 1888. 

(7) Textile fabrics of ancient Peru, by W. H. 
Holmes, 1889. 

(8) The problem of the Ohio mounds, by Cyrus 
Thomas, 1889. 

(9) Bibliography of the Muskhogean languages, 
by J. C. Pilling, 1889. 

(10) The circular, square, and octagonal earth¬ 
works of Ohio, by Cyrus Thomas. 1889. 

(11) Omaha and Ponka letters, by J. Owen 
Dorsey, 1891. 

(12) Catalogue of prehistoric works east of the 
Rocky mountains, by Cyrus Thomas, 1891. 

(13) Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, 
by J. C. Pilling, 1891. 

(14) Bibliography of the Athapascan languages, 
by J. C. Pilling, 1892. 

(15) Bibliography of the Chinookan languages 
(including the Chinook jargon), by J. C. Pilling, 
1893. 

(16) Bibliography of the Salishan languages, 
by J. C. Pilling, 1893. 

(17) The Pamunkev Indians of Virginia, by 
J. G. Pollard, 1894. 

(18) The Maya year, by Cyrus Thomas, 1894. 

(19) Bibliography of the Wakashan languages, 
by J. C. Pilling, 1894. 

(20) Chinook texts, by Franz Boas. 1894. 

(21) An ancient quarry in Indian Territory, by 
W. H. Holmes, 1894. 

(22) The Siouan tribes of the East, by James 
Mooney, 1894. 

(23) Archeologic investigations in James and 
Potomac valleys, by Gerard Fowke, 1894. 

(24) List of the publications of the Bureau of 
Ethnology with index to authors and subjects, 
by F. W. Hodge, 1894. 

"(25) Natick dictionary, by J. H. Trumbull, 
1903. 

(26) Kathlamet texts, by Franz Boas, 1901. 

(27) Tsimshian texts, by Franz Boas, 1902. 

(28) Mexican and Central American antiquities 
and calendar systems, twenty-nine papers, by 


176 


BUREAU OF INDIAN AFFAIRS-BUSK 


[B. a. e. 


Eduard Seler, E. Forstemann, Paul Sehellhas, 
Carl Sapper, and E. P. Dieseldorff, translated 
from the German under the supervision of Charles 
P. Bowditch. 

(29) Haida texts and myths, Skidegate dialect, 
by J. R. Swanton. 

(30) Handbook of the Indians north of Mexico, 
Parts i and n. 

Introductions. —Four volumes, 4°. 

(1) Introduction to the study of Indian lan¬ 
guages, by J. W. Powell, 1877. 

(2) Introduction to the study of Indian lan¬ 
guages, 2d edition, by J. W. Powell, 1880. 

(3) Introduction to the study of sign language 
among the North American Indians, by Garrick 
Mallery, 1880. 

(4) Introduction to the study of mortuary cus¬ 
toms among the North American Indians, by 
H. C. Yarrow, 1880. 

Miscellaneous Publications: 

(1) A collection of gesture-signs and signals 
of the North American Indians, by Garrick Mal¬ 
lery, 1880. 

(2) Proof-sheets of a bibliography of the lan¬ 
guages of the North American Indians, by J. C. 
Pilling, 1885. 

(3) Linguistic families of the Indian tribes 
north of Mexico [by James Mooney, 1885]. 

(4) Map of linguistic stocks of American In¬ 
dians north of Mexico, by J. W. Powell, 1891. 

(5) Tribes of North America, with synonomy: 
Skittagetan family [bv Henry W. Henshaw, 
1890]. 

(6) Dictionary of American Indians north of 
Mexico [advance pages], 1903. 

(w. H. H.) 

Bureau of Indian Affairs.— See Office of 
Indian Affairs. 

Burges’ Town. A Seminole town, the 
exact location of which is unknown, but 
it was probably on or near Flint or St 
Marys r., s. w. Ga.—Connell (1793) in 
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 384, 1832. 

Burial. See Mortuary customs, Urn 
burial. 

Burnt Woods Chippewa. A former Chip¬ 
pewa band on Bois Brule r., near the w. 
end of L. Superior, n. Wis. 

Chippeways of the Burnt Woods. —Schoolcraft, 
Travels, 321, 1821. 

Burrard Inlet No. 3 Reserve. The name 
given by the Canadian Department of 
Indian Affairs to one of 6 divisions of 
the Squawmish, q. v.; pop. 30 in 1902. 

Burrard Saw Mills Indians. The local 
name for a body of Squawmish of Fraser 
River agency, Brit. Col.; noted only in 
1884, when their number was given as 
232.—Can. Ind. Aff., 187, 1884. 

Busac. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Sobaipuri, visited by Kino about 
1697; situated, apparently, on Arivaipa 
cr., a tributary of the San Pedro, e. of 
old Camp Grant, s. Ariz., although Bernal 
(Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 356, 1889) 
states that the settlement w r as on a creek 
flowing e. 

Busanic. A Pima settlement s. w. of 
Guevavi, near the Arizona-Sonora bound¬ 
ary, in lat. 31° 10', long. 111° 1 O', visited 
by Kino in 1694 and by Kino and Mange 
in 1699. It was made a visita of Guevavi 
mission at an early date; pop. 253 in 1730, 
41 in 1764. See Kino (1694) in Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 252, 1856; Rudo 
Ensayo (1763), 150, 1863; Mange quoted 


by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 358, 
1889. 

Bisanig. — Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 524, 1884. 
Busani. —Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 408, 1748. 
Busanic. —Kino, op. cit. Busnio. —Venegas, Hist. 
Cal., i, map, 1759. Busona.— Box, Adventures, 
270,1869. Bussani.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347, 
1864. Cinco Sehores Busanic. —Sonora materiales 
(1730) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 514, 
1884. Ruzany. —Land Office map, U. S., 1881. S. 
Ambrosio Busanic. —Kino (1699) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, I, 270, 1884. San Ambrosio 
de Busanio. —Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 300, 1759. 
Susanna.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726 (misprint). 

Bushamul. A Nishinam village for¬ 
merly existing in the vallev of Bear r., 
Cal. 

Bashonees.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 
Booshamool.—Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22, 
1874. Bu'-sha-mul.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth- 
nol., hi, 316, 1877. Bushones.—Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, i, 450, 1874. Bushumnes.—Hale, Ethnog. 
and Philol., 631, 1846. 

Bushy Head. See Unaduti. 

Businausee (‘echo maker,’ from buswa- 
wag, ‘echo,’ referring to the achichaJc, 
crane). A phratry of the Chippewa. 

Bus-in-as-see.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
V, 46, 1885. Bus-in-aus-e.—Ibid., 44. Bus-in-aus-e- 
wug.—Ibid., 88 (plural). 

Busk (Creek: puskita, ‘afast’). A fes¬ 
tival of the Creeks, by some early writers 
termed the green-corn dance. According 
to Gatschet (Creek Migr. Leg., i, 177, 
1884) the solemn annual festival held by 
the Creek people of ancient and modern 
days. As this authority points out, the 
celebration of the puskita was an occasion 
of amnesty, forgiveness, and absolution 
of crime, injury, and hatred, a season of 
change of mind, symbolized in various 
ways. 

The day of beginning of the celebra¬ 
tion of the puskita, which took place 
chiefly in the “town square,” was de¬ 
termined by the miko, or chief, and his 
council; and the ceremony itself, which 
had local variations, lasted for 4 days in 
the towns of less note and for 8 days in 
the more important, Hawkins (Sketch, 
75, 1848) has left a description of the 
busk, or “ boos-ke-tau,” as it was carried 
out in the white or peace town of Kasihta 
in 1798-99. The chief points are as 
follows: 

First day: The yard of the square is 
cleaned in the morning and sprinkled 
with white sand, while the black drink 
is being prepared. The fire maker, spe¬ 
cially appointed, kindles new fire by 
friction, the 4 logs for the fire being ar¬ 
ranged crosswise with reference to the 
cardinal points. The women of the Tur¬ 
key clan dance the turkey dance, while 
the very strong emetic called passa is 
being brewed; this is drunk from about 
noon to the middle of the afternoon. 
Then comes the tadpole dance, performed 
by 4 men and 4 women known as “tad¬ 
poles.” From evening until dawn the 
dance of the hiniha is performed by the 


BULL. 30] 


BUSK 


177 


men. The “old men’s tobacco” is also 
prepared on the first day. 

Second day: At about 10 o’clock the 
women perform the gun dance, so called 
from the men firing guns during its con¬ 
tinuance. At noon the men approach 
the new fire, rub some of its ashes on the 
chin, neck, and belly, and jump head¬ 
foremost into the river, and then return 
to the square. Meantime the women 
busy themselves with the preparation of 
new maize for the feast. Before the 
feast begins, the men as they arrive rub 
some of the maize between their hands 
and then on the face and chest. 

Third day: The men sit in the square. 

Fourth day: The women, who have 
risen early for this purpose, obtain some 
of the new fire, with which they kindle 
a similarly constructed pile of logs on 
their own hearths, which have previously 
been cleaned and sprinkled with sand. 
A ceremony of ash rubbing, plunging 
into water, etc., is then performed by 
them, after which they taste some salt 
and dance the “long dance.” 

Fifth day: The 4 logs of the fire, which 
last only 4 days, having been consumed, 
4 other logs are similarly arranged, and 
the fire kindled as before, after which 
the men drink the black drink. 

Sixth and seventh days: During this 
period the men remain in the town square. 

Eighth day: In the square and outside 
of it impressive ceremonies are carried 
on. A medical mixture concocted by 
stirring and beating in water 14 kinds of 
plants (the modern Creeks use 15), sup¬ 
posed to have virtue as physic, is used by 
the men to drink, to rub over their joints, 
etc., after the priests have blown into it 
through a small reed. Another curious 
mixture, composed chiefly of the ashes 
of old corncobs and pine boughs, mixed 
with w r ater, and stirred by 4 girls who 
have not reached puberty, is prepared 
in a pot, and 2 pans of a mixture of white 
clay and water are likewise prepared after¬ 
ward by the men. The chief and the 
warriors rub themselves with some of 
both these mixtures. After this 2 men, 
who are specially appointed, bring flow¬ 
ers of old men’s tobacco to the chief’s 
house, and each person present receives 
a portion. Then the chief and his coun¬ 
selors walk 4 times around the burning 
logs, throwing some of the old men’s 
tobacco into the fire each time they face 
the e, and then stop while facing the w. 
When this is concluded the warriors do 
the same. The next ceremony is as 
follows: 

At the miko’s cabin a cane having 2 
white feathers on its end is stuck out. 
At the moment when the sun sets a 
man of the Fish clan takes it down and 
walks, followed by all spectators, toward 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-12 


the river. Having gone half way, he 
utters the death-whoop, and repeats it 4 
times before reaching the water’s edge. 
After the crowd has thickly congregated 
at the bank each person places a grain 
of old men’s tobacco on the head and 
others in each ear. Then at a signal re¬ 
peated four times they throw some of it 
into the river, and every man at a like 
signal plunges into the water to pick up 
4 stones from the bottom. With these 
they cross themselves on their breasts 
4 times, each time throwing 1 of the stones 
back into the river and uttering the death 
whoop. They then wash themselves, 
take up the cane with the feathers, return 
to the square, where they stick it up, 
then walk through the town visiting. 
After nightfall comes the mad dance, 
which concludes the puskita. 

The 4 days’ busk, as performed at Od- 
shiapofa (Little Talasse), as witnessed 
by Swan, whose account seems to have 
been really made up by McGillivray 
(Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 181,1884), 
adds some details concerning the dress of 
the fire maker, the throwing of maize and 
the black drink into the fire, the prepa¬ 
ration and use of the black drink, and the 
interesting addition that any provisions 
left over are given to the fire maker. 
Other travelers and historians, as Adair, 
Bartram, andMilfort, furnish other items 
concerningthe ceremony. Bartram says: 
“ When a town celebrates the busk, hav¬ 
ing previously provided themselves with 
new clothes, new pots, pans, and other 
household utensils and furniture, they 
collect all -their worn-out clothes and 
other despicable things, sweep and cleanse 
their houses, squares, and the whole town, 
of their filth, which with all the remain¬ 
ing grain and other old provisions, they 
cast together into one common heap and 
consume it with fire. After having taken 
medicine, and fasted for 3 days, all the 
fire in the town is extinguished. Dur¬ 
ing this fast they abstain from the grati¬ 
fication of every appetite and passion 
whatever. A general amnesty is pro¬ 
claimed, all malefactors may return to 
their town, and they are absolved from 
their crimes, which are now forgotten, 
and they are restored to favor.” Ac¬ 
cording to Gatschet (op. cit., 182) it 
appears that the busk is not a solstitial 
celebration, but a rejoicing over the first 
fruits of the year. The new year begins 
w T ith the busk, which is celebrated in 
August, or late in July. Every tow r n cel¬ 
ebrated its busk at a period independent 
from that of the other towns, whenever 
their crops had come to maturity. In 
connection with the busk the women 
broke to pieces all the household utensils 
of the previous year and replaced them 
with new ones; the men refitted all their 


178 


BUTTERFLY-STONES-CACHE DISKS AND BLADES [b. a. e. 


property so as to look new. Indeed the 
new fire meant the new life, physical and 
moral, which had to begin with the new 
year. Everything had to be new or re¬ 
newed—even the garments hitherto worn. 
Taken altogether, the busk was one of the 
most remarkable ceremonial institutions 
of the American Indians. (a. f. c.) 

Butterfly-stones. See Banner stones. 

Buzzard Roost. A Creek town “where 
Tom’s path crosses Flint r.,” Ga.; exact 
locality not known. There was another 
Creek town of this name on upper Chat¬ 
tahoochee r., w. of Atlanta. See Ur- 
quhart (1793) in Am. State Papers, Ind. 
Aff., ir, 370, 1832. 

Byainswa. See Biauswah. 

Byengeahtein. A Nanticoke village in 
1707, probably in Dauphin or Lancaster 
co., Pa.—Evans (1707) in Day, Penn., 
361, 1843. 

Caacat. A Chumashan village between 
Goleta and Pt Concepcion, Cal., in 1542. 
Caacac.— Cabrillo, Narr., in Smith, Coll. Doc., 189, 
1857. Caacat.— Ibid. Cacat.— Taylor in Cal. 
Fanner, Apr. 17, 1863. Cuncaae.— Ibid. 

Caamancijup (‘narrows of the arro- 
yos’). A rancheria, probably Cochimi, 
connected with Purfsima (Cadegomo) 
mission, Lower California, in the 18th cen¬ 
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4ths.,v, 189,1857. 

Cabbasagunti. A small body of Indians 
dwelling in 1807 in the village of “ Saint- 
Franeais,” on St Francis r., Quebec, in 
which they were named Cabbassaguntiac, 
i. e., ‘peopleof Cabassaguntiquoke,’ signi¬ 
fying ‘ the place where sturgeon abound.’ 
The form Cobbisseconteag has been re¬ 
placed by the modern Cobbosseecontee 
as the name of what formerly was Win- 
throp pond and outlet which flows into 
Kennebec r., in Kennebec co., Me. These 
Indians, it is reported by Kendall, re¬ 
garded themselves not only as inhab¬ 
itants of Cabbassaguntiquoke, but also as 
true cabassas , or sturgeons, because one of 
their ancestors, having declared that he 
was a sturgeon, leaped into this stream 
and never returned in human form. They 
related a tale that below the falls of 
Cobbosseecontee r. the rock was hewn by 
the ax of a mighty manito. ( j. n. b. h. ) 
Cabbassaguntiac.— Kendall, Travels, in, 124, 1809. 
Cabbassaguntiquoke.— Ibid, (their former place of 
settlement). 

Cabea Hoola. Given by Romans as a 
former Choctaw village on the headwaters 
of Chickasawhay cr., probably in Lau¬ 
derdale co., Miss. 

Cabea Hoala.— West Florida map., ca 1775. Cabea 
Hoola.— Romans, Florida, 1772. 

Caborca. A rancheria of the Soba divi¬ 
sion of the Papagoand the seat of amission 
established by Kino about 1687; situated 
on the s. bank of the Rio Asuncion, lat. 
30° 30', long. 112°, Sonora, Mexico. It 
had 4 subordinate villages in 1721 (Ven¬ 
egas, n, 177, 285,1759) and a population of 


223 in 1730, but it was totally destroyed in 
the Pima rebellion of 1751. It is now a 
white Mexican village. (f. w. h. ) 
Cabetka.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neiie 
Welt-Bott,76,1726. Cabona.— Box,Adventures,267, 
1869. Caborca.— Kino(1696) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., i, 267,1856. Catorea.— Hardy, Travels, 422,1829. 
Concepcion Caborca. —Rivera (1730) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, 1 ,514,1884. Concepcion de Ca¬ 
borca.— Venegas, Hist. Cal., 1,285,1759. Concepcion 
del Cabetca.— Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 360, 1889 (misprint). Concepcion del 
Caborca.— Kino (1694) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
I, 243, 1856. Concepcion del Cabotea. —Writer of 
1702?, ibid., v, 139,1857. 

Caborh. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz. (Sedelmair, 1744, 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
366,1889). Mentioned as distinct from the 
following.- 

Caborica. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the Rio Gila,. s. Ariz.—Sedelmair 
(1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 366, 1889. 

Cabusto (possibly from oka ‘ water,’ ish- 
to ‘great.’—Halbert). A town, probably 
of the Chickasaw, in n. e. Mississippi, vis¬ 
ited by De Soto in 1540; situated between 
Taliepatava and Chica^a, and 5 days’ 
march from the latter, near a great river, 
possibly the Tombigbee.—Gentleman of 
Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 
160, 1850; Halbert in Trans. Ala. Hist. 
Soc., hi, 67, 1899. 

Caca Chimir. A Papago village, probably 
in Pima co., s. Ariz., with a population of 
70 in 1858, and 90 in 1865. 

Caca Chimir.— Davidson in lnd. Aff. Rep., 135, 
1865. Del Caca.— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208,1858. 

Cacaria. A former Tepehuane pueblo 
on the upper waters of the Rio San Pedro, 
central Durango, Mexico.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 319, 1864. 

Cachanegtac. A former village, pre¬ 
sumably Costanoan, connected with Dolo¬ 
res mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Cachanila. A village, probably Pima, 
on the Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., 
Ariz.; pop. 503 in 1860 (Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 19, 1863), 438 in 1869 
(Browne). 

Cachunilla.— Browne, Apache Country, 290,1869. 

Cachaymon. A village or tribe, possibly 
Caddoan, mentioned by Iberville (Mar- 
gry, Dec., iv, 178,1880), in the account of 
his voyage up the Mississippi in 1699, as 
being on or near Red r. of Louisiana. 
Possibly identical with Cahinnio. 

Cache disks and blades. The term cache 
is applied to certain forms of storage of 
property (see Storage ), and in archeol¬ 
ogy it is employed to designate more 
especially certain deposits of implements 
and other objects, mainly of stone and 
metal, the most noteworthy consisting 
of flaked flint blades and disks. These 
caches occur in the mound region of the 
Mississippi valley and generally through¬ 
out the Atlantic states. Very often they 


BULL. 30] 


CACHES-CADDO 


179 



are associated with burials in mounds, but 
in some cases they seem merely to have 
been buried in the ground or hidden 
among rocks. The largest deposit re¬ 
corded contained upward of 8,000 flint 
disks (Moorehead), a few exceed 5,000, 
while those containing 
a smaller number are 
very numerous. It is 
probable that many of 
these caches of flaked 
stones are accumula¬ 
tions of incipient im¬ 
plements roughed out 
at the quarries and car¬ 
ried away for further 
specialization and use. 

But their occurrence 
with burials, the uni¬ 
formity of their shape, and the absence of 
more than the mostmeager traces of their 
utilization as implements or for the maki ng 
of implements, give rise to the conjecture 
that they were assembled and deposited for 
reasons dictated by superstition, that they 
were intended as memorials of important 
events, as monuments to departed chief¬ 
tains, as provision for requirements in the 
future world, or as offerings to the mys¬ 
terious powers or gods requiring this par¬ 
ticular kind of sacrifice. If in the nature 
of a sacrifice they certainly fulfilled all re- 


Discoidal Flint Blade From 
a Cache of no Specimens; 

ILLINOIS. (l “6 ) 



CACHE OF LANCEOLATE FLINT BLADES 


quirements, for only those familiar with 
such work can know the vast labor in¬ 
volved in quarrying the stone from the 
massive strata, in shaping the refractory 
material, and in transporting the prod¬ 
uct to far distant points. In the Hope- 
well mound in Ohio large numbers 
of beautiful blades of obsidian, ob¬ 
tained probably from Mexico, had been 
cast upon a sacrificial altar and partially 
destroyed by the great heat; usually, 
however, the deposits do not seem to 
have been subjected to the altar fires. 
See Mines and Quarries , Problematical ob¬ 
jects , Stone-work. 

Consult Holmes in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
1897; Moorehead (1) Primitive Man in 
Ohio, pp. 190, 192, 1892, (2) in The Anti¬ 
quarian, i, 158, 1897; Seever, ibid., 142; 
Smith, ibid., 30; Snyder (1) in Smithson. 
Rep 1876, 1877, (2) in Proc. A. A. A. S., 


xlii, 1894, (3) in The Archaeologist, i, no. 
10, 1893, (4) ibid., in, pp. 109-113, 1895; 
Squier and Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 
1848; Wilson in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1897, 
1899; and various brief notices in the 
archeological journals. (w. h. h. ) 

Caches. —See Receptacles, Storage and 
Caches. 

Cachopostales. Mentioned by Orozco y 
Berra (Geog., 304, 1864), from a manu¬ 
script source, as a tribe living near the 
Pampopa who resided on Nueces r., Tex. 
They were possibly Coahuiltecan. 
Caohapostate. —Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 69,1891. 

Caddehi (‘head of the reedy place’). 
A rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected 
with Purisima (Cadegomo) mission, 
Lower California, in the 18th century.— 
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 190,1857. 

Caddo (contracted from Kd'dohdda'cho, 
‘Caddo proper,’ ‘real Caddo,’ a leading 
tribe in the Caddo confederacy, extended 
by the whites to include the confederacy). 
A confederacy of tribes belonging to the 
southern group of the Caddoan linguistic 
family. Their own name is Hasmai, 
‘our own folk.’ See Kadohadacho. 

History. —According to tribal traditions 
the lower Red r. of Louisiana was the 
early home of the Caddo, from which 
they spread to the n. , w., and s. Several 
of the lakes and streams connected with 
this river bear Caddo names, as do 
some of the counties and some of the 
towns which cover ancient village sites. 
Cabeza de Vaca and his companions in 
1535-36 traversed a portion of the terri¬ 
tory occupied by the Caddo, and De 
Soto’s expedition encountered some of 
the tribes of the confederacy in 1540-41, 
but the people did not become known 
until they were met by La Salle and his 
followers in 1687. At that time the 
Caddo villages were scattered along Red 
r. and its tributaries in what are now 
Louisiana and Arkansas, and also on the 
banks of the Sabine, Neches, Trinity, 
Brazos, and Colorado rs. in e. Texas. 
The Caddo were not the only occupants 
of this wide territory; other confederacies 
belonging to the same linguistic family 
also resided there. There were also frag¬ 
ments of still older confederacies of the 
same family, some of which still main¬ 
tained their separate existence, while 
others had joined the then powerful 
Hasinai. These various tribes and con¬ 
federacies were alternately allies and 
enemies of the Caddo. The native pop¬ 
ulation was so divided that at no time 
could it successfully resist the intruding 
white race. At an early date the Caddo 
obtained horses from the Spaniards 
through intermediate tribes; they learned 
to rear these animals, and traded with 
them as far n. as Illinois r. (Shea, Cath. 
Ch. in Col. Days, 559, 1855). 



180 


CADDO 


[B. a. e. 


During the 18th century wars in Europe 
led to contention between the Spaniards 
and the French for the territory occupied 
by the Caddo. The brunt of these con¬ 
tentions fell upon the Indians; the trails 
between their villages became routes for 
armed forces, while the villages were 
transformed into garrisoned posts. The 
Caddo were friendly to the French and 
rendered valuable service, but they suf¬ 
fered greatly from contact with the white 
race. Tribal wars were fomented, villages 
were abandoned, new diseases spread 
havoc among the people, and by the close 
of the century the welcoming attitude of 
the Indians during its early years had 
changed to one of defense and distrust. 
Several tribes were practically extinct, 
others seriously reduced in numbers, and 



ANTELOPE, A CADDO 


a once thrifty and numerous people had 
become demoralized and were more or 
less wanderers in their native land. 
Franciscan missions had been established 
among some of the tribes early in the 
century, those designed for the Caddo, 
or Asinais, as they were called by the 
Spaniards, being Purfsima Concepcion de 
los Asinais and (for the Hainai) San 
Francisco de los Tejas (q. v.). The segre¬ 
gation policy of the missionaries tended 
to weaken tribal relations and unfitted 
the people to cope with the new difficul¬ 
ties which confronted them. These 
missions were transferred to the Rio San 
Antonio in 1731. With the acquisition of 
Louisiana by the United States immigra¬ 
tion increased and the Caddo were pushed 
from their old haunts. Under their first 


treaty, in 1835, they ceded all their land 
and agreed to move at their own expense 
beyond the boundaries of the United 
States, never to return and settle as a tribe. 
The tribes living in Louisiana, being thus 
forced to leave their old home, moved 
s. w. toward their kindred living in Texas. 
At that time the people of Texas were 
contending for independence, and no 
tribe could live at peace with both op¬ 
posing forces. Public opinion was di¬ 
vided as to the treatment of the Indians; 
one party demanded a policy of extermina¬ 
tion, the other advocated conciliatory 
methods. In 1843 the governor of the 
Republic of Texas sent a commission to 
the tribes of its n. part to fix a line be¬ 
tween them and the white settlers and 
to establish three trading posts; but, as 
the land laws of the republic did not 
recognize the Indian’s right of occupancy, 
there was no power which could prevent a 
settler from taking land that had been cul¬ 
tivated by an Indian. This condition led 
to continual difficulties, and these did not 
diminish after the annexation of Texas 
to the United States, as Texas retained 
control and jurisdiction over all its public 
domain. Much suffering ensued; the 
fields of peaceable Indians were taken and 
the natives were hunted down. The more 
warlike tribes made reprisals, and bitter 
feelings were engendered. Immigration 
increased, and the inroads on the buffalo 
herds by the newcomers made scarce the 
food of the Indians. Appeals were sent 
to the Federal Government, and in 1855 
a tract near Brazos r. was secured and a 
number of Caddo and other Indians 
were induced to colonize under the 
supervision of Agent Robert S. Neigh¬ 
bours. The Indians built houses, tilled 
fields, raised cattle, sent their chil¬ 
dren to school—lived quiet and orderly 
lives. The Comanche to the w. con¬ 
tinued to raid upon the settlers, some of 
whom turned indiscriminately upon all 
Indians. The Caddo w’ere the chief suf¬ 
ferers, although they helped the state 
troops to bring the raiders to justice. In 
1859 a company of white settlers fixed a 
date for the massacre of all the reserva¬ 
tion Indians. The Federal Government 
was again appealed to, and through the 
strenuous efforts of Neighbours the Caddo 
made a forced march for 15 days in the 
heat of July; men, women, and children, 
with the loss of more than half of their 
stock and possessions, reached safely the 
banks of Washita r. in Oklahoma, where 
a reservation was set apart for them. 
Neighbours, their friend and agent, was 
killed shortly afterward as a penalty for 
his unswerving friendship to the Indians 
(Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 333, 1860). Dur¬ 
ing the civil war the Caddo remained 
loyal to the Government, taking refuge 





BULL. 30] 


CADDO 


181 


in Kansas, while some went even as far 
w. as Colorado. In 1872 the boundaries of 
their reservation were defined, and in 
1902 every man, woman, and child re¬ 
ceived an allotment of land under the 
provisions of the severalty act of 1887, by 
which they became citizens of the United 
States and subject to the laws of Okla¬ 
homa. In 1904 they numbered 535. 

Missions were started by the Baptists 
soon after the reservation was established, 
and are still maintained. Thomas C. 
Battey, a Quaker, performed missionary 
work among them in 1872. The Episco¬ 
palians opened a mission .in 1881, the 
Roman Catholics in 1894. 

Customs and beliefs. —In the legend which 
recounts the coming of the Caddo from 
the underworld it is related: “First an 
old man climbed up, carrying in one hand 
fire and a pipe, and in the other a drum; 
next came his wife with corn and pump¬ 
kin seeds.” The traditions of the people 
do not go back to a time when they were 
not cultivators of the soil; their fields 
surrounded their villages and furnished 
their staple food; they were semisedentary 
in their habits and lived in fixed habita¬ 
tions. Their dwellings were conical in 
shape, made of a framework of poles 
covered with a thatch of grass, and were 
grouped about an open space which 
served for social and ceremonial gather¬ 
ings. Couches covered with mats were 
ranged around the walls inside the house 
to serve as seats by day and beds by 
night. The fire was built in the center. 
Food was cooked in vessels of pottery, and 
baskets of varying sizes were skilfully 
made. Vegetal fibers were woven, and 
the cloth was made into garments; their 
mantles, when adorned with feathers, 
were very attractive to the early French 
visitors. Living in the country of the buf¬ 
falo, that animal and others were hunted 
and the pelts dressed and made into 
clothing for winter use. Besides having 
the usual ornaments for the arms, neck, 
and ears, the Caddo bored the nasal septum 
and inserted a ring as a face decoration— 
a custom noted in the name, meaning 
“pierced nose,” given the Caddo by the 
Kiowa and other unrelated tribes, and 
designated in the sign language of the 
plains. Tattooing was practised. De¬ 
scent was traced through the mother. 
Chieftainship was hereditary, as was the 
custody of certain sacred articles used in 
religious ceremonies. These ceremonies 
were connected with tie cultivation of 
maize, the seeking of game, and the de¬ 
sire for long life, health, peace, and pros¬ 
perity, and were conducted by priests 
who were versed in the rites and who led 
the accompanying rituals and songs. 
According to Caddo belief all natural 
forms were animate and capable of ren¬ 


dering assistance to man. Fasting, 
prayer, and occasional sacrifices were ob¬ 
served; life was thought to continue after 
death, and kinship groups were supposed 
to be reunited in the spirit world. Truth¬ 
fulness, honesty, and hospitality were 
inculcated, and just dealing was esteemed 
a virtue. There is evidence that canni¬ 
balism was ceremonially practised in con¬ 
nection with captives. 

Divisions and totems .—How many tribes 
were formerly included in the Caddo 
confederacy can not now be determined. 
Owing to the vicissitudes of the last 3 
centuries only a remnant of the Caddo 
survive, and the memory of much of their 
organization is lost. In 1699 Iberville 
obtained from his Taensa Indian guide a 
list of 8 divisions; Linares in 1716 gave the 
names of 11; Gatschet (Creek Migr. Leg., 
i, 43, 1884) procured from a Caddo Indian 
in 1882 the names of 12 divisions, and the 
list was revised in 1896, by Mooney, as 
follows: (1) Kadohadacho, (2) Hainai, 
(3) Anadarko, (4) Nabedache, (5) Nacog¬ 
doches, (6) Natchitoches, (7) Yatasi, (8) 
Adai, (9) Eyeish, (10) Nakanawan, (11) 
Imaha, a small band of Kwapa, (12) 
Yowani, a band of Choctaw (Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1092,1896). Of these 
names the first 9 are found under varying 
forms in the lists of 1699 and 1716. The 
native name of the confederacy, Hasinai, 
is said to belong more properly to the first 
3 divisions, which may be significant of 
their prominence at the time when the con¬ 
federacy was overlapping and absorbing 
members of older organizations, and as 
these divisions speak similar dialects, the 
name may be that which designated a 
still older organization. The following 
tribes, now extinct, probably belonged to 
the Caddo confederacy: Doustionis, Na- 
caniche, Nanatsoho, and Nasoni (?). The 
villages of Campti, Choye, and Natasi were 
probably occupied by subdivisions of the 
confederated tribes. 

Each division of the confederacy was 
subdivided, and each of these subtribes 
had its totem, itsr village, its hereditary 
chieftain, its priests and ceremonies, and 
its part in the ceremonies common to the 
confederacy. The present clans, accord¬ 
ing to Mooney, are recognized as belong¬ 
ing equally to the whole Caddo people and 
in old times were probably the chief bond 
that held the confederacy together. See 
Nasoni. (a. c. f.) 

Acinay.— Tex. St. Arch., Nov. 17,1763. Ascanis.— 
La Harpe (1719) in Margry, D6c., VI, 289, 1886. 
Asenys.— Iberville (1699), ibid., iv, 316, 1880. 
A-Simaes.— French, Hist. Coll., ii, 11, note, 1875. 
Asimais.— Kennedy, Repub. Texas, I, 217, 1841. 
A-Simais.— Yoakum, Hist. Texas, I, 28, note, 1855. 
Asinaes.— Kennedy, Repub. Texas, I, 217, 1841. 
Asinais. —Mezi&res (1778) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 661, 1886. Asinay.— Teran (1691), 
ibid., 391. Asoni.— Barcia, Ensayo, 278, 1723. As- 
seni.— Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78,1870. Assi- 


182 


CADDOAN FAMILY 


[B. a. e. 


nais. —P6nicaut (1712) in Margry, D6c., V, 499, 
1883. Assinay.— La Harpe ( ca . 1717) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., in, 48, 1851. Assine.— Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., 1,43,1884. Assinnis.— Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 125,1816. Assoni.— Joutel (1687) 
in Margry, D6c., hi, 311, 1878. Assony.— Joutel, 
ibid., I, 147, 1846. Assynais.— PSnicaut (1716) in 
Margry, D6c.,V, 539, 1883. Ceneseans.— Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 126, 1816. Cenesians.— Hennepin, 
New Discov., pt.2, 25, 1698. Cenis.— Joutel (1687) 
in French,Hist. Coll. La.,l, 148,1851. Cenys. —Jou¬ 
tel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 266, 1878. Ceries 
Assonys. —French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 11, note, 
1875. Cneis.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Coeni.— 
Hennepin, New Discov., map, 1698. Ccenis.— 
De l’Isle, map, 1700. Couis. —Morse, N. Am.,map, 
1776 (misprint). Hasmai. —ten Kate, Reizen in 
N. Am., 374, 1885 (own name). Iscanis. —Bull. 
Soc. Geog. Mex., 504,1869. Nasoni.— For forms of 
this name, see yasoni. Senis. —Cavelier (1687) 
quoted by Shea, Early Voy., 31, 1861. Tiddoes. — 
Keane in Stanford, Com pend., Cent, and So. Am., 
539, 1878 (same?). Yscanes.— Tex. State Arch., 
Nov. 15,1785. Yscanis. —Census of Nacogdoches 
urisdiction, ibid., 1790. 

Caddoan Family. A linguistic family, 
first classified by Gallatin (Trans, and 
Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 116,1836), who 
regarded the Caddo and Pawnee lan¬ 
guages as distinct, hence both names ap¬ 
pear in his treatise as family designations. 
Although now regarded as belonging to 
the same linguistic stock, there is a pos¬ 
sibility that future investigation may 
prove their distinctness. The Caddoans 
may be treated in three geographic groups: 
The Northern, represented by the Arikara 
in North Dakota; the Middle, comprising 
the Pawnee confederacy formerly living 
on Platte r., Neb., and to the w. and s. w. 
thereof; and the Southern group, includ¬ 
ing among others the Caddo, Kichai, and 
Wichita (Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 58, 
1891). The tribes included in the Southern 
group were scattered throughout the re¬ 
gion of the Red r. of Louisiana and its trib¬ 
utaries, in Arkansas and s. Oklahoma, 
where their names survive in the Washita 
r., the Wichita mountains and river, 
Waco city, Kichai hills, etc.; they also 
spread along the Sabine, Neches, Trinity, 
and Brazos rs. of Texas, and in part con¬ 
trolled the territory as far as the Colorado 
r. of Texas and the Gulf of Mexico. 

From cultural and other evidence the 
Caddoan tribes seem to have moved 
eastward from the S. W. The advance 
guard was probably the Caddo proper, 
who, when first met by the white race, 
had dwelt so long in the region of the Red 
r. of Louisiana as to regard it as their 
original home or birthplace. Other 
branches of the Caddoan family followed, 
settling along the rivers of n. e. Texas. 
Whether they drove earlier occupants of 
the region to the Gulf or at a later day 
were forced back from the coast by intru¬ 
sive tribes is not clear, but that some dis¬ 
placement had occurred seems probable, 
as early Spanish and French travelers 
found tribes of different families on the 
Gulf coast, while the Caddoans held the 
rivers but were acquainted with the coast 


and visited the bays of Galveston and 
Matagorda. The last group to migrate 
was probably the Pawnee, who kept to 
the n. and n. e. and settled in a part of 
what is now Kansas and Nebraska. 

The tribes of n. e. Texas being in the 
territory over which the Spaniards, 
French, and English contended for su¬ 
premacy, were the first to succumb to 
cbntact with the white race and the in¬ 
roads of wars and new diseases. Those 
dwelling farther inland escaped for a 
time, but all suffered great diminution 
in numbers; the thousands of 2 centuries 
ago are now represented by only a few 
hundreds. The survivors to-day live on 
allotted lands in Oklahoma and North 
Dakota, as citizens of the United States, 
and their children are being educated in 
the language and the industries of the 
country. 

From the earliest records and from tra¬ 
ditions the Caddoan tribes seem to have 
been cultivators of the soil as well as 
hunters, and practised the arts of pottery 
making, weaving, skin dressing, etc. 
Tattooing the face and body was common 
among those of the Southern group. 
Two distinct types of dwellings were 
used—the conical straw house among 
the Southern group and the earth lodge 
among the Pawnee and Arikara. Their 
elaborate religious ceremonies pertained 
to the quest of long life, health, and 
food supply, and embodied a recogni¬ 
tion of cosmic forces and the heavenly 
bodies. By their supernatural and social 
power these ceremonies bound the people 
together. The tribes were generally 
loosely confederated; a few stood alone. 
The tribe was subdivided, and each one 
of these subdivisions had its own village, 
bearing a distinctive name and sometimes 
occupying a definite relative position to 
each of the other villages of the tribe. A 
village could be spoken of in three ways: 
(1) By its proper name, which was gen¬ 
erally mythic in its significance. or re¬ 
ferred to the share or part taken by it in 
the religious rites, wherein all the vil¬ 
lages of the tribe had a place; (2) by its 
secular name, which was often descrip¬ 
tive of its locality; (3) by the name of 
its chief. The people sometimes spoke 
of themselves by one of the names of 
their village, or by that of their tribe, or 
by the name of the confederacy to which 
they belonged. This custom led to the 
recording, by the early travelers, of a mul¬ 
tiplicity of names, several of which might 
represent one community. This confusion 
was augmented when not all the tribes of 
a confederacy spoke the same language; 
in such cases a mispronunciation or a 
translation caused a new name to be record¬ 
ed. For instance, the native name of the 
Caddo confederacy, Hasinai, ‘ our own 


BULL. 30] 


CA DECHA-CAGNAGUET 


183 


people,’ was translated by the Yatasi, and 
“Texas” is a modification of thb word 
they gave. Owing to the fact that a large 
proportion of the tribes mentioned by the 
writers of the last 3 centuries, together 
with their languages, are now extinct, 
a correct classification of the recorded 
names is no longer possible. The fol¬ 
lowing list of confederacies, tribes, and vil¬ 
lages is divided into 4 groups: (1) Those 
undoubtedly Caddoan; (2) those proba¬ 
bly so; (3) those possibly so; (4) those 
which appear to have been within the 
Caddoan country. 

(1) Arikara, Bidai, Caddo, Campti, 
Choye, Kichai, Nacaniche, Nacisi, Nana- 
tsoho, Nasoni (=Asinai=Caddo?), Na- 
tasi, Pawnee, Wichita. 

(2) Aguacay, Akasquy, Amediche, 
Anoixi, Ardeco, Avoyelles, Cahinnio, 
Capiche, Chacacants, Cliaguate, Chaquan- 
tie, Chavite, Chilano, Coligoa, Colima, 
Doustioni, Dulchioni, Harahey, Pala- 
quesson, Penoy, Tareque. 

(3) Analao, Autiamque, Avavares, 
Cachaymon, Guaycones, Haqui, Irru- 
piens, Kannehouan, Naansi, Nabiri, Toxo. 

(4) Acubadoas, Anamis, Andacaminos, 
Arkokisa, Bocherete, Coyabegux, Judosa, 
Kuasse, Mallopeme, Mulatos, Onapiem, 
Orcan, Palomas, Panequo, Peinhoum, 
Peissaquo, Petao, Piechar, Pehir, Sala- 
paque, Taraha, Teao, Tohaka, Tohau, 
Tsepcoen, Tsera, Tutelpinco, Tyacappan. 

(a. c. f.) 

>Caddoes. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., n, 
116, 306, 1836 (based on Caddo alone); Prichard, 
Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 406, 1847; Gallatin in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853 [gives as 
languages Caddo. Red River (Nandakoes, Tachies, 
Nabedaches)]. >Caddokies. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 116, 1836 (same as his Cad- 
does); Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 406,1847. 
>Caddo. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., ii, 
31,1846 (indicates affinity with Iroquois, Muskoge, 
Catawba, Pawnee); Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. 
Soc., ii, pt. 1, xcix, 77,1848 (Caddo only); Berghaus 
• (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (Caddo, etc.); 
ibid., 1852; Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 338, 1850 (be¬ 
tween the Mississippi and Sabine); Latham in 
Trans. Philol. Soc., Lond., 101,1856; Turner in Pac. 
R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3,55,70,1856 (finds resemblances 
to Pawnee, but keeps them separate); Buschmann, 
Spuren deraztek. Sprache, 426, 448,1859; Latham, 
Opuscula, 290, 366,1860. >Caddo. —Latham, Elem. 
Comp. Philol., 470, 1862 (includes Pawni and Ric- 
cari). >Pawnees. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 128,306,1836 (two nations: Pawnees proper 
and Ricaras or Black Pawnees); Prichard, Phys. 
Hist. Mankind, v, 408,1847 (followsGallatin); Gal¬ 
latin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1, xcix, 
1848; Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (orPanis; 
includes Loup and Republican Pawnees); Galla¬ 
tin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 402,1853 (gives 
as languages: Pawnees, Ricaras, Tawakeroes, 
Towekas, Wachos?); Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Val., 232, 345,1862 (includes Pawnee and An¬ 
kara). >Pams.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 117,128,1836 (of Red river of Texas; men¬ 
tion of villages; doubtfully indicated as of Pawnee 
family); Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 407, 
1847 (supposed from name to be of same race with 
Pawneeof the Arkansa); Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 
344, 1850 (Pawnees or); Gallatin in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853 (here kept separate 
from Pawnee family). >Pawnies. —Gallatin in 


Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (see 
Pawnee above). >Pahnies. —Berghaus (1845), 
Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848; ibid., 1852. ^Paw¬ 
nee)?).— Turner in Pac. R. R. Rep., iii, pt. 3,55,65, 
1856 (Kichai and Hueco vocabularies). =Paw- 
nee. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. 
Am., 478,1878 (gives four groups: Pawnees proper; 
Arickarees; Wichitas; Caddoes). =Pani. —Gat- 
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 42, 1884; Berghaus, 
Physik. Atlas, map 72,1887. >Towiaches.— -Galla¬ 
tin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 116, 128, 1836 
(same as Panis above); Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man¬ 
kind, v, 407, 1847. >Towiachs. —Latham, Nat. 
Hist. Man, 349,1850 (includes Towiach, Tawake- 
noes, Towecas?, Wacos). >Towiacks. —Gallatin in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 402,1853. >Natchito- 
ches. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 116, 
1836 (stated by Sibley to speak a language differ¬ 
ent from any other); Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 
342, 1850; Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 406, 
1847 (after Gallatin); Gallatin in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, iii, 402, 1853 (a single tribe only). 
>Aliche. —Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349,1850 (near 
Nacogdoches; not classified). >Yatassees.— Gal¬ 
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116,1836 (the 
single tribe; said by Sibley to be different from 
any other; referred to as afamily). >Riccarees.— 
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 344, 1850 (kept distinct 
from Pawnee family). >Washita. —Latham in 
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856; Buschmann, 
Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 441,1859 (revokes pre¬ 
vious opinion of its distinctness and refers it to 
Pawnee family). >Witchitas. —Buschmann, ibid, 
(same as his Washita). =Caddoan. —Powell in 7th 
Rep. B. A. E., 58, 1891. 

Cadecha. A former Timuquanan tribe 
in the Utina confederacy of middle Flor¬ 
ida.—Laudonniere (1564) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. 

Cadica.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. Car- 
decha. —Fontaneda in French, op. cit., 2d ser., 
264, 1875. Chadeca. —Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723. 

Cadecuijtnipa (‘over the lava mesas’). 
A rancheria, probably Cochimi, con¬ 
nected with Purfsima (Cadegomo) mis¬ 
sion, Lower California, in the 18th cen¬ 
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 188, 
1857. 

Cadegomo (‘reedy arroyo’). A Co¬ 
chimi settlement in lat. 26° 10 / , not far 
from the Pacific coast of Lower California, 
at which the Jesuit mission of La Pu¬ 
rfsima Concepcion was established by 
Father Tamaral in 1718. It contained 
130 neophytes in 1767, and in 1745 had 
6 dependent villages within 8 leagues. 
From a statement by Venegas (Hist. Cal., 
ii, 23, 1759) that he “hoped at La Pu¬ 
rfsima to find greater conveniences both 
for corn and pasture than atCadigomo,” 
it would seem that the Indian village and 
the mission did not occupy the same 
site. 

Cadegomo.— Clavigero (1789), Hist. Baja Cal., 63, 
1852. Cadigomo. —Venegas, Hist. Cal., 1 , 420; II, 23, 
1759. La Purissima Conception. —Ibid., II, 23, 198. 
Purfsima Concepcion. —Clavigero, op. cit., 109. 

Cadeudebet (‘ reeds, or the reedy coun¬ 
try, ends here ’). A rancheria, probably 
of the Cochimi, under Purfsima (Cade¬ 
gomo) mission, from which it lay about 
10 leagues distant, in central Lower Cali¬ 
fornia, in the 18th century.—Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 4th s., v, 188, 1857. 

Cadeudobet. —Doc. Hist. Mex., op. cit. 

Cagnaguet. A Laimon tribe which, 


184 


CAHAWBA OLD TOWNS-CAHITA 


[B. a. e. 


with the Adac and Kadakaman, formerly 
lived between San Fernando and Muleje, 
near San Francisco Borja, w. side of 
Lower California, lat. 29°. 

Cagnaguet. —Taylor in Browne' Res. Pac. Slope, 
app., 54,1869. Cagnajuet.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Jan. 17,1862. 

Cahawba Old Towns. A former group 
of Choctaw settlements in Perry co., Ala., 
probably on Cahawba r.—Pickett, Ala., 
n, 326, 1851; Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc. 
Trans., in, 66, 1899. 

Cahelca (‘deep pool’). A rancheria, 
probably Cochimi, connected with Pu- 
rfsima (Cadegomo) mission, Lower Cali¬ 
fornia, in the 18th century.—Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 4th's., v, 189, 1857. 

Cahelejyu (‘brackish water’). A ran¬ 
cheria, probably Cochimi, connected with 
Purfsima (Cadegomo) mission, Lower 
California, in the 18th century.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Cahelijyu. —Ibid.,190. Cahelixyu. —Ibid., 186. 

Cahelembil (‘junction of waters’). A 
rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected 
with Purfsima (Cadegomo) mission, 
Lower California, in the 18th century; it 
lay a league from the Pacific coast.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Cahelmet (‘ water and earth ’). A ran¬ 
cheria, probably Cochimi, connected with 
Purfsima (Cadegomo) mission, Lower 
California, in the 18th century.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Cahiague. A Huron village in Ontario, 
where the Jesuits had the mission of St 
John the Baptist in 1640. 

Cahiague. —Champlain (1615), (Euvres, iv, 29,1870. 
S. lean Baptiste. —Jes. Rel. for 1640,90,1858. 

Cahinnio. A tribe visited by Cavelier 
de la Salle on his return from Texas in 
1687, at which time they probably re¬ 
sided in s. w. Arkansas, near Red r. they 
were possibly more closely allied to the 
northern tribes of the Caddo confed¬ 
eracy (the Kadohadacho, Natchitoches, 
Yatasi, etc.) than to the southern tribes, 
with whom, according to Joutel, they 
were at enmity. During the vicissitudes 
of the 18th century the tribe moved n. w., 
and in 1763 were on upper Arkansas r., 
near their old allies, the Mento. By 
the close of the 18th century they were 
extinct as a tribe. (a. c. f. ) 

Cabinoios.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 
81, 1854. Cahainihoua.— Joutel (1687) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., I, 169,1846. Cahainohoua. —Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, Dec., m, 413, 1878. Cahayno- 
houa.— Joutel in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 172, 
1846. Cahinnio.— Le Clercq (1691), First Estab! 
Faith, ii, 265, 1881. Cahinoa. —Carver, Trav., 
map, 1778. Cahirmois.— Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 126, 1816. Cakainikova. —Barcia, Ensavo 
279, 1723. Chininoas.— McKenney and Hall, Ind! 
Tribes, ill, 81, 1854. Cohainihoua. —Joutel in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., 1 , 169,1846. Cohainotoas.— 
Barcia, Ensayo, 279, 1723. Kahinoa. —Jefferys 
(1763), Am. Atlas, map, 5, 1776. 

Cahita. A group of tribes of the Piman 
family, consisting chiefly of the Yaqui 
and the Mayo, dwelling* in s. w. Sonora 


and n. w. Sinaloa, Mexico, principally 
in the middle and lower portions of the 
valleys of the Rio Yaqui, Rio Mayo, 



MAYO (CAHITA) MAN. (hRDL.ICKa) 


and Rio Fuerte, and extending from the 
Gulf of California to the Sierra Madre. 
Physically the men are usually large and 



MAYO (CAHITA) WOMAN AND CHILD. (hRDLICKa) 


well formed; their complexion is of me¬ 
dium brown, and their features, though 
somewhat coarse, are not unpleasant. 
The dress of both sexes is coarse and sim- 












BULL. 30] 


CAHLAHTEL-CAHOKIA 


185 


pie, that of the men consisting of a short 
cotton shirt, trousers, straw hat, and 
leather sandals, the women wearing the 
typical cotton camisa and gown. The 
native blanket and sash are now rarely 
seen. The Yaqui formerly tattooed the 
chin and arms. Owing to the semitrop- 
ical climate their typical dwellings were 
of canes and boughs, covered with palm 
leaves, but these have been largely super¬ 
seded by huts of brush and adobe. Al¬ 
though belonging to the same division of 
the Piman stock and showing no marked 
difference in culture, the Mayo and Yaqui 
tribes have not been friendly; indeed the 
former waged war against the Yaqui until 
they themselves were finally conquered, 
when the Yaqui compelled them to pay 
tribute and to furnish warriors to aid 
the Yaqui in their almost incessant hos¬ 
tility first toward Spain, afterward against 
Mexico. They now hold aloof from each 
other, and while the Yaqui are habitually 
on the warpath, the Mayo are entirely 
pacific. In the fertile valleys along the 
streams respectively occupied by the 
tribes of this group, they engage in 
raising corn, cotton, calabashes, beans, 
and tobacco, and also in cultivating the 
mezcal-producing agave. They hunted 
in the neigh boring Sierra Madre and fished 
in the streams that supplied the water to 
irrigate their fields, as well as on the 
coast, where the Yaqui still obtain salt for 
sale, principally in Guaymas. It has been 
said that neither the Mayo nor the Yaqui 
had a tribal chief, each tribe being set¬ 
tled in a number of autonomous villages 
which combined only in case of warfare; 
but there appears to have been a village 
ruler or kind of cacique. In the first half 
of the 17th century the Mayo and Yaqui 
together probably numbered between 
50,000 and 60,000. There are now about 
40,000, equally divided between the 
tribes, but like most of the southern 
tribes of the Piman family, these have 
largely become Hispanized, except in 
language. The Yaqui particularly are 
naturally industrious and are employed 
as cattlemen, teamsters, farmers, and sail¬ 
ors; they are also good miners, are ex¬ 
pert in pearl diving, and are employed 
for all manual labor in preference to any 
others. They exhibit an unusual talent 
for music and adhere more or less to the 
performance of their primitive dances 
(now somewhat varied by civilization), 
engaged in principally on feast days, par¬ 
ticularly during the harvest festival of 
San Juan and at the celebration of the 
Passover. The chief vices of the Yaqui, 
it is said, are an immoderate indulgence 
in intoxicants, gambling, and stealing, 
while conjugal fidelity is scarcely known 
to them. There is some uncertainty in 
regard to the tribal divisions of the Cahita 


group. Pimentel (Lenguas, i, 453) and 
Buelna (Arte Lengua Cahita, x) divide it 
into three dialects, the Yaqui, Mayo, and 
Tehueco, but the latter, in his Peregrina- 
cion de los Aztecas (21, 1892), mentions 
the Sinaloa, Tehueco, and Zuaque as dis¬ 
tinct groups. Orozco y Berra (Geog., 58) 
gives Yaqui, Mayo, Tehueco, and Vaco- 
regue. It appears that there was in fact 
a Sinaloa tribe which later lost its iden¬ 
tity through absorption by the Tehueco, 
while the Zuaque were apparently iden¬ 
tical with the latter. For the present 
condition of the Yaqui and the Mayo see 
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., n. s., vi, 51, 
1904. (f. w. h. ) 

Cahita.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 1864. Caita.— 
Doc. of 1678 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, in, 53,1890. Cinaloa.—Orozco y Berra, op. 
cit. Sinaloa.—Ibid. 

Cahlahtel Pomo. An unidentifiable 
band of Pomo, said to have lived in Men¬ 
docino co., Cal.—Wiley in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1864, 119, 1865. 

Cahokia. A tribe of the Illinois con¬ 
federacy, usually noted as associated with 
the kindred Tamaroa. Like all the con¬ 
federate Illinois tribes they were of roving 
habit until they and the Tamaroa were 
gathered into a mission settlement about 
the year 1698 by the Jesuit Pinet. This 
mission, first known as Tamaroa, but 
later as Cahokia, was about the site of 
the present Cahokia, Ill., on the e. bank 
of the Mississippi, nearly opposite the 
present St Louis. In 1721 it was the 
second town among the Illinois in impor¬ 
tance. On the withdrawal of the Jesuits 
the tribe declined rapidly, chiefly from 
the demoralizing influence of the neigh¬ 
boring French garrison, and was nearly 
extinct by 1800. With the other remnant 
tribes of the confederacy they removed, 
about 1820, to the W., where the name was 
kept up until very recently, but the whole 
body is now officially consolidated under 
the name Peoria, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Caeuquias.— De l’lsle, map (ca. 1705) in Neill, 
Hist. Minn., 1858. Cahakies.— Carver, Travels, 
map, 1778. Cahau. —Marain (1753) in Margry, D6c., 
vi, 654, 1886. Cahoki. —Gale, Upper Miss., 174, 
1867. Cahokia.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Ca- 
hokiams.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504,1878. 
Cahokies. —Esnauts andRapiily, map, 1777. Caho- 
qui. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., 1,302,1786. Cahoquias. — 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504,1878. Cankia.— 
Hennepin, New Discov., 310, 1698 (same? The 
“Caokia” are named as another Illinois band). 
Caokia.— Allouez (1680) in Margry, D6c., ii, 96,1877. 
Caoquias. —Perkins and Peck, Annals of the West, 
680, 1850. Caouquias.— Du Pratz, La., II, 227, 1758. 
Carrechias.— StCosme (1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 
62, 1861. Caskoukia. —Moll, map, in Salmon, 
Modern Hist., 3d ed., Ill, 602, 1746. Catiokia.— 
Morse, N. Am., 255,1776. Catokiah. —Nourse (1820) 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 588,1852. Cayaugh- 
kias.— Stone, Life of Brant, II, 566, 1864. Coha- 
kias.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., ii, 8,1814. Cohakies.— Am. Pioneer, i, 
408, 1842. Kahokias.— Homann Heirs’ map, 1756. 
Kahoquias.— Nuttall, Journal, 250,1821. Kakias.— 
Milfort, M6moire, 106, 1802 (same?). Kaockhia. — 
La Salle (1682) in Margry, D6c., ii, 201, 1877. 
Kaokia. —Gravier (1701?) in Perrot, M6moire, 221, 
1864. Kaokies.—Lattr6, map, 1784. Kaoquias. — 


186 


CAHOKIA MOUND-CAITSODAMMO 


[B. a. e. 


Perkins and Peck, Annals of the West, 69, 1850. 
Kaouechias.— Force, Inds. of Ohio, 21,1879. Kaoii- 
kia. —Gravier (1701) in Shea, Early Voy., 118,1861. 
Kabkias. —Shea, ibid., 60. Kavvachias. —Shea, Rel. 
Miss, du Mississippi, 36, 1861. Kavvchias. —St 
Cosine (1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 67, 1861. Kavve- 
chias.— Ibid.,66. Kavvkias. —Ibid.,60. Kawkias.— 
Ibid., 61. Kerokias. —Chauvignerie (1736) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 555,1853. Koakias.— 
BoS'U, Travels through La., 131, 1771. Ooukia.— 
Allouez (1680) in Margry, D6c., II, 96, 1877. Taho- 
kias. —Browne in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 119, 1877. 

Cahokia Mound. The largest prehis¬ 
toric artificial earthwork in the United 
States, situated in Madison co., Ill., in 
what is known as the American bottom, 
about 6 m. e. of St Louis, Mo., and in 
plain view of the railroads entering that 
city from the e. Before their partial 
destruction by the plow the principal 
mound w T as surrounded by an extensive 
mound group, numbering, according to 
Brackenridge (Views La., 187, 1814), who 
visited the place in 1811, “45 mounds 
or pyramids, besides a great number of 
small artificial elevations.” The name 
Cahokia is that 
of a tribe which 
formerly occu¬ 
pied a neighbor¬ 
ing village of the 
same name. In 
form the tumu¬ 
lus is a quad¬ 
rangular pyra¬ 
mid with an 
apron, or terrace, 
extending from 
the s. side. The 
dimensions as 
given by Mc¬ 
Adams (Antiq. 
of Cahokia or 
Monk’s Mound, 

2, 1883) are as 
follows: The base n. and s., 998 ft.; e. to 
w., 721 ft.; height, 99 ft.; height of lower 
terrace, 30 ft.; outward extent of terrace 
about 200 ft.; width about 500 ft. The 
area of the base of the mound is estimated 
at about 16 acres. On the w. side, some 30 
ft. above the first terrace, there was a sec¬ 
ond slight terrace, now scarcely distin¬ 
guishable. Patrick, who studied the 
mound and its surroundings, and prepared 
a model which was cast in iron (now in the 
Peabody Museum at Cambridge, Mass.), 
represented a small level area or terrace 
some 3 or 4 ft. below the level top. Omit¬ 
ting the lower terrace and counting the 
diameters of the base as 721 and 798 ft., 
and the height as 99 ft., without regard to 
the upper level, the contents somewhat 
exceed 18,690,000 cu. ft. Adding the 
terrace, 3,000,000 cu. ft., the total con¬ 
tents amount to 21,690,000 cu. ft. The 
wall of Ft Ancient, Ohio, has been fre¬ 
quently referred to as one of the most 
extensive ancient works of the United 
States, yet the contents of the Cahokia 


mound would form a wall of the same 
base and height exceeding 17 m. in 
length, or more than five times the length 
of the wall of Ft Ancient, and would 
have required, according to the usual 
method of calculation, the labor of 1,000 
persons for 4f years, with the means 
that prehistoric Indians had at hand. 
The places from which the earth was 
taken are apparent from the depressions 
surrounding the Cahokia mound. In 
1811, when visited by Brackenridge, the 
largest terrace was used by a colony of 
Trappists (whence sometimes the name 
Monk’s Mound), who resided in several 
small cabins on one of the smaller 
mounds, which latter was cultivated as 
a kitchen garden. See Brackenridge, 
op. cit.; Bushnell, Cahokia and Surround¬ 
ing Mound Group, Peabody Mus. Publ., 
1904; Conant, Footprints of Vanished 
Races, 1879; McAdams (1) Records of 
Ancient Races, 1887, (2) Antiquities of 

Cahokia, or 
Monk’s Mound, 
1883. (c. t.) 

Cahuabi. APa- 
pago village in 
Arizona, near 
the Sonora bor¬ 
der, with 350 in¬ 
habitants in 1863 
and 80 familes in 
1871. Cf. Gue- 
vavi. 

Cahuabi. —Wilbur in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 
365, 1872. Cahua- 
bia. —Poston in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 
385, 1864. Cahua- 
vi.— Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 19, 
1863. Cusbabi.— 
Browne, Apache Country, 291,1869 (misprint from 
Poston). 

Cahuenga. A former Gabrieleno ran- 
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal. 

Cabeugna.— Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Cabuenga.— Hoffman in 
Bull. Essex Inst., xvri, 2,1885. 

Cahunghage. A former Iroquois village 
on the s. side of Oneida lake, N. Y. 
Cahunghage.— Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. 
Cahung-Hage.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 303, 1786. 
Catumghage. — Lattrd, map, 1784. 

Caiasban. An unidentified village or 
tribe mentioned in 1687 to Joutel (Mar¬ 
gry, Dec., hi, 409, 1878), while he was 
staying with the Kadohadacho on Red 
r., of Louisiana, by the chief of that tribe 
as being among his enemies. 

Caicaches. A tribe said to have lived 
on the coast of Texas, but to have been 
extinct by 1850.—Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. 
Soc. Loud., ii, 265, 280, 1850. 

Caiman. A former Tepehuane pueblo 
in Jalisco, Mexico. 

San Francisco. —Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., I 469 
1902 (probably the same). S, Francisco del 
Caiman,— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 281,1864. 

Caitsodammo. An unidentified village 



CAHOKIA MOUND, ILLINOIS) HEIGHT, AS MEASURED BY McADAMS, 99 FT. ) 
GREATEST LENGTH, 998 FT. 













BULL. 30 J 


CA J ATS-CALA POOYA 


187 


or tribe mentioned to Joutel in 1687 
(Margry, Dec., hi, 409, 1878), while he 
was staying with the Kadohadacho on 
Red r. of Louisiana, by the chief of that 
tribe as being among his enemies. 

Cajats. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Cojats.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 459, 1874 (mis¬ 
quoted from Taylor). 

Cajon (Span.: ‘ box ’ cany on). A Die- 
gueno settlement about 1850, so called 
after a mountain pass about 10 m. n. e. 
of San Diego harbor, s. Cal.—Hayes MS. 
cited by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 458,1882. 

Cajpilili. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Cajuenche. A Yuman tribe speaking 
the Cocopa dialect and residing in 1775-76 
on the e. bank of the Rio Colorado below 
the mouth of the Gila, next to the Quig- 
yuma, their rancherias extending s. to 
about lat. 32° 33' and into central s. Cali¬ 
fornia, about lat. 33° 08 7 , where they met 
the Comeya. At the date named the Ca- 
juenche are said to have numbered 3,000 
and to have been enemies of the Cocopa 
(Garces, Diary, 443, 1900). Of the disap¬ 
pearance of the tribe practically nothing 
is known, but if they are identical with 
the Cawina, or Quo-kim, as they seem to 
be, they had become reduced to a mere 
remnant by 1851, owing to constant 
wars with the Yuma. At this date Bart¬ 
lett reported only 10 survivors living with 
the Pima and Maricopa, only one of 
whom understood his native language, 
which was said to differ from the Pima 
and Maricopa. Merced, San Jacome, and 
San Sebastian (?) have been mentioned 
as Cajuenche rancherias. (f. w. h. ) 

Cafuenchi.— Escudero, Noticias Estadisticas de 
Chihuahua, 228,1834. Cajuenche.— Garces (1776), 
Diary, 434,1900. Carjuenche.— Forbes, Hist. Cal., 
162, 1839. Cawina.— Bartlett, Pers. Narr.. II, 251, 
1854. Cojuenchis.— Pike, Expeditions, 3d map, 
1810. Kakhuana.— Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (Mohave 
name). Kokhuene.— Ibid. Oajuenches.— Hinton, 
Handbook to Arizona, 28,1878 (misprint). Quo- 
kim.— Thomas, MS. Yuma vocab., B. A. E., 1868. 

Cajurachic. A Tarahumare settlement 
in Chihuahua, Mexico; definite locality 
unknown.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 
1864. 

Calabashes. See Gourds. 

Calabazas (Span.: ‘calabashes’). For¬ 
merly a Sobaipuri (?) rancheria, dating 
from the early part of the 18th century; 
situated on the Rio Santa Cruz, below Tu- 
bac,ins. Arizona. ItwasavisitaofGuevavi 
until that mission was abandoned prior to 
1784. A church and a house for the priest 
were erected in 1797, before which date 
Calabazas was probably a visita of Tubac. 
It had 116 neophytes in 1760-64, and 64 
in 1772, but it was described as being 
only a rancho in 1828. When visited by 
Bartlett (Pers. Narr., i, 391, 1854), in 


1851, it was in ruins, and seemed to 
have been abandoned many years be¬ 
fore. (f. w. h.) 

Colabazas.— Font, map (1777) in Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 393, 1889 (misprint). San Caye- 
tano de Calabazas. —Bancroft, ibid., 369,385. S. 
Cajetanus. —Kino, map (1702) in Stocklem, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74,1726. S. Gaetan.— Kino, map (1701) 
in Bancroft, op. cit., 360. 

Calagnujuet.—A place in n. Lower Cali¬ 
fornia, 8m. above Borja, at which a Jesuit 
mission was established in Oct., 1766, but 
owing to the barrenness of the soil and 
the alkaline water it was moved in May, 
1767, to a site 50 m. away, where new 
buildings were erected and where, under 
the name Santa Marfa, it soon became 
somewhat prosperous. It was the last of 
the mission establishments of the Jesuits 
in Lower California, as they were ex¬ 
pelled in the year last named. See Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 473, 1886. 

Calahuasa. The mission of Santa In6s, 
or perhaps a Chumashan village formerly 
at or near its site. 

Calahuasa.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24,1863. 
Calla Wassa.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 459, 1874. 
Kalahuasa. —Taylor, op. cit., Oct. 18, 1861. 

Calany. A former Timuquanan tribe or 
settlement of the Utina confederacy in 
middleorN. Florida.—Laudonniere( 1564) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243,1869. 

Calanay.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., II, map, 1591 (town 
on an e. tributary of middle St Johns r.) Cal- 
anio.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723. 

Calaobe. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fontaneda 
Mem. ( co . 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854. 

Calaboe. —Fontaneda as quoted in Doc. In6d., v, 
539, 1866. 

Calapooya. The name, properly speak¬ 
ing, of a division of the Kalapooian family 
formerly occupying the watershed be¬ 
tween Willamette and Umpqua rs., Oreg. 
The term as usually employed, however, 
includes all the bands speaking dialects 
oi the Kalapooian language and is made 
synonymous with the family name. This 
double use of the term, coupled with the 
scanty information regarding the division, 
has wrought confusion in the classifica¬ 
tion of the bands which can not be recti¬ 
fied. The following were ascertained by 
Gatschet to have been bands of this divi¬ 
sion: Ampishtna, Tsanchifin, Tsanklight- 
emifa, Tsankupi, and Tsawokot. ( l. f. ) 

Calahpoewah.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 227, 
1814. Calapooa.— Parker, Journal, 415, 1846. Cal- 
apooah.— Ibid., 173,1840. Calapoogas.— Lea in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 270, 1851. Calapooias.— U. S. Stat. at 
Large, x, 674,1854. Calapoolia.— Lyman in Oreg. 
Hist. Soc. Quar., I, 325, 1900. Calapoogas. —Miller 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 430,1860. Calapooyas.— Lee 
and Frost, Oregon, 90,1844. Calapuaya. —McClane 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 203, 1888. Calapuyas. —Hale in 
U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 198, 1846. Calipoa.— Lane 
(1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 
172, 1850. Calipooias.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
260, 1854. Calipooya. —Bissell, Umpkwa MS. 

vocab., B. A. E. Calipoyas.— Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., II, map, 1836. Calipuyowes.— 
Henry-Thompson Jour., Coues ed., 8l4, 1897. 
Cal-lah-po-e-ouah.— Nouv. Ann. Voy., 1® s., xii, 


188 


CALAVERAS MAN—CALCIATI 


[B. A. E. 


map, 1821. Callahpoewah. —Kelley, Oregon, 68, 
1830. Cal-lah-po-e-wah. —Lewis andClark, Exped., 
i, map, 1814. Callapipas. —McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Callapooahs.— Parker, 
Journal, 239,1840. Callapoohas.— Robertson (1846) 
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 8, 1848. 
Callapooiales.— Howison in H. R. Misc. Doc. 29, 
30th Cong., 1st sess., 26, 1848. Callapooias. —Tay¬ 
lor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 40th Cong., spec, sess., 25, 
1867. Callapootos.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., 
vi, 141, 1883. Callapooya.— Pres. Mess., Ex. Doc. 
39, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1852. Callapooyahs.— 
Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 217, 1846. Calla 
puyas.— Wilkes, ibid., IV, 368, 1845. Callapuyes.— 
Med ill in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 
6, 1848. Call-law-poh-yea-as. —Ross, Fur Hunters, 
108, 1855. Cathlapooya.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 
1848. Cathlapouyeas.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 
x, 117,1821. Col-lap-poh-yea-ass.— Ross, Adven¬ 
tures, 235, 1847. Kait-ka.— Bissell, Umpkwa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1881 (Umpkwa name). Kala- 
pooiah. —Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
225,1841. Kalapooya.— Tolmie and Dawson,Comp. 
Vocab., 11,1884. Kalapooyahs.— Townsend, Narr., 
175, 1839. Kalapouyas. —De Smet, Letters, 230, 
1843. Kalapuaya.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 232, 1883. 

Kalapuya.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 217, 
1846. Kallapooeas. —Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 
30th Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848. Kallapooyah.— 
Slocum (1835) in H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d 
sess., 42, 1839. Kallapugas. —Farnham, Travels, 
112,1843. Kallapuia.— Gibbs in Cont. N.A.Ethnol., 
i, 212, 1877. Kallapuiah. —Ludewig, Am. Aborig. 
Lang., 202, 1858. Tsanh-alokual amim. —Gatscbet, 
Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Lakmiut name). 
Vule Pugas.— Warre and Vavasour in Martin, 
Hudson Bay Terr., 80, 1819. 

Calaveras Man. During the early days 
of gold mining in California many relics 
of man and his implements and utensils 
were found embedded in the ancient river 
gravels from which the gold was washed. 
These remains were 
especially plentiful 
in Calaveras co., 
whence the name 
“Calaveras man,” 
here employed. The 
gold-bearing gravels 
are largely of Tertiary 
age, although the 
conditions have been 
such that in places frontal view of the fragmen- 
accumulations uni- tary calaverasskull 
form in character with the older deposits 
have continued to the present time. Ow¬ 
ing to this fact expert geologic discrim¬ 
ination is necessary in considering ques¬ 
tions of age. The evidences of great 
antiquity, in many cases apparently al¬ 
most conclusive, were accepted as satis¬ 
factory by J. D. Whitney, formerly state 
geologist of California; but the lack of 
expert observation or of actual record of 
the various finds reported makes extreme 
caution advisable, especially since the 
acceptanqp of the evidence necessitates 
conclusions widely at variance with the 
usual conception of the history of man, 
not only in America but throughout the 
world. The need of conservatism in 
dealing with this evidence is further em¬ 
phasized by the fact that the human 
crania of the auriferous gravels are 
practically identical with the crania 
of the present California Indians, and 


it is also observed that the artifacts— 
the mortars and pestles, the implements 
and ornaments—found in the same con¬ 
nection correspond closely with those of 
the historic inhabitants of the Pacific 
slope. It is held by many students of 
human history that man already existed 
in some parts of the world in the late 
Tertiary—a period believed by conserva¬ 
tive geologists to have closed hundreds 
of thousands of years ago. But few are 
ready to accept the conclusion, made 
necessary if the California testimony is 
fully sustained, that man had then reached 
the stage of culture characterized by the 
use of implements and ornaments of 
polished stone. In view of the somewhat 
defective 'nature of the testimony fur¬ 
nished, as well as the vast importance of 
the deductions depending on it, it is per¬ 
haps wise to suspend judgment until 
more systematic investigations can be 
made. The “Calaveras skull,” which 
has had exceptional prominence in the 
discussion of this subject, is preserved in 
the Peabody Museum of Archselogy and 
Ethnology, at Cambridge, Mass. Not¬ 
withstanding the well-fortified statements 
of early writers to the effect that this 
relic came from the gravels of Bald mtn. 
at a depth of about 130 feet, there are 
good reasons for suspecting that it may 
have been derived from one of the lime¬ 
stone caves so numerous in the Calaveras 
region. It thus appears that the impor¬ 
tance of this specimen, as a feature of the 
evidence, has probably been greatly over¬ 
estimated. 

For details relating to the auriferous- 
gravel testimony consult Becker in Bull. 
Geol. Soc. Am., ii, 1891; Blake in Jour, 
of Geol., Oct.-Nov., 1899; Dali in Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1899; Foster, Pre- 
hist. Races, 1878; Hanks, Deep Lying 
Gravels of Table Mtn., 1901; Holmes in 
Smithson. Rep. 1899, 1901; Lindgren and 
Knowlton in Jour, of Geol., iv, 1896; 
Putnam in University of Cal. Publ., 
Dept, of Anthrop., 1905; Skertchley in 
Jour. Anthrop. Inst., May, 1888; Whit¬ 
ney in Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 
vi, no. 1, 1879; Wright, Man and the 
Glacial Period, 1895. See Antiquity , Arch¬ 
eology. (w. h. h. ) 

Calcefar. A division of the New Jersey 
Delawares formerly living in the interior 
between Rancocas cr. and the present 
Trenton. In 1648 they were estimated at 
150 men. 

Calafars.—Sanford, U. S., 1819. Calcefar.—Evelin 
(1648) quoted by Proud, Penn., i, 113,1797. 

Calchufines. A band of Jicarilla Apache 
living in 1719 on Arkansas r., in the pres¬ 
ent s. e. Colorado.—Villa-Senor y San¬ 
chez, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 412, 1748. 
Apaches Calchufines.— Valverde y Costo (1719) 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 236, 1889. 

Calciati. A pueblo of the province of 



BULL. 30] 


CALCITE-CALENDAR 


189 


Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.— Onate (1598) 
in Doc. In£d., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Calcite. —Carbonate of calcium, the 
essential constitutent of chalk and lime¬ 
stone, when pure, colorless, and trans¬ 
parent, though sometimes yellow and 
red and even black. The crystals, which 
are so soft as to be readily shaped with 
primitive knives and scrapers, are of 
general occurrence and were employed 
by the Indians in the manufacture of 
ornaments and minor sculptures. See 
Stone-work. (w. h. h.) 

Caldrons. See Receptacles. 

Caldwell, Billy. See Sagaunash. 

Calendar. Although the methods of 
computing time had been carried to an 
advanced stage among the cultured tribes 
of Mexico and Central America, the In¬ 
dians n. of Mexico had not brought them 
beyond the simplest stage. The alterna¬ 
tion of day and night and the changes of 
the moon and the seasons formed the 
bases of their systems. The budding, 
blooming, leafing, and fruiting of vegeta¬ 
tion, the springing forth, growth, and 
decay of annuals, and the molting, mi¬ 
gration, pairing, etc., of animals and birds 
were used to denote the progress of the 
seasons. The divisions of the day dif- 
ered, many tribes recognizing 4 diur¬ 
nal periods—the rising and setting of the 
sun, noon, and midnight—while full days 
were usually counted as so many nights 
or sleeps. The years were generally 
reckoned, especially in the far n., as 
so many winters or so many snows; but 
in the Gulf states, where snow is rare and 
the heat of summer the dominant feature, 
the term for year had some reference to 
this season or to the heat of the sun. As 
a rule the four seasons—spring, summer, 
autumn, and winter—were recognized 
and specific names applied to them, but 
the natural phenomena by which they 
were determined, and from which their 
names were derived, varied according to 
latitude and environment, and as to 
whether the tribe was in the agricultural 
or the hunter state. Some authorities 
state that the Indians of Virginia divided 
the year into five seasons: (1) The bud¬ 
ding of spring; (2) the earing of corn, or 
roasting-eartime; (3) summer, or highest 
sun; (4) corn-gathering, or fall of the leaf; 
and (5) winter (cohonk). According to 
Mooney the Cherokee and most of the 
southeastern tribes also divided the year 
into five seasons. Swanton and Boas 
state that some of the tribes of the N. W. 
coast divided the year into two equal 
parts, with 6 months or moons to each 
part, the summer period extending from 
April to September, the winter period 
from October to March. Many tribes 
began the year with the vernal equinox; 


others began it in the fall, the Kiowa 
about Oct. 1, the Hopi with the “new 
fire” in November, the Takulli in Janu¬ 
ary, etc. The most important time di¬ 
vision to the Indians n. of Mexico was 
the moon, or month, their count of this 
period beginning with the new moon. 
So far as can be ascertained, it was not 
universal in the past to correlate the 
moons with the year; where correlation 
was attempted, in order that the moons 
should bear a fixed relation to the sea¬ 
sons, 12 was the number usually reckoned; 
but some of the tribes, as those of New 
England, the Cree, and some others 
counted 13. The Kiowa system, although 
counting 12 moons to the year, presents 
the peculiarity of half a moon in one of 
the unequal four seasons, and the other 
half in the following season, thus begin¬ 
ning the year with the last half of a moon. 
Among the Zuni half the months are 
“nameless,” the other half “named.” 
The year is called a “passage of time,” the 
seasons the “ steps” of the year, and the 
months “crescents,” probably because 
each begins with anew moon. The new 
year is termed “mid-journey of the sun,” 
i. e., the middle of the solar trip between 
one summer solstice and another, and 
occurring about the 19th of December 
usually initiates a short season of great 
religious activity. The first six months 
have definite and appropriate names, 
the others, while called the “nameless” 
months, are designated, in ritualistic 
speech, Yellow, Blue, Red, White, Varie¬ 
gated, and Black, after the colors of the 
praver-sticks sacrificed in rotation at 
the full of each moon to the gods of the 
north, west, south, east, zenith, and nadir, 
respectively represented by those colors 
(Cushing in Millstone, ix, 58, Apr. 
1884). There appears to have been an 
attempt on the part of some tribes to com¬ 
pensate for the surplus days in the solar 
year. Carver (Trav., 160,1796), speaking 
of the Sioux or the Chippewa, says that 
when thirty moons have waned they add 
a supernumerary one, which they term 
the lost moon. The Haida formerly in¬ 
tercalated what they called a “between 
month,” because between the two pe¬ 
riods into which they divided the year, 
and it is likely that this was sometimes 
omitted to correct the calendar (Swanton 
in Am. Anthrop., v, 331, 1903). The 
Creeks counted 12| moons to the year, 
adding a moon at the end of every second 
year, half counted in the preceding and 
half in the following year, somewhat 
as did the Kiowa. The Indians gen¬ 
erally calculated their ages by some re¬ 
markable event or phenomenon which 
had taken place within their remem¬ 
brance; but few Indians of mature years 
could possibly tell their age before learn- 


190 


CALIFORNIA INDIANS 


[B. a. k' 


ing the white man’s way of counting time. 
Sticks were sometimes notched by the In¬ 
dians as an aid in time counts. The oldest 
of these among the Pima (Russell in Am. 
Anthrop., v, 76, 1903) dates from the 
meteoric shower of 1833, a notable tally 
date in Indian time reckoning. Some of 
the northern tribes kept records of events 
by means of symbolic figures or picto- 
graphs. One of these is an extended cal¬ 
endar history, called the “Lone-dog 


Those along the coast s. of San Francisco 
were brought under Spanish missionary 
influence in the latter part of the 18th 
and the beginning of the 19th centuries. 
Some tribes, however, were not known 
even by name until after the discovery 
of gold and the settlement of the country 
in 1849 and subsequently. The Califor¬ 
nians were among the least warlike tribes 
of the continent and offered but little re¬ 
sistance, and that always ineffectual, to 



LINGUISTIC FAMILIES OF CALIFORNIA 


winter count,” said to have been painted 
originally on a buffalo robe, found among 
the Dakota, the figures of which cover a 
period of 71 years from 1800 (Mallery in 
10th Rep. B. A. E.). Another series is 
the calendar history of the Kiowa, de- 
cribed by Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E. 
See Measures , Numeral systems, (c. t.) 

California, Indians of. The Indians of 
California are among the least known 
groups of natives of North America. 


the seizure of their territory by the 
whites. Comparatively few of them are 
now on reservations. The majority live 
as squatters on the land of white owners 
or of the Government, or in some cases 
on land allotted them by the Govern¬ 
ment or even bought by themselves from 
white owners. Their number has de¬ 
creased very rapidly and is now probably 
about 15,000, as compared with perhaps 
150,000 before the arrival of the whites. 








BULL. 30] 


CALOUCHA-CALUMET 


191 


Physically, the California Indians, like 
other tribes of the Pacific coast, are rather 
shorter than the majority of those in east¬ 
ern North America. In many cases they 
incline to be stout. Along the coast, and 
especially in the s., they are unusually 
dark. The m ost southern tribes approx i- 
mate those of the Colorado r. in physical 
type and are tall and short-headed. The 
native population of California was broken 
up into a great number of small groups. 
These were often somewhat unsettled in 
habitation, but always within very lim¬ 
ited territories, and were never nomadic. 
The dialects of almost all of these groups 
were different and belonged to as many 
as 21 distinct linguistic families, being a 
fourth of the total number found in all 
North America, and, as compared with 
the area of the state, so large that Cali¬ 
fornia must probably be regarded as the 
region of the greatest aboriginal linguistic 
diversity in the world. Three larger 
stocks have found their way into Califor¬ 
nia: the Athapascan in the n. and the 
Shoshonean and Yuinan in the s. The 
remainder are all small and purely Cali¬ 
fornian. 

This diversity is accompanied by a 
corresponding stability of population. 
While there have undoubtedly been shift- 
ings of tribes within the state, they do 
not appear to have extended very far ter¬ 
ritorially. The Indians themselves in no 
art of the state except the extreme s. 
ave any tradition of migrations and 
uniformly believe themselves to have 
originated at the spot where they live. 
The groups in which they live are very 
loose, being defined and held together by 
language and the topography of the coun¬ 
try much more than by any political or 
social organization; distinct tribes, as 
they occur in many other parts of America, 
do not really exist. The small village is 
the most common unit of organization 
among these people. 

Culturally, the California Indians are 
probably as simple and rude as any large 
group of Indians in North America. 
Their arts (excepting that of basket mak¬ 
ing, which they possessed in a high form) 
were undeveloped; pottery was practi¬ 
cally unknown, and in the greater part 
of the state the carving or working of 
wood was carried on only to a limited 
extent. Housec were often of grass, 
tule, or brush, or of bark, sometimes 
covered with earth. Only in the n. w. 
part of the state w r ere small houses of 
planks in use. In this region, as well 
as on the Santa Barbara ids., w’ooden 
canoes w r ere also made, but over the 
greater part of the state a raft of tules 
was the only means of navigation. Agri¬ 
culture was nowhere practised. Deer and 
small game were hunted, and there was 


considerable fishing; but the bulk of the 
food was vegetable. The main reliance 
was placed on numerous varieties of 
acorns, and next to these, on seeds, espe¬ 
cially of grasses and herbs. Roots and 
berries were less used. 

Both totemism and a true gentile or¬ 
ganization were totally lacking in all parts 
of the state. The mythology of the Cali¬ 
fornians was characterized by unusually 
w T ell-developed and consistent creation 
myths, and by the complete lack not only 
of migration but of ancestor traditions. 
Their ceremonies were numerous and 
elaborate as compared with the pre¬ 
vailing simplicity of life, but they lacked 
almost totally the rigid ritualism and ex¬ 
tensive symbolism that pervade the cere¬ 
monies of most of America. One set 
of ceremonies was usually connected with 
a secret religious society; another, often 
spectacular, was held in remembrance of 
the dead. 

With constant differences from group 
to group, these characteristics held with 
a general underlying uniformity over 
the greater part of California. In the 
extreme n. w. portion of the state, 
however, a somewhat more highly de¬ 
veloped and specialized culture existed, 
which showed in several respects simi¬ 
larities to that of the n. Pacific coast, as 
is indicated by a greater advance in 
technology, a social organization largely 
upon a property basis, and a system of 
mythology that is suggestive of those 
farther n. The Santa Barbara islanders, 
now extinct, appear also to have been 
considerably specialized from the great 
body of Californian tribes, both in their 
arts and their mode of life. The Indians 
of s. California, finally, especially those 
of the interior, living under geographic 
conditions very different from those of 
the main portion of the state, resemble 
in certain respects of culture the Indians 
of Arizona and New Mexico. See Mis¬ 
sion Indians and the articles on the indi¬ 
vidual linguistic families noted on the 
accompanying map. (a. l. k.) 

Caloucha. A tribe on a river flowing 
into the Atlantic n. of St Augustine, Fla. 
(De Isle, map, 1707); possibly an erro¬ 
neous location of Calusa, otherwise uni¬ 
dentifiable. 

Calumet (Norman-French form of lit¬ 
erary French chalumet, a parallel of 
chalumeau for chalemeau , Old French 
chalemel, Provencal caramel , a tube, 
pipe, reed, flute, especially a shepherd’s 
pipe; Spanish caramillo, a flute; English, 
shawm; Low Latin, calamellus , diminu¬ 
tive of Latin calamus , reed). Either one 
of 2 highly symbolic shafts of reed or 
wood about 2 in. broad, i in. thick, and 18 
in. to 4 ft. long, the one representing the 
male, the other the female shaft, usually 


192 


CALUMET 


[B. a. e. 


perforated for a pathway for the breath 
or spirit, painted with diverse symbolic 
colors and adorned with various sym¬ 
bolic objects, and which may or may 
not have a pipe bowl to contain tobacco 
for making a sacred offering of its benev¬ 
olent smoke to the gods. In modern usage 
the term usually includes the pipe. Its 
coloring and degree of adornment varied 
somewhat from tribe to tribe and were 
largely governed by the occasion for 
which the calumet was used. From the 
meager descriptions of the calumet and 
its uses it would seem that it has a cere¬ 
monially symbolic history independent 
of that of the pipe; and that when the 
pipe became an altar, by its employment 
for burning sacrificial tobacco to the gods, 
convenience and convention united the 
already highly symbolic calumet shafts 
and the sacrificial tobacco altar, the pipe- 
bowl; hence it became one of the most 
profoundly sacred objects known to the 
Indians of northern America. As the 
colors and the other adornments on the 
shaft represent symbolically various 
dominant gods of the Indian polytheon, 
it follows that the symbolism of the calu¬ 
met and pipe represented a veritable ex¬ 
ecutive council of the gods. Moreover, 
in some of the elaborate ceremonies in 
which it was necessary to portray this 
symbolism the employment of the two 
shafts became necessary, because the 
one with its colors and accessory adorn¬ 
ments represented the procreative male 
power and his aids, and was denominated 
the male, the fatherhood of nature; and 
the other with its colors and necessary 
adornments represented the reproduc¬ 
tive female power and her aids, and was 
denominated the female, the motherhood 
of nature. 

The calumet was employed by ambas¬ 
sadors and travelers as a passport; it was 
used in ceremonies designed to conciliate 
foreign and hostile nations and to con¬ 
clude lasting peace; to ratify the alliance 
of friendly tribes; to secure favorable 
weather for journeys; to bring needed 
rain; and to attest contracts and treaties 
which could not be violated without in¬ 
curring the wrath of the gods. The use 
of the calumet was inculcated by reli¬ 
gious precept and example. A chant and 
a dance have become known as the chant 
and the dance of the calumet; together 
they were employed as an invocation to 
one or more of the gods. By naming in 
the chant the souls of those against 
whom war must be waged, such persons 
were doomed to die at the hands of the 
person so naming them. The dance and 
the chant were rather in honor of the 
calumet than with the calumet. To 
smoke it was prohibited to a man whose 


wife was with child, lest he perish and she 
die in childbirth. The calumet was em¬ 
ployed also in banishing evil and for ob¬ 
taining good. Some, in order to obtain 
favor of the gods, sacrificed some animals 
in spirit to them, and, as the visible food 
was not consumed visibly by the gods, 
they ate the food and chanted and danced 
for the calumet. 

J. O. Dorsey asserts that the Omaha and 
cognate names for this dance and chant 
signify ‘ * to make a sacred kinship, ’ ’ but 
not “to dance.” This is a key to the 
esoteric significance of the use of the cal¬ 
umet. The one for whom the dance for 
the calumet was performed became there¬ 
by the adopted son of the performer. 
One might ask another to dance the cal¬ 
umet dance for him, or one might offer 
to perform this dance for another, but in 
either case the offer or invitation could 
be declined. The dancing party con¬ 
sisted of 2 leaders and sometimes as many 
as 20 or 30 adherents. In the lodge 
wherein the dance for the calumet was 
to be held the 2 niniba weawan , or cal¬ 
umet pipes, were placed on a forked sup¬ 
port driven into the virgin soil in the 
rear part of the lodge. Each weawan has, 
instead of a pipe-bowl, the head and neck 
of a green-neck duck. Next on the staff 
are the yellowish feathers of the great 
owl, extending about 6 in.; next are 
the long wing-feathers of the war eagle, 
riven and stuck on lengthwise in 3 places; 
at the end a bit of horsehair, tinted red, 
is wrapped around the staff and bound on 
with sinew, and over this is fastened some 
fur of the white rabbit, strips of which 
dangle about 6 in.; below the rabbit 
fur the horsehair extends fully 6 in. 
The horsehair is wrapped around the staff 
in 2 other places and secured in a sim¬ 
ilar manner; the 3 tufts are equidistant, 
about 6 in. apart. Close to the last 
tuft is the head of the wagin'gada (?) 
woodcock, having the bill faced toward 
the mouthpiece. There may be, accord¬ 
ing to La Flesche, as many as 6 heads on 

1 pipe. No part of the neck appears, 
and the lower mandible is removed. The 
head, or the heads, in case of a plurality, 
was secured to the shaft by means of a 
deer or antelope skin. Next to this are 
suspended 2 eagle plumes, symbolizing 

2 eggs, typifying that the adopted per¬ 
son is still an immature child, and serving 
as a thinly veiled symbol suggestive of 
the source of life. Next are a number 
of eagle feathers secured to the shaft by 
means of 2 cords or thongs of deer or 
antelope skin. On one shaft the eagle 
feathers are white, being those of a male 
eagle, and the shaft is dark green. On 
the other shaft the feathers are spotted 
black and white, being those of the fe- 


BULL. 30] 


CALUMET 


193 


male eagle, and the shaft is dark blue. 
Two symbolically painted gourd rattles 
are also employed, 1 for each calumet. 

When these shafts are set against the 2 
forked sticks the heads of the ducks are 
placed nextto the ground. Close to these 
shafts are 2 sticks connected with a sacred 
ear of corn, which must be in perfect con¬ 
dition ; ears containing rough or shriveled 
or otherwise imperfect grains are re¬ 
jected. All the people use corn for food, 
hence it is regarded as a mother. These 
sticks are tinted with Indian red. The 
longer stick, which stands nearer the calu¬ 
met shafts, is driven about 4 in. into the 
earth and projects several inches above 
the ear of corn, the top end of it being 
on a level with that of the ear of corn, 
while the lower end hangs a short dis¬ 
tance below the lower end of the ear of 
corn, but does not reach the ground. 
The ear of corn is fastened to the sticks 
by wrapping around the 3 a band braided 
from hair from the head of a buffalo. 
To the top of the smaller stick an eagle 
plume is secured with sinew. The lower 
part of the ear of corn is white; the upper 
part is painted green. 

In this dance, lasting an hour, the 
movements of the war eagle are closely 
imitated, accompanied by a constant 
waving of the calumets. After the de¬ 
livery of presents, the 2 calumets are 
given to the family to which the adopted 
child belongs. Such are, according to 
Dorsey, the Omaha calumets with their 
use in a ceremony for making a sacred 
kinship in the adoption of a child, who 
for this purpose must be less than 10 
years of age. The Ponka use only 1 cal¬ 
umet, although they are well acquainted 
with the Omaha use of 2, and it may be 
a higher development of the intention of 
the symbolism. 

From Dorsey’s account of the Omaha 
calumets it is evident that they are to¬ 
gether the most highly organized em¬ 
blems known to religious observances 
anywhere, and it is further in evidence 
that the pipe is an accessory rather than 
the dominant or chief object in this 
highly complex synthetic symbol of the 
source, reproduction, and conservation 
of life. 

For the purpose of comparison, the fol¬ 
lowing description of the calumet by 
Hennepin may be given: “The quill, 
which is commonly two foot and a half 
long, is made of a pretty strong reed or 
cane, adorned with feathers of all colors, 
interlaced with locks of women’s hair. 
They tie to it two wings of the most 
curious birds they find, which makes 
their calumet not much unlike Mercury’s 
wand, or that staff ambassadors did for¬ 
merly carry when they went to treat of 
peace. They sheath that reed into the 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-13 


neck of birds they call huars [loons], 
which are as big as our geese and spotted 
with black and white; or else of a sort of 
ducks who make their nests upon trees, 
though water be their natural element, 
and whose feathers are of many different 
colours. However, every nation adorns 
the calumet as they think fit, according to 
their own genius and the birds they have 
in their own country.” 

In her description of the Hako cere¬ 
monial of tiie Pawnee, Miss Fletcher has 
set forth these conceptions with great 
sympathy and detail. Among this people 
two ash saplings are cut and brought with 
due ceremony; they are then warmed 
and straightened over a newly kindled 
sacred fire, and are cut the required 
length, “four spans from the thumb to 
the third finger.” They are then peeled 
and the pith removed to permit the pas¬ 
sage of the breath. A straight groove is 
cut the entire length of each shaft, and 
after the litter thus made is cast into the 
fire, the shafts are passed through the 
flames, “the word of the fire.” Thereupon 
one of the shafts, with the exception of 
the groove, is painted blue with cere¬ 
monially prepared color to symbolize the 
sky, and while this is being done there is 
intoned a song in which a prayer is made 
that life be given to this symbol of the 
dwelling place of the chief deity. Then 
the shaft is placed in the hands of the 
chief shaman, whose function it is to 
paint the groove red, typifying the path¬ 
way of the spirits, represented by the 
objects placed later upon this ashen shaft, 
for their going forth to aid man in this 
ceremony; and, furthermore, the red color 
here employed typifies the passageways 
of the body, through which the breath of 
man—his life—comes and departs, and the 
sun is red, and also straight—like unto 
this—is the pathway on which the sun 
shines. In similar fashion is the other 
shaft painted green and its groove red, 
the latter color having the same signifi¬ 
cance it has on the other shaft, and the 
green color is employed to symbolize 
vegetation, the living covering of mother 
earth. In the accompanying song a 
prayer is made that life be breathed into 
the symbol to make it efficient in the ap¬ 
proaching ceremonies and that living 
power may abide where this symbol 
shall be placed. Then the shaman, after 
anointing his hands with a sacred oint¬ 
ment, consisting of red clay and the fat 
of a deer or buffalo that has been con¬ 
secrated to the chief deity, binds the 
symbolic objects separately on the two 
shafts. Splitting long feathers from the 
wings of an eagle, he glues them with 
pine pitch on the shaft, as in feathering 
an arrow. These feathers signify that 
the eagle soars near the abode of the 


194 


CALUMET 


t £. A. JU. 


chief deity. About the mouthpiece of 
the shaft soft blue feathers are fastened, 
symbolizing the sky wherein the powers 
abide. Then a woodpecker’s head, with 
the mandible turned back upon the red 
crest, is bound to the shaft near the 
mouthpiece, indicating that the bird may 
not be angry; the inner side of the man¬ 
dible thus exposed is painted blue, show¬ 
ing that the chief deity is looking down 
on it as the bird’s spirit moves along the 
groove to reach the people; then about 
the middle of the shaft feathers from the 
owl are bound and the undecorated end 
of the shaft is thrust through the breast, 
throat, and mouth of the duck, the breast 
reaching the feathers of the owl. The 
end of the shaft projects a little from the 
duck’s mouth, that a pipe may be fitted 
to the shaft. The duck’s head, therefore, 
always faces downward toward the earth 
and water. Then 10 tail-feathers of the 
brown eagle, made sacred by sacrifice to 
the chief deity, are prepared for binding 
on one of the stems; a buckskin thong is 
threaded through a hole made in the 
quill midway of its length and another 
thong is passed through a bole near the 
end of the quill in such manner that the 
feathers may be expanded like a fan on 
these two thongs. The two little balls of 
white down from inside the thigh of the 
white male eagle, representing repro¬ 
ductive power, are secured to the ends of 
these thongs and this fan-like wing is se¬ 
cured to the side of the blue-colored shaft 
in such way that it may swing when the 
shaft is waved to simulate the movements 
of an eagle. Such is the female shaft, 
representing the night, the moon, the 
north, as well as kindness and gentleness; 
it cares for the people; it is the mother. 
Every bird represented on these shafts is 
a leader, a chief, a god; the eagle, the 
owl, the woodpecker, and the duck are 
chiefs, respectively, of the day, the night, 
the trees, and the water. Then 7 tail- 
feathers from the white eagle, pre¬ 
pared in similar fashion, are secured to 
the green-colored shaft; but while these 
are being prepared no song is sung, be¬ 
cause the white eagle is not sacred, never 
being a sacrificial victim, and having less 
power than the brown eagle, for it is war¬ 
like and inclined to injure, and so can 
not lead, but must follow. Hence the 
green-colored shaft, the male, is prepared, 
painted, and decorated after the other. 

From Charlevoix (1721) it is learned that 
the calumet is strictly the stem or shaft of 
what is commonly called the calumet pipe; 
that in those designed for public cere¬ 
monial purposes this shaft is very long, 
and “is of light wood, painted with dif¬ 
ferent colors, and adorned with the heads, 
tails, wings, and feathers of the most 
beautiful birds,” wTiich he believed were 


“only for ornament” rather than for 
symbolic expression; that among those 
nations among which the calumet is in 
use it is as sacred as are the wampum 
belts and strands among the nations 
among whom these things are in use; that 
Pawnee tradition asserts that the calumet 
is a gift from the sun; that the calumet 
is in use more among the southern and 
western nations than among the eastern 
and northern, and it is more frequently 
employed for peace than for war. He 
says that if the calumet is offered and 
accepted it is the custom to smoke in the 
calumet, and the engagements contracted 
are held sacred and inviolable, in justso far 
as such human things are inviolable. Per- 
rot also says that the Indians believe that 
the sun gave the calumet to the Pawnee. 
The Indians profess that the violation of 
such an engagement never escapes just 
punishment. In the heat of battle, if an 
adversary offer the calumet to his oppo¬ 
nent and he accept it, the weapons on 
both sides are at once laid down; but to 
accept or to refuse the offer of the calu¬ 
met is optional. There are calumets for 
various kinds of public engagements, and 
when such bargains are made an ex¬ 
change of calumets is usual,, in this man¬ 
ner rendering the contract or bargain 
sacred. 

When war is contemplated, not only 
the shaft but the feathers with which it 
is dressed are colored red, but the feath¬ 
ers only on one side may be red, and it is 
claimed that from the disposition of the 
feathers in some instances it is possible to 
know to what nation the calumet is to be 
presented. By smoking together in the 
calumet the contracting parties intend to 
invoke the sun and the other gods as wit¬ 
nesses to the mutual obligations assumed 
by the parties, and as a guaranty the one 
to the other that they shall be fulfilled. 
This is accomplished by blowing the 
smoke toward the sky, the four world- 
quarters, and the earth, with a suitable 
invocation. The size and ornaments of 
the calumets which are presented to per¬ 
sons of distinction on occasions of moment 
are suited to the requirements of the case. 
When the calumet is designed to be em¬ 
ployed in a treaty of alliance against a 
third tribe, a serpent may be painted on 
the shaft, and perhaps some other device 
indicating the motive of the alliance. 

There were calumets for commerce and 
trade and for other social and political 
purposes; but the most important were 
those designed for war and those for 
peace and brotherhood. It was vitally 
necessary, however, that they should be 
distinguishable at once, lest through 
ignorance and inattention one should 
become the victim of treachery. The 
Indians in general chose not or dared not 


BULL. 30] 


CALUMET-CALUSA 


195 


to violate openly the faith attested by 
the calumet, and sought to deceive an 
intended victim by the use of a false 
calumet of peace in an endeavor to make 
the victim in some measure responsible 
for the consequences. On one occasion 
a band of Sioux, seeking to destroy some 
Indians and their protectors, a French 
officer and his men, presented, in the 
guise of friendship, 12 calumets, appar¬ 
ently of peace; but the officer, who was 
versed in such matters and whose suspi¬ 
cion was aroused by the number offered, 
consulted an astute Indian attached to 
his force, who caused him to see that 
among the 12 one of the calumet shafts 
was not matted with hair like the others, 
and that on the shaft was graven the 
figure of a viper, coiled around it. The 
officer was made to understand that this 
was the sign of covert treachery, thus 
frustrating the intended Sioux plot. 

The use of the calumet, sometimes called 
‘ ‘ peace-pipe ’ ’ and ‘ ‘ war pipe, ’ ’ was wide¬ 
spread in the Mississippi valley gener¬ 
ally. It has been found among the Pota- 
watomi, Cheyenne, Shoshoni, Pawnee 
Loups, Piegan, Santee, Yanktonais, Siha- 
sapa, Kansa, Siksika, Crows, Cree, Skit- 
swish, Nez Perces, Illinois, Chickasaw, 
Choctaw, Chitimacha, Chippewa, Winne¬ 
bago, and Natchez. In the Ohio and St 
Lawrence valleys and southward its use 
is not so definitely shown. 

For more detailed information consult 
Charlevoix, Journal, 1761; Dorsey in 3d 
Rep. B. A. E., 1885; Fletcher in 22d 
Rep. B. A. E., 1904; Jesuit Relations 
and Allied Documents, Thwaites ed., 
i— lxxiii, 1896-1901; Lafitau, Moeurs 
des Sauvages, 1724; Le Page du Pratz, 
Hist, de la Louisiane, 1758; Lesueur, La 
Danse du Calumet, in Les Soirees Cana- 
diennes, iv, 1864; McGuire in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1897, 1899; Perrot, Memoire, 1864; 
Relations des Jesuites, i-iii, 1858. See 
Catlinite, Ceremony , Dance , Pipes, To¬ 
bacco. (j. n. B. H.) 

Calumet. A former Menominee village 
on the e. shore of L. Winnebago, Wis., 
with 150 inhabitants in 1817.—Starrow in 
Wis. Hist, Soc. Coll., vi, 171,1872; Royce 
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. clxxi, 1899. 

Calusa. An important tribe of Florida, 
formerly holding the s. w. coast from 
about Tampa bay to C. Sable and C. 
Florida, together with all the outlying 
keys, and extending inland to L. Okee¬ 
chobee. They claimed more or less au¬ 
thority also over the tribes of the e. coast, 
n. to about C. Canaveral. The name, 
which can not be interpreted, appears as 
Calos or Carlos (province) in the early 
Spanish and French records, Caloosaand 
Coloosa in later English authors, and 
survives in Caloosa village, Caloosa- 
hatchee r., and Charlotte (for Carlos) 


harbor within their old territory. They 
cultivated the ground to a limited extent, 
but were better noted as expert fishers, 
daring seamen, and fierce and determined 
fighters, keeping up their resistance to 
the Spanish arms and missionary ad¬ 
vances after all the rest of Florida had 
submitted. Their men went nearly 
naked. They seem to have practised 
human sacrifice of captives upon a whole¬ 
sale scale, scalped and dismembered their 
slain enemies, and have repeatedly been 
accused of being cannibals. Although 
this charge is denied by Adair (1775), 
who was in position to know, the evi¬ 
dence of the mounds indicates that it 
was true in the earlier period. 

Their history begins in 1513 when, with 
a fleet of 80 canoes they boldly attacked 
Ponce de Leon, who was about to land on 
their coast, and after an all-day fight com¬ 
pelled him to withdraw. Even at this 
early date they were already noted among 
the tribes for the golden wealth which 
they had accumulated from the numerous 
Spanish wrecks cast away upon the keys 
in passage from the s., and two cen¬ 
turies later they were regarded as ver¬ 
itable pirates, plundering and killing 
without mercy the crews of all vessels, 
excepting Spanish, so unfortunate as to be 
stranded in their neighborhood. In 1567 
the Spaniards established a mission and 
fortified post among them, but both seem 
to have been discontinued soon after, 
although the tribe came later under Span¬ 
ish influence. About this time, accord¬ 
ing to Fontaneda, a captive among them, 
they numbered nearly 50 villages, includ¬ 
ing one occupied by the descendants of an 
Arawakan colony (q.v.)from Cuba. From 
one of these villages the modern Tampa 
takes its name. Another, Muspa, existed 
up to about 1750. About the year 1600 
they carried on a regular trade, by canoe, 
with Havana in fish, skins, and amber. 
By the constant invasions of the Creeks 
and other Indian allies of the English in 
the 18th century they were at last driven 
from the mainland and forced to take 
refuge on the keys, particularly Key 
West, Key Vaccas, and the Matacumbe 
keys. One of their latest recorded ex¬ 
ploits was the massacre of an entire 
French crew wrecked upon the islands. 
Romans states that in 1763, on the trans¬ 
fer of Florida from Spain to England, 
the last remnant of the tribe, numbering 
then 80 families, or perhaps 350 souls, 
was removed to Havana. This, however, 
is only partially correct, as a considera¬ 
ble band under the name of Muspa In¬ 
dians, or simply Spanish Indians, main¬ 
tained their distinct existence and lan¬ 
guage in their ancient territory up to the 
close of the second Seminole war. 

Nothing is known of the linguistic af- 


196 


OALUSAHATCHEE-CAMITRIA 


[B. a. e. 


finity of the Calusa or their immediate 
neighbors, as no vocabulary or other speci¬ 
men of the language is known to exist 
beyond the town names and one or two 
other words given by Fontaneda, none of 
which affords basis for serious interpreta¬ 
tion. Gatschet, the best authority on the 
Florida languages, says: “The languages 
spoken by the Calusa and by the people 
next in order, the Tequesta, are unknown 
to us. ... They were regarded as peo¬ 
ple distinct from the Timucua and the 
tribes of Maskoki origin’’ (Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 13, 1884). There is a possibility 
that some fragments of the language may 
yet come to light, as boys of this tribe 
were among the pupils at the mission 
school in Havana in the 16th century, 
and the Jesuit Rogel and an assistant 
spent a winter in studying the language 
and recording it in vocabulary form. 

Fontaneda names the following among 
about 50 Calusa villages existing about 
1570: Calaobe, Casitoa, Cayovea, Coma- 
chica, Cuchiyaga, Cutespa, Enempa, 
Estame, Guacata, Guarungunve, Guevu, 
Jutun, Metamapo, Muspa, No (explained 
as meaning ‘ town beloved’), Quisiyove, 
Sacaspada, Sinaesta, Sinapa, Soco, Tampa 
(distinguished as ‘ a large to wn ’), Tatesta, 
Tavaguemue, Tequemapo, Tomo, Tom- 
sobe, Tuchi, Yagua. Of these, Cuchi¬ 
yaga and Guarungunve were upon the 
keys. (j. m.) 

Calloosas.— Bartram, Trav., 378, 1792. Callos.— 
Brin ton, Floridian Penin., 112,1859 (given as one 
of the French forms). Caloosa.— Romans, Fla., 
291, 1775. Calos. —De Bry, Brevis Narratio, ii, 
Le Moyne map, 1591 (“province” and “chief”: 
early French form as used by Le Moyne and 
LaudonniSre). Calusas. —Rafinesque, introd. 
Marshall, Ky., I, 25, 1824. Cape Florida Indians, — 
Adair, Hist. Am. Inds., 152,1775. Carlin.— Davies, 
Caribby Ids., 332,1666 (‘ ‘ chief ”). Carlos. —Barcia, 
Ensayo, 95,1723 (“province” and “chief”; oldest 
Spanish form as used in Le6n narrative, 1513, Fon¬ 
taneda, 1575, etc). Coloosas. —Romans, Fla., app., 
xxxiv, 1775. Kaloosas. —Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
364, 1822. Kalusa. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 
I, map, 1884. 

Calusahatchee. A former Seminole town 
on Calusahatchee r., s. w. Fla. 

Caloosahatche.— Bartram, Travels, 462, 1791. Co- 
looshatchie.— Drake, Bk. Inds., iv, 149,1848. Cull- 
oo-sau hat-che.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 25, 1848. 

Calusi. An unidentified province ap¬ 
parently in e. Ark., n. of Arkansas r. and 
w. of the St Francis, visited by De Soto in 
1541. 

Calu?.— Biedma in Smith, Coll. Doc. Fla., 1,60,1857. 
Calusa. —Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 175,1850. Calusi. —Biedma, ibid., 106. 

Camajal. A Diegueno rancheria repre¬ 
sented in the treaty of 1852 at Santa Isa¬ 
bel, Cal.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,34th Cong., 

132.1857. 

Camanc-nac-cooya (probably ‘round 
field of cactus’). A rancheria, probably 
Cochimi, connected with Purfsima (Cade- 
gomo) mission, Lower California, in the 
18th century.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 

189.1857. 


Camani. A rancheria, probably of the 
Sobaipuri, on the Rio Gila not far from 
Casa Grande, s. Ariz.; visited by Anza 
and Font in 1775.—Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 392, 1889. 

Laguna del Hospital.—Ibid. La Laguna.—Ibid. 

Camano-ca-caamano (probably ‘arroyoof 
the great cord ’). A rancheria, probably 
Cochimi, connected with Purfsima mis¬ 
sion, Lower California, in the 18th cen¬ 
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 188,1857. 

Camas. Any species of plant belonging 
to the genus Quamasia ( Camassia of some 
later authors), especially Quamasia qua- 
mash; also the edible bulb of these plants. 
Camas is usually blue-flowered and in 
other respects also much resembles the 
hyacinth, to which it is botanically re¬ 
lated. It is sometimes called wild hya¬ 
cinth, and in Canadian French, but im¬ 
properly, pomme blanche and pomme 
des prairies. The bulbs, which were a 
staple food of several N. W. coast tribes, 
and are still much used, are prepared for 
food by prolonged steaming. Camas is 
found from w. Washington and Oregon 
to n. California and British Columbia, and 
eastward to the northern Rocky mts. It 
was most extensively utilized in the val¬ 
leys of the upper Columbia r. watershed. 
The word, spelled also carnass , quamash, 
kamass, quamish , and in other ways, came 
into English through the Chinook jargon. 
Its ultimate source is chamas, signifying 
‘sweet ’ in the Nootka language of Van¬ 
couver id. The camas prairies of the 
w. slopes of the Rocky mts. were long fa¬ 
mous. From its habit of feeding on this 
root the camas rat received its name. 
From camas have also been named vil¬ 
lages in Fremont co., Idaho; Missoula 
co., Mont.; and Clarke co., Wash.; like¬ 
wise a Camas valley in Douglas co., 
Oreg., and a town, Kamas, in Summit co., 
Utah. The Latin name of the plant also 
preserves the Indian appellation. See 
Roots. (a. f. c. f. v. c. ) 

Cambujos. An imaginary Indian ‘ 4 prov¬ 
ince” e. of Quivira, which the abbess 
Maria de Jesus, of Agreda, Spain, claimed 
to have miraculously visited in the 17th 
century. 

Aburcos.— Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), Relacion, 
in Land of Sunshine, 187, Feb.. 1900. Caburcos.— 
Maria de Jesus (1631) in Palou, Relacion Hist., 337, 
1787. Cambujos.—Benavides (1631) in Palou, op. 
cit., 336. Jambujos—Vetancurt (1693), Teatro 
Am., in, 303, 1871. 

Camiltpaw (‘ people of Kamilt ’ ; so 
named from their chief). A band of the 
Fisquows, formerly living on the e. side 
of Columbia r. One of the original treaty 
tribes of 1855, classed with the Yakima 
but really Salishan. They are now on 
Yakima res., Wash. 

Kah-milt-pah.—Treaty of 1855 in U. S. Stat.,951, 
1863. Kamilt-pah.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 302,1877. Qamil- 
Tema.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 736,1896. 

Camitria. A ruined pueblo of the Tewa, 


BULL. 30] 


CAMOA—CAMPING AND CAMP CIRCLES 


197 


situated in Rio Arriba co., N. Mex. 
(Bandelier in Ritch, N. Mex., 201,1885). 
First mentioned by Ofiate in 1598 (Doc. 
In£d.„ xvi, 102, 116, 1871) as an inhab¬ 
ited village and assigned both to the Tewa 
and the “Chiguas ,, (Tigua). 

Camitre. —Onate, op. cit., 102. Comitria.— Bande¬ 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, I, 19,1881 (misprint). 

Camoa. A Mayo settlement on the Rio 
Mayo, 70 m. from the coast, in s. So¬ 
nora, Mexico. 

Camoa.— Hardy, Travels, 390, 1829. Canaxnoo.— 
Kino, map (1702) in Stdcklein, Neue Welt-Bott, 
1726. Santa Catalina Cayamoa. —Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 356, 1864. 

Camoles. A tribe formerly living on the 
Texas coast “in front” of the Como; 
mentioned by Cabeza de Vaca (Smith 
transl., 137, 1871) in the account of his 
sojourn in Texas, 1527-34. They cannot 
be identified with any later historical 
tribe. 

Camones. —Cabeza de Vaca, op. cit.,113. 

Camping and Camp circles. Each North 
American tribe claimed a certain locality 
as its habitat and dwelt in communities 
or villages about which stretched its hunt¬ 
ing grounds. As all the inland people 
depended for food largely on the gath¬ 
ering of acorns, seeds, and roots, the 
catching of salmon when ascending the 
streams, or on hunting for meat and 
skin clothing, they camped in makeshift 
shelters or portable dwellings during a 
considerable part of the year. These 
dwellings were brush shelters, the mat 
house and birch-bark lodge of the 
forest tribes, and the skin tent of the 
plains. The rush mats of different sizes, 
woven by the women, were rolled into a 
long bundle when a party was traveling. 
The oblong frame was made of saplings 
tied together with bark fiber. The long¬ 
est and widest mats were fastened out¬ 
side the frame to form the walls, and 
smaller ones were overlapped to make a 
rain-proof roof, an opening being left in 
the middle for the escape of the smoke 
from the central fire. For the skin tent, 
10 to 20 poles were cut and trimmed by 
the men and preserved from year to year. 
To tan, cut, fit, and sew' the skin cover 
and to set up the tent was the special work 
of women. Dogs formerly transported 
the long tent poles by means of travois, 
but in later years they were dragged by 
pomes. 

Hunting, visiting, or war parties were 
more or less organized. The leader was 
generally the head of a family or of a 
kindred group, or he was appointed to his 
office with certain ceremonies. He de¬ 
cided the length of a day’s journey and 
where the camp should be made at night. 
As all property, save a man’s personal 
clothing, weapons, and riding horses, be¬ 
longed to the woman, its care during a 
journey fell upon her. On the tribal 


hunt the old men, the women and chil¬ 
dren, and the laden ponies formed the 
body of the slowly moving procession, 
protected on either side by the warriors, 
who walked or rode, encumbered only by 
their weapons. The details of the camp 
were controlled by the women, except 
with war parties, when men did the work. 

When a camping place was reached the 
mat houses were erected as most conven¬ 
ient for the family group, but the skin 
tents were set up in a circle, near of kin 
being neighbors. If danger from enemies 
was apprehended, the ponies and other 
valuable possessions were kept within the 
space inclosed by the circle of tents. 
Long journeys were frequently under¬ 
taken for friendly visits or for intertribal 
ceremonies. When traveling and camp¬ 
ing the people kept well together under 
their leader, but when near their desti¬ 
nation, the party halted and dispatched 
one or two young men in gala dress with 
the little packet of tobacco to apprise the 
leading men of the village of their ap¬ 
proach. W hile the messengers were gone 
the prairie became a vast dressing room, 
and men, women, and children shook off 
the dust of travel, painted their faces, and 
donned their best garments to be ready to 
receive the escort which was always sent 
to welcome the guests. 

When the tribes of the buffalo country 
went on their annual hunt, ceremonies at¬ 
tended every stage, from the initial rites, 
when the leader was chosen, through¬ 
out the journeyings, to the thanksgiving 
ceremony which closed the expedition. 
The long procession was escorted by 
warriors selected by the leader and the 
chiefs for their trustiness and valor. 
They acted as a police guard to prevent 
any straggling that might result in per¬ 
sonal or tribal danger, and they prevented 
any private hunting, as it might stam¬ 
pede a herd that might be in the vicinity. 
When on the annual hunt the tribe 
camped in a circle and preserved its po¬ 
litical divisions, and the circle was often a 
quarter of a mile or more in diameter. 
Sometimes the camp was in concentric cir¬ 
cles, each circle representing a political 
group of kindred. The Dakota call them¬ 
selves the “ seven council fires,” and say 
that they formerly camped in two divisions 
or groups, one composed of 4 and the other 
of 3 concentric circles. The Omaha and 
close cognates, when on the annual buf¬ 
falo hunt and during the great tribal cer- 
monies camped in a circle. Each of the 
10 Omaha gentes had its unchangeable 
place in the line. The women of each 
gens knew where their tents belonged, 
and when a camping ground was reached 
each drove her ponies to the proper 
place, so that when the tents of the tribe 


198 


CAMPO-CANADASAGA 


[b. a. e. 


were all up each gens was in the position 
to which it was entitled by the regulations 
that were connected with ancient beliefs 
and customs. For particular ceremonies, 
especially the great annual sun dance 
(q. v.),the Kiowa, Cheyenne, and others 
camped in a circle made up of the differ¬ 
ent political divisions in fixed and regular 
order. 

The tribal circle, each segment com¬ 
posed of a clan, gens, or band, made a living 
picture of tribal organization and respon¬ 
sibilities. It impressed upon the beholder 
the relative position of kinship groups 
and their interdependence, both for the 
maintenance of order and government 
within and for defense against enemies 
from without, while the opening to the e. 
and the position of the ceremonial tents 
recalled the religious rites and obligations 
by which the many parts were held to¬ 
gether in a compact whole. 

See Dorsey in 3d and 15th Reps. B. A. 
E.; Fletcher in Publ. Peabody Mus.; 
Matthews in 5th Rep. B. A. E.; Mooney in 
14th and 17th Reps. B. A. E. (a. c. f.) 

Campo (Span.: ‘field’, ‘camp’). A set¬ 
tlement and reservation of 18 Dieguenos, 
170 m. from Mission Tule River agency, 
Cal. The land, comprising 280 acres, is 
a waterless, unproductive tract for which 
a patent has been issued.—Ind. Ah. Rep., 
175, 1902. 

Campti. A village, probably of the 
Natchitoches, formerly on Red r. of Louis¬ 
iana, about 20 m. above Natchitoches. 
In his report to President Jefferson in 
1805, Sibley (Hist. Sketches, 1806) says 
the town was inhabited by the French, 
the Indians having left it on account of 
sickness in 1792. (a. c. f. ) 

Canaake. Mentioned as the name of 
an ancient Florida tribe, of which a rem¬ 
nant still existed in 1821. The general 
context of the reference indicates that the 
form is a bad misprint for Calusa, q. v. 
Canaacke.—Peni&re (1821) in Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, app., 311, 1822. Cana ake.—Ibid., 149. 

Canada. (Huron: kandda, ‘village,’ 
‘settlement.’—Cartier). A term used to 
designate all the Indians of Canada, and 
also by early writers in a more restricted 
sense. Cartier designates the chief of 
Stadacon6 (Quebec) as the king of Can¬ 
ada, and applies the name Canada to the 
country immediately adjacent. His vo¬ 
cabularies indicate an Iroquoian (Huron) 
people living there. The early French 
writers used the term Canadiens to des¬ 
ignate the Algonquian tribes on or near 
the St Lawrence, especially the Nascapee 
and the Montagnais tribes below the Sague- 
nay, as distinguished from the Algonkin 
and Micmac. The New England writers 
sometimes designated as Canada Indians 
those Abnaki who had removed from 


Maine to St Francis and Becancour. 

(j. m. ) 

Canada.—Cartier, Brief Recit, title, 1545. Cana- 
dacoa.—Lescarbot (1609) quoted by Charlevoix, 
New France, II, 237,1866. Canadenses.—Lescarbot 
quoted by Tanner, Nar., 1830 (Latin form). Cana- 
dese. —Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 26,1744. Canadiains.— 
Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856 
(located north of Chaleur bay). Canadiens.—Jesr 
Rel. 1632, 14, 1858. Canide Indianes.—Gardne - 
(1662) inN. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 225, 1881. 

Canadasaga ( Gd-nd-dd-se >/ -ge , ‘ at the 
new town ’). A former Seneca town near 
the present Geneva, N. Y. On account of 
its size it was for a time considered one 
of the chief towns of the tribe. In 1700 
it was situated 1J m. s. e. of Geneva, but 
in 1732, on account of the ravages of 
smallpox, the inhabitants removed 2 or 3 
m. s. w., to the s. bank of Burrell’s (Slate 
Rock) cr. At the breaking out of the 
French and Indian war this site was also 


abandoned, and the inhabitants moved to 
Canadasaga brook, or Castle brook, s. w. of 
Geneva. Here, in 1756, a stockade was 
built for their protection by Sir William 
Johnson. The town became known as 
New Castle, and was destroyed by Sullivan 
in 1779. (j. m. j. n. b. h. ) 

Canadaasago.— Conover, Kanadasaga and Geneva 
MS., B. A. E. Canada-saga. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
11,1191,1849. Canadasager.— Ibid. Canadasaggo.— 
Johnson (1763), ibid., vn, 550, 1856. Canadasago.— 
Conover, op. cit. Canadaseago.— Ibid. Canada- 
sege.— Ibid. Canadasegy.— Ibid. Canadayager. — 
Ibid. Canadesago.— Pickering (1790) in Am. St. 
Pap., IV, 214, 1832. Canadesaque. — Conover, op. 
cit. Canadesego.— Ibid. Canadisega. —Conf. of 
1763 in N. Y.Doc.Col. Hist., VII, 556,1856. Canado- 
sago.— Conover, op. cit. Canandesaga.— Nukerck 
(1779)quoted by Conover, ibid. Canasadauque.— 
Ibid. Canasadego.— Evans, map (1755) quoted by 
Conover, ibid. Canatasaga. —Ibid. Canedesaga. — 
Ibid. Canesadage. —Ibid. Canidesego. —Ibid. 
Canidisego. — Jones (1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
viii, 786, 1857. Cannadasago. —Conover, op. cit. 
Cannadesago. —Ibid. Cannadisago. —Ibid. Can- 
nisdagua.— Ibid. Cannisdaque.— Ibid. Cannis- 
dque. —Ibid. Cannondesaga.— McKendry (1779) 
quoted by Conover, ibid. Canodasega.— Ibid. 
Canodosago. —Ibid. Canosedagui.— Doc. of 1726 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 797, 1855. Canose- 
dogui.— Bancker (1727) quoted by Conover, op. cit. 
Canundasaga. —Ibid. Caundaisauque.— Ibid. Caun- 
dasaque.— Ibid. Conadasaga.— Ibid. Conadasego.— 
Ibid. Connadasaga. —Ibid. Connadasego.—Ibid. 
Connadesago.— Ibid. Connagasago.— Ibid. Cono- 
dosago. —I bid. Cunnesedago. —B a r t o n ( 1779) 
quoted by Conover, ibid. Ga-na-da-sa-ga.— Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq., 424, 1851 (Cayuga and Onon¬ 
daga form). Ga-na-da-sage.— Ibid. (Oneida and 
Mohawk form). Ga-na-da-se’ , -ge.—Hewitt, inf’n 
(Seneca form). Ganadesaga,— Conover, op. cit. 
Ganechsatage. — Ibid. Ganechstage. —Zeisberger 
(1750) quoted by Conover, ibid. Ga-nun-da- 
sa-ga.— Morgan, League Iroq., 424, 1851 (Seneca 
form). Kaensatague.— Pouchot, map (1758) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. Kauadagago. — 
Conover, op. cit. Kanadaoeaga. —Ibid. Kanadaoe- 
gey.— Ibid. Kanadaragea. —Ibid. Kanadasaega.— 
Ibid. Kanadasagea. —Ibid. Kanadaseagea. —Ibid. 
Kanadaseago. —Drake, Bk. Inds., v, 111, 1848. 
Kanadaseegy,— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vil, 576,1856. Kanadasegoa. —Conover, op. 
cit. Kanadasero.— Johnson (1763) quoted by Con¬ 
over, ibid. Kanadasigea. —Conover, ibid. Kana- 
desaga.— -Ibid. Kanadesego. —Ibid. Kanadesero. — 
Ibid. Kanadesseg’y.— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vil, 550,1856. Kanadessigy. —Conver.op. 
cit. Kanadosega. —Ibid. Kanagago. —Livermore 
(1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., VI, 326,1850. Kan- 


BULL. 30] 


CANA JOHARIE-CANASATEGO 


199 


andasagea. —Nukerck (1779) quoted by Conover, 
op. cit. Kanasadagea. —Ibid. Kanasedaga. —Ibid. 
Kanedasaga. —Ibid. Kanedesago. —Machin (1779) 
quoted by Conover, ibid. Kanesadago. —Con¬ 
over, ibid. Kanesadakeh.— Ibid. Kanesedaga.— 
Ibid. Kannadasaga.— Grant (1779) quoted by Con¬ 
over, ibid. Kannadesagea. —Ibid. Kannadeseys. — 
Pemberton in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., n, 176, 
1816. Kanodosegea. —Conover, op. cit. Kaunau- 
dasage.— Ibid. Kennedaseage.— Ibid. Kennese- 
daga. —Ibid. Konasadagea. —Ibid. Konasoa. —Jef¬ 
fery s, Fr. Dom., pt. 1, map, 1761. Konassa.— Ho- 
mann Heirs’ map, 1756. Old Castle.— Conover, op. 
cit.(so called after removal to Castle brook, 
subsequent to 1756). Ota-na-sa-ga.— Morgan, 
League Iroq., 424, 1851 (Tuscarora form). Seneca 
Castle. —Machin (1779) quoted by Conover, 
op. cit. 

Canajoharie (Kti-nti^djo'-‘ha-re*, ‘it, the 
kettle, is fixed on the end of it ’). An im¬ 
portant Mohawk village, known as Upper 
Mohawk Castle, formerly situated on the 
e. bank of Otsquago cr., nearly opposite 
Ft Plain, Montgomery co., N. Y. The 
community of this name occupied both 
banks of Mohawk r. for some distance 
above and below the village. It was 
also once known as Middle Mohawk 
Castle. (j. n. b. h.) 

Canadsiohare. —Hansen (1713) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., V, 372, 1855. Canaedsishore.— Hansen (1700), 
ibid., iv, 802, 1854. Canajoha. —Morgan, League 
Iroq., chart, 1851 (Seneca form). Ca-na-jo'-ha-e. — 
Ibid., 416, 1851. Canajoha'ga. —Ibid., cnart (On¬ 
ondaga form). Can-ajo'har.— Ibid. (Tuscarora 
form). Canajoharies.— Conference of 1754 in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., V, 36, 1836. Canajoherie.— 
Albanyconf. (1745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 302, 
1855. Canajora. —Parkman, Frontenac, 93, 1883. 
Canajorha.— Greenhalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., Ill, 250,1853. Canijoharie.— Hansen (1700), 
ibid., IV, 802,1854. Cannatchocary. —Doc.of 1758(?), 
ibid., X, 676, 1858. Cannojoharys.— Albany conf. 
(1754), ibid., vi, 877, 1855 (the band). Canojo- 
harrie.— Schuyler (1711), ibid., v, 245, 1855. 

Caunauiohhaury.— Edwards (1751) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 143, 1809. Chonoghoheere. — 
Wraxall (1754) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 857, 
1855. Conagohary. —Murray (1782) in Vermont 
Hist. Soc. Coll., II, 357, 1871. Conajoharees. — 
Albany conf. (1747) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 
383, 1855. Conajohary.— Colden (1727), Five Na¬ 
tions, 164,1747. Conajorha. —Greenhalgh (1677) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Ill, 250, 1853. Conijoharre. — 
Johnson (1775), ibid., VIII, 661, 1857. Conna- 
johary.— Albany conf. (1754), ibid., vi, 868, 1855. 
Connejories. —Goldthwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., lsts., x, 121,1809 (theband). Connojohary.— 
Albany conf. (1754) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 
877, 1855. Conojahary.— N. Y. conf. (1753), ibid., 
vi, 784, 1855. Conojoharie. —Johnson (1749), ibid., 
VI, 512, 1855. Ganajohala'-que.— Morgan, League 
Iroq., chart, 1851 (Oneida form). Ganajoha'rla. — 
Ibid. (Mohawk form). Ganajohhore. —Boyer 
(1710) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 
188, 1872. Ga-na-jo-hi'-e. —Morgan, op. cit., 474, 
1851 (Mohawk name). Ka-na-‘djo'-‘ha-re ‘.—Hew¬ 
itt, inf’ n, 1886 (Mohawk name), Kanajoharry.— 
Hawley (1794) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., iv, 
51, 1795. Ka-na’-tcu-hare’.— Hewitt, inf’n., 1886 
(Tuscarora name). Middle Mohawk Csstle.— 
Morgan, League Iroq., 474,1851 ( common name). 
Upper Castle. —Colden (1727), Five Nations, 164, 
1747. 

Canandaigua [Ga-nd-dd-a'-gwa n n, ‘a vil¬ 
lage was formerly there ’). An important 
Seneca town near the site of the present 
Canandaigua, N.Y.,destroyed by Sullivan 
in 1779. There was another settlement 
not far distant, called New Canandaigua, 
which also was probably destroyed the 
same year. (j. n. b. h. ) 


Anandaque.— Grant (1779) quoted by Conover, 
Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. Canada- 
qua. —Doc. Hist. N. Y., II, 1191, 1849. Ca-na-da'- 
qua. —Doc. of 1792 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 
ser., i, 285, 1806 (Onondaga form). Canadauge. — 
Onondaga conf. (1774) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VIII, 526, 1857. Canadqua.— Deed of 1789 in Am. 
St. Pap., iv, 211, 1832. Canandaigua. —Livermore 
(1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 327, 1850. 
Canandaqua. —Barton, New Views, xiii, 1798. Ca- 
nandarqua. —Doc. Hist. N. Y., II, 1191, 1849. Ca- 
nandauqua. —Chapin (1792) in Am. St. Pap., IV, 
241,1832. Canandeugue.— Dearborn (1779) quoted 
by Conover, Kanadaga and Geneva MS.. B. A.E. 
Cannandaquah. —Norris (1779) quoted by Conover, 
ibid. Ca'-ta-na-ra'-qua. —Morgan, League Iroq., 
map, 1851 (Tuscarora name). Connondaguah. — 
Fellows (1779) quoted by Conover, op. cit. Ga- 
na-da-a'-gwa n n.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Seneca 
name). Ga-na-da-gwa. —Morgan,op. cit. (Cayuga 
name). Ga-na-da-lo'-qua. —Ibid., map, 1851 
(Oneida name). Ga-na-ta-la'-qua.— Ibid. (Mo- 
hawkname). Ganataqueh.— Zeisberger, MS. (1750) 
quoted by Conover, op. cit. Ga'nunda/gwa. —Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq., 469,1851 (Senecaname). Kana- 
daque. —Grant (1779) quoted by Conover, op. cit. 
Kanandagua.— Nukerck (1779) quoted by Conover, 
ibid. Kanandaigua. —Burrows (1779) quoted by 
Conover, ibid. Kanandalangua. —Hubley (1779) 
quoted by Conover, ibid. Kanandaque.— Machin 
(1779) quoted by Conover, ibid. Kanentage. — 
Pouchot, map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
694, 1858. Konnaudaugua.— Pickering (1791) in 
Am. St. Pap., IV, 212, 1832. Konondaigua. —Treaty 
of 1794 quoted by Hall, N. W. States, 71, 1849. 
Ono-dauger. —Blanchard (1779) quoted by Con¬ 
over, op. cit. Shannondaque. —Camfield (1779) 
quoted by Conover, ibid. 

Canarsee. Formerly one of the leading 
tribes on Long Island, N. Y., occupying 
most of what is now Kings co. and the 
shores of Jamaica bay, with their center 
near Flatlands. According to Ruttenber 
they were subject to or connected with 
the Montauk; this, however, is doubt¬ 
ful, as the Indians of the w. end of the 
island appear to have been paying tribute, 
at the time of the Dutch settlement of 
New York, to the Iroquois. Their prin¬ 
cipal village, of the same name, was prob¬ 
ably at Canarsee, near Flatlands, in addi¬ 
tion to which they had others at Maspeth 
and apparently at Hempstead. They 
are important chiefly from the fact that 
the site of the city of Brooklyn was ob¬ 
tained from them. Having asserted their 
independence of the Mohawk, after the 
appearance of the Dutch, they were at¬ 
tacked by that tribe and nearly extermi¬ 
nated. They also suffered considerably 
during the war of the Long Island tribes 
with the Dutch. The last one of them 
died about 1800. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Canaresse.—Document of 1656 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 340,1883. Canarise.—Stuyvesant deed 
(1656) in Thompson, Long Id., 383, 1839. Cana- 
risse.—Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 
524,1883. Canarse.—Wood quoted by Macauley, 
N. Y., n, 253,1829. Canarsees.—Macauley, ibid., 
164. Canarsie.—Nicolls (1666) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 586, 1883. Cannarse.—Document of 
1650, ibid., i, 449, 1856. Canorise.—Dutch treaty 
(1656) in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson River, 125, 
1872. Conarie See.—Petition of 1656 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., xiv, 339, 1883 (misprint). Conarise.— 
Map of 1666, ibid. Conarsie.—Ibid, (applied to 
river). 

Canasatego. An Onondaga chief who 
played an important role in the proceed¬ 
ings of the council at Philadelphia in 



200 


CANASORAGY-CANNIBALISM 


[B. A. E. 


1742. A dispute arose between the Dela¬ 
ware Indians and the government of 
Pennsylvania concerning a tract of land 
in the forks of Delaware r. It was on 
this occasion, evidently in accordance 
with a preconcerted arrangement between 
the governor of Pennsylvania and the 
Iroquois chief, that the latter, addressing 
the Delawares, made the memorable state¬ 
ment: “How came you to take upon you 
to sell land at all? We conquered you; 
we made women of you; you know you 
are women, and can no more sell land than 
women. We charge you to remove in¬ 
stantly; we don’t give you liberty to think 
of it.” The choice of Wyoming and 
Shamokin was granted, and the Dela¬ 
wares yielded. Little more is recorded 
regarding this chief. He died at Onon¬ 
daga in 1750. His son, Hans Jacob, re¬ 
sided on the Ohio in 1758. (c. t. ) 

Canasoragy. A former Shawnee village 
on the w. branch of Susquehanna r., near 
the mouth of Canaserage cr. (now Muncy 
cr.), Lycoming co., Pa., about the site 
of the present Muncy. Conrad Weiser 
held a conference there in 1755, at which 
time it was occupied by 20 Shawnee and 
Chickasaw warriors, there being about 6 
Chickasaw who had lived for many years 
among the Shawnee. During the Indian 
uprising in 1778-79 Capt. John Brady 
built a stockaded house, known as Ft 
Brady, near the mouth of Muncy cr. 
Brady was killed in the spring of 1779. 
Ft Muncy was built, about 4 m. from 
Muncy, in 1778. Both of these forts were 
the scenes of many historic events during 
the early days. See Frontier Forts of Pa., 
i, 387-392, 1895; Meginness, Otzinachson 
or History of the West Branch, 484,1857; 
Egle, Hist. Pa., 919,1883. ( g. p. d. ) 

Canasoragy.—Weiser (1755) in Col. Rec. Pa., Vi, 443, 
1851. 

Canastigaone. A former Mohawk vil¬ 
lage on the n. side of Mohawk r., just 
above Cohoes Falls, N. Y. 

Canastigaone.—Tyron, map of Prov. N. Y., 1779. 
Canastigione.—Doc. Hist. N. Y., II, index, 1849. 
Connestigunes.—Macauley, N. Y., II, 295, 1829. 
Nistigione.—Doc. Hist. N. Y., II, 235, 1849. 

Canatlan {kan-at-lan') . A former Te- 
pehuane pueblo on the upper waters of 
the Rio San Pedro, central Durango, Mex¬ 
ico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 319,1864. 

Candelaria. See Nuestra Sefiora de la 
Candelaria. 

Caneadea (Ga-o ni -hia’-di-on c , ‘it (sky) 
impinges on it’). A former Seneca village 
on the siteof Caneadea, Allegany co., N.Y. 
Being the most distant southerly from the 
lower Genesee r. towns, and protected by 
mountains, it escaped destruction by Sul¬ 
livan in 1779, as he turned northward 
from Dayoitgao. Caneadea, which was a 
‘ ‘ castle ’ ’ and for many years had a council 
lodge, was the point of departure of the 
Seneca on their war expeditions to the w. 
and s. w. (j. n. b. h.) 


Canaseder. -Procter (1791) in Am. St. Papers IV, 
151, 1832. Caneadea.— Morgan, League Iroq., 467, 
1851 (so called by whites). Caneadia.— Day, Penn., 
248 1843. Carrahadeer.— Procter (1791) in Am. St. 
Papers, iv, 158,1832. Gao'yadeo.— Morgan, League 
Iroq 467,1851. Kaounadeau.— Morris deed (1797) 
in Am. St. Papers, IV, 627,1832. Karaghiyadirha.— 
Johnson map (ca. 1770) cited in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vii, 723/1856. Karathyadirs. —Johnson Hall 
conf. (1756), ibid. 

Canienga (‘ at the place of the flint ) . 

A former Mohawk castle situated at the 
distance of a bow-shot from the n. side of 
Mohawk r., N. Y. The Mohawk name 
for themselves is derived from this place. 
In 1677 it had a double palisade with 4 
ports inclosing 24 lodges, (j. n. b. h.) 
Agnie.— For forms of this name, see Mohawk. 
Agniee. —Jes. Rel. for 1656, 3,1858. Agniegue. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1658, 3, 1858. Aniegue.— Ibid., 11. An- 
niene.— Jes. Rel. for 1652, 9, 1858. Cahaniaga.— 
Greenhalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., hi, 
250, 1853. Decanohoge.— Hansen (1700), ibid., IV, 
802,1854. Dekanoge.— Livingston (1700), ibid.,655. 
Upper Mohawk Castle.— Morgan, League Iroq., 
474,1851 (common English name). 

Canj auda. Mentioned as a former Creek 
town in Cherokee co., Ala.—Sen. Doc. 67, 
26th Cong-., 2d sess., 1, 1841. 

Cannel coal. See Jet. 

Cannetquot. Described by Thompson 
(Long Id., 293, 1839) as a semi-tribe or 
family occupying in 1683 the e. side of 
Connetquot r., about Patchogue, in Suf¬ 
folk co., Long Island, N. Y. In another 
place he includes this territory as part of 
that belonging to the Patchoag. The 
name seems to be a dialectal form of Con¬ 
necticut. (J. m.) 

Cannibalism. In one form or another 
cannibalism has been practised among 
probably all peoples at some period of 
their tribal life. In America there are 
numerous recorded references to its occur¬ 
rence within historic times among the 
Brazilians, Carib of northern South 
America, the Aztec and other Mexican 
tribes, and among many of the Indians 
n. of Mexico. The word itself, now more 
commonly used than ^ the older term 
anthropophagy, is derived from Carib 
through Spanish corruption. Restricting 
treatment of the subject to the tribes n. 
of Mexico, many evidences of cannibal¬ 
ism in some form are found—fpom the 
ingestion, perhaps obligatory, of small 
quantities of human flesh, blood, brain, or 
marrow, as a matter of ceremony, to the 
consumption of such parts for food under 
stress of hunger, or even as a matter of 
taste. Among the tribes which practised 
it, in one or another of these forms, may 
be mentioned the Montagnais, and some 
of the tribes of Maine; the Algonkin, 
Armouchiquois, Micmac, and Iroquois; 
farther w. the Assiniboin, Cree, Foxes, 
Miami, Ottawa, Chippewa, Illinois, Kick- 
apoo, Sioux, and Winnebago; in the s. the 
people who built the mounds in Florida 
(see Calusa) , and the Tonkawa, Attacapa, 
Karankawa, Kiowa, Caddo, and Coman¬ 
che (?); in the n. w. and w. parts of the 
continent, the Thlingchadinneh and other 


BULL. 30] 


CANOA-CANONICUS 


201 


Athapascan tribes, the Tlingit, Heiltsuk, 
Kwakiutl, Tsimshian, Nootka, Siksika, 
some of the Californian tribes, and the 
Ute. There is also a tradition of the 
practice among the Hopi, and allusions 
to the custom among other tribes of Ari¬ 
zona and New Mexico. The Mohawk, 
and the Attacapa, Tonkawa, and other 
Texas tribes were known to their neigh¬ 
bors as ‘ ‘ man-eaters. ’ ’ 

Taking all the evidence into considera¬ 
tion, it appears that cannibalism n. of the 
Mexican boundary existed in two chief 
forms. One of these was accidental, from 
necessity as a result of famine, and has 
been witnessed among the Hurons, Mic- 
mac, Chippewa, Etchareottine, and others. 
In most of such instances recourse was had 
to the bodies of those who had recently 
died, but cases are recorded in which in¬ 
dividuals were killed to satisfy hunger. 
The second and prevalent form of canni¬ 
balism was a part of war custom and was 
based principally on the belief that brav¬ 
ery and other desirable qualities of an 
enemy would pass, through actual inges¬ 
tion of a part of his body, into that of the 
consumer. Such qualities were supposed 
to have their special seat in the heart, 
hence this organ was chiefly sought, 
though blood, brain, marrow, and flesh 
were in many instances also swallowed. 
The parts were eaten either raw or cooked. 
The heart belonged usually to the war¬ 
riors, but other parts were occasionally 
consumed by boys or even by women and 
children. In some cases a small portion 
of the heart or of some other part of an 
enemy might be eaten in order to free the 
eater from some tabu (Grinnell). The 
idea of eating any other human being 
than a brave enemy was to most Indians 
repulsive. One of the means of torture 
among the Indians of Canada and New 
York was the forcing of a prisoner to 
swallow pieces of his own flesh. 

Among the Iroquois, according to one 
of the Jesuit fathers, the eating of cap¬ 
tives was considered a religious duty. 
Among the Heiltsuk, and recently among 
the Tsimshian and Kwakiutl, cannibalism 
formed a part of one of their ceremonies. 
Several instances are recorded in which 
cannibalism was indulged in by individ¬ 
uals while in a frenzied state. Finally, 
it seems that among a few tribes, as the 
Tonkawa, Iroquois, and others, man- 
eating, though still with captives as the 
victims, was practised on a larger scale, 
and with the acquired taste for human 
flesh as one, if not the chief, incentive; 
yet the Tonkawa, as well as some men 
long associated with them, declared that 
the eating of human flesh by them was 
only ceremonial. 

Indian mythology and beliefs are re¬ 
plete with references to man-eating giants, 


monsters, and deities, which point to the 
possibility that anthropophagy in some 
form was a practice with which the abo¬ 
rigines have long been acquainted. 

Consult Bancroft, Native Races; Boas 
(1) in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, i, 58,1888, (2) 
Rep. Nat. Mus., 1895; Gatschet, Karan ka- 
walnds., 1891; Jesuit Relations, Thwaites 
ed.; Kohl, Kitchigami, 355,1860; Letour- 
neau in Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, x, 
777, 1887, and xi, 27, 72, 123, 1888; Meg- 
apolensis (1644), Sketch of the Mohawk 
Inds., 1857; Mooney, Our Last Cannibal 
Tribe, 1901; Penicaut (1712) in Margry, 
Decouvertes, v. 504, 1883; Schaafhausen, 
Anthrop. Stud., 515, 1885; Somers in 
Pop. Sci. Mo., xlii, 203, 1892; Wyman 
(1) Human Remains in the Shell Heaps 
of St Johns r., (2) Fresh-water Shell 
Mounds, 1875. (a. h.) 

Canoa (Span.; here doubtless referring 
to a trough or flume in which an irriga¬ 
tion ditch is conducted over broken 
ground). A former Papago rancheria 
between Tubac and San Xavier del Bac, 
on Rio Santa Cruz, s. Ariz.—Garces 
(1775), Diary, 63, 74, 1900. 

La Canoa. —Anza quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 392, 1889. 

Canoas, Pueblo de las (Span.: ‘village of 
the canoes’). A former Indian settle¬ 
ment on the California coast, about lat. 
34° 27 ', in what is within the Chumashan 
area. Its situation is regarded as having 
been at or near the present Yentura. See 
Heylyn, Cosmography, 969, 1703. 

Canocan. A pueblo of the province of 
Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.—Onate (1598) 
in Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Canoe Creek. A Shuswap village and 
band near upper Fraser r., Brit. Col., 
about 300 m. from its mouth; pop. 157 in 
1902.—Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 1902. 

Canoe Lake Indians. The local name 
for a body of Shuswap of Kamloops- 
Okanagan agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 129 in 
1902, including t he Chuckchuqualk, q,v.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1879, 309. 

Canoes. See Boats. 

Canogacola (‘people’). An unidentified 
ancient tribe of n. w. Florida, mentioned 
by Fontaneda about 1575. 

Canegacola.— Ternaux-Compans, Voy., xx, 24, 
1841. Canogacola.— Fontaneda (ca. 1575), Mem., 
Smith trans., 20, 1854. Canogacole. —Fontaneda 
in Doc. In6d., v, 540, 1866. 

Canonchet. See Nanuntenoo. 

Canonicus. A chief of the Narraganset, 
who died in 1647, aged perhaps 80 years. 
Although in 1622 he sent to the people of 
Plymouth the customary Indian challenge 
to "war, he early sought the friendship of 
the English. It was into the country of 
Canonicus that Roger Williams went, and 
from him he received the title to the land 
he afterward held. Canonicus was at war 
against the Wampanoag until in 1635, 


202 


CANOPUS-CAPE FEAR INDIANS 


[b. a. e. 


when the dispute was settled through the 
efforts of W illiams. H e never fully trusted 
the English, nor they him. Durfee, in his 
poem “What cheer?” calls Canonicus 
“cautious, wise, and old,” and Roger 
Williams styles him a “prudent and 
peaceable prince.” He is highly praised 
in John Lathrop’s poem “The Speech of 
Canonicus,” published at Boston in 1802. 
His name, which is spelled in a variety 
of ways, appears to have been changed, 
perhaps by contagion with the Latin 
canonicus , from Qunnoune (Drake, Inds. 
of N. Am., 118, 1880). He is not to be 
confused with Canonchet, a later Narra- 
ganset sachem. (a. f. o. ) 

Canopus. The principal village of the 
Nochpeem, taking its name from their 
chief. It was situated in Canopus Hol¬ 
low, Putnam co., N. Y.—Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 80, 1872. 

Cant. A former rancheria, probably of 
the Maricopa, not far below the mouth of 
Salt r., s. Ariz.; visited and so named 
by Kino and Mange in 1699. 

San Mateo Cant.—Mange quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 357, 1889. S. Mateo Caut.— 
Mange quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 268, 
1884 (misprint). 

Cantaunkack. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, on York r., Gloucester 
co., Va. (Smith (1629), Va., i, map, 
repr. 1819). It apparently belonged to 
the Werowacomaco, although Strachey 
uses the name as that of a tribe having 
more than 100 warriors about the same 
time. (j. m.) 

Cantaunkank.—Strachey (co. 1612),Va., map, 1849. 

Canteens. See Pottery, Receptacles. 

Cantensapud. A pueblo of the province 
of Atripuy, in the region of the lower Rio 
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.—Onate(1598) 
in Doc. In4d., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Cantico. This word, spelled also cantica, 
canticoy, kantico, kanticoy, kintacoy, 
kintecaw, kintecoy, kintekaye, kinticka, 
was in great use among the Dutch and 
English colonists in the region between 
New York and Virginia from the latter 
part of the 17th to the 19th century, nor 
is it yet entirely extinct in American 
English. In the literature of the 18th 
century it appears frequently, with the 
following meanings: (1) Dance, or dancing 
party. (2) Social gathering of a lively 
sort. (3) Jollification. The last signifi¬ 
cation still survives, in literature at least. 
In 1644 kintekaye was said to be a ‘death 
dance,’ but van der Donck (1653) wrote 
of the kintecaw as ‘singing and danc¬ 
ing’ of the young. Later on kintekay 
and kinticoy meant a noisy and demon¬ 
strative dance, with shouting and uproar. 
Dankers in 1679 defined kintekay as 
‘conjuring the devil,’ and Denton (1670) 
called the canticoy ‘a dancing match, a 
festival time.’ Rev. Andrew Hesselius 
(Nelson, Inds. of N. J., 79, 1894), who 


witnessed the first-fruits sacrifice of the 
New Jersey Indians, said: “This and 
other sacrifices of the Americans they 
call, from a native word of their own, 
kinticka, i. e., a festive gathering or a 
wedding.” A word of the Delaware dia¬ 
lect of Algonquian is the source of cantico 
and its variants, namely, gintkaan, signi¬ 
fying ‘to dance,’ cognate with the Vir¬ 
ginian kantikanti, ‘to dance and sing.’ 
The phrase ‘to cut a cantico’ was for¬ 
merly in use. An absurd etymology from 
the Latin canticare, ‘to sing,’ was once 
proposed. According to Boas, New Eng¬ 
land whalers who visit Hudson bay use 
the term antico, or anticoot, to designate 
the performance of the angekut of the 
Eskimo, fhis form of the word probably 
being influenced by the Eskimo name. 

(a. f. c.) 

Canuga ( k&nu'ga, ‘ scratcher, ’ a sort of 
bone-toothed comb with which ball-play¬ 
ers are ceremonially scratched). The 
name of two former Cherokee towns, 
one, a Lower Cherokee settlement, ap¬ 
parently on the waters of Keowee r., S. C., 
destroyed in 1761; the other a traditional 
settlement on Pigeon r., probably near 
the present Waynesville, Haywood co., 
N. C.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
479, 524, 1900. 

Canyon Butte. The local name for a 
group of interesting prehistoric pueblo 
ruins near the n. escarpment of the chief 
basin of the Petrified forest, at the source 
of a wash that enters Little Colorado r. 
from the n. e. at Woodruff, near the 
Apache-Navajo co. boundary, Arizona. 
The remains seem to indicate Zuni 
origin.—Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 
309, 1903. 

Capahnakes. Possibly a misprint in¬ 
tended for the inhabitants of Capawac, or 
Marthas Vineyard, off the s. coast of 
Massachusetts. The form occurs in Bou- 
dinot, Star in the West, 129, 1816. 

Capahowasic. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, about Cappahosic, 
Gloucester co., Va. 

Capahowasick.—Smith (1629), Va., I, map, repr. 
1819. Capahowosick.—Simons, ibid., 163. Capa- 
howsick.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 10, 1848. 

Capasi. A former village on the n. 
frontier of Florida and probably belong¬ 
ing to the Apalachee, visited bv De Soto 
in 1539.—Garcilasso de la Vega' Fla., 74, 
1723. 

Cape Breton. One of the seven districts 
of the country of the Micmac, on Cape 
Breton id., n. of Nova Scotia. The chief 
of this district was the head chief of the 
tribe (Rand, First Micmac Reading Book, 
1875). The name occurs in a list of 1760 
as the location of a Micmac village or 
band. (j. M .) 

Cape Fear Indians. A small tribe, pos¬ 
sibly Siouan, formerly living near the 
mouth of Cape Fear r., N. C. The proper 


HULL. 30] 


CAPE MAGDALEN-CAPTIVES 


203 


name of the tribe is unknown, this local 
term being applied to them by the early 
colonists. They were first known to the 
English in 1661, when a colony from New 
England made a settlement near the 
mouth of the river, and soon incurred the 
ill will of the Indians by seizing their chil¬ 
dren and sending them away under pre¬ 
tense of instructing them in the w T ays of 
civilization, resulting in the colonists be¬ 
ing finally driven from the country. In 
1663 another party from Barbadoes pur¬ 
chased lands of Wat Coosa, head chief of 
the tribe, and made a settlement, which 
was abandoned a few years later. Necoes 
and other villages then existed on the 
lower part of the river. In 1665 another 
colony settled at the mouth of Oldtown 
cr. in Brunswick co., on the s. side of the 
river, on land bought of the Indians, but 
soon abandoned it, though the Indians 
were friendly. The next mention of 
them is by the colonial governor, Col. 
Johnson, in a letter of Jan. 12, 1719 
(Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car., 94, 1874), 
which gives a table of Indian tribes in 
Carolina in 1715, when their population 
is given as 206 in 5 villages. They prob¬ 
ably took part in the Yamasi war of that 
and the following year, and suffered pro¬ 
portionately in consequence. They are 
last noticed in 1751 in the record of the 
Albany Conference (N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
vi, 721,1855) as one of the small friendly 
tribes with which the South Carolina 
government desired the Iroquois to be at 
peace. See Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the 
East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. 

Cape Fears.—Rivers, Early Hist. S. C., 94, 1874. 

Cape Magdalen. An Algonkin mission 
established on the St Lawrence in 1670, 
3 leagues below Three Rivers, Quebec, 
by Indians who removed from the latter 
place on account of smallpox. It was 
abandoned before 1760.—Jeffervs, Fr. 
Dom. Am., pt. i, 10, 110, 1761. 

Cape Sable Indians. A name applied by 
early New England writers to those Mic- 
mac living near C. Sable, in s. Nova 
Scotia. The term is used by Hubbard 
as early as 1680. They were especially 
active in the wars on the New England 
settlements. (j. m.) 

Capiche. A village, probably of one of 
the southern Caddoan tribes, near Red r. 
of Louisiana, “ 20 leagues inland from the 
Mississippi,” visited by Tonti in 1690. 
Capiche.—Tonti (1690) in French, Hist. Coll. La.. 
I, 72, 1846. Capichis.—Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. 
Capiga.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 
1854. 

Capinans. A small tribe or band noted 
by Iberville, in 1699, together with the Bi¬ 
loxi and Pascagoula, in Mississippi. The 
three tribes then numbered 100 families. 
Judging by the association of names, the 
Capinans may be identical with the Moc- 
tobi, q. v. 


Capina. —De l’lsle, map, 1703. Capinans.— Iber¬ 
ville (1699) in Margry, D6c., IV, 602, 1880. Cap- 
inas. —De l’lsle, map, 1707. 

Capitan Grande (Span.: ‘greatcaptain or 
chief’). A Diegueno village in a canyon 
of upper San Diego r., s. Cal. The tract, 
comprising 10,253 acres, now forms a 
reservation of patented land, largely 
desert. Pop. about 60 in 1883, 118 in 
1902. The occupants, classed as Mission 
Indians, are under the Mission Tule 
River agency, 130 m. away.—Jackson 
and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 27, 1883; 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902. 

Capola. A former Seminole village e. 
of St Marks r., in Jefferson co., Fla.— 
Bartram, Travels, 223, 1791. 

Capote (‘mountain peopled—Hrdlicka). 
A division of the Ute, formerly living in 
the Tierra Amarilla and Rio Chama 
country, n. w. N. Mex. They are now 
under the jurisdiction of the Southern 
Ute school in s. w. Colo., and numbered 
180 in 1904. 

Capates. —Collins in Ind. Aff. Rep., 125, 1861 (mis¬ 
print). Capotes.— Graves, ibid., 386, 1854. Capu- 
chies.— Duro, Penalosa, 67, 1882. Kapoti.— Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. 

Capoutoucha. Marked on De 1’ Isle’s 
map of 1707 as an Indian settlement on 
St Johns r., Fla. 

Capeutoucha. —De l’lsle map (1707) in Winsor, 
Hist. Am., II, 294, 1886. 

Caprup. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Captain Jack. See Kintpuash. 

Captives. The treatment accorded cap¬ 
tives was governed by those limited ethical 
concepts which went hand in hand with 
clan, gentile, and other consanguineal 
organizations of Indian society. From 
the members of his own consanguineal 
group, or what was considered such, cer¬ 
tain ethical duties were exacted of an In¬ 
dian which could not be neglected with¬ 
out destroying the fabric of society ot 
outlawing the transgressor. Toward other 
clans, gentes, or bands of the same tribe 
his actions were also governed by well 
recognized customs and usages which had 
grown up during ages of intercourse, but 
with remote bands or tribes good rela¬ 
tions were assured only by some formal 
peace-making ceremony. A peace of this 
kind was very tenuous, however, espe¬ 
cially where there had been a long-stand¬ 
ing feud, and might be broken in an in¬ 
stant. Toward a person belonging to 
some tribe with which there was neither 
war nor peace, the attitude was governed 
largely by the interest of the moment. 
In such cases the virtues of the clan or 
gentile organizations as peace-making fac¬ 
tors made themselves evident, for if the 
stranger belonged to a clan or gens repre¬ 
sented in the tribe he was among, the 
members of that clan or gens usually 


204 


CAPTIVES 


[b. a. e. 


greeted him as a brother and extended 
their protection over him. Another de¬ 
fense for the stranger was—what with 
civilized people is one of the best guaran¬ 
ties against war—the fear of disturbing or 
deflecting trade. If he brought among 
them certain much-desired commodities, 
the first impulse might be to take these 
from him by force and seize or destroy 
his person, but it would quickly be seen 
by wiser heads that the source of further 
supplies of this kind might thereby be 
imperiled, if not entirely cut off. If noth¬ 
ing were to be had from the stranger, he 
might be entirely ignored. And finally, 
the existence of a higher ethical feeling 
toward strangers, even when there was 
apparently no self-interest to be served 
in extending hospitality, is often in 
evidence. There are not wanting stories 
of great misfortune overtaking one who 
refused hospitality to a person in distress, 
and of great good fortune accruing to him 
who offered succor. 

At the same time the attitude assumed 
toward a person thrown among Indians 
too far from his own people to be pro¬ 
tected by any ulterior hopes or fears on 
the part of his captors was usually that 
of master to slave. This was particu¬ 
larly the case on the n. Pacific coast, 
where slavery was an institution. Thus 
John Jewitt, at the^beginning of the 19th 
century, w r as preserved as a slave by the 
Nootka chief Maquinna, because he was 
an ironworker and would be valuable 
property. Most of the other whites who 
fell into the hands of Indians on this 
coast were treated in a similar manner. 

The majority of captives, however, were 
those taken in war. These were consid¬ 
ered to have forfeited their lives and to 
have been actually dead as to their pre¬ 
vious existence. It was often thought 
that the captive’s supernatural helper had 
been destroyed or made to submit to that 
of the captor, though where not put to 
death with torture to satisfy the victor’s 
desire for revenge and to give the cap¬ 
tive an opportunity to show his fortitude, 
he might in a way be reborn by under¬ 
going a form of adoption. 

It is learned from the numerous ac¬ 
counts of white persons who had been 
taken by Indians that the principal im¬ 
mediate hardships they endured were due 
to the rapid movements of their captors 
in order to escape pursuers, and the con¬ 
tinual threats to which they were sub¬ 
jected. These threats were not usually 
carried out, however, unless they at¬ 
tempted escape or were unable to keep 
up with the band, or unless the band 
was pursued too hotly. Each person 
taken was considered the property of the 
one who first laid hands on him, and the 
character of this individual had much to 


do in determining the extent of his hard¬ 
ships. When two or more claimed a 
prisoner he was sometimes kept by all 
conjointly, but sometimes they settled 
the controversy by torturing him to death 
on the spot. The rapid retreat of a war 
party bore particularly hard upon women 
and children, yet a certain amount of 
consideration was often shown them. 
Sometimes the male captives were al¬ 
lowed to help them along, sometimes 
they were drawn on an improvised sledge 
or travois, and, if there were horses in 
the party these might be placed at their 
disposal, while one instance is recorded 
in which the child of a female captive 
was carried by her master for several 
days. It is worthy of remark that the 
honor of a white woman was almost al¬ 
ways respected by her captors among the 
tribes e. of the Mississippi; but w. of 
that limit, on the plains, in the Columbia 
r. region, and in the S. W., the contrary 
was often the case. 

Among the eastern tribes, on arriving 
at the village a dance was held, at which 
the captives were expected to play a con¬ 
spicuous part. They were often placed in 
the center of a circle of dancers, were 
sometimes compelled to sing and dance 
also, and a few were usually subjected to 
revolting tortures and finally burned at 
the stake. Instances of cannibalism are 
recorded in connection w r ith these dances 
after the return from war, and among 
some of the Texas and Louisiana tribes 
this disposition of the bodies of captives 
appears to have been something more 
than occasional. The Iroquois, some Al- 
gonquians, and several western tribes 
forced prisoners to run between two 
lines of people armed with clubs, toma¬ 
hawks, and other weapons, and spared, 
at least temporarily, those who reached 
the chief’s house, a certain post, or some 
other goal. Among many other tribes an 
escaped captive who reached the chief’s 
house was regarded as safe, while the 
Creek peace towns also secured immunity 
from pursuit to the persons who entered 
them. Offering food to a visitor was usu¬ 
ally equivalent to extending the host’s 
protection over him. 

From the experiences of the Spaniard 
Juan Ortiz, taken prisoner by the Flor¬ 
ida chief Ucita, in 1528, as well as 
those of other whites, it would appear 
that captives were sometimes held in 
a sort of bondage elsewhere than on 
the n. Pacific coast, but usually where 
their lives were spared they were held 
for ransom or adopted into the tribe. J. 
0. Dorsey says of some Siouan tribes, 
however, that their captives were allowed 
either to go home or settle among them¬ 
selves, but were neither tortured nor regu¬ 
larly adopted. Although the custom 


BULL. 30 ] 


CAPTIVES 


205 


among the eastern Indians of holding 
white prisoners for ransom dates from 
early times, it is questionable whether it 
was founded on aboriginal usage. The 
ransoming or sale of captives, however, 
was common among the Plains and S. W. 
tribes, while the custom of ransoming 
slaves on the n. Pacific coast was cer¬ 
tainly pre-Columbian. In most of North 
America, however, it was probably a rare 
procedure, especially since many tribes 
are said to have disowned any person who 
once had been taken prisoner. Doubt¬ 
less it became common in dealing with 
white captives owing to the difficulty of 
reconciling adult whites to Indian life 
and customs, while captives taken from 
another tribe no doubt settled down into 
their new relationships and surroundings 
very contentedly. 

The usual object in thus adopting a 
prisoner was that he might fill the place 
of someone who had died, and it is af¬ 
firmed by one writer that, whatever his 
own character, he was treated exactly as 
if he possessed the character of his pre¬ 
decessor. John Gyles, who was cap¬ 
tured by the Abnaki in 1689, informs us 
that a prisoner was brought out to be 
beaten and tortured during the war 
dances unless his master paid over a cer¬ 
tain amount of property. Women and 
children were generally preserved and 
adopted, though there are instances in 
which white women were tortured to 
death, and it is said of the Ute that fe¬ 
male captives from other Indian tribes 
were given over to the women to be tor¬ 
tured, while male prisoners who had dis¬ 
tinguished themselves were sometimes 
dismissed unhurt. Among tribes pos¬ 
sessing clans the adoption of captured 
women was of special importance, as it 
often resulted in the formation of a new 
clan from their descendants. Such, no 
doubt, was the origin of the Zuni and 
Mexican clans of the Navaho. The Ute 
clan of the latter was recruited by a sys¬ 
tematic capture and purchase of Ute girls 
undertaken with the object of supply¬ 
ing the tribe with good basket makers 
(Culin). Among the Plains tribes cap¬ 
tives, especially children, were sometimes 
taken for the express purpose of being 
trained to the performance of certain 
ceremonial duties. Besides the num¬ 
bers of white persons carried away by 
Indians and subsequently ransomed, it 
is evident from all the accounts that 
have reached us that many of English, 
French, and Spanish descent were taken 
into the tribe of their captors and, either 
because carried off when very young or be¬ 
cause they developed a taste for their new 
life, never returned. Some of these even 
rose to high positions, as in the case of a 
Frenchman who became chief of the 


Attacapa, of a Mexican who is recorded 
as the most prominent and successful war 
chief of the Comanche in 1855, and of 
another Mexican still a man of influence 
among the Zuni. The present chief of 
the Comanche, Quanah Parker (q. v.), is 
the son of a captive American woman. 
The confederated tribes of Comanche, 
Kiowa, and Kiowa Apache still hold at 
least 50 adopted white captives, and it is 
probable that fully one-third of the whole 
population have a traceable percentage 
of captive blood. The same is probably 
true in nearly equal measure of the Apache 
of Arizona. 

From Oregon to s. Alaska a different 
treatment of captives was brought about 
by the existence of a slave class. Since 
slaves were the most valuable property a 
man could have, the lives of those taken 
in war were always spared unless such 
captives had committed some great injury 
to the victorious tribe that prompted im¬ 
mediate revenge. After this they might 
be killed at any moment by their masters; 
but such a fate seldom overtook them 
until they grew too old to work, unless 
their masters became involved in a prop¬ 
erty contest, or the people of the town 
from which they had been taken had com¬ 
mitted depredations. Among the Tlingit, 
however, slaves were killed during mor¬ 
tuary feasts, and bodies of slaves were 
thrown into the holes dug for the posts 
of a new house. Slave women, especially 
if they were known to be of noble descent, 
sometimes married their captors and be¬ 
came free. Four prominent Haida clans 
and one clan among the Tsimshian are 
said to have originated from marriages of 
this kind, while another prominent Haida 
clan was called “the Slaves,” though it 
is impossible to say whether they were 
descended from slaves or whether the 
term is applied ironically. Whether male 
slaves ever rose to a high position is doubt¬ 
ful, owing to the strong caste system that 
here prevailed. Instead of receiving com¬ 
mendation, a slave who had escaped suf¬ 
fered a certain opprobrium which could 
be removed only by the expenditure of 
a great amount of property. At the same 
time it is related of the greatest Skide- 
gate chief that he had been enslaved in 
his youth. 

Consult Baker, True Stories of New 
England Captives, 1897; Drake, Indian 
Captivities, 1851; Gentl. of Elvas. in 
Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 1851; Harris, 
Life of Horatio Jones, 1903; Herrick, 
Indian Narr., 1854; Hunter, Captivity 
among the Indians, 1823 (of questionable 
authenticity); Johnston, Incidents at¬ 
tending the Capture, etc., of Charles 
Johnston, 1827; Kelly, Narr. of Captivity 
among the Sioux, 1880; Larimer, Cap¬ 
ture and Escape, or Life among the Sioux, 


206 


CARANTOUAN-CARISES 


[b. a. e. 


1870; Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
1898; Relacion of Alvar Nunez Cabe^a 
de Vaca, B. Smith transl., 1871; Narr. 
of Captivity of Mary Rowlandson, 1791, 
repr. 1856; Severance (ed.), Captivity of 
Benj. Gilbert, 1904; Spears (ed.), Dan¬ 
gers and Sufferings of Robert Eastburn, 
1904; Spencer, Indian Captivity, 1834; 
Stratton, Captivity of the Oatman Girls, 
1857; Tanner, Narr. of Captivity, 1830. 
See Adoption, Cannibalism, Genizaros, 
Ordeals, Slavery, War and War discipline. 

(j. r. s.) 

Carantouan (‘it is a large tree’). One 
of the chief palisaded towns of the 
Conestoga, which in 1615 was situated 
3 short days’ journey from the fort of 
the Iroquois attacked by Champlain in 
that year. It was probably on the site 
of the present Waverly, N. Y., and the 

S alisade attacked was at Nichols Pond, 
ladison co. 

Carapoa (possibly a contraction of cara- 
pohoua , from carami ‘raft,’ po ‘in,’ houa 
‘ house’=‘ house on rafts ’; or carapohueye 
‘to go into rafts.’—Buelna). An ancient 
settlement, apparently of the Tehueco or 
the Cahita, situated near El Fuerte, 
which is on the e. bank of the Rio Fuerte, 
n. Sinaloa, Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 332, 1864. 

Carascan. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Carcajou. The Canadian French form 
of the Algonquian (Montagnais kar-ka-joo) 
name for the wolverene ( Gulo luscus). The 
Chippewa gwingwaage (Baraga), gwin- 
gwaw-ah-ga (Tanner), the Cree quiquakatch 
(Mackenzie), kikkwdhdkSs (Lacombe), 
queequehatch (Dobbs), the Algonkin qwin- 
gwaage{Cnoo[) , and quickhatch, quiquihalch, 
etc., of various authors, are parallels. By 
a freak of popular etymology this animal 
received the name of ‘ ‘ glutton. ’ ’ Its Fin¬ 
nish name is fixl-frass, ‘ dweller among 
rocks,’ corrupted by the Germans into 
vielfrass, ‘glutton.’ The name carcajou 
has been incorrectly applied to several 
animals. For instance, Charlevoix, in 
describing one of the enemies of the deer, 
says the most cruel is “the carcajou or 
quincajou, a kind of cat, with a tail so 
long that it twists it several times around 
his body,” a description taken evidently 
not from nature, but from the Algonquian 
myth of the fire-dragon. Among the 
Canadian French diable des bois is also a 
name of this little beast. (j. n. b. h. ) 
Cardinal points. See Color symbolism, 
Cross, Orientation. 

Carfaray. An ancient pueblo of the 
Tigua, reference to which is made in the 
folk-tales of that people. Supposed to 


have been situated e. of the Rio Grande 
in New Mexico, beyond the saline 
lakes.—Bandelier (after Lummis) in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 255, 1892. 

Car-far-ay.—Ibid. 

Carhagouha (‘in the forest.’—Hewitt). 
A Huron village in Tiny tp., about 2 m. 
n. w. of La Fontaine, Ontario, about 1640. 

Carhagoua. —Champlain (1615), CEuvres, IV, 28,1870. 
Carragouha.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 166, 1855. Carta- 
goua.—Doc. of 1637 in Margry, D6c., I, 3, 1878. 

Caribou. The common name of the 
American reindeer, of w T hich there are 
two chief species, the woodland caribou 
( Rangifer caribou) and the barren-ground 
caribou ( R . arcticus ). The word came 
into English from the French of Canada, 
in which It is old, Sagard-Theodat using 
it in 1632. Josselyn has the Quinnipiac 
form maccarib and the synonym pohano. 
The origin of the word is seen in the cog¬ 
nate Micmac jaZi&u and the Passama- 
quoddy megaVip, the name of this animal 
in these eastern Algonquian dialects. 
According to Gatschet (Bull. Free Mus. 
Sci. and Art, Phila., n, 191, 1900) these 
words signify ‘pawer’ or ‘scratcher,’ the 
animal being so called from its habit of 
shoveling the snow with its forelegs to 
find the food covered by snow. In 
Micmac xalibu’ mul-xadeget means ‘ the 
caribou is scratching or shoveling.’ 
Formerly the word was often spelled 
cariboo, which gave name to the Cariboo 
district in British Columbia, famous for 
its gold mines, and other places in Canada 
and the United States. (a. f. c.) 

Caribous. Wood, in 1769 (Hawkins, 
Missions, 361, 1845), speaks of the “Mic- 
macs, Marashites [Malecite], and Carri- 
bous, the three tribes of New Bruns¬ 
wick,” as all understanding the Micmac 
language. Probably the Abnaki or a 
part of them, as one of their gentes is 
the Magu n leboo, or Caribou. 

Carichic ( garichic, ‘where there are 
houses.’—Lumholtz). A former Tara- 
humare settlement e. of Rio Nonoava, 
the upper fork of Rio Conchos, lat. 27° 
5CK, long. 107°, about 72 m. s. of Chihua¬ 
hua, Mexico. Although often visited by 
the Tarahumare, the place is now thor¬ 
oughly Mexicanized. In the neighbor¬ 
hood are numerous Tarahumare burial 
caves. (a. h.) 

Carichic.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323,1864. Guani- 
carichic.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
ill, 329, 1857. Jesus Carichic.—Ibid., 324. 

Carises (probably Span, carrizo, ‘reed 
grass’). One of a number of tribes for¬ 
merly occupying the country from Buena 
Vista and Carises lakes and Kern r. to 
the Sierra Nevada and Coast range, Cal. 
By treaty of June 10, 1851, they reserved 
a tract between Tejon pass and Kern r., 
and ceded the remainder of their lands 
to the United States. Native name un¬ 
known. Judging by locality and associa- 


75ULL. 30] 


CAKLANES-CARLISLE SCHOOL 


207 


tions they were probably Mariposan, 
though possibly Shoshonean. See Bar¬ 
bour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., 
spec, sess., 256, 1853; Royceinl8th Rep. 
B. A. E., 782, 1899. 

Carlanes (so called from Carlana, their 
chief). A band of Jicarilla who in 1719— 
24 were on Arkansas r., n. e. of Santa Fe, 
N. Mex. (Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, v, 191, 197, note, 1890; Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 236,1889). Orozco y 
Berra (Geog., 59, 1864) classes them as a 
part of the Faraon Apache. 

Apaches Carlanes.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, v, 197, note, 1890. 

Carlisle School. The first nonreserva¬ 
tion school established by the Govern¬ 
ment was that of Carlisle, Pa., which had 
its inception in the efforts of Gen. R. H. 
Pratt, U. S. A., when a lieutenant in 
charge of Indian prisoners of war at St 
Augustine, Fla., from May 11, 1875, to 
Apr. 14,1878. When the release of these 
prisoners was ordered, 22 of the young 
men were led to ask for further educa¬ 
tion, agreeing to remain in the E. 3 
years longer if they could attend school. 
These were placed in school at Hampton, 
Va., and several other places. On Sept. 
6, 1879, an order was issued transferring 
the Carlisle Barracks, Pa., comprising 27 
acres, from the War Department to the 
Department of the Interior for Indian 
school purposes, pending action by Con¬ 
gress on a bill to establish such an institu¬ 
tion. The bill became a law July 31,1882. 

On Sept. 6, 1879, having been ordered 
to report to the Secretary of the Interior, 
Lieut. Pratt was directed to establish a 
school at Carlisle and also to proceed to 
Dakota and Indian Ter. for the purpose 
of obtaining pupils. By the end of Octo¬ 
ber he had gathered 136 Indians from the 
Rosebud, Pine Ridge, and other agencies, 
and, with 11 of the former Florida prison¬ 
ers from Hampton, the school was for¬ 
mally opened Nov. 1,1879. 

Year after year since this modest be¬ 
ginning the school has steadily progressed, 
until its present (1905) enrollment is 
1,000 pupils. Since the foundation of the 
school nearly every tribe in the United 
States has had representatives on its rolls, 
and at the present time pupils from the 
following tribes are in attendance: 
Apache, Arapaho, Ankara, Assiniboin, 
Bannock, Caddo, Catawba, Cayuga, Cher¬ 
okee, Cayuse, Cheyenne, Chinook, Chip¬ 
pewa, Choctaw, Clallam, Comanche, 
Crow, Dalles, Delaware, “Digger,” 
“Grosventre,” Iroquois, Kickapoo, Kla¬ 
math, Mandan, Mashpee, Menominee, 
Mission, Mohawk, Miami, Nez Perce, 
Okinagan, Omaha, Oneida, Onondaga, 
Osage, Ottawa, Paiute, Papago, Pawnee, 
Penobscot, Piegan, Peoria, Pit River, 
Pima, Potawatomi, Pueblo, Sauk and 


Fox, Sanpoil, Seneca, Shawnee, Shivwits, 
Shoshoni, Siletz, Sioux, Stockbridge, St 
Regis, Tonawanda, Tuscarora, Umpqua, 
Ute, Wallawalla, Wichita, Winnebago, 
Wyandot, Wailaki, YokaiaPomo, Yuma, 
and Zuni. There are also in attendance 
68 Alaskans of various tribes. 

In the words of Gen. Pratt, the aim of 
the school “has been to teach English 
and give a primary education and a 
knowledge of some common and practical 
industry and means of self-support among 
civilized people. To this end regular 
shops and farms were provided, where 
the principal mechanical arts and farm¬ 
ing are taught the boys, and the girls 
taught cooking, sewing, laundry, and 
housework.” In pursuance of this policy 
every inducement was offered to retain 
pupils, to prevent their return to reserva¬ 
tion life, and to aid them to make for 
themselves a place among the people of 
the E. In his first annual report on 
the conduct of the school, Lieut. Pratt 
announced that 2 boys and 1 girl had 
been placed in the families of prosperous 
citizens of Massachusetts, and subse¬ 
quently that 5 girls and 16 boys had 
found homes with white families in the 
vicinity of Carlisle during the summer 
months, thus enabling them by direct 
example and association to learn the 
ways of civilization. This was the com¬ 
mencement of the “outing system” that 
has come to be a distinctive civilizing 
feature not only of the Carlisle school 
but of the Indian school service gener¬ 
ally. While thus employed the pupils 
attend the public schools whenever pos¬ 
sible, and by association with white pupils 
in classes and games also acquire an ac¬ 
quaintance with civilized ways. In addi¬ 
tion to these advantages the outing pupil 
is paid a stipulated sum for his labor, 
which tends to make him self-reliant and 
impresses on him the value of time and 
work. Of the thousand pupils at Car¬ 
lisle at least half are placed at “outing” 
during different periods and for varying 
terms. An outing agent is employed, 
who visits the pupils at intervals in their 
temporary homes, observes their conduct 
and progress, and looks after their wel¬ 
fare. Frequent reports are required by 
the school management from both em¬ 
ployer and pupil, thus keeping each in 
close touch with the school. The extent 
and success of the “outing system” since 
its inception is shown in the following 


table: 

Admitted during 25 years. 5,170 

Discharged during 25 years. 4,210 

On rolls during fiscal year 1904. 1,087 

Outings, fiscal year 1904: Girls, 426; boys, 

498 . 924 


Outings during 21 years: Girls, 3,214; 

boys, 5,118. 8,332 

Students’ earnings, 1904. $34,970 

Students’ earnings during last 15 years.. $352,951 








208 


CARLISLE SCHOOL 


[B. a. e. 


Supplementing the outing system, the 
school conducts a bank, with which each 
student has an account that may be drawn 
upon under proper supervision. By this 
means practical instruction in finance is 
given. 

Notwithstanding the efforts of the 
school to induce its graduates to remain 
in the E. instead of returning to their 
reservation homes, the plan has not been 
successful and has therefore necessitated 
a change in harmony with the condi¬ 
tions. Training suited to mechanical 
pursuits is given all male pupils who 
give promise of becoming efficient workers 
at the different trades, and a plan is in 
progress to train girls as professional 
nurses, several graduates having already 
adopted this occupation as a means of 
livelihood. 

From its organization the aim of the 
school has been to give Indian youth a 
practical productive training. Farm 
work for the boys and housework for the 
girls under the outing system are the 
best types, but the school goes farther, 
and its curriculum is based on the plan 
of giving that productive training which 
is best adapted to the abilities of the indi¬ 
vidual pupils. At the school itself there 
are two large farms, and well-equipped 
shops in which regular trades are taught 
by competent instructors. All the cloth¬ 
ing of the school is manufactured by the 
boys in the tailor shop, while in its ad¬ 
junct, the sewing room, the girls are 
taught needlework. The carpenter shop 
furnishes the opportunity to learn the use 
of tools, which is practically demonstrated 
in the erection of buildings and in making 
repairs by the boys assigned to this trade. 
The blacksmith and w T agon-making shops 
not only do the school work, but manu¬ 
facture superior wagons, etc., w’hich are 
furnished to other schools and agencies, 
while the harness shop is engaged in 
similar work and production. The shoe 
shop, tin shop, paint shop, and engineer¬ 
ing department attend to the needs of 
the school in their respective branches. 
While the productive labors of the stu¬ 
dents are mainly for the school, yet all 
surplus finds a ready market outside, in¬ 
cluding other schools and agencies. The 
work of these branches is systematized 
into a department under the control of a 
superintendent of industries. 

The literary curriculum of Carlisle 
stops at that point where the student 
may enter the higher grades of the pub¬ 
lic schools. The policy is to give a broad 
common school education, leaving to the 
individual and his own resources any 
further development of his intellectual 
faculties. The literary and industrial 
curricula are so correlated that when 
graduated the average student is as fully 


equipped as the average white boy to 
take up the struggle for a livelihood. 

During the 26 years of its existence the 
Carlisle School has graduated a large 
number of pupils, many of whom are 
filling responsible positions in the busi¬ 
ness world and especially in the Indian 
service, in which, during the fiscal year 
1903, 101 were employed in various 
capacities from teachers to laborers, 
drawing a total of $46,300 in salaries. 
Others who have returned to their homes 
retain a fair portion of the civilization 
acquired at the school. 

Physical training indoor and out for 
boys and girls is part of the life of the 
school, and a large gymnasium furnishes 
ample facilities for both sexes. In ath¬ 
letics and sports the Indian possesses de¬ 
cided capacity, and baseball, basketball, 
and football teams are regularly organ¬ 
ized, the last of which has held its own 
in many warmly contested games with 
representative teams of the principal col¬ 
leges and universities. The Carlisle foot¬ 
ball team now has a national reputation 
for its successes and for clean, skillful 
playing. 

The Carlisle School band is an interest¬ 
ing feature of the school. Its members 
are selected from the various tribes in 
attendance, and under the leadership of 
Dennison and James Wheelock, Oneida 
Indians, was considered among the best. 
The former was not only a leader but a 
composer, and his compositions were 
rendered by his Indian musicians in a 
manner that has delighted large audiences 
in the principal American cities. 

The Carlisle School produced the first 
paper printed by Indian boys. The print- 
ery was early established and became a 
potent factor in the industrial develop¬ 
ment of the students. The Indian Helper , 
a small leaflet, was first published, and 
afterward a larger journal, The Red Man , 
was issued. These were later consolidated 
under the title Red Man and Helper , and 
reflected the life and policies of the 
school. The new management has con¬ 
tinued the publication as a weekly under 
the name of The Arrow. The school 
printery is well equipped w T ith presses 
and materials, and under competent su¬ 
pervision the boys produce a large amount 
of job and pamphlet work that is a credit 
to their taste and industry. 

The buildings of the plant, although 
consisting of portions of the old military 
barracks, have furnished adequate ac¬ 
commodations for the thousands of pu¬ 
pils who have been enrolled. Besides 
the superintendent, the school has 75 in¬ 
structors, clerks, and other employees. 

General Pratt remained in charge of 
the school from its organization until his 
retirement from the superintendency, 


BULL. 30] 


CARMANAH-CASA GRANDE 


209 


June 30, 1904, when he was succeeded 
by Maj. (then Capt.) William A. Mercer, 
U. S. A. See Education. (j. h. d.) 

Carmanah. A Nitinat village near Bo¬ 
nilla pt., s. w. coast of Vancouver id.; 
pop. 46 in 1902.—Can. Ind. Aff., 264, 
1902. 

Carmel. A Moravian mission at the 
mouth of Nushagak r., Alaska (Bruce, 
Alaska, map, 1885); pop. 189 in 1890, 
381 in 1900. See Kanulik. 

Carolina tea. See Black drink. 

Caromanie (‘ walking turtle ’). An un¬ 
identified Winnebago gens.—McKenney 
and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i ; 315; n, 289, 1854. 

Carrizo (Span.: ‘reed grass,’ Phrag- 
mites communis). A small band of Apache, 
probably the clan Klokadakaydn, ‘ Car¬ 
rizo or Arrow-reed people,’ q. v. The 
name is also applied to a Navaho locality 
and to those Indians living about Car¬ 
rizo mts., n. e. Ariz. (Cortez, 1799, in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, pt. 3, 119, 1856). 
In the latter case it has no ethnic signifi¬ 
cance. 

Cariso. — Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 
265, 1850 (misprint). Carrizalleiios.—Hamilton, 
Mexican Handbook, 48,1883 (probably the same). 

Carrizo. The Coahuiltecan Indians be¬ 
tween Camargo and Matamoras and along 
the Gulf coastin n. e. Tamaulipas, Mexico, 
includingthe remnants of theComecrudo, 
Pinto or Pakawa, Tejon, Cotonam, and 
Casas Chiquitas tribes or bands, gathered 
about Charco Escondido; so called com¬ 
prehensively by the white Mq,xicans in 
later years. Previous to 1886, according to 
Gatschet, who visited the region in that 
year, they used the Comecrudo and Mexi- 
can-Spanish languages, and he found that 
of the 30 or 35 then living scarcely 10 
remembered anything of their native 
tongue. They repudiated the name 
Carrizo, calling themselves Comecrudo. 
It is probable that the Comecrudo was 
the ruling tribe represented in the group. 
The last chief elected by them was- Mar- 
celino, who died before 1856. This ex¬ 
plains the later use of the name, but 
Orozco y Berra (Geog., 294,' 308, 1864) 
and Mota Padilla (Hist, de la Conq., 
1742, lxix, 1870) mention them as a 
distinct tribe, the former stating that they 
were common to Coahuila and Tamauli¬ 
pas. It appears, however, that the name 
Carrizo was applied to the Comecrudo 
(q. v.) at this earlier date, and that it has 
generally been used as synonymous there¬ 
with. The Carrizos are known to the 
Kiowa and the Tonkawa as the ‘shoe¬ 
less people,’ because they wore sandals 
instead of moccasins. Some Carrizo cap¬ 
tives still live among the Kiowa. 
Comecrudos.—Uhde, Die Lander, 120, 185, 1861. 
Dohe'iiko.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,^ 400, 
1898 (‘shoeless people’: Kiowa name). Kaeso.— 
Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Tonkawa 
name). Ka'nhe'iiko.—Mooney, op. cit. (another 
Kiowa name, same meaning). Napuat.—Pimen¬ 

* 57008°—Bull. 30—12-14 


tel, Cuadro Descr., n, 347, 1865 (given as a Co¬ 
manche division, but really the Comanche name 
for the Carrizo: ‘shoeless people.’ —j. m.). Q,ue- 
tahtore. —Ibid. Yi'ata'tehenko. —Mooney, op. cit. 
(another Kiowa name, same meaning). 

Caruana. A tribe of 96 individuals, 
mentioned as on Ft Tejon res., s. central 
Cal., in 1862. They were probably Sho- 
shonean or Mariposan.—Wentworth in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 324, 1862. 

Sierra.— Wentworth, ibid. 

Carving. See A rt, Sculpture, Wood-work. 

Casa Blanca (Span.: ‘white house’). 
Former^ a summer village of the Laguna 
tribe, but now permanently inhabited; 
situated 4J m..w. of Laguna pueblo, Val¬ 
encia co., N. Mex. 

Casa Blanco.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 
123,1893 (misprint). Pur-tyi-tyi-ya. —Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (proper name: ‘edge of the 
hill on the west’). Pu-sit-yit-cho. —Hodge (fide 
Pradt) in Am. Anthrop., IV, 346, 1891. 

Casa Blanca (so called on account of a 
pueblo ruin in the vicinity; see Casa 
Montezuma ). A Pima village consisting of 
about 50 scattered houses on Gila r., s. 
Ariz. It contained 535 inhabitants in 
1858 and 315 in 1869. 

Casa Blanca.— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858. 
Va'-aki.— Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 18, 1902 
(Pima name: ‘ancient house’). VaVak.— Stout 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 59, 1872 (probably the 
same). 

Casa Blanca. A ruined cliff pueblo in 
Canyon de Chelly, in the present Navaho 
country, n. e. Ariz.—Wheeler Survey 
Rep., vn, 373, 1879. 

Casa Chiquita (Span.: ‘small house’). 
A small ruined pueblo 1J m. w. of Pueblo 
Bonito, on the n. side of the arroyo, 
against the mesa wall, in Chaco canyon, 
n. w. N. Mex. It is in the form of a solid 
parallelogram, 78 by 63 ft. A consider¬ 
able part of the building was occupied 
by 2 large circular kivas. The rooms on 
the ground floor were mostly about 5 by 8 
ft. in dimension. The pueblo was origi¬ 
nally 4 stories high, but is now in a very 
ruinous condition, although such walls 
as remain standing display excellent 
workmanship, a well-preserved corner 
being found true to the square and plum¬ 
met. (e. l. h.) 

Casa del Eco (Span.: ‘house of the 
echo’). A large cliff village in San Juan 
canyon, s. Utah, 12 m. below the mouth 
of Montezuma canyon. Described by, 
Gannett in Pop. Sci. Mo., 671, Mar.,1880; 
Hardacre in Scribner’s Mag., 274, Dec., 
1878; Jackson in 10th Rep. Hayden Sur¬ 
vey, 420, 1879. 

Casa Grande (Span.: ‘great house’). 
The principal structure of an extensive 
prehistoric ruined pueblo £ m. s. of Gila r., 
9 m. s. w. from Florence, Pinal co., Ariz. 
It was first mentioned by the Jesuit 
Father Eusebio Kino, or Kuehne, who 
said mass within its walls in Nov., 1694, 
and who again visited it in 1697 and 1699. 
In Kino’s time the great house was of 4 
stories but roofless, and its condition 


CASA GRANDE 


[B. A. K. 


2.10 


was much the same about 1762, when seen 
by the author of the anonymous Rudo 
Ensayo. Its construction is of the pis£ 
type, i. e., the walls, 3 to 5 ft. thick, con¬ 
sist of huge blocks of adobe mortar and 
gravel molded in place and allowed to 
dry hard, then smoothed on the inner 
surface. The present height of the outer 
walls is 20 to 25 ft., accommodating 2 
stories, while the central part or tower, 
forming an additional story, is 28 to 30 
ft. above the ground. The house meas¬ 
ures 43 by 59 ft., 
with 5 rooms in 
its ground plan. 

Casa Grande 
was also visited 
Oct. 31,1775, by 
Father Pedro 
Font, who wrote 
an excellent de¬ 
scription of its 
appearance and 
mentions the 
outlying struc¬ 
tures, then fairly 
preserved. Font 
remarksthatthe 
Casa Grande it¬ 
self measured 50 
by 70 ft., and in¬ 
fers that its beams (4 or 5 in. thick), ap¬ 
parently of pine, must have been carried 
20 m., while the water supply for the set¬ 
tlement was conveyed from the river by 
means of a canal. At this date the build¬ 
ing w r as of 3 stories, though the neighbor¬ 
ing Pima informed Font that there had 
been 4. The celebrated ruins w ere visited 
77 years later (July 12, 1852) by J. R. 
Bartlett, w : hose description indicates little 
change in the main structure since the time 
of Font, although all but 2 of 
the outlying buildings had 
been reduced to mounds. By 
act of Congress of Mar. 2, 

1889, $2,000 w r as appropri¬ 
ated for the repair of the 
building, and the work was 
performed under the direc¬ 
tion of the Secretary of the 
Interior. By Executive or¬ 
der of June 22, 1892, under 
the provisions of the same 
act, a tract of about | sq. m., surround¬ 
ing the ruin, was reserved from sale or 
settlement, and a custodian appointed. 
The origin of this and of other prehis¬ 
toric pueblo groups in s. Arizona and 
n. Chihuahua is unknown. It has long 
been reputed to have been one of the 
places of sojourn of the Nahua or Aztec 
in their migration from the n. to the val¬ 
ley of Mexico (wlience the name ‘Casa 
de Montezuma’), and it has been mis¬ 
takenly regarded by some writers as the 
Chichilticalli, or ‘Red House,’ of the 


chroniclers of Coronado’s expedition in 
1540-42. The Pima, who have occupied 
the region from time immemorial, pre¬ 
serve a legend that it was constructed by 
one of their chiefs or deities named 
Civano, hence the name Civanoki, 
‘house of Civano,’ which they apply to 
it. This has led to the general belief 
that these structures are the work of the 
ancestors of the Pima tribe, notw ithstand¬ 
ing their historical habitations are of an 
entirely different character, being circu¬ 
lar huts of grass 
or reeds, while 
their pottery is 
far inferior in 
quality and dec¬ 
oration to that 
found in the 
Casa Grande re¬ 
gion. It would 
seem more prob¬ 
able that these 
remains are due 
to some of the 
clansofthepres- 
entHopiorZuni 
pueblos, one at 
least of the for¬ 
mer tribe trac¬ 
ing its origin to 
the “land of the giant cactus”—a plant 
characteristic of the Gila valley Before 
its woodwork was taken away by relic 
hunters, Casa Grande show r ed evidences 
of having been burned. 

Consult Apostolicos Afanes, 252 et seq., 
1754; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 
66, 1890, and Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
439, 1892; Bartlett, Pers. Narr., n, 
272-280, 1854; Coues, Garc4s Diary, i, 
89-101, 1900; Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 
274-291, 1856; Emory, Recon., 83, 1848; 
Few'kes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., n, 
177-193, 1892; Mindeleff in 13th Rep. B. 
A. E., 289, 1896, and 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
321,1897; Rudo Ensayo (1762), 1863, also 
Guiteras transl., 124, 1894; Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, hi, 301, 1853; Ternaux-Com- 
pans, Voy., ix, 383, 1838. (f. w. h.) 

Cara de Montezuma.— Johnston in Emory, Recon- 
noissance, 596, 1848 (misprint). Casa Granda.— 
Browne, Apache Country, 116, 1869. Casa 

Grande.— Bernal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 356, 1889. Casagrande, — Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Casas Grandas. — Hard- 
acre in Scribner’s Monthly, 270, Dec., 1878. 
Casas Grandes.— Mange (1697*) quoted by Coues. 
Garc6s Diary, 1, 92,1900. Case grandi.— Clavigero, 
Storia della Cal., map, 1789. Chivano-ki.— Ban¬ 
delier in Mag. West. Hist., 667, Sept., 1886 
(‘ house of Civano ’: Pima name). Civano Ki. — 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, m, 255, 1890 
(Pima name). Ci-vano-Qi.— Bandelier in Revue 
d’Ethnog., 129, 1886. Civa-no-qi.— Bandelier 

in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 80, 1884 ( = ‘Civan6’s 

house’). Grande Maison Dite de Moctecuzoma._ 

Ternaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 383, 1838. Great 
Houses. —Bartlett, Pers. Narr., n, 272,1854. Hall of 
Montezuma.—Hughes, Doniphan’s Exped., 219 
1848. Huis van Montezuma.—ten Kate, Reizen 
in N. A., 162,1885 (Dutch form: ‘ House of Monte- 



CASA GRANDE RUIN, ARIZONA. (MINDELEFF) 



Ground-plan of 
Casa Grande 
Ruin, (minde¬ 
leff) 










BULL. 30] 


CASA GRANDE-CASHWAH 


211 


zuma’). Maison Moctecuzoma.—Ternaux-Com- 

S ans, Voy., IX, 383, 1838 (French form), Maison 
[oteczuma.—Font (1775), ibid., 383 (French 
form). Moctesuma.—Rudo Ensayo (1762), B. 
Smith’s transl., 18, 1863. Mission Montezuma.— 
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., 180 (lo¬ 
cally so called). Siwannoki.—ten Kate quoted 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, V, 132, 1890 (from Siwanki, 

‘ houseof Siwanno’). Vat-qi.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Rep., v, 80, 1884 ( = ‘ ruin,’ another Pima 
name). Wak.—ten Rate, Reizen in N. A., 160, 
1885 (also Wakh and Wahki =‘ruin’: Pima 
name). 

Casa Grande. A ruined pueblo, meas¬ 
uring 68 by 220 ft., situated a little below 
the junction of the Verde and Salt rs., 
Maricopaco., s. Ariz.—Bell, New Tracks, 
i, 199, 1869. 

Casalic. A Chumashan village given 
in Cabrillo’s narrative as near Pueblo de 
las Canoas (San Buenaventura), Cal., in 
1542. It was placed by Taylor at Refugio, 
near Santa Barbara, and was also so lo¬ 
cated by the San Buenaventura Indians 
in 1884. Cf. Cased. 

Casalic.—Cabrillo, Narr., in Smith, Col. Doc., 181, 
1857. Casaliu.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17, 
1863. Cascile.—Ibid., Apr. 24, 1863. Kasi'l.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Casa Montezuma (Span.: ‘Montezuma 
house,’ also called Casa Blanca, ‘white 
house’). A prehistoric ruin near the 
Pima villages on the Gila, s. Ariz. Not 
to be confounded with Casa Grande nor 
with any other ruin, although the same 
name has been indiscriminately applied 
to various cliff-dwellings, andent pueblos, 
etc., in s. w. United States and n. w. 
Mexico, because of their supposed an¬ 
cient occupancy by the Aztec. ( f. w. ii. ) 

A-vuc-hoo-mar-lish.—Pac. R. R. Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 
100, 1856 (Maricopa name). Casa Blanca.—Bell in 
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., N. s., I, 250, 1869. Casa 
Montezuma.—Ibid. Ho-ho-qom.—Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 80, 1884 (Pima name). Huch- 
oo-la-chook-vache.—Pac. R. R. Rep., op. cit., 94 
(Pima name). Vl-pl-set.—Bandelier, op. cit. 
(‘great grandparents’: another Pima name). 

Casa Morena (Span.: ‘brown house’). 
An ancient pueblo ruin of considerable 
importance, situated near the top of the 
continental divide in n. w. New Mexico. 
It is usually assigned to the Chaco canyon 
group, but this is assumed without evi¬ 
dence except as to outward appearance. 
No excavations have been made and the 
ruin has not been described. It is built 
of sandstone after the manner of the 
Chaco canyon pueblos. It is in the midst 
of the desert, far from water, and not 
near any of the main trails, (e. l. h.) 
Kinahzin.—Hevvett, inf’n, 1905 (Navaho name). 

Casa Rinconada (Span.: ‘cornerhouse’). 
A small pueblo ruin 500 yds.s. e. of Pueblo 
Bonito, s. of the arroyo, at the foot of the 
wall of Chaco canyon, n. w. N. Mex. The 
building did not contain more than 50 
rooms. Its most interesting feature is an 
enormous double-walled kiva, the largest 
in the Chaco canyon group, measuring 72 
ft. in diameter, the rooms of the pueblo be¬ 
ing built partially around it. The 2 walls 


were about 30 in. thick, and portions still 
stand from 10 to 12 ft. above the sur¬ 
rounding debris. Probably three-fourths 
of the kiva wall are still standing, being of 
fine, well-selected sandstone, smoothly 
laid. Thirty-two niches, 16 by 22 in., 1*4 
in. deep, smoothly finished and plastered, 
extend around the interior of the kiva wall 
at regular intervals. The outer wall of the 
kiva is 8 ft. from the inner, the space be¬ 
tween being divided into rooms. The in¬ 
dications are that the bui lding was devoted 
to ceremonial rather than to domiciliary 
use. (e. l. h. ) 

Casas Chiquitas (Span.: ‘smallhouses’). 
A tribe supposed to have been once affili¬ 
ated with the Carrizo, a Coahuiltecan 
tribe, but which in 1887 was said to be 
extinct. (a.s. g.) 

Casas Grandes. A name applied to the 
ruins of the Franciscan mission of Con¬ 
cepcion, founded in 1780 by Fray Fran¬ 
cisco Garces, near Yuma, Ariz.—Hardy, 
Travels in Mex., 355, 1829. 

Casca (prob. Span, casco, ‘potsherd’). 
A Papago village, probably in Pima co., 
s. Ariz., with 80 families in 1865.—David¬ 
son in Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865. 

Cascarba (trans. ‘ white man ’). An un¬ 
identified Dakota tribe that lived 35 
leagues up St. Peters r. in 1804.—Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 133, 1904. 

Cascel. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Ines mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal. Cf. Casalic. 

Cascel.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Cascellis.—Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., pt. ill, 
553, 1876. Cascen.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 
1860. Cascil.—Ibid. Kusil.—Ibid., Oct. 18,1861. 

Cases. See Boxes, Receptacles. 

Cashaw. A name of the crook-neck 
squash, a species of pumpkin. Bartlett 
(Diet. Americanisms, 104, 1877) has 
“ cashaw , sometimes spelt kersliaw (Al- 
gonkin), a pumpkin.” The word occurs 
in Hariot (1590) as ecushaw; in Beverley 
(1705) as cashaw, cushaw, etc. The latter 
uses it as synonymous with macock. The 
untruncated form, ecushaw, represents 
escushaw, from a Virginian dialect of 
Algonquian corresponding to the Cree 
askisiwaml the Delaware askasqueu, which 
signify ‘ it is raw or green. ’ Accordi ng to 
Dr William Jones kasha is an old Chip¬ 
pewa term for ‘hard shell.’ (a. f. c.) 

Cashiehtunk. A village, probably be¬ 
longing to the Munsee, situated in 1738 
on Delaware r., near the junction of 
the n. New Jersey state line.—Colden 
(1738) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 124, 
1855. 

Cashong. A small Seneca village situ¬ 
ated in 1779 about 7 m. s. of the present 
site of Geneva, N. Y.—Clark in Sullivan 
(1779), Ind. Exped., 130, note, 1887. 

Cashwah. A former Chumashan village 
at La Sinaguita (Cieneguita), about 3 m. 


212 


CASIO BERRY-CATAHOULA 


|B. A. K. 


n. e. of Santa Barbara mission, Cal. It 
was still inhabited in 1876, according to 
Grinnell (inf’n, 1905). 

Cashwah.—Father Timeno (1856) quoted by Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. Cieneguita.— 
Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., 650,1876. Kasua.— 
Ibid. 

Casio berry. An old name, always used 
in combination with the word “bush,” 
for Viburnum obovatum ( Isevigatum ), the 
leaves of which, as well as those of 
V. cassinoides and V. prunifolium, were 
formerly, if not at present, used on the 
coast of the Carolinas as tea. Since the 
leaves of the yopon (Ilex cassine) were 
employed for the same purpose, the Ilex 
and Viburnum were early confused under 
the same name. See Black drink. 

(w. r. g. ) 

Casitoa. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fontaneda 
Memoir ( ca . 1575), Smith trans., 19,1854. 

Casnahacmo. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage at Santa Clara rancho, Ventura co., 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,1860. 

Casqui. An unidentified province and 
town, probably on lower St Francis r., 
e. Ark., visited by De Soto’s army im¬ 
mediately after crossing the Mississippi in 
1541. It is possibly cognate with Aka n ze, 
a name for the Quapaw. 

Cascia.—La Salle (1680), from De Soto Narr., in 
Margry, D6c., II, 96, 1877. Casein.—Hennepin, 
New Discov., 311,1698. Casque.—Schoolcraft. Ind. 
Tribes, III, 48, 1853. Casqui.—Gentl. of Elvas 
(1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 169, 1850. Cas- 
quia.—Margry, D£c., I, 470, 1875. Casquin.—Gar- 
cilassodela Vega, Fla., 179,1723. Icasque.—Bied- 
ma in Smith, Col. Doc. Fla., I, 59, 1857. Ycas- 
qui.—Biedma in Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 190, 1851. 

Cassapecock. Mentioned by Strachey 
(Va., 62, 1849) as a Powhatan tribe living 
on York or Pamunkey r., about 1612, and 
having 100 warriors. Not mentioned by 
Smith under this name, but probably one 
of the tribes alluded to by him under 
another designation. (j. m.) 

Casse-tete. See Clubs. 

Castahana. A hunting tribe of 5,000 
souls in 500 lodges, mentioned by Clark 
as a Snake band, and by Lewis and Clark 
also as speaking the Minitari (Atsina) 
language. They lived on Yellowstone 
and Loup rs., and roamed also on the 
Bighorn. Called also Gens des Vache, a 
name given to the Arapaho, with whom 
they are seemingly identical. 

Castabanas.—M’Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis and 
Clark, i, map, 1842. Castahamas.—Warden, Acc. 
U. S. A., m, 562, 1819. Cas-ta-ha'-na.—Lewis and 
Clark, Discov., 23,40,1806. Castapanas.—Ibid., 36. 
Pastannownas.—Sanford, U. S.. clxvi, 1819. Pasta- 
now-na.—Brackenridge, Views of La., 86, 1814. 

Castake. One of several tribes formerly 
occupying “the country from Buena Vista 
and Carises [Kern] lakes and Kern r. to 
the Sierra Nevada and Coast range,” Cal. 
By treaty of June 10, 1851, these tribes 
reserved a tract between Tejon pass and 
Kern r. and ceded the remainder of their 
lands to the United States. In 1862 they 
were reported to number 162 on Ft Tejon 
res. The tribe belonged to the Chuma¬ 
shan family. Castac lake, in the Tejon 


pass region, derives its name from this 
tribe and affords a further clue to its 
former habitat. 

Cartaka.—Wentworth in Ind. Aff. Rep., 325,1862. 
Cas-take.—Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853. Catagos.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, June 26,1862 (mentioned as in e. Ne¬ 
vada; same?). Curtakas.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 8, 1863. Surrillos.—Wentworth in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 325,1862. 

Casti. A former Timuquanan settle¬ 
ment on the w. bank of St Johns r., Fla., 
not far from the mouth.—Laudonniere 
(1564) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 306, 
1869. 

Castildavid. An unidentified pueblo on 
the Rio Grande in New Mexico in 1582; 
situated s. of Sia (?), but definite locality 
unknown.—Bustamente and Gallegos 
(1582) in Doc. Ined., xv, 85, 1871. 

Casunalmo. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage at Rafael Gonzales rancho, Ventura 
co., Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 
1860. 

Catahecassa (Black Hoof, probably from 
mdka-tawikasha —W. J.). A principal 
chief of the Shawnee, born about 1740, 
near the present Winchester, Ky. He 
was one of the greatest captains of this 
warlike tribe throughout the period when 
they were dreaded by the whites. He 
was present at Braddock’s defeat in 1755, 
and in the battle with the Virginian mili¬ 
tia under Gen. Andrew Lewis at Point 
Pleasant, W. Va., in 1774 he bore a prom¬ 
inent part. He was an active leader of 
the Shawnee in their resistance to the 
advance of the white settlements w. of 
the Allegheny mts., and fought the troops 
of Harmar and St Clair. When the victory 
of Gen. Anthony Wayne broke the power 
of the Indian confederation and peace was 
signed on Aug. 3, 1795, Catahecassa’s 
fighting days came to an end, but not his 
career as an orator and counselor. When 
finally convinced of the hopelessness of 
struggling against the encroachment of 
the whites, he used his great influence to 
preserve peace. He was a persuasive and 
convincing speaker and was thoroughly 
versed in the traditions of the tribe as 
well as in the history of their relations 
with the whites, in which he had himself 
borne a conspicuous part. As head chief 
of the Shawnee he kept the majority of 
the tribe in restraint when British agents 
endeavored to stir them into rebellion 
against the American government and 
succeeded in seducing Tecumseh and 
some of the younger warriors. He died 
at Wapakoneta, Ohio, in 1831. 

Catahoula (‘lake village,’ from Choc¬ 
taw ak'hdtax ‘lake,’ ougoula , French form 
of 6kla ‘village’). A tribe of unknown 
affinity formerly living on Catahoula cr. 
in Catahoula parish, La.; mentioned in 
1805 by Sibley (Hist Sketches, 121,1806) 
as extinct. Whetherthistribe was a rem¬ 
nant or the Taensa village of Coutahaou- 
goula is uncertain. (a. s. g. ) 


BULL. 30] 


CATALPA-C AT A WBA 


213 


Cataoulou.— Rafinesque, introd. Marshall, Ky., i, 
43, 1824. 

Catalpa. Any tree of the genus Catalpa 
belonging to the family Bignoniacese. 
The two species native in the United 
States are the common catalpa, bean- 
tree, Indian bean, or candle-tree ( Ca- 
lalpa catalpa ); and the western catalpa, 
larger Indian bean, or Shawnee wood 
(C. speciosa). Both species are exten¬ 
sively planted as ornamental and shade 
trees. The second species is also called 
catawba tree, which name was applied 
earlier to the first. Britton and Brown 
(Flora of North. U. S., 201,1896) say that 
catalpa is the American Indian name of 
the first species. In Chambers’ Ency¬ 
clopedia (ii, 826, 1888) it is stated that 
“ the genus was named by Catesby, prob¬ 
ably from the Catawba r., where he first 
found them in 1726.” It is generally 
thought to be identical with the tribal and 
river name Catawba, but W. R. Gerard 
(Gard. and For., ix, 262, 1896) says that 
catalpa is derived from kutulilpa, signi¬ 
fying ‘winged head,’ in reference to its 
flowers, in the Creek language, (a. f. c.) 

Catalte. The first province reached by 
Moscoso after the death of De Soto in 
1542. It lay w. of the Mississippi, prob¬ 
ably in e. Arkansas, s. of Arkansas r.— 
Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 193, 1850. 

Catamaya. A town w. of the Mississippi 
r., visited by the He Soto expedition in 
1542 and mentioned as two days’journey 
from Anoixi, perhaps ins. w. Arkansas.— 
Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 182, 1850. 

Catatoga (corruption of Gatu'gitse'yl, 
‘ new settlement place ’). A former Cher¬ 
okee settlement on Cartoogaja cr., to 
which it gave its name, a tributary of 
Little Tennessee r., above Franklin, in 
Macon co., N. C.—Mooney in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 519,1900. 

Cartoogaja.—Mooney, ibid. Gatu'gitse'.—Ibid, 
(abbreviation of Indian term). 

Cataumut. A village formerly in Fal¬ 
mouth township, Barnstable co., Mass., 
probably near Canaumut neck. In 1674 
there were some Praying Indians in it, 
and there were still a few mixed bloods 
there in 1792. It was in the territory of 
the Nauset. (j. m. ) 

Cataumut.—Freeman (1792) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., I, 230, 1806. Codtanmut.—Bourne 
(1674), ibid., 197. 

Catawatabeta. See Broken Tooth. 

Catawaweshink. A former village, 
probably of the Delawares, on or near 
Susquehanna r., near Big Island, Pa.— 
Post(1758) in Kauffman, West. Pa., app., 
96, 1851. 

Catawba (probably from Choctaw ka- 
tdpa, ‘divided,’ ‘separated,’ ‘a divi¬ 
sion.’—Gatschet). The most important 
of the eastern Siouan tribes. It is said 
that Lynche cr., S. C., e. of the Catawba 


territory, was anciently known as Ivada- 
pau; and from the fact that Lawson ap¬ 
plies this name to a small band met by 
him s. e. of the main body, which he 
calls Esaw, it is possible that it was 
originally given to this people by some 
tribe living in e. South Carolina, from 
whom the first colonists obtained it. 
The Cherokee, having no b in their lan¬ 
guage, changed the name to Atakwa, 
plural Anitakwa. The Shawnee and 
other tribes of the Ohio valley made the 
word Cuttawa. From the earliest period 
the Catawba have also been known as 


0. A. HARRIS, A CATAWBA 



Esaw, or Issa (Catawba iswti,', ‘river’), 
from their residence on the principal 
stream of the region, Iswa being their 
only name for the Catawba and Wa- 
teree rs. They were frequently included 
by the Iroquois under the general term 
Totiri, or Toderichroone, another form of 
which is Tutelo, applied to all the south¬ 
ern Siouan tribes collectively. They were 
classed by Gallatin (1836) as a distinct 
stock, ancl were so regarded until Gat¬ 
schet visited them in 1881 and obtained 
a large vocabulary showing numerous 
Siouan correspondences. Further inves¬ 
tigations by Hale, Gatschet, Mooney, 
and Dorsey proved that several other 
tribes of the same region were also of 
Siouan stock, while the linguistic forms 
and traditional evidence all point to this 
e. region as the original home of the 
Siouan tribes. The alleged tradition 
which brings the Catawba from the N., 
as refugees from the French and their 



214 


CATAWBA 


[b. a. e. 


Indian allies about the year 1660, does 
not agree in any of its main points with 
the known facts of history, and, if genu¬ 
ine at all, refers rather to some local in¬ 
cident than to a tribal movement. It is 
well known that the Catawba were in a 
chronic state of warfare with the northern 
tribes, whose raiding parties they some¬ 
times followed, even across the Ohio. 

The first notice of the Catawba seems 
to be that of Vandera in 1579, who calls 



BENJAMIN P. HARRIS, A CATAWBA 

them Issa in his narrative of Pardo’s 
expedition. Nearly a century later, in 
1670, they are mentioned as Ushery by 
Lederer, who claims to have visited them, 
but this is doubtful. 

Lawson, who passed through their ter¬ 
ritory in 1701, speaks of them as a “ pow¬ 
erful nation” and states that their vil¬ 
lages were very thick. He calls the two 
divisions, which were living a short dis¬ 
tance apart, by different names, one the 
Kadapau and the other the Esaw, un¬ 


aware of the fact that the two were syno¬ 
nyms. From all accounts they were for¬ 
merly the most populous and most im¬ 
portant, tribe in the Carolinas, excepting 
the Cherokee. Virginia traders were 
already among them at the time of 
Lawson’s visit. Adair, 75 years later, 
says that one of the ancient cleared fields 
of the tribe extended 7 m., besides which 
they had several smaller village sites. In 
1728 they still had 6 villages, all on Ca¬ 
tawba r., within a stretch of 20 m., the 
most n. being named Nauvasa. Their 
principal village was formerly on the w. 
side of the river, in what is now York 
co., S. C., opposite the mouth of Sugar 
cr. The, known history of the tribe till 
about 1760 is chiefly a record of petty 
warfare between themselves and the Iro¬ 
quois and other northern tribes, through¬ 
out which the colonial government tried 
to induce the Indians to stop killing one 
another and go to killing the French. 
With the single exception of their alli¬ 
ance with the hostile Yamasi, in 1715, 
they were uniformly friendly toward the 
English, and afterward kept peace with 
the United States, but w;ere constantly at 
war with the Iroquois, Shawnee, Dela¬ 
wares, and other tribes of the Ohio valley, 
as well as with the Cherokee. The Iro¬ 
quois and the Lake tribes made long 
journeys into South Carolina, and the 
Catawba retaliated by sending small scalp¬ 
ing parties into Ohio and Pennsylvania. 
Their losses from ceaseless attacks of their 
enemies reduced their numbers steadily, 
while disease and debauchery introduced 
by the whites, especially several epi¬ 
demics of smallpox, accelerated their de¬ 
struction, so that before the close of the 
18th century the great nation was reduced 
to a pitiful remnant. They sent a large 
force to help the colonists in the Tusca- 
rora war of 1711-13, and also aided in 
expeditions against the French and their 
Indian allies at Ft Du Quesne and else¬ 
where during the French and Indian 
war. Later it was proposed to use them 
and the Cherokee against the Lake tribes 
under Pontiac in 1763. They assisted 
the Americans also during the Revolution 
in the defense of South Carolina against 
the British, as well as in Williamson’s 
expedition against the Cherbkee. In 
1738 smallpox raged in South Carolina 
and worked great destruction, not only 
among the whites, but also among the 
Catawba and smaller tribes. In 1759 it 
appeared again, and this time destroyed 
nearly half the tribe. At a conference at 
Albany, attended by delegates from the 
Six Nations and the Catawba, under the 
auspices of the colonial governments, a 
treaty of peace was made between these 
two tribes. This peace was probably final 
as regards the Iroquois, but the western 








BOLL. 30] 


CATAWBA 


215 


tribes continued their warfare against the 
Catawba, who were now so reduced that 
they could make little effectual resist¬ 
ance. In 1762 a small party of Shawnee 
killed the noted chief of the tribe, King 
Haiglar, near his own village. From this 
time the Catawba ceased to be of impor¬ 
tance except in conjunction with the 
whites. In 1763 they had confirmed to 
them a reservation, assigned a few years 
before, of 15 m. square, on both sides of 
Catawba r., within the present York and 
Lancaster cos., S. C. On the approach 
of the British troops in 1780 the Catawba 
withdrew temporarily into Virginia, but 
returned after the battle of Guilford 
Court House, and established themselves 
in 2 villages on the reservation, known 
respectively as Newton, the principal vil¬ 
lage, and Turkey Head, on opposite sides 
of Catawba r. In 1826 nearly the whole 
of their reservation was leased to whites 
for a few thousand dollars, on which the 
few survivors chiefly depended. About 
1841 they sold to the state all but a single 
square mile, on which they now reside. 
About the same time a number of the Ca¬ 
tawba, dissatisfied with their condition 
among the whites, removed to the eastern 
Cherokee in w. North Carolina, but find¬ 
ing their position among their old ene¬ 
mies equally unpleasant, all but one 
or two soon went back again. An old 
woman, the last survivor of this emigra¬ 
tion, died among the Cherokee in 1889. 
A few other Cherokee are now in¬ 
termarried with that tribe. At it later 
period some Catawba removed to the 
Choctaw Nation in Indian Ter. and 
settled near Scullyville, but are said 
to be now extinct. About 1884 several 
became converts of Mormon missionaries 
in South Carolina and went with them to 
Salt Lake City, Utah. 

The.Catawba were sedentary agricul¬ 
turists, and seem to have differed but 
little in general customs from their neigh¬ 
bors. Their men were respected, brave, 
and honest, but lacking in energy. They 
were good hunters, while their women 
were noted makers of pottery and baskets, 
arts which they still preserve. They 
seem to have practised the custom of 
head-flattening to a limited extent, as did 
several of the neighboring tribes. By 
reason of their dominant position they 
gradually absorbed the broken tribes of 
South Carolina, to the number, according 
to Adair, of perhaps 20. 

In the early settlement of South Caro¬ 
lina, about 1682, they were estimated at 
1,500warriors, orabout4,600souls; in 1728 
at400 warriors, oraboutl,400 persons. In 
1738 they suffered from smallpox; and in 
1743, after incorporating several small 
tribes, numbered less than 400 warriors. 
In 1759 they again suffered from small¬ 


pox, and in 1761 had some 300 warriors, 
orabout 1,000 people. The number was re¬ 
duced in 1775 to 400 souls; in 1780 it was 
490; and in 1784 only 250 were reported. 
The number given in 1822 is 450, and 
Mills gives the population in 1826 as 
only 110. In 1881 Gatschet found 85 on 
the reservation, which, including 35 em¬ 
ployed on neighboring farms, made a 
total of 120. The present number is given 
as 60, but as this apparently refers only 
to those attached to the reservation, the 
total may be about 100. 

See Lawson, History of Carolina, 1714 
and 1860; Gatschet, Creek Migration Le¬ 
gend, i-ii, 1884-88; Mooney (1) Siouan 
Tribes of the East, Bull. 22, B. A. E., 
1894, (2) in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900; H. 
Lewis Scaife, History and Condition of 
the Catawba Indians, 1896. (j. m.) 

Ani'ta'gua.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 509, 
1900 (Cherokee name, pi). Atakwa.—Mooney, 
Siouan Tribes, 67, 1894 (Cherokee form, sing.). 
Cadapouces.—P6nicaut (1708) in Margry, D£c., v, 
477, 1883. Calabaws.—Humphreys, Acct., 98, 1730 
(misprint). Calipoas.—Census of 1857 in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 686, 1857. Canapouces.— 
P6nicaut (1708) in Margry, D6c., v, 547, 1883. 
Catabans.—Rafinesque, int. Marshall, Ky., i, 24, 
1824. Catabas.—George Washington (1770) quoted 
by Kauffmann, West Penn., 396, 1851. Catabaw.— 
Doc. of 1738 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 137, 1855. 
Catabaws.—Niles (1760) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th 
s., v, 549, 1861. Catapaw.—Map of N. Am. and W. 
Ind., 1720. Catapaws.—Gov. Johnson quoted by 
Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car., 94, 1874. Catauba.— 
Filson, Hist, of Ky., 84, 1793. Cataubos.—War 
map, 1711-15, in Winsor, Hist. Am., v, 346, 1887. 
Cataupa.—Potter (1768) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., x, 120, 1809. Catawba.—Albany conf. (1717) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 490,1855. Catawbau.— 
Hist. Coll. So. Car., ii, 199,1836. Catawbaw.—Man- 
drillon, Spectateur AmDrieain, 1785. Cattabas.— 
Doc. of 1715 in N. C. Records, II, 252,1886. Catta- 
baws.—Albany conf. (1717) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
v, 490, 1855. Cattawbas.—Clarke (1741), ibid., vi, 
208, 1855. Cattoways.—Stobo (1754) in The Olden 
Time, i, 72, 1846 (incorrectly named as distinct 
from Catawbas). Cautawba.—Clinton (1751) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 716, 1855. Chatabas.— 
Buchhanan, N. Am. Inds., 155,1824. Contaubas.— 
Oglethorpe (1743) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 243, 
1855. Cotappos.—Doc. of 1776 in Hist. Mag., 2d s., 
II, 216,1867. Cotawpees.—Rogers, N.Am., 136,1765. 
Cotobers.—Doc. of 1728 in Va. St. Pap., I, 215, 
1875. Cuttambas.—German map of British colony, 
ca. 1750. Cuttawa.—Vaugondy, map Partie de 
l’Am. Sept., 1755. Cuttawas.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ill, 292, 1853. Ea-tau-bau.—Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch, 62, 1848 (misprint). Elaws.—Cra¬ 
ven (1712) in N. C. Records, i, 898, 1886 (misprint). 
Esau.—Martin, Hist. N. C., I, 194, 1829. Esaws.— 
Lawson (1714), Hist. Carolina, 73, 1860. Flat- 
heads.—Albany conf. (1715) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., v, 437, 1855. Issa.—Juan de la Vandera 
(1569) in French, Hist. Coll., II, 291, 1875. Kada- 
pau.—Lawson (1714), Hist. Carolina, 76, 1860. 
Kadapaw.—Mills, Stat. of S. C., 109, 1826. Kad- 
depaw.—Ibid.,770. Kaddipeaw.—Ibid., 638. Kat- 
abas.—Jour. (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
$43,1858. Katahba. —Adair, Hist. Am. Inds., 223, 
1775. Kataubans.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 25, 
1848. Kattarbe.—Ibid., 27. Kattaupa.—De l’Isle, 
map, in Winsor, Hist. Am., n, 295, 1886. Ker- 
shaws.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 344, 1853. 
Ojadagochroehne.—Albany conf. (1720) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., V, 567,1855. Oyadagahroenes.—Doc. 
of 1713, ibid., note, 386. Tadirighrones.—Albany 
conf. (1722), ibid., 660. Tagua.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 509, 1900 (Cherokee form, sing.; 
also Ata'qwd). Todenchroone.—Albany conf. 
(1717) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 491, 1855. Toti- 


216 


CATAWBA 


CATHLAMET 


[b. a. e. 


ris.—Chauvignerie (1736), ibid., ix, 1057, 1855. 
Usheree.—Byrd (1728), Hist, of Dividing Line, I, 
181,1866. Usherie.— Lederer (1670), Discov.,27,1672 
(from iswahere, ‘river down here’). TJsherys.— 
Ibid., 17. 

Catawba.—A grape, or the wine pro¬ 
duced from it, made famous by Long¬ 
fellow in one of his poems. This grape 
is a cultivated variety of the northern fox- 
grape ( Vitis labrusca) and is said to have 
been named by Maj. Adlum, in 1825, after 
the Catawba tribe and r. of North Caro¬ 
lina. (a. f. c. ) 

Catawissa.—Probably a Conoy village, as 
Conyngham (Day, Penn., 243, 1843) says 
the Conoy “had a wigwam on the Cata- 
wese at Catawese, now Catawissa,” in 
Columbia co., Pa. The name is probably 
derived from Piscatawese, a later desig¬ 
nation for the Conoy. 

Catawese. —Conyngham * op. cit. 

Catfish Lake. A Seminole settlement, 
with 28 inhabitants in 1880, on a small 
lake in Polk co., Fla., nearly midway 
between L. Pierce and L. Rosalie, toward 
the headwaters of Kissimmee r.—Mac- 
Cauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 478, 1887. 

Catfish Village. A former settlement, 
probably of the Delawares, on Catfish 
run, a short distance n. of the site of 
Washington, Washington co., Pa.; so 
called, according to Day (Penn., 666, 
1843), from a half-blood who settled there 
about the middle of the 18th century. 
See Rovce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. clx., 
1900. 

Catherine’s Town. A former Seneca 
village situated about the site of the 
present Catherine, N. Y., or, according 
to Conover, at Havana Glen. It took its 
name from Catherine Montour, a Cana¬ 
dian woman who was taken by the Iro¬ 
quois and afterward became the chief 
matron in her clan. It was destroyed by 
Sullivan in 1779. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Catharine Town.—Jones (1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., VIII, 785, 1857. Catherine Town.—Pember¬ 
ton ( ca . 1792) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., n, 
177, 1810. French Catharinestown.—Machin (1779) 
quoted by Conover, Kanesadagaand Geneva MS., 
B. A. E. French Catherines town.—Livermore 
(1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., VI, 325, 1850. 

Cathlacomatup. A Chinookan tribe re¬ 
siding in 1806, according to Lewis and 
Clark (Exped., ii, 226, 1814), on the s. 
side of Sauvies id., in the present Mult¬ 
nomah co., Oreg., on a slough of Willa¬ 
mette r. Their estimated number was 
170. 

Cathlacommatups.—Lewis and Clark, op. cit., 473. 
Cath-lah-com-mah-tup.—Lewis and Clark Exped., 
Coues ed., 931, note, 1893. 

Cathlacumup. A Chinookan tribe for¬ 
merly living on the w. bank of the lower 
mouth of AVillamette r., near the Co¬ 
lumbia, claiming as their territory the 
bank of the latter stream from this point 
to Deer id., Oreg. Lewis and Clark esti¬ 
mated their number at 450 in 1806. They 
are mentioned in 1850 by Lane as being 


associated with the Namoit and Katla- 
minimim. See Kasenos. (l. f. ) 

Cathlacumups. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 212, 
1814. Cathlahcumups. —Coues, Lewis and Clark 
Exped., 915, 1893. Cathlakamaps.— Drake, Bk. 
Inds., vi, 1848. Wacamuc.— Farrand, communica¬ 
tion (name of their chief village, used to designate 
the tribe). Wa-come-app. —Ross, Advent.,236,1849. 
Wakamass. —Framboise quoted by Gairdner in 
Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 255, 1841. Waka- 
mucks. —Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 161, 1850. Willa¬ 
mette tribe.— Coues, Henry and Thompson Jour., 
797,1897. « 

Cathlakaheckit. A Chinookan tribe liv¬ 
ing at the cascades of Columbia r. in 1812, 
when their number was estimated at 900. 
Cath-lak-a-heckits. —Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 
xn, 23, 1821. Cathlakahikits.— Morse, Rep. to 
Sec. War, 368,1822. Cathlayackty.— Coues, Jour. 
Henry and Thompson, 803,1897 (in 3 villages just 
above cascades; probably identical). 

Cathlamet. A Chinookan tribe formerly 
residing on the s. bank of Columbia r. 
near its mouth, in Oregon. They ad¬ 
joined the Clatsop and claimed the 



CATHLAMET WOMAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


territory front Tongue pt. to the neigh¬ 
borhood of Puget id. In 1806 Lewis and 
Clark estimated their number at 300. 
In 1849 Lane reported 58 still living, but 
they are now extinct. They seem to 
have had but one village, also known as 
Cathlamet. As a dialect, Cathlamet was 
spoken by a number of Chinookan tribes 
on both sides of the Columbia, extending 
up the river as far as Rainier. It is re¬ 
garded as belonging to the upper Chinook 
division of the family. See Boas, Kath- 
lamet 'Texts, Bull. 26, B. A. E., 1901. 

(l. f.) 

Catelamet. —Lane in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 
lstsess., 172, 1850. Cath Camettes. —Raymond in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 354, 1858. Cathelametts.— 
Minto in Oregon Hist. Soc. Quar., i, 311, 1900. 









HULL. 30 | 


CATHLANAHQUI AH-CATLINITE 


217 


Cathlamah.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, map; 
II, 473, 1814. Cathlamaks.— Domenech, Deserts 
N. Am., ii, 16, 1860. Cath-la-mas. —Gass, Jour., 
189,1807. Cathlamats. —Stuart in Nouv'. Ann. Voy., 
x, 23, 1821. Cathlamet.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Ex¬ 
ped., vi, 215, 1846. Cathlamuts. —Scouler in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Loud., I, 237,1848. Cathlamux.— Ross, 
Adventures, 87, 1849. Cathlawah. — Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., II, 109, 1817. Cathlumet. — Medill 
in H. R. Ex. Doe. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1848. 
Catlahmas.— Snelling, Tales of Travel, 78, 1830. 
Cuthlamuhs.— Robertson, Oregon, 129,1846. Cuth- 
lamuks.— Robertson in II. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 9, 1848. Guasamas. —Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E. (Clackama name). Guithlameth 1 . — 
Ibid. Kathlamet. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1 ,521, 
1853. Kat-hlamet. —Gibbs, Chinook vocab., 4,1863. 
Kathlamit. —Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1850. 
Kathlamut. —Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 317, 1850. 
Kathlemit. —Lane in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 
1st sess., 174,1850. Katlamak. —Framboise quoted 
by Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
255,1841. Katlamat. —Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., 
vi, 215,1846. Katlammets. —Townsend, Narr., 175, 
1839. Kwillu'chinl. —Gibbs, MS., B. A. E. (Chinook 
name). 

Cathlanahquiah (‘people of the r. Na- 
qoaix’). A Chinookan tribe living in 
1806, according to Lewis and Clark, on 
the s. w. side of Wappatoo, now Sauvies 
id., Multnomah co., Greg., and number¬ 
ing 400 souls. 

Cath-lah-nah-quiah.—Lewis and Clark Exped., 
Coues ed., 931, 1893. Cathlanahquiah.—Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., Ii, 226, 1814. Cathlanaquiah.— 
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. GaLa'naqoa-ix.—Boas, 
inf’n, 1904. Gatlanakoa-iq.—Lewis and Clark 
Exped., Coues ed., 931, note, 1893 (Cathlamet 
namel. Nekuai*.—Gatschet MS., B. A. E., 1877 
(Clackama name). 

Cathlapotle (‘peopleof Lewis [Na'pIoLX’] 

r. ’). A Chinookan tribe formerly living 
on the lower part of Lewis r. and on the 

s. e. side of Columbia r., in Clarke co., 

Wash. In 1806 Lewis and Clark esti¬ 
mated their number at 900 in 14 large 
wooden houses. Their main village was 
Nahpooitle. (l. f. ) 

Cath-lah-poh-tle.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 
214, 1905. Cathlapootle.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
368, 1822. Cathlapoutles.—Stuart in Nouv. Ann. 
Voy., x, 115,1821. Cathlapouttes.—Ibid.,29. Cat- 
lipoh.—Coues, Jour. Henry and Thompson, 821, 
1897. Catlipoks.—Ibid., 798. Cattleputles.—Ross, 
Advent., 87, 1849. Ga'LaploLx.—Boas, inf’n, 1904. 
Ga'tlap’otlh.—Lewis and Clark Exped., Coues 
ed., 914, note, 1893 (Cathlamet name). Guathla'- 
payak.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Clackama 
name). Kathlapootle.—Franch6re, Narr., Ill, 1854. 
Katlaportl.—Framboise quoted by Gairdner in 
Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 255, 1841. Nah-poo- 
itle.—Lyman in Oreg. Hist. Soc. Quar., I, 322,1900. 
Quathlahpohtle.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 
212, 1905. Quathlahpothle.—Kelly, Oreg., 68, 1830. 
Quathlahpotle.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, 469, 
1814. Quathlapohtle.— Oreg. Jour. Lewis and Clark, 
VI, 68, 1905. 

Cathlathlalas. A Chinookan tribe liv¬ 
ing on both sides of Columbia r., just be¬ 
low the cascades, in 1812. Their number 
was placed at 500. See Clahcldlah. 

Cath-lath-la-las.—Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., xil, 
23, 1821. Cathlathlaly.—Coues, Jour. Henry and 
Thompson, 801, 1897. Cathlathlas.—Morse, Rep. 
to Sec. War, 368, 1822. 

Catlinite (red pipestone). Smoking was 
a custom of great moment among the ab¬ 
origines of northern America, and much 
time and labor were expended in the 
manufacture and decoration of the tobacco 


pipe, which is often referred to as “the 
sacred calumet,” because of its important 
place in the ceremonial affairs of the 
people. A favorite material for these 
pipes was the red clavstone called catlin¬ 
ite, obtained from a quarry in s. w. Minne¬ 
sota, and so named because it was first 
brought to the attention of mineralogists 
by George Catlin, the noted traveler and 
painter of Indians. Stone of closely analo¬ 
gous characters, save in the matter of 
color, is found in many localities and has 
been used by the Indians for the manu¬ 
facture of pipes and other articles, but so 
far as known to us it has not been quar¬ 
ried to any considerable extent. Catlin¬ 
ite is a very handsome stone, the color 
varying from a pale grayish-red to a dark 
red, the tints being sometimes so broken 
and distributed as to give a mottled ef¬ 
fect. It is a tine-grained, argillaceous 
sedimeilt, and when freshly quarried is 
so soft as to be readily carved with stone 
knives and drilled with primitive hand 
drills. The analysis made by 13r Charles 
F. Jackson, of Boston, who gave the min¬ 
eral its name, is as follows: Silica, 48.20; 
alumina, 28.20; ferric oxide, 5; carbon¬ 
ate of lime, 2.60; manganous oxide, 0.60; 
magnesia, 6; water, 8.40; loss, 1. 

The deposit of catlinite occurs in a 
broad, shallow, prairie valley, on the mar¬ 
gin of which is situated the town of Pipe¬ 
stone, county seat of Pipestone co. The 
outcrop was probably discovered by the 
natives where it had been slightly ex¬ 
posed in the bed of the small stream now 
called Pipestone cr., which descends into 
the valley on the e. in a fall 18 ft. in 
height, and traverses the basin, passing 
out to the n. w. So far as exposed, the 
stratum of pipestone varies from 10 to 
20 in. in thickness, the band of pure, 
fine-grained stone available for the manu¬ 
facture of pipes rarely measuring more 
than 3 or 4 in. in thickness. This stra¬ 
tum is embedded between massive 
layers of compact quartzite which dip 
slightly to the eastward, so that in work¬ 
ing it the overlying quartzite had to be 
broken up and removed, the difficulty 
of this task increasing with every foot of 
advance. With the stone implements in 
use in early times the process was a very 
tedious one, and the excavations were 
consequently quite shallow. The ledge 
which crosses the stream approximately 
at right angles had been followed to the 
right and left by the quarry men until the 
line of pittings, rather conventionally 
shown in Catlin’s plate 151, was nearly a 
mile in length. These ancient diggings 
have been almost obliterated by the more 
recent operations, which since the advent 
of the whites have been greatly acceler¬ 
ated by the introduction of steel sledges, 
picks, shovels, and crowbars. It is said 


2 18 


CATLINITE 


[b. a. e. 



that with the aid of the whites blasting 
has been occasionally resorted to. Some 
of the present excavations are as much as 
10 ft. in depth, and have advanced 20 
ft. or more along the dip of the strata 
to the e. The usual section now ex¬ 
posed in the deeper excavations, begin¬ 
ning above, shows from 2 to 4 ft. of 
soil and from 5 to 8 ft. of quartzite rest¬ 
ing on the thin stratum of pipestone, 
beneath which, again forming the bed of 
the quarry, are compact quartzites, f Nu¬ 
merous hammers of hard stone, some 
roughly grooved to facilitate hafting, 
have been found about the older pits, and 
the prairie in the vicinity is dotted with 
camp sites and tent rings about which are 
strewn bits of pipestone and other refuse 
of manufacture (see Mines and Quarries). 

There is a general impression among 
those who have 
written on the 
subject that the 
discovery and 
use of the red 
pipestone by the 
tribes is of com¬ 
paratively recent 
date, and this is 
no doubt correct; 
but it is equally 
certain that it 
was in use before 
the arrival of the 
whites in the N. 

W. This is made 
clear not only by 
history and tra¬ 
dition but by 
the appearance 
of the ancient 
quarry excava¬ 
tions, and espe¬ 
cially by the- oc¬ 
currence of pipes 
and other objects INDIAN quarryman of to-day. the 
made of it by base of the wall. 

aboriginal methods in mounds in various 
sections of the country. (See Pipes.) 
This quarry is usually referred to as the 
sacred pipestone quarry. According to 
statements by Catlin and others, the site 
was held in much superstitious regard by 
the aborigines. Traditions of very gen¬ 
eral distribution lead to the belief that it 
was, in the words of Catlin, “held and 
owned in common, and as neutral ground 
amongst the different tribes who met here 
to renew their pipes, under some super¬ 
stition which stayed the tomahawk of 
natural foes always raised in deadly hate 
and vengeance in other places ”7 N. Am. } 
Indians, n, 201, 1844). Nicollet states 
(1838) that Indians of the surrounding 
nations made an annual pilgrimage to the 
quarry unless prevented by wars or dis¬ 
sensions. Since the earliest visits of the 


white man to the Coteau des Prairies, 
however, the site has been occupied ex¬ 
clusively by the Sioux,'and Catlin met 
with strong opposition n-om them when 
he attempted to visit the quarry about 
1837. 1 ' 

The following facts regarding the his¬ 
toric occupancy and ownership of the 
Pipestone quarry are extracted from a 
statement furnished by Mr Charles H. 
Bennett, of Pipestone: On Apr. 30,1803, 
the region was acquired by the United 
States through the Louisiana purchase. 
On July 23, 1851, the lands, including 
the quarry, were relinquished to the 
United States by the Sisseton and Wah- 
peton Sioux, and on August 5 they were 
relinquished by the Mdewakanton and 
Wahpekute Sioux, and 64 chiefs and 
head warriors who had also a claim. A 
treaty with the 
Yankton Sioux, 
ratified Apr. 19, 
1858, specifies 
that ‘ ‘ the said 
Y ancton Indians 
shall be secured 
in the free and 
unrestricted use 
of the red pipe¬ 
stone quarry, or 
so much thereof 
as they have 
been accustomed 
to frequent and 
use for the pur¬ 
pose of procuring 
stone for pipes;. 
and the United 
States hereby 
stipulate and 
agree to be 
caused to be 
surveyed and 
marked so much 
pipestone ledge appears at the thereof as shall 
(bennett, coll.) be necessary and 

proper for that purpose, and retain the 
same and keep it open and free to the In¬ 
dians to visit and procure stone for pipes, 
so long as they shall desire.’** Tin 1859, 1 
sq. m., including the quarry, was surveyed 
as a reservation, and in 1892 Congress ap¬ 
propriated $25,000 for the establishment 
of an industrial school, which is now 
(1905) being successfully conducted, with 
several stone buildings and some 200 
pupils. It is situated on the highland 
overlooking the pipestone quarries on the 
e. The Sioux have no other legal claim 
upon the quarry site than that of quarry¬ 
ing the pipestone, a privilege of which 
they yearly take advantage to a limited 
extent. The Yankton Sioux, sometimes 
accompanied by their friends, the Flan- 
dreau Sioux, continue to visit the quarry 
and dig pipestone, coming usually in 






BULL. 30] 


CATOKING-CAUCUS 


219 


June or July. They establish their tents 
on the reservation near the excavations, 
and stay from 1 to 2 weeks, procur¬ 
ing the pipestone which they manufac¬ 
ture into pipes and trinkets of great 
variety. 

The Indians sell much of the stone 
to the whites, who have taken up the 
manufacture of pipes and various trin¬ 
kets, using lathes to aid in the work, 
and in a letter written by Mr Bennett in 
1892 it is stated that not 1 percent of 
the pipes then made and disposed of were 
of Indian manufacture. White traders 
began the manufacture of pipes from the 
pipestone many years ago, and according 
to Hayden these were used by the fur 
companies in trade with the Indians of 
the N. W. At a meeting of the Ameri¬ 
can Philosophical Society in 1866 Hay¬ 
den stated that in the two years just 
passed the Northwestern Fur Company 
had manufactured nearly 2,000 pipes and 
traded them with the tribes of the upper 
Missouri. An important feature of the 
quarry site is a group of large granite 
bowlders, brought from the far N. by 
glacial ice, about the base of which, en¬ 
graved on the glaciated floor of red quartz¬ 
ite, were formerly a number of petro- 
glyphs no doubt representing mytholog¬ 
ical beings associated with the locality. 
These have been taken up and are now in 
possession of Mr Bennett. Additional 
interest attaches to the locality on account 
of an inscription left by the Nicollet ex¬ 
ploring party in 1838. The name of Nicol¬ 
let and the initials of 5 other persons, in¬ 
cluding those of John C. Fremont [C. F. 
only], are cut in the flinty quartzite rock 
face near the “leaping rock” at the falls. 
According to a letter written to Mr Ben¬ 
nett by Gen. Fremont several years ago, 
he at that time named the two small lakes 
adjoining the quarry, one after his wife, 
the other after his son. 

The following publications will afford 
additional details: Barber in Am. Nat., 
xvii, 1883; Carver, Trav. Through N. 
Am., 1778; Catlin (1) in Am. Jour. Sci. 
and Arts, lsts., xxxvm, 1840, (2) No. Am. 
Inds., ii, 1844; Donaldson in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1885, 1886; Hayden (1) in Am. 
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d s., xliii, 1867, (2) 
in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., x, 1865-68; 
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; 
Holmes in Proc. A. A. A. S., xli, 1892; 
Nicollet in Sen. Doc. 237, 26th Cong., 
2d sess., 1841; Norris, Calumet of the Co- 
teau, 1883; Rau in Rep. Smithson. Inst. 
1872, 1873; White in Am. Nat., n, 1868; 
Winchell in Geol. Surv. Minn., i, 1884. 

(w. H. H.) 

Catoking. A village, probably belong¬ 
ing to the Chowanoc, situated about 
Gatesville, Gates co., N. C., in 1585.— 
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 


Catouinayos. An unidentified village or 
tribe mentioned to Joutel in 1687 (Mar- 
gry, Dec., hi, 409, 1878), while he was 
staying with the Kadohadacho on Red r. 
of Louisiana, by the chief of that tribe as 
being among his enemies. 

Catroo. Mentioned in 1598 as a pueblo 
of the Jemez (q.v.) Not identified with 
the present native name of any of the 
ruined pueblos in the vicinity of Jemez. 
Caatri.—Onate (1598) in Doc. Indd.,‘xvi, 102,1871. 
Catroo.—Ibid., 114. 

Catskill. A division of the Munsee 
formerly living on Catskill cr., w. of the 
Hudson, in Greene co., N. Y. They 
were one of the Esopus tribes, and were 
known to the French as Mahingans (or 
Loups) of Taracton, but this name may 
have included other bands in that region. 
The name Catskill is Dutch, and was first 
applied to the stream as descriptive of the 
totem of the band, which was really the 
wolf. 

Catkils.—Salisbury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. 
xiii, 524, 1881. Catskil.—Document of 1659(?), 
ibid., 119. Catskills.—Smith (1660), ibid., 161. 
Cattskill.—Cregier (1663), ibid., 325. Katskil.— 
Lease of 1650, ibid., 26. Katskill.—Schuyler (1691), 
ibid., ill, 801, 1853. Taracton.—Frontenac (1674), 
ibid., IX, 117, 1855. Taractou.—Ibid., 793. Tarak- 
tons.—Bruyas (1678), ibid., xm, 523, 1881. Tar- 
raktons. —Brockholst (1678), ibid., 527. 

Cattachiptico. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy on Pamunkey r., in King 
William co., Va., in 1608.—Smith (1629), 
Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Cattahecassa. See Catahecassa. 

Cattaraugus ( Go?-da-gaPs'-geo^, 1, where 
oozed mud roils.’—Hewitt). A Seneca 
settlement on a branch of Cattaraugus cr., 
Cattaraugus co., N. Y. In 1903 there 
were 1,272 Seneca and 182 Cayuga and 
Onondaga on the reserve, which contains 
21,680 acres, 14,800 of which are under 
cultivation. 

Cataraugos.—Genesee treaty (1797) in Hall, N. W. 
States, 74, 1849. Cattaragus.— Procter (1791) in 
Am. St. Pap., IV, 155,1832. Cattaraugus.—Buffalo 
Creek treaty (1802) in Hall,N. W. States, 76,1849. 
Catteranga.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 535, 
1878. Ga’-da-gans'-geon’.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 
(Seneca form). Gada'gesgao.—Morgan, League 
Iroq., 466, 1851. Ka-‘ta-ra'-kra?. —Hewitt, inrn, 
1886 (Tuscarora form). 

Caucus. This word, defined by Bart¬ 
lett (Diet, of Americanisms, 106, 1877) as 
“a private meeting of the leading politi¬ 
cians of a party, to agree upon the plans 
to be pursued in an approaching elec¬ 
tion,” and by Norton (Polit. American¬ 
isms, 28, 1890) as “ameeting of partisans, 
congressional or otherwise, to decide upon 
the action to be taken by the party,” has 
now a legal signification. In Massachu¬ 
setts it is defined as ‘ * any public meeting 
of the voters of a ward of a city, or of a 
town, or of a representative district, held 
for the nomination of a candidate for elec¬ 
tion, for the election of a political commit¬ 
tee, or of delegates to a political conven¬ 
tion.” The origin of the word is not clear. 
Trumbull (Trans. Am. Philol. Assoc., 


220 


CAUGHNAWAGA 


Lb. a. e. 


30,1872) suggested a derivation from caw- 
cawaassough, a word in the Virginian dia¬ 
lect of Algonquian, perhaps identical with 
cockarouse. it signifies ‘ one who advises, 
urges, encourages, pushes on.’ Related 
words in other Algonquian dialects are the 
Abnaki kakesoman, ‘ to encourage, incite, 
arouse, speak to,’ and the Ohippew r a 
gagansoma. From caucus , which is used 
both as a noun and a verb, are derived 
caucuser, caucusing , etc. (a. f. c.) 

Caughnawaga ( Gci-hnci-w& ,/ -ge , ‘ at the 
rapids ’). An Iroquois settlement on the 
Sault St Louis on St Lawrence r., Quebec. 
When the hostility of the pagan Iroquois 
to the missions established in their terri¬ 
tory frustrated the object of the French 
to attach the former to their interests, the 
Jesuits determined to draw their converts 
from the confederacy and to establish 
them in a new mission village near the 
French settlements on the St Lawrence, 
in accordance with which plan these 
Indians were finally induced to settle at 
La Prairie, near Montreal, in 1668. These 
converts were usually called “French 
Praying Indians” or “ French Mohawks” 
by the English settlers, in contradistinc¬ 
tion to the Iroquois who adhered to their 
own customs and to the English interests. 
In 1676 they were removed from this place 
to Sault St Louis, whereCaughnawaga and 
the Jesuit mission of St Frangois du Sault 
were founded. The village has been re¬ 
moved several times within a limited 
area. The majority of the emigrants 
came from the Oneida and Mohawk, and 
the Mohawk tongue, somewhat modified, 
became the speech of the whole body of 
this village. The Iroquois made several 
unsuccessful efforts to induce the converts 
to return to the confederacy, and finally 
renounced them in 1684, from which time 
Caughnawaga became an important aux¬ 
iliary of the French in their wars with 
the English and the Iroquois. After the 
peace of Paris, in 1763, many of them left 
their village on the Sault St Louis and 
took up their residence in the valley of 
Ohio r., principally about Sandusky and 
Scioto rs., where they numbered 200 at 
the outbreak of the American Revolution. 
From their contact with the wilder tribes 
of that region many of them relapsed into 
paganism, although they still retained 
their French allegiance and maintained 
connection with their brethren on the St 
Lawrence. About 1755 a colony from 
Caughnawaga formed a new settlement at 
St Regis, some distance farther up the St 
Lawrence. As the fur traders pushed 
their way westward from the great lakes 
they were accompanied by Caughnawaga 
hunters. As early as 1820 a considerable 
number of this tribe was incorporated 
with the Salish, while others found their 


way about the same period down to 
the mouth of Columbia r. in Oregon, and 
n. even as far as Peace r. in Athabasca. 
In the W. they are commonly knowm as 
Iroquois. Some of the Indians from St 
Regis also undertook these distant wan¬ 
derings. In 1884 Caughnawaga had a 
population of 1,485, while St Regis (in 
Canada and New r York) had about 2,075, 
and there were besides a considerable 
number from the 2 towrns who were scat¬ 
tered throughout the W. In 1902 there 
were 2,017 on the Caughnawaga res. and 
1,386 at St Regis, besides 1,208 on the St 
Regis reserve, N. Y. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Cagnawage. —Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IV, 120, 1854. Cagnawagees.— Johnson (1750), ibid., 
vi, 592,1855. Cagnawauga.— Hawley (1794) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., IV, 51, 1795. Cagnawaugen. — 
Stevens (1749) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 204,1837. 
Cagnawaugon. —Stevens (1749), ibid., 200. Cagne- 
wage.— Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 
120, 1854. Cagnowages. —Schuyler (1724) quoted 
in Hist. Mag., 1st s., x, 115, 1866. Cagnuagas. — 
Oneida letter (1776) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., viii, 
689,1857. Cahgnawaga. — N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 
104, 1832. Cahnawaas. —Colden (1727), Five Nat., 
55, 1747. Cahnawaga. —Hoyt, Ant. Res., 194, 1824. 
Cahnuaga. —Barton, New Views, xl, 1798. Cakna- 
wage.— Lydius (1750) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 
569, 1855. Canawahrunas.— French trader (1764) 
quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 553,1853. 
Caughnawaga. —Johnson Hallconf. (1763) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 553, 1856. Caughnawageys. — 
Doc. of 1763, ibid., 544. Caughnawanga, —Lloyd 
in Jour. Anthrop. Inst. G. B., IV, 44,1875. Caugh- 
newaga. —Schuyler (1689) quoted by Drake, Bk. 
Inds., I, 32, 1848. Caughnewago. —Smith (1799) 
quoted by Drake, Trag. Wild., 186, 1841. Cay- 
nawagas.— Knox (1792) in Am. St. Pap., iv, 235, 
1832. Cochenawagoes. —Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 509, 1878. Cochnawagah. —Stoddert (1750) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 582, 1855. Cochne- 
wagos.— Bouquet (1764) quoted by Kauffman, 
W. Penn., app., 156, 1851. Cochnewakee. — Bar¬ 
ton, New Views, 8, app., 1798. Cochnowagoes. — 
Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 319, 1816. Cocknawa- 
gas.— Lindesay (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 
538, 1855. Cocknawagees. —Johnson (1749), ibid., 
525. Cocknewagos. —Clarke (1741), ibid., 207. 
Coehnawaghas. —Doc. of 1747, ibid., 620. Coghnawa- 
gees.— Johnson (1747), ibid.,359. Coghnawages.— 
Johnson (1755), ibid., 940. Coghnawagoes.— 
Johnson (1747), ibid., 362. Coghnawayees. —John¬ 
son (1747), ibid., 359. Coghnewagoes. —Croghan 
(1765) quoted in Am. Jour. Geol., 272,1831. Cog- 
nahwaghah.— Doc. of 1798 in Williams, Vt., n, 283, 
1809. Cognawagees.— Johnson (1747) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VI, 359,1855. Cognawago. —Peters (1760) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., IX, 270,1871. Cohna- 
waga. —Washington (1796) in Am. St. Pap., IV, 585, 
1832. Cohnawagey.— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vil, 542, 1856. Cohnawahgans. —Car¬ 
ver, Trav., 173,1778. Cohnewago. —Eastburn (1758) 
quoted by Drake, Trag. Wild., 272, 1841. Cohune- 
wagus.— Imlay, W. Ter., 291, 1797. Cohunnaw- 
goes.— Macauley, N. Y., II, 187, 1829. Cohunne- 
gagoes.— Thompson quoted by Jefferson, Notes, 
282, 1825. Cohunnewagoes. —Bouquet (1764) 

quoted, ibid., 141. Conawaghrunas. —French 
trader quoted by Smith, Bouquet’s Exped., 69, 
1766. Conaway Crunas. —Buchanan,N. Am. Inds., 
156, 1824. Conwahago. —Mercer (1759) quoted by 
Kauffman, W. Penn., 129, 1851. Coughnawagas. — 
Goldthwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., 
x, 121, 1809. Cunniwagoes. —Croghan (1757) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vil, 285, 1856. French Mo¬ 
hawks.— Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., I, 57, 1824. Iroquois du Sault.—Bacqueville 
de la Potherie, in, 67,1753. Iroquois of the Sault. — 
La Barre (1684) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
241, 1855. Jernaistes.— Doc. of 1694, ibid, iv, 92, 
1854. Kachanuage. —Schuyler (1700), ibid., 747. 


bull. 30] CAUGHNAWAGA-CAVES AND ROCK SHELTERS 


221 


Kachanuge.—Livingston (1700), ibid., 695. Kach- 
nauage. — Schuyler (1700), ibid., 747. Kach- 
nuage. — Livingston (1700), ibid., 696. Kagna- 
wage.—Freerman (1704), ibid., 1163. Ka’hnra- 
wage lunuak.—Gatschet, Penobscot MS., B. A. 
E., 1887 (Penobscot name). Kahnuages.—Doug¬ 
lass, Sunim., I, 186, 1755. Kanatakwenke.—Cuoq, 
Lex., 163,1882. Kanawarka.—King, Arct. Ocean, i, 
9,1836. Kannaogau.—Bleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., iv, 920, 1854. Kannawagogh.—Mercer 
(1759) quoted by Kauffman, W. Penn., 129, 1851. 
Kanunge-ono.—Gatschet, Seneca MS., B. A. E., 
1882 (Seneca name). Kaughnawaugas.—Picker¬ 
ing (1794) in Am. St. Pap., iv, 546,1832. Konuaga.— 
Golden (1724) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 732,1855. 
Osault St Louis,—Stoddert (1750), ibid., vi, 582, 
1855 (for au SaultSt Louis, ‘at St Louis fall’). St 
Franpois Xavier du Sault.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 304, 
1855. Saint Peter's.—Ibid., 270. Sault Indians.— 
Doc.of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix,629, 1855. 
Saut Indians.—Doc. of 1698, ibid., 686. 

Caughnawaga. The ancient capital of 
the Mohawk tribe, situated in 1667 on 
Mohawk r., near the present site of 
Auriesville, N. Y. The Jesuits main¬ 
tained there for a time the mission of St 
Pierre. The town w T as destroyed by the 
French in 1693. 

Asserue. —Megapolensis (1644) quoted by Park- 
man, Jes., 222, note, 1883. Cachanuage.— Liv¬ 
ingston (1691) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., hi, 782,1853. 
Cachenuage. —Hansen (1700), ibid., iv, 803, 1854. 
Cachnawage. —Doc. of 1709, ibid., v, 85, 1855. 
Cachnewagas.— Bouquet (1764) quoted by Kauff¬ 
man, W. Penn., 165,1851. Cachnewago.— Bouquet, 
ibid. Cachnuagas. —Pownall (1754) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VI, 896, 1855. Cacknawages. — Clinton 
(1745),ibid.,276. Cacnawagees. —Fox (1756),ibid., 
VII, 77, 1856. Caghnawagah.— Butler (1750), ibid., 
VI, 591, 1855. Caghnawagos. —Croghan (1756) 
quoted by Kauffman, W. Penn, 116, 1851. Cagh- 
nenewaga.— Morse quoted by Barton, New Views, 
app., 8, 1798. Caghnewagos.— Thompson quoted 
by Jefferson, Notes, 282, 1825. Caghnuage. — 

Bleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 895,1854. 
Cagnawaga. —De Lancey (1754), ibid., VI, 909,1855. 
Canoomakers. —Dutch map (1616), ibid., I, 1856 
(ra = w). Ga-‘hna-wa’'-ge. —Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 
(Mohawk form). Gandaoiiague. —Jes. Rel. for 
1670, 23, 1858. Gandaouaque.— Bacqueville de la 
Potherie, Hist, de l’Am. S6pt., I, 353, 1753. 
Gandaougue. —Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 97, 
1872. Gandawague.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 216, 1855. 
Ganeganaga. —Morgan (1851) quoted by Parkman, 
Jesuits, 222, note, 1883. Gannaouague. —De l’lsle 
(1718) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Ill, 250, 1853. 
Ga-no-wau-ga. —Morgan, League Iroq., 419, 1855. 
Kaghenewage. —Conf. of 1674 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., II, 712, 1858. Kaghnawage.— Burnet (1726), 
ibid., v, 813, 1855. Kaghnewage. —Ruttenber 

Tribes Hudson R., 283, 1872 (Dutch form). 
Kaghnuwage. — N. Y\ Doc. Col. Hist., Ill, 250,1853. 
Lower Mohawk castle. —Ruttenber, Tribes Hud¬ 
son R., 97, 1872. Onengioure.— Ruttenber, Tribes 
Hudson R., 283, 1872. 0neugi8re.— Jes. Rel. for 
1646, 15, 1858. Onewyiure. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 215, 
1855. Ossernenon.— Jogues (1643) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., xin, 580, 1881 (misprint). Osserrion. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1646, 15, 1858. Osseruenon.— Park- 
man, Jesuits, 222, note, 1883. 

Causae. A former rancheria of the 
Sobaipuri, on the Rio San Pedro, s. Ariz., 
visited by Father Kino about 1697.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 279, 1856. 

Cavate dwellings. See Cliff-dwellings. 

Caves ant 1 Rock shelters. The native 
tribes n. of Mexico have been cave- 
dwellers to a less extent, apparently, than 
were the primitive peoples of Europe, 
and there is no period in American pre¬ 
history which can be referred to as a 
“Cave period.” Vast areas of limestone 


rocks of varying age occur in the middle 
e. sections of the United States, in which 
there are countless caves, the great 
caverns of Virginia, Kentucky, Indiana, 
and Missouri being well-known examples; 
and caves also occur in many parts of the 
far W., especially in Arizona and Cali¬ 
fornia. It is observed that in general 
these caverns have existed for a long 
period, extending back well beyond the 
time when man is assumed to have ap¬ 
peared on the continent. Few of the 
caverns have been explored, save in a 
most superficial manner, and as a rule 
where serious work has been undertaken 
the finds have been such as to discourage 
investigation by archeologists—not that 
meager traces of man are encountered, 
but because the osseous remains and 
works of art found represent the Indian 
tribes merely. The substrata of the cav¬ 
ern floors, which would naturally con¬ 
tain traces of very early occupants, are 
apparently barren of human remains, a 
condition that is difficult to understand 
if, as some suppose, the continent was 
occupied by man throughout all post- 
Tertiary time. Human remains occur 
along with the fossil fauna of the present 
period, but are not with certainty asso¬ 
ciated as original deposits with the older 
forms. Very considerable age is indi¬ 
cated, however, by the condition of the 
human bones, some of which, found in 
California caves, seem to be completely 
fossilized, the animal matter having dis¬ 
appeared, while in Arkansas and else¬ 
where the bones are deeply embedded in 
deposits of stalagmite. The length of 
time required for fossilization is not well 
known, however, and calcareous accu¬ 
mulations may be slow or rapid, so that 
these phenomena have no very definite 
value in determining age. 

The American caves were occupied by 
the aborigines for a number of purposes, 
including bur¬ 
ial, ceremony, 
and refuge. In 
a few cases 
chert, outcrop- 
p i n g in the 
walls, was 
quarried for 
the manufac¬ 
ture of imple¬ 
ments. Gener- SECT,0N OF CAVERN 

ally only the outer and more accessible 
chambers of deep caverns were occupied 
as dwelling places, and in these evidence 
of occupancy is often abundant. The 
floors are covered with deposits of ashes, 
in which are embedded various imple¬ 
ments and utensils and the refuse of feast¬ 
ing, very much as with ordinary dwelling 
sites. The deeper chambers were some¬ 
times used as temporary retreats in time 















222 


CAWASUMSEUCK-CAYOOSH CREEK 


[B. a. e. 


of danger and for the performance of re¬ 
ligious rites. In numerous cases deposits 
of sacrificial offerings are found, and the 
walls are covered with symbolic or other 
paintings or engravings. The Zuni em¬ 
ploy caverns as shrines and as depositories 
for images of their gods and the painted 
bones of animals, and caves have an impor¬ 
tant place in the genesis myths of many 
tribes. Burial in caves was common, and 
chambers of various depths from the sur¬ 
face were used. Pits and crevices in the 
rocks were also repositories for the dead. 

Far better adapted to man’s use as 
dwellings than the deep caves are the 
rock recesses or shelters which owe their 
origin not to the action of underground 
waters, but to undercutting by the 
waters of the sea or lakes and ordinary 
streams or to disintegration of portions of 
steep rock faces aided by wind action. 
These recesses often have somewhat level 
floors and arched 
roofs, formed by 
hard layers of 
rock, which ex¬ 
pand toward the 
front, thus form¬ 
ing roomy and 
well-lighted 
dwelling places. 

They are no¬ 
where so numer¬ 
ous as in the plateau region of the Colo¬ 
rado and Rio Grande valleys, where the 
well-exposed rock faces in a multitude of 
cases are deeply undercut by the gnaw¬ 
ing agencies of disintegration aided by 
the winds. In this region man was not 
content with the natural shelters so 
abundantly furnished, but the recesses 
were enlarged, and in places where the 
rock was massive and easily worked great 
numbers of chambers were excavated 
for dwellings. See Archeology , Antiquity , 
Cliff-dwellings. 

Consult Andrews in 11th Rep. Pea¬ 
body Mus., 1878; Dali (1) in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 1877, (2) in Smithson. Cont., 
xxii, 1878; Haywood, Nat. and Aborig. 
Hist. Tenn., 1823; Holmes in Am. An- 
throp., in, no. 3, 1890; Jones in Smith- 
son. Cont., xxii, 1876; Mercer (1) in 
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., xi, pt 2, 
1896; (2) in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxxiv, no. 149, 1895; (3) in Pubs. Univ. 
Pa., vi, 1897; Mitchell in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., i, 1820; Palmer in 11th Rep. 
Peabody Mus., 1878; Peabody, in Am. 
Anthrop., vn, no. 3, 1905; Peabody and 
Moorehead, Bull. 1, Dept. Archseol., 
Phillips Acad., 1904; Putnam in Peabody 
Mus. Reps.; Sinclair in Univ. Cal. Publ., 
Am. Archseol. and Ethnol., n, no. 1, 
1904; Stevenson in 23d Rep. B. A. E., 
1905; Yarrow in 1st Rep. B. A, E., 1881. 

(w. H. H.) 


Cawasumseuck. Given by Williams in 
1643 as the name by which some tribe, 
settlement, or band of New England In¬ 
dians called themselves (Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., hi, 205, 1794). To what 
Indians he refers is unknown, but it is 
possibly to some then living on Cawsum- 
sett Neck, near Pawtucket r., R. I. 

Cawruuoc. A village in 1585, perhaps 
belonging to the Neusiok, and seemingly 
situated on the n. side of Neuse r., in the 
present Craven co., N. C. 

Cawruuoc.—Smith (1629), Va., r, map, repr. 1819. 
Cwarenuock.—Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., I, 1856. 

Cawwontoll.—A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, on the n. bank of 
the Rappahannock, in Richmond co., 
Va.—Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 
1819. 

Cayahasomi. The Partridge clan of the 
Acheha phratry of the ancient Timucua 
tribe of Florida. — Pareja ( ca . 1612) 
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., xvn, 492, 1878. 

Cayahoga ( Kayaha’ge\ ‘the fork of the 
stream.’—-Hewitt). A village, perhaps 
belonging to the Wyandot, formerly sit¬ 
uated on the n. e. side of Cuyahoga r., 
near Akron, Ohio. 

Cajocka.— Stoddart (1753) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
vi, 779,1855. Cajuhaga.—Clinton (1750), ibid., 548. 
Caniahaga. —Albany conf. (1751), ibid., 720. Caua- 
hogue.—Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Caya- 
hagah.—Lindesay (1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VI, 706, 1855. Cayahoga.—Hutchins, map (1764) 
in Smith, Boquet Exped., 1766. Cwahago.— 
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Gwahago.— 
Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Kay'a'ha'ge*.—Hewitt, 
inf’n, 1903. Kichaga.—Doc. of 1747 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vi, 391, 1855. Kyahagah.—Lindesav 
(1751), ibid., 706. 

Cayas. A tribe visited by the De Soto 
expedition in 1542, apparently in w. Ar¬ 
kansas. Schoolcraft’s identification of 
the name with Kansa is of very doubtful 
value. 

Cayas.— Ranjel (1543) in Smith, Col. Doc. Fla., 
I, 60, 1857. Cayase.—Ranjel (1543) quoted by 
Bourne, Narr. De Soto, ii, 147, 1904. 

Cayeguas. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage on the Cayeguas ranch, Ventura co., 
Cal. 

Cayeguas.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. 
Cayuguis.—Ibid., May 4, 1860 (located at Punta 
Alamo). Ka-yo'-woc.—Henshaw, Buenaventura 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (c=sh). 

Caymus. A former Yukian Wappo 
village on the site of the present Yount- 
ville, in Napa valley, Cal. (s. a. b. ) 

Caymas.—Bartlett, Pers. Narr., II, 20-21, 1854. 
Caymus.—Revere, Tour of Duty, 91-93,1849. 

Cayomulgi. An ancient Upper Creek 
town on a stream which joins Coosa r. at 
Coussa (Kusa) town, Ala. Possibly for 
Okmulgee, an ancient Creek town in e. 
Georgia. 

Cayomugi.—Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799. Cayo¬ 
mulgi.—Philippeaux, map of Engl. Col., 1781. 

Cayoosh Creek. A local name for two 
bodies of Upper Lillooet Indians of Sali- 
shan stock near the junction of Bridge 
and Fraser rs., Brit. Col. Population of 














BULL. 30] 


CAYOVEA-CAYUGA 


223 


one of the bodies in 1902, 34; of the 
other, also called Pashilqua, 15.—Can. 
Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. n, 72. 

Cayoush.—Survey map, Hydr. Office, U. S. N., 
1882. Kayuse Creek.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 74. 
Pashilquia.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1891, 251. Pashil¬ 
qua.—Ibid., 1884, 190. 

Cayovea. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fontaneda 
Memoir ( ca. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854. 

Cayuga (Kw&iio'gwe n \ ‘ the place where 
locusts were taken out.’—Hewitt). A 
tribe of the Iroquois confederation, for¬ 
merly occupying the shores of Cayuga 
lake, N. Y. Its local council was com¬ 
posed of 4 clan phratries, and this form 
became the pattern, tradition says, of 
that of the confederation of the Five 



CAYUGA. (HOJIAGEDE, FISH-CARRIEr) 


Nations of the Iroquois, in which the 
Cayuga had 10 delegates. In 1660 they 
were estimated to number 1,500, and in 
1778, 1,100. At the beginning of the 
American Revolution a large part of the 
tribe removed to Canada and never re¬ 
turned, while the rest were scattered 
among theother tribes of the confederacy. 
Soon after the Revolution these latter 
sold their lands in New York; some went 
to Ohio, where they joined other Iro¬ 
quois and became known as the Seneca 
of the Sandusky. These are now in In¬ 
dian Ter.; others are with the Oneida in 
Wisconsin; 175 are with the Iroquois still 
in New York, while the majority, num¬ 
bering 700 or 800, are on the Grand River 


res., Ontario. In 1670 they had three 
villages—Goiogouen, Kiohero, and On- 
nontare. Gayagaanha was their chief 
village in modern times. Their other 
villages of the modern period according 
to Morgan, were Ganogeh, Gewauga, and 
Neodakheat. Others were Chonodote, 
Gandaseteiagon, Kawauka, Kente, Nu- 
quiage, Ondachoe, Owego, Onugareclury, 
St Joseph, Sannio, Skannayutenate, and 
Swahyawanah. Their clans were those 
common to the Iroquois, (j.m. j.n.b.h.) 
Caeujes.— Andros (1690) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 
722, 1853. Cahugas. —Marshe (1744) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., VII, 189, 1801. Caijougas. —Ft 
Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 
55, 1856. Caijouges.— Wessels (1693), ibid., iv, 60, 
1854. Caiouga. —Greenhalgh (1677) quoted by 
Conover, Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
Caiougues.— Livingston (1698) in N.Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IV, 342,1854. Caiougos. —Greenhalgh (1677), 
ibid., in, 251,1853. Caiuges. — Andros (1690) in R. I. 
Col. Ree., in, 281, 1858. Caiyougas. —Ft Johnson 
conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vu, 67, 
1856. Cajoegers. —Dellius (1697), ibid., IV, 279, 
1854. Cajougas. —Wessels (1698), ibid., 372. Ca- 
jouges.— Maryland treaty (1682), ibid., in, 323, 

1853. Cajugas. —Weiser (1748) quoted by Kauff¬ 
man, W. Penn., app., 22, 1851. Cajuger.— Schuy¬ 
ler (1699) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 563, 

1854. Cajuges. —Ibid. Cajugu. —Barton, New 
Views, app., 7, 1798. Cajukas. —Weiser (1748) 
quoted by Kauffman, W. Penn., app., 22, 1851. 
Cajyougas.— Johnson Hall conf. (1765) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., Vli, 724, 1856. Cajyugas. —Ibid., 
719. Caujuckos.— Weiser (1736) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 339, 1854. Cayagas. — 
Crepv, map, ca. 1755. Cayagoes. —Bellomont 
(1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 370, 1854. 
Cayauga. —Ft Johnson conf. (1756), ibid., vn, 
186, 1856. Cayauge.— Livingston (1700), ibid., iv, 
650, 1854. Caycuges. —Albany conf. (1737), ibid., 
VI, 99, 1855. Cayeuges. —Albany conf. (1744), 
ibid., 262. Cayeugoes. —Ingoldsby (1691), ibid., 
in, 797, 1853. Cayhuga. —Guy Park conf. (1775), 
ibid., vm, 534, 1857. Caynga.— La Tour, map, 
1779 (misprint). Cayogas.— Phelps deed (1788) 
in Am. St. Pap., iv, 210, 1832. Cayonges.— 
Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 
41, 1824. Cayoogoes. —Conestoga treaty (1721) in 
Proud, Penn., u, 132, 1798. Cayougas. —Hun¬ 
ter (1714) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 384, 1855. 
Cayouges. —Doc. of 1684, ibid., Ill, 347, 1853. Cay- 
ougues. —Doc. of 1688, ibid., 548. Cayounges. —Tel¬ 
ler (1698), ibid., iv, 352, 1854. Cayowges. —Bello¬ 
mont (1698), ibid., 369. Cayuaga. — Doc. of 1792 in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., 1 ,285,1806. Cayugas. — 
Doc. of 1676 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 500, 
1881. Cayuges. —Albany conf. (1737), ibid., vi, 
103, 1855. Cayukers.— Barton, New Views, app., 
7, 1798. Cayungas. —Vetch (1719) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., V, 531, 1855. Chingas. —Albany conf. 
(1751), ibid., VI, 719, 1855 (misprint). Chiugas.— 
Dwight and Partridge (1754) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., v, 120, 1816. Chuijugers. —Dongan 
(1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 532,1853. Chyu- 
gas. —Vaillant (1688), ibid., 527. Coiejues. —Leis- 
ler (1690), ibid., 732. Cojages. —Maryland treaty 
(1682), ibid., 321. Cojoges.— Goldthwait (1766) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., x, 121, 1809. Couiou- 
gas.— Albany conf. (1746) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VI, 317, 1855. Coyougers. —Jamison (1697), ibid., 
IV, 294, 1854. Coyouges. —Doc. ca. 1700 in Hist. 
Mag., 2d s., I, 300, 1867. Cuiukguos. —Drake, Bk. 
Inds., v, 4,1848. Cuyahuga. —Iroquois deed (1789) 
in Am. St. Pap., iv, 211, 1832. Gacheos. —Proud, 
Penn., II, 295, 1798. Gachoi. —Map of 1616 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. Gachoos.— Map, 
ca. 1614, ibid. Gachpas. —Loskiel, Miss. Unit. 
Breth., pt. 3, 16, 1794. Gaiuckers. —Weiser (1736) 
quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 332, 1854. 
Gajuka.— Zeisberger (1750) quoted by Conover, 
Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. (German 
form). Gajuquas.— Barton, New Views, app., 7, 
1798. Gakaos. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 






224 


CAYUSE 


[B. A. E. 


1816. Ga-u'-gweh.— Morgan, League Iroq., 159, 
1851. Gayuga.— Pyrlaeus (ca. 1750) quoted in Am. 
Antiq., IV, 75, 1881. Gogouins.— Chauvignene 
(1736) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in 555, 
1853. Goiogoiiens. —Jes. Rel. for 1670,_ 75, 1858. 
Goiogouioronons. —Courcelles (ca. 1670) in Margry, 
D£c., I, 178, 1875. Gojogouen.— Jes. Rel. for 1671, 
3, 1858. Gooiogouen.— Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Go- 
yagouins. —Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., 
ill, 3, 1753. Goyogans. —La Hontan (1703) quoted 
by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 313, 1816. Goyogo- 
ans.— La Hontan, New Voy., I, map, 1703. Goyo- 
goin. —Pouchot (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
694, 1858. Goyogouans. —La Hontan, New Voy., 

I, 39, 1703. Goyogouens. —Louis XIV (1699) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 698, 1855. Goyogoiiin.— 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., m, 27, 
1753. Goyoguans.— La Hontan, New Voy., I, 231, 
1703. Goyoguen.— Beilin, map, 1755. Goyoguin. — 
Jes. Rel., hi, index, 1858. Goyoguoain.— Denon- 
ville (1685) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 282, 1855. 
Go-yo-gwe 11 ''.— Hewitt, MS. Mohawk vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882 (Mohawk name). Guigouins.— 
Jefferys, Fr. Dom., pt. 1,117, 1761. Gwaugueh. — 
Morgan, League Iroq., map, 1851. Gwe-u-gweh-o- 
no'.— Ibid., 51 (‘people of the mucky land’: 
own name). Honosuguaxtu-wane. —Gatschet, 
Seneca MS., B. A. E., 1882 (‘big pipes’: Seneca 
ceremonial name). Kanawa. —Gatschet, Shaw¬ 
nee MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee name). Ka- 
yowgaws.— Homann Heirs’ map, 1756. Kayugue- 
ono n . —Gatschet, Seneca MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Sen¬ 
eca name). Kei-u-gues. —Dudley (1721) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vm, 244, 1819. Ko-'se-a- 
qe'-nyo Q . —Hewitt, Cayuga MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884 (another Cayuga name). Ko-yo-konk- 
ha-ka.— Hewitt, Mohawk MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1882 (a Mohawk name). Kuenyugu-haka. —Gat¬ 
schet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E., 1882 -(Tuscarora 
name). Kuyuku-haga. —Gatschet, Mohawk MS., 
B. A. E., 1879 (Mohawk name). Oiogoen. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1656, 20,1858. Oiogoenhronnons. —Ibid., 29. 
Oiogouan.— Jes. Rel. for 1657, 15, 1858. Oiogou- 
anronnon. —Ibid. Oiogouen. —La Salle (1679) in 
Margry, D6c., I, 504, 1875. Oiogouenronnon. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1657, 18, 1858. Oiogouin.— La Barre (1683) 
in Margry, D£c., II, 330, 1877. Oiougovenes. — Bar- 
cia, Ensayo, 225, 1723. Ojongoveres.— Ibid., 220. 
Onionenhronnons.— Jes. Rel. for 1653 (misprint). 
Oniouenhronon. —Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858 (mis¬ 
print). Orongouens. —Hennepin, Cont. of New 
Disc., 93, 1698. Oiiioenrhonons. —Jes. Rel. for 1635, 
34, 1858. Ouiouenronnons. —Jes. Rel. for 1647, 46, 
1858. Oyogouins.— La Barre (1683) in Margry, D6c., 

II, 332, 1877. Petuneurs. —Greenhalgh (1677) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 252,1853 (French name). 
Queyugwe. —Macauley, N. Y., II, 176, 1829. 
Queyugwehaughga. —Ibid., 185. Quingoes. —Cour- 
sey (1682) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 558, 1881 
(misprint). Quiquogas. —Stone, Life of Brant, I, 
401, 1864. Quiuquuhs.— Edwards (1751) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 146, 1809. Sanonawanto- 
wane.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq., IV, 75, 1881. 
Shoneanawetowah. —Macauley, N. Y.,ll, 185, 1829. 
Shononowendos. —Ibid. S’ho-ti-non-na-wa n -t6'-na.— 
Hewitt, from Tuscarora informant, 1886 (‘they 
are great pipes’: council name). So-nus'-ho-gwa- 
to-war.— Morgan, League Iroq., 423, 1851 (‘great 
pipe’: council name). Soon-noo-daugh-we-no- 
wenda. —Macauley, N. Y., ii, 185,1829. 

Cayuse. A Waiilatpuan tribe formerly 
occupying the territory about the heads 
of Wallawalla, Umatilla, and Grande 
Ronde rs. and from the Blue mts. to Des¬ 
chutes r. in Washington and Oregon. 
The tribe has always been closely asso¬ 
ciated with the neighboring Nez Perces 
and Wallawalla, and was regarded by the 
early explorers and writers as belonging 
to the same stock. So far as the avail¬ 
able evidence goes, however, they must 
be considered linguistically independent. 
The Cayuse have always been noted for 
their bravery, and owing largely to their 


constant struggles with the Snake and 
other tribes, have been numerically weak. 
According to Gibbs there were few pu re¬ 
blood Cayuse left in 1851, intermar¬ 
riage, particularly with the Nez Percds, 
having been so prevalent that even the 
language was falling into disuse. In 1855 
the Cayuse joined in the treaty by which 
the Umatilla res. was formed, and since 
that time have resided within its limits. 
Their number is officially reported as 
404 in 1904; but this figure is misleading, 





CAYUSE. (PAUL SHOWEWAY, CHIEF) 


as careful inquiry in 1902 failed to dis¬ 
cover a single one of pure blood on the res¬ 
ervation and thelanguage is practically ex¬ 
tinct. The tribe acquired wide notoriety 
in the early days of the white settlement 
of the territory. In 1838 a mission was 
established among the Cayuse by Marcus 
Whitman at the site of the present town 
of Whitman, Wallawalla co., Wash. In 
1847 smallpox carried off a large part of 
the tribe. The Cayuse, believing the 
missionaries to be the cause, attacked 
them, murdered Whitman and a num¬ 
ber of others, and destroyed the mission. 
Owing to the confusion in the early ac¬ 
counts it is difficult to differentiate the 
Cayuse from the Nez Perces and Walla¬ 
walla, but there is no reason to suppose 
that in habits and customs they differed 
markedly from those tribes. (l. f. ) 

Caiiguas.—Palmer, Trav. Rocky Mts., 53, 1852. 
Cailloux.—Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 214, 1846. 
Cajouses.—Ross, Advent., 127, 1849. Cayoose.— 





BULL. 30J 


CAYUSE—CELTS 


225 


Seouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 237, 
1848. Cayouses.— Wyeth (1848) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, I, 221,1851. Cayoux. —Grant in Jour. 
Roy. Geog. Soc., 211, 1861. Cayus. —Latham 
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856. Cayuse. — 
Parker, Jour., 131, 1840. Conguses.— Cain an Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1855,193, 1856. Cuyuse. —Stevens, Life of 
I. I. Stevens, n, 36,1901. Cyuse.— Brown in Proe. 
Roy. Geog. Soc., 90,1867. HaPluntchi.— Gatschet, 
Mollalla MS., 27, B. A. E. (Molalla name). 
Hains. —Whitman in Mowry, Marcus Whitman, 
272, 1901. Kagouse.— Damn, Oregon, 218,1845. Kai- 
jous. —Smet, Letters, 230, 1843. Kayouse.— Town¬ 
send, Narr., 245, 1839. Kayul. —Coke, Ride over 
Rocky Mts., 305, 1852. Kayuses. —Smet, Letters, 
220, 1843. Kayuxes. —Coke, op. c.it., 282. Key- 
uses. —White in Ind. Aff. Rep., 450,1843. Kieoux. — 
Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong. 1st sess., 10, 
1848. Kinse. —Lee and Frost, Oregon, 163, 1844. 
Kioose.— Palmer, Trav. Rocky Mts., 53, note, 1852. 
Kiuses. —Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 92,1845. Kiwaw.— 
Palmer, Trav. Rocky Mts., 53, note, 1852. Ki- 
yuse. —Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 44, 1845. Kye-use. — 
Kane, Wand, of an Artist, 280, 1859. Kyoose.— 
Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., 245, 1866. Nez Perce 
Kayuses. —Smet, Oregoaa Miss., 104, 1847. Ray- 
ouse.— Gairdner (1835) iaa Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., 
XI, 257, 1841 (misprint). Skiuses.— Wyeth, Cor- 
resp. and Jour., 142, 1899. Skynses. —Irving, 
Bonneville’s Advent., 300, 1850. Skyuse.— Farn- 
ham, Trav. W. Prairies, 81, 1843. Waiilatpu. — 
Hale, Ethaaog. and Philol., 214, 1846. Wailatpu. — 
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 416, 1855. Wai'let- 
ma,— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 744, 1896 
(Yakimaname.) Wailetpu. —Ibid, (own aaame). 
Waillatpus.— Armstroaag, Oregon, 112,1857. Wait-' 
lat-pu.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 252,1854. Wau- 
lapta.— Dart in Iiad. Aff. Rep., 476, 1851. Wau- 
latpas. —Ibid., 216. Waulatpus. —Lane (1850) iaa 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 632, 1853. Wi'alet- 
pum. — Mooney iia 14th Rep. B. A. E., 744, 1896 
(another Yakima name). Willetpos. —Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., ii, 309, 1814. Wy-eilat. —Lord, 
Natur. in Brit. Col., 245, 1866. Yeletpo.— Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., n, 471, 1814. 

Cayuse. An Indian pony; from the name 
of a Waiilatpuan tribe. The horses, after 
the Indians had come into contact with 
the whites, were bred by the Cayuse, and 
from a merely local use the word has 
attained an extended currency in the 
N. w. Pacific states. (a. f. c.) 

Cazazhita (said to mean ‘bad arrow- 
points/ and so, perhaps, from kaza ‘to 
pick to pieces/ shicha ‘bad’; but arrow- 
pointds wa n hin). A Dakotadivision, under 
chief Shonka, or Dog; probably a part of 
the Teton, or perhaps the same as Broken 
Arrows and Wannawega. 

Ca-za-zhee-ta. —Catlin, N. A. Inds., 1,233,1844. 

Cazopo. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Cebolleta (Span.: ‘tender onion’). A 
place on Pojuate r., in the n. e. corner 
of Valencia co., N. Mex., at which, in 
1746, a temporary settlement of 400 or 
500 Navaho was made by Father Juan M. 
Menchero. A mission was established 
there in 1749, but in the following year 
the Navaho grew tired of sedentary life, 
and Cebolleta, together with Encinal, 
which was established at the same time, 
was abandoned. In 1804 a request from 
the Navaho to resettle at Cebolleta was 
refused by the Spanish authorities. It is 
now a white Mexican town. Cebolleta 


mtn. and the Cebolleta land grant take 
their name from the settlement. 

(f. w. h. ) 

Ceballeta.— Hughes, Doniphan’s Exped., 126, 1848. 
Cebellitita.— Parke, map New Mexico, 1851. Ce- 
boleta. —Hughes, Doniphan’s Exped., map, 1848. 
Cebolleta. —Ibid., 146. Cebolletta. —Buschmann, 
Neu-Mexico,247,1858 (misquoting Abert). Cevol- 
leta. —Brevoort, New Mexico, 22,1874. Cevolleto.— 
Domenech, Deserts of N. A., II, 7,1860. Cibaleta.— 
Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 247, 1858. Cibaletta.— 
Ibid., 247. Ciboletta. —Am. Ethnol. Soc. Trans., 
ii, map, 1848. Cibolleta. —Abert in Emory, Recon- 
noissance, 468,1848. Cibolletta. —Ibid., 465; John¬ 
ston, ibid., 589. Seboyeta.— U. S. Land Off. map, 
1903. Sevolleta. —Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., 
in, pt. 3, 119, 1856. Sibolletta. —Folsom, Mexico, 
map, 1842. 

Ceca. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. Ined., 
xvi, 114,1871) as a pueblo of the Jemez in 
New Mexico in 1598. The name can not 
be identified with the present native name 
of any ruined settlement in the vicinity. 
Leeca.— Onate, op. cit.,102. 

Celts. Ungrooved axes or hatchets of 
stone, metal, or other hard material. 
It is uncertain whether the name is de- 





Celt Shaped for Inserting in 
Handle; N. C. (1-6) 




Short, Thick Celt; Ala. 
(1-4) 


rived from the Latin celtis, ‘chisel/ to 
which the implement bears some resem¬ 
blance, or from the Welsh cellt, ‘a flint 
stone.’ The celts range in weight from 
less than half an ounce to more than 20 
pounds, while the diversity of form is 
very great. Their distribution is more 
general than that of the grooved ax. The 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-15 






















226 


CEMENTS-CEREMONY 


[B. a. e. 


primary purpose was probably that of a 
hatchet, but in one shape or another they 
served as adzes, chisels, scrapers, skin¬ 
ning knives, meat cutters, and weapons. 
Many have the surface roughened by 
pecking at the top, which was inserted in 
a cavity cut in a wooden club and secured 
with gum or glue; in others, this rough¬ 
ening was around the middle, to give a 
firmer grip to a withe handle; still others, 
wrapped perhaps in a piece of buckskin 
or some such substance to prevent slip¬ 
ping, were held in the hand. Some speci¬ 
mens were set in the end of a short piece 
of bone or antler, which, in turn, acting 
as a buffer, was attached to a handle of 
wood in the fashion of a hatchet, an adz, 
or a plane. The smallest specimens, es¬ 
pecially those made of hematite, which 
usually have the scraper-form edge, were 
similarly set‘in the end of a longer piece 
of bone or antler, and used as knives or 
scrapers. Celts, in their various patterns, 
were among the most important imple¬ 
ments known to primitive man. 

Celts made of flint, jasper, and other 
brittle stone are shaped mainly by flak¬ 
ing. In most, the edge is more or less 
sharpened by grinding, and sometimes the 
entire implement is partially smoothed 
in the same way. They are common 
along the Atlantic coast, where argillite 
and rhyolite are easily procured; and the 
same is true of the Kanawha valley, 
where the black flint outcrops so abun¬ 
dantly. Along the Mississippi r., in Ar¬ 
kansas and Mississippi, are found numer¬ 
ous specimens which have been chipped 
from yellow jasper and then ground until 
the angles formed by the facets are nearly 
obliterated and the lower part of the 
blade attains a high degree of polish. 
These are mostly small, and approach 
more closely the European celts with 
rectangular section than any others found 
in America. They are sometimes classed 
with chisels. See Adzes, Axes, Chisels, 
Copper , Hatchets, Stone-work, Tomahawks. 

Celts are described or briefly referred 
to and illustrated in numerous works on 
archeologic subjects. Among these are 
Abbott, Prim. Indus., 1881; Fowke (1) 
Archaeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902, (2) in 13th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Holmes in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1897; Jones, Antiq. So. Inds., 
1873; Moore, various memoirs in Jour. 
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Moore- 
head, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Rau in Smith- 
son. Cont., xxn, 1876; Thruston, Antiq. 
Tenn., 1897. (g. f. w. ii. h. ) 

Cements.—The Indians used cements of 
animal, vegetal, and mineral origin, and 
sometimes combined two of these or added 
mineral substances for coloring. Animal 
cement was obtained by the Yokuts of 
California by boiling the joints of various 
animals and combining the product with 


pitch (Powers, Tribes of Cal., 373, 1877). 
The Hupa boiled the gland of the lower 
jaw and nose of the sturgeon and dried 
the products in balls (Ray in Smithson. 
Rep., 229, 1886). Capt, John Smith states 
that with sinew of deer and the tops 
of deer horns boiled to a jelly the Vir¬ 
ginia Indians made glue that would 
not dissolve in cold water. The Plains 
tribes boiled the skin of the head of ani¬ 
mals until it was softened into glue, 
which they dried in masses on sticks. 
Such glue-sticks formed a part of the 
equipment of the bow-and-arrow maker, 
and the horn arrow-straighteners of the 
S. W. tribes are often filled with resin. 
Sometimes one end of the hearth of the 
fire-drill bears a mass of resin, as a con¬ 
venient way to carry this substance, which 
may readily be melted at the fire and 
applied to various uses. Wax and albu¬ 
men from eggs had a limited use, and the 
Eskimo used blood mixed with soot. 
The chief use of animal cement was in the 
manufacture of bows and arrows, and, 
among the Plains tribes, in joining the 
stems of certain kinds of pipes. The 
only mineral cement known to the tribes 
was bitumen, which was used by the In¬ 
dians of s. Arizona and California. Veg¬ 
etal cements were numerous, and chief 
among these was the exudation from con¬ 
iferous trees, employed by northern tribes 
for pitching the seams of bark canoes, 
baskets, etc.; by S. W. tribes for render¬ 
ing basketry, water vessels, and the like 
water tight; by the Hopi for varnishing 
pottery, and by many tribes for mending, 
joining, inlaying, etc. The tribes of the 
S. W. made a strong cement of the gum 
resin of the mesquite and the gum of the 
greasewood, which was used to set the 
heads of arrows and for many other pur¬ 
poses. The Pima made a strong cement 
from a gum of parasitic origin on the 
Covillea tridentata. The Indians of Men¬ 
docino co., Cal., made a glue from the 
bulb of the soap plant ( Chlorogalum pom- 
eridianum ) for fastening feathers on ar¬ 
rows. (w. H.) 

Cenyowpreskel. A former village of 
either the Dieguenos or Luisenos in the 
neighborhood of San Luis Rey mission, s. 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11,1860. 

Cepowig. A village in 1608, perhaps be¬ 
longing to the Conestoga, located by Guss 
in or near York co., Pa.—Smith (1629), 
Va., i, map, 1819. 

Ceremonials. See Problematical objects. 

Ceremony. A ceremony is the perform¬ 
ance in a prescribed order of a series of 
formal acts often constituting a drama 
which has an ultimate object. Ceremo¬ 
nies spring from many diverse tenden¬ 
cies, which are the expression of some 
phase of religious emotion. Many fea¬ 
tures of the culture of the North American 


m 


BULL. 30] 


CEREMONY 


227 


Indiana are regarded as ceremonies, such 
as the rites which pertain to birth, pu¬ 
berty, marriage, death, war, etc., but in 
the arbitrarily restricted sense in which 
the term is here used a ceremony is un¬ 
derstood to be a religious performance 
of at least one day’s duration. These 
ceremonies generally refer to one or 
the other of the solstices, to the germi¬ 
nation or ripening of a crop, or to the 
most important food supply. There are 
ceremonies of less importance that are 
connected with the practices of medicine¬ 
men or .are the property of cult societies. 
Ceremonies may be divided into those in 
which the whole tribe participates and 
those which are the exclusive property of 
a society, generally a secret one, or of a 
group of men of special rank, such as 
chiefs or medicine-men, or of an individ¬ 
ual. Practically all ceremonies of ex¬ 
tended duration contain many rites in 
common. An examination of these rites, 
as they are successively performed, reveals 
the fact that they follow one another in 
prescribed order, as do the events or epi¬ 
sodes of the ritual. 

The ritual, or that part of the cere¬ 
mony which is spoken or sung, predom¬ 
inates among some tribes, as the Pawnee; 
among others, as the Hopi, it is greatly 
subordinated to the drama. 

In enumerating the rites of the cere¬ 
monies it may be noted, first, that they 
may be divided into secret and public, 
the secret rites being proprietary, and, as 
a rule, occupying the major part of the 
time of the ceremony. The rites of the 
public performance may be considered as 
the actual play or drama. The secret 
rites are almost invariably performed 
in a specially constructed lodge, room, 
or chamber, into which none but the 
priests or initiated may enter, and which 
is* generally indicated in such a man¬ 
ner that the public may not mistake 
it. Early in point of time in the secret 
rites is the procession of the priests for 
objects or raw material to be used in 
the preparation of an altars which may 
be either secret or public, or to be 
used for paraphernalia or otherwise in 
the public performance. This proces¬ 
sion of priests is generally symbolic, 
and the uninitiated may not accompany 
them. The remaining secret perform¬ 
ances include such rites as smoking, 
which may be either fraternal or direct 
offerings in the nature of a sacrifice to the 
gods; thurification, similar in origin to 
the rite of smoking, in which the smoke 
of some sweet-smelling herb is offered 
direct to the deity, or the priest bathes 
his body, or some object of a special cere¬ 
monial nature, in the smoke of the in¬ 
cense; sweat-lodge purification; a cere¬ 
monial feast, preceded or followed by a 


sacrifice of food; the offering of prayers* 
which may be in the form of a direct 
appeal to the gods or through the instru¬ 
mentality of material prayer offerings, 
upon which, or into which, the prayer 
has been breathed; and the manufacture 
or redecoration of ceremonial masks and 
garments to be worn during the public 
performance, either by the priests exclu¬ 
sively or by all those taking part in the 
ceremony. 

Occupying in point of time a period 
between the exclusively secret perform¬ 
ances and the public presentation of the 
drama may be certain semi-public per¬ 
formances, which take place in the open 
but which are undertaken by priests ex¬ 
clusively. Such is the preparation of 
the site of the public performance, or the 
erection of a bower or lodge within which 
it is to take place. Either within this 
inclosure, or lodge, or within the secret 
lodge of preparation, an altar may be 
erected. This is especially the case with 
the ceremonies of the Pueblos and of the 
Plains tribes (see Altars), among which 
it is always symbolic, and its explana¬ 
tion must generally be sought in the 
ritual. It often symbolizes, as a whole, 
the earth or the heavens, or some god or 
the home of a god or the gods. The 
most prominent feature of the altar is a 
palladium, which may consist of a buffalo 
skull, an ear of corn, a flint knife, or some 
other object of supposed efficacious na¬ 
ture, within which is supposed to reside 
or which is typical or symbolic of the 
spirit or deity. On the altar, also, is gen¬ 
erally found a recognition in one form 
or another of the gods of the four or six 
world-quarters, of the rainbow, of the 
lightning, of vegetation, etc. Falling 
within this semi-public period is often a 
contest, generally a foot race, the winner 
being favored by the gods or receiving 
some tangible object which possesses 
magic potency. 

The public performance is usually 
ushered in by a stately procession of 
priests, the singing of traditional songs, 
rites of smoking, sacrifice of food, and 
offerings of prayer. The most prominent 
feature is the dance, which, as a rule, is of 
a dignified and stately nature, the dancers 
being appropriately costumed and other¬ 
wise adorned. The costume worn in pub¬ 
lic is often supplemented with paint upon 
the body or by masks over the face. The 
dancer, thus arrayed, generally represents 
a minor deity, or he places himself, by 
virtue of the character of his costume, in 
an attitude of defiance to the deity and 
thus opposes his magic power to that of 
the supernatural. Following the dance, 
which may vary in duration from a few 
minutes to several days, is generally a 
ceremonial removal of the costume, 


228 


CEREMONY 


[B. A. E. 


whereupon the dancers undergo a purifi¬ 
cation rite, often in the form of a power¬ 
ful emetic. This may he followed by an 
act of self-inflicted torture, which, how¬ 
ever, often forms an intrinsic part of the 
public performance. During the entire 
ceremony, as a rule, certain tabus are en¬ 
forced, the most common being a prohi¬ 
bition of the presence of women during 
menstruation. 

The time of the performance of cere- 
mohies varies. Some are held annually, 
or biennially, at stated periods; such are 
the solstitial or seasonal ceremonies, for 
which no special provision is necessarily 
made. Some are held during certain sea¬ 
sons within the year, but are dependent 
on the will of an individual who may have 
pledged or taken a vow to perform the 
ceremony. Others are held at any season, 
whenever occasion may demand; such 
are the ceremonies of the medicine-men. 

Inasmuch as ceremonies form intrinsic 
features and may be regarded as only 
phases of culture, their special character 
depends on the state of culture of the 
people by which they are performed; 
hence there are at least as many kinds of 
ceremonies as there are phases of cul¬ 
ture in North America. A few charac¬ 
teristic ceremonies may be considered 
for some of the better-defined areas: 

Among the Plains tribes the most spec¬ 
tacular ceremony is the Sun dance, q. v. 
This varied from an annual performance, 
as among the Ponca and some other 
Siouan tribes, to a presentation only as 
the direct result of a vow, as among the 
Cheyenne, Arapaho, and Siksika. In 
the Sun dance of all tribes are found 
certain common features, such as the 
secret tipi or tipis of preparation; the 
manufacture of objects to be used on the 
public altar; the procession of priests in 
search of an object generally symbolic of 
spying out the world; the ceremonial 
erection of the great lodge, of which the 
center pole is the most prominent feature; 
the erection of the altar; and the charac¬ 
teristic dance lasting from 1 to 4 days. 
During the public performance the 
dancers are symbolically painted and 
otherwise so adorned that their evolu¬ 
tions are supposed to lead to a distinct 
result—the production of rain. While 
the Sun dance varies from tribe to tribe, 
not only in its symbolism but also in 
many important details, it seems primarily 
to have been a rain ceremony, and its 
ritual generally recounts the origin or the 
rebirth of mankind. The second group 
of ceremonies are those performed by 
cult societies, generally four or more in 
number. Each society has its special 
esoteric songs, its own paraphernalia, 
and often distinct gradations in rank. 
The membership is generally exclusively 


male, although a limited number of 
maidens are admitted into the societies 
of the Cheyenne, while the Arapaho 
have a society which belongs exclusively 
to the women, of which there are several 
gradations of rank. The third group 
comprises the performances of cult socie¬ 
ties in which the warrior element does 
not predominate; these are often spoken 
of as dances, although they are, strictly 
speaking, ceremonies. Among the best 
known of these are the Buffalo, the 
Bear, and the Elk. The basis is usu¬ 
ally the acquisition and perpetuation 
of magic power which, primarily, 
was derived from the animal after which 
the society takes its name and from 
which it'is supposed to have originated. 
A fourth group comprises those of the 
medicine-men, and are either cere¬ 
monies in which one or more medicine¬ 
men perform for the benefit of the sick, 
or, more often, in which all the medicine¬ 
men of the tribe join in a performance 
to make public demonstration of magic 
power through sleight-of-hand. The 
last group of Plains ceremonies includes 
those connected with the planting and 
reaping of the maize, or the first killing 
of game in the hunting season, or the 
first coming of the fish—all, it may be 
noted, connected with the gift of food 
for the sustenance of life. 

The Pueblo tribes of the S. W. are 
especially noted for their extended cere¬ 
monies, which among the Hopi number 
no fewer than 13, each of 9 days’ dura¬ 
tion. The secret rites are almost always 
held in an underground chamber called 
a kiva (q. v.), or estufa, in which, in ad¬ 
dition to the performances, an elaborate 
a’ltar is erected. During the initiation of 
candidates into the brotherhood of these 
societies, dry-paintings (q. v.) are laid on 
the floor of the kiva in front of the altar. 
The symbolism both of these and of the 
altar itself is generally very elaborate, 
but with a strong predominance of sym¬ 
bols in which reference is made to rain 
clouds. During certain of these ceremo¬ 
nies masked dancers appear, the symbol¬ 
ism of the mask being distinctive. The 
most notable of the Hopi are: The Soyal, 
a winter solstice ceremony; the Powamu, 
a February bean-planting ceremony; a 
New Fire ceremony, in early spring; the 
Niman, or the departure of the masked 
personages, a ceremony of early summer; 
the Snake-Antelope, of the summer, alter¬ 
nating each year with that of the Flute 
ceremonies; those of the women in the 
autumn comprising the Lagon, the Oaqol, 
and the Marau. In addition to these 
the Hopi have a large number of minor 
ones, generally of one day’s duration. 
Such are the Katcina or masked dances, 
and various others of a social nature 


fetTLL. 30] 


CEROCAHTJI-CERRO CABEZON 


229 


Among the non-Pueblo tribes of the 
S. W., especially among the Navaho 
and Apache, the extended ceremonies 
are almost entirely the property of the 
medicine-men, and must be regarded as 
medicine dances. Many of these are of 
an elaborate and complicated nature, but 
all are designed for the restoration of the 
sick. In these ceremonies masks are 
often worn and complicated and elab¬ 
orate dry-pictures are made, both these 
features probably having been borrowed 
from the Pueblo tribes. 

In California ceremonies of extended 
duration are not found; they partake 
rather of the nature of tribal mourning, 
sometimes spoken of as dances of the dead, 
or initiation rites into cult societies. 
These, generally lasting but a single day, 
are marked by the lack of symbolism, 
by the almost total want of fetishes 
such as abound on the altars of the 
Pueblos, and by the marked absence 
of rituals such as are found among cer¬ 
tain Plains tribes. The costume of the 
dancers is generally restricted to profuse 
feather ornaments. In nearly all cere¬ 
monies of this region there is afforded 
an opportunity for the display of individ¬ 
ual wealth. 

Of the ceremonies of the tribes of the 
Great Basin, but little is known. The 
eastern Shoshonean tribes, such as the 
Shoshoni and the Ute, perform the Sun 
dance, presumably borrowed from the 
tribes of the Plains. 

On the n. Pacific coast, extending from 
Columbia r. to s. Alaska, ceremonies of 
from 1 to 4 days’ duration abound. These 
are performances of cult societies, gen¬ 
erally secret, or of chiefs or lesser individ¬ 
uals who make it an opportunity to display 
personal wealth. In the ceremonies of 
the cult societies masks are worn. Those 
of the Kwakiutl of this region are held 
in winter, at which time the cult socie¬ 
ties replace the gentile organization 
which prevails in summer. Membership 
into the society is acquired by marriage 
or through war. The object of the wdnter 
ceremony is “to bring back the youth 
who is supposed to stay with the super¬ 
natural being who is the protector of his 
society, and then, when he has returned 
in a state of ecstasy, to exorcise the 
spirit which possesses him and to re¬ 
store him from his holy madness. These 
objects are attained by songs and dances.” 
During the performance of these cere¬ 
monies special paraphernalia are worn in 
which the mask, substantially made of 
wood, predominates, the remainder con¬ 
sisting largely of rings of cedar bark (see 
Bark) which constitute the badges of 
the ceremony. The tribes to the n. have 


societies and winter ceremonies similar 
to those of the Kwakiutl, from whom 
they are probably mainly derived. 

Among the Eskimo extended ceremo¬ 
nies, such as prevail over a large part of 
North America, are not found. They 
are rather to be characterized as dances 
or festivals. These are generally held in 
winter and are of short duration. The 
most important of these are the Feasts 
to the Dead; others among the Alaskan 
Eskimo are the Asking festival, the Blad¬ 
der feast, and the performances of the 
medicine-men. In some of the festivals 
w T ooden masks, representing supernatural 
or superhuman beings, are worn. 

As stated at the outset the root of cere¬ 
monies may be discovered only by taking 
into consideration universal human tend¬ 
encies which develop along certain lines 
according to historic or geographic en¬ 
vironment. It may therefore be noted 
that the need for them among the 
Indians of North America varied in 
accordance with the character of their 
life. Thus it is found that in those tribes 
or in those areas extended forms abound 
where there exists a sessile population or 
a strong form of tribal government. 
Hence the greatest number of extended 
and complicated ceremonies are formed 
among the Pueblo people of the S. W. 
and in the village communities of the 
n. Pacific coast. Second only in im¬ 
portance to the ceremonies of these 
two areas are those which are found 
among the tribes of the Plains among 
which ceremonies abound, in which the 
strongest system of government is found. 
As a ceremony of any extended duration 
makes great demands upon the tribe, and 
presupposes law and order, highly de¬ 
veloped and extended ones are not possi¬ 
ble among the Eskimo or the tribes of 
California. See Dance , Religion. ( g. a. d. ) 

Cerocahui. A settlement of the Temoris 
branch of the Guazapar in lat. 27° 25', 
long. 108° 25', w. Chihuahua, Mexico.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, map, 1864. 

Cerrito (Span.: ‘little mountain’). A 
settlement, probably of the Pima, on the 
Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., s. Ariz.; 
pop. 258 in 1860.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
June 19, 1863. 

Cerritos. Apparently a former Yuma 
rancheria on the s. bank of Gila r., 
about 10j m. above its mouth; visited by 
Anza and Font in 1775. 

Los Cerritos.— Anza and Font quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 392, 1889. 

Cerro Cabezon (Span.: ‘big-head hill,’ 
so named from its shape; also El Cabe¬ 
zon, or Cavezon). A prominent butte 
about 40 m. n. e. of the summit of Mt 
Taylor, or Mt San Mateo, N. Mex., 
which figures in Navaho tradition (Mat- 


230 


CERRO CHATO 


CHACHOKWITH 


[b. a. e. 


thews, Navaho Leg., 116, 1897). From 
some points the rock is visible 50 m. 
away. Cortez (Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, pt. 
3, 119, 1856) mentioned it as a Navaho 
settlement in 1799. (f. w. h. ) 

Cerro Chato (Span.: ‘flat-topped hill’). 
Mentioned by Cortez in 1799 (Pac. R. R. 
Rep., hi, pt. 3, 119, 1856) as a Navaho 
settlement, but it is probably only a geo¬ 
graphic name. 

Cerro Chiquito (Span.: ‘little moun¬ 
tain ’). A village, probably of the Pima, 
on the Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., s. 
Ariz.; pop. 232 in 1860.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 19, 1863. 

Cexeninuth. A tribe or division about 
Queen Charlotte sd., Brit. Col.; possibly 
a Gyeksem gens of the Kwakiutl. 
Cex-e-ni-nuth.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 
1859. Ex e ni nuth.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 
488, 1855 (misspelt). 

Chaahl ( Tcla'al ). A former Haida town 
on the n. w. coast of Moresby id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. This seems to 
have been the Kow-welth of John Work, 
who assigned to it 35 houses with 561 
inhabitants in 1836-41. Old people re¬ 
call the names of 28 houses, but many 
more are said to have existed before a 
great fire which destroyed a large part 
of the town. In later times the people 
moved to New Gold Harbor, on the e. end 
of Maude id., and thence into Skide- 
gate.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905. 
Cha-atl.—Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168b, 1880. 
Kaw-welth.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859 
(probably the same; misprint from Work, 1836-41). 
Kow-welth.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855 
(probably the same; from Work’s table). 

Chaahl (Tcla'al). A former Haida 
town on the e. coast of North id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was occu¬ 
pied by a family of the same name who 
afterward moved to Alaska and settled 
at Howkan.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 
1905. 

Chaahl-lanas ( Tcla'al la'nas, ‘ Chaahl 
town people’). A Haida family of the 
Eagle clan, one of those which moved 
to Alaska and constituted the Kaigani. 
They are said to have branched off from 
the Kaiahl-lanas, but derived their name 
from the place on North id. where 
their town stood before they moved to 
Alaska. In the latter country they 
owned the town of Howkan. There 
are said to have been 4 subdivisions: 
Stulnaas-hadai, Lanagukunhlin-hadai, 
Skahene-hadai, and Hotagastlas-hadai.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 1905. 

Ts’atl la'nas.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
26, 1889. 

Chabanakongkomun (‘boundary fishing 
place.’—Trumbull). A village of Pray¬ 
ing Indians established about 1672 near 
Dudley, Worcester co., Mass. In 1674 it 
contained about 45 inhabitants. In later 
times the Indians about Dudley were 


known as the Pegan tribe and continued 
to live there after the settlement of the 
town. Ten of them were still on a reser¬ 
vation in Dudley in 1793. They were 
classed as Nipmuc. (j. m. ) 

Chabanakongkomun.—Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., I, 189-190, 1806. Chanagongum.— 
Trumbull, Conn., I, 346, 1818. Chaubunakongko- 
muk.—Eliot (1668) quoted by Trumbull, Ind. 
Names Conn., 9, 1881. Chobonakonkon.—Gookin 
(1677) in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 467, 1836. 
Chobone-Konhonom. —Ibid., 477. Chobonokono- 
mum.—Ibid., 443. Pegans.— Drake, Bk. Inds., x, 
1848. 

Chabin (from qe, ‘mountain’). A division 
of the Assiniboin.—Maximilian, Trav., 
194, 1843. See Mountain Assiniboin. 

Gens des Montagnes.—Ibid. 

Chacacants. A village, possibly Cad- 
doan, formerly on Red r., at the mouth of 
a n. affluent, in what is now Oklahoma.— 
De l’lsle, map (1707) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., hi, 1851. 

Chacacantes.—Baudry des Lozieres, Voyage 4 la 
La., 242,1802. Chacakante.—De l’lsle, map of La. 
(1701?) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 294, 1886. 

Chacat. Mentioned by Pike (Exped., 
3d map, 1810) as a Navaho settlement. 
It is probably identical in name with that 
of Chaco canyon, n. w. N. Mex. 

Chachambitmanchal. An Atfalati band 
formerly living 3£ m. n. of Forest Grove, 
Washington co., Oreg. 

Tcha tchambit mantchal.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., 
B. A. E., 1877. 

Chachanim. An Atfalati band formerly 
living on Wapatoo Lake prairie, Washing¬ 
ton co., Oreg. 

Tcha tchannim.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chachat. A former village connected 
with San Carlos mission, Cal., and said 
to have been Esselen.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Chachaubunkkakowok. A village of 
Christian Indians in e. Massachusetts in 
1684.—Eliot (1684) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., hi, 185, 1794. 

Chachemewa. An Atfalati band for¬ 
merly residing at Forest Grove, 6 m. from 
Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg. 
Tcha-tchemewa.—Gatschet, Atfalati M3.,B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chachif. An Atfalati band formerly 
livingon Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg. 
Tch’atchif.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,1877. 

Chachimahiyuk (refers to a swamp 
grass). An Atfalati band formerly living 
between Wapatoo lake and Willamette 
r., in Washington co., Oreg. 

Tcha tchimmahiyuk,—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. 
A. E., 1877. 

Chachimewa. An Atfalati band formerly 
living on or near Wapatoo lake, Yamhill 
co., Oreg. 

Tcha tchmewa.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chachokwith (refers to a small shell). 
An Atfalati band formerly living at a 
place of the same name n. of Forest 
Grove, in Washington co., Oreg. 

Tcha tchokuith.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 


BULL. 30] 


CHACTOO-CHAKCHIUMA 


281 


Chactoo. A body of Indians, possibly 
related to the Attacapa, mentioned in 
1753 as living in Louisiana. In 1805 they 
were on Bayou Boeuf, about 10 m. s. of 
Bayou Rapide, toward Opelousas, and 
numbered 30 men. They were not 
Choctaw, and in addition to their own 
tongue they spoke the Mobilian trade 
language. (a. s. g.) 

Chacchoux. —Dumont, La., 1,134,1753. Chactoos. — 
Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 84,1806. Chaetoos.—Scher- 
merhorn in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., ii, 27, 
1814. Chattoos.—Lewis and Clark, Jour, 156, 1840. 

Chafalote. An Apache tribe or band of 
Sonora, Mexico, mentioned in connection 
with the Gilenos and Faraones by Orozco 
y Berra (Geog., 59, 1864) and by Malte- 
Brun (Congres Am6r., ii, 37, 1877); 
otherwise unknown. 

Chagee. A former Cherokee settlement 
near the mouth of Chatooga cr., a tribu¬ 
tary of Tugaloo r., at or near the site of 
the present Ft Madison, in the s. w. part 
of Oconee co., n. w. S. C. It was destroyed 
during the Revolutionary war. (j. m. ) 

Chagindueftei. An Atfalati band for¬ 
merly living between Hillsboro and 
Sauvies id., Washington co., Oreg. 
Tchagi'nduefte-i.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chagu (‘lungs’). A division of the 
Yankton Sioux. 

Band of the lights.—Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 141,1851. Cagu.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 217, 1897. Tcaxu.—Ibid. 

Chaguate. A village, probably belong¬ 
ing to a division of a southern Caddoan 
tribe, formerly situated in the region of 
Washita r., Ark.; visited by Moscoso and 
his troops in the summer of 1542. See 
Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., ir, 193, 1850. 

Chagunte. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chagvagchat. A Kaiyuhkhotanavillage 
near the headwaters of Anvik r., Alaska. 

Tchagvagtchatchachat.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. 
Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Chahelim {helim = ‘outdoors’). An At¬ 
falati band formerly settled in Chehelim 
valley, 5 m. s. of Wapatoo lake, Yamhill 
co., Oreg. 

Chehalim.—Lyman in Oreg. Hist. Soc. Quar., I, 
323, 1900. Tcha helim.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., 
B. A. E., 1877. 

Chahichic ( che-chen , a variety of mos¬ 
quito; chik, or chiki, ‘place of’). A 
Tarahumare rancheria near Palanquo, 
Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 
1894. 

Chahthulelpil. A body of Salish of the 
old Victoria superintendency, Brit. Col.; 
pop. 104in 1881.—Can. Ind. Aff., 258,1882. 

Chaicclesaht ( To'e'k'tlisaih , ‘large-cut- 
in-bay people’). A Nootka tribe on 
Ououkinsh and Nasparte inlets, w. coast 
of Vancouver id., numbering 105 in 1902. 
Acous is their principal town. 


Chaic-cles-aht. —Can. Ind. Aff., 357, 1897. Chay- 
kisaht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 308,1868. Checklesit.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 158,1901. Naspatl.—Jacob in Jour. 
Anthrop. Soc. Lond., xi, Feb., 1864. Naspatle.— 
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301, 1850. Naspatte.— 
Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 234, 
1848. Nespods.— Grant in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 
293, 1857. To’e'k'tlisath.—Boas, 6tli Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 1890. 

Chaik. A Kaviagmiut village on the n. 
shore of Norton sd., Alaska. 

Chaimut.—Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. in Am., pt. 
i, 73,1847. Tchaimuth.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. 
Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Chaikikarachada (‘ those who call them¬ 
selves the deer ’). A Winnebago gens. 
Cha'-ra.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157, 1877. Tca'i-ki'- 
ka-ra'-tca-da.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 241, 
1897. 

Chailkutkaituh. A former Hupa village 
on or near Trinity r., Cal. 

Chail'-kut-kai-tuh. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
in, 73, 1877. 

Chainiki. A Karok village on the s. 
bank of Klamath r., n. Cal., about midway 
between the Trinity and the Salmon. 
Tshei-nik-kee.—Gibbs MS., B. A. E., 1852. 

Chainruk. A Kaviagmiut village at Pt 
Clarence, Alaska.—11th Census, Alaska, 
162, 1893. 

Chaizra. The Elk clan of the Ala-Leng- 
ya phratral group of the Hopi. 

Tcaizra wihwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
583, 1901 (te=ch; wtfm>#=‘clan’). Tcai'-zri-sa 
wiin-wu.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 401, 1894. 

Chak (‘ eagle ’). A name given by the 
northern Tlingit to one of the two phra- 
tries into which they are divided. 

Chethl’.—Dali, Alaska, 414, 1870. Teak!.—Swan- 
ton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 

Chakankni. A Molala band formerly 
settled in the Cascade range, n. w. of 
upper Klamath lake, on the headwaters 
of Rogue r., Oreg. In 1881 they were 
rapidly becoming absorbed by the neigh¬ 
boring tribes and had practically given 
up their own language for that of the 
Klamath. (l. f. ) 

Tchakankni.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., II, 
426, 1890. Tchakenikni.—Ibid. (Modoc name). 

Chakawech. A Modoc camping place 
near Yaneks, on Sprague r., Klamath 
res., s. w. Oreg. 

Tchakawetch.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, 
xxxi, 1890. 

Chakchiuma (Choctaw: saktchi ‘craw¬ 
fish,’ huma ‘red,’ probably referring to a 
clan totem). A tribe speaking a Choc- 
taw-Chickasaw dialect, formerly living 
on Yazoo r, Miss., and, according to 
Iberville (Margry, D6c., iv, 180, 1880), 
between the Taposa below them and the 
Outapo orIbitoupaabove, in 1699. Atthat 
time they were probably the most popu¬ 
lous of the Yazoo tribes, and spoke the 
Chickasaw language. They were an im¬ 
portant tribe at the time of De Soto’s 
expedition (1540-41) and lived in a walled 
town. During the 18th century they 
were included in the Chickasaw confeder¬ 
acy, and had the reputation of being war¬ 
like. Adair (Hist. Am. Inds., 66, 352, 
1775) mentions a tradition that they came 


232 CHAKEIPI- 

to the e. side of the Mississippi with the 
Choctaw and Chickasaw and settled on 
the Tallahatchie, the lower part of which 
was called by their name. Jefferys 
(French Dom., i, 163, 1761) states that in 
his time they occupied 50 huts on the 
Yazoo r. (a. s. g. c. t. ) 

Cacchumas.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776. Chac- 
chooma. —Romans, Fla., 315,1775. Chacchoumas. — 
La Harpe (1721) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 
106, 1851. Chacchumas. —Lattr6, map of U. S., 
1784. Chacci Cumas. —Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 126, 1816. Chacci Oumas.— McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Chacehoumas. — 
Jeiferys, Am. Atlas, 7, 1776. Chachachouma. — 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1854. 
Chachoumas. —La Harpe (1721) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., in, 110, 1851. Chachiimas. —Hervas, 
Idea dell’ Universo, xvii, 90, 1784. Chackchi- 
oomas.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 506,1878. 
Chacksihoomas. —Ibid. Chacoumas. —Tonti (1688) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 72,1846. Chacoume. — 
Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Chacsihomas.— Haw¬ 
kins (1799), Sketch, 15, 1848. Chacsihoomas. —Ro¬ 
mans, Fla., 90, 1775. Chactchi-Oumas.— Du Pratz, 
La., n, 226, 1758. Chactioumas. —Jefferys, French 
Dom., i, 163, 1761. Chacxouxnas. —P6nicaut (1722) 
in Margry, D6c., V, 575,1883. Chaquesauma.— Iber¬ 
ville (1699), ibid., IV, 180,1880. Chiachi-Oumos. — 
Schermerliorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s. n, 15, 
1814. Chocchuma. —Durant (1843) in Sen. Doc. 168, 
28th Cong., 1st sess., 135, 1844. Choccomaws. — 
Pickett, Hist. Ala., I, 134, 1851. Chokchoomah.— 
Adair, Hist. Am. Ind., 66, 352, 1775. Choquichou- 
mans.— Iberville (1700) in Margry, D6c., IV, 430, 
1880. Chouchoumas. —Tonti (1684), ibid., 1,604,1875. 
Craw-fish band. —Catlin, N. A. Inds., 589, 1860. 
Ecrevisses rouges. —Du Pratz, La., n, 226, 1758. 
Red crayfish. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 126,1816. 
Red lobsters. —Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 163, 
1761. Saquechuma. —Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., II, 162,1850. Tchaoumas.— 
Martin, Hist. La., I, 280, 1827. Tchouchoumas. — 
La Salle ( ca . 1680) in Margry, D6c., ii, 198, 1877. 

Chakeipi ( Tch’akeipi , ‘at the beaver 
place’). An Atfalati band that lived 
about 10 m. w. of Oregon City, Oreg., be¬ 
fore the treaty of 1855.—Gatschet, Atfalati 
MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Chakeletsiwish (Klamath: ‘running 
with blood ’). A small Shoshonean set¬ 
tlement in Sprague Kiver valley, Oreg.; 
so named from a spring of reddish water. 
Tcha'kele Tsiwish.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Eth 
nol., II, pt. ii, xxxi, 1890. 

Chakihlako. A Creek town near the 
junction of Deep and North forks of Ca¬ 
nadian r., Ind. Ter. 

Tchaxki'lako.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., n, 186, 
1888. 

Chakkai. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on the e. side of Howe sd., Brit. 
Col. 

Tcakqai.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,1900. 

Chakpahu (Hopi: ‘speaker spring,’ or 
‘speaking spring’). A ruined pueblo on 
the rim of Antelope mesa, overlooking 
Jeditoh valley, in the Tusayan country, 
n. e. Arizona. It is regarded by the Hopi 
as one of three “Kawaika” pueblos—the 
others being Kawaika and Kokopki (?)— 
from which it may be assumed that it 
was built and occupied by Keresan 
people from New Mexico, "the name 
Kawaika being the Hopi designation of 
the present Keresan pueblo of Laguna. 


CHALAWAI tB. a.e. 

The ruin was first described and surveyed 
in 1885 by V. Mindeleff, of the Bureau of 
American Ethnology, and in 1893 James 
Mooney of that Bureau was present dur¬ 
ing the excavation by some Navaho of its 
main spring in which a sacrificial deposit 
of pottery vessels was uncovered. In 
ground-plan the ruin recalls those of the 
Rio Grande pueblos, well represented in 
the Payupki and Sikyatki ruins of Tusa¬ 
yan, but the Chakpahu pottery, noted 
for its excellence of texture and decora¬ 
tion, has little in common with that of 
Payupki, which was occupied within his¬ 
toric time, while it resembles closely the 
Sikyatki ware. This, coupled with the 
fact that one of the neighboring ruined 
Kawaika pueblos was traditionally occu¬ 
pied by Kokop clans, who lived also in 
Sikyatki, would indicate a connection 
between the Sikyatki and the Kawaika 
people, although the former are reputed 
to have come from Jemez. (j. w. f. ) 
Bat House. —Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 52, 
1891. Chak-pahu. —Mooney in Am. Anthrop., VI, 
284, 1893 (given as name of springs; transl. ‘little 
water’). Chapkaku. —Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1901, 336,1903 (misprint). Kawaika. —Fewkes in 
17th Rep. B. A. E., 590,1898 (name of spring and 
ruin; see Kawaika). To-alchln'di. —Mooney, op. 
cit. (given as Navaho name of springs; same 
meaning; mistake). 

Chakutpaliu. An Atfalati band formerly 
settled n. e. of Hillsboro, Washington 
co., Oreg. 

Tcha kutpaliu. —Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chakwaina. The Black Earth Kachina 
clan of the Hopi. 

Tca'-kwai-na. —Stephenin 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 
1891. Tcakwaina winwu. —Fewkes in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E.,584, 1900 (winw&=‘ clan’). Tca'-kwai-na 
wiin-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., VII, 404, 1894. 

Chakwayalham (‘summer town’). A 
former Wahkiakum town near Pillar 
rock, Columbia r., Oreg. 

Tcakwaya'lxam. —Boas, inf’n, 1905. 

Chala. A tribe mentioned by Hutchins 
in 1764 as living on the St Lawrence in 
connection with the Abnaki, Micmac, 
and Malecite, and having 130 warriors. 
Chalas. —Hutchins (1764) quoted by Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 553, 1853. Chatas.— Smith (1785), 
ibid. 

Chalahume. A Creek town of the 16th 
century, 3 days’ journey westward from 
Chiaha, about the present Columbus, Ga., 
and 2 leagues from Satapo, probably 
within the present limits of Alabama 
(Yandera, 1567, in Smith, Col. Doc. Fla., 
i, 18, 1857). The termination liume may 
be the Choctaw humci, ‘red.’ (a. s. g.) 

Chalal. An Atfalati band formerly 
settled near the outlet of Wapatoo lake, 
Yamhill co., Oreg. 

Tcha lal. —Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Chalawai. An Atfalati band that lived 
s. e. of Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg. 
They became extinct probably about 
1830. 


fetJLL. 36} 


CHALCEDONY-CHALTTMU 


233 


Tcha lawai.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E 
1877. 

Chalcedony. Under this head may be 
grouped a number of varieties of silica 
(see Quartz), including flint, chert, horn- 
stone, jasper, agate, novaculite in part, 
onyx, carnelian, etc., most of which were 
used by the aborigines in the manufac¬ 
ture of flaked implements. The distinc¬ 
tions between these rocks have not been 
sharply drawn by mineralogists, and the 
archeologist must be content with group¬ 
ing them according to their resemblance 
to recognized types. The term flint has 
come into somewhat general use among 
archeologists for the whole group, but 
this is not sanctioned by mineralogists. 
Chalcedony is a translucent and variously 
tinted indistinctly crystalline variety of 
silica. It is formed by infiltration in 
cavities in the older rocks, as a secondary 
product during decomposition of many 
rocks, and as accumulations of the sili¬ 
ceous residue from various organisms. 
It occurs as nodules distributed through 
sedimentary strata, as in the middle 
Mississippi valley; as thin, more or less 
interrupted layers, as in Wyandot cave, 
Indiana, and at Millcreek, Ill.; or as 
massive strata, as in Flint ridge, Ohio, 
and on the Peoria res., Ind. Ter. Flint 
(true flint), q. v., is formed as nodular 
segregations in chalky limestone, and is 
composed mainly of nearly amorphous 
silica and partially dissolved radiolaria 
and spicules of sponges. The colors are 
dark gray and brownish to nearly black, 
and somewhat translucent on thin edges. 
It occurs extensively in England, France, 
and n. w. Europe, and has recently been 
found in Arkansas and Texas, where it 
was used by the aborigines in making 
implements. Chert, as commonly recog¬ 
nized, differs from true flint in being 
lighter in color, as a rule, although vari¬ 
ously tinted and less translucent. It oc¬ 
curs in the limestones of a wide range of 
geological formations. The best-known 
deposits utilized by the Indians are on 
the Peoria res., near Seneca, Mo., and at 
Millcreek, Ill. Hornstone is the term 
usually applied to varieties of chalcedony 
displaying peculiar horn-like charac¬ 
teristics of toughness and translucency. 
Much of the nodular chalcedony of the 
Ohio valley, extensively employed by the 
aborigines in the manufacture of imple¬ 
ments and the blades and disks deposited 
in caches, has been known under this 
name. Jasper (q. v.) is a ferruginous 
variety of chalcedony, of red, yellow, and 
brownish tints. The greenish varieties 
are known as prase, and these when 
marked with red are called bloodstone. 
Numerous aboriginal quarries of jasper 
occur in e. Pennsylvania. Agate is a 
banded variety of chalcedony found 


mainly in cavities in igneous rocks. The 
natural colors are white to gray, passing 
into various delicate tints. Onyx is a 
banded variety of agate, but owing to 
fancied similarities the name has been, 
applied to certain calcareous deposits, as 
the so-called Mexican onyx. 

Consult Dana, System of Mineralogy, 
1892; Merrill, Rocks, Rock-weathering 
and Soils, 1897. See Mines and Quarries, 
Stone-work. (w. h. h. q. p. m.) 

Chalichiki (chali ‘blue corn’, child 
‘place of’ : ‘field of blue corn’). A 
Tarahumare rancheria near Palanquo, 
Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 
1894. 

Chalit. A Magemiut Eskimo village 
near Kuguklik r., Alaska; pop. 60 in 
1880, 358 in 1890. 

Chalitmiut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 

1899. Chalitmute.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 54, 
1884. 

Chaliuknak. A former Aleut village 
on Beaver bay, Unalaska id., Alaska.— 
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 

Chalkunts. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on Gambier id., Brit. Col. 
Tca'lkunts.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 

1900. 

Chalone. A division of the Costanoan 
family of California which resided e. of 
Soledad mission, with which they were 
connected. Chalone villages are men¬ 
tioned as follows: Aspasniagan, Chulare, 
Ekgiagan, Eslanagan, Goatcharones, Ich- 
enta, and Yumanagan. Eslanagan, how¬ 
ever, may be Esselen; the Goatcharones 
are undoubtedly the Wacharones of San 
Juan Bautista, and the Yumanagan are 
probably the Ymunacam of San Carlos 
mission, who are also ascribed to the 
Kalindaruk division, so that the consti¬ 
tution and limits of the Chalone are un¬ 
certain. Chalone peak and creek are 
named from them. (h. w. h.) 

Chalones.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,1860. 

Chalosas. A former Chumashan village 
on Santa Cruz id., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Tca-la-cuc.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Chalowe. A former pueblo of the Zuni, 
m. n. w. of Hawikuh. The ruins form 
a widely scattered series of dwelling 
clusters, which traditionally belonged to 
one people, known by the general name 
of Chalowe. It is said to have been in¬ 
habited at the time of the first arrival of 
the Spaniards. The general character 
and arrangement of the pueblo, however, 
are so different from the prevailing type 
in this region that it seems hardly prob¬ 
able that it belonged to the same people 
and to the same age as the other ruins.— 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1891. 

Chall-o-wha.—Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and 
Archseol., I, 101,1891. 

Chalumu. A Costanoan village for¬ 
merly situated a mile n. w. of Santa Cruz 


234 


CHAMADA-CHANSHUSHKA 


[b. a. e. 


mission, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 5, 1860. 

Chamada. A former rancheria of the 
Jova division of the Opata, near the 
Sonora-Chihuahua boundary, about lat. 
29°, Mexico. It appears to have been 
abandoned after 1690, the inhabitants 
finally moving to Sahuaripa.—Doc. of 
18th century quoted by Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 511, 1892. 

Chamampit. An Atfalati band which 
lived on Wapatoo er., at the e. end of 
Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg. 

Tcha mampit. —Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chamblee. See fihabonee. 

Chamhallach. A former village on 
French prairie, Marion co., Oreg., prob¬ 
ably belonging to the Ahantchuyuk.— 
Lyman in Oreg. Hist. Soc. Quar., i, 323, 
1900. 

Chamifu. The Lakmiut name of a San- 
tiam band on Yamhill cr., a w. tributary 
of Willamette r., Oreg. 

Teh’ammifu. —Gatschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chamifu. A Yamel band formerly liv¬ 
ing between the forks of Yamhill r., Yam¬ 
hill co., Oreg. 

Tcha mifu amim. —Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chamisso. A village of the Malemiut 
Eskimo on Chamisso id., in Eschscholtz 
bay, Alaska.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. 
A. E., map, 1899. 

E-ow-ick. —Beechey (1827) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1901 (native name). 

Chamiwi. The Lakmiut name of a 
Yamel band on Yamhill cr., a w. tribu¬ 
tary of Willamette r., and near Inde¬ 
pendence, Oreg. 

Tch’ammiwi. —Gatschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chamkhai. The name, in the upper Clear 
lake dialect, of a Porno band or village 
on the e. fork of Russian r., Cal. ( a . l. k. ) 
Champikle. A Yamel band on Dallas 
(La Creole) cr., a w. tributary of Willa¬ 
mette r., Oreg. 

Tch’ampikle ami'm. —Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. 
A. E., 1877. 

Champoeg. A Kalapooian village be¬ 
tween Chemeketa and Willamette falls, 
Oreg. It is not known to which division 
of the family it belonged. 

Champoeg. —Rees in Trans. Oreg. Pion. Assn., 25, 
1879. Champoicho. —Slocum (1837) in Sen. Doc. 
24, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 15,1838 (misprint). Cham- 
poicks. —Slocum (1835) in H. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 
3d sess., 42, 1839. 

Chananagi (‘ridge of land,’ or ‘hill 
ridge’). A former Upper Creek town e. 
of the site of Montgomery, Ala. 
Chanahuniege. —Giissefeld, map of U. S., 1784. 
Chanahunrege,— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., I, 
134, map, 1761. Cheurkany. —H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 
24th Cong.,310,1836. 

Chanatya. The extinct “Pegwood” 
(?) clan of the Keresan pueblo of Sia, 
N. Mex. 

Chanatya hano. —Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix,351, 
1896 ( hdno =‘ people ’). 


Chanchampenau. The Lakmiut name of 
aSantiam band formerly living e. of Wil¬ 
lamette r., Oreg. 

Tchantchampenau amim,—Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., 
B. A. E., 1877. 

Chanchantu. The Lakmiut name of a 
former Santiam band in Oregon. 
Tchan-tchantu amim.—Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. 
A. E., 1877. 

Chanco. A Powhatan Indian of Vir¬ 
ginia who gave timely warning to the 
English of the intended massacre by 
Opechancanough, in Mar., 1622, thus pre¬ 
serving a number of lives.—Drake, Bk. 
Inds., 361, 1880. 

Chanech. A Costanoan village for¬ 
merly situated near the mission of Santa 
Cruz* Cab, as stated by Friar Olbez in 
1819.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 
1860. 

Chaneleghatchee. Probably a former 
Creek town in Alabama, between Talla¬ 
poosa and Chattahoochee rs. (Robin, 
Voy., ir, map, 1807.) Not identifiable. 

Chanigtac. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chankaghaotina (‘dwellersinlogs’ [i. e., 
log huts?]). A division of the Wahpeton 
Sioux. 

Can-kaga-otina.—Dorsey (after Ashley) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 216, 1897. Tca n -kaxa-otina.—Ibid. 

Chankaokhan (‘sore back,’ referring to 
horses). A Hunkpapa division of the 
Teton Sioux. 

Cay-ho-ham'-pa.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Yal., 376, 1862. Caijka ohan.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897. Sore backs.—Culbertson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. Tcahka-oqa".— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897. 

Chankute (‘ shoot in the woods among 
the deciduous trees ’; a name of derision). 
A division of the Sisseton Sioux. 

Cay kute.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 
1897. Tca n -kute.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
iv ; 260, 1891. 

Chankute. A division of the Yankton 
Sioux. 

Barbarole.—Gass, Journal, 49, 1807. Cay kute.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.—Jonkta.— 
Gass, op. cit. (told by an Indian that he belonged 
to the Jonkta or Barbarole people). Tca n -kute,— 
Dorsey, op. cit. 

Chanona (‘ shoot at trees ’). A division 
of the Upper Yanktonai Sioux, from 
which sprang the Hohe or Assiniboin. 

Cay ona.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 
1897. Tca n -ona.—Ibid. Wazi-kute.—Ibid. (‘shoot¬ 
ers among the pines’). 

Chanshdachikana (from the name of 
the chief, otherwise known as Istahba, 
Sleepy Eyes). A division of the Sisseton 
Sioux. One of the Dakota bands below 
L. Traverse, Minn., formerly considered 
a part of the Kahmiatonwan. 

Caysdacikana.—S. R. Riggs, letter to Dorsey, 
1882. Sleepy Eyes band.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 60, 
102, 1860. 

Chanshushka (‘box elder’). An uni¬ 
dentified division of the Dakota. 


BULL. 30] 


CHANTAPETA’s BAND-CHARTIERSTOWN 


235 


Chan-shu'-shka.—Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 1885. 

Chantapeta’s Band. A Dakota division, 
probably a part or all of the Hunkpapa, 
so called from their chief, commonly 
known as Fire Heart.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 
117, 19th Cong., 1st sess., 6, 1826. 

Arrapapas.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st sess., 
63, 1832. Fire Heart’s band.—Ibid. 

Chantkaip. The Lakmiut name of a 
Santiam band formerly living below the 
junction of the Santiam forks, Oreg. 

Tchan tkaip.—Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A E., 
1877. 

Chants. A Squawmish village commu¬ 
nity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col. 

Tcants.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475,1900. 

Chaolgakhasdi. One of the stopping 
places of the Tsejinkini and Tsehtlani 
clans of the Navaho, where, according to 
their genesis myth, they lived long and 
cultivated corn. 

Tca‘olgaqasdi.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
111,91,1890. 

Chaonacha. A small tribe living, when 
first known, on Bayou La Fourche, a 
short distance below the present New 
Orleans, La. Although they had aided 
the French in their Indian wars, they 
fell under suspicion after the Natchez 
war, and in consequence were attacked 
and a number of the people massacred, in 
1730, by negro slaves acting under orders 
from the French governor, who had in 
view the double purpose of weakening 
the power of the Indians and of over¬ 
coming any projected combination be¬ 
tween them and the negroes. Subse¬ 
quently they seem to have removed to 
the w. side of the Mississippi, a little 
above their former position. (j. m.) 
Chaouachas.—P6nicaut (1703) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n. s., 1,85,1869. Chaouchas.—Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 126,1816. Chawachas.—Jefferys, 
French Dom. Am., I, 150, 1761. Chorouachas.— 
POiicaut (1713) in Margry, D6c., v, 506, 1883. 
Chouacas.—B. des Lozi6res, Vov. 41a La., 242,1802. 
Chouachas.—Dumont in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
V, 101, 1853. Tchaouachas. —P6nicaut (1703) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 1,85,1869. Tehacoa- 
chas.—Lattr£, map U. S., 1784. 

Chaoucoula. One of the 7 villages or 
tribes formerly constituting the Taensa 
confederacy.—Iberville in Margry, Dec., 
iv, 179, 1880. 

Chapana. A former village of Costa- 
noan Indians of central California, 
connected with the mission San Juan 
Bautista. — Engelhardt, Franciscans in 
California, 398, 1897. 

Chapanaghtin. An Atfalati band for¬ 
merly living n. of Hillsboro, Washington 
co., Oreg. 

Tcha panavtin.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chapokele. An Atfalati band formerly 
residing 4 m. w. of Wapatoo lake, Yam¬ 
hill co., Oreg. 

Tcapokele.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,1877. 

Chapticon. A tribe formerly living in St 
Mary or Charles co., Md., probably on 
Chaptico r. They were displaced in 1652 
by the whites and with other tribes were 


assigned a tract at the head of Wico¬ 
mico r. (j. m.) 

Chapticons.—Bozman, Maryland, ii, 421, 1837. 
Choptico.—Ibid., 468 (incorrectly (?) made syn¬ 
onymous with Porto-Back [Potapaco]). Chop- 
ticons.— Davis, Daystar, 196,1855. 

Chapugtac. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chapungathpi. An Atfalati band for¬ 
merly residing at Forest Grove, Wash¬ 
ington co., Oreg., and on Wapatoo lake. 
Tcha pungathpi,—-Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chaquantie. A tribe in 1700, described 
by Bienville (Margry, Dec. iv, 442, 
1880), on Indian information, as living 
on Red r. of Louisiana 4 days’ travel 
above the Kadohadacho, which would 
place them apparently in the n. e. corner 
of Texas. They have not been identified, 
but may have been of Caddo affinity and 
alliance. 

Charac. A Tehueco settlement on the 
Rio del Fuerte, about lat. 26° 15 r , n. w. 
Sinaloa, Mexico. Hardy mentions it as 
a Mayo pueblo, which is improbable, 
although it may have contained some 
people of that tribe. 

Charac.—Hardy, Travels in Mexico, 438, 1829. 
Charai.—Ibid., map. Charay.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., map, 1864. San Jose Charay.—Ibid., 332. 
Tscharai.—Kino, map (1702), in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 1726. 

Charco (Span.: ‘pool’). A Papago vil¬ 
lage in s. Arizona with 50 inhabitants in 
1858; probably identical with Chioro. 

Del Charco.—Baifey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858. 

Charco Escondido (‘hidden pool’). A 
locality about 9 leagues s. w. of Rey- 
nosa, between Matamoros and Victoria, in 
Tamaulipas, Mexico, one of the sections 
occupied by the Carrizo. 

Charcowa. A band, probably of the 
Chinookan tribe of Clowwewalla, found 
in 1806 on the w. bank of Willamette r., 
Oreg., just above the falls. Their num¬ 
ber was estimated at 200. 

Chahcowahs.—Lewis and ClarkExped., Coues ed., 
932,1893. Charcawah.—Kelley, Oregon, 68, 1830. 
Charcowah.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 474, 
1814. 

Charity. See Hospitality. 

Charlestown. A township in Washing¬ 
ton co., R. I., where a few mixed bloods, 
the remnants of the Narraganset and 
Nehantic, still live. (j. m.) 

Charms. See Fetishes , Problematical 
objects. 

Charnrokruit. A Sidarumiut Eskimo 
village on Seahorse ids., Arctic coast, 
Alaska.—11th Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Chartierstown. An Iroquois village, be¬ 
fore 1748, on the Ohio r., about 60 m. by 
water above Logstown, probably near 
Kittanning, Armstrong co., Pa. Peter 
Chartier was an influential Shawnee half- 
breed about that period. ( j. m. ) 

Charretier’s band.—Vaudreuil (1760) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., X, 1092,1858. Chartiers,—Alcedo, 


236 


CHASKPF—CHATAGSHISH 


[b. a. e. 


Die. Geog., I, 476, 1786. Chartiers Old-Town.— 
Weiser(1748) in Kauffman, W. Penn., app., 14, 
1851. Chartiers - Town.—Ibid. Old Showonese 
Town.—Ibid. 

Chaskpe. A tribe or people mentioned 
by La Salle in 1683 (Margry, D6c., n, 314, 
1877) as having come in company with 
the Shawnee and Ouabano at his solici¬ 
tation to Ft St Louis, 111., his desire being 
to draw them away from trade with the 
Spaniards. It is not known to what In¬ 
dians the name refers, but from the fact 
that La Salle speaks of them as allies 
of the Chickasaw, it is probable that 
their home was s. of the present Illinois. 

(j. m. c. T.) 

Chasmuna (‘ sandy ’). An unidentified 
Dakota division. 

Chasmu’na.—Boyd., Local Ind. Names, 7, 1885. 

Chasta. A tribe, probably Athapascan, 
residing on Siletz res., Oreg., in 1867, 
with the Skoton and Umpqua, of which 
latter they were then said to have formed 
a part. The Chasta, Skoton, and Umpqua 
were distinct tribes which concluded a 
treaty Nov. 18, 1854. The Chasta were 
divided into the Kwilsieton and Nahelta, 
both residing on Rogue r. J. 0. Dorsey 
thought these may have been identical 
with Kushetunne and Nakatkhetunne of 
the Tututunne. Kane, in 1859, located 
them near Umpqua r. In 1867 the 
Chasta, the Scoton, and the Umpqua 
together, at Siletz agency, numbered 49 
males and 74 females, total 123. They 
may be identical with the Chastacosta 
or form a part of the Takilma. They 
do not seem to have any connection with 
the Shasta, who did not extend down 
Rogue r. below Table Rock, and who 
were generally bitterly at war with their 
Athapascan neighbors. 

Chasta.—Parker, Jour., 257, 1840. Chasta band of 
Rogue Rivers.—Palmer in Rep. Ind. Aff., 464, 
1854. Chastay.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 182,1859. 
Haw-quo-e-hov-took.—Palmer in Rep. Ind. Aff., 
464, 1854. Illinois Creek bands.—Ibid. 

Chastacosta (Shista kurfosta, their name 
for themselves, meaning unknown). A 
group of Athapascan villages formerly 
situated along Rogue r., Oreg., mostly on 
its n. bank from its junction with Illinois 
r. nearly to the mouth of Applegate cr. 
The Tututunne, who did not differ from 
them in customs or language, were to 
the w. of them; the Coquille, differing 
slightly in language, were n. of them; and 
the Gallice (Tattushtuntude), with the 
same customs but a quite different dia¬ 
lect, to the e. The Takilma, an inde¬ 
pendent stock, were their s. neighbors, 
living on the s. bank of Rogue r. and on 
its s. tributaries. In the summer of 1856, 
after a few months of severe fighting with 
the whites, 153 of them, consisting of 53 
men, 61 women, 23 boys, 16 girls (Par¬ 
rish in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 357, 1858) 
were taken to Siletz res., Oreg., where 
now there are but a few individuals left. 


It is practically certain that nearly all 
the inhabitants of these villages were re¬ 
moved at this time. Considering the 
number of the villages—33 according to 
Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 234, 
1890), 19 according to an aged Gallice 
informant—this number is surprisingly 
small. The names of the villages, as 
given by Dorsey, usually referring to 
the people {-tun, -tunne) thereof, are 
Chetuttunne, Chunarghuttunne, Chun- 
setunneta, Chunsetunnetun, Chushtar- 
ghasuttun, Chusterghutmunnetun, 
Chuttushshunche, Khloshlekh wuche, 
Khotltacheche, Khtalutlitunne, Kthelut- 
litunne, Kushletata, Mekichuntun, Mus- 
me, Natkhwunche, Nishtuwekulsushtun, 
Sechukhtun, Senestun, Setaaye, Setsur- 
gheake, Sheethltunne, Silkhkemecheta- 
tun, Sinarghutlitun, Skurghut. Sukech une- 
tunne, Surghustesthitun, Tacnikhwutme, 
Takasichekhwut, Talsunme, Tatsunye, 
Thethlkhuttunne, Tisattunne, Tsetaame, 
Tsetutkhlalenitun, Tukulitlatun, Tukwil- 
isitunne, Tuslatunne. The following vil¬ 
lages may be synonymous with ones in 
the list: Klothchetunne, Sekhatsatunne, 
Tasunmatunne. (p. e. g. ) 

Atchashti ame'nmei.—Gatschet, Kalapuya MS., 
B. A. E., 31 (Atfalati name). Atchashti ammim.— 
Ibid. (Kalapuya name). Cas-ta-k’o'-sta tene.— 
Everette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans.: 

‘ people by the hills ’). Chasta Costa. —Newcomb 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162,1861. Ci'-sta kqwus'-ta.— 
Dorsey, Chasta Costa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 
(own name). Ci'-sta qwus'-ta qunne.—Dorsey, 
Chetco MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. Cistocootes.— 
Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 216, 1857. Ka- 
tuku.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Shasta name). 
Shastacosta.—Metcalfe in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 357, 
1858. Shasta Costa.—Abbott, MS. Coquille cen¬ 
sus, B. A. E., 1858. Shis-tah-cos-tahs.—Kautz, MS. 
Toutouten census, B. A. E., 1855. Shis-tah-koas- 
tah.—Ibid. Shis-ta-koos-tee.—Parrish in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1854, 495, 1855. Shis-ta-ku-sta.—Schu¬ 
macher in Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., in, 31, 
1877. Sisticoosta.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 
702, 1857. Walamskni.-j-Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. 
(Klamath name). Walamswash.—Gatschet, MS., 
B. A. E. (Modoc name). 

Chasta-Skoton. A tribe or two tribes 
(Chasta and Skoton) formerly living on 
or near Rogue r., Oreg., perhaps the 
Chastacosta or (Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 235, 1890) the Sestikustun. 
There were 36 on Grande Ronde res. and 
166 on Siletz res., Oreg., in 1875. 

Chasta-Scotans.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 62, 1872. Chasta 
Scoten.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 1863. 
Chasta Scoton.—U. S. Stat. at Large, x, 676, 1854. 
Shasta Scoton.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 495, 1854. Sko- 
ton-Shasta.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 253, 1877. 

Chatagihl {atdgihl =‘firewood bark’). 
An Atfalati settlement at the upper end 
of Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg. 

Tch atagi‘1.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Chatagithl. An Atfalati band formerly 
settled a mile s. w. of Wapatoo lake, 
Yamhill co., Oreg. Its last chief lived 
on Grande Ronde res. in 1878. 

Tch tagithl.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Chatagshish. A small Atfalati band 
formerly living in Washington co., Oreg. 


BULL. 30] 


CHATA KUIN-CHATUGA 


237 


Tcha tagshish.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E. 
1877. 

Chatakuin (atakuin refers to a tree). 
A. former Atfalati settlement 7 m. n. of 
Hillsboro, Washington co., Oreg. 

Teh' atakuin. —Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E 
1877. 

Chatamnei. An Atfalati band, long ex¬ 
tinct, that lived 10 m. n. of Wapatoo 
lake, in Washington co., Oreg. 

Tcha tamnei.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chatchini. A camping place not far from 
the Haida town of Kasaan, s. w. Alaska. 
As John Work gives it as the name of a 
town, the people of Kasaan may have had 
a permanent settlement there at one time. 
In 1836-41 it contained 249 inhabitants 
and 18 houses.—Swanton, field notes, 
1900-01. 

Chal-chu-nie. —Kane, Wand. N. A., app., 1859 (after 
Work, 1836-41). Chasinskoe. —Veniaminoff, Za- 
piski, II, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Chatcheeni. —Dawson, 
Queen Charlotte Ids., 173b, 1880 (simplified from 
Work). Chat-chee-nie. —Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes, 
V, 489, 1855 (after Work). Chatounic. —Can. Ind. 
Aff., 8, 1872. Chatsinahs. —Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
312, 1868. Tcatci'ni. —Swanton, Cont. Haida, 282, 
1905. 

Chatelaw (said to mean ‘ copper town’). 
A former Chickasaw town in n. Missis¬ 
sippi.—Romans, Fla., 63, 1775. 

Chatelech (‘ outside water ’). The pres¬ 
ent town of the Seechelt Indians on Trail 
bay, at the neck of Seechelt penin., Brit. 
Col. As a permanent settlement it dates 
only from Bishop Durien’s time ( ca. 
1890), not having been occupied before 
for fear of the Lekwiltok. 

TcatEletc. —Hill-Tout in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 21, 
1904. 

Chatilkuei. An Atfalati band formerly 
residing 5 m. w. of Wapatoo lake, in 
Yamhill co., Oreg. 

Tcha tilkuei.— Alatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chatinak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village 
near the mouth of Yukon r., Alaska; 
pop. 40 in 1880. Petroff, 10th Census, 
Alaska, 12, 1884. 

Catinakh. —Elliot, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886. 
Chatinak.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884. 
Chatinakh. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. 

Chatoksofki ( Chat aksufki, ‘ rock bluff ’). 
A former Upper Creek town in Talladega 
co., Ala., with 143 families in 1833. 
Chatoksofki, Abikudshi, Niuyaka, and 
Oakfuskee were anciently considered 
one town whose people met at one place 
for their annual busk, q. v. In former 
times these were the greatest ball play¬ 
ers of the Creeks. The few survivors are 
consolidated with the Eufaula in the 
Creek Nation, Ind. Ter., where a modern 
town known as Chatoksofki now exists. 

(a. s. g.) 

Chattoesofkar. —H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 140, 
1836. Chattofsofker. —Crawford (1836) in H. R. Doc. 
274,25thCong.,2d sess.,24,1838. Chat-tok-sof-ke. — 
Wyse, ibid., 61. Chattoksofker. —Jones et al., ibid., 
101. Chattossofkins. —Campbell,ibid.,20. Chotok- 
saufk. —Taylor, ibid., 71. Old Merrawnaytown. — 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 333, 1836. 


Chatot. A tribe or band which the 
French settled s. of Ft St Louis, on 
Mobile bay, Ala., in 1709. Bienville, 
wishing to change his settlement, “se¬ 
lected a place where the nation of the 
Chatots were residing, and gave them in 
exchange for it a piece of territory front¬ 
ing on l)og r., 2 leagues farther down” 
(Penicaut, 1709, in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
i, 103, 1869). According to Baudry des 
Lozieres (Voy., 1794) the Chatot and 
Tohome tribes were related to the Choc¬ 
taw and spoke the French and Choctaw 
languages. 

Chactots. —Jeflferys, French, Dom. Am., 162, 1761. 

Chats-hadai ( Teats xa/da-i, ‘Teats river 
people’). A subdivision of the Koetas, 
a Haida family belonging to the Kaigani 
group. They were probably so named 
from a camping place.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 272, 1905. 

Chattahoochee (Creek: chdtu ‘rock,’ lmt- 
chas ‘mark, design’: ‘pictured rocks’). 
A former Lower Creek town on the upper 
waters of Chattahoochee r., to which it 
gave its name; seemingly in the present 
Harris co., Ga. So called from some pic¬ 
tured rocks found at that point. The 
town was above Huthlitaiga, or War-ford, 
and it had probably been abandoned prior 
to Hawkins’ time (1798-99), as he alludes 
to it as the “old town Chattohoche,” not 
as an occupied village. (a. s. g.) 

Catahouche. —Giissefeld, map of U. S., 1784. Cato- 
hoche. —Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 134, map, 1761. 
Cattagochee. —Lattr<5, map U. S., 1784. Chatahoo- 
chas. —Romans, Florida, i, 280,1775. Chatahoosie. — 
Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 
1855. Chatahouchi. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 477, 
1786. Chata Uche.— Bartram, Travels, 462, 1792. 
Chat-to-ho-che. —Hawkins (1798-99), Sketch, 52, 
1848. Katahooche. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776. 
Tchattaouchi. —De l’lsle, map, in Winsor, Hist. 
Am., II, 295, 1886. 

Chattanooga (Cherokee: Tsatdnu'gl, 
meaning unknown.) The Cherokee name 
for a point on the creek entering Tennes¬ 
see r. at the city of Chattanooga, Tenn. 
The ancient name for the site of the pres¬ 
ent city of Chattanooga was A‘tia/nuw&, 
from tWnuwd ‘(hawk) hole.’ So far as 
is known there was no Cherokee settle¬ 
ment at the place, although some promi¬ 
nent men of the tribe lived in the vicin¬ 
ity.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 412, 
413, 1900. 

Chattooka. A village of the Neuse In¬ 
dians, formerly on the site of Newbern, 
N. C. Graffenried bought the tract from 
the owners in 1710 and planted a German 
colony on it, the Indians withdrawing 
probably to the Tuscarora, with whom 
they were on intimate terms, (j. m. ) 

Chatoueka.— Graffenried (1711) in N. C. Rec., i, 978, 
1886. Chattauqua. —Du Four (1885), ibid. Chat- 
tawka. —Graffenreid (1711), ibid., 910. Chattoka,— 
Lawson, map (1710) in Hawks, N. C., ii, 1858. 
Chattoocka. —Graffenried,op.cit.,933. Chattooka. — 
Lawson (1710), Hist. N. C., 384, 1860. 

Chatuga (also Chattooga, a corruption 
of the Cherokee Tsatu'gi , possibly mean- 


238 


CHATUKCHUFAULA-CHAUNIS TEMOATAN 


[b. a. e. 


ing ‘he drank by sips,’ or ‘he has crossed 
the stream and come out upon the other 
side,’ but more likely of foreign origin). 
The name of three Cherokee settlements: 

(1) An ancient village on Chattooga r., a 
headstream of Savannah r., on the boun¬ 
dary between South Carolina and Georgia; 

(2) probably situated on upper Tellico r., 
in Monroe co., Tenn.; (3) perhaps on 
Chattooga r., a tributary of the Coosa, in 
n. w. Georgia.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. 
A. E., 536, 1900. 

Chatuga. —Bartram, Travels, 371,1792. Chatugee. — 
Doc. of 1755 cited by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
142, 1887. 

Chatukchufaula. An Upper Creek town 
on Tallapoosa r., Ala., probably in Cham¬ 
bers co., settled apparently by theTalasse. 
Chalaacpauley.—Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft,Ind. 
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Chattukchufaule.—Hawkins 
(1813) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 852, 1832. 
Chetocchefaula.—Woodward, Reminis., 35, 1859 (a 
branch of the Talasse). 

Chaubaqueduck. A former village on 
Martha’s Vineyard, Mass., or on Chappa- 
quiddick id., just e. of it. In 1698 it had 
about 138 inhabitants. Boyd derives the 
word from chippi-aquidne, 1 separated 
island.’ 

Chappaquidgick.—Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., I, 
204, 1806. Chaubaqueduck.—Report of 1698, ibid., 
x, 131, 1809. 

Chaubatick. A village of the Narragan- 
set orNehantic in 1651, probably within a 
few miles of Providence, R. 1.—Williams 
(1651) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll. 3d s., ix, 
292, 1846. 

Chaudiere Noire. See Black Kettle. 

Chaui (‘in the middle.’—Grinnell). A 
tribe of the Pawnee confederacy, spoken 
of by the French as Grand Pawnee. In 
the positions maintained by the 4 tribes 
of the Pawnee confederacy the villages of 
the Chaui were always between those of 
the Pitahauerat on the e. and Kitkehahki 
on the w. In the council of the confed¬ 
eracy the Chaui held a prominent place, 
their head chiefs outranking all others, 
and being accepted as representative of the 
Pawnee, although without power to domi¬ 
nate all the tribes. Little that is distinc¬ 
tive is known of this tribe. In 1833 they 
ceded to the United States their lands s. 
of Platte r., Nebr., and in 1857 all lands 
on the n. side of that stream, when the 
Pawnee res. on Loup r. was established. 
This land was ceded in 1876 and their 
reservation in Oklahoma set apart. Here 
they now live. Having taken their lands 
in severalty, in 1892 they became citi¬ 
zens of the United States. They were 
included in the missions established 
among the Pawnee. In customs and 
beliefs the Chaui did not differ from 
their congeners. They possessed many 
interesting ceremonies, of which that con¬ 
nected with the calumet (q. v.) has been 
preserved entire and gives evidence of 
their well-defined cosmogony and relig¬ 
ious system. The divisions" and totems 


are not known. See Dunbar in Mag. 
Am. Hist., iv, v, vm, 1880-82; Fletcher, 
The Hako, 22d Rep. B. A. E., ir, 1904; 
Grinnell, Pawnee Hero Stories, 1889. 

(a. c. f. ) 

Cha'-ne. — Morgan in Smithson. Cont., xvii, 196, 
1871 (misprint.) Chau-i. —Grinnell, Pawnee Hero 
Stories, 215,1889. Cha'-we.— Morgan, op. cit., 286. 
Chowees. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 213, 1861. Grand Pans. — 
Gregg, Com. of Prairies, ii, 301, 1850 (so called by 
Canadians). Grand Par. —Lewis and Clark, Dis- 
cov., 17, 1806. Grand Paunee. —H. It. Ex. Doc. 
117, 19th Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1826. Grand Pawnee.— 
Pike, Exped., 143, 1810. Grands. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 
213, 1861. Grands Panis. —Du Lac, Voy. Louis- 
ianes, vij, 1805. Great Pawnee, —Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., I, map, 1814. Panai Proper. —Lewis and 
Clark,Trav. inAmer.,38, 1807. Panee.— Lewis and 
Clark, Discov., 17, 1806. Pania Proper. —Ibid.,62. 
Panias proper. —Ibid., 19. Panias propres. —Gass, 
Voyage, 417,1810. Payi n 'qtci.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Payi"qtsi. — 
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage 
name). Tcami'. —Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1882 (another Kansa name). Tcawi. —Dor¬ 
sey, (pegiha MS. Diet., B. A. E., 1878-80 (own 
name and Omaha name). Tcha-we. —Long, 
Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, lxxxv, 1823. Tsa'-u-i. — 
Gatschet, Pawnee MS. vocab., B. A. E. (own 
name). Tsawi.— Ibid. x au '"i.— Dunbar in Mag. 
Am. Hist., iv, 251, 1880. 

Chaunis Temoatan ( Chaun-istem-oatan , 
‘salt-making village.’—Tooker). A 
country situated, in 1586, indefinitely 
westward from the English settlement 
on Roanoke id., N. C. Ralph Lane, from 
misinterpreted Indian information, be¬ 
lieved it to have been a copper-producing 
region, and that it was situated “ vp that 
riuer Moratoc [Roanoke],” 20 days’ 
journey overland from the Mangoaks 
(Nottoway), who then dwelt about 
160 m. above the Roanoke settlement. 
Lane’s version of the Indian report shows 
that the Indians referred to salt making 
rather than copper mining. By Bozman, 
Bancroft, and others, this Indian report, 
as given by Lane, has been regarded as a 
fiction devised by a crafty Indian to lure 
the English to destruction; but Reynolds 
says that n. Georgia “corresponds as 
nearly as possible to the province of 
Chaunis Temoatan, described by distance 
and direction in Lane’s account,” while 
Tooker places it in the vicinity of Shaw- 
neetown, Gallatin co., Ill. In view of 
what Lane said of the Moratoc r. itself, 
the Indians probably referred to salt 
springs of the Kanawha and little Kana¬ 
wha valleys of West Virginia, or in the 
slopes and foothills of the Blue Ridge 
and Cumberland mts. “And for that 
not only Menatonon,” says Lane, “but 
also the sauages of Moratoc themselves 
doe report strange things of the head of 
that riuer, and that from Moratoc itself, 
which is a principal towne upon that 
River, it is thirtie dayes as some of them 
say, and some say fourtie dayes voyage 
to the head thereof, which head they say 
springeth out of a maine rocke in that 
abundance; that forthwith it maketh a 
most violent stream; and further, that 


BULL. 30] 


CHAUSHILA-CHEBOG 


239 


this huge rock standeth so neere unto a 
sea, that many times in stormes (the 
winds coming outwardly from the sea) 
the waues thereof are beaten into the 
said fresh streame, so that the fresh water 
for a certaine space, groweth salt and 
brackish.” From this it would appear 
that even the sources of the Roanoke 
were reputed to be 30 or 40 days’ journey 
from Moratoc town. 

Consult Lane in Hakluyt, Voy., hi, 
1810. Reynolds in Am. Anthrop., i, Oct., 
1888; Tooker in Am. Antiq., Jan., 1895. 

(j. N. B. H.) 

Chaushila. A Yokuts (Mariposan) tribe 
in central California, n. of Fresno r., proba¬ 
bly on lower Chowchilla r., in the plains 
and lowest foothills, their neighbors on 
the n. being of Moquelumnan stock. As 
a tribe they are now extinct. They are 
confused with, but are distinct from, the 
Chowchilla, under which name the syn¬ 
onymy of both is given. 

Chaushila.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (so pro¬ 
nounced by the Indians). 

Chautauqua. (Seneca: T’kenchiata (/ kw2 n , 
‘one has taken out fish there,’ referring 
to L. Chautauqua.—Hewitt). A sys¬ 
tem of popular education by means of 
lectures, reading circles, etc.; so called 
from Chautauqua, a village and lake in 
w. New York, where the Chautauqua 
Assembly (1874) and the Chautauqua 
Literary and Scientific Circle (1878) were 
founded under the auspices of Bishop 
Vincent of the Methodist Episcopal 
Church, by whom also a history of “The 
Chautauqua Movement” has been pub¬ 
lished. (a. f. c.) 

Chavite. A province w. of the Missis¬ 
sippi and near Washita r., Ark., which 
probably took its name from a tribe of 
the southern Caddoan group. De Soto’s 
troops passed through this country 
during the summer of 1542, and found 
the people making salt. See Biedma 
(1544) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 107, 
1850. 

Chawagis-stustae ( Tcawa'gts stAsta'-i, 
‘the Stustas from Low-tide r.’). A sub¬ 
division of the Stustas, a great Haida 
family of the Eagle clan. The creek 
where they camped and which gave 
them the name is on the coast a short 
distance s. of Naikun or Rose spit, Gra- 
hamid.,Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
276, 1905. 

TsiQua'gis stastaai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. N.W. Tribes 
Can., 23,1898. 

Chawakli. An ancient Lower Creek town 
on Apalachicola r., 12 m. below Ocheese 
Bluff, probably in Calhoun co., Fla. 
Its people were merged with the Eu- 
faula. 

Ehawho-ka-les.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364,1822. 

Chawakoni. A former Karok village on 
Klamath r., n. Cal.; exact location un¬ 
known. 


Cha-ma-ko-nec.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 161, 1853. Cha-ma-ko- 
nees.—Ibid., 215 (given as a Hupa division). 
Cham-ma-ko-nec.—Ibid., 194. Tscha-wa-co-nihs.— 
Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855. 

Chawayed. An Atfalati band formerly 
living w. of Forest Grove, in Washington 
co., Oreg. 

Tcha waye'd.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chawopo. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, at the mouth of 
Chipoak cr., Surry co., Va. 

Chawopo.—Smith (1629), Va., I, map, repr. 1819. 
Chawopoweanock.—Pots in Smith, ibid., 204 (in¬ 
correct combination of Chawopo and Weanock). 

Chawulktit. The Lakmiut name of a 
camping place of the Calapooya on the 
forks of Yamhill r., aw. affluent of Wil¬ 
lamette r., Oreg. 

Tcha wulktit.—Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 
1877. 

Chayen. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chayopin. One of the tribes named 
by Garcia (Manual, title, 1760) as living 
at the missions about Rio San Antonio 
and Rio Grande in Texas, and identified 
by Mooney as a division of the Tonkawa. 
In 1785 there was a rancheria called 
Chayopin, with 8 inhabitants, near the 
presidio of La Bahia (the present Goliad) 
and the mission of Espfritu Santo de 
Zuniga, on the lower San Antonio (Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 659, 1886). 

Chapopines.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17,1863 
(misprint). 

Chedlo. A province of New Mexico in 
1598, supposed to have been situated e. 
of the Rio Grande in the vicinity of the 
Salinas (Onate, 1598, in Doc. Ined., xvi, 
118,1871). It evidently pertained to the 
Tigua or the Piros. See Salineros. 

Cheam. A town said to belong to the 
Pilalt, a Cowichan tribe of lower Chilli¬ 
wack r., Brit. Col., but evidently con¬ 
taining representatives of other tribes as 
well; pop. 100 in 1902. 

Che-ahm.—Brit. Col.map,Victoria, 1872. Cheam.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 158,1901. Tce'iam.—Boas in 
Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894. 

Chebacco. A sort of boat, thus defined 
by Bartlett (Diet, of Americanisms, 111, 
1877): “ Chebacco boat. A description of 
fishing vessel employed in the Newfound¬ 
land fisheries. So called from Chebacco 
parish, Ipswich, Mass., where many were 
fitted out. They are also called pink- 
sterns, and sometimes tobacco-boats.” 
The last name is probably a corruption 
of the first. Dr Murray, in the Oxford 
Dictionary, inclines to believe that the 
place may have been named from the 
boat, in which case Chebacco would be 
related to Xebec , etc. But it is probably 
from the Massachuset dialect of Algon- 
quian. (a. f. c.) 

Chebog. A name of the menhaden, 
from one of the eastern dialects of the 


240 


CHEBONTES-CHEG WALTS 


[B. A. E. 


Algonquian stock, probably Narraganset 
or Massachuset. (a. f. c. ) 

Chebontes. A tribe mentioned in 1853 
(Wessells in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 32, 1857) as living s. e. 
of Tulare lake, Cal. Supposed from the 
location and association to be Mariposan, 
though possibly Shoshonean. 

Cheboygan ( Kichibwagan , ‘a large 
pipe.’—Hewitt). An Ottawa band for¬ 
merly living on Cheboygan r., Cheboy¬ 
gan co., Mich. By treaty of July 31,1855, 
they were granted 2 townships about 
Burts lake; subsequently lands were al¬ 
lotted to them in severalty and the surplus 
restored to the public domain by acts of 
Congress of June 10,1872, and May23,1876. 

Cheboigan band.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 478, 
1853. Cheboygan. —Detroit treaty (1855) in U. S. 
Ind. Treat., 615,1873. Cibaiigan.—W. Jones, inf’n, 
1905. 

Chechawkose (diminutive of chi'-chdk , 
crane: * Little Crane.’—Dunn). A Pota- 
wotami chief who lived at a village com¬ 
monly called “Chechawkose’s village,” 
on the s. side of Tippecanoe r. , about Har¬ 
rison tp., Kosciusko co., Ind. The reserve 
was sold in 1836. Also spelled Chee- 
chawkose and Chitchakos. (j. m.) 

Chechelmen. A Squawmish village 
community on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col. 
TcetceTmen.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 
1900. 

Chechilkok. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity at Seymour cr., Burrard inlet, 
Brit. Col.; pop. 44 in 1902. 

Creek.—Seymour in Can. Ind. Aff.,pt.n, 160,1900. 
Tcetcilqok.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475, 
1900. 

Chechinquamin. See Chinquapin. 

Checopissowo. A village of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on Rappa¬ 
hannock r., above Tobacco cr., in Caroline 
co., Ya.—Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, 
repr. 1819. 

Checout. See Chickwit. 

Chedtokhanye (‘big buffalo bull’). A 
subgens of the Arukhwa, the Buffalo gens 
of the Iowa. 

Tce-^o' qa“'-ye.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239, 
1897. 

Chedtoyine (‘ young buffalo bull ’). A 
subgens of the Arukhwa, the Buffalo gens 
of the Iowa. 

Tce-^o yin'-e.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239, 
1897. 

Cbedunga (‘buffalo bull,’ or ‘buffalo 
with dark hair ’). A Kansa gens, the 6th 
on the Yata side of the tribal circle. Its 
subgentes are Chedunga and Yukhe. 

Buffalo.—Morgan. Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Buffalo 
bull.—Dorsey in Am. Natural., 671, July, 1885. 
Che-dong-ga.—Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1877. Mo-e-kwe-ah-ha.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 
1877. Si-tanga.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., 
B. A. E.,1882 (sig. ‘bigfoot’). Tcedunga.—Dorsey 
in Am. Natural., 671, July, 1885. Wadjutatanga.— 
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (sig. 
‘ big quadruped’). 

Chedunga. A subgens of the Chedunga 
gens of the Kansa. 

Tcedunga.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 232,1897. 


Cheechawkose. See Chechawkose. 

Cheerno. A body of Songish at Beecher 
bay, s. e. end of Vancouver id. It per¬ 
haps incl udes the Kekayaken gens. Pop. 
48 in 1902. 

Cheerno.—Can. Ind. Aff., 66, 1902. Tche-a-nook.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 308,1879 (probably the same). 

Cheeshateaumuck, Caleb. The only New 
England Indian in early days who com¬ 
pleted his studies at Harvard College, 
taking his degree in 1666. He died of 
consumption. (a. f. c.) 

Cheesoheha. A former Cherokee settle¬ 
ment on a branch of Savannah r., in upper 
South Carolina; destroyed during the 
Revolutionary war. (j. m. ) 

Cheewack. A body of Salish under Wil¬ 
liams L'ake agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 9 in 
1891, when the name last appears. 
Chawack.—Can. Ind. Aff. 78, 1878. Cheewack.— 
Ibid., 251,1891. 

Chefixico’s Old Town. A Seminole set¬ 
tlement formerly on the s. side of Old 
Tallahassee lake, 5 m. e. of Tallahassee, 
Fla.—Roberts, Florida, 1763. 

Chefoklak. A Chnagmiut village near 
the head of the Yukon delta, Alaska; 
pop. 26 in 1880. 

Chefokhlagamute. —Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 
54, 1884. 

Cheghita (‘eagle’). A Missouri gens 
with the Wakanta, Khra, Kretan, and 
Momi subgentes.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 240, 1897. 

Eagle people.—Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab., B. A. 
E., 1879. Tce'xi-ta.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
240, 1897. Thunder-bird.—Dorsey, Tciwere MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1879. Wakanta.—Ibid. 

Cheghita. An Oto gens. 

Eagle.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. KHa'-a.— 
Ibid. ( = ‘ eagle’ [?]; cf. Khra). Tpe'-xi-ta.—Dor¬ 
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240,1897. 

Cheghita. An Iowa gens. Its sub¬ 
gentes are Nachiche, Khrahune, Khra- 
kreye, and Khrapathan. 

Cheh'-he-ta.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Ea¬ 
gle.—Ibid. Tce'-xi-ta.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. 
A. E., 238, 1897. 

Cheghulin (‘village on the open 
prairie ’). A former Kansa village on the 
s. side of Kansas r., Kans. 

Tcexuli n .—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1882. 

Cheghulin. A Kansa village, evidently 
named after the earlier settlement of that 
name; situated on a tributary of Kansas 
r., on the n. side, e. of Blue r., Kans. 
Tcexuli 0 . — Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab.,B. A. E.,1882. 

Chegnakeokisela (‘half breechcloth’). 
A division of the Hunkpapa Teton Sioux. 
Born in the middle.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 141, 1851. Cegnake-okisela.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897. Ce'-lia-na-ka'.—Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 376,1862 (‘three- 
cornered cloth ’). Half breech clout people. —Cul¬ 
bertson, op. cit. Tcegnake-okisela.—Dorsey, op. cit. 

Chegoli. A former town on the e. bank 
of Tallapoosa r., Ala. (Bartram, Trav., 
i, map, 1799). Not identified, but prob¬ 
ably Creek. 

Chegwalis (‘spotted frog’). A gens of 
the Abnaki. 


BI LL. 30] 


CHEHALIS-CHEKILLI 


241 


Chehalis. A collective name for several 
Salishan tribes on Chehalis r. and its 
affluents, and on Grays harbor, Wash. 
Gibbs states that it belongs strictly to a 
village at the entrance of Grays harbor, 
and signifies ‘ sand.’ There were 5 princi¬ 
pal villages on the river, and 7 on the n. 
and 8 on the s. side of the bay; there were 
also a few villages on the n. end of Shoal- 
water bay. By many writers they are 
divided into Upper Chehalis or Kwaiailk 
(q. v.), dwelling above Satsop r., and the 
Lower Chehalis from that point down. 
The following subdivisions are men¬ 
tioned, some of which were single villages, 
while others probably embraced people 
living in several: Chiklisilkh,Cloquallum, 
Hoquiam, Hooshkal, Humptulips, Kish- 
kallen,Klimmim,Klumaitumsh,Koalekt, 
Nickomin, Nooachhummilh, Noohoo- 
ultch, Nookalthu, Noosiatsks, Nooskoh, 
Satsop, VVenatchi, Whiskah. The Satsop 
speak a dialect distinct from the others. 
In 1806 Lewis and Clark assigned to them 
a population of 700 in 38 lodges. In 1904 
there were 147 Chehalis and 21 Hump- 
tulips under the Puyallup school super¬ 
intendent, Wash. (n. w. h. j. r. s.) 
Atchixe'lish. —Gatschet, Calapooya MS. vocab., 31, 
B. A. E. (Calapooya name). Chachelis.—Fram¬ 
boise quoted by Gairdner in Jour. Geog. Soc. 
Lond., xi, 255, 1841. Chealis.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 12,1863. Chebaylis.— Lane in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 162, 1850. Checaldish.—Lee and Frost, 
Ten Years in Oregon, 99, 1844. Checalish.—Ibid., 
103. Chechili.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 71,1856. Cheehales.—Dartinlnd. Aft'. Rep., 
215,1851. Cheenales.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 
map, 200, 1853. Chehalis.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. 

A. E., pi. lxxxviii, 1896. Chehaylis. —Lane (1849) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc.52, 31stCong., lstsess., 174, 1850. 
Chekalis. —Townsend, Narr., 175,1839. Chekilis. — 
Duflot de Mofras, Expl. de l’Or£g., n, 335,1844. 
Chick-a-lees. —Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 172, 1852. 
Chickeeles. —Wilkes, West. Am., 88, 1849. Chic- 
kelis. —Ross, Adventures, 87, 1849. Chihales. — 
Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 447, 1854. Chihalis. — 
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 435, 1855. Chihee- 
lees.— Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
i, 249, 1848. Chiheeleesh —Drake, Book Inds., 
vii, 1848. Chihelish. —Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
368,1822. Chikailish. —Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., 
Vi, 211, 1846. Chikalish. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Ethnol.Soc.,li,20,1848. Chikeelis. —Scouler(1846) 
in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 235, 1848. Chike- 
lis.— Farnham, Travels, 112, 1843. Chikilishes. — 
Domenech, Deserts, u, 56,1860. Chikoilish. —Hale 
in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 198, 1846. Chillates. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 571, 1853. Chilts.— 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, map, 1814. Chiltz. — 
Gass, Jour., 189,1807. Ehihalis. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, V, 490, 1853. Ilgat.— Gatschet, MS. vocab., 

B. A. E., 1877 (Nestucca name). Staq-tubc.— 
McCaw, Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Pu¬ 
yallup name: ‘inland people’). Tcheheles.—De 
Smet, Letters, 231, 1843. Tchikeylis.—Franchdre, 
Narr., 124, 1854. Tclts-hets.—Eells in letter of 
Feb., 1886 (own name). Tsehalish.—Gray, Letter 
to Gibbs, B. A. E., 1869. Tsheheilis.—Tolmieand 
Dawson, Vocabs., B. C., 121b, 1884. Tsihaili- 
Selish.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., yi, 211, 1846. 
Tsihailish.—Ibid. Tsihalis.—Gibbs in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., i, 171,1877. Tsi-he-lis.—Eells in letter 
of Feb., 1886. 

Chehalis (StsEe'lis ). A Cowichan tribe 
living along the middle course of Harri- 
eon r., Brit. Col. Chehalis and Koalekt 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-16 


were their villages. Pop. (of tribe or vil¬ 
lage) 112 in 1902. 

Chehales. —Can. Ind. Aff. for 1880,317. Chehalis.— 
Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 158. Saelis. —Brit. Col. map, 
Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. StsEe'lis. —Boas in Rep. 
Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1899 (the village). 

Cnehelu. A clan of the Acheha phratry 
of the ancient Timucua in Florida.— 
Pareja ( ca . 1612) quoted by Gatschet 
in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., 492, 1878. 

Cheikikarachada (‘ they call themselves 
after a buffalo ’). A Winnebago gens. 
Buffalo.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157, 1877. Cha'-ra.— 
Ibid. Tcei-ki'-ka-ra'-tca-da. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E. 240,1897. 

Chein. Mentioned by Oiiate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598; doubtless situated in the 
Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, and in all 
probability occupied by the Tigua or the 
Piros. 

Cheindekhotding (‘ place where he was 
dug up’). A Hupa village on Trinity 
r., Cal. 

Chan-ta-ko-da.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
Ill, 73, 1877. Tceindeqotdin.— Goddard, Hupa, 13, 
1903. 

Chekase’s Village. A former Potawatomi 
village on the w. side of Tippecanoe r., be¬ 
tween Warsaw and Monoquet, Kosciusko 
co., Ind. The reserve on which it was sit¬ 
uated was sold in 1836. The name, which is 
also spelled Checose and Chicase ( chakosi , 
‘short of stature’), is that of a chief who 
formerly resided there. (j. m.) 

Chekhuhaton (‘kettle with legs’). A 
band of the Oglala Teton Sioux. 
6eii-huha-tog.—Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E.,220,1897. Tceq-huha-to".—Ibid. 

Chekilli (from achikillds, ‘making a 
short step backward.’—Gatschet). The 
principal chief of the Creek confederacy 
at the period of the settlement of the 
Georgia colony in 1733, having succeeded 
the “Emperor Bream” on the death of 
the latter. He appears to have been 
one of the Creeks who visited England 
with Tomochichi in that year. In 1735, 
as “Emperor of the Upper and Lower 
Creeks,” he headed a delegation in a 
council with the English at Savannah, 
on which occasion he recited the na¬ 
tional legend of the Creeks, as recorded 
in pictographs upon a buffalo skin, which 
was delivered to the commissioners and 
afterward hung up in the London office 
of the colony. It is now lost, but the 
translation has been preserved, and has 
been made the subject of a brief paper 
by Brinton and an extended notice by 
Gatschet. In 1752 Chekilli was residing 
at Coweta, and although still regarded as 
principal ruler of the confederacy had 
delegated his active authority to Malatche, 
the war chief, a younger man. The name 
appears also as Chiggilli and Tchikilfi. 
See Bosom worth, MS. Jour., 1752, copy 
in B. A. E.; Brinton, Nat. Leg. Chahta- 



242 


CHEKOALCH-CHEMEHUEVI 


[b. a. e. 


Muskokee Tribes, in Hist. Mag., Feb., 
1870; Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, n, 
1884, 1888. (j. m.) 

Chekoalch. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col. 
Tceko'altc.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 
1900. 

Chekwa (prob. from ching'wtfL, ‘ thunder 
rolls’). Given by Morgan (Anc. Soc., 
167, 1878) as the Thunder gens of the 
Potawatomi. 

Chelamela. A small division of the 
Kalapooian family formerly living on 
Long Tom cr., a w. tributary of Willa¬ 
mette r., Oreg. They were included in 
the Dayton treaty of 1855. Nothing is 
known of their customs, and they are 
now extinct. 

Chelamela.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1865), 19, 1873. 
La-malle. — Ross, Adventures, 236, 1849. Long 
Tom.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 19,1873. 

Cheli. The Spruce clan of the Tewa 
pueblo of Hano, Ariz. 

Ca'-la-bi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. K., 39, 1891 
(Hopi name). Tce'-li.—Ibid. (own name). 
Ts'-co.— Ibid. (Navaho name). 

Chelly (pron. shay-ee, frequently shay , 
Spanish corruption of Navaho Tse'gi, or 
Tseyi, ‘among the cliffs.’—Matthews). A 
canyon on the Navaho res., n. e. Ariz., in 
which are numerous ancient cliff-dwell¬ 
ings. Cort6z in 1799 (Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, 
pt. 3, 119, 1856) gave the name (Chell6) 
to a Navaho settlement, but this is true 
only in so far as the canyon contains 
numerous scattered hogans or huts. 

Chemanis. A Cowichan settlement on 
the e. coast of Vancouver id., presumably 
on the bay of the same name. 

Chem&inis.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1891, map. Che- 
manis.—Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. 

Chemapho. Mentioned in the Dayton 
treaty of 1855 as a Kalapooian band. 
Chem-a-pho.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 19, 1873. 
Maddy Band.—Ibid. 

Chemehuevi. A Shoshpnean tribe, ap¬ 
parently an offshoot of the Paiute, for¬ 
merly inhabiting the e. bank of the Rio 
Colorado from Bill Williams fork to the 
Needles and extending westward as far as 
Providence mts., Cal., their chief seat 
being Chemehuevi valley, which stretches 
for 5 m. along the Colorado and nearly 
as far on either side. When or how 
they acquired possession of what appears 
to have been Yuman territory is not 
known. They may possibly have been 
seen by Alarcon, who navigated the Rio 
Colorado in 1540; but if so, they are not 
mentioned by name. Probably the first 
definite reference to the Chemehuevi is 
that by Fray Francisco Garces, who 
passed through their country in journey¬ 
ing from the Yuma to the Mohave, and 
again from lower Kern r. to the latter 
tribe on his way to the pueblo of Oraibi 
in n. e. Arizona in 1775-76. Among the 
Indians whom Garc6s saw, or of whom 
he heard, are the Chemegue, Chemegue 
Cuajdla, Chemegue Sevinta, and Che- 


meguaba, the first and last mentioned 
being apparently the Chemehuevi, while 
the others are the Virgin River Paiute 
and Shivwits, respectively, “Chemegu6” 
here being used somewhat in the sense 
of denoting Shoshonean affinity. In 
passing down the Colorado from the Mo¬ 
have rancherias Garces does not mention 
any Chemehuevi or other Indians in 
Chemehuevi valley or elsewhere on the 
river until the Yuman Alchedoma 
(“ Jalchedunes ”), some distance below, 
were reached. He found the Cheme¬ 
huevi in the desert immediately s. w,, 
w., and n. w. of the Mohave. The same 
observer remarks that they wore Apache 
moccasins, antelope-skin shirts, and a 
white headdress like a cap, ornamented 
with the' crest feathers of a bird, proba¬ 
bly the roadrunner. They were very 
swift of foot, were friends of the Ute 
(Paiute?), Yavapai Tejua, and Mohave, 
and when the latter “break their weap¬ 
ons ’ ’ (keep the peace), so do they also. It 
is said that they occupied at this time the 
country between the Benem4 (Panamint 
and Serrano) and the Colorado “on the n. 
side” as far as the Ute, and extending 
to another river, n. of the Colorado, where 
they had their fields. They made bas¬ 
kets, and those whom Garces saw “all 
carried a crook besides their weapons,” 
which was used for pulling gophers, rab¬ 
bits, etc., from their burrows. Their lan¬ 
guage was noted as distinct from that of 
the other Rio Colorado tribes, as in fact 
it is, these being Yuman (see Garces, 
Diary, Coues ed., op.cit., 1900; Heintzel- 
man (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 1857; Pacific R. R. Rep., 
in, pt. 3, 1856). Physically the Cheme¬ 
huevi appear to have been inferior to the 
Yuma and Mohave. Ives properly cred¬ 
its them with being a wandering people, 
traveling “great distances on hunting 
and predatory excursions, ’ ’ and although 
they did live mainly on the natural 
products of the desert, they farmed on i 
small scale where possible. Like the 
other Colorado r. tribes, they had no 
canoes, but used rafts made of bundles 
of reeds. Their number was estimated by 
Leroux about 1853 at 1,500, probably an 
excessive estimate for the whole tribe; 
in 1866 Thomas estimated their popula¬ 
tion at 750. In 1903 there were 300 on 
the Colorado River res. and probably a 
few under the Moapa agency. It is also 
likely that a few are not under any 
agent but roam as Paiute. Of the organ¬ 
ization of the Chemehuevi nothing posi¬ 
tive is known. Palonies is mentioned 
by Hoffman (Bull. Essex Inst., xvn, 28, 
1885) as a subdivision. (h.w.h. a.l.k. ) 
Ah’alakat.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 160,1885 
(‘small bows’: Pima name). Che-ma-hua-vas.— 
Thomas, Yuma MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1868. 
Che-ma-wa-was.—Heintzelman (1853) in H. R. 


BULL. 30] 


CHEMEKETAS-CH ENT A N SITZ AIV 


243 


Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 1857. Chemchue- 
vis.— Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 131,1881 (mis¬ 
print). Chemebet. —Garc6s (1775-76), Diary, 219, 
1900. Chemegerabas.— Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 
57,1850 (misquoted from Ruxton). Chemeguaba. — 
Garc6s (1775-76), Diary, 353, 1900. Chemeguava.— 
Escudero, Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 228, 1834. 
Chemegue.— Garc6s (1775-76), Diary, 444, 1900 
(mentioned separately from “ Chemeguaba,” but 
doubtless the same). Chemehnevis. —Haines, Am. 
Ind., 139, 1888 (misprint). Chemehuevas. —Cush¬ 
ing in Atl. Wo., 544, Oct., 1882.— Chem-e-hue-vis.— 
Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., ill, pt. 3, 16, 1856. 
Chemehuevis. —Ives, Col. Riv., 54, 1861 (mis¬ 
print). Chem-e-hue-vitz. —Ibid. Chemehuewas. — 
Jones in Ind. AIT. Rep. 1869, 215, 1870. Chemeona- 
has.— Mayer, Mexico, ir, 38, 1854. Chemequaba. — 
Cortez (1799) quoted in Pac. R. R. Rep., m, pt. 3, 
126,1856. Chemeque. —Ibid, (see Cliemegue above). 
Chemiguabos. —Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., II, 276, 1850 (misquoting Ruxton). Che- 
miheavis.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 578, 1865. Chemihua- 
hua. —Gibbs, MS. letter to Higgins, B. A. E., 1866. 
Chemihuaras. —Maltby in Ind. Alf. Rep., 94, 1866. 
Chemihuaves, —Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., 1866. Chemi- 
huevas. —Antisell in Pac. R. R. Rep., vii, pt. 4,104, 
1854. Chemihuevis. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
12, 1863. Cheminares. —Maltby in Ind. AfT. Rep., 
94,1866. Chimawava. —Adams in H. R. Misc. Doc. 
12, 41st Cong., 3d sess., 12, 1870. Chimchinves. — 
Maltby in Ind. AfT. Rep., 102,1866. Chimehuevas. — 
Ehrenberg in Ind. AfT. Rep., 139, 1865. Chime- 
hueve. —Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 189, 
1883. Chimehwhuebes. —Mollhausen, Pacific, n, 
274, 1858. Chimewawas of Arizona. —Ingalls in H. 
R. Ex. Doc. 66, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 2, 1873. Chim- 
huevas. —Ind. AfT. Rep., 175, 1875. Chi-mi-hua- 
hua.— Heintzelman in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 44, 1857. Chimohueois. —Bourke, 
Moquis of Ariz., 228, 1884. Chim-ue-hue-vas. — 
Hodge, Arizona, 159, 1877. Chim-woy-os. —Whip¬ 
ple, Exped., 17,1851. Eche-mo-hua-vas .—Thomas, 
Yuma MS. vocab, B. A. E., 1868. Echi-mo-hua- 
vas. —Ibid. Itchi-mehueves. —Gatschet,MS., B. A.E. 
(Mohaveand Walapai name). Kemahwivi. —Ind. 
AfT. Iiep., 246, 1877. Mat-hat-e-vatch. —Whipple, 
Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, pt. 3, 16, map, 1856 (Yuma 
name [‘northerners’]). Mat-jus. —Heintzelman 
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 44, 
1857. Simojueves.— Froebel, Seven Years’ Trav., 
511, 1859. Tantawait. —Ind. AfT. Rep., 251, 1877. 
Ta'n-ta'wats.— Powell, MS.. B. A. E (‘southern 
men own name). Tontewaits. —ten Kate, Reizen 
in N. Am., 122, 1885. 

Chemeketas. Supposed to have been 
one of the Kalapooian bands formerly 
near Salem, Oreg.—Ingersoll in Harper’s 
Mag., 769, Oct., 1882. 

Chemetunne (‘people on the ocean 
coast’). A Tututunne village or group 
of villages formerly at the mouth of 
Rogue r., Oreg. The people were taken 
to Siletz res., Oreg., in June, 1856. A few 
individuals are still to be found on that 
reservation, where they are officially 
known as Joshuas, a corruption of Ya'-shu , 
their Alsea name; and a few others still 
live near their old home. 

I-a'cu-we tene.— Everette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. 
E., 1883 (trans.: ‘people by the mossy swamp’). 
Joshua. —Newcomb in Ind. AfT. Rep., 162, 1861. 
Joshuta.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 22, 1861. 
Joshuts. —Palmer in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1856,219,1857. 
Tce'-me. —Dorsey, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1884 
(‘on the coast of the ocean’: Tututunne name). 
Tce-me' tene. —Everette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 
1883 (trans.: ‘people by the mossy water’). Tce-me' 
qunne. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 233, 
1890. Tce-me'* tunne.— Dorsey, Coquille MS. vo¬ 
cab., B. A. E., 1884 (Coquille name). Ya'-cu.— 
Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 

(pron. Ya'-shu, Alsea name, the term from which 
“Joshua” is derived). Ya'-cu-me'^unne. —Dor¬ 
sey, Chetco MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chetco 


name). Yah-shoots, —Gibbs, MS. on coast tribes 
Oregon, B. A. E., 1856. Yahshutes. —Ind. AfT. 
Rep. 1854 , 496, 1855. Yash-ue. —Abbott, MS. Co¬ 
quille census, B. A. E., 1858. Ya-su-chah, —Pres. 
Mess., Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1852. 
Yasuchaha. —Domenech, Deserts N. Am., i, map, 
1860. Yasuchan. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 
maps, 96,200,1853. Ya-sut. —Schumacher in Bull. 
G. and G. Surv., in, 31, 1877. Yoshuway. —Ever¬ 
ette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 

Chemisez (apparently from Spanish 
chamizo, a species of small cane). A 
Pima village on the Rio Gila in Arizona; 
pop. 312 in 1858.—Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
208, 1858. 

Chemung. An Iroquois village, prob¬ 
ably of the Seneca, formerly on or near 
the site of the present Chemung, N. Y. 
It was destroyed by Sullivan in 1779. 
An older village of the name stood about 
3 m. farther down Chemung r. (j. m. ) 
Chemeney. —Pemberton (ca . 1792) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st sess., n, 176, 1810. Chemong.— Jones 
(1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 785, 1857. 
Chemung. —Livermore (1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., VI, 321, 1850. 

Chenachaath ( Tc’ e'natc’ aatli ). A division 
of the Toquart, a Nootka tribe.—Boas in 
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890. 

Chenango (Seneca: Ochenango, Targe bull 
thistles.’—Hewitt). A former village on 
the river of the same name, about Bing¬ 
hamton, Broome co., N. Y. It was set¬ 
tled in 1748 by the Nanticoke from Mary¬ 
land, under Iroquois protection. Soon 
thereafter they were joined by a part of 
the Shawnee, together with remnants of 
the Mahican and Wappinger tribes. The 
whole body moved w. about the begin¬ 
ning of the French and Indian war in 
1754, and were mostly incorporated with 
the Delawares. (j. m. ) 

Chenango. —Guy Park conf. (1775) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vm, 560, 1857. Chenengo.— Brown in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 120, 1804. Oche- 
nang.— Morgan, League Iroq., 473, 1851 (Oneida 
name of Chenango r. and Binghamton). Ose- 
wingo.— Homann Heirs’ map, 1756. Oswingo. — 
Mandrillon, Spectateur Am^ricain, map, 1785. 
Otseningo. —Ft Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vii, 67,1856. Otsiningo.— Johnson (1756), 
ibid., 141. Otsininko. —Ft Johnson conf. (1757), 
ibid., 253. Schenenk.— Pyrlaeus (ca. 1750) quoted 
by Barton, New Views, app. 4, 1798. Shenengo. — 
Ibid. TJtsanango. —Croghan (1765) in Monthly 
Am. Jour. Geol., 271, 1831. 

Chenco, Chenko. See Chunkey. 

Chenlin. A former settlement of mixed 
Yuit Eskimo and Chukchi, between 
Aeon and Wuteen, n. e. Siberia. The 
greater part of its inhabitants perished by 
famine in 1880; the remainder turned 
to reindeer breeding or emigrated to 
Cherinak and St Lawrence id. 

Ce'nlin. —Bogoras, Chukchee, 29, 1904. 

Chenposel (‘ dwelling below ’). A tribe 
of the Patwin division of the Copehan 
family, formerly living on lower Cache 
cr., Yolo co., Cal.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., hi, 219, 1877. 

Chentansitzan. —A Yukonikliotana vil¬ 
lage on the n. bank of Yukon r., 30 m. 
below the mouth of Melozi r. ? Alaska. 


244 


CHENTSITHALA-CHERAW 


[b. a. e. 


Chentsithala. A Naskotin village on 
Fraser r., Brit. Col., at the mouth of 
Quesnelle r. 

Chichula.—Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Ques- 
nel.—Morice, Notes on W. Den6s, 24, 1893. Ques¬ 
nelle Mouth.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. 
Col. map, 1884. Tcontsithal’a.—Morice in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can., x, sec. 2, 109,1892. 

Cheokhba (‘ sleepy kettle ’). A division 
of the Hunkpapa Teton Sioux. 

6e-ohba.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 221,1897. 
dji-o-ho'-pa.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 376,1862. Sleepy kettle band. —Culbertson in 
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141,1851 (under White Feet. 
O-jah-ska-ska). Tce-oqba.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 221, 1897. 

Chepanoc (Renape tcMpanok , or tcha- 
panok, ‘ people separated’.—Gerard). A 
village of the Weapomeioc in 1586 on 
Albemarle sd., in Perquimans co., N. C. 

Chapanun.—Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., i, 1856. Chepanoc.—Lane (1586) in Smith 
(1629),Virginia, 1 ,87, repr. 1819. Chepanu.—Smith, 
ibid., i, map, 112. Chepanuu.—De Bry, map ( ca. 
1590), in Hawks, N. C., I, 1859. Chepawy.—Mar¬ 
tin, N. C., i, 13, 1829. Chippanum.—Lane (1586) 
in Smith, op. cit., i, 90. 

Chepenafa. A Kalapooian tribe, some¬ 
times regarded as a subdivision of the 
Lakmiut, formerly residing at the forks 
of St Marys cr., near Corvallis, Oreg. 
They are now on Grande Ronde res., 
being offi daily known as Marys River 
Indians, and number about 25. ( l. f. ) 
Api'nefu.—Gatschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 
1877 (so called by the other Calapooya). Chep- 
en-a-pho.—U. S. Ind. Treat., 19, 1873. Mary 
River,—Smith in Ind. Aff. Rep., 56, 1875. Mary’s 
River.—Victor in Overland Month., vii, 346, 
1871. Marysville.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
12, 1863. Pineifu.—Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, xil, 213, 1899. Tsa mpi'nefa ami'm.—Gat¬ 
schet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Calapooya 
name). 

Cheponta’s Village. A former Choctaw 
village on the w. bank of Tombigbee r., 
in extreme s. e. Choctaw co., Ala. 

Cheponta’s Village. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
Ala. map, 1900. Fuketcheepoonta.—Treaty of 
1805 in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 749, 1832. 

Cheposhkeyine (‘swelled young buffalo 
bull ’). A subgens of the Arukbwa, the 
Buffalo gens of the Iowa. 

Tee p’o-cke yin'-e.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E. 
239, 1897. 

Chepoussa. A name applied by La Salle 
and Allouez to a band of Illinois Indians, 
probably from a chief or leader of a por¬ 
tion of those collected at Kaskaskia by 
La Salle’s invitation; on the other hand 
it may have been given to those Indians 
from a river (apparently Kaskaskia r.), 
in s. w. Illinois, to which the name 
Chepoussa was sometimes applied by 
early explorers. These people were 
probably connected with the Michi- 
gamea. 

Cheponssea.— La Salle (1680) in Hist. Mag., 1st s. 
v, 197,1861. Chepontia.—Proc4s Verbal (1682) in 
Margry, D6c., ii, 189, 1877. Chepousca.—La Salle 
(1681), ibid., 134. Chepoussa.—Allouez (1680), 
ibid., 96. Chepoussea.— La Salle (1682), ibid. 201 
Chipoussa.—Tonti (ca. 1680) in French, Hist." 
Coll. La.,i, 82,1846. Choponsca.—Hennepin, New 
Discov., 310, 1698. 


Chequet, Chequit. See Chickwit. 

Cher aw. An important tribe, very prob¬ 
ably of Siouan stock, formerly ranging in 
central Carolina, e. of the Blue ridge, from 
about the present Danville, Va., south¬ 
ward to the neighborhood of Cheraw, 
S. C., which takes its name from them. 
In numbers they may have stood next to 
the Tuscarora among the North Carolina 
tribes, but are less prominent in history 
by reason of their almost complete de¬ 
struction before the white settlements 
had reached their territory. They are 
mentioned first in the De Soto narrative 
for 1540, under the name Xuala, a corrup¬ 
tion of Suali, the name by which they 
are traditionally known to the Cherokee, 
who rerqember them as having anciently 
lived beyond the Blue ridge from Ashe¬ 
ville. In the earlier Carolina and Vir¬ 
ginia records they are commonly known 
as Saraw, and at a later period as Cheraw. 
We first hear of “Xuala province” in 
1540, apparently in the mountain country 
southward from Asheville. In 1672, 
Lederer, from Indian information, located 
them in the same general region, or possi¬ 
bly somewhat farther n. e., “ where the 
mountains bend to the west,” and says 
that this portion of the main ridge was 
called “ Sualy mountain ” from the tribe. 
This agrees with Cherokee tradition. 
Some years later, but previous to 1700, 
they settled on Dan r. near the s. line of 
Virginia, where the marks of their fields 
were found extending for several miles 
along the river by Byrd, in 1728, when 
running the dividing line between the 2 
colonies. There seem to have been 2 vil¬ 
lages, as on a map of 1760 we find this 
place designated as ‘ ‘ Lower Saura Town, ’ ’ 
while about 30 m. above, on the s. side 
of the Dan and between it and Town fork, 
is another place marked “Upper Saura 
Town.” They are also alluded to by 
J. F. D. Smyth (Tour in U. S., 1784), who 
says the upper town was insignificant. 
About the year 1710, being harassed by the 
Iroquois, they abandoned their home on 
the Dan and moving s. e. joined the Key- 
auwee. The colonists of North Carolina 
being dissatisfied at the proximity of these 
and other tribes, Gov. Eden declared war 
against the Cheraw, and applied to Vir¬ 
ginia for assistance. This Gov. Spots- 
wood refused, as he believed the people 
of Carolina were the aggressors; neverthe¬ 
less the war was carried on against them 
and their allies by the Carolinas until the 
defeat and expulsion of the Yamasi in 
1716. During this period complaint was 
made against the Cheraw, who were de¬ 
clared to be responsible for most of the 
mischief done n. of Santee r., and of en¬ 
deavoring to draw into their alliance the 
smaller coast tribes. It was asserted 
by the Carolinians that arms were sup- 


bui.i.. no 1 


CHERINAK 


CHEROKEE 


245 


plied them from Virginia. At the close 
of the Yamasi war the Cheraw were dwell¬ 
ing on the upper Pedee near the line 
between the Carolinas, where their name 
is perpetuated in the town of Cheraw, 
S. C. Their number in 1715, according 
to Rivers, was 510, but this estimate prob¬ 
ably included the Keyauwee. Being still 
subject to attack by the Iroquois, they 
finally—between 1726 and 1739—became 
.incorporated with the Catawba, with 
whom at an earlier date they had been at 
enmity. They are mentioned as with the 
Catawba but speaking their own distinct 
dialect as late as 1743 (Adair). In 1759 
a party of 45 “Charraws,” some of whom 
were under their chief, “King Johnny,” 
joined the English in the expedition 
against Ft Du Quesne. The last notice of 
them is in 1768, when their remnant, 
reduced by war and disease to 50 or 60, 
were still living with the Catawba. ( j. m. ) 
Ani'-Suwa'li. —Mooney in 19tli Rep. B. A. E., 509, 
1900 (Cherokee name; also Ani'-Suwa'la). 
Characks.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 793, 1855. Cha- 
rah. —Adair, Hist. Inds., 24, 1775. Charraws. — 
Gregg, Hist. Old Cheraws, 12, 1867. Charrows. — 
Ibid., 1. Chawraw. —Smyth, Tour in U. S., I, 207, 
1784. Cheraws. —S. C. Gazette (1739) quoted by 
Gregg, Hist. Old Cheraws, 9, 1867. Chouala. —De 
l’Isle, map, ca. 1700. Chovala. —Shipp, DeSoto and 
Florida, 366, 1881 (misprint). Joara.— Yandera 
(1567) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 15, 1857. Lower 
Sauratown. —Gussefeld, map U. S., 1784. Saras. — 
Lederer, Discoveries, 2,1672. Saraus. —War map 
of 1711-15 in Winsor, Hist. America, v, 346,1887. 
Sarau town.— Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., i, map, 134, 
1761. Saraws. —Virginia Council (1716) in N. C. 
Records, i r, 247, 1886. Saraw Town.— Lattr6, map 
of U. S., 1784. Sarraws. —Doc. of 1715, ibid., 251. 
Sasa. —Lederer, Discoveries, 2, 1672. Saura. — 
Vaugondy, map Partie de l’Am6rique Sept.,1755. 
Sauro.— Byrd (1728), Hist.Dividing Line,l,20,repr. 
1866. Sawara. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ll, 86, 1836. Sawras. —Doc. of 1716 in N. C. 
Records, II, 246, 1886. Sawraw. —Ibid., 243. 
Sawro. —Byrd, Hist. Dividing Line, I, 113, 1866. 
Sawro’s. —Ibid. Sharawas. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
v, 793,1855. Suali.— Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the 
East, 57, 1894 (Cherokee form). Sualy. —Lederer, 
Discoveries, 2, 1672. Swali. —Mooney, Siouan 
Tribes of the East, 57, 1894 (Cherokee form). 
Upper Sauratown, —Smyth, Tour in U. S., 253-259, 
1784. Xuala. —Garcilasso de la Vega (1540), Fla., 
135, 1723. Xualla. —Gentl. of Elvas (1540) quoted 
by Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 366, 1881. 

Cherinak. An Eskimo village near C. 
Ulakhpen, n. e. Siberia; pop. 77 in 14 
houses about 1895; 58 in 8 houses in 1901. 
They are regarded as so seamanlike and 
hardy that they might easily have come 
from the Alaskan shores. 

Ceri'nak. —Bogoras, Chukchee, 29, 1904. Wute'- 
elit. —Ibid., 20 (Chukchi name of people). 
Wute'en. —Ibid., 29. Wu'turen. —Ibid. 

Cherkhu. The westernmost Chilula vil¬ 
lage on Redwood cr., n. w. Cal. 

Cherr’h-quuh. —Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
m, 139, 1853 (Yurok name). 

Chernofski. An Aleut village on Una- 
laska, Aleutian ids., Alaska; pop. 44 in 
1833 according to Veniaminoff; 70 in 
1874 according to Shiesnekov; in 1880, 
101; in 1890, 78. 

Chernofski.— Sarichef (1792) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Chernovskoe. —Veniam- 


inoff, Zapiski, n, 202, 1840. Chernovskoi. —Elliott, 
Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875.— Chernovsky. —Pe¬ 
trol):, 10th Census, Alaska, 23, 1884. Tschernows- 
koje. —Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 1855. 

Cherokee. A powerful detached tribe 
of the Iroquoian family, formerly holding 
the whole mountain region of the s. Alle¬ 
ghenies, in s. w. Virginia, w. North Car- 



CHEROKEE MAN. ( Ball Player) 


olina and South Carolina, n. Georgia, e. 
Tennessee, and n. e. Alabama, and claim¬ 
ing even to the Ohio r. The tribal name 
is a corruption of Tsal&gf or Tsar&gf, the 
name by which they commonly called 
themselves, and which may be derived 
from the Choctaw chiluk-h, ‘cavepeople’, 







246 


CHEROKEE 


[b. a. e. 


in allusion to the numerous caves in 
their mountain country. They some¬ 
times also call themselves AnV- Yim'- 
wiyd', ‘real people,’ or Ani'-Kltu'hwagi, 
‘people of Kituhwa,’ one of their most 
important ancient settlements. Their 
northern kinsmen, the Iroquois, called 
them OyatageronorV, ‘ inhabitants of the 
cave country’ (Hewitt), and the Dela¬ 
wares and connected tribes called them 
Kittuwa , from the settlement already 
noted. They seem to be identical with 
the Rickohockans, who invaded central 
Virginia in 1658, and with the ancient 
Talligewi, of Delaware tradition, who 
were represented to have been driven 
southward from the upper Ohio r. region 
by the combined forces of the Iroquois 
and Delawares. 

The language has three principal dia¬ 
lects: (1) Elatl, or Lower, spoken on the 



CHEROKEE GIRL 


heads of Savannah r., in South Carolina 
and Georgia; (2) Middle, spoken chiefly 
on the waters of Tuckasegee r., in w. 
North Carolina, and now the prevail¬ 
ing dialect on the East Cherokee res.; 
(3) A'tali, Mountain or Upper, spoken 
throughout most of upper Georgia, e. 
Tennessee, and extreme w. North Caro¬ 
lina. The lower dialect was the only 
one which had the r sound, and is now 
extinct. The upper dialect is that which 
has been exclusively used in the native 
literature of the tribe. 

Traditional, linguistic, and archeologic 
evidence shows that the Cherokee orig¬ 
inated in the N., but they were found 
in possession of the s. Allegheny region 


when first encountered by De Soto in 
1540. Their relations with the Carolina 
colonies began 150 years later. In 1736 
the Jesuit (?) Priber started the first mis¬ 
sion among them, and attempted to or¬ 
ganize their government on a civilized 
basis. In 1759, under the leadership of 
A'gansta'ta (Oconostota), they began 
war with the English of Carolina. In the 
Revolution they took sides against the 
Americans, and continued the struggle 
almost without interval until 1794. Dur¬ 
ing this period parties of the Cherokee 
pushed down Tennesseer. and formed new 
settlements at Chickamauga and other 
points about the Tennessee-Alabama line. 
Shortly after 1800, missionary and educa¬ 
tional work was established among them, 
and in 1820 they adopted a regular form 
of government modeled on that of the 
United States. In the meantime large 
numbers of the more conservative Chero¬ 
kee, wearied by the encroachments of 
the whites, had crossed the Mississippi 
and made new homes in the wilderness 
in what is now Arkansas. A year or two 
later Sequoya (q. v.), a mixed-blood, in¬ 
vented the alphabet, which at once raised 
them to the rank of a literary people. 

At the height of their prosperity gold 
was discovered near the present Dahlone- 
ga, Ga., within the limits of the Cherokee 
Nation, and at once a powerful agitation 
was begun for the removal of the Indians. 
After years of hopeless struggle under the 
leadership of their great chief, John 
Ross, they were compelled to submit to 
the inevitable, and by the treaty of New 
Echota, Dec. 29, 1835, the Cherokee sold 
their entire remaining territory and 
agreed to remove beyond the Mississippi 
to a country there to be set apart for 
them—the present (1905) Cherokee Na¬ 
tion in Indian Ter. The removal was 
accomplished in the winter of 1838-39, 
after considerable hardship and the loss 
of nearly one-fourth of their number, the 
unwilling Indians being driven out by 
military force and making the long jour¬ 
ney on foot. On reaching their destina¬ 
tion they reorganized their national gov¬ 
ernment, with their capital at Tahlequah, 
admitting to equal privileges the earlier 
emigrants, known as “old settlers.” A 
part of the Arkansas Cherokee had pre¬ 
viously gone down into Texas, where they 
had obtained a grant of land in the e. 
part of the state from the Mexican gov¬ 
ernment. The later Texan revolutionists 
refused to recognize their rights, and in 
spite of the efforts of Gen. Sam Hous¬ 
ton, who defended the Indian claim, a 
conflict was precipitated, resulting, in 
1839, in the killing of the Cherokee chief, 
Bowl (q. v.), with a large number of his 
men, by the Texan troops, and the expul¬ 
sion of the Cherokee from Texas. 





BULL. 30] 


CHEROKEE 


247 


When the main body of the tribe was 
removed to the W., several hundred fugi¬ 
tives escaped to the mountains, where 
they lived as refugees for a time, until, in 
1842, through the efforts of Wm. H. 
Thomas, an influential trader, they re¬ 
ceived permission to remain on lands set 
apart for their use in w. North Carolina. 
They constitute the present eastern band 
of Cherokee, residing chiefly on the 
Qualla res. in Swain and Jackson cos., 
with several outlying settlements. 

The Cherokee in the Cherokee Nation 
were for years divided into two hostile 
factions, those who had favored and 
those who had opposed the treaty of re¬ 
moval. Hardly had these differences 
been adjusted when the civil war burst 
upon them. Being slave owners and sur¬ 
rounded by southern influences, a large 
part of each of the Five Civilized Tribes 
of the territory enlisted in the service of 
the Confederacy, while others adhered to 
the National Government. The territory 
of the Cherokee was overrun in turn by 
both armies, and the close of the war 
found them prostrated. By treaty in 
1866 they were readmitted to the protec¬ 
tion of the United States, but obliged to 
liberate their negro slaves and admit 
them to equal citizenship. In 1867 and 
1870 the Delawares and Shawnee, re¬ 
spectively, numbering together about 
1,750, were admitted from Kansas and 
incorporated with the Nation. In 1889 
the Cherokee Commission (see Commis¬ 
sion) was created for the purpose of 
abolishing the tribal governments and 
opening the territories to white settle¬ 
ment, with the result that after 15 years 
of negotiation an agreement was made 
by which the government of the Cher¬ 
okee Nation came to a final end Mar. 
3, 1906: the Indian lands were divided, 
and the Cherokee Indians, native and 
adopted, became citizens of the United 
States. 

The Cherokee have 7 clans, viz: AnF- 
wa /{ ya (Wolf), AnF-KawF (Deer), AnF- 
TsFskwa (Bird), AnF-wa/dt (Paint), 
AnF-Sah&'ni, Ani / -Ga / tdg4wI, AnF-Gi- 
BFhl. The names of the last 3 can not be 
translated with certainty. There is evi¬ 
dence that there were anciently 14, which 
by extinction or absorption have been 
reduced to their present number. The 
Wolf clan is the largest and most im¬ 
portant. The “seven clans” are fre¬ 
quently mentioned in the ritual prayers 
and even in the printed laws of the tribe. 
They seem to have had a connection with 
the “seven mother towns ” of the Chero¬ 
kee, described by Cuming in 1730 as 
having each a chief, whose office was 
hereditary in the female line. 

The Cherokee are probably about as 
numerous now as at any period in their 


history. With the exception of an esti¬ 
mate in 1730, which placed them at about 
20,000, most of those up to a recent 
period gave them 12,000 or 14,000, and in 
1758 they were computed at only 7,500. 
The majority of the earlier estimates are 
probably too low, as the Cherokee occu¬ 
pied so extensive a territory that only a 
part of them came in contact with the 
whites. In 1708 Gov. Johnson estimated 
them at 60 villages and “at least 500 
men” (Rivers, So. Car., 238, 1856). In 
1715 they were officially reported to num¬ 
ber 11,210 (Upper, 2,760; Middle, 6,350; 
Lower, 2,100), including 4,000 warriors, 
and living in 60 villages (Upper, 19; 
Middle, 30; Lower, 11). In 1720 they 
were estimated to have been reduced to 
about 10,000, and again in the same year 
reported at about 11,500, including about 
3,800 warriors (Gov. Johnson’s Rep. in 
Rivers, op. cit., 93, 94, 103, 1874). In 
1729 they were estimated at 20,000, with 
at least 6,000 warriors and 64 towns and 
villages (Stevens, Hist. Ga., i, 48, 1847). 
They are said to have lost 1,000 warriors 
in 1739 from smallpox and rum, and they 
suffered a steady decrease during their 
wars with the whites, extending from 
1760 until after the close of the Revolu¬ 
tion. Those in their original homes had 
again increased to 16,542 at the time of 
their forced removal to the W. in 1838, 
but lost nearly one-fourth on the journey, 
311 perishing in a steamboat accident on 
the Mississippi. Those already in the 
W., before the removal, were estimated 
at about 6,000. The civil war in 1861-65 
again checked their progress, but they 
recovered from its effects in a remark¬ 
ably short time, and in 1885 numbered 
about 19,000, of whom about 17,000 were 
in Indian Ter,, together with about 6,000 
adopted whites, negroes, Delawares, and 
Shawnee, while the remaining 2,000 were 
still in their ancient homes in the E. Of 
this eastern band, 1,376 were on Qualla 
res., in Swain and Jackson cos., N. C.; 
about 300 are on Cheowah r., in Graham 
co., N. C., while the remainder, all of 
mixed blood, are scattered over e. Ten¬ 
nessee, n. Georgia, and Alabama. The 
eastern band lost about 300 by smallpox 
at the close of the civil war. In 1902 
there were officially reported 28,016 per¬ 
sons of Cherokee blood, including all 
degrees of admixture, in the Cherokee 
Nation in the Territory, but this includes 
several thousand individuals formerly re¬ 
pudiated by the tribal courts. There 
were also living in the nation about 3,000 
adopted negro freedmen, more than 2,000 
adopted whites, and about 1,700 adopted 
Delaware, Shawnee, and other Indians. 
The tribe has a larger proportion of white 
admixture than any other of the Five Civ¬ 
ilized Tribes. See Mooney, Myths of 


248 


CHEROKEE 


[b. a. e. 


the Cherokee, 19th Rep. B. A. E., 1902; 
Royce, Cherokee Nation, 5th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1887. 

The following were Cherokee settle¬ 
ments: Aguaquiri (?), Amahyaski, Ama- 
kalali, Amohi, Anisgayayi, Anuyi, Aquo- 
liee, Aracnchi, Atsiniyi, Aumuchee, Ayah- 
liyi, Big-island, Briertown, Broomtown, 
Brown’s Village, Buffalo Fish, Canuga, 
Catatoga, Chagee, Chattanooga, Chatuga, 
Cheesoheha, Chewase, Chicherohe, Chick- 
amauga, Chilhowee,Conisca, Conontoroy, 
Conoross, Coongalees(?), Cooweescoowee 
(district), Cotocanahut, Co wee, Cowee- 
shee, Coyatee, Crayfish Town, Creek Path, 
Crowmocker, Crow Town, Cuclon, Cusa- 
watee, Dulastunyi, Dustayalunyi, Echota, 
Ecochee, Elakulsi, Ellijay, Estatoee, 
Etowah, Fightingtown, Frogtown, Galley, 
Guhlaniyi, Gusti, Gwalgahi, Halfway 
Town, Hemptown, Hickory Log, High 
Tower Forks, Hiwassee, Ikatikunahita, 
Itseyi, Ivy Log, Johnstown, Jore, Kala- 
nunyi,Kanastunyi, Kansaki, Kanutaluhi, 
Kawanuyi, Keowee, Kituhwa, Kuhlahi, 
Kulahiyi, Kulsetsiyi, Leatherwood, Long 
Island, Lookout Mountain, Naguchee, 
Nanatlugunyi, Nantahala, Natuhli, 
Nayuhi, Nickajack, Niowe, Noewe, Nowe, 
Nucassee, Nununyi, Ocoee, Oconaluftee, 
Oconee, Olagatano, Ooltewah, Oothcaloga, 
Paint Town, Pine Log, Quacoshatchee, 
Qualatchee, Qualla, Quanusee, Quina- 
haqui, Rabbit Trap, Red Bank, Red Clay, 
Running Water, Sanderstown, Selikwayi, 
Seneca, Setsi, Sitiku, Skeinah, Soquee, 
Spike Bucktown, Spring Place, Standing 
Peach Tree, Stikayi, Sutali, Suwanee, Tag- 
wahi, Tahlasi, Takwashnaw, Talahi, Tala- 
niyi, Talking Rock, Tallulah, Tamali, 
Tanasqui (?), Tasetsi, Taskigi, Tausitu, 
Tawsee, Tekanitli, Tellico, Tennessee,Tes- 
suntee,Tikaleyasuni,Tikwalitsi,Tlanusiyi, 
Tocax, Tomassee, Toquo, Torsalla, Toxa- 
way, Tricentee, Tsilaluhi, Tsiskwahi, 
Tsistetsiyi, Tsistuyi, Tsiyahi, Tsudinun- 
tiyi, Tucharechee, Tuckaseegee, Tugaloo, 
Turkeytown, Turniptown, Turtletown, 
Tusquittah, Two Runs, Ustanali, Ustisti, 
Valleytown, Wahvahi, Wasasa, Watauga, 
Willstown, and Yunsawi. (j. m. ) 

Achalaque.—Garcilasso de la Vega, Florida, in, 
1723. Allegans.—Colden, map (1727) quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 525,1853. Allegewe.— 
Hind, Labrador Penin., n, 7, 1863. Allegewi.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 133,1855. Allegewy. — 
Ibid., II, 37,1852. Alleghans.—Hall, N. W. States, 
29, 1849. Alleghanys.—Rafinesque, introd. to 

Marshall, Ky., I, 34, 1824. Allegwi.—Squier in 
Beach, Ind. Misc., 26, 1877. Alligewi.—Hecke- 
welder (1819) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
hi, 525, 1853. Allighewis,—Keane in Stanford, 
Compend., 500,1878. Baniatho.—Gatschet, Arap- 
ahoMS., B. A. E., 1880 (Arapaho name). Caaip.— 
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage 
name). Callageheahs.—McKenney and Hall,Ind. 
Tribes, I, 186,1854. Cayaki.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E.,1882 (Kansa name). Chalakee.— 
Nuttall, Jour., 124,1821. Chalaque.—Gentleman 
of Elvas (1540) in Hakluyt Soc., Florida, 60, 1851. 
Chalaquies.—Barcia, Ensayo, 335, 1723 (Spanish 


name). Charakees. —Homaim Heirs’ map, 1756. 
Charakeys.— Homann Heirs’ map, ca. 1730. Char- 
ikees.— Doc. of 1718 quoted by Rivers, So. Car* 
55, 1856. Charokees. —Johnson (1720) quoted, 
ibid., 93, 1874. Cheelake.— Barton, New Views, 
xliv, 1798 (Upper Cherokee form). Cheerake. — 
Adair, Am. Inds., 226, 1775. Cheerakee. —Ibid., 
137. Cheeraque.— Moore (1704) quoted by Carroll, 
Hist. Coll. S. C., II, 576, 1836. Cheerokee. —Ross 
(ca. 1776) quoted in Hist. Mag., 2d s., II, 218, 1867. 
Chel-a-ke.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., n, lxx, 1823. 
Chelakees. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 
II, 90, 1836. Chelaques. —Nuttall, Jour., 247, 1821. 
Chelekee.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 506, 
1878. Chellokee. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 
204, 1852. Cheloculgee. —White, Stat. Ga., 28, 1849 
(Creek name; singular,Che-lo-kee). Chelokees. — 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 104, 1836. 
Cheokees. —Johnson (1772) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VIII, 314, 1857 (misprint). Cheraguees.— Coxe, 
Carolana, 11, 1741. Cherahes. —Brickell (1737) 
quoted by Haywood, Tenn., 224, 1823. Chera- 
kees. —Coxe,' Carolana, map, 1741. Cherakis, — 
Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, hi, 555, 1853. Cheraquees. —Coxe, Caro¬ 
lana, 13, 1741. Cheraquis. —POnieaut (1699) in 
Margrv, D6c., V, 404, 1883. Cherickees.— Clarke 
(1739) in N. Y., Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 148, 1855. Cher- 
ikee. —Albany conf. (1742), ibid., 218. Cherokee. — 
.Johnson (1708) quoted by Rivers, So. Car., 238,1856. 
Cherokis. —Rafinesque, Am. Nat., I, 140, 1836. 
Cherookees. —Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., IX, 372,1871. Cheroquees. —Campbell 
(1761), ibid., 416. Cherrackees. —Evans (1755) 
quoted by Gregg, Old Cheraws, 15, 1867. Cher- 
rokees —Treaty of 1722 in Drake, Bk. Inds., iv, 
32, 1848. Cherrykees, —Weiser (1748) quoted by 
Kauffman, W. Penn., app., 18, 1851. Chilukki.— 
Hewitt in Am. Anthrop., II, 592, 1900 (original 
Choctaw form). Chirakues. —Randolph (1699) in 
Rivers, So. Car., 449, 1856. Chirokys. —Doc. (ca. 
1825) in Ann. de la Prop, de la Foi, II, 384, 1841. 
Chorakis.— Doc. of 1748 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
143, 1858. Chreokees.— Pike, Trav., 173, 1811 (mis¬ 
print). Chulukki. —Hewitt in Am. Anthrop., ii, 
592,1900 (alternative Choctaw form). Dog tribe. — 
Vaudreuil (1760) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist,, x, 1094, 
1858. Entari ronnon.— Potier, Huron MS. Gram., 
1751 (a Wyandot name: ‘mountain people’). 
Gatohua.— Barton quoted by Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., I, 28, 1884. Gattocirwa. —Heckewelder 
quoted by Barton, New Views, app., 8, 1798 (Del¬ 
aware name, German form). Isallanic race. — 
Schoolcraft in Ind. Aff. Rep. 73, 1850. Katowa.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 28, 1884 (Shawnee 
form). Ketawaugas.— Haywood, Nat. and Abo- 
rig. Tenn., 234, 1823. Kittuwa.— Brinton, Lenape 
Leg., 16, 1885. KituhwagF. —Mooney in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., pt. i, 15, 1902 (originally the name of a 
Cherokee band, but used by Algonquian tribes 
to designate the whole tribe). Kuttoowauw.— 
Apaumut (1791) quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg., 
16, 1885 (Mahican name). Ma n tera/ n . —Gatschet, 
Catawba MS., B. A. E., 1881 (Catawba name: 
‘ coming out of the ground ’). Nation du Chien.— 
Picquet (1752) quoted by Parkman, Montcalm and 
Wolfe, ll, 417, 1884. Ochie‘tari-ronnon.— Potier, 
Huron MS. Gram., 1751 (one of the Wyandot 
names). Ojadagochroene.— Livingston (1720) in 
N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., V, 567, 1855. Ondadeonwas.— 
Bleeker (1701), ibid., iv, 918, 1854. Oyadackuch- 
raono. —Weiser (1753), ibid., vi, 795, 1855. Oyadag- 
ahroenes.— Letter of 1713, ibid., V, 386, 1855. 
Oyadage'-ono. —Gatschet, Seneca MS., B. A. E., 
1882 (Senecaname: ‘cavepeople,’ from oyanduga-i 
‘cave,’ ono ‘people’). O-ya-da'-go-o-no. —Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq., 337, 1851 (Iroquois name). 
Oyata'ge'ronoii’.— Hewitt, inf’n (Iroquois name: 
‘inhabitants of the cave country’). Oyaudah.— 
Schoolcraft, Notes on Iroq., 448, 1847 (Seneca 
name). Rechahecrians. —Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 
iv, 22, 1848 (name given by the Virginians in 
1656 to an invading mountain tribe; probably 
the Cherokee). Rechehecrians. —Rafinesque in 
Marshall, Ky., I, 36, 1824. Rickohockans. —Led- 
erer (1669) quoted by Hawks, No. Car., u, 48, 
1858 (probably the Cherokee, as called by the 
Powhatan tribes; Hewitt gives the meaning as 


BULL. .°>0] 


CHERT-CHETLESCHANTTTNNE 


249 


1 cavelanders’). Shanaki. —Gatschet, Caddo MS. 
Vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Caddo name). Shan- 
nack. —Marcy, Red R., 273, 1854 (Wichita form). 
Shannakiak. —Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. E., 1882 
(Fox name; sing. Shannaki). Shayage. —Gat¬ 
schet, Kaw MS., B. A. E., 1878 (Kansa name). Sul- 
luggoes.— Coxe, Carolana, 22, 1741. Talagans. — 
Raflnesque in Marshall, Ky., I, 28, 1824. Tale- 
gans. —Ibid., 34. Talegawes.— Ibid. Tallagewy. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ir, 36, 1852. Tallegwi.— 
Raflnesque (ca. 1824) quoted by Mercer, Lenape 
Stone, 90, 1885. Talligeu. —Heckewelder (1819), 
ibid., 40. Talligewi. —Walam Olum (1833) in Brin- 
ton, Lenape Leg., 200, 1885. Tallike. —Brinton, 
ibid., 230 (given as singular form of Talligewi; 
Zeisberger translates talegdn , plural talegd- 
ivak , as ‘crane’ in the Delaware language). 
Tcalke. —Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E., 1882 
(Tonkawa name). Tcerokieco. —Gatschet, Wich¬ 
ita MS., B. A.E., 1882 (Wichita name). Tchata- 
kes. —La Salle (1682) in Margry, D6c., II, 197, 1877. 
Tsalagi. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 25, 1884. 
Tsalagi'. —Mooney in 19th Rep., B. A. E., I, 15, 
1902 (Upper Cherokee form; plural, Ani-TsaliigP, 
abbreviated to Ani-Tsdhlk). Tsalakies. —Gallatin 
in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 90. 1836. Tsa-lo- 
kee. Morgan, Anc. Soc., 113, 1877. TsaragI'. — 
Mooney in 19th Rep., B. A. E., I, 15, 1902 (Lower 
Cherokee form; plural, Ani-Ts<4ragl'). Tschiro- 
kesen. —Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., xxiii, 1839. 
Tsulakki. —Grayson, MS. Creek vocab., B. A. E., 
1885 (Creek name). Tzulukis. —Raflnesque, Am. 
Nations, I, 123, 1836. TJwatayo-rono. —Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 28,1884 (‘ cave people’: Wyan¬ 
dot name). TJyada. —Ibid. (Senecaname). Zolu- 
cans. —Raflnesque in Marshall, Ky., I, 23, 1824. 
Zulocans.— Ibid. 

Chert. See Chalcedony. 

Chesakawon. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, about the mouth of 
Corotoman r., Lancaster co., Va.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Chesapeake. (Algonquian: K’che-sepi- 
ack, ‘country on a great river.’—Tooker). 
Little more is known in regard to the name 
than that it designated also a small Pow¬ 
hatan tribe residing in Princess Anne or 
Norfolk co., Va., in 1608, and also their 
principal village, situated, according to 
Jefferson (Notes, 138,1809), onLinnhaven 
r., in Princess Anne co., a small stream, 
according to his map, flowing n. into 
Chesapeake bay. Stith says they were 
seated on the river now called Eliza¬ 
beth, which falls into Chesapeake bay 
below Norfolk. Linnhaven, on Jeffer¬ 
son’s map, is distinct from and is located 
e, of Elizabeth r. White’s map (Hariot, 
Narr., Quaritch repr., 1893), drawn in 
1585, locates them under the name 
Ehesepiooc, apparently on the stream in¬ 
dicated by Jefferson. * In 1607 they were 
estimated at 100 warriors, equivalent to 
perhaps 350 inhabitants; by 1669 they had 
entirely disappeared as a distinct people. 
On the application of the name Chesa¬ 
peake see Tooker, Algonquian Series, in, 
1901. ^ . (J.M.). 

Chesapeacks.—Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Vir¬ 
ginia, i, 87, repr. 1819. Chesapeakes.—Bozman, 
Maryland, I, 61, 1837. Chesapeians.—Strachey 
(ca. 1612), Virginia, 35,1849. Chesepians.—Harris, 
Voy. and Trav., I, 815,1705. Chesepioock,—Dutch 
map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. Chisa- 
peack.—.Smith(1629),Va., I, map, repr. 1819. Chisa- 
peans —Lane (1586) in Smith, ibid., 1,91. Chi-sapi- 
ack —Tyndall, chart (1608) in Brown, Genesis 


U. S., 184, 1890. Ehesepiooc. —White’s map in 
Hariot, Narrative, Quaritch repr., 1893 (misprint?). 

Cheshish. The principal village of the 
Muchalat, situated back of Bligh id., 
Nootka sd., Vancouver id.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 264, 1902. 

Chesthltishtun. A gens or village of 
the Tolowa, formerly on the coast of n. 
California, s. of Smith r. 

Tc’es-^ltTc'-tun.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 236, 1890. 

Chests. See Boxes and Chests , Receptacles. 

Chetac Lake. A Chippewa village, 
named from the lake on which it is situ¬ 
ated, in Sawyer co., n. w. W r is. 

Lac Shatac. —Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., v, 191, 1885. 

Chetawe. A village of the Ntlakyapa- 
muk, on the e. side of Fraser r., about 
16£ m. above Yale, Brit. Col. Pop. 16 
in 1897, the last time it was separately 
enumerated. 

Chataway, —Can. Ind. Aff. for 1884, 230. Chatowe. — 
Brit.Col.map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. Tca'tua. — 
Hill-Tout in Rep. on Ethnol. Surv. Can. for Brit. 
A. A. S.,5,1899. Tce'tawe.— Teitin Mem. Am.Mus, 
Nat. Hist., n, 169, 1900. 

Chetco (from Cheti, ‘ close to the mouth 
of the stream’: own name.—J. O. Dor¬ 
sey). A group of former Athapascan 
villages situated on each side of the 
mouth of and about 14 m. up Chetco r., 
Oreg. There were 9 villages, those at the 
mouth of the river containing 42 houses, 
which were destroyed by the whites in 
1853, after which the Chetco were re¬ 
moved to Siletz res., Tillamook co., Oreg. 
In 1854 they numbered 117 men, 83 
women, and 41 children; total, 241. In 
1861 they numbered 62 men, 96 women, 
104 children; total, 262. In 1877 only 
63 resided on Siletz res. These villagers 
were closely allied to the Tolowa of Cali¬ 
fornia, from whom they differed but 
slightly in language and customs. The 
villages as recorded by Dorsey were 
Chettanne, Chettannene, Khuniliikhwut, 
Nakwutthume, Nukhwuchutun, Settha- 
tun, Siskhaslitun, Tachukhaslitun, and 
Thlcharghilitun. 

Cha-ta. —Abbott, MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 
1858. Cheahtoc.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
8, 1860. Che-at-tee. —Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
for 1854, 495, 1855. Chetcas.— Palmer, ibid., 467. 
Chetcoe. —Newcomb, ibid., 162, 1861. Chetcoes. — 
Victor in Overland Mo., Vii, 317, 1871. Chet- 
coos. —Palmer in Ind, Aff. Rep. 1856, 217, 1857. 
Chetkoe. —Wells in Harper’s Mag., xm, 588, 1856. 
Chit-co. —Abbott, MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 
1858. Chitcoes. —Buchanan in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 
222, 1856. Chitko.— Gibbs MS. on coast tribes, B. A. 
E., 1856. Tced’i'-te-ne'.— Everette, MS. Tututene 
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans.: ‘people by the 
Mouse r.’). Tce'-ti.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 236, 1890 (own name: ‘close to the mouth 
of the stream’). Tce'-h jun-ne', —Ibid, (own 
name: ‘people close to the mouth of the stream ’) 
Tci'-i-tl.— Dorsey, Smith R. vocab., B. A. E., 1888 
(Khaamotene name). 

Chetleschantunne (‘ people among the 
big rocks ’). A division of the Tututunne 
formerly living on Pistol r., Oreg., and 
the coast from the headlands 6 m. s. of 


250 


OHETLESIYETUNNE-CHEYENNE 


fB. A. eT 


Rogue r. Their villages were at Macks 
Arch, the great rock from which they 
took their name, at Crooks pt. at the 
eddy of Pistol r., and on the n. side of the 
mouth of that stream. In 1854 they 
numbered 51. The survivors, if there 
are any, are on the Siletz res., Oreg. 

Chetl-e-shln.—Schumacher in Bull. G. and G. 
Surv., in, 31, 1877. Chetlessentan.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, vi, 702, 1857. Chetlessenten.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. Chet-less-en-tun.— 
Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1854, 495, 1855. 
Chet-less-in-gen.—Gibbs, MS. on coast tribes of 
Oregon, B. A. E., 1856. Chit-les-sen-ten.—Abbott, 
MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 1858. Pistol Riv¬ 
ers.—Buchanan in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 222,1857. 
Tcet-les'-tcan ^un'ne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 236,1890. Tcut-les-tcun' tene'.—Everette, 
MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans.: ‘people 
by the flat rocks’). Tc’ut-les'-tcun-pin.—Dorsey, 
Naltflnneplnne MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Nal- 
tunne name). 

Chetlesiyetunne (‘people of the bursted 
rock’). A village of the Tututunne, 
located by Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 233, 1890) on the n. side of Rogue r., 
Oreg. 

T’a-rxi'-li-i' ^unne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 233, 1890 (‘people distant from the 
forks’: Naltunne name). Tcet-les'-i-ye' ^unne'.— 
Ibid, (own name). Tc’ut'-les-ye' ipinne'.—Ibid. 
(Naltunne name). 

Chets ( Tcets ). A Haida town, for¬ 
merly occupied by the Chets-gitunai 
and Djushade, on an island at the mouth 
of Tsooskahli, Masset inlet, Brit. Col.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Chetsgitunai (Tcets-gitAna'-i, ‘Gituns 
of Chets id.’). A Haida family of the 
Eagle clan, so named from an island 
in the upper expansion of Masset inlet, 
Brit. Col., at the mouth of Tsooskahli, 
where they once lived. Afterward they 
moved to the mouth of Masset inlet. 
They formed one group with the Widja- 
gitunai, Tohlka-gitunai, and Djushade.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905. 

Chichkitone.—Harrison in Proc. Roy. Soc. Can., 
sec. II, 124,1895. Tsets gyit’inai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 23, 1898. 

Chettanne. A former village of the 
Chetco on the s. side of Chetco r., Oreg., 
at its mouth. 

Tcet-tan'-ng.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
236, 1890. 

Chettannene. A former village of the 
Chetco on the n. side of Chetco r., Oreg., 
at its mouth. 

Tcet-tan' ne'-ne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 236, 1890. 

Chettrokettle (‘Rain pueblo’ in one of 
the New Mexican Indian languages). 
One of the most important ruins of the 
Chaco canyon group in n. w. New Mexico. 
It is less than £ m. e. of Pueblo Bonito, on 
the n. side of the arroyo near the base of 
the canyon wall. Its exterior dimensions 
are 440 by 250 ft. It incloses 3 sides of a 
parallelogram, the extremities of the 
wings being connected by a semicircular 
double wall, the space between being 
divided into apartments. There are 9 
kivas within the space inclosed by the 
wings of the structure, 2 being in the 


court and 7 wholly or in part embraced 
within the walls. The walls still stand 
in places to a height of 30 ft. The build¬ 
ing was not less than 4 stories high, prob¬ 
ably 5. Many timbers are yet in place 
and well preserved. The masonry, 
which is exceptionally good, is of fine¬ 
grained grayish-yellow sandstone, broken 
into small tabular pieces and laid in thin 
mortar; in places courses of heavier stone 
are laid in parallel at intervals, giving an 
ornamental effect and probably adding 
to the stability of the walls. The walls 
are finished alike on both sides. Jack- 
son estimated that there were originally 
in the building not less than 315,000 cu. 
ft. of masonry. See Jackson (1875) in 
10th Rep. Hayden Surv., 438, 1879, and 
the authors cited below. (e. l. h. ) 
Chetho Kette.—Bell in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Loncl., 
n. s., i, 247, 1869. Chetro Ketle.—Domenech, 
Deserts N. Am., I, 200, 1860. Chetro Kettle.— 
Lummis in Land of Sunshine, xv, 426, 1901. 
Chettro-Kettle.—Simpson, Exped. Navajo Coun¬ 
try, 79,1850. Rain Pueblo.—Ibid. 

Chetuckota. A former Seminole village 
on the w. bank of Pease cr., below Pease 
lake, w. central Fla.—H. R. Doc. 78, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., map, 768-769, 1838. 

Chetuttunne (‘people where the road 
crosses a stream’). A former village of 
the Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue 
r., Oreg. 

Tce-tut' }unne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 234,1890. 

Cheucunsene. See Dragging-canoe. 

Cheuek. A village of the Ntlakyapa- 
muk on Fraser r., above Lytton, Brit. Col. 
TcEue'q.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can. 
for Brit. A. A. A. S., 4, 1899. 

Chewagh. A name of the Pacific red- 
spotted salmon trout, or Dolly Varden 
trout ( Salmo campbetti), from chiwakh, in 
the Nisqualli and closely related dialects 
of the Salishan stock, signifying ‘salmon 
trout.’ (a. f. c.) 

Chewas. A Squawmish village on the 
w. side of Howe sd., Brit. Col. 

Tce'was.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,1900. 

Chewase. One of the 5 “inland” towns 
of the Cherokee on a branch of Tennessee 
r., in e. Tennessee, in the latter part of 
the 18th century.—Bartram, Travels, 371, 
1792. 

Chewing-gum. See Food. 

Cheyenne (from the Sioux name Sha - 
hi'yena , Shai-ena, or (Teton) Shai-ela, 
‘people of alien speech,’ from sha'ia, ‘to 
speak a strange language’). An important 
Plains tribe of the great Algonquian fam¬ 
ily. They call themselves DzFtsIfstas, ap¬ 
parently nearly equivalent to ‘people 
alike,’ i. e. ‘our people,’ from Usistau , 
‘alike’ or ‘like this’ (animate); ( eMstd , 
‘ he is from, or of, the same kind ’—Pet- 
ter); by a slight change of accent it 
might also mean ‘ gashed ones ’, from 
ehlstM, ‘he is gashed’ (Petter), or pos¬ 
sibly ‘tall people.’ The tribal form as 
here given is in the third person plural. 


BULL. 30] 


CHEYENNE 


251 


The popular name has no connection with 
the French chien , ‘dog/ as has some¬ 
times erroneously been supposed. In the 
sign language they are indicated by a 
gesture which has often been interpreted 
to mean ‘cut arms’ or ‘cut fingers’— 
being made by drawing the right index 
finger several times rapidly across the 
left—but which appears really to indi¬ 
cate ‘striped arrows,’ by which name 
they are known to the Hidatsa, Shoshoni, 
Comanche, Caddo, and probably other 
tribes, in allusion to their old-time pref¬ 
erence for turkey feathers for winging 
arrows. 

The earliest authenticated habitat of 
the Cheyenne, before the year 1700, 
seems to have been that part of Minnesota 
bounded roughly by the Mississippi, Min¬ 
nesota, and upper Red rs. The Sioux, 
living at that period more immediately 
on the Mississippi, to the e. and s. e. , came 
in contact with the French as early as 
1667, but the Cheyenne are first mentioned 
in 1680, under thoname of Chaa, when a 
party of that tribe, described as living on 
the head of the great river, i. e., the Mis¬ 
sissippi, visited La Salle’s fort on Illi¬ 
nois r. to invite the French to come to 
their country, which they represented as 
abounding in beaver and other fur ani¬ 
mals. The veteran Sioux missionary, 
Williamson, says that according to con¬ 
current and reliable Sioux tradition the 
Cheyenne preceded the Sioux in the oc¬ 
cupancy of the upper Mississippi region, 
and were found by them already estab¬ 
lished on the Minnesota. At a later 
period they moved over to the Cheyenne 
branch of Red r., N. Dak., which thus 
acquired its name, being known to the 
Sioux as “the place where the Cheyenne 
plant,” showing that the latter were still 
an agricultural people (Williamson). 
This westward movement was due to 
pressure from the Sioux, who were them¬ 
selves retiring before the Chippewa, 
then already in possession of guns from 
the E. Driven out by the Sioux, the 
Cheyenne moved w. toward Missouri r., 
where their further progress was opposed 
by the Sutaio—the Staitan of Lewis and 
Clark—a people speaking a closely cog¬ 
nate dialect, who had preceded them to 
the w. and were then apparently living 
between the river and the Black-hills. 
After a period of hostility the two 
tribes made an alliance, some time after 
which the Cheyenne crossed the Mis¬ 
souri below the entrance of the Can¬ 
nonball, and later took refuge in the 
Black-hills about the heads of Cheyenne 
r. of South Dakota, where Lewis and 
Clark found them in 1804, since which 
time their drift was constantly w. and s. 
until confined to reservations. Up to the 
time of Lewis and Clark they carried on 


desultory war with the Mandan and 
Hidatsa, who probably helped to drive 
them from Missouri r. They seem, how¬ 
ever, to have kept on good terms with 
the Arikara. According to their own 
story, the Cheyenne, while living in 
Minnesota and on Missouri r., occupied 
fixed villages, practised agriculture, and 
made pottery, but lost these arts on being 
driven out into the plains to become rov¬ 
ing buffalo hunters. On the Missouri, 
and perhaps also farther e., they occu¬ 
pied earth-covered log houses. Grinnell 
states that some Cheyenne had culti¬ 
vated fields on Little Missouri r. as late 
as 1850. This was probably a recent set¬ 
tlement, as they are not mentioned in 



YELLOW BEAR—CHEYENNE MAN 


that locality by Lewis and Clark. At 
least one man among them still under¬ 
stands the art of making beads and figur¬ 
ines from pounded glass, as formerly 
practised by the Mandan. In a sacred 
tradition recited only by the priestly 
keeper, they still tell how they “lost the 
corn” after leaving the eastern country. 
One of the starting points in this tradi¬ 
tion is a great fall, apparently St An¬ 
thony’s falls on the Mississippi, and a 
stream known as the “river of turtles,” 








252 


CHEYENNE 


[b. a. k. 


which may be the Turtle r. tributary of 
Red r., or possibly the St Croix, entering 
the Mississippi below the mouth of the 
Minnesota, and anciently known by a 
similar name. Consult for early habitat 
and migrations: Carver, Travels, 1796; 
Clark, Ind. Sign Lang., 1885; Comfort in 
Smithson. Rep. for 1871; La Salle in 
Margry, D6couvertes, n, 1877; Lewis and 
Clark, Travels, i, ed. 1842; Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Williamson in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 1872. 

Although the alliance between the 
Sutaio and the Cheyenne dates from the 
crossing of the Missouri r. by the latter, 



CHEYENNE WOMAN AND CHILD 


the actual incorporation of the Sutaio into 
the Cheyenne camp-circle probably oc¬ 
curred within the last hundred years, as 
the two tribes were regarded as distinct 
by Lewis and Clark. There is no good 
reason for supposing the Sutaio to have 
been a detached band of Siksika drifted 
down directly from the n., as has been 
suggested, as the Cheyenne expressly 
state that the Sutaio spoke “a Cheyenne 
language,” i. e. a dialect fairly intelligible 
to the Cheyenne, and that they lived s. w. 
of the original Cheyenne country. The 
linguistic researches of Rev. Rudolph 


Petter, our best authority on the Chey¬ 
enne language, confirm the statement 
that the difference was only dialectic, 
which probably helps to account for the 
complete assimilation of the two tribes. 
The Cheyenne say also that they obtained 
the Sun dance and the Buffalo-head medi¬ 
cine from the Sutaio, but claim the Medi¬ 
cine-arrow ceremony as their own from 
the beginning. Up to 1835, and probably 
until reduced by the cholera of 1849, the 
Sutaio retained their distinctive dialect, 
dress, and ceremonies, and camped apart 
from the Cheyenne. In 1851 they were 
still to some extent a distinct people, but 
exist now only as one of the component 
divisions of the (Southern) Cheyenne 
tribe, in no respect different from the 
others. Under the name Staitan (a con¬ 
traction of Sutai-hitdn, pi. Sutai-hitiinio , 
‘Stitai men’) they are mentioned by 
Lewis and Clark in 1804 as a small and 
savage tribe roving w. of the Black-hills. 
There is some doubt as to when or where 
the Cheyenne first met the Arapaho, with 
whom they have long been confederated; 
neither do they appear to have any clear 
idea as to the date of the alliance between 
the two tribes, which continues unbroken 
to the present day. Their connection 
with the Arapaho is a simple alliance, 
without assimilation, while the Sutaio 
have been incorporated bodily. 

Their modern history may be said to 
begin with the expedition of Lewis and 
Clark in 1804. Constantly pressed farther 
into the plains by the hostile Sioux in 
their rear they established themselves 
next on the upper branches of the Platte, 
driving the Kiowa in their turn farther to 
the s. They made their first treaty with 
the Government in 1825 at the mouth of 
Teton (Bad) r., on the Missouri, about 
the present Pierre, S. Dak. In conse¬ 
quence of the building of Bent’s Fort on 
the upper Arkansas, in Colorado, in 1832, 
a large part of the tribe decided to move 
down and make permanent headquarters 
on the Arkansas, while the rest continued 
to rove about the headwaters of North 
Platte and Yellowstone rs. This separa¬ 
tion was made permanent by the treaty of 
Ft Laramie in 1851, the two sections being 
now known respectively as Southern and 
Northern Cheyenne, but the distinction 
is purely^ geographic, although it has 
served to hasten the destruction of their 
former compact tribal organization. The 
Southern Cheyenne are known in the 
tribe as Sowonf&, ‘southerners,’ while 
the Northern Cheyenne are commonly 
designated as 0‘mUsls eaters,’ from the 
division most numerously represented 
among them. Their advent upon the 
Arkansas brought them into constant 
collision with the Kiowa, who, with the 
Comanche, claimed the territory to the 




HULL. 30] 


CHEYENNE 


253 


southward. The old men of both tribes 
tell of numerous encounters during the 
next few years, chief among these being 
a battle on an upper branch of Red r. in 
1837, in which the Kiowa massacred an 
entire party of 48 Cheyenne warriors of 
the Bowstring society after a stout defense, 
and a notable battle in the following 
summer of 1838, in which the Cheyenne 
and Arapaho attacked the Kiowa and 
Comanche on Wolf cr., n. w. Okla., with 
considerable loss on both sides. About 
1840 the Cheyenne made peace with the 
Kiowa in the s., having already made 
peace with the Sioux in the n., since 
which time all these tribes, together with 
the Arapaho, Kiowa, Kiowa Apache, 
and Comanche have usually acted as 
allies in the wars with other tribes 
and with the whites. For a long time 
the Cheyenne have mingled much with 
the western Sioux, from whom they 
have patterned in many details of dress 
and ceremony. They seem not to have 
suffered greatly from the small-pox 
of 1837-39, having been warned in 
time to escape to the mountains, but 
in common with other prairie tribes 
they suffered terribly from the cholera in 
1849, several of their bands being nearly 
exterminated. Culbertson, writing a 
year later, states that they had lost about 
200 lodges, estimated at 2,000 souls, or 
about two-thirds of their whole number 
before the epidemic. Their peace with 
the Kiowa enabled them to extend their 
incursions farther to the s., and in 1853 
they made their first raid into Mexico, 
but with disastrous result, losing all but 
3 men in a fight with Mexican lan¬ 
cers. From 1860 to 1878 they were 
prominent in border warfare, acting with 
the Sioux in the n. and with the Kiowa 
and Comanche in the s., and have prob¬ 
ably lost more in conflict with the whites 
than any other tribe of the plains, in pro¬ 
portion to their number. In 1864 the 
southern band suffered a severe blow by 
the notorious Chivington massacre in Col¬ 
orado, and again in 1868 at the hands of 
Custer in the battle of the Washita. 
They took a leading part in the general 
outbreak of the southern tribesin 1874-75. 
The Northern Cheyenne joined with the 
Sioux in the Sitting Bull war in 1876 and 
were active participants in the Custer 
massacre. Later in the year they received 
such a severe blow from Mackenzie as 
to compel their surrender. In the winter 
of 1878-79 a band of Northern Chey¬ 
enne under Dull Knife, Wild Hog, and 
Little Wolf, who had been brought down 
as prisoners to Fort Reno to be colonized 
with the southern portion of the tribe in 
the present Oklahoma, made a desperate 
attempt at escape. Of an estimated 89 men 
and 146 women and children who broke 


away on the night of Sept. 9, about 75, 
including Dull Knife and most of the war¬ 
riors, were killed in the pursuit which 
continued to the Dakota border, in the 
course of which about 50 whites lost their 
lives. Thirty-two of the Cheyenne slain 
were killed in a second break" for liberty 
from Ft Robinson, Nebr., where the cap¬ 
tured fugitives had been confined. Little 
Wolf, with about 60 followers, got through 
in safety to the n. At a later period the 
Northern Cheyenne were assigned to the 
present reservation in Montana. The 
Southern Cheyenne were assigned to a 
reservation in w. Oklahoma by treaty of 
1867, but refused to remain upon it until 
after the surrender of 1875, when a num¬ 
ber of the most prominent hostiles were 
deported to Florida for a term of 3 years. 
In 1891-92 the lands of the Southern 
Cheyenne were allotted in severalty and 
the Indians are now American citi¬ 
zens. Those in the n. seem to hold their 
own in population, while those of the s. 
are steadily decreasing. They numbered 
in 1904—Southern Cheyenne, 1,903; 
Northern Cheyenne, 1,409, a total of 
3,312. Although originally an agricul¬ 
tural people of the timber country, the 
Cheyenne for generations have been a 
typical prairie tribe, living in skin tipis, 
following the buffalo over great areas, 
traveling and fighting on horseback. 
They commonly buried their dead in 
trees or on scaffolds, but occasionally in 
caves or in the ground. In character 
they are proud, contentious, and brave to 
desperation, with an exceptionally high 
standard for woman. Polygamy was 
permitted, as usual with the prairie tribes. 
Under their old system, before the divi¬ 
sion of the tribe, they had a council of 44 
elective chiefs, of whom 4 constituted 
a higher body, with power to elect one 
of their own number as head chief of the 
tribe. In all councils that concerned 
the relations of the Cheyenne with other 
tribes, one member of the council was ap¬ 
pointed to argue as the proxy or “devil’s 
advocate” for the alien people. This 
council of 44 is still symbolized by a bun¬ 
dle of 44 invitation sticks, kept with the 
sacred medicine-arrows, and formerly 
sent around when occasion arose to con¬ 
vene the assembly. 

This set of 4 medicine-arrows, each 
of different color, constitutes the tribal 
palladium which they claim to have had 
from the beginning of the world, and is 
exposed with appropriate rites once a 
year if previously “pledged,” and on 
those rare occasions when a Cheyenne 
has been killed by one of his own tribe, 
the purpose of the ceremony being to wipe 
away from the murderer the stain of a 
brother’s blood. The rite did not die 
with the final separation of the two sec- 


254 


CHEYENNE 


[b. a. e. 


tions of the tribe in 1851, as has been 
stated, but the bundle is still religiously 
reserved by the Southern Cheyenne, 
y whom the public ceremony was per¬ 
formed as late as 1904. Besides the pub¬ 
lic tribal ceremony there is also a rite 
spoken of as “fixing’’ the arrows, at 
shorter intervals, which concerns the 
arrow priests alone. The public cere¬ 
mony is always attended by delegates 
from the northern body. No woman, 
white man, or even mixed blood of the 
tribe has ever been allowed to come near 
the sacred arrows. 

Their great tribal ceremony for genera¬ 
tions has been the Sun dance (q. v.), which 
they themselves say came to them from 
the Sutaio, after emerging from the tim¬ 
ber region into the open plains. So far as 
known, this ceremony belongs exclusively 
to the tribes of the plains or to those in 
close contact with them. The Buffalo- 
head ceremony, which was formerly con¬ 
nected with the Sun dance but has been 
obsolete for many years, also came from 
the Sutaio. The modern Ghost-dance 
religion (q. v.) was enthusiastically taken 
up by the tribe at its first appearance, 
about 1890, and the Peyote rite (q. v.) is 
now becoming popular with the younger 
men. They also had until lately a Fire 
dance, something like that credited to the 
Navaho, in which the initiated perform¬ 
ers danced over a fire of blazing coals 
until they extinguished it with their bare 
feet. In priestly dignity the keepers of 
the Medicine-arrow (Cheyenne) and Sun 
dance (Sutaio) rites stood first and equal. 

At the Sun dance, and on other occa¬ 
sions where the whole tribe was assem¬ 
bled, they formed their camp circle in 
11 (?) sections, occupied by as many rec¬ 
ognized tribal divisions. As one of these 
was really an incorporated tribe, and sev¬ 
eral others have originated by segrega¬ 
tion within the memory of old men still 
living (1905), the ancient number did not 
exceed 7. One authority claims these di¬ 
visions as true clans, but the testimony 
is not conclusive. The wandering habit— 
each band commonly apart from the 
others,, with only one regular tribal re¬ 
union in the year—would make it almost 
impossible to keep up an exogamic sys¬ 
tem. While it is quite probable that the 
Cheyenne may have had the clan system 
in ancient times while still a sedentary 
people, it is almost as certain that it dis¬ 
appeared so long ago as to be no longer 
even a memory. The present divisions 
seem to have had an entirely different 
genesis, and may represent original vil¬ 
lage settlements in their old homes, a 
surmise rendered more probable by sur¬ 
vivals of marked dialectic differences. 
As it is now some 70 years since the whole 
tribe camped together, the social struc¬ 


ture having become further demoralized 
in the meantime by cholera, wars, and 
intermixture with the Sioux, the exact 
number and order of these divisions is a 
matter of dispute, even among their own 
old men, although all agree on the prin¬ 
cipal names. 

The list given below, although subject 
to correction, is based on the best con¬ 
sensus of opinion of the southern chiefs 
in 1904 as to the names and order of the 
divisions in the circle, from the e. entrance 
around by s., w., and n. to the starting 
point. The name forms vary consider¬ 
ably as given by different individuals, 
probably in accordance with former dia¬ 
lectic differences. It is evident that in 
some instances the divisions are older 
than their existing names: 

(1) Iievlqs'-nV l pah\s (sing., Heviqs 7 - 
nl‘pa), ‘aortas closed, by burning.’ All 
authorities agree that this was an im¬ 
portant division and came first in the 
circle. The name is said to have origi¬ 
nated from several of the band in an 
emergency, having once made the aorta 
of a buffalo do duty as a pipe. Grinnell 
gives this story, and also an alternative 
one, which renders it ‘small windpipes,’ 
from a choking sickness sent as a punish¬ 
ment for offending a medicine beaver. 
The name, however, in its etymology, 
indicates something closed or shriveled 
by burning, although it is also true that 
the band has a beaver tabu. The name 
is sometimes contracted to Hevl'qsin , for 
which Wee hee skeu of Lewis and Clark’s 
Journals (Clark, 1804, ibid.,i, 190, 1904) 
seems to be a bad misprint. 

(2) Mdlshju (sing., M6Is), ‘flint peo¬ 
ple,’ from m&lso ‘ flint’, apparently having 
reference to an arrowpoint (Petter), pos¬ 
sibly to the sacred medicine-arrows. For¬ 
merly a large division said to have been 
the nucleus of the Cheyenne tribe, and 
hence the Dzitslstas proper. The Arrow- 
men of G. A. Dorsey. Now nearly extinct. 

(3) Wu'tapiu (sing., WiPtap), a Sioux 
word ( wdtap ) meaning ‘eaters,’ or ‘eat’. 
A small division, perhaps of Sioux admix¬ 
ture (cf. 0‘-ml'sls). Some authorities 
claim this division as an offshoot from th'- 
H6vhaita/nio. 

(4) Hevhaita'nio (sing., Hevhaitan), 
‘hair men,’ i. e. ‘fur men’; so called 
because in early days they ranged farth¬ 
est to the s. w., remote from the traders 
on the Missouri, and continued to wear 
fur robes for every-day use after the other 
bands had adopted strouding and calicoes. 
A probable explanation, advanced by 
Grinnell, is that the name refers to ropes 
which they twisted from the long hair of 
the buffalo for use in capturing ponies 
from the tribes farther s. They formed 
the advance of the emigration to the 
Arkansas about 1835, hence the name is 


BULL. 30] 


CHEYENNE 


255 


frequently used as synonymous with 
Southern Cheyenne. 

(5) OVvimana (sing., OUvimdn), 
‘scabby people’; oVvt ‘scabby,’ mana 
‘band,’ ‘people’ (Petter); according to 
another authority, ‘hive people.’ An off¬ 
shoot of the Hevhaita'nio (no. 4). The 
name originated about 1840, when a band 
of the Hevhaita/nio, under a chief known 
as Blue Horse, became infected from hav¬ 
ing used a mangy buffalo hide for a saddle 
blanket. They became later an important 
division. According to Grinnell (Social 
Organization, 1905) the name is also ap¬ 
plied as a nickname to a part of the North¬ 
ern Cheyenne on lower Tongue r., “be¬ 
cause, it is said, Badger, a principal man 
among them, had a skin disease.” 

(6) Hlsiometd'nio (sing., Hisfometa/n), 
‘ridge men,’ referring to the ridge or 
long slope of a hill. Another offshoot 
from the Hevhaita'nio. The name is 
said to have originated from their prefer¬ 
ence for camping upon ridges, but more 
probably from having formerly ranged 
chiefly n. of the upper Arkansas, in that 
portion of Colorado known to the Chey¬ 
enne as the “ ridge country,” or, accord¬ 
ing to another authority, from habitually 
ranging upon the Staked plain, in associ¬ 
ation with the Comanche. They were 
said to have originated from some Hev- 
haita/nio who intermarried with the 
Sutaio before the regular incorporation 
of that tribe. 

(7) (?) Sut&io (sing., SiPtai), mean¬ 
ing unknown. Formerly a distinct tribe, 
but incorporated. According to their 
own statement the people of this division 
occupied the w. of the Cheyenne circle, 
but others put them s., n. w., or n., the 
discrepancy probably arising from the 
fact that they had originally no place in 
the circle at all and were not admitted 
until the old system had fallen into decay. 
The w. side of the Cheyenne circle, as of 
the interior of the tipi, being the place of 
honor, they would naturally claim it for 
themselves, although it is extremely un¬ 
likely that the Cheyenne would grant it. 
Their true position seems to have been 
in the n. w. part of the circle. 

(8) Oqtogund (sing., Oqtogon), ‘bare 
shins’ (?). 

(9) Ho'nowti, (sing., Ho‘now), ‘poor 
people.’ A small division, an offshoot 
from the OqtogunA 

(10) (sing., MM‘kot), of 
doubtful meaning, interpreted by Grin¬ 
nell as ‘corpse from a scaffold,’ or pos¬ 
sibly ‘ghost head,’ i. e. gray hair, but 
more probably (Mooney) from a root de¬ 
noting ‘wrinkled’ or ‘drawn up,’ as 
applied to old tipi skins or old buckskin 
dresses; from this root comes masiskot , 

‘ cricket,’ referring to the doubling up of 
the legs; the same idea of ‘ skin drawn 


up’ may underlie the interpretation 
‘ corpse from a scaffold.’ For some rea¬ 
son, apparently between 70 and 80 years 
ago, all the men of this division joined in 
a body the Hotdmita/nio warrior society, 
so that the two names became practically 
synonymous until the society name sup¬ 
planted the division name, which is now 
obsolete, the Hotamita'nio, with their 
families, being considered owners of that 
part of the circle originally occupied by 
the MitsI^kotS,, viz, next to the last sec¬ 
tion, adjoining the 0‘mUsIs (no. 11), who 
camped immediately n. of the entrance. 

(11) (sing., 0‘mFsIsts), ‘eat¬ 

ers’; the meaning of the name is plain, 
but its origin is disputed, some authori¬ 
ties claiming it as the name of an early 
chief of the division. Cf. Wti'tapiu, no. 
3. This was the largest and most im¬ 
portant division in the tribe and now con¬ 
stitutes the majority of the Northern 
Cheyenne, for which portion the name is 
therefore frequently used as a synonym. 
Before the tribe was divided they occu¬ 
pied that portion of the tribal circle 
immediately n. of the e. entrance, thus 
completing the circle. After the separa¬ 
tion their next neighbors in the circle, 
the MasU‘kot&, alias Hotamita/nio, were 
considered as the last division in order. 

Other names, not commonly recog¬ 
nized as divisional names, are: 

(a) Moqtavhaila'niu, ‘black men,’ i. e. 
‘Ute’ (sing., Moqtdvhaitan). To the 
Cheyenne and most other Plains tribes 
the Ute are known as ‘ Black men ’ or 
‘Black people.’ A small band, appar¬ 
ently not a recognized division, of the 
same name is still represented among the 
Southern Cheyenne, and, according to 
Grinnell, also among the Northern Chey¬ 
enne. They may be descended from Ute 
captives and perhaps constituted a regu¬ 
lar tribal division. 

(b) NfrJcuimdnaj ‘ bear people ’; a small 
band among the Southern Cheyenne, 
taking its name from a former chief and 
not recognized as properly constituting a 
division. 

(c) Anskdwlrils , ‘narrow nose-bridge,’ 
a band of Sioux admixture and of recent 
origin, taking its name from a chief, 
properly named Broken Dish, but nick¬ 
named Anskowlnls. They separated 
from the 0‘mUsIs on account of a quarrel, 
probably, as Grinnell states, a dispute as 
to the guardianship of the sacred buffalo- 
head cap, a stolen horn from which is now 
in possession of one of the band in the 
S. They are represented among both the 
Northern and the Southern Cheyenne. 

(d) Pl'nidgW ‘Pe'natg'ka’ (Coman¬ 
che). This is not properly a divisional 
or even a band name, but was the con¬ 
temptuous name given by the hostile 
Cheyenne in 1874-75 to the “friendlies,” 


CHEYENNE 


[b. a. e. 


256 

under Whirlwind, who remained passive 
near the agency at Darlington, in allusion 
to the well-known readiness of the Pena- 
teka Comanche to sell their services as 
scouts against their own tribesmen on the 
plains. 

(e) M&hoyum , ‘ red tipi ; this name, 
in the form Miayuma, ‘ red lodges,’ is 
erroneously given in the Clarke MS., in 

ossession of Grinnell, as the name of a 
and or division, but is really only the 
name of a heraldic tipi belonging by 
heredity to a family of the Ho‘nowa di¬ 
vision, now living with the Southern 
Cheyenne. 

(f) WoopotsVt (Wohkpotslt, Grinnell), 
‘white wolf’ (?) A numerous family 
group taking its name from a noted com¬ 
mon ancestor, in the southern branch of 
the tribe, who died about 1845. The 
name literally implies something having 
a white and frosty appearance, as hide- 
scrapings or a leaf covered with frost. 

(g) Totoimana (TutoimanJh, Grinnell), 
‘backward or shy clan,’ a modern nick¬ 
name applied by the Northern Cheyenne 
to a band on Tongue r., “ because they 
prefer to camp by themselves” (Grin¬ 
nell). From the same root comes toto, 
‘crawfish,’ referring to its going back¬ 
ward (Petter). 

(h) Black Lodges. A local designation 
or nickname for those Northern Cheyenne 
living in the neighborhood of Lame Deer 
‘ ‘ because they are on friendly terms with 
the band of Crows known as Black 
Lodges” (Grinnell, ibid.). 

(i) Bee band. A local designation or 
nickname for those Northern Cheyenne 
living about Rosebud cr., “ because among 
them there are several men who are re¬ 
lated to the Rees” (Grinnell, ibid.). 

(j) Yellow Wolf band (Culbertson, 
Jour., 1850). From another reference 
this is seen to be only a temporary band 
designation from a chief of that name. 

(k) Half-breed band{ Culbertson, Jour., 
1850). Probably only a temporary local 
designation, perhaps from a chief of that 
name (Mooney). 

The Warrior Organization ( Nti'tqiu , 
‘warriors,’ ‘soldiers’; sing., Nutaq) of 
the Cheyenne is practically the same as 
found among the Arapaho, Kiowa, and 
most other Plains tribes (see Military So¬ 
cieties), and consists of the following 6 
societies, with possibly one or more 
extinct: (1) Hotamita/nio, ‘dog men’; 
(2) Woksfhitanio, ‘(kit) fox men,’ 
alias Motsonitanio, ‘flint men’; (3) 
HFmoiyoqfs ‘pointed-lance men’ (Pet¬ 
ter) or Oomi-nfitqiu, ‘coyote warriors’; 
(4) MJhohlvas, ‘red shield,’ alias Ho- 
toanu'tqiu, ‘buffalo bull warriors’; (5) 
Him&tanohis, ‘bowstring (men)’; (6) 

Hotam-ImsJw’, ‘crazy dogs.’ This last 
society is of modern origin. Besides 


these the members of ihe council of 
44 chiefs were sometimes considered 
to constitute in themselves another soci¬ 
ety, the VPhiyo, ‘chiefs.’ The equivalent 
list given by Clark (Ind. Sign Lang.), 
omitting No. 6, is Dog, Fox, Medicine 
Lance, Bull, Bowstring, and Chief. There 
seems to have been no fixed rule of 
precedence, but the HotamitiPniu, or 
‘ ‘ Dog soldiers ’ ’ as they came to be known 
to the whites, acquired most prominence 
and distinctive character from the fact 
that by the accession of the entire warrior 
force of the Masi / ‘kota division, as already 
noted, they, with their famihes, took on 
the character of a regular tribal division 
with a place in the tribal circle. From 
subsequent incorporation by intermar¬ 
riage of numerous Sioux, Arapaho, and 
other alien elements their connection 
with their own tribe was correspondingly 
weakened, and they formed the habit of 
camping apart from the others and acting 
with the Sioux or as an independent body. 
They were known as the most aggressive 
of the hostiles until defeated, with the 
loss of their chief, Tall Bull, by Gen. 
Carr’s forces in 1869. 

Consult Clark, Ind. Sign Lang, (arti¬ 
cles, Cheyenne and Soldier), 1885; Cul¬ 
bertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 1851; 
Dorsey, The Cheyenne, Field Columb. 
Mus. Publ., Anthrop. ser., ix, nos. 1 and 2, 
1905; Grinnell, various letters and pub¬ 
lished papers, notably Social Org. of the 
Cheyennes, in Proc. Internal. Cong. 
Americanists for 1902, 1905; Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; In¬ 
dian Treaties, eds. 1837, 1873; Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., various editions; Mar- 
gry, Decouvertes, n, 1877; Maximilian, 
Travels, 1843; Mooney (1) Ghost Dance 
Religion, 14th Rep." B. A. E., 1896, 
(2) Calendar Hist, of the Kiowa, 17th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1898, (3) Cheyenne MS., 
B. A. E.; Reports of the Commissioner 
of Indian Affairs; War Dept. Rec. of 
Engagements with Hostile Inds., 1882; 
Williamson in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll, 
i, 1872. (j. m. ) 

a-was-she-tan-qua. — Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., 
II, lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name). Bahakosin,— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023,1896 (‘striped 
arrows’: Caddo name). Black-arms.—Long, op. 
cit., i, 465, 1823 (evidently an error for ‘cut- 
arms,’ one of the renedrings of the tribal sign). 
Ca^ani. —Dorsey, Osage MS., vocab., B. A. E., 1883 
(Osage name. c=sh, ^=dh, i. e. ShadMni). 
Cahiega.— Dorsey, (Pegiha MS. Diet., B. A. E. 
(Omaha and Ponka name; pron. Sh£hi6dha). 
Cayani. — Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1882 (Kansa name; pron. Shaydni). Chaa.— 
La Salle (16801 in Margry, D6c., II, 54, 1877. 
Chaguyennes.—Perrin du Lac, Voy., 307, 1805. 
Chaienne.—Williamson in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1 ,296,1872 (given as a French form). Chaoenne.— 
Lewis, Travels, 15, 1809. Chawas.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, 1 ,198,1851. Chayenne.—Clark (1804) in 
Lewis and Clark Jour., i, 175,1904. Cheyennes.— 
Cass (1834) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii,609, 1853. 
Chians.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st sess., 31, 
1832. Chien.—Lewis and Clark, Travels, 35,1806 


bull. 301 CHEYENNE, NORTHERN-CHEYENNE, SOUTHERN 


257 


(French name). Chiennes. —Brackenridge,Views 
of La., 77, 1815. Choaenne. —Fisher, New Travels, 
26, 1812. Chyannes. —Lewis and Clark, Jour., 135, 
1840. Chyans. —Dougherty (1837) in H. R. Doc. 
276, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. Chyennes. — 
Lewis and Clark, Travels, 35, 1806. Chynnes. — 
Am. St. Papers, IV, 710, 1832. Cien. — Clark (1804) 
in Lewis and Clark Jour., I, 230, 1904. Cut 
wrists.— Burton, City of Saints, 151, 1861 (in¬ 
tended as an interpretation of the tribal sign). 
Dog Indians. —Clark (1804) in Lewis and Clark 
Jour., i, 175,1904 (on p. 189 he speaks of “the 
Chien (Cheyenne) or Dog Inds.,” from confusion 
with the French chien , ‘dog’). Dog nation.— 
Gass, Jour., 63, 1807. Dzltsl'stas. — Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023,1896 (proper tribal name). 
Gatsalghi. —Ibid. (Kiowa Apache name). Hlt- 
asi'na. —Ibid, (‘scarred people’: Arapaho name, 
sing., Hi'tasi). I-sonsh'-pu-she. —Hayden,Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow name). 
Itah-Ischipahji. — Maximilian, Travels, II, 234, 
1839-41 (Hidatsa name). it-anse-p6-|je.— Long, 
Exped. Rocky Mts., n, lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa 
name), itasi'na. —Mooney, Cheyenne MS., B. A. 
E., 1904 (‘scarred people’; also Hitdsi'na, Arapaho 
name; sing., It&si'). I-ta-su-pu-zi.— Matthews, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 160, 1877 (‘spotted 
arrow quills’: from itasu, arrow quills; puzi , spot¬ 
ted: Hidatsa name; s=sh). It-us-shi'-na. —Hay¬ 
den Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 326, 1862 
(‘scarred people’; Arapaho name). Ka'neahei- 
wastsik.— Grinnell quoted by Mooneyin 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1023, 1896 (‘people with a language some¬ 
what like Cree’; Cree name: cf. Kaninavish , the 
Arapaho). Nanonl'ks-karo'mki.— Mooney, ibid. 
(Kichai name). Niere'rikwats-kUni'ki.— Ibid. 
(Wichitaname). Pacarabo. —Pimentel.Lenguas, 
it, 347, 1865 (given as a Comanche division, but 
evidently intended for Pagilnavo). Pag£navo.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023,1896 (Shoshoni 
and Comanche name: ‘striped arrows,’ from 
pdga ‘arrow,’ navo ‘striped’). Pah-kah-nah-vo. — 
Gebow, Snake or Shoshonay Vocab., 9, 1868 
(Shoshoni name). Paikanavos. —Burton, City of 
Saints, 151, 1861 (erroneously interpreted from 
the tribal sign as ‘ cut wrists’). Paikandoos. — 
Blackmore in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 1,307,1869 
(for Pagftmivo, and erroneously interpreted from 
the tribal sign as ‘ cut wrists’). Pa ka na vo. —ten 
Kate, Synonymie, 9, 1884 (‘filches peintes,’ so 
called by the Comanche, who know them also as 
Si'-a-na-vo). Pa-ka-na-wa. —Ibid., 8 (Utename). 
Sa-hi'-ye-na. —Riggs-Dorsey in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
vn, 440,1890 (Yankton Sioux name, indicating a 
‘people speaking an alien language,’ from sd-i-a, 
sdiwaa, ‘to speak a strange language,’ sd-i-a-pi , 
‘a foreign or unknown language’; s=sh; na is a 
diminutive suffix, which becomes la in the Teton 
and dan in the Santee dialect). Sa+k’o+t. —ten 
Kate, op. cit., 10 (Kiowa name). Sak'o'ta. — 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023,1896 (Kiowa 
name; sing., Sak'ddal). Saoyns. —De Smet, Mis¬ 
sions, 264, 1848. Sa-Sis-e-tas. —Clark, Ind. Sign 
Lang., 99, 1885 (given as their own name, prop¬ 
erly Dzitsi'stas). Sayenagi. —Gatschet, Shawnee 
MS., B. A.E., 1879 (Shawnee name; sing., S&yen). 
Scarred-Arms. —Sage, Scenes in Rocky Mts., 92, 
1846 (from misinterpretation of the tribal sign). 
Scheyenne.— Domenech, Deserts, II, 355, 1860. 
Schianese.— Carver, Trav., 50, 1796 (improperly 
noted as a Sioux band and distinct from the 
“Schians’’). Schiannesse. —Williamson in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 297, 1872 (misquoting Carver). 
Schians.— Carver, op. cit. (improperly noted as a 
Sioux band and distinct from the “Schianese”). 
Sha-en. —Gatschet, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1878 (one Kansa name). Shagen.— Culbertson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 96, 1851 (misprint for 
Shayen). Sha-h5.— Grinnell, inf’n, 1904 (Paw¬ 
nee name). Sha-i-a-pi. — Williamson, op. cit., 
299 (Santee Sioux name denoting a ‘people 
speaking an alien language,’ especially the 
Cheyenne, and equivalent to Sha-i-e-na, the 
Yankton Sioux form; pi-pl. suffix). Shai-e'-la.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 274,1862 (so 
called by some Sioux; this is the Teton Sioux 
form). Sha-i-e-na. —Williamson, op. cit., 299, 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-17 


1872 (Yankton Sioux name, applied to people 
speaking an alien language, particularly the 
Cheyenne. Hayden, op. cit., 274, has Shai-en-a; 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., has Shaiena for their 
Taos Pueblo name). Sharas. —Hayden, op. cit., 
274. Shar'-ha. —Lewis and Clark, Travels, 35, 
1806 (incorrectly given as their own name, but 
properly from the Sioux form. Clark, 1804, has 
“Sharha (chien), the village on the other side; 
We hee skeu (chien) the villagers on this side,” 
as though there were then two principal bands.— 
Lewis and Clark Journals, I, 190,1904). Shar- 
shas. —Hayden, op. cit., 274. Shaways. —De Smet, 
Letters, 33, 1843. Sha.whays. —Brackenridge, 

Views of La., 299, 1815. 'Shayen.— Gatschet, Fox 
MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Fox name). Shayenna. — 
Gatschet, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1878 (another 
Kansa name). Sheyen. —Gatschet, Tonkawe MS., 
B. A. E., 1884 (Tonkawa name). Sheyennes. —De 
Smet, Letters, 13, 1843. Shian. —Irving, Ind. 
Sketches, ii, 146,1835. Shia'navo. —Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1023,1896 (another Comanche name 
for the Cheyenne, probably a derivation from 
their common name). Shiannes.— Snelling, Tales 
of Travel, 100,1830. Shiarish. —Gatschet, Wichita 
MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Wichita name). Shie'da. — 
Mooney op. cit. (another Wichita name, probably 
a derivation from Cheyenne). Shiene. —Wil¬ 
liamson in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 296, 1872. 
Shiennes. — Maximilian, Travels, 389, 1843. 

Shiens. —Williamson, op. cit. Shi-ya. —Morgan 
in N. Am. Rev., 50, Jan., 1870 (given as Sioux 
name). Shiyans. —Ibid, (given as Sioux name). 
Showays. —Domenech, Deserts, ii, 60, 1860 (for 
Shaway, etc.). Shyennes. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, 104, 1848. Sianabone. — 
Garcia Rejon in Pimentel, Lenguas, u, 347, 1865 
(for Shiiinavo). Si'-a-na-vo.— ten Kate, Syn¬ 
onymie, 9,1884 (one of the names by which the 
Comanche know them, given as meaning ‘ plumes 
peintes,’ but evidently another form of their 
popular name). Tse-tis-tas'. —Ibid., 8 ( = ‘nous, 
nousautres’: their own name). 

Cheyenne, Northern. The popular des¬ 
ignation for that part of the Cheyenne 
which continued to range along the upper 
Platte after the rest of the tribe (Southern 
Cheyenne) had permanently moved down 
to Arkansas r., about 1835. They are now 
settled on a reservation in Montana. From 
the fact that the Omisis division (q. v.) 
is most numerous among them, the term 
is frequently used by the Southern Chey¬ 
enne as synonymous. (j. m. ) 

Upper Cheyennes.—Custer, Life on the Plains, 88, 
1874. 

Cheyenne Sioux. Possibly a loose ex¬ 
pression for Cheyenne River Sioux, i. e., 
the Sioux on Cheyenne Riverres., S. Dak.; 
but more probably, considering the date, 
intended to designate those Sioux, chiefly 
of the Oglala division, who were accus¬ 
tomed to associate and intermarry with 
the Cheyenne. The term occurs in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 41, 1856. (j. m.) 

Cheyenne, Southern. That part of the 
Cheyenne which ranged in the s. portion 
of the tribal territory after 1835, now per¬ 
manently settled in Oklahoma. They 
are commonly known as Sowonfli, ‘south¬ 
erners’ (from sowdn , ‘ south ’), by the 
Northern Cheyenne, and sometimes as 
Hevhaitanio, from their most numerous 
division. (j. m. ) 

Po-no-i-ta-ni-o.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 290, 1862 (evidently a misprint for Sowon'- 
ita'niu, ‘southern men’). So'wania. —Mooneyin 
14th Rep, B. A. E., 1025, 1896. 


258 


CHEYINYE-CHICAGO 


[B. A. E. 


Cheyinye (‘buffalo calf’). A subgens 
of the Arukhwa, the Buffalo gens of the 
Iowa 

Tee yin'-ye.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239, 
1897. 

Chiaha (Chehaw). A common Creek 
town name. The earliest on record. 
Chiaha, visited by the Da Soto expedi¬ 
tion in 1540, was probably situated on 
Tennessee r., but may have been in n. 
Georgia or n. Alabama. A third town 
of the name was lower down on 
Flint r., and was considered a Semi¬ 
nole settlement. Still another of the 
name, belonging to the Upper Creeks, 
may have been on Upper Coosa r. in n. 
Georgia. 

Achiha.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 7, 1776. Archieco. — 
U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. Big Chehaus. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 263, 1855. Big Che- 
haws.— Barnard (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., 
i, 391, 1832 (on the Chattahoochee). Chahah. — 
Adair, Am. Ind.,257,1775. Che-anhun. —U. S. Ind. 
Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. Chearhau. —H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 327, 1836. Che-ar-haw. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 578, 1854. Che-au- 
hau. —Hawkins(1799),Sketch, 63,1848. Checaws. — 
Harris, Coll, of Voyages, IT, 335,1705. Cheechaws. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. iv, 29, 1848 (on Flint 
r.; a small tribe destroyed in 1817 by Georgia 
militia). Cheehaws.— Morse, Rep. to See. War, 
308,1822. Chehau. —Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 256,1855. Chehawah. —Schoolcraft, 
ibid., iv, 578, 1854. Chehaws. —Barnard (1793) in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 382, 1832. Chehawu- 
seche.— Ibid., 309 (evident misprint for “Che¬ 
haw, Useche”). Chehew. —Crawford (1836) in H. 
R. Doc.274,25tn Cong.,2d sess., 24,1836. Chiaha. — 
Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., II, 145, 1850. Chiha. —Philippeaux, map of 
Engl. Col., 1781. China. —Biedma (1544), Hakluyt 
Soc. transl., 182,1851. Iehiaha.— Garcilasso de la 
Vega, Fla., 139,1723. Iciaha. —Shipp, DeSoto and 
Florida, 370, 1881. Solameco. —Vandera (1569) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., II, 247, 1875. Thiaha. —De 
Soto map (1543) in Harrisse, Discov. N.A., 644, 
1892. Upper Cheehaws. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1797), 69, 
1837. Ychiaha. —Garcilasso de la Vega, Fla., 138, 
1723. 

Chiaha. A town of the Creek Nation, 
Ind. T., on Verdigris r., n. e. of Wea- 
laka.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 
186 , 1888 . 

Tchiaha. —Gatschet, ibid. 

Chiahudshi ( Chiahu'dshi , ‘little Chia¬ 
ha’). A former dependent settlement of 
the Chiaha, about 2 m. w. of Hitchiti 
towrn, e. Ala. 

Che-au-hoo-che. —Hawkins (1799), Sketch,64,1848. 
Chiahu'dshi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 129, 
1884. Little Chehaus. —Swan (1791) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 263, 1855. Little Chiaha.— 
Gatschet, op. cit. 

Chiakamish. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on a creek of the same name, a 
tributary of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col. 
Tcia'kamic. —Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 
1900. Tcia'qamic. —Boas MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Chiakanessou. Mentioned by a French 
trader as a tribe of 350 warriors, associated 
with the Alibamu, Caouikas (Kawita), 
Machecous (Creeks), and Souikilas (Sa- 
wokli). Possibly the Creeks of Chiaha, 
the ending being the misspelt Creek isti, 
* people’; or, less likely, the Chickasaw. 
On the Del’Islemapof 1707 “Chiacante- 


sou,” which is probably the same, is 
located much farther n. w., within the 
Caddoan country. See Bouquet, Exped., 
Smith’s ed., 70, 1766. (a. s. g.) 

Chenakisses. —McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 79, 1854. Chiacantefous. —B. des Lozieres, Voy¬ 
age it la La., 242, 1802. Chiahnessou. —Boudinot- 
Star in the West, 126,1816. Chickanossous. —School, 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 557, 1853. 

Chiaktel. A Chilliwack village in s. 
Brit. Col.; pop. 43 in 1904. 

TcIa'ktE'l.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can. ,4,1902. 
Tyeachten. —Can. Ind. Aff., pt. II, 160, 1901. 
Tzeachten. —Ibid., 224, 1902. 

Chiataina. ( Chi'd-tai'na , ‘knife peo¬ 
ple’). The Knife clan of the pueblo of 
Taos, N. Mex. (f. w. h. ) 

Chibaouinani ( SKiba’u'Mining, ‘passage¬ 
way.—W. J.). A former Missisauga vil¬ 
lage, also known as La Cloche, on Cloche 
id., in L. Huron, n. of Manitoulin id. 
Chibaouinani.— La Galissoniere (1748) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., x, 183, 1858. La Cloche.— Ibid. 

Chibukak. A Yuit Eskimo village at 
Northwest cape, St Lawrence id.-, Bering 
sea.—Nelson in 18th Hep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. 

Chica^a. A chief town of the Chickasaw, 
situated, according to Halbert (Miss. 
Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 452, 1902), 1 m. n. w. 
of Bed land, in Pontotoc co., Miss., in the 
16th century. This settlement was visited 
by the army of De Soto, who made it his 
headquarters during the winter of 1540-41, 
and whose chroniclers describe it as situ¬ 
ated on a hill and consisting of thatch- 
roofed houses. In the following spring 
the Indians, after repeated attacks, suc¬ 
ceeded in setting tire to the town, and, al¬ 
though finally repulsed, killed a number 
of Spaniards and horses. The day fol¬ 
lowing this disaster the Spaniards moved 
to a spot a league away, where they built 
a temporary village which they called 
Chicacilla, i. e., ‘ Little Chicaga.’ 

Chica 9 a.—Ranjel (1546) quoted by Oviedo, Hist. 
Gen., I, 571, 1851. Great Village of the Chicka- 
saws.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 26, 1776. 

Sicacha.—Hennepin (1697), cited by Thwaites, 
Hennepin, ii, 442, 1903. 

Chicago (Sauk, Fox, and Kickapoo: 
shZkagua, ‘skunk’, and shekakoMg q ‘place 
of the skunk’, an ancient name for the 
s. part of L. Michigan, due, it is said, 
to a large skunk that once lived along 
the s. shores and was killed in the 
lake by a party of fox hunters.—W. J.). 
A Miami village on the site of Chicago, 
Ill., at the period of the earliest explo¬ 
rations in that region, 1670-1700. A 
French document of 1695 makes it a 
Wea village at that time (N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist,, ix, 619, 1855). Situated on 
one of the routes to the Mississippi, it 
was a place of importance from an 
early date. Marquette and Joliet passed 
by it on their return from their ex¬ 
ploration of the Mississippi, and Mar¬ 
quette subsequently spent a winter 
there. ^ Allouez took the same route 
in 1677, as did La Salle on his sec- 


BULL. 30 J 


OHICHEROHE-CHICKAHOMINY 


259 


ond journey, and Joutel and Cavelier 
were at Chicago in 1687-88, followed by 
La Hontan the following year. Chicago 
was also the name of a chief of the Illinois 
about 1725. See Hoffman in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 238. 

Apkaw. —St Cosine (1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 52, 
1861 (apparently intended for Chicago). Checa- 
gou. —Membr6 (1681) in Shea, Discov. Miss. R., 
166, 1852. Chegagou.— Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ix, 619, 1855. Chegakou. —La Hontan 
(1703), New Voy., I, 231, 1735. Chekakou.— Ibid., 
i, 135, 1703. Chicago.— Iberville (1702) in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 341, 1872. Chicagou.— Docu¬ 
ment of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 627, 
1855. Chicag8. —St Cosine (1699) in Shea, Early 
Voy., 56, 1861. Chicags. —Croghan (1765) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 785,1856. Chicagu.— St Cosme, 
op. cit., 51. Chicagvv.— Ibid., 59. Chicaqw.— 
Ibid., 54. Chigagou. —Ibid.,68. Chikago.— La Tour, 
map, 1784. Chikagons.— La Potherie, Hist. Amer., 
il, 346, 1753. Chikagou. —St Cosme (1699) in Shea, 
Early Voy., 55,1861. Chikagoua. —Gravier (1700), 
ibid., 116-117. Chikagu. —St Cosme, op. cit., 
51. Chikagvv. —Shea, Rel. Mission de Miss., 22, 
1861. 

Chicherohe. A former Cherokee settle¬ 
ment on War Woman cr., in n. w. Rabun 
co., Ga.; destroyed in the Revolutionary 
war. (j. m.) 

Chichigoue (seemingly cognate with 
Chippewa shishikwe, ‘rattlesnake’.— 
W. J.). A tribe mentioned by La Ches- 
naye as living n. of L. Superior in 1697, 
and generally trading with the English on 
Hudson bay. They can not be identified 
with any known tribe, but they were evi¬ 
dently Algonquian. (j. m.) 

Chichigoue.— La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, Ddc., 
vi, 7, 1886. Chichigoueks. —La Potherie, Hist, de 
l’Amer., n, 49, 1753. 

Chichilek. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col. 
Tcitcile'Ek.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475, 
1900. 

Chichilticalli (Nahuatl: chichiltic ‘red,’ 
colli ‘house’: ‘red house’). A ruined 
pueblo visited by Coronado’s army on its 
journey to Cibola (Zufii) in 1540; appar¬ 
ently situated on the Gila, e. of the mouth 
of the San Pedro, s. Ariz., probably not 
far from Solomonsville. Owing to the 
glowing account of the place given by 
Fray Marcos de Niza in the preceding 
year, Coronado and his followers were 
“ much affected by seeing that the fame 
of Chichilticalli was summed up in one 
tumble-down house without any roof, al¬ 
though it appeared to have been a strong 
place at some former time when it was in¬ 
habited, and it was very plain that it had 
been built by a civilized and warlike race 
of strangers who had come from a dis¬ 
tance” (Castaneda). Thesame writer also 
states that it “ was formerly inhabited by 
people who had separated from Cibola.” 
Many writers have wrongly identified it 
with the present Casa Grande. See Ban- 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, 178, 
1890; Hodge, Coronado’s March, 1899; 
Winship, Coronado Exped., 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896. (f. w. h. ) 


Chichicticale. —Castafieda (1596) in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., ix, 12,1838. Chichillicale. —Kern, 
map in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 38,1854. Chi- 
chilte Calli.— Jaramillo in Ternaux-Compans, 
Voy.. ix, 365,1838. Chichilti. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Ethnol. Soc., n, lxxviii, 1848. Chichilticah.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 117,1881 (mis¬ 
print). Chichilti-cal. —Gallatin, op. cit., Ixix. 
Chichilticala. —Ogilby, America, 299, 1671. Chi- 
chilticale. —Coronado (1540) in Hakluyt, Voy., 448., 
1600. Chichilticalen. —De PIsle, map Am. Sept., 
1700. Chichilticali. —Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Con- 
quista, 113, 1742. Chichilti-calli.— Gallatin, op. 
cit., lx. Chichiltic-Calli.— Jaramillo in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., ix, 368, 1838. Chichiltie.— Jara¬ 
millo in Doc. In6d., xiv, 307, 1870. Chichiltie 
Alii. —Jaramillo quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 40,1889. Chichiticala. —Heylyn, Cosmog¬ 
raphy, 968, 1703. Chichiticale. —Coronado (1540) 
in Ramusio, Nav. etViaggi, in, 362 (f), 1565. Chi- 
chitte Calli. —Jaramillo in Doc. In6d., xiv, 304, 
1870. Chilticale. —Beadle, Undeveloped West, 468, 
1873. Red House. —Wallace in Atl. Monthly, 219, 
Aug., 1880 (or Chichiticale). Red Town.—Dome- 
nech, Deserts N. A., i, 175, 1860 (or Chichilticale). 
Roode Huis. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 161, 1885 
(Dutch form). 

Chichinak. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on a small river flowing into Etolin 
str., Alaska; pop. 6 in 1880, 84 in 1890. 

Chechinamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Chichinagamute. —Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 54,1880. 

Chichip^ Outipe (Chippewa has Titi- 
pe'wntipe, ‘ curly-head. ’—W. J.). A large 
Potawatomi village in 1838 near South 
Bend, St Joseph co., Ind. (. 1 . m.) 

Chichiveachic (probably from the na¬ 
tive term signifying ‘peaks’ + chic ‘place 
of’). A Tarahumare rancheria in Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 



WILLIAM H. ADKINS, A CHICKAHOMINY 


Chickahominy (from K’chick-ahdm-mir/- 
nough , ‘coarse-pounded corn people,’ 
‘hominy people’—Tooker; or from Tshi- 
Mharri&n , a place name, meaning ‘swept,’ 






260 


CHICKAMAUGA 


CHICKASAW 


[ B. A. E. 


‘cleared/ and implying a clearing— 
Gerard). A tribe of the Powhatan con¬ 
federacy, formerly living on Chicka- 
hominy r., Va. It was one of the most 
important tribes in Virginia, numbering 
250 warriors, or perhaps 900 souls, in 
1608, and was not so directly under the 
control of Powhatan as the other tribes 
over which he ruled. In 1613 they en¬ 
tered into an alliance with the English 
and assumed the name of Tassautessus 
(sic), or “Englishmen.” In 1669 they 
were still estimated at 60 warriors, possi¬ 
bly 220 souls, but in 1722 were reported 
to number only about 80. Their last 
public notice occurs in this same year, 
when, in connection with the Pamunkey, 
they were named in the Albany confer¬ 
ence with the Iroquois as among the Vir¬ 
ginia tribes not to be molested by the 



CHICKAHOMINY WOMAN. (mOONEy) 


latter. A mixed-blood band numbering 
about 220 still keeps up the name, but 
without regular tribal organization, on 
both sides of Chickahominy r. in New 
Kent and Charles City cos., Va., with 
Wm. H. Adkins as chief in 1905. They 
are on close terms of association with the 
neighboring bands of Pamunkey and 
Mattapony. On the origin and applica¬ 
tion of the name consult Tooker, Algonq. 
Ser., ix, 1900; Gerard in Am. Anthrop., 
vn, 224, 1905. (j. m. ) 

Chechohomvnies.—Smith, Works, Arber ed.,lxxv, 
1884. Checkahomanies.—Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, 
839,1705. Chekahomanies.—Ibid. Chicahamanias.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, II, 16, repr. 1819. Chicho- 
minys.—Albany conference (1722) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., V, 673, 1855. Chickahamanias.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, II, 27, repr. 1819. Chickaha- 
mines.—Strachey ( ca. 1612), Virginia, 51, 1849. 
Chickahomines.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 


1816. Chickahominys.—Spotswood (1712) in Va. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., n.s., 1 ,167,1882. Chickahomones.— 
Jefferson (1781) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 36, 
1855. Chickahomonie.—Beverly, Virginia, 199, 
1722. Chikahominy.—Martin, N. C., l, 78, 1829. 
Tassautessus.—Smith (1624), Works, Arber ed., 
515,1884 (‘strangers,’ ‘Englishmen,’ an adopted 
name). Vttasantasough.—Simmonds (1612-24), 
ibid., 430. 

Chickamauga ( Tsikcima'gl , a word ap¬ 
parently of foreign origin and probably 
Shawnee, Creek, or Chickasaw). The 
name given to a band of Cherokee who 
espoused the English cause in the war of 
the Revolution and moved far down on 
Tennessee r., establishing new settle¬ 
ments on Chickamauga cr., in .the neigh¬ 
borhood of the present Chattanooga. 
Under this name they soon became noted 
for their . uncompromising and never- 
ceasing hostility. In 1782 their towns 
w r ere destroyed by Sevier and Campbell, 
and they moved farther down the river, 
establishing what were afterward known 
as the “five lower towns,” Running 
Water, Nickajack, Long Island, Crow 
Town, and Lookout Mountain Town. 
Here they were continually recruited by 
Creeks, Shawnee, and white Tories, until 
they were estimated to number a thou¬ 
sand warriors. They continued hostili¬ 
ties against the Tennessee settlements 
until 1794, when their towns were de¬ 
stroyed.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
54, 413, 537, 1900*. 

Chickasaw. An important Muskhogean 
tribe, closely related to the Choctaw in 
language and customs, although the two 
tribes were mutually hostile. Aside 
from tradition, the earliest habitat trace¬ 
able for the Chickasaw is n. Mississippi. 
Their villages in the 18th century cen¬ 
tered about Pontotoc and Union cos., 
where the headwaters of the Tombigbee 
meet those of Yazoo r. and its affluent, the 
Tallahatchie, about where the De Soto 
narratives place them in 1540, under 
the name Chicaza. Their main landing 
place on the Mississippi was at Chick¬ 
asaw Bluffs, now the site of Memphis, 
Tenn., whence a trail more than 160 m. 
long led to their villages. They had two 
other landing places farther up the Mis¬ 
sissippi. Adair, who for many years was 
a trader among the Chickasaw and gives 
a full and circumstantial account of 
them (Hist. Am. Inds., 352-373, 1775), 
states that in 1720 they had four contigu¬ 
ous settlements, and that the towns of 
one of these were Shatara, Chook’heereso, 
Hykehah, Tuskawillao, and Phalacheho. 
Two of the other settlements of which he 
gives the names were Yaneka, 6 m. long, 
and Chookka Phardah (Chukafalava), 
4 m. long. Romans (Florida, 63, 1775), 
describing their country and villages, says 
that they “live nearly in the center of an 
uneven and large nitrous savannah; have 
in it 1 town, 1J m. long, very narrow and 









BULL. SO] 


CHICKASAW 


261 


irregular; this they divide into 7 [towns] 
hv the names of Amalahta ‘hat and 
feather/ Chatelaw ‘coppertown/ Chuka- 
falaya ‘long town/ Hikkihaw ‘stand 
still/ Chucalissa ‘great town/ Tuckahaw 
‘a cert’n weed/ Ashukhuma ‘red grass.’ 
Formerly the whole was inclosed in pali- 
sadoes.” 

The warlike Chickasaw claimed other 
territory far beyond the narrow limits of 
their villages, and extending on the n. to 
the confluence of the Ohio with the Ten¬ 
nessee. They also claimed a large area 
n. of the Tennessee to the ridge be¬ 
tween Duck r. and the Cumberland to 
the headwaters of Duck r. and s. to Chick¬ 
asaw Old Fields on the Tennessee, thence 
along an indeterminate s. e. line to the 
Mississippi. This claim w r as admitted by 
the Cherokee. According to Haywood 
and otherauthoritiesan outlying colony of 
Chickasaw formerly dwelt on Savannah r. 
nearly opposite Augusta, Ga., but trouble 
with the Creeks drove them westward 
again. In 1795 the Chickasaw claimed 
payment from the United States for the 
land on the Savannah thus occupied. 

The Chickasaw were noted from remote 
times for their bravery, independence, 
and warlike disposition. They were con¬ 
stantly fighting with the neighboring 
tribes; sometimes with the Choctaw and 
Creeks, then with the Cherokee, Illinois, 
Kickapoo, Shawnee, Mobilians, Osage, 
and Quapaw. In 1732 they cut to pieces 
a war party of Iroquois who had invaded 
their country. They were constant ene¬ 
mies of the French—a feeling intensified 
by the intrigues of British traders and 
their hatred of the Choctaw who had 
entered into friendly relations with the 
French colonists. The Chickasaw urged 
the Natchez to resist the French encroach¬ 
ments, and gave shelter to them when 
driven from their home. They defeated 
the French at Amalahta in 1736, at the 
Long House and other points, and baffled 
their attempts at conquest in the war of 
1739-40. They combined with the Cher¬ 
okee about 1715 and drove the Shawnee 
from their home on the Cumberland, and 
in 1769 utterly routed, at Chickasaw Old 
Fields, these former Cherokee allies. 

Their relations with the United States 
began with the Hopew r ell treaty in 1786, 
when their boundary on the n. was fixed 
at the Ohio r. They began to emigrate 
w. of the Mississippi as early as 1822, 
and treaties for the removal of those w T ho 
remained in their old seats were made in 
1832 and 1834. By the treaty of 1855 
their lands in Indian Ter. were definitely 
separated from those of the Choctaw, with 
which they had before been included. 

In manners and customs they differed 
little from their congeners, the Choctaw, 
the principal difference being the more 


sedentary habits and greater devotion to 
agricultural pursuits by the Choctaw on 
the one hand, and the more turbulent, 
restless, and warlike disposition of the 
Chickasaw on the other. Their tradi¬ 
tional origin is the same as that of the 
Creeks and Choctaw (q. v.), and is given 
in the so-called ‘ ‘ Creek migration leg¬ 
end” (see Creeks). The Chickasaw ap¬ 
pear to have sheltered and ultimately 
incorporated into their organization the 
small tribes along Yazoo r., who spoke 
substantially the same language. The 
Chickasaw language served as a medium 
of commercial and tribal intercourse for 
all the tribes along the lower Mississippi. 
Early estimates of population vary widely, 
those of the 18th century ranging from 
2,000 to nearly 6,000. According to 
Adair (op. cit., 353) they had been much 



CHICKASAW 

more numerous than during his time 
(1744), one of the two divisions, the 
“Long House,” numbering not more 
than 450 w arriors, indicating a population 
of 1,600 to 1,800 persons. He gives no 
estimate of the other division, but assum¬ 
ing it to have been about the same, the 
population of the entire tribe was between 
3,000 and 4,000. Morse (Rep. to Sec. 
War, 364, 1822), though estimating the 
Choctaw at 25,000, gives the Chickasaw 
population as 3,625. In 1865 the esti¬ 
mated population w r as 4,500; in 1904 the 
official number was given as 4,826, in¬ 
cluding mixed bloods. 

According to Morgan (Anc. Society, 
163, 1878) the Chickasaw were divided 
into 12 gentes, arranged in 2 phratries, as 
follows: 

I.—Koi, Panther: (1) Koinchush, 






262 


CHICKASAW—CHICK WIT 


[b. a. e. 


Wild cat; (2) Hatakfushi, Bird; (3) 
Nunni, Fish; (4) lssi, Deer. II.—Ish- 
panee, Spanish: (1) Shauee, Raccoon; 
(2) Ishpanee, Spanish; (3) Mingko, 
Royal; (4) Hushkoni, Skunk; (5) Funi, 
Squirrel; (6) Hochonchabba, Alligator; 
(7) Nashola, Wolf; (8) Chuhhla, Black¬ 
bird. 

The list given by Gibbs (Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96, 1884) follows: 

I.—Panther phratry, Koa: (1) Koin- 
tchush, Wild cat; (2) Fushi, Bird; (3) 
Nanni, Fish; (4) lssi, Deer. II.—Span¬ 
ish phratry, Ishpani: (1) Shawi, Rac¬ 
coon; (2) Ishpani, Spanish; (3) Mingo, 
Royal; (4) Huskoni; (5) Tunni, Squir¬ 
rel; (6) Hotchon tchapa, Alligator; (7) 
Nashoba, Wolf; (8) Tchu’hla, Black¬ 
bird. 

Mingos or chiefs could be chosen only 
from the “Spanish” gens, and were he¬ 
reditary in the female line. The name 
must formerly have been different or this 
rule must have been established after 
the coming of the Spaniards. 

The following are the old Chickasaw 
towns so far as recorded: Ackia, Ama- 
lahta, Ashukhuma, Chatelaw, Chuca- 
lissa, Chukafalaya, Chula, Hykehah, 
Latcha Hoa, Palacheho, Pontotoc, 
Shatara, Taposa, Tuckahaw, Tuskawillas, 
Yaneka. (a. s. g. c. t. ) 

Ani'-Tsl'ksu, —Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 509, 
1900 (Cherokee name; sing., Tsi'k.sft). Ceicka- 
saw. —Simpson, Report, 11,1850. Chekaihas. —Shea, 
Relat. Miss, on Miss. R., 28,1861. Chekasaws. —Im- 
lay, West. Terr., 290,1797. Chiacasas. —Giissefeld, 
Map of U.S.,1784. Chicapa. —Gentl. of Elvas (1557) 
in Hakluyt Soc. Works, ix, 81,1851. Chicachas. — 
La Salle (1682) in Margry, D6c., I, 553, 1875. Chi- 
cachos.— Chauvignerie (1736) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 555, 1853. Chicaksaws. —Schoolcraft, 
ibid., 45. Chicasan.— Morse, Hist. Am., map, 
1798. Chicasas.— Croghan (1759) in Proud, Penn., 
11,297,1798. Chicasauus. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., 
i, 497, 1786. Chicasaws. —Barton, New Views, 
xlvii, 1798. Chicasou. —Mandrillon, Spect. Am., 
map, 1785. Chicassas. —French, Hist. Coll. La., 
iii,237, 1851. Chicawchaws. —Perrin du Lac.,Voy., 
368, 1805. Chicaza.— Biedma (1545) in Smith, Col. 
Doc. Fla., I, 55,1857. Chichacas. —Robin, Voy. k la 
Louisiane, I, 54, 1807. Chichasau. —Mollhausen, 
Reisen, I, 343, 1858. Chichasaws. —Imlay, West. 
Terr., 13, 1797. Chichashas. —Gamelin (1790) in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 93, 1832. Chicka- 
saws. —Niles (1760) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th s., v, 
549, 1861. Chickassas. — Domenech, Deserts, I, 440, 
1860. Chickesaw.— Frink (1764) in Hawkins, 
Missns., 101, 1845. Chicketaws. —Rogers, North 
America, 201, 1765. Chickisaw. — Bollaert in 
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., it, 280, 1850. Chickka- 
sah. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 109,1816. Chick- 
sas. —Croghan (1759) in Kauffman, West. Pa., 146, 
1851. Chicksaws. — Bossu (1751), Travels La., I, 92, 
1771. Chicksha. —Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. 
Coll., lsts., 79, 1824. Chickshau. —Niles (1760) in 
Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th s., V, 333,1861. Chigasaws. — 
Catesby, Nat. Hist. Car., ii, x, 1743. Chikachas. — 
Vater, Mith., in, 245, 1816. Chikakas. —Shea, 
Relat. Miss, on Miss. R., 34, 1861. Chikasahs. — 
Prichard, Phys. Hist., V, 401, 1847. Chikasaws.— 
Drake, Ind. Chron., 215, 1836. Chikasha. —ten 
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 402, 1885. Chikitaws. — 
Rogers, North America, 149, 1765. Chikkasah.— 
Barton, New Views, xlvii, 1798. Chikkesah,— 
Boudinot, Star in the West. 231, 1816. Chiksah.— 
Tanner, Narr., 327, 1830. Chiquacha. —Hennepin 
(1680) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 206, 1846. 
Chixaxia, —French writer (1761) in Mass. Hist. 


Coll., 4th s., IX, 428, 1861. Chukesws. — Buchanan, 
N. Am. Inds., 155, 1824. Cicaca.—La Salle (1679) 
in Margry, D6c., II, 41, 1877. Cikaga.—Hennepin, 
New Discov., 141, 1698. Kasaha unu”.—Gatschet, 
inf’n (Yuchi name; abbreviated from Chikasahd 
HnUn). Ohikkasaw.— Latham, Opuscula, 278,1860. 
Sicacas.—La Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c., I, 487, 
1875. Sicacha.—Hennepin, New Discov., 152,1698. 
Sicachia.—Ibid., 311. Sikacha.—Ibid., 152. 
Tchaktchan.—Gatschet, inf’n (Arapaho name). 
Tchicachas.—Bossu, Travels La., I, 92, 1771. 
Tchikasa.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 126,1888 
(Creek name, pi. Tchicasalgi). Tci'-ka-sa'.— 
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa 
name). Techichas.—Duquesne (1754) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., x, 263, 1858. Ti-ka'-ja.—Dorsey, 
Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Kwapaname). 
Tsi'-ka-ce.—Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1883 (Osage name). Tsi'ksu.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 509, 1900 (Cherokee name, pi. Ani'- 
Tsl'ksh). Tslk-u-su.—Grayson, Creek MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name). 

Chickasaw Half Town. Mentioned as a 
Choctaw town in the report of the Ft 
Adams conference in 1801.—Macomb in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 661, 1832. 

Chickasawhay. A former Choctaw town 
which stood, according to tradition, on the 
e. side of Chickasawhay r. about 3 m. 
below the present town of Enterprise, 
Clarke co., Ga. It also gave its name to 
a subdivision between Chickasawhay and 
Buckatunna rs.—Halbert in Rep. Ala. 
Hist. Soc., Misc. Coll., i, 379, 1901. 

Chicasahay.—Romans, Florida, 86, 1775. Chicka- 
sawhays.—Ibid., 73. Chickasawka.—Ker, Travels, 
331, 1816. Tchicachae.—Jefferys, French Dom. 
Am., 135, map, 1761. Tchikachae.—D’Anville, 
map ( ca . 1732) discussed by Halbert in Miss. Hist. 
Soc. Publ., ill, 367, 370, 1902. 

Chickasaw Old Fields. A place on the 
n. side of Tennessee r., opposite Chicka¬ 
saw id., about 4 m. below Flint r., in 
s. e. Madison co., Ala.; claimed by the 
Chickasaw as one of their ancient village 
sites.—Treaty of 1805 in U. S. Ind. Treat., 
116, 1837. 

Chickataubut (‘ house afire ’). A Massa- 
chuset sachem of the region about Wey¬ 
mouth, Mass., whose enmity against the 
English was early aroused by their dep¬ 
redations on the tribal cornfields and 
desecration of his mother’s grave ( Drake, 
Inds. N. Am., 107, 1880). In 1621, with 
several other chiefs, he submitted to 
the English authority, and in 1631 vis¬ 
ited Gov. Winthrop at Boston, behaving 
“like an Englishman.” In 1632 he 
served against the Pequot and died the 
next year of smallpox. He was a man 
of note and influence. (a. f. c.) 

Chickwit. A name of the weakfish 
( Labrus squeteague) still used, according 
to Bartlett (Diet, of Americanisms, 112, 
1877), in parts of Connecticut and Rhode 
Island. This word, spelled also chick- 
wick , chequet, etc., is generally thought 
to be a further corruption of squeteague , 
another name of this fish. Trumbull 
(Natick Diet., 21, 1903) cites the forms 
chequit and checout, and suggests a deri¬ 
vation from chohki, signifying, ‘spotted,’ 
in the Massachuset dialect of Algon- 
quian. (a. f. c.) 


BULL. 30] 


CHICOLI 


CHIEFS 


263 


Chicoli. Mentioned as a Navaho set¬ 
tlement in 1799 (Cortez in Pac, R. R. 
Rep., in, pt. 3, 119, 1856); but as the 
Navaho are not villagers, it is probably 
only a geographical name. 

CMconessex (from chicories ink, ‘place 
of small turkeys.’—Hewitt). A village 
of the Powhatan confederacy, formerly 
about Wiseville, Accomac co., Va. It 
was nearly extinct in 1722. (j. m.) 

Chiconessex.—Beverly, Virginia, 199, 1722. Chis- 
senossick.—Herrman map (1670) in Maps to Ac¬ 
company the Rept. of the Comrs. on the Bdy. 
bet. Va. and Md., 1873. 

Chicora. The name given by the Span¬ 
iards at the time of Ay lion’s visit in 1521 
to the coast region of South Carolina, s. 
of Edisto r., and to the Indians inhabit¬ 
ing it. The name Cusabo, subsequently 
applied, included most of the tribes of 
the same region. Gatschet suggests that 
the name Chicora is derived from the 
Catawba Yuchi-klrb, ‘Yuchi are there, 
or over there,’ but the connection is not 
very obvious. The French form of about 
the same period, Chigoula, has more the 
appearance of a Muskhogean word. Fon- 
taneda, about 1570, makes Chicora and 
Orista (Edisto) equivalent. The tribes 
of this region were practically extermi¬ 
nated by Spanish and English slave hunt¬ 
ers before the close of the 17th century. 

(j. M.) 

Chicora.—Fontaneda ( ca . 1570) in Ternaux-Com- 
pans, Voy., xx, 16, 1841. Chicoria.—Garcilassode 
la Vega, Fla., 4,1723. Chicorie.—Ayllon (ca. 1521) 
quoted by Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 240, 1881. 
Chigoula.—Laudonniere (1562) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n. s., 190, 1869. Chiquola.—Syms, Hist. 
S. C., 10, 1860. 

Chicoutimi. The name of a locality, 
the end of smooth navigation of Sague¬ 
nay r., Quebec, by which the Lake St 
John band of Montagnais was sometimes 
referred to (Jes. Rel. 1661, 13, 1858). 
The French formerly had a mission of 
the same name on the right bank of the 
Saguenay. In 1898 the Montagnais of L. 
St John numbered 404 and resided on a 
reservation at Pointe Bleue. (j. m.) 
Checoutimi. — Jefferys, French Dom. Am., I, 18, 
1761. Checoutimiens.—Ibid. Chegoutimis.—Jes. 
Rel. 1661, 14, 1858. Chekoutimiens.—Beilin, map, 
1755. Chekoutimis.—La Tour, map, 1784. Chicon- 
tami.—Johnson (1764) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
vii, 658, 1856 (misprint). Chicoutime.—Lords of 
' Trade (1764), ibid., 635. Chicoutimi.—Jes. Rel. 
1661, 13, 1858. Chixoutimi.—Johnson (1764) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 664, 1856. Montagnais 
of Lake St. John.—Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 1884, pt. I, 
185, 1885. 

Chicuchatti (probably Creek chxika chati, 

1 red houses, ’ referring to the custom of 
daubing the houses with red clay). A 
former Seminole town n. of Tampa bay, 
in the so-called Chocochatee savanna, 
Hernando co., Fla. According to Brinton 
it was one of the 7 bands into which the 
Seminole became divided after their sepa¬ 
ration from the Creeks. 

Chickuchatty.—Lindsay (1836) in H. R. Doc. 78, 
25th Cong., 2d sess., 149, 1838. Chicuchatty.— 
Drake, Ind. Chron., 209, 1836. Chockechiatte.— 


Peni&re in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311,1822. Cho- 
cochattee.—Cowperwaite, Atlas, 1850. Choke- 
chatti.—Brinton, Florida Penin., 145, 1859. Chu- 
ku-chatta.—Morse, op. cit., 307. 

Chicutae. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Chie. One of the two principal clans 
of the Chiricahua Apache, codrdinate 
with the Destchin clan of San Carlos 
agency, Ariz. 

Chi-e'.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 115, 
1890. 

Chief Joseph. See Joseph. 

Chiefs. Among the North American 
Indians a chief may be generally defined 
as a political officer whose distinctive 
functions are to execute the ascertained 
will of a definite group of persons united 
by the possession of a common territory 
or range and of certain exclusive rights, 
immunities, and obligations, and to con¬ 
serve their customs, traditions, and re¬ 
ligion. He exercises legislative, judica¬ 
tive, and executive powers delegated to 
him in accordance with custom for the 
conservation and promotion of the com¬ 
mon weal. 

The wandering band of men with their 
women and children contains the sim¬ 
plest type of chieftaincy found among the 
American Indians, for such a group has 
no permanently fixed territorial limits, 
and no definite social and political rela¬ 
tions exist between it and any other 
body of persons. The clan or gens, the 
tribe, and the confederation present more 
complex forms of social and political or¬ 
ganization. The clan or gens embraces 
several such chieftaincies, and has a 
more highly developed internal political 
structure w ith definite land boundaries. 
The tribe is constituted of several clans 
or gentes and- the confederation of sev¬ 
eral tribes. Among the different In¬ 
dian communities the social and politi¬ 
cal structure varied greatly. Many stages 
of social progress lay between the small 
band under a single chief and the intri¬ 
cate permanent confederation of highly 
organized tribes, with several kinds of 
officers and varying grades of councils of 
diverse but interrelated jurisdictions. 
With the advance in political organiza¬ 
tion political powers and functions were 
multiplied and diversified, and the mul¬ 
tiplicity and diversity of duties and func¬ 
tions required different grades of officers 
to perform them; hence various kinds and 
grades of chiefs are found. There were in 
certain communities, as the Iroquois and 
Creeks, civil chiefs and subchiefs, chosen 
for personal merit, and permanent and 
temporary war chiefs. These several 
grades of chiefs bear distinctive titles, 
indicative of their diverse jurisdiction. 
The title to the dignity belongs to the 


264 


CHIFUKLUK—CHIHLAKONINI 


[b. H. 


community, usually to its women, not to 
the chief, who usually owes his nomina¬ 
tion to the suffrages of his female constit¬ 
uents, but in most communities he is 
installed by some authority higher than 
that of his chieftaincy. Both in the low¬ 
est and the highest form of government 
the chiefs are the creatures of law, ex¬ 
pressed in well-defined customs, rites, 
and traditions. Only where agriculture 
is wholly absent may the simplest type 
of chieftaincy be found. 

Where the civil structure is permanent 
there exist permanent military chieftain¬ 
ships, as among the Iroquois. To reward 
personal merit and statesmanship the 
Iroquois instituted a class of chiefs whose 
office, upon the death of the holder, re¬ 
mained vacant. This latter provision 
was made to obviate a large representa¬ 
tion and avoid a change in the established 
roll cf chiefs. They were called “the 
solitary pine trees,” and were installed 
in the same manner as the others. They 
could not be deposed, but merely ostra¬ 
cized, if they committed crimes rendering 
them unworthy of giving counsel. 

Where the civil organization was of the 
simplest character the authority of the 
chiefs was most nearly despotic; even in 
some instances where the civil structure 
was complex, as among the Natchez, the 
rule of the chiefs at times became in a 
measure tyrannical, but this was due 
largely to the recognition of social castes 
and the domination of certain religious 
beliefs and considerations. 

The chieftainship was usually heredi¬ 
tary in certain families of the community, 
although in some communities any person 
by virtue of the acquisition of wealth 
could proclaim himself a chief. Descent 
of blood, property, and official titles were 
generally traced through the mother. 
Early writers usually called the chief who 
acted as the chairman of the federal coun¬ 
cil the “head chief” and sometimes, 
when the tribe or confederation was pow¬ 
erful and important, “king” or “em¬ 
peror,” as in the case of Powhatan. In 
the Creek confederation and in that of 
the Iroquois, the most complex abo¬ 
riginal government n. of Mexico, there 
was, in fact, no head chief. The first 
chief of the Onondaga federal roll acted 
as the chairman of the federal council, 
and by virtue of his office he called the 
federal council together. With this all 
preeminence over the other chiefs ended, 
for the governing power of the confedera¬ 
tion was lodged in the federal council. 
The federal council was composed of the 
federal chiefs of the several component 
tribes; the tribal council consisted of the 
federal chiefs and subchiefs of the tribe. 

Communities are formed on the basis 
of a union of interests and obligations. 


By the union of several rudimentary 
communities for mutual aid and protec¬ 
tion, in which each retained part of its 
original freedom and delegated certain 
social and political powers and jurisdic¬ 
tion to the united community, was 
evolved an assembly of representatives of 
the united bands in a tribal council hav¬ 
ing a definite jurisdiction. To these 
chiefs were sometimes added subchiefs, 
whose jurisdiction, though subordinate, 
was concurrent with that of the chiefs. 
The enlarged community constitutes a 
tribe. From tribes were organised con¬ 
federations. There were therefore sev¬ 
eral grades of councils constituted. In 
the council of the Iroquois confederation 
the subchiefs had no voice or recognition. 

Among the Plains tribes the chieftaincy 
seems to have been usually non-heredi- 
tary. Any ambitious and courageous 
warrior could apparently, in strict accord¬ 
ance with custom, make himself a chief 
by the acquisition of suitable property 
and through his own force of character. 
See Social organization. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Chifukluk. A Magemiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the left bank at the head of the 
Yukon delta, Alaska. 

Chifukhlugumut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. 

Chiggilli. See Chekilli. 

Chigilousa (Choctaw: lusa ‘black/ 
chigi ‘houses’). A former tribe on the 
lower Mississippi, probably the same as 
the Chitimacha, w. of that river (La Tour, 
map, 1783); but possibly they were of 
Choctaw affinity. 

Chigmiut. A subtribe of the Chu- 
gachugmiut Eskimo inhabiting Montague 
id., Prince William sd., Alaska. 

Chigmut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, map, 
1877. 

Chignecto (from sigunikt, ‘foot cloth’). 
A Micmac village in Nova Scotia in 1760.— 
Frye (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 
s., x, 115, 1809. 

Chiguau. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chihlakonini ( chi l ldko-nini , ‘horse- 

trail’). A former Lower Creek town on 
the upper waters of Chattahoochee r., 
seemingly in the present Harris Co., Ga. 
It was burned by the whites in Sept., 
1793, at which date it consisted of 10 
houses, but by 1799 the people had 
formed a new town on the left bank of 
Tallapoosa r., opposite Oakfuskee, Ala. 
The upper trail or war path crossed the 
latter stream by a horse ford at this 
place, about 60 m. above Kasihta town. 
It was probably identical with Okfus- 
kinini. ’ (a. s. q.) 

Checlucca-ninne.—Bartram, Travels, 462, 1792. 
Che'lako Nini.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 129, 
1884. Che-luc-co ne-ne.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 
45,1848. Chelucconinny.—Swan (1791) in School- 


BtJLL. 30] 


CH1HUCCH1HUI—CHILD LIFE 


265 


craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Horse-Trail — 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 129, 1884. Little 
Oakfuskee.—Knox (1793) in Am. State Pap.. Ind. 
Aff., I, 362, 18327 

Chihucchiliui. A former Chumashan 
village in Ventura co., Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. 

Chihupa (‘ jawbone band *). A former 
Dakota band under Sishhola, or Barefoot. 
6i-hu'-pa.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 373,1862. 

Chiink. An Alsea village on the s. side 
of Alsea r., Oreg. 

Tci'-ink.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 
230,1890. 

Chikak. An Aglemiut village on Hi- 
amna lake, Alaska; pop. 51 in 1880.— 
Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 

Chikataubut. See Chickataubut. 

Chikauach. A Songish band at McNeill 
bay, s. end of Vancouver id., Brit. Col. 
Tcik au'atc.—Boas in 6th Rep. on N. W. Tribes 
Can., 17, 1890. 

Chiklisilkh. A Lower Chehalis settle¬ 
ment at Pt Leadbetter, the n. ond of the 
land tongue at Shoal water bay, Wash.— 
Gibbs, Chinook vocab., B. A. E., 23. 

Chikohoki (from Chikelaki; chikeno 1 tur¬ 
key, 5 aki ‘land 5 ). The former principal 
seat of the Unalachtigo Delawares, situ¬ 
ated on the w. bank of Delaware r., near 
the present Wilmington, Del. 

Chichohocki.—Bozman, Maryland, I, 130, 1837. 
Ckickahokin.—Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, repr. 
1819. Chihohocki.—Thompson quoted by Jeffer¬ 
son, Notes, 278, 1825. Chikaholiin.—Brinton, 
Lenape Leg., 37, 1885. Chikelaki.—Ibid. Chiko- 
hocki.—Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., II, 6, 1814. Chikolacki.—Brinton, op. 
cit. 

Chikohoki. A former village, said to 
be of the Manta division of the Dela¬ 
wares, on the site of Burlington, Burling¬ 
ton co., N. J. According to Heckewelder 
it was the oldest village on Delaware r. 

(j. M.) 

Chikonapi (the Canadian Chippewa use 
the term chikonapa for ‘carpenter. 5 — 
W. J.). Mentioned in the Walam Olum 
of the Delawares as a people conquered 
or destroyed by the latter tribe (Brinton, 
Lenape Legends, 190, 1885). They can 
not be located with certainty. 

Chilano. A village or tribe, probably 
Caddoan, visited by De Soto’s troops un¬ 
der Moscoso toward the close of 1542, and 
at that time situated in n. e. Texas, near 
upper Sabine r. See Gentl. of El vas (1557) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 201,1850. 

Chilchadilkloge (‘grassy-hill people 5 ). 
An Apache band or clan at San Carlos 
agency and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881. 

Chilchadilkiogue.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk- 
Lore, in, 112, 1890. 

Child life. The subject of Indian child 
life has been but very lightly treated by 
ethnologists, although the child is in fact 
the strongest bond of family life under a 
system which allowed polygamy and easy 
separation. Both parents alike were en¬ 
tirely devoted to their children, and be¬ 
stowed upon them the fullest expression 


of affection and solicitude. The relation 
of parent to child brings out all the high¬ 
est traits of Indian character. 

Among some tribes, notably those of the 
plains, in anticipation of the new arrival 
the father prepares the wooden f rameof the 
cradle w T hich is to be its portable bed until 
it is able to walk. The body of the cradle, 
with its ornamentation of bead or quill 
design, fringes and bangles, is made either 
by the grandmother or by some woman 
noted in the tribe for her superior ex¬ 
pertness. There w T ere many well-marked 
varieties of cradle, differing with the 
tribe. Among the Choctaw, Catawba, 
and other former tribes of the Southern 
states, and among the Chinookan and 
Salishan tribes of the Columbia, there 
was used a special attachment which, by 
continued pressure upon the forehead 
while the bones were still soft, produced 
the so-called “flat head, 55 esteemed with 
these tribes a point of beauty (see Arti¬ 
ficial Head Deformation ). One cradle was 
used for successive infants in the same 
family. 

The newborn infant is commonly treated 
at once to a cold bath, and turned over to 
another matron to nurse until the mother’s 
health is restored. AmongtheHopi, ashes 
or sacred meal are rubbed on the newborn 
babe. Lactation is long continued, even 
for 2 years or more, and in rare cases much 
longer. With all the affection of the 
mother, the women are almost completely 
ignorant of ordinary sanitary rules as to 
feeding, exposure, etc., consequently 
the rate of infant mortality is very high 
in almost every tribe, many children 
being born, but only a small proportion 
coming to maturity, so that even in for¬ 
mer times the tribal population remained 
almost stationary. The child sisters or 
cousins of the baby are its attendants, 
while the mother is occupied with other 
duties, and perform their work with the 
instinct of little mothers. The child is 
kept in its cradle usually only during a 
journey or while being carried about, 
and not, as is commonly supposed, dur¬ 
ing most of the time. At home it rolls 
about upon the grass or on the bed 
without restraint. Formerly, except in 
extreme weather, no clothing was worn 
during waking hours up to the age of 
from 5 to 10 years, according to the 
tribe and climate, and in some tribes this 
practice still prevails. The child may be 
named soon after birth, or not for a year 
or more after, this child name, like the 
first teeth, being discarded as the boy or 
girl grows up for another of more impor¬ 
tant significance (see Names and Naming ). 
The child name is often bestowed by the 
grandparent. Among the Hopi the in¬ 
fant, when 20 days old, is given a name 
and is dedicated to the sun with much 


266 


CHILD LIFE 


[b. a. e. 


ceremony. With some tribes, as the 
Omaha, the hair is cut in a pattern to 
indicate the gens or band of the parent, 
and in some, as the Kiowa, to indicate 
the particular protecting medicine of the 
father. 

Twins are usually regarded as uncanny, 
and are rather feared, as possessing oc¬ 
cult power. With some Oregon and 
other coast tribes they were formerly re¬ 
garded as abnormal and one or both were 
killed. There are well-authenticated in¬ 
stances of deformed children being put 
to death at birth. On the other hand 
children crippled by accident are treated 
by parents and companions with the 
greatest tenderness. 

Among the Plains tribes the ceremo¬ 
nial boring of the ears for the insertion 
of pendants is often made the occasion of 
a more or less public celebration, while 
the investment of the boy with the 
breechcloth at the age of 9 or 10 years is 
observed with a quiet family rejoicing. 
The first tattooing and the first insertion 
of the lab ret are also celebrated among 
the tribes practising such customs. In 
many or most tribes the boys passed 
through an initiation ordeal at an early 
age, sometimes, as with the Zuni, as young 
as 5 years (see Ordeals ). With the Hopi 
and Zuni the child is lightly whipped with 
yucca switches when initiated into the 
Kachina priesthood. With the Powhatan 
of Virginia, if we can believe the old chron¬ 
iclers, the boys, w T ho may have been about 
10 years of age at the time, were actually 
rendered unconscious, the declared pur¬ 
pose being to take away the memory of 
childish things so that they should wake 
up as men (see Huskanaw). On the 
plains the boys at about the same age were 
formally enrolled into the first degree of 
the warrior society and put under regular 
instruction for their later responsibilities. 

Children of both sexes have toys and 
games, the girls inclining to dolls and 
“playing house,” while the boys turn to 
bows, riding, and marksmanship. Tops, 
skates of rib-bones, darts, hummers, balls, 
shinny, and hunt-the-button games are 
all favorites, and wherever it is possible 
nearly half the time in warm weather is 
spent in the water. They are very fond 
of pets, particularly puppies, w r hich the 
little girls frequently dress and carry 
upon their backs like babies, in imita¬ 
tion of their mothers. Among the Zuni 
and Hopi wooden figurines of the princi¬ 
pal mythologic characters are distributed 
as dolls to the children at ceremonial per¬ 
formances, thus impressing the sacred 
traditions in tangible form (see Amuse¬ 
ments, Dolls, Games). 

Girls are their mothers’ companions 
and are initiated at an early period into 
all the arts of home life—sewing, cooking, 


weaving, and whatever else may pertain 
to their later duties. The boys as natur¬ 
ally pattern from their fathers in hunting, 
riding, or boating. Boys and girls alike 
are carefully instructed by their elders, 
not only in household arts and hunting 
methods, but also in the code of ethics, 
the traditions, and the religious ideas 
pertaining to the tribe. The special cere¬ 
monial observances are in the keeping of 
the various societies. The prevalent idea 
that the Indian child grows up without 
instruction is entirely wrong, although it 
may be said that he grows up practically 
without restraint, as instruction and 
obedience are enforced by moral suasion 
alone, physical punishment very rarely 
going beyond a mere slap in a moment of 
anger. As aggressiveness and the idea of 
individual ownership are less strong with 
the Indian than with his white brother, 
so quarrels are less frequent among the 
children, and fighting is almost unknown. 
Everything is shared alike in the circle of 
playmates. The Indian child has to'learn 
his language as other children learn t heirs, 
lisping his words and confusing the gram- 
matic distinctions at first; but with the 
precocity incident to a wild, free life, he 
usually acquires correct expression at an 
earlier age than the average white child. 

At about 15 years of age in the old days, 
throughout the eastern and central re¬ 
gion, the boy made solitary fast and vigil 
to obtain communication with the medi¬ 
cine spirit which was to be his protector 
through life; then, after the initiatory 
ordeal to which, in some tribes, he was 
subjected, the youth was competent to 
take his place as a man among the war¬ 
riors. For a year or more before his ad¬ 
mission to full manhood responsibilities 
the young man cultivated a degree of re¬ 
serve amounting even to bashfulness in 
the presence of strangers. At about the 
same time, or perhaps a year or two ear¬ 
lier, his sister’s friends gathered to cele¬ 
brate her puberty dance, and thenceforth 
child life for both was at an end. 

Consult Chamberlain, Child and Child¬ 
hood in Folk Thought, 1896; Dorsey in 
3d Rep. B. A. E., 1884; Eastman, Indian 
Boyhood (autobiographic), 1902; Fewkes 
(1) in Am. Anthrop., iv, 1902, (2) in 21st 
Rep. B. A. E., 1903; Fletcher in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, 1888; Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 1884; La Flesche, The Middle 
Five, 1901 (autobiographic); Mason in 
Rep. Nat. Mus., 1887; Owens, Natal Cere¬ 
monies of the Hopi, 1892; Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., in, 1877; Spencer, Educa¬ 
tion of the Pueblo Child, 1899; Stevenson 
in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 1887; and especially 
Jenks, Childhood of Jishib, the Ojibwa, 
1900, a sympathetic sketch of the career 
of an Indian boy from birth to manhood. 

(J. M.) 


BULL. 30] 


CHILHOWEE-CHILLICOTHE 


267 


Chiihowee (Tsitltin we't, abbr. Tsulufd- 
we, or Tshla'wl , possibly connected with 
tsiillX ‘ kingfisher ’). A former important 
Cherokee settlement on Tellico r., a 
branch of Tennessee r., in Monroe co., 
Tenn., near the North Carolina boundary. 

(j. M.) 

Chelowe. —Bartram,Travels, 371,1792. Chiihowee. — 
Roycein 5th Rep.B. A. E.,map,1887. Chilhowey.— 
Timberlake, Memoirs, 76,1765. Chillhoway.—Cen¬ 
sus of 1755 cited by Royce, op. cit., 144. 

Chilili ( Chi-li-lV ). A former Tigua 
pueblo on the tv. side of the Arroyo de Chi¬ 
lili, about 30 m. s. e. of Albuquerque, N. 
Mex. It is inadvertently mentioned as a 
“captain” of a pueblo by Ohate in 1598, 
and is next referred to in 1630 as a mis¬ 
sion with a church dedicated to Nuestra 
Senora de Navidad. In this church were 
interred the remains of Fray Alonzo 
Peinado, who went to New Mexico about 
1608, and to whom was attributed the 
conversion of the inhabitants and the 
erection of the chapel. The village was 
abandoned, according to Bandelier, be¬ 
tween 1669 and 1676 on account of the 
persistent hostility of the Apache, the 
inhabitants retiring mostly to the Tigua 
villages on the Rio Grande, but some 
joined the Mansos at El Paso. According 
to Vetancurt the pueblo contained 500 
Piros in 1680, and Benavides referred to 
it as a Tompiros pueblo 50 years earlier; 
but Bandelier believes these statements to 
be in error, since the northern pueblos 
of the Salinas belonged to the Tigua. 
See the latter authority in Arch. Inst. 
Rep., v, 34, 1884; Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, 
128-131, 1890; iv, 255-257, 1892. . 

(f. w. h.) 

Acolocu.—Onate (1598) in Doc. In£d., xvi, 118,1871 
(believed by Bandelier, Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
113,1892, to be probably Chilili). Chichilli. —Squier 
in Am. Rev., n, 522,1848. Chichiti.—Loew in Rep. 
Wheeler Surv., app. LL, 175,1875. Chili.—Galle- 
gas(1844)in Emory, Reconnoissance, 478,1848. Chi- 
lile.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 254,1893 (misprint). 
Chilili.—Benavides, Memorial, 21,1630. Chilili'.— 
Pac. R. R. Rep., Ill, pt. 3, map 10,1856. Chilily.— 
Jeffervs, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Chillili.—Squier 
in Am. Rev., II, 522, 1848. Chititi.—Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, xciv, 1848. Navidad 
de Nuestra Senora.—Vetancurt (1693), Teatro 
Mex., in, 324, repr. 1871. Old Chilili.—Abert in 
Emory, Reconnoissance, 483, 1848. 

Chilili. A former tribe or village of the 
Utina confederacy in n. Florida. On the 
De Bry map it is located e. of St Johns r. 
Chilili.—Laudonni5re (1565), Hist. Not. de la Flor- 
ide, 90, 1853. Chililo.—Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723 
(cacique’s name). Chilily.—Laudonniere (1565) 
quoted by Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 525,1881. 

Chilkat (said to be from tcU-xdt, 1 store¬ 
houses for salmon’). A Tlingit tribe 
about the head of Lynn canal, Llaska; 
noted for the manufacture of the famous 
blankets to which they have given their 
name (seeAdornment, Blankets)', pop. 988 
in 1880, and 812 in 1890. Winter towns: 
Chilkoot, Katkwaahltu, Ivlukwan, Yen- 
destake. Smaller towns: Deshu, Dyea, 
Skagway. Social divisions: Daktlawedi, 


Ganahadi, Hlukahadi, Kagwantan, Nus- 
hekaayi, Takestina. 

Cheelcat. —Anderson quoted by Gibbs in Hist. 
Mag., vil, 75, 1862. Cheelhaats. —Scouler in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc.Lond., 1,242,1848. Cheelkaats. —Ibid., 
232. Chelkatskie. —Elliott, Cond. AfY. Alaska, 227, 
1875. Chilcahs. —Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 314, 1868. 
Chilcaks. —Ibid.,309. Chilcales. —Halleck in Rep. 
Sec. War, pt. 1,38,1868. Chilcat. —Kane, Wand, in 
N. A., app., 1859. Chilcates. —Halleck in Ind Aff. 
Rep. 1869,562,1870. Chilkaht-Kwan.— Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., I, 37, 1877. Chilkahts. —Halleck in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 562,1870. Chilkasts. —Dunn, 
Hist. Oreg., 288,1844. Chilkat-qwan. —Emmons in 
Mem. Am. Mus.Nat. Hist.,in,232,1903. Chilkats. — 
Halleck in Rep. Sec.War, pt. 1, 38, 1868. Chilkat- 
skoe. —Veniaminoff, Zapiski, II, pt. 3, 30, 1840. 
Chilkhat. —Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 31,1884. 
Chitl-kawt. —Jackson, Alaska, 242, 1880 (native 
pronunciation of name of Chilcat r. ). Tchilcat. — 
Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105,46th Cong., 2d sess., 
31, 1880. Tschilkat. —Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., 
102, 1839. Tschilkat-kon. —Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 
116,1885. Tschischlkhathkhoan. —Kingsley, Stand. 
Nat. Hist.,pt. 6,132,1883. Tschishlkhath. —Holm- 
berg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 142, 1855. Tschishl- 
khathkhoan. —Ibid., 11-12. 

Chilkat. According to Petroff (Comp. 
10th Census, pt. 2, 1427, 1883) a Tlingit 
town or aggregation of towns, on Con¬ 
troller bay, e. of the mouth of Copper 
r., Alaska. It belonged to the Yakutat 
and had 170 inhabitants in 1880. Prob¬ 
ably it was only a summer village. 

Chilkoot. A Tlingit town on the n. e. 
arm of Lynn canal, Alaska. Pop. at 
Chilkoot mission in 1890, 106. These 
people are often regarded as a separate 
division of Koluschan, but are practically 
the same as the Chilkat. 

Chilcoot.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 31,1884. 
Chilkoot.—11th Census, Alaska, 3, 1893. Tschil- 
kut.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 100,1885. 

Chillescas. An Indian province, e. of 
Quivira, which the abbess Maria de Jesus, 
of Agreda, Spain, claimed to have mirac¬ 
ulously visited in the 17th century.— 
Benavides (1631) in Palou, Relacion 
Hist., 336, 1787. 

Chillicothe (from C/u-la-ka / -lha). One 
of the four tribal divisions of the Shawnee. 
The division is still recognized in the tribe, 
but the meaning of the word is lost. The 
Chillicothe always occupied a village of 
the same name, and this village was re¬ 
garded as the chief town of the tribe. 
As the Shawnee retreated w. before the 
whites, several villages of this name were 
successively occupied and abandoned. 
The old Lowertown, or Lower Shawnee 
Town, at the mouth of the Scioto, in 
Ohio, was probably called Chillicothe. 
Besides this, there were three other vil¬ 
lages of that name in Ohio, viz: 

(1) On Paint cr., on the site of Old- 
town, near Chillicothe, in Ross co. This 
village may have been occupied by the 
Shawnee after removing from Lower- 
town. It was there as early as 1774, and 
was destroyed by the Kentuckians in 
1787. 

(2) On the Little Miami, about the site 
of Oldtown, in Greene co. The Shawnee 


268 CHILLIWACK-CHILOCCO INDIAN INDUSTRIAL SCHOOL [b. a. e. 


are said to have removed from Lower- 
town to this village, but it seems more 
probable that they went to the village on 
Paint cr. This village near Oldtown 
was frequently called Old Chillicothe, and 
Boone was a prisoner there in 1778. It 
was destroyed by Clark in 1780. 

(3) On the (Crreat) Miami, at the pres¬ 
ent Piqua, in Miami co.; destroyed by 
Clark in 1782. (j. m.) 

Chellicothee.—Perrin du Lac, Voy. des Deux 
Louisianes, 146, 1805. Chilacoffee.—Brodhead 
(1779) in Penn. Archives, xii, 179,1856. Chi-lah- 
cah-tha.—W. H. Shawnee in Gulf States Hist. 
Mag., i, 415,1903 (name of division). Chilicothe.— 
Harmar (1790) in Kauffman, West Penn.,app., 226, 
1851. Chilikoffi.—Brodhead, op. cit., 181. Chilla- 
cothe.—Harmar, op. cit., app., 227. Chillicoffi.— 
Brodhead, op. cit., 258. Chillicothe.—Clark (1782) 
in Butterfield, Washington-Irvine Cor., 401,1882. 
Chilocathe.—Lang and Taylor, Rep., 22, 1843. 
Paint Creek town.—Flint, Ind. Wars, 69, 1833 (in 
Ross co., on Paint cr.). Shillicoffy.—Brodhead, op. 
cit., 258. Tsalaxgasagi.—Gatschet, Shawnee MS., 
B. A. E., 1879 (correct plural form). 

Chilliwack. A Salish tribe on a river of 
the same name in British Columbia, now 
speaking the Cowichan dialect, though 
anciently Nooksak according to Boas. 
Pop. 313 in 1902. Their villages, mainly 
on the authority of Hill-Tout, are Atse- 
lits, Chiaktei, Kokaia, Shlalki, Skaialo, 
Skaukel, Skway, Skwealets, Stlep, Thal- 
telich, Tsoowahlie, and Yukweakwioose. 
The Can. Ind. Aff. Reports give Koqua- 
pilt and Skwah (distinct from Skway), 
and Boas gives Keles, which are not iden¬ 
tifiable with any of the above. 

Chillwayhook.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 295,1861. Chi- 
loweyuk.—Gibbs, MS. vocab. 281, B. A. E. Chi- 
lukweyuk.—Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 
278, 1866. Squahalitch.—Ibid. Tc’ileQue'uk-.— 
Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., lxiv, 454, 1894. Tcil’- 
Qe'uk.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 3, 
1902. Tshithwyook.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 120 b, 1884. 

Chilluckittequaw ( ChiWktkwa ). A Chi- 
nookan tribe formerly living on the n. side 
of Columbia r. in Klickitat and Skamania 
cos., Wash., from about 10 m. below the 
Dalles to the neighborhood of the Cas¬ 
cades. In 1806 Lewis and Clark estimated 
their number at 2,400. According to 
Mooney a remnant of the tribe lived near 
the mouth of White Salmon r. until 1880, 
when they removed to the Cascades, 
where a few still resided in 1895. The 
Smackshop were a subtribe. (l. f. ) 
Chee-luck-kit-le-quaw.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, iv, 262,1995. Che-luc-it-te-quaw.—Ibid., in, 
164. Che-luck-kit-ti-quar.—Ibid., iv, 288. Chillo- 
kittequaws.—Wilkes, Hist. Oreg., 44,1845. Chillo 
Kittequaws.—Robertson, Oreg., 129,1846. Chilluc¬ 
kittequaw.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 45, 1814. 
Chilluckkitequaws.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, 
op. cit., iv, 285. Chilluckkittaquaws.—Ibid., 295. 
Chil-luck-kit-tequaw.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
I, map, 1817. Chillukittequas.—Am. Pioneer, I, 
408, 1842. Chillukittequaw.—Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 
1845. Chilluk-kit-e-quaw.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. 
Rep., I, 417, 1855. Chil-luk-kit-te-quaw.—Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., i, map, 1814. Chilu'ktkwa.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 741, 1896. 

Ckillychandize. Mentioned as a small 
Kalapooian tribe on Willamette r., Oreg. 


Otherwise not identifiable.—Ross, Ad 
ventures, 236, 1847. 

Chilocco Indian Industrial School. A 

Government school for Indian children, 
conducted under the direction of the 
Commissioner of Indian Affairs; situated 
on a reserve of 13 sections of land (8,320 
acres) along the Kansas boundary in 
Kay co., Okla., set aside by executive 
order of July 12, 1884. The school was 
opened Jan. 15, 1884, with 186 pupils. 
At that time only Indians living in In¬ 
dian Ter. were permitted to enter; but 
through subsequent action by Congress 
all Indian children save those belonging 
to the Five Civilized Tribes are now ad¬ 
mitted, although pupils are recruited 
chiefly from contiguous states and terri¬ 
tories. The equipment of the school has 
increased from a single large building in 
1884 to 35 buildings, principally of stone, 
with modern improvements for the health 
and convenience of the children and em¬ 
ployees. The pupils now (1905) number 
more than 700. The corps consists of a 
superintendent, 51 principal employees, 
and 20 minor Indian assistants. The 
primary object of the Government in 
establishing the Chilocco school on such 
a large tract was to enable the allotment 
of small farms to Indian youth who had 
acquired knowledge of the theory of 
agriculture at the school, thus enabling 
them to learn farming in a practical and 
intelligent manner and to return to their 
homes and kindred well equipped for the 
struggle for a livelihood. In pursuance 
of this plan every department of the 
Chilocco school is now organized with 
the view of making it preeminently an 
institution for agriculture and the attend¬ 
ant industries, with the result that it has 
become the best-equipped institution in 
the Indian service for agricultural in¬ 
struction. In 1904 800 acres of wheat 
and oats were harvested and threshed 
by the school force; there were also 60 
acres in potatoes, 50 acres in garden 
truck, 350 acres in corn, 100 acres in cane, 
80 acres in Kaffir corn, and 200 acres in 
meadow. In addition there have been 
planted 5,000 forest trees, more than 
3,500 fruit trees, 4,000 grapevines, 6,000 
strawberry plants, and a proportionately 
large number of other small fruits and 
vegetables. In addition to produce al¬ 
most sufficient to supply the needs of the 
school, the nursery is largely drawn on 
to establish gardens ana orchards at 
other Indian schools, and a surplus of 
hay, grain, garden and other seeds, and 
cattle, hogs, and poultry is annually sold 
for the school’s benefit. Particular at¬ 
tention is paid to instruction of boys in 
the trades, especially those useful to the 
farmer, and include blacksmithing, horse- 


BULL. 30] 


CHILOHOCKI-CHIMALAKWE 


269 


shoeing, wagon making, shoe and har¬ 
ness making, carpentry, painting and 
paper hanging, tailoring, broom making, 
stonecutting, stone and brick laying, en¬ 
gineering, plumbing and steam fitting, 
and printing; while special instruction 
in sewing, baking, cooking, housekeep- 
ing, dairying, and along kindred lines is 
given the girls, who number about half 
the pupils enrolled. In addition to the 
industrial education every pupil is given 
a grammar-school training; religious in¬ 
struction of a non-sectarian character also 
forms part of the school work, and the 
pupils are encouraged to form associa¬ 
tions promotive of mutual strength and 
character. A printing office is in opera¬ 
tion, the product, including a periodical, 
The Indian School Journal , being the work 
of Indian boys. (j. h. d. ) 

Chilohocki. A village on Miami r., Ohio, 
in 1779 (Brodhead in Penn. Archives, xn, 
177, 1856). Probably a Delaware village; 
the name seems to be connected with 
Chikohoki, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Chiltneyadnaye (‘ walnut *). An Apache 
clan or band at San Carlos agency and Ft 
Apache, Ariz., in 1881; coordinate with 
the Chisnedinadinaye of the Pinal Coyo- 
teros.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 112, 1890. 

Chilula ( Tsu-lu'-la, from Tsula, the 
Yurok name for the Bald hills. A small 
Athapascan division which occupied the 
lower (n. w.) portion of the valley of 
Redwood cr., n. Cal., and Bald hills, 
dividing it from Klamath valley. They 
were shut off from the immediate coast 
by the Yurok, who inhabited villages at 
the mouth of Redwood cr. The name of 
the Chilula for themselves is not known; 
it is probable that like most of the Indians 
of the region they had none, other than 
the word for “people.” Above them 
on Redwood cr. was the related Atha¬ 
pascan group known as Whilkut, or 
Xoilkut. The Yurok names of some of 
their villages are Cherkhu, Ona, Opa, 
Otshpeth, and Roktsho. (a. l. k.) 
Bald Hill.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 139, 1853. Bald Hill Indians.—McKee 
(1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 
160, 1853. Chalula.— Parker, Jour., 262, 1842. 
Chil-lu-la.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., m, 87, 
1877. Chillulahs.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, map, 
322, 1882. Tcho-lo-lah.—Gibbs (1851) in School¬ 
craft, Ind.Tribes,in, 139,1853 (‘Bald hill people’: 
Yurok name). Tes'-wan.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., hi, 87,1877 (Hupa name). 

Chimai. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on the left bank of Squawmisht 
r., Brit. Col. 

TcimaP.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,1900. 

Chimakuan Family. A linguistic family 
of the N. W. coast, now represented by one 
small tribe, the Quileute (q. v.), on the 
coastof Washington. There was formerly 
an eastern division of the family, the Chi- 
makum, occupying the territory between 
Hood’s canal and Port Townsend, which 


is now probably extinct. The situation 
of these two tribes, as well as certain 
traditions, indicate that in former times 
the family may have been more powerful 
and occupied the entire region to the 
s. of the strait of Juan de Fuca from which 
they were driven out by the Clallam and 
Makah. This, however, is uncertain. 
Within historic times the stock has con¬ 
sisted solely of the two small branches 
mentioned above. They have borne a 
high reputation among their Indian neigh¬ 
bors for warlike qualities, but for the 
greater part have always been on friendly 
terms with the whites. In customs the 
Quileute, or eastern Chimakuan, resem¬ 
bled the Makah and Nootka; all were 
whalers. The Chimakum, on the other 
hand, resembled the Clallam in customs. 
The Chimakuan dialects have not been 
thoroughly studied, but the material col¬ 
lected shows the language to be quite in¬ 
dependent, though with certain phonetic 
and morphologic relations to the Salish 
and Wakashan. (l. f.) 

=Chemakum.—Eells in Am. Antiq., 52, Oct., 1880 
(considers language different from any of its 
neighbors). =Chimakuan.—Powell in 7th Rep. 
B. A. E., 62,1891. =Chimakum.—Gibbs in Pac. R. 
R. Rep., 1,431,1855 (family doubtful). <Nootka. — 
Bancroft, Native Races, in, 564, 1882 (contains 
Chimakum). <Puget Sound Group.—Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 474, 1878 
(Chinakum included in this group). 

Chimakum. A Chimakuan tribe, now 
probably extinct, formerly occupying the 
peninsula between Hood’s canal and Port 
Townsend, Wash. Little is known of 
their history except that they were at 
constant war with the Clallam and other 
Salish neighbors, and by reason of their 
inferiority in numbers suffered extremely 
at their hands. In 1855, according to 
Gibbs, they were reduced to 90 indi¬ 
viduals. The Chimakum were included 
in the Point no Point treaty of 1855 and 
placed upon the Skokomish res., since 
.which time they have gradually dimin¬ 
ished in numbers. In 1890 Boas was able 
to learn of only three individuals who 
spoke the language, and even those but 
imperfectly. He obtained a small vocab¬ 
ulary and a few grammatical notes, pub¬ 
lished in part in Am. Anthrop., v, 37-44, 
1892. (l. f. ) 

A-hwa-ki-lu.—Eells in Smithson. Rep. 1887,606,1889 
(native name). Aqospilo.—Boas in Am. Anthrop., 
v, 37,1892 (native name). Chema-keem. —Ross in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1870. Chemakeum.—Eells in 
Am. Antiq., ix, 100, 1887. Chemakum.—Swan, N. 
W. Coast, 344, 1857. Chemicum.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 12, 1863. Chim-a-kim.—Jones in 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1857. 
Chima-kum.—Gibbs in Pac.R. R. Rep., I, 431,1855. 
Chimicum.—Simmons in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 398, 
1860. Chin-a-kum.—Starling, ibid., 170, 1852. 
Chine-a-kums.—Ibid., 172. Chumakums.—Morrow, 
ibid., 179,1861. Clamakum.—Simmons, ibid., 1857, 
333, 1858. Port Townsend.—Wilkes in Stevens’ 
Rep. N. P. R. R., 463, 1854. Tsemakum.—Gibbs in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 177, 1877. 

Chimalakwe. Mentioned by Powers as 
an extinct tribe that once lived on New r., 


270 


CHIMALTITLAN-CHIMMESYAN FAMILY 


[B. A. B. 


if. Cal., and included in his map, as by 
Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 63,1891), with 
the Chimariko. The name Chimalakwe 
is undoubtedly only a variant of Chi¬ 
mariko, often pronounced Chimaliko. 
The Chimariko, however, did not occupy 
upper New r., which region, together 
with the adjacent territory about the 
headwaters of Salmon r., was held by a 
group of people belonging to the Shastan 
family, though markedly divergent from 
the Shasta proper in dialect. This Shas¬ 
tan group, the proper name of which is 
unknown, has been described by Dixon 
(Am. Anthrop., vn, 213,1905) under the 
name of New River Shasta. In 1902 two 
aged women appeared to be the only 
survivors of this people. (a. l. k.) 
Chi-mal'-a-kwe.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
hi, 91, 1877. Chimalaquays.—Powers in Overland 
Mo., IX, 156, 1872. Chimalquays.—Powers quoted 
by Bancroft, Nat. Races, 1,446,1882. New River.— 
Dixon in Am. Anthrop., vii, 216,1905. 

Chimaltitlan (Nahuatl: ‘where prayer- 
sticks are placed ’). A former settlement 
of the Tepecanoor of a related tribe, about 
8 m. s. of Bolanos, in the valley of the Rio 
de Bolanos, Jalisco, Mexico.—Hrdlicka, 
inf n, 1905. 

Chimarikan Family. Established as a 
linguistic family on the language of the 
Chimariko, which was found to be distinct 
from that of any known tribe. All that is 
known in relation to the family, w r hich is 
now nearly extinct, will be found under 
the tribal name Chimariko. 

=Chiraarikan.—Powellin7th Rep. B. A. E.,63,1891. 
=Chim-a-ri , -ko.—Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
in, 474, 1877; Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255, 
Apr., 1882 (stated to be a distinct family). 

Chimariko (from Djimaliko, the name 
they apply to themselves; derived from 
djimar ‘man’). A small tribe, com¬ 
prising the Chimarikan family, formerly 
on Trinity r., near the mouth of New r., 
n. Cal., extending from Hawkins Bar 
to about Big Bar, and probably along 
lower New r.; they adjoined the Hupa 
downstream and the Wintun upstream. 
The Chimariko first became known to the 
whites on the influx of miners about 1850. 
They were then a small tribe, friendly 
with the Hupa and the neighboring Shas¬ 
tan tribes, but at war with the Wintun of 
Hay fork of Trinity r. In 1903 they num¬ 
bered only 9 individuals, including mixed 
bloods, who lived scattered from Hupa up 
Trinity r., and on New r., among Indians 
of other tribes, and among the whites 
(Goddard, MS., Univ. Cal.). In general 
culture the Chimariko were much like 
their neighbors to the n. w., the Hupa, 
though they are said to have lacked 
canoes, and did not practise the deerskin 
dance of the Hupa and Yurok. They ap¬ 
pear to have lived largely on salmon and 
eels caught in Trinity r., and on vegetal 
foods, especially acorns. Like the other 
tribes of n. w. California, they had no po¬ 


litical organization or divisions other than 
villages, one of which was at or near Haw¬ 
kins Bar, others at Burnt Ranch, Taylor’s 
Flat, and Big Bar, and probably at other 
places, though their names for these set¬ 
tlements are not known with certainty. 
See Chimalakwe. (a. l. k. ) 

Djimaliko.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (own 
name). Kwoshonipu.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (name 
probably given them by the Shasta of Salmon r.). 
Me-em-ma.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32(1 
Cong., spec, sess., 194,1853. Meyemma.—Gibbs in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 139, 1853. Mi-em- 
ma.—Meyer in Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855. 

Chimbuiha. A former settlement of the 
Molala on the headwaters of Santiam r., 
in the Cascade mts., Oreg. (a. s. g.) 

Chimiak. A Kuskwogmiut village on 
Kuskokwim r., Alaska; pop. 71 in 1880, 
40 in 1890. 

Chim-e-kliag-a-mut.—Spurr and Post quoted by 
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Chimekliak.— 
Baker, ibid. Chimiagamute.—Petroff, 10th Census, 
Alaska, 17, 1884. Chimingyangamiut.—11th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Chimmesyan Family (from Tsimshian, 

‘ people of Skeena r. ’). A small linguistic 
family on Nass and Skeena rs., n. Brit. 
Col., and the neighboring coast as far s. 
as Milbank sd. The 3 main divisions 
are the Tsimshian of lower Skeena r., the 
Kitksan of upper Skeena r., and the Niska 
of Nass r. The closest cultural affinities 
of these people are with the Haida of 
Queen Charlotte ids. and the Tlingit of 
the Alaskan coast, though their language 
is strikingly different and must be placed 
in a class by itself among the tongues of 
the N, W. According to their own tra¬ 
ditions and those of neighboring tribes 
they have descended Nass and Skeena 
rs. in comparatively recent times to the 
coast, displacing the Tlingit. 

In physical characters and social organ¬ 
ization the Chimmesyan resemble the 
Haida and Tlingit, but the Kitksan, living 
farther inland, seem to have mixed with 
the Athapascan tribes, and more nearly 
approach their type. The Chimmesyan 
language is characterized by a very exten¬ 
sive use of adverbial prefixes principally 
signifying local relations, by an extreme 
useof reduplication, a great abundance of 
plural forms, and numerous temporal 
and modal particles (Boas). Like other 
coast tribes they obtain the largest part 
of their food from the sea and the rivers. 
The annual runs of salmon on the Skeena 
and of eulachon into the Nass furnish 
them with an abundance of provisions at 
certain seasons. Eulachon are a great 
source of revenue to the Niska, the oil 
being in great demand all along the coast, 
and indispensable for the great winter pot- 
latches. Bear, mountain goats, and other 
wild animals are hunted, particularly by 
the interior tribes. The horns of moun¬ 
tain goats are carved into handles for 
spoons used at feasts and potlatches, and 
are sold to other tribes for the same pur- 


BULL. 30] 


CHIMNAPUM-CHINATU 


271 


pose. Although good carvers and canoe 
builders, the Chimmesyan are surpassed 
by the Haida, from whom they still pur¬ 
chase canoes. Their houses were often 
huge structures made of immense cedar 
beams and planks, and accommodating 
from 20 to 30 people. Each was presided 
over by a house chief, while every family 
and every town had a superior chief; under 
him were the members of his household, 
his more distant clan relations, and the 
servants and slaves. 

There were four clans or phrarties: 
Kanhada, Lakyebo (‘On the Wolf ’), Lak- 
skiyek (‘On the Eagle’), and Gyispawa- 
duweda. Each of these clans comprised a 
great number of subdivisions, concern¬ 
ing which the information is more or 
less conflicting, some regarding them 
simply as names for the people of certain 
towns, while others treat them as family 
groups, not necessarily confined to one 
place. If their organization was anything 
like that of the Haida, the subdivisions 
were at one time local groups; but it is 
probable that many of them have been 
displaced from their ancient seats or have 
settled in more than one place. This 
view is corroborated by the account of 
the Niska tribes given by Boas (10th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 48, 49). Their names, 
as far as obtainable, will be found under 
the separate divisional headings. De¬ 
scent is reckoned in the female line. 
While the present culture of the Chim- 
mesyail tribes is similar to that of the 
neighboring coast peoples, there is some 
evidence of their recent assimilation. In 
most of the Tsimshian myths they ap¬ 
pear primarily as an inland tribe that 
lived by hunting, and their ancestral 
home is described as on a prairie at the 
headwaters of Skeena r. This suggests 
an inland origin of the tribe, and the 
historical value of the traditional evidence 
is increased by the peculiar divergence 
of their mythological tales from those of 
neighboring tribes; the most character¬ 
istic tales of the Tsimshian being more 
like the animal tales of the w. plateaus 
and of the plains than like the tales of 
the n. coast tribes in which the human 
element plays an important part. The 
Chimmesyan tribes have also adopted cus¬ 
toms of their s. neighbors on the coast, 
more particularly the winter ceremonial 
with its cannibal ceremonies, which they 
obtained from the Bellabella. In 1902 
there were reported 3,389 Chimmesyan 
in British Columbia; and with the 952 
enumerated as forming Mr Duncan’s col¬ 
ony in Alaska in 1890, the total is about 
4,341. (j. r. s.) 

=Chemmesyan.—Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. 
Soc. Lond., I, 233,1848. =Chimmesyan.—Schouler 
in Jour.Geog.Soc.Lond. ,1,219,1841. =Chimsyans.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. =Chymsey- 
ans.—Kane, Wand. inN. A.,app.,1859. xHaidah.— 


Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog Soc. Lond., xi, 220, 
1841. >Hydahs.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
473,1878 (includes other tribes). > Naas.—Gallatin 
in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1, c, 1848 (in¬ 
cludes other tribes). >Naass.— Ibid.,77. >Nass.— 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 564,1882 (includes other 
tribes). =Nasse.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
36,1877. x Northern.—Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., XI, 220, 1841 (includes many other tribes). 
=Tshimsian.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. B. C., 
114B, 1884. =Tsimpsi-an'.—Dali in Proc. A. A. A. 
S., 379, 1885. 

Chimnapum. A small Shahaptian tribe 
located by Lewis and Clark in 1805 on the 
n. w. side of Columbia r. near the mouth 
of the Snake, and on lower Yakima r., 
Wash. They speak a dialect closely 
allied to the Paloos. By Lewis and Clark 
their population was estimated at 1,860, in 
42 lodges. A remnant of the tribe is still 
living on the w. side of Columbia r., op¬ 
posite Pasco, Wash. (l. f. ) 

Chamna'pum.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 739, 
1896. Chim-nah-pan.—Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
252, 1854. Chim-nah-pum.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, vi, 115, 1905. Chim-nah-pun.—Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., i, map, 1814. Chimnapoos.—Ibid., 
II 257, 1814. Chimnapum.—Ibid., II, 12. Chim- 
na-pum.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, in, 
123, 1905. Chimnapuns.—Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 
44, 1845. Chinnahpum.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 570, 1853. Chin-na-pum.—Orig. Jour., op. cit., 
in, 184,1905. Chunnapuns.—Nicolay, Oregon, 143, 
1846. Chym-nah'-pos.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
Coues ed., 973, note, 1893. Chymnapoms.—Orig. 
Jour., op. cit., IV, 339, 1906. Chymnapums.—Ibid., 
73. Cuimnapum.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 17, 
1814. 

Chimuksaich. A Siuslaw village on 
Siuslaw r., Oreg. 

Tcim'-muk-saitc'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 230, 1890. 

China Hat (seemingly a corruption of 
Xa'exaes , their own name). A Kwakiutl 
tribe speaking the Heiltsuk dialect and 
residing on Tolmie channel and Mussel 
inlet, Brit. Col.; pop. 114 in 1901, 77 in 
1904. 

Haihaish.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. B. C., 
117 b, 1884. Qe'qaes.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 52,1890. Xa'exaes.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1895, 328 (own name). 

Chinakbi. A former Choctaw town on 
the site of the present Garlandsville, Jas¬ 
per co., Miss. It was one of the villages 
constituting the so-called Sixtowns, and 
gave its name to a small district along 
the n. side of Sooenlovie cr., partly in 
Newton co. and partly in Jasper co.— 
Halbert in Publ. Ala. Hist. Soc., Misc. 
Coll., i, 381-382, 1901. 

Chinokabi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 109, 
1884. 

Chinapa. An Opata pueblo, and the 
seat of a Spanish mission founded in 
1648, on the Rio Sonora, lat. 30° 30', 
Sonora, Mexico; pop. 393 in 1678, and 
204 in 1730. It was burned by the 
Apache in 1836. 

Chinapa.—Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Chmapi.—Bartlett, Personal 
Narr., I, 279, 1854. San Jose Chinapa.—Zapata 
(1678) in Doc. Hist. Hex., 4th s., in, 370, 1857. 

Chinatu (Chi-na-tu', ‘the hidden back of 
a mountain.’—Lumholtz). A pueblo, in¬ 
habited by both Tepehuane and Tara- 


272 


CHINCAPIN-CHINOOK 


[b. a. e. 


humare, in the Sierra Madre, w. Chi¬ 
li uahua, Mexico. 

Chinatu.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 322,1864. Chis- 
mal. —Ibid., 324. 

Chincapin. See Chinquapin. 

Chinchal. A Yamel band that formerly 
lived on Dallas cr., a w. tributary of Wil¬ 
lamette r., Oreg. 

Tch’intchal. —Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877. 

Chincomen. See Chinquapin. 

Chincoteague ( Chingua-tegwe , ‘ large 

stream,’ ‘inlet.’—Hewitt). A village, 
probably belonging to the Accohanoc 
tribe of the Powhatan confederacy, 
formerly about Chincoteague inlet in Ac¬ 
comack co., Va. In 1722 the few re¬ 
maining inhabitants had joined a Mary¬ 
land tribe. Cf. Cinquaeleck, Cinquoteck. 
Chingoteacq.— Herrman, map (1670) in Maps to 
Accompany Rept. of Comrs. on the Bdy. bet. Va. 
and Md.,1873. Chingo-teagues.—Bozman, Md., I, 
102, 1837 (the villagers). Gingo-teque.—Beverly, 
Virginia, 199, 1722. 

Chingigmiut. An Eskimo tribe inhab¬ 
iting the region of C. Newenham and 
C. Peirce, Alaska. Their women wear 
birdskin parkas; the kaiakshaveno hole 
through the bow like those of the Kusk- 
wogmiut. The villages are Aziavik and 
Tzavahak. 

Chingigmut.—Nelson in 18th Rep., B. A. E., map, 
1899. Tschinjagmjut.—Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., 
map. 142, 1855. 

Chiniak. A Kaniagmiut village at the 
e. end of Kodiak id., Alaska; pop. 24 in 
1880.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. 

Chinik. A Kaviagmiut village and mis¬ 
sion on Golofnin bay, Alaska; pop. 38 
in 1890, 140 in 1900. 

Cheenik. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Chilli- 
miut.—11th Census, Alaska, 162,1893. Chinigmut.— 
Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Ross, in Am., pt. I, 73, 
1847. Dexter.—Baker, op. cit. Ikaligvigmiut.— 
Tikhmenief quoted by Baker, op. cit. Ikalig- 
■wigmjut.—Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 1855. 
Tchinimuth. —Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., 
xxi, map, 1850. 

Chinik. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on 
the e. bank of Yukon r., at the junction 
of Talbiksok. 

Tchinik.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., 
xxi, map, 1850. 

Chinila. A Knaiakhotana village of 15 
persons in 1880, on the e. side of Cook 
inlet, Alaska, near the mouth of Kaknu r. 
Chernila.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. 
Chernilof.—Ibid., map. Chinila.—Ibid., 29. 

Chinipa. A term used in different 
senses by early Spanish authors; by 
some, as Ribas, the Chinipa are men¬ 
tioned as a nation distinct from the Var- 
ohio, and by others it is applied to a group 
of villages. It is also used to designate a 
particular village on an upper affluent of 
the Rio del Fuerte, in Varohio territory, 
lat. 27° 30', long. 108° 30', in w. Chihua¬ 
hua, Mexico, and by Hervas as that of a 
dialect of the Tara humare. Curepo was 
a Chinipa rancheria in 1601. 

Chinipa.—Hervas, Cat., I, 319, 1800. Chinipas.— 
Ribas, Hist. Triumphos, 255, 1645. San Andres 


Chinipas.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864 (the 
settlement). 

Chinits. A Karok village on the s. bank 
of Klamath r., just below Tsofkara, Hum¬ 
boldt co., Cal. 

Chee-nitch.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 
1860. T’cheh-nits.—Gibbs, MS. Misc., B. A. E., 
1852. 

Chinkapin. See Chinquapin. 

Chinklacamoose (possiblyDelaware Chin- 
gua-klakamoos , ‘large laughing moose.’— 
Hewitt). A former village of the Iroquois 
on the site of Clearfield, Clearfield co., 
Pa., before 1805. It probably took its 
name from a chief. The Seneca of Corn- 
planter’s village also frequented the neigh¬ 
borhood. 

Chingleclamouche.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
pi. clx, 1900. Chingleolamolik.—La Tour, map, 
1784. Chingleolamuk.—Gussefeld, map, 1784. 
Chinklacamoose.—Day, Hist. Coll. Pa., 231, 1843. 
Chinklacamoose's Oldtown.—Ibid. 

Chinko. A former division of the Illi¬ 
nois tribe. 

Chinko.—Allouez (1680) in Margry, D6c., II, 96, 
1877. Chinkoa.—La Salle (1681), ibid., 134. 

Chinkopin. See Chinquapin. 

Chiniak. A former village of the Tan- 
otenne at the confluence of Nechaco and 
Stuart rs., Brit. Col., which had a flour¬ 
ishing population that the Tsilkotin 
racticallv annihilated in one night. 

cinlak.—Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s, 25,1893. 

Chinnaby’s Fort. In 1813, at the time 
of the Creek rebellion, Chinnaby, a Creek 
chief friendly to the United States, had a 
“kind of fort” at Ten ids, on Coosa 
r., Ala. 

Chinnaby’s Fort.—Drake, Bk. Inds. IV, 55, 1848. 
F‘ Chinnabie.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,Ala. 
map, 1900. 

Chinook (from Tsinuk, their Chehalis 
name). The best-knowm tribe of the Chi- 
nookan family. They claimed the territory 
on the n. side of Columbia r., Wash. , from 
the mouth to Grays bay, a distance of 
about 15 m., and n. along the seacoast as 
far as the n. part of Shoal water bay, where 
they were met by the Chehalis, a Salish 
tribe. The Chinook were first described 
by Lewis and Clark, who visited them 
in 1805, though they had been known to 
traders for at least 12 years previously. 
Lewis and Clark estimated their number 
at 400, but referred only to those living 
on Columbia r. Swan placed their num¬ 
ber at 112 in 1855, at which time they 
were much mixed w ith the Chehalis, with 
whom they have since completely fused, 
their language being now extinct. From 
their proximity to Astoria and their in¬ 
timate relations with the early traders, 
the Chinook soon became well known, 
and their language formed the basis for 
the widely spread Chinook jargon, which 
w’as first used as a trade language and is 
now a medium of communication from 
California to Alaska. The portion of the 
tribe living around Shoalwater bay was 
called Atsmitl. The following divisions 


BULL. 30] 


CHINOOK-CHINOOKAN FAMILY 


273 


and villages have been recorded: Chinook, 
Gitlapshoi, Nakoaik, Nemah, Nisal, Pa- 
lux, Wharhoots. (l. f. ) 

Ala'dshush. —Gatschet, Nestucca MS. vocab., B. 
A. E. (Nestucca name). Cheenook.—Scouler in 
Jour. Ethnol.Soc. Lond.,1,236,1848. Cheenooks.— 
Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., i, 224, 1841. 
Chenooks.— Parker, Jour., 142, 1842. Chenoux.— 
Meek in H.R. Ex. Doc. 76,30th Cong., 1st sess., 
10, 1848. Chenukes.—Hastings, Emigr. Guide to 
Oregon, 59, 1845. Chimook.—Emmons in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, m, 224,1853. Chin-hook.—Gass, 
Jour., 238, 1808. Chin-nooks.—Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., Coues ed., 755, 1893. Chinook.—Fitzpat¬ 
rick in Ind. Aff. Rep., app., 245,1847. Chin ook.— 
Gass, Jour., 176, 1807, Chinouks.—Smet, Oregon 
Miss., 33, 1847. Chinucs.—Rafinesque, introd. 

Marshall, Ky., I, 32,1824. Chinuks.—Latham, Nat. 
Hist. Man., 317,1850. Chonukes.—Hastings, Emigr. 
Guide to Oregon, 59, 1845. Flatheads.—Parker, 
Jour., 142, 1842. Nez Perces.—Ibid. Schinouks.— 
Smet, Letters, 220, 1843. Tchinooks.—Smet, Ore¬ 
gon Miss., 72,1847. Tchinouks. —Duflot de Mofras, 
Explor. de l’Oregon, ii, 125, 1844. Tchinoux.— 
Smet, Letters, 230, 1843. Tpinuk.—Hale in U. S. 
Expl. Exped., vi, 562, 1846. Tehenooks.—Smet, 
Letters, 152, 1843. Tetes-Plates.—Duflot de Mo¬ 
fras, Explor. de l’Oregon, n, 108,1844. Thlala’h.— 
Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Clackama name). Tschi- 
nuk.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 73, 
1856. Tshinuk.—Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped vi, 
214,1846. Tsinuk.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 57, 1856. T’sinuk.—Gibbs in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 241,1877. Tsniuk.—Wickersham in Am. 
Antiq., xxi, 374,1899. 



CHINOOK MAN. (am. Mus. NAT. HIST.) 


Chinook. The principal village of the 
Chinook, situated on Baker bay, Pacific 
co., Wash., near the mouth of Columbia r. 

Chinookan Family. An important lin¬ 
guistic family, including those tribes for¬ 
merly living on Columbia r., from The 
Dalles to its mouth (except a small strip 
occupied by the Athapascan Tlatskanai), 
and on the lower Willamette as far as the 
present site of Oregon City, Oreg. The 
family also extended a 3hort distance 
along the coast on each side of the mouth 
of the Columbia, from Shoal water bay on 

57008°—Bull. 30-12-18 


the n. to Tillamook Head on the s. The 
family is named from the Chinook, the 
most important tribe. With the excep¬ 
tion of a few traders near the mouth of 
the Columbia, Lewis and Clark were the 
first whites to visit these tribes, and their 
description still constitutes the main au¬ 
thority as to their early condition. The 
Chinookan villages were situated along 
the banks of the Columbia, near the 
mouths of its tributaries, and for the 
greater part on the n. side. The houses 
were of wood and very large, being occu¬ 
pied on the communal principle by 3 or 
4 families and often containing 20 or more 
individuals. Their villages were thus 
fairly permanent, though there was much 
moving about in summer, owing to the 
nature of the food supply, which con¬ 
sisted chiefly of salmon, with the roots 
and berries indigenous to the region. 
The falls and Cascades of the Columbia 
and the falls of the Willamette were the 
chief points of gathering in the salmon 
season. The people were also noted 
traders, not only among themselves, but 
with the surrounding tribes of other 
stocks, and trips from the mouth of the 
Columbia to the Cascades for the purpose 
of barter were of frequent occurrence. 
They were extremely skilful in handling 
their canoes, which were well made, 
hollow r ed out of single logs, and often of 
great size. In disposition they are de¬ 
scribed as treacherous and deceitful, es¬ 
pecially when their cupidity was aroused, 
and the making of portages at the Cas¬ 
cades and The Dalles by the early traders 
and settlers was always accompanied with 
much trouble and danger. Slaves were 
common among them and were usually 
obtained by barter from surrounding 
tribes, though occasionally in successful 
raids made for that purpose. Little is 
known of their particular social customs 
and beliefs, but there was no clan or 
gentile organization, and the village was 
the chief social unit. These villages 
varied greatly in size, but often consisted 
of only a few houses. There w^as always 
a headman or chief, who, by reason of 
personal qualities, might extend his influ¬ 
ence over several neighboring villages, 
but in general each settlement was inde¬ 
pendent. Their most noteworthy histor¬ 
ical character was Comcomly, q. v. 

Physically the Chinookan people dif¬ 
fered somewhat from the other coast 
tribes. They were taller, their faces 
wider and characterized by narrow and 
high noses; in this respect they resembled 
the Kwakiutl of Vancouver id. The cus¬ 
tom of artificially deforming the head by 
fronto-occipital pressure was universal 
among them, a skull of natural form being 
regarded as a disgrace and permitted only 



274 


CHINOOK JARGON 


[B. a. e. 


to slaves. This custom later lost its force 
to some extent among the tribes of the 
upper Columbia. 

Linguistically they were divided into 
2groups: (1) Lower Chinook, comprising 
two slightly different dialects, the Chinook 
proper and the Clatsop; (2) Upper Chi¬ 
nook, which included all the rest of the 
tribes, though with numerous slight dia¬ 
lectic differences. As a stock language 
the Chinookan is sharply differentiated 
from that of surrounding families. Its 
most striking feature is the high degree 
of pronominal incorporation, the pho¬ 
netic slightness of verbal and pronominal 
stems, the occurrence of 3 genders, and 
the predominance of onomatopoetic proc¬ 
esses. The dialects of Lower Chinook are 
now practically extinct. Upper Chinook 
is still spoken by considerable numbers. 

The region occupied by Chinookan 
tribes seems to have been well populated 
in early times, Lewis and Ciark estimat¬ 
ing the total number at somewhat more 
than 16,000. In 1829, however, there 
occurred an epidemic of what was called 
ague fever, of unknown nature, which in 
a single summer swept away four-fifths 
of the entire native population. Whole 
villages disappeared, and others were so 
reduced that in some instances several 
were consolidated. The epidemic was 
most disastrous below the Cascades. In 
1846 Hale estimated the number below 
the Cascades at 500, and between the Cas¬ 
cades and The Dalles at 800. In 1854 
Gibbs gave the population of the former 
region as 120 and of the latter as 236. 
These were scattered along the river in 
several bands, all more or less mixed with 
neighboring stocks. In 1885 Powell esti¬ 
mated the total number at from 500 to 
600, for the greater part on Warm Springs, 
Yakima, and Grande Ronde reservations, 
Oreg. The fusion on the reservations has 
been so great that no accurate estimate is 
now possible, but it is probable that 300 
would cover all those who could properly 
be assigned to this family. 

Most of the original Chinookan bands 
and divisions had no special tribal names, 
being designated simply as “those living 
at such a place.” This fact, especially 
after the general disturbance caused by 
the epidemic of 1829, makes it impossible 
to identify all the tribes and villages 
mentioned by writers. The following list 
includes the different tribes, divisions, 
and the villages not listed under the 
separate tribes: Cathlacomatup, Cathla- 
cumup, Cathlakaheckit, Cathlamet, 
Cathlanahquiah, Cathlapotle, Charcowa, 
Chilluckittequaw, Chinook, Chippan- 
chickchick(?), Clackama, Clahclellah, 
Clahnaquah, Claninnatas, Clatacut, Clat¬ 
sop, Clowwewaila, Cooniac, Cushook, 
Dalles Indians, Ithkyemamits, Kasenos, 


Katlagulak, Katlaminimin, Killaxthokle, 
Klemiaksac, Knowilamowan, Ktlaeshatl- 
kik, Lower Chinook, Multnomah, Na- 
moit, Navakaukaue, Nechacokee, Ne- 
cootimeigh, Neerchokioon, Nemalquin- 
ner, Nenoothlect, Scaltalpe, Seamysty, 
Shahala, Shoto, Skilloot, Smackshop, 
Teiakhochoe, Thlakalama, Tlakatlala, 
Tlakluit, Tlakstak, Tlalegak, Tlashgene- 
maki, Tlegulak, Upper Chinook, Wahe, 
Wahkiacum, Wakanasisi, Wappatoo, 
Wasco, Watlala, Willopah, Wiltkwilluk, 
Yehuh. (l. f.) 

>Cheenook.— Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
I, 286, 1848. = Chinook.—Gatschet in Mag. Am. 

Hist., 167, 1877 (names and gives habitat of 
tribes). > Chinook.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 
565, 626-628, 1882 (enumerates Chinook, Wakia- 
kum, Cathramet, Clatsop, Multnomah, Skilloot, 
Watlala). = Chinookan.—Powell in 7th Rep. B. 
A. E., 6o, 1891. >Chinooks.—Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 134, 306,1836 (a single tribe at 
mouth of Columbia). = Chinooks.—Hale in U. S. 
Expl. Exped., VI, 198, 1846. < Chinooks.—Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 474, 
1878 (includes Skilloots, Watlalas, Lower Chi¬ 
nooks, Wakiakums, Cathlamets, Clatsops, Cala- 
pooyas, Clackamas, Killamooks, Yamkally, Chi- 
mook Jargon; of these Calapooyas and Yam¬ 
kally are Kalapooian, Killamooks are Salishan). 
>Chinuk.—Latham, Nat Hist. Man, 317, 1850 
(same as Tshinilk; includes Chindks proper, 
Klatsops, Kathlamut, Wak&ikam, Watlala, Niha- 
loitih). x Nootka-Columbian.—Scouler in Jour. 
Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 224, 1841 (includes 
Cheenooks and Cathlascons of present family), 
xSouthern.—Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as his 
Nootka-Columbian family above). =Tschinuk.— 
Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. 
=Tshinook.—Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 402, 1853 (Chinooks, Clatsops, and Watlala). 
= Tshinuk.—Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 562, 
569, 1846 (contains Watlala or Upper Chinook, 
including Watlala, Nihaloitih, or Echeloots; and 
Tshinuk, including Tshinuk, Tlatsap, Wakai- 
kam). >Tshinuk. — Buschmann, Spuren der 
aztek. Sprache, 616, 1859 (same as his Chinuk). 
= Tsinuk.—Gallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am. 
Ethnol. Soc., II, pt. 1, 15, 1848. =T’sinuk. —Dali, 
after Gibbs, in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 241, 1877 
(mere mention of family). 

Chinook jargon. The Indian trade lan¬ 
guage of the Columbia r. region and the 
adjacent Pacific coast from California 
far up into Alaska. It was first brought 
to public notice in the early days of the 
Oregon fur trade, about 1810. In addi¬ 
tion to the Indian elements it has now 
incorporated numerous words from va¬ 
rious European languages, but there can 
be no doubt that the jargon existed as an 
intertribal medium of communication long 
before the advent of the whites, having 
its parallel in the so-called “Mobilian 
language” of the Gulf tribes and the sign 
language of the plains, all three being the 
outgrowth of an extensive aboriginal sys¬ 
tem of intertribal trade and travel. The 
Indian foundation of the jargon is the 
Chinook proper, with Nootka, Salish, and 
other languages, to which were added, 
after contact with the fur companies, cor¬ 
rupted English, French, and possibly 
Russian terms. Hale, in 1841, estimated 
the number of words in the jargon at 250; 
Gibbs, in 1863, recorded about 500; Eells, 


BULL. 30] 


CHINOOK OLIVES-CHIPEWYAN 


275 


in 1894, counted 740 words actually in 
use, although his dictionary cites 1,402, 
662 being obsolete, and 1,552 phrases, 
combinations of mamook (‘do’), yielding 
209. The following table shows the 
share of certain languages in the jargon 
as recorded at various periods of its ex¬ 
istence, although there are great differ¬ 
ences in the constituent elements of the 
jargon as spoken in different parts of the 
country: 


Words contributed 

1841 

1863 

1894 

Nootka. 

18 

24 

23 

Chinook. 

111 

221 

198 

English. 

41 

67 

570 

French. 

34 

94 

153 

Other languages. 

48 

79 

138 


There Is much local variation in the 
way Chinook is spoken on the Pacific 
coast. While it tends to disappear in the 
country of its origin, it is taking on new 
life farther n., where it is evidently des¬ 
tined to live for many years; but in s. e. 
Alaska it is little used, being displaced by 
English or Tlingit. This jargon has been 
of great service to both the Indian and 
the white man, and its role in the devel¬ 
opment of intertribal and interracial rela¬ 
tions on the n. Pacific coast has been 
important. For works bearing on the 
subject see Pilling, Bibliography of the 
Chinookan Languages, Bull. B. A. E., 
1893. (a. f. c.) 

Chee-Chinook.— Bulmer, MS., cited by Pilling, op. 
cit. Chinook Jargon.—Cox, Columbia R., ii, 134, 
1831. Oregon jargon.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 3‘2d Cong., spec, sess., 169, 1853. Oregon 
Trade Language.—Hale, Manual of Oregon Trade 
Lang., 1890. 

Chinook olives. The name given by 
whites to an article of food of.the Chinook 
in earlier days (Kane, Wanderings, 187, 
1859), consisting of acorns ripened in a 
urine-soaked pit. ( a. f. c. ) 

Chinook salmon. A name of the Colum¬ 
bia r. salmon (Oncorhynchus chouicha ), 
more commonly known as the quinnat, 
and also called the tyee salmon, (a. f. c.) 

Chinook wind. A name applied to cer¬ 
tain winds of n. w. United States and 
British Columbia. According to Bur¬ 
rows (Yearbook Dept. Agric., 555, 1901) 
there are three different winds, each es¬ 
sentially a warm wind whose effect is 
most noticeable in winter, that are called 
chinooks. There is a wet chinook, a 
dry chinook, and a third wind of an in¬ 
termediate sort. The term was first ap¬ 
plied to a warm s. w. wind which blew 
from over the Chinook camp to the trad¬ 
ing post established by the Hudson Bay 
Company at Astoria, Oreg. Under the in¬ 
fluence of these chinook winds snow is 
melted with astonishing rapidity, and the 
weather soon becomes balmy and spring¬ 
like. The name is derived from Chinook, 


the appellation of one of the Indian 
tribes of this region. (a. f. c.) 

Chinoshahgeh (‘at the bower’ [?]). A 
Seneca village near Victor, N. Y., on or 
near the site of the earlier settlement 
called Kanagaro, that was broken up 
by the Denonville expedition.—Shea in 
Charlevoix, New Fr., iii, 289, note, 1864. 

Ga-o-sa-eh-ga-aah. —Marshall quoted by Conover, 
Kanadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E.( = ‘ the bass¬ 
wood bark lies there ’). Gaosagao. —Morgan, 
League Iroq., 19, 1851 ( = ‘in the basswood coun¬ 
try’). Ga-o-us-a-ge-o n . —Hewitt, inf’n (Seneca 
form). 

Chinquapin. A species of chestnut 
(Castaneapumila) common in the Middle 
and Southern states; spelled also chinka¬ 
pin, chincapin, chinquepin, chinkopin. 
Castanopsis chrysopkylla is called western 
chinquapin, and in California and Oregon 
chinquapin. Two species of oak ( Quercus 
acuminata and Q. prinoides) are named 
chinquapin oak and dwarf chinquapin 
oak, respectively. A species of perch 
(Pomoxys annularis) , known also as crap- 
pie, is called chinquapin or chinkapin 
perch. Such forms as chincomen and 
chechinquamin, found in early writings, 
make plausible the supposition that a p 
was later substituted for an m in the 
last syllable of the word, which would 
then represent the widespread Algon- 
quian radical min, ‘fruit,’ ‘seed.’ The 
first component of the word, according to 
Hewitt, is probably cognate with the Dela¬ 
ware chinqua, ‘large,’ ‘great.’ (a. f. c.) 

Chintagottine (‘people of the woods’). 
A division of the Kawchodinneh, dwell¬ 
ing on Mackenzie r., Mackenzie Ter., 
Canada, n. of Ft Good Hope and between 
the river and Great Bear lake. Petitot 
often uses the term synonymously with 
Kawchodinneh. 

Gah-tau'-_go ten'-ni. —Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, B. 
A. E. Gah-tow-go tin'-ni. —Kennicott, Hare Ind. 
MS. vocab., B. A. E. Gens du Poil. —Petitot, Expl. 
du grand lac des Ours, 349, 1893. Ta-laottine.— 
Petitot, MS., B. A. E., 1865 (‘dwellersat the end 
of the pine trees’). Tchin-t’a-gottine. —Petitot 
in Bull. Soc. G6og. Paris, chart, 1875. Tchin-tpa- 
gottine.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 
362, 1891. Tcin-tat' tene'.— Everette, MS. Tutu 
vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 

Chinunga. The extinct Thistle clan of 
the Chua(Snake) phratry of the Hopi. 
Tci-nuna wun-wii. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 
403,1894 (.wun-wii— ‘ clan ’). 

Chioro. A village of 35 Papago, prob¬ 
ably in Pima co., s. Ariz., in 1865 (David¬ 
son in Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865). Possi¬ 
bly identical with Charco. 

Chipewyan (‘pointed skins,’ Cree Chip- 
wayanawok , from chipwa ‘pointed,’ 
weyanaw ‘ skin,’ ok plural sign: Cree name 
for the parkas, or shirts, of many north¬ 
ern Athapascan tribes, pointed and orna¬ 
mented with tails before and behind; 
hence, the people who wear them). An 
Athapascan linguistic group, embracing 
the Desnedekenade and Athabasca, called 
the Chipewyan proper, the Thilanottine, 













276 


CHIPIINTJINGE 


[ B. A. E. 


Etheneldeli, and Tatsanottine. The term 
was originally applied to the Chipewyan 
who assailed the Cree about L. Atha¬ 
basca; subsequently the Cree and, follow¬ 
ing their example, the whites, extended 
it to include all Athapascan tribes known 
to them, the whites using it as a syn¬ 
onym of Tinneh, but it is now confined 
to the linguistic group above referred to, 
although the Tatsanottine, or Yellow- 
knives, are generally separated in pop¬ 
ular usage. The deerskin shirts worn by 
these people sometimes had the queue 
behind only, like a poncho, and the tales 
told by the early travelers of a race of 
people living in the far N., having a tail 
and being in a transition stage between 
animal and man, had their foundation in 
the misrepresentation of the descriptions 
given by other Indians of these people 
with the pointed shirts. Petitot (La Mer 
Glaciale, 303, 1887) characterized these 
people as innocent and natural in their 
lives and manners, imbued with a sense of 
justice, endowed with sound sense and 
judgment, and not devoid of originality. 
Ross (Notes on the Tinn4, MS., B. A. E.) 
gave the habitat of the Chipewyan as 
Churchill r., and Athabasca and Great 
Slave lakes. Kennicot(MS., B. A. E.) said 
their territory extended as far n. as Ft 
Resolution on the s. shore of Great Slave 
lake, Brit. Col., and Drake (Bk. Inds.,vii, 
1848) noted that they claimed from lat. 
60° to 65° and from long. 100° to 110°, and 
numbered 7,500 in 1812. In 1718, accord¬ 
ing to Petitot, the Chipewyan were living 
on Peace r., which they called Tsades, the 
river of beavers, the shores of L. Atha¬ 
basca and the forests between it and Great 
Slave lake being then the domain of the 
Etchareottine. The Cree, after they had 
obtained guns from the French, attacked 
these latter and drove them from their 
hunting grounds, but were forced back 
again by the Chipewyan tribes. As a 
result of this contest the Thilanottine 
obtained for themselves the upper waters 
of Churchill r. about La Crosse lake, the 
Chipewyan proper the former domain of 
the Etchareottine, while a part went to 
live in the neighborhood of the English 
post of Ft Prince of Wales, newly estab¬ 
lished on Hudson bay at the mouth of 
Churchill r. for trade with the Eskimo, 
Maskegon, and Cree. These last be¬ 
came known as the Etheneldeli, ‘eaters 
of reindeer meat,’ or Theyeottine, ‘stone- 
house people,’ the latter being the name 
that they gave their protectors, the 
English. In 1779 the French Canadians 
brought smallpox to the shores of La 
Crosse and Athabasca lakes. Cree and 
Chipewyan were decimated by the mal¬ 
ady, and the former, already driven back 
to the s. shore of L. Athabasca by the 
martial attitude of the Chipew T yan, were 


now willing to conclude a lasting peace 
(Petitot, La Mer Glaciale, 297, 1887). 
There were 230 Cree at La Crosse lake in 
1873, and 600 Thilanottine Chipewyan, 
many of whom were half-breeds bearing 
French names. The report of Canadian 
Indian Affairs for 1904 enumerates nearly 
1,800 Indians as Chipewyan, including 
219 Yellowknives (Tatsanottine). 

Athabasca. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 114, 1874. 
Athapasca. —Gallatin in Drake,Tecumseh, 20,1852. 
Che-pa-wy-an. —Macauley, Hist. N. Y., II, 244,1829. 
Chepayan.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 58,1826. Chepe- 
ouyan. —Ibid. Chepewayan. —Ross, MS. Notes on 
Tinne, B. A. E. Chepewyan. —Lewis, Travels, 143, 
1809. Chepeyan.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. 
Cheppewyan.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 58, 1826. 
Cheppeyans. —Gallatin in Trans. Am.Ethnol. Soc., 
ii, 18, 1836. Chipeouaian.— Duflot de Mofras, Ore¬ 
gon, n, 337 r 1844. Chipewan.— Keane in Stanford, 
Compend., 508,1878. Chipeway. —Harmon, Journal, 
264, 1820. Chipewayan.— Kennicott, MS. vocab., 
B. A. E. Chipewyan. —Morse, System of Mod. 
Geog., i, 55, 1814. Chipewyan Tinneys. —Petitot in 
Can. Rec. Sci., i, 47,1884. Chipiouan.— Balbi, Atlas 
Ethnog., 58, 1826. Chippewayan. —Howe, Hist. 
Coll., 380, 1851. Chippewayanawok. —Ibid. (Cree 
name). Chippewayeen. —Kane, Wanderings in 
N. A., 130, 1859. Chippeweyan. —McLean, Hud¬ 
son’s Bay, I, 224, 1849. Chip-pe-wi-yan.— Tanner, 
Nar., 390, 1830. Chippewyan. —Schermerhorn 

(1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., II, 42,1814. Chip- 
powyen. —Mackenzie misquoted by Bracken- 
ridge, Mexican Letters, 85, 1850. Chipwayan. — 
Can. Ind. Rep., 171, 1877. Chipwayanawok. — 
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 143, 1883. Chip- 
weyan.— Latham, Essays, 275, 1860. Chip-wyan.— 
Anderson, MS., B. A. E. Chyppewan.— Snelling, 
Tales of N. W., 195,1830. Dene Tchippewayans. — 
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 289, 1891. 
Gens des Montagnes. —McLean, Hudson’s Bay, II, 
243,1849. Highlander.—Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., 649,1883. Montagnais. —Petitot, Diet. D6n6 
Dindji6, xx, 1876. Montagnees.— Smet, Oregon 
Miss., 193, 1847. Montagnes.— Belcourt in Minn. 
Hist. Coll., 1,227,1872. MontagTiez. —Henry, Trav. 
in Can., 173,note, 1809. Mountains.— Hooper,Tents 
of Tuski, 403, 1853. Mountaineers. —Ross, MS. 
notes on Tinne, B. A. E. Mountain Indians. — 
Franklin, 2d Exped. Polar Sea, 152,1828. Ooche- 
ayyan.— McKeevor, Hudson’s Bay, 73, 1819. 
uachipuanes. —Jefferys, French Dom. Am., Can. 
map, 1741. Shepeweyan.— Engl, writer (1786) in 
Mass. Hist. Coll., 1st s., ill, 24,1794. Tckippewayan. — 
Petitot, Expl. Grand lac des Ours, 363, 1893. 
Tchipwayanawok. —Petitot, Diet. D6n6-Dindii6, 
xix, 1876. Wachipuanes. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 
map 2,1776. Wetshipweyanah.— Belcourt in Minn. 
Hist. Coll.. I, 226, 1872. 

Chipiinuinge (Tewa: ‘house at the 
pointed peak’). A great ruined pueblo 
and cliff village occupying a small but 
high detached mesa between the Canones 
and Polvadera cr., 4 m. s. of Rio Chama 
and about 14 m. s. w. of Abiquiu, Rio 
Arriba co., N. Mex. The site was doubt¬ 
less selected on account of its defensible 
character, the pueblo being situated at 
least 800 ft. above the level of the creek 
and its walls built continuous with the 
edge of the precipice. The great Pedernal 
peak, from which the village takes its 
name, rises on the other side of the can¬ 
yon about 2 m. to the s. w. The pueblo 
is inaccessible except by a single trail 
which winds up from the Polvadera and 
reaches the summit of the mesa at its s. 
end, passing thence through two strongly 


BULL. 30] 


CHIPISCLIN-CHIPPEWA 


277 


fortified gaps before the pueblo is reached. 
The site was impregnable to any form of 
attack possible to savage warfare. The 
commanding position was at the gateway 
to the Tewa country e. of the mountains, 
and, according to tradition, it was the 
function of Chipiinuinge to withstand 
as far as possible the fierce Navaho and 
Apache raids from the n. w. The pueblo 
was built entirely of stone and was of 3 
stories, in places possibly 4. Portions of 
second-story walls are still standing and 
many cedar timbers are well preserved. 
The remains of 15 kivas, mostly circular, a 
few rectangular, are still traceable in and 
about the ruins; these were all mostly if 
not wholly subterranean, having been 
excavated in the rock surface on which 
the pueblo stands. The cliff-dwellings 
in the e. face of the mesa are all of the 
excavated type, and appear to have been 
used for mortuary quite as much as for 
domiciliary purposes. (e. l. h. ) 

Chipisclin. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct, 18, 1861. 

Chipletac. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chipmunk. The common name of the 
striped ground squirrel ( Tamias striatus ), 
of which the variants chipmonk, chip¬ 
muck, chitmunk, and others occur. The 
word has been usually derived from the 
“ chipping’’ of the animal, but (Chamber- 
lain in Am. Notes and Queries, in, 155, 
1889) it is clearly of Algonquian origin. 
The word chipmunk is really identical with 
the adjidaumo (‘tail-in-air’) of Longfel¬ 
low’s Hiawatha, the Chippewa atchitamo n , 
the name of the ordinary red squirrel ( Sci- 
urus hudsonicus) . The Chippewa vocabu¬ 
lary of Long (1791) gives for squirrel 
chetamon, and Mrs Traill, in her Canadian 
Crusoes, 1854, writes the English word 
as chitmunk. By folk etymology, there¬ 
fore, the Algonquian word represented 
by the Chippewa citchitamo n has become, 
by way of chitmunk , our familiar chip¬ 
munk. The Chippewa word signifies 
‘head first’, from atchit ‘headlong,’ am 
‘mouth,’ from the animal’s habit of de¬ 
scending trees. The Indian word applied 
originally to the common red squirrel 
and not to the chipmunk. (a. f. c.) 

Chippanchickchick. A tribe or band of 
doubtful linguistic affinity, either Chi- 
nookan or Shahaptian, living in 1812 on 
Columbia r., in Klickitat co., Wash., 
nearly opposite The Dalles. Their num¬ 
ber was estimated at 600. 

Chippanchickchicks.— Morse inRep. to Sec. War, 368, 
1822. Tchipan-Tchick-Tchick.— Stuart in Nouv. 
Ann. Voy., xn, 26,1821. 

Chipped implements. See Stonework. 


Chippekawkay ( Chip'-ka-kyun'-ge, ‘place 
of roots.’—Dunn, after Godfroy). A 
Piankishaw village, in 1712, on the site 
of Vincennes, Knox co., Ind. 

Brushwood. —Baskin, Forster & Co.’s Hist. Atlas 
Ind., 249,1876. Chih-kah-we-kay.— Hough in Ind. 
Geol. Rep., map, 1883. Chipcoke. —Baskin, Forster 
& Co., op. eit., 249, 1876. Chip'-kah-kyoon'-gay.— 
Dunn, after Godfroy, inf’n, 1908 (‘place of roots’: 
Miftmi name). Chipkawkay.— Baskin, Forster & 
Co., op. cit. Chip-pe-coke.— Hough, op. cit. 
Chippekawkay. —Ibid. 

Chippewa (popular adaptation of Ojib- 
way, ‘to roast till puckered up,’ refer¬ 
ring to the puckered seam on their moc¬ 
casins; from ojib ‘to pucker up,’ ub-ivay 
‘ to roast’). One of the largest tribes n. 
of Mexico, whose range was formerly 



CHIPPEWA MAN 


along both shores of L. Huron and L. 
Superior, extending across Minnesota to 
Turtle nits., N. Dak. Although strong 
in numbers and occupying an extensive 
territory, the Chippewa were never 
prominent in history, owing to their re¬ 
moteness from the frontier during the 
period of the colonial wars. According to 
tradition they are part of an Algonquian 
body, including the Ottawa and Pota- 
watomi, which separated into divisions 
when it reached Mackinaw in its west¬ 
ward movement, having come from some 
point n. or n. e. of Mackinaw. Warren 
(Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 1885) asserts 
that they were settled in a large village 






278 


CHIPPEWA 


[B. a. e. 


at La Pointe, Wis., about the time of the 
discovery of America, and Verwyst (Mis¬ 
sionary Labors, 1886) says that about 
1612 they suddenly abandoned this local¬ 
ity, many of them going back to the Sault, 
while others settled at the w. end of L. 
Superior, where Father Allouez found 
them in 1665-67. There is nothing 
found to sustain the statement of War¬ 
ren and Verwyst in regard to the 
early residence of the tribe at La Pointe. 
They were first noticed in the Jesuit 
Relation of 1640 under the name Baouich- 
tigouin (probably Bawa'tigowininiwhg, 
‘people of the Sault’), as residing at 
the Sault, and it is possible that Ni¬ 
collet met them in 1634 or 1639. In 
1642 they were visited by Raymbaut 
and Jogues, who found them at the 
Sault and at war with a people to the w., 
doubtless the Sioux. A remnant or off¬ 
shoot of the tribe resided n. of L. Superior 
after the main body moved s. to Sault 
Ste Marie, or when it had reached the 
vicinity of the Sault. The Marameg, a 
tribe closely related to if not an actual 
division of the Chippewa, who dwelt 
along the n. shore of the lake, were ap¬ 
parently incorporated with the latter 
while they were at the Sault, or at any 
rate prior to 1670 (Jesuit Rel., 1670). 
On the n. the Chippewa are so closely 
connected with the Cree and Maskegon 
that the three can be distinguished only 
by those intimately acquainted with their 
dialects and customs, while on the s. the 
Chippewa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi have 
always formed a sort of loose confederacy, 
frequently designated in the last century 
the Three Fires. It seems to be well 
established that some of the Chippewa 
have resided n. of L. Superior from time 
immemorial. These and the Marameg 
claimed the n. side of the lake as their 
country. According to Perrot some of 
the Chippewa living s. of L. Superior in 
1670-99, although relying chiefly on the 
chase, cultivated some maize, and were 
then at peace with the neighboring 
Sioux. It is singular that this author 
omits to mention wild rice (Zizania 
aquatica ) among their food supplies, since 
the possession of wild-rice fields was one 
of the chief causes of their wars with 
the Dakota, Foxes, and other nations, 
and according to Jenks (19th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1900) 10,000 Chippewa in the 
United States use it at the present time. 
About this period they first came into 
possession of firearms, and w ere pushing 
their way westward, alternately at peace 
and at w ar with the Sioux and in almost 
constant conflict with the Foxes. The 
French, in 1692, reestablished a trading 
postat Shaugawaumikong, now LaPointe, 
Ashland co., W ; s., which became an im¬ 
portant Chippewa settlement. In the 


beginning of the 18th century the Chip¬ 
pewa succeeded in driving the Foxes, 
already reduced by a war with the French, 
from n. Wisconsin, compelling them to 
take refuge with the Sauk. They then 
turned against the Sioux, driving them 
across the Mississippi and s. to Minnesota 
r., and continued their westward march 
across Minnesota and North Dakota until 
they occupied the headwaters of Red r., 
and established their westernmost band 
in the Turtle mts. It was not until after 
1736 that they obtained a foothold w. of 
L. Superior. "While the main divisions 
of the tribe were thus extending their 
possessions in the w\, others overran the 
peninsula between L. Huron and L. Erie, 
which had long been claimed by the 
Iroquois through conquest. The Iroquois 
were forced to withdraw', and the whole 
region was occupied by the Chippewa 
bands, most of whom are now know’n as 
Missisauga, although they still call them¬ 
selves Ojibwa. The Chippewa took part 
with the other tribes of the N. W. in 
all the wars against the frontier settle¬ 
ments to the close of the war of 1812. 
Those living within the United States 
made a treaty w r ith the Government in 
1815, and have since remained peaceful, 
all residing on reservations or allotted 
lands within their original territory in 
Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, and 
North Dakota, with the exception of the 
small bandof Swan Creek and Black River 
Chippew'a, who sold their lands in s. 
Michigan in 1836 and are now' with the 
Munsee in Franklin co., Kans. 

Schoolcraft, who was personally ac¬ 
quainted with the Chippew a and married 
a woman of the tribe, describes the Chip- 
pew y a warriors as equaling in physical 
appearance the best formed of the N. W. 
Indians, with the possible exception of 
the Foxes. Their long and successful 
contest with the Sioux and Foxes exhib¬ 
ited their bravery and determination, yet 
they were uniformly friendly in their rela¬ 
tions with the French. The Chippewa 
are a timber people. Although they have 
long been in friendly relations w'ith the 
whites, Christianity has had but little 
effect on them, owing largely to the con¬ 
servatism of the native medicine-men. 
It is affirmed by Warren, w'ho is not dis¬ 
posed to accept any statement that tends 
to disparage the character of his people, 
that, according to tradition, the division 
of the tribe residing at La Pointe prac¬ 
tised cannibalism, while Father Belcourt 
affirms that, although the Chippew'a of 
Canada treated the vanquished with most 
horrible barbarity and at these times ate 
human flesh, they looked upon cannibal¬ 
ism, except under such conditions, with 
horror. According to Dr William Jones 
(inf’n, 1905), the Pillagers of Bear id. 


BULL. 30] 


CHIPPEWA 


279 


assert that cannibalism was occasionally 
practised ceremonially by the Chippewa 
of Leech lake, and that since 1902 the 
eating of human flesh occurred on Rainy 
r. during stress of hunger. It was the 
custom of the Pillager band to allow a 
warrior who scalped an enemy to wear 
on his head two eagle feathers, and the 
act of capturing a wounded prisoner on 
the battlefield earned the distinction of 
wearing five. Like the Ottawa, they were 
expert in the use of the canoe, and in 
their early history depended largely on 
fish for food. There is abundant evi¬ 
dence that polygamy was common, and 
indeed it still occurs among the more 
wandering bands (Jones). Their wig¬ 
wams were made of birch bark or of 
grass mats; poles were first planted in 
the ground in a circle, the tops bent 
together and tied, and the bark or mats 
thrown over them, leaving a smoke hole 
at the top. They imagined that the shade, 
after the death of the body, followed a 
wide beaten path, leading toward the 
w., finally arriving in a country abound¬ 
ing in everything the Indian desires. It 
is a general belief among the northern 
Chippewa that the spirit often returns to 
visit the grave, so long as the body is not 
reduced to dust. Their creation myth is 
that common among the northern Algon- 
quians. Like most other tribes they be¬ 
lieve that a mysterious power dwells in 
all objects, animate and inanimate. Such 
objects are manitus , which are ever 
wakeful and quick to hear everything in 
the summer, but in winter, after snow 
falls, are in a torpid state. The Chippewa 
regard dreams as revelations, and some 
object which appears therein is often 
chosen as a tutelary deity. The Mede- 
wiwin, or grand medicine society (see 
Hoffman, 7th Rep. B. A. E., 1891), was 
formerly a powerful organization of the 
Chippewa, which controlled the move¬ 
ments of the tribe and was a formidable 
obstacle to the introduction of Christian¬ 
ity. When a Chippewa died it was cus¬ 
tomary to place the body in a grave, 
sometimes in a sitting posture, or 
to scoop a shallow cavity in the earth 
and deposit the body therein on its back 
or side, covering it with earth so as to 
form a small mound, over which boards, 
poles, or birch bark were placed. Ac¬ 
cording to McXenney (Tourtothe Lakes, 
1827), the Chippewa of Fond du Lac, 
Wis., practised scaffold burial in winter, 
the corpse being wrapped in birchbark. 
Mourning for a lost relative continued for 
a year, unless shortened by the meda or by 
certain exploits in war. 

Authors differ as to the names and 
number of the Chippewa gentes, which 
range all the way from 11 to 23. Warren 
gives 21 gentes, of which the following are 


not included among those named by Mor¬ 
gan: Manamaig (Catfish), Nebaunaub- 
ay (Merman), Besheu (Lynx), Mous 
(Moose), Nekah (Goose), Udekumaig 
(Whitefish), Gyaushk (Gull). Some of 
them, Warren says, have but few mem¬ 
bers and are not known to the tribe at 
large. The Maskegon sprang from the 
Reindeer, Lynx, and Pike (Pickerel) 
gentes, which went to the n. of L. Su¬ 
perior when the tribe moved w. from 
Sault Ste Marie. Among some of the 
Chippewa these gentes are associated in 
5 phratries: the Awausee, Businausee, 
Ahahweh, Noka, and Mousonee. The 
Awausee phratry includes the Catfish, 
Merman, Sturgeon, Pike (Pickerel), 
Whitefish, and Sucker gentes—all the 
Fish gentes. The Businausee phratry 
includes the Crane and Eagle gentes, 
businausee, ‘echo-maker/ being a name 
for the crane. The Ahahweh phratry 
includes the Loon, Goose, and Cormorant 
gentes, ahahweh being a name for the 
loon, though the Loon gens is called 
Mong. Morgan makes Ahahweh distinct 
and called them the ‘Duck’ gens. The 
Noka (No-'ke, Bear) phratry included 
the Bear gentes, of which there were for¬ 
merly several named from different parts 
of the bear’s body; but these are now 
consolidated and no differences are recog¬ 
nized excepting between the common and 
the grizzly bears. The Mousonee phratry 
includes the Marten, Moose, and Reindeer 
gentes. Mousonee seems to be the proper 
name of the phratry, though it is also 
called Waubishashe, from the important 
Marten gens which is said to have sprung 
from the incorporated remnant of the 
Mundua. Morgan (Anc. Soc., 166, 1877) 
names the following 23 gentes: Myeengun 
(Wolf), Makwa (Bear), Ahmik (Beaver), 
Mesheka (Mud turtle), Mikonoh (Snap¬ 
ping turtle), Meskwadare, (Little tur¬ 
tle), Ahdik (Reindeer), Chueskweskewa 
(Snipe), Ojeejok (Crane), Kakake (Pig¬ 
eon hawk) [=Kagagi, Raven], Omegee- 
ze (Bald eagle), Mong (Loon), Ahahweh 
(Duck), [=Wa e wa e , Swan], Sheshebe 
(Duck), Kenabig (Snake), Wazhush 
(Muskrat), Wabezhaze (Marten), Moosh- 
kaooze (Heron), Ahwahsissa (Bullhead), 
Namabin (Carp [Catfish]J, Nama (Stur¬ 
geon), Kenozhe(Pike) [=Kinozha n , Pick¬ 
erel]. Tanner gives also the Pepegewiz- 
zains (Sparrow-hawk), Mussundummo 
(Water snake), and the forked tree as 
totems among the Ottawa and Chip¬ 
pewa. 

It is impossible to determine the past or 
present numbers of the Chippewa, as in 
former times only a small part of the 
tribe came in contact with the whites at 
any period, and they are now so mixed 
with other tribes in many quarters that 
no separate returns are given. The prin- 


280 


CHIPPEWA 


[b. a. e. 


cipal estimates are as follow: In 1764, 
about 25,000; 1783 and 1794, about 15,000; 
1843, about 30,000; 1851, about 28,000. 
It is probable that most of these estimates 
take no account of more remote bands. 
In 1884 there were in Dakota 914; in 
Minnesota, 5,885; in Wisconsin, 3,656; in 
Michigan, 3,500 returned separately, and 
6,000 Chippewa and Ottawa, of whom 
perhaps one-third are Chippewa; in Kan¬ 
sas, 76 Chippewa and Munsee. The en¬ 
tire number in the United States at this 
time was therefore about 16,000. In 
British America those of Ontario, includ¬ 
ing the Nipissing, numbered at the same 
time about 9,000, while in Manitoba and 
the Northwest Territories there were 
17,129 Chippewa and Cree on reserva¬ 
tions under the same agencies. The Chip¬ 
pewa now (1905) probably number 30,000 
to 32,000—15,000 in British America and 
14,144 in the United States, exclusive of 
about 3,000 in Michigan. 

As the Chippewa were scattered over a 
region extending 1,000 m. from e. to w., 
they had a large number of villages, 
bands, and local divisions. Some of the 
bands bore the name of the village, lake, 
or river near which they resided, but 
these were grouped under larger divi¬ 
sions or subtribes which occupied certain 
fixed limits and w r ere distinguished by 
marked differences. According to War¬ 
ren there were 10 of these principal divi¬ 
sions: Kechegummewininewug, on thes. 
shore of L. Superior; Betonukeengainube- 
jig, in n. Wisconsin; Munominikasheen- 
hug, on the headwaters of St Croix r. 
in Wisconsin and Minnesota; Wahsuah- 
gunewininewug, at the head of Wiscon¬ 
sin r.; Ottawa Lake Men, on Lac Court 
Oreilles, Wis.; Kitchisibiwininiwug, on 
the upper Mississippi in Minnesota; Muk- 
meduawininewug, or Pillagers, on Leech 
lake, Minn.; Sugwaundugahwininewug, 
n. of L. Superior; Kojejewininewug, on 
Rainy lake and r. about the n. boundary 
of Minnesota; and Wazhush, on the 
n. w. side of L. Superior at the Cana¬ 
dian border. Besides these general 
divisions the following collective or 
local names are recognized as belong¬ 
ing to various settlements, bands, or 
divisions of the tribe: Angwassag, Big 
Rock, Little Forks, Menitegow, Black¬ 
bird, Menoquet’s Village, Ketche- 
waundaugenink, Kishkawbawee, Sagi¬ 
naw, Thunder Bay, Nagonabe, Om- 
munise, Shabwasing, Beaver Islands, 
Nabobish, Cheboygan, Otusson, Reaum’s 
Village, and Wapisiwisibiwininiwak, in 
lower Michigan; Red Cedar Lake, Suka- 
auguning, Kechepukwaiwah, Long Lake, 
Chetac Like, Turtle Portage, Rice Lake, 
Yellow Lake, Trout Lake, Pawating, 
Ontonagon, Wauswagiming, Lac Courte 
Oreilles, Shaugawaumikong, Burnt 


Woods, Gatagetegauning, Bay du Noc, 
Wequadong, Mekadewagamitigweyawin- 
iniwak, Michilimackinac, St Francis 
Xavier, and Wiaquahhechegumeeng, in 
Wisconsin and upper Michigan; Grand 
Portage, Pokegama, Fond du Lac, Red 
Cliff, Crow Wing River, Gull Lake, 
Onepowesepewenenewak, Miskwagami- 
wisagaigan, Wabasemowenenewak(?), 
Wanamakewajenenik, Mikinakwadshi- 
wininiwak, Misisagaikaniwininiwak, Os- 
chekkamegawenenewak, Winnebegosh- 
ishiwininiwak, Gamiskwakokawinini- 
wak, Gawababiganikak, Anibiminanisi- 
biwininiwak, Kahmetahwungaguma, and 
Rabbit Lake, in Minnesota and the Dako¬ 


tas; Oueschekgagamioulimy, Walpole Is¬ 
land, Obidgewong, Michipicoten, Doki’s 
Band, Bagoache, Epinette (1744), Ouas- 
ouarini, Mishtawayawininiwak, Nope- 
ming, and Nameuilni, in Ontario; Sage- 
wenenewak, Mattawan, and Pic River in 
Manitoba; and Nibowisibiwininiwak in 
Saskatchewan. (j. m. c. t.) 

Achipoes.—Prise de Possession (1671) in Perrot, 
M6m., 293,1864. Achipoue.— Neill in Minn. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., v, 398, 1885. Anchipawah.—Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 126, 1816. An-ish-in-aub-ag.— 
Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 45, 1885 
(‘spontaneous men’). A-wish-in-aub-ay.— Ibid., 
37. Axshissaye-runu.—Gatschet, Wyandot MS., B. 
A. E., 1881 (Wyandot name). Baouichtigouin. — Jes. 
Rel. 1640, 34, 1858. Bawichtigouek.—Ibid., index. 
Bawichtigouin. — Ibid. Bedzaqetcha. — Petitot, 
Montagnais MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 (‘long 
ears’: Tsattinename). Bedzietcho.—Petitot, Hare 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 (Kawchodinne name). 
Bungees.—Henry, MS. vocab. (Bell copy, B. A. 
E.), 1812 (so called by Hudson Bay traders). 
Cabellos realzados.—Duro, Don Diego de Penalosa, 
43,1882 (the Raised-hair tribe of Shea’s Peiialosa; 
Cheveux-relev6s of the French). Chebois.— 
Gass, Jour., 47, note, 1807. Chepawas.—Croghan 
(1759) quoted by Kauffman,West. Penn., 132, app., 
1851. Chepeways.—Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll.,4ths., IX, 287,1871. Chepowas.—Croghan 
(1759) quoted by Proud, Penn., ii, 296,1798. Chep- 
pewes.—Shirley (1755) ih N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 
1027,1855. Chiappawaws.—Loudon, Coll. Int. Nar., 
1 ,34,1808. Chibois. —Bouquet (1760) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll.,4ths., IX, 295,1871. Chipawawas.—Gold- 
thwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., x, 122, 
1809. Chipaways.—Croghan (1760),ibid., 4ths., ix, 
250,1871. Chipaweighs.—German Flats con f. (1770) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 229,1857. Chipewas.— 
Lattr6, mapU. S., 1784. Chipeways.—Carver (1766) 
Trav., 19, 1778. Chipeweghs.—Johnson (1763) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,vil, 526, 1856. Chipeweighs.— 
Johnson (1763), ibid., 583,1856. Chipiwa.—Treaty 
of 1820,U. S. Ind. Treat., 369,1873. Chipoes.—Prise 
de Possession (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 803, 

1855. Chippawas.—Croghan (1759) quoted by Jef¬ 
ferson, Notes, 143, 1825. Chippawees.—Writer of 
1756in Mass. Hist. Soc.Coll., lsts.,vn, 123, 1801. 
Chippeouays.—Toussaint, map of Am., 1839. Chip- 
pewaes.—Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, 
vil, 525, 1856. Chippewais.—Perrot (ca. 1721) in 
Minn. Hist.Soc.Coll., n,pt.2,24,1864. Chippewas.— 
Washington (1754) quoted by Kauffman, West. 
Penn., 67,1851. Chippewaus.— Edwards (1788) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s.,ix, 92,1804. Chippe- 
ways.—Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, III, 556, 1853. Chippe weighs.— 
Johnson (1767) inN.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 969 

1856. Chippewyse.—Ft Johnson conf. (1755), ibid.’, 
VI, 975, 1855. Chippoways.—Washington (1754) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi, 140, 1800. 
Chippuwas.—Heckewelder quoted by Barton, New 
views, app. 1, 1798. Chipwaes.—Croghan (1765) 
in N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist., vn, 782,1856. Chipwas.— 
Bouquet (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.;4th s., 


BULL. 30] 


CHIPPEWA OF LAKE NIPEGON 


28i 


IX, 321, 1871. Chipways.—Croghan (1765),op. cit. 
Cypoways.—Beltrami quoted by Neill, Minn., 350, 
1858. De-wa-ka-nha’.—Hewitt, Mohawk MS. 
vocab., B. A. E. (Mohawk name). Dewoganna’s.— 
Bellomont (1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 
407,1854. Douaganhas.—Cortland (1687), ibid., 
111,434,1853. Douwaganhas.—Ibid. Dovaganhaes.— 
Livingston (1691), ibid., 778. Dowaganahs.—Doc. 
of 1700, ibid., IV, 701, 1854. Dowaganhas.—Cort¬ 
land (1687), ibid, 111,434,1855. Dowanganhaes.— 
Doc. of 1691, ibid., 776. Dshipowe-haga.—Gat- 
schet, Caughnawaga MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Caughna- 
waga name). Dwa-ka-ne n .—Hewitt, Onondaga 
MS. vocab., B. A. E. (Onondaga name). Lwa-ka- 
nha’.—Hewitt, Seneca and Onondaga vocab., 
B. A. E., 1880 (Seneca and Onondaga name). 
Eskiaeronnon.—Jes. Rel. 1649, 27, 1858 (Huron 
name; Hewitt says it signifies ‘ people of 
the falls’). Estiaghes.—Albany conf. (1726) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 791, 1855. Estiaghicks.— 
Colden (1727), ibid., iv, 737, note, 1854. 
Estiage.—Livingston (1701), ibid., 899, 1854. 

Etchipoes.—Prise de possession (1671), ibid., ix, 808, 
1855. Gibbaways.—Imlay, West Ter., 363, 1797. 
Hahatona. —Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voy., I, 
300, 1847. Hahatonwan.—Iapi Oaye, xm, no. 
2, 6, Feb., 1884 (Sioux name). Hahatoqwap.— 
Riggs, Dakota Diet., 72, 1852 (Sioux name). 
Hahatonway.—Matthews, Hidatsa Inds., 150, 1877 
(Sioux name). Ha-hat-tong.—Long, Exped. 
Rocky Mts., ii, lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name, in¬ 
correctly rendered ‘leapers’). Ha-ha-tu-a.—Mat¬ 
thews, Hidatsa Inds., 150,1877 (Hidatsa name; h 
guttural). Ha-ha-twawns.—Neill,Minn., 113,1858. 
Hah-hah-ton-wah.—Gale, Upper Miss., 265, 1867. 
Hrah-hrah-twauns.—Ramsey (ca. 1852) in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 50, 1872. Icbewas.—Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 126,1816 (misprint). Jibewas.— 
Smith (1799) quoted by Drake, Trag. Wild., 213, 
1841. jumpers.—Neill, Minn., 36, 1858 (incorrect 
translation of Saulteurs). Khahkhahtons.— 
Snelling, Tales of the Northwest, 137, 1830 (Sioux 
name). Khakhatons.—Ibid., 144. Khakhaton- 
wan.—Williamson, Minn. Geol. Rep. for 1884, 107. 
Kutaki.—Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Fox 
name). Leapers.—Hennepin, New Discov., 86, 
1698 (incorrect rendering of Saulteurs). Na¬ 
tion du Sault.— Jogues and Raymbaut in Jes. Rel. 
1642, II, 95, 1858. Ne-a-ya-og'.—Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 235,1862( ‘ those speaking the 
same language’: Creename). Ne-ga-tce.—StCyr, 
oral inf’n, 1886 (Winnebago name; plural, 
Ne-g&tc-hi-j& n ). Ninniwas.—Rafinesque, Am. 
Nations, I, 123, 1836. Nwa’-ka.—Hewitt, Tusca- 
rora MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1880 (Tuscarora name). 
Objibwa^s.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 143, 
1883. O'chepb'wag.—Long, Exped. St. Peter’s 
R., II, 151, 1824. Ochipawa.—Umfreville (1790) in 
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi,270,1859. Ochipewa.—Rich¬ 
ardson, Arct. Exped., 71, 1851. Ochipoy.—York 
(1700) inN. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 749,1854. Ochip- 
pewais.—Foster in Sen. Misc. Doc. 39, 42d Cong., 
3d sess., 6, 1873. Odchipewa.—Hutchins (1770) 
quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., n, 38,1851. 
Odgiboweke.—Perrot, M6m., 193,1864. Odjibewais.— 
Ibid. Od-iib-wag.—Schoolcraft quoted in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 35, 1885. Odjibwas.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, I, 307, 1851. Odjibwe.—Kelton, 
Ft Mackinac, 153, 1884. Odjibwek.—Belcourt 
(1850?) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1,227,1872. Ogi- 
bois.—M’Lean Hudson Bay, n, 323, 1849. 0-je- 
bway.—Jones, OjebwayInds., 164,1861. Ojeebois.— 
Henry, MS. vocab. (Bell copy, B. A. E.), 1812. 
Ojibaway.—Lewis and Clark, Trav.. 53, 1806. 
Ojibbewaig.—Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (Ottawa 
name). Ojibbeways.—Ibid., 36. Ojibboai.—Hoff¬ 
man, Winter in the Far West, n, 15, 1821. Ojibe- 
ways.—Perkins and Peck, Annals of the West, 
1850. Ojibois.— Gunn in Smithson. Rep., 400,1868. 
Ojibua.—Maximilian, Trav., 135, note, 1843. 
0-jib-wage.—Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287, 
1871. Ojibwaig.—Hale, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 224, 1846. Ojibwas.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 454,1838. 
0-jib-wa-uk'.—Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287, 
1871. Ojibways.—Am. Pioneer, II, 190, 1843. 
Ojibway-ugs.—Foster in Sen. Misc. Doc. 39, 42d 
Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1873. Ojibwe.—Burton, City of 
the Saints, 117, 1861. Ontehibouse.—Raymbaut 


(1641) quoted in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 70,1850 (prob¬ 
ably a misprint). Oshibwek.—Belcourt (1850?) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 227, 1872. Ostiagaghroon- 
es.—Canajoharie conf. (1759) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vn, 384, 1856. Ostiagahoroones.—Neill in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 397, 1885 (Iroquois 
name). Otchepose.—Proces verbal (1682) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 19, 1875. Otchi- 
poeses.—La Salle (1682) in Margry, Dec., II, 187, 
1877. Otchipois.—La Salle (1682) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., I, 46, 1846. Otchipoises.—Hildreth, 
Pioneer Hist.,9,1848. Otchipwe.—Baraga,Otchipwe 
Gram., title, 1878. Otjibwek.—Perrot, M6m., 193, 
1864. Ottapoas.—Buchanan, N.Am. Inds., 156,1824. 
Oucahipoues.—La Hontan (1703), New Voy., II, 87, 
1735. Ouchibois.—Writer of 1761 in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., IX, 428, 1871. Ouchipawah.—Pike 
(1806) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 563, 
1853. Ouchipoe.—La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, 
D6c., VI, 6, 1886. Ouchipoves.—Coxe, Carolana, 
map, 1741. Outachepas.—McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, hi, 79, 1854. Outchibouec.—Jes. Rel. 
1667, 24, 1858. Outchibous.— Ibid., 1670. 79, 1858. 
Outchipoue.—GallinSe (1669) in Margry, D6c.,1,163, 
1875. Outchipwais.—Bell in Can. Med. and Surg. 
Jour., Mar. and Apr., 1886. Outehipoues.—La 
Hontan, New Voy., I, 230,1703. Paouichtigouin.— 
Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 1858. Paouitagoung. — Ibid. 
Paouitigoueieuhak. —Ibid. Paouitingouach-irini. — 
Ibid. Qa-qa-to»-wa n .—Dorsey, oral inf’n, 1886 
(Sioux name). Ra-ra-to-oans.—Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 96,1885. Ra-ra-t’wans.— 
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 72, 1850 (Sioux 
name). Salteur.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, n, 
48, 1753. Santeaux.—Brown, West. Gaz., 265, 
1817 (misprint). Santena.—Gunn in Smithson. 
Rep. 1867, 400,1868 (misprint). Santeurs.—Dobbs, 
Hudson Bay, 26, 1744 (misprint). Saulteaux.— 
Beauhamois (1745) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 
432, 1885. Saulteurs.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 1858. 
Saulteuse.—Belcourt (ca. 1850) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., I, 228, 1872. Saulteux.—Gallin6e (1669) in 
Margry, Dec., I, 163, 1875. Sault Indians.—Vau- 
dreuil (1710) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 843, 1855. 
Sauteaux.—Gamelin (1790) in Am. St. Papers, 
IV, 94, 1832. Sauters.—Schermerhorn (1812) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., ii, 6,1814. Sauteurs.— 
Jes. Rel. 1667, 24, 1858. Sauteus.—Cox. Columbia 
R., ii, 270, 1831. Sauteux.—Vaudreuil (1719) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 893,1855. Sautor.—Carver 
(1766), Trav., 97, 1778. Sautous.—King, Journ. to 
Arct. Ocean, I, 32, 1836. Sautoux.—Ibid. Schip- 
uwe.—Heckewelder quoted by Barton, New 
Views, app., 1, 1798 (German form). Shepa- 
wees.—Lindesay (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VI. 538, 1855. Shepewas.—Bradstreet (ca. 1765), 
ibid., VII, 694, 1856. Shepuway.—Heckewelder 
quoted by Barton, New Views, app., 1, 1798. 
Sothuze.—Dalton (1783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,1st 
s., x, 123,1890. Sotoes.—Cox, Columbia R., ii, 270, 
1831. Sotoos.—Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, 96,1824. 
Sotto.—Kane, Wanderings inN. A., 438,1859. Soul- 
teaux.—Henry, MS. vocab. (Bell copy, B. A. E.), 
1812. Souteus.—Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 556, 1853. Souties.— 
Am. Pioneer, ii, 192, 1843. Stiaggeghroano.—Post 
(1758) quoted by Proud, Penn., ii, app., 113, 1798. 
Stiagigroone.—Livingston (1700) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., iv, 737, 1854. Tcipu'.—Dorsey, Kansas MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Tschipeway. — 
Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., 100, 1839. Tschippi- 
weer.—Walch,map, 1805 (Germanform). Tsipu'.— 
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage 
name). Twa-’ka'-nha’.—Smith, Cayuga and 
Oneida MS. vocabs., B. A. E., 1884 (Cayuga and 
Oneida name). TJchipweys.—Dalton (1783) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 123, 1809. Wah- 
kah-towah.—Tanner, Narr., 150, 1830 (Assiniboin 
name). 

Chippewa of Lake Nipegon. A Chippewa 
band officially known by this name re¬ 
siding in the vicinity of L. Nipegon, n. 
of L. Superior, in Ontario. The “ Chris¬ 
tians,’’ composing nearly one-half the en¬ 
tire band, occupy a village at the head of 
the lake near the Hudson Bay Company’s 
post; the remainder live about 100 m. 


282 


CHIPPOY-CHIRICAHUA 


[B. a. e. 


farther inland. The aggregate number in 
1884 was 426, and in 1901, 518. They are 
connected with the band at Red Rock on 
Nipegon bay. (J. m.) 

Allenemipigons.— Denonville (1687), in Margry, 
D6c., vi, 52,1886. 

Chippoy. A former Potawatomi vil¬ 
lage on Big Shawnee cr., in Fountain 
co., Ind. It was settled after 1795, and 
the site was included in a tract sold in 
1818 by the Miami. (j. m. ) 

Chipaille.—St Mary’s treaty with Miamis (1818) in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 493, 1873. Chippoy.—Harrison 
(1814) quoted by Drake, Tecumseh, 161, 1852. 

Chiputca. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chiricahua (Apache: ‘ great mountain ’). 
An important division of the Apache, 



BEDAZ-ISHU—CHIRICAHUA APACHE 


so called from their former mountain 
home in s. e. Arizona. Their own 
name is Aiaha. The Chiricahua were 
the most warlike of the Arizona In¬ 
dians, their raids extending into New 
Mexico, s. Arizona, and n. Sonora, among 
their most noted leaders being Cochise, 
Victorio, Loco, Chato, Nachi, Bonito 
and Ceronimo. Physically they do not 
differ materially from the other Apache. 
The men are well built, muscular, with 
well-developed chests, sound and regular 
teeth, and abundant hair. The women 
are even more vigorous and strongly 
built, with broad shoulders and hips 
and a tendency to corpulency in old 
age. They habitually wear a pleasant 
open expression of countenance, exhibit¬ 
ing uniform good nature, save when in 


anger their face takes on a savage cast. 
White thought their manner of life, gen¬ 
eral physique, and mental disposition 
seemed conducive to long life. Their 
characteristic long-legged moccasins of 
deerskin have a stout sole turning 
up at the toes, and the legs of the moc¬ 
casins, long enough to reach the thigh, 
are folded back below the knee, form¬ 
ing a pocket in which are carried paints 
and a knife. The women wore short 
skirts of buckskin, and the men used to 
display surplus skins folded about the 
waist. Their arrows were made of 
reed tipped with obsidian or iron, the 
shaft winged with three strips of feathers. 
They used in battle a long spear and a 
slung-shot made by inserting a stone into 
the green hide of a cow’s tail, leaving a 
portion of the hair attached. They pos¬ 
sessed no knowledge of weaving blankets. 
White (MS., B. A. E.) supposed that 
they had immigrated into Arizona from 
New Mexico three or four generations 
back. Their camps were located on the 
highlands in winter that they might catch 
the warm rays of the sun, and in summer 
near the water among stunted trees that 
sheltered them from its scorching glare. 
Their bands or clans were named from the 
nature of the ground about their chosen 
territory. Both men and women were 
fond of wearing necklaces and ear pend¬ 
ants of beads. The hair was worn long 
and flowdng, with a turban, to which was 
attached a flap hanging down behind; 
they plucked out the hairs of the beard 
w ith tweezers of tin, and wore suspended 
from their necks a small round mirror 
which they used in painting their faces 
with stripes of brilliant colors. Strings of 
pieces of shell w T ere highly prized. Their 
customary dwelling w^as a rude brush hut, 
circular or oval, with the earth scooped 
out to enlarge its capacity. In winter 
they huddled together for w T armth and, 
if the hut w r as large, built a fire in the 
center. When they changed camp they 
burned their huts, which were always 
built close together. They subsisted on 
berries, nuts, and the fruit of various trees, 
mesquite beans, and acorns, of which 
they were particularly fond, and they 
ground the seeds of different grasses on 
a large flat stone and made a paste with 
water, drying it afterward in the sun. 
They relished the fruit of cacti and of 
the yucca, and made mescal from the 
root of the agave. Fish they would not 
eat, nor pork, but an unborn calf and the 
entrails of animals they regarded as deli¬ 
cacies, and horse and mule flesh was con¬ 
sidered the best meat. Though selfish in 
most things, they were hospitable with 
food, which was free to anyone who 
was hungry. They were scrupulous in 
keeping accounts and paying debts. 






BULL. .301 


CHIRICAHU A 


283 


Like many other Indians they would 
never speak their own names nor 
on any account speak of a dead member 
of the tribe. They tilled the ground a 



LOCO—CHIRICAHUA CHIEF 

little with wooden implements, obtaining 
corn and melon seeds from the Mexicans. 
In their clans all were equal. Bands, 
according to White, were formed of 
clans, and chiefs were chosen for their 
ability and courage, although there is 
evidence that chiefship was sometimes 
hereditary, as in the case of Cochise, son 
and successor of Nachi. Chiefs and old 
men were usually deferred to in council. 
They used the brain of the deer in dress¬ 
ing buckskin. It is said that they charged 
their arrows with a quick deadly poison, 
obtained by irritating a rattlesnake with 
a forked stick, causing it to bite into a 
deer’s liver, which, when saturated with 
the venom, was allowed to putrefy. They 
stalked the deer and the antelope by 
covering their heads with the skull of 
the animal and imitating with their 
crouching body the movements of one 
grazing; and it was their custom to ap¬ 
proach an enemy’s camp at night in a 
similar manner, covering their heads with 
brush. They signaled war or peace by 
a great blaze or smoke made by burning 
cedar boughs or the inflammable spines 
on the giant cactus. Of their social or¬ 
ganization very little is definitely known, 
and the statements of the two chief au¬ 
thorities are widely at variance. Accord¬ 
ing to White, the children belong to the 
gens of the father, while Bourke as¬ 
serts that the true clan system prevails. 
They married usually outside of the gens, 


according to White, and never relatives 
nearer than a second cousin. A young 
warrior seeking a wife would first bargain 
with her parents and then take a horse 
to her dwelling. If she viewed his suit 
with favor she would feed and water the 
animal, and, seeing that, he would come 
and fetch his bride, and after going on a 
hunt for the honeymoon they would re¬ 
turn to his people. When he took two 
horses to the camp of the bride and killed 
one of them it signified that her parents 
had given her over to him without re¬ 
gard to her consent. Youth was the 
quality most desired in a bride. After 
she became a mother the husband might 
take a second wife, and some had as many 
as five, two or more of them often being 
sisters. Married women were usually 
faithful and terribly jealous, so that sii}- 
gle girls did not care to incur their rage. 
A woman in confinement went off to a 
hut by herself, attended by her women 
relatives. Children received their earli¬ 
est names from something particularly 
noticeable at the time of their birth. As 
among the Navaho, a man never spoke to 
his mother-in-law, and treated his wife’s 
father with distant respect; and his broth¬ 
ers were never familiar with his wife 
nor he with her sisters and brothers. 
Faithless wives were punished by whip¬ 
ping and cutting off a portion of the nose, 
after which they were cast off. Little 



TSHAI-KLOGE—CHIRICAHUA WOMAN 


girls were often purchased or adopted by 
men who kept them until they were old 
enough for them to marry. Often girls 
were married when only 10 or 11 years of 
age. Children of both sexes had perfect 
freedom, were not required to obey, and 









284 


CHIRICAHUA 


[b. a. e. 


never were punished. The men engaged 
in pastimes every day, and boys in mock 
combats, hurling stones at each other 
with slings. Young wives and maidens 
did only light work, the heavy tasks be¬ 
ing performed by the older women. 
People met and parted without any form 
of salute. Kissing was unknown. Ex¬ 
cept mineral vermilion, the colors with 
which they painted their faces and dyed 
grasses for baskets were of vegetal ori¬ 
gin—yellow from beech and willow bark, 
red from the cactus. They would not 
kill the golden eagle, but would pluck 
its feathers, which they prized, and for 
the hawk and the bear they had a super¬ 
stitious regard in a lesser degree. They 
made tizwin, an intoxicating drink, from 
corn, burying it until it sprouted, grind¬ 
ing it, and then allowing the mash 
diluted with water to ferment. The 
women carried heavy burdens on their 
backs, held by a strap passed over the 
forehead. Their basket work was imper¬ 
vious to water and ornamented with 
designs similar to those of the Pima, 
except that human figures frequently 
entered into the decorative motive. 
Baskets ft. in length and 18 in. 
wide at the mouth were used in collect¬ 
ing food, which was frequently brought 
from a great distance. When one of 
the tribe died, men carried the corpse, 
wrapped in the blankets of the deceased, 
with other trifling personal effects, to an 
obscure place in low ground and there 
buried it at once, piling stones over the 
grave to protect it from coyotes or other 
prowling beasts. No women were al¬ 
lowed to follow, and no Apache ever 
revisited the spot. Female relatives kept 
up their lamentations for a month, utter¬ 
ing loud wails at sunset. The hut in 
which a person died was always burned 
and often the camp was removed. 
Widows used to cut off their hair and 
paint their faces black for a year, during 
which time the mourner lived in the fam¬ 
ily of the husband’s brother, whose wife 
she became at the expiry of the mourn¬ 
ing. They had a number of dances, 
notably the “devil dance,” with clowns, 
masks, headdresses, etc., in which the 
participants jumped over fire, and a 
spirited war dance, with weapons and 
shooting in time to a song. When any¬ 
body fell sick several fires were built in 
the camp, and while the rest lay around 
on the ground with solemn visages, the 
young men, their faces covered with 
paint, seized firebrands and ran around 
and through the fires and about the lodge 
of the sick person, whooping continually 
and flourishing the brands to drive away 
the evil spirit. They had a custom, when 
a girl arrived at puberty, of having the 
other young girls lightly tread on her 


back as she lay face downward, the cere¬ 
mony being followed by a dance. 

In 1872 the Chiricahua were visited by 
a special commissioner, who concluded 
an agreement with Cochise, their chief, 
to cease hostilities and to use his influence 
with the other Apache to this end. By 
the autumn of this year more than 1,000 
of the tribe were settled on the newly 
established Chiricahua res., s. e. Ariz. 
Cochise died in 1874, and was succeeded 
as chief by his son Taza, who remained 
friendly to the Government; but the 
killing of some settlers who had sold 
whisky to the Indians caused an inter¬ 
tribal broil, which, in connection with 
the proximity of the Chiricahua to the 
international boundary, resulted in the 
abolishment of the reservation against 
their will. Camp Apache agency was es¬ 
tablished in 1872, and in the year follow¬ 
ing 1,675 Indians were placed thereunder; 
but in 1875 this agency was discontinued 
and the Indians, much to their discontent, 
were transferred to San Carlos, where 
their enemies, the Yavapai, had also been 
removed. For further information re¬ 
garding the dealings of the Chiricahua 
with the Government, see Apache. 

The members of Geronimo’s band, 
which was captured in 1886 and sent by 
the War Department in turn to Florida, 
Alabama, and Oklahoma, are now at Ft 
Sill, Okla., where they number 298. 
The remaining Chiricahua are included 
among the Apache under Ft Apache and 
San Carlos agencies, Ariz. The Pinaleno 
are that part of the Chiricahua formerly 
residing in the Pinal mts. 

Ai-aha.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 197, 1885- 
Aiha.—Ibid. Apaches Broncos.—Steck in Cal. 
Farmer, June 5, 1863 (Span.: ‘wild Apaches’). 
Apaches Chiricaguis. — Mayer, Mexico, II, 38,1853. 
Broncos.—Taylor in Cal. Fanner, Feb. 14, 1862. 
Cherecaquis.—Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 57, 1850. 
Chericahui. — Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 94, 1870. Chica- 
raguis. —Bonnycastle, Span. Am., 68,1819. Chigui- 
cagui.—Anza (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
II, 114,1856. Chilcow.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 3,1872. 
Chilecago. -Ind. Aff. Rep., 122,1861. Chile Cowes.— 
Ibid., 506, 1865. Chilicagua.—Ibid., 1859, 336,1860. 
Chiricaguis.—Garc6s (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex.. 4th 
s., II, 375, 1856. Chiricahni.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 
223, 1870. Chiricahua.—White, MS. Hist, of Apa¬ 
ches, B. A. E., 1875. Chir-i-ca-huans. — Hodge, 
Arizona, 163, 1877. Chiricahues.—Escudero, Not. 
Estad. de Chihuahua, 212, 1834. Chi-ri-ca-hui.— 
Cremony, Life Among Apaches, 33,1868. Chirica- 
quis.—Ruxton, Adventures, 194, 1848. Chiri- 
cuagi.—Stone in Hist. Mag., v, 166, 1861. Chiri- 
guais.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6,180,1883. 
Chirikahwa.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. Chiri- 
quans.—Smet, Letters, 135, 1843. Chirocahue.— 
Garcia in Soc. Mex. Geog. Boletin, v, 314, 1861. 
Cohila Apache.—Graves in Ind. Aff. Rep., 439,1853. 
Haya-a.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. Hayaha.—Ibid. 
(‘ live in the east ’: so called by the White Moun¬ 
tain Apache, because they formerly lived at Hot 
Springs,N. Mex.). Heya.—Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., 
i, 370, 1883 (Apache name: ‘below’). Hi-ar.— 
White, MS. Hist, of Apaches, B. A. E., 1875 (so 
called by other Apache: trans., ‘lived away off’). 
Pa ‘lnen ah ponin.—Gatschet, MS. Isleta vocab., 
B. A. E., 1885 (Isleta name). Segatajenne.—Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 59,1864. Sagetaen-ne.—Escudero, 
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 212, 1834. Southern 


BULL. 30] 


CIIISCA-CHISKELIKBATCHA 


285 


Chiricahua.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1875. Tchishi 
dinne.—Gatschet, Apache MS., B. A. E., 1883 (Nav- 
aho name). 

Chisca (possibly from Cherokee tsVskwa 
‘bird,’ tsiskwd'hl ‘bird place.’—Mooney). 
The mountainous northern region of the 
Cherokee in n. w. Georgia or n. e. Ala¬ 
bama, in search of which men were sent 
by De Soto in 1541 from the province of 
Chiaha to look for copper and gold. It 
seemingly received its name from a village 
of the same name on an island in the 
river of St Esprit (Coosa r.?), the inhab¬ 
itants of which made a great deal of oil 
from nuts. De Soto’s troops remained 
here 26 or 27 days. The Chisca of Gar- 
cilasso de la Vega (Florida, 175, 1723) is 
the Quizquiz of the other chroniclers of 
De Soto’s expedition, situated in n. w. 
Mississippi, on Mississippi r. See Garci- 
lasso de la Vega, Florida, 175, 1723; 
Biedma in French, Hist. Coll. La., pt. n, 
101, 1850; Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
1900; Bourne, Narr. De Soto, i, 79, n, 
110, 1904. 

Cheesca.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 47, 1853. 
Chisca.—Bourne, Narr. of De Soto, i, 79, 117; II, 
110, 1904. Cisca.—La Salle (ca. 1680) in Margry, 
D6c., II, 196 et seq., 1877. 

Chisedec. A Montagnais tribe, band, 
or settlement about the Bay of Seven 
Islands on the n. shore of St Lawrence r. 
where it enters the gulf. The name 
appears to have been applied to a locality 
and the people of that locality, as it is 
stated in the Jesuit Relation of 1645 that 
certain savages boasted of their warlike 
actions “at Chichedek, country of the 
Bersiamites, where they had killed 7 sav¬ 
ages,” probably Eskimo. In the Relation 
of 1640 it is stated that in ascending the St 
Lawrence, after passing the Eskimo, “we 
meet with the people of Chisedech and the 
Bersiamites, two small nations of which 
we have but slight knowledge.” Lescar- 
botsays that in his time (1609) the name 
of the river which enters into or near 
the Bay of Seven Islands was changed 
to Chi-sche-dec, an Indian appellation 
(Hind). A Dutch map of 1621 names 
the bay or locality Chichedec. It is pos¬ 
sible, therefore, that the name applied 
to the Indians, who seem to have been 
closely connected with and possibly were 
a part of the Bersiamite tribe, was that 
of the river and referred only to a settle¬ 
ment. The name Ouakouiechidek, used 
in 1660 as that of a tribe in connection 
with the Outabitibek (Abittibi), if in¬ 
tended for the Chisedec would indicate a 
locality in the distant n. As the designa¬ 
tion of a people the name dropped from 
history at an early date. (c. t. ) 

Chichedec.—Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., I, 1856. Chichedek.—Jes. Rel. 1645,37,1858. 
Chisedech.—Ibid., 1640,34, 1858. 0uak8iechidek.— 
Ibid., 1660, 12, 1858, (same?). Wakouiechiwek.— 
Ibid., in, index, 1858. 

Chisels. Long, slender, celt-like imple¬ 
ments of stone or hard varieties of bone, 


with narrow cutting edge, and round, 
rectangular, elliptical, or half-elliptical 
in section. Those of stone, mainly pre¬ 
historic, are rarely more than a few 
inches in length. Some specimens are 
largest at the top, gradually tapering to 
the edge, but most of them decrease in 
size in each direction from near the mid¬ 
dle. Some have hammer marks on the 
blunt end, others are polished at the top, 
while a few are sharp at both ends. It is 
probable that their primary intent was 
for woodworking, though they are nu¬ 
merous wherever steatite vessels were 
made, and the marks of their 
use are seen on the unfinished 
product and on the worked sur¬ 
faces of the quarry face. These 
soapstone cutting tools have 
usually been flaked into the 
desired form, the edge only 
being carefully ground. In the 
lower Ohio valley and in the 
Southern states chisels are gen¬ 
erally made of chert; toward 
the n., where glacial material is easily 
procured, they are of diorite, syenite, 
or other tough rock. Chisels of stone 
were in common use among the wood¬ 
working tribes of the N. W. coast, but 
these are now almost wholly superseded 
by chisels of metal. While not so abun¬ 
dant as celts (q. v.), from which they 
can not always be distinguished, they 
have practically the same distribution. 
See Fowke in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; 
Holmes in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; 
Rau in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 1876. 

(w. H. H. g. f. ) 

Chiserhonon. A former Canadian tribe 
subordinate to theOttawa.—Sagard(1632), 
Canada, iv, 1866. 

Chishafoka (‘among the post oaks’). A 
former Choctaw town on the site of the 
present city of Jackson, Miss.—Brown in 
Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., iv, 445, 1902. 

Chishucks. One of the 8 Tillamook vil¬ 
lages at the mouth of Tillamook r.,Oreg., 
in 1805.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 
117, 1814. 

Chisi. A town in 1540 on a small river, 
between Toalli and Altamaca, in e. Geor¬ 
gia. The name seems to be intended for 
Ochisi, but not the town of that name on 
Chattahoochee r. It was entered by De 
Soto’s army in Mar., 1540. 

Achese.—Gentleman of Elvas (1557) In French, 
Hist. Coll. La., II, 138,1850. Chisi.—Biedma (1544) 
in French, op. cit., 100. 

Chiskatalofa ( chiski ‘post oak,’ talofa 
‘ town ’). A former Creek town on the w. 
side of Chattahoochee r., 4 m. below 
Wikaihlako, in Henry co., Ala. 

Cheskitalowas.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364,1822. 
Chuskee Tallafau.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 163, 
1837. 

Chiskelikbatcha. A former Choctaw 
town belonging to the Sixtowns dis¬ 
trict, near Chicasawhay r., probably in 



Stone Chisel; 
Ala. (1-5) 




286 


CHISKIAC—CHITSA 


[b. a. e. 


Jasper co., Miss. (West Fla. map, ca. 
1775). 

Chiskiac. A tribe of the Powhatan 
confederacy formerly living in York co., 
Va. They numbered about 200 in 1608. 
At that time their principal village, of the 
same name, was on the s. side of York 
r., about 10 m. below the junction of the 
Mattapony and Pamunkey. (j. m. ) 
Chickiaes.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816. 
Chiskact.—Smith (1629), Virginia,ir,77,repr. 1819. 
Chiskiack.—Ibid., 1,117. Kiskiack.—Ibid., I, map. 
Kiskiak.—Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 36, 1849. 

Chisnedinadinaye ( 4 walnut’) A clan or 
band of the Pinal Coyoteros (Bourke in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 112,1890), coor¬ 
dinate with the Chiltneyadnaye clan of 
the White Mountain Apache. 

Chisro. The Snow-bunting clan of the 
Hopi of Arizona. 

Tcisro wiiiwu.—Fevvkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 
1900 (winwu ='clan ’). Tci'-sro wiin-wu.—Fewkes 
in Am. Anthrop., vii, 405, 1894. 

Chitchakos. See Chechawkose. 

Chithut. Mentioned as a band associ¬ 
ated with the Squaksin and Puyallup of 
Puget sd., Wash.; not to be confounded 
with Chitwout, a synonym of Similka- 
meen. 

Chit-hut.—Simmons in Ind. Aff. Rep., 226, 1858. 

Chitimacha (Choctaw: chuti ‘cooking pot, ’ 
masha ‘they possess’: ‘they have cook¬ 
ing vessels’). A tribe, forming the Chit- 
imachan linguistic family, whose earliest 
known habitat was the shores of Grand 
lake, formerly Lake of the Shetimasha,and 
the banks of Grand r., La. Some 16 or 18 
of the tribe were livingonGrand r. in 1881, 
but the majority, about35, lived at Charen- 
ton, on the s. side of Bayou Teche, in St 
Mary’s parish, about 10 m. from the gulf. 
The remnant resides in the same district, 
but the present population is not known. 
The name of these Indians for themselves 
is Pdntch-pinunkansh, ‘men altogether 
red,’ a designation apparently applied 
after the advent of the whites. The 
Chitimacha came into notice soon after 
the French settled Louisiana, through 
the murder by one of their men of the 
missionary St Cosme on the Mississippi 
in 1706. This was followed by protracted 
war with the French, who compelled them 
to sue for peace, which was granted by 
Bienville on condition that the head of 
the murderer be brought to him; this 
done, peace was concluded. The tribe 
then must have been reduced to a small 
number of warriors, though Le Page du 
Pratz, who was present at the final cere¬ 
mony, says they arrived at the meeting 
place in many pirogues. Little is known 
in regard to their customs. Fish and the 
roots of native plants constituted their 
food, but later they planted maize and 
sweet potatoes. They were strict monoga¬ 
mists, and though the women appear to 
have had considerable authority in their 
government, there were no indications of 


totems or the gentile system among them. 
The men wore their hair long, with a piece 
of lead at the end of the queue, and tat¬ 
tooed their arms, legs, and faces. The 
noonday sun is said to have been their 
principal deity. The dead were buried 
in graves, and after the flesh had decayed 
the bones were taken up and reinterred. 
Their villages or former settlements so far 
as known were: Amatpan, Grosse Tete 
Tcheti, Hipinimtch, Kamenakshtchat, 
Kushuh, Namukatsup, Nekunsisnis, Net- 
pinunsh, Shoktangihanehetchinsh, Tcha- 
tikutingi, Tchatkasitunshki, Tsakhtsin- 
shup. Chitimacha villages were situated 
also on the site of Donaldsonville, As¬ 
cension parish, on the w. bank of the 
Mississippi (here St Cosme was murdered 
in 1706), and at the mouth of Bayou La¬ 
fourche. See Trans. Anthrop. Soc.Wash., 
ii,148,1883. (a. s. g.) 

Chetemachas.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. 
Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848. Chetimachas.—Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.,11,306,1836. Chitimachas.— 
Ibid., 114. Pa'ntch pinunkansh.—Gatschet in 
Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., ii, 150, 1883. Sheti- 
masha.—Ibid., 148. Shyoutemacha.—Ibid., 150 
(early French form). Tchikemaha.—Ibid. (Ali- 
bamu name). Tchitimachas. —Le Page du Pratz, 
Hist, de la Louisiane, I, 83,1758. Tchoutymacha.— 
Gatschet, op. cit., 150 (early French form). 
Yachimichas.—Martin, Hist. La., 1,167,1827 (men¬ 
tioned with Chitimacha, but probably the same). 

Chitimachan Family. A linguistic fam¬ 
ily consisting solely of the Chitimacha 
tribe (q. v.), from which it takes its name. 
See Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 66, 1891. 

Chititiknewas (Yokuts name). A for¬ 
mer division of the Bankalachi that lived 
on upper Deer cr., s. e. of Tulare lake, 
Cal. (a. l. k.) 

Cheticnewash.—Wessells (1853) in H R Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 32, 1857. 

Chitklin’s Village. A summer camp of 
one of the Taku chiefs (Koluschan family) 
named TcIItLen (‘big tc/it,’ a bird). 113 
people were there in 1880.—Petroff in 
10th Census, Alaska, 32, 1884. 

Chitlatamus. A Kuitsh village on lower 
Umpqua r., Oreg. 

Tci'-tla-ta'-mus. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 231, 1890. * 

Chitmunk. See Chipmunk. 

Chitnak. A Yuit Eskimo village on the 
s. shore of St Lawrence id., Bering sea. 
Shetnak.—Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886. 
Shitnak.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Chito (‘large’ [people]). A Choctaw 
gens of the Watakihulata pliratry.—Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 162, 1878. 

Chitola. The nearly extinct Rattle¬ 
snake clan of the Zuni. 

Chitola-kwe.—Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 
368, 1896 (kwe=‘ people’). 

Chitsa (refers to anything of a pale color; 
specifically, ‘fair people’). One of the 
three classes or castes into which the 
Kutchakutchin are divided, the others 
being the Natesa and the Tangesatsa, 
faintly representing, respectively, “the 
aristocracy, the middle classes, and the 
poorer orders of civilized nations. ” Mar- 


BULL. 30] 


CHITTO-FANNA-CHULA-CHOCORUA 


287 


riage was not allowed within the class or 
caste, however, and descent was in the 
female line.—Kirby in Smithson. Rep. 
1864, 418, 1865; Hardisty, ibid., 1866, 315, 
1872. 

Chit-che-ah.— Jones in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 326, 
1872. Chit-sa.—Kirby in Smithson. Rep. 1864, 
418, 1865. Chitsah.—Hardisty in Smithson. Rep. 
1866,315,1872. Chit-sangh.—Ibid. Etchian-Kpet.— 
Petitot, Trad. Ind. du Can.Nord-ouest, 14,15,1886. 
Tchit-che-ah.—Jones, ibid., 326. 

Cbitto-Fanna-Cbula. See Neamathla. 
Chiuchin. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Chiukak (‘pike village’). A Kaviag- 
miut village on the peninsula inclosing 
Golofnin bay, Alaska; pop. 15 in 1880. 

Chiokuk.—Jackson, Reindeer in Alaska,map, 145, 
1894. Chiookuk.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 
11, 1884. Knecktakimut.—W. U. Tel. Exp., 1867, 
quoted by Baker, (ieog. Diet. Alaska, 1901 (appa¬ 
rently the same). Scookuk.—Coast Surv. chart 
cited by Baker, ibid. Tchioukakmioute.—Zagos¬ 
kin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Chiutaiina ( Chiu-taiina) . The Eagle 
clan of Taos pueblo, N. Mex. ( f. w. h. ) 
Chiwere (‘belonging to this place,’ the 
home people). A term employed by J. 
O. Dorsey to designate a group of Siouan 
tribes, including the Oto, Iowa, and Mis¬ 
souri, for information regarding which, 
see under their respective names. Con¬ 
sult also Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
1897; McGee, ibid., and the writings by 
Dorsey cited below. 

‘Ce'kiwere.—Dorsey in Bull. Philos. Soc. Wash., 
128, 1880. ‘Ciwere.—Ibid. Ockiwere.—Dorsey in 
Am. Antiq., 313, 1883 (misprint). Olwere.—ibid, 
(misprint). Tcekiwere.—Dorsey in Am. Natur., 
829, 1882. x oe5 P were -—Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. 
E., 211,1884. Tciwere.—Am. Natur., 829, 1882. 
Ti-re'-wi.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., 168, 1879. 
Cbizhu. The 1st Ponka half-tribe, com- 
osed of 4 gentes. 

ci n ju.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897. 
Chizhuwashtage (‘chizhupeacemaker’). 
The 15th Kansa gens, the 7th on the 
Yata side of the tribal circle. 

Peacemaker.—Dorsey in Am. Natur., 671, July, 
1885. Tciju Wactage.—Ibid. 

♦ Chkungen. A Songish band at McNeill 
bay, s. end of Vancouver id. 

Tck'unge'n.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
17, 1890. 

Chlacbaik. Given by Krause as a Ko- 
luschan town occupied by the Tukden- 
tan. Actually a summer camp on an 
island called La/xa, near Chichagof id., 
Alaska. 

Chlacha-ik.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118,1885. 

Chlorite. —A soft, greenish, often black¬ 
ish, mineral, related to the micas, much 
used by the aborigines for ornaments, 
ceremonial objects, and pipes. When 
polished it is in many cases not readily 
distinguished from**steatite or soapstone 
save by its somewhat greater hardness. 
It occurs as a secondary mineral result¬ 
ing from alteration of other species, as 
biotite, pyroxene, amphibolite, etc. See 
Stone-work . (w. h. h. ) 


Chnagmiut (‘ coast people ’). An Alas¬ 
kan Eskimo tribe occupying the shore of 
Pastol bay, the Yukon delta, and both 
banks of Yukon r. as far as Razboinski, 
Alaska. They hunt the seal and beluga, 
trap mink and muskrat, have fish in 
abundance, eggs, and berries, and no lack 
of driftwood; yet they often suffer priva¬ 
tions, and their carelessly built villages 
are sometimes demolished by freshets. 
Subtribes are Ankachagmiut, Chukchage- 
miut, Koshkogemiut, Teletagmiut, and 
Ukagemiut. Their villages are Aiachag- 
iuk, Aimgua, Alexief, Andreafski, Anka- 
chak, Apoon, Ariswaniski, Avnulik,Chat- 
inak, Chefoklak, Chukchuk, Claikehak, 
Fetkina, Ikuak, Ingichuk, Kanig, Kashu- 
tuk, Khaik, Kochkok, Komarof, Kotlik, 
Kusilvak, Kwiahok, Kwikak, Nigiklik, 
Ninvok, Nokrot, Nunapithlugak, Onu- 
ganuk, Pastoliak, Pastolik, Razboinski, 
Ribnaia, Staria Selenie, Starik, Takshak, 
Tiatiuk, Tlatek, and Uglovia. The tribe 
numbered 621 in 1890. 

Agulmiut.—Woman quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 17,1877. Kangjulit.—Erman quoted by 
Dali, ibid. Kaniulit.—Zagoskin quoted by Dali, 
ibid. Premorska.—Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 267, 
1869 (Russian: ‘people by the sea’). Premorski.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1,17,1877. Primoske.— 
Whymper, Trav. in Alaska, 235,1868. Prinoski.— 
Raymond in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 593, 1870. 
Tschnagmeuten.—Richardson, Arct. Exped., I, 
370, 1851. Tschnagmjuten.—Holmberg, Ethnol. 
Skizz., 5,1885. Tschnagmiiten.—Wrangell, Ethnol. 
Nach., 122,1839. Tsnagmyut.—Turner, MS. Unalit 
vocab., B. A. E. (= ‘ people of the outer edge, 
dwelling farthest seaward ’). 

Chobaabisb. A small band of Salish, 
subordinate to Skagit, on Swinomish res., 
Wash.; mentioned in Pt Elliott treaty of 
1855; pop. 38 in 1870. 

Che-baah-ah-bish.—Ross in Ind. All. Rep., 17,1870. 
Cho-ba-abish.—Mallet in ibid., 198, 1877. Cho- 
bah-ah-bish.—U. S. Ind. Treat., 378, 1873. 

Chockrelatan ( Thlcharghilii-tunne , ‘ peo¬ 
ple away from the forks’ ot the stream). 
A former village of the Mishikhwutme- 
tunne near the forks of Coquille r., Oreg. 
Their lands were drained by the waters 
of that stream, and the villagers were 
separated by mountain barriers from all 
neighbors except the Kusan, living on 
the coast. 

Chak-re-le-a-ton.—Kautz, MS. Toutouten census, 
B. A. E., 1855. Chockrelatan.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8,1860. Chockreletan.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, VI, 702, 1857. Choc-re-le-a-tan.—Par¬ 
rish in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 495, 1855. Qltc’a-rxi'- 
li-i' }unne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
232,1890 (=: ‘ people away from the forks ’). Okre- 
letan.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 702, 1857. 

Choconikla. A Seminole town, of about 
60 warriors in 1820, on the w. side of 
Apalachicola r., contiguous to Ataphulga, 
on Little r., Decatur co., Ga. (a. s. g. ) 
Cho-co-nickla.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
307,1822. 

Chocorua. The legendary last survivor 
of a small tribe of Indians who, previous 
to 1766, inhabited the region about the 
town of Burton, N. H. He was pur- 


288 


CHOCTAW 


[ B. A. E. 


sued by a white hunter to the mountain 
which bears his name and driven over 
the cliffs or shot to death. Before dying 
he is reported to have cursed the English 
and their cattle, and to this is attributed 
the fact that none of these animals thrive 
in Burton (Drake, Aboriginal Races, 285, 
1880). It is possible that the chief has 
been conjured up to account for the name 
of the mountain. (a. f. c. ) 

Choctaw (from Choctaw chah’ta , of un¬ 
known meaning, but supposed to signify a 
separation—“separation from the Creeks 
and Seminole, who were once of one 
tribe.’’—Wright). An important tribe 
of the Muskhogean stock, formerly oc¬ 
cupying middle and s. Mississippi, 
their territory extending, in their 
most flourishing days, e. of Tombigbee 
r., probably as far as Dallas co., Ga. 



ALLEN WRIGHT—CHOCTAW 


Ethnically they belong to the Choctaw 
branch of the Muskhogean family, which 
included the Choctaw, Chickasaw, Huma, 
and their allies, and some small tribes 
which formerly lived along Yazoo r. 
The dialects of the members of this 
branch are so closely related that they 
may be considered as practically identical 
(Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 53,1884). 

The earliest notice of these Indians is 
found in the De Soto narratives for 1540. 
The giant Tascalusa, whom he met in his 
march down Coosa valley and carried to 
Mauvila, was a Choctaw chieftain; and 
the natives who fought the Spaniards so 
fiercely at this town belonged to a closely 
related tribe. When the French, about 
the beginning of the 18th century, began 
to settle colonies at Mobile, Biloxi, and 


New Orleans, the Choctaw came early into 
friendly relations with them and were 
their allies in their wars against other 
Indian tribes. In the French war on the 
Natchez, in 1730, a large body of Choctaw 
warriors served under a French officer. 
They continued this friendship until the 
English traders succeeded in drawing over 
to the English interest some of the e. 
Choctaw towns. This brought on a war 
between them and the main body, who 
still adhered to the French, which contin¬ 
ued until 1763. The tribe was constantly 
at war with the Creeks and Chickasaw. 
After the French had surrendered their 
American possessions to Great Britain, 
in 1763, and to some extent previously 
thereto, Piembers of the tribe began to 
move across the Mississippi, where, in 
1780, Milfort (Memoire, 95, 1802) met 
some of their bands who were then 
at war with the Caddo. About 1809 a 
Choctaw village existed on Wichita r., 
and another on Bayou Chicot, Opelousas 
parish, La. Morse (1820) says there were 
1,200 of them on the Sabine and Neches 
rs., and about 140 on Red r., near Pecan 
point (Rep. to Sec. War, 373, 1822). It 
is stated by some historians that this 
tribe, or parties of it, participated in the 
Creek war; this, however, is emphatic- 
allv denied by Halbert (Creek War of 
1813 and 1814, 124, 1895), who was 
informed in 1877 by some of the oldest 
members of the tribe that the Choc¬ 
taw manifested no hostility toward the 
Americans during this conflict. A small 
band of perhaps 30 were probably the 
only Choctaw with the Creeks. The 
larger part of those in Mississippi began 
to migrate to Indian Ter. in 1832, hav¬ 
ing ceded most of their lands to the 
United States in various treaties (Royce, 
Indian Land Cessions, 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
1899). 

The Choctaw were preeminently the 
agriculturists of the southern Indians. 
Though brave, their wars in most in¬ 
stances were defensive. No mention is 
made of the “great house,” or “the 
square,” in Choctaw towns, as they ex¬ 
isted in the Creek communities, nor of 
the busk (q. v.). The game of chunkey 
(q. v.), as well as the ball play (q. v.), was 
extensively practised by them. It was 
their custom to clean the bones of the 
dead before depositing them in boxes or 
baskets in the bone-houses, the work be¬ 
ing performed by “certain old gentle¬ 
men with very long nails,” who allowed 
their nails to grow long for this 
purpose. The people of this tribe also 
followed the custom of setting up poles 
around the new graves, on which they 
hung hoops, wreaths, etc., to aid the 
spirit in its ascent. They practised arti¬ 
ficial head flattening and in consequence 
were sometimes called Flatheads. 






BULL. 30] 


CHOCTAW CAPITALE 


289 


The population of the tribe when it 
first came into relations with the French, 
about the year 1700, has been estimated 
at from 15,000 to 20,000. Their number 
in 1904 was 17,805, exclusive of 4,722 
Choctaw freedmen (negroes). These are 
all under the Union agency, Ind. Ter. 
To these must be added a small number 
in Mississippi and Louisiana. 

There are, or at least were formerly, 
several dialects spoken in different sec¬ 
tions; these, however, differed so little 
that they have not been considered 
worthy of special mention. The small 
Muskhogean tribes known as Mobilian, 
Tohome or Tomez, Tawasa, Mugulasha, 
Acolapissa, Huma, and Conshac (q. v.), 
on the gulf coast of Mississippi and Ala¬ 
bama, are sometimes called Choctaw, but 
the Choctaw proper had their villages 
inland, on the upper courses of the Chicka- 
sawhay, Pearl, and Big Black rs. and the 
w. affluents of the Tombigbee. At least 
in later times they were distinguished 
into three sections, each under its mingo 
or chief. The western division was called 
Oklafalaya, ‘the long people,’ and con¬ 
sisted of small, scattered villages; the 
northeastern, Ahepatokla (Oypatukla), 
‘ potato-eating people,’ and the southeast¬ 
ern district came to be called Oklahannali, 
‘Sixtowns,’ from the name of the domi¬ 
nant subdivision. The people of these 
two latter districts lived in large towns for 
mutual defense against their constant 
enemies the Creeks. Gatschet gives Cobb 
Indians as the name of those Choctaw 
settled w. of Pearl r. 

According to Morgan (AncientSociety, 
99, 162,1877) the Choctaw were divided 
into two phratries, each including 4 
gentes, as follows: A, Kushapokla (Di¬ 
vided people): 1, Kushiksa (Reed); 2, 
Lawokla; 3, Lulakiksa; 4, Linoklusha; 
B, Watakihulata (Beloved people): 1, 
Chufaniksa (Beloved people); 2, Isku- 
tani (Small people); 3, Chito (Largepeo¬ 
ple); 4, Shakchukla (Crayfish people). 
Besides these, mention is made of a gens 
named Urihesahe (Wright in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1843, 348), which has not been 
identified. Morgan’s list is probably far 
from complete. 

Following are names of Choctaw vil¬ 
lages: Alamucha, Alloou Loanshaw, Aya- 
nabi, Bayou Chicot, Bishkon, Bissasha, 
Bogue Toocola Chitto, Booctolooee, Bouc- 
fouca, Boutte Station, Cabea Hoola, Ca- 
hawba Old Towns, Cheponta’s Village, 
Chicasawhay, Chinakbi, Chishafoka, Chis- 
kelikbatcha, Chomontokali, Chooca Hoo¬ 
la, Chunkey, Chunkey Chitto, Coatraw, 
Coila, Concha, Conchachitou, Concha 
Consapa, Conchatikpi, Coosha, Coue- 
chitou, Cushtusha, Cutha Aimethaw, 
Cuthi Uckehaca, East Abeika, EbitaPoo- 
colo Chitto, Ebita Poocolo Skatane, Es- 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-19 


cooba, Etuck Chukke, Faluktabunnee, 
Haanka Ullah, Heitotowa, Hoola-tassa, 
Hopahka, Hushukwa,Hyukkeni,Ikatchi- 
ocata, Imongalasha, Imongalasha Ska¬ 
tane, InkillisTamaha, Kaffetal-iya, Lukfa, 
Lushapa, Mahewala, Nashwaiya,Okaalta- 
kala, Okachippo, Okacoopoly, Okahullo, 
Okakapassa, Okalusa, Okapoolo, Okata- 
laya, Okhatatalay a, Oktibbeha(?), Olitassa, 
Oony, Oskelagna, Osuktalaya, Otaksha- 
nabe, Panthe, Pineshuk, Pooscoostekale, 
Pooshapukanuk, Sapa Chitto, Sapeessa, 
Schekaha, Shanhaw, Shukhata, Shuqua- 
lak, Skanapa, Sukinatchi, Tala, Taliepa- 
taua, Talpahoka, Teeakhaily Ekutapa, 
Tombigbee, Tonicahaw, West Abeika, Wia 
Takali, Yagna Shoogawa, Yanatoe, Ya¬ 
zoo, Yazoo Skatane, Yowani. (j. k. s. C.T.) 
Ani'-Tsa'ta. Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 509, 
1900 (Cherokee name; sing. Tsa'ta ). Qa'-ta.— Dor¬ 
sey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage name). 
Chacatos. —Barcia, Ensayo, 313,1723. Chacktaws. — 
Jefferson (1781), Notes, 144, 1825. Chactah.— 
Rafinesque, Am. Nations, I, 241, 1836. Chac- 
tanys.—Ann. Propagation de la Foi, ii, 380, 1841. 
Chactas.—Parraud, Hist. Kentucke, 111, 1785. 
Chactaws.—Jefferys, French Dom., I, 153, 1761. 
Cha’hta.—Gatschet in American Antiq., iv, 76, 
1881-82. Chaktaws.—N. Y. Stat. at Large, Treaty 
of 1808, VII, 98, 1846. Chaltas. — Coxe, Caro- 
lana, map, 1741 (misprint). Chaqueta.—Iberville 
(1700) in Margry, D6c., IV, 463, 1880. Cha- 
quitas.—Ibid., 419. Chataw. — Rogers, North 
America, 204, 1765. Chat-Kas.—Du Pratz, Hist. 
La., ii, 216, 1758. Chatkaws.—Jefferys, French 
Dom., i, 165, 1761. Chattaes.—Coxe, Carolana, 
map, 1741. Chattas.—Ibid., 25. Chattoes.—Ibid., 
22. Chawetas.—Perrin du Lac, Voy., 368, 1805. 
Chectaws.—Morse, N.Am.,218,1776. Chicktaws.— 
Rogers,North America,203,1765. Chictaws. —Ibid., 
238. Chocataus.—Disturnell, map M6jico, 1846. 
Chocktaws.—Ellicott, Jour., 35, 1797. Chocta.— 
Latham (1844) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 
160, 1848. Choctaughs.—Catesby, Nat. Hist. Car., 
ii, xi, 1743. Choctaw.—French writer (ca. 1727) 
in Shea, Cath. Missions, 429, 1855. Choctos.— 
Domenech, Deserts, ii, 193, 1860. Choktah.—Bar¬ 
ton, New Views, 1,1798. Choktaus.—Am. Pioneer, 
i, 408, 1842. Choktaw.—Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 184,1816. Chouactas.—Martin, Hist, of La., 
i, 249, 1827. Chukaws.—Boudinot, op. cit., 126. 
Flat Heads.—Jefferys, French Dom., 135, map, 
1761. Flats.—Bartram, Travels, 515, 1791. Hen- 
ne'sh.—Gatschet, inf’n (Arapaho name). Nabug- 
gindebaig.—Tanner, Narrative, 316, 1830, (‘flat 
heads ’: the name given by the Ottawa to a tribe 
“said to have lived below the Illinois r.”; proba¬ 
bly Choctaw). Sanakiwa.—Gatschet, infn (Chey¬ 
enne name: ‘feathers sticking up above the 
ears’). Shacktaus.—Penhallow (1726) in N. H. 
Hist. Coll., 1sts., 79,1824. Shocktaus.—Niles (1760) 
in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th s., 332, 1861. Ta-qta.— 
Dorsey, Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Kwapa 
name). Tca-qta a n -ya-di.—Dorsey, Biloxi MS. 
Diet., B. A. E., 1892 (one of the Biloxi names). 
Tca-qta ha n -ya.—Ibid. (another Biloxi name). 
Tca-ta.—Ibid., Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 
(Kansa name). Tchactas.— Charlevoix, Voy. to 
N. A., Ii, 210, 1766. Tchatakes.—Margry, D6c., II, 
197, 1877. Tchiactas.—Bienville (1708) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist, IX, 925, 1855. Tetes Plates.—Pic- 
quet letter (1752) in Parkman, Montcalm and 
Wolfe, ii, 417,1884. Tsah-tu.—Grayson, Creek MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name). Tsaxta.— 
Muller, Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft, ii, pt. 
1,232,1882. Tschaktaer.— Ally (1712), Historie der 
Reisen, xvi, 1758. Tubbies.—Am. Notes and 
Queries, vm, 281, Apr. 16, 1892. 

Choctaw Capitale. On a French map of 
1777 this name appears on an affluent of 
Pascagoula r., Miss., e. of Yowani and 
Chicasawhay. On Philippeaux’s map 


290 


CHOG SET-CHOM A ATH 


[ B. A. E. 


of the English colonies in 1781 it is loca¬ 
ted w. of Yowani. Possibly identifiable 
with Inkillis, q. v. 

Chaetaw Capitaleo.—Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799 
(misprint). 

Chogset. A New England name of the 
dinner, blue perch, or burgall ( Ctenola - 
brus cseruleus ). Gerard (Sun, N. Y., July 
30, 1895) says the word means ‘it is 
flabby’, in Chippewa shagosi. Trumbull 
(Natick Diet., 30, 1903) derives chogset, 
in Pequot cachauxet, from chohchohkesit 
in the Massachuset dialect, signifying 
‘spotted’ or ‘striped,’ which is a much 
preferable etymology. (a. f. c.) 

Chohalaboohhulka. A former Seminole 
town on the w. side of Suwanee r., above 
its junction with the Alapaha, in Hamil¬ 
ton co., Fla.—H. P. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 
19th Cong., 27, 1826. 

Choinimni (pi. Chuyenmani). A Mari- 
posan tribe on Kings r., at or near the 
mouth of Mill cr., Cal. Powers calls 
them Chainimaini and says they lived 
downstream from the Tisechu and above 
the Iticha. Only a few families are left. 
Chai-nim'-ai-ni.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
in, 370, 1877. Chewenee.—Gatschet in Mag. Am. 
Hist., i58, 1877. Choemimnees.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Cho-e-nem-nee.—Royce in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. Choe-nim-ne. —Mer- 
riarn in Science, xix, 915, June 17, 1904. Cho-e- 
nim-nees.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 223, 1851. Choe-wem- 
nes.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., 1st sess., 23, 1852. Choo-nemnes.—Ibid., 22. 
Chow-e-nim-ne.—Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. Chunemmes.— 
Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 511,1854. 

Choinok. A small Mariposan tiibe, 
nearly extinct, which formerly inhabited 
the locality just s. of where the town of 
Visalia now stands, in Tulare co., Cal. 

Cho-e-nees.—Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 253, 1853. Cho-e-nuco.— 
Ibid., 254. Choinoc.—Garc6s (1775-76), Diary, 289, 
1900. Choinook.—Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76,34th Cong., 3d sess , 32,1857. Choi-nuck.— 
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. Choi- 
nucks.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. 

Chokatowela (‘ blue spot in the middle ’). 
A band of the Brul6 Teton Sioux. 

Choke-tar-to-womb.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 34, 
1806 (probably synonymous). Coka-towela.—Dor¬ 
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218,1897. Tcoka-towela.— 
Ibid. 

Chokishgna. A former Gabrieleno ran- 
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a local¬ 
ity later called Jaboneria. 

Chokisgna.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 
Chokishgna.—Ibid., June 11, 1861. 

Chokoukla. A former Seminole town 
on the w. side of Apalachicola r., 4 m. 
below the forks, in Florida. Mulatto 
King was chief in 1823.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 
74, 19th Cong. ,'27, 1826. 

Chokuyem. The name probably applied 
originally to a single village somewhere 
in Petaluma valley, Sonoma co., Cal. It 
gained a wider significance, being used by 
Gibbs to designate all the Indians in the 
region from San Rafael mission n. to 
Santa Rosa and e. to Suscol, and by others 


in a still broader sense as the name of a 
division of what they termed the Ola- 
mentke, and comprising all the Indians 
in Petaluma and Sonoma valleys. This 
latter broad significance is probably due 
to the association at Sonoma mission of 
the original Chokuyem people with those 
from various other villages, (s. a. b.) 
Chocouyem.—Latham (1853) in Proc. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., vi, 83,1854. Cho-ku-yen.—Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., in, 195, 1877. Petaluma.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. Petlenum.—Ibid. 
Tcho-ko-yem.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 421, 1853. Tshokoyem.—Latham in Trans. 
Philol. Soc. Lond., 1856. 

Cholicus. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Ines mission, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Cholocco, Litabixee (Chu-‘lako Ui-tapiksi 
‘horse’s flat foot.’—A. S. G.). A former 
Upper Creek village on a bend of Talla¬ 
poosa r., Ala., inthe river bottom, w r here, 
on Mar. 27, 1814, the defeat of the Red- 
stick party took place at the battle of the 
Horseshoe.—Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 341, 
1851. 

Cholosoc. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Cholovone. A tribe or group of tribes 
constituting a portion of the Mariposan 
family, inhabiting San Joaquin valley, 
Cal., and occupying a strip of territory 
along the e. bank of San Joaquin r. in the 
vicinity of Stockton, from the Tuolumne 
to about Calaveras r. They were thus 
separated by Moquelumnan tribes from 
the main body of the family farther s. 
Little is known about them, and they are 
probably extinct. A Yokuts vocabulary 
(Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 571, 
1877), from Takin or Dents Ferry on 
Stanislaus r., at the foot of the Sierra, 
may be from Cholovone territory. The 
following divisions or subtribes of the 
Cholovone are mentioned: Chupcan, Sa- 
wani, Yachikamni, Yachimese, and 
Yukolumni. The following are men¬ 
tioned as Cholovone villages: Bantas, 
Heluta, Hosmite, Khulpuni, Mitutra, 
Pashashe, Takin, Tammakan, and Tawi. 
Somewhat doubtful are Lakisuinne and 
Tuolumne, which may have been Mo¬ 
quelumnan. 

Cholobone.—Pinart, Yokuts MS., B. A. E., 1880. 
Cholovone.—Ibid. Tchalabones.—Chamisso in 
Kotzebue Voy., in, 51, 1821. Tcholoones.—Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, I, 453, 1874 (misquoted from 
Chamisso). Tcholovones.—Chamisso, op. cit. 

Cholupaha. A Timuquanan town in n. 
Florida, visited by De Soto’s troops in 
Aug., 1539, before reaching Aquacalecuen. 
They spoke of it as a villa farta, a town of 
plenty, because they found an abundance 
of Indian corn there.—drentl. of Elvas 
(1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 131, 
1850. 

Chomaath ( Tco'maath ). A sept of the 
Toquart, a Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890. 


BULL. 30] 


CHOMCHADILA-CHORRUCO 


291 


Chomchadila (* pitch-pine ’—Powers; or 
‘ white-pine ridge ’—Kroeber). A former 
Pomo village on the mesa s. w. of Calpella, 
Mendocino co., Cal. 

Choam-Cha-di'-la Pomo. —Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., ill, 155, 1877. 

Chomonchouaniste. A name given on 
several maps as that of a tribe formerly- 
living n. w. of L. St John, Quebec. Prob¬ 
ably a Montagnais band or settlement. 

Chemonchovanistes. —Esnauts and Rapilly map, 
1777. Chomonchouanistes. —Beilin map, 1755. 
Chomoncouanistes. —Lotter map, ca. 1755. Chomo- 
nehouanistes. —Lattr6 map, 1784. 

Chomontokali ( shomo-takali , ‘hanging 
moss ’). A former town of the Oypatukla 
or northeastern division of the Choctaw, 
consisting of 8 hamlets, with garden 
patches intervening, extending e. and 
w. about 2 m. and about J m. in width; 
situated between two head-streams of 
Black Water cr., in Kemper co., Miss. 
In 1830 the residence of Nita Homraa, 

‘ Red Bear,’ was in the third hamlet from 
the w., and about 1,200 yds. s. of the site 
of his house is a mound about 12 ft. high. 
The town was on the trail that extended 
e. and w. from Imongolasha to Haan- 
kaulla.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. 
Publ., vi, 418, 1902. 

Chomontakali. —Romans, Fla., map, 1775. Chomon¬ 
tokali. —West Fla. map, ca. 1775. Shomo Takali. — 
Halbert, op. cit. 

Chonacate.—A Huichol settlement at the 
e. border of their territory, in the Sierra 
de los Huicholes, Jalisco, Mexico.—Lum- 
holtz, Unknown Mex., ii, 16, map, 1902. 

Chonakera. The Black Bear gens of 
the Winnebago. 

Bear. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157,1877. Black bear. — 
Dorsey, MS. Winnebago vocab., B. A. E., 1878. 
Hone'-cha'-da.-— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157, 1877. 
Ho n tc' i-ki'-ka-ra'-tca-da. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. 
A. E., 240, 1897 (‘they who call themselves after 
the black bear’). Tco'-na-ke-ra. —Ibid, (archaic 
name). 

Chongasketon. A division of the Sisse- 
ton Sioux, identified by Riggs as the Lac 
Traverse band; possibly the same as the 
Sisseton proper of Pike; applied by early 
writers to the whole tribe and interpreted 
Wolf or Dog nation, though now recog¬ 
nized as a form of the word Sisseton. 
Chongaskabes. —Barcia, Ensayo, 238, 1723. Chon- 
gaskabion.— Hennepin quoted by Neill in Minn. 
Hist. Coll., 1, 257,1872. Chongaskethon. —Hennepin 
quoted by Shea, Early Voy. Miss., Ill, 1861. Chon- 
asketon.— Hennepin, New Discov., 185, 1698. 
hongonsceton.— Neill, op. cit., 260 (misprint). 
Chongousceton. —Carver, Trav., 80, 1778. Chonkas- 
ketonwan. —Williamson quoted by Neill, op. cit., 
260 (interpreted ‘dwellersin a fort’ and applied 
to the Sisseton of L. Traverse). Chonsgaskaby.— 
Hennepin, New Discov., map, 1698. Chougaska- 
bees. —McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 80, 
1854. Chougasketon. —La Salle (1679-81) in Margry, 
D6c., i, 481, 1876. Cnongasgaba.— Coxe, Carolana, 
map, 1741 (misprint). Conkasketonwan, —Riggs, 
Dakota Gram, and Diet., introd., ix, 1852. 

Chongyo. The Pipe clan of the Piba 
(Tobacco) phratry of the Hopi. 

Tcoh-o .—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 
Tcoii wuh-wix. —Fewkes in Am. Antlirop., Vll, 
405, 1894 (umn-vni = ‘ clan ’). 


Chonodote (perhaps tyohnodote,’ ‘where 
a spring issues.’—Hewitt). A former 
Cayuga settlement located on Machin’s 
map of Sullivan’s expedition (Conover, 
MS., B. A. E.) on the e. side of Cayuga 
lake, a few miles s. of the present Cayuga, 
N. Y. It was probably destroyed by 
Sullivan in 1779. 

Chonque. Probably a Choctaw band on 
Yazoo r., Miss., below the Tioux, in the 
17th century. See Chunkey. 

Chenkus.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 
80, 1854. Chongue.—Coxe, Carolana, 12, 1741. 
Chonque.—Tonti (1690) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
82, 1846. 

Chooahlitsh. A former Samish settle¬ 
ment in the canoe passage e. of Hidalgo 
id., n. w. Wash. 

Choo-ah-litsh.—Gibbs, MS. no. 248, B. A. E. 

Chooca Hoola (chuka ‘house,’ ‘lodge,’ 
hullo ‘ beloved ’). A former Choctaw set¬ 
tlement on the n. side of Sukenatcha cr., 
between the mouths of Running Tiger 
and Straight crs., in the n. part of Kemper 
Co., Miss.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. 
Publ., vi, 425, 1902. 

Chooca Hoola.—Romans, Florida, map, 1775. 
Chooka-hoola.—Ibid, 310. 

Choppatee’s Village. A former Miami 
village on the w. bank of St Joseph r., a 
few miles from Ft Wayne, Allen co., Ind. 
Named after a chief who resided there. 
The tract was granted to J. B. Boure, an 
interpreter, by treaty of Oct. 23, 1826. 

Choptank. Apparently a tribe consist¬ 
ing of 3 subtribes—the Ababco, Hutsa- 
wap, and Tequassimo—formerly living 
on Choptank r. in Maryland. In 1741 
they were given a reserve near Secretary 
cr., on the s. side of Choptank r., in Dor¬ 
chester co., on the Eastern shore, where 
a few of mixed Indian and negro blood 
still remained in 1837. See Bozman, 
Maryland, l, 115, 1837. 

Chorofa (‘bird’). A clan of the Apo- 
hola phratry of the ancient Timucua of 
Florida.—Pareja (1614) quoted by Gat- 
schetinProc. Am. Philos. Soc., xvn, 492, 
1878. 

Choromi. A Costanoan village formerly 
situated near Santa Cruz mission, Cal.— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Chorruco. A tribe, formerly on the 
Texas coast, to whom Cabeza de Yaca 
fled from the Coaque with whom he had 
lived nearly a year after shipwreck on 
Malhado id. in 1528. The people, he 
said, took their name from the woods in 
which they lived. He stayed with this 
tribe about 6 years, traveling and trading 
with others in the vicinity and inland. 
The region was probably the home of the 
Karankawan family at that time. The 
Chorruco are now extinct. See Gatschet, 
Karankawa Indians, Peabody Museum 
Papers, i, 46, 1891. (a. c. f. ) 

Carruco.—Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, 802, 1705. 
Charruco,—Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 53,1851. 


292 


CHOSRO-CHOWCHILLA 


[B. a. e. 


Chorruco.—Ibid.,84. Chorucco.—Smith, Cabezade 
Vaca, index, 1871. Choruico.—Latham, Elem. 
Comp. Philol., 466, 1862. 

Chosho. A Chumashan village formerly 
on Santa Cruz id., Cal., probably e. of 
Prisoner’s harbor. 

Tcb-co.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,B. 

A. E.,1884. 

Chosro. The Bluebird clan of the Hopi. 
Choro.—Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi Ceremo¬ 
nies, 175, 1902. Chorzh.—Voth, Oraibi Summer 
Snake Ceremony, 283,1903. Chorzh-namu.—Voth, 
Trad, of the Hopi, 37, 1905. Tco'-ro wiin-wii. — 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 1894 ( wiin-wii 
= ‘clan’). Tcosro winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. 

B. A. E., 584,1900. Tco'-zir.—Stephen in 8th Rep. 
B. A. E., 38,1891 (given as the Jay clan). 

Chotanksofkee (tchat aksofka ‘preci¬ 
pice’). A town situated 1 m. s. w. of 
Eufaula, in the Creek Nation, Ind. Ter. 
(H. R. Doc. 80, 27th Cong., 3d sess., 8, 
1843). In the old Creek country there 
was formerly a settlement of the same 
name, probably near Abikudshi, e. of 
upper Coosa r., Ala. (a. s. g.) 

Choupetoulas. A village formerly on 
the left bank of the Mississippi, 2 or 3 
leagues above New Orleans; spoken of 
by Penicaut in 1718 as old and apparently 
abandoned. The name of the people, 
who were possibly of Choctaw affinity, is 
perpetuated in that of a street in New 
Orleans. (a. s. g. ) 

Chapitoulas.—Dumont, La., I, 13, 1753. Choupi- 
toulas.—Penicaut (1718) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., 141,1869. Tchoupitoulas.—French, Hist. Coll. 
La., in, 59, note, 1851. 

Choutikwuchik (Pima: Tcd'Cittk Wu'tclk , 
‘charcoal laying’). A former village of 
the Maricopa, in s. Arizona, which was 
abandoned by its inhabitants on their 
removal down the Gila to their present 
location below Gila crossing. It was 
then occupied by the Pima, who in turn 
abandoned it.—Russell, MS., B. A. E., 
16, 1902. 

Chowanoc (Algonquian: shawtiri*' ‘south’; 
shaivunogi ‘they of the south,’ ‘southern¬ 
ers. ’—W. J.). A tribe formerly living on 
Chowan r.,N. e. N. C., about the junc¬ 
tion of Meherrin and Nottoway rs. In 
1584-85, when first known, they were the 
leading tribe in that region. Two of 
their villages at that time were Ohanoak 
and Maraton, and they probably occupied 
also Catoking and Metocaum. Ohanoak 
alone was said to have 700 warriors. They 
gradually dwindled away before the 
whites, and in 1701 were reduced to a sin¬ 
gle village on Bennetts cr. They joined in 
the Tuscarora war against the whites in 
1711-12, and at its close the remnant, esti¬ 
mated at about 240, were assigned a small 
reservation on Bennetts and Catherine 
crs. In 1820 they were supposed to be 
extinct. In addition to the settlements 
named, the Chowanoc also occupied Ra- 
mushonok. (j. m.) 

Chawanock.— Barlow (1584) in Smith (1629), Vir¬ 
ginia, I, 84, repr. 1819. Chawanook.—Greenville 


(1585) in Hawks, N. C., I, 112, 1859. Chawon- 
acks.— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 15, 1871. 
Chawonests.— Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Vir¬ 
ginia, I, 88, repr. 1819. Chawonoack. —Ibid., 87, 
90. Chawonock. —Ibid. Chawonoks. —Ibid. Cha- 
wons. —Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
i, 1856. Chawoon.— Horne, map (1666) in Hawks, 
N. C., II, 1858. Chawwonocks. —Smith (1629), op. 
cit., I, 75, repr. 1819. Chawwonoke.— Pots, ibid., 
230. Choan.— Doc of 1653 in N. C. Rec., I, 17, 1886. 
Choanists. —Lane (1586) in Hakluyt, Voy., m, 314, 
repr.1810. Chowah.— Latham, Elem.Comp.Philol., 
466,1862. Chowan,— Doc. of 1663 in N. C. Rec., I, 54, 
1886. Chowane. —Ibid.,55. Chowanoake. —Doc. of 
1707, ibid., 657. Chowanocs.— Jefferson, Notes, 
129, 1825. Chowanok. —Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. 
Chowanooke. —Strachey (ca . 1612), Virginia, 143, 
1849. Chowou. —Lawson (1710), Hist. Car., 353, 
repr. 1860(misprintforChuwon). Chuwon. —Ibid., 
383. Shawan. — Lederer (1670) in Hawks, N. C., II, 
45, 1858 (used as a synonym for Roanoke r.) 

Chowchilla. A name applied in various 
forms to'two distinct divisions of Cali¬ 
fornia, one belonging to the Miwok (Mo- 
quelumnan family), the other to the 
Yokuts (Mariposan family). The former 
lived on the upper waters of Fresno and 
Chowchilla rs., and the latter, properly 
called Chaushila (q.v.), probably on lower 
Chowchilla r., in the plains and lowest 
foothills. Recorded under many forms 
of the same name from the time of the 
gold excitement, the two divisions have 
been inextricabl y confused. A treaty was 
made with them and numerous other 
tribes Apr. 29, 1851, by which a tract be¬ 
tween Chowchilla and Kaweah rs. was 
reserved for their use. At this time the 
Yokuts Chowchilla, or Chaushila, to¬ 
gether with the Howeches, Chukchansi, 
Pohoniche, and Nukchu were said to be 
under a single chief called Naiyakqua. 
The Miwok division, apparently, were 
considered the most powerful and w arlike 
people of that region, and to them was 
attributed the greater part of the hos¬ 
tilities, murders, and robberies that had 
occurred, although this arraignment is 
probably due to nothing more than the 
defense by the Indians of themselves and 
their homes against the depredations of 
lawdess whites. These numbered only 85 
in 1857. The reservation w as abandoned 
by 1859, and a smaller one, w. of Madera, 
was set aside; this, how r ever, was seem¬ 
ingly never confirmed. There are some 
survivors of the Miwok Chowchilla living 
along the upper waters of the stream that 
bears their name. 

Chau-chiP-Ia.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., nr, 
349, 1877. Chouchillas. —Barbour et al. (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc.4,32dCong.,spec.sess., 61,1853. Chou- 
chille.— Johnston (1851),ibid.,65. Chou-chillies.— 
McKee et al. (1851), ibid., 74. Chow-chi-la. —Wes- 
sells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d 
sess., 30, 1857. Chow-chi-liers. —Johnston in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Chow- 
chillas.— Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 399, 1858. 
Chowchille.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 64,1853. Chow-chill-ies.— 
McKee et al. in Ind. Aff. Rep., 223, 1851. Chow- 
clas.— Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 512, 1854. Cow- 
chillas.— Beale (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., 
spec, sess., 378, 1853. 


BULL. 30] 


CHOWIGNA-CHUOHUNAYHA 


293 


Chowigna. A Gabrieleno rancheria for¬ 
merly at Palos Verdes, Los Angeles co., 
Cal.—Hied (1852) quoted by Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 

TJnaungna.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (Luiseno name). 

Choye. A village, mentioned by Tonti 
(French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 72, 1846) in 
1690, as near the settlements of the Yatasi 
on Red r., in the n. w. part of what is 
now Louisiana. The people were said to 
be hostile to the Kadohadacho, perhaps 
some passing quarrel. From its associa¬ 
tion with the Yatasi and Natasi, the vil¬ 
lage was probably inhabited by a sub¬ 
division of one of the Caddo tribes. The 
subsequent history of the settlement is not 
known; its inhabitants were probably 
scattered among their kindred during the 
contentions of the 18th century, later 
becoming extinct. (a. c. f. ) 

Chaye.—Margry, D6c., in, 409, 1878. Choye.— 
Tonti (1690) in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 72, 
1846. 

Choyopan (‘ moving the eyelids or eye- 
brows’). A Tonkawa clan. 

Tchoyopan.—Gatschet, Tonkawe vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Chozetta. Mentioned in 1699 by Iber¬ 
ville (Margry, Dec., iv, 154,193,195, 311, 
1880), who, after speaking of the “nation 
of the Annocchy and Moctobi” (q. v.), 
says: “ They told me of a village of their 
neighbors, the Chozettas; they are on a 
river whose entrance is 9 leagues to the 
e., which they call Pascoboulas.” In 
Gatschet’s opinion the people of this vil¬ 
lage were Choctaw. 

Christanna Indians. A group of Siouan 
tribes of Virginia, which were collected 
for a time in the early years of the 18th 
century at Ft Christanna, on Meherrin 
r., near* the present Gholsonville, Va. 
Gov. Spotswood settled these tribes there 
about 1700 in the belief that they would 
form a barrier on that side against hos¬ 
tile Indians. The tribes were the Mei- 
pontsky, Occaneechi, Saponi, Stegaraki, 
and Tutelo. See Mooney, Siouan Tribes 
of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. 

Christanna Indians.—N. Y. Council minutes cited 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 671, note, 1855. 
Christian Indians.—Albany conf. (1722), ibid., 671. 
Todirichroones.— Ibid., 673 (Iroquois name). 

Christianshaab. A Moravian missionary 
station among the Eskimo near Spring 
bay, w. Greenland.—Crantz, Hist. Green¬ 
land, i, 13, 1820. 

Cbua. The Snake phratry of the Hopi, 
comprising the following clans: Chua 
(Snake), Tohouh (Puma), Huwi (Dove), 
Ushu (Columnar cactus), Puna (Cactus 
fruit), Yungyu (Opuntia), Nabowu (Opun- 
tia frutescens), Pi v wani (Marmot), Pihcha 
(Skunk), Kalashiauu (Raccoon). The 
Tubish (Sorrow), Patung (Squash), A toko 
(Crane), Kele (Pigeonhawk), and Chi- 
nunga (Thistle) clans also belonged to this 
phratry, but are now extinct. According 
to tradition this people came from a 


place called Tokonabi, about the junction 
of San Juan and Colorado rs., and were 
the second migratory body to reach 
Tusayan. See Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., 
vii, 402, 1894, and in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 

582, 1901. 

Tcu'-a nyu-mu.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 
402, 1894 (nyti-mu=‘ phratry’). Tcuin nyumu.— 
Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 35,1891. 

Chua. The Rattlesnake clan of the 
Chua (Rattlesnake) phratry of the Hopi. 
Chia.—Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Tcu.— 
Yoth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 282, 1903. 
Tcu'-a.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 38, 1891. 
Tcua.—Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi Ceremo¬ 
nies, 174,1902. Tcua winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 582, 1901 (miiwft=‘clan’). Tcu'-a-wun- 
wii.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 402, 1894 
(vmn-wii= < clan ’). 

Chuah. A former Chumashan village 
at La Goleta, 6 m. from Santa Barbara 
mission, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 4, 1860. 

Chuarlitilik. A deserted Kuskwogmiut 
Eskimo village on Kanektok r., Alaska.— 
Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1901. 

Chuba. A Papago village in s. Arizona; 
pop. about 250 in 1863.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
385, 1863. 

Chubio. The Antelope clan of the Ala 
(Horn) phratry of the Hopi. 

Tc'ib-io.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 38, 1891. 
Tciibio winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 

583, 1901. Tciib'-i-yo wiin-wii.—Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop., vii, 401,1894 ( wun-vm =‘ clan ’). 

Chubkwichalobi (Hopi: ‘antelope notch 
place’). A group of ruined pueblos on 
the hills above Chaves pass, 20 m. s. w. 
of Winslow, Ariz., claimed by the Hopi 
to have been built and occupied by some 
of their clans. Excavations by the Bu¬ 
reau of American Ethnology in 1897 re¬ 
vealed mortuary objects practically iden¬ 
tical in character with those found in the 
valleys of the Verde and the Gila to the 
southward, thus indicating a common 
origin. See Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 
32, 1904. 

Chaves Pass ruin.—Fewkes, ibid. Jettipehika.— 
Ibid. (Navaho name, with same meaning). 
Tciibkwitcalobi.—Ibid. (Hopi name). 

Chucalissa (‘ great town ’). One of the 
former Chickasaw settlements in n. Mis¬ 
sissippi, probably in Pontotoc or Dallas co. 

Chickalina.—West Fla. map, ca. 1775. Chook’heer- 
eso.—Adair, Am. Inds., 353, 1775. Chucalissa.— 
Romans, Florida, I, 63, 1775. 

Chuchictac. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chuchtononeda. A Mohawk division 
formerly occupying the s. side of Mohawk 
r., N. Y., from Schenectady almost to 
Schoharie cr. (Macauley, N. Y., ii, 295, 
1829). Their principal village probably 
bore the same name. 

Chuchunayha. A body of Okinagan, of 
the Similkameen group, in s. w. British 
Columbia; pop. 52 in 1901. 


294 


CHUCKCHU QUA LK-CHUK AI 


[b. a. e. 


Cheh-chewe-hem.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1883, 191. 
Chuchunayha.—Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 166. Chuchu- 
wayha.—Ibid., 1894, 278. 

Chuckchuqualk (‘ red place’). A Shus- 
wap village on North Thompson r., Brit. 
Col.; pop. 129 in 1902. 

Chakehuqualk.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1894, 277, 1895. 
Chuchuqualk.—Ibid., 244, 1902. Chukchukualk,— 
Ibid., 1892, 312, 1893. Chuk-chu-quaeh-u.—Ibid., 
1885, 196, 1886. Chukchuqualk.—Ibid., 1886, 230, 
1887. North River.—Ibid., 78,1878. North Thomp¬ 
son.—Ibid., 74, 1878. Tsuk-tsuk-kwalk'.—Dawson 
in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 44,1891. 

Chucktin. The southernmost Tilla¬ 
mook village on a creek emptying into 
Tillamook bay, n. w. Oreg., in 1805. 

Chucklin.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, 148, 1817. 
Chuck-tins.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 71, 
1905. 

Chueachiki (‘ snouts ’). A Tarahumare 
rancheria in Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lum- 
holtz, inf n, 1894. 

Chuemdu. A Nishinam village formerly 
existing in the valley of Bear r., Cal. 
Che'-em-duh.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
316, 1877. 

Chueskweskewa (‘snipe’). A gens of 
the Chippewa. (j. m. ) 

Chufaniksa ( Chu-fan-ik'-sa , ‘beloved 
people ’). A Choctaw clan of the Wataki- 
hulata phratry.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 162, 
1878. 

Chuga ( Tdu'uga , ‘ to go for cedar 

planks ’). A Haida town of the Gunghet- 
gitunai, near Houston Stewart channel 
and the abandoned town of Ninstints, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.—Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Chugachigmiut. An Eskimo tribe occu¬ 
pying the territory extending from the w. 
extremity of Kenai penin. to the delta of 
Copper r., Alaska, and lying between the 
Kaniagmiut and Ugalakmiut. The Uga- 
lakmiut have been almost absorbed by 
the Tlingit, who are encroaching on 
the Chugachigmiut also, who are now 
poor, although blubber, salmon, cod, hali¬ 
but, ptarmigan, marmot, and bear are 
obtained in abundance, and occasion¬ 
ally a mountain sheep. The sea otter 
has become scarce, but silver fox and 
other fur-bearing animals are hunted and 
trapped, and the fish canneries afford em¬ 
ployment. The hair seal is abundant, 
furnishing covers for the kaiaks as well 
as meat, blubber, and oil. The tribe 
numbered 433 in 1890. Their villages 
are Ingamatsha, Ivanikluk, Kiniklik, 
Nuchek, and Tatitlek. 

Choogaks.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 29, 1874. 
Chuga.— Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, map, 1877. 
Chugach.—Petroff in Am. Nat., xvi, 568, 1882. 
Chugachigmiut.—11th Census, Alaska, 66, 1893. 
Chugach'ig-mut. —Dali, op. cit., 20. Chugachimute. -- 
Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 164, 1884. Chugacki- 
mute.—Ibid., map. Chugatch.—Petroff in Internat. 
Rev., xn, 113, 1882. Tatliakhtana.—Petroff, 10th 
Census, Alaska. 164, 1884 (so called by Kinai). 
Tschugatschi.—Humboldt, New Spain, II, 393,1811. 
Tschugazzes.—Rink in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., xv, 
240,1885. Tschugazzi.—Prichard, Phys. Hist., v, 
371, 1847. Tshugazzi.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., ir, 14, 1836. 

Chugita (‘edge of a precipice’). A 
Tarahumare rancheria of about 30 fami¬ 


lies, not far from Norogachic, Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Chugnut. A small tribe living, about 
1755, under Iroquois protection in a vil¬ 
lage of the same name on the s. side of 
Susquehanna r., opposite Binghamton, 
Broome co., N. Y. In 1758 they were 
on the Susquehanna with the Nanticoke, 
Conoy, and Tutelo. Choconut cr. takes 
its name from the tribe. Conoy, Ma- 
hican, Nanticoke, Shawnee, and probably 
Munsee bands also resided there, and the 
name may have been a local, not a tribal, 
designation. (j. m.) 

Chaghnutt. —Ft Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vn, 50,1856. Chagnet. —Imlay, W. Ter., 
291,1797. Chucknutts. —Ft Johnson conf., op. cit., 
172. Chugants. —Doc. of 1759 quoted by Rupp, 
Northampton Co., 50, 1845. Chughnot. —German 
Flats conf. (1770) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 243, 
1857. Chugnues. —Macauley, N. Y., II, 166, 1829. 
Chugnuts. —Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 201,1872. 

Chuhhla (‘blackbird’). A Chickasaw 
clan of the Ishpanee phratry. 

Chuh-hla. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Tchu’- 
hla. —Gatschet, (’reek Migr. Leg., 1,96, 1884. 

Chuhuirari ( Chu-hwV-ra-ri, from a term 
meaning ‘ the dead ones ’). A rancheria, 
with a cave dwelling containing a single 
Tarahumare family, not far from Noro¬ 
gachic, Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, 
inf’n, 1894. 

Chuitna. A Knaiakliotana village on 
Cook inlet, Alaska, at the mouth of 
Chuit r. 

Chuitna. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Shu- 
itna. —Ibid. 

Chukafalaya ( Chukafdldya, ‘longtown’). 
A former Chickasaw settlement, covering 
a district 4 m. long and a mile wide, in 
1720, and forming one of the geographic 
divisions of the tribe. Adair states that 
it had more people in 1775 than the whole 
Chickasaw Nation in 1740. Several vil¬ 
lages composed this settlement, which 
probably was in Pontotoc or Dallas co., 
Miss. (a. s. g). 

Chattafallai. —Hearrt in Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., 
Ill, 217, 1793. Chookka Pharaah. —Adair, Am. 
Ind., 353, 1775. Chukafalaya. —Romans, Fla., 63, 
1775. Long House Town. —Adair, Am. Ind., 354, 
1775. Long Town.— Blount (1792) in Am. State 
Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 288, 1832. 

Chukahlako (‘great house’). (1) A for¬ 
mer Lower Creek town on Chattahoochee 
r., Ala. In 1799 the inhabitants had aban¬ 
doned the place and moved to Oakfuskee, 
on the opposite side of Tallapoosa r. 
There is a Choccolocco post-office in Ala¬ 
bama on Choccolocco cr. (2) Mentioned 
in a census of 1832 as an Upper Creek 
town with 109 families.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 578,1854. (a. s. g.) 

Chau-kethluc-co.— Hawkins (1799),Sketch, 45,1848. 
Chockalocha.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st 
sess., 315, 1836. Chockalock. —Ibid., 312. Chocke- 
clucca. —Bartram, Travels, 463, 1791. Chocko- 
locko. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 
220, 1836. Tchuka ‘lako. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 146, 1884. Thlcocotcho. —Gallatin in Ar- 
chaeol. Am., 112, 1836. 

Chukai. The Mud clan of the Lizard 
(Earth or Sand) phratry of the Hopi. 
Tcu'-kai.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 


BULL. 30] 


CHUKAIMINA-CHULUFTCHI 


295 


Chukaimina. A Mariposan tribe for¬ 
merly near Kings r., Cal. According to 
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 370, 
1877) they were in Squaw valley, Fresno 
co., and here Merriam found a few fami¬ 
lies in 1903. 

Cho-co-men-as. —Johnston in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., 1st sess., 23,1852. Cho-ke-me-nes.— Barbour 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32(1 Cong., spec, sess., 252,1853. 
Cho-ke-min-nah. —Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. Cho-kem-nies. — 
Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 399, 1858. Chokia- 
mauves. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 456, 1874 (mis¬ 
quoted from Taylor). Chokimauves.— Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. Cho-ki-me-nas. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 223,1851. Cho-ki'-min-ah.— Merriam in 
Science, xix, 915, 1904. Chu-kai'-mi-na. —Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 370, 1877. 

Chukanedi (‘ bush or grass people ’). A 
clan among the Huna division of the Tlin- 
git, belonging to the Wolf phratry. An¬ 
ciently they are said to have stood low in 
the social scale. Their principal emblem 
was the porpoise. 

Tcu'kAnedi.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Tschukane'di.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118,1885. 

Chukchagemiut. A subdivision of the 
Chnagmiut Eskimo whose chief village is 
Chukchuk, on the Yukon delta, Alaska. 
Chukchag'emut.— Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 17, 
1877 (the people). Chukchuk. —Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1901 (the village). 

Chukchansi. A Mariposan tribe, form¬ 
ing one of the northern divisions of the 
family, the remnants of which now oc¬ 
cupy the foothill country between Fresno 
cr. on the n. and San Joaquin r. on the s., 
from a little above Fresno Flat down to 
the site of old Millerton, Cal. (Merriam 
in Science, xix, 915, June 17, 1904). In 
1861 they were on Fresno reserve and 
numbered 240. Naiakawe, a noted 
prophet about 1854, was a member of this 
tribe, and Sloknich was chief about the 
same time. (a. l. k.) 

Choocchanceys. —Lewis in Ind. Ail. Rep. 1856, 256, 
1857. Chook-cha,n-cie. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. 
E., 822, 1899. Chook-chancy. —Johnston (1851) ill 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 64, 1853. 
Chook-cha-nees. —Barbour (1852), ibid., 252. Chook- 
chau-ces. —McKee et al. (1851), ibid., 74. Chook- 
chaw-ces. —McKee et al. in Ind. Aff. Rep., 223, 
1851. Chook-chuncy, —Savage (1851) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 231, 1853. Choot- 
chancers. —Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 
32d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Chuckehalins. —Bar¬ 
bour et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., 
spec, sess., 61,1853. Chuk-chan'-cy.— Merriam in 
Science, xix, 915, June 17, 1904. Chuk'-chan-si. — 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 370, 1877. 
Chu-ke-chan-se. —Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 30, 1857. Cookchaneys. — 
Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 512, 1854. Cove-chan¬ 
ces. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 219, 1861. Suksanchi. —Kroe- 
ber, inf’n, 1903 (Yaudanchi name). 

Chukchukts. A Squawmish village 
community on the left bank of Squaw- 
misht r., Brit. Col. 

Tcuk-tcuk’ts.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S.,474 
1900. 

Chukela. A Yuit Eskimo village in 
Siberia, w. of C. Chukoshki.—Jackson, 
Reindeer in Alaska, map, 145, 1894. 

Chukeu ( Tcuqle-u', 1 mouth of the 
tide’). A Haida town on the s. w. coast 


of Moresby id., n. w. Brit. Col., said 
to have been so named from an inlet in 
and out of which the tide rushes with 
great force. It was occupied by the 
Sakikegawai, a family of Ninstints.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Chukhuiyathl. A Kuitsh village on 
lower Umpqua r., Oreg. 

Tc’u-qu'-i-yapl'. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 231, 1890. 

Chukkilissa. One of five hamlets com¬ 
posing the former Choctaw town of 
Imongalasha, in the present Neshoba co., 
Miss.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
vi, 432, 1902. 

Chukotalgi (‘toad’). An extinct Creek 
clan, closely affiliated with the Toad or 
Sopaktalgi clan. 

Tchukotalgi. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 
1884. Tsuxodi. —Ibid. 

Chukubi. A traditional settlement situ¬ 
ated a mile n. e. of Shipaulovi, n. e. Ari¬ 
zona. It was occupied by the Squash, 
Sand, and other clans of the Hopi, who 
were afterward joined by the Spider clan. 
Being harassed by enemies, among them 
the Ute and the Apache, it was aban¬ 
doned, its inhabitants joining those of 
old Mashongnovi in building the present 
Mashongnovi pueblo. 

Chukubi. —Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. 
A. E., 25, 58, 1891; Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
538,1898. Chukuvi. —Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 
40, 1905. 

Chukukh. A Kuitsh village on lower 
Umpqua r., Oreg. 

Tc’u-kukq'. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
23L 1890. 

Chula (‘fox’). A former Yazoo tribe, 
confederated with the Chickasaw, on or 
near the headwaters of Yazoo r., Miss. 
A village called Tehula is now in Holmes 
co., Miss. 

Chola. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 99, 1884. 
Choula. —La Harpe (1721) in French, Hist. Col 1 . 
La., in, 106, 1851. Foxes. —Gatschet, op. cit. 
Tehula. —Ibid. 

Chulare. A former village of the Cha- 
lone division of the Costanoan family, 
situated in the vicinity of the present 
Guadalupe rancho, near Soledad mission, 
Cal. Chualar, a post-office in Salinas 
valley, is probably the same name. 

Achulares. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 
Chulares. —Ibid. 

Chulik. A fishing station of the Nuni- 
vagmiut on Nunivak id., Alaska. Pop. 
62 in 1890, comprising two villages called 
Chuligmiut and Upper Chuligmiut (11th 
Census, Alaska, 114). 

Chulithltiyu. A Yaquina village on the 
s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 

Tcul-lipl'-ti-yu. —Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 229, 1890. 

Chulufichi. A phratry of the ancient 
Timucua of Florida. Its clans were 
Arahasomi, Habachaca, and several oth¬ 
ers not recorded.—Pareja (1614) quoted 
by Gaschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xvii, 492, 1878. 


'296 


CHUM ASH—CHUM ASH AN FAMILY 


[b. a. k. 


Chumasli. The Santa Rosa islanders, of 
the Chumashan family of California.— 
Bowers in Smithson. Rep., 316, 1877. 
Tcumac.—Henshaw, Santa Rosa MS. vocab., B. 

A. E., 1884. 

Chumashan Family. A linguistic family 
on the coast of s. California, known also as 
Santa Barbara Indians. Like most Cali¬ 
fornian aborigines, they appear to have 
lacked an appellation of general signifi¬ 
cance, and the term Chumash, the name 
of the Santa Rosa islanders, is arbitrarily 
chosen for convenience to designate the 
linguistic stock. Seven dialects of this 
family are known, those of San Luis 
Obispo, Purfsima, Santa Inez, Santa 
Barbara, and San Buenaventura mis¬ 
sions, and of Santa Rosa and Santa 
Cruz ids. These are fairly similar ex¬ 
cept the San Luis Obispo, which stands 
apart. It is probable that there were 
other dialects. The Chumashan lan¬ 
guages show certain morphologic re¬ 
semblances to the adjacent Shoshonean 
and Salinan, especially the latter, but 
constitute an independent family, as their 
stock of words is confined to themselves. 
The territorial limits of the Chumashan 
Indians are not accurately known. The 
area shown on Powell’s map (7th Rep. 

B. A. E., 1891) includes the entire Santa 
Maria r. drainage, Santa Inez r., the 
lower half of the Santa Clara r. drain¬ 
age, and Somis cr., the e. boundary line 
on the coast lying between Pt Dume 
and Santa Monica. Since the language 
of San Luis Obispo was Chumashan, this 
region n. of the Santa Maria and s. of 
the Salinas drainage must be added (see 
the linguistic maps accompanying the 
articles California Indians and Linguistic 
Families). The northern of the Santa 
Barbara ids. (Santa Cruz, Santa Rosa, and 
San Miguel) were inhabited by the Chu¬ 
mash, but the 3 southern islands of the 
group belonged to Shoshonean people. 

The Chumashan Indians, both of the 
islands and of the coast, were visited by 
Europeans as early as 1542, when Ca- 
brillo spent some time in their territory, 
meeting with an exceedingly friendly re¬ 
ception. Vizcayno in 1602 and Portola 
in 1769 also came in contact with them, 
and have left accounts of their visits. 
Five missions were established by the 
Franciscans among the Chumash; those 
of San Luis Obispo, San Buenaventura, 
Santa Barbara, Purfsima, and Santa Inez, 
founded respectively in 1771, 1782, 1786, 
1787, and 1804, the missionaries meeting 
with little opposition and no forcible re¬ 
sistance. The early friendship for the 
Spaniards soon changed to a sullen hatred 
under their rule, for in 1810 it was re¬ 
ported by a missionary that nearly all 
the Indian women at Purfsima had for 
a time persistently practised abortion, 


and in 1824 the Indians at Santa Bar¬ 
bara, Santa Inez, and Purfsima revolted 
against the mission authority, which they 
succeeded in shaking off for a time, 
though the Spaniards apparently suffered 
no loss of life at their hands. Even dur¬ 
ing mission times the Chumash de¬ 
creased greatly in numbers, and in 1884 
Henshaw found only about 40 individ¬ 
uals. This number has been reduced to 
less than half, the few survivors being 
largely “Mexicanized,” and the race is 
extinct on the islands. 

In character and habits the Chumash 
differed considerably from the other In¬ 
dians of California. All the early voy¬ 
agers note their friendliness and hos¬ 
pitality, and their greater affluence and 
abundance of food as compared with 
their neighbors. They appear to have 
had a plentiful supply of sea food and to 
have depended on it rather than on the 
vegetal products which usually formed 
the subsistence of California Indians. 
With the islanders this was no doubt a 
necessity. Their houses were of grass or 
tule, dome-shaped, and often 50 ft. or 
more in diameter, accommodating as 
many as 50 people. Each was inhabited 
by several families, and they were grouped 
in villages. The Chumash were noted 
for their canoes, which were not dug out 
of a single log, but made of planks lashed 
together and calked. Most were built for 
only 2 or 3 men, but some carried 10 and 
even 13 persons. As no canoes were found 
anywhere else on the coast from C. San 
Lucas to C. Mendocino, even where suit¬ 
able wood is abundant, rafts or tule 
balsas taking their place, the well-built 
canoes of the Chumash are evidence of 
some ethnographic specialization. The 
same may be said of their carved wooden 
dishes and of the figures painted on posts, 
described as erected over graves and at 
places of worship. On the Santa Barbara 
ids. stone killer-whale figurines have been 
found, though almost nowhere else in 
California are there traces of even at¬ 
tempted sculpture. An unusual variety 
of shell ornaments and of work in 
shell inlaid by means of asphaltum also 
characterize the archeologic discoveries 
made in Chumashan territory. Large 
stone jars similar to those in use among 
the neighboring Shoshoneans, and coiled 
baskets somewhat similar to those of 
their southern neighbors, were made 
by the Chumash. Their general culture 
has been extensively treated by Putnam 
(Wheeler, Survey Rep., vn, 1879). Of their 
religion very little is known, and nothing 
of their mythology.. The gentile system 
was not recognized by them, marriage 
between individuals of the same village 
being allowed. On Santa Catalina id. 
birds which were called large crows by 


BULL. 30] 


CHUMASHAN FAMILY 


297 


the Spaniards were kept and worshiped, 
agreeing with what Boscana tells of the 
Shoshonean condor cult of the adjacent 
coast. The medicine-men of one of the 
islands are said to have used stone pipes 
for smoking, sucking, and blowing to 
remove disease, dressing in a hair wig, 
with a belt of deer hoofs. This practice 
was similar to that which prevailed 
through Lower California. The dead 
among the Chumash were buried, not 
burned as in many other parts of Cali¬ 
fornia; property was hung on poles over 
their graves, and for chiefs painted 
planks were erected. The Franciscan 
missionaries, however, rightly declare that 
these Indians, like all others in California, 
were not idolaters. 

True tribal divisions were unknown to 
the Chumash as to most other Indians of 
California, the only basis of social organ¬ 
ization being the family, and of political, 
the village settlement. The names of vil¬ 
lage sites are given in great number from 
the time of the earliest voyage in the 16th 
century, but the majority can neither be 
located nor identified. The following is 
a list of the villages, most of the names 
being taken from the mission archives: 

Santa Ines Mission: Achillimo, Aguama, 
Ahuamhoue, Akachumas, Akaitsuk, Ala- 
hulapas, Alizway, Asiuhuil, Awashlaurk, 
Calahuasa, Cascel, Cholicus, Chumuchu, 
Coloc, Geguep, Guaislac, Huhunata, 
Hunawurp, Ialamne, Ionata, Jonatas, 
Kalawashuk, Katahuac, Kolok, Kuyam, 
Matiliha, Mekewe, Mishtapawa, Nipoma, 
Nutonto, Sapelek, Saptuui, Sauchu, 
Shopeshno, Sikitipuc, Sisuchi, Situchi, 
Sotonoemu, Souscoc, Stucu, Suiesia, Suk- 
tanakamu, Tahijuas,Takuyumam, Talax- 
ano, Tapanissilac, Tarkepsi, Tekep, 
Temesathi, Tequepis, Tinachi, Tsamala, 
Tujanisuissilac. 

San Miguel Island: Nimoyoyo, Zaco. 

Santa Rosa Island: Kshiwukciwu, Lili- 
beque, Muoc, Ninumu, Niquesesquelua, 
Niquipos, Patiquilid, Patiquiu, Pilidquay, 
Pisqueno. Poele, Siliwihi. 

Santa Cruz Island: Alali, Chalosas, 
Chosho, Coy coy, Estocoloco, Hahas, Hits- 
chowon, Klakaamn, Lacayamu, Liyam, 
Macamo, Maschal, Mishumac, Nana- 
huani, Niakla, Nichochi, Nilalhuyu, 
Nimatlala, Nimitapal, Nitel, Nomkolkol, 
Sasuagel, Xugua. 

San Buenaventura Mission: Aguin, Alloc, 
Anacbuc, Chihucchihui, Chumpache, 
Eshhulup, Kachyayakuch, Kanwaia- 
kaku, Kinapuke, Lacayamu, Liam, 
Lisichi, Lojos, Luupch, Mahow, Mala- 
hue, Malico, Matillija, Miguihui, Misca- 
naka, Piiru, Sespe, Shishalap, Simi, Sisa, 
Sisjulcioy, Sissabanonase, Somo, Tapo, 
Ypuc, Yxaulo. 

Puris'ima Mission: Alacupusyuen, Aus- 
ion, Esmischue, Esnispele, Espiiluima, 


Estait, Fax, Guaslaique, Huasna, Huene- 
jel, Huenepel, Husistaic, Ialamma, Jlaacs, 
kachisupal, Lajuchu, Lipook, Lisahuato, 
Lompoc, Nahuey, Naila, Ninyuelgual, 
Nocto, Omaxtux, Pacsiol, Paxpili, Sac- 
siol, Sacspili, Salachi, Sihimi, Silimastus, 
Silimi, Silino, Silisne, Sipuca, Sisolop, 
Sitolo, Stipu, Suntaho, Tutachro. 

Santa Barbara Mission: Alcax, Alican, 
-Alpincha, Alwathalama, Amolomol, Ane- 
jue, Awhawhilashmu, Cajats, Cajpilili, 
Casalic, Cashwah, Chiuchin, Cholosoc, 
Chuah,Cinihuay, Cuyamus, Eleunaxciay, 
Eljman, Eluaxcu, Estuc, Geliac, Gleuax- 
cuqu, Guainonost, Guima, Hanaya, Hello, 
Huelemin, Huililoc, Huixapapa, Humal- 
ija, Hunxapa, Inajalaihu, Inojey, Ipec, 
Ituc, Lagcay, Laycayamu, Lintja, Lisu- 
chu, Lugups, Majalayghua, Mishtapalwa, 
Mistaughchewaugh, Numguelgar, Oten- 
ashmoo, Salpilel, Sayokinck, Sihuicom, 
Silpoponemew, Sinicon, Sisahiahut, 
Sisuch, Snihuax, Sopone, Taxlipu, Tex- 
maw, Xalanaj, Xalou. 

Miscellaneous: Anacoat, Anacot, Antap, 
Aogni, Asimu, Bis, Caacat, Casnahacmo, 
Casunalmo, Cayeguas, Chwaiyok, Cica- 
cut, Ciucut, Ciyuktun, Elquis, Escuma- 
wash, Garomisopona, Gua, Helapoonuch, 
Honmoyaushu, Hueneme, Humkak, Im- 
mahal, Isha, Ishgua, Kamulas, Kasakti- 
kat, Kashiwe, Kashtok, Kashtu, Kaso, 
Katstayot, Kaughii, Kesmali, Koiyo, 
Kuiyamu, Lohastahni,Mahalial, Malhok- 
she, Malito, Malulowoni, Maquinanoa, 
Masewuk, Mershom, Michiyu, Micoma, 
Misesopano, Mishpapsna, Misinagua, 
Mismatuk, Mispu, Mugu, Mupu, Nacbuc, 
Nipomo, Nocos, Ojai, Olesino, Onkot, 
Onomio, Opia, Opistopia, Paltatre, Par- 
tocac, Potoltuc, Pualnacatup, Quanmugua, 
Quelqueme, Quiman, Salnahakaisiku, 
San Emidio, Sapaquonil, Saticoy, Sat- 
wiwa, Shalawa, Shalikuwewich, Shalka- 
haan, Shishlaman, Shuku, Shup, Shu- 
shuchi, Shuwalashu, Simomo, Sisichii, 
Sitaptapa, Siuktun, Skonon, Spookow, 
Sulapin, Susuquey, Sweteti, Swino, Tal- 
lapoolina, Temeteti, Tocane, Topotopow, 
Tucumu, Tukachkach, IJpop, Uva, 
Walekhe, Wihatset, Xabaagua, Xagua, 
Xocotoc, Yutum. (h. w. h. a. l. k.) 

>Santa Barbara.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 85,1856 (includes Santa Barbara, Santa Inez, 
San Luis Obispo languages); Buschmann, Spuren 
der aztek. Sprache, 531, 535,538,602,1859; Latham, 
Opuscula, 351,1860; Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
in, 550, 567,1877 (Kasu£, Santa Inez, id. of Santa 
Cruz, Santa Barbara); Gatsehet in U. S. Geog. Surv. 
W. 100th Mer., vn, 419, 1879 (cites La Purisima, 
Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Kasu&, Mugu, Santa 
Cruz id.). x Santa Barbara. —Gatsehet in Mag. Am. 
Hist., 156,1877 (Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Santa 
Cruz id., San Luis Obispo, San Antonio). =Chu- 
mashan.—Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 67,1891. 

Chumawi. A former Shastan band or 
village in Big valley, Modoc co, Cal. 
Chu-ma'-wa.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 
267,1877. 

Chumidok. A term used by Powers as 
a tribal name similar to Chumteya, q. v. 


298 


CHUMPACHE-CH UPCAN 


Ib ; a. e. 


Chimedocs. —Powers in Overland Mo., x, 324,1873. 
Chim'-i-dok. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., m, 
349,1877. Choomedocs.— Powers in Overland Mo., 
x, 324,1873. Chu'-mi-dok.— Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., Ill, 349, 1877. 

Chumpache. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage in Ventura co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, July 24, 1863. 

Chumteya. A name meaning ‘southern¬ 
ers,’ and applied with dialectic variations 
by most Mi wok (Moquelumnan) divi¬ 
sions to the divisions s. of them. In some 
cases the name or a form of it may have 
been the proper appellation of particular 
divisions, but on the whole it remained 
geographical rather than national or 
tribal; as explained by the Indians 
themselves, divisions called Chumteya 
by those n. of themselves applied the 
same term in turn to their southern 
neighbors, and so on. See also Chumidok , 
Chumuch , Chumwit. (a. l. k.) 

Chimteya. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 353, 
1877. Choomteyas. —Powers in Overland Mo., x, 
324, 1873. Chumeto.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq., 
v, 71, 1883. Chum-te'-ya.— Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., ill, 349, 1877. 

Chumuch. A term used by Powers as a 
tribal name similar to Chumteya, q. v. 
Choomuch. —Powers in Overland Mo.,"x, 324,1873. 
Chu'-much. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
349,1877. 

Chumuchu. Apparently 2 distinct Chu¬ 
mashan villages formerly near Santa Ines 
mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chumwit. A term used by Powers as a 
tribal name similar to Chumteya, q. v. 
Choomwits. —Powers in Overland Mo., x, 324,1873. 
Chum'-wit.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 349, 
1877. 

Chunacansti. Mentioned by Alcedo 
(Die. Geog., i, 565, 1786) as a pueblo of 
the province of South Carolina, on a swift 
river of the same name which flows s. e. 
to the sea. Unidentified. 

Chunaneets. A Tuscarora village in 
North Carolina in 1701.—Lawson (1709), 
N. C., 383, 1860. 

Chunarghuttunne. A former village of 
the Chastacosta on the n. side of Pogue 
r., e. of its junction with Applegate cr., 
Oreg. 

Tc’u-na'-rxut ^un'ne. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 234, 1890. 

Chunkey. The name commonly used 
by the early traders to designate a man’s 
game formerly popular among the Gulf 
tribes and probably general in the S. , e. of 
the Mississippi. It w'as played with a stone 
disk and a pole which had a crook at one 
end. The disk was rolled ahead, and the 
object was to slide the pole after it in 
such a way that the disk would rest in 
the curve of the crook when both came 
to a stop. It was usually played in the 
larger towns upon a piece of ground regu¬ 
larly prepared for the purpose, called 
by the traders the “chunkey yard,” 
or “chunk yard,” adjoining the town 


square, or central plaza, in which the most 
important public ceremonies were per¬ 
formed. In the W. a somewhat similar 
game was played with a netted wheel and 
a pair of throwing sticks. The name ap¬ 
pears to come from the Catawba or some 
other language of Carolina, where Lawson, 
in 1701, mentions it under the name 
chenco. For diagrams of the Creek town 
square, with chunkey yard, see Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., n, 186, 1888, and Swan 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 264, 1855. 
See Games , Discoidal stones. (J. m. ) 

Chunkey. A former Choctaw town on 
the site of the modern village of Union, 
Newton co., Miss.—Brown in Miss. Hist. 
Soc. Publ., vi, 443, 1902. 

Chanki.—Ramans, Florida, map, 1775. Chunky.— 
Brown, op. cit. 

Chunkey Chitto (‘big Chunkey,’ so 
called to distinguish it from Chunkey). 
A former Choctaw town on the w. bank 
of Chunky cr., about ? m. below its con¬ 
fluence with Talasha cr., in Newton co., 
Miss. It was the southernmost town 
visited by Tecumseh in the fall of 1811.— 
Brown in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 443- 
444, 1902; Halbert and Ball, Creek War, 
46, 1895. 

Chunky.—Brown, op. cit. 

Chunsetunneta. A former village of the 
Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue r., 
Oreg. 

Tcun-se'-tun-ne'-ta.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, Hi, 234, 1890. 

Chunsetunnetun. A former village of the 
Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue r., 
Oreg. 

Tcun-se'-tun-ne'-tun.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 234, 1890. 

Chuntshataatunne (‘ people of the large 
fallen tree’). A former village of the 
MishikhwutmetunneonCoquille r., Oreg. 
Tcun-tca'-ta-a' ^unne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 232,1890. 

Chunut (pi. Chunotachi). A former 
important Yokuts tribe in the plains e. 
of Tulare lake, Cal. They were enemies 
of the Tadji at the n. end of the lake, but 
on friendly terms with the hill tribes. 
They lived in long communal houses of 
tule. Their dialect formed a group with 
the Tadji and Choinok. (a. l. k.) 

Cho-ho-nuts.—Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853. Choo-noot.—Wes- 
sells(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,34thCong., 3d sess., 
32,1857. Chu'-nut.—PowersinCont. N. A. Ethnol., 
ill, 370, 1877. Chunute.—Roycein 18th Rep. B. A. 
E., 782, 1899. Chu-su-te.—Barbour, op. cit. (men¬ 
tioned as on Paint cr.). 

Chupatak ( Tcupat'ak , ‘mortar stone’). 
A former Pima village in s. Arizona.— 
Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902. 

Chupcan. Mentioned as a village of the 
Cholovone on the e. bank of San Joaquin 
r., n. of the Tuolumne, Cal. The name 
may be another form of Chapposan, ap¬ 
parently a tribe on the San Joaquin, and 
also of the otherwise unidentifiable 
Chopee mentioned as on Fresno res. in 
1861. (a. l. k.) 


BULL. 30] 


CHUPICHNUSHKUCH—CIENEGA 


299 


Chap-pah-seins.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 20, 1852. Chap-po-sans.— 
Ryer (1851), ibid., 21. Chopees.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 
219,1861. Chupcan.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 
18, 1861. Tchupukanes. —Kotzebue, New Voy., ir, 
146, 1830. 

Chupichnushkucli. A former Kuitsh vil¬ 
lage near lower Umpqua r., Oreg. 

Tc’u'-pitc n‘u' ckutc. —Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 231, 1890. 

Chuptimni. A former Miwok village 
not far s. of Cosumnes r., Cal. 

Chupumnes. —Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., vi, 630, 
1846. 

Churamuk. A former village of the Iro¬ 
quois on the e. side of Susquehanna r., 
18 m. above Oswego, N. Y.; destroyed by 
Sullivan in 1779.—Livermore (1779) in 
N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 322, 1850. 

Churan (‘ red-eye people ’). One of the 
two divisions or fraternities of Isleta pueb¬ 
lo, N. Mex. See Shifunin. 

Chu-ran'.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895. 
Shuren.—Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1885 (given as a clan). 

Churchcates.—A small unidentified tribe 
mentioned by Gov. Archdale, of South 
Carolina, in the latter part of the 18th 
century, in a complaint that the Appa- 
lachicoloes, or English Indians, had at¬ 
tacked and killed 3 of them.—Carroll, 
Hist. Coll. S. C., n, 107, 1836. 

Churchers. A body of Indians living 
e. and n. e. of the white settlements in 
New England in 1634 (Wood, 1634, 
quoted by Barton, New Views, xviii, 
1798). Not the Praying Indians, as the 
period is too early. 

Churehu. The Mole clan of Isleta 
>ueblo, N. Mex. 

hurehu-t’amin.—Lummis quoted by Hodge in 
Am. Anthrop., ix, 351,1896 {t'almn=' people’). 

Churmutce. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Churuptoy. A tribe of the Patwin di¬ 
vision of the Copehan family, formerly 
living in Yolo and perhaps in Napa co., 
Cal. It was one of the 7 which made 
peace with Gov. Vallejo in 1836.—Ban¬ 
croft, Hist. Cal., iv, 71, 1886. 

Chusca. The name ( Tsus-kai , Tso-is- 
kai) given by the Navaho to a promi¬ 
nent hill on the Navaho res., n. w. N. 
Mex. Geographers extend the name 
(Choiska) to the whole mountain mass 
from which the knoll rises. Cortez in 
1779 (Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, pt. 3, 119, 
1856) recorded it, with doubtful pro¬ 
priety, as the name of a Navaho settle¬ 
ment. In these mountains are the re¬ 
mains of breastworks and other evidences 
of a disastrous fight that took place before 
1850, according to Navaho informants, be¬ 
tween their warriors and Mexican troops. 

(W. M.) 

Chuscan. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 


sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chushtarghasuttun. A former village 
of the Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue 
r., Oreg. 

Tc’uc'-ta-rxa-sut'-tun. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 234, 1890. 

Chusterghutmunnetun. A former vil¬ 
lage of the Chastacosta, the highest on 
Rogue r., Oreg. 

Tc’us-te'-rxut-mun-ne'-tun. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 234,1890. 

Chutchin. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Chutil (named from a slough on which 
it was situated). A former village or 
camp of the Pilalt, a Cowichan tribe of 
lower Chilliwack r., Brit. Col. 

Tcuti'l.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can., 48, 
1902. 

Chuttusgelis. The reputed site of Sole- 
dad mission, Cal.—Engelhardt, Francis¬ 
cans in Cal., 380, 1897. 

Cbuttushshunche. A former village of 
the Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue 

r. , Oreg. 

Tcut'-tuc-cun-tce. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 234, 1890. 

Chuwutukawutuk ( Tcu'wutukan/utuk, 
‘earth hill’). A former Pima village in 

s. Arizona.—Russell, Pima MS., B. A. F., 
16, 1902. 

Chuyachic (‘ the point of a ridge ’). A 
small rancheria of the Tarahumare, not 
far from Norogachic, Chihuahua, Mex¬ 
ico.—Lumholtz, inf n, 1894. 

Chwaiyok. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage e. of San Buenaventura, Ventura co., 
Cal., a locality now called Los Pitos. 
Tc’-wai-yok.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo¬ 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Chynau. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Cibolas (Mexican Span.: ‘buffaloes’). 
A term applied by early Spanish writers 
to any buffalo-hunting Indians. The 
name Vaqueros (see Querecho) was simi¬ 
larly applied to the Apache of the Texas 
plains in the 16th century. 

Cicacut. A Chumashan village at Go- 
leta, w. of Santa Barbara, Cal., in 1542.— 
Cabrillo in Smith, Colec. Doc., 181,1857. 

Cicauit.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. 
Pueblo de las Sardinas. —Cabrillo, op. cit. 

Cienega (Span.: ‘marsh,’ ‘moor,’ and 
in s. w. U. S., ‘meadow’; Tewa name, 
Tzigumci, ‘lone cottonwood tree’). A 
pueblo formerly occupied by the Tano, 
but apparently containing also some 
Queres, situated in the valley of Rio 
Santa Fe, 12 m. s. w. of Santa Fe, N. 
Mex. In the 17th century it was a 
visita of San Marcos mission. Of this 
pueblo Bandelier says: “It was aban¬ 
doned at a time when the Pueblos were 


300 


CIENEGA-CITIZEN POTAWATOMI 


[b. a. e. 


independent [between 1680 and 1692], 
and an effort to repeople it was made by 
Diego de Vargas after the pacification of 
New Mexico in 1695, but with little suc¬ 
cess. Tziguma was therefore a historic 
pueblo. Nevertheless, I am in doubt as 
to which stock its inhabitants belonged. 
They are mentioned as being Queres, . . . 
but the people of Cochiti do not regard 
them as having been of their own stock, 
but as belonging to the Puya-tye or Ta- 
nos. Until the question is decided by 
further researches among the Tanos of 
Santo Domingo, I shall hold that the 
pueblo was a Tanos village.” It con¬ 
tained no Indians in 1782, and at no time 
did its population reach 1,000.—Arch. 
Inst. Papers, hi, 125, 1890; iv, 91-92, 
1892. 

Alamo Solo. —Bandelierin Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
pt. 2, 92, 1892 (Spanish name of present village: 
‘ Lon e cottonwood tree ’). Chi-mu-a. —Bandelier 
in Ritch, N. Mex., 201, 1885. Chiu-ma.— Ritch, 
ibid., 166. Cienega de Carabajal. —Onate (1598) in 
Doc. In6d., xvi, 114, 1871. Cieneguilla. —Davis, 
Span.Conq.N.Mex.,333,1869. Cinega. —D’Anville, 
mapN. A., Bolton’s ed., 1752. La Cienega.— Bande¬ 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 91, 1892. La Ciene- 
gia.— Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 333,1869. La 
Cienguilla. —Ibid., 350. Sienaguilla. —Ibid., map. 
Sienega. —Gallegas (1844) in Emory, Recon., 478, 
1848. Tzi-gu-ma. —Bandelierin Arch. Inst. Papers, 
ill, 125, 1890 (aboriginal name). Tzi-gu-may.— 
Ibid., iv, 91,1892. Ziguma. —Ladd, N. Mex., 199, 
1891. 

Cienega. A large Cora rancheria in the 
Sierra de Nayarit, in the n. part of the 
territory of Tepic, Mexico. 

Cienega. —Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., ii, map, 16, 
1902. La Cienega.— Ibid., I, 498. 

Cieneguilla (Span.: ‘ little marsh ’). A 
former village on the Potrero Viejo, above 
the present Cochiti pueblo, N. Mex., oc¬ 
cupied almost continuously by the Cochiti 
between 1681 and 1694. It was burned in 
the latter year by Gov. Vargas during his 
reconquest of the country.—Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst, Papers, iv, 169, 1892. 

Cienegui. —Escalante (1693?) quoted by Bandelier, 
ibid., 173, 1892. Cieneguilla. —Mendoza (1681), 
ibid., 169. 

Cincinnati Tablet. See Notched plates. 

Cinco Llagas (Span.: ‘five wounds,’ re¬ 
ferring to the wounds of Christ). A 
Tepehuane village near the Cerro de 
Muinora, in the Sierra Madre, on the head¬ 
waters of the Rio del Fuerte, in the ex¬ 
treme s. w. part of Chihuahua, Mexico, 
the inhabitants of which are of pure blood, 
but speak Spanish.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., iv, 93, 1857; Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mexico, i, 429,1902. 

Cinihuay. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage at Los Gatos, near Santa Barbara, 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 
1863. 

Cinnabar. The sulphide of mercury, 
which supplies a brilliant red pigment 
used to a considerable extent by the na¬ 
tive tribes. It is somewhat more bril¬ 
liant in hue than the hematites, being 


the basis of the vermilion of commerce. 
It occurs in pulverulent earthy forms and 
as a compact ore largely in connection 
with serpentines. It is found in Cali¬ 
fornia and Texas, and to a limited ex¬ 
tent in Idaho, Utah, and Nevada. Yar¬ 
row found it associated with burials in 
s. California, and remarks that, used as 
a paint for the person, it might be ex¬ 
pected to cause “constitutional derange¬ 
ments of a serious nature” (Surv. W. 
100th Merid., vii, 1879), and Meredith 
(Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900) even 
attributes the diseased bones so often ob¬ 
tained from native graves to the excessive 
use of this pigment. (w. h. h.) 

Cinquack. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy near Smiths Pt on the Poto¬ 
mac, in Northumberland co., Va., in 1608. 

Chinquack.—Doc. of 1638 in Bozman, Md., II, 73, 
1837. Cinquack.—Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, 
repr. 1819. 

Cinquaeteck. A village on the Poto¬ 
mac, in the present Prince George co., 
Md., in 1608.—Smith (1629), Virginia, i, 
map, repr. 1819. Cf. Chincoteague, Cinquo- 
teck. 

Cinquoteck. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, probably of the Pamunkey 
tribe, in the fork of Mattapony and 
Pamunkey rs., King William co., Va., in 
1608. —Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 
1819. Cf. Chincoteague, Cinquaeteck. 

Cisco. A name applied to various spe¬ 
cies of fish found in the region of the 
great lakes, particularly the lake herring 
( Coregonus artedi) and the lake noon-eye 
( C. hoyi ). The word is said to be taken 
from one of the Algonquian dialects of 
the region, but its origin is not clear. 
Perhaps it is a reduction of ciscoette or 
siskcnmt. (a. f. c.) 

Cisco (Si'ska, ‘uncle’). A village of 
the Lytton band of Ntlakyapamuk on 
Fraser r., 8 m. below Lytton, Brit. Col.; 
pop. 32 in 1902. 

Si'ska.—Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., II, 171, 
1900. Siska Flat.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1880,317. 

Ciscoette. A name of the lake herring 
(Coregonus artedi), seemingly a French 
diminutive in ette from cisco, but proba¬ 
bly a French corruption of siskowit, q. v. 

(a. f. c.) 

Ciscoquett, Ciscowet. See Siskowit. 

Citisans. One of the five tribes of which 
Badin, in 1830 (Ann. de la Prop, de la 
Foi, iv, 536,1843), believed the Sioux na¬ 
tion to be composed. Possibly intended 
for Sisseton. 

Citizen Potawatomi. A part of the 
Potawatomi who, while living in Kansas, 
withdrew from the rest of the tribe about 
1861, took lands in severalty and became 
citizens, but afterward removed to In¬ 
dian Ter. (now Oklahoma). They num¬ 
bered 1,036 in 1890, but by 1900 had in- 


BULL. 30] 


CITJCUT-CIVILIZATION 


301 


creased to 1,722, and in 1904 the number 
was given as 1,686. 

Ciucut. A Chumashan village between 
Goletaand Pt Conception, Cal., in 1542. 
Ciucut.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542), in Smith, Colec. 
Doc. Fla., 183,1857. Cuicut. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 17,1863. 

Civilization. To the aboriginal inhab¬ 
itant of this continent civilization entails 
the overturning of his ancient form of 
government, the abolition of many of his 
social usages, the readjustment of his 
ideas of property and personal rights, and 
change of occupation. No community 
of natives was devoid of a social organiza¬ 
tion and a form of government. These 
varied, some tribes being much more 
highly organized than others (see Clan 
and Gens), but all possessed rules of con¬ 
duct which must be obeyed, else punish¬ 
ment would follow. Native organization 
was based on kinship, which carried with 
it the obligation of mutual protection. 
The tribe, wherever it chanced to be, 
whether resting at home in the village, 
wandering on the plains in pursuit of 
game, or scattered in quest of fish on the 
rivers or sea, always preserved its organ¬ 
ization and authority intact, whereas the 
organization which civilization imposes 
on the native is based on locality, those 
living within certain limits being, regard¬ 
less of relationship, subject to common 
laws and having equal responsibilities; 
mere kinship warrants no claim, and the 
family is differently constituted. In the 
tribal family husband and wife very often 
must belong to different units. According 
to the custom of the particular tribe the 
children trace descent through their 
father and belong to his gens, or through 
their mother and are members of her clan. 
Modern civilization demands the abroga¬ 
tion of the clan or gens, and children 
must inherit from both parents and be 
subject to their authority, not that of a 
clan or gens. 

Most of the common occupations of 
tribal life are wiped out by civilization. 
Intertribal wars have ceased, and war 
honors are no longer possible; the herds 
of buffalo and other animals are gone, 
and with them the hunter, and the makers 
of bows, arrows, spears, and other im¬ 
plements of the chase. The results of 
generations of training are of little avail 
to the civilized male Indian. 

Under tribal conditions woman held, 
in many cases, a place in the management 
of tribal affairs. Upon her devolved 
partly the cultivation of the fields, the 
dressing of skins, the making of clothing, 
the production of pottery and baskets, 
the preparing of food, and all that went 
to conserve the home. Civilization puts 
an end to her outdoor work and consigns 


her to the kitchen and the washtub, 
w r hile the white man’s factories supply 
cloth, clothing, pots, pans, and baskets, 
for none of the native industries can sur¬ 
vive in competition with machinery. 
Woman, moreover, loses her importance 
in public affairs and the independent 
ownership of property that was her right 
by tribal law. No group of peoples on 
the continent were destitute of religious 
beliefs or of rites and ceremonies express¬ 
ive of them. These beliefs were based 
on the idea that man, in common with 
all created things, was endowed with life 
by some power that pervaded the uni¬ 
verse. The methods of appealing to this 
power varied with the environment of 
the peoples, but the incentive was the 
desire for food, health, and long life, 
while the rites and ceremonies inculcated 
certain ethical relations between man 
and man. As among all races, priest¬ 
craft overlaid many of the higher 
thoughts and teachings of native religion 
and led to unworthy practices. Never¬ 
theless the breaking down of the ancient 
forms of worship through the many 
changes and restrictions incident to the 
settlement of the country has caused the 
natives much distress and mental confu¬ 
sion. It is not surprising that it has 
been a slow and difficult process for the 
aborigines to accept and conform to such 
radical changes of organization, customs, 
and beliefs as are required by civilization. 
Yet many have done so, showing a grasp 
of mind, a power to apprehend the value 
of new ideals, and a willingness to accept 
the inevitable, and evincing a degree of 
courage, self-restraint, and strength of 
character that can not fail to win the ad¬ 
miration of thinking men. The younger 
generation, born under the new condi¬ 
tions, are spared the abrupt change 
through which their fathers had to 
struggle. Wherever the environment 
permits, the employments of the white 
race are now those of the Indian. In one 
branch of the Eskimo change has come 
through the introduction of the reindeer. 
Already the Indian is to be found tilling 
his farm, plying the trades, employed 
on the railroads, working in mines and 
logging camps, and holding positions of 
trust in banks and mercantile houses. 
Indians, of pure race or of mixed blood, 
are practising as lawyers, physicians, and 
clergymen; they have made their way in 
literature and art, and are serving the pub¬ 
lic in national and state offices, from that 
of road master to that of legislator. The 
school, the missionary, and the altered 
conditions of life are slowly but surely 
changing the Indian’s mode of thought as 
well as his mode of living, and the old life 
of his tribe and race is becoming more 


302 


CIY UKTUN-CLALLAM 


[ B. A. E. 


and more a memory and a tradition. See 
Agency system , Education , Government pol¬ 
icy , Missions. (a. c. f. ) 

Ciyuktun. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. 

Cizentetpi. Mentioned by Ofiate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in the 
Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, e. of the 
Bio Grande, and in all probability for¬ 
merly occupied by the Tigua or the Piros. 

Clackama. A Chinookan tribe formerly 
occupying several villages on Clackamas 
r., in Clackamas co., Oreg. In 1806 
Lewis and Clark estimated their num¬ 
ber at 1,800; in 1851 thetr number was 
placed at 88, and at that time they claimed 
the country on the e. side of Willamette 
r. from a few miles above its mouth 
nearly to Oregon City and e. as far as the 
Cascade mts. This territory they ceded 
to the United States by the Dayton treaty 
of 1855, and later they were removed to 
the Grande Konde res., Oreg., where they 
are said to number about 60. (l. f. ) 

A'kimmash. —Gatschet, Kalapuya MS., B. A. E. 
(Atfalati name.) Clackamas.—' Dart in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 214, 1851. Clackamis. —Palmer, Trav. Rocky 
Mts., 84,1845. Clackamos. —Lewis and Clark, Ex- 
ped., ii, 219, 1814. Clackamurs. —Wilkes, Hist. 
Oregon, 44,1845. Clack-a-mus. —Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., i, map, 1814. Clackanurs. —Robertson, 
Oregon, 129, 1846. Clackarners. —Robertson in H. 
R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 9, 1848. 
Clakamus. —War re and Vavasour (1835) in Martin, 
Hudson Bay Ter., 80, 1849. Clakemas. —Duflot de 
Mofras, Explor. de l’Oregon, II, 335,1844. Clarka- 
mees. —Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 372, 1822. Clark - 
ames. —Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Clarkamos. — 
Orig.Jour> Lewis and Clark (1806), iv, 255, 1905. 
Clarkamus. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., it, 474,1814. 
Clukemus. —Coues, Henry-Thompson Jour., 811, 
1897. Gita'q;emas. —Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 237, 
1901 (Clatsop name). Guithla'kimas. —Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E. (own name). Klackamas. —Hines, 
Oregon, 144, 1850. Klackamus. —Wilkes in U. S. 
Expl. Exped., IV, 368,1845. Klackamuss. —Kane, 
Wand, in N. A., 196, 1859. Klakamat.— Gatschet 
in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 443, 1877. Klaki'mass. — 
Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
256, 1841. Nsekau's. —Gatschet, Nestucca MS. 
vocab., B. A. E. (Nestucca name). Ns tiwat. — 
Ibid. (Nestucca name). Sehalatak.— Framboise 
quoted by Gairdner (1835) in Jour, Geog. Soc. 
Lond., XI, 256, 1841. Thlakeimas. —Tolmie and 
Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 11, 1884. Tla- 
klmlsh. —Mooney, inf n, 1904(own name). Tlakl- 
mish-pum. —Ibid. Tu'hu tane. —Gatschet, Umpqua 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1877 (Umpqua name). 

Clahclellah (probably a variation of 
Watlala). A Chinookan tribe living in 
a single village of 7 houses near the foot 
of the Cascades of Columbia r., Oreg., 
in 1806. 

Clahclallah.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 
275,1905. Clahclellah.—Ibid., 273. Clahclellars.— 
Ibid., 258. 

Clahnaquah. A Chinookan tribe or di¬ 
vision living in 1806 on Sauvies id., Mult¬ 
nomah co., Oreg., on Columbia r. below r 
the upper mouth of the Willamette. 
Their estimated number was 130, in 4 
houses. 

Clahnahquah.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 268, 
1817. Clan-nah-quah.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, IV, 218, 1905. Clan-nah-queh’s Tribe of 
Moltnomah’s.—Ibid., VI, 116, 1905. 


Clahoose. A Salish tribe on Toba inlet, 
Brit. Col., speaking the Comox dialect; 
pop. 73 in 1904. 

Clahoose.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 243, 1862. Clay- 
hoosh.—Whymper, Alaska, 49, 1869. Cle-Hure.— 
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Cle-Huse.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind, Tribes, v, 488,1855. Klahoose.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1874, 142. Klahose.—Ibid., 
1891, map. Klahous.—Downie in Mayne, Brit. 
Col., app., 449, 1862(name of inlet). Klashoose.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1874,144. Tlahoos.—Tolmie and 
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 119 b, 1884. Tlahu's.—■ 
Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Claikahak. A Chnagmiut village on 
the right bank of Yukon r., near Ukak, 
Alaska; perhaps identical with Khaik. 
Claikahakamut.—Post-ronte map, 1903. 

Claikehak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the n. bank of Yukon r., above 
Tlatek, Alaska. 

Claikehakamut.—Post route map, 1903. 

Clallam (‘strong people’). A Salish 
tribe living on the s. side of Puget sd., 
Wash., formerly extending from Port 
Discovery to Hoko r., being bounded at 
each end by the Chimakum and Makah. 
Subsequently they occupied Chimakum 
territory and established a village at Port 
Townsend. A comparatively small num¬ 
ber found their way across to the s. end of 
Vancouver id., and, according to Kane, 
there was a large village on Victoria har¬ 
bor. They are said to be more closely re¬ 
lated to the Songisli than to any other 
tribe. Their villages were: Elwha, Hoko, 
Huiauulch, Hunnint, Kahtai, Kaquaith, 
Klatlawas (extinct), Pistchin (extinct), 
Sequim, Stehtlum, Tsako, Tsewhitzen, 
Tsitsukwich, and Yennis. Eleven villages 
were enumerated by Eells in 1886, but 
only 3—Elwha, Pistchin, and Sequim— 
are spoken of under their native names. 
Pop. 800 in 1854, according to Gibbs. 
There were 336 on Puyallup res., Wash., 
in 1904—248 at Jamestown and 88 at Port 
Gamble. (j. r. s. ) 

Chalam.—Farnham, Travels, 111, 1843. Clalams.— 
Nicolay, Oregon, 143,1846. Clallams.—Stevens in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 450, 1854. Clallems.—Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, 19, 1848. Clal-lums 
Indians.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., 209, 1859 (refer¬ 
ring to their village in Victoria harbor). Hue- 
yang-uh.—Mackay quoted by Dawson in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. ii, 7 (own name: 

‘ the people’). Khalams. —Smet, Letters, 231,1843. 
Klalams.— Smet, Oregon Miss., 58, 1847. Kla- 
lanes.— Ibid., 56. Klallam.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 254, 
1877. Noosdalum.— Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. 
Lond., i, 224,1841 (Noos is a prefixum gentilicium) . 
Nooselalum.— Lane (1849) in Sen.Ex. Doc. 52, 31st 
Cong., 1st sess., 173, 1850. Noostlalums. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 700, 1855. Nostlalaim,— Tol¬ 
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120b, 1884. 
Nusdalum.— Latham in Trans., Philol. Soc. Lond., 
71, 1856. Nu-sklaim.— Eells in letter, Feb., 1886 
(own name: ‘strong people ’). Nus-klai-yum.— 
Gibbs, Clallum and Lummi, v, 1863. S’calam.— 
Keane in Stanford, Com pend., 534, 1878. Sclal- 
lum.— Jones (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,34th Cong., 
3d sess., 5, 1857. Skal-lum.— Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 598, 1854. S’Klallams.— U. S. Ind. 
Treat., 800, 1873. S’Klallan.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 450, 1854. SKlal-lum. —Starling, ibid., 170, 
1852. Thwspa'-lub. —McCaw, Puyallup MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1885. Tlalams. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
ill, 96, map, 1853. Tla'lEm.— Boas in 5th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 10,1889. Tlalum. — Tolmie and 
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120 b, 1884. Tsclal- 


BULL. 30] 


CLAN AND GENS 


303 


lums.— Grant in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 293, 1857. 
Wooselalim.— Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1850. 

Clan and Gens. An American Indian 
clan or gens is an intratribal exogamic 
group of persons either actually or theo¬ 
retically consanguine, organized to pro¬ 
mote their social and political welfare, the 
members being usually denoted by a com¬ 
mon class name derived generally from 
some fact relating to the habitat of the 
group or to its usual tutelary being. In the 
clan lineal descent, inheritance of per¬ 
sonal and common property, and the 
hereditary right to public office and trust 
are traced through the female line, while 
in the gens they devolve through the 
male line. Clan and gentile organizations 
are by no means universal among the 
North American tribes; and totemism, 
the possession or even the worship of per¬ 
sonal or communal totems by individuals 
or groups of persons, is not an essential 
feature of clan and gentile organizations. 
The terms clan and gens as defined and 
employed by Powell denote useful dis¬ 
criminations in social and political organi¬ 
zation, and, no better names having been 
proposed, they are used here practically 
as defined by Powell. 

Consanguine kinship among the 
I roquoian and Muskhogean tribes is traced 
through the blood of the woman only, 
and membership in a clan constitutes 
citizenship in the tribe, conferring certain 
social, political, and religious privileges, 
duties, and rights that are denied to aliens. 
By the legal fiction of adoption the blood 
of the alien might be changed into one of 
the strains of Iroquoian blood, and thus 
citizenship in the tribe could be conferred 
on a person of alien lineage. The primary 
unit of the social and political organiza¬ 
tion of Iroquoian and Muskhogean tribes 
is the ohwachira, a Mohawk term signify¬ 
ing the family, comprising all the male 
and female progeny of a woman and of 
all her female descendants in the female 
line and of such other persons as may be 
adopted into the ohwachira . An ohwachira 
never bears the name of a tutelary or other 
deity. Its head is usually the eldest 
woman in it. It may be composed of one 
or more firesides, and one or more ohwa- 
chiras may constitute a clan. The mem¬ 
bers of an ohwachira have (1) the right to 
the name of the clan of which their ohwa¬ 
chira is sl member; (2) the right of inherit¬ 
ing property from deceased members; and 
(3) the right to take part in councils of the 
ohwachira. The titles of chief and sub¬ 
chief were the heritage of particular 
ohwachiras. In the development of a 
clan by the coalescence of two or more 
actually or theoretically related ohwachiras 
only certain ohwachiras obtained the in¬ 
heritance and custody of the titles of and 
consequently the right to choose chief 


and subchief. Very rarely were the off¬ 
spring of an adopted alien constituted an 
ohwachira having chiefship or subchief- 
ship titles. The married women of child¬ 
bearing age of such an ohwachira had the 
right to hold a council for the purpose of 
choosing candidates for chief and sub¬ 
chief of the clan, the chief matron of one 
of the ofnvachiras being the trustee of the 
titles, and the initial step in the deposition 
of a chief or subchief was taken by the 
women’s council of the ohwachira to 
whom the title belongs. There were 
clans in which several ohwachiras pos¬ 
sessed titles to chiefships. The Mohawk 
and Oneida tribes have only 3 clans, each 
of which, however, has 3 chiefships and 
3 subchiefships. Every ohwachira of the 
Iroquois possessed and worshiped, in ad¬ 
dition to those owned by individuals, one 
or more tutelary deities, called oiaron or 
ochinagenda , which were customarily the 
charge of wise women. An alien could 
be taken into the clan and into the tribe 
only through adoption into one of the 
ohwachiras. All the land of an ohwachira 
was the exclusive property of its women. 
The ohivachira was bound to purchase 
the life of a member who had forfeited 
it by the killing of a member of the 
tribe or of an allied tribe, and it pos¬ 
sessed the right to spare or to take the 
life of prisoners made in its behalf or 
offered to it for adoption. 

The clan among the Iroquoian and the 
Muskhogean peoples is generally consti¬ 
tuted of one or more ohwachiras. It was 
developed apparently through the coa¬ 
lescence of two or more ohwachiras hav¬ 
ing a common abode. Amalgamation natu¬ 
rally resulted in a higher organization and 
an enlargement and multiplication of 
rights, privileges, and obligations. Where 
a single ohwachira represents a clan it was 
almost always due to the extinction of 
sister ohwachiras. In the event of the 
extinction of an ohwachira through death, 
one of the fundamental rules of the con¬ 
stitution of the League of the Iroquois 
provides for the preservation of the titles 
of chief and subchief of the ohwachira , by 
placing these titles in trust with a sister 
ohwachira of the same clan, if there be 
such, during the pleasure of the League 
council. The following are some of the 
characteristic rights and privileges of the 
approximately identical Iroquoian and 
Muskhogean clans: (1) The right to a 
common clan name, which is usually that 
of an animal, bird, reptile, or natural ob¬ 
ject that may formerly have been regarded 
as a guardian deity. (2) Representation 
in the council of the tribe. (3) Its share 
in the communal property of the tribe. 
(4) The right to have its elected chief 
and subchief of the clan confirmed and 
installed by the tribal council, among the 


304 


CLAN AND GENS 


[b. a. e. 


Iroquois in later times by the League 
council. (5) The right to the protection 
of the tribe. (6) The right to the titles 
of thechiefshipsand subchiefships heredi¬ 
tary in its ohwachiras. (7) The right to 
certain songs, chants, and religious ob¬ 
servances. (8) The right of its men or 
women, or both together, to hold councils. 

(9) The right to certain personal names, 
to be bestowed upon its members. 

(10) The right to adopt aliens through 
the action of a constituent ohwachira. 

(11) The right to a common burial 
ground. (12) The right of the child¬ 
bearing women of the ohwachiras in 
which such titles are hereditary to elect 
the chief and subchief. (13) The right 
of such women to impeach and thus in¬ 
stitute proceedings for the deposition of 
chiefs and subchiefs. (14) The right to 
share in the religious rites, ceremonies, 
and public festivals of the tribe. The 
duties incident to clan membership were 
the following: (1) The obligation not to 
marry w ithin the clan, formerly not even 
within the phratry to w hich the clan be¬ 
longed; the phratry being a brotherhood 
of clans, the male members of it mutu¬ 
ally regarded themselves as brothers and 
the female members as sisters. (2) The 
joint obligation to purchase the life of a 
member of th$ clan which has been for¬ 
feited by the homicide of a member of 
the tribe or of an allied tribe. (3) The 
obligation to aid and defend fellow r - 
members by supplying their needs, re¬ 
dressing their w r rongs and injuries, and 
avenging their death. (4) The joint obli¬ 
gation to obtain prisoners or other persons 
to replace members lost or killed of any 
ohwachira of a clan to w’hich they are 
related as father’s clansmen, the matron 
of such ohwachira having the right to ask 
that this obligation be fulfilled. All these 
rights and obligations, however, are not 
always found together. 

The clan or gentile name is not usually 
the common name of the animal or ob¬ 
ject after which the clan may be called, 
but denotes some salient feature or char¬ 
acteristic or the favorite haunt of it, or 
may be an archaic name of it. One of the 
Seneca clans is named from the deer, 
commonly called neog2 n , ‘cloven foot’, 
while the clan name is hadiniorigwaiiu\ 

‘ those w'hose nostrils are large and fine- 
looking.’ Another Seneca clan is named 
from the sandpiper, which has the ono- 
matopoetic name dowisdowi' , but the clan 
name is hodi'nesiio\ ‘those who come 
from the clean sand,’ referring to the 
sandpiper’s habit of running along the 
water’s edge where the sand is w T ashed 
by the waves. Still another clan is called 
after the turtle, commonly named ha’n- 
owa from its carapace, but the clan desig¬ 
nation is hadiniadtfi 1 , ‘they have upright 


necks.’ The number of clans in the dif¬ 
ferent Iroquois tribes varies. The small¬ 
est number is 3, found in the Mohawk 
and Oneida, while the Seneca have 9, the 
Onondaga 8, and the Wyandot 12. 

Clans and gentes are generally organized 
into phratries and phratries into tribes. 
Usually only 2 phratries are found in 
the modern organization of tribes. The 
Huron and the Cayuga appear formerly 
to have had 4, but the Cayuga to-day 
assemble in 2 phratries. One or more 
clans may compose a phratry. The clans 
of the phratries are regarded as brothers 
one to another and cousins to the mem¬ 
bers of the other phratry, and are so 
addressed. The phratry has a certain 
allotted-place in every assembly, usually 
the side of the fire opposite to that held 
by the other phratry. A clansman in 
speaking of a person of the opposite 
phratry may also say “He is my father’s 
clansman,” or “He is a child whom I 
have made,” hence the obligation resting 
on members of a phratry to “find the 
word” of the dream of a child of the 
other phratry. The phratry is the unit 
of organization of the people for ceremo¬ 
nial and other assemblages and festivals, 
but as a phratry it has no officers; the 
chiefs and elders of the clans composing 
it serve as its directors. 

The government of a clan or gens, 
when analytically studied, is seemingly a 
development from that of the ohwachira. 
The government of a tribe is developed 
from that of the clan or gens, and a con¬ 
federation, such as the League of the 
Iroquois, is governed on the same prin¬ 
ciple. 

The simpler unit of organization sur¬ 
rendered some of its autonomy to the 
higher unit so that the whole was closely 
interdependent and cohesive. The estab¬ 
lishment of each higher unit necessarily 
produced new duties, rights, and privi¬ 
leges. 

According to Boas the tribes of the 
N. W. coast, as the Tlingit, Haida, Tsim- 
shian, Heiltsuk, and Kitamat, have ani¬ 
mal totems, and a “maternal organiza¬ 
tion” in which the totem groups are 
exogamic. The Kw^akiutl, however, al¬ 
though belonging to the same stock as 
the last tw r o, do not have animal totems, 
because they are in “a peculiar transi¬ 
tional stage.” The Kwakiutl is exoga¬ 
mic. In the n. part of this coast area a 
woman’s rank and privileges always de¬ 
scend to her children. As the crest, or 
totemic emblem, descends in the female 
line through marriage among the Kwa¬ 
kiutl, a somewhat similar result has been 
brought about among them. Among the 
Haida and the Tlingit there are respec¬ 
tively 2 phratries; the Tsimshian have 4, 
the Heiltsuk 3, and the Kitamat 6. The 


BULL. 30] 


CLAN INN ATA-CLIFF-DWELLINGS 


305 


tribes of the s. part, of the coast, accord¬ 
ing to the same authority, are “purely 
paternally organized.” Natives do not 
always consider themselves descendants 
of the totem, but rather of some ancestor 
of the clan who obtained the totem. An 
adopted remnant of a tribe may some¬ 
times constitute a clan. See Social organ¬ 
ization. (j. n. B. H.) 

Claninnata. A Chinookan tribe living 
in 1800 on the s. w. side of Sauvies id., 
Multnomah co., Oreg. Their estimated 
population was 200, in 5 houses. 
Clah-in-nata.—Lewis and C’arkExped., Coues ed., 
1249, note, 1893. Clah-in-na-ta.—Orig. Jour. Lewis 
and Clark, iv, 213 et seq., 1905. Clanimatas.— 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 371, 1822. Clan-in-na- 
ta’s.—Orig. Jour., op. cit., VI, 116,1905. 

Clatacut. A former Chinookan village 
on the n. side of Columbia r., 10 m. below 
The Dalles, Oreg.—Lee and Frost, Oregon, 
176, 1844. 

Clatchotin. A division of the Tenan- 
kutchin on Tanana r., Alaska. 

Bear Indians.—Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can. 
1888, 203 b, 1889. Clatochin.—Allen, Rep. on 
Alaska, 137, 1887. Sa-tshi-o-tin'.—Ibid 

Clatsop. (La'k/elak, ‘dried salmon.’— 
Boas). A Chinookan tribe formerly 
about C. Adams on the s. side of the 
Columbia r. and extending up the river 
as far as Tongue pt and s. along the coast 
to Tillamook Head, Oreg. In 1806 their 
number, according to Lewis and Clark, 
was 200, in 14 houses. In 1875 a few 
Clatsop were found living near Salmon r. 
and were removed to Grande Ronde res. 
in Oregon. The language is now prac¬ 
tically extinct, and the remnant of the 
tribe has been almost wholly absorbed by 
neighboring groups. The villages of the 
Clatsop, so far as known, were Konope, 
Neacoxy, Neahkeluk, Niakewankih, Ne- 
ahkstowt, and Necotat. (l. f. ) 

Calt-sops.—Hunter, Captivity, 71, 1823. Chat- 
sops.—Dart in Ind. Aff. Rep., 214,1851. Cladsaps.— 
Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soe. Lond., I, 
236, 1848. Clap-sott.—Clark (1805) in Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark, m, 238, 1905. Clasaps.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, map, 96, 1853. Classops.— 
Smet, Letters, 220, 1843. Clastops.—Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 509, 1878. Clatsaps.—Belch¬ 
er, Voy., I, 307, 1843. Clat.sop’: .—Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark (1806), VI, 117,1905. Clatsops.— 
Ibid. (1805), ill, 241, 1905. Clatstops.—Farnham, 
Travels, 111, 1843. Clatsup.—Nesmith in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1857, 321,1858. Clot sop.—Orig. Jour. Lewis 
and Clark (1805),in, 244,1905. Klaat-sop.—Gibbs, 
MS., B. A. E. Klatraps.—Smet, Letters, 231, 
1843. Klatsaps.—Townsend, Narr., 175, 1839. 
Klatsops.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 201, 1853. 
La'klelak.—Boas, Chinook Texts, 277,1894 (own 
name). La'klelaq.—Boas, field notes, (Upper 
Chinook name: ‘ dry salmon ’). Latsop.—Ford in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 250, 1858. Satchap.—Buschmann, 
Spuren der azt.-Spr., 632,1859. Tlatsap.—Hale in 
U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 215, 1846. Tschlahtsop- 
tschs.—Trans. Oregon Pion. Assn., 85, 887. 

Claushaven. A former Eskimo mission¬ 
ary station on Disko bay, w. Greenland. 
Claushaven.—Crantz, Hist. Greenland, I, 15, pi. 1. 
1767. Claushavn.—Meddelelser om Gronland, 
xxv, map, 1902. 

Clay, Clay-work. See Adobe, Pottery . 

Clay-eating. See Food. 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-20 


Clayoquot. A Nootka tribe living on 
Meares id. and Torfino inlet, Clayoquot 
sd., Vancouver id.; pop. 241 in 1904, 
having become reduced from about 1,100 
in 60 years. 

Claiakwat.—Swan, MS., B. A. E. Clao-qu-aht.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., 357,1897. Claucuad.—Galiano, 
Relacion, 19, 1802. Clayoquot.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 
251, 1862. Clayoquotoch.—Grant in Jour. Roy. 
Geog. Soc., 211,1861. Clyoquot.—Bulfinch in H. R. 
Doc. 43, 26th Cong., 1st sess., 1, 1840. Clyquots.— 
Eells in Am. Antiq., 146, 1883. Ilaoquatsh.— 
Jacob in Jour. Anthrop. Soc. Lond., ii, Feb., 
1864. Klah-oh-quaht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 308,1868. 
Klahoquaht.—Ibid., 189. Kla-oo-qua-ahts.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 52, 1875. Kla-oo-quates.—Jewitt, Narr., 
37, 76, 1849. Klay quoit.—Findlay quoted by Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, July 19, 1862. Tlao'kwiath.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. 
Tlaoquatch.—Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., 
I, 224, 1841. Tlaoquatsh.—Latham, Elem. Comp. 
Philol., 403, 1862. 

Clear Lake Indians. A collective name 
loosely applied to the Indians on Clear 
lake, n. Cal. The shores of this lake were 
occupied entirely by the Pomo except at 
the southernmost extremity of the south¬ 
ern arm, known as Lower lake, which for 
a few miles was controlled by Indians of 
the Moquelumnan family. See Laguna. 

(s. a. b. ) 

Clear Lake Indians.—Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 60,1857. Lak.—Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Lakamellos.— 
Ibid. Locollomillos.—Ibid. Lopillamillos.—Ibid. 
Lu-pa-yu-ma.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 110, 1853 (so called by the Wintun 
Kope of Puta cr.). Lupilomis.—Taylor, op. cit. 
Lu-pi-yu-ma.—Wessells, op. cit. Socollomillos.— 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 363,1874. 

Clecksclocutsee. A former village 12 m. 
inland from Clayoquot town, on the w. 
coast of Vancouver id.—Bulfinch in II. 
R. Doc. 43, 26th Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1840. 

Clelikitte. An unidentified (Wakash- 
an) tribe about Queen Charlotte sd., Brit. 
Col. 

Cle-li-kit-te.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 

Clemclemalats. A Salish tribe speaking 
the Cowichan dialect and residing in 
Cowichan valley, Vancouver id.; pop. 
140 in 1904. ' 

Clem-clem-a-lats.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1898, 417, 1899. 
Clem-clemalets.—Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 164. Clem-clem- 
a-lits.—Ibid., 308, 1879. Clymclymalats.—Brit. 
Col. Map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. Tlemtle'me- 
lets.—Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Clickass. Said to have been a former 
Kaigani village on Prince of Wales id. 
See Klinkwan. 

Click-ass.—Work (1836) quoted by Dawson, Queen 
Charlotte Ids., 173 b, 1880. Clict-ars.—Work (1836) 
quoted by Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 
Clict-ass.—Work (1836) quoted by Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, V, 489,1855. 

Cliff-dwellings. A term applied to desig¬ 
nate the houses in the cliffs of the arid 
region, the former occupants of which 
belonged, at least in the main, to the 
group of tribes now known as the Pue¬ 
blos. The plateau country of Arizona, 
New Mexico, Colorado, and Utah abounds 
in natural recesses and shallow caverns 
weathered in the faces of the cliffs; prim¬ 
itive tribes, on taking possession of the 
region, although by preference, no doubt, 


306 


CLIFF-DWELLINGS 


[b. a. e. 


settling in the valleys along the running 
streams, in many cases. naturally occu¬ 
pied the ready-made shelters for resi¬ 
dence, storage, and burial, and for hiding 
and defense in time of danger. This 



CASA BLANCA RUINS IN CANYON DE CHELLY, ARIZONA 


occupancy led in time to the building of 
marginal walls for protection and houses 
within for dwelling, to the enlargement 
of the rooms by excavation when the 
formations permitted, and, probably later 
on, to the excavation of commodious 
dwellings, such as are now found in 
many sections of the arid region. Arche¬ 
ologists thus find it convenient to dis¬ 
tinguish two general classes of cliff-dwell¬ 
ings, the cliff-house proper, constructed 
of masonry, and the cavate house, exca¬ 
vated in the cliffs. 

It is commonly believed that the agri¬ 
cultural tribes of pre-Spanish times, who 
built large towns and developed an ex¬ 
tensive irrigation system, resorted to the 
cliffs, not from choice, but because of the 
encroachment of warlike tribes, who were 
probably nonagricultural, having no well 
established place of abode. This must be 
true to some extent, for no people, unless 
urged by dire necessity, would resort to 
fastnesses in remote canyon walls or to 
the margins of barren and almost inac¬ 
cessible plateaus and there establish their 
dwellings at enormous cost of time and 
labor; and it is equally certain that a peo¬ 
ple once forced to these retreats would, 
when the stress was removed, descend to 
the lowlands to reestablish their houses 
where water is convenient and in the 
immediate vicinity of arable lands. Al¬ 
though these motives of hiding and de¬ 


fense should not be overlooked, it appears 
that many of the cliff sites were near 
streams and fields, and were occupied be¬ 
cause they afforded shelter and were nat¬ 
ural dwelling places. It is important to 
note also that many of the cliff-houses, 
both built and excavated, are mere stor¬ 
age places for corn and other property, 
while many others are outlooks from 
which the fields below could be watched 
and the approach of strangers observed. 
In some districts evidence of post-Spanish 
occupancy of some sites exists—walls of 
houses are built on deposits accumulated 
since sheep were introduced, and adobe 
bricks, which were not used in prehistoric 
times, appear in some cases. A well au¬ 
thenticated tradition exists among the 
Hopi that, about the middle of the 18 th 
century a group of their clans, the Asa 
people, deserted their village on account 
of an epidemic and removed to the Can¬ 
yon de Chelly, where they occupied the 
cliff-shelters for a considerable period, 
intermarrying with the Navaho. 

The area in which the cliff-dwellings 
occur is practically coextensive with that 
in which are now found traces of town 
building and relics attributable to the 
Pueblo tribes. The most noteworthy of 
these groups of built dwellings are found 
in the canyons of the Mesa Verde in 
Colorado, in Hovenweep, McElmo, and 



SQUARE TOWER IN CUFF RUIN GROUP, McELMO CREEK, 
COLORADO 


Montezuma canyons in Colorado and 
Utah, in Canyon de Chellv and its 
branches in n. e. Arizona, and, of the 
cavate variety, in the cliffs of the Jemez 
plateau facing the Rio Grande in New 
















3ULL. 30] 


CLIFF-DWELLINGS 


307 


Mexico, and in the Verde valley of Ari¬ 
zona. Although there are local differ¬ 
ences in style of building, construction, 
plan, and finish, the chief characteristics 
are much the same everywhere. Corre¬ 
sponding differences with general likeness 
are observed in implements, utensils, and 
ornaments associated with the ruins— 
facts which go to show that in early 
periods, as now, numerous tribal groups 
were represented in the region, and that 
then, as now, there was a general commu¬ 
nity of culture, if not kinship in blood. 

Owing to differences in the composi¬ 
tion of the rocky strata, the natural shel¬ 
ters occupied by the cliff-dwellings are 
greatly varied in character. While many 
are mere horizontal crevices or isolated 
niches, large enough only for men to 
crawl into and build small stone lodges, 


there are extensive chambers, with com¬ 
paratively level floors, and with roofs 
opening outward in great sweeps of solid 
rock surface, more imposing than any 
structure built by human hands. These 
latter are capable of accommodating not 
merely single households, but communi¬ 
ties of considerable size. The niches 
occur at all levels in cliffs rising to the 
height of nearly a thousand feet, and are 
often approached with great difficulty 
from below or, in rare cases, from above. 
Where the way is very steep, niche stair¬ 
ways were cut in the rock face, making 
approach possible. Ladders of notched 
logs were also used. In the typical cliff¬ 
dwelling of this class, the entire floor of 
the niche is occupied, the doorway giv¬ 
ing entrance through the outer wall, 
which is built up vertically from the 
brink of the rocky shelf and rises one, 


two, or more stories in height, or to the 
rocky roof, where this is low and over¬ 
hanging. In the larger shelters the build¬ 
ings are much diversified in plan and 
elevation, owing to irregularities in the 
conformation of the floor and walls. The 
first floor was the rock surface, or if that 
was uneven, of clay or flagstones, and 
upper floors were constructed of poles set 
in the masonry, often projecting through 
the walls and overlaid with smaller poles 
and willows, finished above with adobe 
cement. Some of the rooms in the larger 
buildings were round, corresponding in 
appearance and no doubt in purpose to 
the kivas, or ceremonial chambers, of the 
ordinary pueblos. The masonry is ex¬ 
cellent, the rather small stones,.gathered 
in many cases from distant sites, being 
laid in mortar. The stones were rarely 


dressed, but were carefully selected, so 
that the wall surface was even, and in 
some cases a decorative effect was given 
by alternating layers of smaller and larger 
pieces and by chinking the crevices with 
spalls. The walls were sometimes plas¬ 
tered inside and out and finished with 
clay paint. The doorways were small 
and squarish, and often did not extend 
to the floor, except an opening or square 
notch in the center for the passage of the 
feet. The lintels were stone slabs or con¬ 
sisted of a number of sticks or small tim¬ 
bers. Windows, or outlook apertures, 
were numerous and generally small. 

Cliff-dwellings to which the term cavate 
is applied are not built but dug in the 
cliffs. Where the formations are friable 
or chalky, natural recesses or openings 
were enlarged by digging, and this led 
to the excavation of chambers and groups 



CLIFF VILLAGE (CLIFF PALACE), MESA VERDE, COLORADO. (COURTESY OF SANTA FE RAILWAY) 





308 


CLIFF-DWELLINGS 


[b. a. e. 


of chambers at points where no openings 
previously existed. In cases where the 
front opening was large, either originally 
or through the effects of weathering, it 



TYPICAL CLIFF-HOUSE, MANCOS CANYON, COLORADO. 

(holmes, jackson) 


was walled up as in the ordinary cliff¬ 
dwelling, the doors and openings being 
of usual type; but the typical cavate 
dwelling is entered through a small hewn 
opening or doorway and consists of one 



EXCAVATED DWELLINGS IN CLIFFS OF VERDE VALLEY, ARIZONA. 
(FEWKE6) 


or more chambers, approximately rectan¬ 
gular or roundish in outline, adapted to 
the needs of the occupants. The floor is 
often below the level of the threshold, 


and both floors and walls are sometimes 
plastered, and, in cases, a simple orna¬ 
mental dado in one or more colors is car¬ 
ried around some of the principal rooms. 
Frequently crude fireplaces occur near 
the entrance, sometimes provided with 
smoke vents; and numerous niches, al¬ 
coves, and storage places are excavated 
at convenient points. In front of the ex¬ 
cavated rooms, porches were sometimes 
built of poles, brush, and stones, holes 
cut in the cliff wall furnishing the pos¬ 
terior support for roof and floor beams. 
These cavate dwellings are most numer¬ 
ous on the e. side of the Jemez plateau, 
facing the Rio Grande, where almost 
every northern escarpment of the mesas 
between 'the mountains and the river 
is honeycombed with them (Bandelier, 
Hewett, Mindeleff). They are also nu¬ 
merous along the Rio San Juan and its n. 



GROUND-PLAN AND SECTION OF EXCAVATED DWELLING, VERDE 
VALLEY, ARIZONA. (c. MINDELEFF) 


tributaries in New Mexico and Colorado 
(Holmes), and in the valley of the Rio 
Verde in Arizona (Fewkes, Mindeleff). 

Belonging to the cavate class, yet meas¬ 
urably distinct from the dwellings last 
described, are certain rude habitations 
excavated in the slopes of cinder cones 
and in the steep faces of scoriaceous de¬ 
posits in the vicinity of Flagstaff, Ariz. 
These are entered by doorways excavated 
in the steep slopes of cliffs, or by shafts 
descending obliquely or vertically where 
the slopes are gentle. The rooms are of 
moderate or small size and generally of 
rather irregular outline. The walls have 
been plastered in some cases, and not in¬ 
frequently exterior chambers have been 
built of the rough scoriaceous rocks. The 
correspondence of these habitations and 
their accompanying artifacts with the 
architectural and minor remains of the 































r.ru, .“.01 


CLIFF PALACE 


309 


general region make it clear that the 
occupants of these strange dwellings were 
a part of the great Pueblo family (Powell, 
Fewkes). 

The minor works of art associated with 
the cliff-dwellings are in general closely 
analogous to similar remains from the 
ancient plateau and village sites of the 
same section. This applies to basketry, 
pottery, textile products, stone imple¬ 
ments and utensils, and various kinds of 
weapons and ornaments. The presence 
of agricultural implements and of de¬ 
posits of charred corn in many places 
indicates that the people depended largely 
on agriculture. 

The antiquity of the cliff-dwellings can 
only be surmised. That many of them 
were occupied in comparatively recent 
times is apparent from their excellent 
state of preservation, but their great 
numbers and the extent of the work ac¬ 
complished suggest very considerable 
antiquity. Just when the occupancy of 
the cliffs began, whether 500 or 5,000 
years ago, must for the present remain a 
question. Some travelers have reported 
the occurrence of ancient stone houses 
overwhelmed and destroyed by flows of 
lava, and have inferred great age from 
this; but verification of these reports is 
wanting. Striking differences in the 
crania of earlier and later occupants of 
the cliff-dwellings are cited to prove early 
occupancy by a distinct race, but crani- 
ologists observe that equally striking dif¬ 
ferences exist between tribes living side 
by side at the present day. It may be 
safely said that to the present time no 
evidence of the former general occupancy 
of the region by peoples other than those 
now classed as Pueblo Indians or their 
neighbors to-day has been furnished. 
Among the more important examples of 
the cliff ruins are the so-called Cliff 
Palace in Walnut canyon and the Spruce 
Tree House in Navaho canyon, Mesa 
Verde, Colo. (Chapin, Nordenskiold); 
Casa Blanca in Canyon de Chelly (Min- 
deleff); and the so-called Montezuma 
Castle on Beaver cr., Ariz. (Mearns). 
Intimately associated with these clifl- 
dwellings, and situated on the plateaus 
immediately above or at the base of the 
cliffs below, are ruins of pueblos in every 
way identical with the pueblos in the 
open country. See Pueblos. 

In the canyons of the Piedras Verdes 
r., Chihuahua, Mexico, are cliff-dwell¬ 
ings corresponding in many respects with 
those of the Pueblo region. These are in 
ruins, but in other sections of the same 
state there are similar dwellings occupied 
to-day by the Tarahumare (Lumholtz). 
The most southerly cliff-dwellings thus 
far observed are in the state of Jalisco, 
central Mexico (Hrdlicka). 


Quite distinct in type from the cliff- 
dwellings of the arid region are the pic¬ 
turesque and remarkable dwellings of the 
Eskimo fishermen of King id., near the 
n. margin of Bering sea. Here there are 
some 40 dwellings partly excavated in 
the side of the precipitous cliffs and 
partly built of stone and w'ood. The 
exterior portions are constructed of drift¬ 
wood poles and covered with hides and 
earth. A low-covered passage, 10 to 15 ft. 
in length, leads under the center of the 
dwelling, which is entered by a small 
opening in the floor. In summer these 
caves sometimes become too damp for 
comfortable occupancy, and the people 
erect summer houses over them, which 
consist of a framework of wood covered 
with walrus hides, forming rooms from 
10 to 15 ft. square. These houses are 
anchored to the rocks with ropes of raw- 
hide which prevent their being blown 
into the sea (Jackson, Nelson). See Pile- 
dwellings. 

Among works treating of the cliff-dwell- 
ings of the arid region are: Bandelier in 
Papers Arch. Inst. Am., in, 1890; iv, 
1892; Birdsall in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 
xxin, 1891; Chapin, Land of the Cliff 
Dwellers, 1892; Fewkes in 17th and 22d 
Reps. B. A. E., 1898, 1904; Hewett in 
Smithson. Rep. 1904, 1905; Holmes in 
Rep. U. S. Geol. Surv. of Terr, for 1876, 
1879; Jackson, ibid., 1874, 1876; Lum- 
mis (1) Strange Corners, 1892, (2) Land 
of Poco Tiempo, 1893; Mearns in Pop. 
Sci. Mo., xxxvii, 1890; Mindeleff (V.) in 
8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891; Mindeleff (C.) 
in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Nordens¬ 
kiold, Cliff Dwellings of the Mesa Verde, 
1893; Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., xvm, 
1901; Prudden in Am. Anthrop., v, no. 
2, 1903; Simpson, Exped. into Navajo 
Country, 1850; Stevenson in Bull. Am. 
Geog. Soc., xvm, 1886. The Mexican 
cliff-houses are described by Lumholtz 
in Unknown Mexico, i, 1902, and by 
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., v, 1903; and 
those of Alaska by Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1899, and by Jackson in 
Metropol. Mag., Jan., 1905. See Archi¬ 
tecture , Habitations , Popular Fallacies, 
Pueblos. (w. h. n.) 

Cliff Palace. A celebrated ruined cliff¬ 
dwelling in Cliff canyon, Mesa Verde, 
s. Colo., 2 m. across the mesa, s. e. of 
the Spruce Tree House. It consists of a 
group of houses in a fair state of preser¬ 
vation, all connecting and opening one 
into another, the whole forming a cres¬ 
cent about 100 yds. from end to end. It 
contains ruins of 146 rooms, some of which 
are on a secondary ledge. The village 
contained 5 kivas or estufas. See H. R. 
Rep. 3703, 58th Cong., 3d sess.,1905, and 
consult Chapin and Nordenskiold cited 
above under Cliff-dwellings. 


310 


CJLISTOW A OK A-CLOTH! NO 


[b. a. e. 




buffalo' was worn for robes by tribes of 
the plains, and even for dresses and leg¬ 
gings by older people, but the leather 
was too harsh for clothing generally, 
while elk or moose skin, although soft, 
was too thick. Fabrics of bark, hair, 
fur, mountain-sheep wool, and feathers 
were made in the n. Pacific, Pueblo, 
and southern regions, 
and cotton has been 
woven by the Hopi 
from ancient times. 

Climate, environ¬ 
ment, elevation, and 
oceanic currents de¬ 
termined the materi¬ 
als used for clothing 
as well as'the demand 
for clothing. Sinew 
from the tendons of 
thelargeranimals was 
the usual sewing ma¬ 
terial, but fibers of 
plants, especially the 
agave, were also em¬ 
ployed. Bone awls 
were used in sewing; 
bone needles were B0Y S costume; western 

i i j i Eskimo, vMurdoch; 

rarely employed and 
were too large for fine work. The older 
needlework is of exceptionally good char¬ 
acter and shows great skill with the awl. 
Unlike many other arts, sewing was prac¬ 
tised by both sexes, and each sex usually 
made its own clothing. The typical and 
more familiar costume of the Indian man 
was of tanned buckskin and consisted 
of a shirt, a breechcloth, leggings tied 
to a belt or waist-strap, and low mocca¬ 
sins. The shirt, which hung free over 
the hips, was provided with sleeves and 
was designed to be drawn over the head. 
The woman’s costume differed from that 
of the man in the 
length of the shirt, 
which had short 
sleeves hanging 
loosely over the 
upper arm, and in 
the absence of 
the breechcloth. 

Women also wore 
the belt to confine 
the garment at the 
waist. Robes of 
skin, woven fabrics, 
or of feathers were 
also worn, but 
blankets (q. v.) were 
substituted for these 

later. The costume MAN ’ S costume; western Eskimo. 

presented tribal dif- 1murooch) 

ferences in cut, color, and ornamentation. 
The free edges were generally fringed, and 
quill embroidery and beadwork, paint¬ 
ing, scalp-locks, tails of animals, feathers, 
claws, hoofs, shells, etc., were applied 


Clistowacka. A Delaware village for¬ 
merly near Bethlehem, Pa.—Loskiel 
(1742) in Day, Penn., 517,1843. 

Clocktoot. A body of Shuswap of Kam¬ 
loops agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 194 in 1884. 

Clock-toot.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. I, 188, 1884. 

Clo-oose. A Nitinat village at the 
mouth of Suwany r., s. w. coast of Van¬ 
couver id.; pop. 80 in 1902.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 264, 1902. 

Cloquallum. A former subdivision and 
village of the Upper Chehalis on a river 
of the same name in w. Washington. 
Clickquamish—Ford in Ind. Alt. Rep., 341, 1857 
(called Lower Chehalis, but probably the same 
as the above.) Kla-kwul-lum.—Boas, inf’n, 1904. 
Luq lu'lEm. —Ibid. 

Clothing. The tribes of northern Amer¬ 
ica belong in general to the wholly 
clothed peoples, the exceptions being 
those inhabiting the warmer regions of s. 
United States and the Pacific coast, who 


FLORIDA WAR CHIEF; SIXTEENTH CENTURY. (DE BRY ) 

were semiclothed. Tanned skin of the 
deer family was generally the material for 
clothing throughout the greater part of 
the country, and dressed fur skins and 
pelts of birds sewed together were invari¬ 
ably used by the Eskimo. The hide of the 












BULL. 30 ] 


CLOTHING 


311 


as ornaments or charms (see Adornment). 
The typical dress of the Pueblo Indians is 
generally similar to that of the Plains 
tribes, except 
that it is made 
largely of woven 
fabrics. 

The Alaskan 
Eskimo costume 
also is quite sim¬ 
ilar, but the 
woman’s coat,is 
provided with a 
hood, and legging 
and moccasin are 
made into one 
garment, while 
the men wear 
breeches and 
boots. Besides the heavy fur outer cloth¬ 
ing, under-coat, under-trousers, and stock¬ 
ings (the latter in s. Alaska of twined 
grass) are found neces¬ 
sary by the Eskimo as a 
protection from the cold. 
They also make water¬ 
proof coats of the intes¬ 
tines of seal and walrus, 
which are worn on hunt¬ 
ing trips in the kaiak. 
In s. Alaska a long outer 
dress without hood, made 

WOMAN’S HOOD; WESTERN r . , u • 

Eskimo. (Murdoch) of squirrel pelts, is worn, 



Boots of Hudson Bay Eskimo, 
(turner) 



sian influence. 


a costume indicating Rus- 
In general the Eskimo 
costume was more complete than that of 
any tribes within 
the United States. 
TheBritish Colum¬ 
bia tribes made 
twined robes of 
frayed cedar bark 
and sagebrush 
bark,and bordered 
them with otter 
fur. The Chilkat 
of s. e. Alaska still 
weave remarkable 
ceremonial blan¬ 
kets of mountain- 
goat wool over a 
warp of twisted 
wool and bark. 

Among the Pa¬ 
cific coast tribes, 
and those along 
the Mexican bor¬ 
der, the Gulf, and 
the Atlantic coast, 
the customary gar¬ 
ment of women 
was a fringe-like 
skirt of bark, cord, 
strung seeds, or 
peltry, worn around the loins. In certain 
seasons or during special occupations only 
the loin band was worn. For occasional 



Chief's Costume; Haioa. 
(niblack) 


of strips of rabbit skin. Ceremonial cos¬ 
tume was much more elaborate than that 
for ordinary wear. Moccasins and leg¬ 
gings were worn throughout much of this 
area, but in the warmer parts and in Cali- 



use in cooler weather a skin robe or cape 
was thrown about the shoulders, or, under 
exceptional conditions, a large robe woven 


HUPA WOMAN’S CINCTURE. (mASOn) 



ANCIENT CLIFF-DWELLER’S SANDAL. (mASOn) 


fornia their use was unusual. Some 
tribes near the Mexican boundary wear 
sandals, and sandal-wearing tribes once 
ranged widely in the S. W. Those have 
also been found in Kentucky caverns. 



ANCIENT SANDAL FROM A KENTUCKY CAVE. (hOLMEs) 

Hats, usually of basketry, were worn by 
many Pacific coast tribes. Mittens were 
used by the Eskimo and other tribes 
of the far N. Belts of various materials 
and ornamentation not only confined the 
clothing but supported pouches, trinket 





















312 


CLOTHING 


[ R. A. E. 



Basketry Hat; Haida. 


bags, paint bags, etc. Larger pouches 
and pipe bags of fur or deerskin, beaded 
or ornamented with quill work, and of 
plain skin, netting, or woven stuff, were 
slung from the 
shoulder. Nepk- 
laces, earrings, 
charms, and brace¬ 
lets in infinite va¬ 
riety formed a part 
of the clothing, and 
( n i slack) th e wrist-guard to 
protect the arm from the recoil of the 
bow-string was general. 

Shortly after the advent of whites In¬ 
dian costume was profoundly modified 
over a vast area of 
America by the 
copying of Euro¬ 
pean dress and the 
use of traders’ stuffs. 

Knowledge of pre¬ 
historic and early 

historic primitive , x 

textile fabrics has 

been derived from impressions of fabrics 
on pottery and from fabrics themselves 
that have been preserved by charring in 




MODERN BUCKSKIN COSTUMES; WOMAN AND CHILD; KIOWA. 
(Russell, photo) 

fire, contact with copper, or protection 
from the elements in caves. 

A synopsis of the costumes worn 
by tribes living in the 11 geographical 
regions of northern America follows. 
The list is necessarily incomplete, for 
on account of the abandonment of 
tribal costumes the data are chiefly his¬ 
torical. 

(1) Eskimo {Northern). Men: Shirt- 
coat with hood, trousers, half or full 
boots, stockings, mittens. Women: 
Shirt-coat with large hood, trousers or 
legging-moccasins, belt and mittens, nee¬ 
dle-case, workbag, etc. ( Southern .) Men: 
Robe, gown, trousers, boots, hood on 
gown or cap. 

(2) Athapascan (Mackenzie and Yukon). 

Men: Shirt-coat, legging-moccasins, 


breechcloth, hat, and hood. Women: 
Long shirt-coat, legging-moccasins, belt. 

(3) Algonquian-Iroquois {Northern). 
Men: Robe, shirt-coat, long coat, trousers, 
leggings, moccasins, breechcloth, turban. 
( Virginia. ) Men and women: Cloak, 
waist garment, moccasins, sandals(?), 
breechcloth(?). ( Western.) Men: Robe, 
long dress-shirt, long leggings, moccasins, 
bandoleer bag. Women: Long dress- 
shirt, short leggings, moccasins, belt. 
( Arctic.) Men: 1 ,ong coat, open in front, 
short breeches, leggings, moccasins, 
gloves or mittens, cap or headdress. 
Women: Robe,shirt-dress, leggings, moc¬ 
casins, belt, cap, and sometimes a shoul¬ 
der mantle. 

(4) Southern or Muskhogean {Semi¬ 
nole). Men: Shirt, over-shirt, leggings, 
moccasins, breechcloth, belt, turban. 
Formerly the Gulf tribes wore robe, 
waist garment, and occasionally mocca¬ 
sins. 

(5) Plains. Men: Buffalo robe, shirt 
to knees or longer, breechcloth, thigh- 
leggings, moccasins, headdress. Women: 
Long shirt-dress with short ample cape 
sleeves, belt, leggings to the knees, 
moccasins. 

(6) North Pacific {Chilkat). Men: 
Blanket or bark mat robe, shirt-coat 
(rare), legging-moccasins, basket hat. 
Women: Tanned skin shoulder-robe, 
shirt-dress with sleeves, fringed apron, 
leggings(?), moccasins, breechcloth(?). 

(7) W ASIUNGTON-COLUMBIA {Scilish). 
Men: Robe, headband, and, rarely, shirt- 
coat, leggings, moccasins, breechcloth. 
Women: Long shirt-dress, apron, and, 
rarely, leggings, breechcloth, moccasins. 

(8) Shoshonean. Same as the Plains 
tribes. 

(9) California-Oregon {Hupa). Men: 
Robe and waist garment on occasion, 
moccasins (rarely); men frequently and 
old men generally went entirely naked. 
Women: Waist garment and narrow 
aprons; occasionally robe-cape, like Pu¬ 
eblo, over shoulders or under arms, over 
breast; basket cap; sometimes mocca¬ 
sins. {Central California). Men: Usually 
naked; robe, network cap, moccasins 
and breechcloth occasionally. Women: 
Waist-skirt of vegetal fiber or buck¬ 
skin, and basketry cap; robe and mocca¬ 
sins on occasion. 

(10) Southwestern {Pueblo). Men: 
Blanket or rabbit or feather robe, shirt 
with sleeves, short breeches partly open 
on outer sides, breechcloth, leggings to 
knees, moccasins, hair-tape, and head- 
band. Women: Blanket fastened over 
one shoulder, extending to knees; small 
calico shawl over blanket thrown over 
shoulders; legging-moccasins, belt. San¬ 
dals formerly worn in this area. Snow 







BULL. 30] 


CLOWWEW ALLA-CLUBS 


313 


moccasins of fur sometimes worn in win¬ 
ter. (Apache.) Men: Same as on plains. 
Women: Same, except legging moccasins 
with shield toe. Navaho, now like Pueb- 
t lo; formerly like Plains tribes. 

(11) Gila-Sonora ( Cocopa and Mo¬ 
have). Men: Breechcloth, sandals, some¬ 
times headband. Women: Waist gar¬ 
ment, usually of fringed bark, front and 
rear. (Pima.) Same as Plains, formerly 
cotton robe, waist cloth, and sandals. 

Consult the annual reports of the Bu¬ 
reau of American Ethnology; Bancroft, 
Native Races; Carr in Proc. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., 1897; Catlin, Manners and Customs 
N. Am. Inds., 1841; Dellenbaugh, North 
Americans of Yesterday, 1901; Goddard, 
The Hupa, Publ. Univ. of Cal., 1904; 
Hariot, Virginia, 1590, repr. 1871; Mason, 
Primitive Travel and Transportation, 
Rep. Nat. Mus., 1894; Schoolcraft, In¬ 
dian Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57; Willoughby 
in Am. Anthrop., vn, nos. 1, 3, 4, 1905. 

(w.h.) _ 

Clowwewalla. A branch of the Chi- 
nookan family formerly residing at the 
falls of Willamette r., Oreg. They are 
said to have been originally a large and 
important tribe, but after the epidemic of 
1829 were greatly reduced in numbers. 
In 1851 they numbered 13 and lived on 
the w. bank opposite Oregon City. They 
joined in the Dayton treaty of 1855, and 
later the remnant was removed to Grande 
Ronde res., Oreg. (l. f. ) 

Claugh-e-wall-hah.—Parker, Jour., 175, 1840. 

Clough-e-wal-lah.— Ibid., 178, 1846. Clough-e- 

wall-hah.—Ibid., 171, 1840. Clowewallas.—Coues, 
Henry-Thompson Jour., 811, 1897. Clow-we-wal- 
la.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 19, 1873. Fall In¬ 
dians.—Meek quoted by Medill in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848. GiLa'wewa- 
lamt.—Boas, field notes. Gitla'we-walamt.—Boas, 
MS., B. A. E. Katlawewalla.—Framboise quoted 
by Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., 
xi, 256, 1841. Keowewallahs.— Slocum (1835) in 
H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d sess., 42, 1839. 
Thlowiwalla —Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocab. 
Brit. Col., 11, 1884. Tla-we-wul-lo.—Lyman in 
Oregon Hist. Soc. Quar., I, 323, 1900. Tummewa- 
tas.— Slocum (1835) in H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 
3d sess., 42, 1839. Tumwater.—Dart in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 214, 1851. Wallamettes.—Slocum (1835) in 
H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d sess., 42, 1839. 
Willamette Falls Indians.—Stanley in Smithson. 
Misc. Coll., II, 61, 1862. Willammette Indians.— 
Lane in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 
171,1850. Willamette Tum-water band.— U. S. Ind. 
Treat. (1855), 19, 1873. Willhametts.—Slocum 
(1837) in Sen. Doc. 24, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 15,1838. 

Clubs. Every tribe in America used 
clubs, but after the adoption of more ef¬ 
fectual weapons, as the bow and the lance, 
clubs becamein many cases merely a part 
of the costume, or were relegated to cere¬ 
monial, domestic, and special functions. 
There was great variety in the forms of 
this weapon or implement. Most clubs 
were designed for warfare. Starting from 
the simple knobstick, the elaboration of 
the war-club may be followed in one line 
through the straight-shafted maul-headed 
club of the Zufii, Pima, Mohave, Paiute, 





Kickapoo, Kiowa, and Oto, to the slung-' 
shot club of other Pueblos, the Apache, 
Navaho, Ute, Oto, and Sioux, to the club 
with a fixed stone head of the Ute, Sho- 
shoni, Comanche, Kiowa, and 
the Siouan 
tribes. Another 
line begins with 
the carved, often 
flattened, club 
of the typical 
pueblos, the Zu- 
niand Hopi(see 
Rabbit sticks), 
and includes the 
musket-shaped 
club of the 
northern Sioux, 
and the Sauk 
and Fox and 
other Algon- 
quian tribes, and 
the flat, curved 
club with a 
knobbed head 
(Alg. pogamog- 
gan, Fr. casse- 
tete) belonging to 
some Sioux, and 
to the Chippe¬ 
wa, Menominee, and other timber Algon- 
quians. Clubs of this type are often set 
with spikes, lance-heads, knife-blades, or 
the like, and the elk horn with sharpened 
prongs belongs to this class. 

The Plains tribes and those of the 
n. forest country furnish many exam- 


AnciIent Stone 
Club; Oregon. 
(l-9) 


Ancient copper 
Club; Brit¬ 
ish Columbia, 
(smith) 



STONE-HEADED CLUBS OF THE PLAINS TRIBES 


pies of dangerous-looking ceremonial 
clubs of this character. There is, how¬ 
ever, archeologic evidence that rows of 
flint splinters or horn points were set in 





















314 


COAHUILTECAN 


t B. A. 13. 


clubs by the Iroquois and the Indians of 
North Carolina, forming a weapon like 
the Aztec maquahuitl (Morgan, League of 
Iroquois, 359, 1851). 

A series of interesting paddle-shaped 
clubs, ancient and modern, often with 
carved handles, are found in the culture 
area of the Salishan tribes. They are 
from 18 to 24 in. long, made of bone, stone, 
wood, and, rarely, copper. Shorter clubs, 
that could be concealed about the person, 
were also used. Le Moyne figures paddle¬ 
shaped clubs that were employed by Flo¬ 
ridian tribes which in structure and 
function suggest a transition toward the 
sword. 

Outside the Pueblos few missile clubs 
are found. Most Indian clubs are fur¬ 
nished with a thong for the wrist, and 
others have pendants, often a cow’s tail, a 
bunch of hawk or owl feathers, or a single 
eagle feather. 

The stone-headed clubs were usually 
made by paring thin the upper end of a 
wooden staff, bending it round the stone 
in the groove, and covering 
the withe part and the rest 
of the staff with wet raw- 
hide, which shrank in drying 
and held all. fast. In many 
cases, especially on the plains, 
the handle was 
inserted in a 
socket bored in 
the stone head, 
but this, it 
would seem, is 
a modern proc¬ 
ess. The head 
of the slung- 
shot club was a 
round or oval 
stone, entirely 
inclosed in 
rawhide, and 
the handle was 
so attached as 
to leave a plia¬ 
ble neck, 2 or 
3 in. long, between the head and the up¬ 
per end of the handle, also inclosed in 
rawhide. 

The heads of the rigid clubs were of 
hard stone, grooved and otherwise worked 
into shape, in modern times often double- 
pointed and polished, catlinite being 
sometimes the material. The pemmican 
maul had only one working face, the 
other end of the stone being capped with 
rawhide. The hide-working maul fol¬ 
lowed the form of the typical club, but 
was usually much smaller. 

The tribes of British Columbia and s. 
e. Alaska made a variety of clubs for 
killing slaves, enemies, salmon, seal, etc., 
and for ceremony. These clubs were 



Tlingit War-club of 
Stone; 1-7. (nib- 
lack) 



Tsimshian War- 
club of wood; 
1-12. (nib- 
lack) 


usually handsomely carved, inlaid, and 
painted. The Eskimo did not make clubs 
for war, but a few club-like mallets of 
ivory and deer-horn in their domestic arts. 

Mauls resembling clubs, and which 
could be used as such on occasion, were 
found among most tribes, the common 
form being a stone set on a short handle 
by means of rawhide, employed by women 
for driving stakes, beating bark and hide, 
and pounding pemmican. 

Ceremonial clubs and batons (q. v.) 
were used, though few specimens of these 
now exist. The chief man of the Mohave 
carried a potato-masher-shaped club in 
battle, and clubs of similar shape have 
been found in caves in s. Arizona. The 
Zuni employ in certain ceremonies huge 
batons made of agave flower stalks, 
as well as some of their ordinary club 
weapons, and in the New-fire ceremony 
of the Hopi a 
priest carries an 
agave-stalk club 
in the form of a 
plumed serpent 
(Fewkes). Bat¬ 
ons were often 
carried as badges 
of office by cer¬ 
tain officers of 
the Plains tribes 
and those of the 
N. W. coast. 

Captain John 
Smith describes 
clubs 3 ells long. 

The coup stick 
was often a cere¬ 
monial club. It 
is noteworthy 
that the parry¬ 
ing club was not 
known in America. See Batons , Ham¬ 
mers, Rabbit-sticks, Tomahawks. 

Consult Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 
1897; Knight, Savage Weapons at the 
Centennial, Smithson. Rep. 1879, 1880; 
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Mor¬ 
gan, League of the Iroquois, 1904; Niblack 
in Rep. Nat, Mus. 1888, 1890; Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Smith in Mem. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 1903. (w. h.) 

Coahuiltecan. A name adopted by 
Powell from the tribal name Coahuilteco 
used by Pimentel and Orozco y Berra to 
include a group of small, supposedly cog¬ 
nate tribes on both sides of the lower 
Rio Grande in Texas and Coahuila. The 
family is founded on a slender basis, and 
the name isgeographicrather than ethnic, 
as it is not applied to any tribe of the 
group, while most of the tribes included 
therein are extinct, only meager remnants 
of some two or three dialects being pre¬ 
served. Pimentel (Lenguas, n, 409,1865) 



Tlingit Club for Killing Slaves; 
1-11. (niblack) 







BULL. 30] 


CO AM A-COAQUE 


315 


says: “I call this language Tejano or 
Coahuilteco, because, according to the 
missionaries, it was the one most in use 
in the provinces of Coahuila and Texas, 
being spoken from La Candela to the 
Rio San Antonio.” The tribes speaking 
this language were known under the 
names of Pajalates, Orejones, Pacaos, 
Pacoas, Tilijayos, Alasapas, Pausanes, 
Pacuaches, Mescales, Pampopas, Tacames, 
Venados, Pamaques, Pihuiques, Borrados, 
Sanipaos, and Manos de Perro. The only 
book known to treat of their language is 
the Manual para administrar los santos 
sacramentos, by Fray Bartholome Garcfa, 
Mexico, 1760. Other names have been 
mentioned as possibly those of tribes 
belonging to the same family group, 
chiefly because they resided in the same 
general region: Aguastayas, Cachopos- 
tales, Carrizos (generic), Casas Chiquitas, 
Comecrudo, Cotonam, Pacaruja, Pakawa, 
Pastancoya, Patacal, Payaya, Pihuique, 
Tejones, and Tilijaes. In addition to 
these the following may possibly belong 
to the family, as the names where men¬ 
tioned are given in connection with those 
of some of the preceding tribes: Mesqui- 
tes, Parchinas, Pastias, Pelones, and Sali¬ 
nas. How many of the names given are 
applicable to distinct tribes and how many 
are synonyms is not known on account of 
the insufficiency of data. See Gatschet, 
Karankawa Inds., 1891. (a. s. g. c. t. ) 

=Coahuiltecan.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 68, 
1891. =Coahuilteco.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 
1864. =Tejano.—Pimentel, Lenguas, II, 409, 1865 
(or Coahuilteco). 

Coama. An Indian settlement of which 
Alarcon learned from natives of the Gulf 
of California region, and described as be¬ 
ing in the vicinity of Cibola (Zuni), but 
which was afterward found by him on 
his voyage up the Rio Colorado, or Buena 
Guia. See Alarcon (1540) in Hakluyt, 
Voy., hi, 514, 1600; Ternaux-Compans, 
Voy., ix, 326, 1838. 

Coana.—Ternaux-Compans, op. cit. 

Coanopa. A tribe, apparently Yuman, 
residing probably on or in the vicinity of 
the lower Rio Colorado early in the 18th 
century. They visited Father Kino while 
he was among the Quigyuma and are 
mentioned by him in connection with the 
Cuchan (Yuma) and other tribes (Vene¬ 
gas, Hist. Cal., i, 308,1759; Coues, Garces 
Diary, 551, 1900). Possibly the Cocopa. 

Coapites. An unidentified tribe or band 
formerly living in the coast region of the 
present State of Texas.—Rivera, Diario y 
Derrotero, leg. 2602, 1736. 

Coaque. A tribe formerly living on 
Malhado id., off the coast of Texas, where 
Cabezade Vaca suffered shipwreck in 1528. 
This was almost certainly Galveston id. 
Cabeza de Vaca found two tribes, each 
with its own language, living there—one 


the Han, the other the Coaque. The peo¬ 
ple subsisted from October to March 
on a root taken from the shoal water 
and on fish which they caught in weirs; 
they visited the mainland for berries and 
oysters. They displayed much affection 
toward theirchildren and greatly mourned 
their death. For a year after the loss of 
a son the parents wailed each day before 
sunrise, at noon, and at sunset. As soon 
as this cry was heard it was echoed by all 
the people of the tribe. At the end of the 
year a ceremony for the dead was held, 
after which “ they wash and purify them¬ 
selves from the stain of smoke.” They 
did not lament for the aged. The dead 
were buried, all but those who had * ‘ prac¬ 
tised medicine,” who were burned. At 
the cremation a ceremonial dance was 
held, beginning when the fire was kin¬ 
dled and continuing until the bones were 
calcined. The ashes were preserved, and 
at the expiration of a year they were 
mixed with water and given to the relatives 
to drink. During the period of mourn¬ 
ing the immediate family of a deceased 
person did not go after food, but had to 
depend on their kindred for means to 
live. When a marriage had been agreed 
on, custom forbade the man to address 
his future mother-in-law, nor could he do 
so after the marriage. According to Ca¬ 
beza de Vaca this custom obtained among 
tribes “living 50 leagues inland.” The 
houses of the Coaque were of mats and 
were set up on a “mass of oyster shells.” 
The men wore a piece of cane, half a 
finger thick, inserted in the lower lip, 
and another piece two palms and a half 
long thrust through one or both nipples. 
Owing to the starvation which faced the 
Spaniards after their shipwreck, they were 
forced to eat their dead; this action gave 
the natives such great concern that 
“they thought to kill ” the strangers, but 
were dissuaded by the Indian who had 
Cabeza de Vaca in charge. 

Gatschet (Karankawa Inds., i, 34,1891) 
is correct in identifying these Indians 
with the Cokes of Bollaert, but he is 
probably wrong in supposing the Cujanos 
are also the same. That the Coaques and 
the Cujanos or Cohani (q. v.) were dis¬ 
tinct seems to be indicated by the state¬ 
ment of an early Texan settler (Texas 
Hist. Quar., vi, 1903) that “the Cokes 
and Cohannies” were “but fragments of 
the Carancawa tribe.” Probably the 
latter are Cabeza de Vaca’s Quevenes. 
That the Coaque spoke a dialect of Karan¬ 
kawa is indicated as well by Bollaert 
(Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., n, 265, 1850), 
since he refers to them as a branch of the 
“Koronks,” a variant of Karankawa. 
In 1778, according to MeziOres, about 20 
families of Mayeyes and Cocos lived be- 


316 


COASSITT-COCHIMI 


[b. a. e. 


tween the Colorado and the Brazos, op¬ 
posite the island of La Culebra. The 
mounds and graves found on the coast of 
Texas probably belonged to the Coaque 
and kindred tribes, which are now ex¬ 
tinct. (a. c. F.) 

Biscatronges.—Baroia quoted by Gatschet, Ka- 
rankawa Inds., 34, 1891 (=‘weepers’). Biska- 
tronge.—Barcia, Ensayo, 263, 1723. Cadoques.— 
Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 82, 1869. Cahoques.— 
Cabe^a de Vaca (1529), Smith transl., 137, 1871. 
Caoques.—Ibid., 139. Capoques.—Ibid., 82. Ca- 
yoques.—Davis, op. cit. Coaquis.—Barcia, Ensayo, 
259,1723. Cocos.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602, 1736. 
Cokes.—Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., n, 
276, 1860. Planidores.—Barcia, Ensayo, 264, 1723. 
Pleureurs.—Martin, Hist. La., I, 116. Quoaquis.— 
Douay (1687) quoted by Shea, Discov. Miss. Val., 
207, 1852. Weepers.—Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 
34, 1891. 

Coassitt (‘atthe pines.’—Hewitt). An 
Indian rendezvous during King Philip’s 
war of 1675; situated about 56 m. above 
Hadley, Mass. (Appleton, 1675, in Barber, 
Mass. Hist. Coll., 294, 1839). Possibly 
Coosuc (q. v.). 

Coat. A rancheria, probably of the 
Maricopa, visited by Kino and Mange in 
1699.—Mange quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 358, 1889. 

Coatraw. A former Choctaw town 
which probably stood about 4 m. w. of 
Newton, Newton co., Miss., where are 
several broad low mounds. The name is 
evidently greatly corrupted and can not 
be interpreted. See Romans, Florida, 
map, 1775; Brown in Miss. Hist. Soc. 
Publ., vi, 444, 1902. 

Coatuit. A village of Praying Indians, 
probably belonging to the Nauset, near 
Osterville, Barnstableco., Mass., in 1674.— 
Bourne (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., i, 197, 1806. 

Coaxet. A village of Praying Indians 
formerly near Little Compton, Newport 
co., R. I., subject to the Wampanoag. 
As late as 1685 it contained about 100 
adults. Acoakset r. preserves the name. 
Coaksett.—Records (1664?) quoted by Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. 3, 10, 1848. Coaxet.—Drake, ibid., 14. 
Cokesit.—Rawson and Danforth (1698) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., x, 130,1809. Cooxet.—Hinck¬ 
ley (1685), ibid.,4th s., v, 133,1861. Cooxitt.—Ibid. 
Coquitt.—Cotton (1674), ibid., 1st s., I, 200, 1806. 
Coxit.—Ibid. 

Coayos. An unidentified tribe that 
lived near the Cutalchiches, Malicones, 
and Susolas, of whom Cabeza de Vaca 
(Smith trans., 72, 1851) heard during his 
stay with the Avavares in Texasin 1527-34. 

Cobardes. Given by Dominguez and 
Escalante (Doc. Hist. Mex., 2d s., i, 537, 
1854) as one of 5 divisions of the Ute in 
1776, and subdivided into the Huascari, 
Parusi, Yubuincariri, Ytimpabichi, and 
Pagampache. Some of these appear to 
be Ute and some Paiute. 

Cobora. An Opata village, now in ruins, 
near Guachinera, e. Sonora, Mexico. — 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 517, 
1892. 


Coca. A former Papago village in s. 
Arizona.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
19, 1863. 

Cocash. A name of the red-stalk or 
purple-stem aster (Asterpuniceus), known 
also as swan-weed, early purple aster, 
etc.; from one of the eastern dialects of 
the Algonquian language, signifying ‘ it is 
rough to the touch,’ in reference to the 
stem of the plant. (a. f. c.) 

Cochali. Given by Coxe in 1741 as the 
name of one of 4 small islands in Tennes¬ 
see r , 40 leagues above the Chickasaw, 
each occupied by a “ nation ’ ’ of the same 
name. The others were lvakick, Taho- 
gale, and Tali (Little Talasse). The lo¬ 
cation was in n. Alabama, and the names 
may perhaps be Creek. They do not 
seem to be Cherokee, although Cochali 
may possibly be kdts&W , implying ‘some¬ 
thing in a sheath.’ (j. m. ) 

Cochali.—Coxe, Carolana, 14, 1741 (after Sauvole, 
1701). Cochaly.—Ibid., map. 

Cochimi ( ko-clii-mi' ). A term originally 
used to designate a Yuman dialect sup¬ 
posed to have been spoken from about lat. 
26° to the n. limit of Lower California. It 
is doubtful, however, if any single dialect 
was spoken over such an extended area. 
It is here employed as a collective or di¬ 
visional name embracing many former 
tribes of the Californian peninsula from 
lat. 31° southward to about lat. 26°, in¬ 
cluding the settlements around Loreto. 
The tribes of this division were the most 
populous in the peninsula, though it 
would be difficult now to define their 
limits to the n. and s. in a strictly ethno¬ 
logic or linguistic sense. According to 
Hervas (Idea dell’ Universo, xxi, 79-80, 
1787) there existed in 1767 the following 
missions at which Cochimi dialects were 
spoken: San Xavier de Biaundo (pop. 
485); San Jos4 Comondu (pop. 360); 
Santa Borja (1,500 neophytes); Santa 
Maria Magdalena (300 neophytes and 
30 catechumens); La Purfsima Concep¬ 
cion (130 neophytes); Santa Rosalia de 
Mulege or Muleje (pop. 300); N. S. de 
Guadalupe (530 neophytes); San Ignacio 
(pop. 750), and Santa Gertrudis (pop. 
1,000). A few of these Indians are said 
to survive. Duflot de Mofras (Expl., 
i, 227, 1844) states that in his time 
the Cora, Edu, Pericu, and Cochimi 
were no longer distinct from one an¬ 
other, but Buschmann regards this as 
doubtful. 

The following are classed as Cochimi 
tribes or rancherias: Adac, Afegua, Ag- 
gavacaamanc, Amalgua, Amaniini, Am- 
etzilhacaamanc, Anchu, Avolabac, Ca- 
amancijup, Caddehi, Cadecuijtnipa, Cade- 
gomo, Cadeudebet, Cahelca, Cahelejyu, 
Cahelembil, Cahelmet, Camancnaccooya, 
Camanocacaamano, Cunitcacahel, Egui- 


L'.l'LL. 30] 


COCHISE-COCHITI 


317 


annacahel, Gabacamanini, Gamacaamanc, 
Gamaeaamancxa, Hualimea, Idelabuu, 
Idelibinaga, Ika, Jetti, Laimon, Liggige, 
Menchu, Mokaskel, Paviye, Paya, Piacaa- 
manc, Piagadme, San Athanasio, San Beni¬ 
to deAruy, San Francisco Bor ja, San Fran¬ 
cisco Vellicata, San Ignacio de Kadaka- 
man, San Jose deComondu, San Juan, San 
Miguel, San Sabas, Santa Aguida, Santa 
Gertrudis, Santa Lucia, Santa Maria, Santa 
Marta, Santa Monica, Santa Nynfa, San 
Pedro y San Pablo, Santisima Trinidad, 
Tahuagabacahel, Temedegua, Uacazil, Va- 
ba, Vabacahel, Vajaclemin, Yazacahel, 
Vinatacot. (h. w. h.) 

Cochiemes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860. 
Cochimas.—Mayer, Mexico, II, 38,1853. Cochime.— 
Venegas, Hist. Cal., ii, 340, 1759. Cochimi.—Her- 
vas, Idea dell’ Universo, xvir, 1784. Cochimies.— 
Clavijero, Hist Cal., 22, 1789, repr. 1852. Co- 
chimy.—Venegas, Hist.Cal., 11,324,1759. Cochini.— 
Ibid., 200. Colimies.—Humboldt, Atlas, carte 2, 
1811. Cotshimi.—Baegertin Smithson. Rep., 1864, 
393, 1865. Cuchimies.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 
53,1857. Cuchinu.—Ibid., 80. 

Cochise. A Chiricahua Apache chief, 
father and predecessor of Tazi Nachi. Al¬ 
though/ever at feud with the Mexicans, he 
gave no;trouble to the Americans until af¬ 
ter he went, in 1861, under a flag of truce, 
to the camp of a party of soldiers to deny 
that hiatribe had abducted a white child. 
The commanding officer was angered by 
this and ordered the visiting chiefs seized 
and bound because they would not confess. 
One was killed and four were caught, but 
Cochise, cutting through the side of a tent, 
made his escape with three bullets in his 
body and immediately began hostilities to 
avenge his companions, who were hanged 
by the Federal troops. The troops w T ere 
forced to retreat, and white settlements in 
Arizona were laid waste. Soon afterward 
the military posts were abandoned, the 
troops being recalled to take part in the 
Civil war. This convinced the Apache 
that they need only to tight to prevent 
Americans from settling in their country. 
Cochise and Mangas Coloradas defended 
Apache pass in s. e. Arizona against the 
Californians, who marched under Gen. 
Carleton to reopen communication be¬ 
tween the Pacific coast and the E. The 
howitzers of the California volunteers put 
the Apache to flight. When United States 
troops returned to resume the occupancy 
of the country after the close of the 
Civil war, a war of extermination was 
carried on against the Apache. Cochise 
did not surrender till Sept., 1871. When 
orders came to transfer his people from 
Canada Alamosa to the new Tularosa 
res., in New Mexico, he escaped with a 
band of 200 in the spring of 1872, and 
his example was followed by 600 others. 
Afterthe Chiricahua res. was established 
in Arizona, in the summer of 1872, he 
came in, and there died in peace June 8, 


1874. He was succeeded as chief by his 
son Taza. The southeasternmost county 
of Arizona bears Cochise’s name. See 
Apache , Chiricahua. 

Cochise Apache. —A former band of Chi¬ 
ricahua Apache, named from their leader. 
Cachees’s band.—Bell in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 
242, 1869. Cachise Apaches.—White, MS. Hist. 
Apaches, B. A. E., 1875. Cachise Indians.—Ibid. 
Cochees.—Ind. AfY. Rep., 141, 1868. Cochise.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 209, 1875. Northern Chiricahua 
Apaches.—Ibid. 

Cochiti ( Ko-chi-lV). A Keresan tribe 
and its pueblo on the w. bank of the Rio 
Grande, 27 m. s. w. of Santa Fe, N. Mex. 
Before moving to their present location 
the inhabitants occupied the Tyuonyi, or 
Rito de los Frijoles, the Potrero de las 
Yacas, the pueblo of Haatze on Potrero 
San Miguel or Potrero del Capulin, and 



FRANCISCO ARESO, A HEADMAN OF COCHITI 


the pueblo of Kuapa in the Canada de 
Cochiti. Up to this time, which was still 
before the earliest Spanish explorations, 
the ancestors of the present San Felipe 
inhabitants and those of Cochiti formed 
one tribe speaking a single dialect, but on 
account of the persistent hostility of their 
n. neighbors, the Tewa (to whom is at¬ 
tributed this gradual southerly movement 
and through whom they were compelled 
to abandon Kuapa), the tribe was divided, 
one branch going southward, where they 
built the pueblo of Katishtya (later called 
San Felipe), while the other took refuge 
on the Potrero Yiejo, where they estab¬ 
lished at least a temporary pueblo known 
as Hanut Cochiti. On the abandonment 
of this village they retired 6 or 7 m. s. e. 
to the site of the present Cochiti, on the 








318 


COCKAROUSE-COCKEROUSE 


[b. a. e.' 


Rio Grande, where they were found by 
Onate in 1598. The Cochiti took an 
active part in the Pueblo revolt of 1680, 
but remained in their pueblo for 15 
months after the outbreak, when, learn¬ 
ing of the return of Gov. Otermin to recon¬ 
quer New Mexico, they retreated with the 
Keresan tribes of San Felipe and Santo 
Domiqgo, reenforced by some Tewa from 
San Marcos and by Tigua from Taos and 
Picuris, to the Potrero Viejo, where they 
remained until about 1683, when it was 
reported that all the villages from San 
Felipe northward were inhabited. Be¬ 
tween 1683 and 1692 the Cochiti, with 
their San Felipe and San Marcos allies, 
again took refuge on the Potrero Viejo. 
In the fall of the latter year they were 
visited in their fortified abode (known to 
the Spaniards as Cieneguilla) by Vargas, 
the reconqueror of New Mexico, who in¬ 
duced them to promise to return to their 
permanent villages on the Rio Grande. 
But only San Felipe proved sincere, for 
in 1692 the Cochiti returned to the 
Potrero, where they remained until early 
in the following year, when Vargas, with 
70 soldiers, 20 colonists, and 100 warriors 
from the friendly villagers of San Felipe, 
Santa Ana, and Sia, assaulted the pueblo 
at midnight and forced the Cochiti 
to flee, the Indian allies leaving for the 
protection of their own homes. The 
force of Vargas being thus weakened, the 
Cochiti returned, surprised the Span¬ 
iards, and succeeded in liberating most 
of the Indian captives. Vargas remained 
a short time, then burned the pueblo and 
evacuated the Potrero, taking with him 
to Santa Fe a large quantity of corn and 
other booty and nearly 200 captive 
women. Cochiti was the seat of the 
Spanish mission of San Buenaventura, 
with 300 inhabitants in 1680, but it was 
reduced to a visita of Santo Domingo 
after 1782. These villagers recognize the 
following clans, those marked with an 
asterisk being extinct: Oshach (Sun), 
Tsits (Water), Itra (Cottonwood), Shu- 
whami (Turquoise), Mohkach (Mountain 
Lion), Kuhaia (Bear), Tanyi (Calabash), 
Shrutsuna (Coyote), Hapanyi (Oak), 
Yaka (Corn), Hakanyi (Fire), *Dyami 
(Eagle), *Tsin (Turkey), *Kuts (Ante¬ 
lope), *Shruhwi (Rattlesnake), *Washpa 
(Dance-kilt), *Kishqra (Reindeer?). In 
addition, Bandelier notes an Ivy and a 
Mexican Sage clan. Present population 
300. The Cochiti people occupy a grant 
of 24,256 acres, allotted to them by the 
Spanish government and confirmed by 
United States patent in 1864. Consult 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 139, 
1892. See also Keresan , Pueblos. 

(f. w. h.) 

Caehiti. —Bandelier, Gilded Man, 216, 1893 (mis¬ 
print). Chochite.— Barreiro,OjeadaSobreN.M£x., 


15, 1832. Chochiti.— Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., 
xvi, 114, 1871. Cocheli.— Vaugondy, map, Am6r- 
ique, 1778. Cocheti. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 263, 1889. 
Cocheto.— Ibid., 264. Cochilis. —Meriwether (1856) 
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 146,1857. 
Cochit. —Prince,N.Mex.,217,1883. Cochite. —Zarate- 
Salmeron ( ca. 1629) quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 600,1882. Co-chi-te-mi'.— Pac. R. R. Rep., 
in, pt. 3, 90, 1856 (given as own name). Cochite- 
iios.— Lummis in Scribner’s Mag., 92,1893. Cochi- 
teumi.— Cubas, Repub. of Mexico, 65, 1876. Co¬ 
chiti. —Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 102, 1871. 
Cochitinos.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Bui., I, 26, 
1883. Cochito. —Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
map, 1889. Cochitti.— Vargas (1694) quoted by 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 168, 1892. 
Cochity. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 194, 1865. Cocluti. — 
Curtis, Children of the S^n, 121,1883. Cotchita. — 
Kingsley, Stand.Nat. Hist.,vi, 183,1885. Cotchiti. — 
Powell in Am. Nat., XIV, 604, Aug., 1880. Cu- 
chili.— Simpson, Report Sec. War, map 4, 1850. 
Cuchin. —Abert, Report, map, 1848. Ko-cke. — 
Simpson, op. cit., 143 (proper name). Kotite. — 
Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 37, 1891 (Tewa 
name). Kof-ji-ti. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, hi, 260, 1890 (native name of pueblo). 
Kotu'ti.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Acoma 
name). Kotyit’.— -Ibid. Ko-tyi-ti.— Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 126, 1890 (native name of 
pueblo). Ootyi-ti. —Bandelier,Gilded Man,216,1893 
(0=Q). Pa‘nlai.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 
(Isleta and Sandia name; prob. sig. ‘soapweed 
place’). Pa’l-ab.— Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1885 (‘soapweed town’: Isleta name). 
Pa‘lahuide.— Ibid. (Isleta name for a Cochiti 
man). Qui'-me.— Pac. R. R. Rep., ill, pt. 3, 90, 
1856 (incorrectly given as Spanish name of the 
Cochitemi). St. Bartholomew.— Pike, Trav., 273, 
1811 (evidently Cochiti; intended for San Bue¬ 
naventura). San Bartolomeo. —Miihlenpfordt, 
Mejico, II, 533,1844 (mistake). San Buena Ventura 
de Cochita.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 91, 
1893. San Buenaventura de Cochiti. —Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1867 . 213, 1868. San Buena Ventura de 
Cochiti. —Alencaster (1805) in Meline, Two Thou¬ 
sand Miles. 212,1867. S. Buenaventura.— Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 281, 1889. 

Cockarouse. A word, derived from the 
Algonquian dialect of Virginia, used by 
early writers in the sense of a person of 
distinction. In the 17th century the term, 
written also cockerouse, was applied to a 
member of the Provincial Council. Bev¬ 
erly, in 1705, stated that “a cockarouse 
is one that has the lionorto be of the king’s 
or queen’s council.” Capt. John Smith 
(Hist. Va., 38, 1624) couples the word 
with iverowance as synonymous with “cap¬ 
tain ’ ’. Trumbull derives cockarouse from 
the Virginian cawcawaassough, ‘adviser,’ 

‘ urger,’ from which may be derived also 
caucus. (a. f. c.) 

Cockenoe (Algonq.: ‘interpreter’). A 
Montauk, made captive in the Pequotwar 
of 1637, who.afterward became the inter¬ 
preter of John Eliot, the missionary and 
Bible translator, and probably his first 
teacher in the Massachuset language. He 
died about the close of the 17th century, 
having rendered great service not only to 
individual settlers, but also to the authori¬ 
ties of New England and New York. With¬ 
out him the Eliot Bible, in all probability, 
would never have been prepared. See 
Tooker, John Eliot’s First Indian Teacher 
and Interpreter: Cockenoe de Long 
Island, 1896. (a.f. c.) 

Cockerouse. See Cockarouse. 


BULL. 30] 


COCOIGUI-COCOPA 


319 


Cocoigui. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz., visited by Father 
Sedelmair in 1744.—Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Cocomorachic. A Tarahumare settle¬ 
ment on the headwaters of the Rio Yaqui, 
lat. 28° 4CK, long. 107° 4CK, Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 
1864. 

Coconoon. A Yokuts tribe of Califor¬ 
nia, said by Johnston in 1851 (School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 413, 1854) to “live 
on the Merced r., with other bands, under 
their chief Nuella. There are the rem¬ 
nants of 3 distinct bands residing together, 
each originally speaking a different lan¬ 
guage. The aged of the people have 
difficulty in understanding each other. ” 
The vocabulary given by Johnston is 
Yokuts. Merced r. is, however, otherwise 
known to have been inhabited only by 
Moquelumnan tribes. The Coconoon are 
also mentioned by Royce (18th Rep. B. A. 
E., 780), together with 5 other tribes from 
Tuolumne and Merced rs. (all of which 
w r ere undoubtedly Moquelumnan), as 
ceding all their lands, by treaty of Mar. 
19, 1851, excepting a tract between the 
Tuolumne and the Merced. If these state¬ 
ments about the Coconoon are correct, 
they constituted a small detached division 
of the Mariposan family situated among 
Moquelumnan groups midway between 
the main body of the stock to the s. and 
the Cholovone to the n. w. 

Co-co-noon.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doe. 61, 
32d Cong., 1st sess., 23,1852. 

Cocopa ( ko'-ko-pa ). A division of the 
Yuman family which in 1604-05 lived in 9 
rancherias on the Rio Colorado, 5 leagues 
above its mouth. At a later period they 
also extended into the mountains of Lower 
California, hence were confined almostex- 
clusively to Mexico. According to Heint- 
zelman, in 1856, the tribe was formerly 
strong in numbers and could muster 300 
warriors; theirtotal numberwasestimated 
by Fray Francisco Garc£s in 1775-76 at 
3,000, but there are now’ only 800 in n. 
Lower California, in the valley of the Rio 
Colorado. The Cocopa were reputed to be 
less hostile than the Yuma or the Mohave, 
who frequently raided their villages; 
nevertheless they were sufficiently war¬ 
like to retaliate when necessary. Garces 
said of them in 1776 that they had always 
been enemies of the Papago, Jalliquamai 
(Quigvuma), and Cajuenche, but friendly 
tow’ard the Cuneil. Although spoken of 
as being physically inferior to the cog¬ 
nate tribes, the males are fully up to 
and in some cases rather above normal 
stature, and are well proportioned, while 
the females appear also to be of at least 
ordinary size and are also w ell developed. 
Heintzelman (H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong. 3d sess., 43,1857) says“ they so much 


resemble the Cuchan (Yuma) in arms, 
dress, manners, and customs it is difficult 
to distinguish one from another.” They 
depended for subsistence chiefly on corn, 
melons, pumpkins, and beans, which they 
cultivated, adding native grass seeds, 
roots, mesquite beans, etc. The Cocopa 
houses of recent time range in character 
from the brush arbor for summer use to 



COCOPA MAN. (MCGEE) 


the wattled hut, plastered outside and in¬ 
side with mud, for winter occupancy. 
Polygamy was formerly practised to some 
extent. They universally cremate their 
dead. The Cuculato are mentioned as a 
Cocopa division and Llagas as the name 
applied by the Spaniards to a former 
group of Cocopa rancherias. (f. w. n.) 
Cacopas.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 390, 1863. Cacupas.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 96, 1853. Cocapa.— 







320 


COCORI-COFA 


t B. A. E. 


Ind. Aff. Rep., 361, 1859. Coeapas. —Z&rate-Sal- 
meron (ca . 1629) in Land of Sunshine, 106, Jan., 
1900. Cochopas. —Stratton, Oatman Captivity, 175, 
1857. Co-co-pah. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 116, 
1852. Co-co-pas. —Derby, Colorado River, 16,1852. 
Cucapa. —Carets (1776), Diary, 434, 1900. Cuca- 
pachas. —Mayer, Mexico, IT, 38, 1853. Cucassus.— 
Hinton, Handbook to Ariz., 28,1878. Cucopa.— 
Forbes, Hist. Cal., 162, 1839. Cu-cu-pahs.— Kern 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 38,1854. Cuhanas.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864 (Cucapd, or; but 
Cubana—Cuchan=Yuma). Cupachas.— Mayer, 



COCOPA WOMAN 


Mexico, ii, 300, 1853. Kokopa. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 
246, 1877. Kukapa.— A, L. Kroeber, infn., 1905 
(Mohave name). Kwikapa.— Ibid. (Mohave 
name, alternative form). 

Cocori. A former Yaqui settlement s. e. 
of the lower Rio Yaqui, Sonora, Mexico, 
with an estimated population of 4,000 in 
1849. It is now a white Mexican town, 
the only Yaqui living there being those 
employed as laborers. See Escudero, 


Not. Son. y Sin., 100, 1849; Velasco, 
Noticias de Sonora, 84,1850. 

Cocori.— Hardy, Trav. in Mexico, 438, 1829. Coco¬ 
run.— Miihlenpfordt, Mejico, II, pt. 2, 419, 1844. 
Espiritu Santo de Cocorin. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
355, 1864. 

Cocospera (‘ place of the dogs ’). A for¬ 
mer Pima settlement on the headwaters of 
Rio San Ignacio,lat. 31°, Sonora, Mexico; 
pop. 74 in 1730,133 in 1700. The Apache 
compelled the abandonment of the vil¬ 
lage in 1845. See Bartlett, Pers. Narr., 
i, 417, 1854; Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 
563, 1884. 

Cocospara. —Kino, map (1702) in Stdcklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Cocospera. —Kino (1696) in 
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 267, 1856. Coespan.— 
Rudo Ensayo (1762), 148, 1863. Coscospera. — 
Pineda (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., n, 10, 
1856. Santiago. —Bancroft, No. Mex. States, 1,563, 
1884 (after early doc.). Santiago Cocospera. — 
Rivera (1730), ibid., 514. 

Cocoueahra. Indians who took part in 
the Santa Isabel treaty with the Diegue- 
itos of s. California in 1852. They may 
have been Yuman or Shoshonean, as 
some of the latter entered into the treaty. 
Co-con-cah-ras.—Wozencraft (1852) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 289. 1853. Co-cou- 
eah-ra.—Wozencraft (1852) in H. R. Ex. Doc 76, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 131,1857. 

Cocoyes. Mentioned in 1598 by Onate 
(Doc. Ined., xvi, 114, 303, 1871), in con¬ 
nection with the Apache, as a wild tribe of 
the New Mexican region. Judging from 
the name, it is possible that one of the 
Yuman tribes far to the w. was intended. 

Cocoyomes. A mythical people, said to 
be regarded by some of the Tarahumare 
as their ancient enemies, by others as 
their ancestors; they are also spoken of 
as having been the first people. They 
were short of stature, lived in caves in 
the high cliffs, and subsisted chiefly on 
herbs, especially a small agave, and were 
also cannibals. According to one version, 
once when they were very bad the sun 
came down and burned most of them to 
death; the survivors escaped to 4 large 
caves at Zapuri, in which they built adobe 
houses, but the Tarahumare finally be¬ 
sieged the place for 8 days, when the 
Cocoyomes perished from hunger. An¬ 
cient ruins near Morelos, s. of Batopilas, 
in s. w. Chihuahua, Mexico, are also at¬ 
tributed to them by the Tarahumare, 
although according to Hrdlicka these are 
of Tepehuane origin. See Lumholtz, 
Unknown Mexico, i, 193, 441, 1902. 

Coe Hadjo’s Town. A former settlement 
of negro slaves affiliated with or belonging 
to the Seminole, w. of Oclawaha r., in 
Marion co., Fla. Perhaps identical with 
Oclawaha town (q. v.). 

Coe Hadjos Town. —Taylor, War map of Fla., 1839. 
King Heijah’s.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
307, 1822. 

Coerntha. A former town of the 
Tuscarora in North Carolina, situated 
on Neuse r., about 2 days’ journey above 











BULL. 30] 


COF AQUI-COIRA COENTANON 


321 


the present Newbern, Craven co. (De 
Graffenried in N. C. Col. Rec., i, 927, 
1886 ). 

Cofaqui. A (Muskhogean?) settlement 
in e. Georgia, through which De Soto 
passed in Apr., 1540. 

Cafaquj.—Map of 1597 in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 128, 
1887. Cofachis.—Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, 
Ky., i, 30,1824. Cofaqui.—Garcilasso de la Vega, 
Florida, 113, 1723. Cofoque.—Biedma in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., II, 100, 1850. Cofoqui.—Biedma in 
Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 179, 1851. 

Cofitachiqui. A town and province of 
the Yuchi(?), situated on Savannah r.; 
visited by De Soto in 1540. According 
to Pickett (Inv. of Ala., 41, 1849) there 
was a tradition among the Indians about 
1735 that the town stood on the e. bank 
at Silver Bluff, Barnwell co., S. C., and 
this view is taken by Jones (De Soto in 
Ga., 1880). On the other hand, the 
name of Vandera’s Canos (Smith, Col. 
Doc. Fla., i, 16, 1857), identified with 
this place, is preserved in Cannouchee, 
a n. w. affluent of Ogechee r. f Ga., while 
another place called Cannouchee is in 
Emanuel co., Ga. The province was 
governed at the time of De Soto’s visit 
by a woman who was at war with the 
people of Ocute and Cofaqui. She gave 
the Spaniards a friendly reception and 
entertained them for several days. This 
friendship was ill requited by the Spanish 
leader, who carried her away with him a 
prisoner, but she managed to escape in 
the mountainous region of n. e. Georgia, 
returning to her village with a negro 
slave who had deserted the army. Her 
dominion extended along the river to 
about the present Habersham co., Ga., 
and westward probably across a third or 
more of the state. (c. t.) 

Cafitachyque.—Biedma in Ternaux-Compans, 
Voy., xx, 63, 1841. Canos.—Vandera (1569) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., II, 290, 1875. Canosi.— 
Ibid. Cofaehiqui.—Garcilasso de la Vega, Florida, 
105,1723. Cofaciqui.—Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 
337,1881. Cofetafque.—Vandera (1569) in French, 
op. cit. Cofitachyque.—Biedma in Hakluyt Soc., 
Publ., IX, 180,1851. Cutifachiqui.—Gentl. of Elvas 
(1557) in French, op. cit., II, 143, 1850. Cutifiachi- 
qua.—Stevens, Hist. Ga., 22,1847. 

Cogoucoula (prob. ‘swan people,’ from 
Choctaw okok, ‘ swan ’). One of the nine 
villages constituting the Natchez confed¬ 
eracy in 1699.—Iberville in Margry, D6c., 
iv, 179, 1880. 

Coguinachi. Given by Velasco (Bol. 
Soc. Mex. Geog. Estad., l a s., x, 705, 
1863) as one of the 4 divisions of the 
Opata, inhabiting principally the valley 
of the Rio Babispe, a tributary of the 
Yaqui, and adjacent small streams in e. 
Sonora, Mexico. Their villages, so far 
as known, were: Bacadeguachi, Guazavas, 
Matape (in part), Mochopa, Nacori, 
Oposura, Oputo, and Tonichi. As the di¬ 
vision was based on neither linguistic hor 
ethnic characters, Coguinachi, Teguima, 
and Tegui were soon dropped as classifi- 
catory names. 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-21 


Cagiiinachi.—Davila, Sonora Hist., 317, 1894. 
Opatas cogiiinachis.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 344, 
1864. 

Cohannet (probably from quuneuet , or 
quuiunet, ‘long’). A former Wampa- 
noag village about Fowling Pond, near 
Taunton, Bristol co., Mass. King Philip 
often made it a hunting station. When 
John Eliot and others began their mis¬ 
sionary work among the Indians, a part 
of those at Cohannet went to Natick, but 
the majority removed to Ponkapog about 
1654. (.t. m. ) 

Cohanat.—Forbes (1793) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., in, 166, 1794. Cohannet.—Mayhew (1653), 
ibid., 3d s., iv, 234,1834. 

Cohas. A tribe mentioned with the 
Chickasaw in 1748 as having been at¬ 
tacked by the Huron (N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., x, 138,1858). Possibly the Creeks. 

Cohatchie. A former Upper Creek 
town on the left bank of Coosa r., in s. w. 
Talladega co., Ala.—Royce in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., pi. cviii, 1899. 

Collate. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz., visited by Father 
Sedelmair in 1744 (Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 366, 1889). It was apparently 
distinct from Gohate. 

Cohes. A division of Maidu in Sutter 
co., Cal., numerous in 1851. 

Cohes.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 244,1851. Cohias.—Wozen- 
craft (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, 
sess., 206, 1853. 

Cohog. See Quahog. 

Cohosh. The common name of several 
plants; written also cohush. Black co¬ 
hosh is black snakeroot, or bugbane 
( Cimicifuga racemosd ); blue cohosh is 
squawroot ( Caulophyllum thalictroides) ; 
white cohosh is white baneberry ( Actsea 
alba); red cohosh is red baneberry (A. 
rubra). The word comes from one of the 
e. dialects of Algonquian, probably de¬ 
rived from the root represented by the 
Massachuset kushki ‘ rough ’. ( a. f. c. ) 

Cohoth. A province of the s. coast of 
South Carolina, mentioned by Ayllon in 
1520.—Barcia, Ensayo, 5, 1723. 

Cohowofooche. A former Seminole town, 
of which Neamathla was chief, situated 
23 m. n. w. of St Marks, Wakulla co., 
Fla.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th 
Cong., 27, 1826. 

Cohush. See Cohosh. 

Coila. ( Koi-ai-vla, ‘panther comes 
there’). A former Indian town on a 
creek of the same name in Carroll co., 
Miss. This region may originally have 
been occupied by some of the Yazoo r. 
tribes, but in 1830, when Coila is referred 
to, it was probably occupied by Choctaw. 
See Halbert in Trans. Ala. Hist. Soc., in, 
72, 1899. 

Quiilla. —Records quoted by Halbert, op. cit. 

Coiracoentanon. Mentioned by La Salle 
as a tribe or band of the Illinois living 
on a branch of Illinois r. about 1680. 
No Illinois tribe of this name is known. 


322 


COIKACOITAGA-COLLECTING 


[ B. A. E. 


Caracontauon. —Coxe, Carolana, 17, 1741. Caraco- 
tanon. —Ibid., map. Coiracoentanon. —La Salle 
(ca. 1680) in Margry, D6c., II, 201,1877. Koeracoe- 
netanon. —Ibid., 42. Koracocnitonon. —Hennepin, 
New Discov., 310,1698. Korakoenitanon. —La Salle, 
op. cit., 96. Kouivakouintanouas. —Gravier (ca. 
1700) in Tailhan, Perrot, 221, 1864. 

Coiracoitaga. A tribe mentioned by La 
Salle (Margry, Dec., ii, 149, 1877) in con¬ 
nection with the Mahican, Manhattan, 
Minnisink, and others in 1681. 

Cojate. A Papago village of 103 fami¬ 
lies in 1865, in s. w. Pinal co., Ariz., near 
the present town of the same name. 
Coajata. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865. Cobota.— 
Browne, Apache Country, 291,1869 (misprint from 
Poston). Cojate. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
19, 1863. Cojota.— Poston in Ind. Aff. Rep., 385, 
1863. Del Cojate. —Bailey, ibid., 208, 1858. 

Cojoya. An unidentified people, de¬ 
scribed by Fray Geronimo de Zarate-Sal- 
meron, about 1629 (Land of Sunshine, 
183, Feb., 1900), as living in a fertile and 
well-watered country “80 leagues before 
reaching New Mexico from the w. side, 
separated by 2 days of travel from the 
Rio del Norte [Rio Grande] and the 
King’s highway.” They raised cotton, 
corn, and other vegetables, and wove 
very fine, thin mantas. Their neighbors 
to the e. were the Gorretas (Mansos), 
and on the s. were their enemies, the 
Conchas, or Conchos, who lived about 
the junction of the Rio Conchas and the 
Rio Grande, in Chihuahua, Mexico. Za- 
rate-Salmeron adds that the Cojoya had 
hitherto been believed to be the Guagua- 
tu (q. v.). As here given their habitat 
coincides somewhat with that of the Jum- 
ano (q. v.), as given by Espejo in 1582. 

Cojuat. A former Diegueno rancheria 
near San Diego, s. Cal.—Ortega quoted 
by Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i, 254, 1884. 

Cokah (‘eyes open’). A Cree band of 
100 skin lodges on Lac Qu’apelle, Assini- 
boia, Canada, in 1856; named from their 
chief.—Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 237, 1862. 

Colbert, William. A Chickasaw chief. 
During the Revolutionary war he aided 
the Americans, and in the army of Gen. 
Arthur St Clair led the Chickasaw allies 
against the hostile tribes and was known 
as the great war-chief of his nation. In 
the war of 1812 he served 9 months in 
the regular infantry, then returned to 
lead his warriors against the hostile 
Creeks, whom he pursued from Pensa¬ 
cola almost to Apalachicola, killing many 
and bringing back 85 prisoners to Mont¬ 
gomery, Ala. He was styled a general 
when he visited Washington at the head 
of a Chickasaw delegation in 1816. In 
the treaties ceding Chickasaw lands to 
the United States the name of Gen. Col¬ 
bert appears, except in the ones to which 
was signed the name Piomingo, which 
also was borne by a captain of the Chicka¬ 
saw in the St Clair expedition, and was 
the pseudonym under which John Rob¬ 


ertson, “a headman and warrior of the 
Muscogulgee nation,” wrote The Savage 
(Phila., 1810). 

Colcene. One of the 3 bands into which 
theTwanaof n. w. Washington are divided. 
Colcene. —Fells in Smithson. Rep. 1887, 606, 1889 
(name given by the whites). Colcins. —Ibid. Col- 
seed.— Ibid. Kolsids.— Ibid, (own name). Kol- 
sins. —Ibid. Kwulseet. —Gibbs in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., I, 178, 1877. Quilcene. —Eells, op. cit. 
(name given by the whites). 

Colchopa. A body of Salish of Wil¬ 
liams Lake agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 40 in 
1889, the last time the name appears.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1889, 271. 

Cold Country. About 1756 some Indian 
allies of the French “of the tribe called 
the Cold Country,” and armed with 
bows, attacked the English near Ft Ed¬ 
ward, N. Y. They were recent allies of 
the French and sucked the blood of the 
slain. Mentioned by Niles (about 1761) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 436, 
1861. Probably some remote tribe toward 
Hudson bay. 

Colete. One of the two principal vil¬ 
lages of the Ivoasati on lower Trinity r., 
Tex.—Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., ii, 282, 1850. 

Coligoa. A village visited by the De 
Soto expedition in 1542 and described as 
in a very fertile country, in which the 
troops made salt, “toward the moun¬ 
tains,” and by a river at the foot of a 
hill; possibly in w. Arkansas or on the 
border of the Ozark mts. 

Coligoa. —Gentl. of Elvas in Hakluyt Soc. PubL, 
ix, 105, 1851. Coligua.— Biedma(1544) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., ii, 106,1850. Colima. —Garcilassode 
la Vega, La Florida, 188, 1723. Province de Sel. — 
Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 420,1881. Provincia 
de la Sal. —Garcilasso de la Vega, op. cit., 189. 

Colina (‘small hill’). A wild tribe of 
New Mexico in the 18th century (Villa- 
Sefior, Theatre Am., ii, 412, 1748); not 
identified, but probably an Apache band. 

Collecting. Trained observers, whose 
task is to bring together material and 
data on which accurate generalization 
may be based, play an important part in 
the development of the science of anthro¬ 
pology, in which minute detail and exact 
differentiation have increasing weight. 
The scientific value of an ethnologic col¬ 
lection depends particularly on the knowl¬ 
edge and skill of the collector. 

Archeology. —In this branch there are 
for examination caves, rock-shelters, 
mounds, village and camp sites, shell- 
heaps, refuse-heaps, mines and quarries, 
workshops, pueblos, cliff-ruins, cavate 
lodges, garden beds, irrigation works, 
forts, altars, shrines, springs, towers, 
stone mounds, cemeteries, camp sites, etc. 
While each of these requires individual 
treatment, depending on the conditions, 
and the judgment of the explorer may 
modify the methods, modern science re¬ 
quires that all data be reduced to meas¬ 
urement and graphic delineation. Thus 


BULL. 30] 


COLLECTING 


323 


the following points are essential: (1) 
Accurate location of the site on a map; 
(2) photographs of site; (3) plan, with 
measurement of areas to be worked; (4) 
stakes or datum marks placed; (5) re¬ 
moval of debris and location of specimens 
with reference to datum marks with the 
aid of camera and pencil; (6) field num¬ 
bers on specimens and references to these 
numbers in the notebook; (7) care of 
specimens after collection. 

Mounds are explored by means of 
trenches and then stripped of the upper 
part, which rarely contains anything of 
importance, but the contour of the mound 
is noted and one or more sections plotted. 
When the zone of deposits is reached a 
layer of earth is removed. The aspect of 
skeletons and other objects exposed is 
recorded and photographed and their po¬ 
sition marked. Village sites near mounds 
are prolific in material illustrating the 
life of the former occupants. In the 
alluvial soil of the prairie states, wherever 
mounds abound such sites may be located 
by sounding the earth with an iron rod. 
The earth is then stripped off as in a 
mound, or it may be found preferable 
to excavate by “benching.” 

The top soil of a cave should be 
searched, calcareous deposits, if there be 
any, broken up and removed, and the 
underlying soil benched and thrown 
back, as in a mound. Specimens from 
different levels below the datum stakes 
or marks are kept separate. A prelimi¬ 
nary exploration of the cave floor is some¬ 
times made by means of test pits. It will 
be found usually that the front of a cave 
in the zone of illumination yields most 
material, and it is essential to examine 
the talus outside the mouth of a cave if 
any exists. 

The site of an ancient pueblo is first 
searched for surface relics, and the ceme¬ 
tery is located. It is customary to ascer¬ 
tain the limits of the cemetery by test 
excavations and to work it by trenches, 
throwing the earth back and carefully 
examining it for small artifacts as the ex¬ 
cavation progresses. On account of the 
unproductiveness of excavation in rooms 
and the great labor and expense required 
to remove the debris, no pueblos have 
been thoroughly explored. Generally a 
few living rooms and kivas only have 
been investigated. 

No indication or object is insignificant. 
In turning up the soil around ancient 
habitations a decayed fragment of cloth, 
a wooden implement, or any relic of or¬ 
ganic material may extend knowledge. 
The various offal of debris heaps, such as 
bones of animals, shells, and seeds, are 
secured, and an endeavor is made to ob¬ 
serve, collect, and record everything that 
is brought to light. Every site under 


examination demands attention, not 
merely for what it may yield in tangible 
results; the environment, with its biolog¬ 
ical and geological resources, topography, 
and meteorology, requires to be studied. 
Notes and collections relating to this 
subject add much to the clearness of an 
appreciation of the conditions which 
aided or hampered the development of 
culture in a given locality. The relation 
of sites one to another, and the grouping 
or separation of sites in a locality, are 
necessary subjects of inquiry, as are the 
presence or absence in a neighborhood of 
springs, trails, shrines, detached houses, 
canals and reservoirs, and pictographs. 

Somatology .—Human remains are fre¬ 
quently encountered in archeologic work, 
and such material is carefully collected, 
every bone being saved if possible. The 
surface of hard ground may be broken 
with a pick and the excavation continued 
with a shovel. As soon as anv part of 
the human skeleton is reached, a short 



METHOD OF EXHUMING A HUMAN SKELETON. (w. C. MILLS) 


stick, a trowel, and a stiff brush are 
used for exposing the bones. Often the 
bones are fragile and should not be lifted 
out until the earth has been loosened 
around them. Exposure to sunlight and 
dry air usually hardens them. The bones 
of each skeleton should be marked with 
serial numbers, preferably with an ani¬ 
line pencil, and packed in some light, 
elastic material. It is better to pack 
skulls apart from the rest of the bones. 
The collection of somatological data on 
the living requires familiarity with the 
use of instruments, a knowledge of anat¬ 
omy and physiology, and some training 
in laboratory work. 

Ethnology .—In this wide field it is 
necessary to specialize in order to produce 
effective results. Social organization, 
customs, language, arts, folklore, and re¬ 
ligion each demands adequate time and 
the closest attention for its study. With 
the aid of a manual, like “Notes and 
Queries,” used by the Anthropological 
Institute of Great Britain, the important 







324 


COLOC-COLORADAS 


[b. a. e. 


data concerning a tribe may be sketched, 
giving material of value for comparative 
study as well as indicating subjects to be 
taken up by specialists. Ethnographic 
objects form the bulk of collections. In¬ 
numerable collectors gather material of 
this kind for various purposes, wittingly 
or unwittingly becoming contributors to 
the advance of anthropology. As a rule, 
however, striking objects only are ac¬ 
quired in desultory collecting. Common 
tools, appliances, and products do not 
attract the attention they merit. 

The most obvious materials for collec¬ 
tions among aboriginal tribes may be 
classed under the following headings: 
Aliment, habitations and appurtenances, 
vessels and utensils, clothing, adornment, 
implements, transportation, measuring 
and valuing, writing, games and pastimes, 
music, art, language, domestic life, social 
life, government, and religion. Physical 
man and his surroundings are prime ob¬ 
jects of study. Collections will comprise 
specimens of implements, clothing, etc., 
actually or formerly in use, models care¬ 
fully made, photographs and drawings, 
and descriptions of objects, customs, in¬ 
stitutions of society, laws, beliefs, and 
forms of worship. A thorough investiga¬ 
tion of a single tribe requires time and 
patience, but the result of painstaking 
work in one tribe renders easier the ex¬ 
amination of other tribes. Wherever 
possible, photographs of Indians, front 
and profile views, should be taken. Casts 
of faces are desirable, and with a little 
instruction a collector can easily make 
them. 

The field collector’§ outfit varies so 
much with circumstances and the work 
to be carried on that it is not possible to 
enumerate all the articles needed, yet a 
few desiderata of general utility may be 
indicated: String and stick tags, twine, 
glue, tissue paper, coarse muslin, cotton 
batting, small boxes, pencils, notebooks, 
quadrille paper, envelopes, and tape meas¬ 
ure are essential. A 5 by 7 camera with 
glass plates is the most useful kind, 
though smaller film cameras are more 
convenient. The panorama camera is 
very useful for extended views or scenery. 
It is advantageous to take a film-develop¬ 
ing machine, since by its means one may 
be sure of results. 

For excavation, long-handled shovels, 
picks for rough work in hard soil, trow¬ 
els, a long-bladed knife, and a whisk 
broom are sufficient. These tools, except 
trowels and brush, can nearly always be 
procured in the locality where the work 
is to be carried on. For work in dry, 
dusty caves, cheesecloth or sponge aspira¬ 
tors may be improvised, and acetylene 
lanterns or pocket electric lights used to 
furnish smokeless light, though the dif¬ 


fused light of candles sometimes gives 
more satisfactory results. 

For work in somatology numerous ac¬ 
curate instruments are needed, which, 
with the methods, render essential a course 
of instruction in an anthropological lab¬ 
oratory. The instruments required are 
sliding calipers, open calipers, a wooden 
compass, a wooden standard graduated 
meter, a measuring rod, and a tape meas¬ 
ure. A notebook ruled for recording 
data should be provided. 

For casting, dental plaster, vaseline or 
other grease, soap, and cheesecloth are 
necessary. 

Collections in ethno-botany are readily 
carried on in connection with other field 
work. For this purpose one may take 30 
driers, with newspapers for inner sheets. 
The driers may be strapped to a board 
or between two boards of suitable dimen¬ 
sions; in camp, stones or other heavy ob¬ 
jects placed on the package furnish the 
necessary pressure. 

Consult Holmes and Mason, Instructions 
to Collectors of Historical and Anthro¬ 
pological Specimens, 1902; Hrdlicka, Di¬ 
rections for Collecting Information and 
Specimens for Physical Anthropology, 
1904; Mason (1) Directions for Collect¬ 
ing Basketry, 1902, (2) Ethnological Di¬ 
rections Relative to the Indian Tribes of 
the United States, 1875; Mills, Explora¬ 
tions of the Gartner Mound and Village 
Site, 1904; Niblack, Instructions for tak¬ 
ing Paper Molds of Inscriptions in Stone, 
Wood, Bronze, etc., 1883; Notes and 
Queries on Anthropology, 1899; Peabody 
and Moo rehead, Explorations of Jacobs 
Cavern, 1904; Putnam, On Methods of 
Archaeological Research in America, 1886; 
Thomas (1) Directions for Mound Ex¬ 
plorations, 1884, (2) Mound Explora¬ 
tions, 1894; Willoughby, Prehistoric Bur¬ 
ial Places in Maine, 1898. See Preserva¬ 
tion of Collections. (w. h.) 

Coloc. Apparently two Chumashan vil¬ 
lages, one formerly near the Rincon or at 
Ortegas, near Santa Barbara, Cal., the 
other near Santa Inez mission. 

Coloc.—Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 
181, 1857. Kolok.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 
1860. 

Colomino. (1) A town placed by Jef- 
ferys (French Dom. Am., pt. i, map, 134, 
1761) on one of the head streams of Oc- 
mulgee r., Ga. (2) A town on the w. 
bank of upper Altamaha or St George 
r., Ga. (Giissefeld, Map of U. S., 1784). 
Both places were within Muskhogean ter¬ 
ritory. 

Color. See Anatomy. 

Coloradas. A Tepehuane (?) village, 
apparently situated s. e. of Morelos, in 
the Sierra Madre, s. w. Chihuahua, Mex¬ 
ico.—Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, i, 439, 
1902. 


BULL. 30] 


COLORADO-COLOR SYMBOLISM 


825 


Colorado. A White River Ute chief, 
leader in the outbreak of 1879. The 
Ute agent, N. C. Meeker, an enthusiast 
who believed that he could readily inure 
the Indians to labor, interested himself 
in the internal quarrels of the tribe and 
thus incurred the resentment of Colo¬ 
rado’s faction. He removed the agency 
to their favorite pasture lands, but when 
he attempted to make a beginning of agri¬ 
cultural operations they stopped the plow¬ 
ing by force. They were hunters and did 
not care to learn farming. Troops under 
Maj. T: T. Thornburgh were dispatched 
at the request of Meeker, but after a parley 
the Indians understood that they would 
not enter the reservation. When they 
nevertheless advanced, Colorado, or Colo- 
row, as he was popularly called, led one 
of the parties that ambushed the com¬ 
mand and killed Thornburgh and many 
of his men on Sept. 29, 1879. Others 
then massacred employees of the agency 
and made captives of some of the women. 
The Ute head chief, Ouray, induced the 
Indians to cease hostilities before the 
arrival of reinforcements. 

Color symbolism. The American Indi¬ 
ans had extensive and elaborate systems 
of symbolism which was sometimes ex¬ 
pressed by means of color. Perhaps the 


European and Asiatic races have systems 
as elaborate, but they are not generally 
employed, and knowledge of them is 
not so well diffused. The aborigines 
throughout the western continent either 
painted or tattooed their persons. In 
details they may have been governed to 
some extent by individual caprice, but 
there is good evidence that they usually 
followed established and rigid laws of sym¬ 
bolism, particularly in ceremonial decora¬ 
tion. There are records of such symbolic 
decoration among savage and barbarous 
peoples in all parts of the w r orld, and the 
custom of tattooing, not always devoid of 
symbolism, remains among the most civ¬ 
ilized. The four cardinal points are sym¬ 
bolized by color among many American 
tribes, and it is probable that at some time 
all had such a symbolism. In addition to 
the four horizontal points or regions of the 
universe, three others were sometimes 
recognized, which may be termed the ver¬ 
tical points or regions, namely, the upper, 
middle, and lower worlds. It is probable 
that the symbolism of the vertical regions 
was very extensive, but knowledge of it 
is meager. The following table show's a 
few' of these systems of symbolism. The 
order in which the regions are placed is 
that of the Navaho: 


Tribe. 

Authority. 

| East. 

South. 

West. 

North. 

Lower. 

Middle. 

Apache . 

Gatschet. 

Black... 

White. 

Yellow . 

Blue .... 



Cherokee 

1 Mooney_ 

Red. 

White. 

Black... 

| Blue ... 



Chippewa 1. 

Hoffman. 

White... 

Green. 

Red. 

Black... 



Chippewa 2. 

Hoffman. 

Red. 

Green. 

White... 

Black... 



Creek. 

Gatschet. 

White... 

Blue .. 

Black... 

Red and 








yellow. 



Hopi 1 . 

Fewkes. 

White... 

Red... 

Blue .... 

Yellow . 

Black... 


Isleta. 

Gatschet. _ 

White... 

Red... 

Blue_ 

Black... 



Navaho 1 

Matthews.. 

White... 

Blue .. 


Black... 

White 






Yellow . J 


and 








black. 


Nfl.vn.ho 2. 

j Matthews. 

Black... 

Blue.. 

Yellow . 

White... 



Oma.ha.. 


Red. 

Black. 

Yellow . 

Blue .... 



Sioux... 

Miss Fletcher. 

Red. 

Black. 

Yellow . 

Blue.... 



Zuiiil. 

Mrs Stevenson 

White... 

Red... 

Blue.... 

Yellow . 

Black... 


Zuni2. 

Cushing. 

White... 

Red... 

Blue .... 

Yellow . 

Black... 

. 

All col¬ 








ors. 


Upper. 


All col¬ 
ors. 

Blue. 


All col¬ 
ors. 

Many 

colors. 


There are accounts of such symbolism 
among the Winnebago, Osage, and other 
tribes which do not give the orientation 
of the different colors. 

Of the two schemes of color recorded 
for the Navaho the first is applied in all 
songs, ceremonies, prayers, and legends 
which pertain to the surface of the earth 
or to celestial regions, places of life and 
happiness; the second to songs, etc., 
w'hich refer to the underground world, to 
the regions of danger, death, and witch¬ 
craft, where the goddess of witches and 
wizards dwells. In regard to other tribes 
where more than one system has been 
recorded there is a tendency among stu¬ 


dents to attribute this to an error on the 
part of narrator or recorder, but the Na¬ 
vaho afford evidence that more than one 
system may properly exist in the same 
tribe and cult. When the Hopi make 
dry-paintings the yellow (north) is first 
drawn, followed by green or blue (west), 
red (south), and white (east), in order, 
and the same sequence is observed in 
all cases where colors are employed 
(Fewkes). 

The colors of the cardinal points have 
been used to convey something more than 
ideas of locality, but which may often 
have some connection in the mind with 
locality. J. Owen Dorsey tells us that the 



























































COLOTLAN-COLVILLE 


tB. A. E. 


326 


elements as conceived in Indian philoso¬ 
phy, viz, fire, wind, water, and earth, 
are among Siouan tribes symbolized by 
the colors of the cardinal points; and 
Cushing relates the same of the Zuni. 
Mooney says that among the Cherokee 
red signifies success, triumph; blue, de¬ 
feat, trouble; black, death; white, peace, 
happiness. In another connection he 
says: “ Red is a sacred color with all In¬ 
dians and is usually symbolic of strength 
and success, and for this reason is a fa¬ 
vorite color in painting the face and body 
for the dance or warpath and for paint¬ 
ing the war pony, the lance, etc.” Like¬ 
wise black was a sign of mourning and 
white of peace, while red was usually a 
sign of war. 

There is a symbolism of sex among the 
Navaho that is based on that of the car¬ 
dinal points. Where two things some¬ 
what resemble each other but one is 
larger, more violent, noisy, or robust than 
the other, it is spoken of as the male, while 
the smaller, finer, or jgentler is spoken of 
as female. Thus the supposedly turbu¬ 
lent San Juan r. is called “male water” 
and the placid Rio Grande “ female wa¬ 
ter ”; an electric storm is called ‘ ‘ male 
rain, ’ ’ a gentle shower ‘ ‘ female rain. ’ ’ So 
the land n. of the Navaho country, with 
giant snow peaks and violent winds, is 
regarded as the “male land,” while the 
country to the s., devoid of very high 
mountains and sending forth warm, gentle 
breezes, is considered the “female land.” 
For this reason, among the Navaho, 
black, the color of the n. , belongs to the 
male in all things, and blue, the color of 
the s. to the female. Among the Arap- 
aho white and yellow are the ceremonial 
colors for male and female respectively 
(Kroeber), while the Hopi associate red 
and yellow with the male, and white and 
blue or green with the female (Fewkes). 

Many Indian personal names contain 
words denoting colors, often in relations 
which seem incongruous to us. It is 
probable that they generally have mystic 
meanings. 

Implements used in games usually have 
different significant colors. Where there 
are two opposing sides the colors are often 
red and black, as they are in many of our 
games. Thus in the game of nanzoz, or 
hoop-and-pole, among the Navaho, one of 
the two long sticks is marked black at the 
base and the other red. In their game 
of kesitse the chip tossed up to determine 
which party shall first hide the stone in 
the moccasin is blackened on one side 
and left unpainted on the other. They 
say that this symbolizes night and day, 
and the game itself is based on a myth of 
the contest of night with day. Day is 
commonly symbolized by red and night 
by black among the Indians. The Hopi 


paint their prayer-sticks in prescribed 
colors; those for rain are green, for war 
red. Every kachina has a prayer-stick 
painted yellow, green, red, white, and 
black, indicative of the cardinal points 
(see the table). Hopi gods are also 
assigned special colors—the Sun god red, 
the Underworld god black, and the Fire 
god all colors (Fewkes). Many tribes 
do not distinguish by name between 
green and light blue, black and dark 
blue, or white and unpainted, (w. m. ) 

Colotlan. Classed by Orozco y Berra as 
a branch of the Cora division of the Pi- 
man stock inhabiting a n. tributary of the 
Rio Grande de Santiago (Rio Colotlan), 
between long. 104° and 105° and about 
lat. 22°, Jalisco, Mexico. The language 
was almost extinct by 1864. Among 
their towns were Comatlan and Apo- 
zolco, at which missions were estab¬ 
lished by the Spaniards. (f. w. h. ) 
Coloclan.—Orozco v Berra, Geog., map, 1864. 
Colotlan.—Ibid., 59, 280, 282. 

Columbians. Applied by Bancroft (Nat. 
Races, i, 150, 1882) to the Indians of n. 
w. America dwelling between lat. 42° and 
55°, and stated by him to be synonymous 
with the Nootka-Columbians of Scouler 
and others. The term Columbians, how¬ 
ever, is evidently broader in its scope, as 
it includes all the tribes w. of the Rock¬ 
ies from the Skittagetan group, in the n., 
to the s. boundary of Oregon, while Scou- 
ler’s term comprises a group of languages 
extending from the mouth of Salmon r. 
to the s. of Columbia r., now known to 
belong to several linguistic stocks. 

Colville. A division of Salish between 
Kettle falls and Spokane r., e. Wash.; 
said by Gibbs to have been one of the 
largest of the Salish tribes. Lewis and 
Clark estimated their number at 2,500, 
in 130 houses, in 1806. There were 321 
under the Colville agency in 1904. 

Basket People.—Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., iv, 
444, 1845. Cauldrons.—Smet, Letters, 37, 1843. 
Chaudiere. —Cox, Columbia R., 1.189, 1831. Chual- 
pays.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 309, 1859. Coll- 
ville.—Dart (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
hi, 632, 1853. Colville.—Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
159, 1850. Covilles.—Stevens (1855) in H.R. Doc. 
48, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 3, 1856. Gens des 
Chaudieres.—Duflot de Mofras, Oregon, II, 335, 
1844. Hualpais. —Petitot, Autour du Lac des Es- 
claves, 362,1893. Kettle Falls.—Parker, Journal, 
293, 1840. Kettle Indians.—Cox, Columbia R., 
ii, 155,1831. KQoptle'nik.—Chamberlain,8th Rep. 
on N. W. Tribes of Can., 8, 1892 (‘people of the 
falls’: Kutenai name). Les Chaudieres.— Cox,op. 
cit., i, 358. Quarlpi.—Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 532, 1878. Quiarlpi.—Hale in U. S. Expl. 
Exped.,iv, 444, 1845. Sals*uyilp.—Gatschet, MS., 
B. A. E. (Okinagan name). Schroo-yel-pi.—Ste¬ 
vens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 428, 1854. Schwo-gel-pi.— 
Ibid.,445. Schwoyelpi.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., 
I, 413, 1855. Shuyelpees.—Smet (1869) in H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 65, 36th Cong., 1st sess., 141, 1860. Shuy- 
elphi.—Smet, Oregon Miss., 108, 1874. Shuy- 
elpi.—Smet, Letters, 213,1843. Shwoi-el-pi. -Ste¬ 
vens, Rep. on Pac. R. R., 94, 1854. Sin-who-yelp- 
pe-took.— Ross, Adventures, 290, 1849. Siyelpa.— 
Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 292, 1866. 
Skoiel-poi.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 296, 1861. Skuy- 
elpi,—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (socalled by other 


BI LL. 30 1 


COM A C-C< )M ANCHE 


827 


Salish tribes). Soayalpi. —Hale in U. S. Exj>1. 
Expert.. VI, 205, 184(5. Squaw-a-tosh. —Suckley in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 300,1855. Squeer-yer-pe. —Ibirt. 
Squiaelps.— Lane in Incl. AIT. Rep., 159, 1850. 
Sweielpa. —Wilson in Jour. Ethnol.Soc. Lond.,292, 
1866. Swi-el-pree. —Ross in lnrt. Aft - . Rep., 22,1870. 
Whe-el-po.— Lewis and Clark. Exped., I, map. 
1814. Whe-el-poo. —McVickar, Exped. Lewis and 
Clark, ii, 385, 1842. 

Comae. A former Pima rancheria, vis¬ 
ited by Kino and Mange in 1699; situated 
on the Rio Gila, 3 leagues (miles?) below 
the mouth of Balt r., s. Ariz. 

S. Bartolome Comae. —Mange in Doe. Hist. Mex., 
4th s., I, 306, 1856. 

Comachica. A Calusa village on the s. 
w. coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fonta- 
neda Memoir {ca. 1575), Smith transl., 
19, 1854. 

Comanche. One of the southern tribes of 
the Shoshonean stock, and the only one of 
that group living entirely on the plains. 
Their language and traditions show that 
they are a comparatively recent offshoot 
from the Shoshoni of Wyoming, both 
tribes speaking practically the same dia¬ 
lect and, until very recently, keeping up 
constant and friendly communication. 
Within the traditionary period the 2 tribes 
lived adjacent to each other in s. Wyom¬ 
ing, since which time the Shoshoni have 
been beaten back into the mountains by 



ASAHABIT —PENATEKA COMMANCHE 


the Sioux ana other prairie tribes, while 
the Comanche have been driven steadily 
southward by the same pressure. In 
this southerly migration the Penateka 
seem to have preceded the rest of the 
tribe. The Kiowa say that when they 
themselves moved southward from the 
Black-hills region, the Arkansas was the 
n. boundary of the Comanche. 


In 1719 the Comanche are mentioned 
under their Siouan name of Padouca as 
living in what now is w. Kansas. It must 
be remembered that from 500 to 800 m. 
was an ordinary range for a prairie tribe 
and that the Comanche were equally at 
home on the Platte and in the Bolson 
de Mapimi of Chihuahua. As late as 
1805 the North Platte was still known as 



COMANCHE WOMAN 


Padouca fork. At that time they roamed 
over the country about the heads of the 
Arkansas, Red, Trinity, and Brazos rs., 
in Colorado, Kansas, Oklahoma, and Tex¬ 
as. For nearly 2 centuries they were at 
war with the Spaniards of Mexico and 
extended their raids far down into Du¬ 
rango. They were friendly to the Amer¬ 
icans generally, but became bitter ene¬ 
mies of the Texans, by whom they were 
dispossessed of their best huntinggrounds, 
and carried on a relentless war against 
them for nearly 40 years. They have 
been close confederates of the Kiowa 
since about 1795. In 1835 they made 
their first treaty with the Government, 
and by the treaty of Medicine Lodge in 
1867 agreed to go on their assigned 
reservation between Washita and Red 
rs., s. w. Okla.; but it was not until 
after the last outbreak of the southern 
prairie tribes in 1874-75 that they and 
their allies, the Kiowa and Apache, finally 
settled on it. They were probably never 
a large tribe, although supposed to be pop¬ 
ulous on account of their wide range. 
Within the last 50 years they have been 
terribly wasted by war and disease. They 
numbered 1,400 in 1904, attached to the 
Kiowa agency, Okla. 














328 


COMANCHE 


[r. a. e. 


The Comanche were nomad buffalo 
hunters, constantly on the move, cultiva¬ 
ting little from the ground, and living 
in skin tipis. They were long noted as the 
finest horsemen of the plains and bore a 
reputation for dash and courage. They 
have a high sense of honor and hold 
themselves superior to the other tribes 
with which they are associated. In per¬ 
son they are well built and rather corpu¬ 
lent. Their language is the trade lan¬ 
guage of the region and is more or less 
understood by all the neighboring tribes. 
It is sonorous and flowing, its chief char¬ 
acteristic being a rolling r. The lan¬ 
guage has several dialects. 

The gentile system seems to beuriKnown 
among the Comanche. They have, or still 
remember, 12recognizeddi visions orbands 
and may have had others in former times. 
Of these all but 5 are practically extinct. 
The Kwahari and Penateka are the most 
important. Following, in alphabetic or¬ 
der, is the complete list as given by their 
leading chiefs: Detsanayuka or Nokoni; 
Ditsakana, Widyu, Yapa, or Yamparika; 
Kewatsana; Kotsai; Kotsoteka; Kwahari 
or Kwahadi; Motsai; Pagatsu; Penateka 
or Penande; Pohoi (adopted Shoshoni); 
Tanima; Tenawa or Tenahwit; Waaili. 
In addition to these the following have 
also been mentioned by writers as divi¬ 
sions of the Comanche: Ouagejohe, Mu- 
vinabore, Nauniem, Parkeenaum. See 
Dotame. (j. m. ) 

Allebome.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 39, 1806 (so 
called by the French; see Ne'-mo-sin, below). 
Bald Heads. —Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 155, 
1823. Bo'dalk'inago. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1043, 1896 (Kiowa name: ‘reptile people’, 
‘snake men’). Cadouca. —Domenech, Deserts N. 
Am., n, 100, 1860 (misprint of Padouca). Caman- 
che.— Pike, Trav., xiv, 214, note, 1811. Caman- 
chees. —Pilcher in Sen. Doc. 198, 25th Cong., 2d 
sess., 23, 1838. Camarsches. —Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, 367, 1822. 6a'-tha. —Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 326,1862 (‘having many horses’: 
Arapaho name). Caumuches. —La Harpe (1719) in 
Margry, Dee., VI, 289, 1886. Caunouche.— Beau- 
rain, ibid. Caw-mainsh. —Gebow, Shoshonay 
Voeab., 8, 1868 (Shoshoni name). Cemanlos.— 
Escalante (1776) misquoted by Harry in Simpson, 
Explor. across Utah, 495, 1876. Cintu-aluka.— 
Corliss, Dacotah MS. voeab., B. A. E., 106, 1874 
(Teton name). Comances. —Schoolcraft, Pers. 
Mem., 620, 1851. Comancha. —Barreiro, Ojeada, 
app., 9, 1832. Comanchees. —Abert in Emory, 
Recon., 470, 1848. Comanchero. —Gregg, Comm. 
Prairies, ii, 56,1844 (Spanish form). Comanches. — 
Sanchez (1757) in Doe. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 88, 
1856. Comanchos. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 
10,1863. Comandes. —Maximilian, Trav., 510,1843. 
Comandus. —Alegre, Hist. Comp. Jesus, i, 336, 
1841. Comanshima.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 
118,1884 (Hopi name). Comantz. —Gregg, Comm. 
Prairies, ii, 34, 1844 (Comanche pronunciation). 
Comauch. —Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822 
(misprint). Cumanche. —Doc. of 1720 quoted by 
Bandolier in Arch. Inst. Pap., V, 183,1890. Cuman- 
cias.— Long, Exped. to Rocky Mts., i, 478, 1823. 
Cumeehes. —Sohermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., ii, 
29,1812. Da'tse-a". —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Ki¬ 
owa Apache name). Gyai'-ko. —Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1043,1896 (‘enemies’: Kiowa name). 
Idahi.— Ibid. (Kiowa Apache name). Jtnda. — 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Jiearilla name). 


Ka-man'-tci.—Dorsey, MS. Biloxi Diet., B. A. E., 
1892 (Biloxi name). Kaumainsh.—Burton, City 
of Saints, 75, note, 1861. Kelamouches.—Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776 (probably the same). 
Komantsu.—Ind. AIL Rep., 248, 1877. Komats.— 
ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 326, 1885 (Ute form). - 
Ku-man-i-a-kwe.—Cushing, inf’n, 1891 (Zuni 
form). La Paddo.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 64, 

1806 (French name; cf. La Playes, below). La 
Plais.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 155, 1823 
(French traders’ name; perhaps corrupted from 
Tete Peltfe). La Play.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 
17,1806. La Playes.—Lewis and Clark, Trav., 177, 
1809. La'ri’hta.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Pawnee 
name). Le Plays.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 17, 
1806. Los Mecos.—Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Loud., ii, 265, 1850 (Mexican name). Mahan.— 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Isleta name). 
Mahana.—Ibid. (Taos name). Memesoon.—Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 39, 1806 (see Ne'-mo-sin, be¬ 
low). Na' lani.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1043,1896 (Navaho name: ‘many aliens,’ or ‘many 
enemies’;- collective term for plains tribes). 
Na'nita.—Ibid. (Kichai name). Nar-a-tah.— 
Neighbors in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 126, 1852 
(Waco name). Na'taa'.—Mooney in 14th Rep. 

B. A. E., 1043, 1896 (Wichita name: ‘snakes,’ i. e. 
‘enemies’ or ‘dandies)’. Naiine.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, ii, ix, 1852. Na-u-ni.—Ibid., I, 518, 
1851. Nazanne.—ten Kate, Reizen N. Am., 6, 1885 
(Navahoname: ‘rich ones’). Nemausin.—Scher- 
merhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii, 38, 1812 
(see Ne'-mo-sin, below). Neme‘ ne.—Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E. (own name). Nemiseau.—Brown, 
West. Gaz., 213, 1817. Nemonsin.—Am. State 
Papers, iv, 716,1832. Nemosen.—Lewisand Clark, 
Discov., 23, 1806. Ne'-mo-sin.—Ibid., 39 (given as 
their own name; rove with Kiowa, Kiowa 
Apache, and others at heads of Platte and Chey¬ 
enne rs.; apparently a misprint of N6me'ne or 
NimCnim, the Comanche name for themselves). 
Nemousin. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, VI, 102, 
1905. Neum.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 166, 1859 (own 
name). Ne'-uma.—Buschmann (1859) quoted by 
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 33, 1891. Ne'-ume.— 
Ibid. Nimenim,—ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 
382, 1885 (own name: ‘people of people’). Ni- 
mi-ou-sin.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 102, 
1905. Ni' u am.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc.,xxm,300,1886(own name). Niunas.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 34, 1857. Nota-osh.—Gat¬ 
schet, MS., B. A. E. (Wichita name: ‘snakes,’ 
‘enemies’). No-taw.—Marcy, Explor. Red R., 
273, 1854 (Wichita name). Niima.—Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 1896 (own name: 
‘people’). Padacus.—Lewisand Clark, Trav., 39, 

1807 (misprint), jadanka.—Dorsey, MS., B. A. 
E., 1878 (Omaha and Ponka name). Padaws.— 
Perrin du Lac, Voy. La,, 261, 1805. Padducas.— 
Pike, Trav., 347, 1811. Padokas.—Fabry (1741) in 
Margry, Dec., VI, 475, 1886. Padoncas.—Bracken- 
ridge, Views of La., 80, 1815. Padonees.—Morse, 

N. Am., map, 1776. Padoo.—Orig. Jour. Lewis 
and Clark, vi, 108, 1905 (Canadian French “nick¬ 
name”). Padoucahs.—Hutchins (1764) quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 557,1853. Padoucas.— 
De l’lsle, map, 1712 (Siouan name; perhaps a 
contraction of Penateka.—Mooney). Padoucee.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 82, 1854. 
Padoucies.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 108, 
1905. Paduca.—Clarke in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, 
152,1875. Paducahs.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., 
pt. 6,186,1883. Paducas.—Jeffery*, Fr. Dom. Am., 
pt. 1, map, 1761. Paduka.—Dorsey, MS., B. A. E., 
1882 (Kansa name). Paduka.—Hervas, Idea dell’ 
Univ., XVII, 90, 1784. Pah-to-cahs.—Butler in H. 

R. Ex. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. Pan- 
aloga.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 81, 
1858. Pandoga.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 128, 
1816. Pandouca.— Cass in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 596, 1853. Paneloga.—Douay (1687) in Shea, 
Miss. Valley, 222, 1852 (probably the same; there 
are many misprints and derivatives of this word, 
all probably being traceable to this source). 
Panelogo.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
460,1862. Paneloza.—Ibid., 346 (from Douay, 1687: 
misprint). Panetoca—Harris, Coll. Voy. and 


BULL. 301 


COMAQUIDAM-COMEYA 


329 


Trav., i, map, 685,1705. Panetonka. —La Hontan, 
New Voy., I, 130, 1703. Panoucas. —Perkins and 
Peck, Ann. of West, 669,1850. Paoducas. —Alcedo, 
Dice. Geog., j r, 630, 1787. Par-too-ku. —Neighbors 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 126, 1852. Pa-tco'- 

J a.— David St Cyr, inf’n (Winnebago name). 

a-tco'-^a-ji.—Ibid. Patonca.—Barcia, Ensayo, 
298,1723. Pa-tuh-ku.—Grayson, MS. vocab., B. A. 
E., 1885 (Creek name). Pa'-tu-ka.—Dorsey, 

Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Quapaw 
name). Paquka.— Dorsey, MS., B. A. E., 1883 
(Osage name). Pa^unke.— Ibid., 1881 (Iowa, Oto, 
and Missouri name). Peducas.—Perrin du Lac, 
Voy., 225, 1805. Pen loca.—Shea, Pehalosa, 21, 
note, 1882. Sanko.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1043, 1896 (obsolete Kiowa name). Sau'hto.— 
Ibid. (Caddo name). Saii'-tu*.—ten Kate, Syno- 
nymie, 10, 1884 (Caddo name). Selakampom.— 
Gatschet, Comecrudo MS., B. A. E. (Comecrudo 
name for all warlike tribes, especially the Coman¬ 
che). Shishiniwotsitan—ten Kate, Reizen in 
N. Am., 361, 1885 (Cheyenne name: ‘snake peo¬ 
ple’). Shishino'wits-Itaniuw’.—Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 1896 (Cheyenne name: ‘snake 
people’). Shx'shlnowutz-hita'neo.—Mooney, inf’n, 
1906 (correct Cheyenne name). Snake Indians.— 
Brackenridge, Views of La., 80, 1815 (see also 
under Ietan). Sow-a-to.—Neighbors in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, n, 126, 1852 (Caddo name). 
Tete Pelee.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 
1896 (French traders’ name. “ The identification 
is doubtful, as the Comanche cut their hair only 
when mourning”). Tetes pelees.—Perrin du Lac, 
Voy., 261, 1805. Yampah.—Stuart, Montana, 25, 
1865 (Shoshoni name). Ya'mpaini.—Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1045, 1896 (Shoshoni name: 
‘yampa people,’ or ‘yampa eaters’; ef. Caw- 
mainsh, above). Yampairi'kani.—Ibid. 

Comaquidam. A former Papago ranche- 
ria visited by Ivino and Mange in 1701; 
situated in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, on the 
Rio Salado, 10 in. below Sonoita. 
Anunciata. —Bancroft. No. Mex. States, 1,495,1884. 
Comaquidam. —Kino (1701) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., I, 328,1856. 

Comarchdut. A former Maricopa ran- 
cheria on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz.; visited 
by Father Sedelmair in 1744.—Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Comarsuta. A former Sobaipuri ran- 
cheriavisited by Father Kino about 1697; 
situated on the Rio San Pedro, s. Ariz., 
between its mouth and the junction of 
Aravaipa cr.—Bernal (1697) quoted by 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 356, 1889. 

Comatlan. A former pueblo of the Co- 
lotlan division of the Cora and the seat 
of a mission; situated on the Rio Colo- 
tlan, lat. 21° 5CK, long. 104° 10 / , Jalisco, 
Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 280, 
1864. 

Combahee. A small tribe formerly liv¬ 
ing on Combahee r., S. C. Little is known 
of its history, as it early became extinct. 
See Rivers, Hist. S. C., 94, 1874. 

Comcomly. A Chinook chief. He re¬ 
ceived the Lewis and Clark expedition 
hospitably when it emerged at the mouth 
of Columbia r. in 1805, and when the 
Astor expedition arrived to take posses¬ 
sion of the country for the United States 
he cultivated close friendship with the 
pioneers, giving his daughter as wife to 
Duncan M’Dougal, the Canadian who 
was at their head. Yet he was probably 
an accomplice in a plot to massacre the 


garrison and seize the stores. When a 
British ship arrived in 1812 to capture the 
fort at Astoria, he offered to tight the 
enemy, with 800 warriors at his back. 
The American agents, however, had al¬ 
ready made a peaceful transfer by bargain 
and sale, and gifts and promises from the 
new owners immediately made him their 
friend (Bancroft, N. W. Coast; Irving, 
Astoria). Writing in Aug., 1844, Father 
De Smet (Chittenden and Richardson, 
De Smet, ii, 443, 1905) states that in the 
days of his glory Comcomly on his visits 
to Vancouver would be preceded by 300 
slaves, “and he used to carpet the ground 
that he had to traverse, from the main 
entrance of the fort to the governor’s 
door, several hundred feet, with beaver 
and otter skins.” 

Comecrudo (‘eatersof raw meat’). One 
of the few tribes of theCoahuiltecan fam¬ 
ily that have been identified. The sur¬ 
viving remnant was visited in 1886 by 
Gatschet, who found only 8 or 10 old per¬ 
sons who could speak the dialect, living 
on the s. side of the Rio Grande, 2 of 
them at Las Prietas, Coahuila. Orozco 
y Berra (Geog., 293, map, 1864) placed 
them in Tamaulipas, Mexico, in the 
vicinity of the Tedexenos. They appear 
to have been known in later times as 
Carrizos, q. v. 

Estok pakai peyap.—Gatschet, Comecrudo MS., 
B. A. E. ( = ‘Indians eaters raw’), vaima aran- 
guas.—Ibid. ( = ‘ Indians of this locality’: Coto- 
nam name). 

Comeya. Apparently a collective name 
indefinitely applied to the Yuman tribes 
from San Diego eastward to the lower Rio 
Colorado. By many authors it has been 
assumed to be synonymous with Diegueno, 
which doubtless it was in part. Just what 
tribes it included can not now be told, but 
the term is here applied only to interior 
tribes, the Diegueno about San Diego be¬ 
ing excluded. (S ee Cufleil.) When vis¬ 
ited by Anza, Garc6s, and Font, in 1775, 
the “Quemaya” woresandalsof maguey 
fiber and descended from their own ter¬ 
ritory (which began at the mountains, in 
lat. 33° 08', some 100 m. to the n. w. of 
the mouth of New r. in n. e. Lower Cali¬ 
fornia, and extended as far as San Diego) 
to eat calabashes and other fruits of the 
river. They were described as “very 
dirty, on account of the much mezcal 
they eat; their idiom is foreign to those 
of the river” (Garc£s, Diary, 1775, 165, 
197, etseq., 1900). They were also vis¬ 
ited in 1826 by Lieut. Hardy (Trav. in 
Mex., 368-372, 1829), who found them on 
the Colorado just above the mouth of the 
Gila, and who described them, under the 
name Axua (which, he says, is their tribal 
name), as beingvery numerous and filthy 
in their habits; to overcome vermin they 
coated their hair with mud, with which 
they also painted their bodies, and “on 


330 


COMIAKTN-COMMERCE 


[b. a. k. 


a hot day it is by no means uncommon 
to see them weltering in the mud like- 
pigs. ’ ’ They were of medium stature, and 
were regarded by Hardy as excessively 
poor, having no animals except foxes, of 
which they had a few skins. The dress 
of the women in summer was a short 
bark skirt; the men appear to have been 
practically without clothing during this 
season. Both sexes practised facial paint¬ 
ing, from which they were likened to the 
cobra de capello. The practice of selling 
children seemed to have been common. 
Their subsistence was fish, fruits, vege¬ 
tables, and the seeds of grass, and many 
of the tribe were said to have been 
dreadfully scorbutic. Their weapons 
were bows, arrows, a few lances, and a 
short club like a round mallet. Whipple 
described the Comeya in 1849 (School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 116, 1852) as occupy¬ 
ing the banks of New r., near Salt (Salton) 
lake, and as distinguishable from the 
Cuchan (Yuma) “ by an oval contour of 
the face.” The names of but few Co¬ 
meya bands or rancherias are known. 
These are Hamechuwa, Hatavva, Hepow- 
woo, Itaywiy, Quathlmetha. 

(h. w. h. f. w. n.) 

Axua.—Hardy, Trav. in Mexico, 368, 1829 (also 
Axiia). Camilya.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ii, 176, 1889 (probably the same). Co-mai- 
yah.—Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3,16,1856. 
Comedas.—Froebel, Seven Years’ Travels,511,1859. 
Comeya.—Bartlett, Pers. Narr., Ii, 7,1854. Co-mo- 
yah.—Whipple (1849) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
II, 116,1852. Comoyatz. —Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., 
in, pt. 3, 16, map, 1856. Comoyee.—Whipple, 
Exped. San Diego to the Colorado, 28, 1851. Co- 
mo-yei.—Whipple (1849) in Schoolcraft, op. cit. 
I'-um O'-otam. — Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 86, 1886 
(Pima name of Comeya and Diegueno). Kamia- 
akhwe.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 ( = ‘foreign Kamia,’ 
i. e., foreign Dieguenos; Mohave name for 
Yuman lnds. near head of gulf, who are not 
Dieguenos; cf. Axua , above). New River In¬ 
dians.—Heintzelman in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 53, 1857 (Yum, or). Q,uathl- 
met-ha.—Thomas, Yuma MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1868 
(on New r.). Quemaya.— Garc6s (1775-76), Diary, 
166, 450, 1900. Serranos.—Ibid., 196. Yum. — 
Heintzelman, op. cit., 42 (or New River Indians; 
cf. I'-um O'-otam, above). 

Comiakin {Qumie'qEn). A Salish tribe 
speaking the Cowichan dialect and in¬ 
habiting part of Cowichan valley, s. e. 
Vancouver id.; pop. 67 in 1904. 
Cornea-kin.—Can. Ind. Aff., 269,1889. Comiaken.— 
Whymper, Alaska, 62,1869. Comiakin.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 417, 1898. Ko-ne-a kun.—Ibid., 1880, 316. 
Xume'xgn—Boas, MS., B.A.E., 1887. 

Comitre. Mentioned with San Felipe 
by^Onate in 1598 (Doc. Ined., xvi, 114, 
1871) as a pueblo of the “Castixes,” 
which is identified with Katishtya, the 
aboriginal name of the inhabitants of San 
Felipe (q. v.), and, evidently through 
misunderstanding, given also as a "Trios” 
village. The name, according to Bande- 
lier (Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 189, 1892), is 
a corruption or misprint of Tamita, the 
name of the mesa at the base of which 
San Felipe stood, and not of the settle¬ 
ment itself. 


Commerce. Evidences of widespread 
commerce and rude media of exchange 
in North America are found in ancient 
shell-heaps, mounds, and graves, the ob¬ 
jects having passed from hand to hand 
often many times. Overland, this trade 
was done on foot, the only domestic ani¬ 
mal for long-distance transportation being 
the dog, used as a pack beast and for the 
travois and the sled. In this respect the 
north temperate zone of America was in 
marvelous contrast with the same lati¬ 
tudes of the Old World, where most of 
the commercial animals originated. 

The deficiency in the means of land 
commerce was made up by the waters. 
Natural conditions in the section of the 
New World along the Arctic circle and 
on Hudson bay, continuously inhabited 
by the homogeneous Eskimo, in the inlets 
of the Atlantic coast, in the neighboring 
Caribbean area, and in the archipelagoes 
of British Columbia and s. e. Alaska, en¬ 
couraged and developed excellent water 
craft for commerce. Better still by far 
for the trader were the fresh-water rivers, 
navigable for canoes, of the Yukon-Mac- 
kenzie, StLawrence, Atlantic, Mississippi, 
and Columbia systems, jin which neigh¬ 
boring waters are connected for traffic 
by easy portages, a condition contrasting 
with that of Siberia, whose great rivers all 
end in frozen tundras and arctic wastes. 

The North American continent is 
divided into culture areas in a way con¬ 
ducive to primitive commerce. Certain 
resources of particular areas were in uni¬ 
versal demand, such as copper, jade, 
soapstone, obsidian, mica, paint stones, 
and shells for decoration and money, as 
dentalium, abalone, conus, olivella, and 
clam shells. 

The Eskimo, to whom the Arctic area 
belonged, carried on extensive commerce 
among themselves and with the western 
Athapascan tribes and the Algonquian 
tribes to the e. They knew where soap¬ 
stone for lamps, jade for blades, and drift¬ 
wood for sleds and harpoons could be 
found, and used them for traffic. They 
lived beyond the timber line; hence the 
Athapascans brought vessels of wood and 
baskets to trade with them for oil and 
other arctic products. 

The Mackenzie-Yukon tribes were in 
the lands of the reindeer and of soft fur¬ 
bearing animals. These they traded in 
every direction for supplies to satisfy 
their needs (see Fur trade). The Rus¬ 
sians in Alaska and the Hudson’s Bay 
Co. stimulated them to the utmost and 
taught them new means of capture, in¬ 
cluding the use of firearms. Remnants 
of Iroquois bands that were employed in 
the fur trade have been found on Rainy 
lake, on Red and Saskatchewan rs., 
even as far n. as the Polar sea and as 


BULL. 30] 


COMMERCE 


331 


far w. as the Siksika of the plains and the 
Takulli of British Columbia (Havard in 
Smithson. Rep., 318, 1879; Chamberlain 
in Am. Anthrop., vi,459,1904; Morice, N. 
Int. Brit. Col., 1904.) See Caughnawciga. 

The Atlantic slope from Labrador to 
Georgia was the special home of Algon- 
quian and Iroquoian tribes. Inland were 
found deer, bears, foxes, and turkeys. 
The salt-water bays and inlets not only 
supplied mollusks, crustaceans, fish, and 
aquatic birds in vast numbers, but stimu¬ 
lated easy transportation and commerce. 
The great lakes and the St Lawrence, 
moreover, placed the tribes about them 
in touch with the copper mines of L. Su¬ 
perior. Through this enlarging influence 
the Iroquois were ennobled and became 
the leading family of this area. A medium 
of exchange was invented in the shape of 
wampum, made from clam shells. The 
mounds of the s. portion of this slope 
reveal artifacts of copper, obsidian, and 
shell, which must have been trans¬ 
ported commercially from afar along the 
water highways in birch-bark canoes and 
dugouts. 

The Mississippi area was a vast receiv¬ 
ing depot of commerce, having easy touch 
with other areas about it by means of 
portages between the headwaters of in¬ 
numerable streams; with the Chesapeake 
bay, the great lakes, and the Mackenzie 
basins through the Ohio and the main 
stream; with the e. Rockies and Co¬ 
lumbia r. through the Missouri and other 
great branches of the Mississippi in the 
w. Buffalo skins and horns were de¬ 
manded by the Pueblos, while pemmican 
and beads enlivened trade. The mounds 
reveal dentalium shells from the Pacific, 
obsidian from the Rockies, copper from 
L. Superior, pipes of catlinite, and black 
steatite from Minnesota and Canada, and 
objects from the Atlantic. 

The Gulf area includes the ancient home 
of the Muskhogean, the Caddoan, and a 
few smaller families. Commerce here was 
inland. Their coast was almost without 
islands and came in commercial touch 
with an outside world only through 
Mexico. The discoveries of Cushing in 
s. Florida reveal a colony in the southern 
Mexican or West Indian culture status. 
The shorter rivers of this area put its 
n. border in trade touch with Tennessee 
and the Carolinas, and its w. with Arkan¬ 
sas and Texas. The Mississippi lured its 
traders almost to the Canadian border. 
The Rio Grande was the commercial 
artery connecting the e. areas with the 
interior basin. The Rio Grande Pueblos 
still trade their paper-bread with the 
Kiowa and Comanche of Oklahoma. 
Coronado speaks of Pawnee and Wich¬ 
ita visitors among the Pueblos of the Rio 
Grande in 1540 (Winship in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896). 


The Pacific coast tribes occupied two 
areas that present quite opposite condi¬ 
tions in regard to commercial activity. 
From Mt St Elias s. to California trade 
was active, transportation being effected 
in excellent dugout canoes; the waters 
and the lands offered natural products 
easy of access that stimulated barter. 
Copper, horn for spoons, eulachon, and 
Chilkat blankets were exchanged for 
abalone and dentalium shells, and baskets 
were bartered for other baskets and the 
teeth of a large southern shark, also for 
the furs of the interior Indians. The 
Haida regularly visited their Tsimshian 
neighbors to exchange canoes for eula¬ 
chon oil, wood suitable for boxes, and 
mountain-goat horn, while the Tlingit 
were intermediaries in diffusing the cop¬ 
per that came from the n. On the Co¬ 
lumbia r. cam ass and moose were articles 
of commerce. Farther s., in Oregon and 
California, whether from the islandless 
coast or the genius of the peoples, the 
spirit of commerce was less prominent. 
Among the n. w. California tribes, the 
Hupa and others, dentalia served for local 
money. In central California (Yuki, 
Porno, Sacramento, and San Joaquin val¬ 
leys, etc.) wampum of pierced disks al¬ 
most exclusively served as a medium of 
exchange and standard of value. In s. 
California the inhabitants of the islands 
carried on a commerce in basketry, 
feathered wearing apparel, nets, vessels 
of steatite and serpentine, various imple¬ 
ments of stone and bone, wampum, sea- 
shells and shell ornaments, and cured 
fish, which they bartered with the tribes 
of the mainland for basket materials, 
skins, nuts, prepared meats, and other 
articles which they did not have on the 
islands. The Indians of the mountains 
and the interior valleys of California 
constantly traveled to and fro for the 
purpose of barter, and the trails over the 
range to the coast are yet plainly visible, 
especially from the lower Tulare valley 
(A. L. Kroeber and C. P. Wilcomb, infin, 
1905; Stearns in Nat. Mus. Rep., 297, 
1887). From the early mariners we learn 
that the island Indians had canoes made 
of skins, some being very large and hold¬ 
ing 20 persons. Vizcaino, the Spanish nav¬ 
igator, who made his voyage in 1602-3, 
mentions large boats of planks at Santa 
Catalina, Cal., and states that its natives 
engaged in trade, though not extensive, 
with those on the mainland (Hittell, 
Hist. Cal., i, 139,1885). Hittell does not 
think that there were any voyages be¬ 
tween the Santa Barbara ids. and Puget 
sd., though canoes may have drifted or 
have been carried by stress of weather 
over considerable distances. 

The Interior basin, especially in the 
Pueblo country, had a lively home and 
distant commerce, the duration and ex- 


332 


COMMISSION TO THE FIVE CIVILIZED TRIBES 


[ B. A. E. 


tent of which are witnessed by the trails 
measuring in all many hundreds of miles 
in length. Pacific coast shells and copper 
bells of Mexican origin are encountered 
in the ancient ruins. The inland com¬ 
merce was fostered by the two kinds of 
social life, pueblo and castral. After the 
advent of the Spaniards, this traffic was 
greatly quickened. The Hopi traded in 
cotton of their own cultivation with out¬ 
side tribes, and are still the chief weavers 
and traders of ceremonial cotton blankets, 
sashes, and kilts in the S. W. The Zuni 
and some of the Rio Grande pueblos use 
shell beads and turquoise, trading largely 
with the Navaho. The latter have a wide 
and varied commerce, trafficking with the 
Havasupai, Hopi, and Walapai for baskets 
and using their blankets and sil s^er work 
as an exchange medium with neighboring 
tribes and with the whites. 

Commerce was greatly stimulated 
through the coming of the whites by the 
introduction of domestic animals, espe¬ 
cially horses, mules, donkeys, cattle, 
sheep, goats, poultry; by the vastly en¬ 
larged demand for skins of animals, ivory, 
fish, and native manufactures; by offering 
in exchange iron tools and implements, 
woven goods, and other European prod¬ 
ucts desired by the Indians. The effects 
of this stimulated trade were profound, 
both for good and evil. Indians were 
drawn far from home. The Iroquois, for 
example, traveled with the fur traders 
into n. w. Canada. 

Many kinds of Indian handiwork have 
entered into world commerce. Money 
is lavished on fine basketry, beadwork, 
wampum belts, ivory carvings, horn 
spoons, wooden dishes, silver work, cos¬ 
tumes, feather and quill work, and espe¬ 
cially Navaho blankets and Hopi and 
Zuni textiles. In ancient times there 
were intertribal laws of commerce, and 
to its agents were guaranteed freedom and 
safety. See Boats, Fur trade, Exchange, 
Horse, Trails and Trade-routes, Travel, 
Travois, and the bibliographies thereun¬ 
der; consult also Rau in Smithson. Rep., 
27!, 1872. (o. t. m.) 

Commission to the Five Civilized Tribes. 
A commission appointed by President 
Cleveland, under act of Congress of Mar. 
3,1893, and consisting of Henry L. Dawes 
of Massachusetts, chairman (1893-1903), 
Archibald S. McKennon of Arkansas 
(1893-98), and Meredith H. Kidd of 
Indiana (1893-95). It was increased to 
5 members in 1895 and reduced to 4 in 
1898. In addition to those named, it has 
included Frank C. Armstrong of the 
District of Columbia (1895-98), Thomas 
B. Cabaniss of Georgia (1895-97), Alex¬ 
ander B. Montgomery of Kentucky (1895- 
97), Tams Bixby of Minnesota (1897- 
1905), Thomas B. Needles of Illinois 


(1897-1905), Clifton R. Breckenridge of 
Arkansas (1898-1905), and William E. 
Standley of Kansas (1903-04). On the 
death of Mr Dawes, in Feb., 1903, Mr 
Bixby was appointed chairman. The 
work of the Commission being finished, 
it expired by law July 1, 1905. As the 
Indian governments did not dissolve until 
Mar. 4, 1906, all the remaining powers of 
the Commission were vested in the Secre¬ 
tary of the Interior during the interim. 

The headquarters of the Commission 
were at Muscogee, Ind. Ter., except for 
short periods in 1895 and 1896 at South 
McAlester and Vinita, Ind. Ter., and at 
Fort Smith, Ark. Special headquarters 
have also -been established temporarily 
when necessary in various towns of the 
Territory. 

The Commission was instructed to nego¬ 
tiate with the Five Civilized Tribes for 
the extinguishment of the national or 
communal title to the land and its allot¬ 
ment in severalty, and for the dissolution 
of the tribal governments, looking toward 
their ultimate absorption into the United 
States as a territory or state. The Com¬ 
mission had no authority, but was directed 
to induce the Indians to consent to these 
changes on terms which should be just 
and equitable to all, and binding after 
due ratification both by the Indians and 
the United States. 

The work of the Commission was re¬ 
quired on account of conditions peculiar 
to the Indian Territory. When these 
tribes were removed from the E., they 
were given special titles to the land, 
in the form of patents, and their govern¬ 
ments (modeled closely after those of the 
states) were recognized and established 
by treaties, under which they were re¬ 
quired to hold the land in common for the 
use of the whole tribe and to secure its 
exclusive use to the Indians. To this end 
the United States guaranteed the title and 
the exclusive use of the land by the In¬ 
dians. Their already advanced civiliza¬ 
tion was still further developed, but in 
time the Indians disregarded the treaties 
and invited white settlement, both by 
intermarriage and through commerce. 
A dominant class of mixed-bloods appro¬ 
priated to their own benefit large tracts 
of land and other exclusive privileges 
through manipulation of the govern¬ 
ments. The peculiar legal conditions en¬ 
couraged great lawlessness. More than 
250,000 white settlers had no control or 
protection of law whatever, as the United 
States courts had very little jurisdiction 
over the Indians and the Indian courts 
had no jurisdiction over the whites. 
Civilization was further obstructed in that 
30,000 white children had no schools and 
no possibility thereof. 

Immediately on its appointment the 


BULL. 30] 


COMMUNIPAW 


333 


Commission proceeded to request a hear¬ 
ing from each nation in turn, asking it to 
treat with the United States, and after¬ 
ward made the same offer to a joint con¬ 
vention. The proposal was received with 
some favor, but persistent misinterpreta¬ 
tion of the purpose and proposals of the 
United States by the favored class created 
prejudice among the ignorant Indians, 
and the overtures were refused. Private 
and public conferences were held and 
further proposals made. Whenever the 
purposes of the United States were un¬ 
derstood a desire appeared for a friendly 
agreement, but adverse pressure of many 
kinds was constantly and successfully 
brought to bear. As the internal condi¬ 
tions grew worse the situation became a 
menace to the surrounding country. Ac¬ 
cordingly the United States was com¬ 
pelled to resume its right of protection 
and control, hitherto held in abeyance. 
In June, 1898, Congress passed a law, 
generally known as the Curtis act, pro¬ 
viding that in case no agreements could 
be reached the Indian courts should be 
abolished or curtailed in jurisdiction, and 
giving the Commission authority to allot 
the land and otherwise to proceed with 
the work for which it was created. 

Agreements were made with the tribes 
at various times, but none of them was 
completed until after the passage of this 
act. As the land titles differed with each 
tribe, separate agreements were neces¬ 
sary. In the case of the Choctaw and 
Chickasaw the land was held in common, 
but agreements were necessary with each 
government. Two agreements were made 
with the Creeks in 1897, but failed of 
ratification. Many other vain attempts 
were made, but on Mar. 8, 1900, an 
agreement passed the Creek council which 
was ratified by Congress. Agreements 
with the Cherokee were made in 1899 
and in 1900, but failed either in Congress 
or in the Cherokee council. Another 
agreement was sought by the Cherokee 
in Apr., 1901, but too late, and allotment 
proceeded under the Curtis act. An 
agreement made with the Choctaw and 
Chickasaw in Feb., 1901, failed to be 
ratified by the Chickasaw. Another in 
Mar., 1902, was ratified by both nations 
and by Congress. An agreement with 
the Seminole was made in Oct., 1899, and 
ratified by Congress. Several other agree¬ 
ments were made from time to time re¬ 
garding the enrollment of citizens, or 
otherwise supplementary to the main 
agreements. 

Allotment began among the Creeks in 
1899, the Seminole in 1901, and in the 
other nations in 1903. Congress also pro¬ 
vided that the Commission should make 
citizenship rolls for each tribe, containing 
lists of such Indians as were justly en¬ 


titled to share in the division of the land. 
Of the 200,000 claims presented, about 
90,000 were allowed. These decisions 
included the question of the rights of the 
Mississippi Choctaw, the care of the freed- 
men who had been owned as slaves by 
these Indians and after the Civil war 
granted citizenship, and several other 
difficult questions. 

The Commission was required to allot 
the land according to its value. This 
differed greatly on account of the coal, 
asphalt, and other minerals, of the valu¬ 
able timber, of its great agricultural possi¬ 
bilities, and of its large towns with flour¬ 
ishing business interests. It was there¬ 
fore necessary to determine the value of 
each quarter section. The Commission 
surveyed the country, appraised these 
values, decided and carried out plans for 
the equitable and possible adjustment of 
the town sites, and made triplicate records 
of all these matters. This occupied a 
large cleric? 1 force, at one time amounting 
to 500, from 1898 to 1905. 

In 1903 charges were made by the In¬ 
dian Rights Association that the members 
and officers of the Commission had used 
their positions to advance their private 
interests. President Roosevelt appointed 
Hon. Charles J. Bonaparte and Mr Clinton 
R. Woodruff to investigate these charges. 
Their report, while advising circumspec¬ 
tion in these particulars, exonerated the 
Commission from all malfeasance. 

By the processes described, and by a 
large amount of other detailed work, 
20,000,000 acres of land were justly dis¬ 
tributed among 90,000 heirs; the interests 
of 600,000 other inhabitants were con¬ 
served, and an enormous amount of labor 
connected therewith was successfully 
carried on under difficult conditions of 
many kinds. The work of allotment occu¬ 
pied about 7 years and was accomplished 
at a cost equivalent to 10 cents an acre 
for the land allotted. Thus by the work 
of the Commission from 1893 to 1905 five 
governments with their executive, legis¬ 
lative, and judicial machinery were suc¬ 
cessfully transformed into a constituent 
part of the United States by transactions 
which secured all their just rights and 
promoted their highest welfare, as well 
as contributed to the best interests of the 
whole country. 

Seethe Reports of the Commissioner of 
Indian Affairs, 1893-1905; Reportsofthe 
Commission to the Five Civilized Tribes, 
1894-1905. (a. ud.) 

Communipaw (‘good fishing.’—Jones, 
Ind. Bui., 15, 1867). The principal vil¬ 
lage of the Hackensack, about 1630, at 
the present Communipaw, Hudson co., 
N. J. (j. m.) 

Communipau.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 90, 
1872. Gamoenapa.—Ibid. (Dutch form). Gamo- 


334 


COMO-CON CH ACHITOU 


[b. a. e. 


enepa.—Doc. of 1665 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., II, 
463, 1858 (probably a Dutch settlement). Ga- 
monepa.—Ibid., 466. Gemoenepaen.—Deed of 1654, 
ibid., xm, 36, 1881. Gemoenepaw.—Deed of 1647, 
ibid., 22 (name of creek). 

Como. An unidentified tribe that lived 
near the Susola, of whom Cabeza de 
Vaca (Smith trans., 84, 1851) heard while 
in Texas in 1527-34. The people seem 
to have been nearer the coast than the 
Susola, who, at the time Cabeza de Vaca 
heard of them, were at war with the 
Atayos (Adai). 

Comohuabi. A Papago village in s. 
Ariz., on the border of Sonora; pop. 80 
families in 1871.—Wilbur in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1871, 365, 1872. 

Comopori. A warlike tribe of the Cahita 
group formerly inhabiting a peninsula 7 
leagues from Ahome, n. w. Sinaloa, 
Mexico. They subsisted by fishing, and 
appear to have been related to the Vaco- 
regue, speaking the same language.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 332, 1864. 

Comox. An important coast Salish 
tribe on both sides of Discovery pas¬ 
sage, between Chancellor channel and C. 
Mudge, Brit. Col. Their proper name, 
Qatlo'ltx, lias been taken by Boas as the 
designation of one dialect of coast Salish, 
including, besides this, the Clahoose, 
Eeksen, Kakekt, Kaake, Klamatuk (?), 
Tatpoos, Homalko, and Sliammon. Pop. 
of the tribe 58 in 1904; of those speaking 
the dialect, about 300. (j. r. s. ) 

CaMo'ltq.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes of Can., 
10, 1889. Commagsheak.—Scouler (1846) in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 1,234, 1848. Co-moux.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1855. Comox.—Mayne, 
Brit. Col., 181, 1861. Comuxes.—Grant in Jour. 
Roy. Geog. Soc., 293,1857. K’o'moks.—Boas in 5th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 1889. Ko-mookhs.— 
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1 ,269,1877. Komux.— 
Sproat, Savage Life, 311, 1868. Kowmook.—Tol- 
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120 b, 1884. 
S’komook.—Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 269, 
1877 (Uguultas name). S’tlaht-tohtlt-hu.—Ibid, 
(own name). Xomoks.—Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887 
(Lekwiltok name). 

Comoza. A former Potawatomi vil¬ 
lage on Tippecanoe r., in Fulton co., 
Ind. The reserve on which it was situa¬ 
ted was sold in 1834. The name was 
that of a chief. Also spelled Camoza. 

Comupatrico. An Opata pueblo visited 
by Coronado in 1540. It was situated in 
the valley of the Rio Sonora, n. w. 
Mexico, doubtless in the vicinity of 
Arizpe. Possibly identical with a pueblo 
later known by another name. 

Comupatrico.—Castaneda (1596) in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 515,1896. TJpatrico.—Castaneda in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., ix, 158,1838. 

Cona. A settlement of a semisedentary 
tribe called Teyas by the Spaniards, re¬ 
garded as probably the Hainai, a Caddoan 
tribe. The place was visited by Coro¬ 
nado and his army in 1541, and de¬ 
scribed as situated 250 leagues (ca. 660 
m.) from the Pueblo settlements of the 
Rio Grande and 40 days’ journey s. of 
Quivira in e. central Kansas. See Casta¬ 


neda (1596) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 507, 
1896. 

Conaliga. A former Upper Creek band 
or settlement, probably near Tukabatchi, 
on Tallapoosa r., perhaps in Randolph 
co., Ala.—Woodward, Reminiscences, 37, 
1859. 

Conauhkare. A Tuscarora village in 
North Carolina in 1701.—Lawson (1709), 
N. C., 383, 1860. 

Concepcion (Spanish). A Tubar pueblo 
on the s. tributary of the Rio Fuerte, 
s. w. Chihuahua, Mexico.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 323, 1864. 

Concepcidn. A mission established 
among the Yuma by Fray Francisco 
Garces, in T780, on the w. bank of the 
Rio Colorado, in s. e. Cal., near the 
Arizona boundary, at the site of modern 
Ft Yuma. The mission was destroyed 
by the natives July 17-19,1781, and about 
50 Spaniards, including Garces, 3 other 
friars, and Capt. Rivera y Moncada, were 
killed. See San Pedro y San Pablo. 
Concepcion.—Taylor in CaL Farmer, June 13, 
1862; Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 397, 1889. Im¬ 
maculate Conception.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 101, 1855. 
Puerta de la Purisima Concepcion.—Coues, Garces 
Diary, 19,1900. 

Concepcidn de Nuestra Senora. A visita¬ 
tion town of (Cochimi?) Indians in 1745, 
situated 6 leagues s. of the parent mission, 
Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe, in lat. 27°, 
Lower California. Thirty-two ranch e- 
rias were dependent on it. 

Concepcion de Nuestra Senora.—Venegas, Hist. 
Cal., II, 198, 1759. Purisima Concepcion.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., V, 186, 1857. 

Concha (shortened from Ku n shak-bolukta , 

‘ round reed-brake’). A former impor¬ 
tant Choctaw town, named from its situ¬ 
ation on the side of a circular reed-brake 
in the s. w. corner of Kemper co., Miss. 
It was at the junction of the lines which 
separated the three primary Choctaw 
divisions, although belonging itself to 
the n. e. division.—Halbert in Ala. Hist. 
Soc. Publ., i, 376, 1901; Miss. Hist. Soc. 
Publ., iii, 370, 1900. 

Concha.—Danville, map (1732) in Hamilton, Co¬ 
lonial Mobile, 158, 1897; Jefferys, French Dom. 
Am., 135, map, 1761. Conshaques.—LaHarpe 
(1715) in French, Hist. Coll. La., iii, 44, 1851. 
Coosak Baloagtaw.—Romans, Florida, 311, 1775. 
Couchas.—Vaudreuil (1709) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist,, x, 951, 1858. 

Conchachitou ( Ku r >sliak-chitto , ‘ big reed- 
brake’). A former Choctaw town in 
Neshoba co., Miss., which extended from 
about 2 m. w. of Yazoo town almost to 
the vicinity of Schekaha. Often called 
West Congeto and West Cooncheto to dis¬ 
tinguish it from another town of the same 
or a similar name. See Couechitou, and 
consult Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
vi, 427, 1902. 

Conchachitou.— Philippeaux, Map of Engl. Col., 
1781. Conchachitouu.—Alcedo. Dice. Geog., I, 638, 
1786. Quansheto. —Adair, Am. Inds., 296, 1775. 
West Congeta.—Romans, Florida, 313,1775. West 
Congeto.—Halbert, op. cit. West Cooncheto.—Ibid. 


BULL. 30] 


CONCHANTY 


CONESTOGA 


335 


Conchanty. A town of the Creek Nation 
about the junction of Conchanti cr. with 
Arkansas r., Ind. Ter. 

Conchanti. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., n, 185, 
1888. Ikan’-tchati. —Ibid. Kanshadi. —Ibid. 

Conchartimicco’s Town. A former town 
on Apalachicola r., Fla., evidently named 
from a chief called Conchart, orConcharti, 
and probably belonging to the Lower 
Creeks. 

Conchaptimicco’s town. —Jesup (1837) in H. R. 
Doc. 78, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 95, 1838. Concharti- 
micco’s town.— Jesup (1837) in H.R. Doc. 225, 25th 
Cong., 3d sess., 65,1839. 

Conchatikpi ( Ku n shak-tikpi, ‘reed-brake 
knob’). A former Choctaw town on a 
creek of the same name, popularly called 
Coonshark, in the s. part of Neshoba 
co., Miss. It derived its name from the 
creek, which in turn was called after a 
prominent bluff near a reed-brake.— 
Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 
430, 1902. 

Conchayon. One of the 7 villages or 
tribes forming the Taensa confederacy in 
1699.—Iberville in Margry, Dec., iv, 179, 
1880. 

Conchi. Mentioned by Garcia (Origen 
Inds., 293, 1729) as an Indian province 
of New Mexico, but more likely identi¬ 
fiable with the Conchas, or Conchos, a 
little-known tribe formerly living on a 
river of the same name in Chihuahua, 
Mexico. (f. w. h.) 

Concho (Span.: ‘ conch ’). The inhab¬ 
itants of Concho bay, e. coast of Lower 
California, on which Loreto mission was 
established in 1697. The people spoke 
the Cochimi dialect.—Picolo (1702) in 
Lettres Edif., ii, 63, 1841. 

Condawhaw. A Seneca settlement, in 
1779, on the site of the present North 
Hector, N. Y.—Doc. of 1779 quoted by 
Conover, Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., 
B. A. E. 

Conejeros (Span.: ‘ rabbit men’). An 
unidentified Apache band, mentioned 
by Barcia (Ensayo Cronologico, 169, 
1723): “In 1596 the Apaches called Cone¬ 
jeros destroyed a people they described 
as red and white who had come from 
Florida. The Spaniards could not ascer¬ 
tain of what nation they were nor find 
traces of their journey.” 

Conejoholo (‘ a kettle on a long upright 
object.’—Hewitt). A Conov village, 
identical with the Dekanoagah of Evans, 
which Day locates on the e. bank of the 
Susquehanna, on or near the site of Bain- 
bridge, Lancaster co., Pa. The Conoy 
removed to Conejoholo from their former 
home on the Potomac about 1700 and 
again removed farther up the Susque¬ 
hanna before 1743. (j. m. ) 

Conejaghera. —Doc. of 1705 in Day, Penn., 390, 
1843. Conejoholo.— Doc. of 1743 in Brinton, Lenape 
Leg., 26,1885. Dekanoagah.— Evans (1707) in Day, 
op. cit., 389, 1843. 


Conejos (Span.: ‘rabbits’). A small 
Diegueno band on or near Capitan Grande 
res., at least 9 m. from San Diego, Cal.; 
pop. 80 in 1883. 

Conemaugh (Delaware kunamdg, ‘long 
fishing place.’—Gerard). A former Del¬ 
aware and Shawnee village on the site 
of the present Johnstown, Cambria co., 
Pa. 

Cones. Small prehistoric objects of 
polished stone, the use of which is unde¬ 
termined, and they are therefore classed 
with problematical objects (q. v.). They 
are usually made of hematite or other 
hard material, and occur most plentifully 
in the states e. of the Mississippi. The 
base often varies somewhat from a circle, 
and the apex is sometimes quite low. 
Occasionally the specimens are truncated 
or abruptly sloped above or grade into 
hemispheres (q. v.), and there are 
doubly conical and egg forms which grade 
into the typical plummets (q. v.), the 
top in cases being truncated or slightly 
hollowed out, as if to accommodate some 
kind of fastening. Some of the cones 
approximate in form the more conical 
boat-stones (q. v.). It is surmised that 
they were carried as charms or served as a 
part of the “medicine” kit of the shaman. 
It is possible, however, that they were 
employed in playing some 
game. It is observed that 
kindred objects of hematite 
of more or less irregular 
shape show facets, such as 
would result from rubbing C0NE 0F hematite; 
them down for the red color KENTUCKY ' ' 1 * 3 ' 
which they somewhat readily yield. Sim¬ 
ilar conical objects of hematite are used 
by the Pueblos of to-day and were used by 
the ancient tribes in making sacred paint; 
a tablet of sandstone or shale served as 
the grinding plate, and the cone, which 
was the muller, also yielded the paint. 
See Hemispheres. 

Cones are described and illustrated 
among others by Fowke (1) in 13th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896, (2) Archseol. Hist. Ohio, 
1902; Jones, Antiq. So. Inds., 1873; 
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Rau in 
Smithson. Cont., xxii, 6,1872. 

(w. H. H. G. F.) 

Conestoga ( Kanastoge , ‘at the place of 
the immersed pole ’). An important Iro- 
quoian tribe that formerly lived on Sus¬ 
quehanna r. and its branches. When 
first met by Capt. John Smith, in 1608, 
and until their conquest by the Iroquois 
confederation in 1675, they were in alli¬ 
ance with the Algonquian tribes of the e. 
shore of Chesapeake bay and at war with 
those on the w. shore. They were de¬ 
scribed as warlike and as possessed of a 
physique far superior to that of all the 
other neighboring tribes. By conquest 



336 


CONESTOGA 


[ B. A. E. 


they claimed the lands on both sides of 
Chesapeake bay, from the Choptank and 
Patuxent n. to the territory of the Iro¬ 
quois. In 1675, after their defeat, they 
established themselves on the e. bank of 
the Potomac, in Maryland, immediately 
n. of Piscataway cr., below which the 
Doag (Nanticoke) were then living. 
They formed a close alliance with the 
Dutch and Swedes, and with the English 
of Maryland. The Iroquois had carried 
on relentless war against them, with vary¬ 
ing success, which finally reduced them 
from about 3,000 in 1608 to about 550 
in 1648, while their allies brought the ag¬ 
gregate to about 1,250. Champlain says 
that in 1615 they had more than 20 vil¬ 
lages, of which only 3 were at that time 
engaged in war with the Iroquois, and 
that their town of Carantouan alone could 
muster more than 800 warriors. The Iro¬ 
quois of the n. drove the Conestoga down 
on the tribes to the s. and w., who were 
allies of the English, a movement involv¬ 
ing the Conestoga in a war with Maryland 
and Virginia in 1675. Finding them¬ 
selves surrounded by enemies on all 
sides, a portion of them abandoned their 
country and took refuge with the Occa- 
neechi on Roanoke r., while the rest 
remained in Pennsylvania. A quarrel oc¬ 
curred soon with the Occaneechi, who 
made common cause with the whites 
against the fugitive Conestoga, who were 
compelled to return to Susquehanna r. and 
submit to the Iroquois. According to 
Colden they were all finally removed to 
the country of the Oneida, where they re¬ 
mained until they lost their language, 
when they were allowed to return to 
Conestoga, their ancient town. Here 
they rapidly wasted, until, at the close 
of the year 1763, the remnant, number¬ 
ing only 20, were massacred by a party of 
rioters inflamed by the accounts of the 
Indian war then raging along the Penn¬ 
sylvania frontier. About 1675 their 
stockade, where they were defeated by 
the Maryland forces, was on the e. side 
of Susquehanna r., 3 m. below Columbia, 
Pa. Herrman’s map of 1676 located it 
at nearly the same point on the river, but 
on the w. bank. The Swedes and Dutch 
called them Minqua, from the Delaware 
name applied to all tribes of Iroquoian 
stock; the Powhatan tribes called them 
Susquehannock, a name signifying ‘roily 
river,’ which was adopted by the English 
of Virginia and Maryland.* The names 
of their villages are Attaock, Carantouan, 
Cepowig, Oscalui, Quadroque, Sasquesa- 
hanough, Testnigh, and Utchowig. The 
Meherrin, on the river of that name in s. e. 
Virginia, were officially reported to be a 
band of the Conestoga driven s. by the 
Virginians during Bacon’s rebellion in 
1675-76. (j. N . B . h.) 


Akhrakouaehronon. —Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 2, 1858. 
Akhrakvaeronon. —Jes. Rel. 1640, 35,1858. Amdus- 
tez. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816. 
Andaslaka. —Ibid. Andastaehronon. —.Tes. Rel. for 
1640, 35, 1858. Andastaeronnons. —Jes. Rel. for 

1657.11.1858. Andastaes.— Treaty of 1666 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 45, 1855. Andastagueus.— 
Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Andastaguez. —Park- 
man, Jes. in N. Am., xlvi, note, 1883. Andastakas. — 
Proud, Penn., ii, 294, 1798. Andastes. —Raffeix 
(1672) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 
52-53, 1872. And’astfs.— Alcedo, Dice. Geog., I, 97, 
1786 (misprint). Andastiguez. —Parkman,Conspir¬ 
acy of Pontiac, I, 22, 1883. Andastiquez.— Keane 
in Stanford, Compend.,500,1878. Andastoe. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1647, 58, 1858. Andasto‘e‘r. —Jes. Rel.. 
Th waites ed., xxxvu,104,1899. Andastoerhonon.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1637,159,1858. Andastoeronnon. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1646, 76, 1858. Andasto‘e‘ronnons. —Jes. 
Rel., Thwaites ed., xxxvii, 104, 1899. Andasto- 
errhenons. —Jes. Rel. for 1635, 33, 1858. Andasto- 
gnes. —Gale, Upper Miss., 49,1867. Andastogue. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1663, 10, 1858. Andastoguehronnons. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1664, 35, 1858. Andastogueronnons. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1663, 10.1858. Andastoguez. —Jes. Rel. 
for 1672, 24, 1858. Andastohe. —Jes. Rel. for 1647, 

8.1858. Andastonez.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 81, 1854. Andastoui.—Parkman, Jes. 
in N. Am., xlvi, note, 1883. Andastracronnons.— 
Ibid. Andosagues.—Memoir of 1681 in Margry, 
Dec., ii, 270,1877. Andostaguez.—Frontenac (1673) 
in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 110,1855. Andostoues.— 
Galline6 (1669) in Margry, D£c., I, 130,1875. An- 
tastoez.—Ibid., 138. Antastogue.—Ibid., 124. An- 
tasto8i.—Courcelles (1671) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ix, 84,1855. Antastouais.—Galline6 (1669) in Mar¬ 
gry, Dec., I, 124, 1875. Antastouez.—Courcelles 
(1670), ibid., I, 189, 1875. Atra‘K8ae‘r.—Jes. Rel., 
Thwaites ed., XXXVII, 104, 1899. Atra‘kwae‘ron- 
nons.—Ibid., 105. Atrakwer. — Doc. of 1652 quoted 
by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 137, 1857. Can- 
astoga.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 
79,1854. Canastoge.—Zeisberger (1750) quoted by 
Conover, Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
Canastogues.—Doc. of 1699 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
iv, 579, 1854. Canestogas.—Barton, New Views, 
97,1798. Canestogo.—Colden (1727), Five Nations, 
app., 58, 1747. Canistage.—Livingston (1717) 
in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist.,v, 486,1855. Canistoge.—Liv¬ 
ingston (1717), ibid., 485. Canostogas.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 136, 1857. Carantouanis.— 
Champlain, (Euvres, v, pt. 2, 8, 1870. Carantou- 
annais.— Ibib., IV, chart. 32, 1870. Carantouans.— 
Parkman, Pion. Fr., 337, 1883. Cinelas.—Pey¬ 
ton, Hist. Augusta Co., Va.,6,1882. Conastagoe.— 
Peters (1764) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., x, 
508, 1871. Conastoga.—Ft Johnson conf. (1756) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,vn, 110,1856. Conastogy.— 
Johnson (1747), ibid., vi, 390, 1855. Conestego.— 
Weyman ( ca . 1719) quoted by Hawkins, Mis¬ 
sions, 117, 1845. Conestoga.—Keith (1722) quot¬ 
ed by Day, Penn., 390,1843. Conestogo.—Doc. of 
1701, ibid. Conestogue.—Smith (ca. 1810) quoted 
by Day, ibid., 279. Conistogas.—Rupp, North¬ 
ampton Co., 5,1845. Connastago.—Peters (1764) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., x, 508, 1871. Cono- 
stogas.—Ft Stanwix treaty (1768) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., viu, 133, 1857. Endastes.—Denonville 
(1865),ibid., IX, 283,1855. Gandastogues.—Jes. Rel. 
1672, 26, 1858. Gandostogega.—La Salle (1682) in 
Margry,D6c., ii, 237,1877. Ganossetage.—Doc. of 1756 
in Rupp, Northampton Co., 106, 1845. Guandasto- 
gues. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., 103,1848. 
Guandostagues.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 290, 
1853. Guyandots.—Gallatin quoted in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ill, 125, note, 1853. Huskchanoes.—Carr 
(1664), ibid., 74. Kanneastoka-roneah.—Macauley, 
N. Y., ii. 174, 1829. Machoeretini.—De Laet, Nov. 
Orb.,76,1633. Minckus.—Holm (1702)inMem.,Hist. 
Soc. Pa., Ill, pt. 1, 157, 1834. Minquaas.—Dutch 
map (1616) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. Min- 
quaes.—Hendricksen (1616), ibid.,14. Minquaos.— 
Yong (1634) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 119, 
1871. Minquas.—Dutch rec. (1649) quoted by Win¬ 
field, Hudson Co., 49, 1874. Minquase.—Hudde 
(1645) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xu, 30, 1877. Min- 

quays.—Penn’s treaty (1701) in Proud, Penn.,i,428, 

1797. Minques.— Holm (1702) in Mem. Hist, Soc. 
Pa. in, pt. 1,157,1834. Minquinos. —Mitchell, map 


BULL. 30] 


CONESTOGA HORSE-CONFEDERATION 


337 


(1755), quoted in Am. Antiq., I, 96, 1878. Minquo- 
sy. —De Laet, Nov. Orb., 76, 1633. Mynckussar. — 
Vater. Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 317,1816. Myncqueser.— 
Ibid., 317. Natio perticarum. —Du Creux quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes, vi, 137,1857 (Lat.: ‘Nation 
of the poles’). Ogehage.— Dutch map (1616) in 
hi. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 1 , 1856 (Mohawk name). On- 
tastoes.— Galline6 (1684) in Fernow, OhioVal., 219, 
lo90. Saskwihanang.— Rafinesque, Am. Nations, 
1,138,1836. Sasquahana. —Herrman, map (1670) 
in Rep. on Boundary between Va. and Md., 1873. 
Sasquahannahs.— Doc. of 1726 in N. C. Rec., II, 
643,1886. Sasquehannocks. —Doc. ca. 1646 in Force, 
Hist. Tracts, II, 19,1838. Sasquesahanocks. — Smith 
(1629), Va., 1,118, 1819. Sasquesahanoughs. —Ibid., 
74. Sasquesahanougs. —Strachey (ca. 1612), Va., 
39,1849. Sasquisahanoughes. —Md. Rec. quoted in 
The Nation,343, Apr. 22, 1886. Sassquahana. —Herr¬ 
man, map (1670) in Rep. on Boundary between 
Va. and Md., 1873. Sesquehanocks. —Harris, Voy. 
and Trav., I, 843,1705. Sesquihanowes. —Bozman, 
Md.,1,128,1837. Southern Minquas. —Doc. of 1649 in 
N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Xlil,25,1881. Suscahannaes. — 
Andros (1676), ibid., xil, 557,1877. Suscohannes.— 
Andros, ibid., 556. Susquahanna. —Penn’s treaty 
(1701) in Proud, Penn., i, 428, 1797. Susqua- 
hannocks. —Doc. of 1648, ibid., 114. Susquehanas, — 
Doc. of 1671 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xn, 488,1877. 
Susquehannagh. —Penn. Rec. (1701) in Day, Penn., 
390, 1843. Susquehannah Minquays, —Ibid. Sus¬ 
quehanna’s. —Andros (1675) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., Xil, 543, 1877. Susquehannocks. —Doc. of 
1648 in Proud, Penn., I, 114. 1797. • Susquehan- 
noes.— Doc. of 1642 quoted by White, Rel. Itin., 82, 
1874. Susquehannos. —Doc. of 1677 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 227,1855. Susquehanocks. —Bozman, 
Md., 1,128,1837. Susquehanoes. —White (ca. 1634), 
Rel. Itin., 37, 1874. Susquhannok. —Drake, Bk. 
Inds., xi, 1848. Susquihanoughs.— Doc. of 1638 in 
Bozman, Md., II, 62, 1837. Takoulguehronnons, — 
Jes. Rel., Thwaites ed., xxxvii, 104, 1899. Tra- 
kouaehronnons. —Jes. Rel., ill, index, 1858. Tra- 
k8aehronnons. —Ibid, 1660, 7, 1858. 

Conestoga horse. A heavy draft horse, 
said to have originated in Pennsylvania 
toward the close of the 18th century, 
from a cross of the Flemish cart horse 
with some English breed (Bartlett, Diet. 
Americanisms, 137, 1877). This horse 
was much in use before the era of rail¬ 
roads. (a. f. c.) 

Conestoga wagon. A large white-topped 
wagon, to which 6 or more Conestoga 
horses were attached (Bartlett, Diet. 
Americanisms, 137, 1877). These horses 
and wagons “were a marked feature of 
the landscape of this state.” The horse 
and the wagon were named from Con¬ 
estoga, a village in Lancaster co., Pa., 
called after one of the Iroquoian peoples 
inhabiting this region in the 18th cen¬ 
tury. (a. f. c.) 

Confederation. A political league for 
offense and defense was sometimes formed 
by two or more tribes, who entered into 
a compact or formal statement of princi¬ 
ples to govern their separate and collect¬ 
ive action. A looser, less formal, and less 
cohesive alliance of tribes was sometimes 
formed to meet some grave temporary 
emergency. The unit of a confederation is 
the organized tribe, just as the clan or gens 
is the unit of the tribe. The confederation 
has a supreme council composed of rep¬ 
resentatives from the several contracting 
tribes of which it is composed. The 
tribes forming a confederation surren¬ 
dered to the league certain powers and 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-22 


rights which they had exercised indi¬ 
vidually. The executive, legislative, and 
judicial functions of the confederation 
were exercised by the supreme council 
through instruments appointed in the 
compact or afterward devised. Every 
tribe of the confederation was generally 
entitled to representation in the supreme 
federal council. The chiefs of the federal 
council and the subchiefs of each tribe 
constituted the local council of the tribe. 
The confirmation of officials and their 
installation were functions delegated to 
the officers of the confederation. The 
supreme federal council had practically 
the same officers as a tribal council, 
namely, a speaker, fire-keeper, door¬ 
keeper, and wampum-keeper or annalist. 
In the Iroquoian confederation the origi¬ 
nal 5 tribes severally had a supreme war- 
chief, the name and the title of whom 
were hereditary in certain specified clans. 
The supreme federal council, sitting as a 
court without a j ury, heard and determined 
causes in accordance with established 
principles and rules. The representation 
in the council of the Iroquois confedera¬ 
tion was not based on the clan as its unit, 
for many clans had no representative in 
the federal council, while others had sev¬ 
eral. The supreme federal council of 
this confederation was organized on the 
basis of tribal phratries or brotherhoods 
of tribes, of which one phratry acted as 
do the presiding judges of a court sitting 
without a jury, having power to confirm, 
or on constitutional or other grounds to 
reject, the votes or conclusions of the two 
other phratries acting individually, but 
having no right to discuss any question 
beyond suggesting means to the other 
phratries for reaching an agreement or 
compromise, in the event that they offer 
differing votes or opinions, and at all 
times being jealously careful of the cus¬ 
toms, rules, principles, and precedents of 
the council, requiring procedure strictly 
to conform to these where possible. The 
constituent tribes of the Iroquois con¬ 
federation, the Mohawk, Oneida, Onon¬ 
daga, Cayuga, and Seneca, constituted 
three tribal phratries, of which the Mo¬ 
hawk and Seneca formed the first, the 
Oneida and Cayuga the second, and the 
Onondaga the third; but in ceremonial 
and festal assemblies the last tribe affi¬ 
liated with the Mohawk-Seneca phratry. 

Among the looser confederations, prop¬ 
erly alliances, may be mentioned that of 
the Chippewa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi; 
the 7 council fires of the Dakota; and the 
alliance of the tribes of Virginiaand Mary¬ 
land called the Powhatan confederacy. 
To these may be added the loose Caddo 
confederacy, which, like the others, was 
held together largely by religious affilia¬ 
tion. The records are insufficient to de- 


338 


CONGAREE-CONOHASSET 


[b. a. e. 


fine with accuracy the political organiza¬ 
tion of these groups. See Clan and Gens , 
Government , Social Organization , Tribe. 

(j. N. b. H.) 

Congaree. A small tribe, supposed to 
be Siouan, formerly living in South Caro¬ 
lina. The grounds for including this 
tribe in the Siouan family are its location 
and its intimate relation with known 
Siouan tribes, especially the Catawba, 
with which it was ultimately incorpo¬ 
rated; but according to Adair and Law- 
son the Congaree spoke a dialect differ¬ 
ent from that of the Catawba, which they 
preserved even after their incorporation. 
In 1693 the Cherokee complained that the 
Shawnee, Catawba, and Congaree took 
prisoners from among them and sold 
them as slaves in Charleston. They were 
visited in 1701 by Lawson, who found 
them on the n. e. bank of Santee r. below 
the junction of the Wateree. Their town 
consisted of not more than 12 houses, 
with plantations up and down the coun¬ 
try. On a map of 1715 the village of 
the Congaree is placed on the s. bank of 
Congaree r., about opposite the site of 
Columbia. A fort bearing the tribal 
name was established near the village in 
1718. They were a small tribe, having 
lost many by tribal feuds but more by 
smallpox. Lawson states that, although 
the several tribes visited by him were 
generally small and lived closely adjoin¬ 
ing one another, they differed in features, 
disposition, and language, a fact which 
renders the assignment of these small 
tribes to the Siouan family conjectural. 
The Congaree, like their neighbors, took 
part in the Yamasi war in 1715, as a re¬ 
sult of which they were so reduced that 
they were compelled to move up the 
country and join the Catawba, with 
whom they w T ere still living in 1743. 
Moll’s map of 1730 (Salmon, Modern 
History, hi, 562, 1746) places their town 
or station on the n. bank of Congaree r., 
opposite which ran the trail to the Chero¬ 
kee country. It was s. of lat. 34°, prob¬ 
ably in Richland co. They were a friendly 
people, handsome and well built, the 
women being especially beautiful com¬ 
pared with those of other tribes. See 
Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the East, 1894. 
Ani'-Gili'.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508, 
1900 (‘long-haired people,’ a Cherokee clan, pos¬ 
sibly originally Congaree). Canggaree.— Adair, 
Hist. Am. Inds., 225,1775. Congarees. —Mills, Hist. 
S. C., 108,1826. Congares. —Doc. of 1719 in Rivers, 
Hist. S. C., 93, 1874. Congerees. —Lawson, Hist. 
Carolina, 25,1860. Congeres. —Moll, map of Caro¬ 
lina, 1720. Congree.— La Toui^ map of U. S., 1784. 
Conqerees. —War map of 1715 in Winsor, Hist. Am., 
V, 346,1887. 

Congewichacha ( wichacha =‘ man’). A 
Dakota division, possibly of the Teton. 
Cf. Kanghiyuha. 

Conge-wee-cha-cha.— Corliss, MS. Lacotah vocab.. 
B. A.E., 106,1874 (Teton name). 


Conicari (Nahuatl :coni ‘crow,’ ‘raven ’, 
cari ‘house’: ‘house of the raven.’— 
Buelna). A settlement of the Mayo, 
probably of the Tepahue division, on 
the Rio Mayo, 30 m. n. of Alamos, in 
lat. 27° 6', s. e. Sonora, Mexico. It con¬ 
tained 200 families in 1645, and is still 
one of the most important Mayo settle¬ 
ments. For discussion as to its linguistic 
relations see Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, iii, 53,1890. 

Canicari. —Escudero, Noticias de Son. y Sin., 101, 
1849. Conecare.— Hardy, Travels in Mexico, 438, 
1829. Conicare.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, 
Neue Welt-Bott, 1726. Conicari.—Rivera, Diario 
y Derrot., leg. 1179, 1736. San Andres Conicari.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 356,1864. 

Conisca (seemingly from kane'ska, 

‘ grass ’). One of 4 Cherokee settlements 
mentioned by Bartram (Travels, 371, 
1792) as situated on a branch of Ten¬ 
nessee r. about 1776. 

Conkhandeenrhonon. An Iroquoian tribe 
living s. of St Lawrence r. in 1635. 

Conkhandeenrhonons. —Brebeuf in Jes. Rel. for 1635, 
33, 1858. Konkhandeenhronon. —Jes. Rel. for 1640, 

35,1858. 

Conneaut. A village composed of Onon¬ 
daga and Missisauga and other Algon- 
quian immigrants, situated on Conneaut 
lake, Pa., in the 18th century. 

Coneyat. —Procter (1791) in Am. St. Pap., Ind. Aff., 
I, 163, 1832. Conyat.— Ellicot (1794), ibid., 516. 

Connecticut (from the Mahican quinni- 
tukq-ut, ‘at the long tidal river’). Tribes 
living on Connecticut r., including the 
Scantie, Nawaas, and Podunk. 

Conittekooks. —Van der Donck (1655) quoted by 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 82, 1872. Connecta- 
cuts.— Wood (1639) quoted by Barton, New Views, 
xix, 1798. Connegticuts. —Russell (1682) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., VIII, 85,1868. Quinticoock.— 
Williams (1643), ibid., 1st s., iii,205, 1794. 

Connewango (‘at the falls’). (1) A 
Seneca village that stood on the site of 
Warren, Pa., and was destroyed by Col. 
Brodhead in 1779. (2) A former Seneca 

village on the left bank of Alleghany r., 
above the site of Tionesta, Forest co., Pa. 
Both villages belonged to the division of 
the Seneca known as Cornplanter’s band. 

Cananouagan, —La Tour, map, 1779. Canaouagon,— 
Vaudreuil (1759) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 949,1858. 
Canawagon. —Guy Park conf. (1775), ibid., vm, 
553,1857. Canawagow. —Johnson Hall conf. (1774), 
ibid. Canawako. —Onondaga conf., ibid., 426. 
Canwagan.— Guy Park conf. (1774), ibid., 519. 
Cayantha.— Procter in Am. St. Pap., IV, 154, 1832. 
Conawago. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
clx, 1899. Conewango. —Butterfield, Washington- 
Irvine Cor., 43, 1882. Conneogie. — Harris, Tour, 
map, 1805. Connewangoes. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, III, 288, 1853. Cornplanter’s Town.—V. L. 
Thomas, letter, 1885. Kanaouagan. — Joncaire 
(1749) in Margry,D6c., VI, 675,1886. Kanauagon.— 
Butterfield, op. cit. Kanoagoa. — Pouchot, map 
(1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694,1858. Kuno- 
agon.— Doc. of 1759, ibid., 984. 

Conohasset. A Massachuset village for¬ 
merly about Cohasset, Norfolk co., Mass. 
The site was sold by the Indians in 1635. 
Conohasset. —Flint (1821) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
3d s., II, 84-85, 1830. Quonahasit.— Smith (1629), 
Virginia, ii, 194, repr. 1819. Quonahassit. —Smith 
(1616) in Mass. Hist, Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 108, 1837, 


BULL. 30] 


CONONTOROY-CONOY 


339 


Conontoroy. Given as one of the “out 
towns” among the Cherokee in a docu¬ 
ment of 1755 (Roycein5th Rep. B. A. E., 
143,1887). Not identified. 

Conop. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Conoross (corruption of Kdwdn'-urd'- 
stinyi, or Kawdn'-tmrd'-sixnyi, ‘ where the 
duck fell off’). The supposed name of 
a Cherokee settlement on Conoross cr., 
which enters Keowee or Seneca r. from 
the w., in Anderson co., S. C.—Mooney 
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 412, 1900. 

Conneross. —Ibid. 

Conoy. An Algonquian tribe, related 
to the Delawares, from whose ancestral 
stem they apparently sprang, but their 
closest relations were with the Nanticoke, 
with whom it is probable they were in 
late prehistoric times united, the two 
forming a single tribe, while their lan¬ 
guage is supposed to have been somewhat 
closely allied to that spoken in Virginia 
by the Powhatan. Heckewelder believed 
them to be identical with the Kanawha, 
who gave the name to the chief river of 
West Virginia. Although Brinton calls 
this “a loose guess,” the names Conoy, 
Ganawese, etc., seem to be forms of Kana¬ 
wha. The application of the same name 
to the Piscataway tribe of Maryland, and 
to the river, is difficult to explain by 
any other theory than that the former 
once lived on the banks of the Kanawha. 
In 1660 (Proc. Coun., 1636-67, Md. Ar¬ 
chives, 403, 1885) the Piscataway applied 
to the governor of the colony to confirm 
their choice of an “emperor,” and to his 
inquiry in regard to their custom in this 
respect, replied: ‘ ‘ Long a goe there came a 
King from the Easterne Shoare who Co- 
manded over all the Jndians now inhab¬ 
iting within the bounds of this Province 
(nameing every towne severally) and 
also over the Patowmecks and Sasque- 
hannoughs, whome for that he Did as it 
were imbrace and cover them all they 
called Vttapoingassinem this man dye¬ 
ing without issue made his brother Quo- 
konassaum King after him, after whome 
Succeeded his other brothers, after whose 
death they tooke a Sister’s Sonn, and soe 
from Brother to Brother, and for w r ant of 
such to a Sisters Sonne, the Governm 1 
descended for thirteene Generacons with¬ 
out Jnterrupcon vntill Kittamaquunds 
tyme who dyed without brother or Sister 
and apoynted his daughter to be Queene 
but that the Jndians withstood itt as 
being Contrary to their Custome, where- 
vpon they chose Weghucasso for their 
King who was descended from one of 
Vttapoingassinem brothers (But which 
of them they knowe not) and Weghucasso 


at his death apoynted this other Vttapo¬ 
ingassinem to be King being descended 
from one of the first Kings this man they 
sayd was Jan Jan Wizous which in their 
language signifyes a true King. And 
would not suffer vs to call him Tawzin 
which is the Style they give to the sons 
of their Kings, who by their Custome are 
not to succeede in Rule, but his Broth¬ 
ers, or the Sons of his Sisters.” 

The order of descent in this extract 
gives it an impress of truth. It indicates 
close relation between the Nanticoke 
and the Conoy, though the inclusion of 
the Susquehanna (Conestoga) among the 
emperor’s subjects must be rejected. One 
of the tribes of the e. shore from which 
this chief could have come was the 
Nanticoke. Thirteen generations would 
carry back the date of this first emperor 
to the beginning of the 16th century. 
Lord Baltimore’s colonists in 1634 estab¬ 
lished a mission amongst them, and 
the “emperor” Chitomachen, otherwise 
known as Tayac, said to be ruler over a 
dominion extending 130 m. e. and w., 
was converted, with his family. They 
were, however, so harassed by the Cones¬ 
toga that a few years later they aban¬ 
doned their country and moved farther 
up the Potomac. They, then rapidly 
decreasing, were in 1673 assigned a tract 
on that stream, which Streeter (Hist. 
Mag., 1st s., i, 67, 1857) thinks may have 
been near the site of Washington, D. C. 
The Conestoga, when driven from their 
own country by the Iroquois in 1675, 
again invaded the territory of the Conoy 
and forced that tribe to retire up the 
Potomac and into Pennsylvania. This 
was a gradual migration, unless it took 
place at a much later period, for Baron 
Graffenried, while searching for a re¬ 
ported silver mine in 1711, found them 
on the Maryland side of the Potomac 
about 50 m. above Washington, and made 
a treaty of friendship with them. He 
calls them Canawest. About this time 
the Iroquois assigned them lands at Cone- 
joholo on the Susquehanna, near the pres¬ 
ent Bainbridge, Pa., in the vicinity of the 
Nanticoke and Conestoga. Here they 
first began to be known as Conoy. Some 
of them were living with these tribes at 
Conestoga in 1742. They gradually made 
their way up the Susquehanna, stopping 
at Harrisburg, Shamokin, Catawissa, and 
Wyoming, and in 1765 were living in s. 
New York, at Owego, Cliugnut, and Che¬ 
nango, on the e. branch of the Susque¬ 
hanna. At that time they numbered 
only about 150, and, with their associates, 
the Nanticoke and Mahican, were de¬ 
pendent on the Iroquois. They moved 
w. with the Mahican and Delawares, and 
soon became known only as a part of 


340 


CONOY 


f B. A. E. 


those tribes. In 1793 they attended a 
council near Detroit and used the turkey 
as their signature. 

The customs and beliefs of the Conoy 
may best be given by the following quota¬ 
tion from White’s Relatioltineris, ca. 1635, 
although the author’s interpretations of 
customs often go far astray: “The natives 
are very tall and well proportioned; their 
skin is naturally rather dark, and they 
make it uglier by staining it, generally 
with red paint mixed with oil, to keep 
off the mosquitoes, thinking more of their 
own comfort than of appearances. They 
disfigure their countenances with other 
colors, too, painting them in various and 
truly hideous and frightful ways, either 
a dark blue above the nose and red below, 
or the reverse. And as they live almost 
to extreme old age without having beards, 
they counterfeit them with paint, by 
drawing lines of various colors from the 
extremities of the lips to the ears. They 
generally have black hair, which they 
carry round in a knot to the left ear, 
and fasten with a band, adding some 
ornament which is in estimation among 
them. Some of them wear on their fore¬ 
heads the figure of a fish made of copper. 
They adorn their necks with glass beads 
strung on a thread like necklaces, though 
these beads are getting to be less valued 
among them and less useful for trade. 
They are clothed for the most part in 
deerskins or some similar kind of cov¬ 
ering, which hangs down behind like a 
cloak. They wear aprons round the mid¬ 
dle, and leave the rest of the body naked. 
The young boys and girls go about with 
nothing on them. The soles of their feet 
are as hard as horn, and they tread on 
thorns and briers without being hurt. 
Their arms are bows, and arrows 3 ft. 
long, tipped with stag’s horn, or a white 
flint sharpened at the end. They shoot 
these with such skill that they can stand 
off and hit a sparrow in the middle; and, 
in order to become expert by practice, 
they throw a spear up in the air and 
then send an arrow from the bow string 
and drive it into the spear before it falls. 
But since they do not string the bow very 
tight, they can not hit a mark at a great 
distance. They live by means of these 
weapons, and go out every day through 
the fields and woods to hunt squirrels, 
partridges, turkeys, and wild animals. 
For there is an abundance of all these, 
though we ourselves do not yet venture 
to procure food by hunting, for fear of 
ambushes. They live in houses built in 
an oblong, oval shape. Light is admitted 
into these through the roof, by a window 
a foot and a half long; this also serves 
to carry off the smoke, for they kindle the 
fire in the middle of the floor, and sleep 
around the fire. Their kings, however, 


and chief men have private apartments, 
as it were, of their own. and beds, made by 
driving 4 posts into the ground, and ar¬ 
ranging poles above them horizontally.” 

According to the same authority they 
acknowledged one god of heaven, yet 
paid him no outward worship, but strove 
in every way to appease a certain imagin¬ 
ary spirit, which they called Ochre, that 
he might not hurt them. They also wor¬ 
shiped corn and fire. The missionary 
probably here alludes to the use of corn 
and fire in certain religious ceremonies. 
The Conoy villages were Catawissa, Cone- 
dogwinit, Conejoholo, Conoytown, Kitta- 
maquindi, Onuatuc, Opament, Peixtan. 

(j. m. c. t. ) 

Arogisti. —Colden (1727), Five Nations, 40, 1747 
(given as the English name of the Cahnowas in 
1679). Cachnawayes. —Maryland treaty (1682) in 
N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist., in, 323, 1853. Cahnowas. — 
Colden, op. cit. Canagesse. —Ibid., 38. Canais. — 
Heckewelder (1819) in Bozman, Md., 1 ,169, 1837 
(given as the proper form). Canavest. —GraiTen- 
ried (1711) in N. C. Rec., I, 958,1886. Canaways. — 
Heckewelder, qp. cit. Canawese. —Ibid. Cana- 
west. —Graffenried, op. cit. Canhaways. —Drake, 
Bk. Inds., viii, 1848. Canoise. —Penn. Records 
(1707) in Day, Penn., 391, 1843. Canowes. —Mary¬ 
land treaty (1682) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 322, 
1853. Canoyeas. —McKenneyandHall,Ind.Tribes, 
in, 80, 1854. Canoyias.— Colden (1727), Five Na¬ 
tions, app., 58, 107, 1747. Canoys. —Doc. of 1764 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 641, 1856. Coch- 
newwasroonaw. —McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Connays. —Croghan (1757) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 268, 1856. Con- 
noye. —Johnson (1757), ibid., 329. Connoys. — 
Lincoln (1793) in Am. St. Papers, iv, 352, 
1832. Conoies. —Imlay, West Terr., 291, 1797. 
Conois.— Heckewelder (1819) in Bozman. Md., i, 
169-171, 1837. Conoy. —Colden (1727), Five Na¬ 
tions, app., 148, 1747. Conoy-uch-such. —Douglass, 
Summary, n, 315, 1755 (same?). Conoyucksuch- 
roona.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 
1854 (same?). Gachnawas-haga. —Gatsehet in Am. 
Antiq., iv, 75, 1881-82 (Mohawk name, according 
to Pyrlaeus). Ganaway. —Day, Penn., 398, 1843 
(form used in treaties before 1744). Ganawense. — 
Ibid., 389. Ganawese.— Penn’s treaty (1701) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 140, 1857. Gana- 
woose.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816. 
Ganawses.— Domenech, Deserts, i, 441, 1860. 
Gangawese.— Conyngham in Day, Penn., 243,1843. 
Gannaouens. —D’Heu (1708) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IX, 815,1855. Ganniessinga. —Hennepin, New Dis- 
cov., 59, 1698. Guananesses. —Domenech, Deserts, 
i, 441, 1860 (same?). Kanaa. —Worsley, View Am. 
Inds., 92, 1828. Kanaai. —Boudinot,'Star in the 
West, 126, 1816. Kanai. —Worsley, op. cit. Ka- 
nawhas. —Brinton, Lenape Legends, 213, 1885 
(Johnston, on Shawnee authority, renders this 
word, ‘having whirlpools,' but Brinton thinks 
it but another form of Canal or Conoy). Kan- 
hawas. —Heckewelder (1819) in Bozman, Md., i, 
169-171, 1837. Kanhaways. —Drake, Bk. Inds., viii, 
1848. Kenhawas.— Day, Penn., 243, 1843. Keno- 
wiki.— Squier in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 34, 1877. 
Konowiki. —Rafinesque, Am. Nations, I, 139, 1836 
(Delaware name). Kuhnauwantheew. —Aupau- 
mut (1791) quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg., 
20, 1885 (Mahican name). Pascatawaye. — White 
(1634?), Relatio Itineris, 33,1874. Pascatoe.— Ibid., 
68. Pascatoways. —Brinton, Lenape Leg., 15,1885. 
Pascattawaye. —Herrman, map (1670) in Maps to 
Accompany the Rep. of the Comrs. on the Bndry. 
Line bet. Va. and Md., 1873 (village about 
Piscataway cr., s. side). Pascoticons. — Spilman 
(ca. 1623) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 28, 
note, 1871. Piscatawese. —Conyngham in Day, 
Penn., 243, 1843. Piscatoway.— Maryland treaty 
(1682) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 322, 1853. 
Piscatowayes.— Ibid., 323, Piscattawayes. —Brock- 



BULL. 30] 


CONOYTOWN-COOS 


341 


Bolls (1682), ibid., xm, 561,1881. Piscatua.— Doc. 
of 1743 quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg., 25, 1885. 
Pisscattaways.— Brockholls, op. cit. 

Conoytown. A Conoy village formerly 
on Susquehanna r. in Pennsylvania, be¬ 
tween Conejoholo (Bainbridge) and Sha- 
mokin (Sunbury). In 1744 the Conoy 
abandoned it after but a short stay there 
and removed to the last-named place. — 
Brinton, Lenape Leg., 29, 1885. 

Conshac (‘cane’, ‘reed’, ‘reed-brake’). 
A name applied in three principal ways: 
(1) to the inhabitants of ceKain Choc¬ 
taw towns (see Concha , Conchachitou, 
Conchatikpi, Conshaconsapa, Coosha ); (2) 
to the Koasati, q. v.; (3) to a people living 
somewhere on Coosa r., not far from the 
Alibamu. Most of the later statements 
regarding these people seem to have been 
derived from Iberville (Margry, D6c., 
iv, 594-95, 602,1880), who, in 1702, speaks 
of two distinct bands under this name, 
the one living with the Alibamu, the other 
some distance e. n. e. of them. The former 
were probably the Koasati, although it is 
possible that they were the people of Old 
Kusa, which was close by. The Conshac 
living higher up, 20 to 30 leagues beyond, 
Iberville states to have been called ‘ ‘ Apa- 
lachicolys” by the Spaniards and to have 
moved into the district they then occupied 
from Apalachicola r. in order to trade with 
the English. Such a migration does not 
seem to have been noted by anyone else, 
however, and it is highly probable that 
these Conshac were the people of Kusa, the 
(JpperCreek “capital.” This is rendered 
more likely by the analogous case of the 
Choctaw Coosha, called Coosa by Romans, 
the name of which has been corrupted 
from the same word, and from the fur¬ 
ther consideration that Conshac and 
Kusa rarely occur on the same map. 
That the Conshac were an important tribe 
is attested by all early narratives and by 
the fact that Alabama r. was often called 
after them. If not identical with the peo¬ 
ple of Kusa specifically, the entire Musko¬ 
gee tribe may be intended. (j. r. s. ) 

Conchacs.— Du ‘Pratz, Hist, de la Louisiane, ii, 
208, 1758. Conchaes.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 
126, 1816. Conchakus.— McKenneyand Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, nr, 79, 1854. Conchaques. —P6nicaut 
(1708) in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 101, 1869. 
Conchas. —French, ibid., in,235,1851. Conchatez. — 
De l’Isle, map (ca. 1710) in Winsor, Hist. Am., n, 
294, 1886. Conches.— Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 510,1878. Conshachs. —Carroll, Hist. Coll. 
S. C., i, 190,1836 (Coosas are also mentioned, but 
this is probably a duplication made in quoting 
earlier authorities). Conshakis,— Bossu (1759), 
Travels La., i, 229, 1771. 

Conshaconsapa (corruption of Kushak- 
osapa, ‘reed-brake field’). A former 
Choctaw townE. of Imongalasha, Neshoba 
co., Miss.; exact location not known.— 
Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 
431, 1902. 

Contahnah (‘ a pine in the water. ’—Hew¬ 
itt). A Tuscarora village near the mouth 
of Neuse r., N. C., in 1701. 


Cau-ta-noh.— Cusic (1825) quoted by Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 636, 1855. Contahnah. —Lawson 
(1709),N.C.,383,1860. Kau-ta-noh. —Cusic, op. cit. 
Kautanohakau. —Cusic, Six Nations, 24,1828. 

Contarea. One of the principal Huron 
villages in Ontario in the 17th century; 
situated near the present Lannigan’s lake, 
Tiny township. See Kontareahronon. 
Carmaron. —Champlain (1615),CEuvres, IV, 27, 1870. 
Contareia. —Jes. Rel. for 1656, 10, 1858. Contar- 
rea. —Jes. Rel. for 1636, 94, 1858. Kontarea.— Jes. 
Rel. for 1642, 74, 1858. 

Contla. A branch of the Opata inhab¬ 
iting the pueblo of Santa Cruz, Sonora, 
Mexico (Orozco y Berra, Geog., 344,1864). 
The name is probably that applied by 
the natives to their town. 

Cooking. See Food. 

Cook’s Ferry. A body of Ntlakyapa- 
muk, probably belonging to the Nicola 
band, under the Fraser superintendency, 
Brit. Col.; pop. 282 in 1882, 204 in 1904.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. Reps. 

Coon. See Raccoon. 

Coongalees. Given by Sauvole (French, 
Hist. Coll. La., 1st s., in, 238, 1851) as a 
village on Wabash (i. e. Ohio) r., above 
a Chickasaw village that was 140 leagues 
from the Mississippi in 1701. As it is 
represented as on the route to Carolina, 
Tennessee r. may have been intended. 
Perhaps a Cherokee town. 

Tahogale.— Coxe in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 230, 
1850. 

Cooniac. A village of the Skilloot tribe 
of the Chinookan family at Oak point 
(from which the village was named), on 
the s. side of Columbia r., below the 
mouth of the Cowlitz, in Columbia co., 
Oreg. After 1830 the Cooniac people 
seem to have been the only surviving 
remnant of the Skilloot. (l. f. ) 

Cooniacs. —Gibbs, Chinook Vocab., iv, 1863. Kahn- 
yak. — Ibid. Ketlakaniaks. — Framboise (1835) 
quoted by Gairdner in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
255, 1841. Konick.— Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 174, 1850. Konnaack.— 
Pres. Mess., Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 
1852. Kukhn-yak. —Gibbs, Chinook Vocab., iv, 
1863. Ne-co-ni-ac. —Lee and Frost, Oregon, 194, 
1844. Ne Coniacks. —Ibid., 194. Qa'niak. —Boas, 
field notes (name for Oak point). Whill Wetz.— 
Ross, Adventures, 104, 1849. 

Coonti. A cycadaceous plant ( Zamia 
integrifolia) , or the breadstuff obtained 
from it by the Seminole of Florida; 
spelled also koontie, coontia, etc. Kunti 
is the name of the ‘ ‘ flour ’ ’ in the Seminole 
dialect. (a. f. c.) 

Cooptee. A Nootka winter village near 
the head of Nootka sd., w. coast of Van¬ 
couver id. 

Coopte. —Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902, app., 83. Coop- 
tee.— Jewitt, Narr., 104,1849. 

Coos. The term usually employed to 
denote the villages or tribes of the Kusan 
family formerly on Coos bay, Oreg. Lewis 
and Clark estimated their population at 
1,500 in 1805. The name is often used 
as synonymous with the family name. 
Properly speaking there are 2 villages 
included under the term, Melukitz and 
Anasitch. (l. f.) 


342 


COOSA-COOWEESCOOWEE 


[b. a. E. 


Cookkoooose. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, 118, 
1814. Cookkoo-oosee. —Drake, Bk. Inds., xi, 1848. 
Cookoose.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 307, 1874. 
Coos.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 231,1890. 
Coosas. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 62, 1872. Coos Bay. —Dor¬ 
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 231,1890. Co-ose. — 
Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 495, 1855. Coose 
Bay.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 218, 1857. 
Cooses. —Taylor in Sen. Ex. Dqc. 4, 40th Cong., 
spec, sess., 5, 1867. Coose Taylors. —Dole in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 220,1861. Cowes. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, nr, 231, 1890. Ha'tene.— Everette, Tu- 
tutgne MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Tututunne 
name). Ha'^unne. —Dorsey, Chasta Costa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chastacosta name). 
Kaons. —Framboise (1835) quoted by Gairdner 
in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., XI, 256, 1841. Kaus. — 
Hale, Etbnog. and Philol., 221,1846. Ko'-i-yak*. — 
Bissell, Umpkwa MS. vocab., B. A. E. (Umpqua 
name). Ko-k‘oc'. —Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea name). Kook-koo-oose. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., viii, 1848. Kouse. —Armstrong, 
Oregon, 116, 1857. Kowes. —Drew (1855) in H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 93, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 94, 1856. Kowes 
Bay. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 359, 1858. K'qlo-qwec 
^unne.— Dorsey, Chasta Costa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884 (Chastacosta name). Kus. —Dorsey in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 231, 1890. Kusa.— Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 253, 1877. Kus-me' ipmne, —Dorsey, Chetco 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chetco name). Kwok- 
woos.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 221, 1846. 
Mu-cin'-t’a purine. —Dorse}', Coquille MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884 (Coquille (Athapascan) name). 
Sai-yu'-cle-me' ^unne. —Dorsey, Tutu MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884 (Tututunne name). Tce'^unne.— 
Dorsey, Nalttinne }tmn6' MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884 (Naltunnename). 

Coosa. A small tribe, now extinct, 
which lived about the mouth of Edisto 
or Combahee r., South Carolina. Its 
name is preserved in Coosaw and Coosaw- 
hatchee rs. According to Rivers (Hist. 
S. C., 94, 1874) they lived n. e. of Com¬ 
bahee r., which separated them from the 
Combahee tribe. They appear to be 
identical with the Couexi of the Huguenot 
colonists (1562) and with the Cogao of 
Juan de la Vandera’s narrative of 1569. 
They were hostile to the English in 1671; 
in 1675 the “great and lesser Casor” 
sold to the colonists a tract lying on 
Iviawah, Stono, and Edisto rs.; there is 
also record of a sale by the chief of ‘ ‘ Kis- 
sah” in 1684. They are mentioned as 
Kussoes in the South Carolina trade reg¬ 
ulations of 1707, and last appear in 1743, 
under the name Coosali, as one of the 
tribes incorporated with the Catawba but 
still preserving their own language. 
They were probably related to the In¬ 
dians of the Creek confederacy. 

(j. M.) 

Casor. —Deed of 1675 in Mills, S. C., npp. 1, 1826. 
Copao. —Vandera (1567) quoted by French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n,290,1875. Coosah. —Adair, Am. Inds., 
225, 1775. Coosaw.— Rivers, Hist. S. C., 38, 1856. 
Cosah. —Mills, Stat. S. C., 107, 1826. Couexi. —Doc. 
cited by Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the East, 84, 
1894. Cozao.— Vandera, op. cit. Kissah. —Mills 
op. cit., 107, app. 1. Kussoe.— Doc. of 1671 quoted 
by Rivers, Hist. S. C., 372, 1856. 

Coosa. Given as a Cherokee town in a 
document of 1799 (Royce in 5th Rep 
B. A. E., 144, 1887). Unidentified, but 
perhaps on upper Coosa r., Ala. See 
Kusa. 


Coosada. A former settlement of Koa- 
sati, from whom it received its name, 
established about 1784 on the left bank 
of Tennessee r. at what is now Lar¬ 
kin’s Landing, Jackson co., Ala. From 
this village to the site of Guntersville 
there was an Indian trail.—Street in Ala. 
Hist. Soc. Publ., i, 417, 1901; Royce in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. cviii, 1899. 

Coosadi Hychoy. A former Koasati set¬ 
tlement on Tombigbee r., in Choctaw and 
Marengo cos., Ala., about lat. 32° 35G 

Coosadi Hychoy. —West Fla. map, ca. 1775. Oc- 
choy.— Romans, Florida, 327,1775. 

Coosahatchi. An Upper Creek town on 
Tallapoosa r., Ala., with 36 families in 
1832. 

Coosahatches.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Cubahatchee. —Hopoethle 
Yoholo (1836) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 80, 27th Cong., 3d 
sess., 36, 1843. Cube hatcha. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. 

Coosak-hattak-falaya (Choctaw: ‘long 
white cane’). Noted on Robin’s map 
as an Indian town in 1807. Romans 
(Fla., 305, 1775) mentions it apparently 
as a settlement w. of lower Tombigbee 
r., Ala., in Muskhogean territory. 

Coosak hattak. —Robin, Voy., I, map, 1807. 

Coosha ( kushak , or Jcusha, ‘reed,’ or 
‘reed-brake’). A former important 
Choctaw town on the n. side of a w. 
branch of Lost Horse cr., an affluent of 
Ponta cr., in Lauderdale co., Miss. (Hal¬ 
bert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 416, 
1902). Romans has transposed the loca¬ 
tion of this town and Panthe, q. v. 

Coosa.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775 (misapplied). 
Coosahs. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 108,1884. 
Cusha. — Ibid. Konshaws. — Bvington, Choctaw 
MS. Diet., B. A. E., ca. 1834. 

Coosuc (from koash ‘pine,’ ak ‘ at:’ ‘ at the 
pine’). A small band, probably of the 
Pennacook, formerly living about the 
junction of the Upper and Lower Am- 
monoosuc with the Connecticut, in Coos 
and Grafton cos., N. II. Their village, 
called Coos or Coosuc, seems to have 
been near the mouth of the Lower Am- 
inonoosuc. They were driven off by the 
English in 1704 and joined the St Francis 
Indians, where they still kept up the 
name about 1809. (j. m.) 

Cohassiac.— Kendall, Travels, m, 191, 1809 (name 
still used for themselves by those at St Francis). 
Coos.— Macaulev, N. Y., ii, 162, 1829. Coosucks.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 222, 1855. Cowa- 
sacks.— Kidder in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 236, 

1859. Cowassuck.—Penhallow (1726) quoted by Lv 
man in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 36, 1824. 

Coot. A Costanoan village situated in 
1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz mission, 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 

1860. 

Cooweescoowee( Gu'ivisguwiV , anonoma- 
tope for a large bird said to have been 
seen formerly at frequent intervals in 
the old Cherokee country, accompanying 
the migratory wild geese, and described 
as resembling a large snipe, with yellow 
legs and unwebbed feet). A district of 


BULL. 30] 


COOXISSETT-COPPER 


343 


the Cherokee Nation, Indian Ter., named 
in honor of the noted Cherokee chief so- 
called, better known as John Ross.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 285, 521, 
1900. 

Cooxissett. A village, probably in Ply¬ 
mouth co., Mass., having about 160 inhab¬ 
itants in 1685. Mentioned by Hinckley 
(1685) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., 
v, 133, 1861. 

Copala. A mythical province, about 
which the “Turk,” apparently a Paw¬ 
nee Indian, while among the Pueblos of 
the Rio Grande in New Mexico in 1540, 
endeavored to deceive Coronado and his 
army. It was said to have been situated 
in the direction of Florida and to have 
contained great wealth. See Winship 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 491, 1896. Cf. Ey- 
ish , Iza, Quivira. 

Copalis. A division of Salish on Co¬ 
palis r., 18 m. n. of Grays harbor, 
Wash. Lewis and Clark estimated their 
number at 200, in 10 houses, in 1805. 

Copalis. —Swan, N. W. Coast, 210,1857. Pailishs.— 
Domenech, Deserts, i, 443, 1860. Pailsh.— Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., ii, 474,1814. Pailsk.— Ibid., 119. 

Copeh (from Icapai, ‘stream/ in the lo¬ 
cal dialect). A tribe of the Patwin di¬ 
vision of the Copehan family formerly 
living on lower Puta cr., Yolo co., Cal. 
Cop-eh.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 428, 
1853. Ko-pe. —Powell inCont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 
519,1877. Putos.— Powers in Overland Mo., xm, 
543,1874 (so called by the Spaniards “ on account 
of their gross licentiousness ”). 

Copehan Family. A linguistic stock for¬ 
merly occupying a large territory in Cali¬ 
fornia, from Suisun and San Pablo bays on 
the s. to Mt Shasta and the country of the 
Shastan family on the n. Starting from 
the n., the e. boundary ran a few miles 
e. of McCloud r. to its junction with the 
Sacramento and thence to Redding, a 
large triangle e. of Sacramento r. belong¬ 
ing to the Copehan; and from Redding 
down the boundary was about 10 m. e. 
of Sacramento r., but s. of Chico it was 
confined to the w. bank. On the w. the 
summit of the Coast range formed the 
boundary, but from the headwaters of 
Cottonwood cr. northward it nearly 
reached the s. fork of the upper Trinity. 
The people of this family were among the 
most interesting of the California Indians, 
with a harmonious language and an inter¬ 
esting mythology. Their social and polit¬ 
ical system was like that of all California 
tribes: their largest unit was the village, 
more extensive combinations being for 
temporary purposes only. The people 
comprising this family have been divided 
by Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 
1877) into 2 branches, the Patwin and 
the Wintun, differing considerably in 
language and customs. Following is a 
list of their villages: 

Patwin subfamily: Aclutoy, Ansactoy, 
Chenposel, Churuptoy, Copeh, Guilitoy, 


Korusi, Liwaito, Lolsel, Malaka, Napa, 
Olposel, Olulato, Suisun, Topaidisel, 
Tuluka, Waikosel, Wailaksel, Yodetabi, 
Yolo. 

Wintun subfamily: Daupom, Noam- 
laki, Normuk, Nuimok, Nummuk, Pui- 
mem, Puimuk, Tientien, Waikenmuk, 
Winimem. 

Copper. Copper had come into very 
general use among the tribes n. of Mexico 
before the arrival of the white race in the 
Mississippi valley and the region of the 
great lakes. The reign of stone, which 
in early times had been undisputed, was 
beginning to give way to the dominion of 
metal. It is probable that copper came 
into use in the n. as a result of the dis¬ 
covery of nuggets or small masses of the 
native metal among the debris deposited 
over a large area s. of the lakes by the 
sheets of glacial ice that swept from 
the n. across the fully exposed surface of 
the copper-bearing rocks of the L. Supe¬ 
rior region (see Mines and Quarries). 
These pieces of copper were at first doubt¬ 
less treated and used as were stones of 
similar size and shape, but the peculiar 
qualities of the metal must in time have 
impressed themselves upon the acute 
native mind, and implements were shaped 
by hammering instead of by pecking. 
At first the forms produced would be 
much the same as those of the stone im¬ 
plements of the same people, but after a 
while the celts, hatchets, awls, knives, 
drills, spearheads, etc., would take on 
new forms, suggested by the peculiar 
properties of the material, and other va¬ 
rieties of implements would be evolved. 
The metal was too soft to wholly super¬ 
sede stone as a material for the manufac¬ 
ture of implements, but its pleasing color 
and its capacity for taking a high polish 
must have led at an early date to its use 
for personal ornaments, and on the ar¬ 
rival of the whites it was in great demand 
for this purpose over nearly the entire 
country. 

A knowledge of the discovery of de¬ 
posits of copper in the lake region passed 
in course of time beyond the local 
tribes, and it is not unlikely that it ex¬ 
tended to Mexico, where the metallurgic 
arts had made remarkable headway and 
where the red metal was in great demand. 
That any extensive trade sprang up be¬ 
tween the N. and the far S., however, 
seems improbable, since such communica¬ 
tion would have led inevitably to the intro¬ 
duction of southern methods of manipula¬ 
tion among the more advanced tribes of 
the Mississippi valley and the Gulf coast 
and to the frequent presence of peculiarly 
Mexican artifacts in the burial mounds. 

There can be no question that the supply 
of copper used by the tribes of e. United 
States came mainly from the L. Superior 


344 


COPPER 


[b. a. e. 


region, although native copper in small 
quantities is found in Virginia, North Caro¬ 
lina, Tennessee, Arizona, New Mexico, and 
Nova Scotia. It is not at all certain, how¬ 
ever, that the natives utilized these latter 
sources of supply to any considerable ex¬ 
tent before the coming of the whites. 
There seems to be little doubt that cop¬ 
per was somewhat extensively used in 
Alaska before the arrival of Europeans. 
It is possible that a small percentage of the 
copper found in mounds in the Southern 
states came from Cuba and Mexico, but 
there is no way of satisfactorily determin¬ 
ing this point. The L. Superior copper 
can often be distinguished from other cop¬ 
per by the dissemination through it of 
minute particles of silver. 

The processes employed in shaping cop¬ 
per (see Metal-work) were at first prob¬ 
ably confined to cold hammering and 
grinding, but heat was employed to facil¬ 
itate hammering and in annealing, and 
possibly rude forms of swedging in molds 
and even of casting were known, although 
little evidence to this effect has yet been 
obtained. It appears that in dealing with 
thin sheets of the metal, which were 
readily made by hammering with stone 
implements and by grinding, pressure 
with suitable tools was employed to pro¬ 
duce repousse effects, the sheet being laid 
for treatment on a mold of stone or wood, 
or on a pliable pad or a plastic surface. 
Certain objects of sheet copper with re¬ 
pousse designs obtained from Indian 
mounds in Illinois, Ohio, Georgia, and 
Florida have attracted much attention 
on account of the very skilful treatment 
shown. That primitive methods of ma¬ 
nipulation well within the reach of the 
aborigines are adequate to accomplish 
similar results is shown, however, by ex¬ 
periments conducted by Cushing. 

The very considerable progress of the 
native metallurgist in copper working is 
well shown by examples of plating re¬ 
covered from the mounds in Ohio and 
elsewhere. A headdress belonging to a 
personage of importance buried in one of 
the Hopewell mounds, near Chillicothe, 
Ohio, found by Moorehead, consists of a 
high frontal piece made of sheets of cop¬ 
per covered with indented figures, out 
of which rises a pair of antlers imitating 
those of a deer. The antlers are formed 
of wood and neatly covered or plated with 
sheet copper (Putnam). Other exam¬ 
ples from the same source are spool-like 
objects, probably ear ornaments, formed 
of thin sheets of copper over a wood base, 
and most skilfully executed. Willoughby 
has very effectively imitated this work, 
using a bit of native copper with bowl¬ 
ders and pebbles from the beach as tools. 
Of the same kind of workmanship are 
numerous specimens obtained by Moore 


from mounds on St Johns r., Fla., the 
most interesting being jaw-bones of wolves 
plated with thin sheets of copper. Other 
objects similarly treated are disks of lime¬ 
stone and beads of shell, bone, wood, and 
possibly other materials. 

A popular belief exists that the Egyp¬ 
tians and other ancient nations, including 
the Mexicans and Peruvians, had a proc¬ 
ess for hardening copper, but there is no 
real foundation for this belief. The re¬ 
puted hardened product is always an 
alloy. No specimen of pure copper has 
been found which has a greater degree of 
hardness than can be produced by ham¬ 
mering. 

Although' copper probably came into 
use among the northern tribes in com¬ 
paratively recent times, considering the 
whole period of aboriginal occupancy, 
there can be no doubt of its extensi ve and 
widespread utilization before the coming 
of the whites. That the ancient mines 
of the L. Superior region are purely ab¬ 
original is amply shown by their char¬ 
acter and by the implements left on the 
ground; and the vast extent of the work 
warrants the conclusion that they had 
been operated hundreds of years before 
the white man set foot on American 
shores. It is true that the influence of 
French and English explorers and colo¬ 
nists was soon felt in the copper-producing 
districts, and led in time to modifications 
in the methods of shaping the metal and 
in the forms of the articles made from it, 
and that later foreign copper became an 
important article of trade, so that as a 
result it is now difficult to draw a very 
definite line between the aboriginal and 
the accultural phases of the art; but that 
most of the articles recovered from ab¬ 
original sites are aboriginal and made of 
native metal can not be seriously ques¬ 
tioned. 

Considerable discussion has arisen re¬ 
garding the origin and antiquity of certain 
objects of sheet copper, the most con¬ 
spicuous of which are several human 
figures in elaborate repousse work, from 
one of the Etowah mounds in Georgia, 
and a large number of objects of sheet 
copper cut in conventional patterns, found 
in a mound on Hopewell farm, Ross co., 
Ohio. Analysis of the metal in this and 
similar cases gives no encouragement to 
the theory of foreign origin (Moore). 
The evident antiquity of the mounds in 
which these objects were found and the 
absence in them of other objects open to 
the suspicion of foreign (European) origin 
or influence tend to confirm the belief in 
their American origin and pre-Columbian 
age. 

The state of preservation of the imple¬ 
ments, utensils, and ornaments found in 
mounds and other places of burial varies 


BULL. 30] 


COPPER 


345 


greatly, but many specimens are in per¬ 
fect condition, some having retained the 
high surface polish acquired in long use. 
It happens that the presence of copper 
objects in association with more perish¬ 
able objects pf wood, bone, shell, and 
textile materials, has, through the action 
of the copper carbonates, resulted in the 
preservation of many precious things 
which otherwise would have entirely 
disappeared. 

Of the various implements of copper, the 
celt, or chisel-like hatchet, has the widest 
distribution. The 
forms are greatly diver¬ 
sified, and the weight 
ranges from a few 
ounces to several 
pounds. The imple¬ 
ment is never perfo¬ 
rated for hafting, al¬ 
though hafts were un¬ 
doubtedly used, por¬ 
tions of these having „ / % 

been preserved in a few 
cases. As with our own axes, the blade 
is sometimes widened toward the cutting 
edge, which is convex in outline. Many 
specimens, however, are 
nearly straight on the 
sides, while others are 
long and somewhat nar¬ 
rower toward the point. 
They could be hafted to 
serve as axes, adzes, or 
gouges. Some have one 
face flat and the other 
slightly ridged, suggesting 
the adz or gouge. The celt 
forms grade into other 
celt; new york. (i-e) m oreslender shapes which 
have chisel edges,and these into drillsand 
^raver-like tools, while following in turn 
are needles and poniards, the latter being 
generally cylindrical, 
with long, tapering 





grooved Ax; Missouri; 
1-4. (long col¬ 
lection) 


Grooved Ax; new Mexico; 
1-4. (long Collec¬ 
tion) 



Spud; Michigan. 


Related in general shape to the ax is 
another type of implement sometimes 
called a spud. Its distribution is lim¬ 
ited to the district lying immediately s. 
of the great lakes. The socket is usually 
formed by hammer¬ 
ing out lateral wings 
at the upper end of 
the implement and 
bending them in¬ 
ward. The purpose 
of this implement is 
notfully determined. 

With a long and 
straight handle it 
would serve as a 
spadeordiggingtool; 
with thehandlesharply bent near the point 
of insertion it would become a hatchet or 
an adz, according to the relative position 
of the blade and handle. The natives had 
already come to appreciate the value of 
copper for knives, and blades of various 
forms were in use; usually these are drawn 
out into a long point at the haft end 
for insertion into a wood or bone 
handle. Arrowheads of various or¬ 
dinary shapes are common, as are 
also lance and spear heads, the lat¬ 
ter being sometimes 
shaped for insertioninto 
the end of the wooden 
shaft, but more fre¬ 
quently ha ving a socket, 
made as in the spud, for 
the insertion of the han¬ 
dle. Drills, needles, 
pins, fishhooks, etc., 
occur in considerable 
numbers, especially in 
the Northern states. 

- —Personal ornaments 
? re , °J. great variety, 
sin (i-e)j c . spear- including beads, pen- 
head, Wisconsin (i-e) dants, pins, eardisks, 
earrings, bracelets, gorgets, etc. The most 
interesting objects of copper do not come 
within either of the ordinary classes of or¬ 
naments, although they doubtless served 
in some way as adornments for the per¬ 
son, probably in connection with the cer¬ 
emonial headdress. These are made of 
sheet copper, and certain of their fea¬ 
tures are suggestive of 
exotic, though not of 
European, influence. 



Knife Blade, Wiscon- 


points, the largest examples being 2 or 3 
ft. in length and weighing several pounds. 
The grooved ax is of rare occurrence, and 
where found appears to repeat the stone 
forms of the particular district. Squier 
and Davis illustrate a two-edged specimen 
with a hole through the middle of the 
blade from face to face, supposed to have 
been intended to aid in fixing the haft. 




Bracelet from a mound. 
(l-3) 


Pierced Tablet; Ohio. 
( 1 - 8 ) 


The best examples are from one of the 
Etowah mounds in Georgia. Other re- 















346 


COPPER 


[b. a. e. 


markable objects found in mounds at 
Hopewell farm, Ross co., Ohio, appear 
to have been intended for some special 
symbolic use rather than for 
personal adornment, as usual 
means of attachment are not 
provided. The early voyagers, 
especially along the Atlantic 
coast, mention the use of to¬ 
bacco pipes of copper. There 
is much evidence that imple¬ 
ments as well as ornaments and 



other objects of copper were regarded as 
having exceptional virtues and magical 
powers, and certain early writers aver that 



some of the 
tribes of the 
great lakes held 
all copperas sa¬ 
cred, making no 
practical use of 
it whatever. 

Copper was 
not extensively 
used within the 
area of the Pacific 
states, but was em¬ 
ployed for various 
purposes by the 
tribes of the N. W., 
who are skilful 
metal workers, em¬ 
ploying to some ex¬ 
tent methods intro¬ 
duced by the whites. 

Formerly the na¬ 
tives obtained copper from the valley of 
Copper r. and elsewhere, but the market 
is now well sup¬ 
plied with the im- 
portedmetal. Itis 
used very largely 
for ornaments, for 
utensils, especially 
knives, and whis¬ 
tles, rattles, and 
masks are some¬ 
times made of it. 
Perhaps the most 
noteworthy prod¬ 
uct is the unique, 
shield-like “cop¬ 
pers’’ made of 
sheet metal and 
highly esteemed as symbols of wealth or 
distinction. The origin of these “cop- 



Sheet-copper Eagle; Illinois 
Mound; 1-6 (thomas) 




pers” and of their peculiar form and use 
is not known. The largest are about 3 
ft. in length. The upper, wider portion, 




Sheet-copper Figure; Etowah Mound, Ga. (about 1-s) 

and in cases the lower part, or stem, are 
ornamented with designs representing 
mythic creatures (Niblack, Boas). 

The literature of copper is extensive; 
the principal works, especially those 
contributing original material, 
are: Beauchamp in Bull. N. Y. 

State Mus., no. 73, 1903; Boas 
in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1895, 1897; 

Butler in Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
vii, 1876; Cushing (1) in The 
Archaeologist, ii, no.5,1894, (2) 
in Am. Anthrop., vn, no. 1, 

1894; Davis in Smithson. Rep. 

1874, 1875; Farquharson in 
Proc. Davenport Acad., i, 1876; 

Foster, Prehist. Races, 1878; 

Foster and Whitney, Rep. on 
Geol. and Topog. L. Superior 
Land District (H. R. Doc. 69, copper knife; 
31st Cong., 1st sess., 1850); haida; length 
F owke, Archaeol. Hist. Ohio, ? 1-2 IN \ HE8, 
1902; Gillman in Smithson. IBLACK 
Rep. 1873, 1874; Hamilton in Wis. .Ar¬ 
chaeol., i, no. 3, 1902; Hearne, Journey, 
1796; Holmes in Am. Anthrop., hi, 1901; 
Hoy in Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., iv, 1878; 
Lapham, Antiq. of Wis., 1855; Lewis in 
Am. Antiq., xi,no. 5,1889; McLean, Mound 
Builders, 1879; Mason in Proc. Nat. Mus., 
xvii, 1895; Mass. Hist.Soc.Coll., vm, 1843; 
Moore, various memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat. 
Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Moore, McGuire, et 
al. in Am. Anthrop., n. s., v, no. 1, 1903; 
Moorehead (1) Prehist. lmpl., 1900, (2) in 


















BULL. 30] 


COPS—CORA 


347 


The Antiquarian, i, 1897; Nadaillac, Pre- 
hist. Amer., 1884; Niblack in Nat. Mus. 
Rep. 1888, 1890; Packard in Am. Antiq., 

xv, no. 2, 1893; Patterson in Nova Scotia 
Inst, of Sci., vii, 1888-89; Putnam (1) in 
Peabody Mus. Reps., 

xvi, 1884, (2) in Proc. 

A. A. A. S., xliv, 1896; 

Rau (1) Archseol. Coll. 

Nat. Mus., 1876, (2) in 
Smithson. Rep. 1872, 

1873; Reynolds in Am. 

Anthrop., i, no. 4, 1888; 

Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
i, 1851; Short, N. Am. of 
Antiquity, 1880; Slaf- 
ter, Prehist. Copper 
Impl.,1879; Squier, An¬ 
tiq. of N. Y. and the 
West, 1851; Squier and 
Davis, Ancient Monu¬ 
ments, 1848; Starr, First 
Steps in Human Progress, 1895; Strachey 
(1585), Hist. Va., Hakluyt Soc. Publ., 
viii, 1843; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 
1894; Whittlesey, Ancient Mining on Lake 
Superior, Smithson. Cont., xm, 1863; 
Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., v, no. 1, 
1903; Wilson, Prehist. Man, 1862; Win- 
chell in Engin. and Min. Jour., xxxn, 
Sept. 17, 1881. (w. h. h. ) 

Cops. A former Papago rancheria vis¬ 
ited by Kino and Mange in 1699; situated 
w. of the Rio San Pedro, probably in the 
vicinity of the present town of Arivaca, 
s. w. of Tubac, s. Ariz. 

Cops.—Mange (1701) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 358,1889. Humo.—Mange, ibid. 

Copway, George ( Kaglgegabo , ‘he who 
stands forever. ’—W. J.). A young Chip¬ 
pewa chief, born near the mouth of Trent 
r., Ontario, in the fall of 1818. His pa¬ 
rents were Chippewa, and his father, until 
his conversion, was a medicine-man. 
George was educated in Illinois, and 
after acquiring considerable knowledge 
in English books returned to his people 
as a Wesleyan missionary. For many 
years he was connected with the press of 
New York city and lectured extensively 
in Europe and the United States, but he 
is noted chiefly as one of the few Indian 
authors. Among his published writings 
are: The Life, History, and Travels of 
Kah-ge-ga-gah-bowh (George Copway), 
Albany, 1847, and Philadelphia, 1847; 
The Life, Letters, and Speeches of Kah- 
ge-ga-gah-bowh, New York, 1850; The 
Traditional History and Characteristic 
Sketches of the Ojibway Nation, London 
and Dublin, 1850, and Boston, 1851; 
Recollections of a Forest Life, London, 
Edinburgh, and Dublin, 1851, and Lon¬ 
don, 1855; Indian Life and Indian His¬ 
tory, Boston, 1858; The Ojibway Con¬ 
quest, a Tale of the Northwest, New York, 


1850; Organization of a New Indian Ter¬ 
ritory East of the Missouri River, New 
York, 1850; Running Sketches of Men and 
Places in England, France, Germany, Bel¬ 
gium and Scotland, New York, 1851. 
Copway also wrote a hymn in the Chip¬ 
pewa language (London, 1851) and co¬ 
operated with the Rev. Sherman Hall in 
the translation of the Gospel of St Luke 
(Boston, 1837) and the Acts of the 
Apostles (Boston, 1838). He died at 
Pontiac, Mich., about 1863. 

Coquilt. One of the Diegueno ranche- 
rias represented in the treaty of 1852 at 
Santa Isabel, s. Cal.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 133, 1857. 

Coquite. Mentioned by Mota Padilla 
(Historia, 164, 1742, repr. 1870) in con¬ 
nection with Jimena (Galisteo) and Zitos 
(Silos) as a pueblo which lay between 
Pecos and the Keresan villages of the Rio 
Grande in New Mexico when visited by 
Coronado in 1540-42. It was seemingly 
a Tano pueblo. 

Coquitlam. A coast Salish tribe speak¬ 
ing the Cowichan dialect and inhabiting 
Fraser valley just above the delta, in Brit¬ 
ish Columbia. They owned no land, 
being practically slaves of the Kw’antlen. 
Pop. 25 in 1904. 

Coquet-lane. —Can. Ind. AfE., pt. I, 268, 1889. Co- 
quetlum. —Ibid., 309, 1879. Coquilain. —Trutch, 
Map Brit. Col., 1870. Coquitlam. —Can. Ind. AfL, 
413, 1898. Coquitlan. —Ibid., 74, 79, 1878. Coquit- 
lane. —Ibid., 276, 1894. Coquitlum. —Ibid., 316, 
1880. Koquitan.— Brit. Col. Map, Victoria, 1872 
(named as a town 1 ). Kwikof/em, —Boas, MS., B. 
A. E., 1887. Kwi'kwitlEm. —Hill-Tout in Ethnol. 
Surv. Can., 54, 1902. 

Cora. A tribe or group of tribes be¬ 
longing to the Piman family and occupy¬ 
ing several villages and rancherias in the 
Sierra de Nayarit and on the Rio de 
Jesus Marfa, Jalisco, Mexico. They were 
a brave and warlike people, living inde¬ 
pendently in the mountain glens and 
ravines until 1721-22 when they were 
subjugated by the Spaniards and mis¬ 
sions established among them. Accord¬ 
ing to Jose de Ortega (Vocab. Leng. Cas- 
til. y Cora, 1732, 7, repr. 1888) the Cora 
language consisted of 3 dialects: the 
Muutzizti, spoken in the middle of the 
sierra; the Teacuacueitzisti, spoken in 
the low^er part of the sierra tow T ard the 
w., and the Ateacari, spoken on the 
banks of the Rio Nayarit (Jesus Marfa). 
Orozco y Berra (Geog., 59, 281, 1864) fol¬ 
lows the same grouping and adds Colo- 
tlan as a dialect, while he quotes Alegre 
to the effect that the Cora are divided 
into the Cora (proper), the Nayarit, and 
the Tecualme or Gecualme. These are 
probably identical with Ortega’s divi¬ 
sions. Nayari, or Nayariti, is the name 
by which the Cora are known among 
themselves. They still use their native 
language, which is guttural although 



Kwakiutl Ceremonial 
Copper; Length 37 
inches, (boas) 




348 


CORAPA—CORCHAUG 


[b. a. fi. 


quite musical, but all the men and most 
of the women also understand Spanish to 
some extent. They are proud of their 
Indian blood, and although they have 
largely adopted the clothing of the white 
Mexicans there is very little intermar¬ 
riage between the two. The native cos¬ 
tume of the men consists of buckskin 
trousers and a very short tunic of home- 
woven woolen material dyed dark blue. 
The Cora, especially those of the high 
sierra, possess an air of independence and 
manliness. In speech, religion, and cus¬ 
toms they are akin to the Huichol, and 
while they trade with them for red paint, 
wax, and feathers, and the services of 
Huichol shamans are highly regarded by 
the Cora, there is no strong alliance be¬ 
tween the two tribes. Most of the Cora 
men are slightly bearded, especially on 
the chin. The women weave belts and 
bags of cotton and wool, and the men 
manufacture fish-nets which are used in 
dragging the streams. Their houses are 
of stone with thatched roofs, with little 
ventilation. Their country, notwith¬ 
standing its altitude, is malarial, yet the 
Cora are said to attain remarkable lon¬ 
gevity and their women are well pre¬ 
served. In the valley a disease of the 
eyes prevails in summer. The waters of a 
crater lake e. of Santa Teresa are regarded 
as sacred, and necessary to the perform¬ 
ance of every ceremony. An afternoon 
wind which prevails daily in the hot 
country is believed to be beneficial to the 
corn, and a tamal of ashes, 2 ft. long, is 
sacrificed to it. Easter is celebrated by a 
feast and a dance—a survival of mission¬ 
ary training—-and the mitote is also danced 
for weeks in succession to bring needed 
rain. Connected with their puberty cere¬ 
monies is the drinking of home-made 
mescal. Fasting, sometimes conducted 
by shamans alone, is a ceremonial feature 
and is thought to be necessary to insure 
good crops. The morning star is the 
principal god and protecting genius, being 
characterized as a brother, a youth armed 
with bow and arrow who once shot the 
powerful sun at noontime on account of 
his intense heat. The moon is also a 
god—both man and woman—and there 
are many others, as everything is be¬ 
lieved to be animate and powerful. In 
their sacred songs the musical bow, at¬ 
tached to a gourd, is played. At 15 years 
the Cora reach the marriageable age. 
Marriages are arranged by the parents of 
the boy, who on five occasions, every 
eighth day, go to ask for the bride they 
have selected. A new-born child was 
named after an uncle or an aunt, and at 
certain intervals during childhood feasts 
were prepared in its honor. It is said 
that on the spot where the relative of a 
Cora was killed in a fight a piece of 


cloth was dipped in blood and kept as 
a remembrance until his death was 
avenged by killing the slayer or one of 
the males of his family. Some of the 
Cora still deposit the bodies of the dead 
in caves. The population is estimated at 
2,500. The settlements pertaining to the 
various divisions of the Cora group are: 
Apozolco, Cienega, Comatlan, Corapa, 
Guasamota, Guaynamota, Ixtacan, Jesus 
Marfa, Mesa del Nayant, Nuestra Senora 
.del Rosario, Peyotan, San Diego, San 
Francisco, San Juan Bautista, San Lucas, 
Santa Fe, Santa Rosa, Santa Teresa, and 
Tonati. See Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, 
i,1902. (f. w. h.) 

Chora. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Chota.— 
Ibid. Hashi.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., I, 492, 
1902 (‘crocodiles’: Huichol name). Nayaerita.— 
Orozco y Berra, op. cit. Nayari. —Lumholtz, op. 
cit. (own name). Nayarita.—Orozco y Berra, op. 
cit. Nayariti. —Lumholtz, op. cit. (alternative 
form of their own name). 

Corapa. A pueblo pertaining to the 
Cora division of the Piman stock and a 
visita of the mission of Nuestra Senora del 
Rosario. Probably situated on the Rio 
San Pedro, Jalisco, Mexico. 

S. Juan Corapa. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 280, 1864. 

Corazones (Span.: ‘hearts’). A pueblo 
of the Opata, determined by Hodge (Coro¬ 
nado’s March, 35,1899) to "have been situ¬ 
ated at or near the site of the present 
Ures, on the Rio Sonora, Sonora, Mexico. 
It was so named by Cabeza de Vaca in 
1536 because the inhabitants presented to 
him more than 600 deer hearts. It was 
visited also by Coronado and his army in 
1540, called by his chroniclers San Hier- 
onimo de los Corazones, and described 
as being situated midway between Culia- 
can and Cibola (Zurii). The houses were 
built of mats; the natives raised corn, 
beans, and melons, dressed in deerskins, 
and used poisoned arrows, (f. w. h. ) 
Corapones.— Barela, Historiadores, 1 ,36,1749. Cora¬ 
zones.— Cabeza da Vaca (1536), Smith trans., 172, 
1871. San Hieronimo.— Castaneda (1596) in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 501,1896. San Hieronimo de los Cor¬ 
azones. —Ibid., 484. Villa de los Corapones. —Ovie¬ 
do, Historia, in, 610,1853. 

Corbitant. A Massachuset sachem. 
He was a determined foe of the English, 
and when Massasoit entered into an alli¬ 
ance with them he strove to wrest the 
chieftaincy from the latter and form a 
league with the Narraganset to expel the 
intruders. He caught and tried to kill 
Squanto, whom he called the tongue of 
the English, and Hobomok, their spy 
and guide. With other hostile chiefs he 
signed a treaty of peace with the English 
in 1621.—Drake, Bk. Inds., 93, 1880. 

Corchaug. A tribe or band formerly 
occupying Riverhead and Southold town¬ 
ships on Long id., N. Y., n. of Peconic 
bay, and extending w. to Wading r. 
Cutchogue, Mattituck, Ashamomuck, and 
Aquebogue were probably sites of their 
villages. The Yannococ Indians, n. of 


BULL. 30] 


CORE E-CORNPLANTER 


349 


Peconic r., must have been identical with 
theCorchaugtribeorapartof it. (j. m.) 

Chorchake.— Deed of 1648 in Thompson, Long Id., 
181, 1839. Corchaug. —Wood quoted by Macauleyj 
N. Y., n, 252, 1829. Corchongs. —Thompson, Long 
Id., i, 386, 1843 (misprint). Corchougs.— Ibid., 238. 
Yannacock.— Doc. of 1667 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiv, 601, 1883. Yannocock. —Ibid. Yeannecock.— 
Ibid., 602. 

Coree. A tribe, possibly Algonquian, 
formerly occupying the peninsula s. of 
Neuse r., in Carteret and Craven cos., 
N. C. They had been greatly reduced 
in a war with another tribe before 1696, 
and were described by Archdale as having 
been a bloody and barbarous people. 
Lawson refers to them as Coranine In¬ 
dians, but in another place calls them 
Connamox, and gives them two villages in 
1701—Coranine and Raruta—with about 
125 souls. They engaged in the Tusca- 
rora war of 1711, and in 1715 the rem¬ 
nants of the Coree and Machapunga were 
assigned a tract on Mattamuskeet lake, 
Hyde co., N. C., where they lived in one 
village, probably until they became ex¬ 
tinct. v (j. m.) 

Caranine.— Oldmixon (1708) in Carroll, Hist. Coll. 
S. C., ii, 459,1836. Connamox.— Lawson (1709), N.C., 
383, 1860. Coramine. —Archdale (ca. 1696) in 
Humphreys, Account, 282,1730. Coranine.—Arch¬ 
dale (1707) in Carroll, Hist. Coll. S. C., ii, 89,1836 
(used by Lawson as the name both of the tribe 
and of one of its villages). Corees. —Drake, Ind. 
Chron., 175,1836. Cores. —Williamson, N. C., 1, 203, 
1812. 

Coreorgonel. The chief Tutelo town 
in New York, settled in 1753; situated in 
1779 on the w. side of Cayuga lake inlet 
and on the border of the great swamp, 3 
m. from the s. end of Cayuga lake. When 
destroyed by Dearborn in 1779 it con¬ 
tained 25 “elegantly built” houses. Sir 
Wm. Johnson, in a conference with the 
Six Nations in July, 1753, said to the 
Cayuga: “It is agreeable news that you 
are about to strengthen your Castle by 
taking in the Tedarighroones [Tutelo], 
and shall give a pass to those of that 
Nation here among you that they and the 
rest of them may come and join your 
Castle unmolested” (N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vi, 811, 1855). Three of these 
Tutelo were present at this meeting “ to 
partake in the name of their Nation of 
the intended present.” (j. n. b. h.) 
Corcargonell.— Norris in Jour. Mil. Exped. Maj. 
Gen. John Sullivan in 1779, 237, 1887. Coreorgo¬ 
nel. —Dearborn, ibid., 77. De Ho Riss Kanadia.— 
Grant, ibid., 118 (corruption of the Mohawk 
Tehoterigh-kanada, 1 Tutelo town ’). Kayeghtala- 
gealat.— Map of 1779 cited by Hale, ibid. Tode- 
vigh-rono. —Guy Johnson, map of 1771, cited by 
Hale, ibid. 

Cores. Small blocks of flint, obsidian, 
or other brittle stone from which flakes 
have been struck in such a manner as to 
leave them roughly cylindrical or conical 
in shape and with fluted sides. There 
has been some discussion as to whether 
cores are really the wasters of flake mak¬ 
ing or were intended for some practical 


use. The sharp angle at the base in 
many of them would make an excellent 
edge for working a hard or tough sub¬ 
stance, such as horn or bone; but few 
show the slightest marks of wear. Wher¬ 
ever flint, obsidian, or other stone suitable 
for making flakes was worked, the cores 
also occur. On Flint Ridge 
in Ohio they are more abun¬ 
dant than at any other 
known locality, many thou¬ 
sands of them lying around 
the flaking shop sites. Al- core of chert: ind. 
though all are small, none TER - ^' 4 ' 
being capable of yielding flakes more than 
3 in. in length, there seems to be no rea¬ 
son for questioning the conclusion that 
they are the mere refuse of flake making. 
The use to which the flakes derived from 
them were applied is problematical, but 
they would have served as knives or 
scrapers or for the making of small arrow- 
points. See Stone-work. Consult Fowke 
in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Holmes (1) 
in Bull. 21, B. A. E., 1894, (2) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1897, (3) in Memoirs In- 
ternat. Cong. Anthrop., 1894; Rau in 
Smithson. Cont., xxn, 1876. (g. f.) 

Corn. See Maize. 

Corn Band. A band at Spotted Tail 
(later Rosebud) agency, S. Dak.; prob¬ 
ably a part of the Teton.—Cleveland in 
Our Church Work, Dec. 4, 1875. Cf. 
Wagmezayuha. 

Cornplanter ( Kaiiofitwa i/ ko n , ‘by what 
one plants’—Hewitt; variously written 
Garganwahgah, Koeentwahka, etc.). A 
Seneca chief, known also as John O’Bail, 
supposed to have been born between 1732 
and 1740 at Ganawagus, on Genesee r., 
N. Y. Drake (Biog. and Hist. Ind., 7th 
ed., Ill, 1837) says he was a warrior at 
Braddock’s defeat in 1755, which is evi¬ 
dently a mistake, though he may have 
been present as a boy of 12 or 15 years. 
His father was a white trader named John 
O’ Bail, or O’ Beel, said by some to have been 
an Englishman, although Harris (Buffalo 
Hist. Soc. Pub., vi, 416, 1903) says he 
was a Dutchman, named Abeel, and Rut- 
tenber (Tribes Hudson R., 317,1872) also 
says he was a Dutch trader. His mother 
was a full-blood Seneca. All that is 
known of Cornplanter’s early days is 
contained in a letter to the governor 
of Pennsylvania, in w T hich he says he 
played with Indian boys who remarked 
the difference between the color of his 
skin and theirs; his mother informed 
him that his father resided at Albany. 
He visited his father, who, it appears, 
treated him kindly but gave him nothing 
to carry back; “nor did he tell me,” he 
adds, “that the United States were about 
to rebel against the Government of Eng¬ 
land.” He states that he was married 
before this visit. He was one of the par- 



350 


CORNSTALK-CORRAL 


[b. a. k. 


ties to the treaty of Ft Stanwix in 1784, 
when a large cession of land was made 
by the Indians; he also took part in the 
treaty of Ft Harmar in 1789, in which an 
extensive territory was conveyed to the 
United States (although his name is not 
among the signers); and he was a signer 
of the treaties of Sept. 15, 1797, and July 
30, 1802. These acts rendered him so 
unpopular with his tribe that for a time 
his life was in danger. In 1790 he, to¬ 
gether with Halftown, visited Philadel¬ 
phia to lay before Gen. Washington the 
grievances complained of by their peo¬ 
ple. In 1816 he resided just within 
the limits of Pennsylvania on his grant 
7 m. below the junction of the Conne- 
W’ango with the Allegheny, on the banks 
of the latter. He then owned 1,300 



CORNPLANTER. (mcKENNEY AND HAU.) 


acres, of which 640 formed a tract granted 
to him by Pennsylvania, Mar. 16, 1796, 
“for his many valuable services to the 
whites.” It is said that in his old age he 
declared that the “Great Spirit” told him 
not to have anything more to do with the 
whites, nor even to preserve any memen¬ 
tos or relics they had given him. Im¬ 
pressed with this" idea, he burned the belt 
and broke the elegant sword that had 
been given him. A favorite son (Henry 
Obeal), who had been carefully educated, 
became a drunkard, thus adding to the 
troubles of Corn planter’s last years. He 
received from the United States, for a 
time, a pension or grant of $250 per year. 
He was perhaps more than 90 years of age 
at the time of his death, Feb. 18, 1836. 
A monument erected to his memory on 
his reservation by the state of Pennsyl¬ 


vania in 1866 bears the inscription “aged 
about 100 years.” (c. t. ) 

Cornstalk. A celebrated Shawnee chief 
(born about 1720, died in 1777) who held 
authority over those of the tribe then set¬ 
tled on the Scioto, in Ohio. He was 
brought most prominently into notice by 
his leadership of the Indians in the bat¬ 
tle of Point Pleasant, at the mouth of 
Great Kanawha r., W. Va., Oct. 10, 1774. 
Although defeated in a battle lasting 
throughout the day, his prowess and gen¬ 
eralship on this occasion—where his force, 
mostly Shawnee, numbering probably 
1,000, was opposed to 1,100 Virginia vol¬ 
unteers—won the praise of the whites. 
After this battle he entered into a treaty 
of peace with Lord Dunmore in Nov., 
1774, at Chillicothe, Ohio, although stren¬ 
uously opposed by a part of his tribe, and 
faithfully kept it until 1777. In the lat¬ 
ter year the Shawnee, being incited to re¬ 
new hostilities, he went to Point Pleasant 
and notified the settlers that he might be 
forced into the war. The settlers detained 
him and his son as hostages, and they 
were soon after murdered by some in¬ 
furiated soldiers in retaliation for the 
killing of a white settler by some roving 
Indians, thus arousing the vindictive 
spirit of the Shawnee, w T hich was not 
broken until 1794. Cornstalk -was not 
only a brave and energetic warrior, but 
a skilful general and an orator of consid¬ 
erable ability. A monument was erected 
to his memory in the court-house yard at 
Point Pleasant in 1896. 

Cornstalk’s Town. A Shawnee village 
on Scippo cr., opposite Squaw Town, 
Pickaway co., Ohio, nearly due s. from 
Circleville, in 1774.—Howe, Hist. Coll. 
Ohio, 402, 1896. 

Corn Village. A former Natchez settle¬ 
ment. 

Corn Village.—Gayarre, La.. I, 411, 1851. Flour 
Village.—Dumont in French, Hist. Coll. La., v, 

48, 1853. 

Corodeguachi. A former Opata pueblo 
on the headwaters of the Rio Sonora, n. 
e. Sonora, Mexico, about 25 m. below the 
boundary of Arizona. It was the seat of 
the Spanish mission of Santa Rosa, 
founded in 1653, and of the presidio of 
Fronteras, established in 1690. In 1689 
the mission was abandoned on account of 
the hostilities of the Jocome, Suma, 
Jano, and Apache; and owing to Apache 
depredations in more recent years the 
settlement was deserted by its inhabitants 
on several occasions, once as late as about 
1847. (f. w. h.) 

Corodeguachi. —Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 354, 
1889. Santa Rosa Corodeguatzi.— Doc. of 18th cent, 
quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
529, 1892. Santa Rosa de Coradeguatzi.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 343,1834. 

Corral. A rancheria of gentile Diegue- 
nos near San Diego, s. Cal., in 1775. 




BULL. 30] 


CORUANO-COSTE 


851 


El Corral.-Ortega (1775) quoted by Bancroft, 
Hist. Cal., I, 254, 1884. 

Coruano. One of 4 unidentified tribes, 
probably Shoshonean, formerly living e. 
of Tejon pass, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, May 8, 1863. 

Cosaque (probably from ko^shak, ‘ reed’). 
An unidentified town in n. e. Alabama, in 
the same region as Cossa (Kusa), visited 
by Juan Pardo in 1565.—Vandera (1567) 
in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 18, 1857. 

Cosattuck. A Pequot village in 1667, 
probably near Stonington, New London 
co., Conn. 

Causattuck.— Noyes (1667) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
3d s., X, 67-68, 1849. Cosattuck. —Denison (1666), 
ibid., 64. 

Coshocton (Heckewelder derives a sim¬ 
ilar name, Coshecton, from gichiechton 
(Germanform), ‘finished,’ ‘completed’). 
Formerly the chief town of the Turtle 
tribe of the Delawares, on the site of Co¬ 
shocton, Coshocton co., Ohio. Destroyed 
by the whites in 1781. Cf. Goshgoshunk. 
Cashictan.— Peters (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
4th s., ix, 300, 1871. Coochocking.— Butterfield, 
Washington-Irvine Cor., 9, 1882. Cooshacking.— 
Ibid. Coshockton. —Rupp, West Penn., 201, 1846. 
Coshocton.— Heckewelder (1781) quoted by But¬ 
terfield, op. cit., 51. Goschachguenk. —Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. 5, 59, 1848. Goschaching,— Writer of 
1784 in Harris, Tour, 214, 1805. Goschachking.— 
Heckewelder in Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., iv, 391, 
1834. Goschochking.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 5, 61, 
1848. Goshachking.— Heckewelder, op. cit. Go- 
shochking. —Ibid. Kushacton. —Pentecost (1782) 
in Butterfield, op. cit., 242. Kushocton.— Ibid.,241. 

Cosoy. A Diegueno rancheria at which 
the mission of San Diego (q. v.) was es¬ 
tablished in 1769; situated at the pres¬ 
ent Old Town, on San Diego bay, s. Cal. 

Cossarl. Marked by Jefferys (French 
Dom. Am., i, map, 134, 1761) as a native 
town on the extreme head of Yadkin r., 
in the mountains of n. w. North Carolina. 
Unidentified. 

Costanoan Family. A linguistic family 
on the coast of central California. In 1877 
Powell (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 535) es¬ 
tablished a family which he called Mutsun, 
extending from San Francisco to Soledad 
and from the sea inland to the Sierras, 
and including an area in the Marin co. 
penin., n. of San Francisco bay, and gave 
vocabularies from various parts of this 
territory. In 1891 (7th Rep. B. A. E., 
70, 92, map) Powell divided this area be¬ 
tween two families, Moquelumnan and 
Costanoan. The Moquelumnan family 
occupied the portion of the old Mutsun 
territory e. of San Joaquin r. and n. of 
San Francisco bay. 

The territory of the Costanoan family 
extended from the Pacific ocean to San 
Joaquin r., and from the Golden Gate 
and Suisun bay on the n. to Pt Sur on the 
coast and a point a short distance s. of 
Soledad in the Salinas valley on the s. 
Farther inland the s. boundary is uncer¬ 
tain, though it was probably near Big 
Panoche cr. The Costanoan Indians 1 i ved 


mainly on vegetal products, especially 
acorns and seeds, though they also o btained 
fish and mussels, and captured deer and 
smaller game. Their clothing was scant, 
the men going naked. Their houses were 
tule or grass huts, their boats balsas or rafts 
of tules. They made baskets, but no pot¬ 
tery, and appear to have been as primi¬ 
tive as most of the tribes of California. 
They burned the dead. The Rumsen of 
Monterey looked upon the eagle, the 
humming bird, and the coyote as the 
original inhabitants of the world, and 
they venerated the redwood. Their 
languages were simple and harmonious. 
Seven missions—San Carlos, Soledad, San 
Juan Bautista, Santa Cruz, Santa Clara, 
San Jose, and Dolores (San Francisco)— 
were established in Costanoan territory 
by the Franciscans subsequent to 1770, 
and continued until their confiscation by 
the Mexican government in 1834, when 
the Indians were scattered. The surviv¬ 
ing individuals of Costanoan blood may 
number to-day 25 or 30, most of them 
“Mexican” in life and manners rather 
than Indian. 

True tribes did not exist in Costanoan 
territory, the groups mentioned below 
being small and probably little more 
than village communities, without politi¬ 
cal connection or even a name other than 
that of the locality they inhabited. 

The following divisions or settlements 
have been recognized: Ahwaste, Altah- 
mo, Ansaime, Aulintac, Chalone, Costa- 
nos, Juichun, Kalindaruk, Karkin, Mut¬ 
sun, Olhon, Romonan, Rumsen, Saclan, 
Thamien, Tulomo, and Wacharon (?). 
=Costano. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
82,1856 (includes the Ahwastes, Olhones or Cos- 
tanos, Romonans, Tulomos, Altatmos); Latham, 
Opuscula, 348,1860. <Mutsun. —Gatschet in Mag. 
Am. Hist., 157,1877 (includes Ahwastes, Olhones, 
Altahmos, Romonans, Tulomos); Powell in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., in, 535, 1877 (includes under this 
family vocabs. of Costano, Mutsun, Santa Clara, 
Santa Cruz). Costanoan.— Powell in 7th Rep. 
B, A. E., 70, map, 1891. 

Costanos (Span.: ‘ coastmen’). Certain 
tribes or groups belonging to the Costa- 
noan family on San Francisco penin., 
connected with Dolores mission, Cal. 
The term has been applied to the Ol- 
hone, Ahwaste, Altahmo, Romonan, and 
Tulomo collectively; also to the Olhone 
and Ahwaste taken together; and to the 
Olhone alone. The term was chosen by 
Powell for the name of the Costanoan 
family, q.v. (a. l. k.) 

Coast Indians. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 124, 1850. Coast- 
men.— Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 
79, 1854. Costanoes.— Ind. Aff. Rep., op. cit. 
Costanos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, n, 506, 1852. 
Costeiio. —Simeon, Diet. Nahuatl, xviii, 1885. 

Coste. A province and town, apparently 
in Alabama, visited by De Soto in 1540. 
Biedma says the towns were built on 
islands in the river. 

Acosta.— Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 373, 1881. 
Acoste. —Garcilasso de la Vega, La Florida, 141,, 


352 


COSUMNI-COTTON 


[b. a. e. 


1723. Costa.— French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., II, 247, 
1875. Coste.— Gentleman of Elvas (1567),ibid., n, 
149, 1850. Costehe.— Biedma (1544), ibid., 102. 

Cosumni. A tribe, probably Moquel- 
umnan, formerly residing on or near Co- 
sumnes r., San Joaquin co., Cal. Accord¬ 
ing to Rice (quoted by Mooney in Am. 
Anthrop., in, 259, 1890) these Indians 
went almost naked; their houses were 
of bark, sometimes thatched with grass 
and covered with earth: the bark was 
loosened from the trees by repeated blows 
with stone hatchets, the latter having 
the head fastened to the handle with 
deer sinew. Their ordinary weapons 
were bows and stone-tipped arrows. The 
women made finely woven conical bas¬ 
kets of grass, the smaller ones of which 
held water. Their amusements were 
chiefly dancing and football; the dances, 
however, were in some degree ceremo¬ 
nial. Their principal deity was the sun, 
and the women had a ceremony which 
resembled the sun dance of the tribes of 
the upper Missouri. Their dead were 
buried in graves in the earth. The tribe 
is now practically extinct. 

Cosemenes.— Beechey, Narr., I, 366, 1831. Cosum- 
nes.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 631, 1846. 
Cosumnies.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8,1860. 
Kosumnes. —Duflot de Mofras, Expl., II, 376, 1844. 

Cotan. An Algonquian village in 1585 
about Ransomville, Beaufort co., N. C. 

Cotam.— Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
I, 1856. Cotan.— Map in Smith (1629), Virginia, I, 
repr. 1819. 

Cotechney. A town and palisade of the 
Tuscarora in North Carolina, which be¬ 
came noted in their war of 1711-18; 
situated, according to Hawks, on the site 
of Ft Barnwell, but according to Graffen- 
ried the town lay about 3 m. from the 
palisade, evidently on the opposite side 
of the Neuse, about the mouth of Con- 
tentnea cr., the name of which is prob¬ 
ably a form of Cotechney. It was a large 
town, the residence of Hancock, one of 
the principal Tuscarora chiefs. Here 
Lawson and Graffenried were prisoners in 
1711, and it was the scene of the execu¬ 
tion of the former. On the outbreak of 
the Tuscarora war the inhabitants aban¬ 
doned the town and intrenched them¬ 
selves in the palisade, which was attacked 
by Barnwell, Jan. 28, 1712, when 400 of 
its defenders were killed or taken. In¬ 
stead of completing his work, Barnwell, 
to save the lives of white prisoners held 
in the fort, made a worthless treaty with 
the remainder, who at once joined the 
other hostiles. (j. n. b. h.) 

Catchne.— Pollock (1717) in N. C. Rec., II, 288, 
1886. Catechna,— Graffenried (1711), ibid., I, 923, 
1886. Catechne,— Pollock (1712), ibid., 882. Cat- 
echnee. —Pollock (1713) , ibid. , II, 39. Catechneys. — 
Pollock (1713), ibid., 88. Contah-nah.— Lawson 
(1710), Hist. N. C., 383,1860. Coteching.— Pollock 
(1713) in N. C. Rec., II, 24, 1886. Cotechnees. — 
Pollock (1713), ibid., 62. Cotechneys.— Hawks, N. 
C., II, 547, 1858. Hancock Fort. — Hyde (1712) in 
N. C. Rec., I, 900, 1886. Hencocks-Towne,— Graf- 
fenned (1711),ibid., 927. 


Cotejen. A Costanoan village formerly 
near San Francisco bay, Cal.—Mission 
book (1784) quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Cotocanahnt. Given as one of the Cher¬ 
okee ‘ ‘ valley towns ” in a document of 
1755 (Roycein 5th Rep. B. A. E., 142, 
1887). Not identified. 

Cotohautustennuggee. A former Lower 
Creek town on the right bank of TJpatoie 
cr., in Muscogee co., Ga.—Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., pi. cxxii, 1900. 

Cotonam. A tribe affiliated with the 
Carrizos of the Coahuiltecan family and 
living in their vicinity, though their dia¬ 
lect differs largely from the Comecrudo 
language. ' The last of this tribe were at 
La Noria rancheria, in s. Hidalgo co., 
Tex., in 1886, and one man at Las Prietas 
was slightly acquainted with the native 
dialect. They call an Indian and 

are the Xaimame or Haname of the Texan 
tribes farther n. The Tonkawa say that 
the Cotonam were not cannibals and 
that they wore sandals instead of moc¬ 
casins. (a. s. g.) 

Cotoplanemis. Probably a division of 
the Moquelumnan family, living on a 
reserve between Stanislaus and Tuo¬ 
lumne rs., Cal., in 1851; but it is possible 
that they may have been a band of the 
Cholovone division of the Mariposan 
family. 

Co-ta-plane-mis.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 20,1852. Co-to-plane-mis.— 
Ibid. 

Cotsjewaminck. A former village on 
Long Island, N. Y., probably near the 
w. end.—Doc. of 1645 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 60, 1883. 

Cotton. Judging from the lack of men¬ 
tion of it by early writers on the s. por¬ 
tion of the United States, cotton was not 
cultivated by the tribes of this section, 
notwithstanding the favorable soil and 
climate. The cotton blankets seen by 
De Soto’s troops on the lower Mississippi 
were said to have been brought from the 
W., possibly from the far-off Pueblo 
country of New Mexico and Arizona. 
Although the latter section seems less 
favorable to its cultivation, cotton has 
been raised to a considerable extent by 
the Pueblos, especially the Hopi, from 
time immemorial, and cloth, cord, thread, 
and seed are commonly found in ancient 
deposits in caves, cliff-dwellings, and 
ruined pueblos throughout that region. 
The Hopi are now the only cultivators 
and weavers of cotton, their products, 
consisting chiefly of ceremonial robes, 
kilts, and scarfs, finding their way 
through trade to many other tribes w T ho, 
like the Hopi, employ them in their re¬ 
ligious performances. In the time of 
Coronado (1540-42) and of Espejo (1583) 
cotton was raised also by the people of 


BULL. 30] 


COUECHITOU-COUNTING 


353 


Acoma and the Rio Grande villages in 
New Mexico, and the Pima of s. Arizona 
also raised the plant until about 1850; 
but the introduction of cheap fabrics by 
traders has practically brought the in¬ 
dustry to an end everywhere among the 
Indians, the Hopi alone adhering to the 
old custom of cultivating and weaving it, 
and that chiefly for ceremonial garments. 
In ancient Hopi and Zuni mortuary rites 
raw cotton was placed over the face of the 
dead, and cotton seed was often deposited 
with food vessels and other accompani¬ 
ments in the grave. Consult Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, m, iv, 1890-92; 
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 1898; 
Holmesinl3thRep. B. A.E., 1896; Hough 
in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1901; Winship in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896. (w. h.) 

Couechitou. A former important Choc¬ 
taw town destroyed in the Choctaw civil 
war of 1764. Its location is in doubt, 
but it was traditionally placed in the 
neighborhood of Moscow, Kemper co., 
Miss. (Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
vi, 424, 1902). This name appears on 
Danville’s map, ca. 1732, in which it 
seems to be translated “village of the 
great chief. ’’ In later times it was known 
by the same name as Conchachitou 
(q. v.), usually in the contracted form 
Congeto, or Cooncheto, and to distin¬ 
guish it it was called East Congeto. 
Halbert assumes that the original name 
w r as Conchachitou and interprets it as 
‘big reed-brake,’ like the other; but if 
such w r ere indeed the case it is surprising 
that Danville, who locates and trans¬ 
lates Conchachitou correctly, should have 
erred regarding this. (j. n. s.) 

Conachitow. —Lattr£, map of U. S., 1784. Couet- 
chiou.— Gussefeld, map of U. S., 1784. Coue-tchi- 
tou.— Danville map (1732) in Hamilton, Colonial 
Mobile, 158, 1897. Cowachitow. —Philippeaux, 
map, 1781. Cuoerchitou. —Bartram, Voy., i, map, 
1799. East Congeata. —Romans, Florida, 310, 1775. 
East Congeeto. —West Fla. map, ca. 1775. East 
Coongeeto.— Romans, op. cit., 73. 

Couna. Mentioned hy Ofiate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in 
the Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, e. of 
the Rio Grande, and in all probability a 
Tigua or Piros village. 

Counting. Two systems of counting 
were formerly in use among the Indians 
of North America, the decimal and the vi¬ 
gesimal. The latter, which was used 
in Mexico and Central America, was also 
in general use n. of Columbia r., on the 
Pacific slope, w hile between that area and 
the border of Mexico it w^as employed by 
only a few tribes, as the Pomo, Tuolumne, 
Konkau, Nishinam, and Achomawi. On 
the Atlantic side the decimal system was 
used by all except the Eskimo tribes. 
Both systems, based apparently on the 
finger and hand count, were as a rule 
fundamentally quinary. There are some 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-23 


indications, however, of a more primitive 
count, with minor tribal differences. In 
Siouan and Algonquian the word for 2 
is generally related to that for arms or 
hands, and in Athapascan dialects to 
the term for feet. In a few languages, the 
Siksika, Catawba, Gabrieleno, and some 
others, 3 is expressed by joining the 
w r ords for 2 and 1. In many others the 
name for 4 signifies 2 and 2, or 2 times 2, 
as in most of the Shoshonean dialects, 
and in Cataw ba, Haida, Tlingit, and ap¬ 
parently Kiowa; the Pawnee formerly 
applied a name signifying ‘all the fin¬ 
gers,’ or ‘the fingers of the hand,’ thus 
excluding the thumb. Five has usually 
a distinct name, which in most cases 
refers to one hand or fist. The numbers 
from 6 to 9 are generally based on 5, thus, 
6=5-J-l, 7=5+2, etc.; or the names refer 
to the fingers of the second hand as used 
in counting; thus, among the Eskimo of 
Pt Barrow 6 is ‘to the other hand 1’, 
7 ‘to the other hand 2’, and in many 
dialects 6= ‘ 1 on the other hand.’ There 
are exceptions to this rule, however; for 
example, 6 is 3 and 3 in Haida and some 
other dialects; in Bellacoola the name 
signifies ‘second 1’, and in Montagnais 
(Algonquian), ‘3 on each side.’ Al¬ 
though 7 is usually ‘the second finger 
on the second hand’, in some cases it is 
based on 4, as among the Montagnais, 
\yho say ‘4 and 3.’ Eight is generally 
expressed by ‘the third finger on the 
second hand’; but the Montagnais say 
‘ 4 on each side ’, and the Haida ‘ 4 and 4 ’; 
in Karankawait signifies ‘2 fathers’, and 
in the Kwakiutl and some other languages 
it is ‘2 from 10.’ In a number of lan¬ 
guages the name for 9 signifies 1 from 10, 
as with the Kwakiutl, the Eskimo of n. w. 
Alaska, the Pawnee, and the Heiltsuk. 

The numbers from 11 to 19 are usually 
formed in both systems by adding 1, 2, 
3, 4, etc., to 10; but in the vigesimal the 
quinary count is carried out, 16 being 
15+1,17=15+2, etc., or, in some dialects, 
17=10+5+2. Many of the Indians could 
count to 1,000, some by a regular system, 
while in a number of languages, as Tlingit, 
Cherokee, etc., its signification is ‘great 
100.’ In Ottawa the meaning was ‘one 
body’; in Abnaki, ‘one box’; in Iroquois 
dialects, ‘ten hand-claps,’ that is, ten 
hundreds; in Kiow r a, ‘the whole hand 
hundred.’ Baraga and Cuoq give terms 
for figures up to a million or more, but it 
is doubtful if such were actually in use 
before contact with Europeans. 

The common Indian method of count¬ 
ing on the hands, as perhaps is usual with 
most savage or uncivilized peoples, was 
to “tell off” the fingers of the left hand, 
beginning with the little finger, the 
thumb being the fifth or 5; while in 
counting the right hand the order was 


354 


COUP-COW CREEK 


[b. a. e. 


usually reversed, the thumb being coun¬ 
ted 6, the forefinger 7, and so on to the 
little finger, which would be 10. The 
movement was therefore sinistral. Al¬ 
though the order in counting the first 
5 on the left hand was in most cases as 
given above, the order of counting the 
second 5 was subject to greater variation. 
It was a common habit to bend the fin¬ 
gers inward as counted, but there were 
several western tribes whose custom was 
to begin with the clenched hand, opening 
the fingers as the count proceeded, as 
among the Zuni. Among the tribes using 
the vigesimal system, the count of the 
second 10 was practically or theoretically 
performed on the feet, the 20 making the 
“complete man,” and often, as among 
the Eskimo and Tlingit, receiving names 
having reference to the feet. The Zuni, 
however, counted the second 10 back on 
the knuckles. 

Indians often made use of numeral 
classifiers in counting, that is, the num¬ 
ber name was modified according to the 
articles counted; thus, in the Takulli dia¬ 
lect of Athapascan tha means 3 things; 
thane, 3 persons; that, 3 times; thatsen, in 
3 places; thauh, in 3 ways; thailtoh, all 3 
things, etc. Such classifiers are found in 
many dialects, and in some are quite 
numerous. 

Certain numbers have been held as 
sacred by most tribes; thus 4, probably 
owing to the frequent reference to the 
cardinal points in ceremonies and reli¬ 
gious acts, has become sacred or cere¬ 
monial. Among the Creeks, Cherokee, 
Zuni, and most of the Plains tribes, 7 is 
also considered a sacred number. For 
the Zuni, Cushing says it refers to the 4 
cardinal points plus the zenith, nadir, 
and center or ego. Some of the Pacific 
coast Indians regard 5 as their sacred 
number. Although 13 appears in most of 
the calendar and ceremonial counts of the 
cultured nations of Mexico and Central 
America, its use as a sacred or ceremonial 
number among the Indians n. of Mexico 
was rare, the Pawnee, Hopi, and Zuni 
being notable exceptions. 

Consult Brinton, Origin of Sacred Num¬ 
bers, Am. Anthrop., 1894; Conant, Num¬ 
ber Concept, 1896; Cushing, Manual Con¬ 
cepts, Am. Anthrop., 1892; Hayden, Eth- 
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; McGee, 
Primitive Numbers, 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
1900; Thomas, Numeral Systems of Mex¬ 
ico and Central America, ibid.; Trumbull, 
Numerals in American Indian Languages, 
Tran«. Am. Philol. Ass’n, 1874; Wilson, 
Indian Numerals, Canad. Ind., i, 272, 
189h (c.t.) 

Coup (‘blow,’ ‘stroke’). The French- 
Canadian term adopted to designate 
the formal token or signal of victory in 
battle, as used among the Plains tribes. 


Coups are usually “counted,” as it was 
termed—that is, credit of victory was 
taken, for three brave deeds, viz, killing an 
enemy, scalping an enemy, or being first 
to strike an enemy either alive or dead. 
Each one of these entitled a man to rank 
as a warrior and to recount the exploit in 
public; but to be first to touch the enemy 
was regarded as the bravest deed of all, 
as it implied close approach during battle. 
Among the Cheyenne it was even a point 
of bravado for a single warrior to rush in 
among the enemy and strike one with 
quirt or gun before attempting to fire, 
thus doubly risking his own life. Three 
different coups might thus be counted by 
as many different persons upon the body 
of the same enemy, and in a few tribes 4 
were allowed. The stealing of a horse 
from a hostile camp also carried the right 
to count coup. The stroke (coup) might 
be made with whatever was most conven¬ 
ient, even with the naked hand, the 
simple touch scoring the victory. In 
ceremonial parades and functions an orna¬ 
mented quirt or rod was sometimes car¬ 
ried and used as a coup stick. The war¬ 
rior who could strike a tipi of the enemy 
in a charge upon a home camp thus 
counted coup upon it and was entitled 
to reproduce its particular design upon 
the next new tipi which he made for his 
own use and to perpetuate the pattern in 
his family. In this way he was said to 
“capture” the tipi. Warriors who had 
madecoupsof distinguished bravery, such 
as striking an enemy within his own tipi 
or behind a breastwork, were selected to 
preside over the dedication of a new tipi. 
The noted Sioux chief Red Cloud stated 
in 1891 that he had counted coup 80 
times. See War and War discipline. 

(j. M.) 

Coups de Fleches. An unidentified tribe 
mentioned as on the Texas border in con¬ 
nection with Tawakoni, Anadarko, Hai- 
nai, Tonkawa, etc., early in the 19th 
century.—Robin, Yoy. Louisiana, hi, 5, 
1807. 

Cous. See Kouse. 

Couth. A Karok rancheria on Klamath 
r., Cal., in 1856.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Mar. 23, 1860. 

Couthaougoula (‘ lake people ’). One of 
the 7 villages or tribes forming the Taensa 
confederacy in 1699.—Iberville in Margry, 
D6c., iv, 179, 1880. 

Cowate. A village of Praying Indians, 
in 1677, at the falls of Charles r., Middle¬ 
sex co., Mass.—Gookin (1677) in Drake, 
Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 115, 1848. 

Cow Creek. A Seminole settlement of 
12 inhabitants in 1880, on a stream run¬ 
ning southward, at a point about 15 m. 
n. e. of the entrance of Kissimmee r. into 
L. Okeechobee, Brevard co., Fla.—Mac- 
Cauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 478, 1887. 


BULL. 30] 


CO WEE-COWLITZ 


355 


Cowee (from Kawi abbreviated form 
of Kawi'yl , which is possibly a contrac¬ 
tion of Ani'-kawi'yl, ‘ place of the Deer 
clan’). A former important Cherokee 
settlement about the mouth of Co wee cr. 
of Little Tennessee r., about 10 m. below 
Franklin, Macon co., N. C.—Mooney in 
19th Rep. B. A. E.,525, 1900. 

Cowe.— Bartram, Travels, 371, 1792. 

Coweeshee. Given as a Cherokee town 
in the Keowee district, n. w. S. C.; exact 
locality uncertain.—Doc. of 1755 quoted 
by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 143,1887. 

Coweset (‘place of small pine trees.’— 
Trumbull). A small tribe or band for¬ 
merly living in n. Rhode Island, w. of 
Blackstone r. In 1637 they were subject 
to the Narraganset, but had thrown off 
the connection by 1660. (j. m. ) 

Cawesitt. —Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., i, 147, 1806. Corvesets. —Williams (1682), 
ibid., 2d s., VII, 76, 1818 (misprint). Cowesets.— 
Williams (1660) in R. I. Col. Rec., I, 460, 1856. 
Cowwesets. —Williams and Olney (1660), ibid., I, 
39-41. Cowweseuck, —Williams (1643) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., hi, 205, 1794 (name used by 
the tribe). Cowwesit. —Williams (1675), ibid., 4th 
s., vr, 300,1863. 

Cowichan. A group of Salisli tribes 
speaking a single dialect and occupying 
tlie s. e. coast of Vancouver id. between 
Nonoos bay and Sanitch inlet, and the 



COWICHAN MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


valley of lower Fraser r. nearly to Spuz- 
zum,’ Brit. Col. The various bands and 
tribes belonging to this group aggregated 
2,991 in 1902. The following list of Co¬ 
wichan tribes is based on information 
obtained from Boas: On Vancouver id.— 
Clemclemalats, Comiakin, Hellelt, Ken- 
ipsim, Kilpanlus, Koksilah, Kulleets, Lil- 


malche, Malakut, Nanaimo, Penelakut, 
Quamichan, Siccameen, Snonowas, So- 
menos, Tateke, and Yekolaos. On lower 
Fraser r.—Chehalis, Chilliwack, Coquit¬ 
lam, Ewawoos, Katsey, Kelatl, Kwantlen, 
Matsqui, Musqueam, Nicomen, Ohamil, 
Pilalt, Popkum, Scowlitz, Siyita, Sewa- 
then, Snonkweametl, Skwawalooks, 
Squawtits, Sumass, Tait, Tsakuam, and 
Tsenes. (j. r. s.) 

Caw-a-chim, —Jones (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 
34th Cong., 5, 1857. Ca-witchans. —Anderson 
quoted by Gibbs in Hist. Mag., vn, 74, 1863. 
Cowegans,— Fitzhue in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 329, 

1858. Cowe-wa-chin. —Starling, ibid., 170, 1852. 
Cowichin. —Douglas in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 
246, 1854. Cowitchens. —Mayne, Brit. Col., 247, 
1862. Cowitchins.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 220, 

1859. Halkome'lEm.—Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. 
Can., 54, 1902 (name of Fraser R. Cowichan 
for themselves). Hue-la-muh. —Mackay quoted 
by Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, 
sec. n, 7 (‘the people’:ow r n name). Hum-a-luh. — 
Ibid. (‘ the people’: name by which the Cowichan 
of Yale and Hope call themselves). Kauitchin. — 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 19,1862. Kau'itcin. — 
Boas in 5th Rep. N. W.* Tribes Can., 10, 1889. 
Kawatskins. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 475, 1855. Kawi- 
chen.— Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
I, 234, 1848. Kawitchen. —Scouler in Jour. Geog. 
Soc. Lond., I, 224, 1841. Kawitshin. —Hale in U. 
S. Expl. Exped., VI, 221,1846. Kawitskins. —Smet, 
Oregon Miss., 59, 1847. Kowailchew. —Gibbs in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 433, 1855. Kow-ait-chen. — 
Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 455, 1854. Kowitch- 
ans.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 578, 1878. 
Kowitsin.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 181. 
1877. Qauitcin. —Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. Q,ua- 
mitchan.— Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., lx, 1877. 

Cowichan Lake. A local name for 
Nootka Indians who in summer live on a 
reservation at the n. end of Cowichan 
lake, s. Vancouver id. There were only 
2 there in 1904.—Can. Ind. Aff., 1902,1904. 

Cowish. See Kouse. 

Cowlitz. A Salish tribe formerly on the 
river of the same name in «. w. Washing¬ 
ton. Once numerous and powerful, they 
were said by Gibbs in 1853 to be insignifi¬ 
cant, numbering with the Upper Che¬ 
halis, with whom they were mingled, not 
more than 165. About 1887 there were 
127 on Puyallup res., Wash. They are 
no longer known by this name, being 
evidently officially classed as Chehalis. 
See Sekwu. (j. r. s.) 

Cawalitz. —Lee and Frost, Oregon, 99, 1844. Co- 
neliskes. —Domenech, Deserts of N. A., 401, 1860. 
Cowelits.— Hale in U.S. Expl. Exped., vi, 211,1846. 
Cowelitz. — Farnham, Travels, 112, 1843. Cow-e- 
na-chino.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 171, 1852. 
Cowlitch.— Scouler 0846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond., I, 235, 1848. Cowlits.— Meek in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848. Cowlit- 
sick. —Drake, Book of Inds., vii, 1848. Cowlitsk. — 
Proc, Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., 84, 1851-54. Cow¬ 
litz.— Smet, Letters, 230, 1843. Kaoulis.— Duflot 
de Mofras, Oregon, ii, 95, 1844. Kau'-lits.— Mc- 
Caw, Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Puyallup 
name). * Kawelitsk.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., 
VI, 211, 1846. Kowalitsks.— Townsend, Narr., 175, 
1839. Kowelits —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 71, 1856. Kowelitsk.— Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, 119,1848. Kowlitz. —Gibbs in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 164, 1877. Nu-so-lupsh.— 
Ibid., 172 (name given by Indians not on Sound 
to Upper Cowlitz and Upper Chehalis; refers to 
rapids). 









356 


CO WN ANTICO-COY Y 0 


[B. A. E. 


Cownantico. A former division of the 
Skoton, living, according to the treaty of 
Nov. 18, 1854, on Rogue r., Oreg. 

Cow-nan-ti-co.— U. S. Ind. Treaties, 23, 18/3. 

Cowpens. Given in a distribution roll 
of Cherokee annuities paid in 1799 as a 
Cherokee town. It may have been situ¬ 
ated near the noted place of that name 
in Spartanburg co., S. C.—Royce in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887. 

Cowsumpsit. Mentioned in 1664 as if a 
village subject to the chief of the Wam- 
panoag, in Rhode Island.—Deed of 1664 
in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 14, 1848. 

Cow Towns. Mentioned with 9 other 
Upper Creek towns on Tallapoosa r., 
Ala.—Finnelson in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., i, 289, 1832. 

Coya. A former village on or near mid¬ 
dle St Johns r., Fla. 

Choya.— DeBry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. Coya.— 
Laudonniere (1564) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
287, 1869. 

Coyabegux. A village or tribe, now ex¬ 
tinct, mentioned by Joutel as being n. or 
n. w. of Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex., in 
1687. This region was controlled chiefly 
by Caddoan tribes. The name seems to 
have been given Joutel by Ebaliamo In¬ 
dians, who were closely affiliated with 
the Karankawa. See Gatschet, Karanka- 
wa Indians, 35, 1891; Charlevoix, New 
France, iv, 78, 1870. 

Cagabegux.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., I, 152, 1846. Coiaheguxes. —Barcia, Ensayo, 
271,1723. Coyabegux.— Joutel, op. cit., 136. 

Coyachic. A Tarahumare settlement n. 
of the headwaters of the central arm of 
the Rio San Pedro, lat. 28° 20', long. 106° 
48', Chihuahua, Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 323, 1864. 

Coyatee. A former Cherokee settle¬ 
ment on Little Tennessee r., about 10 m. 
below the Tellico, about the present Coy- 
tee, Loudon Co.,Tenn. It was the scene 
of the treaty of Coyatee in 1786 between 
commissioners representing the state of 
Franklin, as Tennessee was then called, 
and the chiefs of the Overhill towns.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 63, 513, 
1900. 

Cawatie. —Mooney, op. cit. Coiatee. —Ibid. Coy- 
tee. —Ibid. Coytoy. —Ibid. Kai-a-tee. —Ibid. 

Coycoy. A Chumashan village on one of 
the n. Santa Barbara ids., Cal., in 1542.— 
Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 
186, 1857. 

Coyoteros (Span.: ‘ wolf-men ’; so called 
in consequence, it is said, of their sub¬ 
sisting partly on coyotes or prairie wolves 
(Gregg, Com. Prairies, i, 290, 1844); but 
it seems more probable that the name 
was applied on account of their roving 
habit, living on the natural products of 
the desert rather than by agriculture or 
hunting). A division of the Apache, 
geographically divided into the Pinal 
Coyoteros and the White Mountain Co¬ 
yoteros, whose principal home was the 


w. or s. w. part of the present White 
Mountain res., e. Ariz., between San 
Carlos cr. and Gila r., although they 
ranged almost throughout the limits of 
Arizona and w. New Mexico. The name 
has evidently been indiscriminately ap¬ 
plied to various Apache bands, especially 
to the Pinal Coyoteros, who are but a 
part of the Covoteros. They were said 



COYOTERO APACHE MAN 

to have numbered 310 under the San 
Carlos Agency in 1886, 647 in 1900, and 
489 in 1904, but whether these figures in¬ 
clude other Apache is not known. See 
Apache, Tonto. (f. w. h. ) 

Cayotes. —Emory, Recoil., 70, 1848. Colloteros. — 
Bartlett, Pers. Narr., II, 601, 1854. Coyaheros. — 
H. R. Rep. 98, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 457, 1873. Coya- 
tero. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 203, 1855. Coye- 
tero. —Cooke in Emory, Recoil., map, 1848. Coyo- 
leno. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 122,1861. Coyotaro. — Emory, 
Recon.. 96, 1848. Coyote. — Mayer, Mex., ii, 122, 
1853. Coyotens.— Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, V, 689, 1855. Coyotero Apaches. —Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 141, 1868. Coyoteros.— Hardy, Trav. in 
Mexico, 430, 1829. Coystero. —Simpson in Rep. 
Sec. War, 118, 1850 (misprint). Cyotlero. — Abert 
in Emory, Recoil., 507, 1848. Eiotaro. —Pattie, 
Pers. Narr., 66, 1833 (misprint). Gilands. —John¬ 
ston in Emory, Recon., 587, 1848. Hilend’s Gila 
Indians. —Ibid, (“or Kiataws, prairie wolves”). 
Kiataro. —Ibid. Kiataw.— Ibid. Kiateros.—Ibid., 
591. Koiotero. —Ind. Aff. Rep.,246, 1877. Palawi. — 
Gatschet, Ynma-Spr., I, 371, 1883 (Tonto name: 
‘they play cards’). Pawilkna. —Ibid., 411 (Tonto 
name). Quietaroes. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 506, 1865. 
Silka.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 6, 1884 ('on the 
mountain’: Navaho name). Tzej-gla. — Ibid. 
Wilatsu'kwe. —Ibid., 7 (Zufii name: ‘lightning- 
shell people’). Wolf-Eaters.— Ruxton in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., li, 95, 1850 (Coyoteros or). 

Coyyo. A village connected with the 
former San Carlos mission, Cal., and said 
to have been of the Esselen tribe.—Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 






BULL. 30] 


CRADLES 


357 




Cradles. In North American ethnology, 
the device in which the infant was bound 
during the first months of life. It served 


ACOMA WOMAN WITH CRADLE. (vROMAN, PHOTO.) 

for both cradle and baby’s carriage, more 
especially the latter. In the arctic region, 
where the extreme cold would have been 
fatal, cradles were not used, the infant 
being carried about in the hood of the 
mother’s fur parka; the Mackenzie r. tribes 
put the baby in a bag of moss. In the 
warmer regions also, from the boundary 
of Mexico southward, frames were not 
universal, but the child, wearing little 
clothing, was in some way attached to 
the mother and borne on her hip, where 
it partly rode and partly clung, or rested 
in hammock-like swings. The territory 
between these extremes was the home of 
the cradle, which is found in great vari¬ 
ety. The parts of a cradle are the body, 
the bed and covering, the pillow and 
other appliances for the head, including 
those for head flattening, the lashing, 
the foot rest, the bow, the awning, the 
devices for suspension, and the trinkets 
and amulets, such as dewclaws, serving 
for rattles and moving attractions as well 
as for keeping away evil spirits. Cradles 
differ in form, technic, and decoration. 
Materials and designs were often selected 
with great care and much ceremony, the 
former being those best adapted for the 
purpose that nature provided in each 
culture area, and they, quite as much as 
the wish of the maker, decided the form 
and decoration. 

Bark cradles. —These were used in the 
interior of Alaska and in the Mackenzie 


drainage basin. They were made of a 
single piece of birch or other bark, bent 
into the form of a trough, with a hood, and 
tastefully adorned with quill- 
work. The bed was of soft fur, 
the lashing of babiche. They 
were carried on the mother’s 
back by means of a forehead 
band. 

Skin cradles .—Adopted in the 
area of the buffalo and other 
great mammals. The hide with 
the hair on was rolled up, in¬ 
stead of bark, and in much the 
same way, to hold the infant; 
when composed of hide only 
they were seldom decorated. 

Lattice cradles .—On the plains, 
cradles made of dressed skins were lashed 
to a lattice of flat sticks, especially among 


KIOWA CRADLE. (RUSSELL, PHOTO.) 

the Kiowa, Comanche, and others; but all 
the tribes now borrow from one another. 
In these are to be seen the perfection of 




358 


CRADLES 


[b. a . e. 


this device. The infant, wrapped in furs, 
was entirely encased. Over the face was 
bent a flat bow adorned with pendants 
or amulets and covered, in the best ex¬ 
amples, with a costly hood. The whole 
upper surface of the hide was a field of 
beadwork, quillwork, or other decora¬ 
tion, in which symbolic and heraldic de¬ 
vices were wrought. The frame was 
supported and carried on the mother’s 
back or swung from the pommel of a 
saddle by means of bands attached to the 
lattice frame in the rear. Among some 
tribes the upper ends of the frame pro¬ 
jected upward and were decorated. 

Board cradles. —Nearly akin to the last 
named is the form seen among the Iro- 
quoian and Algonquian tribes of the E., 
in which a thin, rectangular board takes 
the place of the lattice. It was frequently 
carved and gorgeously painted, and had 
a projecting foot rest. The bow was also 
bent to a right angle and decorated. The 
infant, after swaddling, was laid upon 
the board and lashed fast by means of a 
long band. The tree for the Pawnee 
cradle-board was carefully 
selected, and the middle 
taken out so that the heart 
or life should be preserved, 
else the child would die. 
Equal care was taken that 
the head of the cradle should 
follow the grain. The spots 
on the wildcat skin used for 
a cover symbolized the stars, 
the bow the sky, and the 
crooked furrow cut thereon 
hupa cradle of signified thelightiling, whose 
W,CKER power was typified by the 
arrows tied to the bow (Fletcher). All 
the parts were symbolic. 

Dugout cradles. —On the n. Pacific coast 
the infant was placed in a little box of 
cedar. The region furnished material, 
and the adz habit, acquired in canoe ex¬ 
cavation, made the manufacture easy. 
Interesting peculiarities of these cradles 
are the method of suspending them hori¬ 
zontally, as in Siberia, the pads of 
shredded bark for head flattening, and 
the relaxation of the child’s body in 
place of straight lacing. Decorative fea¬ 
tures are almost wanting. 

Matting cradles. —Closely allied to dug- 
out cradles and similar in the arrange¬ 
ment of parts are those found in contigu¬ 
ous areas made from the bast of cedar. 

Basket cradles.— On the Pacific slope 
a^id throughout the interior basin the 
basket cradle predominates and exists in 
great variety. Form, structure, and dec¬ 
oration are borrowed from contiguous 
regions. In British Columbia the dugout 
cradle is beautifully copied in coiled work 
and decorated with imbrications. The 
Salish have developed such variety in bas¬ 


ketry technic that mixed types of cradles 
are not surprising. In the coast region of n. 
California and Oregon cradles are more like 
littlechairs; the child’s feet are free, and it 
sits in the basket as if getting ready for 
emancipation from restraint. The woman 
lavishes her skill upon this vehicle for the 
object of her affection. Trinkets, face 
protectors, and soft beds complete the 
outfit. Elsewhere in California the baby 
lies flat. In the interior basin the use 
of basketry in cradles is characteristic of 
the Shoshonean tribes. In certain pue¬ 
blos of New Mexico wicker coverings are 
placed over them. 

Hurdle cradles. —These consist of a 
number of rods or small canes or sticks 
arranged in a plane on an oblong hoop 
and held in place by lashing with splints 
or cords. The Yuman tribes and the 
Wichita so made them. The bed is of 
cottonwood bast, shredded, and the child 
is held in place in some examples by an 
artistic wrapping of colored woven belts. 
The Apache, Navaho, and Pueblo tribes 
combine the basket, the hurdle, and the 
board cradles, the Navaho covering the 
framework with drapery of the softest 
buckskin and loading it with ornaments. 
The ancient cliff-dwellers used both the 
board and the hurdle forms. 

Hammock cradles. —Here and there were 
tribes that placed their infants in net¬ 
work or wooden hammocks suspended 
by the ends. In these the true function 
of the cradle as a sleeping place is better 
fulfilled, other varieties serving rather for 
carrying. 

Among the San Carlos Apache at least 
the cradle is made after the baby is born, 
to fit the body; later on a larger one is 
prepared. The infant was not placed 
at once after birth into the cradle after 
the washing; a certain number of days 
elapsed before the act was performed 
with appropriate ceremonies. When the 
mother was working about the home the 
infant was not kept in the cradle, but was 
laid on a robe or mat and allowed free 
play of body and limbs. The final escape 
was gradual, the process taking a year 
or more. The cradle distorted the head 
by flattening the occiput as a natural con¬ 
sequence of contact between the resistant 
pillow and the immature bone, and among 
certain tribes this action was enhanced 
by pressure of pads. The Navaho are said 
to adjust the padding under the shoulders 
also. Hrdlicka finds skull deformations 
more pronounced and common in males 
than in females (see Artificial head de¬ 
formation ). In many tribes scented herbs 
were placed in the bedding. Among the 
Yuma difference was sometimes made 
in adorning boys’ and girls’ cradles, the 
former being much more costly. Some 
tribes make a new cradle for each child, 



BULL. 30] 


CRANETOWN-CREE 


359 


but among the Pueblo tribes, particu¬ 
larly, the cradle was a sacred object, hand¬ 
ed down in the family, and the number 
of children it had carried was frequently 
shown by notches on the frame. Its sale 
would, it is thought, result in the death 
of the child. If the infant died while in 
the helpless age, the cradle was either 
thrown away (Walapai and Tonto), broken 
up, burned, or placed on the grave (Nav- 
aho and Apache), or buried with the 
corpse, laced up inside as in life (cliff- 
dwellers, Kiowa). The grief of the 
mother on the death of an infant is in¬ 
tensely pathetic. The doll and the cradle 
were everywhere playthings of Indian 
girls. See Child life , Moss-hag. 

Consult Fewkes in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
1897; Hrdlickain Am. Anthrop., vii, nos. 
2, 3, 1905; Mason in Rep. Nat. Mus., 
161-212, 1887; Porter, ibid., 213-235. 

(O. T. M.) 

Cranetown. A former Wyandot village 
on the site of the present Royalton, Fair- 
field co., Ohio. It was known to the 
Indians as Tarhe, from the name of a 
chief in 1790, at which time it contained 
about 500 inhabitants in 100 wigwams 
built of bark.—Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, 
i, 588, 1898. 

Tarhetown.—Ibid. 

Cranetown. A former Wyandot village 
in Crawford co., Ohio, 8 or 10 m. n. e. of 
the present Upper Sandusky.—Royce in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. clvi, 1899. 

Craniology. See Anatomy , Artificial 
head deformation , Physiology. 

Crayfish Town (probably translated from 
Cherokee TsistUnd'yi, ‘crawfish place’). 
A former Cherokee settlement in upper 
Georgia about 1800. (j. m. ) 

Crazy Horse. An Oglala Sioux chief. 
He is said to have received this name 
because a wild pony dashed through the 
village when he was born. His bold, ad¬ 
venturous disposition made him a leader 
of the southern Sioux, who scorned res¬ 
ervation life and delighted to engage in 
raiding expeditions against the Crows or 
the Mandan, or to wreak vengeance on 
whites wherever they could safely attack 
them. When the Sioux went on the war¬ 
path in 1875, on account of the occupancy 
of the Black-hills and other grievances, 
Crazy Horse and Sitting Bull were the 
leaders of the hostiles. Gen. Reynolds, 
commanding a column of the army of 
Gen. Crook, in the winter of 1875 surprised 
Crazy Horse’s camp and captured his 
horses, but the Indians succeeded in stam¬ 
peding the herd in a blinding snowstorm. 
When Gen. Crook first encountered Crazy 
Horse’s band on Rosebud r., Mont., the 
former was compelled to fall back after a 
sharp fight. The band at that time con¬ 
sisted of about 600 Minneconjou Sioux 
and Cheyenne. Later Crazy Horse was 


joined on Powder r. by warlike Sioux of 
various tribes on the reservation, others 
going to swell the band of Sitting Bull in 
Dakota. Both bands united and anni¬ 
hilated the column of Gen. George A. 
Custer on Little Bighorn r., Mont., June 
25, 1876. When Gen. Nelson A. Miles 
pursued the Sioux in the following winter 
the two camps separated again s. of Yel¬ 
lowstone r., Crazy Horse taking his Chey¬ 
enne and Oglala and going back to Rose¬ 
bud r. Gen. Mackenzie destroyed his 
camp on a stream that flows into Tongue 
r., losing several men in the engagement. 
Gen. Miles followed the band toward 
Bighorn mts. and had a sharp engagement 
in which the troops could scarcely have 
withstood the repeated assaults of double 
their number without their artillery, 
which exploded shells among the Indians 
with great effect. Crazy Horse surren¬ 
dered in the spring with over 2,000 fol¬ 
lowers. He was suspected of stirring up 
another war and was placed under arrest 
on Sept. 7, 1877, but broke from the 
guard and was shot. See Miles, Pers. 
Recol., 193, 244, 1896. 

Creation myths. See Mythology , Religion. 

Credit Indians. A Missisauga band 
formerly living on Credit r., at the w. end 
of L. Ontario. About 1850 they removed 
to Tuscarora, on Grand r., Ontario, by 
invitation of the Iroquois.—Jones, Ojeb- 
way Inds., 211, 1861. 

Cree (contracted from Kristinaux, 
French form of Kenistenoag, given as one 
of their own names). An important Al- 
gonquian tribe of British America whose 
former habitat was in Manitoba and 
Assiniboia, between Red and Saskatch¬ 
ewan rs. They ranged northeastward 
down Nelson r. to the vicinity of Hudson 
bay, and northwestward almost to Atha¬ 
basca lake. When they first became 
known to the Jesuit missionaries a part of 
them resided in the region of James bay, 
as it is stated as early as 1640 that “they 
dwell on the rivers of the north sea where 
Nipissings go to trade with them”; but 
the Jesuit Relations of 1661 and 1667 in¬ 
dicate a region farther to the N. w. as the 
home of the larger part of the tribe. A 
portion of the Cree, as appears from the 
tradition given by Lacombe (Diet. Lang. 
Cris), inhabited for a time the region 
about Red r., intermingled with the 
Chippewa and Maskegon, but were 
attracted to the plains by the buffalo, the 
Cree like the Chippewa being essentially 
a forest people. Many bands of Cree 
were virtually nomads, their movements 
being governed largely by the food supply. 
The Cree are closely related, linguist¬ 
ically and otherwise, to the Chippewa. 
Hayden regarded them as an offshoot of 
the latter, and the Maskegon another 
division of the same ethnic group. 


360 


CREE 


[b. a. e. 


At some comparatively recent time the 
Assiniboin, a branch of the Sioux, in 
consequence of a quarrel, broke away 
from their brethren and sought alli¬ 
ance with the Cree. The latter received 
them cordially and granted them a home 
in their territory, thereby forming 
friendly relations that have continued to 
the present day. The united tribes at¬ 
tacked and drove south westward the Sik- 
sika and allied tribes who formerly dwelt 
along the Saskatchewan. The enmity 
between these tribes and both the Siksika 
and the Sioux has ever since continued. 
After the Cree obtained firearms they 
made raids into the Athapascan country, 
even to the Rocky mts. and as far n. 
as Mackenzie r., but Churchill r. was 
accounted the extreme n. limit of their 
territory, and in their cessions of land to 
Canada they claimed nothing beyond this 
line. Mackenzie, speaking of the region 
of Churchill r., says the original people of 
this area, probably Slaves, were driven 
out by the Cree. 

As "the people of this tribe have been 
friendly from their first intercourse with 
both the English and the French, and 
until quite recently were left compara¬ 
tively undisturbed in the enjoyment of 
their territory, there has been but little 
recorded in regard to their history. This 
consists almost wholly of their contests 
with neighboring tribes and their re¬ 
lations with the Hudson Bay Co. In 
1786, according to Hind, these Indians, 
as well as those of surrounding tribes, 
were reduced to less than half their 
former numbers by smallpox. The same 
disease again swept off at least half the 
prairie tribes in 1838. They were thus 
reduced, according to Hind, to one-sixth 
or one-eighth of their former population. 
In more recent years, since game has 
become scarce, they have lived chiefly 
in scattered bands, depending largely 
on trade with the agents of the Hudson 
Bay Co. At present they are gathered 
chiefly in bands on various reserves in 
Manitoba, mostly with the Chippewa. 

Their dispersion into bands subject to 
different conditions with regard to the 
supply and character of their food has re¬ 
sulted in varying physical characteristics; 
hence the varying descriptions given by 
explorers. Mackenzie, who describes the 
Cree comprehensively, says they are of 
moderate stature, well proportioned, and 
of great activity. Their complexion is 
copper-colored and their hair black, 
as is common among Indians. Their 
eyes are black, keen, and penetrating; 
their countenance open and agreeable. 
In regard to the women he says: “Of all 
the nations which I have seen on this 
continent, the Knisteneaux women are 
the most comely. Their figure is gener¬ 


ally well proportioned, and the regularity 
of their features would be acknowledged 
by the more civilized people of Europe. 
Their complexion has less of that dark 
tinge which is common to those savages 
who have less cleanly habits.” Umfre- 
ville, from whom. Mackenzie appears to 
have copied in part what is here stated, 
says that they are more inclined to be 
lean of body than otherwise, a corpulent 
Indian being “a much greater curiosity 
than a sober one.” Clark (Sign Lan¬ 
guage, 1885) describes the Cree seen by 
him as wretchedly poor and mentally and 
physically inferior to the Plains Indians; 
and Harmon says that those of the tribe 
w T ho inhabit the'plains are fairer and more 
cleanly than the others. 

Their hair v r as cut in various fashions, 
according to the tribal divisions, and by 
some left in its natural state. Henry 
says the young men shaved off the hair 
except a small spot on the crown of the 
head. Their dress consisted of tight leg¬ 
gings, reaching nearly to the hip, a strip 
of cloth or leather about 1 ft. wide and 
5 ft. long passing between the legs and 
under a belt around the w r aist, the ends 
being allowed to hang down in front and 
behind; a vest or shirt reaching to the 
hips; sometimes a cap for the head made 
of a piece of fur or a small skin, and 
sometimes a robe thrown over the dress. 
These articles, with moccasins and mit¬ 
tens, constituted their apparel. The dress 
of the women consisted of the same mate¬ 
rials, but the shirt extended to the knees, 
being fastened over the shoulders with 
cords and at the wnist with a belt, and 
having a flap at the shoulders; the arms 
were covered to the wrist with detached 
sleeves. Umfreville says that in trading, 
fraud, cunning, Indian finesse, and every 
concomitant vice was practised by them 
from the boy of 12 years to the octogena¬ 
rian, but where trade was not concerned 
they were scrupulously honest. Macken¬ 
zie says that they were naturally mild and 
affable, as well as jiist in their dealings 
among themselves and with strangers; that 
any deviation from these traits is to be 
attributed to the influence of the white 
traders. He also describes them as gen¬ 
erous, hospitable, and exceedingly good 
natured except w hen under the influence 
of spirituous liquor. Chastity was not 
considered a virtue among them, though 
infidelity of a wife was sometimes severely 
punished. Polygamy was common; and 
when a man’s wife died it was considered 
his duty to marry her sister, if she had one. 
The arms and utensils used before trade 
articles were introduced by the whites 
were pots of stone, arrow-points, spear¬ 
heads, hatchets, and other edged tools of 
flint, knives of buffalo rib, fishhooks made 
out of sturgeon bones, and awls from 


BULL. 30 ] 


CREE 


361 


bones of the moose. The fibrous roots of 
the white pine were used as twine for sew¬ 
ing their bark canoes, and a kind of thread 
from a weed for making nets. Spoons 
and pans were fashioned from the horns 
of the moose (Hayden). They sometimes 
made fishhooks by inserting a piece of 
bone obliquely into a stick and sharpen¬ 
ing the point. Their lines were either 
thongs fastened together or braided wil¬ 
low bark. Their skin tipis, like those of 
the n. Athapascans, were raised on poles 
set up in conical form, but were usually 
more commodious. They occasionally 
erect a larger structure of lattice work, 
covered with birch bark, in which 40 
men or more can assemble for council, 
feasting, or religious rites. 

The dead were usually buried in shal¬ 
low graves, the body being covered with a 
)ile of stones and earth to protect it from 
)easts of prey. The grave was lined with 
branches, some of the articles belonging 
to the deceased being placed in it, and in 
some sections a sort of canopy was erected 
over it. Where the deceased had distin¬ 
guished himself in war his body was laid, 
according to Mackenzie, on a kind of scaf¬ 
folding; but at a later date Hayden says 
they did not practise tree or scaffold burial. 
Tattooing was almost universal among the 
Cree before it was abandoned through the 
influence of the whites. The women were 
content with having a line or two drawn 
from the corners of the mouth toward the 
angles of the lower jaw; but some of the 
men covered their bodies with lines and 
figures. The Cree of the Woods are ex¬ 
pert canoemen and the women lighten 
considerably their labors by the use of the 
canoe, especially where lakes and rivers 
abound. A double-head drum and a rattle 
are used in all religious ceremonies except 
those which take place in the sweat house. 
Their religious beliefs are generally sim¬ 
ilar to those of the Chippewa. 

The gentile form of social organization 
appears to be wanting. On account of 
the uncertain application of the divisional 
names given by the Jesuit missionaries 
and other early writers it is impossible 
to identify them with those more mod¬ 
ern ly recognized. Richardson says: “It 
would, however, be an endless task to 
attempt to determine the precise people 
designated by the early French writers. 
Every small band, naming itself from its 
hunting grounds, was described as a dif¬ 
ferent nation.” The first notice of the 
Cree divisions is given in the Jesuit Rela¬ 
tion of 1658, which states that they are 
composed of four nations or peoples, as 
follows: Alimibegouek, Kilistinons of the 
bay of Ataouabouscatouek, Kilistinons 
of the Nipisiriniens, and Nisibourounik. 
At least 3 of these divisions are erro¬ 
neously located on the Creuxius map of 


1660, and it is evident from the Relation 
that at least 3 of them were supposed by 
the writer to have been situated some¬ 
where s. or s. w. of James bay. Nothing 
additional is heard of them in the subse¬ 
quent notices of the tribe, which is other¬ 
wise divided into the Paskwawininiwug 
and Sakawininiwug (people of the plains 
and of the woods), the former subdi¬ 
vided into Sipiwininiwug and Marniki- 
niniwug (river and lowland people), the 
latter into Sakittawawininiwug and Aya- 
baskawininiwug (those of Cross lake and 
those of Athabasca). In 1856 the Cree 
were divided, according to Hayden, into 
the following bands, all or nearly all tak¬ 
ing their names from their chiefs: Apis- 
tekaihe, Cokah, Kiaskusis, Mataitaikeok, 
Muskwoikakenut, Musk woikauepa wit, 
Peisiekan, Piskakauakis, Shemaukan, 
and Wikyuwamkamusenaikata, besides 
several smaller bands and a considerable 
number around Cross lake, in the present 
Athabasca, who were not attached to any 
band. So far as now known the ethnic 
divisions, aside from the Cree proper, are 
the Maskegon and the Monsoni. Al¬ 
though these are treated as distinct tribes, 
they form, beyond doubt, integral parts 
of the Cree. It was to the Maskegon, 
according to Richardson, that the name 
Kilistenaux, in its many forms, was 
anciently applied, a conclusion with which 
Henry apparently agrees. 

In 1776, before smallpox had greatly 
reduced them, the population of the Cree 
proper was estimated at about 15,000. 
Most of the estimates during the last cen¬ 
tury give them from 2,500 to 3,000. 
There are now about 10,000 in Manitoba 
(7,000 under agencies) and about 5,000 
roving in Northwest Territory; total, 
15,000. (j. m. c. T.) 

Ana. —Petitot, Kutchin MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 
(‘foes’: Kutchin name). Annah. —Mackenzie, 
Voy., 291,1802 (‘foes’: Chipewvan name). Ayis- 
iyiniwok.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 649, 
1883 (name used by themselves). Castanoe.— 
Stanwix conf. (1759) in Rupp, West. Penn., 
app., 140, 1846. Chahis. —Maximilian, Trav., 
II, 234, 1841 (Hidatsa name). Christaneaux.— 
Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 156,1824. Christenaux.— 
Writer of 1719 in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 424,1885. 
Christeneaux.— Hutchins (1764) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, III, 556, 1853. Chris'-te-no.— 
Lewis and Clark, Trav., 55, 1806. Christenois.— 
Ibid., 30. Christianaux. —La Harpe (1700), in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 27, 1851. Christian- 
eaux. —Gale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Chris- 
tianux.— Hutchins (1770) quoted by Richardson, 
Arct. Exped., n, 37, 1851. Christinaux. —Dobbs, 
Hudson Bay, 20, 1744. Christineaux. —French 
writer (1716) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 422, 
1885. Christinos. —Proces verbal (1671) in Margry, 
D6c., I, 97, 1875. Christinou. —Hervas (m. 1785) 
quoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 348,1816. 
Chritenoes.— Fisher, Interesting Acct., 190, 1812. 
Cithinistinee. —Writer of 1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., iii,24, 1794. Clintinos.— Ramsey in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 72, 1850 (misprint). Clistenos.— 
Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., I, 32,1824. 
Clistinos.— La Hontan, New Voy., I, 231, 1703. 
Cnistineaux, —Neill, Minn., Ill, 1858. Crees. — 
Harmon, Jour., 313, map, 1820. Cries,— Smet, 


362 


CREEK PATH-CREEKS 


[b. a. e.' 


Missions, 109, 1848. Criqs.— Henry, Trav. in Can., 
214, 1809. Criques. —Charlevoix (1667), New 
France, in, 107, 1868 (so called by Canadians). 
Cris. —Dobbs, Hudson Bay, map, 1744. Criste- 
neaux. —Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 556, 1853. Cristinaux. — 
Montreal treaty (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ix, 722, 1855. Cristineaux. —Petitot in Jour. 
Roy. Geog. Soc., 649, 1883. Cristinos. —La Ches- 
naye (1697) in Margry, D6c., VI, 7, 1886. Crists. — 
Vaudreuil (1716), ibid., 496. Crus. —Gunn in 

Smithson. Rep., 399, 1867. Cyininook. —Kingsley, 
Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 148, 1883. Eithinyook.— 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 23, 1836. 
Eithinyoowuc. —Franklin, Jour. Polar Sea, 96, 
1824 (‘men’: their own name). Ennas. —Petitot 
in Can. Rec. Sci., i, 49, 1884 (‘strangers’, ‘ene¬ 
mies’: Athapascan name). Eta. —Petitot, Hare 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 (‘foe’: Kawchodinne 
name). Ethinu. —Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 1, 
1851. Ethinyu. —Ibid., 34. Eythinyuwuk. —Ibid., 
1 (own name). Guilistinons. —Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 
1858. Gu'tskia/we. —Chamberlain, inf’n, 1903 
(‘liars’: Kutenai name). Hillini-Lle'ni. —Petitot 
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 650, 1883. Ininyu- 
we-u.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., n, 33,1851. In- 
ninyu-wuk. —Ibid., 70 (name used by themselves). 
Iyiniwok.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 649, 
1883 (‘men’: name used bythemselves). Ka-lis- 
te-no.— Lewis and Clark quoted by Yater, Mith., 
pt. 3, sec. 3, 408,1816. Keiscatch-ewan.— Hutchins 
(1770) quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., n, 37, 
1851 (‘people of Saskatchewan r.’). Keiskatche- 
wan. —Ibid., 38. Kelistenos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, VI, 33,1857. Ke-nish-te-no-wuk.— Morgan, 
Consang. and Aftin., 287, 1871. Ke-nis-te-noag. — 
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 33, 1885 
(Chippewa name). Kenistenoo. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 
454,1838. Kenistenos. —Burton, City of the Saints, 
117,1861. Kilisteno. —Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man¬ 
kind, V, 410, 1847. Kilistinaux. —Jes. Rel. 1670, 92, 
1858. Kilistinon.— Jes. Rel. 1658, 20, 1858. Kilisti- 
nos. —Du Lhut (1684) in Margry, D6c., vi, 51, 1886. 
Kilistinous.— Charlevoix quoted by Yater, Mith., 
pt. 3, sec. 3,407,1816. Killestinoes. —Boudinot, Star 
in the West, 107, 1816. Killini.— Petitot in Jour. 
Roy. Geog. Soc., 650, 1883. Killisteneaux. —Army 
officer (1812) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
m,556, 1853. Killistenoes. —Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
2d s., x, 99, 1823. Killistinaux. —Henry, Trav. in 
Can., 247,1809. Killistini. —Duponceau quoted by 
Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 649,1883. Killisti- 
noer.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 257,1816 (German 
form). Killistinoes. —Edwards(1788) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix,92,1804. Killistinons. — Henry, 
Trav. in Can., 247, 1809. Killistinous. —Jefferys, 
Fr. Dorns., I, 44, 1760. Killistins. —Ibid., map. 
Kinishtinak. —Belcourt (before 1853) inMinn. Hist. 
Soc. Coll.,i, 227, 1872 (trans.: ‘being held by the 
winds’). Kinishtino.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet.,63, 
1878 (Chippewa name). Kinisteneaux. —Macken¬ 
zie (1801) quoted by Kendall, Trav., II, 289, 1809. 
Kinistinaux.— Henry, Trav. in Can., 214, 1809. 
Kinistineaux. —Ibid., 247. Kinistinoes. —Harmon, 
Jour., 67, 1820. Kinistinons. —Jes. Rel. 1672, 54, 
1858. Kinistinuwok. —Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., 649, 1883 (Chippewa name). Kinstenaux.— 
Lewis and Clark, Trav., 105, 1840. Kinstinaux.— 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., n, 104,1848. 
Kiristinon,— Jes. Rel. 1640,34,1858. Kislistinons.— 
Du Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, ix, 161, 
1855. Kisteneaux. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 71, 
1850. Klistinaux.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., II, 23, 1836. Klistinons. —Jes. Rel. (1671) 

quoted by Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 71, 1850. 
Klistinos. —Petitot in Jour. Roy .Geog. Soc. ,649,1883. 
Kneestenoag.— Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (Ottawa 
name). Knisteaux.— Howe, Hist. Coll., 357, 1851. 
Knistenaus.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., 45, 1806. 
Knistenaux.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc.Coll.,2d s.,ii,11, 1814. Knisteneau. —Farnham, 
Trav., 32, 1843. Knisteneaux, —Gass, Jour., 42, 
note, 1807. Knisteneux.— Harmon, Jour., 313,1820! 
Kmsteno.— Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., 100, 1839. 
Kmstenoos. — Brackenridge, Views of La., 86,1815. 
Kmstinaux.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq., Soc. 
k’J 3 ’,! 836, Kni stineaux.— Shea, Cath. Miss’., 14L 
st A nos, ~ 1 Kingsley, Stand.Nat.Hist.,pt. 6, 
148, 1883. Krees.— Henry, MS. vocab. (1812), Bell 


copy, B. A. E. Kricqs, —Bacqueville de la Poth- 
erie, Hist. Am., I, 170, 1753. Kries. —Baudry des 
Lozi5res, Voy. a la Le., 242, 1802. Kriqs.— Lettres 
Edif., i, 645,1695. Kris. —Jefferys, Fr. Dorns, I,map, 
1760. Kristenaux.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., 
pt. 6, 148, 1883. Kristeneaux. —Franklin, Jour, to 
Polar Sea, 96, 1824. Kristinaux. —Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 23, 1836. Kristino. — 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 34, 1822. Kyristin8ns.— 
Jes. Rel. 1641, 59,1858. Mehethawas. —Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 521, 1878. Ministeueaux. — 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816 (misprint). 
Naehiaok.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,pt. 6, 148, 
1883. Nahathaway. —West, Jour., 19, 1824. Na- 
heawak. —Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., I, 376, 1824. 
Nahhahwuk. —Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (said to be 
their own name). Nahiawah.— Prichard, Phys. 
Hist. Mankind, v, 410, 1847. Nahioak. —Maxi¬ 
milian, Trav., 1,454,1839. Nakawawa, —Hutchins 
(1770) quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., n, 38, 
1851. Naka-we-wuk.— Ibid. Nathehwy-within- 
yoowuc, —Franklin, Journ. to Polar Sea, 96, 1824 
(‘southern men’). Nathe'-wywithin-yu. — Ibid., 
71. Nation du Grand-Rat. —La Chesnaye (1697) in 
Margry, D6c., VI, 7, 1886. Ne-a-ya-og. —Hayden, 
Ethnol. and Philol. Mo. Val., 235,1862 (‘ those who 
speak the same tongue’: own name). Ne-heth- 
a-wa. —Umfreville (1790) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., 
vi, 270, 1859. Nehethe-wuk,— Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., ii, 36, 1851 (‘exact men’: own name). 
Nehethowuck. —Shea, note in Charlevoix, New 
Fr., in, 107, 1868. Nehethwa. —Umfreville (1790) 
quoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 418, 1816. 
Nehiyaw. —Baraga, Ojibwa Diet., 1878 (Chippewa 
name). Nehiyawok. —Lacombe, Diet, des Cris, x, 
1874 (own name; from iyiniwok,' those of the first 
race’). Nenawehks. —Keane in Stanford, Com¬ 
pend., 525,1878. Nenawewhk. —Walch, map, 1805. 
Nena Wewhok.— Harmon, Jour., map, 1820. Ni- 
the-wuk.— Hind, Lab. Benin., n, 10,1863. Northern 
Uttawawa.— Hutchins (1770) quoted by Richard¬ 
son, Arct. Exped., II, 38, 1851. O’pimmitish Inini- 
wuc.— Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, 56, 1824 (‘men 
of the woods’). Quenistinos. —Iberville (1702) in 
Minn.Hist.Soc.Coll.,i, 342,1872. Queristinos. —iDer- 
ville in Margry, D6c., IV, 600,1880. Re-nis-te-nos.— 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 122, 1851. 
sa-he'.— Matthews, Hidatsalnds.,200, 1877(Hidatsa 
name). Saie'kuun.— Tims, Blackfoot Gram, and 
Diet., 124, 1889 (Siksika name; sing.). Schahi.— 
Maximilian, Trav., n, 234, 1841 (Hidatsa name), 
sha-i-ye, —Matthews, Hidatsalnds., 200, 1877 (As- 
siniboin name). Shi-e-a-la.— Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 235, 1862 (Sioux name). 
Shi-e-ya.— Ibid. (Assiniboin name: ‘enemies,’ 
‘strangers’). Southern Indians. —Dobbs, Hudson 
Bay, 95, 1744 (so called by the Hudson bay 
traders). 

Creek Path (transl. of Ku'sd-nlmnd'hl ). 
A former important Cherokee settlement, 
including also a number of Creeks and 
Shawnee, where the trail from the Ohio 
region to the Creek country crossed Ten¬ 
nessee r., at the present Guntersville, 
Marshall co., Ala. It was later known 
as Gunter’s Landing, from a Cherokee 
mixed-blood named Gunter.—Mooney in 
19th Rep. B. A. E., 526, 1900. 

Creeks. A confederacy forming one of 
the largest divisions of the Muskhogean 
family. They received their name from 
the English on account of the numerous 
streams in their country. During early 
historic times the Creeks occupied the 
greater portion of Alabama and Geor¬ 
gia, residing chiefly on Coosa and Talla¬ 
poosa rs., the two largest tributaries of 
Alabama r., and on Flint and Chatta¬ 
hoochee rs. They claimed the territory 
on the e. from the Savannah to St Johns r. 
and all the islands, thence to Apalache 


DULL. 30] 


CREEKS 


303 


bay, and from this line northward to the 
mountains. The s. portion of this terri¬ 
tory was held by dispossession of the 
earlier Florida tribes. They sold to Great 
Britain at an early date their territory be¬ 
tween Savannah and Ogeechee rs., all the 
coast to St Johns r., and all the islands 
up to tidewater, reserving for themselves 
St Catherine, Sapelo, and Ossabaw ids., 
and from Pipemakers bluff to Savannah 
(Morse, N. Am., 218, 1776). Thus oc¬ 
cupying a leading position among the 
Muskhogean tribes the Creeks were suffi¬ 
ciently numerous and powerful to resist 
attacks from the northern tribes, as the 
Catawba, Iroquois, Shawnee, and Chero¬ 
kee, after they had united in a confed¬ 
eracy, which they did at an early day. 
The dominating tribes at the time of 
the. confederation seem to have been the 
Abihka, Kusa, Kasihta, Kawita, Wokokai, 
Hilibi, and Huhliwahli, and some other 
tribe or tribes at the junction of Coosa 
and Tallapoosa rs. Nothing certain can 
be said of their previous condition, or of 
the time when the confederacy was estab¬ 
lished, but it appears from the narratives 
of DeSoto’s expedition that leagues among 
several of these towns existed in 1540, 
over which head chiefs presided. 

For more than a century before their 
removal to the W., between 1836 and 
1840, the people of the Creek confederacy 
occupied some 50 towns, in w r hich were 
spoken 7 distinct languages, viz, Musco¬ 
gee, Hitchiti, Koasati, Alibamu, Natchez, 
Yuchi, and Shawnee. The first 5 were 
Muskhogean, the others were wholly alien 
incorporations. About half the confed¬ 
eracy spoke the Muscogee language, 
which thus constituted the ruling lan¬ 
guage and gave name to the confederacy. 
The meaning of the word is unknown. 
Although an attempt has been made to 
connect it with the Algonquian maskeg, 
‘swamp,’ the probabilities seem to favor 
a southern origin. The people speaking 
the cognate Hitchiti and Koasati were 
contemptuously designated as ‘ ‘Stincards’ ’ 
by the dominant Muscogee. The Koasati 
spoke almost the same language as the 
Alibamu of central Alabama, while the 
Hitchiti, on lower Chattahoochee r., 
appear to have been the remnant of the 
anuient people of s. e. Georgia, and 
claimed to be of more ancient occupancy 
than the Muscogee. Geographically the 
towns were grouped as Upper Creek, on 
Coosa and Tallapoosa rs., Ala., and Lower 
Creek, on middle or Lower Chattahoochee 
r., on the Alabama-Georgia border. 
While the Seminole (q. v.) were still a 
small body confined to the extreme n. of 
Florida, they were frequently spoken of 
as Lower Creeks. To the Cherokee the 
Upper Creeks were known as Ani-Kusa, 
from their ancient town of Kusa, or 


Coosa, while the Lower Creeks were 
called Ani-Kaivita, from their principal 
town Kawita, or Coweta. The earlier 
Seminole emigrants were chiefly from the 
Lower Creek towns. 

The history of the Creeks begins with 
the appearance of De Soto’s army in their 
country in 1540. Tristan de Luna came 
in contact with part of the group in 1559, 
but the only important fact that can be 
drawn from the record is the deplorable 
condition into which the people of the 
sections penetrated by the Spaniards had 
been brought by their visit. Juan del 
Pardo passed through their country in 
1567, but Juan de la Vandera, the chron¬ 
icler of his expedition, has left little more 
than a list of unidentifiable names. The 



CREEK MAN 


Creeks came prominently into history as 
allies of the English in the Apalachee 
wars of 1703-08, and from that period 
continue almost uniformly as treaty allies 
of the South Carolina and Georgia colo¬ 
nies, while hostile to the Spaniards of 
Florida. The only serious revolt of the 
Creeks against the Americans took place 
in 1813-14—the well-known Creek war, 
in which Gen. Jackson took a prominent 
part. This ended in the complete defeat 
of the Indians and the submission of 
Weatherford, their leader, followed by 
the cession of the greater part of their 
lands to the United States. The extended 
and bloody contest in Florida, which 
lasted from 1835 to 1843 and is knowm as 
the Seminole war, secured permanent 
peace with the southern tribes. The re- 





364 


CREEKS 


[b. a. e. 


moval of the larger part of the Creek and 
Seminole people and their negro slaves 
to the lands assigned them in Indian 
Ter. took place between 1836 and 1840. 

The Creek woman was short in stature 
but well formed, while the warrior, ac¬ 
cording to Pickett (Hist. Ala., 87, ed. 
1896), was “larger than the ordinary 
race of Europeans, often above 6 ft. in 
height, but w T as invariably well formed, 
erect in his carriage, and graceful in every 
movement. They were proud, haughty, 
and arrogant; brave and valiant in war.” 
As a people they were more than usually 
devoted to decoration and ornament; 
they were fond of music, and ball play 
was their most important game. Exog¬ 
amy, or marriage outside the clan, was 
the' rule; adultery by the wife was pun¬ 
ished by the relatives of the husband; 
descent was in the female line. Each 
town or small tribe ( talwa ) was under an 
elected chief, or miko, who was advised 
by the council of the town in all impor¬ 
tant matters, while the council appointed 
the “ great warrior ” or tustenuggi-hlako. 
They usually buried their dead in a square 
pit under the bed where the deceased 
lay in his house. Certain towns were 
consecrated to peace ceremonies and 
were known as “white towns,” while 
others set apart for war ceremonials were 
designated as “red towns.” They had 
several orders of chiefly rank. Their 
great religious ceremony was the annual 
puskita (see Busk), of which the lighting 
of the new fire and the drinking of the 
black drink (q. v.) were important accom¬ 
paniments. 

The early statistics of Creek popula¬ 
tion are based on mere estimates. It is 
not known what numerical relation the 
mixed bloods hold to the full bloods and 
their former negro slaves, nor the num¬ 
ber of their towns (having a square for 
annual festivities) and villages (having 
no square). In the last quarter of the 
18th century the Creek population may 
have been about 20,000, occupying from 
40 to 60 towns. Knox in 1789 (Am. State 
Pap., i, 1832) estimates them at 6,000 war¬ 
riors, or a total of 24,000 inhabitants in 
100 towns; but these evidently included 
the Seminole of Florida. Bartram, about 
1775, credits the whole confederacy, ex¬ 
clusive of the Seminole, with 11,000' in 55 
towns. Hawkins, in 1785, gave them 
5,400 men, representing a total of about 
19,000. Estimates made after the re¬ 
moval to Indian Ter. place the popula¬ 
tion between 15,000 and 20,000. In 1904 
the “Creeks by blood” living in the 
Creek Nation, numbered 9,905, while 
Creek freedmen aggregated 5,473. The 
number of acres in their reserve in 1885 
was 3,215,395, of which only a portion 
was tillable, and 90,000 were actually 
cultivated. 


Some of the more important earlier 
treaties of the United States with the 
Creek Indians are: Plopewell, S. C., Nov. 
28, 1785; New York, Aug. 7, 1790; Cole¬ 
raine, Ga., June 29, 1796; Ft Jackson, 
Ala., Aug. 9,1814; Creek agency on Flint 
r., Jan. 22, 1818; Indian Spring, Creek 
Nation, Jan. 8,1821; Washington, D. C., 
Jan. 24,1826, and Mar. 24,1832; Ft Gib¬ 
son, Ind. T., Nov. 23,1838. 

Until recently the Creek Nation in 
Oklahoma was divided into 49 townships 
(“towns”), of which 3 were inhabited 
solely by negroes. The capital was Ok¬ 
mulgee. Their legislature consisted of a 
House of Kings (corresponding to the 
Senate) and a House of Warriors (similar 
to the National House of Representa¬ 
tives), with a head chief as executive. 
Several volumes of their laws have been 
published. 

The Creek clans follow, those marked 
with an asterisk being extinct; the final 
algi means ‘people’: Ahalakalgi (Bogpo¬ 
tato), Aktayatsalgi, Atchialgi (Maize), 
*Chukotalgi, Fusualgi (Bird), Halpadalgi 
(Alligator), Hlahloalgi (Fish), Hutalgalgi 
(Wind), *Isfanalgi, Itamalgi, Itchhasu- 
algi (Beaver), Itchualgi (Deer), Katsalgi 
(Panther), Koakotsalgi (Wild-cat), Ku- 
nipalgi (Skunk), *Muklasalgi, Nokosalgi 
(Bear), *Odshisalgi (Hickory-nut), *Oki- 
lisa, *Oktchunualgi (Salt), Osanalgi (Ot¬ 
ter), Pahosalgi, Sopaktalgi(Toad), Takus- 
algi (Mole),Tsulalgi (Fox), * Wahlakalgi, 
Wotkalgi (Raccoon), Yahalgi (Wolf). 

Below is a list of the Creek towns and 
villages. The smaller contained 20 to 30 
cabins and the larger as many as 200. 
Tukabatchi, the largest, is said' to have 
had 386 families in 1832. The towns 
were composed of irregular clusters of 4 
to 8 houses, each cluster being occupied 
by the representative of a clan. 

Upper Creek towns. —Abihka, Abikud- 
shi, Alkehatchee, Anatichapko, Assi- 
lanapi, Atasi, Atchinaalgi, Atchinabat- 
chi, Aucheucaula, Canjauda, Cayomulgi, 
Chakihlako, Chananagi, Chatoksofki, 
Chatukehufaula, Chiaha, Cholocco Lita- 
bixee, Conaliga, Coosahatchi, Cow Towns, 
Eufaula, Fusihatchi, Ghuaclahatche, 
Guaxule, Hatcheuxhau, Hatchichapa, 
Hillabi, Hlanudshiapala, Hlaphlako, 
Hlahlokalka, Huhliwahli, Ikanachaka, 
Ikanhatki, Imukfa, Ipisoga, Istapoga, 
Istudshilaika, Kailaidshi, Keroff, Kitcho- 
pataki,Kohamutkikatska, Kulumi, Kusa, 
Littefutchi, Lutchapoga, Massi (?), Muk- 
lassa, New Eufaula, Ninnipaskulgee, 
Niuyaka, Oakfuskee, Oakfuskudshi, 
Okchayi, Okchayudshi, Opilhlako, Os- 
onee (?), Otituchina, Pakan, Talla¬ 
hassee, Pinhoti, Potchushatchi, Saka- 
atatayi, Sambella, Satapo, Sauga- 
atchi, Sukaispoka, Taladega, Talasse, 
Talassehatchi, Talapoosa, Taliposehogy, 
Taluamutchasi, Tukabatchi, Tukabatchi 


BULL. 30] 


CREMATION-CROSS 


365 


Tallahassee, Tukpafka, Tukhtukagi, Tus- 
kegee, Uktahasasi, Ullibahali, Wakokayi, 
Weogufka, Wetumpka, Wewoka, Wok- 
soyudshi. (See also Alibamu.) 

Lower Creek and Hitchiti towns. —Ama- 
kalli, Apalachicola, Apatai, Chatta¬ 
hoochee, Chiaha, Chiahudshi, Chi- 
hlakonini, Chiskatalofa, Chukahlako, 
Cotohautustennuggee, Donally’s Town, 
Ematlochee, Finhalui, Hatchichapa, 
Hihagee, Hlekatska, Hotalihuvana, 
Huhlitaiga, Itahasiwaki, Kasihta, Kaw- 
aiki, Kawita, Nipky, Ocheese, Oc- 
mulgee, Ocon, Oconee, Okitiyakni, 
Osotchi, Savvokli, Sawokliudshi, Se- 
charlecha, Suolanocha, Tamali, and 
Telmocresses. 

Ani'-Gu'sa.— Mooney in 19th Rep. A. B. E., 509, 
1900 (Cherokee name, from Kusa, their principal 
ancient town). Anikoessa. —ten Kate, Reizen in 
N. A., 422, 1885 (Cherokee name). Ani'-Ku'sa. — 
Mooney, op. cit. (alternative form of Cherokee 
name). Copas.— Carver, Trav., map, 1778 (possibly 
the same; see Kopa , the Yuchi name, below). 
Creek Indians.— Craven (1712) in N. C. Col. Rec., I, 
898, 1886. Greek nation.— H. R. Rep. 854, 27th 
Cong., 2d sess., 12, 1842 (misprint). Humasko. — 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 60,1884 (Shawnee 
name, singular). Humaskogi. —Ibid. (pi. form). 
Kopa. —Gatschet, Yuchi MS., B. A. E., 1885 (Yuchi 
name, from ko ‘man,’ pa ‘to burn,’ referring to 
their custom of burning prisoners at the stake). 
Kreeks. —Mandrillon, Spectateur AmOricain, 
map, 1785. Krichos. —Hervas, Ideadell’ Universo, 
xvii, 90, 1784. Krihk.— Gatschet, ini’n (German 
form of several writers). Kusa. —Gatschet, inf’n 
(Cherokee name, pi. Anikusa; so called after 
Kusa, their earliest center). Ku-u'-sha— Gat¬ 
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 59, 1884 (Wyandot 
name, after Cherokee name). Machecous, — 
Smith, Bouquet’s Exped., 69, 1766 (probably mis¬ 
spelled for Mashcouqui; misspelling handed down 
by Hutchins, Jefferson, and Schoolcraft). Mac- 
ko^e. —Dorsey, Kansas MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 
(Kansa name). Macku'^e.— Dorsey, Osage MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 ((Jsage name). Maskogi.— • 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 59, 1884. Masko- 
kalgi. —Ibid, (own name, plural). Maskoki.— 
Ibid. Maskokulki. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 
411, 1885 (ulki trans. ‘people’). Masquachki.— 
Heckewelder in Barton, New Views, app., 9,1798 
(Delaware name: ‘swampy land’, ‘Swampy- 
landers’). Mobilian.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 22,1855. 
Mo-cko’-ip. —Dorsey, Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1891 (Quapaw name). Moskoky. —Morse, Rep. 
to Sec. War, 311, 1822. Mucogulgee. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, m, 511,1853. Musaogulge. —Ker, Trav¬ 
els, 337,1816 (misprint). Muscagee.— N. Y.Doc. Col. 
Hist., vi, 709, 1855. Muscogee. —Ind. AIT. Rep., 73, 
1849. Muscogeh.— Brinton, Floridian Benin., 144, 
1859. Muscogulges. —Bartram, Travels, 149, 1791. 
Muscoigees.— Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., 

i, 30, 1824. Muscows.— Brinton, Floridian Penin., 
144, 1859. Musgogees.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
I, 134,1851. Muskogee.— Pike, Travels, 159, 1811. 
Muskogolgees. —Nuttall, Jour., 277, 1821. Mus- 
kohge. —Adair, Am. Ind., 257, 1775. Muskoh- 
gee. —Worsley, View of Am. Inds., 95, 1828. Mus- 
kokes. —Smith. Cabe^a de Vaca, 164, note, 1871. 
Mus-koo-gee. —Bol laert i n .1 on r. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 

ii, 265, 1850. Musqua.— Woodward, Reminis¬ 
cences, 13, 1859. Sko'-ki ha n -ya'. —Dorsey, Bi¬ 
loxi MS. Diet., B. A.E., 1892 (Biloxi name). Umash- 
gohak.— Gatschet, inf’n (Fox name). Western 
Indians.— Brinton, Floridian Penin., 144,1859. 

Cremation. See Mortuary customs. 

Crescents. See Banner stones. 

Cristone. A ruined pueblo on Gallinas 
cr., s. of Tierra Amarilla, n. w. N. Mex.— 
Cope in Wheeler Survey Rep., vii, 355, 
1879. 


Croatan. A village in 1585 on an island 
then called by the same name, which 
appears to have been that on which C. 
Lookout is situated, on the coast of Car¬ 
teret co., N. C. The inhabitants seem 
to have been independent of the chiefs 
of Secotan. It is thought that the lost 
colony of Lane, on Roanoke id., joined 
them and that traces of the mixture 
were discernible in the later Hatteras In¬ 
dians. (j. M.) 

Croatan. —Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia, 
I, 92, repr. 1819. Croatoan. —Strachey (ca. 1612), 
Virginia, 43,145,1849. Crooton.— Lane, op. cit., 86. 

Croatan Indians. The legal designa¬ 
tion in North Carolina for a people evi¬ 
dently of mixed Indian and white 
blood, found in various e. sections of the 
state, but chiefly in Robeson co., and 
numbering approximately 5,000. For 
many years they were classed with the 
free negroes, but steadily refused to ac¬ 
cept such classification or to attend the 
negro schools or churches, claiming to be 
the descendants of the early native tribes 
and of white settlers who had intermar¬ 
ried with them. About 20 years ago 
their claim was officially recognized and 
they were given a separate legal existence 
under the title of “Croatan Indians,” on 
the theory of descent from Raleigh’s lost 
colony of Croatan (q. v.). Under this 
name they now have separate school 
provision and are admitted to some privi¬ 
leges not accorded to the negroes. The 
theory of descent from the lost colony 
may be regarded as baseless, but the 
name itself serves as a convenient label for 
a people who combine in themselves the 
blood of the wasted native tribes, the 
early colonists or forest rovers, the run¬ 
away slaves or other negroes, and prob¬ 
ably also of stray seamen of the Latin 
races from coasting vessels in the West 
Indian or Brazilian trade. 

Across the line in South Carolina are 
found a people, evidently of similar 
origin, designated “Redbones.” In por¬ 
tions of w. N. C. and e. Tenn. are found 
the so-called “Melungeons” (probably 
from French melange , ‘mixed’) or “Por¬ 
tuguese,” apparently an offshoot from 
the Croatan proper, and in Delaware are 
found the “Moors.” All of these are 
local designations for peoples of mixed 
race with an Indian nucleus differing in 
no way from the present mixed-blood 
remnants known as Pamunkey, Chicka- 
hominy, and Nansemond Indians in Vir¬ 
ginia, excepting in the more complete 
loss of their identity. In general, the 
physical features and complexion of the 
persons of this mixed stock incline more 
to the Indian than to the white or negro. 
See Metis, Mixed bloods. (j. m. ) 

Cross. This symbol or device, which 
in some of its familiar forms is known as 


366 


CROSS 


[ B. A. E. 





the swastika, was in common use all over 
America in pre-Columbian times. N. of 
the Rio Grande it assumed many forms, 
had varied significance and use, and 
doubtless originated in many different 
ways. Some of these ways may be briefly 
suggested: (1) 
Primitive man 
adjusts him¬ 
self to his 
environment, 
real and imagi¬ 
nary, by keep¬ 
ing in mind 
the cardinal 
points as he 
understands 
them. When 
the Indian 

navaho Altar-floor Symbol of the Four -considers the 

WORLD-QUARTERS. (j. STEVENSOn) WOrld abOUt 

him he thinks of it as divided into the 
four quarters, and when he communi¬ 
cates with the mysterious beings and 
powers with which his imagination peo¬ 
ples it—the rulers of the winds and 
rains—he turns his face to the four direc¬ 
tions in stipulated 
order and addresses 
them to make his ap¬ 
peals and his offer¬ 
ings. Thus his wor¬ 
ship, his ceremonies, 
his games, and even 
his more ordinary oc¬ 
cupations in many 
cases are arranged to 
conform to the cardi¬ 
nal points,and the va¬ 
rious symbolic repre¬ 
sentations associated with them assume 
the form of the cross (see Color symbolism, 
Orientation ). This w T as and is true of many 
peoples and is well illustrated in the won¬ 
derful altar paintings of the tribes of the 
arid region (see Dry-painting). Such 
crosses, although an 
essential part of 
symbolism and reli¬ 
gious ceremony, ex¬ 
ist only for the pur¬ 
poses of the occasion 
and are brushed 
away when the cer¬ 
emony is ended, but 
nevertheless they 
pass into permanent 
form as decorations 
of ceremonial ob¬ 
jects— as pottery, 
basketry, and costumes—retaining their 
significance indefinitely. (2) Distinct 
from the crosses thus derived in form and 
significance are those having a pictorial 
origin; such are the conventional delinea¬ 
tions of animal and vegetal forms or their 
markings, or those representing the cos¬ 


Shell Gorget with figure of 
Spider and Conventional¬ 
ized Cross marking. (2-5) 


Navaho Basket Tray with 
Crosses Representing the 
Four World-quarters and 
Stars or Clouds. (1-15) 


mic bodies, as the sun and the stars, par, 
ticularly the morning and evening stars- 
as among the tribes of the S. W. These fig¬ 
ures, generally very simple in form, may 
be symbols of mythic powers 
and personages; and when used 
in non-symbolic art they may 
in time lose the symbolic char¬ 
acter and remain in art as mere 
formal decorative patterns. (3) 
Distinct from these again are a 
large class of crosses and cross¬ 
like forms which have an ad¬ 
ventitious origin, being the re¬ 
sult of the combined mechan¬ 
ical and esthetic requirements 
of embellishment. In nearly 
all branches of art in which 
surface ornament is an impor¬ 
tant factor the spaces availa¬ 
ble for decorative designs are 
squares, rectangles, circles, and 
ovals, or are borders or zones 
which are divided into squares 
or parallelograms for ready treatment. 
When simple figures, symbolic or non- 
symbolic, are filled into these spaces, they 
are introduced, not singly, since the result 
would be unsatisfac¬ 
tory from the point 
of view of the deco¬ 
rator; not in pairs, 
as that would be lit¬ 
tle better, but in 
fours, thus filling 
the spaces evenly 
and symmetrically. 

This quadruple ar- 
rangem ent in a mu 1- 
titude of cases pro- 
duces the cross 
which, although a 
pseudo cross, is not always to be distin¬ 
guished from the cross symbol. The sep¬ 
arate elements in such crosses may be 
figures of men, insects, mountains, clouds, 
frets, and scrolls, or w r hat 
not, and of themselves 
symbolic, but the cross 
thus produced is an acci¬ 
dent and as a cross is 
withoutsignificance. (4) 
In very many cases de¬ 
signs are invented by the 
primitive decorator who 
fills the available spaces 
to beautify articles man¬ 
ufactured, and the ar¬ 
rangement in fours is of¬ 
ten the most natural and 
effective that can be de¬ 
vised* These designs, 
primarilynonsignificant, 
may have meanings read into them by the 
woman as she works the stitches of her 
basketry or beadwork, or by others sub¬ 
sequently, and these ideas may be wholly 



Silver Cross (roman 
Catholic) from a 
Mound in Wisconsin; 
1 -s. (thomas) 



Pima Basket with Pseudo Cross 
(swastika) Formed Adventi¬ 
tiously of the Interspaces of 
Four Scroll-fret Units. (1-12) 



Cross Formed 
by the orna¬ 
mental Ar¬ 
rangement of 
Four Tipi Fig¬ 
ures on AN 
Arapaho Medi¬ 
cine-case Lid. 
(kroeber) 


























BULL. 30] 


CROSSW EEKSUNG-CROWS 


367 


distinct from those associated with the 
cross through any other means. 

It is thus seen that the cross naturally 
and freely finds its way into the art of 
primitive peoples, and that it may have 
great variety of form and diversity of 
meaning. There seems no reason what¬ 
ever for supposing that the cross of the 
American aborigines, in any of its phases, 
is derived from the cross of the Old 
World, or that the ideas associated with 
it are at all analogous with those that 
cluster about the Christian cross. It is 
well known, however, that the Christian 
cross was introduced everywhere among 
the American tribes by the conquerors 
and colonists as a symbol of the religion 
which they sought to introduce, and be¬ 
ing adopted by the tribes it is embodied 
to some extent in the post-Columbian 
native art. Crosses of silver, such as 
w T ere commonly worn as pendants on 
rosaries, are frequently recovered from 
mounds and burial places of the abo¬ 
rigines. 

Consult Barrett in Am. Anthrop., vii, 
no 4,1905; Beauchamp in Bull. 73, N. Y. 
State Mus., 1903; Blake, The Cross, An¬ 
cient and Modern, 1888; Brinton in Proc. 
Am. Philos. Soc., xxvi, 1889; .T.O. Dorsey 
(1) in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894, (2) in The 
Archaeologist, 1894; Fletcher in Rep. Pea¬ 
body Mus., hi, 1884; Holmes (1) in 20th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1903, (2) in Am. Anthrop., 
ii, 1889; Jones in Smithson. Rep. 1881, 
1883; Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xvm, 1902; McAdams, Records of 
Ancient Races, 58, 1887; Stevenson in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1891; Tookerin Am. Antiq., 
xx, no. 6,1898; Wilson in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1894, 1896. (*w. h. h. ) 

Crossweeksung (‘the house of separa¬ 
tion’ (?).—Boudinot). A former Dela¬ 
ware village in Burlington co., N. J., 
probably about the present Crosswicks. 
A mission was established there by 
Brainerd in 1745. (j. m. ) 

Crossweeckes. —Doc. of 1674 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ii, 682, 1858. Crossweeksung.—Boudinot, Star in 
the West, 278, 1816. Crosweek.—Ibid.,117. 

Croton-bug. The water cockroach 
(Blatta germanica ), from Croton, the name 
of a river in Westchester co., N. Y., 
which has been applied also to the metro¬ 
politan reservoir system. Tooker con¬ 
siders the word a personal name and de¬ 
rives it from kloltin , in the Delaware 
dialect of Algonquian, signifying ‘ he 
contends.’ (a. f. c.) 

Crow Dog ( Kangisunka ). An Oglala 
Sioux chief. He took no prominent part 
in the Sioux war of 1876, but in 1881 he 
shot Spotted Tail in a brawl, and for 
this was tried before a jury and sentenced 
to be hanged, but the United States Su¬ 
preme Court ordered his release on habeas 
corpus, ruling that the Federal courts had 


no jurisdiction over crimes committed on 
reservations secured to Indian tribes by 
treaty. Other deeds attested his fearless 
nature, and when the Ghost-dance craze 
emboldened the Oglala to go upon the 
warpath, angered by a new treaty cutting 
down their reservation and rations, Crow 
Dog was one of the leaders of the desper¬ 
ate band that fled from Rosebud agency 
to the Bad-lands and defied Gen. J. A. 
Brooke’s brigade. He was inclined to 
yield when friendlies came to persuade 
them, and when the irreconcilables 
caught up their rifles to shoot the waver- 
ers he drew his blanket over his head, 
not wishing, as he said, to know who 
would be guilty of slaying a brother 
Dakota. When the troops still refrained 
from attacking, and the most violent of 
his companions saw the hopelessness of 
their plight, he led his followers back to 
the agency toward the close of Dec., 
1890. (f. h. ) 

Crowmocker (transl. of Kdg'-ahyells'J$, a 
chief’s name). A former Cherokee set¬ 
tlement on Battle cr., which falls into 
Tennessee r. below Chattanooga, Tenn. 

(j. m. ) 

Crow Mockers Old Place.—Royce in 5th Rep. B. 
A. E., map, 1887. 

Crow People. A division of the Crows, 
distinguished from the Minesetperi.— 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 
1851. 

Crows (trans., through French gens des 
corbeaux, of their own name, Absaroke, 
crow, sparrowhawk, or bird people). A 
Siouan tribe forming part of the Hidatsa 
group, their separation from the Hidatsa 
having taken place, as Matthews (1894) 
believed, within the last 200 years. 
Hayden, following their tradition, placed 
it about 1776. According to this story 
it was the result of a factional dispute 
between two chiefs who were desper¬ 
ate men and nearly equal in the num¬ 
ber of their followers. They were then 
residing on Missouri r., and one of the two 
bands which afterward became the Crows 
withdrew and migrated to the vicinity of 
the Rocky mts., through which region 
they continued to rove until gathered on 
reservations. Since their separation from 
the Hidatsa their history has been similar 
to that of most tribes of the plains, one 
of perpetual war with the surrounding 
tribes, their chief enemies being the 
Siksika and the Dakota. At the time of 
the Lewis and Clark expedition (1804) 
they dwelt chiefly on Bighorn r.; 
Brown (1817) located them on the Yel¬ 
lowstone and the e. side of the Rocky 
mts.; Drake (1834) on the s. branch of 
the Yellowstone, in lat. 46°, long. 105°. 
Hayden (1862) wrote: “The country 
usually inhabited by the Crows is in and 
near the Rocky mts., along the sources of 


368 


CROWS 


[B, a. e. 




river, as far as the source of the Mussel¬ 
shell and as low down as the mouth of 
the Yellowstone.” 

According to Maximilian (1843) the 
tipis of the Crows were exactly like those 
of the Sioux, set up without any regular 
order, and on the poles, instead of scalps 
were small pieces of colored cloth, chiefly 
red, floating like streamers in the wind. 
The camp he visited swarmed with wolf¬ 
like dogs. They were a wandering tribe 
of hunters, making no plantations except 
a few small patches of tobacco. They 
lived at that time in some 400 tents and 
are said to have possessed between 9,000 
and 10,000 horses. Maximilian consid¬ 
ered them the proudest of Indians, de¬ 
spising the whites; “they do not, how¬ 
ever, kill them, but often plunder them.” 
In stature and dress they corresponded 
with the Hidatsa, and were proud of their 
long hair. The women have been de¬ 
scribed as skilful in various kinds of 
work, and their shirts and dresses of big¬ 
horn leather, as well as ther buffalo robes, 
embroidered and ornamented with dyed 
porcupine quills, as particularly hand¬ 
some. The men made their weapons 
very well and with much taste, especially 
their large bows, covered with horn of 


of hunting and roaming near the moun¬ 
tains away from Missouri r., the latter 
from the fact that they left the mountain 
section about 1859 and occupied the 


Powder, Wind, and Bighorn rs., on the 
s. side of the Yellowstone, as far as Lara¬ 
mie fork on the Platte r. They are also 
often found on the w. and n. side of that 


CROW MAN 


the elk or bighorn and often with rattle¬ 
snake skin. The Crows have been de¬ 
scribed as extremely superstitious, very 
dissolute, and much given to unnatural 
practices; they are skilful horsemen, 
throwing themselves on one side in their 
attacks, as is done by many Asiatic tribes. 
Their dead were usually placed on stages 
elevated on poles in the prairie. 

The population was estimated by Lewds 
and Clark (1804) at 350 lodges and 3,500 
individuals; in 1829 and 1834, at 4,500; 
Maximilian (1843) counted 400 tipis; 
Hayden (1862) said there were formerly 
about 800 lodges or families, in 1862 re¬ 
duced to 460 lodges. Their number in 
1890 was-2,287; in 1904, 1,826. Lewis 
(Stat. View, 1807) said they were divided 
into four bands, called by themselves 
Ahaharopirnopa, Ehartsar, Noota, and 
Pareescar. Culbertson (Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 144, 1851) divides the tribe into (1) 
Crow People, and (2) Minesetperi, or 
Sapsuckers. These two divisions he sub¬ 
divides into 12 bands, giving as the names 
only the English equivalents. Morgan 
(Anc. Soc., 159,1877) gives the following 
bands: Achepabecha, Ahachik, Ashina- 
dea, Ashbochiah, Ashkanena, Booadasha, 
Esachkabuk, Esekepkabuk, Hokarutcha, 
Ohotdusha, Oosabotsee, Petchaleruhpaka, 
and Shiptetza. 

The Crows have been officially classified 
as Mountain Crows and River Crows, the 
former so called because of their custom 


CROW WOMAN 








BULL. 30 J 


CROW TOWN-CUBERO 


369 


country along the river. There was no 
ethnic, linguistic, or other difference be¬ 
tween them. The Mountain Crows num¬ 
bered 2,700 in 1871 and the River Crows 
1,400 (Pease in Ind. Aff. Rep., 420, 1871). 
Present aggregate population, 1,826. See 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 
1832; Maximilian, Trav., 1843; Dorsey 
in 11th and 15th Reps. B. A. E., 1894, 
1897; McGee in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; 
Simms, Traditions of the Crows, 1903. 

Absaraka. —Brackett, Absaraka MS. vocab., 
B. A. E.. 2879. Absarakos. —Warren, Nebr. and 
Ariz., 50. 1875. Absaroka.— Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, i, 259, 1851. Ab-sar'-o-kas. —Morgan in N. 
Am. Rev., 47,1870. Absarokes. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, I, 528, 1851. Absaroki. —Am. Natur.,829, 
1882. Absoroka. —Drake. Bk. Inds., x, 1848. A-i- 
nun'.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 
326, 1862 (‘Crow people’: Arapaho name). Ap- 
sah-ro-kee.— Bonner, Life of Beckwourtn, 298, 
1856(trans. :‘sparrowhawk people’). Apsarraka. — 
Everette in Pilling, Proof Sheets, 942,1885. Apsa- 
ruka. —Maximilian, Tray., 174,1843. Ap-sha-roo- 
kee. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 267, 1905. 
Atsharoke.— Smet, Letters, 51, 1843 (trails, ‘crow’, 
attributed to their robberies). Aub-sa'-ro-ke. — 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 402, 
1862 (own name: ‘anything that flies’). Cor- 
beaus.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 103, 1905. 
Corbeaux. —Perrin du Lac, Voy. dans les Louis- 
ianes, 337,1805. Crow Indians.— Orig. Jour. Lewis 
and Clark, I, 189, 1904. De Corbeau. —Clark (1804) 
in Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 130, 1904. de 
Curbo. —Ibid. Gensdes Corbeau. —Lewis and Clark, 
Discov., 41, 1806 (French name). Hahderuka. — 
Maximilian, Trav., 174, 1843 (Mandan name). 
Haideroka. —Ibid. (Hidatsa name). Hapsa-ro- 
kay.— Gebow, Sho-sho-nay Vocab., 8, 1868 (Sho- 
shoni name). Hapsaroke. —Burton,City of Saints, 
151, 1861. Hounena.— A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 
(Arapahoname: ‘crowmen’). I-sa-po'-a. —Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.Valley, 264,1862 (Sik- 
sika name). Issappo'. —Tims, Blackfoot Gram, 
and Diet., 125, 1889 (Siksika name; sing. Issftppo'- 
ekuhn). Kangitoka. —Iapi Oaye, xm, no. 9, 33, 
1884 (Yankton name: ‘raven foes’). Kaij-gi'-wi- 
ca-sa.— Cook, MS. Yankton vocab., B. A. E., 184, 
1882. Ka'-xi.— Dorsey, Winnebago MS., B.A.E., 
1886(Winnebagoname). Kee'-hat-sa. —Orig.Jour. 
Lewis and Clark, vi, 103, 1905. Keeheet-sas. — 
M’Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis and Clark, i, map, 
1842. Kee'-kat'-sa. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 41, 
1806. KiHnatsa. —Matthews,Hidatsa Inds., 39,1877 
(Hidatsa name: ‘ they who refused the paunch’). 
Kikastas. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 518, 
1878. Kiqatsa. —Am. Naturalist, 829, Oct., 1882. 
Kite. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 130, 1904 
(De Corbeau or). Kokokiwak.— Gatschet, Fox MS., 
B. A. E., 1882 (Fox name). Long Haired Indians. — 
Sanford, U. S., clxvii, 1819. O-e'-tun'-i-o.— Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 290, 1862 
(Cheyenne name). 0-tun-nee. —Bonner, Life of 
Beckwourth, 452,1856 (Cheyenne name: ‘crow’). 
Par-is-ca-oh-p&n-ga. —Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., 
ir,lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name: ‘crow people’). 
Ravin Indians.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 
220, 1904. Steamtshi. —Hoffman in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., 371, 1886 (Salish name). Stemchi.— 
Giorda, Kalispelm Diet., pt. 2, 81, 1879 (Kalispel 
name). Stemtchi. —Gatscnet, Salish MS., B. A. E., 
1884 (Salish name). Stimk.— Gatschet,Okinagin 
MS., B.A.E.,1884(Okinagan name). TJpsaraukas. — 
Browne in Beach, Ind. Miscel.,83,1877. Upsaro- 
cas.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 470, 1878. 
Up -s&-ro-ka.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, lxxix, 
1823 (own name). Up-shar-look-kar. —Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark (1806), v, 21, 1905 (Chopunnish 
name). Upsook. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 
181,1854. Up-sor-ah-kay.— Anon. CrowMS.vocab., 
B. A. E. Yax-ka'-a.— Gatschet, Wandot MS., B. 
A. E.,1881 (Wyandot name: ‘crow’). 

Crow Town (trans. of Kdgunyi, ‘ crow 
place,’ from kd'gti ‘crow,’ yi locative). 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-24 


A former Cherokee town on the left 
bank of Tennessee r., near the mouth of 
Raccoon cr., Cherokee co., n. e. Ala. 
It was one of the so-called “five lower 
towns” built by those Cherokee, called 
Chickamauga, who were hostile to the 
American cause during the Revolutionary 
period, and whose settlements farther up 
the river had been destroyed by Sevier 
and Campbell in 1782. The population 
of Crow Town and the other lower set¬ 
tlements was augmented by Creeks, Shaw¬ 
nee, and white Tories until it reached a 
thousand warriors. The towns were de¬ 
stroyed in 1794. See Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 54, 1900. 

Crow-wing. Mentioned by Neill (Hist. 
Minn., 386, 1858) as one of the Chippewa 
bands that took part in the treaty of 
1826. There was a village of the same 
name at the mouth of Crow Wing r., in 
n. central Minnesota, which was the 
home of Hole-in-the-Day in 1838. 

Cuaburidurch. A former Maricopa 
rancheria on the Rio Gila, Ariz.; visited 
by Father Sedelmair in 1744.—Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Cuactataugh. A village, probably be¬ 
longing to the Patuxent, on the e. bank 
of Patuxent r., in Anne Arundel co., Md., 
in 1608.—Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, 
repr. 1819. 

Cuampis. Mentioned as a division of 
the Faraon Apache. 

Cuampes. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Cuam¬ 
pis. —Villa Sen or y Sanchez, Theatro Am., n, 
413, 1748. 

Cuanrabi. Given as the name of a Hopi 
village in 1598 in connection with Naybf 
(Oraibe), Xumupamf (Shumopovi), and 
Esperiez (Onate, 1598, in Doc. Ined., xvi, 
137,1871) . Not identified. 

Cubac. A former rancheria,' probably 
of the Papago, visited by Father Garc6s 
in 1771; situated in the neighborhood of 
San Francisco Atf, w. from the present 
Tucson, s. Ariz. Distinct from Tubac. 
Cubac. —Arricivita (1791) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 387, 1889. Cubic. —Orozco, y 
Berra, Geog., 348, 1864. 

Cubero (from Pedro Rodriguez Cubero, 
governor of New Mexico, 1697-1703). 
Formerly a pueblo, established in 1697 
by rebel Queres from Santo Domingo, 
Cieneguilla, and Cochiti, 14 m. n. of Aco- 
ma, at the site of the present town of that 
name in New Mexico. It was probably 
abandoned in the early part of the 18th 
century (Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
221, 1889). According to Laguna tradi¬ 
tion Cubero was formerly a pueblo of the 
Laguna and Acoma people, who were 
driven out by the Mexican colonists a 
century ago. (f. w. h.) 

Covera.— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 281, 1889 
(or Cubero). Covero.— Emory, Recon., 133,1848. 
Cubero. —Bancroft, op. cit. Cuvarro. —Hughes, 
Doniphan’s Exped., 149,1848. Govero. —Eastman, 
map in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 24-25, 1854. 
Punyeestye. —Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 83,1891. 


370 


CUBO GUASIBAYIA-CUEVA PINT AD A 


[b. a. e. 


Punyits? ama, —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 
(Laguna name). 

Cubo Guasibavia. A former rancheria, 
apparently Papago, visited by Kino and 
Mange in 1701; situated in a volcanic 
desert in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, between 
the Rio Salado and the Gulf of California, 
2 m. from the shore. 

Cubo Guasibavia.— Kino (1701) quoted by Bancroft, 
No. Mex. States, I, 495, 1884. Duburcopota.— Ibid. 

Cucamonga. A former Gabrieleno ran-' 
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 

Coco Mongo. —Pac. R. R. Rey>., in, pt. 3, 34, 1856. 
Cucamungabit. —Caballeria, Hist. San Bernardino 
Val., 1905. Cucomogna.— Ried (1852) quoted by 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8,1860. 

Cuchendado. A Texas tribe, the last 
that Cabeza de Yaca met before he left the 
Gulf coast to continue inland.—Cabeza 
de Vaca, Nar. (1542), Smith trans., 137, 
1871. 

Cuchillones (Span: ‘knifers,’ ‘knife 
people’). A former Costanoan division 
or village e. of San Francisco bay, Cal. 
In 1795, according to Fngelhardt (Fran¬ 
ciscans in Cal., 1897), they became in¬ 
volved in a quarrel with the neophytes of 
San Francisco mission, whereupon their 
rancheria was attacked by the Spaniards. 
Cuchian. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Cuchiyaga (‘ place where there has been 
suffering’). A former Calusa village on 
one of the keys on the s. w. coast of Flor¬ 
ida, about 1570. 

Cuchiaga.— Fontaneda (ca. 1575) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., 2d s., ir, 256, 1875. Cuchiyaga. —Fonta¬ 
neda, Mem., Smith trans., 19, 1854. 

Cucho. An Indian province or settle¬ 
ment of New Mexico, noted, with Cibola 
(Zuni), Cicuich (Pecos), and others, in 
Ramusio, Nav. et Viaggi, iii, 455, map, 
1565. Probably only another form of 
Cicuich or Cicuye, duplication being com¬ 
mon in early maps of the region. 

Cuchuta. A former Opata pueblo and 
the seat of a Spanish mission founded in 
1653; situated in n. e. Sonora, Mexico, 
near Fronteras; pop. 227 in 1678, 58 in 
1730. It was abandoned on account of 
depredations by the Suma and Jano, war¬ 
like Mexican tribes. 

Chu-ui-chu-pa.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, 59, 1890 (same?). Cuchuta. —Doc. of 1730 cited 
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, 1,514,1884. San Fran¬ 
cisco Javier Cuchuta. —Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 4th s., in, 369, 1857. 

Cuchuveratzi (‘valley or torrent of the 
fish called matalote [the Gila trout].’ — 
Bandelier). A former Opata settlement 
a few miles n. e. of Fronteras, on the 
headwaters of the Rio Bavispe, in the 
n. e. corner of Sonora, Mexico.—Bande¬ 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 520, 1892. 

Cuclon. Given as a Cherokee town in a 
document of 1799 (Royce in 5th Rep. 
B. A. E., 144, 1887). Not identified. 

Cucoomphers. Mentioned as a tribe liv¬ 
ing in the mountains near Mohave r., s. e. 
Cal., not speaking the same language as 


the Mohave or the Paiute (Antisell in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., vii, 104, 1854). They 
were perhaps Serranos. 

Cucompners. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Jan. 31, 1862 
(misprint). 

Cuculato. A Yuman tribe living w. of 
lower Rio Colorado in 1701, when they 
were visited by Father Kino. Consag 
(1746) classes them with the gulf or 
southern divisions of the Cocopa. 

Cuculato. —Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 58, 1759. Cucu- 
lutes. —Taylor in Browne, Res. Pac. Slope, app., 
54, 1869. 

Cucurpe. A Eudeve pueblo, contain¬ 
ing also some Tegui Opata, and the seat 
of a Spanish mission subordinate tc Ari- 
vechi, founded in 1647; situated on the 
headwaters of the Rio San Miguel de 
Horcasitas, the w. branch of the Rio 
Sonora, Mexico, about 25 m. s. e. of Mag¬ 
dalena. Pop. 329 in 1678, 179 in 1730. 
It is still inhabited by Opata. (f. w. h. ) 
Cucurpe.— Doc. of 1730 "cited by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, I, 513, 1884. Cucurpo.— Kino, map 
(1702) in Stocklein, Neue Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. 
Reyes de Cucurpe. —Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 4th s., Ill, 344,1857. Santos Reyes Cucurpe. — 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 245, 1884. 

Cudurimuitac. A former Maricopa ran¬ 
cheria on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz., visited 
by Father Sedelmair in 1744.—Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 366, 1889. 

Cuercomache. Apparently a division or 
rancheria of the Yavapai on one of the 
heads of Diamond cr., near the Grand 
Canyon of the Colorado, Ariz., in the 
18th century. They lived n. e. of the 
Mohave, of whom they were enemies, 
and are said to have spoken the same 
language as the Havasupai. (f. w. h. ) 
Yabipais Cuercomaches. —Garc6s (1776), Diary, 231, 
410, 1900. Yavipai cuercomache. —Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 41, 1864 (after Garc6s). 

Cuerno Verde (Span.: ‘green horn’). 
A celebrated Comanche warrior who led 
various raids against the Spanish settle¬ 
ments along the Rio Grande in New 
Mexico in the latter part of the 18th cen¬ 
tury. A force of 645 men, including 85 
soldiers and 259 Indians, was led against 
him by Juan de Anza, governor of New 
Mexico, in 1778, and in a fight that took 
place 95 leagues n. e. of Santa Fe, Cuerno 
Verde was killed, together with 4 of his 
subchiefs, his “high priest,” his eldest 
son, and 32 of his warriors. His name 
is commemorated in Greenhorn r. and 
mt., Colo. (f. w. h. ) 

Cueva Pintada (Span.: ‘painted cave,’ 
on account of numerous pictographs on 
its walls). A natural cave in the s. wall 
of the Potrero de las Yacas, about 25 m. 
w. of Santa Fe, N. Mex., anciently used 
for ceremonial purposes and still one of 
the points to which ceremonial pilgrim¬ 
ages are made by the Queres. A few 
cliff-dwellings of the excavated type occur 
near by in the face of the cliff overlook¬ 
ing the Canada de la Cuesta Colorada. 
The small excavated rooms within and 


BULL. 30] 


CUIAPAIPA-CUMUMBAH 


371 


about the rim of the cave were probably 
not used for places of abode, but rather 
as shrines where idols and other ceremon¬ 
ial objects were deposited. ( e. l. h. ) 
Tse-ki-a-tan-yi.— Lummis in Scribner’s Mag., 96, 
1893. Tsikyati tans’. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 
1895. Tzek-iat-a-tanyi. —Bandelier, in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, iv, 156, 1892 (Queres name). 

Cuiapaipa. A rancheria and reservation 
of 36 Mission Indians in s. California. 
Their land, consisting of 880 acres, is an 
unproductive waterless tract 125 m. from 
Mission Tule River agency. 

Cuiapaipa.— Lummis in Out West, xxi, 578, 1904. 
Cuyapipa.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902. Cuyapipe — 
Lummis, op. cit. (given as common but incorrect 
form). Guaypipa.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 146, 1903. 

Cuirimpo. A Mayo settlement on the 
Rio Mayo, between Navajoa and Echojoa, 
s. w. Sonora, Mexico. 

Concepcion Cuirimpo. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 356, 
1864. Corimpo. —Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, 
Neue Welt-Bott, 1726. Couirimpo, —Orozco y Berra, 
op. cit., map. Curinghoa.— Hardy, Travels, 438, 
1829. 

Cuitciabaqui. A former rancheria of the 
Papago, visited by Father Kino in 1697; 
situated on the w. bank of the Rio Santa 
Cruz, in the vicinity of the present Tuc¬ 
son, s. Ariz. According to Father Och a 
mission was established at the Papago set¬ 
tlement of “Santa Catharina” in 1756 b.y 
Father Mittendorf, but he was forced to 
abandon it, evidently shortly afterward, 
on account of cruel treatment by the 
natives. This is doubtless the same. 

(f. w. h. ) 

S. Catharina,— Och (1756), Nachrichten, I, 71, 1809. 
Sta. Catalina. —Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex.,360,1889. Sta Catalina Cuitciabaqui. — 
Bernal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, ibid., 356. Sta. 
Catarina. —Mange, ibid., 358. Sta Catarina Caitua- 
gaba. —Ibid. 

Cuitoas. A tribe mentioned in connec¬ 
tion with the Escanjaques (Kansa). 
Their habitat and identity are unknown.— 
Duro, Don Diego de Penalosa, 57, 1882. 

Cuitoat. A former settlement, evi¬ 
dently of the Papago, between San Xavier 
del Bac and Gila r., s. Ariz; visited by 
Father Garces in 1775. The name has 
been confused with Aquitun. 

Cuitoa.— Font (1775) quoted by Coues, Garc^sDiary, 

' i, 84,1900. Cuitoat.— Arricivita, Cr6nica Seraf., II, 
416,1792. Cuytoa.— Font, op cit. Quitcac. —Coues, 
op cit. Quitoa. —Garc6s (1775), Diary, 65, 1900. 
Quitoac. —Ibid., 64. 

Cujant. Apparently a former Papago 
rancheria in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, between 
the mouth of the Gila and the settlement 
of Sonoita in 1771.—Coues, Garc6s Diary, 
37, 1900. 

Cultus-cod. A name of the blue, or 
buffalo, cod ( Ophiodon elongatus), an im¬ 
portant food fish of the Pacific coast from 
Santa Barbara to Alaska; so called from 
cultus, signifying ‘worthless,’ in the Chi¬ 
nook jargon, a word ultimately derived 
from the Chinook dialect of the Chinook- 
an stock and in frequent use on the Pacific 
coast. (a. f. c.) 


Cumaro. A Papago village in s. Arizona, 
near the Sonora border, having 200 families 
in 1871. 

Camaro.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 135,1865. Cumaro.— Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863. Cumera.— 
Browne, Apache Country, 291, 1869 (misquoting 
Poston). Cumero. —Poston in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 
385,1864. Del Cumero. —Bailey, ibid., 208,1858. 

Cummaquid. A village subject to the 
Wampanoag, formerly at Cummaquid 
harbor, Barnstable co., Mass. Qyan- 
nough, from whom Hyannis takes its 
name, was chief in 1621-23. Hyanaes 
village still existed in 1755. (j. m. ) 

Cummaquid.— Mourt (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., ix, 53,1822. Hyanaes. —Douglass, Sum¬ 
mary, i, 188,1755. Wayanaes, —Ibid. 

Cumpa. Located as a Navaho settle¬ 
ment by Pike (Exped., 3d map, 1810). 
It is more likely either the name of a lo¬ 
cality or a confounding of the Kwium- 
pus division of the Paiute of s. w. Utah. 

Cumpus. A Teguima Opata pueblo and 
the seat of a Spanish mission founded 
in 1644; situated on the Rio Soyopa (or 
Moctezuma), n. of Oposura, lat. 30° 20', 
n. e. Sonora, Mexico. Pop. 887 in 1678, 
146 in 1730. 

Asuncion Amipas. —Doc. of 1730 quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, 246, 1884 (or Comupas). 
Comupas.— Ibid. Cumpas.— Hardy, Travels, 437, 
1829. Cumupas.— Ribas (1645) quoted by Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 58,1890. 

Cumshewa (corrupted from Go'mshewa, 
or Gd'msewa , the name of its chief). A 
former Haida town at the n. entrance of 
Cumshewa inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col. By the natives it was known 
as Hlkenul. It was almost entirely occu¬ 
pied by the Stawas-haidagai, q. v. Accord¬ 
ing to John Work’s estimate, 1836-41, 
there w T ere then 20 houses in the place 
and 286 people. This agrees closely with 
that still given by Cumshewa people as 
the former number. Cumshewa was one 
of the last towns abandoned when all the 
Indians of this region went to Skidegate.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 
Casswer.— Downie in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi, 
251, 1861. Comshewars.— Dunn, Hist. Oreg., 281, 
1844. Crosswer.— Downie, op. cit. Cumshawas.— 
Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xi, 219, 1841. 
Cumshewa.— Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168 b, 1880. 
Cumshewes.— Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
1,233,1848. Cumshuwaw. —Can. Ind. Aff., 128,1879. 
Gumshewa.— Deans, Tales from Hidery, 82, 1899. 
Kit-ta-was.— Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168, 1880 
(Tsimshian name). Koumchaouas.— Duflot de 
Mofras, Oreg., I, 337, 1844. Kumshahas.— Latham 
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Kumshe- 
wa- Dawson, op. cit., 168. Kumshiwa.— Tolmie 
and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 26, 1884. 
ike'nAl. —Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279,1905 (Haida 
name). Tlkinool. —Dawson, op. cit., 168 (Haida 
name). 

Cumumbah. A division of the Ute, 
formerly living in Salt Lake, Weber, and 
Ogden valleys, Utah. They are said to 
have been a mixture of Ute and Shoshoni, 
the Ute element largely predominating 
in their language; pop. 800 in 1885. They 
are not now separately enumerated. 
Cawaupugos. —Collins in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 125,1861. 


372 


CUMURIPA—CUQUIAR ACHI 


[B. A. E. 


Cum-i*um*has. —Hurt, ibid., 1856, 230, 1857. Cum- 
min-tahs.— Head, ibid., 149, 1868. Cumpes.- 
Pino, Noticias Hist. N. Mex., 83, 1849. Cumum- 
bah.— West (1858) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 29,37thCong., 
2dsess., 113,1862. Cum-um-pahs— Simpson (1859), 
Exped. Across Utah, 34,460,1876. Cun-i-um-hahs.— 
Hurt in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,228,1857. Kumumbar.— 
Doty in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 175,1865. Treaber 
TJt*s — Hurt in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1855,197,1856 (mis¬ 
print for Weber). Weber River Yutas. —Burton, 
City of Saints, 578,1861. Weber-Utes.—Cooley in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 17,1865. 

Cumuripa. A Nevome pueblo and the 
seat of a Spanish mission founded in 1619; 
situated on the w. tributary of the Rio 
Yaqui, about 12 m. n. n. e. of Buena Vis¬ 
ta, and about 20 m. n. of Cocori, in So¬ 
nora, Mexico; pop. 450 in 1678 and 165 
in 1730, but the village contained only 4 
families in 1849. It is now practically a 
white Mexican town. The inhabitants, 


also called Cumuripa, probably spoke a 
dialect slightly different from the Ne¬ 
vome proper. ( f. w. h. ) 

Comoripa.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Comuripa.— Rivera (1730) 
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 513,1884. 
Cumuripa*— Escudero, Noticias Son. y Sin., 99, 
1849. S. Pablo Comuripa. —Zapata (1678) quoted 
by Bancroft, op. cit., 246. S. Pedro. —Sonora Cat- 
alogo quoted by Bancroft, ibid. 

Cuneil. A tribe, evidently Yuman, de¬ 
scribed by Garc6s in 1775-76 (Diary, 444, 
450, 1900) as inhabiting the territory be¬ 
tween San Diego, s. Cal., and the mouth 
of the Rio Colorado. They were friendly 
with the Cocopa. From their habitat 
and the similarity in their names they 
would seem to be identical with the Com- 
eya, but Garces mentions the latter, under 
the name Quemayd, as if distinct. On 
the map of Father Pedro Font (1777), 
who was a companion of Father Garces, 
the Cuneil are located in n. Lower Califor¬ 
nia, between lat. 31° and 32°. According 
to Gatschet the name Kunyil, or Kuneyil, 
in the Comeya dialect, signifies ‘all men,’ 
‘people.’ (f. w. h.) 

Cunai.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 353, 1864. Cun- 
yeel. —Font (1777),map in Coues, Garc6sDiary,1900. 

Cunitcacahel (‘water of the great 
rocks’). A rancheria, probably Cochimi, 
connected with Purfsima mission, which 
was near the w. coast of Lower California, 
about lat. 26° 20 / .—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., v, 188, 1857. 

Cunquilipinoy. Mentioned as a pueblo 
of the province of Atripuy, in the region 
of the lower Rio Grande, N. Mex., in 
1598.—Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 
115, 1871. 

Cupheag (‘a place shut in,’ from kuppi , 
‘closed’). The Algonquian name of 
Stratford, Fairfield co., Conn. There 
was probably a village of the same name 
there before the English settlement in 
1639.—Benj. Trumbull, Hist. Conn., i, 109, 
1818; J. H. Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 
13, 1881. 

Cuppunaugunnit. Mentioned as if a 
Pequot village in 1637, probably in New 
London co., Conn, 


Cuppunaugunnit. —Williams (1637) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 4th s., VI,201. 1852. Cuppunnaugunnit.— 
Ibid. 

Cups. See Receptacles. 

Cupstones. Blocks of stone unworked 
except for small cavities made in them. 
These cups vary from a rough pecking, 
probably the initial stage, to smooth, 
hemispherical depressions 2 in. in diam¬ 
eter; at the bottom of many of the 
latter is a secondary pit as though made 
with a flint drill or gouge. They range 
in number from 1 to 20, though rarely 
one stone may contain 50 or 100. In a 
majority of cases they are of sandstone. 
On irregular blocks the pits are on one 
side only, extending over less than half 
the surface; on flat slabs they are always 
on both sides. Many theories have been 
advanced to account for these cupstones; 
but while any suggestion may apply to 
a few specimens, it will not fit the ma¬ 
jority. There is a prevalent idea that 
they were used for cracking nuts in, for 
which reason the blocks are sometimes 
called nutstones; but only 
casual inspection is neces¬ 
sary to prove this belief in¬ 
correct. The holes are not 
often on the same level, and 
in any case it would be nec¬ 
essary to pick the 
stone up and turn it 
over each time it was 
used. They are also 
supposed to be for 
grinding paint, or to 
steady drills, spin¬ 
dles, or firesticks; 
but it is evident that 
only one pit could cupstones; Ohio, (i-io) 
be used at a time for any of these pur¬ 
poses. Undoubtedly the real explana¬ 
tion awaits determination. Cupstones 
are the most abundant and widespread 
of the larger relics. They not only occur 
on many village sites but are scattered at 
random over the country, often in places 
where diligent search fails to disclose ab¬ 
original relics of any other form. See 
Problematical objects. Consult Fowke in 
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Rau in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., v, 1881. (g. f. ) 

Cuquiarachi. A former pueblo of the 
Teguima Opata and the seat of a Spanish 
mission founded in 1653; situated about 
6 m. southward from Fronteras, n. e. 
Sonora, Mexico. Pop. 380 in 1678; 76 in 
1730. When visited by Bartlett in 1850 
it was deserted, apparently on account of 
the Apache. (f. w. h.) 

Cocuiarachi.—Bartlett, Personal Narrative, 1,273, 
1854. Cuquiarachi.—Bandelier in Arch. Hist. 
Papers, iv, 529, 1892 (wrongly identified with 
Fronteras). Cuquiaratzi.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
343, 1864. Cuquiarichi.—Mange (ca. 1700) quoted 
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 233, 1884. Cu- 
quiurachi.—Hamilton, Mexican Handbook, 47, 
1883. San Ignacio Cuqiuarachi.*—Zapata (1678) 
quoted by Bancroft, op. cit., 246, 




BULL. 30] 


CUREPO—CUSIHUIRIACHIC 


373 


Curepo.—A Chinipa rancheria in Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico, in 1601.—Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, i, 211, 1886. 

Curly Head {Babislgandlbe ). A chief 
of the Mississippi (or Sandy lake) Chip¬ 
pewa, born about the middle of the 18th 
century, on the s. shore of L. Superior. 
He removed to the upper Mississippi about 
1800 with a number of the Crane (Businau- 
see) gens, of which he was a member, and 
settled near the site of the present Crow 
Wing, Minn. Here his band was aug¬ 
mented by the bravest warriors and har¬ 
diest hunters of the eastern Chippewa 
until it became a bulwark against the 
Sioux raiders who hitherto had harried 
the Chippewa as far as the shores of L. 
Michigan. The white traders lavished 
gifts upon him, which he freely shared 
with his followers. His lodge was always 
well supplied with meat, and the hungry 
were welcomed. The peace and friend¬ 
ship that generally prevailed between the 
white pioneers and the Chippewa were 
due chiefly to Curly Head’s restraining 
influence. He was visited in 1805 by 
Lieut. Z. M. Pike, who passed the winter 
in his neighborhood. He died while re¬ 
turning from the conference, known as 
the treaty of Prairie du Chien, held Aug. 
19, 1825, in which his name appears as 
“ Babaseekeendase, Curling Hair.” Ac¬ 
cording to Warren (Hist. Ojibway, 47, 
1885) he was both civil and war chief of 
his people. 

Cusabo. A collective term used to 
designate the Combahee, Coosa, Edisto, 
Etiwaw, Kiawaw, St Helena, Stono, 
and Wapoo Indians, formerly living be¬ 
tween Charleston, S. C., and Savannah 
r. Their territory was the Chicora of 
Ayllon and other early Spanish ad¬ 
venturers, and it is probable that some, 
if not most of the tribes mentioned, be¬ 
longed to the Muskhogean stock. They 
early became reduced through the raids 
of Spanish slavers and the connivance 
of the colonists. In Jan., 1715, they 
were reported to number 295 inhabitants 
in 4 villages, but during the Yamasi war 
in that year they and other tribes were 
expelled or exterminated. See Mooney, 
Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 
86,1894. 

Corsaboys.— Doc. of 1719 in Rivers, Hist. S. C., 93, 
1874. Cusabees.— Rivers, Hist. S. C., 38, 1856. 
Cussobos.— Simms, Hist. S. C., 56,1860. 

Cusarare (corruption of Usarare, from 
usdka, ‘eagle’). A small Tarahumare ran¬ 
cheria situated a short distance s. of 
Bocoyna, on the e. slope of the Sierra 
Madre, in lat. 28°, w. Chihuahua, Mex. 
—Lumholtz (1) in Scribner’s Mag., xvi, 
40,1894; (2) Unknown Mex., i, 136,1902. 

Cusawatee ( Kusdwetiyi , ‘old Creek 
place’). A former important Cherokee 
settlement on lower Coosawatee r., in 
Gordon co., Ga. 


Coosawatee.— Mooney, in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 526, 

1900. Coosawaytee.— Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce 
in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887. Kusawetiyl. — 
Mooney, op. cit. (proper Cherokee name). Ten- 
sawattee. —Doc. quoted by Mooney, ibid. 

Cuscarawaoc (‘place of making white 
beads. ’—Tooker). A division of the Nan- 
ticoke; mentioned by Capt. John Smith 
as a tribe or people living at the head 
of Nanticoke r., in Maryland and Del¬ 
aware, and numbering perhaps 800 in 
1608. Their language was different from 
that of the Powhatan, Conestoga, and 
Atquanachuke. Heckewelder believed 
them to be a division of the Nanticoke, 
the correctness of which Bozman (Mary¬ 
land, i, 112-121, 1837) has clearly dem¬ 
onstrated. For a discussion of the name 
see Tooker, Algonquian Series, ix, 65, 

1901. (j. m.) 

Cuscarawaoke. —Simons in Smith(1629),Virginia,I, 
178, repr. 1819. Cuskarawaocks. —Bozman, Mary¬ 
land, i, 110, 1837. Huokarawaocks. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, VI, 131,1857. Kuscarawaoks. —Smith 
(1629), op. cit., 74. Kuscarawocks. —Brinton, Le- 
nape Leg., 23, 1885. Kuskaranaocke. —Prier in 
Purchas, Pilgrimes, IV, 1713,1626. Kuskarawack. — 
Smith’s map (1615) in Purchas, ibid., p. 1692. Nus- 
karawaoks. —Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia,41,1849. 

Cuscatomin. See Kiskitomas. 

Cuscowilla. The principal Seminole 
town on Cusco willa lake, Alachua co., Fla. 
It was established by Creeks from Oconee, 
Ga., who first settled at Alachua Old Town 
but abandoned it on account of its un- 
healthfulness.—Bartram (Travels, 1791) 
found 30 houses there in 1775. 

Cushaw. See Cashaw. 

Cushna. A division of the Maidu on the 
upper waters of the s. fork of Yuba 

r. , Sierra co., Cal.; pop. about 600 in 
1850.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 124, 1850; Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, May 31, 1861. 

Cushook. A band residing in 1806 on 
the e. bank of Willamette r., Oreg., just 
below the falls, their number estimated at 
650. Probably a branch of the Chinookan 
tribe of Clowwewalla. 

Cashhooks. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 233, 
1905. Cashook.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 216, 
1814. Clishhooks. —Cass (1834) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 609,1853. Cushhooks.— Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., II, 474, 1814. Cushhouks.— 
Nouv. Ann. Voy., xir, map, 1821. 

Cushtusha ( Kashlih-asha , ‘fleas are 
there’). A former Choctaw town on the 

s. side of Cushtusha cr., about 3 m. s. w. 
of the old town of Yazoo, Neshoba co., 
Miss.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., 
vi, 431, 1902. 

Castachas.— Charlevoix, Hist. Nouv. France, Shea 
ed., vi, 104, 1872. Cuctachas.— Romans, Florida, 
map, 1775. Custachas. —West Fla. map, ca. 1775. 
Custusha.— Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc. Trans., 73, 
1899. 

Cusihuiriachic (‘where the upright pole 
is’). A former Tarahumare settlement, 
now a white Mexican town, on the head¬ 
waters of the Rio San Pedro, lat. 28° 12', 
long. 106° 50', w. central Chihuahua, 
Mexico. 

Cusihuirachic. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864. 
Cusihuiriachic. —Lumholtz in Scribner’s Mag., 
xvi, 32, July, 1894. 


374 


CUSS EWAGO-CUYAMUS 


[B; A. E. 


Cussewago. A village of the Seneca 
and of remnants of other wandering 
tribes, situated in 1750 where Ft Le Boeuf 
was afterward built, on the site of the 

S resent Waterford, Erie co., Pa. 

asewago.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., X, 259,1858. Cus¬ 
sewago.— Gist (1753) in Mass. Hist. Soc.Coll.,3d s., 
V, 104,1836. 

Custaloga’s Town. The Delawares had 
two villages, each known as Custaloga’s 
Town, from the name of its chief, prob¬ 
ably one and the same person. The first 
village was near French cr., opposite 
Franklin, Venango co., Pa., in 1760; the 
other was on Walhonding r., near Kill- 
bucks cr., in Coshocton co., Ohio, in 1766. 
The chief of this second village w r as chief 
of the Unalachtigo Delawares, and had 
probably removed from the first village 
about 1763. The name is also written Cos- 
teloga, Custalaga, Custologa, Custologo, 
Kustaloga. (j. m.) 

Cutalchich. A tribe or subtribe that 
visited the Avavare, in whose country 
Cabeza de Vaca (Smith trans., 72-74, 
84, 1851) stayed during the latter part 
of his sojourn in Texas in 1528-34. They 
spoke a language different from that 
of the Avavare, and lived inland near 
the Maliacon and the Susola. Learn¬ 
ing of Cabeza de Vaca’s success in treat¬ 
ing the sick, the Cutalchich applied to 
him for help, and in return for his serv¬ 
ices gave ‘ ‘ flints a palm and a half in 
length, with which they cut,” and which 
‘ ‘ were of high value among them. ’ ’ They 
showed their gratitude also by leaving 
with him, as they departed, their supply 
of prickly pears, one of their staple foods. 
Although the Cutalchich dwelt in the 
region occupied in part by agricultural 
Caddoan tribes, they seem not to have 
cultivated the soil, but to have subsisted 
on roots and fruits, as did the tribes 
nearer the coast. Their ethnic relations 
are not determined. (a. c. f.) 

Cultalchulches. —Cabeza de Vaca (1529), Smith 
trans., 137, 1871. Cutalches.— Ibid., note, 127. 
Cutalchiches.— Ibid., note, 139. Cuthalchuches.— 
Ibid., 121. 

Cutans. A name used by Rafinesque 
(introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 23, 1824) for 
the people of an imaginary prehistoric 
empire of North America. 

Cutchogue. The present Cutchogue in 
Suffolk co., Long id., N. Y., occupies the 
site of a former Indian village, probably 
of the same name, which was in the 
Corchaug territory.—Thompson, Long 
Island, i, 392, 1843. 

Catsjajock. —Stuyvesaht (1647) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 79, 1883. Catsjeyick. —Doc. of 1645, 
ibid., 60. 

Cuteco. A former division of the Va- 
rohio, in w. Chihuahua, Mexico, probably 
in Chinipas valley.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 58, 1864. 

Cutespa. A Calusa village on the s. w. 


coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fontaneda 
Memoir ( ca . 1575), Smith trans., 19,1854. 

Cutha Aimethaw. A former Choctaw 
village placed by Romans (Florida, map, 
1775) in the present Kemper co., Miss., 
on the headwaters of an affluent of Suki- 
natcha cr. 

Cuthi TJckehaca (possibly a corruption 
of Kati OJca-hikia, ‘thorn-bush standing 
in water’). A former Choctaw town 
which seems to have been near the mouth 
of Parker cr., which flows into Petickfa 
cr., Kemper co., Miss.—Halbert in Miss. 
Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 426, 1902. 

Cuthi TJskehaca.—Romans, Florida, map, 1775. 

Cuts. An unidentified band of the 
Sihasapa.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 141, 1851. 

Des Coupes.—Culbertson, ibid. 

Cuttatawomen. According to Capt. 
John Smith, the name of 2 tribes of the 
Powhatan confederacy in Virginia in 
1608, each having a principal village of 
the same name. One village was on the 
Rappahannock, at Corotoman r., in Lan¬ 
caster co., and the tribe numbered about 
120. The other was about Lamb cr., on 
the Rappahannock, in King George co., 
and the tribe numbered about 80. (j. m. ) 

Cuttatawoman.—Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, 
repr. 1819. Cuttatawomen.—Smith, ibid., 117. 
Cuttawomans.—Jefferson, Notes, 139, 1801. 

Cuyamaca. A former Diegueno village 
about 50 m. e. n. e. from San Diego mis¬ 
sion, s. Cal.—Hayes (1850) quoted by 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 458, 1882. 

Cuyamunque. A former Tewa pueblo 
on Tesuque cr., between Tesuque and 
Pojoaque, about 15 m. sr. w. of Santa F£, 
N. Mex. With Nambe and Jacona the 
population was about 600 in 1680, when 
the Pueblo rebellion, which continued 
with interruptions until 1696, resulted in 
the abandonment of the village in the 
latter year and the settlement of its surviv¬ 
ing inhabitants in the neighboring Tewa 
pueblos. In 1699 the site of Cuyamunque 
was granted to Alonzo Rael de Aguilar, and 
regranted in 1731 to Bernardino de Sena, 
who had married the widow of Jean 
l’Archev&que, the murderer of La Salle. 
It is now a “Mexican” hamlet. See 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 85, 
1892; Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 231, 
1867. (f. w. h.) 

Coyamanque.—Cope in Ann. Rep. Wheeler Surv., 
app. LL, 76,1875. Cuya Mangue.—Vetancurt, Tea- 
troMex., in, 317,1871. Cuyamanque.—Domenech, 
Deserts, I, 443,1860. Cuyammique.—Vargas (1692) 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 199,1889. 
Cuyamonge,—Pullen in Harper’s Weekly, 771, Oct. 
4, 1890. Cuya-mun-ge.—Bandelier in Ritch, New 
Mexico, 201, 1885. Cuyamungue.—Buschmann, 
Neu-Mexico, 230, 1858. Cuyamunque.—Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, I, 23,1881. Cuyo, Monque.— 
Davis, El Gringo, 88, 1857. Ku Ya-mung-ge.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 85,1892. 

Cuyamus. A Chumashan village for¬ 
merly on the mesa near Santa Barbara, 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24,1863. 


BULL. 30] 


CUYUHASOMI-DAIYUAHL-LANAS 


375 


Cuyuhasomi (‘fish people,’ from cuyu 
‘fish,’ hasomi ‘people’). A phratry of 
the ancient Timucua of Florida.—Pareja 
(1617) quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., xvn, 492,1878. 

Cuyuhasomiaroqui. A clan of the Cuyu¬ 
hasomi phratry of the Timucua of Flor¬ 
ida.—Pareja (1617) quoted by Gatschet 
in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., xvn, 492, 1878. 

Cuyuhasomiele. A clan of the Cuyuha¬ 
somi phratry of the Timucua of Florida.— 
Pareja (1617) quoted by Gatschet in Proc. 
Am. Philos. Soc., xvn, 492, 1878. 

Daahl. The Earth or Sand clan of 
Jemez. pueblo, N. Mex. A correspond¬ 
ing clan existed also at the former related 
pueblo of Pecos. 

Daahl.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896 
(Pecos form). Da'at'hl.— Ibid. (Jemez form). 
Pah-kah-tah.— Hewett in Am. Anthrop., n. s., vi, 
431, 1904 (Pecos form). 

Dachizhozhin (‘renegades’). A divi¬ 
sion of the Jicarillas whose original home 
was around the present Jicarilla res., n. 
N. Mex. 

Dachizh-6-zhi'n. —Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 
1897. Nachizh-6-zhI'n.— Ibid. 

Dadens (Da'dens). A Haida town on 
the s. coast of North id., fronting Parry 
passage, Queen Charlotte ids., British 
Columbia. It was the chief town of the 
Yaku-lanas previous to their migration to 
Prince of Wales id.; afterward the site 
was used as a camp, but, it is said, was 
not reoccupied as a town. It figures 
prominently in accounts of early voy¬ 
agers, from which it would appear either 
that it was still occupied in their time 
or that it had only recently been aban¬ 
doned. _ (j. r. s.) 

Da'dens lnaga'-i. —Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 281,1905 
(lnaga'-i = ‘ town ’ ). Tartanee. —Douglas quoted 
by Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 162, 1880. 

Dadjingits ( Dadji'ngits , ‘common-hat 
village’). A Haida town on the n. 
shore of Bearskin bay, Skidegate 
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col. It was occupied for a brief 
time by part of the Gitins of 
Skidegate, afterward known as 
Nasagas-haidagai, during a tem¬ 
porary difference with the other 
branch of the group.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 279,1905. 

Dagangasels ( Daganas&ls , ‘com¬ 
mon food-steamers ’). A subdi¬ 
vision of the Kona-kegawai of the 
Haida. They were of low social 
rank, and the name was used prob- 
ably in contempt.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 273, 1905. 

Daggers. Sharp-pointed, edged 
implements, intended to thrust 
and stab. Daggers of stone do not 
(niblack) a prominent place among the 

weapons of the northern tribes, 
and they are not readily distinguished from 
knives, poniards, lance-heads, and projec¬ 
tile points, save in rare cases where the 


I 



Stone Daggers, a, Of 
chalcedony; Illinois; 
Length io in. b , Of 
Flint; Alabama; 
length 7 1-4 in. 


Dagger of 
Steel; 
Tlingit. 


handle was worked in a single piece with 
the blade. Bone was well suited for the 
making of stabbing implements and the 
long 2-pointed copper poniard of the re¬ 
gion of the great lakes was a formi¬ 
dable weapon. The exact use of 
this group of objects as employed 
in prehistoric times must remain 
largely a matter of con¬ 
jecture. The introduc¬ 
tion of iron soon led to 
the making of keen- 
pointed knives, as the 
dirk, and among the 
N. W. coast tribes the 
manufacture of broad- 
bladed daggers of cop¬ 
per and iron or steel, 
modeled after European 
and Asiatic patterns, be¬ 
came an important in¬ 
dustry. 

For daggers of stone 
consult Moorehead, Pre- 
hist. Impls., 1900; Rau 
in Smithson. Cont., xxn, 1876; Thruston, 
Antiq. of Tenn., 1897; for metal daggers, 
see Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888,1890. 

(w. H. H.) 

Dahet ( Daxe't , ‘fallen stunned’). A 
former Tlingit village in the Sitka coun¬ 
try, Alaska. (j. r. s.) 

Dahnohabe (‘ stone mountain ’). A Po¬ 
rno village said to have been on the w. 
side of Clear lake, Lake co., Cal., with 
70 inhabitants in 1851. 

Dah-no-habe.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 109,1853. Do-no-ha-be.— McKee (1851) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,32dCong., spec, sess., 136,1853. 

Daboon. An American holly, Ilex da- 
hoon. The term was first applied by Cates- 
by (1722-26), probably from one of the 
Indian languages of the s. Atlantic states, 
though nothing definite seems to be 
known about the word. (a. f. c.) 

Dahua ( Da'xua ). A Haida town n. 
of Lawn hill, at the mouth of Skide¬ 
gate inlet, Queen Charlotte id., Brit. Col. 
It belonged to the Djahui-skwahladagai, 
and was noted in legend as the place 
where arose the troubles which resulted 
in separating the later w. coast Indians 
from those of Skidegate inlet. It was 
also the scene of a great battle between 
the inlet people and those of the w. coast, 
in which the latter were defeated.—Swan¬ 
ton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Daiyu ( Daiyu ‘ giving-food-to-others 
town’). A Haida town on Shingle 
bay, e. of Welcome point, Moresby id., w. 
Brit. Col. It was owned by a small band, 
the Daiyuahl-lanas or Kasta-kegawai, 
which received one of its names from that 
of the town.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 
1905. 

Daiyuahl-lanas ( Daiyu at la'nas, ‘ peo¬ 
ple of the town where they always give 
away food’). A division of the Raven 






376 


DAKANMATJYIN-DAKOTA 


[b. a. e. 


clan of the Haida, named from one of its 
towns. A second name for the band was 
Kasta-kegawai (Q!a'staqe'gawa-i), ‘those 
born at Skidegate cr.’ It formerly occu¬ 
pied the coast between Alliford bay and 
Cumshewa point, but is now nearly ex¬ 
tinct.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 269, 1905. 

K'astak e'rauai.—Boas, Fifth_ Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 26, 1889. Qla'sta qe'gawa-i.—Swanton, 
op. cit. Tai'otl la'nas.—Boas, * Twelfth Rep. N. 
W. Tribes Canada, 24, 1898. 

Dakanmanyin (‘walks shining’). A 
subgens of the Han gens of the Kansa. 
Daka" ma n yi n .—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 
1897. 

Dakota (‘ allies ’). The largest division 
of the Siouan family, known commonlyas 
Sioux, according to Hewitt a French- 
Canadian abbreviation of the Chippewa 
Nadowe-is-iw, a diminutive of nadowe, ‘ an 
adder,’ hence ‘an enemy.’ Nadoweisiw-eg 
is the diminutive plural. The diminutive 
singular and plural were applied by the 
Chippewa to the Dakota, and to the Huron 
to distinguish them from the Iroquois 
proper, the true ‘adders’ or ‘enemies.’ 
According to Chippewa tradition the name 
was first applied to a body of Indians liv¬ 
ing on an island somewhere e. of Detroit 
(W. Jones). 

Dakota, Nakota, Lakota are the names 
used by themselves, in the Santee, Yank¬ 
ton, and Teton dialects respectively. J. 
O. Dorsey, in his classification of the Siou¬ 
an languages, divides the Dakota group 
into 4 dialects: Santee, Yankton, Assim- 
boin, and Teton. The Assiniboin, how¬ 
ever, constitute a separate tribe. The close 
linguistic relation of the divisions—the 
differences being largely dialectic—indi¬ 
cates that they are branches of an original 
group, the development probably being 
augmented by incorporations. At the 
time of Long’s expedition (1825), when 
the bands w ere still near their respective 
localities, the country inhabited by the 
group was, according to him, bounded by 
a curved line extending e. of n. from 
Prairie du Chien on the Mississippi, so as 
to include all the e. tributaries of the 
Mississippi, to the first branch of Chip¬ 
pewa r. ; thence by a line running w. of n. 
to Spirit lake; thence westwardly to Crow 
Wing r., Minn., and up that stream to its 
head; thence w r estwardly to Red r., and 
down that stream to Pembina; thence 
south westwardly to the e. bank of the Mis¬ 
souri near the Mandan villages; thence 
down the Missouri to a point probably 
not far from Soldiers r. ; thence e. of n. to 
Prairie du Chien, Wis. This tract in¬ 
cludes the territory between lat. 42° to 
49°, and long. 90° 30' to 99° 30', but omits 
entirely the vast region occupied by the 
various bands of the Teton Sioux w. of 
the Missouri from the Yellowstone south¬ 
ward to the Platte. 


The first positive historical mention of 
this people is found in the Jesuit Rela¬ 
tion for 1640, where it is said that in the 
vicinity of the “Nation des Puans” 
(Winnebago) are the “Nadvesiv” (Na- 
dow r essioux), “Assinipour” (Assiniboin), 
etc. In the Jesuit Relation for 1642 it is 
stated that the Nadouessis are situated 
some 18 days’ journey n. w r . or w. of Sault 
Ste Marie, “18 days farther away.” Ac¬ 
cording to their tradition, the Chippewa 
first encountered the Dakota at Sault Ste 
Marie. Dr Thomas S. Williamson, who 
spent several years among the Dakota of 
the Mississippi, says (Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, i, 247, 1851) that they claimed to 
have resided near the confluence of the 
Mississippi* and Minnesota rs. for several 
generations; that before they came to the 
Mississippi they lived at Mille lac, which 
they call Isanta-mde, ‘ knife lake, ’ from 
which is probably derived the name 
Isanyati, ‘dwelling at the knife,’ by which 
the Dakota of the Missouri call those who 
lived on Mississippi and Minnesota rs. 
Rev. A. L. Riggs asserts that Isanyati, from 
which Santee is derived, was properly 
applied only to the Mdewakanton, which 
would seem to identify this tribe with 
Hennepin’s Issati. He also remarks that 
most of these Indians with whom he con¬ 
versed could trace their history no further 
back than to Mille lac, but that some 
could tell of wars they had with the 
Chippewa before they went thither and 
trace their history back to Lake of the 
Woods. He adds that all their traditions 
show that they came from the n. e. and 
have been moving toward the s. w., which 
would imply that they came from some 
point n. of the lakes. DuLuth (1678) and 
Hennepin (1680) found some of the Da¬ 
kota at and in the region of Mille lac, 
named by the latter in his text L. Issati, 
and in his autograph map L. Buade. 
These included the Mdewakanton, part of 
the Sisseton, part if not all of the Wahpe- 
ton, and probably the Wahpekute. Hen¬ 
nepin’s map places the Issati (Mdewakan¬ 
ton ) close to L. Buade, the Oiia de Battons 
(Wahpeton) a little to the n. e. of the lake, 
the Hanctons (Yankton or Yanktonai) 
some distance to the n. , and the Tinthonha 
or Gens des Prairies (Teton) to the w., on 
the upper Mississippi. If this may be 
considered even approximately correct, it 
indicates that parts at least of some of the 
western tribes still lingered in the region 
of the upper Mississippi, and indeed it is 
well known that very few T of the Sioux 
crossed the Missouri before 1750. Mal- 
lery’s winter count (10th Rep. B. A. E., 
266, 1894) places their entrance into the 
Black-hills, from which they dispossessed 
the Cheyenne and the Kiowa, at about 
1765. Referring to their location in the 


BULL. 30] 


DAKOTA 


377 


latter part of the 17th century, Hennepin 
(Descr. La., Sheatrans., 201, 1880) says: 
“ Eight leagues above St. Anthony of 
Padua’s falls on the right, you find the 
river of the Issati or Nadoussion [Rum 
r.], with a very narrow mouth, which 
you can ascend to the n. for about 70 
leagues to L. Buade [Mille lac] or of the 
Issati where it rises. ... In the 
neighborhood of L. Buade are many other 
lakes, whence issue several rivers, on the 
banks of which live the Issati, Nadoues- 
sans, Tinthonha (which means ‘prairie- 
men’), Ouadebathon River People, 
Chongaskethon Dog, or Wolf tribe (for 
chonga among these nations means dog 
or wolf), and other tribes, all which we 
'comprise under the name IS adonessiou.” 
Here the Issati are distinguished from the 
Tinthonha (Teton), Ouadebathon (Wah- 
peton), Chongaskethon (Sisseton), and 
Nadouessans (perhaps the Wahpekute). 
From the time of Le Sueur’s visit (1700) 
the Dakota became an important factor 
in the history of the N. W. Their grad¬ 
ual movement westward was due chiefly 
to the persistent attacks of the Chippewa, 
who received firearms from the French, 
while they themselves were forced to rely 
almost wholly on bows and arrows. 

Lieut. Gorrell, an English officer, men¬ 
tions their condition in this respect as late 
as 1763 (Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 36,1855): 
“This day, 12 warriors of the Sous came 
here [Green Bay, Wis.]. It is certainly 
the greatest nation of Indians ever yet 
found. Not above 2,000 of them were 
ever armed with fire-arms, the rest de¬ 
pending entirely on bows and arrows and 
darts, which they use with more skill 
than any other Indian nation in North 
America. They can shoot the wildest 
and largest beasts in the woods at 70 or 
100 yds. distance. They are remarkable 
for their dancing; the other nations take 
the fashion from them.” He mentions 
that they were always at war with the 
Chippewa. On the fall of the French 
dominion the Dakota at once entered into 
friendly relations with the English. It is 
probable that the erection of trading posts 
on L. Pepin enticed them from their old 
residence on Rum r. and Mille lac, for it 
was in this section that Carver (1766) 
found those of the eastern group. He 
says (Travels, 37,1796): “Near the river 
St. Croix reside three bands of the Nau- 
dowessie Indians, called the River bands. 
This nation is composed, at present, of 11 
bands. They were originally 12, but the 
Assinipoils [Assiniboin] some years ago, 
revolting, and separating themselves from 
the others, there remain only at this time 
11. Those I met here are termed the 
River bands, because they chiefly dwell 
near the banks of this river: the other 8 
are generally distinguished by the title, 


Naudowessies of the Plains, and inhabit 
a country that lies more to the westward. 
The names of the former are Nehogata- 
wonahs, the Mawtawbauntowahs, and 
Shahsweentowahs.” During an investi¬ 
gation by Congress in 1824 of the claim 
by Carver’s heirs to a supposed grant of 
land, including the site of St Paul, made 
to Carver by the Sioux, Gen. Leaven¬ 
worth stated that the Dakota informed 
him that the Sioux of the Plains never 
owned any land e. of the Mississippi. 

During the Revolution and the War of 
1812 the Dakota adhered to the English. 
There was, however, one chief who sided 
with the United States in 1812; this was 
Tohami, known to the English as Rising 
Moose, a chief of the Mdewakanton who 
joined the Americans at St Louis, where 
he was commissioned by Gen. Clark. 
By the treaty of July, 1815, peace between 
the Dakota and the United States was 
established, and by that of Aug., 1825, 
the boundary lines between them and the 
United States and between them and the 
various tribes in the N. W. were defined. 
The boundaries of the Sioux and other 
northwestern tribes were again defined 
by the treaty of Sept. 17, 1851. Their 
most serious outbreak against the whites 
occurred in Minnesota under Little Crow 
in 1862, when about 700 white settlers 
and 100 soldiers lost their lives and some 
of the most horrible cruelties known to 
history were committed by the Indians; 
but the entire Dakota group never par¬ 
ticipated unitedly in any of the modern 
wars or outbreaks. The bands engaged 
in the uprising mentioned were the Mde¬ 
wakanton, Wahpekute, Wahpeton, and 
Sisseton. Although this revolt was quelled 
and the Sioux were compelled for a time 
to submit to the terms offered them, aspirit 
of unrest continued to prevail. By the 
treaty of 1867 they agreed to relinquish 
to the United States all their territory s. 
of Niobrara r., w. of long. 104°, and n. of 
lat. 46°, and promised to retire to a large 
reservation in s. w. Dakota before Jan. 1, 
1876. On the discovery of gold in the 
Black-hills the rush of miners thither be¬ 
came the occasion of another outbreak. 
This war was participated in by such well- 
known chiefs as Sitting Bull, Crazy Horse, 
Spotted Tail, Rain-in-the-face, Red Cloud, 
American Horse, Gall, and Crow King, 
and was rendered famous by the cutting 
off of Maj. Gen. George A. Custer and 
five companies of cavalry on the Little 
Bighorn, June 25, 1876. A final rising 
during the Ghost-dance excitement of 
1890-91 was subdued by Gen N. A. Miles. 

The Dakota are universally conceded 
to be of the highest type, physically, 
mentally, and probably morally, of any 
of the western tribes. Their bravery has 
never been questioned by white or Indian, 


878 


DAKOTA 


[b. a. e. 


and they conquered or drove out every 
rival except the Chippewa. They are 
educated in their own language, and 
through the agency of missionaries of the 
type of Riggs, Williamson, Cleveland, 
and Cook, many books in the Dakota 
language have been printed, and papers 
in Dakota are issued regularly. (See 
Pilling, Bibliog. Siouan Lang., Bull. B. 
A. E., 1887.) 

Socially, the Dakota originally consisted 
of a large number of local groups or bands, 
and, although there was a certain ten¬ 
dency to encourage marriage outside the 
band, these divisions were not true gentes, 
remembered blood relationship, accord¬ 
ing to Clark, being the only bar to mar¬ 
riage. Personal fitness and popularity 
determined chieftainship more than he¬ 
redity, but where descent played any part 
it was usually from father to son. The 
tipi might belong to either parent and 
was obtained by that parent through some 
ancestor who had had its character re¬ 
vealed in a dream or who had captured 
it in war. The authority of the chief was 
limited by the band council, without whose 
approbation little or nothing could be ac¬ 
complished. War parties were recruited 
by individuals who had acquired reputa¬ 
tion as successful leaders, while the sha¬ 
mans formulated ceremonial dances and 
farewells for them. Polygamy was com¬ 
mon, the wives occupying different sides 
of the tipi. Remains of the dead were 
usually, though not invariably, placed on 
scaffolds. 

Early explorers usually distinguished 
these people into an Eastern or Forest 
and a Western or Prairie division. A 
more complete and accurate classification, 
one which is also recognized by the peo¬ 
ple themselves, is the following: 

1. Mdewakanton; 2. Wahpeton; 3. Wah- 
pekute; 4. Sisseton; 5. Yankton; 6. Yank- 
tonai; 7. Teton, each of which is again 
subdivided into bands and subbands. 
These seven main divisions are often 
known as “the seven council fires.” 
The first four named together constitute 
the Isanyati, Santee, or eastern division, 
of which the Mdewakanton appear to be 
the original nucleus, and speak one dia¬ 
lect. Their home was in Minnesota prior 
to the outbreak of 1862. The Yankton 
and Yanktonai—the latter subdivided 
into (a) Upper and ( b ) Hunkpatina or 
Lower—held the middle territory be¬ 
tween L. Traverse and Missouri r. in e. 
Dakota, and together spoke one dialect, 
from which the Assiniboin was an off¬ 
shoot. The great Teton division, with 
its subdivisions, Upper and Lower Brul6, 
Oglala, Sans Arcs, Sihasapa or Blackfoot, 
Miniconjou, Oohenonpa or Two Kettle, 
Hunkpapa, etc., and comprising together 
more than half the nation, held the whole 


tribal territory w. of the Missouri and 
spoke one dialect. 

The following are names of divisions, 
groups, or bands that are spoken of as per¬ 
taining to the Dakota. Some of these have 
not been identified; others are mere tem¬ 
porary geographical or local bands: Black 
Tiger, Broken Arrows, Cascarba, Cazazh- 
ita, Chanshushka, Chasmuna, Cheokhba, 
Cheyenne Sioux, Congewichacha, Farm¬ 
er’s band, Fire Lodge, Flandreau Indians, 
Gens du Large, Grand Saux, Grey Eagle, 
Late Comedu, Lean Bear, Long Sioux, 
Menostamenton, Micacoupsiba, Minisha, 
Neecoweegee, Nehogatawonahs, New- 
astarton, Northern Sioux, Ocatameneton, 
Ohankanska, Oughetgeodatons, Oujates- 
pouitons, Peshlaptechela, Pineshow, Psin- 
chaton, Psinoumanitons, Psinoutanhin- 
hintons, Rattling Moccasin, Red Leg’s 
band, Redwood, Sioux of the Broad Leaf, 
Sioux of the Des Moyan, Sioux of the 
East, Sioux of the Meadows, Sioux of 
the West, Sioux of the Woods, Sioux of 
the Lakes, Sioux of the River St Peter’s, 
Souon, Star band, Talonapi, Tashunkee- 
ota, Tateibombu’s band, Tatkannai, Ti- 
cicitan, Touchouasintons, Traverse de 
Sioux, Upper Sioux, Waktonila, White 
Cap Indians, White Eagle band, Wiat- 
tachechah. 

In 1904 the Dakota were distributed 
among the following agencies and school 
superintendencies: Cheyenne River (Min¬ 
iconjou, Sans Arcs, and Two Kettle), 
2,477; Crow Creek (Lower Yanktonai), 
1,025; Ft Totten school (Sisseton, Wah¬ 
peton, and Pabaksa), 1,013; Riggs Insti¬ 
tute (Santee), 279; Ft Peck (Yankton), 
1,116; Lower Brul6 (Lower Brul6), 470; 
Pine Ridge (Oglala), 6,690; Rosebud 
(Brule, Waglukhe, Lower Brule, North¬ 
ern, Two Kettle, and Wazhazha), 4,977; 
Santee (Santee), 1,075; Sisseton (Sisseton 
and Wahpeton), 1,908; Standing Rock 
(Sihasapa, Hunkpapa, and Yanktonai), 
3,514; Yankton (Yankton), 1,702; under 
no agency (Mdewakanton in Minnesota), 
929; total, 26,175. Including the Assini¬ 
boin the total for those speaking the 
Dakota language is 28,780. A comparison 
of these figures with those taken in pre¬ 
vious years indicates a gradual decline in 
numbers, but not so rapid a decrease as 
among most North American tribes. 
Ab-boin-ee Sioux.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83, 
1850. Ab-boin-ug.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 
36, 1885 (Chippewa name: ‘roasters,’ from their 
custom of torturing foes). Abbwoi-nug.—Tan¬ 
ner, Narr., 57, 1830. Ab-oin.—Warren in Minn. 
Hist. Coll., V, 162, 1885. Aboinug.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, ii, 141, 1852. Abwoinug.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 39, 1855. Ba-akush'.— Gat- 
schet, Caddo and Yatassi MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
82 (Caddo name). Ba-ra-shup'-gi-o.—Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow 
name). Bevan-acs.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 70, 
1849 (usual Chippewa name; ev misprint for w). 
Bewanacs.—Lapham, Blossom and Dousman, Inds. 
of Wis., 15,1870. Boin-acs.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. 


BULL. 30] 


DAKOTA 


379 


Rep., 70, 1849 (French notation of Bwanacs). 
Bomes.— Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., i, 389, 1824. 
Bwa». —Trumbull, MS. letter to Dorsey, Aug. 25, 

1876. Bwan-acs. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 74, 
1849. Bwoinug, —Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830. Bwoir- 
nug. —Ioid.,144. Caa n '. —Dorsey in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., vi, pt. 1, 339, 1890 (Omaha and Ponca, 
and Pawnee name). Caa n 'qti. —Dorsey, Dhegiha 
MS. Diet., B. A. E., 1878 (Omaha name: ‘real 
Dakota’). Ca'ha n . —Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1879 (so called by Iowa, Oto, Mis¬ 
souri, Kansa, and Osage). Ca n -ha n .— David St 
Cyr in Dorsey, Winn. MS., B. A. E., 1886 (Win¬ 
nebago name). Chah'-ra-rat.— Grinnell, Pawnee 
Hero Tales, 92, 1889 (Pawnee name). Chi8.— 
Charlevoix, New France, ed. Shea, hi, 31, 1868. 
Ciou. —Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 611, 
1855. Cioux. —Doc. of 1693, ibid., 570. Coupe- 
gorge. —Blackmore in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 

I, 301, 1869 (‘cutthroats’: so called by the French 
from their gesture). Coupes-gorges.—Burton, City 
of Saints, 95,1862. Cruel.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 348, 
1855. Cuouex.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 70, 
note, 1893. Cutthroats.—Marcy, Army Life on 
Border, 33, 1866 (given erroneously as the trans¬ 
lation of Dakota). Dacorta.—Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., I, 61, 1814. Dacota.—Long, Exped. St 
Peter’s R., n, 245, 1824. Dacotah.—Howe, Hist. 
Coll., 357,1851 (translated ‘allied tribes’). Dah- 
cotah.—Tanner, Narr., 18, 1830. Dahcotas.—Gal¬ 
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 121, 1836. 
Dahkota.—Parker, Minn. Handbk., 13, 1857. Dah- 
ko-tah.—Tanner,Narr., 146,1830. Dakoias.—Shea, 
Early Voy., 120, note, 1861 (misprint for Dakotas). 
Dakotah.—Neill, Hist. Minn., xliv, note, 1858. 
Dakotas.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 69, 1849. 
Dakotha.—Smet, Mission de 1’ Oregon, 264, 1848. 
Darcota.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, 183, 1817. 
Darcotar.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 30, 1806. 
Dareotas.—Rafinesque in Marshall, Hist. Ky., i, 
28, 1824. Dawta.—Domenech, Deserts of N. 
Am., ii, 28, 1860. Docota.—Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 

1848. Guerriers. —Jes. Rel. 1658, 21,1858. Hadove- 
saves.— Alcedo, Diet. Geog., ill, 213, 1788 (mis¬ 
print). Hadovessians. —Harris, Coll. Yoy. and 
Trav., ii, 919,1705 (misprinted from Lahontan). 
Hand Cutters.— Burton, City of Saints, 124, 1862 
(Ute name). I ta ha tski. —Matthews, Ethnog. 
Hidatsa, 159, 1877 (Hidatsa name: ‘ long ar¬ 
rows ’). it-ans-ke.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., 

II, lxxxiv, 1823. Kaispa. —Wilson in Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 11, 1888 (Sarsi name). Kious.— La 
Metairie (1682) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 25, 
i875. K'odalpa-K'ihago.— Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1057, 1896 (‘necklace people’: Kiowa 
name). Lacota. —Morgan in Beach, Ind. Misc.,220, 

1877. La-cotahs.— Ruxton, Life in Far West, 112, 

1849. La-ko'-ta.— Riggs, Dakota Gram, and Diet., 
135, 1851. La Sues— Croghan (1765), Jour., 38, 
1831. Madowesians.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., 

i, 61, 1814. Ma-ko'-ta.— Hayden, Ethnog. and 

Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow name). 

mar-an-sho-hish-ko. —Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., 

ii, lxxix, 1823 (Crow name: ‘cutthroats’). 
Mattaugwessawacks. —Sproat, Scenes Sav. Life, 
188, 1868. Maudowessies.— McIntosh, Orig. N. Am. 
Inds., 103, 1853. Minishupsko. —Col. H. L. Scott, 
inf’n, 1906 (Crow name, of opprobrious mean¬ 
ing). Nacotah.— Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Yoy., 

I, 168, 1847. Nadawessi. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 71, 1849. Na-da-wessy. —Ibid., 70. Nad- 
douwessioux. —Braekenridge, Views of La., 77, 
1815. Nadesis.— Giissefeld, Charte von Nord Am., 
1797. Nadiousioux.— Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., 

II, 323, 1824. Nadissioux. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
index, 304,1861. Nadoeses.— Barcia, Ensayo, 291, 
1723. Nadoessi. —Coues and Kingsley, Stand. Nat. 
Hist., pt. 6,167,1883. Nadoessians.— Salverte, Hist. 
Men, Nat., and Places, I, 66, 1864. Nadoessious. — 
La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, D6c., vi, 6,1886. 
Nadonaisi.— Burton, City of Saints, 96,1862 (Chip¬ 
pewa name: ‘enemies’). Nadonaisioug. —pome- 
nech, DesertsN. Am.,Il, 26,1860. Nadonechiouk. — 
Ibid. Nadonessioux. —Blackmore in Jour. Ethnol. 
Soc. Loud., I, 301, 1869 (misprint). Nadonessis.— 
Lahontan, New Voy., I, 115, 1703. Nadooessis. — 
Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 8, 1776. Nadouags.— 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., ii, 


49, 1753. Nadouagssioux. —Ibid., 147. Nadouais* 
sious. —Ibid., 179. Nadouaissioux. —Ibid., 62. 
Nadouayssioux. —Ibid., 56. Nad8echi8ec. —Charle¬ 
voix, New France, ill, 31, 1868. Nadouechiouec. — 
Rel. of 1660 in Margry, D6c., I, 54,1876. Nadoue- 
chiouek.— Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858. Nadoiiechio8ec. — 
Ibid., 1660, 27. Nadoiiecious. —Ibid., 1670, 98. 
Nadoiiecis. —Ibid., 1670, 97. Nad8e8is. —Shea, 
Discov. Miss. Val., xxi, 1852. Nadouesans. —Hen¬ 
nepin, New Discov., map, 1698. Nadouesciouz. — 
Domenech, Deserts N. Am., ii, 26, 1860. Nadoue- 
siouack. —Neill, Hist. Minn., 102, 1858. Nadoue- 
siouek.— Jes. Rel. 1656, 39, 1858. Nadouesioux. — 
Perrot (1689) in Margry, D6c., V, 33,1883. Nadoue- 
siouz. —Williamson in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 297,1872. 
Nadouessans. —La Salle’s Exped. (1679-81), in Mar¬ 
gry, D6c., i, 481, 1876. Nadouesse. —French map 
(1710) in Minn. Hist. Coll., ii, 256,1872. Nadoues- 
sians. —Niles (1760) in Mass. Hist. Col., 4th s., v, 
541, 1861. Nadouessies. —Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 380, 1862. Nadouessions. —La 
Metairie (1682) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 25, 
1875. Nadouessiou. —Hennepin (1683) quoted by 
Shea, Discov., 131,1852. Nadoiiessiouak.— Jes. Rel. 
1665, 7, 1858. Nadouessiouek. —Ibid. 1667,23. Na- 
doiiessious. —Ibid. 1670, 99. Nadouessioux. —Doc. 
of 1681 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 161, 1855. Na- 
doiiessis. —Jes. Rel. 1642, 97, 1858. Nadouessons. — 
Coxe, Carolana, 42, 1741. Nadouessoueronons. — 
Sanson, map of Can. (1657) in Am. Antiq., i, 233, 
1879. Nadoussians. —Hennepin, New Discov., I, 
178, 1698 (made equivalent to Issati). Nadous- 
sieux.— Du Chesneau(1681)inN.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ix, 153, 1855. Nadoussioux. —Doc. (1679), ibid, 795. 
Nadouwesis. —Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 380, 1862. Nadovesaves.— Barcia, Ensayo, 238, 
1723. Nadovessians. —Hennepin (1680) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., I, 211, 1846. Na-do-wa-see-wug. — 
Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 53, 1870. Nadowasis. — 
Mackenzie, Voy., lx, 1802. Nadowassis. —Maxi¬ 
milian, Trav., 148, 1843. Nadowaysioux. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 51, 1853. Nadowesee. — 
Schiller quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn., 89, 1858. 
Nadowesi. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 
1896 (‘little snakes,’ or ‘little enemies’: common 
Algonquian name). Nadowesioux. —Kingsley, 
Stand. Nat. Hist., vi, 167,1885. Nadowessi. —Rafi¬ 
nesque in Marshall, Hist. Ky., I, 28, 1824. Nado- 
wessiern.— Adelung, Mithridates, ill, 244, 1816. 
Nadowessies. —Henry, Trav., 46, 1809. Nado-wes- 
siouex. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 348, 1855. Nadowes- 
sioux.— Henry, Trav., 197, 1809. Nadowesteaus.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 80, 1854. 
Nadsnessiouck.— Domenech, Deserts N. Am., n, 26, 
1860. Nadussians. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5,1776. 
Naduwessi. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 70, 1849. 
Nadvesiv. —Le Jeune in Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858. 
Nahcotah.— Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voy., i, 
223, 1847. Nahdawessy.— Ramsey in Minn. Hist. 
Coll., I, 45, 1872. Nahdowaseh.— Jones, Ojibway 
Inds., 129, 1861. Nahtooessies. —Snelling, Tales of 
Northwest, 137, 1830. Nakota. —Burton, City of 
Saints, 95,1862. Nandawissees. —Umfreville (1790) 
in Me. Hist. Coll., 6th s., 270, 1859. Nandoesi. — 
Maximilian, Trav., 148, 1843. Nandoessies. — 
Lahontan quoted by Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
72, 1849. Nandowese.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 186, 
1836. Nandowessies. —Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man¬ 
kind, v, 410,1847. Nandswesseis. —Harmon, Jour., 
165, 1820 (misprint). Naoudoouessis. —B. de Lozi- 
feres, Voy. d, la Louisiane, 348, 1802. Narcotah. — 
Schoolcraft, Trav., 291, 1821. Natenehima. —Mal- 
lery in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 352, note, 1877. Nat- 
e-ne'-hin-a.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 326, 1862 (Arapaho name: ‘cutthroats’). 
Natni.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A, E., 1057, 
1896 (Arapaho name). Natnihina. —Ibid. Na'-to- 
wo-na. —Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
290, 1862 (Cheyenne name, applied to Mde- 
wakanton, Sisseton, Wahpekute, and Wah- 
peton). Natuesse. —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1878 
(Potawatomi name: ‘small snake,’ because 
farther w., therefore less tobedreaded). Natues- 
suag.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq., II, 78,1879 (Pota¬ 
watomi name). Naudawissees. —Umfreville 
quoted by Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
380,1862. Naudewessioux. —Trumbull in Johnson 
Cyclop., II, 1156,1877. Naudoessi.— Ramsey in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 72,1849. Naudouescioux.—Morgan in N. 


380 


DAKOTA TUKNIP-DALLES INDIAN'S 


[b. a. e. 


Am. Rev., 53,1870. Naudoiiessi.—Ramsey in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 69, 1849. Naudouisioux.—Raymbault 
(1642) quoted by Brackett in Smithson. Rep. 1876, 
466, 1877. Naudouisses.—Ibid. Naudouwessies.— 
Brown, West. Gaz., 360,1817. Naud-o-wa-se.—War¬ 
ren in Minn. Hist. Coll., V, 280,1885. Naud-o-wa-se- 
wug.—Ibid., 72. (Chippewa name: ‘ like unto ad¬ 
ders’) . Naudowasses.—Schuyler et al. (1702) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 979, 1854. Naudowesies.— 
Carver, Trav., ix, 1778. Naudowesse. — Lewis, 
Trav., 233, 1809. Naudowesseeg.—Tanner, Narr., 
316, 1830 (Ottawa name: ‘roasters’). Naudowes- 
sies.—Carver, Trav., 56, 1778. Naudowissies.— 
Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 53,1870. Naudussi.—Jef- 
ferys, Am. Atlas, map, 2, 1776. Nauduwassies.— 
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., 
II, 12, 1814. Nawdowessie.—Carver, Trav., 59,1778. 
Nawdowissnees.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 34, 
1857 (Algonquian nickname: ‘our enemies’). 
Ndakotahs.—Nicollet, Rep. on Upper Mississippi, 
10,1843. Nedouessaus.—Hennepin quoted by Neill 
in Minn. Hist. Coll., I, 256,1872. Noddouwessces.— 
Brackenridge, Views of La., 77, 1815. Nod-o-way- 
se-wug.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, n, 139, 1852. 
Nodoweisa.—Linn (1839) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 204, 26th 
Cong., 1st sess., I, 1840. Nodowessies.—Bradbury, 
Trav., 41, 1817. Nord oiiests.—Bradford quoted 
by Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 70,1849 (evident cor¬ 
ruption of Nadouessiou). Nottawessie.—Adelung, 
Mithridates, in,264,1816. Nottoweasses.—Croghan 
(1759), Hist. West. Penn., 146, note, 1851. Nuktu- 
sem.—Gatschet. MS., 1884 (Salish name: ‘cut¬ 
throats’). Nuqtu'.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., 371,1886 (Salishname). Nxtusum.—Gatschet 
MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Okinagan name). 0-bwah- 
nug.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 193,1855 (Chip¬ 
pewa name). Oceti sakowiq.—Riggs, Dakota 
Gram, and Diet., xv, 1851 (own name: ‘seven 
council fires’). Ochente Shakoan.—Long, Exped. 
St Peters R., I, 377, 1824. Ochente Shakons.— 
Coues and Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 169, 
1883. Ocheti Shaowni.—Warren, Dacota Country, 
15, 1855. Oho-homo.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 8,1884 
(‘ those on the outside ’). Oho-omo-yo.—Mallery in 
Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 352, note, 1877. O-o'-ho- 
mo-i'-o.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 290, 1862 (Cheyenne name), dshahak.— 
Gatschet, MS., 1883 (Fox name). Osheti Sha- 
kowin.—Burton, City of Saints, 95,1862. Otchenti- 
Chakoang.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 55, 1826. Pain- 
pe-tse-menay. — Gebow, Sho-sho-nay Vocab., 18, 
1868 (Shoshoni name). Pakota.—U. S. Stat., x, 71, 
1853 (misprint). Pambizimina.—Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 1896 (‘beheaders’: Shoshoni 
name). Pampe Chyimina.—Burton, City of Saints, 
124, 1862 (Ute name: ‘hand-cutters’). Pani.— 
Schuyler et al (1702) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
iv, 979, 1854 (given as French name; confused 
with Pawnee). Papitsinima.—Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 1896 (‘beheaders’: Co¬ 
manche name). Pishakulk.—Mooney, inf’n, 1892 
(Yakima name: ‘beheaders’). Ponarak.—Jes. 
Rel. 1656, 39, 1858 (misprint). Poualac.—Mallery 
in Proc. A. A. A. S., XXVI, 352, note, 1877. Poua- 
lak.—Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858 (Chippewa name; 
incorrectly transl. ‘warriors’). Poualakes.—Mc- 
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, m, 81,1854. Poua- 
laks.—Boucher (1660) in Margry, D6c., I, 55, 1875. 
Pouanak.—Tailhan, Perrot M6m., 232, note, 1864. 
Roasters.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83, 1850 
(Ab-boin-ee Sioux, or). Sahagi.—Gatschet, MS., 
B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee name). Saoux.—Scher¬ 
merhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., n, 12, 
1814. Saux.—Hurlbert in Jones, Ojebway Inds., 
178,1861. Sceouex.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, 
70, note, 1893. Sceoux.—Clark, MS., Codex B, 
quoted in Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 101, note, 
1893. Scieux. —Henry (1801) quoted by Neill 
in Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 453, 1885. Sciou.—Neill, 
Hist. Minn., 149, 1858. Scioux.—Doc. (1693) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 570, 1855. Scouex.—Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., i, 70, note, 1893. Seauex.— 
Clark, Codex B, quoted in Lewis and Clark 
Exped., i, 128, note, 1893. Seaux.—Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., i, 70, note, 1893. Shahan.—Dorsey 
quoted by Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1057,1896 
(Osage, Kansa, and Oto name). Shanana.—Gat¬ 


schet, MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Kiowa Apache name)- 
Sicouex.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., i,70, note, 1893. 
Sieouex.—Ibid. Sieux.—Coxe, Carolana, 20, 1741. 
Siooz.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 8, 1776. Sios.— 
Alegre, Hist. Comp. Jesus, I, 336,1841. Siou.—La- 
mothe Cadillac (1703) in Margry, D6c., v, 329, 
1883. Siouse.—Perrot, M5m., 232, 1864. Sioust.— 
Doc. (1767) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 989, 1856. 
Sioux.—Morel (1687) in Margry, D£c., v, 32, 1883. 
Siouxes.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., 
iv, 33,1753. Siouxs.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 7, 
1806. Sioxes.—Poole, Among the Sioux, 153, 1881. 
Siroux.—Perrot, M6m., 55, 1864. Sivux.—Boudi- 
not, Star in the West, 128, 1816 (misprint). 
Siwer.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog.. 55, 1826. Soo.— 
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 30,1806. Soues.—Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., I, 70, note, 1893. Souex.— 
Ibid. Souix.—Ibid. Sous.—Gorrell (1761) in Wis. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 26, 1855. Soux.—Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., i, 70, note, 1893. Su.—Gatschet, 
Kaw vocab., B. A. E., 27,1878 (Kansa form). Sue.— 
Croghan (1765), Jour., 38, 1831. Suil.—Ibid., 37. 
Sun-nun'-at.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 357, 1862 (Arikara name). Suouex.—Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., I, 70, note, 1893. Tsaba’kosh.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 1896 (‘cut¬ 
throats’: Caddo name). Tuyetchiske.—ten Kate, 
Synonymie, 9, 1884 (Comanche name: ‘cut¬ 
throats’). Wadoiiissians.—Hennepin quoted by 
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 72, 1849. Wanak.—Bel- 
court (1850-56) in Minn. Hist. Coll., I, 235, 1872 
(Chippewa name). Wa-sa-sa-o-no.—Morgan in 
N. Am. Rev., 52, note, 1870 (Iroquois name). Wji- 
sa'-seh-o-no.—Morgan, League of Iroquois, 268, 
1851 (Senecaname). Yu n ssaha.—Gatschet, Wyan¬ 
dot MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Wyandot name: ‘birds’). 
Zue.—Croghan (1759), Hist. West. Penn., 146, note, 
1851 (given as French form). 

Dakota turnip. See Tipsinah. 

Daktlawedi. A Tlingit clan belonging 
to the Wolf phratry. It is found at Ton¬ 
gas, Killisnoo, and among the Chilkat, 
while the Tsaguedi of Kake is a branch. 

Dakla-weti. — Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. 
DAq! lawe'di.— Swan ton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Takla-uedi.—Krause, op. cit., 116. Taktla-uedi.— 
Ibid., 120. 

Dakubetede. A group of Athapascan 
villages formerly on Applegate cr., Greg. 
The inhabitants spoke a dialect practi¬ 
cally identical with that employed by the 
Taltushtuntede who lived on Gallice cr. 
not far from them. They were inter¬ 
married with the Shasta, who, with the 
Takilman, were their neighbors. With 
other insurgent bands they were removed 
to the Siletz res. in 1856. 

Applegate Creek.—Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
464, 1854. Da'-ku-be te'-de.—Dorsey in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 235, 1890 (own name). 
Do-dah-ho.—Gibbs, letter to Hazen, B. A. E., 1856. 
Etch-kah-taw-wah.—Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 464, 
1854. Nl'ckitc hitclum.—Dorsey, Alsea MS. vo¬ 
cab., B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea name: ‘people far up 
the stream’). Spena.—Gibbs, letter to Hazen, 
1856, B. A. E. Ts’u-qus-li'-qwut-me' pinne.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 235, 1890 
(NaltilnnetOnnC name). 

Dalles Indians. The Chinookan tribes 
formerly living at The Dalles, Oreg., and 
on the opposite side of Columbia r. 
While tribes of other stocks, notably 
Shahaptian, frequently visited The Dalles 
during the summer, they were not per¬ 
manent residents. Of the Chinookan 
tribes the Wasco were important, and 
the term is sometimes limited to that 
tribe. ( L . f.) 


BULL. 30] 


DANCE 


381 


Dalles.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 622, 1873. Dalles 
Indians.—White in Ind. Aff. Rep., 204,1844. Dalis 
Indians. — Lee and Frost, Oregon, 96, 1844. La 
Dalle Indians.—M’Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis 
and Clark, u, 386, note, 1842. La Dalles Indians — 
Parker, Jour., 140, 1846. 

Dance. Nature is prodigal of life and 
energy. The dance is universal and in¬ 
stinctive. Primarily the dance expresses 
the joy of biotic exaltation, the exuber¬ 
ance of life and energy; it is the ready 
physical means of manifesting the emo¬ 
tions of joy and of expressing the exulta¬ 
tion of conscious strength and the ecstasy 
of successful achievement—the fruitage 
of well-directed energy. Like modern 
music, through long development and 
divergent growth the dance has been 
adapted to the environment of many and 
diverse planes of culture and thought; 
hence it is found among both savage and 
enlightened peoples in many complex 
and differing forms and kinds. But the 
dance of the older time was fraught with 
symbolism and mystic meaning which it 
has lost in civilization and enlightenment. 
It is confined to no one country of the 
world, to no period of ancient or modern 
time, and to no plane of human culture. 

Strictly interpreted, therefore, the dance 
seems to constitute an important adjunct 
rather than the basis of the social, mili¬ 
tary, religious, and other activities de¬ 
signed to avoid evil and to secure welfare. 
A contrary view renders a general defini¬ 
tion and interpretation of the dance com¬ 
plex and difficult, apparently requiring a 
detailed description of the various activi¬ 
ties of which it became a part. For if the 
dance is to be regarded as the basis of 
these activities, then these ceremonies 
and observances must be defined strictly 
as normal developments of the dance, a 
procedure which is plainly erroneous. 
The truth appears to be that the dance is 
only an element, not the basis, of the 
several festivals, rites, and ceremonies 
performed in accordance with well-defined 
rules and usages, of which it has become 
a part. The dance was a powerful im¬ 
pulse to their performance, not the mo¬ 
tive of their observance. 

Among the Indians n. of Mexico the 
dance usually consists of rhythmic and 
not always graceful gestures, attitudes, 
and movements of the body and limbs, 
accompanied by steps usually made to 
accord with the time of some form of 
music, produced either by the dancer or 
dancers or by one or more attendant 
singers. Drums, rattles, and sometimes 
bone or reed flutes are used to aid the 
singers. Every kind and class of dance 
has its own peculiar steps, attitudes, 
rhythm, figures, song or songs with 
words and accompanying music, and 
costumes. 


The word or logos of the song or chant 
in savage and barbaric planes of thought 
and culture expressed the action of the 
orenda, or esoteric magic power, regarded 
as immanent in the rite or ceremony of 
which the dance was a dominant adjunct 
and impulse. In the lower planes of 
thought the dance was inseparable from 
the song or chant, which not only started 
and accompanied but also embodied it. 

Some dances are peculiar to men and 
others to women. Some dances are per¬ 
formed, by a single dancer, others belong 
respectively to individuals, like those of 
the Onthonrontha (‘one chants’) among 
the Iroquois; other dances are for all who 
may wish to take part, the number then 
being limited only by the space available; 
still others are for specified classes of per¬ 
sons, members of certain orders, societies, 
or fraternities. There are, therefore, per¬ 
sonal, fraternal, clan or gentile, tribal, and 
inter-tribal dances; there are also social, 
erotic, comic, mimic, patriotic, military or 
warlike, invocative, offertory, and mourn¬ 
ing dances, as well as those expressive of 
gratitude and thanksgiving. Morgan 
(League of the Iroquois, i, 278,1904) gives 
a list of 32 leading dances of the Seneca 
Iroquois, of which 6 are costume dances, 
14 are for both men and women, 11 for 
men only, and 7 for women only. Three 
of the costume dances occur in those 
exclusively for men, and the other 3 in 
those for both men and women. 

In general among the American Indians 
the heel and the ball of the foot are lifted 
and then brought down with great force 
and swiftness in such wise as to produce 
a resounding concussion. Usually the 
changes of position of the dancer are slow, 
but the changes of attitude are sometimes 
rapid and violent. The women employ 
several steps, sometimes employed also 
by the men, among which are the shuffle, 
the glide, and the hop or leap. Holding 
both feet together and usually facing the 
song altar, the women generally take a 
leap or hop sidewise in advance and then 
a shorter one in recoil, so that after every 
two hops the position is slightly advanced. 
They do not employ the violent steps and 
forceful attitudes in vogue among the 
men. They keep the body quite erect, 
alternately advancing either shoulder 
slightly, which gives them a peculiar 
swaying or rocking motion, resembling the 
waving of a wind-rocked stalk of corn. 
Indeed, among the Onondaga, Cayuga, 
and other Iroquois tribes, one of the 
names for “woman” ( wathonwisas , ‘she 
sways or rocks’) is a term taken from 
this rocking or swaying motion. 

Among some tribes, when the warriors 
were absent on a hunting or war expe¬ 
dition, the w r Qtt\eu performed appropriate 


382 


DANOKHA-DAVIS 


[ B. A. E. 


dances to insure their safety and success. 
Among the same people in the dances in 
which women may take part, these, 
under the conduct of a leader with one 
or more aids, form a circle around the 
song altar (the mat or bench provided 
for the singer or singers), maintaining an 
interval of from 2 to 5 feet. Then, out¬ 
side of this circle the men, under like 
leadership, form another circle at a suit¬ 
able distance from that of the women. 
Then the two circles, which are usually 
not closed between the leaders and the 
ends of the circles, move around the song 
altar from the right to the left in such 
manner that at all times the heads of the 
circles of dancers move along a course 
meeting the advancing sun (their elder 
brother), whose apparent motion is con¬ 
versely from the left to the right of the 
observer. In the Santee Dakota dance a 
similar movement around the center of 
the circle from right to left is also ob¬ 
served. Among the Muskhogean tribes, 
however, the two circles move in opposite 
directions, the men with the course of the 
sun and the women contrary to it (Bar- 
tram ). Among the Santee the women may 
dance only at the meeting of the “ medi¬ 
cine ” society of which they are members; 
they alone dance the scalp dance while 
the warriors sing. Rev. John Eastman 
says that in dancing the Santee form 3 cir¬ 
cles, the innermost composed of men, the 
middle of children, and the outermost of 
women. According to Le Page Du Pratz, 
these circles, among the Natchez, moved 
in opposite directions, the women turn¬ 
ing from left to right, and the men from 
right to left. This movement of the cir¬ 
cles from right to left seems designed to 
prevent the dancer in the entire course 
around the song altar from turning his 
back to the sun. 

The Mandan and other Siouan tribes 
dance in an elaborate ceremony, called 
the Buffalo dance, to bring game when 
food is scarce, in accordance with a well- 
defined ritual. In like manner the In¬ 
dians of the arid region of the S. W. per¬ 
form long and intricate ceremonies with 
the accompaniment of the dance ceremo¬ 
nies which, in the main, are invocations 
or prayers for rain and bountiful harvests 
and the creation of life. Among the 
Iroquois, in the so-called green-corn 
dance, the shamans urge the people to 
participate in order to show gratitude for 
bountiful harvests, the preservation of 
their lives, and appreciation of the 
blessings of the expiring year. The ghost 
dance, the snake dance, the sun dance, 
the scalp dance, and the calumet dance 
(q. v.), each performed for one or more 
purposes, are not developments from the 
dance, but rather the dance has become 
only a part of the ritual of each of these 


important observances, which by me¬ 
tonymy have been called by the name of 
only a small but conspicuous part or ele¬ 
ment of the entire ceremony. 

Consult Bartram, Travels, 1792; Jesuit 
Relations, Thwaites ed., i-lxxiii, 1896- 
1901; Margry, Dec., i-vi, 1875-86; Mor¬ 
gan, League of the Iroquois, 1857, 1904; 
Lafitau, Mceurs des Sauvages, 1724; Le 
Page Du Pratz, Hist, de la Louisiane, 1758. 

(j. N. B. H.) 

Danokha ( Danoxa ). A former Porno 
village on the n. shore of Clear lake, Cal. 

(S. A. B.) 

Dapishul ( Dd-pi-shul , ‘high sun’). A 
former Pomo village in Redwood valley, 
Mendocino co., Cal.—Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., hi, 155, 1877. 

Daquinatinno (Caddo: atino ‘red’). A 
tribe of n. e. Texas in 1687, said to be 
allies of the Caddo, and probably related 
to them.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., 
in, 410, 1878. Cf. Daquio , Daycao. 

Daquio. One of the bands, mostly 
Caddoan, who were allies of the Caddo 
in Texas in 1687 (Margry, Dec., hi, 410, 
1878). Possibly the same as the Daycao 
of the narratives of De Soto’s expedition 
of 1542 (Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in Bourne, 
Narr. De Soto, i, 182, 1904). 

Darby’s Village. A former Huron vil¬ 
lage on upper Darby cr., about midway 
between the present Columbus and 
Marysville, Ohio.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. 
A. E., pi. clvi, 1899. 

Dart sling. See Throwing-stick. 

Dasamonquepeuc. An Algonquian vil¬ 
lage on the coast of Dare co., N. C., op- 
osite Roanoke id., in 1587. 
asamanquepeio.—Strachey ( ca . 1612), Virginia, 
147, 1849. Dasamanquepeuk.—Ibid., 152. Dasa- 
monpeack.—Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia, 
1,91, repr. 1819. Dasamonquepeio.—Hakluyt(1600), 
Voy., nr, 344-345, repr. 1810. Dasamonquepeuk.— 
Strachey,op.cit., 151. Dasamoquepeuk.—Ibid., 150. 
Dasamotiqueperc.—Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1856 (misprint). Lassamon- 
peack.—Lane, op. cit., 92. Dassamopoque.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, I, map, repr. 1819. Dessamon- 
peake.—Morse, N. Am., 159, 1776. Dessamopeak.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 93,1857. 

Dasoak (‘flying’). A clan of the 
Huron. 

Datcho. An unidentified Texan tribe or 
division hostile to the Caddo in 1687.— 
Joutel (1687) in Margry, Dec., hi, 409, 
1878. Cf. Kadohadacho. 

Daupom Wintun (‘sloping-ground Win- 
tun’). A Wintun tribe formerly living 
in Cottonwood valley, Shasta co., Cal. 
Cottonwoods.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
230, 1877. Dau-pum Wintun.— Ibid. Valley In¬ 
dians.— Ibid. Waikemi. —Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 
(Yuki name of Cottonwood Creek Wintun; prob¬ 
ably the same). 

Davis, John. A full-blood Creek, born 
in the “Old Nation.” In the War of 
1812, when a boy, he was taken prisoner, 
and was reared by a white man. He 
emigrated from Alabama in 1829, and 
was educated at the Union Mission after 


BULL. 30 J 


DAWES COMMISSION-DEKANAWIDA 


383 


reaching Indian Territory. He had good 
talents, and in early manhood became a 
valuable helper to the missionaries as in¬ 
terpreter and speaker in public meetings. 
He was an active worker in 1830, and 
died about 10 years later. Two daugh¬ 
ters survive him, who were educated in 
the Presbyterian boarding school, one of 
whom, Susan, wife of John McIntosh, 
rendered important service to Mrs A. E. 
W. Robertson in her Creek translations. 
Davis was joint author with J. Lykens in 
translating the Gospel of John into Creek, 
published at the Shawanoe Baptist Mis¬ 
sion, Ind. Ter., in 1835, and was also a 
collaborator with R. M. Loughridge, D. 
Winslett, and W. S. Robertson in the 
translation into Creek of two volumes of 
hymns.—Pilling, Bibliog. Muskhogean 
Lang., Bull. B. A. E., 1889. 

Dawes Commission. See Commission to 
the Five Civilized Tribes. 

Daycao. A territory that lay 10 days’ 
journey beyond the extreme westerly 
point reached by Moscoso, of De Soto’s 
expedition, in 1542. The name was 
strictly that of a stream, possibly Trinity 
r., Texas, and is spoken of also as if desig¬ 
nating an Indian “province.” See 
Gentl. of Elvas in Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 
138-140, 1851. 

Dayoitgao (‘ there where it issues ’). A 
former Seneca village situated at Squakie 
hill, on Genesee r., near Mt Morris, N. Y. 
It received the name Squawkiehah from 
the fact that 700 Fox (Muskwaki) cap¬ 
tives were settled there by the Iroquois 
in 1681-83. The site was sold by the 
Seneca in 1825 and relinquished by them 
in 1827. See Squawkihow. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Da-yo-it-ga-o.—Morgan, League Iroq., 435, 1851. 
Squakie Hill village.—Ibid., 468. Squawkie Hill.— 
Conover, Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
( = Squawkiehah Ganadahah, ‘ Squawkiehah 
village lying high’). Squawkihows.—Cusick, 
Sketches Six Nations, 20, 1828. Squawky Hill.— 
Morris treaty (1797) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 820, 
1873. 

De. The Coyote clans of the Tewa 
pueblos of San Juan, Tesuque, and San 
Ildefonso, N. Mex. Those of Tesuque 
and San Ildefonso are extinct. 

De-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896 
(tdda= > people’). 

Deadoses. A small Texan tribe which 
in the 18th century lived with other 
tribes on San Xavier r., probably the 
San Miguel, which joins Little r. and 
flows into the Brazos about 150 m. from 
the gulf. In 1767-68 they were said to 
reside between Navasota and Trinity rs., 
and in 1771 were mentioned with the 
Tonkawa, Comanche, To wash (Wichita), 
and others as northern Texas tribes in 
contradistinction to the Cocos (Coaque), 
Karankawa, and others of the coast re¬ 
gion. If the Mayeyes were really related 
to the Tonkawa, as has been asserted, the 


fact that this tribe is mentioned with 
them may indicate that the language of 
the Deadoses resembled that of the Ton¬ 
kawa. They may have been swept 
away by the epidemic that raged among 
the Indians of Texas in 1777-78. 

(h. E. B. j. r. s.) 

Decoration. See Adornment, Art, Cloth¬ 
ing, Ornament. 

Deep Creek Spokan. A former Spokan 
colony that lived 17 m. s. w. of Spokane 
falls, now Spokane, Wash. The colony 
was established for farming purposes; 
pop. about 30 in 1880.—Warner in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 67, 1880. 

Deer Skins. Apparently a division of 
the northern Athapascans, as they are 
mentioned as belonging to a group in¬ 
cluding the Beaver Hunters, Flatside 
Dogs (Thlingchadinne), and Slaves.— 
Smet, Oregon Missions, 164, 1847. 

Defense. See Fortification. 

Deformation. See Artificial head defor¬ 
mation. 

Degataga. See Stand Watie. 

Dekanawida (‘two river-currents flow¬ 
ing together.’—Hewitt). An Iroquois 
prophet, statesman, and lawgiver, who 
lived probably during the second and 
third quarters of the 15th century, and 
who, conjointly with Hiawatha, planned 
and founded the historical confederation 
of the five Iroquois tribes. According to 
a circumstantial tradition, he was born in 
the vicinity of Kingston, Ontario, Canada, 
in what then was probably Huron terri¬ 
tory. He was reputed to have been one 
of 7 brothers. Definite tradition gives 
him rank with the demigods, owing to the 
masterful orenda or magic power with 
which he worked tirelessly to overcome 
the obstacles and difficulties of his task, 
the astuteness he displayed in negotia¬ 
tion, and the wisdom he exhibited in 
framing the laws and in establishing the 
fundamental principles on which they 
were based and on which rested the en¬ 
tire structure of the Iroquois confedera¬ 
tion. Omens foreshadowed his birth, 
and portents accompanying this event 
revealed the fact to his virgin mother 
that Dekanawida would be the source 
of evil to her people, referring to the 
destruction of the Huron confederation 
by that of the Iroquois. Hence at his 
birth his mother and grandmother, with 
true womanly patriotism, sought to 
spare their country woes by attempting 
to clrown the new-born infant by thrust¬ 
ing it through a hole made in the ice 
covering a neighboring river. Three at¬ 
tempts were made, but in the morning 
after each attempt the young Dekanawida 
was found unharmed in the arms of the 
astonished mother. Thereupon the two 
women decided that it was decreed that 


384 


DEKANISORA-DEKAURY 


[B. A. E. 


he should live, and so resolved to rear 
him. Rapidly he grew to man’s estate, 
and then, saying that he must take up 
his foreordained work, departed south¬ 
ward, first assuring his mother that in 
the event of his death by violence or 
sorcery, the otter skin flayed entire 
which, with the head downward, he had 
hung in a corner of the lodge, would 
vomit blood. Dekanawida was probably 
a Huron by blood, but perhaps an Iro¬ 
quois by adoption. In the long and 
tedious negotiations preceding the final 
establishment of the historical confed¬ 
eration of the five Iroquois tribes, he 
endeavored to persuade the Erie and the 
Neuter tribes also to join the confedera¬ 
tion; these tribes, so far as known, were 
always friendly with the Huron people, 
and their representatives probably knew 
of Dekanawida’s Huron extraction. 
Many of the constitutional princi¬ 
ples, laws, and regulations of the con¬ 
federation are attributed to him. His 
chiefship did not belong to the hereditary 
class, but to the merit class, commonly 
styled the ‘pine-tree chiefs.’ Hence, he 
could forbid the appointment of a suc¬ 
cessor to his office, and could exclaim, 
“Toothers let there be successors, for 
like them they can advise you. I have 
established your commonwealth, and 
none has done what I have.” But it is 
probable that prohibition was attributed 
to Mm in later times when the true nature 
of the merit chiefs had become obscured. 
Hence it is the peculiar honor of the 
merit chiefs of to-day not to be condoled 
officially after death, nor to have suc¬ 
cessors to their chieftaincies. For these 
reasons the title Dekanawida does not 
belong to the roll of 50 federal league 
chiefships. (j. n. b. h.) 

Dekanisora. An Onondaga chief who 
came into prominence in the latter part 
of the 17th century, chiefly through 
his oratorical powers and his efforts to 
maintain peace with both the French and 
the English. He was first mentioned by 
Charlevoix in 1682 as a member of an 
embassy from the Iroquois to the ‘French 
at Montreal. He was also one of the em¬ 
bassy to the French in 1688, which was 
captured by Adario (Le Rat), and then 
released by the wily captor under the 
plea that there had been a mistake, blam¬ 
ing the French for the purpose of widen¬ 
ing the breach between them and the 
Iroquois. Colden (Hist. Five Nat., i, 165, 
1755) says Dekanisora was tall and well 
made, and that he “had for many years 
the greatest reputation among the Five 
Nations for speaking, and was generally 
employed as their speaker in their nego¬ 
tiations with both French and English.” 
His death is supposed to have occurred 
about 1730, as he was a very old man 


when he was a member of an embassy at 
Albany in 1726. (c. t. ) 

Dekanoagah (‘between the rapids.’— 
Hewitt). A village, inhabited by Seneca, 
Nanticoke, Conoy, and remnants of other 
tribes, placed by Gov. Evans (Day, Penn., 
391, 1843) in 1707 on Susquehanna r., 
about 9 m. from Pequehan, the Shawnee 
village on the e. side of the Susquehanna, 
just below Conestoga cr., in Lancaster 
co... Pa. 

Dekaury, Choukeka. A chief of the 
Winnebago tribe, born about 1730. He 
was the son of Sabrevoir De Carrie, an 
officer of the French army in 1699, and 
Hopoekaw, daughter of a principal Win¬ 
nebago chief, whom he married in 1729, 
spoken of by Carver (Travels, 20, 1796) 
as the queen of the Winnebago. Their 
son, Choukeka (‘Spoon’), was known 
to the whites as Spoon Dekaury. After 
having been made chief he became the 
leader of attacks on the Chippewa during 
a war with the Winnebago, but he main¬ 
tained friendly relations with the whites. 
It was principally through his influence 
that the treaty of June 3, 1816, at St 
Louis, Mo., was brought about. His wife 
was a daughter of Nawkaw. He died at 
Portage, Wis., in 1816, leaving 6 sons and 
5 daughters. 

Dekaury, Konoka. The eldest son and 
successor of Choukeka Dekaury, born in 
1747. He was named Konoka (‘Eldest’) 
Dekaury, and is often mentioned as ‘ ‘ Old 
Dekaury,” but is equally well known as 
Schachipkaka. Before his father’s death, 
in 1816, Konoka had joined a band of 
Winnebago who took part, in 1813, in 
the attack led by Proctor on Ft Stephen¬ 
son, on lower Sandusky r., Ohio, which 
was gallantly defended by Maj. George 
Croghan. He fought also in the battle 
of the Thames, in Canada. He was held 
for a time, in 1827, as a hostage at Prairie 
du Chien for the delivery of Red Bird. 
His band usually encamped at the port¬ 
age of Wisconsin r., the site of the present 
Portage, Wis. Mrs Kinzie (Wau-Bun, 
89, 1856) describes him as “the most 
noble, dignified, and venerable of his 
own or indeed of any other tribe,” hav¬ 
ing a fine Roman countenance, his head 
bald except for a solitary tuft of long, 
silvery hair neatly tied and falling back 
on his shoulders, and exhibiting a de¬ 
meanor always courteous, while his 
dress was always neat and unosten¬ 
tatious. He signed the treaty of Prairie 
du Chien Aug. 19, 1825, on behalf of the 
Winnebago, and died on Wisconsin r. 
Apr. 20, 1836. 

Other members of the family, whose 
name has been variously written DeKaury, 
DeKauray, DayKaurav, Day Korah, Da- 
corah, and DeCorrah, were noted. From 
Choukeka’s daughters, who married white 


BULL. 301 


DELAWARE 


385 


men, are descended several well-known 
families of Wisconsin and Minnesota. 

(c. t.) 

Delaware. A confederacy, formerly the 
most important of the Algonquian stock, 
occupying the entire basin of Delaware 
r. in e. Pennsylvania and s. e. New 
York, together with most of New Jersey 
and Delaware. They called themselves 
Lem'ipe or Leni-lendpe, equivalent to ‘real 
men,’ or ‘ native, genuine men ’; the Eng¬ 
lish knew them as Delawares, from the 
name of their principal river; the French 
called them Loups, ‘wolves,’ a term 
probably applied originally to the Ma¬ 
hican on Hudson r., afterward extended 
to the Munsee division and to the whole 
group. _To the more remote Algonquian 



JACK HARRY (wAIAWAKWAKUMAU, TRAMPING EVERYWHERE) — 
DELAWARE 


tribes they, together with all their cog¬ 
nate tribes along the coast far up into 
New England, were known as Wapa- 
nachki, ‘easterners,’ or ‘eastern land 
people,’ a term which appears also as a 
specific tribal designation in the form of 
Abnaki. By virtue of admitted priority 
of political rank and of occupying the 
central home territory, from which most 
of the cognate tribes had diverged, they 
were accorded by all the Algonquian 
tribes the respectful title of “grand¬ 
father,” a recognition accorded by cour¬ 
tesy also by the Huron. The Nanti- 
coke, Conoy, Shawnee, and Mahican 
claimed close connection with the Dela¬ 
wares and preserved the tradition of a 
common origin. 

The Len&pe, or Delawares proper, were 
composed of 3 principal tribes, treated by 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-25 


Morgan as phratries, viz: Munsee, Unami, 
and Unalachtigo (q. v.), besides which 
some of the New Jersey bands may have 
constituted a fourth. Each of these had 
its own territory and dialect, with more 
or less separate identity, the Munsee par¬ 
ticularly being so far differentiated as fre¬ 
quently to be considered an independent 
people. 

The early traditional history of the 
Lendpe is contained in their national 
legend, the Walam Olum (q. v.). When 
they made their first treaty with Penn, 
in 1682, the Delawares had their council 
fire at Shackamaxon, about the present 
Germantown, suburb of Philadelphia, 
and under various local names occupied 
the whole country along the river. To 
this early period belongs their great chief, 
Tamenend, from whom the Tammany 
Society takes its name. The different 
bands frequently acted separately but re¬ 
garded themselves as part of one great 
body. About the year 1720 the Iroquois 
assumed dominion over them, forbidding 
them to make war or sales of lands, a 
condition which lasted until about the 
opening of the French and Indian war. 
As the whites, under the sanction of the 
Iroquois, crowded them out of their 
ancient homes, the Delawares removed 
to the Susquehanna, settling at Wyoming 
and other points about 1742. They soon 
crossed the mountains to the headwaters 
of the Allegheny, the first of them hav¬ 
ing settled upon that stream in 1724. In 
1751, by invitation of the Huron, they 
began to form settlements in e. Ohio, and 
in a few years the greater part of the 
Delawares were fixed upon the Mus¬ 
kingum and other streams in e. Ohio, 
together with the Munsee and Mahican, 
who had accompanied them from the E., 
being driven out by the same pressure 
and afterward consolidating with them. 
The Delawares, being now within reach 
of the French and backed by the western 
tribes, asserted their independence of the 
Iroquois, and in the subsequent wars up 
to the treaty of Greenville in 1795 showed 
themselves" the most determined op¬ 
ponents of the advancing whites. The 
work of the devoted Moravian mission¬ 
aries in the 17th and 18th centuries forms 
an important part of the history of these 
tribes (see Gnadenhuetten, Missions). 
About the year 1770 the Delawares re¬ 
ceived permission from the Miami and 
Piankishaw to occupy the country be¬ 
tween the Ohio and White rs., in Indiana, 
where at one time they had 6 villages. 
In 1789, by permission of the Spanish 
government, a part of them removed to 
Missouri, and afterward to Arkansas, to¬ 
gether with a band of Shawnee. By 1820 
the two bands had found their way to 
Texas, where the Delawares numbered at 





386 


DELAWARE 


[B. a. e. 


that time probably at least 700. By the 
year 1835 most of the tribe had been gath¬ 
ered on a reservation in Kansas, from 
which they removed, in 1867, to Indian 
Ter. and incorporated with the Cherokee 
Nation. Another band is affiliated with 
the Caddo and Wichita in w. Oklahoma, 
besides which there are a few scattered 
remnants in the United States, w T ith sev¬ 
eral hundred in Canada, under the va¬ 
rious names of Delawares, Munsee, and 
Moravians. 

It is impossible to get a definite idea of 
the numbers of the Delawares at any 
ejiven period, owing to the fact that they 
have always been closely connected with 
other tribes, and have hardly formed 
one compact body since leaving the At¬ 
lantic coast. All the estimates of the 
last century give them and their con¬ 
nected tribes from about 2,400 to 3,000, 
while the estimates within the present 
century are much lower. Their present 
population, including the Munsee, is 
about 1,900, distributed as follows: In¬ 
corporated with Cherokee Nation, Ind.T., 
870; Wichita res., Oklahoma, 95; Munsee, 
with Stockbridges, in Wisconsin, perhaps 
260; Munsee, with Chippewa, in Kansas, 
perhaps45; “Moravians of the Thames,” 
Ontario, 347; “ Munsees of the Thames,” 
Ontario, 122, with Six Nations on Grand 
r., Ontario, 150. 

According to Morgan (Anc. Soc., 171, 
1877) the Delawares have 3 clans (called 
by him gentes), or phratries, divided 
into 34 subclans, not including 2 sub¬ 
clans now extinct. These clans, which 
are the same among the Munsee and Ma- 
hican, are: (1) Took-seat (‘round paw,’ 
‘wolf’). (2) Pokekooungo (‘crawling,’ 
‘turtle’). (3) Pullaook (‘non-chewing,’ 
‘turkey’). These clans—Wolf, Turtle, 
and Turkey—are comm only given as syn¬ 
onymous with Munsee, Unami, and Una- 
lachtigo, the 3 divisions of the Delawares, 
exclusive of the New Jersey branch. Ac¬ 
cording to Brinton they are not clans, but 
mere totemic emblems of the 3 geographic 
divisions above named. Of these the 
Unami held the hereditary chieftainship. 
The New Jersey branch probably formed 
a fourth division, but those bands broke 
up at an early period and became incor- 

orated with the others. Many of them 

ad originally removed from the w. bank 
of Delaware r. to escape the inroads of 
the Conestoga. The 3 clans as given by 
Morgan are treated under the better 
known geographic names. 

The Took-seat, or Wolf clan, has the 
following 12 subdivisions: (1) Maangreet 
(big feet); (2) Weesowhetko (yellow tree); 
(3) Pasakunamon (pulling corn); (4) 
Weyarnihkato (care enterer, i. e. cave en- 
terer?); (5) Tooshwarkama (across the 
river); (6) Olumane (vermilion); (7) 


Punaryou (dog standing by fireside); 
(8) Kwineekcha (longbody); (9) Moon- 
hartarne (digging); (10) Nonharmin 
(pulling up stream); (11) Longushhar- 
karto (brush log); (12) Mawsootoh 
(bringing along). 

The Pokekooungo, or Turtle clan, has 
the following 10 subdivisions, 2 others be¬ 
ing extinct: (1) Okahoki (ruler); (2) Ta- 
koongoto (high bank shore); (3) Seehar- 
ongoto (drawing down hill); (4) Olehar- 
karmekarto (elector); (5) Maharolukti 
(brave); (6) Tooshkipakwisi (green 
leaves); (7) Tungulungsi (smallestturtle); 
(8) Welunungsi (little turtle); (9) Lee- 
kwinai (snapping turtle); (10) Kwisaese- 
keesto (deer). 

The Pullaook, or Turkey clan, has the 
following 12 subdivisions: (1) Moharala 
(bigbird); (2)Lelewayou (bird’scry) ;(3) 
Mookwungwahoki (eye pain); (4) Moo- 
harmowikarnu (scratch the path); (5) 
Opinghfki (opossum ground); (6) Muh- 
howekaken (old shin); (7) Tongonaoto 
(driftlog); (8) Noolamarlarmo (livingin 
water); (9) Muhkrentharne (rootdigger); 
(10) Muhkarmhukse (red face); (11) 
Koowahoke (pineregion); (12) Oochuk- 
ham (ground scratcher). 

The divisions of the Munsee, according 
to Ruttenber, were the Minisink, Waor- 
anec, Waranawonkong, Mamekoting, 
Wawarsink, and Catskill. He names 
among the Unami divisions the Navasink, 
Raritan, Hackensack, Aquackanonk, Tap- 
pan, and Haverstraw, all in n. New Jersey, 
but there w r ere others in Pennsylvania. 
Among the Unalachtigo divisions in Penn¬ 
sylvania and Delaware were probably the 
Neshamini, Shackamaxon, Passayonk, 
Okahoki, Hickory Indians (?), and Nan- 
tuxets. The Gachwechnagechga, or Le¬ 
high Indians, were probably of the Unami 
division. Among the New Jersey bands 
not classified are the Yacomanshaghking, 
Kahansuk, Konekotay, Meletecunk, Ma- 
tanakons, Eriwonec, Asomoche, Pomp- 
ton (probably a Munsee division), Ran- 
cocas, Tirans, Siconesses (Chiconessex), 
Sewapoo (perhaps in Delaware), Keche- 
meche, Mosilian, Axion, Calcefar, As- 
sunpink, Naraticon, and Manta (perhaps 
a Munsee division). The Nyack band, or 
village, in Rockland co., N. Y., may have 
belonged to the Unami. The Papagonk 
band and the Wysox probably belonged 
to the Munsee. See also Munsee , Unami, 
Unalachtigo. 

The following were Delaware vil¬ 
lages: Achsinnink, Ahasimus (Una¬ 
mi ?), Alamingo, Allaquippa, Alle¬ 
ghany, Aquackanonk, Au Glaize, Bald 
Eagle’s Nest, Beaversville, Bethlehem 
(Moravian), Black Hawk, Black Leg’s 
Village, Buckstown, Bullets Town (?), 
Cashiehtunk (Munsee?), Catawawe- 
shink (?), Chikohoki (Unalachtigo), 


BULL. 30] 


DELUGE MYTHS-DES CHUTES 


387 


Chilohocki (?), Chinklacamoose (?), Clis- 
towacka, Conedogwinit, Communipaw 
(Hackensack), Conemaugh, Coshocton, 
Crossweeksung, Custaloga’s Town, Edg- 
piiliik, Eriwonec, Frankstown (?), Fried- 
enshuetten (Moravian), Fried ensstadt 
(Moravian), Gekelemukpechuenk, Gnad- 
enhuetten (Moravian), Goshgoshunk, 
Grapevine Town (?), Greentown (?), 
Gweghkongh .(Unami ?), Hespatingh 
(Unami ?), Hickory town, Hockhocken, 
Hogstown (?), Hopocan, Jacob’s Cabins 
(?), Jeromestown (?), Kalbauvane (?) 
Kanestio, Kanhanghton, Katamoonchink 
(?), Kickenapawling (?), Killbuck’s 
Town, Kiskiminetas, Kiskominitoes, Kit- 
taning, Kohhokking, Kuskuski, Lacka- 
waxen (?), Languntennenk (Moravian), 
Lawunkhannek (Moravian), Lichtenau 
(Moravian), Macharienkonck (Mini¬ 
sink), Macock, Mahoning, Mamalty, , 
Matawoma, Mechgachkamic (Unami ?), 
Meggeckesson (?), Meniolagomeka, 
Meochkonck (Minisink), Minisink (Mini¬ 
sink), Mohickon John’s Town (Mahican 
?), Munceytown (Munsee), Muskingum, 
Nain (Moravian), Nescopeck, New- 
comerstown, New Town, Nyack (Unami), 
Ostonwackin, Outaunink (Munsee), 
Owl’s Town, Pakadasank (Munsee ?), 
Pakataghkon, Papagonk (?), Passayonk, 
Passycotcung (Munsee ?), Peckwes (?), 
Peixtan (mixed), Pematuning (?), Pe- 
quottink (Moravian), Playwickey, Poh- 
kopophunk, Queenashawakee, Rancocas, 
Remahenonc (Unami ?), Roymount, 
Salem, (Moravian), Salt Lick, Saw- 
cunk (with Shawnee and Mingo), 
Sawkin (?), Schepinaikonck (Munsee), 
Schipston (?), Schoenbrunn (Moravian), 
Seven Houses, Shackamaxon, Shamokin 
(with Seneca and Tutelo), Shannopin’s 
town, Shenango (with others), Sheshe- 
quin, Skehandowa (with Mahicans and 
Shawnee), Snakestown (?), Soupnapka 
(?), Three Legs Town, Tioga (with Mun¬ 
see and others), Tom’s Town, Tullihas, 
Tuscarawas, Venango (?), Wakatomica 
(with Mingo), Wechquetank (Moravian), 
Wekeeponall, Welagamika, White Eyes, 
White Woman, Will’s Town (?), Wape- 
minskink, Wapicomekoke, Wyalusing, 
Wyoming, Wysox (?). (j. m.) 

Abnaki. —For various forms applied to the Dela¬ 
wares, see under Abnaki. A-ko-tca-ka' ne n \— 
Hewitt, Mohawk MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (‘one 
who stammers in his speech’: Mohawk name 
used in derision of the strange tongue. See 
other forms under Mahican). A-ko-tca-ka-nha’. — 
Hewitt, Oneida MS. vocab., B. A. E. (Oneida 
name). A-kots-ha-ka-nen. —Hewitt, Mohawk MS. 
vocab., B. A. E. (Mohawk form). A-ku-tca-ka 1 '- 
nha’.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Tuscaroraform). Ana- 
kwan‘ki. —Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508, 
1900 (Cherokee name; an attempt at the Algon- 
quian Wapanaqti, ‘easterners’). Auquitsaukon.— 
Stiles (1756) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., vii, 74, 
1801. Delawar.— Lords of Trade (1756) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 120, 1856. Delawaras.— Mt 
Johnson Conference (1755), ibid., vi, 977, 1855. 


Delawares.— Lords of Trade (1721), ibid., v, 623, 
1855. Le Lawarrs. —Watts (1764) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc^ Coll., 4th s., x, 524,1871. Delaways.— Cowley 
(1775) in Arch, of Md., Jour, of Md. Convention, 
94, 1892. Delewares. —Glen (1750) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VI, 588, 1855. Delewars. — Campbell 
(1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc". Coll., 4th s., ix, 423,1871. 
Deleways.— Croghan (1760), ibid., 248. Deluas.— 
Soc. Geog. Mex., 268,1870. Dillewars. —Lewis and 
Clark, Trav., 12, 1806. Lenais. —Boudinot, Star in 
the W est, 127,1816. Lenalenape. —Am. Pion., 1 ,408, 
1842. Lenalinepies.— Jefferson (1785?), quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 669,1855. Lenap. —Raf- 
inesque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 31, 1824. Le¬ 
nape.— Heckewelder in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,2d s., 
x, 98, 1823. Lenapegi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1879 (Shawneename). Lenappe. — 
Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 44,1885. Lenappys. —Gor¬ 
don (1728) quoted byBrinton,Lenape Leg., 33,1885. 
Lenawpes. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 65, 1851. 
Lenelenape. — Am. Pion., II, 189, 1843. Lenele- 
noppes.— Proud, Penn., II, 295, 1798. Lenepee. — 
Gale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Leni-Lenape.— 
Nuttall, Jour., 250, 1821. Lenna-lenape. —Drake, 
Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Lennape. —Ibid., bk. 5, 
179. Lennapewi. — Squier quoted in Beach, 
Ind. Miscel., 28,1877. Lenni-lappe. —Maximilian, 
Trav., 39, note, 1843. Lenni-Lenape. —Loskiel 
(1794) quoted by Barton, New Views, app. 1,1798. 
Lenni-Lennape. —Barton, ibid., X. Lenno Lena- 
pees.— Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Proc., 80, 
1844. Lenno Lenapi. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi. 
573,1857. Lenno-Lennape. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., ii, 44,1836. Lenopi. —Easton treaty 
(1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 294,1856. Lenop- 
pea. —Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 366, 1816. Leo- 
nopi. —Thompson in Jefferson, Notes, 283, 1825. 
Leonopy.— Conference of 1759 quoted by Brinton, 
Lenape Leg., 34,1885. Xinapis. —Rafinesque, Am. 
Nations, I, 121, 1836. Linapiwi. —Squier quoted 
in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 28, 1877. Linnelinopies. — 
Croghan (1759) quoted by Jefferson, Notes, 142, 
1825. Linni linapi.—Rafinesque (1833) quoted by 
Brinton, Lenape Leg., 162,1885. Linnilinopes. — 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. Linnope. — 
McCoy, Ann. Reg. Ind. Aff., 27, 1836. Lleni- 
lenapes. —Nuttall, Jour., 283. 1821. Loup. — 
‘Wolf,’ the name applied by the French to the 
Delawares, Munsee, and Mahican; for forms see 
under Mahican. Mochomes. —Yates and Moulton 
in Ruttenber, TribesHudson R.,47, 1872 (‘Grand¬ 
father’: title given to the Delawares by those 
Algonquian tribes claiming descent from them). 
Nar-wah-ro. —Marcy,Red River, 273,1854 (Wichita 
name). Renapi.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 44, 1836 (given as Swedish form, but prop¬ 
erly the form used by the New Jersey branch of 
the tribe). Renni Renape. —Duponceau in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll.,2d s., vii, note, 1822 (form used in 
New Jersey and Delaware). Sag-a-na'-ga.— Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq., 338, 1851 (Iroquois name). 
Tca-ka'-ne». —Smith and Hewitt, Mohawk and 
Onondaga MS. vocabs., B. A. E., 1881 (Mohawk 
and Onondaga name). Tca-ka'-nha’.— Smith and 
Hewitt, Tuscarora, Cayuga, Seneca, Oneida, and 
Onondaga MS. vocabs., B. A. E., 1884 (Cayuga, 
Oneida, and Onondaga name). Tsa-ka-nha’-o- 
na n .— ibid. (Seneca name). Wapanachki.— For 
various forms applied to the Delawares see under 
Abnaki. 

Deluge myths. See Mythology. 

Descent. See Clan and Gens, Family. 
Kinship, Social organization. 

Des Chutes. A loosely defined Shahap- 
tian group living formerly on and about 
Deschutes r., Oreg. The term probably 
included remnants of several tribes. The 
name has passed out of use, and the In¬ 
dians, if any survive, are probably on the 
Warm Springs res., Oreg., under other 
names. * (l. f. ) 

De Chentes.—Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848 (misprint). De Chute 
river,—Farnham, Trav., 112, 1843. De Chutes,— 


388 


DESHU-DHATADA 


[B. A. E. 


Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. Des Chutes. — 
Wilkes in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 417,1855. Des Chute’s 
River.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 417, 1855. 
Deshoot. —Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 194, 1855. 
Deshoots. —Palmer in H. R. Ex. Doc. 93,34th Cong., 
1st sess.,23,1856. Fall Indians. —Parker, Jour., 137, 
1842. Falls Indians.— M’Vickar, Hist. Exped. 
Lewis and Clark, n, 386, note, 1842. 

Deshu. A former Chilkat town at the 
head of Lynn canal, Alaska. 

Dashu. —Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
in, pi. v, 1903. Decu'.— Swanton, field notes, B. 

A. E., 1904. 

Deshuhittan (‘ people of the house at the 
end of the road’). A Tlingit clan at Kil- 
lisnoo, Alaska, belonging to the Raven 
phratry. Formerly they lived at Angun. 
Dashiton. —Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
Ill, pi. xiii, 1903. De'citan.— Swanton, field notes, 

B. A. E., 1904 (contracted form of name). 

Decu'hit tan. —Ibid. Deschltan. —Krause, Tlinkit 
Ind., 118, 1885. 

Desnedekenade (‘people of the great 
river ’). A tribe of the Chipewyan group 
of the Athapascan family living along the 
banks of Great Slave r., Athabasca, Can¬ 
ada. There were 122 enumerated at Ft 
Resolution and 256 at Smith Landing in 
1904. 

Des-nedhe-kke-nade. —Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 363, 1891. 

Desnedeyarelottine (‘ people of the great 
river below’). An Etchareottine divi¬ 
sion living on the banks of upper Mac¬ 
kenzie r., British America. 
Des-nedhe-yape-rOttine. —Petitot, Autour du lac 
des Esclaves, 363, 1891. Gens du Fort Norman. — 
Petitot, Diet. Dene-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Tess-cho tin- 
neh. —Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS., B.A. E., 1866. 
Tpi-kka-Gottine. —Petitot, Autour, op. cit. (‘peo¬ 
ple on the water’). 

Dest. A former village, probably Tim- 
uquanan, in Florida, lat. 28° 30 / , near 
a small lake.—Bartram, Voy., i, map, 
1799. 

Destcaraguetaga. Named by La Salle 
(Margry, D£c., n, 149, 1877) with the 
Mahican, Manhattan, Minisink, and oth¬ 
ers as a New England tribe in 1681. 
Unidentified. 

Destchetinaye (‘tree in a spring of wa¬ 
ter’). A Coyotero band or clan at San 
Carlos agency, Ariz., in 1881; consid¬ 
ered by Bourke (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 112, 1890) to be an offshoot of a 
former clan of which the Titsessenaye 
also formed part. 

Destchin (‘ red paint ’). An Apache band 
or clan at San Carlos agency and Ft 
Apache, Ariz., in 1881 (Bourke in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, hi, 111, 1890); coordinate 
with the Chie of the Chiricahua and the 
Theshchini of the Navaho. 

Deshtchin.— Gatschet, Apache MS., B. A. E., 1883. 
Dis-cheine. —White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes, 
MS., B. A. E. 

Detsanayuka ( Detstinayuka , ‘bad camp¬ 
ers’). A division of the Comanche, for¬ 
merly called Nokoni (‘wanderers’), but 
on the death of a chief bearing the latter 
name their designation was changed. In 
1847 they were said to number 1,750, in 
250lodges, evidently a gross exaggeration; 


in 1869 their number was 312, and in 1872 
they were reported at 250. Their present 
population is unknown, as no official ac¬ 
count is now taken of the various Coman¬ 
che divisions. (j. m. ) 

Detsanayuka. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1044, 
1896. Go-about band. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 0,39th Cong., 
lstsess., 4,1866. Nacanes. —P^nicaut (1712) in Mar¬ 
gry, D6c., V, 504, 1883. Nacanne. —Jefferys (1763), 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Naconomes. —Rivera, Di- 
ario, leg. 2,602,1736. Nacunes. —Boudinot, Star in 
the West, 127,1816. Na-ko-nies. —Neighbors in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 577, 1848. No-co-me. —Leavenworth 
(1868) in H. R. Misc. Doc. 139, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 
6, 1870. Noconee.— Neighbors in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1856, 175, 1857. Noconi. — Pimentel, CuadroDesc., 
II, 347,1865 (or Yiuhta,confused with Ute). Noconi 
Comanches. — Leavenworth in Sen. Ex. Doc. 60, 
40th Cong., 2d sess., 3, 1869. No-coo-nees. —Butler 
in H. R. Doc„ 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. 
No'koni.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxiii, 300, 1886 (trans. ‘movers’). No-ko-nies. — 
Neighbors in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 127, 1852. 
People in a Circle. —Butler in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th 
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. Tist'shinoie'ka. —Hoff¬ 
man in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., xxiii, 299, 1886 
(trans. ‘ bad movers ’). Tistshnoie'ka. —Ibid., 300. 
Tiixtchenoyika. —Gatschet, Comanche MS., B. A. 
E., 1893 (trans. ‘people removing from place to 
place’). Wanderers. —Alvord in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
240, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 151, 1870. 

Devil. See Religion. 

Devil’s Medicine-man Band. A Sihasapa 
band; not identified.—Culbertson in 
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. 

Deyodeshot (‘there is a spring,’ from 
the neighboring Avon Springs.—Hewitt). 
A modern Seneca settlement that formerly 
stood about 2 m. s. e. of the present site 
of East Avon, on the site of the ancient 
Seneca settlement of Keinthe. (j. m. ) 
De-o'-de-sot?. —Morgan, League Iroq., 468, 1851. 
Deyode's’hot.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (correct Seneca 
form). Dyudoosot. —Shea, note in Charlevoix, 
New France, III, 289, 1868. Gandachioragon. — 
Jes. Rel. 1672, 24, 1858. Gandachiragou. — Jes. 
Rel. 1670, 69, 1858. Gannondata. — Denonville 
(1687) quoted by Morgan, League Iroq., 316,1851. 
Gannounata. —Denonville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IX, 367,1855. Ganochiaragon. —LaSalle (1682) 
in Margry, D6c., ii, 217,1877. Keint-he.— Green- 
halgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 111,251,1853. 
Onnenatu.— Belmont (1687) quoted by Conover, 
Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. Ounne- 
natu. —Ibid. Saint Jean. —Mission name about 
1670. Saint John. —The same. Tanochioragon. — 
Writer of 1686 in Margry, D6c., ii, 99, 1877. 

Deyohnegano (‘at the cold spring’). 
(1) A former Seneca village near Caledo¬ 
nia, N. Y.; (2) A former Seneca village 
on Allegany res., Cattaraugus co., N. Y., 
near Allegheny r. 

Allegany Village.—Morgan, League Iroq., 466, 
1851. Cananouagan.—La Tour, map, 1779. Cold 
Spring Village.—Brown, West. Gaz., 355, 1817. 
Deonagano.—Morgan, League Iroq., 466, 1851. 
Deyo-hne-ga'-no.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. Dune- 
wangua —Procter (1791) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., I, 152, 1832. 

Deyonongdadagana (‘two little hills close 
together. ’—Hewitt). An important Sen¬ 

eca village formerly on the w. bank of 
Genesee r. near Cuylerville, N. Y. The 
tract was sold by the Indians in 1803. 
De-o-nun'-da-ga-a.—Morgan, League Iroq., 426, 
1851. De-yo-non-da-da-ga n '-a.—Hewitt, inf’n, 

1886. Little Beard’s Town.—Morris deed (1797) in 
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 627,1832. 

Dhatada. One of the four gentes of the 
Hangashenu subdivision of the Omaha, 


BULL. 30] 


DHEGIHA-DICTIONARIES 


389 


The meaning is lost, although Dorsey 
translates it ‘bird.’ 

patada.—Dorsey in 31 Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1885; 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 226,1897. La'-ta-da.—Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 155,1877. 

Dhegiha (‘on this side.’—Fletcher). A 
term employed by J. O. Dorsey to distin¬ 
guish a group of "the Siouan family com¬ 
prising the Omaha, Ponca, Osage, Kansa, 
and Quapaw tribes. Dorsey arranged the 
group in two subdivisions: the Quapaw 
or Lower Dhegiha, consisting of the Qua¬ 
paw only; and the Omaha, or Upper 
Dhegiha, including with the Omaha, the 
Osage, Kansa, and Ponca. See Chiwere. 

^egiha.—Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 211, 1885 
(Ponca and Omaha name for themselves). 
0e3jaha.—Dorsey, Osage MS., B. A. E., 1883 (name 
of Osage for themselves). D^e-tu’.—Dorsey, 
KwapaMS. vocab.,B. A. E., 1891 (used by the Qua¬ 
paw in speaking of themselves). Dhegiha.—Dor¬ 
sey in Am. Antiq., 168, 1879. Yegaha.— Dor¬ 
sey, Kansas MS., B. A. E., 1883 (name of Kansa 
for themselves on their own land). 

Dhighida. A Ponca gens, divided into 
the subgentes Sindeagdhe and Wamii- 
tazhi, according to Dorsey. The mean¬ 
ing of the name is lost. 

pixida.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897 
(trans. ‘bird’). De-a-ghe'-ta.—Morgan, Anc.Soc., 
155, 1877 (trans. ‘ many people’). 

Dhiu. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in the 
Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, e. of the 
Rio Grande, and in all probability a vil¬ 
lage of the Piros or the Tigua. 

Dictionaries. Dictionaries have been 
made of at least 63 different North Ameri¬ 
can Indian languages belonging to 19 lin¬ 
guistic families, besides many vocabu¬ 
laries of other languages. Of 122 diction¬ 
aries mentioned below more than half are 
still in manuscript. 

Beginning with the Eskimauan family, 
vocabularies of Greenland Eskimo have 
been supplied by the labors of Egede 
(1750), Fabricius (1804), Kleinschmidt 
(1871), Rink (1877), and Kjer and Ras¬ 
mussen (1893); of Labrador Eskimo, by 
Erdmann (1864); of Chiglit (Kopag- 
miut), by Petitot (1876); and there are 
collections by Pinartof the Aleutian Fox 
(Unalaskan Aleut) dialect (1871, MS.), 
and of that of the Kaniagmiut (1871-72, 
MS.). 

In the Athapascan languages there are 
the dictionaries of V£greville for the 
Chipewyan (1853-90, MS.), the three¬ 
fold dictionary of Petitot for the Mon- 
tagnais (Chipewyan), Peau de Lievre 
(Kawchodinne), and Loucheux (Kut- 
chin) (1876); of Radloff for the Kenai 
(Knaiakhotana) (1874); of Garrioch 
(1885) for the Beaver (Tsattine); of 
Morice for the Tsilkotin (1884, MS.); 
of Matthews (1890, MS.) and Weber 
(1905, MS.) for the Navaho; and of God¬ 
dard for the Ilupa (1904, MS.). 


Of the languages of the Algonquian 
family, the Cree has dictionaries by Wat¬ 
kins (1865), Lacombe (1874), and Vegrd- 
ville ( ca . 1800, MS.); the Montagnais, by 
Silvy (ca. 1678, MS.), Favre (1696, MS.), 
Laure (1726, MS.), and Lemoine (1901); 
the Algonkin, 3 by anonymous Jesuit 
fathers (1661, 1662, 1667, all MS.) and 
leach by Andre (ca. 1688, MS.), Tha- 
venet (ca. 1815, MS.), and Cuoq (1886); 
the Micmac, by Rand (Micmac-English, 
1854, MS., and English-Micmac, 1888); 
the Malecite-Passamaquoddy, by Demil- 
lier (ca. 1840, MS.); the Abnaki, by 
Rasies (1691, first printed in 1833), Au- 
b6ry (1712-15, MS.), Lesueur (ca. 1750, 
MS.), Nudenans (1760, MS.), Mathevet 
(ca. 1780, MS.), andVetromile (1855-75, 
MS.); the Natick Massachuset, by Trum¬ 
bull (1903); the Delaware, by Ettwein 
(ca. 1788, MS.), Dencke (ca. 1820, MS.), 
Henry (1860, MS.), Zeisberger (1887), 
and Brinton and Anthony (1888);. Hie 
Ojibwa (Chippewa), by Belcourt^Mjf 
1840, MS.), Baraga (1853, new ed. 1878- 
80), Wilson (1874), and Ferard (1890, 
MS.); the Potawatomi, by Bourassa (ca. 
1840, MS.) and Gailland (ca. 1870, MS.); 
the Ottawa, by Jaunay (ca. 1740, MS. ); 
the Shawnee, by Gatschet (1894, MS.); 
the Peoria Illinois, by Gravier (ca. 1710, 
MS.) and Gatschet (1893, MS.); the 
Miami Illinois, by Le Boulanger (ca. 
1720, MS.); the Menominee, by Krake 
(1882-89, MS.) and Hoffman (1892); the 
Blackfoot( Siksika), by Lacombe (1882-83, 
MS.), Tims (1889), and McLean (1890, 
MS.). 

In the Iroquoian languages there are 
dictionaries of the Huron (Wyandot), by 
Le Caron (1616-25, MS.), Sagard (1632, 
repr. 1865), Breboeuf (ca. 1640, MS.), 
Chaumonot (ca. 1680, MS.), and Carheil 
(1744, MS.); of the Iroquois Mohawk, 
by Bruy as (1862), Marcoux (1844, MS.), 
and Cuoq (1882); of the Iroquois Seneca, 
by Jesuit fathers (MS.); the Iroquois 
Onondaga, by Jesuit fathers (printed in 
1860); of the Iroquois Tuscarora, by Mrs 
E. A. Smith (1880-82, MS.) and Hewitt 
(1886, MS.); besides extended glossaries 
of the Cherokee, by Gatschet (1881, MS.) 
and Mooney (1885, MS.; and 1900, 19th 
Rep. B. A. E.). 

In the Muskhogean languages there are 
the dictionaries of the Choctaw by Bying- 
ton (ca. 1865, MS.), Wright (1880), and 
Rouquette (ca. 1880, MS.); of the Mas- 
koki (Creek), by Robertson (1860-89, 
MS.) and Loughridge (1882, MS.). 

The Siouan family is provided with 
dictionaries of the Santee Dakota by 
Riggs (1852, 1890) and Williamson (1871, 
1886); of the Yankton Dakota, by Wil¬ 
liamson (1871); of the Quapaw, the Bi¬ 
loxi, the Winnebago, and the Dhegiha 


390 


DIEGUENOS-D1GHTON ROCK 


[b. a. e. 


(Omaha), by Dorsey (1891-95, MS.); of 
the Hidatsa, by Matthews (1873-74); and 
of the Kansa, by Bourassa (ca. 1850, MS.). 

Other linguistic families are represent¬ 
ed by dictionaries or extended glossaries 
as follows: Natchesan, Natchez lexicon, 
by Gatschet (1893, MS.); Chitimachan, 
Shetimasha (Chitimacha), by Gatschet 
(ca. 1880, MS.); Caddoan, Pawnee, by 
Dunbar (1880, MS.); Tonkawan, Ton- 
kawa, by Gatschet (ca. 1877, MS.); Kio- 
wan, Kiowa, by Mooney (1900, MS.); 
Shoshonean, Snake (Shoshoni), by Ge- 
bow (1864, 1868), and Comanche, by 
Rejon (1866); Koluschan, Chilkat, by 
Everette (ca. 1880, MS.); Chimmesyan, 
Tsimshian, by Boas (1898, MS.); Salishan, 
Kalispel by Giorda (1877—79), Twana by 
Eells (ca. 1880, MS.), and Nisqualli by 
Gibbs (1877); Chinookan, Chinook by 
Gibbs (1863) and Boas (1900, MS.), and 
Chinook jargon by Blanchet (1856), 

* 3(1863), Demers (1871), Gill (1882), 
h (1888), Tate (1889), Coones (1891), 
er (1891, MS.), StOnge (1892, MS.), 
Eells (1893, MS.); Kitunahan, Ku- 
tenai, by Chamberlain (1891-1905, MS.); 
Shahaptian, Nez Perce by McBeth (1893, 
MS.) and Gatschet (1896, MS.); Lutua- 
mian, Klamath by Gatschet (1890); Shas- 
tan, Shasta, by*Gatschet (1877, MS.); 
Piman, Cora by Ortega (1732, repr.1888), 
Opata by Pimentel (1863), and Tarahu- 
mare by Steffel (1791) and Lumholtz 
(1894, MS.). (w. e.) 

Dieguenos. A collective name, prob¬ 
ably in part synonymous with Comeya, 
applied by the Spaniards to Indians of 
the Yuman stock who formerly lived in 
and around San Diego, Cal., whence the 
term; it included representatives of many 
tribes and has no proper ethnic sig¬ 
nificance; nevertheless it is a firmly es¬ 
tablished name and is here accepted to 
include the tribes formerly living about 
San Diego and extending s. to about lat. 
31° 30'. A few Dieguenos still live in the 
neighborhood of San Diego. There are 
about 400 Indians included under this 
name as attached to the Mission agency of 
California, but they are now officially rec¬ 
ognized as part of the “Mission Indians.” 
The rancherias formerly occupied by the 
Dieguenos, so far as known, are: Abascal, 
Awhut, Cajon, Camaial, Campo, Capitan 
Grande, Cenyowprcukel(?), Cojuat, Co¬ 
quilt, Corral, Cosoy, Cuyamaca, Ekquall, 
Focomae, Gueymura, Hasoomale, Has- 
sasei, Hataam, Hawai, Hbnwee Val- 
lecito, Icayme, Inomassi, Inyaha, Kwal- 
whut, Laguna, La Punta, Lorenzo, Mac- 
tati, Maramoydos, Mataguay, Matamo, 
Matironn, Mattawottis, Melejo, Mesa 
Chiquita, Mesa Grande, Meti, Nellmole, 
Nipaguay, Otai, Otat, Pocol, Prickaway, 
San Dieguito, San Felipe, San Jos4, San 
Luis, San Pascual, Santa Isabel, Sequan, 


Suahpi, Tacahlay, Tahwie, Tapanque, 
Toowed, Valle delas Viejas, Wahti, Xam- 
acha, Xana, and Yacum. The Conejos 
and the Coyotes are mentioned as former 
bands of the Dieguenos. (h. w. h.) 

Daigano.—Palmer in Am. Nat., XI, 736, 1877. Dia- 
gano.—Ibid., 743. Diegana.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 361, 
1859. Diegeenos.—Whipple, Exp’n from San Di¬ 
ego to the Colorado, 2, 1851. Diegenes.—Sleigh 
(1873) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 91, 43d Cong., lstsess.,6, 
1874. Diegino.—Burton (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 115, 1857. Diegmons.— 
Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 20,1883. 
Dieguinos.—Wozencraft (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d ong., spec, sess., 288, 1853. Diegunos.—Whip¬ 
ple (1849) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 100,1852. 
Digenes.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 13, 1879. Diogenes.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1902, 595,1903. Disguino.—Burton (1856) 
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 127, 
1857. Kamia.—A. L. ICroeber, inf’n, 1905 (Mohave 
name; cf. Comeya). Llegeenos.—Whipple, Exp’n 
from San Diego to the Coldrado, 2,1851 (misprint). 
Lligunos.—Whipple (1849) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ii, 100, 1852 (misprint). 

Digger. Said by Powell to be the Eng¬ 
lish translation of Nuanuints, the name of 
a small tribe near St George, s. w. Utah. 
It was the only Paiute tribe practising 
agriculture, hence the original significa¬ 
tion of the name, “ digger.” In time the 
name was applied to every tribe known 
to use roots extensively for food and hence 
to be “diggers.” It thus included very 
many of the tribes of California, Oregon, 
Idaho, Utah, Nevada, and Arizona, 
tribes speaking widely different languages 
and embracing perhaps a dozen distinct 
linguistic stocks. As the root-eaters were 
supposed to represent a low type of In¬ 
dian, the term speedily became one of 
opprobium. (h. w. h. ) 

Digging sticks. See Agriculture , Per¬ 
forated stones. 

Dighton Rock. A mass of silicious con¬ 
glomerate lying in the margin of Taunton 
r., Bristol co., Mass., on which is an ancient, 
probably prehistoric, inscription. The 
length of the face measured at the base is 
11^ ft. and the height a little more than 
5 ft. The whole face, to within a few 
inches of the ground, is covered with the 
inscription, which consists of irregular 



DIGHTON ROCK, MASS. (LENGTH ABOUT 12 Ft) 


lines and outline figures, a few having a 
slight resemblance to runes; others tri¬ 
angular and circular, among which can 
be distinguished 3 outline faces. The ear¬ 
liest copy was that of Danforth in 1680. 
Cotton Mather copied a part as early as 
1690 and sent a rude woodcut of the entire 
inscription to the Royal Society of Great 
Britain in 1712. Copies were also made 



BULL. 30] 


DIPPERS AND LADLES-DISCOIDAL STONES 


391 


by Isaac Greenwood in 1730; by Stephen 
Sewell, of Cambridge, in 1768; by Prof. 
Winthrop in 1788; by Joseph Gooding in 
1790; by Edward A. Kendall in 1807; by 
Job Gardner in 1812, and one for the 
Rhode Island Historical Society in 1830. 
Soon after this the suggestion was made 
that it was a runic inscription of the 
Norsemen, and the interest excited by 
this caused it to be frequently copied and 
published. The subject, with accompa¬ 
nying figures, was thoroughly discussed 
by Danish antiquaries, especially by Rafn, 
in Antiquitates Americans (1837). The 
earlier drawings mentioned above are re¬ 
produced by Mallery (10th Rep. B. A. E., 
pi. xi, 1893). The annexed illustration 
from a photograph is perhaps the most 
nearly correct of any published. The 
opinions advanced in regard to the origin 
and signification of the inscription vary 
widely. The members of the French 
Academy, to whom a copy was sent, judged 
it to be Punic; Lort, in a paper in 
Archseologia (London, 1786), expressed 
the opinion that it was the work of a peo¬ 
ple from Siberia; Gen. Washington, who 
saw Winthrop’s drawings at Cambridge 
in 1789, pronounced the inscription simi¬ 
lar to those made by the Indians; Davis 
and Kendall also ascribed it to the Indians, 
the former thinking it represented an In¬ 
dian deer hunt. The Danish antiquaries 
decided that it was the work of the North-' 
men; Prof. Finn Magnusen interpreted 
the central portion, assuming it to consist 
of runes, as meaning that Thorfinn with 
151 men took possession of the country; 
and even Dr De Costa was persuaded that 
the central part is runic. Buckingham 
Smith, according to Haven (Proc. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., Apr. 29, 1863), was inclined 
to believe it to consist of ciphers used by 
the Roman Catholic Church. Schoolcraft, 
although charged with wavering in his 
opinion, decided without reservation in 
1853 that it was entirely Indian. The latter 
author submitted several drawings of the 
inscription to an Algonquian chief, who, 
rejecting a few of the figures near the cen¬ 
ter, interpreted the remainder as the me¬ 
morial of a battle between two native 
tribes. Although this Indian’s explana¬ 
tion is considered doubtful, the general 
conclusion of students in later years, 
especially after Mallery’s discussion, is 
that the inscription is the work of In¬ 
dians and belongs to a type found in 
Pennsylvania and at points in the W. 

Following are the more important 
writings on the subject of Dighton Rock: 
Antiquitates Americanse, 1837; Archaeolo- 
gia, vm, 1786; T. Evvbank, N. Am. Rock¬ 
writing, 1866; Gravier in Compte-rendu 
Cong. Internat. des Am^ricanistes, i, 1875; 
Haven in Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc., Apr. 
29, 1863, Oct. 21, 1864, Oct., 1867; Ken¬ 


dall, Trav., 11, 1809; Mallery in 10th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1893; Mem. Am. Acad. Arts 
and Sci., n, pt. 2, 1804, hi, pt. 1, 1809; 
Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond., xxvm, 
1714; Rau (1) in Am. Antiq., i, 1878; (2) 
in Mag. Am. Hist., Feb., 1878, Apr., 1879; 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 1851, iv, 1854; 
Trans. Soc. Antiquaries, Lond., 1732; 
Winsor, Hist. Am., i, 1884. (c. t.) 

Dippers and Ladles. See Receptacles. 
Discoidal stones. Prehistoric objects of 
unknown use (see Problematical objects) 
whose most typical form is that of a 
double-convex or double-concave lens. 



Disk of Granite; Virginia. 


The perimeter is a circle and the sides 
range from considerably convex through 
plane to deeply concave. The diameter 
varies from 1 in. to 8 in., the thickness 
from one-fourth of an inch to 6 in., very 
rarely passing these limits; the two di¬ 
mensions have no definite relation to 
each other. Some specimens are convex 
on one face and plane on the others but 
when one face is concave the oth^^V 
also. Of the latter form many haver a 
secondary depression at the center; others 
have a perforation which is sometimes 
enlarged until the disk becomes a ring. 
They are made principally of very hard 
rock, as quartz, flint, jasper, novaculite, 
quartzite, porphyry, syenite, and the like, 
though stone as 
soft as marble, 
sandstone, barite, 
and even steatite 
was sometimes 
chosen. No type 
of relics is more 
difficult to classify 
than these disks. 

The name first given them, and by which 
they are still commonly known, is “chun- 
key stones,” from the native name of the 
game played with analogous disks by 
southern Indians. But the description of 
the game, considered in connection with 
the great variation in size and material of 
the specimens, shows that only a small 
percentage of them could have been thus 
utilized. Culin believes that a limited 
number may be definitely regarded as 
chunkey stones. He recognizes three 
types: (1) perforated (leastcommon); (2) 
symmetrical, unperforated; (3) asym¬ 
metrical, unperforated. A similar diver¬ 
sity is observed in the stones used in the 
analogous Hawaiian game of maika (24th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1906). From the smooth, 
symmetrical, highly polished chunkey 
stone they merge by insensible grada¬ 
tions into mullers, pestles, mortars, pitted 
stones, polishingandgrindingstones, ham¬ 
mers, sinkers, club heads, and ornaments, 
for all of which purposes except the last 
they may have been used in some of 
their stages, so that no dividing line is 
possible. They present various styles 




892 


DISHES 


t B. A. B. 


and degrees of finish. Many retain their 
natural surface on both sides with the 
edge worked off by grinding or pecking, 
the latter marks possibly resulting from 
use as hammers. The sides may be 
ground down while the edge remains un¬ 
touched; or, when made from a thick 
pebble, the sides may be pecked and the 
edge ground. Some specimens which are 
entirely unworked require very close ex¬ 
amination to distinguish them from oth¬ 
ers whose whole surface has been artifi¬ 
cially produced. It is possible, however, 
to arrange a large number of specimens 
from one locality in a regular series from 
a roughly chipped disk to a finished 
product of the highest polish and sym¬ 
metry. The finest specimens, in greatest 
numbers, come from the states s. of the 
Ohio r., and from Arkansas eastward to 
the Atlantic. The territory within a 
rad ius of 100 m. around Chattanooga, 
and for about the same distance 
arownd Memphis, is especially rich in 
IBnii. From s. e. Ohio to central Mis¬ 
souri a considerable number has been 
found, though few of them are as well 
wrought as those from the S. Rather 
rough ones occur along the Delaware r. 
Beyond the limits indicated the type 
practically disappears. Discoidal stones 
corresponding closely with eastern types, 
save that the faces are rarely concave, 
are found in the Pueblo country and in 
the Pacific states. See Chunkey. 

Objects of the class here described are 
referred to by numerous authors, includ¬ 
ing Fowke (1) Arehieol. Hist. Ohio, 1902, 
(2) in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Jones, 
Antiq. So. Inds., 1873; Moorehead, Pre- 
hist. Impls., 1900; Squier and Davis, An¬ 
cient Monuments, 1848; Rau, Archseol. 
Coll. Nat. Mus., 1876; Thruston, Antiq. 
Tenn., 1897. (g. f.) 

Disease. See Health. 

Dishes. Vessels for the preparation and 
serving of food and other purposes were 
manufactured by all Indian tribes. While 
their use as receptacles prescribes a con¬ 
cavity of circular, oval, or oblong outline, 
there is a great variety of shape, decora¬ 
tion, etc., according to individual taste 
or tribal custom, and a wide range of 
material, as stone, shell, bone, ivory, 
horn, rawhide, bark, wood, gourd, pot¬ 
tery, and basketry. 

The vessels for serving food were not 
used to hold individual portions, for the 
Indians ate in common; but the little 
dishes held salt and other condiments, 
small quantities of delicate foods, etc. 
The larger dishes contained preparations 
of corn or other soft vegetables, and the 
trays and platters were for game, bread, 
etc., or for mixing or preparing food. 
In many cases the cooking pot held the 
common meal, and portions were taken 


out by means of small dishes and ladles, 
in which they were cooled and eaten. 
Some dishes had special uses, as platters, 
mats, and trays for drying fruits, roasting 
seeds, etc., and as ceremonial bowls, bas¬ 
kets, etc. 

From archeological sites have been col¬ 
lected many examples of dishes. Some 
made of soapstone were found in several 
Eastern and Southern states, and in 
Wyoming and California. Vessels formed 
of seashells, cut principally from Busy- 
con, and also from Cassis, Strum bus, and 
Fasdolaria, were found in Ohio, Indiana, 
Illinois, Iowa, Arkansas, Georgia, and 
Florida. Dishes of pottery come from 
many parts of the United States and some 
made of wood from Florida. 

The Indians in general used dishes of 
wood, and even where pottery, basketry, 
and bark were common, wooden vessels 
were made. Each region supplied suit¬ 
able woods. A predilection for burl wood 
and knots was general. The majority of 
existing wooden vessels were fashioned 
with iron tools, but before metal was 
introduced they were excavated by means 
of fire and stone tools. Eskimo wooden 
dishes were sometimes cut from a single 
piece, but they usually had a rim of bent 
wood fastened to the excavated bottom 
and were oval in shape. Those of the 
N. W. coast tribes were boxes of rectangu¬ 
lar shape, with scarfed and bent sides 
attached to the bottom; but the Indians 
also had excavated dishes carved to rep¬ 
resent animal forms in great variety, and 
small bowls of horn occur. The Salishan 
tribes made dishes of wood and horn 
which were elaborately carved. The 
northern Athapascans as a rule used 
dishes, platters, and trays of birch bark 
folded and sewed, but among some tribes 
the dishes were like those of the Eskimo. 

The Chippe wahad well-finished wooden 
dishes of rectangular, oval, or circular 
shape. The Iroquois made excellent 
dishes, cups, bowls, etc., of burl wood, 
and sometimes furnished them with han¬ 
dles. The Plains Indians also used in 
preference burl or knot wood, and while 
as a rule their dishes were simple in out¬ 
line and homely, some specimens were 
well carved and finished. The Virginia 
and other Southern Indians cut dishes, 
often of large size, from softwood; of these 
the Cherokee and Choctaw bowls and 
platters made of tupelo are noteworthy. 
The Ute made rude oval bowls with pro¬ 
jections at the ends, and oblong platters 
and knot bowls with handles. The 
Paiute used for dishes the carapace of the 
box turtle. The Pueblos, while relying 
mainly on pottery and basketry, had 
dishes wrought from knots and mountain- 
sheep horn. The Pima and Papago made 
oblong trays and shallow platters from 


BULL. 30] 


DISTANCIA-DJIGUAAHL-LANA8 


393 


mesquite wood. The Hupa of n. Califor¬ 
nia cut large, flat trays from redwood. 
The tribes of the Santa Barbara region, 
California, inlaid wooden vessels with 
mother-of-pearl. 

Bark dishes were extensively used by 
tribes within the birch area and to some 
extent by all the forest Indians. Those 
of the S. made great use of gourds. 

The Pueblo Indians employed pottery 
and to some extent basketry for dishes, 
and the same is true in a lesser degree of 
some of the Plains and Eastern tribes. 
Southwestern and Californian Indians 
made use of basketry almost exclusively. 
See Bark , Basketry , Bowls , Implements , 
Pottery , Receptacles, Woodwork. 

Consult Goddard in Univ. Cal. Publ., 
Am. Archseol. and Ethnol., i, no. 1, 1903; 
Holmes in 20th Rep. B. A. E., 1903; 
Moore in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
x-xn, 1894-1903; Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
1899; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 
1890; Swanton in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., v, 1905; Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1894. (w. h.) 

Distancia. One of the villages of the 
Opata.—Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., vi, 
72, 1904. 

Ditsakana ( Ditsa'kdna , ‘ sewers ’). A Co¬ 
manche division, the name of which was 
formerly Widyu (‘ awl ’), but on the death 
of a chief bearing the same name it was 
changed to Ditsakana. They were also 
popularly known as Yamparika, from 
their habit of eating yampa root. They 
were estimated to number 356 in 1869, 
and 200 in 1872, but their present popu¬ 
lation is unknown, as the Comanche divi¬ 
sions are not officially recognized. ( j. m. ) 
Ditsa/kana.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1044, 
1896. Etsitii'biwat.—Ibid. (‘northerners’). Gui- 
yus.—Butcher and Lyendecher, MS. Comanche 
vocab., B. A. E., 1867. It-chit-a-bud-ah.—Neigh¬ 
bors in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tr., ii, 128,1852. Jupes.— 
Bol. Soc. Mex., v, 318, 1857. Lamparacks.—Bol- 
laert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 265, 1850. 
Lemparack.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
1856. Llamparicas.—Escudero, Noticias Nuevo 
Mex., 83, 1849. Root Diggers.—Butler in H. R. 
Doc. 76,29th Cong., 2d sess., 6,1847. Root-Eaters.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 522, 1851. Sampa- 
ricka.—Maximilian, Trav., 510, 1843. Tapparies 
Comanches.—Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th 
Cong., 3d sess., 23, 1869 (misprint). Teachatz- 
kennas.—Ibid., 36. Teckat Kenna.—McKusker in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 40, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 14, 1869. 
Ted-Chath-Kennas.—Ibid. Tedchat-kenna.—Ibid. 
Titsakanai.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxill, 300, 1886 (‘the sewing people’). Tupes.— 
Domenech, Deserts, ii, 21,1860. Wl'dyu.—Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1044, 1896 (‘awl’). Wiui- 
ni'em.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., xxiii, 
300, 1886. Yachakeenees.—Penney in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1869, 101,1870 (probably the same; Yampa- 
rakas also given). Yamhareek.—Ruxton, Life in 
Far West, 201, 184C. Yamparack.—Burnet in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 230, 1851. Yampara- 
kas.—Penney in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 101, 1870. 
Yamparecks.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 544, 
1878. Yampareekas.—Hazen in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 
388, 1870. Yamparicas.—Mayer, Mexico, II, 123, 
1853. Yam'pan'ka.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., xxiii, 299, 1886 (‘yampa eaters’). 
Yam-pa-se-cas.—Neighbors in Ind. Aff. Rep., 574, 


1848. Yampateka.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 
384, 1885. Yampaxicas.—Domenech, Deserts, ii, 
21,1860. Yamperack.—Drake, Bk. Inds., xii, 1848. 
Yamperethka.—Battey, Advent., 90, 1875. Yam- 
per-rikeu.—Leavenworth in H. R. Misc. Doc. 139, 
41st Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1870. Yam-pe-uc-coes.— 
Butler in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6, 
1847. Yampirica.—Sen. Ex. Doc. O, 39th Cong., 
1st sess., 4,1866. Yam-pi-ric-coes.—Butler in H. R. 
Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 8, 1847. Yapa.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1044, 1896. Yapa- 
ine.—Pimentel, Cuadro Descr., ii, 347,1865. Ya- 
parehca.—Ibid. Ya-pa-res-ka.—Butcher and Ly¬ 
endecher, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1867. 
Ya'pa-re'xka.—Gatschet, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. Yapparickoes.—McKusker in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
40, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 13, 1869. Yappariko.—Al- 
vordinSen. Ex. Doc. 18,40th Cong, ,3d sess., 6,1868. 

Diwall. See Bowl. 

Djahui-gitinai ( Djaxui' gitina'i, ‘sea¬ 
ward Eagles’). A division of the Eagle 
clan of the Haida. They considered 
themselves a part of the Gitins of Skide- 
gate, being simply those who lived far¬ 
thest Outward down Skidegate inlet, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. They 
formed the main part of the Eagle popu¬ 
lation at Naikun and C. Ball.—Swantoff, 
Cont. Haida, 274, 1905. 

Dj'aaquig'it ’ena'i.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can. i 26,1889; ibid., 12th Rep., 25, 1898. TsaagwF 
gyit’i'nai'.—Ibid. 

Dj ahui-hlgahet-kegawai ( Djaxui'lga' - 
xet qe'gawa-i , ‘ those born on the seaward 
side of Pebble town ’). A subdivision of 
the Hlgahet-gitinai, of the Haida of Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 274, 1905. 

Djahui-skwahladagai ( Djaxui' sqoa'lad- 
aga-i, ‘down-the-inletSkwahladas ’). A 
division of the Raven clan of the Haida. 
They were probably once a part of the 
Skwahladas who lived on the w. coast of 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., being 
distinguished from them by the fact that 
they lived seaward ( djahui ) down Skide¬ 
gate inlet.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 269, 
1905. 

Djaaqui'skuatl’adaga'i.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 26, 1889. Tsaagwisguatl’adegai'.— 
Ibid., 12th Rep., 25,1898. 

Djestyedje (‘long lake’). A former 
village of the Kansa on Kansas r., near 
Lawrence, Kans.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1882. 

Djigogiga ( DjigogVga ). A legendary 
Haida town of the Kasta-kegawai on Cop¬ 
per bay, Moresby id., Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 
1905. 

Djigua ( Dfi'gua). A legendary Haida 
town on the n. shore of Cumshewa inlet, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., whence 
the ancestress of theDjiguaahl-lanas, Kai- 
ahl-lanas, Kona-kegawai, and Stawas-hai- 
dagai is said to have come.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 94, 1905. 

Djiguaahl-lanas ( Dfi'gua at la'nas, ‘DjP- 
guatown people’). Aprominentdivision 
of the Eagle clan of the Haida, so named 
from a legendary town on the n. side of 
Cumshewa inlet, whence their ancestress, 


394 


D.TIHUAGITS-DOHASAN 


[B. a. e. 


who was also the ancestress of the Kai- 
ahl-lanas, Kona-kegawai, and Stawas-hai- 
dagai, is said to have come. They lived in 
the town of Kloo.—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 
273, 1905. 

Tsegoatl la'nas.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 25,1898. 

Djihuagits ( Djixudgits, Masset dialect 
Chawagis, ‘always low water’). A Haida 
town on a creek "just s. of Naikun, e. coast 
of Graham id., n. w. Brit. Col. Anciently 
it belonged to the Naikun-kegawai, but 
afterward to the Chawagis-stustae.— 
Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 280,1905. 

Djishtangading. A Iiupa village at a 
bend in Trinity r. at the extreme s. end 
of Hupa valley, Cal., below the mouth of 
Tishtangatang cr. (p. e. g. ) 

Djictanadin.—Goddard, Life and Culture of the 
Hupa, 12,1903. Pa-tes-oh.—McKee (1851) in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1853. Pat- 
isch-oh.—Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282,1855. 
Peht-sau-an.—Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., 1852. Pepht- 
soh.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 139, 
1853. Petsawan.—Goddard, inf’n, 1903 (Yurok 
name). Tish-tan'-a-tan.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethpol., ill, 73, 1877. 

'Djus-hade ( Djus xade' , ‘ people of Djus 
island ’). A division of the Eagle clan of 
the Haida, living on an island of the 
same name at the entrance of Tsooskahli, 
Queen Charlotte ids., and closely related 
to the Widja-gitunai, Tohlka-gitunai, and 
Chets-gitunai. They afterward moved 
to the mouth of Masset inlet. A branch 
of the Kuna-lanas received the same 
name.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905. 

Dzos haedrai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
23,1898. 

Dockmackie. A name of the maple¬ 
leaved arrowwood ( Viburnum acerifo- 
lium). The Indians used this plant for 
external application in tumors, etc. The 
terminal -ie suggests that the word came 
from them first to the Dutch, and from 
these to English-speakers. According to 
Miss L. S. Chamberlain (Am. Nat., xxxv, 
3, 1901), the Delawares smoked dogeku- 
mak. W. R. Gerard (Gard. and For., ix, 
262, 1896) says it is from a Mahican word 
meaning ‘it is cooling,’ which would be 
related to the Chippewa takaiamagad , ‘ it 
is cool.’ A Delaware origin is however 
more probable. (a. f. c. ). 

Doestoe (‘live where there are large 
falls of water ’). A subdivision of Apache 
under chiefs Chiquito and Disalin in 1875. 
Does-to'-e.—White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes, 
MS., B. A. E. 

Dog. A former division of the Foxes. 

Dog. See Many Horses. 

Dog Creek. A Shuswap village or band 
on upper Fraser r. below the mouth of 
Chilcotin r., Brit. Col. Pop. 14 in 1904.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 72, 1904. 

Dogachamus. A name for Comus cir- 
cinata, cited by Gerard (Gard. and For., 
ix, 263, 1896), who states that it is a cor¬ 
ruption of damaganatikwamosi, ‘ pipe- 


stem bush,’ in the Penobscot dialect of 
Algonquian. The word is also spelled 
dogackerme. (a. f. c.) 

Dogekumak. See Dockmackie. 

Dogi. Mentioned by Lederer (Discov., 
2, 1672) as a people who inhabited the 
piedmont region of Virginia before the 
appearance of the historic tribes in that 
section. They were extinct at the time 
of his journey in 1670. Apparently dis¬ 
tinct from the Doeg (Nanticoke). 

Tacci.—Lederer, op. cit. 

Do-gitunai {Do-gitAna'-i, ‘Gitans of 
the west coast’). A division of the Eagle 
clan of the Haida. They are said to have 
branched off from the Mamun-gitunai, 
and, as the name implies, their towns 
and camping places were on the w. coast 
of Queen Charlotte id., Brit. Col.—Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905. 

Togyit’inai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
22,1898. 

Dogs. A band or a secret order of the 
Hidatsa.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 143, 1851. 

Dogs. See Domestication. 

Dog Soldiers. See Military societies. 

Doguenes. A tribe or division of a tribe 
met by Cabeza de Vaca about 1527, when 
they were living on the mainland near 
the coast, probably in the vicinity of San 
Antonio bay, Tex. The region was prob¬ 
ably occupied by Karankawan people, 
but the data are too meager to determine 
the ethnic relations of the Doguenes. 
SeeGatschet, Karankawa Inds., 46, 1891. 

Aguenes.—Cabeza de Vaca (1555), Bandelier trans., 
120,1905. Deaguanes,—Ibid.,79. Deguenes.—Ibid., 
123. Doguenes.—Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 
137,1871. Draguanes.—Ibid., 56, ed. 1851. 

Dohasan {Dohdsdn, ‘little bluff’ ; also 
Dohd, Dohdte, ‘ bluff ’). The hereditary 
name of a line of chiefs of the Kiowa for 
nearly a century. It has been borne by 
at least four members of the family, viz: 
(1) The first of whom there is remem¬ 
brance was originally called Pd-do'gd'-i 
or Pado'ga, ‘ White-faced-buffalo-bull,’ 
and this name was afterward changed 
to Dohd or Dohdte. He was a promi¬ 
nent chief. (2) His son was originally 
called A'anoiVte (a word of doubtful 
etymology), and afterward took his 
father’s name of Dohdte, which was 
changed to Dohdsdn, ‘ Little Dohate,’ or 
‘Little-bluff,’ for distinction. He be¬ 
came a great chief, ruling over the whole 
tribe from 1833 until his death on Cimar¬ 
ron r. in 1866, since which time no one 
has had unquestioned allegiance in the 
tribe. His portrait was painted in 1834 
by Catlin, who calls him Teh-toot-sah, 
and his name appears in the treaty of 
1837 as “ To-ho-sa, the Top of the Moun¬ 
tain.” . (3) His son, whose widow is An- 
klma, inherited his father’s name, Do- 
hdsan. He was also a distinguished 


BULL. 30] 


DOKIS BAND-DOLLS 


395 


warrior, and died about 1894. His scalp 
shirt and war-bonnet case are in the Na¬ 
tional Museum. (4) The nephew of the 
great Dohasan II and cousin of the last 
mentioned (3) was also called Dohitsan, 
and always wore a silver cross with the 
name “Tohasan” engraved upon it. He 
was the author of the Scott calendar and 
died in 1892. Shortly before his death 
he changed his name to DJnpii', ‘shoul¬ 
der-blade,’ from dan , ‘shoulder’ (?), 
leaving only Ankfma’s husband (3) to 
bear the hereditary name, which is now 
extinct. Dohasarr II, the greatest chief 
in the history of the Kiowa tribe, in 1833 
succeeded A'date, who had been de¬ 
posed for having allowed his people to 
be surprised and massacred by the Osage 
in that year. It was chiefly through his 
influence that peace was made between 
the Kiowa and Osage after the massacre 
referred to, which has never been 
broken. In 1862, when the Cheyenne, 
Arapaho, Comanche, Kiowa, and Kiowa 
Apache were assembled on Arkansas r. 
to receive annuities, the agent threat¬ 
ened them with punishment if they did 
not cease their raids. Dohasan listened 
in perfect silence to the end, when he 
sprang to his feet, and calling the atten¬ 
tion of the agent to the hundreds of tipis 
in the valley below, replied in a charac¬ 
teristic speech: “The white chief is a 
fool. He is a coward. His heart is 
small—not larger than a pebble stone. 
His men are not strong—too few to con¬ 
tend against my warriors. They are 
women. There are three chiefs—the 
white chief, the Spanish chief, and my¬ 
self. The Spanish chief and myself are 
men. We do bad toward each other 
sometimes—stealing horses and taking 
scalps—but we do not get mad and act 
the fool. The white chief is a child, and, 
like a child, gets mad quick. When my 
young men, to keep their women and 
children from starving, take from the 
white man passing through our country, 
killing and driving away our buffalo, a 
cup of sugar or coffee, the white chief is 
angry and threatens to send his soldiers. 
I have looked for them a long time, but 
they have not come. He is a coward. 
His heart is a woman’s. I have spoken. 
Tell the great chief what I have said.” 
In addition to the treaty of 1837 Dohasan 
was also a signer of the treaty of Ft 
Atkinson, Ind. T., July 27, 1853, and that 
of Oct. 18, 1865, on Little Arkansas r., 
Kansas. See Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. 
E., pt. 1, 1898. 

Dokis Band. A Chippewa band, so named 
from their chief, residing on a reserva¬ 
tion of 30,300 acres at the head of French 
r., where it leaves L. Nipissing, Ontario. 
They have a large admixture of French 
blood, are Roman Catholics, and obtain 


Eastern Eskimo Doll western Eskimo Doll 

children. Among these people there was 
a festival in which small figures or dolls 
were used to represent the dead, at which 
time the people prepared and partook of 
food in their presence in memory of the 
time when those represented were living. 
The corncob and rag dolls were usually 
of the child’s own manufacture. Those 
made of dough were used in a social cere¬ 
mony among the Iroquois. Dolls were 
provided with cradles, clothing, tents, and 
vessels and utensils of clay. 

In the S. W. and the extreme N. little 
figures were made for ceremonies in which 
mythic ancestors or dead relatives were 
remembered. Travelers have sometimes 
mistaken these figures for idols. Among 
the Hopi these little figures are of. soft 
cottonwood, so cut and painted as to indi¬ 
cate in miniature the elaborate head¬ 
dress, decorated face, body, and clothing 



a livelihood by hunting and fishing and 
by working in adjacent lumber camps. 
The band numbered 62 in 1884 and 78 in 
1904. (j. m.) 

Dolls. Dolls were common among all 
the American tribes. They were fashioned 
from stone, wood, clay, skin, dough, 
corncobs, plants, and rags. Those used 
merely as playthings were frequently 
elaborately dressed by the mother in ac¬ 
cordance with tribal costumes. Human 
hair was sometimes fastened to the head 
and arranged in the tribal style, the face 
was painted, the eyebrows were marked, 
and tattoo lines were indicated. Labrets 
of bone or shell were put in place among 
the tribes which used these objects, and 
the doll was further adorned with ear¬ 
rings, bracelets, and necklaces. The Es¬ 
kimo father carved the small bone or ivory 
dolls more or less elaborately, and made 
them stand upright, to 
the great delight of the 



396 


DOLORES 


[b. a. e. 



of those who represent kachinas, or im¬ 
personations of ancestral ‘ ‘ breath bodies’ ’ 
or spirits of men. These dolls are not 
worshipped, but are made by the priests 
in their kivas during the great spring 
ceremonies as presents 
for the little girls, to 
whom they are presented 
on the morning of the 
last day of the festival by 
men personating kachi¬ 
nas (Fewkes). In this 
way the young become 
familiar with the com- 


Hopi Kachina doll of 
WOOD (1-4) 


Hopi Doll of Clay (1-2) 


plicated and symbolic masks, ornaments, 
and garments worn during tribal and 
religious ceremonies. See Amusements , 
Child life , Games. 

Consult Dorsey and Voth in Field 
Columb. Mus. Publ., 55 and 66; Fewkes 
in 17th, 19th, and 21st Reps. B. A. E., 
and Internat. Archiv. Ethnog., vn, 1894; 
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 1898; Nel¬ 
son in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Turner 
in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (a. c. f.) 

Dolores (contracted from Span. Nuestra 
Senora de los Dolores , ‘ Our Lady of Sor¬ 
rows’). A mission established among 
the Pima by Father Kino in 1687, just 
above Cucurpe on the headwaters of the 
w. branch of the Rio Sonora, in n. w. 
Sonora, Mexico. According to Venegas 
it had 2 visitas (probably Remedios and 
Cocospera) in 1721. Pop. 29 in 1730. 
Dolores.—Mange (1699) in Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 352, 1889. Los Dolores.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 347, 1864. Nuestra Senora de los Dolores.— 
Kino (1694) in Doc. Hist. Hex., 4th s., I, 248,1856. 

Dolores. A Spanish Franciscan mission 
established in California within the site 
of the city of San Francisco on Oct. 9, 
1776. When Gov. Portola, in searching 
for Monterey, came to the bay of San 
Francisco, that had remained hidden to 
all previous explorers, Father Junipero 
Serra regarded it as a miraculous discov¬ 
ery, for the visitador-general in naming 
the missions to be established at the 
havens of the coast had said to the mis¬ 
sion president, who was disappointed be¬ 


cause the name of the founder of the 
order was omitted, that if St Francis de¬ 
sired a mission he must show his port. 
The missionaries impatiently brooked the 
obstacles that delayed planting a mission 
at the port that their patron saint had 
revealed. The site was beside the lagoon 
of Nuestra Senora de los Dolores, hence 
the mission of San Francisco de Assisi 
came to be known as Dolores mission. 
There w’ere no natives present when the 
mission was opened. The inhabitants, 
the Romonan, had been driven from the 
peninsula by a hostile tribe who burned 
their rancherias and killed all who did not 
escape on rafts. When the fugitives re¬ 
turned to find their home occupied by the 
Spaniards they were disposed to contend 
for its possession. In the first fight the sol¬ 
diers fired in the air, in the next they shot 
a native, upon which the savages begged 
for peace, but fled when the Spaniards re¬ 
leased after a whipping those tfiatthey had 
captured, and were not seen again until 
spring. The missionaries gradually won 
their confidence after they returned and in 
October baptized 17 adults. At the end of 
5 years there were 215 converts, and in 1796 
they numbered 720. The neophytes when 
harshly treated could escape easily by 
water, and after 280 had run away and 
the soldiers were unable to stay the exodus 
the head missionary sent out a party of 
15 Christian Indians, of whom 7 were slain 
by the Cuchillones. A priest, Father 
Fernandez, brought charges against the 
missionary fathers, and Gov. Borica de¬ 
manded that they reform their treat¬ 
ment—long tasks, scant rations, and cruel 
punishments, evidenced by200 escapes and 
as many deaths within a year. Although 
Father Lasuen, the mission president, 
promised and endeavored to remedy the 
alleged evils, the Indians continued to 
run aw r ay, and the missionaries, in 1797, 
sent out another party of neophytes to 
gather in the lost flock, but the former 
barely escaped the fate of the preceding 
party. The Saclan harbored the fugitives 
and threatened to kill the mission In¬ 
dians if they continued to work and the 
soldiers if they interfered. The governor 
sent a detachment of troops to punish 
them, and in the fight 2 soldiers were 
wounded and 7 natives killed. The 
Cuchian were also attacked and the sol¬ 
diers returned with 83 of the fugitive 
Christians. During the decade 1,213 na¬ 
tives were baptized and 1,031 buried, and 
at the end of the 18th century the neo¬ 
phyte population was 644. The cattle 
had increased to 8,200 head, and the 
crop in 1800 was 4,100 bushels, half of it 
w'heat. The land about the mission w as 
sterile, and fields 12 m. distant were 
planted. The neophytes first dwelt in 



BULL. 30] 


DOMESTICATION 


397 


rude huts of willow poles and tule, but 
between 1793 and 1798 adobe houses were 
built for every family and the thatched 
roofs of the church and mission buildings 
were replaced with tiles. On looms made 
by the Indians woolen cloth was produced 
in quantities sufficient to clothe the con¬ 
verts and blankets were woven for the 
presidio. In 1796 the manufacture of 
coarse pottery was begun. In 1820 the neo¬ 
phyte population was 622, but the mor¬ 
tality continued to be greater than in any 
other mission. In 1830 the population 
was 219. The sheep fell off to one-fifth 
of the former number and only a third 
as much grain was produced as in 1810. 
The decline was due to the division of the 
mission when San Rafael was founded in 
a healthier location in 1817 and San 
Francisco Solano in 1823. While the 
baptisms were exceeded only at San Jose, 
there were 2,100 deaths at San Francisco 
Dolores and San Rafael, whither half the 
neophytes were removed, in the 10 years 
ending with 1820. Solano, founded with 
the intention of transferring the entire 
mission, received half the neophytes of 
the parent mission, but returned a part 
when it was constituted an independent 
establishment. The buildings fell into 
ruin, except the church, which is still 
standing as part of the Dolores mission 
church of San Francisco. The number 
of neophytes fell to 204 in 1832, and in 
1840 there were 89 at San Mateo and 
about 50 scattered about the district. 
The civilian administrator found little 
property in 1834 and soon none was left. 
The neophytes received nothing; they 
were never organized in a pueblo, but 
were apportioned among the settlers and 
held in servitude against their will. In 
1843 the last remnant, 8 aged starvelings, 
appealed to the Government for help. 

The tribes that came first under the in¬ 
fluence of the Dolores mission were the 
Ahwaste, Altahmo, Olhon, Romonan, 
and Tulomo, all speaking the same lan¬ 
guage, the Costanoan, as did some other 
tribes, not so numerous, that lived on or 
near the thickly peopled shores of San 
Francisco bay. They subsisted by hunt¬ 
ing and fishing. Both sexes often wore 
their hair short, having the custom of cut¬ 
ting it when afflicted by sorrow or misfor¬ 
tune. Those of the s. allowed their hair 
to grow and wore the long carefully 
dressed braids adorned with beads and 
trinkets wound about the head like a tur¬ 
ban. The medicine-men, through their 
incantations, pretended to be able to bring 
fish as well as to cure the sick. Of the blub¬ 
ber of stranded whales and of seals they 
were extremely fond, and they ate nuts, 
berries, and camas bulbs, and made bread 
of seeds and acorns. The people who came 
to the mission from the opposite shore of 


the bay and the estuary were of lighter 
hue and more corpulent than the coast 
Indians. The men w*ent naked, coating 
themselves with mud on cold mornings; 
the women wore an apron of sedge or 
rushes reaching before and behind to the 
knees and a cloak of the same material 
over their shoulders. People are said to 
have married and parted without cere¬ 
mony, mothers taking their children with 
them, and men often took whole families 
of sisters for their wives. These Indians 
burned their dead. 

The following list of rancherias and 
tribes from which the mission drew its 
neophytes is adapted from those recorded 
in the parish books (Taylor in Cal. Far¬ 
mer, Oct. 18, 1861): 

Abmoctac, Acnagis, Acyum, Aleta, Al¬ 
tahmo, Aluenchi, Amutaja, Anamas, An- 
amon, Anchin, Aramay, Assunta, Atarpe, 
Cachanegtac, Caprup, Carascan, Cazopo, 
Chagunte, Chanigtac, Chapugtac, Chaven, 
Chipisclin, Chipletac, Chiputca, Chuchic- 
tac, Chupcan, Churmutce, Chutchin, Chy- 
nau, Conop, Elarroyde, Flunmuda, Gam- 
chines, Genau, Guanlen, Guloismistac, 
Halchis, Horocroc, Huimen, Hunctu, 
Itaes, Joquizara, Josquigard, Juniamuc, 
Juris, Lamsim, Libantone, Livangebra, 
Livangelva, Luianeglua, Luidneg, Macsi- 
num, Malvaitac, Mitline, Muingpe, Naig, 
Naique, Napa, Olestura, Ompivromo, 
Otoacte, Ousint, Patnetac, Petaluma, 
Proqueu, Pructaca, Pruristac, Puichon, 
Purutea, Puycone, Quet, Sadaues, Sa- 
gunte, Saraise, Sarontac, Satumuo, Sat- 
uraumo, Sicca, Sipanum, Siplichiquin, 
Siscastac, Sitintajea, Sitlintaj, Sittintac, 
Ssalayme, Ssichitca, Ssipudca, Ssiti, 
Ssogereate, Ssupichum, Subchiam, Su- 
chui, Sunchaque, Talcan, Tamalo, Tat- 
quinte, Timigtac, Timsin, Titivu, Torose, 
Totola, Tubisuste, Tuca, Tupuic, Tu- 
puinte, Tuzsint, Uchium, Urebure, Us- 
sete, Vagerpe, Yectaca, Yacmui, Yacomui, 
Zomiomi, Zucigin. The names of the 
tribes which furnished the early converts 
were Ahwaste, Bolbone, Chiguau, Cuchil- 
lones, Chuscan, Cotejen, Junatca, Karkin, 
Khulpuni, Olemos, Olhon, Olmolococ, 
Olpen, Quemelentus, Quirogles, Saclan, 
Suisun, Sanchines, Saucou, Sichican, 
Uchium, Uquitinac. 

See Hittell, Hist. Cal., 1885-97; Ban¬ 
croft, Hist. Cal., 1886-90; Palou, Life of 
Serra, 102,1884. 

Domestication. The Indian learned a 
great deal from and was helped in his 
efforts by the actions of animals in their 
wild state. The period of domestication 
began when he held them in captivity for 
the gratification of his desires or they be¬ 
came attached to him for mutual benefit. 
In this process there are gradations: 

1. Commensalism begins when food 
is left for serviceable animals to devour. 


398 


DOMESTICATION 


[B. a. e. 


so that these may give notice of danger 
or advantage. The coyote is said to re¬ 
veal the presence of the mountain lion. 
Small animals are tolerated for their 
skins and flesh. Plants would be sown 
to attract such creatures as bees, and 
tame animals would be regularly fed at 
later stages. 

2. Confinement is represented by such 
activities as keeping fish and other aquatic 
animals in ponds; caging birds and carry¬ 
ing off their young, gallinaceous fowl last; 
tying up dogs or muzzling them; cor¬ 
ralling ruminants, and hobbling or teth¬ 
ering wild horses so as to have them near, 
keep them away from their enemies, or 
fatten them for eating. The aborigines 
had no difficulty in breeding some ani¬ 
mals in confinement, but few. wild birds 
will thus propagate, and the Indians could 
obtain those to tame only by robbing 
nests. Lawson says of the Congaree of 
North Carolina that “they take storks 
and cranes before they can fly and breed 
them as tame and familiar as dung-hill 
fowls.” 

3. Keeping animals for their service or 
produce, as dogs for retrieving game or 
catching fish, hawks for killing birds; 
various creatures for their fleece, hides, 
feathers, flesh, milk, etc., and taming 
them for amusement and for ceremonial 
or other purposes, were a later develop¬ 
ment. Roger Williams says the Narra- 
ganset Indians of Rhode Island kept tame 
hawks about their cabins to frighten small 
birds from the fields. 

4. Actually breaking them to work, 
training dogs, horses, and cattle for pack¬ 
ing, sledding, hauling travois, and, later, 
for riding, constitutes complete domesti¬ 
cation. 

In pre-Columbian times the dog was 
the most perfectly subdued animal of 
the North Americans, as much so as the 
llama in w. South America. But other 
species of mammals, as well as birds, were 
in different degrees rendered tractable. 
After the coming of the whites the meth¬ 
ods of domesticating animals were per¬ 
fected, and their uses multiplied. More¬ 
over, horses, sheep, cattle, donkeys, hogs, 
and poultry w'ere added to the list, and 
these profoundly modified the manners 
and customs of many Indian tribes. 

Domestication of animals increased the 
food supply, furnished pets for old and 
young, aided in raising the Indian above 
the plane of low savagery, helped him to 
go about, multiplied his wants, furnished 
a standard of property and a medium of 
exchange, took the load from the back 
of women, and provided more abundant 
material for economic, artistic, and cere¬ 
monial purposes. 

Domestication had a different develop¬ 
ment in each culture area. In the Arctic 


region the dog was preeminent; it was 
reared with unremitting care, the women 
often suckling the puppies; all its life it 
was trained to the sled. As the dogs were 
never perfectly tamed, it was no easy task 
to drive a team of them; yet by the aid 
of dogs and sleds, in combination with 
umiaks, the whole polar area of America 
was exploited by the Eskimo, who found 
these an excellent means of rapid transit 
from Asia to the Atlantic. In recent years 
the successful introduction of the reindeer 
among the Alaskan tribes has proved a 
blessing. The Mackenzie-Yukon district 
is a canoe country, and domestication of 
the dog was not vigorously prosecuted 
until the Hudson’s Bay Company gave 
the stimulus. But southward, among the 
Algonquian and Siouan tribes of the great 
lakes and the plains, this animal attained 
its best as a hunter and a beast of burden 
and traction. It was also reared for food 
and for ceremonial purposes. Not more 
than 50 pounds could be borne by one 
dog, but twice that amount could be moved 
on a travois. The coming of the horse 
(q. v.) to the great plains was a boon to the 
Indian tribes, all of which at once adopted 
the new instrument of travel and transpor¬ 
tation. The horse was apotheosized; it 
became a standard of value, and fostered 
a greater diversity of occupations. But 
the more primitive methods of domesti¬ 
cation were still practised throughout 
the middle region. In the n. Pacific area 
dogs were trained to hunt; but here and 
elsewhere this use of the dog was doubtless 
learned from the whites. Morice writes 
of the Athapascan tribes of the interior 
of British Columbia: “Owing to the semi- 
sedentary state of those Indians and the 
character of their country, only the dog 
was ever domesticated among them in 
the common sense of the word. This 
had a sort ,of wolfish aspect, and was 
small, with pointed, erect ears, and uni¬ 
formly gray, circumstances which would 
seem to imply that the domesticating proc¬ 
ess had remained incomplete. The flesh 
of those wolf dogs was relished by the em- 
ployeesof the Northwestern and Hudson’s 
Bay companies, who did notgenerally eat 
that of those of European descent. In a 
broader sense, those aborigines also oc¬ 
casionally domesticated and have con¬ 
tinued to domesticate other animals, such 
as black bears, marmots, foxes, etc., which 
they took when young and kept as pets, 
tied up to the tent post or free. Such 
animals, as longas they remained in a state 
of subj ection, were considered as members 
of the family and regarded as dogs, though 
often called by the endearing names 
of ‘sons,’ ‘daughters,’ ‘grandsons,’ etc. 
Birds were never caged, but might be seen 
at times hobbling about with the tips of 
their wings cut.” 


BULL. 30] 


DONACONA-DRAGGING-CANOE 


399 


In the California-Oregon area birds of 
gay plumage were caged, plucked, and 
then set free. On Santa Catalina id. birds 
called large crows by tl\e Spaniards were 
kept and worshipped, recalling Boscana’s 
story of the Shoshonean condor cult on 
the adjacent California coast. In the 
S. W., the desert area, the whole devel¬ 
opment of domestication is seen. The 
coyote was allowed to feed about the 
cam ps. The Querecho (Vaquero Apache) 
of Coronado in 1541 had a great number 
of large dogs which they obliged to carry 
their baggage when they moved from place 
to place (see Travois). Someof the Pueblo 
tribes practised also the caging of eagles, 
the rearing of turkeys, and, since the com¬ 
ing of the Spaniards, the herding of sheep, 
goats, burros, and horses. (o. t. m. ) 

Donacona. A Huron chief found by 
Jacques Cartier, in 1535, residing with his 
people at the junction of St Croix and St 
Lawrence rs., Canada. Although Cartier 
was well received and kindly treated by 
this chief, he managed, partly by strata¬ 
gem and partly by force, to convey the 
latter aboard his vessel and carry him to 
France where he soon died. (c. t.) 

Donally’s Town. A (Creek?) settlement 
mentioned in 1793 as situated on Flint r., 
Ga.—Melton in Am. State Papers, Ind. 
Aff., ii, 372, 1832. 

Dooesedoowe (‘plover.’—Hewitt). A 
clan of the Iroquois. 

Asco.—French writer (1666) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 47, 1855. Doo-ese-doo-we—Morgan, 
League Iroq., 46, 1851 (Seneca form). Nicohes.— 
French writer (1666), op. cit. Ta-wis-ta-wis.— 
Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Tuscarora name). 

Dostlan-lnagai (Dd-sL.'an-lnaga'-i, ‘west- 
coast rear-town people’). A local sub¬ 
division of the Stlenga-lanas, one of the 
larger Haida divisions on the Raven 
side, who lived on the n. w. coast of 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. A small 
section of them was called Kaiihl- 
lanas.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 271, 1905. 

Du Haade.—Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can.. 2d s., n, sec. 2, 124, 1895. TostlEngil- 
nagai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 22, 
1898. 

Dotame. A tribe of which Lewis and 
Clark learned from Indian informants. 
They were said to speak the Comanche 
language and to number 30 warriors, or 
120 souls, in 10 lodges. No traders had 
been among them; they trafficked usually 
with the Arikara, were hostile toward 
the Sioux, but friendly with the Mandan, 
the Arikara, and with their neighbors. 
From the use of the name in connection 
with Cataka (Kiowa Apache) and Ne- 
mousin (Comanche), the Dotame are 
seemingly identifiable with the Kiowa. 
Detame.—Fisher, New Tray., 26,1812. Do-ta ma.— 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 102,1905. Do-ta- 
me.—Ibid. 

Dotchetonne. An unidentified Texan 
tribe allied to the Caddo in 1687 (Joutel 


in Margry, Dec., hi, 409, 1878). The 
ending suggests dinne, tinne, the Atha¬ 
pascan term for ‘people,’ and hence a 
possible Apache connection. 

Dotle. A Koyukukhotana village on 
Koyukuk r., Alaska; pop. 12 in 1885. 

Dotlekakat.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 140,1887. 

Dotuskustl (Do'tlAsklAsL, ‘those who 
left the west coast ’). A subdivision of 
the Sagua-lanas, a division of the Eagle 
clan of the Haida. The name seems to 
imply that they formerly lived on the w. 
coast of Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., 
but in historical times they were in the 
town of Kung, in Naden harbor, with 
the other Sagua-lanas.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 275, 1905. 

Doughnut stones. S Perforated stones. 

Douglas. The local name for a body of 
Lower Lillooet between Lillooet and Har¬ 
rison lakes, Brit. Col.; pop. 76 in 1904.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. ii, 74, 1905. 

Doustioni. A tribe, formerly living on 
Red r. of Louisiana, that from its proxim¬ 
ity to the Natchitoches and the Yatasi was 
probably kindred thereto and belonged 
to the Caddo confederacy. The people 
are mentioned by Joutel, in 1687, as al¬ 
lies of the Kadohadacho. Penicaut, in 
1712, met them with a party of Natchi¬ 
toches, and remarks that for the 5 years 
previous they had been constantly wan¬ 
dering, and living by the chase (Margry, 
Dec., v, 488). Their warriors at that 
time numbered about 200. The cause of 
the abandonment of their village is un¬ 
known, but when in 1714 they accepted 
the invitation of St Denys to settle near 
the Natchitoches, and seed was given 
them, they seem to have returned to 
their agricultural and village life. In 
1719 La Harpe speaks of them as num¬ 
bering 150 and dwelling on an island in 
Red r. not far distant from the French 
post among the Natchitoches. If any 
survive they are merged with the kindred 
Caddo in Oklahoma. (a. c. f. ) 

Douesdonqua.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 
409, 1878. Doustiany.—Penicaut (1712), ibid., v, 
498, 1883. Doustionis.—Penicaut (1713) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., I, 117, 1869. 

Dragging-canoe (translation of his In¬ 
dian name, Tsfyu-gunsml; known also as 
Cheucunsene and Kunnesee). A promi¬ 
nent leader of those Cherokee who were 
hostile to the Americans during the 
Revolutionary war. He moved with his 
party to the site of Chickamauga, where 
he continued to harass the Tennessee 
settlements until 1782, when the Chicka¬ 
mauga towns were broken up. His peo¬ 
ple then moved farther down the river 
and established the “five lower towns,” 
but these also were destroyed in 1794. In 
accounts of the Creek war Dragging-canoe 
is mentioned as one of the prominent 
Cherokee chiefs in alliance with Jackson, 
and a participant in the last great eucoun- 


400 DRAMATIC REPRESENTATION-DREAMS AND VISIONS [b. a. e. 


ter at Horseshoe Bend.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 54, 63, 97, 1900. 

Dramatic representation. Among mapy 
tribes ceremonies were dramatic in charac¬ 
ter. Every religious rite had its dramatic 
phases or episodes expressive of beliefs, 
emotions, or desires, but in certain in¬ 
stances the dramatic element dominated 
and became differentiated from the cere¬ 
mony. In such cases there were masked 
and costumed actors with stage setting, 
effigies, and other properties, and events, 
historical or mythic, in the cultural his¬ 
tory or life of the tribe were represented. 
The most elaborate of these exhibitions 
were those of the Pueblo peoples and 
the tribes of the N. W. coast. Among 
the Hopi a dramatic representation oc¬ 
curs yearly in March either in the open 
plaza or in a kiva. The space between 
the tire and one end of the room is set 
apart as the stage; at the rear a decorated 
screen is placed, behind which are men 
who sound shell trumpets and manipu¬ 
late theeffigies of aplumed serpent, which, 
at times, are projected through the screen 
and contend with the actors in front. 
Marionettes of the Corn-maids are occa¬ 
sionally employed and are skilfully man¬ 
aged; birds walk about and whistle; 
imitation fields of corn are swept over by 
serpent effigies, and men representing pri¬ 
mal gods struggle with the effigies in an 
effort to overcome them. The stage set¬ 
ting and personnel are changed for every 
act, and during the change blankets are 
held around the fire to darken the kiva. 

In the large wooden dwellings of the 
N. W. my ths and legends were dramatized. 
The performance took place at one end 
of the house, where concealed openings 
in the painted wall admitted the actors 
who personated gods and heroes, and 
there were devices to give realistic effect 
to strange and magical scenes. Songs 
and dances accompanied the dramatic 
presentation. 

Some of the great tribal ceremonies of 
the inland peoples, while religious in ini¬ 
tiative, were social in general character. 
They portrayed episodes in the past his¬ 
tory of the tribe for the instruction of the 
younger generation. There were societies 
a part of whose function was to preserve 
the history of its membership. This was 
done by means of song and the dramatic 
representation of the acts the song 
commemorated. 

The Pawnee were remarkable for their 
skill in sleight-of-hand performances. 
Seeds were sown, plants grew, blossomed, 
and yielded fruit; spears were thrust 
through the body and many other sur¬ 
prising feats performed in the open lodge 
with no apparent means of concealment. 
During many dramatic representations, 


particularly those which took place in 
the open air, episodes were introduced in 
which a humorous turn was given to some 
current event in the tribe. Sometimes 
clowns appeared and by their antics re¬ 
lieved the tensity of the dramatic pres¬ 
entation. Among the Pueblo Indians 
these “ delight-makers,’’ as Bandelier 
translates the name of the Koshare of the 
Queres villagers, constitute a society which 
performs comedies in the intervals of the 
public dances. See Ceremony, Dance. 

Consult Bandelier, Delight Makers, 
1900; Boas in Rep. Nat, Mus., 1895; Dorsey 
and Voth in Field Columb. Mus. Publ., 
Anthrop. ser.; Fewkes (1) in 15th and 19th 
Reps.B. A..E., 1897,1900; (2) Proc. Wash. 
Acad. Sci., n, 1900; (3) various articles 
in Am. Anthrop. and Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore; Fletcher in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlv, 
1896; Matthews in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., vi, 1902; Powell in 19th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1900; Stevenson in 23d Rep. B. A. 
E., 1905. (a. c. f.) 

Dreams and Visions. Most revelations 
of what was regarded by the Indians as 
coming from the supernatural powers 
were believed to be received in dreams 
or visions. Through them were bestowed 
on man magical abilities and the capacity 
to foresee future events, to control disease, 
and to become able to fill the office of 
priest or of leader. It was the common 
belief of the Indians that these dreams 
or visions must be sought through the 
observance of some rite involving more 
or less personal privation; an exception 
is found in the Mohave who believe that 
the dream seeks the individual, coming 
to him before birth, or during infancy, 
as well as in mature life. In general the 
initiation of a man’s personal relations to 
the unseen through dreams and visions 
took place during the fast which occurred 
at puberty, and the thing seen at that 
time became the medium of supernatural 
help and knowledge, and in some tribes 
determined his affiliations. It was his 
sacred object. It had no reference to his 
kindred, but was strictly personal in its 
efficacy, and he painted it on his person 
or his belongings as a prayer for assist¬ 
ance—a call for help in directing his 
actions. Any dream of ordinary sleep in 
which this object appeared had meaning 
for him and its suggestions were heeded. 
Men with a natural turn of mind toward 
the mysterious frequently became sha¬ 
mans and leaders in rites which dealt 
with the occult. Such persons, from the 
time of their first fast, cultivated their 
ability to dream and to have visions; the 
dreams came during natural sleep, the 
visions during an ecstasy when the man 
was either wholly or partially uncon¬ 
scious of his surroundings. It was gen- 


BULL. 30] 


DRESS-DRILLS AND DRILLING 


401 


erally believed that such men had power 
to bring or to avert disaster through direct 
communication with the unseen. 

Many of the elaborate ceremonies ob¬ 
served among the tribes were said to 
have been received through visions, the 
actual performance following faithfully 
in detail the prefiguration of the vision. 
So, too, many of the shrines and their 
contents were believed to have been su- 
pernaturally bestowed in a vision upon 
some one person whose descendants were 
to be the hereditary keepers of the sacred 
articles. The time for the performance 
of rites connected with a shrine, and also 
other ceremonies, frequently depended 
on an intimation received in a dream. 

The dreams of a man filling an impor¬ 
tant position, as the leader of a war party, 
were often regarded as significant, espe¬ 
cially if he had carried with him some one 
of the sacred tribal objects as a medium 
of supernatural communication. This 
object was supposed to speak to him in 
dreams and give him directions which 
would insure safety and success. Fore¬ 
casting the future was deemed possible 
by means of artificially induced visions. 
The skin of a freshly killed animal, or 
one that had been well soaked for the 
purpose, was wound around the neck of 
a man until the gentle pressure on the 
veins caused insensibility, then in a vision 
he saw the place toward which his party 
was going and all that was to take place 
was prefigured. In some tribes a skin 
kept for this special purpose was held 
sacred and used for divining by means of 
an induced vision. Some Indians em¬ 
ployed plants, as the peyote, or mescal 
button, for like purposes. That the spirit 
left the body and traveled independently, 
and was able to discern objects distant 
both in time and space, w’as believed by 
certain tribes; others thought that the 
vision came to the man as a picture or in 
the form of a complete dramatic cere¬ 
mony. 

The general belief concerning dreams 
and visions seems to have been that the 
mental images seen with closed eyes were 
not fancies but actual glimpses of the un¬ 
seen world where dwelt the generic types 
of all things and where all events that 
were to take place in the visible world 
were determined and prefigured. 

Consult Fletcher in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 
1903; Kroeberin Am. Anthrop., iv, no. 2, 
1902; Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896. ’ (a. c. f.) 

Dress. See Adornment , Clothing. 

Drills and Drilling. The first drill was 
a development of the primitive awl, a 
sharp-pointed instrument of bone, stone, 
or copper which was held in one hand, 
pressed against the object, and turned 
back and forth until a hole was bored. 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-26 



Single hand Drills 


The point was set in a socket of bone or 
wood. By setting it in a transverse han¬ 
dle increased pressure and leverage were 
obtained, with increased penetrating 
power. Artificially perforated objects of 
bone, fish bones, ivory, pottery, stone, and 
wood, common to all periods of the world’s 
history, are found in mounds, caves, shell- 
heaps, and burial places of the Indians. 
The holes vary from 
an eighth to a half 
inch in diameter, and 
from a fourth of an 
inch to 6 in. or more 
in depth. Shell, bone, 
and stone weredrilled 
to make beads. Stone 
pipes with bowl and 
stem openings of dif¬ 
ferent sizes were com- 
mon, and whistles 
were made of stone 
and bone. Tubes in 
stone, several inches 
long, with walls 
scarcely an eighth of 
an inch thick, were accurately drilled. 
The columella of the Busycon shell was 
bored through for beads. The graceful 
butterfly-shaped objects found through¬ 
out e. United States were perforated with 
surprising accuracy. It has been said that 
in prehistoric times the natives bored 
holes through pearls by means of heated 
copper spindles. The points of drills were 
made of copper rolled into a hollow cylin¬ 
der or of pieces of reed, or of solid metal, 
stone, shell, or wood. Boring by means 
of hollow drills was usual among all early 
races of Europe, Asia, and Africa; it was 
common also in Mexico, and instances are 
not rare in the mounds of Ohio and else¬ 
where in the United States, but in North 
America solid drill points were 
generally employed. Grass and 
bristles were also used as drills, 
being worked by twirling between 
the thumb and 
the 


index fin¬ 
ger. Points of 
hard stone or 
metal usually 
cut by direct 
contact, but 
where the 
points w T ere of 
wood, dry or 
wet sand proved 
more effectual. At times the points were 
separate from the shafts and were firmly 
attached to the latter by strings of hide or 
vegetal fiber. The rapidity with which a 
drill cuts depends on the velocity of the 
revolution, the weight and size of its dif¬ 
ferent parts, the hardness of the abrading 
material and of the object drilled, the 
diameter of the hole, and its depth. The 



Tubular Drill of Sheet-copper and 
Section of Boring 















402 


DRILLS AND DRILLING 


[B. a. e. 




point used is indicated by the form of the 
perforation. The frequency with which 
objects are found bored from both sides is 
proof that the Indian appreciated the ad¬ 
vantage of reducing friction. Progress in 
the elaboration of drills consisted mainly 
in heightening speed of revolution. 
If the drill-point be of wood much 
depends on its hard¬ 
ness, for when too 
hard the wood 
grinds the sand to 
powder, while if it 
be too soft the grains 
catch at the base of 
the cavity and cut 

Drill-point of stone and sec- away the shaft. 
tion of Boring ■. •' , - 

Only woodof proper 
texture holds the sand as in a matrix and 
enables it to cut to the best advantage. 
The insides of drill holes show by the 
character of their striae whether the cut¬ 
ting was accomplished by direct pressure 
or with the aid of sand. 

The simplest form of drill was a straight 
shaft, varying from a fourth to three- 
fourths of an inch in diameter and from 
10 in. to 2 ft in length. 

This shaft was revolved 
in alternating directions 
between the hands, or, 
when the shaft was held 
horizontally, it was rolled 
up and down the thigh 
with the right hand, the 
point of the drill being pressed against 
the object held in the left hand; or at 
times the object was held between the 
naked feet while the drill was revolved 
between the 
hands. This 
drill was in use 
at the time of 
Columbus and 
is the only one 
represented in 
the Mexican 
codices (Kings- 
borough, An- 
tiq. of Mex., i, 
pi. 39). With, 
the exception 
of the strap 
drill, which 
was apparently 
used only in the 
far N., this is 
the only form of 
drill referred to 
by early Amer¬ 
ican writers. 

The strap drill, used both as a tire drill 
and as a perforator, is an improvement on 
the shaft drill, both in the number of its 
revolutions and in the pressure which 
may be imparted to the shaft. The shaft 
is kept in position by means of the head¬ 


Section of Bead With 
Biconical perforation 



The Revolving Shaft Drill used by a 
Hupa 



Strap Drill used by Eskimo of Alaska 


piece of wood, which is held in the teeth. 
A thong that is wound once round the 
shaft, one end being held in each hand, 
is pulled alternately to the right and to 
the left. The thong was sometimes fur¬ 
nished with 
hand pieces 
of bone or 
bear’s teeth 
to give a 
firmer grip 
to the strap. 

This drill, 
apparently 
known to the 
cave people 
of France, as 
it certainly 
was to the 
early peoples, 
of Greece, 

Egypt, and 
India, has 
been used by 
the Green¬ 
landers from 
early times and is employed also by the 
Aleut. To a person using the strap drill 
the jar to the teeth and head is at first 
quite severe, but much of the disagree¬ 
able sensation disappears with 
use. 

Closely related to the strap 
drill, but a great improve¬ 
ment over the latter, is the 
bow drill, which can be re- 
volved with 
much greater 
speed. The head 
piece of the bow 
drill is held in 
position with the 
left hand, while 
* the strap is at¬ 

tached to the 
two ends of a 
after wrapping 
around the shaft, as with the 
strap drill, is alternately re¬ 
volved by a backward and forward mo¬ 
tion of the bow. 

The pump drill, still employed in the 
arts, is said to have been known to the 
Iroquois and is used by the Pueblo Indi¬ 
ans. This drill con¬ 
sists of a shaft which 
passes through a disk 
of stone, pottery, or 
wood, and acrosspiece 
through which" the 
shaftalsoruns;toeach 
end of the crosspiece 
is attached a string or 
buckskin thong hav¬ 
ing sufficient play to allow it to cross the 
top of the shaft and to permit the cross¬ 
piece to reach close to the disk. This 



Eskimo Bow drill 
Showing Parts 

bow, and 



Bow Drill With 
Stone Point, a, 
Hand-Piece 



Use of bow Drill 


















BULL. 30] 


DRY-PAINTING 


403 


disk is turned to wind the string about 
the shaft; this raises the crosspiece. By 
pressing down the crosspiece after a few 
turns have been taken, the shaft is made 
to revolve and the disk receives sufficient 
impetus to rewind the string, which by 
successive pressure and re- 



Use of Pump Drill by a zuni Pump Drill 

lease, continues the reciprocal movement 
necessary to cutting. The speed attained 
by the pump drill is much greater than 
with the bow drill or the strap drill, and 
the right hand is left free to hold the 
object that is being drilled. The pump 
drill, although long in com¬ 
mon use among the Pueblo 
Indians, is probably of for¬ 
eign origin. 

A remarkable and unique 
drill was recently used by 
the Indians of Round valley, 

Cal., for drilling small holes 
through hard white shells. 

Its shaft is of hard wood, the 
disk taking the place of the 
crosspiece and the weight of 
the shaft giving sufficient 
impetus. The thong of this 
drill passes over the shaft 
and through opposite sides 
of the disk, and is attached 
to the shaft near the bottom. 

The disk moves freely up 
and down the shaft, and the 
thong is so wrapped that as 
the string unwinds from the 
top of the shaft it winds be¬ 
low, and vice versa. This DI8K DRILL: CALI ' 
drill revolves little if any 
faster than the shaft drill, and appears to 
cut chiefly, but not entirely, with the 
downward pressure. The use of this 
drill is apparently confined to a very re¬ 
stricted area. See Shettwork, Stonework. 

Consult Hough, Firemaking Appara¬ 
tus, Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1888; McGuire, A 
Study of the Primitive Methods of Drill¬ 
ing, Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1894. ( j. d. m. ) 

Dry-painting. An art existing among 
the Indians, especially those of the S. W., 
the products of which have been named 
sand altars, sand pictures or paintings, and 


sand mosaics by various authors. It is 
doubtless of aboriginal origin and of great 
antiquity, but it has come to the knowl¬ 
edge of white people only within the last 
25 years. The art has been found among 
various Pueblo tribes of New Mexico and 
Arizona, among the wilder Navaho and 
Apache of the same region, and, in crude 
form, among the Cheyenne, Arapaho, 
and Siksika. According to Navaho infor¬ 
mation, dry-painting was practised also 
by the Ute and the cliff-dwellers, but 
the latter may refer to one or more of 
the Hopi clans that occupied Canyon de 
Chelly, Arizona, within comparatively 
recent time (see Asa ). There is evidence 
of a wide extent of the art among the In¬ 
dians, but it is probable that it has been 
yet more widely practised in the past, 
or may even be more widely practised at 
the present among tribes who have con¬ 
cealed it from civilized men. 

So far as can be learned dry-painting 
has reached its greatest perfection among 
the Navaho, whose designs are larger, 
more numerous, and more elaborate than 
those of any other tribe. These Indians 
make their pictures almost exclusively in 
connection with religious ceremonies and 
draw them of various sizes. Some of 
their larger pictures, in their great 9 
days’ ceremonies, are 10 or 12 ft in di¬ 
ameter, and represent, in conventional 
forms, various gods of their mythology, 
divine ceremonies, lightning, sunbeams, 
rainbows, mountains, animals, and plants, 
having a mythic or traditional signifi¬ 
cance. Among this people, in order to 
prepare a groundwork for a sacred pic¬ 
ture in the lodge, several young men 
collect, with ceremonial observances, a 
quantity of dry sand, which is carried 
in blankets, thrown on the floor of the 
lodge, spread over a surface of sufficient 
size and to the depth of 2 or 3 in., and 
made smooth and level by means of the 
broad oaken battens used in weaving. 
The pigments represent the 5 sacred col¬ 
ors of Navaho mythology—white, blue, 
yellow, black, and red. For the greater 
part of the work the white, yellow, and 
red are made of finely powered sandstone 
of these colors; the black of powdered 
charcoal mixed with a little sandstone to 
give it stability; and the “blue” (really 
gray) of black and white mixed. These 
powders are prepared before the picture 
is begun and are kept on improvised 
trays of juniper bark. Sometimes, for 
certain ornamental parts of the work, 
more precious pigments than these are 
used. To apply the pigments the artist 
picks up a small quantity between his 
first and second fingers and his opposed 
thumb and allows it to flow slowly as he 
moves his hand. When he takes up his 
pinch of powder, he blows on his fingers 









404 


DSIHLNAOTHIHLNI-DTEDHEZEDHATAZHI 


[B. A. E. 


to remove aberrant particles and to keep 
them from falling on the picture out of 
place. When he makes a mistake he 
does not brush away the colored powder, 
but obliterates it by pouring sand on it, 
then draws the correct design on the new 
surface. The drawings are begun as near 
the center as the design will permit, due 
regard being paid to the points of the 
compass, which have an established order 
of precedence in Navaho ceremony. The 
figures in the periphery of the picture 
are made last, in order that the operators 
may not have to step over and thus pos¬ 
sibly spoil the finished work. T he pic¬ 
tures are drawn according to an exact 
system, except in certain well-defined 
cases where the artist is allowed to in¬ 
dulge his fancy. On the other hand, 
some parts are measured by palms, and 
not the slightest deviation can be made 
from the established design. Straight 
and parallel lines are drawn with the aid 
of a tightened cord. The naked bodies 
of the gods are first drawn and then the 
clothing is put on. The shaman who 
enacts the part of master of ceremonies 
does little more than direct and criticize 
the work. A number of men who have 
been initiated into the mystery of the 
ceremony perform the labor, each work¬ 
ing on a different part, and often spend¬ 
ing many hours on one picture. When 
it is finished, ceremonies are performed 
over it, and then with song and cer¬ 
emony it is obliterated. When no sem¬ 
blance of it remains, the sand of which 
it was made is gathered in blankets and 
thrown away at a distance from the 
lodge. In the ceremonies of the Pueblo 
Indians a picture is allowed to remain 
several days, while the Navaho make 
and destroy a picture in a day. No per¬ 
manent copies of the dry-paintings are 
preserved by the Navaho; indeed, until 
recently they had no means of making 
such copies. The paintings are not made 
in the summer, hence their designs must 
be carried from winter to winter in the 
fallible memories of men; yet the sham¬ 
ans declare that the pictures have been 
transmitted unaltered for many genera¬ 
tions. Although this declaration may 
reasonably be doubted, there is some 
evidence in its favor. 

During the Sun-dance ceremony of the 
Cheyenne a dry-painting is made in a 
lodge to represent the morning star. The 
field of the painting is of plain sand, and 
the design is made in a strictly prescribed 
manner by the use of black, red, yellow, 
and white dry paint, in order. Dotted 
lines representing stars form part of the 
painting, in this case those in white being 
drawn first because the white stars appear 
first in the morning. The unbroken lines 


are roads; the white represents the lodge- 
maker and his wife, the red line the road 
of the Cheyenne, the black the trail of 
the buffalo, and yellow the path of the 
sun. The dry-painting made by the Ara- 
paho in their Sun-dance ceremony, while 
of symbolic significance, is of a much 
simpler character. 

The sand pictures of the Hopi differ 
considerably from those of the Navaho. 
Some of the best are made in midsummer 
during the ceremonies of the Antelope 
society. In making dry-paintings the 
Hopi chief of the ceremony commonly 
begins at the periphery and follows the 
ceremonial circuit of the cardinal points 
in the use of pigments—first drawing yel¬ 
low (north), then green or blue (west), 
then red (south), and finally white (east). 
The field pf the picture, which is always 
made secretly in kivas among the Hopi, 
is valley sand sifted on the floor from a 
basket. These Indians never use cords 
or other measuring instruments. When 
the dry-painting is effaced pinches of the 
sand used in making it are deposited in 
prescribed places; e. g., a portion of the 
sand of an Antelope dry-painting is placed 
in a shrine of each cardinal point by the 
Snake chief (Fewkes). 

See Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. Publ., 
Anthrop. ser., iv, 1903, and ix, no. 2,1905; 
Voth, ibid., in, nos. 2, 4,1901, 1903; Dor¬ 
sey and Voth, ibid., hi, nos. 1, 3, 1901, 
1902; Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and 
Archseol., iv, 1894, and in various reports 
of the B. A. E.; Matthews (1) in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1887, (2) in Mem. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, 1902, (3) Navaho Leg¬ 
ends, 1897; Stevenson in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
1891. (w. m.) 

Dsihlnaothihlni (‘ encircled mountain ’). 
A Navaho clan, so named from Dsilnao- 
thil mt., its original home. 

Dsilanofi'lni.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 103,1890 (misprint). Dsilnao^^ine.—Ibid., 91. 
Dsilnaocfini. — Ibid. DsI7naolI7ni. — Matthews, 
Navaho Leg., 30,1897. 

Dsihlthani (‘brow of the mountain’). 
A Navaho clan. 

Bi^ani.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
104,1890 (distinct from BI<&‘ni, ‘folded arms’; see 
Bithani). Bifani.—Matthews, Navaho Leg., 30, 
1897. Dsilpani.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 104, 1890. DsIMani.—Matthews, Navaho Leg., 
30, 1897. 

Dsihltlani (‘base of the mountain’). 
A Navaho clan. 

Dsi/tla‘ni.—Matthews, Navaho Leg., 30, 1897. 
Dsiltla‘ni.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
103, 1890. 

Dtakhtikianpandhatazhi (‘does not eat 
deer and elk ’). Given as a subgens of the 
Ponca gens Nikapashna, but seemingly 
an error. 

Xaqti kl A"pa n ^ataji — Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 228, 1897. 

Dtedhezedhatazhi (‘does not eat buffalo 
tongues ’). A subgens of the Ponca gens 


BULL. 30] 


DTEPAITAZHI-DUHARHE 


405 


Washabe. J. 0. Dorsey also gives it as a 
Nikapashna gens, but this is seemingly 
an error. 

X e fSeze tfataji.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228. 
229, 1897. 

Dtepaitazhi (‘touch no buffalo head’). 
A subgens of the Dhatada gens of the 
Omaha. 

je-da it‘ajl.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 226, 
1897. 

Dtepaitazhi (‘ does not touch a buffalo 
head or skull’). A subgens of the Wa¬ 
shabe gens of the Ponca. 

ie-da it‘aji.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229, 
1897. 

Dtesanhadtadhishan (pertaining to the 
sacred skin of an albino buffalo cow). 
Given as a subgens of the Hanga gens of 
the Omaha, but it is seemingly an error. 
Hanga-qti.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 227,1897 
(‘real Hanga’). xe-^eze-^ataji.— Ibid, (‘do not 
eat buffalo tongues’). x esauha l a '^ ican -~ Ibid - 
Wacabe. —Ibid, (‘dark buffalo’). 

Dtesinde (‘buffalo tail’). Given as a 
subgens of the Washabe gens of the Ponca. 

xe-^eze ^ataji.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229, 
1897 (‘does not eat buffalo tongues’). x e_ ji“& a 
fiataji.— Ibid, (‘does not eat a very young buffalo 
calf’). x e ‘ sin <ie. —Ibid., 228. 

Dtesindeitazhi (‘ does not touch a buf¬ 
falo tail’). Given as a subgens of the 
Ponca gens Nikapashna. 

Xe-slnde-it‘ajl. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,228, 
1897. 

Duahe. Mentioned by Oviedo (Hist. 
Gen. Indies, iii,628, 1853) as one of the pro¬ 
vinces or villages visited by Ayllonin 1520; 
probably on the South Carolina coast. 

Duasno. A former Kawia village on 
or near the Cahuilla res., s. Cal. (Jackson 
and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 18, 1883). 
Possibly intended for Durazno (Span. 
‘ peach ’). 

Dubois. Mentioned only by McKenney 
and Hall (Ind. Tribes, iii, 79, 1854) in a 
list of tribes. Possibly intended for Gens 
des Bois (Hankutchin, Tschantoga, etc.); 
otherwise unidentified. 

Duck Lake. A local name for a band of 
Okinagan in s. w. British Columbia; 
pop. 24 in 1901.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901, 
pt. ii, 166. 

Duck tablets. Prehistoric objects of un¬ 
determined use, made of wood, 
bone, and metal, and represent¬ 
ing in a conventional manner 
the figure of a duck. The most 
typical examples are certain 
paddle-like objects of wood 
found, by Cushing in excava¬ 
tions at Key Marco, Fla., and 
connected by him with other 
similar forms in stone and silver 
found also in Florida, as well as DucK TABLET 
with various other classes of f[ 0 W r°d°'; 
objects thought to embody the about 1 - 30 .’ 
duck motive, such as the bird- (gushing) 
stone (q.v.), the banner stone (q.v.), and 
the calumet (q. v.). Although these tab¬ 
lets were undoubtedly symbolic, the ex¬ 
act significance and manner of use can not 


be determined, and they are therefore 
classed with problematical objects (q. v.). 
See Cushing in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxxv, 1897. (w. h. h. ) 

Ducoigne, Jean Baptiste. A Kaskaskia 
chief at the beginning of the 19th cen¬ 
tury, noted mainly for his firm adher¬ 
ence to the United States and friendship 
for the whites. Reynolds (Pion. Hist., 
iii, 22, 1887) describes him as a cunning 
half-blood of considerable talent. In his 
Memoirs, Gen. W. H. Harrison, who had 
dealings with Ducoigne, speaks of him 
as “ a gentlemanly man, by no means 
addicted to drink, and possessing a very 
strong inclination to live like a white 
man; indeed has done so as far as his 
means would allow.” Writing to the 
Secretary of War, he says: “Ducoigne’s 
long and well-proved friendship for the 
United States has gained him the hatred 
of all the other chiefs and ought to be an 
inducement with us to provide as well for 
his happiness, as for his safety.” Ac¬ 
cording to Reynolds, Ducoigne asserted 
that neither he nor his people had shed 
the blood of white men. He was a 
signer of the treaties of Vincennes, Aug. 
7 and 13, 1803; by the latter the United 
States agreed to build a house and in¬ 
close 100 acres of land for him. He had 
two sons, Louis and Jefferson, and a 
daughter, Ellen, who married a white 
man and in 1850 was living in Indian 
Ter. The name of Louis appears on be¬ 
half of the Kaskaskia in the treaty of Ed¬ 
wards ville, Ill.,Sept.25,1818. Ducoigne’s 
death probably occurred shortly before 
Oct., 1832, as it is stated in the treaty 
at Castor Hill, of that date, that there 
should be reserved “to Ellen Ducoigne, 
the daughter of their late chief,” a certain 
tract of land. The name is perpetuated 
in that of the town of Duquoin, Perry 
co., Ill. (c. t. ) 

Duel. See Nith songs. 

Dueztumac. A former Maricopa ran- 
cheria about 45 leagues (120 m.) above 
the mouth of the Rio Gila in s. w. Ari¬ 
zona; visited by Father Sedelmair in 
1744.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 366, 
1889. 

Santa Maria del Agua Caliente.— Ibid., 367 (proba¬ 
bly the same). 

Dugh-sokum. Given as the name of a 
tribe (Malletin Ind. Aff. Rep., 198,1877), 
but really that of the place where Port 
Madison, Wash., now stands. (Boulet in 
letter, Mar. 22, 1886). 

Duharhe. A country on the coast of 
Florida, seen by Lucas Vazquez de Ay- 
llon in 1520, whose people were light in 
color and had abundant hair. The chief 
who ruled over this and other provinces 
was said to have been nourished on a cer¬ 
tain food that caused him to grow to a 
gigantic size.—Barcia, Ensayo, 4, 1723. 




406 


DUKES, JOSEPH 


DUTCH INFLUENCE 


[b. a. e. 


Dukes, Joseph. An interpreter, the son 
of half-blood Choctaw parents, born in 
the old Choctaw country, in the present 
Mississippi, in 1811. He attended one of 
the early mission schools at Mayhew, 
where he made such progress that he often 
acted as interpreter for Rev. Cyrus Kings¬ 
bury, the pioneer missionary, who never 
learned the Choctaw language. After 
the Choctaw had ceded to the United 
States their lands in the E., he remained 
in Mississippi for some years, helping 
Rev. Cyrus Byington prepare a Choc¬ 
taw grammar and dictionary. In 1851 or 
1852 he preached under the direction of 
Rev. Allen Wright at Wheelock, Ind. 
Ter., and assisted Mr Wright in trans¬ 
lating the Old Testament. When Mr 
Wright was succeeded by Rev. John Ed¬ 
wards, in 1853, Dukes taught the latter 
Choctaw and aided him in translation in 
addition to his preaching. The first draft 
of the whole of the Old Testament from 
Genesis to II Kings, as well as of the 
Psalms, is attributed to him, and he prob¬ 
ably translated also some portions of the 
New Testament. He died in 1861. He 
was the author of The History of Joseph 
and His Brethren (Utica, 1831, repr. 
1836).—Pilling, Bibliog. Muskh. Lang., 
Bull. B. A. E., 1889. 

Dulastunyi (Dulasttin'yl, ‘potsherd 
place’). A former Cherokee settlement 
onNottelyr., Cherokee co., N. C., near 
the Georgia line. A half-breed Cherokee 
ball captain who formerly lived there, 
John Butler, or Tsanug&sita (Sour John), 
having been defeated in a ball game, 
said, in contempt of his men, that they 
were of no more use than broken pots.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 406, 1900. 

Dulchioni. A tribe, probably Caddoan, 
formerly living in villages on Red r. of 
Louisiana, 3 leagues below those of the 
Natchitoches. They were visited by Bien¬ 
ville and St Denys in 1700, when on their 
journey up Red r. to open trade between 
the Spanish and French provinces, and 
by La Harpe in 1719. Further than these 
brief references little is known of this 
tribe or of its subsequent fate. (a. c. f. ) 
Dulchanois. —La Harpe (1719) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ill, 19, 1851. Dulchinois. —Ibid., 72. 
Oulchionis. —La Harpe in Margry, D6c., vi, 277, 
1886. 

Duldulthawaiame (‘ village where there 
are plenty of humming insects’). A 
former village of the Mishikhwutmetunne 
on Coquille r., Oreg. 

Dul-dul' pa-wai'-a-me.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 232, 1890. 

Dull Knife. A chief of a band of North¬ 
ern Cheyenne who first came into public 
notice in 1868 when, as one of the repre¬ 
sentatives of his tribe, he signed the 
treaty of Ft Laramie, May 10, made by 
the Northern Cheyenne and Northern 
Arapaho with the United States, his name 


appearing as “ Tah-me-la-pash-me, or 
Dull Knife.” In 1875, or early in 1876, 
Dull Knife’s band, numbering about 400 
warriors, suddenly attacked Washakie’s 
band of Shoshoni, at that time on Big¬ 
horn r. near the mouth of Gray Bull 
r. In 1876 the Northern Cheyenne, in¬ 
cluding Dull Knife’s band, joined the 
Sioux under Sitting Bull in their general 
uprising during this and the following 
year. They were present at and were 
participants in the Custer massacre on 
the Little Bighorn in June, 1876, and ac¬ 
cording to Chief Gall’s statement, at the 
beginning of the battle the Cheyenne 
fought Custer’s command while the Sioux 
attacked Reno’s force, and after the lat¬ 
ter had been driven back, the entire 
body of warriors turned on Custer’s com¬ 
mand. On Nov. 25, 1876, the cavalry 
under Col. Mackenzie attacked Dull 
Knife’s camp at daybreak, destroying 173 
lodges and capturing 500 ponies. Al¬ 
though the Indians escaped, with heavy 
loss, they later surrendered and were 
moved to Oklahoma and placed with the 
Southern Cheyenne. Greatly dissatisfied 
with their new home, an attempt was 
made by a large party under Dull Knife 
to escape to the N. in Sept., 1878. They 
were pursued and a part of them cap¬ 
tured and confined at Ft Robinson, Nebr., 
whence they made a desperate attempt 
to escape on the night of Jan. 9, 1879, 
during which most of them, including 
Dull Knife, were killed. Consult Dunn, 
Massacres, 1886; Ellis, Ind. Wars, 1892; 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1877-79; Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896. See the article 
Cheyenne. (c. t.) 

Durango. A former Tepehuane settle¬ 
ment, now the capital of the Mexican 
state of the same name.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 318, 1864. 

Dustayalunyi ( DustayaUvn'yt , ‘ where it 
made a noise, as of thunder or shooting,’ 
apparently ref erring to a lightning stroke). 
A former Cherokee settlement about the 
mouth of Shooting cr., an affluent of Hi- 
wassee r., near Hayesville, Clay co., 
N. C.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
517, 1900. 

Dutch influence. The influence of the 
Dutch on the Indians n. of Mexico was 
confined to the period (1609-64) from 
Hudson’s visit to the surrender of New 
Amsterdam and its dependencies to the 
English. The region in which this in¬ 
fluence was exerted lies between the 
Susquehanna and Connecticut rs., and 
between the Atlantic and L. Ontario. 
Ft Orange, now the city of Albany, was a 
noted trading post of the Dutch, and there 
they came in contact with the Iroquoian 
tribes of the N., in addition to the Algon- 
quian tribes of the S. The harsh con¬ 
duct of Hudson toward the Indians met 


BULL. 30] 


DWAMISH-DYES AND PIGMENTS 


407 


by him on Hudson r. was in part re¬ 
sponsible for many subsequent conflicts 
between the Dutch and the natives. The 
Dutch were agents in furnishing brandy 
to the Indians of their territory and to 
the surrounding tribes, thereby undoing 
much of the good sought to be accom¬ 
plished by the French authorities. The 
United Company of the New Netherlands, 
which exercised the first controlling in¬ 
fluence in the region of Hudson r., was 
succeeded in 1621 by the powerful West 
India Company, and in 1632 was founded 
the fort on Connecticut r. where is now 
the city of Hartford. The trade in furs 
with the Pequot and other tribes was ex¬ 
tensive. Disputes soon occurred that 
proved detrimental to trade, and De Forest 
(Hist. Inds. of Conn., 73, 1852) considers 
that it was the loss of the Dutch trade 
which induced the Pequot to invite the 
English of Massachusetts bay to settle in 
Connecticut, an act that led ultimately to 
their own destruction. Quarrels between 
the Dutch of New Amsterdam and the 
Indians, and the savage conduct of Gov. 
Kieft in 1642, led to much slaughter of 
natives during the next 2 years, and 
stirred up many of the Connecticut tribes 
against both the English and the Dutch. 
Some of them had engaged in intriguing, 
now against one, now against the other 
party of the whites. Friederici (Indianer 
und Anglo-Americaner, 16, 1900) takes a 
more favorable view of the attitude of the 
Dutch toward the Indians in general than 
that entertained by many authorities. 
The Dutch helped the Iroquois confed¬ 
eracy against the northern Algonquian 
hordes, and the wars thus initiated were in 
progress when the English conquest took 
place. They also aided the Mahican 
against the Mohawk (Ruttenber, Ind. 
Tribes of Hudson R., 56, 1872) and the 
Seneca against the Munsee, to whom the 
Swedes had supplied arms. Many trou¬ 
bles arose from the cupidity of the traders 
and settlers who sold firearms and liquors 
to the Indians, regardless of the general 
policy of the government (Nelson, Inds. 
of New Jersey, 1894). An interesting relic 
of Dutch influence is the title “Kora” 
given by the modern Iroquois of Canada 
to the governor-general, or to the King of 
England, a corruption of Corlaer, the 
name of one of the Dutch governors of 
New Amsterdam. (a. f. c.) 

Dwamish. A small body of Salish near 
Seattle, Wash., which city was named 
from a chief of this and the Suquamish 
tribes. Their proper seat, according to 
Gibbs, was at the outlet of L. Washing¬ 
ton. In 1856 they were removed to the 
e. shore of Bainbridge id., but owing to 
the absence of a fishing ground were 
shortly afterward taken to Holderness 
point, on the w. side of Elliot bay, which 


was already a favorite place for fishing. 
The name, being well known, has been 
improperly applied collectively to a num¬ 
ber of distinct bands in this neighbor¬ 
hood. Their population about 1856 is 
variously given from 64 to 312. The 
remnant is incorporated with the Sno¬ 
homish and others under the Tulalip 
school, n. w. Wash., altogether number¬ 
ing 465 in 1904. (j. r. s. ) 

Dawamish. —Simmons (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 73, 1857. Dewamish.— Shaw 
(1856), ibid., 113. Du-a-f be'.— McCaw, Puyallup, 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Puyallupname). Dugh- 
dwabsh. —Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 1877. 
Dwahmish. —Maynard (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 
34th Cong.,3d sess.,86,1857. Dwa-mish.— Stevens 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 453,1854. D’Wamish. —Gibbs in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., 1,436,1855. Lake Indians. —Page 
(1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37,34th Cong., 3d sess., 82, 
1857. Neamitch.— Farnham, Travels, 111, 1843. 
Nee-wam-ish.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 170,1852. 
Nowamish.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 432, 1855. 
Nuna-mish.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 171, 1852. 
N’Wamish.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 432, 1855. 
Port Orchard.— Wilkes, ibid., 435. Tsa-bah-bish.— 
Maynard (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 
3d sess., 86, 1857. Tsa-bah-bobs. —Ibid., 82. Tsah- 
bahbish. —Ibid.,86. T’sakbahbish. —Stevens (1856), 
ibid., 46. 

Dwarfs. See Anatomy, Physiology, Popu¬ 
lar fallacies. 

Dyami ( D'ya'-mi ). The Eagle clans of 
the Keresan pueblos of Laguna, Acoma, 
Santa Ana, Sia, San Felipe, and Cochiti, 
N. Mex. The Eagle clan of Laguna claims 
to have come originally from Acoma; that 
of Acoma forms a phratry with the Soshka 
(Chaparral-cock) clan, while that of Co¬ 
chiti is extinct. (f. w. h.) 

D’yami-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 
1896 (Sia, San Felipe, and Santa Ana forms; 
hdno=‘ people’). Dyami-hanuch.— Ibid. (Cochiti 
form). Ti-a'-mi.— Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 
19,1894 (Sia form). Tya-me.— Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, in, 293, 1890 (applied to the clan 
fetish). Tyame hanutsh.— Bandelier, Delight 
Makers, 181,1890. Tyami-hano ch . —Hodge, op. cit. 
(Laguna form). T’yanff-hanoq oh . —Ibid. (Acoma 
form). 

Dyani ( Dya'-ni ). The Deer clans of 
Sia and San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex.; 
the latter clan is extinct. 

Dyani-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350,1896 
( hdno= ‘ people ’ ). Ta'ne. —Stevenson in 11th Rep. 
B.A.E.,19,1894. 

Dyapige. A prehistoric Tano pueblo 
s. e. of Lamy, “some distance in the 
mountains,” n. central New Mexico. 

Dyap-i-ge.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
100,1892 (Tewa name). 

Dye (D'ye). The Gopher clans of the 
Tewa pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, 
San Ildefonso, and Tesuque, N. Mex. 
Dye-tdoa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896 
( td6a=‘ people’). 

Dyea. A former Chilkat village which 
became noted subsequently in the time of 
the Yukon gold excitement, but is now 
practically dead owing to the building of 
the Yukon and White Pass railway to 
Skagway. 

Daiye'.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 

Dyes and Pigments. Most of the Indian 
tribes of North America made permanent 
dyes from organic materials. The de- 


408 


DYES AND PIGMENTS 


[b. a. e. 


mand for these dyes arose when basketry, 
quillwork, and other textile industries 
had reached a considerable degree of 
advancement, and there was need of 
diversity of color in ornamentation, as 
well as permanency of color, which pig¬ 
ments alone could not supply. 

Dyes.—The California tribes and many 
others who made baskets w r ere usually 
satisfied with natural colors. These are 
the red and black of bark, the white of 
grass stems, the pale yellow of peeled 
rods or rushes, and the brown of root 
bark. A few dyes were known, however, 
notably a black or dark gray on splints 
which had been buried in mud. The 
Hupa obtained bright yellow from lichens, 
another color from the roots of the Oregon 
grape, and a brownish red from alder 
bark. Most of the tribes of the S. W. 
use only black for designs on baskets, 
and, rarely, red dyes. The Hopi, how¬ 
ever, have a larger number of native 
dyes for basketry splints than any other 
tribe, and the Apache, Walapai, and 
Havasupai have a number of vegetal dyes 
that are not used in basketry. The 
Abnaki and other tribes made fugitive 
stains from pokeberries and fruits of the 
blueberry and elder. Lichens, golden¬ 
seal, bloodroot, and the bark of the but¬ 
ternut and other trees were also used by 
the northern and eastern tribes, and in 
southern regions the prickly pear. The 
Virginia Indians, according to Hariot, 
used sumach, a kind of seed, a small root, 
and the bark of a tree to dye their hair, 
as well as to color their faces red and to 
dye mantles of deerskin and the rushes 
for baskets and mats. The tribes of the 
N. W. coast employed a number of har¬ 
monious vegetal colors in their baskets. 
Most of the native dyes of the Indians 
were superseded by others introduced, 
especially in late years by aniline colors. 

Quillwork, formerly widespread, was 
generally superseded by beadwork, and 
the native dyes employed in the art have 
fallen almost into disuse. Some of the 
N. W. coast tribes, the Eskimo, and the 
northern Athapascans alone practise 
quillworking in its purity, but its former 
range was extensive. 

Native vegetal blanket dyes are found 
in use only among the Chilkat of Alaska, 
who still retain them in weaving their 
ceremonial shawls. The Nez Perces and 
the Navaho formerly used permanent 
vegetal dyes of pleasing colors for wool. 
With the latter these dyes have given way 
so recently to aniline colors that the de¬ 
tails of their manufacture have not be¬ 
come lost. The use of dyes required a 
knowledge of mordants; for this purpose 
urine was commonly employed by the 
Navaho, Hopi, and Zuni, besides an im¬ 
pure native alum, and an iron salt mixed 


with organic acids to produce black. It 
has been assumed that, since the weaver’s 
art seems to be accultural with the Navaho, 
the mordant dyes may have been derived 
from the Pueblos, who, in turn, may have 
received them from the Spaniards. Mat¬ 
thews, however, controverts the opinion 
that the Navaho learned the art of weav¬ 
ing from the Pueblos; and indeed there 
is no reason why the Indians should not 
have become acquainted with various 
mordants through the practise of the 
culinary art or other domestic arts in 
which fire is employed. 

Pigments .—The inorganic colors used by 
the Indians were mostly derived from 
iron-bearing minerals, such as ochers and 
other ores, and stained earths. These 
furnished various tints, as brown, red, 
green, blue, yellow, orange, and purple. 
The search for good colors was assidu¬ 
ously pursued; quarries were opened and 
a commerce in their products was carried 
on. White was derived from kaolin, 
limestone, and gypsum; black from 
graphite, powdered coal, charcoal, or 
soot; green and blue from copper ores, 
phosphate of iron, etc. Pigments were 
used for facial decoration, red being most 
prized, for which reason the vermilion of 
the trader was eagerly adopted, but the 
intent of face painting was generally to- 
temic or religious and not merely orna¬ 
mental. Pigments were rubbed into soft 
tanned skins, giving the effect of dye, and 
were mixed with various media for paint¬ 
ing the wood and leather of boxes, arrows, 
spears, shields, tipis, robes, parfleche 
cases, etc. Among the Southwestern 
tribes in particular pigments were mixed 
with sand for dry-paintings (q. v.), 
while pigments of iron earths or kaolin 
were employed for decorating pottery. 
In connection with the preparation and 
use of pigments are grinding slabs and 
mullers, mortars and pestles, brushes and 
paint sticks, and a great variety of pouches 
and pots for carrying or for preserving 
them. The media for applying the pig¬ 
ments varied with the objects to be deco¬ 
rated and with tribal or personal usage. 
In general, face paint was mixed with 
grease or saliva, while the medium for 
wood or skin was grease or glue. The 
N. W. coast Indians put grease on their 
faces before applying the paint. Among 
some of the Pueblos, at least, an emulsion 
of fat seeds was made with the pigment, 
and this was applied by spurting from 
the mouth. See Adornment , Art, Dry- 
painting, Mines and Quarries, Ornament, 
Painting. 

Consult Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. 
Publ., Anthrop. ser.; Fewkes in 17th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1898; Goddard, Life and 
Culture of the Hupa, 1903; Holmes in 
Am. Anthrop., v, no. 3, 1903; Hough 


BULL. 30] 


DYOSYOWAN-EAGLE 


409 


(1) in Am. Anthrop., xi, May, 1898; (2) 
in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1900 and 1901; Kroe- 
ber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvm, 
pt. 1, 1902; Mason, Aboriginal American 
Basketry, 1902; Matthews in 3d Rep. 
B. A. E., 1884; Pepper, Native Navajo 
Dyes, in Papoose, Feb., 1902; Stephen in 
Internat. Folk-lore Cong., i, 1898; Wiss- 
ler in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvm, 
pt. 3, 1904. (w. h. ) 

Dyosyowan (‘it is oil-covered.’—Hew¬ 
itt). An important former Seneca vil¬ 
lage on Buffalo cr., Erieco., N. Y. 
Buffalo.— Kirkland (1788) in Am. State Pap., Ind. 
Aff.,1,211,1832. Dyo'-syo-wa". —Hewitt,infn, 1887 
(Seneca name). Tehoseroron.— Treaty of Oct. 22, 
1784, in U. S. Ind. Treat., 922, 1873. Teyoheghs- 
colea.— Kirkland, op. cit. 

Dyrnaeskirk. A former Eskimo mis¬ 
sionary station on Eriksfjord, s. Green¬ 
land.—Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, map, 
1767. 

Eagle. Among the many birds held in 
superstitious and appreciative regard by 
the aborigines of North America, the 
eagle, by reason of its majestic, solitary, 
and mysterious nature, became an espe¬ 
cial object of worship. This is expressed 
in the employment of the eagle by the 
Indian for religious and esthetic pur¬ 
poses only. The wing-bones were fash¬ 
ioned into whistles to be carried by war¬ 
riors or used in ceremonies, and the 
talons formed powerful amulets or fe¬ 
tishes, having secondary value as orna¬ 
ments; the feathers were, however, of 
greatest importance. The capture of 
eagles for their feathers was a hazardous 
branch of hunting, requiring great skill. 
Among some tribes eagle-killing was 
delegated to certain men. Owing to the 
difficulty of getting within bowshot of 
the bird, it was often trapped or the 
eyrie was visited to secure the young. 
Eagles are still kept in captivity by the 
Pueblo Indians as in the time of Coro¬ 
nado (14th Rep. B. A. E., 516, 1896). 
The striking war-bonnet of the Plains 
tribes was made of eagle feathers and 
was highly valued, for it is said that one 
pony was the price of a perfect tail of 12 
feathers of the “war eagle,” i. e., the 
white plumes with black tips. Other 
varieties, with bars across the feathers, 
are regarded as inferior (Mooney). War- 
riors of the Plains tribes usually wore the 
feathers of the golden eagle only, and it is 
probable that the customs of many tribes 
prescribed like discriminations as to 
feathers of different species. Many tribes 
wore one or more eagle feathers in the 
hair, and these feathers were often cut, 
colored, or otherwise decorated with some 
cognizance of the wearer (see Heraldry). 
It was the custom of the Pillager Chip¬ 
pewa to allow a warrior who scalped an 
enemy to wear on his head two eagle 
feathers, and the act of capturing a 


wounded prisoner on the battlefield 
earned the distinction of wearing five. 
Fans made of the primary feathers of the 
eagle formed an accessory to the costume 
of the Sioux and other tribes. Eagle 
feathers were also attached as ornaments 
to the buckskin shirts worn by men, and 
war costumes and paraphernalia, includ¬ 
ing shields, were ornamented with them. 
As one of the prominent totemic animals, 
the eagle gave its name to many clans 
and religious fraternities. It is probable 
that nearly every tribe in the United 
States recognizing clan or gentile organi¬ 
zation had an eagle clan or gens at some 
period in its history. 

The eagle held an important place in 
symbolic art. It was depicted by all the 
methods of art expression known to the 
Indian, appearing on pottery, basketry, 
textiles, beadwork, quillwork, shields, 
crests, totem poles, house and grave posts, 
pipes, rattles, and objects pertaining to 
cult and ceremony. It was also repre¬ 
sented in the primitive drama connected 
with ceremonies. Many tribes possessed 
eagle deities, as the Kwahu, the eagle 
kachina of the Hopi of Arizona, and the 
Eagle god of the Miwok of California. 

Among the Haida, passes made with 
eagle fans were thought to be effectual in 
conjuring, and this use reappears in many 
tribes. The wing-bones were often em¬ 
ployed as sucking tubes, with which 
medicine-men pretended to remove dis¬ 
ease. The Tlingit and other North Pa¬ 
cific tribes used eagle down for ceremo¬ 
nial sprinkling on the hair, masks, and 
dance costume; it was also scattered in 
the air, being blown through a tube or 
sprinkled by hand. The Pawnee and 
other Plains tribes as well as the Pueblos 
also used the down in ceremonies, and it 
was probably a general custom. Among 
the Hopi the eagle is generally associated 
with the Sky god, and its feathers are 
used with disks to represent the Sun god 
(Fewkes). 

The use of eagle feathers in religion is 
nowhere better shown than among the 
Pueblos, when downy plumes are attached 
to masks, rattles, prayer-sticks (q. v.), and 
other cult objects entering into ceremo¬ 
nies. For this purpose a great quantity of 
feathers is yearly required. The Hopi 
clans claimed the eagle nests in the locali¬ 
ties where they formerly resided, and 
caught in traps or took from the nests 
eaglets, whose down was used in cere¬ 
monies. The eaglets, when required for 
feathers, have their heads washed; they 
are killed by pressure on the thorax, and 
buried with appropriate rites in special 
cemeteries, in which offerings of small 
wooden images and bows and arrows are 
yearly deposited. The interior Salish 
also are said by Teit to have property in 


410 


[b. a. e. 


EAGLE HILLS ASSINIB01N-EARTH LODGE 


eagles. Near the present Hopi villages 
there are shrines in which offerings of 
eagle eggs carved from wood are placed 
during the winter solstice for the increase 
of eagles. Among the Zuni, feathers shed 
by their captive eagles have special sig¬ 
nificance, though the feathers are also 
regularly plucked and form a staple arti¬ 
cle of trade. 

The mythology of almost every tribe is 
replete with eagle beings, and the wide¬ 
spread thunderbird myth relates in some 
cases to the eagle. In Hopi myth the 
Man-eagle is a sky-being who lays aside his 
plumage after flights in which he spreads 
devastation, and the hero who slays him 
is carried to the house in the sky by 
eagles of several species, each" one in its 
turn bearing him higher. The Man- 
eagle myth is widely diffused, most tribes 
regarding this being as a manifestation 
of either helpful or maleficent power. 

See Fewkes, Property Rights in Eagles 
among the Hopi, Am. Anthrop., n, 690- 
707,1900; Hoff¬ 
man in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 

1896; Mooney 
(1) ibid., (2) 
in 19th Rep. 

B. A. E., 1900. 

(w. H.) j 

Eagle Hills 
Assiniboin. A 
band of Assini- 
boin of 35 
lodges living in 
1808 between 
Bear hills and 
South Saskatch¬ 
ewan r., Assiniboia, Canada.—Henry - 
Thompson Jour., Coues ed., n, 523,1897. 

Earth lodge. A dwelling partly under¬ 
ground, circular in form, from 30 to 60 ft 
in diameter, with walls about 6 ft high, 
on which rested a dome-shaped roof with 
an opening in the center to afford light 
within and to permit the egress of smoke. 
The entrance was a projecting passage¬ 
way from 6 to 14 ft long. The method 
of construction was first to draw a circle 
on the ground and excavate the earth 
within it from 2 to 4 ft deep. About 1 £ 
ft within the circle were set crotched 
posts some 8 or 10 ft apart, on which 
were laid beams. Outside these posts 
were set others, one end of them braced 
against the bottom of the bank of earth 
at the periphery of the circle, and the 
other end leaning against the beams, 
forming a close stockade, an opening being 
left at the e. side for the entrance. Mid¬ 
way between the center of the excavation 
and the stockade were planted 4, 6, or 8 


tall crotched posts, forming an inner cir¬ 
cle. In the crotches were laid heavy 
beams to support the roof. The bark 
was stripped from all the posts and 
beams. The roof was formed of long, 
slender, tapering tree trunks, stripped of 
bark. The large ends were tied with 
strings of the inner bark of the elm to the 
beams at the top of the stockade, and the 
middle to those resting in the crotches of 
the inner circle of posts. The slender 
ends were cut so as to form the circular 
opening in the center of the roof, 2 or 3 
ft in diameter. Outside this framework 
branches of willow were placed close to¬ 
gether across the posts of the wall and 
the beams, of the roof, and bound tightly 
to each pole, beginning at the ground and 
continuing upward to the central open¬ 
ing. Over the willow branches a heavy 
thatch of coarse dried grass was laid, tied 
in bundles and arranged so that it would 
shed water. Over the thatch was placed 
a thick coating of sods, cut so that they 
could be lap¬ 
ped, and laid 
like shingles. 
The wall and 
roof were after¬ 
ward carefully 
tamped with 
earth and made 
impervious to 
rain. The long 
entranceway 
was built in the 
same manner as 
the lodge, and 
thatched and 
sodded at the 
same time. The grass of the sod continued 
to grow, and wild flowers brightened the 
walls and roof of the dwelling. The 
blackened circle around the central open¬ 
ing in the roof, produced by the heat and 
smoke, was the only suggestion that the 
verdant mound was a human abode. 
Within, the floor was made hard by a 
series of tampings, in which both water 
and fire were used. The fireplace was 
circular in shape and slightly excavated. 
A curtain of skin hung at the opening 
from the passageway into the lodge. The 
outer door was covered with a skin that 
was stiffened by sticks at the top and 
bottom, which was turned to one side to 
give entrance to the passageway. The 
couches of the occupants were placed 
around the wall, and frequently were in¬ 
closed by reed mats which could be raised 
or lowered.. More than one family some¬ 
times occupied a lodge, and in such case 
the families took different sides. The 
back part, opposite the entrance, was re- 



PAWNEE EARTH LODGE 





BULL. 30] 


EAST ABEIKA-EAST GREENLANDERS 


411 


served for tlie keeping of sacred objects 
and the reception of guests. In the winter 
curtains of skin were hung from the beams 
of the inner circle of posts, making a 
smaller room about the fireplace. The 
shields and weapons of the men were sus¬ 
pended from these inner posts, giving 
color to the interior of the dwelling, 
which was always picturesque, whether 
seen at night, when the fire leaped up 
and glinted on the polished blackened 
roof and when at times the lodge was 
filled with men and women in their gala 
dress at some social meeting or religious 
ceremony, or during the day when the 
shaft of sunlight fell through the central 
opening over the fireplace, bringing into 
relief some bit of aboriginal life and leav¬ 
ing the rest of the lodge in deep shadow. 
Few, if any, large and well-built earth 
lodges exist at the present day. Even 
with care a lodge could be made to last 
only a generation or two. 

Ceremonies attended the erection of an 
earth lodge from the marking of the cir¬ 
cle to the putting on of the sods. Both 
men and women took part in these rites 
and shared in the labor of building. To 
cut, haul, and set the heavy posts and 
beams was the men’s task; the binding, 
thatching, and sodding that of the women. 

The earth lodge was used by the Paw¬ 
nee, Ankara, Omaha, Ponca, Osage, and 
other tribes. A similar abode was found 
in the Aleutian ids., on Kodiak id., and 
in s. w. Alaska. There were habitations 
among some of the California tribes that 
had features in common with the earth 
lodge, and there are evidences of relation¬ 
ship between it, the Navaho hogan, and 
one form of Pima dwelling. 

Among the Pawnee are preserved the 
most elaborate ceremonies and traditions 
pertaining to the earth lodge. These 
tribes are said to have abandoned the 
grass house of their kindred at some dis¬ 
tant period and, under the teaching of 
aquatic animals, to have learned to con¬ 
struct the earth lodge. According to 
their ceremonies and legends, not only 
the animals were concerned with its con¬ 
struction—the badger digging the holes, 
the beaver sawing the logs, the bears car¬ 
rying them, and all obeying the directions 
of the whale—but the stars also exercised 
authority. The earlier star cult of the 
people is recognized in the significance 
attached to the four central posts. Each 
stood for a star—the Morning and Even¬ 
ing stars, symbols of the male and female 
cosmic forces, and the North and South 
stars, the direction of chiefs and the abode 
of perpetual life. The posts were painted 
in the symbolic colors of these stars—red, 
white, black, yellow. During certain 
ceremonies corn of one of these colors was 
offered at the foot of the post of that 


color. In the rituals ol the Pawnee the 
earth lodge is made typical of man’s abode 
on the earth; the floor is the plain, the wall 
the distant horizon, the dome the arching 
sky, the central opening the zenith, 
dwelling place of Tirawa, the invisible 
power which gives life to all created 
beings. 

The history of the distribution of this 
kind of dwelling among peoples widely 
scattered is a problem not yet fully solved. 
See Grass lodge, Habitations, (a. c . f.) 

East Abeika. ( Aiabeka , ‘unhealthful 
place ’). A former Choctaw town at the 
mouth of Straight cr., an affluent of the 
Sukenatcha, in Kemper co., Miss. Called 
East Abeika to distinguish it from another 
town of the same name.—Halbert in Miss. 
Hist. Soc. Publ., vi,425,1902. See AbihJca. 
Abeeka.— Romans, Florida, 313, 1775. Aiabeka.— 
Halbert, op. cit. East Abeeka. —Ihid., 309. East 
Abeika.— West Florida map, ca. 1775. 

Eastern Indians. A collective term ap¬ 
plied by the early New England writers 
to all the tribes n . e . of Merrimac r. It 
is used by Hubbard as early as 1680. 
These tribes, including the Pennacook, 
Abnaki, Malecite, and Micmac, were gen¬ 
erally in the French interest and hostile 
to the English. (j. m. ) 

Eastern Indians. —Form used by most early Eng¬ 
lish writers. Eastward Indians. —Winthrop (1700) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 612, 1854. Estward 
Indians. —Owaneco (1700), ibid., 614 (“the Nowon- 
thewog or the Estward Indians’’). 

Eastern Shawnee. A division of the 
Shawnee now living in Indian Ter. They 
formerly lived with the Seneca (Mingo) 
near Lewistown, Ohio, but sold their 
lands in 1831 and removed with the latter 
tribe to Kansas. In 1867 they separated 
from the Seneca and removed to Indian 
Ter. under the name of Eastern Shawnee. 
They are now under the Seneca school 
and numbered 95 in 1904. ( j. m. ) 

East Greenlanders. The Eskimo inhab¬ 
iting the e. coast of Greenland. They 
are divided into two groups: The Ang- 
magsalingmiut, inhabiting the fjords 
about C. Dan; and the southern group, for¬ 
merly scattered along the coast south¬ 
ward. They have long lived in complete 
isolation, three-fourths of them in the 
Angmagsalik district, others farther s. 
about Iluilek, C. Bille, and Tingmiarmiut. 
(Nansen, First Crossing of Greenland, i, 
321-371, 1890). They have developed 
some of the peculiar arts of the Eskimo 
to their highest perfection, especially the 
use of harpoons with shafts that become 
detached and float in the water, while 
the seal swims off with the line and blad¬ 
der, and of flexible-jointed lances also 
for killing the struggling animal. The 
more easily handled double bladder is 
their invention. They employ the 
double-bladed paddle altogether, wear 
skin-tight garments that fit in the waist 
of the kaiak so closely that no water 


412 


EASTMAN 


[B. A. E. 


can enter, and when overturned in the 
sea they are able to right themselves 
single handed with the paddle. The 
ornamental arts of the East Greenland¬ 
ers are neglected, except among one iso¬ 
lated band in the remote n. e. Their 
winter houses, made of stones and sod, 
are long and narrow, with family benches 
on one side, and can be stretched out 
to accommodate more people than the 
square houses of Alaska. The large 
public buildings of the western tribes 
they know only by tradition. The East 
Greenlanders numbered 548, comprising 
245 males and 303 females, in 1884, not 
counting a few scattered families of un¬ 
known numbers living n. of 68° (Rink, 
Eskimo Tribes, 1887). The entire south¬ 
ern group of the East Greenlanders, all 
the pagan Eskimo of Tingmiarmiut and 
the other places s. of Angmagsalik, 114 
individuals altogether, emigrated between 
1887 and 1900 to Kernertok, near C. Fare¬ 
well. 

The villages and settlements of the East 
Greenlanders, past and present, are as fol¬ 
lows: Akernivak, Akorninarmiut, Aluik, 
Aluk, Amivik, Anarnisok, Angmagsalik, 
Anoritok, Aputitek, Atangime, Auarkat, 
Estale, Igdluarsuk, Ikatek, Ikerasak, Ilui- 
lek, Imarsivik, Ingmikertok, Inigsalik, 
Inugsiut, Ivimiut, Ivangarsik, Kangigd- 
lek, Kemisak, Kernertok, Kialinek, Ki- 
kertarsoak, Ivinarbik, Ivoremiut, Ku- 
marmiut, Kutek, Manitsuk, Nanusek, 
Narsuk, Norajik, Norsit, Nualik, Nuna- 
kitit, Okiosorbik, Orkua, Patuterajuit, 
Pikiutdlek, Sangmisok, Sarkarmiut, Ser- 
miligak, Sermilik, Sivinganek, Sivingar- 
narsik, Tarsia, Tasiusarsik, Taterat, 
Tingmiarmiut, Umanak, Umivik, Utor- 
karmiut. (h. w. h. ) 

Eastman, Charles Alexander ( Ohiyesci, 
‘the Winner’). A Santee Dakota phy¬ 
sician and author, born in 1858 near Red¬ 
wood Falls, Minn. His father was a full- 
blood Sioux named Many Lightnings, 
and his mother the half-blood daughter 
of a well-known army officer. His mother 
dying soon after his birth, he was reared 
by his paternal grandmother and an 
uncle, who after the Minnesota massacre 
in 1862 fled with the boy into Canada. 
Here he lived the life of a wild Indian 
until he was 15 years of age, when his 
father, who in the meantime had accepted 
Christianity and civilization, sought him 
out and brought him home to Flandreau, 
S. Dak., where a few Sioux families had 
established themselves as farmers and 
homesteaders. Ohiyesa was placed in 
the mission school at Santee, Nebr., where 
he made such progress in 2 years that he 
was selected for a more advanced course 
and sent to Beloit College, Beloit, Wis. 
After 2 years spent there in the prepara¬ 
tory department he went to Knox Col¬ 


lege, Galesburg, Ill., thence to Kimball 
Academy and Dartmouth College, New 
Hampshire. He was graduated from 
Dartmouth in 1887, and immediately 
entered the Boston University school of 
medicine, receiving the degree of M. D. in 
1890. Dr Eastman was then appointed 
Government physician to the Pine Ridge 
agency, S. Dak., and served there nearly 
3 years, through the ghost-dance disturb¬ 
ance and afterward. In 1893 he went to 
St Paul, Minn., and entered there on the 
practice of medicine, also serving for 3 
years as traveling secretary of the Young 
Men’s Christian Association among the 
Indians. Afterward he was attorney for 
the Sioux at Washington, and later again 
Government physician at Crow Creek, 
S. Dak. In 1903 he was appointed by 
the Office of Indian Affairs to the special 



CHARLES ALEXANDER EASTMAN. (HARPER & BROS.) 


work of revising the allotment rolls and 
selecting permanent family names for the 
Sioux. His first book, “Indian Boy¬ 
hood,” appeared in 1902, and “Red 
Hunters and the Animal People” in 
1904. He is an occasional contributor to 
the magazines and lectures frequently on 
Indian life and history. In 1891 Dr 
Eastman married Miss Elaine Goodale, 
of Massachusetts, and they have 6 chil¬ 
dren. (e. G. E.) 

Eastman, John ( Mahpiyawakankidan , 
‘Sacred Cloud Worshipper’). A Santee 
Dakota of three-fourths blood, brother 
of Charles Alexander Eastman, noted 
as a Presbyterian clergyman; born in 
Mar., 1849, at Shakopee, Minn. His 
father was Many Lightnings, a full- 
blood Sioux, who, on becoming a Chris¬ 
tian in 1864, took the name of Jacob 
Eastman. His mother, Mary Nancy 
Eastman, was the daughter of Capt. Seth 







BULL. 30] 


EBAHAMO-ECHULIT 


413 


Eastman, an American army officer, and 
maternal granddaughter of Cloudman, a 
Sioux chief. He was taught during two 
winters by Rev. A. L. Riggs at Sisseton 
mission, walking there about 100 m. from 
his home at Flandreau, S. Dak., and back 
again in spring. Afterward he was sent 
to live for 9 mos. in the family of Robert 
Riggs at Beloit, Wis., who taught him. 
In 1876 he was ordained as a Presbyterian 
minister at Flandreau and installed as 
pastor of the Indian church of Flandreau 
township, which had been organized in 
1871 and provided by the Presbyterian 
Mission Board with a building in 1874. 
Mr Eastman took charge of a Govern¬ 
ment school and began teaching the youth 
of the Santee res. in 1878, but resigned 
this charge in 1885 in order to accept the 
position of overseer of the band then liv¬ 
ing in Flandreau township. He retired 
from this position in 1896 and now de¬ 
votes much of his attention to the work 
of his ministry and the cultivation of a 
small farm purchased some years ago. 
His church now numbers 96 communi¬ 
cants. In 1874 Mr Eastman married 
Miss Mary J. Faribault, a half-blood 
Santee. They are parents of 6 children. 
Mr Eastman is still active in tribal 
affairs, and since about 1880 has an¬ 
nually served in the capacity of delegate 
of his people at Washington. 

Ebahamo. An extinct tribe formerly 
dwelling on Matagorda bay, Tex. La 
Salle constructed his Ft St Louis within 
the territory of this tribe and of the 
Quelanhubeches, or Karankawa, who 
probably were a cognate people. Joutel 
(1687) states in his narrative (French, 
Hist. Coll. La., i, 134, 1846) that La Salle 
recorded a vocabulary of their language, 
which is very different from that of the 
Cenis (Caddo) and more difficult; that 
they were neighbors and allies of the latter 
people and understood some of their 
words. “At our fort at St Louis bay,” he 
says, ‘ ‘ we made some stay to cultivate the 
friendship of our Bracamos (as the Indian 
nation that dwells near our fort is called), 
in order to leave protectors to the people 
whom we would have to leave in the 
fort.” (a. s. g.) 

Apayxam. —Massanet MS. (1690) cited by H. E. 
Bolton, inf’n, 1906 (same?). Bahamos.— Early 
writer quoted by Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 
24, 1891. Bracamos.— Cavelier (1685) quoted by 
Shea, Early Voy., 21, 1861. Ebahamo. —Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, D£c., in, 276. 1878. Ebahumo — 
Ibid., 300. Hebahamo.— Joutel (1687) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., I, 134, 1846. Hebohamos— Joutel 
quoted by Gatschet, op. cit. 

Ebiamana. An unidentified village in 
n. Florida about 1565.—De Bry, Brev. 
Nar., ii, map, 1591. 

Ebita Poocola Chitto (Ibetap okla chitto, 
‘fountain-head big people’). A former 
Choctaw town, noted by Romans, be¬ 
lieved to have been situated on the head 


of Straight cr., in Kemper co., Miss., 
hence the name.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. 
Soc. Publ., vi, 425, 1902. 

Ebita-poocolo-chitto. —West Florida map, ca. 1772. 
Ebitap-oocoolo-cho. —Romans, Florida, 310, 1775. 
Ibetap okla chitto. —Halbert, op. cit. 

Ebita Poocola Skatane (ibetap oklaiskitini, 
1 fountain-head little people ’). A former 
Choctaw town on the w. or main prong 
of Yazoo cr., a n. affluent of Petickfa cr., 
in Kemper co., Miss.—Halbert in Miss. 
Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 423, 1902. 

Ebeetap Oocoola. —Romans, Florida, 310, 1775. 
Ibetap okla iskitini. —Halbert, op. cit. 

Ecatacari. A rancheria of either the 
Eudeve or the Nevome of Sonora, Mexico, 
in the early part of the 18th century. It 
was probably situated near Matape.— 
Writer of 1702(?) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., v, 126, 1857. 

Echantac. A village, presumably Cos- 
tanoan, formerly connected with San Juan 
Bautista mission, Cal.—Engelhardt, Fran¬ 
ciscans in Cal., 398, 1897. 

Echilat. A former village of the Rum- 
sen division of the Costanoan family sit¬ 
uated 12 m. s. e. of San Carlos mission, 
Cal. 

Echilat.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 
San Francisquita. —Ibid. 

Echojoa. A Mayo settlement on the Rio 
Mayo, above Santa Cruz, s. w. Sonora, 
Mexico; pop. 444 in 1900. 

Echehoa.— Hardy, Trav. in Mex., 438, 1829. Echo¬ 
joa.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 356,1864. Echonova.— 
Ibid. (Echojoa, or) . Hetschojoa. —Kino, map (1702) 
in Stocklein, Neue Welt-Bott, 1726. 

Echota (corruption of Its&'ti, meaning 
unknown). The name of several Chero¬ 
kee towns. (1) the most important— 
often distinguished as Great Echota—was 
on the s. side of Little Tennessee r., a 
short distance below Citico cr., in Monroe 
co., Tenn. It was the ancient capital and 
sacred “peace town ” of the nation. At 
that place there is a large mound. (2) 
Little Echota was on Sautee (Its6/tl) cr., 
a head-stream of the Chattahoochee, w. 
of Clarkesville, Ga. (3) New Echota, 
the capital of the nation for some years 
before the removal, was established at a 
spot, originally known as G&nsJgi, at the 
junction of Oostanaula and Conasauga rs., 
in Gordon co., Ga. It was sometimes 
called Newtown. (4) The old Macedo¬ 
nian mission on Soco cr., of the North 
Carolina res., is also known to the Cher¬ 
okee as ItScVtl, as was also (5) the great 
Nacoochee mound. See Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 523, 1900. 

Choquata.— Mooney, op. cit. (cited as former mis¬ 
print) . Chota. —Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 
5th Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887. Chote.— Timberlake, 
Mem., map, 1765 (on Little Tennessee r.). Chote 
great.— Bartram, Trav., 371, 1792 (onTenn. r.). 

Echulit. A Tolowa village at a lagoon 
on the coast about 5 m. n. of Crescent, 
Cal. (p. e. g.) 

E'-tcu-let pin-ne.—Dorsey, MS. Chetco vocab., B. 
A. E., 1884. E-tcu'-lit.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 236,1890(Tututunnenamed). E-tc‘u'-lIt.— 


414 


ECLAUOU-EDUCATION 


[B. A. E. 


Ibid. (Naltunnetunne name). Tc’Ss-qan'-me — 
Ibid, (another Naltunnetunne name). 

Eclauou. A village of the Utina (Tim- 
ucua) confederacy in central Florida in 
the 16th century. —Laudonniere (1564) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243,1869. 

Ecochee. A former Cherokee settle¬ 
ment on a head stream of Savannah r., in 
n. w. South Carolina or n. e. Georgia. 
It was destroyed during the Revolution¬ 
ary war. (j. M.) 

Ecorce. A band of Nipissing living at 
Oka, Canada, in 1736. Their totem was 
the birch. Chauvigneriecalls themL’Eco- 
ree, evidently intended for L’ Ecorce. 

Bark tribe.—Chauvignerie (1736) transl. in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 1053, 1855. L’Ecoree.—Chau¬ 
vignerie quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 
554, 1853. 

Ecureuil (French: 1 squirrel ’). Spoken 
of as a tribe formerly living between Ta- 
doussac and Hudson bay, Quebec pro¬ 
vince, Canada; destroyed by the Iroquois 
in 1661. Probably a Montagnais band 
living about the headwaters of Three rs., 
possibly about the lake named Ouapichi- 
ouanon in the Jesuit Relations. 

Escurieux.—Jes. Rel., 20, 1661. L’Ecureuil.—Mc- 
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, m, 79,1854. 

Ecushaw. See Cashaw. 

Edelano. An unidentified village on an 
island in St Johns r., Fla., in the 16th 
century.—Laudonniere (1564) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 287, 1869. 

Edenshaw (or Edensaw, from a Tlingit 
word ref erri ng to the glacier). The Haida 
chief best known to the whites. He suc¬ 
ceeded early in the 19th century to the 
chieftainship of the strong Stustas kinship 
group which centered in the town of 
Kioosta on the coast of Graham id. oppo¬ 
site North id., Brit. Col. Shortly after 
1860, his people having fallen off in num¬ 
bers, he moved with them to Kung, at 
the mouth of Naden harbor, where he 
erected a large house, which is still stand¬ 
ing. Through the exercise of his excep¬ 
tional abilities in trade and in various 
other ways he became one of the wealth¬ 
iest of the Haida chiefs. His relations 
with the whites were always cordial, and 
it was through his influence that a mis¬ 
sionary was sent to Masset. Among other 
good offices to the whites, he protected 
the crew of an American vessel when 
threatened by other natives. He died 
about 1885. A monument mentioning 
his kind treatment of the whites stands in 
Masset. (j. r. 8 .) 

Edgpiiliik. A Delaware village in w. 
New Jersey in 1792. 

Edgpiiliik.— Brinton, Lenape Leg., 46, 1885. Edg- 
piiluk.— Keane in Stanford, Comp., Cent, and S. 
Am., 512, 1878. 

Edisto. A small tribe, now extinct, 
which appears to have occupied lower 
Edisto r., S. C., which derived its name 
from that of the tribe. The Huguenots 
of Ribault’s colony were kindly wel¬ 
comed by them in 1562, and the Span¬ 


iards for a time had a mission among 
them. They were included in the Cusabo 
group, and are mentioned in connection 
with the Stono, Westo, and Savannah as 
still living in the region named in 1670, 
when English colonization began. With 
the Westo and Stono they were possibly 
driven out by the Shawnee in 1680. 
Gatschet thinks it probable that they 
spoke the Uchean language. See Moon¬ 
ey, Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. 
E., 1894. 

Adusta.—De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. 
Audusta.—Laudonniere (1587) in Hakluyt, Voy., 
379,1600. Edistoes.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 83,1836. Edisto.—Adair, Hist. Inds., 325, 
1775. Edistow.—Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, map, 
1705. Orista.—Fontaneda (ca. 1570) in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., xx, 16, 1841. Oristanum.—Brig- 
stock (1623) quoted by French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 
186, 1875. 

Edjao ( 8 1'djao ). A Haida town situ¬ 
ated around a hill of the same name, 
at the e. end of Masset village, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was occupied 
by the Aoyaku-lnagai, a branch of the 
Yaku-lanas, and, according to the old 
men, consisted in later times of about 6 
houses, which would have contained 
nearly a hundred persons. Later it came 
to be included within the limits of Mas¬ 
set.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 99, 1905. 

Hai'ts’au.—Boas, Twelfth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
23, 1898. Ha-ju hade.—Krause, Tlinkit-Indianer, 
304,1885 (‘people of Edjao’; probably the same). 

Edjieretrukenade (‘buffalo people’). 
An Athapascan tribe of the Chipewyan 
group living along the banks of Buffalo 
r., Athabasca, Canada. 

Edjiere-tpou-kke-nade.—Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 363,1891 (‘buffalo people’). 

Education. The aborigines of North 
America had their own systems of educa¬ 
tion, through which the young were in¬ 
structed in their coming labors and obli¬ 
gations, embracing not only the whole 
round of economic pursuits—hunting, 
fishing, handicraft, agriculture, and 
household work—but speech, fine art, 
customs, etiquette, social obligations, and 
tribal lore. By unconscious absorption 
and by constant inculcation the boy and 
girl became the accomplished man and 
woman. Motives of pride or shame, the 
stimulus of flattery or disparagement, 
wrought constantly upon the child, male 
or female, who was the charge, not of the 
parents and grandparents alone but of 
the wffiole tribe (Heckewelder). Loskiel 
(p. 139) says the Iroquois are particu¬ 
larly attentive to the education of the 
young people for the future government 
of the state, and for this purpose admit 
a boy, generally the nephew of the prin¬ 
cipal chief, to the council and solemn 
feast following it. 

The Eskimo were most careful in teach¬ 
ing their girls and boys, setting them diffi¬ 
cult problems in canoeing, sledding, and 
hunting, showing them how to solve them, 


BULL. 30] 


EDUCATION 


415 


and asking boys how they would meet a 
given emergency (see Child life ). Every¬ 
where there was the closest association, for 
education, of parents with children, who 
learned the names and uses of things in 
nature. At a tender age they played 
at serious business, girls attending to 
household duties, boys following men’s 
pursuits. Children were furnished with 
appropriate toys; they became little 
basket makers, weavers, potters, water 
carriers, cooks, archers, stone workers, 
watchers of crops and flocks, the range 
of instruction being limited only by tribal 
custom. Personal responsibilities were 
laid on them, and they were stimulated by 
the tribal law of personal property, which 
was inviolable. Among the Pueblos 
cult images and paraphernalia were their 
playthings, and they early joined the 
fraternities, looking forward to social du¬ 
ties and initiation. The Apache boy had 
for pedagogues his father and grandfather, 
who began early to teach him counting, 
to run on level ground, then up and down 
hill, to break branches from trees, to jump 
into cold water, and to race, the whole 
training tending to make him skilful, 
strong, and fearless. The girl was trained 
in part by her mother, but chiefly by the 
grandmother, the discipline beginning as 
soon as the child could control her move¬ 
ments, but never becoming regular or 
severe. It consisted in rising early, carry¬ 
ing water, helping about the home, cook¬ 
ing, and minding children. At 6 the little 
girl took her first lessons in basketry 
with yucca leaves. Later on decorated 
baskets, saddle-bags, beadwork, and dress 
were her care. 

On the coming of the whites a new era 
of secular education, designed and unde¬ 
signed, began. All the natives, young 
and old, were pupils, and all the whites 
who came in contact with them were in¬ 
structors, whether purposely or through 
the influence of their example and pat¬ 
ronage. The undesigned instruction can 
not be measured, but its effect was pro¬ 
found. The Indian passed at once into 
the iron age; the stone period, except in 
ceremony, was moribund. So radical 
was the change in the eastern tribes that 
it is difficult now to illustrate their true 
life in museum collections. 

An account of the designed instruction 
would embrace all attempts to change 
manners, customs, and motives, to teach 
reading and writing in the foreign tongue, 
to acquaint the Indians with new arts and 
industries, and to impress or force upon 
them the social organization of their con¬ 
querors. The history of this systematic 
instruction divides itself into the period 
of (1) discovery and exploration, (2) 
colonization and settlement, (3) Colonial 
and Revolutionary times, (4) the growth 


of the national policy, and (5) the present 
system. 

Parts of the area here considered were 
discovered and explored by several Euro¬ 
pean nations at dates wide apart. All of 
them aroused the same wonder at first 
view, traded their manufactures for In¬ 
dian products, smoked the pipe of peace, 
and opened friendly relations. The Nor¬ 
wegians began their acculturation of 
Greenland in the year 1000. The Span¬ 
ish pioneers were Ponce de Leon, Narvaez, 
Cabeza de Vaca, Marcos de Niza, De Soto, 
Coronado, Cabrillo, and many others. 
The French appeared in Canada and in 
the Mississippi valley, and were followed 
by the English in Virginia and in New 
England, the Dutch in New York, the 
Swedes in New Jersey, the Quakers in 
Pennsylvania, and the Russians in Alaska. 
Instruction, designed and undesigned, 
immediately ensued, teaching the Indians 
many foreign industrial processes, the 
bettering of their own, and the adoption 
of firearms, and metal tools and utensils. 
Domestic animals (horses, donkeys, cat¬ 
tle, sheep, goats, poultry) and many 
vegetables found congenial environ¬ 
ment. It was through these and other 
practical lessons that the missionaries 
and teachers of the early days, who 
came to Christianize young Indians and 
bestow on them an education, were more 
successful instructors than they knew. 
By the subtle process of suggestion, the 
inevitable action of mind upon mind, the 
Indians received incalculable training in 
all arts and the fashion of living. Fail¬ 
ures to accomplish the most cherished 
object of the missionaries grew out of the 
great distance which separated the two 
races, and of the contrary influences of 
many of the whites who were first on the 
spot, not from lack of zeal or ability. The 
Roman Catholic clergy were at first the 
most efficient agents of direct instruction; 
besides carrying on their proper mission¬ 
ary work they exerted themselves to miti¬ 
gate the harsh treatment visited on the 
Indian. In the 16th century the expe¬ 
dition of Narvaez to Florida was accom¬ 
panied by Franciscans under Padre Juan 
Juarez, and the appearance of Cabeza de 
Vaca in Mexico prompted Fray Marcos 
de Niza’s journey to the n . as far as Zuni, 
and of the expedition of Coronado, who 
left Fray Juan de Padilla and a lay brother 
in Quivira, on the Kansas plains, as well 
as a friar and a lay brother at Tiguex and 
Pecos, respectively, all destined to be 
killed by the natives. The subsequent 
history of the S. W. records a series of 
disasters to the immediate undertakings, 
but permanent success in practical edu¬ 
cation. 

In 1567 the agricultural education of 
Indians was tried in Florida by the Jesuit 


416 


EDUCATION 


[B. a. e. 


Fray Rogel, who selected lands, pro¬ 
cured agricultural implements, and built 
commodious houses (Shea). 

Early in the 17th century Franciscan 
missions were established among the 
Apalachee and neighboring tribes, after¬ 
ward to be abandoned, but forming the 
first link in the chain of causes which has 
brought these Indians through their mi¬ 
nority under guardianship to mature self- 
dependence. Concentration for practical 
instruction was established in California 
by the Franciscans ( see California , Indians 
of). The results achieved by the mis¬ 
sions in the S. W. were chiefly practical 
and social. Domestic animals, with the 
art of domestication and industries de¬ 
pending on their products, were perma¬ 
nently acquired. Foreign plants, includ¬ 
ing wheat, peaches, and grapes, were 
introduced, gunpowder was adopted in 
place of the bow, and new practices 
and customs, good and bad, came into 
vogue. The early French missions in 
North America were among (1) the Ab- 
naki in Maine, (2) the Huron in Ontario, 
Michigan, and Ohio, (3) the Iroquois in 
New York, (4) the Ottawa in Wisconsin 
and Michigan, (5) the Illinois in the mid¬ 
dle W., and (6) the tribes of Louisiana. 
Bishop Laval founded a school at Quebec 
for French and Indian youth, Father de 
Smet planted the first Catholic mission 
among the Salish tribes, and Canadian 
priests visited the natives on Puget sd. 
and along the coast of Washington. 

One of the objects in colonizing Vir¬ 
ginia, mentioned in the charter of 1606 
and repeated in that of 1621, was to bring 
the infidels and savages to human civility 
and a settled and quiet government 
(Neill). Henrico College was founded in 
1618. The council of Jamestown in 1619 
voted to educate Indian children in re¬ 
ligion, a civil course of life, and in some 
useful trade. George Thorpe, superin¬ 
tendent of education at Henrico, gave a 
cheering account of his labors in 1621. 
Many youths were taken to England to 
be educated. William and Mary College 
was founded in 1691, and special provi¬ 
sions were made in the charter of Virginia 
for the instruction of Indians (Hist. Col¬ 
lege of William and Mary, 1874). Brass- 
erton manor was purchased through the 
charity of Robert Boyle, the yearly rents 
and profits being devoted to a boarding- 
school foundation in William and Mary 
College. In Maryland no schools were 
founded, but the settlers and Indians ex¬ 
changed knowledge of a practical kind. 
The interesting chapter of Indian educa¬ 
tion in New England includes, during the 
17th century, the offering of their children 
for instruction, the translation of the Bible 
(1646-90) into their language by Eliot (see 
Eliot Bible), the founding of Natick, the 


appointment of a superintendent of Indi¬ 
ans (Daniel Gookin, 1656-86), and the pro¬ 
vision for Indian youth in Harvard. The 
spirit and methods of instruction in the 
18th century are revealed in the adoption 
of Indian children by the colonists (Sam¬ 
son Occum, for example), the founding of 
Moor’s charity school, Bishop Berke¬ 
ley’s gift to Yale, the labors of Eleazer 
Wheelock (1729), and the founding of 
Dartmouth College in 1754 (see Fletcher, 
Ind. Education and Civilization, 1888). 
In New York and other northern states 
large sums of money were appropriated 
for the instruction of Indians, and in 
Princeton College special provisions were 
made for their education. 

The Moravians, models of thrift and 
good will, had in their hearts wherever 
they went the welfare of the aborigines 
as a private and public burden. 

Between 1741 arid 1761 began, under 
Vitus Bering and his successors, the se¬ 
ries of lessons given for the acculturation 
of the Aleut, Eskimo, and Indians of 
Alaska. Schools were formally opened 
in Kodiak in 1794, and a little later in 
Sitka. This chapter in education includes 
the Russian Company’s schools, as well 
as military, Government, and church 
schools. Pupils were taught the Russian 
and English languages, geography, his¬ 
tory, arithmetic, geometry, trigonometry, 
and navigation. Industrial training was 
compulsory in many cases. Dali (Alaska, 
1870) speaks of the great aptness of the 
Aleuts in receiving instruction. In all 
areas the voyageur, the trapper, the 
trader, the missionary, the settler, the 
school-teacher, and Government authori¬ 
ties were partners in education. The 
contact, whenever it took place, had its 
effect in a generation or two. The mak¬ 
ing of treaties with the Indians afforded 
an object lesson in practical affairs. Old 
things passed away whose nature and very 
existence and structure can be proved now 
only by impressions on ancient pottery or 
remains in caverns and graves. The two¬ 
fold education embraced new dietaries, 
utensils, and modes of preparing and eat¬ 
ing food; new materials and fashions in 
dress and implements for making clothing; 
new or modified habitations and their 
appurtenances and furniture; new pro¬ 
ductive industries and new methods of 
quarrying and mining, woodcraft, hunt¬ 
ing, trapping, and fishing; the introduc¬ 
tion of gunpowder, domestic animals, and 
foreign handicrafts; the adoption of cal¬ 
endars and clocks, and the habit of steady 
employment for wages; new social insti¬ 
tutions, manners, customs, and fashions, 
not always for the better; foreign words 
and jargons for new ideas and activities; 
new esthetic ideas; changes in the clan 
and tribal life, and accessions to native 


BULL. 30] 


EDUCATION 


417 


beliefs and forms of worship borrowed 
from the conquerors. 

In the Canadian colonies little was done 
for secular and industrial education by the 
provincial governments prior to confeder¬ 
ation. The Roman Catholic missions in¬ 
herited from the French, Anglican mis¬ 
sions sent from the mother country, the 
New England Company’s missions among 
the Six Nations and Mohawk, and Meth¬ 
odist schools founded by Lord Elgin and 
others, as well as those managed by Pres¬ 
byterians, Baptists, and Congregational- 
ists, all combined common school instruc¬ 
tion and training in the practical arts 
with their special work (see Missions). 
After the confederation (1867) the sub¬ 
ject was taken up systematically and con¬ 
tract schools were established and put 
into the hands of the Christian denom¬ 
inations. In the older provinces agri¬ 
culture and other industries had largely 
taken the place of primitive arts. After 
the admission of British Columbia, Man¬ 
itoba, and the Northwest Territory into 
the Dominion, steps were taken to estab¬ 
lish systematic training in those prov¬ 
inces. In 1904 there were 24 industrial, 
46 boarding, and 228 day schools in ope¬ 
ration. Day schools among the tribes aim 
to secure the cooperation of parents; the 
boarding schools especially cultivate in¬ 
dustrial training for various bread-win¬ 
ning trades; normal schools and girls’ 
homes have been established to teach 
self-support under new conditions. Im¬ 
provement in dwellings has developed 
a stronger attachment to home, as well 
as bettered health and raised the moral 
tone, for when houses are furnished with 
stoves, beds, tables, chairs, musical in¬ 
struments, andsewingmachines, the tastes 
of the occupants are elevated and other 
thoughts stimulated. Indians become in¬ 
dividual owners of farms and of flocks 
and herds and sell the produce; they par¬ 
take of the benefits of commerce and 
transportation and acquire thrift. Com¬ 
petition in fairs and exhibitions stimu¬ 
lates proficiency in both the old and the 
new activities. The purpose of the Cana¬ 
dian government has been to encourage 
the Indians to emerge from a condition 
of tutelage and continue voluntarily what 
they have learned under close supervi¬ 
sion. The schools discourage premature 
marriages and educate the young pro¬ 
spective mothers. Education has made 
the aborigines law-respecting, prosperous, 
and contented. Far from being a menace 
to or a burden upon the commonwealth, 
they contribute in many ways to its wel¬ 
fare. The able-bodied in the mixed 
farming districts have become practically 
self-supporting (Pedley in Can. Ind. Aff. 
for 1904). 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-27 


After the establishment of the United 
States government the following Christian 
bodies either instituted secular day and 
boarding schools among the Indians or 
continued those already in existence, and 
these schools have borne a large part in 
Indian education: Roman Catholic and 
Moravians from colonial times; Friends 
(Orthodox), 1795; Baptist, 1807; Amer¬ 
ican Board of Commissioners for Foreigr 
Missions, 1810; Episcopal, 1815; Methodist 
Episcopal, 1816; Presbyterian (North), 
1833; Old School Presbyterians, 1837; 
Methodist Episcopal (South), 1844; Con¬ 
gregational American Missionary Asso¬ 
ciation, 1846; Reformed Dutch, 1857; 
Presbyterian (South), 1857; Friends 
(Hicksite), 1869; United Presbyterian, 
1869; Unitarian, 1886. Miss Alice C. 
Fletcher affirms that the missionary 
labors among the Indians have been as 
largely educational as religious. Until 1870 
all Government aid for this object passed 
through the hands of the missionaries. 

On July 12, 1775, a committee on In¬ 
dian affairs was appointed in the Con¬ 
tinental Congress, with Gen. Schuyler as 
chairman, and in the following year a 
standing committee was created. Money 
was voted to support Indian students at 
Dartmouth and Princeton colleges. After 
the War Department was created, in 1789, 
Indian affairs were left in the hands of 
its Secretary until 1849, when the De¬ 
partment of the Interior was established 
and the Indian Bureau was transferred 
thereto. Gen. Knox, Washington’s Sec¬ 
retary of War, urged industrial education, 
and the President was of the same mind. 
In his message of 1801 President Adams 
noted the success of continued efforts to 
introduce among the Indians the imple¬ 
ments and practices of husbandry and 
the household arts. 

The first petition of an Indian for 
schools among his tribe was made by 
David Folsom, a Choctaw, in 1816. The 
Ottawa, in their treaty (1817) and in their 
address to President Monroe (1822),stipu¬ 
lated for industrial and literary education. 
In 1819 a first appropriation of $10,000 was 
made by Congress for Indian education, 
the superintendents and agents to be 
nominated by the President. In 1823 
there were 21 schools receiving Govern¬ 
ment aid, and the number was increased 
to 38 in 1825. The first contract school 
was established on the Tulalip res., Wash., 
in 1869, but it was not until 1873 that Gov¬ 
ernment schools proper were provided. 
In the beginning there were only day 
schools, later boarding schools on the 
reservations, and finally boarding schools 
remote from them. The training in all 
these schools was designed to bring the 
Indians nearer to civilized life, with a 


418 


EEH-EEKSEN 


[ B. A. E. 


view to ultimate citizenship by enabling 
them to assimilate the speech, industrial 
life, family organization, social manners 
and customs, civil government, knowl¬ 
edge, modes of thinking, and ethical 
standards of the whites. The change to 
agriculture and sedentary industries had 
a profound effect in developing a sense of 
continuous responsibility. A school was 
established at Carlisle, Pa., in 1879, by 
Capt. R. H. Pratt, U. S. A., for the purpose 
of educating Indian boys and girls by 
separating them from their tribal life so as 
to prepare them to live and labor in contact 
with white people (see Carlisle School). 
To this end they are taugh t in the school as 
far as the high-school grade, and instruc¬ 
tion is given in mechanical trades and 
domestic work. In order to facilitate asso¬ 
ciation with the white population the 
“outing system” was adopted, by which 
pupils are permitted to go out during vaca¬ 
tions to earn money. Boys and girls are 
also placed in families where they may 
work for their board, and perhaps more, 
and attend school. Thus the young In¬ 
dians are trained in home life and associate 
with white children. Contract schools 
were abandoned June 30, 1900; the reli¬ 
gious societies have since taken care of 
their own schools, and the appropriation 
for Indian education is applied under 
the law entirely to Government schools. 
About 100 students receive higher instruc¬ 
tion in Hampton Institute. One of the 
latest experiments is that of Rev. Sheldon 
Jackson in connection with the introduc¬ 
tion of domesticated reindeer into Alaska. 
These are allotted to mission and other 
schools, and instruction in the care and 
use of them is a part of the training. 

The present scheme of education 
adopted by the Indian Office is to teach 
the pupils English, arithmetic, geog¬ 
raphy, and United States history, and 
also to train them in farming and the 
care of stock and in trades, as well as 
gymnastics. This requires the mainte¬ 
nance of day, boarding, and training 
schools, 253 how in all, with 2,300 em¬ 
ployees, involving an annual expenditure 
of nearly $5,000,000. Some of these In¬ 
dian schools are models (see Chilocco 
Indian Industrial School ). Allotment of 
land has been the means of sending Indian 
children to district schools with white 
children. Indian teachers are being em¬ 
ployed and parents are coming to be 
interested. 

While on some reservations there are 
still Indian children who never saw a 
school, the great mass have ceased to be 
indifferent. The results of a century’s 
efforts are immeasurable. Indians now 
take their places beside whites in many 
of the industrial pursuits and in the higher 
walks as well. The best evidence that 


the Indian is capable of civilization is the 
list of those who have succeeded. The 
Governmenthas been stimulated, advised, 
and aided all along by associations of 
benevolent men and women who have 
freely given their time and means for the 
education and uplifting of the Indians, 
with various motives, some seeking the 
preservation of tribal life, arts, and cus¬ 
toms, some their extinction. See Carlisle 
School, Chilocco Indian Industrial School, 
Dutch influence , English influence, French 
influence, Spanish influence, etc., Govern¬ 
mental policy, Missions. 

In addition to the works cited, see 
Reps. Ind. Aff., especially for 1898 and 
subsequent years; Bureau of Education 
Reports for 1870, 339-354; 1871, 402-411; 
1872, 405-418; 1873, 469-480; 1874, 506- 
516; 1875, 519-528; 1878, 281-286; 1879, 
278-280; 1880, 372-376; 1886, app. 8 and 
657-660; 1888, 999-1004; 1897, 1520-1522; 
also circulars 3, 1883, 58-73; 4, 34-43; 
Bulletin 1 of the New Orleans Exposi¬ 
tion, 541-544 and 746-754, 1889; Archae- 
ologia Americana, 1820-60; Bacon, Laws 
of Md., 1765; Camden Soc. Publica¬ 
tions, i—cix, 1838-72; Canadian Ind. Aff. 
Reps.; Catesby, Nat. Hist. Carolina, n, 
xii, 1743; Eastman, Indian Boyhood, 
1902; Doc. Hist. N. Y., i-iv, 1849-51; 
Fletcher, Indian Education and Civiliza¬ 
tion, 1888; Hailmann, Education of the 
Indian, 1904; Hall, Adolescence, 1904; 
Heckewelder, Narr. of the Mission of the 
United Brethren, 1820; Jenks, Childhood 
of Ji-shib', 1900; Hist. College of William 
and Mary, 1660-1874; La Flesche, The 
Middle Five, 1900; Loskiel, Hist, of the 
Mission of the United Brethren, 1794; 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., i-x, 1792-1809; 
Neill, Hist. Ya. Co., 1869; Parkman, Old 
Regime in Canada; Pratt, Reps, on Car¬ 
lisle School in An. Rep. Commr. Ind. Aff., 
especially 20th and 24th; Rawson et al., 
Rep. of Commissioners on Indian Educa¬ 
tion in 1844 (Jour. Leg. Assemb. Prov. of 
Can., vi, 1847); Shea, Catholic Missions, 
1855; Smet (1) Oregon Miss., 1845, (2) 
New Indian Sketches, 1865, (3) Western 
Missions and Missionaries, 1863; Spencer, 
Education of the Pueblo Child, 1899; 
Spotswood, Off. Letters (1710-22), Va. 
Hist. Soc., i— ii, 1882-85; Stevenson, 
Religious Life of the Zuni Child, 1887; 
Stith, Hist. Va., repr. 1865. (o. t. m.) 

Eeh. A band or division of the Iru- 
waitsu of Scott valley, Siskiyou co., Cal.; 
noted by Gibbs as living with the Wat- 
sahewa in 1851. 

E-eh.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 
171,1853. E-oh.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 171,1853. 

Eeksen (E'exsgn). A Salish tribe about 
Oyster bay, e. coast of Vancouver id., 
speaking the Comox dialect.—Boas, MS., 
B. A. E., 1887. 


BULL. 30] 


EEL RIVER INDIANS-EKALU1N 


419 


Eel River Indians. A part of the Mi¬ 
ami, formerly living in Indiana. Their 
village was at Thorntown, Boone co., 
where they had a reservation, which was 
sold in 1828, the band removing to the 
Miami res. between the Wabash and 
Eel rs., in Miami co. They afterward 
shared the general fortunes of the tribe. 

(J. m.) 

Eel River Indians. —Knox (1792) in Am. St. Papers, 
i, 235, 1832. Eelrivers. —Brown, West. Gaz., 72, 
1817. Elk river tribe. —Ibid., 349 (misprint). 
Isle-River Indians. —Imlay, West. Ter., 371, 1793 
(Eel r., through a corruption of l’Anguille into 
‘Long-isle’). l’Anguille. —French name of the 
band and settlement (‘The eel’). Long-isle.— 
Imlay, op. cit. (misrendering of French l’An- 
guille). Thornton party. —Gale, Upper Miss., 178, 
1867. Thorntown party. —Wyandot Vil. treaty (pro¬ 
claimed 1828) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 520, 1873. 

Eesteytoch. Given as a tribe on Cas¬ 
cade inlet, Brit. Col.; probably a village 
group of the Bellacoola. 

Ees-tey-toch.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app.,1859. 

Efaca. A Timucua clan belonging to 
the Acheha phratry.—Pareja (1612-14) 
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., xvii, 492, 1878. 

Egan. An Algonquian settlement in 
Maniwaki township, Ottawa co., Quebec, 
containing 225 Indians in 1884. 

Egedesminde. A missionary station on 
Davis str., w. Greenland.—Crantz, Hist. 
Greenland, i, 14, 1767. 

Eguianna-cahel (‘water-hole of the 
mountain’). A rancheria, probably Co- 
chimi, connected with Purisima (Cade- 
gomo) mission, Lower California, in the 
18th century.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 
189, 1857. 

Egusanna cahel. —Ibid. 

Ehartsar. A band of the Crows, one 
of the four into which Lewis divided the 

tribe. , 

E-hart'-sar. —Lewis, Trav., 175, 1809. £h-ha- 
tz&.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., n, lxxxiv, 1823 
(Hidatsa name: ‘leaf people’). 

Ehatisaht. A Nootka tribe on Esper- 
anza inlet, w. coast of Vancouver id., 
Brit. Col.; pop. 101 in 1902, 95 in 1904. 
Their principal village is Oke. From 
their waters came the larger part of the 
supply of dentalium shells extensively 
used on the Pacific coast as media of 
exchange. 

Ai-tiz-zarts— Jewitt, Nar., 36, 1849. Aitzarts.— 
Armstrong, Oregon, 136, 1857. Ayhuttisaht. — 
Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 1868. Eh-aht-tis-aht. —Can. 
Ind. Aff., 52,1875. Ehateset.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 
251, 1862. Ehatisaht.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1901, pt. 2, 
158. E'hatisath.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
31,1890. Ehatt-is-aht. —Can. Ind. Aff. 1897, 357. 

Ehouae (‘one battered it.’—Hewitt). 
A village of the Tionontati existing in 
1640. 

Eh8ae. —Jes. Rel. 1641, 69, 1858.— Ehwae.— Shea, 
note in Charlevoix, New France, II, 153, 1866. 
Sainct Pierre et sainct Paul. —Jes. Rel. 1640, 95, 
1858. 

Ehressaronon. The Huron name of a 
tribe mentioned by Ragueneau in 1640 as 
living s. of St Lawrence r. (Jes. Rel. 1640, 
35, 1858). It can not now be identified 


with any tribe s. of the St Lawrence. Per¬ 
haps Iroquoian, as are some of the tribes 
mentioned in the same list. 

Ehutewa. A Luiseno village formerly 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey 
mission, s. Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860). Possibly the same as 
Hatawa. 

Eidenu (perhaps an Eskimo rendering 
of ‘I don’t know’). A Kinugumiut coast 
settlement at C. Prince of Wales. 

Ei-dan-noo.—Beechy (1826) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Iden-noo.—Ibid. Wales.— 
Post-route map, 1903. 

Eider (trans. of Igognak , ‘ eider duck ’). 
An Aleut village on Captain bay, Un- 
alaska, Alaska, at a point of the same 
name. Pop. 39 in 1830, according to 
Veniaminoff. 

Igognak.—Kotzebue (1816) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1901 (‘eider duck’). Igonok.—Coxe, 
Russ. Discov., 166, 1787. Paystravskoi.—Elliott, 
Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875. Pestriakof.—Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901 (Russian: ‘eider duck’). 
Pestriakovo.—Sarichef (1792) quoted by Baker, 
ibid. Pestriakowskoje.—Holmberg,Ethnol.Skizz., 
map, 1855. Pestryakovskoe.—Veniaminoff, Za- 
piski, 11,202,1840. 

Einake {E-ln'-a-ke, ‘ catchers,’or ‘sol¬ 
diers’). A society of the Ikunuhkatsi, or 
All Comrades, in the Piegan tribe; it has 
been obsolete since about 1860, and per¬ 
haps earlier.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 221, 1892. 

Eiwhuelit. A division of the Yuit Es¬ 
kimo on St Lawrence id., Bering Sea. 
Bogoras says “they are plainly a colony 
from the nearest [Siberian] shore, prob¬ 
ably from Indian point.” The villages 
are Chibukak, Chitnak, Kialegak, Kuku- 
liak, Puguviliak, and Punuk. 

Eiwhue'lit.—Bogoras, Chukchee, 20,1904 (Chuk¬ 
chi name). Kikhtog'amut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., I, 15, 1877 (‘islanders’). Oomoojeks.— 
Kelly, Arctic Eskimo in Alaska, 11,1890. Shi- 
wo-kug-mut.—Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxxiv, 
377, 1885. Umudjek.—Woolfe in 11th Census, 
Alaska, 130,1893. 

Ekaentoton. The Huron name of Man- 
itoulin id. and of the Indians (Amikwa) 
living on it in 1649. It was the ancient 
home of the Ottawa. 

Ekaentoton.—Jes. Rel. 1649, II, 6, 1858. l’lsle de 
Saincte Marie.—Ibid. 

Ekaloaping. A Padlimiut Eskimo set¬ 
tlement in Padli fjord, Baffin land. 

Exaloaping.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441,1888. 

Ekaluakdjuin. A summer settlement 
of the Saumingmiut subtribe of the Oko- 
miut Eskimo, n. of Cumberland sd. 
Exaluaqdjuin.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 439,1888. 

Ekalualuin. A summer settlement of 
the Akudnirmiut Eskimo on Home bay, 
Baffin land. 

Exalualuin.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441,1888. 

Ekaluin. A summer settlement of the 
Nugumiut Eskimo of Baffin land at the 
head of Frobisher bay. 

Exaluin.—Boas in 6th Rep. B A. E.,map, 1888. 

Ekaluin. A summer settlement of 
Talirpingmiut Eskimo on the s. shore of 
Cumberland sd. 

Exoluin.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 


420 


EKALUKDJUAK-ELEPHANT MOUND 


[B. a. e. 


Ekalukdjuak. A summer settlement of 
the Kingua Okomiut Eskimo at the head 
of Cumberland sd. 

E x aluqdjuaq.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Ekaluktaluk. An Eskimo village in the 
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 24 in 
1893. 

Ekaluktalugumiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164,1893. 

Ekarenniondi (‘there a tree lies ex¬ 
tended.’—Hewitt). A Tionontati village 
of the Deer clan where the Jesuits had 
their mission of St Mathias in 1648. 

Ekarenniondi— Gamier (1648) in Charlevoix, New 
Fr., ii, 228, note, 1866. Sainct Matthieu. —Jes. 
Rel. 1640, 95, 1858. Saint Mathias. —Jes. Rel. 1648, 
61,1858. 

Ekatopistaks (‘half-dead meat’—Mor¬ 
gan’ ; ‘ the band that have finished pack¬ 
ing’—Hayden). A division of the Pie- 
gan tribe of the Siksika (q. v.), probably 
extinct. 

e-ka-to'-pi-staks.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Val., 264, 1862. E-ko'-to-pis-taxe. —Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 171, 1878. 

Ekgiagan. A village of the Chalone 
division of the Costanoan family, for¬ 
merly near Soledad mission, Cal.—Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Ekilik. A Togiagamiut village on To- 
giak r., near its mouth, in Alaska. Pop. 
192 in 1880; 60 in 1890. 

Ekiligamut. —Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Ikalinkamiut. —11th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 5, 1893. Ikaliukha. —Petroff, 10th 
Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 

Ekiondatsaan. A Huron village in On¬ 
tario about 1640. 

Ekhiondaltsaan. —Jes. Rel. 1637, 162, 1858. Ekion¬ 
datsaan. —Jes. Rel., ill, index, 1858. Khiondaesa- 
han.— Jes. Rel. 1637, 70, 1858. 

Ekoolthaht (‘ bushes-on-hill people ’). 
A Nootka tribe formerly inhabiting the 
shores of Barclay sd., w. coast of Van¬ 
couver id.; pop. 48 in 1879. They have 
now joined the Seshart. 

E-koolth-aht. —Can. Ind. Aff., 308, 1879. Eku'- 
lath.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. 
Equalett.— Kelley, Oregon, 68, 1830. 

Ekquall. A former rancheria, possibly 
of the Dieguefio, under San Miguel de la 
Frontera mission, in the mountains of 
w. Lower California, about 30 m. s. of 
San Diego, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 18, 1860. 

Ekuhkahshatm. A Shuswap village on 
a small branch of Deadman cr., a n. 
affluent of Thompson r., Brit. Col. Pop., 
with Skichistan (q. v.), 118 in 1904. 
E-kuh-kah'-sha-tin. —Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can. for 1891, sec. ii, 44. 

Ekuk. A Nushagagmiut village near 
the mouth of Nushagak r., Alaska. Pop. 
112 in 1880; 65 in 1890. 

Ekouk.— Lutke (1828) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1901. Ekuk. —Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 
17, 1884. Yekuk. —11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Ekuks. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on the right bank of Squawmisht 
r., w. Brit. Col. 

E'kuiks.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. Ekuks.— 
Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 
Ekupabeka. A Hidatsa band. 


Bonnet.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159,1877. E-ku'-pa- 
be-ka. —Ibid. 

Elahsa (‘ village of the great willows’). 
A former Hidatsa village on the n. bank 
of Knife r., N. Dak., about 3 m. from 
Missouri r. 

Biddahatsi-Awatiss.— Maximilian,Voy. dans Pint, 
del’Am.,111,3,1843. Elah-Sa.— Maximilian,Trav., 
178,1843. Hidatsa.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 
38, 1877 (see Hidatsati). 

Elakulsi (E'laktil'sl, referring to da, 

‘ earth ’; or Alagulsa ). A Cherokee settle¬ 
ment in n. Georgia about 1800-35. (j. m. ) 
Ailigulsha.—Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 5th 
Rep. B. A.E., 144, 1887. 

Elarroyde. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Eleidlinottine (‘people of the fork’). 
An Etchareottine tribe at the confluence 
of Liard and Mackenzie rs., whose terri¬ 
tory extends to La Martre, Grandin, 
and Tache Lakes. 

ih'e-idlin-Gottine.—Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 363, 1891. ^le-idlin-ottine.—Petitot in 
Bull. Soc. de Geog. Paris, chart, 1875. Gens de la 
fourche du Mackenzie.—Petitot. Diet. D6ne Dind- 
jid, xx, 1876. 

Elephant Mound. A noted effigy mound, 
4 m. s. of Wyalusing, Grant co., Wis., 
first brought to public notice in 1872 
through a pencil sketch and brief descrip¬ 
tion by Jared Warner (Smithson. Rep. 
1872,1873). From its massive form and 
an apparentprolongation of the nose, sup¬ 
posed to be a part of the original mound, 
giving the tumulus a slight resemblance 
to an elephant, the name Elephant Mound 
was applied to it. Although frequently 
mentioned and illustrated, the figures are 
copies of Warner’s sketch, no reexamina¬ 
tion having been made until Nov., 1884, 
when the Bureau of American Ethnology 
surveyed and platted the mound; the result 
of this work appears in its Twelfth Report 
(91-93, fig. 44, 1894). The immediate 
situation is a long rectangular depression 
forming a cul de sac, the level of which 
is only a few feet above the Mississippi 
at high water. Although the tract had 
been cultivated for many years, the 
mound at the time of the survey dis¬ 
tinctly showed the rounded surface, the 
highest point being at the hip of the 
effigy, where the height was 4 ft. The 
measurements were: length, 140 ft; 
width across the body and to the lower 
end of the hind leg, 72 ft. At the time 
of the survey no indication of an elephant¬ 
like proboscis was found. After an ex¬ 
amination of similar effigies it was deter¬ 
mined that this mound was designed to 
represent a bear, and that the supposed 
nasal prolongation seen by Warner was 
accidental, due probably to washed or 
drifted earth. In addition to the refer¬ 
ences cited, see Am. Antiq., vi, 178,1884; 
Strong (1) in Rep. Wis. Geol. Surv. for 


BULL. 30] 


ELETJNAXCIAY—EL PEN ON 


421 


1873-4, (2) in Smithson. Rep. 1876, 431, 
1877; Thomas, Catalogue Prehist. Works, 
Bull. B. A. E., 232,1891. (c. t. ) 

Eleunaxciay . A Chumashan village for¬ 
merly near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874. 

Elhlateese. The principal village of 
the Uchucklesit (q. v.) at the head of 
Uchucklesit harbor, Alberni canal, Van¬ 
couver id.; pop. 45 in 1902.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 263, 1902. 

Eliot Bible. The translation of the 
Scriptures into the Algonquian language 
of the Massachuset, made by John 
Eliot (1604—90), the Apostle to the Indians, 
was the first Bible printed in Amer¬ 
ica by English-speaking people. The 
first edition of the whole Bible was pub¬ 
lished at Cambridge, Mass., in 1663, the 
New Testament having appeared two 
years before. The books of Genesis and 
Matthew seem to have been printed in 
1655 and a portion of the Psalms in 1658, 
by which time the translation of the 
whole Bible was completed. Eliot was 
the author of other works in the lan¬ 
guage of the Massachuset, and of books 
about the language and the natives (Pil¬ 
ling, Bibliog. Algonq. Lang., Bull. B. A.E., 
1891). Trumbull’s Dictionary of the 
Eliot Bible, which is not exhaustive, 
has been published as the Natick Dic¬ 
tionary (Bull. 25, B. A. E., 1903). The 
Eliot Bible is one of the monuments of 
missionary endeavor and prescientific 
study of the Indian tongues. In his lin¬ 
guistic labors Eliot was assisted by his 
two sons and by several Indians. See 
Bible translations, Cockenoe. (a. f. c .) 

Eljman. A former Chumashan village 
described as situated near the windmill of 
La Patera, near Santa Barbara, Cal. 
Aljiman.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 459,1874. Elji- 
man. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 
Eljman. —Ibid. Elmian.— Bancroft, op. eit. San 
Marcos.— Taylor, op. cit. 

Elks. A mythical people, said by Pid- 
geon (Traditions of De-coo-dah, 162, 
1858), on information said to have been 
obtained from the Dakota, “to have 
come from the N., and once held domin¬ 
ion over all this country, from the Missis¬ 
sippi r., e. and n., to the great waters.” 

Ellijay (from El&tsS, abbr. of Elatseyl, 
possibly ‘green [verdant] earth’). The 
name of several former Cherokee settle¬ 
ments. One was on the headwaters of 
Keowee r., S. C.; another was on Ellijay 
cr. of Little Tennessee r., near the pres¬ 
ent Franklin, Macon co., N. C.; another 
about the present Ellijay in Gilmer co., 
Ga., and a fourth on Ellejoy cr. of Little 
r., near the present Maryville, in Blount 
co., Tenn.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
517, 1900. 

Allagae. —Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792, Elijoy. — 
Doc. of 1775 quoted by Royce in 5th Report 
B. A. E., 143, 1887. Ellijay.— Doc of 1799, ibid. 


El Morro (Span.: * the castle ’). A pre¬ 
historic ruined pueblo, consisting of the 
remains of two blocks of dwellings, situ¬ 
ated on the summit of a rock mesa called 
El Morro, or Inscription Rock, about 35 m. 
e . of Zuni, Valencia co., N. Mex. The 
pueblo is reputed to be of Zuni origin, 
but there is only legendary testimony of 
this. The penol is called El Morro on 
account of its fancied resemblance to a 
castle from a distance, and Inscription 
Rock from the occurrence thereon of nu¬ 
merous inscriptions carved by early Span¬ 
ish explorers. The earliest in date is that 
of Juan de Onate in 1605. For descrip¬ 
tion see Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
iv, 328,1892; Coues, Garces Diary (1775- 
76), 1900; Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. 
and Archseol., i, 1890; Hoopes and 
Broomall in Proc. Del. Co. (Pa.) Inst, of 
Sci., i, pt. 1,1905; Lummis, Strange Cor¬ 
ners, 164-182, 1892; Simpson, Jour., 121, 
1850. (f. w. h. ) 

El Morro.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 200,1889 (applied to the penol). 
Heshotaya’hlto. —Hodge, inf’n, 1895 (‘ruins on top 
or above’: Zuni name). Hesho-ta Yashtok.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 328, 1892 
(given as Zuni name). 

Elochuteka. A former village, probably 
Seminole, between Hillsboro and Big 
Withlacoochee rs., Fla.—H. R. Doc. 78, 
25th Cong., 2d sess., map, 768-769, 1838. 

Elogio. A Papago settlement, probably 
in Pima co., s. Ariz., with 66 inhabitants in 
1858.—Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208,1858. 

Eloquale. An unidentified village in n. 
Florida in 1564.—De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, 
map, 1591. 

Eloquence. See Oratory. 

Elothet. Given by Kelley (Oregon, 68, 
1830) as a Nootka town on Vancouver id. 
under chief Wickaninish; possibly in¬ 
tended for Ucluelet. 

El Paso. A mission established among 
the Mansos at the present Juarez, Chi¬ 
huahua, opposite El Paso, Tex., by Fray 
Garcia de Zuniga (ordeSan Francisco) 
in 1659. The settlement contained also 
some Piros from Tabira in 1684, and it 
became prominent as the seat of the New 
Mexican government during the Pueblo 
rebellion of 1680-92. (f. w. h.) 

Guadalupe del Paso.— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
168,1889. Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe de los Man¬ 
sos del Paso del Norte.— Garcia (1659) quoted by 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 86, 1890. 
Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe del Paso del Rio del 
Norte.— MS. of 17th century quoted by Bandelier, 
ibid., iv, 248, 1892. Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe 
del Passo.— Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 422, 
1748. Paso. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 83,1855. Paso del 
Rio del Norte.— Arch. Santa F6,MS. quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, op. cit. Passo del Norte. —Villa-Senor, op. 
cit., 424. 

El Penon (Span.: ‘the large rocky hill 
or height’). A former small settlement, 
probably Seminole, on an island 13 
leagues n. of Mosquito r., at the entrance 
of Matanzas r., Fla. 

El Penon. —Smyth, Tour in U. S., II, 21, 1784. 


422 


ELQUIS 


ENEESHUR 


[b. a. e. 


Elquis. A Chumashan village w. of 
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven¬ 
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542.—Ca- 
brillo, Nar. (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. 
Fla., 181, 1857. 

Elskwatawa. See Tenskwatawa. 

El Turco. See Turk. 

Eluaxcu. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, i, 459, 1874. 

Elwha. A Clallam village at the mouth 
of the river of the same name in Wash¬ 
ington. 

El'-hwa.— Eells, letter, B. A. E., Feb., 1886 (own 
name). Elkwah.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 429, 
1855. Elwahs, —Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 191,1871. 
Elwha.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 50, 1869. 
Iraqua Indians.— Lee and Frost, Oregon, 274,1844. 

Emamoueta. An unidentified tribe 
placed by Marquette on his map of 1673 
w. of the Mississippi, apparently on the 
lower Arkansas. 

Emam8eta. —Marquette, map (1673) in Shea, Dis- 
cov. Miss. Yah, 268, 1852. 

Emanuelito. See Manuelito. 

Ematlochee ( imatla, ‘leader’). A former 
Creek town on Apalachicola r.; exact lo¬ 
cation unknown. 

Emarhe.— Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 299, 
1836. Ematlocheestown. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1833), 
578, 1837. 

Emet. A small tribe met by De Leon 
and Manzanet near lower Guadalupe r., 
Texas, in 1689. They occupied a village 
with the Cava Indians near the crossing 
place, apparently about 15 leagues from 
the French Fort St Louis on Matagorda 
bay. To the northward they encoun¬ 
tered several other Emet “ranchitos.” 
Within a year these Indians appear to 
have moved farther e., for in 1690 De 
Leon encountered them on that side of the 
Rio Colorado, living with the Cava, Too, 
and Toaa Indians, their former neighbors. 
They were perhaps related to the Karan- 
kawa. Possibly the Meghty of Joutel 
are identical. (h. e. b.) 

Emat.— De Le6n MS. (1690) in Texas Archives. 
Emet. —Manzanet (1689) quoted in Tex. Hist. 
Quar., viii, 214, 1905. 

Emistesigo. Known also as Gurister- 
sigo. An Upper Creek chief and noted 
warrior who came prominently into no¬ 
tice in the latter part of the 18th century. 
The British being in possession of Savan¬ 
nah, Ga., in June, 1782, Gen. Wayne 
was dispatched to watch their movements. 
On May 21, Col. Brown, of the British 
force, marched out of Savannah to meet, 
according to appointment, a band of In- 
dians under Emistesigo, but was intercept¬ 
ed and cut to pieces by Wayne. Mean¬ 
while Emistesigo succeeded in traversing 
the entire state of Georgia without discov¬ 
ery, except by two boys, who were cap¬ 
tured and killed. Wayne, who was not 
anticipating an attack, was completely sur¬ 
prised by the Indians, who captured 2 of 
his cannon, but succeeded in extricating 
his troops from their danger, and, after 


severe fighting, in putting the Creeks to 
flight. Emistesigo was pierced by bayo¬ 
nets, and 17 of his warriors fell by his side. 
He was at this time only 30 years of age, 
and is described as being 6 ft 3 in. in 
height and weighing 220 pounds. 

(c. T.) 

Emitahpahksaiyiks (‘dogs naked’). A 
division of the Siksika. 

Dogs Naked.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
208, 1892. E'-mi-tah-pahk-sai-yiks. — Ibid,. 

Emitaks ( E'-mi-taks, ‘dogs’). A society 
of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Comrades, in 
the Piegan tribe; it is composed of old men 
who dress like, and dance with and like, 
the Issui, though forming a different so¬ 
ciety.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
221, 1892. 

Empress of the Creek Nation. See 

Bosomworth, Mary. 

Emussa (imusa, ‘affluent,’ ‘tributary’). 
Mentioned as a Lower Creek town for¬ 
merly on lower Chattahooche r., Henry 
co., Ala., 2 m. above Wikaiva, near the 
junction of Omussee cr., with 20 inhabit¬ 
ants in 1820. It seems to be equally 
probable that the settlement, which is 
not mentioned by early writers, was com¬ 
posed of Yamasi, from whom it derived 
its name. 

Emusas. —Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Emus- 
sas.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 1822. 

Encaquiagualcaca. Mentioned by Onate 
(Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871) as a'pueblo 
of the province of Atripuy, in the region 
of the lower Rio Grande, N. Mex., in 
1598. 

Encinal (Span.: ‘oak grove’). For¬ 
merly a summer village of the Lagunas, 
now a permanently occupied pueblo, sit¬ 
uated 6 m. n. w. of Laguna, N. Mex. In 
1749 an attempt was made by Father 
Menchero to establish a mission there for 
the Navaho, but it was abandoned in the 
following year. (f. w. h. ) 

Hapuntika.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 
(Laguna name: * place of the oaks ’). Lespaia. — 
Ibid. (Acomaname). Pun-ye-kia,—Pradtquoted 
by Hodge in Am. Anthrop., iv, 346. 1891 (another 
Laguna name: ‘house to the west’). 

Enecappe. A village on middle St Johns 
r., Fla., belonging to the Utina (Timucua) 
confederacy in the 16th century. 
Enacapen.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723 (cacique’s 
name). Enecappe. —Laudonniere(1567) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. Enecaq. —De Bry, 
Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. Enecaque. — Laudon- 
niere, op. cit., 305. Eneguape.— Laudonni6re, op. 
cit., 287. Enequaque. —Barcia, op. cit., 72. Helma- 
cape. —Laudonniere, op. cit., 349. 

Eneeshur. Shahaptian bands, aggre¬ 
gating 1,200 population in 41 mat lodges, 
found by Lewis and Clark in 1805 on both 
sides of Columbia r. near the mouth of the 
Deschutes, in Washington. The term 
probably refers more specifically to the 
Tapanash. (l. f. ) 

Eioestures.—Robertson in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 9, 1848. Eivesteurs.—Robertson, 
Oregon, 129, 1846. E-ne-churs.—Clark (1806) in 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, in, 342, 1905. E-nee- 
sher,—Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, map, 1814. 


BULL. 30] 


ENEKELKAWA—ENGLISH INFLUENCE 


423 


Enesher. —Lewis (1806) in Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, ill, 164 1905. E-nee-shur.— Clark (1805), 
ibid., 164. E-nee-Shur.— Ibid., 183. E-ne-show.— 
Gibbs in Pac. R. R.Rep., I, 417, 1855. E-ne-shur.— 
Lewis and Clark, op. cit.,l,map. Eneshure.— Ibid., 
II, 472. Enesteurs. —Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 44.1845. 

Enekelkawa. A former Luiseno village 
near the site of San Luis Rey mission, 
s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11, 
1860. 

Enempa. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fontaneda 
Memoir ( ca . 1575), Smith trans., 19,1854. 

Enfrenado (Span.: ‘bridled’). An In¬ 
dian village about 40 leagues from C. Santa 
Helena, in s. South Carolina, visited by 
Juan Pardo in 1565.—Vandera (1567) in 
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 16, 1857. 

English influence. The first English 
visitors to the coast of Virginia-Carolina 
were well received by the Indians, whom 
the early chroniclers, as Hariot, for ex¬ 
ample, describe as peaceful and amiable 
people. So, too, were in the beginning 
the natives of the New England coast, 
but in 1605 Capt. Weymouth forcibly 
carried off five Indians, and he soon had 
many imitators. The good character 
ascribed by Pastor Cushman in 1620 to the 
Indians of Plymouth colony was forgot¬ 
ten when theological zeal saw in the abo¬ 
rigines of the New World “ the accursed 
seed of Canaan,” which itwas the duty of 
good Christians to exterminate (see Lost 
Ten Tribes). When the political ambi¬ 
tions of the English colonists were aroused 
conflicts with the Indians soon occurred, 
and the former came to regard the latter 
as the natural enemies of the whites in 
the onward march of civilization. Un¬ 
like the French, they paid little attention 
to the pride of the Indians, despising the 
heathen ways and institutions more and 
more as their power grew and their land 
hunger increased. With a few noble ex¬ 
ceptions, like Roger Williams and John 
Eliot, the clergy of the English col¬ 
onies were not nearly so sympathetic to¬ 
ward the natives as were the French mis¬ 
sionaries in Acadia and New France. 
Scotchmen, however, in the S., in the 
W., in the old provinces of Canada, and 
in the territories handed over to the 
Hudson’s Bay Company have played a 
conspicuous part as associates and leaders 
of the Indians. Even men like Canonicus 
were always suspicious of their English 
friends, and never really opened their 
hearts to them. The introduction of rum 
and brandy among the Indians worked 
infinite damage. Some of the New Eng¬ 
land tribes, such as the Pequot, for ex¬ 
ample, foreseeing perhaps the result of 
their advent, were inimical to the English 
from the first, and the extermination of 
these Indians ensued when the whites 
were strong enough to accomplish it. 
It appears, however, that the English 


colonists paid for most of the land that 
they took from the Indians (Thomas in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., 549, 1899). English 
influence on tribal government and land 
tenure was perceptible as early as 1641. 
The success of deliberately planned edu¬ 
cational institutions for the benefit of 
the Indian during the early periods of 
American history does not seem to have 
been proportionate to the hopes and 
ideals of their founders. Harvard, Dart¬ 
mouth, and the College of William and 
Mary all began, in whole or in part, as 
colleges for Indian youth, but their grad¬ 
uates of aboriginal blood have been few 
indeed, while they are now all high-class 
institutions for white men (see Educa¬ 
tion). The royal charter of Dartmouth 
College (1769) specifically states that it is 
to be “for the education and instruction 
of youths of the Indian tribes in this 
land,” and “ for civilizing and Christian¬ 
izing the children of pagans.” That of 
Harvard looked to ‘ ‘ the education of the 
English and Indian youth in knowledge 
and godliness.” Harvard had during 
the colonial period one Indian graduate, 
Caleb Cheeshateaumuck, of whom hardly 
more than his name is known (see James, 
English Institutions and the American 
Indian, 1894). The aim of the English 
has ever been to transform the aborigines 
and lift them at once to their own plane. 
When commissioners visited the Cherokee 
they induced these to elect an “em¬ 
peror, ’ ’ with whom treaties could be made. 
The Friends, from the time of William 
Penn (1682) down to the present (see 
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 193,1898), 
seem to have furnished many individuals 
capable, like the Baptist Roger Williams 
(1636), of exercising great personal influ¬ 
ence over the Indians. The Quakers still 
continue their work, e. g., among the east¬ 
ern Cherokee (Mooney in 19th Rep. B. 
A. E., 176,1900) and the Tlingit of Alaska. 
The New England Company established 
for the propagation of the gospel in Amer¬ 
ica (1649), whose operations were trans¬ 
ferred to Canada in 1822, carries on at 
the present time work on the Brantford 
Iroquois reserve and in other parts of 
Ontario, at Kuper id., Brit. Col., and 
elsewhere. Its Mohawk institute, near 
Brantford, has had a powerful influence 
among the Iroquois of Ontario. The 
pagan members of these Indians have 
recently been investigated by Boyle (Jour. 
Anthrop. Inst. G. B., n. s., hi, 263-273, 
1900), who tells us that “all for which 
Iroquois paganism is indebted to European 
culture” is the possession of some ideas 
about God or the Great Spirit and “a few 
suggestions respecting conduct, based on 
the Christian code of morals.” The con¬ 
stant mingling of the young men with 
their white neighbors and the going of 


424 


ENGLISHMA N-ENGRAVING 


[b. a. E. 


the young women out to service are never¬ 
theless weakening more and more the old 
ideas which are doomed ‘ ‘ to disappear as 
a system long before the people die out. ’ ’ 
That they have survived so long is re¬ 
markable. 

English influence made itself felt in 
colonial days in the introduction of im¬ 
proved weapons, tools, etc., which facili¬ 
tated hunting and fishing and made pos¬ 
sible the manufacture with less labor and 
in greater abundance of ornaments, trin¬ 
kets, and other articles of trade. The 
supplying of the Indians with domestic 
animals also took place at an early period. 
Spinning wheels and looms were intro¬ 
duced among the Cherokee shortly before 
the Revolution, and in 1801 the agent re¬ 
ported that at the Cherokee agency the 
wheel, the loom, and the plow were in 
pretty general use. The intermarriage of 
Englishmen and Indians has been greater 
all over the country than is commonly be¬ 
lieved, and importance must consequently 
be attached to the effects of such inter¬ 
mingling in modifying Indian customs and 
institutions. Clothing and certain orna¬ 
ments, and, after these, English beds and 
other furniture were adopted by many 
Indians in colonial days, as is now being 
done by the tribes of the n. Pacific coast. 

English influence on the languages of 
some of the aborigines has been consider¬ 
able. The word Kinjames, ‘King James,’ 
in use among the Canadian Abnaki, testi¬ 
fies to the power of English ideas in the 
17th century. The vocabularies of the 
eastern Algonquian tribes who have come 
in contact with the English contain other 
loan-words. Rand’s English-Micmac 
Dictionary (1888) contains, among oth¬ 
ers, the following: Jak-ass; cheesawa, 
‘cheese’; koppee, ‘coffee’; mulugech, 
‘milk’; gubulnol, ‘governor.’ Brinton 
and Anthony’s Lenape-English Diction¬ 
ary (1889), representing the language of 
about 1825, has amel, ‘hammer’; apel, 
‘apple’; mbit, ‘beer’; mellik, ‘milk’; 
skulin, ‘to keep school,’ which may be 
partly from English and partly from Ger¬ 
man. A Shawnee vocabulary of 1819 
has for ‘sugar’ melassa, which seems to 
be English ‘molasses’; and a Micmac 
vocabulary of 1800 has blaakeet, ‘blanket.’ 
The.English ‘cheese’ has passed into the 
Nipissing dialect of Algonquian as tchis. 
The Chinook jargon (q. v.) contained 41 
words of English origin in 1804, and 57 in 
1863, while in 1894, out of 1,082 words 
(the total number is 1,402) whose origin 
is known, Eells cites 570 as English. Of 
recent years “many words of Indian ori¬ 
gin have been dropped, English words 
having taken their places.” In colonial 
days English doubtless had some influ¬ 
ence on the grammatical form and sen¬ 
tence-construction of Indian languages, 


and this influence still continues: the 
recent studies by Prince and Speck of the 
Pequot-Mohegan (Am. Anthrop., n. s., 
vi, 18-45, 469-476,1904) contain evidence 
of this. English influence has made 
itself felt also in the languages of the 
N. W. Hill-Tout (Rep. Ethnol. Surv. 
Can., 18, 1902) observes, concerning cer¬ 
tain Salishan tribes, that ‘ ‘ the spread and 
use of English among the Indians is very 
seriously affecting the purity of the native 
speech.” Even the Athapascan Nahane 
of n. British Columbia have, according to 
Morice (Trans. Canad. Inst., 529, 1903), 
added a few English words to their vocab¬ 
ulary. See also Friederici, Indianer und 
Anglo-Amerikaner, 1900; MacMahon, 
The Anglo-Saxon and the North Ameri¬ 
can Indian, 1876; Manypenny, Our In¬ 
dian Wards, 1880. (a. f. c.) 

Englishman. See Sagaunash. 

Engraved tablets. See Notched plates. 

Engraving. Although extensively em¬ 
ployed in pictographic work and in dec¬ 
oration, the engraver’s art did not rise to 
a high degree of artistic excellence among 
the tribes n. of Mexico. As no definite 
line can be drawn between the lower 
forms of relief sculpture and engraving, 
all ordinary petroglyphs may be classed 
as engravings, since the work is executed 
in shallow lines upon smooth rock sur¬ 
faces (see Pictography). Point work is 
common on wood, bone, horn, shell, bark, 
metal, clay, and other surfaces. Each 
material has its own particular technique, 
and the designs run the entire gamut of 
style from graphic to purely conventional 
representations, and the full range of sig¬ 
nificance from purely symbolic through 
esthetic to simply trivial motives. 

Perhaps the most artistic and technic¬ 
ally perfect examples of engraving are 
those of the N. W. coast tribes of the 
present 
day, exe¬ 
cuted on 
slate uten¬ 
sils and on 
ornaments 
of metal 
(Niblack), 

Vet the Animal Figures Engraved on Silver 
^ • Bracelets; Haida 

graphic 

productions of the Eskimo on ivory, bone, 
and antler have sometimes a considerable 
degree of merit (Boas, Hoffman, Murdoch, 
Nelson, Turner). With both of these peo¬ 
ples the processes employed and the style 
of representation have probably under¬ 
gone much change in recent times through 
contact with white people. The steel 
point is superior to the point of stone, 
and this alone would have a marked effect 
on the execution. The picture writings 
on bark of many of the northern tribes, 
executed with bone or other hard points, 






bull. SO] . FNIAS-ENO 425 


are good examples of the native engraver’s 
art, although these are not designed 
either for simply pictorial or for decora¬ 
tive effect. The ancient mound builders 
were clever 
engravers, 
the technical 
excellence of 
their work be¬ 
ing well illus¬ 
trated by ex¬ 
amples from 
the mounds 
and dwelling 
sites of Ross 
co., Ohio 
(Putnam and 
Willough¬ 
by), and by 
others from 
the Turner 
mounds in 
Hamilton co., 

Ohio. Shell 
also was a fa- ENGRAV,NGS 0N O0JECTS 0F |V0RY ; “ 
vorite material for the graver’s point, as 
is illustrated by numerous ornaments re¬ 
covered from mounds in the middle Mis¬ 
sissippi valley. 

In decorating their earthenware the 
native tribes often used the stylus with 
excellent effect. The yielding clay af¬ 
forded a tempting surface, and in some 
cases considera¬ 
ble skill was 
shown, especially 
by the ancient 
potters of the 
lower Gulf states, 
who executed 
elaborate scroll 
designs with 
great precision 
(Moore, Holmes). 
The point was 
used for incising, 
trailing, and in¬ 
denting, and among ancient Pueblo potters 
was sometimes used upon dark-painted 
surfaces to develop delicate figures in the 
light color of the underlying paste. Ex¬ 
amples of engraving are given by Boas in 
6 th Rep.B. A. E., 1888; Fewkes in 17th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1898; Hoffman in Nat. Mus. Rep. 
1895, 1897; Holmes (1) in 2d Rep. B. A. 
E., 1883, (2) in 20th Rep. B. A. E., 1903; 
Hough in Nat. Mus. Rep., 1901; Moore, 
various memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila., x-xii, 1894-1903; Murdoch in 9th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1899; Niblack in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1888,1890; Putnam and Willoughby 
in Proc. A, A. A. S., xliv, 1896; Turner 
in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. See Art, 
Ornament. (w. h. h.) 

Enias. A local name for a body of 
Upper Lillooet on Seton lake, in 1902 re¬ 


duced to a single individual.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., pt. ii, 72, 1902. 

Enipeu. A Yurok village on Klamath 
r., Cal., 15 m. above the mouth. 

Enitunne (‘people at the base of a 
plateau’). A village of the Tututni near 
the mouth of a southern affluent of 
Rogue r., Oreg. 

Eni' tunne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
236, 1890. 

Enitunne. A part of the Mishikwut- 
metunne in a village on upper Coquille r., 
Oreg. 

E-ni' tunne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
232, 1890. 

Enmegahbowh (‘The one who stands 
before his people ’). An Indian preacher. 
He was an Ottawa by birth, but was 
adopted while young by the Chippewa 
and was converted to the Methodist faith 
in Canada, educated at the Methodist 
mission school at Jacksonville, Ill., and 
ordained as a preacher with the name of 
the Rev. John Johnson. In 1839 he ac¬ 
companied Elder T. B. Kavanaugh to 
the upper Mississippi, where he was a 
missionary among the Chippewa for 5 
years, when the Methodist church with¬ 
drew from that field. In 1852, at John¬ 
son’s solicitation, the Episcopal church 
sent a minister into this section, and a 
mission and school were established at 
Gull lake, Minn., in which he served as 
assistant and interpreter. In 1858 John¬ 
son was admitted by Bishop Kemper to 
the first order of the Episcopal ministry 
at Faribault, and in 1859 was left in 
charge of the mission at Gull lake, where 
he continued until the Sioux outbreak of 
1862, when he alone of the Episcopal 
missionaries remained in the field. In 
1869 the Gull lake mission was removed 
to the reservation at White Earth, whither 
Johnson followed and was given charge, 
bringing into the church a number of his 
tribesmen and erecting a chapel and par¬ 
sonage. Here the Rev. Joseph A. Gilfil- 
lan, who was assigned to White Earth as 
an Episcopal missionary in 1873, with 
Johnson’s aid established a school for 
the training of Indian clergy, and in a 
few years 9 Chippewa were ordained to 
the ministry. Johnson was living in 
1898, at which time he was spoken of as 
the “aged Indian pastor and co-worker 
of Bishop Whipple.” 

Enmitahin (‘cliff’s end’). A Yuit 
Eskimo village of the Nabukak or Nooka- 
lit division, n. of East cape, n. e. Siberia; 
pop. 42 in 8 houses about 1895. 
Enmita'hin.— Bogoras, Chukchee, 30,1904 (Chuk¬ 
chi name). 

Eno. A tribe associated with the Ad- 
shusheer and Shakori in North Carolina 
in the 17th century. Mooney thinks it 
doubtful that the Eno and the Shakori 
were of Siouan stock, as they seem to have 
differed in physique and habits from their 




Engraving on a Shell gorget from 
a Missouri Mound. (1-4) 



























426 


FNOQUA—EN8ENORE 


[b. a. e. 


neighbors, although their alliances were 
all with Siouan tribes. Little is known 
of them, as they disappeared from history 
as tribal bodies about 1720, having been 
incorporated with the Catawba on the s. 
or with the Saponi and their confederates 
on the n., although they still retained 
their distinct dialect in 1743. The Eno 
and Shakori are first mentioned by Yard- 
ley in 1654, to whom a Tuscarora de¬ 
scribed, among other tribes of the interior, 
living next to the Shakori, “a great na¬ 
tion ” called Haynoke, by whom the 
northern advance of the Spaniards was 
valiantly resisted (Hawks, N. C., ii, 19, 
1858). The next mention of these two 
tribes is by Lederer, who heard of them in 
1672 as living s. of the Occaneechi about 
the headwaters of Tar and Neuse rs. The 
general locality is still indicated in the 
names of Eno r. and Shocco cr., upper 
branches of these streams. In 1701 
Lawson found the Eno and Shakori 
confederated and the Adshusheer united 
with them in the same locality. Their 
village, which he calls Adshusheer, was 
on Eno r., about 14 m. e. of the Occanee¬ 
chi village, which was near the site of the 
present Hillsboro. This would place the 
former not far n. e. of Durham, N. C. 
Eno Will, a Shakori by birth, was at that 
time, according to Lawson, chief of the 
three combined tribes, and at this period 
the Shakori seem to have been the princi¬ 
pal tribe. They had some trade with the 
Tuscarora. Later, about 17^4, with the 
Tutelo, Saponi, Occaneechi, and Keyau- 
wee, together numbering only about 750 
souls, they moved toward the settlements. 
Lawson includes Eno in his list of Tusca¬ 
rora villages at that date, and as the Eno 
lived on the Neuse adjoining theTuscarora, 
it was natural that they were sometimes 
classed with them. In 1716 Gov. Spots- 
wood, of Virginia, proposed to settle the 
Eno, Sara, and Keyauwee at Eno town, 
on “ the very frontiers” of North Caro¬ 
lina; but the project was defeated by 
North Carolina on the ground that all 
three tribes were then at war with South 
Carolina. From the records it can not be 
determined clearly whether this was the 
Eno town of Lawson or a more recent 
village nearer the Albemarle settlements. 
Owing to the objection made to their set¬ 
tlement in the n., the Eno moved south¬ 
ward into South Carolina. They probably 
assisted the other tribes of that region in 
the Yamasi w;arof 1715. At least a few of 
the mixed tribe found their way into Vir¬ 
ginia with the Saponi, as Byrd speaks of 
an old Indian, called Shacco Will, living 
near Nottoway r. in 1733, who offered to 
guide him to a mine on Eno r. near the 
old country of the Tuscarora. The name 
of Shockoe cr., at Richmond, Va., may 
possibly have been derived from that of 


the Shakori tribe, while the name of 
Enoree r. in South Carolina may have a 
connection with that of the Eno tribe. 

Lederer speaks of the Eno village as 
surrounded bv large cultivated fields and 
as built around a central plaza w T here the 
men played a game described as “slinging 
of stones,” in which “they exercise with 
so much labor and violence and in so great 
numbers that I have seen the ground wet 
w T ith the sweat that dropped from their 
bodies.” This w r as probably the chunkey 
game played with round stones among 
the Creeks. Lederer agrees with Yardley 
as to the small size of the Eno, but not as to 
their bravery, though they were evidently 
industrious. They raised plentiful crops 
and “ out of their granary supplied all the 
adjacent parts.” “The character thus 
outlined,” says Mooney, “accords more 
with that of the peaceful Pueblos than 
with that of any of our eastern tribes and 
goes far to indicate a different origin.” 
It should be remembered, however, that 
Lederer is not a leading authority, as it is 
doubtful if he was ever in North Carolina. 
The houses of the Eno are said to have been 
different in some respects from those of 
their neighbors. Instead of building; of 
bark, as did most Virginia and Carolina 
tribes, they used intenvoven branches or 
canes and plastered them with mud or 
clay, like the Quapaw Indians of e. Arkan¬ 
sas. The form was usually round. Near 
every house was a small oven-shaped 
structure in which they stored corn and 
nuts. This was similar to the storehouse 
of the Cherokee and some other southern 
tribes. Thei r government was democratic 
and patriarchal, the decision of the old 
men being received with unquestioned 
obedience. See Mooney, Siouan Tribes of 
the East, Bull. B. A. E., 1896. 

Anoeg.— Strachey (1612), Hist. Va., 48, 1849 (proba¬ 
bly identical). Eano.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tr., in, 81, 1854. Eeno.— Adair (1743), Hist. Am. 
Inds., 224, 1775. Enoe.— Lawson (1709), N. C., 97, 
1860. Haynokes.— Yardley (1654) quoted by 
Hawks, N. C., ii, 19, 1858. CEnock.— Lederer, Dis¬ 
co v., 15, 1672. Oenock. —Ibid. 

Enoqua. An unidentified village or 
tribe mentioned to Joutel, in 1687 (Mar- 
gry, D6c., iii, 410, 1878), while he w r as 
staying with the Kadohadacho on Red r. 
of Louisiana, by the chief of that tribe, 
as one of his allies. 

Enpishemo (from ciptshlmun .—W. J.). 
According to Bartlett (Diet. American¬ 
isms, 201, 1877), “a word used w. at the 
Rocky mts. to denote the housings of a 
saddle, the blanket beneath it, etc. ” An¬ 
other form seems to be ‘apishamore’. 
In the Medicine Lodge treaty made with 
the Comanche, Kiow a, and others in 1867, 
Fisli-e-more appears as the name of one 
of the signers. (a. f. c.) 

Ensenore. A chief of Wingandacoa 
(Secotan), N. C., previous to 1585, noted 


BULL. 301 


ENTUBUR-ENVIRONMENT 


427 


as the earliest chief of the e. coast 
between Hudson r. and St Helena sd. of 
whom there is any notice. He was the 
father of Wingina and Granganameo 
(q. v.), and a firm friend of the English 
colony on Roanoke id. in 1585-86. While 
he lived he restrained Wingina from 
wreaking vengence on Lane’s company 
for killing some of the natives. His 
death occurred in 1585 or 1586. (c. t. ) 

Entubur. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Papago, visited by Kino and Mange 
in 1694; situated between Tubutama and 
Busanic, lat. 31°, n. w. Sonora, Mexico.— 
Mange ( ca . 1701) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, i, 258, 1884. 

Environment. The natural phenomena 
that surrounded the aborigines of North 
America, stimulating and conditioning 
their life and activities, contrasted greatly 
with those of the European-Asia tic con¬ 
tinent. The differences in the two envi¬ 
ronments do not lie alone in physical 
geography and in plant and animal life, 
but are largely meteorologic, the sun oper¬ 
ating on air, land, and water, producing 
variations in temperature and water sup¬ 
ply, and as a result entirely new vegetal 
and animal forms. The planets and stars 
also affected cultural development, since 
lore and mythology were based on them. 
Within the American continent n. of Mex¬ 
ico there were ethnic environments which 
set bounds for the tribes and modified their 
industrial, esthetic, social, intellectual, 
and religious lives. Omitting the Eskimo, 
practically all the peoples dwelt in the 
temperate zone. Few impassable barriers 
separated the culture areas, as in Asia. 
In some respects, indeed, the entire region 
formed one environment, having easy 
communications n. and s. and few bar¬ 
riers e. and w. The climate zones which 
Merriam has worked out for the U. S. 
Department of Agriculture in regard to 
their animal and vegetal life correspond 
in a measure with the areas of linguis¬ 
tic families as delimited on Powell’s 
map (see Linguistic families). The en¬ 
vironmental factors that determine cul¬ 
tural development of various kinds and 
degrees are (1) physical geography; (2) 
climate, to which primitive peoples are 
especially amenable; (3) predominant 
plants, animals, and minerals that supply 
the materials of drink, food, medicines, 
clothing, ornaments, houses, fuel, furni¬ 
ture and utensils, and the objects of hunt¬ 
ing, war, the industrial arts, and activi¬ 
ties connected with travel, transportation, 
and commerce. Twelve ethnic environ¬ 
ments may be distinguished. There are 
cosmopolitan characters common to sev¬ 
eral, but in each area there is an ensemble 
of qualities that impressed themselves on 
their inhabitants and differentiated them. 


(1) Arctic. —The characteristics of this 
environment are an intensely cold climate; 
about six months day and six months 
night; predominance of ice and snow; im¬ 
mense archipelagos, and no accessible ele¬ 
vations; good stone for lamps and tools; 
driftwood, but no timber and little fruit; 
polar bear, blue fox, aquatic mammals in 
profusion, migratory birds, and fish, 
supplying food, clothing, fire, light, and 
other wants in the exacting climate. 

(2) Yukon-Mackenzie. —This is Merri¬ 
am’s transcontinental coniferous belt, sep¬ 
arated from the arctic environment by the 
timber line, but draining into arctic seas. 
It has poor material resources, and bar¬ 
ren grounds here and there. Its saving 
riches are an abundance of birch, yield¬ 
ing bark utensils, canoes, binding "mate¬ 
rials, and houses, and of spruce, fur¬ 
nishing textile roots and other necessa¬ 
ries; caribou, muskox, bear, red fox, wolf, 
white rabbit, and other fur-bearing mam¬ 
mals, and porcupines, migrating birds, 
and fish. Snow necessitates snowshoes 
of fine mesh, and immense inland waters 
make portages easy for bark canoes. Into 
this area came the Athapascan tribes who 
developed through its resources their 
special culture. 

(3) St Lawrence and Lake region. —This 
is a transition belt having no distinct lines 
of separation from the areas on the n. and 
s. It occupies the entire drainage of the 
great lakes and includes Manitoba, e. Can¬ 
ada, and n. New England. It was the 
home of the Iroquois, Abnaki, Chippewa, 
and their nearest kindred. The climate 
is boreal. There are a vast expanse of 
lowlands and numerous extensive inland 
waters. The natural products are abun¬ 
dant—evergreens, birch, sugar maple, 
elm, berries, and wild rice in the w.; 
maize, squash, and beans in the s.; 
moose, deer, bear, beaver, porcupines, 
land and water birds in immense flocks, 
whitefish, and, on the seacoast, marine 
products in greatest variety and abun¬ 
dance. Canoe travel; pottery scarce. 

(4) Atlantic slope. —This area, occupied 
principally by tribes allied to the Dela¬ 
wares, but also by detached Iroquoian 
tribes and perhaps some Siouan and 
Uchean bands, included the region of 
the fertile piedmont, poor foothills, rich 
lowlands, bays and rivers abounding in 
aquatic life, and vast salt meadows. The 
low mountains were not ethnic barriers,, 
but the differences in physical condi¬ 
tions on the tw T o sides were marked 
enough to produce separate cultures. 
Minerals for tools and weapons were 
present in great variety, and ochers, 
clays, and some copper were found. 
Plant life was varied and abundant. 
Forests of hard wood, birch, elm, maple, 


428 


ENVIRONMENT 


tB. A. E. 


and evergreens furnished materials for 
supplying -a great diversity of wants. 
From the soft wood w r ere made dugout 
canoes. The dense forest growth ren¬ 
dered foot traveling irksome. Nuts, ber¬ 
ries, roots, and maize furnished food; flax 
and tough pliant woods and bark gave tex¬ 
tile materials. The life conditions for eco¬ 
nomic animals were as varied as possible. 
Beginning with the shallow marshes and 
numerous salt-water inlets, furnishing 
clams, oysters, crabs, cod, mackerel, her¬ 
ring, halibut, shad, sturgeon, eels, and 
terrapin, as shell-heaps attest, it termi¬ 
nated in the trout streams of the moun¬ 
tains. There were birds of the air, like 
the eagle and w ild pigeon, ground birds, 
like the quail and the turkey, and water 
birds innumerable. Mammals of the 
water were the muskrat, otter, and beaver; 
of the land, moose, elk, deer, bear, rab¬ 
bit, squirrel, raccoon, opossum, and wood¬ 
chuck. The wide range of latitude neces¬ 
sitated different dwellings for different 
climates, as the bark tipi, the mat house, 
and the arbor house. For clothing, gar¬ 
ments of hide, rabbit skin, and feathers 
were used. Stone w r as abundant for 
making tools, for flaking or grinding, but 
neither materials nor motives for artistic 
work of a high order were present. 

(5) Gulf coast. —The Southern states, 
from Georgia to Texas, w r ere inhabited by 
Muskhogean tribes and several small lin¬ 
guistic families. The characteristics of 
this area are a climate ranging from tem¬ 
perate to subtropical, with abundant rain, 
low mountains, and rich river valleys and 
littoral w T ith varied and profuse mineral, 
vegetal, and animal resources. The en¬ 
vironment yielded a diet of meat, fish, 
maize, pulse, melons, and fruits. It was 
favorable to meager dress and furnished 
materials and incentives for featherwork 
and bead work, stonework, earthwork, and 
pottery. Traveling on foot and in dug- 
out canoes was easy. 

(6) Mississippi valley. —This area in¬ 
cludes the states of the Middle West 
beyond the Great Lake divide, extend¬ 
ing to the loosely defined boundary of 
the great plains. Its characteristics in 
relation to Indian life were varied climate, 
abundant rainfall, numerous waterways, 
fertile lands, alternate timber and prairie, 
and minerals in great variety and abun¬ 
dance, including clay for pottery. The 
economic plants were soft and hard 
woods, and plants yielding nuts, berries, 
fruits, and fiber. The fertile land was 
favorable to the cultivation of maize and 
squashes. Animals of the chase were buf¬ 
falo, deer, small rodents, and wild pigeons 
and other land birds; but there was a 
poor fish supply, and the only shellfish 
were river mussels. This environment 
developed hunting and agricultural tribes, 


chiefly of Algonquian lineage, including 
sedentary tribes that built remarkable 
mounds. 

(7) Plains. —This environment lies be¬ 
tween the Rocky mts. and the fertile 
lands w. of the Mississippi. To the n. it 
stretches into Athabasca, and it termi¬ 
nates at the s. about the Rio Grande. The 
tribes were Siouan, Algonquian, Kiowan, 
Caddoan, and Shoshonean. The Mis¬ 
souri and Arkansas and many tributaries 
drain the area. The plants were bois d’ arc 
and other hard w r oods for bow r s, cedar for 
lodge poles, willows for beds, the pomme 
blanche for roots, etc., but there w r ere no 
fine textile fibers. Dependence on the 
buffalo and the herbivorous animals asso¬ 
ciated with it compelled a meat diet, skin 
clothing and dwellings, a roving life, and 
industrial arts depending on the flesh, 
bones, hair, sinew, hide, and horns of 
those animals. Artistic and symbolic de¬ 
signs were painted on the rawhide, and 
the myths and tales related largely to the 
buffalo. Travel was on foot, wdth or with¬ 
out snowshoes, and transportation was 
effected by the aid of the dog and travois. 
The horse afterward wrought profound 
changes. The social order and habit of 
semi-nomadic wandering about fixed cen¬ 
ters were the direct result of the surround¬ 
ings and discouraged agriculture or much 
pottery. No canoes or other craft than the 
Mandan and Hidatsa skin boats. 

(8) North Pacific coast. —From Mt St 
Elias to the Columbia mouth, lying along 
the archipelago and cut off from the inte¬ 
rior by mountains covered with snow, w 7 as 
the area inhabited by the Tlingit, Haida, 
Tsimshian, Nootka, and coast Salish. It 
has a moist, temperate climate, a moun¬ 
tainous coast, with extensive island 
groups and landlocked waters favorable 
to canoe travel. The shores are bathed 
by the warm current of the n. Pacific. 
The days in different seasons vary greatly 
in length. The material resources are 
black slate for carving and good stone for 
pecking, grinding, and sawdng; immense 
forests of cedar, spruce, and other ever¬ 
green trees for houses, canoes, totem-posts, 
and basketry; mountain goat and big¬ 
horn, bear, beaver, birds, and sea food in 
great variety and in quantities inexhaust¬ 
ible by savages. This environment in¬ 
duced a diet of fish, mixed wdth berries, 
clothing of bark and hair, large com¬ 
munal dwellings, exquisite twined and 
checkered basketry to the discourage¬ 
ment of pottery, carving in wood and 
stone, and unfettered travel in dugout 
canoes, which provided opportunity for 
the full development of the dispersive clan 
system. 

(9) Columbia-Fraser region. —This in¬ 
cludes the adjoining basins of these 
streams and contiguous patches, inhab- 


BULL. 30] 


ENVIRONMENT 


429 


ited principally by Salishan, Shahaptian, 
and Chinookan tribes. In the s. is a 
coast destitute of islands. At the head¬ 
waters of its rivers it communicates with 
the areas lying to the e. across the moun¬ 
tains. Rich lands, a mild climate, good 
minerals for industries, textile plants, ex¬ 
cellent forests, and an abundance of edible 
roots and fruits, fish, mollusks, and water- 
fowl ready at hand characterize this en¬ 
vironment, with skin and wool for cloth¬ 
ing. The manifold resources and varied 
physical features fostered a great variety 
of activities. 

(10) Interior basin .—This is embraced 
between the Rocky mts. and the Sierras 
of the United States, terminating in a 
regular line in the s., and is the home of 
the great Shoshonean family. It partly 
coincides with the arid Sonoran area of 
Merriam, consisting of partial deserts, 
with rich wooded patches among the 
mountains. Good stone for various crafts 
is present. Timber is scarce, but wild 
seeds are abundant for food, and excel¬ 
lent woods and roots for basketry. Ani¬ 
mals available were buffalo, rabbit, deer, 
antelope, wolf, mountain sheep, and birds, 
but fish were scarce. The environment 
made necessary the brush shelter and the 
cave dwelling. Little pottery was made, 
but the sinew-backed bow Vv’as developed. 
Traveling was necessarily done on foot, 
and carrying effected by dogs and women, 
as there was no transportation by water. 

(11) California- Oregon .—This includes 
s. Oregon and the greater part of Califor¬ 
nia—that embraced in the drainage basins 
of the Sacramento, San Joaquin, and 
smaller rivers flowing into the Pacific. 
The temperature is mild, neither cold in 
winter nor hot in summer, and the year 
is divided into wet and dry seasons. The 
Sierras form a mountain boundary, and 
mountain groups of some height are ob¬ 
structions within the area, but the Coast 
range is low and broken and not a barrier. 
Obsidian, steatite, and other good stones 
for the arts were plentiful. There was 
clay, but no pottery. The region was well 
but not heavily timbered, consisting of 
open plains, -with hillsides and ranges 
covered more or less with brush and 
scattered oaks, many species furnishing 
acorns for food. The open spaces alter¬ 
nating with the wooded lands yielded 
grasses and medicinal herbs. Other use¬ 
ful plants were the buckeye,. manzanita, 
nut pine, redwood, and tule in the s. for 
balsas, baskets, matting, and houses, and 
edible and textile roots w T ere also found. 
The animals entering into Indian econ¬ 
omy were the deer, rabbit, bear, coyote, 
squirrel, jaguar, condor, salmon, sturgeon, 
eel, trout, smelt, mussel, clam, haliotis, 
and other shellfish whose shells furnished 
media of exchange. This environment 


was the Caucasus of North America, where 
25 linguistic families were assembled. 
On Merriam’s bio-geographic maps, pub¬ 
lished by the Department of Agriculture, 
a great variety of life is shown, due to ver¬ 
tical zones of temperature, only the lower 
of which were inhabited by Indians. The 
more elevated of these were just as effec¬ 
tual as boundaries as though they were 
impassable. Owfing to the peculiar nature 
of materials, the arts of this environment 
were well defined. 

(12) Pueblo country. This area in¬ 
cludes s. Utah, s. w. Colorado, all of New 
Mexico and Arizona together with the 
Mohave desert, and extends southward 
into Mexico. It embraces the drainage 
basin of the San Juan in the n., the Rio 
Grande and the Pecos in the e., and the 
Colorado in the w. In physiographic 
character it ranges from semiarid to desert. 
There are deep canyons, elevated mesas, 
narrow fertile valleys, broad stretches of 
plains, and isolated mountain masses. 
The climate demands little clothing in 
the lowlands, but on the plateaus the 
nights are cold and the summer tempera¬ 
ture that of Maine. Rain is irregular and 
periodic, being plentiful for weeks, fol¬ 
lowed by months of drought; most of the 
streams are therefore intermittent. Use¬ 
ful minerals are gypsum, obsidian, vari¬ 
eties of quartz, potter’s clay, adobe, 
ochers, lignite, salt, and turquoise. Plant 
life, except after rains, is comparatively 
meager, the species giving rise to native 
industries being chiefly cactus, yucca, 
cottonwood, greasewood, willow, scrub 
oak, conifers, and rushes. Maize, beans, 
and cotton w T ere cultivated from a very 
early period. Wild animals hunted or 
trapped were the rabbit, deer, bear, 
turkey, prairie dog, mountain lion, wild¬ 
cat, wood-rat, mountain sheep, coyote, 
and wolf. Dogs were trained, and bur¬ 
ros, sheep, goats, and cattle found a con¬ 
genial home in this area after their intro¬ 
duction by the Spaniards. Travel was 
formerly done on foot only, and goods 
had to be carried chiefly on the heads 
and backs of men and women, there being 
few navigable waters. This peculiar en¬ 
vironment impelled tribes coming into 
the region to lead the life of the Pueblo. 
The outskirts of the region were even less 
favored with resources, hence the Pueblos 
were brought into conflict with predatory 
tribes like the Ute, and later the Navaho, 
the Apache, and the Comanche, who 
robbed them and constantly threatened 
to consume what they raised. These con¬ 
flicts developed the cliff-dwelling as means 
of protection. Southwest of the region 
proper are Piman and Yuman tribes and 
the Mission Indians, dwelling in oases of 
the desert that extends into Mexico. 
Here grow mesquite, ironwood, agave, 


430 


EOTOTO-ERIE 


[b. a. e. 


palo verde, cacti in the greatest variety, 
and, along the water courses, cottonwood 
and rushes. The people live a life partly 
sedentary, housed in shelters of brush 
and grass. The effects of this environ¬ 
ment, where the finding of springs was 
the chief desideratum in the struggle for 
existence, were to influence social struc¬ 
ture and functions, manners and customs, 
esthetic products and motives, lore and 
symbolism, and, most of all, creed and 
cult, which were conditioned by the un¬ 
ending, ever-recurring longing for water. 

Consult Morice (1) W. Den£s, 1894, 
(2) N. Inter. Brit. Col., 1904; Merriam 
(1) Life Zones, Bull. 20, Biol. Surv. Dept. 
Agr., (2) N. A. Fauna, ibid., Bull. 3 and 
16, (3) Bio.-Geo. maps, 1892 and 1893; 
Powell, Linguistic Families, 7th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1891; Sargent (1) Distrib. For¬ 
est Trees, 10th Census, (2) Trees of N. 
Am., 1905, (3) Silva N. Am.; Chesnut 
(1) Poisonous Plants, Bull. 20, Div. Bot. 
Dept. Agr., (2) Plants used by Inds. Men¬ 
docino Co., Cal., Cont. U. S. Nat. Herb., 

vii, 3, 1902; Elliott, Mammals of N. Am., 
Fewkes in Internat. Geog. Cong., 1903; 
Field Columb. Mus. Publ., Zool., n, 1901; 
McGee, Beginning Agr., Am. Anthrop., 

viii, no. 4,1895; Mason, Influence of En¬ 

vironment, Smithson. Rep. 1895, 1896; 
Barrows, Eth no-botany of Coahuilla Inds., 
1900; Miller, N. Am. Land Mammals, Bos¬ 
ton Soc. Nat. Hist., xxx, no. 1, 1901; 
Farrand, Basis of Am. Hist., 1904; Del- 
lenbaugh, North Americans of Yester¬ 
day, 1901. (o. T. M.) 

Eototo (name of a supernatural being). 
One of the clans of the Kokop (Wood) 
phratry of the Hopi. 

Eototo winwu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
584, 1900 (winwti^ 1 elan’). E-o'-to-to wiin-wu.— 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894. 

Epanow. One of the first Indians to be 
taken across the Atlantic by the English 
from N ew England—a member of the party 
forcibly taken from Marthas Vineyard, 
Mass., by Capt. Harlow in 1611. He was 
shown in England as a wonder, and man¬ 
aged to escape from the English on the 
return voyage by pretending to pilot them 
to a gold mine. In 1619 he was at the 
island of Capoge, near C. Cod, and in 
that year a body of Indians under his 
guidance attacked Capt. Dormer’s men 
while attempting to land on Marthas 
Vineyard. Epanow is spoken of as artful 
and daring. He may be the same as 
Apannow, a signer of the Plymouth treatv 
of 1621. See Drake, Inds. N. Am., 72, 
1880. 

Epiminguia. A tribe formerly living on 
Mississippi r., 20 leagues above Arkansas 
r. (Coxe, Carolana, 11, 1741); probably 
a division of the Quapaw. 

Epinette. A Chippewa band which 
formerly lived on the n. shore of L. Supe¬ 


rior, e. of Michipicoton r., Ontario.— 
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 32, 1744. 

Episok. An Eskimo settlement in n. w. 
Greenland.—Kane, Arct. Explor., n, 278, 
1856. 

Epley’s Ruin. A large prehistoric 
pueblo ruin on the outskirts of Solomons- 
ville, on the Gila, s. e. Ariz. So called 
from the owner of the ranch on which it 
is situated.—Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 
171, 1904. 

Erie (Huron: yZnresh, ‘itis long-tailed’, 
referring to the eastern puma or panther; 
Tuscarora, M n ‘raks, ‘lion’, a modern use, 
Gallicised into Eri and Ri, w hence the 
locatives Eri l e, Rigue, and Rique, ‘at the 
place of the panther’, are derived. Com¬ 
pare the forms Erieehronon, Eriechro- 
non, and Riqu6ronon of the Jesuit Rela- 
tions, signifying ‘people of the panther’. 
It is probable that in Iroquois the puma 
and the wild-cat originally had generic- 
ally the same name and that the defining 
term has remained as the name of the 
puma or panther). A populous sedentary 
Iroquoian tribe, inhabiting in the 17th 
century the territory extending s. from 
L. Erie probably to Ohio r., e. to the lands 
of the Conestoga along the e. watershed 
of Allegheny r. and to those of the Seneca 
along the line of the w. watershed of Gen¬ 
esee r., and n. to those of the Neutral 
Nation, probably on a line running east¬ 
ward from the head of Niagara r. (for the 
Jesuit Relation for 1640-41 says that the 
territory of the Erie and their allies joined 
that of the Neutral Nation at the end of 
L. Erie), and w. to the w. watershed of 
L. Erie and Miami r. to Ohio r. Their 
lands probably adjoined those of the Neu¬ 
tral Nation w\ of L. Erie. The Jesuit Re¬ 
lation for 1653, speaking of L. Erie, says 
that it “ w T as at one time inhabited toward 
the s. by certain peoples whom we call 
the Cat Nation; but they w T ere forced to 
proceed farther inland in order to escape 
their enemies whom they have toward 
the w.” In this eastward movement of 
the Erie is probably found an explanation 
of the emigration of the Awenrehronon 
(Wenrohronon) to the Huron country in 
1639 from the e. border of the lands of the 
Neutral Nation, although the reason there 
given is that they had for some unknown 
reason ruptured their relations with the 
Neutral Nation, w ith whom, it is stated, 
they had been allied, and that, conse¬ 
quently, losing the powerful support of 
the populous Neutral Nation, the Wenroh¬ 
ronon, were left a prey to their enemies, 
the Iroquois. But the earlier Jesuit Re¬ 
lation (for 1640-41), referring undoubt¬ 
edly to this people, says that a certain 
strange nation, the Awenrehronon, dwelt 
beyond the Cat Nation, thus placing them 
at this time e. of the Erie and apparently 
separate from the Neutral Nation; so that 


BULL. 30] 


ERIE 


431 


at that time the Wenrohronon may have 
been either entirely independent or else 
confederated with the Erie. 

Historically little is definitely known of 
the Erie and their political and social or¬ 
ganization,, but it maybe inferred to have 
been similar to that of the Hurons. The 
Jesuit Relations give only a few glimpses 
of them while describing their last wars 
with the Iroquois confederation; tradi¬ 
tion, however, records the probable fact 
that the Erie had had many previous 
wars with these hostile tribes. From the 
Relations mentioned it is learned that the 
Erie had many sedentary towns and vil¬ 
lages, that they were constituted of sev¬ 
eral divisions, and that they cultivated 
the soil and spoke a language resembling 
that of the Hurons, although it is not 
stated which of the four or five Huron 
dialects, usually called “Wendat ” (Wy¬ 
andot) by themselves, was meant. From 
the same source it is possible to make a 
rough estimate of the population of the 
Erie at the period of this final war. At 
the taking of the Erie town of Rique in 
1654 it is claimed that the defenders num¬ 
bered between 3,000 and 4,000 combat¬ 
ants, exclusive of women and children; 
but as it is not likely that all the war¬ 
riors of the tribe were present, 14,500 
would probably be a conservative esti¬ 
mate of the population of the Erie at this 
period. 

The Jesuit Relation for 1655-56 (chap, 
xi) gives the occasion of the final strug¬ 
gle. Thirty ambassadors of the Cat 
Nation had been delegated, as was cus¬ 
tomary, to Sonontouan, the Seneca capi¬ 
tal, to renew the existing peace. But 
through the misfortune of an accident one 
of the men of the Cat Nation killed a 
Seneca. This act so incensed the Seneca 
that they massacred all except 5 of the 
ambassadors in their hands. These acts 
kindled the final war between the Erie 
and the confederated tribes of the Iro¬ 
quois, especially the Seneca, Cayuga, Onei¬ 
da, and Onondaga, called by the French 
the ‘upper four tribes’, or ‘les Iroquis 
superieurs’. It is further learned from 
the Jesuit Relation for 1654 that on the 
political destruction of their country some 
Hurons sought asylum among the Erie, 
and that it was they who were actively 
fomenting the war that was then striking 
terror among the Iroquois tribes. The 
Erie were reputed brave and warlike, 
employing only bows and poisoned 
arrows, although the Jesuit Relation for 
1656 declares that they were unable to 
defend one of their palisades against the 
Iroquois on account of the failure of their 
munitions, especially powder, which 
would indicate that they used firearms. 
It is also said that they “fight like 
Frenchmen, bravely sustaining the first 


charge of the Iroquois, who are armed 
with our muskets, and then falling upon 
them with a hailstorm of poisoned 
arrows,” discharging 8 or 10 before a 
musket could be reloaded. Following 
the rupture of amicable relations be¬ 
tween the Erie and the Iroquois tribes in 
1653, the former assaulted and burned a 
Seneca town, pursued an Iroquois war 
party returning from the region of the 
great lakes, and cut to pieces its rear 
guard of 80 picked men, while the Erie 
scouts had come to the very gates of one of 
t he Iroquois palisaded towns and seized 
and carried into captivity Annenraes 
(Annencraos), “one of the greatest cap¬ 
tains. ’ ’ All this roused the Iroquois tribes, 
which raised 1,800 men to chastise the Erie 
for these losses. A young chief, one of 
the two leaders of this levy, was converted 
by Father Simon Le Moine, who chanced 
to be in the country at the time, and was 
baptized. These two chiefs dressed as 
Frenchmen, in order to frighten the Erie 
by the novelty of their garments. When 
this army of invaders had surrounded one 
of the Erie strongholds, the converted 
chief gently asked the besieged to sur¬ 
render, lest they be destroyed should they 
permit an assault, telling them: “The 
Master of Life fights for us; you will be 
ruined if you resist him.” “Who is this 
Master of our lives?” the Erie defiantly 
replied. ‘ ‘ We acknowledge none but our 
arms and hatchets.” No quarter was 
asked or given on either side in this war. 
After a stubborn resistance the Erie pal¬ 
isade was carried, and the Onondaga 
‘ ‘ entered the fort and there wrought such 
carnage among the women and children 
that blood was knee-deep in certain 
places.” This was at the town of Rique, 
which was defended by between 3,000 and 
4,000 combatants, exclusive of women 
and children, and was assailed by about 
1,800 Iroquois. This devastating war 
lasted until about the close of 1656, when 
the Erie power was broken and the peo¬ 
ple were destroyed or dispersed or led 
into captivity. Six hundred surrendered 
at one time and were led to the Iroquois 
country to be adopted as one of the con¬ 
stituent people of the Iroquois tribes. 
The victory at Rique was won at a great 
loss to the Iroquois, who were compelled 
to remain in the enemy’s country two 
months to care for the wounded and to 
bury the dead. 

Only two of the Erie villages are known 
by name—Riqu6 and Gentaienton. A 
portion of the so-called Seneca now living 
in Indian Ter. are probably descendants 
of Erie refugees. ( j. n. b. ii. ) 

Cat Indians.—Smith quoted by Proud, Penn., ii,. 
300, 1798. Cat Nation.—Cusic (ca. 1824) quoted 
by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, Vi, 148,1857. Ehrieh- 
ronnons.—Jes. Rel. for 1654, 9, 1858. Erians.—Ma- 
cauley, N. Y.,. U, 180, 1829. Erieckronois.—Hen- 


432 


ERIGOANNA-ESCOOBA 


[B. a. e. 


nepin, New Discov., map, 1698. Erieehronons. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1641, 71, 1858. Eriehronon,— Jes. Rel. 
for 1640, 35,1858. Enelhonons.— Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, IV, 207, 1854. Erieronons. —Rafinesque, 
introd. Marshall, Ky., 1,36,1824. Eries. —Jefferys, 
Fr. Dorns., I, 103, 1760. Eri^z.— Esnauts and 
Rapilly, map, 1777. Erigas.— Evans (1646?) 
quoted by Barton, New Views, lxv, 1798. Errie- 
ronons.— Lahontan, New Voy., I, 217, 1703. 

Eves. —McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, hi, 79, 
1854 (misprint). Gahkwas.— Ruttenber, Tribes 
Hudson R., 52, 1872. Ga-qua'-ga-o-no. —Morgan, 
League Iroq., 41,1851. Heries.— Browne in Beach, 
Ind. Misc., 110,1877. Irrironnons. —Day, Penn., 309, 
1843. Irrironons.— Harvey quoted by Day, ibid., 
311. Kah-Kwah.— Gale, Upper Miss., 37,1867. Kab- 
quas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 290,1853 (Sen¬ 
eca name). Kakwas. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
ii, 344, 1852. Nation des Chats. —Jes. Rel. for 1660, 
7,1858. Nation du Chat. —Jes. Rel. for 1641,71,1858. 
Pungelika. —Rafinesque, Am. Nat., I, 138, 1836 
(‘lynx-like’: Delaware name). Rhiierrhonons. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1635, 33, 1858 (probably their Huron 
name). Rigneronnons. —Jes. Rel. for 1661, 29,1858 
(misprint). Rigueronnons. —Jes. Rel. for 1666, 3, 
1858. Riquehronnons. —Jes. Rel. for 1660, 7, 1858. 

Erigoanna. A tribe living near St Louis 
(Matagorda) bay, Tex., in 1687, and re¬ 
ferred to as at war with the Ebahamo, 

q. v. (Douay quoted by Shea, Discov. 
and Expl. Miss., 209, 1852). Not identi¬ 
fied, unless the same as the Kohani 
(q. v.). Probabl} r a Karankawa band. 

Erilite. A mineral, according to Dana 
(Text-book of Mineral.,426,1888), “acic- 
ular, wool-like crystals of unknown 
nature occurring in a cavity in the quartz 
from Herkimer co., N. Y.”: from Erie, 
the name of a lake, and -lile from the 
Greek AzQoj, a stone. The lake was 
named from one of the peoples of Iro- 
quoian stock. (a. f. c.) 

Erio (E-rV-o). A name given by the 
Spaniards to the Porno living at the 
mouth of Russian r., Sonoma co., Cal.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 194, 
1877. 

Eriwonec. A former Delaware village 
on the e. bank of Delaware r., about Old 
Man’s cr., in Salem or Gloucester co., 
N. J. The village was next above the 
Asomoche and 5 m. below the Ran- 
cocas. In 1648 the population num¬ 
bered about 200, but had just been at 
war with the Conestoga. 

Armeomeks.— De Laet ( ca . 1633) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., I, 303,1841. Amewamen,— Shea, note 
in Alsop, Md., 118, 1880. Armewamus. —Hudde 
(1663) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xn, 430, 1877. 
Aroenemeck.— Beekman (1660), ibid., 300 (settle¬ 
ment). Eriwoneck. —Evelin {ca. 1648) in Proud, 
Pa., i, 113, 1797. Ermomex.— Van der Donck, 
map (1656) cited by Brinton, Lenape Leg., 42, 
1885. Esewonecks.— Sanford, U. S., cxlvi, 1819. 

Erner. A Yurok village on Klamath 

r. , at the mouth of Blue cr., in Del Norte 

co., n. w. Cal. (a. l. k.) 

Ernivwin ( Er'nlvwin ). An Utkiavin- 
miut Eskimo summer camp inland from 
Pt Barrow, Alaska.—Murdoch in 9th 
Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1892. 

Ertlerger. A Yurok village on lower 
Klamath r., at the mouth of the Trinity, 
opposite Pekwuteu and Weitspus, in 
Humboldt co ? , Cal. (a. l. k.) 


Erusi ( E-rus'-si ). A name said by 
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 194, 
1877) to have been applied to the Porno 
formerly living near Ft Ross, Sonoma co., 
Cal., by the Porno living n. of them. 
The people referred to now live near 
Stewart’s Point and on the Haupt ranch a 
few miles e. of that place. Powers sug¬ 
gests that the name is a relic of the Rus¬ 
sian occupancy, which is probably correct, 
as it is not an Indian name. (s. a. b. ) 

Ervipiames. A tribe of central Texas 
in the 18th century. Domingo Ramon 
was met by some of them a few leagues 
w. of Trinity r., not far from the country 
of the Bidai. They are mentioned in 
unpublished documents as among the 
tribes which in company with other north¬ 
ern tribes petitioned for a mission on San 
Javier r., and they are included among 
the northern Indians as distinguished 
from the coast tribes. If they belonged 
to any of the large recognized divisions 
in this neighborhood it was probably 
Tonkawan. (h. e. b. ) 

Enepiahe.—Joutel, Jour. Voy., 90, 1719. Enepia- 
hoe.—Shea, note in Charlevoix, New France, iv, 
78, 1870. Enepiahoes.—Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. 
Ervipiames.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602, 1736. Ex- 
epiahohe.—Joutel in Margry, D6c., in, 288, 1878. 
Hierbipiames.—Barrios,MS., 1771. Yerbipiame.— 
Ram6n, MS., Texas Memorias, xvii, 151. Yor- 
bipianos.—Informe de Misiones, ibid., xxvm,179, 
1762. Yrbipias.—Bosque (1675) in Nat. Geog. 
Mag., xiv, 343, 1903. Yrbipimas.—Ibid., 340. 

Esachkabuk (‘ bad leggings ’). A Crow 
band. 

BadLeggins.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 
144, 1851. E-sach'-ka-buk.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
159, 1877. 

Esahateaketarpar (‘toward the Santee’, 
from Isanyate ‘Santee’, ektapa ‘toward’). 
A division of the Brule Dakota which had 
Tartonggarsarpar (Tatonka-tsapa, Black 
Buffalo Bull) for its principal chief in 1804. 

E-sah-a-te-ake-tar-par.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 

34, 1806. 

Esbataottine (? ‘bighorn people’). A 
Nahane tribe living in the mountains 
between Liard and Peace rs., Brit. Col. 
They are said to be of a very low grade 
of culture and to practise cannibalism, 
probably under stress of hunger. 
Dounie'Espa-tpa-Ottine.—Petitot, Autourdu grand 
lac des Esclaves, 301, 1891 ( = ‘goat people’). 
Esba-t'a-ottine.—Petitot, Ethnog. chart in Bull. 
Soc. de G6ogr. Paris, July, 1875 (=‘ dwellers 
among the argali’). Es-pa-to-ti-na.—Dawson in 
Rep.Geol.Surv. Can. for 1887, 202 b, 1889. Espa-tpa- 
Ottine.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 362, 
1891 (trans. ‘bighorn people’). Gens des Bois.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 32, 1877 (so called 
by Hudson bay people). Gens des chevres.—Peti¬ 
tot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 301, 1891. Knife 
Indians.—Campbell quoted by Dawson, op. cit. 

Escaba. A former tribe, probably Coa- 
huiltecan, on the lower Rio Grande. 
Escabaca-Cascastes.—Fernando del Bosque (1675) 
in Nat. Geog. Mag., xiv, 340,1903 (combined with 
the name of another tribe, the Cascastes, and cor¬ 
rupted). Escabas.—Revillagigedo (1793) quoted 
by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 611, 1886. 

Escambuit. See Assacumbuit. 

Escooba (Oski holba, ‘cane-like’, refer¬ 
ring to reed-brakes). A former Choctaw 


BULL. 30] 


ESCOUMAINS-ESKIMO 


433 


town, noted by Romans; evidently situ¬ 
ated a few miles e. or n. e. of Ayanabi, 
perhaps on or near Petickfa cr., Kemper 
co., Miss.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. 
Publ., vi, 424, 1902. 

Escoumains (probably from ashkimin, or 
asMmXn, 1 early berry’.—W. J.). A Mon- 
tagnais band living on a reserve of 97 
acres on the s. w. side of Escoumains r., 
on the n. shore of the St Lawrence, in 
Saguenay co., Quebec. Thev numbered 
53 in 1884, 43 in 1904. 

Escoumains.—Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1384, pt. I, 
185, 1885. 

Escumawash. A former Chumashan 
village at San Jose, about 6 m. from 
Santa Barbara mission, Cal.—Timeno 
(1856) quoted by Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 4, 1860. 

Esekepkabuk. A band of the Crow tribe 
adopted from the Sihasapa. 

Bad Coup.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850,144, 
1851. Bad Honors.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 
Ese-kep-ka'-buk.—Ibid. 

Eshhulup. The name of “the rancheria 
of the mission of San Buenaventura,” 
Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 
1860). The native name usually given to 
San Buenaventura was Mishkanakan, or 
Mitskanakan (see Miscanaka). 

Eshkebugecoshe (‘Flat-mouth’, ‘ Wide- 
mouth’). A chief of the Pillager Chip¬ 
pewa; born in 1774, died about 1860. He 
belonged to the Awausee gens. In his 
youth Eshkebugecoshe engaged in distant 
expeditions, lived among the Cree and 
Assiniboin, and visited in war or peace 
the tribes of the upper Missouri, spend¬ 
ing some time among the Hidatsa. His 
father, Yellow-hair (Wasonaunequa), 
was not a chief by descent, but gained 
ascendency over the Pillagers through 
his knowledge of medicine, and it is said 
that whoever incurred his hatred died 
mysteriously. The son was different, en¬ 
joying the respect of whites as well as 
Indians throughout his long life. He 
was much impressed by the prophecies of 
Tenskwatawa, and through his influence 
poisoning ceased among the Pillagers, as 
among other Chippewa. In the later 
contests with the Sioux for the head¬ 
waters of the Mississippi he bore a val¬ 
iant part. Although his band at Leech 
lake, Minn., was decimated in the ex¬ 
terminating war, it continued to grow 
through accessions of the bravest spirits 
of the eastern villages. When a political 
agent sought to enlist the Pillagers in the 
British interest at the beginning of the 
war of 1812, Flat-mouth returned the prof 
fered wampum belts, saying that he 
would as soon invite white men to aid 
him in his wars as take part in a quar¬ 
rel between the whites. (f. ii.) 

Eshpeu. A Yurok village on the coast 
between the mouths of Klamath r. and 
Redwood cr., at Gold bluff, Cal. The 


dialect differed slightly from that of the 
Klamath River Yurok. (a. l. k.) 

Eskegawaage. One of the 7 districts of 
the territory of the Micmac as recognized 
by themselves. It includes e. Nova Sco¬ 
tia from Canso to Halifax.—Rand, First 
Micmac Reading Book, 81, 1875. 

Eskimauan Family. A linguistic stock 
of North American aborigines, compris¬ 
ing two well-marked divisions, the Eski¬ 
mo and the Aleut (q. v.). See Powell in 
7thRep. B. A. E.,71,1891. (Thefollowing 
synonymy of the family is chronologic.) 
>Eskimaux.— Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., ir, 9,305,1836; Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848; Gallatin in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 401,1853. =Eskimo. — 
Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17,1848; ibid., 
1852; Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 288, 1850 (general 
remarks on origin and habitat); Buschmann, 
Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 689, 1859; Latham, 
Elem. Comp. Philol., 385, 1862; Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, ill, 562,574,1882. >Esquimaux.— Prichard, 
Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 867-371,1847 (follows Gal¬ 
latin); Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 
182-191, 1848; Latham, Opuscula, 266-274, 1860. 
>Eskimo.— Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 266,1869(treats 
of Alaskan Eskimo and Tuski only); Berghaus, 
Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the Aleu¬ 
tian). >Eskimos. — Keane, app. to Stanford’s 
Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 460,1878 (excludes 
Aleutian). >0unangan. —Veniaminoff, Zapiski, 
ii, 1, 1840 (Aleutians only). >Unugun.— Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 22, 1877 (Aleuts a division 
of his Orarian group). >TJnangan.— Berghaus, 
Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. xNorthern.— Scouler 
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xi, 218, 1841 (includes 
Ugalentzes of present family). xHaidah.— Scou¬ 
ler, ibid., 224,1841 (same as his Northern family). 
>Ugaljachmutzi. —Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iii, 402, 1853 (lat. 60°, between Prince 
Williams sd. and Mt St Elias, perhaps Athapas¬ 
can). >Aleuten. —Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizzen, 
1855. > Aleutians. —Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S.,266, 
1869; Dali, Alaska, 374, 1870 (in both places a di¬ 
vision of his Orarian family). > Aleuts. —Keane, 
app. to Stanford’s Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 
460,1878 (consist of Unalaskans of mainland and 
of Fox and Shumagin ids., with Akkhas of rest 
of Aleutian arch.). >Aleut. —Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, iii, 562, 1882 (two dialects, Unalaska and 
Atkha). >Konjagen.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skiz¬ 
zen, 1855 (Island of Koniag or Kadiak). =0ra- 
rians. —Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 265, 1869 (group 
name; includes Innuit, Aleutians, Tuski); Dali, 
Alaska, 374, 1870; Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
8, 9, 1877. xTinneh. —Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
269,1869 (includes “Ugalens6”). >Innuit. —Dali 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 9, 1877 (“ Major group” 
of Orarians: treats of Alaska Innuit only); Berg¬ 
haus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the 
Aleutians). 

Eskimo. Agroupof American aborigines, 
forming part of the Eskimauan linguistic 
stock, which formerly occupied nearly all 
the coasts and islands of Arctic America 
from e. Greenland and the n. end of New¬ 
foundland to the westernmost Aleutian 
ids., even extending to the e. coast of Sibe¬ 
ria, adistanceof more than5,000m. From 
remains found in Smith sd. it is evident 
that bands formerly wintered as far n. 
as lat. 79° and had summer camps up to 
82°. At the present time they have re¬ 
ceded from this extreme range and in 
the S. have abandoned the n. shore of the 
Gulf of St Lawrence, the n. end of New¬ 
foundland, James bay, and the s. shores 
of Hudson bay, while in Alaska one Es- 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-28 



434 


ESKIMO 


[B. A. E. 


kirno tribe, the Ugalakmiut, has prac¬ 
tically become Tlingit through intermar¬ 
riage. The name Eskimo (in the form 



8UKUUK, A KINUGUMIUT ESKIMO OF ALASKA. (nEL80n) 

Excomminquois) seems to have been first 
given by Biard in 1611. It in said to come 
from the Abnaki Esquimantxic, or from 
Aehkimeq , the Chippewa equivalent, sig¬ 
nifying ‘eaters of raw flesh.’ They call 
themselves limit, meaning‘people.’ The 
Eskimo constitute physically a distinct 
type. They are of medium stature, but 
possess uncommon strength and endur¬ 
ance; their skin is light brownish yel- 
lowwith a ruddy tin ton the ex posed parts; 
their hands and feet are small and well 
formed; their eyes, like those of other 
American tribes, have a Mongoloid char¬ 
acter, which circumstance has induced 
many ethnographers to class them with 
the Asiatic peoples. They are character¬ 
ized by very broad facesand narrow, high 
noses; their heads are also exceptionally 
high. This type is most marked among 
the tribes e. of Mackenzie r. Indisposi¬ 
tion the Eskimo may bedescribed as peace¬ 
able, cheerful, truthful, and honest, but 
exceptionally loose in sexual morality. 

The Eskimo have permanent settle¬ 
ments, conveniently situated for marking 
certain hunting and fishing grounds. In 
summer they hunt caribou, musk-oxen, 
and various birds; in winterthey live prin¬ 
cipally on sea mammals, particularly the 
seal. Although their houses differ with 
the region, they conform in the main to 
three types: In summer, when they 


travel, they occupy tents of deer or seal 
skins stretched on poles. Their winter 
dwellings are made either in shallow ex¬ 
cavations covered with turf and earth laid 
upon a framework of wood or whale ribs, 
or they are built of snow. Their clothing 
is of skins, and their personal adorn¬ 
ments are few. Among most tribes, how¬ 
ever, the women tattoo their faces, and 
some Alaskan tribes wear studs in open¬ 
ings through their cheeks. Considering 
their degree of culture, the Eskimo are 
excel lent draftsmen and carvers, their de¬ 
signs usually consisting either of simple 
linear incisions or of animal forms exe¬ 
cuted with much life and freedom. The 
people about Bering strait make some use 
of paints. 

There has always been extensive inter¬ 
tribal communication. The Eskimo have 
an exceptional knowledge of the geogra¬ 
phy of their country. Poetry and music 
play an important part in their life, espe¬ 
cially in connection with their religious 
observances. 

The Eskimauan social organization is 
exceedingly loose. In general the village 
is the largest unit, although persons in¬ 
habiting a certain geographical area have 
sometimes taken the name of that area as 
a more general designation, and it is often 
convenient for the ethnographer to make 



KERLUNGNER, A KINUGUMIUT ESKIMO WOMAN OF ALA8KA. 

• (nelson) 


a more extended use of this native cus¬ 
tom. In matters of government each set¬ 
tlement is entirely independent, and the 









BULL. 30] 


ESKIMO 


485 


same might almost be said for each family, 
although there are customs and prece¬ 
dents, especially with regard to hunting 
and fishing, which define the relations ex¬ 
isting between them. Although hardly 
deserving the name of chief, there is 
usually some advisory head in each settle¬ 
ment whose dictum in certain matters, 
particularly as to the change of village 
sites, has much weight, but he has no 
power to enforce his opinions. 

The men engage in hunting and fish¬ 
ing, while all the household duties fall to 
the lot of the women—they must cook, 
make and mend clothes, and repair the 
kaiaks and boat covers, pitch the tents, 
and dry the fish and meat and stow them 
away for the winter. In some tribes 
skin-dressing is done by the men, in 
others by the women. Monogamy, po¬ 
lygamy, and polyandry are all practised, 
their occurrence being governed some¬ 
what by the relative proportion of the 
sexes; but a second marriage is unusual 
where a man’s first wife has borne him 
children. The execution of law is largely 
left to the individual, and blood-revenge 
is universally exacted. 

The Eskimo believe in spirits inhabit¬ 
ing animalsand inanimate objects. Their 
chief deity, however, is an old woman 
who resides in the ocean and may cause 
storms or with hold seals and other marine 
animals if any of her tabus are infringed. 
Her pow er over these animals arises from 
the fact that they are sections of her fin¬ 
gers cut off by her father at the time when 
she first took up her abode in the sea. 
The chief duty of angakoks, or shamans, 
is to find who has infringed the tabus and 
thus brought down the wrath of the 
supernatural beings and to compel the 
offender to make atonement by public 
confession or confession to the angakok. 
The central Eskimo suppose two spirits to 
reside in a man’s body, one of which stays 
with it when it dies and may temporarily 
enter the body of some child, who is then 
named after the departed, while the other 
goes to one of several lands of the souls. 
Some of the lands of souls lie above the 
earth’s surface, some beneath, and the 
latter are generally more desirable. 

Although the theory of Asiatic origin 
of the Eskimo was long popular, many of 
their ethnic peculiarities are opposed to 
such a notion, and recent researches 
seem to indicate that their movements 
have rather been from E. to W. They an; 
peculiar as beingtheonly raceof American 
aborigines who certainly had contact 
with white people before the days of Co¬ 
lumbus, for Greenland was occupied dur¬ 
ing the 10th and 11th centuries by 
Norwegians, whose expeditions extended 
even as far as the American mainland. 


Later Frobisher and other European nav¬ 
igators encountered Eskimo along the 
e. coasts, while the Russians discov¬ 
ered and annexed the w. part of their 
domain. This occupancy in its earlier 
period proved disastrous to the Aleut 
(q. v.) in particular, who were harshly 
dealt with and whose number was greatly 
reduced during the Russian domination 
(see Russian influence). The larger por¬ 
tion of the Greenland and Labrador Es¬ 
kimo have been Christianized by Mo¬ 
ravian and Danish missionaries, while 
the Alaskan representatives of the family 
have had Russian missionaries among 
them for more than a century. Those 
of the central groups, however, owing 
to the remoteness of their situation, 
have always been much less affected by 
outside influences. The Eskimo have 
proved almost indispensable assistants to 
Arctic explorers. 

The Eskimauan stock embraces two 
well-marked divisions, the Eskimo proper 
and the inhabitants of the Aleutian ids., 
the Aleut. Other divisions are rather 
geographical than political or dialectic, 
there being great similarity in language 
and customs from one end of the Eskimo 
domain to the other. They can be sepa¬ 
rated, however, into the following fairly 
well marked ethnological groups (based 
on information furnished by Dr Franz 
Boas): 

I. The Greenland Eskimo, subdivided 
into the East Greenlanders, West Green¬ 
landers, and Ita Eskimo, the last transi¬ 
tional between the Greenland Eskimo 
proper and the next group. 

II. The Eskimo of s. Baffin land and 
Labrador, embracing the following divi¬ 
sions: Akudnirmiut, Akuliarmiut, Itivi- 
miut, Kaurnauangmiut, Kigiktagmiut, 
Nugumiut, Okomiut, Padlimiut, Kikosui- 
larmiut, Suhinimiut, Tahagmiut. 

III. The Eskimo of Melville penin., 
North Devon, n. Baffin land, and theN. w. 
shore of Hudson bay, embracing the Ago- 
rniut, Aivilirmiut, Amitorrniut, Iglulir- 
miut, Inuissuitmiut, Kinipetu, Koung- 
miut, Pilingmiut, Bauniktumiut. 

IV. The Sagdliriniut of Southampton 
id., now extinct. 

V. The Eskimo of Boothia Felix, King 
William land, and the neighboring main¬ 
land. These include the Netchibrmiut, 
Sinimiut, LTgjulirmiut, Ukusiksalirmiut. 

VI. The Eskimo of Victoria land and 
Coronation gulf, including the Kangor- 
miut and Kidnelik, which may, perhaps, 
be one tribe. 

VII. The Eskimo between C. Bath- 
urstand I lersehel id., indudingthe mouth 
of Mackenzie r. Provisionally they may 
be divided into the KitegareutatO. Bat h¬ 
urst and on Anderson r., the Nagcuktor- 


436 


ESKIMO 


[B. a. e. 


miut at the mouth of Coppermine r., and 
the Kopagmiut of Mackenzie r. This 
group approximates the next very closely. 

VIII. The Alaskan Eskimo, embrac¬ 
ing all those within the American terri¬ 
tory. This group includes the Aglemiut, 
Chingigmiut, Chnagmiut, Chugachig- 
miut, Ikogmiut, Imaklimiut, Ingukli- 
miut, Kaialigmiut, Kangmaligmiut, Kani- 
agmiut, Kaviagmiut, Kevalingamiut, Kia- 

tagm i u t, 
Kinugu- 
miut, Ko- 
wagmiut, 
Kukpau- 
rungmiut, 
Kunmiut, 
Kuskwog- 
miut, Mage- 
mi ut,Male- 
miut, Nu- 
natogmiut, 
Nunivag- 
miut, Nu- 
wukmiut, 
Nushagag- 
miut, Sela- 
w igmiut, 
Sidarumiut, 
Tikeramiut, 
Togiagmiut, 
U g a 1 a k - 
miut, Una- 
1 i g m i u t, 
Utukamiut, 
and Utkia- 
vinmiut. 

IX. The 
Yu it of Si¬ 
beria. 

Holm 
(1884-85) 
placed the 
number of 
EastGreen- 
land Eskimo at 550. The w. coast Green¬ 
landers were given as 10,122 by the 
Royal Greenland Co. in 1888, and the Ita 
Eskimo numbered 234 in 1897, giving 
a total for this group of 10,906. The 
Eskimo of Labrador were estimated at 
1,300 in a recent report by the Govern¬ 
ment of Newfoundland, and Boas in 1888 
gave the number of Eskimo in the central 
groups as 1,100. According to the census 
of 1890, there were on the Arctic coast of 
Alaska from the British border to Norton 
sd., 2,729 Eskimo; on the s. shore of Nor¬ 
ton sd. and in the Yukon valley, 1,439; 
in Kuskokwim valley, 5,254; in the val¬ 
ley of Nushagak r., 1,952; on the s. coast, 
1,670. The Ugalakmiut of Prince Wil¬ 
liam sd., numbering 154, are reckoned 
with the Tlingit, but they were originally 
Eskimo, and for our present purposes 
are best placed in that category. Adding 
these, therefore, the total for this group, 


exclusive of the 968 Aleut, is 13,298. 
The Yuit of Siberia are estimated by Bo- 
goras at 1,200. The Eskimo proper there¬ 
fore number about 27,700, and the stock 
about 28,670. (h. w. h. j. r. s.) 

Aguskemaig.—Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830. A'lva- 
ye'lilit.—Bogoras, Chukchee, 11, 1904 (Chukchi: 
‘ those of alien language ’). Anda-kpoen.—Petitot, 
Diet. Den6 Dindji6, 169, 1876 (Loucheux name: 
trails, ‘ennemis-pieds’). Ara-k’e.—Ibid. (Bas¬ 
tard Loucheux name, same meaning). Enna-k’e.— 
Ibid. (Peaux de Lievre name, same meaning). 
En-na-k’ie.—Ibid. (Slave name: trans. ‘steppes- 
ennemis’). Escoumins.—Jes. Rel., in, index, 1858. 
Eshkibod.—Baraga, Otchipwe-Eng. Diet., 114,1880 
(Ojibwa: ‘those who eat their food raw’). Eskee- 
moes.—Gordon, Hist. Mem. of N. Am., 117, 1820. 
Eskima.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay. 203, 1744. Eski- 
mantsik.—Hervas, Idea dell’ Universo, xvu, 87, 
1784. Eskima'ntzik.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
9, 1877 (Abnaki name). Eskimauk.—Morse, N. 
Am., map, 1776. Eskimaux.—Lahontan, New 
Voy., I, 208, 1703. Eskimeaux.—Jeffreys, French 
Dom. Am., pt. 1, map, 1760. Eskimesi.—Hervas, 
Idea dell’ Universo, xvu, 86, 1784. Eskimo.— 
Buschmann, Spuren d. Aztek. Spr., 669, 1859. 
Eskimos.—Hutchins (1770) quoted by Richard¬ 
son, Arct. Exped., II, 38, 1851. Esquimantsic.— 
Prichard, Phys. Hist., v, 367,1847. Esquimau.— 
Petitot, Diet. Dene I)indji6, 169, 1876. Esqui¬ 
maux.—Morse, Hist. Am., 126, 1798. Esquimeaux 
Indians.—McKeevor, Voy. Hudson’s Bay, 27,1819. 
Esquimones.—Hennepin, Cont. of New Discov., 
95, 1698. Eusquemays.—Potts (1754) quoted by 
Boyle, Archseol. Rep. Ont., 1905. Excomminqui.— 
Jes. Rel. 1612-14, Thwaites ed., u, 67, 1896 (=‘ex¬ 
communicated’). Excomminquois.—Biard in Jes. 
Rel. 1611, 7, 1858. Huskemaw.—Packard in Am. 
Natural., xix,555,1885 (name given by amission¬ 
ary in Labrador). Hus'ky.— Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 9,1877 (Hudson bay iargon). Innoit.— 
Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnol. Am., hi, pt. 2,29, 
1876 (sing. Innok). In-nu.—Lyon, Repulse Bay, 
40, 1825. Innuees.—Parry, Sec. Voy., 414, 1824. 
In'nuit.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 9, 1877 
(own name). Inuin.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. 
E., 42,1892. Inuit.—Bessels in Archiv f. Anthrop., 
vin, 107, 1875. Kaladlit.—Nansen, Eskimo Life, 
13,1893 (name which the Greenland Eskimo give 
themselves, said to be a corruption of Danish 
Skraeling). Kalalik.— Richardson, Polar Regions, 
300, 1861. Kalalit.—Keane in Stanford’s Com- 
pend., 517, 1878. Karaler.—Crantz, Greenland, ii, 
291, 1820. Karalit.—Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., 
ix, 233, 1822. Keralite.—Heriot, Travels, 34, 1813. 
Ki'imilit.—Bogoras, Chukchee, 21, 1904 (from 
ki'xmi, an inhabitant of C. Prince of Wales: Yuit 
name). Nochways.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 12,1744 
(Algonkin: ‘snakes,’ ‘enemies,’appliedtopeople 
of alien race regarded as natural enemies). Nod- 
ways.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 12, 1744 (‘snakes’: 
Siksika name). (Enne.—Petitot, Diet. D5n6 Dind- 
jie, 169,1876 (Loucheuxname: ‘enemies’). Ora- 
rians.—Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., xvm, 265,1870. 
Ot’el’nna.— Petitot, Diet. D6n6 Dindji6, 169, 1876 
(Montagnais name: trans. ‘steppes-ennemis’). 
Pa-erks,—Hooper, Tents of Tuski, 137,1853 (Chuk¬ 
chi name for Eskimo of American coast). Paya- 
irkets.—Ibid., 103. Ro'b'hilit.—Bogoras, Chuk¬ 
chee, 21, 1904 (‘opposite shore people’: Yuit 
name). Seymbs.—Richardson, Arct. Exped., 1,340, 
1851 (used by sailors of Hudson’s Bay Co.’s 
ships: derived from the Eskimo cry of greeting: 
Seymo or Teymo). Skraelings.—Schultz in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can., XIII, pt. 2,114,1895. Skraellingar, — 
Richardson, Polar Regions, 298, 1861 (Scandina¬ 
vian name: ‘small people’). S Kraellings. — 
Crantz, Greenland, I, 123, 1820 (applied by the 
Norwegians). Skrellings.—Amer. Hist. Soc., 2d 
ser., i, Portland, 1869. Skroelingues. —Morse, Hist. 
Am., 126, 1778. Suckemos. —Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., i, 340, 1851 (same derivation as Seymos). 
Ta-Kutchi.—Ibid. (Kutchin name: ‘ocean peo¬ 
ple’). Tchiechrone. —Pyrlseus ( ca. 1748) quoted 
in Am. Antiq., iv, 75,1881 (German form of Seneca 
name: ‘seal people’). Tcie'k-runera.—Hewitt, 
inf’n (Seneca name). Ultsehaga. —Richardson, 





western Eskimo Costume. (Murdoch) 






BULL. 30] 


ESKINI-ESQUGBAAG 


437 


Arct. Exped., i, 408,1851 (Kenai name: ‘slaves’). 
Ultsehna.—Ibid. Uskee-mes.—Ibid., 55. Uskee'- 
mi. — Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 9, 1877 
(Athapascan name). Uskees.— O’Reilly, Green¬ 
land, 59, 1818. TJskimay.—Middleton in Dobbs, 
Hudson Bay, 189,1744. TJsquemows.—Coats, Geog. 
of Hudson Bay, 15,1852. Weashkimek.—Belcourt 
(before 1853) in Minn. Hist. Coll., I, 226, 1872 
(Saulteur name: ‘ eaters of raw flesh ’). Yikirga'- 
ulit.—Bogoras, Chukchee,21,1904 (Yuit name). 

Eskini. A Maidu village formerly sit¬ 
uated on the site of Durham, Butte co., 
Cal., the people of which are extinct ex¬ 
cept for a few survivors at Chico. The 
Maidu creation myth centers about this 
spot. (r. b. d. ) 

Erskins.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 124,1850. Es'-kin.—Pow¬ 
ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,282,1877. £skini,— 
Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. 

Esksinaitupiks (‘worm people’). A 
division of the Piegan. 

Esk'-sin-ai-tup-iks. —Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. is-ksi'-na-tup-i.— Hayden, Eth- 
nog. and Philol. Mo. Yal., 264, 1862. Worm Peo¬ 
ple.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225,1892. 

Eskusone. A Micmac village formerly 
in Cape Breton.—Rand, First Micmac 
Reading Book, 87, 1875. 

Eslanagan. A village, supposed to be 
of the Chalone division of the Costanoan 
family, but possibly Esselenian, formerly 
connected with Soledad mission, Monte¬ 
rey co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 20, 1860. 

Esmischue. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Esnispele. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Esopus (sip ‘river,’ -us ‘small’). A di¬ 
vision of the Munsee that lived along the 
w. bank of Hudson r. in Greene and Ulster 
cos., N. Y., above the Minisink, who 
formed the main division. Esopus is the 
old name of Kingston, which was their 
principal rendezvous. Under this name 
were included the Catskill, Mamekoting, 
Waoranec, Warranawonkong, and Wa- 
warsink, sometimes called the five tribes 
of the Esopus country. They continued 
to reside about Kingston until some 
joined the Moravian Munsee and Mahi- 
can in Pennsylvania, and others placed 
themselves under the protection of the 
Iroquois. About the year 1775 the rem¬ 
nant were at Oquanga, with fragments of 
other tribes. (j. m. ) 

JEsopus.— Smitt (1660) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiii, 157, 1881. Aesopus. — Doc. of 1658, ibid., 81. 
Asopus.— Writer ca. 1742 in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 
5, 18, 1848. Esopes.— Doc. of 1665 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., xiii, 401,1881. Esopus.— De Laet (1633) 
quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 72,1872. 
Esopuz.— Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 
1856. Sapes.— Doc. of 1665, ibid., Xiii, 399, 1881. 
Sepus. -Schuyler (1693), ibid., iv, 66,1854 (settle¬ 
ment). Soopis. — Stoll (1658), ibid., xiii, 77, 1881 
(locality). Soopus. —Ibid., 96. Sopes.— Nicolls 
(1665), ibid.,399. Sopez.— Smith (1659), ibid., 114 
(place). Sopus. —Doc. of 1668, ibid.,418. Zopus.— 
Ingoldsby (1691), ibid., ill, 793,1853 (settlement). 


Espachomy. A village on lower Hudson 
r., N. Y., near Poughkeepsie, under Eng¬ 
lish protection in 1664.—Albany treaty 
(1664) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., hi, 68,1853. 

Espamichkon. A small Montagnais tribe 
n. of the St Lawrence in 1643 (Jes. Rel. 
1643, 38,1858), probably about the head¬ 
waters of Saguenay or St Maurice r. 

Espejos (named from their chief Espe- 
jo (Span.: ‘mirror’). A branch of the 
Mescaleros inhabiting the plains of Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico, about 1859.—Froebel, 
Seven Years’ Trav., 352, 1859. 

Espeminkia. A band, apparently part 
of the Illinois, mentioned with the Tam- 
aroa and Tapouaro (Peoria?).—La Salle 
(1681) in Margry, D6c., ii, 134, 1877. 

Esperiez. Given by mistakeasthe name 
of one of the Hopi pueblos in 1598.—Oliate 
(1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 137, 1871. 

Espiiluima. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Espiritu Santo de Zuniga. A mission 
established by the Marquis de San Miguel 
Aguayo, in March or April, 1722, near and 
under the protection of the newly estab¬ 
lished fort of Santa Marfa de Loreto de la 
Bahfa del Espiritu Santo, commonly 
called La Bahfa, which was built on the 
site of La Salle’s ill-fated Ft St Louis, on 
Lavaca r., Matagorda bay, Tex., in the 
territory of the Karankawa. The Span¬ 
ish mission, of which Fray Agustin Pat¬ 
ron was the first missionary, was aban¬ 
doned before 1726, its priest establishing 
a new one among the Tamique and Ju- 
ranames (Aranama), who lived 10 leagues 
inland, on lower San Antonio r., and in 
1749 it was moved upstream opposite the 
site of the modern Goliad. The presidio 
of La Bahfa was shifted with the mission. 
In 1768 its population was 300, and to that 
date there had been 623 baptisms; there 
were also 1,500 cattle and 100 horses, and 
it is said once to have had 15,000 cattle. 
The population, which consisted of Ara¬ 
nama, Tamique, Piguican, ManosdePerro, 
Kohani, and Karankawa Indians, had 
dwindled to 116 in 1785 (in which year 
there, were also 3,000 cattle), and to only 33 
Indians in 1793. See Bancroft, No. Mex. 
States, i, 1886; Garrison, Texas, 1903. 

Espopolames. A former tribe, probably 
Coahuiltecan, in the neighborhood of the 
lower Rio Grande. 

Espopolames.—Fernando del Bosque (1675) in 
Nat. Geog. Mag., xiv, 341, 1903. Isipopolames.— 
Revillagigedo (1793) quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, i, 611,1886. 

Esqugbaag. Formerly a rancheria, 
probably of the Sobaipuri, and a visita of 
the mission of Suamca about 1760-67; 
situated on or near the Rio San Pedro, 
near the Arizona-Sonora boundary. 
Badz.— Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 563, 1884. 
S. Andres Esqugbaag,—Ibid. 


438 ESQ HIM ALT ESTANCIA [ a. e. 


Esquimalt. The local name for a body 
of Songish at the s. e. end of Vancouver 
id., under the Cowichan agency; pop. 15 
in 1901, 20 in 1904.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. 2, 
66, 1902; pt. 2, 69, 1904. 

Esquimaux Point. A Montagnais mis¬ 
sion settlement on the n. bank of the St 
Lawrence, about 20 m. e. of Mingan, 
Quebec. 

Esquimaux Point.—Stearns, Labrador, 271, 1884. 
Pointe des Esquimaux.—Hind, Lab. Penin., II, 180, 

1863. 

Esquipomgole. Defined by Bartlett 
(Diet, of Americanisms, 202, 1877) as 
“another name for kinnickinnick, or a 
mixture of tobacco and cornel bark”; 
said to be an Indian word, possibly Al- 
gonquian. (a. f. c. ) 

Essanape (Algonq.: asinapd ‘stone per¬ 
son ’.—W. J.). A tribe located by Lahon- 
tan (New Voy., i, 114,1703) on his “Long 
r., ” identified with Minnesota r. His voy¬ 
age up this stream is probably fictitious, 
and so may be the tribe, which was cer¬ 
tainly not the Assiniboin, as has been 
suggested, since these under the name 
Assimpoual were correctly placed by La- 
hontan in the region of L. Winnipeg. 
The tribe, if not imaginary, may have 
been, as Ramsey supposed, the Santee, 
known as Isanyati, for the Mdewakanton 
band dwelt at that time on Minnesota r. 
Esanapes.—Harris, Coll. Voy. and Trav., n, map, 
1705. Esanopes.— Barcia, Ensayo, 291, 1723. Es- 
san-a-pis.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 78, 
1850. Essannapes.—Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., 1 ,31, 
1872. Essenapes.—Vaugondy, map, 1778. 

Esselen. A tribe of Californian Indians, 
constituting the Esselenian family, most 
of the members of which on the founding 
of Carmelo mission, near Monterey, in 
1770, were brought under civilizing in¬ 
fluences, resulting, as was the case with 
the Indians at all the Californian missions, 
in their rapid decrease (see California In¬ 
dians, Mission Indians, Missions). A por¬ 
tion of the tribe seems to have been taken 
to the mission at Soledad, for Arroyo de 
la Cuesta (MS., B. A. E.) in 1821 says of 
an Esselen vocabulary obtained by him¬ 
self, “Huelel language of Soledad; it is 
from the Esselenes, who are already few.” 
The original territory of the Esselen lay 
along the coast s. of Monterey, though 
its exact limits are diversely given. 
Henshaw (Esselen MS., B. A. E.) states 
that they lived on the coast s. of Mon¬ 
terey, in the mountains. The Rumsen 
Indians of the present day at Carmel 
and Monterey state (Kroeber, MS., Univ. 
Cal.) that the Esselen originally lived at 
Agua Caliente (Tassajara springs), which 
is near the head of Carmel r., in a line 
between Surand Soledad. Powell’s map 
(7th Rep. B. A. E.) makes the Esselen 
territory comprise Surr., the head of Car¬ 
mel r., and the country about as far s. as 
Santa Lucia peak, which is probably ap¬ 
proximately correct. In any case the Es¬ 


selen territory was confined to a limited 
area and was bordered only by Salinanand 
Costanoan tribes. La Perouse’s statement 
that it extended more than 20 leagues e. of 
Monterey is incorrect. Almost nothing 
is known of the mode of life and practices 
of the Esselen, but they were certainly 
similar to those of the neighboring 
tribes. What little is known in regard 
to the Esselen language shows it to have 
been simple and regular and of a type 
similar to most of the languages of central 
California, but, notwithstanding a few 
words in common with Costanoan, of en¬ 
tirely unrelated vocabulary and therefore 
a distinct stock. 

Taylorgivesalistof Esselen villages con¬ 
nected with San Carlos mission, namely: 
Chachat, Coyyo, Fyules, Gilimis, Jappa- 
yon, Nennequi, Noptac, Santa Clara, Sap- 
ponet, Soccorondo, Tebityilat, Triwta, 
Tushguesta, Xumis, Yampas, and Yanos- 
tas. He mentions also Xaseum, 10 leagues 
from Carmelo, in the sierra, and Pach- 
hepes near Xaseum, among the Esselen. 
He gives still other names, such as Ex- 
cellemaks and Eslanagan; but none of 
the settlements named by him have been 
proved to be Esselen and not Costanoan. 
Carmelo Eslenes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 
1860. Ecclemachs.—Lamanon in La Perouse, Voy., 
n, 291, 1797. Eclemaches.—Chamisso quoted by 
Kotzebue, Voy., in, 49, 1821. Ecselenas. —Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. Ecselenes.—Ibid. 
Ekklemaches.—Ludewig, Abor. Lang. Am., 68, 
1858. Ensenes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 

1860. Escelen.—Humboldt, Essai Pol., 321, 1811. 
Escelenes.—Mayer, Mexico, II, 39, 1853. Escel- 
lens.—'Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. Es- 
elenes.—Ibid. Eskelen.—Ludewig, Abor. Lang. 
Am., 68, 1858. Eslen.—Galiano, Viaje Sutil y 
Mexicana, 167, 1802. Eslenes.—Ibid., 172. Esse¬ 
len.—Henshaw in Am. Anthrop., m, 45, 1890. 
Excellemaks.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,1860. 

Esselenian Family. A small linguistic 
stock in w. California, first positively 
established by Henshaw (Am. Anthrop", 
hi, 45,1890). At the time of the Spanish 
settlement, this family, which has become 
extinct, consisted of a single group, the 
Esselen, q. v. 

=Esselen.—Dixon and Kroeber in Am. Anthrop., 
n. s., v, no. 1, map, 1903. =Esselenian.—Powell 
in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 75, 1891. <Salinas.—Latham 
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes 
Gioloco?, Ruslen, Soledad, Eslen, Carmel, San 
Antonio, and San Miguel, cited as including 
Eslen); Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860. 

Estait. A former Chumashan village 
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 

1861. 

Estate. A former settlement of the 
southern group of E. Greenland Eskimo. — 
Meddelelser om Gronland, xxv, 26, 1902. 

Estame. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570.—Fontaneda 
Memoir ( ca . 1575), Smith trans., 19,1854. 

Estancia (a Spanish term with many 
meanings, but here probably signifying 
‘sojourning or staying place’). A Pima 
rancheria visited by Anza in 1774; situ- 


BULL. ;jo J 


ESTATOEE-ETCHAKEOTTINE 


439 


ated 4 leagues s. of the mission of Saric, 
which was just s. of the Arizona boundary. 
La Estancia.— Anza quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 389,1889. 

Estatoee. Two former Cherokee settle¬ 
ments, one on Tugaloo r. below the junc¬ 
tion of Chattooga and Tallulah rs., in 
Oconee co., S. C., the other in the n. w. 
part of Pickens co. The former was 
enerally known as Old Estatoee. 

stalaoe. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pl.clxi, 
1900. Estatoe.— Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1887. Estatoie.— Doc. of 1755 quoted by Royce, 
ibid., 143. Estotowe. —Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792 
(on Tugaloo r.). Estotowe great. —Ibid, (town on 
another river). 

Estero. An unidentified tribe men¬ 
tioned by Langsdorff (Voy., ii, 163,1814) 
as inhabiting the coast of California. 

Estocoloco. A Chumashan village on 
one of the northern Santa Barbara ids., 
Cal., in 1542.—Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in 
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 186, 1857. 
Coloco.— Cabrillo, op. cit., 186. Estilococo.— Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. 

Estuc. A former Chumashan village 
near San Marcos, in the vicinity of Santa 
Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 24, 1863. 

Estufa. See Kiva. 

Etaa. The Turtle clan of the Zuni of 
New Mexico. It appears to be extinct, 

Iltaa-kwe. —Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 386, 
1896 (&we=‘people’). 

Etaatthatunne (‘people at the cove’). 
A village of the Tututni of Oregon. 
E'-ta-a'-tfa lun'ne. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, ill, 233, 1890 (Tututni name). E'-ta-a-t’fut' 
^unne'. —Ibid. (Naltunnetunne name).. 

Etagottine (‘people in the air’). A 
Nahane band or division in the valleys of 
the Rocky mts. between the Esbataottine 
and the Tukkuthkutchin, lat. 66°, British 
America. Their totem is the lynx. 
Dabo'-tena. —Ross quoted by Dawson in Rep. 
Geol.Surv. Can. 1887-88, 200 b, 1889. Daha-dinneh.— 
Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 79,1844. Dahadinnes. —Rich¬ 
ardson, Arct. Exped., I, 180, 1851. Daha-dtinne. — 
Richardson quoted by Petitot, Diet. D6ne-I)indji6, 
xx, 1876. Da-ha-dumies. —Hind, Expl. Exped., II, 
159, 1860. Dahodinni.— Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 66,1856. Daho-tena.— Bancroft, Native 
Races, 1,149,1882. Daho'-tena'. —Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., I, 33, 1877. Dawhoot-dinneh.— Franklin, 
Narr., II, 84, 1824. Ehta-Gottine.— Petitot, Autour 
du lac des Esclaves, 362, 1891. Eta-gottine. —Petitot, 
Diet. Den6-Dindji6, xx, 1876 (trans. ‘mountain 
people’). Eta-Gottine.— Petitot, Autour du Grand 
lac des Esclaves, 301, 1891. ^ta-Ottine. —Petitot, 
Grand lac des Ours, 66,1893 (trans. ‘Rocky moun¬ 
tain people’). Gens de la montagne. —Petitot, Diet. 
D6n6-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Gens d’ En-haut. —Pet¬ 
itot, Autour du Grand lac des Esclaves, 363,1891. 
Gens des Montagnes-Rocheuses. —Petitot, Grand lac 
des Ours, 66, 1893. Gens en l’air.— Petitot, Autour, 
op. cit., 262. Hunters. —Prichard, Phys. Hist., 
v, 377, 1847. Mountain Indian. —Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., I 400, 1851. Naha-’tdinne. —Ibid. Noh’ha- 
i-e.— Ibid., ii, 7, 1851 (so called by Kutchin). 
Sicanees. —Dali in Cont. N. A. EthnoL, I, 33,1877 
(sometimes so called by traders). Yeta-ottine. — 
Petitot, Autour du Grand lac des Esclaves, 363. 
1891 (trans. ‘dwellers in the air’). 

Etah. An Ita Eskimo village at C. Ohl- 
sen, on Smith sd., w. Greenland, lat. 78° 
20 / . See Ita. 

Ahipa. —Markham in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
9, 1866. Appah.— Kane, Arct. Explor., n, 212, 


1856. Etah.—Bessels, Am. Nordpol. Exped., map, 
1878. Igita.— Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xii, 269, 1900. 

Etakmehu. A division of Salish now on 
Port Madison res., Wash. 

Etak-bush.—Mallett in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 1877. 
Etakmehu.—Boulet, letter, B. A. E., Mar. 22, 1886. 
Etakmurs.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 176, 1875. 

Etanie. A former Seminole town in 
Putnam co., Fla., of which Checota Hajo 
was chief in 1823. There is now a town 
of Etoniah in the w. part of the county, 
and also a creek of the same name. See 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 
1st sess., 27, 1826. 

Etarita. A village of the Wolf clan of 
the Tionontati, where the Jesuits estab¬ 
lished the mission of St Jean; destroyed 
by the Iroquois in 1649. 

Etarita.—Parkman, Jes., 403, 1883. Etharita.— 
Garreau (1648) quoted in Hist. Mag., 1st s., v, 263, 
1861. Sainct lean.—Jes. Rel. for 1640, 95, 1858. 
Saint lean.—Jes. Rel. for 1648, 61, 1858. St. 
John’s.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 192, 1855. 

Etatchogottine (‘hair people’). A di¬ 
vision of the Kawchodinne dwelling n. 
and e. of Great Bear lake and on Great 
cape, Mackenzie Ter., Can. Their totem 
is a white wolf. 

Ehta-tcho-Gottine.—Petitot, Grand lac des Ours, 
66, 1893. 

Etchaottine. An Etchareottine division 
living w. and n. w. of Great Slave lake 
between Liard r. and the divide, along 
Black, Beaver, and Willow rs., British 
America. The Bistchonigottine and 
Krayiragottine are two of the divisions. 
Dene ^tcha-Ottine.—Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 301, 1891. Esclaves.—Ibid. ^tcha-Ot- 
tine.—Ibid. Gens du lac la Truite.—Petitot, Diet. 
Den6-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Slaves proper.—Kenni- 
cott, MS. vocab., B. A. E. 

Etchareottine (‘ people dwelling in the 
shelter’). An Athapascan tribe occupy¬ 
ing the country w. of Great Slave lake 
and upper Mackenzie r. to the Rocky 
mts., including the lower Liard valley, 
British America. Their range extends 
from Hay r. to Ft Good Hope, and they 
once lived on the shores of L. Athabasca 
and in the forests stretching northward to 
Great Slave lake. They were a timid, 
pacific people, called ‘ the people sheltered 
by willows’ by the Chipewyan, indicat¬ 
ing a riparian fisher folk. Their Cree 
neighbors, who harried and plundered 
them and carried them off into bondage, 
called them Awokanak, ‘slaves,’ an epi¬ 
thet which in its French and English 
forms came to be the name under which 
they are best known. Early in the 18th 
century they were dispossessed of their 
home, rich in fish and game, and driven 
northward to Great Slave lake whither 
they were still followed by the Cree, 
known only as Enna, ‘the enemy,’ a name 
still mentioned with horror as far as Great 
Bear lake. On the islands where they 
took refuge a fresh carnage took place. 
The Thlingchadinneh and Kawchodin- 
neh, who speak the same dialect with 


440 


ETCHERIDIEGOTTINE-ETHENELDELI 


[b. a. e. 


them and bear a like reputation for timid¬ 
ity, probably comprehended under the 
name Awokanak by the Cree, began their 
northerly migration at the same time, 
probably under the same impulsion (Peti- 
tot, La Mer Glaciale, 292, 1887). Petitot 
found among them a variety of physiog¬ 
nomy that he ascribed to a mixture of 
races. Many of the males are circumcised 
in infancy; those who are not are called 
dogs, not opprobriously, but rather affec¬ 
tionately. The bands or divisions are 
Eleidlinottine, Etchaottine, Etcheridie- 
gottine, Etechesottine, Klodesseottine, 
and Desnedeyarelottine (Petitot, Autour 
du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891). In his 
monograph on the Dend-Dindjie, Petitot 
restricted the term to the Etcheridiegot- 
tine, whom he distinguished from the 
Slaves proper, making the latter a separate 
tribe with divisions at Hay r., Great Slave 
lake, Horn mts., the fork of the Macken¬ 
zie, and Ft Norman. 

A-cha'-o-tin-ne. —Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 
289,1871 (trans. ‘peopleof thelowlands’). Acheo- 
tenne. —Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 58, 1870. A-che- 
to-e-ten-ni. —Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. 
Acheto-e-Tinne. —Kennicott, MS. vocab., B. A. E. 
Acheto-tena. —Dali, Alaska, 429, 1870. Achoto-e- 
tenni, —Pope, MS. Sicanny vocab., B. A. E., 1865. 
A-tsho-to-tl-na. —Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv.Can., 
1887-88, 200 B, 1889. Awokanak. —Petitot, La Mer 
Glaciale, 293, 1887 (‘slaves’: Cree name). Brush¬ 
wood Indians.— Franklin, Journ.to Polar Sea, ii, 87, 
1824. Cheta-ut-tdinne. —Richardson, Arct. Exped., 
ii, 7,1851, Dane Esclaves. —Petitot, Autour du lac 
des Esclaves, 289, 1891. Danites Esclaves. —Ibid., 
305. Edchautawoot. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
II, 27, 1852. Edchawtawhoot dinneh. — Franklin, 
Journ. to Polar Sea, 262,1824. Edchawtawhoot tin- 
neh.— Tanner, Narr., 293, 1830. Edchawtawoot. — 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 19, 1836. 
Edshawtawoots. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 542, 
1853. Esclaves.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es¬ 
claves, 363, 1891. Etchape-ottine. —Petitot, Diet. 
D6n6-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Etsh-tawut-dinni. —La¬ 
tham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69,1856 (trans. 
‘ thickwood-men’). Slave Indians. —Hooper, 
Tents of Tuski, 303,1853. Slaves. —Petitot, Autour 
du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891 (English form). 
Slavey. —Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. (so 
called by fur-traders). 

Etcheridiegottine (‘people of the rap¬ 
ids’). An Etchareottine division which 
hunt along Liard r. and neighboring 
regions to the border of the Etchaottine 
country near old Ft Halkett, British 
America. They have intermarried with 
the Etchaottine and with the Tsattine in 
the s., and have absorbed their manners 
and customs and adopted their dialectal 
forms to such a degree that they have 
been frequently confounded with the one 
tribe or the other. 

Bastard Beaver Indians.—Ross in Smithson. Rep. 
1866,308,1872. Beaver.—Franklin, Journ. to Polar 
Sea, 262, 1824. Erettchi-ottine.—Dawson in 

Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 1887-88, 200 b, 1889 (‘peo¬ 
ple,of the rapids’: Kawchodinneh name). Et- 
tcheri-die-Gottinfe.—Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 363, 1891. Liards Indians.—Ross quoted 
by Gibbs, MS., B. A.E. Liard Slaves.—Pope, MS. 
Sicanny vocab., B. A. E, 1865. Ndu-tcho-ottinne.— 
Dawson, op. cit. Sceth-tessesay-tinneh.—Ross 
quoted by Gibbs, MS., B. A. E. (‘people of the 
mountain river’). Slave Indians of Ft. Liard.—Ross 
MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. Strong bow.—Mac¬ 


kenzie in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ir, 43,1814. Tsilla- 
ta-ut’ tine.— Richardson quoted by Petitot, Diet. 
Dene-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Tsilla-ta-ut’-tinne. —Rich¬ 
ardson, Arct. Exped., ix, 6, 1851. Tsillawadoot. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 28, 1852. Tsillaw- 
awdoot. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., H, 
19,1836. Tsillaw-awdut-dinni. —Latham in Trans. 
Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1856 (trans.: ‘bush-wood- 
men ’ ). Tsillawdawhoot-dinneh. —Franklin, J ourn. 
to Polar Sea, II, 87,1824. Tsillawdawhoot Tinneh. — 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 145, 1882. 

Etechesottine (‘horn mountain peo¬ 
ple’). A division of the Etchareottine 
occupying the country between Great 
Slave and La Martre lakes, Mackenzie 
Ter., Can. Franklin erroneously con¬ 
sidered them Thlingchadinneh. 

Deerhorn mountaineers. —Franklin, Narr., II, 181, 
1824. ^te-ches-ottine. —Petitot in Bull. Soc. de 
Geog. Paris, chart, 1875. Gens de la montagne la 
Corne. —Petitot, Diet. Den6-Dindji6, xx, 1876. 
Horn Mountain Indians. —Franklin, Narr., 260,1C24. 

Etheneldeli (‘caribou-eaters’). An 
Athapascan tribe living e. of L. Caribou 
and L. Athabasca, in the barren grounds 
which extend to Hudson bay (Petitot, 
Diet. Dene-Dindji£, xx, 1876). Franklin 
(Journ. Polar Seas, n, 241, 1824) placed 
them between Athabasca and Great 
Slave lakes and Churchill r., whence 
they resorted to Ft Chipewyan. Ross 
(MS., B. A. E.) makes them a part of the 
eastern Tinne, their habitat being to the 
n. and e. of the head of L. Athabasca, 
extending to the end of Great Slave lake. 
Rocky r. separates them from the Tatsa- 
nottine. In the e. are the barren 
grounds to which they resort every year 
to hunt the caribou, which supplies 
practically all their needs. They were 
a part of the migrating Chipewyan who 
descended from the Rocky mts. and 
advanced eastward from Peace r. to dis¬ 
pute the Hudson bay region with the 
Maskegon and Cree. One of their women 
who was held in captivity by the Maske¬ 
gon was astonished at the weapons, uten¬ 
sils, and clothing of European manufac¬ 
ture that she saw among her captors, who 
told her that they made these articles 
themselves. Finding at last that they 
got them in barter for furs at Ft Prince 
of Wales, she made her escape to the 
English and told them of her own people 
on Peace r. who held the choicest furs 
cheap. The British traders, eager to ex¬ 
tend their trade, sent her with a safe 
conduct to her people, whom she per¬ 
suaded to migrate to the barren grounds 
near Hudson bay, where caribou were 
abundant. They settled around Rein¬ 
deer, Big, and North Indian lakes, and 
were called the Northern Indians by the 
English and the Mangeurs de Cariboux 
by the Canadian French, while the neigh¬ 
boring tribes called them by the same 
name that they had given to the English, 
Men of the Stone House. Hearne saw 
them in 1769 and Petitot found them 
there still a century later, numbering 
900. About 300 traded at Ft Fond du 


BULL. 30] 


ETHICS AND MORALS 


441 


Lac at the head of L. Athabasca. There 
were 248 enumerated at Fond du Lac in 
1902, and 368 in 1904. 

Cariboo eaters. —Ross in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 
306, 1872. Eastern Folks.— Richardson, Arct, 

Exped., II, 5, 1851. Ethen-eldeli. —Petitot, Diet. 
D5n6-Dindji(§, xx, 1876. Ethen-elteli.— Petitot, 
Autour du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891. Ettine- 
tinney.— Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS. notes, B. A. E. 
(‘caribou people’). Gensdu Fort-de-pierre.— Pet¬ 
itot, Autour du Grand lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891. 
Mangeurs de cariboux. —Petitot, Diet. D&ne-Din- 
dji6 xx, 1876. Michinipicpoets.— Dobbs, Hudson 
Bay, 25,1744 (‘people ot stone of the great lake’: 
Cree name). Northern Indians. —Ibid, 17. Ris¬ 
ing Sun Folks. —Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 
5, 1851. Rising Sun men.— Prichard, Phys. Hist., 
v, 376, 1847. Sa-essau-dinneh. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ii, 27, 1852 (trans. ‘eastmen’). Sah-se- 
sah tinney. —Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS. notes, 
B. A. E. (trans. ‘eastern people’). Sa-i-sa- 
’dtinne.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 5, 1851 
(‘ people of the rising sun ’). Sawassaw-tinney. — 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 534, 1878. Saw- 
cesaw-dinneh. —Franklin quoted by Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, III, 542, 1853. Saw-cessaw-dinnah.— 
Schoolcraft, ibid., V, 172, 1855. Saw-eessaw- 
dinneh. —Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, ii, 241, 
1824 (trans. ‘Indians from the rising sun,’ or 
‘eastern Indians).’ Sawessaw tinney.— Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 464, 1878. See-issaw-dinni. — 
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1856 
(trans. ‘rising-sun-men’). The-Ottine.— Petitot, 
MS. vocab.,B. A.E.,1865 (‘ stone people’). The-ye 
Ottine.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 651, 1883. 
The-ye-Ottine.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es¬ 
claves, 363, 1891 (‘people of the stone fort’). 

Ethics and Morals. It is difficult for a 
person knowing only one code of morals 
or manners to appreciate the customs of 
another who has been reared in the 
knowledge of a different code; hence it 
has been common for such a one to con¬ 
clude that the other has no manners or no 
morals. Every community has rules 
adapted to its mode of life and surround¬ 
ings, and such rules may be found more 
rigorously observed and demanding great¬ 
er self-denial among savages than among 
civilized men. Notwithstanding the dif¬ 
ferences which necessarily exist between 
savage and civilized ethics, the two sys¬ 
tems must evidently have much in com¬ 
mon, for from the days of Columbus to 
the present travelers have given testi¬ 
mony of customs and manners of Indians, 
who were still in the barbarous or the 
savage stage, which displayed a regard for 
the happiness and well-being of others. 

It is often difficult to tell how much of 
Indian manners and morals may have 
been derived from white people; but 
there are still some tribes which have held 
aloof from the intrusive race and have 
been little contaminated by it, and we 
have the testimony of early writers to 
guide us. The latter may be narrow in 
their judgment of Indian conduct while 
they are accurate in describing it. 

To discuss the rise of ethics among 
primitive peoples would lead too far 
afield; but it is clear from all that is 
known of the natives of this continent 
that there existed among them standards 
of right conduct and character. Both 


from folklore and other sources we learn 
of conscience among the Indians and of 
their dread of its pangs. The Navaho 
designate conscience by a term which 
signifies “that standing within me which 
speaks to me.” Abundant evidence 
might be adduced to show that Indians 
are often actuated by motives of pure 
benevolence and do good merely from a 
generous delight in the act. 

Social ethics obtained among all the 
tribes, and public opinion was the power 
that compelled the most refractory to obe¬ 
dience. A system of ethics having once 
taken shape, the desire for the approval 
of one’s associates and the wish to live at 
peace furnished sufficient incentive for 
compliance with the less onerous rules. 
But these motives were not sufficient in 
matters of graver import. Some tribes 
had executive bands, which had limited 
power to punish offenders in certain cases, 
such as violation of the orders of the tribal 
council; but among other tribes there was 
no established power to punish, nor were 
there even the rudiments of a court of 
justice. The pagan Indian is destitute 
of the faith in heaven and hell, which 
affords a strong incentive to moral life 
among many of our own people; but he 
has faith in good and bad luck, and fre¬ 
quently attaches different imaginary pun¬ 
ishments to different offenses. "Some 
regard various inanimate objects as the 
agents of these punishments. “May the 
cold freeze you!” “May the fire burn 
you!” “May the waters drown you!” 
are their imprecations. 

When during the tribal hunt runners 
were sent out to seek a herd of buffalo, 
they had to give, on their return to camp, 
their report in the presence of sacred em¬ 
blems in attestation of the truth of their 
statement. Scouts must report accurately 
or meet disgrace. The successful warrior 
must not claim more than his due; other¬ 
wise he would not be permitted to receive 
the badge of honors rightfully won. The 
common punishment for lying in many 
of the tribes was the burning of the liar’s 
tent and property by tribal sanction. 
Not to keep a promise deliberately given 
was equivalent to lying. There are many 
instances of Indians keeping their word 
even at the risk of death. 

Honesty was inculcated in the young 
and exacted in the tribe. In some com¬ 
munities the rule was limited in its 
operation to those within the tribe itself, 
but it was not uncommon to find its 
obligations extended to allies and to all 
friendly tribes. As war removed all ethi¬ 
cal barriers, pillage was legitimate. The 
stealing of horses was a common object of 
war parties, but only from a hostile tribe. 
When a theft was committed the tribal 
authorities demanded restitution; the loss 


442 


ETIPSIKYA-ETIQUETTE 


[ B. A. E. 


of the property taken, flogging, and a de¬ 
gree of social ostracism constituted the 
unishment of the thief. Instances could 
e multiplied to show the security of per¬ 
sonal effects in a tribe. The Zuni, for 
example, on leaving home, close and seal 
the door with clay, and it remains invio¬ 
late. The Nez Perc6s and many other 
tribes lean a pole across the door to indi¬ 
cate the absence of the family, and no 
one molests the dwelling. 

Murder within the tribe was always 
punished, either by exile, by inexorable 
ostracism and the making of gifts to the 
kindred of the slain, or by suffering the 
murderer to become the lawful victim of 
their vengeance. 

Truth, honesty, and the safeguarding 
of human life were everywhere recognized 
as essential to the peace and prosperity 
of a tribe, and social customs enforced 
their observance; the community could 
not otherwise keep together, much less 
hold its own against enemies, for except 
where tribes were allies, or bound by 
some friendly tie, they were mutual ene¬ 
mies. An unaccredited stranger was al¬ 
ways presumably an enemy. 

Adultery was punished. The manner 
of punishment varied among the tribes, 
the choice being frequently left to the 
aggrieved party. Among the Apache it 
was the common custom to disfigure an 
erring woman by cutting off her nose. 

The care of one’s family was regarded 
as a social duty and was generally ob¬ 
served. This duty sometimes extended 
to one’s relations. 

While the young were everywhere 
taught to show respect to their elders, and 
while years and experience were supposed 
to bring wisdom, yet there were tribes 
among which it was the custom to aban¬ 
don or to put to death the very old. 
Where this custom prevailed the condi¬ 
tions of life were generally hard, and the 
young and active found it difficult to 
secure food for themselves and their 
children. As the aged could not take 
care of themselves, and were an encum¬ 
brance to travel, they acquiesced in their 
fate as a measure of prudence and econ¬ 
omy, dying in order that the young might 
live and the tribe maintain its existence. 

The cruel punishment of witchcraft 
everywhere among the tribes had its 
ethical side. The witch or wizard was 
believed to bring sickness or death to 
members of the community; hence for 
their security the sorcerer must be put to 
death. The custom was due to a lack of 
knowledge of the causes of disease and to 
mistaken ethics. (a. c. f. w. m. ) 

Etipsikya (the name of a shrub). A 
traditional village of the Squash people 
of the Hopi; situated on the s. side of 
Rio Colorado Chiquito, on the brink of a 


canyon, not far from the point where the 
river is crossed by the Santa Fe Pac. R. R., 
Arizona.—Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 26, 1891. 

Etiquette. The interior of most native 
dwellings was without complete parti¬ 
tions, yet each member of the family had 
a distinct space, which was as inviolable 
as a separate apartment inclosed by walls. 
In this space the personal articles of the 
occupant were stored in packs and bas¬ 
kets, and here his bed was spread at night. 
Children played together in their own 
spaces and ran in and out of that belong¬ 
ing to the mother, but they were forbid¬ 
den to intrude elsewhere and were never 
allowed to" meddle with anyone’s posses¬ 
sions. When more than one family 
occupied a dwelling, as the earth lodge, 
the long bark house, or the large wooden 
structure of the N. W., every family had 
its well-known limits, within which each 
member had a place. A space was gen¬ 
erally set apart for guests, to which, on 
entering, a visitor made his way. Among 
the Plains tribes this place was at the 
back part of the dwelling, facing the en¬ 
trance, and the visitor when entering a 
lodge and going to this place must not 
pass between his host and the fire. 
Among many tribes the place of honor 
was at the w., facing the entrance. If he 
was a familiar friend, greetings were at 
once exchanged, but if he had come on a 
formal mission, he entered in silence, 
which was unbroken for some little time 
after he was seated. On such occasions 
conversation was opened by reference to 
trivial matters, the serious purpose of the 
visit not being mentioned until consider¬ 
able time had elapsed. When a delega¬ 
tion was received, only the older men of 
the party or of the tribe spoke; the 
younger members kept silentunless called 
on to say something. Among all the tribes 
haste was a mark of ill breeding, particu¬ 
larly during official or ceremonial pro¬ 
ceedings. No visitor could leave the 
dwelling of his host without some parting 
words to show that his visit was at an end. 

Among many tribes etiquette required 
that when speaking to a person a term of 
relationship rather than the personal 
name should be used. An elderly man 
or woman was usually addressed as grand¬ 
father or grandmother, and a similar title 
was also applied to a man of distinction. 
Uncle or aunt might be used for persons 
of about the same age as the speaker, but 
to a younger man or woman the term of 
address would signify younger brother or 
sister. A friendly visitor from outside 
the tribe was addressed by a term mean¬ 
ing “friend.” A member of the tribe, 
although of a different clan or gens, was 
spoken to by a term of relationship; 
among the Iroquois, for example, one of 


BULL. 30] 


ETISHOKA-ETIWAW 


443 


the opposite phratry was greeted as “my 
father’s clansman,” or “my cousin.” 

When the bearer of an invitation en¬ 
tered a lodge, the person invited did not 
respond if a relative or friend was pres¬ 
ent, who would accept for him, saying, 
“Your uncle (or aunt) has heard.” 
Among the Hopi, in entering a kiva, ac¬ 
cording to Dr Fewkes, one must ask, 
“Am I welcome?” before his left foot 
leaves the lowest rung of the ladder. He 
must always approach the altar on the 
right and leave it on the left. Among 
the Zuni a person, whether friend or 
stranger, on appearing at a doorway is in¬ 
vited to enter and sit; if at meal time, and 
often at other times, he is offered food. 

Among a number of tribes etiquette 
required that there should be no direct 
speech between a woman and her son-in- 
law, and in some instances a similar 
restriction was placed on a woman ad¬ 
dressing her father-in-law. In many 
tribes also the names of the dead were not 
likely to be mentioned, and with some 
Indians, for a space of time, a word was 
substituted for the name of a deceased 
person, especially if the latter were promi¬ 
nent. In some tribes men and women 
used different forms of speech, and the 
distinction was carefully observed. A 
conventional tone was observed by men 
and women on formal occasions which 
differed from that employed in everyday 
life. 

Etiquette between the sexes demanded 
that the man should precede the woman 
while walking or in entering a lodge “to 
make the way safe for her.” Familiar 
conversation could take place only be¬ 
tween relatives; reserve characterized the 
general behavior of men and women 
toward each other. 

Respect must be shown to elders in 
both speech and behavior. No one could 
be interrupted when speaking or forced 
to speak when inclined to be silent, nor 
could personal questions be asked or pri¬ 
vate matters mentioned. During certain 
ceremonies no one may speak above a 
whisper. If it was necessary to pass be¬ 
tween a person and the fire permission 
must be asked, and if one brushed against 
another, or trod upon his foot, an apology 
must be made. At meal time, if one 
could not eat all that had been put upon 
his dish, he must excuse himself to show 
that it was through no dislike of the food, 
and when he had finished he must not 
push away his dish but return it to the 
woman, speaking a term of relationship, 
as mother, aunt, wife, which was equiva¬ 
lent to thanks. Among some tribes, if 
a cooking vessel had been borrowed, it 
must be returned with a portion of what 
had been cooked in it to show the owner 
the use that had been made of the utensil, 
and also, in courtesy, to share the food. 


There was an etiquette in standing and 
sitting that was carefully observed by the 
women. They stood with the feet straight 
and close together, and if the hands were 
free, the arms hung down, a little toward 
the front, the fingers extended and the 
palms lightly pressed against the dress. 
Women sat with both feet under them, 
turned to one side. Men usually sat 
cross-legged. 

The training of children in tribal eti¬ 
quette and grammatical speech began at 
an early age, and the strict observance 
of etiquette and the correct use of lan¬ 
guage indicated the rank and standing of 
a man’s family. Class distinctions were 
everywhere more or less observed. On 
the n. Pacific coast the difference be¬ 
tween high caste and low caste was 
strongly marked. Certain lines of con¬ 
duct, such as being a too frequent guest, 
were denounced as of low caste. So, too, 
among the Haida, it was of low caste to 
lean backward; one must sit on the for¬ 
ward part of the seat in an alert attitude 
to observe good form. Lolling in com¬ 
pany was considered a mark of bad man¬ 
ners among the tribes; and among the 
Hopi one would not sit with legs extended 
during a ceremony. Smoking, whether 
social or ceremonial, had its etiquette; 
much form was used in exchanging smok¬ 
ing materials and in passing the pipe in 
smoking and in returning it. In certain 
societies, when a feast was served, par¬ 
ticular parts of the animal belonged by 
etiquette to the noted warriors present, 
and these were presented by the server 
with ceremonial speech and movements. 
Among some tribes when a feast was given 
a pinch of each kind of food was sacrificed 
in the fire before eating. Ceremonial vis¬ 
itors usually made their approach known 
according to the local custom. Among 
some of the Plains tribes the visitors 
dispatched a runner bearing a little bunch 
of tobacco to apprise their host of their 
intended visit; should their coming prove 
to be ill timed, the tobacco could be re¬ 
turned with an accompanying gift, and 
the visit would be postponed without any 
hard feeling. There was much and varied 
detail in the etiquette of family life, social 
gatherings, and the ceremonies of the 
various tribes living n. of Mexico. See 
Child life, Ethics and Morals, Hospitality, 
Salutation. ( a. c. f. ) 

Etishoka {E-tish-sho'-ka, ‘hillpeople’). 
An Hidatsa band.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
159, 1877. 

Etiwaw (Catawba: ‘pine tree’). A 
small tribe, now extinct, forming part of 
the Cusabo group and living about Ash¬ 
ley and Cooper rs., Berkeley co., S. C., 
extending e. to the present Monk’s Cor¬ 
ner, where their hunting grounds bor¬ 
dered the Sewee country. The Santee 
and Congaree were above them. They 


444 


ETLEUK-ETOWAH MOUND 


[B. a. e. 


were never prominent historically, and in 
Jan., 1715, had a single village with 240 
inhabitants (Rivers, Early Hist. S. C., 94, 
1874). Nothing is heard of them after 
the Yamasi war in 1715, until 1751, when 
they are mentioned as one of the small 
tribes for which the South Carolina gov¬ 
ernment made peace with the Iroquois. 
From this time they seem to have be¬ 
come lost to history. Their name is pre¬ 
served in Eutaw Springs, and in Pine Tree, 
another name for Camden, S. C.—Mooney, 
Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 
1894. 

Ashley River Indians.— Williamson, N. C., I, 201, 
1812. Etewaus.— Glen (1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., VI, 721,1855. Etiwans. —Rivers, Hist. S. C., 37, 
1856. Ittawans. —Ibid. 

Etleuk. A Squawmish village commu¬ 
nity on the right bank of Squawmisht r., 
w. British Columbia. 

Ela-a-who.— Brit. Adm. Chart, No. 1917. Etle'uq.— 
Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Etnataek (perhaps atanatahegi, ‘where 
the fight, battle, or clubbing took place.’— 
W. J.). Given 
as the name of an 
old fortification 
said to have stood 
formerly near the 
Kickapoo vil¬ 
lage on Sanga¬ 
mon r., Ill. It 
is supposed to 
have been built 
by the Kickapoo 
and Foxes, who 
were defeated 
there by the com¬ 
bined forces of 
the Ottawa, Pota- 
watomi, and 
Chippew r a.—Long, Exped., i, 173, 1823. 

Etoluk. An Alaskan Eskimo village in 
the Kuskokwim district; pop. 25 in 1890. 
Etohlugamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Etotulga. A former Seminole town, 
10 m. e. of the old Mickasuky town, in 
Florida.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th 
Cong., lstsess., 26, 1826. 

Etowah (properly FtdwF, of unknown 
meaning). A Cherokee settlement that 
existed, until the removal of 1838, on 
Etowah r., about the present Hightower 
(a corruption of Ft&wti'), in Forsyth co., 
Ga. Another settlement of the same 
name may have been on Hightower cr. 
of Hiwassee r., in Towns co., Ga. —Moonev 
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 522, 1900. 
Hightower.— Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., 144,1887. I'tawa'. —Mooney, op. cit. 
(Cherokee name.) 

Etowah mound. A large artificial mound 
on the n. bank of Etowah r., 3 m. s. e. of 
Cartersville, Bartow co., Ga. With 4 or 5 
smaller mounds it is on a level bottom in a 
bend of the stream, the immediate area, 
covering about 56 acres, flanked on one 
side by an artificial ditch which extends 


in a semicircle from a point on the river 
above to the river below. The large 
mound, which is a quadrilateral truncated 
pyramid, 61 ft. high, has a broad roadway 
ascending the s. side to within 18 or 20 ft. 
of the top, and was formerly provided 
with steps made with crossbeams imbed¬ 
ded in the earth, remains of which were 
visible as late as 1885. The diameters of 
the base are respectively 380 and 330 ft, 
and of the top 170 and 176 ft. The area 
of the base is a little less than 3 acres, and 
of the top about seven-tenths of an acre. 
The solid contents of the mound, including 
the roadway, are about 4,300,000 cu. ft. 
On the e. side there is a narrow exten¬ 
sion from "the summit to the base, which 
appears to have been a sort of refuse 
slide. The village situated here was pos¬ 
sibly the Guaxule of De Soto’s chroni¬ 
clers (1540), and the large mound the one 
mentioned by Garcilasso de la Vega (Flor¬ 
ida, lib. hi, cap. xx, 139, 1723), although 
Mooney.(19th Rep. B. A. E., 520, 1900) 
is of the opin¬ 
ion that Guaxule 
was probably 
about at Nacoo- 
che mound in 
White co. 

The earliest de¬ 
scription of the 
Etowah mound 
in modern times 
is by Cornelius 
(Silliman’s Am. 
Jour. Sci. and 
Art., 1st s., i, 322, 
1818). C. C. 
Jones (Antiq. So. 
Ind., 136, 1873) 
and Whittlesey (Smithson. Rep., 624,1881) 
also describe and illustrate it. A careful 
sui /ey of the large mound and group, and a 
partial exploration of the smaller mounds, 
were made by the Bureau of American Eth¬ 
nology and an account thereof w r as pub¬ 
lished (5th Rep., 95-105,1887; 12th Rep., 
292, 1894). Cornelius states that “the 
Cherokees in their late war with the 
Creeks secured its [the large mound’s] 
summit by pickets and occupied it as a 
place of protection for hundreds of their 
women and children.” The smallest of 
the 3 larger mounds, the surrounding 
space, and 1 or 2 small tumuli have been 
explored. Parts of 3 or 4 stone images, 
copper plates with stamped figures bear¬ 
ing some resemblance to Mexican designs, 
and other copper plates with pieces at¬ 
tached by rivets have been found. Other 
articles, such as pipes, earthenware, copper 
celts, stone plates, etc.., have also been un¬ 
earthed. For further information see the 
works above cited; also Squier and Davis, 
Ancient Monuments, 1852; Thomas (1) 
Burial Mounds of the Northern Section, 



ETOWAH MOUflD, GEORGIA. (HEIGHT, 61 FTJ GREATEST LENGTH OF 
BASE, 380 FT) 








BULL. 30] 


ETSEKIN-EUFAULA 


445 


5th Rep. B. A. E., 1887, (2) Catalogue of 
Prehistoric Works, Bull. B. A. E., 45,1891; 
Holmes in Science, in, 437,1884. (c. t.) 

Etsekin. A winter village of the Kwa- 
kiutl proper on Havannah channel, w. 
coast of British Columbia. 

Et-se-kin.— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 229, 1887. 
Etsi-kin.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. n. 
65,1887. 

Etskainah ( Ets-kai'-nah , ‘horns’). A 
society of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Com¬ 
rades, among the Siksika; it is obsolete 
among the southern Piegan, but still ex¬ 
ists with the northern Piegan and the 
Kainah. It is regarded as having origi¬ 
nated with the latter and extended to the 
other divisions. The Sinopah (Kit-fox) 
society among the southern Piegan is 
practically identical with it. The present 
Etskainah society is said to have taken on 
some of the functions of the Stumiks 
(Bulls), now extinct. The members 
carry a crooked staff and are supposed 
to have magical powers (Wissler, inf’n, 
1906). See Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 221, 1892. 

Etsowish. - simmegee - itshin (‘grizzly- 
bear standing’). A Kalispel chief in the 
first half of the 19th century, baptized by 
Father Be Smet about 1842 or 1843 under 
the name Loyola, by which name he was 
known to the whites. His early history 
is not known, but he was distinguished 
in his later years for his firm adherence 
to the Roman Catholic religion and his 
zealous efforts to lead his people to ob¬ 
serve the teachings of the missionaries 
and the services and ordinances of the 
church. Although strict in repressing 
disorder, Loyola was highly regarded by 
his people, who regarded him as a father. 
He died Apr. 6, 1854, and was succeeded 
by Victor Alamiken, distinct from Victor 
of the Flathead (Salish) tribe of about 
the same period. (e. t. ) 

Ettchaottine (‘people who act contra- 
rily’). A Nahane tribe of which one 
division lives on Francis lake, British 
Columbia, another in the neighborhood 
of old Ft Halkett (Hardisty in Smithson. 
Rep. 1866, 311, 1872) . Their name came 
from their warlike habits. Ross (MS., 
B. A. E.) gave their pop. in 1858 as 435. 
Bad-people.— Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s, 16, 1893. 
’Dtcha-ta-’uttinnne.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., 
n, 6, 1851. Ettcha-ottine. —Petitot, Diet. Dene- 
Dindji6, xx, 1876 (‘people who act contrarily’). 
Mauvais Monde. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 66, 1856. Netsilley.— Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., i, 401,1851. Slave Indians. —Dali, Alaska, 
429,1870. Wild Nation.— Richardson, op. cit. 

Etuck Chukke (‘blue wood’). A for¬ 
mer Choctaw town near East Abeika, 
Kemper co., Miss.—Romans, Fla., 309, 
1775. 

Eudeve. A division of the Opata of 
Sonora, Mexico, inhabiting the divide of 
the Rio Sonora and Rio San Miguel, and 
extending southward from about lat. 30° 


30' to the villages of Matape and Nacori 
on the Rio Matape in lat. 29°, exclusive 
of Ures, which for the greater part was 
a Nevome pueblo, although containing 
some Opata. The language of the Eu¬ 
deve—also called Heve, Dohme, etc.—is 
a dialect of the Opata. Like the other 
Opata, they have almost lost their former 
customs, religion, and habits, and have 
become Mexicanized. Population of the 
division unknown. The villages and set¬ 
tlements that have been mentioned are: 
Alamos, Bacanora, Batuco, Cucurpe, 
Matape, Nacori, Opodepe, Robesco, Sara- 
cachi, Sahuaripa,* Soyopa,* Tepuspe, 
Toape,* and Tonicbi.* Those marked 
with an asterisk were settled in part by 
Nevome. (f. w. h.) 

Batucos.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 344, 1864 (used 
here as a synonym of the language). Cudeves.— 
Cancio (1768) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., ii, 270, 
1856 (misprint). Dohema.—Pimentel, Lenguas 
de Mex., ii, 153,1865 (corruption of dohme , ‘man,’ 
‘ pueblo,’ ‘ nation’). Dohme.—Orozco y Berra, op. 
cit. Egues.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 1352,1736 (doubt¬ 
less identical, although mentioned as distinct 
from Eudeve at leg. 1514). Equi.—Orozco y Berra, 
op. cit. Eudebe.—Ibid., 63. Eudeva. — Ibid. 
Eudeve.—Rivera, op. cit., leg. 1514. Hegue.— 
Orozcoy Berra, op. cit. Hequi.—Ibid.,63. Heve.— 
Ibid., 64. 

Eufaula. A former Upper Creek town 
on Eufaula cr., 5 or 6 m. s. of the present 
town of Talladega, Ala. 

Eufala’s.—Campbell (1836) in H. R. Doc. 274,25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. Eufalee.—Flint, Ind. 
Wars, 202, 1833. Eufaulahatche.—Pickett, Hist. 
Ala., II, 341, 1851. Eufaula Old Town.—Royce in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. cviii, 1899. Eu-fau-lau-hat- 
che.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 42, 1848. Eufau- 
lies.—Finnelson (1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. 
Aff., I, 289, 1832. Euphalau.—Alcedo, Die. Geog., 
ii, 113, 1787. Euphalees.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1797), 
70, 1837. Huphale.—Adair, Am. Inds., 278, 1775. 
Little Eufauly.—Finnelson (1792) in Am. State 
Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 289, 1832. Little Ufala.—Swan 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262,1855. Ufaula.— 
H. R. Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 142, 1838. 
Ufauley.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 371, 1857. 
Uphaulie towns.—Robertson (1793) in Am. State 
Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 467, 1832. Upper Eufalla.— 
U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. Upper Euphau- 
les.—Ibid. (1797), 68. Upper Ufale.—Bartram, 
Travels, 462, 1791. Usauleys.—Cherokee council 
(1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 273, 1832. 
Usawla.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 140, 1836. 
Usawles.—Harris, Voy. and Trav., ii, 385, 1705. 
Yofale.—Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 1 ,134, map, 
1761. Yofate.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 7,1776. 

Eufaula. A former Upper Creek town 
on the w. bank of Tallapoosa r., near the 
site of the present Dadeville, Tallapoosa 
co., Ala. 

Big Ufala.—Swan in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 
262,1855. Eufaula.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
pi. cviii, 1899. Eu-fau-lau. — Hawkins (1799), 
Sketch, 48, 66, 1848. 

Eufaula. A former Lower Creek town 
on the e. bank of Chattahoochee r., 15 
m. below Sawokli, Quitman co., Ga. In 
1799 a portion of its inhabitants settled at 
several points downstream as far as the 
mouth of Flint r.; the settlements here 
made also became known as Eufaula. 
Eufantees.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., n, 26,1888. 
Eufath—Seagrove (1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. 
Aff., I, 311, 1832. Eufaule.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 
4, 29,1848. Eufollahs,—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 


446 


EUFAULA 


EXCHANGE 


[b. a. e. 


vi, 469,1857. Eufowlas.—Woodward, Reminis., 38, 
1859. Lower Enfalla.—Robin, Voy., n, map, 1807. 
lower Enfula.—Jesup (1836) in H. R. Doc. 78,25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 48,1838 (misprint). Lower Ufale.— 
Bartram, Trav., 461, 1791. Nafoli.—Bartram, 
Voy., Benoist trans., i, map, 1799. Ufalees.— 
Holmes (1799) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 386, 
1832. TJfallahs.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 
1822. Ufallays.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 94, 
1848. TJfawlas.—McCall, Hist. Georgia, 1 ,363,1811. 
Ufewles.—Barnard (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. 
Aff., I, 395,1832. Youfalloo.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 
24th Cong., 300, 1836. Yufala.—Romans, Florida, 

I, 280,1775. Yufalis.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 

II, 26,1888. 

Eufaula. A former Lower Creek town 
on the w. bank of Chattahoochee r., in 
Henry co., Ala. 

Eufala Town.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
cviii, 1899. 

Eufaula. A town of the Creek Nation 
on the s. side of Deep fork of Canadian r., 
near Ocmulgee, Ind. T. 

Yufala hupayi. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg, I, 122, 
1884. 

Eufaula. Formerly a town, now a city, 
of the Creek Nation, near the mouth of 
North fork of Canadian r.,on the Mo., 
Kans. and Tex. R. R., Ind. T. 

Yufala.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg.,n, 185, 1888. 

Eulachon. One of the names of the 
candle-fish (Thaleichthys padficus), of the 
family Salmonidse, closely related to the 
smelt: from the name of this fish in one 
of the Chinookan dialects. It is found in 
the waters of the n. Pacific coast of Amer¬ 
ica and is much used by the Indians of 
that region for food and the production 
of grease and oil. Other forms (Christian 
Union, Mar. 22, 1871) are hoolikan and 
oolichan , and Irving (Astoria, ii) cites the 
form utMecan. (a. f. c.) 

Eushtat ( E'-uslitat ). The principal set¬ 
tlement of the Klamath on lower William¬ 
son r., near lower Klamath lake, Klamath 
co., Oreg.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A, 
Ethnol., ii, pt. 2, 32, 1890. 

Evea. A Comanche chief, prominent 
between 1772 and 1778. In June, 1772, 
he went to San Antonio Bexar and rati¬ 
fied a treaty with the governor of Texas. 
Gov. Ripperda, referring to this event in 
a letter of July 4, 1772, called him Evea, 
“capitan” of the Comanche nation, and 
in a letter written the next day he referred 
to him as ‘ ‘ Pubea 6 Evea, principal capi¬ 
tan” of that tribe. He was apparently 
still chief in 1778, for Mezieres tells of 
meeting in Texas a party of Comanche 
under the son of Evea, a chief held in high 
estimation among his people, (h. e. b. ) 

Evil Peace. A village seen by De Soto’s 
army in 1539, between Utinama and Cho- 
lupaha, Fla.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 130, 1850. 

Ewawoos. A Cowichan tribe whose 
town was Skeltem, 2 m. above Hope, 
Fraser r., Brit. Col.; pop. 27 in 1904. 

Ewahoos.—Can. Ind^Aff., 309, 1879. Ewa-woos.— 
Ibid.,1901, pt.2,158. Ewa'wus.—Boas,MS., B. A. E., 


Exchange, media of. Before the arrival 
of Europeans intertribal trade had re¬ 
sulted almost everywhere in America in 
the adoption of certain standards of value 
of which the most important were shell 
beads and skins. The shell currency of 
the Atlantic coast consisted of small •white 
and black or purplish beads cut from the 
valves of quahog and other shells and fa¬ 
miliarly known as wampum, q. v. These 
were very convenient, as they could be 
strung together in quantities and carried 
any distance for purposes of trade, in this 
respect having a decided advantage over 
skins. In exchange two white beads 
were equivalent to one black one. Dur¬ 
ing the early colonial period wampum 
was almost the only currency among 
white people as well; but inferior, poorly 
finished kinds, made not only out of 
shell, but of stone, bone, glass, horn, and 
even wood, were soon introduced, and in 
spite of all attempted regulation the value 
of wampum dropped continually until 
in 1661 it was declared to be legal tender 
no longer in Massachusetts, and a year or 
two later the same fate overtook it in the 
other New England colonies. In New 
York it appears to have held on longer, 
its latest recorded use as currency being 
in 1693. Holm says, speaking of the Del¬ 
awares of New Jersey: “In trade they 
measure those strings [of wampum] by 
their length,” each fathom of them being 
worth 5 Dutch guilders, reckoning 4 beads ~ 
for every stiver. “The brown beads are 
more valued than the others and fetch a 
higher price; a white bead is of the value 
of a piece of copper money, but a brown 
one is worth a piece of silver.” Holm 
quotes another authority, however, to the 
effect that a white bead was worth one 
stiver and a black bead two. The latter 
says also that ‘ ‘ their manner of measuring 
the strings is by the length of their 
thumbs; from the end of the nail to the 
first joint makes 6 beads.” 

On the Pacific coast between s. e. 
Alaska and n. California shell currency 
of another kind was employed. This 
was made from the Dentalium pretiosum 
(money tooth-shell), a slender univalve 
found on the w. coasts of Vancouver and 
Queen Charlotte ids. In the Chinook jar¬ 
gon it was called hiaqua. The principal 
place where it was obtained is said to 
have been the territory of a Nootka tribe, 
the Ehatisaht, in Esperanza inlet, w. coast 
of Vancouver id., but it was collected as 
far n. as Quatsino inlet. The method of 
procuring it is described in one of the ear¬ 
liest accounts of this region, the Narrative 
of John Jewitt. According to Boas, a 
block of cedar was split up at one end so 
that it formed a kind of brush which 
opened when pushed down into the 


BULL. 30] 


EXCHANGE 


447 


water and closed when pulled up, thus 
entangling the shells. These shells were 
valued in proportion to their individual 
lengths. In w. Washington the standard 
of value was 40 to the fathom, and the 
value fell off rapidly above that number, 
while very long single shells were worth 
more than a dollar. A fathom of 40 was 
formerly equivalent to a slave, according 
to Gibbs, and in his time would bring $5. 
In California and on the plateaus farther 
n. the shells had incised designs. Among 
the Hupa of California they are decorated 
by being wrapped spirally with fish skin 
or snake skin, and in addition usually 
bear a tuft of red feathers, probably from 
the woodpecker’s crest. The following 
further description of these is given by 
Goddard: 

‘ ‘ The individual shells are measured 
and their value determined by the creases 
on the left hand. The longest known 
shells were about in. long. One of 
them would reach from the crease of 
the last joint of the little finger to the 
crease on the palm opposite the knuckle 
joint of the same finger. The value of 
such a piece in early days was about $5. 
Shells of this length were called dinket. 
The next smaller shells were called kike- 
tHkixtxoi, and measured about 2f in. 
They were worth about $1.50 each. A 
shell about l£ in. long was called tcwolahit. 
Their value was from 25 to 50 cents. 
Shells smaller than these were not rated 
as money and had no decoration. The 
length of the shells smaller than the first 
mentioned was determined by applying 
them to the creases of the middle and 
other fingers of the left hand. 

“This money was strung on strings 
which reached from the thumb nail to 
the point of the shoulder. Eleven of the 
largest size filled such a string and was 
therefore called moanala. Twelve shells 
of the next smaller size composed a string 
and were called moananax. Thirteen 
shells are called moanatak, and 14 of the 
smallest shells, called moanadink, was the 
largest number placed on a string. These 
strings are approximately 25 in. long. 
This, as it appears, was the least com¬ 
mon multiple of the individual standard 
lengths. 

“Since all hands and arms are not of 
the same length, it was necessary for the 
man, when he reached his maturity, to 
establish the values of the creases on his 
hand by comparison with money of 
known length as measured by someone 
else. He also had a set of lines tattooed 
on the inside of the left forearm. These 
lines indicated the length of 5 shells of 
the several standards. The measures 
were subdivided, there being lines of 
moanala long and moanala short, and so 
on. This was the principal method of 


estimating the money. The first 5 on the 
string were measured by holding the tip 
of the first shell at the thumb nail and 
drawing ttyg string along the arm and 
noting the tattooed mark reached by the 
butt of the fifth shell. In like manner 
the last and intermediate sets of 5 were 
measured.” This shell money was car¬ 
ried in special elk-horn boxes. 

Among the coast tribes isr. of Vancou¬ 
ver id., dentalia were not so much in 
vogue, but were used for ornamental pur¬ 
poses and in trade with the interior Indi¬ 
ans. The standard of value among the 
Kutchakutchin and neighboring tribes 
consisted of lines of beads 7 ft long 
joined together at the distance of a foot, 
and called naki eik (‘ bead clothing ’). The 
whole naki eik , according to Jones, “is 
equal to 24 made beaver, and one of the 
lines is one or more beaver skins, accord¬ 
ing to the value of the beads.” 

In central and s. California circular, 
disk-shaped shell beads were used. 
Among the Maidu they were counted in¬ 
stead of being measured in strings, al¬ 
though for each 10 beads a stick was 
laid down as a counter (Dixon). Ac¬ 
cording to Powers the Miwok rated shell 
beads at $5 a yard, while the Yokuts val¬ 
ued a string reaching from the point of 
the middle finger to the elbow at 25 cents. 
These latter sometimes strung with them 
a section of bone very white and pol¬ 
ished, about 2J in. long, which they rat¬ 
ed at 12£ cents. The Miwok strung to¬ 
gether other shells which Powers be¬ 
lieved to be olivella, valuing them at $1 
a yard, as well as fancy marine shells, 
rated from $3 to $10 or $15 a yard, ac¬ 
cording to their beauty. 

So far inland were these shells carried 
that dentalia were found among the Da¬ 
kota, and it is probable that shells from 
both the Atlantic and the Pacific reached 
the same tribes. 

A more usual standard of value among 
interior people, however, was the pelt, 
especially the skin of the beaver. Even 
on the Atlantic coast it was used from the 
very earliest times side by side with wam¬ 
pum, and in 1613 the statement is made 
that it was the basis of all trade between 
the French of Canada and the Indians. 
In 1670 (Margry, D£c., i, 164, 1878) it is 
learned that a beaver skin was worth a 
fathom of tobacco, a fourth of a pound 
of powder, 6 knives, or a portion of 
little blue beads. According to Hunter 
it was also the standard of value among 
the Osage, Kansa, Oto, Omaha, and their 
neighbors. He adds that 2 good otter 
skins, from 10 to 12 raccoon, or 4 or 5 
wildcat skins were valued at one beaver 
skin. Here this standard passed out 
very rapidly with the coming of white 
men; but in the great fur regions of Can- 


448 


EYAK-EYEISH 


[B. A. E. 


ada it remained the basis of value first 
between French and Indians, and after¬ 
ward between English and Indians. Up 
to the present time everything is valued 
in “skins/’ meaning beaver skins, but 
the term has come to have a fixed value 
of 50 cents in Canadian money. 

In former days, before the arrival of 
the Russians, the unit of value among the 
Eskimo of the lower Yukon was a full 
grown land-otter skin, to which was 
equivalent the skin of the large hair seal. 
This has now given place to the beaver; 
and all other skins, furs, and articles of 
trade are sold as “ a skin ’ ’ and multiples 
and fractions of “a skin.” “In addi¬ 
tion to this,” says Nelson, “certain small, 
untanned skins, used for making fur coats 
or blouses, are tied in lots sufficient to 
make a coat, and are sold in this way. 
It requires 4 skins of reindeer fawns, or 
40 skins of Parry’s marmot or of the 
muskrat for a coat, and these sets are 
known by terms designating these 
bunches.” The pelt of a wolf or wolver¬ 
ene is worth several “skins” in trade, 
while a number of pelts of muskrats or 
Parry’s marmot are required to make the 
value of “a skin.” 

Among the northern tribes in the n. 
Pacific coast area, where dentalia wore not 
so much valued, elk and moose skins seem 
formerly to have constituted one of the 
standards of value, although the skins of 
other animals wore no doubt used to 
some extent as well. In later times all 
these were replaced by blankets intro¬ 
duced by the Hudson’s Bay Company, 
which wore distinguished by points or 
marks on the edge, woven into their tex¬ 
ture, the best being 4-point, the smallest 
and poorest 1-point. The acknowledged 
unit of value, at least among the Haida, 
was a single 2J-point blanket, worth in 
1880 a little more than $1.50, but on the 
coast farther s. it is now rated at about 50 
cents. Everything was referred to this 
unit, according to Dawson, even a large 
4-point blanket being said to be worth so 
many “blankets.” 

Another standard universal in this re¬ 
gion was slaves, and perhaps the remark¬ 
able copper plates should also be men¬ 
tioned, though strictly speaking they 
were legal tender of varying value which 
had to be fixed by means of some other 
standard, such as blankets or slaves. 
Pieces of cedar bark prepared for roofing 
sometimes appear as units of value also. 

By the interior Salish of British Colum¬ 
bia Indian hemp bark was put up in bun¬ 
dles about 2 ft long and 2 in. in diame¬ 
ter, and tied at both ends, and 6 of these 
bundles constituted a “package,” while 
dried salmon was generally sold by the 
“stick,” each stick numbering 100 fish 
(Teit). 


In addition to their dentalia the Hupa 
and the peoples of Klamath r., in n. Cali¬ 
fornia, use scalps of woodpeckers. They 
employ those of both the pileated and 
smaller woodpecker for this purpose, the 
present exchange values of which are now 
$1 and 10 cents, respectively (Goddard). 
According to Bourke, eagle feathers were 
an article of commerce w r ith a determi¬ 
nate value among the Pueblo Indians. 
The Mandan standards were skin corn 
measures of different dimensions which 
were kept in the council lodge; and the 
Arikara measure was a stone mortar. In 
later years an important unit of value on 
the great plains w T as the horse. 

The standards among the Hopi and 
probably other Pueblo tribes were a kind 
of basket tray, a fixed variety of blue 
blanket, and turquoise and shell beads. 

On the Pacific coast canoes were val¬ 
ued according to the length in fathoms, 
but among the Hupa, where the length 
is constant, by their height and breadth, 
the natives providing themselves with 
marks on their legs for this particular pur¬ 
pose. Many other long articles seem to 
have been appraised in the same manner. 

Although incl uding the more prominent 
standards, the foregoing list by no means 
exhausts their number, for w r here articles 
of various kinds were continually bar¬ 
tered, numerous standards of a more or 
less evanescent nature arose. For a list 
of comparative valuations in one tribe 
see Teit, cited below, p. 260. See Bead- 
work, Commerce, Fur-trade, Horses, Meas¬ 
urements, Shellwork, Wampum. 

Consult Bourke, Snake Dance of the 
Moquis, 1885; Chittenden, Am. FurTrade, 
1902; Dawson, Report on Queen Char¬ 
lotte Ids., Geol. Surv. of Can., 1880; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xvn, pt. 3, 1905; Gibbs in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 1877; Goddard in Univ. Cal. 
Publ., Am. Archteol. and Ethnol., 1903; 
Hardesty in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 1872; 
Holm, Descr. New Sweden, 1834; Holmes 
in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 1883; Hunter, Cap¬ 
tivity, 1823; Jewitt, Narrative, 1815; 
Jones in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 1872; 
Loskiel, Missions, 1794; Nelson in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., hi, 1877; Teit, Thompson 
Indians, Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 
1900. (j. r. s.) 

Eyak. An Ugalakmiut Eskimo village 
at the entrance of Prince William sd., 
Alaska; pop. 94 in 1890, 222 in 1900. 
Near by is a cannery called Odiak, where 
273 people live. 

Eyak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Hyacks.— 
Halleck in Rep. Sec. of War. i, pt. 1,1869 (probably 
identical). Ikhiak.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 
29,1884. Odiak.—Moser (18991, quoted by Baker, 
op. cit. 

Eyeish. . A tribe of the Caddo confed¬ 
eracy which spoke a dialect, now practi- 


BULL. 30] 


FABRICS-FACE PAINTING 


449 


cally extinct, very different from the dia¬ 
lects of the other tribes; hence it is prob¬ 
able they were a part of an older confeder¬ 
acy which was incorporated in the Caddo 
when the latter became dominant. The 
early home of the tribe was on Eyeish 
cr. between the Sabine and Neches rs. of 
Texas. Moscoso led his troops through 
their country in 1542, encountering herds 
of buffalo. From the statements of Joutel 
and Douay, the Eyeish were not on good 
terms with the tribes w. of them on the 
Trinity, nor with those on Red r. in the n. 
at the time the French entered their 
country late in the 17th century; but, 
judging from the confusion of names by 
early writers, it is likely that only some 
of the subdivisions or villages were repre¬ 
sented in the war parties. The mission of 
Nuestra Senorade los Dolores (q. v.) was 
established among them by the Francis¬ 
cans who accompanied Don Domingo Ra¬ 
mon on his tour in 1716-17. They were, 
however, very little amenable to Spanish 
influence, for after 50 years of missionary 
effort, the mission register showed, ac¬ 
cording to Solis (MS., cited by H. E. 
Bolton, inf n, 1906), only 11 baptisms, 7 
interments, and 3 marriages performed 
at the mission, although the tribe had 
not been backward in receiving material 
aid from the missionaries. Solis reported 
in 1768 that this tribe was the worst in 
Texas—drunken, thievish, licentious, im¬ 
pervious to religious influence, and dan¬ 
gerous to the missionaries. Their vil¬ 
lages were not far from the road between 
the French post at Natchitoches and the 
Spanish post at Nacogdoches, and the 
tribe was thus exposed to the contentions 
of the period and to the ravages of small¬ 
pox, measles, and other new diseases in¬ 
troduced by the white race. In the lat¬ 
ter part of the 18th century the Eyeish 
were placed under the jurisdiction of the 
officials residing at Nacogdoches; in 1779 
Mezieres stated that there were 20 fami¬ 
lies of the “Ays” and that they were 
hated by both Indians and Spaniards 
(Bolton, op. cit.). In 1785 there were re¬ 
ported to have been 300 “Ahijitos” on 
Atoyac r., opposite the Nacogdoches 
(Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 666, 1886). 
In 1805 Sibley stated that only 20 mem¬ 
bers of the tribe were then living; but in 
1828 (Soc. Geog. Mex., 1870) they were 
said to number 160 families between 
Brazos and Colorado rs. These differ¬ 
ences in the estimates would seem to in¬ 
dicate that the Eyeish were considerably 
scattered during this period. Those who 
survived the vicissitudes which befell the 
Caddo in the 19th century are with their 
kindred on the Wichita res. in Oklahoma. 
Nothing definite is known of their cus¬ 
toms and beliefs, which, however, were 


probably similar to those entertained 
and practised by other tribes of the con¬ 
federacy, and no definite knowledge of 
their divisions and totems has survived. 
While in New Mexico in 1540-41 Coro¬ 
nado learned from a Plains Indian known 
as The Turk, probably a Pawnee, of a 
province or settlement called Ayas, 6 or 
7 days’ journey distant, at which the 
Spanish army could obtain provisions on 
its way to Copala and Quivira. This place 
may have been imaginary, or the Eyeish 
people may have been meant. It was The 
Turk’s intention to lead the Spaniards 
astray, hence locality plays but little part 
in the identification. (a. c. f. ) 

Aas. — Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., pt. II, 412, 1748. 
Aays. —Gentl. of Elvas(1557) in Hakluyt Soc. Pub., 
ix, 136, 1851. Aes. —Rivera, Diario y Derrotero, 
leg. 2165, 1736. Ahiahichi. —Thevenot quoted by 
Shea,Discov., 268,1852. Ahijados. —Freytas,Pena- 
losa (1662), 35, 66,1882. Ahijitos.— Morfi, MS. Hist. 
Tejas, bk. 2, ca. 1781-82. Ahijaos. —Freytas, op. 
cit.,34. Ahyches. —Doc. ca. 1735in Margry ^D6c.,Vl, 
233,1886. Aiaichi. —Marquette, map (1673) in Shea, 
Discov.,1852. A'-ic.— Dorsey,Caddo MS.,B. A. E., 

1882. Aiehes. —La Harpe( 1716) in Margry, D6c.,vi, 
193, 1886. Aijados. —Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
150,1889. Aijaos. —Ibid., 163. Aijas. —Vetancurt 
(ca. 1693),Teatro Mex., in, 303,1871. Ais. —Uhde, 
Lander, 182, 1861. Aise.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, 373, 1822. A'-ish.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 44, 1884. Aix. —Bull. Soc. Geog. Mex., 268, 
1870. Aixai. —Sanson, L’Am^rique, map 27, 1657. 
Aixaj. —Linschoten, Descr. PAmOrique, map 1, 
1638. Aixaos. —Benavides, Memorial, 85, 1630. 
Aizes. —Tex. St. Arch., Nacogdoches, 1832. Ale- 
che.— Schermerhorn(1812)in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
2d s., n, 24,1814. Alich.— Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 101,1856. Aliche. —Sibley (1805), Hist. 
Sketches, 70,1806. Abekas. —McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 80,1854. Alish.— Latham, Essays, 
401, 1860. Alishes. —Brackenridge, Views of La., 
87,1814. Apiches. —Shea, Discov., xxxii, 1852 (mis¬ 
print). Auches. —Garcilasso de la Vega, Fla., 213, 
1723(seemingly thesame). Axtaos.— Onate(1606) 
cited by Prince,N. Mex., 166,1883 (possibly identi¬ 
cal). Ayache. —Flint, Ind. Wars, 30, 1833. Ayas. — 
Mota-Padilla, Hist. delaConq., 164,1742. Ayays. — 
Gentl. of Elvas(1557)in HakluytSoc. Pub., ix, 115, 
1851. Ayche.— La Harpe(1716) in Margry, D6c., 
Vi, 194,1886. Ayches.— Jefferys (1763), Am. Atlas, 
map 5, 1776. Aychis. —Baudry des Lozieres, Voy. 
41a Louisiane,241, 1802. Ayeche. —Gravelin (ca. 
1717) quoted by Winsor, Hist. Am., v, 30, note, 
1887. Ayes. —Villa-Senor (1748) quoted by Busch- 
mann, Spuren. d. azt. Spr.,418,1854. Ayiches. —La 
Harpe(1717) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 48,1851. 
Ayish.— Kennedy, Tex., i, 25, 1841 (the bayou). 
Ayjados.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., in, 169, 
1890. Ayjaos.—Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), Rel., 
in Land of Sunshine, 46, Dec., 1899. Ays. — 
Barcia, Ensayo, 322,1723. Ayses. —Tex. St. Arch., 
census of 1790. Ayzes.— Ibid. Egeish. —Scher- 
merhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., 
II, 24, 1814 (misprint). Eyeish.— Sibley, Hist. 
Sketches, 70, 1806. Eyish.— Brackenridge, Views 
of La., 81, 1815. Haiish.— ten Kate, Reizen in 
N. Am., 374,1885. Hais. —Biedma (1544) in Hak¬ 
luytSoc. Pub., ix, 197,1851. Ha'-ish.— Gatschet, 
Caddo and Yatassi MS., B. A. E., 42. Haychis. — 
Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 410,1878. Hei- 
che. —Brown, West, Gaz., 214, 1817. Yais. —Soc. 
Geog. Mex., 504,1869. Yayecha. —D’Anville, Carte 
des Isles de l’Am6r., 1731. 

Fabrics. See Clothing, Cotton, Feather- 
work, Quillwork, Weaving. 

Face. See Anatomy. 

Face painting. See Adornment, Orna¬ 
ment , Painting, Tattooing. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-29 



450 


FALLACIES 


FAMILY 


[b. a. e. 


Fallacies. See Popular fallacies. 

Faluktabunnee. A Choctaw town, men¬ 
tioned in the treaty of 1805, on the right 
bank of Tombigbee r., in Choctaw co., 
Ala.—Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 749, 
1832; Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
cviii, 1899. 

Fuketcheepoonta.— Am. State Papers, op. cit. 

Family. There are important material 
differences in the organization and in the 
functions of the family as found respec¬ 
tively in savagery, barbarism, and civili¬ 
zation, and even within each of these 
planes of culture several marked types of 
the family, differing radically one from 
another in many characteristic features, 
exist. 

To determine definitely even the main 
organic features of the family systems in 
a majority, not to say all, of the Indian 
tribes n. of Mexico, is not yet possi¬ 
ble, owing to lack of material. In com¬ 
munities like those of the Muskhogean 
and the Iroquoian tribes, in which the 
clan system has been so highly developed, 
two radically different organic groups of 
persons exist to which the term family 
may properly be applied; and within 
each of these groups a more or less com¬ 
plex system of relationships definitely 
fixes the status of every person, a status 
that, acquired by birth or adoption, deter¬ 
mines the civil or other rights, immunities, 
and obligations of the person. Among 
the Iroquois the ohwachira (the common 
Iroquoian name for the maternal blood 
family) was becoming merged into the 
clan (q. v.), so that in specific cases the two 
are virtually identical, although in other 
cases several ohwachira are comprised 
under one clan. The term ohwachira is 
common to all the known dialects of the 
Iroquoian stock. On the other hand there 
are found in these dialects several differ¬ 
ent names designating the group called a 
clan, seemingly indicating the proba¬ 
bility that the family as an institution 
existed long before the development of 
the clan organization, when the several 
tribes still had a common history and 
tradition. But it is not strictly accurate 
to call an ohwachira a family, or a clan a 
family. The first and larger group in¬ 
cludes the entire body of kindred of some 
one person, who is usually denominated 
the propositus. 

In view of the rights and obligations of 
the father’s clan to a person, in addition 
to those inherited from the clan of the 
mother, it appears that the family group 
among the Iroquois and Muskhogean 
tribes is composed of the maternal and 
paternal clans. The clan owes the child 
of its son certain civil and religious rights, 
and is bound to the child by obligations 
which vitally concern the latter’s life and 
welfare, present and future. The youth’s 


equipment for life would not be regarded 
as complete were the performance of 
these clan duties neglected. The tutelar 
of every person is named and made by 
the members of the paternal clan. The 
duties just mentioned do not end with 
the death of the person; if occasioned by 
war or by murder the loss must be made 
good by the paternal clan supplying a 
prisoner or the scalp of an enemy. 

Some of the duties and obligations of 
the clan or clans whose sons have taken 
wives from a clan stricken by death are to 
condole with it, prepare the death feasts, 
provide suitable singers to chant the 
dirges at .the wake lasting one or more 
nights, guard and care for the body lying 
in state and prepare it for burial, make 
the bark burial case or wooden coffin, 
construct the scaffold or dig the grave, 
and to perform all the other needful 
duties due from clans bound together by 
marriage. It was regarded as unseemly 
for the stricken clan to do anything but 
mourn until the body of the dead had 
been placed in its final resting place and 
until after the feast of ‘ ‘ reassociating with 
the public,” held ten days subsequent to 
the death of the deceased, at which his 
property was divided among his heirs 
and friends. In case of the death of a 
chief or other noted person the clan 
mourned for an entire year, scrupulously 
refraining from taking part in public 
affairs until the expiration of this period 
and until after the installation of a suc¬ 
cessor to the dead officer. During the 
interim the bereaved clan was represented 
by the clan or clans bound to it by the 
ties of marriage and offspring. 

These two clans are exogamic groups, 
entirely distinct before the child’s birth, 
and form two subdivisions of a larger 
group of kindred—the family—of which 
any given person, the propositus, is the 
focal point or point of juncture. Strictly 
speaking, both clans form incest groups 
in relation to him. Every member of 
the community is therefore the point of 
contact and convergence of two exogamic 
groups of persons, for in these communi¬ 
ties the clan is exogamic; that is to say, 
each is an incest group in so far as its 
own members are concerned. Within 
these clans or exogamic groups the mem¬ 
bers are governed by rules of a more or 
less complex system of relationships, 
which fix absolutely the position and 
status of everyone in the group, and the 
clan is thus organized and limited. 
Those, then, who have common blood 
with one another, or with a third person, 
belong to the same family and are kin¬ 
dred. Both of these clans owe the off¬ 
spring the rights and obligations of kin¬ 
dred, but in differing degrees. Thus a 
person may be said to have two clans, in 


BULL. 30] 


FAMILY 


451 


some measure—that of his mother and that 
of his father. Both clans exercise rights 
and are bound by obligations to the house¬ 
hold of which he is a member; both have, 
moreover, in different measure, the 
rights and obligations of kinship to him. 

The second and smaller group, the fire¬ 
side or household, includes only the hus¬ 
band, his wife or wives, and their chil¬ 
dren. Where there are several wives 
from several different families, this group 
in its family relations becomes very in¬ 
tricate, but is nevertheless under the rigid 
control of family law and usage. 

It is thus apparent that these two groups 
of persons are in fact radically distinct, 
for the lesser group is not merely a por¬ 
tion of the larger. The relative status of 
the husband and his wife or wives and 
their children makes this evident. 

Custom, tradition, and the common law 
do not regard the wife or wives of the 
household as belonging to the clan of the 
husband. By marriage the wife acquires 
no right of membership in her husband’s 
clan, but remains a member of her own 
clan, and, equally important, she trans¬ 
mits to her children the right of mem¬ 
bership in her clan; and she acquires no 
rights of inheritance of property either 
from her husband or from his clan. On 
the other hand, the husband acquires no 
rights from his wife or from her clan, and 
he, likewise, does not become a member 
of his wife’s clan. 

But the fireside, or household, is the 
product of the union by marriage of two 
persons of different clans, which does not 
establish between the husband and wife 
the mutual rights and obligations arising 
from blood feud and from inheritance. 
It is precisely these mutual rights and 
obligations that are peculiarly character¬ 
istic of the relations between clansmen, 
for they subsist only between persons of 
common blood, whether acquired by birth 
or by adoption. Therefore, husband and 
wife do not belong to the same clan or 
family. 

As there is a law of the clan or exogamic 
kinship group governing acts and rela¬ 
tions as between members of the same 
clan group, so there are rules and usages 
governing the household or fireside and 
defining the rights and obligations be¬ 
longing to its jurisdiction. The relations 
of the various members of the fireside are 
affected by the fact that every member 
of it is directly subject to the general rule 
of the clan or higher kinship group—the 
husband to that of his clan, the wife or 
wives to those of their respective clans, 
and the children to those of both parents, 
but in different kind and degree. 

The dominating importance of the fam¬ 
ily in the social organization of a primitive 
people is apparent; it is one of the most 


vital institutions founded by private law 
and usage. In such a community every 
member is directly obligated to the 
family, first of all, for the protection that 
safeguards his welfare. The members of 
the family to which he belongs are his 
advocates and his sureties. In the grim 
blood feud the family defends him and 
his cause, even with their lives, if need be, 
and this care ends not with his death, for 
if he be murdered the family avenges his 
murder or exacts payment therefor. In 
the savage and barbaric ages, even to the 
beginning of civilization, the community 
placed reliance largely on the family for 
the maintenance of order, the redress of 
wrongs, and the punishment of crime. 

Concerned wholly with the intimate 
relations of private life, family custom 
and law are administered within the 
family and by its organs; such customs 
and laws constitute daily rules of action, 
which, with their underlying motives, 
embody the common sense of the com¬ 
munity. In a measure they are not with¬ 
in the jurisdiction of public enactment, 
although in specific cases the violation of 
family rights and obligations incurs the 
legal penalties of tribal or public law, and 
so sometimes family government comes 
into conflict with public law and welfare. 
But by the increasing power of tribal or 
public law through centralization of 
power and political organization the in¬ 
dependence of the family in private feuds, 
regarded as dangerous to the good order 
of the community, is gradually limited. 
And when the family becomes a unit or 
is absorbed in a higher organization the 
individual acquires certain rights at the 
expense of the family—the right of appeal 
to the higher tribunal is one of these. 

The wealth and power of a clan or fam¬ 
ily depend primarily on the dearth or 
abundance of its numbers. Hence the 
loss of a single person is a great loss, and 
there is need that it be made good by re¬ 
placing the departed with another or by 
many others, according to the relative 
standing and importance of the person to 
be restored. For example, Aharihon, an 
Onondaga chieftain of the 17th century, 
sacrificed 40 men to the shade of his 
brother to show the great esteem in 
which he held him. But among the Iro¬ 
quois the duty of restoring the loss does 
not devolve directly on the stricken clan 
or exogamic kinship group, but upon 
all allied to it by the ties of what is 
termed hontonrtishon' —i. e., upon those 
whose fathers are clansmen of the per¬ 
son to be replaced. So the birth or the 
adoption of many men in a clan or ex¬ 
ogamic kinship group is a great advan¬ 
tage to it; for although these men become 
separated through the obligation of mar¬ 
rying into clans or such groups other than 


452 


FAMILY 


[B. a. e. 


their own, the children of such unions 
are bound in a measure to the clan or 
exogamic kinship group of their fathers. 
This is a principle so well established 
that the chief matron of the paternal clan 
or exogamic kinship might oblige these 
offspring of diverse households (as many 
as might suffice) to go to war in fulfil¬ 
ment of their obligation, as seemed good 
to her; or she might stop them if they 
wished to undertake a war which was 
not, from its expediency, pleasing to her 
and her advisers. Therefore this chief 
matron, having decided that the time was 
at hand “to raise again the fallen tree” 
or “to put back on the vacant mat” one 
of the clan whom death removed, would 
inform one of the children whose fathers 
were her clansmen, their honthonni’, that 
it was her desire that he form and lead 
a war party against their enemies for the 
purpose of securing a prisoner or a scalp 
for the purpose named. The person whom 
she selected was one judged most capable 
of executing her commission. This was 
soon accomplished. She enforced and 
confirmed this commission with a belt of 
wampum. So powerful was this chief 
matron of a clan that when the council 
chiefs did not favor the designs of certain 
ambitious war chiefs in raising levies for 
military purposes, fearing that they might 
injure the best interests of the tribe, one 
of the surest methods they might employ 
to frustrate these enterprises was to win 
the chief matrons of the clans whose 
clansmen were the fathers of the recruits 
from the other clans, for these chief 
matrons had only to interpose their influ¬ 
ence and authority to bring to naught 
the best concerted designs and enterprises 
of these ambitious war chiefs. This is 
ample evidence that these women had 
an influence in some degree exceeding 
that of the council of the ancients and 
tribal chiefs. 

In the blood feud the paternal kin did 
not interfere except by counsel; but to 
avenge the death of a clansman of their 
father was an obligation. Outlaws were 
denied family and tribal rights. The re¬ 
nunciation of clan kinship entailed the 
loss of every right and immunity inhering 
in kinship. The fundamental concept in 
the organic structure of the family with 
its rights, immunities, and obligations is 
that of protection. To exercise the right 
of feud was lawful only to avenge the 
guilty murder of a clansman. 

The clan or family was made useful by 
the tribe as a police organization, through 
which control was exercised over lawless 
men who otherwise were beyond re¬ 
straint. Every clan had jurisdiction over 
the lives and property of its members, 
even to the taking of life for cause. 

The mutual obligations of kindred 
subsist between persons who can act for 


themselves; but there are duties of pro¬ 
tection by these toward those who can 
not act for themselves for any reason 
whatever, for it is a principle of human¬ 
ity that they who are legally independ¬ 
ent should protect those who are legally 
dependent. The modern law of guard¬ 
ianship of minors and imbeciles is evi¬ 
dently but a survival and extension of 
this obligation of protection in the primi¬ 
tive family and clan. 

Speaking generally of the tribes of the 
N. W. coast, S want on (Am. Anthrop., n. s., 
vn, no. 4, 1905) says that in addition to 
the . “ husband, wife, and children, a 
household was often increased by a num¬ 
ber of relations who lived with the house 
owner on almost equal terms, several 
poor relations or prot4g£s who acted as 
servants, and on the n. Pacific coast as 
many slaves as the house owner could 
afford or was able to capture. ’ ’ 

In tribes where a clan or gentile organi¬ 
zation similar to that of the Iroquoian and 
the Muskhogean tribes does not exist, it 
is known that the incest groups on the 
maternal and the paternal sides are largely 
determined by the system of relation¬ 
ships, which fixes the position and status 
of every person within an indefinite 
group, and the incest group is reckoned 
from each propositus. That is to say, 
marriage and cohabitation may not sub¬ 
sist between persons related to each other 
within prescribed limits on both the ma¬ 
ternal and paternal sides, although kin¬ 
ship may be recognized as extending 
beyond the prescribed limit. Among the 
Klamath these relationships are defined 
by reciprocal terms defining the relation 
rather than the persons, just as the term 
“cousin” is employed between cousins. 

In speaking of the fierce, turbulent, 
and cruel Athapascan tribes of the valley 
of the Yukon, Kirkby (Smithson. Rep. 
1864, 1865), says: “There is, however, 
another division among them, of a more 
interesting and important character than 
that of the tribes just mentioned. Irre¬ 
spective of tribe they are divided into 
threeclasses, termed, respectively,Chit-sa, 
Nate-sa, and Tanges-at-sa, faintly repre¬ 
senting the aristocracy, the middle classes, 
and the poorer orders of civilized nations, 
the former being the most wealthy and the 
latter the poorest. In one respect, how¬ 
ever, they greatly differ, it being the rule 
for a man not to marry in his own, but to 
take a wife from either of the other 
classes. A Chit-sa gentleman will marry 
a Tanges-at-sa peasant without the least 
feeling infra dig. The offspring in every 
case belong to the class of the mother. 
This arrangement has had a most bene¬ 
ficial effect in allaying the deadly feuds 
formerly so frequent among them.” As 
no further data are given, it is impossible 
to say what, if any, was the internal 


BULL. 30] 


FARAON 


FASTING 


453 


structure and organization of these three 
exogamic classes, with female descent, 
mentioned above. Apparently a similar 
social organization existed among the 
Natchez, but no detailed information on 
the subject is available. 

See Adoption , Captives , Clan and Gens , 
Government , Labor , Kinship , Marriage , 
Slavery , Social organization , IFbrwer?. 

(j. N. b. h. ) 

Faraon (‘ Pharaoh’). A tribe of Apache. 
From references in early Spanish writings 
to the “Apache hordes of Pharaoh,” it is 
assumed that the name of the Faraon 
Apache was thus derived. This tribe, 
no longer known by name, seems to have 
formed the s. division of the Querecho 
of Coronado (1541), the Vaqueros of 
Benavides (1630) and other 17th century 
writers, and part at least of the Llaneros 
of more recent times. Their principal 
range was that part of New Mexico lying 
between the Rio Grande and the Pecos, 
although their raids extended beyond 
this area. Nothing is known of their 
ethnic relations, but judging from their 
habitat, they were probably more closely 
related to the Mescaleros than to any 
other of the Apache tribes, if indeed they 
were not a part of them. They made 
numerous depredations against the Span¬ 
ish and Pueblo settlements of the Rio 
Grande in New Mexico, as well as in 
Chihuahua, and fora time at least their 
principal rendezvous was the Sandia mts. 
in the former territory. Several expedi¬ 
tions were led against them by the Spanish 
authorities, and treaties of peace were 
made, but these did not prove to be bind¬ 
ing. According to Orozco y Berra (Geog., 
59, 1864) their divisions were Ancavistis, 
Jacomis,Orejones,Carlanes,andCuampes, 
but of these the Carlanes at least belonged 
to the Jiearillas. (f. w. h. ) 

Apache hoards of Pharaoh. —Doc. of 1714 quoted by 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 232, 1889. Apaches 
Faraones. —Autos de guerra (1704) quoted by Ban- 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 183,1890. Apaches 
Farones.— Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., n, 
265,1850. Apaches Pharaones. —Rivera, Diario, leg. 
784, 1736. Apaches Taraones. —Bandelier, Gilded 
Man, 253, 1893 (misprint). Faraona.— Doc. of 1714 
quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 
180, 1890. Faraon Apaches. —Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 223, 1889. Faraones. —Villa-Senor, Thea- 
tro Am., pt. 2, 416, 17.48. Fardones. —Humboldt, 
Kingd. of N. Sp., II, 238,1822 (misprint). Farreon 
Apaches. —Vargas (1694) quoted by Davis, Span. 
Conq. N. Mex., 396, 1869. Intujen-ne.— Escudero, 
Noticias Estad.de Chihuahua, 212,1834 (misprint). 
Pharaona.— Valverde (1720) quoted bv Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, V, 184, 1890. Pharaones.— 
Rivera, Diario, leg. 950,1736. Southern Apaches. — 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 183, 1890. 
Taracone. —Villa-Sefior, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 416, 
1748. Taraones. —Mota-Padilla. Hist, de la Con- 
quista, 516,1742. Tarracones. —Domenech, Deserts 
of N. Am., ii, 7,1860. Yuta-jenne. —Orozcoy Berra, 
Geog., 59, 1864. 

Far Indians. A general term used by 
English writers about the beginning of 
the 18th century to designate the Indians 
of any tribe remote from the English set¬ 


tlements of the n. Atlantic coast. It was 
applied more especially to the tribes of 
the upper great lakes and to the Shawnee 
before their removal from the S. The 
word occurs also as “Farr.” (j. m.) 

Farmers Band. A Dakota division, 
probably of the Mdewakanton, whose 
habitat was below L. Traverse, Minn. 

Civilized Farmers.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 100, 1860. 
Iasica.—Hinman, MS. notes, B. A. E., 1881. Farm¬ 
ers’ band.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 68,1860. New civilized 
band.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859,102,1860. Saopi.— Gale, 
Upper Miss., 252, 1867 (probably misprint for 
Taopi). Taopi’s band.—McKusick in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 315, 1863. 

Farmer’s Brother. A Seneca chief, 
known among his people as Honanya- 
wus, of vulgar meaning, born in 1716, or 
1718, or 1732, according to varying au¬ 
thorities; died in 1814 (Drake, Biog. and 
Hist. Inds., bk. v, 108,1837; Haines, Am. 
Indian, 579, 1888). He is often men¬ 
tioned in connection with Red Jacket, but 
does not appear to have come into promi¬ 
nence until about 1792. One of his most 
celebrated speeches was delivered before 
a council at Genesee r., N. Y., in 1798. 
He signed the treaties of Genesee, Sept. 
15, 1797, and Buffalo cr., June 30, 1802. 
He espoused the cause of the United States 
in the war of 1812, and although 80 years 
of age engaged actively in the strife and was 
present in the action near Ft George, N. Y., 
Aug. 17,1813. He died soon after the bat¬ 
tle of Lundy’s Lane and was buried with 
military honors by the fifth regiment of 
U. S. infantry. Farmer’s Brother was 
always an advocate of peace and more 
than once prevented his tribe from going 
on the warpath. (c. t. ) 

Fasting. A rite widely observed among 
the Indians and practised both in private 
and in connection with public ceremonies. 
The first fast took place at puberty, when 
the youth was sometimes sent to a seques¬ 
tered place and remained alone, fasting 
and praying from 1 to 4 days, or even 
longer (see Child life). At this time or 
during similar fasts which followed, he 
was supposed to see in a dream the object 
which was to be his special medium of 
communication with the supernatural. 
Simple garments or none were worn when 
fasting. Among some tribes clay was put 
upon the head, and tears were shed as 
the appeals were made to the unseen pow¬ 
ers. At the conclusion of a long fast the 
quantity of food taken was regulated for 
several days. It was not uncommon for 
an adult to fast, as a prayer for success, 
when about to enter upon an important 
enterprise, as war or hunting. Fasting 
was also a means by which occult power 
was believed to be acquired; a shaman 
had to fast frequently in order to be able 
to fulfill the duties of his office. 

Initiation into religious societies was 
accompanied by fasting, and in some of 


454 


FAX 


•FEASTS 


[b. a. e. 


the great ceremonies all the principal ac¬ 
tors were obliged to fast prior to taking 
part. The length of these fasts varied 
with the ceremony and the tribe, and 
ranged from midnight to sunset, or con¬ 
tinued 4 days and nights. Fasting gen¬ 
erally included abstinence from water 
as well as food. The reason for fasting 
has been explained by a Cherokee priest 
as “a means to spiritualize the human 
nature and quicken the spiritual vision 
by abstinence from earthly food. ’ ’ Other 
tribes have regarded it as a method by 
which to remove “the smell” of the 
common world. Occasionally chiefs or 
leaders have appointed a tribal fast in 
order to avert threatening disaster. See 
Feasts. 

Consult Dorsey and Voth in Field Co¬ 
lumbian Mus. Publ., Anthrop. ser., hi, 
1900-03; Fewkes (1) in Jour. Am. Ethnol. 
and Archaeol., iv, 1894, (2) in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1900; Matthews in Mem. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, 1902; Mooney in 
19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900. (a. c. f.) 

Fax. A former Chumashan village near 
Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara co., 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 
1861. 

Feasts. Among all tribes there were 
feasts, ranging in importance from that of 
the little child to its playmate up to those 
which were a part of the great sacred 
ceremonies. These so-called feasts were 
never elaborate and were simply served, 
each portion being ladled from the kettle 
by the hostess, or by one appointed for 
the task. 

Feasts were held at stated times. On 
the n. Pacific coast the coming of the 
salmon was celebrated in a feast of thanks¬ 
giving by all. the tribes able to secure 
the fish from inlets or rivers. Farther s. 
the ripening of acorns and other fruits 
w as similarly observed. The maturing of 
the maize was the occasion for tribal fes¬ 
tivities; at that time the Creeks held 
their 8-days’ ceremony known as the 
Busk (q. v.), when the new corn was 
eaten, the new fire kindled, new garments 
worn, and all past enmities forgiven. In 
November, when the Eskimo had gath¬ 
ered their winter store, they held a feast, 
at which time gifts were exchanged; 
by this a temporary relationship was 
formed between the giver and taker, 
which tended to good feeling and fellow¬ 
ship. During the full moon of Decem¬ 
ber the Eskimo held a feast to which 
the bladders of animals killed during the 
year were brought. These were “sup¬ 
posed to contain the inuas, or shades of 
the animals. ’ ’ On the sixth and last day 
the bladders were taken out to a hole 
made in the ice, and thrust into the water 
under the ice. They “were supposed 
to swim far out to sea and then enter 


the bodies of unborn animals of their 
kind, thus becoming reincarnated and 
rendering game more plentiful ’ ’ (Nelson). 
Among the Iroquois a feast was held to 
keep the medicine alive. Religious cere¬ 
monies to insure fruitfulness took place 
at the planting of the maize, at which 
time a feast was held. 

Feasts were given on the completion of 
a house, at a marriage, and when a child 
was named. Feasts in honor of the dead 
were widely observed. The time which 
must elapse after a death before the feast 
could be given varied among the tribes. 
Among some of the Plains Indians it oc¬ 
curred after 4 days, with the Iroquois after 
10 days, and with other tribes after nearly 
a year. The Eskimo held their memo¬ 
rial feast late in November. The near 
relatives were the hosts, and the dead 
were supposed to be present beneath the 
floor of the dwelling where they enjoyed 
the festivities in their honor, partaking 
of the food and water cast there for them, 
and receiving the clothing put as a gift 
upon their namesakes. At the feast for 
the dead held by the tribes on the n. 
Pacific coast, the spirits of the departed 
were also supposed to be present, but the 
portions of food intended for them were 
passed through the fire and reached them 
in this manner. The Huron held their 
ceremonial feast in the fall, when all who 
had died during the year were disinterred 
by their kindred, the flesh stripped from 
the bones, and these wrapped in new 
robes and laid in the clan burial pit. 
The feast was one of tribal importance and 
was accompanied with religious rites. 

It was incumbent on an aspirant to 
tribal honor to give feasts to the chiefs, 
and one who desired initiation into a so¬ 
ciety must provide feasts for the society. 
Respect to chiefs and leading men was 
expressed by a feast. On such an occa¬ 
sion the host and his family did not eat 
with their guests; they provided the food 
and the dishes, but the head chief ap¬ 
pointed one of the guests to act as server. 
At all feasts the host was careful not to 
include in the food or the dishes used 
anything that would be tabu to any of 
his guests; a failure to observe this im¬ 
portant point would be considered an 
insult. 

The meetings of secular societies 
among the Plains tribes, whether the 
membership was of one or both sexes, 
were always accompanied with a feast. 
There was no public invitation, but the 
herald of the society went to each lodge 
and gave notice of the meeting. The 
food was provided by the family at 
whose lodge the society met, or by cer¬ 
tain other duly appointed persons. The 
preparation for the feast varied in differ¬ 
ent societies within the same tribe. In 


BULL. 30] 


FEATHERWORK 


455 


some instances the food was brought 
ready cooked to the lodge, in others it 
was prepared in the presence of the as¬ 
sembly. The people brought their own 
eating vessels, for at these feasts one had 
to eat all that was served to him or take 
what was left to his home. 

In most tribal ceremonies sacred feasts 
occurred, for which certain prescribed 
food was prepared and partaken of with 
special ceremony. Feasts of this kind 
often took place at the close of a cere¬ 
mony, rarely at the beginning, although 
sometimes they marked a particular stage 
in the proceedings. Among the Iroquois, 
and perhaps other tribes, the owner 
feasted his fetish (q. v.), and the cere¬ 
mony of the calumet (q. v.), according 
to early writers, was always concluded 
with a feast, and was usually accompanied 
by an exchange of presents. 

Among the Omaha and cognates there 
was a gathering called “the fire-place 
feast.’’ A company of young men or of 
young women, never of both sexes, met 
together by invitation of one of their 
number. When the company took their 
places around the fire, a space at the w. 
was left, where a bowl and spoon were 
placed to represent the presence of Wa- 
kanda, the giver of food. 

At every feast of any kind, on any 
occasion where food was to be eaten, a 
bit or small portion was first lifted to the 
zenith, sometimes presented to the four 
cardinal points, and then dropped upon 
the earth at the edge of the fire or into 
the fire. During this act, which was an 
offering of thanks for the gift of food, 
every one present remained silent and 
motionless. See Etiquette , Fasting , Food, 
Potlatch. 

Consult Dorsey and Yoth in Field 
Columbian Mus. Publ., Anthrop. ser., hi, 
1900-03; Fewkes in 15th, 16th, and 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1897-1900; Fletcher in 
Publ. Peabody Museum; Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., i, 177, 1884; Hoffman in 7th 
and 14th Reps. B. A. E., 1891,1896; Jenks 
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900; Jesuit Rela¬ 
tions, Thwaites ed., i-lxxiii, 1896-1901; 
Matthews in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
vi, 1902; Mindeleff in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
1898; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 357, 
1899. (a. c. f.) 

Featherwork. The feathers of birds en¬ 
tered largely into the industries, decora¬ 
tions, war, and worship of the Indians. 
All common species lent their plumage 
on occasion, but there were some that 
were especially sought: in the Arctic re¬ 
gions, water birds during their annual 
migrations; the eagle everywhere; wild 
turkeys in their habitat; ravens and flick¬ 
ers on the n. Pacific coast; woodpeckers, 
meadow larks, crested quail, mallard 
ducks, jays, blackbirds, and orioles in 


California; and in the Pueblo region, 
eagles, hawks, turkeys, and parrots espe¬ 
cially. The prominent species in every 
area were used. 

Not willing to depend on the fortunes 
of the hunt, the Pueblo and Virginia In¬ 
dians held eagles and turkeys in captivity 
until such time as their feathers were 
wanted. Property right in eagles of cer¬ 
tain localities were recognized by the 
Pueblos. In the Arctic regions parkas 
were made of bird skins sewed together, 
the feathers forming an excellent barrier 
against the cold. To the southward the 
skins of young waterfowl, while covered 
with down, were sewed together for robes. 
The historic tribes of the E. cut bird skins 
into strips and wove them into blankets in 
the same way that the western tribes 
used rabbit skins. In the turkey robes 
described by Capt. John Smith and other 
early explorers the pretty feathers of these 
birds were tied in knots to form a network, 
out of which beautiful patterned cloaks 
were wrought. Fans and other acces¬ 
sories of dress were made of wings or 
feathers by the Iroquois and other tribes. 
The uses of feathers in decoration were 
numberless. The Western Eskimo sewed 
little sprays of down into the seams of 
garments and bags made of intestinal 
membranes, and the California Indians 
decorated their exquisite basketry in the 
same manner. The quills of small birds, 
split and dyed, were used for beautiful 
embroidery and basketry in the same 
way as porcupine quills. For giving 
directness to the flight of arrows, feathers 
were usually split so that the halves could 
be tied or glued to the shaftment in twos 
or threes. Among the Eskimo and some 
of the southwestern Indians the feathers 
were laid on flat. Among California 
tribes bird scalps were used as money, 
being both a standard of value and a me¬ 
dium of exchange. The most striking 
uses of feathers w r ere in connection with 
social customs and in symbolism. The 
masks and the bodies of performers in 
ceremonies of the n. Pacific coast were 
copiously adorned with down. Feathers 
worn by the Plains tribes in the hair in¬ 
dicated rank by their kind and number, 
or by the manner of mounting or notch¬ 
ing. The decoration of the stein of the 
calumet (q. v.) was of feathers, the col¬ 
ors of which depended on the purpose for 
which the calumet was offered. Whole 
feathers of eagles were made into war- 
bonnets, plumes, and long trails for 
dances and solemnities. In the Pueblo 
region feathers played an important role 
in symbolism and worship—prayer- 
sticks, wands, altar decorations, and as¬ 
pergills were made of them. The downy 
feather was to the mind of the Indian a 
kind of bridge between the spirit world 


456 


FEATURES 


FETISH 


[b. a. e. 


and ours. Creation and other myths 
spring out of feathers. 

Feather technic in its highest develop¬ 
ment belongs to South America, Central 
America, and Polynesia, but there is con¬ 
tinuity in the processes from the n. part of 
America southward. See Adornment, Art, 
Clothing, Color symbolism, Eagle, Exchange, 
Horse, Ornament, Quillwork, Weaving. 

Consult Bancroft, Native Races, i-v, 
1874-75; Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 1888; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, 
pt. 3, 1905; Goddard in Publ. Univ. Cal., 
Am. Archseol. and Ethnol., i, 1903; 
Holmes (1) in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 1888, 
(2) in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Mallery 
in 10th Rep. B. A. E., 1893; Mason (1) in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1902, 1904, (2) in Smith- 
son. Rep. 1886, 1889; Murdoch in 9th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1899; Turner in 11th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1894; Winship in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1896. (o. t. m.) 

Features. See Anatomy. 

Fejiu. A prehistoric pueblo of the 
Tewa at the site of the present town of 
Abiquiu, on the Rio Chama, Rio Arriba 
co., N. Mex. 

Fe-jiu.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, IV, 54, 
1892. Fe-jyu.—Ibid.,55. 

Fermentation. Instances are few among 
the North American tribes of the employ¬ 
ment of fermentation for a definite pur¬ 
pose. The phenomena of the “turn¬ 
ing ’ ’ or souring of cooked vegetal food or 
of ripe fruit must frequently have been 
observed, but the isolation of a pure cul¬ 
ture, the starting and control of its action 
to furnish a desired product or result, was 
practically unknown. The rare examples 
of primitive American brewing and yeast 
making, however, are instructive as bear¬ 
ing on the development of the knowledge 
of the process of fermentation. Some 
Californian tribes prepare manzanita cider 
by mashing the berries of the Arctosto- 
phylos manzanita, collecting the juice 
and allowing it to ferment from natural 
causes—by means of minute organisms, 
such as yeast and bacteria, which are con¬ 
stantly present in human surroundings 
and for which the juice of ripened fruit 
presents a proper medium. This, how¬ 
ever, was perhaps not knowingly used as 
a fermented drink or intoxicant in abo¬ 
riginal times. A step in advance of this 
is observed in the preparation of tiswin 
by the Apache of Arizona; corn is soaked, 
sprouted, dried, and ground, and this is 
mixed in water and kept in a warm place 
to ferment, producinga kind of beer. The 
fermenting agent is natural, as in the case 
of the manzanita cider, but the production 
of malt as a culture for the yeast germs 
seems to indicate that tiswin is not an 
Apache invention. The Apache also fer¬ 
ment pine bark by a process more primitive 


than that employed in the manufacture of 
tiswin. In the crude fermentations de¬ 
scribed, the Indians have learned to put 
their brew in a jar long used for the pur¬ 
pose, and thus retaining in its pores the 
organisms causing fermentation. What 
appears to be an approach to the discovery 
of beer is found in the sour corn gruel made 
by the Cherokee and other southern tribes, 
and by the Huron and other tribes of the 
N. This is a thin gruel of corn meal and 
water allowed to sour. It was a popular 
food, and there is no evidence that it had 
an intoxicating effect. Among the Pue¬ 
blos is found the highest advance in the 
process of fermentation—the preparation 
and preservation of yeast for bread mak¬ 
ing. This is made by retaining corn 
meal in the mouth for several hours, 
when the magma is ejected into the food 
mass designed to be fermented. By this 
method the starch of the corn meal is acted 
on by the ptyalin of the saliva, rendering 
it a culture medium for the yeast which, 
'once “set,” continues its action in¬ 
definitely. The Zuni have discovered 
that by means of salt and lime this saliva 
yeast may be preserved for future use. 
Saliva yeast was known to most beer¬ 
drinking agricultural tribes of the Old 
World; in America it is known to various 
tribes of s. Mexico and of Central and 
South America, but so far as known the 
Pueblos and neighboring tribes are the 
only ones in northern America acquainted 
with its use. See Food. 

Consult Cushing, Zuni Breadstuff, The 
Millstone, ix, x, Indianapolis, 1884-85; 
Goddard in Univ. of Cal. Publ., Am. 
Archseol. and Ethnol., i, 1903; Hrdlicka, 
Tesvino among the White River Apaches, 
Am. Anthrop., vi, 190, 1904. (w. h.) 

Fesere. A prehistoric pueblo of the 
Tewa on a mesa w. or s. of the Rio 
Chama, near Abiquiu, Rio Arriba co., N. 
Mex. 

Fe-se-re.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 58, 
1892. 

Fetish (Portuguese: feitiqo, ‘a charm’, 
‘sorcery’, ‘enchantment’ (whence the 
English fetish); adjective, ‘made by art’, 
‘artificial’, ‘skilfully contrived’; Latin 
factitious, ‘ made by art’, ‘ artful by magic’). 
Among the American Indians an object, 
large oi small, natural or artificial, re¬ 
garded as possessing consciousness, voli¬ 
tion and immortal life, and especially 
orenda (q. v.), or magic power, the essen¬ 
tial characteristic, which enables the ob¬ 
ject to accomplish, in addition to those 
that are usual, abnormal results in a 
mysterious manner. Apparently in any 
specific case the distinctive function and 
sphere of action of the fetish depends 
largely on the nature of the object which 
is supposed to contain it. It is the im¬ 
agined possession of this potent mysteri- 


BULL. 30] 


FETISH 


457 


ous power that causes an object to be 
regarded as indispensable to the welfare 
of its possessor. 

In the belief of the Indians, all things 
are animate and incarnate—men, beasts, 
lands, waters, rocks, plants, trees, stars, 
winds, clouds, and night—and all pos¬ 
sess volition and immortal life; yet many 
of these are held in perpetual bondage by 
weird spells of some mighty enchantment. 
So, although lakes and seas may writhe 
in billows, they can not traverse the 
earth, while brooks and rivers may run 
and bound over the land, yet even they 
may be held by the potent magic power 
of the god of winter. Mountains and 
hills may throb and quake with pain and 
grief, but they can not travel over the 
earth because they are held in thraldom 
by the powerful spell of some potent en¬ 
chanter. Thus it is that rocks, trees, 
roots, ‘stocks and stones’, bones, the 
limbs and parts of the body, and the vari¬ 
ous bodies of nature are verily the living 
tombs of diverse beings and spirits. Of 
such is the kingdom of the fetish, for even 
the least of these may be chosen. More¬ 
over, a fetish is an object which may also 
represent a vision, a dream, a thought, 
or an action. 

The following extract from Cushing’s 
Zufii Fetiches (2d Rep. B. A. E., 1883) 
will show the reputed connection between 
the object and its quickener, between the 
object and the thing it represents. In 
speaking of the Two Sun Children, Cush¬ 
ing says: “Now that the surface of the 
earth was hardened, even the animals of 
prey, powerful and like the fathers (gods) 
themselves, would have devoured the 
children of men; and the Two thought it 
was not well that they should all be per¬ 
mitted to live, ‘for,’ said they, ‘alike will 
the children of men and the children of 
the animals of prey multiply themselves. 
The animals of prey are provided with 
talons and teeth; men are but poor, the 
finished beings of earth, therefore the 
weaker.’ 

“ Whenever they came across the path¬ 
way of one of these animals, were he a 
great mountain lion or but a mere mole, 
they struck him with the fire cf lightning 
which they carried in their magic shield. 
Thlu! and instantly he w T as shriveled and 
burned into stone. 

“Then said they to the animals that 
they had changed into stone: ‘That ye 
may not be ev .1 unto men, but that ye 
may be a great good unto them, have we 
changed you into rock everlasting. By 
the magic breath of prey, by the heart 
that shall endure forever within you, 
shall ye be made to serve instead of to 
devour mankind.” 

“Thus was the surface of the earth 
hardened and scorched and many of all 


kinds of beings changed to stone. Thus, 
too, it happened that we find, here and 
there throughout the world, their forms, 
sometimes large like the beings them¬ 
selves, sometimes shriveled and distorted. 
And w r e often see among the rocks the 
forms of many beings that live no longer, 
which shows us that all was different in 
the ‘days of the new.’ 

“Of these petrifactions, which are of 
course mere concretions or strangely 
eroded rock forms, the Zuni say, ‘Whom¬ 
soever of us may be met with the light of 
such great good fortune may see (discover, 
find) them and should treasure them for 



the sake of the sacred (magic) power 
which was given them in the days of the 
new.’ ” Such is the Zuni philosophy of 
the fetish. 

A fetish is acquired by a person, a fam¬ 
ily, or a people for the purpose of pro¬ 
moting welfare. In return, the fetish re¬ 
quires from its owner worship in the form 
of prayer, sacrifice, feasts, and protection, 
and from its votaries it receives ill or 
good treatment in accordance with the 
character of its behavior toward them. 
Some fetishes are regarded as more effi¬ 
cacious than others. The fetish which 
loses its repute as a promoter of welfare 
gradually becomes useless and may de¬ 
generate into a sacred object—a charm, 
an amulet, or a talisman—and finally into 
a mere ornament. Then other fetishes 
are acquired, to be subjected to the same 
severe test of efficiency in promoting the 
well-being of their possessors. 

The fetish is clearly segregated from 
the group of beings called tutelars, or 
guardian spirits, since it may be bought 
or sold, loaned or inherited, while, so 
far as known, the tutelar is never sold, 
loaned, or, with the Iroquois, inherited. 





458 


FETKINA-FEW’THAT-LIVED 


[b. a. e. 


Among the Santee and the Muskhogean 
and Iroquoian tribes the personal tutelar, 
having a different origin, is scrupulously 
discriminated from all those objects and 
beings which may be called fetishes. The 
tutelar has a particular name as a class 
of beings. Rev. John Eastman says that 
this is true of the Santee, and it is prob¬ 
ably true of many other tribes. Some 
fetishes are inherited from kindred, while 
others are bought from neighboring 
tribes at a great price, thus constituting 
a valuable article of intertribal commerce. 
It is also acquired by choice for multi¬ 
farious reasons. 

A person may have one or many 
fetishes. The name fetish is also applied 
to most of the articles found in the medi¬ 
cine sack of the shaman, the pindikosan 
of the Chippewa. These are commonly 
otter, snake, owl, bird, and other skins; 
roots, bark, and berries of many kinds; 
potent powders, and a heterogeneous col¬ 
lection of other things employed by the 
shaman. 

A fetish is not a product of a definite 
phase of religious activity, much less is it 
the particular prerogative of any plane of 
human culture; for along with the adora¬ 
tion of the fetish goes the worship of the 
sun, moon, earth, 
life, trees, rivers, 
water, mountains, 
and storms as the 
embodiment of as 
many personali¬ 
ties. It is there¬ 
fore erroneous to 
assign the fetish to the artificial stage of 
religion sometimes called hecastotheism. 
The fetish must be carefully distinguished 
from the tutelar of every person. Among 
the Iroquois these are known by distinct 
names, indicative of their functions: ochi- 
na i k'£rida' for fetish, and oiaro n ’ for the 



Whale Fetish of Wood; Western 
Eskimo. ,( Murdoch) 


tutelar. 

Mooney says, in describing the fetish, 
that it may be “ a bone, a feather, a carved 
or painted stick, a stone arrowhead, a cu¬ 
rious fossil or concretion, a tuft of hair, a 
necklace of red berries, the stuffed skin 
of alizard, the dried 
hand of an enemy, 
a small bag of 
pounded charcoal 
mixed with human 
blood—anything, 
in fact, which the 
owner’s medicine 
dream or imagination might suggest, no 
matter how uncouth or unaccountable, 
provided it be easily portable and attach¬ 
able. The fetish might be the inspiration 
of a dream or the gift of a medicine-man, 
or even atrophy taken from a slain enemy, 
or a bird, animal, or reptile; but, however 
insignificant in itself, it had always, in 



Wildcat fetish of the chase; 
Zuni. (cushing) 



Fetish of Dried bees in 

Box; WESTERN ESKIMO. 

(Murdoch) 


the owner’s mind at least, some symbolic 
connection with occult power. It might 
be fastened to the scalp-lock as a pend¬ 
ant, attached to some part of the dress, 
hung from the bridle bit, concealed be¬ 
tween the covers of a shield, or guarded 
in a special repository in the dwelling. 
Mothers sometimes tied the fetish to the 
child’s cradle. 

“Afetish noted among the Sioux is de¬ 
scribed as the image of a little man, which 
was inclosed in a cylindrical wooden 
case and enveloped in sacred swan’s down 
(Riggs). A hunting and divining fetish 
among the Cherokee 
consisted of a trans¬ 
parent crystal, which 
its owner kept wrap¬ 
ped up in buckskin in 
a sacred cave and oc¬ 
casionally fed by rub¬ 
bing over it the blood 
of a deer. The Pueblo tribes have nu¬ 
merous war and hunting fetishes of 
stone, small figurines cut to resemble 
various predatory animals, with eyes of 
inlaid turquoise and one or more arrow¬ 
heads bound at the back or side, and 
smeared with frequent oblations of blood 
from the slain game. The protective 
amulet sometimes took the form of a 
small figurine of a bird or other animal 
swift in flight, as the hawk; silent in 
movement, as the owl; or expert in dodg¬ 
ing, as the dragonfly. In all tribes the 
nature and mysterious origin of the per¬ 
sonal fetish or ‘ medicine ’ were the secret 
of the individual owner or of the maker, 
who, as a rule, revealed it only to one 
formally chosen as heir to the mystic pos¬ 
session and pledged in turn to the same 
secrecy.” 

Consult Bourke in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 
1892; Clark, Indian Sign Language, 1885; 
Cushing, Zuni Fetishes, 2d Rep. B. A. E., 
1883; Jesuit Relations, Thwaites ed., 
1896-1901; Lafitau, Mceurs des Sauvages 
Ameriquains, 1724; Maximilian, Travels, 
1843; Muller, Orig. and Growth of Re¬ 
ligion, 1879; Murdoch in 9th Rep. B.A.E., 
1892; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; 
Riggs, Gospel Among the Dakotas, 1869. 

(j. N. b. h. ) 

Fetkina. A Chnagmiut village on the 
n. arm of the Yukon delta, Alaska; pop. 
30 in 1880.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 111, 1884. 

Fetutlin. A Hankutchin village of 106 
people on upper Yukon r., Alaska, near 
the mouth of Forty-mne cr.- Petroff, 10th 
Census, Alaska, map, 1884. 

David’s people.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 62, 1880. 
Fetoutlin.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884. 

Few that Lived (The). A former Yank- 
tonai band under chief Two Bears.— 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 
1851. 


BULL. 30] 


FIFE-FIRE-M A KING 


459 


Fife. An Upper Creek chief, called 
James or Jim Fife, who flourished in the 
early years of the 19th century, and whose 
importance arose chiefly from the aid he 
rendered Gen. Jackson in the latter’s fight 
with the Creeks, Jan. 22, 1814, on Talla¬ 
poosa r. near the mouth of Emuckfau cr., 
Ala. In this battle, Fife, who had joined 
Jackson with 200 warriors at Talladega, 
not only saved Coffee’s division from de¬ 
feat when hard pressed by fearful odds, 
but turned the tide of battle in favor of 
Jackson’s army. “But for the prompt¬ 
ness of Fife and his warriors, ’ ’ says Drake 
(Ind. Chiefs, 104, 1832), “doubtless the 
Americans must have retreated.” He 
signed the treaty of Indian Springs, 
Ga., Feb. 12, 1825, only as representing 
Talladega, and is not included among 
“the chiefs and headmen of the Creek 
nation” who signed the supplementary 
treaty. (c. t. ) 

Fife’s Village. A former Upper Creek 
village situated a few miles e. of Talladega, 
Ala.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
cviii, 1899. 

Fightingtown (mistranslation of Walds'- 
untilsti'yl , ‘place of the plant walas / - 
unfiUstl’, i. e., ‘frog fights with it’). A 
former Cherokee settlement on Fighting- 
town cr., near Morganton, Fannin co., 
Ga.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 545, 
1900. 

Finhalui ( Fin-halui , ‘high log’). A 
former Lower Creek town, probably in 
Georgia, with 187 heads of families in 
1832. A swamp bearing the name Fin- 
holoway is in Wayne co., Ga., between 
lowerAltamahaandSatillars. (a. s.g. ) 
Fin-’halui.—Gatschet, Creek, Migr. Leg., I, 130, 
1884. High Log.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 
18 54. 

Finhioven (Fin-hi-dven) . A chief of the 
Kadohadacho in 1771. He guided the 
Wichita from upper Red r. to Natchito¬ 
ches, La., and witnessed the treaty made 
between the latter tribe and the Spanish 
governors of Louisiana and Texas, Oct. 
27, 1771. He is referred to in the man¬ 
uscript record of this event as “gran cas- 
ique” of the Kadohadacho. (h. e. b.) 

Fire Lodge. One of the former Dakota 
bands below L. Traverse, Minn.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1859, 102, 1860. 

Fire-making. Two methods of making 
fire were in use among the American 
aborigines at the time of the discovery. 
The first method, by flint-and-pyrites (the 
progenitor of flint-and-steel), was prac¬ 
tised by the Eskimo and by the northern 
Athapascan and Algonquian tribes rang¬ 
ing across the continent from Stikine r. 
in Alaska to Newfoundland and around 
the entire Arctic coast, and also through¬ 
out New England; as well as by the tribes 
of the n. Pacific coast. The inference is 
that this method of fire-making at one 
time was general in this area, but the ob¬ 


servations on which its distribution is 
based are from widely separated localities 
in which it is invariably used in connec¬ 
tion with fire-making by wood friction. 
It appears probable that flint-and-pyrites, 
in view of its distribution in northern 
Europe, was introduced into America 
through Scandinavian contact, or is ac- 
cultural either from Europe or Asia. The 
flint-and-steel is clearly an introduction 
of recent times. 

The second method, by reciprocating 
motion of wood on wood and igniting the 
ground-off particles through heat gener¬ 
ated by friction, was widespread in 
America, where it was the most valued 



MAKING FIRE WITH SIMPLE ROD DRILL REVOLVED BETWEEN 
THE hands; HUPA 


as well as the most effectual process 
known to the aborigines. The apparatus, 
in its simplest form, consists of a slender 
rod or drill and a lower piece or hearth, 
near the border of which the drill is 
worked by twisting between the palms, 
cutting a socket. From the socket a nar¬ 
row canal is cut in the edge of the hearth, 
the function of which is to collect the 
powdered wood ground off by the friction 
of the drill, as within this wood meal the 
heat rises to the ignition point. This is the 
simplest and most widely diffused type of 
fire-generating apparatus known to unciv¬ 
ilized man. Among the Eskimo and some 
other tribes the simple two-piece fire drill 
became a machine by the use of a hand 






460 


FIRST CHRISTIAN PARTY-FISHHOOKS 


[b. a. e. 


or mouth rest containing a stone, bone, 
or wood socket for the upper end of the 
drill, and a cord with two handles or 
string oil a bow for revolving the drill. 
By these inventions uniform and rapid 
motion and great pressure were effected, 
rendering it possible to make fire with in¬ 
ferior wood. The four-part drill consisted 
of two kinds: (a) The cord drill, which 
requires the cooperation of two persons 
in its working, and (6) the bow drill, 
which enables one person to make fire or 
to drill bone and ivory. The distribution 
of these varieties, which are confined to 
the Eskimo and their neighbors, follows 
no regular order; they may be used to¬ 
gether in the same tribe, or one or the 
other may be used alone, although the 
presumption is that the cord drill is the 
older. The hearth alone embodies two 
interesting modifications which reflect 
the environment. In one the canal leads 
down to a step or projection from the side 
of the hearth, and in the other the drill¬ 
ing is done on a longitudinal slot in the 
middle of the hearth, the object in both 
cases being to prevent the fire from fall¬ 
ing into the snow. These features also 
seem to have an indiscriminate distribu¬ 
tion in the area mentioned. 

The pump drill has been employed for 
fire-making only among the Onondaga of 
Canada, who used it in making sacred 
fire for the White-dog feast; but the 
pump drill is of little practical use in fire- 
inaking. From the Onondaga also there 
is an example of the fire plow like that 
of the Polynesians, in which a stick is 
held at an angle between the hands and 
rubbed back and forth along a plane sur¬ 
face, cutting a groove in which the wood 
meal produced by friction igitnes. The 
appearance of these diverse methods in 
one tribe, in an area where the simple 
drill was common, leads to the assump¬ 
tion that they are of recent introduction. 
There is no other evidence that the fire 
plow ever existed in the western hemi¬ 
sphere. 

The wood selected for the fire drill 
varied in different localities, the proper 
kinds and qualities being a matter of ac¬ 
quired knowledge. Thus the weathered 
roots of the cottonwood were used by the 
Pueblos; the stems of the yucca by the 
Apache; the root of the willow by the 
Hupa and Klamath; cedar by the N. W. 
coast tribes; elm, maple, and buttonwood 
by the eastern Indians. In some instances 
sand was placed in the fire cavity to in¬ 
crease friction; often two men twirled the 
drill alternately for the purpose of saving 
labor or when the wood was intractable. 

A similar discrimination is observed in 
the selection of tinder. The Eskimo 
prized willow catkins; the Indians of the 
N. W. coast used frayed cedar bark; other 


tribes used fungi, softened bark, grass, or 
other ignitible material. Touchwood or 
punk for preserving fire was obtained 
from decayed trees, or some form of slow 
match was prepared from bark. From 
the striking of a spark to the well-started 
campfire considerable skill and fore¬ 
thought were required. The glowing 
coal from the fire drill was usually made 
to fall into a small heap of easily ignitible 
material, where it was encouraged by fan- 
ing or blowing until actual flame was pro¬ 
duced; or the spark with the small kind¬ 
ling was gathered in a bunch of grass or 
a strip of bark and swung in the air. 

Fire-making formed an important fea¬ 
ture of a number of ceremonies. New 
fire was made in the Green-corn ceremony 
of the Creeks (see Busk), the White-dog 
feast of the Iroquois, the New-fire and 
Yaya ceremonies of the Hopi, and among 
many other tribes in widely separated 
localities. There are also many legends 
and myths grouped about the primitive 
method of obtaining fire at will. The 
Cherokee and other southern tribes be¬ 
lieved that a perpetual fire burned be¬ 
neath some of the mounds in their coun¬ 
try, and the Natchez built their mounds 
with a view, it is said, of maintaining a 
perpetual fire. On the introduction of 
flint-and-steel and matches the art of fire¬ 
making by the old methods speedily fell 
into disuse among most tribes and was 
perpetuated only for procuring the new 
fire demanded by religious rites. See 
Drills and Drilling , Illumination. 

Consult Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xvn, pt. 3, 1905; Hough in Rep. 
Nat. Mus., 1888 and 1890. (w. h. ) 

First Christian Party. A division of the 
Oneida at the period of the removal to 
Green bay, Wis., and afterward.—Wash¬ 
ington treaty (1828) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 
621, 1873. 

Fish-eating Creek. A Seminole settle¬ 
ment with 32 inhabitants in 1880, situated 
5 m. from the mouth of a creek that 
empties into L. Okeechobee, Manatee co., 
Fla.—MacCauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
478, 1887. 

Fish-e-more. See Enpishemo. 

Fishhooks. Starting from the simple 
device of attaching the bait to the end of 
a line, the progressive order of fishhooks 
used by the Indians seems to be as fol¬ 
lows: (a) The gorge hook, a spike of bone 
or wood, sharpened at both ends and 
fastened at its middle to a line, a device 
used also for catching birds; (6) a spike 
set obliquely in the end of a pliant shaft; 
(c) the plain hook; ( d ) the barbed hook; 
( e ) the barbed hook combined with sinker 
and lure. This series does not exactly 
represent stages in invention; the evolu¬ 
tion may have been effected by the habits 
of the different species of fish and their 


BULL. 30] 


FISHING 


461 


increasing wariness. The material used 
for hooks by the Indians was wood, bone, 
shell, stone, and copper. The Mohave 
employed the recurved spines of certain 
species of cactus, which are natural hooks. 

Data on the arche¬ 
ology of the fish¬ 
hook have been 
gathered from the 
Ohio mounds and 
the shell-heaps of 
Santa Barbara, Cal., 
unbarbed hooks of. 
bone having been 
found on a number 
of Ohio sites and 
gorge hooks atSanta 
Barbara. The fish¬ 
hook of recent times 
may be best studied 
among the n. Pa¬ 
cific tribes and the 
Eskimo of Alaska. The Makah of Wash¬ 
ington have a modified form of the gorge 
hook, consisting of a sharpened spine of 
bone attached with a pine-root lash to a 
whalebone. British Columbian and s. 
Alaskan tribes used either 
a simple hook of bent 
wood having a barb lashed 
to a point, or a compound 
hook consisting of a shank 
of wood, a splint of pine- 
root lashed at an angle of 
45° to its lower end, and 
a simple or barbed spike 
of bone, wood, iron, or 
copper lashed or set on 
the outer end of the splint. 

Eskimo hooks consisted 
frequently of a shank of 
bone with a curved, sharpened spike of 
metal set in the lower end, or several 
spikes were set in, forming a gig. Usu¬ 
ally, however, the Eskimo hook had the 
upper half of its shank made of stone and 
■ half of ivory, in 
e unbarbed curved 
spike of metal was 
set, the parts being 
fastened together 
by lashings of split 
quill. A leader of 
quill was attached 
to the hook and a 
bait of crab carapace 
was hung above the 
spike. This is the 
most complex hook 

known in aboriginal COPPER F IS H - 

America. hook ; wiscon- 

Lines and poles * c <r"u) 
varied like the hook 
with the customs of the fishermen, thb 
habits of the fish, and the environment. 
The Eskimo used lines of knotted lengths 
of whalebone quill, hair, or sinew; the n. 


Pacific tribes, lines of twisted bark, pine 
root, and kelp; and other tribes lines 
of twisted fiber. Short poles or none 
were used by the Eskimo and n. Pacific 
tribes. In other regions it is probable 
that long poles of cane or saplings were 
used. In some regions, as on the N. 
W. coast, a trawl, consisting of a series of 
hooks attached by leaders to a line, was 
used for taking certain species of fish. 
The Haida, according to Swanton, made 
a snap hook, consisting of a hoop of wood, 
the ends of which were held apart by a 
wooden peg. This peg was displaced by 
the fish on taking the bait, and the ends 
of the hoop snapped together, holding 
the fish by the jaw. (See Fishing.) 

Consult Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 1888; 
Goddard in Univ. Cal. Publ., Am. 
Archseol. and Ethnol., i, 1903; Hoffman 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E. pt 2,1896; Holmes 
in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 1883; Mills (1) in 
Ohio Archaeol. and Hist. Quar., ix, no. 4, 
1901, (2) ibid., xv, no. 1, 1906; Moore (1) 
in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., xi, 1899, 
(2) ibid., xn, 1903, (3) ibid., xm, 1905; 
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; 
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pt 1, 1899; 
Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; 
Palmer in Am. Nat., xn, no. 6, 1878; Put¬ 
nam in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vn, 1879; Rau 
in Smithson. Cont., xxv, 1884; Teit in 
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., n, Anthrop. 
i, 1900; Turner in Hth Rep. B. A. E., 
1894. (w. h.) 

Fishing. At the first coming of the 
Europeans the waters of this continent 
were found teeming with food fish, the 
great abundance of which quickly attract¬ 
ed fleets of fishermen from all civilized 
parts of the Old World. The list of spe¬ 
cies living in American waters utilized by 
the Indians would fill a volume. The 
abundance or scarcity of this food on the 
Atlantic coast varied with the season. In 
spring the fish made their appearance in 
vast shoals in the spawning beds of the 
coast and in the bays and rivers. Capt. 
John Smith relates, in his History of 
Virginia, early in the 17th century, that 
on one occasion fish were encountered in 
such numbers in the Potomac as to im¬ 
pede landing from his boat. The annual 
spring run of herring above Washington 
is still almost great enough to warrant the 
assertion. Fish life varied with locality 
and season. On the northern and east¬ 
ern coasts the fish disappeared to a great 
extent when the waters became cold at the 
approach of winter, and many northern 
fishes went to more southerly waters. 
Among the better known food products 
furnished by the waters of the country 
may be mentioned the whale, sea lion, 
seal, otter, swordfish, sturgeon, porpoise, 
cod, haddock, halibut, pollock, salmon, 
trout, herring, shad, perch, bass, mack- 



Fishhook and Line; Hudson 
BAY Eskimo: (turner) 



the lowei 
which th 



Bone Fish¬ 
hook; Arkan¬ 
sas; Actual 
Size, (rau) 





462 


FISHING 


[b. a. e. 


erel, flounder, eel, plaice, turbot, white- 
fish, catfish, smelt, pike, dogfish, and all 
varieties of shellfish. By some tribes, as 
the Apache, Navaho, and Zufii, fish were 
tabu as food; but where fish was used at 



WATTLE-WORK FISH TRAP OF THE VIRGINIA INDIANS. 
(HARIOT, 1585) 


all by the Indians, practically everything 
edible that came from the water was con¬ 
sumed. The salmon of the Pacific coast 
are still found in enormous schools, and 
in the canning industry hundreds of per¬ 
sons are employed. Lobsters and crabs 
furnished no incon¬ 
siderable food sup¬ 
ply, while the vast 
deposits of shells 
along all tidewater 
regions, as well as 
many of the interior 
rivers, testify to the 
use made of shellfish 
by the aborigines; 
they not only sup¬ 
plied a large part of 
the daily food of the 
people but were dried 
for time of need. 
Shellfish were dug or 
taken by hand in wading and by diving. 
Salmon and herring eggs formed one of 
the staple articles of diet of the tribes of 
the n. Pacific coast. To collect herring 
eggs these tribes laid down under water at 
low tide a row of hemlock branches, which 
were held in position 
with weights; then 
branches were fast¬ 
ened together, and a 
float was fixed at one 
end, bearing the own¬ 
er’s mark. When 

these boughs were Alaskan Eskimo Harpoon; 
found to be covered foreshaft and head. 
with eggs they were ( MURD °ch) 
taken into- a canoe, carried ashore, and 
elevated on branches of a tree stripped of 
its smaller limbs, where they were left to 
dry. When first placed in position the 
eggs adhered firmly to the boughs, but 
on taking them down great care had to 


be exercised, because they were very 
brittle and were easily knocked off. 
Those not immediately consumed were 
put up in the intestines of animals and 
laid aside for winter use. It is recorded in 
the Jesuit Relations that many eels came 
to the mouth of St Lawrence r. and were 
trapped by the Indians, w r ho made long 
journeys to get the season’s supply. 

On the middle and s. Atlantic coast fish 
are found during the greater portion of, if 
not throughout, the year, while farther n. 
fishing is confined more to the spawning 
seasons and to the months when the 
waters are free of ice. Experience taught 
the natives when to expect the coming 
of the fish and the time when they would 
depart. In methods of capturing seafood 
the native had little to learn from the 
white man, even in killing the whale 
(which was treated as royal game on the 



ALASKAN ESKIMO BOX FOR CONTAINING HARPOON HEADS. 
(murdoch) 


coast of Vancouver id.), the sea lion, or the 
seal, or in taking shellfish in the waters 
of the ocean and in the smallest streams. 

Large fish and marine mammals were 
captured by means of the harpoon, while 
the smaller ones were taken 
by the aid of bow and arrow, 
gigs, net, dull, trap, or weir. 

Fires or torches were used 
along the shore or on boats, 
the gleam of which at¬ 
tracted the game or fish to 
the surface, when they 
were easily taken by hand 
or with a net. Among the 
Cherokee, Iroquois, and 
other tribes, fish were 
drugged with poisonous 
bark or other parts of 
plants; in parts of Cali¬ 
fornia extensive use was 
made of soap root and 
other plants for this pur¬ 
pose. Carved fishhooks 
(q. v.) of shell and bone 
have been found in shell- 
heaps and graves in the 
interior. In shape these 
resemble the hooks of metal from Europe, 
though the natives of the Pacific coast used 
fishhooks of wood and bone combined, 



Carrying Fish in a Basket; 
Virginia Indians, (hariot) 




Alaskan Eskimo 
Stone Sinker; 1-2. 
(rau) 









BULL. 30] 


FIS KERN AES-FIVE CIVILIZED TRIBES 


463 


made in so primitive a manner as to indi¬ 
cate aboriginal origin. Another ingenious 
device employed along the n. Pacific coast 
for catching fish consisted of a straight 
pin, sharp at both ends and fastened to a 
line by the middle; this pin was run 
through a dead minnow, and, being 
gorged by another fish, a jerk of the 
string caused the points to pierce the 
mouth of the fish, which was then easily 
taken from the water. Artificial bait, 
made of stone and bone combined, was 
used as 
a lure, 
and was ^ 
quite as 

attractive to fish as is 
the artificial bait of 
the civilized fisherman. 

Still another ingeni¬ 
ous way of catching fish 
was by “pinching,” by 
means of a split stick, 
which, like the gig, held 
the fish fast. 

In shallow rivers low 
walls were built from one 
side of the stream to the 
other, having a central dipnet of the haida. 
opening through which (niblack) 
fish were forced into a trap. Brushwood 
mats were also made, which were moved 
along like seines, so as to drive the fish 
into shallow or narrow places, where they 
were readily taken by the hand or with 
dipnets. Along the* shores of rapid 
streams men stationed themselves on 
rocks or staging and speared fish as they 
passed up or down stream. During winter, 
when the northern waters were frozen, 
holes were cut in the ice, and through 
these fish were shot, speared, or netted. 

Probably the most primi¬ 
tive of all methods of fish¬ 
ing, however, by which 
many salmon were and 
doubtless are still cap¬ 
tured, was that of knock¬ 
ing them on the head 
with a club. After a great 
run of fish had subsided, 
single ones were caught 
in shallow water by any of the above 
methods. There are still indications that 
from an early period a trade existed be¬ 
tween the fishing Indians and those of 
the interior who gained their livelihood 
by other means. Great supplies of fish 
were cured by drying in the sun or over 
fires, and sometimes the product was 
finely ground and packed in skins or bas¬ 
kets for future use. See Food . 

Consult Adair, Plist. Am. Inds., 1775; 
Boas (1) in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 1888, (2) 
in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xv, pt. 1, 
1901; Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 1880; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, 



Alaskan Eskimo 
Sinker. 


pt. 3, 1905; Gatschet in Am. Anthrop., v, 
361, 1892; Goddard in Univ. Cal. Publ., 
Am. Archseol. and Ethnol., i, 1903; 
Jesuit Relations, Thwaites ed., i-lxxiii, 
1896-1901; Lawson, Hist. Caro¬ 
lina, 340,1714, repr. 1860; Lewis 
and Clark, Orig. Jour., i-viii, 

1904-05; Margry, Decouvertes, 
v, 81, 1883; Morice in Trans. 

Can. Inst., 1893; Murdoch in9th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., pt. 1, 1889; 

Rau, Prehistoric Fishing, 1884; 

Smith, Hist. Va., repr. 1819. 

Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 

1894. (j. d. m.) 

Fiskernaes. An Eskimo settle¬ 
ment and Danish trading post, 90 
miles s. of Godthaab, w. Green¬ 
land.—Kane, Arct. Explor., 1 , 21 , 

1856. 

Five Civilized Tribes. A term 
used both officially and unoffi¬ 
cially in modern times to desig¬ 
nate collectively the Cherokee, 
Chickasaw, Choctaw, Creek, and 
Seminole tribes in Indian Ter., 
applied on account of the advance 
made by these tribes toward civi¬ 
lized life and customs. The term 
appears in the reports of the In¬ 
dian Office as early as 1876, when 
the agent reported (p. 61) that 
each tribe “had a constitutional 
government, with legislative, 
judicial, and executive depart¬ 
ments, conducted upon the same ALASKAN t8 _ 
plan as our State governments, kimo fish 
the entire expenses of which are f PEAR ; 
paid out of their own funds.” tMURD0CH ' 
There was, however, at that date no court 
with jurisdiction to try cases where an 
Indian was one party and a citizen of the 
United States or a corporation was the 
other, but this lack has since been sup¬ 
plied. Some of the tribes, notably the 
Cherokee, have had their laws and the 
acts of their councils printed. 

These five tribes differed from most 
others in the fact that their lands were 
held not on the same basis as reservations 
but by patents or deeds in fee simple, 
with certain restrictions as to aliena¬ 
tion and reversion—those conveyed to 
the Cherokee Nation, Dec. 31, 1838, for¬ 
ever upon condition that they “shall 
revert to the United States if the said 
Cherokee Nation becomes extinct or aban¬ 
dons the same”; those to the Choctaw 
Nation, Mar. 23,1842, in fee simple to them 
and their descendants, “to inure to them 
while they shall exist as a nation, and live 
on it, liable to no transfer or alienation, 
except to the United States or with their 
consent”; those to the Creek tribe, Aug. 
11,1852, “'so long as they shall exist as a 
nation and continue to occupy the coun- 








464 


FLAKES 


[B. A. E. 


try hereby conveyed to them. ’ ’ Although 
the lands were held in fee simple, the 
right to alienate them except to the 
United States or with its consent does 
not appear to have passed to the grantees. 
The title is defined as a “ base, qualified, or 
determinable fee, with only a possibility 
of reversion to the United States (U. S. v. 
Reese, 5 Dill., 405). The right of these 
tribes to cut, sell, and dispose of their tim¬ 
ber, and to permit mining and grazing 
within the limits of their respective tracts 
was for a time limited to their own citi¬ 
zens, but this right has been somewhat 
extended, though the exercise of it is still 
subject to approval by the proper United 
States authorities. The title of the Chick¬ 
asaw Nation to their lands in Indian Ter. 
was obtained from the Choctaw in ac¬ 
cordance with treaties with the United 
States, while that of the Seminole was ob¬ 
tained from the Creeks, these two tribes 
being granted their lands on the same 
basis and with the same title and privi¬ 
leges as the United States granted the 
lands to the Choctaw and the Creeks. The 
territory thus assigned to these five tribes 
within the limits of Indian Ter. amounted 
to 19,475,614 acres, or about 30,431 sq. m., 
an area equal to that of South Carolina, 
and equivalent to 230 acres for each man, 
woman, and child of the entire population 
(84,507) of the five tribes. 

The treaties of 1866 with the several 
tribes all provided for the holding of a gen¬ 
eral council to be composed of delegates 
from each tribe in Indian Ter., and the 
Choctaw and Chickasaw treaty also pro¬ 
vides that this general council shall elect 
a delegate to Congress whenever Congress 
shall authorize the admission into its body 
of an official who shall represent Indian 
Ter. Although some of the tribes have 
made an effort to bring about the results 
contemplated in these treaty stipulations, 
nothing effectual in this direction has been 
accomplished. By act of Congress Feb. 8, 
1887, every Indian born in the United 
States who receives land in allotment and 
takes up ‘ ‘ his residence separate and apart 
from any tribes of Indians therein and has 
adopted the habits of civilized life,” isde- 
clared a citizen of the United States; but 
the Five Civilized Tribes were excepted 
from the provisions of this act. By act 
of Mar. 3,1901, however, this section was 
amended by insertingafterthe words “civ¬ 
ilized life” the words “and every Indian 
in Indian Territory,” thus declaring every 
Indian of that territory to be a citizen of 
the United States. By act of May 2,1890, 
the laws of Arkansas, so far as applicable, 
were extended over Indian Ter. until Con¬ 
gress should otherwise provide. United 
States courts and courts of special juris¬ 
diction have also been established in the 
Territory. By sec. 16 of the act of Mar. 3. 


1893, the President was authorized to ap¬ 
point three commissioners (subsequently 
changed to five), to negotiate with the five 
tribes for the allotmentin severalty of their 
lands, thus extinguishing the tribal title 
thereto. (See Commission to the Five Civil¬ 
ized Tribes.) 

On the abolition of slavery the problem 
of determining the status and relations 
of the freedmen in the Five Civilized 
Tribes became a difficult one, though by 
treaties of 1866 it was agreed that they 
should be subject to the same laws as the 
Indians and be entitled to a portion of 
the land (the rights in this respect differ¬ 
ing in the different tribes); but questions 
respecting other matters, as school privi¬ 
leges, have proved troublesome factors. 
In some of the tribes negroes have separate 
schools, and by the act of Congress of 
June 28, 1898, the freedmen were ex¬ 
cluded from participating in the royalties 
on coal and asphalt, or in the school 
funds arising therefrom. By the same 
act and the acts of Mar. 1,1901, and July 
1, 1902, the tribal governments of these 
tribes were to cease Mar. 4, 1906, but by 
resolution of Feb. 27, 1906, the time was 
extended one year. Freedmen are, how¬ 
ever, citizens in all the tribes. Consult 
the articles on the tribes composing the 
Five Civilized Tribes. (c. t. ) 

Flakes. The term flake is often used 
by archeologists synonymously with chip 
and spall, but it is rnost commonly applied 
to the long, thin slivers of 
flint or other brittle stone 
designed for use as cutting 
implements or produced 
without particular design 
in the ordinary course of 
implement making. When 
systematically made in 
numbers for use as knives 
or scrapers or for other pur¬ 
poses, a roughly cylindrical 
or somewhat conical piece 
of fine-grained material was 
selected or made, and the 
flakes were removed by strokes with a 
hammer delivered on one of the ends near 
the margin, the fracture extending the 
entire length or most of the length of the 
core and producing a flake, flat or slightly 
convex on the inside, sharp on the edges, 
and having an outer surface or back with 
one or more angles or facets according to 
the previous contour of the particular part 
of the original surface of the core removed. 
The manufacture of flakes for knives, 
extensively carried on by the ancient 
Mexicans, is described as being accom¬ 
plished by abrupt pressure with a wooden 
implement, one end placed against the 
shoulder of the operator and the other 
set upon the core at the proper point. 
The exact manner of utilizing the flake 



Flint Flakes for 
Use as Knives. 



BULL. 30] 


FLAKING IMPLEMENTS-FLINT 


465 


blades by the northern tribes is not 
known, but they were probably set in 
suitable handles as knives, or employed 
in making small arrowheads, scrapers, 
and the like. Flakes and chips are pro¬ 
duced by identical implements, the lat¬ 
ter term being generally applied to the 
shorter, more abrupt flakes or bits pro¬ 
duced in the ordinary work of shaping 
implements by both percussion and pres¬ 
sure processes. The expression ‘ ‘ chipped 
implements” is however very generally 
applied to all forms shaped by fracture 
processes. See Cores, Flaking implements, 
Hammers, Stonework. (w. h. h.) 

Flaking implements. The shaping of 
stone by fracture processes is one of the 
earliest as well as one of the most impor¬ 
tant arts of primitive men. Two distinct 
classes of processes as well as two widely 
differing classes of implements are em¬ 
ployed. Fracture by percussion is ac¬ 
complished by means of hammers of 
stone or other hard material (see Ham¬ 
mers, Stonework ), and fracture by pressure 



FLAKERJ ALASKAN ESKIMO. THE FLAKING POINT OF HARD 
BONE IS AT THE LEFT. (MURDOCH) 


employs a number of devices, perhaps 
the most usual among the northern 
tribes being bits of hard bone, antler, or 
ivory, somewhat resembling an awl in 
shape and often set in handles of wood or 
other suitable material. These are em¬ 
ployed where the edges of the stone un¬ 
der treatment are sharp and rather thin. 
In using them the edge is firmly placed 
crosswise on the sharp edge of the brittle 
stone, or the point is set near the edge, 
and by a quick movement accompanied 
with strong pressure the flake is driven 
off. This operation is rapidly repeated, 
passing along the outline of the imple¬ 
ment, alternating the sides, until the de¬ 
sired form is produced. The pieces un¬ 
der treatment may be held in various 
ways; for deep notching, which requires 
strong force, they are often laid flat on a 
pad of buckskin or other yielding material 
supported on a stable surface, and the 
bone point is made to remove the chips 
by a quick downward movement. Im¬ 
plements of metal are effectual in this 
particular form of the chipping work. 
Other devices mentioned by some writers 
are notched bones and pincers of bone, 
by means of which the sharp edge of the 
flint was chipped. For heavier work va¬ 
rious contrivances enabling the operator 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-30 


to apply greater force were employed, but 
these are not well understood. It ap¬ 
pears that a punch-like tool of bone or 
antler was sometimes used, the point be¬ 
ing set, at the proper point, on the stone 
to be fractured, while the other end was 
struck with a hammer or mallet to re¬ 
move the flake. For writings on the sub¬ 
ject, see Stonework. (w. h. h.) 

Flandreau Indians. A part of the Santee 
who separated from the Mdewakanton 
and Wahpekute of the Santee agency, 
Nebr., in 1870, and settled in 1876 at 
Flandreau, S. Dak.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 27, 
1876. 

Flandreau Sioux.— Barber in Am. Nat.. XVII, 750, 
1885. 

Flathead. A name applied to several 
different tribes usually owing to the fact 
that they were accustomed to flatten 
the heads of their children artificially. 
In s. e. United States the Catawba and 
Choctaw were sometimes designated by 
the term Flatheads, and the custom ex¬ 
tended to nearly all Muskhogean tribes 
as well as to the Natchez and the Tonika. 
In the N. W. the Chinook of Columbia r., 
many of the Vancouver id. Indians, and 
most of the Salish of Puget sd. and Brit¬ 
ish Columbia were addicted to the prac¬ 
tice, and the term has been applied to all 
as a body and to some of the separate 
divisions. Curiously enough, the people 
now known in official reports as Flat- 
heads—the Salish proper (q. v.)—never 
flattened the head. Dawson implies 
(Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. it, 
6) that they were so named (Tetes-Plates) 
by the first Canadian voyageurs because 
slaves from the coast with deformed heads 
were among them. For the names c" the 
tribes to which the term has been applied, 
see Flatheads in the index; consult also 
Artificial head deformation. ( j. r. s. ) 

Fiat-mouth. See Eshkebugecoshe. 

Flechazos (Span: ‘ arrow or dart blows ’). 
A name applied by the Spaniards in the 
latter part of the 18th century to the 
upper village of the Tawakoni settlement 
on the w. side of Brazos r., near Waco, 
Tex. The one below it was called Quis- 
cat. One or the other of these villages 
was the Waco village. (h. e. b. ) 

Flint. Until recently the use of the 
term flint was restricted to nodular con¬ 
cretions found in chalk beds of Creta¬ 
ceous age mainly in England, France, 
and other European countries, but re¬ 
cently obtained from Cretaceous strata 
in Arkansas and Texas. Although flint 
is classed as a variety of chalcedony, the 
name has been extended in popular usage 
to include various forms of chalcedonic 
minerals, as chert, liornstone, basanite, 
jasper, agate, and the like. The princi¬ 
pal constituent of all these minerals is 
silica, and notwithstanding their great 


466 


FLINT DISKS-FOOD 


[b. a. e. 



dissimilarity the distinctions are due al¬ 
most entirely to manner of formation 
and included foreign substances. Such 
impurities, though they make up a very 
small percentage of the stone, produce 
upon exposure to atmospheric influences 
an infinite variety of coloring and great 
diversity of texture. The flints as thus 
defined* were extensively employed by 
the aborigines in the manufacture of 
chipped implements, and the implements 
themselves are sometimes referred to as 
“flints.” See Chalcedony, Chert, Quartz, 
Mines and Quarries, (g. f. w. h. h.) 

Flint disks. Flattish objects of circu¬ 
lar, elliptical, or almond-like outline pro¬ 
duced by chipping away the outer por¬ 
tions of nodules having these approximate 
forms. The question has been earnestly 
debated whether these and kindred forms 
were for any practical or economic use, or 
whether they had some occult significance 
as votive offerings. They are very seldom 
found in graves and 
infrequently on vil¬ 
lage sites or about 
shops where imple¬ 
ments were made. 
Many of them are 
of the blue nodular 
hornstone found in s. 
Illinois, in the vicini¬ 
ty of W yandotte cave 
in s. Indiana, and 
in av. Kentucky and 
Tennessee, but no record has yet been 
made of the discovery in large numbers 
of such disks in any of these localities 
except the first. The range in size is 
generally from 3 to 8 in. in length or 
diameter, though a few exceed the latter 
dimension. The finest specimen known 
is from Tennessee; it is almost exactly 
circular, made of the Stewart co. flint, 
about 1 in. thick and 9 in. across. Flint 
disks as well as the more leaf-like blades 
are usually found in deposits or caches 
containing numerous nearly identical 
specimens. See Cache disks and blades, 
Storage and Caches. (w. h. h. ) 

Florida Indians. A term almost as 
vague as the ancient geographic concep¬ 
tion of Florida itself, used (Doc. Col. 
Hist. N. Y., vi, 243, 1855) to designate 
Indians who robbed a vessel stranded 
on the Florida keys in 1741-42. School¬ 
craft (Ind. Tribes, vi, 47, 1857) refers to 
it as a term vaguely applied to the “Apa- 
lachian group of tribes.” (a. s. g.) 

Flowpahhoultin. A small body of Sa- 
lish of Fraser superintendency, Brit. Col., 
in 1878.—Can. Ind. Aff., 79, 1878. 

Flnnmnda. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected Avith Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 


Flint Disk; Tennessee, 
(diam., 9 In.) 


Focomae. A Diegueno rancheria rep¬ 
resented in the treaty of 1852 at Santa 
Isabel, s. Cal.— H. R Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 132, 1857. 

Folk-lore. See Mythology. 

Fond du lac. A Chippewa band re¬ 
siding on St Louis r., near Fond du Lac, 
e. Minnesota. They are now under the 
White Earth agency, numbering 107 in 
1905. (J. m.) 

Food. The areas occupied by the In¬ 
dians may be classed as supplying, pre¬ 
dominantly, animal food, vegetalfood, and 
mixed diet. No strict lines separate these 
classes, so that in regions where it is com¬ 
monly said that the tribes are meat eaters 
exclusively, vegetal food is also of impor¬ 
tance, and vice versa. Vegetal food stuffs 
are (1) preagricultural, or the gather¬ 
ing of self-sown fruits, nuts, seeds, and 



MONO WOMEN HARVE? TING SEEDS. (SANTA FE RAILWAY) 


roots; and (2) agricultural, or (a) the 
raising of root crops, originating in the 
harvesting of roots of wild plants, and 
(b) of cereal products, consisting chiefly 
of maize (q. v ) grown by the majority of 
the tribes, and wild rice (q. v.) in the 
area of the upper lakes, where a sort of 
semiagriculture was practised to some 
extent. (Sea Agriculture.) 

Animal food was obtained from the 
game of the environment, and the settle¬ 
ment and movements of some tribes de¬ 
pended largely on the location or range 
of animals, such as the buffalo, capable of 
furnishing an adequate food supply; while 
on the other hand, the limit of habitat of 
water animals, as the salmon, tended to 
restrict the range of other tribes to the 
places where the supply could be gath¬ 
ered. No pure hunter stage can be found, 
if it ever existed, for while the capture of 
animals devolved on the man and the 
preparation of food on the woman, the 
latter added to the diet substances derived 
from the vegetal kingdom. Similarly no 
purely agricultural stage with exclusively 



BULL. 30] 


FOOD 


467 


vegetal diet existed, and no aboriginal 
domestication (q. v.) of animals n. of 
Mexico is found except in the case of the 
turkey and the dog. 

In general, in the n. portion of the con¬ 
tinent the diet was three-fourths animal 
food; in the s. part it was three-fourths 
vegetal; while with the tribes of the 
coast, mountains, lakes, and plains, it 
varied according to the food supply. The 
absence of milk food, other than the ma¬ 
ternal lactation, to a considerable extent 
limited the natural increase of population. 
The food supply also changed with the 
seasons, causing the diet at different pe¬ 
riods of the year to vary in its ratio of 
animal to vegetal constituents, and an¬ 
other feature depended on religious cus¬ 
toms and habits which modified or regu¬ 
lated the food used. For example, the 
Apache and Navaho will not eat fish 
or the flesh of the bear or beaver, and 
other tribes had tabu or totemic animals 
which, though useful for food, were not 
eaten (see Tabu). In inhospitable regions, 
such as that inland from the Texas coast 
in the 16th century, the natives subsisted 
on whatsoever they could find. Cabeza 
de Vaca wrote of the Yguazas: “Their 
support is principally roots, which re¬ 
quire roasting two days; many are very 
bitter. Occasionally they take deer, and 
at times take fish; but the quantity is so 
small and the famine so great, that they 
eat spiders and the eggs of ants, worms, 
lizards, salamanders, snakes, and vipers 
that kill whom they strike; and they eat 
earth and wood, and all that there is, the 
dung of deer, and other things that I 
omit to mention; and I honestly believe 
that were there stones in that land they 
would eat them. They save the bones of 
the fishes they consume, of snakes, and 
other animals, that they may afterward 
beat them together and eat the powder.” 
Almost as much may be said of the Maidu 
of California who, in addition to consum¬ 
ing every edible vegetal product, ate badg¬ 
ers, skunks, wildcats, and mountain 
lions; practically all birds except the buz¬ 
zard; yellowjacket larvae, grasshoppers, 
locusts, and crickets, and even salmon 
bones and deer vertebrae (Dixon). 

Vegetal food comprised a vast array 
of the products of plant life, of which 
roots and seeds were the most valuable. 
The most important food plant possessed 
by the Indians was maize (q. v.) which 
formed and still forms their principal sub¬ 
sistence. Following maize in order of 
importance came beans, peas, potatoes, 
squashes, pumpkins, melons, and chile, 
which were grown in variety. Unculti¬ 
vated plants also entered into the dietary, 
as seeds, roots, and flowers of grasses and 
other plants, or parts of plants used as 
greens, for flavoring, etc. In number¬ 


less cases wild plants have preserved 
tribes from starvation when cultivated 
crops failed. In the S. W., cactus and 
yucca fruits, mesquite beans, and the agave 
were most important elements of the food 
supply. As in Mexico, the roasted fleshy 
leaves and leaf matrix of the agave were 
prized as sw r eet, nourishing food (see 
Mescal). Tuckaho and other fungi were 
used for food by the eastern Indians; 
“tuckahobread” was well known in the 
S. The n. Pacific tribes made much use 
of the sweet inner bark of the hemlock 
and spruce. Savors, flavors, and condi¬ 
ments, as well as sweets, were valued by 
the Indian, who was also fond of chew¬ 
ing gum. While salt was tabued by the 
Onondaga and lye substituted by some of 
the southern Indians, the former was in 
general use. In some cases salt was made 
by the evaporation of the water of salt 
springs; in other localities it was obtained 
in crystal form from salt lakes and springs, 
and commerce in this product was wide¬ 
spread. Chile, which is of Mexican 
origin, became known throughout the S. 
W., and saffron, an introduced plant, is 
still in use there to flavor and color food, 
as are also the yellow flowers of the 
squash vine. Throughout New England 
and s. e. Canada sugar was produced by 
the evaporation of maple sap (see Maple 
sugar); in the S. W. it was derived from 
the willow and the agave. In some local¬ 
ities clay was eaten, either alone or mixed 
with food or taken in connection with 
wild potatoes to mitigate the griping effect 
of this acrid tuber. In general, buffalo, 
the deer family, and fish were the ani¬ 
mals most useful for food. Some wood¬ 
land tribes depended on deer, while the 
coast and river tribes usually made special 
use of fish and other products of the 
waters. Amphibious mammals sustained 
the Eskimo, while the porcupine is said 
to have been the chief food animal of the 
Montagnais. The range of game ani¬ 
mals influenced the range of man in 
America quite as much as the distribution 
of food plants predetermined his natural 
diffusion. 

Contrary to popular belief the Indians, 
as a rule, preferred cooked food. The 
Eskimo, whose name signifies ‘ eaters of 
raw flesh’, ate uncooked meat only when 
absence of fuel prohibited cooking, or as 
a side dish. Vegetal food especially re¬ 
quires the agency of fire to render it fit 
for human digestion, whereas animal food 
may be consumed in a raw state, certain 
parts, as the liver, often being eaten in 
this way. All the edible portions of the 
animal were put to use, and in many cases 
both animal and vegetal substances ad¬ 
vanced toward putrefaction were pre¬ 
ferred, as salmon eggs which were stored 
in sand, by the Alaskans, and immature 


468 


FOOD 


[B. a. e. 


corn in the ear which the Hurons are said 
to have soaked in water until it became 
putrid, when soup was made of it. 

Among the Pueblo Indians cooking is 
carried to a remarkable degree of profi¬ 
ciency, approaching in variety and meth¬ 
ods the artamongcivilized peoples. _ Most 



STONE-BOILING—LIFTING THE HOT STONES INTO THE FOOD 
BASKET; CALIFORNIA INDIANS. (HOLMES) 


tribes knew how to prepare savory and 
nourishing dishes, some of which have 
been adopted by civilized peoples (see 
Hominy , Maize , Samp, Succotash, etc.). 
The methods of cooking among the meat- 
eating tribes were, in order of importance, 



STONE-BOILING—REMOVING THE STONES FROM THE BOILING 
BASKET; CALIFORNIA INDIANS. (hOLMEs) 


broiling, roasting, and boiling, the last- 
named process often being that known as 
“stone boiling.” The tribes whose diet 
was approximately vegetarian practised 
all the methods. (See Ovens.) 

The preparation of maize as food in¬ 
volved almost numberless processes, vary¬ 
ing with the tribes. In general, when 
maize reached the edible stage the ears 
were roasted in pit ovens, and after the 
feasting the surplus of roasted ears was 
dried for future use. The mature grain 
was milled raw or parched, the meal en¬ 
tering into various mushes, cakes, pones, 
wafers, and other bread. The grain was 
soaked in lye obtained from wood ashes to 
remove the horny envelope and was then 
boiled, forming hominy; this in turn was 
often dried, parched and ground, re’- 
parched and reground, making a concen¬ 
trated food of great nourishing power in 
small bulk, which was consumed dry or 
in water as gruel. Pinole, consisting of 


ground parched corn, forms the favorite 
food of S. W. desert tribes. The fermenta¬ 
tion of corn to make beer was not gener¬ 
ally practised, and it is doubtful if the 
process w r as known in America before 
the discovery. A yeast formed by chew¬ 
ing corn has long been known to the Zufii 
and Hopi at least, and the former know 
how to preserve it through the agency of 
salt. (See Fermentation .) 

The Iroquois and other eastern tribes 
cooked maize with beans, meat, or vege¬ 
tables. The Pueblos add wood-ash lye to 
their “paper bread,” and prepare their 
bread and mushes with meat, greens, or 
oily seeds and nuts, besides using condi¬ 
ments, especially chile. 

Vegetal food stuffs were preserved by 
drying, and among the less sedentary 
tribes were strung or tied in bundles for 
facility of transportation or storage. The 
preservation of maize, mesquite beans, 
acorns, etc., gave rise to granaries and 
other storage devices. Animal food, from 
its perishable character, was often dried 
or frozen, but at times was preserved by 
smoking. Dried meat was sometimes pul¬ 
verized and mixed with berries, grease, 
etc., formingpemmican (q. v.), valued for 
use on journeys on account of its keeping 
properties. Fruits were pulped and dried 
for preservation. Nuts were often ground 
before being stored, as were also maize, 
grass seeds, and the legumes. Tubers 
were frequently stored in the ground or 
near the fireplace; the Virginian tribes 
preserved tubers for winter use in this 
way. (S ee Agriculture, Storage.) 

Infusions of leaves, roots, etc., of vari¬ 
ous herbs were drunk by the Indians as 
medicine (see Black drink), but no stim¬ 
ulating beverage of the character of tea or 
coffee has been observed. Drinks made 
from fruit, as cider from manzanita ber¬ 
ries, used by the tribes of California, and 
a beverage made from cactus fruit by the 
Pima and neighboring tribes of Arizona, 
are the fermented beverages best known. 

In addition to the reports of the Bureau 
of American Ethnology, consult Barber, 
Moqui Food Preparation, Am. Nat., xn, 
456,1878; Barrows, Ethnobotany of Coa- 
huilla Inds., 1900; Carr, Food of Certain 
American Indians and their Method of 
Preparing It, Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc., x, 
155-190, 1895; Cabeza de Vaca, Narr., 
Smith trans., 1871; Coville, Wokas, A 
Primitive Food of the Klamath Inds., 
1902; Cushing, Zuni Breadstuffs, The 
Millstone, ix and x, Indianapolis, 1884- 
85; Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xvn, pt. 3,1905; Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., 
ix, 1896; Goddard in Univ. Cal. Publ., 
Am. Archaeol. andEthnol., i, 1903; Holm, 
Descr. New Sweden, 1834; Hough (1) in 
Am. Anthrop., x, 1897, (2) ibid., xi, 
1898; Jenkins, The Moki Bread, Pop. Sci. 










l>t’LL. 30] 


FOOLISH DOGS-FORT ANCIENT 


469 


Month., Jan., 1900; Jenks in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1900; Mason (1) Migration and 
the Food Quest, Smithsonian Rep., 1894, 
(2) Aboriginal American Zootechny, Am. 
Anthrop., i, Jan., 1899; Palmer (1) in 
Am. Nat., xn, 402, 1878, (2) in Rep. 
Com’r of Agr. 1870, 1871; Payne, Hist. 
America, i, 376-400, 1892; Powers in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 1877; Sagard- 
Theodat, Grand Voy., 1632, repr. 1865; 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57; 
Sturtevant, Indian Corn and the Indian, 
Am. Nat., xix, 225, 1885. See also the 
bibliographies under the articles above 
cited. (w. h.) 

Foolish Dogs. An Hidatsa band accord¬ 
ing to Culbertson (Smithson. Rep., 1850, 
143, 1851), but properly a warrior society. 

Footprint sculptures. Among relics of 
undetermined use and significance left 
by the vanished tribes are numerous rep¬ 
resentations of human footprints, often 
regarded as actual footprints made while 
the rock material was still plastic. They 
are sculptured in slabs or masses, gener¬ 
ally of sandstone, 
and show varying 
degrees of skill in 
execution. Repre¬ 
sentations of tracks 
of men and beasts 
also occur fre¬ 
quently in picto- 
graphs painted and 
sculptured on rock 
surfaces (see Track 
rock). In this con¬ 
nection they prob¬ 
ably served to des¬ 
ignate particular 
creatures or beings, 
the direction of their movements, the 
number of individuals, etc., but the larger 
well-sculptured footprints represented in 
museum collections probably had special 
significance as the reputed tracks of an¬ 
cestors, of giants, or monsters, and may 
have been designed by cunning persons 
to deceive the uninitiated. The carvings 
represent sometimes a single footprint 
and again two or more in association, and 
are usually shallow, beingrarely more than 
an inch in depth (see Pictography , Prob¬ 
lematical objects). Consult Rau in Smith- 
son. Cont., xxii, 22, 1876. (w. h. h.) 

Foreman, Stephen. A Cherokee who 
became an active coworker with the Pres¬ 
byterian missionaries among his people. 
He received an elementary education at 
the mission school at Candy’s Creek, w. 
of Cleveland, Tenn., and after pursuing 
some preparatory studies under Rev. S. A. 
Worcester at New Echota, Ga., spent a 
year at Union Theological Seminary in 
Virginia and another at Princeton, N. J., 
in the study of theology. He was licensed 
to preach by the Union Presbytery of 


Tennessee about Oct. 1, 1833. Foreman 
is said to have preached with animation 
and fluency in the Cherokee language. 
With Mr Worcester he translated the 
Psalms and a large part of Isaiah into 
the Cherokee language.—Pilling, Bibliog. 
Iroq. Lang., Bull. B. A. E., 1888. 

Forked Horn. One of the Dakota bands 
below L. Traverse, Minn.; probably Wah- 
peton or Sisseton.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 102, 
1859. 

Forks of the River Men. A band of the 
Arapaho, q. v. 

Fort Ancient. A prehistoric Indian for¬ 
tification in Warren co., Ohio. It is sit¬ 
uated on a headland, from 260 to 280 ft 
high, which projects from a plateau and 
overlooks the e. bank of Miami r. The 
slopes are mostly steep and in several 
places precipitous. The place is naturally 
a strong one, the elevated area being 
flanked by two ravines that approach each 
other some distance back from the point 
of the bluff, forming a peninsula of this 
front part with a narrow isthmus behind 
it. This divides 
the fort into two 
unequal portions, 
the smaller one 
embracing the 
peninsula known 
as the “Old Fort,” 
the other, known 
as the “New Fort,” 
extending back 
and eastwardly on 
the plateau to a sec¬ 
ond butwider neck 
of land. The total 
area is estimated 
at about 100 acres. 
The wall, w'hich is chiefly of earth, follows 
closely the zigzag course of the bluff, ex¬ 
cept where it crosses the level neck of land 
in the rear of the fort. The work has been 
often described and figured, the firstnotice 
and plan being that given in the “Port¬ 
folio ’ ’ (1809), from which Atwater’s plan 
and description (Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 
i, 1820) appear to have been in large part 
copied. About 20 years later a survey 
was made by Locke, whose description 
and plat appear in Trans. Assn. Am. Geol¬ 
ogists, i, 1843. Locke’s plat was copied 
by Squier and Davis, and is the one from 
which most subsequent figures have been 
taken; it is accurate in the main, but the 
elementshavesomewhat changed thecon- 
figuration in subsequent years, additional 
ravines having been formed by water 
breaking through the wall at certain 
points. Evidences of wearing are ob¬ 
servable at some of the ravines crossed by 
the wall, and a few of the smaller gullies 
appear to have been worn since the wall 
was built, although in most cases the 
adaptation of the wall to the slopes shows 



FORT ANCIENT EMBANKMENT 







470 


FORTIFICATION AND DEFENSE 


[B. A. 13. 


that these existed when it was erected. 
That gaps were left in the wall at the bot¬ 
tom of the few deep ravines that it crosses 
is evident from the form of the wall at 
these points, but nothing remains to in¬ 
dicate how these gaps were closed in case 
of attack. Although the wall is built 
chiefly of earth (mostly of clay) cast up 
from an inside ditch, it is partially under¬ 
laid at numerous points with stone. The 
total length of the wall, following all the 
bends, is 18,712 ft, or a little more than 
3| m.; the height varies from 6 to 10 ft, 
except across the neck at the back of the 
fort where it reaches 18 or 19 ft. The 
solid contents 
probably do not 
exceed 3,000,000 
cu. ft. 

That Ft An¬ 
cient, so called, 
is a work of de¬ 
fense is evident 
from its charac¬ 
ter and situa¬ 
tion, exhibited 
especially by 
the different 
methqds adopt¬ 
ed for defending 
its more vulner¬ 
able points. The 
only level ap¬ 
proach was at 
the rear, which 
was protected 
by a high wall. 

On the n. the 
points more eas¬ 
ily approached 
are usually nar¬ 
row, sloping 
ridges, gener¬ 
ally crossed at 
the upper termi¬ 
nus by a wall of 
ordinary height, 
the ridge imme¬ 
diately outside being cut down several 
feet in order to present a steep slope cor¬ 
responding to the outer slope of the wall. 
On the other hand, where similar ridges 
form approaches from the s., and at some 
other points, the defenses are formed by 
raising the wall considerably above the 
normal height. The most vulnerable 
point appears to be at the isthmus sepa¬ 
rating the two forts, where the opposite 
walls have their nearest approach. Here 
a short space was undefended, though 
the ascent is by no means difficult. A 
short distance e. of the posterior wall of 
the new fort are two small mounds, a 
short distance apart, from each of which 
extends a low wall, or road as Atwater 
terms it, elevated about 3 ft, running 
nearly parallel about £ m., and forming 


an irregular semicircle about another 
small mound. A part of the area be¬ 
tween these walls was paved with flat 
stones, remains of which now lie at a 
depth of 2 ft in the soil. Several small 
mounds and a number of stone graves 
which contained human remains were 
within the fort; these were explored by 
Moorehead, but nothing of special interest 
was found except the human remains. 
The greater portion of the area included 
in this inclosure is now the property of 
the State of Ohio and has been made a 
reservation under the care of the Ohio 
Archaeological and Historical Society. 

The first pur¬ 
chase w r as made 
in accordance 
with an act of 
the legislature, 
Apr. 28, 1890, 
and the second 
purchase in pur¬ 
suance of the act 
of Apr. 16,1896. 

For further in¬ 
formation see, in 
addition to the 
works cited, Al¬ 
len, Prehistoric 
World, 1885; 
Drake, Pictures 
of Cincinnati, 
1815; Howe, His¬ 
torical Collec¬ 
tions of Ohio, 
1898; MacLean, 
Mound Build¬ 
ers, 1879; Moore¬ 
head, Fort An¬ 
cient, 1890; Peet 
in Am. Antiq., 
Apr., 1878; Shep¬ 
herd, Antiqui- 
tiesofOhio,1887; 
Thomas in Sci¬ 
ence, vm, Dec. 
10, 1886.. (c. t.) 

Fortification and Defense. The simplest 
defenses were furnished to the Indians 
by nature. In the forest regions battles 
were fought in the shelter of trees, and 
in stony sections from sheltering rocks. 
That war was waged and defensive meas¬ 
ures were necessary in prehistoric times 
is shown by the remains of fortifications 
in the mound area of the United States. 
These are of different types, the most 
common being the so-called hill forts, 
where defensive walls of earth or stone 
surround a peak or hilltop or skirt a bluff 
headland, as at Ft Ancient (q. v.), Ohio. 
There are also circular, square, octagonal, 
and other inclosures on the lowlands which 
are generally supposed to have been built 
for defensive purposes, but they could 
hardly have been effectual unless stock- 










BULL. 30] 


FORT YUKON 


471 


aded. There are, or were until recently, 
earthen embankments and inclosures in 
New York which, as Squier has shown, 
mark the sites of palisaded forts similar to 
those of the Iroquois observed by Cham¬ 
plain and Cartier. These were often po¬ 
lygonal, of double or triple stockades, as 
that at Hochelaga which Cartier says was 
of “three courses of rampires, one within 
another.” Some were strengthened by 
braces and had beams running round 
them near the top, where stones and 
other missiles were placed ready to be 
hurled upon besiegers. The walls of some 
of these fortifications were 20 ft high. One 
of the polygonal forts in w. New York, 
however, was overlooked by a hill from 
which arrows could easily be shot into the 
inclosure. Most of the early figures of these 
forts represent them as having a single 
entrance between overlapping ends of the 
stockade; there is one, however (Under¬ 
hill, News from America, 1638), which 
shows two overlappings. When first seen 
by the whites most of the villages from 
Florida to the Potomac were protected 
with surrounding stockades, which are 
represented in De Bry as single with one 
opening where the ends overlap. The 
construction of these surrounding pali¬ 
sades was practically the same, whether 
they inclosed a single house or 50 houses. 
In some sections a ditch was usually dug, 
both within and outside of the palisade. 
A few of the forts in s. New England were 
square, but the circular form generally 
prevailed (Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., 
viii, no. 1, 1906). The fortress built by 
King Philip in the swamp at South Ken¬ 
sington, R. I., consisted of a double row of 
palisades, flanked by a great abatis, outside 
of which was a deep ditch. At one corner 
a gap of the length of one log was left as an 
entrance, the breastwork here being only 
4 or 5 ft high; and this passage was de¬ 
fended by a well-constructed blockhouse, 
whilst the ditch was crossed by a single 
log which served as a bridge. Stockaded 
villages were also common as far w. as 
Wisconsin. Stone walls, which C. C. 
Jones considered defensive, have been 
observed on Stone mtn., Mt Yona, and 
other peaks of n. Georgia. Be Soto found 
strongly fortified villages in his passage 
through the Gulf states and Arkansas. 

Vancouver (Voy., hi, 289, 1798) men¬ 
tions villages on Kupreanof id., situated 
on the summits of steep, almost inacces¬ 
sible rocks and fortified with strong plat¬ 
forms of wood laid upon the most elevated 
part of the rock, which projected at the 
sides so as to overhang the declivity. At 
the edge of the platform there was usu¬ 
ally a sort of parapet of logs placed 
one upon another. This type, accord¬ 
ing to Swanton, was quite common on 
the N. W. coast. The Skagit tribe, ac¬ 


cording to Wilkes, combined dwellings 
and forts, and a similar custom was fol¬ 
lowed by some of the Haida clans. 
Wilkes mentions also inclosures 400 ft 
long, which were constructed of pickets 
about 30 ft long thrust deep into the 
ground, the interior being divided into 
roofed lodges. The Clallam also had a 
fort of pickets, 150 ft square, roofed over, 
and divided into compartments for fami¬ 
lies. No stockades seem to have been 
used by the Ntlakyapamuk, but for¬ 
tresses or fortified houses were at one time 
in use in a few places. These defenses, 
according to Boas, consisted of logs placed 
lengthwise on the ground one above an¬ 
other and covered with brush and earth, 
loopholes being left at places between the 
logs. According to the same authority, 
some of the stockades of British Columbia 
were provided with underground passages 
as a means of escape. It has been a general 
custom of the Indians of the plains, when 
in danger of being attacked by a superior 
force, to dig a pit or pits in the loose, gener¬ 
ally sandy soil, throwing the earth around 
the margin to increase the height of the 
defense, the bank of a creek or a gully 
being selected when within reach, as 
defense of one side only was necessary. 
Native drawings of some of these defenses 
are given by Mooney (17th Rep. B. A. E., 
271-274, 1898). In the S. W. the cliff- 
dwellings (q. v.) were places of security, 
easy of defense. The large compound 
structures known as pueblos (q. v.), in 
which the lower stories formerly had few 
or no wall openings, were fortifications as 
well as habitations, while in some cases 
the mesas on which they are built are in 
themselves well-nigh impregnable. In 
the drainage area of the Gila and Salado 
of s. Arizona there were defensive struc¬ 
tures, as shown by their massive walls, in 
which the former inhabitants could take 
refuge in time of danger. Many of the 
isolated peaks of s. Arizona, n. Sonora, 
and Chihuahua contain the remains of 
stone breastworks and fortifications. See 
Architecture, Casa Grande , Cliff-dwellings , 
Habitations, Mounds, Pueblos, War and, 
War discipline. 

In addition to the authorities cited, con¬ 
sult Bancroft, Native Races, i, 1886; Bry, 
Collectiones Peregrinationem, 1590-1634; 
Jesuit Relations, Thwaites ed., i-lxxiii, 
1896-1901; V. Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. 

A. E., 1891; C. Mindeleff in 13th and 16th 
Reps. B. A. E., 1896, 1897; Squier, Antiq. 
ofN. Y., 1851; Squier and Bavis, Ancient 
Monuments, 1848; Thomas in 12th Rep. 

B. A. E.,1894. (c. t.) 

Fort Yukon. A Kutchakutchin village 

and trading post of 107 inhabitants at the 
junction of Yukon and Porcupine rs., 
Alaska.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
62, 1884. 


472 


FOSKEY-FOXES 


[B. a. E. 


Foskey. See Black drink , Busk. 

Fotshou’s Village. A summer camp of 
one of the Taku chiefs of the Tlingit 
named Gochaf; 24 people were there in 
1880.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32, 
1884. 

Fountain. A band of Upper Lillooet, 
inhabiting, with the Shuswap, the village 
of Huhilp, on the e. bank of Fraser r., 
above Lillooet, Brit. Col.; pop. 205 in 
1904.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. n, 73, 1905. 

Four Creek Tribes. A collective name 
for the Yokuts tribes or bands that re¬ 
sided on the four streams tributary to L. 
Tulare, Cal.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 80, 1853; 
Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 511, 1854. 

Four Mile Ruin. A prehistoric ruin on 
a branch of the Little Colorado, 4 m. 
from Snowflake, Navajo co., Ariz. The 
ruin was excavated in 1897 by the Bureau 
of American Ethnology, the mortuary 
deposits unearthed indicating relations 
with both Zuni and Hopi clans. See 
Fewkesin22dRep. B. A. E., 136-164,1904. 

Four Nations. Mentioned with the Ka- 
wita and Kasihta as having a conference 
with the English near the mouth of Apa¬ 
lachicola r., Fla., in 1814 (Hawkins in 
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 859, 1832). 
Probably the Oakfuskee, with their 3 vil¬ 
lages on the Chattahoochee, were meant. 

(a. s. g.) 

Fowl Town. A former Seminole town 
in n. w. Florida, about 12 m. e. of Ft Scott, 
on Apalachicola r. at the Georgia bound¬ 
ary, containing about 300 inhabitants in 
1820. The name has been given also in 
the plural as though including more than 
one town. It is distinct from Tutalosi, 
also called Fowl Town. 

Foul Town.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 4,64,1848. Fowl 
Towns.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364,1822. 

Foxes (trans. in plural of wagosh, ‘red 
fox/ the name of a clan). An Algon- 
quian tribe, so named, according to Fox 
tradition recorded by Dr William Jones, 
because once while some Wagoliug 1 , 
members of the Fox clan, were hunting, 
they met the French, who asked who 
they were; the Indians gave the name of 
their clan, and ever since the whole tribe 
has been known by the name of the Fox 
clan. Their own name for themselves, 
according to the same authority, is MSsh- 
kwa'kihug*, ‘ red-earth people,’ because 
of the kind of earth from which they are 
supposed to have been created. They 
were known to the Chippewa and other 
Algonquian tribes as Utugamig, ‘people 
of the other shore’. 

When they first became known to the 
whites, the Foxes lived in the vicinity of 
L. Winnebago or along Fox r., Wis. Ver- 
wyst (Missionary Labors, 178, 1886) says 
they were on Wolf r. when Allouez visited 
them in 1670. As the tribe was inti¬ 


mately related to the Sauk, and the two 
were probably branches of one original 
stem, it is probable that the early migra¬ 
tions of the former corresponded some¬ 
what closely with those of the latter. 
The Sauk came to Wisconsin through 
the lower Michigan peninsula, their tra¬ 
ditional home having been n. of the 
lakes, and were comparatively new¬ 
comers in Wisconsin when they first 
became known to the French. One of 
their important villages was for some time 
on Fox r. The conclusion of Warren 
(Hist. Ojibways, 95, 1885) that the Foxes 



FOX CHIEF 


early occupied the country along the s. 
shore of L. Superior and that the incom¬ 
ing Chippewa drove them out, has the 
general support of Fox tradition. Nev¬ 
ertheless there is no satisfactory histor¬ 
ical evidence that the Foxes ever re¬ 
sided farther n. than Fox r. in Wis¬ 
consin, and in none of their treaties 
with the United States have they 
claimed land n. of Sauk co. This restless 
and warlike people was the only Algon¬ 
quian tribe against whom the French 
waged war. In addition to their dispo¬ 
sition to be constantly at strife with their 








BULL. 30] 


FOXES 


473 


neighbors, they had conceived a hatred 
of the French because of the aid which 
the latter gave the Chippewa and others 
by furnishing firearms, and because they 
gathered the various tribes for the pur¬ 
pose of destroying the Foxes. The 
proposal to exterminate them was 
seriously considered in the French coun¬ 
cils, and their destruction would earlier 
have been attempted but for the pleas 
interposed by Nicolas Perrot. Their 
character is briefly described by Charle¬ 
voix (Shea trans., v, 305, 1881) when he 
says they “infested with their robberies 
and filled with murders not only the 
neighborhood of the Bay [Green bay], 
their natural territory, but almost all the 
routes communicating with the remote 
colonial posts, as well as those leading 
from Canada to Louisiana. Except the 
Sioux, who often joined them, and the 
Iroquois, with whom they had formed an 
alliance, ... all the nations in alliance 
with us suffered greatly from these hos¬ 
tilities.” It was this tribe that in 1712 
planned the attack on the fort at Detroit, 
and but for the timely arrival of friendly 
Indians and the bravery of the French 
commandant, Buisson, would undoubt¬ 
edly have destroyed it. They were 
almost constantly at war with the Illinois 
tribes s. of them, and finally succeeded, 
in conjunction with the Sauk, in driving 
them from a large part of their country, 
of which they took possession. From 
their earliest known history they were 
almost constantly at war with the Chip¬ 
pewa dwelling n. of them, but usually 
without decided success, though often 
aided by the Sioux. It was by the Chip¬ 
pewa, together with the Potawatomi, 
Menominee, and the French, that their 
power was finally broken. About 1746, 
and perhaps for some few years pre¬ 
vious, the Foxes lived at the Little 
Butte des Morts on the w. bank of 
Fox r., about 37 m. above Green bay. 
They made it a point, whenever a trader’s 
boat approached, to place a torch upon 
the bank as a signal for the traders to 
come ashore and pay the customary trib¬ 
ute, which they exacted from all. To 
refuse was to incur their displeasure, and 
robbery would be the mildest penalty 
inflicted. Incensed at this exaction, 
Morand, a leading trader, raised a volun¬ 
teer force of French and Indians, and 
after inflicting severe punishment on the 
Foxes in two engagements drove them 
down Wisconsin r. They settled on the 
n. bank about 20 m. from the mouth. 
About 1780, in alliance with the Sioux, 
they attacked the Chippewa at St Croix 
falls, where the Foxes were almost anni¬ 
hilated. The remnant incorporated with 
the Sauk, and although long officially 
regarded as one, the two tribes have pre¬ 
served their identity. 


According to Dr William Jones (inf’n, 
1906) the culture of the Foxes is that of 
the tribes of the eastern woodlands with 
some intrusive streaks from the plains. 
They w’ere acquainted with wild rice, 
and raised corn, beans, squashes, and 
tobacco. They lived in villages in sum¬ 
mer, the bark house being the type of 
the warm-weather dwelling; in winter 
they scattered and dwelt in oval flag- 
reed lodges. The social organization is 
rigid and is based on gentes with mar¬ 
riage outside of the gens. The gens and, 
with some exceptions, the name, followed 
the father. The Fox gentes are the Bear, 
Fox, Wolf, Elk, Big Lynx, Buffalo, 
Swan, Pheasant, Eagle, Sea, Sturgeon, 
Bass, Thunder, and Bear Potato. The 
mythology of the Foxes is rich. Beast 
fable prevails. The deities are many and 
some have clear definite character. The 
principal deity is Wisa'kir 1 , the culture 
hero. His brother is Kiyapa'ta a , or 
Chlpayabosw® 1 , who presides over the 
spirit world at the setting of the sun. 
The belief in a cosmic substance called 
mtinllowtvfi, or rnunitowlwlni , is an essen¬ 
tial element in their philosophy. Ob¬ 
jects, animate or inanimate, imbued 
with this substance become the recipients 
of marked adoration. The Foxes prac¬ 
tise many ceremonies, the principal one 
being the feast festival of the gentes. 
There is probably no other Algonquian 
community within the limits of the 
United States, unless it be that of the 
Mexican band of Kickapoo in Oklahoma, 
where a more primitive state of society 
exists. 

Besides being warlike, the Foxes were 
described by neighboring tribes as stingy, 
avaricious, thieving, passionate, and quar¬ 
relsome; their bravery, however, was 
proverbial. Like most of the tribes of 
the region of the great lakes they were 
polygamists. They were familiar with 
both dug-out and birch-bark canoes. 
Spears and clubs were among their 
weapons of war. Schoolcraft states that 
a band of warriors seen by him wore 
headdresses consisting of red-dyed horse¬ 
hair tied in such manner to the scalplock 
as to present the shape of the decoration 
of a Roman helmet. The rest of the 
head was completely shaved and painted. 
They wore breech-cloths, moccasins, and 
leggings, and the upper part of their 
bodies was painted; often the print of a 
hand in white clay was marked on the 
back or shoulder. They bore flags of 
feathers. Their “coat of arms” is de¬ 
scribed by Laliontan in heraldic terms: 
“A meadow sinople, crossed by a wind¬ 
ing pale, with two foxes’ gules at the two 
extremities of the river, in chief and 
point”—in other words, as his figure 
shows, an oblique mark representing a 
stream, with a fox at each end on oppo- 


474 


FOXES-FRANCISCO 


[b. a. e. 


site sides. He explains this “coat of 
arms” as the mark or symbol which, 
after a victory or successful raid, they 
paint on trees. (See Owen, Folk-lore of 
the Musquakie Inds., 1904.) 

Guignes estimated them in 1728 at 200 
warriors, but most of the estimates before 
the last half century give them from 1,500 
to 2,000 souls. Lewis and Clark estimated 
them at 300 warriors, or 1,200 souls, in 
1805. Since about 1850 the two tribes 
have been enumerated together. The 345 
‘ ‘Sauk and Fox of Mississippi ’ ’ still (1905) 
in Iowa are said to be all Foxes. There 
are also 82 “Sauk and Fox of Missouri” 
under the Kickapoo school in Kansas. 
See ; Sauk. ( j. m. c. t. ) 

Be-sde'-ke.— Riggs, Dakota Diet., 34, 1852 (Dakota 
name). Cutagamies. —Lapham, Inds. of Wis., 16, 
1870 (misprint). Dutagamis. —Lahontan, New 
Voy., i, 172, 1703 (misprint). Boxers. —Dalton 
(1783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 123, 1809. 
Foxes. —Albany conf. (1737) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vi, 104, 1855. Mechecaukis. —French trader 
(1766) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 554, 
1853. Mechecou'akis.— French trader quoted by 
Smith, Bouquet’sExped., 69,1766. Mechuouakis. — 
Heckewelder quoted by Buchanan, Sketches of 
N. Am. Inds., 156, 1824. Meskwa ki'ag 1 . —Jones in 
Am. Anthrop., vi, 370,1904 (‘red-earth people’: 
own name). Messenacks. —Hennepin, New Dis- 
cov., 230,1698 (Sioux name). Messenecqz.— Henne¬ 
pin (1683) quoted by Shea, Discov. Miss. Val., 134, 
1852. Miscouaquis.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. 
Miskwukeeyuk.— Jones, Ojebway Inds., 178, 1861 
(trans. * red-earth men ’; said to be so called from 
wearing red blankets). Moshkos. —Loskiel (1794) 
quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 336, 1872 
(maybe Mascouten). Mus-kwa-ka-uk.— Morgan, 
Consang. and Affin., 288, 1871. Muskwake. —Tan¬ 
ner, Narr., 325, 1830. Muskwaki. —McGee in Am. 
Anthrop., xi, 88, 1898. Musquacki. —Maximilian, 
Trav., 106, 1843. Mus-quack-ki-uck. —Ibid. Mus- 
quakees. —Croghan (1759) quoted by Rupp, West 
Penn., 146, 1846. Musquakes. —Ibid., app., 132. 
Musquakies. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 161, note, 
1855. Musquakkink.— Meigs in Smithson. Rep. 
1867, 414,1872. Musquattamies. —Croghan (1765) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vil, 780,1856. Musquawkee. — 
Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voy., ii, 26,1847. Mus- 
quiakis. —Army officer (1812) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 555,1853. Odagami.— Kelton, 
Ft Mackinac, 154, 1884. Odagumaig. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, V, 39, 1855. O-dug-am-eeg. —Warren 
(1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 33,1885 (Chip¬ 
pewa name: ‘those who live on the opposite 
side’; from agaming, ‘on the other side of the 
water,’ and od, a personal and tribal prefix). 
Odugamies. —Ibid., 242. O-dug-aumeeg. —Ramsey 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83,1850. Onlogamies. —Bracken- 
ridge, La., 16, note, 1815 (misprint). Ontagamies. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 184,1855. Ootagamis. — 
Maximilian, Trav., 102, 1843. Osheraca. —Morse, 
Rep. to Sec. War, 21, 1822 (Winnebago name). 
Otagaxnies. —Kendall, Trav., II, 295, 1809. Otoga- 
mies. —Hutchins (1778) quoted by Jefferson, 
Notes, 144, 1825. Ottagamies. —Boudinot, Star in 
the West, 128,1816. Ottagaumies. —Carver, Trav., 
105, 1778. Ot.tar-car-me. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, vil, 93, 1905. Ot-tar-gar-me.— Lewis and 
Clark, Trav., 30, 1806. Ottigamie. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, ii, 335, 1852. Ottigaumies. —Carver, 
Trav., 39,1778. Otliquamies.— Pike, Trav., 30,1811. 
Ottogamis.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 266, 1816. 
Ouagoussac.— Jes. Rel. for 1673, quoted by Lapham, 
Inds. Wis., 4,1870 (plural of wagosh, ‘ fox ’). Outa- 
gami. —Jes. Rel. for 1667,21,1858. Outagamie-ock.— 
Owen, Folk-lore of Musquakie Inds., 18, 1904 
(‘other side of river people’). Outagamiouek.— 
Ibid. Outagamy.— Ibid. Outagomies. —Minn. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., v, 32, note, 1885. Outaouagamis. —Hen¬ 
nepin (1683), La., 119, 1698. Outigamis. —Nuttall, 
Jour., 184, 1821. Outoagamis. —Hennepin, New 


Discov., 257,1698. Outogamis. —Coxe,Carolana, 48, 
1741. Outouagamis.— Hennepin, New Discov., 244, 
1698. Outougamis. —Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. 
Outtagamies. —Croghan (1765) quoted in Monthly 
Am. Jour. Geol., 272, 1831. Outtagaumie.— Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., 513, 1878. Outtagomies. — 
Hutchins (1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 
714, 1857. Outtongamis.— Prise de Possession 
(1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 803, 1855. Out- 
touagamis. —Hennepin, New Discov.,98,1698. Out- 
tougamis.— Prise de Possession (1671) in Margry, 
D6c., I, 97, 1875. Penard. —Esnauts and Rapilly, 
map U. S., 1777 (misprint). Guacksis. —Albany 
conf. (1726) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 791, 1855. 
Red Fox. —McGee in Am. Anthrop., xi, 88, 1898. 
Reiners. —Dalton (1783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., x, 123,1809. Renais. —McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854. Renards. —Du Chesneau 
(1681) in Margry, D6c., II, 267, 1877. Renars. — 
Lewis and Clark, Trav., 15, 1806. Renarz. —Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 93, 1905. Reynards. — 
Pike (1806) quoted in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 
457,1885. Ska\shurunu. —Gatschet, Wyandot MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1881 (‘fox people,’ from skd^shu, 
‘the red fox’: Huron name). Skenchiohro- 
non.— Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858 (Huron name). 
Skuakisagi. —Gatschet, Shawnee MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882 (sing. Skuakisa; Shawnee name, 
from M'skuakisagi) . Squaghkies. —Stone, Life of 
Brant, n, 4, 1864! Squatchegas.— Jour. Maj. Gen. 
Jno. Sullivan, 300, 1887. Squawkiehah.— Conover, 
Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. (Seneca 
name). Squawkihows. —Macauley, N. Y., II, 180, 
1829 (improperly said to be the Erie). To-che- 
wah-coo.— Clark (1804) in Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark,i, 190, 1904 (Ankara name?). Utaganhg. — 
Jones in Am. Anthrop., vi, 370, 1904 (Chippewa 
name: ‘peopleof the other shore’). Wa’gushag. — 
Gatschet, Ojibwa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1878 
(‘foxes,’ from u'a'gush, ‘fox’; a modern Chippewa 
name). Wakusheg. —Gatschet, Potawatomi MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1878(‘foxes,’ from wakushe', ‘fox ’: 
Potawatomi name, probably recent). 

Foxes. An Arikara band.—Culbertson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 143, 1851. 

Foxes. A gens or secret order of the 
Hidatsa, according to Culbertson (Smith- 
son. Rep. 1850, 143, 1851), but properly 
one of the war and dance societies. 

Francisco. A Yuma chief. The Tonto 
Apache who murdered Royse Oatman 
and most of his family at the Gila bend, 
Ariz., Mar. 18,1850, carried off Olive and 
Mary, the youngest children, 12 and 7 
years of age, into slavery, and in 1852 sold 
them to the Mohave. These Indians 
treated them better than had the Tonto 
until a famine came, during which Mary 
died from starvation and cruelty. Young 
Lorenzo Oatman, who had escaped after 
being left for dead, endeavored to interest 
people in California in the fate of his 
sisters, but a searching party sent out 
from Ft Yuma returned without finding 
trace of them. Finally Francisco, who 
happened to be at the fort in Jan., 1856, 
betrayed knowledge of the lost girls, and, 
impressed with fear of the troops, said he 
would bring the surviving captive if he 
had four blankets and some beads to pay 
for her. When Francisco came to the 
village the Mohave denied having Olive, 
having stained her skin with berries, but 
she spoke out and told who she was. 
Francisco then addressed them with such 
eloquent conviction that they consented 
to release the girl, and on the day set he 


BULL. 30] 


FRANCIS THE PROPHET—FRENCH INFLUENCE 


475 


brought her to the fort, where she was 
soon joined by her brother. Owing to his 
service in saving his tribe from chastise¬ 
ment by the militia, or to the rewards and 
praise he received from the whites, Fran¬ 
cisco was chosen chief. He grew over¬ 
bearing, but remained friendly to the 
whites. To this friendship his people 
attributed the ill luck that befell them in 
a raid that the river tribes undertook in 
1857 against the Maricopa. The latter, 
reenforced by the Papago, won the battle 
at Maricopa wells, Ariz. Of 75 Yuma 
warriors all were slain save 3, and when 
the day turned against them they are be¬ 
lieved to have killed the chief who led 
them to disaster. (f. h.) 

Francis the Prophet. See Hillis Hadjo. 

Frankstown. A village, probably of the 
Delawares, which seems to have been 
near the site of the present Frankstown, 
Blair co., Pa., in 1756. (j. m.) 

Franckstown.—Pouchot map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., X, 694, 1858. Franks Town.—Weiser 
(1748) in Rupp, West. Pa., app. 13, 1846. Franks¬ 
town.—Ibid.,20. 

Frauds. See Pseudo Indian. 

Frederiksdal. A Moravian missionary 
station in s. Greenland, close to C. Fare¬ 
well. 

Fredericstahl.—Kane, Arct. Explor., 1,453,1856. 

Frederikshaab. A missionary station in 
s. w. Greenland.—Crantz, Hist. Green¬ 
land, i, map, 1767. 

French Indians. A term used by early 
English writers to designate the tribes in 
the French interest, especially the Abnaki 
and their congeners on the New England 
frontier. 

French influence. The influence of the 
French colonists on the Indians began 
very early. The use of glass beads in 
barter gave an impetus to the fur trade, 
and the speedy introduction of other com¬ 
modities of trade led to long-continued 
associations with the Iroquoian tribes in 
particular. The influence of the French 
missionaries on many of the Indian tribes 
was marked; for example, the Montagn- 
ais and the Huron in the early days. 
The supply of peltries was increased by 
furnishing the Indians with firearms, 
which enabled them to travel with im¬ 
punity and gave them a superiority over 
the neighboring tribes which they were 
not slow to take advantage of; hence al¬ 
most from the beginning the French set¬ 
tlers and the government of New France 
came into more or less sympathetic con¬ 
tact with several tribes of the country. 
This state of affairs arose both from the 
peaceful efforts of the missionaries and 
from the desire of the authorities to use 
the aborigines as a bulwark against the 
power of the English in North America. 
To her alliances with the Algonquian 
tribes of the great lakes and the region s. 
and e. of them, including New France 


and Acadia, France owed in great part 
her strength on this continent, while on 
the other hand the confederacy of the 
Iroquois, the natural enemies of the Al¬ 
gonquian peoples, contributed largely to 
her overthrow. The French character 
impelled the colonists to see in the Indian 
a fellow human being, and it is no wonder 
that the greatest intermixture between 
the Indian and the European, n. of the 
Mexican boundary, is represented by the 
mixed-bloods of Canada and the N. W. 
and their descendants, who form no 
small element in the population of these 
regions of civilized America (see Mixed- 
bloods). The French recognized the In¬ 
dian’s pride and prejudices, and won his 
confidence by respecting his institutions 
and often sharing in his ceremonies. 
They ruled while seeming to yield. Least 
of all did. they despise the languages of 
the aborigines, as the rich records of the 
missionaries abundantly prove. The ex¬ 
istence of a large number of mixed-bloods 
able to speak both their own tongue and 
French was a distinct advantage to the 
colonists. The relations between the 
French and the Acadian Indians, as pic¬ 
tured by Lescarbot, were, to use the word 
of Friederici, “idyllic,” though there is 
doubtless some exaggeration in these old 
accounts. 

Several words of French origin crept 
very early into the eastern Algonquian 
tongues, such asMontagnais,Nascapi, and 
Micmac,and later a corresponding French 
element is to be found in the Algonquian 
languages of the region beyond Montreal 
(Chamberlain in Canad. Indian, Feb., 
1891). The Chippewa vocabulary (Carver, 
Trav., 421, 1778) contains the word ka- 
potewian, ‘coat,’ which is the French 
capote , with the Chippewa radical suffix 
-waian, ‘skin.’ In a Missisauga vocabulary 
of 1801 appears napank , ‘flour.’ The 
French bon jour! in the form boju! is now 
the salutation in several Algonquian dia¬ 
lects. From ( les ) anglais is supposed to 
be derived the word for ‘English’ in a 
number of these languages: Micmac 
aglaseaoo, Montagnais agaleshu, Nipis- 
sing aganesha, formerly angalesha , Chip¬ 
pewa shaganash , Cree akaydsiw, etc. An¬ 
other example of French influence is the 
contribution of Canadian French to the 
Chinook jargon (q. v.). There is also a 
French element in the modern tales and 
legends of the Indians of the Canadian 
Northwest and British Columbia, partly 
due to missionary teaching, partly to the 
campfires of the trappers, voyageurs, cou- 
reurs de bois, etc. In tales of the n. Pacific 
coast appears ‘ Shish6 T16* (i. e., J6sus 
Christ), and in some of those of Indians 
on the e. side of the Rocky mts., ‘Mani’ 
(i. e., the Virgin Mary). The French are 
also the subject of many Indian stories 


'476 


FRESNAL-FURNITURE 


t B. A. E. 


from the Atlantic to the Pacific. Among 
the Abnaki intermixture began very early. 
With them the term for mixed-blood is 
malouidit, ‘of (St) Malo,’ indicative of the 
source of the fathers in most of these 
marriages. The wheat introduced from 
France was termed maloumenal, ‘ grains of 
(St) Malo.’ In the 17th century the Ab¬ 
naki called peas wenutsiminar, ‘French 
seeds.’ The Micmac term for apple is 
wenjoosoon, ‘French cranberry.’ In the 
Iroquoian languages an example of French 
influence is seen in Onontiio (‘Big Moun¬ 
tain’), the term applied by the Mohawk 
to the kings of France, which seems to 
translate Montmagny, the name of Cham¬ 
plain’s successor as governor of Canada. 
Another example, noted by Hewitt, is that 
the Mohawk of Caughnawaga and other 
settlements on St Lawrence r. speak far 
more rapidly than do their brethren on 
Grand River res., Ontario, and they also 
have a more copious lexicon of modern 
terms. 

Under the leadership of Mgr. de Laval 
the clergy of New France made strenuous 
opposition to the sale of liquor to the In¬ 
dians, and succeeded in getting Colbert 
to prohibit the traffic; but the necessities 
of the political schemes of Frontenac and 
the fact that the Indians turned to the En¬ 
glish and Dutch, from whom they could 
easily procure rum and brandy, caused 
the reversal of this policy, against the pro¬ 
tests of missionaries and the church. To 
salve their feelings the matter was re¬ 
ferred to the Sorbonne and the Univer¬ 
sity of Toulouse, the former pronouncing 
against the sale of liquor to the Indians, 
the latter declaring it permissible. Finally 
a sort of theoretical prohibition but actual 
toleration of liquor selling* resulted. 

Consult Parkman (1) Jesuits in North 
America, (2) Conspiracy of Pontiac, (3) 
Pioneers of France in the New World, 
and other works; Jesuit Relations, 
Thwaitesed., i-lxxiii, 1896-1901. 

(a. f. c.) 

Fresnal (Span.: ‘ ash grove ’). A Papago 
village, probably in Pima co., s. Ariz.; 
pop. about 250 in 1863.—Poston in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1863, 385, 1864. 

Friedenshuetten (German: ‘huts of 
peace’). A village formerly on Susque¬ 
hanna r. a few miles below Wyalusing, 
and probably in Wyoming co., Pa. It 
was established in 1765 by Maliican and 
Delaware converts under direction of the 
Moravian missionaries, and seems to have 
been on the siteof an older town. In 1770 
the Indians removed to Friedenstadt, in 
Beaver co. According to Loskiel (Miss. 
United Breth., pt. 3,1794) the name Frie¬ 
denshuetten was also applied to a tempo¬ 
rary village adjoining Bethlehem in 
Northampton co., settled in 1746 by Mo¬ 
ravian converts from Shecomico, who 


soon afterward removed to Gnadenhuet- 
ten in Carbon co. (J. m.) 

Freidenshutten.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 
198,1872. FriedenHuetten.—Rupp, Northampton, 
etc., Cos., 86, 1845. Friedenshuetten.—Loskiel 
(1794) in Rupp, West. Pa., app., 355, 1846. Frie- 
denshutten.—Loskiel in Day, Penn., 103, 1843. 

Friedensstadt(Germ.: ‘town of peace’). 
A village in Beaver co., Pa., probably 
near the present Darlington, settled in 
May, 1770, by the Moravian Delawares 
from Friedenshuetten. In 1773 they re¬ 
moved to Gnadenhuetten and Schoen- 
brunn on the Muskingum. See Langun- 
lennenk. (J. m.) 

Friedensstadt. —Loskiel, Missions, map, 1794. 
Friedenstadt. — Ibid., pt. 3,57. Town of Peace. —Ibid . 

Friendly Village. The name given by 
Mackenzie (Voy., 351, 1802) to an Atha¬ 
pascan village, probably of the Takulli, 
on upper Salmon r., Brit. Col., on ac¬ 
count of his kind treatment there. 

Frogtown (trans. of Waldsi'yt, ‘frog 
place’). A former Cherokee settlement 
on a creek of the same name, n. of Dah- 
lonega, Lumpkin co., Ga.—Mooney in 
19th Rep. B. A. E., 545, 1900. 

Fugitive. A former Kaniagmiut Eskimo 
village at Hobson harbor, Sitkalidak id., 
near Kodiak, Alaska.—Lisiansky, Voy., 
178, 1814. 

Furniture. There was little regular fur¬ 
niture among the Indians, as home life 
was simple and wants were few. The 
furniture of the tipi differed from that 
used in the communal dwelling, for the 
character of the habitation controlled its 
furnishing. In all classes of habitations 
seats were generally arranged along the 
walls. Mats of plaited bark or of woven 
rushes and skins dressed only on one side 
were spread as seats, and pillows, for¬ 
merly having skin cases, were stuffed w-ith 
feathers, the hair of the deer or elk, in 
some cases scrapings from the hide, or, 
as in the S., the long gray Spanish moss, 
and used as cushions to sit on. Among 
some tribes a bearskin w Y as the seat of 
honor. In the pueblos seats were of stone, 
or w'ere rectangular stools made from a 
single block of wood, in addition to a ma¬ 
sonry bench extending round or partly 
round the room. In n. California stools 
wero circular in form. In the houses of 
the N. W. coast long settees were placed 
facing the fire, against the partitions that 
marked a family’s space in the communal 
dwelling. 

In the earth lodge and similar habi¬ 
tations stationary couches, which served 
as seats by day and as beds by night, w T ere 
arranged against the walls. These were 
made by planting in the floor four tall 
posts on which were supported two 
shelves, or bunks, of w r attled twigs, on 
which the bedding was placed. Some¬ 
times both shelves w T ere used as beds, but 
generally the upper one was used for stor- 


BULL. 30] 


FURNITURE 


477 


ing the property of the person to whom the 
compartment belonged. In the lodges of 
some tribes, hung on a rod fastened across 
the two front poles was a reed curtain, 
which could be rolled up or dropped to give 
seclusion to the occupant of the berth. An¬ 
other form of bed consisted of a mat of wil¬ 
lows stretched upon a low platform, its 
tapering ends raised and fastened to tri¬ 
pods which formed head and foot boards. 
The skin of an animal, as the buffalo bull, 
killed in winter, was trimmed to fit the bed 
and served as the mattress, on which robes 
or blankets were spread as bedding. Pil¬ 
lows such as are described above were used, 
but in n. California were of wood and were 



BED FRAME OF THE CHIPPEWA. (hOFFMAn) 


used only in the men’s sleeping lodge. 
Little children occupied cradles (q. v.), 
which varied in form and ornamentation, 
but were all constructed on the general 
plan of a portable box and adapted to the 
age of the child. Among some tribes a 
hammock, made by folding a skin about 
two ropes, was hung between posts and 
used to swing children to sleep. A 
crotched stick was thrust slanting into the 
edge of the fireplace, and from the crotch 
hung one or more smaller crotched sticks 
directly over the fire, serving as hooks for 
kettles in cooking. The household meal 



COUCH OF THE PLAINS TRIBES. (mOONEy) 


was often served on a mat. In the dwell¬ 
ings of the corn-growing Plains Indians 
the wooden mortar used for pounding 
maize was set at the right of the entrance 
and held firmly in place by sinking its 
pointed base well into the earthen floor. 
In every habitation a suspended pole or 
rack was placed near the fire for the d ry ing 
of moccasins or other clothing. In the 
Pueblo house the mealing trough occupied 
a corner of the room, and was set at a 
sufficient distance from the wall to per¬ 
mit the women to kneel comfortably at 
their work and face the apartment. The 
trough was of stone and generally con¬ 
tained three metates, varying in coarse¬ 


ness, for hulling, cracking, and mealing 
the grain. Niches in the walls served as 
shelves or closets. Utensils varied with 
the methods of cooking in the different 
parts of the country; they were baskets, 
wooden and pottery vessels, and later 
metal kettles. Household utensils, for 
cooking, eating, and drinking, were usu¬ 
ally kept in or near the space belonging to 
the housewife, and consisted of baskets, 
boxes, platters, and bowls of wood or 
pottery, spoons of horn, wood, gourd, or 
pottery, and ladles. Some of the house¬ 
hold utensils were ornamented with 
carving or painting, and not infrequently 
were treasured as heirlooms. Brooms of 
coarse grass or twigs were used to sweep 
the floor, and the wing of a bird served as 
a brush to keep the central fireplace tidy. 
The Pueblos tied a bunch of coarse grass 
near the middle, using the butt end for 
brushing the hair and the other for sweep¬ 
ing the floor. Some of the Plains and 
Rocky mtn. tribes used a wooden spade¬ 
like implement to remove the snow from 
th e ground about the entrance of the lodge, 
and the Pueblos employed a similar im¬ 
plement for passing bread in and out of 
the ovens. The Plains tribes stored their 
food and other articles in packs made of 
parfleche and ornamented with painted 
designs; for preserving feathers until 
needed the Pueblos used wooden recepta¬ 
cles cut from a single stick, usually of cot¬ 
tonwood, and provided with a counter¬ 
sunk lid; on the N. W. coast elaborately 
carved boxes and trays were made for 
this purpose. 

Mural decoration was confined to the 
Pueblos and the houses on the n. Pacific 
coast. Frequently in the latter the posts, 
beams, and doors were carved and paint¬ 
ed, as were also the screens, which served 
several purposes, domestic and ceremo¬ 
nial. 

In the lodges of the Plains tribes the 
ornamented shields, weapons, saddles, 
bridles, and various accouterments were 
always hung on the posts within the 
lodge, and gave color and decorative effect 
to the otherwise plain interior of the na¬ 
tive dwelling. In winter painted or em¬ 
broidered skins were suspended between 
the inner circle of posts of the earth lodge 
and, like an arras, inclosed the space about 
the fire, adding much to the attractiveness 
of this picturesque habitation. Among 
the Eskimo the stone lamp was the essen¬ 
tial article of the household. It furnished 
light and heat and served as a stove for 
cooking. Such lamps, cut from steatite or 
basalt, cost much labor, and were handed 
down from one generation to another. 
See Boxes and Chests, Dishes, Habitations, 
Implements. 

Consult Boas (1) in Rep. Nat. Mus., 
1895, (2) in 6th Rep. R.A. E., 1888; Dixon 













478 


FUR TRADE 


[b. a. e. 


in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, pt 3, 
1905; Dorsey and Voth in Field Columb. 
Mus. Publ., Anthrop. ser.; J. 0. Dorsey 
in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Goddard in 
Univ. Cal. Publ., Am. Archseol. and 
Ethnol., i, 1903; Hoffman in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896; Holm, Descr. New 
Sweden, 1834; Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus., 
1896; Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xviii, ptl, 1902; Mindeleff in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1891; Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1899. (a. c. f.) 

Fur trade. The fur trade was an im¬ 
portant factor in the conquest and settle¬ 
ment of North America by the French 
and the English. Canada and the great 
W. and N. W. were long little more to 
the world than the ‘ ‘ Fur Country. ’ ’ La- 
hontan (New Voy., i, 53, 1703) said: 

‘ ‘Canada subsists only upon the trade of 
skins or furs, three-fourths of which come 
from the people that live around the great 
lakes.” Long before his time the profit 
to be gained in the fur traffic with distant 
tribes encouraged adventurers to make 
their way to the Mississippi and beyond, 
while the expenses of not a few ambitious 
attempts to reach Cathay or Cipangu 
through a tf. w. passage to the South sea 
were met, not out of royal treasuries, but 
from presents and articles of barter re¬ 
ceived from the Indians. The various fur 
and trading companies established for 
traffic in the regions w. of the great lakes 
and in the Hudson bay country exercised 
a great influence upon the aborigines by 
bringing into their habitat a class of men, 
French, English, and Scotch, who would 
intermarry with them, thus introducing 
a mixed-blood element into the popula¬ 
tion. Manitoba, Minnesota, and Wiscon¬ 
sin in particular owe much of their early 
development to the trader and the mixed- 
blood. The proximity of hunting grounds 
to the settlements beyond the Alleghanies 
favored the free hunter and the single 
trapper, while the remote regions of the 
N. W. could best be exploited by the 
fur companies. The activity of the free 
trapper and solitary hunter meant the 
extermination of the Indian where possi¬ 
ble. The method of the great fur compa¬ 
nies, which had no dreams of empire over 
a solid white population, rather favored 
amalgamation with the Indians as the best 
means of exploiting the country in a ma¬ 
terial way. The French fur companies of 
early days, the Hudson’s Bay Company (for 
two centuries ruler of a large part of what 
is now Canada), the Northwest Company, 
the American Fur Company (in the initi¬ 
ation of which patriotism played a part), 
the Missouri Fur Company, the Russian- 
American Company, the Alaska Commer¬ 
cial Company, and others have influenced 
the development of civilization in North 
America/ The forts and fur-trading sta¬ 


tions of these companies long represented 
to the Indian tribes the white man and 
his civilization. That the Hudson’s Bay 
Company abandoned its line of forts on 
the seacoast and went to the Indian hunt¬ 
ing grounds, ultimately taking possession 
of the vast interior of Canada, was due 
largely to the competition of rival fur 
traders, such as the Northwest Company. 
Intimate contact with Indian tribes was 
thus forced on rather than initiated by the 
Hudson’s Bay Company. The pioneers of 
the fur trade were the solitary trappers 
and buyers, whose successors are the free 
traders on the upper Mackenzie today. 
They blazed the way for canoe trips, fur 
brigadesj tradingposts, and, finally, settle¬ 
ments. It was often at a portage, where 
there were falls or rapids in a river, that 
the early white trader established him¬ 
self. At such places afterward sprang up 
towns whose manufactures were devel¬ 
oped by means of the water power. The 
Indian village also often became a trading 
post and is now transformed into a mod¬ 
ern city. Portages and paths that were 
first used by the Indian and afterward by 
the fur trader are now changed ,to canals 
and highways, but other routes used by 
fur traders are still, in regions of the far 
N., only primitive paths. Some, like 
the grande route from Montreal to the 
country beyond Hudson bay, are followed 
by white men for suinmer travel and 
pleasure. In the N. W. the fur trade 
followed the course of all large streams, 
and in some parts the leading clans de¬ 
rived much of their power from the con¬ 
trol of the waterways. 

The appearance and disappearance of 
fur-bearing animals, their retreat from 
one part of the country to another, influ¬ 
enced the movements of Indian tribes. 
This is particularly true of the movements 
of the buffalo (q. v.), though the decrease 
of other large game was often the compel¬ 
ling motive of tribal migration. The hunt 
of the buffalo led to certain alliances and 
unions for the season of the chase among 
tribes of different stocks, a few of which 
may have become permanent. Thus the 
Kutenai, Sarsi, Siksika, and Atsina have 
all hunted together on the plains of the 
Saskatchewan and the upper Missouri. 
The occasional and finally complete dis¬ 
appearance of the buffalo from these 
regions has weighed heavily upon the 
Indian tribes, the buffalo having been to 
some of them what the bamboo is to the 
Malay and the palm to the West African, 
their chief source of food, fuel, clothing, 
and shelter. The extermination of the wild 
buffalo caused the discontinuance of the 
Kiowa sun dance (Mooney in 17th Rep. B. 
A. E., 346, 349,1898) and affected likewise 
the ceremonies of other tribes. In several 
tribes the buffalo dance was an important 


BULL. 30] 


FU SANG 


479 


ceremony and buffalo chiefs seem to have 
been elected for duty during the hunting 
season. The importance of the northern 
hare, whose skin was used to make coats 
and tipis by certain Indiansof the Canadian 
Northwest, is shown in the designation 
“ Hareskins” for one of the Athapascan 
tribes (Kawchogottine). The Tsattine, 
another Athapascan tribe, received their 
name for a like reason. The Iroquois 
war against the Neutral nation was partly 
due to the growing scarcity of beavers in 
the Iroquois country. The recent inroads 
of the whites upon the muskox of arctic 
Canada are having their effect upon the 
Indian tribes of that region. Bell (Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, xvi, 74, 1903) has noted 
the advance of the free trader on Atha¬ 
basca r. and lake, giving rise to a barbarous 
border civilization, like that of the whaler 
on the shores of Hudson bay and the 
rancher and miner on the Peace and other 
mountain streams, which is having its due 
effect on the natives: “The influx of fur 
traders into the Mackenzie r. region, and 
even to Great Bear lake, within the laSt 
two years, has, I believe, very much altered 
the character of the northern Indians.” 
The effect upon the Indians of the s. At¬ 
lantic region of the coming of the white 
trader was early noted by Adair and 
others. Here, too, the trader not infre¬ 
quently married into the tribe and became 
an agent in modifying aboriginal culture 
by the introduction of European ideas 
and institutions. 

Before the advent of the Europeans the 
fur trade had assumed considerable pro¬ 
portions in various parts of the continent 
(Mason, Rep. Nat. Mus., 586-589, 1894). 
In the 16th century the Pecos obtained 
buffalo skins from the Apache and bar¬ 
tered them again with the Zuni. The 
people of Acoma obtained deerskins from 
the Navaho. The trade between Ottawa 
r. and Hudson bay was well known to the 
Jesuit missionaries in the beginning of the 
17th century. In the time of Lewis and 
Clark the Arikara obtained furs from 
other tribes and bartered them with the 
whites for various articles, and the Skil- 
loot used to get buffalo skins from tribes 
on the upper Missouri to barter off with 
other Indian tribes. TheChilkat proper 
and the Chilkoot even now act as middle¬ 
men in the fur trade between the whites 
and other Indian tribes. The tribes about 
the mouth of the Columbia were also mid¬ 
dlemen, and their commerce influenced 
the conditions of their social institutions, 
making possible, perhaps, slavery, the 
existence of a class of nobles, certain 
changes in the status of women, etc. The 
trade in furs between the Eskimo of 
Alaska and the peoples of extreme n. e. 
Asia existed long before the advent of 
Europeans. At Kotzebue sd. there is 


still held a summer fair (Nelson in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., 229, 1899). Fur-trading 
voyages are common in this region. 

The development of intertribal com¬ 
merce among the Plains Indians was much 
stimulated by the hunt of the buffalo and 
its material rewards. By inducing the 
natives to trap and hunt the wild animals 
of the northern part of the continent on 
a large scale for the sake of their valuable 
skins the fur companies stimulated the 
aboriginal talent in the production and 
use of snares and other devices, even if 
they did not improve the morals of the 
Indians. The introduction of the horse 
(q. v.) and the gun led to the extermina¬ 
tion of the buffalo by Plains Indians and 
whites. In certain parts of the continent 
skins were a basis of value—primitive 
money. A Kutenai, when he draws a 
beaver, produces a picture, not of the 
animal, but of its cured skin. With the 
Eskimo of the Yukon, even before the 
advent of the Russians, the unit of value 
was “one skin”; that is, the skin of the 
full-grown land otter, and of late years 
this has been replaced by the skin of the 
beaver (Nelson, op. cit., 232). Skins of sea 
otters, beavers, and other animals were 
the basis of the wealth, also, of many 
tribes of the n. Pacific coast, until the 
practical extermination of some of these 
species made necessary a new currency, 
provided in the blankets of the Hudson’s 
Bay Company, which were preferred to 
most other substitutes that were offered 
by white men. Toward the interior the 
beaver skin was the ruling unit, and to-day 
in some parts such unit is the skin of the 
muskrat. Among the Kutenai of s. e. 
British Columbia the word for a quarter of 
a dollar is khcinko (‘ muskrat ’). English 
traders reckoned prices in skins and 
French traders in “plus” ( pelus , peaux). 
Indians counted their wealth in skins, 
and in the potlatch of some tribes the skin 
preceded the blanket as a unit of value 
in the distribution. During the colonial 
period furs were legal tender in some 
parts of the country; also at various times 
and places during the pioneer occupancy 
of the W. and N. Altogetherthe fur trade 
may be considered one of the most impor¬ 
tant and interesting phases of the inter¬ 
course between the Europeans and the 
North American Indians. See Buffalo , 
Commerce , Exchange , Trading posts , Trails 
and Trade routes , Travel and Transportation. 

Consult Bryce, Remarkable History of 
the Hudson’s Bay Company, 1900; Chit¬ 
tenden, American Fur Trade of the Far 
West, 1902; Laut, Story of the Trapper, 
1902; Morice, History of Northern British 
Columbia, 1904; Willson, The Great Com¬ 
pany, 1900. (a. f. c.) 

Fu Sang. A land e. of China which, 
according to Chinese annals, was visited 


480 


FUS1H ATCHI- Q AEDI 


[b. a. k. 


in a voyage made by Buddhist monks in 
the 5th century a. d. Some have sought 
to identify it with America; there is good 
reason to believe that Fu Sang was Corea, 
Japan, Sakhalin, or the Liu-kiu ids., or 
all of them. Japan has played a part in 
the myths of the Chinese similar to the 
garden of the Hesperides in Greek story. 
DeGuignes was an early propagator of the 
Fu Sang theory; more recent advocates 
were C. G. Leland (Fu-Sang, 1875) and 
Vining (An Inglorious Columbus, 1885). 
Arguments on the other side have been 
advanced by W. H. Dali in Science, Nov. 
5,1886; H. Mueller in Verh. d. Berl. Ges. 
F. Anthr., 1883, and A. F. Chamberlain 
in Am. Notes and Queries, ii, 84, 1888, 
but the whole matter has been effectual¬ 
ly disposed of by the authoritative inves¬ 
tigations of Gustav Schlegel, an eminent 
Chinese scholar, in his Fou-Sang (1892). 
Schlegel attributes what is not mythical 
in the Chinese legends to the island of 
Sakhalin, etc. (a. f. c.) 

Fusihatchi (Creek: fu'swa ‘bird,’ ha'- 
tchi ‘creek,' ‘river’). A former Upper 
Creek town in Macon co., Ala., on 
the n. bank of lower Talapoosa r., 
2 m. below Huhliwahli. Remains of 
a walled town were visible from 
the opposite bank of the river at 
the close of the 18th century. 

(a. s. g.) 

Foosce-hat-che.—Hawkins (1799) , Sketch, 33, 1848. 
Fooschatchee.—Hawkins (1813) in Am. State Pa¬ 
pers, Ind. Aff., i, 854, 1832. FooseHatchee.—Ibid., 
848. Fooskahatche.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 
380, 1854. Fusahatche.—Bartram, Trav., 461,1791. 
Tusehatche.—Barnard (1793) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. AIT., I, 386,1832 (misprint). 

Fusualgi. The Bird clan of the Creeks. 
Bird.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1878. Fusualgi.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1,155,1884. Tus'-wa.— 
Morgan, op.cit. (misprint). 

Fwaha. The Fire clan of the former 
pueblo of Pecos, N. Mex. 

Fwah.—Hewett in Am. Anthrop., n. s., vi, 431, 
1904. Fwa-ha'.—Hodge, ibid., ix, 350, 1896. 

Fyules. A former village in California, 
said to have been Esselen.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Gaandowanang ( G&'-an-do-wtii-na n n , ‘it 
is a great tree.’—Hewitt). A former 
Seneca village on Genesee r., near Cuy- 
lerville, N. Y. 

Big Tree.—Morris deed (1797) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., I, 627, 1832. Chenondoanah.—Johnson 
(1754) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 899,1855. Ga'- 
an-do-wa-na"n.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Seneca 
name). Ga-un-do'-wa-na.—Morgan, League Iroq., 
468, 1851. Kanvagen.—Pouchot, map (1758) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. 

Gabacamanini. A rancheria, probably 
Cochimi, connected with Purisima (Cade- 
gomo) mission, Lower California, in the 
18th century.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 
190, 1857. 

Gabrieleno. A Shoshonean division and 
dialectic group which formerly occupied 
all of Los Angeles co., Cal., s. of the San 
Bernardino mts., with the probable ex¬ 
ception of a strip of coast from Santa 


Monica westward, and Orange co. to Ali- 
sos cr.; the territory did not extend very 
far e. of the Los Angeles co. line. Santa 
Catalina id. also was occupied by them, 
and possibly San Nicolas id. The name 
has been loosely applied by the Spanish 
inhabitants from the name of the mission 
of San Gabriel, near Los Angeles, where 
many were at one time collected. This, 
in the absence of an appropriate native 
term, may be accepted as the most conven¬ 
ient designation. Their rancherias were: 
Acuragna, Ahapchingas, Alyeupkigna, 
Awigna, Azucsagna, Cahuenga, Chokish- 
gna, Chowigna, Cucamonga, Hahamogna, 
Harasgna, Houtgna, Hutucgna, Isanthcog- 
na, Kowanga, Mapipinga, Maugna, Na- 
caugna,Okowvinjha, Pascegna, Pasinogna, 
Pubugna, Pimocagna, Saway-yanga, 
Sibagna, Sisitcanogna, Sonagna, Suangna, 
Taybipet, Techahet, Tibahagna, and 
Yangna. 

Gabrilenos.—Loew in Ann. Rep. Chief of Eng., pt. 
111,542,1876. Kij—Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 222, 
1846. Kizh.—Ibid., 569; Gatschet in Rep. Chief of 
Eng., Ill, 556,1876 (trans. ‘houses’). Playsanos.— 
Hoffman in Bull. Essex Inst., xvii, 26, 1885 (seems 
to be applied to the California Shoshoni living in 
the lowlands, and especially near the coast in the 
region of Los Angeles). San Gabriel.—Hale, op. 
cit., 222. Tobikhars.—Gatschet, op. cit., 656 (said 
to mean ‘settlers,’ but probably taken from Tobo- 
har, the mythical first man). Tumangamalum.— 
A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1905 (Luiseno name: ‘ north¬ 
erners ’). 

Gachigundae ( Gatdigu'nda-i, ‘ village 
always moving to and fro’). A Haida 
town on the n. e. shore of Alliford bay, 
Moresby id., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col., occupied by a socially low branch 
of the Djahui-skwahladagai.—Swan ton, 
Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Gachwechnagechga (‘islanders.’— 
Hewitt). The name applied to the Le¬ 
high Indians formerly on Lehigh r., Pa.; 
so called, according to Pyrlseus, after the 
island they occupied. 

Gachwechnagechga.—Gatschet in Am. Antiq., iv, 
75,1881-82. Lecha—Ibid. Lehigh.—Ibid. 

Gadaho (Gti- cfa'-ho’, ‘sand bank.’— 
Hewitt). A former Seneca village that 
occupied the site of Castile, Genesee co., 
N. Y. 

Ga'd'a'ho’.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Seneca formf. 
Ga-da'-o'.—Morgan, League Iroq., 435, 1851. Gar- 
deau.—Morris deed (1797) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., I, 627, 1832. Gardow.—Morgan, op. cit., 
467. Guardou.—Conover, Kanadega and Geneva 
MS., B. A. E. 

Gadinchin(‘rush,’ ‘reedgrass’). Given 
as a clan of the Pinal Coyotero living in 
1881 at San Carlos agency, Ariz.—Bourke 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 112, 1890. 

Gado ( Gadd / ). A Haida town said to 
have stood on the s. side of De la Beche 
inlet, Moresby id., Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col. Another town of the same 
name is said to have stood on the e. side 
of Lyell id., near the town of Hlkia.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278, 1905. 

Gaedi (Ga'-idl, the name of a fish). 
A Haida town on the n. e. shore of a small 


BULL. 30] 


GAESIGUSKET-GALISTEO 


481 


inlet just n. e. of Huston inlet, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It belonged to 
the Tadji-lanas, a band of Ninstints.— 
Svvanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Gaesigusket ( Ga-isiga's-q.'eit , ‘strait 
town where no waves come ashore’). 
A Haida town on Murchison id., at a 
point opposite Hot Springs id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. So named be¬ 
cause it fronted on smooth water. It 
belonged to the Hagilanas of the Nin¬ 
stints.—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Gagihetnas-hadai ( G'Egihe't-nas- 
:had'a'i , ‘land-otter house people’). 
Given by Boas (5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 27, 1889) as the name of a subdi¬ 
vision of the Yaku-lanas, a division of 
the Raven clan of the Haida in Alaska. 
It is in reality only a house name belong¬ 
ing to that band. The Gagihet (Gagixi't) 
is a human being who, in native myth¬ 
ology, has been made insane by land 
otters. (j. r. s.) 

Gahato (‘floating branch.’—Hewitt). 
A village, probably of the Seneca, in Che¬ 
mung co., N. Y., which was burned by 
Sullivan in 1779. (j. m.) 

Chamong.—Pemberton (ca. 1792) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., lsts., II, 175, 1810. Chemeney.—Ibid., 
176. Chemung.—Brown (1803), ibid., IX, 120, 1804 
(probably the Delaware name). Gaha'to.— Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq., 469,1851. 

Gahayanduk ( G&- ha n y6,-y<i T, n'-dti’k, 
‘there was a forest, or orchard.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A Seneca village destroyed by De- 
nonville’s expedition in 1687.—Shea, note 
in Charlevoix, New France, hi, 289, 1868. 

Gahko (‘crane’). A Mahican clan. 

Gahlinskun ( GalVnskun , ‘high up on a 
point’). A Haida town n. of C. Ball, on 
the e. coast of Graham id., Brit. Col., 
occupied by the Naikun-kegavvai. Work 
assigned to it 120 people in 9 houses in 
1836-41. A-se-guang, the name given by 
him, is said to have been applied to some 
high land back of the town.—Swan ton, 
Cont. Haida, 280, 1905. 

A se guang.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855 
(after Work, 1836-41). A-se-quang.—Kane, Wand, 
in N. A.,app., 1859 (misprint from Work). Gaii'n- 
skun.—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 280,1905. 

Gaiagunkun ( GaiEgA'nkun ). A Haida 
town said to have stood near Hot Spring 
id., Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
278, 1905. 

Gaibanipitea. Apparently a former set¬ 
tlement of the Pima or of an allied tribe, 
possibly the Sobaipuri, described as situ¬ 
ated on a hill on the w. bank of the Rio 
San Pedro. Visited by Father Kino in 
1697. Probably identical with the ruins 
known as Santa Cruz, a few miles w. of 
Tombstone, s. Ariz. 

Jaibanipitca.—Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 274, 
1884. Santa Cruz de Gaibanipitea.—Bernal (1697) 
in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 277, 1856. Santa Cruz 
del Cuervo.—Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 274,1884. 
Sta Cruz de Gaibauipetea.—Ibid., 264. Sta. Cruz de 
Jaibanipitca de Pimas.—Kino (1698), ibid., 290. 


Gakhulin (‘ village on a stream ’). One 
of the 4 Kansa villages in 1820. 

Gaquli n .—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1882. 

Gakhulinulinbe. A former Kansa vil¬ 
lage near the head of a s. tributary of 
Kansas r., on which a trading post was 
established. 

Gaquli n uli n, be.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. 
E.,1882. 

Gakpomute (‘ little turtle ’). A Mahican 
clan. 

Galena. The ore of lead occurs in beds, 
pockets, and in true veins in connection 
with various geological formations in the 
United States and in British America, be¬ 
ing especially abundant in Illinois and 
Missouri. The Indians of the Mississippi 
valley, especially the mound builders, 
seem to have prized this ore very highly 
in the form in which it usually occurs— 
masses of blue-gray, glistening cubical 
crystals. It was probably valued for its 
beauty, as was also the yellow crystals of 
iron pyrites, and possibly had special sig¬ 
nificance with the mound-building tribes, 
as it is found among the articles placed 
upon the sacrificial altars. In some cases 
the heat of the altar fires has been suf¬ 
ficient to melt part of the ore, but it does 
not appear that the Indians had learned 
to make any practical use of the lead. 
Squier and Davis found 30 pounds of the 
ore, in pieces varying from 2 ounces to 3 
pounds, on an altar in one of the Mound 
City mounds in Ohio; and it is at times 
found also on pueblo sites. Galena was 
sometimes shaped into the simpler forms 
of ceremonial objects, such as spheres, 
hemispheres, cones, plummets, and boat- 
stones (q. v.). Consult Moorehead in 
The Antiquarian, i, 1897; Rau in Smith- 
son. Rep. 1872,1873; Squier and Davis in 
Smithson. Cont., i, 1848. (w. h. h.) 

Galiano Island. A band of the Penela- 
kut (q. v.) who speak a Cowdchan dia¬ 
lect, residing in s. e. Vancouver id.; pop. 
32 in 1904.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. ii, 69, 
19 °5. 

Galilali ( Galilali , ‘the houses’; i. e., 
ancient cave houses). A Tarahumare 
rancheria in the Sierra Madre, w. Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Galisteo. A former Tano pueblo 1£ m. 
n. e. of the present hamlet of the same 
name, and about 22 miles s. of Santa F6, 
N. Mex. Identified by Bandelier (Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 122, 1892) with the 
Ximena of Coronado, who visited the 
village in 1541, when it consisted of 30 
houses. Galisteo was the seat of a Fran¬ 
ciscan mission perhaps as early as 1617— 
certainly in 1629—and in 1680 contained 
800 neophytes and a fine church; San 
Cristobal was a visita at this date. In 
the revolt of the Pueblos in August of the 
latter year the Indians of Galisteo killed 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-31 


482 


GALL-GALLINOMERO 


[e. a. e. 


the resident priest, besides the father cus¬ 
todian of New Mexico, the missionaries of 
San Marcos and Pecos, who were on their 
way to give warning, and several colo¬ 
nists. After the remaining Spanish col¬ 
onists had been driven out of the country 
the Tano of Galisteo removed to Santa Fe 
and erected a village on the ruins of the 
old Palace, but were expelled by Vargas in 
1692. In 1706 the town was reestablished 
with 90 Indians by the governor of the 
province under the name Nuestra Senora 
de los Remedios de Galisteo, but it was 
also called Santa Marfa. It remained an 
inconsiderable village until between 1782 
and]794, whentheinhabitants, decimated 
by smallpox and by the persistent hos¬ 
tilities of the Comanche, removed to Santo 
Domingo pueblo, where their descendants 
still live, preserving the language of their 
ancestors and in part their tribal autono¬ 
my. At one time, according to Bandelier, 
Galisteo probably had a population of 
1,000. In 1712 it numbered 110 souls; in 
1748,50 families, and but 52 souls in 1782 
iust before its abandonment. ( f. w. h. ) 
Calisteo.—Vaugondy, map Am6rique, 1778. Ca- 
lixteo.—Kitchin, map N. A., 1787. Calixto.—Gusse- 
feld, Charte America, 1797. Galasteo.—Mendoza 
(1742) quoted by Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 
213,1867. Galiste. — Alcedo, Die. Geog., II, 131, 

1787. Galisteo.—Zarate Salmeron (ca. 1629) cited 
by Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 600,1882. Gallisteo.— 
Eaton in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 220, 1854. 
Glisteo.—Onate (1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 258,1871. 
Jimena.—Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Conq., 164,1742. 
Kimena.—Peet in Am. Antiq., XVI, 354, 1895 (mis¬ 
print) . Nuestra de Senora de los Remedios de Galis¬ 
teo.—MS. of 1720 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, v, 194,1890. San Lucas—Sosa (1590) 
in Doc. In6d., xv, 251, 1871 (identified with Galis¬ 
teo by Bandelier, Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 101, 
1892). Santa Ana.—Onate (1598), ibid., xvi, 258, 
1871 (Glist6o or). Santa Cruz de Galisteo.—Vetan- 
curt, Teatro Mex., iii, 322, 1871 (mission name 
prior to 1706). Santa Maria de Galisteo.—Cuervo 
(1706) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
228, 1889 (mission name from 1706). S'. a Cruz de 
Galisteo.—D’Anville, map Am6r. Sept., 1746. S«? 
Maria.—Ibid. S<? Mario.—Jefferys, Amer. Atlas, 
map 5, 1776. S( Maria.—D’Anville, map N. A., 
Bolton ed., 1752. T’a-ge Uing-ge.—Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 100, 1892 (native name). 
Ta-ge-uing-ge.—Ibid., hi, 125, 1890 (native name). 
Tage-unge.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 221,1893. Ta- 
noque.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 298, 1853 
(trans. ‘ the lower settlement’: native name; butit 
seemingly means ‘ Tano village ’). Ximena.— Cas¬ 
taneda (ca. 1565) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 523, 1896. 
Ximera.—Castaneda in Ternaux-Compans, Vov. 
IX, 177,1838. 

Gall (Pizi). A chief of the Hunkpapa 
Teton Sioux, born on Moreau r., S. Dak., 
in 1840; died at Oak cr., S. Dak., Dec. 
5, 1894. He was of humble parentage, 
but was well brought up, receiving the 
usual consideration of his people for an 
orphan, his mother being a poor widow. 
As a young man he was a warrior of note, 
and. that he was possessed of military 
genius of high order was shown by the 
disposition he made of his forces at the 
battle of the Little Bighorn, June 25, 
1876, where he led the Sioux. He was 
the lieutenant of Sitting Bull, but had the 
quality of leadership in the field that was 


lacking in his chief. He fled to Canada 
with Sitting Bull after the Custer affair, 
but in 1880 he and Crow Chief withdrew 
from the Sitting Bull following, leaving 
the latter with but few people. With his 
followers he surrendered to Maj. Ilges 
at Poplar r. camp, Mont., Jan. 1, 1881, 
and settled as a farmer on Standing Rock 
res., N. and S. Dak. He denounced Sit¬ 
ting Bull as a coward and a fraud and 
became a friend to the whites, wielding 
a potent influence in procuring the sub¬ 
mission of the Indians to the plan of the 
Government for the education of the 
children. He was a man of noble pres¬ 
ence and much esteemed for his candor 



CHIEF GALL 

and sagacity by the whites with whom 
he came in contact. He was influential 
in bringing about the ratification of the 
act of Mar. 2, 1889, the last agreement 
with the Sioux by which their great res¬ 
ervation was divided into separate reser¬ 
vations and certain portions were ceded 
to.the United States. From 1889 he was 
a judge of the court of Indian offenses at 
Standing Rock agency. (j. m’l. ) 

Galley. A Cherokee settlement of 
about 12 families in 1819 (Nuttall, Ar- 
kansa, 122, 1821), on the Galley hills, in 
Yell co., Ark., about midway between 
Danville and Dardenelle. (j. m.) 

Gallinomero. A name more usually ren¬ 
dered Kainomero by the Indians to whom 






BULL. 30] 


GALPA-GAMES 


483 


it is applied. It was given by the Span¬ 
iards of San Rafael mission to the Pomo 
from the vicinity of Healdsburg and Santa 
Rosa, Sonoma co., Cal., on the occasion 
of their being brought into the mission in 
the early part of the 19th century. The 
name is now used to designate in particu¬ 
lar the few remaining Indians whose 
former homes were in the Russian r. val¬ 
ley from the vicinity of Healdsburg s. to 
the southern limit of the territory occu¬ 
pied by the Pomo, or a point about half¬ 
way between Santa Rosa and Petaluma. 
In a still broader sense it is made to in¬ 
clude the remainder of the people speak¬ 
ing the same dialect and formerly living 
about Cloverdale and the upper part of 
Dry cr. The name is not of Indian ori¬ 
gin and its significance is not known. 

(S. A. B) 

Cainameros.—Bancroft, Hist. Cal., iv, 71, 1886. 
Calajomanes.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 363, 1877. 
Canaumanos.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer. Mar. 30, 
1860. Canimairo.—Ibid., June 8, 1860. Cani- 
mares.—Ibid., Feb. 22, 1860. Gal-li-no-me'-ro.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 174, 1877. 
Kai-nama.—Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 80, 1839. 
Kai-na-meah.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, III, 102, 1853. Kai-na-me-ro.—Ibid. Kai- 
no-meahs.—Ibid., 112. Kanamara.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Kanimares.—Ibid. Kani- 
marres.—Ibid. Kianamaras.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 
119, 1865. Kyanamara.—Ibid., 1856, 257, 1857. 

Galpa. A former Tepehuane pueblo 
and the seat of amission; situated in cen¬ 
tral Durango, Mexico, on the headwaters 
of Rio San Pedro. 

S Lucas de Galpa.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 319,1864. 

Gamacaamanc (‘ravine of palms’). A 
rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected 
with Purfsima (^Cadegomo) mission, 
Lower California, in the 18th century.— 
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Gamacaamancxa (‘mouth of the ravine 
of palms’). A rancheria, probably Co¬ 
chimi, connected with Purfsima (Cade- 
gomo) mission, Low^r California, in the 
18th-century.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s. 
v, 190, 1857. 

Gambling. See Games. 

Gamchines. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Games. Indian games may be divided 
into two general classes: games of chance 
and games of dexterity. Games of pure 
skill and calculation, such as chess, are 
entirely absent. The games of chance 
fall into one of two categories: (1) games 
in w hich implements corresponding with 
dice are throwrn at random to determine 
a number or numbers, the counts being 
kept by means of sticks, pebbles, etc., or 
upon an abacus or counting board or cir¬ 
cuit; (2) games in which one or more 
of the players guess in which of two 
or more places an odd or particularly 
marked counter is concealed, success or 
failure resulting in the gain or loss of 


counters. The games of dexterity may 
be designated as (1st) archery in its va¬ 
rious modifications; (2d) a game of slid¬ 
ing javelins or darts upon the hard ground 
or ice; (3d) a game of shooting at a mov¬ 
ing target consisting of a netted hoop or 
a ring; (4th) the game of ball in several 
highly specialized forms; and (5th) the 
racing games, more or less interrelated and 
complicated with the ball games (q. v.). 
In addition, there is a sub-class, related 
to the game of shooting at the moving 
target, of which it is a miniature form, 
corresponding w r ith the European game of 
cup-and-ball. Games of all the classes 
designated are found among all the In¬ 
dian tribes of North America, and con¬ 
stitute the games, par excellence , of the 
Indians. The children have a variety of 
other amusements such as top spinning, 
mimic fights, and similar imitative sports 
(see Amusements ); but the games first 
described are played only by men and 
women, youths and maidens, not by 
children, and usually at fixed seasons as 
the accompaniment of certain festivals or 
religious rites. A w r ell-marked affinity 
exists between the manifestation of the 
same game even among the most widely 
separated tribes; the variations are more 
in the materials employed, due to envi¬ 
ronment, than the object or method of 
plays. Precisely the same games are 
played by tribes belonging to unrelated 
linguistic stocks, and in general the va¬ 
riations do not follow the differences in 
language. At the same time there ap¬ 
pears to be a progressive change from 
what seems to be the older forms of exist¬ 
ing games from a center in S. W. United 
States along lines radiating from the same 
center southward into Mexico. There is 
no evidence that any of the games above 
described w ere ever imported into Amer¬ 
ica; on the contrary, they appear to be 
the direct and natural outgrowdh of 
aboriginal American institutions. They 
show no modification due to white influ¬ 
ence other than the decay which charac¬ 
terizes all Indian institutions under exist¬ 
ing conditions. It is probable, however, 
that the wide dissemination of certain 
games, as, for example, the hand game, 
is a matter of comparatively recent date, 
due to wider and less restricted inter¬ 
course through the abolition of tribal 
wars. Playing cards and probably the 
simple board game, known by the Eng¬ 
lish as merrels, are practically the only 
games borrowed by the Indians from the 
whites. On the other hand we have 
taken lacrosse in the N. and racket in the 
S., and the Mexicans of the Rio Grande 
play all the old Indian games under Span¬ 
ish names. In the dice games, it ap¬ 
pears, the original number of dice w^as 
Four, and that they w T ere made of canes, 


484 


GAMES 


[B. A. E. 


being the shaftments of arrows painted 
or burned with marks corresponding with 
those used to designate the arrows of the 
four world-quarters. In one of the earliest 
forms of the guessing game the number of 
the places of concealment was four, and 
the implements used in hiding were de¬ 
rived from the four marked arrow shaft¬ 
ments. In general, in all Indian games, 
the arrow or the bow, or some derivative 
of them, is found to be the predominant 
implement, and the conceptions of the 
four world-quarters the fundamental idea. 
From this it became apparent that the 
relation of the games to each other in the 
same area, and of each to its counterpart 
among all the tribes, was largely depen¬ 
dent on their common origin in cere¬ 
monies from which games produced as 
amusements were uniformly derived. 
Back of each game is found a ceremony 
in which the game was a significant 
part. The ceremony has commonly dis¬ 
appeared; the game survives as an amuse¬ 
ment, but often with traditions and ob¬ 
servances which serve to connect it with 
its original purpose. The ceremonies 
appear to have been to cure sickness, to 
cause fertilization and reproduction of 
plants and animals, and, in the arid re¬ 
gion, to produce rain. Gaming imple¬ 
ments are among the most significant 
objects that are placed upon many Hopi 
altars, and constantly reappear as parts 
of the masks, headdresses, and other 
ceremonial adornments of the Indians 
generally. These observations hold true 
both of the athletic games as well as of 
the game of chance. The ball was a 
sacred object not to be touched with the 
hand, and has been identified as sym¬ 
bolizing the earth, the sun, or the moon. 
In the ring-and-pole game, the original 
form of the ring was a netted hoop de¬ 
rived from the spider web, the emblem 
of the Earth mother. The performance 
of the game was bound up with ceremo¬ 
nies of reproduction and fertility. In 
the kicked-stick and ball-race games of 
the S. W., the primary object seems to 
have been to protect the crops against 
sand storms within the circuit traversed. 

Following are brief descriptions of the 
principal games played by the Indians n. 
of Mexico: 

Arrow games. —A variety of games was 
played with actual arrows. In one of 
the commonest, an arrow was tossed with 
the hand by one of the players and the 
others then threw at it and endeavored 
to cause their arrows to fall across it. 

Ball games. —The two common ball 
games which are widely distributed are 
racket ball, a man’s game played with 
one or two netted bats or rackets, and 
shinny, commonly played by women. 


In addition, women had a game with a 
double or tied ball which was tossed with 

long slen¬ 
der rods. 
In all of 
these it 
was not 
permitted 
to touch 
the ball 
with the 

Shinny Ball and Stick hands. 

Among 

the Plains tribes the women played with 
a small buckskin-covered ball of buffalo 
hair. (See Ball play .) 



DOUBLE BALL AND STICK 


Bowl game. —A kind of dice game 
widely played by women among the 
Algonquian, Iro¬ 
quois, Sioux, and 
other northern 
tribes. The dice 
consist of bone 
disks, or of peach or 
plum stones, which 
are tossed in a 
wooden bowl or a 
basket. Some Cali¬ 
fornia tribes use a 
large flat basket. 

Cat's cradle .—The 
trick of weaving patterns with string up¬ 
on the fingers, which we call cat’s cradle, 
is very generally known, but the designs 
are different and much more intricate. 



BASKET DICE GAME 


The Zuiii and Navaho attribute the origin 
of this amusement to the spider and asso¬ 
ciate the figures with the spider-web net 
shield of the war gods. 

Children'sgames. —Indian children play 
a variety of games, which are practically 
identical with those played by the chil¬ 
dren of civilization. They are all mi¬ 
metic in their character, and have no re¬ 
lation to the ceremonial and divinatory 
games of their elders, except so far as 
they may be imitations of them. (See 
Amusements , Child life.) 

Chunkey. —The ring-and-pole game of 
the Creeks and neighboring tribes, in 
which a stone ring or disk was employed. 
From specimens of the stones found in 




Bowl Game 






BULL. 30 ] 


GAMES 


485 


the mounds it is shown that this form of the 
game had a wide distribution. Stone rings 
were used until recently in a similar game 
by some of the tribes on the N. W. coast. 

Cup-and-pin game. —An amusement 
analogous to the cup-and-ball, or bilbo- 
quet, of Europe. The game is universal 
among the Indians, and exists in a great 



ESKIMO CUP-AND-PIN GAME 


variety of forms, all of which may be re¬ 
ferred to the spider-web shield. Among 
the Dakota the game is called the ‘ deer-toe 
game’ and played with a string of phalan- 



CUP-AND-PIN GAME 


geal bones which are caught on a needle. 
The Eskimo use solid bone or ivory ob¬ 
jects which are caught in the same way. 

Football. —The game commonly spoken 
of as football is a ball race, chiefly con¬ 
fined to the S. W., in which a small 
wooden or stone ball is kicked around a 
long course, the original object having 
been the magical protection of the fields 
against sand storms. The Tarahumare 
derive their name from this game. 
Football proper exists among the Eskimo. 

Four-stick game. —A game in which 4 
marked sticks or billets of two different 



FOUR-STICK GAME 


sizes are hidden under a flat basket, 
the object being to guess their relative 
positions. 

Hand game. —The commonest and most 
widely distributed of Indian guessing 
games. Two (or four) bone or wooden 
— _ .. cylinders, one plain and 

0_0 -O-OM one marked, are held in 
Q the hands by one player, 
the other side guessing 
in which hand the un¬ 
marked cylinder is con¬ 
cealed. The game is 
commonly counted with 
sticks and is played to the accompani¬ 
ment of songs or incantations. 



Hano Game 








run 




Hidden-ball Game 


Hidden-ball game. —The common gues¬ 
sing game of the Southwestern tribes, 
played with four wooden tubes or cups, 
under one of which a 
ball or stick is hid¬ 
den. The opposing 
side endeavors to 
guess where the ob¬ 
ject is concealed. 

The four cups or 
tubes refer to the 
four world-quarters, 
and the game is sacred to the war gods. 

Hoop-and-pole. —A widely distributed 
athletic game in which a hoop or ring, 
frequently covered with network, is rolled 

along the 
ground and 
shot at with 
arrows or 
javelins, the 
counts being 
determined 
by the way 
in which the 
latter fall 
with refer- 
to the 
The 
exists 
great 
variety of 
forms, all 
more or less 
related tband 
associated 
with ideas of fertility and generation. 

Juggling .—Juggling with balls, some¬ 
times made of clay especially for the pur¬ 
pose, is practised by the women of some 
tribes. They keep two or more in the 
air at one time, and endeavor to see 
which can thus maintain them longest. 

Kicked stick. —A game of the South¬ 
western Indians, 


notably the Zuni, 
in which two 
small painted 
sticks are kicked 
in a race around 



HOOP-AND-POLE GAME 


KICKED STICK GAME 


a ceremonial circuit 
inclosing the fields beyond the village. 

Moccasin game. —A common guessing 
game of the northern tribes. Four moc¬ 
casins are commonly employed and a 
small object, such as a bullet, or a ball of 
buffalo hair, is hidden in one of them. 
The opposing side endeavors to guess 
where it isconcealed. The game is counted 
with sticks, and is clearly a derivative 
of the hidden-ball game played with 
wooden tubes. 

Patol. —The Spanish or Mexican name 
of the stick-dice game among the Hopi 
Indians and some of the Pueblos of the 
Rio Grande. Derived from the Aztec 
word patolli, which the old Mexicans 
are described as having played on a 
painted mat, using beans as dice. 











































486 


GAMGAMTELATL-GANERASKE 


[b. a. E. 


Snow snake .— A gaming implement, 
sometimes carved to represent a snake, 




vww. / ///-///?. ■ 


<3 SSS S5 S5S jB 


3s 


SNOW SNAKES 


which is hurled along the ice or frozen 
ground, the object being to see whose 
‘snake’ will go farthest. 

Stick game. — A common guessing 
game of the tribes of California and 

the n. Pacific 
coast, one that 
extends en¬ 
tirely across 
the continent 
to Canada and 
the Atlantic. 
The sticks, 
probably orig¬ 
inally arrow 
shaftments,are 
shuffled and di¬ 
vided, the ob¬ 
ject being to 
guess in which bundle either the odd 
or a particularly marked stick is con¬ 
cealed. (See Straw game, below.) 

Stick dice game .—A -widely distributed 
game in which several 2-faced lots are 

tossed in the air 



STICK GAME 


D 


C 


like dice, the 


STICK DICE GAME 


D counts being kept 
on a diagram or 
with sticks. The 
number of the 
dice ranges from 
3 upward, 4 being the most common. 

Stilts. —Stilt-walking is a children’s 
sport among the Hopi and Shoshoni, and 
from its existence in Mexico is probably 
indigenous among the Indians. 

Straw, game of .—The name given by 
early writers to a guessing game played 
by Huron and other tribes of the Atlan¬ 
tic slope. The implements consisted of 
fine splints or reeds, and the object of the 
game was to guess the number, odd or 
even, when the bundle was divided at 
random. 

Tops .—The top is almost universal as 
a child’s plaything among the Indian 
tribes of the United States and appears 
to be indigenous. The common form is 
a whip top made of horn, bone, stone, 
or wood, spun on the ice or on frozen 
ground. 

Consult Culin, American Indian Games, 
24th Rep. B. A. E., 1906. (s. c.) 

Gamgamtelatl. A gens of the Tenaktok, 
a Kwakiutl tribe. 

{j’a'mS’amtElaL.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 331,1895. 

Gamiskwakoka-wininiwak ( Kamlskwa- 
wdku ka-wlrilniwag, ‘men or people of the 


place of much red cedar.’—Jones). A 
Chippewa band about Cass lake, near the 
head of the Mississippi, in Minnesota. 

Cass Lake band.—Common name. Gamiskwakoka- 
wininiwak.—Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A.E., 1882. 
Kamiskwawa'kuka-winiwiwag.—Win. Jones, inf n, 
1905 (correct Chippewa form). 

Ganadoga (‘it is a divided village.’— 
Hewitt). A former Oneida village in 
Oneida co., N. Y., near Oneida Castle. 

Ganadoga. A former Iroquois village 
on the Canadian shore of L. Ontario, near 
the site of Toronto. 

Ganadoke.—Homann Heirs’ map, 1756. Ga-na'- 
doque.—Morgan, League Iroq., 473,1851. Kanada- 
gerea.—Doc. of 1676 in Doc. Col. Hist. N. Y.,XIII, 
502,1881. 

Ganagweh (‘one took it out.’—Hewitt). 
A former Seneca village about the site of 
Palmyra, N. Y. 

Ga'-na gweh.—Morgan, League Iroq., 469,1851. 

Ganahadi (‘ people of Ganak,’ an island 
somewhere near the s’, end of Alaska). 
A Tlingit division which is said to have 
moved from below the present town of 
Port Simpson, Brit. Col., and to have sep¬ 
arated into several branches, of which 
one settled at Tongas, another at Taku, a 
third at Chilkat, a fourth at Yakutat, and, 
according to one informant, a fifth at 
Ivlawak. (.1. R. s.) 

Ganaxa'di.—Swanton, inf’n, 1904. Ganaxte'di.— 
ibid". Karach-adi.—Krause, Tlinkit iiid., 120, 
1885. Kanach-tedi.—Ibid.,116. 

Ganasarage (‘ at the place of man¬ 
drakes.’—Hewitt). A former Tuscarora 
village on Canaseraga cr., at the present 
site of Sullivan, N. Y. 

Canaseraga.—N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 512, note, 
1856. Canesraca.—Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1782. 
Ganaghsaragey.—Johnson (1762) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., Vii, 512, 1856. Ganaghsaragues.—German 
Flats conf. (1770), ibid., vm, 229, 1857. Ga-na- 
sa-raY-ge.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Seneca form). 
Kanadasero.—Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vii, 582, 1856. Kanassarago.—Canajoharie 
conf. (1759), ibid., 382. 

Ganawagus (‘it has a swampy smell.’— 
Hewitt). A former Seneca village on 
Genesee r., near Avon, N. Y. 

Canawagus.—Deed of 1797 in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. AIL, I, 627, 1832. Conewaugus.—Cornplanter 
(1822) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. v, 115,1848. 
Ga’-na-wa'-gus.^Hewitt, inf’n, 1886(Senecaform). 
Ganowauges.—Morgan, League Iroq., 468, 1851. 

Gandaseteiagon. A Cayuga village ex¬ 
isting about 1670 near Port Hope, On¬ 
tario, on the shore of L. Ontario. 

Ganadatsiagon.—Vaugondy, map (1753), cited in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 112,1855. Ganatcheskia- 
gon.—Frontenac (1673) in Margry, D£c., I, 233, 
1875. Ganatoheskiagon,—Frontenac (1673) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 112, 1855 (misprint). Gandas- 
chekiagon.—Frontenac (1674), ibid., 117. Gan¬ 
daseteiagon.—Shea, note in Charlevoix, New 
France, in, 110, 1868. Gandatsiagon.—Beilin,map, 
1755. Gandatskiagon.—Homann Heirs’ map, 1756. 

Ganedontwan ( Gd'‘-ne l ‘-do n -twa n , ‘ one 
put hemlock in the fire.’—Hewitt). A 
former Seneca village on the site of Mos¬ 
cow, N. Y. 

Ga-nah'-da-on-tweh.—Morgan, League Iroq., 468, 
1851. 

Ganeraske. An Iroquois village that 
stood about 1670 at the mouth of Trent r., 
Ontario, near the n. e. end of L. Ontario. 


















BULL. 30] 


GANGASCO-GARABATO 


487 


Ganaraske. —Beilin, map, 1756. Ganeraske. — 
Frontenac (1673) in Margry, DC*c., I, 233, 1875. 
Ganeroske. —Aleedo, Die. Ueog., ii, 183, 1787. 
Gannaraske.— Denonville (1687) in N.Y. Doe. Col. 
Hist., ix, 369, 1855. Gonaraske. —Homann Heirs’ 
map, 1756. Quandarosque. —Crepy, map, ca. 1755. 

Gangasco (from shingascui, ‘ level, wet, 
and grassy ground.’—Heckewelder). A 
village of the Powhatan confederacy for¬ 
merly near the present Eastville, North¬ 
ampton co., Va. It was the most impor¬ 
tant village on the lowest part of the e. 
shore in 1722. Theinhabitants, who were 
of the Accomac or the Accohanoc tribe, 
were known as Gingaskins and remained 
there until they were driven off in 1833, 
being then much mixed with negroes. 

(J. M.) 

Gangascoe. —Beverly, Va., 199,1722. Gingaskins.— 
Wise in Schoolcraft, lnd. Tribes, v, 36, 1855 
(name used for the band). 

Ganneious. A former Iroquois village 
on the n. shore of L. Ontario, on the 
present site of Napanee, Ontario. 

Ganciou. —Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Gancydoes. —Es- 
nautsand Rapilly, map, 1777. Ganeidos. —Aleedo, 
Die. Geog., ii, 183, 1787. Ganeious. —Frontenac 
(1673) in Margry, D6c., 1,233,1875. Ganejou. —Ho¬ 
mann Heirs’ map, 1756. Ganeousse. —Lahontan 
(1773), New Voy., I, 32, 1735. Ganeyont. —Park- 
mail, Frontenac, 140, 1883. Ganneious. —Denon¬ 
ville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 362, 1855. 
Gannejouts. —Beilin, map, 1755. Ganneous. —Hen¬ 
nepin, NevvDiscov., 101,1698. Ganneouse.— Lahon¬ 
tan (1703) quoted by Macauley, N. Y., ii, 191, 
1829. Gonejou. —Crepy, map, ca. 1755. 

Gannentaha (‘beside the mountain.’— 
Hewitt). The Huron form of the name 
of Onondaga lake, N. Y. In 1656 the 
French established on its shore, about 5 
leagues from Onondaga, a mission, com¬ 
posed of Onondaga, Hurons, and Neutrals, 
which was called Notre Dame de Ganen- 
taa, from the name of the lake. It was 
abandoned in 1658 on account of the hos¬ 
tility of the pagan Iroquois. (j. m.) 
Canainda. —Hansen (1700) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IV, 803, 1854. Caneenda.— Bleeker (1701), ibid., 
891. Cannenda.— Schuyler (1711), ibid., v, 246, 
1855. Ganentaa. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 224, 1855. 
Ganentaha.— Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. 
Gannentaha. —Macauley, N. Y., I, 1 13, 1829. Ga- 
no n -da'-a’. —Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. Ga-nun-ta'-ah. — 
Morgan, League Iroq., 471, 1851. Kaneenda. — 
Bleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 891, 
1854. Notre Dame de Ganentaa. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 
228, 1855(French name of mission). St. Mary’s.— 
Ibid. 

Ganogeh (Gd-d'^-no^-ge, ‘place of float¬ 
ing oil.’—Hewitt). The principal Cayuga 
village formerly on the site of Canoga, 
N. Y. 

Canoga. —Macauley, N. Y., n, 177, 1829. Ga-a n - 
no’'-ge. — Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. Ga-no'-geh. — Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq., 423, 1851. 

Ganondasa (‘it is a new town.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A former Seneca village on the site 
of Moscow, N. Y. 

Canadaraggo. —Amherst (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., Vil, 568, 1856. Canadasaggo.— Johnson 
(1763), ibid., 550. Canaderagey. —Johnson Hall 
conf. (1763), ibid., 556. Ga-no n -da’-sa‘.— Hewitt, 
inf’n, 1886. Ga-nun'-da-sa— Morgan, League Iroq., 
435, 1851. Kanadaraygo. —Johnson (1763) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 576, 1856. Kanaderagey.— 
Ibid., 582. 

Ganosgagong( ‘amongthemilk weeds.’— 
Hewitt). A small Seneca village for¬ 
merly on the site of Dansville, N. Y. 


Ga-nose'-ga-go.—Morgan, League Iroq., 437,1851. 
Ga-nos'-ga-gon.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. Ga-nus'- 
ga-go.—Morgan, op. cit., 468. Ganuskago.—John¬ 
son (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 92, 1856. 
Kanuskago.—Ft Johnson conf. (1756), ibid., 57. 

Ganowarohare (‘ skull is fastened to the 
top of it.’—Hewitt). One of the former 

principal Oneida towns, situate on Oneida 
cr., at the site of Vernon, N. Y. At this 
place the Jesuit mission of St Francois 
Xavier was established in 1667. In 1777 
it was destroyed by the Indians who had 
espoused theBritish cause. ( j. n. b. h. ) 
Cahnowellahella. —Macauley, N. Y., II, 298, 1829. 
Canawagore. —Guy Park conf. (1775) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VIII, 550,1857. Canawaroghere. —Johnson 
Hall conf. (1774), ibid., 476. Canowaloa. —Ibid., 
vii, 101, note, 1856 (Oneida form). Canowari- 
ghare.— Guy Park conf., ibid., vni, 535, 1857. 
Canowaroghere.— Johnson (1762), ibid., VII, 512, 
1856. Conawaroghere. —Johnstown conf. (1774), 
ibid., vni,504,1857. Ga-no-a-o'-a.— Morgan,League 
Iroq., chart, 394, 1851 (Cayuga name). Ga-no'a- 
o-ha. —Ibid. (Seneca name). Gano n waro'hare‘. — 
Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (a Seneca form). Ga-no-wa'-lo- 
hale. —Morgan, League Iroq., chart, 394, 1851 
(Oneidaname). Ga'-no-wa-lo-har'-la.— Ibid. (Mo¬ 
hawk name). Ga no-wi'ha.— Ibid. (Onondaga 
name). Kahnonwolo-hale. —Belknap and Morse 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., v, 13, 1806. Kahno- 
wolohale. —Macauley, N. Y., ii, 298, 1829. Ka-no- 
■wa-no'-hate. —Morgan,op. cit. (Tuscarora name). 
Kononwarohare. —Oneida address (1775) in Wil¬ 
liams, Vermont, II, 437, 1809. Old Oneida. —Ser¬ 
geant (1796) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., v, 
18, 1806. Onawaraghhare. —Johnson (1756) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 101, 1856. Oneida Castle. — 
Sauthier, map, 1777. Onnosarage Castle.— Ibid. 
Orisca. —Johnson Hall conf. (1765) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vii, 729, 1856. Oriska.— Sergeant(1796) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., v, 18,1806. Oriske. — 
Oneida letter (1776) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 
690, 1857. Tgano n eo' l ha’.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (a 
Seneca form). 

Gantlet. See Captives , Ordeals. 

Gaodjaos ( Gaodja'os , ‘drum village’). 
A Haida town on the s. shore of Lina id., 
Bearskin bay, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col., occupied by the Hlgaiu-lanas family. 
It is often referred to in the native stories. — 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Gao-haidagai (‘inlet people’). The 
name by which the Haida of Masset inlet 
and of the n. coast of Queen Charlotte 
ids. generally were known to those far¬ 
ther s. (J. r. s.) 

Gaousge ( Gd-o ni sage-o n \ ‘place of bass¬ 
wood.’—Hewitt). Probably a former 
Seneca village, located by Morgan on Ni¬ 
agara r., N. Y. 

Ga-o-us'-ge‘.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. Ga-o-us-geh.— 
Morgan, League Iroq., map, 1851. 

Gapkaliptoua. A Malemiut Eskimo 
village on Norton bay, Alaska.—Zagoskin 
inNouv. Ann. Voy.,5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Garabato (a Spanish term with various 
meanings, but here referring to the picto- 
graplis). A cave in a gorge on the w. 
slope of Arroyo Garabato, which drains 
into the Rio Chico, in the Sierra Nacori, 
w. of the Rio Casas Grandes, in n. w. 
Chihuahua, that contains the well-pre¬ 
served remains of an ancient aboriginal 
habitation on the walls of which are 
numerous paintings that give the cave its 
name. The remains are possibly those of 
the Tarahumare.—Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mex., i, 103, 1902. 


488 


GARAKONTHIE-GEGUEP 


[ B. A. E. 


Garakonthie (Ga-ra ( -kon-ti-e\ ‘Moving 
Sun’), Daniel. An Onondaga chief dur¬ 
ing the middle of the 17th century; died 
at Onondaga, N. Y., in 1676. When the 
French missionaries fled from Onondaga 
in 1658, Garakonthie aided them, perhaps 
secretly, to make their escape, but soon 
openly became the protector of the 
Christians and an advocate of peace. In 
1661 he induced the Onondaga to send 
an embassy to Quebec and to return 9 
French captives with a view of establish¬ 
ing peace. He accompanied the prison¬ 
ers to Montreal, where he was well re¬ 
ceived, and obtained the release of a 
number of his people. In 1662 he suc¬ 
ceeded in temporarily checking the chiefs 
who wished to make war on the French, 
and frustrated a plot to kill the mission¬ 
ary Le Moyne. During the war that fol¬ 
lowed he exercised his authority in pro¬ 
tecting the French in his country. He 
declared himself a convert and was bap¬ 
tized in 1669 in the cathedral at Quebec, 
receiving the name Daniel. Garakon¬ 
thie was not only an able, humane 
leader, but an orator of considerable 
ability; his strong attachment to the 
whites lessened his influence with the 
more warlike element of his tribe, yet 
when an embassy was to be sent either to 
the French or to the English, his services 
were in demand. (c. t.) 

Garangula. See Grangula. 

Garganwahgah. See Cornplanter. 

Garomisopona. A Chumashan village 
between Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal., 
in 1542.—Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in Smith, 
Colec. Doc. Fla., 183, 1857. 

Gash. The winter town of the Sanya- 
koan (q. v.), a Tlingit clan near C. Fox, 
s. Alaska. Most of the people have now 
moved to Ketchikan. (j. r. s.) 

Gasins ( GasVns , perhaps ‘gambling 
sticks’). A Haida town on tne n. w. 
shore of Lina id., Bearskin bay, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.; occupied by 
the family Hlgaiu-lanas.—Swan ton, Cont. 
Haida, 279, 1905. 

Gaskosada (‘it is a waterfall.’—Hewitt). 
A former Seneca village on Cayuga cr., 
w. of Lancaster, N. Y. 

. Falls Village. Morgan, League Iroq., 466, 1851 
(common English name). G&’-sko'-sa-d&\— 
Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. 

Gaspesien (Gaspb is from gachepe, or 
kechpi , ‘the end.’—Vetromile). A name 
given by early French writers to a part 
of the Micmac living about Gaspe bay on 
the Gulf of St Lawrence, Quebec province. 
Their dialect differs somewhat from that 
of the other Micmac. They frequently 
crossed the gulf and made war on the 
Eskimo and Papinachois. In 1884 the 
“Micmacs of Gasp6” numbered 71 per¬ 
sons. (j. M.) 

Gaspesians.—Lahontan, New Voy., I, 230, 1703 
(common English form). Gaspesi'es.— Hennepin, 
New Discov., map, 1698. 


Gatagetegauning (probably for K&- 
'tdgfilgaritng, ‘at the ancient field.’— 
W. J.) A former Chippewa village on 
Lac (Vieux) Desert or Gatagetegauning, 
on the Michigan-Wisconsin state line. 
The present Yieux Desert Chippewa in 
Michigan numbered, with the L’Anse 
band, 668 in 1903. 

Ga-ta-ge-te-gaun-ing.—Warren (1852) in Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 38, 1885. Gete'kitigan.—Baraga 
Eng.-Otch. Diet., 185, 1878. Katagi'tiganing.— 
Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905 (correct Chippewa form). 
Old Field.—Ibid. Vieux Desert.—Ibid. Vieux De 
Sert band.—La Pointe treaty (1854) in U. S. Ind. 
Treat., 223, 1873. 

Gatga-inans ( Ga'tgaivna'ns). A Haida 
town on Hippa id., ‘Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col.. It is in possession of the family 
Do-gitinai.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280, 
1905. 

Gatun / waTi. See Big-mush. 

Gaudekan (‘ bell town ’). The principal 
Huna town, now generally called Huna, 
in Port Frederick, on the n. shore of 
Chichagof id., Alaska. Pop. 800 in 1880; 
447 (including whites) in 1900. 

Gaotla'k-an.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E.,1904. 
Gaud-ah-kan.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., in, pi. xii, 1903. Gaudekan.—Krause, Tlin- 
kit Ind., 104, 118, 1885. Koudekan.—Petroff in 
Tenth Census, Alaska, 31,1884. 

Gawababiganikak (Kawapabikhnt kag, 

‘ place of much whiteearth.’—W. J.). A 
Chippewa band about White Earth lake, 
n. w. Minn., officially reported to number 
1,735 in 1905. 

Gawababiganikak.—Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A. 
E., 1882. Kawapabikani'kag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 
1905. White Earth band.—Common name. 

Gawunena. A band of the Arapaho, 

q- v - t 

Gayagaanhe ( Ga-y&’-g&'-a” -he , ‘ its 

body is inclined.’—Hewitt). The former 
principal village of the Cayuga, situate 
near the e. shore of Cayuga lake, 3£ miles 
s. of Union Springs, N. Y. St Joseph’s 
mission was established there in 1668, and 
the settlement was destroyed by Gen. 
Sullivan in 1779. (j. m.) 

Cayuga Castle.—Machin, map (1779), cited by Con¬ 
over, Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
Ga-ya'-ga-an'-ha.—Morgan, League Iroq., 423, 
1851. Ga-ya'-ga'-a n ‘he'.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886. 
Goiogouin.—See Cayuga. Gwa-u-gweh.—Morgan, 
League, Iroq., map, 1851. Saint Joseph.—Jes. Rel. 
for 1670, 63, 1858. 

Gayanthwahgeh, Gayehtwageh, Gayenth- 
wahgih. See Cornplanter. 

Gay Head. A village, probably of the 
Wampanoag, formerly on the w. end of 
Marthas Vineyard, off the s. e. coast of 
Massachusetts. It contained 260 souls in 
1698, and in 1809 there were still 240 
Indian and negro mixed-bloods, who 
probably represented the entire Indian 
population of the island. (j. m. ) 

Gearksutite. A fluorine mineral resem¬ 
bling kaolin, found in Greenland. The 
word is compounded of arksutite (q. v.) 
and the Greek yf/, ‘earth.’ (a. f. c. ) 

Geguep. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Inez mission, Santa Barbara co., 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. 


BULL. 30] 


GEIES-GENOBEY 


489 


Geies (or Geier). One of the non-Cad- 
doan tribes reported by Father Damian 
Massanet, comisario for the missions of 
Texas, on the road from Coahuila (prob¬ 
ably the presidio rather than the prov¬ 
ince) to the Tejas (Texas) country in 
the 18th century.—Dictamen Fiscal, Mex¬ 
ico, Nov. 30,1716, cited by H. E. Bolton, 
inf n, 1906. 

Gekelemukpechuenk. A Delaware vil¬ 
lage in Ohio in 1770-73 and the residence 
of Netawatwees, the principal chief of the 
tribe. Perhaps identical with White 
Eyes’ town. It was abandoned in 1773 
or 1774, the inhabitants removing to Co¬ 
shocton, on the e. side of the Muskingum, 
which Netawatwees henceforth made his 
chief residence.—Loskiel, Missions, 1794. 

Gelelemend (‘leader’). A Delaware 
chief, born about 1722; known also as Kill- 
buck, the name borne by his father, one 
of the best educated Indians of his time. 
He was chosen on the death of White 
Eyes, about 1778, to succeed him as act¬ 
ing chief of the nation during the minor¬ 
ity of the hereditary sachem of the Turtle 
orUnami division, having in the council 
won a reputation for sagacity and discre¬ 
tion. Like his predecessor he strove to 
maintain friendship with the whites, and 
was encouraged in this by the Indian 
agents and military commandants at Pitts¬ 
burg, who promised the aid of the Ameri¬ 
can Government in the uplifting and civ¬ 
ilization of the Indians if lasting peace 
could be effected. The war party, led by 
Hopocan, prevailed, however, in the coun¬ 
cil. Gelelemend w^as therefore invited 
by the officer commanding the garrison to 
remove with others of the peace party to 
an island in Allegheny r., wffiere they 
could be under the protection of the sol¬ 
diery, but they were not protected from 
a party of murderous white men that fell 
upon them when returning from the mas¬ 
sacre of nearly 100 Christian Delawares at 
Gnadenhuetten in 1782, when the young 
chief and all the others except a few were 
slain. Gelelemend made his escape by 
swimming, but the documents that Wil¬ 
liam Penn had given to the Indians w r ere 
destroyed. His services were of value in 
bringing about a general peace, but the 
Munsee held him responsible for the mis¬ 
fortunes that had befallen the Delawares, 
and to escape their vengeance he remained 
with his family at Pittsburg long after 
peace was proclaimed. He joined the Mo¬ 
ravian Indians in the end and lived under 
the protection of the settlement, still sed¬ 
ulously avoiding his vindictive foes. He 
was baptized by the name of William 
Henry and lived till Jan., 1811. 

Geliac. A former Chumashan village 
on Patera ranch, near Santa Barbara, Cal. 
Geliac. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1862. 
Geliec.— Baiicroft, Nat. Races, I, 459,1874. Gelo.— 
Ibid. 


Gdnau. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Genega’s Band (named from its chief, 
Genega, ‘ Dancer ’). A Paviotso band for¬ 
merly living at the mouth of Truckee r., 

w. Nevada, said to number 290 in 1859. 
They are no longer recognized under this 
name. 

Dancer band.—Burton, City of Saints, 472, 1862. 
Ge-nega’s band.—Dodge in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859,374, 
1860. Gonega.—Burton, op. cit. 

Geneseo {Tyo’nesi'yd’ , ‘ there it has tine 
banks.’—Hewitt). An important Seneca 
settlement formerly situated about the 
site of Geneseo, N. Y. In 1750 it con¬ 
tained 40 or more large houses. It was 
destroyed by Sullivan in 1779. 

Cenosio.—Ft Johnson conf. (1757) in N.Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VII, 254, 1856. Chenceses.—Bouquet 
(1764) quoted by Rupp, West Penn., app., 147, 
1846. Chenesee Castle.—Machin (1779) quoted by 
Conover, MS., B. A. E. Chenessies.—Croghan(1765) 
quoted by Rupp, West Penn., app., 172, 1846 
(band). Chenessios.—Colden (1764) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VII, 609, 1856. Chenissios.—Ibid., 610. 
Chennesse Castle.—Machin (1779) quoted by Con¬ 
over, op. cit. Chennussios.—N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
index,291,1861. Chenosio.—Johnson (1759), ibid., 
vn, 376, 1856. Chenusies.—Watts (1764) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., X, 522, 1871. Chenusios.— 
Johnson (1763) inN. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,vn, 522,1856. 
Chenussio.—Johnson (1759), ibid., 379. Chinesee.— 
Sullivan (1779) quoted by Conover, MS., B. A. E. 
Chinesse.—Jones (1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
Vin, 786, 1857. Chinnesee.—Pemberton (ca. 1792) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc.Coll., 1st s., ii, 177,1810. Chino- 
sia.—Ft Johnson conf. (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vii, 264,1856. Genesee.—Livermore (1779) in 
N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., vr, 328,1850. Geneseo.—Knox 
(1791) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 226, 1832. 
Genessees.—Mallery in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 
352,1877. Genneces.—Goldthwait (1766) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 121, 1809. Gennesse.—Ma¬ 
chin, map (1779), quoted by Conover, MS., B. A. 
E. Ginnacee.—McKendry (1779) quoted by Cono¬ 
ver, ibid. Ischua.—Day, Penn., 644,1843. Tennes¬ 
see.—Drake, Bk. Inds.,bk. 5, 111,1848. Kanonske- 
gon.—Pouchot, map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 

x, 694, 1858. Tsinusios.—Claus (1777), ibid., vm, 
702, 1857. Tyo’nesi'yo’.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1890 (cor¬ 
rect Seneca form). Upper Senecas.—Claus (1777) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 702,1857. Zeneschio.— 
Loskiel (1794) misquoted by Day, Penn., 644,1843. 
Zoneschio.—Loskiel, Missions, pt. 3, 32,1794. Zone- 
shio.—Ibid., pt. 2, 122. Zonesschio.—Zeisberger 
(1750) quoted by Conover, MS., B. A. E. Zonne- 
schio.—Conover, ibid. 

Genizaros (Span, transl. of Turkish yeni- 
cheri (Eng. janizary ), lit. ‘new troops,’ 
referring to a former body of Turkish 
infantry largely recruited from compul¬ 
sory conscripts and converts taken from 
Christian subjects). A term applied to 
certain Indians who w r ere purchased 
or captured from predatory tribes and 
settled by the Spaniards in villages along 
the Rio Grande, N. Mex. One of these 
“pueblos de Genizaros” w T as established 
at Abiquiu before 1748; another at Tome, 
farther down on the Rio Grande, at a sub¬ 
sequent date, and a third apparently at 
Belen. See Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., 
416, 1748; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., 
hi, 197, 1890; iv, 54, 1892. (f. w. h. ) 

Genobey. A large Jumano settlement 
e. of the Rio Grande, in N. Mex., in 


490 


GENS-GERMAN INFLUENCE 


[b. a. e. 


1598.—Onate (1598) in Doc. In4d., xvi, 
114, 1871. 

Xenopue.—Ibid., 123. 

Gens. See Clan and Gens. 

Gens de la Sapiniere (French: ‘ people of 
the fir tree’). A numerous tribe formerly 
living n. n. w. of L. Superior and trading 
with the English on Hudson bay. Du 
Lhut, in 1684, endeavored to draw their 
trade to the French. They w r ere distinct 
from the Cree, Chippewa, and Assini- 
boin, and may have been a part of the 
Maskegon.—La Chesnaye (1697) inMar- 
gry, D6c., vi, 7, 1886. 

Gens de Paise (corruption of French 
Gens du Pais, ‘ people of the land ’; or of 
Gens du Pause, ‘band of the j>aunch). 
Given as a band of Sioux at the Mandan 
subagency, N. Dak., in 1832 (Ex. Doc. 
90, 22d Cong., 1st sess., 63, 1832), but 
probably intended for the Hidatsa, q. v. 

Gens de Pied (French: ‘foot people’). 
A former band of Assiniboin in 33 lodges 
w. of Eagle hills, Assiniboia, Canada.— 
Henry (1808) in Coues, New Light, ii, 
491, 1897. 

Foot Assiniboines.—Ibid., 523. 

Gens des Lacs (French: ‘people of the 
lakes’). One of the 5 tribes into 
which Badin (Ann. de la Prop, de la 
Foi, iv, 536, 1843) in 1830 divided the 
Sioux nation. What people he includes 
has not been ascertained, possibly only 
the Mdewakanton. Prichard (Phys. 
Hist. Mankind, v, 140, 1847) uses the 
term Gens du Lac as equivalent to Peo¬ 
ple of the Leaves, and includes the 4 
most easterly Dakota tribes, not only 
the Mdewakanton (the true Gens des 
Lacs), but the Wahpeton (Leaf villages), 
Wahpekute (Leaf-shooters), and Sisseton. 

Gens du Large (French: ‘wandering 
people’). One of the two divisions 
of the Dakota, as given by Long (Ex- 
ped. St Peters r., i, 380, 1824), com¬ 
prising the following tribes: Kahra (a 
Sisseton band), Miakechakesa (Sisseton), 
Tetoans (Teton), Wahkpakota (Wahpe¬ 
kute), Wahkpatoan (Wahpeton), Yank- 
toanan (Yanktonai), Yanktoan (Yank¬ 
ton). It embraces all the group except 
the Mdewakanton, his Gens du Lac. 
Dacota errans.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 55, 1826. 
Roving Dakotas.—Long, op. cit., I, 380. 

Gentaienton (‘meadows lying to¬ 
gether.’—Hewitt). One of the chief vil¬ 
lages of the Erie, q. v. Its location is 
not known, but the name indicates that it 
was on a plain. 

Gentagega.—Jes. Rel., Thwaites ed., lviii, 75,1899. 
Gentaguetehronnons.—Ibid., XLII, 197, 1899. Gen¬ 
taienton.—Ibid., lxi, 195, 1900. Kentaienton.— 
Shea, note in Charlevoix, New France, n, 266, 
1866. 

Gergecensens. A subdivision of the so- 
called Thamien group of the Costanoan 
Indians of California. 

Gergecensens.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 22, 
1860. Gerguensens.—Ibid. Gerzuensens.—Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, I, 452,1874. 


German influence. German influence 
on the aborigines n. of Mexico has 
made itself felt in three particular re¬ 
gions—among the Eskimo of Labrador 
and Greenland; among the Delawares, 
Mahican, and some of the Iroquois in 
Pennsylvania, New York, and Ontario; 
and among the Cherokee of South Caro¬ 
lina. In those regions Moravian mission¬ 
aries have endeavored to convert the 
natives with considerable success. The 
Moravian missions in Greenland began in 
1721 under Egede. The station of Ny 
Herrnhut dates from 1734. From the 
account given by Thompson (Moravian 
Missions/211,1890) the native Christians 
in Greenland number some 1,500, and 
their customs and habits have been much 
changed for the better, especially where 
the influence of whalers and traders has 
not been too strong. The Moravian 
efforts in Labrador began at Hopedale in 
1752 under Ehrhardt, but the first suc¬ 
cessful establishment was made in 1771. 
The general result has been to modify 
considerably the dress, implements, hab¬ 
its, and beliefs of the natives, and particu¬ 
larly their sexual morality (Delabarre in 
Bull. Geog. Soc. Phila., 145-151, 1902). 
The disappearance of the Eskimo pirates, 
who once infested the straits of Belleisle, 
and the general improvement of Arctic 
navigation have been brought about 
through the change in Eskimo life and 
character. Turner observed that some of 
the Eskimo children of the Labrador 
missions use the German words for num¬ 
bers up to 10 in their counting-out games, 
having caught them from the mission¬ 
aries. Much of what the Moravians have 
accomplished in Greenland has been done 
in spite of the Danish authorities rather 
than with their cooperation. Moravian 
missionaries in the 18th century and the 
early years of the 19th, labored among 
the Mahican of e. New York (Rauch 
having begun the work in 1740), among 
the Delawares and other tribes of Penn¬ 
sylvania, Zeisberger being “the apostle 
of the Delawares,” and among the Iro¬ 
quois in parts of Pennsylvania, New York, 
and Canada (Thompson, op. cit., 267-341). 
They exercised restraint on the Indians 
during the French-English and Revolu¬ 
tionary wars, when their converts gener¬ 
ally were illtreated by all sorts of white 
men. According to Thompson (p. 276) 
the Moravian mission of 1735 to Georgia 
was the first company from any quarter 
that reached the shores of America with 
the express and leading object of evangel¬ 
izing natives. Their labors began among 
the Creeks. Moravian missions were 
established also among the Cherokee 
(Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 
1900). According to some the father of 
Sequoya, the inventor of the Cherokee 


GERONIMO-GHOST DANCE 491 


BULL. 30] 

alphabet, was a German of the Georgia 
colony. (a. f. c.) 

Geronimo (Spanish for Jerome, applied by 
the Mexicans as a nickname; native name 
Goyathlay, ‘ one who yawns’). A medi¬ 
cine-man and prophet of the Chiricahua 
Apache who, in the latter part of the 19th 
century, acquired notoriety through his 
opposition to the authorities and by sys¬ 
tematic and sensational advertising; born 
about 1834 at the headwaters of Gilar., N. 
Mex., near old Ft Tulerosa. His father 
was Taklishim, ‘The Gray One,’who was 
not a chief, although his father (Geroni¬ 
mo’s grandfather) assumed to be a chief 
without heredity or election. Geroni- 
mo’s mother was known as Juana. When 
it was decided, in 1876, in consequence 
of depredations committed in Sonora, of 



GERONIMO 


which the Mexican government com¬ 
plained, to remove the Chiricahua from 
their reservation on the s. frontier to 
San Carlos, Ariz., Geronimo and others 
of the younger chiefs fled into Mexico. 
He was arrested later when he returned 
with his band to Ojo Caliente, N. Mex., 
and tilled the ground in peace on San 
Carlos res. until the Chiricahua became 
discontented because the Government 
would not help them irrigate their lands. 
In 1882 Geronimo led one of the bands 
that raided in Sonora and surrendered 
when surrounded by Gen. George H. 
Crook’s force in the Sierra Madre. He 
had one of the best farms at San Carlos, 
when trouble arose in 1884 in consequence 
of the attempt of the authorities to stop 
the making of tiswin, the native intoxi¬ 


cant. During 1884-85 he gathered a band 
of hostiles, who terrorized the inhabit¬ 
ants of s. Arizona and New Mexico, as well 
as of Sonora and Chihuahua, in Mexico. 
Gen. Crook proceeded against them 
with instructions to capture or destroy 
the chief and his followers. In Mar., 
1886, a truce was made, followed by a 
conference, at which the terms of sur¬ 
render were agreed on; but Geronimo 
and his followers having again fled to the 
Sierra Madre across the Mexican frontier, 
and Gen. Miles having been placed in 
command, active operations were renewed 
and their surrender was ultimately ef¬ 
fected in the following August. The 
entire band, numbering about 340, in¬ 
cluding Geronimo and Nachi, the hered¬ 
itary chief, were deported as prisoners of 
war, first to Florida and later to Alabama, 
being finally settled at Ft Sill, Okla., 
where they now reside under military 
supervision and in prosperous condition, 
being industrious workers and careful 
spenders. Geronimo died there Feb. 17, 
1909. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Gewauga ( Odji f wagi n \ ‘it is bitter, 
salty.’—Hewitt). A Cayuga village on 
the site of the presentUnion Springs, town 
of Springport, on the e. side of Cayuga 
lake, N. Y. It was destroyed by Sullivan’s 
troops, Sept. 22, 1779. (j. n. b. h.) 

Ge-wa'-ga.—Morgan, League Iroq., 470, 1851. Ge- 
wau'-ga.—Ibid., 423. Ge-waw ga.—Adams in Ca¬ 
yuga Co. Hist. Soc. Coll., no. 7, 176, 1889. 

Ghost dance. A ceremonial religious 
dance connected with the messiah doc¬ 
trine, which originated among the Pavi- 
otso in Nevada about 1888, and spread 
rapidly among other tribes until it num¬ 
bered among its adherents nearly all 
the Indians of the interior basin, from 
Missouri r. to or beyond the Rockies. 
The prophet of the religion was a young 
Paiute Indian, at that time not yet 35 
years of age, known among his own peo¬ 
ple as Wovoka (‘Cutter’), and com¬ 
monly called by the whites Jack Wilson, 
from having worked in the family of a 
ranchman named Wilson. Wovoka seems 
already to have established his reputa¬ 
tion as a medicine-man when, about 
the close of 1888, he was attacked by a 
dangerous fever. While he was ill an 
eclipse spread excitement among the In¬ 
dians, with the result that Wovoka be¬ 
came delirious and imagined that he had 
been taken into the spirit world, and 
there received a direct revelation from 
the God of the Indians. Briefly stated, 
the revelation was to the effect that a 
new dispensation was close at hand by 
which the Indians would be restored to 
their inheritance and reunited with their 
departed friends, and that they must pre¬ 
pare for the event by practising the songs 
and dance ceremonies which the prophet 
gave them. Within a very short time 






492 


GHUACLAHATCHE-GIPUY 


[B. a. e. 


the dance spread to the tribes e. of the 
mountains, where it became known com¬ 
monly as the Spirit or Ghost dance. The 
dancers, men and women together, held 
hands, and moved slowly around in a 
circle, facing toward the center, keeping 
time to songs that were sung without any 
instrumental accompaniment. Hypnotic 
trances were a common feature of the 
dance. Among the Sioux in Dakota the 
excitement, aggravated by local griev¬ 
ances, led to an outbreak in the winter of 
1890-91. The principal events in this 
connection were the killing of Sitting 
Bull, Dec. 15, 1890, and the massacre at 
Wounded Knee, Dec. 29. The doctrine 
has now faded out, and the dance exists 
only as an occasional social function. In 
the Crow dance of the Cheyenne and 
Arapaho, a later development from the 
Ghost dance proper, the drum is used, 
and many of the ordinary tribal dances 
have incorporated Ghost-dance features, 
including even the hypnotic trances. 

The belief in the coming of a messiah, 
or deliverer, who shall restore his people 
to a condition of primitive simplicity and 
happiness, is probably as universal as the 
human race, and takes on special empha¬ 
sis among peoples that have been long 
subjected to alien domination. In some 
cases the idea seems to have originated 
from a myth, but in general it may safely 
be assumed that it springs from a natural 
human longing. Both the Quichua of 
Peru and the Aztec of Mexico, as well 
as more cultured races, had elaborate 
messiah traditions, of which the first 
Spanish invaders were quick to take ad¬ 
vantage, representing themselves as the 
long-expected restorers of ancient happi¬ 
ness. Within the United States nearly 
every great tribal movement originated 
in the teaching of some messianic prophet. 
This is notably true of the Pontiac con¬ 
spiracy in 1763-64, and of the combination 
organized by Tecumseh (q. v.) and his 
brother, the prophet Tenskwatawa (q. v.), 
shortly before the War of 1812. Of similar 
nature in more recent times is the doctrine 
formulated on Columbia r. by Smohalla. 
See Mooney, Ghost Dance Religion, 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., pt. ii, 1896. See Dance, 
Mythology, Religion. (j. m.) 

Ghuaclahatche. A former Upper Creek 
town on lower Tallapoosa r., Ala., be¬ 
tween Kulumi and the Atasi towns.— 
Bartram, Travels, 461, 1791. 

Giants. See Popular fallacies. 

Gidanemuk (or Gilddanum ). A band of 
Serranos (q. v.) living on Tejon and neigh¬ 
boring creeks in the Tehachapi mts., s. 
Cal. The term is that which they apply 
to themselves. (a. l. k. ) 

Giguay. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with San Juan Bau¬ 
tista mission, Cal.—Engelhardt, Francis¬ 
cans in Cal., 398, 1897. 


Gila Apache. The name Gila, or Xila, 
was apparently originally that of an 
Apache settlement w. of Socorro, in s. w. 
New Mexico, and as early as 1630 was ap¬ 
plied to those Apache residing for part of 
the time on the extreme headwaters of the 
Rio Gila in that territory, evidently em¬ 
bracing those later known as Mimbrenos, 
Mogollones, and Warm Springs (Chiri- 
cahua) Apache, and later extended to 
include the Apache living along the Gila 
in Arizona. The latter were seemingly 
the Arivaipa and Chiricahua, or a part of 
them. There were about 4,000 Indians 
under this name in 1853, when some of 
their bands were gathered at Ft Webster, 
N. Mex., and induced by promise of sup¬ 
plies for a number of years to settle down 
and begin farming. They kept the peace 
and made some progress in industry, but 
were driven back to a life of pillage when 
the supplies were stopped, the treaty not 
having been confirmed. They are no 
longer recognized under this name. The 
term Gilenos has also been employed to 
designate the Pima residing on the Gila 
in Arizona. (f. w. h.) 

Apaches de Xila.—Benavides, Memorial, 53, 1630. 
Apaches gilenos.—Garc6s (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 
4th s., II, 371, 1856. Apaches jilenos.—Escudero, 
Notic. de Sonora y Sinaloa, 69, 1849. Cilenos.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864. Gelinos.—Hamy 
in Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, 788, 1883. Gila 
Apaches.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 436, 1853. Gilans.— 
Hughes, Doniphan’s Exped., 216, 1848. Gilas.— 
Rivera, Diario y Derrotero, leg. 950, 1736. Gile- 
has.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 122, 1861. Gileno.—Adelung 
and Vater, Mithridates, in, 178, 1816. Gilenos.— 
Arricivita (1791) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 388, 1889. Gilenos Apaches.—Garc6s (1769) 
in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., n, 375, 1856. Southern 
Apache.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 191, 1872. Tiuiccu- 
jen-ne.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Tjusceu- 
jen-ne.—Escudero, Notic. Estad. de Chihuahua, 
212, 1834 (native name). Xilenos.—Rudo Ensayo 
(ca. 1763), Smith ed., 20, 1863. Xilenos.—Alegre, 
Hist. Comp. Jesus, I, 336,1841. Yabipais Gilenos.— 
Garc6s (1776), Diary, 452, 1900. 

Gilak. A Magemiut settlement near 
C. Romanzoff, Alaska; pop. 22 in 1890. 
Gilakhamiut.—11th Census, Alaska, 111, 1893. 

Gilimis. A former village, said to have 
been Esselen, connected with San Carlos 
mission, Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 20, 1860. 

Gimiels. A band of almost pure Yuma 
in n. Lower California (Taylor in Browne, 
Res. Pac. Slope, app., 53-54, 1869). Per¬ 
haps the Corneya. 

Gipuy. A village occupied by the an¬ 
cestors of the present Queres of Santo Do¬ 
mingo pueblo, 1£ m. e. of Thornton, on 
the brink of Arroyo de Galisteo, n. cen¬ 
tral N. Mex. In consequence of a flood 
which destroyed a portion of the pueblo, 
Gipuy was abandoned prior to 1591, and 
another village bearing the same name 
was built 4 m. w., nearly on the site of 
the present Santo Domingo. It was the 
latter Gipuy that was visited and named 
Santo Domingo (q. v.) by Castano de 
Sosa in 1591; but after 1605 this pueblo 
was also destroyed by a freshet, the in- 


BULL. 30] 


GIRTY’s TOWN-GNADENHUETTEN 


493 


habitants moving farther w., where they 
built another village on the banks of the 
Rio Grande, naming it Huashpa Tzena. 
See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
185-187, 1892. (f. w. h.) 

Gi-pu-i.—Bandelier in Ausland, 814, 1882. Gi- 
pu-y.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 22,185, 
1892. Guiperi.—Onate cited by Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Bull., i, 18, 1883 (misprint). Guipui.—Onate 
(1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 102, 1871 (or Santo Do¬ 
mingo). Gui-pu-y.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, ill, 34,1890. 

Girty’s Town. A Shawnee village in 
1795 on St Marys r., e. of Celina reser¬ 
voir, Auglaize co., Ohio. It took its 
name from Simon Girty, an Indian trader 
living with the Shawnee. (j. m.) 

Gist, George. See Sequoya. 

Gitin-gidjats (Gitin-gVdjats, ‘servants 
of theGitins’). A family of the Eagle 
clan of the Haida. This family, who are 
of low social rank and are distributed 
among the houses of the Gitins of Skide- 
gate, once had a town in connection with 
the Lana-chaadus, on Shingle bay, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., but people of 
Kloo enslaved so many of them that they 
gave u p their town and independent family 
organization, entering the different houses 
of the Gitins as servants.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 273, 1905. 

Gyitingits’ats.—Boas, Twelfth Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 24, 25, 1898. Gyit’ingyits’ats.—Boas, Fifth 
Rep., ibid., 26, 1889. 

Gitinka-lana ( GVtinqla-Wna ). A town 
of the Yagunstlan-lnagai of the Haida, 
on theN. shore of Masset inlet, Brit. Col., 
■where it expands into the inner bay.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Gitins ( Giti'ns ). An important subdi¬ 
vision of the Eagle clan of the Haida. 
Gitins is a synonym for Eagle clan, and 
the name of the subdivision would nat¬ 
urally have been Hlgaiu-gitinai, but the 
family was so prominent that, as in a sim¬ 
ilar case at Masset, it came to be called 
simply Gitins. This was the subdivision 
or family that owned the town of Skide- 
gate, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It 
was divided into two principal branches— 
Nayuuns-haidagai and Nasagas-haida- 
gai. Subordinate branches were the La- 
galaiguahl-lanas and the Gitin-gidjats.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 273, 1905. 

Gyit’i'ns.—Boas, Twelfth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
24, 1898. 

Gitlapshoi (‘grassland people’). A 
division of the Chinook tribe living at 
Sealand, Pacific co., Wash. 

GiLa'pco-i.—Boas, Chinook Texts, 260, 1891. 

Gituns ( GitAns , dialectic variant of 
Gitins). An important family group of 
the Haida, living at Masset, Queen Char¬ 
lotte ids., Brit. Col. Its prominence at 
Masset, like that of the Gitins at Skide- 
gate, was such that no further designation 
was used. Two principal subdivisions 
recognized were the Mamun-gitunai and 
the Undlskadjins-gitunai; inferior divi¬ 
sions were the Tees-gitunai and the Sad- 
jugahl-lanas. (J. R. s.) 


Gyit’i'ns.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 23, 
1898. Kitans.—Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., sec. n, 125, 1895. 

Glacial man. See Antiquity , Archeology. 

Glaglahecha (‘ slovenly ones ’). A band 
of the Sihasapa Teton Sioux, possibly 
identical with Tizaptan, q. v. 

Bad looking ones.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 141,1851. Glagla-heca.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 219, 1897. Glagla-hetca.—Ibid. 

Glaglahecha. A band of the Miniconjou 
Teton Sioux. 

Glagla-heca.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 
1897. Glagla-hetca.—Ibid. 

Glen-Vowell Band. A band of Kitksan 
living on the right bank of upper Skeena 
r., 4 m. above Hazelton, Brit. Col.; pop. 
73 in 1904.—Can. Ind. Aff., 209, 1902; 
212, 1904. 

Gleuaxcuqu. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Glikhikan. A Delaware warrior and 
orator. He was one of the chief captains 
of the Delawares, who, in an argument 
with the French priests in Canada had, in 
the opinion of the Indians, refuted the 
Christian doctrine. Thinking to achieve 
a similar victory and win back to paganism 
the Christian Delawares, he challenged the 
Moravian missionaries to a debate in 1769. 
To the dismay of his admirers he was 
himself converted to Christianity, and in 
the following year went to live with the 
United Brethren. In the Revolutionary 
war his diplomacy saved the Christian 
settlements from destruction at the hands 
of the Hurons under Half-King in 1777, 
and when the latter, on Sept. 4, 1781, cap¬ 
tured him and the German missionaries, 
their chief interfered to save Glikhikan 
from the wrath of his Munsee tribesmen 
who were with the Hurons. Glikhikan 
was murdered and scalped at Gnaden- 
huetten on Mar. 8, 1782, by the white 
savages under Col. David Williamson. 

Glooscap. See Nanabozo. 

Glue. See Cement. 

Gluskap. See Nanabozo. 

Gnacsitare. A tribe, supposed to be 
imaginary, mentioned by Lahontan as 
living, about 1690, on a long river*emp- 
tying into the Mississippi in Minnesota, 
in about the same latitude as Minnesota r. 
Gnacsitares.—Lahontan, Voyages, I, 119, 1703. 
Gnacsitaries.—Janson, Stranger in Am., 277, 1807. 
Gnasitaries.—Coxe, Carolana, 19, 1741. Knacsi- 
tares.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, map, 1744. 

Gnadenhuetten (German: ‘ huts of 
grace’). The name of several mission 
villages (5, according to Brinton) estab¬ 
lished at different periods among the 
Mahican, Munsee, and Delawares by the 
Moravian missionaries. The first was 
settled in 1746 by Moravian Mahican from 
Shecomeco and Scaticook on the n. side 
of Mahoning cr., near its junction with 
the Lehigh, about the present Lehighton, 
Carbon co., Pa. In 1754 it was aban¬ 
doned for a new village, called New 
Gnadenhuetten, on the site of Weiss- 


494 


G0AS1LA-GOIOGOUEN 


[b. a. b. 


port, Carbon co., Pa. Delawares and 
Mahican occupied the village together. 
Soon after removing here the old village 
was burned by hostile Indians in 1755, 
and the new place was for a time deserted. 
In 1763 the Indians abandoned the set¬ 
tlement for a short time on account of the 
troubles arising from Pontiac’s war. The 
last and best known village of the name 
was established on the Muskingum, about 
the site of the present Gnadenhuetten, 
Tuscarawas co., Ohio, in 1772. Toward 
the close of the Revolution the inhabit¬ 
ants were removed to Sandusky by the 
hostile Indians, and on returning to 
gather their corn were massacred by 
the Americans in 1782. Consult Heck- 
ewelder, Narr., 1820; Howells, Three 
Villages, 1884; Loskiel, Hist. Miss. United 
Brethren, 1794. (j. m. ) 

Gnaden Auetten.—Rupp, Northampton, etc., Cos., 
220, 1845 (misprint). Gnadenhuetten.—Loskiel, 
Hist. Miss. United Brethren, pt. 3, 82,1794. Gua- 
den Huetten.—Rupp, op. cit., 86 (misprint). 

Goasila (‘northpeople’). A Wakashan 
tribe of Smith inlet, Brit. Col., speaking 
the Kwakiutl subdialect. The gentes are 
Gyigyilkam, Sisintlae, and Komkyutis. 
One of their towns is Waitlas. Pop. 48 in 
1901; 36 in 1904. 

Gua-shil-la.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 
Guasi'la.—Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 53, 
1890. Xwashilla.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 117b, 1884. Xwasila.—Boas in Bull. 
Am. Geog. Soc., 226,1887. Kwawshela.—Can. Ind. 
Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 70,1905. Kwaw-she-lah.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 145, 1879. Qoasi'la.— Boas in Petermanns 
Mitt., pt. 5, 131,1887. Quatsinas.—Scott in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 316,1868. Quaw-she-lah.— Boas in Bull. 
Am. Geog. Soc., 226, 1887. Quoisillas.—Brit. Col. 
map, 1872. Qusisillas.—Can. Ind. Aff., 113, 1879. 

Goch (‘ wolf ’). The name given by the 
southern Tlingit to one of the two sides 
or phratries into which the Tlingit are 
divided. The northern Tlingit call this 
phratry Cliak, q. v. 

Goto.—Swanton, field notes, 1904, B. A. E. Xha- 
liukh.—Dali, Alaska, 414,1870 (the word for petrel 
is here used erroneously). 

Godbout. A trading station of the Mon- 
tagnais and Nascapee at the mouth of 
Godbout r., on the St Lawrence, Quebec. 
In 1904 the Indians there numbered 40, 
the population having been stationary for 
20 years. 

Godthaab. The chief Danish residence 
and Eskimo missionary station on the w. 
coast of Greenland, about lat. 64°.— 
Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, map, 1767. 

Goggles. Inventions related to the vis¬ 
or and eyeshade, to reduce the amount of 
sunlight penetrating the eye. After the 
long Arctic winter comes the trying season 
of the low sun which, glancing over the 
snow and Arctic waters, nearly blinds the 
hunter and fisher. All northern peoples 
wear vizors of some kind, but it is not 
enough that the Eskimo should have his 
eyes shaded; he must have a device 
through which the eyes look out of nar¬ 
row slits or small elliptical holes. In¬ 


deed, in many localities the shade and 
goggles are united. From E. to the far¬ 
thest W. the Eskimo have succeeded in 
perfecting such apparatus. The Eskimo 
and Aleut spend much pains and skill in 
the manufacture of their goggles. They 
differ in materials, form, workmanship, 
method of attachment, and amount of 
foreign acculturation according to locality 
and exposure. Goggles or eyeshades 
were rarely worn by the Indians. In the 



WOODEN GOGGLES; HUDSON BAY ESKIMO. (TURNER) 


Report of the National Museum for 1894 
(pp. 281-306, figs. 15-35) this device is 
well illustrated. Consult also Boas, Mur¬ 
doch, Nelson, and Turner in the Reports 
of the Bureau of American Ethnology. 
In the writings of Arctic explorers also 
goggles are mentioned. (o. t. m. ) 

Gohate. A former Maricopa rancheria 
on the Rio Gila in s. Arizona; visited by 
Sedelmair in 1744 (Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 366, 1889). Apparently distinct 
from Cohate. 

Gohlkahin ( Gdlkdhtn , ‘prairie people’). 
A division of the Jicarillas. See Guhl- 
kainde. (j. m. ) 

Going Snake ( I'nddii-naG, , signifying 
that a person is ‘going along in company 
with a snake’). A Cherokee chief, 
prominent about 1825.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 522, 1900. 

Goiogouen ( GwZtlio' gw2 tl ‘, ‘ place where 
locusts were taken out of a liquid.’— 
Hewitt). One of the chief towns of the 
Cayuga in 1670, and from which the tribe 
took its name, situated at this time on the 
e. side of Cayuga lake, on Great Gully 
brook, about 4 m. s. of the present Union 
Springs, and 4 leagues from the town of 
Tiohero (Kiohero), lying at the n. end of 
Cayuga lake, and 6 leagues from Onnon- 
tare, these three being the principal towns 
of the Cayuga when first known. The 
inhabitants of Goiogouen were composed 







BULL. 30 ] 


GOLD 


495 


in part of Cayuga and in part of adopted 
captives from the Hurons, the Conestoga, 
and the Neutral Nation. This town or 
‘ Bourg d’Oiogouen,’ in 1668, according to 
the Jesuit Relation for 1669, contained 
more than 2,000 souls and could muster 
more than 300 warriors. While the Ca¬ 
yuga were proud-spirited, the missiona¬ 
ries found them more tractable and less 
fierce than were the Onondaga and the 
Oneida. At this town Father de Carheil 
dedicated the mission of St Joseph on 
Nov. 9, 1668, and 7 days later witnessed 
the horrible spectacle of the burning and 
the eating of a captive Conestoga woman. 
Archeologic evidence indicates, what is 
usual in regard to the permanency of In¬ 
dian village sites, that this town has been 
removed from site to site within a radius 
of 10 miles or more. 

In 1779 Gen. Sullivan’s army found 
three places named Cayuga; namely, (1) 
Cayuga Castle, containing about 15 very 
large houses of squared logs, superior to 
anythingseen before among these Indians; 
the troops destroyed here 110 acres of corn; 
(2) Upper Cayuga, containing 14 houses, 
situated about 1 m. s. of the Castle; (3) 
East Cayuga, ‘Old Town,’ containing 
about 13 houses, situated about 1 m. n. e. 
from the Castle. In these towns the 
troops found apples, peaches, potatoes, 
turnips, onions, pumpkins, squashes, 
cucumbers, watermelons, and vegetables 
of various kinds in great abundance. 
These with other hamlets of the Cayuga 
were burned and the fruit and vegetables 
destroyed by the troops, Sept. 23-24, 
1779. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Caiougo.—N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., index, 1861. Ca- 
jouge.—Doc. of 1687, ibid., Ill, 446,1853. Cayauge.— 
Ibid., 480. Cayuga.—Proc. at Johnson Hall (1765), 
ibid., vii, 737, 1856. Gajuka.—Beauchamp, Hist. 
N. Y. Iroquois, 162, 1905. Ga'-u-gwa.—Morgan, 
League Iroq., 159, 1851. Goiogoiien.—Jes. Eel. 
1668-69, Thwaites ed., m, 184, 1899. Goiogouin.— 
Ibid., 1673-74, lviii, 225, 1899. Goiogwen.—Ibid., 
1696, LXV, 25, 1900. Goiog8en.—Ibid., 24. Goyo- 
gouh.—Cusick, Sketches, 19, 1828. Goyogouin.— 
Jes. Rel., index, 1858. Gue-u-gweh.—Morgan, 
League Iroq., 51, 65, 1851. Gweugweh.—Ibid., 170. 
Mission de St Joseph.—Jes. Rel., 1670, 63, 1858. 
Oigoien.—Jes. Rel., Thwaites ed., index, lxxiii, 
1901. Oiogoen.—Ibid., 1656-57, X LI 11,185,1899. Oio- 
goien.—Ibid., 1655-56, xlii, 99, 1899. Oiogouan.— 
Ibid., 1656-57, XLill, 167, 1899. Oiogouen.—Ibid., 
1660-61, XLVII, 81, 1899. Oiogouin— Ibid., 1673-77, 
LIX, 77, 1900. Oioguen.—Ibid., 1659-61, xlvi, 181, 
1899. Oiogwen.—Ibid., 1666-67, L, 197, 1899. 
Oiog8en.—Ibid.,106. Ojogoiien.—Ibid., 1668-69. Lil, 
172, 1899. Oneyote.—Jes. Rel., index, 1858. Oni- 
oen.—Ibid. Onneiote.—Ibid., 1653, 18 (given as 
the chief * bourg’ or capital of the Omonenhron- 
nons, butprobablyamistakeforOnnontare.q. v.). 
Ouioen.— Ibid., index. Ouoguens.—Jes. Rel., 1676- 
77, Thwaites ed., lx, 173,1900. 

Gold. Although gold in the form of 
nuggets occurs in more than one section 
of the continent n. of Mexico, the tribes 
in general were practically withoutknowl- 
edge of its use. In a few cases objects of 
gold have been obtained from mounds in 
the Ohio valley, notably in the Turner 
group, Hamilton co., Ohio, where a small 


copper pendant was found retaining traces 
of a thin plating of gold, and bits of the 
filmy sheet were also found in the d6bris 
(Putnam). This plating with thin sheet 
gold is suggestive of well-known Mexican 
work, and along with other ev¬ 
idence obtained from mounds 
in Ross co., Ohio, tends to 
strengthen the belief that the 
mound-builders of this region 
had more or less indirect in¬ 
tercourse with the people of 
central Mexico. Some rudely 
shaped and perforated gold 
beads were found in one of the 
Etow r ah mounds in Georgia 
(Jones), and finds of slight 
importance are reported from 
other localities. 

The most interesting objects 
of gold found in connection 
with native remains come 
from Florida, and several of these have 
been published by Kunz. One of the 
specimens described was obtained from 
a mound in Orange co.—a flat rectangular 
pendant notched at the upper end for the 
attachment of a cord. It was 
associated with a human skel¬ 
eton, and had been worn as a 
pendant in connection with a 
necklace of glass beads. Its 
weight is 75| dwts. A second 
specimen is a pendant orna¬ 
ment 2| in. in length and 
nearly 1 in. wide, and weigh- 
ing 61^ dwts. It is convex on 
one face and flat on the other, 
from A mound; and is grooved at the upper 
Sum ter Co., end for the attachment of a 
Florida. corc p a third specimen is a 
disk of thin sheet gold, 3£ in. 
in diameter and weighing 19 dwts., with 
repousse embellishment about the edge 
and a circular boss at the center. It was 
found in a mound in Orange co., and in ap¬ 
pearance closely resembles gold ornaments 
found in large 
numbers in the 
Isthmian region. 

A fourth specimen, 
also from anOrange. 
co. mound, isaplain 
disk of thin metal 
nearly 2£ in. in di¬ 
ameter and having 
a central perfora¬ 
tion. A very in¬ 
teresting object of 
gold, or rather of 
gold-silver alloy, 
was obtained from a mound in Manatee 
co., s. Fla., and is described by Rau. It is 
cut from a piece of thin gold plate, and 
graphically represents the head of a 
crested bird, probably theivory-bill wood¬ 
pecker, the neck being prolonged in a 



Gold Pendant 
From a Mound; 

ORANGE CO., 

Florida. 

(kunz) 










496 


GOLDEN LAKE-GOSIUTE 


[b. a. e. 


thin knife-like blade. The conventional 
treatment of the bird is characteristically 
Floridian, and the object is almost cer¬ 
tainly of native make. The alloy consists 
of 893 parts of gold to 107 of silver, and 
may be of Spanish origin, although it is 
more likely to have been derived from 
Central America or Mexico. 

Although the early Spanish explorers 
of Florida found some gold in possession 
of the natives and were led to believe that 

it had been 
mined in 
the moun¬ 
tains to the 
n., the evi¬ 
dence on 

Gold Ornament From a Mound; Manatee Co., this point 
FLOR,DA. LENGTH 9 IN. (RAU) fc unSatig _ 

factory, and it seems highly probable, 
as stated Sir John Hawkins, that most of 
the gold observed in Florida had been 
derived from Spanish vessels wrecked on 
the coast on their homeward voyage 
from the gold-producing districts of mid¬ 
dle America. 

Consult Cabeza de Vaca, Relation, 
Smith trans., 1871; Douglas in Proc. A. A. 
A. S., xxxviii, 1890; Jones, Antiq. South¬ 
ern Inds., 1873; Hawkins in Hakluyt, 
Voyages, hi, 615, 1800; Kunz in Am. 
Antiq., ix, no. 4, 1887; Le Baron in 
Smithson. Rep. 1882, 1884; Moore, vari¬ 
ous memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. 
Phila., 1894-1905; Putnam in Peabody 
Mus. Rep., xvi, 1884; Rau in Smithson. 
Rep. 1877, 1878; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. 

A. E., 1894. (w. h. h.) 

Golden Lake. A band of Algonkin occu¬ 
pying a reservation on Golden lake, Ren¬ 
frew co., Ontario, near Ottawa r.; pop. 
86 in 1900, 97 in 1904. 

Golok. An Eskimo village in the Nu- 
shagak district, Alaska; pop. 29 in 1890. 

Gologamiut.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Gonaho. A former Tlingit town at the 
mouth of Alsek r., Alaska. Cf. Guna- 
chonken. 

Gona'xo.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Gun-nah-ho.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., Ill, 232, 1903. 

Gontiel (‘broad river’). Given as an 
Apache clan at San Carlos agency and Ft 
Apache, Ariz., in 1881 (Bourke in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 112, 1890). The name 
indicates a former habitat on Gila r. 

Goolkizzen (‘ spotted country ’). A band 
of Apache, probably Coyoteros, formerly 
under chief Nakaidoklini, q. v.—White, 
Apache Names of Indian Tribes, MS., 

B. A. E., 1875. 

Gorgets. A term applied to objects 
worn in some proximate relation with the 
gorge or throat. They may be suspended 
from a string or chain encircling the 
neck, or may be attached to the dress. 
They may be simple ornaments not dif¬ 
fering materially in form or significance 


from those used to embellish the ears, 
hair, wrists, or waist, or they may have 
special significance as symbols, insignia, 
charms, etc. They may be plain, or em¬ 
bellished with designs, significant, orna¬ 
mental, or trivial. They may be natural 
objects selected because of their beauty, 
or they may be made of any material pre¬ 
senting an attractive appearance. On 
account of its beauty of color and its 
probable sacred significance as being a 
product of the water, shell was a favorite 
material and the numerous engraved 
disks obtained from 
burial mounds in 
the middle Eastern 
states are typical 
pendant gorgets 
(see Shellwork). 

Sheet copper was 
extensively em¬ 
ployed by many of 
the tribes (see Cop¬ 
per) , and stone was 
in universal use. 

Gorgets may have 
one or two marginal perforations for sus¬ 
pension, or they may be pierced centrally 
or otherwise for attachment, against a 
supporting surface, as illustrated by the 
pierced tablets much used by the former 
Eastern tribes. The name gorget is also 
applied to composite ornaments of various 
kinds suspended on or fixed against the 
chest, the showy breast ornament com¬ 
posed of two rows of bone beads or tubes 
employed by the Plains tribes being a 
good example (see Adornment). Gorgets 
are described in various publications on 
ethnology and archeology, and a some¬ 
what extended discussion of these and 
allied ornaments and other objects, by 
Peabody and Moorehead, appears in Bull, 
n, Dept, of Archseol., Phillips Acad., 
1906. See Pendants , Pierced tablets , Prob¬ 
lematical objects. (w. H. H.) 

Goshgoshunk (‘hogplace.’—Hewitt). A 
large settlement of the Munsee and Dela¬ 
wares, with perhaps some Seneca, consist¬ 
ing of 3 villages, on Allegheny r. in 1767, 
about the upper part of Venango co., Pa. 
It was visited by the missionary Zeisber- 
ger in the year named, and in 1768 it be¬ 
came the seat of a Moravian mission. 

Goschegoschuenk.—Loskiel (1794) quoted by Rupp, 
West Pa., app., 356, 1846. Goschgoschuenk.—Los¬ 
kiel (1765), Hist. United Brethren, pt. 3,16, 1794. 
Goshgoshink.— Ibid., map. Goshgoshunk.—Day, 
Pa., 102, 1843. 

Gosiute (ktitsip , or gtitsip, ‘ashes,’ 
‘parched ordry earth,’-ftfo.-R.V. Cham¬ 
berlin ). A Shoshonean tribe formerly 
inhabiting Utah w. of Salt andUtah lakes, 
and e. Nevada. Jacob Forney, superin- 
tendentof Indian affairs for Utah, reported 
in 1858 that he had visited a small tribe 
called the Go-sha-utes, who lived about 
40 m. w. of Salt Lake City. “They are,” 




Shell Gorget From a mound; 
Tennessee, (diameter 4 1-4 

.N.) 






BULL. 30] 


GOT-GOURDS 


497 


he says, “without exception, the most 
miserable looking set of human beings 
I ever beheld. They have heretofore 
subsisted principally on snakes, lizards, 
roots, etc.” Writing in 1861, Burton 
(City of Saints, 475, 1862) says: “Gosh 
Yuta, or Gosha Ute, is a small band, once 
proteges of the Shoshonee, who have the 
same language and limits. Their princi¬ 
pal chief died about 5 years ago, when 
the tribe was broken up. A body of 60, 
under a peaceful leader, were settled 
permanently on the Indian farm at 
Deep cr., and the remainder wandered 40 
to 200 m. w. of Great Salt Lake City. 
During the late tumults they have lost 
50 warriors, and are now reduced to 
about 200 men. Like the Ghuzw of 
Arabia, they strengthen themselves by 
admitting the outcasts of other tribes, and 
will presently become a mere banditti.” 
The agent in 1866 said they “are peace¬ 
able and loyal, striving to obtain their 
own living by tilling the soil and laboring 
for the whites whenever an opportunity 
presents, and producing almost entirely 
their own living.” In 1868 the superin¬ 
tendent at Utah agency wrote of them: 
“These Indians range between the Great 
Salt lake and the land of the western Sho¬ 
shones. Many of them are quite indus¬ 
trious, maintaining themselves in good 
part by herding stock and other labor for 
the settlers.” It appears that later they 
cultivated land to some extent, being scat¬ 
tered over the country in spots where 
springs and streams afforded arable* land. 
It is asserted by some authors that they 
are a mixture of Shoshoni and Ute. Their 
language indicates a closer relationship 
with the Shoshoni proper than with the 
Ute and Paiute, though they affiliate 
chiefly with the latter and have largely 
intermarried with them. According to 
Powell they numbered 460 in 1873; in 
1885 they were said to number 256. 

The followingare divisions or subtribes: 
Pagayuats, Pierruiats, Torountogoats, 
Tuwurints, and Unkagarits. 

Go-sha-utes.—Forney in Ind. Aff. Rep., 212, 
1858. Goshee Utes.—Hatch in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 
116, 1864. Goshen Utes.—Head, ibid., 1867, 174, 
1868. Goship.—Ibid.,349,1866. Goship Shoshones.— 
Sen. Misc. Doc. 136, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 21, 1870. 
Go-ship-Utes.— Simpson (1859), Rep. of Explor. 
across Utah, 36, 1876 (so named from Goship, 
their chief). Goshiss.—U.S. Statutes, xm, 177,1866. 
Goshoots.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 26, 1863. 
Go-shutes.—Simpson, op. cit., 36. Gosh Yuta.— 
Burton,City of Saints, 475,1862. Go-siUtes.—Powell 
in H. R. Misc. Doc. 86, 43d Cong., 1st sess., 6, 1874. 
Gos-ta Utes.—Huntington (1857) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
29, 37th Cong., 2d sess., 85, 1862. Kusi-Utahs.— 
Remy and Brenchley, Journ. to Great Salt Lake, 
n, 412, 1861. 

Got ( Got ,‘ eagle ’). One of the two great 
exogamic phratries or clans of the Haida. 
A synonym for the term was Gitins, the 
meaning of which is uncertain. The 
Masset dialect made these f, ot and Gituns, 
respectively. (j. R. s-) 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-32 



STONE GOUGE; NEW YORK. 


Got.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, passim, 1905. 
Hoot.—Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 134b., 1880. 

Gouges. Stone implements resembling 
celts or adzes, with one face hollowed out, 
giving a curved edge. Early writers 
speak of their use 
as spiles, in some 
sections, for tap¬ 
ping sugar-maple 
trees, the sap run¬ 
ning through the 
groove into the ves¬ 
sel placed beneath. 

Examples grooved 
forhaftingare rare. 

Held in the hand 
and struck with a 
mallet, or hafted 
after the manner of 
a hoe or an adz, 
they would be serv¬ 
iceable for hollow¬ 
ing out wooden ca¬ 
noes, troughs, mor¬ 
tars, and other ves¬ 
sels, especially in 
connection with 
charring. The dis¬ 
tribution of these 
implements does not favor the theory of 
their use in making canoes, as they are most 
numerous in the N. where these vessels 
were mostly of birch-bark, and are rare 
in the S. where the dugout was the pre¬ 
vailing craft. The gouge is of somewhat 
rare occurrence w. of the Alleghanies. 
See Adzes, Celts. 

Consult Abbott, Prim. Indus., 1881; 
Fowkein 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Moore- 
head, Prehist. Impl., 1900; Rau, Archseol. 
Coll. Nat. Mus., 1876. (g. f.) 

Gourds. The shells of gourds were em¬ 
ployed by the Indians for storage and car¬ 
rying, as water jugs, dippers, spoons, and 
dishes, and for mixing bowls, pottery 
smoothers, rattles, sounders for the rasp¬ 
ing stick, roof-drains, masks, parts of orna¬ 
ments, and other purposes, and the flowers 
were used as food, coloring material, and 
in ceremonies. A number of species and 
varieties were commonly raised, produc¬ 
ing fruit of different shapes and sizes— 
globose, lenticular, pyriform, and tubular, 
with necks of varying length and curve, 
or without necks, but all of value for the 
general or special purpose for which they 
were selectively grown. Gourds were 
sometimes shaped by pressure or ban¬ 
daging while growing. W ild species were 
eaten green, or were used as medicine, 
but these were rarely made into utensils, 
while the larger and varied gourds, which 
were early distributed, like corn, from 
regions to the S. or derived during the his¬ 
toric period from the Old World, adapted 
themselves more fully to Indian needs. 
Aside from their use as domestic utensils 
















498 


GOVERNMENT 


[B. A. E. 


they were extensively made into rattles, 
those e. of the Rocky mts. being almost 
universally of pyriform gourds, while the 
shape of the Pueblo gourd rattles is glob¬ 
ular, lenticular, and pyriform. The 
Pueblos also made of gourd-shell heads 
for certain effigies, noses for masks, the 
bell ends of flageolets, ornaments for para¬ 
phernalia, and resonators for the notched 
rattle; and the Hopi imitate with a gourd 
trumpet behind a ceremonial altar the 
supposed sound made by the mythical 
plumed serpent. Gourd rattles for cere¬ 
monial use by various tribes were some¬ 
times painted, burnt, or etched in sym¬ 
bolic designs. A Navaho specimen bears 
the outlines of several constellations 
scratched on the surface. Among the 
Iroquois gourd rattles were the special 
sacred objects of the medicine societies. 
The Cherokee, according to Mooney, fast¬ 
ened hollow gourds to tops of long poles 
setup near their houses so that the black 
house-martin might build their nests in 
them and frighten away the crows. Some 
of the Pueblos have Gourd or Calabash 
clans. See Dishes, Rattles, Receptacles. 

(w. H.) 

Government. Government is the basis 
of the welfare and prosperity of human 
society. A government is an organic in¬ 
stitution formed to secure the establish¬ 
ment of justice by safeguarding rights 
and enforcing the performance of duties 
in accordance with the experience and 
the established customs and rules of con¬ 
duct of the governed. The superlative 
measure of justice obtainable by govern¬ 
ment is found in the care and protection 
of the young and the aged, the ready 
assistance rendered to comrades and the 
unfortunate, the maintenance of peace, 
the preservation of the equivalency of 
rights, the recognition of the equality of 
persons, the liberty of judgment and per¬ 
sonal activity, and the substitution of 
mercy for vengeance in the punishment 
of crime. Among primitive folk rules of 
conduct, formulated by common consent 
or by customs derived from high ancestral 
usage, are observed, and these are en¬ 
forced ultimately by corrective punitive 
measures. But justice is not secured 
thereby, and so some other method 
whereby causes in contention may be 
more promptly adjudicated is devised, 
and governments are organized. 

Among the Indians of North America 
there are found many planes of culture, 
every one of which is characterized by 
widely differing forms of government— 
from the simplest family group and vil¬ 
lage community to the most complex con¬ 
federation of highly organized tribes. In 
this area there are scores of distinct polit¬ 
ical governments, all differing widely in 
degrees of structural complexity. These 


differences in organization are determined 
largely by the extent to which the func¬ 
tions of government are discriminated 
and by the correlative specialization of 
organs thus made necessary. For most 
of the tribes of North America a close 
study and analysis of the social and polit¬ 
ical organization are wanting, hence the 
generalizations possible may as yet be 
applied safely only to those peoples that 
have been most carefully studied. How¬ 
ever, it may be said in general that kin¬ 
ship, real or fictitious, is the basis of gov¬ 
ernment among the Indians of North 
America, for the fundamental units of 
the social structure are groups of consan¬ 
guine kindred, tracing descent of blood 
through the male or the female line. 

The known units of the social and po¬ 
litical organization of the North American 
Indians are the family, the clan or gens, 
thephratry, the tribe, and the confedera¬ 
tion (q. v.). Of these the tribe and the 
confederation are the only units com¬ 
pletely organized. The structures of only 
two or three confederations are known, 
and that of the Iroquois is the type ex¬ 
ample. The confederation of tribes was 
not usual, because the union of several 
tribes brought together many conflicting 
interests which could not be adjusted 
without sacrifices that appeared to over¬ 
balance the benefits of permanent con¬ 
federation, and because statesmanship of 
the needed breadth and astuteness was 
usually wanting. Hence tribal govern¬ 
ment remains as the prevailing type of 
social organization in this area. In most 
tribes the military were carefully dis¬ 
criminated from the civil functions. The 
civil government was lodged in a chosen 
body of men usually called chiefs, of 
whom there were commonly several 
grades. Usually the chiefs were or¬ 
ganized in a council exercising legisla¬ 
tive, judicial, and executive functions in 
matters pertaining to the welfare of the 
tribe. The civil chief was not by virtue 
of his office a military leader. Among 
the Iroquois the civil chief in order to go 
to war had to resign his civil function 
during his absence on the warpath. 

In tribal society every structural unit 
has, so far as known, the right to hold a 
council. The ohwachira (q. v.) can hold 
a council, the family can hold a council, 
and the united ohwachira councils with 
their officers form the council of the clan 
or gens. The clan or gens has the right 
to hold a council. The chiefs of the clans 
and gentes are the tribal chiefs, who 
form the tribal council; but on occasions 
of great emergencies a grand council is 
held, composed of the chiefs and sub¬ 
chiefs, the matrons and head warriors 
of the ohwachira, and the leading men of 
the tribe. Besides, there is the council 


BULL. 30 ] 


GOVERNMENTAL POLICY 


499 


of the confederation. So there are family 
councils, clan councils, gentile councils, 
tribal councils, and confederation coun¬ 
cils, respectively exercising sway in sepa¬ 
rate and independent jurisdictions. 

In some regions nature is so niggard of 
her bounties to man that savagery and 
barbarism had not devised means tp en¬ 
able their sons to dwell there in, organ¬ 
ized political communities; hence here 
may be found some of the lowest forms 
of social organization, if such it may be 
named. Kroeber says: “In general 
rudeness of culture the California In¬ 
dians are scarcely above the Eskimo; and 
whereas the lack of development of the 
Eskimo on many sides of their nature is 
reasonably attributable in part to their 
difficult and limiting environment, the 
Indians of California inhabit a country 
naturally as favorable, it would seem, as 
might be. If the degree of civilization 
attained by people depends in any large 
measure on their habitat, as does not 
seem likely, it might be concluded from 
the case of the California Indians that 
natural advantages were an impediment 
rather than an incentive to progress” 
(Univ. Cal. Publ., Am. Archseol. and 
Ethnol., ii, no. 3, 81, 1904). This ques¬ 
tion of the effect of environment on the 
activities and development of peoples is 
one still requiring much scientific study. 

Dixon (Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, 
pt. 3, 1905), in treating of the northern 
Maidu of California, describes a state of 
society largely similar to that of the Hupa 
as noted in general terms by Goddard. 
Among the Maidu he finds no trace of 
gentile or totemic grouping. Aside from 
the village communities there was no 
definite organization. Every village or 
group of small villages had a headman or 
chief (the office being in no case heredi¬ 
tary), who was chosen largely through 
the aid of the shaman, who was thought 
to reveal to the electors the choice of the 
spirits. Mature years and wealth, ability, 
and generosity were strong recommenda¬ 
tions in making a selection. Tenure of 
office lasted only during good behavior. 
The functions of the chief were largely 
advisory, although force of character and 
ability might in some cases secure a larger 
measure of respect and obedience. There 
also appears to have been “a rather inde¬ 
terminate council, composed of the older 
members of the Secret Society.” 

Goddard (Univ. Cal. Publ., Am. Ar¬ 
chseol. and Ethnol., i, no. 1, 1903) says 
there were no organization and no formal¬ 
ities in the government of the village or 
tribe among the Hupa. “Formal coun¬ 
cils were unknown, although the chief 
might, and often did, take the advice of 
his men in a collected body.” Each vil¬ 
lage had a headman, whose wealth gave 


him the power of a chief and maintained 
him in that power, and he was obeyed 
because from him food was obtained in 
times of scarcity. If trouble arose, he 
settled the dispute with money. While 
the people obeyed him, whatever he had 
was at their service. “His power de¬ 
scended to his son at his death, if his 
property also so descended. On the 
other hand, anyone who, by industry or 
extraordinary abilities, had acquired more 
property might obtain the dignity and 
power.” The family and the village 
communities were the units of the social 
organization. 

According to Powers (Overland Mo., 
viii, 530, 1872), among the Karok of Cal¬ 
ifornia the chief exercises no authority 
beyond his own village, wherein his 
functions are chiefly advisory. He can 
state the law or the custom and the facts, 
and he may give his opinion, but he can 
hardly pronounce and execute judgment. 

Kroeber (op. cit., 83), in speaking of 
the Indians of California generally, says 
that the social structure was simple and 
loose, there being no trace of a gentile 
organization and that it is hardly correct 
to speak of tribes. Above the family the 
only units of organization were the vil¬ 
lage and the dialect; the common bond 
was similarity of language or frequency 
and cordiality of intercourse; in most 
cases the larger groups were nameless, 
while the village communities were usu¬ 
ally named from localities; the lack of 
organization generally made the system¬ 
atic classification of the divisions of any 
large body of Indians difficult; in popu¬ 
lation and social life the village approxi¬ 
mated a localized clan, but, being the 
largest political unit, it corresponded in 
a measure to a tribe. In so simple a con¬ 
dition of society difference of rank natu¬ 
rally found but little scope. The influence 
• of chiefs was small, and no distinct classes 
of nobles or slaves were known. 

Mooney says that the Kiowa govern¬ 
ment was formerly lodged in a council of 
chiefs, composed of the presiding chief, 
the chiefs of the several bands, and the 
war chiefs. Women had no voice in the 
government. The Cheyenne have no 
head chief, but instead have a council 
composed of 40 chiefs and 4 ex-chiefs. 

Some of the tribes, like the Five Civil¬ 
ized Tribes, the eastern Cherokee, and the 
Seneca of New York, have written consti¬ 
tutions patterned largely after European 
ideas. That of the Seneca is confirmed 
by the legislature of New r York. 

See Chiefs, Clan and Gens , Confedera¬ 
tion, Family , Kinship, Social organization , 
Tribe. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Governmental policy. The policy of the 
several governments toward the Indians 
and their methods of pursuing it were 


500 


GOVERNMENTAL POLICY 


[B. a. e. 


often at variance, and therefore should 
not be confused. The policy itself may 
have been just, equitable, and humane, 
while the method of carrying it into effect 
by those to whom this duty was intrusted 
was sometimes unjust, oppressive, and 
dishonest. The governments, other than 
those of the United States and the colo¬ 
nies, which have had control of parts 
of the territory n. of Mexico are Great 
Britain, France, Spain, Russia, Denmark, 
Sweden, and the Netherlands. Al¬ 
though the policy adopted by them in 
their dealings with the Indians differed 
in some important respects, all agreed in 
assuming the right of dominion, based on 
discovery, without regard to the natives. 
In all the contests between the European 
nations regarding their claims to territory 
in the New World the rights of the Indi¬ 
ans nowhere were allowed to intervene. 
The earliest charters, as those to Raleigh 
and Gilbert, make no allusion to the na¬ 
tives, while most of those of the 17th cen¬ 
tury call briefly for their Christianization, 
and efforts to this end were made to some 
extent in most of the colonies. The ques¬ 
tions of most importance in the relations 
of the whites with the Indians were those 
relating to the title to the soil. Although 
each government insisted on the right of 
dominion in its acquired territory and that 
of granting the soil, the rights of the 
original inhabitants were in but few in¬ 
stances entirely disregarded, though they 
were necessarily to a considerable extent 
curtailed (Johnson and Graham’s lessee 
v. McIntosh, 8 Wheaton, 583 et seq.). 
The Indians were admitted to be the 
rightful occupants of the lands, with right 
of possession over so much as was neces¬ 
sary for their use; ) 7 et the policy of the 
various governments differed in the ex¬ 
tent to which the exercise of this right 
was conceded. While Spain limited it 
to the lands actually occupied or in use 
(Recop. de Leyes de los Reynos de las 
Indias, i, lib. ii, 1774), the United States 
usually allowed it to the land claimed, 
whenever the boundaries between the 
different tribes were duly recognized. 

It was the usual policy of the United 
States and other governments, as well 
as of the colonies, in dealing with the 
Indians to treat them as tribes. The 
Articles of Confederation gave to Congress 
the “sole and exclusive right and power 
of regulating the trade and. managing all 
affairs with the Indians” not under State 
jurisdiction. By the Constitution, the 
power of Congress in this respect is briefly 
expressed as follows: “To regulate com¬ 
merce with foreign nations and among 
the several States, and with the Indian 
tribes.” The authority to act in this re¬ 
spect must therefore be found in this 
clause, in that relating to the making of 


treaties, and in the general powers granted 
to Congress and the Executive. The term 
“tribes” in the clause quoted would in¬ 
dicate that the framers of the Constitu¬ 
tion contemplated dealing with the Indi¬ 
ans as autonomous groups, through trea¬ 
ties; this was the method followed by 
the United States until it was changed by 
the act of Mar. 3, 1871, and was that of 
the colonies and the mother country. 
The effect of the act cited was to bring 
under the immediate control of Congress, 
as specified in art. i, section 8, clause 3, of 
the Constitution, all transactions with the 
Indians, and to reduce to simple agree¬ 
ments what before had been accomplished 
by solemn treaties. Laws w r ere enacted 
in the various colonies, and also by the 
United States, forbidding and rendering 
void the sale of lands by Indians to indi¬ 
viduals. By the act of Congress of Feb. 
8, 1887, the later policy of the Govern¬ 
ment, that the Indian tribes should cease 
to exist as independent communities and 
be made part of the body politic, found 
legislative expression. This act permits 
tribal lands, including reservations, to be 
divided so as to give to each man, woman, 
and child of the tribe an individual hold¬ 
ing and, after a limited probation, confers 
citizenship upon the allottees, and makes 
them subject to the laws of the states or 
territories within which they live. Pre¬ 
vious, however, to this final step inter¬ 
vened the reservation policy. The plan 
of forming Indian reservations was 
adopted from the necessity of bringing 
tribes under the more complete control of 
the Government and of confining them to 
definite limits for the better preservation 
of order, and aimed especially to restrict 
them to less territory in order that the 
whites might obtain the use of the residue. 
This was a most important step in the 
process of leading the natives to abandon 
the hunter stage and to depend for their 
subsistence on agriculture and home 
industries (see Reservations). The same 
policy was followed in Canada under 
both French and English rule, and to 
some extent by the colonies, and it was 
inaugurated by the United States in 
1786. An incident indicative of one 
phase of the policy of the colonies in 
their dealings with and management of 
the Indians is that Indian captives were 
held as slaves in some of the colonies, 
while, under various pretexts, during a 
period in the history of South Carolina 
Indians were forced to submit to the same 
fate. In 1702 the Virginia assembly de¬ 
creed that no Indian could hold office, 
be a capable witness, or hunt over pat¬ 
ented land; an Indian child was classed 
as a mulatto, and Indians, like slaves, 
were liable to be taken on execution for 
the payment of debt (Hening, Stat. Va., 


BULL. 30 ] 


GOVERNMENTAL POLICY 


501 


hi, 224, 250-252, 298, 333, 447). In 1644 
the county courts of Massachusetts were 
invested with jurisdiction over the Indi¬ 
ans in their respective districts (Rec. 
Mass., ii, 134). Through the efforts of 
John Eliot and Thomas May hew many 
Indians in Massachusetts were brought 
under religious influence and gathered 
into towns on lands set apart for them by 
the General Court in accordance with the 
act of 1633 (Thomas and Homans, Laws 
of Colonial and State Govts., 9,1812). In 
1655 the Indians were placed nominally 
under law and required to pay taxes. 

Though the brief rule of the Dutch in 
New York was marked chiefly by an irreg¬ 
ular and vacillating policy in their deal¬ 
ings with their Algonquian neighbors, 
they established a trading post at Albany 
in 1615 and entered into treaties with the 
Iroquois that were never broken. In 1664 
New Netherlands passed under English 
control, and the ill-advised English policy 
relative to the Indians of the northern 
districts prevailed until 1765, when, 
through the efforts of Sir William John¬ 
son, a more satisfactory and practical 
method of dealing with the Indians, es¬ 
pecially as to their territorial rights, was 
adopted. 

Preeminent among the difficulties in 
the way of carrying out a just, humane, 
and consistent policy has been and is 
still the antagonism, born of the igno¬ 
rance of both races of each other’s mode 
of thought, social ideals and structure, and 
customs, together with persistent conten¬ 
tion about land, one race defending its 
birthright, the other race ignoring native 
claims and regarding the territory as 
vacant. As a result a dual condition has 
existed—on the one side, a theoretic Gov¬ 
ernment plan, ideal and worthy; on the 
other, modifications of this plan in com¬ 
pliance with local ignorance and greed. 
The laws and regulations of the U. S. 
Government applying to the Indian 
tribes, with few exceptions, have been 
framed to conserve their rights. The 
wars, which have cost much blood and 
treasure, the enforced removals, the dis¬ 
honest practices and degrading influences 
that stain the page of history have all 
come about in violation of these laws and 
of solemn compacts of the Government 
with native tribes. In spite of adverse 
circumstances the theoretic purpose of 
the Government policy has slowly made 
headway. On July 13,1787, an ordinance 
was passed by the Continental Congress 
for the government of the territory of the 
United States n. w. of the Ohio r., in 
which article 3 provides: “The utmost 
good faith shall always be observed to¬ 
ward the Indians; their land and prop¬ 
erty shall never be taken from them 
without their consent; and in their prop¬ 


erty, rights, and liberty they shall never 
be invaded or disturbed, unless in just 
and lawful wars authorized by Congress; 
but laws founded in justice and humanity 
shall from time to time be made, for pre¬ 
venting wrongs being done to them, and 
for preserving peace and friendship with 
them” (U. S. Stat., i, 52, 1854). This 
ordinance was confirmed by the act of 
Aug. 7, 1789 (ibid., 50). Acts organizing 
the following states and territories con¬ 
tain an article 'reaffirming the above 
ordinance: Alabama, Colorado, Dakota, 
Idaho, Illinois, Iowa, Kansas, Michigan, 
Minnesota, Mississippi, Montana, Ne¬ 
braska, Nevada, Oregon, Wisconsin, and 
W yoming. 

The Republic of Texas in its need 
made solemn treaties which were after¬ 
ward repudiated; consequently no tribe 
within its limits could claim tribal lands. 
When Texas was admitted into the Union 
it retained its laws and the control of its 
public lands. The Indian tribes appealed 
to the U. S. Government for protection, 
and for their relief they were removed to 
reservations set apart for them in what 
was then a part of the Indian Ter., and 
there the remnant of them are now, hold¬ 
ing their lands in severalty, subject to the 
laws and regulations of Oklahoma. 

In 1792 the Russians established a 
school at Kodiak, and in 1805 one at 
Sitka, the Government and the church 
cooperating in behalf of education for 
the mixed-bloods and natives. When the 
transfer of Alaska to the United States 
took place in 1867 the teachers were 
recalled to Russia and the schools were 
closed. Within a month the American 
residents voted to establish schools, but 
little was accomplished. After 10 years 
of persistent effort Dr John Eaton, Com¬ 
missioner of Education, assisted by Dr 
Sheldon Jackson, secured the first Presi¬ 
dential appeal to Congress for civil gov¬ 
ernment and schools for the “self-sup¬ 
porting natives of the territory.” Four 
years later Congress passed the needed 
law in which the natives’ “right of occu¬ 
pancy” was recognized, the sale of liquor 
prohibited, and education ordered to be 
provided for the children of school age 
‘ ‘ without reference to race. ” In the fol¬ 
lowing year public schools were opened 
and some of the mission schools were 
turned over to the Government. The 
sufferings of the Eskimo consequent 
upon the decline of the whaling industry 
and the killing of the fur animals prompt¬ 
ed the introduction of reindeer from Si¬ 
beria in 1892. In the following year the 
Government made its first appropriation 
for the purchase of reindeer. Herds have 
been placed in charge of some of the 
schools, and Laplanders were imported 
to instruct the natives in the care and 


502 


GOVERNMENTAL POLICY 


[b. a. e. 


breeding of reindeer, which have very 
largely multiplied. Not only has a new 
vocation thus been opened to the natives, 
but a valuable means of support has been 
given to the rapidly increasing popula¬ 
tion of the territory (see Jackson, Rep. 
on Introd. of Reindeer, 1904). 

On May 22, 1792, the following decla¬ 
ration was made in instructions given to 
Brig. Gen. Rufus Putnam, who was sent 
to negotiate with the lately hostile In¬ 
dians near L. Erie: “That the United 
States are highly desirous of imparting to 
all the Indian tribes the blessings of civil¬ 
ization, as the only means of perpetuating 
them on the earth; that we are willing 
to be at the expense of teaching them to 
read and write, to plow and to sow in 
order to raise their own bread and meat 
with certainty, as the white people do” 
(Am. State Papers, i, 235). The first 
treaty providing for any form of edu¬ 
cation was made on Dec. 2, 1794, with 
the Oneida, Tuscarora, and Stockbridge 
Indians, w ho had faithfully adhered to 
the colonies during the Revolution. 
Twm persons were to be employed to 
instruct them in the “arts of the mil¬ 
ler and sawder” (U. S. Stat., n, 48). 
The Committee on Indian Affairs re¬ 
ported to the House of Representatives 
on Jan. 22, 1818, in favor of increasing 
the number of trading posts and estab¬ 
lishing schools on or near the frontier 
for the education of Indian children as 
measures that “ would be attended with 
beneficial effects both to the United 
States and to the Indian tribes” (Am. 
State Papers, ii, 151). In 1819 the first 
general appropriation ($10,000 a year) 
for Indian education was made. The 
maintenance of shops, supported, how¬ 
ever, by tribal funds, w r as one of the 
means used for industrial training, and 
many tribes through treaty stipulations 
supported and still support the schools 
on their reservations. The money ap¬ 
propriated by the Government for Indian 
education from 1819 to 1873 was mainly 
expended with the cooperation of vari¬ 
ous missionary societies that had estab¬ 
lished missions. From 1873 to the 
present time the Government has main¬ 
tained public schools for the Indians. 

About 1875 the Indians began to mod¬ 
ify the tribal form of government by 
depriving chiefs of power and transfer¬ 
ring their authority to a representive 
council, limited in number. The move¬ 
ment met with opposition in some tribes, 
but w r as accepted in others as a means 
of countervailing undue conservatism and 
giving to the progressive element a voice 
in the management of tribal affairs. 
About the same time Congress passed a 
law prohibiting agents from distributing 
supplies and ammunition to able-bodied 


Indians, between 18 and 45 years of age, 
except after the performance of some 
service “for the benefit of themselves or 
the tribe, at a reasonable rate to be fixed 
by the agent in charge and to an amount 
equal in value to the supplies to be de¬ 
livered.” The Secretary of the Interior 
might “by written order except any par¬ 
ticular tribe or portion of tribe from 
the operation of this provision when he 
deems it proper or expedient” (U. S. 
Stat., xviii, 176, 449, 1875). 

A court of Indian offenses w r as insti¬ 
tuted in 1882 in order to familiarize the 
Indian w-ith some of the methods w'hich 
his white neighbors use in trying and 
punishing offenders. Though the prac¬ 
tice of this court has been crude, it has 
yet assisted in preparing the Indian to 
conform to the general customs of the 
country. The judges are appointed by 
the Indian bureau to serve one year. No 
compensation is given. The agents all 
report faithful service on the part of the 
Indian judges. 

The method of establishing reserva¬ 
tions has not been uniform, some having 
been created by treaty, some by Executive 
order, and others by act of Congress; but 
those established by Executive order 
without an act of Congress were not held 
to be permanent before the general allot¬ 
ment act of 1887 w r as passed. The vari¬ 
ous Indian titles recognized by the Gov¬ 
ernment are (1) the original right of 
occupancy, alienable to the Government 
only; (2) the title to reservations, which 
differs from the original title chiefly in 
the fact that it is derived from the United 
States. The tenure since the act of 1887 
is the same as before, and the powder to 
alienate or transfer is subject to the same 
limitation, the absolute title being in the 
Government. Another class of titles is 
(3) where reservations have been pat¬ 
ented to Indian tribes, as those to the 
Cherokee, Choctaw, and Creek nations, 
or where grants made by Spain have 
been confirmed by treaty, as in the case 
of the Pueblo Indians of New Mexico. 
The right of the Indians on reservations 
to sell timber or to grant mining privileges 
has been restricted, though it is now 
being gradually extended. 

The policy.of the United States in deal¬ 
ing with the Indians has, as a rule, been 
humane and just. The chief exceptions 
are: First, that arid orsemi-arid landshave 
been selected for some of the reservations, 
defeating the effort to change some tribes 
from the hunter to the agricultural stage 
and entailing misery and death; second, 
that the pressure brought to bear by 
white settlers to eject the Indians from 
their favorite sections, where they were 
promised permanent homes, has too often 
been successful. See Agency system , Dutch 


BULL. 30] 


GOYATHLAY-GRANGULA 


503 


influence, Education, English influence, 
French influence, German influence, Land 
tenure, Missions, Office of Indian Affairs, 
Reservations, Russian influence, Spanish 
influence, Treaties. (a. c. f. ) 

Goyathlay. See Geronimo. 

Grail. The name of a chief and of a 
band of Sisseton and Yankton Sioux occu¬ 
pying a village of 627 people on Big Stone 
lake, 280 m. from the agency in Minnesota 
in 1836, the other chief being Mazahpa- 
tah. Grail was probably a Sisseton 
Sioux. See Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 
612, 1853. 

Granaries. See Receptacles, Storage. 

Grand Bois. A former village, probably 
of the Potawatomi, about 6 in. s. e. of 
Geneva, Kane co., Ill.; also known as 
Shaytee’s village.—Royce in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., pi. cxxv, 1899. 

Grande Gueule. See Grangula. 

Grand Portage, A Chippewa band for¬ 
merly at this place, on the n. shore of L. 
Superior in n. e. Minnesota; mentioned 
in La Pointe treaty (1854) in U. S. Ind. 
Treat., 224, 1873. 

Grand River Indians. The Iroquois liv¬ 
ing on Grand r., Ontario. They num¬ 
bered 3,230 in 1884, 4,050 in 1902, 4,195 
in 1904. 

Sweke-aka.—Gatschet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E., 
1885 (Tuscarora name). 

Grand River Ute. A band of the Yampa. 
Under Chief Piah they formerly ranged 
as far e. as Denver, Colo. They num¬ 
bered 350 in 1873. 

Denver Ute.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. Grand 
River Utahs.—Nicolay in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 151, 
1864. Pe-ah’s band of Utes.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 340, 
1874. Piah band.—Barber in Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv. 
Terr., in, no. 3, 533,1877. 

Grand Sanx. Given apparently as equiv¬ 
alent to the Dakota of the plains, as dis¬ 
tinguished from “Saux [Sioux] of the 
wood.”—Trumbull, Ind. Wars, 185,1851. 

Grand Soleil (French: ‘Great Sun’). 
The title of a noted Natchez chief, whose 
individual name is unknown, in the first 
half of the 18th century. He was a friend 
of the whites until the French comman¬ 
dant demanded the site of his village, 
White Apple, situated a few miles s. w. 
of the present Natchez, Miss., which the 
Natchez had occupied, as their chief 
replied, for more years than there were 
hairs in the governor’s peruke. The 
haughty commandant, Chopart, would 
not allow them to have even their grow¬ 
ing crops until it was agreed to compen¬ 
sate him for the concession. The chief 
then sent out bundles of sticks to the 
Natchez villages to indicate, ostensibly, 
their quota of the promised tribute, but 
really the number of days that were to 
elapse before making a concerted attack 
on the French. The docile and submis¬ 
sive Natchez were not suspected, even 
though a Natchez woman warned the 


French officers. On Nov. 30, 1729, the 
Indians massacred every white person in 
the settlement, 700 in number, and with 
his allies the Grand Soleil went on laying 
waste French plantations in Louisiana 
until the governor of the French colony 
assembled a force of French and Choctaw 
with which he recaptured the fort at Nat¬ 
chez. Then the chief ostensibly agreed 
to terms of peace that were offered, but 
in the night he and his people disap¬ 
peared in different directions. One divi¬ 
sion he led 180 miles up Red r., where he 
built a fort and an expedition found him 
a year later. His warriors sallied out to 
attack the French, who drove them back 
into the fort and bombarded them there 
until the great chief and some others 
surrendered themselves. The chief was 
taken to New Orleans and probably exe¬ 
cuted with most of his warriors, while 
the women and children who did not die 
of an epidemic that befell them were trans¬ 
ported to Haiti to labor as slaves on the 
French plantations. The title “Great 
Sun ” was always borne by the head chief 
of the Natchez to distinguish him from 
other members of the class of nobles, all 
of whom were called “ Suns.” 

Grand Traverse. A former settlement 
of the Chippewa near the site of Flint, 
Genesee co., Mich.; so named by French 
traders because at this point was the 
great ford of Flint r. on the Indian trail 
from the Saginaw to Detroit. The place 
became a popular hunting place and camp¬ 
ing ground, game and fish being abundant 
in the neighborhood. 

Granganameo. A son of Ensenore and 
brother of Wingina. chiefs of Wingan- 
dacoa (Secotan), N. C., and leading man 
of the tribe in 1585. He is noted chiefly 
for the friendly aid shown by him to Ami- 
das and Barlow and to Grenville and the 
accompanying English sent out by Sir 
Walter Raleigh in the year named. His 
residence was on Roanoke id., Albemarle 
sd. As Wingina was confined to his house 
by a wound when Amidas and Barlow ar¬ 
rived, Granganameo, as acting sachem, 
received the adventurers kindly and, ac¬ 
cording to the account given by them, sent 
them “commonly every day” deer, rab¬ 
bits, fish, and sometimes various fruits 
and vegetables. Unfortunately for the 
English colonists he died before a year 
expired. (c. t.) 

Grangula (from French grande gueule, 
1 big mouth ’). An Onondaga chief, whose 
right name was Haaskouan (‘His mouth 
is large’), but who was also known as 
Otreouati. The governor of Canada 
equipped an army in 1684 to crush the 
Five Nations because they interfered with 
French trade. Sickness among the troops 
having prevented the expedition, Gov¬ 
ernor de la Barre crossed L, Ontario to 


504 


GRANITE-GRAPHIC ART 


[b. a. e. 


offer peace, which he sought to make 
conditional on the restoration to French 
merchants of the trade that the Iroquois 
had diverted to the English. Grangula, 
representing the Five Nations, replied 
defiantly that the Iroquois would trade 
with English or French as they chose, and 
would continue to treat as enemies French 
traders who supplied the Miami, Illinois, 
Shawnee, and other tribes with arms and 
ammunition to fight them. 

Granite. A term applied to igneous 
rocks consisting essentially of quartz and 
orthoclase feldspar, with mica, horn¬ 
blende, and other accessories. The name, 
however, is often made to include a vari¬ 
ety of siliceous rocks with similar struc¬ 
ture, as the coarser gabbros and diabases, 
gneiss, syenite, etc. These rocks are gen¬ 
erally massive in structure, and were 
much used by the Indian tribes for their 
heavier implements, such as sledges for 
quarry work, hammers for breaking up 
stone and roughing out implements, and 
for axes, celts, mortars, pestles, mullers, 
discoidal stones, and the larger varieties 
of so-called ceremonial objects. On ac¬ 
count of the toughness of these rocks 
they were difficult to fracture or to flake, 
and were therefore shaped almost exclu¬ 
sively by the pecking and grinding proc¬ 
esses. Very generally the natives se¬ 
lected water-w r orn fragments approxi¬ 
mating the form of the implement to be 
made, so that the minimum of shaping 
work was necessary. (w. h. h.) 

Grape Island. A former Missisauga set¬ 
tlement, probably in n. Minnesota.— 
Jones, Hist. Ojeb. Inds., 138,1861. 

Grapevine Town. A former village, per¬ 
haps belonging to the Delawares, situated 
8 m. up Captina cr., Belmont co., Ohio.— 
Washington (1770) in Rupp, West Pa., 
app., 397,1846. 

Graphic art. With the tribes n. of 
Mexico the arts that may be compre¬ 
hended under the term graphic are prac¬ 
tically identical with the pictorial arts; 
that is to say, such as represent persons 
and things in a manner so realistic that 
the semblance of the original is not en¬ 
tirely lost. Graphic delineations may be 
(1) simply pictorial; that is, made to 
gratify the pictorial or esthetic impulse 
or fancy;(2) trivial, intended to excite 
mirth, as in caricature and the grotesque; 
(3) simply decorative, serving to embel¬ 
lish the person or object to which they 
are applied; (4) simply ideographic, stand¬ 
ing for ideas to be expressed, recorded, or 
conveyed; (5) denotive, including per¬ 
sonal names and marks of ownership, dis¬ 
tinction, direction, enumeration, etc.; and 
(6) symbolic, representing some religious, 
totemic, heraldic, or other occult concept. 
It is manifest, however, that in very many 
cases there must be uncertainty as to the 


motives prompting these graphic repre¬ 
sentations; and the significance attached 
to them, even where the tribes using them 
come directly under observation, is often 
difficult to determine. 

The methods of expression in graphic 
art are extremely varied, but may be 
classified as follows: (1) Application of 
color by means of brushes and hard or 
soft points or edges, and by developing 
the form in pulverized pigments (see 
Dry painting, Painting ); (2) engraving, 
which is accomplished by scratching and 
pecking with hard points (see Engraving ); 
(3) indenting and stamping where the sur¬ 
faces are plastic (see Pottery ); (4) tattooing, 
the introduction of coloring matter into 
designs pricked or cut in the skin (see Tat¬ 
tooing); (5) textile methods, as in weav¬ 
ing, basketry, bead work, featherwork, 
and embroidery (see Textile arts); and 
(6) inlaying, as in mosaic, where small 
bits of colored material are so set as 
to form the figures (see Mosaic). The 
figures are drawn in outline simply, 
or are filled in with color or other dis¬ 
tinctive surfacing. The elaboration or 
embellishment of sculptured or modeled 
figures or images of men and beasts by 
adding details of anatomy, markings, etc., 
in color or by engraving, thus increasing 
the realism of the representation, comes 
also within the realm of the graphic as 
here defined. In recent times, as the re¬ 
sult of contact with the whites, much 
progress has been made by some of the 
native tribes in the pictorial art; but the 
purely aboriginal work, although display¬ 
ing much rude vigor, shows little advance 
toward the higher phases of the art. Ab¬ 
originally, there waslittleattemptateffect- 
ive grouping of the subject save as required 
indecoration, and light and shadeand per¬ 
spective were entirely unknown. Por¬ 
traiture and landscape belong apparently 
to much more advanced stages of culture 
than have been reached by any of the 
northern tribes. When the delineations 
are devoted to the presentation of non- 
symbolic ideas merely, as in pictography 
and denotive devices, there is a tendency 
in frequently recurring use to progressive 
simplification; the picture as such has no 
reason to be perpetuated, and this sim¬ 
plification in time reaches a stage where 
a part takes the place of the whole, oi 
where semblance to the original is en¬ 
tirely lost, the figure becoming the formal 
sign of an idea. The graphic art of the 
northern tribes, however, shows no very 
significant progress in this kind of special¬ 
ization, unless modern alphabets, like 
those of the Micmac, or certain inscrip¬ 
tions of somewhat problematical origin, 
as the Grave Creek Mound tablet (see 
Grave Creek Mound) and the Davenport 
tablet (Farquharson), are considered. 


BULL. BO] 


GRASS HOUSE 


505 


Graphic delineations are most exten¬ 
sively employed by the tribes in pictog¬ 
raphy (q. v.), examples of which, engraved 
or painted on rock surfaces, are found in 
nearly every section of the country. Sim¬ 
ilar work was executed by many of the 
tribes on dressed skins, on birch-bark, and 
on objects of wood, ivory, bone, horn, and 
shell. The delineation of life forms in dec¬ 
orative and symbolicart is hardly less uni¬ 
versal than in simple pictography, and is 
especially exemplified in the work of the 
more advanced peoples, as the pottery 
of the mound builders and Pueblos, the 
utensils and the carvings of the tribes 
of the n. Pacific coast, and ceremonial 
costumes, and walls and floors of sacred 
chambers among various tribes. The 
graphic work of the Eskimo has a pecu¬ 
liar interest, since it seems to have been 
somewhat recently superposed upon an 
earlier system in which simple geometric 
figures predominated, and is much more 
prevalent where these people have been 
for a long time 
in contact with 
the whites, and 
more especially 
with the Atha¬ 
pascan and other 
Indian tribes 
skilled in graph¬ 
ic work (Hoff¬ 
man). A special 
feature of the art 
of the Eskimo is 
the engraving of 
hunting scenes 
and exploits of 
various kinds 
on objects of ivo¬ 
ry and bone— 
works paralleled 
among the Indian tribes in the S. by 
such examples as the Thruston tablet 
(Thruston, Holmes), the Davenport tab¬ 
let (Farquharson), and the battle and 
hunting scenes of the Plains tribes (Mal- 
lery, Mooney). 

Skill in graphic work was highly re¬ 
garded among many of the tribes, and the 
artist took particular pride in his work, 
and when especially successful became in 
a sense professional. Usually decorative 
designs were executed without pattern or 
copy, and with much directness. The 
most intricate patterns, applied to earth¬ 
enware vessels and other objects, were 
not sketched out but were drawn at once, 
and often with remarkable skill. Among 
the N. W. coast tribes, however, patterns 
were often cut out of cedar bark and 
the conventional life forms worked in 
their handsome blankets and capes were 
drawn out full size on a pattern board. 
The native artist did not draw directly 
from nature, but kept in view rather the 
presentation of the idea, delineating it in 


the conventional form common to his 
tribe. He might have been able to pro¬ 
duce a portrait, for example, but the de¬ 
sirability of portraiture does not seem to 
have occurred to him. He might have 
delineated a species of animal with accu¬ 
racy, but was apparently content to sug¬ 
gest the particular subject of his thought 
in a striking and forcible though conven¬ 
tional manner. See Art, Basketry, Orna¬ 
ment, Painting, Pottery. 

Among the numerous authorities to be 
consulted on this topic are Boas, Cush¬ 
ing, Fewkes, Holmes, Mallery, Mooney, 
Murdoch, Nelson, J. andM. C. Stevenson, 
and Turner in Reps. B. A. E.; Boas, Hoff¬ 
man, Mason, and Niblack in Reps. Nat. 
Mus.; Dixon, Kroeber, Matthews, Swan- 
ton, Wissler, and others in Memoirs and 
Bulletins Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.; Farquhar¬ 
son in Proc. Davenport Acad. Sci., n, 1877- 
1880; Grosse, Beginnings of Art, 1897; 
Haddon, Evolution in Art, 1895; Kroeber 
in Am. Anthrop., n. s., hi, 1901; Moore, 
various memoirs 
in Jour. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1894-1905; 
Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, i-vi, 
1851-57; Thrus¬ 
ton, Antiq. of 
Tenn., 1897; va¬ 
rious authors in 
the ethnological 
and archeologic¬ 
al journals. 

(w. H. H.) 
Grass house. 
A dwelling hav¬ 
ing the shape of 
an old-fashioned 
beehive, often 
described by Spanish and French travel¬ 
ers of the 16th and 17th centuries, which 
was the typical habitation of the Caddoan 
tribes, except the Pawnee and Arikara. 
Its construction was begun by drawing a 
circle on the ground, and on the outline 
setting a number of crotched posts, in 
which beams were laid. Against these, 
poles were set very closely in a row so as 
to lean inward; these in turn were laced 
with willow rods and their tops brought 
together and securely fastened so as to 
form a peak. Over this frame a heavy 
thatch of grass was laid and bound down 
by slender rods, and at each point where 
the rods joined an ornamental tuft of 
grass was tied. Two poles, laid at right 
angles, jutting out in four projecting 
points, were fastened to the apex of the 
roof, and over the center, where they 
crossed, rose a spire, 2 ft high or more, 
made of bunches of grass. Four doors, 
opening to each point of the compass, 
were formerly made, but now, except 
when the house is to be used for ceremo- 



WICHITA GRASS HOUSE IN PROCESS OF CONSTRUCTION. (mOONEy) 






506 


GRASSWORK-GRAVE CREEK MOUND 


[ B. A. E. 


nial purposes, only two are provided, one 
on the e. to serve for the morning, and 
one on the w. to go in and out of when 
the sun is in that quarter. The fireplace 
was a circular excavation in the center of 
the floor, and the smoke found egress 
through a hole left high up in the roof 
toward the e. The four projecting beams 
at the peak pointed toward and w r ere 
symbolic of the four points of the com¬ 
pass, where were the paths down which 
the powers descend to help man. The 
spire typified the abode in the zenith of 
the mysterious permeating force that ani¬ 
mates all nature. The fireplace was 
accounted sacred; it was never treated 
lightly even in the daily life of the family. 
The couches of the occupants w T ere placed 
against the wall. They consisted of a 
framework on which was fitted a woven 
covering of reeds. Upon this robes or 
rush mats were spread. The grass house 
is a comely structure. Skill is required 
to build it, and it has an attractive appear¬ 
ance both without and within. It is 
adapted to a warm climate only, and is 
still in use among the Wichita. Tempo¬ 
rary dwellings of poles covered wdth grass 
were common among the Plains tribes, 
and similar houses for storage purposes 
were used by tribes on the coast of Ore¬ 
gon (Boas). See Earth lodge , Habitations. 

Consult Catlin, No. Am. Inds., 1 - 11 , 
1841; Winship, Coronado Exped., 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; G. A. Dorsey, Mythol¬ 
ogy of the Wichita, 1904; Manzanet 
Diary in Tex. Hist. Ass’n Quar., n, 303, 
1899. (a.c.f.) 

Grasswork. The Indian found the 
widely diffused grasses of the United 
States of great value, almost a necessity, 
and adapted them in numerous ways to 
his needs. The obvious needs supplied 
by loose grass were for house building 
(see Grass house), bedding, for lining 
caches, etc.; it was also worked into bas¬ 
kets (southern Indians, Hopi, Pima, Tlin- 
git, Aleut, Eskimo), mats, leggings 
(Ntlakyapamuk),socks, towels (Eskimo), 
and other articles. The polished yellow 
or white stems were used by various tribes 
to ornament basketry, and by the Hupa 
of California as fringes of garments. 
Stiff stems were gathered into bundles 
and used as hair and floor brushes by the 
Pueblos and cliff-dwellers. Slender, flat 
grass stems, sometimes dyed, wereapplied 
to dressed skins by some tribes with 
sinew thread for ornamental purposes, 
just as were porcupine quills (Grinnell). 

Grass was generally found useful as tin¬ 
der; some species furnished excellent 
fiber for cord, and some were employed 
as perfumery. The Cheyenne burned 
grass and mixed the ashes with blood and 
tallow to produce paint. So far as is 
known the Indian invented no implements 


for cutting grass; basketry fans, gathering 
baskets, etc., were used in harvesting 
seeds for food. In ceremony grass had 
an important place. It was a component 
of various prayer-sticks and wands of the 
Hopi, and the sacred buffalo skull of some 
of the Plains tribes was thought to be 
made to live by stuffing balls of grass in¬ 
to the eye sockets and nose. Sweet grass 
was also burned to produce consecrating 
smoke and for lighting the pipe in sacred 
rites of the Plains Indians. The sod used 
in the Hako altar of the Pawnee, described 
by Miss Fletcher (22d Rep. B. A. E., 
1903) was in Indian thought a symbol 
of life and growth. (w. h.) 

Grave Creek mound. A noted prehistoric 
Indian mound, situated near Mounds- 
ville, Marshall co., W. Va., at the point 
where Grave cr. unites w ith Ohio r. It 
was visited as early as 1734, as appears 
from this date cut on a tree growdng from 
its summit, but was first described by 



GRAVE CREEK MOUND AND SECTION. (SQUIER AND DAVIs) 


Hart in 1797 (Imlay, Topog. Desc. W. 
Ter. N. Am., 296-304), since which time it 
has been repeatedly described and figured, 
attention of scholars having been called to 
it chiefly by an inscription on a small stone 
w hich was reputed to have been found in 
the mound during its excavation. The 
mound is conical inform, being probably 
the largest example of this type in the 
United States, having a diameter at the 
base of about 320 ft, a height of 70 ft, 
and 1,870,000 cu. ft of solid contents. It 
is symmetrical in form and has a dish¬ 
shaped depression in the top. It was ex¬ 
cavated in 1838 by the proprietor, who 
first carried a horizontal drift at the base 
to the center and a shaft from the top to 
connect with the drift. Two burial vaults 
were discovered, one at the base and an¬ 
other 30 ft above, each constructed of logs 
and covered with stones, which had sunk 
as the wood decayed, leaving the depres¬ 
sion in the summit. Squier and Davis 
(Anc. Mon., 169, 1848) assert that under 
the center of the mound there was a slight 
natural elevation into which the lower 





GRAY VILLAGE-GRIGRAS 


507 


BULL. 30] 

vault had been sunk. This vault con¬ 
tained two human skeletons, the upper 
vault but one. Accompanying the skele¬ 
tons were 3,000 to 4,000 shell beads, orna¬ 
ments of mica, several copper bracelets, 
and various articles of stone, including 
the inscribed stone mentioned, the in¬ 
scription on which has received various 
interpretations. An illustration of this 
inscription was first published in the Cin¬ 
cinnati Chronicle, Feb. 2, 1839; another 
in the American Pioneer, n, no. 5, 1843. 
Rafn, whose tendency was to give a for¬ 
eign interpretation to Indian inscriptions, 
inclined to the opinion that the inscribed 
characters were Anglo-Saxon runes, while 
Schoolcraft concluded that they belonged 
to some 8 or 9 different alphabets, as old 
Greek, Etruscan, etc. A committee of 
the Ohio Archaeological and Historical 
Society in 1877 reached the following con¬ 
clusions: “1. The inscription is not nec¬ 
essarily to be regarded as alphabetical. 
2. If it is assumed to be alphabetical, it 
can not be referred to any known lan¬ 
guage. 3. It is precisely of such a char¬ 
acter as would be the result of an ordinary 
attempt to manufacture an inscription. 
4. Its manufacture is within the capacity 
of any laborer of ordinary intelligence 
who may have been employed in the work 
of exploring the mound. 5. At the time 
of its discovery there was no proper 
scrutiny of the inscription to determine 
whether it was of recent manufacture or 
not. 6. The evidence that it came from 
the mound is by no means conclusive. 
7. Its history is such that the subsequent 
discovery of unquestioned ancient inscrip¬ 
tions with similar characters would war¬ 
rant us in concluding that this also is 
ancient. 8. Until its authenticity is thus 
fully established, it ought not to be re¬ 
garded as any evidence of the character, 
ethnical relationship, or intellectual cul¬ 
ture of the builders of the mounds.” 
Whittlesey, in 1872, expressed the belief 
that the inscription was a forgery. 

Consult Clemens in Morton, Crania 
Americana, 221, 1839; Schoolcraft in 
Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., i, 369-420, 1846; 
Squier and Davis, Anc. Monuments, 168- 
170,1848; Thomas (1) in 5th Rep. B. A. 
E., 51, 1887; (2) Cat. Prehistoric Works, 
222, 1891, with bibliographic references; 
Whittlesey in Tracts West. Res. Hist. 
Soc., i, nos. 9 and 33, 1877, and n, no. 44, 
1888. (c. t.) 

Gray Village. A former Natchez vil¬ 
lage. 

Grays.—Dumont in French, Hist. Coll. La., v, 49, 
1853. Gray Village.—Ibid., 48. 

Greasy Faces. A band of the Arapaho, 
q. v. 

Great Island Village. A former settle¬ 
ment, probably of the Delawares, on the 
Susquehanna opposite the present Lock 


Haven, Clinton co., Pa.—Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., Pa. map, 1899. 

Great Mortar (Yayatustenuggee). A 
Creek chief; an ally of the French in 
the Seven Years’ war. When the Eng¬ 
lish superintendent of Indian affairs called 
a council of the Creeks with the object of 
winning them over, he refused the pipe of 
peace to Great Mortar because the chief 
had favored the French, and the latter 
withdrew with his followers, confirmed in 
his hostility to the British. He received 
a commission from the French, and after 
killing or driving out the English traders 
and settlers took up a position on the 
border, where he could raid the Georgia 
settlements, obtaining his arms and sup¬ 
plies from the French fort on Alabama r. 
Many Creeks and Cherokee joined him 
there until the Chickasaw surprised the 
camp and put his warriors to flight. He 
settled at another place whence he could 
resume his depredations and continued to 
ravage the scattered settlements, includ¬ 
ing Augusta, Ga. In 1761 Col. James 
Grant, at the head of 2,600 Americans and 
friendly Indians, brought all the hostiles 
to terms, and a peace was made which 
fixed the watershed of the Allegheny 
mts. as the boundary between the British 
colonies and the lands of the natives.— 
Drake, Aborig. Races, 384, 1880. 

Great Spirit. See Popular fallacies , Re¬ 
ligion. 

Great Sun. See Grand Soleil. 

Green-corn dance. See Busk. 

Greentown. A former Delaware village 
on the Black fork of Mohican r., near the 
boundary of Richland and Ashland cos., 
Ohio. See Treaty of Maumee Rapids (1819) 
in U. S. Ind. Treat., 204, 1873; Royce in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., Ohio map, 1899. 

Greeting. See Salutation. 

Grenadier Squaw’s Town. A Shawnee 
village situated in 1774 on Scippo cr., Pick¬ 
away co., Ohio. The name was derived 
from Grenadier Squaw, a sister of Corn¬ 
stalk, the Shawnee chief, who made this 
her home. (j. m. ) 

Grenadier Squaws T.—Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, 
II, 402, 1896. Squaw Town.—Royce in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., Ohio map, 1899. 

Grey Eagle Band. One of the Dakota 
bands below L. Traverse, Minn. (Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1859, 102, 1860), evidently taking 
its name from the chief; not identified. 

Grigras. A French nickname and the 
only known name of a small tribe already 
incorporated with the Natchez confed¬ 
eracy in 1720; it was applied becauseof the 
frequent occurrence oigrigra in their lan¬ 
guage. There is uncertainty in regard to 
the language and ethnic relations, but 
unless affiliated with the Tonica, the tribe 
was evidently distinct from every other, 
since, as indicated by the sound grigra, 
their language possessed an r. 


508 


GRINAICHES-GUAES 


[ B. A. Er 


Grigas.—Richebourg (1713) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., ill, 248, 1851. Grigras.—Le Page du Pratz, 
Hist. La., II, 222, 1758. 

Grinaiches. Mentioned by Baudry de 
Lozieres (Voy. Louisiane, 242, 1802) in a 
list of tribes with no indication of habitat. 
Probably a misorint of some well-known 
tribal name. 

Grinding stones. See Abrading imple¬ 
ments. 

Grizzly Bear Erect. See Etsowisli-sini- 

megee-itshin. 

Gros (Les). A Wea village on the Wa¬ 
bash in 1718 (Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 891, 1855); perhaps in 
Tippecanoe co., Ind. 

Grosse Tete (Fr.: ‘big head’). A for¬ 
mer Chitimacha village in Louisiana. 

Grosse Tete namu.—Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop. 
Soc. Wash., n, 152, 1883 ( namu — ‘village’). 

Gros Ventres (French, ‘ big bellies’) A 
term applied by the French, and after 
them by others, to two entirely distinct 
tribes: (1) theAtsina(q. v.), orliitunena, 
a detached band of the Arapaho, and (2) 
the Hidatsa (q. v.), or Minitari. In the 
Lewis and Clark narrative of 1806 the 
former are distinguished as Minitarees of 
Fort de Prairie and the latter as Mini¬ 
tarees of the Missouri, although there is 
no proper warrant for applying the name 
Minitari to the Atsina. The two tribes 
have also been distinguished as Grosven- 
tres of the Missouri (Hidatsa) and Gros- 
ventres of the Prairie (Atsina). The name 
as applied to the Atsina originates from 
the Indian sign by which they are desig¬ 
nated in the sign language—a sweeping 
pass with both hands in front of the ab¬ 
domen, intended to convey the idea of 
‘always hungry,’ i. e., ‘beggars.’ A clew 
to its application to the Hidatsa is given 
in the statement of Matthews (Hidatsa, 
43, 1877) that the LIidatsa formerly tat¬ 
tooed parallel stripes across the chest, and 
were thus sometimes distinguished in pic¬ 
ture writings. The gesture sign to indicate 
this style of tattooing would be sufficiently 
similar to that used to designate the At¬ 
sina to lead the careless observer to inter¬ 
pret both as “Gros Ventres.” The ordi¬ 
nary sign now used by the southern Plains 
tribes to indicate the Hidatsa is inter¬ 
preted to mean ‘spreading tipis’ or ‘row 
of lodges.’ (j. m.) 

Big-bellys.— Gass, Journal, 76, 1807. Big bellied.— 
Mackenzie, Voy., lxiv, 1801. Bigbellies. —Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., i, 132,1814. Big Pauch. —Lewis and 
Clark, Travels, 15,1807 (misprint). Big Paunch. — 
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 18, 1806. Gos ventres. — 
De Smet, Letters, 62, 1843. Great Belly Indians.— 
Writer of 1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., in, 
24, 1794. Grosse Ventres. —Brown, West. Gaz., 212, 
1817. Gross Vantres. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark 
(1804), I, 210, 1904. Grossventers. —Gass, Jour., 76, 
1807. Gross Ventres.— Orig. Jour. Lewisand Clark, 
I, 243, 1904. Gross Ventres proper.— Schoolcraft, 
Ind.Tribes, 1 ,259,1851 (intended for the Hidatsa). 
Grosvantres.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, I, 209, 
1904. Gros-Ventres. —Saint Pierre (1753) in Margry, 
DOc., VI, 640,1886. Gros Ventres of the Missouri,— 
Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 220,1846 (intended for 


the Hidatsa). Gros-Vents.—Kane, Wanderings of 
an Artist, 366, 1859. Grovan.— Bonner, Life of 
Beckwourth, 162, 1856. 

Groton. A former Mohegan village about 
the present Groton, New London, Conn. 
In 1825 the population was reduced to 50 
souls. (J. m. ) 

Gua. A Chumashan village w. of Pue¬ 
blo de las Canoas (San Buenaventura), 
Ventura co., Cal., in 1542. In the Munoz 
manuscriptof Cabrillo’snarration (Smith, 
Colec. Doc. Fla., 181, 1857) this name is 
united, probably correctly, with the prefix 
Quanmu, forming Quanmugua. 

Guacata. An inland Calusa village on 
L. “Mayaimi,” or Okechobee, s. Fla., 
about 1570. Elsewhere in his memoir 
Fontaneda refers to it as a distinct but 
subordinate tribe. 

Guacata.—Fontaneda Memoir (ca. 1575), Smith 
trans.,19,1854. Guasaca.—Fontaneda in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., 2d s., n, 245, 1875. 

Guacaya. Mentioned by Oviedo (Hist. 
Gen. Indies, m, 628, 1853) as one of the 
provinces or villages on or in the general 
vicinity of the South Carolina coast, vis¬ 
ited by Ayllon in 1520. 

Guachochic (‘place of the blue herons ’). 
A rancheria of “civilized” Tarahumare 
on the headwaters of Rio Fuerte, about 
lat. 26° 50 / , long. 106° 55', in s. Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico; entire population 1,147 
in 1900. The inhabitants gain a liveli¬ 
hood mainly as servants of the Mexi¬ 
cans.—Lumholtz (l)in Scribner’s Mag., 
xvi, 32, 39, 1894; (2) Unknown Mexico, 
i, 194, 205, 1902. 

Guachoya. A palisaded village, prob¬ 
ably of the Quapaw, containing 300 houses 
in the 16th century, on the w. bank of the 
Mississippi, apparently a short distance 
below the mouth of the Arkansas. It 
was here De Soto died, May 21, 1542. 

Guachoia.—Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 432, 1881. 
Guachoya.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., II, 186, 1850. Guachoyanque.—Biedma 
(1544) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 107, 1850. 

Guadalupe. Mentioned as a Navaho 
settlement in 1799 (Cortez in Pac. R. R. 
Rep., hi, pt. 3, 119, 1856), but more 
likely the Spanish name of a locality, as 
the Navaho are not villagers. 

Guadelupe.—Domeneeh, Desertsof N. A., II, 7,1860. 

Guadalupe. A Papago village about 10 
leagues s. of Areitorae, in Sonora. Mexico. 

Guadalupe,—Box, Adventurers, 264, 1869. Guada- 
lupe-Pa-Pagoe.—Ibid. (i.e., “Papago”). 

Guadalupe y Ocotan.—A Huichol pueblo 
near Rio Chapalagana, Jalisco, Mexico. 
See Lumholtz (1) Huichol Indians, 5, 
1898; (2) Unknown Mexico, ii, 16, map. 
1902. 

Guaes. A people of whom Coronado 
learned in 1542. They evidently lived e. 
of Quivira, the Wichita country of e. cen¬ 
tral Kansas, of whose people they were 
enemies. The name bears a resem¬ 
blance to Raws, but as this is the French 
traders’ contraction of Kansa, first ap¬ 
plied not earlier than the first quarter of 


BULL. 30] 


GUAGEJOHE-GUARUNGUNVE 


509 


the 19th century, the two peoples were 
probably mot the same, Guas or Guaes 
being apparently a Wichita or Pawnee 
name, or a corruption thereof, (p. w. h. ) 
Guaes.—Castafieda (ca. 1560) in 14th Rep. B A 
503 1896. Guas.—Ibid., 529. Guyas.— Castaneda 
in 1 ernaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 194, 1838 (mis¬ 
print). 


Guagejohe — Given as one of the Co¬ 
manche divisions, living about 1857 on 
the plains n. of Texas. Possibly a mis¬ 
print Spanish form of Kwahari , q. v. 
Gua-ge-jo-he.—Butcher and Lyendecher, MS. Co¬ 
manche vocab., B. A. E., 1867. 

Guaguatu. An unidentified people de¬ 
scribed early in the 17th century, by the 
Acoma and J emez Indians of New Mexico, 
as resembling the Mexicans in language 
and dress, and as living in straw-covered 
houses in a mild country somewhere to 
the westward of the Navaho, toward the 
Pacific. The name suggests the pueblo 
of Awatobi, q. v. 

Guaguatu.—Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), Rel., in 
Land of Sunshine, 183, Feb., 1900. Guaputu.—Ibid. 

Guahate. A fertile province, probably 
in the present s. w. Arkansas, heard of 
by De Soto in 1541 at Quipana as being 8 
days s. of that place.—Gentl. of Elvas 
(1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 182, 
1850. 


Guailopo. A subdivision of the Yarohio 
in w. Chihuahua, Mexico. They lived 
with the Chinipa in the pueblo of San 
Andres Chinipas.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
58, 325, 1864. 

Guainonost. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara mission, Cal.— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Guaislac. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa In6s mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 
1861. 

Guajochic (‘place of the guajo,’ a small 
variety of mosquito). A small rancheria 
of the Tarahumare, not far from Noro- 
gachic, Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, 
Unknown Mexico, i, 218, 1902. 

Gualala. A name applied by Powers 
to the Porno living along Gualala r., 
in Sonoma co., Cal. The people living 
along this stream belong to two dialectic 
groups, one occupying the territory chiefly 
along the lower course of Russian r., the 
other that along the immediate coastline 
w. of Gualala r.; but as Powers’ state¬ 
ments are not explicit, it is not possible 
to say whether the people speaking one 
or the other of these dialects is meant. 
The name itself comes undoubtedly from 
waldli , a name applied to the point at 
which the waters of any two streams 
flow together, or at which any stream 
flows into the ocean. (s. a. b. ) 

Gua-la-la.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
186, 1877. Walhalla.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 362, 
1874. 

Guale. The Indian name by which the 
Spaniards knew the present Amelia id., 


n. coast of Florida, and a part of the ad¬ 
jacent Florida and Georgia coast, in the 
16th century. There is strong probabil¬ 
ity that the tribe in occupancy was that 
known later as Yamasi. In 1597 the son 
of the chief of Guale led a revolt against 
the missions that had been established 
by the Spanish Franciscans a few years 
before. There were then on the island 
at least 3 mission villages—Asao, Asopo, 
and Ospo. The missions were reestab¬ 
lished in 1605 and may have continued 
until their destruction by the English and 
their Indian allies in 1704-06. ( j. m. ) 

Gualdape.—Fontaneda Memoir (ca. 1575), Smith 
trails., 16, 1854. Guale.—Ibid. Quale .—Foiltane- 
da in Ternaux-Compans, Voy., xx, 16, 1841. 
Quate.— Fontaneda misquoted by Shipp, De Soto 
and Fla., 585,1881. 

Gualta. Given by the Yavapai to Fray 
Francisco Carets in 1776 as the name of a 
tribe, possibly in the vicinity of the Rio 
Colorado.—Garces, Diary (1775-76), 405, 
1900. 

Guamua. The Yavapai name of a tribe 
evidently on or in the vicinity of the Rio 
Colorado in Arizona or California, in the 
18th century.—Garces (1775-76), Diary, 
404, 1900. Cf. Gueymura. 

Guamoa.—Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., ill, 
pt. 3, 126, 1856. 

Guanabepe. The Yavapai name of a 
tribe, evidently Yuman, on the lower 
Colorado in Arizona or California, in the 
18th century. 

Guanabepe.—Garces (1776), Diary, 404, 1900. Gua- 
navepe.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 349, 1864 (after 
Garc6s). 

Guanacos (Span.: Los Guanacos.) A 
group of ruined pueblos 8 m. s. of Tempe, 
in the Salt River valley, Ariz. So named 
from a number of figurines, resembling 
the guanaco, found there.—Cushing in 
Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vn, 
178, 1890. 

Guancane. Mentioned by Garcilasso de 
la Vega (Florida, 201,1723) as a province 
visited by De Soto’s army in 1542. Situ¬ 
ated probably in s. w. Arkansas, near 
Naguatex, q. v. 

Guacane.—Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 430,1881. 

Guanipas. A former Coahuila tribe, 
belonging perhaps to the Coahuiltecan 
stock.—Revillagigedo (1793) quoted by 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 306, 1864. 

Guanlen. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Guarungunve (‘town of weeping’). A 
Calusa village on one of the keys of the 
s. w. coast of Florida, about 1570. Brin- 
ton (Floridian Renin., 114, 1859) thinks 
the word is another name for Old Mata- 
cumbe (Metacumbe) key, described by 
Romans (1775) as one of the last refuges 
of the Calusa Indians. ( j. m. ) 

Guaragunve.—Fontaneda quoted by Ternaux 
Compans.Voy., xx, 10,1841. Guardgumve.—Fonta’ 
neda quoted by French, Hist. Coll. La., 2d s., ii' 


GUASAMOTA-GUAYOGUIA 


[B. a. e. 


510 


262, 1875 (misprint). Guarugumbe. —Fontaneda 
quoted by Ternaux-Compans, op. cit., 32. Guaru- 
gunve. —Fontaneda Mem. ( ca . 1575), Smith trans., 
13,1854. Guarungunve. —Ibid., 19. Guarunguve. — 
Fontaneda quoted by Ternaux-Compans., op. cit., 
22. Metacumbe. —Present map form for the key. 
Old Matacombe. —Romans, Fla., app., xxxiv, 1775 
(the key; same?). 

Guasamota. A Cora pueblo on the 
upper Rio Jesus Maria, on the e. slope 
of the Sierra de Nayarit, in the n. part of 
the territory of Tepic, Mexico (Lum- 
holtz, Unknown Mexico, i, 487; n, 16, 
map, 1902). Orozco y Berra records it as 
a Tepehuane settlement. 

Guasamota. —Lumholtz, op. cit. Guazamota. — 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 281, 1864. Santa Maria 
Guazamota. —Ibid., 318-319. 

Guasas. A tribe mentioned in Span¬ 
ish narratives and reports on Texas in 
the latter part of the 18th century as 
enemies of the “northern Indians,” 
particularly of the Comanche. Accord¬ 
ing to one narrative they were the only 
people able to defeat the latter. They 
are described as having lived in perma¬ 
nent villages defended by adobe towers; 
they called their warriors together by 
means of drums in time of danger. They 
were reputed to be of great stature and of 
remarkable skill in horsemanship. Al¬ 
though many of the things told about 
them are entirely fabulous, a real tribe 
appears to be referred to, probably one of 
those which erected earth lodges. This 
may have been the Osage ( Wasash) or, 
since an annotator of a letter written by 
Ripperda in 1772 enumerates “Guasers” 
and Osage separately, possibly they were 
the Kansa or the Pawmee. (j. r. s. ) 
Guasas.— Prieto, Hist, de Tamaulipas, 137, 1873. 
Guasers. —Annotator of a letter of Ripperda, 1772, 
MS. cited by H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 19U6. Guazas. — 
Report of council at San Antonio in 1778, MS. 
cited by H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 1906. 

Guasco. A province, possibly Caddoan, 
visited in 1542 by Moscoso, of De Soto’s 
army, who there found much maize; sit¬ 
uated probably in s. w. Arkansas or n. w. 
Louisiana. See Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 199, 1850. 

Guasigochic (‘a flat’). A small ran- 
cheria of the Tarahumare, n. e. of Noro- 
gachic, Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, 
inf’n, 1894. 

Guaslaique. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Guatitruti. Mentioned by Onate in 1598 
(Doc. Ined., xvr, 114, 1871) as a pueblo 
of the Jemez in New Mexico. It has not 
been identified with the present native 
name of any ruins in the vicinity of 
Jemez. In Onate’s second list of Jemez 
villages (ibid., 102) Fiapuzi and Triyti 
are given. Comparison shows the first 
name to be a misprint of the name of the 
preceding pueblo mentioned (‘Trea’), 
improperly compounded with a misprint 
(‘puzi’) of ‘Guati,’ the first part of the 


name Guatitruti; the other pueblo men¬ 
tioned in the second list (‘Triyti’) being 
a corruption of the latter portion (‘truti ’) 
of the name Guatitruti. (f. w. h.) 
Friyti.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex.,136,1889(mis¬ 
print). Guatitritti. — Columbus Memorial Vol., 
155, 1893 (misprint). Trivti.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 207, 1892 (misquoting Onate). 
Triyti.—Onate (1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 102,1892. 

Guauaenok. A Kwakiutl tribe living 
on Drury inlet, Brit. Col. The gentes are 
Gyigvilkam, Ivwakowenok, and Kwi- 
koaenok. Summer villages are Hohopa 
and Kunstamish. Pop. 46 in 1885. 

Guau'aenoq.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
55, 1890. Guau'aenox.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 
331, 1895. Kwauaenoq.—Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. 
Soc., 228,1887. Kwa-wa-ai-nuk.—Dawson in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can., sec. n, 73, 1887. Kwa-wa-a-nuk.— 
Ibid. Q,uai-iunough.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. Qua- 
i-nu.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. Quauae- 
noq.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887. 

Guaxule. A village, apparently of the 
Creeks, visited by De Soto in 1540. Coxe 
seems to locate it near the head of Mobile 
r.; Shipp places it on the Chattahoochee, 
and Thomas (12th Rep. B. A. E., 649, 
1894) nearCartersville, in Bartow co., Ga. 
The Spaniards were entertained so well 
at this place that to the army its name 
became a synonym for good fortune. See 
Etowah mound. 

Guachoula.—Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 368,1881. 
Guachoule.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 520, 
1900 (given as an early form). Guachule.—Mooney, 
Siouan Tribes of the East, 57, 1894. Guasili.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep., op. cit. Guasula.—Ibid. 
Guasuli.—Biedma (1544) in Hakluyt Soc. Pub., ix, 
182, 1851. Guaxula.—Coxe, Carolana, 23, 1741. 
Guaxule.—Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., n, 147, 1850. 

Guaya. A former village of the Calusa 
confederacy near the s. end of Florida 
(Fontaneda, ca. 1575, in Ternaux-Com¬ 
pans, Voy., xx, 22, 23, 1841). The vil¬ 
lage is not given in B. Smith’s translation 
of Fontaneda’s narrative. 

Guayabas. A Huichol rancheria and 
religious place, containing a temple; situ¬ 
ated about 2\ m. s. w. of San Andres 
Coamiata, q. v.—Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mex., ir, 52, 1902. 

Temolikita.— Lumholtz, ibid, (‘where trees and 
flowers are budding’: native name). 

Guaycones. An unidentified tribe visit¬ 
ed by Cabeza de Vaca (Smith trans., 84, 
1851) during his sojourn in Texas in 
1528-34. 

Gualciones.—Barcia, Historiadores, I, 1749. 

Guaynamota. A former Cora pueblo 
and the seat of a mission, situated on the 
e. bank of Rio San Pedro, lat. 22° 30', 
Jalisco, Mexico. 

S. Ignacio Guaynamota. —Orozco y Berra, Geog:.. 

280, 1864. 

Guayoguia. Mentioned by Onate in 1598 
(Doc Ined., xvr, 114, 1871) as a pueblo 
of the Jemez in New Mexico. It has 
not been identified with the present 
native name of any ruins in the vicinity 
of Jemez. In Onate’s second list (ibid., 
207) Yxcaguayo and Quiamera are men¬ 
tioned. The names are obviously mis- 


BULL. 30] 


GU AYOTRI-GUEVAVI 


511 


printed, the latter part of the first name 
and a misprint of the first part of the 
other forming “Guayoquia.” 

Guayotri. Apparently a Tigua pneblo 
in New Mexico in 1598. Mentioned by 
Onate (Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871) in 
connection with Puaray. See Tiguex. 

Guayusta. A village of the Rumsen 
division of the Costanoan family, for¬ 
merly at Pt Pinos, near Monterey, Cal., 
the inhabitants of which were connected 
with San Carlos mission. 

Guayusta.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 
Point Pinos.—Ibid. 

Guazapar. A division of the Tarahu- 
mare occupying the village of Guazapares, 
w. Chihuahua, Mexico. It includes also 
the Temoris who inhabit the pueblos of 
Santa Marfa Magdalena, Nuestra Senora 
del Valle Humbroso, and Cerocahui. 
The Guazapar dialect is said to resem¬ 
ble more closely the Tarahumare proper 
than the Varohio. (f. w. h.) 

Guazapar.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864. 
Guazapare.—Ibid., 68. 

Guazapares. A village of the Guazapar 
division of the Tarahumare in the district 
of Arteaga, w. Chihuahua, Mexico; pop. 
542 in 1900. 

Guazayepo.—Orozco Berra, Geog., 324, 1864. 

Santa Teresa de Guazapares.—Ibid. 

Guazarachic. A Tarahumare settlement 
in the Hidalgo district, Chihuahua, 
Mexico. 

Guasarochic.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 322, 1864. 
Guazarachis.—Ibid., 59 (given as Apache, but 
doubtless Piman). 

Guazavas (probablyfrom Opata, guasaca, 

‘ where the (pitahaya) fruit ripens first. ’— 
Rudo Ensavo). A former Coguinachi 
Opata pueblo, containing also some 
Apache, and the seat of a Spanish mission 
founded in 1645, on Rio Bavispe, about 
lat. 29° 40', Sonora, Mexico. Its inhabit¬ 
ants numbered 632 in 1678, and 191 in 
1730. A new church was built in 1764. 
The place is now civilized, but 50 Yaqui 
were settled in and about the town in 
1900. (f. w. h.) 

Buasdabas.—Ribas (1645) quoted by Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 58, 1890. Goasavas.— de 
Croix (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., n, 25, 
1856. Guasavas.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343, 1864. 
Guayavas.—Hamilton, Mex. Handbook, 47, 1883. 
Guazaca.—Doc. of 1730 quoted by Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 505,1892. Guazava.—Mange 
( ca . 1700) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, 
i, 233, 1884. Huassabas.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, hi, 58, 1890. Huassavas—Ibid., 56. San 
Francisco Guazava.—Rivera (1730) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, op. cit., 514. San Francisco Javier de Gua¬ 
zava.—Zapata (1678), ibid., 246. 

Guazave. A subdivision of the Vaco- 
regue, formerly occupying the pueblos of 
San Pedro Guazave and Tamazula, on Rio 
Sinaloa, about lat. 25° 45 / , n. w. Sinaloa, 
Mexico. The Vacoregue were also some¬ 
times known as Guazave. A Jesuit mis¬ 
sion was established among them in 1600, 
but the natives burned the church and 
fled. They were brought back, however, 
and the offenders hanged. Between 1646 


and 1649 they again threatened trouble, 
but they later became Christianized and 
noted for their faith in the new religion. 
Orozco y Berra (Geog., 332, 1864) says: 
“In Guazave were united several factions, 
and although they were known as Gua- 
zaves they speak the Mexican tongue be¬ 
tween themselves; this is the civilized 
language in all parts.” (f. w. h.) 

Gubo. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Papago, visited by Father Kino in 
1694; situated 13 leagues e. of Sonoita, 
which wasontheRio Saladoof Sonora, just 
below the Arizona boundary. 

Gubo.—Kino (1694) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 
252,1856. Guvoverde.—Kino (1699) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, I, 267,1884. 

Gueguachic. A former Tarahumare set¬ 
tlement in Chihuahua, Mexico.—Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 322,1864. 

Gueiquesales. A former tribe of s. 
Texas, probably Coahuiltecan, living 
near the Manos Prietas, Bocores, Haeser, 
Pinanaca, Escaba, Cacastes, Cocobipta, 
Codame, Contotores, Colorados, Babia- 
mares, and Taimamares. Perhaps iden¬ 
tical with the Guisoles, and probably the 
Susolas of Cabeza de Vaca. (j. r. s.) 

Gueiquesales.—Fernando del Bosque (1675) in 
Nat. Geog. Mag., xiv, 340, 1903. Gueiquizales.— 
Revillagigedo MS. (1793) quoted by Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, 1,611,1886. 

Guepacomatzi. A former Opata ran¬ 
cheria n. of Oputo, e. Sonora, Mexico. It 
was abandoned in the 18th century owing 
to the hostility of the Apache, Suma, 
and Jocome. Not to be confounded with 
Huepac. 

Guepa Comatzi.—Doc. of 18th cent, quoted by 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 525,1892. 

Guerachic. Mentioned as a Tepehuane 
pueblo on the Upper Rio Fuerte, in the 
Sierra Madre, Chihuahua, Mexico. 
Guerachic.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864. 
Guerechic.—Ibid., 322 (apparently the same). 
Huerachic.—Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, i, 299, 
note, 1902. 

Guess, George. See Sequoya. 

Guetela (‘northern people’). A sept 
of the true Kwakiutl which formerly 
formed one tribe with the Komoyue, but 
separated on account of some quarrel. 
The clans are Maamtagyila, Kukwakum, 
Gyeksem, Laalaksentaio, and Sisintlae. 
They now live at Ft Rupert, Brit. Col. 
Gue'tEla.—Boas in Nat. Mus. Rep., 330, 1895. 
Kue'xamut.—Ibid. (=* fellows of the Kucha’). 

Guetela. A clan of the Wikeno, a 
Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Nat. Mus. Rep., 
330, 1895. 

Guevavi. A former Sobaipuri settle¬ 
ment and the seat of a Spanish mission 
established about 1720-32; situated on the 
w. bank of Rio Santa Cruz, below Tubac, 
at or near the present Nogales, Arizona- 
Sonora boundary. In 1750 it was plun¬ 
dered by the Indians and abandoned, but 
was reoccupied two years later as a mis¬ 
sion under the protection of Tubac. In 
1760-64 Guevavi contained 111 natives; 


512 


GUEVU-GUNACHONKEN 


[B. a. e. 


in 1772, 86, and with its visitas (Calabazas, 
Jamac, Sonoita, and Tumacacori), 337. 
It was abandoned before 1784, Tumacacori 
becoming head of the mission establish¬ 
ment. (p. w. H.) 

Genevavi.—Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft. Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 360, 1889 (misprint). Guazavez.— 
Writer (ca. 1713) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., y, 175, 
1857. Guebavi.—Kino, map (1701) in Stocklein, 
Neue Welt-Bott, 74,1726. Guevavi.—Mange (1699) 
quoted by Bancroft, op. cit., 358. Guevavi-Gussu- 
dac.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347,1864. Gusudac.— 
Rudo Ensayo (1763), 149,1863 (Pima name: ‘great 
water’). Gusutaqui.—Mange quoted by Bancroft, 
op. cit., 358. San Felipe de Jesus Guevavi.—Villa- 
Senor quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 531, 
1884. San Miguel.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
384, 1889 (Jesuit name). San Miguel de Guevavi.— 
Ibid., 362 (probably not so named until 1732). 
San Rafael.—Ibid., 384 (Jesuit name). Santos 
Angeles.—Ibid. (Franciscan name). S. Luis Gue¬ 
bavi.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, map, 1759. 

Guevu. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570. 

Gueva.—Fontaneda quoted in Doc. In6d., y, 539, 
1866. Guevu.—Fontaneda Mem. (ca. 1575), Smith 
trans., 19, 1854. 

Gueymura. A tribe speaking the Die- 
guefio dialect, formerly living about Santa 
Catalina mission, n. Lower California. 
(Duflot de Mofras, Voy., i, 217, 228,1844). 
Cf. Comeya , Guamua, Quilmur. 

Gueyniotiteshesgue (‘four tribes’). A 
phratry of the Caughnawaga Iroquois. 

Gueza. An Indian settlement in w. 
South Carolina, probably in the present 
Edgefield co., visited by Juan Pardo in 
1565.—Vandera in Smith, Colec. Doc. 
Fla., i, 17, 1857. 

Guhlaniyi (Gtilani'yV). A Cherokee 
and Natchez settlement formerly at the 
junction of Brasstown cr. with Hi wasseer., 
a short distance above Murphy, Cherokee 
co., N. C.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
520, 1900. 

Guhlga ( Gu'lga ). A legendary Haida 
town on the n. shore of Skidegate inlet, 
just above the present town of Skidegate, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., where 
there are now works for refining dog-fish 
oil. No native pretends to say what 
family occupied this town. (j. r. s.) 
Gu'iga*—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. Quilh- 
cah.—Deans, Tales from Hidery, 67, 1899. 

Guhlkainde ( GU'tka-Ynde , ‘plains peo¬ 
ple ’). A division of the Mescalero Apache 
who claim as their original habitat the 
Staked plains region e. of Pecos r., in 
New Mexico and Texas. See Gohlkahin. 

(j. M.) 

Cuelcajen-ne.—Escudero, Not. de Chihuahua, 212, 
1834 (probablyidentical). GuTka-I'nde.—Mooney, 
field notes, B. A. E., 1897. Llaneros.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 59,1864 (Cuelcajen-ne or). 

Guia. An unidentified ruined pueblo 
on the Rio Grande in the vicinity of 
Albuquerque, N. Mex.—Loew in Wheeler 
Survey Rep., vn, 338, 1879. 

Guias. A Maricopa rancheria on the 
Rio Gila, s. Ariz., in 1744.—Sedelmair 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
366, 1889. 

Guika. A former Tanos pueblo on the 
Rio Grande, in the vicinity of Albuquer¬ 


que, N. Mex.—Loew in Wheeler Survey 
Rep., vii, 338, 1879. 

Gui-k'ati. See Sleeping Wolf. 

Guilitoy. A tribe of the Patwin divi¬ 
sion of the Copehan family, formerly liv¬ 
ing in Napa co., Cal.; one of the seven 
which made peace with Gov. Vallejo in 
1836. 

Guilitoy.—Bancroft, Hist. Cal., IV, 71, 1886. Guil- 
licas.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Gui- 
lucos.—Bancroft, op. cit., 72. TJlucas.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, June 7,1861. 

Guima. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Guimen. A division of the Olamentke 
branch of the Moquelumnan family of 
California, according to Choris and Kot¬ 
zebue, who state that the people spoke 
the same language as the Tamal and 
Sonomi. 

Guimen.—Choris, Voy. Pitt., 6, 1822. Guymen.— 
Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 51, 1821. 

Guiomaer. A village said to be 40 
leagues from St Helena, probably in or 
near the present Barnwell co., S. C.; vis¬ 
ited by Juan Pardo in 1566.—La Vandera 
(1569) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 16,1857. 

Guipago. See Lone Wolf. 

Guismanes. An imaginary province, 
located in the great plains, in the region 
of Quivira.—Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), 
Relacion, in Land of Sunshine, 187,1900. 

Guisoles. A tribe of Coahuila or Texas, 
probably Coahuiltecan, noted in a manu¬ 
script quoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
306, 1864. It may be identical with the 
Gueiquesales, or with the Quitoles of 
Cabeza de Vaca. 

Gulhlgildjing ( GAllgVldjin, probably 
‘ mussel-chewing town ’). A Haida town 
on the s. shore of Alliford bay, Moresby 
id., Queen Charlotte ids., "Brit. Col. 
Another name for this place (or for one 
near it) was Skama. It was occupied by 
a low social division of the Djahui- 
skwahladagai.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
279, 1905. 

Sqa'ma.—Ibid. (probably identical with above: 

* woman’s needle case’). 

Gull Lake Band. A Chippewa band for¬ 
merly on Gull lake, on the upper Missis¬ 
sippi, in Cass co., Minn. They sold their 
lands in 1863. (j. m. ) 

Gulf Lake reservation.—Washington treaty (1867) 
in U. S. Ind. Treat., 273, 1873 (misprint). Gull 
Lake band.—Washington treaty (1863), ibid., 215. 

Guloismistac. A former village, pre¬ 
sumably Costanoan, connected with Do¬ 
lores mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Gumisachic (‘ arroyo ’). A Tarahumare 
rancheria about 20 m. n. e. of Noroga- 
chic, Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, 
inf’n, 1894. 

Gunachonken. Given by Krause as one 
of the Tlingit sociahgroups living at Yak- 
utat, Alaska, but it is actually only a 
name for the people of Gonaho ( Go'naxo), 
q. v., a small town in that neighborhood. 


BULL. 30] 


GUN AKHE-GYAZRU 


513 


Go'naxo qoan.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Gunachokon.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. 

Gunakhe. The principal village of the 
Lakweip, situated on a branch of upper 
Stikine r., Brit. Col. 

Gunaqa'—Boas, 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 34, 

1895. 

Gunasquamekook (‘ long gravel bar join¬ 
ing the island’). A former Passama- 
quoddy village on the site of St Andrews, 
New Brunswick, on Passamaquoddy bay. 
The Indians were dispossessed by the 
whites and were finally settled at Pleas¬ 
ant Point, Me.—Vetromiie, Abnakis, 55, 
1866. 

Gunghet-haidagai (‘Ninstints people’). 
A part of the Haida living about the s. 
end of Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. 
In the Masset dialect their name is An- 
ghethade. The whites formerly called 
them Ninstints people, from the name by 
which their chief town was generally 
known. Their language differs some¬ 
what from that spoken by the Haida far¬ 
ther n. The remnant lives principally 
at Skidegate. (j. r. s.) 

Angit Haade.—Harrison in Proc. Royal Soc. Can., 
sec. II, 125,1895. Cape St. James tribe.—Poole, Queen 
Charlotte Ids., 195, 1372. GA'hxet Xa'-idAga i.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 272,1905. Kunqit.—Swan- 
ton, field notes, 1900-1901. Kunqit.—Dawson, 
Queen Charlotte Ids., 169, 1880 (proper name of 
the village, Ninstance being the name of the 
chief). 

Gunghet-kegawai ( Ga' nxet-qe,'gawa-i, 
‘those born in the Ninstints country’). 
A subdivision of the Stasaos-kegawai, a 
division of the Raven clan of the Haida, 
probably descended from women who 
had married in the Ninstints country. 
It is to be distinguished from another and 
more important division of the same name 
at Ninstints which belonged to the Eagle 
clan.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 1905. 

Gunghet-kegawai. A subdivision of the 
Eagle clan of the Haida, belonging, as 
the name implies, to one of the Ninstints 
or Gunghet group. They were sometimes 
called also Gunghet-gitinai.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 270, 1905. 

Gupa. A former Agua Caliente village 
on the headwaters of San Luis Rey r., s. 
Cal., better known as Agua Caliente (q. v.). 
Its inhabitants were removed to Pala res. 
in 1902. 

Agua Caliente.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902,175,1903. Aqua 
Caliente.—Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 
20, 1883. Gupa.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (own 
name). Gupa-nga-git-om.—Ibid, (own name: 
‘Gupa-at-people’). Ha-koo-pin.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, May 11, 1860. Hakupin.—A. L. Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1905 (Diegueno name). Ko-pa.—Barrows, 
Ethno-Bot. CoahuillaInd., 34,1900 (Kawianame). 

Gusti ( GustY) . A traditional Cherokee 
settlement on Tennessee r., near Kings¬ 
ton, Roane co., Tenn.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 521, 1900. 

Gutgunest-nas-hadai ( Gutgurie'st nas:- 
hadJd'i ‘owl-house people’). Given by 
Boas (Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 26, 
1889) as the name of a subdivision of the 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-33 


Yaku-lanas, a division of the Raven clan 
of the Haida. It is really only a house 
name belonging to that family, (j. r. s.) 

Gutheni ( GAt-hVni, ‘ salmon creek ’). A 
formerTlingit town situated n. of Dry bay, 
Alaska, (j. r. s.) 

Gutubur. A Pima rancheria visited by 
Father Kino in 1694; definite locality un¬ 
known.—Kino in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
i, 251, 1856. 

Guwisguwi. See Cooweescoowee; Boss 
( John ). 

Guyasuta. See Kiasutha. 

Gwaeskun ( Gwa-iskun , ‘ end of island’). 
Formerly the northernmost Haida town 
on Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It 
was named from the cape near by and is 
said to have been owned by the Stustas, 
but it has long been abandoned.—Swan¬ 
ton, Cont. Haida, 281,1905. 

Gwaidalgaegins ( Gwai-dalga'-igins, ‘is¬ 
land that floats along ’). A former Haida 
fort belonging to the Kadusgo-kegawai 
of Kloo. It was near the mountain called 
Kinggi, famous in native legend, on Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. (j. r. s.) 

Gwalgahi ( Gwatgd'hl, ‘ frog place ’). 
A place on Hiwassee r., in the Cherokee 
country, just above the junction of Peach¬ 
tree cr., near Murphy, Cherokee co., 
N. C.; about 1755 the site of a village 
of refugee Natchez, and later of a Baptist 
mission.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
521, 1900. 

Gwaugweh (‘one took out a locust.’— 
Hewitt). Probably a former Seneca vil¬ 
lage near Niagara r., N. Y. 

Carrying Place Village.—Morgan, League Iroq., 
466, 1851. Gwa-u-gueh.—Ibid., map. Gwa'-u- 

gweh.—Ibid., 466. 

Gweghkoagh. A village in 1657, proba¬ 
bly belonging to the Unami Delawares 
and apparently situated in n. New Jersey, 
near Staten id., or in the adjacent part of 
New York. 

Gweghkongh.—Deed of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 393, 1883. Hweghkongh.—Ibid. 

Gweundus ( GweA'ndAs). A subdi¬ 
vision of low social rank of the Hlgahet- 
gitinai, a family of the Eagle clan of the 
Haida.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274, 1905. 

Gwinwah. A former Niska village on 
Nass r., Brit. Col. 

Gu'nwa.—Swanton, field notes, 1900-01 (name ob¬ 
tained from the Haida). Gwinwah.—Dorsey in 
Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897. 

Gyagyilakya ( G’ag'g’ilak’a , ‘always 
wanting to kill people’). A gens of the 
Tsawatenok, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus., 331, 1895. 

Gyaushk (‘gull’). A gens of the Chip- 

6 ewa (q. v.). 

i-oshk.—Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830. Gyaushk.— 
Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44,1885. 

Gyazru. The Parrot clan of the Hopi. 
Gyarzobi.—Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 120,1891. 
Gya'-zro —Stephen, ibid., 39. Gyazru wihwu.— 
Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584,1900 ( winwH= 
‘clan’). Karo.—Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 81, 
1905. Karro.—Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi 
Ceremonies, 175, 1902. 


514 


GYEGYOTE-GYUSIWA 


[b. a. e. 


Gyegyote ( G' i eg’ , d / ie , ‘descendants of 
Gyote’). A subdivision of the Lalauitlela, 
a gens of the Tlatlasikoala.—Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus., 332, 1895. 

Gyekolekoa (G'eg’d'lqEoa). A gens of 
the Koskimo, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus., 329, 1895. 

Gyeksem (‘ chiefs ’). The principal gens 
in the following Kwakiutl tribes and 
septs: Koskimo, Nakomgilisala, Tlatla¬ 
sikoala, Nakoaktok, Guetela, Walas- 
kwakiutl, Matilpe, Tenaktak, Hahuamis, 
and Wiwekae. 

Ge'xsEm.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 329-331,1895. 
Gye'qsEm.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
53-55, 1890. 

Gyeksemsanatl (G'e'xsEms’anaL , ‘high¬ 
est chiefs’). A gens of the Koskimo, a 
Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 
329, 1895. 

Gyigyekemae ( G'Vg’EqEmae , ‘chiefs’). 
A gens of the Tsawatenok, a Kwakiutl 
tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 331,1895. 

Gyigyilkam (‘ those who receive first ’). 
A gens, or gentes, having the same name, 
in the following Kwakiutl tribes and 
septs: Wikeno, Tlatlasikoala, Goasila, 
Komoyue sept of the true Kwakiutl, 
Koeksotenok, Tlauitsis, Nimkish, Awai- 
tlala, Guauaenok, Hahuamis, Wiwekae 
sept of the Lekwiltok. 

G’i'g ilqam.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 328-331,1895. 
Gyi'gyElk am.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 55, 1890. Gyi'gyilk am.—Ibid. Hamalak- 
yause.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887 
(name of ancestor). 

Gyilaktsaoks ( Guildxts&'oks, ‘people of 
the canoe planks’). A Tsimshian family 
living at Kitzilas, on the n. side of Skeena 
r., Brit. Col.—Boas in Ztschr. f. Ethnol., 
232, 1888. 

Gyisgahast ( Gyisg‘ , aha / st , ‘grass peo¬ 
ple’). A Niska division of the Gyispa- 
waduweda clan, living in the town of 
Kitwinshilk, on Nass r., and a Kitksan 
division living in the town of Kitzegukla, 
on Skeena r., Brit. Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 49-50, 1895. 

Gyiskabenak ( Gyisk’ab’Ena'q ). A Niska 
division of the Lakskiyek clan, living in 
the town of Lakkulzap, on Nass r., Brit. 
Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 49, 1895. 

Gyispawaduweda ( Gyispawaduw e' da, 
‘bear’). One of the four Tsimshian 
clans.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 49, 50, 1895. 

GyispotuwE'da.—Boas in 5th Rep., ibid., 9, 1889. 

Gyitgyigyenik ( Gyltgyigye'niH ). A 
Niska division of the Lakyebo clan, now 
in the town of Andeguale, on Nass r., 
Brit. Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 49, 1895. 

Gyitkadok ( GyitHk-’add'fr ). A Niska 
division of the Kanhada clan, now living 
in the town of Lakkulzap, at the mouth 
of Nass r., Brit. Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 1895. 

Gyitktsaktl ( Gyitxtsa'xtl, ‘ people of the 
lake shore ’). A subdivision of the Kitzi¬ 


las living in a village on the s. side of 
Skeena r., Brit. Col.—Boas in Ztschr. 
f. Ethnol., 232, 1888. 

Gyitsaek ( Gyits’a'eK ). A Niska di¬ 
vision of the Lakskiyek clan living in the 
town of Kitwinshilk, on Nass r., Brit. 
Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 49, 1895. 

Gyitwulnakyel ( Gyitwulnaky‘e'1 ). A 
Niska division of the Lakyebo clan living 
in the town of Kitlakdamix, on Nass r., 
Brit. Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 49, 1895. 

Gypsum. A mineral (hydrous sulphide 
of calcium) embracing three principal 
varieties—gypsum, satin-spar, and sele¬ 
nite—and occuring in both crystallized 
and massive forms in connection with 
stratified rocks. The light-colored com¬ 
pact forms are known as alabaster, a 
name sometimes erroneously applied to 
certain forms of travertine and stalagmite. 
Having no considerable degree of hard¬ 
ness, gypsum was not used for implements 
by the aborigines, but the pleasing colors 
and translucent effects made the massive 
forms valuable for ornaments and carv¬ 
ings generally. Selenite, which has the 
foliate structure, is readily separated into 
thin sheets and until recent years was used 
for window lights instead of glass by some 
of the Pueblo tribes. The same people 
crush the gypsum and use it as white¬ 
wash on the walls of their houses, gen¬ 
erally using a piece of sheep skin as a 
brush. The Plains Indians, according to 
Mooney, roast the blocks of gypsum and 
use the resulting powder to clean and 
whiten dressed skins and to whiten the 
gummed tips of feathers in decorative 
work. (w. h. h.) 

Gyusiwa. Formerly one of the west¬ 
ern group of Jemez pueblos, \ m. n. of 
Jemez hot springs, on a slope descending 
to the river from the e., in Sandoval co., 
New Mexico. Judging from the extent 
of the ruins of the village, it at one time 
contained probably 800 inhabitants. It 
was the seat of the Spanish mission of 
San Diego de Jemez, and had a chapel, 
erected probably previous to 1617, at 
which date it was the principal Jemez 
village. The pueblo was abandoned in 
1622 on account of the persistent aggres¬ 
siveness of the Navaho, who had suc¬ 
ceeded in scattering the Jemez tribe; but 
in 1627 Fray Martin de Arvide gathered 
the scattered members and resettled them 
inGyusiwaandAmushungkwa(Patoqua?) 
pueblos. The latter was deserted prior to 
1680, but Gyusiwa was occupied when the 

ueblos revolted in that year. It was, 

owever, finally abandoned shortly after¬ 
ward. The walls of the ruined church, 
in some places 8 feet thick, are still stand¬ 
ing. See Bandelier, cited below; Holmes 
in Am. Anthrop., vn, no. 2, 1905. 

(f. w. h.) 


BULL. 30] 


GYUUNGSH-HABITATIONS 


515 


Cuunsiora. —Orozco y Berra in Anales Minis. Fom. 
Mex., 196, 1882 (evidently the same). Gin-se- 
ua.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, tv, 204, 1892. 
Guimzique.— Ibid., 205 (misprint of Zarate-Sal- 
meron’s Quiunzique). Guin-se-ua.— Bandelier in 
Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vn, 452,1890. 
Qicinzigua. —Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629) quoted by 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 600, 1882. Quicinzigua. — 
Vargas quoted by Orozco y Berra in Anales Minis. 
Fom. Mex., 196, 1882. Quinsta. —Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 136, 1889 (misquoting Onate). Qui- 
umzi-qua. —Zarate-Salmeron ( ca . 1629) Rel., in 
Land of Sunshine, 183, Feb., 1900. Quiumzique. — 
Zarate-Salmeron quoted by Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, III, 127, 1890. Quiunzique. —Ibid., IV, 
205, 1892. Quiusta. —Onate (1598) in Doc. Ined., 
xvi, 102, 1871 (probably the same). San Diego. — 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 23, 27, 1881. 
San Diego de James. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 213, 1868. 
San Diego de Jemes. —Alencaster (1805) quoted by 
Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 212,1867. San Diego 
de Jemez. —Alencaster (1805) quoted by Prince, 
New Mex,, 37, 1883. San Diego de los Emex. — 
MS. of 1643 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, IV, 206, 1892. San Diego de los Hemes. — 
Vetancurt, Menolog. Fran., 275, 1871. San Diego 
de los Temes. —Orozco y Berra in Anales Minis. 
Fom. Mex., 255,1882. S. Diego. —D’Anville, map 
Am. Sept., 1746. 

Gyuungsh. The Oak clan of the former 
pueblo of Pecos, N. Mex. 

Gyuu n sh.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896 
(usually with the suffix -ash, ‘people’). 

Haaialikyauae ( HaaVnlik’auae , ‘the 
shamans’). A gens of the Hahuamis, 
a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. 
Mus., 331, 1895. 

Haailakyemae (‘ the shamans ’). A gens 
of the Kwakiutl proper, found among the 
Koinoyue and Matilpe subdivisions. 

Haai'lak'Emae.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 330, 1895. 
Haailakyemae—Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
54, 1890. Haialikya'uae.—Boas in Petermanns 
Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. Laqse.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. 
W. Tribes Can., 54, 1890. La/xse.—Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus., 330, 1895 (sig. ‘going through’). 

Haanatlenok (‘ the archers ’). A gens of 
the lvomoyue, a subdivision of the Kwa¬ 
kiutl. 

Ha'anaLenox.—Boas in Nat. Mus, Rep., 330, 1895. 
Ha'anatlenoq.—Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
54, 1890. Ha'naWino.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 
pt. 5, 131, 1887. 

HaankaUllah (Ilankha aiola , ‘wild goose 
there cries’). A former Choctaw town 
situated on a long flat-topped ridge be¬ 
tween Petickfa cr. and Black water cr., 
Kemper co., Miss. It received its name 
from a pond of water about 7 acres in ex¬ 
tent which was much frequented by wild 
fowl.—Romans, Florida, 310, 1775; Hal¬ 
bert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 420,1902. 

Haaskouan. See Grangula. 

Haatze (Queres: ‘earth’). A prehis¬ 
toric pueblo of the Cochiti near the foot 
of the Sierra San Miguel, above Cochiti 
pueblo, N. Mex. It is claimed to have 
been occupied after the abandonment of 
the Potrero de lasVacas.—Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 157, 1892. 

Haatse.—Hewett in Am. Anthrop., VI, 638, 1904. 
Ha-a-tze.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
157, 1892. Rat-je Kama Tse-shu-ma.—Ibid., pi. 1, 
fig. 13. Ra-tya.—Lummis in Scribner’s Mag., 98, 
1893. Ra-tye Ka-ma Tze-shuma.—Bandelier, op. 
cit., 159 ( = ‘the old houses at the rabbit,’in allu¬ 
sion to the rabbit-like outline of the neighboring 
crest). San Miguel.—Lummis, op. cit. 


Habachaca. A clan of the Chulufichi 
phratry of the ancient Timucua of Flor¬ 
ida.—Pareja (ca. 1614) quoted by Gatschet 
in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 492, 1878. 

Habamouk. See Ilobomok, Hobomoko. 

Habitations. The habitations of the In¬ 
dians of northern America may be classed 
as community houses (using the term 



ANCIENT CLIFF-DWELLING, MESA VERDE, COLORADO 


“community” in the sense of comprising 
more than one family) and single, or fam¬ 
ily, dwellings. “The house architecture 
of the northern tribes is of little impor¬ 
tance, in itself considered; but as an out¬ 
come of their social condition and for 
comparison with that of the southern vil¬ 
lage Indians, is highly important” (Mor- 



DWELLINGS, PUEBLO OF HANO, ARIZONA 


gan). The typical community houses, 
as those of the Iroquois tribes, were 50 to 
100 ft long by 16 to 18 ft wide, with frame 
of poles and with sides and triangular 
roof covered with bark, usually of the 
elm; the interior was divided into com¬ 
partments and a smoke hole was left in 
the roof. A Mahican house, similar in 













516 


HABITATIONS 


[b. a. e. 


form, 14 by 60 ft, had the sides and roof 
made of rushes and chestnut bark, with 
an opening along the top of the roof from 
end to end. The Mandan circular com¬ 
munity house was usually about 40 ft in 
diameter; it was supported by two series 
of posts and cross-beams, and the wide 
roof and sloping sides were covered 
with willow or brush matting and earth. 
The fireplace was in the center. Morgan 
thinks that the oblong, round-roof houses 
of the Virginia and North Carolina tribes, 
seen and described by Capt. John Smith 
and drawn by John White, were of the 
community order. That some of them 
housed a number of families is distinctly 
stated. Morgan includes also in the com¬ 
munity class the circular, dome-shaped 
earth lodges of Sacramento valley and the 
L-form, tent-shaped, thatched lodges of 
the higher areas of California; but the 
leading examples of community houses 
are the large, sometimes massive, many- 
celled clusters of stone or adobe in New 
Mexico and Arizona known as pueblos 
(q. v.). These dwellings vary in form, 
some of those built in prehistoric times 
being semicircular, others oblong, around 
or inclosing a court or plaza. These build¬ 
ings were constructed usually in terrace 
form, the lower having a one-story tier 
of apartments, the next two stories, and 
so on to the uppermost tier, which some¬ 
times constituted a seventh story. The 
masonry consisted usually of small, flat 
stones laid in adobe mortar and chinked 
with spalls; but sometimes large balls 
of adobe were used as building stones, or 
a double row of wattling was erected and 
filled in with grout, solidly tamped. By 
the latter method, known as pise con¬ 
struction, walls 5 to 7 ft thick were some¬ 
times built (see Adobe, Casa Grande). 
The outer walls of the lowest story were 
pierced only by small openings, access to 
the interior being gained by means of 
ladders, which could be drawn up, if nec¬ 
essary, and of a hatchway in the roof. It is 
possible that some of the elaborate struc¬ 
tures of Mexico were developed from 
such hive-like buildings as those of the 
typical pueblos, the cells increasing in size 
toward the S., as suggested by Bandelier. 
Chimneys appear to have been unknown 
in North America until after contact of 
the natives with Europeans, the hatch¬ 
way in the roof serving the double pur¬ 
pose of entrance and flue. 

Other forms, some community and oth¬ 
ers not, are the following: Among the 
Eskimo, the karmak, or winter residence, 
for which a pit of the required diameter is 
dug 5 or 6 ft deep, with a frame of wood 
or whalebone constructed within 2 or 3 
ft above the surface of the ground and 
covered with a dome-shaped roof of poles 
or whale ribs, turfed and earthed over. 


Entrance is gained by an underground pas¬ 
sageway. The temporary hunting lodge of 
the Labrador Eskimo was sometimes < on- 
structed entirely of the ribs and vertebrae 
of the whale. Another form of Eskimo 
dwelling is the hemispherical snow house, 
or iglu, built of blocks of snow laid in spiral 
courses. The Kaniagmiut build large 
permanent houses, called barabaraby the 
Russians, which accommodate 3 or 4 fami- 



ESKIMO HOUSE, EAST CAPE, SIBERIA. (nELSOn) 


lies; these are constructed by digging a 
square pit 2 ft deep, the sides of which 
are lined with planks that are carried to 
the required height above the surface and 
roofed with boards, poles, or w r hale ribs, 
thickly covered with grass; in the roof is a 
smoke hole, and on the eastern side a door. 
The Tlingit, Haida, and some other tribes 
build substantial rectangular houses with 
sides and ends formed of planks and with 
the fronts elaborately carved and painted 

with symbolic 
figures. Di¬ 
rectly in front 
of the house 
a totem pole 
is placed, and 
near by a me¬ 
morial pole 
is erected. 



SNOW HOUSE OF CENTRAL ESKIMO, a, FRONT VIEW; b, GROUND 

plan; c, section, (boas) 

These houses are sometimes 40 by 100 ft in 
theNootkaand Salish region, and are occu¬ 
pied by a number of families. Formerly 
some of the Haida houses are said to 
have been built on platforms supported 
by posts; some of these seen bv such early 
navigators as Vancouver were 25 or 30 ft 
aboveground, access being had by notched 
logs serving as ladders. Among the N. W. 
inland tribes, as the Nez Perces, the dwell- 















fcULL. SO] 


HABITATIONS 


517 


mg was a frame of poles covered with 
rush matting or with buffalo or elk skins. 
The houses of the California tribes, some 
of which are above noted, were rectan¬ 
gular or circular; of the latter, some were 
conical, others dome-shaped. There was 



HAIDA HOUSE WITH TOTEM POLE. (nIBLACk) 


also formerly in use in various parts of Cali¬ 
fornia, and to some extent on the interior 
plateaus, a semisubterranean earth-cov¬ 
ered lodge known among theMaidu as hum. 

The most primitive abodes were those 
of the Paiute and the Cocopa, consist¬ 
ing simply of brush shelters for summer, 



HOUSE OF NORTHERN CALIFORNIA INDIANS; KLAMATH RIVER. 

(powers) 


and for winter of a framework of poles 
bent together at the top and covered 
with brush, bark, and earth. Somewhat 
similar structures are erected by the 
Pueblos as farm shelters, and more elab¬ 
orate houses of the same general type 
are built by the Apache of Arizona. As 



APACHE HOUSE OF BRUSH AND CANVAS 


indicated by archeological researches, the 
circular wigwam, with sides of bark or 
mats, built over a shallow excavation in 
the soil, and with earth thrown against 
the base, appears to have been the usual 
form of dwelling in theOhio valleyand the 
immediate valley of the Mississippi in pre¬ 


historic and early historic times. Another 
kind of dwelling, in use in Arkansas before 
the discovery, was a rectangular structure 
with two rooms in front and one in the 
rear; the wal Is were of upright posts thickly 
plastered with clay on a sort of wattle. 



HOUSE CONSTRUCTION, MOUND BUILDERS. PLASTERED 
WATTLE WORK. (THOMAS) 


With the exception of the Pueblo struc¬ 
tures, buildings of stone or adobe were 
unknown until recent times. 

The d wellings of some of the tribes of the 
plains, as the Sioux, Arapaho, Comanche, 
and Kiowa, were generally portable skin 
tents or tipis, but those of the Omaha, 



VILLAGE OF TIPIS; PLAINS INDIANS 

Osage, and some others were more sub¬ 
stantial (see Earth lodge , Grass lodge). 
The dwellings of the Omaha, according to 
Miss Fletcher, “are built by setting care¬ 
fully selected and prepared posts together 
in a circle, and binding them firmly with 
willows, then backing them with dried 



NAVAHO HOGAN (EARTH LODGE) 


grass, and covering the entire structure 
with closely packed sods. The roof is 
made in the same manner, having an 
additional support of an inner circle of 
posts, with crotchets to hold the cross logs 
which act as beams to the dome-shaped 
roof. A circular opening in the center 
























518 


HABITATIONS 


[b. a. a. 





serves as a chimney and also to give light 
to the interior of the dwelling; a sort of 


PALMETTO HOUSE; LOUISIANA INDIANS 

sail is rigged and fastened outside of this 
opening to guide the smoke and prevent 
it from annoying 
the occupants of 
the lodge. The 
entrance passage¬ 
way, which usu¬ 
ally faces east¬ 
ward, is from 6 
to 10 ft long and 
is built in the 
same manner as 
the lodge.” An 
important type 
is the Wichita 
grass hut, circu¬ 
lar, dome-shaped 
with conical top. 

The frame is 
built somewhat 
in panels formed by ribs and crossbars; 
these are covered with grass tied on shin¬ 
gle fashion. These grass lodges vary in di¬ 
ameter from 40 to 50 ft. The early Florida 
houses, according to Le Moyne’s illustra¬ 
tions published by DeBry, were either cir¬ 
cular w T ith dome-like roof, or oblong with 
rounded roof like those of Secotan in North 
Carolina, as shown in John White’s fig¬ 
ures. The frame was of poles; the sides 
and roof were covered with bark, or the 
latter was sometimes thatched. The Chip¬ 
pewa usually constructed a conical or hem¬ 
ispherical framework of poles, covered 
with bark. Formerly caves and rock 
shelters were used in some sections as 
abodes, and in the Pueblo region houses 
were formerly constructed in natural 
recesses or shelters in the cliffs, whence 
the designation cliff-dwellings. Similar 
habitations are still in use to some extent 
by the Tarahumare of Chihuahua, Mexico. 
Cavate houses with several rooms w T ere also 
hewn in the sides of soft volcanic cliffs; so 
numerous are these in Verde valley, Ari¬ 
zona, and the Jemez plateau, New Mex¬ 
ico, that for miles the cliff face is honey¬ 
combed with them. As a rule the women 
were the builders of the houses where 
wood was the structural material, but the 
men assisted with the heavier work. In 
the Southern states it was a common 
custom to erect mounds as foundations for 


council houses, for the chief’s dwelling, 
or for structures designed for other official 
uses. 

The erection of houses, especially those 
of a permanent character, was usually 
attended with great ceremony, particu¬ 
larly when the time for dedication came. 
The construction of the Navaho hogan, 
for example, was done in accordance with 
fixed rules, as was the cutting and sewing 
of the tipi among the Plains tribes, while 
the new houses erected during the year 
were usually dedicated with ceremony 
and feasting. Although the better types 
of houses were symmetrical and well pro¬ 
portioned, their builders had not learned 
the use of the 
square or the 
plumb-line; the 
unit of measure 
was also appar¬ 
ently unknown, 
and even in the 
best types of 
ancient Pueblo 
masonry the 
joints of the 
stonework were 
not “broken.” 

The Indian 
names for some 
of their struc¬ 
tures, as tipi, 
wigwam, wicki¬ 
up, hogan, and iglu, have come into use to 
a greater or less extent by English-speak¬ 
ing people. See A dole, Archeology, Archi¬ 
tecture, Cliff-dwellings, Earth lodge, Forti¬ 
fication arid Defense, Grass lodge, Hogan, 
Kiva, Mounds, Pueblos, Tipi. 


SECOTAN, A TCWN OF THE CAROLINA COAST. (hARIOTJ 


CHIPPEWA BARK HOUSE; MINNESOTA. (gILFILLAn) 


















BULL. 30] 


HACANAC-HAGI 


519 


Consult Boas in Proc. Nat. Mus., xi, 
1889; Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., v, 385, 
1903; vi, 51, 1904; vn, 480, 1905; vm, 39, 
1906; De Bry, Brevis Narratio, 1591; Har- 
iot, Virginia, repr. 1874. Dixon in Bull. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, pt. 3, 1905; 
Catlin, Manners and Customs N. A. 
Inds., 1841; Goddard, Life and Culture 
of the Hupa, 1903; Bandelier in various 
Papers of the Archseol. Inst. America; 
Morgan, Houses and House-life of the 
American Aborigines, Cont. N. A. Eth- 
nol., iv, 1881; Willoughby in Am. An¬ 
throp., vm, No. 1, 1906; Holm, Descr. 
New Sweden, 1834; Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57; Dellenbaugh, North 
Americans of Yesterday, 1901; Matthews, 
Navaho Legends, 1897; also, the various 
reports of the B. A. E.: Boas, Murdoch, 
Nelson, and Turner for the Eskimo; Dor¬ 
sey for the Omaha; C. and V. Mindeleff 
for the Navaho and Pueblos; Fewkes for 
the Pueblos; Hoffman for the Menominee 
and Chippewa, etc. (c. t.) 

Hacanac. Mentioned by the Gentleman 
of Elvas in 1557 (Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 
132, 1851) as a province of which Moscoso 
was informed in 1542; apparently on the 
n. e. Texan border. Unidentified. 

Hachaath. An extinct Nootka tribe 
which formerly lived on or n. of Barclay 
sd., Vancouver id. 

A-y-charts.—Jewitt, Narr., 120,1849. Aytch-arts.— 
Ibid., 87. Haca'ath.—Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 32,1890. Hatca'ath.—Ibid., 31. 

Hachepiriinu (‘ young dogs ’). A former 
Ankara band under chief Chinanitu, The 
Brother. 

Ha-ce'-pi-ri-i-nu'.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Val., 357, 1862. Young Dogs.—Culbertson in 
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 143, 1851. 

Hachimuk. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Hachos (prob. Span.: a fagot or bundle 
of straw orgrasscovered with resin). Men¬ 
tioned as a wild tribe of New Mexico in 
the 18th century.—Villa-Senor, Theatro 
Am., pt. 2, 412,1748. 

Hackensack ( Ackkinkas-hacky , ‘the 
stream that unites with another in low 
level ground. ’—Heckewelder). A former 
division of the Unami Delawares, occupy¬ 
ing the territory designated by the In¬ 
dians Ackkinkashacky, embracing the 
valleys of Hackensack and Passaic rs. in 
n. New Jersey. Their principal village 
was Gamoenapa, usually known as Com- 
munipaw. They took a prominent part 
in the events of 1643-44, but subsequently 
appear as mediators through their chief 
Oritany (Oratamy, Oratam, etc.), who en¬ 
joyed, to a ripe old age, the confidence of 
his people and the surrounding chieftain¬ 
cies, as well as that of the whites. The 
lands of the tribe embraced Jersey City, 
Hoboken, a part of Staten island, Wee- 
hawken, Newark, Passaic, etc. Their 


number was estimated at 1,000 in 1643, of 
which 300 were warriors, probably an ex¬ 
aggeration (Ruttenber). (j. m. c. t.) 
Achkingkesacky.—Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiii, 276, 1881. Achkinkehacky.—Treaty of 
1645, ibid., 18. Achkinkes hacky.—Doc. of 1643, 
ibid., 14. Ackinckesaky.—Doc. of 1663, ibid., 280. 
Hacansacke.—Doc. of 1662, ibid., xiv, 512, 1883. 
Haccinsack.—Doc. ca. 1643, ibid., I, 198, 1856. 
Hachinghsack. —Deed of 1657, ibid, xiv, 394,1883. 
Hachkinkeshaky.—Doc. of 1655, ibid., XIII, 56.1881. 
Hackensack.—Treaty of 1673, ibid., 476. Hack- 
inckesaky.—Stuyvesant (1663), ibid., 323. Hack- 
inghesaky.—Doc. of 1662, ibid., 218. Hack- 
inghsack. —Deed of 1657, ibid., xiv, 393, 1883. 
Hackinghsackin.—Doc. of 1660, ibid., 182. Hack- 
inghsakij.—Doc. of 1663, ibid., XIII, 305, 1881. 
Hackingkesacky.—Doc. of 1663, ibid., 294. Hack- 
ingkescaky.—Doc. of 1663, ibid., 289. Hack- 
ingsack.—Report of 1644, ibid., 1 ,150,1856. Hack- 
inkasacky.—Treaty of 1660, ibid., xiii, 148, 1881. 
Hackinkesackinghs.—Doc. of 1660, ibid., 183. 
Hackinkesacky.—Doc. of 1663, ibid., 294. Hack- 
inkesaky.—Ibid. Hackinsack.—Doc. ca. 1643, 
ibid., i, 199,1856. Hackinsagh.—Doc.of 1673,ibid., 
II, 606, 1858. Hackquinsack. — Doc. of 1650, ibid., 
I, 411, 1856. Hacquinsack.—Ibid. 

Haddo. See Huddoh. 

Hadley Indians. A small body or band, 
possibly Nipmuc, which, at the time of 
King Philip’s war in 1675, occupied a 
small fort about a mile above Hatfield, 
on the w. side of Connecticut r., in 
Hampshire co., Mass. They abandoned 
their village to join Philip’s forces and 
thereafter ceased to be known under the 
name above given. (j. m.) 

Hadsapoke’s Band (from the name of its 
chief, “Horse-stopper”). A Paviotso 
band formerly at Gold canyon, Carson 
r., w. Nev., said to number 110 in 1859. 
Had-sa-poke’s band.—Dodge in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 
373, 1860. 

Hadtuitazhi (‘touches no green corn 
husks ’). A former subgens of the Hanga 
gens of the Omaha. 

Ha-ju-it‘ajl.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 227, 
1897. 

Haena. A former Haida town on the 
e. end of Maude id., Skidegate inlet, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It is said 
to have been occupied in very early times 
by the Djahui-skwahladagai, and in re¬ 
cent years it was reoccupied by the west 
coast Haida, who desired to be nearer the 
traders, but after a comparatively short 
occupancy the people moved to Skidegate 
about 1880. There are said to have been 
13 houses, which would indicate a popu¬ 
lation of about 150. (j. r. s.) 

Khina Haade.—Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 1895 (Khina = Haena). 
New Gold Harbour Village.—Dawson, Queen Char¬ 
lotte Ids., 168 b, 1880. Xa'ina.—Swan ton, Cont. 
Haida, 279,1905. 

Haeser. A former tribe near the lower 
Rio Grande, living with the Gueiquesales, 
ManosPrietas, Bocores, Pinanaca, Escaba, 
Cacastes, Cocobipta, Cocomaque, Codame, 
Contotores, Colorados, Babiamares, and 
Taimamares. Probably Coahuiltecan. 

Siaexer.—Fernando del Bosque (1675) in Nat. 
Geog. Mag., XIV, 340, 1903. Xaeser.—Ibid., 344. 

Hagi (Xa'gt, said to mean ‘striped’). 
A Haida town on or near the largest of the 



520 


HAGI-LANAS-HAIDA 


[ B. A. K. 


Bolkus ids., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col. It derived its name from a reef 
which, in local mythology, was the first 
land to appear above the waters of the 
flood, bearing the ancestress of all the 
Baven people upon it. The town was oc¬ 
cupied by a Ninstints division of the same 
name.—S wanton, Cont. Ilaida, 277, 1905. 

Hagi-lanas ( X&gi-la'nas , ‘people of 
striped (?) town’). A subdivision of the 
Haida, belonging to the Raven clan and 
occupying the town of Hagi, on Hagi id., 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. From 
the circumstance attendingtheir supposed 
origin (see Hagi ) the family claimed to 
be the oldest on the islands, but it is now 
represented by only two or three indi¬ 
viduals. There were two subdivisions, 
the Huldanggats and the Keda-lanas.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 268, 1905. 

Haglli. A Yuman tribe or division 
which in 1604-05 occupied 5 rancherias 
on the lower Rio Colorado, between the 
Cohuanas (Yuma) and the Halligua- 
mayas, of which latter (identifiable with 
the Quigyuma) they apparently formed 
a part. 

Haqjli.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 110, 
1890. Haglli.— Zarate-Salmeron ( ca . 1629), Rel., in 
Land of Sunshine, 106, Jan. 1900. Tlaglii.—Ban¬ 
croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 156,1889. 

Hagonchenda. A former Iroquois town, 
probably belonging to the people of 
Tequenondahi, and situated in 1535 not 
far from the junction of Jacques Cartier 
r. with the St Lawrence. The chief of 
this town gave a small girl to Cartier on 
his second voyage, and placed Cartier on 
his guard against the machinations of the 
chiefs of the peoples dwelling around 
Stadacona and elsewhere on the St Law¬ 
rence. For this reason Cartier, in his 
third voyage, in 1540, gave this chief 2 
small boys to learn the language, and also 
a “cloake of Paris red, which cloake was 
set with yealow and white buttons of 
Tinne, and small belles.’’ See Cartier, 
Bref Recit, 67, 1863. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Hagwilget (Tsimshian: ‘welldressed’). 
The chief village of the Hwotsotenne, 
on Bulk ley r., 3 m. s. e. of Hazelton, Brit. 
Col.; pop. 500 in 1870, 161 in 1904. 

Achwlget.— Horetzky, Canada on Pac., 103, 1874. 
Ahwilgate.—Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 
1879-80, 20b, 1881. Hagulget.—Scott in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1869, 563, 1870. Hagwilget.—Can. Ind. Aff. 
1904, pt. 2, 73,1905. Ha-gwil'-ket.—Henshaw, MS. 
note, B. A. E., 1887. Tschah.—Morice in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can., map, 1892. Tsitsk.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 212, 1902 (Kitksun form). 

Hahamatses (‘old mats’). A subdivi¬ 
sion or sept of the Lekwiltok, a Kwakiutl 
tribe. They received their name because 
they were slaves of the Wiwekae sept. 
Recently they have taken the name of 
Walitsum, ‘the great ones.’ Pop. 53 in 
1901, 43 in 1904. 

Chachamatses.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 
131,1887. H'ah'amatses.—Boas in Bull. Am.Geog. 
Soc., 230,1387. Kahk-ah-mah-tsis.—Can. Ind. Aff , 
119,1880. Kakamatsis.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. 4a'- 


qamatses.—Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 55, 
1890. Wa'-lit-sum.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can ., v, sec. II, 65,1887. W au-lit-sah-mosk. —Sproat 
in Can. Ind. Aff., 149, 1879. Waw-lit-sum.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 189, 1884. Xa'xamatsEs.—Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus., 331, 1895. 

Hahamogna. A former Gabrieleno 
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a 
locality later called Rancho Verdugos.— 
Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, 1860. 

Hahas. A former Chumashan village 
at the principal port of Santa Cruz id., 
Cal., probably at Prisoners’ harbor.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Hahatonwanna (‘small village at the 
falls’).* A former Sioux village or divi¬ 
sion at the Falls of St Anthony, Minn.; 
mentioned doubtfully by Horsey (1880). 
Given by Lewis and Clark in 1804 as a 
subdivision of the Yankton of the north, 
of which Mahpeondotak was chief. The 
name may refer to an incorporated Chip¬ 
pewa band. 

Hahatouadeba.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. 
Hah-har-tones.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, VI, 
99, 1905. Har-har-tones.—Lewis and Clark, Dis- 
cov., 34, 1806. Horheton.—Del’Isle (1701), map in 
Neill, Hist. Minn., 164,1858. Horhetton.—Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Morheton.—La Tour, 
Am. Sept., map, 1779 (misprint). 

Hahekolatl ( Ha'htqolaL , descendants of 
Hakolatl’). A subdivision of the Lalau- 
itlela, a gens of the Tlatlasikoala (q. v.), 
a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. 
Mus., 332, 1895. 

Hahuamis. A Kwakiutl tribe living on 
Wakeman sd., Brit. Col.; pop. 63 in 1901, 
the last time they were officially reported. 
They are divided into three gentes: Gyek- 
sem, Gyigyilkam, and Haaialikyauae.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 331, 1895. 

Ah-knaw-ah-mish.—Can. Ind. Aff., 189, 1884. Ah- 
know-ah-mish.—Ibid., 314, 1892. Ah-wha-mish.— 
Ibid., 364,1897. A-kwa'-amish.—Dawson in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 65. A-qua-mish.— 
Kane,Wand.inN.Am.,app., 1859. Chachua'mis.— 
Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,130,1887. Ecqua- 
mish.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. H'ah'uamis.—Boas in 
Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 228,1887. Haqua'mis.—Boas, 
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 55,1890. Haxua'mis.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 331, 1895. 

Haida ( Xa'ida , ‘people’). The native 
and popular name for the Indians of the 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., and the 
s. end of Prince of Wales id., Alaska, com¬ 
prising the Skittagetan family (q. v.). By 
the natives themselves the term may be 
applied generally to any human being or 
specifically to one speaking the Haida 
language. Some authors have improperly 
restricted the application of the term to 
the Queen Charlotte islanders, calling the 
Alaskan Haida, Kaigani (q. v. ). Several 
English variants of this w r ord ow*e their 
origin to the fact that a suffix usually ac¬ 
companies it in the native language, mak¬ 
ing it Ha/de in one dialect and Haidaga'i 
in the other. 

On the ground of physical characteris¬ 
tics the Haida, Tlingit, and Tsimshian 


fet'LL. SOI 


SAIDA 


521 




peoples should be grouped together. 
Language and social organization indicate 
still closer affinities between the Haida 
and Tlingit. 

According to their own traditions the 
oldest Haida towns stood on the e. shore, 
at Naikun and on the broken coast of 


HAIOA MAN. (AM. MUS. NAT. HIST. ) 

Moresby id. Later a portion of the people 
moved to the w. coast, and between 150 
and 200 years ago a still larger section, the 
Kaigani, drove the Tlingit from part of 
Prince of Wales id. and settled there. 
Although it is not impossible that the 
Queen Charlotte ids. were visited by Span¬ 
iards during the 17th century, the first 
certain account of their discovery is that 
by Ensign Juan Perez, in the corvette 
Santiago , in 1774. He named the n. point 
of the islands Cabo de Santa Margarita. 
Bodega and Maurelle visited them the 
year after. In 1786 La Perouse coasted 
the shores of the islands, and the follow¬ 
ing year Capt. Dixon spent more than a 
month around them, and the islands are 
named from his vessel, the Queen Char¬ 
lotte. After that time scores of vessels 
from England and New England resorted 
to the coast, principally to trade for furs, 
in which business the earlier voyagers 
reaped golden harvests. The most im¬ 
portant expeditions, as those of which 
there is some record, were by Capt. Doug¬ 
las, Capt. Jos. Ingraham of Boston, Capt. 
Etienne Marchand in the French ship 
Solide, and Capt. Geo. Vancouver (Daw¬ 
son, Queen Charlotte Ids., 1880). 

The advent of whites was, as usual, dis¬ 
astrous to the natives. They were soon 
stripped of their valuable furs, and, 
through smallpox and general immorality, 


they have been reduced in the last 60 
years to one-tenth of their former strength. 
A station of the Hudson’s Bay Company 
was long established at Masset, but is now 
no longer remunerative. At Skidegate 
there are works for the extraction of dog¬ 
fish oil, which furnish employment to the 
people during much of the year; but in 
summer all the Indians from this place 
and Masset go to the mainland to work in 
salmon canneries. The Masset people 
also make many canoes of immense cedars 
to sell to other coast tribes. The Kaigani 
still occupy 3 towns, but the population of 
2 of them, Kasaan and Klinkwan, is incon¬ 
siderable. Neighboring salmon canneries 
give them work all summer. 

Mission stations are maintained by the 
Methodists at Skidegate, by the Church 
of England at Masset, and by the Presby¬ 
terians at Howkan, Alaska. Nearly all 
of the people are nominally Christians. 

The Haida, Tlingit, and Tsimshian seem 
to show greater adaptability to civilization 
and to display less religious conservatism 
than many of the tribes farther s. They 
are generally regarded as superior to them 
by the white settlers, and they certainly 
showed themselves such in war and in the 
arts. Of all peoples of the N. W. coast the 
Haida were the best carvers, painters, and 
canoe and house builders, and they still 
earn considerable money by selling carved 
objects of wood and slate to traders and 


HAIDA WOMAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 

tourists. • Standing in the tribe depended 
more on the possession of property than 
on ability in war, so that considerable in¬ 
terchange of goods took place and the peo¬ 
ple became sharp traders. The morals of 
the people were, however, very loose. 












522 


HA1DA 


[b. a. e. 


Canoes were to the people of this coast 
what the horse became to the Plains 
Indians. They were hollowed out of sin¬ 
gle logs of cedar, and were sometimes 
very large. Houses were built of huge 
cedar beams and planks which were 
worked out with adzes and wedges made 
anciently of stone, and put together at 
great feasts called by the whites by the 
jargon word “potlatch’’ (q. v.). Each 
house ordinarily had a single carved pole 
in the middle of the gable end presented 
to the beach (see Architecture). Often the 
end posts in front were also carved and 
the whole house front painted. The dead 
were placed in mortuary houses, in boxes 
on carved poles, or sometimes in caves. 
Shamans were placed after death in small 
houses built on prominent points along 
shore. Among the beliefs of the Haida 
reincarnation held a prominent place. 

An estimate of the Haida population 
made, according to Dawson, by John 
Work, between 1836 and 1841, gives a 
total of 8,328, embracing 1,735 Kaigani and 
6,593 Queen Charlotte islanders. Dawson 
estimated the number of people on the 
Queen Charlotte ids. in 1880 as between 
1,700 and 2,000. An estimate made for 
the Canadian Department of Indian Af¬ 
fairs in 1888 (Ann. Rep., 317) gives 2,500, 
but the figures were evidently exagger¬ 
ated, for when a census of Masset, Skide- 
gate, and Gold Harbor was taken the year 
after (Ann. Rep., 272) it gave only 637. 
This, however, left out of consideration 
the people of New Kloo. In 1894 (Ann. 
Rep. , 280), when these were first added to 
the list, the entire Haida population was 
found to be 639. The figures for the year 
following were 593, but from that time 
showed an increase and stood at 734 in 
1902. In 1904, however, they had suffered 
a sharp decline to 587. Petroff in 1880-81 
reported 788 Kaigani, but this figure may 
be somewhat too high, since Dali about 
the same time estimated their number at 
300. According to the census of 1890 
there were 391, and they are now (1905) 
estimated at 300. The entire Haida pop¬ 
ulation would thus seem to be about 900. 

The Alaskan Haida are called Kaigani. 
By the Queen Charlotte islanders they 
are designated Kets-hade (QJets xa'de ), 
which probably means ‘people of the 
strait.’ The people of Masset inlet and 
the n. end of Queen Charlotte ids. gener¬ 
ally are called by their southern kinsmen 
Gao-haidagai (Gao xci'-ida-ga-i), ‘inlet 
people,’ and those living around the 
southern point of the group are called 
Gunghet-haidagai ( Ga' nxet-xa'-idAga-i), 
from the name of one of the most south¬ 
erly capes in their territory. All of these 
latter finally settled in the town after¬ 
ward known to whites as Ninstints, and 
hence came to be called Ninstints people. 


The entire stock is divided into two 
“sides” or clans—Raven (Hoya) and 
Eagle (Got)—each of which is subdivided 
and resubdivided into numerous, smaller 
local groups, as given below. (The braces 
indicate that the families grouped there¬ 
under were related. Theoretically each 
clan was descended from one woman.) 

Raven 

Aokeawai. 

a. Hlingwainaas-hadai. 

b. Taolnaas-hadai. 

Daiyuahl-lanas (or) Kasta-kegawai. 
'Djahui-skwahladagai. 

Hlgaiu-lanas. 

a. Hlgagilda-kegawai. 

Kogangas. 

Skwahladas. 

a. Nasto-kegawai. 

Hagi-lanas. 

a. Huldanggats. 

b. Keda-lanas. 

'Hlgahetgu-lanas. 

a. Kilstlaidjat-taking-galung. 

b. Sels. 

Stasaos-kegawai. 

a. Gunghet-kegawai. 
Kadusgo-kegawai. 

< Yaku-lanas. 

а. Aoyaku-lnagai. 

б. (Alaskan branch,) 

1. Kaadnaas-hadai. 

2. Yehlnaas-hadai. 

3. Skistlainai-hadai. 

4. Nakeduts-hadai. 

'N aikun-kegawai. 

a. Huados. 

Kuna-lanas. 

a. Hlielungkun-lnagai. 

b. Saguikun-lnagai. 

c. Teeskun-lnagai. 

• d. Yagunkun-lnagai. 

Stlenga-lanas. 

a. Aostlan-lnagai. 

b. Dostlan-lnagai. 

1. Kaiihl-lanas. 

c. Teesstlan-lnagai. 

d. Yagunstlan-lnagai. 
Kagials-kegawai. 

a. Kils-haidagai. 

b. Kogahl-lanas. 

• Tadji-lanas. There were two great di¬ 

visions of this name, the southern 
one with a subdivision called— 
a. Kaidju-kegawai. 

Kas-lanas. 

Kianusili. 

Sagangusili. 

Skidaokao. 

Koetas. 

a. Hlkaonedis. 

b. Huadjinaas-hadai. 

c. Nakalas-hadai. 

d. Neden-hadai. 

e. Chats-hadai. 








HULL. 30] 


HAIGLAR 


523 


EAGLE 

Djahui-gitinai. 

Gitins of Skidegate. 

a. Nayuuns-haidagai. 

b. Nasagas-haidagai. 

c. Lgalaiguahl-lanas. 

d. Gitingidjats. 
Hlgahet-gitinai. 

a. Djahuihlgahet-kegawai. 

b. Yaku-gitinai. 

c. Hlgahet-kegawai. 

d. Kahlgui-hlgahet-gitinai. 

e. Gweundus. 
Sagui-gitunai. 

a. Kialdagwuns. 
Djiguaahl-lanas. 

a. Tlduldjitamae. 
Kaiahl-lanas. 

a. Stasaos-lanas. 
Kona-kegawai. 

< a. Dagangasels. 

b. Sus-haidagai. 
Stawas-haidagai. 

a. Heda-haidagai. 

b. Kahligua-haidagai. 

c. Sa-haidagai. 

Do-gitunai. 

Gituns (of Masset). 

a. Mamun-gitunai. 

1. Ao-gitunai. 

b. Undlskadjins-gitunai. 

c. Tees-gitunai. 

d. Sadjugahl-lanas. 
Djus-hade. 

Sagua-lanas. 

a. Dotuskustl. 
Chets-gitunai. 

Tohlka-gitunai. 

Widja-gitunai. 

Gungh et-kega wai. 
Saki-kegawai. 

Skidai-lanas. 

Stagi-lanas. 

Lana-chaadus. 

Salendas. 

a. Hlimulnaas-hadai. 

b. Nahawas-hadai. 

Stustas. 

a. Kawas. 

b. Kangguatl-lanas. 

c. Hlielung-keawai. 

d. Hlielung-stustai. 

e. Nekun-stustai. 

/. Chawagis-stustae. 
g. Yadus. 

1. Ildjunai-hadai. 

2. Naalgus-hadai. 

3. Nakons-hadai. 

4. Otkialnaas-hadai. 

5. Otnaas-hadai. 
Chaahl-lanas. 

a. Lanagukunhlin-hadai. 

b. Hotagastlas-hadai. 

c. Skahene-hadai. 

d. Stulnaas-hadai. 
Taahl-lanas (clan uncertain). 


The principal towns known to have 
been occupied by large bodies of people 
in comparatively recent times, although 
notalways contemporaneously, are the fol¬ 
lowing, the Kaigani towns being marked 
with an asterisk: Chaah 1 (on Moresby id.), 
Cumshewa, Dadens, Gahlinskun, Haena, 
Hlielung, Howkan, * Kaisun, K asaan, * Ka- 
yung, Kiusta, Klinkwan,* Kloo, Kung, 
Kweundlas,* Masset, Naikun, Ninstints, 
Skedans, Skidegate, Sukkwan,* Tigun, 
Yaku, and Yan. Of these only Howkan, 
Kasaan, Kayung, Klinkwan, Masset, and 
Skidegate are now inhabited. 

In addition there was formerly an im¬ 
mense number of small towns hardly dis¬ 
tinguishable from camps, places that had 
been occupied as towns at some former 
time, and mythic or semimythic towns. 
The following is a partial list of these: 
Aiodjus, A tana, Atanus, Chaah 1 (on North 
id. ),Chatchini, Chets, Chuga, Chukeu, 
Dadjingits, Dahua, Daiyu, Djigogiga, 
Djigua, Djihuagits, Edjao, Gachigundae, 
Gado (2 towns), Gaedi, Gaesigusket, 
Gaiagunkun, Gaodjaos, Gasins, Gat- 
gainans, Gitinkalana, Guhlga, Gulhlgil- 
djing, Gwaeskun, Hagi, Heudao, Hlagi, 
Hlakeguns, Hlgadun, Hlgaedlin, Hlga- 
het, Hlgai, Hlgaiha, Hlgaiu, Hlgihla-ala, 
Hlgadun, Hlkia, Hluln, Hotao, Hotdji- 
hoas, Hoya-gundla, Huados, Kadadjans, 
Kadusgo, Kae, Kaidju, Kaidjudal, Kai¬ 
gani,* Kasta, Katana, Kesa, Ket, Kil, Koa- 
gaogit, Koga, Kogalskun, Kostunhana, 
Kundji (2 towns), Kungga, Kungielung, 
Kunhalas, Kunkia, Kuulana, Lanada- 
gunga, Lanagahlkehoda, Lanahawa (2 
towns), Lanahilduns, Lanas-lnagai (3 
towns), Lanaungsuls, Nagus, Sahldung- 
kun, Sakaedigialas, Sgilgi, Sindaskun, 
Sindatahla, Singa, Skae, Skaito, Skaos, 
Skena, Skudus, Stlindagwai, Stunhlai, 
Sulustins, Ta, Te, Tlgunghung, Tlhingus, 
Tohlka, Widja, Yagun,Yaogus, Yastling, 
Yatza, Youahnoe(?) (j. k. s.) 

Haida.—Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 103b, 1880. 
Haidah.—Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xi, 
184, 221, 1841. Hai-dai.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 
app., 1859 (after Work, 1836-41). Hydahs.—Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, July 19,1862. Hyder.—Simmons 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 190, 1860. Tlaidas.—Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 176,1877. 

Haiglar. The principal chief of the 
Catawba about the middle of the 18th 
century, commonly known to the Eng¬ 
lish colonists as King Haiglar. It is prob¬ 
able that he became chief in 1748, as it is 
stated in Gov. Glenn’s letter of May 21, 
1751, to the Albany Conference (N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 722, 1855), that the 
Catawba king had died a year and a half 
before that time. This must refer to 
Haiglar’s predecessor. Haiglar, though 
disposed to peace, offered his services to 
the governor of South Carolina when 
war with the Cherokee broke out in 1759. 
He joined Col. Grant’s forces and took 
an active part in the severe battle of 




524 


HAIM—HAIR DRESSING 


1b. a. E. 


Etchoe (Itseyi), assisting materially in 
gaining the victory for the whites. He 
is described as a man of sterling character, 
just in his dealings and true to his word, 
acting the part of a father to his people, 
by whom he was greatly beloved. See¬ 
ing that strong drink was injuring them, 
he sent a written petition to Chief Jus¬ 
tice Henley, May 26, 1756, requesting 
him to put a stop to the sale of spirituous 
liquors to the members of his tribe. In 
1762 the Shawnee waylaid, killed, and 
scalped him while he was returning from 
the Waxaw attended by a single servant. 
Col. Samuel Scott, who was a chief in 
1840, and signed the treaty of Mar. 13 
in that year with South Carolina, was 
Haiglar’s grandson. (c. t. ) 

Haim. A body of Salish of Kamloops 
agency, Brit. Col., numbering 26 in 1885. 
Ha-im. —Can. Ind. AIT. 1885, 196, 1886. 

Haimaaksto ( Hai'maaxsto ). A subdi¬ 
vision of the Tsentsenkaio, a clan of the 
Walaskwakiutl.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 
332, 1895. 

Hainai. A tribe of the Caddo confed¬ 
eracy, otherwise known as Inie, or Ioni. 
After the Spanish occupancy their village 
was situated 3 leagues w. of the mission of 
Nacogdoches, in e. Texas; it contained 
80 warriors, the same number assigned 
to the Hainai by Sibley in 1805, who per¬ 
haps obtained his information from the 
same sources. Sibley places their village 
20 m. from Natchitoches, La. In manners, 
customs, and social organization the Hai¬ 
nai do not appear to have differed from 
the other tribes of the Caddo confederacy 
(q. v.), whose subsequent fate they have 
shared. By Sibley and others they are 
called “Tachies or Texas” (see Texas), 
as if that term applied to them particu¬ 
larly. The “great nation called Ayano, 
or Cannohatinno,” according to the nar¬ 
rative of the La Salle expedition in 1687, 
were not the Hainai, as has been some¬ 
times supposed, or any tribe at all, prop¬ 
erly speaking. Ayano, or hayano, is 
merely the Caddo word for ‘people,’ 
while Kano-hatino (q. v.) is the Caddo 
equivalent for ‘Red river,’ presumably 
the same stream now so called. The In¬ 
dians simply informed the explorer that 
many people lived on Red r., a statement 
which the French, in their ignorance of 
the language, construed to contain the 
definite name and synonym of a power¬ 
ful tribe. (j. r. s. j. m.) 

Aenay.— Linares (1716) in Margry, Dec., VI, 217, 
1886. Agerones. —Davis, Span. Coiiq. N. Mex., 82, 
note, 1869. Ahinai. —MS. Census of 1790 in Tex. 
State Archives. Amais. —Carver,Trav., map, 1778. 
Anais. —Soc. Geog. Mex., 504, 1869. Annay. — 
Linares (1716) in Margry, D£c., vi, 218, 1886. 
Ayanais. —Domenech, Deserts N. Am., i, 440,1860. 
Ayenai. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 43, 1884. 
Ayenis.— Alcedo, Dic.Geog., 1 ,190,1786. Ayennis.— 
Charlevoix, New France, iv, 80, note, 1870. 
Aynais. —Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Conquista, 384, 
1742. Aynays.— Rivera, Diario y Derrotero, leg. 


2140,1736. Aynics.— Burnet (1847) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, 1,239,1851. Ayonai.— Talon quoted by 
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 27, 1891. Hainais.— 
Whipple, Explor. for R. R. to Pac., Ill, pt. 3,76,1856. 
Hini.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 373,1822. Inay.— La 
Harpe (1716) in Margry, D6c., VI, 193.1886. Ini.— 
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 101, 1856. 
Inics.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504, 1878. 
Inies.— Sibley (1805), Hist. Sketches, 67, 1806. 
Innies.— Penicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., I, 73, note, 1869. Iondes. —Foote, Tex., I, 299, 
1841. Ionees. —Ind. AfT. Rep., 899, 1846. I-on-i.— 
Sen. Ex. Confid. Doc. 13,29th Cong., 2d sess., i, 1846. 
Ionias.— Ind. AfT. Rep. 1871, 191, 1872. Ionies.— 
Ind. AfT. Rep., 894,1846. Ironeyes. —Edward, Hist. 
Tex., 92, 1836. Ironies. —Foote, Tex., I, 299, 1841. 
Jonies.— Parker, Tex., 213, 1856. Youays.— La 
Harpe (1716) in French, Hist. Coll. La., hi. 47,1S51. 


Haines Mission. A missionary post 
among the Chilcat at Deshu (q. v.), in 
Portage cove, near the head of Lynn canal, 
Alaska; pop. (entire) 85 in 1900. 

Hair. See Anatomy. 

Hair dressing. Many tribes had a dis¬ 
tinctive mode of cutting and dressing the 
hair, and the style occasionally suggested 
the nickname by 
which the people 
were called by 
other tribes, as, 
for instance, in 
the case of the 
Pawnee, who cut 
the hair close to 
the head, except 
a ridge from the 
forehead to the 
crown, where the 
scalp-lock was 
parted off in a 
circle, stiffened 
with fat and paint, 
made to stand 
erect, and curved 
like a horn, hence 
the name Pawnee, 
derived from pa- 
riki, ‘horn.’ The 
same style of 
shaving the head 
and roaching the 
hair was common 



COMB OF BONE FROM 

mound; about t. 


A VIRGINIA 

(fowke) 


among eastern and western tribes, who 
braided and generally hung the scalp-lock 
with ornaments. The Dakota and other 
western tribes parted the hair in the 
middle from the forehead to the nape of 
the neck, the line, usually painted red, 
being broken by the circle that separated 
the scalp-lock, which was always finely 
plaited, the long hair on each side, 
braided and wrapped in strips of beaver 
or otter skin, hanging down in front over 
the chest. The Nez Perces of Idaho and 
neighboring tribes formerly wore the hair 
long and unconfined, falling loosely over 
the back and shoulders. In the*S. W. 
among most of the Pueblo men the hair 
was cut short across the forehead, like a 
“bang,” and knotted behind. The Es¬ 
kimo wore the hair loose. 









BULL. 30] 


HAIR DRESSING 


525 


There was generally a difference in the 
manner of wearing the hair between the 
men and women of a tribe, and in some 
tribes the women dressed their hair differ¬ 
ently before and after marriage, as with 
the Hopi, whose maidens arranged it in 
a whorl over each ear, symbolizing the 
flower, of. the squash, but after marriage 
wore it in simple braids. Aside from 
these ordinary modes of hair dressing 
there were styles 
that were totemic 
and others connect¬ 
ed with religious 
observances or with 
shamanistic prac¬ 
tices. Among the 
Omaha and some 
other tribes the 
child from 4 to 7 
years of age formerly 
had its hair cut in a 
manner to indicate 
the totem of its gens; 
for instance, if the 
turtle was the totem, 
all the hair was cut 
off close, except a short fringe encircling 
the head, a little tuft being left on the fore¬ 
head, one at the nape of the neck, and two 
tufts on each side; the bald crown above 
the fringe represented the shell of the tur¬ 
tle and the tufts its head, tail, and four legs. 
Generally speaking, the mode of wearing 
the hair was in former times not subject 
to passing fancies or fashions, but was rep¬ 
resentative of tribal kinship and beliefs. 



WOODEN COMB AND BIRCH- 
BARK CASE; HUDSON BAY 
ESKIMO. (TURNER) 




HAIR DRESSING; WESTERN ESKIMO 

man. (murdoch) 


zuni hair-dressing, (stevenson) 


The first cutting of the hair was usually 
attended with religious rites. Among the 
Kiowa and other southern Plains tribes a 
lock from the first clipping of the child’s 
hair was tied to the forelock (Mooney). 
Among many tribes the hair was believed 
to be closely connected with a person’s 
life. This was true in a religious sense of 
the scalp-lock. In some of the rituals used 
when the hair was first gathered up and 
cut from the crown of a boy’s head the 


teaching was set forth that this lock rep¬ 
resents the life of the child, now placed 
wholly in the control of the mysterious 
and supernatural power that alone could 
will his death. The braided lock worn 
thereafter was a sign of this dedication and 
belief, and represented the man’s life. On 
it he wore the ornaments that marked his 
achievements and honors, and for any¬ 
one to touch lightly this lock was re¬ 
garded as a grave insult. As a war trophy 
the scalp-lock had a double meaning. It 
indicated the act of the supernatural 
power that had 
decreed the death 
of the man, and 
it served as tan¬ 
gible proof of the 
warrior’s prow- 
b? ess in wresting it 
v-* from the enemy. 

K The scalper, how¬ 

ever, was not al¬ 
ways the killer or 
the first striker. 
The latter had 
the chief credit, 
and frequently left others to do the killing 
and scalping. With the Eastern or timber 
tribes, the scalper was usually the killer, 
but this was not so often the case among the 
Plains Indians. The scalp was frequently 
left on the battle ground as a sacrifice. 
Among the Dakota a bit of the captured 
scalp-lock was preserved for a year, during 
which period the spirit was supposed to 
linger near; then, when the great death 
feast was held, the lock was destroyed 
and the spirit was freed thereby from its 
earthly ties (see Scalp). There are many 
beliefs connected with 
the hair, all of which 
are interwoven with 
the idea that it is mys¬ 
teriously connected 
with a person’s life and 
fortune. One can be 
bewitched and made 
subservient to the will 
of a person who be¬ 
comes possessed of a 
bit of his hair; conse¬ 
quently combings are 
usually carefully 
burned. According to Hrdlicka the Pima, 
after killing an Apache, purified them¬ 
selves with smoke from the burnt hair of 
the victim. 

Personal joy or grief was manifested 
by the style of dressing the hair (see 
Mourning). Young men often spend 
much time over their locks, friends as¬ 
sisting friends in the toilet. The Pueblo 
and Plains tribes commonly used a stiff 
brush of spear grass for combing and 
dressingthehair,whiletheEskimoand the 
N. W. coast tribes used combs. A pointed 



HEAD OF SEMINOLE MAN. 

(maccauley) 











526 


HAIRWORK 


HALF KING 


[b. a. e. 


stick served for parting it and painting 
the line. These sticks were often carefully 
wrought, ornamented with embroidery 
on the handle, and kept in an embroid¬ 
ered case. Perfumes, as well as oils, were 
used,and wisps of sweet-grass were con¬ 
cealed in the hair of young men to add to 
their attractions. The Pima and Papago 
paint or stain the hair when it becomes 
bleached by the sun (Hrdlicka in Am. 
Anthrop., vm, no. 1, 1906), and the for¬ 
mer, as well as other tribes of the arid 
region, often coated the hair completely 
with river mud to destroy vermin. 

Early French travelers in Texas and 
other Southern states mention a custom 
of the hostess to hasten to wash the head 
of a visitor with warm water, as a sign of 
good will and welcome. Among the 
Pueblo Indians the washing of the hair 
with the pounded root of the yucca plant 
prior to a religious rite was attended with 
much ceremony, and seems to corre¬ 
spond to the purification observances of 
the sweat lodge, which always preceded 
sacred rites among the tribes of the 
plains. See Adornment. (a. c. f. ) 

Hairwork. One of the most useful 
materials known to the Indians of the 
United States was hair, which, as a textile 
material, was generally more available 
than vegetal fibers. Hair was obtained 
from the dog, buffalo, mountain sheep, 
mountain goat, moose, deer, reindeer, elk, 
antelope, opossum, rabbit, beaver, otter, 
lynx, and other animals, and human hair 
was also sometimes employed. 

In more modern times horsehair was 
used to stuff balls, drumsticks, dolls, pads, 
pillows, etc., and tufts of it, frequently 
dyed, were attached as ornaments to cos¬ 
tumes, pouches, harness, ceremonial ob¬ 
jects, etc. False hair was worn by the 
Crows, Assiniboin, Mandan, Mohave, and 
Yuma; and ceremonial wigs of black wool 
and bangs of natural or dyed hair, es¬ 
pecially horsehair, were made by the 
Pueblos. Twisted or sometimes braided 
into cord, hair had a most extensive use, 
satisfying the multifarious demands for 
string or rope of great tensile strength, 
and was combined with other fibers in 
the warp or weft of textiles and basketry. 
According to Grinnell cowskin pads 
stuffed with the hair of elk, antelope, 
buffalo, or mountain sheep were com¬ 
monly used instead of saddles by some of 
the Plains tribes in running buffalo and 
in war. Bourke (9th Rep. B. A. E., 474, 
1892) says that mantles made of votive 
hair are mentioned as having been in use 
among the Lower California or southern 
California tribes in the 18th century, and 
quotes Parkman (Jesuits in North Amer¬ 
ica, lxxxiv, 1867) to the effect that the 
Algonquians believed in a female manito 
who wore a robe made of the hair of her 


victims, for she caused death. See A dorn- 
ment, Feaihenvork, Hair dressing , Quill- 
work. Consult Holmes in 13th Rep. B. 
A. E., 25, 37, 1896. (w. h.) 

Haisla ( Xa-isla ). One of the three 
Kwakiutl dialectic divisions, embracing 
theKitamat (Haisla proper) and the Kit- 
lope.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 328, 1895. 

Haiwal (‘acorn’). A clan of the Ton¬ 
ka wa. (a. s. g.) 

Hakan. The Fire clans of the Keresan 
pueblos of Acoma, Cochiti, Santa Ana, 
Sia, and San Felipe, N. Mex. That of 
Acoma is now extinct. 

Haka-hanoq ch .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX, 
350, 1896 (Acoma form: hdnoqch = ‘ people’). 
Hakan-hano.—Ibid. (Santa Ana and Sia form). 
Ha'-kan-ni.—Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 
19, 1894 (Sia form). Hakanyi-hano.—Hodge, op. 
cit. (San Felipe form). Hakanyi-hanuch.—Ibid. 
(Cochiti form.) 

Hakkyaiwal ( Hdk-kydV-wdl ). A Ya- 
quina village on the s. side of Yaquina r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Hakouchirmiou (probably misprint for 
Hakouchiriniou). Mentioned by Dobbs 
(Hudson Bay, 23, 1744), as a tribe, on or 
near Bourbon (Nelson) r., Brit. Am., at 
war with the Maskegon. Possibly a di¬ 
vision of the Cree or of the Assiniboin. 

Halant. A Shuswap village 3 m. below 
Shuswap lake, Brit. Col.; pop. 152 in 
1904. 

Halant.—Can. Ind. Aff., 244, 1902. Ha-la-ut.— 
Ibid., 196, 1885. Kell-aout.— Ibid., 188, 1884. 
Naskantlines.—Ibid.,78, 1878. Neskainlith.—Ibid., 
pt. II, 68, 1902. Niskahnuith.—Ibid., 259, 1882. 
Niskainlith.—Ibid., map, 1891. South Thompson.— 
Ibid. 

Halchis. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Half Breed Band. Mentioned by Cul¬ 
bertson (Smithson. Rep. 1850, 143, 1851) 
as a local band of the Cheyenne (q. v.) in 
1850, probably named from a chief; or 
perhaps the Sutaio. 

Half-breeds. See Metis, Mixed-bloods. 

Half King (Scruniyatha, Seruniyattha, 
Tanacharison, Tannghrishon, etc.). An 
Oneida chief; born about 1700; died at the 
house of John Harris, at the site of Har¬ 
risburg, Pa., Oct. 4,1754. He appears to 
have first come into notice about 1748, at 
which time he lived at or in the vicinity 
of Logstown, Pa. (q. v.). According to 
some statements his residence was in this 
village, but according to others it was on 
Little Beaver cr., about 15 m. distant. It 
was to Half King that most of the official 
visitors to the Indians of the Ohio region, 
including Weiser, Gist, Croghan, and 
Washington, applied for information, ad¬ 
vice, and assistance, Logstown being their 
stopping place for this purpose. He ac¬ 
companied Washington both on his jour¬ 
ney of 1753 and on his expedition of 1754. 


BULL. 30] 


HALF KING-HALONA 


527 


Half King claimed that he killed Jumon- 
ville, the French officer, during the skir¬ 
mish at Great Meadows, Pa., May 28, 
1754, in revenge of the French, who, he 
declared, had killed, boiled, and eaten 
his father; and it was he who had advised 
Ensign Ward, when summoned by Con- 
tracoeur, the French officer, to surrender 
Ft Necessity, at the site of Pittsburg, Pa., 
to reply that his rank did not invest him 
with power to do so, thus obtaining de¬ 
lay. Half King was a prominent figure 
on the Indian side in the treaty with the 
Virginia commissioners in 1752, and for 
this and other services was decorated by 
Gov. Dinwiddie and given the honorary 
name “Dinwiddie,” which, it is said, he 
adopted with pride. On the advice of 
Croghan, he with other Indians removed 
to Aughquick (Oquaga) cr., Pa., in 1754. 
Half King has been confused with the 
Huron Half King of Sandusky, Ohio, 
known also as Pomoacan, and with his 
own successor, who bore the same popu¬ 
lar title. His Delaware name was Mon- 
akatuatha. See Drake, Aborig. Races, 
531,1880; Rupp, Hist. West. Pa., 71,1846; 
Dinwiddie Papers, i, 148, 1883; Col. 
Records Pa., v, 358, 1851. (c. t.) 

Half King (Petawontakas, Dunquad, 
Dunquat, Daunghquat; Delaware name, 
Pomoacan). A Huron chief of Sandusky, 
Ohio, who flourished during the latter 
part of the Revolutionary war. Under 
employment by the British he aided the 
Delawares in their resistance to the en¬ 
croachment of the white settlements 
beyond the Allegheny mts., and it was 
through his intervention that the Mora¬ 
vians of Lichtenau were saved from mas¬ 
sacre by the Indians in 1777. According 
to Loskiel (Missions United Brethren, 
pt. 3, 127,1794) he was joined by a large 
number of warriors, including Hurons, 
Ottawa, Chippewa, Shawnee, and others, 
besides some French, and his influence 
as a disciplinarian was such that he kept 
this mixed assemblage in good order, per¬ 
mitting no extravagance on their part. 
Sometimes more than 200 warriors lay all 
nightcloseto Lichtenau, but they behaved 
so quietly that they were hardly per¬ 
ceived. Loskiel also says that Half King 
“was particularly attentive to prevent all 
drunkenness, knowing that bloodshed 
and murder would immediately follow.” 
He insisted on the removal of the Chris¬ 
tian Indians from the vicinity of San¬ 
dusky, believing it to be unsafe for them 
to remain there; he also protected the 
Moravians and their converts from mal¬ 
treatment when the missionaries were 
sent to Detroit. Under the name Daungh¬ 
quat he signed the treaty of Ft McIntosh, 
Ohio, Jan. 21, 1785. The treaties of 
Greenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 1795; Ft Mc¬ 
Intosh, July 4, 1805; Greenville, July 


22, 1814, and Spring Wells, Sept. 8, 1815, 
were signed by Haroenyou (Harrowen- 
you), his son, not by himself; but the 
name “Dunquad or Half King” is ap¬ 
pended to the treaty of Miami Rapids, 
Ohio, Sept. 29, 1817. (c. t. ) 

Halfway Town. A former Cherokee 
settlement on Little Tennessee r., about 
halfway between Sitiku and Chilhowee, 
about the boundary of the present Mon¬ 
roe and Loudon cos., e. Tenn.—Timber- 
lake, Mem., map, 1765. 

Halkaiktenok [Ha'lx'aix’tenoXy ‘killer 
whale’). A division of the Bellabella.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 328, 1895. 

Halona (Hdlona l'tiwana , ‘middle 
place of happy fortune’, ‘middle ant-hill 
of the world’, ‘the ant-hill at the navel 
of the Earth Mother.’—Cushing). A 
former pueblo of the Zuni and one of the 
Seven Cities of Cibola of the early Span¬ 
ish chroniclers, said to have been situated 
on both sides of Zuni r., on and opposite 
the site of the present Zuni pueblo, w. 
N. Mex. Only the mound on the s. 
side of the stream is now traceable, and 
a part of this is occupied by modern build¬ 
ings erected by white people. While 
there seems to be no question that Ha¬ 
lona was inhabited by the Zuni at the 
time of Coronado in 1540, it was not men¬ 
tioned by name until Nov. 9, 1598, when 
the Zuni made a vow of obedience and 
vassalage to Spain at Hawikuh, Halona 
being designated as Halonagu ( Halona - 
kwin, ‘ Halona-place’). A Franciscan mis¬ 
sion was established there in 1629, but 
the murder by the Zuni of their mis¬ 
sionary in 1632 impelled thelndians to flee 
for protection to Thunder mtn., a mesa 
3 m. away, where they remained for about 
3 years. The mission was rehabilitated 
some time after 1643, and continued until 
the Pueblo outbreak of Aug., 1680, when 
the Zuni murdered Fray Juan de Bal, 
the Halona missionary, and burned the 
church. The Zuni again fled to Thunder 
mtn., where they remained until after 
the reconquest by Diego de Vargas in 
1692. Meanwhile the pueblos in the val¬ 
ley, including Halona, had fallen in 
decay, and none of them was rebuilt. The 
present village of Zuni was reared on the 
n. bank of Zuni r., partly on the site of 
Halona, about the close of the 17th cen¬ 
tury. The population of Halona at the 
time of the revolt of 1680 was about 1,500, 
and Matsaki and Kiakima were visitas of 
its mission. See Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 1889; Bandelier (1) Doc. Hist. 
Zuni Tribe, in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., 
nr, 1892, (2) in Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, iv, 
1890—92; Cushing, Zuni Creation Myths, 
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Vetaneurt in 
Teatro Am., repr. 1871. (f. w. h.) 

Alauna.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map no. 5, 1776* 
Alena.— Bowles, map Am., 1784. Aloma.— Vargas 


528 


HALPA D ALGI-HAMMERS 


[b. a. e. 


(1692) quoted in Davis, Span. Conq. of N. Mex., 
371, 1869. Alomas. —Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la 
Conquista (possibly the same; Acoma (q. v.), how¬ 
ever, seems more likely). Alona. —Del’Isle, Carte 
Mexiqueet Floride, 1703; Yetancurt (1693) inTea- 
troMex., hi, 320,1871. Alonas.— Rivera, Diario y 
Derrotero, leg. 950,1736 (referring to the inhabi¬ 
tants). Ant Hill. —Cushing, Zuni Folk Tales, 7, 
1901 (Hfilonawan, or). Ant Hill of the Middle. — 
Ibid., 31. Concepcion de Alona. —Vetancurt (1693), 
Menolog. Fran., 275, 1871 (mission name). Ha- 
lona. —Cushingin Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884 (Zuni 
namel. Halonagu. —Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., 
xvi, 133, 1871 (corruption of Halonakwin, kwin 
being the locative). Halona I'tiwana.— Cushing 
in Millstone, IX, 55, Apr. 1884. Halona-itiwana. — 
Cushing, Zuni Folk Tales, 7, 1901. Halona-kue.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 171, 1890 
(given as the name of the pueblo; but kue= 
‘people’). Halona Kuin. —Bandelier, ibid., iv, 
337, 1892 \kuin= locative). Hal-onan. —Ibid., 335. 
Halona-quin.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Ethnol. 
and Archieol., Ill, 84,1892. Hal-on-aua. — Bande¬ 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, ill, 260, 1890. Ha-lo- 
na-wa. —Cushing in Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. 
Am., vii, 156, 1890 (or Hd-lo-na). Halonawan.— 
Cushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 7, 1901. La Purifica¬ 
tion de la Virgen de Alona. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 337,1892 (mission name). Middle 
Ant Hill.— -Cushing, Zuni Folk Tales, 31, 1901. 
Middle Ant Hill of the World. —Ibid., 55. Middle 
Place.— Ibid., 34. Purificacion.— D’Anville, map 
Am. Sept., 1746 (intended for mission name). 

Halpadalgi (halpada ‘alligator’, algi 
1 people ’). A Creek clan. 

Halpadalgi—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 
1884. Kal-put'-lu.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. 

Hamalakyauae. An ancestor of a Nim- 
kish gens, after whom it was sometimes 
called.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 
130, 1887. 

Hamanao (Xdmando ). A gens of the 
Quatsino tribe of the Kwakiutl, q. v.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 329, 1895. 

Hamechuwa. A former Luiseno village 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey 
mission, s. Cal.—Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860. 

Hameyisath {Ha'meyiscith) . A sept of 
the Seshat, a Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890. 

Hami. The Tobacco clans of Sia and 
San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex. 

Haami-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 
1896 (Siaform: hdno— 1 people’). Ha-mi.—Steven¬ 
son in 11th Hep. B. A. E., 19, 1894 (Sia form). 
Hami-hano.—Hodge, op. cit. (San Felipe form). 

Hamilton Creek. The local name for a 
body of Salish of Kamloops-Okanagan 
agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 38 in 1901 (Can. 
Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. n, 166), after which 
date the name does not occur. 

Hamitinwoliyu. A former Nishinam 
village in the valley of Bear r., Cal. 

Hameting-Woleyuh.—Powers in Overland Mo., xir, 
22,1874. Ha'-mi-ting-Wo'-li-yuh.—Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 316, 1877. 

Hammers. Few implements are of so 
much importance to primitive men as 
the stone hammer and the several closely 
allied forms—the sledge, the maul, and 
the stone-head club, which may be de¬ 
scribed here rather than under the caption 
Clubs. All of these implements are em¬ 
ployed, like the ordinary club, in striking 
blows that stun, break, crush, or drive) 
the only distinction to be drawn between 


the hafted hammer and the club being 
that the one carries the weight chiefly in 
the extremity or head, which is usually 
of heavier or harder material than the 
handle, while the other has the weight 
distributed along 
the shaft. Although 
the several imple¬ 
ments comprised in 
this group have 
many features in 
common, they are 
somewhat clearly 
differentiated in 
shape and use. All 
are made of hard, heavy, tough materials, 
including stone, bone, ivory, antler, 
shell, and metal. Some are never hafted, 
while perhaps nearly all on occasion are 
used unhafted, one or both hands being 
employed accord- 



Discoidal Chipping Hammers. 
a. Ohio; b, California, 
(about 1-6) 



f -ft 

Pitted Hammer. 



mg to the weight 
of the implement. 

Haftings vary 
with the form and 
use of the object as 
well as with the re¬ 
gion and the people. 

Hammers em¬ 
ployed in shaping stone, especially in the 
more advanced stages of the work, are 
usually unhafted and are held tightly in 
the hand for delivering heavy blows, or 
lightly between the thumb and finger¬ 
tips for flaking or pecking. 
They may be natural peb¬ 
bles, bowh 
ders, or 
fragments, 
but by pro¬ 
longed use 
they as¬ 
sume defi¬ 
nite shapes 
or are in¬ 
tentionally 
modified to better fit them for their pur¬ 
pose. Globular and discoidal forms pre¬ 
vail, and the variety employed in pecking 
and for other light uses often has shallow 
depressions centrally placed at opposite 
sides to render the fin¬ 
ger hold more secure. 

The pecking and flak¬ 
ing work is accom¬ 
plished by strokes with 
the periphery, which 
is round or slightly 
angular in profile to 
suit the requirements 
of the particular work. 

Hammers intended 
for breaking, driving, and killing are gen¬ 
erally hafted to increase their effective¬ 
ness. Sledge hammers, used in mining 
and quarrying, were usually heavy, often 
rudely shaped, and the haft was a pliable 


Heads from the Copper Mines, 
Michigan. (about 1 - 5 ) 



Heavy Hammer; British Co¬ 
lumbia. (length 6 3-4- 

IN.) 








hull. 30] 


H AMMON ASSET-HAMPTON INSTITUTE 


529 



HEAVY HAMMER OF THE PLAINS TRIBES. 


stick or withe bent around the body of 
the implement, which was sometimes 
grooved for the purpose. The fastening 
was made secure by the application of 
thongs or rawdiide coverings. In the 
flint quarries and copper mines great 
numbers of hammers or sledges were re¬ 
quired; indeed, it may be said that in and 

about the 
ancient 
copper 
mines of 
McCar- 
golscove, 
Isle Hoy- 

ale, Mich., there are to be seen tens of 
thousands of wornout and abandoned 
sledge heads. In an ancient paint mine 
in Missouri, recently exposed by the open¬ 
ing of an iron mine, upward of 1,200 rude 
stone sledges were thrown out by the 
workmen. Heavy grooved and hafted 
hammers, resembling somewhat the min¬ 
ing sledges, though much more highly 
specialized, were in general use 
the tribes of 
the great plains 
and served an 
important pur¬ 
pose in break- 
i n g up the 
bones of large 
game animals, 
in pounding 
pemmican, 
flint, and seeds, in driving tipi pegs, etc. 
A lighter hammer, usually referred to 
as a w T ar-club, was and is in common use 
among the western tribes. It is a glob¬ 
ular or doubly conical stone, carefully 
finished and often grooved, the haft being 
strengthened by binding with rawhide. 
Closely allied to this weapon is a kind of 
slung hammer, the roundish stone being 



Grooved Stone Hammers. a, New 
Mexico; b, Dakota 



Bone Maul With woooen Handle. ( i-6) 
Eskimo. (Murdoch) 

held in place at the end of the 
handle by a covering of raw- 
hide that extends the full 
length of the haft. These are 
very effectual implements, and decked 
with streamers of horsehair and other 
ornaments have been devoted, at least 
in recent years, to ceremony and show. 

Heavy hammers, often tastefully carved, 
were and are used by the tribes of the 
N. W. fordriving wedges in splitting wood, 
for driving piles, and for other heavy 
work; they are usually called mauls, or 
pile-drivers. Many of the larger speci¬ 
mens have handles or finger holes carved 


in the stone, while others are provided 
w r ith handles of wood. The Eskimo also 
have hammers for various purposes, made 
of stone, bone, and ivory, with haftings 
ingeniously attached. 

The literature of this topic is volumi¬ 
nous, but much scattered, references to the 
various kinds of hammers occurring in 
nearly all works dealing with the arche¬ 
ology and ethnology of n. America. For 
an extended article on the stone hammer, 
see McGuire in Am. Anthropologist, iv, 
no. 4, 1891. (w. h. h. ) 

Hammonasset. A small band, headed 
by a chief named Sebequanash (‘the 
man who weeps’), formerly living about 
Hammonasset r., near Guilford, Middle¬ 
sex co., Conn. They were probably a 
part of the Quinnipiac.—He Forest, Hist. 
Inds. Conn., 52, 1853. 

Hamnulik. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Hampasawan (‘tented village,’ from 
hampone, ‘tent’). A former Zufii pueblo, 
the ruins of which are still visible 6 m. w. 
of the present Zuni, Valencia co., N. Mex. 
Regarded by Cushing as probably one of 
the seven cities of Cibola. See Minde- 
leff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 83,1891, and the 
authors cited below. 

Hainpassawan.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 291, 
1885 (after Cushing; misprint). Hampasawan.— 
Cushing, Zuni Folk Tales, 6, 1901. Ham-pas-sa- 
wan.— Cushing in Millstone, ix, 55, 1884. Tented 
Pueblo. —Cushing, Zuni Folk Tales, 6, 1901. Vil¬ 
lage of the White Flowering Herbs. —Cushing, Zuni 
Folk Tales, 104, 1901 (probably the same). 

Hampton Normal and Agricultural Insti¬ 
tute. A school for negroes and Indians, 
situated 2 m. from Fort Monroe and Old 
Point Comfort, Va. Established in 1868 
by Gen. S. C. Armstrong for the indus¬ 
trial and agricultural education of freed- 
men, it was the first school in the United 
States of a practical industrial nature. 
After 10 years of success in training and 
establishing negroesas teachers and farm¬ 
ers, it responded to the call of 14 young 
Indians, who had been prisoners of war 
at St Augustine, Fla., for three years, 
and thus opened its doors to the Indian 
race. Since then 1,100 Indian girls and 
boys have had more or less training at 
Hampton, and to-day five-sixths of those 
now living are industrious and civilized, 
working with their own hands for the 
support of themselves and their families. 

The school is not a government insti¬ 
tution, but is controlled by a board of 17 
trustees, and is entirely nonsectarian in 
character. It is supported by the income 
of a partial endowment and by certain 
government funds distributed by the state 
of Virginia, but its chief support is de¬ 
rived from the donations of its friends. 

The academic course covers a period of 
4 years, and includes English branches in 
both grammar and high school grades. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-34 










530 


HAMTSIT-HANGATANGA 


[B. a. e. 


Normal courses are given in business, 
agriculture, and the trades, as well as in 
kindergarten and public school teaching. 
Agriculture begins in the primary depart¬ 
ment of the training school, and becomes 
so important a branch of the academic 
work that at the end of the course the 
student is prepared to conduct intelligent 
farming. In addition to the model farm, 
dairy, orchards, poultry yards, and expe¬ 
riment garden, the school has a dairy and 
stock farm of 600 acres a few miles away. 
The trades taught the boys are carpentry, 
wood turning, bricklaying, plastering, 
painting, wheelwrighting, blacksmithing, 
machine work, steam fitting, tailoring, 
shoe and harness making, tinsmithing, 
upholstering, and printing. A large and 
well equipped trade school, with mechan¬ 
ical-drawing room, offers excellent facil¬ 
ities for the practical instruction given. 
The domestic-science building and the 
school kitchens and laundries give oppor¬ 
tunity for instruction in all kinds of do¬ 
mestic work, and each girl is required to 
complete a practical course in every 
branch of housekeeping, cooking, dairy¬ 
ing, and gardening. 

The school has about 60 buildings for 
housing and educating its 900 boarding 
students. These include a church, li¬ 
brary, dormitories, recitation halls, trade 
school, domestic science and agricultural 
building, hospital, printing office, green¬ 
houses, barn, workshops, laundry, offices, 
and dwellings for the officers and teachers. 
All the young men receive instruction in 
military tactics, which has proved of great 
value in instilling habits of promptness, 
neatness, and obedience. 

The Government pays $167 a year for 
each of its 120 Indian pupils; all expenses 
in excess of this must be provided by 
philanthropic friends. The Indians and 
colored students have separate dormitory 
buildings, and the pupils of the two races 
also occupy separate tables in the dining 
rooms, but work together in classes and 
shops with mutual good feeling and help¬ 
fulness. 

The record of Indians returned to their 
homes is carefully kept. For the year 
ending in May, 1906, there were 183 doing 
an excellent grade of work as teachers in 
schoolroom, shop, or on farms; as doctors, 
lawyers, or ethnologists; 306 were living 
civilized lives, setting examples of indus¬ 
try and temperance; 80 were doing fairly 
well under hard conditions; 28 were doing 
poorly, and 4 were bad. This gives so 
large a proportion of satisfactory results 
that Hampton considers her work for 
Indians in every way a success. 

The school publishes a monthly maga¬ 
zine called The Southern Workman, de¬ 
voted to the interests of the negro and 
the Indian. The Indians publish a small 
paper, Talks and Thoughts, now in its nine¬ 


teenth year; all its' contributors are In¬ 
dians, and many of the articles are valu¬ 
able additions to Indian literature and 
ethnology. (c. m. f.) 

Hamtsit {Hamtsit, ‘havingfood’, named 
from an ancestor). A Bellacoola division 
at Talio, Brit. Col.—Boas in 7th Rep. N. 
W. Tribes Can., 3, 1891. 

Han. An unidentified tribe living on a 
part of the island of Malhado (Galveston 
id.?), Texas, on which Cabeza de Vaca 
suffered shipwreck in 1528. The language 
of the Han differed from that of their 
neighbors, the Capoque (probably Coa- 
que), but they had customs in common. 
They -possibly formed the westernmost 
band of the Attacapa. See Cabeza de 
Vaca, Narr., Smith trans., 82, 1871; Gat- 
schet, Karankawa Inds., 34, 1891. 

Han (‘ night ’). A Ivansa gens. Its sub- 
gentes are Hannikashingaand Dakanman- 
yin. 

Ha".—Dorsey in Am. Nat., 671, 1885. 

Hana (‘ dog ’). A subphratry or gens of 
the Menominee.—Hoffman in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E.,pt. i, 42,1896. 

Hanahawunena (‘rock men.’—Ivroe- 
ber). A division of the Northern Arap- 
aho, now practically extinct. 

Aanu'hawa.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E^, 956, 
1896. Ha'nahawunena. —Ibid. Ha»anaxawuune / - 
na".—Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
XVIII, pt. 1, 6, 1902. 

Hanakwa. A former pueblo of the 
Jemez in New Mexico, the exact site of 
which is not known. 

Ham-a-qua. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
207,1892. Han-a-kwa. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 

1895. 

Hanaya. A former Chumashan village 
in Mission canyon, near Santa Barbara 
mission, Cal. 

Ha'-na-ya. —Henshaw, Santa Barbara MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. Janaya. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 24,1863. 

Hanehewedl {XanExEwti', ‘stone by or 
near the trail’). A village of the Nicola 
band of the Ntlakyapamuk, near Nicola r., 
27 in. above Spences Bridge, Brit. Col.— 
Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 174, 
1900. 

Hanga (‘leader’). A gens of the Han- 
gashenu division of the Omaha. 

Foremost.— Dorsey in Bull. Philos. Soc. Wash., 129, 
18S0. Hanga. —Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 233, 
1884. Hunga.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155, 1877. Hun- 
guh.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 327,1823. Large 
Hanga.— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 674, 1885. Medi¬ 
cine.— Morgan,op. cit., 155. 

Hangashenu (‘ young men of the lead¬ 
ers.’—Fletcher). One of the two divi¬ 
sions of the Omaha, composed of the 
Wezhinshte, Inkesabe, Hanga, Hhatada, 
and Kanze gentes. 

Hangacenu.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 219, 
1884; 15th Rep. B. A. E., 226, 1897. Hongashan.— 
Jackson (1877) quoted by Donaldson in Smithson. 
Rep., 1885, pt. 2, 74, 1886. Hon-ga-sha-no.—Long, 
Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 325,1823. 

Hangatanga (‘ large Hanga ’). A Kansa 
ens. 

lack eagle.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Da- 
sin'-ja-ha-ga— Ibid. (‘Deertail’). Hanga tanga.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 1897. Hanga 


BULL. 30] 


HANGING-MAW-HANO 


531 


utanandji. —Ibid. (‘Hanga apart from the rest’). 
Hung-ga ni-ka-shing-ga.— Stubbs, Raw MS. vo- 
eab., B. A. E., 25, 1877. Hun-go-tin'-ga. —Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Ta nika-shing-ga. —Stubbs, 
op. cit. Ta sindje qaga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 231, 1897. 

Hanging-maw ( XJskwd'll-gH'ta, ‘his stom¬ 
ach hangs down’). A prominent Chero¬ 
kee chief of the Revolutionary period.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A.E., 543, 1900. 

Hanginihkashina (‘night people’). A 
subdivision of the Tsishu division of the 
Osage. Its subdivisions in turn are 
Haninihkashina and Wasape. 

Ha 11 i'niqk‘aci n 'a. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
231, B97. Huinihkaci"a. —Dorsey, Osage MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1883. Tse'fanka'. —Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 234,1897. Tsi'ou we'haqi^e. —Ibid. 

Hangka (‘leader’). One of the three 
divisions of the Osage, the last to join the 
tribe, dividing with the Wazhazhe the 
right or war side of the camp circle. 
Hanqa.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 233, 1897. 

Hangkaahutun (‘Hangka having 
wings’). A gens of the Hangka division 
of the Osage, in two subgentes, Husadta- 
wanun and Husadta. 

Eagle people. —Dorsey, Osage MS. voeab., B. A. E., 
1883. Han'qa a'hii tu n/ . —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 234, 1897. Hu'sa^a. —Ibid, (‘limbs stretched 
stiff’). Qu£ i'niqk‘aci n 'a. —Ibid. (‘ white eagle peo¬ 
ple’). 

Hangkaenikashika (‘those who became 
human beings by means of the ancestral 
animal’). A Quapaw gens. 

Ancestral gens.— Dorsey in loth Rep. B. A. E., 229, 
1897. Hanna e'nikaci'qa. —Ibid. 

Hangkautadhantsi (‘ Hangka apart from 
the rest ’). A gens on the Hangka side of 
the Osage tribal circle. 

Hanna uta'r/an^si. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
234,1897. Qu«Ja'qtsii'niqk‘aci n 'a. —Ibid. (‘ real eagle 
people’]. War eagle people. —Dorsey, Osage Ms. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 

Hangnikashinga (‘night people’). A 
subgens of the Han gens of the Kansa. 
Ha 11 nikaci n ga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 
1897. 

Hanilik. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Haninihkashina (‘ night people proper’). 
A subdivision of the Haninihkashina di¬ 
vision of the Osage.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 234, 1897. 

Hankutchin (‘riverpeople’). AKutchin 
tribe on upper Yukon r. below Klondike 
r., Alaska. They make baskets of tama¬ 
rack roots with hair and porcupine quills 
tastefully woven into them. When these 
are used for cooking, the water is boiled 
by putting red-hot stones into them. The 
Hankutchin are noted for their skill in 
catching large salmon. Gibbs stated that 
60 hunters visited Ft Yukon in 1854. They 
still trade at that post. Subdivisions are 
Katshikotin, Takon, and Tsitoklinotin. 
Villages are Fetutlin, Johnnys, Nuklako, 
Tadush, and Tutchonekutchin. 

Ai-yan. —Schwatka, Rep. on Alaska, 82,1885, Ai- 
ya'-na.— Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 200 -b, 
1887. An-Kutchin.— Whymper, Alaska, 223, 1868. 
Au Kotchins.— Raymond quoted byColyer in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1869, 693, 1870. Ayans— Schwatka in 
Century Mag., 821, Sept. 1885. Gens de Bois.— Dali 


in Proc. A. A. A. S., xvm, 271, 1870. Gens-de- 
fine.— Raymond quoted by Colyer in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1869, 593, 1870. Gens de Fou. —Hardisty in 
Smithson. Rep. 1866, 311, 1872. Gens de Foux.— 
Whymper in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 233, 1868. 
Gens des Bois. —Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 4‘2d 
Cong., 1st sess., 34, 1871. Gens des faux. —Petroff, 
Alaska, 160, 1884. Hai-ankutchin. —Dali in Proc. 
A. A. A. S., xxxiv, 376, 1886. Han-kutchi.— Rich¬ 
ardson, Arct. Exped., I, 396,1851. Han kutchin.— 
Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., xvm, 271, 1870. Han- 
Kutchin. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 31, 1877. 
Han-kuttchin. —Petitot, Diet. Dene-Dindji6, xx, 
1876. Hong-Kutchin. —Jones in Smithson. Rep. 
1866, 321, 1872. Hun-koo-chin.— Hardisty, ibid., 
311. Hun-Kutchin.— Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
12, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 34, 1871. Hun'kutch-in. — 
Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. (trans.: ‘peo¬ 
ple of the river country’). Lower Gens de fou.— 
Ibid. Wood people. —Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
xvm, 271, 1870. 

Hannakallal. A tribe or band, probably 
Athapascan, numbering 600 in 1804, and 
dwellings, of the ‘Luckkarso’ (Kosotshe) 
on the Pacific coast; possibly the Khai- 
nanaitetunne or the Henaggi. 

Hannakalals. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 119, 
1814. Hannakallah. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 
571, 1853. Han-na-kal-lal. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, vt, 117, 1905. 

Hano (contracted from Anopi , ‘ eastern 
people.’—Fewkes). The easternmost 
pueblo of Tusayan, n. e. Ariz., and famil¬ 
iarly spoken of as one of the Hopi vil¬ 
lages; it is, however, occupied by Tewa 
people, whose ancestors, early in the 18th 
century, migrated from the upper Rio 
Grande, in New Mexico, principally from 
an ancient pueblo known as Tsawarii, 
above the present town of Santa Cruz, 
where the hamlet of La Puebla now 
stands (Hodge). The Hano people 
have largely intermarried with the Hopi. 
In 1782 the population was 110 families; 
in 1893 it numbered 163 individuals, 
including 23 husbands of Hano women. 
In addition, there ’were 16 Hano people 
living in the Hopi pueblos. The clans 
represented at Hano are the Ke (Bear), 
Kun (Corn), Sa (Tobacco), Tenyo 
(Pine), Okuwa (Cloud), Nang (Earth), 
Kachina, and Tang (Sun). Formerly 
there were also the Kapulo (Crane), Pe 
(Timber), Kopeli (Pink conch), Pohulo 
(Herb), Kuyanwe (Turquoise ear pend¬ 
ant), Ku (Stone), and Ta (Grass) clans, 
but these have become extinct since the 
Hano people settled in Tusayan. Con¬ 
sult Fewkes (1) in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
636, 1898; (2) in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,612, 
1900; (3) in Am. Anthrop., vii, 162,1894; 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 62, 1891. 

Hano.— Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 412, 
1879. Hanoki. —Ibid. Hanom. —ten Kate, Reizen 
in N. A., 259,1885 (Hopi name for the people). 
Ha-no-me.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 7, 1884 (Hopi 
name for the people). Hanomuh. —Stephen and 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 36,1891. Harno.— 
Ten Broeck in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, map, 
24-25,87,1854. Haro.— Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 515, 1878. Iano. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
June 19, 1863. Jano. —Garctis (1776), Diary, 394, 
1900. Janogualpa. —Garc6s quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N.Mex ; , 137, 395, 1889 (Hanoand Walpi 
combined). Koyoshtu. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. 
E., 1895 (Acoma name). Na-ca-ci-kin. —Stephen, 
MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Navaho name: ‘foreign bear 
people’s house’). Nah-shah-shai, —Eaton in 


532 


HANOCOUCOUAIJ-HARAMES 


[b. a. e. 


Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 220, 1854 (Navaho 
name). Tano. —Ward quoted by Donaldson, Mo- 
qui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Tanox. —Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Isletaname). Tanoquevi. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1,519,1853. Tanoquibi. — 
Calhoun quoted by Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo 
Inds., 14,1893. Tanos. —Yilla-Senor, Theatro Am., 
pt. 2, 425, 1748. Tanus.— Escudero, Noticias de 
Chihuahua, 231, 1834. Taucos. —Cortez (1799) in 
Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., ill, pt. 3, 121, 1856. 
Te-e-wun-na.— Whipple, ibid. ,13,1856 (Zuni name). 
Teh-wa. —Stephen in Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo 
Inds., 14, 1893. Tewa. —Popular but incorrect 
name for the pueblo (see Tewa). Tewe. —Shipley 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 310, 1891. Towas. —Davis, El 
Gringo, 115, 1857. 

Hanocoucouaij. A village on the e. coast of 
Florida, n. of C. Canaveral, in the 16th cen¬ 
tury.—De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. 

Hantiwi, A Shastan tribe or band for¬ 
merly living in Warm Spring valley, 
Modoc co., Cal. 

Han-te'-wa. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
267, 1877. 

Hanut Cochiti ( hanut , ‘above’, + Co- 
chiti, q. v.). The sixth town successively 
occupied by the people of Cochiti; situated 
about 12 m. n. w. of Cochiti pueblo, 
in the Potrero Viejo, N. Mex. 

Ha-nut Cochiti.—Lummis in Scribner’s Monthly, 
100, 1893. 

Hapaluya. A former large village in up¬ 
per Florida,, visited by De Soto in 1539.— 
Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 133, 1850. 

Hapanyi. The Oak clans of the Keresan 
pueblos of Laguna, Acoma, Sia, San Felipe, 
and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Oak clan of 
Laguna claims to have come originally 
from Rio Grande pueblos, by way of Mt 
Taylor, and to form a phratry with the 
Mokaich (Mountain Lion) clan; while 
that of Acoma claims phratral relationship 
with the Showwiti (Parrot) and Tanyi 
(Calabash) clans. The Oak clan of Sia is 
extinct. (f. w. h.) 

Hapai-hano ch . —Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 
1896 (Laguna form; hdnoch = t people’). Hapan- 
hano.— Ibid. (Sia form). Ha-pan-ni.— Stevenson in 
11th Rep. B. A. E., 19, 1894 (Sia form). Hapanyi- 
hano.— Hodge, op. cit. (San Felipe form). Ha- 
panyi-hanoq ch . —Ibid. (Acoma form). Hapanyi- 
hanuch. —Ibid. (Cochiti form). 

Hapes. A small tribe found by Spanish 
explorers on the lower Rio Grande in the 
vicinity of Eagle Pass, Tex., although 
Uhde (1861) places it near Lampazos, in 
Nueva Leon, Mexico, some distance far¬ 
ther w. They numbered 490 in 85 huts in 
1688, but an epidemic of smallpox raged 
among them soon afterward, and in 1689 
the survivors were attacked by coast 
Indians and exterminated, with the ex¬ 
ception of some boys who were carried 
off- (j. r. s.) 

Apes.— Fernando del Bosque (1675) in Nat. Geog. 
Mag., xiv, 9,347,1903. Apis.— Manzanet (1689) in 
Tex. Hist. Ass. Quar., ii, 25,1898. Hapes,— De Le6n 
(1689), ibid., vm, 205, 1905. lapies.— Linschottn, 
Descr. de 1’AmCr., map, 1,1638. Japies.— De Laet, 
Hist. Nouv. Monde, 234,1640. Jeapes.— Fernando 
del Bosque, op. cit. Xapes.— Uhde, Lander 121, 
1861. Xapies.— Navarette, Memorial y Noticias 
Sacras, 104, 1646. 

Hapkug. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited, 


Happy Hunting Ground. See Popular 
fallacies. 

Haqihana (‘wolves’). A local band of 
the Arapaho, q. v. 

Haqui. A Caddoan (?) tribe, apparently 
in n. e. Texas, mentioned in 1687 as at war 
with the “Coenis” or main body of the 
Caddo confederacy. Perhaps the Adai. 

Aquis. —Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., Ill, 409,1878. 
Hakesians. —Hennepin, New Discov., 41, 1698. 
Haquis. —Douay (1687) quoted by Shea, Discov. 
Miss.Val., 217, 1852. 

Harahey. One of the various forms of 
the name of a province of which Coro¬ 
nado, while among the New Mexico 
pueblos in 1540-41, learned from a native 
thereof who said that it lay beyond 
Quivira (the Wichita country of e. cen¬ 
tral Kansas), and contained much gold. 
This Indian, who was known as The 
Turk (q. v.) and who served as a guide to 
Coronado’s army, became a traitor to the 
Spaniards by leading them astray on the 
buffalo plains of Texas. After 12 days’ 
journey from Pecos r. in New Mexico the 
Spaniards, then on the Staked plain, were 
informed by The Turk that Idaxa, or 
Haya, was one or two days’ journey 
toward sunrise. A party was sent for¬ 
ward to find it, and although settlements 
of Indians were found, amongst them 
Cona, occupied by the Teya (Texas?), 
Ilaxa does not appear to have been 
reached; it is therefore possible that 
Haxa, or Haya, is but another form of 
Harahey, which was far n. of where the 
Spaniards then were. Arriving at Qui¬ 
vira, Coronado learned more of Harahey, 
which was the next province beyond. 
The Spaniards did not visit it, but sent 
for their chief, named Tatarrax, who 
came with 200 warriors, “all naked, with 
bows, and some sort of things on their 
heads.” From the characteristic head¬ 
dress of The Turk and the other mem¬ 
bers of the tribe, and their proximity and 
apparent relationship with the Quivira, 
or Wichita, the Harahey people may have 
been the Pawnee, and their habitat at 
this date (1542) in the vicinity of Kansas 
r. in e. Kansas. See Brower, Quivira, 1898; 
Hodge, Coronado’s March, in Brower, 
Harahey, 1899; Winship, Coronado Ex- 
ped.,14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896. (f.w. h.) 
Araal.—Barcia. Ensayo, 21, 1723. Arache.—Jara- 
millo (after 1542) in 14th Rep. B. A.E., 588,1896. 
Arae.—Rel. del Suceso (ca. 1542), ibid., 577. Ara- 
hei.—Jaramillo, op. cit. Arche.—Castaneda (ca. 
1565) in 14th Rep. B. A.E., 503, 1896. Axa.—Go- 
mara (1553) quoted by Winship in 14th Rep. 
B. A E.. 492, 1896. Axaas.—Volney, America, 
map. 1804. Axas.—Gvissefeld, CharteNord Amer¬ 
ica, 1797. Harae.—Herrera, Historia, Vi, 206,1728. 
Harahey.—Jaramillo, op. cit., 590. Harale.—Rel 
del Suceso, op. cit. Harall.—Doc. of 1541 in Doc. 
InOd., xiv, 325,1870. Haxa. — Castaneda (ca. 1565) 
in 14th Rep B. A. E„ 505,1896. Haya.—Ibid. Hu- 
rall.—Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 51, 1889. 
Xaqueuira.—Galvano (1563) in Hakluyt Soc. Publ., 
xxx, 227, 1862 (apparently Axa and Quivira con¬ 
fused). 

Harames. A former tribe of Coahuila, 
n. e. Mexico, gathered into the mission 


BULL. 30] 


HARASGNA-HARPOONS 


533 


of San Juan Bautista. Probably of Coa- 
huiltecan stock. 

Jarames.— Morfi (1777) quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 612, 1886. Xarames.— Revillagigedo 
(1793) quoted by Bancroft, ibid., 611. 

Harasgna. A former Gabrieleno ran- 
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal.—Ried 
(1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
June 8, 1860. 

Hard-mush. See Big-mush. 

Harooka ( Nayuharu'kefi, ‘ forked 
reed.—Hewitt). A Tuscarora village in 
North Carolina in 1701.—Lawson (1709), 
Carolina, 383, 1860. 

Harpaha. A former Timucua village 
near the mouth of St Johns r., Fla.—Lau- 
donniere (1565) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., n. s., 349, 1869. 

Harpoons. Piercing and retrieving 
weapons with a movable head—probably 
the most ingenious and complicated de¬ 
vice invented by the North 
American aborigines. Before 
the natives came into contact 
with the whites, they made 
harpoons of wood, bone, wal¬ 
rus ivory, shell, stone, sinew, 
and hide. The several struc¬ 
tural parts consisted of the 
shaft, foreshaft, loose shaft, ice 
pick, head, hinge, connecting 
line, assembling line, mainline, 
hand rest, eyelet, float, and de¬ 
tachers. Besides these there 
were a multitude of accesso¬ 
ries, such as stools, decoys, ice 
scoops, and canoes. The tech¬ 
nic of ever) r part represented the 
Indian’s best skill in a number 
of handicrafts—wood working, 
bone and ivory carving, chip¬ 
ping and grinding stone; shred¬ 
ding, twisting, and braiding sin¬ 
ew ; and dressing hidesorfloats, 
canoes, and the toughest possible 
thongs or lines, and other parts. 
There are two quite different 
barbed heap varieties of harpoons, based 
harpoon; on the shape of the head—the 
western j^^bed harpoon and the toggle 
harpoon. The head of the 
barbed harpoon is attached to the shaft 
by means of a connecting line tied to the 
butt or tang of the head. The toggle head 
is attached to the line or sling by means 
of a hole bored through the body; the 
head is driven entirely into the animal, 
and, toggling under the skin, gives firm 
hold. These two types merge into each 
other, and some harpoons possess the 
characteristics of both. 

The parts of a barbed harpoon are: 
Head .—Of various materials, the spe¬ 
cific characters being the same as those 
of barbed arrows; they differ in that the 
tang fits loosely into a socket and is 
roughened, notched, or pierced for the 
hingeing or connecting line. 


Foreshaft .—That of the harpoon, as 
compared with the arrow, is heavier, 
and has a socket in front for the wedge- 
shaped, conical, or spindle- 

< shaped tang of the head. 

Shaft. —Length, from a few 
inches to many feet; thickness, 
from one-fourth of an inch to an 
inch or more; outer end spliced or 
socketed to the foreshaft; center 
of gravity furnished with hand 
rest; inner end pointed, pitted 
0 for hook of throwing stick, 
notched for a bowstring, with or 
without feathers, or furnished 
with ice pick. 

Connecting line .—Of string or 
thong rudely tied to head and 
shaft or, in the finest specimens, 
attached at one end through a 
hole in the tang, the other end 
being bifurcated and fastened 
like a martingale to the ends of 
the shaft. When the animal is 
struck by the hurled harpoon 
the head is withdrawn, the fore¬ 
shaft sinks by 
its gravity, and 
the shaft acts 
as a drag to im¬ 
pede the prog¬ 
ress of the game 
(see Nat. Mus. 

Rep. 1900, pi. 

11 ). 

The parts of 
a toggle har¬ 
poon are: 

Toggle head .— 

Consisting of 
body; blade of 
slate, chipped 
stone, ivory, or 
metal, usually 
fitted into a slit 
i in front; line 

hole or opening 
through the 
if body for the 

i' sling or leader 

\ of hide on 

« which the tog- 

V gle head hinges; 

toggle-head line grooves 
harpoon; channeled 
ESKIM0 backward from 

the line hole to protect 
the leader; barbs project¬ 
ing backward at the butt 
of the toggle head to catch 
into the flesh and make 
the head revolve 90 de¬ 
grees, forming a T with 
the line; shaft socket, a 
conoid pit in the butt of the toggle head 
to receive front end of loose shaft; and 
leader or sling, not always separate, but 



















534 


HARRISON RIVER—HASSANAMESIT 


[b. a. e. 


when so, either spliced to the main line 
or joined by an ingenious detacher, which 
is sometimes prettily carved. 

Loose shaft—A spindle-shaped piece of 
ivory socketed to toggle head and fore¬ 
shaft and attached as a hinge to the leader 
or the foreshaft. Its object 
is to catch the strain caused 
by convulsive movements 
in the game and to render 
certain the speedy detach¬ 
ment of the toggle head. 

One of the most interest¬ 
ing studies in connection 
with harpoons is environ¬ 
ment in relation to cul¬ 
ture—the play between the 
needy and ingenious man 
and the resources of game, 
materials, and tools. In e. 

Greenland is found the 
hinged toggle by the side 
of old forms; in w. Green¬ 
land a great variety of types 
from the very primitive and 
coarse to those having feath¬ 
ers of ivory and the hooks 
on the shaft. In the latter 
area are also throwing sticks 
of two kinds. On the w. 
side of Davis strait harpoons 
are heavy and coarse, show¬ 
ing contact of the natives 
with whalers, especially the 
Ungava Eskimo examples. 

There also are flat types sug¬ 
gestive of n. Asia. From 
the Mackenzie r. country 
the harpoons are small and 
under the influence of the 
white trader. The har¬ 
poons of the Pt Barrow Es¬ 
kimo are 
exhaust¬ 
ively dis¬ 
cussed by 
Murdoch, 
and those 
from Pt 
Barrow 
south¬ 
ward by Nelson. 

From Mount St Elias 
southward, within the 
timber belt, where wood 
is easily obtainable, 
harpoon shafts are 
longer, but all the parts 
are reduced to their sim¬ 
plest form. For exam¬ 
ple, the Ntlakyapamuk of British Colum¬ 
bia make the toggle heads of their two¬ 
pronged harpoons by neatly lashing the 
parts together and to the sennit lead¬ 
ers. The Makah of Washington formerly 
made the blade of the head from shell, 
but now use metal; the leader is tied to a 




Eskimo Harpoon Modified 
by contact with Whites 


large, painted float of sealskin, the shaft 
being free. The Quinaielt of Washing¬ 
ton have the bifurcated shaft, but no float. 
The Naltunne of Oregon have a barbed 
harpoon, with prongs on the blade as well 
as on the shank, while their cousins, the 
Hupa of n. California make the toggle, 
as do the Vancouver tribes, by attaching 
the parts of the head to a strip of rawhide. 

See Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 1888; 
Goddard in Publ. Univ. Cal., Am. 
Archaeol. and EthnoL, i, no. 1, 1903; 
Holm, Ethnol. Skizz., 1887; Mason in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1900, 1902; Morice in 
Trans. Can. Inst., iv, 1895; Murdoch in 
9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Niblack in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1888, 1890; Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., iii, 1877; Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., ii, Anthrop. i, 1900; Turner in 
11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (o. t. m. ) 

Harrison River. The local name for a 
body of Cowichan near kywer Fraser r., 
Brit. Col. (Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 78); 
evidently the Scowlitz, or the Chehalis, 
or both. 

Harsanykuk ( Harsanykuk , ‘saguaro cac¬ 
tus standing’). A Pima village at Saca- 
ton Flats, s. Ariz.—Russell, Pima MS., 
B. A. E., 18, 1902. 

Hartwell. An Algonquian settlement, 
containing 25 persons in 1884, in Ottawa 
co., Quebec.—Can. Ind. Aff., 1884. 

Harutawaqui (Harontaw<i’ / ko n ’, ‘He 
holds the tree.’—Hewitt). A Tuscarora 
village in North Carolina in 1701.—Law r - 
son (1709), Carolina, 383, 1860. 

Hasatch (‘ place to the east ’). A former 
summer village of the Lagunas, now a 
permanently occupied pueblo; situated 
3 m. e. of Laguna pueblo, N. Mex. 

Hasatch.—Loew in Wheeler Survey Rep., vn, 345, 
1879. Hasatyi.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 
(proper native name). Mesita.—Ind. AfT. Rep. 
1904, 256, 1905 (‘little mesa’: common Spanish 
name). Mesita Negra.—Hodge (after Pradt) in 
Am. Anthrop., iv, 346, 1891 (Span.: ‘little black 
mesa’). 

Hashkushtun {Ha'-cktic-ttin). A former 
Takelma village on the s. side of Rogue r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 
235, 1890. 

Haslinding. A small Hupa village, re¬ 
cently deserted, on the e. side of Trinity 
r., Cal., at the mouth of a creek of the same 
name, 3 m. s. of Hupa valley. ( p. e. g. ) 
Has-lintah.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 
139, 1853. Hass-lin'-tung.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., 111,73,1877. Kas-lin-ta.—McKee (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1853. 
Xaslindin.—Goddard, Life and Culture of the 
Hupa, 12, 1903. 

Hasoomale. One of the Diegueno ran- 
cherias represented in the treaty of 1852 
at Santa Isabel, s. Cal.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 133, 1857. 

Hassanamesit (‘at the place of small 
stones. ’—Gookin). A village of Christian 
Indians established in 1654 at Grafton, 
Worcester co., Mass., in Nipmuc territory. 












BULL. 30] 


HASSASEI-HATCHETS 


535 


The last of the pure Indians died about 
1825, but in 1830 there were still 14 per¬ 
sons there of mixed Indian and negro 
blood. It was the third of the praying 
towns “ in order, dignity, and antiquity.” 
Cf. Hassimanisco. (j. m. ) 

Hasanameset.—Hubbard (1680) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s, V, 544, 1815. Hasanamoset.—Gookin 
(1677) in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 447,1836. Hasa- 
nemesett.—Leverett (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
XIII, 513,1881 . Hassanamasasitt. — Salisbury (1678) , 
ibid., 526. Hassanamaskett.—Writer of 1676 in 
Drake, Ind. Chron., 17, 1836. Hassanamesitt.— 
Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., i, 184, 
1806. Hassana-misco.—Barber, Hist. Coll. Mass., 
568, 1839. Hassanamset.—Gookin (1677) in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 467, 1836. Hassanemesit.— 
Rawson (1675) in Drake, Ind. Chron., 17, 1836. 
Hassannamesit.—Gookin (1677) in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., ii, 435, 1836. Hassenemassit.—Harris 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 198, 1804. 
Hassinammisco.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk, 2, 51, 1848. 
Hassunnimesut.—Eliot quoted by Tooker, Algonq. 
Ser., x, 24, 1901. Hessamesit.—Writer of 1675 in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi, 205, 1800. Hus- 
sanamesit.—Drake, Ind. Chron., 166, 1836. 

Hassasei. A rancheria, probably Die- 
gueno, on the coast of Lower California; 
it was under the mission of San Miguel 
de la Frontera, which was in lat. 32°.— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860. 

Hassimanisco. A former Indian village 
in Connecticut, probably near Connecti¬ 
cut r. In 1764 there were only 5 Indians 
left.—Stiles (1764) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., x, 105,1809. Cf. Hassanamesit. 

Hassinunga. A tribe of the Manahoac 
confederacy living about 1610 on the 
headwaters of Rappahannock r., Va. 

Hasinninga. —Smith (1629), Virginia, i, 186, repr. 
1819. Hassaninga. —Ibid., 74. Hassiniengas. — 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816. Hassinu- 
gas.— Strachey (ra. 1612), Virginia, 104, 1849. 
Hassinungaes.— Smith, op. cit., 74. 

Hastings Saw Mill. A local name for a 
body of Squawmish of Fraser River 
agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 91 in 1898, the 
last time the name is mentioned. 

Haisting’s Saw Mills. —Can. Ind. Aff. for 1889, 268. 
Hastings Saw-mill. —Ibid., 1898,413. Hastings Saw 
Mills.— Ibid., 1886, 229. 

Hastwiana (‘he was a little man.’— 
Hewitt). A former Onondaga settle¬ 
ment on the site of the present village of 
Onondaga Valley, Onondaga co., N. Y. 

Gis-twe-ah'-na.— Morgan, League Iroq., 421, 1851. 
Has-twi'-a'-na.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Onondaga 
form). Touenho. —Denonville (1688) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 375, 1855. 

Hata. A Tsawatenok village at the 
head of Bond sd., Brit. Col. 

Ha-ta.— Dawson in Can. Geol. Surv., map, 1888. 

Hataam (‘rider’). A Diegueno ran¬ 
cheria in n. w. Lower California, near 
Santo Tomas mission; visited in 1867 by 
Wm. Gabb, who obtained a vocabulary 
published in Ztsclir. f. Ethnologie, 1877. 

Hatakfushi (‘bird’). A Chickasaw clan 
of the Koi phratry. 

Fushi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 96, 1884. 
Ha-tak-fu-shi. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. 

Hatawa. A former Luiseno village in 
the neighborhood of San Luis Rey mis¬ 
sion, s. Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 
11,1860). Possibly the same as Ehutewa. 


Hatchcalamocha. A former Seminole 
village near Drum swamp, 18 m. w. of 
New Mickasuky town; probably in the 
present Lafayette co., Fla.—Id. R. Ex. 
Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 1st sess., 27, 
1826. 

Hatchets. These implements, made of 
iron or steel, and hafted with wood, were 
an important factor in the colonization 
of northern America, and the value of 
the hatchet, as well as that of the ax, 
was soon recognized by the natives, 
who obtained these tools through trade. 
Large numbers of hatchets and axes of 
both French and English manufacture are 
obtained from aboriginal dwelling sites. 
It is not known with certainty just what 
aborigi¬ 
nal im¬ 
plements 
and weap¬ 
ons were 
supplant¬ 
ed by the 
European 
hatchet, 
but it 
probably 
super¬ 
seded, in 
large part, 

the grooved ax, the celt, and probably the 
tomahawk or war club among tribes that 
used these implements. So far as can be 
judged by the forms, the term “ hatchet” 
may be applied with equal propriety to 
both the hafted ax and the hafted celt, 
as both were wielded usually with one 
hand and were equally effectual in war 
and in the arts of peace. So far as colo¬ 
nial literature refers to the uses of these 
implements, it would appear that the 
tomahawk or club, among the eastern 
tribes, was the weapon of war par excel¬ 
lence, while the ax and the celt were em¬ 
ployed more especially in domestic work 
and for otherordinary industrial purposes 
(McCulloch). Both the hatchet and the 
war club doubtless rose on occasion to the 
dignity of ceremonial objects. 

It is clear, not only from the practice 
of the living tribes and of primitive peo¬ 
ples generally, but from traces of handles 
remaining on both stone and copper 



Common Form of Hatchet—a Sharpened 
Bowlder; Virginia 



CELT-HATCHET WITH WOODEN HANDLE, FROM A MICHIGAN 
MOUND. (DODGE COLL.) 

specimens obtained from the mounds, 
that the celt was hafted after the manner 
of the hatchet. An interesting group of 
implements showing that this was the ar- 




536 


HATCHEUXHAU-HATHAWEKELA 


[b. a. e. 


chaic method of hafting celt-like objects, 
are the monolithic hatchets in which the 
blade and the handle are carved of a sin¬ 
gle piece of stone. Several specimens of 
this type are on record; one, found by 



MONOLITHIC HATCHET OF GREENSTONE, FROM A TENNESSEE 
MOUND. LENGTH 13 1-2 IN. (jONEs) 

Joseph Jones, in Tennessee, is made of 
greenstone, and is 13 \ in. in length; 
another, from a mound in York district, 
S. C., now in the National Museum, is 
also of greenstone; the third is from Mis¬ 
sissippi co., Ark., and is owned by Mr 
Morris of that county (Thruston); the 
fourth, from a mound in Alabama, and 
now in possession of Mr C. B. Moore, 



Monolithic Hatchet of Green¬ 
stone, From a Mound at mound- 
ville, Ala. Length 11 1-2 in. 
(moore) 

of Philadelphia, is 11 \ 
in. long, of greenstone, 
and a superb example of native lapi- 
darian work. Specimens of this class are 
much more numerous in the Bahamas 
and the West Indies. As all are carefully 
finished, some being provided with a 
perforated knob or projection at the end 
of the handle for the insertion of a thong, 
it is probable that they served as maces 
or for some other ceremonial use. On the 
Pacific coast the stone war club some¬ 
times took the form of a monolithic 
hatchet (Niblack). 

The combination of the iron hatchet 
with the tobacco pipe as a single imple¬ 
ment, often called the tomahawk pipe, 
became very general in colonial and later 
times, and as no counterpart of this de¬ 
vice is found in aboriginal art, it was 
probably devised by the whites as a use¬ 
ful and profitable combination of the sym¬ 
bols of peace and war. To “take up 
the hatchet” was to declare war, and “to 
bury the hatchet” was to conclude peace. 
According to some authors the hatchet 
pipe was a formidable weapon in war, but 
in the forms known to-day it is too light 
and fragile to have taken the place of 
the stone ax or the iron hatchet. It has 
passed entirely out of the realm of weap¬ 
ons. See Axes, Calumet , Celts, Pipes, Tom¬ 
ahawks. 


Consult C. C. Jones, Antiq. So. Inds., 
1873; Jos. Jones, Aboriginal Remains of 
Tenn., 1876; McCulloch, Researches, 
1829; McGuire in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1897; 
Moore, various memoirs in Jour. Acad. 
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Morgan, 
League of the Iroquois, 1904; Niblack in 
Rep) Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Thruston, 
Antiq. of Tenn., 1897; Wilson in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1896,1898. (w. h. h.) 

Hatcheuxhau. —A former Upper Creek 
village near the site of La Grange, Troup 
co., Ga.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
Ga. map, 1899. 

Hatchichapa (‘half-way creek’). A 
former branch settlement of the Upper 
Creek town Kailaidshi, between Coosa 
and Tallapoosa rs., Ala. Hawkins states 
that the Creeks hostile to the United 
States burned it in 1813, but it was prob¬ 
ably rebuilt as it is mentioned in Parsons’ 
census list of 1832 as having 62 heads of 

1 ill 6S 

Halchuchubb. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. 
Half-way Creek.— Gatachet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 
131, 1884. Hatchchi chubba. —Parsons (1832) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. Hatche- 
chubba. —Corley (1835) in H. R. Doc. 452, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., G6, 1838. Hat-cbe chub-bau.— 
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 49, 1848. Hatchechub- 
bee. —Creek paper (1836) in H. R. Rep. 37, 31st 
Cong., 2d sess., 122, 1851. Hatch ee chub ba.— 
Abbott (1832) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 580, 
1854. Hatcheechubbas. —Simpson (1836) in H. R. 
Doc. 80, 27th Cong., 3d sess., 50, 1843. Hatchi 
tchapa. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1,131,1884. 

Hatchichapa. A towmship in the Creek 
Nation, Ind. T., near North fork of Cana¬ 
dian r. 

Hatch Point. A local nam. m a body 
of Salish of Cowichan agency, Vancouver 
id.; pop. 4 in 1896, the last time reported. 

Haitch Point. —Can. Ind. Aflf. for 1896, 433. Hatch 
Point. —Ibid., 1883, 197. 

Hatchukuni (‘ wolf ’). A Tonkawa clan. 
Hatchukuni.— Gatschet, Tonkawe MS. vocal)., B. 
A. E., 1884. 

Hathawekela. A principal division of 
the Shawnee, the name of which is of 
uncertain etymology. They emigrated 
from the S. about 1697, together with 
other Shawnee bands, and settled with 
them, partly on Susquehanna and partly 
on Allegheny r., Pa., where they are 
mentioned in 1731. Sewickley, Pa., 
probably takes its name from them. 
According to W. H. Shawnee, an edu¬ 
cated member of the tribe, the proper 
form is Ha-tha-we-ke-lah, and they con¬ 
stitute one of the original 5 principal 
divisions of the Shawnee. Together with 
the Bicowetha (Piqua) and Kispokotha 
( Kispococoke) divisions they removed 
about 1793 to what was then Spanish 
territory in e. Missouri, thence into Ar¬ 
kansas, and in 1832 into Texas, where 
with other tribes they settled for a time 
near Saline r. Being afterward driven 
out by the new Texas government they 
removed to the present Oklahoma, where 
the 3 united bands are now known as 










BULL. 30] 


HATHLETUKHISH-HAVASUPA1 


537 




Absentee Shawnee, from having been 
absent from the more recent treaties 
made with the rest of the tribe. The 
Hathawekela claim to be the “elder 
brothers” among the Shawnee, as being 
the first created of the tribe. The band 
formerly under Black Bob (q. v.) are a 
portion of this division. See Halbert and 
Shawnee in Gulf States Hist. Mag., i, no. 
6,413-418,1903. (j. m.) 

Asseekales.—Cartridge (1731) in Pa. Archives, i, 
305, 1852. Assekelaes.—-Gordon (1731) quoted by 
Brinton, Lenape Legends, 32,1885. Assiwikales.— 
Brinton, ibid. Asswekales.—Davenport (1731) in 
Pa. Archives, I, 299, 1852. Asswikales.—Gov. Pa. 
(1731), ibid., 302. Asswikalus.—Le Tort (1731), 
ibid., 300. Elder Brothers.—W. H. Shawnee, op. 
cit., 417. Ha-tha-we-ke-lah.—Ibid., 415. Ha-tha- 
we-ki-lah.—Ibid., 417. 

Hathletukhish (HaQV-t’ti-qlc'). A for¬ 
mer Yaquina village on the s. side of Ya- 
quina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 229, 1890. 

Hatsi. The extinct Earth clans of 
Laguna and San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex. 
The Earth clan of Laguna claimed to have 
come originally from Jemez and to have 
formed a phratry with the Meyo (Lizard), 
Skurshka (Water-snake), and Shruhwi 
(Rattlesnake) clans. (f. w. h. ) 

Haatsii-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 
1896 (San Felipe form: hdno = ‘people’). Hatsi- 
hano ch .—Ibid. (Lagunaform). 

Hatsinawan (hawe ‘leaves’, tsinawe 
‘marks,’ ‘paintings’, wan ‘place of’: 
‘town of the (fossil?) leaf-marks.’—Cush¬ 
ing). A ruined pueblo formerly inhab¬ 
ited by the Zuni, situated n. n. w. of 
Hawikuh and s. w. of the present Zuni 

g ueblo, N. Mex.—Cushing, inf’n, 1891. 

atschi-na-wha.—Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. 
and Archaeol., I, 101,1891 (probably identical). 

Hatteras. An Algonquian tribe living 
in 1701 on the sand banks about C. Hat¬ 
teras, N. C., e. of Pamlico sound, and 
frequenting Roanoke id. Their single 
village, Sandbanks, had then only about 
80 inhabitants. They showed traces of 
white blood and claimed that some of 
their ancestors were white. They may 
have been identical with the Croatan 
Indians (q. v. ), with whom Raleigh’s 
colonists at Roanoke id. are supposed to 
have taken refuge. (J. m. ) 

Hatarask.-Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia, 
I, 92, 1819 (place name). Hatorask.—Ibid. Hat¬ 
teras Indians.—Lawson (1714), Carolina, 108, 1860. 

Hauenayo. A clan of the Apohola 
phratry of the ancient Timucua of Flor¬ 
ida.—Pareja ( ca . 1614) quoted by Gat- 
schet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 
492, 1878. 

Haukoma. A Porno division or band 
on the w. side of Clear lake, Cal., num¬ 
bering 40 in 1851. 

How-ku-ma.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 109,1853. How-ru-ma.—McKee (1851) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 136, 1853. 

Hauwiyat (Hau-wi-yat’). A former 
Siuslaw village on or near Siuslaw r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 230, 1890. 


Hauzaurni. A former Costanoan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Cruz mission, Cal.— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Havasupai( ‘blueorgreen waterpeople’). 
A small isolated tribe of the Yuman stock 


HAVASUPAI MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST. ) 

(the nucleus of which is believed to have 
descended from the Walapai) who occupy 
Cataract canyon of the Rio Colorado in n. 


HAVASUPAI WOMAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST. ) 

w. Arizona. Whipple (Pac. R. R. Rep., 
in, pt. i, 82, 1856) was informed in 1850 
that the “Cosninos” roamed from the 















538 


HAVASUPAI 


[b. a. e. 


Sierra Mogollon to the San Francisco 
mts. and along the valley of the Colo¬ 
rado Chiquito. The tribe is a peculiarly 
interesting one, since of all the Yuman 
tribes it is the only one which has devel¬ 
oped or borrowed a culture similar to, 
though less advanced than, that of the 
Pueblo peoples; indeed, according to tra¬ 
dition, the Havasupai (or more probably 
a Pueblo clan or tribe that became incor¬ 
porated with them) formerly built and 
occupied villages of a permanent charac¬ 
ter on the Colorado Chiquito e. of the 
San Francisco mts., where ruins were 
pointed out to Powell by a Havasupai 
chief as the former homes of his people. 
As the result of war with tribes farther 
e., they abandoned these villages and 
took refuge in the San Francisco mts., 
subsequently leaving these for their pres¬ 
ent abode. In this connection it is of 
interest to note that the Cosnino caves on 
the upper Kio Verde, near the n. edge of 
Tonto basin, central Arizona, Avere named 
from this tribe, because of their supposed 
early occupancy by them. Their present 
village, composed of temporary cabins or 
shelters of wattled canes and branches 
and earth in summer, and of the natural 
caves and crevices in winter, is situ¬ 
ated 115 m. n. of Prescott and 7 m. s. 
of the Grand canyon. The Havasupai 
are well formed, though of medium 
stature. They are skilled in the manu¬ 
facture and use of implements, and 
especially in preparing raw material, like 
buckskin. The men are expert hunters, 
the women adept in the manufacture of 
baskets which, Avhen lined with clay, 
serve also as cooking utensils. Like the 
other Yuman tribes, un til affected by white 
influences during recent years, their cloth¬ 
ing consisted chiefly of deerskin and, for 
the sake of ornament, bot h men and women 
painted their faces Avith thick, smooth 
coatings of tine red ocher or blue paint 
prepared from wild indigo; tattooing and 
scarification for ornament Avere also some¬ 
times practised. In summer they subsist 
chiefly on corn, calabashes, sunflower 
seeds, melons, peaches, and apricots, 
which they cultivate by means of irriga¬ 
tion, and also the wild datila and mescal, 
in winter principally upon the flesh of 
game, Avhich they hunt in the surround¬ 
ing uplands and mountains. While a 
strictly sedentary people, they are un¬ 
skilled in the manufacture of earthen Avare 
and obtain their more modern implements 
and utensils, except basketry, by barter 
with the Hopi, with Avhich people they 
seem always to have had closer affilia¬ 
tion than with their Yuman kindred. 
Their weapons in war and the chase Avere 
rude clubs and pikes of hard wood, boAvs 
and arrows, and, formerly, slings; but fire¬ 
arms have practically replaced these more 


primitive appliances. The gentile system 
of descent or organization seems to be ab¬ 
sent among the Havasupai, their society 
consanguineally being patriarchal. They 
are polygamists, the number of wives a 
man shall have being limited apparently 
only by his means for supporting them. 
Betrothals by purchase are common, and 
divorces are granted only on the ground 
of unfaithfulness. The Havasupai occupy 
a reserAction of about 38,400 acres, set 
aside by Executive order in 1880 and 
1882. Their population Avas 300 in 1869, 
233 in 1902, 174 in 1905. (h. w. h.) 

Agua Supais. —Hodge, Arizona, 169, 1877.^ Ah- 
Supai.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 80,1884. Ak'-ba- 
su'-pai. —Gilbert, Yuma vocab., B. A. E., 64, 1878 
(Walapai form). Akuesu-pai. —Gatschet in Ztschr. 
f. Ethnol., xv, 127, 1885. Ava-Supies. —Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N-. Mex., 547, 1889. Avesupai.—Gat¬ 
schet, op. cit., 123. Casinos. — Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 
91, 1870. Casnino. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 
27,1863. Co-a-ni-nis. —Powell in Scribner’s Mag., 
213, Dec. 1875. Cochineans.— Emory, Recoil., 96, 
1848 (trans. ‘dirty fellows’). Cochnichnos. — 
Bartlett, Pers. Narr., ii, 178, 1854. Coponinos. — 
Cushing in Atlantic Mo., 544, Oct. 1882. Coho- 
ninos. —Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 80, 1884. Coj- 
nino. —Sitgreaves, Expedition, 15, 1853 (name by 
which a Havasupai called himself). Cojonina. — 
Scott in Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 52,1893. 
Cominas. —Vargas (1692), cited by Davis, Span. 
Conq. N. Mex., 370, 1869. Cominos. —Browne, 
Apache Country, 290, 1869 (mentioned as a branch 
of Gila Apache). Coninas. —Rivera, Diario y Der- 
rotero, leg. 950,1736. Conninos. —Pumpelly, Across 
America and Asia, map, 1870. Cosninas.— Garc6s 
(1776), Diary, 472, 1900. Cosninos. —Whipple, Pac. 
R. R. Rep., in, pt.l, 82, 1856. Cuesninas. —Garc6s 
(1776), Diary, 445, 1900 (erroneously said to be 
Maricopa name for Mohave). Cuismer.— Orozco y 
Berra, Geografia, 59, 1864 (misquoting Garc6s). 
Cuisnurs.— Garc£s (1776), Diary, 446, 1900. Culis- 
nisna. —Ibid., 473 (erroneouslysaid to be applied 
to Mohave). Culisnurs. —Ibid, (erroneously said 
tobeapplied to the Mohave). Habasopis. —Gibbs, 
MS. map of Colorado tribes, B. A. E., no. 282. Ha- 
ha-vasu-pai. —James, Inds. Painted Desert, 195,199, 
1903 (‘people of the blue Avater’). Havasopi.— 
Thomas, MS., no. 602, B. A. E., 1868. ’Havasua 
Pai.— Ewing in Great Divide, 203, Dec. 1892. 
Ha-va-su-pai. —Cushing in Atlantic Mo., L, 374, 
Sept. 1882. Hava-su-pay. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, IV, 366, 1892. Havesu-pai.— Ewing, 
op. cit. ’Havisua Pai. —Ibid. Jabesua.— Garc&s 
(1776), Diary, 340, 1900. Java Supais.— Baxter in 
Harper’s Mag., June 1882. Javeusa.— Escudero, 
Noticias de Chihuahua, 228, 1834 (misquoting 
Garc£s). Kochninakwe. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. 
A., 300, 1885 (Zuni name: ‘Pinon nut people’?). 
Kochonmo. — Ibid., 259. Ko'-hni'-na. —Gilbert, 
Yuma vocab., B. A. E., 64, 1878 (Hopi name). 
Kohonino.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 19, 1905 
(Hopi name). Kokoninos. —Gatschet in Zeitschr. 
f. Ethnol., xviii, 97, 1886. Konino. —Ibid., xv, 
124,1883(Hopiname), Ko^-nina' kwe. —ten Kate, 
Synonomie, 7, 1884 (Zuni name, borrowed from 
the Hopi). Koxniname.— Ibid. (Hopi name). 
Kuchnikwe. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 300, 1885 
(Zuni name: ‘Pinon nut people’?). Kuhni 
kwe.— Cushing in Atlantic Mo., L, 362, Sept. 1882 
(Zufii name; kwe=' people’). Ku’h-nis.— Escu¬ 
dero, Noticias de Chihuahua, 228, 1834 (mis¬ 
quoting Garc£s, 1776). Ku^ni-kue.— Gatschet in 
Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., xv, 124, 1883 (Zuni name). 
Nation of the Willows. —Cushing in Atlantic Mo., 
L, 362, 541, 1882. Navesu-pai.— Gatschet, op. cit., 
xv, 127, 1883 (a Walapai form). People of the Wil¬ 
lows.— Powell in 3d Rep. B. A. E., xix, 1884. 
Supais.— Cushing in Atlantic Mo., 544, Oct. 1882 
(after “ArizonaMiner”). Supies.— Hinton, Hand¬ 
book to Arizona, 353,1878. Supis.— Orozco y Berra, 
Geografia, 59, 386, 1864 (erroneous]v given as 
part of Faraon Apache). Suppai.— Ind, Aff. Rep., 


BULL. 30] 


HAVERSTRAW-HAWIKUH 


539 


lxxxi, 1886. Tonto Cosnino. —Mollhausen, Tage- 
buch, II, 196, 1858. Yabipais Jabesua. —Garc6s 
(1776), Diary, 414, 1900. Yavai Suppai. —Arthur 
(1882) in Ind Aff. Rep., 297, 1886. Yavipai Jab- 
esua.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, 
112,1890 (after Garc6s). Yavipai javesua. —Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 41, 1864 (after Garc£s). Yuva- 
Supai. —Corbusier in Am. Antiq., 276, Sept. 1886. 

Haverstraw (Dutch: haverstroo, ‘ oat- 
straw’). The name applied by the 
Dutch to a small tribe or band (according 
to Ruttenber, a division) of the Unami 
Delawares, formerly living on the w. bank 
of the lower Hudson, in Rockland co., 
N. Y. The name they applied to them¬ 
selves is lost, but it may have been Re- 
weghnome or Rumachenanck. 

Haverstraw.— Van Couwenhoven (1664) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., XIII, 364, 1881. Haverstroo. — De 
Laet (1633) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson 
R., 71,1872. Rewechnongh. —Treaty of 1664 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 375, 1881 (‘Rewechnongh 
or Haverstraw ’). Rumachenanck. —Treaty of 1660, 
ibid., 147 (apparently given as the tribal name). 

Hawai. A former Diegueno rancheria 
under the Dominican mission of San 
Miguel de la Frontera, w. coast of Lower 
California, about 30 m. s. of San Diego, 
Cal. (a. s. g.) 

Hawaiian influence. The establishment 
of the whale and seal fisheries of the n. 
Pacific coast led to the presence in that 
region of sailors and adventurers of the 
most diverse races and nationalities, 
many of whom came into more or less 
lasting contact with the natives of the 
country. Toward the middle of the 19th 
century (Hale, Oregon Trade Language, 
19, 1890) the Hawaiian language was 
spoken by about 100 Sandwich Islanders 
employed as laborers about Ft Vancou¬ 
ver, Wash. Doubtless some intermix¬ 
ture of these with the Indians took 
place. In 1891 there lived among the 
Ivutenai an Indian nicknamed Kanaka. 
Murdoch (9th Rep. B. A. E., 55, 1892) 
notes that several Hawaiian words have 
crept into the jargon as used by the west¬ 
ern Eskimo and white whalers and traders 
who come into contact with them, and 
one or two of these words have even 
come to be employed by the Pt Barrow 
Eskimo among themselves; but there is 
no evidence that the Chinook jargon con¬ 
tains a Hawaiian element. Swanton sug¬ 
gests that it is barely possible that the 
Haida custom of tattooing may have come 
from some Polynesian island, as its intro¬ 
duction is always said by the natives to 
be recent. Whether the idea of a ladder 
made of a chain of arrows, which occurs 
among the myths of Polynesians and the 
people of the N. W. coast, could have had 
a similar origin may be doubted, but it 
is nevertheless possible. The theory of 
Polynesian-American contact has been 
maintained by Ratzel, Schultz, and others, 
stress being laid on resemblances in art as 
exemplified by clubs, masks, etc., and in 
other ways. (a.f. c.) 


Hawikuh. (hence ‘leaves’, wiku ‘gum’). 
A former pueblo of the Zuni and one of 
the Seven Cities of Cibola of early Spanish 
times, situated about 15 m. s. w. of the 
present Zuni pueblo, N. Mex., near the 
summer village of OjoCaliente. Hawikuh 
was seen in 1539 by Fray Marcos de Niza, 
who viewed it from an adjacent height a 
few days after the murder, by the Zuni of 
Hawikuh, of Estevanico, the former negro 
companion of Cabeza de Vaca. Fray 
Marcos referred to it by the name of Aha- 
cus. In the following year Francisco 
Vasquez Coronado visited the pueblo 
with his advance guard, and as its inhab¬ 
itants offered resistance, the village was 
stormed and captured, most of its people 
fleeing for safety to Taaiyalone, a mesa 
e. of the present Zuni. Coronado referred 
to Hawikuh, under the name Granada, 
as the chief pueblo of Cibola, containing 
about 200 houses, and from there wrote 
his account of the journey to the viceroy 
Mendoza, Aug. 15, 1540. A Franciscan 
mission was established at Hawikuh in 
1629, at which time the pueblo contained 
about 110 houses. Owing to Navaho or 
Apache depredations in Oct., 1670, when 
many of the Zuni as well as the mis¬ 
sionary of Hawikuh were killed, the 
pueblo was abandoned and never after¬ 
ward permanently occupied. It is said 
that the roof timbers of the old church 
at Zuni, which was erected about 1705, 
were those used previously in the Hawi¬ 
kuh chapel. A portion of the adobe 
walls of the latter building were still 
standing until about 1894, when the 
adobes were taken by the Indians to Ojo 
Caliente and there used in the construc¬ 
tion of new houses. See Mindeleff in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 80, 1891; Bandelier (1) 
Final Rep., pts. i, n, 1890, 1892; (2) 
Doc. Hist. Zuni Tribe, 1892; Cushing in 
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., vm, 142, 1895. (f. w. h.) 

Abacu.— Heylyn, Cosruog., 968, 1703. Abacus.— 
Blaeu, Atlas, xii, first map, 1667. Aguas Calien- 
tes.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 133,1890 
(Ha-ui-cu, or). Aguascobi. —Zarate- Salmeron 
(ca . 1629) quoted by Bandelier in Mag. West. Hist., 
663, 1886. Aguico.— Cushing in Millstone, ix, 20, 
Feb. 1884 (misquoting Coronado). Aguicobi.— 
Onate (1598) in Doc.In^d., xvi,133,1871. Aguscobi.— 
Ibid., 132. Ahacus. —Ni?a (1539) in Hakluyt, Voy., 
443, 1600. Apacus.— Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 
128,1869 (misquoting Marcos de Niza). Aquico.— 
Espejo (1583) in Doc. In6d., xv, 118, 181, 1871. 
Auuico.— MS. of 1676 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 338, 1892. Avicu.— Cushing in 
Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vil, 156, 1890 
(given as an early Spanish form). Cibola. —Cas¬ 
taneda (ca. 1565) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 483, 1896. 
Granada.— Coronado (1540) in Hakluyt, Voy., ill, 
449,451,1600. Granade.— Gomara, Hist. Gen., 467b, 
1606. Granado.— Purchas, Pilgrimes, 648, 1613; 
V, 853,1626. Granata.— Coronado (1540) in Ramu- 
sio, Nav. et Viaggi, 361, 363,1565. Grenada.— Simp¬ 
son in Smithson. Rep. 1869,330,1871. Grenade.— 
Sanson, map l’Am^rique, 28, 1657. Hahauien.— 
Peet in Am. Antiq., xvii,352, 1895 (misprint). Ha 
Huico. —Zarate-Salmeron (1629) cited by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 154,1889 (Havico or). Haicu.— 


540 


HAWMANAO-HEALTH AND DISEASE 


[B. A. E. 


Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 326, 1892 (mis¬ 
print). Ha-ui-ca.— Bandelier quoted in Arch. 
Inst. Rep., v, 43, 1881. Ha-ui-cu.— Bandelier in 
Revue d’Ethnog., 202, 1886. Havico. —Zarate-Sal- 
meron (ca. 1629), Relacion, in Land of Sunshine, 
47, Dec. 1899. Ha-vi-cu.— Bandelier in Mag. West. 
Hist., 668, Sept. 1886. Ha wi-k’hu.— Cushing in 
Millstone, x. 4, Jan. 1886. Ha-wi-k’uh.— Ibid., 19, 
Feb. 1884. Ha-wi-k’uh-ians. —Ibid., 20 (=the peo¬ 
ple of Hawikuh). Ha-wi-kuhs. —Powell, 2d Rep. 
B. A. E., xxvii, 1883. Hay-way-ku. —Fewkes in 
Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., I, 100, 1891. 
Hay-we-cu. —Ibid., map. Jahuicu. —Escalante 
(1778) quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, 257, 1892. Kuikawkuk. — Peet in Am. Antiq., 
XVII, 352, 1895 (misprint). La Concepcion de Agui- 
co. —Vetancurt (1693) in Teatro Mex., 320, 1871. 
Nueua Granada.— Galvano (1563) in Hakluyt Soc. 
Publ., XXX, 227, 1862. Nueva Granada. — Barcia, 
Ensayo, 21, 1723. Ojo-caliente. —Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., hi, 370, 1788 (doubtless identical). Rosa 
Hawicuii. —Villasenor misquoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 252, 1889 (confused with Abi- 
quiu). Santa Rosa de Hauicui. —Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., II, 355, 1787. Santa Rosa Havicuii. — Villa¬ 
senor, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 413, 1748. Tzibola. — 
Mota-Padilla (1742), Hist. Nueva Espana, 111, 1871. 
Zibola.— Perea, Verdadera Rel., 4, 1632. 

Hawmanao ( Xdmando ). A gens of the 
Quatsino, aKwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. for 1895, 329. 

Hayah ( Ild-yah ). The Snake elan of 
the Pecos tribe of New Mexico.—Hewett 
in Am. Anthrop., vi, 439, 1904. 

Head deformation. See Artificial head 
deformation. 

Heakdhetanwan ( ITe-ay^e ta n wa n/ ). An 
ancient Osage village on Spring cr., a 
branch of Neosho r., Indian Ter.—Dor¬ 
sey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 

Health and Disease. There is little evi¬ 
dence to show what diseases prevailed 
among the Indians n. of Mexico prior to 
the advent of white people. The tra¬ 
ditions of the Indians, the existence 
among them of elaborate healing rites of 
undoubtedly ancient origin, their plant- 
lore, in which curative properties are 
attributed to many vegetal substances, and 
the presence among them of a numerous 
class of professed healers, honored, feared, 
and usually well paid, would seem to indi¬ 
cate that diseases were not rare, but actual 
knowledge and even tradition as to their 
nature are wanting. The condition of the 
skeletal remains, the testimony of early 
observers, and the present state of some 
of the tribes in this regard, warrant the 
conclusion that on the whole the Indian 
race was a comparatively healthy one. It 
was probably spared at least some of the 
epidemics and diseases of the Old World, 
such as smallpox and rachitis, while other 
scourges, such as tuberculosis, syphilis 
(precolumbian), typhus, cholera, scarlet 
fever, cancer, etc., were rare, if occurring 
at all. Taking into consideration the 
warlike nature of many of the tribes and 
the evidence presented by their bones 
(especially the skulls), injuries, etc., 
particularly those received by offensive 
weapons, must have been common, al¬ 
though fractures are less frequent than 
among white people. 


At the time of the discovery the In¬ 
dians on the whole were probably slowly 
increasing in numbers. Frequent wars, 
however, had a marked effect in limiting 
this increase. Since their contact with 
whites most of the tribes have gradually 
diminished in strength, while some of 
the smaller tribes have disappeared en¬ 
tirely. Very few tribes have shown an in¬ 
crease or even maintained their former 
numbers. The most remarkable example 
of steady gain is the Navaho tribe. The 
causes of decrease were the introduction 
of diseases (particularly smallpox), the 
spread of alcoholism, syphilis, and especi¬ 
ally tuberculosis, destructive wars with 
the whites, and increased mortality due to 
changes in the habits of the people through 
the encroachment of civilization. Dur¬ 
ing recent years a slow augmentation in 
population has been noticed among a 
number of tribes, and as more attention 
is paid to the hygienic conditions of the 
Indians, an increase comparable to that 
in whites may be expected in many sec¬ 
tions. The least hopeful conditions in 
this respect prevail among the Dakota 
and other tribes of the colder northern, 
regions, where pulmonary tuberculosis 
and scrofula are very common. (See 
Population.) 

While preserving much of their robust 
constitution, the Indians—particularly 
those of mixed blood—are at present 
subject to many disorders and diseases 
known to the whites, although the pure 
bloods are still free from most of the 
serious morbid conditions and tendencies 
due to defective inheritance. They suffer 
little from insanity, idiocy, and rachitis. 
Cretinism is exceedingly rare, and gen¬ 
eral paresis, with a large number of 
serious nervous affections, has not yet 
been recorded among them. Diseases of 
the heart, arteries, and veins, serious 
affection of the liver and kidneys, 
as well as typhoid and scarlet fever are 
infrequent. Congenital malformations 
are very rare, although it is commonly 
heard among the Indians themselves that 
they do sometimes occur, but that the 
afflicted infants are not allowed to live. 
Fractures, and diseases of the bones in 
general, as well as dental caries, are less 
frequent than among the whites. There 
is considerable doubt whether cancer 
occurs in any form. Venereal diseases, 
while predominant among the more de¬ 
graded Indians, are more or less effectu¬ 
ally guarded against by others. 

The most common disorders of health 
now experienced among Indians gener¬ 
ally are those of the gastro-intestinal 
tract, which in infancy are due to im¬ 
proper feeding and particularly to the 
universal consumption of raw, unripe 
fruit and vegetables, and in later life to 
the lack of or overindulgence in food, 


BULL. 30] 


HEASHKOWA-HEHLKOAN 


541 


irregular meals, the preference for fat, 
crudely prepared food, and, recently, the 
misuse of inferior baking powders and 
excessive use of coffee. While most of 
the disorders thus introduced are of a 
minor character, others, particularly in 
infants, are frequently fatal. Other more 
common diseases are various forms of 
malaria, bronchitis, pneumonia, pleurisy, 
and measles in the young. Whooping 
cough is also met with. Inflammation of 
the conjunctivEe is common and often leads 
to ulceration, opacity, and defect in or 
even total loss of vision. Defective hear¬ 
ing is occasionally found in the aged, and 
there are rare instances of deaf mutes. 
Eczema, favus, and acnae are among the 
more ordinary affections of the skin. 
Tuberculosis of the lungs, and glandular 
tuberculosis, or scrofula, are frequent in 
many localities and are especially com¬ 
mon among the reservation Indians in 
the colder parts of the United States, 
particularly in North Dakota, South Da¬ 
kota, and Montana, due to their present 
mode of life. They live in small, insan¬ 
itary hovels, which in cold weather are 
ill ventilated and often overheated and 
crowded, while their dress is heavier than 
formerly, their daily life less active, their 
food changed, and, what is most impor¬ 
tant, there is complete ignorance of the 
contagious nature of consumption. Some 
of these conditions, however, are being 
gradually bettered. 

Goiter is widely distributed, though 
seldom prevalent; it is found particularly 
among some bands of the Sioux, and it oc¬ 
curs also with some frequency among the 
Menominee, Oneida, Crows, and White 
Mountain Apache. Albinism occurs 
among a number of the tribes; the cases, 
however, are quite isolated, except among 
the Hopi and to a lesser degree the Zuni. 
In 1903 there were 12 cases of albinism in 
the former and 4 in the latter tribe, all of 
the complete variety. Vitiligo is much 
more scattered, but the cases are few. 
Diseases and functional disturbances pe¬ 
culiar to women, including those of the 
puerperium, are much less common among 
Indians than among the white women of 
this country. Of diseases peculiar to old 
age, senile arthritis, which affects particu¬ 
larly the spine, and occasional dementia, 
are found. Senility proceeds slowly in 
the pure-biood Indian, and the number 
of individuals above 80 years of age, ac¬ 
cording to census returns (which, how¬ 
ever, should be regarded with caution), 
is relatively greater than among the 
whites. See Anatomy, Physiology. 

Consult Bancroft, Native Races (with 
bibliographical references), i-v, 1882; 
Hrdlicka, Physiological and Medical Ob¬ 
servations Among the Indians (with bib¬ 
liography), Bull. 33, B. A. E., 1906; Jesuit 


Relations, Thwaites ed., i-lxxiii, 1896- 
1901; Josselyn, New-England’s Rarities 
(1672), repr. 1865; Reports of the Com¬ 
missioner of Indian Affairs; Report on 
Indians, Eleventh U. S. Census (1890), 
1894; Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, i-vi, 
1851-57. (a. h.) 

Heashkowa. A prehistoric pueblo of the 
Red Corn (Kukinish-yaka) clan of Acoma, 
situated at the foot of a mesa about 2 m. s. e. 
of the present Acoma pueblo, N. Mex. 
According to tradition it was built by the 
Red Corn clan when the tribe entered its 
present valley from the n. and settled at 
Tapitsiama. It is said that when the vil¬ 
lage was abandoned some of the inhabi¬ 
tants joined the main body of the tribe 
while the remainder migrated southward. 

(f. w. h.) 

Hebron. A Moravian Eskimo mission, 
founded in 1830, on the e. Labrador coast, 
lat. 58°.—Hind., Lab. Penin., ii, 199,1863. 

Hecatari. A former Nevome pueblo of 
Sonora, Mexico, with 127 inhabitants in 
1730; situated probably at or near the 
junction of the w. branch of the Rio 
Yaqui with the main stream, about lat. 
28° 30'. Orozco y Berra classes it as a 
pueblo of the upper Pima. 

Hecatari.—Rivera (1678) quoted by Bancroft, No. 
Mex. States, i, 613, 1884. Hecatazi.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 347, 1864. 

Heda-haidagai (XVdaxa'-idAga-i, ‘peo¬ 
ple living on the low ground’). A sub¬ 
division of the Stawas-haidagai, a Haida 
family of the Eagle clan; named from the 
character of the ground on which their 
houses stood in the town of Cumshewa. 
The town chief belonged to this subdivi¬ 
sion.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 273, 1905. 

Hediondo (Span.: ‘fetid’). AHuichol 
rancheria about 2\ m. w. of Ratontita, in 
Jalisco, Mexico.—Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mex., ir, 271, 1902. 

Rancho Hediondo.—Lumholtz, ibid. 

Hegan. According to Pike (N. H. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., hi, 56, 1832) some English 
near Kittery, York co., Me., were at¬ 
tacked in 1706 “by their good friends, the 
Hegans.” This may mean some relatives 
of Hogkins or Hawkins, a chief of the 
hostile Pennacook, formerly living in that 
vicinity. It can hardly mean the Mohe- 
gan, who were not hostile and who did 
not live in the neighborhood. (i. m. ) 

Hehametawe ( HVha’mVtawe , ‘descend¬ 
ants of Hametawe’). A subdivision of 
the Laalaksentaio, a Kwakiutl gens.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 332. 

Hehlkoan (‘peopleof Foam’). A Tlin- 
git division at Wrangell, Alaska, belong¬ 
ing to the Wolf clan. They are named 
from a place called Foam (Xel), close to 
Loring, where they lived before joining 
the Stikine. 

Chrelch-kon.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 120, 1885. 
Qetlk-oan.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 25, 
1889, Xel koan—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 


542 


HEILTSUK-HEMISPHERES 


[B. A. E. 


Heiltsuk ( He'-ilt-mq ). A dialect of 
Kwakiutl embracing the Bellabella (after 
whose native name it is called), the China 
Hat, Somehulitk, Nohunitk, and Wikeno. 
The number of Indians speaking the dia¬ 
lect was about 500 in 1904. (j. r. s.) 

Heitotowa. A Choctaw town in the 
Choctaw Nation, Ind. T., situated at the 
later Sculleville. 

Hei-to-to-wee.—Mollhausen, Journey, 1,32,1858. 

Hekhalanois (Hexala'nois). The ances¬ 
tor of a Koskimo gens, after whom it 
was sometimes called.—Boas in Peter- 
manns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. 

Hekpa. The Fir clan of the Honau 
(Bear) phratry of the Hopi. 

He'k-pa.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 38,1891. 

Helapoonuch. A former Chumashan 
village situated about 15 m. from Santa 
Barbara mission, Cal.—Father Timeno 
(1856) quoted bv Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 4, 1860. 

Helicopile. A village, named after a 
chief, on lower St Johns r., Fla., in 1564, 
probably belonging to Saturiwa’s con¬ 
federacy. 

Helicopile.—Laudonniere (1567) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n. s., 349, 1869. Hilicopile.—Gourgue 
(1568), ibid., 2d s., II, 280, 1875. 

Helikilika. An ancestor of a gens of the 
Nakomgilisala tribe of Kwakiutl.—Boas 
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. 

Hellelt. A Salish tribe on Chimenes 
r., s. w. Vancouver id., speaking the Co- 
wichan dialect; pop. 28 in 1904. 

Hal-alt.—Can. Ind. Aff., 308,1879. Haltalt —Ibid., 
79,1878. Hel-alt.—Ibid.', 1883, pt. I, 190. Hellal — 
Ibid., 1892, 313. Hel-lalt.—Ibid., 1889, 269. Hel¬ 
lelt.—Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 164. Qala'ltq.—Boas, MS., 
B. A. E., 1887. 

Hello (Hel-lo'). A former Chumashan 
village on Mooris id., w. of Santa Bar¬ 
bara, Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Helshen (‘sandy beach’; lit., ‘soft to 
the foot’). A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col. 
Helcen.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475, 1900. 

Heluta. A former Cholovone village 
in San Joaquin co., Cal., near San Joa¬ 
quin r.—Pinart, Cholovone MS., B. A. E., 
1880. 

Hematite. An iron ore much used by the 
native tribes for implements, ornaments, 
and small objects of problematical use. 
It is found in many parts of the country 
and in great abundance in the Iron 
Mountain district of Missouri and in the 
Marquette region of Michigan. 11 occurs 
as a massive ore, as nodules, and in other 
forms, distributed through rocks of vari¬ 
ous classes, and is usually dark in color, 
showing various shades of gray, brown, 
and red. The specular varieties are gen¬ 
erally rather gray, and have a metallic 
luster. The red, earthy varieties, when 
compact, are known as red chalk, and 
when much disintegrated and pulveru¬ 
lent, as red ocher. They were, and are, 


much used as paint by the aborigines, 
and small quantities, either in lumps or 
as powder, are commonly found in ancient 
graves, placed there for personal embel¬ 
lishment in the future existence. The 
highly siliceous varieties are often very 
hard, heavy, and tough, and make excel¬ 
lent implements. They were used espe¬ 
cially in the manufacture of celts, axes, 
scrapers, etc., and for the rudely shaped 
hammers and sledges that served in min¬ 
ing work, as in the iron mines at Leslie, 
Mo. (Holmes). Many of the celts and 
celt-like implements are quite small, and 
in some cases probably served as amulets. 
Grooved axes of this material are of some¬ 
what rare occurrence, but objects of prob¬ 
lematical use, such as cones, hemispheres, 
and plummets, are common, and on ac¬ 
count of their high finish, richness of 
color, and luster, are much prized by col¬ 
lectors. Hematite objects are found in 
mounds and on dwelling sites in the 
middle Mississippi valley region, in the 
Ohio valley, and extending into e. Ken¬ 
tucky and Tennessee to w. North Caro¬ 
lina, and to a limited extent in the S., in 
the Pueblo country, and on the Pacific 
coast. A small, well-shaped figure of 
this material, representing a bird, and 
neatly inlaid with turquoise and white 
shell, is among the collections obtained 
by Pepper from the Pueblo Bonito ruin, 
New Mexico. Hematite is not always 
readily distinguishable from limonite 
(which is generally yellowish or brownish 
in tint), and from some other forms of 
iron ore. See Mines and Quarries. 

References to hematite objects are 
widely distributed throughout the liter¬ 
ature of American archeology. Among 
others the following authors may be con¬ 
sulted: Douglass in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., viii, 1896; Fewkes(l) in 17th Rep. 
B. A. E., 730, 1898, (2) in 21st Rep. 
B. A. E., 77, 1903; Fowke in 13th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896; Holmes in Smithson. Rep. 
1903, 1904; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 
1900; Pepper in Am. Anthrop., vii, 195, 
1905. (w. H. H.) 

Hembem. A former Maidu village on 
the e. side of North fork of American r., 
about 6 m. s. e. of Colfax, Placer co., 
Cal.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Hemispheres, Spheres. Small objects, 
usually of polished stone, the use of which 
has not been fully determined; they are 
therefore classed with problematical ob¬ 
jects. The more typical forms, found in 
the mounds, are often of hematite and, like 
the cones, rarely exceed a few ounces in 
weight. Hemispheres are comparatively 
numerous, but spheres referable to this 
group are rare. Hammerstones and 
stones used as club-heads (see Clubs, 
Hammers) are often spherical, but usually 


BULL. 30] 


HEMPTOWN-HEPOWWOO 


543 


they are not well finished, and occa¬ 
sionally large cannonball-like stones are 
found which can not be properly classed 
with the smaller polished objects. The 
base of the hemispheres is flat, rarely 
slightly hollowed out, and varies from a 
circle to a decided ellipse, while the ver¬ 
tical section departs considerably from a 
true semicircle. Typical objects of this 
group' are most plentiful in the middle 
Ohio valley. It is surmised that they 
served in playing some game, as talismans 
or charms, or for some special shaman- 
istic purpose. According to Grinnell 
(inf’n, 1906) small balls of stone are still 
used by some Plains tribes in a game. 
Little girls roll them on the ice in winter, 
trying to move a small stick resting on 
the ice in front of the opposing party, 
perhaps 20 ft distant. If the stick is 
touched and moved, the 
side which rolls the ball 
may roll it again, and a 
point is counted. If the 
stick is not moved, the ball 
hemisphere of hema- is rolled by one of the op- 
tite; mvest Virginia. p 0 gi n g party who endeav¬ 
ors to mo ve the stick which 
rests on the ice in front of her opponent. 
A small stone sphere was used by the 
Pima of Arizona in a kicked ball game, 
and numerous small spheres, usually of 
soft stone, are found in prehistoric ruins 
in Salt river valley of the same territory. 

Consult Rau in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 
1877; Fowke (1) in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896, (2) Archseol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; 
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., vnr, no. 1, 
1906; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls. 1900; 
Cushing in Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. 
Am., vn, 178, 1890. (w. h. h.) 

Hemptown (translation of the native 
name, GatibVltVyi). A former Cherokee 
settlement on a creek of the same name, 
near the present Morganton, Fannin co., 
Ga.—Moonev in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 519, 
1900. 

Henaggi. An Athapascan tribe or band 
residing, according to Powers (Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., hi, 65,1877), on Smith r., Cal. 
A treaty was made with them Aug. 17, 
1857. It is said they were exceedingly 
hostile to the neighboring bands to whom 
they were related, but this hostility was 
probably only a temporary feud. They 
are seemingly extinct. 

Engnas.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 219, 1857 (possibly 
identical). Hanags.— Taylorin Cal. Farmer, June 
8, 1860. Haynaggi.— Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 665, 1878. Haynargee.— Gibbs, letter to 
Hazen, B. A. E., 1856. Hay-narg-ger.— A. W. Ham¬ 
ilton, MS. vocab., B. A. E. He-nag-gi.— Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 65, 1877. He-nar- 
ger. —Hamilton, vocab., op. cit. 

Henakyalaso ( He'nakyalaso ). An an¬ 
cestor of a gens of the Kwakiutl tribe 
Tlatlasikoala, after whom it was some¬ 
times called.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 
pt. 5, 131, 1887. 


Hendrick. A Mohawk chief, son of The 
Wolf, a Mohegan, and a Mohawk woman; 
often called King Hendrick. With many 
of his men he participated in the cam¬ 
paign against the French in 1755, and not- 
withstandingthe strong tendency of Brad- 
dock’s defeat in that year to draw the In¬ 
dians to the side of the French, Hendrick, 
at the request of Gen. Johnson, joined the 
English army, which met 2,000 French 
under Gen. Dieskau at Lake George, N. Y. 
At the battle which there took place, 
Sept. 8, 1755, Hendrick and many of his 
followers were killed. He was then less 
than 70 years of age. 

Henicohio. Mentioned, in connection 
with Puaray, apparently as a pueblo of 
the Tigua in New Mexico in 1598.—Onate 
(1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 115, 1871. 

Heniocane. A former tribe in s. Texas, 
encountered by Fernando del Bosque in 
1675 and said to number 178, including 
65 warriors. They were probably related 
to the Coahuiltecan tribes. 

Geniocane.—Fernando del Bosque (1675), in Nat. 
Geog. Mag., xiv, 346, 1903. 

Henry, William. See Gelelemend. 

Hens. Seemingly derived from a New 
England Indian cognate of Algonkin, 
Chippewa, and Cr eeens, ‘a shell,’ especi¬ 
ally a small shell, with which may be 
compared the Natick anna ( ?anns ) and 
the Abnaki als ( l = n ). The early Eng¬ 
lish colonists of New England by prefix¬ 
ing h formed hens, which they applied to 
the quahaug, quahock, or poquahock, ‘a 
little thick shellfish ’ ( Venus mercena- 
ria ), from an interior portion of the shell 
of which the New England Indians manu¬ 
factured suckauhock, ‘black or purple 
beads, ’ commonly called purple wampum. 
See Wampum. (j. n. b. h.) 

Henuti. The extinct Cloud clan of the 
pueblo of Sia, N. Mex. 

Hen'-na-ti.—Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 19, 
1894. He'niiti-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 
349, 1896 (hdno= l people’). 

Henya. A Tlingit tribe on the w. 
coast of Prince of Wales id., Alaska, be¬ 
tween Tlevak narrows and Sumner strait; 
pop. 300 in 1869, 500 in 1881, 262 in 1890, 
and about the same in 1900. Their chief 
town is Klawak; other towns are Shakan 
and Tuxican. The social divisions of the 
tribe are Ganahadi, Hlkoayedi, Kakoshit 
tan, Kuhinedi, Shunkukedi, Takwanedi, 
and Tanedi. (j. r. s.) 

Anega.—Mahony (1869) in Sen. Ex. Hoc. 68, 41st 
Cong., 2d sess., 19, 1870. Genuvskoe—Veniami- 
noff, Zapiski, II, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Hanaga.—Kane, 
Wand. N. A., app., 1859. Hanega.—11th Census, 
Alaska, 158, 1890. Hanieas.—Borrows in H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 197. 42d Cong., 2d sess., 4, 1872 (probably 
identical). Henja-kon.—Krause,Tlinkitlnd.,Ill, 
1885. Henne-ga-kon.—Ibid.,120. Hennegas.—Ibid., 
111. Henya qoan.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 
1904. 

Hepowwoo. A former Luiseno village 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey 
mission, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860. 



544 


HERALDRY-HESHOTA AYAHLTONA 


[b. a. e. 


Heraldry. Among the tribes of the great 
plains, and perhaps of other sections, there 
existed a well-defined system of military 
and family designation comparable with 
the heraldic system of Europe. It found 
its chief expression in the painting and 
other decoration of the shield and tipi, 
with the body paint and adornment of 
the warrior himself, and was guarded by 
means of religious tabu and other cere¬ 
monial regulations. The heraldic tipis, 
which might number one-tenth of the 
whole body, usually belonged to promi¬ 
nent families by hereditary descent. The 
shield belonged to the individual warrior, 
but several warriors might carry shields 
of the same origin and pattern at the 
same time, while so far as known the her¬ 
aldic tipi had no contemporary duplicate. 
Both tipi and shield were claimed as 
the inspiration of a vision, and the de¬ 
sign and decoration were held to be 
in accordance with the instructions im¬ 
parted to the first maker by the pro¬ 
tecting spirit of his dream. The tipi is 
commonly named from the most notable 
feature of the painting, as the ‘ buffalo 
tipi,’ ‘star tipi,' etc. The shield was 
more often known by the name of the 
originator and maker of the series, but 
certain more noted series were known 
as the ‘buffalo shield,’ ‘bird shield,’ 
‘sun shield,’ etc., the ‘medicine’ or pro¬ 
tecting power being believed to come 
from the buffalo, bird, or sun spirits re¬ 
spectively. Shields of the same origin 
were usually but not necessarily retained 
in the possession of members of the fam¬ 
ily of the original maker, and handed 
down in time to younger members of the 
family, unless buried with the owner. A 
certain price must be paid and certain 
tabus constantly observed by the owner 
of either shield or tipi. Thus the heir 
to a certain heraldic tipi in the Kiowa 
tribe must pay for it a captive taken in 
war, while those who carried the bird 
shield were forbidden to approach a 
dead bird, and were under obligation on 
killing their first enemy in battle to 
eat a portion of his heart. Those of the 
same shield generally used a similar body 
paint and headdress, pony decorations, 
and war cry, all having direct reference 
to the spirit of the original vision, but no 
such regulation appears to have existed 
in connection with any tipi. The flag 
carried on the upper Columbia by the 
followers of the prophet Smohalla is an 
instance of the adaptation of Indian sym¬ 
bolism to the white man’s usage (Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896). 

Among the Haida and some other tribes 
of the N. W. coast, according to Swan ton 
and other authorities, is found the germ 
of a similar system. Here, in many cases, 
the clan totem, or perhaps the personal 


manito of the individual, has evolved into 
a crest which persons of the highest rank, 
i. e. of greatest wealth, are privileged to 
figure by carving or painting upon their 
totem poles, houses, or other belongings, 
tattooing upon their bodies, or painting 
upon their bodies in the dance, on pay¬ 
ment of a sufficient number of ‘ ‘ potlatch ’ ’ 
gifts to secure recognition as chiefs or 
leading members of the tribe. The privi¬ 
lege is not hereditary, the successor of the 
owner, usually his sister’s son, being 
obliged to make the same ceremonial 
payment to secure the continuance of the 
privilege. (j. M.) 

Hermho ( Herm'-ho , ‘once’). A Pima 
village on the n. side of Salt r., 3 m. 
from Mesa, Maricopa co., s. Ariz.—Rus¬ 
sell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 1902. 

A'mu A'kimult.—Russell, ibid. 

Hero Myths. See Mythology , Religion. 

Herring Pond. A former settlement on 
a reserve established for Christian Indians 
in 1655 at Herring Pond, Plymouth co., 
Mass. It is probably identical with Co- 
massakumkanit, mentioned by Bourne in 
1674, and the Indians there seem to have 
been considered a distinct tribe. In 1825 
there were but 40 left, and these were of 
mixed blood. (j. m.) 

Heshokta (‘ancient town of the cliffs’). 
A ruined pueblo, formerly inhabited by 
the Zuni, on a mesa about 5 m. n. w. of 
Zuni pueblo, N. Mex. Cf. Shopakia. 
Heshohtakwin.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 291, 
1885 (Heshoktakwin, or). Heshokta.—Cushing, 
Zuni Folk Tales, 365,1901. Hesh-o-ta-thlu-al-la>— 
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., i, 111, 
1891. 

Heshota Ayahltona (‘ancient buildings 
above’). The ruins of a group of stone 
houses on the summit of Taaiyalana, or 
Seed mtn., commonly called Thunder 
mtn., about 4 m. s. e. of Zuni pueblo, N. 
MOx. This mesa has been a place of refuge 
for the Zuni at various periods since they 
have been known to history, Coronado 
mentioning it as such, although not by 
name, in 1540. In 1632, after having 
killed their first missionary, the Zuni 
fled to the heights, remaining there until 
1635. The ruined pueblo now to be seen 
on the summit was built probably about 
1680, on the site of the ancient fortifica¬ 
tions alluded to by Coronado, as a refuge 
against Spanish invasion during the 
Pueblo revolt of that year, when the vil¬ 
lages in the valley below—those that re¬ 
mained of the Seven Cities of Cibola— 
were abandoned. The tribe doubtless 
occupied this stronghold uninterruptedly 
for at least 12 years during the Pueblo 
revolt, being found there by Vargas in 
1692. In 1703 the Zuni again fled to 
their mesa village, after having killed 4 
Spanish soldiers. This time they re¬ 
mained until 1705, when they returned 
to the valley and began to build the pres- 


BULL, ao] 


HESHOTA HLUPTSINA-HIABU 


545 


ent Zuni pueblo on a part of the site of 
Halona. The ruins of Heshota Ayahl- 
tona have been mistakenly regarded by 
some writers as the ancient Cibola, hence 
are often noted on maps as Old Zuni. 
See Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 89, 
1891; Bandelier (1) in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
in, 134, 1890; iv, 335, 1892, (2) Doc. Hist. 
Zuni, in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., 
hi, 1892; Cushing, Zuni Creation Myths, in 
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Winship, Coro¬ 
nado Exped., in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896. 

(f. w. h. ) 

He-sho-ta A'-yathl-to-na. — Cushing, inf’n, 1891. 
Mesa de Galisteo. —Vargas (1692) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 200,1889 (referring to the 
mesa). Old Tuni.— Wallace, Land of Pueblos, 238, 
1888 ^(misprint). Old Zuni. —Common map form. 
Taa-ai-yal-a-na-wan.— Cushing, inf’n, 1891 (lit. 
‘abiding place above on mountain-of-all-seed’). 
Taaiya'hltona ‘Hluelawa. — Cushing in 13th Rep. 
B. A. E., 429, 1896 (lit. ‘towns-all-above of-the- 
seed-all’) . Toillenny.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo 
Inds., 127, 1893 (refers to the mesa). To-yo-a-la- 
na— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, pt. 1, 
134, 1890. Zuni Vieja.— Domenech, Deserts, I, 211, 
1860. 

Heshota Hluptsina ( Hesliota- l lilup-tsina, 
‘ancient village of the yellow rocks’). 
A prehistoric ruined stone pueblo of the 
Zuni, situated between the “gateway” 
and the summer village of Pescado, 7 m. 
e. of Zuni pueblo, N. Mex. (f. w. h. ) 

Heshota Ihluctzina. —Bandelier in Rev. d’Ethnog., 
200,1886 (misprint). Hesh-o-ta-sop-si-na. —Fewkes 
in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., I, map, 1891. 
Heshota Thluc-tzinan.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, IV, 333, 1892. Heshotathlu’ptsina. — ten 
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 291, 1885. Village of the 
Yellow Rocks. —Cushing, Zuni Folk Tales, 104, 
1901. 

Heshota Imkoskwin (‘ancient town sur¬ 
rounded by mountains’). A ruined pueblo 
near Tawyakwin, or Nutria, anciently 
occupied by the northern clans of the 
Zuni.—Cusliing, inf’n, 1891. 

He-sho-ta Im'-k‘os-kwi-a. —Cushing, inf’n, 1891 
(another form). Heshota Im-quosh-kuin.— Ban¬ 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 340,1892. Hesho¬ 
ta Im-quosh-quin.— Bandelier in Rev. d’ Ethnog., 
202, 1886. Hesh-o-ta-inkos-qua. —Fewkes in Jour. 
Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., I, 100, 1891. Heshota 
Mimkuosh-kuin.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, 340,1892. Hesho-taMimquoshk-kuin. — Ibid., 329. 

Heshota TJhla ( Heshotci-u‘hla , ‘ancient 
town of the embrasure’). A prehistoric 
ruined stone pueblo of the elliptical type, 
supposed to be of Zuni origin; situated at 
the base of a mesa on Zuni r., about 5 m. 
w. of the Zuni summer village of Ojo Pesca¬ 
do, or Heshotatsina, N. Mex. So named, 
according to Cushing, because it was em¬ 
braced by hills, and by the turn of a 
northern trail. (f. w. h.) 

Heshota TJthia. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, 22, 1892 (misprint). Hesho-ta U-thla. —Ibid., 
329. Heshotau’thla. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 
291, 1885. 

Heshque. The principal village of the 
Hesquiat (q. v.), on Hesquiat harbor, 
Vancouver id.—Can. Ind. Aff., 264, 1902. 

Hespatingh. Avillageinl657, probably 
belonging to the Unami Delawares, and 
apparently in n. New Jersey (Deed of 
1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 393, 


1883). A clue to the locality is given by 
Nelson (Inds. N. J., 124, 1894), who re¬ 
cords Espatingh, or Ispatingh, as the 
name of a hill back of Bergen, or about 
Union Hill, in 1650. 

Hesquiat. A Nootka tribe on Hesquiat 
harbor and the coast to the westward, 
Vancouver id.; pop. 162 in 1901, 150 in 
1904. Their principal village is Heshque. 
Esquiates.— Jewitt, Narr., 37, 1849. He'ckwiath. — 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. 
Hesh-que-aht.— Can. Ind. Aff., 188, 1883. Hesqui- 
aht. —Ibid., 131, 1879. Hesquiat.— Ibid., pt. 2, 158, 
1901. Hishquayaht. —Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 1868. 
Hosh-que-aht. —Can. Ind. Aff., 186, 1884. 

Heuchi. A Yokuts tribe formerly living 
in the plains on or s. of Fresno r., n. cen¬ 
tral Cal., and on Fresno reserve in 1861, 
when they numbered 18. 

Hawitches.— Barbour etal. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess , 61, 1853. Haw-on-chee.— 
Ind. Com’r Jour. (1851), ibid., 61. Heuchi. — A. L. 
Kroeber, inf’n, 1906 (correct form). Hou-et- 
chus.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. How-ach-ees.— Barbour 
(1852),op.cit.,252. How-a-chez. —Lewisinlnd.Aff. 
Rep.,399,1857. Howchees. —Ind. Aff.Rep.,219,1861. 
How-ech-ee. — Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 
1899. How-ech-es. —McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 74, 1853. 

Heudao ( Xe-uda'o , ‘the village that 
fishes toward the south’). A Haida 
town of the Kaidju-kegawai on the e. side 
of Gull pt., Prevost id., Queen Charlotte 
ids., Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
277, 1905. 

Hevhaitanio (Hevhaita'nio, ‘hair men’, 
‘fur men’; sing., Hevhaitdn). A princi¬ 
pal division of the Cheyenne, q. v. 
Hairy-Men’s band. —G. A. Dorsey in Field Columb. 
Mus. Pub. no. 99, 13, 1905 (also Hairy-Men band). 
Hev'a tan i u. —Grinnell, Social Org. Cheyennes, 
136, 1905(trans. ‘hairy men’). Hev'-hai-ta-ni-o. — 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862 
(‘hairy people’). Hevhaita'nio. —Mooney, inf’n, 
1905 (see p. 254 of this Handbook). Hewa-ta'- 
niuw’.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1025,1896. 

Heviqsnipahis ( Ileviqs'-n¥’ pahis, ‘ aortas 
closed, by burning’; sing., Heirlqs'-nVpa ). 
A principal division of the Cheyenne, q. v. 
Aorta band —G. A. Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. 
Pub., no. 99, 13,1905. Evi'sts-um' pahis. —Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1025,1896 (it does not mean 
‘smoky lodges’, as stated in the Clark MS). 
Heviqs-nUkpahis. —Mooney, inf’n, 1905 (see p.254 
of this Handbook). I vlsts tslnih’ pah.— Grinnell, 
Social Org. Cheyennes, 136, 1905 (trans. ‘small 
wind-pipes’). We heeskeu (chien).— Clark (1804) 
in O’rig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 190, 1904. 

Hewut. The village of the Umpqua on 
upper Umpqua r., Oreg. 

Hay-woot. — Milhau, Umpqua Val. MS. vocab., 
B. A. E. He'-wut. —Milhau, Hewut MS. vocab., 
B. A. E. 

Hia (‘ band of Cree ’). A former Arikara 
band under chief Cherenakuta, or Yellow 
Wolf. 

Hi'-a.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol., 357, 1862. 

Hiabu. A tribe met by De Leon, in 
company with the Hapes, Jumenes (Ju- 
mano), and Mescales, near the Rio 
Grande, not far from the present Laredo, 
Tex., in 1696. It was probably a Coahuil- 
tecan tribe. 

Xiabu. —De Leon (1696) in Texas Hist. Ass. Quar., 
VIII, 205, 1905. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-35 



546 


HI AMONEE-HICKER AU 


[b. a. e. 


Hiamonee. A former Seminole village 5 
m. from the Georgia boundary, on the 
e. bank of Okloknee r., probably on the 
present L. Lamony, Leon co., Fla. 
Hiamonee.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 
1st sess., 27,1826. 

Hianagouy. Mentioned by Joutel (Mar- 
gry, Dec., hi, 409, 1878) as a tribe living 
probably in e. Texas in 1687, and hostile 
to the Kadobadacho. 

Hiantatsi. Mentioned by Joutel (Mar- 
gry, D6c., hi, 409, 1878) as a tribe living 
probably in e. Texas in 1687, and hostile 
to the Kadohadacho. 

Hiaqua. Shell money and ornaments, 
composed of strings of dentalia, used by 
Indians of the n. Pacific coast. This 
word, which has been variously spelled 
haiqua , hioqua , hiqua, hykwa , iokwa, ioqua , 
etc., and even Iroquois , is derived from 
the name for dentalium in the Chinook 
jargon. (a. f. c. ) 

Hiatam ( Hi'-a-tam , ‘sea-sand place,’ 
from Hiakatdk ). A Pima village n. of Mari¬ 
copa station on the S. P. R. R., s. Ariz.— 
Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 18, 1902. 

Hiawatha ( Haio nl hwa i 'tha\ ‘he makes 
rivers’). A name and a title of a chief¬ 
tainship hereditary in the Tortoise clan of 
the Mohawk tribe; it is the second on the 
roll of federal chieftainships of the Iro¬ 
quois confederation. The first known 
person to bear the name was a noted re¬ 
former, statesman, legislator, and magi¬ 
cian, justly celebrated as one of the found¬ 
ers of the League of the Iroquois, the Con¬ 
federation of Five Nations. Tradition 
makes him a prophet also. He probably 
flourished about 1570, a. d., and was the 
disciple and active coadjutor of Dekana- 
wida. These two sought to bring about 
reforms which had for their object the 
ending of all strife, murder, and war, and 
the promotion of universal peace and 
well-being. Of these one was the regu¬ 
lation to abolish the wasting evils of in- 
tratribal blood-feud by fixing a more or 
less arbitrary price—10 strings of wam¬ 
pum, a cubit in length—as the value of 
a human life. It was decreed that the 
murderer or his kin or family must offer 
to pay the bereaved family not only for 
the dead person, but also for the life of 
the murderer who by his sinister act had 
forfeited his life to them, and that there¬ 
fore 20 strings of wampum should be 
the legal tender to the bereaved family 
for the settlement of the homicide of a 
co-tribesman. By birth Hiawatha was 
probably a Mohawk, but he began the 
work of reform among the Onondaga, 
where he encountered bitter opposition 
from one of their most crafty and remorse¬ 
less tyrants, Wathatotarho (Atotarho). 
After three fruitless attempts to unfold 
his scheme of reform in council, being 
thwarted by the craft of his formidable 
antagonist (who for revenge destroyed his 


opponent’s daughters), Hiawatha left the 
Onondaga and, exiling himself, sought 
the aid of the Mohawk and other tribes. 
But, meeting with little success among the 
former, he continued his mission to the 
Oneida, who willingly assented to his 
plans on condition that the Mohawk 
should do the same. The Mohawk, the 
Cayuga, and the Oneida finally formed a 
tentative union for the purpose of persuad¬ 
ing the Onondaga to adopt the plan of 
confederation, and the latter accepted it 
on condition that the Seneca should also 
be included. A portion of the Seneca 
finally joined the confederation, whereon 
the Onondaga, through Wathatotarho, 
accepted the proposed union. As the 
Onondaga chieftain was regarded as a 
great sorcerer, it was inferred that in this 
matter he had been overcome by superior 
magic power exercised by Hiawatha and 
Dekanawida,for they had brought Watha¬ 
totarho under the dominion of law and 
convention for the common welfare. 
Hence in time the character of Hiawatha 
became enveloped in mystery, and he was 
reputed to have done things which prop¬ 
erly belong to some of the chief gods of 
the Iroquois. In this mystified form he 
became the central figure of a cycle of in¬ 
terrelated legends. Longfellow has made 
the name of Hiawatha everywhere famil¬ 
iar, but not so the character of the great 
reformer. Schoolcraft, in his Algic Re¬ 
searches, embodied a large number of leg¬ 
ends relating to Chippewa gods and demi¬ 
gods, and, while compiling his Notes on 
the Iroquois, J. V. H. Clark communicated 
to him this cycle of mythic legends mis¬ 
applied to Hiawatha. Charmed with the 
poetic setting of these tales, Schoolcraft 
confused Hiawatha with Manabozho, a 
Chippewa deity, and it is to these two 
collections of mythic and legendary lore 
that the English language owes the charm¬ 
ing poem of Longfellow, in which there 
is not a single fact or fiction relating to the 
great Iroquoian reformer and statesman. 
For further published information see 
Hale (1) Iroquois Book of Rites, (2) A 
Lawgiver of the Stone Age; Hewitt in 
Am. Anthrop., Apr. 1892. ( j. n. b. h. ) 

Hicaranaou. An ancient Timuquanan 
village in n. Florida.—DeBry, Brev. Nar., 
ii, map, 1591. 

Hiccora, Hiccory. See Hickory. 

Hichakhshepara (‘eagle’). A subgens 
of the Waninkikikarachada, the Bird gens 
of the Winnebago. 

Hi-tca-qce-pa-ra.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
240, 1897. 

Hichucio. A subdivision or settlement 
of the Tehueco, probably inhabiting the 
lower Rio Fuerte or the Fuerte-Mayo di¬ 
vide, in n. w. Sinaloa, Mex.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 58, 1864. 

Hickerau. A small Santee village on a 
branch of Santee r., S. C., in 1701. 


BULL. 30] 


HICKORY-H1DAT8A 


547 


Black house.—Lawson (1714), Hist. Carolina, 45, 
1860 (so called by traders). Hickerau.—Ibid. 

Hickory. A walnut tree belonging to 
any one of several species of the genus 
Hicoria. The word is spelled by early 
writers in a great variety of ways: po- 
hickery (Farrar, 1653), pekickery (Shrig- 
ley, 1669), peckikery, pokickery, hickorie, 
hiccora, hiccory, hickory (1682), etc. 
Capt. John Smith (Hist. Va., ii, 26, 
1624) describes pawcohiccora, a food of 
the Algonquian Indians of Virginia, as a 
preparation of pounded walnut kernels 
with water. From the cluster words paw¬ 
cohiccora, etc., transferred by the whites 
from the food to the tree, has been de¬ 
rived hickory. Derivative words and 
terms are: Hickory-borer (Cyllenepicta), 
hickory-elm ( Ulmus racemosa) , hickory- 
eucalyptus ( Eucalyptus punctata), hick¬ 
ory -girdler ( Oncideres cingulatus), hick¬ 
ory-head (the ruddy duck), hickory nut 
(the nut of the hickory, specifically of 
Hicoria ovata or H. ladniosa ), hickory-oak 
(Quercus chrysolepis) , hickory-pine (Finns 
halfouriana and P. pungens ), hickory pole 
(a Democratic party emblem), hickory 
poplar ( Liriodendron tulipifera ), hickory- 
shad (the gizzard-shad), hickory shirt (a 
coarse cotton shirt). As an adjective the 
word hickory took on the senseof firm, un¬ 
yielding, stubborn, as applied to religious 
sectarians, members of a political party, 
etc. Gen. Andrew Jackson was called 
“ Old Hickory.” In Waterloo co., On¬ 
tario, according to W. J. Wintemberg, the 
German residents call a Pennsylvania 
German a Hickory, possibly in reference 
to their fellows in Pennsylvania having 
voted the Jackson ticket. (a. f. c. ) 

Hickory Indians. A small band for¬ 
merly occupying a village near Lancaster, 
Pa. (Day, Penn., 397, 1843). Probably 
a part of the Delawares. 

Hickory Log. A former Cherokee set¬ 
tlement on Etowah r., a short distance 
above Canton, Cherokee co., Ga.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 545, 1900. 

Wane'-asuii'tlunyl.—Mooney, ibid, (‘hickory foot- 
log place’: native name). 

Hickorytown. A former Munsee and 
Delaware village, probably about East 
Hickory or West Hickory, Forest co., Pa. 
On account of the hostility of the western 
tribes the Indians here removed in 1791 
to the Seneca and were by them settled 
near Cattaraugus, N. Y. (j. m. ) 

Hickory town.—Procter(1791) in Am.State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., I, 154, 1832. Munsee settlement.—Ibid., 
153. 

Hictoba. One of the 5 divisions of the 
Dakota recorded bv Pachot (Margry, 
D6c., vi, 518,1886) about 1722. Uniden¬ 
tified. 

Scioux de la chasse.—Ibid. 

Hidatsa. A Siouan tribe living, since 
first known to the whites, in the vicinity of 
the junction of Knife r. with the Missouri, 
North Dakota, in intimate connection with 
the Mandan and Arikara. Their language 


is closely akin to that of the Crows, with 
whom they claim to have been united un¬ 
til some time before the historic period, 
when the two separated in consequence of 
a quarrel over the division of some game, 
the Crows then drawing off farther to the w. 

The name Hidatsa, by which they now 
call themselves, has been said, w ith doubt¬ 
ful authority, to mean ‘willows,’ and is 
stated by Matthews to have been origi¬ 
nally the name only of a principal village 
of the tribe in their old home on Knife r. 
(see Elahsa). It probably came to be used 
as the tribe name, after tne smallpox epi- 



HIDATSA (CHESHAKHADAKHI, LEAN WOLF) 


demic of 1837, from the consolidation of 
the survivors of the other two villages 
with those of Hidatsa. By the Mandan 
they are known as Minitarf, signifying 
‘ they crossed the water, ’ traditionally said 
to refer to their having crossed Missouri r. 
from the e. The Sioux call them He- 
waktokto, said to mean ‘dwellers on a 
ridge,’ but more probably signifying 
‘spreading tipis,’ or ‘tipis in a row,’ the 
name by which they are known to the 
Cheyenneand Arapaho. The sign gesture 
in each case would be nearly the same 
(Mooney). The Crows call them Amashi, 
‘ earth lodges, ’ and they are now officially 







548 


HIDATSA 


[B. a. e. 


known as Gros Ventres (q. v.), a name 
applied also to the Atsina, a detached 
tribe of the Arapaho. 

According to their own tradition the 
Hidatsa came from the neighborhood of a 
lake n. e. of their later home, and identi¬ 
fied by some of their traditionists with 
Mini-wakan or Devils lake, N. Dak. They 
had here the circular earth-covered log 
house, in use also by the Mandan, Ank¬ 
ara, and other tribes living close along 
the upper Missouri, in addition to the 
skin tipi occupied when on the hunt. 
Removing from there, perhaps in conse¬ 
quence of attacks by the Sioux, they 
moved s. w. and allied themselves with 
the Mandan, who then lived on the w. 
side of the Missouri, about the mouth of 
Heart r. The three tribes, Hidatsa, Man¬ 
dan, and Arikara were all living in this 
vicinity about 1765. From the Mandan 
the Hidatsa learned agriculture. Some 
time before 1796 these two tribes moved 
up the river to the vicinity of Knife r., 
where they were found by Lewis and 
Clark in 1804, the Hidatsa being then in 
three villages immediately on Knife r., 
while the Mandan, in two villages, were 
a few miles lower down, on the Missouri. 
The largest of the three villages of the 
tribe was called Hidatsa and was on the 
n. bank of Knife r. The other two, Ama- 
tiha and Am ihami, or Mahaha, were on 
the s. side. The last named was occupied 
by the Amahami (Ahnahaway of Lewis 
and Clark), formerly a distinct but closely 
related tribe. In consequence of the in¬ 
roads of the Sioux they had been so far 
reduced that they had been compelled to 
unite with the Hidatsa, and have long 
since been completely absorbed. The 
three villages together had a popula¬ 
tion of about 600 warriors, equivalent to 
about 2,100 souls. Of these the Amahami 
counted about 50 warriors. There was no 
change in the location of the villages until 
after the terrible smallpox epidemic of 
1837, w T hich so greatly reduced the Indian 
population of the upper Missouri, and in 
consequence of which the survivors of the 
three villages consolidated into one. In 
1845 they, and about the same time the 
remnant of the Mandan also, moved up 
the river and established themselves in a 
new village (see Hidatsati) close to the 
t rading post of Ft Berthold, on the n. bank 
of the Missouri and some distance below 
the entrance of the Little Missouri, in 
North Dakota. In 1862 the Arikara 
moved up to the same location, the three 
tribes now occupying a reservation of 
884,780 acres on the n. e. side of the Mis¬ 
souri, including the siteof the village. In 
1905 the Hidatsa (Gros Ventres) were offi¬ 
cially reported to number only 471. 

Early writers describe the Hidatsa as 
somewhat superior intellectually and 
physically to their neighbors, although 


according to Matthews this is not so evi¬ 
dent in later days. In home life, reli¬ 
gious beliefs and customs, house building, 
agriculture, the use of the skin boat, and 
general arts, they closely resembled the 
Mandan with whom they w T ere associated. 
Their great ceremony was the Sun dance, 
called by them Da-hpi-ke, which was ac¬ 
companied with various forms of torture. 
Their warriors were organized into vari¬ 
ous military societies, as is the case with 
the Plains tribes generally. 

Morgan (Anc. Soc., 159, 1877) gives a 
list of 7 Hidatsa “gentes,” which were 
probably really original village names, or 
possibly society names, viz: Mit-che-ro'- 
ka (‘knife’), Min-ne-pa-ta (Gvater’), Ba- 
ho-lia/-ta*( ‘ lodge’), Seech-ka-be-ruh-pa/- 
ka (‘prairie chicken’), E-tish-sho'-ka 
(‘hill people’), Ah-nah-ha-niF-me-te (an 
unknown animal), E-ku'-pti-be-ka (‘bon¬ 
net’). The list of “bands” given by Cul¬ 
bertson (Smithson. Rep. 1850,143,1851) is 
really a list of military societies, viz: Fox, 
Foolish Dog, Old Dog, Bull, and Black- 
tailed Deers. 

Consult Clark, Ind. Sign Lang., 1885; 
Coues, Exped. Lewis and Clark, 1893; 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i-viii, 1904- 
05; Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
1867; Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hi¬ 
datsa, 1877; Maximilian, Trav., 1843; Mc¬ 
Gee in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897. (j. m. ) 

A-gutch-a-ninne. —Tanner,Narr., 58,1830. A-gutch- 
a-ninne-wug.— Ibid, (‘the settled people’: Chip¬ 
pewa name). A-me-she'. —Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol., 402, 1862 (‘people who live in earth 
houses’: Crow name). Ar-me-shay. —Anon. MS. 
Crow vocab., B. A. E. Belantse-etea.— U. S. Ind. 
Treaties, 354, 1826. Belautse-etea. —Cass (1834) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 609,1853. E-nat'-za.— 
Morgan in N. A. Rev., 47, Jan. 1870 (national 
name; cf. Ehartsar). Gi-aucth-in-in-e-wug. —War¬ 
ren in Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 178, 1885 (‘men of 
the olden time’: Chippewa name). Gi-aucth- 
in-ne-wug. —Ibid., 261. Grosventres.— For various 
forms of this name applied to the Hidatsa, see 
Gros Ventres. Hedatse.— Hamilton in Trans. 
Nebr. Hist. Soc., I, 75, 1885. He-wa'-kto-kta. — 
Cook, Yankton, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 184, 1882. 
Hewaktokto. —Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol., 
36, 1877 (Dakota name). He-war-tuk-tay.— Cor¬ 
liss, Lacotah MS. vocab., B. A. E., 106, 1874. 
Hidatsa. —Matthews. Ethnog. and Philol., 3, 1877 
(own name). Hidatza.— Baxter in Harper’s Mag., 
June, 1882. Hidhatsa.— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 829, 
1882. Manetores.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 75, 
1849. Maniataris. —Du Lac, Voy. dans La., 225, 
1805. Manitaries. —Maximilian, Trav., vii, 1843. 
Mannatures. —Cumming in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 34th 
Cong., 1st sess., 8, 1856. Menetare. —Lewis and 
Clark, Discov., 26, 1806. Me-ne-ta-rees.— Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i, 249, 1904. Mene- 
tarres.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 25,1806. Me ne 
tar res.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), I, 248, 
1904 (also Mene tar res). Metaharta. —Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., I, 121, 1814. Miditadi.— Matthews, 
Ethnog. and Philol., 193,1887. Mimetari.— Meigs 
in Smithson. Rep. 1867, 414, 1868. Minataree.— 
Clark and Cass in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117, 20th Cong., 
2d sess., 98, 1829. Minatarees. —Bradbury, Trav., 
109, 1817. Minatares.— Brown, West. Gaz., 215, 
1817. Minatories.— Dougherty in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
276, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 16, 1838. Minetaire.— 
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Minetarees. —Lewis 
and Clark, Exped., I, 163, 1817. Minetares.— Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), I, 324,1904. Mine- 


BULL. 30] 


HI DATS ATI—HILLIS HAD JO 


549 


tari.— Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man., v, 409, 1847. 
Minetaries.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., n, 
125,1836. Minetarre.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, 
map, 1814. Minetarries. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark (1805), I, 283, 1904. Minitare. —Latham in 
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 1,160,1848. Minitarees.— 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), I, 216, 1904. 
Minitares. —Ibid., 10. Minitari. —Brownell, Ind. 
Races N. Am., 466, 1853 (Mandan name). Mini- 
tarres.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 13, 1904. 
Minnetahrees.— Tanner, Narr., 316,1830. Minne- 
tahse. —Ibid., 325 (misprint). Min-ne-ta-re. —Long, 
Exped. Rocky Mts., II, lxx, 1823. Minnetarees. — 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, 115, 1814. Minne¬ 
tarees Metaharta. —Ibid., 131. Minnetarees of the 
Willows. —Ibid. Minnetares of the Knife R. — 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i,283, 1904. 
Minnetaroes.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 164, 
1817. Minnetarres. —Warren, Nebr. and Ariz., 50, 
1875. Minnitarees. —Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. 
Mo. Val., 420, 1862. Minnitarees Metaharta. — 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., 1 ,131,1814. Minnitarees 
of the Willows. —Ibid. Minnitaris. —Am. Nat., 829, 
1882. Minntaree. —Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., in, 
65, 1885. Moennitarris. —Maximilian, Trav., 337, 
1843. Quehatsa. —Brown, West. Gaz., 213, 1817. 
Stationary Minetares. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. An¬ 
tiq. Soc., ii, 125, 1836 (as distinguished from 
“Minitarees of Fort de Prairie,” i. e., the Atsi- 
na). Wa-nuk'-e-ye'-na. —Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 326, 1862 (‘lodges planted to¬ 
gether’: Arapaho name). Wetitsaan. —Mat¬ 
thews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 36,1877 (Ank¬ 
ara name). Winetaries. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark (1804), 1,220, 1904. Wi-tets'-han.— Hayden, 
op. cit.,357 (‘well-dressed people’: Ankara name). 

Hidatsati (from Ilidatsa and ati: ‘dwel¬ 
ling of the Hidatsa Indians’). The Hi¬ 
datsa village formerly at Ft Berthold, 
N. Dak. In 1872 it contained 71 Ankara 
and 104 Hidatsa and Mandan dwellings. 
See Elahsa. 

Berthold Indian Village.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. 
A. E., pi. cxviii, 1899. Hi da tsa ti.—Matthews, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Ilidatsa, 211, 1877. 

Hidlis Hadjo. See Hillis Hadjo. 

Highahwixon. One of several tribes 
displaced by the whites in 1651 from their 
homes in Charles and St Mary cos., Md., 
and given a tract at the head of the Wi- 
comoco. They were probably Conoy.— 
Bozman, Maryland, ii, 421, 1837. 

High Tower Forks. A former Cherokee 
settlement mentioned in a document 
of 1799 (Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 144, 
1887). It was probably one of the places 
called Etowah {Flawed), q. v. 

Higos {Indios de los Higos, Span.: ‘Fig 
Indians’). A tribe of s. Texas, so named 
by Cabezade Vaca in 1528 (Smith trails., 
84, 1851) from their custom of subsisting 
on the prickly pear, or tuna, in its season. 
Cabeza de Vaca states that they counted 
the seasons by the ripening of the fruits, 
the “dying” or (according to Smith) the 
biting of the fish, and by the appearance of 
certain constellations. Nothing is known 
of their ethnic relations. (a. c. f. ) 

Higtiguk. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Hihagee. An unidentified Lower Creek 
town mentioned in a census list of 1833.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. 

Hihakanhanhanwin (‘ women the skill of 
whose teeth dangles’). A band of the 
Brule Teton Sioux. 


Hi-ha karjhaghaq wig.—Dorsey (after Cleveland) 
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Hi-ha ka n ha n ha Q 
wi n .—Ibid. 

Hihames. A former tribe of Coahuila, 
n. e. Mexico, which was gathered into the 
mission of El Santo Nombre de Jesus 
Peyotes when it was refounded in 1698. 
This tribe probably belonged to the 
Coahuiltecan family. 

Gijames.—Morfi (1777) quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 611, 1886. Hijames.—Revillagigedo 
(1793), ibid. Xijames.—Ibid. 

Hilakwitiyus ( Ilil-d-kwi-U-yus '). A for¬ 
mer Siuslaw village on or near Siuslaw r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 230, 1890. 

Hilksuk. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id,, Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Hillabi (pron. hV-la-pi). A former Up¬ 
per Creek town near the present Ashland, 
Clay co., Ala., in the “central district” 
between Coosa and Tallapoosa rs., on 
Koufadi cr., a branch of Ilillabee cr. 
Most of the Hillabi people had settled 
before 1799 in the 4 villages called Hlan- 
udshiapala, Anatichapko, Istudshilaika, 
and Uktahasasi. In the vicinity of Hillabi 
town its inhabitants, with other “Red 
Sticks,” or hostiles, were vanquished by 
Jackson’s army, Nov. 18, 1813, when 316 
of them were killed or captured and their 
town devastated. (a. s. g.) 

Halibee.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. iv, 54,1848. Halle- 
bac.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776 (on w. bank 
of Loucushatchee [Tallapoosa] r.). Hallibees.— 
Drake,Ind.Chron., 198,1836. Hi’-la-pi.—Gatschet, 
Creek. Migr. Leg., i, 131,1884 (proper pronuncia¬ 
tion). Hillaba.—Bartram, Travels, 462, 1791 (on a 
branch of Coosa r.). Hillabees,—Swan (1791) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Hillabys.— 
Woodward, Reminiscences, 96,1859. Hill-au-bee.— 
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 43,1848. Hillebese.—Cor¬ 
nell (1793) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 385, 
1832. 

Hillabi. A town of the Creek Nation, 
s. w. of Eufaula, between North fork and 
Canadian r., Ind. T.—Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., n, 185, 1888. 

Hilabi.—Gatschet, ibid. 

Hillis Hadjo. ( hilis ‘medicine’, hadsho 
‘crazy’, an official at the busk, q. v.). 
A noted Seminole leader in the early 
part of the 19th century, usually known 
among the whites as Francis the Prophet, 
and whose name is also recorded as Hid¬ 
lis Hadjo, Hillishago, Hillishager, etc. 
He took an active part in the Semi¬ 
nole war, and is accused of having been 
one of the chief instigators of the sec¬ 
ond uprising. He seems to have come 
into public notice as early as 1814, as on 
Apr. 18 of that year Gen. Jackson wrote 
from his camp at the junction of Coosa 
and Tallapoosa rs., Ala., that “Hillisha- 
gee, their [the Seminole’s] great prophet, 
has absconded. ’ ’ Led by some a bandoned 
English traders to believe that the treaty 
of Ghent in 1814 provided for the restora¬ 
tion of the Seminole country, and in the 
hope of obtaining aid for his tribe against 
the Americans, he went to England, where 


550 


HILUYS-HITCH APUKS ASS t 


[b. a. E. 


he received much attention. An English 
journal thus mentions his arrival: “The 
soundof trumpets an nounced the approach 
of the patriot Francis, who fought so glo¬ 
riously in our cause in America during 
the late war. Being dressed in a most 
splendid suit of red and gold, and wearing 
a tomahawk set with gold, gave him a 
highly imposing appearance.” His mis¬ 
sion led to no practical result. Near the 
closeof 1817an American named McKrim- 
mon, who had been captured by a Semi¬ 
nole party, was taken to Mikasuki, where 
dwelt Hiilis Hadjo, who ordered him to be 
burned to death, but at the last moment 
his life was saved by the entreaties of 
Milly (q.v.), the chiefs daughter, who, 
when her father wavered, showed her de¬ 
termination to perish with him. Francis 
shortly thereafter fell into the hands of 
the Americans and was hanged. His 
wife and several daughters afterward sur¬ 
rendered to the Americans at St Marks, 
Fla., where Milly received much attention 
from the whites, but refused McKrim- 
mon’s offer of marriage until assured that 
it was not because of his obligation to her 
for saving his life. (c. t.) 

Hiluys. An unidentified tribe, said to 
have lived on Laredo channel, Brit. Col., 
about lat. 52° 3CK (Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
316, 1868). This is in the country of the 
Kittizoo. 

Himatanohis ( Himdtanohts , ‘ bowstring 
men ’). A warrior society of the Chey¬ 
enne, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Bow-String (Society). —Dorsey in Field Columb. 
Mus. Pub., no. 99, 15, 1905. inverted (Society). — 
Ibid. 

Himoiyoqis ( HVmoiyoqts , a word of 
doubtful meaning). A warrior society 
of the Cheyenne (q. v.); also sometimes 
known as Oomi-niFtqiu, ‘Coyote warri¬ 
ors.’ (j. M.) 

Coyote (Society). —Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. 
Pub., no. 99, 15, 1905. 

Hinama ( Hi'ncimd , referring to the head 
of a variety of fish). A former Maricopa 
village whose people now live on the s. 
bank of Salt r., e. of the Mormon settle¬ 
ment of Lehi, Maricopa co., s. Ariz.—Rus¬ 
sell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902. 

Hinanashiu ( Hinana'shiu , ‘golden 
eagle’). A gens of the Kineuwidishianun 
or Eagle phratry of the Menominee.— 
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 
1896. 

Hinauhan’s Village. A summer camp 
of a Stikine chief on Stikine r., Alaska. 
In 1880, 31 people were there.—Petroff 
in Tenth Census, Alaska, 32, 1884. 

Hinhanshunwapa (‘toward the owl 
feather’). A band of the Brule Teton 
Sioux, 

Hi n ha n -cu n -wapa.— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Hipharj-sun-wapa. —Ibid. 

Hiocaia. A former village, governed by 
a female chieftain, situated 12 leagues 


n. of Charlefort, the French fort on St 
Johns r., Fla., in the 16th century. 
Hiocaia.—LaudonniOre (1564) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n. s., 286, 1869. Hiouacara.—De Bry, 
Brev. Narr., ii, map, 1591. 

Hioqua. See Hiaqua. 

Hios. A branch of the Nevome who 
lived 8 leagues e. of the pueblo of Tepa- 
hue, in Sonora, Mexico (Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 58, 351, 1864). The name doubt¬ 
less properly belongs to their village. 

Hipinimtch (hipi ‘prairie’, nimtch 
‘ road, ’ ‘ portage ’). A former Chitimacha 
village on the w. side of Grand lake, at 
Fausse Pointe, near Bayou Gosselin, La. 

Hipinimtch namu.—Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop. 
Soc. Wash., ii, 152, 1883 (ndwu=‘village’). 

Hiqua. See'Hiaqua. 

Hirrihigua. A province and town, pre¬ 
sumably Timuquanan, on the w. coast of 
Florida, on or near Tampa bay, where 
De Soto landed in May, 1539. Possibly 
the same as Ucita. 

Harriga.—Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 257, 1881. 
Hihirrigua.—Gareilasso de la Vega, Hist. Fla., 30, 
1723. Hirriga.—Shipp, op. cit., 683. 

Hisada (‘legs stretched out stiff’, re¬ 
ferring to a dead quadruped). A Ponca 
gens on the Chinzhu side of the camp 
circle. 

Hisada.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897. 
Thunder people.—Ibid. 

Hishkowits ( HishkovJi'ts , ‘porcupine’, 
known to the whites as Harvey White- 
shield). A Southern Cheyenne inter¬ 
preter, born in w. Oklahoma in 1867; 
eldest son of the chief White-shield (see 
Wopowats). After 5 years’ attendance at 
the agency schools he entered Carlisle 
School, Pa., in 1881, afterward attending 
other schools at Ft Wayne, Hanover 
(Ind.), and Lawrence (Kan.). In 1893 
he became assistant teacher in the Men- 
nonite mission school among the Chey¬ 
enne at Cantonment, Okla., which posi¬ 
tion he held for 4 years. He still serves 
as interpreter for the mission and has 
been chief assistant of the Rev. Rudolph 
Petter, missionary in charge, in the prep¬ 
aration of a number of translations and a 
manuscript dictionary of the Cheyenne 
language. (.t. m. ) 

Hisiometanio ( Hisiomela'nio , ‘ridge 

men’; sing., Hlsiometa'n) . A principal 
division of the Cheyenne, q. v. 
Hisiometa'nio.—Mooney, inf’n, 1905 (see p. 255 of 
this Handbook). Hissi o me tan i u. —Grinnell, So¬ 
cial Org. Cheyennes, 136,1905. I' sium-ita'niuw’.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1025, 1896. 

Histapenumanke. A Mandan band, the 
first, according to their mythology, to 
come above ground from the subterran¬ 
ean lake. 

E-sta-pa'.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 158, 1877 (‘those 
with the tattooed faces’). Flat-head.—Ibid. Hi- 
sta pe' nu-mah'-ke.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
241, 1897. Histoppa.—Maximilian, Trav., 366,1843. 

Hitchapuksassi. A former Seminole 
town about 20 m. from the head of 
Tampa bay, in what is now Hillsboro 
co., Fla. 


4 


BULL. 30] 


HITCHITI-HI20 


551 


Hechapususse.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
307, 1822. Helch-puck[sasy] .—H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 
(1823), 19th Cong., 1st sess., 23, 1826 (the last two 
syllables of this name are joined to the next 
town name, -chicu-chaty.) Hich-a-pue-susse.— 
Bell, op. cit. Hichipucksassa. —Taylor, War map, 
1839. 

Hitchiti (Creek: ahitchita , ‘ to look up¬ 
stream’). A Muskhogean tribe formerly 
residing chiefly in a town of the same 
name on the e. bank of Chattahoochee 
r., 4 m. below Chiaha, and possessing a 
narrow strip of good land bordering on 
the river, in w. Georgia. When Haw¬ 
kins visited them in 1799 they had spread 
out into two branch settlements—one, the 
Hitchitudshi, or Little Hitchiti, on both 
sides of Flint r. below the junction of 
Kinchafooneecr., which passes through a 
country named after it; the other, Tuta- 
losi, on a branch of Kinchafooneecr., 20 m. 
w. of Hitchitudshi. The tribe is not often 
mentioned in history, and appears for the 
first time in 1733, when two of its del¬ 
egates, with the Lower Creek chiefs, met 
Gov. Oglethorpe at Savannah. The lan¬ 
guage appears to have extended beyond 
the limits of the tribe as here defined, as it 
was spoken not only in the towns on the 
Chattahoochee, as Chiaha, Chiahudshi, 
Hitchiti, Oconee, Sawokli, Sawokliudshi, 
and Apalachicola, and in those on Flint 
r., but by the Mikasuki, and, as trace¬ 
able by the local names, over considera¬ 
ble portions of Georgia and Florida. The 
Seminole are also said to have been a 
half Creek and half Hitchiti speaking 
people, although their language is now 
almost identical with Creek; and it is 
supposed that the Yamasi likewise spoke 
the Hitchiti language. This language, 
like the Creek, has an archaic form 
called “woman’s talk,” or female lan¬ 
guage. The Hitchiti were absorbed into 
and became an integral part of the Creek 
Nation, though preserving to a large ex¬ 
tent their own language and peculiar 
customs. See Creeks. (a.s. g.) 

Achilia.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., i, 134, map, 
1761 (incorrectly located; false orthography). 
At-pasha-shliha.— Gatschet, Koasati MS., B. A. E. 
(Koasati name: ‘mean people’)- Echeetees. — 
Carver, Travels, map, 1778. Echeles. —Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, 7, 1776 (town on Apalachicola r., Ga.). 
Echeta. —Bartram, Trav., 462, 1791. Echetas — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. IV, 29, 1848. Echetee. —Lat- 
tr6, map, U.S., 1784 (1, on Chattahoochee; 2, on 
Altamaha). Echetes. —Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 
i, 134, map 1761 (two towns, incorrectly located). 
Echeti. —Mandrillon, Spectateur Am6ricain, map, 
1785. Echetii. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., II, 60, 1787 
(on Echesii r., Ga.). Echitis.— Ibid, (on Apa¬ 
lachicola r.). Echitos. —Penifire in Morse, Rep. 
to Sec. War, 311, 1822. Etchitas.— Doc. of 1747 in 
McCall, Hist. Ga., I, 367, 1811. Etichita.— Jones, 
Hist. Ga., 1,134,1873. Euchitaws.— Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., II, 9,1888. Hatchita.— Robin, Voy., I, 
map, 1807. Hichetas.— Woodward, Reminiscenses, 
25, 38, 1859. Hilchittees.— Stevens, Hist. Ga., 51, 
1847. Hitchatees. — Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Hitchetaws.— U. S. Ind. 
Treat. (1779), 69, 1837. Hit-che-tee.— Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch, 64, 1848. Hitchies.— Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, I, 239, 1851. Hitchittees.— Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. vni, 1848. Hitch-ity.— Duval (1894) in 


Sen. Ex. Doc. 49, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 144,1850. 
Ichiti. —Rafinesque, introd. Marshall, Ky., I, 24, 
1824. Kitaheeta.— Barnard (1792) in Am. State 
Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 309, 1832 (misprint). 

Hitchiti, A town of the Creek Nation, 
Ind. Ter., on Deep fork of Canadian r., 
about midway between Eufaula and Oc- 
mulgee. 

Hitchita.— P. O. Guide, 367, 1904. Hitchiti.— 

Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 1888. 

Hitchitipusy. A former village, prob¬ 
ably Seminole, a few miles s. e. of Ft 
Alabama, and the same distance n. e. of 
Ft Brooke, both of which forts were on 
Hillsboro r., Fla.—H. R. Doc. 78, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 768-9, map, 1838. 

Hitchitudshi. A branch settlement of 
Hitchiti on Flint r., Ga., below its junc¬ 
tion with Ivinchafoonee cr. 

Hitchatooche. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Ga. 
map, 1900. Hit-che-too-che. —Hawkins (1779), 
Sketch, 65, 1848. Hitchitudshi. —Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., i, 77, 131, 1884. Little Hit-chetee. — 
Hawkins, op. cit. Little Hitchiti. —Gatschet, op. 
cit. 

Hitschowon. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage on the harbor of Santa Cruz id., off 
the coast of California. 

Hits-tco'-won.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Hitshinsuwit. A former Yaquina village 
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 
Hi'-ioin-su'-wlt.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 229,1890. 

Hittoya (‘westerners.’—Kroeber). A 
division of the Miwok on upper Chow- 
chilla r., Mariposa co., Cal. 

Heth-to'-ya.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
349, 1877. Hittoya.— A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903. 

Hiwaitthe. A former Yaquina village 
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 
Hi'-wai-i'-t’pe. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Hiwassee ( Ayuhwa'sl , ‘savanna,’ ‘mead¬ 
ow’). The name of several former Chero¬ 
kee settlements. The most important, 
commonly distinguished by the Cherokee 
as Ayuhwa'sl Egwd/hl, or Great Hiwas¬ 
see, was on the n. bank of Hiwassee r., 
at the present Savannah ford, above 
Columbus, Polk co., Tenn. Another was 
farther up the same river, at the junction 
of Peachtree cr., above Murphy, Cherokee 
co., N. C.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
512, 1900. 

Ayuhwa'sl.— Mooney, op. cit. Euforsee.— Doc. of 
1755 quoted by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 142, 
1887. Highwassee.— Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce, 
ibid., 144. Hiwasse.— Bartram. Travels, 371, 1792. 
Owassa. —Lanman quoted by Mooney, op. cit. 

Hiyaraba (‘panther’). A clan of the 
Acheha phratry of the ancient Timucua 
of Florida.—Pareja ( c a. 1614) quoted by 
Gatschet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 
492,1878. 

Hiyayulge (‘tree trunk’). A former 
Maricopa village on Gila r., s. Ariz. 

Hiyayulge.— ten Kate, inf’n, 1888. TJskbk. —Ibid. 
(Pima name). 

Hizo. A division of the Varohio which 
occupied the pueblo of Taraichi in Chi- 
nipas valley, w. Chihuahua, Mexico.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 324, 1864. 


552 


HLAGI—HLGAGILDA-KEGAWAI 


fB. A. B. 


Hlagi (: ba/gt). A town of the Kaidju- 
kegawai family of the Haida, on an is¬ 
land near the e. end of Houston Stew- 
wart channel, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Hlahayik ( La'xayik , ‘inside of Hlaha 
[fca'xa]’). A former Yakutat town on 
Yakutat bay, Alaska, back of an island 
called Hlaha, whence the name. The 
Clach-ft-jek of Krause seems to be inden- 
tical with the town of Yakutat. 

(j. r. s.) 

Hlahloakalga (‘j LdHo-akdlga, ‘fish 
ponds’). A Creek town in the Creek 
Nation, Ind. T., near Hilabee, between 
North fork and Canadian r. 

Fish Ponds.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 
1888. ‘ La'lo akalga.—Ibid. 

Hlahloalgi (‘ fish people ’). An extinct 
Creek clan. 

Hu'-hlo.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. ‘La‘lo- 
algi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884. 

Hlahlokalka (‘ LdHo-kalka: l ld‘lo ‘fish’, 
akdlgas ‘ I am separated from ’). A for¬ 
mer Upper Creek settlement established 
by the Okchayi on a small river forming 
ponds, 4 m. above Oakfuskee, Cleburne 
co., Ala. (a. s. g.) 

Fish pond.—Bartram, Travels, 462, 1791 (traders’ 
name). Fish ponds.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 49, 
1848. Fish-Pond Town.—Parsons (1833) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 578, 1854. ‘La‘lo-kalka.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 137, 1884. Slaka- 
gulgas.—Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, op. cit., v, 262, 
1855. Tatloulgees.—Woodward, Reminis., 83,1859. 
Thlatlogulgau.—Schoolcraft, op. cit., iv, 381. 
Thlot-lo-gul-gau.—Hawkins(1799), Sketch,49,1848. 

Hlakeguns [Page'g^ns ). A town of the 
Kuna-lanas on Yagun r., at the head of 
Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Hlanudshiapala ( l ldni ‘mountain’, udshi 
dim. suffix, apala ‘on the other side’: 
‘on the other side of a little mountain’). 
A former Upper Creek settlement, one of 
the four Hillabi villages, with a town 
square, situated on the n. w. branch of 
Hillabi cr., Ala., 15 m. from Hillabi 
town. (a. s. g.) 

‘Lanudshi apala.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i,137, 
1884. Thla-noo-che au-bau-lau.—Hawkins (1799), 
Sketch, 43, 1848. 

Hlaphlako (‘Ldp-Hdko, ‘tall cane’). 
Two former Upper Creek villages on or 
near Cupiahatchee cr., in Macon co., 
Ala., with 81 and 66 heads of families, 
respectively, in 1832. 

James Bay.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st 
sess., 131,1836 (misprint). Jim Boy’s.—Campbell 
(1836) in H. R. Doc. 274,25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 
1838. ‘Lap-‘lako.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
137, 1884. Thabloc-ko.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, op. cit. 
Thloblocco-town.—Jesup (1836) in H. R. Doc. 78, 
25th Cong,, 2d sess., 48, 1838. Thlobthlocco.—H. 
R. Doc. 274, op. cit. Thlob Thlocko.—Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 257, 1836. Thlop- 
thlocco.—Woodward, Reminis., 91,1859. 

Hlaphlako. A town of the Creek Nation, 
on Alabama cr., n. of the North fork of 
Canadian r., Okla.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., ii, 185, 1888. 

Hlauhla (‘ Hla'-u‘hla, ‘surrounded by 
arrow-shaft bushes’). The ruins of a 


small but traditionally important Zuni 
pueblo near a small spring about 10 m. 
n. n. e. of Zuni, N. Mex. (f. h. c.) 

Clan-utsh-la.—Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and 
Arclneol., I, 100, 1891. ’Hla'-u’hla.—Cushing, 
inf’n, 1891. 

Hlaukwima ( ‘Hlaukwi'ma ). The native 
name of the South town of Taos pueblo, 
N. Mex. (f. w. h.) 

Hlauuma ( ‘Hlauu'ma ). The native 
name of the North town of Taos pueblo, 
N. Mex. (f. w. h.) 

Hleetakwe (‘ Hie'-e-td-kwe ). The north¬ 
western migration of the Bear, Crane, 
Frog, Deer, Yellow-wood, and other clans 
of the ancestral pueblo of Zuni.—Cushing 
quoted by Powell, 4th Rep. B. A. E., 
xxxviii, 1886. See Pishla Ateuna. 

Hlekatchka (’ Le-kdtchka, or ’Li-i- 
katchka , from He or ’li, ‘arrow’, kalchka, 
‘broken’: ‘ broken arrow’). A former 
Lower Creek town on a trail ford cross¬ 
ing Chattahoochee r., 12 m. below Ka- 
sihta, on the w. side of the river, proba¬ 
bly in Russell co., Ala. According to 
Hawkins (Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 
858, 1832) the settlement was destroyed 
in 1814; but it was apparently reestab¬ 
lished, as it was represented in the treaty 
of Nov. 15, 1827, and a census of 1832 
(Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854) 
gives the number of families as 331 in 
that year. (a. s. g. ) 

Broken Arrow.— Carey (1792) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., I, 329, 1832. Broken Arrow Old Field. — 
Robertson (1796), ibid., 600. Chalagatsca.— Swan 
(1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. 
Horse-path-town. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 
1st sess., 135,1836. ‘Lekatchka. —Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., I, 137, 1884. ‘Li-i-katchka.—Ibid. 
Tauthlacotehcau. —Hawkins (1814) in Am. State 
Papers, op. cit., 858. Theacatckkah. —Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. 4, 54, 1848. Thlakatchka. — Census of 
1832 in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. 
Thleacatska.— Woodward, Reminis., 35, 1859. 

Thlu-katch-ka. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st 
sess., 135,1836. 

Hlekatska ( l Le katska). The settlement 
of an offshoot of the Kawita on Arkansas 
r., almost opposite Wialaka and near 
Coweta (Kawita), in the Creek Nation, 
Okla.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 
185, 1888. 

Hlgadun ( PgadA'n, ‘suffering from over¬ 
work’). A town of the Skidai-lanas 
on Moresby id., opposite and facing An¬ 
thony id., Queen Charlotte group, Brit. 
Col. It is prominent in Haida mythol¬ 
ogy.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Hlgaedlin ( hga'-iun , probably ‘where 
they wash the'frames upon which salal 
berries are dried ’). A Haida town occu¬ 
pied by a branch of the Kona-kegawai 
called Sus-haidagai; situated on the s. 
side of Tanoo id., s. e. Queen Charlotte 
ids., Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
278, 1905. 

Hlgagilda-kegawai ( PgagtHda qe'- 
gawa-i, ‘those born at Hlgagilda,’ i. e., 
Skidegate). A subdivision of the Hlgaiu- 


BULL. 30] 


HLGAHET—HLIELUNGKUN-LNAGAI 


553 


lanas family of the Haida.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 269, 1905. 

Hlgahet {hga'xet, ‘pebble town’.) A 
former Haida town near Skidegate, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was 
purchased from its earlier owners, the 
Kogangas, by a branch of the Yaku-lanas 
who were afterward known as the 
Hlgahetgu-lanas, from the name of their 
town. (j. r. s.) 

Kil-kait-hade. —Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 
1885 (‘people of Hlgahet’). Tlg-a'it.— Boas, 12th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 24, 1898 (misapplied to 
to Old Gold Harbor). 

Hlgahet-gitinai ( hga'xet gitind'-i , ‘ Git- 
ins of Pebble-town ’). A division of the 
Eagle clan of the Haida, for which Gitins 
was a second name. They moved from 
Hlgahet, the old town near Skidegate, to 
Chaahl on the w. coast, along with other 
families (see Hlgahetgu-lanas). Origi¬ 
nally they and the Gitins of Skidegate 
constituted one family. The Djahui- 
hlgahet-kegawai, Yaku-gitinai, Hlgahet- 
kegawai, and Gweundus were subdivi¬ 
sions. (j. r. s.) 

iga'xet gitina'-i. —Swanton, Cont. Haida,274,1905. 
Tl’ga'it gyit’inai'. —Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 24, 1898. 

Hlgahetgu-lanas ( hga'xet-gu-la'nas, 
‘people of Pebble-town’). The most 
important division of the Raven clan of 
the Haida, on the w. coast of Queen Char¬ 
lotte ids., Brit. Col. It received its name 
from an old town near Skidegate, where 
the people formerly lived. Before this 
they were part of the Yaku-lanas and 
lived at Lawn hill, but trouble arising, 
they were driven away and purchased the 
town of Hlgahet from the Kogangas. 
Later another war forced them to move 
to the w. coast. (j. r. s. ) 

Ega'xet-gu-la'nas.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 
1905. Lth’ait Lennas.— Harrison in Proc. and 
Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125,1895. Tlg-a'itgu 
la'nas.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 24, 
1898. 

Hlgahet-kegawai ( hga'xet-qe'gawa-i , 
‘ those born at Pebble-town ’). A' subdi¬ 
vision of the Hlgahet-gitinai, a family of 
the Eagle clan of the Haida, or only 
another name for that family.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 274, 1905. 

Hlgai (hga'i). Said to have been the 
name of a town at the head of Skedans 
bay, w. coast of the Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 
1905. 

Hlgaiha ( hga'-ixa , from Igai ‘to dig’, 
xa ‘to put'in’). A semi-legendary 
Haida town n. of Dead Tree pt., at the 
entrance of Skidegate inlet, Queen Char¬ 
lotte ids., Brit. Col. From this place the 
great Gitins family of Skidegate is said 
to have sprung.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
99, 1905. 

Hlgaiu {hgdi-u', probably ‘place of 
stones ’). A town and camping place of 
the Djahui-skwahladagai of the Haida, 


s. of Dead Tree pt., at the entrance to 
Skidegate inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col. One of the names of the town 
of Skidegate is said to have been derived 
from this. _ ( j. r. s. ) 

Kit-hai-uass hade.—Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 
1885(possibly identical). £gai-u'. —Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 279,1905. 

Hlgaiu-lanas {hgai-u' la'nas, ‘Skidegate 
town people ’). A division of the Raven 
clan of the Haida who originally owned 
the town of Skidegate, Brit. Col., and 
hence came to be called by the Haida 
name of the town. Later they gave the 
town to the Gitins in payment for an in¬ 
jury inflicted on one of the latter, and 
moved to Gaodjaos, farther up the inlet. 
A subdivision was called Hlgagilda-ke- 
awai. (j. r. s.) 

gai-u' la'nas.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 269, 1905. 
Tl’aiyu Haade.—Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., sec. n, 125, 1895 (erroneously assigned 
to Old Gold Harbor). Tlg aio la'nas.—Boas, 12th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 24, 1898. Tlqaiu la'nas.— 
Boas, 5th Rep. of same, 26, 1889. 

Hlgan ( hgAn , ‘killer-whale’s dorsal 
fin’). A Haida town s. of Tigun, on 
the w. coast of Graham id., Queen Char¬ 
lotte group, Brit. Col., occupied by the 
Dostlan-lnagai. The Koetas are said 
to have lived at this place before they 
moved to Alaska, and the town is said to 
have been so named on account of a rock 
which stands up in front of it like the 
dorsal fin of a killer-whale. (j. r. s. ) 
Ij^An.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905. £ 8 An.— 
Swanton, inf’n, 1905 (another form). 

Hlgihla-ala {hgi'lA ala , probably ‘town 
of the ditches’)*. A former Haida town 
n. of Cape Ball, e. shore of Graham id., 
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was 
occupied by the Naikun-kegawai.—Swan¬ 
ton, Cont. Haida, 280,1905. 

Hlielung ( hi'eUh ). A former Haida 
town of the Kuna-lanas family on the 
right bank of a river of the same name 
(Hi-ellen on Dawson’s chart), which 
flows into Dixon entrance at the foot of 
Tow hill, n. coast of Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col. The town was erroneously 
thought by Dawson (Queen Charlotte 
Ids., 165b, 1880) to be the Ne-coon of J ohn 
Work. (j. r. s.) 

Hieller.—Deans, Tales from Hidery, 92, 1899. 
Ia'gEn.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W.Tribes Can., 23,1898. 
£i'elAii.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905. 

Hlielung-keawai {hi'el Ah qe'awa-i , 

‘those born at the town of Hlielung’). 
A subdivision of the Stustas, a family of 
the Eagle clan of the Haida, occupying 
a town at the mouth of Hiellen (Hlie¬ 
lung) r., Graham id., Queen Charlotte 
group, Brit. Col. (j. R. s.) 

Dl’ia'lEn k-eowai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 23, 1898. ii'elAii qe'awa-i.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 276,1905. Lthyhellun Kiiwe.—Harrison in 
Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. n, 125,1895. 

Hlielungkun-lnagai {hi'elAh kun Inaga'- 
i, ‘ Li'elAn river point town-people ’). A 
town of the Kuna-lanas, belonging to the 
Raven clan of the Haida, situated on a 


554 


HLIELUNG-STUSTAE-HOBOMOK 


[b. a. a. 


river of the same name (called Hiellen 
on Dawson’s map). ( j. r. s. ) 

Dl’ia'lEn kunilnagai'.— Boas, 12th Rep. N.W. Tribes 
Can., 23, 1898. Ei'elAii kun lnaga'-i. —Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 270, 1905. 

Hlielung-stustae (Jbi'elAn stAsta'-i, ‘Stus- 
tas of Hlielung’). A subdivision of the 
Stustas, an important family of the Eagle 
clan of the Haida, occupying the town 
at the mouth of Hlielung or Hiellen 
r., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Pos¬ 
sibly a synonym of Hlielung-keawai.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 1905. 

Hlimulnaas-hadai ( inmA'l na'as xa / - 
da-i, ‘ hlimul-skin-house people’). A 
subdivision of the Salendas, a Haida fam¬ 
ily of the Eagle clan. They were so 
called from one of their houses; hlimul 
was a name applied to the skins of cer¬ 
tain mainland animals.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 276, 1905. 

Hlingwainaas-hadai ( inngwa'-i na' as 
xa'da-i , ‘world-house people’). A sub¬ 
division of the Aokeawai, a family of the 
Raven clan of the Haida; probably named 
from a house.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
272, 1905. 

Hlkaonedis (Tlingit: tiqa'onedis , ‘peo¬ 
ple of Jbqao river’). A subdivision of 
the Koetas, a family of the Raven clan of 
the Haida, living principally in Alaska. 
They may have received their name from 
a camping place.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
272, 1905. 

Hlkia {tkHd', 1 chicken-hawk town ’ 
or ‘ saw-bill town ’) A former Haida town 
on the outer side of Lyell id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was occupied 
by the Kona-kegawai.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 278, 1905. 

Hlkoayedi {iiqo' ayedi) . A Tlingit divi¬ 
sion at Klawak, Alaska, said to be part of 
the Shunkukedi, q. v. (j. r. s.) 

Hlukahadi. A division of the Raven 
phratry of the Chilkat, formerly living in 
the town of Yendestake, Alaska. Accord¬ 
ing to the Chilkat themselves the name 
means ‘ quick people ’, but according to in¬ 
formants at Wrangell, ‘ people of Hlukak ’ 
(Huqa/x), a creek near Wrangell. 
Chlukoach-adi.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. 
Kaduwot-kedi.—Ibid, (given as a distinct social 
group), iiuqa'xadi.—Swan ton, field notes, B. A. E., 
1904. 

Hlukkuhoan ( iiAxq! u xo-dn , ‘town where 
people do not sleep much’). A former 
Tlingit town in Alaska. (j. r. s. ) 

Hluln (i%Zn). A former Haida town 
in Naden harbor, Graham id., Queen 
Charlotte group, Brit. Col.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Hoabonoma. Evidently the Pima or 
Maricopa name of a tribe of which Father 
Kino learned while on the lower Rio Gila, 
Ariz., in 1700. Unidentified, although 
probably Yuman. They have sometimes 
been loosely classed as a part of the Cocopa. 
Heabenomaa.— Consag (1746) quoted by Taylor in 


Cal. Farmer, Dec. 6,1861. Hebonumas.—Venegas, 
Hist. Cal., II, 171, 1759. Hoabonoma.—Kino (1700) 
quoted by Coues, Garces Diary, 548,1900. Hoaho- 
nomos.—Mayer, Mexico, n, 38,1853. Hobonomas.— 
Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 301, 1759. Oaboponoma.— 
Kino (1700) in Doc. Hist. Mex.,4th s.,l, 349,1856. 

Hoaiels. Mentioned by Baudry des Lo- 
zieres (Voy. Louisiane, 242, 1802) in a 
list of tribes with no indication of habitat. 
Possibly intended for Theloel, a name 
given sometimes to part, at others to all 
the Natchez. 

Hoako. A former Maidu village on the 
w. bank of Feather r., below Marysville, 
Sutter co., Cal. (r. b. d.) 

Hoak.—Wozencraft (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 206, 1853. Hoako.—Dixon in 
Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, pt. 3, map, 124, 
1905. Hock.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
282, 1877. Hocks.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 129, 1850. 
Hoka.—Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. Huk.— 
Hale, Ethnol. and Philol., vi, 631, 1846. 

Hobatinequasi. A clan of the Acheha 
phratry of the ancient Timucua of 
Florida.—Pareja ( ca . 1614) quoted by 
Gatschet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 
492, 1878. 

Hobbamock, Hobbamoco. See Hoboviok , 

Hobomoko. 

Hobeckentopa. A locality, possibly a 
town, where a treaty with the Choctaw 
was concluded Aug. 31, 1803. It was on 
Tombigbee r., in the e. part of Washington 
co., Ala., perhaps on or near a bluff of the 
same name upon which St Stephens now 
stands. (h. w. h.) 

Hobeckenlopa.—Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff. (1805), 
i, 749, 1832. Hoe-Buckin-too-pa.—U. S. Ind. Treat. 
(1803), 103, 1837. 

Hobnuts. A folk-etymological corrup¬ 
tion of hobbenis, the name of a tuberous 
root ( Orontiumaquaticum ) in the Delaware 
dialect of Algonquian. Rev. A. Hesselius 
(cited by Nelson, Inds. of N. J., 78,1894), 
writing in the early years of the 18th cen¬ 
tury in New Jqrsey, mentions “the first 
fruits of roots, which grow in swamps, 
not unlike nuts, called tachis , or by the 
English hopnuts.” The Delaware hobbe¬ 
nis is a diminutive of bobbin , which was 
afterward applied by these Indians to the 
potato. The Swedish colonists called this 
root hopnis. ( a. f. c. ) 

Hobomok. A chief of the Wampanoag 
who was the life-long friend of the Eng¬ 
lish, from the time he met them at Plym¬ 
outh in 1621. He helped to strengthen 
the friendship of Massasoit for the colo¬ 
nists, but, unlike Massasoit, he became a 
Christian, and died, before 1642, as a 
member of the English settlement at 
Plymouth. He was of great service to the 
English in warning them of Indian con¬ 
spiracies. He was present at some of the 
battles in which Standish performed val¬ 
orous deeds, but was not an active partici¬ 
pant. The name is identical with Abba- 
mocho, Hobbamoco, Habamouk, Hobba¬ 
mock, Hobomoko, etc. See the follow¬ 
ing. (a. f. c.) 


BULL. 30] 


HOBOMOKO-HOG CREEK 


555 


Hobomoko. Whittier, in the notes to 
his Poems (464, 1891) cites the saying 
concerning John Bonython: 

Here lies Bonython, the Sagamore of Saco, 

He lived a rogue and died a knave, and went 
to Hobomoko. 

Mentioned by early writers as an evil 
deity of the Massachuset and closely re¬ 
lated Algonquian tribes. (a. f. c.) 

Hoccanum. Mentioned as a band for¬ 
merly in East Hartford township, Hart¬ 
ford co., Conn., where they remained, 
according to Stiles, until about 1745. 
They were probably identical' with or a 
part of the Podunk (q. v.). De Forest 
locates the Podunk here, but does not 
mention the Hoccanum. 

Hoccanums.— Stiles (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., x, 105, 1809. Hockanoanco. —Mason (1659), 
ibid., 4th s., vn, 423,1865 (perhaps the name of 
the village). 

Hochelaga (dialectic form of Hochelayi, 
‘at the place of the [beaver] dam’). A 
former Iroquoian town, strongly palisad¬ 
ed, situated in 1535on Montreal id., Can¬ 
ada, about a mile from the mountain first 
called “Mont Royal” by Cartier. At 
that time it contained about 50 typical 
Iroquoian lodges, each 50 or more paces 
in length and 12 or 15 in breadth, built 
of wood and covered with very broad 
strips of bark, neatly and deftly joined. 
Estimating 12 fires and 24 firesides, each 
of three persons, to every lodge, the total 
population would have been about 3,600. 
The upper portion of the lodges was 
used for storing corn, beans, and dried 
fruits. The inhabitants pounded corn 
in wooden mortars with pestles and 
made a paste of the meal, which was 
molded into cakes that were cooked 
on large hot rocks and covered with hot 
pebbles. They also made many soups of 
corn, beans, and peas, of which they had 
a sufficiency. In the lodges were large 
vessels in which smoked fish was stored 
for winter use. They were not travelers 
like those of “ Canada” and “Saguenay,” 
although, according to Cartier, “the said 
Canadians are subject to them with 8 or 
9 other peoples along the river.” 

(j. N. B. H.) 

Hochelaga. —Cartier (1545), Bref R6cit, 9, 1863. 
Hochelagenses. —De Laet (1633) quoted by Barton, 
New Views, xlii, 1798 (Latin name of the inhabi¬ 
tants). Ochelaga.— Map (ca. 1543) in Maine Hist. 
Soc. Coll., I, 354, 1869; Jes. Rel. 1642, 36, 1858. 

Hochelayi (‘ at the place of the [beaver] 
dam’). A former Iroquoian town, situ¬ 
ated in 1535 in a flat country not far from 
the junction of Jacques Cartier r. with 
the St Lawrence, and probably near the 
present Pt Platon, Quebec. ( j. n. b. h. ) 
Achelaci.— Cartier (1535), Bref R6cit, 56a, 1863. 
Achelacy.— Ibid. Achelaiy.— Ibid. Achelayy.— 
Ibid. Hochelai.— Cartier (1535) quoted by Hak¬ 
luyt, Voy., II, 115, 1889. Hochelay. —Ibid., 129. 
Ochelay.— Cartier, Bref R6cit, op. cit. 

Hochonchapa (‘alligator’). A Chicka¬ 
saw clan of the Ishpanee phratry. 
Ho-chon-chab-ba. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. 


Hotchon tchapa.— Gatschet, CreekMigr. Leg., I, 96, 
1884. 

Hockhocken (‘place of gourds.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A former Delaware village on Hock¬ 
ing r., Ohio. 

Hackhocken.— La Tour, map, 1779. Hockhocken.— 
Ibid., 1782. Hoekhocken. —Lattr6, map, 1784. 
Mockhoeken.— Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777 
(misprint). 

Hoes and Spades. Agricultural imple¬ 
ments in general are referred to under 
Agriculture (q. v.), special mention being 
here made of certain numerous, large, 
bladelike, chipped implements of flint 
found in the rich alluvial bottom lands 
of the middle Mississippi valley, whose 
polished surfaces in many cases unmis¬ 
takably indicate long-continued use in 
digging operations; and this, in connec¬ 
tion with their suggestive shape, has 
caused them to be classified as hoes and 
spades. Extensive quarries of the flint 
nodules from which implements of this 
class were shaped, have been located in 
Union co., Ill. (see Quarries). Great 
numbers of the hoes and spades, origi¬ 
nating in these or in similar quarries, are 
distributed over an extensive area in 
Missouri, Illinois, and the neighboring 
states. The most common form has an 
oval, or elliptical outline, with ends 
either rounded or somewhat pointed; a 
modified form has the lower end strongly 
curved, with the sides in straight or 
slightly concave lines and the same 
pointed top. Beginning with the ex¬ 
tremes of this type, it is possible to ar¬ 
range a series which will pass by insen¬ 
sible gradations into small scrapers and 
scraper-like celts. Another type, not un¬ 
usual, has a semi-elliptical blade with a 
square or flat top, in the sides of which 
deep notches are cut for securing the 
handle. An allied form is without the 
notches but has projecting points at the 
top, which answer the same purpose. 
The larger implements of this class, often 
reaching a foot in length, are generally 
denominated spades, and the shorter, or 
notched, forms hoes; but as both had the 
handles put on either parallel with the 
longer axis or at an angle with it, allow¬ 
ing all alike to be used in the same man¬ 
ner, the distinction is without particular 
significance. 

Consult Fowke in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896; Moorehead, Prehist. Implements, 
1900; Rau, Archseol. Coll. Nat. Mus., 1876; 
Thruston, Antiquities of Tenn., 1897; 
Willoughby in Am. Anthrop,, viii, 130, 
1906. * (g. f. w. h. h. ) 

Hog. See Quahog. 

Hogan. A Navaho house; adapted 
from qoghdn (Mindeleff in 17th Rep. B. 
A. E., 475, 1898), in the Navaho dialect 
of the Athapascan stock. See Habitations. 

Hog Creek. A former Shawnee settle¬ 
ment on a branch of Ottawa r., in Allen 



556 


HOGOLOGES—HOLKCLAME 


[b. a. e. 


co., Ohio. The Indians sold their reser¬ 
vation there in 1831 and removed w. of 
the Mississippi. (j. m. ) 

Hogologes. A former Yuchi town on 
Apalachicola r., at the junction of Chat¬ 
tahoochee and Flint rs., in Georgia. 

Hagaligis.—Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799. Ho- 
gohegees.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 8,1776. Hogo- 
leeges.—Romans, Fla., I, 280, 1775. Hogoleegis.— 
Roberts, Fla., 13, 90, 1763. Hogoligis.—Alcedo, 
Die. Geog., n, 364,1787. Hogologes.—Jefferys, Am. 
Atlas, map 5, 1776. Ogolegees.—Lattr6, Map U. S., 
1784. 

Hogstown. Described as an old (Del¬ 
aware) village between Venango and Buf¬ 
falo cr., Pa., in 1791 (Proctor in Am. St. 
Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 153,1832). Perhaps 
wrongly located and identical with Ivus- 
kuski. 

Hoh. A band of the Quileute living 
at the mouth of Hoh r., about 15 m. 
s. of Lapush, the main seat of the tribe 
on the w. coast of Washington. They 
are under the jurisdiction of the Neah 
Bay agency. Pop. 62 in 1905. ( l. f . ) 

Hohs.—McKenney in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 131,1870. 
Holes.—Hill, ibid., 1867, 48, 1868. Hooch.—Swan, 
N. W. Coast, 211, 1857. Hooh.—Ibid. Huch.— 
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 173, 1877. Kwaak- 
sat.—Ibid. 

Hohandika (‘earth eaters’). A Sho- 
shoni division inhabiting the region w. 
of Great Salt lake, Utah. They suffered 
a severe defeat in 1862 at the hands of 
California volunteers. 

Diggers.—Gatschet in Geog. Surv. W. 100 M., 409, 
1879. Earth Eaters.—Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. 
Soc., XXIII, 298, 1886. Hohandika.—Ibid. Ho- 
kan-dik'-ah.—Stuart, Montana, 81, 1865. Hokan- 
ti ; kara.—Gatschet, op. cit. Salt Lake Diggers.— 
Stuart, op. cit. 

Hohe (‘Assiniboin’). A band of the 
Sihasapa division of the Teton Sioux.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 219,1897. 

Hohilpo. Said by Lewis and Clark 
(Exped., i, map, 1814; ii, 596,1817) to be 
a tribe of the Tushepaw (q. v.) residing 
on Clarke r., above the Micksucksealton, 
in the Rocky mts., and numbering 300 in 
25 lodges in 1805. 

Ho hill pos.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi,114, 
1905. Ho-hil-pos.—Ibid., 120. Ho-pil-po.—Lewis 
and Clark misquoted by Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., 
I, 417, 1855. 

Hohio. Mentioned by Coxe (Carolana, 
12,1741) as a nation living on the Wabash. 
Unidentified, and probably imaginary as 
a tribe, although the name is the same as 
Ohio. 

Hohopa ( Ifo-ho-pa ). A Koeksotenok 
village on the w. coast of Baker id., Brit. 
Col.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 
sec. 2, 73, 1887. 

Hohota. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 113, 1871) as a pueblo of New 
Mexico in 1598; at that time doubtless 
situated in the country of the Salinas, in 
the vicinity of Abo, e. of the Rio Grande, 
and evidently occupied by the Tigua or 
the Piros. (f. w. h.) 

Homdarhonon (‘island people.’ — Hew¬ 
itt). The Huron name of a tribe subor¬ 


dinate to the Ottawa.—Sagard (1632), 
Canada, iv, cap. ‘Nations,’ 1866. 

Hoitda. A division of the Maidu living 
on Rocker., in the n. partof Butteco.,Cal. 
Hocktem. — Chever in Bull. Essex Inst., ii, 28,1871. 
Hoitda.—Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A.E., 1885. 

Hokarutcha (‘skunk’). A band or so¬ 
ciety of the Crows. 

Ho-ka-rut'-cha.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. 
Pole-cat band.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 144, 1851. 

Hokedi ( Xoqle'di , ‘ people of Xoq! ’). A 
Tlingit clan at Wrangell, Alaska, belong¬ 
ing to the Wolf phratry. They are named 
from a place (Xoq!) opposite Old Wran¬ 
gell. 

Kook-a-tee.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. 
Qoke'de.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes of Can., 25, 
1889. Rchuch-e'di.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 120, 
1885. Xoqle'di.—Swan ton,field notes, B. A. E.,1904. 

Hoko. A'Clallam village on Okeho r., 
Wash. Under the name Okeno its in¬ 
habitants participated in the treaty of 
Point No Point, Wash., in 1855. 

Hoko —Swan, letter, B. A. E., Feb. 1886. Ocha.— 
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 429, 1855. Ocho.— 
Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 450,1854. Okeho.—Ibid. 
Okeno.—IJ. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 800, 1873. 

Hoko. The Juniper clan of the Kokop 
(Wood) phratry of the Hopi. 

Hohu.—Voth, Hop! Proper Names, 78, 1905. Hoko 
wihwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 
(winivu—' clan’). Ho'-ko wiih-wu.—Fewkes in 
Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 1894. 

Hokokwito. A former village of the 
Awani division of the Miwok, opposite 
Yosemite falls, in Yosemite valley, Mari¬ 
posa co., Cal. The hotel now occupies 
its site. 

Hococwedoc.—Powers in Overland Mo., x, 333, 
1874. Hok-ok'-wi-dok.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., in, 365, 1877. Hokokwito.—A. L. Kroe- 
ber, inf’n, 1905. 

Hokomo. A former Maidu village on 
the e. side of Middle fork of Feather r., 
almost due n. of Mooretown, Butte co., 
Cal.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Hok waits ( Ho-kwaits ). A band of Pai- 
ute formerly living hear Ivanpah, s. e. 
Cal. (Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 51, 
1874). Cf. Hakwiche, the Mohave name 
of the Kawia, q. v. 

Holatamico, popularly known as Billy 
Bowlegs. The last Seminole chief of 
prominence to leave Florida and remove 
with his people to the W. He was born 
about 1808, and after the first Seminole 
removal became the recognized chief of 
the remnant in 1842, and was the leader 
of hostilities in 1855 to 1858. Although 
but 25 years of age, and not then a chief, 
he was one of the signers of the treaty of 
Payne’s Landing, May 9, 1832, by which 
the Seminole agreed to remove to Indian 
Ter., but it was not until May, 1858, that 
he and his band, numbering 164 persons, 
departed. See Bowlegs. (c. t. ) 

Holeclame. One of several tribes for¬ 
merly occupying “the country from 
Buena Vista and Carises lakes, and Kern 
r. to the Sierra Nevada and Coast range,” 


BULL. 30] 


HOLE-IN-THE-DAY-HOMAYO 


557 


Cal. (Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853). By treaty 
of June 10, 1851, these tribes reserved a 
tract between Tejon pass and Kern r., and 
ceded the remainder of their lands to the 
United States. Probably Mariposan (Yo- 
kuts), though possibly Chumashan. Cf. 
Holkoma , Holmiuk. 

Hole-in-tbe-day ( Bagwunagifik, ‘hole, 
opening, rift in the sky.’—W. J.). A 
Chippewa chief, a member of the warlike 
Noka (Bear) clan. He succeeded Curly- 
head (q. v.) as war chief in 1825. He had 
already been recognized as a chief by the 
Government for his bravery and fidelity 
to the Americans in the war of 1812. His 
whole subsequent life was spent in fighting 
the Sioux, and he ended the struggle that 
had lasted for centuries over the posses¬ 
sion of the fisheries and hunting grounds 
of the L. Superior region by definitively 
driving the hereditary enemy across the 
Mississippi. Had not the Government 
intervened to compel the warring tribes 
to accept a line of demarkation, he threat¬ 
ened to plant his village on Minnesota 
r. and pursue the Sioux into the western 
plains. At Prairie du Chien he acknowl¬ 
edged the ancient possession by the Sioux 
of the territory from the Mississippi to 
Green bay and the head of L. Superior, 
but claimed it for the Chippewa by right 
of conquest. The Chippewa had the ad¬ 
vantage of the earlier possession of fire¬ 
arms, but in the later feuds which Hole- 
in-the-day carried on the two peoples 
were equally armed. George Copway, 
who valued the friendship of Hole-in-the- 
day and once ran 270 miles in 4 days to 
apprise him of a Sioux raid, relates how 
he almost converted the old chief, who 
promised to embrace Christianity and 
advise his people to do so “after one 
more battle with the Sioux.” He was 
succeeded as head chief of the Chippewa 
on his death in 1846 by his son, who bore 
his father’s name and who carried on in 
Minnesota the ancient feud with the Da¬ 
kota tribes. At the time of the Sioux 
rising in 1862 he was accused of planning 
a similar revolt. The second Hole-in-the- 
day was murdered by men of his own 
tribe at Crow Wing, Minn., June 27, 
1868. (f. h.) 

Holholto. A former Maidu village a 
few miles s. of Mooretown, Butte co., Cal. 
Helto. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., nr, 282, 
1877. Holholto.— Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xvn, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Holkoma. A Mono tribe on Sycamore 
cr. and Big cr., n. of Kings r., Cal. There 
is some doubt as to its proper name. 
Hol-cu-ma.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782,1899. 
Ho-len-mahs.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc 61, 
32d Cong., 1st sess., 22,1852. Hol-en-nas.— Barbour 
(1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 
254 1853. Hol'-ko-mah.— Merriam in Science, xix, 
916, June 15,1904. Hol-o'-kommah.— Ibid. To- 
win-che'-bi.—Ibid. 


Hollow-horn Bear. A Brul6 Sioux chief, 
born in Sheridan co., Nebr., in Mar., 1850. 
When but 16 years of age he accompanied 
a band led by his father against the Paw¬ 
nee, whom they fought on the present 
site of Genoa, Nebr. In 1868 he joined a 
band of Brules in an attack on United 
States troops in Wyoming, and in another 
where now is situated the Crow agency, 
Mont.; and in the following year par¬ 
ticipated in a raid on the laborers who 
were constructing the Union Pacific R. R. 
Subsequently he became captain of po¬ 
lice at Rosebud agency, S. Dak., and ar¬ 
rested his predecessor, Crow Dog, for the 
murder of Spotted Tail. Five years later 
he resigned and was appointed second 
lieutenant under Agent Spencer, but was 
again compelled to resign on account of 
ill health. When Gen. Crook was sent 
with a commission to Rosebud, in 1889, to 
make an agreement with the Indians there, 
Hollow-horn Bear was chosen by the 
Sioux as their speaker, being considered 
an orator of unusual ability. He took 
part in the parade at the inauguration of 
President Roosevelt at Washington, Mar. 
4,1905. (c. t. ) 

Holmiuk. One of the tribes formerly 
occupying ‘ ‘ the country from Buena Vista 
and Carises lakes, and Kern r. to the 
Sierra Nevada and Coast range, ’ ’ Cal. By 
treaty of June 10, 1851, these tribes re¬ 
served a tract between Tejon pass and 
Kern r. and ceded the remainder of their 
land to the United States. Probably of 
Mariposan (Yokuts) orShoshoneanstock. 
Cf. Holeclame, Holkoma. 

Hol-mie-uhs.— Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 256,1853. Holmiuk.— Royce 
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. 

Holstenborg. A missionary station on 
Davis str., w. Greenland. 

Holsteinberg. —Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 13,1767. 
Holstensborg.— Meddelelser om Gronland, xxv, 
map, 1902. 

Holtrochtac. A Costanoan village for¬ 
merly connected with Santa Cruz mis¬ 
sion, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 
1860. 

Holukhik ( Ho-luq'-lk). A Yaquina 
village on the n. side of Yaquina r., 
Oreg.—Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890/ 

Homalko. A Salish tribe on the e. side 
of Bute inlet, Brit. Col., speaking the 
Comox dialect; pop. 89 in 1904. 

Em-alcom.— Can.Ind. AIT. for 1884,187. Homalco.— 
Ibid., 1891, map. Homalko. —Ibid.,1901, pt. II, 158. 
Qoe'qomaMxo. —Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Homayine (Ho'ma yin'-e, ‘young elk’). 
A subgens of the Khotachi, the Elk gens 
of the Iowa.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 238, 1897. 

Homayo. A large ruined pueblo of the 
Tewa on the w. bank of Rio Ojo Caliente, 
a small w. tributary of the Rio Grande, 
in Rio Arriba co., N. Mex. See Bandelier 


558 


HOMHO ABIT-HONANI 


[B. A. E. 


in Arch. Inst. Papers, rv, 37,1892; Hew- 
ett in Bull. 32, B. A. E., 39, 1906. 

Homhoabit. Given by Rev. J. Caballeria 
(Hist. San Bernardino Val., 1902) as a 
former village, probably of the Serranos, 
at a place now called Homoa, near San 
Bernardino, s. Cal. 

Hominy. From the Algonquian dia¬ 
lects of New England or Virginia, applied 
to a dish prepared from Indian corn 
pounded or cracked and boiled, or the 
kernels merely hulled by steeping first 
in lye or ashes and afterward boiled, with 
or without fish or meat to season it. The 
first mention of the name in print occurs 
in Capt. John Smith’s True Travels, 43, 
1630. Some forms of the name given by 
early writers are tackhummin , ‘to grind 
corn (or grain), ’ and pokhommin, ‘ to beat 
or thresh out,’ Josselyn (N. E. Rar., 53, 
1672) defined hominy as what was left 
after the flour had been sifted out of 
cornmeal. Beverley (Virginia, bk. 3, 
1722) says that homony is “Indian corn, 
broken in a mortar, husked, and then 
boiled in water over a gentle fire for ten 
or more hours to the consistency of furm- 
ity.” The name “hominy grits” is 
sometimes applied to the cracked variety. 
Tooker suggests as the radicals ahdm, ‘he 
beats or pounds’; min , ‘berry or fruit,’ 
‘grain.’ The name may be a reduction 
of some of the words in which it occurs, 
as rockohominy. Dr Wm. Jones (inf’n, 
1906) says: “It is plain that the form of 
the word hominy is but an abbreviation, 
for what is left is the designative suffix 
-mm, ‘grain,’ and part of a preceding 
modifying stem.” For a discussion of 
the etymology see Gerard in Am. An- 
throp.,* vi, 314, 1904; vii, 226, 1905; 
Tooker, ibid., vi, 682. See Samp . 

(a. f. c. j. n. b. h. ) 

Homna ( Ho-mna , ‘smelling like fish’). 
A division of the Brul6 Teton Sioux.— 
Dorsey in 15th Hep. B. A. E., 218,1897. 

Homnipa. Given as a Karok village on 
Klamath r., n. w. Cal., inhabited in 1860. 

Home-nip-pah.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 
1860. 

Homolobi ( Hd-mol'-ohi , ‘place of the 
breast-like elevation’). A group of ru¬ 
ined pueblos near Winslow, Ariz., which 
were occupied by the ancestors of various 
Hopi clans. See Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. 
A. E., 23, et seq., 1904; Mindeleff in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 29, 1891. 

Homolua. A former Timucua village, 
situated, according to Laudonniere, on 
the s. side of St Johns r., Fla., at its 
mouth, in 1564. De Gourgues placed a 
town of similar name about 60 leagues 
inland on the same river. 

Emola.— Laudonniere (1564) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., n. s., 306, 1869. Homoloa.— Ibid., 331. Homo- 
loua.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., map, 1590. Molloua.— 
Laudonniere, op. cit., 242. Moloa.— Fontaneda 
(1575), ibid., 2d s., 264, 1875. Molona.— Laudon¬ 
niere, op. cit., 245. Monloua. —Gourges, ibid., 2d 
s., 276, 1875. Omoloa.— Laudonniere, op. cit., 253. 


Homosassa (‘ abundance of pepper ’). A 
Seminole town in Hernando co., Fla., in 
1837. There are now a river and a town 
of the same name in that locality. 

Homa Susa.—Drake, Ind. Chron., 215,1836. 

Homuarup. A former Karok village on 
Klamath r., Cal. 

Home-war-roop.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 
1860. 

Homulchison. A Squawmish village 
community at Capilano cr., Burrard inlet, 
Brit. Col.; the former headquarters of the 
supreme chief of the tribe. Pop. 45 in 
1904. 

Capalino.—Can. Ind. AfL, 276, 1894. Capitano 
Creek.—Can. Ind. Aff., 308, 1879. Homu'ltcison.— 
Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475, 1900. Kapi- 
lano.—Can. Ind. Aff., 357, 1897. 

Honabanou. Coxe (Carolana, 14, 1741) 
says that “fifteen leagues above the Ho- 
hio ... to the w. is the river Hona¬ 
banou, upon which dwells a nation of the 
same name, and another called Amicoa.” 
On the map accompanying his work this 
river is represented as in s. e. Missouri, 
entering the Mississippi immediately 
above or nearly opposite the mouth of 
the Ohio. As there is no stream on the 
w. side between the mouth of the Ohio 
and St Genevieve co. that can be called 
a river, and no Indians of the names 
mentioned are known to have resided in 
that section, both must be rejected as un- 
authentic, and indeed mythical so far as 
the locality is concerned. This river has 
evidently been laid down from Henne¬ 
pin’s map of 1697, relating to the “New 
Discovery,” which is admitted to be un- 
authentic so far as it relates to the region 
s. of the mouth of Illinois r. It is evident, 
however, that Coxe has attempted to give 
the name Ouabano (q. v.), which La Salle 
applied to some Indians who visited Ft St 
Louis, on Matagorda bay, Texas, from a 
westerly section. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Honani. The Badger phratry of the 
Hopi, comprising the Honani (Badger), 
Muinyan (Porcupine), Wishoko (Turkey- 
buzzard), Buli (Butterfly),Buliso (Even¬ 
ing Primrose), and Kachina (Sacred Dan¬ 
cer) clans. According to Fewkes this 
people settled at Kishyuba, a spring 
sacred to the Kachinas, before going to 
Tusayan. The Honani and Kachina 
phratries are intimately associated. The 
former settled Walpi when the village 
was on the old site, and some of them 
went on to Awatobi, whence they returned 
after the fall of that pueblo. The arrival 
of the Honani in Tusayan was probably 
not earlier than the latter part of the 17th 
century. 

Ho-na-m-nyu-mu.—Fewkes in Am.Anthrop., vii, 
405, 1894 {ny0,-mu= l phratry’). 

Honani. The Badger clan of the Hopi. 
Honani.—Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Honani 
wiiiwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 
(t»in!M=‘clan’). Ho-na'-ni wiin-wu.—Fewkes in 
Am. Anthrop.,Vll, 405,1894. Hon'-wim-wii.—Ibid.. 
404. 


BULL. 30] 


HON ANKI-HOOK-STONES 


559 


Honanki (Hopi: ‘ bear house ’). A pre¬ 
historic cliff-village, attributed to the 
Hopi, in the valley of Oak cr., in the 
“red-rock” country s. of Flagstaff, Ariz.— 
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 558-569, 
1898. 

Honau ( Ho'-na-u ). The Bear phratry 
of the Hopi, comprising the Honau 
(Bear), Tokochi (Wild-cat), Chosro (Bird 
[blue]), Kokyan (Spider), and Hekpa 
(Fir) clans. According to Fewkes these 
people are traditionally said to have been 
the first to arrive in Tusayan. Although 
reputed to be the oldest people in Walpi 
they are now almost extinct in that pue¬ 
blo, and are not represented in Sicho- 
movi. They exist however at Mishong- 
novi. 

Honau.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 684,1900. 
Ho'-nau-iih.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 
1894. Honin nyumu.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
38,1891 (nyumu— 1 phratry ’). Hon-namu.— Voth, 
Traditions of the Hopi, 36, 1905. 

Honau. The Bear clan of the Hopi. 
Honan.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884 (mis¬ 
print). Ho'-nau.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
39, 1891. Honau wiiiwu. —Fewkes in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 584,1900. Honawuu. —Dorsey and Voth, 
Mishongnovi Ceremonies, 175, 1902. 

Honayawus. See Farmer’s Brother . 

Honeoye (‘his finger lies.’—Hewitt). A 
former Seneca settlement on Honeoye cr., 
near Honeoye lake, N. Y.; destroyed by 
Sullivan in 1779. 

Anagangaw.— Livermore (1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., VI, 327-329, 1850. Anjageen. —Pouchot, map 
(1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. An- 
nagaugaw.— Livermore,op.cit. Anyayea.— Hubley 
(1779) quoted by Conover, Kanadega and Geneva 
MS., B. A. E. Hannayaye.— Sullivan (1779) quoted 
by Conover, ibid. Hanneyaye. —Nukerck (1779), 
ibid. Haunyauya.— Grant (1779),ibid. Honeyoyc. — 
Dearborn (1779), ibid. Honneyayea. — Fellows 
(1779), ibid. Onnayayou. —McKendry (1779), ibid. 
Onyauyah.— Barton (1779), ibid. 

Honest John. See Tedyuskung. 

Honetaparteenwaz. Given as a division 
of the Yankton of the North under chief 
Tattunggarweeteco in 1804, but probably 
intended for the Hunkpatina. 
Hone-ta-par-teen-waz. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 
34, 1806; Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 99 ; 1905. 

Honkut. A division of Maidu living 
near the mouth of Honcut cr., Yuba co., 
Cal. 

Hoancuts.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 420,1874. 
Hoan'-kut.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
282, 1877. Honcut. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450, 
1874. 

Honmoyaushu ( Hon-mo-yau'-cu ). A 
former Chumashan village at El Barranco, 
near San Pedro, Ventura co., Cal.—Hen- 
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. 
E., 1884. 

Honniasontkeronon (Iroquois: ‘peopleof 
the place of crook-necked squashes,’ or 
‘people of the place where they wear 
crosses’). An unidentified people of 
whom Gallin£e was informed by the Iro¬ 
quois as living on Ohio r., above the falls 
at Louisville, Ky. On a map of De l’lsle, 
dated 1722, a small lake called L. Onia- 
sont, around which are the words ‘les 
Oniasontke,’ is placed on the s. side, ap¬ 


parently, of the “Ouabache, otherwise 
called Ohio or Beautiful river,” and the 
outlet of L. Oniasont is made to flow into 
the Ouabache. It may be inferred that 
the Iroquois statement as to the location 
of this people was substantially correct; 
that is, that they lived on a small lake e. 
of Wabash r. and having an outlet into 
that stream, although Honniasontke‘ron- 
no n is an Iroquois euphemism for the 
land of departed spirits. (j. n. b. h. ) 
Honniasontkeronons.—Gallin6e (1669) in Margry 
D6c., i, 116,1875. Oniasontke.—De l’lsle, map, 1772. 
Oniasont-Keronons.— Feruow, Ohio Valley, 32,1890. 

Honosonayo (‘white deer’). A clan of 
the ancient Timucua of Florida. 

Honoso Nayo.—Pareja (ca. 1613) quoted by Gat- 
schet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 492, 1878. 

Honowa ( H6 ( nowd, ‘poor people’; sing., 
H6 l now). A principal division of the 
Cheyenne, q. v. 

Hoi nowa. — Grinnell, Social Org. Cheyennes, 136, 
1905. Ho‘nowa.—Mooney, inf n, 1905. Poor.—Dor¬ 
sey in Field Columb. Mus. Pub., no. 103, 62, 1905. 

Honsading. A former Hupa village situ¬ 
ated on the right bank of Trinity r., Cal., 
near the entrance of the canyon through 
which the river flows after leaving Hupa 
valley. (p. e. g. ) 

Aknutl.—Goddard, inf’n, 1903 (Yurok name). 
Hoonselton.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 66,1872. Hoonsolton.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 82,1870. Hun'-sa-tung.—Powers in 
Cont. N. A.Ethnol.,in, 73,1877. Loonsolton.— H. R. 
Kep. 98, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 428, 1873. Okahno.— 
Meyer, Nachdem Sacramento, 282,1855. Oka-no.— 
McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 
194,1853. Oke-noke.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes,in, 139,1853. Okenope.—Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., 
1852. 

Honwee Vallecito. A Diegueno ranch- 
eria represented in the treaty of 1852 at 
Santa Isabel, s. Cal.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 132, 1857. 

Hook. One of the small tribes or bands 
formerly living in South Carolina on the 
lower Pedee and its affluents, and possibly 
of Siouan stock. Lawson (Hist. Car., 45, 
1860) refers to them as foes of the Santee 
and as living in 1701 about the mouth of 
Winyaw bay, S. C. Consult Mooney, 
Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 
1895. See Backhook. 

Hooka ( Ho'-o-ka ). The Dove clans of 
the Keresan pueblos of Santa Ana, San 
Felipe, and Sia, New Mexico. That of 
the last-mentioned village is extinct. 
Hohoka-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., iXj 350,. 
1896 (Sia form; hdno = ‘people’). ^ Hooka-hano.— 
Ibid. (Santa Ana form). Huuka-hano. Ibid. (San 
Felipe form). 

Hook-stones. A variety of prehistoric 
artifacts to which no particular purpose 
can be assigned. They are heavy, hook¬ 
like objects, from 1 to 4 or 5 in. in 
length and of diversified proportions. 
The principal variety standing on the 
heavy rounded base resembles somewhat 
the letter Z; others are longer and more 
slender, with the base less developed, but 
with the hook more pronounced. An 
example with hook at both ends, prob¬ 
ably not properly eluded in this group, 


560 


HOOLATASSA-HOPI 


[b. a. e. 



is given by Yates in Morehead’s Prehis¬ 
toric Implements. They are usually made 
of soapstone and other soft rock, and occur 
in burials in s. California, on the islands 
as well as on the mainland, 
and no doubt had symbolic use 
(see Problematical objects). A 
number of these objects, now 
in the Peabody Museum, are 
described by Putnam, w r ho 
prefers to regard them as im¬ 
plements, and mentions signs 
of use. Two examples were 
obtained from a grave at the 
ancient soapstone quarry of Santa Catalina 
id. in 1902 (Holmes), and a deposit of 
about 50 specimens was discovered at Re¬ 
dondo beach, Cal., in 1903 (Palmer). 

Consult Holmes in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1900, 1902; Moorehead, op. cit.; Palmer 
in 2d Bull. S. W. Soc. Archseol. Inst. 
Am., 1905; Putnam in Surv. W. 100th 
Merid., 7, 1879. (w. h. h.) 

Hoolatassa. A former Choctaw town 4 
in. from Abihka, probably in the present 
Kemper co., Miss.—Romans, Fla., 310, 


HOOK-STONE; S . 
CA UFORNIA. 

(palmer) 


1775. 

Hoolikan. See Eulachon. 

Hoonebooey. One of the Shoshoni tribes 
or bands said to have dwelt e. of the Cas¬ 
cade and s. of the Blue mts. of Oregon, in 
1865. Not identified. 

Hoonebooey. —Huntington in Tnd. Aff. Rep., 466, 
1865. Hoo-ne-boo-ly. —Ibid., 471. 

Hooshkal ( Hoosh-kal ). A former Che- 
halis village on the n. shore of Grays 
harbor, Wash.—Gibbs, MS., no. 248, 


B. A. E. 


Hopahka Choctaw. The Choctaw for¬ 
merly residing in Hopahka town in s. 
Mississippi, w. of Pearl r., who are spoken 
of as the most intelligent and influential 
of the tribe. Known also as Cobb Indians, 
from their leader.—Claiborne (1843) in 
Sen. Doc. 168, 28th Cong., 1st sess., 39, 65, 
1844. 


Hopedale. A Moravian Eskimo mission 
village on the e. coast of Labrador, estab¬ 
lished in 1782 (Hind, Lab. Penin., ii, 199, 
1863). Pop. about 155. 

Hopehood. A Norridgewock chief, 
known among his people as Wahowa, 
or Wohawa, who acquired considerable 
notoriety in e. New England in the latter 
part of the 17th century. He was the 
son of a chief called Robinhood. Hope- 
hood’s career is pronounced by Drake 
(Ind. Biog., 130, 1832) to have been one 
of long and bloody exploits. He first 
appears as a participant in King Philip’s 
war, when lie made an attack on a house 
filled with w r omen and children at Ne- 
wichawanoc, about the site of Berwick, 
Me.; all escaped, however, except two 
children and the woman who bravely bar¬ 
red and defended the door. In 1676 he 
was one of the leaders of the e. New Eng¬ 
land tribes who held consultation with 


the English at Taconnet, Me. In 1685 he 
joined Kankamagus and other sachems 
in a letter to Gov. Cranfield of New 
Hampshire, protesting against the en¬ 
deavor of the English to urge the Mo¬ 
hawk to attack them. On Mar. 18, 1690, 
he joined the French under Hertel in a 
massacre at Salmon falls, and in May 
attacked Fox Point, N. H., burning sev¬ 
eral houses, killing 14 persons, and carry¬ 
ing away 6 others. Not long afterward he 
penetrated the Iroquois country, where 
some Canadian Indians, mistaking him 
for an Iroquois, slew him and several of 
his companions. Hopehood was at one 
time a captive in the hands of the English 
and served as a slave for a season in 
Boston. . (c. t.) 

Hopi (contraction of Hopitu , ‘peaceful 
ones,’ or Hopitu-shinumu, ‘peaceful all 
people’: their own name). A body of 
Indians, speaking a Shoshonean dialect, 
occupying 6 pueblos on a reservation of 
2,472,320 acres in n. e. Arizona. The 
name “Moqui,” or “Moki,” by which 
they have been popularly known, 
means ‘dead’ in their own language, 
but as a tribal name it is seemingly 
of alien origin and of undetermined sig¬ 
nification—perhaps from the Keresan 
language (Moslcha in Laguna, Mo-ts in 
Acoma, Mots! in Sia, Cochiti, and San 
Felipe), whence Espejo’s “Mohace” and 
“Mohoce” (1583) and Onate’s “Moho- 
qui ’’ (1598). Bandelier and Cushing be¬ 
lieved the Hopi country, the later pro¬ 
vince of Tusayan, to be identical with the 
Totonteac of Fray Marcos de Niza. 

History .—The Hopi first became known 
to white men in the summer of 1540, 
when Coronado, then at Cibola (Zuni), 
dispatched Pedro de Tobar and Fray Juan 
de Padilla to visit 7 villages, constituting 
the province of Tusayan, toward the w. 
or n. w. The Spaniards were not re¬ 
ceived with friendliness at first, but the 
opposition of the natives was soon over¬ 
come and the party remained among the 
Hopi several days, learning from them 
of the existence of the Grand canyon of 
the Colorado, which Cardenas was later 
ordered to visit. The names of the 
Tusayan towns are not recorded by Cor¬ 
onado’s chroniclers, so that with the ex¬ 
ception of Oraibi, Shongopovi, Mishong- 
novi, Walpi,and Awatobi, it is not known 
with certainty what villages were inhab¬ 
ited when the Hopi first became known 
to the Spaniards. Omitting Awatobi, 
which was destroyed in 1700, w T it.h the 
possible exception of Oraibi none of these 
towns now occupies its 16th century site. 

Francisco Sanchez Chamuscado visited 
Zuni in 1581 and speaks of the Hopi 
country as Asay or Osay, but he did not 
visit it on account of the snow. Two 
years later, however, the province was 
visited by Antonio de Espejo, who jour- 


BULL. 30] 


HOPI 


561 


neyed 28 leagues from Zuni to the first of 
the Hopi pueblos in 4 days. The Mohoce, 
or Mohace, of this explorer consisted of 
5 large villages, the population of one of 
which, Aguato (Ahuato, Zaguato=Awa- 
tobi) he estimated at 50,000, a figure 
perhaps 25 times too great. The names 
of the other towns are not given. The 
natives had evidently forgotten the horses 
of Tobar and Cardenas of 43 years before, 
as they now became frightened at these 
strange animals. The Hopi presented 
Espejo with quantities of cotton “towels,’’ 
perhaps kilts, for which they were cele¬ 
brated then as now. 

The next Spaniard to visit the “Moho- 
qui” was Juan de Onate, governor and 
colonizer of New Mexico, who took pos¬ 
session of the country and made the In¬ 
dians sw r ear to obedience and vassalage on 
Nov. 15,1598. Their spiritual welfare was 
assigned to Fray Juan de Claros, although 
no active missions were established 
among the Hopi until nearly a generation 
later. The 5 villages at this time, so far 
as it is possible to determine them, were 
Aguato or Aguatuybd (Awatobi), Gaspe 
(Gualpe=Walpi), Comupavf or Xumu- 
pamf (Shongopovi), Majananf (Mishong- 
novi), and Olalla or Naybf (Oraibi). 

The first actual missionary work under¬ 
taken among the Hopi was in 1629, on 
Aug. 20 of which year Francisco de Por- 
ras, Andres Gutierrez, Cristobal de la 
Concepcion, and Francisco de San Buena¬ 
ventura, escorted by 12 soldiers, reached 
Awatobi, where the mission of San Ber¬ 
nardino was founded in honor of the day, 
followed by the establishment of missions 
also at Walpi, Shongopovi, Mishongnovi, 
and Oraibi. Porras was poisoned by the 
natives of Awatobi in 1633. All the 
Hopi missions seem to have led a preca¬ 
rious existence until 1680, when in the 
general Pueblo revolt of that year four 
resident missionaries were killed and the 
churches destroyed. Henceforward no 
attempt was made to reestablish any of 
the missions save that of Awatobi in 
1700, which so incensed the other Hopi 
that they fell upon it in the night, kill¬ 
ing many of its people and compelling 
its permanent abandonment. Before the 
rebellion Mishongnovi and Walpi had 
become reduced to visitas of the missions 
of Shongopovi and Oraibi respectively. 
At the time of the outbreak the popula¬ 
tion of Awatobi was given as 800, Shongo¬ 
povi 500, and Walpi 1,200. Oraibi, it is 
said, had 14,000 gentiles before their con¬ 
version, but that they were consumed 
by pestilence. This number is doubtless 
greatly exaggerated. 

The pueblos of # Walpi, Mishongnovi, 
and Shongopovi, situated in the foothills, 
were probably abandoned about the time 
of the Pueblo rebellion, and new villages 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-36 


built on the adjacent mesas for the purpose 
of defense against the Spaniards, whose 
vengeance w r as needlessly feared. • The 
reconquest of the New Mexican pueblos 
led many of their inhabitants to seek 
protection among the Hopi toward the 
close of the 17th century. Some of these 
built the pueblo of Payupki, on the Mid¬ 
dle mesa, but were taken back and set¬ 
tled in Sandia about the middle of the 
18th century. About the year 1700 Hano 



WIKI, CHIEF PRIEST OF THE ANTELOPE SOCIETY; PUEBLO OF 
WALPI. (VROMAN, PHOTO. ) 


was established on the East mesa, near 
Walpi, by Tewa from near Abiquiu, 
N. Mex., who came on the invitation of 
the Walpians. Here they have lived unin¬ 
terruptedly, and although they have inter¬ 
married extensively with the Hopi, they 
retain their native speech and many of 
their distinctive tribal rites and customs. 
Two other pueblos, Sichomovi on the 
First mesa, built by Asa clans (q. v.) 








562 


HOPI 


[b. a. e. 


from the Rio Grande, and Shipaulovi, 
founded by a colony from Shongopovi on 
the Second or Middle mesa, are both of 
comparatively modern origin, having 
been established about the middle of the 
18th century, or about the time the Pay- 
upki people returned to their old home. 
Thus the pueblos of the ancient province 
of Tusayan now consist of the following: 
Walpi, Sichomovi, and Hano, on the 
First or East mesa; pop. (1900) 205, 119, 
and 160, respectively, exclusive of about 
20 who have established homes in the 
plain; total 504. Mishongnovi, Shongo¬ 
povi, and Shupaulovi, on the Second or 
Middle mesa; estimated pop. 244, 225, 
and 126; total 595. Oraibi, on the Third 
or West mesa; pop. (1890) 905. Total 
Hopi population (1904) officially given as 
2,338, including about 160 Tewa of Hano. 

Social organization .—The Hopi people 
are divided into several phratries, con¬ 
sisting of numerous clans, each of which 
preserves its distinct legends, ceremonies, 
and ceremonial jmraphernalia. Out of 



HOPI MAN AND WIFE; PUEBLO OF MISHONGNOVI. (vROMAN, 
Photo.) 

these clan organizations have sprung 
religious fraternities, the head-men of 
which are still members of the dominant 
clan in each phratry. The relative im¬ 
portance of the clans varies in different 
pueblos; many that are extinct in some 
villages are powerful in others. The 
12 phratries and their dependent dans 
as represented in the East Mesa villages 
are as follows: 

1. Ala-Lengya (Horn-flute) phratry: Ala 
(Horn), Pangwa (Mountain sheep), So- 
wiinwa (Deer), Chubio (Antelope), Chaiz- 
ra (Elk), Lehu (Seed grass), Shiwanu 
(Ant), Anu (Red-ant), Tokoanu (Black- 
ant), Wukoanu (Great-ant), Leliotu 
(Tiny-ant), Shakwalengya (Blue flute), 
Masilengya (Drab or All-colors flute). 


2. Patki (Water-house or Cloud) phra¬ 
try: Patki (Water-house), Kau (Corn), 
Omauwu (Rain-cloud), Tanaka (Rain¬ 
bow), Talawipiki (Lightning), Kwan 
(Agave), Siwapi (‘Rabbit-brush’), Pa- 
wikya (aquatic animal [Duck]), Pakwa 
(Frog), Pavatiya (Tadpole), Murzibusi 
(Bean), Kawaibatunya (Watermelon), 
Yoki (Rain). 

3. Chua (Snake) phratry: Chua (Snake), 
Tohouh (Puma), Huwi(Dove), Ushu (Co¬ 
lumnar cactus), Puna (Cactus fruit), 
Yungyu (Opuntia), Nabowu (Opuntia 
frutescens), Pivwani (Marmot), Pihcha 
(Skunk), Kalashiavu (Raccoon), Tubish 
(Sorrow), Patung (Squash), Atoko 
(Crane), Kele (Pigeon-hawk), Chinunga 
(Thistle b The last 5 are extinct. 

4. Pakab (Reed) phratry: Pakab 
(Reed), Kwahu (Eagle), K wayo (Hawk), 
Koyonya (Turkey), Tawa (Sun), Paluna 
(Twin-brother of Puhukonghoy a), Shohu 
(Star), Massikwayo (Chicken-hawk), 
Kahabi (Willow), Tebi (Greasewood). 

5. Kokop (Wood) phratry: Kokop 
(Wood), Ishauu (Coyote), Kwewu 
(Wolf), Sikyataiyo (Yellow-fox), Le- 
taiyo (Gray-fox), Zrohona (small mam- 
vial), Masi(Masauu, dead, skeleton, Ruler 
of the Dead), Tuvou (Pinon), Hoko 
(Juniper), Awata(Bow), Sikyachi (small 
yellow bird), Tuvuchi (small red bird). 

6. Taho (Cottontail rabbit) phratry: 
Tabo (Cottontail rabbit), Sowi (Jackrab- 
bit). 

7. Tawa (Sand or Earth) phratry: Ku- 
kuch, Bachipkwasi, Nananawi, Momobi 
(varieties of lizard), Pisa (White sand), 
Tuwa (Red sand), Chukai (Mud), Sihu 
(Flower), Nanawu (small striped squir¬ 
rel). 

8. Honau (Bear) phratry: Honau 
(Bear), Tokochi (Wild-cat), Chosro 
(Blue-bird), Kokvan (Spider), Hekpa 
(Fir). 

9. Kachina (Sacred dancer) phratry: 
Kachina (Sacred dancer), Gyazru (Paro¬ 
quet), Angwusi (Raven), Sikyachi (Yel¬ 
low bird),Tawamana(Blackbird), Salabi 
(Spruce), Suhubi (Cottonwood). 

10. Asa (Tansy mustard) phratry: Asa 
(Tansy mustard), Chakwaina (Black- 
earth Kachina), Kwingyap (Oak), Hos- 
boa (Chapparal cock), Posiwu (Magpie), 
Chisro (Snow - bunting), Puchkohu 
(Boomerang rabbit-stick), Pisha (Field- 
mouse). 

11. Piba (Tobacco) phratry: Piba (To¬ 
bacco), Chongyo (Pipe). 

12. Honani (Badger) phratry: Honani 
(Badger), Muinyawu (Porcupine), Wish- 
oko (Turkey-buzzard), Buli (Butterfly), 
Buliso (Evening Primrose), Kachina 
(Sacred dancer). 

Most of the above clans occur in the 
other Hopi pueblos, but not in Hano. 
There are a few clans in the Middle Mesa 







BULL. 30] 


HOPI 


563 


villages and in Oraibi that are not now 
represented at Walpi. For the Hano 
clans see Hano. 

The Honau (Bear) clan is represented 
on each mesa and is supposed to be the 
oldest in Tusayan. It is said to have come 
originally from the Rio Grande valley, 
but on the East mesa the clan is now so 
reduced as to be threatened with extinc¬ 
tion at Walpi within a generation. 

The Chua (Snake) people were among 
the earliest to settle in Tusayan, joining the 
Bears and living with them when Walpi 
was in the foot-hills. The legends of this 
people declare that they came from pue¬ 
blos in the N., near Navaho mt., on the Rio 
Colorado. In their northern home thev 
were united with the Ala (Horn) people”, 
who separated from them in their south¬ 
erly migration and united with the Flute 
people at the now-ruined pueblo of Leng- 
yanobi, n. of the East mesa. The com¬ 
bined Snake and Ala people control the 
Antelope and Snake fraternities, and 
possess the fetishes and other parapher¬ 
nalia of the famous Snake dance. The 
palladium of this people is kept at Walpi, 
thus leading to the belief that this was 
the first Hopi home of the Snake and 
kindred people. 

The Lengya (Flute) people, once very 
strong, are now almost extinct at the East 
mesa, but are numerous in some of the 
other pueblos. They are said to have 
lived formerly at Lengyanobi and to have 
come to Tusayan from the S., or from pue¬ 
blos along Little Colorado r. The chief 
of the Flute priesthood controls the Flute 
ceremony, which occurs biennially, alter¬ 
nating with the Snake dance. There are 
two divisions in the Flute fraternity, one 
known as the Drab Flute and the other as 
the Blue Flute, the former being extinct 
at Walpi. Sichomovi and Hano have 
no representatives of this phratry, but 
it is represented in all the other Hopi 
villages. 

There are Ala, or Horn, people in most 
of the Hopi pueblos, and clans belonging 
to this phratry are named generally after 
horned animals. Their ancestors came 
to Walpi with the Flute people and were 
well received, because they had formerly 
lived with the Snake people in the N. 
They now join the Snake priest in the 
Antelope rites of the Snake dance. 

The Patki (Water-house, or Cloud) 
phratry includes a number of clans that 
came to the Hopi country from the S., 
.and the now ruined villages along the 
Little Colorado are claimed by this people 
to have been their former homes. They 
were comparatively late arrivals, and 
brought a high form of sun and serpent 
worship that is still prominent in the Win¬ 
ter Solstice ceremony. The Sun priests, 
who are well represented in most of the 


Hopi pueblos and are especially strong at 
Walpi, accompanied this people. Others, 
as the Piba or Tobacco clan, came to 
Walpi from Awatobi on the destruction 
of the latter pueblo in 1700. 

The Pakab (Reed) people also came 
from Awatobi, settling first at the base 
of the Middle mesa, whence they went 
to Walpi. They control the Warrior 
society called Kalektaka. 

The Kokop (Wood) phratry. came from 
Sikyatki and have a few representatives 
in Walpi and in the other villages. The 
traditional home of the Kokop and allied 
clans was Jemez (q. v.), in New Mexico. 

The Honani or Badger phratry origi¬ 
nally lived at Awatobi, and after the de¬ 
struction of that pueblo went to Oraibi 
and Walpi. It is now largely represented 
in Sichomovi, which village” it joined the 
Asa in founding. The Buli, or Butterfly, 
clan is closely related to the Honani peo¬ 
ple, and both are probably of Keresan or 
of Tewa origin. 



HOPI 8NAKE CEREMONY 


The Kachina phratry is also of New 
Mexican origin, and in some of the pue¬ 
blos shares with the Honani the control 
of the masked dance organization called 
Kachinas; but it is not strong in Walpi. 

The Asa people were Tewa in kin, 
coming originally from the Rio Grande 
valley and settling successively at Zuni 
and in the Canyon de Chelly. This 
people, with the Honani, founded Sicho¬ 
movi, and is now one of the strongest 
clans on the East mesa. Only one or 
two members now live at Walpi; a few 
live in the Middle Mesa villages, but none 
at Oraibi. 

Archeology .—The erection and final 
abandonment of their villages by the va¬ 
rious Hopi clans during their migrations 
and successive shiftings have left many 
ruins, now consisting largely of mounds, 
both within their present territory and re¬ 
mote from it. Ruins of villages which the 
traditions of the Hopi ascribe to their an¬ 
cestors are found as far n. as the Rio Colo. 




564 


HOPI 


[b. a. e. 


rado, w. to Flagstaff, Ariz., s. to the Verde 
valley, Tonto basin, and the Rio Gila, 
and e. to the Rio Grande in New Mexico. 
Therefore, although Shoshonean in lan¬ 
guage, the present Hopi population and 
culture are composite, made up of accre¬ 
tions from widely divergent sources and 
from people of different linguistic stocks. 
Some of the Hopi ruins have been ex¬ 
plored by the Bureau of American Eth¬ 
nology, the National Museum, and the 
Field Museum of Natural History. One 
of the most celebrated of these is Awatobi 
(q. v.) on Jeditoh or Antelope mesa, the 
walls of whose mission church, built prob¬ 
ably in 1629, are still partly standing. 

Sikyatki (q.v.), another large and now 
well-known ruin, in the foot-hills of the 
East mesa, was occupied in prehistoric 
times by Kokop clans of Keresan people 
from the Rio Grande country. They had 
attained a highly artistic development as 
exhibited by their pottery, which is prob¬ 
ably the finest ware ever manufactured by 
Indians n. of Mexico. 

The original clans of Walpi are said to 
have occupied three sites after their ar¬ 
rival in the Hopi country, settling first 
on the terrace w. of the East mesa, then 
, higher up and toward the s., where the 
foundation walls of a Spanish mission 
church can still be traced. From this 
point they moved to the present Walpi 
on the summit of the mesa, apparently 
soon after the Pueblo revolt of 1680. See 
Kisakobi, Kuchaptuvela. 

Payupki, a picturesque ruin on the 
Middle mesa, was settled by Tanoan 
people (apparently Tigua) about the year 
1700 and abandoned about 1742, when the 
inhabitants were taken back to the Rio 
Grande and settled at Sandia. 

Chukubi, a prehistoric pueblo midway 
between Payupki and Shupaulovi, also 
on the Middle mesa, was built probably 
by southern clans whose descendants form 
most of the present population of the 
Middle mesa villages. 

Old Shongopovi lay in the foot-hills at 
the base of the Middle mesa, below the 
present pueblo of that name. This town 
was inhabited at the time of the Spanish 
advent, and near it was built a church 
the walls of which, up to a few j^ears ago, 
served as a sheep corral. Its original in¬ 
habitants came from the Little Colorado 
valley. 

The ruins of Old Mishongnovi are on 
the terrace below the present pueblo. 
Its walls are barely traceable. From 
its cemetery beautiful pottery, resembling 
that of Sikyatki, has been exhumed. 

Some of the most important ruins of 
the Hopi country are situated on the rim 
of Antelope mesa, not far from Awatobi, 
and are remains of Keresan pueblos. 
Among these are Kawaika and Chakpa- 


hu. In the same neighborhood are the 
ruins of Kokopki, once occupied by the 
Wood clan, originally from Jemez. North 
of the present Hopi mesas are ruins at 
Kishuba, where the Kachina clan once 
lived, and at Lengyanobi, the home of the 
Flute people. The ruins along the lower 
Little Colorado, near Black falls, known 
as Wukoki, and those called Homolobi, 
near Winslow, are likewise claimed by 
the Hopi as the homes of ancestral clans. 
Wukoki may have been inhabited by the 
Snake people, while the inhabitants of 
Homolobi were related to southern clans 
that went to Walpi and Zuni. 

Characteristics and customs. —The Hopi 
are rather small of stature, but muscular 
and agile. Both sexes have reddish- 
brown skin, high cheek-bones, straight 
broad nose, slanting eyes, and large 
mouths with gentle expression. As a 
rule the occiput exhibits cradle-board 
flattening (see Artificial head deforma¬ 
tion). The proportion of albinos is 
large. The hair is usually straight and 
black, but in some individuals it is 
brownish and in others it is wavy. The 
hair of the men is commonly “banged” 
in front or cut in “terraces”; the long 
hair behind is gathered in a sort of short 
queue and tied at the neck. The ma¬ 
trons wear their hair in two coils which 
hang in front. On reaching puberty the 
girls dress their hair in whorls at the sides 
of the head, in imitation of the squash 
blossom, the symbol of fertility (see illus¬ 
tration). The women tend to corpulency 
and age rapidly; they are prolific, but 
the infant mortality is very great (see 
Health and Disease). Boys and girls usu¬ 
ally have fine features, and the latter 
mature early, often being married at the 
age of 15 or 16 years. Bachelors and 
spinsters are rare. A few men dress as 
women and perform women’s work. 

In mental traits the Hopi are the 
equal of any Indian tribe. They possess 
a highly artistic sense, exhibited by 
their pottery, basketry, and weaving. 
They are industrious, imitative, keen in 
bargaining, have some inventive genius, 
and are quick of perception. Among 
themselves they are often merry, greatly 
appreciating jests and practical jokes. 
They rarely forget a kindness or an in¬ 
jury, and often act from impulse and in 
a childlike way. They are tractable, 
docile, hospitable, and frugal, and have 
always sought to be peaceable, as their 
tribal name indicates. They believe in 
witchcraft, and recognize many omens of 
good and bad. 

The Hopi are monogamists, and as a 
rule are faithful in their marital rela¬ 
tions. Murder is unknown, theft is rare, 
and lying is universally condemned. 
Children are respectful and obedient to 


BULL. SO] 


HOPI 


565 


their elders and are never flogged except 
when ceremonially initiated as kachinas. 
From their earliest years they are taught 
industry and the necessity of leading up¬ 
right lives. 

The clothing of the Hopi men consists 
of a calico shirt and short pantaloons, and 
breechcloth, moccasins, and hair bands. 
Bracelets, necklaces of shell, turquoise, or 
silver, and earrings, are commonly worn. 



HOPI MAIDEN. (MOONEY, PHOTO.) 

The women wear a dark-blue woolen 
blanket of native weave, tied with an em¬ 
broidered belt, and a calico manta or 
shawl over one shoulder; their moccasins, 
w r hich are worn only occasionally, are 
made of ox-hide and buckskin, like those 
of the men, to which are attached leg¬ 
gings of the same material, but now often 
replaced by sheepskin. The ear-pend¬ 
ants of the women and girls consist of 
small wooden disks, ornamented with 
turquoise mosaic on one side. Small 


children generally run about naked, and 
old men while working in the fields or 
taking part in ceremonies divest them¬ 
selves of all clothing except the breech¬ 
cloth. 

The governing body of the Hopi is a 
council of hereditary clan elders and 
chiefs of religious fraternities. Among 
these officials there is recognized a speaker 
chief and a war chief, but there has never 
been a supreme chief of all the Hopi. 
Following ancient custom, various activi¬ 
ties inhere in certain clans; for instance, 
one clan controls the warrior society, 
while another observes the sun and deter¬ 
mines the calendar. Each pueblo has 
an hereditary village chief, who directs 
certain necessary communal work, such 
as the cleaning of springs, etc. There 
seems to be no punishment for crime ex¬ 
cept sorcery, to which, under Hopi law, 
all transgressions may be reduced. No 
punishment of a witch or wizard is known 
to have been inflicted at Walpi in recent 
years, but there are traditions of impris¬ 
onment and of the significant and myste¬ 
rious disappearance of those accused of 
witchcraft in former times. 

The Hopi possess a rich mythology and 
folklore, inherited from a remote past. 
They recognize a large number of super¬ 
natural beings, the identification of which 
is sometimes most difficult. Their my¬ 
thology is poetic and highly imaginative, 
and their philosophy replete with incon¬ 
sistency. Their songs and prayers, some of 
which are in foreign languages, as the Ker- 
esan and Tewa, are sometimes very beauti¬ 
ful. They have peculiar marriage cus¬ 
toms, and elaborate rites in which chil¬ 
dren are dedicated to the sun. The bodies 
of the dead are sewed in blankets and de¬ 
posited with food offerings among the 
rocks of the mesas. The Hopi believe in a 
future life in an underworld, but have no 
idea of future punishment. They smoke 
straight pipes in ceremonies, but on secu¬ 
lar occasions prefer cigarettes of tobacco 
wrapped in corn-husks. They never in¬ 
vented an intoxicating drink, and until 
within recent years none of them had 
any desire for such. Although they 
have seasons of ceremonial gaming, they 
do not gamble; and they have no oaths, 
but many, especially among the elders, 
are garrulous and fond of gossip. 

Maize being the basis of their subsist¬ 
ence, agriculture is the principal industry 
of the Hopi. On the average 2,500 acres 
are yearly planted in this cereal, the 
ield in 1904 being estimated at 25,000 
ushels. Perhaps one-third of the annual 
crop is preserved in event of future fail¬ 
ure through drought or other causes. 
There are also about 1,000 acres in peach 
orchards and 1,500 acres in beans, melons, 
squashes, pumpkins, onions, chile, sun- 














566 


HOPI 


tB. A. E. 


flowers, etc. Cotton, wheat, and tobacco 
are also raised in small quantities, but in 
early times native cotton was extensively 
grown. In years of stress desert plants, 
which have always been utilized to some 
extent for food, form an important part 
of the diet. 

The Hopi have of late become more or 
less pastoral. Flocks (officially estimated 
in 1904 at56,000 sheep and 15,000 goats), 
acquired originally from the Spaniards, 
supply wool and skins. They own also 
about 1,500 head of cattle, and 4,350 
horses, burros, and mules. Dogs, chick¬ 
ens, hogs, and turkeys are their only 
other domesticated animals. All small 
desert animals are eaten; formerly ante¬ 
lope, elk, and deer were captured by be¬ 
ing driven into pitfalls or corrals. Com¬ 
munal rabbit hunts are common, the an¬ 
imals being killed with wooden clubs 
shaped like boomerangs (see Rabbit 
sticks). Prairie dogs are drowned out of 
their burrows, coyotes are caught in 
pitfalls made of stones, and small birds 
are captured in snares. 

The Hopi are skilled in weaving, dye¬ 
ing, and embroidering blankets, belts, 
and kilts. Their textile work is durable, 
and shows a great variety of weaves. The 
dark-blue blanket of the Hopi woman is 
an important article of commerce among 
the Pueblos, and their embroidered cere¬ 
monial blankets, sashes, and kilts made of 
cotton have a ready sale among neighbor¬ 
ing tribes. Although the Hopi ceramic 
art has somewhat deteriorated in modern 
times, fair pottery is still made among the 
people of Hano, where one family has 
revived the superior art of the earlier vil¬ 
lagers. They weave basketry in a great 
variety of ways at the Middle Mesa pue¬ 
blos and in Oraibi; but, with the excep¬ 
tion of the familiar sacred-meal plaques, 
which are well made and brightly colored, 
the workmanship is crude. The Hopi 
are clever in making masks and other re¬ 
ligious paraphernalia from hides, and ex¬ 
cel in carving and painting dolls, repre¬ 
senting kachinas, which are adorned with 
bright feathers and cloth. They likewise 
manufacture mechanical toys, which are 
exhibited in some of their dramatic en¬ 
tertainments. Nowhere among the ab¬ 
origines of North America are the Hopi 
excelled in dramaturgic exhibitions, in 
some of which their imitations of birds 
and other animals are marvelously real¬ 
istic. 

The Hopi language is classified as Sho- 
shonean; but, according to Gatschet, it 
“seems to contain many archaic words 
and forms not encountered in the other 
dialects, and many vocables of its own.” 
The .published vocabularies are very 
limited, and comparatively little is known 
of the grammatical structure of the lan¬ 


guage; but it is evident that it contains 
many words of Keresan, Tewa, Pima, 
Zuni, Ute, Navaho, and Apache derivation. 
As among other Southwestern tribes a 
number of words are modified Spanish, as 
those for horse, sheep, melon, and the 
names for other intrusive articles and 
objects. Slight dialectic differences are 
noticeable in the speech of Oraibi and 
Walpi, but the language of the other 
pueblos is practically uniform. The 
Hopi language is melodious and the 
enunciation clear. The speech of the 
people of Awatobi is said to have had a 
nasal intonation, while the Oraibi speak 
drawlingly. Although they accompany 
their speech with gestures, few of the 
Hopi understand the sign language. The 
Keresan people have furnished many 
songs, with their words, and Zuni and 
Pima songs have also been introduced. 
Some of the prayers also have archaic 
Tanoan or Keresan words. 

The Hopi are preeminently a religious 
people, much of their time, especially in 
winter, being devoted to ceremonies for 
rain and the growth of crops. Their my¬ 
thology is a polytheism largely tinged 
with ancestor worship and permeated 
with fetishism. They originally had no 
conception of a great spirit corresponding 
to God, nor were they ever monotheists ; 
and, although they have accepted the 
teachings of Christian missionaries, these 
have not had the effect of altering their 
primitive beliefs. Their greatest gods 
are deified nature powers, as the Mother 
Earth and the Sky god—the former 
mother, and the latter father, of the 
races of men and of marvelous animals, 
which are conceived of as closely allied. 

The earth is spoken of as having always 
existed. In Hopi mythology the human 
race was not created, but generated from 
the earth, from which man emerged 
through an opening called the sipapu f 
now typified by the Grand canyon of 
the Colorado. The dead are supposed 
to return to the underworld. The Sky 
Father and the Earth Mother have many 
names and are personated in many ways; 
the latter is represented by a spider; the 
former by a bird—a hawk or an eagle. 
Such names as Fire god, Germ god, and 
others are attributal designations of the 
great male powers of nature, or its male 
germinative principle. All supernatural 
beings are supposed to influence the rain 
and consequently the growth of crops. 
Every clan religion exhibits strong ances¬ 
tral worship, in which a male and a 
female ancestral tutelary of the clan, 
called by a distinctive clan name, is pre¬ 
eminent. The Great Horned or Plumed 
Serpent, a form of sky god, derived from 
the S., and introduced by the Patki and 
other southern clans, is prominent in sun 


bill. SO] 


HOPI 


567 


ceremonies. The number of subordinate 
supernatural personages is almost unlim¬ 
ited. These are known as “kachinas,” 
a term referring to the magic power inher¬ 
ent in every natural object for good or 
for bad. Many of these kachinas are 
personations of clan ancestors, others are 
simply beings of unknown relationship 
but endowed with magic powers. Each 
kachina possesses individual character¬ 
istics, and is represented in at least six 
different symbolic colors. The world- 
quarters, or six cardinal points, play an 
important role in Hopi mythology and 
ritual. Fetishes, amulets, charms, and 
mascots are commonly used to insure luck 
in daily occupations, and for health and 
success in hunting, racing, gaming, and 
secular performances. The Hopi cere¬ 
monial calendar consists of a number of 
monthly festivals, ordinarily* of 9 days’ 
duration, of which the first 8 are devoted 
to secret rites in kivas (q. v.) or in rooms 
set apart for that purpose, the final day be¬ 
ing generally devoted to a spectacular pub- 
licceremonyor “dance.” Every great fes¬ 
tival is held under the auspices of a special 
religious fraternity or fraternities, and is 
accompanied with minor events indicating 
a former duration of 20 days. Among 
the most important religious fraternities 
are the Snake, Antelope, Flute, Sun, Lala- 
kontu, Owakultu, Mamzrautu, Kachina, 
Tataukyamu, Wuwuchimtu,- Aaltu, Kwa- 
kwautu, and Kalektaka. There are also 
other organized priesthoods, as the Yaya 
and the Poshwympkia, whose functions 
are mainly those of doctors or healers. 
Several ancient priesthoods, known by 
the names Koyimsi, Paiakyamu, and 
Chukuwympkia, function as clowns or 
fun-makers during the sacred dances of 
the Kachinas. The ceremonial year is 
divided into two parts, every great cere¬ 
mony having a major and a minor per¬ 
formance occurring about 6 months apart; 
and every 4 years, when initiations occur, 
most ceremonies are celebrated inextenso. 
The so-called Snake and Flute dances are 
performed biennially at all the pueblos 
except Sichomovi and Hano, and alter¬ 
nate with each other. Ceremonies are 
also divided into those with masked and 
those with unmasked participants, the 
former, designated kachinas, extending 
from January to July, the latter occurring 
in the remaining months of the year. 
The chief of each fraternity has a badge 
of his office and conducts both the secret 
and the open features of the ceremony. 
The fetishes and idols used in the sacred 
rites are owned by the priesthood and are 
arranged by its chief in temporary altars 
(q. v.), in front oi which dry-paintings 
(q. v.) are made. The Hopi ritual is 
extraordinarily complex and time-con¬ 
suming, and the paraphernalia required 


is extensive. Although the Hopi cultus 
has become highly modified by a semi- 
arid environment, it consisted originally 
of ancestor worship, embracing worship 
of the great powers of nature—sky, sun, 
moon, fire, rain, and earth. A confusion 
of effect and cause and an elaboration of 
the doctrine of signatures pervade all their 
rites, which in the main may be regarded 
as sympathetic magic. 

Consult Dorsey and Voth in the publi¬ 
cations of the Field Columbian Museum; 
Fewkes in Reports of the Bureau of Amer¬ 
ican Ethnology and in various papers in 
the American Anthropologist, the Journal 
of American Folk-lore, and the Journal 
of American Ethnology and Archaeology; 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891. See 
Pueblos , Shoshonean, and the pueblos above 
named. (j. w. f.) 

A-ar-ke.— White, MS. Hist. Apaches, B. A. E., 
1875 (Apache name). Ah-mo-kai.— Eaton in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. T-ibes, iv, 221,1854 (Zufii name). 
Ai-yah-kin-nee, —Ibid., 220 (Navaho name). Alo- 
qui.— Escalante (1775-1776) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 185, 1889. Amaques. —Short, 
N. Aim of Antiq., 332,1880 (wrong identification). 
Amaqui. —Ibid. A’moekwikwe. —ten Kate, Reizen 
in N. Am., 264, 1885 (‘smallpox-folk’ : Zufii 
name). A-mo-kini.— Bowman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
136, 1884 (Zufii name; ‘kini’=fcwe, ‘people’). 
A-mo-kwi.— Vandever in Ind. Aff. Rep., 168,1890 
(Zuniname). A'-mu-kwi-kwe. —ten Kate, Synon- 
ymie, 7, 1884 (‘smallpox people’: Zufii name). 
Asay.— Bustamante and Gallegos (1582) in Doc. 
In<$d., xv, 86, 1871 (also Osay, p. 93). Bokeaf.— 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia Tigua 
name). Buhk’herk. — Ibid. (Isleta Tigua name 
for Tusayan). Bukin.— Ibid. (Isleta name for the 
people). Chinouns.— Hoffman in Bull. Soc. d’An- 
throp. Paris, 206, 1883 ( = ‘Moquis de 1’Arizona’). 
Cf-nyu-muh.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, v, 
33,^1892 (‘people’: own name; c=sh). Cummoa- 
qui. —Viceroy Monterey ( ca . 1602) in Doc. In6d., 
xvi, 60, 1871. Cummooqui. —Viceroy Monterey 
cited by Duro, Don Diego de Pefialosa, 24, 1882. 
E-ar'-ke. —White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes, 
MS., B. A. E., 2, n. d. ( = ‘ live high up on top 
of the mesas’: Apache name). Eyakrni dine. — 
Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Navaho name). Ha- 
pe-ka.— Hodge, Arizona, 169, 1877 ( = Hepekya- 
kwe, ‘ excrement people’: a Zufii name). Hapi- 
tus.— Bowman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 136, 1884 (given 
as their own name). Ho-pees.— Dellenbaugh in 
Bull. Buffalo Soc. Nat. Sci., 170,1877 (‘our peo¬ 
ple’: own name). Hopi.— Fewkes in Am. An- 
throp., V, 9, 1892. Hopii.— Bourke, Moquis of 
Ariz., 117, 1884 (own name). Hopite.— ten Kate, 
Reizen in N. Am., 259,1885 (‘the good ones?’: 
own name). Hopitu. —Ibid. Hopituh. —Minde¬ 
leff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 17, 1891 (own name). 
Ho-pi-tuh-ci'-nu-muh.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., 
v, 9,1892 (‘peaceful people’: own name; c=sh). 
Ho-pi-tuh-ci-nyu-muh.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, v, 33,1892. Ho-pi-tuh-lei-nyu-muh.— Donald¬ 
son, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 13, 1893 (misprint). 
Hupi.— Lummis quoted by Donaldson, ibid., 71. 
Joso.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 612, 1900 
(Tewa name). Khoso.— Hodge cited in 17th Rep. 
B. A. E., 642, 1898 (Santa Clara name). Koco.— 
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 642,1898 (Hano 
Tewa name; c=sh). Koso.— Ibid. K’o-so-o. — 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (San Ildefonso 
Tewa name). Maastoetsjkwe. —ten Kate, Reizen 
in N. Am., 260,1885 (‘the land of M4saw6,’god 
of the earth: given as the name of their country). 
Macueques. —Arricivita, Cronica Ser&fica, it, 424, 
1792 (probably identical). Magui.— Ten Broeck 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 81,1854 (misprint). 
Makis. —Bowman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 136, 1884. 
Maqui.— Venegas, Hist. Cal., II, 194, 1759. Mas- 
tutc'-kwe.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 6, 1884 (‘the 


568 


HOPITSEWAH-HOPOCAN 


[b. a. E. 


country of Ma-sa-wfi ’: given as the Hopi name 
for their country). Mawkeys.—Bartlett in Trans. 
Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, 17, 1848; Squier in Am. 
Review, 523, Nov. 1848 (traders’ corruption of 
‘Moqui’). Miqui,—Johnston in Emory, Recon., 
569, 1848. Mocas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 561, 
1851. Mochi.—Clavijero, Storia della California, 
map, 1789. Mochies.—Calhoun (1849) in Cal. Mess, 
and Corresp., 221, 1850. Mogeris.—Ruxton mis¬ 
quoted by Simpson, Report, 57, 1850. Mogin.— 
Wilkins (1859) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 69, 86th Cong., 
1st sess., 6, 1860 (misprint). Mogui. — Ogilby, 
America, map, 1671. Mohace.— Espejo (1583) in 
Doc. In6d., xv, 119, 1871. Mohoce.—Ibid. 
Mohoce.—Ofiate (1598), ibid., xvi, 307, 1871. 
Mohoqui. — Ibid., 115. Mohotze.— Hakluyt, 
Voyages, 462, 1600. Moke.—Gatschet in Mag. 
Am. Hist., 260, 1882. Mokee.—Pattie, Pers. 

Narr., 91, 1833. Moki.—Hervas, Idea dell’ Uni- 
verso, XVII, 76, 1784. Monkey Indians.—Wilkes, 
U. S. Expl. Exped., iv, 472,1845. Monquoi.—Prich¬ 
ard, Physical Hist. Mankind, v, 430, 1847. Moo- 
qui. — Zarate-Salmeron ( ca. 1629), Relacion, in Land 
of Sunshine, 48, Dec. 1899. Mo-o-tza.—Bandelier 
in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., Ill, 67, 1892 
(Keresan name). Moq.—Saldivar (1618) quoted 
by Prince, N. Mex., 176, 1883. Moqni.—ten Kate, 
Reizen in N. Am., 260, 1885 (misprint). Moqua.— 
Palmer in Am. Nat., XII, 310, 1878. Moques.— 
Blaeu, Atlas, xii, 62, 1667. Moqui,—Benavides, 
Memorial, 33, 1630. Moquian Pueblos.—Shufeldt, 
Ind. Types of Beauty, 14, 1891. Moquinas.—Villa¬ 
senor, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 426, 1748. Moquinos.— 
Kino (1697) in Doc. Hist Mex., 4tli s., I, 285, 1856; 
Rivera, Diario, leg. 950, 1736. Moquins.—Poston 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 388, 1864. Moquitch.—Bar¬ 
ber in Am. Nat,, n, 593, 1877 (Ute name). Mo- 
quois.— Holmes in 10th Rep. Hayden Surv., 403, 
1878. Moquy.— Duro, Don Diego de Pehalosa, 63, 
1882. Morqui.—Hoffman in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 
ix, 465, 1880. Mosl.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 
1895 (Laguna name for Tusayan). Mosicha.—Ibid. 
(Laguna name for the Hopi). Mosquies.—Calhoun 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 65, 1850. Mo-ts.—Hodge, field 
notes, B. A.E.,1895 (Acoma name for the Hopi). 
Mo'-tsi.—Ibid. (Cochiti name). Mouguis.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860. Moxi.—Palou/Re¬ 
lacion Hist., 251, 1787. Muca.— Garcds cited by 
Escudero, Noticias Estad. de Chihuahua, 228, 
1834. Mu-gua.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 149, 1893 
(misprint). Mu-ke.—Corbusier, Yavapai MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 27, 1873-75 (Yavapai name). 
Munchies.—Sage, Scenes in Rocky Mts., 198, 1846. 
Muqui.—Garc£s (1775-76) cited by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 137, 395, 1889. Opii.—Bourke, Mo- 
quis of Ariz., 117,1884 (given as their own name). 
Osaij.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Arch¬ 
seol., in, 62, 1892 (misprint of the following). 
Osay.—Bustamante and Gallegos (1582) in Doc. 
Ined., xv, 93,1871 (alsoAsay, p. 86). Pokkenvolk.— 
ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 264, 1885 (Dutch: 
‘smallpox-folk,’ trans. of Zufii name; see A’moek- 
wikwe, above). She-noma.—Gatschet in Wheeler 
Surv. Rep., vn, 412, 1879 (trans., ‘townspeople’). 
Shinome.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 259, 1885 
(Shinumo, or). Shi-nu-mos.—Powell in Scrib¬ 
ner’s Mag., 202, 212, 1875 (own name: trans., ‘ we, 
the wise’). Shumi.—Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 
118, 1884 (given^ as the sacred name for them¬ 
selves). Ta-sa-un.—Vandeverin Ind. Aff. Rep., 
168,1890 (‘the place of isolated buttes’: Navaho 
name of surrounding country). Tesayan.—Prince, 
N. Mex., 125, 1883. Tonteac.—Sanson, L’Am6r- 
ique, 30, 1657. Tonteaca.—Mota-Padilla, Hist, de 
la Conquista, 111, 1742. Tontonteac.—Wytfliet, 
Hist, des Indes, map, 66-67, 1605. Topin-keua.— 
Cushing cited by Bandelier in Archteol. Inst. 
Papers, iv, 368, 1892 (or Topin-teua; given as the 
Zufii name of which ‘Totonteac’ is a corruption). 
Top-in-te-ua.—Bandelier, ibid., v, 175,1890; iv, 368, 
1892. Totanteac.—Marcos de Ni?a (1539) in Hak¬ 
luyt, Voy., 443, 1600 (misprint). Totonteac.—Ibid., 
440; Coronado (1540), ibid., 452 (see Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, III, 114; v, 175, 1890). Toton- 
teal.—Loew (1875) in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vn, 333, 
1879 (misprint). Totontoac.— Alarcon (1540) in 
Ternaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 315,1838. Tototeac.— 
Visscher, Americse Nova Descr., first map, 1601. 
Tufan,—Writer of 1542 in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 


i, 149,1857. Tucano.—Coronado (1542) in Hakluyt, 
Voy., hi, 453,1600. Tucayan.—Castaneda (ca. 1565) 
in Ternaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 181, 1838; Jara- 
rnillo, ibid., 370. Tuchano.—Zaltieri, map (1566) 
in Winsor, Hist. Am., n, 451, 1886; Wytfliet, Hist, 
des Indes, map, 114-116, 1605. Tusan.—Coronado 
(1540) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 46, 
137,1889. Tusayan.—Castaneda (ca. 1565) in Ter¬ 
naux-Compans, Voy., ix, 58, 1838. Tusayan 
Moqui.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 115, 
1890. Tu-se-an.—Bowman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 136, 
1884 (said to be the Navaho name for the Rocky 
mts.). Tusyan.—Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 
328,1883. Tuzan.—Coronado (1540) in Doc. In5d., 
xiv, 320, 1870. Usaya.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, v, 170, 1890 (or Usayan; “names given 
anciently by the Zufiis to the principal pueblos of 
Moqui’’). Usaya-kue.—Ibid., 115 (=‘people of 
Usaya,’ the Zufii name of “two of the largest 
Moqui villages”; hence T-usayan). Usayan.— 
Ibid., 170. Welsh Indians.—Prichard, Phys. Hist. 
Mankind, v, 431, 1847. White Indians.—Sage, 
Scenes in Rocky Mts., 198, 1846. Whiwunai.— 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia Tigua 
name). * ^ 

Hopitsewah. Mentioned as a “sacred 
town” of th6 “ Laguna” Indians, a Pomo 
band on the w. shore of Clear lake, Men¬ 
docino co., Cal.— Revere, Tour of Duty, 
130, 1849. 

Hopkins, Sarah. See Winnemucca. 

Hopnis, Hopnuts. See Hobnuts. 

Hopnomkoyo. A former Maidu village 
on Lights cr., in the n. part of Plumas 
co., Cal.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Hopocan (‘[tobacco] pipe’). A Dela¬ 
ware chief, known to the whites as Cap¬ 
tain Pipe, and after 1763 among his 
people as Konieschguanokee (‘ Maker of 
Daylight’). An hereditary sachem of the 
Wolf division of the Delawares, he was 
war chief of the tribe. He was also prom¬ 
inent in council, having a reputation for 
wisdom and a remarkable gift of oratory. 
In the French war he fought against the 
English with courage and skill. He was 
present at the conference with Geo. Cro- 
ghan at Ft Pitt in 1759, and in 1763 or 
1764 tried to take the fort by strategem, 
but failed, and was captured. After 
peace was concluded he settled with his 
clan on upper Muskingum r., Ohio, and in 
1771 sent a “speech” to Gov. Penn. 
He attended the councils of the tribe at 
the Turtle village and at Ft Pitt until the 
Revolutionary war broke out, when he ac¬ 
cepted British pay and fought the Amer¬ 
icans and the friendly Indians, but told 
the British commander at Detroit that 
he would not act savagely toward the 
whites, having no interest in the quar¬ 
rel, save to procure subsistence for his 
people, and expecting that when the En¬ 
glish made peace with the colonists the 
Indians would be punished for any ex¬ 
cesses that they committed. Col. William 
Crawford, however, in retaliation for the 
massacre of Moravian Indians by a party 
of white men, was put to torture when he 
fell into Captain Pipe’s hands after the 
ignominious rout of his regiment of vol¬ 
unteers near the upper Sandusky in May, 


LULL. 30] 


HOQUIAM—HORSES 


569 


1782. Pipe signed the treaty of Ft Pitt, 
Pa., Sept. 17, 1778, the first treaty be¬ 
tween the United States and the In¬ 
dians; he was also a signer of the treaties 
of Ft McIntosh, Ohio, Jan. 21, 1785, and 
Ft Harmar, Ohio, Jan. 9, 1787. In 1780 
he removed from his home on Walhond- 
ing cr., at or near White Woman’s town, 
to old Upper Sandusky, or Cranestown, 
Ohio, thence to Captain Pipe’s village, 
about 10 m. s. e. of Upper Sandusky, on 
land that was ceded to the United States 
in 1829. He died in 1794. See Drake, 
Hist. Ind., 534, 1880; Darlington, Jour, 
of Col. May, 94, 1873; Pa. Archives, iv, 
441, 1833. 

Hoquiam. A Chehalis village on a creek 
of the same name, n. shore of Grays har¬ 
bor, Wash. 

Ho-ki-um. —Ross in Ind. Aff. Rep., 18,1870. Hokwa- 
imits. — Gibbs, MS., No. 248, B. A. E. (Chehalis 
name). Hoquiam.— Land Office map of Washing¬ 
ton, 1891. Hoquium.— Gibbs, op. cit. 

Horicon. Marked on a map of 1671 as 
a people living on the headwaters of Hud¬ 
son r., N. Y., w. of L. Champlain, and 
placed by others in the same general re¬ 
gion. Ruttenber says they were a part 
of the Mahican who occupied the L. 
George district, but Shea considers the 
word a mere misprint for Hirocoi, Hiero- 
coyes, or Iroquois, which is doubtful. 

Herechenes.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq., in, 321,1881. 
Hereckenes.— Fleet (1682) quoted, ibid. Hori- 
cons.— Ruttenber,Tribes HudsonR.,41,1872. Hor- 
ikans. —Ogilby, America, map, 1671. 

Hormiguero (Span.: ‘ant hill’). A 
village, probably of the Pima, on the 
Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., Ariz.; 
pop. 510 in 1860, 514 in 1869. Cf. Ormejea. 

Herringuen.— Browne, Apache Country, 290, 1869. 
Hormiguero.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 19,1863. 

Hornotlimed. A Seminole chief who 
came into notice chiefly through a single 
incident of the Seminole war of 1817-18. 
He resided at the Fowl Town, in n. w. 
Florida, at the beginning of hostilities, 
but was forced to flee to Mikasuki. On 
Nov. 30, 1817, three vessels arrived at the 
mouth of Apalachicola r. with supplies 
for the garrison farther up the stream, 
but on account of contrary winds were 
unable to ascend. Lieut. Scott was sent 
to their assistance with a boat and 40 men, 
who, on their return from the vessels, 
were ambushed by Hornotlimed and a 
band of warriors, all being killed except 6 
soldiers, who jumped overboard and swam 
to the opposite shore. Twenty soldiers 
who had been left to aid the vessels, and 
an equal number of women and sick who 
were with them, fell into the hands of 
Hornotlimed and his warriors and were 
slain and scalped. The scalps were car¬ 
ried to Mikasuki and displayed on red 
sticks as tokens of the victory. Mikasuki 
was soon afterward visited by American 
troops and, although most of the Indians 
escaped, Hornotlimed was captured and 
immediately hanged. Gen. Jackson 


called him “ Homattlemico, the old Red- 
stick,” the latter name being applied 
because he was a chief of the Mikasuki 
band, known also as Red sticks, because 
they erected red-painted poles in their 
village. (c. t.) 

Horocroc. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Horses. The first horses seen by the 
mainland Indians were those of the Span¬ 
ish invaders of Mexico. A few years 
later De Soto brought the horse into Flor¬ 
ida and westward to the Mississippi, 
while Coronado, on his march to Quivira 
in 1541, introduced it to the Indians of 
the great plains. When the Aztec saw 
the mounted men of Cortes they supposed 
horse and man to be one and were greatly 
alarmed at the strange animal. The clas¬ 
sical Centaur owed its origin to a like 
misconception. A tradition existed 
among the Pawnee that their ancestors 
mistook a mule ridden by a man for 
a single animal and shot at it from con¬ 
cealment, capturing the mule when the 
man fell. 

The horse was a marvel to the Indians 
and came to be regarded as sacred. For 
a long time it was worshiped by the 
Aztec, and by most of the tribes was 
considered to have a mysterious or sa¬ 
cred character. Its origin was explained 
by a number of myths representing horses 
to have come out of the earth through 
lakes and springs or from the sun. 
When Antonio de Espejo visited the Hopi 
of Arizona in 1583, the Indians spread 
cotton scarfs or kilts on the ground for 
the horses to walk on, believing the 
latter to be sacred. This sacred character 
is sometimes shown in the names given 
to the horse, as the Dakota sunka wakan , 

‘ mysterious dog. ’ Its use in transporta¬ 
tion accounts for the term ‘dog’ often 
applied to it, as the Siksika ponokamita, 
‘elk dog’; Cree rriistatlm, ‘big dog’; 
Shawnee mlsliawa, ‘elk.’ (See Chamber- 
lain in Am Ur-Quell, 1894.) 

The southern plains proved very favor¬ 
able, and horses greatly multiplied. 
Stray and escaped horses formed wild 
herds, and, as they had few carnivorous 
enemies, their increase and spread were 
astonishingly rapid. The movement of 
the horse was from s. to n., at about an 
equal rate on both sides of the mountains. 
It moved northward in three ways: (1) 
The increase of the wild horses and their 
dispersal into new regions was rapid. (2) 
For 150 years before the first exploration 
of the W. by residents of the United States, 
Spaniards from the Mexican provinces 
had been making long journeys north¬ 
ward and eastward to trade with the 
Indians, even, it is said, as far N. as 


670 


HORSES 


[b. a. e. 


the camps of the Kiowa, when these 
were living on Tongue r. (3) As soon as 
the Indians nearest to the Spanish settle¬ 
ments appreciated the uses of the horse, 
they began to make raiding expeditions 
to capture horses, and as knowledge of 
the animal extended, the tribes still far¬ 
ther to the N. began to procure horses 
from those next S. of them. So it was 
that tribes in the S. had the first horses 
and always had the greatest number, 
while the tribes farthest N. obtained 
them last and always had fewer of them. 
Some tribes declare that they possessed 
horses for some time before they learned 
the uses to which they could be put. 

On the n. Atlantic coast horses were 
imported early in the 17th century, and 
the Iroquois possessed them toward the 
end of that century and were regularly 
breeding them prior to 1736. For the 
northern plains they seem to have been 
first obtained from the region w. of the 
Rocky mts., the Siksika having obtained 
their first horses from the Kutenai, Sho- 
shoni, and other tribes across the moun¬ 
tains, about the year 1800. W. T. Hamil¬ 
ton, who met the Nez Perces, Cayuse, 
and other tribes of the Columbia region 
between 1840 and 1850, tells of the tradi¬ 
tion among them of the time when they 
had no horses; but having learned of 
their existence in the S., of the purposes 
for which they were used, and of their 
abundance, they made up a strong war 
party, went S., and captured horses. It 
is impossible to fix the dates at which any 
tribes procured their horses, and, since 
many of the Plains tribes wandered in 
small bodies which seldom met, it is 
likely that some bands acquired the horse 
a long time before other sections of the 
same tribe. The Cheyenne relate va¬ 
riously that they procured their first 
horses from the Arapaho, from the Kiowa, 
and from the Shoshoni, and all these 
statements may be true for different 
bodies. A very definite statement is 
made that they received their first horses 
from the Kiowa at the time when the 
Kiowa lived on Tongue r. The Cheyenne 
did not cross the Missouri until toward 
the end of the 17th century. For some 
time they resided on thatstream, and their 
progress in working westward and south- 
westward to the Black-hills, Powder r., 
and Tongue r. was slow. They probably 
did not encounter the Kiowa on Tongue r. 
long before the middle of the 18th century, 
and it is possible that the Kiowa did not 
then possess horses. Black Moccasin, 
reputed trustworthy in his knowledge 
and his dates, declared that the Cheyenne 
obtained horses about 1780. The Pawnee 
are known to have had horses and to have 
used them in hunting early in the 18th 
century. Carver makes no mention of 


seeing horses among the Sioux that he 
met in 1767 in w. Minnesota; but in 1776 
the elder Alexander Henry saw them 
among the Assiniboin, while Umfreville 
a few years later spoke of horses as com¬ 
mon, some being branded, showing that 
they had been taken from Spanish settle¬ 
ments. 

The possession of the horse had an 
important influence on the culture of the 
Indians and speedily changed the mode 
of life of many tribes. The dog had pre¬ 
viously been the Indian’s only domestic 
animal, his companion in the hunt, and 
to some extent his assistant as a burden 
bearer, yet not to a very great degree, 
since the power of the dog to carry or to 
haul loads, was not great. Before they 
had horses the Indians were footmen, 
making short journeys and transporting 
their possessions mostly on their backs. 
The hunting Indians possessed an insig¬ 
nificant amount of property, since the 
quantity that they could carry was small. 
Nowall this waschanged. An animal had 
been found which could carry burdens 
and drag loads. The Indians soon real¬ 
ized that the possession of such an animal 
would increase their freedom of movement 
and enable them to increase their prop¬ 
erty, since one horse could carry the load 
of several men. Besides this, it insured a 
food supply and made the moving of camp 
easy and swift and long journeys possible. 
In addition to the use of the horse as a 
burden bearer and as a means of moving 
rapidly from place to place, it was used as 
a medium of exchange. 

The introduction of the horse led to 
new intertribal relations; systematic war 
parties were sent forth, the purpose of 
which was the capture of horses. This 
at once became a recognized industry, fol¬ 
lowed by the bravest and most energetic 
young men. Many of the tribes, before 
they secured horses, obtained guns, which 
gave them new boldness, and horse and 
gun soon transformed those who, a gen¬ 
eration before, had been timid foot wan¬ 
derers, to daring and ferocious raiders. 

On the plains and in the S. W. horses 
were frequently used as food, but not 
ordinarily when other flesh could be 
obtained, although it is said that theChiri- 
cahua Apache preferred mule meat to 
any other. It frequently happened that 
war parties on horse-stealing expeditions 
killed and ate horses. When this was 
done the leader of the party was always 
careful to warn his men to wash them¬ 
selves thoroughly with sand or mud and 
water before they went near the enemy’s 
camp. Horses greatly dread the smell of 
horse flesh or horse fat and will not suffer 
the approach of any one smelling of it. 

The horse had no uniform value, for 
obviously no two horses were alike. A 


HOSBOA—HOSPITALITY 


571 


BULL. 30] 


war pony or a buffalo horse had a high, 
an old pack pony a low, value. A rich 
old man might'send fifteen or twenty 
horses to the tipi of the girl he wished 
to marry, while a poor young man might 
send but one. A doctor might charge a 
fee of one horse or five, according to the 
patient’s means. People paid as they 
could. Among the Sioux and the Chey¬ 
enne the plumage of two eagles used to be 
regarded as worth a good horse. Forty 
horses have been given for a medicine 
pipe. 

Indian saddles varied greatly. The old 
saddle of Moorish type, having the high 
peaked pommel and cantle made of wood 
or horn covered with raw buffalo hide, 
was common, and was the kind almost 
always used by women; but there was an¬ 
other type, low in front and behind, 
often having a horn, the prong of a deer’s 
antler, for a rope. The Indians rode with 
a short stirrup—the bareback seat. To¬ 
day the young Indians ride the cowboy 
saddle, with the cowboy seat—the long 
leg. Cow-skin pads stuffed with the hair 
of deer, elk, antelope, buffalo, or mountain 
sheep were commonly used instead of 
saddles by some of the tribes in running 
buffalo or in war, but among a number 
of tribes the horse was stripped for chas¬ 
ing buffalo and for battle. Some tribes 
on their horse-stealing expeditions car¬ 
ried with them small empty pads, to be 
stuffed with grass and used as saddles 
after the horses had been secured. The 
Indians of other tribes scorned such lux¬ 
ury and rode the horse naked, reaching 
home chafed and scarred. 

Horse racing, like foot racing, is a 
favorite amusement, and much property 
is wagered on these races. The Indians 
were great jockeys and trained and han¬ 
dled their horses with skill. When visit¬ 
ing another tribe they sometimes took 
race horses with them and won or lost 
large sums. The Plains tribes were ex¬ 
tremely good horsemen, in war hiding 
themselves behind the bodies of their 
mounts so that only a foot and an arm 
showed, and on occasion giving exhibi¬ 
tions of wonderful daring and skill. Dur¬ 
ing the campaign of 1865 on Powder r., 
after Gen. Conner’s drawn battle with a 
large force of Arapaho and Cheyenne, an 
Arapaho rode up and down in front of the 
command within a few hundred yards, 
and while his horse was galloping was 
seen to swing himself down under his 
horse’s neck, come up on the other side, 
and resume his seat, repeating the feat 
many times. 

The horse was usually killed at the 
grave of its owner, just as his arms were 
buried with him, in order that he might 
be equipped for the journey that he was 
about to take. A number of Plains tribes 


practised a horse dance. There were 
songs about horses, and prayers were 
made in their behalf. On the whole, 
however, the horse’s place in ceremony 
was only incidental. On the occasion of 
great gatherings horses were led into the 
circle of the dancers and there given 
away, the donor counting a coup as he 
passed over the gift to the recipient. In 
modern times the marriage gift sent by a 
suitor to a girl’s family consisted in part 
of horses. Among some tribes a father 
gave away a horse when his son killed 
his first big game or on other important 
family occasions. In the dances of the 
soldier-band societies of most tribes 2, 4, 
or 6 chosen men ride horses during the 
dance. Their horses are painted, the 
tails are tied up as for war, hawk or owl 
feathers are tied to the forelock or tail, 
and frequently a scalp, or something 
representing it, hangs from the lower jaw. 
The painting represents wounds received 
by the rider’s horse, or often there is 
painted the print of a hand on either side 
of the neck to show that an enemy on foot 
has been ridden down. In preparing to 
go into a formal battle the horse as well 
as his rider received protective treatment. 
It was ceremonially painted and adorned, 
as described above, and certain herbs and 
medicines were rubbed or blown over it 
to give it endurance and strength. 

Among some of the Plains tribes there 
was a guild of horse doctors who devoted' 
themselves especially to protecting and 
healing horses. They doctored horses 
before going into battle or to the buffalo 
hunt, so that they should not fall, and 
doctored those wounded in battle or on 
the hunt, as well as the men hurt in the 
hunt. In intertribal horse races they 
“doctored” in behalf of the horses of 
their own tribe and against those of their 
rivals. See Commerce , Domestication , 
Travel and Transportation. (g. b. g.) 

Hosboa. The Road-runner or Pheasant 
clan of the Hopi, q. v. 

Hoc'-bo-a.— Stephen In 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39,1891. 
Hoc'-bo-a wuri-wu. —Fewkes in Am Anthrop., vn, 
405, 1894 (wun-wti— ‘clan '). Hosboa winwu — 
Fewkes in i9th Rep. B. A. E., 584,1900. Huspoa.— 
Bourke, Snake Dance, 117,1884. 

Hosmite. A former Cholovone village 
on low r er San Joaquin r., Cal. 

Hosmite.— Pinart, Cholovone MS., B. A. E., 1880. 
Kosmitas.— Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., hi, 51, 
1821. Kosmiti.— Choris, Voy. Pitt., 5, 1822. 

Hospitality. Hospitality, distinguished 
from charity, was a cardinal principle 
in every Indian tribe. The narratives 
of many pioneer explorers and settlers; 
from De Soto and Coronado, Amidas 
and Barlow, John Smith and the Pil¬ 
grims, down to the most recent period, 
are full of instances of wholesale hos¬ 
pitality toward the white strangers, 
sometimes at considerable cost to the 
hosts. Gift dances were a feature in 


572 


HOSTAYUNTWA—HOTNAS-HAHAI 


t ft. A. fi. 


every tribe, and it was no uncommon oc¬ 
currence on the plains during the sum¬ 
mer season for large dancing parties to 
make the round of the tribes, return¬ 
ing in the course of a month or two 
with hundreds of ponies given in return 
for their entertainment. Every ceremo¬ 
nial gathering was made the occasion of 
the most lavish hospitality, both in feast¬ 
ing and the giving of presents. In some 
languages there was but one word for 
both generosity and bravery, and either 
one was a sure avenue to distinction. A 
notable exemplification of this was the 
institution of the potlatch (q. v.) among 
the tribes of the N. W. coast, by which 
a man saved for half a lifetime in order 
to give away his accumulated wealth in 
one grand distribution, which would en¬ 
title him and his descendants to rank 
thereafter among the chiefs. In tribes 
where the clan system prevailed the duty 
of hospitality and mutual assistance with¬ 
in the clan was inculcated and sacredly 
observed, anyone feeling at liberty to 
call on a fellow-clansman for help in an 
emergency without thought of refusal. 
The same obligation existed in the case 
of formal comradeship between two men. 
Among the Aleut, according to Veni- 
aminoff, the stranger received no invita¬ 
tion on arriving, but decided for himself 
at which house he chose to be a guest, 
and was sure to receive there every at¬ 
tention as long as he might stay, with 
food for the journey on his departure. 

On the other hand it can not be said 
that the Indian was strictly charitable, 
in the sense of extending help to those 
unable to reciprocate either for them¬ 
selves or for their tribes. The life of the 
savage was precarious at best, and those 
who had outlived their usefulness were 
very apt to be neglected, even by their 
own nearest relatives. Hospitality as be¬ 
tween equals was a tribal rule; charity 
to the helpless depended on the disposi¬ 
tion and ability of the individual. See 
Ethics and Morals, Feasts. (j. m.) 

Hostayuntwa ( Ho- l std-yo n -twa ni , ‘there 
he cast a lean thing into the tire.’—Hew¬ 
itt). An Oneida village that stood on the 
site of Camden, N. Y. 

Ho-‘sta-y6 n -twa n ‘.—J. N. B. Hewitt, inf’n, 1906. 
Ho-sta-yun'-twa.—Morgan, League Iroq., 478,1851. 

Hosukhaunu (‘ foolish dogs ’). Given as 
an Ankara band under chief Sithauche 
about 1855, but properly a dance society. 

Foolish Dogs.—Culbertson-in Smithson. Rep. 1850. 
143,1851. Ho-suk'-hau-nu.—Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol., 357,1862. 

Hosukhaunukarerihu (‘little foolish 
dogs’). Given as an Arikara band under 
chief Tigaranish about 1855, but prop¬ 
erly a dance society. 

Ho-suk'-hau-nu-ka-re'-ri-hu. — Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol., 357, 1862. Little Foolish Dogs.—Ibid. 


Hotachi (‘elk’). A Missouri gens, co¬ 
ordinate with the Khotachi gens of the 
Iowa. 

Ho-ma'.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897. 
Hoo'-ma.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Ho-ta'- 
tci.—Dorsey, op. cit. 

Hotagastlas-hadai ( Xd' tAgastLas xd'da-i, 
‘people who run about in' crowds’). A 
subdivision of the Chaahl-lanas, a family 
of the Eagle clan of the Haida, settled in 
Alaska. They are said to have been thus 
named because they were so numerous 
that when visitors came great crowds ran 
to meet them.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
276, 1905. 

Hotalihuyana (Creek : hotali, hutali, 
‘wind,’ ‘gust,’ ‘hurricane’; huydna, ‘pass¬ 
ing’; hence ‘Hurricane town’). A for¬ 
mer Lower Creek or Seminole town in 
Dougherty co., Ga., established by I ndians 
of Chiaha on the e. bank of Flint r., 6 m. 
below the junction of Kitchofooni cr. 
Settlers from the adjacent Osotchi had 
mingled with the 20 families of the village 
in Hawkins’ time (1799). It had 27 fami¬ 
lies in 1832. (a. s. g. ) 

Fatehennyaha.—Brinton, Florida Penin., 145, 1859. 
Holatlahoanna.—II. R. Ex. Doc. 276,24th Cong., 1st 
sess., 300,1836. Ho tal le ho yar nar.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. O-tel-le-who-yau-nau.— 
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 64, 1848. Otellewhoyon- 
nee.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 163, 1837. Tale- 
hanas.—Ibid. (1797), 68. Talehouyana.—PeniOre 
in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822. Talle-whe- 
anas.—Ibid., 364. Telhuanas.—Kinnard (1792) in 
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 313, 1832. Telli- 
huana.—Ibid., 383. Telluiana.—Ibid. 

Hotamimsaw ( Ilotam-imsaw , ‘foolish or 
crazy dogs’). A warrior society of the 
Cheyenne, q. v. 

Hota/mi massau.—Grinnell, inf’n, 1906 (lit.‘dogs 
crazy’). Hotam-imsaw.—Mooney, inf’n, 1905. 

Hotamitanio ( HotdmitcVnio , ‘dog men’; 
sing., Hotdmitd'n). A warrior society of 
the Cheyenne (q. v.), commonly known 
to the whites as Dog Soldiers. See Mili¬ 
tary Societies. (j. m.) 

Dog Men’s.—G. A. Dorsey, The Cheyenne, 15,1905. 
Dog Soldier band.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850,143,1851. Hotamita'nio.—Mooney, inf’ n, 1905 
(see p.256of this Handbook). Ho-tum'-i-ta'-ni-o.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 281, 1862 
(incorrectly given as the name of a dance, but 
properly intended for the dance of this society). 
Mi'stavii'nut.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1026, 
1896 (=‘ heavy eyebrows’: another name). 

Hotao ( Xo'tao). A legendary Haida 
town that is said to have stood on the 
s. w. coast of Maude id., Queen Char¬ 
lotte group, Brit. Col. From this place, 
according to one account, came the an¬ 
cestress of the Hlgaiu-lanas.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Hotdjihoas (A 'o'tdjixoa's, ‘hair seals at 
low tide’). A former Haida town on 
Lyell id., near the n. end of Darwin sd., 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was 
occupied by the Hagi-lanas.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Hothlepoya. See Menewa. 

Hotnas-hadai ( £ ot nas xada'-i , ‘box- 
house people’). Given by Boas (Fifth 


BULL. 30] 


HOT SPRINGS-HOYALAS 


573 


Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 27, 1889) as the 
name of a subdivision of the Yaku-lanas, 
a family of the Raven clan of the Haida 
in Alaska. It is in reality only a house 
name belonging to that family. (j. r. s. ) 

Hot Springs. A summer camp of the 
Sitka Indians on Baranoff id., Alaska. 
There were 26 people there in 1880.—Pe- 
troff in Tenth Census, Alaska, 32,1884. 

Hottrochtac. A Costanoan village situ¬ 
ated in 1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz 
mission, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 5, 1860. 

Houaneiha. An unidentified village or 
tribe mentioned to Joutel (Margry, Dec., 
hi, 409, 1878) in 1687, while he was stay¬ 
ing with the Kadohadacho on Red r. of 
Louisiana, by the chief of that tribe as 
being among his enemies. 

Honattoehronon (Huron: Kwathoge 1 - 
ronon, ‘people of the sunsetting or of 
the west’). One of a number of tribes, 
mentioned in the Jesuit Relation for 
1640, which were reputed to be seden¬ 
tary, populous, and agricultural. Later 
the form Quatoghe, or Quadoge, is 
found as the name of the s. end of L. 
Michigan, being so employed on Mitch¬ 
ell’s map of the British Colonies in N. A., 
of 1755, and on Jefferys’ and D’Anville’s 
maps, the one of 1777 and the other of 
1775. Meaning simply ‘people of the 
west’, it was evidently the name of some 
people living in the w., at the s. end of 
L. Michigan. For some unknown reason 
the name Quatoghees or Quatoghies was 
applied to the Tionontati by Colden, and 
by Gallatin, Schoolcraft, and others who 
followed him; but this is an apparent 
error, as the Tionontati, or Hurons du 
Petun, never lived at the s. end of L. 
Michigan. In the famous deed of the 
hunting grounds of the Five Nations to 
the King of England, in 1701, Quadoge 
is given as the western boundary, at a 
point w. of the Miami. Father Potier, 
who resided at Detroit in 1751, says that 
8atoeronnon (Ouatoierononand Quatoke- 
ronon being cognate forms) was the 
Huron name for the Sauk. ( j. n. b. h. ) 

Houattoehronon.—Jes. Rel., index, 1858. Hvat- 
toehronon. —Jes. Rel. 1640,35,1858. Satoeronnon.— 
Potier, Rac. Hur. et Gram., MS., 1751. 

Houjets. An unidentified tribe contain¬ 
ing 40 men described as of fine stature, 
living on a branch of Red r. of Louisiana, 
6 leagues from the main stream, at the 
beginning of the 19th century.—Baudry 
des Lozieres, Voy. a la Louisiane, 242, 
249, 1802. 

Houtgna. A former Gabrieleno ran- 
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a locality 
later called Ranchito de Lugo.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 

Howakeeas. Mentioned with the Choc¬ 
taw as forming a small party which was 
defeated by the Creeks (Oglethorpe, 1743, 


in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, vi, 242, 1855). 
Possibly a bad misprint for Timucua. 

Howiri. A ruined pueblo, formerly oc¬ 
cupied by the Tewa, at the Rito Colo¬ 
rado, about 10 m. w. of the Hot Springs, 
near Abiquiu, Rio Arriba co., N. Mex. 
See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 
61, 1890; iv, 22, 1892; Hewett in Bull. 32, 
B. A. E., 40, 1906. 

Ho-ui-ri.—Bandelier, op. cit. 

Howkan ( 8 a'ok.'ian , aTlingit word prob¬ 
ably referring to a stone which stood up 
in front of the town, although some 
derive it from qowaka'n , ‘deer,’ deer be¬ 
ing numerous there). A Haida town on 
Long id., facing Dali id., Alaska, below 
which a great canoe fight took place, 
resulting in the occupancy of part of 
Prince of Wales id. by the Kaigani Haida. 
It was the seat of several families, but 
the Chaahl-lanas owned it. According 
to John Work’s estimate (1836-41) there 
were 27 houses and 458 inhabitants. 
Petroff gave the population as 287 in 
1880-81; in 1890 there were 90; in 1900, 
145, including'whites. (j. r. s.) 

Hau kan hade.— Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 
1885. Hou a guan.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,v, 489, 
1855 (after Work, 1836-41). Houkan Haade.— 
Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. 
n, 125, 1895. How-a-guan. —Dawson, Q. < harlotte 
Ids., 173 b, 1880 (after Work). Howakan.— Petroff in 
10th Census, Alaska, 32,1884. Howkan.— Eleventh 
Census, Alaska, 31, 1890. Uon-a-gan.— Kane, 
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859 (misprint from Work). 

Howungkut. A Hupa village of the 
southern division, nearly due s. of Medild- 
ing, from which it is separated by Trinity 
r., Cal. At this village the first day’s 
dancing of the white deer-skin dance of 
the Hupa takes place. (p. e. g.) 

Wang'-kat.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
73, 1877. Xowuhkut. —Goddard, Life and Culture 
of the Hupa, 12, 1903. 

Hoya. The name of a chief and also of 
a former settlement on or near the s. coast 
of South Carolina, visited by Jean Ribault 
in 1562. Apparently the Ahoya men¬ 
tioned by Vandera in 1567. The people 
were friendly with and were possibly 
related to the Edisto, q. v. 

Ahoya.— Vandera (1567) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 
16, 1857. Hoya.— Ribault (1562) in Hakluyt,Voy., 
1600, 379, 1800. 

Hoya ( Xb'ya , ‘raven’ in the Skide- 
gatedialect). One of the two great phra- 
tries or clans into which the Haida are 
divided. (J. R- s.) 

K’oa'la.— Boas, Fifth and Twelfth Reps. N. W. 
Tribes Canada, passim (improperly applied; 
K-oa'la or K.'oa'las means simply ‘people of an¬ 
other clan ’). Yehl.— Swanton, inf n, 1900 (name 
in Masset dialect). 

Hoyagundla {Xb'ya gA'nha, ‘raven 
creek’). A Haida town' on a stream of 
the same name which flows into Hecate 
str. a short distance s. of C. Fife, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit, Col. It was occupied 
by the Djahui-gitinai.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 280, 1905. 

Hoy alas (‘the troubled ones’). A 
Kwakiutl tribe formerly occupying the 


574 


HOYIMA-HUDA 


[B. A. E. 


upper shores of Quatsino sd.; they were 
exterminated by the Koskimo. 

Ho-ya.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can. for 
1897, Sec. II, 70. Xo'yalas. —Boas in Mem. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., V, pt. 2, 401, 1902. Xoya'les.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 332. 

Hoyima. AformerYokuts (Mariposan) 
tribe on San Joaquin r., Cal.—A. L. Kroe- 
foer, inf’n, 1906. 

Huachi. A former Costanoan village 
near Santa Cruz mission, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Huachinera (so called on account of the 
tascal wood found there in abundance.— 
Rudo Ensayo). An Opata pueblo and 
seat of a Spanish mission, founded about 
1645, which afterward became a visita of 
Baseraca; situated on Tesorobabi cr., a 
branch of Rio Bavispe, e. Sonora, Mexico, 
near the Chihuahua border. Population 
538 in 1678; 285 in 1730, but as it became 
the place of refuge of the inhabitants of 
Baquigopa and Batesopa on the abandon¬ 
ment of those villages later in the 18th 
century, the population was augmented. 
Total pop. 337 in 1900. (f. w. h. ) 

Guatzinera.— Rudo Ensayo ( ca . 1763), Guiteras 
trans., 217,1894. Huachinera. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, III, pt. 1, 69,1890. San Juan Guachi- 
iita.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343,1864 (mentioned 
as if distinct from Huachinera). S. Juan de Gua- 
chinela. —Rivera, Diario, leg. 1444, 1736. S. Juan 
Guachinera. —Zapata (1678) quoted by Bancroft, 
No. Mex. States, I, 246, 1884. 

Huadjinaas-hadai. ( Xu'Adji na'as xa'- 
da-i , ‘people of grizzly-bear house’). A 
subdivision of the Koetas family of the 
Kaigani Haida of British Columbia.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 272, 1905. 

Huados ( Xuado's , ‘standing-water peo¬ 
ple, ’ in allusion to the swampy nature 
of the land around their towns). A di¬ 
vision of the Raven clan of the Haida, 
formerly occupying the e. shore of Gra¬ 
ham id., Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. 
Originally they were settled at Naikun, 
but on account of wars they moved to C. 
Ball, thence to Skidegate. The Naikun- 
kegawai seem to have been a sort of aristo¬ 
cratic branch of this family, (j. r. s. ) 
Q,ua'dos. —Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 
:24, 1898. Xuado's. —Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 
1905. 

Huados. A small Haida town, inhabited 
by a family bearing the same name, near 
the town of Hlgihla-ala, n. of C. Ball, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.—Swan¬ 
ton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905. 

Hualga. Given by Bourke (Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, n, 180, 1889) as the Moon clan 
of the Mohave; but according to Kroe- 
ber, so far as known the Mohave do not 
name their clans, and their name for moon 
is halya. 

Hualimea. A former Cochimi rancheria 
under San Ignacio mission, Lower Cali¬ 
fornia, about lat. 28° 4CK.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Jan. 17,1862. 

Hualquilme. A former Costanoan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Cruz mission, Cal.— 
Taylor in CaL Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 


Huanes. A former tribe of s. Texas, 
mentioned with the Pampoas, Mesquites, 
Pastias, Camamas, Cacanas, and Canas, as 
a tribe for which mission San Jos5 at San 
Antonio had been founded. 

Xuanes. —Solis, Diario, 1767-68, cited by H. E. Bol¬ 
ton, inf’n, 1906. 

Huaque. Mentioned by Oviedo (Hist. 
Gen. Indies, m, 628, 1853) as one of the 
provinces or villages visited by Ayllon in 
1520. Probably on the South Carolina 
coast. 

Huascari. A tribe or band, probably 
Paiute, living in 1775 in lat. 38° 3', doubt¬ 
less in s. U tah. —Dominguez and Escalante 
in Doc. Hist. Mex., 2d s., i, 537,1854. 

Huashpatzena (huashpa = ‘dance-kilt’). 
A pueblo occupied after 1605 by the an¬ 
cestors of the inhabitants of Santo Do¬ 
mingo pueblo, near the present site of 
the latter, on the e. bank of the Rio 
Grande, n. central New Mexico. The 
pueblo was erected after the destruction, 
by a freshet, of the second Gipuy (q. v.) 
to the eastward. A part of Huashpatzena 
was also carried away by flood, compel¬ 
ling the villagers to move farther east, 
where they built the pueblo of Kiua— 
the present Santo Domingo, q. v. 

Huash-pa Tzen-a. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, iv, 187, 1892. Uash-pa Tze-na. —Ibid., in, 31, 
1890. 

Huasna. A former Chumashan village 
near Purisima mission, Santa Barbara co., 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. 

Huatabampo. One of the principal set¬ 
tlements of the Mayo, in Sonora, Mexico; 
pop. 1,553 in 1900.—Censo del Estado de 
Sonora, 96, 1901. 

Huaxicori. A former Tepehuane pueblo 
in lat. 23°, long. 105° 30', Sinaloa, Mexico. 

Huajicori.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864. 
Huaxicori.—Ibid., 281. 

Huchiltchik ( Hu'tcUtt&k , ‘ round clear¬ 
ing ’). A Pima village below Santa Ana, 
on the n. bank of the Gila, ins. Arizona. 
Hbrltchbletchbk.— ten Kate quoted by Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E., xx, 199,1888 (trans. 4 plain ’). Hii'- 
tcilttcik.— Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 1902. Buen 
Llano.— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208,1858. Llano.— 
Brown, Apache Country, 270, 1869. 

Huchnom. A division of the Yuki of n. 
California, speaking a dialect divergent 
from that of the Round Valley Indians. 
They lived on South Eel r. above its con¬ 
fluence with the middle fork of Eel r., or 
in adjacent territories, and on the head¬ 
waters of Russian r. in upper Potter val¬ 
ley. To the n. of them Were the Witu- 
komnom Yuki, to the e. the Wintun, and 
on the other sides were Pomo tribes. 
The Pomo call them Tatu, the whites 
Redwoods, from Redwood cr. 

Huch'-nom.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
126, 1877 (trans. ‘outside the valley’). Red¬ 
woods.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 75,1870. Tahtoos.— Powers 
in Overland Mo., ix, 507, 1872. Ta-tu.— Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., op. cit., 139 (so called by 
Pomo of Potter valley). 

Huda (‘ wind ’). A Yuchi clan. 

Huda taha,— Gatschet, Uchee MS., B. A. E.. 70 

1QQK. 9 9 


BULL. 30] 


HUDDOH-HUICHOL 


575 


Huddoh. A local name of the hump¬ 
backed salmon (Salmo proteus ); also 
known as haddo, from huddo, the name 
of this fish in Niskwalli (Rep. U. S. 
Comm. Fish., 1872-73, p. 99), of the Sa- 
lishan stock. (a. f. c.) 

Hudedut ( Hudedid 7 ). A former Takil- 
man village at the forks of Rogue r. and 
Applegate cr., Oreg. 

Howtetech. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lonci., 
76, 1856 (misprint). How-te-te'-oh. —Gibbs in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 423,1853 (possibly the 
same, or mistaken for the Kikaktsik). Hu-de- 
dut'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 235, 1890. 

Huehuerigita. A former Opata pueblo 
at Casas Grandes, at the w. foot of the 
Sierra Madre, Chihuahua, Mexico. It 
was already deserted in the 16th century. 
Bandelier, Gilded Man, 142, 1893. 

Huelemin. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Huenejel. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. Mentioned as if distinct 
from Huenepel. 

Hueneme. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage on the coast, a few miles s. of Saticoy 
r., Ventura co., Cal. 

Hueneme. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. 
We-ne'-mu. —Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Huenepel. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. Mentioned as if distinct 
from Huenejel. 

Huepac. A Teguima Opata pueblo and 
the seat of a Spanish mission founded in 
1639; situated in Sonora, Mexico, on the 
e. bank of Rio Sonora, below lat. 30°. 
Pop. 268 in 1678, 71 in 1730. In addition 
to its civilized Opata population it con¬ 
tained 10 Yaqui in 1900. 

Guipaca. —Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 1726. Huepac.— Davila, Sonora Ilistbr- 
ico, 317, 1894. Huepaca.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
344, 1864. San Lorenzo Guepaca.— Ibid., 343. San 
Lorenzo Huepaca. —Zapata (1678) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, 514,1884. 

Huertas (Las Huertas; Span.: ‘the 
orchards’ or ‘ kitchen gardens’). A clus¬ 
ter of ruined pueblos 4 m. below Socorro, 
N. Mex. (Abert in Emory, Recon., 495, 
1848) ; probably originally inhabited by 
the Piros. 


Hueso Parado (Span.: ‘bone set up’ or 
‘standing bone’). A former Pima and 
Maricopa village on the Pima and Mari¬ 
copa res., Gila r., Ariz.; pop. 263 Pima 
and 314 Maricopa in 1858. 

El Juez Farado.—Bell in Jour Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
1,231,1869 (misquoting Bailey). El Juez Tarado.— 
Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 207, 208, 1858. Hueso 
Pan-ado.— 1 Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863. 

Huexotitlan. A pueblo in Chihuahua, 
Mexico, and the seat of a Spanish mission 
with a mixed population of Nevome, 
Tepehuane, and Tarahumare. Its in¬ 
habitants are now civilized. 


Huejotitan.—Present name. Huexotitlan.—Ban¬ 
croft, No. Mex. States, I, 598, 1884. San Geronimo 
Huexotitlan.—Orozco y Berra, Geog.,324,1864. 

Huhilp ( Huh-Up , ‘on the edge’). A 
village of the Fountain band of Upper 
Lillooet, on Fountain cr., an e. affluent 
of upper Fraser r., Brit. Col.—Dawson in 
Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. ii, 44. 

Huhlitaiga (Hidli-tdiga, ‘war ford’). 
A lower Creek village on Chattahoochee 
r., about the present Georgia-Alabama 
boundary, the inhabitants of which in or 
prior to 1799 removed to Oakfuski, set¬ 
tling on the opposite side of the Talla¬ 
poosa. 

Hohtatoga. — Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Ho-ith-le-ti-gau.—Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch, 45, 1848. Hothletega.—Bartram, 
Travels, 462, 1791. Hothtetoga.—Swan misquoted 
by Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 131, 1884. 
Hu‘li-taiga.—Ibid, (correct form). 

Huhliwahli (‘to apportion war’). A 
former Upper Creek town on the right 
bank of Tallapoosa r., 5 m. below Atasi, 
in Macon co., Ala. It obtained its name 
from the privilege of declaring war which 
was accorded to it, the declaration being 
sent from this town to Tukabatchi, thence 
to the other villages. (a. s. g.) 

Cawalla. —H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 
150,1836. Chiwalle. —Ibid.,131. Cleewallees. —U.S. 
Ind. Treat. (1797), 68, 1837. Cleu wathta.— Par¬ 
sons in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 575, 1854. 
Clewalla.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. 
Clewauleys.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Clewella. —Devereux in H. 
R. Doc.274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 8, 1838. Cle- 
wulla. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 578, 1854. 
Cleyali. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., r, 589,1786. Cluale.— 
Bartram, Travels, 461, 1791. Cuwally. —Wood¬ 
ward, Reminiscences, 14, 1859. Elewalies. — 

Weatherford (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., 
i, 385, 1832. Hoithlewalee.— Flint, Ind. Wars, 205, 
1833. Ho-ith-le Waule. —Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 
32, 1848. Hothleawally.— Woodward, Reminis¬ 
cences, 76, 1858. Hu‘li Wa‘hli. —Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., I, 131, 1884. Rolling Bullet.— Wood¬ 
ward, op. cit. Sdewaetes. —Weatherford (1793) in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 385,1832. Teguales.— 
Barcia (1693), Ensavo, 313,1723 (calledaTalapoosa 
town). Tekeewaulees. —Doyell (1813) in Am. State 
Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 841, 1832. Thlea Walla.— Wood¬ 
ward, Reminiscences, 14, 75, 1858 (“Rolling 
Bullet”). 

Huhliwahli. A town in the Creek Na¬ 
tion, on North fork of Canadian r., above 
Hillabi, Okla. 

Hu‘li-Wa‘li.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., II, 185, 
1888. ‘Liwa'hli,—Ibid. 

Huhunata (Hu-liu'-na-ta). A former 
Chumashan village near Santa lues mis¬ 
sion, Santa Barbara co., Cal.—Henshaw, 
Santa Inez MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Huiauulch. —A Clallam village, the mod¬ 
ern Jamestown, 5 m. e. of Dungeness, 
Puget sd., Wash. 

Hui-au-ultc.—Eells, letter, B. A. E., May 21, 1886. 
Jamestown. —Ibid. 

Huichol. A tribe of the Piman stock, 
numbering 3,000 to 4,000, living in the 
rugged Sierra Madre of n. w. Jalisco, 
Mexico. Their neighbors on the e. are 
the Tepecano, on the w. the Cora; in the 
n. their territory was formerly bounded 
by that of the Tepehuane, and in the s. 
by the Jalisco tribes proper, but these 


576 


HUICHOL 


[B. a. e. 


have largely given way to a Mexican and 
mixed population. In many respects the 
Huichol are closely related to the Cora; 
they are alike physically, speak cognate 
dialects, and exhibit many similarities in 
culture, thus leading some early writers 
to confuse the two tribes. 

Their country, drained chiefly by the 
Rio Chapalagana, is divided into three 
principal districts, with the villages of 

m —s- : --— 



HUICHOL MAN. (am. MUS. Nat. HIST.) 


Santa Catarina, San Sebastian, and San 
Andres Coamiata as their respective cen¬ 
tral seats of government. There is little 
political unity in the tribe. Each of the 
three districts controls the land within 
definite boundaries and annually elects 
officers of its own, consisting of a gov¬ 
ernor, an alcalde, a captain, a majordomo, 
and some minor officials—an acquisition 
from the Spaniards. These officials reside 
in the central village, which is also a 
religious center. The farming season is 
spent in isolated rancherias, and here 
indeed some of the natives live during the 
entire year. 

The Huichol are of medium stature, 
three-fourths of the men ranging between 
160 and 170 cm.; they are predominantly 
brachycephalic (the cephalic index of 70 
percent of the men exceeding 80), with 
rather short face and slightly platyrhinic 
nose. The body is generally well devel¬ 
oped, deformity being extremely rare. 
They are healthy and prolific, and gain 
their livelihood by farming, hunting, 
fishing, and by gathering wild fruits. 
The wealthier Indians own good cattle. 
They maintain their independence with 
great jealousy, but they are generally 
peaceable and mild tempered, and show 
marked fondness for music, dancing, 


flowers, and personal finery. The women 
are adept in weaving and embroidery. 

Their houses are quadrangular, and are 
built of loose stones, or of stone and mud, 
with thatched roofs. The dress of the 
men, now slightly modified, consisted of 
a poncho made of brown, blue, or white 
woolen fabric, tightened at the waist with 
one to three handsomely embroidered 
girdles, and short breeches of poorly 
dressed deerskin without hair, at the 
lower edges of which were strung a num¬ 
ber of leathern thongs. To-day these are 
supplanted by trousers of white cotton. 
The males wear straw hats handsomely 
decorated in many ways. Pouches woven 
of wool or cotton in great variety of design 
form a part of their costume. Several 
such bags generally hang from a woven 
string around the waist; on ceremonial 
occasions as many as a dozen may be thus 
worn. The women wear short skirts and 
ponchos of cotton cloth, sometimes nicely 
embroidered. Both the men and the 
women wear over their shoulders, on 
gala occasions, a small cotton shawl, 
richly embroidered with red or red and 
blue thread. Sandals are worn by men. 
The men tie the hair in a sort of queue 



HUICHOL WOMAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST. ) 


with a colored hair ribbon, or confine it 
at the neck behind. The women usually 
wear the hair loose. 

The Huichol are polygamists. They 
preserve their aboriginal religious beliefs, 
which however show some Christian ad¬ 
mixture owing to the teachings of the friars 
which began after the Spanish conquest 
of 1722. They have numerous small tem¬ 
ples, shrines, and sacrificial caves. Each 
year a party of men makes a pilgrimage to 








BULL. 30] 


HUIKU AYAKEN-HUMA 


577 


San Luis Potosi to gather peyote and to 
procure holy water, and their return is 
followed by an elaborate ceremony. Jus¬ 
tice is administered almost entirely by 
the Indians themselves. Thieves are 
punished by enforced restitution; other 
criminals by whipping and confinement 
without food; sorcerers are sometimes 
killed. The dead are buried in graves or 
deposited in caves. 

The Huichol villages and rancherias, 
past or present, include Bastita, Chona- 
cate, Guadalupe y Ocotan, Guay abas, He- 
diondo, Kiatate, Nogal, Ocota, Peder- 
nales, Pochotita, Popotita, San Andres 
Coamiata, San Jos6, San Sebastian, Santa 
Catarina, Santa Gertrudis, Soledad, and 
Texompa. (a. h.) 

Huicholas. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 621, 3882. 
Huitcole. —Ibid., ill, 719,1886. Vi-ra-ri-ka. —Lum- 
holtz, Huichol^ Inds., 2, 1898 (given as their own 
name). Vishalika. —Lumholtz, Unknown Mex¬ 
ico, II, 21, 1902. 

Huiknayaken. Given as a gens of the 
Squawmish on Howe sd., Brit. Col. 

Xuikua'yaxen. —Boas, MS., B.A. E., 1887. 

Huilacatlan (Nahuatl: ‘place of the 
reeds ’). A former settlement of theTepe- 
cano, situated in the valley of the Rio de 
Bolanos, a short distance from the town 
of Bolanos, in Jalisco, Mexico.—Hrdlicka 
in Am. Anthrop., v, 409, 1903. 

Huila.— Hrdlicka, ibid. 

Hnililoc. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Hel-i-ok. —Hensbaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. Huililoc. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 24, 1863. 

Huimen. A former Costanoanrancheria 
connected with Dolores mission, San 
Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Huinihkasliina (Hu i / nii[k l 6,ci n/ a, ‘fish 
people’). A division of the Washashe- 
wanun gens of the Osage.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897. 

Huinikashika. A Quapaw gens. 

Fish gens.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229,1897. 
Hu i'nikaci'jia. —Ibid. 

Huinyirren. A former Costanoan village 
whose people were connected with San 
Juan Bautista mission, Cal. 

Huinirren. —Arroyo de la Cuesta, Idiomas Califor- 
nias, 1821, MS. trans., B. A. E. 

Huirivis. A settlement of the Yaqui 
on the n. bank of the lower Rio Yaqui, 
s. w. Sonora, Mexico. 

Huadibis. —Miihlenpfordt quoted by Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, I, 608, 1882. Huiris.— Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 332,1864. Huirivis —Velasco (1850) quoted 
by Bancroft, op cit. 

Huite (Cahita: ‘archer’). A small 
tribe or subdivision of the Cahita group, 
formerly living, according to Orozco y 
Berra, in the mountains of n. Sinaloa, 
Mexico, 7 leagues from the “Sinaloas.” 
They are described as having been an¬ 
thropophagous, at open war with all 
their neighbors, and as barbarous and 
naked, but through the efforts of the mis¬ 
sionaries they were gradually reformed 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-37 


and were gathered into a pueblo where 
they afterward became confounded with 
the “Sinaloas.” Whether they spoke a 
dialect different from that of the other 
subdivisions of the Cahita is uncertain, 
although from statements by Father Perez 
de Ribas, in 1645, it may be inferred that 
they did. They became extinct as a tribe 
at an early date, probably through ab¬ 
sorption by the Sinaloa. 

Huites. —Ribas, Hist. Triumphos, 211, 1645. San¬ 
tiago Huires. —Orozco y Berra, Geog. 333, 1864 
(mission name of settlement). Vites. —Ibid. 

Huititnom. The branch of the Yuki of 
n. California who held the s. fork of the 
middle fork of Eel r. (a. l. k. ) 

Huixapapa. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874. 

Hukanuwu(X4& nuwii'). AnoldTlingit 
town on the n. side of Cross sd., Alaska, 
between the mainland and Chichagof id. 
Distinct from Kukanuwu. (j. r. s.) 

Huldanggats ( XAlda'ngats , ‘ slaves ’). 
A division of the Hagi-lanas, an important 
part of the Raven clan among the Nin- 
stints Haida of Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col. The native story told to account for 
their name relates that a chief’s wife was 
once giving these people food, and since 
they never seemed to have enough, she 
finally said, “Are you slaves?” The name 
clung to them ever after. ( j. r. s. ) 

Qalda'ngasal.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 25, 1898. XAlda'ngats.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 268, 1905. 

Hullooetell. Reported to Lewis and 
Clark as a numerous nation living n. of 
Columbia r., on Coweliskee (Cowlitz) r., 
above the Skilloot, and on Chahwahna- 
hiooks (Lewis) r., in 1806. It was either 
a Chinookan or a Salishan tribe. 
Hull-loo-el-lell. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 
117,1905. Hullooellell.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
11,591,1817. Hullooetell.— Ibid., il, 209,1814. Hul- 
loo-et-tell. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 206, 
1905. Hul-lu-et-tell.— Ibid., 214. 

Huma (‘ red ’). A Choctaw tribe living 
during the earlier period of the French 
colonization of Louisiana, 7 leagues above 
Red r. on the e. bank of the Mississippi, 
their settlement in 1699 containing 140 
cabins and 350 families. A red pole (see 
Baton Rouge) marked the boundary be¬ 
tween them and the Bayogoula on the s. 
In 1706 the Tonika fled to them from the 
Chickasaw, but later rose against them 
and killed more than half, after which the 
remainder established themselves near the 
site of New Orleans. Later they lived 
along Bayou La Fourche and in the neigh¬ 
borhood of the present Houma, La., which 
bears their name and where they are still 
represented by several hundred mixed- 
bloods. 

Homas. -La Harpe (1719) in Margry, Dec., Vi, 244, 
1886. Houma. -Gatschet, op. cit. Omats. —Letter 
of 1682 in Margry, D6c., ii, 205, 1877. Ommas. — 
Iberville (1699), ibid., iv, 448, 1880. Ouma. — La 
Salle, ibid., I, 563,1875. 


578 


HUMALIJA-HUNA 


[b. a. e. 


Humalija. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Humarisa (from humashi, 1 to run ’). A 
rancheria of 288 Tarahumare, not far from 
Norogachic, Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lum- 
holtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Humawhi. A Shastan tribe or subtribe 
formerly living on the s. fork of Pit r., 
Modoc co., Cal. According to Curtin 
they were a portion of the Ilmawi, living 
a short distance n. of Hot Spring, Modoc 
co. 

Hama’wi.— Curtin, Ilruawi vocab., B. A. E., 1889. 
Hu-ma'-whi.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
267, 1877. 

Humbo. A New Hampshire word for 
maple syrup. Horatio Hale sought to 
bring it into relation with ombigamisige in 
Chippewa and closely related Algonquian 
dialects, a term signifying ‘ he makes the 
maple syrup boil, ’ or * boiled sugar drink, ’ 
the chief element being the radical omb , 
‘toboil.’ (a. f. c.) 

Humboldt Indians. The Paviotso living 
around Humboldt lake, Nev.—Simpson, 
Rep. of Explor. Across Utah, 38,1876. 

Hume. A former tribe of s. Texas, prob¬ 
ably Coahuiltecan, the chief of which was 
encountered in 1675 by Fernando del 
Bosque 7 leagues beyond the Rio Grande. 
Jume.— Fernando del Bosque (1675) in Nat. Geog. 
Mag., xiv, 344,1903. Jumees. Revillagigedo, MS. 
(1793) quoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 306,1864. 

Humelsom ( HumElsom ). ~ A Squawmish 
village community on Burrard inlet, Brit. 
Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 
475, 1900. 

Humkak (Hum-kak'). An important 
Chumashan village formerly near Pt Con¬ 
ception, Santa Barbara co", Cal.—Hen- 
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Humor. It has been so commonly the 
fashion to describe the American Indian 
as “the stoic of the woods without a 
tear,” that he has generally been denied 
as well the possession of a sense of humor. 
That he does not lack such, however, will 
readily be admitted by any one who has 
come to know the Indian as he is, has 
shared his meals and his camp fire, and 
had the opportunity of enjoying the real 
wit and humor abounding in common 
speech and in ancient legend. The pun, 
the jest of all kinds, the practical joke, 
the double-entendre, of which he is some¬ 
times past-master, are all known to him. 
Particularly does the awkward action or 
the inexpert movement of the white man 
incite him to laughter. Like the white 
man, he has a fund of wit at the expense 
of the weaker sex and its peculiarities. 
The Eskimo and the Pueblos especially are 
merry, laughingpeople, who jest and trifle 
through all the grades from quiet sar¬ 
casm to the loudest joke. This appears 
in their songs and legends, in which 
humor and satire are constantly cropping 


out. That the Micmac and closely re¬ 
lated Indian tribes of the Algonquian 
stock in n. e. North America have a keen 
sense of the humorous and ridiculous any 
one may convince himself by reading 
some of the tales in Leland and Prince’s 
Kuloskap (1902), especially the episode of 
the master and the babe, and the story of 
the wizard and the Christian priest. The 
mythic trickster is, in fact, found in every 
tribe, sometimes as a misshapen person¬ 
age, sometimes as a supernatural coyote, 
rabbit, or other animal, and the relation 
of his adventures provokes the greatest 
mirth. Around their camp fires, and 
“ when the spirit moves them,” the Chip¬ 
pewa and related tribes can jest and trifle 
in real fashion. The episodes in many 
of their tales and legends also prove their 
possession of wit and humor. The Chero¬ 
kee sense of humor is proved by their 
myths and legends (Mooney in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1900), and that of the Zuni by 
the folklore of that tribe (Cushing, Zuni 
Folk Tales, 1901). The Kutenai of Brit¬ 
ish Columbia and Idaho are not without 
the virtues of humor and sarcasm (Cham¬ 
berlain, Rep. on N. W. Tribes of Can., 
70, 1892). Puns and mistakes in pronun¬ 
ciation easily set them into fits of laugh¬ 
ter. The Pueblos, Iroquois, Apache, some 
of the Plains tribes, and those of the n. w. 
Pacific coast had regular clowns or fun- 
makers at some of their dances and other 
ceremonies. Some Plains tribes had the 
custom of marking the spot where 
any amusing accident occurred while on 
the march in order that later travelers 
might inquire and learn the joke. See 
Amusements. (a. f. c.) 

Humptulips (said to mean ‘chilly re¬ 
gion’). A body of Chehalis on a river 
of the same name emptying into Chehalis 
r., Wash. They are under the supervi¬ 
sion of the Puyallup school superinten¬ 
dent and numbered 21 in 1904. 

Hamtolops.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 574, 
1878. Humptulip.—Ind. Aff. Rep., pt. I. 702, 1901. 
Hump-tu-lups.—Ross in Ind. Aff. Rep., 18, 1870. 
Um-too-leaux.—Ford, ibid., 250, 1858. 

Huna. A Tlingit tribe on Cross sd., 
Alaska, camping in summer northward 
to and beyond Lituya bay. Pop. 1,300 
in 1870, 908 in 1880, and 592 in 1890. For 
1900 the entire population of Gaudekan, 
the chief Huna village, was given as 447. 
Other towns in their country are Akvet- 
skoe, Hukanuwu, Klughuggue, Kukan- 
uwu, and Tlushashakian. Their social 
divisions are Chukanedi, Koskedi, Tak- 
dentan, and Wushketan. 

Chuna-kon.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. 
Cross Sound Indians.—Kane, Wand N. A., app., 
1859 (traders’ name). Grass Sound Indians.— 
Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 535, 1870. Hoonah 
Kow.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., in, 
232, 1903. Hoone-ahs.—Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
314, 1868. Hoone-aks.—Halleck in Rep. Sec. War! 
pt. I, 39,1868. Hooniahs.—Scidmore, Alaska, 127. 
1885. Hoonid—Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 535 
1870. Hoonyah.—Petroff in Tenth Census, Alaska, 


BULL. 30] 


HUNAWURP-HUNKPAPA 


579 


31, 1884. Humros.— Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 314, 
1868. Huna. —Pfeiffer, Second Journ. Around 
World, 314, 1856. Huna cow. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 489, 1855 (after Kane; misprint). 
Huna-kon.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. Hun- 
nas. —Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, pt. i, 39, 1868 
Ueena-caw.— Kane, Wand in N. A., app., 1859. 
Whinega.— Mahony (1869) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 68, 
41st Cong., 2dsess., 19,1870. 

Hunawurp ( Hu-na-wurp ). One of the 
Chumashan villages formerly near Santa 
Ines mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal.— 
Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Hunctu. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Hungopavi (Navaho: ‘crooked nose’). 
An important pueblo ruin 2 m. above 
Pueblo Bonito, on the n. side of Chaco 
canyon, at the base of the canyon wall, 
in n. w. New Mexico. It is built around 
3 sides of a court, the extremities of the 
wings being connected by a semicircular 
double wall and the space between these 
walls divided into rooms. The length of 
the main building is 309 ft; of the 2 
wings, 136 ft each. The building was 4 
stories high. There is a circular kiva in 
the court and another inclosed within the 
walls of the main building. The one in¬ 
closed is 23 ft in diameter. The masonry 
of Hungopavi is exceptionally good; the 
material is fine-grained, grayish-yellow 
sandstone, compactly laid in thin mud 
mortar. The exterior walls of the first 
story are 3 ft thick. Walls still stand to 
a height of 30 ft, and deterioration has 
proceeded very slowly since the ruin was 
first described. See Hardacre in Scrib¬ 
ner’s Mag., Dec. 1878; Jackson in 10th 
Rep. Hayden Surv., 438, 1879, and the 
writers mentioned below. (e. l. h.) 
Hungo Parie. —Domenech, Deserts, I, 200, 1860 
(misprint). Hungo Pavia. —Morgan in Rep. Pea¬ 
body Mus., Xll, 549,1880. Hungo Pavie. —Simpson, 
Exped. Navaho Country, 79, 1850. Hunyo Pavie. — 
Cope in Rep. Wheeler Surv., app. LL, 173,1875. 

Huning ruin. A large, rectangular, pre¬ 
historic ruin on the ranch of Henry Hun¬ 
ing at Showlow, Navajo co., Ariz., on a 
rock table above Showlow cr. The pot¬ 
tery found on the site is of red and gray 
ware, not of very fine quality. The ma¬ 
sonry of the walls is good, but the remains 
of the pueblo do not indicate very long 
occupancy.—Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1901, 301, 1903. 

Hunkkhwitik ( Hun-kqwV-ttk ). A former 
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina 
r., Oreg.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Hunkpapa (variously interpreted ‘at the 
entrance,’ ‘atthe head end of the circle,’ 
‘those who camp by themselves,’ and 
‘wanderers’). A division of the Teton 
Sioux. From the meager data relating 
to the history of this band it seems prob¬ 
able that it is one of comparatively mod¬ 
ern formation. When Hennepin, in 1680, 


found what are believed to have been the 
Teton as far e. as the banks of the upper 
Mississippi, no mention of the Hunkpapa 
at that early date or for 100 years there¬ 
after can be found unless it be under some 
name yet unidentified. Their name is not 
mentioned by Lewis and Clark, though it 
is possible that the tribe is included in the 
Tetons Saone of those explorers. The 
name first appears as Honkpapa, and 
it is properly written Hunkpapa in the 
treaty of 1825. It is evident that the tribe 
was then well known, although its his¬ 
tory previous to this date is undetermined. 
The Tetons Saone were located by Lewis 
and Clark, in 1804, on both sides of the 
Missouri below Beaver cr., N. Dak., and 
were estimated at 300 men or 900 souls in 
120 tipis. Ramsey (1849) gave their loca¬ 
tion as near Cannonball r. Culbertson 
(1850) gave their range as on the Chey¬ 
enne, Moreau, Grand, and Cannonball 
rs., and estimated them at 320 tipis. 
Gen. Warren (1855) said that they lived 
on the Missouri near the mouth of the 
Moreau and roamed from the Big Chey¬ 
enne up to the Yellowstone, and w. to the 
Black-hills. He states that they formerly 
intermarried extensively with the Chey¬ 
enne. His estimate of population is 365 
tipis, 2,920 souls. He adds that many 
of the depredations along the Platte “ are 
committed by the Unkpapas and Sihasa- 
pas.” It is indicative of their character 
that they were among the last of the Da¬ 
kota to be brought upon reservations. 
The Indian agent, writing in 1854, says: 
“All the bands of Sioux have already re¬ 
ceived their presents with great appear¬ 
ance of friendship, excepting the Minne- 
cowzues (Miniconjou), Blackfeet (Siha- 
sapa), and Honepapas (Hunkpapa). The 
former band are daily expected at the fort, 
and will gladly receive their annuities; 
but the Blackfeet and Honepapas still 
persist in refusing any annuities, and are 
constantly violating all the stipulations of 
the treaty. They are continually warring 
and committing depredations on whites 
and neighboring tribes, killing men and 
stealing horses. They even defy the 
Great Father, the President, and declare 
their intention to murderindiscriminately 
all that come within their reach. They, 
of all Indians, are now the most dreaded 
on the Missouri.” And when the agent 
finally succeeded in reaching them and 
holding a council with their chiefs at Ft 
Clark, they refused to receive the pres¬ 
ents sent by the Government, stating that 
they did not want them, but preferred the 
li berty to take scalps and com mit whatever 
depredations they pleased. They took part 
in most of the subsequent conflicts with 
the whites, as that at Ft Phil. Kearney and 
that with Custer on the Little Bighorn. 
The number of the band in 1891 was 571; 


580 


HUNKPATINA-HUNTING 


[B. A. E. 


these were gathered on Standing Rock 
res., N. and S. Dak. The population is 
no longer given separately. The noted 
Sitting Buli was chief of this tribe, though 
in making treaties he signed also for the 
Oglala. 

Their subdivisions as given by J. O. 
Dorsey are: (1) Chankaokhan, (2) Che- 
okhba, (3) Tinazipeshicha, (4) Talona- 
pin, (5) Kiglashka, (6) Chegnakeokisela, 
(7) Shikshichela, (8) Wakan, and (9) 
Hunskachantozhuha. Culbertson (Smith- 
son. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851) mentions the 
following bands: Devil’s medicine-man 
band (Wakan), Half breechclout people 
(Chegnakeokisela), Fresh meat necklace 
people (Talonapin), Sleepy Kettle band 
(Cheokhba), Sore backs (Chankaokhan), 
Bad bows (Tinazipeshicha), and Those 
that carry. Fire-Heart’s band (Chanta- 
apeta’s band) is supposed to be a part of 
the Hunkpapa. 

Ampapa.— Smet, Miss, de 1’ Oregon, 264,848. Ampa- 
pes. —Smet, Letters, 23,1843. Aukpapas. —Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 297,1854. Hankpapes. —Parker, J our., 44,1840. 
Honepapas. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 295,1854. Honk pa pa. — 
Ex. Doc. 56, 18th Cong., 1st sess.,9,1824. Houkpa- 
pas. —Ind. Aff. Rep.,471,1838. Hunkappas. —Ram¬ 
sey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 86, 1850 (misprint). 
Hupkpapa.— Riggs, Dakota Gram, and Diet., viii, 
1852. Hunkpapas. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1825), 346, 
1826. Hunkpa-te-dans. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1849, 86, 1850 (mistake). Nicpapa. —Hare in Spirit 
of Missions, 586, 1885 (misprint). Oak-pa-pas. — 
Hoffman in H. R. Ex. Doc. 36, 33d Cong., 2d sess., 
3, 1855. Oncapapas. —Corliss, Lacotah MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 107, 1874. Onch-pa-pah.— Culbertson in 
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. Onc-pah-pa. —Don¬ 
aldson in Smithson. Rep. 1885, pt. 2, 57,1886. One- 
papa. -Catlin, N. Am. Inds., I, 223, 1844. One-ca- 
papa. —Donaldson in Smithson. Rep., 1885, pt. 2, 
57, 1886. Onkpahpah. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1886), 899, 
1873. Onkpapah. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 494, 
1855. Ouh-papas.— Vaughan in H. R. Doc. 36, 33d 
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1855. TJncpapa. —Terry in Rep. 
Sec. War for 1869, pt. 1, 34. Unc Papas. —Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1856, 7, 1857. Uncpappas. —Keane in Stan¬ 
ford, Compend., 541, 1878. TJnkpapa Dakotas. — 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., map, 1862. 
TJnkpapas. —Warren, Dacota Country, 16,1855. 

Hunkpatina (‘campers at the end of the 
circle’). One of the two primary divi¬ 
sions of the Yanktonai Sioux, commonly 
known as Lower Yanktonai, from their 
former range on lower James r. of e. 
South Dakota. The Hunkpatina are 
seemingly referred to for the first time, 
in whole or in part, by Lewis and Clark, 
in 1804, under the name Honetaparteen, 
as a division of the Yankton of the N. 
They were on intimate terms with the 
Upper Yanktonai, who ranged about the 
upper waters of the James. They are 
now chiefly on Crow Creek res., S. Dak., 
where they numbered 1,009 in 1905. 
In 1866 they were estimated at 2,100. 
Some others appear to be attached to 
Standing Rock agency, N. Dak. Their 
bands, as given by J. O. Dorsey (15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897), are: Putetemini 
(Sweat-lips), Shungikcheka (Common 
dogs), Takhuhayuta (Eat-the-scrapings- 
of-hides), Sangona (Shot-at-some-white- 
object), Ihasha (Red-lips), Iteghu 


(Burnt-face), Pteyuteshni (Eat-no-buffa- 
lo-cows). 

Amkepatines. —Smet, Letters, 23, 1843. Hen-ta-pah- 
tus.— Prescott in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 169, 
note, 1852. Hen-tee-pah-tees. —Ibid. Ho in de bor- 
to.— Clark (1804) in Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, r, 
132,1904. Honcpatela band. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 94,34th 
Cong., 1st sess., 11,1856. Honepatela Yanctonnais.— 
H.R.Ex.Doc.130,34thCong.,lstsess.,7,1856. Hone- 
ta-par-teen. — Lewis and Clark, Discov., 34, 1806. 
Hunk-pate.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 71, 1858. Hunkpatee.— 
Cleveland in Our Church Work, Dec. 4, 1875. 
Hunkpatidan. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 248, 
1851. Hupkpatidaijs. —Riggs, Dak.Gram. andDict., 
xvi, 1852. ! Hunkplatin. — Brown in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1859, 92, 1860. Lower Yanctonais. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 
371, 1866. Lower Yanctonnais. —Ibid., 1871, 525, 
1872. Lower Yanktonai. —Robinson, letter to Dor¬ 
sey, 1879. Lower Yanktonnais.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 27, 
1878. Unc-pah-te.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 231, 1868. 
Uncpatina.— Alderson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 266, 1874, 
Unkepatines.— Smet, Letters, 37, note, 1843. 

Hunkuwacnicha (‘without a mother’). A 
band of the Brul6 Teton Sioux. 
Huijku-wanica.— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Hunku-wanitca. —Ibid. 

Hunnint. A Clallam village in n. w. 
Washington which participated in the 
treaty of Point No Point in 1855.—U. S. 
Ind. Treat., 800,1873. 

Hunskachantozhuha (‘ legging tobacco 
pouches’). A band of the Hunkpapa 
Teton Sioux. 

Hupska-caijtozuha.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
221, 1897. Hu"ska-tca n tojuha. —Ibid. 

Hunting. The pursuit of game may be 
divided into two sets of activities, which 
correspond to military strategy and tac¬ 
tics, the one including the whole series 
of traps, the other hunting weapons and 
processes. Beginning with the latter, the 
following 9 classes embrace all the hunt¬ 
ing activities of the American Indians: 

(1) Taking animals with the hand 
without the aid of apparatus. Examples 
of this are picking up marine animals on 
the beach to eat on the spot, robbing 
birds’ nests, and seizing birds on their 
roosts on dark nights. Such unskilled 
taking developed the utmost cunning, 
agility, and strength for pursuing, seiz¬ 
ing, climbing, diving, stealing upon, and 
deceiving, and the same qualities were 
useful also in the pursuit with weapons. 
The climax of this first class was the com¬ 
munal game drive, in which a whole band 
or tribe would surround a herd of animals 
and coax or force them into a gorge, a 
corral, or natural cul-de-sac. 

(2) Gathering with devices. To this 
class of activities belong substitutes for 
the fingers or palms, such as rakes for 
drawing or piling up sea food; a sharp 
stick for getting worms by forcing them 
out of the ground; nets "and scoops for 
taking animals from the water (see Fish¬ 
ing, Nets ); also dulls, reatas, and bolasfor 
reaching out and grasping. This class 
reached its climax in the partnership or 
communal net, used by the Eskimo and 
other tribes for taking seal and also small 
fish. 

(3) The employment of apparatus for 


BULL. 30] 


HUNTLATIN-HUPA 


581 


striking, bruising, or breaking bones, in¬ 
cluding stones held in the hands, clubs 
with grips, and hard objects at the end 
of a line or handle, like a slung shot. 
The n. Pacific tribes took great pains 
with their clubs, carving on them their 
symbolism. 

(4) Slashing or stabbing with edged 
weapons. The Indians had little to do 
with metals and were given almost alto¬ 
gether to the use of stone, bone, reeds, 
and wood for stabbing and slashing. 
Both chipped and ground weapons were 
used, either without a handle, with agrip, 
or at the end of a shaft. Every Eskimo 
had a quiver of daggers for use at close 
quarters, and so had the Indian his side 
arms. Edged weapons, however, were 
not so common as the weapons of the 
next class. 

(5) Hunting with piercing weapons, 
the most common of all Indian methods 
of taking animals. The implements in¬ 
clude the pointed stick or stone, the lance, 
the spear, the harpoon, and the arrow 
(q. v.). Weapons of this class were held 
in the hand, hurled from the hand, shot 
from a bow or a blowgun, or slung from 
the throwing stick. Each of the varie¬ 
ties went through a multitude of transfor¬ 
mations, depending on game, materials 
at hand, the skill of the maker, etc. 

(6) The use of traps, pits, and snares 
(see Traps). The Tenankutchin of 
Alaska capture deer, moose, and caribou 
by meansof a brush fence, extended many 
miles, in which at intervals snares are 
set; and the same custom was practised 
by many other tribes in hunting the 
larger game. The Plains tribes and the 
ancient Pueblos captured deer, antelope, 
and wolves by means of pitfalls. 

(7) Capturing game by means of dogs 
or other hunting animals. Indian tribes, 
with few exceptions, had no hunting dogs 
regularly trained to pursue game, but the 
common dog was very efficient. Fowls 
of the air, marine animals, and especially 
carnivorous animals, such as the coyote, 
by their noises and movements gave the 
cue which aided the cunning and obser¬ 
vant hunter to identify, locate, and follow 
his game. (See Domestication.) 

(8) Hunting by means of fire and 
smoke. In America, as throughout the 
world, as soon as men came into posses¬ 
sion of fire the conquest of the animal 
kingdom was practically assured. The 
Indians used smoke to drive animals out 
of hiding, torches to dazzle the eyes of 
deer and to attract fish and birds to their 
canoes, and firebrands and prairie fires 
for game drives. 

(9) Taking animals by meansof drugs. 
The bark of walnut root served to asphyxi¬ 
ate fish in fresh-water pools in the South¬ 


ern states; in other sections soap root 
and buckeyes were used. 

In connection with hunting processes 
there were accessory activities in which 
the Indian had to be versed. There were 
foods to eat and foods tabued, clothing 
and masks to wear, shelters and hiding 
places to provide, and not only must the 
hunter be familiar with calls, imitations, 
decoys, whistles, and the like, but ac¬ 
quainted with the appropriate hunting 
songs, ceremonies, and fetishes, and with 
formulas for every act in the process, the 
time for the chase of the various animals, 
the laws for the division of game, and the 
clan names connected with hunting. Be¬ 
sides, there were num berless employments 
and conveniences associated therewith. 
In order to use the harpoon it was neces¬ 
sary to have a canoe, and with every 
method of hunting were connected other 
employments which taxed the ingenuity 
of the savage mind. There were also 
certain activities which were the result of 
hunting. Questions presented themselves 
regarding transportation, receptacles, the 
discrimination of useful species, and the 
construction of fences. A slight knowl¬ 
edge of anatomy was necessary in order 
to know where to strike and how to cut 
up game. All these gave excellent train¬ 
ing in perception, skill, and cooperative 
effort. See Buffalo, Fishing, Food , Fur 
trade, Horse, etc., and the various sub¬ 
jects above referred to. 

Consult Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 138, 
1885; Boas, Central Eskimo, 6th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1888; Catlin, N. A. Inds., i-ii, 1844; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, 
pt. 3, 1905; Hoffman, Menomini Inds., 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Mason, various 
articles in Rep. Smithson. Inst, and Nat. 
Mus.; Maximilian, Travels, 1849; Mur¬ 
doch, Ethnological Results of the Point 
Barrow Exped., 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; 
Nelson, Eskimo about Bering Strait, 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Schoolcraft, Indian 
Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57. (o. t. m.) 

Huntlatin. A division of the Tenan¬ 
kutchin on Tanana r., Alaska. 

Hautlatin.—Dawson (after Allen) in Rep. Geol. 
Surv. Can., 203b, 1887. Huntlatin.—Allen, Rep. 
on Alaska, 137, 1887. 

Hunxapa. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Huixapa.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 459, 1874. 
Hunxapa.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Huocom. A former Costanoan village 
near Santa Cruz mission, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. 

Hupa. An Athapascan tribe formerly 
occupying the valley of Trinity r., Cal., 
from South fork to its junction with 
the Klamath, including Hupa valley. 
They were first mentioned by Gibbs in 
1852; a military post was established in 
their territory in 1855 and maintained 


HUPA 


[b. a. e. 


582 


until 1892; and a reservation 12 m. square, 
including nearly all the Hupa habitat, was 
set apart in Aug., 1864. The population 
in 1888 was given as 650; in 1900, 430; 
in 1905, 412. They are at present self- 
supportiqg, depending on agriculture and 



HUPA WOMAN. (GODDARD) 


stock raising. When they first came in 
contact with the whites, in 1850, the Hupa 
were all under the control of a chief 
called Ahrookoos by the Yurok (McKee 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 
161, 1853), whose authority is said to have 
extended to other peoples southward 
along Trinity r. The position of chief de¬ 
pended on the possession of wealth, which 
usually remained in the family, caus¬ 
ing the chieftainship to descend from 
father to son. In feasts and dances a 
division of the Hupa into two parts is 
manifest, but this division seems to have 
no validity outside of religious matters. 
The tribe occupied the following perma¬ 
nent villages: Cheindekhotding, Djish- 
tangading, Haslinding, Honsading, How- 
ungkut, Kinchuwhikut, Medilding, 


Miskut, Takimilding, Tlelding, Toltsas- 
ding, and Tsewenalding. Powers (Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., in, 73, 1877) gave Chail- 
kutkaituh, Wissomanchuh, and Misketoi- 
itok, which have not been identified with 
any of the foregoing; Gibbs (MS. on 
Klamath river, B. A. E., 1852), on infor¬ 
mation furnished by the Yurok, gave 
Wangullewutlekauh, Wangullewatl, 
Sehachpeya, and (Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes, 
in, 139, 1853)Tashuanta, Sokeakeit (Sok- 
chit), and Meyemma. 

The houses of the Hupa were built of 
cedar slabs set on end, the walls being 4 ft 
high on the sides and rising to more than 
6 ft at the ends to accommodate the slope 
of the roof, inclosing a place about 20 ft 
square, the central part of which was ex¬ 
cavated to form the principal chamber, 
which was about 12 ft square and 5 ft 
deep. The entrance was a hole 18 or 20 
in. in diameter and about a foot above 
the ground. This was the storehouse for 
the family goods and the sleeping place 
of the women. The men occupied sweat 
houses at night. The Hupa depended 
for food on the deer and elk of the moun¬ 
tains, the salmon and lamprey of the 



HUPA MAN. (GODDARD) 


river, and the acorns and other vegetal 
foods growing plentifully about them. 
They are noted for the beautiful twined 
baskets produced by the women and 
the fine pipes and implements executed 
by the men. The yew bows they used 












BULL. 30} 


HUPA 


583 


to make, only about 3 ft long, strength¬ 
ened with sinew fastened to the back 
with sturgeon glue, were effective up to 
75 yds. and could inflict a serious wound 
at 100 yds. Their arrows, made of sy- 
ringa shoots wound with sinew, into 
which foreshafts of juneberry wood were 
inserted, feathered with three split hawk 
feathers and pointed with sharp heads 
of obsidian, flint, bone, or iron, some¬ 
times passed entirely through a deer. 
The hunter, disguised in the skin of the 
deer or elk, the odor of his body removed 
by ablution and smoking with green fir 
boughs, simulated so perfectly the move¬ 
ments of the animal in order to get with¬ 
in bowshot that a panther sometimes 
pounced upon his back, but withdrew 
when he felt the sharp pins that, for the 
very purpose of warding off such an at¬ 
tack, were thrust through the man’s hair 
gathered in a bunch at the back of the 
neck. The Hupa took deer also with 
snares of a strong rope made from the 
fiber of the iris, or chased them into the 
water with dogs and pursued them in 
canoes. Meat was roasted before the fire 
or on the coals or incased in the stomach 
and buried in the ashes until cooked, or 
was boiled in water-tight baskets by drop¬ 
ping in hot stones. Meat and fish were 
preserved by smoking. Salmon were 
caught in latticed weirs stretched across 
the river or in seines or poundnets, or 
were speared with barbs that detached 
but were made fast to the pole by lines. 
Dried acorns were ground into flour, leach¬ 
ed in a pit to extract the bitter taste, and 
boiled into a mush. 

The men wore ordinarily a breechclout 
of deerskin or of skins of small animals 
joined together, and leggings of painted 
deerskin with the seam in front hidden 
by a fringe that hung from the top, which 
was turned down at the knee. Moccasins 
of deerskin with soles of elk hide were 
sometimes worn. The dance robes of 
the men were made of two deerskins sewn 
together along one side, the necks meet¬ 
ing over the left shoulder and the tails 
nearly touching the ground. Panther 
skins were sometimes used. The hair 
was tied into two clubs, one hanging down 
on each side of the head, or into one 
which hung behind. Bands of deer¬ 
skin, sometimes ornamented with wood¬ 
peckers’ crests, were worn about the head 
in dances, and occasionally feathers or 
feathered darts were stuck in the hair. 
The nose was not pierced, but in the ears 
were often worn dentalium shells with 
tassels of woodpeckers’ feathers. A quiver 
of handsome skin filled with arrows was 
a part of gala dress, and one of plain 
buckskin or a skin pouch or sack of net¬ 
ting was carried as a pocket for small 
articles. Women wore a skirt of deer¬ 


skin reaching to the knees, with a long, 
thick fringe hanging below and a short 
fringe at the waist. When soiled it was 
washed with the soap plant. At the 
opening of the skirt in front an apron 
was worn underneath. The skirts worn 
in dances were ornamented with strings 
of shell beads, pieces of abalone shell, 
and flakes of obsidian fastened to the 
upper and of shells of pine nuts inserted 
at intervals in the lower fringe. The 
apron for common wear was made of long 
strands of pine-nut shells and braided 
leaves attached to a belt. The dance 
aprons had strands of shells and pendants 
cut from abalone shells. Small dentalium 
and olivella shells, pine-nut shells, and 
small black fruits were strung for neck¬ 
laces. A robe of deerskin or of wildcat fur 
was worn with the hair next to the body 
as a protection against the cold and in 
rainy weather with the hair side out. The 
head covering was a cap of fine basket 
work, which protected the forehead from 
the carrying strap whereby burdens and 
baby baskets were borne. Women, ex¬ 
cept widows, wore their hair long and 
tied in queues that hung down in front 
of the ears, and were ornamented with 
strips of mink skin, sometimes covered 
with woodpeckers’ crests, and shell pen¬ 
dants, and sometimes perfumed with 
stems of yerba buena. From their ears 
hung pendants of abalone shell attached 
to twine. All adult women were tattooed 
with vertical black marks on the chin 
and sometimes curved marks were added 
at the corners of the mouth. 

The imagination of the Hupa has peo¬ 
pled the regions e., w., s., and above with 
mortals known as Kihunai. The under¬ 
world is the abode of the dead. Their 
creator or culture hero, Yimantuwingyai, 
dwells with Kihunai across the ocean to¬ 
ward the n. A salmon feast is held by the 
southern divison in the spring and an 
acorn feast by the northern division in 
the fall. They formerly celebrated three 
dances each year: the spring dance, the 
white-deerskin dance, and the jumping 
dance. They have a large and varied 
folklore and many very interesting med¬ 
icine formulas. See Goddard, Life and 
Culture of the Hupa, Univ. Cal. Pub., 1903; 
Hupa Texts, ibid., 1904. (p. e. g.) 

Cha'parahihu.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (Shasta 
name). Hich’hu.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (Chima- 
riko name). Hoopa.— Gatschet in Beach, Ind. 
Miscel., 440,1877. Hoo-pah.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 139, 1853. Ho-pah.—Gibbs, MS., 
B. A. E., 1852. Hupa.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., hi, 73, 1877. Hupo.— Gatschet in Beach, 
Ind. Miscel., 440, 1877. Kishakevira.—Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1903 (Karok name). Nabiltse.—Gibbs, Na- 
biltse MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1857 (trans. ‘man’). 
Nabil-tse.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 
423, 1853. Nabittse.—Latham in Proc. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., VI, 84, 1854. Natano.—Ray in Am. 
Nat., 832,1886. Noh-tin-oah.—Azpell, MS., B. A. E. 
(own name). Num-ee-muss,—Ibid. (Yurokname). 
Trinity Indians.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 


584 


HURON 


[B. a. e. 


4,32d Cong., spec, sess., 161,1853. Up-pa.—Hazen 
quoted by Gibbs, Nabiltse MS. vocab., B. A. E. 

Huron (lexically from French hure, 
‘bristly,’ ‘bristled,’ from hure, ‘rough 
hair ’ (of the head), head of man or beast, 
wild boar’s head; old French, ‘muzzle of 
the wolf, lion,’ etc., ‘the scalp,’ ‘a wig’; 
Norman French, hurt, ‘ rugged ’; Rou¬ 
manian, hurte, ‘rough earth,’ and the 
suffix -on, expressive of depreciation and 
employed to form nouns referring to per¬ 
sons). The name Huron, frequently with 
an added epithet, like vilain, ‘ base,’ was 
in use in France as early as 1358 (La Curne 
deSainte-Palaye in Diet. Hist, de l’Ancien 
Langage Fran^oise, 1880) as a name ex¬ 
pressive of contumely, contempt, and in¬ 
sult, signifying approximately an un¬ 
kempt person, knave, ruffian, lout, wretch. 
The peasants who rebelled against the 
nobility during the captivity of King John 
in England in 1358 were called both 
Hurons and Jacques or Jacques bons hom- 
mes, the latter signifying approximately 
‘simpleton Jacks,’ and so the term Jac¬ 
querie was applied to this revolt of the 
peasants. But Father Lalement (Jes. Rel. 
for 1639, 51, 1858), in attempting to give 
the origin of the name Huron, says that 
about 40 years previous to his time, 
i. e., about 1600, when these people first 
reached the French trading posts on the 
St Lawrence, a French soldier or sailor, 
seeing some of these barbarians wearing 
their hair cropped and roached, gave them 
the name Hurons, their heads suggesting 
those of wild boars. Lalement declares 
that while what he had advanced con¬ 
cerning the origin of the name was the 
most authentic, “others attribute it to 
some other though similar origin.” But 
it certainly does not appear that the re¬ 
bellious French peasants in 1358, men¬ 
tioned above, were called Hurons because 
they had a similar or an identical manner 
of wearing the hair; for, as has been 
stated, the name had, long previous to 
the arrival of the French in America, a 
well-known derogatory signification in 
France. So it is quite probable that the 
name was applied to the Indians in the 
sense of ‘an unkempt person,’ ‘a bristly 
savage,’ ‘ a wretch or lout,’ ‘ a ruffian.’ 

A confederation of 4 highly organized 
Iroquoian tribes with several small de¬ 
pendent communities, which, when first 
known in 1615, occupied a limited terri¬ 
tory, sometimes called Huronia, around 
L. Simcoe and s. and e. of Georgian bay, 
Ontario. According to the Jesuit Rela¬ 
tion for 1639 the names of these tribes, 
which were independent in local affairs 
only, were the Attignaouan tan (Bear peo¬ 
ple), the Attigneenongnahac (Cord peo¬ 
ple), the Arendahronon (Rock people), 
and the Tohontaenrat (Atahonta'enrat or 
Tohonta'enrat, White-eared or Deer peo¬ 
ple) . Two of the dependent peoples were 


the Bowl people and the Ataronchronon. 
Later, to escape destruction by the Iro¬ 
quois, the Wenrohronon, an Iroquoian 
tribe, in 1639, and the Atontrataronnon, an 
Algonquian people, in 1644, sought asylum 
with the Huron confederation. In the 
Huron tongue the common and gen¬ 
eral name of this confederation of tribes 
and dependent peoples was Wendat (8en- 
dat), a designation of doubtful analysis 
and signification, the most obvious mean¬ 
ing being ‘the islanders’ or ‘dwellers on 
a peninsula. ’ According to a definite tra¬ 
dition recorded in the Jesuit Relation for 
1639, the era of the formation of this con¬ 
federation was at that period compara¬ 
tively recent, at least in so far as the date 
of membership of the last two tribes men¬ 
tioned therein is concerned. According 
to the same authority the Rock people 
were adopted about 50 years and the 
Deer people about 30 years (traditional 
time) previous to 1639, thus carrying 
back to about 1590 the date of the immi¬ 
gration of the Rock people into the Huron 
country. The first two principal tribes 
in 1639, regarding themselves as the orig¬ 
inal inhabitants of the land, claimed that 
they knew with certainty the dwelling 
places and village sites of their ancestors 
in the country for a period exceeding 200 
years. Having received and adopted the 
other two into their country and state, 
they were the more important. Official ly 
and in their councils they addressed 
each other by the formal political terms 
‘brother’ and ‘sister’; they were also 
the more populous, having incorporated 
many persons, families, clans, and peo¬ 
ples, who, preserving the name and mem¬ 
ory of their own founders, lived among 
the tribes which adopted them as small 
dependent communities, maintaining the 
general name and having the community 
of certain local rights, and enjoyed the 
powerful protection and shared with it 
the community of certain other rights, 
interests, and obligations of the great 
Wendat commonwealth. 

The provenience and the course of mi¬ 
gration of the Rock and Deer tribes to 
the Huron country appear to furnish a 
reason for the prevalent but erroneous 
belief that all the Iroquoian tribes came 
into this continent from the valley of the 
lower St Lawrence. There is presump¬ 
tive evidence that the Rock and the Deer 
tribes came into Huronia from the middle 
and upper St Lawrence valley, and they 
appear to have been expelled therefrom 
by the Iroquois, hence the expulsion of 
the Rock and the Deer people from lower 
St Lawrence valley has been mistaken 
for the migration of the entire stock from 
that region. 

In his voyages to the St Lawrence in 
1534-43, Jacques Cartier found on the 


BULL. 30] 


HURON 


585 


present sites of Quebec and Montreal, and 
along both banks of this river above the 
Saguenay on the n. and above Gasp6 
peninsula on the s. bank, tribes speaking 
Iroquoian tongues, for there were at 
least two dialects, a fact well established 
by the vocabularies which Cartier re¬ 
corded. Lexical comparison with known 
Iroquoian dialects indicates that those 
spoken on the St Lawrence at that early 
date were Huron or Wendat. Cartier 
further learned that these St Lawrence 
tribes were in fierce combat with peoples 
dwelling southward from them, and his 
hosts complained bitterly of the cruel at¬ 
tacks made on them by their southern 
foes, whom they called Toudamani (Tru- 
damans or Trudamani) and Agouionda 
( OnJchiio nl tha’ is an Onondaga form), the 
latter signifying ‘those who attack us.’ 
Although he may have recorded the na¬ 
tive names as nearly phonetically as he 
was able, yet the former is not a distant 
approach to the well-known Tsonnon- 
towanen of the early French writers, a 
name which Champlain printed Chouon- 
touctroiion (probably written Chonon- 
touaronon), the name of the Seneca, 
which was sometimes extended to in¬ 
clude the Cayuga and Onondaga as a geo¬ 
graphical group. Lescarbot, failing to 
find in Canada in his time the tongues 
recorded by Cartier, concluded that “the 
change of language in Canada” was due 
“to a destruction of people,” and in 1603 
he declared (Nova Francia, 170, 1609): 
“For it is some 8 years since the Iro¬ 
quois did assemble themselves to the 
number of 8,000 men, and discomfited 
all their enemies, whom they surprised 
in their enclosures;” and (p. 290) “by 
such surprises the Iroquois, being in 
number 8,000 men, have heretofore ex¬ 
terminated the Algoumequins, them of 
Hochelaga, and others bordering upon 
the great river.” So it is probable that 
the southern foes of the tribes along 
the St Lawrence in Cartier’s time were 
the Iroquois tribes anterior to the for¬ 
mation of their historical league, for he 
was also informed that these Agouionda 
“doe continually warre one against an¬ 
other”—a condition of affairs which 
ceased with the formation of the league. 
Between the time of the last voyage of 
Cartier to the St Lawrence, in 1543, and 
the arrival of Champlain on this river in 
1603, nothing definite is known of these 
tribes and their wars. Champlain found 
the dwelling places of the tribes discov¬ 
ered by Cartier on the St Lawrence de¬ 
serted and the region traversed only 
rarely by war parties from extralimital 
Algonquian tribes which dwelt on the 
borders of the former territory of the ex¬ 
pelled Iroquoian tribes. Against the 
aforesaid Iroquoian tribes the Iroquois 


were still waging relentless warfare, 
which Champlain learned in 1622 had 
then lasted more than 50 years. 

Such was the origin of the confedera¬ 
tion of tribes strictly called Hurons by 
the French and Wendat (8endat) in their 
own tongue. But the name Hurons was 
applied in a general way to the Tionon- 
tati, or Tobacco tribe, under the form 
“Huron du Petun,” and also, although 
rarely, to the Attiwendaronk in the form 
“Huron de la Nation Neutre.” After 
the destruction of the Huron or Wendat 
confederation and the more or less 
thorough dispersal of the several tribes 
composing it, the people who, as political 
units, were originally called Huron and 
Wendat, ceased to exist. The Tionontati, 
or Tobacco tribe, with the few Huron 
fugitives, received the name “ Huron du 
Petun” from the French, but they be¬ 
came known to the English as Wendat, 
corrupted to Yendat, Guyandotte, and 
finally to Wyandot. The Jesuit Relation 
for 1667 says: “The Tionnontateheron- 
nons of to-day are the same people who 
heretofore were called the Hurons de la 
nation du p6tun.” These were the so- 
called Tobacco nation, and not the Wen¬ 
dat tribes of the Huron confederation. 
So the name Huron was employed only 
after these Laurentian tribes became set¬ 
tled in the region around L. Simcoe and 
Georgian bay. Champlain and his 
French contemporaries, after becoming 
acquainted with the Iroquois tribes of 
New York, called the Hurons les bons 
Iroquois , ‘the good Iroquois,’ to dis¬ 
tinguish them from the hostile Iroquois 
tribes. The Algonquian allies of the 
French called the Hurons and the Iro¬ 
quois tribes Nadowek, ‘adders,’ and Irw- 
khoivek, ‘realserpents,’ hence, ‘bitterene- 
mies.' The singular Ird'kowi, with the 
French suffix -ois, has become the fa¬ 
miliar “Iroquois.” The term Nadowe, in 
various forms (e. g., Nottaway) was ap¬ 
plied by the Algonquian tribes generally 
to all alien and hostile peoples. Cham¬ 
plain also called the Hurons Ochciteguin 
and Charioquois, from the names of 
prominent chiefs. The Delawares called 
them Talamatan , while the peoples of the 
“Neutral Nation” and of the Huron 
tribes applied to each other the term 
Attiwendaronk , literally, ‘their speech is 
awry,’ butfreely, ‘they are stammerers,’ 
referring facetiously to the dialectic dif¬ 
ference between the tongues of the two 
peoples. 

In 1615 Champlain found all the tribes 
which he later called Hurons, with the 
exception of the Wenrohronon and the 
Atontrataronon, dwelling in Huronia 
and waging war against the Iroquois 
tribes in New York. When Cartier ex¬ 
plored the St Lawrence valley, in 1534-43, 


586 


HURON 


[B. a. e. 


Iroquoian tribes occupied the n. bank of 
the river indefinitely northward and 
from Saguenay r. eastward to Georgian 
bay, with no intrusive alien bands (despite 
the subsequent but doubtful claim of the 
Onontchataronon to a former possession 
of the island of Montreal), and also the 
s. watershed from the Bay of Gasp6 w. to 
the contiguous territory of the Iroquois 
confederation on the line of the e. water¬ 
shed of L. Champlain. 

The known names of towns of these 
Laurentian Iroquois are Araste, Hagon- 
chenda, Hochelaga, Hochelay, Satadin, 
Stadacona, Starnatan, Tail la, Teguenon- 
dahi, and Tutonaguy. But Cartier, in 
speaking of the people of Hochelaga, 
remarks: “Notwithstanding, the said 
Canadians are subject to them with eight 
or nine other peoples who are on the said 
river.” All these towns and villages 
were abandoned previous to the arrival 
of Champlain on the St Lawrence in 1603. 
Of the towns of the Hurons, Sagard says: 
“There are about 20 or 25 towns and 
villages, of which some are not at all 
shut, nor closed [palisaded], and others 
are fortified with long pieces of timber in 
triple ranks, interlaced one with another 
to the height of a long pike [16 ft], and 
reenforced on the inside with broad, coarse 
strips of bark, 8 or 9 ft in height; below r 
there are large trees, with their branches 
lopped off, laid lengthwise on very short 
trunks of trees, forked at one end, to 
keep them in place; then above these 
stakes and bulwarks there are galleries or 
platforms, called ondaqna (‘box ’), which 
are furnished with stones to be hurled 
against an enemy in time of war, and 
with water to extinguish any fire which 
might be kindled against them. Persons 
ascend to these by means of ladders quite 
poorly made and difficult, which are 
made of long pieces of timber wrought by 
many hatchet strokes to hold the foot 
firm in ascending.” Champlain says that 
these palisades were 35 ft in height. In 
accord with the latter authority, Sagard 
says that these towns w T ere in a measure 
permanent, and were removed to new 
sites only when they became too distant 
from fuel and when their fields, for lack 
of manuring, became worn out, which 
occurred every 10, 20, 30, or 40 years, 
more or less, according to the situation of 
the country, the richness of the soil, and 
the distance of the forest, in the middle 
of which they always built their towns 
and villages. Champlain says the Hu¬ 
rons planted large quantities of several 
kinds of corn, w r hich grew finely, 
squashes, tobacco, many varieties of 
beans, and sunflowers, and that from the 
seeds of the last they extracted an oil 
with which they anointed their heads 
and employed for various other purposes. 


The government of these tribes was 
vested by law in a definite number of 
executive officers, called “chiefs” (q. v.) 
in English, who were chosen by the suf¬ 
frage of the child-bearing women and 
organized by law or council decree into 
councils for legislative and judicial pur¬ 
poses. There were five units in the 
social and political organization of these 
tribes, namely, the family, clan, phratrv, 
tribe, and confederation, which severally 
expressed their w T ill through councils co¬ 
ordinate with their several jurisdictions 
and which made necessary various grades 
of chiefs in civil affairs. In these com¬ 
munities the civil affairs of government 
were entirely differentiated from the 
military, the former being exercised by 
civil officers', the latter by military offi¬ 
cers. It sometimes happened that the 
same person performed the one or the 
other kind of function, but to do so he 
must temporarily resign his civil au¬ 
thority should it be incumbent on him to 
engage in military affairs, and when this 
emergency was past he would resume his 
civil function or authority. 

In almost every family one or more 
chiefship titles, known by particular 
names, were hereditary, and there might 
even be two or three "different grades of 
chiefs therein. But the candidate for the 
incumbency of any one of these dignities 
was chosen only by the suffrage of the 
mothers among the women of his family. 
The selection of the candidate thus made 
was then submitted for confirmation to 
the clan council, then to the tribal coun¬ 
cil, and lastly to the great federal council 
composed of the accredited delegates from 
the various allied tribes. 

The tribes composing the Hurons rec¬ 
ognized and enforced, among others, the 
rights of ownership and inheritance of 
property and dignities, of liberty and se¬ 
curity of person, in names, of marriage, 
in personal adornment, of hunting and 
fishing in specified territory, of prece¬ 
dence in migration and encampment and 
in the council room, and rights of religion 
and of the blood feud. They regarded 
theft, adultery, maiming, sorcery with 
evil intent, treason, and the murder of a 
kinsman or a co-tribesman as crimes 
which consisted solely in the violation of 
the rights of a kinsman by blood or 
adoption, for the alien had no rights 
which Indian justice and equity recog¬ 
nized, unless by treaty or solemn compact. 
If an assassination were committed or 
a solemnly sworn peace with another 
people violated by the caprice of- an in¬ 
dividual, it was not the rule to punish 
directly the guilty person, for this would 
have been to assume over him a juris¬ 
diction which no one would think of 
claiming; on the contrary, presents de- 


BULL. 30] 


HURON 


587 


signed to “cover the death ” or to restore 
peace were offered to the aggrieved party 
by the offender and his kindred. The 
greatest punishment that could be in¬ 
flicted on a guilty person by his kindred 
was to refuse to defend him, thus placing 
him outside the rights of the blood feud 
and allowing those whom he had offend¬ 
ed the liberty to take vengeance on him, 
but at their own risk and peril. 

The religion of these tribes consisted in 
the worship of all material objects, the 
elements and bodies of nature, and many 
creatures of a teeming fancy, which in 
their view directly or remotely affected 
or controlled their well-being. These 
objects of their faith and worship were 
regarded as man-beings or anthropic per¬ 
sons possessed of life, volition, and orenda 
(q. v.) or magic power of different kind 
and degree peculiar to each. In this reli¬ 
gion ethics or morals as such received 
only a secondary, if any, consideration. 
The status and interrelations of the per¬ 
sons of their pantheon one to another 
were fixed and governed by rules and 
customs assumed to be similar to those 
of the social and the political organization 
of the people, and so there was, therefore, 
at least among the principal gods, a kin¬ 
ship system patterned after that of the 
people themselves. They expressed their 
public religious worship in elaborate cere¬ 
monies performed at stated annual festi¬ 
vals, lasting from a day to fifteen days, 
and governed by the change of seasons. 
Besides the stated gatherings there were 
many minor meetings, in all of which 
there were dancing and thanksgiving for 
the blessings of life. They believed in a 
life hereafter, which was but a reflex of 
the present life, but their ideas regarding 
it were not very definite. The bodies of 
the dead were wrapped in furs, neatly 
covered with flexible bark, and then 

f jlaced on a platform resting on four pil- 
ars, which was then entirely covered 
with bark; or the body, after being pre¬ 
pared for burial, was placed in a grave 
and over it were laid small pieces of tim¬ 
ber, covered with strong pieces of bark 
and then with earth. Over the grave a 
cabin was usually erected. At the great 
feast of the dead, which occurred at in¬ 
tervals of 8 or 10 years, the bodies of 
those who had died in the interim, from 
all the villages participating in the feast, 
were brought together and buried in a 
common grave with elaborate and solemn 
public ceremonies. 

In 1615, when the Hurons w T ere first 
visited by the French under Champlain, 
he estimated from the statements of the 
Indians themselves that they numbered 
30,000, distributed in 18 towns and vil¬ 
lages, of which 8 were palisaded; but in 
a subsequent edition of his work Cham¬ 


plain reduces this estimate to 20,000. A 
little later Sagard estimated their pop¬ 
ulation at 30,000, while Brebeuf gave 
their number as 35,000. But these fig¬ 
ures are evidently only guesses and per¬ 
haps much above rather than below the 
actual population, which, in 1648, was 
probably not far from 20,000. 

When the French established trading 
posts on the St Lawrence at Three Rivers 
and elsewhere, the Hurons and neighbor¬ 
ing tribes made annual trips down Ottawa 
r. or down the Trent to these posts for 
the purpose of trading both with the 
Europeans and with the Montagnais of 
the lower St Lawrence w’ho came up to 
meet them. The chief place of trade at 
this time was, according to Sagard (His- 
toire, i, 170,1866), in the harbor of Cape 
Victory, in L. St Peter of St Lawrence r., 
about 50 miles below Montreal, just above 
the outlet of the lake, where, on Sagard’s 
arrival, there were “already lodged a 
great number of savages of various na¬ 
tions for the trade of beavers with the 
French. The Indians who were not sec¬ 
tarians in religion invited the mission¬ 
aries into their country. In 1615 the 
Recollect fathers accepted the invitation, 
and Father Le Caron spent the year 1615- 
16 in Huronia, and was again there in 
1623-24. Father Poulain was among the 
Hurons in 1622, Father Viel from 1623 
to 1625, and Father De la Roche Daillion 
in 1626-28. The labors of the Jesuits 
began with the advent of Father Brebeuf 
in Huronia in 1626, but their missions 
ended in 1650 with the destruction of the 
Huron commonwealth by the Iroquois. 
In all, 4 Recollect and 25 Jesuit fathers 
had labored in the Huron mission during 
its existence, which at its prime was the 
most important in the French dominions 
in North America. As the first historian 
of the mission, Fr. Sagard, though not a 
priest, deserves honorable mention. 

From the Jesuit Relation for 1640 it is 
learned that the Hurons had had cruel 
wars with the Tionontati, but that at the 
date given they had recently made peace, 
renewed their former friendship, and en¬ 
tered into an alliance against their com¬ 
mon enemies. Sagard is authority for 
the statement that the Hurons were in 
the habit of sending large war parties to 
ravage the country of the Iroquois. The 
well-known hostility and intermittent 
warfare between the Iroquois and the 
Huron tribes date from prehistoric times, 
so that the invasion and destruction of 
the Huron country and confederation in 
1648-50 by the Iroquois w r ere not a sud¬ 
den, unprovoked attack, but the final 
blow in a struggle which was already in 
progress when the French under Cartier 
in 1535 first explored the St Lawrence. 
The acquirement of firearms by the Iro- 


588 


HURON 


[B. A. E. 


quois from the Dutch was an important 
factor in their subsequent successes. By 
1643 they had obtained about 400 guns, 
while, on the other hand, as late as the 
final invasion of their country the Hurons 
had but very few guns, a lack that was 
the direct cause of their feeble resistance 
and the final conquest by the Iroquois 
confederation of half of the country e. of 
the Mississippi and n. of the Ohio. In 
July, 1648, having perfected their plans 
for the final struggle for supremacy with 
the Hurons, the Iroquois began open hos¬ 
tility by sacking two or three frontier 
towns and Teanaustayae (St Joseph), the 
major portion of the invading warriors 
wintering in the Huron country unknown 
to the Hurons; and in March, 1649, these 
Iroquois warriors destroyed Taenhaten- 
taron (St Ignace) and St Louis, and car¬ 
ried into captivity hundreds of Hurons. 
These disasters completely demoralized 
and disorganized the Huron tribes, for 
the greater portion of their people were 
killed or led into captivity among the 
several Iroquoian tribes, or perished 
from hunger and exposure in their pre¬ 
cipitate flight in all directions, while of 
the remainder some escaped to the Neu¬ 
tral Nation, or “Hurons de la Nation 
Neutre,” some to the Tobacco or Tionon- 
tati tribe, some to the Erie, and others 
to the French settlements near Quebec 
on the island of Orleans. The Tohonta- 
enrat, forming the populous town of 
Scanonaenrat, and a portion of the Aren- 
dahronon of the town of St-Jean-Bap- 
tiste surrendered to the Seneca and were 
adopted by them with the privilege of 
occupying a village by themselves, which 
was named Gandougarae (St Michel). 
As soon as the Iroquois learned of the 
Huron colony on Orleans id., they at 
once sought to persuade these Hurons to 
migrate to their country. Of these the 
Bear people, together with the Bowl 
band and the Rock people, having in an 
evil day promised to remove thither, 
were finally, in 1656, compelled to choose 
between fighting and migrating to the 
Iroquois country. They chose the latter 
course, the Bear people going to the Mo¬ 
hawk and the Rock people to the Onon¬ 
daga. The Cord people alone had the 
courage to remain with the French. 

The adopted inhabitants of the new 
town of St Michel (Gandougarae) were 
mostly Christian Hurons who preserved 
their faith under adverse conditions, as 
did a large number of other Huron cap¬ 
tives who were adopted into other Iro¬ 
quois tribes. In 1653 Father Le Moine 
found more than 1,000 Christian Hurons 
among the Onondaga. The number of 
Hurons then among the Mohawk, Oneida, 
and Cayuga is not known. 

Among the most unfortunate of the 


Huron fugitives were those who sought 
asylum among the Erie, where their pres¬ 
ence excited the jealousy and perhaps the 
fear of their neighbors, the Iroquois, with 
whom the Erie did not fraternize. It is 
also claimed that the Huron fugitives 
strove to foment war between their pro¬ 
tectors and the Iroquois, with the result 
that notwithstanding the reputed 4,000 
warriors of the Erie and their skill in the 
use of the bow and arrow (permitting 
them dextrously to shoot 8 or 9 arrows 
while the enemy could fire an arquebus 
but once), the Erie and the unfortunate 
Huron fugitives were entirely defeated in 
1653-56 and dispersed or carried away into 
captivity. But most pathetic and cruel 
was the fate of those unfortunate Hurons 
who, trusting in the long-standing neu¬ 
trality of the Neutral Nation which the 
Iroquois had not theretofore violated, fled 
to that tribe, only to be held, with the 
other portion of the Huron people still 
remaining in their country, into harsh 
captivity (Jes. Rel. 1659-60). 

A portion of the defeated Hurons es¬ 
caped to the Tionontati or “Huron du 
Petun,” then dwelling directly westward 
from them. But in 1649, when the Iro¬ 
quois had sacked one of the Tionontati 
palisaded towns, the remainder of the 
tribe, in company with the refugee Hu¬ 
rons, sought an asylum on the Island of 
St Joseph, the present Charity or Chris¬ 
tian id., in Georgian bay. It is this group 
of refugees who became the Wyandots 
of later history. Finding that this place 
did not secure them from the Iroquois, 
the majority fled to Michilimakinac, 
Mich., near which place they found fer¬ 
tile lands, good hunting, and abundant 
fishing. But even here the Iroquois 
would not permit them to rest, so they 
retreated farther westward to Manitoulin 
id., called Ekaentoton by the Hurons. 
Thence they were driven to lie Huronne 
(Potawatomi id., because formerly occu¬ 
pied by that tribe), at the entrance to 
Green bay, Wis., where the Ottawa and 
their allies from Saginaw bay and Thun¬ 
der bay, Manitoulin, and Michilimaki¬ 
nac, sought shelter with them. From 
this point the fugitive Hurons, with some 
of the Ottawa and their allies, moved 
farther westward 7 or 8 leagues to the 
Potawatomi, while most of the Ottawa 
went into what is now Wisconsin and 
n. w. Michigan among the Winnebago and 
the Menominee. Here, in 1657, in the 
Potawatomi country, the Hurons, num¬ 
bering about 500 persons, erected a stout 
palisade. The Potawatomi received the 
fugitives the more readily since they 
themselves spoke a language cognate 
with that of the Ottawa and also were 
animated by a bitter hatred of the Iro¬ 
quois who had in former times driven 


BULL. 30] 


HURON 


589 


them from their native country, the n. 
peninsula of Michigan. This first flight 
of the Potawatomi must have taken place 
anterior to the visit by Nicollet in 1634. 

Having murdered a party of Iroquois 
scouts through a plot devised by their 
chief Anahotaha, and fearing the ven¬ 
geance of the Iroquois, the Hurons re¬ 
mained here only a few months longer. 
Some migrated to their compatriots on 
Orleans id., near Quebec, and the others, 
in 1659-60, fled farther w. to the Illinois 
country, on the Mississippi, where they 
were well received. Anahotaha was killed 
in 1659 in a fight at the Long Sault of Otta¬ 
wa r., above Montreal, in which a party 
of 17 French militia under Sieur Dolard, 
6 Algonkin under Mitameg, and 40 Huron 
warriors under Anahotaha (the last being 
the flower of the Huron colony then re¬ 
maining on Orleans id.) were surrounded 
by 700 Iroquois and all killed with the 
exception of 5 Frenchmen and 4 Hurons, 
who were captured. It was not long be¬ 
fore the Hurons found new enemies in 
the Illinois country. The Sioux brooked 
no rivals, much less meddlesome, weak 
neighbors; and as the Hurons numbered 
fewer than 500, whose native spirit and 
energy had been shaken by their many 
misfortunes, they could not maintain 
their position against these new foes, and 
therefore withdrew to the source of Black 
r., Wis., where they were found in 1660. 
At last they decided to join the Ottawa, 
their companions in their first removals, 
who were then settled at Chequamigon 
bay, on the s. shore of L. Superior, and 
chose a site opposite the Ottawa village. 
In 1665 Father Allouez, the founder 
of the principal western missions, met 
them here and established the mission of 
La Pointe du Saint Esprit between the 
Huron and the Ottawa villages. He la¬ 
bored among them 3 years, but his suc¬ 
cess was not marked, for these Tionon- 
tati Hurons, never fully converted, had 
relapsed into paganism. The Ottawa 
and the Hurons fraternized the more 
readily here since the two peoples dwelt 
in contiguous areas s. of Georgian bay 
before the Iroquois invasion in 1648- 
49. Father Marquette succeeded Father 
Allouez in 1669 and founded the missions 
of the Sault Ste Marie and St Frangois- 
Xavierde la Baiedes Puants. The Sioux, 
however, sought every possible pretext 
to assail the settlements of the Hurons 
and the Ottawa, and their numbers and 
known cruelty caused them to be so 
feared that the latter tribes during Mar¬ 
quette’s regime withdrew to the French 
settlements, since the treaty of peace be¬ 
tween the French and the Iroquois in 
1666 had delivered them from their chief 
enemies. The Ottawa, however, returned 
to Manitoulin id., where the mission of 


St Simon was founded, while the Hurons, 
who had not forgotten the advantageous 
situation which Michilimakinac had pre¬ 
viously afforded them, removed about 
1670 to a point opposite the island, where 
they built a palisaded village and where 
Marquette established the mission of St 
Ignace. Later, some of the Hurons here 
settled moved to Sandusky, Ohio, others 
to Detroit, and still others to Sandwich, 
Ontario. The last probabl y became what 
was latterly known as the Anderdon band 
of Wyandots, but which is now entirely 
dissipated, with the possible exception of 
a very few persons. 

In 1745 a considerable party of Hurons 
under the leadership of the war chief 
Orontony, or Nicholas, removed from 
Detroit r. to the marsh lands of San¬ 
dusky bay. Orontony was a wily sav¬ 
age whose enmity was greatly to be 
feared, and he commanded men who 
formed an alert, unscrupulous, and pow¬ 
erful body. The French having provoked 
the bitter hatred of Nicholas, which was 
fomented by English agents, he conspired 
to destroy the French, not only at Detroit 
but at the upper posts, and by Aug., 

1747, the “Iroquois of the West,” the 
Hurons, Ottawa, Abnaki, Potawatomi, 
“Ouabash,” Sauteurs, Missisauga, Foxes, 
Sioux, Sauk, “Sarastau,” Loups, Shaw¬ 
nee, and Miami, indeed all the tribes of 
the middle W., with the exception of 
those of the Illinois country, had entered 
into the conspiracy; but through the 
treachery of a Huron woman the plot was 
revealed to a Jesuit priest, who communi¬ 
cated the information to Longueuil, the 
French commandant at Detroit, who in 
turn notified all the other French posts, 
and although a desultory warfare broke 
out, resulting in a number of murders, 
there was no concerted action. Oron¬ 
tony, finding that he had been deserted 
by his allies, and seeing the activity and 
determination of the French not to suffer 
English encroachments on what they 
called French territory, finally, in Apr., 

1748, destroyed his villages and palisade 
at Sandusky, and removed, with 119 war¬ 
riors and their families, to White r., Ind. 
Not long after he withdrew to the Illi¬ 
nois country on Ohio r., near the Indiana 
line, where he died in the autumn of 1748. 
The inflexible and determined conduct of 
Longueuil toward most of the conspiring 
tribes brought the coalition to an end by 
May, 1748. 

After this trouble the Hurons seem to 
have returned to Detroit and Sandusky, 
where they became known as Wyandots 
and gradually acquired a paramount in¬ 
fluence in the Ohio valley and the lake 
region. They laid claim to the greater 
part of Ohio, and the settlement of the 
Shawnee and Delawares within that area 


590 


HURON 


[ B. A. E. 


was with their consent; they exercised 
the right to light the council fire at all 
intertribal councils, and although few in 
number they joined all the Indian move¬ 
ments in the Ohio valley and the lake 
region and supported the British against 
the Americans. After the peace of 1815 
a large tract in Ohio and Michigan was 
confirmed to them, but they sold a large 
part of it in 1819, under treaty provisions, 
reserving a small portion near Upper 
Sandusky, Ohio, and a smaller area on 
Huron r., near Detroit, until 1842, when 
these tracts also were sold and the tribe 
removed to Wyandotte co., Kans. By 
the terms of the treaty of 1855 they were 
declared to be citizens, but by the treaty 
of 1867 their tribal organization was re¬ 
stored and they were placed on a small 
tract, still occupied by them, in the n. e. 
corner of Oklahoma. 

That portion of the Hurons who with¬ 
drew in 1650 and later to the French 
colony, were accompanied by their mis¬ 
sionaries. The mission of La Conception, 
which was founded by them, although 
often changed in name and situation, has 
survived to the present time. The Hu¬ 
rons who wintered in Quebec in 1649 did 
not return to their country after learning 
of its desolation by the Iroquois, but 
were placed on land belonging to the 
Jesuits at Beauport, and when the Hu¬ 
ron fugitives came down to Quebec to seek 
protection, the others followed these in 
May, 1651, to Orleans id., settling on 
the lands of Madamoiselle de Grand 
Maison that had been bought for them. 
Here a mission house was erected near 
their stockaded bark lodges. In 1654 
they numbered between 500 and 600 per¬ 
sons. But again the Iroquois followed 
them, seeking through every misrepre¬ 
sentation to draw the Hurons into their 
own country to take the place of those 
who had fallen in their various wars. By 
this means a large number of the Hurong, 
remnants of the Bear, Rock, and Bowl 
tribes, were persuaded in 1656 to migrate 
to the Iroquois country, a movement that 
met with such success that the Iroquois 
even ventured to show themselves under 
the guns of Quebec. In the same year 
they mortally wounded Father Garreau, 
near Montreal, and captured and put to 
death 71 Hurons on Orleans id. These 
misfortunes caused the Hurons to draw 
nearer to Quebec, wherein they were 
given asylum until peace was concluded 
between the French and the Iroquois in 
1666. The Hurons then withdrew from 
the town about 5 m., where in the fol¬ 
lowing year the mission of Notre Dame 
de Foye was founded. In 1693 the Hu¬ 
rons moved 5 m. farther away on account 
of the lack of wood and the need of 


richer lands; here the missionaries ar¬ 
ranged the lodges around a square and 
built in the middle of it a church, to 
which Father Chaumonot added a chapel, 
patterned after the Casa Sancta of Lorette 
in Italy, and now known as Old Lorette. 
Some years later the mission was trans¬ 
ferred a short distance away, where a new 
village, Younger Lorette, or La Jeune 
Lorette, was built. About the remains of 
this mission still dwell the so-called Hu¬ 
rons of Lorette. 

The old estimates of Huron population 
have been previously given. After the 
dispersal of the Huron tribes in 1649-50, 
the Hurons who fled w. never seem to 
have exceeded 500 persons in one body. 
Later estimates are 1,000, with 300 more 
at Lorette (1736), 500 (1748), 850 (1748), 
1,250(1765), 1,500(1794-95), 1,000(1812), 
1,250 (1812). Only the first of these esti¬ 
mates is inclusive of the “Hurons of Lor¬ 
ette,” Quebec, who were estimated at 300 
in 1736, but at 455, officially, in 1904. In 
1885 those in Indian Ter. (Oklahoma) 
numbered 251, and in 1905, 378, making 
a total of 832 in Canada and the United 
States. 

Nothing definite was known of the clans 
of th^ Hurons until the appearance of 
Morgan’s Ancient Society in 1877, Pow¬ 
ell’s Wyandot Government (1st Rep. B. 
A. E., 1881), and Connolley’s The Wyan- 
dots (Archseol. Rep. Ontario, 92, 1899). 
From the last writer, who corrects the 
work of the former authorities, the fol¬ 
lowing list of Huron clans is taken: Great 
Turtle, Little Water Turtle, Mud Turtle, 
Wolf, Bear, Beaver, Deer, Porcupine, 
Striped Turtle, Highland Turtle, Snake, 
and Hawk. These, according to Powell, 
were organized into four phratries or clan 
brotherhoods, but Connolley denies that 
four phratries ever existed. The evi¬ 
dence appears to indicate, however, that 
the four-phratry organization was merged 
into one of three, of which the Wolf clan 
constituted one and acted as executive 
and presiding officer. 

The Huron villages were Andiata, An- 
goutenc, Anonatea, Arendaonatia, Arente, 
Arontaen, Brownstown, Cahiague, Car- 
hagouha, Carmaron, Cranetown (2 vil¬ 
lages), Ekhiondatsaan, Endarahy, Iaen- 
houton, Ihonatiria (St Joseph II), Jeune 
Lorette, Junqusindundeh(?), Junundat, 
Khioetoa, Karenhassa, Khinonascarant 
(3 small villages so called), Lorette, 
Onentisati, Ossossane, Ouenrio, Sandusky, 
Ste Agnes, Ste Anne, St Antoine, Ste 
Barbe, Ste Catherine, Ste Cecile, St 
Charles (2 villages), St Denys, St Etienne, 
St Francois Xavier, St Genevieve, St 
Joachim, St Louis, St Martin, Ste Marie 
(2 villages), Ste T6rese, Scanonaenrat, 
Taenhatentaron (St Ignace I, II), Tean- 


BULL. 30] 


HURRIPARACUSSI-HUSHKOVI 


591 


austayae (St Joseph I), Teandewiata, 
Toanche, Touaguainchain (Ste Made¬ 
leine), and Tondakhra. 

For sources of information consult 
Bressany, Relation-Abregee (1053), 1852; 
Connolley in Archseol. Rep. Ontario 1899, 
1900; Jesuit Relations, i—in, 1858, and also 
the Th waites edition, i-lxxiii, 1896-1901; 
Journal of Capt. William Trent (1752), 
1871; Morgan, Ancient Society, 1878; 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i-xv, 1853-87; 
Perrot, Memoire,Tailhaned., 1864; Powell 
in 1st Rep. B. A. E., 1881. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Ahouandate. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 522, 
1853. Ahwandate.— Featherstonhaugh, Canoe 
Voy., 1,108,1847. Atti8endaronk.— Jes. Rel. 1641,72, 
1858. Bons Irocois. —Champlain (1603), CEuvres, 
II, 47, 1870. Charioquois. — Ibid. (1611), III, 244 
(probably from the name of a chief). Delamat- 
tanoes.— Post (1758) in Proud, Pa., ii, app., 120, 
1798 (Delaware name). Delamattenoos. —Loskiel, 
Hist. United Breth., pt. 3, 16, 103, 1794. Delemat- 
tanoes.— Post (1758) quoted by Rupp, West. Pa., 
app., 118, 1846. Dellamattanoes. —Barton, New 
Views, app., 8, 1798. Ekeenteeronnon.— Potier, 
Rac. Huron et Gram., MS., 1761 (Huron name of 
Hurons of Lorette). Euyrons. —Van der Donck 
(1656) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., I, 209, 1841. 
Garennajenhaga. —Bruyas, Radices, 69,1863. Guy- 
andot. —Parkman, Pioneers, xxiv, 1883. Gyan- 
dottes. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, 
103, 1848. Hah8endagerha. —Bruyas, Radices, 55, 
1863. Harones. —Rasle (1724) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., ii, 246,1814. Hatindia8ointen. —Potier, 
Rac. Huron et Gram., MS., 1761 (Huron name of 
Hurons of Lorette). Hiroons.— Gorges (1658) in 
Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., n, 67, 1847. Houandates. — 
Sagard (1632), Canada (Diet.), iv, 1866. Hounon- 
date. —Coxe, Carolana, 44, 1741. Hourons. —Tonti 
(1682) in French, Hist.Coll. La.,169,1846. Huron.— 
Jesuit Relation 1632, 14, 1858. Hurones. —Vail- 
lant (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 524, 1853. 
Huronnes. —Hildreth, Pioneer Hist., 9, 1848. 
Hurrons. —Writer of 1761 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
4th s., IX, 427, 1871. Lamatan.— Raflnesque, Am. 
Nations, I, 139, 1836 (Delaware name). Little 
Mingoes. —Pownall, map of N. Am., 1776. Men- 
chon.— Duro, Don Diego de Penalosa, 43, 1882. 
Nadowa.— For forms of this name applied to the 
Hurons see Nadowa. Ochasteguin. —Champlain 
(1609), GSuvres, hi, 176,1870 (from name of chief). 
Ochatagin.— Ibid., 219. Ochataiguin.— Ibid., 174. 
Ochategin.— Ibid. (1632), V, pt. 1, 177. Ochate- 
guin. —Ibid. (1609), III, 175. Ochatequins. —Ibid., 
198. Ouaouackecinatouek. —Potier quoted by Park- 
man, Pioneers, xxiv, 1883. Ouendat. —Jes. Rel. 
1640, 35, 1858. 8endat —Jes. Rel. 1639, 50, 1858. 
Owandats. —Weiser (1748) quoted by Rupp, West. 
Pa., app., 16, 1846. Owendaets. —Peters (1750) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 596, 1855. Owendats. — 
Croghan (1750) quoted by Rupp, West. Pa., app., 
26, 1846. Owendot.— Hamilton (1760) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., IX, 279,1871. Pemedeniek. — 
Vetromile in Hist. Mag., 1st s., iv, 369, 1860 (Ab- 
naki name). Quatoges. —Albany conf. (1726) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 791, 1855. Quatoghees. — 
Ibid., vi, 391, note, 1855. Quatoghies.— Garangula 
(1684) in Williams, Vermont, i, 504,1809. Quato- 
ghies of Loretto. —Colden, Five Nations, I, 197, 
1756. Sastaghretsy. —Post (1758) in Proud, Pa., II, 
app., 113, 1798. Sastharhetsi.— La Potherie, Hist. 
Am. Sept., ill, 223, 1753 (Iroquois name). Tala- 
matan.— Walam Olum (1833) in Brinton, Lenape 
Leg., 200, 1885. Talamatun.— Squier in Beach, 
Ind. Miscel., 28,1877. j;elama^eno n . —Hewitt after 
Journeycake, a Delaware (“Coming out of a 
mountain or cave’’: Delaware name). Telemati- 
nos.— Document of 1759 in Brinton, Lenape Leg., 
231, 1885. xhasichetcf.— Hewitt. Onondaga MS., 
B. A. E., 1888 (Onondaga name). Viandots. — 
Maximilian, Travels, 382, 184. Wanats.— Barton, 
New Views, xlii, 1798. Wandats. —Weiser (1748) 
quoted by Rupp, West. Pa., app., 15, 1846. Wan- 
dots.— Ibid., 18. Wantats.— Weiser in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 605, 1854. Wayandotts.— 


Hamilton (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 531, 
1855. Wayondots. —Croghan (1759) in Proud, Pa., 
II, 296, 1798. Wayondotts. — Croghan, Jour., 37, 
1831. Wayundatts. —Doc. of 1749 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vi, 533, 1855. Wayundotts. —Ibid. 
Weandots. —Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 156, 1824. 
Wendats.— Shea, Miss. Val., preface, 59, 1852. 
Weyandotts.— Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., ix, 262,1871. Weyondotts. — Ibid., 249. 
Wiandotts. —Ft Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., Vii, 236, 1856. Wiondots. —Ed¬ 
wards (1788) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., ix, 95, 
1804. Wiyandotts. —Morse, Modern Geog:, I, 196, 
1814. Wyandote. —Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 52, 
Jan. 1870. Wyandotte. —Garrard, Wahtoyah, 2, 
1850. Wyandotts. —Croghan (1754) quoted by 
Rupp, West. Pa., app., 51, 1846. Wyondats.— Cro¬ 
ghan (1765) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 782, 1856. 
Wyondotts. —Croghan, Jour., 34, 1831. Yendat. — 
Parkman, Pioneers, xxiv, 1883. Yendots. — 
Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Proc., 86, 1844. 

Hurriparacussi. A village near which 
DeSoto landed from Tampa bay, Fla., in 
1539. According to Gatschet the name 
is properly the title of the principal 
chief, from two Timucua words signifying 
‘war chief.’ 

Hurripacuxi. —Biedma in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 
48, 1857. Paracossi. —Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 128, 1850. Parocossi. — 
Gentl. of Elvas in Hakluyt Soc. Pub., ix, 32,1851. 
Urriba cuxi. —French, op. cit., 98, note. Urribarra- 
cuxi. —Garcilasso de la Vega cited in Hakluyt 
Soc. Pub., op. cit, 32. Vrribarracuxi. —Garcilasso 
de la Vega, Florida, 37, 1723. 

Hurst tablet. See Notched plates. 

Husada (‘legs stretched out stiff’). A 
subgens of the Khuyagens of the Kansa. 
Husada. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 1897. 
Q,iiyunikaci n ga. —Ibid. (‘ White-eagle people’). 

Husadta (Husaja, ‘limbs stretched 
stiff’). A subgens of the Hangkaahutun 
gens of the Osage, one of the original 
fireplaces of the Hangka division.—Dor¬ 
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897. 

Husadtawanu (Hidsaja Wanu n ', ‘elder 
Husadta’). A subgens of the Hangkaa¬ 
hutun gens of the Osage, one of the origi¬ 
nal fireplaces of the Hangka division.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897. 

Husain. A former winter village of the 
Hahamatses at the mouth of Salmon r., 
Brit. Col.; now the seat of a salmon 
fishery. 

H’usam— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 230, 1887. 
Koo-sam. —Dawson in Trans. Rov. Soc. Can. for 
1887, sec. ii, 65. 

Hushkoni (‘skunk’). A Chickasaw clan 
of the Ishpanee phratry. 

Hushkoni.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Hus- 
koni.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96, 1884. 

Hushkovi. A traditionary village about 
2 m. n. w. of Oraibi, n. e. Ariz. Accord¬ 
ing to Hopi story Hushkovi and Pivan- 
honkapi were destroyed by afire that had 
been kindled in the San Francisco mts., 
90 m. away, at the instance of the chief of 
Pivanhonkapi and with the aid of the 
Yayaponchatu people who are said to 
have been in league with supernatural 
forces, because the inhabitants of Pivan¬ 
honkapi had become degenerates through 
gambling. Most of the inhabitants were 
also destroyed; the survivors moved 
away, occupying several temporary vil¬ 
lages during their wanderings, the ruins 


592 


HUSISTAIC-HUWANIKIKARACHADA 


[b. a. e. 


of which are still to be seen. See Voth, 
Traditions of the Hopi, 241, 1905. 

Hu'ckovi.— Voth, op. cit. 

Husistaic. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18,1861. 

Huskanaw. An Algonquian word ap¬ 
plied to certain initiation ceremonies of 
the Virginia Indians, performed on boysat 
puberty, which were accompanied by fast¬ 
ing and the use of narcotics. The whites 
applied the term to huskanaw (Beverley, 
Hist. Va., in, 32, 39,1705) in a figurative 
sense. Thus Jefferson (Corresp., ii, 342) 
wrote: “He has the air of being huska- 
noyed, i. e., out of his element.” The 
term is derived from the language of the 
Powhatan. Gerard (Am. Anthrop., vii, 
242, 1905) etymologizes the word as fol¬ 
lows: “Powhatan uskinaweu, ‘he has a 
new body’, from uski ‘new’, naw ‘body’, 
eu ‘has he’, said of a youth who had 
reached the age of puberty”. But the 
word is rather from the Powhatan equiv¬ 
alent of the Massachuset wuskenco , ‘ he is 
young’, and does not necessarily contain 
the root iaw (not naw) ‘body’. It has 
no connection with the English word 
“husky,” as some have supposed. For 
an account of the ‘ ‘ solemnity of huskanaw- 
ing ” see Beverley, op. cit., andef. Hecke- 
welder (1817), Indian Nations, 245,1876. 
See Child life, Ordeals. (a. f. c.) 

Husky. According to Julian Ralph (Sun, 
N. Y., July 14, 1895), “the common and 
only name of the wolf-like dogs of both 
the white and red men of our northern 
frontier and of western Canada. ’ ’ Husky 
was originally one of the names by which 
the English settlers in Labrador have long 
known the Eskimo (q. v.). The word, 
which seems to be a corruption of one of 
the names of this people, identical with 
our ‘Eskimo’ in the northern Algonquian 
dialects, has been transferred from man to 
the dog. (a. f. c.) 

Husoron. A former division or pueblo 
of the Varohio, probably in the Chinipas 
valley, inw. Chihuahua, Mexico.—Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 58, 1864. 

Huspah. A Yamasi band living in 
South Carolina under a chief of the same 
name about the year 1700. (a. s. g.) 

Hussliakatna. A Koyukukhotana vil¬ 
lage, of 14 people in 1885, on the right 
bank of Koyukuk r., Alaska, 2 m. above 
the s. end of Hall id. 

Hussleakatna.—Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 122, 1887. 
Hussliakatna.— Ibid., 141. 

Hutalgalgi ( hutali ‘wind’, algi ‘peo¬ 
ple’). A principal Creek clan. 
Ho-tor'-lee.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Hotul- 
gee.—Pickett, Hist. Ala., I, 96,1851. Hutalgalgi.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884. Wind 
Family.—Woodward, Reminiscences, 19, 20,1859. 

Hatatchl (Hwt-tdt-ch’l). A former 
Lummi village at the s. e. end of Orcas id., 


of the San Juan group, Wash.—Gibbs, 
Clallam and Lummi, 38, 1863. 

Huthutkawedl ( X'li'tx'iUkawei, ‘holes 
by or near the trail ’). A village of the 
Nicola band of the Ntlakyapamuk, near 
Nicola r., 23 m. above Spences Bridge, 
Brit. Col. 

N’hothotkS'as.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. 
Can., 4,1899. X -u'tx 'utkaweT.—Teit in Mem. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 174,1900. 

Hutsawap. One of the divisions or sub¬ 
tribes of the Choptank, formerly in Dor¬ 
chester co., Md.—Bozman, Maryland, i, 
115, 1837. 

Hutsnuwu (‘grizzly bear fort’). A Tlin- 
git tribe on the w. and s. coasts of Admi¬ 
ralty id., Alaska; pop. estimated at 300 
in 1840, and given as 666 in 1880 and 420 
in 1890. Their former towns were Angun 
and Nahltushkan, but they now live at 
Killisnoo. Their social divisions are An- 
kakehittan, Daktlawedi, Deshuhittan, 
Tekoedi, and Wushketan. (j. r. s.) 
Chuts-ta-kon.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. 
Chutznou.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map facing 
142,1855. Contznoos.—Borrows in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
197, 42d Cong., 2d sess., 4, 1872. Hoidxnous.— 
Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 313, 1868. Hoochenoos.— 
Ball in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105,46th Cong., 1st sess., 30, 
1880. Hoochinoo.—Wright, Among the Alaskans, 
151,1883. Hoodchenoo.—George in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
105, 46th Cong., 1st sess., 29, 1880. Hoodsinoo.— 
Colyer, ibid., 1869, 575,1870. Hoodsna.—Hallock 
in Rep. Sec. War, pt. I, 39, 1868. Hoods-Nahoos.— 
Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 309, 1868. Hookchenoo.— 
Ball in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 46th Cong., 1st sess., 30, 
1880. Hoonchenoo.—George, ibid., 29. Hootsi- 
noo.—Kane, Wand. N. A., app., 1859. Hootz-ah- 
tar-qwan.—EmmonsinMem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
ill, 232,1903. Khootznahoo.—Petroff in Tenth Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 32, 1884. Khutsno.—Tikhmenief, 
Russ. Am. Co., II, 341, 1863. Khutsnu.—Ibid. 
Koo-tche-noos.—Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 
46th Cong., 1st sess., 29, 1880. Kootsenoos.—Ma¬ 
honey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 576, 1870. Koots- 
novskie.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227, 1875 
(transliterated from Veniaminoff). Kootzna- 
hoo.—Niblack, Coast Indians of S. Alaska, chart 
i, 1890. Kootznoos.—Seward, Speeches on Alaska, 
6, 1869. Kootznov.—Col yer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 587, 
1870. Koushnous.—Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, I, 
38,1868. Koutzenoos.—Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
105, 46th Cong., 1st sess., 31, 1880. Koutznous.— 
Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, pt. 1,38,1868. Kutsnov- 
skoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30, 1840. 
Xu'adji-nao.—Swanton, field notes, 1900-01 (ac¬ 
cording to the Haida). Xutslnuwu'.—Ibid., 1904, 
B. A. E. (own name). 

Hutucgna. A former Gabrieleno ran- 
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a place 
later called Santa Ana (Yorbas). 

Hutucgna.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 
Hutuk.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (Luiseno name). 

Huvaguere. A Nevome division, de¬ 
scribed as adjoining the Hio, who were 
settled 8 leagues e. of Tepahue, in Sonora, 
Mexico (Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58,1864). 
The name doubtless properly belongs to 
their village. 

Huwaka. The Sky clan of Acoma 
pueblo, N. Mex., which, with the Osach 
(Sun) clan, forms a phratry. 
Huwaka-hanoqc* 1 .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 
352,1896 (hanoqcti = 1 people’). 

Huwanikikarachada ( ‘those who call 
themselves after the elk ’). AW innebago 

ens. 

Ik.— Morgan,Anc. Soc., 157,1877. Hoo-wun'-na,— 


bull. 30] HUWI ICHENTA 593 


Ibid. Hu-wa n -i-ki'-ka-ra'-tca-da.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 240,1897. 

Huwi. The Dove clan of the Chua 
(Rattlesnake) phratry of the Hopi. 
He-wi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 38,1891. Huwi 
wihwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 582, 1901 
(wn«m=‘clan’). Hu'-wi wun-wii.—Fewkes in 
Am. Anthrop., vii, 402,1894. 

Hwades ( Xude's , ‘cut beach’). The 
principal village of the Koskimo and Ko- 

g rino at Quatsino narrows, Vancouver id. 

wat-es'.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 
1887, sec. II, 65,1888. Hwot-es.—Dawson in Can. 
Geol. Surv., map, 1887. Xude's.—Boas, inf’n, 1906. 

Hwahwatl (Qwa/qwa^). A Salish tribe 
on Englishman r., Vancouver id., speak¬ 
ing the Puntlatsh dialect.—Boas, MS. 
B. A. E., 1887. 

Hwotat. A Hwotsotenne village on the 
e. side of Babine lake, near its outlet, 
in British Columbia. 

Hwo'-tat.—Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc.Can.,x, 109, 
1893. Whalatt.—Downie in Mayne, Brit. Col., 453, 
1861 (misprint). Whatatt.—Downie in Jour. Roy. 
Geog. Soc., xxxi, 253,1861. Wut-at.—Dawson in 
Geol. Surv. Can., 26b, 1881. 

Hwotsotenne (‘people of Spider river’). 
A Takulli tribe, belonging to the Babine 
branch, living on Bulkley r. and hunting 
as far as Francois lake, Brit. Col. They 
are somewhat mixed with their imme¬ 
diate neighbors, the Kitksan (Morice in 
Trans. Can. Inst., 27, 1893). Their vil¬ 
lages are Hagwilget, Hwotat, Keyerhwot- 
ket, Lachalsap,Tsechah, and Tselkazkwo. 
Akwilget.—Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s, 27, 1893 
(‘ well dressed’: Kitksan name). Hwotso’tenne.— 
Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., map, 1892. Out- 
sotin.—British Columbia map, 1872. 

Hykehah. A former Chickasaw town, 
one of a settlement of five, probably in or 
near Pontotoc co., Miss. 

Hikihaw. —Romans, Florida, 63,1775. Hikkihaw.— 
W. Florida map, ca. 1775. Hykehah.—Adair, Am. 
Ind., 352, 1775. 

Hykwa. See Hiakwa. 

Hyperboreans (Greek). Applied by Ban¬ 
croft (Nat. Races, i, 37,1882) to the tribes 
of extreme n. w. America, n. of lat. 55°, 
including western and southern Eskimo, 
Aleut, Tlingit, and Athapascan tribes; by 
others the name is employed to designate 
all the circumpolar tribes of both the Old 
and the New World. 

Hyukkeni. A former Choctaw settle¬ 
ment, noted by Romans in 1775, but not 
located on his map unless it be an unnum¬ 
bered towrn on the e. side of Buckatunna 
cr., n. e. of Yowani, in the present Mis¬ 
sissippi.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Pub., 
vi, 432, 1902. 

Iahenhouton (‘at the caves.’—Hewitt). 
A Huron village in Ontario in 1637.—Jes. 
Rel. for 1637, 159, 1858. 

Ialamma. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage subordinate to Purisima mission, 
Santa Barbara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. 

Ialamne. A former Chumashan village 
subordinate to Santa Ines mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-38 


Oct. 18, 1861). Possibly the same as 
Ialamma. 

Ialmuk ( Ia'lmuq ). A Squawmish vil¬ 
lage community at Jericho, Burrard in¬ 
let, Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. B. A. 
A. S., 475, 1900. 

Ialostimot ( lalo'stimdt , ‘ making good 
fire’). A Talio division among the Bel- 
lacoola of British Columbia; named from 
a reputed ancestor. 

Ialo'stimot.—Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 3, 1891. T’a't’Entsait.—Ibid, (‘a cave pro¬ 
tecting from rain’: secret society name). 

Iana ( la'na ). The Corn clan of the 
pueblo of Taos, N. Mex. 

Iana-taxina.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 
(taiina = ‘ people ’). 

Ibache (‘holds the firebrand to sacred 
pipes’). A Kansa gens. Its subgentes 
are Khuyeguzhinga and Mikaunika- 
shinga. 

Hahga jihga.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 
1897 (‘small Hanga’). Ibatc‘e.—Ibid. 

Ibin. A former Aleut village on Agattu 
id., Alaska, one of the Near id. group of 
the Aleutians, now uninhabited. * 

Ibitoupa. A small tribe of unknown 
affinity, but the theory that they were 
connected with the Chickasaw has more 
arguments in its favor than any other. 
In 1699 they formed one of the villages 
mentioned by Iberville (Margry, D6c., 
iv, 180, 1880) as situated on Yazoo r., 
Ibitoupa being near the upper end of the 
group between the Chaquesauma (Chak- 
chiuma) and the Thysia (Tioux), accord¬ 
ing to the order named, which appears 
to be substantially correct, although Coxe 
(Carolana, 10, 1741) who omits Thysia, 
makes the Ibitoupa settlement expressly 
the uppermost of the series. The Ibitoupa 
and Chakchiuma, together with the Ta- 
poucha (Taposa), were united in one 
village on the upper Yazoo by 1798. 
What eventually became of them is not 
known, but it is probable that they were 
absorbed by the Chickasaw. S eeltomapa. 

(a. s. g. ) 

Bitoupas.—P6nicaut (1700) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., n. s., i, 61, 1869. Epitoupa.—Coxe, Carolana, 
10, map, 1741. Ouitoupas.—Penicaut (1700) in 
Margry, D6c., v, 401, 1883. Outapa.—Iberville 
(1699), ibid., IV, 180, 1880. Outaypes.—Martin, 
Hist. La., i, 249, 1827. Witoupo.— Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., v, 343, 1789 (misprint). Witowpa.—Esnauts 
et Rapilly, map, 1777. Witowpo.—Philippeaux, 
map of English Col., 1781. Ybitoopas.—Romans, 
Fla., i, 101, 1775. Ybitoupas.—Baudry des Lo- 
zieres, Voy. a la Louisiane, 245,1802. 

Icayme. Given as the native name of 
the site on which San Luis Rey mission, 
s. California, was founded; perhaps also 
the name of a neighboring Diegueno vil¬ 
lage.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Feb. 22, 
1860. 

Ichenta. A village of the Chalone divi¬ 
sion of the Costanoan family, formerly 
near Soledad mission, Cal. 

Ichenta.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 
San Jose.—Ibid. 


594 


ICHUARUMPATS-IETAN 


[b. a. e. 


Ichuarumpats (F-chu-ar'-rum-pats, 1 peo¬ 
ple of cactus plains’). A Paiute tribe 
formerly in or near Moapa valley, s. e. 
Nev., numbering 35 in 1873.—Powell in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874. 

I c o s a n s . Mentioned by Bartram 
(Trav., 54, 1792) in connection with the 
Ogeeche, Santee, Utina, Wapoo, Yamasi, 
etc., as having been attacked by the 
Creeks, and ‘ ‘ who then surrounded and 
cramped the English possessions.” The 
reference is to the early colonial period 
of South Carolina and Georgia. 

Idakariuke. Mentioned as a Shasta 
band of Shasta valley, n. Cal., in 1851, 
but it is really only a man’s personal 
name. (r. b. d.) 

Ida-kara-wak-a-ha. —McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 221,1853 (seemingly 
identical). Ida-ka-riuke. —Gibbs (1851) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, III, 171,1853. I-do-ka-rai-uke.— 
McKee, ibid., 171. 

Idelabuu (‘mesas of the mountains’). 
A rancheria, probably Cochimi, con¬ 
nected with Purfsima (Cadegomo) mis¬ 
sion, Lower California, in the 18th cen¬ 
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 
1857. 

Idelibinaga (‘high mountains’). A 
rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected 
with Purfsima mission, Lower Califor¬ 
nia, in the 18th century.—Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857. 

Idiuteling. An Eskimo settlement on 
the n. chore of Home bay, Baffin land, 
where the Akudnirmiut Eskimo gather 
to hunt bear in the spring. 

Ipiutelling. —Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441, 1888 
(misprint). Ipnitelling.— Ibid., map (misprint). 

Idjorituaktuin (‘with grass’). A vil¬ 
lage of the Talirpingmiut division of the 
Okomiut Eskimo on the w. shore of 
Cumberland sd.; pop. 11 in 1883. 

Ejujuajuin.— Kumlien in Bull. Nat. Mus., no. 15, 
15,1879. Idjorituaktuin.— Boas in Deutsche Geog. 
Blatt., VIII, 33, 1885. Idjorituaqtuin.— Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 426, 1888. Idjorituaktuin. —Boas in 
Petermanns Mitt., no. 80, 70, 1885. 

Idjuniving. A spring settlement of 
Pad li mint Eskimo near the s. end of Home 
bay, Baffin land —Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. 
E., map, 1888. 

Iebathu. The White-corn clan of the 
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. 
febathu-t’aimn.—Lummis quoted by Hodge in 
Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 (t’alnin=' people’). 

Iechur. The Yellow-corn clan of the 
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. 

fechur-t’ainin.— Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 {t’alnin=' people ’). 

Iefeu. The Red-corn clan of the Tigua 
pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. 
lefe'u-t’ ainin. —Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 (t'alnin= l people’). 

Iekidhe (Tekife, ‘criers’). A gens of 
the Inkesabe division of the Omaha.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 227, 1897. 

Ieshur. The Blue-corn clan of the 
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. 
feshur-t’ainin. —Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 (Vainin—' people’). 

Ieskachincha (‘ child of one who speaks 


Dakota’). The ordinary name for the 
mixed-blood element among the western 
Sioux. Given by J. O. Dorsey as a Brule 
gens composed of half-breeds. 

Ieskaciqca.—Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Ieska-tci n tca.—Ibid. 

Ieskachincha. A modern Oglala Da¬ 
kota band, composed of half-breeds. 

Ieska ciijca.—Cleveland, letter to Dorsey, 1884. 
Ieska-tci n tca.—Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A.E.,221, 1897. 

Ietan. A term which, with “ Tetau ” 
and other forms of the name, was applied 
by writers of the early part of the 19th 
century to several western tribes. 
Mooney (17th Rep. B. A. E., 167, 1898) 
explains its application as follows: “The 
Ute of the mountain region at the head¬ 
waters of the Platte and the Arkansas, 
being a powerful and aggressive tribe, 
were well known to all the Indians of 
the plains, who usually called them by 
some form of their proper name, Yutawdts, 
or, in its root form, Yuta, whence we get 
Eutaw, Utah, and Ute., Among the 
Kiowa the name becomes Idtd(-go), while 
the Siouan tribes seem to have nasalized 
it so that the early French traders wrote it 
as Ayutan, Iatan, or Ietan. By prefixing 
the French article it became L’ Iatan, and 
afterward Aliatan, while by misreading of 
the manuscript word we get Jatan, Jetan, 
and finally Tetau. Moreover, as the early 
traders and explorers knew but little of 
the mountain tribes, they frequently con¬ 
founded those of the same generic stock, 
so that almost any of these forms may 
mean Shoshoni, Ute, or Comanche, ac¬ 
cording to the general context of the 
description.” By reason of the varied 
applications of Ietan and its equivalents, 
the name is here treated separately. 

Aliata. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 60, 1806 (so 
called by the French). Aliatan.— Drake, Bk. 
Inds., vi, 1848. Aliatans, of La Playes. —Lewis, 
Travels, 181, 1809. Aliatans, of the west. —Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 63, 1806. Aliatons. —Lewis 
and Clark, Jour., 139,1840. Aliatons of the West.— 
Brown, West. Gaz., 213, 1817. Alitan. —Lewis and 
Clark, Discov., 23, 1806. Aliton. —Am. State Pa¬ 
pers, Ind. Aff., I, 710, 1832. Alliatan.— Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., ii, 131, 1814. Alliatans of the 
west.— Brown, West. Gaz., 215, 1817. Ayutan.— 
Brackenridge, Views of Louisiana, 80, 1814 (also 
called ‘Camanches’). Halisanes. —Du Lac, Voy. 
Louisianes, 261, 1805. Halitanes. —Ibid., 309. Hi- 
etanes.— OrozcoyBerra, Geog.,40,1864. Hietans.— 
P^nicaut (1720) in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 156, 
1869. I-a'-kar. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 60, 
1806. Iatan.— Gregg, Comm. Prairies, I, 21, 1844. 
I-a-tans.— Bonner, Life of Beckwourth, 34, 1856. 
Ictans. —Boudinot, Star in West, 126, 1816 (mis¬ 
print). Ielan.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822 
(misprint). Ietam. —Cass in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117, 
20th Cong., 2d sess., 102, 1829. Ietan.—Pike, Trav¬ 
els, xiv, 1811. Ietanes.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
40, 1864. Ietans.— Pike, Exped., 3d map, 1810. 
Iotan.— Pattie, Pers. Narr., 36,1833. Itean. — 
M’Kenney, Memoirs, n, 94, 1846 (misprint). 
Jetam.— Cass quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
hi, 609,1853 (misprint). Jetans.—P6nicaut (1720) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La,, I, 156, note, 1869 (mis¬ 
print). Jetans.— Mayer, Mexico, ii, 39, 1853 
(misprint). Jotans. —Pattie, Pers. Narr., 37, 1833 
(misprint.) Laitanes. —Mallet (1740) in Margry, 
D£c., vi, 457, 1886 (French form). La Kar.— 
Fisher, New Trav., 175, 1812. La Litanes.—Ibid. 


BULL. 30] 


IEWATSE-IHANKTONWAN 


595 


Lee-ha-taus.— Hunter, Captivity, 68,1823. Liahtan 
Band.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, map, 1822. 
L’latan.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1043,1896 
(French form of Jatan above). Tetaus.— Pike, 
Exped., 109, 1810 (misprint). Yetans.— Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 545,1878 (misprint). 

Iewatse [i-e-wat-se ', ‘mouth men’). 
The Crow name for some unidentified 
tribe.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 402, 1862. 

Ift. A Karok village on Klamath r., 
Cal., inhabited in 1860. . 

If-terram.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23,1860. 

Igagik. An Aglemiut Eskimo settle¬ 
ment at the mouth of Ugaguk r., Alaska; 
pop. 120 in 1880, 60 in 1890, 203 in 1900. 
Igagik.— Petrolf, 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 
Ugaguk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Igak. A former Kaniagmiut Eskimo 
village on Afognak id., Alaska, e. of 
Afognak, whither it seems to have been 
moved. 

Igagmjut.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855. 
Kaljukischwigmjut. —Ibid. 

Igamansabe ( Igama n sdb$, ‘black paint,’ 
Kansa name for Big Bluer., Kans.). One 
of the villages occupied by the Kansa, 
probably before 1820.—Dorsey, MS. Kan¬ 
sas vocab., B. A. E., 1882. 

Igdlorpait. A Danish post and Eskimo 
village in s. w. Greenland, lat. 60° 28'. 

Igdlopait.— Koldewey, German Arct. Exped., 182, 
1870. Igdlorpait. —MeddelelseromGronland, xvi, 
map, 1896. 

Igdluluarsuk. A village of the southern 
group of East Greenland Eskimo, on the 
coast between lat. 63° and 64°.—Nansen, 
First Crossing, 383, 1890. 

Igiak. A Magemiut Eskimo village in¬ 
land from Scammon bay, Alaska; pop. 10 
in 1880. 

Igiagagamute. —Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 1884. 
Igiogagamut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A.E., map, 
1899. Igragamiut.— Nelson cited by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 212,1901. 

Igiakchak. A village of the Kuskwog- 
miut Eskimo in the Kuskokwim district, 
Alaska; pop. 81 in 1890. 

Ighiakchaghamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 6, 1893. 
Igiakchak. —Ibid. 

Igivachok. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo 
village in the Nushagak district, Alaska; 
pop. 31 in 1890. 

Igivachochamiut. —11th Census, Alaska, 164,1893. 

Iglakatekhila (‘ refuses to move camp ’). 
A division of the Oglala Teton Sioux. 
Iglaka teHila— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
ReD. B. A. E., 220,1897. Iglaka-teqila.— Ibid. 

iglu. A snow house of the Eskimo: 
from igdlu, its name in the e. Eskimo 
dialects. See Habitations. (a. f. c. ) 
Igludahoming. An Ita Eskimo settle¬ 
ment on Smith sd., Greenland. 
Igloodahominy. —Mrs Peary, My Arct. Jour., 81, 
1893. Igludahoming.— Heilprin, Peary Relief Ex¬ 
ped., 133,1893. 

Igluduasuin ( Igludu&'hsuin , ‘place of 
houses’). An Ita Eskimo village in n. 
Greenland, lat. 77° 50'.—Stein in Peter- 
manns Mitt., no. 9, map, 1902. 

Iglulik. A winter settlement of the 
Aivilirmiut Eskimo at the head of Lyon 
inlet, Hudson bay. 

Igdlulik.— Rink in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., xv, 240, 
1886. Igdlumiut— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1888 (the inhabitants). Igloolik.— Parry, Sec.Voy., 


404, 1824. Igloolip.—Gilder, Schwatka’s Search, 
253,1881. 

Iglulik. A town of thelglulirmiut Es¬ 
kimo, on an island of the same name, near 
the e. end of Fury and Hecla straits.— 
BoasinZeitschr. Ges. f. Erdk.,226, 1883. 

Iglulirmiut (‘people of the place with 
houses’). A tribe of central Eskimo liv¬ 
ing on both sides of Fury and Hecla straits. 
They kill walrus in winter on Iglulik and 
other islands, harpoon seal in the fjords 
in early spring, and throughout the sum¬ 
mer hunt deer in Baffin land or Melville 
peninsula. Their settlements are Akuli, 
Arlagnuk, Iglulik, Kangertluk, Krimerk- 
sumalek, Pilig, Pingitkalik, and Uglirn.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 444, 1888. 
Iglulingmiut.—Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc.Wash., 
in, 96, 1885. 

Ignok. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village 
on the right bank of the lower Yukon, 
Alaska; pop. 175 in 1880. 

Ignokhatskomute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
57, 1884. Ingekasagmi.—Raymond (1869), quoted 
by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,. 1902. 

Ignokhatskamut. A village on lower 
Yukon r., adjacent to the Bering coast 
Eskimo, the inhabitants of which are 
probably of Athapascan and Eskimo mix¬ 
ture.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
ii, 1900. 

Igpirto. A fall settlement of Talirping- 
miut Eskimo of the Okomiut tribe at the 
head of Nettilling fjord, Cumberland sd.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Igualali ( Ig-vm'-la-li , ‘ a hole ’). A small 
rancheria of the Tarahumare, not far from 
Norogachic, Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lum- 
holtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Iguanes. A tribe of whom Father Kino 
heard, in 1699, while near the mouth of 
the Rio Gila in s. w. Arizona. As they 
are mentioned in connection with the Al- 
chedoma and Yuma, they were probably 
a Yuman tribe. 

Iguanas.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 57, 1759. 
Iguanes.—Kino (1699) quoted by Coues, Gar- 
c6s Diarv, 544, 1900. Yuanes.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 59, 1864. 

Iguik. An Unaligmiut Eskimo village 
on Norton sd., Alaska; pop. 8 in 1880, 51 
in 1890. 

Agowik.—llth Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Ego- 
wik.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, map, 1877. 
Igauik.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 
Igawik.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 59, 1884. 
Iguik.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 165,1893. 

Igushik. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Igushik r., Alaska; pop. 74 in 
1880. 

Igushek.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 
Igushik.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 

Ihaisdaye ( Iha-isdaye , ‘mouth-greas¬ 
ers’). A band of the Yankton Sioux.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897. 

Ihamba (I’ha-mba). An ancient pue¬ 
blo of the Tewa on the s. side of Pojoa- 
que r., between Pojoaque and San Ilde- 
fonso pueblos, n. New Mex.—Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 85, 1892. 

Ihanktonwan (‘Yankton’). A band of 
the Brul6 Teton Sioux, so called because 
descended from Yankton women. 


596 


IHASHA-IKOGMIUT 


[B. A. E. 


Iharjktogwag.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 
1897. Ihaiikto n wa n .—Ibid. 

Ihasha (‘red lips’). A band of the 
Hunkpatina or Lower Yanktonai Sioux. 
Iha-ca.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897. 
Iha-sa.—Ibid. 

Ihonatiria. A former Huron village 
in Simcoe co., Ontario, built about 1634 
and depopulated by pestilence in 1636. 
The Jesuits established there the mission 
of Immaculate Conception. 

Ihonatiria.—Jes. Rel. for 1635, 30, 1858. Ihonat- 
tiria.—Jes. Rel. for 1637, 153, 1858. Immaculate 
Conception.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 173,1855. 

Ijelirtung. The northernmost summer 
settlement of the Akudnirmiut Eskimo of 
Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
441, 1888. 

Ijirang. A fabulous people of central 
Eskimo mythology.—Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., 640, 1888. 

Ika. A Cochimi tribe of Lower Cali¬ 
fornia, said by Father Baegert to have 
lived about 40 m. inland from Magdalena 
bay in the 18th century. 

Ica.—Mvihlenpfordt, Mexico, II, 2, 443, 1844. 
Ikas.—Baegert, Nachrichten, 96,1773. 

Ikak. An Aglemiut Eskimo village 
near Naknek lake, Alaska; pop. 162 in 
1880. 

Ik-khagmute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 
1884. Savonoski.—Spurr and Post (1898) quoted by 
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. TJkak.—Dali, 
Alaska, map, 1870. 

Ikalu. A winter village of the Ita Es¬ 
kimo on Whale sd., n. Greenland. 
Idkalloo.—Markham in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
129,1866. Ika'rlo—Stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 
9, map, 1902. 

Ikanachaka ( ikana ‘ground’, atchaka 
‘reserved,’ ‘set apart,’ ‘beloved,’ ‘sa¬ 
cred’). A former Upper Creek town, 
located by Meek (Romantic Passages in 
S. W. Hist., 278, 1857) on the s. side of 
Alabama r., between Pintlala and Big 
Swamp cr., in Lowndes co., Ala. It was 
built on “holyground” and hence was 
thought to be exempt from hostile in¬ 
roads. Weatherford and the “ prophet ’ ’ 
Hillis Had jo resided there, and the Creek 
forces were defeated there Dec. 23, 1813, 
at which date it contained 200 houses 
and included some Shawnee. 

(h. w. h.) 

Eckanachacu.—Clay bourne (1814) inBoudinot, Star 
in the West, 254, 1816. Eckanakaka.—Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. iv, 58,1848. Econachaca.—Pickett, Hist. 
Ala., II, 323, 1851. E-cun-cha-ta.—Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., Ala., map, 1899. Holy Ground.— 
Claybourne (1814) in Boudinot, op. cit. Ikanatch- 
aka.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 132, 1884. 

Ikanhatki (‘ white ground ’). A former 
Upper Creek town on the right bank of 
lower Tallapoosa r., Montgomery co., 
Ala., immediately below Kulumi town. 
Swan, who passed there in 1791, says it 
had been settled by Shawnee, who had 
4 villages in the vicinity, and they are 
called by him Shawnee refugees, but 
Bartram (1775) states that they spoke 
Muscogee. Under the name Ekundutske 
the village was said to contain 47 families 
in 1832. (a. s. g.) 


Cunhutke.—Bartram, Trav., 461, 1791. Econau- 
tckky.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 
255, 1836. Econautske. —Ibid. E-cun-hut-ke.— 
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 34, 1848. Ecunhutlee.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 380,1854. E kun 
duts ke.—Census of 1832, ibid., 578. Ekunhutke.— 
Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 267, 1851 (inhabited by 
Shawanese). Ikan’-hatki.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., I, 132, 1884. Kenhulka.—Swan (1791) in 
Schoolcraft, op. cit., V, 262,1855. White Ground.— 
Finnelson (1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 
289,1832. 

Ikaruck. Mentioned as a Shasta band 
of Shasta valley, n. Cal., in 1851, but it is 
really a man’s personal name. (r. b. d. ) 
I-ka-nuck.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 171, 1853. Ika-ruck.—Gibbs 
(1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 171, 1853. 

Ikatchiocata. A former Choctaw town 
between the headwaters of Chicasawhay 
and Tombigbee rs., Miss. 

Ikachiocata.—Lattr6, map U. S., 1784. Ikechipou- 
ta.—Philippeaux, map, 1781. 

Ikatek. An Angmagsalingmiut Eskimo 
village on Sermilik fjord, e. Greenland; 
pop. 58 in 1884.—Meddelelser om Gron- 
land, x, map, 1888. 

Ikatikunahita ( ikd'tl ‘swamp’, kunahi'ta 
‘long’: Long Swamp town). A Chero¬ 
kee settlement, about the period of the 
removal in 1839, situated on Long Swamp 
cr., about the boundary of Forsyth and 
Cherokee cos., n. w. Ga. (j. m. ) 

Long Swamp Village.—Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1887. 

Ikatlek. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village 
on Yukon r., Alaska, 30 m. below Anvik; 
pop. 9 in 1880. 

Ikaklagmute.—Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 
42d Cong., 1st sess., 25, 1871. Ikatlegomut.—Nel¬ 
son in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Ikatlego- 
mute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. 
Ikoklag'mut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 17, 
1877. 

Ikerasak. A northern settlement of 
the Angmagsalingmiut Eskimo of e. 
Greenland, lat. 66°.—Meddelelser om 
Gronland, xxvn, 22, 1902. 

Ikherkhamut ( I-qer-qa-mut' , ‘ end of 
river people’: Kaniagmiut name). A 
division of the Ahtena near the mouth 
of Copper r., Alaska.—Hoffman, MS., 
B. A. E., 1882. 

Ikmun (referring to an animal of the 
cat kind). A band of the Yankton 
Sioux. 

Ikmup.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897. 
Ikmu D .—Ibid. 

Iknetuk. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Golofnin bay, Alaska; pop. 100 
in 1880. 

Ignituk.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 
Iknetuk.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. 
Kniktag'emut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 16, 
1877. 

Ikogmiut. A tribe of Alaskan Eskimo 
inhabiting both banks of the Yukon as 
far as Makak. They have hairy bodies 
and strong beards and exhibit a marked 
variation in physique, customs, and dia¬ 
lect from the Eskimo n. and e. of Norton 
sd., being more nearly allied to the other 
fishing tribes s. of them. Dali estimated 
their number at 1,000 in 1870, including 
the Chnagmiut. In 1890 there were 172 


BULL. 30] 


IKOGMIUT-ILLINOIS 


597 


Ikogmiut proper. Holmberg divided 
the natives of the delta into the Kwik- 
pagmiut and the Kwikluagmiut, living 
respectively on the Kwikpak and Kwik- 
luak passes. The villages are Asko, 
Bazhi, Ignok, Ikatlek, Ikogmiut, Inga- 
hame, Ingrakak, Katagkag, Kenunimik, 
Kikhkat, Koko, Koserefski, Kuyikanuik- 
pul, Kvikak, Makak, Narosigak, Nuk- 
luak, Nunaikak, Nunaktak, Paimute, 
Pogoreshapka, and Uglovaia, 

Ekog'mut.— Dali In Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1 ,17,1877. 
Ekogmuts. — Dali, Alaska, 407, 1870. Hekinx- 
tana. —Doroschin in Radloff, Worterbuch 0 d. 
Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874 (Kinai name). Ikogmiut.— 
Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 142, 1855. fkvog- 
mutes. —Schwatka, Milit. Recon., Explor. in 
Alaska, 353, 1900. Kahvichpaks. —Elliott, Cond. 
Aff. in Alaska, 29,1874. Koikhpagamute. —Petroff 
in Am. Nat., xvi, 570,1882 (Eskimo: ‘ people of the 
Kwikpak, the big river’). Kuwichpackmiiten.— 
Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 122, 1839. Kvikhpag- 
mute. —Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 37, 1884. Kwichliuagmjuten. —Holmberg, 
Ethnog. Skizz., 5,1855. Kwichpacker. —Wrangell, 
Ethnog. Nachr., 122, 1839. Kwichpagmjuten.— 
Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 5, 1855. Kwichpak.— 
Whymper, Trav. in Alaska, map, 1868. Kwikh- 
pag-mut.— Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 17, 1877. 

Ikogmiut. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the lower Yukon, Alaska, where 
the Russians established a mission about 
1843. Pop. 148 in 1880, 140 in 1890, 166 
in 1900. 

Icogmute. —Bruce, Alaska, map, 1885. Ikogh- 
miout.— Zagoskine in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., 
xxi, map, 1850. Ikogmut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., pi. ii, 1899. Ikogmute. —Petroff, Rep. 
on Alaska, map, 1884. Ikuagmjut. —Holmberg, 
Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855. 

Ikolga. A former Aleut village on Un- 
alaska, Aleutian ids., Alaska.—Coxe, 
Russian Discov., 164, 1787. 

Iktigalik. A Kaiyuhkhotana village 
onUnalaklik r., Alaska, having 10 houses 
in 1866. 

Igtigalik.— Whymper in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 
225, 1868. Iktigalik. —Dali, Alaska, 26, 1870. 
New TJlukuk. —Whymper, Trav. in Alaska, 175, 
1869. Nove Ulukuk.— Ibid. (Russian name). 

Ikuak. A Chnagmiut village on the 
lower Yukon, Alaska, near the head of the 
delta; pop. 65 in 1890. 

Iko-agmiut.— llth Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Iku- 
agmiut. —Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Ikuak. —Baker, ibid. 
Yukagamut.— Raymond (1869), quoted by Baker, 
ibid. 

Ikwopsum. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on the left bank of Squawmisht 
r., Brit. Col. 

Eukwhatsum.— Survey map, U. S. Hydrog. Office. 
Ikwo'psum. —Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475, 
1900. Yik’oa'psan. —Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Ilamatech. A formerTepehuanepueblo 
in Durango, Mexico, and the seat of a 
mission. 

S. Antonio Ilamateeh. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 319, 
1864. . 

Ildjunai-hadai ( I'ldjuna-i xa'da-i , ‘val¬ 
uable-house people’). A subdivision of 
the Yadus, a family of the Eagle clan of 
the Haida in w. British Columbia. The 
name is derived from that of a house.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 1905. 

lie Percde. A French mission, proba¬ 
bly among the Micmac, on the Gulf of 


St Lawrence in the 17th century.—Shea, 
Miss. Val., 85,1852. 

Ilex cassine. See Black drink. 

Iliamna. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo village 
on the s. shore of Iliamna lake, Alaska; 
pop. 49 in 1880, 76 in 1890. 

Iliamna.—llth Census, Alaska, 95, 1893. Ilyam- 
na.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 

__ Ilis (‘ spread-legs beach ’). A Nimkish 
Kwakiutl village on Cormorant id., Alert 
bay, Brit. Col., opposite Vancouver id. 
Some Kwakiutl proper come here during 
the salmon season.—Boas in Bull. Am. 
Geog. Soc., 227,1887. 

I-lis.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 65, 
1887. 

Ilisees. Mentioned by Ker (Travels, 98, 
1816) as the native name of a tribe, num¬ 
bering about 2,000, which he says he met 
on upper Red r. of Louisiana, apparently 
in the n. e. corner of Texas. Their chief 
village M as said to be Wascoo. Both the 
tribe and the village are seemingly imag¬ 
inary. 

Iliuliuk (Aleut: ‘harmony’). A town 
on Unalaska id., Alaska, the headquar¬ 
ters of the commercial interests of the 
Aleutians (Schwatka, Mil. Recon., 115, 
1885). Pop. 196 in 1831, 406 in 1880, 317 in 
1890. 

Gavanskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840 
(Russian:‘harbor’). Gavanskoi.—Elliott, Cond. 
Aff. Alaska, 1875. Gawanskoje.—Holmberg, Eth¬ 
nog. Skizz., map, 1855. Iljljuljuk.—Ibid. Illoo- 
look.—Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886. Oona- 
laska.—Schwatka, Mil. Recon., 115, 1885. Una¬ 
laska.—llth Census, Alaska, 88, 1893. 

Iliutak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Kuskokwim bay, Alaska; pop. 
40 in 1880. 

Iliutagamute.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1884. 

Ilkatsho (‘the big fattening’). A vil¬ 
lage of the Ntshaautin on the lake at the 
head of Black water r., Brit. Col. The 
population is a mixed one of Takulli and 
Bellacoola descent. 

al’katco.—Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 109, 

1892. I’ka-tco.—Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s,-25, 

1893. Uhlchako.—Can. Ind. Aff., 285, 1902. 

Illinois ( lliniwek , from ilini ‘man’, iw 

‘is’, ek plural termination, changed by the 
French to ois). A confederacy of Algon- 
quian tribes, formerly occupying s. Wis¬ 
consin, n. Illinois, and sections of Iowa and 
Missouri, comprising the Cahokia, Kas- 
kaskia, Michigamea, Moingwena, Peoria, 
and Tamaroa. 

The Jesuit Relation for, 1660 represents 
them as livings, w. of Green bay, Wis., in 
60 villages, and gives an extravagant esti¬ 
mate of the population, 20,000 men, or 
70,000 souls. The statement in the Jes¬ 
uit Relations that they came from the 
border of a great sea in the far W. arose, 
no doubt (as Tailhan suggests), from a 
misunderstanding of the term “great 
water,” given by the Indians, M'hich in 
fact referred to the Mississippi. Their 
exact location when first heard of by the 
whites can not be determined with cer¬ 
tainty, as the tribes and bands M-ere more 


598 


ILLINOIS 


[b. a. e. 


or less scattered over s. Wisconsin, n. 
Illinois, and along the w. bank of the 
Mississippi as far s. as Des Moines r., 
Iowa. The whites first came in actual 
contact with them (unless it be true that 
Nicollet visited them) at La Pointe 
(Shaugawaumikong), where Allouez met 
a party in 1667, which was visiting that 
point for purposes of trade. In 1670 the 
same priest found a number of them at 
the Mascoutin village on upper Fox r., 
some 9 m. from where Portage City now 
stands, but this band then contemplated 
joining their brethren on the Mississippi. 
The conflicting statements regarding the 
number of their villages at this period 
and the indefiniteness as to localities ren¬ 
der it difficult to reach a satisfactory con¬ 
clusion on these points. It appears that 
some villages were situated on the w. side 
of the Mississippi, in what is now Iowa, 
yet the major portion of the tribes belong¬ 
ing to the confederacy resided at points 
in n. Illinois, chiefly on Illinois r. When 
Marquette journeyed down the Missis¬ 
sippi in 1673 he found the Peoria and Mo- 
ingwena on the w. side, about the mouth 
of Des Moines r. On his return, 2 
months later, he found them on Illi¬ 
nois r., near the present city of Peoria. 
Thence he passed n. to the village of Kas- 
kaskia, then on upper Illinois r., within 
the present Lasalle co. At this time the 
village consisted of 74 cabins and was occu¬ 
pied by one tribe only. Hennepin esti¬ 
mated them, about 1680, at 400 houses and 
1,800 warriors, or about 6,500 souls. A few 
years later (1690-94) missionaries reported 
it to consist of 350 cabins, occupied by 8 
tribes or bands. Father Sebastian Rasies, 
who visited the village in 1692, placed the 
number of cabins at 300, each of 4 “fires,” 
with 2 families to a fire, indicating a pop¬ 
ulation of about 9,000—perhaps an ex¬ 
cessive esti mate. The evidence, however, 
indicates that a large part of the confeder¬ 
acy was gathered at this point for awhile. 
The Kaskaskia at this time were in some¬ 
what intimate relation with the Peoria, 
since Gravier, who returned to their vil¬ 
lage in 1700, says he found them prepar- 
ingto starts., and believed that if he could 
have arrived sooner “the Kaskaskians 
would not thus have separated from the 
Peouaroua [Peoria] and other Illinois.” 
By his persuasion they were induced to 
stop in s. Illinois at the point to which 
their name was given. The Cahokia and 
Tamaroawere at this time living at their 
historic seats on the Mississippi in s. Illi¬ 
nois. The Illinois were almost constantly 
harassed by the Sioux, Foxes, and other 
northern tribes; it was probably on this 
account that they concentrated, about the 
timeofLaSalle’svisit,onIllinoisr. About 
the same time the Iroquois waged war 


against them, which lasted several years, 
and greatly reduced their numbers, while 
liquor obtained from the French tended 
still further to weaken them. About the 
year 1750 they were still estimated at 
from 1,500 to 2,000 souls. The murder 
of the celebrated chief Pontiac, by a 
Kaskaskia Indian, about 1769, provoked 
the vengeance of the Lake tribes on the 
Illinois, and a war of extermination was 
begun which, in a few years, reduced 
them to a mere handful, who took refuge 
with the French settlers at Kaskaskia, 
while the Sauk, Foxes, Kickapoo, and 
Potawatomi took possession of their coun¬ 
try. In 1778 the Kaskaskia still num¬ 
bered 210,' living in a village 3 m. n. of 
Kaskaskia, while the Peoria and Michi- 
gamea together numbered 170 on the Mis¬ 
sissippi, a few miles farther up. Both 
bands had become demoralized and gen¬ 
erally worthless through the use of liquor. 
In 1800 there were only about 150 left. 
In 1833 the survivors, represented by the 
Kaskaskia and Peoria, sold their lands in 
Illinois and removed w. of the Mississippi, 
and are now in the n. e. corner of Okla¬ 
homa, consolidated with the Wea and 
Piankashaw. In 1885 the consolidated 
Peoria, Kaskaskia, Wea, and Piankashaw 
numbered but 149, and even these are 
much mixed with white blood. In 1905 
their number was 195. 

Nothing definite is known of their tri¬ 
bal divisions or clans. In 1736, accord¬ 
ing to Chauvignerie (N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 1056,1855), the totem of the 
Kaskaskia was a feather of an arrow, 
notched, or two arrows fixed like a St 
Andrew’s cross; while the Illinois as a 
whole had the crane, bear, white hind, 
fork, and tortoise totems. 

In addition to the principal tribes or 
divisions above mentioned, the following 
are given by early writers as seemingly 
belonging to the Illinois: Albivi, Amono- 
koa, Chepoussa, Chinko, Coiracoentanon, 
Espeminkia, and Tapouara. In general 
their villages bore the names of the tribes 
occupying them, and were constantly va¬ 
rying in number and shifting in location. 

The Illinois are described by early 
writers as tall and robust, with pleasant 
visages. The descriptions of their char¬ 
acter given by the early missionaries differ 
widely, but altogether they appear to have 
been timid, easily driven from their 
homes by their enemies, fickle, and 
treacherous. They were counted excel¬ 
lent archers, and, besides the bow, used 
in war a kind of lance and a wooden club. 
Polygamy was common among them, a 
man sometimes taking several sisters as 
wives. Unfaithfulness of a wife was pun¬ 
ished, as among the Miami, the Sioux, the 
Apache, and other tribes, by cutting off 


BULL. 30] 


ILLUMINATION 


599 


the nose of the offending woman, and as 
the men were very jealous, this punish¬ 
ment was often inflicted on mere suspicion. 

It was not the custom of the Illinois, at 
the time the whites first became acquaint¬ 
ed with them, to bury their dead. The 
body was wrapped in skins and attached 
by the feet and head to trees. There is 
reason, however, to believe, from discov¬ 
eries that have been made in mounds 
and ancient graves, which appear to be 
attributable to some of the Illinois tribes, 
that the skeletons, after the flesh had 
rotted away, were buried, often in rude 
stone sepulchers. Prisoners of war were 
usually sold to other tribes. 

According to Hennepin, the cabins of 
the more northerly tribes were made like 
long arbors and covered with double mats 
of fiat hags or rushes, so well sewed that 
they were never penetrated by wind, 
snow, or rain. To each cabin were 4 or 
5 hres, and to each hre 2 families, indi¬ 
cating that each dwelling housed some 8 
or 10 families. Their towns were not 
inclosed. 

The villages of the confederacy noted in 
history are Cahokia (mission), Immacu¬ 
late Conception (mission), Kaskaskia, 
Matchinkoa, Moingwena, Peoria, and 
Pimitoui. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Abimiouec. —Doc. of 1660 in Margrv, D6c., i, 54, 
1875 {b=l). AbimiSec.— Jes. Rel. i660, 12, 1858 
( b=l ). Alimouek. —Ibid., 1667, 21. Alimouk. — 
Ibid., in, index, 1858. Aliniouek. —Ibid., 1658, 21. 
Alini8ek. —Ibid., 1660, 12 (correction in errata). 
Alinouecks. —Coxe, Carolana, 19, 1741. Allinou- 
ecks. —Ibid., 49. Chicktaghicks. —Colden (1727), 
Five Nations, 30,1747 (Iroquoisname). Chictag- 
hicks. —Smith in Williams, Vermont, I, 501, 1809. 
Chigtaghcicks. —Colden, op. cit., 31. Chiktachiks. — 
Homann, map, 1756. Eriniouai. —Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 
1858. Eriniwek. —Ibid., in,index, 1858. Geghdag- 
eghroano. —Post (1758) in Proud, Pa., n,app., 113, 
1798. Geghtigeghroones. —Canajoharie conf. (1759) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 384. 1856. Hilini. — 
Brinton, Lenape Leg., 213,1885. Hiliniki. —Rafin- 
esque, Am. Nations, i, 139,1836 (Delaware name). 
Ilimouek. —Jes. Rel. 1670,101,1858. Iline.— Hervas 
(1785) in Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816 (Ital¬ 
ian form). Ilinese. —La Hontan.New Voy., I, 217, 
1703. Ilinesen. —Walch,map,1805 (German form). 
Ilinioiiek. —Jes. Rel. 1667, 18, 1858. Ilinois. —Ibid., 
1670, 86. Ilinoiiets. —Ibid., 1670, 92. Ilinoiietz. — 
Ibid., 101. Ilionois. —Proud, Pa., II,296,1798. Ille- 
nois. —Morse, North Am., map, 1776. Illeno- 
necks. —Ibid., 255. Illicoueck. —Coxe, Carolana, 17, 
1741. Illimouec. —Jes. Rel. 1667,21,1858. Illinese. — 
Hennepin, Cont. of New Discov., 88, 1698. Illine- 
sen. —Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 341, 1816 (German 
form). Il-li-ni.— Hough in Indiana Geol. Rep., 
map, 1883. Illiniens.— Hennepin, op. cit. 45b. 
Illiniwek.— Shea.Cath. Miss., 348,1855. Illinoias. — 
Niles (1761?) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 
541, 1861. Illinois.— Prise de Possession (1671) in 
Margrv, D6c., I, 96,1875. Illinoix.— Brackenridge, 
La., 132, 1815. Illinonecks.— Morse, North Am., 
255, 1798. Illinoneeks. —Doc. of 1719 in N. C. Rec., 
II, 351,1886. Illinouecks. —Coxe, Carolana, 49,1741. 
Illonese. —Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., II, 3, 1814. Ilionois.— Campbell (1761), 
ibid., 4th s., ix, 423, 1871. Illuni.— Allouez (1665) 
quoted by Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 71, 1850. 
Irinions. —Jes. Rel. 1642,97,1858. Isle aux Noix. — 
Lapham, Ind’sof Wis., 4, 1870 (‘Walnut island’: 
a form used by some author, who probably mis¬ 
took Illinois for a corrupted French word). Isli- 
nois.— La Salle (1680) in Margry, D<§c., ir, 33,1877. 
Kichtages. —Maryland treaty (1682) in N. Y. Doc. 


Col. Hist., in, 325,1853. Kicktages.—Albany conf. 
(1726), ibid., V, 791, 1855. Kighetawkigh Roanu.— 
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 28, 1744 (Iroquois name). 
Kightages.—Livingston (1720) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., v, 567, 1855. Lazars.—Croghan (1759) in 
Rupp, West. Pa., 146, 1846. Lezar.—Croghan 
quoted by Jefferson, Notes, 145, 1825 (probably 
the Illinois). Liniouok.—Jes. Rel. 1656, 39, 1858. 
Linneways.—Brice, Ft Wayne, 121, 1868. Lin- 
ways.—Croghan, op. cit. Minneways.—Brice, Ft 
Wayne, 121, 1868. Ondataouatouat.—Potier MS. 
cited in Charlevoix, New France, ii, 270, note, 
1866 (first applied by the Wyandot to the Ottawa, 
afterward to the Illinois). Willinis.— Proud, Pa., 
II, 296, 1798. Witishaxtanu.—Gatschet, Wyandot 
MS., B. A. E., 1881 (from Ushaxtti.no, ‘Illinois r.,’ 
Huron name for the Peoria, Kaskaskia, Wea, and 
Piankashaw). 

Illumination. The employment of arti¬ 
ficial light among the Indians was limited 
by their simple habits and needs to the 
camp-fire and the torch, in which respect 
they are found in the same culture grade 
as the Malay, the Negro, and the majority 
of uncivilized peoples. The camp-fire, 
built for the purpose of cooking food or 
furnishing heat, supplied most of the 
needed light. On special occasions large 
bonfires were made when ceremonies 
were held and nocturnal illumination 
was required. As a makeshift for the 
torch, a brand was taken from the camp¬ 
fire. When a continuous light was de¬ 
sired the fire was fed with slivers of wood 
set up in a circle and fed from one end 
where a gap was 
left in the cir¬ 
cle, as among 
the Cherokee; or 
when a tempo¬ 
rary light was 

wanted among Eskimo Lamp, 24 in. long. ^ (nelson) 

the Indians of British Columbia a little oil 
was thrown on the coals. The torches 
were of pine knots, rolls of bark, cane, or 
other inflammable material, but bundles 
of resinous wood, or masses of resin were 
almost never made, the form of the In¬ 
dian torch being of the most primitive 
character. They were used by night for 
hunting and fishing; for instance, deer 
were “weequashed, ,, or “jacked,” by 
means of torches, and fish were speared 
and birds captured by light from pine 
knots, especially among the eastern In¬ 
dians. Lamps, however, have been pos¬ 
sessed from time immemorial by the 
Eskimo, and they are the only aborigines 
of the hemisphere who had such utensils. 
In s. Alaska the lamp has a narrow wick- 
edge and is in the shape of a fiat-iron; 
along the tundra n. of St Michael it is 
a saucer of clay or stone; northward to 
Point Barrow it is gibbous, with wide 
wick-edge and made of soapstone. The 
length of the wick-edge of the Eskimo 
lamp has been observed to vary with the 
latitude, that is, the higher the latitude 
the longer the night, hence the greater 
need for light, which is met by lengthen¬ 
ing the margin of the lamp on which the 
moss wick is placed, so that while in s. 




600 


ILMAWI-IMNANGANA 


[B. A. E. 


Alaska the wick edge is 2 or 3 in. long, 
in Smith sd. it is 36 in. in length, and 
between these geographical extremes 
there is an increase in the size of the 
lamp from lower to higher latitudes. In 
at least two localities in the United States 
the bodies of fish were burned for light— 
the candle-fish of the N. W. coast and a 
fresh-water fish of Penobscot r. in Maine. 

Torches and fires were used for signal¬ 
ing at night; the Apache set fire to the 
resinous spines of the saguaro, or giant 
cactus, for this purpose. The picturesque 
and remarkable Fire-dance of the Navaho 
described by Matthews is a good example 
of the use of illumination in ceremonies. 
Among many tribes fire forms an essential 
part of a ceremony; in some cases, where 
Indians have been induced to rehearse a 
night ceremony by day, they do not omit 
the fire, though artificial light is not re¬ 
quired. A law of the Iroquois League 
required that a messenger approaching a 
camp-fire or village at night should carry 
a torch in order to show the absence of 
hostile intent. See Fire-making. 

Consult Hough (1) Development of 
Illumination, Smithson. Rep. 1901, 1902, 
(2) The Range of the Eskimo Lamp, Am. 
Anthrop., Apr. 1898, (3) The Lamp of the 
Eskimo, Rep. Nat. Mus. 1896, 1898; Mat¬ 
thews, Mountain Chant, 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
1887. (w. h.) 

ilmawi (own name; from ilma , ‘river’). 
A tribe of the Achomawi division of the 
Shastan family, formerly living on the s. 
side of Pit r., opposite Ft Crook, Shasta 
co., Cal. 

Illmawees.— Powers in Overland Mo., xn, 412, 
1874. Il-ma'-wi. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
ill, 267, 1877. 

Ilrak (rrak ). A former village of the 
Ntshaautin sept of the Takulli of British 
Columbia.—Morice in Trans. Can. Inst., 
iv, 25, 1893. 

Ilsethlthawaiame. A former village of 
the Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., 
Oreg. 

Il'-sepl pa-wai-a-me.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, III, 232,1890. 

Iluilek. An Eskimo village, now de¬ 
serted. on the e. coast of Greenland, lat. 
60° 20'. 

Illuidlek.—Das Ausland, 162,1886. Iluilek.— Med- 
delelser om Gronland, xxv, 23, 1902. 

Imagnee. A former Aleut village on 
Summer bay, Unalaska, e. Aleutian ids.; 
pop. 32 in 1830, 34 in 1884. 

Imagnak.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 34,1884. 
Imagnee. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 215, 1902. 
Imagninskoe. —Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840. 
Sinagnia. —Sarichef (1790) quoted by Baker, op. 
cit. 

Imaha. A Quapaw village mentioned 
by La Metairie in 1682 and by Iberville 
in 1699, and visited by La Harpe in 1719. 
It was situated on a s. w. branch of Ar¬ 
kansas r. In the wars and contentions 
of the 18th and 19th centuries some of 
the Quapaw tribe fled from their more 
northerly villages and took refuge among 


the Caddo, finally becoming a recognized 
division of the confederacy. These were 
called Imaha, but whether the people 
composing this division were from the 
village Imaha, mentioned by the early 
French travelers, is not absolutely known. 
The people of the Imaha division of the 
Caddo confederacy for some time re¬ 
tained their own language, which was 
Siouan. See Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1092, 1896. (a. c. f.) 

Imaham.—La Harpe (1719) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., pt ill, 73,1851. Imahans.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 
map 5,1776. Imahao.—Iberville (1699) in Margry, 
D6c., IV, 179, 1880. 

Imaklimiut. An Eskimo tribe occupy¬ 
ing Big Diomede id., Bering strait. See 
Okiogmiut. 

Achjuch-Aliat.—Dali in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 2, 
1880. Imach-leet.—Jackson, Reindeer in Alaska, 
map, 145,1894. Imah-kli-mut.—Dali in Proc. A. A. 
A. S., xxxiv, 377,1886. Imakleet.—Wells and Kel¬ 
ly, Eskimo-English and Eng.-Esk. Vocabs., chart, 
1890. Imaklitgmut.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. 
in Am., I, 73, 1847. Inalugmiut.—Woolfe in 11th 
Census, Alaska, 130, 1893 (given to inhabitants of 
both islands; see Inalik). Yikirga'ulit.—Bogo- 
ras, Chukchee, 21, 1904 (Chukchi name for in¬ 
habitants of Diomede ids.). 

Imarsivik. An Eskimo village of 21 
people on the e. coast of Greenland.— 
Nansen, Eskimo Life, 124, 1894. 

Imekpung (Im^kpixil). An Utkiavin- 
miut Eskimo camp near Pt Barrow, 
Alaska.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 
274, 1892. 

Imiak. A Togiagmiut village at the out¬ 
let of Aleknagik lake, Alaska.—Tebenkof 
(1849) quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1902. 

Imiche. A Californian tribe cited sev¬ 
eral times and mentioned once as on 
Kaweah r., Cal., which location, if cor¬ 
rect, would make it part of the Mariposan 
stock. The Wimilchi of Kings r. may 
have been meant. 

Eemitches.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 363, 1874. 
Y-Mitches.—Henley in Ind. Aff.Rep., 511,1854 (at 
Four rivers, near Tulare r.). Ymitches.—Bancroft, 
op. cit., i, 456 (misquoted from Henley). 

Imigen (‘ fresh water ’). One of the two 
winter villages of the Kinguamiut, a 
branch of the Okomiut Eskimo, on an 
island at the head of Cumberland sd.; 
pop. 17 in 1883.—Boas in 6th Rep. B.A.E., 
map, 1888. 

Imik. A former Aleut village on Agattu 
id., Alaska, one of the Near id. group of 
the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Immaculate Conception. A mission es¬ 
tablished by Marquette in 1674 among 
the Kaskaskia, near Rockford, Ill. 

Immaculate Conception.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 406, 
1855. Immaculee Conception de Notre Dame aux 
Illinois.—Gravier(?) (1694) quoted by Shea, ibid., 
419. 

Immahal. A former Chumashan village 
in Ventura co., Cal., “not far from Jos6 
Carrillo’s rancho ” in 1856.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. 

Imnangana. The southernmost winter 
settlement of the Ita Eskimo, situated at 
C. York, n. Greenland. 


BULL. 30] 


IMNARKUAN-IMPLEMENTS, TOOLS, UTENSILS 


601 


Ekadlu'hsuin.—Stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 9, 
map, 1902 ( = ‘salmon fishery’). Ignanine.—Heil- 
prin, Peary Relief Exped., 102,1893. Imangen.— 
Markham in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 127, 1866. 
Imnagen.— Ibid., 129. Imnangana.—Kroeber in 
Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., XII, 269, 1899. Imu- 
anak.—Hayes, Arct. Boat Journ., 182, 1860. 

Imnarkuan (‘where we make maple 
sugar’). A Passamaquoddy village for¬ 
merly on the site of Pembroke, Washing¬ 
ton co., Me.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 56, 
1866. 

Imoktegokshuk. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo 
village at C. Nome, Alaska; pop. 30 in 
1880. 

Imokhtagokhshuk.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
11, 1884. Imokhtegokhshuk.—Ibid., map. Imok¬ 
tegokshuk.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Imongalasha ( Imoklasha , ‘their people 
are there’). A former Choctaw settlement, 
sometimes called West Imongalasha to 
distinguish it from Imongalasha Skatane, 
and also popularly known as Mokalusha. 
It was situated on the headwaters of Tala- 
sha cr., Neshoba co., Miss., and was the 
most important Choctaw town in that 
region, the name appearing often in early 
government records. Tecumseh visited 
it in 1811 and held a council there. In 
1824 it was almost abandoned owing to 
the ravages of smallpox. The houses of 
the settlement, with the small fields inter¬ 
vening, covered an area of 3 m. n. and s., 
and 1£ m. e. and w. It consisted of a 
number of hamlets, the names of which, 
from s. to n., were Yaneka Chukkilissa, 
Onaheli, Nanihaba, and Bihikonlo.—Hal¬ 
bert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 431,1902. 

Imuklasha. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 138, 
1884. 

Imongalasha Skatane (Imoklasha Iskitini, 
‘Little Imongalasha’). A former Choc¬ 
taw town on the e. prong of Yazoo cr., 
now known as Flat cr., a n. affluent of 
Petickfa cr., Kemper co., Miss.—Halbert 
in Miss. Plist. Soc. Pub., vr, 423, 1902. 
East Moka-Lassa.—Romans, Florida, 310, 1775. 
Imongolasha Skatani.—West Fla. map., ca. 1775. 

Implements,Tools, Utensils. Whileatool 
is that with which something is made, 
an implement that with which work is 
done, and a utensil that in or on which 
something is prepared or used up, they 
can not always be distinguished among 
primitive peoples, who utilize one thing 
for many purposes. Many forms are dis¬ 
cussed under Arts and Industries and in 
articles devoted to special activities. It 
must be borne in mind that all such 
devices were helpers of the skilful hand 
and a vast deal of excellent work was done 
with it alone. 

The Indians of North America were in 
the stone age and therefore every device 
with which the arts of life were carried 
on, whether implement, tool, or utensil, 
was in harmony with this grade of cul¬ 
ture. The archeologist finds of such 
objects in ancient remains and sites either 
their substantial portions, or the perish¬ 
able parts that have been accidentally 


preserved, or impressions of them left on 
pottery. By comparing these relics with 
implements, tools, and utensils found in 
actual use among the Indians one is able 
to partially reconstruct ancient industry 
and read far backward into history. The 
moment that the savages saw implements, 
tools, and utensils of metal in the hands 
of Europeans, they recognized the supe¬ 
riority of these and adopted them. It 
is interesting to note the modifications 
that were made in hafting and using, in 
order to adapt the new devices to old 
habits and customs. As of old, manual 
parts were still carved, painted, and hung 
with symbols, without which they were 
thought to be ineffectual. 

The instruments of handicraft were of 
two classes—general, for common pur¬ 
poses, and special, for particular indus¬ 
tries. The general implements, tools, 
and utensils may be described in detail 
(Holmes in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 501, 
1903): 

Hammers. —These were made of stone 
or other hard substance, with or without 
handles. There were sledges, mauls, 
and pile-drivers for two or more men. 

Knives. —These were made commonly 
of chipped or ground stone. Teeth, bone, 
shell, and wood were also used for the 
purpose (McGuire in Am. Anthrop., iv, 
1891). 

Saws. —These were of serrated stones, 
shells, or other materials, and were 
worked by rubbing with the edge, often 
with the aid of sand with or without 
water. 

Borers. —Many natural objects were 
used for making holes in hard and soft ob¬ 
jects, either by pressure, striking, vibrat¬ 
ing, or revolving. They were held directly 
in the hand or were hafted; were grasped 
by one hand or by both hancls; held be¬ 
tween the palms or were worked by 
means of strap, bow, or pump (McGuire 
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1894, 623,1896). (See 
Drills and Drilling.) 

Axes. —The stone ax, rudely flaked or 
highly polished, plain or grooved, ranging 
in weight from a few ounces to many 
pounds in the ceremonial ax, was 
universal. It was held in the hand or 
attached in various ways to a handle by 
means of rawhide, but was never fur¬ 
nished with an eye for a helve. Other 
substances were occasionally used, as 
shell, iron ore, and copper, but the stone 
ax was the main reliance. The blade 
could be easily turned at right angles, and 
then the implement became an adz. (See 
Adzes, Axes, Celts.) 

Scrapers. —The scraper was also a tool 
of wide dispersion. In shape it re¬ 
sembled a chisel blade with a beveled 
edge. The rudest were sharp spalls of 
siliceous stone, held in the hand with or 


602 


IMPLEMENTS, TOOLS, UTENSILS 


[B. a. e. 


without padding; others were of smooth 
materials set into handles or grips that 
snugly fitted the workwoman’s hand. 
One variety was made for scraping hides, 
another for scraping wood. 

Nippers .—These include all devices for 
holding tightly an object or holding parts 
together while being worked. Hinged 
varieties were not known, but the Eskimo, 
especially, had several inventions to do 
the work of clamps, pincers, tweezers, or 
the vise with the aid of wedges. 

The simple mechanical powers, the 
wedge, the lever, and the inclined plane, 
were universally understood. The screw 
was employed but sparingly, if at all. 
The N. W. coast tribes used rollers, skids, 
and parbuckles to move gi^eat house beams 
into place, and the Alaskan Eskimo, ac¬ 
cording to Elliott, landed the walrus by 
means of a sliding tackle looped over 
pegs driven into cracks in the rocks and 
run through slits in the hide. The wheel 
and axle were entirely unknown, save in 
their most primitive form, the spindle. 
Power for doing work with the devices 
just described was derived from the mus¬ 
cle of the worker. The wind was utilized 
here and there, blowing upon a fixed mat 
erected for a sail, but nothing was known 
of shifting sails. The Indians made good 
use of fire in clearing ground for planting, 
in felling trees, excavating canoes, and 
making pitch and glue. Bellows were not 
used, but the blowtube existed. Water 
wheels were unknown, and in the matter 
of using nature’s forces for work northern 
America was in a primitive state of culture. 
The special implements, tools, and uten¬ 
sils employed in the various aboriginal 
industries are enumerated below. They 
are also treated more fully in separate 
articles. 

Agriculture .—Digging sticks, hardened 
in fire and sharpened, and often weighted; 
dibbles, hoes, scarecrows, harvesting de¬ 
vices, husking pegs, granaries, and caches 
were common. For harvesting both wild 
and cultivated produce various tribes had 
tongs for picking the cactus fruit, stone 
implements for opening hulls or shells, 
baskets for gathering, carrying, and stor¬ 
ing, poles for reaching fruit, harvesting 
apparatus for grass seed, wild rice, camas, 
wokas, coonti, maize, etc. (See Agricul¬ 
ture , Food.) 

Bark work. —Peelers, shredders, twist¬ 
ers, sewing tools, pitching tools. 

Boat building. —Axes, adzes, saws, 
borers, hammers, knives, pitch and paint 
brushes, and fire. 

Carrying .—Packing baskets, hide cases, 
walking sticks, special costumes, and a 
provision of compact food, as pemmican, 
dried fish, and crisp bread. The making 
up of burdens into neat loads for han¬ 
dling and for the back was understood 


and further completed by means of head- 
bands, breast straps, and shoulder straps. 
The dog was here and there a pack beast 
and harness was devised. 

Cooking .—Besides open roasting, gril¬ 
ling frames of wood, and pits for baking 
and steaming, there were stone slabs for 
parching seeds and for baking bread; pot¬ 
tery and baskets for boiling (the latter by 
the help of heated stones), and soapstone 
utensils for preparing meat and other 
food. (See Food.) 

Curing food .—Drying frames, smoking 
devices. 

Fishing .—Besides fishing implements 
proper, the fisher’s outfit included canoes, 
paddles, weirs, dams, anchor Stones, etc. 

Plastic art .—In the technic of this in¬ 
dustry belong all tools and implements 
used in quarrying clays and preparing 
them for the potter, all devices employed 
in building up, smoothing, polishing, 
and decorating ware, and the apparatus 
for burning. (See Pottery.) 

Quarrying , mining , and stone working .— 
Digging sticks, mauls, hammers, edge 
tools for making lamps, and dishes and 
other receptacles of soapstone, chipping 
and other shaping tools and implements, 
carrying apparatus, flakers, chippers, 
polishers. 

Textile industries .—All implements and 
tools needed in gathering roots, stems, 
and leaves as materials, and those used 
in preparing these for matting, bagging, 
basketry, blankets, robes, lacework, net¬ 
work, thread, string, and rope; finally all 
inventions employed in manufacturing 
these products. (See Basketry , Blankets , 
Weaving .) 

Whaling .—Suit of water-tight clothing; 
kaiak and paddle; harpoon, with line; 
skin floats; lance. 

Woodcraft. —Ax, knife, saw, adz, chisel, 
borers, rasps, polishers, paint brushes, 
rollers, moving and setting up devices. 
(See Woodwork.) 

For serving and consuming food, knives 
were necessary; spoons were fashioned 
of natural objects, especially of wood, 
horn, and gourd, but there were no forks 
or individual dishes or tables. Much 
food was consumed on the spot where it 
was found. The Indians had manifold 
apparatus for making, preserving, and 
using fire; for cooking, lighting, and heat¬ 
ing. Shovels were used for baking bread. 
The outfit for harvesting and preparing 
acorns included gathering basket, for 
which the woman’s hat was often used, 
carrying hamper, granary, hulling mill, 
mortar, hopper basket, meal mat, leach¬ 
ing pit, cooking basket, mush basket, and 
eating bowls. Milling implements in 
general included natural bowlders and 
pebbles; mortars of wood, stone, bone, 
or hide; pestles of the same materials; 


BULL. 30] 


IMTUK 


IMURIS 


603 


metates of varying degrees of texture, 
with manos to correspond; baskets to 
serve as hoppers and to catch meal, and 
brooms. Hunters’ implements included 
a vast number of accessory apparatus for 
making weapons effectual. 

Devices for binding or permanently 
holding two parts together, pegs, lash¬ 
ings, and cement were used (see Ce¬ 
ment). In the absence of metal and rat¬ 
tan, rawhide, sinew, roots of evergreen 
trees, splits of tough wood, pitch, and 
animal glue performed the necessary 
function. In the aboriginal economy no 
great stones were moved, but large logs 
were sometimes transported many miles. 

Metric devices of the North Americans 
were very crude compared with modern 
standards, but were exactly adapted to 
their needs. A man ^fitted his boat and 
all its appurtenances to his body, just as 
he did his clothing. The hunter, basket 
maker, potter, tentmaker, weighed and 
measured by means of the same standard. 
For securing uniform thickness the N. W. 
coast tribes bored holes through hulls of 
dugouts, and ran slender plugs into them 
which were used as gauges. Usually the 
parts of the body were the only gauges. 
(See Measurements.) 

Straighteners were made of wood, stone, 
horn, or ivory for bending w’ood and other 
substances to shape. Digging sticks, dib¬ 
bles, and the whole class of implements 
for making holes in the ground were used 
also for working in quarries, for getting 
worms and the like from the beach or 
the earth, and for digging roots for food 
or for textile and other industrial pur¬ 
poses. Tongs were employed in moving 
hot stones, in gathering cactus fruit, and. 
in capturing snakes. 

Dwellings were of such varying types 
and forms that their construction in dif¬ 
ferent areas required the services of differ¬ 
ent kinds of work—that of the tentmaker, 
the joiner, the mason, or the snow worker, 
with their different implements, includ¬ 
ing shovels, axes, trowels, adzes, levers, 
parbuckles, etc. (see Architecture , Habi¬ 
tations). The joiner’s outfit included 
many devices, from those for liafting to 
those for house building, tent framing, 
boat fitting, and the use of roots and 
thongs. Puncheons were hewn out, but 
there was no mortising. Hafting, the 
joining of the working part of a tool to 
the manual part, was accomplished vari¬ 
ously by driving in, groove, splice, socket, 
tongue-and-groove, or mortising, and the 
fastening was done with pegs or lashing. 

For the shaping arts, the working of 
stone, wood, and other hard substances, 
the apparatus varied with the material, 
and consisted of knives, hammers, wedges, 
saws, files, polishers, borers, adzes, and 
chisels, made out of materials best suited 


always to their uses. (See Art , Sculpture, 
Stonework, Woodwork.) 

The propelling of all sorts of water craft 
was done by paddling, by poling, by 
dragging over mud, and by towing. No 
oars or rudders were used. Vessels were 
made water-tight with pitch or by the 
swelling of the wood. The rope or raw- 
hide line for dragging a canoe along shore 
is known as a cordelle, the French- 
Canadian term. Portage, the moving of 
a bark canoe from one body of water to 
another, was accomplished by carrying 
load and canoe separately, sliding the 
empty canoe over mud, or shooting rapids 
in it. (See Boats, Commerce, Travel and 
Transportation.) 

The making of snowshoes was an im¬ 
portant occupation in the N., requiring 
great skill and manifold tools and devices. 
Ice and snow implements and utensils 
used in the higher latitudes include picks 
with ivory or stone blades, shovels with 
wooden blade and ivory edge, creepers 
for the boots, boat hooks for warding off 
and drawing canoes, sleds, and the indis¬ 
pensable snowshoes. The Eskimo were 
ingenious in devising such implements. 
They had shovels with edges of walrus 
ivory, walking sticks for going over the 
snow, snow goggles, snowshoes, and snow 
trowels and knives for housebuilding; 
also ice picks and crowbars and hooks 
and scoops for cutting and moving ice. 

See Arts and Industries, and the sub¬ 
jects cited thereunder; also the articles 
describing special types of implements, 
tools, and utensils, and the materials from 
which they are made. (o. t. m.) 

Imtuk. A Yuit Eskimo village near 
Indian pt., n. e. Siberia; pop. 43 in 9 
houses about 1895, 65 in 12 houses in 
1901. Most of its people are of the 
Aiwan division, but 4 families are from 
Cherinak. 

I'mtuk. —Bogoras, Chukchee, 29,1904. I'mtun.— 
Ibid. (Chukchi name). 

Imukfa (Hitchiti: ‘shell,’ also referring 
to a metallic ornament of concave shape; 
applied possibly in allusion to the bend 
in the river). A subordinate settlement 
of the Upper Creek town Oakfuski, on a 
creek of the same name, a short distance 
w. of Tallapoosa r., Ala. A battle was 
fought there Jan. 24, 1814, in the Creek 
war, and the celebrated battle of the 
Horseshoe Bend, on Mar. 25 of the same 
year, took place in the immediate 
vicinity. (a. s. g. ) 

Emucfau.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 371, 1857. 
Emuckfau.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 332-339, 1859. 
Emuckfaw. —Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. IV, 50, 1848. 
Emukfau. —Ibid., 59. Im-mook-fau. —Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch, 46, 1848. 

Imuris. Given by early authorities as 
a Pima rancheria near the e. bank of 
Rio San Ignacio (or Magdalena), lat. 
30° 50', long. 110° 5(K, in the present 
Sonora, Mexico. Orozco y Berra men- 


604 


INAJALAIHU—INDELCHIDNTI 


[b. a. e. 


tions the Himeris (who are evidently the 
inhabitants of this settlement), with the 
Opata. If they belonged to the latter, 
Imures was doubtless the last Opata set¬ 
tlement toward the n., and the earlier 
writers did not, in this case, distinguish 
the Opata from the Pima. Imuris was 
visited by Father Kino as early as 1699, 
and the bell in its church bears the date 
1680. It was afterward a visita of San 
Ignacio mission (Rudo Ensayo, ca. 1762, 
153, 1863), with 80 inhabitants in 1730. 
It is now a civilized pueblo. Of its 637 
inhabitants in 1900, 74 were Mayo and 32 
Yaqui. (f. w. h.) 

Himares.— Kino, map, in Stocklein, Neue Welt- 
Bott, 74, 1726. Himeris.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
58, 344, 1864. Himuri.— Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1762), 
153, 1863. Imoris.— Box, Adventures, 277, 1869. 
Imures— Kino (1696) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., I, 267, 1856. Imurez. —Hardy, Travels, 427, 
1829. Imuri.— Kino (ca. 1699) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 
4th s., i, 348, 1856. Imuris.— Font, map (1777) in 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 393, 1889. Imunz. — 
Hardy, Travels, 432,1829. S. Jose Imuri. —Rivera 
(1730) in Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884. 
Uburiqui.— Kino (ca. 1699) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 
s., I, 348,1856. Ymurez. —Bandelier, Gilded Man, 
179, 1893. 

Inajalaihu. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874. 

Inalik. An Inguklimiut village on 
Little Diomede id., Alaska. The name 
of the people was extended by Woolfe 
(11th Census, Alaska, 130, 1893) to in¬ 
clude the inhabitants of both islands.— 
Nelson, 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Inam. The best known village of the 
upper division of the Karok, speaking 
the Karakuka dialect. Situated on Kla¬ 
math r., at or near the mouth of Clear cr., 
n. w. Cal. It was the scene of the Deer¬ 
skin dance and of an annual “world- 
making” ceremony. (a. l. k. ) 

E-nam.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860. 

Inaqtek ( Ina/lchteh , ‘raven’). A sub- 
phratry or gens of the Menominee.—Hoff¬ 
man in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42,1896. 

Inaspetsum. One of the tribes included 
by the early fur traders under the term 
Nez Perce (Ross, Fur Hunters, i, 185, 
1855). They lived on Columbia r., above 
the mouth of the Snake, in Washington. 
Perhaps they were the Winatshipum or 
the Kalispel. (l. f. ) 

Incense. Incense, from the Latin incen- 
dere , ‘to burn,’ is defined as anything 
burned to produce a pleasant sweet smell 
during religious rites. It may be regard¬ 
ed as direct sacrifice, as symbolic of as¬ 
cending prayer, or as an aid to spiritual ex¬ 
altation. Incense has been in almost uni¬ 
versal use from the earliest historic period, 
particularly in the more highly organized 
ancient religions. In Mexico and adja¬ 
cent parts various resinous gums known 
collectively under the Aztec name of 
copalli, or copal, were used. North of the 
Rio Grande the plant substances most 
commonly employed for the same purpose 


were tobacco, in various native varieties; 
the dried tops of Thuja, and other ce¬ 
dars; spruce and pine needles, particu¬ 
larly those of Abies and Pinus ponderosa; 
s weet grass ( Savastana odorata ), Artemisia, 
and the root of the balsam-root' ( Balsam - 
orrhiza ). Tobacco was used in one way 
or another in important ceremonials over 
almost the whole area of the United States 
and along the N. W. coast, and in the 
Canadian interior. Pine needles were 
most commonly used among the Pueblos 
and other tribes of the S. W. In the 
noted Hopi snake dance the smoke of 
burning juniper tops was blown through 
tubes known as ‘ ‘ cloud-blowers’ ’ until the 
kiva was -filled with the pleasing fra¬ 
grance. Cedar tops, sweet grass, and 
wild sage were more common in cere¬ 
monies of the Plains Indians, especially 
the Peyote rite, and parcels of the dried 
substance w r ere sometimes attached to 
sacrifice poles or deposited with the 
corpse in the grave or on the scaffold. 
With some tribes the twigs and leaves of 
the plant were differentiated as male and 
female. The balsam root was burned in 
small quantities in every great sweat- 
house rite among the Plains tribes and 
was held so precious that sometimes a 
horse was given for a single root. Among 
the Siksika, according to Wissler, every 
tipi contains an altar—a small excavation 
in the earth—where sweet gum is burned 
daily. 

There were also a number of vegetal 
perfumes used for personal gratification, 
either by rubbing the juice of the crushed 
plant over the skin or by wearing the 
leaves or dried tops in little bags at¬ 
tached to the clothing. The Southern 
Ute mother placed sweet-smelling herbs 
under the pillow of her baby. One of 
the ingredients of the secret medicine 
employed by the Buffalo doctors among 
the Plains tribes in treating wounds is be¬ 
lieved to have been the strong smelling 
musk of the beaver. (j. m.) 

Incha. An unidentified tribe said to have 
lived where there were Spanish settle¬ 
ments and to have been at war with the 
Mantons (Mento) of Arkansas r. in 1700. 
Icca.— Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c., iv, 561, 
1880. Incha.— Ibid., 599. 

Inchi ( In'tci , ‘ stone lodge’). A village 
occupied by the Kansa in their migration 
up Kansas r.— J. O. Dorsey, inf’n, 1882. 

Incomecanetook ( Income-can-ttook). 
Given by Ross (Advent., 290,1847) as an 
Okinagan tribe. 

Indak. A former Maidu village on the 
site of Placerville, Eldorado co., Cal.— 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
xvn, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Indelchidnti (‘pine’). An Apache clan 
or band at San Carlos agency and Ft 
Apache, Ariz., in 1881 (Bourke in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, hi, 111, 1890); identical 


BULL. 30 ] 


INDIAN 


605 


with Indilche-dentiene, ‘ Live in country 
with large pine trees’ (White, Apache 
Names of Indian Tribes, MS., B. A. E.), 
a band formerly under chief Narchubeu- 
lecolte. 

Indian.. The common designation of 
the aborigines of America. The name 
first occurs in a letter of Columbus dated 
Feb., 1493, wherein the discoverer speaks 
of the Indios he had -with him (F. F. 
Hilder in Am. Anthrop., n. s., i, 545, 
1899). It was the general belief of the 
day, shared by Columbus, that in his 
voyage across the Atlantic he had reached 
India. This term, in spite of its mislead¬ 
ing connotation, has passed into the lan¬ 
guages of the civilized world: Indio in 
Spanish, Portuguese, and Italian; Indien 
in French; Indianer in German, etc. The 
term American Indian, for which it has 
been proposed to substitute Amerind 
(q. v.), is however in common use; less so 
the objectionable term redskins, to which 
correspond the French Peaux-rouges , 
the German Rothhaute. Brinton titled 
his book on the aborigines of the New 
World, “The American Race,” but this 
return to an early use of the word Amer¬ 
ican can hardly be successful. In geo¬ 
graphical nomenclature the Indian is 
well remembered. There are Indian 
Territory, Indiana, Indianapolis, Indian- 
ola, Indio. Besides these, the maps and 
gazetteers record Indian arm, bay, bayou, 
beach, bottom, branch, brook, camp, cas¬ 
tle, cove, creek, crossing, diggings, draft, 
fall, field, fields, ford, gap, grove, gulch, 
harbor, head, hill, hills, island, lake, 
mills, mound, mountain, neck, orchard, 
pass, point, pond, ridge, river, rock, run, 
spring, springs, swamp, town, trace, trail, 
valley, village, and wells, in various parts 
of the United States and Canada. The 
term Red Indian, applied to the Beothuk, 
has given Newfoundland a number of 
place names. 

Many wild plants have been called 
“Indian” in order to mark them off from 
familiar sorts. Use by Indians has been 
the origin of another class of such terms. 

The following plants have been called 
after the Indian: 

Indian apple. —The May apple, or wild 
mandrake ( Podophyllum peltatum ). 

Indian arrow. —The burning bush, or 
wahoo (Euonymus atropurpureus). 

Indian arrow-wood. —Theflowering dog¬ 
wood, or cornelian tree ( Cornus Jlorida). 

Indian holm. —The erect trillium, or ill- 
scented wake-robin ( Trillium erectum). 

Indian bark. —The laurel magnolia, or 
sweet bay ( Magnolia virginiana). 

Indian bean .—(1) The catalpa, or bean- 
tree ( Catalpa catalpa) . (2) A New Jersey 
name of the groundnut ( Apios apios). 

Indian beard-grass. —The bushy beard- 
grass ( Andropogon glomeratus). 


Indian bitters .—A North Carolina name 
of the Fraser umbrella or cucumber tree 
{Magnolia fraseri). 

Indian black drink .—The cassena, yau- 
pon, black drink (q. v.), or Carolina tea 

(Ilex cassine). 

Indian boys and girls .—A western name 
of the Dutchman’s breeches {Bikukulla 
cucullaria). 

Indian bread. —The tuckahoe ( Scelero- 
tium giganteum). 

Indian bread-root .—The prairie turnip, 
or pomme blanche (Psoralea esculenta). 

Indian cedar .—The hop-hornbeam, or 
iron wood (Ostrya virginiana). 

Indian cherry .— (1) The service-berry, 
or june-berry (Amelanchier canadensis). 
(2) The Carolina buckthorn (Rhamnus 
caroliniana). 

Indian chickweed .—The carpet-weed 
(Mollugo verticillata). 

Indian chief .—A western name of the 
American cowslip or shooting-star {Do- 
decatheon meadia). 

Indian cigar tree .—The common catalpa 
{Catalpa catalpa ), a name in use in Penn¬ 
sylvania, Maryland, and the District of 
Columbia. See Indian bean , above. 

Indian corn .—Maize {Zea mays), for 
which an early name was Indian wheat. 

Indian cucumber.—Medeola virginiana , 
also known as Indian cucumber-root. 

Indian cup .—(1) The common pitcher- 
plant {Sarracenia purpurea ). (2) The cup- 
plant {Silphium perfoliatum). 

Indian currant .—The coral-berry {Sym- 
phoricarpos vulgaris ). 

Indian dye .—The yellow puccoon or 
orange-root {Hydrastis canadensis); also 
known as yellow-root. 

Indian elm .—The slippery-elm ( Ulmus 
fulva). 

Indian fig .—(1) The eastern prickly 
pear {Opuntia opuntia). (2) Cereus gi- 
ganteus, or saguaro, the giant cereus of 
Arizona, California, Mexico, and New 
Mexico. 

Indian fog .—The crooked yellow stone- 
crop or dwarf houseleek {Sedum refiexum). 

Indian gravel-root .—The tall boneset or 
joe-pye-weed {Eupatoriumpurpureum). 

Indian hemp .—(1) The army-root ( Apo- 
cynum cannabinum), called also black In¬ 
dian hemp. (2) The swamp milkweed 
{Asclepias incarnata) and the hairy milk¬ 
weed {A. pulchra), called also white In¬ 
dian hemp. (3) A West Virginia name 
for the yellow toad-flax (IAnaria linaria). 
(4) The velvet-leaf {Abutilon abutilon ), 
called also Indian mallow. 

Indianhippo .—The bowman’s-root {Por- 
teranthus trifoliatus) , called also Indian 
physic. 

Indian lemonade .—A California name, 
according to Bergen, for the fragrant 
sumac {Rhus trilobata). 


606 


INDIAN 


[b. a. e. 


Indian lettuce .—The round-leaved win- 
tergreen (Pyrola rotundifolia). 

Indian mallow .*—(1) The velvet-leaf 
(Abutilon abwtilon), also known as Indian 
hemp. (2) The prickly sida (Sida spi- 
nosa). 

Indian melon .—A Colorado name of a 
species of Echinocactus. 

Indian millet .—The silky oryzopsis 
(Oryzopsis cuspidata). 

Indian moccasin .—The stemless lady’s- 
slipper or moccasin-flower (Cypripedium 
acaule). 

Indian mozemize , or moose misse.—The 
American mountain-ash or dogberry ( Sor- 
bus americana). 

Indian paint. —(1) The strawberry-blite 
(Blitum capitatum). (2) The hoary puc- 
coon (Lithospermum canescens). (3) A 

Wisconsin name, according to Bergen, for 
a species of Tradescantia. (4) Bloodroot 
(Sanguinaria canadensis ), called red In¬ 
dian paint. (5) The yellow puccoon ( Hy¬ 
drastis canadensis ), called yellow Indian 
paint. 

Indian paint-brush .—The scarlet-paint¬ 
ed cup (Castilleja coccinea ). 

Indian peach .—Ungrafted peach trees, 
according to Bartlett, which are consid¬ 
ered to be more thrifty and said to bear 
larger fruit. In the South a specific 
variety of clingstone peach. 

Indian pear .—The service-berry ( Ame- 
lanchier canadensis), called, also wild In¬ 
dian pear. 

Indian physic. —(1) The bowman’s- 
root (Porteranthus trifoliatus), called also 
Indian hippo. (2) American ipecac ( Por¬ 
teranthus stipulatus). (3) Fraser’s mag¬ 
nolia, the long-leaved umbrella-tree 
{Magnolia fraseri). 

Indian pine .—The loblolly, or old-field 
pine (Pinus taeda). 

Indian pink. —(1) The Carolina pink, 
or worm-grass ( Spigeliamarylandica). (2) 
The cypress-vine (Quamoclit quamoclit). 
(3) The fire pink {Silene virginica). (4) 
The cuckoo-flower, or ragged-robin 
{Lychnis flos-cuculi). (5) The fringed 
milkwort, or polygala {Polygala pauci- 
folia ). (6) The scarlet-painted cup ( Cas¬ 
tilleja coccinea). (7) The wild pink {Si¬ 

lene pennsylvanica). (8) Silene calif ornica. 

Indian pipe. —The corpse-plant or ghost- 
flower {Monotropa uniflora). 

Indian pitcher .—The pitcher-plant or 
side-saddle flower {Sarracenia purpurea). 

Indian plantain. —(1) The great Indian 
plantain or wild collard {Mesadenia reni- 
formis). (2) The pale Indian plantain 
{M. atriplicifolia). (3) The tuberous In¬ 

dian plantain {M. tuberosa). (4) The 
sweet-scented Indian plantain {Synosma 
suaveolens). 

Indian poke. —(1) American white hel¬ 
lebore ( Veratrum viride). (2) False hel¬ 
lebore ( V. woodii). 


Indian posey. —(1) Sweet life-everlast¬ 
ing ( Gnaphalium obtusifolium). (2) Large- 
flowered everlasting {Anaphalis margari- 
tacea). (3) The butterfly-weed {Asclepias 
tuberosa). 

Indian potato. —(1) The groundnut 
{Apios apios). (2) A western name for 
the squirrel-corn {Bikukulla canadensis). 
(3) A California name, according to Ber¬ 
gen, for Brodiaea capitata; but according 
to Barrett (inf’n, 1906) the term is indis¬ 
criminately given to many different species 
of bulbs and corms, which formed a con¬ 
siderable item in the food supply of the 
Californian Indians. i 

Indian puccoon. —The hoary puccoon 
{Lithospermum canescens). 

Indian red-root. —The red-root ( Gyroth- 
eca capitata). 

Indian rhubarb. —A California name, ac¬ 
cording to Bergen, for Saxifraga peltata. 

Indian rice. —Wild rice {Zizania aquat- 
ica). 

Indian root. —The American spikenard 
(Aralia racemosa). 

Indian sage. —The common thorough- 
wort or boneset ( Eupatorium perfoliatum ). 

Indian shamrock. —The ill-scented wake- 
robin, or erect trillium ( Trillium erectum). 

Indian shoe. —The large yellow lady’s- 
slipper ( Cypripedium hirsutum). 

Indian slipper. —Th epink lady ’ s-slipper, 
or moccasin-flower ( Cypripedium acaule). 

Indian soap-plant .—The soap-berry, or 
wild China-tree {Sapindus marginatus). 

Indian strawberry. —The strawberry- 
blite {Blitum capitatum). 

Indian tea.—Plants, the leaves, etc., of 
which have been infused by the Indians, 
and after them by whites; also the decoc¬ 
tion made therefrom, for example, Lab¬ 
rador tea {Ledum groelandicum) , which in 
Labrador is called Indian tea. 

Indian tobacco. —(1) The wild tobacco 
{Lobelia inflata). (2) Wild tobacco {Nic- 
otiana rustica). (3) The plantain-leaf ever¬ 
lasting {Antennaria plantaginifolia). (4) 

A New Jersey name, according to Bart¬ 
lett, of the common mullein ( Verbascurn 
thapsus). 

Indian turmeric. —The yellow puccoon, 
or orange-root {Hydrastis canadensis). 

Indian turnip. — (1) The jack-in-the- 
pulpit {Arisaema triphyllum), also called 
three-leaved Indian turnip. (2) The 
prairie potato, or pom me blanche {Psor- 
alea esculenta). 

Indianvervain. —ANewfoundlandname, 
according to Bergen, for the shining club- 
moss {Lycopodium lucidulum). 

Indian warrior.—A California name for 
Pedicularis densiflora. 

Indian weed. —An early term for to¬ 
bacco. 

Indian wheat. —An early term for maize, 
or Indian corn. 

Indian whort. —A Labrador and New- 


bull. 30] INDIAN AFFAIRS-INDIAN INDUSTRIES LEAGUE 


607 


foundland name for the red bearberry or 
kinnikinnik ( Arctostaphylos uva-ursi). 

Indian wickup. —The great willow-herb 
or fireweed ( Epilobium augustifolium ), 
although Algonquian Indians called the 
basswood ( Tilia americana) wickup. 

There are, besides, the Indian's dream , 
the purple-stemmed cliff-brake ( Pellaea 
atropurpurea ), and the Indian's plume, 
Oswego tea ( Monarda didyma ). 

Another series of terms in which the 
Indian is remembered is the following: 

Indian bed. —A simple method of roast¬ 
ing clams, by placing them, hinges up¬ 
permost, on the ground, and building 
over them a fire of brushwood. 

Indian bread. —Bread made of maize 
meal or of maize and rye meal. 

Indian-corn hills.— (1) In Essex co., 
Mass., according to Bartlett, hummocky 
land resembling hills of Indian corn. 
(2) Hillocks covering broad fields near 
the ancient mounds and earthworks of 
Ohio, Wisconsin, etc. (Lapham, Antiqui¬ 
ties of Wisconsin). 

Indian dab. —A Pennsylvania name for 
a sort of battercake. 

Indian file. —Single file; the order in 
which Indians march. 

Indian fort. —A name given to aborig¬ 
inal earthworks in w. New York, in Ohio, 
and elsewhere. 

Indian gift. —Something reclaimed after 
having been given, in reference to the 
alleged custom among Indians of expect¬ 
ing an equivalent for a gift or otherwise 
its return. 

Indian giver. —A repentant giver. 

Indian ladder.—A ladder made by 
trimming a small tree, the part of the 
branches near the stem being left as 
steps. 

Indian liquor. — A Western term for 
whisky or rum adulterated for sale to the 
Indians. 

Indian meal. —Maize or corn meal. A 
mixture of wheat and maize flour was 
called in earlier days “wheat and in- 
dian”; one of maize and rye flour, “rye 
and indian.” 

Indian orchard. —According to Bartlett, 
a term used in New York and Massachu¬ 
setts to designate an old orchard of un¬ 
grafted apple trees, the time of planting 
being unknown. 

Indian pipestone. —A name for catlinite 
(q. v.), the stone of which tribes in the 
region of the upper Mississippi made 
their tobacco pipes. 

Indian pudding. —A pudding made of 
cornmeal, molasses, etc. 

Indian reservation or reserve. —A tract of 
land reserved by Government for the In¬ 
dians. 

Indian sign. —A Western colloquialism 
of the earlier settlement days for a trace 
of the recent presence of Indians. 


Indian sugar .—One of the earlier names 
for maple sugar. 

Indian summer .—The short season of 
pleasant weather usually occurring about 
the middle of November, corresponding 
to the European St Marthas summer, or 
summer of All Saints (Albert Matthews 
in Monthly Weather Rev., Jan., 1902). 

The name Indian appears sometimes 
in children’s games (Chamberlain in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xv, 107-116, 1902). 

In Canadian French the usual term 
applied to the Indian was “sauvage” 
(savage); and hence are met such terms 
as “botte sauvage,” “traine sauvage,” 
“tabagane,” “the sauvage.” The “Si- 
wash” of the Pacific coast and in the 
Chinook jargon is only a corruption of 
the “sauvage” of French-Canadian trap¬ 
pers and adventurers. (a. f. c.) 

Indian Affairs. See Office of Indian Af¬ 
fairs. 

Indian Commissioners. See United States 
Board of Indian Commissioners. 

“Indian Helper.” See Carlisle School. 

Indian Industries League. A philan¬ 
thropic organization, originally the In¬ 
dian industries department of the Na¬ 
tional Indian Association, but incorpor¬ 
ated as an independent body at Boston, 
Mass., in 1901. Its object is “to open 
individual opportunities of work, or of 
education to be used for self-support, to 
individual Indians, and to build up self- 
supporting industries in Indian commu¬ 
nities. ” Asa department of the national 
organization the Indian industries gained 
its first important impetus in 1892, when 
it held at the Mechanics’ Fair, in Boston, 
an exhibition of Indian bead work and 
of class-room work in iron, tin, wood, 
leather, and lace. It has been instru¬ 
mental in the education of two Indian 
girls, who were graduated with credit 
from the Boston High School, and has 
helped individual educated Indians to¬ 
ward self-support, having in view the fact 
that the progress of the Indians toward 
civilization is in proportion to the number 
of their young people who have seen and 
practised the white man’s life at its best. 
It has also helped to foster a beadwork in¬ 
dustry*; aided in developing the native 
moccasin to suit the white man; bought 
baskets of native manufacture, paying 
therefor a fair price to the Pima and Mis¬ 
sion Indians, the basket-making tribes of 
Washington, and others, and has obtained 
for these products places for exhibit and 
sale. The league also erected an indus¬ 
trial room for the Navaho on San Juan r., 
N Mex., which was disposed of when the 
plant became a mission station. In 1905 
the president of the league officially visited 
the Mission Indians of California and 
others, his report on the former resulting 
in the amelioration of their extreme pov- 


608 


INDIAN POINT-INDIAN RIGHTS ASSOCIATION 


[ B. A. E. 


erty by bringing to them governmental 
and private aid. The league strives to 
aid the Indians in any way that offers 
even temporary self-support, like that 
derived from their aboriginal industries. 
It believes in the assimilation of the In¬ 
dians into the national life, in the abol¬ 
ishment of reservations, and in the free¬ 
dom of the Indians to live and work 
where they please. (f. c. s.) 

Indian Point. A village on the site of 
Lisbon, N. Y., occupied after the Revo¬ 
lution by Catholic Iroquois removed 
thither by the English Government until 
they were dispersed in 1806, when they 
retired to Onondaga and St Regis.—Shea, 
Cath. Miss., 342, 1855. 

Indian Rights Association. A nonpolit¬ 
ical, nonsectarian body organized in Phil¬ 
adelphia, Dec. 15, 1882, by gentlemen 
who met in response to an invitation of 
Mr John Welsh to consider the best 
method of producing such public feeling 
and Congressional action as should secure 
civil rights and education to the Indians, 
and in time bring about their civilization 
and admission to citizenship. When the 
association began its work much of the 
country over which the Indians roamed 
was sparsely settled; outbreaks had been 
frequent; comparatively little attention 
was paid to the Indians’ rights and 
wrongs, and ignorance concerning Indian 
affairs was widespread. When the tide 
of emigration swept westward, and set¬ 
tlers, good and bad, began crowding the 
Indians more and more, it was evident 
that measures should be adopted whereby 
the Indian could be adapted to his new 
artificial environment. The work con¬ 
fronting the association was one of mag¬ 
nitude. It was necessary to procure 
accurate knowledge of actual conditions, 
which could be done only by frequent 
visits to the Indian country. The infor¬ 
mation thus obtained had to be brought 
to the attention of the public in order 
that sufficient pressure might be exerted 
on Congress and the Executive. This 
was done by dissemination of information 
in pamphlets and leaflets, by public ad¬ 
dresses, and by announcements through 
the public press. The association gradu¬ 
ally won the respect and confidence of 
the public. The accuracy of its state¬ 
ments is rarely questioned now, and an 
appeal to the press on any matter requir¬ 
ing attention from Congress or the public 
usually meets with ready response. In 
the beginning the association was re¬ 
garded by a few as maintaining visionary 
theories, and was viewed by some Gov¬ 
ernment officials as a meddlesome and 
irresponsible body; but the Office of In¬ 
dian Affairs came to regard it as a friendly 
critic and welcomed its aid. The asso¬ 
ciation has a representative in Washing¬ 


ton to cooperate with the Office of Indian 
Affairs, to bring to the attention of the 
Commissioner matters requiring adjust¬ 
ment, to scrutinize legislation relating to 
Indian affairs, and to inform members of 
Congress regarding the merits or demer¬ 
its of pending bills. Vicious legislation, 
when it can not be defeated in committee, 
is vigorously fought in Congress through 
personal presentation and by letters and 
pamphlets, with frequent appeals to the 
Executive. 

Many of the laws enacted by Congress 
with a view of improving the condition 
of the Indian have been prompted by the 
association. Among those of a general 
nature is the statute of Feb. 8, 1887, 
known aS the “general severalty act,” 
which authorizes allotments. Under this 
law the title to Indian lands is held by 
the Government in most cases for 25 
years, but in the meantime the allot¬ 
tee is subject to the laws in common with 
other citizens. More recent is the enact¬ 
ment of a statute, drafted by the associa¬ 
tion, designed to defeat the monopoly 
that has so largely controlled Indian 
trade, the law now providing that any 
person of good moral character shall be 
granted a license on application. 

The courts have frequently been ap¬ 
pealed to by the association in the en¬ 
deavor to secure justice. The Warner 
Ranch (Mission Indian) case, appealed 
from the local courts of California to the 
Supreme Court of the United States, was 
in its inception espoused by the associa¬ 
tion and prosecuted by it to the final de¬ 
cree of the highest tribunal, the necessary 
funds for the prosecution of the case 
being advanced by the association. The 
celebra 1 “Lone Wolf” case was ap¬ 
pealed bj he association to the United 
States Supiame Court in the hope that 
the policy of recognizing the validity and 
sacredness of the Government’s treaty 
obligations with the Indian tribes, fol¬ 
lowed since the adoption of the Constitu¬ 
tion, would be upheld. The adverse 
decision in this case marked the begin¬ 
ning of a new era in the management of 
the Indians. The appeal made to the 
association by friends of Spotted Hawk and 
Little Whirlwind, of the Northern Chey¬ 
enne in Montana, under sentence of death 
and life imprisonment, respectively, for 
the alleged murder of a sheep herder, 
was responded to by the association, 
which employed counsel to present the 
case on appeal to the supreme court of 
Montana. The effort resulted in securing 
the liberty of both young men, and a 
subsequent confession by the person 
guilty of the crime charged to them fully 
exonerated them and showed the need 
of watchfulness to prevent great wrongs 
against Indians by reason of local preju- 


BULL. 36*1 


INDIAN RIVER-iNlAttrCO 


609 


dice. The exposure by the association 
of the anomalous conditions in Indian 
Territory resulted in directing the atten¬ 
tion of the people and of Congress to the 
need of better safeguarding the rights of 
the Five Civilized Tribes. 

Considerable attention has been given 
by the association to exposing the 
wrongdoing of Government officials 
where such unfortunately existed, usu¬ 
ally by the class of employees who ob¬ 
tained their positions through political 
influence. The association has also 
strenuously urged that the appointment 
of Indian agents be made solely on the 
ground of efficiency, and it was through 
its efforts that the civil-service rules were 
extended to the Indian service. 

At the time of the organization of the 
Indian Rights Association, Congress, 
owing largely to misunderstanding of the 
Indians’ needs, failed to make adequate 
appropriations for schools, but by inform¬ 
ing the public of the nature and possi¬ 
bilities of this work, a vigorous sentiment 
was created in its favor (see Education). 
The fact that an organization exists solely 
to guard the rights of the Indians acts as 
a powerful deterrent to persons seeking 
the exploitation of the Indians’ estate. 

The association has printed and dis¬ 
tributed about 600,000 copies of various 
publications. Among those that have 
attracted much attention are: The Indian 
Before the Law, by Henry S. Pancoast; 
The Indian Question Past and Present, 
bv Herbert Welsh; Indian Wardship, by 
Charles E. Pancoast; Civilization Among 
the Sioux, by Herbert Welsh; The Mis¬ 
sion Indians, by C. C. Painter; Latest 
Studies on Indian Reservations, by J. B. 
Harrison; and A New Indian Policy, by 
S. M. Brosius. (m. k. s. s. m. b.) 

Indian River. A summer camp of the 
Sitka Indians of Alaska, containing 43 
persons in 1880.—Petroff in Tenth Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 32, 1884. 

‘ ‘ Indian’s Friend. ’ ’ See National Indian 
Association. 

Indian Village. A former Micmac vil¬ 
lage near L. Badger, Fogo co., Newfound¬ 
land.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 56, 1866. 

Industries. See Arts and Industries, and 
the various industries thereunder men¬ 
tioned. 

Inewakhubeadhin (I n ‘ %-waqube-ajx n , 
‘keepers of the mysterious stones’). A 
subgens of the Mandhinkagaghe gens of 
the Omaha.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
228, 1897. 

Ingahame. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village 
on lower Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 63 in 1880. 
50 in 1890. 

Ingahame.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 12,1884. 
Ingahameh.— Ibid, map. Ingahamiut.— 11th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 165, 1893. 

Ingalik (‘ having louse’s eggs’). An Es¬ 
kimo term for Indian, applied first to the 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-39 


Kaiyukhotana of Yukon r., and extended 
by the Russians to all Kaiyukhotana, 
sometimes to Athapascan tribes in gen¬ 
eral. Pop. 635 in 1890: 312 males and 323 
females. The villages are Anvik, Chag- 
vagchat, Chinik, Kagokakat, Kaiakak, 
Kaltag, Khatnotoutze, Khogoltlinde, 
Khulikakat, Klamasqualtin, Koserefski, 
Kunkhogliak, Kutul, Lofka, Nunakhtag- 
amut, Tanakot, Tutago, Taguta, and 
Wolasatux. 

Ingaleek.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 29, 1874. 
Ingaleet. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 26, 1877. 
Ingalete. — Whymper, Alaska, 153, 1868. Ing'- 
aliki.— Dali, op.cit.,25 (Russian form). Ingalit. — 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 5, 1884. Ingekas- 
agmi. —Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d Cong., 
1st sess., 25, 1871. Ingeletes. —Ibid., 31. In'-kal- 
ik.— Dali, op. cit., 25. Inkalite. —Latham in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 183,1848. Inkaliten. — Glasu- 
noff in Baer and Helmersen, Beitrage, i, 120,1839. 
Inkilik.— Schott in Erman, Archiv, vii, 480,1849. 
Inkiliken. —Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 7,1855. 

Ingamatsha. A Chugachigmiut village 
on Chenega id., Prince Williamsd., Alas¬ 
ka; pop. 80 in 1880, 73 in 1890,140 in 1900. 

Chenega.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29,1884. 
Ingamatsha. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 67, 1893. 

Ingdhezhide (‘red dung’). An Omaha 
gens on the Inshtasanda side of the tribal 
circle. 

Ihg^e-jide.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1885. 
Iiigdhe-zhide. —Dorsey in Bull. Philos. Soc. Wash., 
130, 1880. Ing-gera-je-da.— Long, Exped. Rocky 
Mts., i, 327, 1823. In-gra'-zhe-da.— Morgan, Anc. 
Soc., 155, 1877 (trans. ‘red’). 

Inger. A Nunivagmiut Eskimo village 
on Nunivak id., Alaska; pop. 35 in 1890. 

Ingeramut. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. 

Ingichuk. A Chnagmiut village in the 
delta of the Yukon, Alaska; pop. 8 in 1880. 
Ingechuk.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886. 
Ingichuk— Nelson (1878) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Ingkdhunkashinka (‘ small cat ’). A sub¬ 
gens of the Wasapetun gens of the 
Hangka division of the Osage. 

Inji0uh'ka oin'sia. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
234, 1897. 

Inglutaligemiut (IngluldV igemut ). A 
subdivision of Malemiut Eskimo dwell¬ 
ing on Inglutalik r., Alaska.—Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16, 1877. 

Ingmikertok. An East Greenland Eski¬ 
mo village on a small island in Angmagsa- 
lik fjord.—Meddelelser om Gronland, ix, 
379, 1889. 

Ingrakak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil- 
village on lower Yukon r., Alaska. 
Ingrakaghamiut. —Coast Surv. officers, 1898. In¬ 
grakak. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Inguklimiut. An Eskimo tribe occupy¬ 
ing Little Diomede id., Bering strait. 
Their village is Inalik. See OkiogmiuL 

Achjuch-Aliat. —Dali in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 2, 
1878 (Chukchi name). Inalugmiut. —Woolfe in 
11th Census, Alaska, 130, 1893 (given to inhab¬ 
itants of both islands). Ing-uh-kli-mut.— Dali in 
Trans. A. A. A. S., xxxiv, 377, 1885. Inugleet — 
Jackson in Rep. Bur. Education, 145, map, 1894. 
Yi kirga'ul it.—Bogoras, Chukchee, 21,1904 (Chuk¬ 
chi name: ‘large-mouthed,’ referring to their 
labrets). 

Iniahico. A principal Apalachee village 
in 1539, near the site of Tallahassee, Fla. 


610 INIGSALIK-INSHTASANDA [b. a. e. 


Anaica Apalache. —Gentleman of Elvas in Hak¬ 
luyt Soc. Pub., IX, 43, 1851. Anhayca.— Gallatin 
in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., n, 102, 1836. Aniaca 
Apalache. —Shipp, He Soto and Florida, 684, 1881 
(misprint). Iniahico.— Biedma (1544) in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., xx, 57,1841. 

Inigsalik. A southern settlement of the 
Angmagsalingmiut Eskimo of e. Green¬ 
land, where they find soft stone of which 
they fashion pots and lamps.—Meddelel- 
ser om Gronland, x, 368, 1888. 

Inigsuarsak. An Eskimo village in 
lat. 72° 45', w. Greenland.—Science, xi, 
map, 259, 1888. 

Inisiguanin. Mentioned as one of the 
towns or provinces apparently on or in 
the vicinity of the South Carolina coast, 
visited by Ayllon in 1520. 

Inisiguanin.— Oviedo, Hist. Gen. Indias, in, 628, 
1853. Yncignavin. —Barcia, Ensayo, 5, 1723. 

Initkilly. A Tikeramiut Eskimo village 
near the coal veins e. of C. Lisburne, 
Alaska.—Coast Surv. map, 1890. 

Inkalich. The Eskimo name of a divi¬ 
sion of the Kaiyuhkhotanaon Innoko r., 
Alaska. Paltehikatno and Tigshelde were 
probably two of the villages. 

Inchulukhlaites. —Latham, Essays, 271,1860. Inka- 
lichljuaten. —Holmberg quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., 1, 25,1877. Inkiiluchliiaten.— Wran¬ 
gell quoted by Baer and Helmersen, Beitrage, I, 
118, 1839. Inkulukhlaites. —Latham, op. cit, 267. 
Inkuluklaities.— Ibid., 272. 

Inkesabe (‘black shoulder’). An Omaha 
gens of the Hangashenu division, the 
custodian of the tribal pipes. The sub- 
gentes are Iekidhe, Nonhdeitazhi, Wad- 
higizhe, and Watanzizhidedhatazhi. 

Black. —Morgan, Abe. Soc., 155, 1877. Enk-ka-sa- 
ba.— Long, Exped. Kocky Mts., i, 326,1823. Ink- 
ka'-sa-ba.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155, 1877. Inke- 
sabe.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1885. 

Inkillis Tamaha (‘ English town ’). One 
of the former so-called Choctaw Sixtowns 
in the n. w. part of Jasper co., Miss. It 
gave its name to a considerable tract in 
that part of the county and extending 
into Newton co. It is said to have re¬ 
ceived this name from the fact that the 
English made a distribution of property 
there in early times.—Halbert in Ala. 
Hist. Soc., Misc. Coll., i, 382, 1901. 
Killis-tamaha.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1 ,109, 
1884. 

Inkpa. A band of the Wahpeton Sioux, 
living in 1886 at Big Stone lake, Minn., 
and probably at Cormorant pt., Mille 
Lacs, in 1862. 

Big Stone Lake band. —Ind. AIL Rep., 102, 1859. 
Inkpatonwan.— Ashley, letter to Dorsey, Jan. 1886. 
Inpaton. —Ibid. 

Innoka. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on 
Tlegon r., Alaska.—Petroff, Rep. on 
Alaska, 37, 1884. 

Inojey. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Inomassi. A former Dieguenorancheria 
belonging to San Miguel de la Frontera 
mission, w. coast of Lower California, 
about lat. 32° 10'.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 18, 1860. 

Inoschuochn (‘ bear berry’). An Apache 


clan or band at San Carlos agency and Ft 
Apache, Ariz., in 1881. 

Inoschujochen.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 112, 1890. 

Inotuks. Given as a Karok village on 
Klamath r., Cal.; inhabited in 1860. 
E-no-tucks.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860. 

Insanity. See Health and Disease. 

Inscribed tablets. Objects, generally of 
soft stone, usually shale or sandstone, con¬ 
taining various lines and formal characters 
incised or in relief. Some of them are 
undoubtedly prehistoric and susceptible 
of interpretation in the light of aboriginal 
ornamentation and symbolism; others are 
forgeries. While it would perhaps be too 
much to say that there exists n. of Mex¬ 
ico no tablet or other ancient article that 
contains other than a pictorial or picto- 
graphic record, it is safe to assert that no 
authentic specimen has yet been brought 
to public notice. Any object claimed to 

_ be of pre-Columbian age 

iTA4 >\ an( l showing hieroglyphic 
1 ^ la / M or ot ^ er characters that 

denote a degree of culture 

V , higher than that of the 

1 known tribes, is to be 

GR L * V E NG C T R H E T^ A m ETi viewed with suspicion and 
all the circumstances con¬ 
nected with its discovery subjected to 
rigid scrutiny. The same remarks apply 
to engraved copper plates. In the latter 
material, the uneven surface produced by 
natural corrosion is often mistaken for 
attempts at inscriptions. See Grave Creek 
mound , Pictography. 

Consult Farquharson in Proc. Daven¬ 
port Acad. Sci., ii, 1877-80; Fowke, 
Archaeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; McLean, 
Mound Builders, 1879; Mallory in 10th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1893; Mercer, The Lenape 
Stone, 1885; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 
1900; Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-iv, 1851- 
57; Squier and Davis, Ancient Monu¬ 
ments, 1848; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 
632,1894. ( G . f.) 

Inscription Rock. See El Morro. 

Inselnostlinde. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil¬ 
lage of the Jugelnute division on Shage- 
luk r., Alaska.—Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. 
Poss. Am., map, 1842. 

Inshtasanda ( inshta , ‘eye’ or ‘eyes’; 
sanda, an archaic and untranslatable 
term.—Fletcher). One of the 2 divisions 
of the Omaha, containing the Mandhin- 
kagaghe, Tesinde, Tapa, Ingdhezhide, 
and Inshtasanda gentes. 

Grey Eyes.—Jackson (1877) quoted by Donaldson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1885, pt. 2, 74,1886. Ictasanda.— 
Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 219,1885. Inshtasanda. — 
A. C. Fletcher, inf’n, 1906. Ish-ta-sun'-da.—Long, 
Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 325,1823. Istasunda.—Jack- 
son (1877), op. cit., 74. 

Inshtasanda. An Omaha gens, belong¬ 
ing to the Inshtasanda division. The sub¬ 
divisions are Ninibatan, Real Inshtasan¬ 
da, Washetan, and Real Thunder people. 
Ictasanda.—Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1885. 
Inshtasanda.—A. C. Fletcher, inf’n, 1906. Ish- 







BULL. 30] 


INSIACHAK-INVENTION 


611 


da'-sun-da.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155, 1877 (trans. 
‘thunder’). Thunder.—Ibid. Wash-a-tung.—Long, 
Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 327,1823 (mistaking a Han- 
gasnenu gens for the Inshtasanda division). 

Insiachak. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo 
village in the Nushagak district, Alaska; 
pop. 42 in 1890. 

Insiachamiut. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164,1893. 

Intanto. A former Nishinam village in 
the valley of Bear r., Cal.—Powers in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 316, 1877. 

Intapupshe (I n tahpupce / , ‘curved 
stone’). An ancient Osage village on 
upper Osage r., above the mouth of Sac 
r., Mo.—Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1883. 

Intatchkalgi (‘people of the beaver 
dams.’—Gatschet). A former Yuchi 
town on Opihlako cr., 28 m. above its 
junction with Flint r., probably in Dooly 
co., Ga. It contained 14 families in 1796. 

Intatchkalgi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 132, 
1884. In-tuch-cul-gau.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 
62, 1848. 

Intenleiden. A Kaiyuhkhotana village 
of the Jugelnute division on the e. bank 
of Shageluk r., Alaska. 

Iltenleiden.—Zagoskin quoted by I’etroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. Imtelleiden.—Zagoskin 
in Nouv. Ann. Voy.. 5th s., XXI, map, 1850. In¬ 
tenleiden.—Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. Am., 
map, 1842. 

Interpreters. See Agency system. 

Intietook ( Inti-etook ). Given by Ross 
(Advent., 290,1847) as an Okinagan tribe. 

Intimbich. A Mono band in Mill Creek 
valley, some miles s. of its junction with 
Kings r., Cal. 

Em-tim'-bitch.—Merriam in Science, xix, 916, 
June 15, 1904. Entimbich.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 
1906 (correct form). Eu-tem-pe-che’s. — Wessells 
(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 
32, 1857. In-tem-peach-es.—Johnston (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 61,32d Cong., 1st sess., 22,1852. In- 
tim-peach.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782,1899. 
In-tim-peches.—Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 254,1853. Ytimpabiches.— 
Dominguez and Escalante (1776) in Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 2d s., I, 537, 1854. 

Inuarudligang. A race of dwarfs who 
figure in the mythology of the Central 
Eskimo. They are supposed to inhabit 
cliffs that overhang the sea.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 640, 1888. 

Inugsiut. An Eskimo settlement in e. 
Greenland, about lat. 61° 50 / ; pop. 32 in 
1884.—Das Ausland, 163, 1886. 

Inugsulik. A summer settlement of the 
Aivilirmiut Eskimo on the n. coast of 
Repulse bay, n. of Hudson bay. 
Enook-sha-lig.—Ross, Second Voy., 430, 1835. 
Inugsulik.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Inuhksoyistamiks ( Tn-uhk'-so-yi-stam- 
iks, ‘long tail lodge poles’). A band of 
the Kainah division of theSiksika.—Grin¬ 
ned, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 209, 1892. 

Imiissuitmiut. An Eskimo tribe that 
occupied Depot id. and the adjacent coast 
of Hudson bay before 1800. The last 
descendant died some years ago.—Boas 
in Bull. Am, Mus. Nat. Hist., xv, 6,1901. 

Inuksikahkopwaiks ( I-nuk-sV-kali-ko- 
pwa-tJcSj ‘small brittle fat’). A division 
of the Piegan Siksika.—Grinnell, Black- 
foot Lodge Tales, 209, 225, 1892. 


Inuksik3 (‘small robes’). A former 
division of the Piegan Siksika. 

A-miks'-eks.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 264,1862. I-nuks'-iks.—Grinnell, Blackfoot 
Lodge Tales, 209, 1892. Little Robes.—Culbertson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 1851. Small Robes.— 
Grinnell, op. cit., 225. 

Invention. In the language of the Pat¬ 
ent Office “an invention is something 
new and useful.” The word applies to 
the apparatus of human activities and to 
the processes involved. The life of cul¬ 
ture from the lowest savagery to the 
highest civilization is an increase in the 
artificialities of life. There were no tribes 
in America without culture, and the low¬ 
est of them had inventions. For instance, 
the Fuegians had learned to convert the 
fish-spear into a barbed harpoon by fas¬ 
tening the detachable head, which was 
set loosely in the socket, to the end of a 
shaft by means of a short piece of raw- 
hide. They had also invented a canoe of 
bark made in three pieces. When they 
wished to move to a new bay or inlet 
between which and the last there was a 
dangerous headland, they could take the 
canoe apart, carry it over the intervening 
mountain, and unite the parts by lashing, 
covering the joints with pitch. The most 
ingenious savages on the continent, how¬ 
ever, were the Eskimo, all of whose ap¬ 
paratus used in their various activities 
show innumerable additions and changes, 
which are inventions. They lived sur¬ 
rounded by the largest animals in the 
world, which they were able to capture 
by their ingenuity. Their snow domes, 
waterproof clothing, skin canoes, sinew- 
backed bows, snowshoes, traps and snares 
in myriad varieties, some of which 
they shared with neighboring. Indian 
tribes, amaze those who study them. 
Among other ingenious devices which 
would pass under the name of inventions 
are: the use of skids by the N. W. coast 
natives for rolling logs into place in build¬ 
ing their immense communal dwellings; 
the employment of the parbuckle to assist 
in the work of moving logs; the use of a 
separate fly of rawhide at the top of the 
tipi, which could be moved by means of 
a pole with one end resting on the ground, 
so that the wind would not drive the 
smoke back into the tipi; driving a peg 
of known length into the side of a canoe 
as a gauge for the adzman in chipping out 
the inside; the boiling of food in baskets 
or utensils of wood, gourd, or rawhide, by 
means of hot stones; the attachment of 
inflated sealskins to the end of a harpoon 
line to impede the progress of game 
through the water after it was struck; the 
sinew-backed bow, which enabled the 
Eskimo hunter to employ brittle wood 
for the rigid portion and sinew string for 
propulsion; the continuous motion spin¬ 
dle; the reciprocating drill; the sand saw 
for hard stone, and all sorts of signaling 
and sign language. See Arts and Indus - 


612 


INYAHA-IOWA 


[b. a. e. 


tries and Implements , and the separate 
articles cited thereunder. 

Consult Mason (1) Aboriginal Ameri¬ 
can Mechanics, Mem. Internat. Cong. 
Anthrop., Chicago, 1894; (2) Origins of 
Invention, 1895; McGuire, A Study of 
the Primitive Methods of Drilling, Rep. 
U. S. Nat. Mus. 1894, 1896; Holmes, De¬ 
velopment of the Shaping Arts, Smith- 
son. Rep. 1902. See also the various 
Reports of the Bureau of American Eth¬ 
nology. (o. t. m. ) 

Inyaha. A Diegueno village in w. San 
Diego co., Cal. Its inhabitants, who 
numbered 53 in 1883, 32 in 1891, and 42 
in 1902, occupy a reservation comprising 
280 acres of poor land, which has been 
patented to them. 

Anaha. —Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 24, 
1883. Anahuac. —Ind.Aft.Rep., 175,1902. Ineja.— 
Ibid., II, 72, 1891. Injaya.— Ibid., 146, 1903. In¬ 
yaha. —Ibid., 175, 1902. 

Inyancheyaka-atonwan (‘ village at the 
dam or rapids’). A Wahpeton Sioux 
band or division residing in 1859 at Little 
Rapids, Sand Prairie, and Minnesota r., 
not far from Belleplaine, Minn. Mazo- 
mani was their chief in 1862. 
l ll ya"-tceyaka-ato I ‘wa 11 . —Dorsey (after Ashley) in 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 216, 1897. Little Falls Band.— 
Ind. All. Rep. 1859. 102, 1860. Little Rapids.— 
Parker, Minn. Handbk., 140,1857. Lower Wahpe¬ 
ton. —Ind. All. Rep. 1859, 102,1860. Lower Wakpa- 
tons.— Minn. Hist. Coll., hi, 250,1880. 

Inyangmani. A AVahpeton Sioux band, 
named after its chief, living on Yellow 
Medicine cr., Minn., in 1862. 

Inyangmani. —Ashley, letter to J. O. Dorsey, 
1886. Yellow Medicine’s band.— McKusick in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1863, 315, 1864. 

Inyanhaoin (‘musselshell earring’). A 
band of the Miniconjou Teton Sioux. 
I-na-ha'-o-win.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 376, 1862 (trans. ‘stone earring band’). 
I n ya n -ha-oi n .— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 
1897. Ipyap-h-oip.— Ibid. Shell earring band.— 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850,142, 1851. 

Iokwa. See Hiaqua. 

Ionata. Apparently two former Chu- 
mashan villages connected with Santa 
Ines mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal. 
Ionata. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861, Jo- 
natas. —Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., pt. iii, 553, 
1876. 

Ioqua. See Hiaqua. 

Iowa (‘sleepy ones’). One of the south¬ 
western Siouan tribes included by J. O. 
Dorsey with the Oto and Missouri in his 
Chiwere group. Traditional and linguis¬ 
tic evidence proves that the Iowa sprang 
from the Winnebago stem, which appears 
to have been the mother stock of some 
other of the southwestern Siouan tribes; 
but the closest affinity of the Iowa is with 
the Oto and Missouri, the difference in 
language being merely dialectic. Iowa 
chiefs informed Dorsey in 1883 that their 
people and the Oto, Missouri, Omaha, 
and Ponca “once formed part of the 
Winnebago nation.” According to the 
traditions of these tribes, at an early pe¬ 
riod they came with the Winnebago from 


their priscan home n. of the great lakes, 
but that the Winnebago stopped on the 
shore of a great lake (L. Michigan), at¬ 
tracted by the abundant fish, while the 
others continued southwestward to the 
Mississippi. Here another band, the 
Iowa, separated from the main group, 
“and received the name of Pahoja, or 
Gray Snow, which they still retain, but 
are known to the w T hite people by the 
name of Ioways, or Aiaouez. The first 
stopping place of the Iowa, after parting 
from the Winnebago, as noted in 
tradition, appears to have been on RcTdk 
r., ill., near its junction with the Missis¬ 
sippi. Another tradition places them 
farther n v In 1848 a map was drawn by 
a member of the tribe showing their 
movements from the mouth of Rock r. to 
the place where they were then living. 
According to this their first move was to 
the banks of Des Moines r., some distance 
above its mouth; the second was to the 
vicinity of the pipestone quarry in s. w. 
Minnesota, although on the map it was 
placed erroneously high up on the Mis¬ 
souri; thence they descended to the 
mouth of Platte r., and later moved suc¬ 
cessively to the headwaters of Little 
Platte r., Mo.; to the w. bank of the Mis¬ 
sissippi, slightly above the mouth of Des 
Moines r., a short distance farther up on 
the same side of the Mississippi; again 
southwestwardly, stopping on Salt r., 
thence going to its extreme headwaters; 
to the upper part of Chariton r.; to 
Grand r.; thence to Missouri r., opposite 
Ft Leavenworth, where they lived at the 
time the map was drawn. These succes¬ 
sive movements, which are of compara¬ 
tively recent date, are generally accepted 
as substantially correct. The Sioux have 
a tradition (Williamson in Minn. Hist. 
Coll., i, 296) that w r hen their ancestors 
first came to the falls of St Anthony, the 
Iowa occupied the country about the 
mouth of Minnesota r., while the Chey¬ 
enne dwelt higher up on the same stream. 
The Iowa appear to have been in the 
vicinity of the mouth of Blue Flarth r., 
Minn., just before the arrival there of Le 
Sueur in 1701 for the purpose of erecting 
his fort. His messengers, sent to invite 
them to settle in the vicinity of the fort 
because they were good farmers, found 
that they had recently removed toward 
Missouri r., near the Maha (Omaha), who 
dwelt in that region. The Sioux informed 
Le Sueur that Blue Earth r. belonged to 
the Scioux of the West (Dakota), the Aya- 
vois (Iowas), and Otoctatas (Oto), who 
lived a little farther off. Father Marest 
(La Harpe, Jour., 39, 1851) says that the 
Iowa were about this date associated with 
the Sioux in their war against the Sauk. 
This does not accord with the general 
tradition that the Dakota were always 


BULL. 30] 


IOWA 


613 


enemies of the Iowa, nevertheless the 
name Nadoessi Mascouteins seems to have 
been applied to the Iowa by the early 
missionaries because of their relations for 
a time with the Sioux. Pere Andre thus 
designated them in 1676, when they were 
living 200 leagues w. of Green Bay, Wis. 
Perrot (Mem., 63, 1864) apparently locat¬ 
ed them in the vicinity of the Pawnee, 
on the plains, in 1685. Father Membr6 
(1680) placed the Anthoutantas (Oto) 
and Nadouessious Maskoutens (Iowa) 
about 130 leagues from the Illinois, in 3 
grbat villages built near a river which 
empties into the river Colbert (Missis¬ 
sippi) on the w. side, above the Illinois, 
almost opposite the mouth of the Wis¬ 
consin. He appears to locate a part of the 
Ainoves (perhaps intended for Aioiies), 
on the w. side of Milwaukee r., in Wis¬ 
consin. On Marquette’s map (1674-79) 
the Pahoutet (lo wa), the Otontanta (Oto), 
and Maha (Omaha) are placed on Mis¬ 
souri r., evidently by mere guess. La 
Salle knew of the Oto and the Iowa, and 
in his letter in regard to Hennepin, Aug. 
22,1682, mentions them under the names 
Otoutanta and Aiounouea, but his state¬ 
ment that Accault, one of his company, 
knew the languages of these tribes is 
doubtful. It is probable that in 1700, 
when Le Sueur furnished them with their 
first firearms, the Iowa resided on the 
extreme headwaters of Des Moines r., 
but it appears from this explorer’s jour¬ 
nal that they and the Oto removed and 
“established themselves toward the Mis¬ 
souri river, near the Maha.” Jefferys 
(Fr. Dom. in Am., 1761) placed them on 
the e. side of the Missouri, w. of the 
sources of Des Moines r., above the Oto, 
who were on the w. side of the Missouri 
and below the Omaha; but in the text 
of his work they are located on the Mis¬ 
sissippi in lat. 43° 3(K. In 1804, accord¬ 
ing to Lewis and Clark (Orig. Jour., vi, 
91-92, 1905), they occupied a single vil¬ 
lage of 200 warriors or 800 souls, 18 
leagues up Platte r., on the s. e. side, 
although they formerly lived on the Mis¬ 
souri above the Platte. They conducted 
traffic with traders from St Louis at their 
posts on Platte and Grand Nemaha r., as 
well as at the Iowa village, the chief trade 
being skins of beaver, otter, faccoon, deer, 
and bear. They also cultivated corn, 
beans, etc. In 1829 (Rep. Sec. War) they 
were on Platte r., Iowa., 15 m. from the 
Missouri state line. Schoolcraft (1853) 
placed them on Nemaha r., Nebr., a mile 
above its mouth. By 1880 they were 
brought under the agencies. 

The visiting and marriage customs of 
the Iowa did not differ from those of 
cognate tribes, nor was their management 
of children unlike that of the Dakota, 
the Omaha, and others. They appear 


to have been cultivators of the soil at an 
early date, as Le Sueur tried to persuade 
them to fix their village near Ft 
L’Huillier because they were “indus¬ 
trious and accustomed to cultivate the 
earth.” Pike says that they cultivated 
corn, but proportionately not so much as 
the Sauk and Foxes. He also affirms 
that the Iowa were less civilized than the 
latter. Father Andre (Jes. Rel., 1676, 
Thwaites ed., lx, 203, 1900) says that al¬ 
though their village was very large, they 
were poor, their greatest wealth consist¬ 
ing of “ox-hides and red calumets,” in¬ 
dicating that the Iowa early manufactured 
and traded catlinite pipes. Some small 
mounds in Minnesota and Iowa have 
been ascribed to them by two distinct 
traditions. 



IOWA. (david tohee) 


In 1824 they ceded all their lands in 
Missouri, and in 1836 were assigned a 
reservation in n. e. Kansas, from which a 
part of the tribe moved later to another 
tract in central Oklahoma, which by 
agreement in 1890 was allotted to them 
in severalty, the surplus acreage being 
opened to settlement by whites. 

Various estimates of the population of 
the Iowa at different dates are as follows: 
In 1760, 1,100 souls; by Lewis and Clark 
in 1804, 800, smallpox having carried off 
100 men besides women and children in 
1803; the Secretary of War gives the num¬ 
ber in 1829 as 1,000; Catlin in 1832 at 
about 1,400, but in 1836 at 992; the In¬ 
dian Affairs Report of 1843 gives their 
number as 470; the number at the Pota- 
watomi and Great Nemaha agency in 






614 


IPEC—IPERSUA 


[b. a. e. 


Kansas was 143 in 1884, 138 in 1885, 143 
in 1886, and 225 in 1905. At the latter 
date they were under the jurisdiction of 
the Kickapoo School. At the Sauk and 
Fox agency, Okla., in 1885 they numbered 
88; in 1901, 88; in 1905, 89. 

The Iowa camp circle was divided into 
half circles, occupied by two phratries of 
four gentes each. These were: 

First phratry. (1) Tunanpin, Black 
Bear; (2) Michirache, Wolf; (3) Che- 
ghita, Eagle and Thunder-being; (4) 
Khotachi, Elk. 

Second phratry. (5) Pakhtha, Beaver; 
(6) Ruche, Pigeon; (7) Arukhwa, Buf¬ 
falo; (8) Wakan, Snake; (9) Mankoke, 
Owl. The last-named gens is extinct. 

There was an Iowa village called Wolf 
village. 

SeeCatlin, Iowa Inds., 1844; Dorsey (1) 
in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894, and 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1897, (2) Trans. Anthrop. Soc. 
Wash., ii, 1883; Hamilton and Irvin, 
Ioway Gram., 1848; Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; Lewis and Clark, 
Orig. Jour., i-viii, 1904-05; Long, Exped. 
Rocky Mts., i, 1823; Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
i, 1872; Sen. Doc. 452, 57th Cong., 1st 
sess., ii, 1903. (j. o. d. c. t. ) 

Agones. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816. 
Agouais. —De Ligney (1726) inWis. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
I, 22, 1854. Agoual.— Chauvignerie (1736) quoted 
by Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes, in, 557,1853. Agoues. — 
Hutchins (1764), ibid. Ah-e-o-war.— Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark, vi, 91, 1905. Aiaoua. —Perrot 
(1689), M6m., 196, 1864. Aiaouais— Ibid., index. 
Aiaouez.— Jefferys, French Dom. in Am., I, 139, 
1761. Aiauway.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark 
(1804), I, 61, 1904. Aiavvis. —Le Sueur quoted by 
Ramsey in Minn. Hist. Coll., 1,45,1872. Aieways.— 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), I, 45, 1904. 
Aijoues. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 522, 1853. 
Ainones.— Membre (1680) quoted by Hayden, Eth¬ 
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 445, 1862. Ainoves. — 
Hennepin, New Discov., 132, 1698. Aioaez. — 
Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., I, 19, note, 43, 
1893. Aiouez.— Charlevoix (1723) in Margry, D£c., 
vi, 526, 1886. Aiounouea.— Hennepin (1680-82) in 
Margry, D6c., II, 258,1877. Aiowais. —Pike, Trav., 
134, 1811. Aisnous. —McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, III, 80, 1854. Ajaouez.— Jefferys, Fr. Dom. 
Am., pt 1, map 1, 1761. Ajouas. —Smet, Miss, de 
l’Oregon, 108, 1848. Ajoues.— Bowles, map Am., 
ca. 1750. Ajouez. —Perrot, M6m., index, 1864. 
Anjoues. —Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 155, 1824. 
Aoais. —N. Y. Doc.Col.Hist., x,630,1858. Aonays.— 
Smet, Letters, 38, note, 1843 (misprint). Aouas. — 
Cabe<?a de Vaca misquoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, Ii, 37,1852 (error). Avauwais. —Lewis and 
Clark, Trav., 14, 1807. Avoy. —Neill, Hist. Minn., 
200, 1858. Avoys. —Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 32, 1854. 
Ayahwa. —Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., I. 20, 
note, 1893. Ayauais. —Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. 
Ayauvai.— Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., I, 19, 
note, 1893. Ayauwais. — Lewis and Clark, Discov., 
17,1806. Ayauwas. —Lapham, Blossom, and Dous- 
man, Inds. Wis., 3, 1870. Ayauwaus. —Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark, 1 ,91,1904. Ayauway. —Ibid., 45. 
Ayavois. —La Harpe and Le Sueur(1699)quoted by 
Long, Exped. St Peter's R., ii, 320,1824. Ayawai. — 
Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 19, note, 1893. 
Ayaways.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., H, 442, 1814. 
Ayeouais. —Neill, Hist. Minn., 197,1858. AyeSais. — 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 608,1858. Ayoa. —Martin, 
Hist. La., 301, 1882. Ayoes. —Perrot (1689) in 
Minn. Hist. Coll., II, pt 2, 24,1864. Ayoois.— Bien¬ 
ville (1722) in Margry, D6c., vi, 407, 1886. 
Ayoouais.— Beauharnois and Hocquart (1731) in 
Margry, D6c., vi, 570, 1886. Ayooues. —Iberville 
(1702) quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn., 172, 1858. 


Ayo8ois. —N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 1055, 1855. 
Ayoua. — Adelung, Mithridates, ill, 271, 1816. 
Ayouahs. —Domenech, Deserts N. Am., Ii, 34,1860. 
Ayoues.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 173, 1858. Ayouez. — 
Lamothe Cadillac (1695) in Margry, D£c., v, 124, 
1883. Ayouwa.- Pike, Trav., map, 1811. Ayou- 
wais. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 49, 1806. Ayou- 
ways ._Ibid., 29. Ayovai. — Coues, Lewis and 
Clark Exped., I, 20, note, 1893. Ayovois.— Bien¬ 
ville (1722) in Margry, D6c., VI, 396, 1886. 
Ayowa. —Gatschet, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 27,1878 
(Kansa name). Ayowas. —Maximilian, Travels, 
507, 1843. Ayoway— Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
1,487,1817. Ayuhba.— Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 
278,1852. Ayuhuwahak. —Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. 
E. (Fox name). Ayukba. —Williamson in Minn. 
Hist. Coll., I, 299, 1872. Ayuwas.— Brackenridge, 
Views of La., 83, 1815. Dusty Nose. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 262, 1853. Ho-wah. —Ramsey in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 74,1850 (Mdewakanton name). 
Iawai. —Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., I, 20, 
note, 1893. Iawas. —La Harpe and Le Sueur 
(1699) quoted by Long, Exped. S. Peter’s R., ii, 
320,1824. Iaways.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, 
vi, 91, 1905. Ihoway. —Sen.Doc. 21,18thCong.,2d 
sess., 5, 1825. Ioewaig. —Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830 
Ottawa name). Iowa. —Pike, Trav., 134, 1811. 
oway. —Pike, Exped., 112, 1810. Iyakhba. —Wil¬ 
liamson in Minn. Geol. Rep. for 1884, 106 (Santee 
Dakota name). Iyakhwa. —Ibid. (Teton name). 
Iyuliba. —Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 278, 1852 
(trans. ‘sleepyones’). Jowai. —Annde la Propag. 
de la Foi, in, 569, 1828. Jowas.— Pike, Trav., 123, 
1811. Joways. —Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. 
Hist. Coll., 2d s. ii, 39, 1814. Maqude. —Dorsey, 
pegiha MS. Diet., B. A. E. 1878 (Omaha and Ponca 
name). Minowas. —Rafinesque in Marshall, Hist. 
Ky., i, 28,1824 (confounding Iowa with Missouri). 
Nadoessi Mascouteins. —Jes. Rel. 1676-77, Thwaites 
ed., lx, 203. 1900. Nadouessi-Maskoutens. —Per¬ 
rot, M£m., index, 1864. Nadouessioux des prai¬ 
ries. — Ibid., 237. Nadouessioux Maskoutens. — 
Minn. Hist. Coll., II, pt. 2, 30, note, 1864 
(‘Sioux of the prairies’: Algonkin name). 
Ne persa.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 91, 
1905 (i. e., Nez Percds; given as traders’ nick¬ 
name). Ovas.—Barcia, Ensayo, 238,1723. Oyoa. — 
Du Lac, Voy. dans les Louisianes, 232, 1805. Pa- 
ho-cha. —Hamilton in Trans. Nebr. Hist. Soc., I, 
47, 1885 (trans. ‘dusty men’). Pa-ho-dje. —Maxi¬ 
milian, Trav., 507, *1843 (trans. ‘dust-noses’). 
Pa-ho-ja.—Long. Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 339, 1823 
(trans. ‘ gray snow ’). Pah8tet.—Marquette (1673) 
in Shea, Discov., 268, map, 1852. Pahucae.— Ham¬ 
ilton and Irwin, Ioway Gram., 17, 1848. Pa-hu- 
cha.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 262, 1853. 
Pa-kuh'-tha.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. 
Paote.—La Salle (1682) in Margry, D£e., n, 215, 
1877. Paoutees.—La Harpe, from Le Sueur’s Jour. 
(1700) in Shea, Early Voy., 93, 1861. Paoutes. — 
Le Sueur (1700) in Margry, D£c., vi, 70, 1886. 
Paoutez.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Paq- 
octe.—Dorsey in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., n, 
10, 1883. Pa'-qo-tce. —Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Pa'-qu-te. —Dorsey. 
Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E.. 1881 (Quapaw name). 
Paqu^se.— Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 
(Osage name). Pashohan.—Gatschet, Pawnee 
MS.. B. A. E. (Pawnee name). Passinchan. —Doc. 
1720 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., v, 
203, 1890. Pauhoochees.—McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, II, 209, 1854. Paxodshe. —Gatschet, 
Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 27, 1878 (Kansa name). 
Pierced Noses.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 339, 
1823. Wa-qotc'.— Dorsey, Winnebago MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1886 (W’innebago name). Yahowa.— 
Beltrami, Pilgrimage, ii, 151, 1828. Yoways.—De 
P Isle, map of La., in Neill, Hist. Minn., 164,1858. 
Yuahes.— Iberville (1700) in Margry, D6c., iv, 440, 
1880(identical?). Zaivovois.—Haldimand,accord¬ 
ing to Catlin, quoted by Donaldson in Smithson. 
Rep. for 1885, pt. 2, 145, 1886. 

Ipec. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara mission, Cal.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Ipersua. A summer village of the Ut- 
kiavimiut Eskimo in n. Alaska.—Mur¬ 
doch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1892. 


BULL. 301 


IPIK—IROQUOIAN FAMILY 


615 


Ipik. An Eskimo village in s. w. Green¬ 
land, lat. 60° 31/.—Meddelelser om Gron- 
land, xvi, map, 1896. 

Ipisogi. A subordinate settlement of 
the Upper Creek town Oakfuski, on a 
creek of the same name which enters 
the Tallapoosa from the e., opposite 
Oakfuski, Ala. According to Hawkins it 
had 40 settlers in 1799. 

E-pe-sau-gee. — Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 47, 1848. 
Ipisogi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1 ,133,1884. 

Ipnot. A Nunatogmiut Eskimo village 
at C. Thomson, Alaska; pop. 40 in 1880. 

Ip-Not.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 59,1884. 

Ipoksimaiks ( F-pok-si-maiks, ‘fat roast¬ 
ers’). A division of the Piegan. * 
E-pofi'-si-miks.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 264,1862 (= ‘the band that fries fat’). Fat 
Roasters.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225, 
1892. Ih-po'-se-ma.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171, 1877 
(= ‘webfat’). I'-pok-si-maiks.—Grinnell.op. cit., 
209. 

Ippo ( Ip-po / , ‘mesa’). A Tarahumare 
rancheria in Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lum- 
holtz, inf n, 1894. 

Iptugik. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Iratae. A village, presumably Costa- 
noan, formerly connected with San Juan 
Bautista mission, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Nov. 23, 1860. 

Irihibano (‘ war councilors’). The pro¬ 
genitors of the Fish clan of the ancient 
Timucua of Florida.—Pareja (ca. 1613) 
quoted by Gatschet in Am. Philos. Soc. 
Proc., xvii, 492, 1878. 

Iron. The use of iron by the American 
aborigines and especially by the tribes n. 
of Mexico was very limited as compared 
with their use of copper. The compact 
ores were sometimes used, and were flaked, 
pecked, or ground into shape, as were 
the harder varieties of stone. Imple¬ 
ments, ornaments, and symbolic objects 
of hematite ore are found in great num¬ 
bers in mounds and in burial places and 
on dwelling sites over a large part of the 
country. Since smelting was unknown to 
the natives, the only form of metallic iron 
available to them and sufficiently malle¬ 
able to be shaped by hammering is of 
meteoric origin, and numerous examples 
of implements shaped from it have been 
recovered from the mounds. A series of 
celts of ordinary form, along with partly 
shaped pieces and natural masses of the 
metal, were found by Moorehead in a 
mound of the Hopewell group near Chilli- 
cothe, Ohio, and these are now in the Field 
Museum of Natural History, Chicago. The 
Turner mounds, in Hamilton co., Ohio, 
have perhaps yielded the most interest¬ 
ing relics of this class. Putnam describes 
these, in enumerating the various objects 
found on one of the earthen altars, as 
follows: “But by far the most important 
things found on this altar were the sev¬ 
eral masses of meteoric iron and the orna¬ 
ments made from this metal. One of 


them is half of a spool-shaped ear orna¬ 
ment, like those made of copper with 
which it was associated. Another ear 
ornament of copper is covered with a thin 
plating of iron, in the same manner as 
others were covered with silver. Three 
of the masses of iron have been more or 
less hammered into bars, as if for the pur¬ 
pose of making some ornament or imple¬ 
ment, and another is apparently in the 
natural shape in which it was found” 
(16th Rep. Peabody Museum, hi, 171, 
1884; see also Putnam in Proc. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 349,1883). Ross records the fact 
that the Eskimo of Smith sd. used mete¬ 
oric iron. Small bits of this metal beaten 
out and set in a row in an ivory handle 
made effective knives. See Hematite , 
Metal work. 

Consult Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xn, 285, 1899; Ross, Voyage of 
Discovery, 1819; Thomas in 12th Rep. 
B. A. E., 319, 336, 1894. (w. h. h.) 

Iroquoian Family. A linguistic stock 
consisting of the following tribes and 
tribal groups: the Hurons composed of 
the Attignaouantan (Bear people), the 
Attigneenongnahac (Cord people), the 
Arendahronon (Rock people), theTohon- 
taenrat (Atahontaenrat or Tohontaenrat, 
White-eared or Deer people), the Weii- 
rohronon, the Ataronchronon, and the 
Atonthrataronon (Otter people, an Al- 
gonquian tribe); the Tionontati or To¬ 
bacco people or nation; the confedera¬ 
tion of the Attiwendaronk or Neutrals, 
composed of the Neutrals proper, the 
Aondironon, the Ongniarahronon, and 
the Atiragenratka (Atiraguenrek); the 
Conkhandeenrhonon; the Iroquois con¬ 
federation composed of the Mohawk, 
the Oneida, the Onondaga, the Cayuga, 
and the Seneca, with the Tuscarora after 
1726; and in later times the incorporated 
remnants of a number of alien tribes, 
such as the Tutelo, the Saponi, the Nanti- 
coke, the Conoy, and the Muskwaki or 
Foxes; the Conestoga or Susquehanna of 
at least three tribes, of which one was 
the Akhrakouaehronon or Atrakouaeh- 
ronon; the Erie or Cat nation of at least 
two allied peoples; the Tuscarora con¬ 
federation, composed of several leagued 
tribes, the names of which are pow un¬ 
known; the Nottaway; the Meherrin; 
and the Cherokee composed of at least 
three divisions, the Elati, the Middle 
Cherokee, and the A tali; and the Onnon- 
tioga consisting of the Iroquois-Catholic 
seceders on the St Lawrence. 

Each tribe was an independent political 
unit, except those which formed leagues 
in which the constituent tribes, while en¬ 
joying local self-government, acted jointly 
in common affairs. For this reason there 
was no general name for themselves com¬ 
mon to all the tribes. 

Jacques Cartier, in 1534, met on the 


616 


IROQUOIAN FAMTLY 


fB. A. E. 


shore of Gasp6 basin people of the Iro- 
quoian stock, whom in the following year 
he again encountered in their home on 
the site of the city of Quebec, Canada. 
He found both banks of the St Lawrence 
above Quebec, as far as the site of Mon¬ 
treal, occupied by people of this family. 
He visited the villages Hagonchenda, 
Hochelaga, Hochelayi, Stadacona, and 
Tutonaguy. This was the first known 
habitat of an Iroquoian people. Cham¬ 
plain found these territories entirely de¬ 
serted 70 years later, and Lescarbot found 
people roving over this area speaking an 
entirely different language from that re¬ 
corded by Cartier. He believed that this 
change of languages was due to “a de¬ 
struction of people,” because, he writes, 
“some years ago the Iroquois assembled 
themselves to the number of 8,000 men 
and destroyed all their enemies, whom 
they surprised in their enclosures.” The 
new language which he recorded was Al- 
gonquian, spoken by bands that passed 
over this region on warlike forays. 

The early occupants of the St Lawrence 
were probably the Arendahronon and To- 
hontaenrat, tribes of the Hurons. Their 
lands bordered on those of the Iroquois, 
whose territory extended westward to 
that of the Neutrals, neighbors of the 
Tionontati and western Huron tribes 
to the n. and the Erie to the s. and w. 
The Conestoga occupied the middle and 
lower basin of the Susquehanna, s. of the 
Iroquois. The n. Iroquoian area, which 
Algonquian tribes surrounded on nearly 
every side, therefore embraced nearly the 
entire valley of the St Lawrence, the 
basins of L. Ontario and L. Erie, the s. e. 
shores of L. Huron and Georgian bay, 
all of the present New York state except 
the lower Hudson valley, all of central 
Pennsylvania, and the shores of Chesa¬ 
peake bay in Maryland as far as Choptank 
and Patuxent rs. In the S. the Cherokee 
area, surrounded by Algonquian tribes on 
the n., Siouan on the e., and Muskhogean 
and Uchean tribes on the s. and w., em¬ 
braced the valleys of the Tennessee and 
upper Savannah rs. and the mountainous 
parts of Virginia, the Carolinas, and Ala¬ 
bama. Separated from the Cherokee by 
the territory of the eastern Siouan tribes 
was the area occupied by the Tuscarora 
in e. North Carolina and by the Meherrin 
and Nottoway n. of them in s. e. Virginia. 

The northern Iroquoian tribes, espe¬ 
cially the Five Nations so called, were sec¬ 
ond to no other Indian people n. of Mex¬ 
ico in political organization, statecraft, 
and military prowess. Their leaders were 
astute diplomats, as the wily French 
and English statesmen with whom they 
treated soon discovered. In war they 
practised ferocious cruelty toward their 
prisoners, burning even their unadopted 


women and infant prisoners; but, far from 
being a race of rude and savage warriors, 
they were a kindly and affectionate peo¬ 
ple, full of keen sympathy for kin and 
friends in distress, kind and deferential 
to their women, exceedingly fond of their 
children, anxiously striving for peace and 
good will among men, and profoundly 
imbued with a just reverence for the con¬ 
stitution of their commonwealth and for 
its founders. Their wars were waged 
primarily to secure and perpetuate their 
political life and independence. The 
fundamental principles of their confed¬ 
eration, persistently maintained for cen¬ 
turies by force of arms and by compacts 
with otherpeoples, were based primarily 
on blood relationship, and they shaped 
and directed their foreign and internal 
polity in consonance with these princi pies. 
The underlying motive for the institution 
of the Iroquois league was to secure uni¬ 
versal peace and welfare {nd' sken / no n ' > ) 
among men by the recognition and en¬ 
forcement of the forms of civil govern¬ 
ment (ne 7/ ga'Vhwiio) through the direc¬ 
tion and regulation of personal and public 
conduct and thought in accordance with 
beneficent customs and council degrees; 
by the stopping of bloodshed in the 
bloodfeud through the tender of the pre¬ 
scribed price for the killing of a cotribes¬ 
man; by abstaining from eating human 
flesh; and, lastly, through the mainte¬ 
nance and necessary exercise of power 
(ne ,; gti’shtisdo ni/ sa’), not only military 
but also magic power believed to be em¬ 
bodied in the forms of their ceremonial 
activities. The tender by the homicide 
and his family for the murder or killing 
by accident of a cotribesman was twenty 
strings of wampum—ten for the dead per¬ 
son, and ten for the forfeited life of the 
homicide. 

The religious activities of these tribes 
expressed themselves in the worship of 
all environing elements and bodies and 
many creatures of a teeming fancy, which, 
directly or remotely affecting their wel¬ 
fare, were regarded as man-beings or an¬ 
thropic personages endowed with life, 
volition, and peculiar individual orenda , 
or magic power. In the practice of this 
religion, ethics or morals, as such, far 
from having a primary had only a second¬ 
ary, if any, consideration. The status 
and personal relations of the personages 
of their pantheon were fixed and regu¬ 
lated by rules and customs similar to those 
in vogue in the social and political organ¬ 
ization of the people, and there was, 
therefore, among at least the principal 
gods, a kinship system patterned on that 
of the people themselves. 

The mental superiority of the Hurons 
(q- v.) over their Algonquian neighbors 
is frequently mentioned by the early 


BULL. SO] 


IROQUOIS 


617 


French missionaries. A remainder of the 
Tionontati, with a few refugee Hurons 
among them, having fled to the region of 
the upper lakes, along with certain Ottawa 
tribes, to escape the Iroquois invasion in 
1649, maintained among their fellow ref¬ 
ugees a predominating influence. This 
was largely because, like other Iroquoian 
tribes, they had been highly organized 
socially and politically, and were there¬ 
fore trained in definite parliamentary cus¬ 
toms and procedure. The fact that, al¬ 
though but a small tribe, the Hurons 
claimed and exercised the right of light¬ 
ing the council fire at all general gather¬ 
ings, shows the esteem in which they 
were held by their neighbors. The Chero¬ 
kee were the first tribe to adopt a consti¬ 
tutional form of government, embodied 
in a code of laws written in their own 
language in an alphabet based on the 
Roman characters adapted by one of them 
(see Sequoya ), though in weighing these 
facts their large infusion of white blood 
must be considered. 

The social organization of the Iroquoian 
tribes was in some respects similar to that 
of some other Indians, but it was much 
more complex and cohesive, and there 
was a notable difference in regard to the 
important position accorded the women. 
Among the Cherokee, the Iroquois, the 
Hurons, and probably among the other 
tribes, the women performed important 
and essential functions in their govern¬ 
ment. Every chief was chosen and re¬ 
tained his position, and every important 
measure was enacted by the consent and 
cooperation of the child-bearing women, 
and the candidate for a chiefship was 
nominated by the suffrages of the matrons 
of this group. His selection by them 
from among their sons had to be con¬ 
firmed by the tribal and the federal coun¬ 
cils respectively, and finally he was in¬ 
stalled into office by federal officers. 
Lands and houses belonged solely to the 
women. 

All the Iroquoian tribes were sedentary 
and agricultural, depending on the chase 
for only a small part of their subsistence. 
The northern tribes were especially noted 
for their skill in fortification and house¬ 
building. Their so-called castles were 
solid log structures, with platforms run¬ 
ning around the top on the inside, from 
which stones and other missiles could be 
hurled down upon besiegers. 

For the population of the tribes com¬ 
posing the Iroquoian family see Iroquois, 
and the descriptions of the various Iro¬ 
quoian tribes. (j. n. b. h.) 

>Chelekees.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
Cent, and So. Am., app., 472,1878 (or Cherokees). 
>Cherokees.— Gallatin in Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 89, 
306,1836 (kept apart from Iroquois, though prob¬ 
able affinity asserted); Bancroft. Hist. U. S., in, 
246,1840; Prichard, Pnys. Hist. Mankind, v, 401, 
1847; Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 


1, xcix, 77, 1848; Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 58,1856 (a separate group, perhaps to be 
classed with Iroquois and Sioux); Gallatin in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853; Latham, 
Opuscula,327,1860; Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
Cent, and So. Am., app., 460, 472, 1878 (same as 
Chelekees or Tsalagi—“ apparently entirely dis¬ 
tinct from all other American tongues”). 
> Cheroki.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 24, 
1884; Gatschet in Science, 413, Apr. 29, 1887. 
=Huron-Cherokee. —Hale in Am. Antiq., 20, Jan., 
1883 (proposed as a family name instead of Huron- 
Iroquois; relationship to Iroquois affirmed). 
<Huron-Iroquois.— Bancroft, Hi-t. U. S., Ill, 243, 
1840. >Irokesen. —Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, 
map 17,1848; ibid., 1852. xlrokesen.— Berghaus, 
Physik. Atlas, map 72,1887 (includes Kataba and 
said to be derived from Dakota). =Iroquoian.— 
Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 77, 1891. > Iroquois.— 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 21, 23, 
305, 1836 (excludes Cherokee); Prichard, Phys. 
Hist. Mankind, v, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin); 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1, 
xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836); Gallatin in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 401,1853, Latham in Trans. 
Philol. Soc. Lond., 58, 1856; Latham, Opuscula, 
327,1860; Latham, Elements Comp. Philol., 463, 
1862. >Tschirokies. —Berghaus (1845), Physik. 
Atlas,map 17, 1848. >Wyandot-Iroquois. —Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. Am., app., 
460, 468,1878. 

Iroquois (Algonkin: Iri^akhoiw, ‘real 
adders’, with the French suffix -ois). 
The confederation of Iroquoian tribes 
known in history, among other names, 
by that of the Five Nations, comprising 
the Cayuga, Mohawk, Oneida, Onondaga, 
and Seneca. Their name for themselves 
as a political body was Ongwano n sionnV, 

‘ we are of the extended lodge. ’ Among 
the Iroquoian tribes kinship is traced 
through the blood of the woman only; 
kinship means membership in a family, 
and this in turn constitutes citizenship 
in the tribe, conferring certain social, 
political, and religious privileges, duties, 
and rights which are denied to persons 
of alien blood; but, by a legal fiction 
embodied in the right of adoption, the 
blood of the alien may be figuratively 
changed into one of the strains of the 
Iroquoian blood, and thus citizenship may 
be conferred on a person of alien lineage. 
In an Iroquoian tribe the legislative, 
judicial, and executive functions are 
usually exercised by one and the same 
class of persons, commonly called chiefs 
in English, who are organized into coun¬ 
cils. There are three grades of chiefs. 
The chiefship is hereditary in certain of 
the simplest political units in the gov¬ 
ernment of the tribe; a chief is nomi¬ 
nated by the suffrages of the matrons of 
this unit, and the nomination is con¬ 
firmed by the tribal and the federal coun¬ 
cils. The functions of the three grades 
of chiefs are defined in the rules of pro¬ 
cedure. When the five Iroquoian tribes 
were organized into a confederation, its 
government was only a development of 
that of the separate tribes, just as the 
government of each of the constituent 
tribes was a development of that of the 
several clans of which it was composed. 
The government of the clan was a de» 


618 


ntOQtrois 


Lb. a. e. 


velopment of that of the several brood 
families of which it was composed, and 
the brood family, strictly speaking, was 
composed of the progeny of a woman 
and her female descendants, counting 
through the female line only; hence the 
clan may be described as a permanent 
body of kindred, socially and politically 
organized, who trace actual and theoret¬ 
ical descent through the female line only. 
The simpler units surrendered part of 
their autonomy to the next higher units 
in such wise that the whole was closely 
interdependent and cohesive. The estab¬ 
lishment of the higher unit created new 
rights, privileges, and duties. This was 
the principle of organization of the con¬ 
federation of the five Iroquoian tribes. 
The date of the formation of this confed¬ 
eration (probably not the first, but the 
last of a series of attempts to unite the 
several tribes in a federal union) was not 
earlier than about the year 1570, which 
is some 30 years anterior to that of the 
Huron tribes. 

The Delawares gave them the name 
Mingwe. The northern and western 
Algonquians called them Nadowa, ‘ad¬ 
ders’. The Powhatan called them Mas- 
sawomekes. The English knew them as 
the Confederation of the Five Nations, 
and after the admission of the Tuscarora 
in 1722, as the Six Nations. Moreover, 
the names Maqua, Mohawk, Seneca, and 
Tsonnontowan, by which their leading 
tribes were called, were also applied to 
them collectively. The League of the 
Iroquois, when first known to Europeans, 
was composed of the five tribes, and oc¬ 
cupied the territory extending from the 
e. watershed of L. Champlain to the w. 
watershed of Genesee r., and from the 
Adirondacks southward to the territory of 
the Conestoga. The date of the formation 
of the league is not certain, but there is 
evidence that it took place about 1570, oc¬ 
casioned by wars with Algonquian and 
Huron tribes. The confederated Iroquois 
immediately began to make their united 
power felt. After the coming of the 
Dutch, from whom they procured fire¬ 
arms, they were able to extend their con¬ 
quests over all the neighboring tribes 
until their dominion was acknowledged 
from Ottawa r. to the Tennessee and from 
the Kennebec to Illinois r. and L. Michi¬ 
gan. Their westward advance was 
checked by the Chippewa; the Cherokee 
and the Catawba proved an effectual bar¬ 
rier in the S., while in the N. they were 
hampered by the operations of the 
French in Canada. Champlain on one of 
his early expeditions joined a party of 
Canadian Indians against the Iroquois. 
This made them bitter enemies of the 
French, whom they afterward opposed at 
every step to the close of the French 


regime in Canada in 1763, while they 
were firm allies of the English. The 
French made several attempts through 
their missionaries to win over the Iro¬ 
quois, and were so far successful that a 
considerable number of individuals from 
the different tribes, most of them Mo¬ 
hawk and Onondaga, withdrew from the 
several tribes and formed Catholic set¬ 
tlements at Caughnawaga, St Regis, and 
Oka, on the St Lawrence. The tribes of 
the league repeatedly tried, but without 
success, to induce them to return, and 
finally, in 1684, declared them to to 
traitors. In later wars the Catholic Iro¬ 
quois took part with the French against 
their former brethren. On the breaking 
out of the American Revolution the 
League of the Iroquois decided not to 
take part in the conflict, but to allow 
each tribe to decide for itself what action 
to take. All the tribes, with the excep¬ 
tion of the Oneida and about half of the 
Tuscarora, joined the Plnglish. After the 
revolution the Mohawk and Cayuga, with 
other Iroquoian tribes that were in the 
English interest, after several temporary 
assignments, were finally settled by the 
Canadian government on a reservation 
on Grand r., Ontario, where they still 
reside, although a few individuals emi¬ 
grated to Gibson, Bay of Quinte, Caugh¬ 
nawaga, and St Thomas, Ontario. All 
the Iroquois in the United States are on 
reservations in New York with the ex¬ 
ception of the Oneida, who are settled 
near Green Bay, Wis. The so-called 
Seneca of Oklahoma are composed of the 
remnants of many tribes, among which 
may be mentioned the Conestoga and 
Hurons, and of emigrants from all the 
tribes of the Iroquoian confederation. It 
is very probable that the nucleus of 
these Seneca was the remnant of the 
ancient Erie. The Catholic Iroquois of 
Caughnawaga, St Regis, and Oka, al¬ 
though having no connection with the 
confederation, supplied many recruits to 
the fur trade, and a large number of 
them have become permanently resident 
among the northwestern tribes of the 
United States and Canada. 

The number of the Iroquois villages 
varied greatly at different periods and 
from decade to decade. In 1657 there 
were about 24, but after the conquest of 
the Erie the entire country from the 
Genesee to the w. watershed of L. Erie 
came into possession of the Iroquoian 
tribes, which afterward settled colonies 
on the upper waters of the Allegheny 
and Susquehanna and on the n. shore of 
L. Ontario, so that by 1750 their villages 
may have numbered about 50. The 
population of the Iroquois also varied 
much at different periods. Their con¬ 
stant wars greatly weakened them. In 


BULL. 30] 


IROQUOIS 


1689 it was estimated that they had 2,250 
warriors, who were reduced by war, 
disease, and defections to Canada, to 
1,230 in 1698. Their losses were largely 
made up by their system of wholesale 
adoption, which was carried on to such 
an extent that at one time their adopted 
aliens were reported to equal or exceed 
the number of native Iroquois. Disre¬ 
garding the extraordinary estimates of 
some early writers, it is evident that the 
modern Iroquois, instead of decreasing 
in population, have increased, and num¬ 
ber more at present than at any former 
period. On account of the defection of 
the Catholic Iroquois and the omission 
of the Tuscarora from the estimates it 
was impossible to get a statement of the 
full strength of the Iroquois until within 
recent times. About the middle of the 
17th century the Five Nations were sup¬ 
posed to have reached their highest 
point, and in 1677 and 1685 they were 
estimated at about 16,000. In 1689 they 
were estimated at about 12,850, but in 
the next 9 years they lost more than half 
by war and by desertions to Canada. The 
most accurate estimates for the 18th cen¬ 
tury gave to the Six Nations and their 
Colonies about 10,000 or 12,000 souls. In 
1774 they were estimated at 10,000 to 
12,500. In 1904 they numbered about 
16,100, including more than 3,000 mixed- 
bloods, as follows: 

In Ontario: Iroquois and Algonkin at 
Watha (Gibson), 139 (about one-half 
Iroquois); Mohawk of the Bay of Quinte, 
1,271; Oneida of the Thames, 770; Six 
Nations on Grand r., 4,195 (including 
about 150 Delawares). In Quebec: Iro¬ 
quois of Caughnawaga, 2,074; of St Re¬ 
gis, 1,426; of Lake of Two Mountains, 
393. Total in Canada, about 10,418. 

The Iroquois of New York in 1904 
were distributed as follows: Onondaga 
and Seneca on Allegany res., 1,041; 
Cayuga, Onondaga, and Seneca on Catta¬ 
raugus res., 1,456; Oneida on Oneida res., 
150; Oneida and Onondaga on Onondaga 
res., 513; St Regis res., 1,208; Cayugaand 
Seneca on Tonawanda res., 512; Onon¬ 
daga and Tuscarora on Tuscarora res., 
410. Total, 5,290. 

In 1905 there were also 366 Indians 
classed as Seneca under the Seneca 
School, Okla. 

The Algonquian and other Indians in¬ 
cluded with the Iroquois are probably 
outnumbered by the Caughnawaga and 
others in the Canadian N. W. who are 
not separately enumerated. 

The following villages were Iroquois, 
but the particular tribes to which they 
belonged are either unknown or are col¬ 
lective: Adjouquay, Allaquippa, Anpua- 
qun, Aquatsagana, Aratumquat, Awegen, 
Blackleg’s Village, Buckaloon, Cahun- 


619 

ghage, Canowdowsa, Caughnawaga, Char- 
tierstown, Chemegaide, Chenango, Chin- 
klacamoose, Chugnut, Churamuk, Codo- 
coraren, Cokanuck, Conaquanosshan, 
Conejoholo, Conemaugh, Conihunta, Con- 
nosomothdian, Conoytown (mixed Conoy 
and Iroquois), Coreorgonel (mixed), 
Cowawago, Cussewago, Ganadoga, Gana- 
garahhare, Ganasarage, Ganeraske, Gan- 
neious, Gannentaha, Glasswanoge, Gosh- 
goshunk (mixed), Grand River Indians, 
Hickorytown (mixed), Janundat, Jed- 
akne, Johnstown, Jonondes, Juniata, 
Juraken (2), Kahendohon, Kanaghsaws, 
Kannawalohalla, Kanesadageh, Kara- 
ken, Karhationm, Karhawenradon, 
Kayehkwarageh, Kaygen, Rente, Kick- 
enapawling, Kiskiminetas, Kittaning, 
Kuskuski (mixed), Lawunkhannek, 
Logstown, Loyalhannon (?), Mahusque- 
chikoken, Mahican, Mahoning, Manck- 
atawangum, Matchasaung, Middletown, 
Mingo Town, Mohanet, Nescopeck, 
Newtown (4 settlements), Newtychan- 
ing, Octageron, Ohrekionni, Onaweron, 
Onkwe Iyede, Opolopong, Oquaga, Ose- 
wingo, Oskawaserenhon, Ostonwackin, 
Osw T egatchie, Otiahanague, Otskwirake- 
ron, Ousagwentera, Owego, Paille Cou¬ 
pee, Pluggy’s Town, Punxatawney, Qui- 
naouatoua, Runonvea, Saint Regis, Saw- 
cunk, Schoharie, Schohorage, Sconassi, 
Scoutash’s Town, Seneca Town, Sevege, 
Sewickly’s Old Town, Shamokin, Shan- 
nopin, Shenango, Sheshequin, Sheo- 
quage, Sittawingo, Skannayutenate, Ske- 
handowa, Solocka, Swahadowri, Taiaia- 
gon, Tewanondadon, Tioga, Tohoguses 
Cabins, Tonihata, Tullihas. Tuscarora, 
Tuskokogie, Tutelo, Unadilla, Venango, 
Wakatomica, Wakerhon, Wauteghe, 
Yoghroonwago, Youcham. Catholic mis¬ 
sions among the Iroquois were: Caughna¬ 
waga, Indian Point, La Montagne, La 
Prairie, Oka, Oswegatchie, St Regis, and 
Sault au Recollet. For the other Iroquois 
settlements, see under the several tribal 
names. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Acquinoshionee.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 517, 
1853. Acquinushionee.—Schoolcraft in Proc. N. Y. 
Hist. Soc., 80, 1844. Aganuschioni.—Macauley, N. 
Y., II, 185, 1829. Agoneaseah.—Ibid. Agonnon- 
sionni.—Charlevoix (1744) quoted by Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. v, 3, 1848. Agonnousioni.—McKenney 
and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854. Agonn- 
sionni.—Clark, Onondaga, I, 19, 1849. Akonon- 
sionni.—Brinton, Lenape Leg., 255, 1885. Akwi- 
noshioni.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, Vi, 138, 1857. 
Aquanoschioni.—Barton, New Views, app., 7, 1798. 
Aquanuschioni.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. v, 4, 1848. 
Aquanuschionig.—Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 309, 
1816. Aquinoshioni.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 
188, 1857. Aquinushionee.—Ibid., ill, 532, 1853. 
Caenoestoery.—Schuyler (1699) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IV, 563, 1854. Canaghkonie.—Dellius(1697), 
ibid., 280. Canaghkouse.—Ibid. Cannassoone.— 
Doc. of 1695, ibid., 122. Cannissoone.—Ibid., 
120. Cannossoene.—Gov. of Can. (1695), ibid., 
122, note. Canossoene.—Doc. of 1695, ibid., 120. 
Canossoone.—Ibid. Canton Indians.—Fletcher 
(1693), ibid., 33. Coenossoeny.—Ibid., 563, note. 
Confederate Indians.—Johnson (1760), ibid., VII, 
432. Confederate Nations.—Mt Johnson conf. 


620 


IROQUOISE CHIPPEWAYS-IRRIGATION 


[ B. A. E. 


(1755), ibid., VI, 983, 1855. Confederates. —Johnson 
(1763). ibid., vil, 582,1856. Erocoise.— Morton (ca. 
1650) in Me. Hist. 3oe. Coll., Ill, 34, 1853. Five 
Canton Nations. —Jamison (1696) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IV, 235,1854. Five Indian Cantons. —Hunter 
(1711), ibid., V, 252,1855. Five Mohawk Nations. — 
Carver, Trav., 173, 1778. Five Nations. —Andros 
(1690)inR. I. Col. Rec., ill, 284,1858. Gwhunnugh- 
shonee. —Macauley, N. Y., II, 185, 1829. Haugh- 
goghnuchshionee. —Ibid.,185. Hirocoi. —Shea.Cath. 
Miss.,215,1855. Hiroquais.— Ibid.,205(firstapplied 
by French to both Hurons and Iroquois). 
Hiroquois. —Jes. Rel. for 1632, 14, 1858. Ho-de'- 
no-sau-nee. —Morgan, League Iroq., 51, 1851. 
Ho-di-no n ‘syo n 'ni’.— Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (‘they are 
of the house’: own name, Senecaform). Honon- 
tonchionni. —Millet (1693) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IV, 78, 1854. Hotinnonchiendi. —Jes. Rel. for 1654, 
11, 1858. Hotinnonsionni. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 205, 
1855. Hotinonsionni. —Bruyas (ca. 1700) quoted in 
Charlevoix, New France, II, 189, note, 1866 (Mo¬ 
hawk form). Hyroquoise. —Sagard (1636) in note 
to Champlain, (Euv., ill, 220, 1870. Hyroquoyse. — 
Ibid. Inquoi.— Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 1885 (mis¬ 
print). Irecoies. —Lovelace (1670) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ill, 190,1853. Irequois. —Brickell, N. C., 
283, 1737. Iriquoi.— Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 30, 
1885. Iriquois.— Thornton in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
v, 175,1857. Irocois. — Champlain (1603), (Euv., H, 
9,1870. Irocquois. —Doc. of 1666 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., in, 134,1853. Irognas.— Rasle(1724) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vm, 246, 1819. Irokesen. — 
Yater, Mith.,pt. 3, sec. 3,303,1816 (German form). 
Ironois.— Hennepin, Cont. of New Discov., map, 
1698. Iroquaes.— Bayard (1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., iv, 353, 1854. Iroque.— Smith (1799) quoted 
by Drake, Trag. Wild., 254, 1841. Iroquese. —Hen¬ 
nepin (1683) quoted by Harris, Voy. and Trav., ii, 
906, 1705. Iroqueze. —Harris, ibid., I, 811, 1705. 
Iroquiese. —Hennepin, New Discov., 19, 1698. 
Iroquoi. —Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 147, 1878. 
Iroquois. —Jes. Rel. for 1645, 2, 1858. Iroquos. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. v, 41,1848. Irriquois.— Pike, 
Trav., 130,1811. Irroquois.— Talon (1671) in Mar- 
gry, D£c., I, 100, 1875. Irroquoys. —La Montagne 
(1658) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., XllI, 89, 1881. 
Ke-nunctioni.— Macauley, N. Y., II, 174,1829. Kon- 
oshioni.— Gale, Upper Miss., 159, 1867. Konos- 
sioni.— Dellius (1694) in N. Y. Doc, Col. Hist., IV, 
78,1854. Konungzi Oniga. —Vater, Mith., pt3, sec.3, 
309,1816. Let-e-nugh-shonee. —Macauley, N. Y., n, 
185,1829. Mahongwis. —Rafinesque, Am. Nations, 

I, 157, 1836. Masawomekes. —Smith (1629), Va., I, 
120, 1819. Massawamacs.— Keane in Stanford, 
Compend., 521, 1878. Massawomacs. —Jefferson, 
Notes, 279, 1825. Massawomecks. —Strac.hey (ca. 
1612), Va., 40, 1849. Massawomees. —Rafinesque, 
introd. to Marshall, Ky., I, 33, 1824. Massawo- 
mekes. —Smith (1629), Va., I, 74, 1819. Massawo- 
nacks.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 130, 1857. 
Massawonaes. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 
1816. Massowomeks. —Smith(1629),Va.,i,119,1819. 
Mat-che-naw-to-waig. —Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830 
(‘bad snakes’: Ottawa name for the Iroquois, 
in contradistinction to the Hurons, called the 
'good snakes’). Matchinadoaek. —La Hontan 
(1703) quoted by Vater, Mith., pt 3, sec. 3, 264,1816 
(‘bad people’: Algonquian name). Mengua. — 
Heckewelder (1819) quoted by Thompson, Long 
Id., i, 767, 1843. Mengues. —Bozman, Md., II, 481, 
1837. Menguy.— Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, 
Ky., i, 31,1824. Mengwe. —Heckewelder (1819) in 
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 216,1859. Mengwee. —Ma¬ 
cauley, N. Y., II, 185,1829. Mengwi. —Rafinesque, 
Am.Nations, 1 ,157,1836. Messawomes. —Am. Pion., 

II, 189,1843. Minckquas.—Smitt (1660) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., XIII, 164,1881. Mincquaas.—Doc.of 1660, 
ibid., 184. Mingaes.—Doc. of 1659, ibid., 106. Min- 
goe.—Conestoga council (1721) quoted by Proud, 
Penn., ir,132,1797. Mingos.—Homann Heirs map, 
1756. Mingwee.—Macauley, N. Y., II, 185, 1829. 
Minquaas.—Doc. of 1660 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiii, 181,1881 (also applied to the Mingo on Ohio 
r., on map in Mandrillon, Spectateur Am6ricain, 
1785). Minquaes.—Doc. of 1658, ibid. 95. Min- 
quas.—Van der Donck (1656) quoted by Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 51, 1872. Mungwas.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 147,1855 (Chippewa mame, 
and may mean the Mundua). Na-do-wage'.— 


Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 52, 1870. Nadowaig.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 39, 1855. Nadowas.— 
Schoolcraft, Pers. Mem., 446, 1851. Nadowe.— 
Baraga, Engl.-Otch. Diet., 147, 1878 (Chippewa 
name). Nah-dah-waig.—Schoolcraft, Ind Tribes, 
v, 193,1855. Nahdooways.—Jones, Ojebway Inds., 
32, 1861. Nahdoways.—Ibid., 111. Natuagi.—Gat- 
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 61, 1884 (Creek name). 
Naud-o-waig.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., V, 83, 1885. Naudoways.—Tanner, Narr., 88, 
1830. Nautowaig.—Ibid., 316 (Ottawa name). 
Nautowas.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes. I, 304, 1853. 
Nautoway.—Tanner, Narr., 310, 1830. Nod-o- 
waig.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 90, 1850. Nodoways.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 149,1852. Nodswaig.— 
Ind, Aff. Rep., 83, 1850. Notinnonchioni.—Millet 
(1693) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 79,1854. Notta- 
wagees.—Glen (1750), ibid., VI, 588, 1855. Notta- 
wegas. — Mitchel in Hist. Mag., 1st s., IV, 358, 1860. 
Notteweges.—McCall, Hist. Ga., I, 243, 1811. 
On-gwa-no n 'syo n/ ni’.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Seneca 
form). Rodinunchsiouni.—Colden (1727) quoted 
in Charlevoix, New France, n, 189, note, 1866. 
Sechs Nationen.—Giissefeld, map, 1784 (German: 
‘Six Nations’). Six Allied Nations.—Sharpe (1754) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., v, 16, 1836. Six 
Nations.—Albany conf. (1724) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist, v, 713, 1855. Trokesen.—Heckewelder (1819) 
quoted by Thompson, Long Id., i, 76,1843 (Dutch 
form; misprint). Troquois.—Gorges(1658) in Me. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, 66, 1847 (misprint). Tuda- 
manes.—Barcia, Ensayo, 16,1723. Wassawomees.— 
Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., I, 33, 1824, 
Ya"kwa-na n -‘syan-ni’.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Tus- 
carora form). Yrocois.—Champlain (1632), (Euv., 
V, pt, 2, 46, 1870. Yrokoise.—Vaudreuil (1760) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 1092, 1858. Yroquois.— 
Champlain (1632), (Euv., v, pt 2, 47, 1870. 

Iroquoise Chippeways. The Catholic 
Iroquois and Nipissing settled at Oka, 
Quebec.—Schermerliorn (1812) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., ir, 11, 1814. 

IroquoisSuperieurs (French: ‘upperIro¬ 
quois’). A geographical group of Iro¬ 
quois, embracing the Oneida, Onondaga, 
Cayuga, and Seneca, occupying, in the 
17th century, an inland country farther 
from St Lawrence r. than the Mohawk, 
who were called Iroquois Inferieurs.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1656, 7, 1858. 

Irrigation. It was once assumed that 
irrigation was not practised by the Indians 
of the arid region, except to a very limited 
extent, until after they came under the 
influence of Spanish missionaries; but 
recent systematic study of the archeologic 
remains in theS. W. has removed all doubt 
that agriculture was conducted in prehis¬ 
toric times with the aid of extensive irri¬ 
gation canals, reservoirs, and clams. The 
most important of these works are in the 
valleys of the Gila and its tributaries, in 
s. Arizona, where scores of milesof ditches 
are still traceable, in instances extending 
more than 10 m. from the stream from 
which the water was diverted; according 
to some observers there are individual 
canals that traverse a total distance of 25 
m. In the Salt River valley alone it is 
estimated that from 200,000 to 250,000 
acres were made available for cultivation 
by means of irrigation before the arrival 
of white men. Some of the ancient canals 
were about 7 ft deep and 4 ft wide at 
the bottom, but the sides sloped grad¬ 
ually, rising in steps, giving the acequia 


BULL. 30] 


IRRUPIENS-IRUWAITSU 


621 


a width of about 30 ft at the surface. 
Both the bed and the sides were care¬ 
fully tamped and plastered with clay to 
prevent waste through seepage. Re¬ 
mains of what are believed to have been 
wooden head gates have been exposed 
by excavation. W here canal depressions 
have disappeared, owing to cultivation 
or to sand drift, the canals are still trace¬ 
able by the innumerable bowlders and 
water-worn concretions that line the 
banks; these, according to Cushing, hav¬ 
ing been placed there by the natives 
as “ water-tamers” to direct the streams 
to the thirsty fields. The irrigation 
w r orks in the valleys mentioned probably 
indicate greater engineering skill than 
any aboriginal remains that have been 
discovered n. of Mexico. Several of the 
old canal beds have been utilized for 
miles by modern ditch builders; in one 
instance a saving of $20,000 to $25,000 
was effected at the Mormon settlement of 
Mesa, Maricopa co., Ariz., by employing 
an ancient acequia that traversed a vol¬ 
canic knoll for 3 m. and which at one 
point was excavated to a depth of 20 to 
25 ft in the rock for several hundred feet. 
The remains of ditches the building of 
which necessitated overcoming similar 
though less serious obstacles exist in the 
valley of the Rio Verde; and on the Has- 
sayampa, n. w. of Phoenix, a canal from 
that stream traverses a lava mesa for sev¬ 
eral miles and falls abruptly into a valley 
40 or 50 ft. below, the water in its descent 
having cut away the rocky mesa walls for 
several feet. 

Even w T here the w T ater supply of a 
pueblo settlement situated several miles 
from a stream was obtained by means 
of canals, each house cluster was pro¬ 
vided with a reservoir; and in many 
instances through the S. W., reservoirs, 
sometimes covering an area measuring 1 
m. by Jm., designed for the storage of 
rain water, were the sole means of water 
supply both for domestic purposes and 
for irrigation. In the valleys of the Rio 
Grande and its tributaries, in New Mex¬ 
ico, small reservoirs were the chief means 
of supplying water to the ancient villages; 
and even to-day only the rudest methods 
of irrigation are employed by the Pueblo 
tribes. The ancient occupants of Penas- 
co Blanco, one of the Chaco canyon 
group of ancient ruins in the Navaho 
desert in n. w. New Mexico, diverted 
water from the Chaco by means of a 
ditch which supplied a reservoir built in 
sand, and partially prevented seepage by 
lining its bed with slabs of stones and clay. 

The neighboring pueblos of Una Vida, 
Pueblo Bonito, Kinklazhin, Kinbineola, 
and Kinyaah, also were artificially pro¬ 
vided with water for irrigation. Kinbi¬ 
neola, however, exhibits the best example 


of irrigation works of any of the Chaco 
group of villages, water having been 
diverted from the sandy wash to a large 
natural depression and thence conducted 
to the fields, 2 m. away, by a ditch dug 
around a mesa and along a series of sand 
hills on a fairly uniform grade. This 
ditch was mainly earthwork, but where 
necessary the lower border was reenforced 
with retaining walls of stone. Kinyaah 
is said to have been provided with two 
large reservoirs and a canal 25 to 30 ft 
wide and in places 3 to 4 ft deep. 

Hand irrigation is still practised by the 
Pueblo Indians. The Zuni women, in 
order to raise their small crops of onions, 
chile, etc., are obliged to carry water in 
jars on their heads, sometimes for several 
hundred yards; it is then poured on the 
individual plants with a gourd ladle. At 
the Middle Mesa villages of the Hopi, 
garden patches are watered in much the 
same way, except that here the gardens 
are within easier reach of the springs and 
are irrigated by means of a gourd vessel 
fastened to the end of a long pole. Both 
the Hopi of to-day and the ancient inhab¬ 
itants of the vicinity of the present Solo- 
monville, on the Gila, constructed reser¬ 
voirs on the mesa sides from which ter¬ 
raced gardens below were readily irrigated, 
the reservoirs being supplied by impound¬ 
ing storm water. Throughout the S. W. 
where pueblos occupied the summits of 
mesas, reservoirs were provided, and 
according to tradition some of these were 
filled in winter by rolling into them im¬ 
mense snowballs. For hundred of years 
the pueblo of Acoma (q. v.) has derived 
its entire water supply for domestic pur¬ 
poses from a natural depression in the 
rock which receives the rainfall from the 
mesa summit. 

Consult Cushing (1), Zuni Breadstuff, 
1884-85, (2) in Coinpte-rendu Internat. 
Cong. Am6r., vii, 163, 1890; Fewkes in 
22d Rep. B. A. E., 1904; He wett in Records 
of the Past, iv, no. 9,1905; Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., vi, 323,1893; Mindeleff in 13th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Wilson in 13th Rep. 
U. S. Geol. Surv., 133,1893. (f. w. h.) 

Irrupiens. A village on a river of the 
same name, an affl uent of Trinity r., Tex., 
at which St Denis and his party stopped 
in 1717. Herds of buffalo were encoun¬ 
tered there. The region was in the main 
occupied by tribes of the Caddoan family, 
but bordered the country occupied by 
intrusive tribes of other stocks. Con¬ 
sult Derbanne in Margry, Dec., vi, 204, 
1886; La Harpe in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., hi, 48, 1851. Cf. Ervipiames. 

(a. c. f.) 

Iruwaitsu ( Iruai'tsu , ‘Scott valley peo¬ 
ple ’). One of the 4 divisions of the main 
body of Shasta, living in Scott valley, Sis¬ 
kiyou co., Cal. In 1851 the entire Indian 


622 


ISALWAKTEN ISLET A 


[b. a. e. 


population of Scott valley occupied 7 vil¬ 
lages and was estimated by Gibbs (School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 171, 1853) to num¬ 
ber 420. One of these settlements was 
apparently Watsaghika. 

Iruai'tsu. —R. B. Dixon, inf’n, 1903 (correct name). 
I'ruwai. —Curtin, MS. vocab.,B. A. E., 1885. Scott’s 
Valley Indians. —McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 170, 1853. Scott Valley In¬ 
dians.— Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 120, 1865. 

Isalwakten. A body of Salish of Fraser 
superintendencv, Brit. Col. 

Isalwakten. —Can. ind. Aff., 79,1878. Isalwalken.— 
Ibid., 138, 1879. 

Isamis. A body of Salish of Fraser 
superintendency, Brit. Col.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 78, 1878. 

Isamuck. A body of Salish of Fraser 
superintendency, Brit. Col. 

Isammuck. —Can. Ind. Aff., 138, 1879. Isamuck.— 
Ibid., 78, 1878. 

Isanthcogna. A former Gabrieleno 
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a 
locality later called Mission Vieja.—Ried 
(1852) quoted by Hoffman in Bull. Essex 
Inst., xvii, 2, 1885. 

Isanyati (‘Santee’). A Brule Sioux 
band, probably originally Santee. 
Isaijyati.— Cleveland quoted by Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Isa n yati. —Ibid. 

Isfanalgi. An extinct clan of the Creeks, 
said by Gatschet to be seemingly analo¬ 
gous to the Ishpani phratry and clan of 
the Chickasaw. 

Is-fa-nul'-ke. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Ish- 
fanalgi. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 156,1884. 

Isha. A former populous Chumashan 
village near San Pedro, Ventura co., Cal. 
I-ca'. —Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Ishauu. The Coyote clan of the Hopi. 

F-sau-iih wiin-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., VII, 
403, 1894 {wun-vm= ‘clan’). Isauu winwu. — 

Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900. Ish. — 
Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 282,1903. 
I-sha-hue. —Bourke, Snake Dance, 171, 1884. Ish- 
awu. —Dorsey and Voth. Oraibi Soyal, 12, 1901. 
I'shawuu. —Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 81, 1905. 
Shahue. —Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 65,1893 
(misquoting Bourke). 

Ishgua. A former Chumashan village 
located by Taylor near the mouth of 
Saticoy r., Ventura co., Cal. Perhaps 
the same as Isha. 

Ishgua.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. 
Ishguaget. —Ibid. 

Ishipishi. A Karok village on the w. 
bank of Klamath r., n. w. Cal., a mile 
above the mouth of the Salmon, opposite 
Katimin, and, like it, burned by the 
whites in 1852. 

Ish-e-pish-e.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 
1860. Ishipishi.— A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1904 (Karok 
name). Isshe-pishe-rah. —Gibbs, MS. Misc., B. A. 
E., 1852. Kepar.— Kroeber, inf’n, 1904 (Yurok 
name). 

Ishpani (‘Spanish’). A Chickasaw 
phratry and clan. 

Ish-pan-ee. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Ish- 
ani.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 96, 1884. 
spani. —Ibid., 156. 

Ishtakhechiduba ( Icin'qe tci duba, ‘four 
white men’s houses’). One of the later 
villages occupied by the Kansa in their 
migration up Kansas r.—Dorsey, Kansa 
MS. vocab., B, A. E., 1883. 


Ishtowa. The extinct Arrow clans of 
Sia and San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex. 

Ish'to-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX, 348, 
1896 (San Felipe form; hdno = ‘people’). Ishtowa- 
hano.—Ibid. (Sia form). 

IshtuaYene (Keresan: ishtoa, ‘arrow’). 
A place above Santo Domingo, N. Mex., 
whence fled the Cochiti inhabitants of 
Kuapa w r hen pursued in prehistoric times 
by the mythical Pinini (q. v.), or pyg¬ 
mies, according to San Felipe tradition. 
The place is so called on account of nu- 
merousarrowpoints found there.—Bande- 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 166, 1892. 

Isht-ua Yen-e.—Bandelier, op. cit. 

Ishtunga (‘rightside’). The name ap¬ 
plied to those divisions of the Kansa 
that camped on the right side of the 
tribal circle. 

Ictunga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 230, 1897. 
Ishwidip. A Karok village on Klamath 

r. , Cal., inhabited in 1860. 

E-swhedip.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860. 
Ishwidip.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. 

Isi (a red and white flower). A clan 
of San Felipe pueblo, N. Mex., of which 
there was but a single survivor in 1895. 

I'si-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX, 350, 1896 

(hdno = ‘people’). 

Isisokasimiks ( T-sis'-o-kas-im-iks, ‘ hair 
shirts’). A division of the Kainah. 

Hair Shirts.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
209, 1892. I-sis'-o-kas-im-iks.—Ibid. The Robes 
with Hair on the outside.—Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 144, 1851. 

Isituchi. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Iskutani (‘small’ [people]). A Choc¬ 
taw clan of the Watakihulata phratry. 
Iskulani.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 162.1878 (misprint). 

Isle aux Tourtes (French; ‘turtle-dove 
island’). A French Sulpitian mission 
station, probably on Ottawa r., Quebec, 
begun for the Algonkin and Nipissing 
about 1720, butshortly afterward removed, 
to Oka, q. v.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 333,1855. 

Isle of St John’s. A village or resort of 
a band of Miemac, probably in Nova 
Scotia, in 1760.—Frye (1760) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 115, 1809. 

Isleta (Span: ‘ islet ’, so named from the 
location of the old village on a delta or 
island between the bed of a mountain 
torrent and the Rio Grande. The native 
name of the pueblo is Shiewhibak , ‘ knife 
laid on the ground to play whib ,’ whib be¬ 
ing a native foot race. The name was 
perhaps suggested by the knife-like shape 
of the lava ridge on which the pueblo is 
built.—Lummis). A Tigua pueblo on the 
w. bank of the Rio Grande, about 12 in. 

s. of Albuquerque, N. Mex. According 
to Lummis it stands on the site it occu¬ 
pied at the time of the Spanish discovery 
in 1540, when it formed one of the vil¬ 
lages of the province of Tiguex of Coro¬ 
nado’s chroniclers. It was the seat of the 
Franciscan mission of San Antonio de 
Isleta from prior to 1629, and about 1675 


BULL. 30] 


ISLETA 


623 



received accessions from the Tigua pue¬ 
blos of Quarai, Tajique, and others, e. of 
the Rio Grande, when those pueblos were 
abandoned in consequence of Apache 
depredations. In 1680 the population of 
Isleta was about 2,000. As the Spanish 
settlers along the lower Rio Grande took 
refuge in this pueblo when the uprising 
occurred in the year named, and thus in- 


ISLETA WOMAN. (VROMAN, PHOTO.) 

terrupted communication between its in¬ 
habitants and the seat of war at the 
northern villages, they did not participate 
in the massacre of the colonists and 
missionaries in the vicinity. When Gov. 
Otermin retreated from Santa Fe, how¬ 
ever, he found Isleta abandoned, the in¬ 
habitants having joined the rebels. The 


year following (1681) Otermin surprised 
and captured the pueblo, and on his re¬ 
turn from the n. took with him 519 cap¬ 
tives, of whom 115 afterward escaped. 
The remainder were settled on the n. e. 
bank of the Rio Grande, a few miles be¬ 
low El Paso, Tex., the name Isleta del 
Sur (‘ Isleta of the South ’) being applied 
to their pueblo. The date of the refound¬ 
ing of the northern Isleta is somewhat 
in doubt. According to Bancroft the 
present pueblo was built in 1709 by some 
scattered families of Tigua gathered by 
missionary Juan de la Pena, while Bande- 
lier asserts that the pueblo “remained 
vacant and in ruins until 1718, when it 
was repeopled with Tiguas who had re¬ 
turned from the Moquis [Hopi], to whom 
the majority of the tribe had fled during 


VICENTE JIRON, FORMER GOVERNOR OF ISLETA 

the 12 years of Pueblo ‘independence,’ ” 
1680-92. The name of the mission (San 
Antonio de la Isleta) seems also to have 
been transferred to the new pueblo in 
the s., and on the reestablishment of the 
northern Isleta the latter became the mis¬ 
sion of San Agustin. The Genizaros 
pueblos of Belen and Tom6 were visitas 
of this mission in 1788. It has been 
learned by Lummis that a generation ago 
about 150 Queres from Acoma and La¬ 
guna were forced to leave their homes on 
account of drought and to settle at Isleta, 
where they still form a permanent part 
of that village and are recognized by 
representation in its civil and religious 
government. Pop. 1,110. (Consult Ban- 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 233, et 
seq., 1892.) 









624 


ISLETA DEL SUR-ISTUDSHIL AIK A 


[B. a. e. 


According to Lummis (inf’n, 1896) the 
Isleta people have the following clans: 
Kim (Mountain lion), Pashir (Water 
pebble), Num (Earth), T’hur (Sun), 
Shiu (Eagle), Tam (Antelope), Pirn 
(Deer), Churehu (Mole),Shumuyu (Tur¬ 
quoise), Kurni (Goose), Tuim (Wolf), 
Iebathu (White corn), Iefeu (Red corn), 
Ieshur (Blue corn), Iechur (Yellow 
corn), and Parrot. According to Gatschet 
the tribe is divided into the Churan and 
Shifunin fraternities or parties—the ‘ Red 
Eyes’ and the ‘Black Eyes’—but these 
may be merely phratral designations. 
See Pueblos, Tigua. (f. w. h.) 

Alameda la Isleta.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 
1776. Gleta. —Calhoun 1(1849) in Cal. Mess, and 
Corresp., 211, 1850 (misprint). Hanichina. — 

Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (‘eastern river’: 
Laguna name). Ilet. —D’Anville, map N. A., 
1752. Iseta.— Segura in Ind. Aff. Rep., 172, 1890 
(misprint). Islella. —Morse, Hist. Am., map, 1798 
(misprint). Isleta. —De l’lsle, carte Mexique et 
Floride, 1703. Isletabuh. —Ward (1864) in Don¬ 
aldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 81, 1893. Isletans.— 
Lummis, N. Mex. David, 98, 1891. Isletenos. — 
Lummis, Man Who Married the Moon, 133, 1894. 
Isletta. —Kitchin, map N. Am., 1787. Isoletta.— 
Emory, Recon., 41, 1848. Jsleta. —Humboldt, At¬ 
las Nouv.-Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Lleta.— Senex, 
map, 1710 (misprint). San Agustin del Isleta. — 
Alencaster (1805) quoted by Prince, N. Mex., 37, 
1883. San Antonio de la Isleta. —Benavides, Me¬ 
morial, 20,1630. San Augustin de la Isleta. —Villa- 
Sefior, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 418, 422, 1748. San 
Augustin del Isleta.— Alencaster (1805) in Meline, 
'Two Thousand Miles, 212, 1867. Shee-ah-whib- 
bahk. —Lummis in St Nicholas, xvm, 834, Sept. 
1891 (native name). Shee-ah-whib-bak. — Ibid.,829. 
Shee-e-huib-bac. —Lummis in Scribner’s Mag., 478, 
Apr. 1893. Shee-eh-whib-bak. —Lummis, Man Who 
Married the Moon, 4, 1894. Shiewhibak. —Hodge, 
field notes, B. A. E., 1895. Shye-ui-beg.— Century 
Cyclop, of Names, art. “Isleta,” 1894. Siwhipa. — 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Acoma form). 
Tayude. —Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., 1882 (‘ one of 
the people’: proper name of an Isleta Indian; pi. 
T&yun or TAiun). Tchi-ha-hui-pah. —Jouvenceau 
in Cath. Pion., I, nc. 9,13,1906. Tshi-a-uip-a. —Ban- 
delier in Arch. Inst 1 . Papers, iv, 220,1892. Tshya- 
ui-pa. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 37, 1884. 
Tii-ei. —Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., 1882 (‘town’: 
given as their own name for the pueblo). Yo- 
letta.— Columbus Memorial Vol., 156, 1893 (mis 
print). Ysleta.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 756, 1736. 
Yslete. —Buschmann, N. Mex., 277,1858. Ystete. — 
Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689,1855. 

Isleta del Sur (Span.: ‘Isleta of the 
south ’). A Tigua pueblo on the n. e. bank 
of the Rio Grande, a few miles below El 
Paso, Tex. It was established in 1681 by 
some 400 Indian captives from Isleta, N. 
Mex., taken thence by Gov. Oterinin on 
his return from the attempted reconquest 
of the Pueblos after their revolt in Aug., 
1680. It was the seat of a Franciscan 
mission from 1682, containing a church 
dedicated to San Antonio de Padua. The 
mission name San Antonio applied to 
Isleta del Sur belonged to the northern 
Isleta until its abandonment in conse¬ 
quence of the revolt, and when the latter 
was resettled in 1709 or 1718, themissipn 
was named San Agustin de la Isleta. The 
few inhabitants of Isleta del Sur are now 
almost completely Mexicanized. See au¬ 
thors cited below; also Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop., iv, no. 1, 1902. (f. w. h.) 


Corpus Christi de Isleta.—Otermin (1682) quoted 
by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 191,1889. Ilesta.— 
De l’lsle, Atlas Nouveau, map, 59, 1733. Iselle.— 
Vaugondy, map Am6r., 1778. Isla.—Escudero, 
Noticias Nuevo-M6x., 14, 1849. Isleta del Paso.— 
Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 259, Apr. 1882. 
Isleta-del-Paso. — ten Kate, Synonymie, 8, 1884. 
Isleta del Sur.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
ill, 86,1890. Isleta of the South.—Davis, El Gringo, 
115, 1857. Isletta.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 128, 1850. 
Islettas.—Calhoun (1849) in Cal. Mess, and Cor¬ 
resp., 211, 1850. San Antonio de la Isleta.—Bell in 
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 224, 1869. Ysleta.— 
Rivera, Diario, leg. 684, 1736. 

Islets de Jeremie. An Indian mission, 
probably Montagnais, on the lower St 
Lawrence, Quebec, in 1863.—Hind, Lab. 
Penin., ii, 179, 1863. 

Islyamen. A village w. of the Tlaamen 
and n. of Texada id., on the mainland of 
British Columbia.—Brit. Col. map, Ind. 
Aff., Victoria, 1872. 

Ismiquilpas. A tribe or band of w. 
Texas, allied with the Jumano in 1699.— 
Iberville (1702) in Margry, Dec., iv, 316, 
1880. 

Ismuracanes. One of the tribes formerly 
connected with San Carlos mission, near 
Monterey, Cal.—Galiano, Relacion, 164, 
1802. 

Isoguichic. A Tarahumare settlement 
in Chihuahua, Mexico (Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 323, 1864); possibly the same as 
Sisoquichi, located on some maps near the 
headwaters of Rio Conchos, lat. 27° 48L 

Ispipewhumaugh. One of the tribes in¬ 
cluded by the early fur traders under the 
term Nez Perc6s (Ross, Fur Hunters, i, 
185, 1855). They lived on Columbia r., 
above the mouth of Snake r., Wash. 
They were possibly of Shahaptian stock, 
but are not otherwise identifiable. 

Isquepah. A Sumass village on the n. 
bank of Fraser r., Brit. Col., opposite the 
lake.—Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Vic¬ 
toria, 1872. 

Issi (‘ deer ’). A clan of the Koi pliratry 
of the Chickasaw.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
163, 1877. 

Issui (//-mi, ‘tails that can be seen 
from the front,’ in allusion to a buffalo- 
tail worn on the hip.—Wissler). A so¬ 
ciety of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Com¬ 
rades, among the Piegan Siksika. It is 
composed of old men who dress like and 
dance with and like the Emitaks, though 
forming a different society.—Grinnell, 
Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 221, 1892. 

Istapoga (isti ‘people’, apokita ‘to re¬ 
side’). An Upper Creek settlement, not 
recorded in the earlier documents; but 
probably in the neighborhood of the 
present Eastaboga, Talladega co., Ala.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133, 1884. 

Istsikainah. ( Is-tsP-kai-nah , ‘woods 
Bloods’). A division of the Kainah. 
Is-tsi'-kai-nah.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
209,1892. Woods Bloods.—Ibid. 

Istudshilaika ( Vstudshi-lai'ka, ‘ where 
a young thing was found.’—Hawkins). 
One of the 4 Hillabi villages formerly on 


BULL. 30] 


ISUTKWA-ITICHA 


625 


the left side of Hillabi cr., 4 m. below 
Hillabi, Ala. 

E-chuse-is-li-gau.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 43, 
1848. Istudshi-laika.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 
I, 133, 1884. 

Isutkwa (Isljtkwa). An ancient Nu- 
wukmiut village on the site of the U. S. 
Signal station at Pt Barrow, Alaska.— 
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., pi. ii, 1892. 

Ita. A tribe of Eskimo between lat. 
76° and 78° 18', w. Greenland. Their 
principal village (Etah), from which they 
take their name, is at Foulke fjord; their 
chief hunting grounds are Whale and 
Wolstenholme sds. When first visited 
by Ross in 1818 they possessed neither 
canoes nor arrows. The art of building 
kaiaks, long forgotten, was introduced 
after 1873 by immigrants from Baffin 
land, who came by way of Ellesmere land. 
They hunt seal, their principal food, on 
the floes of the bays and walrus at the 
floe edges, and in summer they kill cari¬ 
bou in the mountains. They live in 
almost complete isolation, without salt, 
with scarcely any substance of vegetal 
origin, in the northernmost climate inhab¬ 
ited by human beings, having no food 
besides meat, blood, and blubber; no 
clothing except the skins of birds and 
animals. Pop. in 1854, according to Kane, 
140; in 1884, according to Nourse, 80; 
Peary enumerated 253 in 1895, reduced 
by disease to 234 in 1897. Their villages 
and camping places at various times are: 
Akpan, Anoatok, Etah, Igludahoming, 
Igluduasuin, Ikalu, Imnangana,Iterlesoa, 
Itibling, Kana, Kangerdluksoa, Kangidli, 
Karmenak, Karsuit, Kiatang, Kingatok, 
Koinsun, Kukan, Navialik, Netlek, Nu- 
tun, Pikirlu, Pituarvik, Sarfalik, Udluh- 
sen, Umana, and Uwarosuk. See Kroe- 
ber, cited below. 

Arctic Highlanders.—Ross, Voy. of Discov., 183, 
1819. Etah.—Hayes, Arct. Boat. Jour., 197. 1860. 
Ita-Eskimos.—Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., 
in, 102,1885. Ita'mi.—Stein in Petermanns Mitt., 
198, 1902. Itaner.—Bessells, Amer. Nordpol. 
Exped., 351,1879. Itanese.—Bessells in Am. Nat., 
xviii, 863, 1884. Smith Sound Eskimo.—Kroeber 
in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xn, 266, 1899. 

Itaanyadi (Ita a n yadi, ‘deer people’). 
A Biloxi clan.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. 
A. E., 243, 1897. 

Itaes.—A former Chumashan rancheria 
connected with Dolores mission, San 
Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Itafi. A district of Florida where one 
of theTimuquanan dialects was spoken.— 
Pareja (ca. 1614), Arte Leng. Timuq., xxi, 
1886. 

Itahasiwaki (‘old log’). A former 
Lower Creek town on lower Chattahoo¬ 
chee r., 3 m. above Ft Gaines, Ga., with 
100 inhabitants in 1820. 

Eto-husse-wakkes.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 
1822. 

Itamalgi. A Creek clan. 

Itamalgi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1,155,1884. 
Tamalgi.—Ibid. Ta-mul'-kee.—Morgan, Anc.Soc., 
161,1877. 


Itamameou. A Montagnais mission in 
1854, e. of Natashquan, on theN. bank of 
the St Lawrence, Quebec province. 

Itamameou.—Arnaud (1854) in Hind, Lab. Penin., 
11,178,1863. Itamamiou.—Hind, ibid., 180. 

Itara. A former village in n. Florida, 
visited by De Soto’s troops in 1539. 
Ytara.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 130, 1850. 

Itaywiy. A former Luiseno village 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey 
mission, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860. 

Itazipcho (‘without bows’). A band 
of the Sans Arcs Sioux, the same as Min- 
ishala, though the two were originally 
distinct. 

Itazipco-lica,— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 219, 
1897. Itaziptco-qtca. —Ibid. Me-ne-sharne. —Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 34, 1806 (given as a Bruld 
division). Mini-cala. —Dorsey, op. cit. Mini- 
sala. —Ibid. Min-i-sha'. —Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 375, 1862. Red water band. —Cul¬ 
bertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 142,1851. 

Itchadak. A former Aleut village on 
one of the e. Aleutian ids., Alaska.— 
Coxe, Russ. Discov., 165, 1787. 

Itchhasualgi (itchhasua ‘beaver’, algi 
‘people’). A Creek clan.—Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884. 

Itchualgi ( itchu ‘deer’, algi ‘people’). 
A Creek clan. 

E'-cho. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161,1877. Itchualgi.' — 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884. 

Iteghu (‘ burnt faces ’). A band of the 
Hunkpatina or Lower Yanktonai Sioux. 
Ite gu.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897. 
Ite-xu. —Ibid. 

Iterlesoa ( IterU'hsoa , ‘bay’). An Ita 
Eskimo settlement on Granville bay, lat. 
76° 50 / , n. Greenland.—Stein in Peter¬ 
manns Mitt., no. 9, map, 1902. 

Iteshicha (‘bad face’). A band of the 
Oglala Sioux. 

Bad Faces. —Brackett in Smithson. Rep. 1876, 467, 
1877. E-tach-e-cha.— Ibid. Ite-citca.— Dorsey in 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897. Ite-sida.— Ibid. 
Oglala-qtca.— Ibid, (‘real Oglala’). 

Iteshichaetanhan (‘ from bad face ’). A 
band of the Oglala Sioux. 

Ite-citca-eta n ha n .—Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897. Ite-sida-etaghag.—Ibid. 

Ithkyemamits. A tribe or band of 
doubtful linguistic affinity, either Chi- 
nookan or Shahaptian, living in 1812 on 
Columbia r. in Klickitat co., VVash., nearly 
opposite The Dalles. Their number was 
estimated at 600. 

Iltte-Kai-Mamits. —Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., xn, 
26, 1821. Ithkyemamits.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
368, 1822. 

Itibleng (‘portage’). An Ita Eskimo 
village at the entrance of Inglefield gulf, 
n. w. Greenland. 

i'tibleng.— Stein in Petermanns Mitt., 198, 1902. 
Ittibloo. — Peary in Geog. Jour., ii, 224,1898. Itti- 
blu. —Peary, My Arct. Jour., 80, 1893. Ittiblu- 

Netlik.— Sharp, Arct. Highlanders, II, 244,-. 

Iticha. A Yokuts (Mariposan) tribe on 
Kings r., Cal., below the Choinimni and 
above the Wichikik. 

Aiticha. —A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906 (correct form). 
I-tach-ee. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. 
Itaches. —Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., lstsess., 22,1852. I-te-che.— Wessells (1853) 
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-40 



626 


ITIJARELLING-IVIKAT 


[b. a. e. 


I-techees.—McKee et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 75,1853. It-i'-cha.—Powers 
in Cont. N. A, Ethnol., hi, 370,1877. I-to-ches.— 
Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc.4,32d Cong., spec, 
sess., 252,1852. Ituchas.—Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
399, 1858 (a band of the Wattokes high up on 
Kings r.). 

Itijarelling. A summer settlement of 
Padlimiut Eskimo on Exeter sd., Baffin 
land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1888. 

Itivimiut (‘people of the farther side,’ 
so called by the Eskimo of Labrador 
proper). A tribe of Labrador Eskimo 
inhabiting the e. coast of Hudson bay, 
from lat. 53° to 58°; pop. estimated at 500. 
These people hunt in the interior half¬ 
way across the peninsula, continually 
scouring the coast for seal and the plains 
and hills for caribou to obtain necessary 
food and clothing. 

Itivimiut. —Turner in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., ii, 99, 
1888. Thiviment.—Boas in Am. Antiq., 40, 1888 
(misprint). 

Itivliarsuk. An Eskimo village in w. 
Greenland, lat. 73° 30L—Science, xi, map, 
259, 1888. 

Itiwa Ateuna (‘ those of the midmost 
all’). A Zuni phratry embracing the 
Pichi or Mula (Parrot or Macaw), Taa 
(Seed or Corn), and Yatokya (Sun) 
clans.—Cushing, inf n, 1891. 

Itliok. A Squawmish village commu¬ 
nity on the left bank of Squawmisht r., 
Brit. Col. 

Itli'oq.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 
YIMe'q.—Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Itokakhtina (‘dwellers at the south’). 
A band of the Sisseton Sioux; an off¬ 
shoot of the Basdecheshni. 

ItokaH-tina.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 
1897. Itokaq-tina.—Ibid. 

Itomapa. Mentioned by Martin (Hist. 
La., i, 252,1820) as a tribe, on the w. side 
of the lower Mississippi, which sent a 
deputation to the village of the Acolapissa 
in 1717 to meet Bienville. Cf. Ibitoupa. 

Itrahani. The Cottonwood clan of Co- 
chiti pueblo, N. Mex. 

Hiits Hanyi.—Bandelier, Delight Makers, 256, 
1890 (same?). I'trahani hanuch.—Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896 {hanuch— ‘ people’). 

Itsaatiaga {It-sa'-a-ti-a-ga) . APaviotso 
band formerly living about Unionville, 
w. Nev.—Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E., 
1881. 

Itscheabine. A division of the Assini- 
boin, numbering 850, including 250 war¬ 
riors, in 100 tipis, when seen by Lewis 
and Clark in 1804, at which time they 
roved on the headwaters of Mouse (Sou¬ 
ris), Qu’Appelle, and Assiniboine rs., in 
the United States and Canada. In 1808, 
according to Henry (Coues, New Light, 
ii, 522, 1897), they were at enmity with 
the Dakota, Shoshoni, and with some of 
the Arikara and other tribes, but were 
friendly with the Cree. They lived by 
hunting, conducting trade with the Hud¬ 
son’s Bay, Northwest, and X. Y. fur 
companies, whose posts were 150 m. n. of 


Ft Mandan. They are said to have paid 
little attention to their engagements and 
were great drunkards. In 1853 they 
numbered 10 lodges under chief Les 
Yeux Gris. (f. w. h. ) 

Gens de Feuilles.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., 1 ,217, 
1893. Gens de la Feuille. —Badin (1830) in Ann. de 
la Prop, de la Foi, iv, 536,1843 (same?). Gens des 
fees or Girls.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 
104, 1905 (given as traders’ nickname). Gens 
des filles.—Maximilian, Trav., 194,1843. Gens des 
Tee.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, op. cit. Girls’ 
band.—Hayden quoted by Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 222, 1897. Itscheabine.—Maximilian, op. 
cit. Little Girl Assiniboines.—Coues, Henry and 
Thompson Jour. (1808), Ii, 522, 1897. Na-co'-tah 
0-see-gah.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, op. cit. 
Osgeegah. — Ibid. We-che-ap-pe-nah. —D e n ig 
(1853)quoted by Dorsey,op. cit. Wi-ic'-ap-i-nah.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 387, 1862. 
Witci n ya n pifia.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 223, 
1897. 

Itseyi ( Itshjl , ‘new green place,’ or 
‘ place of fresh green ’; often falsely ren¬ 
dered ‘Brasstown,’ from the confusion of 
Itseyi and UntsaiyV, the latter term sig¬ 
nifying ‘brass’). The name of several 
former Cherokee settlements. One was 
on Brasstown cr. of Tugaloo r., in Oconee 
co., S. C.; another was on Little Tennessee 
r., near the present Franklin, Macon co., 
N. C., and probably about the junction of 
Cartoogaja cr.; a third, known to the 
whites as Brasstown, was on upper Brass- 
town cr. of Hiwassee r., Towns co., Ga.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 523, 1900. 

Echay.—Mouzon map quoted by Royce in 5th Rep. 
B. A. E., 143, 1887. Echia.—Mooney, op. cit. 
Echoe.—Bartram, Travels, 371, 1792." Echoee.— 
Doc. of 1755'quoted by Royce, op. cit. Etchoe.— 
Scaife, Hist. Catawba, 7, 1896. Etchowee.— 
Mooney, op. cit. 

Ittatso. The principal village of the 
Ucluelet (q v.) on Ucluelet arm of Bar¬ 
clay sd., w. coast of Vancouver id.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 263, 1902. 

Ituc. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Itukemuk. A former Luiseno village 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey 
mission, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860. 

Ivan. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on 
the divide between Unalaklik and Yukon 
rs., Alaska. Allen (Rep. Alaska, 131, 
1877) gave the population as 69. 

Ivan’s barrabora.—Dali, Alaska, 531, 1870. 

Ivigtite. A variety of paragonite. Ac¬ 
cording to Dana (Text-book of Mineral., 
354, 1888) it occurs in yellow scales, also 
granular, with cryolite from Greenland. 
It was named from Ivigtuk, Greenland, 
where it was discovered, a place-name 
derived from the Eskimo language. The 
-ite is an English suffix. (a. f. c.) 

Ivigtut. A settlement of Europeans 
and Eskimo in s. w. Greenland, lat. 61° 
15L—Nansen, First Crossing, ii, 182,1890. 

Ivikat. A missionary station 16 m. n. 
of Julianehaab, s. Greenland. — Kol- 
dewey, German Arct. Exped., 203, 1874. 


BULL. 30] 


IVIMIUT-JACONA 


627 


Ivimiut. An Eskimo settlement near 
Lindenov fjord, e. Greenland, with 12 
inhabitants in 1829.—Graah, Exped., 114, 
1837. 

Ivitachuco. A former principal town 
of the Apalachee, possibly near the pres¬ 
ent Wacahotee, Fla. 

Attachooka. —Archdale (1707) in Carroll, Hist. 
Coll. S. C., II, 352, 1836. Ibitachka.— Ibid., 575. 
Ivitachma. — Bancroft, Hist. U. S., II, 194, 1884. 
tvitachua. —Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., West Indies 
map, 1761. Ivi-ta-chuco. — Biedma (1544) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., II, 99, 1850. Ivitanoa.— 
Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., 135, map, 1761. Vita- 
chuco.— Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., II, 134, 1850. Yvitachua. — Bartram, 
Trav., I, map, 1799. 

Ivory. See Boneicork. 

Ivy Log. A Cherokee settlement, about 
the period of the removal of the tribe to 
Indian Ter. in 1839, on Ivy Log cr., 
Union co., n. Ga. (j. m. ) 

Iwai. A former Yaquina village on the 
n. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 

I-wai'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229, 
1890. 

Iwayusota (‘uses up by begging for’; 
‘uses up with the mouth’). A band of 
the Oglala Sioux.—Dorsey (after Cleve¬ 
land) in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897. 

Iwi. The Eagle gens of the Kadoha- 
dacho.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1093, 1896. 

Ixtacan. A pueblo of the Cora and the 
seat of a mission; situated on the s. bank 
of the Rio San Pedro, about lat. 22°, 
Tepic, Mexico. 

Diskatan. —Hrdlicka, inf’n, 1906. S. Pedro de 
Ixtacan.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 280, 1864. 

Iyaaye ( I-ya-dye , ‘sunflower’). An 
Apache clan or band at San Carlos 
agency and Ft Apache in 1881.—Bourke 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 111, 1890. 
See Yachin. 

Iyakoza (‘wart on a horse’s leg’). A 
band of the Bruld Teton Sioux. 

A-a-ko-za.— Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 376,1862. Big Ankle band— Ibid. Big-legged 
horses. —Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 
1851. Iyakoza.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 
1897. Iyak’oza. —Ibid. 

Iyama Ateuna (‘those of the upper¬ 
most’). A phratry embracing the 
Kyakyali (Eagle) and Ana (Tobacco) 
clans of the Zuni.—Cushing, inf’n, 1891. 

Iyis. A Karok village on Klamath r., 
Cal., inhabited in 1860. 

I-yiss. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23,1860. 

Iza. A settlement of which Coronado 
was informed by the Indian known as 
The Turk, while on the Rio Grande in 
New Mexico in 1540-41, as a place, 6 
or 7 days’ journey distant, at which the 
army could obtain provisions on its way 
to “Copala” and Quivira. It was possi¬ 
bly imaginary; if not, it may have been 
a settlement of the Eyish, a Caddoan 
tribe of Texas. See Mota-Padilla (1742), 
Nueva Galicia, 164, 1870. (f. w. h.) 

Iztacans. A name adopted by Rafi- 
nesque (introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 26, 
1824) for an imaginary prehistoric race of 
the United States. 


Jack. See Kintpuash. 

Jackash. A name of the American 
mink ( Putorius vison ) in use in the fur 
country (Coues, N. Am. Must., 172,1877). 
From atchdkas, the name of this animal 
in the Cree dialect of Algonquian. This 
wordLacombe (Diet., 316, 1874) explains 
as a diminutive of wittakay , signifying 
‘genitals,’ in reference to the glands of the 
creature. (a. f. c.) 

Jack Indians. An unidentified tribe 
mentioned by Dobbs (Hudson Bay, 13, 
1744), who states that in 1731 they came 
to trade at the mouth of Albany r., 
N. W. Ter., Canada. Named as distinct 
from Moose River Indians (Monsoni), 
Sturgeon Indians (Nameuilini), and 
French Indians. 

Jackquyome ( Jack-quy-ome ). A body of 
Salish of Kamloops agency, Brit. Col.; 
pop. 257 in 1884, when their name ap¬ 
pears for the last time.—Can. Ind. Aff. 
for 1884, 188. 

Jacobs Cabins. A settlement on Yough- 
iogheny r. in 1753 (Gist in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 3d s., v. 102, 1836). It may 
have been near Jacobs cr., Fayette co., 
Pa., and was perhaps named from Cap¬ 
tain Jacobs. (j. m. ) 

Jacobs, Captain. A Delaware chief who 
participated in the ambush of Gen. Brad- 
dock’s army, and a leader in conjunction 
with Shingis in the raids and massacres 
on the frontiers of the settlements of 
Pennsylvania that followed the British 
disaster. A price was set on both their 
heads. They had a rendezvous at Kit¬ 
tanning, Pa., whither they took their 
spoils and captives. Col. John Armstrong 
marched against this place and assailed 
it at daybreak on Sept. 8, 1756. The 
Pennsylvanians surrounded the village 
and the Indians defended themselves 
bravely but hopelessly from their burn¬ 
ing wigwams. Jacobs was killed with all 
his family.—Drake, Bk. Inds., 534,1880. 

Jacona (Span, form of Tewa S&kona). 
A former small Tewa pueblo situated 
with Cuyamunque a short distance w. of 
Nambe, on the s. side of Pojoaque r., 
Santa F6 co., N. Mex. At the time of the 
Pueblo rebellion of 1680 it was a visita 
of Nambe mission. It was abandoned in 
1696, its inhabitants settling among the 
other Tewa pueblos, and in 1702 the grant 
of land that had been made to it by 
Spain became the property of Ignacio de 
Roybal. See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, iv, 85,1892. (f. w. h. ) 

Iacona.— Buschmann, Neu-Mex., 230, 1858. Jaco- 
ma.—Davis, El Gringo, 88,1857. Jacona.—Vetan- 
curt (1693) Teatro Mex., in, 317, 1871. Sacona.— 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, IV, 85, 1892 (Ja¬ 
cona, or). Sa'kona.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. 
E., 1885 (Tewa pronunciation). S. Domingo de 
Xacomo.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. S. 
Domingo de Xacoms.—VValch, Charte America, 
1805. S. Domingo de Xacona.—D’Anville, map Am. 
Sept., 1746. Xacona.—De l’Isle, carte Mexique et 
Floride, 1703. Xacono.—De l’Isle, Atlas Nouveau, 
map 60,1733. 


628 


JACUENCACAHEL-JATONABINE 


[b. a. e. 


Jacuencacahel. A former rancheria un¬ 
der the mission of San Francisco Xavier 
de Biaundo, in Lower California.—Writer 
of 1728 in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 187, 
1857. 

Jade. See Nephrite. 

Jagavans. The name of a small tribe 
formerly on the Texas coast; mentioned 
by Harris (Coll. Voy., i, 802, 1705) as 
one of those visited about 1530 by Cabeza 
de Vaca, as not far from the Chorruco, 
and as neighbors of the Mariames. Pos¬ 
sibly the Yguases of Cabeza de Vaca’s 
Relation (Smith trans., 92, 1871). 

Jagaya. A former village in a well- 
watered country 50 leagues from Santa 
Helena and 20 leagues from the sea, in 
n. w. South Carolina; visited by Juan 
Pardo in 1565.—Yandera (1567) in Smith, 
Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 16, 1857. 

Jakobshavn. A Danish missionary sta¬ 
tion and trading post on Disko bay, w. 
Greenland, established in 1741. Pop. 300 
in 1867. 

Jacobs-haven.—Crantz, Hist, of Greenland, I, 15, 
1767. 

Jamac. A former rancheria, probably 
of the Sobaipuri of s. Arizona, and a vi- 
sita of the mission of Guevavi in 1732.— 
Alegre quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. 
States, i, 524, 1884. 

Jamaica. A former pueblo of theOpata 
in n. e. Sonora, Mexico, under the juris¬ 
diction of the municipality of Cum pus, 
in the district of Moctezuma (Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 343, 1864). It contained 9 
civilized inhabitants in 1900. 

Jameco. The supposed name of “ a small 
tribe or family of Indians subject to some 
other,’’ thought to have dwelt formerly 
on Long Island, N. Y., near Jamaica, 
which derives its name from the band. 
Jameco.—Thompson, Long Id., 382,1839. Jemaco.— 
Flint, Early Long Id., 198,1896. 

Janemo. See Ninigret. 

Janos. An extinct tribe which, with 
the Jocomes, inhabited the region of Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico, between Casas Grandes, 
Chihuahua, and Fronteras. Bandelier 
(Nation, July 2, 1885) classes them as 
the most southerly band of the Apache, 
called after presidio Janos in n. w. 
Chihuahua. He believes that the tribe 
slowly arose after 1684 and was composed 
of Lipan, Mescalero, and other Apache 
stragglers, together with renegade Suma, 
Toboso, Tarahumare, and Opata Indians, 
and Spanish captives. Missions were 
established among them at an early date 
at Janos and Carretas, but were aban¬ 
doned on account of the incursions of the 
Apache proper, with whom the Janos 
were subsequently merged. Frequent 
mention is made of the Janos by Jesuit 
missionaries during the first half of the 
18th century, but of their language and 
customs almost nothing is known. 
Hanes.—Linschoten, Descr. de l’Am., map 1,1638. 
Hanos.—Benavides, Memorial, 7, 1630. Jamos.— 


Duro, Penalosa, 63,1882. Janeros.—Bandelier in 
N. Y. Nation, July 2, 1885. Janos.—Kino (1690) 
in Doc. Hist, Mex., 4th s., I, 230, 1856, Yanos.— 
Miihlenpfordt, Mejico, II, 521,1844. 

Jantamais. Mentioned by Domenech 
(Deserts of N. Am., i, 441, 1860) in a list 
of tribes without further notice. Possibly 
the Yanktonai; otherwise unknown. 

Japazaws. A Powhatan Indian, chief 
of Potomac and a friend of the English. 
In 1611 he inveigled Pocahontas on board 
an English ship to be detained as a hos¬ 
tage for the good behavior of Powhatan, 
her father.—Drake, Bk. Inds., 357, 1880. 

Jappayon. A former village connected 
with San Carlos mission, Cal., and said 
to have been Esselen.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Jap ill. Given by the Yavapai to Fray 
Francisco Garces in 1776 (Diary, 405, 
1900) as the name, seemingly, of a Yuman 
tribe; locality not recorded, but possibly 
in the vicinity of the Rio Colorado. 

Japiel.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 349,1864 (misprint- 
ingGarc£s). Japui.—Garc6s,op.cit.,444. Tapiel.— 
Cortez (1799) in Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3, 
126,1856 (misprint). 

Jars. See Dishes , Pottery , Receptacles. 

Jasniga. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with San Juan 
Bautista mission, Cal.— Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Nov. 25, 1860. 

Jasper. An impure, opaque form of 
chalcedony displaying various shades of 
color, the yellow, red, and brown hues 
predominating. When grayish or green¬ 
ish and mottled with red the name blood¬ 
stone is sometimes applied. It was much 
used by the native tribes for flaked im¬ 
plements of several varieties, and more 
rarely for hammers, celts, axes, and orna¬ 
ments. It occurs in irregular masses, or 
pockets, in connection with other forma¬ 
tions in many sections of the United 
States, and was often obtained by the 
Indians in the form of fugitive pebbles 
and bowlders; but in Pennsylvania, and 
perhaps in other states, it was quarried 
from the original beds. The best known 
quarries are in Bucks, Lehigh, and Berks 
cos., e. Pa. Jasper was extensively w T orked 
by the ancient inhabitants of Converse 
and neighboring counties of Wyoming, 
who found this material as well as the 
translucent varieties of chalcedony in con¬ 
nection with the quartzite of the region. 
See Chalcedony. 

Consult Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. 
Pub., Anthrop. ser., n, no. 4, 1900; 
Holmes in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Mer¬ 
cer in Am. Anthrop., vir, 80, 1894. 

(w. H. H.) 

Jatonabine (‘people of the rocks’). An 
Assiniboin band living in 1808 in n. w. 
Manitoba, and having 40 tipis. 

E-an-to-ah.—Denig quoted by Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 222,1897 (‘Stone Indians’: “the original 
appellation for the whole nation”). Eascab.— 
Franklin, Narr., 104, 1823. Gens de Roche.—Ibid., 
306. Gens des Roches.—Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Yah, 387,1862. Gens des rosches.—Ind. 


BULL. 30] 


J AUM ALTURGO-JEMEZ 


629 


Aff. Rep., 289,1854. I'-ag-to'-an.—Hayden, Eth- 
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 387, 1862. Ie-ska-pi.— 
Am. Natur., 829, 1882. I n ya !l to n wa n .—Dorsey in 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 223,1897 (= ‘stone village’). 
Jatonabine.—M ax imilian, Trav., 194,1843. Rocks.— 
Larpenteur (1829), Narr., I, 109, 1898. Stone In¬ 
dians.—Maximilian, Trav., 194, 843 (so called by 
the English). 

Jaumalturgo. A rancheria of the Pima 
or the Sobaipuri in 1697, s. of the ruin of 
Casa Grande, in the present Arizona. 

San Gregoris Jaumalturgo. — Mange quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 301, 1853 (Gregoris = 
Gregorio). 

Jeaga. A village at the s. extremity of 
Florida, about 1570. 

Caga.—Fontaneda (ca. 1575) in Ternaux-Compans, 
Voy., XX, 32,1841. Feaga.—Shipp, Hist. Fla., 587, 
1881. Jaega.—Fontaneda, Narr., Smith trans., 21, 
1854. Teaga.—Fontaneda in Ternaux-Compans, 
op. cit., 23. Teago.—Ibid., 32. 

Jeboaltae. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, near San Juan Bautista 
mission, Cal. 

Jeboaltae.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Nov. 23, 1860. 
Teboaltac.—Engelhardt, Franciscans in Cal., 398, 
1897. 

Jedakne. A village, Iroquois or Dela¬ 
ware, that existed in the 18th century on 
the w. branch of Susquehanna r., prob¬ 
ably on the site of Dewart, Northumber¬ 
land co., Pa. (J. N. b. h. ) 

Jedacne.—Lattr6, map, 1784. Jedakne.—Homann 
Heirs’ map, 1756. 

Jedandago. A former Seneca hamlet, 
e. of Irondequoit bay, L. Ontario, N. Y.— 
Doc. of 1687 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
hi, 434, 1853. 

Jemez (from Ha'-mish , or Hae'-mish , 
the Keresan name of the pueblo.—Bande- 
lier). A village on the n. bank of Jemez r., 
about 20 m. n. w. of Bernalillo, N. Mex. 
According to tradition the Jemez had 
their origin in the n., at a lagoon called 
Uabunatota (apparently identical with 
the Shipapulima and Cibobe of other 
Pueblo tribes), whence they slowly drift¬ 
ed into the valleys of the upper tribu¬ 
taries of the Rio Jemez—the Guadalupe 
and San Diego—where they resided in a 
number of villages, and finally into the 
sandy valley of the Jemez proper, which 
they now occupy, their habitat being 
bounded on the s. by the range of the 
w. division of the Rio Grande Keresan 
tribes—the Sia and Santa Ana. Casta¬ 
neda, the chronicler of Coronado’s expe¬ 
dition of 1541, speaks of 7 pueblos of the 
Jemez tribe in addition to 3 others in 
the.province of Aguas Calientes, identified 
by Simpson with the Jemez Hot Springs 
region. Espejo in 1583 also mentions that 
7 villages were occupied by the Jemez, 
while in 1598 Onate heard of 11 but saw 
only 8. In the opinion of Bandelier it is 
probable that 10 pueblos were inhabited 
by the tribe in the early part of the 16th 
century. 

Following is a list of the pueblos for¬ 
merly occupied by the Jemez people so 
far as known. The names include those 
given by Onate, which may be identical 
with some of the others: Amushungkwa, 


Anyukwinu, Astialakwa, Bulitzequa, 
Catroo, Ceca, Guatitruti, Guayoguia, 
Gyusiwa, Hanakwa, Kiashita, Kiatsukwa, 
Mecastria, Nokyuntseleta, Nonyishagi, 
Ostyalakwa, Patoqua, Pebulikwa, Pek- 
wiligii, Potre, Seshukwa, Setokwa, To- 
wakwa, Trea, Tyajuindena, Tyasoliwa, 
Uahatzaa, Wabakwa, Yjar, Zolatungze- 
zhii. 

Doubtless the reason for the division of 
the tribe into so many lesser village com¬ 
munities instead of aggregating in a single 
pueblo for defense against the persistent 
aggressiveness of the Navaho, according 
to Bandelier, was the fact that cultivable 
areas in the sandy valley of the Jemez 
and its lower tributaries are small and 
at somewhat considerable distances from 
one another; but another and perhaps 
even more significant reason was that the 
Navaho were apparently not troublesome 
to the Pueblos at the time of the Spanish 
conquest. On the establishment of Span¬ 
ish missions in this section and the intro¬ 
duction of improved methods of utilizing 
the water for irrigation, however, the 



JEMEZ MAN AND WIFE. (VROMAN, PHOTO.) 


Jemez were induced to abandon their 
pueblos one by one, until about the year 
1622 they became consolidated into the 
two settlements of Gyusiwa and probably 
Astialakwa, mainly through the efforts of 
Fray Martin de Arvide. These pueblos 
are supposed to have been the seats of 
the missions of San Diego and San Joseph, 
respectively, and both contained chapels 
probably from 1618. Astialakwa was per¬ 
manently abandoned prior to the Pueblo 
revolt of 1680, but in the meantime an¬ 
other pueblo (probably Patoqua) seems 
to have been established, which became 
the mission of San Juan de los Jemez. 
About the middle of the 17th century the 
Jemez conspired with the Navaho against 
the Spaniards, but the outbreak plotted 
was repressed by the hanging of 29 of the 
Jemez. A few years later the Jemez were 
again confederated with the Navaho and 
some Tigua against the Spaniards, but the 
contemplated rebellion was again quelled, 





630 


JEMEZ 


[b. a. e. 


the Navaho soon resuming their hostil¬ 
ity toward the village dwellers. In the 
revolt of the Pueblos in Aug., 1680, the 
Jemez took a prominent part. They mur¬ 
dered the missionary at Gyusiwa (San 
Diego de Jemez), but the missionary at 
San Juan de los Jemez, with the alcalde 
mayor and three soldiers, succeeded in 
escaping. In 1681, when Gov. Otermin 
attempted to regain possession of New 
Mexico, the Jemez retreated to the mesas, 
but returned to their village on the evac¬ 
uation of the region by the Spaniards. 
Here they probably remained until 1688, 
when Cruzate appeared, causing them to 
flee again to the heights. When Vargas 
came in 1692 the Jemez were found on the 
mesa in a large pueblo, but they were in¬ 
duced to descend and to promise the Span¬ 
iards their support. The Jemez, how¬ 
ever, failed to keep their word, but waged 
war during 1693 and 1694 against their 
Keresan neighbors on account of their 
fidelity to the Spaniards. Vargas returned 
to the Jemez in 1693, when they reiterated 
their false promises. In July, 1694, he 
again went to Jemez with 120 Spaniards 
and some allies from Santa Ana and Sia. 
The mesa was stormed, and after a des¬ 
perate engagement, in which 84 natives 
were killed, the pueblo was captured. 
In the month following, Vargas (after 
destroying this village, another on a 
mesa some distance below, and one built 
by their Santo Domingo allies 3 leagues 
n. ) returned to Santa Fe with 361 prison¬ 
ers and a large quantity of stores. From 
this time the only then existing pueblo 
of the Jemez reoccupied was San Diego, 
or Gyusiwa, which was inhabited until 
1696, when the second revolt occurred, 
the Indians killing their missionary and 
again fleeing to the mesas, where they 
constructed temporary shelters. Here 
they were joined by some Navaho, Zuni, 
and Acoma allies, and made hostile dem¬ 
onstrations toward the Sia, Santa Ana, 
and San Felipe people, but in June of the 
year mentioned they were repulsed by a 
small detachment of Spaniards from Ber¬ 
nalillo and Sia with a loss of 30 men, 8 of 
whom were Acoma. The defeated Jemez 
this time fled to the Navaho country, 
where they remained several years, finally 
returning to their former home and con¬ 
structing the present village, called by 
them Walatoa, “Village of the Bear.” 
In 1728,108 of the inhabitants died of pes¬ 
tilence. In 1782 Jemez was made a visita 
of the mission of Sia. 

The Jemez clans are: Waha (Cloud), 
Seh (Eagle), Sonsa (Badger), Daahl 
(Earth), Kyiahl (Crow), Pe (Sun), Kyunu 
(Corn), Sungki (Turquoise), Weha (Cala¬ 
bash), Yang (Coyote), Kio (Pine). 

The population of the tribe in 1890 
was 428; in 1904, 498, including a score of 


descendants of the remnant of the Pecos 
(q. v.), who left their old home on the 
upper Rio Pecos in 1838 to join their kin¬ 
dred. 

Consult Bancroft, Arizona and N. Mex., 
1889; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
iv, 200-217, 1892; Hewett in Bull. 32, 
B. A. E., 1906; Holmes in Am. An- 
throp., vii, no. 2, 1905. See also Pecos , 
Pueblos , Tanoan. (f. w. h.) 

Amayes.— Duro, Don Diego de Penalosa, 128,1882. 
Ameges.— Siguenza quoted by Buschmann, Neu- 
Mex., 228, 264, 1858. Ameias. Espejo (1583) 
quoted by Mendoza (1586) in Hakluyt Soc. Pub., 
xv, 245, 1854. Ameies.— Mendoza in Hakluyt, 
Voy., Ill, 469,1600. Amejes. —Ibid., 462. Ameries.— 
Squier in Am. Review, 523, Nov. 1848. Amies.— 
Davis,Span.Conq.N.Mex.,252,1869. Amios.—Ibid., 
map. Amires.s— Ogilby, Amer., 294,1671. Djemez.— 
Gallatin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxvii, 280, 
1851. Emeaes. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
IV, 206, 1892. Emeges. —Espejo (1583) in Doc. 
In<§d., xv, 179,1871. Emenes.— Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 132, 1889. Ernes. —Cordova (1619) inTer- 
naux-Compans, Voy., x,444, 1838. Ernes.— Villa- 
gran, Hist. Nueva Mex., 155, 1610. Emexes.— Es¬ 
pejo (1583) in Doc. In6d., xv, 116,1871. Emmes.— 
Ofiate (1598), ibid., xvi, 102, 260, 1871. Emmes.— 
Columbus Memorial Vol., 155, 1893. Gemes.— 
Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., pt. 2,421,1748. Gemex.— 
Zdrate-Salmeron ( ca. 1629) quoted by Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, I, 600,1882. Gemez. —Humboldt, Atlas 
Nouv. Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Gomez.— Arrow- 
smith, map N. A., 1795, ed. 1814. Hae-mish.— 
Bandelier in Revue d’Ethnog., 203, 1886 (Queres 
name). Ha-mish.— Bandelier in N. Y. Staats- 
zeitung, June 28, 1885 (Queres name). Ha-waw- 
wah-lah-too-waw. —Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 
143, 1850 (proper name of pueblo). He'-mai.— 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Isleta name). 
Hemeos. —Z&rate-Salmeron (1629) quoted by Ban¬ 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 205,1892. Hemes. — 
Castaneda (ca. 1565) in Ternaux-Compans, Voy., 
ix, 138,1838. Hemes.— Benavides (1630) quoted by 
Gallatin in Nouv. Ann. Vov., 5th s., xxvii, 305, 
1851. Hemeshitse. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 
1895 (Laguna and San Felipe name). He'-me- 
shu-tsa.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sia 
form). Hemez.— Squier in Am. Review, 522, Nov. 
1848 (misquoting Castaneda). He'mi.— Hodge, 
field notes, B. A. E., 1895 ((Santa Ana name). 
He-mi-ma'. —Ibid. (Picuris name). Hemishitz. — 
Ibid. (Acoma name). Henex.— Ztirate-Salmeron 
(ca. 1629) quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, iv,205,1892. Hermes.— Curtis, Children of the 
Sun, 121, 1883 (misquoting Coronado). Hernes. — 
Kern in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 32, 39, 1854. 
He’'-wa’. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E.,1895 (Pecos 
name of pueblo). Hiem-ai. —Gatschet, Isleta MS. 
vocab., B. A.E., 1885 (Isletanameof pueblo). Hie- 
mide.— Ibid. (pl.Hiemnin; Isleta name for the peo¬ 
ple). James.— Marcy in Rep. Sec. War, 196, 1850. 
Jamez. —Gallegas (1844) inEmory, Recon. ,478,1848. 
Jemas.— Wislizenus, Memoir, 24, 1848. Jemes. — 
Mendoza (1742) in Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 
213, 1867. Jemex.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
12, 1863. Jemez. —Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 59, 
1850. Jemmes. —Peet in Am. Antiq., xvn, 354, 
1895. Jemos. —Loew (1875) in Wheeler Surv. Rep., 
VII, 345, 1879. Jenies.— Calhoun in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, ill, 633,1853. Jermz. —Kern, ibid., iv, 
39, 1854. Jeures. —Ward in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 
210, 1868. Jimenez. —Escudero, Not. Estad. Chi¬ 
huahua, 180, 1834. Jumez. —Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 37, 
1884. Mai-dec-kiz-ne.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 6,1884 
(‘Wolf neck’: Navaho name).’ Tames. — Brack- 
enridge, Early Spanish Discov., 19, 1857. 
Temes.— Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 259, Apr. 
1882. Temez.— Alegre, Hist. Comp. Jesus, i, 336, 
1841. Tuhoa.— Bandelier in Ausland, 813, 1882 
( = ‘houses’: proper name of the pueblo). Tu'- 
wa.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (own name 
of pueblo). Uala-to-hua. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, ill, 260, 1890 (‘village of the bear’ : 
own name of pueblo). TJal-to-hua.— Ibid., iv, 203, 
1892. Vallatoa. —Loew in Wheeler Surv. Rep.,viq 


bull. 30] JENNESEDAGA-JICARILLA 


344,1879. Wa-la-nah.—JouvenceauinCath. Pion., 
i, no. 9,13,1906. Walatoa.—Gatschet in Mag. Am. 
Hist., 259, Apr. 1882. Wa'-la-tu-wa.—Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895. Wong'-ge'.—Ibid. (‘Navaho 
place’: Santa Clara and San Ildefonso name). 
Xemes.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 950,1736. x eme s.—ten 
Kate, Synonymie, 6, 1884. Xemez.—Ruxton, Ad¬ 
ventures, 194, 1848. Yemez.—Latham, Yar. of 
Man, 396, 1850. Zemas.—Simpson in Jour. Am. 
Geog. Soc., V, 195, 1874. 

Jennesedaga.—A former Seneca village 
on the right bank of Allegheny r., 17 m. 
above Warren, Pa., which in 1816 was 
the residence of the celebrated Corn- 
planter; it then consisted of 12 houses.— 
Day, Hist. Coll. Pa., 656, 1853. 

Jenzenaque. A former Natchez village. 
Dumont (Memoire, ii, 97,1753) mentions 
it in addition to Great, Flour, Apple, and 
Gray villages, in the early part of the 
18th century. The filth village, men¬ 
tioned by most authors of his period, is 
Terre Blanche, and Jenzenaque may be 
its Natchez name. 

Jerome Big Eagle. See Wamdetanka. 

Jeromestown. A former Delaware vil¬ 
lage near the present Jeromesville, Ash¬ 
land co., Ohio, on a section of land set 
aside for the use of the Delawares by act 
of Mar. 3, 1807, but ceded to the United 
States by treaty of Sept. 29, 1817. It re¬ 
ceived its name from Jean Baptiste Je¬ 
rome, an early French trader. See Brown, 
West. Gaz., 314, 1817; Howe, Hist. Coll. 
Ohio, i, 255, 1898; Royce in 18th Pep. 
B. A. E., Ohio map, 1899. 

Jesus Maria. A pueblo of the Cora on 
the e. bank of Rio San Pedro, here known 
as the Rio Jesus Maria, in the n. part of 
the Territory of Tepic, about lat. 22° 4(K, 
Mexico. It was the seat of a mission, of 
which San Francisco was a visita. See 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 380, 1864; Lum- 
holtz, Unknown Mexico, i, 487; ii, 16, 
map, 1902. 

Jesus Maria y Jose. A Franciscan mis¬ 
sion founded by Fathers Casaiias and Bor- 
doy, in 1690, in the vicinity of and as an 
adjunct to the mission of San Francisco 
de los Tejas (q. v.) in Texas, and aban¬ 
doned in 1693. Its history is the same as 
that of the parent mission. See Bancroft, 
No. Mex. States, i, 417-418, 666, 1886; 
Garrison, Texas, 1903. 

Santa Maria.—Bancroft, op. cit. Santisimo Nom- 
bre de Maria.—Ibid. 

Jet, Lignite, Anthracite, Cannel coal. Car¬ 
bonaceous materials used to some extent 
by Indians. Jet of excellent quality oc¬ 
curs in Colorado, and the Indians of the 
arid region employ it for jewelry and 
various carvings. Good examples of lig¬ 
nite ornaments were obtained by Fewkes 
from the ancient ruins of Arizona, and of 
jet by Pepper from the ruins of Chaco 
canyon, N. Mex. Among the latter is a 
well-sculptured frog decorated with inlaid 
designs in turquoise and shell. Cannel- 
coal objects are found in the Ohio valley 
mounds, but few specimens carved from 


631 

anthracite are known. A small, well- 
carved human head of jet-like stone was 
obtained by Smith from a shell heap on 
lower Frazer r., Brit. Col., and Niblack 
says that the N. W. coast tribes pulverize 
lignite and mix it with oil for paint. 

Consult Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 
1903; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 
1890; Pepper in Am. Anthrop., vn, 1905; 
Smith in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., iv, 
1903. (w. h. h. ) 

Jetti. A former Cochimi rancheria 3 
leagues n. of Loreto mission, Lower Cali¬ 
fornia.—Picolo (1702) in Lettres £difi- 
antes, ii, 63, 1841. 

Jews and Indians. See Lost Ten Tribes , 
Popular fallacies. 

Jiaspi. A former rancheria of the So- 
baipuri, visited by Father Kino about 
1697 and by him named Rosario. It was 
situated on thew. bank of Rio San Pedro, 
probably in the vicinity of the present vil¬ 
lage of Prospect, s. Arizona. (f. w. h. ) 

Jiaspi.—Kino (1697) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 
279,1856. Rosario.—Bernal (1697) quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 356,1887, (Jiaspi, or). 

Jicamorachic. A former Tarahumare 
settlement in Chihuahua, Mexico.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 1864. 

Jicara. (Mex. Span.: ‘small gourd 
vessel or basket ’). A former Tepehuane 
pueblo in Durango, Mexico, and the seat 
of a Spanish mission. 

S. Pedro Jicara.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 319, 1864. 

Jicarilla (Mex. Span.: ‘little basket’). 
An Athapascan tribe, first so called by 
Spaniards because of their expertness in 
making vessels of basketry. They ap¬ 
parently formed a part of the Yaqueros 
of early Spanish chronicles, although, ac¬ 
cording to their creation legend, they have 
occupied from the earliest period the 
mountainous region of s. e. Colorado and 
n. New Mexico, their range at various 
periods extending eastward to w. Kansas 
and Oklahoma, and into n. w. Texas. 
The Arkansas, Rio Grande, and Canadian 
rs. figure in their genesis myth (Mooney 
in Am. Anthrop., xi, 200,1898), but their 
traditions seem to center about Taos and 
the heads of Arkansas r. They regard the 
kindred Mescaleros and also the Navaho as 
enemies, and, according to Mooney, their 
alliances and blood mixture have been 
with theUte and Taos. In language they 
are more closely related to the Mescaleros 
than to the Navaho or the Arizona 
Apache. The Jicarillas were first men¬ 
tioned by this name early in the 18th cen¬ 
tury. Later, their different bands were 
designated Carlanes, Calchufines, Quar- 
telejos, etc., after their habitat or chief¬ 
tains. The Spaniards established a mis¬ 
sion among them within a few leagues of 
Taos, N. Mex., in 1733, which prospered 
for only a short time. They were regarded 
as a worthless people by both the Spanish 
settlers of New Mexico and their Ameri- 


632 


JITISORICHI—JOCOMES 


tB. A. E. 


can successors, in raids for plunder the 
worst of the Apache tribes, more treacher¬ 
ous and cruel and less brave and energetic 
warriors than the Ute, but equally fond 
of intoxicants. While they sometimes 
planted on a small scale, they regarded 
theft as a natural means of support. The 
governor of New Mexico in 1853 induced 
250 of the tribe to settle on Rio Puerco, but 
failure to ratify the treaty caused them to 
go on the warpath, maintaining hostility 
until their defeat by United States troops 
in 1854. Henceforward they were nomi¬ 
nally at peace, although committing many 
petty thefts. In 1870 they resided on the 
Maxwell grant in n. e. New Mexico, the 
sale of which necessitated their removal. 
In 1872 and again in 1878 an attempt was 
made to move them s. to Ft Stanton, but 



JICARILLA. (AGUSTIN VIJIl) 

most of them were permitted to go to the 
Tierra Amarilla, on the n. confines of the 
territory, on a reservation of 900 sq. m. 
set aside in 1874. Their annuities being 
suspended in 1878 on account of their re¬ 
fusal to move southward in accordance 
with an act of Congress of that year, they 
resorted to thieving. In 1880 the act of 
1878 was repealed, and a new reservation 
was set aside on the Rio Navajo, to which 
they were removed. Here they remained 
until 1883, when they were transferred to 
Ft Stanton, but in 1887 were again re¬ 
turned to the reservation setasidefor them 
in the Tierra Amarilla region by Execu¬ 
tive order of Feb. 11 of that year, where 
they have since resided. Of this reser¬ 
vation 129,313.35 acres have been allotted 


to the Indians, and 280.44 acres reserved 
for mission, school, and agency purposes; 
the remainder, comprising 286,400 acres, 
is unallotted. Their population in 1905 
was 795. The present divisions of the 
Jicarilla, as recorded by Mooney (MS., 
B. A. E., 1897), are: Apatsiltlizhihi, 
Dachizhozhin, Golkahin, Ketsilind, and 
Saitinde. (f. w. h. ) 

Apaches Xicarillas —Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R.Rep., 
hi, 119, 1856. Be'-xai. —ten Kate, Synonymie, 
6, 1884 (Navaho name). Gicarillas.— MS. of 1784 
quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 184, 
1890. Hickory. —Coues, Garc^s Diary, 222, 1900. 
Icarilla Apaches. —Arny in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867,204, 
1868. IccarillaApaches. —Ibid.,217,1861. Icharilla 
Apaches. —Ibid., 1864, 495, 1865. Iicarrillas. — Bent 
(1846) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 
11, 1848. Jajcarilla Apaches. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 328, 
1875. Jacarrilla Apaches. —Bell, New Tracks in 
N. Am., I, 184, 1869. Jecorilla. —Latham in Proc. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., VI, 74, 1854. Jicaras. —Gibbs, 
Letter to Higgins, B. A. E., 1866. Jicarello 
Apaches.— Meriwether in Sen. Ex. Doc. 69, 34th 
Cong., 1st sess., 15, 1856. Jicarila Apache. —Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 1863. Jicarilla. —Ri¬ 
vera, Diario y Derrotero, leg. 950, 1736. Jicarilla 
Apaches. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 434,1853. Jicarilleros. — 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 464, 1878. Jicari- 
llos. —Morgan in N.Am. Rev.,58,1870. Jiccarilla 
Apache. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 55,35th Cong., 1st sess., 11, 
1858. Jiccarrilla Apaches. —Bell in Jour. Ethnol. 
Soc. Lond., I, 240, 1869. Jickorie. —Higgins, MS. 
noteson Apache, B. A. E., 1866. Jicorilla. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, I, 243,1851. Jicorilla Apaches. — 
Simpson, MS. vocab., B. A. E. Kihya-inde. — 
Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (Mescalero 
name). K'op-tagui. —Ibid. (‘mountain Apache’: 
Kiowaname). Northern Apaches. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 
142,1850. Pe+x'ge.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 6,1884 
(Navaho name). Pi'-ke-e-wai-'i-ne. —Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895(Picurisname). Tan-nah-shis- 
en.— Yarrow in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 470,1879 
(‘men of the woodland’). Tashl'ng. —Mooney, 
field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (Mescalero name, possibly 
fromtas/if, ‘above,’ ‘beyond’). Ticorillas.— Simp¬ 
son in Rep. Sec. War, 57,1850 (misprint). Tinde. — 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (own name). 
Tu-sa-be'. —ten Kate, Synonymie, 8,1884 (Tesuque 
name). Xicarillas. —MS. of 1.724quoted by Bande¬ 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 192, 1890. 

Jitisorichi. A former pueblo, apparent¬ 
ly of the Teguima Opata, on the upper 
Rio Sonora between Bacuachi and Arizpe, 
in Sonora, Mexico. It was doubtless 
abandoned prior to the 17th century. 
Jitisorichi.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
489, 1892. Ti-ji-so-ri-chi.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 
182, 1893 (misprint). 

Jlaacs. A former Chumashan village 
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal. 

Jlaacs.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Jlacus.—Ibid. 

Joasseh (‘heron’). An Iroquois clan. 
Jo-as'-seh.—Morgan, League Iroq., 80, 1851 (Sene¬ 
ca form). Otinanchahe.—French writer (1666) 
in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist., ix, 47, 1855. 

Jocomes. A warlike nomadictribe of the 
17th and 18th centuries which, with the 
Janos, ranged to the n. of theCasasGrandes 
in Chihuahua, Mexico, and westward 
to Fronteras, Sonora, later becoming ab¬ 
sorbed by the Apache (Bandelierin Arch. 
Inst. Papers, hi, 91, 1890). Orozco y 
Berra (Geog., 59, 1864) classes them as a 
part of the Faraon Apache and as distinct 
from the Jacomis, who, however, were 
doubtless the same. (f. w. h. ) 










®*^L.36i JOCONOSTLA-JONES, PETER 633 


Hojomes.—De l’Isle, Carte Mex. et Floride, 1703. 
Jacome.—Humboldt, Atlas, 1st map, 1811. Jaco- 
mis.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Jocomeos.— 
Doc. ca. 1702 in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 129, 
1857. Jocomes.—Kino (1690), ibid. I, 230, 1856. 
Jocomis.—Rudo Ensayo (ra. 1763), 154, 1863. 
Xocomes.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 591, 1736. 

Joconostla. A former Tepehuane pue¬ 
blo in Durango, Mexico, and the seat of a 
Spanish mission. 

S. Jose de Joconostla.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 318, 
1864. 

John Day. A Shahaptian tribe, speak¬ 
ing the Tenino language, formerly living 
on John Day r., Oreg., having their prin¬ 
cipal village 4 m. above the mouth. By 
treaty of 1855 they were placed on Warm 
Springs res., Oreg., where there are about 
50 survivors. (l. f.) 

Dock-spus.—U. S. Stat., xil, 963, 1863. John Days.— 
Thompson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 285,1854. John Day’s 
river.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 417, 1855. Tuk- 
spu'sh.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 743, 1896 
(Tenino name for John Day r.). Tukspu'sh- 
‘lema.— Ibid, (sig.: ‘ people of John Day r.’). 

John Hicks’ Town. A former Seminole 
settlement w. of Payne’s savanna, in n. 
Florida, occupied by Mikasuki Indians.— 
Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 807,1822. 

Johnnys. A Hankutchin village situa¬ 
ted on Yukon r., Alaska, where the min¬ 
ing camp of Eagle now is. It was the vil¬ 
lage of the Katshikotin, whose chief was 
known as John.—Schwatka, Recon. in 
Alaska, 87, 1885. 

Johnson, John. See Enmegahbowh. 

Johnstown. A former Cherokee settle¬ 
ment on the upper waters of Chattahoo¬ 
chee r., probably in the n. part of Hall 
co., Georgia. 

John’s Town.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1887. 

Johnstown. A new settlement “where 
the Iroquois were thereafter to speak,” 
instead of at Orange or New Albany, 
N. Y.—Doc. of 18th cent, in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., x, 98, 1858. 

Jolee. A former Seminole town in Flor¬ 
ida, on the w. bank of Apalachicola r., 60 
m. above its mouth, apparently at or near 
the present Iola in Calhoun co.—H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 1st sess., 
27, 1826. 

Jolly, John. A Cherokee chief, noted 
as the adopted father of Gen. Samuel 
Houston, and later chief of the Arkansas 
band of Cherokee. His native name was 
Ahulud^gl, ‘He throw’s away the drum.’ 
His early life was spent in Tennessee, near 
the mouth of the Hiwassee, where an 
island still preserves his name, and it was 
here that Houston came to live with him, 
remaining 3 years and acquiring a life¬ 
long friendship for his adopted people. 
In 1818 Jolly removed to the other side 
of the Mississippi and joined the Arkansas 
band, whose chief he became a few years 
later on the death of Tollunteeskee.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 507, 1900. 

Jonatas. A former Chumashan village, 


tributary to Santa In6s mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal.—Gatschet in Chief 
Engrs. Rep., pt. hi, 553, 1876. 

Joneadih ( Jo'-ne-a-dih , ‘beyond the 
point.’—Hewdtt). A former Seneca vil¬ 
lage on Allegheny r., nearly opposite Sal¬ 
amanca, N. Y.—Morgan, League Iroq., 
466, 1851. 

Jones, Peter (Kahkewaquonaby, Kahke- 
wagwonnaby). A mixed-blood Missis- 
auga chief, missionary, and author; born 
Jan. 1,1802,diedJune29,1856. Hisfather 
was a white man of Welsh descent named 
Augustus Jones, w r ho maintained the 
closest friendship with Brant during the 
latter’s life. Peter’s mother w 7 as Tuh- 
benahneeguay, daughter of Wahbanosay, 
a chief of the Missisauga on Credit r., at 
the extreme w. end of L. Ontario, where, 
on a tract of land know 7 n as Burlington 
heights, Peter and his brother John were 
born. He remained w T ith his tribe, fol¬ 
lowing their customs and accompanying 
them on their excursions, until his 16th 
year, when his father, who was then a 
government surveyor, had him baptized 
by Rev. Ralph Leeming, an English Epis¬ 
copal minister, at the Mohaw 7 k church 
on Grand r., near Brantford, Ont. Hav¬ 
ing professed religion at a campmeet¬ 
ing held near Ancaster, Ont., and taken 
an active part in the religious exercises of 
the Wesleyan Methodist Church, Peter 
w 7 as sent on a missionary tour, in 1827, to 
L. Simcoe, St Clair, Muncey, and other 
points in w. Ontario, although not yet 
ordained. He had by this time entered 
upon his literary work, as in this year was 
published a hymn book translated by 
him into Chippewa. He was constituted 
a deacon of the Wesleyan Methodist 
conference in 1830, and as minister by 
Rev. George Marsden at the Toronto 
conference in 1833. The remainder of 
his life was devoted chiefly to missionary 
work among the Missisauga and Chip¬ 
pewa, and to some extent among the 
Iroquois. His position as a Christian 

astor and ruling chief of his tribe gave 

im great influence, not only among his 
own people, but among all the Chippew r a 
tribes. He visited England and New 
York, and made repeated journeys to 
Toronto in the prosecution of his work 
and in behalf of his people. It w 7 as 
largely through his efforts that the titles 
of the Credit Indians to their lands were 
perfected. Although inured to out-door 
life and of a somewhat robust frame, his 
constitution began to yield to excessive 
exposures, resulting in his death, near 
Brantford, in 1856. A monument w 7 as 
erected to his memory, in 1857, w 7 ith the 
inscription: “Erected by the Ojibeway 
and other Indian tribes to their revered 
and beloved chief, Kahkewaquonaby (the 


634 


JONES’ RIVER—JOSEPH 


[b. a. e. 


Rev. Peter Jones).” A memorial tablet 
was placed by his family in the Indian 
church at the New Credit settlement. 

Ryerson (Ojebway Indians, 18, 1861) 
describes Jones as “a man of athletic 
frame, as well as of masculine intellect; a 
man of clear perception, good judgment, 
great decision of character; a sound 
preacher, fervent and powerful in his 
appeals; very well informed on general 
subjects, extensively acquainted with 
men and things.” His wife was an Eng¬ 
lish woman, who with 4 sons survived 
him. His seventh son, Peter E. Jones, 
who bore his father’s name (Kah-ke-wa- 
quo-na-by), was editor of a periodical, 
The Indian, published at Hagersville, 
Ont., in 1885-86. 

In addition to the volume of hymns, 
first printed in 1829, republished in 1836, 
and in various enlarged editions in later 
years, Jones translated also into Chip¬ 
pewa a volume of Additional Hymns 
(1861), an Ojibway Spelling Book (1828), 
Part of the New Testament (1829), The 
First Book of Moses (1835), and Part of 
the Discipline of the Wesleyan Methodist 
Church in Canada (1835). He also wrote 
the Life and Journals of Kah-ke-wa-quo- 
na-by (Rev. Peter Jones), 1860, and a 
History of the Ojebway Indians, with 
Especial Reference to their Conversion to 
Christianity, 1861. Consult Pilling, Bib- 
liog. Algonq. Lang., Bull. B. A. E., 1891. 

Jones’ River. A village of Christian In¬ 
dians in Kingston township, Plymouth 
co., Mass., in 1703.—Cotton (1703) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ii, 244,1830. 

Jonondes (Diionon'dese’, ‘at the high 
mountain’). A former Iroquois village 
belonging to the Bear clan; location un¬ 
known. (j. N. B. H.) 

Jonondese.—Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites, 120, 
1833. Jonondeseh.—Ibid., 121. 

Joquizara. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. Cf. Josquigard. 

Jore (probably from Ayd'li'yi , ‘ little 
place,’ i. e., ‘little town’; abbreviated 
Ayd'li). A former Cherokee settlement 
on Iola cr., an upper branch of Little 
Tennessee r., N. C. (j. m.) 

Iola.—Present map form. Jore.— Bartram, Trav¬ 
els, 371, 372, 1792. Joree.—Doc. of 1755 cited by 
Royee in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 142, 1887. 

Joseph. The leaderof the Nez Perces in 
the hostilities of 1877. His mother was a 
Nez Perc6, his father a Cayuse, who re¬ 
ceived the name Joseph from his teacher, 
the missionary Spalding, who was with 
Dr Whitman and who went to the Idaho 
country in the late thirties of the 19th 
century. Chief Joseph’s native name was 
Hinmaton-yalatk.it ( hinmaton , ‘ thunder ’; 
yalatkit, ‘ coming from the water up over 
the land.’—Miss McBeth), but both he 
and his brother Ollicot were often called 


Joseph, as if it were a family name. Joseph 
was a man of fine presence and impressive 
features, and was one of the most remark¬ 
able Indians within the borders of the 
Union. The treaty of 1863, by which the 
whites obtained a right to the Wal Iowa val¬ 
ley, the ancient home of Joseph’s band in 
n. e. Oregon, was not recognized by Jo¬ 
seph and the Indians sympathizing with 
him, who continued to dwell there in 
spite of collisions between the Indians 
and the whites, which became more and 
more frequent. The matter of removing 
these Indians to the Lapwai res. in Idaho, 
after the failure of a commission the pre¬ 
vious year, was proceeding to a peaceful 
settlement \vhen outrageous acts on the 
part of the white settlers caused the Nez 
Perces to break loose and attack the set- 



CHIEF JOSEPH 


tlements. War was declared. After sev¬ 
eral engagements, in which the whites 
lost severely, Joseph displayed remarka- 
able generalship in a retreat worthy to be 
remembered with that of Xenophon’s ten 
thousand (Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
714, 1896). In spite of the fact that in 
front of him was Col. Miles, behind Gen. 
Howard, on his flank Col. Sturgis and his 
Indian scouts, Joseph brought his little 
band, incommoded with women and chil¬ 
dren, to within 50 miles of the Canadian 
border, their objective point, when they 
were cut off by fresh troops in front and 
forced to surrender conditionally on 
Oct. 5, 1877. Not only the conduct 
of the Nez Perces during this retreat of 
more than 1,000 miles, but also the 
military and tactical skill displayed by 





BULL. 30] 


JOSQU1GARD-JUL1ANEHAAB 


635 


their leader, won unstinted praise from 
their conquerors. The promises made to 
Joseph and his people were ignored, and 
the Indians, numbering431, were removed 
to Ft Leavenworth, Kans., and afterward 
to Indian Ter., where they remained for 
several years, always yearning for the 
mountains and valleys of Idaho. In 1883 
a party of 33 women and children were 
allowed to go back to their old home, 
and were followed the next year by 118 
others. Joseph and the remaining mem¬ 
bers of his band, however, numbering 
150, were not permitted to return to Idaho, 
but were sent to the Colville res., Wash. 
He lived to visit President Roosevelt and 
Gen. Miles at Washington in Mar., 1903, 
butdiedatNespelim, on the Colville res., 
Wash., Sept. 21, 1904. According to the 
Indian agent he had become reconciled to 
civilization in his last years, lending his 
aid in the education of the children of 
his tribe, and discouraging gambling and 
drunkenness. 

Josquigard. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. Cf. Joquizara. 

Jotars. An unidentified tribe of Texas, 
mentioned in the Mezieres MS. of 1779, 
together with the Kichai and Nasoni, 
from whom an epidemic had spread to 
the Tawakoni, Caddo, and other tribes. 
The Jotars lived in a locality remote 
from Nacogdoches, probably toward the 
n. w. (h. e. b.) 

Jova. A former Opata division inhabit¬ 
ing principally the valley of the stream on 
which Sahuaripa (lat. 29°, Ion. 109°) is 
situated, in Sonora, Mexico, and extend¬ 
ing e. into Chihuahua, to and including 
the village of Dolores on a s. tributary 
of Rio Aros. Its members are now 
completely Mexicanized. The language 
spoken differed dialectically from the 
Opata proper and the Eudeve. The Jova 
settlements were Arivechi, Chamada, 
Natora, Ponida, Sahuaripa (in part), San 
Mateo, Malzura, Santa Marta de los Do¬ 
lores, Santo Tomas, Satechi (?), Servas, 
Setasura, and Teopari. • (f. w. h.) 

Jaba.—Davila. Sonora Hist., 316, 1894. Joba.— 
Ibid., 317. Jobal.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 345,1864. 
Jobales.—Ibid. Jova.—Ibid. Ovas.—Ibid. Sahua- 
ripas.—Ibid. 

Joytudachi. Apparently a former vil¬ 
lage of the Opata in the Sierra de Baserac, 
one of the n. w. spurs of the Sierra Madre, 
in n. e. Sonora, Mexico.—Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, nr, 58, 1890. 

Joy van. Mentioned by La Harpe (Mar- 
gry, D6c., vi, 277,1886), together with the 
Quidehais, Naouydiches, Huanchan6s, 
and others, as a wandering tribe, appar¬ 
ently w. of southern Arkansas in 1719. 
Unidentified. 

Juajona. A former rancheria, probably 
Papago, near San Xavier del Bac in s. 
Arizona; visited by Kino and Mange 


in 1699.—Mange quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 358, 1889. 

Juan Bautista. A Kawia village of the 
Cabezon division, in San Bernardino co., 
Cal.—Burton in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 117, 1857. 

Juanenos. A Shoshonean division on 
the California coast, named from San Juan 
Capistrano mission (q. v.), at which they 
were principally gathered, extending n. 
to Alisos cr. and s. to a point between 
San Onofre and Las Flores crs. Their 
language forms one group with those of 
the Luisenos, Kawia, and Aguas Calien- 
tes (q. v.). According to Ames (Rep. 
Mission Inds., 5,1873) there were only 40 
individuals in the neighborhood in 1873; 
of these most are now dead and the re¬ 
mainder scattered. 

Gaitchim.—Gatschet in Rep. Chief of Engrs., pt. 3, 
555, 1876. Juanenos.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (so 
called by the Indians and Spaniards). Netela.— 
Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 222, 1846 (sig. ‘my 
language’). 

Judac. The largest of three large Pima 
rancherias on Gila r., s. Ariz., in the 18th 
century, now probably known by some 
other name.—Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., 
pt. 2, 404, 1748. 

Judosa. A village or community e. of 
the mouth of Trinity r., Tex., in a region 
generally controlled by tribes of the At- 
tacapan family in the 17th century. 
Jacdoas.—Uhde, Lander, 159, 1861. Judosa.—De 
l’Isle, map (1700) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 294, 
1886. 

Jugelnute. A Kaiyuhkhotana division 
on Shageluk and Innoko rs., Alaska; pop. 
150 in 1880. It included the villages of 
Anilukhtakpak, Inselnostlinde, Intenlei- 
den, Khuligichakat, Kuingshtetakten, 
Kvigimpainagmute, and Vagitchitchate. 
Chageluk settlements.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 12, 1884. Inkalit-Ingelnut.—Schott in 
Erman, Archiv, vii, 480, 1849 (misprint). Jugel- 
nuten.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 7, 1855. 
Jugelnuts.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 517, 
1878. Ounagountchagueliougiout.—Zagoskin in 
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., XXI, map, 1850. Shage- 
look—Whymper, Alaska, map, 1869. Shageluk.— 
Schwatka, Rep. on Alaska, 101, 1885. Shaglook.— 
Whymper, Alaska, 265, 1869. Takai'-yakho- 
tan'a.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 26, 1877 
(Athapascanname). Yugelnut.—Zagoskin (1842) 
quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. 

Juichun. A Costanoan division or vil¬ 
lage in California, speaking a dialect very 
similar to that of the Mutsun.—Arroyo 
de la Cuesta, Idiomas Californias, MS. 
trans., B. A. E. 

Jukiusme. The Moquelumnan Indians 
on whose land the San Rafael mission, 
Cal., was built. Their language was iden¬ 
tical with the Chokuyem, and their name 
may be a distorted form of the same 
word. 

Joukiousme.—Duflot de Mofras, Expl., II, 391,1844. 
Jouskiousme.—Shea, Catholic Miss., 109, 1855. 
SanRafael Indians.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
in, 195, 1877. Yonkiousme.—Latham in Trans. 
Philol. Soc. Lond., 82,1856 (misquoted). 

Julianehaab. A Danish colony and Es¬ 
kimo settlement on a small island, lat. 
60° 43', s. Greenland. 


636 


JULIMENOS-JUNALUSKA 


tB. A. E. 


Julianehaab.—Graah, Exped. Greenland, map, 
1837. Kakortok.—Meddelelser om Gronland, xvi, 
map, 1896. 

Julimenos. A former tribe in n. e. 
Mexico, probably of the Coahuiltecan 
linguistic family, which was gathered into 
the mission of San Francisco Vizarron de 
los Pausanes, in Coahuila, in 1737.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 303, 1864. 

Jumano. A tribe of unknown affinity, 
first seen, although not mentioned by 
name, about the beginning of 1536 by 
Cabeza de Vaca and his companions in 
the vicinity of the junction of the Con- 
chos with the Rio Grande, or northward 
to about the s. boundary of New Mexico. 
They were next visited in 1582 by An¬ 
tonio de Espejo, who called them Juma- 
nos and Patarabueyes, stating that they 
numbered 10,000 in five villages along the 
Rio Grande from the Conchos junction 
northward for 12 days’ journey. Most of 
their houses were built of sod or earth and 
grass, with flat roofs; they cultivated 
maize, beans, calabashes, etc. When 
visited in 1598 by Juan de Onate, who 
called them Rayados on account of their 
striated faces, a part at least of the Juma¬ 
no resided in several villages near the 
Salinas, e. of the Rio Grande, in New 
Mexico, the four principal ones being 
called Atripuy, Genobey, Quelotetrey, 
and Pataotrey. From about 1622 these 
were ministered to by the Franciscan 
Fray Juan de Salas, missionary at the 
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. In re¬ 
sponse to the request of 50 Jumano, who 
visited Isleta in July, 1629, an independ¬ 
ent mission, under the name San Isidore, 
was established among them in the Sa¬ 
linas, but the main body of the tribe at 
this time seems to have resided 300 m. e. 
of Santa Fe, probably on the Arkansas, 
within the present Kansas, where they 
were said to be also in 1632. Forty years 
later there were Jumano 15 leagues e. of 
the Piros and Tigua villages of the Sa¬ 
linas, not far from Pecos r., who were 
ministered to by the priest at Quarai. 
About this time "the Salinas pueblos were 
abandoned on account of Apache depre¬ 
dations. The Jumano did not participate 
in the Pueblo rebellion of 1680-92, but 
before it was quelled, i. e., in Oct., 1683, 
200 of the tribe visited the Spaniards 
at El Paso, to request missionaries, but 
owing to the unsettled condition of affairs 
by reason of the revolt in the n., the re¬ 
quest was not granted. In the following 
year friars visited the Jumano in s. Texas, 
and within this decade they became 
known to the French under the name 
Choumans. Various references to them 
are made during the 18th century, in¬ 
cluding the perhaps significant statement 
by Cabello (Informe, 1784, MS. cited by 
H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 1906) that “the 
Taguayazes (Wichita) are known in New 


Mexico by the name of Jumanes also.” 
As late as the middle of the 19th cen¬ 
tury they are mentioned in connection 
with the Kiowa, and again as living near 
Lampazas, Nuevo Leon, Mexico. The 
tribal name was once applied to the 
Wichita mts. in Oklahoma, and it is stjll 
preserved in the “Mesa Jumanes” of New 
Mexico. See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, iv, 268, 1892; Benavides, Memo¬ 
rial (1630), in Land of Sunshine, xiv, 46, 
51, 1901; Vetancurt (1693),Teatro Ameri¬ 
cana, hi, 304, repr. 1871. (f. w. h.) 

Aumanes. —Uhde, Lander, 121, 1861 (near Lampa- 
zos, N. Leon). Borrados. —Doc. of 1796quoted by 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 382,1864‘stripedsame?). 
Chaumenes. —Charlevoix, New France, Shea ed., 
IV, 78,1870. Chomanes. —Barcia, Ensavo, 264,1723. 
Chomans.— Doc. of 1699 in Margry, D*6c., iv, 316, 
1880. Chomenes. —Barcia, op. cit., 271. Chouman. — 
Joutel (1687) in Margry, Dec., in, 299, 1878. 
Choumanes. —Barcia, op. cit., 283. Choumans. — 
Douay ( ca. 1687) quoted by Shea, Discov., 205, 
1852. Choumay. —Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., 
iii,410, 1878. Choumenes. —Joutel (1687) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., I, 137, 1846. Desumanas. —Duro, 
Don Diego de Penalosa, 63, 1882. Humanas.— 
Perea, Yerdadera Rel., 2, 1632. Humanas de 
Tompires.— Brion de la Tour, Map N. Am., 1779 
(confounded with Tompiros). Humanas de 
Tompiros. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. 
Humanos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 28, 1852. 
Humas.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 70,1864 (believed 
by Bandelier to be identical; see Xwnas below). 
Humunas de Tompires. —Morse, Atlas, map 52,1812. 
Ipataragiiites.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Con- 
quista, 169,1742 (probably identical). Iumanas. — 
Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 228,264,1858 (after Sig- 
uenza, 1691-93). Iumanes. —Sanson, L’Amerique, 
map, 27, 1657. Iumanos. —Mendoza (1586) in Hak¬ 
luyt. Voy., 459,466,1600. Jumanas. : — Espejo (1582) 
in Doc. in6d., xv, 186, 1871. Jumanes. —Whipple, 
Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3, 113, 1856 (misquoting 
Hakluyt). Jumanoes. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
ii, 29, 1852. Jumanos. —Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 163, 
1744. Jumas.— Orozco y Berra (1864) quoted in 
Arch. Inst. Bui., I, 31, 1883. Lumanos.— Davis, 
Span. Conq. N. Mex., 242, 1869. Parabuyeis.—De 
l’lsle, Atlas Nouveau, map 59, 1733. Patarabue- 
ges.— Bell in Jour. Ethnol.Soc. Lond., i, 263,1869. 
Patarabueyes.— Espejo (1582) in Doc. In6d., xv, 
168, 1871. Patarabuyes. —Mendoza (1586) in Hak- 
luyt, Voy., 459. 1600. Patarabyes.—Heylen, Cos¬ 
mog., 1072, 1703. Rayados. —Onate(1598) in Doc. 
InOL,xvi, 266,1871. Rrayados. —Ibid. Sumanas. — 
Duro, Don Diego de Peiihlosa, 56, 1882. Tarra- 

Iumanes.—Linschoten, Description del’Amerique, 
map 1,1638 (confused with Tarahumare?). Tata- 
rabueyes.—Rodriguez, Relacion, in Doc. In6d., xv, 
97,1871. Umanos.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1,519, 
1851 (misidentified with Yumas). Xoumanes.— 
Doc. of 1699 in Margry, D6c., iv, 316, 1880. 
Xumanas.—Onate (1598) in Doc. In<5d., xvi, 114, 
1871. Xumanes.—Del'Isle, Map Am. Septentrion- 
ale,1700. Xumarias.—Espejo (1582) in Doc. In6d., 
xv, 168, 1871. Xumas.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Bui., i, 31, 1883 (said to be a 16th century name). 
Xumases.—Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d„ xvi, 266, 
1871. Yumanos.—Bent (1846) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, I, 242, 1851. Zumanas.—Vetancurt (1693), 
Teatro Mex., hi, 308, 1871. 

Junaluska (corruption of Tsunul&Mmskl, 
‘he tries repeatedly, but fails’). A 
former noted chief of" the East Cherokee 
in North Carolina. In the Creek war of 
1813-14 he led a detachment of warriors 
to the support of Gen. Jackson, and did 
good service at the bloody battle of the 
Horseshoe Bend. Having boasted on 
setting out that he would exterminate the 
Creeks, he was obliged to confess on his 
return that some of that tribe were still 


BULL. 30] 


JUNATCA 


KABAYE 


637 


alive, whence the name jokingly bestowed 
upon him by his friends. He went west 
with his people in the removal of 1838, 
but returned to North Carolina, and as a 
special recognition of his past services was 
given citizenship rights and a tract of 
land at Cheowa, near the present Rob- 
binsville, Graham co., N. C., where he 
died in 1858. See Mooney in 19th Rep. 
B.A.E.,97, 164-5, 1900. 

Junatca. A former tribe or village, pre¬ 
sumably Costanoan, from which Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal., drew some 
of its neophytes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. • 

Junetre. A ruined pueblo of the Tewa 
in Rio Arriba co., N. Mex.—Bandelier in 
Ritch, N. Mex., 201, 1885. See Tajique. 

Juniamuc. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Juniata (from Tyu i na n yate, ‘projecting 
rock,’ in the Seneca and other Iroquois 
dialects, a name said to refer to a stand¬ 
ing stone to which the Indians paid rev¬ 
erence.—Hewitt). An unidentified tribe 
that lived at and about the mouth of 
Juniata r., Pa. Their village, known by 
the same name, was situated on Duncan 
id., in the Susquehanna. About 1648 
they were the forced auxiliaries of the 
Conestoga. (j. m. ) 

Ihon-a-Does.—Writer ( ca . 1648) quoted by Proud, 
Penn., 1,114,1797. Iottecas.—Map (ca. 1614) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. John-a-does.—Sanford, 
U. S., cxlviii, 1819. Juneauta.—Brainerd (1745) 
quoted by Day, Penn., 275,1843 (the village). 

Junostaca. A former rancheria, prob¬ 
ably Papago, visited by Kino and Mange 
in 1699; situated near San Xavier del 
Bac, in the present s. Arizona.—Mange 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
358, 1889. 

Junqueindundeh (‘it has a rock.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A village, probably of the Hurons, 
situated in 1766 on Sandusky r., Ohio, 
24 m. above its mouth.—Smith, Bouquet 
Exped., 67, 1766. 

Junundat (‘one hill.’—Hewitt). A Hu¬ 
ron village in 1756 on a small creek that 
empties into a little lake below the mouth 
of Sandusky r., Seneca co., Ohio. 

Ayonontouns.—La Jonquiere (1751) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., X, 240,1858. Ayonontout.—Ibid., VI, 733, 
1855. Canundageh.—Guy Park conf. (1775), ibid., 
viii, 556,1857. Chenunda.—Croghan (1759) quoted 
by Rupp, West. Penn., 146, 1846. Chenundea.— 
Croghan (1759) quoted by Proud, Penn., n, 296,1798. 
Chinundeda.—Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll.,4ths., IX, 261,1871. Junundat.—Peters(1760), 
ibid., 258. Sunyendeand.—Smith (1799) quoted by 
Drake, Trag. Wild., 201. 1841. Wyandot Town.— 
Hutchins, map in Smith, Bouquet Exped., 1766. 

Juraken. Two former villages under 
Iroquois rule, one situated on the right 
bank of Susquehanna r., just below the 
fork, at the site of Sunbury, Pa., the 
other on the left bank of the e. branch of 
the Susquehanna.—Popple, Nouv. Carte 
Particuliere de l’Amerique [n. d.]. 

(j. N. B. H.) 


Juris. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Jurlanoca. A former village on the In¬ 
dian trail of n. Florida, 8 m. e. of Alachua. 
Jefferys (Topog. N. Am., chart, 67, 1762) 
has here a river joining the St Johns from 
the s. w. 

Jurumpa. Given by Rev. J. Caballeria 
(Hist. San Bernardino Val., 1902) as a 
former village, probably Serrano, at River¬ 
side, s. California. The Spanish Rancho 
Jurupa shows the same name. 

Jutun. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida, about 1570. 

Futun.—Fontaneda as quoted by Shipp, De Soto 
and Fla., 586,1881 (misprint). Jutun.—Fontaneda 
Memoir (ca. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854. 

Juyubit. A former rancheria connected 
with San Gabriel mission, Los Angeles 
co., Cal. The locative ending, bit, shows 
the name to be Serrano rather than 
Gabrieleno. 

Jujubit.—Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 
76, 1854. Juyubit.—Duflot de Mofras, Explor., I, 
394, 1844. 

Kaadnaas-hadai ( Q!d'ad naf as Xada'-i , 

‘ dogfish house people ’). A subdivision 
of the Yaku-lanas, a family of the Raven 
clan of the Haida, living in s. w. Alaska. 
The name is probably derived from that 
of a particular house. (j. it. s.) 

K-’at nas :hadVi.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 26,1898. Qla'ad na'as Xada'-i.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 271, 1905. 

Kaake ( Qd'aqe ). A Salish tribe which 
formerly occupied the s. e. coast of Valdez 
id. Brit. Col., and spoke the Comox 
dialect. It is now extinct.—Boas, MS., 
B. A. E., 1887. 

Kaana. The Corncob clan of the pue¬ 
blo of Taos, N. Mex. 

Kaana-taiina.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1899 
( talina= ‘people’). 

Kaayahunik. A Squawmish village on 
the w. bank of Squawmishtr., Brit. Col.— 
Brit. Adm. chart, no. 1917. 

Kaayu ( Ka-a-yu ). A pueblo built, oc¬ 
cupied, and abandoned by the Nambe 
tribe prior to the Spanish advent in the 
16th century. Situated with Agawano 
in the vicinity of the “ Santuario,” in the 
mountains about 7 m. e. of the Rio 
Grande, on Rio Santa Cruz, Santa Fe co., 
N. Mex.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, iv, 84, 1892. 

Kabahseh (‘sturgeon’). A gens of the 
Abnaki. 

Ka-bafi'-seh.—Morgan. Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. Ka- 
basa.—J. Dyneley Prince, inf’n, 1905 (modern St 
Francis Abnaki form). 

Kabaye. A tribe or village formerly in 
the country lying between Matagorda bay 
and Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. Joutel 
in 1687 obtained the name from the 
Ebahamo Indians, who were probably 
closely affiliated to Karankawan tribes 
living in this region. They are probably 
identical with the Cabia of Manzanet. 
See Joutel in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 


638 


KACHEGARET-KADOHADACHO 


[b. a. e. 


137, 152, 1846, and in Margry, Dec., in, 
288,1878: Gatschet, Karankawa Indians, 
23,25,1891. Cf. Kiabaha. (a. c. f.) 
Cabaies.—Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. Cabia.—Mas- 
sanet Q690), MS., cited by Bolton, inf’n, 1906. 
Kabayes.—Joutel, Jour. Voy., 90,1719. 

Kachegaret. A Kaviagraiut village at 
Port Clarence, Alaska.—11th Census, 
Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Kachgiy a (‘ the raven ’). A Knaiakho- 
tana division residing on Cook inlet, 
Alaska.—Richardson, Arctic Exped., i, 
406, 1851. 

Kachina. A term applied by the Hopi 
to ‘ ‘ supernatural beings impersonated by 
men wearing masks or by statuettes in 
imitation of the same”; also to the dances 
in which these masks figure. See Masks. 
Consult Fewkes (1) in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
25, 1897; (2) 21st Rep. B. A. E., 3, 1903; 
Yoth in various pubs. Field Columbian 
Museum. 

Kachina. The Sacred Dancer phratry 
of the Hopi, comprising the Kachina, 
Gyazru (Paroquet) Angwusi (Raven), 
Sikyachi (Yellow bird), Tawamana 
(Black bird), Salabi (Spruce), and Su- 
hubi (Cottonwood) clans. They claim 
to have come from the Rio Grande, but 
lived for some time near the now ruined 

S ueblo of Sikyatki. 

a-tci'-na.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891 
(tc = ch). Ka-tci'-na nyu-mu.—Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894 (nyti-mti = ‘phratry’). 

Kachina. The name of two distinct 
Sacred Dancer clans of the Hopi, one be¬ 
longing to the Kachina, the other to the 
Honani (Badger) phratry. The Tewa 
pueblo of Hano has a similar clan. 
Kachina-towa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX, 351, 
1896 (Tewaname: toiva= ‘people’). Ka-tci-na.— 
Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. Katcina 
wiiiwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 
(wiffovti = ‘ clan ’). Ka-tci'-na wiin-wii.—Fewkes 
in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404,1894. 

Kachinba (‘sacred-dancer spring’). A 
small ruin at a spring 6 m. from Sikyatki 
and about e. of Walpi pueblo, n. e. Ari¬ 
zona. It was one of the stopping places 
of the Kachina clan of the Hopi, whence 
the name.—Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. 
E., 589, 1898. 

Kachisupal. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage connected with Purfsima mission, 
Santa Barbara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Kachnawaacharege. A former fishing 
station of the Onondaga, situated w. of 
Oneida lake. At this place Col. Schuyler 
held a conference with the Onondaga 
chiefs, Apr. 25, 1700. (j. n. b. h.) 

Kachnawaacharege.—Doc. of 1700 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IV, 657, 1854. Kachnawarage.—Ibid., 
799. Kagnewagrage.—Ibid., 805. 

Kachyayakuch (Katc-ya-yd'-kutc) . A 
former Chumashan village at Alazumita, 
near San Buenaventura, Ventura co., 
Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kadadjans ( QIadadja'ns , said to be ap¬ 
plied to a person who gets angry with 


another and talks of him behind his 
back; a backbiter). A town of the Hagi- 
lanas of the Haida, on the n. w. end of 
Anthony id., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col., on which also stood the town of Nin- 
stints.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277,1905. 

Kadakaman. A Laimon tribe or band 
that lived between the old missions of San 
Fernando and Santa Rosalia Mulege, 
Lower California.—Taylor in Browne, 
Res. Pac. Slope, app., 54, 1869. See San 
Ignacio de Kadakaman. 

Kadishan’s Village. A summer settle¬ 
ment of a Stikine chief named Katishan, 
on Stikine r., Alaska; 27 people were there 
in 1880.—Petroff in Tenth Census, Alas¬ 
ka, 32, 1884. 

Kadohadacho ( Kd' dohadaf cho, ‘real 
Caddo,’ ‘ Caddo proper’). A tribe of the 
Caddo confederacy, sometimes confused 
with the confederacy itself. Their dialect 
is closely allied to that of the Hainai and 
Anadarko, and is one of the two dialects 
dominant to-day among the remnant of 
the confederacy. 

The Kadohadacho seem to have devel¬ 
oped, as a tribe, on Red r. of Louisiana 
and in its immediate vicinity, and not to 
have migrated with their kindred to any 
distance either n. ors. Their first knowl¬ 
edge of the white race was in 1541, when 
De Soto and his followers stayed with 
some of the subtribes on Washita r. and 
near the Mississippi. The Spaniards nev¬ 
er penetrated during the 16th and 17th 
centuries to their villages in the lake re¬ 
gion of n. w. Louisiana, but the people 
came in contact with Spanish soldiers and 
settlers from the w. by joining the war 
parties of other tribes. Various articles 
of European manufacture were brought 
home as trophies of war. The tribe was 
not unfamiliar with horses, but had not 
come into possession of firearms when the 
survivors of La Salle’s party visited them 
on their way n. in 1687. For nearly two 
years La Salle had previous direct rela¬ 
tions with tribes of the Caddo confedera¬ 
cy who were living in what is now Texas, 
so that when the approach of the French 
was reported the visitors were regarded 
as friends rather than as strangers. The 
chief of the Kadohadacho, with his war¬ 
riors, taking the calumet, went a league 
to meet the travelers, and escorted them 
with marks of honor to the village on Red 
r. On arrival, “the women,” says Dou- 
ay, “as is their wont, washed our heads 
and feet in warm water and then placed 
us on a platform covered with very neat 
white mats. Then followed banquets, the 
calumet dance, and other rejoicing day 
and night. ’ ’ The friendly relations then 
begun with the French were never aban¬ 
doned. A trading post was established 
and a flour mill built at their village by 
the French early in the 18th century, but 


BULL. 30] 


KADUSGO-KAE 


639 


both were given up in a few years owing 
to the unsettled state of affairs between the 
Spaniards and the French. These dis¬ 
turbances, added to the enmity of tribes 
who were being pushed from their homes 
by the increasing number of white settlers, 
together with the introduction of new dis¬ 
eases, particularly smallpox and measles, 
brought about much distress and a great 
reduction in the population. During the 
last quarter of the 18th century the Ka- 
dohadacho abondoned their villages in 
the vicinity of the lakes inx.w. Louisiana, 
descended the river, and settled not far 
from their kindred, the Nachitoches. By 
the beginning of the 19th century their 
importance as a distinct tribe was at an 
end; the people became merged with the 
other tribes of the confederacy and shared 
their misfortune. In customs and cere¬ 
monies they resembled the other Caddo 
tribes. 

The tribes of the Caddo confederacy, in¬ 
cluding the Kadohadacho, have 10 clans, 
according to Mooney, viz.: Suko (Sun), 
Kagahanin (Thunder), Iwi (Eagle), Kishi 
(Panther), Oat (Raccoon], Tao (Beaver), 
Kagaih (Crow), Nawotsi (Bear), Tasha 
(Wolf), Tanaha (Buffalo). The Buffalo 
clan was sometimes called Koho (Alliga¬ 
tor), “because both animals bellow in 
the same way. ’ ’ The members of a group 
did not kill the animal from which the ‘ 
group took its name, except the eagle, 
whose feathers were necessary for regalia 
and in sacred ceremonies; but the bird 
was killed only by certain men initiated 
to perform this ceremonial act. The rit¬ 
uals and songs attending the rite of prep¬ 
aration for the killing of eagles have passed 
away with their last keeper, and the peo¬ 
ple have now to depend on other tribes for 
the needed feathers (see Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1093,1896). ( a. c. f. ) 

At'-ta-wits. —ten Kate, Synonymie, 10, 1884 (Co¬ 
manche name). Cadadoquis. —Tonti (1690) in 
French, Hist. CoH. La., 1 , 73,1846. Cadaquis. — Jou- 
tel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 409. 1878. Cadauda- 
chos. —Barreiro, Ojeada, 7, 1832. Cadaux. —Sibley, 
Hist, Sketches, 136,1806 (so called by the French). 
Caddo-dacho.— Espinosa (1746) quoted by Busch- 
mann, Spuren, d. aztec. Spr., 417,1854. Caddoe.— 
Nuttall, Jour., 288, 1821. Caddokies.— Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 116, 1836. Caddons. — 
Keane in Stafford, Compend., 504, 1878. Cad- 
doques. —Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 66, 1806. Cad- 
doquies.— Ibid., 105. Caddoquis.— Brackenridge, 
Views of La., 80, 1815. Caddos.— Sibley, Hist. 
Sketches, 66,1806. Caddow.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 21,18th 
Cong., 2d sess., table, 5, 1825. Cadeaux.— Sibley, 
Hist. Sketches, 162.1806. Cadloes.— Keane in Stan¬ 
ford, Compend., 504, 1878. Cado.— Long, Exped. 
Rocky Mts., II, 310,1823. Cadodaccho.— Hennepin, 
New Discov., pt. 2, 41, 1698. Cadodache.— Drake, 
Bk. Inds., vi, 1818. Cadodachos. —De 1 ’Isle, map, 
1700. Cadodaguios.— Carver, Trav., map, 1778. 
Cadodakis.— Gussefeld, Charte U. S., 1784. Cadoda- 
quinons. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504, 
1878. Cadodaquio. —Joutel (1687) in French, His_t. 
Coll. La., 1,168, 1846. Cadodaquiou.— Joutel (1687) 
in Margry, D5c., Ill, 408, 1878. Cadodaquioux. 
P6nicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 

I, 73, 1869. Cadodaquis— Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., ill, 409, 1878. Cadoes.— Ker, Trav., 83, 1816. 
Cadogdachos.— Morfi, Mem. de Texas, 1792. Ca-do- 


ha-da-cho.—P<§nicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., n. s., i, 73, note, 1869. Cadojodacho.—Linares 
(1716) in Margry, D6c., VI, 217, 1886. Cadoux.— 
Lewis and Clark, Jour., 193, 1840. Cadrons.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 34, 1857. Candada- 
cho.—Altamira (1714) quoted by Yoakum, Hist. 
Texas, I, 386, 1855. Caodacho.—Tex. State Arch., 
Nov. 17, 1763. Catcho— Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., iii, 409, 1878. Chadadoquis.—Sibley, Hist. 
Sketches, 134, 1806. Coddoque.—Brackenridge, 
Views of La., 87,1815. Codogdachos.—Morfi quoted 
by Shea in Charlevoix, New France, iv, 80, note, 
1870. Da'sha-i.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1092,1896(Wichitaname). Datcho.—Joutel (1687) 
in Margry, D6c., in, 409,1878. De'sa.—Mooney, op. 
cit. (another form of Dii'sha-i). ISdawika.—Gat- 
schet, MS., B. A. E. (Pawnee name, sing.), £ra- 
wika.—Ibid. Kaado.—Mollhausen, Journ. to Pac., 
95, 1858. Ka'-di.—Gatschet, Caddo and Yatassi 
MS., B. A. E. (‘chief’: original name). Kado.— 
Bruy^re (1742) in Margry, D6c., vi, 483,1886. Ka- 
dodakio.—Gravier (1701) quoted by Shea, Early 
Voy., 149, 1861. Kadodakious.—Bruv&re (1742) in 
Margry, D6c., vi, 474, 1886. Kadodaquious.—Ibid., 
483. Ka'dohada'cho,—Mooney in 14th Rep. B.A.E., 
1092,1896 (own name). Ka-lox-la'-tce.—ten Kate, 
Synonymie, 11, 1884 (Choctaw form). Kalu-xnad- 
shu.—Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E. (Ton- 
kawa form). Karo-xnadshu.—Ibid. Kasseya.— 
Ibid. (Tonkawa name). Kasseye'-i.—Ibid. (Ton¬ 
kawa name). Kul-hul-atsi.—Grayson, MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name). Ma'se'p.—Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1092,1896 (‘pierced nose’: 
Kiowa name). Mosi.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. 
Am., 375, 1885 (Kiowa name). Ni'rls-hari's- 
ki'riki.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1092, 1896 
another Wichita name). Ota's-ita'niuw’.—Ibid. 
‘pierced-nose people’: Cheyenne name). Qua- 
dodaquees.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 128,1816. 
Quadodaquious.—Le Page du Pratz, Hist. La., map, 
1758. Quodadiquio.—Barcia, Ensayo, 288, 1723. 
Soudaye.— La Harpe (1722) in Margry, D6c., vi, 
363,1886 (Fr. form of Quapaw name).' Su'-djfe.— 
Dorsey, Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Quapaw 
name). Tani'banen.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1092, 1896 (‘pierced-nose people’: Arapaho 
name). Tani'banenina.—Ibid. Tani'batha.—Ibid. 
Tashash.—Gatschet, Wichita MS., B. A. E. (Wich¬ 
ita name). Tawitskash.—Ibid. (Wichita name 
for a Caddo). U-tai-si'-ta.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 
9,1884 (‘pierced noses’: Cheyenne name). Uta- 
seta.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Cheyenne name). 
Witune.—Gatschet, Comanche MS.vocab.,B. A. E., 
9, 1884 (Comanche name). 

Kadusgo ( QIa'dAsgo ). A Haida town 
or camp on Louise id., Queen Charlotte 
group, Brit. Col., at the mouth of a 
creek bearing the same name, which flows 
into Cumshewa inlet from the s. The 
family which occupied it came to be called 
Kadusgo-kegaw T ai (‘those born at Kadus¬ 
go’).—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278, 1905. 

Kadusgo-kegawai ( Qld'dAsgo qe'gawa-i , 
‘ those born at Kadusgo creek ’). A fam¬ 
ily belonging to the Raven clan of the 
Haida, residing in the town of Kloo, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. The 
name was derived from that of an old 
camping place on the n. side of Louise id., 
and the people claimed descent from the 
Hlgahetgu-lanas of Old Gold Harbor; but 
until recent years they occupied a low posi¬ 
tion socially. At present they form one 
of the most numerous of the surviving 
family groups of the tribe. (j. r. s.) 
K-’adas k'e-e'owai.— Boas, l‘2th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 25,1898. OJa'dAsgo qe'gawa-i. —Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 269, 1905. 

Kae (Qd-i, ‘sea-lion town’). A former 
Haida town on Skotsgai bay, above Skide- 


640 


KAEKIBI-KAHLCHANEDI 


[b. a. e. 


gat®, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It 
was occupied by the Kaiahl-lanas, who 
took their name from the place before 
they moved to Kaisun. (j. r. s.) 

Kaekibi. A traditionary pueblo of the 
Asa people of the Hopi, who were of Tewa 
origin; situated on the Rio Chama, N. 
Mex., near the present Abiquiu.—Stephen 
in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 30, 1891. 

Kaersok. An Eskimo village and trad¬ 
ing post in w. Greenland, lat. 72° 39 r .— 
Meddelelser omGronland, vm, map, 1889. 

Kaffetalaya ( Kafi-talaia , ‘saisafras 
thicket’). A former Choctaw town on 
Owl cr., Neshoba co., Miss. The name 
was extended to cover a large district in 
that territory.—Halbert in Miss. Hist. 
Soc. Pub., vi, 427, 1902. 

Cofetalaya.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 108, 
1884. Coffadeliah.—West Florida map, ca. 1775. 
Kaffi talaya.—Romans, Florida, map, 1775. 

Kagahanin ( Ka f gahtinln ). The Thun¬ 
der clan of the Caddo.—Moonev in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1093, 1896. 

Kagaih ( Ka'gaih ). The Crow clan of 
the Caddo.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B.A.E., 
1093, 1896. 

Kagakwisuwug (Kdga kwisuwag *, ‘they 
go by the name of pigeon-hawk’). A 
Thunder gens of the Sauk and Foxes. 
Kagii'kwisuwag'.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Ka-ka- 
kwis'-so-uk.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877. 

Kaganhittan (‘sun-house people’). 
Given by Boas as a social group of the 
Tlingit at Wrangell, Alaska, but it is 
actually only the name of the people of 
a house belonging to the Kiksadi, q. v. 

GAgS'nhittan. —Swan ton, fieldnotes,B. A. E., 1904. 
K agan hit tan. —Boas, 5th Rep. N„ W. Tribes of 
Can., 25, 1889. 

Kagials-kegawai {Qa / gials qe'gawa-i, 
‘ those born at Kagials ’). An important 
family of the Raven clan of the Haida, 
which derives its name from a reef near 
Lawn hill, at the mouth of Skidegate in¬ 
let, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., 
whore some of the people formerly lived. 
A second name was Lqe'nol-la'nas, ‘peo¬ 
ple of [the town of] Cumshewa’, whence 
one portion of the Kagials-kegawai is 
said to have moved. Their own town 
was Skedans, and their chief was one 
of the most influential on the islands. 
Subdivisions of the family were the 
Kils-haidagai and Kogaahl-lanas, the 
latter being of low social rank. The 
Kagials-kegawai claim to have sprung 
from a woman who floated ashore at Hot 
Springs id. in a cockleshell. They were 
closely connected with the Tadji-lanas, 
who appear to have originated in the same 
locality. (j. r. s.) 

K-agyalsk-e'owai.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 24, 1898. jBqe'nol la'nas.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 269,1905. Qa'gials qe'gawa-i.—Ibid. Tlk i- 
notl la'nas.—Boas, op. cit. 

Kagokakat. A village of the Ingalik 
division of the Kaiyuhkhotana, at the 
mouth of Medicine cr., n. bank of Yukon 

r. , Alaska; pop. 9 in 1843, 115 in 1880. 
Kagokhakat.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th 

s. , xx, map, 1850. Kakagokhakat.— Zagoskin 


quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37,1884. 
Khatnotoutze.—Petroff, ibid., 12. 

Kagoughsage (Seneca: Kakon's&’-ge, 1 at 
false-face place’). The Iroquois name of 
a Shawnee village, known also as Akon- 
warage (Akonwar&’-ge, the Mohawk 
equivalent), in 1774, apparently in Ohio 
or w. Pa. (J. n. b. h. ) 

Agonwarage.—Johnson Hall conf. (1774)inN.Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VIII, 426,1857. Akonwarage.—Ibid. 
Kagoughsage. —Ibid. 

Kagsersuak. An Eskimo village and 
trading post in w. Greenland, lat. 73° W. 

Kagerssauk.—Science, XI, 259,1888. Kagsersuak.— 
Meddelelser om Gronland, vm, map, 1889. Ka- 
sarsoak.—Kane, Arct. Explor., II, 293, 1853. 

Kaguyak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the s. w. coast of Kodiak id., 
Alaska; pop. 109 in 1880, 112 in 1890. 

Alsentia.—Coast Surv. map, 1898. Kaguiak.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. Kagu¬ 
yak.—Coast Surv. map, 11th Census, Alaska, 1893. 
Kaniag-miut. — Russ.-Am. Co. map, 1849. Ka- 
niagmjut.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 142, map, 
1855. Kawnjagmjut.—Ibid. 

Kaguyak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Shelikof strait, Alaska; pop. 85 in 
1890. 

Douglas.—11th Census, Alaska, map, 1893. Kaia- 
iak.—Tebenkof (1849) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kaiayakak.—Lutke (1835), 
quoted, ibid. Kayayak.—Coast Surv. charts prior 
to 1884, quoted, ibid. 

Kagwantan (‘ burnt [house] people’). A 
large and important Tlingit division at 
Sitka, Chilkat, Huna, and Yakutat, Alas¬ 
ka, being especially strong at the two first- 
mentioned places. It belongs to the Wolf 
phratry. 

Kagontan.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 11S, 1885. 
Ka'gwantan.—Swanton, field notes, 1904, B. A. E. 
Kar-gwan-ton.—Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., ill, pi. vi, 1903. Kokvontan.—Lutke, Voy. 
Autour du Monde, I, 195, 1835. Koukhontans.— 
Ibid. 

Kahabi (Ka-ha'-bi) . The Willow clan 
of the Pakab (Reed) phratry of the 
Hopi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
39, 1891. 

Kahansuk. Marked as a Delaware 
tribe on the e. bank of lower Delaware 
r., about Low cr., Cumberland co., N. J., 
on Herrman’s map (1670) in Maps to Ac¬ 
company the Report of the Commission¬ 
ers on the Boundary line between Vir¬ 
ginia and Maryland, 1873. 

Kahendohon (Ka l h^ / ndo /i ho ni ). A for¬ 
mer Iroquois village belonging to the 
Two-clans of the Turtle. The locality is 
not known. (j. n. b. h.~) 

Kahhendohhon.—Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites, 
118, 1883.—Kah ken doh hon.—Ibid., 119. 

Kahesarahera (‘a rotten log lying on 
the top of it. ’—Hewitt). A Seneca village 
in New York in 1691; location unknown.— 
Markham (1691) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., iii, 805, 1853. 

Kah-ge-ga-gah-bowh. See Copway. 
Kahl. The Forehead clan of the Hopi, 
represented in their pueblo of Mishong- 
novi. 

Kahl.—Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi Cere¬ 
monies, 175, 1902. Kal-namu.—Voth, Trad, of the 
Hopi, 58, 1905. 

Kahlchanedi ( QfAtlcAne'di , ‘people of 
Kahlchan r.’). An extinct Tlingit divi- 


BULL. 30 ] 


KAHLCHATLAN—KAIBAB 


641 


sion formerly living at Kake, Alaska. It 
was of the Raven phratry. (j. r. s.) 

Kahlchatlan ( Qd'Ucahlan ). A town oc¬ 
cupied by the Stikine before moving to 
the present site of Wrangell. Alaska, and 
consequently called Old Wrangell by the 
whites. (j. r. s.) 

Kahlguihlgahet-gitinai ( QaiguV-tga'xet 
gUtnci'-i, ‘the Pebble-town GitPns living 
on the side of the town up the inlet’). 
A small branch of a Haida family called 
Hlgahet-gitinai living on the w. coast of 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.—Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 284, 1905. 

Kahligua-haidagai ( Qa'liguaxa'-idAga-i, 
‘people living at the end of the town up 
the inlet ’). A subdivision of the Stawas- 
haidagai, a family of the Eagle clan of 
the Haida in Brit. Col., so named from 
the position of their houses in the town.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 273,1905. 

Kahmetahwungaguma (‘lake of the 
sandy waters. ’—Warren). The Chippewa 
name of Sandy lake, on the upper Missis¬ 
sippi r., in Cass co., Minn. The Chippewa 
built a village on this lake about 1730, 
which was their first settlement on the 
headwaters of the Mississippi. The band 
residing here was commonly known as 
the Sandy Lake band. Some of them 
removed about 1807 to Pembina r. at the 
persuasion of the Northwest Fur Com¬ 
pany. (j. M.) 

Chippeways of Sand Lake. —Lewis and Clark, Trav¬ 
els, ‘28,1806. Kah-me-tah-wung-a-guma.—Warren 
(1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 177, 1885. 
Kami'tawg.ngagamag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906 (cor¬ 
rect form). Sandy Lake Indians.—Morse, Rep. to 
Sec. War, 33, 1822. 

Kahmitaiks (‘buffalo dung’). A di¬ 
vision of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika. 
Buffalo Dung.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
225, 1892. Kah'-mi-taiks.—Ibid., 209. 

Kahmiut. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village in the Kuskokwim district, Alaska; 
pop. 40in 1890.—11th Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. 

Kahra (‘wild rice’). One of the two 
modern divisions of the Sisseton Sioux. 
They had no permanent residence, but 
frequently visited L. Traverse, Minn., 
their hunting grounds being on Red r. 
of the North. Long (Exped. St Peters 
R., i, 378, 1824) said that they dwelt in 
fine skin tipis, the skins being well pre- 

g >ared and handsomely painted. 

aree.—Drake, Book Inds., vi. 1848 (identical?). 
Carees.—Domenech, Deserts of N. Am., 1,440,1860 
(identical?). Carrees.—Pike, Trav., 127, 1811. 
Cawras.—McIntosh, Origin of N. Am. Inds., 202, 
1853. Caw-ree.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 34,1806. 
Lac Traverse band.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 102, 1860. 
North Susseeton.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 497,1839. Sussi- 
tongs of Roche Blanche.—Pike, Trav., 127, 1811. 
Upper Seesetoans.—Sibley (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
29, pt. 2, 32d Cong., 2d sess., 9,1853. 

Xahtai. A former Clallam village at 
Port Townsend, Wash., in territory for¬ 
merly occupied by the Chemakum. 
Kahti—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 429, 1855. 
Ka-tai.—Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 20,1863. 


Kai (‘willows’). A Navaho clan. Cf. 
Kaihatin. 

Kai-jftne —Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
103,1890 (= ‘ people of the willows ’). Kaidine ‘ 
Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30,1897. 

Kaiachim. A former Porno village in 
Russian r. valley, Sonoma co., Cal. 
Kajatschim.—Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 80, 1839. 

Kaiahl-lanas (Qa'-iat la'nas, ‘people of 
sea-lion town’). A family of the Eagle 
clan of the Haida, so called from the town 
which they formerly occupied on Skots- 
gai bay, near Skidegate, Queen Charlotte 
ids., Brit. Col. After difficulties with 
their neighbors they moved to the w. 
coast, where they built the town of Kai- 
sun. The remnant is now at Skidegate. 
They claimed community of origin with 
the Kona-kegawai, Djiguaahl-lanas, and 
Stawas-haidagai. (j. r. s.) 

Kai'atl la'nas.—Boas in 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 24, 1898. Q,a'-iai la'nas.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 274, 1905. Qa'-ita la'nas.—Ibid. 

Kaiak, kayak. The men’s boat of the 
Eskimo of n.e. North America, from qajaq 
(< 7 =German ch), the name in the eastern 
dialects of the Eskimo language. See 
Boats. (a. f. c.) 

Kaiakak. A village of the Ingalik divi¬ 
sion of the Kaiyuhkhotana, with 134 na¬ 
tives in 1880, on the w. bank of Yukon 

r. , Alaska.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 12, 1884. 

Kaiaksekawik (‘place for making kai- 
aks’). A Utukamiut village on the n. side 
of Icy cape, Alaska. 

Kaiaksekawik.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 
1893. Kayakshigvikg.—Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. 
Poss. in Am., pt. 1, 74, 1847. 

Kaialigmiut. An Eskimo tribe n. of the 
Kuskwogmiut, extending on the main¬ 
land from Kuguktik r. to C. Romanzof, 
Alaska. In the lakes and streams of the 
tundra they obtain an abundant supply 
of fresh fish at the season when the coast 
natives often hunger. They are therefore 
a more vigorous people, living still in prim¬ 
itive simplicity. Their villages are Agi- 
ukchuk, Askinuk, Chininak, Kaialik, Ka- 
liukluk, Kashigalak, Kushunuk, Kvigat- 
luk, Nuloktolok, Nunvogulukhluguk, 
Sfaganuk, Ukak, Ukuk, and Unakagak. 
Kaialigamut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. Kai-a-lig-mut.—Dali in Proc. Am. A. A. S., 
XXXIV, 18, 1886. 

Kaialik. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo village 
in the Yukon delta near Azun r., Alaska; 
pop. 100 in 1880, 157 in 1890. 
Kaialigumiut.—Nelson (1868) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet.Alaska, 1902. Kailwigamiut.—Eleventh 
Census, Alaska, 164,1893. Kialigamiut.—Ibid., 110. 

Kaibab (prob. ‘on the mountain,’ from 
kaib or Jcaiba, ‘ mountain,’ and the locative 
ending ab or ba. —Kroeber). A division 
of the Paiute, numbering 171 in 1873, 
when they were in the vicinity of Kanab, 

s. w. Utah. Powell gave their name to 
the Kaibab plateau, n. w. Ariz. In 1903 
their number was given as 140, of which 
30 were at Cedar City, Utah, and 110 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-41 



642 


KAIDATOI ABIE-K AIM E 


[B. a. e. 


under a special agent. In 1905 there were 
109 reported, not under an agent. 
Kai-bab-bit.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 251, 1877. Kaibabits.— 
Ingalls in H. R. Ex. Doc.66, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 2, 
1873. Kaivavwit.—Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 
50, 1874. Kai-vwav-uai Nu-ints.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 42, 
43d Cong., 1st sess., 15,1874. 

Kaidatoiabie (Kai-da-toi-ab-ie). APavi- 
otso tribe of 6 bands formerly living in 
n. e. Nevada; pop. 425 in 1873.—Powell in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 52, 1874. 

Kaidju ( Qai'dju , ‘songs-of-victory 
town’). A Haida town on a point op¬ 
posite Danger rocks, Moresby id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., occupied by 
the Tadji-lanas. The Kaidju-kegawai, 
a subdivision of the Tadji-lanas, took its 
name from this town.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 277, 1905. 

Kaidju. A Haida town in Hewlett bay, 
on the e. coast of Moresby id., Queen 
Charlotte ids. Brit. Col. It was occu¬ 
pied by the Kas-lanas.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 277, 1905. 

Kaidjudal (QaVdjudal) . A former 
Haida town on Moresby id., opposite 
Hot Spring id., Queen Charlotte group, 
Brit. Col. It was occupied by the Hul- 
danggats.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278, 
1905. 

Kaidju-kegawai ( Qai'dju qe'gawa-i, 
‘those born at Songs-of-victory’town’). 
A subdivision of the Tadji-lanas, a family 
belonging to the Gunghet-haidagai (Nin- 
stints people) of the Haida of British 
Columbia.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 269, 
1905. 

Kaigani ( K!aigd'ni ). A division of the 
Haida, living in Alaska. Their name is 
derived from that of a camping place or 
summer settlement where they were ac¬ 
customed to assemble to meet incoming 
vesels and to trade with the whites. The 
Kaigani emigrated from the n. w. end of 
Queen Charlotte ids. between 150 and 200 
years ago, drove the Tlingit (Koluschan) 
from the s. end of Prince of Wales id., 
and took possession of their towns. The 
most important of these settlements 
were Sukwan, Klinkwan, Howkan, and 
Kasaan, which bear their old Tlingit 
names. The last three are still inhab¬ 
ited. Like many Tlingit tribes, but un¬ 
like other Haida, the Kaigani subdivi¬ 
sions often took their names from the 
name given to some individual house. 
About 1840 the population was estimated 
at 1,735. According to Petroff’s report 
(10th Census, Alaska) they numbered 
788 in 1880; in 1890 the population was 
given as 391. Their present number prob¬ 
ably does not exceed 300. ( j. r. s. ) 

Kaiaganies.—Halleck (1869) in Morris, Resources 
of Alaska, 67,1879. Kaigan.—Terry in Rep. Sec. 
War, i, 40,1868-69. Kaigani.—Dawson, Queen Char¬ 
lotte Ids., 104 b, 1880. Kegarnie.—Dunn, Hist. Ore¬ 
gon, 281, 1844. Kiganis.—Duflot de Mofras, Ore¬ 
gon, 1 ,335, 336,1844. Kigarnee.—Ludewig, Aborig. 
Lang. America, 157, 1860. Kigenes.—Am. Pioneer, 
II, 189, 1843. Kygani.—Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
269,1869. Kyganies.—Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. 


Lond., i, 219,1841. Kygany.—Gibbs after Anderson 
in Hist. Mag., 74, 1863. Kygargey.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855 (after Work, 1836-41). 
Kygarney.—Kane, Wand. N. A., app., 1859 (after 
Work, 1836-41). 

Kaigani. An important Haida summer 
town or camping place at the s. e. end 
of Dali id., s. w. Alaska. Most of the 
families which moved from the Queen 
Charlotte ids. formerly gathered here to 
meet trading vessels, for which reason 
they came to be known to the whites as 
Kaigani. The dominant family in this 
town is said to have been the Yaku- 
lanas. (.t. e. s. ) 

Kaigwu (Kiow r a proper). The oldest 
tribal division of the Kiowa, from which 
the tribe derives its name. To it be¬ 
longs the keeping of the medicine tipi, 
in which is the grand medicine of the 
tribe.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1079, 1896. 

Kaihatin (‘willow’). A clan or band 
of the Coyotero and also of the Pinaleno 
Apache at San Carlos and Ft Apache 
agencies, Ariz.; coordinate with the Kai 
clan of the Navaho. 

Kayjatin.—Bourkein Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 112, 
1890. Kay-tzen-lin.—Ibid. 

Kaiihl-lanas (Qai-il la'nas). A subdi¬ 
vision of the Dostlan-lnagai, a family 
group of the Haida, named from a camp¬ 
ing place on the w. coast of Queen Char¬ 
lotte ids., Brit. Col. (j. r. s.) 

Kailaidshi. A formerUpperCreek town 
in the central district, on a creek of the 
same name, which joins Oakjoy cr., a w. 
tributary of Tallapoosa r., probably in the 
n. w. part of the present Elmore co., Ala. 
Atchinahatehi and Hatchichapa were 
dependent villages of this town, the name 
of which probably has reference to a war¬ 
rior’s head-dress. (a. s. g.) 

Caileedjee—Robin,Voy.,II,map, 1807. Cieligees.— 
Woodward, Reminiscences,83,1859. Ka-ilaidshi.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 133, 1884. Kealee- 
gees.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1779), 69,1837. Keilijah.— 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 318, 1836. 
Kialajahs.—Simpson (1836) in H. R. Doc. 80,27th 
Cong., 3d sess., 50, 1843. Kialechies.—H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 124, 1836. Kialee- 
gees.—U. S. Ind. Treaties (1779),69,1837. Kialega.— 
Crawford (1836) in H. R. Doc. 274,25th Cong., 2d 
sess., 24, 1838. Kialgie.—Shorter (1835) in H. R. 
Doc. 452, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 65, 1838. Kiali- 
ages.—Ore (1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 
274, 1832. Kialiga’s.—Campbell (1836) in II. R. 
Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. Kialige.— 
Creek paper (1836) in H. R. Rep. 37, 31st Cong., 
2d sess., 122, 1851. Kialigee.—H. R. Doc. 274, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 149, 1838. Ki-a-li-jee.—Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch, 48,1848. Kiclichee.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 
425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 181, 1836. Kiliga.—Gat¬ 
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133, 1884 (an early 
form). Killeegko.—Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 262,1855. Kiolege.—Bartram (1778), 
Travels, 462, 1791. Kuyalegees.—U. S. Ind. Treat. 
(1797), 68,1837. Ogoleegees.—Lattr6, mapof U. S., 
1784 (probably identical). Pialeges.—Weatherford 
(1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 386,1832. 

Kailaidshi. A town of the Creek Nation 
on Canadian r., e. of Hilabi, Okla. 
Ka-ila'idshi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 
1888. 

Kaime ( Kai-me 7 ). APomotribe occupy¬ 
ing Russian r. valley, Cal., from Clover- 


BULL. 30] 


KAINAH-KAIYUHKHOTANA 


643 


dale to Geyserville.—Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., hi, 183, 1877. 

Kainah ( Ah-kai-nah , ‘ many chiefs’, 

from a-kai-im ‘many’, ni'-nah ‘chiefs’). 
A division of the Siksika (q. v.), or Black- 
feet, now living on a reservation under 
the Blood agency in Alberta, Canada, 
between Belly and St Mary rs. The 
subtribes or "bands are Ahkaiksumiks, 
Ahkaipokaks, Ahkotashiks, Ahkwonist- 
sists, Anepo, Apikaiyiks, Aputosikainah, 
Inuhksoyistamiks, Isisokasimiks, Istsi- 
kainah, Mameoya, Nitikskiks, Ponokix, 
Saksinahmahyiks, Siksahpuniks, and 
Siksinokaks. According to the Report 
of the Commissioner of Indian Affairs 
for 1858, there were then 300 tipis and 
2,400 persons. In 1904 there were 1,196 
persons on the reservation, of whom 958 
were classed as pagans. 

Bloodies.—Hind, Red R. Exped., 157, 1860 (so 
called by half-breeds). Blood Indians.—Writer of 
1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., in, 24, 1794. 
Blood People.—Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 289, 
1871. Blut Indianer.—Walch, map, 1805 (Ger¬ 
man form). Ede-but-say.—Anon. Crow MS. 
vocab., B. A. E. (Crow name). Gens du Sang.— 
Duflot de Mofras, Exp]., ii, 342, 1844. Indiens 
du Sang.—Ibid., 339. Kaenna.—Maximilian, 
Travels, 245, 1843. Kahna.—Ibid. Kai'-e-na.— 
Ha>den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 256,1862. 
Kaime.—Browne in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 81,1877. 
Kai'-na.—Clark Wissler, inf n, 1905 (Piegan dia¬ 
lectic form). Kai'nau.—Tims, Blackfoot Gram, 
and Diet., 113, 1889 (Siksika name). Kainoe'- 
koon.—Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, I, 170, 1824 
(own name). Kam'-ne.—Hayden, op. cit., 402 
(Crow name). Ke'na.—Hale, Ethnol. and Philol., 
219, 1846 (sing., Keneku'n). Ki-na.—Morgan, 
Consang. and Affin., 289, 1871 (trans.: ‘high 
minded people’). Kine-ne-ai-koon.—Henry, MS. 
vocab., 1808. Ki'-no.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171, 
1877. Meethco-thinyoowuc.—Franklin, Journ. Po¬ 
lar Sea, 1,170,1824. We'-wi-ca-sa.—Cook, Yankton 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Yankton name). 

Kaisun ( Qai'sun ). A former Haida 
town on the n. w. coast of Moresby id., 
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It 
belonged to the Kaiahl-lanas, who set¬ 
tled there after moving from Skidegate 
inlet, but before that time the Kas-lanas 
are said to have occupied it. By the 
whites Kaisun was sometimes called Gold 
Harbor, or, to distinguish it from the town 
afterw’ard built on Maude id. by the 
west-coast people, Old Gold Harbor; but 
this term is properly applicable to Skai- 
to, acamponGold Harbor, itself occupied 
by Haida from all parts of the Queen 
Charlotte ids. during the time of the 
gold excitement. Kaisun is the Kish-a- 
win of John Work’s list, which was ac¬ 
credited by him with 18 houses and 329 
people in 1836-41. Since the old people 
can still remember 17 houses, Work’s 
figures would appear to be trustworthy. 
The few survivors of Kaisun now live at 
Skidegate. (j. R. s.) 

Kaishun.—Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168, 1880. 
K*ai's’un.—Boas, Twelfth Report N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 24, 1880. Kaiswun Haade.—Harrison in 
Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 
1895. Kish-a-win.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 


489,1855 (after Work, 1836-41). Qai'sun.—Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 287, 1905. 

Kaivanungavidukw ( Kai-va-nung-av'-i- 
dukw.) A band of the Paviotso, popu¬ 
larly called Paiute, formerly living in 
Surprise valley, n. e. Cal.—Powell, Pav¬ 
iotso MS., B. A. E., 1881. 

Kaiyau (‘head’). A name applied by 
all the Pomo about Clear lake to those 
living about the n. end of the lake, in 
Upper Lake and Bachelor valleys, Lake 
co., Cal. (s. a. b.) 

Kaiyuhkhotana. The westernmost Ath¬ 
apascan tribe of Alaska, living on the 
banks of Yukon r. between Anvik and 
Koyukuk rs. They have been supplant¬ 
ed in the w. part of their old habitat by 
Eskimo. Since hostilities between them 
and the Eskimo have ceased they have 
become assimilated with the latter, adopt¬ 
ing a fish diet and differing from all their 
congeners in acquiring a liking for oil. 
The tribe is distinguished from its neigh¬ 
bors also by its language, they being un¬ 
able to converse with the Kutchin. The 
southernmost settlements subsist princi¬ 
pally by fishing and trading. They dry 
fish and are very expert in making wood¬ 
en ware and strong birch canoes. Those 
of upper Yukon, Shageluk, and Kusko- 
kwim rs. combine hunting with these pur¬ 
suits. The Kaiyuhkhotana build perma¬ 
nent villages which they sometimes leave 
during the summer. The pointed hunt¬ 
ing shirts formerly worn have been largely 
replaced by the clothing of the whites. 
They do not appear to have adopted a to- 
temic system, and follow the Eskimo cus¬ 
tom of giving elaborate feasts. Zagoskin 
in 1844 estimated their population at 923. 
Petroff (10th Census, Alaska, 1884) gave 
their number as 805 on the Yukon and 148 
on the Kuskokwim. Allen (Report on 
Alaska, 1887) gave the population as about 
1,300. The 11th Census (158,1893) gives 
the population of the Yukon district as 
753 and of the Kuskokwim as 386; total, 
1,139. The following are Kaiyuhkhotana 
villages, exclusive of those of the Jugel- 
nute division: Anvik, Chagvagchat, Chi- 
nik, Iktigalik, Innoka, Ivan, Kagokakat, 
Kaiakak, Kaltag, Khaigamute, Kho- 
goltlinde, Khulikakat, Khunanilinde, 
Klamaskwaltin, Koserefski, Kunkhogli- 
ak, Kutul, Lofka, Nulato, Paltchikatno, 
Taguta, Tanakot, Terentief, Tigshelde, 
Tutago, Ulukakhotana, and Wolasa- 
tux. The local divisions were Ingalik, 
Inkalich, Jugelnute, Kaiyuhkhotana, 
Nulato, Takaiak, Tlegonkhotana, Tai- 
yanyanokhotana, and Ulukakhotana. 
Dane.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361, 
1891. Ingaliks.— I)all in Proc. Am. A. A. S., xvm, 
270,1870. Kaeyah-Khatana.—Bancroft, Nat.Races, 
I, 133, 1874. Kaiyuhkatana.—Ibid., 148, 1882. 

Kaiyuhkho-tana.—Dali, Alaska, 431, 1870. Kaiyu- 
khotana.—Allen, Rep., 143, 1887. Kkpayou-Kout- 
tance.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361, 


644 


KAIYUHKHOTANA-KAKINONBA 


[B. a. e. 


1891 (‘people of the willows’). Lowlanders.— 
Dali in Proc. Am. A. A. S., xvm, 270, 1870. 

Kaiyuhkhotana. A division of the Kai- 
yuhkhotana, living on Kaiyuh r. Their 
village was Kutul. 

Kainhkhotana.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 161, 
1884 (misprint). Kaiyuk'a-kho-tan'a.—Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 26,1877. 

Kaiyuwuntsunitthai (‘ rocky land ’). A 
former Kuitsh village on lower Umpqua 
r., Oreg. 

Kai'-yu-wun-ts’u'-nit t’pai'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, m, 231, 1890. 

Kajechadi. (Kd-jech-adi ). Given by 
Krause (Tlinkit-Ind., 116, 1885) as a 
Tlingit division living in the town of 
Chilkoot, Alaska. Unidentified. 

Kajienatroene (‘eagle people.’—Hew¬ 
itt ). One of the 6 ‘ ‘ castles ” of the Ottawa 
near Michilimackinac, Mich., in 1723.— 
Albany conf. (1723) in N, Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., v, 693, 1855. 

Kaka (‘crows’). A band or society of 
the Arikara. 

Crows.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 143, 
1851. Ka-ka'.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol., 357, 
1862. 

Kakagshe ( Ka-kag'-she , ‘crow’). A 
gens of the Potawatomi.—Morgan, Anc. 
Soc., 167,1877. 

Kakake ( Kakdke , ‘ crow’). A subphratry 
or gens of the Menominee.—Hoffman in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 1896. 

Kakake. Given as the Pigeon-hawk 
gens of the Chippewa, but really the 
Raven (Kagigi) gens of that tribe. 
Kagagi.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Ka-kaik.—Tan¬ 
ner, Narr., 314, 1830 (‘hen hawk’). Ka-kake'.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877 (‘pigeon hawk’). 

Kakanatzatia. A former village of the 
Sia (q. v.), opposite the present Sia pueblo, 
on Jemez r., n. central N. Mex. Accord¬ 
ing to Sia tradition, war broke out be¬ 
tween the inhabitants of this village and 
those of Kohasaya, the former being 
driven southward by an attempt of the 
latter to burn their pueblo, the Kohasaya 
afterward moving to the site of Sia. It 
is not improbable that one of the two 
pueblos mentioned was occupied at the 
time of Espejo’s visit in 1583, and thus 
formed one of the villages of his province 
of Punames. 

Ka-kan A-tza Tia.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, iv, 198, 1892. 

Kakapoya (‘inside fat.’ — Morgan). 
Given as a division of the Piegan tribe of 
the Siksika. Perhaps the same as Inuk- 
sikahkopwaiks, q. v. 

Inside Fat.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171,1877. Ka-ka'- 
po-ya.—Ibid. 

Kakawatilikya (Qa r qawatiliJc’a). A 
gensoftheTsawatenok,aKwakiutl tribe.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897. 

Kake. A Tlingit tribe on Kupreanof 
id., Alaska. The designation is often 
extended to include the people of Kuiu 
and Smndum (q. v.). Their winter vil¬ 
lage is Kcke, near Hamilton harbor. 
Pop., including probably the Kuiu people, 
234 in 1890. Their social divisions are 


Kahlchanedi (extinct), Katchadi, Nesadi, 
Sakutenedi, Shunkukedi, Tsaguedi, 
Tanedi, and Was-hinedi. (j. r. s.) 

Cakes.—Seward, Speeches on Alaska, 5,1869. Ka- 
acks.—Crosbie in H. R. Ex. Doc. 77, 36th Cong., 
lstsess.,8, 1860. Kake.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., 
app., 1859. Kakus.—Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, pt. 
1, 38, 1868. Kates.—Colyer (Louthan) in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 573, 1870. Kaykovskie—Elliott, Cond. Aff. 
Alaska, 227, 1875 (transliterated from Veniam- 
inoff). Kehk.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32, 
1884. Kehons—Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 313, 1868 
(name on Russian charts). Kek.—Tikhmenieff, 
Russ. Am. Co., II, 341, 1863. Kekch-kon.—Krause, 
Tlinkitlnd., 120,1885. Kekuvskoe.—Veniaminoff, 
Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Keq!—Swanton, field 
notes, B. A. E.,1904. Khekhu.—Holmberg, Ethnog. 
Skizz.,map,1855. Kyacks.—Scottin Ind. Aff.Rep., 
314, 1868. Rat tribe.—Mahony (1869) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 68, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1870. 

Kake. The modern name of the village 
of the Kake Indians on the n. w. coast of 
Kupreanof id., Alaska; pop. 234 in 1890. 

Keq!.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. Kluk- 
wan.—Petroff in Tenth Census, Alaska, 32, 1884. 
SlikAnAxsa'ni. — Swanton, op. cit. (said to be 
proper name of the town, perhaps meaning ‘ from 
a black bear town’). 

Kakegha (‘making a grating noise’). 
A division of the Brul6 Teton Sioux. 
Kakega.—Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 219, 1897. Kak’exa.—Ibid. < 

Kakekt ( Xax’eqt ). An extinct Salish 
tribe which formerly lived at C. Lazo e. 
coast of Vancouver id., and spoke the 
Comox dialect.—Boas, MS., B. A. E., 
1887. 

Kakhan. The Wolf clan of the Keresan 
pueblo of Laguna, N. Mex. It claims to 
have come originally from Sandia. 
Ka-kan.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 293, 
1890 (given as name of the wolf fetish). Kakhan- 
hano ch .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 1896 
(hanoch = * people ’). 

Kakhmiatonwan (‘ village at the bend ’). 
A division of the Sisseton Sioux. 
Kahmi-atoq wap.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
217, 1897. Kaqmi-ato n wa n .—Ibid. 

Kakhtshanwaish. A former Alsea vil¬ 
lage on the n. side of Alsea r., Oreg. 
Kaq-tca n -waic'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 230,1890. 

Kakick. According to Coxe a tribe for¬ 
merly on an island of the same name in 
Tennessee r., above the Chickasaw; pos¬ 
sibly Creek. See Cochali. 

Kakick.—Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Kakigue.— 
Ibid., 14. 

Kakinonba. A tribe mentioned by sev¬ 
eral early French writers about the close 
of the 18th century as living apparently 
on Tennessee or Cumberland r., although 
the exact locality and the relationship of 
the tribe can not be determined. Mar¬ 
quette’s map places them e. of the Mis¬ 
sissippi, about the region of Kentucky, 
in 1674. The Senex map of 1710 locates 
them along the middle of Tennessee r. 
St Cosme speaks of them as in s. Illinois 
in 1699. Tennessee r. was called Casquin- 
ambeaux, Casquinampo, and Kaskinenpo 
by early French explorers. 

Cakinonpas.—Sauvole (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., ill, 238, 1851. Caskinampo.—Senex, map of 
N. Am., 1710. Kakinonba,—Marquette’s map (ca. 
1674) in Shea, Discov. Miss., 1852. Karkinonpols.— 


BULL. 30] 


K AKLIAKLI A-KALAPOOIAN FAMILY 


645 


St Cosme (1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 60, 1861. 
Kasquinanipo.—Tonti (ca. 1690) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., I, 82, 1846. 

Kakliaklia. A Koyukukhotana village 
of 26 people on the Koyukuk, at the mouth 
of Sukloseanti r., Alaska. 
Kakhlyakhlyakakat.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. 
Am., map, 1848. * Kakliakhliakat.—Zagoskin 
quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37,1884. 
Kakliaklia.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 
Kakliakliakat.—Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by 
Baker, ibid. Kikliakliakakate.—Zagoskin in 
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Kakonak. A Kiatagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the s. shore of Iliamna lake, Alas¬ 
ka; pop. 28 in 1890. 

Kakhonak.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164,1893. 

Kakonkaruk (kakon , a species of hawk; 
ka, locative; ruk, ‘house.’—Kroeber). 
A village of the Rumsen, a division of the 
Costanoan family, formerly at Sur, on the 
coast, 20 m. s. of Monterey, Cal. 

Cakanaruk.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,1860. 
Kakontaruk.—A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1906. 

Kakos-hit-tan ( Qaq!o's hit tan, ‘people 
of man’s-feet house’). A subdivision of 
the Shunkukedi (q. v.), a Tlingit division 
at Klawak, Alaska. (j. r. s.) 

Kakouchaki (from kakou, ‘porcupine’). 
A small Montagnais tribe formerly living 
on St John lake, Quebec. They frequently 
visited Tadoussac with other northern 
tribes and were occasionally visited in 
their country by the missionaries. 
Kacouchakhi.—Can. Ind. Aff., 40, 1879. Kak8a- 
zakhi.—Jes. Rel. for 1641, 57, 1858. Kakouchac.— 
Ibid., 1672, 44. Kakouchakhi.— Ibid., 1643, 38. 
Kakouchaki.—Champlain, CEuvres, ii, 21, note, 
1870. Nation des Pore epics.—Jes. Rel. for 1638,24, 
1858. Nation of the Porcupine.—Winsor, Cartier to 
Frontenac, 171, 1894. Porcupine Tribe.—Charle¬ 
voix, Hist. N. France, II, 118, 1866. 

Kaksine ( Qak'sine ). A Squawmish vil¬ 
lage community on Mamukum cr., left 
bank of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.—Hill- 
Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kaku ( Kd-k’u ). A former Yaquina 
village onthes. sideof Yaquina r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 229, 
1890. 

Kakuak. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage 60 m. up Nushagakr., Alaska; pop. 
104 in 1880, 45 in 1890. 

Kakuak.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 47, 1881. Kak- 
wok.—Coast Surv. map, 11th Census, Alaska, 1893. 

Kakuguk. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kakuiak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Kuskokwim r., Alaska; pop. 8 in 
1880. 

Kakhuiyagamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
17, 1884. 

Kalanunyi ( Kd'laniin'yi , ‘ raven place ’). 
One of the five districts or “towns” which 
Col. William H. Thomas, in his capacity of 
agent for the Eastern Cherokee, laid off 
on the e. Cherokee res., in Swain and 
Jackson cos., N. C., after the removal of 
the rest of the tribe to Indian Ter. in 1838. 
The name is still retained. (j. m. ) 
Big Cove.—Mooney in 19th Rep., B. A. E., 161,524, 
1900. Ka'lanun'yi.— Ibid. (Cherokee name: ‘Ra¬ 
ven place ’). Raventown. —Ibid. 


Kalapooian Family. A group of tribes for¬ 
merly occupying the valley of Willamette 
r., n. w. Oreg., and speaking a distinct 
stock language (see Powell in 7th Rep. B. 
A. E., 81,1891). Little is known of their 
history, but they seem to have confined 
themselves to the territory mentioned, 
except in the case of one tribe, the Yon- 
kalla, which pushed southward to the val¬ 
ley of the Umpqua. The earliest accounts 
describe a numerous population in Willa¬ 
mette valley, which is one of the most 
fertile in the N. W.; but the Kalapooian 
tribes appear to have suffered severe losses 
by epidemic disease about 1824, and since 
that time they have been numerically 
weak. They are also described as being 
indolent and sluggish in character, yet 
they seem to have been able to hold their 
territory against the attempts of surround¬ 
ing tribes to dispossess them. They were 
at constant war with the coast peoples 
and also suffered much at the hands of 
the white pioneers. Game, in which the 
country abounded, and roots of various 
kinds constituted their chief food supply. 
Unlike most of the Indians of that region 
they did not depend on salmon, which 
are unable to ascend the Willamette above 
the falls, and at which point the Kala¬ 
pooian territory ended. Of the general 
customs of the group there is little infor¬ 
mation. Slavery existed in a modified 
form, marriage w’as by purchase and w T as 
accompanied by certain curious ceremo¬ 
nials (Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
xii, 212, 1899), and flattening of the head 
by fronto-occipital pressure was practised. 
The language is sonorous, the verb ex¬ 
cessively complex, few prefixes being 
used, and the words are distinguished by 
consonantal endings. 

By treaty of Calapooia cr., Oreg., Nov. 
29, 1854, the Umpqua and Kalapooian 
tribes of Umpqua valley ceded their lands 
to the United States, the tract, however, 
to constitute a reserve for these and other 
tribes, unless the President should decide 
to locate them elsewhere. This removal 
was effected, and the entire tract was re¬ 
garded as ceded. By treaty at Dayton, 
Oreg., Jan. 22, 1855, the Calapooya and 
confederated bands of Willamette valley 
ceded the entire drainage area of Willa¬ 
mette r., the Grande Ronde res. being 
set aside for them and other bands by 
Executive order of June 30, 1857. By 
agreement June 27, 1901, confirmed Apr. 
21, 1904, the Indians of Grande Ronde 
res. ceded all the unallotted lands of said 
reservation. The Kalapooian bands at 
Grande Ronde numbered 351 in 1880, 
164 in 1890, 130 in 1905. There are also 
a few representatives of the stock under 
the Siletz agency. 

It is probable that in early times the 
tribes and divisions of this family were 


646 


KALASHIAUU-KALISPEL 


[B. A. E. 


more numerous, but the following are the 
chief ones of which there is definite in¬ 
formation: Ahantchuyuk or Pudding 
River, Atfalati or Tualati, Calapooya, 
Chelamela,Chepenafa, Lakmiut, Santiam, 
Yamel, and Yonkalla. 

The following are presumed to be Ka- 
lapooian tribes or bands, but have not 
been fully identified: Chemapho, Che- 
meketas, Chillychandize, Laptambif, 
Leeshtelosh, Peeyou, Shehees, Shookany, 
and Winnefelly. See Calapooya. (l. f.) 

>Calapooya.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 565, 629, 
1882. xChinooks.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
Cent, and So. Am., app., 474, 1878 (includes Cala- 
pooyas and Yamkally). =Kalapooiah.—Scouler 
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 225, 1841 (in¬ 
cludes Kalapooiah and Yamkallie; thinks the 
Umpqua and Cathlascon languages are related); 
Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 599, 617, 
1859 (follows Scouler). =Kalapooian.—Powell in 
7th Rep. B. A. E., 81, 1891. =Kalapuya.—Hale in 
U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 217, 564, 1846 (of Willamet 
valley above falls); Gallatin in Trans. Am. 
Ethnol. Soc., n, pt. 1, c, 17, 77, 1848; Berghaus 
(1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852; Gallatin in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 402,1853; Latham in 
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856; Buschmann, 
Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 617, 1859; Latham, 
Opuscula, 340,1860; Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 
167, 1877; Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 442, 
1877. >Yamkally.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, iii,565, 
630, 1882 (bears a certain relationship to Cala¬ 
pooya). 

Kalashiauu {Ka-la'-ci-au-u) . The Rac¬ 
coon clan of the Chua (Snake) phratry 
of the Hopi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. 
E., 38, 1891. 

Kalawashuk (Ka-la-wa'-cuk) . One of 
the Chumashan villages connected with 
the former Santa Ines mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal.—Henshaw, Santa Inez 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kalawatset. A geographical group of 
tribes of different families in w. Oregon, 
embracing particularly the Coos, Kuitsh, 
and Siuslatv. 

Kala-Walset.—Mannypenny in H.R. Ex. Doc. 37, 
34thCong., 3d sess., 9,1857. Kalawatset.—Milhau, 
MS. vocab. Coast Inds., B.A. E. Kalawatshet.— 
Gibbs, MS., B.A.E. Kiliwatsal.—Framboise, quot¬ 
ed by Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
255,1841. Kiliwatshat.—Hale, Ethnol. and Philol., 
221, 1846. Killawat.—Drake, Bk. Inds., viii, 1848. 
Killewatsis.—Armstrong, Oreg., 116, 1857. Killi- 
washat.—Latham (1853) inProc. Philol.Soc. Lond., 
Vi, 82, 1854. Killiwatshat.—Hamilton quoted by 
Gibbs, MS., B.A.E. K’qlo-qwec^unne.—Dorsey, 
MS. Chasta Costa vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chasta- 
costa name). Ral-la-wat-sets.—Drew in H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 93, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 127, 1856. 

Kalbauvane. A former Delaware (?) 
village on the headwaters of the w. 
branch of Susquehanna r., Pa.—Pouchot 
map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
694,1858. 

Kalbusht (‘where the water rolls’). 
A former Alsea village on the s. side of 
Alsea r., Oreg. 

Xal'-buct’.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, m, 
230, 1890. 

Kalekhta. A former Aleut village on 
Unalaska, Aleutian ids., Alaska, contain¬ 
ing 14 persons about 1825. 

Kahlechtenskoi.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 
1875. Kalaktak.—Coxe, Russian Discov., 167, 
1787. Kalechtinskoje.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 
map, 1885. Kalekhtinskoe.—Veniamin off, Zapis- 
ki, ii, 202, 1840. 


Kalelk ( Ka'-lelk ). A former Modoc 
settlement on the n. shore of Tule or 
Rhett lake, s. w. Oregon.—Gatschet in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 1, xxxii, 1890. 

Kali (‘fishermen’). A Knaiakhotana 
clan living on Cook inlet, Alaska.—Rich¬ 
ardson, Arct. Exped., i, 407, 1851. 

Kalignak. A Nushagagmiut village on 
a tributary of Nushagak r., Alaska; pop. 
91 in 1880.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 47, 
1880. 

Kaliko. A Yuit Eskimo village on the 
Siberian coast e. of Iskagan bay.—Krause 
in Deutsche Geog. Blatt.,v, 80, map, 1882. 

Kalindaruk (kalin ‘ocean’, ta ‘at’, ruk 
‘houses.’—Kroeber). A village near the 
mouth of Salinas r., Cal. The name has 
been used, whether or not with justifica¬ 
tion, to designate the group of Indians 
inhabiting the villages on lower Pajaro r., 
and between it and the Salinas, near the 
coast. Indians from this area were taken 
both to San Carlos and to San Juan Bau¬ 
tista missions. Among the villages at¬ 
tributed to this region are Alcoz, Animpa- 
yamo, Kapanai, Kulul, Lukaiasta, Mus- 
tak, Nutnur, Paisin, Poitokwis, Tiubta, 
and Ymunakam. 

Calendaruc.—Engelhardt, Franciscans in Cal., 398, 
1897. Kalindaruk.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906 
(proper form). Kathlendaruc.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Nov. 25, 1860. Katlendarukas.—Ibid., 
Apr. 20, 1860. 

Kalispel (popularly known as Pend 
d’Oreilles, ‘ear drops’). A Salish tribe 
around the lake and along the river of 
the same name in the extreme n. part 
of Idaho and n. e. Washington. Gibbs 
divided them into the Kalispelms or 
Pend d’Oreilles of the Lower Lake and 
the Slka-tkml-schi or Pend d’Oreilles of 
the Upper Lake, and according to Dr 
Dart the former numbered 520 in 1851, 
the latter 480 (Pac. R. R. Rep. i, 415, 
1855). McVickar (Hist. Exped. Lewis 
and Clark, ii, 386, note, 1842) made 
three divisions: Upper Pend d’Oreilles, 
Lower Pend d’Oreilles, and Micksuck- 
sealton. Lewis and Clark estimated 
their number at 1,600 in 30 lodges in 
1805. In 1905 there were 640 Upper 
Pend d’Oreilles and 197 Kalispel under 
the Flathead agency, Mont., and 98 Kal¬ 
ispel under the Colville agency, Wash. 

The subdivisions, being seldom re¬ 
ferred to, are disregarded in the syn¬ 
onymy. 

Ach-min-de-cou-may.— Anon. Crow MS. vocab., 
B. A, E. (Crowname). Ak-min'-e-shu'-me.— Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol., 402,1862 (‘the tribe that 
uses canoes’: Crow name). Calapelins.— School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes,vi, 686, 1857. Calespelin.— Lane 
(1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 
170,1850. Calespell.— Johnson and Winter, Rocky 
Mts., 34, 1846. Calespin. — Lane (1849) in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 52, op. cit., 170. Calispells. —Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 504, 1878. Colespelin.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 701,1857. Colespells.— 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 102, 43d Cong., 1st sess., 1, 1874- 
Coopspellar.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Coos* 
pellar.— Lewis and Clark Exped., u, 475, 1814. 
Coos-pel-lar’s Nation. —Orig.Jour.Lewisand Clark, 
VI, 119, 1905. Ear Rings. —De Smet, Letters, 62, 
1843. Flathead Kootanie. —Tolmie and Dawson, 


BULL. 30] 


KALIUKLUK-KALULAADLEK 


647 


Comp. Vocabs., 124b, 1884 (erroneously so called). 
Hanging Ears. —Irving, Rocky Mts., I, 127, 1837. 
Kah-lis-pelm.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 461,1854. 
Kale pel. —Ibid.,418. Kalespilum.— Gatschet, MS., 
B. A. E. (Okinagan name). Kalispel. —Ina. Aff. 
Rep. 1901, 692, 1902 (own name). Kalispelines. — 
Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 418, 1854. Kalispelms. — 
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 415, 1855. Kalispels. — 
Smet, Letters, 170, 1843. Kulispelum.— Stevens in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 419,1854. Kalispelu ses. —Ibid.,418. 
Ka'noqtla'tlam. —Chamberlain in 8th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 8, 1892 (Kutenai name : ‘compress 
side of head’). Kellespem.— Duflot de Mofras, 
Expl., ii, 101, 335, 1844. Klanoh-klatklam.— Tol- 
mie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 124b, 1884 (Kute¬ 
nai name). Kulias Palus. —Warre and Vavasseur 
in Martin, Hudson Bay Ter., 82,1849. Kullespelm.— 
Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 205,1846. Kulles- 
pen.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., n, 27, 
1848. Kushpelu. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
731, 1896 (a Yakima or Paloos form). Kuttel- 
spelm.— Latham, Comp. Philol., 399, 1862. Lower 
Pend d’Oreilles. —Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 415, 
1855. Ni-he-ta-te-tup'i-o. —Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol., 264,1862 (Siksikaname). Papshpun‘lema. — 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 731,1896 (Yakima 
name: ‘people of the great fir trees’). Peaux 
d’Oreilles.— Audouard, Le.Far West, 204, 1869. 
Pend d’Oreilles of the Lower Lake. —Gibbs in Pac. 
R. R. Rep., I, 415,1855. Pend d’Oreilles of the Upper 
Lake. —Ibid. Pends-d’oreilles. —Smet, Letters, viii, 
1843. Pend^s Oreilles. —Irving, Rocky Mts., I, 
121, 1837. Pond d’Oreilles. —Price in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 44, 47th Cong., 2d sess., 2, 1883. Pondecas.— 
McVickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis and Clark, n, 
386, note, 1842. Pondera. —Parker, Jour., 293, 1840. 
Ponderas.— Robertson (1846) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 
30th Cong., 1st sess., 8, 1848. Ponderays.— Hale in 
U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 569, 1846. Pord Orrilles. — 
Dart in Ind. Aff. Rep., 216, 1851. Ponduras. —Lane 
(1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 
170,1850. Pouderas. —Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 159, 
1850. Sar-lit-hu.— Suck ley in Pac. R. R. Rep., 
i, 300, 1855. Slka-tkml-schi. —Gibbs, ibid., 415, 
Upper Pend d'Oreilles. —Com’r. Ind. Aff. in Sen. 
Misc. Doc. 136, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 11, 1870. 

Kaliukluk. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage s. of C. Vancouver, Nelson id., Alaska; 
pop. 30 in 1880. 

Kaliokhlogamute. —Nelson quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kaliookhlogamute.— Petroff 
in 10th Census, Alaska, 54, 1884. Kaliukluk. — 
Baker, op. cit. 

Kalkalya. A former Maidu village on 
the site of Mooretown, Butte co., Cal.— 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,xvii, 
pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Kalokta. The Crane clan of the Zuhi 
of New Mexico. 

Ka/lokta-kwe. —Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A.E., 368, 
1896 (kw€= ‘ people ’). ‘Ko-oh-lok-ta-que. —Ste¬ 
venson in 5tli Rep. B. A. E., 541,1887. 

Kalokwis ( Qa'logwis, ‘crooked beach’). 
A village of the Tlauitsis on Turner id., 
Brit. Col. It was the legendary home of 
the Kwakiutl tribe at which all the trans¬ 
formations of animals took place. 
Ka-loo-kwis.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 
1887, sec. II, 72. Kar-luk-wees. —Boas in Bull. Am. 
Geog. Soc., 229, 1887. Qa'logwis. —Boas, inf’n, 
1906 (=‘crooked beach’). Qalukwis. —Boas in 
Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., op. cit. 

Kalopaling (pi. Kalopalit). A merman 
of Eskimo mythology; also called Miti- 
ling (‘with eider ducks’). He wears a 
jacket of eider-duck skins spotted with 
their black heads, and into the enormous 
hood he puts drowned hunters when 
kaiaks capsize. His feet are as big as 
sealskin floats. The Central Eskimo be¬ 
lieve that once there were many Kalopa¬ 


lit, while now only few are left, but they 
imagine that they still see one occasion¬ 
ally swimming far out at sea and splash¬ 
ing the water with his legs and arms, or 
basking on a rock, or sitting in winter on 
the edge of a floe. They are supposed to 
delight in overturning kaiaks, and hun¬ 
ters tell stories of stealing up to Kalopalit 
while they lie asleep on the water and 
killing them with walrus harpoons,'but 
one must shut his eyes as he makes the 
cast, else the Kalopaling will overset the 
kaiak and drown all on board. The flesh 
of the Kalopalit is said to be poisonous, 
but it can be fed to dogs.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 620, 1888. 

Kaltag. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on 
the left bank of the Yukon, Alaska; pop. 
45 in 1880. 

Coltog.— Whymper, Alaska, 190, 1869. Kahltog.— 
Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 
25,1871. Kaltag.— Dali, Alaska, 41,1870. K-kal- 
tat. —Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 37, 1884. Kkhaltel. —Tikhmenief (1861) 
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kaltat. A Koyukukhotana village on 
an island in Yukon r., not far from its 
junction with Koyukuk r., Alaska; pop. 
9 in 1842. 

Khaltat’s village. —Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 110,1887. 
K-khaltat.— Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 37,1884. 

Kaltsergheatunne (‘ people on a point of 
land extending far into the ocean’). A 
division of the Tututni, formerly residing 
at Port Orford, on the coast of Oregon. 
Kal-ts’e'-rxe-apxnne'. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 233, 1890 (own name). Port Orford In¬ 
dians.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 214, 1857. 
Port Orfords. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 470,1865. Qwuc-tcu'- 
mlfl-tun pinn'e. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 233, 1890 (Naltunnetunne name). Tsa-re-ar- 
to-ny. —Abbott, MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 
1855. Ts’e-rxi'-a ^unne. —Dorsey, Coquille MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. Tse-xi'-a tene'.— Everette, 
Tutu MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 ( = ‘people by 
C. Foul weather’). 

Kaltshak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the right bank of Kuskokwim 
r., about Ion. 161°; pop. 106 in 1880, 29 
in 1890. 

Kakhilgagh-miut.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 
5th s., xxi, map, 1850. Kalkhagamute. —Hallock 
in Nat. Geog. Mag., IX, 90,1898. Kalthagamute. — 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. Kalt- 
kagamiut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Kaltkhagamute. —Petroff, op. cit., 53. Kaltsha- 
gamut.— Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kaltshak.— Baker, ibid. 
Kchaljkagmjut.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 
1855. 

Kaluiak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage and fishing station on Chignik bay, 
Alaska; pop. 30 in 1880, 193 in 1890. 
Chignik Bay. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 163,1893. 
Kaluiak.— Petroff in 10th Census. Alaska, 28, 1884. 

Kaluktuk. An Eskimo village in the 
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 29 in 
1893. 

Kahlukhtughamiut. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. 

Kalulaadlek (Kalulaa'i-EX, ‘small house 
of owl ’). A village of the Ntlak yapamuk 
on the e. side of Fraser r., about 24 m. 
above Yale, Brit. Col.—Teit in Mem. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 169,1900. 


648 


KALULEK 


KAMIAKEN 


[b. a. e. 


Kalulek. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage at Port'Clarence, Alaska. 

Kalulegeet.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162,1893. 

Kaluplo ( Ka'-lu-plo.) A former Nishi- 
nam village in the valley of Bear r., Cal.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 316, 
1877. 

Kamaiakan ( KamaVakan ). The prin¬ 
cipal chief of the Yakima and confederate 
tribes of e. Washington under the treaty 
of 1855, and leader in the war which 
began a few months later and continued 
for 3 years. He appears to have been 
himself a Yakima. In consequence of 
the heavy immigration to Oregon and 
the discovery of gold in the Colville and 
Coeur d’Alene country of n. e. Washing¬ 
ton and adjacent Idaho, in the spring of 
1855, Gov. Stevens, of Washington, was in¬ 
structed to negotiate treaties for cession 
of territory with the various tribes of the 
region, with the purpose of limiting them 
to reservations. Led by Kamaiakan the 
Indians offered strong opposition to any 
arrangement which would deprive them 
of any portion of the lands or allow right 
of way to the whites. After considera¬ 
ble difficulty treaties were made with a 
number of the tribes, largely through the 
assistance of a majority of the Nez Perc£s, 
but it soon became evident that practi¬ 
cally the entire body of the Cayuse, Ya¬ 
kima, Wallawalla, Paloos, Spokan, and 
others were bitterly opposed to removal 
from their homes or confinement to res¬ 
ervations. In the meantime, although 
the treaties were not yet ratified and no 
time had been designated for the removal, 
settlers and miners began to overrun the 
Indian lands and collisions became fre¬ 
quent. In Sept., 1855, the war began 
with the killing of special agent Bolon 
while on his way to arrange a conference 
with Kamaiakan, who now publicly de¬ 
clared his intention to keep all whites out 
of the upper country by force and to 
make war also on any tribe refusing to 
join him. The first regular engagement 
occurred, Oct. 4 and 5, on the southern 
edge of Simcoe valley, between a de¬ 
tachment of 84 regulars under Maj. Hal¬ 
ler and a large force of Indians led by 
Kamaiakan himself. The troops were 
finally obliged to retire, although the 
Indian loss was thought to be the greater. 

By this time it was believed that 1,500 
hostiles w’ere in the field, and the rising 
now spread to the tribes in w. Washing¬ 
ton as well as among those of s. Oregon, 
and even including some of the coast In¬ 
dians of s. Alaska. The principal leader 
in w. Washington was Leschi (q. v.). In 
Sept., 1856, another conference was held 
near Wallawalla with some of the chiefs, 
but to no purpose, Kamaiakan refusing to 
attend and those present refusing all terms 
except the evacuation of the territory by 
the whites. The war went on, with nu¬ 


merous raids, murders, and small engage¬ 
ments by regulars and volunteers. In the 
next year, 1857, the rising was brought 
under control w. of the Cascade mts., sev¬ 
eral of the leaders being hanged. An in¬ 
cident of the war in this quarter was a 
determined attack on Seattle, Jan. 25, 
1856, which was repulsed by a naval force 
stationed in the harbor at the time. 

On May 17, 1858, a strong force of dra¬ 
goons under Col. Steptoe was defeated a 
few miles from the present site of Colfax, 
n. w. Washington, by a combined force of 
Paloos, Spokan, and Skitswish (Coeur 
d’Alenes), but a few months later the war 
was brought to a close by two decisive 
defeats inflicted by Col. George Wright, 
with more than 700 cavalry, infantry, 
and artillery, on the main body of the 
hostiles led by Kamaiakan himself. The 
engagements took place Sept. 1 and 5 
near Four Lakes, on a s. tributary of Spo¬ 
kane r. Besides their killed and wound¬ 
ed, the Indians lost 800 horses, having 
already lost large quantities of winter sup¬ 
plies, and burned their own village to save 
it from capture. Kamaiakan was among 
the wounded. On the 17th Wright dic¬ 
tated terms to the hostiles at a conference 
near Coeur d’Alene mission. The defeated 
Indians, being no longer capable of resis¬ 
tance, were treated with great severity, 24 
of the leading chiefs of the various tribes 
being either hanged or shot. Kamaiakan 
refused to sue for peace, but crossed the 
border into Brttish Columbia, where he 
finally ended his days. Consult Bancroft, 
Hist. Wash., Idaho, and Montana, 1890, 
and authorities cited; Stevens, Life of 
I. I. Stevens, 1900. (j. m.) 

Kamass. See Camas. 

Kamatukwucha {Kd'matdk wu'tcd, ‘be¬ 
low the Estrella mts. ’). A Pima village 
at Gila crossing, s. Ariz.—Russell, Pima 
MS., B. A. E., 18, 1902. 

Kamegli. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the right bank of Kuskokwim r. ; 
above Bethel, Alaska. 

Kameglimut.—Kilbuck (1898) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kamenakshtchat. A former important 
Chitimacha town at Bayou du Plomb, 
near Bayou Ch&ne, 18 m. n. of Charen- 
ton, La. 

Kame naksh tchat namu.—Gatschet in Trans. An- 
throp. Soc. Wash., ii, 152, 1883 (tchat, ‘bayou’; 
ndmu, ‘village’). 

Kamiah. A Nez Perc6 band formerly 
living at the site of the present town of 
Kamiah, Idaho. It is mentioned by Lewis 
and Clark in 1805 as a band of the Cho- 
punnish and numbering 800 people who 
lived in large lodges. 

Kamia.—Gatschet, MS.,B. A. E.,1878. Kamiah.— 
Howard, Nez Perc6 Joseph, 19, 1885. Kimmooe- 
nim.—Morse, Rep. to. Sec. War, 369, 1822. Kimoe- 
nims.—Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Kimooenim.— 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 471, 1814. Ki-moo-e- 
nim.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 115, 1905. 

Kamiaken. See Kamaiakan. 


BULL. 30] 


KAMIT-KANAGARO 


649 


Kamit ( Kd'rritt, ‘ back ’). A former Pima 
village in s. Arizona.—Russell, Pima MS., 
B. A. E., 16,1902. 

Kamloops (‘point between the rivers’). 
A village at the junction of Thompson and 
North Thompson rs., Brit. Col., occupied 
by Shuswap Salish; pop. 244 in 1904. It 
gave its name to Kamloops Indian agency, 
now united with that of Okanagan as 
Kamloops-Okanagan. 

Kam-a-loo'-pa.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 
for 1891, sec. n, 7 (native name). Kameloups.— 
Smet, Oregon Miss., 100, 1847. Kamloops—Cox, 
Columbia River, II, 87, 1831. Salst Kamlups — 
Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Okinagan name, from 
Salst, ‘people’). 

Kammatwa ( KammaVwa ). One of the 
four divisions of the main body of the 
Shasta, occupying Klamath valley from 
Scott r. to Seiad valley, n. w. Cal. Accord¬ 
ing to Steele the native name of these 
Hamburg Indians, so-called, is T-ka, but 
this is apparently a misprint of I-ka, 
properly Aika, their name for Hamburg 
bar. (r. b. d. ) 

Hamburg Indians.—Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 
120, 1865. T-ka.—Ibid, (misprint). 

Kammuck. A former body of Salish of 
Fraser superintendency, Brit. Col. 
Kammack.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1879, 138. Kam¬ 
muck.—Ibid., 1878, 79. 

Kamuksusik. A former Aleut village 
on Agattu id., one of the Near id. group 
of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kamulas. A former Chumashan village 
situated at or near the present Camulos, 
near the mouth of the Piru, in Ventura 
co., Cal. 

Kamulas.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. 
Ka-mu'-lus.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Kana. An Ita Eskimo settlement on 
Murchison sd., n. Greenland. 

Ka'na.—Stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 9, map, 
1902. Karnah.—Mrs Peary, My Arct. Jour., 190, 
1893. 

Kanadasero. One of the two Seneca 
villages, locality unknown, which in 1763 
ware still in the English interest.—John¬ 
son (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 
582, 1856. 

Kanagak. An Eskimo village in the 
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 35 in 
1890. 

Kanagamiut.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Kanagaro ( Kanakaro’ pole in the wa¬ 
ter’). A Mohawk town situated in 1677 
on the n. side of Mohawk r., in Mont¬ 
gomery or Herkimer co., N. Y. In the 
year named it had a single stockade, 
with four ports, and contained 16 houses. 
Megapolensis mentions it as early as 
1644, but no reference is made to it after 
1693. (j. N. B. H.) 

Andagaron.—Parkman, Jesuits, 222, note, 1883. 
Andaraque.—Parkman, Old R6g., 197,1883. Bana- 
giro.—Megapolensis (1644) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
Ill 250, 1853. Kanagaro.—Conf. of 1674, ibid., II, 
712, 1858. Kanagiro.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 
250, 1853. Kanakaro’.—Hewitt, inf’n (Mohawk 
and Cayuga form). 

Kanagaro. A former Seneca town on 
Boughton hill, directly s. of Victor, N.Y. 
For a long period it was the capital of the 


Seneca tribe. Greenhalgh states that in 
1677 it contained 150 houses, 50 to 60 ft 
in length, with 13 or 14 fires to the house. 
Here Greenhalgh saw 9 prisoners (4 men, 
4 women, and a boy) burned, the torture 
lasting about seven hours. This shows 
that the Iroquois as well as the Neuters 
burned their unadopted women prisoners, 
but the Jesuit Relation for 1641 says the 
Huron do not burn their women captives. 
On the approach of Denonville, in 1687, 
this town was burned by its inhabitants, 
who, like those of the neighboring Kana¬ 
garo, the foreign colony, removed about 
20 m. s. e. to Kanadasega, where the for¬ 
eign element became known by the name 
Seneca. In the early part of the 19th 
century the Seneca formed a village ap¬ 
proximately on the site of the burned 
Kanagaro, which they called Gaonsageon 
(‘basswood bark lying around’), refer¬ 
ring, it is said, to gutters of this material 
employed to convey water from a neigh¬ 
boring spring. Another settlement ex¬ 
isted in 1740 in the vicinity of the old site, 
which was called Chinoshahgeh. 

(j. N. B. H. ) 

Cahacarague. : —Lattrt‘, map, 1784. Cahaquonaghe.— 
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Canagaroh.— 
Greenhalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist., in, 251, 
1853. Canagora.—Ibid., 250. Cangaro.—Ibid. 
Gaensera.—Belmont (1687) quoted by Conover, 
Kanadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E. Ganagaro.— 
La Salle (1682) in Margry, D£c., n, 217, 1877. 
Gandagan.—Jes. Rel.for 1657,45,1858. Gandagaro.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1670, 23, 1858. Gannagaro.—Denon- 
villeJ1687) inN. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 367, 1855. 
Kanakao’.—Hewitt, inf’n (Seneca and Onondaga 
form). Kohoseraghe.—Cortland (1687) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., in, 434, 1853. Onnutague.—Bel¬ 
mont (1687) quoted by Conover, op. cit. Saint 
Jacques. —Jes. Rel. for 1671,20,1858. Saint James. — 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 367,1855. 

Kanagaro. A former town belongingto 
the Seneca, situated at different times at 
different sites from 1£ to 4 m. s. of Kana¬ 
garo, the Seneca capital, and s. e. from 
Victor, on the e. side of Mud cr., N. Y. 
According to Greenhalgh it contained 
about 30 houses in 1677. The inhabitants 
of this town, according to the Jesuit Re¬ 
lation for 1670, were chiefly incorporated 
captives and their descendants of three 
tribes, the Onnontioga, the Neuters, and 
the Hurons. Its situation thus placed its 
inhabitants directly under the eyes of the 
federal chiefs dwelling in the capital town 
of Kanagaro. Here in 1656 the Jesuits 
established the mission of the Tohonta- 
enrat at Scanonenrat, which surrendered 
in a body to the Seneca in 1649. On ac¬ 
count of these associations the missiona¬ 
ries gave it their special attention, with 
such success that it became known as the 
Christian town of the Seneca. Like all 
the principal Seneca towns it was de¬ 
stroyed by Denonville in 1687. The in¬ 
habitants of the western towns, Totiak- 
ton and Gandachiragon, removed s. and 
then w. to Genesee r., where their settle¬ 
ments were destroyed by Sullivan in 1779; 
those of the eastern towns, Gandagaro 


650 


KANAGHSAWS-KANASTTJNYI 


r B. A. E. 


(Kanagaro) and Gandougarae, removed 
to the e., where their settlements at Can¬ 
andaigua and near Geneva, N. Y., were 
also destroyed by Sullivan’s army. 

(j. N. B. H.) 

Canoenada.—Greenhalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., in, 250, 1883. Gandagarae.—Jes. Rel. for 
1670, 77, 1858. Gandougarae.—Denonville (1687) 
quoted by Conover, MS., B. A. E. Gannogarae.— 
Denonville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 366, 
1855. Gannongarae.—Doe. 1687, ibid., 334. Gan- 
nougarae.—Denonville quoted by Conover, MS., 
B. A. E. Saint Michael’s.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 291, 
1855. Saint Michel.—Jes. Rel. for 1670, 77, 1858. 

Kanaghsaws. An Iroquois town of 18 
houses, situated in 1779 about 1 m. n. w. 
of Conesus Center, N. Y. Grant, one of 
Sullivan’s officers, says: “Captain Sun- 
fish, a negro, resided here, a very bold, 
enterprising fellow, who commanded the 
town.” Chief Bigtree (Karontowanen) 
is said to have resided here also.—Jour. 
Mil. Exped. of Gen. Sullivan (1779), 131, 
1887. (j. N. B. n.) 

Kanajormiut. An Eskimo village in 
s. w. Greenland.—Meddelelser om Gron- 
land, xvi, map, 1896. 

Kanak. An Alaskan Eskimo village in 
the Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 41 
in 1893. 

Kanagmiut.—11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Kanakanak. A Nushagagmiut village 
on Nushagak bay, near which are two 
salmon canneries; pop. 53 in 1890, 145 in 
1900. 

Kanakanak.—11th Census, Alaska, 93, 1893. Kna- 
kanak.—12th Census Rep., I, 426,1901. 

Kanakuk. A Kickapoo prophet. When 
the Kickapoo in 1819 ceded their lands, 



KANAKUK, THE KICKAPOO PROPHET. (after Catlin) 

covering nearly half the state of Illinois, 
they could not go to the reservation as¬ 
signed to them in Missouri because it 


was still occupied by the hostile Osage. 
Half the tribe emigrated instead to Span¬ 
ish territory in Texas, and the rest were 
ready to follow when the Government 
agents intervened, endeavoring to induce 
them to remove to Missouri. Kanakuk, 
inspired with the ideas that had moved 
Tenskwatawa, exhorted them to remain 
where they were, promising that if they 
lived worthily, abandoning their native 
superstitions, avoiding quarrels among 
themselves and infractions of the white 
man’s law, and resisting the seduction of 
alcohol, they would at last inherit a land 
of plenty clear of enemies. He was 
accepted as the chief of the remnant who 
remained 4n Illinois, and many of the 
Potawatomi of Michigan became his dis¬ 
ciples. He displayed a chart of the path, 
leading through fire and water, which 
the virtuous must pursue to reach the 
“happy hunting grounds,” and furnished 
his followers with prayer-sticks graven 
with religious symbols. When in the 
end the Kickapoo were removed to Kan¬ 
sas he accompanied them and remained 
their chief, still keeping drink away from 
them, until he died of smallpox in 1852. 
See Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 692- 
700, 1896. 

Kanani ( Ka‘n&ni , ‘livingarrows’). A 
Navaho clan.—Matthews in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, iii, 104, 1890. 

Kanapima (‘one who is talked of’). 
An Ottawa chief, born about 40 m. s. of 
Mackinaw, Mich., July 12, 1813, and 
christened as Augustin H ammelin, jr. He 
was sent with his younger brother, Ma- 
coda Binnasee (The Blackbird), in 1829 to 
be educated in the Catholic seminary at 
Cincinnati, where the tw r o boys remained 
for 3 years without making marked prog¬ 
ress in their studies. In 1832 both were 
sent to Rome to continue their educa¬ 
tion in the college of the Propaganda 
Fide, with the view of entering the 
priesthood. This object in Kanapima’s 
case was defeated from the usual causes. 
After his brother died at the end of two 
years he ceased his studies, returned to 
America, became chief of his branch of 
the tribe, and resumed the costume and 
habits of his people, except when he went 
among white people, as in 1835, to make a 
treaty for the Ottawa with the Govern¬ 
ment at Washington, but he does not 
appear to have been a signer of any Ottawa 
treaty. On such occasions he exhibited 
the ease and polish of a man of the 
world. 

Kanastunyi (K&nasttin'yi). A tradi¬ 
tionary Cherokee settlement on the head¬ 
waters of French Broad r., near the pres¬ 
ent Brevard, in Transylvania co., N. C. 
A settlement called Cannostee or Cannas- 
tion is mentioned as existing on Hiawas- 
see r. in 1776. (j. m.) 

Conastee.—Doc. of 1755 quoted by Royce in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., 142, 1887. Kana'sta.—Mooney in 





BULL. 30] 


KANATAK—KANGHIYUHA 


651 


19th Rep. B. A. E., 480, 524, 1900 (abbreviated 
form). Kanastun'yi.—Ibid. 

Kanatak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Shelikof strait, Alaska; pop. 26 in 
1890 (11th Census, Alaska, 163, 1893). 

Kanatakowa (‘ great village.’—Hewitt). 
The village of the Onondaga situated at 
the place still called Onondaga Castle, 
N. Y. It tvas the principal village of the 
tribe as early as 1654. (j. m. ) 

Ka-na-ta-go'-wa.—Morgan, League Iroq.,471,1851. 
Ka-na-ta’-ko'-wa.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Onondaga 
form). Onondaga.—Greenhalgh (1677) quoted by 
Morgan, League Iroq., 316, 1851. Onondaga Cas¬ 
tle.—Ibid., 471 (common English name). Onon- 
daghara.—Macauley, N. Y., II, 177, 1829. Onon- 
dagharie.—Ibid. 

Kanatiochtiage (‘ place of wild rice ’). A 
former Iroquois settlement or village on 
the n. shore of L. Ontario, inhabited 
chiefly by “Dowaganhaes,” and reputed 
to be “near the Sennekes [Seneca] coun¬ 
try.” It was situated near Tchojachiage, 
or approximately on the site of Darling¬ 
ton or Port Hope, in the New Castle dis¬ 
trict, Ontario. Three nations, composing 
16 ‘ ‘ castles ’ ’, came to settle there by Iro¬ 
quois permission. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Ganadatsiagon.—Frontenac (1673) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 112, 1855. Ganatcheskiagon. — Ibid., 
note. Ganatoheskiagon.—Ibid. Kanatiochtiage.— 
Doc. of 1700, ibid., iv, 694,1854. 

Kanchati (‘red ground,’ ‘red earth’). 
A name applied to several places, one of 
the best known being the principal village 
of the Alibamu, formerly on the e. bank 
of Alabama r., below Koasati and a little 
w. of Montgomery, Ala. Hawkins de¬ 
scribed it in 1799 as a small village on the 
left bank of Alabama r., with its fields on 
the right side in a cane swamp, and its 
people poor and indolent. A census of 
1832 (Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 
1854) gave the number of families as 55. 
The name has been applied also to a 
towmship in the Creek Nation, Okla., 
and to a village a few miles n. w. of Tal¬ 
ladega, Ala. (a. s. g. ) 

Con chante ti.—Census of 1832 in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, IV, 578, 1854. Con-chant-ti.—Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., I, 133, 1884. Conchart-ee.—H. 
R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 312, 1836. 
Ecanchatty.—Woodward, Reminiscences, 12,1859. 
Ecumchate.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 380,1854. 
E-cun-cha-ta.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Ala. 
map, 1899. E-cun-chate.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 
36, 1848. Ikan-tcbati.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 88, 1884. Kanshade.—Ibid., 133. 0-cun- 
cha-ta.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 307,1822. 
Red Grounds.—Ibid., 364. 

Kandoucho. A former village of the 
Neutrals in Ontario, near the Huron 
country. 

Kandoucho.—Jes. Rel. for 1641, 75, 1858. Tous les 
Saints.—Ibid, (mission name). 

Kaneenda. A former fishing station of 
the Onondaga, situated at the fork of 
Seneca and Onondaga rs., N. Y., 8 m. 
from their palisaded village. It was also 
their landing place when they returned 
from hunting on the n. side of L. Ontario. 

(j. n. b. h.) 

Kanienda.—Doc. of 1700 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IV, 649,1854. 

Kanesadageh ( Kane l s&d& w ge l ). A for¬ 
mer Iroquois village belonging to the 


Two-clans of the Turtle; location un¬ 
known. (j. N. B. H.) 

Kaneghsadakeh.—Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites, 
118,1883. Kanesadakeh.—Ibid, 119. 

Kanestio. A village occupied by Dela¬ 
wares and others, subject to the Iroquois, 
formerly on the upper Susquehanna, 
near Kanestio cr., in Steuben co., N. Y. It 
was burned by the Iroquois in 1764, on 
account of hostilities committed by the 
inhabitants against the whites. It then 
contained about 60 houses. 

Canestio.—Vaudreuil (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., x, 588,1858 (nameof the creek). Kanestio.— 
Pouchot, map (1758), ibid., 694. 

Kang. The Mountain Lion clans of the 
Tewa pueblos of San Juan, San Ildefonso, 
and Nambe, N. Mex. 

Chang Doa.—Bandelier, Delight Makers, 464, 1890. 
Ka n -td6a.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896 
(San Juan and San Ildefonso form; tdda = ‘peo¬ 
ple’). Q,en-tdoa.—Ibid. (Nambe form; q = Ger¬ 
man ch). 

Kangarsik. A village of the Angmag- 
salingmiut on a large island at the mouth 
of Angmagsalik fjord, Greenland, lat. 65° 
33'; pop. 34 in 1884.—Meddelelser om 
Gronland, ix, 379, 1889. 

Kangek. An Eskimo settlement 10 m. 
s. of Godthaab, w. Greenland, lat. 64° 
1CK. —Nansen, Eskimo Life, 166, 1894. 

Kangerdluksoa (‘the great fjord ’). An 
Ita Eskimo settlement in Inglefield gulf, 
n. Greenland. 

Kangerdlooksoah.— Wychoff in Scribner’s Mag., 
xxvin, 447,1900. Kangerdlu'hsoa.—Stein in Peter- 
manns Mitt., ix, map, 1902. 

Kangertloaping (‘remarkable fjord’). 
A summer settlement of Okomiut Eskimo 
of Saumia, at the head of an inlet empty¬ 
ing into Cumberland sd., Baffin land.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kangertluk (‘fjord’). A spring and fall 
settlement of Iglulirmiut Eskimo on n. 
Melville penin. near the Fox Basin coast.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kangertlukdjuaq (‘great fjord’). A 
summer settlement of Okomiut Eskimo 
of Saumia, at the head of an inlet empty¬ 
ing into Cumberland sd., Baffin land.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kangertlung (‘ fjord ’). A summer set¬ 
tlement of Talirpia Okomiut Eskimo on 
the s. w. coast of Cumberland sd.—Boas 
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kangguatl-lanas ( Qa'nguaL la'nas ). An 
extinct subdivision of the Stustas, a fam¬ 
ily of the Eagle clan of the Haida of 
British Columbia. (j. r. s.) 

K anguatl la'nai.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. "Bribes 
Can., 22,1898. Ga'nguaL la'nas.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 276,1905. 

Kanghishunpegnaka (‘those who wear 
crow feathers in their hair ’). A division 
of the Sihasapa or Blackfoot Sioux. 

Karjgi-suij-pegnaka.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
219, 1897. Ka n xi-cu n -pegnaka.—Ibid. 

Kanghiyuha (‘crow keepers’). A 
division of the Brule Teton Sioux. 

Kaq-gi yu-ha.—Tatankawakan, letter to Dorsey, 
1880. Karjgi-yuha.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
218,1897. Ka n xi-yuha.—Ibid. Thosethateatcrows.— 
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141,1851. 


652 


KANGIARTSOAK-KANNEHOUAN 


[b. a. e. 


Kangiartsoak. An Eskimo village and 
Danish settlement in w. Greenland, lat. 
72° 47L—Kane, Arctic Exped., 472,1854. 

Kangidli. An Ita Eskimo village at C. 
York, n. Greenland.—Stein in Peter- 
manns Mitt., ix, map, 1902. 

Kangigdlek. An Angmagsalingmiut 
Eskimo village on Angmagsalik fjord, e. 
Greenland, lat. 65° 40 / .—Meddelelser om 
Gronland, xvi, map, 1896. 

Kangikhlukhmut ( Kang-iq-xlu-q’mut, 
1 head-of-the-rapid-river people’: Kani- 
agmiut name). A division of the Ah- 
tena at the head of Copper r., Alaska.— 
Hoffman, MS. vocab. B. A. E., 1882. 
Kangisunka. See Crow Dog. 
Kangivamiut (‘people at the head’). 
A subtribe of the Sukinimiut Eskimo, 
living in the region of George r., n. Lab¬ 
rador. 

Kangivamiut. —Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1888. Kan'guk/jlua'luksoagmyut. —Turner in 11th 
Rep. B. A. E., 176,1894 (= ‘ peopl e of the great bay’). 
Kanuktlualuksoagmyut. —Turner in Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., v, 99, 1888. 

Kangmaligmiut (‘distant ones’). An 
Arctic Eskimo tribe between Manning pt 
and Herschel id. The name has been 
attached to different local groups all the 
way from Pt Hope to Mackenzie r. 
Kadjakians. —Rink in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., xv,240, 
1886. Kakmalikg. —Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. 
Am., pt. I, 74, 1847. Kangiugdlit. —Rink, op. cit., 
240. Kangmali-enyiii .—Richardson, Polar Re¬ 
gions, 300, 1861. Kangmaligmeut. —Murdoch in 
Ninth Rep. B. A. E., 46, 1892. Kangmali'gmut.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1 ,10,1877. Kangmali- 
innuin. —Simpson quoted by Dali, ibid. Ka gma- 
lik.— VVoolfe in 11th Census, Alaska, 130, 1893. 
K'mgnialis. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 517, 
1878. Kanmali-enyuin.— Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. 
A. E., 46,1892. Kunmu'd’lln. —Ibid.,43,46. W stern 
Mackenzie Innuit. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
i, 12, 1877 (collective term including Kopagmiut 
and Kangmaligmiut). 

Kangormiut (‘goose people’). A tribe 
of Central Eskimo living in Victoria land. 

Kang-orr-Moeoot. —Franklin, Journ. to Polar Sea, 
II, 43, 1824. Kanq-or-mi-ut. —Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., i, 362, 1851. Kanp-meut. —Petitot in Bib. 
Ling, et Ethnol. Am., ill, 11, 1876 (Chiglit name). 
White-Goose Eskimos. —Franklin, op. cit., 42. 

Kanhada (G’cinhada, meaning obscure). 
One of the 4 clans or phratries into which 
all Indians of the Chimmesyan stock are 
divided. It is also applied specifically 
to various local subdivisions of the clan. 
One such is found in the Niska town of 
Lakkulzap and one in each of the Kitk- 
san towns—Kitwingach, Kitzegukla, and 
Kishpiyeoux.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 49-50, 1895. 

Kanhanghton. A former Delaware vil¬ 
lage about the mouth of Chemung r., in 
the n. part of Bradford co., Pa. It was 
destroyed by the Iroquois in 1764 on 
account of the hostility of its inhabitants 
to the whites.—Johnson (1764) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist,, vn, 625, 1856. 

Kaniagmiut (‘ people of Kodiak ’). The 
largest and most powerful Eskimo tribe 
on the Alaskan coast, inhabiting Kodiak 
id. and the mainland from Iliamna lake 


to Ugashik r., the s. coast to Ion. 159° w. 
The tribe numbered 1,154 in 1890. Their 
villages are Afognak, Aiaktalik, Akhiok, 
Aleksashkina, Alexandrovsk, Ashivak, 
Chiniak, Fugitive, Igak, Iliamna, Kagu- 
yak, Kaluiak, Kanatak, Karluk, Katmai, 
Kattak, Kiliuda, Kodiak, Kuiukuk, 
Kukak, Liesnoi, Mitrofania, Nauklak, 
Nunamiut, Nuniliak, Orlova, Ostrovki, 
Seldovia, Sutkum, Three Saints, Uganik, 
Uhaiak, Uhaskek, Ukshivikak, Uyak, 
Uzinki, Yalik, and Yelovoi. 

Achkugmjuten.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 4,1855 
(applied to Aglemiut and Kaniagmiut by the 
people of Norton sd.; = ‘ inhabitants of the warm 
country’). Kadiagmuts.—Am. Nat., XV, 156,1881. 
Kadjacken.—Wrangell, Ethnol. Nach., 117, 1839. 
Kanagist.—Coxe, Russ. Disc., 135, 1787. Kaniag'- 
mut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 20, 1877. 
Kaniagmut. — Rink, Eskimo Tribes, 32, 1887. 
Kinaghi.—Morse, Syst. of Mod. Geog., I, 74, 1814- 
Konagens. — Drake, Bk. of Inds., viii, 1848. 
Konagis.—Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
i, 183, 1848. Konasgi.—Prichard, Phys. Hist., 
Man, 371,1847. Koniagi.—Humboldt, New Spain, 
n, 392. 1811. Koniagmutes.—Dali in Proc. Am. A. 
A. S., XVIII, 267, 1870. Konjagen.—Holmberg, 
Ethnog. Skizz., 4,1855. Southern Eskimos.—Form 
used by various English writers. 

Kanig. A former Chnagmiut village on 
the n. bank of Yukon r., Alaska, near its 
mouth. 

Kanig-miout.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 
5th s., xxi, map, 1850. Kanygmjut.—Holmberg, 
Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855. 

Kanikaligamut ( Ka'ni-qa-li-ga-mut , 
‘people close to the river’: Chugachig- 
miut name). An unidentified division of 
the Knaiakhotana living on Cook inlet, 
Alaska.—Hoffman, MS., B. A. E., 1882. 

Kanikluk. A Chugachigmiut village on 
theN. shore of Prince William sd., Alaska; 
pop. 54 in 1880, 73 in 1890. 

Kanikhluk.—PetrofT in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 
1884. Kanikluk.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 229, 
1902. 

Kanlax ( Nxd'lstEn , ‘the point’). An 
Upper Lillooet town at the junction of 
Bridge and Fraser rs., interior of British 
Columbia; pop. 104 in 1904. 

Bridge river.—Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 1904, pt. 2, 72, 
1905. Kan-lax'.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 
for 1891, sec. ii, 44. Nxo'istEn. —Boas.inf’n, 1906. 

Kanna (‘ eel ’). A clan of the Tuscarora. 
According to Morgan (League Iroq., 70, 
1877) an Eel clan is found among the Tus¬ 
carora, the Onondaga, and the Cayuga. 
Eel.—Morgan, op. cit. Ka n '-na.—Hewitt, inf’n, 
1886 (Tuscarora form). 

Kannawalohalla (‘a head fastened to the 
end of an object.’—Hewitt). An Iroquois 
village on the site of Elmira, N. Y., 
which wab destroyed by Sullivan in Aug., 
1779.—Jour. Mil. Exped. Gen. Sullivan 
(1779), 232, 1887. 

Kannehouan. An unidentified tribe, pos¬ 
sibly of Caddoan affinity, heard of by La 
Salle’s party in 1687 as living to the w. 
or n. w. of Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. 
Cf. Cahinnio , Kanohatino. 

Caniouis —Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 341,1786 (possibly 
identical). Cannaha.—Joutel (1687)inMargry,D6c., 
Ill, 409, 1878. Cannahios.—Ibid. Cannehovanes.— 
Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. Kannehonan.—Joutel 
(1687), Jour. Voy., 90, 1719. Kannehouan.—Joutel 


BULL. 30] 


KANOHATINO-KANSA 


653 


(1687) in Margry, D6c.,Ill, 288,1878. Kaouanoua.— 
17th cent. Doc.in Margry, ibid., 602. Ouanahinan.— 
De l’lsle, map (1703) in Winsor, Hist. Am., n, 
294, 1886 (possibly identical; misprint 0 for C). 
duayneps.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Ta- 
hiannihouq.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 409, 
1878. 

Kanohatino (‘red river’). The Caddo 
name for the Red r. of Louisiana, and, 
according to Gatschet, for the Colorado r. 
of Texas. It was supposed by the com¬ 
panions of La Salle to be the name of a 
tribe encountered by them in the neigh¬ 
borhood of the Colorado or the Brazos. 
From the alternative name given, “Ay- 
ano,” or “Ayona,” it has been errone¬ 
ously assumed that this tribe was the 
Hainai. “Ayano,” however, is evidently 
the general Caddo word for “man.” Al¬ 
though a Caddo tribe may have been liv¬ 
ing or camping in the region indicated 
when La Salle passed, the fact that they 
were not mentioned when Leon advanced 
to the Caddo country a few years later 
would seem to discredit the theory. The 
only alternative supposition is that the 
Wichita or one of their branches, the 
Tawakoni or the Waco, were camping 
considerably to the s. of their customary 
habitat at that time. This would explain 
the warfare that was found to exist be¬ 
tween the Caddo and the Kanohatino in 
which some of La Salle’s former compan¬ 
ions took part. ( j. r. s. ) 

Aiano. —Barcia, Ensayo,271,1723. Ayano. —Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 299, 1878. Ayona. — 
Joutel in French, Hist. Coll. La., 1 ,138,1846. Can- 
atino. —Anville, map N. Am., 1752. Cannohatin- 
no. —Joutel (1687) in Margry, D£c., in, 299, 1878. 
Uannohatino. —Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. Canno- 
kantimo. —Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
I, 148,1846. Canoatinno.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D£c., 111,409,1878. Canoatinos. —Iberville (1700), 
ibid., iv, 374, 1880. Canohatinno. —Shea, Early 
Voy., 36, note, 1861. Canohatino. —Joutel, Jour. 
Voy., 90,1719. Canouhanans. —BaudrydesLozieres, 
Voy. a la Le., 242, 1802. Conoatinos. —Bienville 
(1700) in Margry, D6c., IV, 442,1880. Kanaatino. — 
Brion de la Tour, Carte Gen. des Col. Angl., 1781. 
Kanoatinas. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816. 
Kanoatinnos. —Hennepin, NewDiscov., pt. 2, 32, 
1698. Kanoatino. —Le Page du Pratz (1757), Hist. 
La., map, 1774. Kano Hatino. —Mooney, inf’n 
(Caddo: ‘red river’). Kanoutinoa. —Cavelier 
(1688) in Shea, Early Voy., 36, 1861. Konatines. — 
Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Konoatinnos. —Ibid., 
38. Quanoatinno. —Douav (ca . 1688) in Shea, Dis- 
cov., 211, 1852. Quanoatinos. —McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1854. Quanoouatinos. — 
Tonti (1690) in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 76,1846. 
Quanouatins. —Tbid., 74. Quoanantino. —Barcia, 
Ensayo, 302, 1723. Quonantino. —McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, III, 87, 1854. Quonoatinnos. — 
Coxe, Carolana, 38,1741. 

Kansa. A southwestern Siouan tribe; 
one of the five, according to Dorsey’s 
arrangement, of the Dhegiha group. 
Their linguistic relations are closest with 
the Osage, and are close with the Quapaw. 
In the traditional migration of the group, 
after the Quapaw had first separated 
therefrom, the main body divided at the 
mouth of Osage r., the Osage moving up 
that stream and the Omaha and Ponca 
crossing Missouri r. and proceeding 
northward, while the Kansa ascended 


the Missouri on the s. side to the mouth 
of Kansas r. Here a brief halt was made, 
after which they ascended the Missouri 
on the s. side until they reached the pres¬ 
ent n. boundary of Kansas, where they 
were attacked by the Cheyenne and com¬ 
pelled to retrace their steps. They set¬ 
tled again at the mouth of Kansas r., 
where the Big Knives, as they called the 
whites, came with gifts and induced them 
to go farther w. The native narrators of 
this tradition give an account of about 
20 villages occupied successively along 
Kansas r. before the settlement atQouncil 



KANSA. (KAKEBASHA) 


Grove, Kans., whence they were finally 
removed to their reservation in Indian 
Ter. Marq uette’s autograph map, drawn 
probably as early as 1674, places the 
Kansa a considerable distance directly 
w. of the Osage and some distance s. of 
the Omaha, indicating that they were 
then on Kansas r. The earliest recorded 
notice of the Kansa is by Juan de Onate, 
who went from San Gabriel, N. Mex., in 
1601, till he met the “ Escansaques,” who 
lived 100 leagues to the n. e., near the 
“Panana,” or Pawnee. It is known that 
the Kansa moved up Kansas r. in historic 





654 


KANSA 


[ B. A. E. 


times as far as Big Blue r., and thence 
went to Council Grove in 1847. The 
move to the Big Blue must have taken 
place after 1723, for at that date Bourg- 
mont speaks of the large village of the 
Quans (Kansa) as on a small river flow¬ 
ing from the n. 30 leagues above Kansas 
r. and near the Missouri. The village of 
the Missouri tribe was then 30 leagues 
below Kansas r. and 60 leagues from the 
Quans village. Iberville estimated them 
at 1,500 families in 1702. A treaty of 
peace and friendship was made with 
them by the United States, Oct. 28, 1815. 
They were then on Kansas r. at the 
mouth of Saline r., having been forced 
back from the Missouri by the Dakota. 
They occupied 130 earth lodges, and their 
number was estimated at 1,500. Accord¬ 
ing to Lewis and Clark, they resided in 
1804 on Kansas r., in two villages, one 
about 20 and the other 40 leagues from its 
mouth, with a population of 300 men. 
These explorers say that they formerly 
lived on the s. bank of Missouri r. about 
24 leagues above the mouth of the Kan¬ 
sas, and were more numerous, but were 
reduced by the attacks of the Sauk and 
the Iowa. O’Fallon estimated their num¬ 
ber in 1822 at 1,850. By the treaty of St 
Louis, June 3, 1825, they ceded to the 
United States their lands in n. Kansas 
and s. e. Nebraska, and relinquished all 
claims they might have to lands in Mis¬ 
souri, but reserving for their use a tract 
on Kansas r. Here they were subject to 
attacks by the Pawnee, and on their hunts 
by other tribes, whereby their number 
was considerably reduced. Porter esti¬ 
mated their number in 1829 at 1,200; ac¬ 
cording to the Report of the Indian Office 
for 1843 the population was 1,588. By 
treaty at Methodist Mission, Kans., Jan. 
14, 1846, they ceded to the United States 
2,000,000 acres of the e. portion of their 
reservation, and a new reservation was 
assigned them at Council Grove, on Neo¬ 
sho r., Morris co., Kans., where they 
remained until 1873. As this tract was 
overrun by settlers, it was sold, and with 
the funds another reservation was bought 
for them in Indian Ter. next to the 
Osage; with the exception of 160 acres, 
reserved for school purposes, all their 
lands have now been allotted in severalty. 
The population diminished from about 
1,700 in 1850 to 209 in 1905, of whom 
only about 90 were full-bloods. Much of 
this decrease has been due to epidemics. 
In the winter of 1852-53 smallpox alone 
carried off more than 400 of the tribe at 
Council Grove. 

The Kansa figured but slightly in the 
history of the country until after the 
beginning of the 19th century, and 
they never played an important part in 
frontier affairs. During the 26 years 


which the Kansa spent at Council Grove, 
efforts were made to civilize them, but 
with little success. Mission schools were 
conducted by the Methodists in 1850-54, 
and by the Quakers in 1869-73, but 
the conservatism of the tribesmen pre¬ 
vented the attendance of the children, 
believing it to be degrading and ruinous 
to Indian character to adopt the white 
man’s ways. According to T. S. Huff- 
aker, who lived among them, chiefly as 
teacher, from 1850 to 1873, only one In¬ 
dian of the tribe was converted to Chris¬ 
tianity during that period, while the 
influence of frontier settlers and traders, 
with the introduction of liquor, stood in 
the way of. the good that the schools 
might otherwise have accomplished. 
While at Council Grove they subsisted 
largely by hunting the buffalo, until the 
extinction of the herds, when they took 
up desultory farming under the instruc¬ 
tion of Government teachers, because 
driven to it by necessity; but the houses 
erected by the Government for their use 
they refused to occupy, regarding their 
own lodges as more healthful and com¬ 
fortable (G. P. Morehouse, inf’n, 1906). 

Say’s account, perhaps the most accu¬ 
rate of the earlier notices (Long, Exped. 
Rocky Mts., 1823), describes the ordi¬ 
nary dress of the men as consisting of a 
breech-clout of blue or red cloth secured 
in its place by a girdle, leggings and 
moccasins without ornamentation, and a 
blanket thrown over the shoulders. The 
hair of the chiefs and w T arriors, except a 
small lock at the back, was scrupulously 
removed. The dress of the females con¬ 
sisted of a piece of cloth secured at the 
waist by a girdle, the sides meeting on 
the outside of the right thigh, the whole 
extending downward to the knee. In 
cold weather or for full dress a similar 
piece of cloth was thrown over the left 
shoulder, and leggings of cloth, with a 
broad protecting border on the outside, 
and moccasins were worn. They were 
cultivators of the soil. Tattooing was 
formerly practised to a limited extent. 
The chastity of the females was guard¬ 
ed to a greater extent than was usual 
among the western tribes. The mode of 
constructing their principal permanent 
dwellings is described by Say as follows: 
“The roof is supported by two series of 
pillars, or rough vertical posts, forked at 
top for the reception of the transverse 
connecting pieces of each series; 12 of 
these posts form the outer series, placed 
in a circle; and 8 longer ones, the inner 
series, also describing a circle; the outer 
wall, of rude frame-work, placed a proper 
distance from the exterior series of pil¬ 
lars, is 5 or 6 ft high. Poles as thick 
as the leg at base rest with their butts 
upon the wall, extending on the cross- 


BULL. 30] 


KATTSA 


655 


pieces, which are upheld by the pillars 
of the two series, and are of sufficient 
length to reach nearly to the summit. 
These poles are very numerous, and, 
agreeably to the position which we have 
indicated, they are placed ali round in 
a radiating manner, and support the roof 
like rafters. Across these are laid long 
and slender sticks or twigs, attached par¬ 
allel to each other by means of bark cord; 
these are covered by mats made of long 
grass, or reeds, or with the bark of trees; 
the whole is then covered completely 
over with earth, which, near the ground, 
is banked up to the eaves. A hole is 
permitted to remain in the middle of the 
roof to give exit to the smoke [see Earth 
lodge ]. Around the walls of the interior a 
continuous series of mats are suspended; 
these are of neat workmanship, composed 
of a soft reed united by bark cord in straight 
or undulated lines, between which lines 
of black paint sometimes occur. The 
bedsteads are elevated to the height of a 
common seat from the ground, and are 
about 6 ft wide; they extend in an un¬ 
interrupted line around three-fourths of 
the circumference of the apartment, and 
are formed in the simplest manner of 
numerous sticks or slender pieces of 
wood, resting at their ends on cross¬ 
pieces, which are supported by short 
notched or forked posts driven into the 
ground; bison skins supply them with a 
comfortable bedding.” Restriction of 
marriage according to gentes has always 
been strictly observed by the Kansa. 
When the eldest daughter of a family 
married, she controlled the lodge, her 
mother, and all her sisters, the latter be¬ 
ing always the wives of the same man. 
On the death of the husband the widow 
became the wife of his eldest brother with¬ 
out ceremony; if there was no brother the 
widow w T as left free to select her next hus¬ 
band. 

The Kansa gentes as given by Dorsey 
(15th Rep. B. A. E., 230, 1897) are: 1, 
Manyinka (earth lodge); 2, Ta (deer); 3, 
Panka (Ponca); 4, Kanze (Kansa); 5, Wa- 
sabe (black bear); 6, Wanaghe (ghost); 
7, Kekin (carries a turtle on his back); 8, 
Minkin (carries the sun on his back); 9, 
Upan (elk); 10, Khuya (white eagle); 
11, Han (night); 12, ibache (holds the 
firebrand to sacred pipes); 13, Hanga- 
tanga (large Hanga); 14, Chedunga (buf¬ 
falo bull); 15, Chizhuwashtage (Chizhu 
peacemaker); 16, Lunikashinga(thunder¬ 
being people). These gentes constitute 
7 phratries. 

The following w T ere some of the Kansa 
villages, their names having been gained 
chiefly through the investigations of Rev. 
J. O. Dorsey, but in only a few cases are 
their locations known: Bahekhube, Che- 
ghulin (2), Djestyedje, Gakhulin, Gakhu- 


linulinbe, Igamansabe, Inchi, Ishtakhe- 
chiduba, Manhazitanman, Manhazulin, 
Manhazulintanman, Manyinkatuhuudje, 
Neblazhetama, Niudje, Padjegadjin, Pa- 
sulin, Tanmangile, Waheheyingetseyabe, 
Wazbazhepa, Yuzhemakancheubukhpa- 
ye, Zandjezhinga, Zandjulin, and Zha- 
nichi. 

Alaho.—Mooney, inf’n (Kiowa name). Ansaus.— 
Trumbull, Ind. Wars, 185, 1851 (misprint). Can- 
ceze.—Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, xxv, 
note, 1893. Cancezs.—Lewis (1806) in Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark, VII, 336, 1905. Canchez.—Le 
Page Du Pratz, Hist. La., II, 251, 1758. Canips.— 
Lewis, Trav., 3,1809. Cans.—Maximilian, Trav., 
119,1843 (so called by the French). CLnsa.—Har¬ 
ris, Vov. and Trav.,'i, map, 685, 1705. Canses.— 
Smith, Bouquet Exped., 70, 1766. Canses.—Iber¬ 
ville (1702) in Margry, Dec., IV, 601, 1880. Can- 
sez.—Charlevoix, Voy. N. Am., ii, 168, 1766. 
Canzas.—Le Page Du Pratz, Hist. La., 301, 1774. 
Canzes.—Bienville (1722) in Margry, D6c., VI, 387, 
1886. Canzez.—Le Page Du Pratz, Hist. La., I, 324, 
1758. Caugh.—Whitehouse (1804) in Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark, vii, 46, 1905. Cauzes.—Trum¬ 
bull, Ind. Wars, 185,1851. Caw.—Farnham, Trav. 
West. Prairies, 14, 1843. Ercansaques.—Salmeron 
quoted by Dunbar in Mag. Am. Hist., iv, 280,1880. 
Escanjaques.—Vetancurt (1693), Teatro Mex., in, 
303, repr. 1871. Escansaques.—Zarate-Salmeron 
( ca . 1629), Relacion, in Land of Sunshine, 45, Dec. 
1899 (the original form of this name; possibly the 
Kansa). Escanxaques.—Shea (1662), Penalosa, 29, 

1882 (supposed by Shea to be Comanche). Es- 
quansaques.—Ladd, Story of N. Mex., 109, 1891. 
Estanxaques.—Shea, Penalosa, 83, 1882. Excan- 
jaque.—Zarate-Salmeron quoted by Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, I, 599, 1882. Excausaquex.—Colum¬ 
bus Memor., 157, 1893 (misprint). Hutahga.— 
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (own 
name). Ka Anjou.—Bowen, Am. Discov. by the 
Welsh, 92, 1876. Ka Anzou.—Ibid, (called Chick¬ 
asaw name; trans. ‘first men’). Kah.—Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 81, 1905 (given as 
French traders’ name). Kah.—Lewis and Clark, 
Discov., 13,1806. Kamse.—N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IX, 1057, 1855. Kancas.—La Potherie, Hist. Am., 
ii, 271, 1753. Kances.—Du Lac, Voy. dans les 
Louisianes, vi, 1805. Kans.—Pike, Exped., 123, 
1810. Kansa.—Ex. Doc. 56, 18th Cong., 1st sess, 9, 
1824. Kansae.—Coxe, Carolana, 11, 1741. Kan¬ 
sas.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), i, 60,1904. 
Kanse.—La Harpe (1722) in Margry, D6c., VI, 365, 
1886. Ka n se.—Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 

1883 (Osage and Quapaw name). Kanses.—Iber- 
ville(1702)in Margry, D6c., iv,599,1880. Kansez.— 
Anville,mapN.Am.,1752. Kansies.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, ill, 557,1853. Kantha.—Hamilton in 
Trans. Nebr. Hist. Soc., I, 73, 1885 (Iowa name). 
Kants.—Smet, Oregon Miss., 161, 1847. Kanzas.— 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), I, 67, 1904. 
Kanzeis.—Whitehouse (1805), ibid., vn, 189, 1905. 
Kanzes.—Lewis and Clark, ibid., vi, 84. Kar'-sa.— 
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 13,1806. Karsea.—Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 84, 1905 (given as their 
own name). Kasas.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 
37,1853. Kathagi.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Shaw¬ 
nee name). Kausas. —Dorsey in Am. Antiq., i, 186, 
1879 (misprint). Kauzau.—M’Coy, Ann. Reg., no. 
2, 4, 1836. Kaws.—Gregg, Commerce of Prairies, 
I, 41, 1844. Kaw'-sa.—Huffaker (1873), inf’n com¬ 
municated by G. P. Morehouse, 1906 (own name). 
Kaw'-za.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Konaz—. 
Latham, Philol. and Ethnol. Essays, 296, 1860 
(misprint). Konsa.—Gatschet, Kaw vocab., 27, 
B. A. E., 1878. Kon-ses.—Hunter, Captiv. among 
Itids., 18, 1823. Konza.—Maximilian Trav., 119, 
1843. Konzas.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 111, 
1823. Les pancake.—Shea, Penalosa, 21, note, 1882 
(=Les kan<?ak6=Escanxaques). Mohtawas.—ten 
Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 383, 1885 (Comanche 
name). Mo”tawas.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 9,1884 
(Comanche name: ‘ without a lock of hair on the 
forehead’). Okames.—Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 45, 
1870. Okams.—N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 1057,1855. 
Okanis.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 557, 1853. 


656 


KANSAKI-KAPOZHA 


[B. a. e. 


Quans.—Bourgmont (1723) in Margry, D6c., vi, 
393, 1886. tJkasa.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Fox 
name). Ukasak.—Ibid. 

Kansaki ( G&nsd'gi, G&nsd'giyt). The 
name of several distinct Cherokee settle¬ 
ments: (1) on Tuckasegee r., a short dis¬ 
tance above the present Webster, in 
Jackson co., N. C.; (2) on the lower part 
of Canasauga cr., in McMinn co., Tenn.; 
(3) at the junction of Conasauga and 
Coosawatee rs., where afterward w r as situ¬ 
ated the Cherokee capital, New Echota, 
in Qordon co., Ga.; (4) mentioned in the 
De Soto narratives as Canasoga or Cana- 
sagua, in 1540, on Chattahoochee r., pos¬ 
sibly in the neighborhood of Kenesaw 
mtn., Ga. (j. m. ) 

Canasagua.—Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in Hakluyt Soc. 
Pub., ix, 61,1851. Canasauga.—Royce in 5th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1887. Gansa'gi.—Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 518,1900. GansagiyI.—Ibid. 

Kanse (‘Kansa’). The 14th Hangka 
Osage gens and 7th on the right side of 
the tribal circle. See Kanze. 

A'k’a iniqak‘aci n/ a.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
234, 1797 (‘south wind people’). Fdats‘e.—Ibid. 
(‘ holds a firebrand to the sacred pipes to light 
them’). Kansa.—Ibid. Ka n 'se.—Ibid. Pe'^se 
i'niuk‘aci n 'a.—Ibid, (‘fire people’). Ta^se' i'n- 
iqk‘ac n 'a.—Ibid, (‘wind people’). 

Kantico, Kanticoy. See Cantico. 

Kannlik. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the left bank of Nushagak r., near 
its mouth, in Alaska; pop. 142 in 1880, 54 
in 1890. Carmel mission is here. 

Kanoolik.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 47, 1880. Ka- 
nulik.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 
Karulik.—Elliott, Our Aret. Prov., map, 1886. 

Kanutaluhi ( Kanu'tdWhl , ‘ dogwood 

place’). A Cherokee settlement in n. 
Georgia about the period of the removal 
of the tribe in 1839. ( j. m. ) 

Kanuti. A Koyukukhotana village on 
Koyukuk r., Alaska, lat. 66° 18', with 13 
inhabitants in 1885. 

Kanuti.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Ko- 
nootena.—Allen, Rep. Alaska, 97,1887. 

Kanwaiakaku ( Kan-wai'-a-ka-ku ). A 
former Chumashan village near the mis¬ 
sion of San Buenaventura, Cal.—Henshaw, 
Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kanwasowaua ( Kanwasowaua , ‘ long 

tail’). The panther gens of the Miami. 
Ka-no_za'-wa.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877. 
Kanwasowau*.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Kanyuksa Istichati ( i-kan-a ‘ground’, 
i-yuk-sa ‘point’or ‘tip’, i. e., point of 
ground, or peninsula, is-ti-tca-ti ‘red men ’). 
The native name of that branch of the 
Seminole, numbering 136 in 1881, residing 
s. of Caloosahatchee r., at Miami and Big 
Cypress Swamp settlements, Fla.—Mac- 
Cauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 509,1887. 

Kanze (archaic and untranslatable; ren¬ 
dered by Dorsey ‘ wind people ’). The 5th 
gens on the Hangashenu side of the Omaha 
tribal circle. See Kanse. 

S a n ze.—Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1885. 

on-za.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 327, 1823. 
Kun'-za.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155,1877. 

Kanze (Kansa). Given by J. O. Dorsey 
as the 4th Kansa gens, consisting of the 
Tdjeunikashinga and Tadjezhinga sub- 
gentes. 


Ic'-ha-she.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877 (trans. 

‘ tent’). Ka n ze.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 
1897. Last-lodge.—Ibid. Lodge-in-the-rear.— 
Ibid. Tci haci n .—Ibid. 

Kapachichin (‘ sandy shore ’). A Ntla- 
kyapamuk town on the w. side of Eraser 
r., about 28 m. above Yale, Brit. Col.; 
pop. 52 in 1901. 

Kapatci'tcin.—Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
II, 169, 1900. Kapatsitsan.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 
1901, pt. II, 164. Klapatcl'tcin.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899. Kopachichin.—Brit. 
Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. North Bend.— 
Teit, op. cit. (name given by whites). 

Kapaits. The conservative party among 
the Lagunas of New Mexico (Loew r in 
Wheeler Surv. Rep., vn, 339,1879). Ac¬ 
cording to Bandelier this party constitutes 
a phratry. See Kayomasho. 

Kapaka (Ka / -pa-ka) . A former Nishi- 
nam village in the valley of Bear r., n. 
Cal. — Pow T ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 
316, 1877. 

Kapanai. A former village of the same 
Costanoan group as Kalindaruk, and con¬ 
nected with San Carlos mission, Cal. 

Capanay.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer. Apr. 20, 1860. 
Kapanai.— A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. 

Kaparoktolik. A summer settlement of 
Tununirusirmiut Eskimo near the en¬ 
trance to Ponds inlet, Baffin land.— 
McClintock, Voy. of Fox, 162, 1859. 

Kapaslok ( K'apasloq , ‘sand roof’). A 
village of Ntlakyapamuk on Fraser r., 
above Suk, Brit. Col. It was formerly a 
large settlement.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899. 

Kapawnich. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy on the n. bank of the Rappa¬ 
hannock, about Corotomanr., Lancaster 
co., Va., in 1608.—Smith (1629), Va., i, 
map, repr. 1819. 

Kapiminakouetiik. Mentioned in the 
Jesuit Relations (26, 1646) as a tribe liv¬ 
ing at some distance n. of Three Rivers, 
Can. Doubtless Montagnais, and possibly 
the Papinachois, q. v. 

Kapisilik. An Eskimo village not far 
from Godthaab, n. Greenland.—Nansen, 
First Crossing of Greenland, ii, 219,1890. 

Kapkapetlp ( Qapqapetlp, ‘ place of 
cedar’ [?]). A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity at Point Grey, Burrard inlet, 
Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. 
S., 475, 1900. 

Kapozha (‘ not encumbered with much 
baggage ’). A Mdewakanton Sioux band. 
In 1811 they lived between Cannon r. and 
Minnesota r., and their village, known as 
Kaposia, was on the e. bank of the Mis¬ 
sissippi 15 m. below the mouth of the 
Minnesota. At that time the chief was 
Little Crow (Chetanwakanmani), q. v. 
In 1830 their village was said to be 3 
leagues below the mouth of Minnesota 
r. Another Little Crow, who was chief 
in 1862, was killed at the close of the 
Sioux outbreak. 

Ca-po-cia band.—Smithson. Misc. Coll., xiv, art. 6, 
1878. His-scarlet-people.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, 
note, 1858. Kah-po-sia.—Prescott in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, pt. 2,171,1852. Kahpozhah.—Snelling, 


BULL. 30] 


KAPOZHA-KAEANKAWA 


657 


Tales of N. W., 197, 1830. Kahpozhay.—McKen- 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, I, 303, 1854. Kapoga.— 
Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 263,1872. Kapoja.— 
Long, Exped. St Peters R., 1 .383,1824. Kapo'ia.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep.B. A. E., 215,1897. Ka-po-sias.— 
Ramsay in Ind. Aff. Rep., 81, 1850. Kapota.— 
Ausland,462,1887. Ka-po'-za.—Riggs, Dak. Gram, 
and Diet., 118, 1852. ‘Kapozha.—Williamson in 
Minn. Geol. Rep., 107, 1884. Little Crow’s band.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 118, 1850. Petit Corbeau’s band.— 
Long, Exped. St Peters R., 380,1824. Tahohyahtay- 
dootah.—Neill, Hist. Minn., 589,1858 (‘hisscarlet 
people’: real name of Little Crow). Ta-o-ya-te- 
du-ta.—Ibid., 144, note. 

Kapozha. A band of the Sisseton Sioux. 
Kap’oja.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897. 
Kapoza.—Riggs quoted by Dorsey, ibid. 

Kapulo. The now extinct Crane clan 
of theTewa of Hano pueblo, n. l. Arizona. 
Ka-pu'-lo.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 166, 
1894. Kapulo-towa.—Hodge, ibid., ix, 350, 1896 
(towa=‘ people’). 

Kaquaith. A former Clallam village at 
Port Discovery, Wash. 

Ka-kaitl.—Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 20, 1863. 
Ka-quaith.—Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 457, 1854. 
Ka-quaitl.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 435, 1855. 
Skwa-kwel.—Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 20, 
1863. Squah-quaihtl.—U. S. Ind. Treat., 800, 1873. 
Squa-que-hl.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1 ,429,1855. 

Karaken (Kara'k<t n , ‘it is white’). A 
traditionary Iroquois town belonging to 
the Bear clan and designated as one of 
recent formation. (j. n. b. h.) 

Karakenh.—Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites, 120, 
1883. Ka ra ken.—Ibid., 121. 

Karakuka. The name given by the 
main body of the Karok (q. v.) to the 
divergent dialect spoken on Clear cr. and 
at Happy Camp, Cal.—A. L. Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1905. 

Karankawa. A term that seems to have 
been given originally to a small tribe near 
Matagorda bay, Texas, but its application 
has been extended to include a num¬ 
ber of related tribes between Galveston 
bay and Padre id. The signification of 
the name has not been ascertained. 
Although the linguistic material obtained 
is not sufficient to show positive relation 
to any other language, there are very 
strong indications of affinity with the dia¬ 
lects of the Pakawa group—Pakawa, 
Comecrudo, and Cotonam—still recog¬ 
nized as a part of the Coahuiltecan family. 
On the other side they were probably con¬ 
nected with the Tonkawa. If any of the 
coast tribes mentioned by Cabeza de Vaca 
was identical with the Karankawa, which 
is not unlikely, it is impossible to deter¬ 
mine the fact. The first positive notice 
of them is found in the accounts of La 
Salle’s ill-fated visit to that section. It 
was on Matagorda bay, in the country 
of the tribe at that time, that this French 
explorer built his Ft St Louis. Joutel 
(1687) mentions them under the name 
Koienkahe (Margry, D£c., hi, 288,1878), 
probably a misprint for Korenkake, 
which is also given. They are repre¬ 
sented as living at that time chiefly be¬ 
tween St Louis bay (a part of Matagorda 
bay) and Maligne (Colorado) r., but are 
the Indians, though mentioned under the 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-42 


name Clamcoets, who massacred all ex¬ 
cept 5 of the people left by La Salle at his 
fort in 1687. If the Ebahamo, Hebobia- 
mos, Bahamos, or Bracamos were identi¬ 
cal with the Karankawa or with a por¬ 
tion of the tribe, which is probable, 
they were living on St Louis or St Ber¬ 
nard bay in 1707 (De l’lsle’smapin Win- 
sor, Hist. Am., ii, 294, 1886), and are 
noticed as living at the same place in 
1719-21. Their abode is spoken of as an 
island or peninsula in St Bernard bay 
(French, Hist. Coll., n, 11, note, 1875). 
It appears from documents in the Texas 
archives that in 1793 a part of the 
Karankawa had become christianized 
and were then living at the mission of 
Nuestra Senora del Refugio (q. v.), estab¬ 
lished in 1791 at the mouth of Mission r. 
emptying into Aransas bay. The pagan 
portion of the tribe lived at that time 
contiguous to the Lipan. Later a num¬ 
ber of the tribe were living at the mission 
of Espfritu Santo de Zuniga. According 
to Orozco y Berra (Geog., 382, 1864) the 
territory of the Lipan near the lower Rio 
Grande bordered that occupied by the 
Karankawa in 1796. An incident in the 
history of the tribe was a fierce battle with 
Lafitte’s band of pirates in consequence 
of the abduction of one of their women 
by one of the former; the Indians, how¬ 
ever, were forced to retreat before the 
heavy fire of the buccaneers. With the 
settlement made by Stephen Austin on 
the Brazos in 1823 began the decline of 
the tribe. Conflicts between the settlers 
and the Indians were frequent, and finally 
a battle was fought in which about half 
the tribe were slain, the other portion 
fleeing for refuge to La Bahia presidio on 
San Antonio r. They took sides with the 
Americans in the Texan war of indepen¬ 
dence, in which their chief, Jos6 Maria, 
was killed, as were most of his warriors, 
amounting, however, to only about 20. 
Mention is made of 10 or 12 families liv¬ 
ing between 1839 and 1851 on Aransas 
bay and Nueces r. According to Bonnell 
(Topog. Descrip. Texas, 137, 1840) the 
Karankawa in 1840 had become reduced 
to 100, living on Lavaca bay. In 1844, 
having murdered one of the whites on 
Guadalupe r., they fled toward the mouth 
of the Rio Grande, one part stopping on 
Padre id. and the other passing into Mex¬ 
ico. But few references are made to 
them after this date, and these are con¬ 
flicting. A report quoted by Gatschet 
says the history of these Indians termi¬ 
nates with an attack made on them in 
1858 by Juan Nepomuceno Cortina with 
other rancheros, when they were sur¬ 
prised at their hiding place in Texas and 
exterminated. 

The men are described as very tall and 
well formed, the women as shorter and 


658 


K A RANK A WAN FAMILY-KARIGOUISTES 


[b. a. e. 


fleshier. Their hair was unusually coarse, 
and worn so long by many of the men 
that it reached to the waist. Agriculture 
was not practised by these Indians, their 
food supply being obtained from the wa¬ 
ters, the chase, and wild plants, and, to 
a limited extent, human flesh; for, like 
most of the tribes of the Texas coast, they 
were cannibals. Travel among them was 
almost wholly by the canoe, or dugout, 
for they seldom left the coast. Head¬ 
flattening and tattooing were practised to 
a considerable extent. Little is. known 
in regard to their tribal government, fur¬ 
ther than that they had civil and war 
chiefs, the former being hereditary in the 
male line. (See Gatschet, Karankawa 
Inds., 1891.) 

The following tribes or villages were 
probably Karankawan: Coaque, Ebaha- 
mo, Emet, Kouyam, Meracouman, Quara, 
and Quinet. The following -were in the 
country of the Karankawa, but whether 
linguistically connected with them is 
not certain: Ahehouen, Ahouerhopiheim, 
Arhau, Chorruco, Doguenes, Kahaye, 
Kiabaha, Ivopano, Las Mulas, Mariames, 
Mendica, Mora, Ointemarhen, Omena- 
osse, Pataquilla, Quevenes, San Francisco, 
and Spichehat. See Nuestra Seflora del 
Rosario. (a. c. f. j. r. s.) 

Caramanes.—Mezitires (1778) quoted by Bancroft, 
No. Mex. States, 1 ,661,1886 (distinct from the Xar- 
amanes = Aramanes). Carancaguacas.— Doc. of 
1796 quoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 382, 1864. 
Carancaguazes.—Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602, 1736. 
Carancahuas.—Maillard, Hist. Tex., 238, 251, 1842. 
Carancahuases.—Doc. of 1828 in Soc. Geog. Mex., 
504,1869. Carancahuazes.—Doc. of 1793 quoted by 
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 28, 1891. Caranca- 
nay.—Robin, Voy. Louisiane, m, 15, 1807. Caran- 
couas.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 101, 
1856. Caranhouas.—Lewis and Clark, Jour., 155, 
1840. Carankahuas.—Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Carankawaes.—French, 
Hist. Coll. La., II, 11, note, 1875. Carankonas.— 
Domenech, Deserts N. A., I, 440, 1860. Caran- 
kouas.—Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 72, 1806. Caran- 
koways.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 571, 1855. 
Cazancanay.—Robin, Voy. Louisiane, in, 14, 1807. 
Charankoua.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 544, 
1853. Clamcoets.—Joutel, Jour, du Dernier Voy. 
de La Salle, 74,1713. Coiencahes.—Barcia, Ensayo, 
271, 1723. Coran-canas.—Schermerhorn (1812) in 
Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., II, 25, 1814. Corankoua.— 
Brackenridge, Views La., 81, 1814. Coronkawa.— 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822. Coronks.—A 
popular abbreviation in Texas for Karankawa. 
Curancahuases,—Escudero, Not. de Chihuahua, 
231, 1834. Karankaways.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 30, 1850. 
Karankoas.—Sanford, Hist. U. S., clxvii, 1819. 
Karankoo-as.—Brackenridge, Views La., 87, 1814. 
Keles.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (‘ wrestlers’: Ton- 
kawa name). Kikanonas.—Barcia, Ensayo, 263, 
1723. Kironnonas.—French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 
11, note, 1875. Kironomes. — Charlevoix, New 
France, Shea ed., iv, 88, 1870. Kirononas.—Coxe, 
Carolana, 38, 1741. Koienkahe.—Joutel (1687) in 
Margry, D6c., in, 288, 1878. Korenkake.—Joutel 
(1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., I, 137, 1846. Ko- 
ronks—Bollaert (1849) quoted by Gatschet, Karan¬ 
kawa Inds., 35,1891. Nda kun-dadehe.—Gatschet, 
Lipan MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Lipan name: ndd ‘peo¬ 
ple’, kun ‘water’, cladehe ‘going walking’: ‘peo¬ 
ple walking in the water’). Quelamoueches.—De 
l’lsle map (ca. 1707) in Winsor, Hist. Am., n, 294, 
1886. Quelancouchis.—Iberville (1699) in Margry, 
D6c., iv, 316, 1880. Quelanhubeches.—Barcia, En¬ 
sayo, 294, 1723 (probably identical). Quineres.— 


Ibid., 259 (identical?). Q,uinets.—Douay in Shea, 
Discov., 207,210,1852 (identical?). Tampacuases.— 
Reports of the Mex. Border Commission, 406,1873. 
Tarancahuases.—Doc. of 1828 quoted by Gatschet, 
Karankawa Inds., 34, 1891. Yakokon kapai.— 
Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E., 145 (‘without 
moccasins’: Tonkawa name, including also the 
Coahuiltecan coast tribes). 

Karankawan Family. A family estab¬ 
lished by Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 82, 
1891) on the language of the Karankawa 
tribe as determined by Gatschet. Al¬ 
though this and the related tribes are 
extinct, investigation has led to the con¬ 
clusion that the Coaque, Ebahamo, and 
other tribes or settlements of the Texas 
coast mentioned under Karankawa (q. v.) 
should be included in the family. 

Karezi. A.n unidentified tribe men¬ 
tioned as living w. of L. Superior and dis¬ 
tinct from the Cree.—Jes. Rel. 1667, 23, 
1858. 

Karhadage (‘in the forest.’—Hewitt). 
An unidentified tribe, band, or village, 
probably in Canada, with which the Iro¬ 
quois affirmed they had made peace in 
1701. Mentioned with the Chippewa, 
Missisauga, Nipissing, and others (Living¬ 
ston in N. Y. Hoc. Col. Hist., iv, 899,1854). 
Cf. Karhagaghrooney, Karigouistes, Karri- 
haet. (j. m.) 

Karhagaghrooney (Karhagaronon , ‘peo¬ 
ple of the woods’). According to Sir 
Wm. Johnson a name applied by the Iro¬ 
quois to wandering Indians n. of Quebec; 
but as he suggests Carillon on Ottawa r. 
as the best point for a post of trade with 
them, they were probably more to the 
westward. Hobbs located them n. of L. 
Huron. The term is a collective one, re¬ 
ferring to wandering bands of different 
tribes, possibly to the Tetes de Boule, and 
to those called O’pimittish Ininiwac by 
Henry. 

Karhagaghrooneys.— Johnson (1764) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VII, 658, 1856. Kirhawguagh Roanu.— 
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 28, 1744. 

Karhationni {Kdrhdtion'nV , ‘a forest 
lying extended lengthwise’). A tradi¬ 
tionary Iroquois village belonging to the 
Wolf clan; location unknown. 

(j. N. b. h. ) 

Karhatyonni,— Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites, 118, 
1883. Karhetyonni.—Ibid., 119. 

Karhawenradonh ( Karhawe^hra'do n ’). 
A traditionary Iroquois town belonging 
to the Bear clan and to those towns 
designated as cf recent formation; loca¬ 
tion unknown. (j. n. b. h. ) 

Karhawenghradongh.—Hale, Iroquois Book of 
Rites, 120, 1883. Ka rho wengh ra don.—Ibid., 121. 

Kariak. An Eskimo settlement close to 
Amaralik fjord, w. Greenland.—Crantz, 
Hist. Greenland, i, 8, 1767. 

Kariak. A summer settlement of Aivi- 
lirmiut Eskimo on Lyon inlet, n. end of 
Hudson bay.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
450, 1888. 

Karigouistes. The name given by the 
Iroquois to the Catholic Indians of'Can¬ 
ada, probably more especially to the 


BULL. 30] 


K ARKIN-K ARRIH AET 


659 


Caughnawaga. The name seems to have 
reference to a long dress, possibly the 
owns worn by the priests. (j. n. b. h. ) 

araguists.— Golden (1727), Five Nations, 163,1747. 
Karigouistes.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, in, 200, 
1753. Karig8stes.—Dellins (1694) inN. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IV, 95, 1854. 

Karkin. A division of the Costanoan 
Indians inhabiting the country s. of 
Carquinez straits, San Francisco bay,Cal., 
the name of the straits being derived from 
that of the Indians. According to Kotze¬ 
bue they extended e. as far as the mouth 
of San Joaquin r. 

Carquin.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Jarquin.—Ibid. Karkin.—Arroyo de la Cuesta, 
Idiomas Californias, MS. traris., B. A. E. Kar- 
quines.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. Kore- 
kins.—Kotzebue, New Yoy. (1823-26), ii, 141,1830. 

Karluk. A Kaniagmiut village on the 
n. coast of Kodiak id., Alaska, where 
there are large salmon canneries; pop. 
302 in 1880, 1,123 in 1890, 1,864 in 1900. 

Carlcok.—Lisianski (1805), quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Karlooch.—Ibid. Karluta.— 
Coxe, after Shelikof, quoted by Baker, ibid. 
Nunakachwak.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 
1855. 

Karmakdj uin ( Qarmaqdjuin, ‘large 
huts’). A summer settlement of the 
Akudnirmiut Eskimo on Home bay, 
Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
441, 1888. 

Karmakdj uin. A village of Padlimiut 
Eskimo on the coast just n. of Exeter sd., 
Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1888. 

Karmang ( Qarrnang, ‘ hut ’). A sum¬ 
mer settlement of Talirpingmiut Okomiut 
Eskimo at the n. w. end of Nettilling lake, 
w. of Cumberland sd.—Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Karmenak. An Ita Eskimo settlement 
in n. Greenland.—Kane, Arct. Explor., 
ii, 127, 1856. 

Karmentaruka. A former village of the 
Rumsen, connected w r ith San Carlos mis¬ 
sion, Cal. 

Carmentaruka.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 
1860. 

Karok ( karuk , ‘upstream’; they have 
no name for themselves other than that 
for ‘men’ or ‘people’, arcir, whence 
Arra-arra, Arci-ara, etc.). The name by 
which the Indians of the Quoratean 
family have, as a tribe, been generally 
called. They lived on Klamath r. from 
Redcap cr. to Indian or., n. w. Cal. 
Below them on the river were the 
Yurok, above them the Shasta, to their 
e. were other Shastan tribes, while on 
the w. they were separated by a spur 
of the Siskiyou mts. from the Yurok and 
the Athapascan Tolowa. Salmon r., a 
tributary of the Klamath, was not Karok 
territory except for about 5 m. from its 
mouth, but was held mainly by Shastan 
tribes. While the Karok language is fun¬ 
damentally different from the languages 
of the adjacent Hupa and Yurok, the 
Karok people closely resemble these two 


tribes in mode of life and culture, and any 
description given of the latter will apply 
to the Karok. They differ from the 
Yurok principally in two points: One, 
that owing to the absence of redwood they 
do not make canoes but buy them from 
the Yurok; the other, that they celebrate 
a series of annual ceremonies called “mak¬ 
ing the world,” which are held at Pan¬ 
amenik, Katimin, and Inam, with a sim¬ 
ilar observance at Amaikiara, while the 
Yurok possess no strictly analogous per¬ 
formances. The Karok had no divi¬ 
sions other than villages, and while these 
extended along the entire extent of their 
territory, three important clusters are 
recognizable, in each of which there was 
one village at which certain ceremonies 
were held that were observed nowhere 
else. Panamenik, on the site of Orleans 
Bar, and several other settlements formed 
the first group; the second was about the 
mouth of Salmon r. and comprised Amai¬ 
kiara, Ashipak, Ishipishi, Katimin, Shan- 
amkarak, and others; in the third and 
northernmost group the most important 
villages were Inam, at the mouth of Clear 
cr., and Asisufuunuk at Happy Camp. 
In the first two groups a single dialect w T as 
spoken; in the last, the farthest upstream, 
a divergent dialect called Karakuka was 
employed. 

Following is a list of the Karok villages: 
Amaikiara, Aperger, Apyu, A rani- 
mokw, Ashipak, Asisufuunuk, Chainiki, 
Chawakoni, Chinits, Couth, Homnipa, 
Homuarup, Ift, Inam, Inotuks, Ishipishi, 
Ishwidip, Iyis,. Katimin, Katipiara, Ko- 
kaman, Kworatem, Ohetur, Olegel, Oler, 
Opegoi, Panamenik, Pasara, Sawuara, 
Shanamkarak, Shegoashkwu, Sumaun, 
Sunum, Supasip, Tishrawa, Tsano, Tsofk- 
ara, Tui, Uchapa, Unharik, Wetsitsiko, 
Wopum, and Yutoyara. 

Ara.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 1, 
xlvi, 1890 (sig. ‘man’). Ara-ara.— Ibid. Arra- 
Arra.—Crook, ibid., in,447, 1877. Cahrocs.—Pow¬ 
ers in Overland Mo., ix, 157, 1872. Cahroes.— 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504, 1878. Cis- 
quiouws.—Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 
1st sess., 10, 1848 (may include also Yurok and 
Shasta). Ivap'i. — 4 . L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 
(Shasta name). Kahruk.—Gibbs (1851) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 151, 1853. Karok.—Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., HI, 19, 1877. Orleans 
Indians.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (sometimes lo¬ 
cally used, especially downstream from the 
Karok territory). Patesick.—McKee (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1853. 
Patih-riks.—Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 
1855. Peh-tsik.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 138, 1853 (Yurok name; sig. ‘up¬ 
stream’—Kroeber). Petit-sick.—McKee, op. cit., 
161. Petsikla.—Kroeber,inf’n, 1903(Yurokname). 
Upper Klamath.—McKee, op. cit., 194. 

Karrihaet. Given as the name of a tribe, 
probably in Canada, with whom the 
Iroquois made peace in 1701. Mentioned 
with the Chippewa, Missisauga, Nipis- 
sing, and others.—Livingston (1701) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 899, 1854. Cf. 
Karigouistes , Karhadage. 


660 


KARSOK-KASHTU 


[b. a. e. 


Karsok. An Eskimo village in w. Green¬ 
land, lat. 72° 4CK. 

Karsok. —Science, xi, 259, 1888. Karsuk. —Kane, 
Arct. Explor., I, 458, 1856. 

Karsuit. A village of Ita Eskimo on 
Inglefield gulf, n. Greenland. 

Karsioot.— Kane, Arct. Explor., II, 212, 1856. 
Karsooit. —Hayes, Arct. Boat. Journ., 307,1860. 

Karsukan. A spring settlement of Oko- 
miut Eskimo of Saumia, on the coast of 
Baffin land, n. of Cumberland sd.—Boas 
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Karusuit (‘the caves’)- A village of 
the Talirpingmiut Okomiut Eskimo on 
Nettilling fjord, w. shore of Cumberland 
sd.; pop. 29 in 1883. 

Kaiossuit.— Boas in Deutsche Geog. Bliitt., vm, 
32, 1885. K’arussuit. —Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 
no. 80, 70, 1885. Kemasuit. —Kumlien in Bull. 
Nat. Mus., no. 15, 15, 1879. Kemesuit. — Ibid. 
Kimmocksowick. —Wareham in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., xii, 24,1842. Qarussuit. —Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., 426, 1888. 

Karusuk. An Eskimo settlement near 
Ameralik fjord, lat. 64° 20', w. Green¬ 
land.—Nansen, First Crossing of Green¬ 
land, ir, 416,1890. 

Kasaan (pronounced by Haida GAsa'n, 
but said to be from Tlingit Ka'si-an , 

‘ pretty town ’). One of the three towns 
in Alaska still occupied by the Haida; 
situated on Skowl arm of Kasaan bay, 
e. coast of Prince of Wales id. Chat- 
chee-nie, the name of a Kaigani town 
in John Work’s list of 1836-41, was 
either a camping place of the people of 
Kasaan or a town occupied by them 
before moving to the latter place. In 
Work’s time it had 18 houses and 249 
people. Petroff gives the population of 
Kasaan (and “Skowl”) in 1880 as 173, 
and the Census of 1890 as 46; the present 
number is insignificant. The family that 
settled here wastheTadjilanas. (.t. r. s. ) 
GAsa'n. —Swanton, Cont. Haida, 282, 1905. Ka¬ 
saan. —U. S. Coast Surv. map of Alaska, south¬ 
east sec., Apr. 1898. Kassan. —Petroff in 10th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 32, 1884. Kassan Haade. —Harrison 
in Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 
1895. 

Kasaktikat ( Kn-sak-tV-kat ). A former 
Chumashan village at a place called Ba- 
jada de la Canada, in Ventura co., Cal.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocal)., B. 
A. E., 1884. 

Kasenos {Ka'-se-nos) . A village, prob¬ 
ably of the Cathlacumup, formerly sit¬ 
uated where Scappoose cr. empties into 
Willamette slough, Oreg.—Gibbs, MS. 
248, B. A. E. 

Kashahara. The Karok name of the 
Wintun of Trinity r., n. Cal. (Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1903). The Trinity r. Wintun 
consisted of the Normuk, Tientien, and 
Waikenmuk. 

Kashaiak. A Togiagamiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Togiak r., near its junction with 
the Kashaiak, Alaska; pop. 181 in 1880. 

Kashaiak. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kash- 
aiyak. —Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, ibid. 
Kissaiakh.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17,1884. 
Kissiak.— Petroff,Rep. on Alaska, 49, 1880. Kissi- 
akh. —Nelson in 18th Rep B. A. E., map, 1900. 


Kashiga. An Aleut village on Unalaska 
id., Alaska. Pop. 41 in 1833 (at which 
date it was the headquarters of the fore¬ 
man of the Russian-American Co. for the 
w. half of Unalaska), according to Veni- 
aminoff; 74 in 1874, according to Shiesne- 
kov; 73 in 1880; 46 in 1890. 

Kashega.—Sarichef (1792) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kashiga.—11th Census, Alaska, 
89,1893. Kashigin.—Ibid. Koschiginskoje.—Holm- 
berg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 142, 1855. Koshegen- 
skoi.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225,1875. Kosh- 
igin.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 20, 1880. Koshi- 
ginskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840. 

Kashigalak. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage in the middle of Nelson id., Alaska; 
pop. 10 in 1880. 

Kashigalagamute.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 54, 
1881. Kashigalogamut.—Nelson (1878) quoted by 
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,1902. Kashigalogumut.— 
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1900. Kashi- 
galuk.—Baker, op.cit. 

Kashiwe ( Kas-hi'-we ). AformerChuma- 
shan village near Newhall, Ventura co., 
Cal., at a place now called Cuesta Santa 
Sus&na.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kashkachuti (Kash-kach'-u-ti). A pueblo 
of the Acoma which, according to tradi¬ 
tion, was inhabited in prehistoric times 
during the migration of the tribe from the 
mythic Shipapu in the indefinite n.— 
Hodge in Century Mag., lvi, 15, May, 1898. 

Kashkekoan (‘ people of [the r. ] Kashk’). 
A Tlingit division at Yakutat, Alaska, that 
is said to have migrated from the Atha¬ 
pascan country on the upper part of Cop¬ 
per r. It belongs to the Raven phratry. 

Kackle qoan.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Kaschke-kon.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. 

Kashong. A former Seneca settlement 
on Kashong cr., at its entrance into Sen¬ 
eca lake. It is first mentioned in 1765, 
and contained 14 houses when destroyed 
by Sullivan in Sept., 1779. (j. m.) 

Cashaem.— MS. Jour, of 1787 quoted by Conover, 
Kanadasega and Geneva MS., B. A. E. Cashong.— 
Ibid. Gaghasieanhgwe. — Ibid. Gaghsiungua.— 
Ibid. Gaghsonghgwa. — Ibid. Gaghsonshwa.— 
Kirkland (1765) quoted by Conover, ibid. Gag- 
songhwa.— Ibid. Gahasieanhgwe.— Ibid. Garhaw- 
quash.— Morgan, League Iroq., map, 1851. Gath- 
siungua.— Jour, of 1687 quoted by Conover, MS., 
B. A. E. Gothescunqueon.— Ibid. Gothsenquean.— 
Ibid. Gothseunquean.— Ibid. Gothsinquea.—Ibid. 
Kashanquash.— Ibid. Kashong.— Ibid. Kashon- 
quash.— Ibid. Kershong.— Ibid. Kushang.—Ibid. 
Shenawaga.— Ibid. 

Kash’s Village. A summer camp of a 
Stikine chief on Etolin id., Alaska; 40 
people were there in 1880.—Petroff in 
10th Census, Alaska, 32, 1884. 

Kashtata ( K’ac-ta'-tti,). A former Ta- 
kelma village on the s. side of Rogue r., 
above Leafcr. andGalice cr., Oreg.—Dor¬ 
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 235,1890. 

Kashtok ( Kac-t'6'k ). A former Chuma¬ 
shan village in the interior of Ventura co., 
Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo¬ 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kashtu ( Kac-tu). A former Chumashan 
village on the Piru, a tributary of Santa 
Clara r., Ventura co., Cal.—Henshaw, 
Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 


BULL. 30] 


KASHUNUK-KASKASKIA 


661 


Kashunuk. A Magemiut Eskimo village 
on the Kashunuk outlet of Yukon r., 
Alaska; pop. 125 in 1880, 232 in 1890, 208 
in 1900. 

Kashunahmiut.—lltli Census, Alaska, 111, 1893. 
Kashunok.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 54,1884. 
Kashunuk.—Nelson (1878) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kesuna.—12th Census Rep. 

Kashutuk.—A Ohnagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on an island of the Yukon delta, 
Alaska; pop. 18 in 1880. 

Kachutok.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Kashutuk.— Nelson (1878) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kushutuk.— Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Kasigianguit (‘ little freshwater seals. ’— 
Boas). An Eskimo village near Ameralik 
fjord, w. Greenland, lat. 64° 1CK.—Nansen, 
First Crossing of Greenland, ii, 376,1890. 

Kasihta. A former Lower Creek town 
on the e. bank of Chattahoochee r., in 
Chattahoochee co., Ga., 2£ m. below 
Kawita, its branch settlements extending 
along the w. side of the river. It was 
visited by I)e Soto in 1540, and is re¬ 
ferred to under the name Casiste by the 
Gentleman of Elvas as a great town. 
In 1799 it was considered the largest of 
the Lower Creek towns, containing, with 
its dependencies, 180 warriors and in 
1832 it had 620 families and 10 chiefs. 
Hawkins (Sketch, 58, 1843), in 1799, 
described a large conical mound, with 
the “old Cussetah town” near it, which 
afterward was settled by the Chickasaw. 
Apatai, now spelled Upatoie, was a branch 
village. The Kasihta people believed 
they were descended from the sun, and a 
curious migration legend, preserved by 
Von Reck, existed among them (see 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133-34, 
1884), from which it appears that the 
Kawita were originally the same people 
as those of Kasihta, and that they sepa¬ 
rated in very ancient times. Cusseta, a 
variant of Kasihta, is now the name of a 
town in Chambers co., Ala., and another 
is in Chattahoochee co., Ga. A district 
in the Creek Nation, Okla., was once 
called Cuseta. (a. s. g. ) 

Casawda. —Crawford (1836) in H. R. Doc. 274, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 24,1838. Caseitas.— Boudinot, Star 
in the West, 126, 1816. Casica. —Bareia (1693), 
Ensayo, 287, 1723. Casista. —Ibid.,333. Casiste. — 
Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., II, 155,1850. Cassetash.— White (1787) in Am. 
State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 21, 1832. Cassita. —Swan 
(1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 254, 1855. 
Cuseta. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 365,1854. Cusetahs. —U. S. 
Ind. Treat. (1779), 69,1837. Cusetas. —Lattrii,Carte 
des Etats-Unis, 1784. Cusheta^s. —Coxe, Carolana, 
23, 1741. Cusitas.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 738, 1786. 
Cusitash.— White(1787)in Am. State Pap.,Ind. Aff., 

i, 20, 1832. Cusseta.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 

ii, 180, 1888. Cussetahs —McGillivray (1787) in 
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 18, 1832. Cussetas.— 
Pickett, Hist. Ala., passim, 1851. Cussetau. —U. S. 
Ind. Treat. (1814), 162,1837. Cussetaw. —Census of 
1832 in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578,1854. Cus- 
se-tuh.— Hawkins(1799),Sketch,25,57,1848. Cussi- 
tahs.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 
262,1855. Cussito-\— Romans, Florida, I, 280, 1775. 
Cussutas. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816. 
Kacistas. —Milfort, M6moire, 118, 1802. Old Cuse- 
taw. —Woodward, Reminis., 14, 1859. TJsseta.— 
Bartram, Travels, 457, 1791. 


Kasilof. A Knaiakhotana village on 
the e. coast of Cook inlet, at the mouth 
of Kasilof r., Alaska. A settlement was 
planted there by the Russians in 1786, 
called St George. Pop. 31 in 1880; 117, 
in 7 houses, in 1890. 

Georgiefskaia.—Russian map cited by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 232, 1902. Kassilo.—Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. Kassilof.—Ibid., map. 
Kussilof.—Post route map, 1903. 

Kasispa ( kdsVs ‘a point’, pa locative: 
‘ at the point’). A Paloos village at Ains¬ 
worth, at the junction of Snake and 
Columbia rs., Wash. 

Cosispa.—Ross, Fur Hunters. I, 185, 1855. Ka- 
si'spa.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 735, 1896. 

Kaska. Given by Dawson (Rep. Geol. 
Surv. Can., 199 b, 1889) as a division of the 
Nahane, comprising the Achetotena 
(Etchareottine) and Dahotena (Etagot- 
tine) tribes. They are described as un¬ 
dersized and of poor physique, have the 
reputation of being timid, and are lazy 
and untrustworthy, but are comparatively 
prosperous, as their country yields good 
furs in abundance. According to Morice 
(Trans. Can. Inst., vii, 519, 1892-93), 
however, “Kaska is the name of no tribe 
or subtribe, but McDane cr. is called by 
the Nahane Kasha . . . and this is the 
real word which, corrupted into Cassiar 
by the whites, has since a score of years 
or more served to designate the whole 
mining region from the Coast range to 
the Rocky mts., along and particularly 
to the n. of the Stickeen r.” The name 
Kaska is not recognized by the Indians 
themselves, who form the third division 
of Morice’s classification of the Nahane. 
They number about 200. (a. f. c.) 

Kaskakoedi (‘people of Kaskek’). A 
division of the Raven phratry of the 
Tlingit, living at Wrangell, Alaska. 
They are said to have come from among 
the IVIasset Haida and to have received 
their name from a place (Kasq!e / k u ) 
where they camped during the migration. 

Kaas-ka-qua-tee.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 
1859. Kasq’ague'de.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
of Can., 25, 1889. Kasqlakue'di.—Swanton, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1904. Kassra-kuedi.—Krause, Tlin- 
kit Ind., 120, 1885. 

Kaskanak. A Kiatagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Kvichak r., where it flows from 
L. lliamna, Alaska; pop. 119 in 1880, 66 
in 1890. 

Kaskanakh.—Post route map, 1903. Kaskanek.— 
Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, map, 1880. Kaskinakh.— 
Ibid., 45. 

Kaskaskia (perhaps akin to kaskaska- 
hamw a , ‘ he scrapes it off by means of a tool. ’ 
The Foxes have always held the Peoria 
in low esteem, and in their traditions 
claim to have destroyed most of them on 
a rocky island in a river.—Wm. Jones). 
Once the leading tribe of the Illinois con¬ 
federacy, and perhaps rightly to be con¬ 
sidered as the elder brother of the group. 
Although the first knowledge of this con¬ 
federacy obtained by the whites related, 
in all probability, to the Peoria while 


662 


KASKASKIA 


[b. a. e. 


they yet resided on the Mississippi, it is 
probable that the references to them in 
the Jesuit Relations of 1670 and 1671, 
from the reports of Father Allouez, apply 
to the Kaskaskia on upper Illinois r. 
and possibly to some minor tribes or 
bands connected therewith whose names 
have not been preserved. Although it 
has been asserted that earlier visits than 
that of Marquette in 1673 were made to 
this people by the whites, there is no sat¬ 
isfactory evidence to justify this conclu¬ 
sion. Their chief village, which had the 
same name as that of the tribe, is sup¬ 
posed to have been situated about the 
present site of Utica, La Salle co., Ill. 
Marquette states that at the time of his 
first visit the village was composed of 74 
cabins. He returned again in the spring 
of 1674 and established the mission of 
Immaculate Conception among them. It 
appears that by this time the village had 
increased to somewhat more than a hun¬ 
dred cabins. Allouez, who followed as 
the next missionary, states that when he 
came to the place in 1677 the village con¬ 
tained 351 cabins, and that while the vil¬ 
lage formerly consisted of but one nation 
(tribe), at the time of his visit it was com¬ 
posed of 8 tribes or peoples, the addi¬ 
tional ones having come up from the 
neighborhood of the Mississippi. Al¬ 
though the known Peoria village was 
some distance away, it may be that at 
this time this tribe and the Moingwena 
resided at the Kaskaskia village. This is 
implied in an expression by Gravier, who 
speaks of the Mugulasha “forming a vil¬ 
lage with the Baiougoula [Bavogoula] as 
the Pioiiaroiia [Peoria] do with the Kas¬ 
kaskia.” This, however, would lead to 
the supposition, if the statement by Al¬ 
louez be accepted as correct, that there 
were other bands or tribes collected here 
at the time of his mission whose names 
have not survived. Possibly they may 
have been bands of the Mascoutin or the 
Miami. Kaskaskia was the village of the 
Illinois which La Salle reached about the 
close of Dec., 1679, on his first visit south¬ 
ward from the lakes. He found it unoc¬ 
cupied, however, the inhabitants being 
on a hunting expedition. The French 
mission was maintained at this place un¬ 
der Fathers Rasies, Gravier, Binneteau, 
Pinet, and Marest, until about the close 
of 1700. At that time the Kaskaskia, in¬ 
fluenced by a desire to join the French in 
Louisiana, resolved to separate from their 
brethren and migrate to the lower Missis¬ 
sippi. Gravier was much opposed to this 
movement, and although he arrived on 
the ground too late to prevent their depar¬ 
ture, he was successful in checking the 
blow which the indignant Peoria and 
Moingwena were about to inflict on them. 
It was also through his influence that 


they were induced to halt at the mouth 
of Kaskaskia r., where they made their 
home, on or near the site of the present 
town of Kaskaskia, Randolph co., Ill., 
until their removal w. of the Mississippi 
under the treaty of Oct. 27, 1832. Ac¬ 
cording to Hutchins, in 1764 the Kaskaskia 
numbered 600, but he gives the number in 
1778 as 210 individuals, including 60 war¬ 
riors. They were then in a village about 
3 m. n. of the present town of Kaskaskia, 
greatly degenerated and debauched. 
The tribe participated in the treaties of 
Greenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 1795, and Ft 
Wayne, Ind., June 7, 1803, made by the 
tribes of the n. w. with Anthony Wayne 
and William H. Harrison. In the treaty 
of Aug. 13,1803, at Vincennes, lnd., it is 
stated that the tribe constitutes “the re¬ 
mains of and rightfully represents all the 
tribes of the Illinois Indians, originally 
called the Kaskaskia, Mitchigamia, Ca- 
hokia, and Tamaroi.” By this treaty 
they were taken under the immediate care 
and patronage of the United States and 
promised protection against the other In¬ 
dians. By treaty made at Castor Hill, 
Mo., Oct. 27,1832, they ceded to the United 
States all their lands e. of the Mississippi 
except a single tract reserved to Ellen 
Ducoigne, the daughter of their late chief. 
Previous to this, however, the remnants 
of the various tribes of the Illinois con¬ 
federacy had consolidated with the Kas¬ 
kaskia and Peoria. By the treaty of 
Washington, May 30, 1854, the consoli¬ 
dated tribes ceded to the United States 
part of the tracts held by them under the 
treaty of 1832, above mentioned, and un¬ 
der the treaty with the Piankashaw r and 
Wea, Oct. 29, 1832, reserving 160 acres for 
each member of the tribe and 10 sections 
as a tribal reserve. By the treaty of 
Washington, Feb. 23, 1867, land was as¬ 
signed them in the n. e. corner of Indian 
Ter. 

The consolidated bands, including also 
the remnant of the Wea and Piankashaw 
and now known officially as Peoria, num¬ 
bered altogether in 1905 only 195, hardly 
one of whom was of pure Indian blood. 

Their totem or crest was an arrow 
notched at the feather, or two arrows 
supporting each other like a St Andrew’s 
cross. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Cacachias.—LaSalle (1682)in Margry, D6c., u,96, 
1877. Carcarilica.—Hennepin, New Discov., 310, 
1698 (? an Illinois division about 1680). Cas.—Mar- 
ain (1753) in Margry, D 6 c., VI, 654, 1886. Casca- 
chias—Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doc. Col.Hist., 
ix, 891,1855. Cascacia.—La Salle (1682) in Margry, 
D6c., I, 508, 1875. Cascakias.—La Harpe (1719), 
ibid., vi, 310, 1886. Cascaqu as.—Giissefeld, map, 
1784. Cascaschia.—La Salle (1681) in Margry, D6c., 

II, 134, 1877. Cascaskias.—Perkins and Peck, An- 
nalsoftheWest,55,1850. Cascasquia.—Joutel(1687) 
in Margry, D 6 c., in, 476, 1878. Caskaguias.—De 
l’lsle map ( ca . 1710) in Neill, Minn., 1858. Caska- 
quias.—Doc. of 1748 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 142, 
1858. Casquasquia.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., 

III , 481,1878. Casquiars.—Writer in Smith, Bou- 


BULL. 301 


KAS-LANAS 


KATCHADt 


663 


quet Exped., 66, 1766. Casquias. —Smith, ibid. 
Huskhuskeys. —Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am. 
Jour. Geol., 272, 1831. Kacaskias. —La Harpe 
(1719) in Margry, D6c., vr, 309, 1886. Kachkach- 
kia.— Allouez (1677) in Shea, Miss. Val., 74, 1852. 
Kachkaska.— Marquette map (ca. 1678) in Shea, 
ibid. Kakaskigi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS., B. A. 
E., 1879 (Shawnee name, sing., Kakaski). Ka- 
kasky. —Imlay, West. Ter., 364,1797. Karhaski.— 
Loskiel (1794) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hud¬ 
son r., 336, 1872. Karkadia. —Perkins and Peck, 
Annals of the West, 64, 1850. Kasgresquios.— Bu¬ 
chanan, N. Am. Inds., 155, 1824. Kaskaisas. — 
Doc. of 1717 inN. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 876, 1855. 
Kaskaiskas.— Jeft'erys, French Dorns., pt. 1, map, 
1761. Kaskakias. —Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 1056,1855. Kaskakies.— Vau- 
dreuil (1760), ibid., x, 1092, 1858. Kaskascia.— La 
Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c., n, 121, 1877. Kas- 
kasia. —Burton, City of the Saints, 117,1861. Kas- 
kaskia. —La Salle (1682) in Margry, Dec., ii, 201, 
1877. Kaskaskians. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1795), 184, 
1873. Kaskaskies. —Greenville treaty (1795) in 
Harris, Tour, 241, 1805. Kaskasquia.— Charlevoix 
(1724) in Schoolcraft, Travels, 136, 1821. Kask- 
kasies. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. 
Kasqui. —Coxe, Carolana, 13, 1741 (identical?). 
Kasquias.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 351, 1816. 
Kasquuasquias. —Smyth, Tour in U.S.,i, 347, 1784. 
Keskeskias. —Doc. of 1764 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VII, 641,1856. Kiskuskias. —Smyth, Tour in U. S., 
II, 247, 1784 (place name). Kuilka.— Hennepin, 
New Discov. (1698), II, 667, 1903. Kuskeiskees.— 
Johnson (1767) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 966, 
1856. Kuskuske. —Adair, Am. Inds., 371, 1775. 
Quasquens. —Iberville(ca. 1701) in Margry,D6c.,iv, 
544,1880. Roinsac. —Memoir of 1718 in N.Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 891, 1855 (village). Rouinsac. — 
Ibid., 886 (said in note to be Kaskaskia village). 
Tchatchakigouas. —La Salle (1679-81) in Margry, 
D^c., 1,481, 1877. 

Kas-lanas ( Q.’as la'ncis , ‘pitch-town 
people ’). A family of the Raven clan of 
the Haida. They inhabited the w. coast 
of Moresby id., Queen Charlotte group, 
Brit. Col., had no crests like the other 
Haida divisions, and were regarded as 
barbarous by the latter. Their principal 
town was in Tasoo harbor.—Swan ton, 
Cont. Haida, 270, 1905. 

Kaslukug. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kasnatchin. A Knaiakhotana village 
at Anchor pt., Kenai penin., Alaska; pop. 
29 in 1880. 

Kasnatchin.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 75, 1902. 
Laida.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. 
Laidennoj.— Baker, op. cit. (Russian name: ‘ icy’). 

Kaso ( Kd'so ). A former Chumashan 
village at Canada del Diablo, Ventura 
co., Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kasoongkta. A tribe or band conquered 
by the Iroquois and settled among the 
Onondaga. — Clark, Onondaga, i, 305, 
1849. 

Kassiank. A Togiagamiut village on 
Togiak r., Alaska, having two dance 
houses; pop. 615 in 1880, 50 in 1890. 

Kassiachamiut. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. Kassianmute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alas¬ 
ka, 17, 1884. 

Kassigiakdjuak ( Qassigiaqdjuaq) . A 
winter settlement of Nugumiut Eskimo 
on Frobisher bay, s. e. Baffin land.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kassovo (from Gashowu , pi. of Gashwu- 
sha. —Kroeber). A Yokuts tribe for¬ 


merly living on Dry cr., Fresno co., Cal. 
Several families of survivors now live in 
Winchell gulch, near Pollasky. 

Car-soos.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., 1st sess., 23,1852. Cas-sans.—Barbour (1852) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 252,1853. 
Cas-soes.—McKee et al. in Ind. Aff. Rep., 223, 1851. 
Casson.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. 
Cassoos.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d 
Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Cosos.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, May 18,1863 (same?). Costrowers.—Hen¬ 
ley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 512,1854. Coswas.—Lewis in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 1857, 399, 1858. Gashowu.—A. L. 
Kroeber, ini’n, 1906 (correct form; p\.Gashwusha). 
Gosh'-sho-o.—Merriam in Science, xix, 915, June 
15,1904. Kash-a-woosh-ah.—Ibid., 916 (Wiksachi 
name). Kas-so'-vo.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth- 
nol., ill, 370, 1877. Kosh-sho'-o.—Merriam, op. cit. 

Kasta ( Qld'sta ). A legendary Haida 
town on Copper bay, Moresby id., Queen 
Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was named 
for the creek (Skidegate cr.), which ran 
near it, and was occupied by the Daiyuahl- 
lanas.—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Kastitchewanuk. A Cree band on Al¬ 
bany r. of Hudson bay in 1770.—Hutch¬ 
ins (1770) in Richardson, Arctic Exped., 
ii, 37, 1851. 

Kata (K’dt'ci, ‘biters,’ referring to the 
Arikara). A tribal division of the Kiowa; 
so called, not because of Arikara origin, 
but because they were more intimate with 
that tribe in trade and otherwise when the 
Kiowa lived in the N.—Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1079, 1896. 

Katagemane ( Kd-ta'-ge-md-ne , ‘starv¬ 
ing’). Given by Morgan (Anc. Soc., 171, 
1877) as a division of the Piegan tribe of 
the Siksika, q. v. 

Katagkak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Innoko r., above its junction with 
the Yukon, Alaska. 

Ighelkostlende.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 
5th s., xxi, map, 1850. Katagkag-mioute.—Ibid. 

Katagwadi ( KAtagwA' di ). A Tlingit 
division formerly resident at Sitka, Alas¬ 
ka, but now almost extinct. (j. n. s.) 

Katahuac. A former Chumashan vil lage 
connected with Santa Ines mission, Santa 
Barbara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Katamoonchink (‘hazelnut grove.’ — 
Lewis). The Indian name of the site of 
Whiteland, Chester co., Pa., and perhaps 
also of a Delaware (?) village formerly 
near West Whiteland. Mentioned by 
Lewis (1824) in Day, Penn., 222, 1843. 

Katana {Kid'tana). A former Haida 
town on Louise id., . Queen Charlotte 
group, Brit. Col., in possession of the 
Kagials-kegawai.—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 
279, 1905. 

Katchadi (people of Katch, a creek on 
Admiralty id.). A Tlingit division at 
Kake and Wrangell, Alaska. Some of 
them intermarried with the Athapascans 
on the upper Stikine. 

Kaadg ett ee.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 
1855 (after Kane; misprint). Kaady-ett-ee.—Kane, 
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Katc’a'de.—Boas, 
Fifth Rep. N.W.Tribes Can., 25,1889. Katschadi.— 
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 120,1885. Qa'tcadi.—Swan- 
ton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 


664 


KATCH ANA AR-KATMAI 


[b. a. e. 


Katchanaak ( QoXcxa' na-ak /, ‘Hip 
lake’). The native name for the Tlingit 
town now known as Wrangell, the winter 
town of the Stikine Indians of Alaska. 
It was so named because the mountain 
behind it resembles a human hip and the 
inner harbor is so shut in as to appear like 
a lake. Indian pop. 228 in 1890; total 
population (white and Indian) 868 in 
1900. (j.e.s.) 

Katearas. One of the principal villages 
of the Tuscarora in 1669, “a place of great 
Indian trade and commerce ’ ’; situated on 
a s. branch of Roanoke r., N. C. 

Katearas.— Lederer (1672), Discov., 22, 1902. Ka- 
teras.—Ibid., map. 

Katernuna (perhaps jargon ‘ Kater 
land’). A Talirpingmiut Eskimo village 
of the Okomiut tribe on Cumberland sd., 
Baffin land.—Howgate, Cruise of Flor¬ 
ence, 84, 1879. 

Kathio. A large village of the eastern 
Dakota, the Mdewakanton, Wahpekute, 
Sisseton, and Wahpeton, who were gath¬ 
ered about Mille Lac in the 17th and 18th 
centuries. Brower (Kathio, 33,1901) lo¬ 
cates the village at the outlet of Mille Lac, 
Minn., and thinks it was a Mdewakanton 
settlement. It was visited in 1659 by 
Radisson; in 1679 by Du Luth, who speaks 
of it as a great village; and by Hennepin 
in 1680. According to Warren (Hist. Ojib- 
ways, 160, 1885) it was destroyed by the 
Chippewa about 1750. See Du Luth in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 795, 1855. 

Kathlaram. A body of Salish formerly 
under Fraser superintendency, British 
Columbia; now no longer officially re¬ 
ported. 

Kathlaram.—Canadian Ind. Aff., 79, 1878. Kath- 
larem.—Ibid., 138, 1879. 

Katimin. A Karok village in n. w. Cal. , 
on the e. bank of Klamath r., a mile 
above the mouth of the Salmon, opposite 
Ishipishi. It was believed by the Karok 
to be the center of the world, contained 
a sacred house and sweat-house, and was 
the scene of the deer-skin dance and of 
an annual ceremony called “making the 
world.” The village was burned by the 
whites in 1852. 

Sche-woh. —Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, hi, 151, 1853. Se-wah.—McKee (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec. sess.. 164, 1853. 
Shegwuu.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (Yurok 
name). Si-wahs.—McKee, op. cit., 211. 

Katipiara. A Karok village of two houses 
on the s. bank of Klamath r., Cal., nearly 
opposite Orleans Bar; described by Gibbs 
in 1852. See Tsana. 

Kah-tee-pee-rah.—Gibbs, MS. Miscel., B. A. E., 
1852. Katipiara.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1904. 

Katiru ( Ka-ti'-ru ). One of the 4 divi¬ 
sions of the main body of the Shasta, liv¬ 
ing in Klamath valley, from Seiad valley 
to Happy Camp, n. Cal. (r. b. d. ) 

Katkaayi (‘island people’, from an 
island at the mouth of Alsek r.). A 
Tlingit division at Sitka belonging to the 
Raven phratry. 


Chratka-ari. — Krause, Tlinket Ind., 118, 1885. 
QlA'tkaayi—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 

Katkwaahltu (‘town on the point of a 
hill’). A Tlingit town about 6m. above 
the mouth of Chilkat r., Alaska; pop. 
125 in 1880. 

Katkwaltu.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 100, 1885. Kut- 
kwutlu.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 31,1884. 
Q,atq!wa'altu'.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E.,1904. 

Katlagulak ( Kha'gulaq ). AChinookan 
tribe formerly living on the s. bank of 
Columbia r., in Columbia co., Oreg., 2 
m. below Rainier.—Boas, Kathlamet 
Texts, 6, 1901. 

Katlaminimin. A Chinookan tribe for¬ 
merly occupying the s. end of Sauvies id., 
Multnomah co., Oreg. Their principal 
village was .on the s. w. side of the island, 
in Willamette r. In 1806 Lewis and Clark 
estimated their number at 280 in 12 
houses. In 1850 they were said by Lane 
to be associated with the Cathlacumup 
and Namoit. 

Cathlaminimims.—Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., x, 
23, 1821. G'athlanamenamens.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. 
War, 368,1822. Cathlanaminim.—Franch6re,Narr., 
135,1854. Cathlanaminimins.—Stuart, op. cit., 115. 
Clam-nah-min-na-mun.—Lewis and Clark Exped., 
Couesed.,913, note, 1893. Clanaminamums.—Lewis 
and Clark Exped., II, 212,1814. Clanaminanums. — 
Ibid., II, 268,1817. Clannahminamun.—Ibid., II, 226, 
1814. Clan-nar-min-a-mon’s.—Clark (1806) in Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, IV, 220,1905. Clannarmini- 
muns.—Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Clan-nar-min- 
na-mon.—Clark (1806) in Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, iv, 216, 1905. Clannarminnamuns.—Lewis 
and Clark Exped., 11,473,1814. Kathlaminimim.— 
Framboise quoted byGairdnerin Jour. Geog. Soc. 
Lond., xi, 255, 1841. Namanamin.—Lane in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 172,1850. Naman- 
anim.—Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 161,1850. 

Katlamoik. Said by Boas (Kathlamet 
Texts, 6, 1901) to be a Chinookan tribe 
formerly living at the site of the present 
town of Rainier, Columbia co., Oreg., 
but later (inf’n, 1904) given as the Chi¬ 
nook name of the locality of the modern 
Rainier, and of Rainier itself. 

GaLia'moix. —Boas, inf’n, 1904. KLa'moix.— 

Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 6,1901. 

Katlany’s Village. A summer camp of 
one of the Taku chiefs of the Tlingit 
named Qala'ni; 106 people were there in 
1880.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32, 
1884. 

Katlian. The principal chief at Sitka, 
Alaska, at the time it was settled by the 
Russians under Baranoff. Also called 
Kotlian. The first fort established by 
Baranoff in 1799 was destroyed by the 
natives under Katlian’s leadership, and 
they afterward entrenched themselves so 
strongly in a palisaded fort reinforced by 
stone that the Russians, returning 5 years 
later, had great difficulty in dislodging 
them. The name is that usually borne 
by the chief of the Kiksadi clan of the 
Tlingit. (j. r. s.) 

Katluchtna (‘lovers of glass beads’). 
A Knaiakhotanaclan.—Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., i, 407, 1851. 

Katmai. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil- 


BULL. 301 


KATO-KAULDAW 


665 


lage on the s. e. coast of Alaska penin.; 
pop. 218 in 1880, 132 in 1890.—Petroff in 
10th Census, Alaska, 28, 1884. 

Kato. A Kuneste tribe or band for¬ 
merly living in Cahto and Long valleys, 
Mendocino co., Cal. These were prob¬ 
ably the people mentioned by McKee as 
occupying the second large valley of Eel 
r., numbering about 500 in 1851, and dif¬ 
fering in language from the Porno, a fact 
which has long been lost sight of. 
Powers divides them into Kai Porno, 
Kastel Porno, and Kato Porno, and gives 
a Kulanapan vocabulary. They have 
recently been found to belong to the 
Athapascan stock, and closely related to 
the Wailaki, although they resemble the 
Porno in culture. (p. e. g. ) 

Batemdaikai. — Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 77,1856. Batem-da-kai-ee. —Gibbsin School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, III, 434,1853. Ba-tem-da-kaii. — 
Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., nr, 491, 1877. 
Batin-da-kia. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 240, 1851. Cabadi- 
lapo.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.4, 32d Cong., 
spec. sess., 148,1853. Cahto Pomo. —Powers in Over¬ 
land Mo., ix, 500, 1872. Kai Po-mo.— Powers in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 148, 1877. Ka-to-Po-mo. — 
Ibid., 150. Ki-Pomas.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 119, 
1865. Laleshiknom. —A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 
(Yuki name). Tlokeang. —Kroeber, Coast Yuki 
MS., Univ. Cal. (own name). 

Katomemetunne (‘ people by the deep 
water’). A former village of the Mish- 
ikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., Oreg. 
Ka'-to-me'-me }un'ne. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, III, 232, 1890 ; 

Katsalgi (katsci ‘panther’, algi ‘peo- 

S le’). A Creek elan. 

at'-chu. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161,1877 (‘Tiger’). 
Katsalgi. —Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 
1884. 

Katsey. A Cowichan tribe occupying 
the villages of Seltsas and Shuwalethet, 
on Pitt lake and river emptying into the 
lower Fraser, Brit. Col.; pop. 79 in 1904. 
Kaitze. —Brit. Adm. Chart, no. 1917. Katezie. — 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 79. Katsey. —Can. Ind. 
Rep. 1901, pt. 2, 158. K e'etse. —Boas in Rep. 
64th Meeting Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894. Ke'tsi. — 
Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can., 54, 1902. 

Katshikotin. A part of the Hankutchin 
living on Yukon r., a short distance be¬ 
low Fortymile cr., near the Yukon- Alaska 
boundary. 

Ka-tshik-otin.— Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can. 
for 1888, 202b, 1889. Klat-ol-klin.—Schwatka, 
Rep. on Alaska, 86, 1885 (name given by Russian 
half-breeds). 

Katstayot ( Kat-stci'-yot ). A former 
Chumashan village between Pt Concep¬ 
tion and Santa Barbara, Cal., at a locality 
now called Santa Anita.—Henshaw, Bue- 
naventurg, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kattak. A former Kaniagmiut village 
on Afognak id., e. of Afognak, Alaska. 
Katak.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kattag- 
miut.— Russ.-Am. map (1849) quoted by Baker, 
ibid. Kattagmjut. —Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 
map, 1855. 

Katzik. Two Indian settlements on the 
s. bank of lower Fraser r., below Sumass 
lake, Brit. Col. (Brit. Col. map, Ind. 
Aff., Victoria, 1872). Perhaps the name 
refers to the Katsey tribe. 

Katzimo ( Ka-tzV-mo ). The Keresan 
name of a precipitous mesa rising 430 ft 


above the basin of Acoma, and about 3 
m. n. e. of the latter pueblo, in Valencia 
co., N. Mex. According to tradition its 
summit was the site of one of several pre¬ 
historic villages which the Acoma people 
successively occupied during their south¬ 
westerly movement from the mythic Shi- 
papu in the indelinite N. The tradition 
relates that during a storm a part of the 
rock fell and some of the inhabitants, 
cut off from the valley beneath, perished. 
The site was henceforth abandoned, the 
survivors moving to another mesa on the 
summit of which they erected the pres¬ 
ent Acoma pueblo (q. v.). Katzimo mesa 
is inaccessible by ordinary means, but it 
was scaled in 1897 by a party representing 
the Bureau of American Ethnology and 
evidences of its former occupancy ob¬ 
served, thus verifying the native tradi¬ 
tion. See Bandelier in Century Cyclop, 
of Names, 1894; Hodge (1) in Century 
Mag., lvi, 15, May, 1898, (2) in Am. An- 
throp., Sept. 1897, and the references 
noted below. (f. w. h.) 

Enchanted Mesa.— Lummis, New Mexico David, 
39, 1891. Katzim-a. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Pap., IV, 314, 1892. Mesa Encantada. —Pullen in 
Harper’s Weekly, 594, Aug. 2, 1890. Rock of Kat¬ 
zimo. —Lummis, op. cit., 40. 

Kau. The Corn clan of the Patki 
(Water House) phratry of the Hopi. 
Ka-ah. —Bourke, Snake Dance, 117,1884. Ka'i-e.— 
Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. Kaii wih- 
wu, —Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 1901 {win- 
wH, = ‘clan’). Ka'-ii wiin-wu. —Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop,, vn, 402, 1894. 

Kaudjukdjuak ( Qaudjuqdjuclq) . A win¬ 
ter settlement of the Akudnirmiut Es¬ 
kimo between Frobisher bay and Cum¬ 
berland sd., Baffin land.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kaughii. A former Chumashan village 
at La Canada del Corral, about 22 m. from 
Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Ka-h‘o'. —Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. Kaughii. —Father Timeno (1856) 
quoted by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. 

Kauhuk (‘high place’). A former 
Alsea village on the s. side of Alsea r., 
Oreg.; noted by Lewis and Clark as con¬ 
taining 400 inhabitants in 1806, and as 
existing on the coast. 

Kahuncle. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, 473,1814. 
Kahunkle.— Ibid., II, 188, 1814. Ka-hun-kle’s — 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 117, 1905. Kau'- 
huk. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 230, 1890. 

Kaukhwan. A former Alsea village on 
the n. side of Alsea r., Oreg., at Beaver cr. 
Kau'-qwan. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
230, 1890. 

Kauldaw. The Kitksan division and 
town lying farthest inland toward the 
headwaters of Skeena r., under the Ba¬ 
bble and Skeena River agency, Brit. Col.; 
pop. 37 in 1904. 

Culdoah.— Horetzky, Canada on Pac., 212, 1874. 
Gal-doe.— Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., 431,1896. Gal Doe.— 
Ibid., 252, 1891. Gol-doe.— Ibid., 280, 1894. Kal- 
doe.— Ibid., 415, 1898. Kaul-daw.— Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., XIX, 278, 1897. Kuldo.— Brit. Col. map, 
1872. Kuldoe.— Can. Ind. Aff., pt. II, 160, 1901. 
Kuldos.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 
114 b,1884. 


666 


KATJMAUANGMIUT-KAWAIKA 


[b. a. e. 


Kaumauangmiut (from the lake of the 
same name, around which they chiefly 
dwell). An Eskimo tribe in s. e. Baffin 
land, probably closely related to the 
Nugumiut. 

Karmowong. —Hall, Arctic Researches, 294, 1865. 
Kaumanang. —Boas in Deutsche Geog. Blatt.,vm, 
32, 1885 (misprint). K’aumauangmiut. —Boas in 
Petermanns Mitt., no. 80, 70, 1885. Quaumauang- 
miut.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 421, 1888. 

Kaunaumeek. A former Stockbridge vil¬ 
lage in Rensselaerco. (?), N. Y., abouthalf- 
wav between Albany and Stockbridge, 
Mass., to which latter place the inhabit¬ 
ants removed in 1744.—Brainerd ( ca > 
1745) quoted bv Ruttenber, Tribes Hud- 
son R., 198, 1872. 

Kautas. A Ivoyukukhotana village on 
Koyukuk r., Alaska, with 10 inhabitants 
in 1885. 

Cawtaskakat. —Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 141, 1887. 

Kauten ( Kau'ten ). A Squawmish vil¬ 
lage community on the right bank of 
Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in 
Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kauweh. An unidentified village on 
Klamath r., Cal., below its junction with 
the Trinity, and therefore in Yurok ter¬ 
ritory.—McKee (1851) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, hi, 138, 1853. 

Kaveazruk. A Ivaviagmiut village at 
Port Clarence, Alaska.—Eleventh Census, 
Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Kaviagmiut. An Eskimo tribe occupy¬ 
ing the s. part of Kaviak penin., Alaska, 
from Norton bay w. Many winter on the 
e. shore of Norton sd. Dali includes the 
Kinugumiut, whose lawless life and enter¬ 
prise have been copied by the Kaviagmiut 
remaining in their old home. This was 
once a populous country, but the extermi¬ 
nation of the arctic hare and the marmot, 
the disappearance of the reindeer, and the 
raids of the Kinugumiut have depopu¬ 
lated the peninsula and caused the inhab¬ 
itants to migrate to other parts of arctic 
Alaska and become merged in other 
tribes. Local subdivisions of the exist¬ 
ing Kaviagmiut, who numbered 427 in 
1890, are as follows: Aziagmiut, of Sledge 
id.; Kaviazagmiut, at the head of Port 
Clarence; Kniktagemiut, of Golofnin 
bay, and Ukivogmiut, of King id. Their 
villages are Aiacheruk, Akpaliut, Anelo, 
Anlik, Atnuk, Ayak, Aziak, Chaik, Chain- 
ruk, Chinik, Chiukak, Iknetuk, Imokte- 
gokshuk, Kachegaret, Kalulek, Kaveaz¬ 
ruk, Kaviak, Kogluk, Kovogzruk, 
Metukatoak, Netsekawik, Niktak, Okino- 
yoktokawik, Opiktulik, Perebluk, Seni- 
kave, Shinnapago, Siningmon, Sinuk, 
Sitnazuak, Sunvalluk, Takchuk, Tubuk- 
tulik, Uinuk, Ukivak, Ukodliut, and 
Ukviktulik. 

Anligmuts.— Holmbergquoted by Dali, Alaska,408, 
1870. Anlygmiiten.— Wrangell, Ethnog. Nach.,122, 
1839. Kavea. — Kelly, Arct. Eskimo, 9, 1890. 
Kaveaks. —Whymper, Trav. in Alaska, 143, 1868. 
Kaverong Mutes. —Kelly, Arct. Eskimo, chart, 1890. 
K.aviacks.— Raymond in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 591, 


1870. Kaviagmut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A.E., 
map, 1899. Kaviagmuts.—Dali, Alaska, 408, 1870. 
Kaviagmyut.—Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 178, 
1894. Kaviaks.—Dali in Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., IV, 
35, 1869. 

Kaviak. A Kaviagmiut village s. e. of 
Port Clarence, Alaska; pop. 200 in 1880.— 
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kaviazagmiut. A subdivision of the 
Kaviagmiut, q. v. 

Kaviagamute.—Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Kaviazagamute — Ibid., 11. Kaviaza'gemut.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, map, 1887. 

Kavinish. A former Kawia village in 
Coahuila valley, Riverside co., Cal. 

Ka-vi-nish.—Barrows, Ethno.-Bot. Coahuillalnd., 
34, 1900. Indian Wells.—Ibid. 

Kawa ( Kdwct , ‘eel spring’). A Modoc 
camp at Yaneks, on Sprague r.,s. Oreg. 

Kaua.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., II, pt. 1, 
31; pt, 2, 122, 1890. Kawa.—Ibid. ' 

Kawaibatunya ( Ka-wai-ba-tun-a ) . Given 
as the Watermelon clan of the Patki 
(Cloud) phratry|of the Hopi.—Stephen 
in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 

Kawaiisu. The most westerly subdivi¬ 
sion of the Ute-Chemehuevi linguistic di¬ 
vision of the Shoshonean family. They 
occupy an isolated area on both sides of 
the Tehachapi mts., Cal., but particularly 
the w. side around Paiute mts., and the 
valleys of Walker basin and Caliente and 
Kelso crs. as far s. as Tehachapi. 

Cobajais.—Garc6s (1776), Diary, 489,1900. Cobaji.— 
Ibid., 304, 445. Covaji.—Keane in Stanford, 
Compend., 510, 1878. Kah-wis'-sah.—Merriamin 
Science, XIX, 916, June 15,1904. Kawaiisu.—Kroe- 
ber, inf’n, 1905 (Yokuts name). Ka-wi'-a-suh.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 393, 1877 (Yo¬ 
kuts name). Kawishm.—Kroeber. inf’n, 1905 (Tu- 
batulabal name). Kow-a'-sah.—Merriam, op. cit. 
Kubakhye.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (Mohave name). 
Newoo'-ah.—Merriam,op.cit.(= ‘people’). Noches 
Colteches.—Carets, op. cit., 295, 304 (so called by 
Mariposa people). Ta-hi-cha-pa-han-na.—Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 393, 1877 (division 
around mtns. of same name). Ta-hichp'.—Ibid, 
(so called by Kern r. people). 

Kawaika. A ruined pueblo, attributed 
by the Hopi to the Kawaika people, a 
name also applied by them to the pueblo 
of Laguna, N. Mex., and by the Lagunas 
themselves to designate their village; 
situated a short distance w. of the Keam’s 
Canyon road, on the top of a mesa be¬ 
tween two gorges tributary to Jeditoh 
valley, in the Hopi country, n. e. Ari¬ 
zona. The ruin was surveyed and first 
described by V. Mindeleff in 1885, under 
the name Mishiptonga, apparently 
through confusion with Nesheptanga, 
another ruin near by. The ruin has been 
largely rifled of its art remains by Navaho 
diggers and the results mostly lost to 
science, but systematic excavation was 
conducted in the undisturbed portion by 
the National Museum in 1901. See Min¬ 
deleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 52, pi. 9, 
1891; Mooney in Am. Anthrop., July, 
1893; Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 590, 
622, 1898; Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1901, 339, 1903. 

Kawaika,—Mooney, op. cit. Kawaiokuh.—Hough 
op. cit. Mishiptonga,—Mindeleff, op. cit. 


BULL. 30] 


KAWAIKI-KAWCHODINNE 


667 


Kawaiki (Hitchiti: oki ‘water’, awdiki 
‘hauling’, ‘carrying’ [place]: ‘water- 
carrying place ’). A former Lower Creek 
town at the junction of the present Cowi- 
kee cr. and Chattahoochee r., in the n. e. 
corner of Barbour co., Ala. It had 45 
heads of families in 1833. (a. s. g.) 

Cow ye ka.— Census of 1833 in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, I v, 578, 1854. Kawaiki. —Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., I, 134,1884. 

Kawanunyi ( Kdwantinyt, from kdwdnd 
‘duck’, yi locative: ‘duck place’). A 
former Cherokee settlement about the 
present Ducktown, Polk co., s. e. Tennes¬ 
see. (j. M.) 

Cowanneh.— Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1887. 
Duck-town. —Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce, ibid., 
144. 

Kawarakish ( Ka-wa-ra'-Tdsh ). One of 
the two divisions of the Pitahauerat, or 
Tapaje Pawnee, the other being the Pita¬ 
hauerat proper.—Grinnell, Pawnee Hero 
Stories, 241, 1889. 

Kawas ( K.'d'was , ‘ fish eggs ’). A subdi¬ 
vision of theStustas, an important family 
of the Eagle clan of the Haida. One 
of their chiefs is said to have been 
blown across to the Stikine country, 
where he became a chief among the 
Stikine. (j. r. s.) 

K’a'was. —Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 
22, 1898. Kla'was. —Swanton, Cont., Haida, 275, 
1905. Kouas. —Harrison in I’roc. and Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 1895. 

Kawchodinne (ka ‘hare’, cho ‘great’, din- 
ne‘ people’: ‘people of the great hares’). 
An Athapascan tribe dwelling n. of 
Great Bear lake, Mackenzie Ter., Canada, 
on Mackenzie r., the lakes e. of it, and An¬ 
derson r. Mackenzie (Vov., i, 206, 1802) 
said they were a small tribe residing on 
Peace r., who spoke the language of the 
Chipewyan and derived their name from 
the Arctic hare, their chief means of sup¬ 
port. At another time (Mass. Hist. Coll., 
ii, 43, 1814) he placed them on Porcupine 
r., Alaska. Franklin (Journ. to Polar Sea, 
261, 1824) placed them immediately n. 
of the Thlingchadinne on the n. side of 
the outlet of Bear lake. Back (Journal, 
497, 1833-35) located them on Mackenzie 
r. as far n. as 68°. Richardson (Arct. 
Exped., ii, 3,1851) gave their habitat as 
the banks of Mackenzie r. from Slave lake 
downward. Hind (Lab. Penin., n, 261, 
1863) said they resorted to Ft Norman and 
Ft Good Hope on the Mackenzie, and also 
to Ft Yukon, Alaska. Ross( MS.,B. A. E.) 
said they resided in 1859 in the country 
surrounding Ft Good Hope on Mackenzie 
r., extending beyond the Arctic circle, 
where they came in contact with the 
Kutchin, with whom by intermarriage 
they have formed the tribe of Bastard 
Loucheux (Nellagottine). Petitot (Diet. 
DembDindji6, xx, 1876) said the Kawcho¬ 
dinne lived on the lower Mackenzie from 
Ft Norman to the Arctic ocean. They 
are described as a thickset people, who 
subsist partly on fish and reindeer, but 


obtain their clothing and most of their 
food from the hares that abound in their 
country. Their language differs little 
from that of the Etehareottine, while 
their style of dress and their customs are 
the same, although through long inter¬ 
course with the traders, for whom they 
have great respect, most of the old cus¬ 
toms and beliefs of the tribe have become 
extinct. They are on friendly terms 
with the Eskimo. The Kawchodinne 
have a legend of the formation of the earth 
by the muskrat and the beaver. The dead 
are deposited in a rude cage built above 
ground, the body being wrapped in a 
blanket or a moose skin; the property of 
relatives is destroyed, and their hair is cut 
as a sign of mourning. When the supply 
of hares becomes exhausted, as it fre¬ 
quently does, they believe these mount 
to the sky by means of the trees and re¬ 
turn in the same way when they reap¬ 
pear. Polygamy is now rare. They are 
a peaceable tribe, contrasting with their 
Kutchin neighbors. In personal combat 
they grasp each other by their hair, which 
they twist round and round until one of 
the contestants falls to the ground. They 
are not so numerous as formerly, a great 
many having died from starvation in 1841, 
at which time numerous acts of cannibal¬ 
ism are said to have occurred. In 1858 
Ross (MS., B. A. E.) gave the population 
as 467; 291 males, 176 females. Of these 
103 resorted to Ft Norman and 364 to Ft 
Good Hope. Petitot (Diet. Dene-Dindjie, 
xx, 1876) arranged them in five subdivi¬ 
sions: Nigottine, Katagottine, Katchogot- 
tine, Satchotugottine, and Nellagottine. 
In another list (Bull. Soc. Geog. Paris, 
1875) instead of Nigottine he has Etat- 
chogottine and Chintagottine. In a later 
grouping (Autour du lac des Esclaves, 362, 
1891) Petitot identifies Katagottine with 
Chintagottine, suppresses Satchotugot¬ 
tine, and adds Kfwetragottine. 

Dene. —Petitot, Hare MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869. 
Dene Peaux-de-Lievre. —Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 289, 1891. Harefoot Indians. —Chappell, 
Hudson Bay, 166, 1817. Hare Indians.— Mac¬ 
kenzie, Voy., I, 206, 1802. Hareskins.— Petitot in 
Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 650,1883. Ka-cho-’dtinne.— 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 3, 1851. Kah-cho 
tinne. —Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS., B. A. E. 
(‘Arctic hare people’). Kancho. —Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 19, 1836. Kat‘a-got- 
tine. —Petitot, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1867. K’a-t’a- 
gottine.— Petitot, Diet. DenS-Dindjie, xx, 1876 
(‘people among the hares’). Kawchodinneh.— 
Franklin, Journ. to Polar Sea, 261,1824. Kha-t’a- 
ottine.— Petitot in Bull. Soc. G6og. Paris, chart, 
1875. Khatpa-Gottine.— Petitot, Autour du lac des 
Esclaves, 362, 1891 (‘people among the rabbits’). 
Kkpayttchare ottine. —Petitot, Hare MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1869 (Chipewyan name). Nouga.— Mac- 
farlane (1857) in Hind, Lab. Penin., ii, 258, 1863 
(‘spittle’: Eskimo name). PeaudeLievre. —Peti¬ 
tot in Bull. Soc. G£og. Paris, chart, 1875. Peaux- 
de-L:evres.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 
362, 1891. Rabbitskins.— McLean, Hudson Bay, II, 
243, 1849. Slave. —Richardson, Arct. Exped., I, 
242, 1851. Ta-na-tin-ne.— Morgan, Consang. and 
Affin., 289, 1871. 


668 


KAWOHOGOTTINE-KAWIA 


[b. a. e. 


Kawchogottine (‘dwellers among the 
large hares’). A division of the Kaw- 
chodinne. Petitot, in 1867 (MS., B. A. 
E.), located them on the border of the 
wooded region n. e. of Ft Good Hope, 
and in 1875 (Bull. Soc. de Geog. Paris, 
chart, 1875) on the headwaters of An¬ 
derson r., n. of Great Bear lake. The 
same authority (Autour du lac des Es- 
claves, 362, 1891) says their habitat is on 
the large lakes of the interior e. of Mac¬ 
kenzie r. 

K’a-tcho-gottine. —Petitot, Diet. Den6-Dindji£, xx> 
1876. Katcho-Ottine. —Petitot in Can. Rcc. Sci., i, 
49, 1884. Kha-tcho-gottine. —Petitot in Bill. Soc. 
de G6og. Paris, chart, 1875. Natle-tpa-Gottine.— 
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 362, 1891 
(=‘people among the little reindeer’). 

Kawia. The name, of uncertain deri¬ 
vation, of a Shoshonean division in s. Cal¬ 
ifornia, affiliated linguistically with the 
Aguas Calientes, Juanenos, and Luisenos. 
They inhabit the n. tongue of the Colo¬ 
rado desert from Banning s. e. at least as 
far as Salton, as also the headwaters of 
Santa Margarita r., where the Kawia res. 
is situated. Formerly they are said to 
have extended into San Bernardino val¬ 
ley, but it seems more likely that this 



KAWIA MAN 


was occupied, as at present, by the Se¬ 
rranos. They are not to be confounded 
with a Yokuts tribe bearing the same 
name. They were first visited in 1776 by 
Fray Francisco Garc4s, who referred to 
them under their Mohave name, “Jecu- 
ich,” obtained from his guide. At this 
time they lived about the n. slopes of the 
San Jacinto mts. and to the northward, 
and roamed e. to the Colorado, but their 


principal seat was about San Gorgonio 
pass. Burton (H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 115,1857) gave 3,500as the 
number of men alone in 1856, evidently 
an exaggeration. There were 793 Indians 
assembled under the name “Coahuila” 
at all the Mission reservations in 1885, 
while the Indians on Cahuilla res. under 
the Mission Tule r. agency in 1894 num¬ 
bered 151, and in 1902, 159. This reser- 



KAWIA WOMAN 

vation consists of 18,240 acres of un¬ 
patented land. Villages: Duasno, Juan 
Bautista, Kavinish, Kawia, Kwaleki, 
Lawilvan, Malki, Pachawal, Palseta, Pal- 
tewat, Panachsa, San Sebastian, Sechi, 
Sokut Menyil, Temalwahish, Torres, 
Tova, and Wewutnowhu. 

Caguillas.—Duflot de Mofras, I. 349, 1844. Cagul- 
las.—Duflot de Mofras misquoted by Latham in 
Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 76, 1854." Cahnilla.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 128, 1884. 
Cahnillo.—Ibid., 129. Cahuilla.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
175, 1902 (applied to res.). Cahuillos,—Ludwig, 
Abor. Lang., 26, 1816. Cah-wee-os.—Whipple, 
Exped. from San Diego, 17, 1851. Cah-wilias. — 
Heintzelman (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 44,1857. Carvillas.—Burton, ibid., 
114. Cavios.—Gatschet in Rep. Chief Engrs., pt. 3, 
553,1876. Caweos.—Ibid. Coahuilas.—Stanley in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 194, 1870. Coguifa.—Garc6s 
(1775-76), Diary,289,1900 (identical?). Cohuillas.— 
Stanley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 119,1865. Cohuilles.— 
Greene in Ind. Aff. Rep., 93,1870. Cowela.—Hen- 
leyin Ind.Aff.Rep. 1856,243,1857. Cowillas.—Beale 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 378,1853. 
Dancers.—Cones, Garctis Diary, 42, 1900. Danza- 
rines.—Ibid.,204,423. Gecuiches.—Ibid.,423. Hak- 
wiche.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (Mohave name). 
Jecuches.—Coues, Garc6s Diary, index, 1900. Je- 
cueche. —Garc6s (1776), Diary, 444, 1900. Jecui- 
ches.—Ibid., 451. Jequiches.—Ibid. Kahuilla.— 
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 189, 1883. Kah- 
weaks.—Sen. Misc. Doc. 53, 45th Cong., 3d sess., 
70, 1879. Kah-we-as.—Wozencraft in Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 289,1853. Kahweyahs.— 














BULL. 30] 


KAWIA-K A Y EPU 


669 


Schumacher in Rep. Peabody Mus., xn, 621,1880. 
Kauvuyas. —Loew in Rep. Chief Engrs., pt. 3, 542, 
1876. Kau-yai'-chits. —Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1873, 51, 1874. Kavayos, —Gatschet in Rep. Chief 
Engrs., pt. 3, 553, 11876. Kavwaru-maup. —Ingalls 
(1872) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 66, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 2, 

1873. Koahualla. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1877, 246, 1878. 
Tecuiche. —Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., hi, 
pt. 3, 125, 1856 (misquoting Garc5s). 

Kawia. A Yokuts tribe formerly living 
on the edge of the plains on the n. side of 
Kaweah r., Cal., but now extinct. They 
were hostile to the American settlers. 
By agreement of May 13,1851 (which was 
not confirmed), a reserve was set aside 
for this and other tribes between Kaweah 
and Chowchilla rs., Cal., which at the 
same time ceded their unreserved lands. 
This tribe is to be distinguished from the 
Kawia (Coahuila, Cahuillo, etc.), a Sho- 
shonean tribe in Riverside co., Cal. 
Cah-was. —Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 
32d Cong., 1st. sess., 23, 1852. Cahwia. —Barbour 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 232, 1851. Cah-wi-ah. —Wessells 
(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 73, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 
32, 1857. Cowhuillas.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
June 8, 1860. Cowiahs. —Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
511, 1854. Cow-illers. —Lewis, ibid., 400, 1858. 
Cowwillas. —Dole, ibid., 219, 1861. Gawia.— A. L. 
Kroeber, inf’n, 1906 (the more strictly correct 
form). Kahweahs. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 456, 

1874. Kauia. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 
370, 1877. Kawia— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1903, 508, 1904. 
Keawahs.— Maltbv in Ind. Aff. Rep., 381, 1872. 
Keweah.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 284, 1884. 

Kawia. A Kawia village on Cahuilla 
res., near the headwaters of Santa Marga¬ 
rita r., s. Cal. 

Cahuilla.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902, 175, 1903. 

Kawirasanachi (‘ white hill ’). A Tara- 
humare rancheria in Chihuahua, Mexi¬ 
co.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Kawita. The name of two former 
Lower Creek towns on Chattahoochee 
r., in Russell co., Ala. They were situ¬ 
ated 2\ m. apart and were commonly 
distinguished as Upper Kawita and Ka¬ 
wita Talahasi (‘Kawitaold town’), in vari¬ 
ous forms of spelling. The former was 
situated on the w. bank of the river, 3 m. 
below its falls, the latter ^ m. from the 
stream. Kawita Talahasi, or Old Kawita, 
was the “public establishment’’ of the 
Lower Creeks and the headquarters of 
the agent. In 1799 it could muster 66 
warriors, and about the year 1833 the 
town contained 289 families. It was an 
offshoot from Kasihta, and in turn gave 
origin to Wetumpka, on Big Uchee cr. 
From the fact that Kawita was regarded 
as the assembly place and treaty capital 
of the Lower Creeks, the name was fre¬ 
quently used synonymously with Lower 
Creeks; as Kusa, the name of the capital 
of the Upper Creeks, was sometimes used 
to designate that portion of the tribe. In 
1775 Bartram (Trav., 387, 1792) spoke of 
Kawita Talahasi as “the bloody town, 
where the micos, chiefs, and warriors 
assemble when a general war is proposed; 
and here captives and state malefactors 
are put to death.” (a. s. g.) 

Akowetako. —Squior in Beach, Ind. Mi seel., 34, 
1877 (traditional name, fide the Walam-Olum). 


Ani'-Kawi'ta. —Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,508, 
1900 (Cherokee name of Lower Creeks, from their 
former principal town on Chattahoochee r.). 
Cabetas.— Barcia, Ensayo, 313, 1723. Cabuitta. — 
Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, *1776. Cacouitas. —Baudry 
des Lozi6res, Voy. AlaLe., 242, 1802. Cahouita. — 
Peniere in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822. 
Cahouitas.— La Harpe (1703) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., ill, 29, 1851. Cahuita.— Jefferys, Fr. Dom., 
134, map, 1761. Canitas. —Smith (1785) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 557,1853. Caoitas. —Charle¬ 
voix, New France, Shea’s ed., Vi, 147,1866. Cao- 
netas. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 126,1816. Cao- 
nites. —Ibid. Caouikas. —Smith, Bouquet’sExped., 
70, 1766. Caouitas. —Du Pratz, La., II, 208, 1758. 
Caveta. —Barcia, Ensayo, 287, 1723. Cawidas. —N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist. (1753), VI, 797, 1855. Cawittas. — 
Romans, Florida, 90, 1775. Cawittaws. —Carroll, 
Hist. Coll. S. C., I, 190, 1836. Cohuntas.— Martin, 
Hist. La., i, 161, 1827. Coneta. —Morse, N. Am., 
218, 1776 (misprint). Conetta. —Jefferys, Am. 
Atlas, 5, 1776 (town on headwaters of Ocmulgee 
r.). Conetuhs. —Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 19,1848. 
Couetta. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776. Couitias. — 
Brinton,Florida Pen.,144,1859. Couueta. —Alcedo, 
Die. Geog., I, 676, 1876. Coweeta. —Drake, Bk. 
Inds.,bk.iv, 29,1848. Coweitas.— Giissefeld, map 
U. S., 1784. Coweta.— Bartram, Travels, 387, 1792. 
Cowetah. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 
II, 95,1836. Cow-e-tah Tallahassee. —Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., Ga. map, 1899. Cowetas. —Lincoln 
(1789) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 78, 1832. 
Cowetau.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 162, 1837. Co- 
wetaw. —Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. iv, 51,1848. Cowet- 
tas. —Romans, Florida, I, 280, 1775. Cow-e-tugh. — 
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 52, 1848. Cow-e-tuh. — 
Ibid.,25,55. Cow-e-tuhTal-lau-has-see. —Ibid., 55. 
Grand Coweta. —Robin, Voy., I, map, 1807. Kaiou- 
tais.— Lozi5res,Voy.41aLe.,242,1802. Kaouitas. — 
Gayarr6, Hist. La., n. 40, 1852. Kaoutyas.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854. 
Kawita Talahassi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
135,1884. Kawuytas. —Bossu (1759), Travels, 1,229, 
1771. Kawytas. —Ibid.,271. Kow-he'-tah.— Adair, 
Am. Ind., 257, 1775. Lahouita. —Morse, Rep. to 
Sec. War, 149, 1822. Powebas. —Lattr£, Carte des 
Etats-Unis, 1784. Pt. Coweta. —Robin, Voy., I, 
map, 1807. TJpper Cowetas town. —Seagrove (1793). 
in Am, State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 427, 1832. 

Kawita. A town of the Creek Nation 
on the n. side of Arkansas r., Okla. 
Coweta.— U. S. P. O. Guide, 367, 1904. Kawita.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., n, 185, 1888. 

Kawoltukwucha (Kdwoltdk < widca, ‘hill 
below’). A Pima village w. of the Mari¬ 
copa and Phoenix R. R., in Maricopa co., 
Ariz.—Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 18, 
1902. 

Kawerkewotche. —ten Kate quoted by Gatschet, 
MS., B. A. E., XX, 199,1888. 

Kayak. See Kaiak. 

Kayashkidetan (‘ people of the house 
with a high foundation’). A Tlingit di¬ 
vision at Wrangell, Alaska, belonging to 
the Wolf phratry and closely connected 
with the Nanyaayi and Hokedi. 

Hara'c hit tan. —Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
25,1889. Ka-rasch-kidetan. —Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 
120, 1885. Kaya'ckidetan. —Swanton, field notes, 
B. A. E., 1904.’ 

Kayehkwarageh ( Kdie‘kv)drd / r/e < ) . A 
traditionary Iroquois village belonging to 
the Two-clans of the Turtle; locality un¬ 
known. (j. n. B. H.) 

Kah he kwa ke.— Hale, Iroq. Book of Rites, 119, 
1883. Kayyhekwarakeh. —Ibid, 118. 

Kayepu. A prehistoric ruined pueblo 
of the compact, communal type, situated 
about 5 m. s. of Galisteo, Santa F4 co., 
N. Mex. The Tanos now living with the 
Queres of Santo Domingo claim that it 
was a village of their tribe. 


670 


KAYGEN-KEGI 


[b. a. e. 


Ka-yePu. —Bandelierin Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 106, 
1892 (native name). Pueble Blanco. —Bandelier 
in Ritch, N. Mex., 201, 1885 (misprint). Pueblo 
Blanco.— Ibid. (Span.: ‘ white house’). 

Kaygen. A Seneca village on the s. 
bank of Chemung r., below Kanestio r., 
N. Y.—Pouchot, map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. 

Kaynaguntl (‘ people at the mouth of the 
canyon’). An Apache clan or band at 
San Carlos agency and Ft Apache, Ariz., 
in 1881.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 111, 1890. 

Kayomasho. The progressive party in 
Laguna pueblo, N. Mex. (Loew in Wheeler 
Survey Kep., vn, 339, 1879). According 
to Bandelier this party constitutes a 
phratry. See Kapaits. 

Kayung ( Qlaya'n ). A Haida town on 
Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col., just above Masset. It was occu¬ 
pied by the Kuna-lanas, who owned 
the place, and the Sagui-gitunai. John 
Work does not give separate figures for 
the population of this town in 1836-41, 
but the old people estimate the number 
of houses at 14, which would indicate 
about 175 people. The place was at one 
time entirely abandoned, but two or three 
families have recently returned to it. 

(j. r. s.) 

K^aya'iig. —Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 23, 
1898. Kayung.— Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 
163b, 1880. Qlaya'n lnaga'-i. —Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 281, 1905 (the people). 

Kchegagonggo ( K’ chi-ga-gong'-go, 
‘pigeon-hawk’). A gens of the Abnaki 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc.,174, 1877. 

Kdhun (‘thunder being’). The 7th 
Tsichu gens of the Osage tribe. 

Xjia“.—Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 

S ^u n .—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897. 

a'xe.— Ibid. (‘upper-world people’). Nig'ka 
wakan'^a^d.—Ibid, (‘mysterious male being’). 
Thunder People. —Dorsey in Am. Nat., 114, 1884. 
Tsi'hacK —Dorsey in 15th Rep., op cit. (‘camp 
last’). 

Ke. The Bear clan of the Tewa pueblo 
of Nambe, N. Mex., and of Hano, Ariz. 
Cac. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39,1891 (Navaho 
name). Ho'-nau. —Ibid. (Hopiname). Ke. —Ibid. 
(Tewa name). Ke-tdoa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., 
IX, 349, 1896 (Nambe form; td6a=‘ people’). 
Ke'-to-wa. —Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vn,166,1894. 

Kechayi. Adivisionof theYokuts,for¬ 
merly livingonSan Joaquin r., Cal. 

Kechayi.— A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. Kech-eel. — 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 223, 1851 (same?). 

Kechemeches. A division of the New 
Jersey Delawares mentioned by Evelin 
(Proud, Pa., i, 113, 1797; Smith, Hist. 
N. J., 29, 1765, rep. 1890) as living in 
1648 in the s. part of the state, at the 
mouth of Delaware r., and numbering 50 
men. Some old authorities locate here 
the Naraticon. 

Kechemudluk. A Kevalingamiut vil¬ 
lage at C. Seppings on the Arctic coast of 
Alaska; pop. 50 in 1880. 

Cape Sepping.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 59, 1900. 
Cape Seppings. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. Kechemudluk.— Hydrog. chart cited by 
Baker, Geog, Diet. Alaska, 115,1902. Kivalinge. — 
Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 


Kechepukwaiwah. A former Chippewa 
village on a lake of the same name, near 
Chippewa r., Wis.—Warreh (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 314, 1885. 

Kechipauan (‘town of the spread-out 
grit’; evidently referring to the sandstone 
mesa). A former pueblo of the Zuni on 
a mesa e. of Ojo Caliente, or Kyapkwaina- 
kwin, 15 m. s. w. of Zuni pueblo, N. Mex. 
According to Cushing it was called also 
Kyanawe, which Bandelier identifies with 
the Canabi of Ofiate in 1598, and therefore 
regards it as one of the Seven Cities of 
Cibola of Marcos de Niza and Coronado in 
1539-42. Spanish Franciscans evidently 
began the establishment of a mission at 
this pueblo, probably in 1629, when the 
first missionaries resided among the Zuni, 
but judging from the character of the 
church building, the walls of which are 
still standing, it was never finished. See 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 81, 1891, 
and authorities cited below, (f. w. h. ) 
Canabe.—Cushing in Compte-rendu Internat. 
Cong. Am., vir, 156, 1890 (misprint of early Span¬ 
ish form). Canabi.—Ofiate (1598) in Docl In6d., 
xvi, 133, 1871. Chan-a-hue.— Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, ill, 133, 1890. Chyanahue. —Ibid., v, 
171, 1891; IV, 338, 1892. Chyanaue.— Ibid., Ill, 133, 
note, 1890. Chek-e-pa-wha. —Fewkesin Jour. Am. 
Eth. and Arch., 1 ,101,1891. Ketchi-na. —Cushing 
in Millstone, IX, 55, Apr. 1884. Ketchip-a-huan.— 
Bandelierin 10th Rep. Arch. Inst. Am., 107, 1889. 
Ketchip-a-uan.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
HI, 133, 1890; IV, 329, 1892; v, 171,1891 (recorded as 
distinct from Kyanawe). Kia)anaan.— ten Kate, 
Reizen in N. A., 291, 1885. Kia-na-wa. —Cushing 
in Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884. K’ya-na-we. — 
Cushing in Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., 
VII, 156, 1890. Village of Odd Waters. —Cushing, 
Zuni Folk-tales, 104, 1901 (possibly identical). 

Kecoughtan. A small tribe of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy residing in 1607 at the 
mouth of James r., in what is now Eliz¬ 
abeth City co., Va. According to Capt. 
John Smith their fighting men did not 
exceed 20.—Smith (1629), Hist. Va., i, 
116, map, repr. 1819. 

Keda-lanas ( QH'da lafnas, ‘strait peo¬ 
ple’). A subdivision of the Hagi-lanas, 
a family of Ninstints belonging to the 
Raven clan of the Haida. They re¬ 
ceived their name from a narrow strait in 
frontof tlietown.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
268, 1905. 

Kedlamik ( QP/iamix , ‘ broad patch of 
bushes’). An Okinagan village near Ni¬ 
cola lake, Brit. Col. 

Lka iamix.—Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 
174, 1900. Qe'iamix.—Ibid. 

Keeches. Mentioned by Barbour (Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 4,32d Cong., spec, sess., 61,1853) 
as a hostile tribe living n. and e. of San 
Joaquin r., among the foot-hills of the 
Sierra Nevada, on the headwaters of the 
Tuolumne, Merced, and Mariposa rs., 
Cal., in 1851. It was probably of Moque- 
lumnan stock. 

Kegi. The House clan of the Tewa of 
Hano pueblo, n. e. Ariz. 

Ke'gi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 
Ki-a'-ni.—Ibid. (Navaho name). Ki'-hu.—Ibid. 
(Hopi name). 


BULL. 30] 


KEG1KTOWRIGEMIUT-KELE 


671 


Kegiktowrigemiut ( Kegiktowric/emut). 
A subdivision of the Unaligmiut Eskimo 
whose chief village is Kiktaguk.—Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877. 

Keguayo. A pueblo built, occupied, 
and abandoned by the Nambe tribe prior 
to the Spanish advent in the 16th cen¬ 
tury. Situated in the vicinity of the 
Chupaderos, a cluster of springs in a 
mountain gorge, about 4 m. e. of Nambe 
pueblo, n. N. Mex.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 84, 1892. 

Kehsidatsoos {Keh-sid-ats-oos) . A for¬ 
mer summer village of theMakah of Wash¬ 
ington.—Gibbs, MS. 248, B. A. E. 

Kein (‘turtle carriers,’ because they 
have the ceremonies connected with the 
turtle.—Fletcher). A subgens of the 
Dhatada gehs of the Omaha. 

Kaetage.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 56, 1826. Ka-e- 
ta-ie.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 827, 1823 
(‘those who do not touch turtles’). Ka'-ih.—Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. a;e‘i n .—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 226, 1897. 

Keinouche ( Klndzha n , ‘ pickerel’). One 
of the divisions or chief bands of the 
Ottawa, q. v. The Jesuit Relation of 1640 
locates them at that time, under the name 
Kinounchepirini, s. of the Isle of the 
Algonquins (Allumette id.) in Ottawa r. 
This would place them, if taken literally, 
some distance E. of L. Huron; but as the 
knowledge then possessed by the French 
was very imperfect, it is probable that 
the Relation of 1643, which places them 
on L. Huron, is more nearly correct. In 
1658 they appear to have lived along theN. 
shore of the lake. Between 1660-70 they, 
with the Kiskakon and Sinago, were 
attached to the mission at Shaugawaumi- 
kong (now Bayfield), on the s. shore of 
L. Superior. It is probable, however, that 
at the time of Father Menard’s visit, in 
1660, they were at Keweenaw bay, Mich. 
In 1670-71 they returned to Mackinaw, 
some passing on to Manitoulin id.; but it 
is probable that the latter, or a part of 
them, were included in the Sable band, 

. v. (j. m. c. T.) 

einouche.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 87, 1858. Kinonche- 
piirinik.—Ibid., 1658, 22, 1858. Kinonchepirinik.— 
Ibid., 1643, 61, 1858. Kinouche.—Marquette (1670) 
quoted by Shea, Miss. Val., xlix, 1852. Kinouche- 
biiriniouek.—Jes. Rel. 1646, 34, 1858. Kinounche¬ 
pirini.—Ibid., 1640, 34,1858. Quenongebin.—Cham¬ 
plain (1613), CEuvres, IIP, 298, 1870. 

Kekayeken ( K'ek'a'yek'En ). A Songish 
division residing between Esquimalt and 
Beecher bay, s. end of Vancouver id.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 17, 
1890. 

Kekelun (K'e'lcElun). A Squawmish 
village community on the w. side of Howe 
sd., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. 
A. A. S., 474,1900. 

Kekertakdjuin ( Qeqertaqdjuin , ‘big 
island’). Aspring settlement of Padli- 
miut Eskimo at the end of Howe bay, 
Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1888. 


Kekertarsuarak. An Eskimo village on 
an islet off the s. w. coast of Greenland, 
lat. 60° 50 / .—Meddelelser om Gronland, 
xvi, map, 1896. 

Kekertaujang ( Qeqerlaujang , ‘like an 
island’). A winter village of the Sau- 
mingmiut, a subtribe of the Okomiut 
Eskimo, on Cumberland penin., Baffin 
land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1888. 

Kekerten (‘islands’). The winter vil¬ 
lage of the Kingnaitmiut Eskimo on the 
e. side of Cumberland id., Baffin land; 
pop. 82 in 1883. 

Kekerten.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., no. 80, 70, 
1885. Kikkerton.— Kumlien in Bull. U. S. Nat. 
Mus., no. 15,15,1879. Qeqerten. —Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., 425, 1888. 

Kekertukjuak ( Qeqertuqdjuaq , ‘big 
island’). A spring settlement of Nugu- 
miut Eskimo on an island in Frobisher 
bay, s. e. Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kekin {Keyin', ‘turtle carriers’). A 
division of the Washashewanun gens of 
the Osage.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 234, 1897. 

Kekin. A Kansa gens. 

Do-ha-kel'-ya.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156,1877 (trans. 
‘turtle’). Ke.— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 671, 1885 
(‘turtle’). Ke-k’i". —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.E., 
231, 1897 (trans. ‘carries a turtle on his back’). 
Ke nika-shing-ga. —Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 25, 1877. 

Kekionga. The principal village of the 
Miami, formerly situated on the e. bank 
of St Joseph r., in Allen co., Ind., oppo¬ 
site Ft Wayne. It was often designated 
as “Miami town” and “Great Miami vil¬ 
lage. ’ ’ Several other settlements were in 
the vicinity. It was burned in 1790, and 
the tract on which it stood, an area 6 m. 
square, was ceded to the United States 
by the treaty of Greenville, Aug. 3, 1795. 
See Maumee Towns. (j. m. ) 

Great Miami village. —Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 5, 
189, 1848. Kegaiogue.— Harmon (1790) in Rupp, 
West. Pa., app., 228, 1846. Kegniogue.— Ibid. K^- 
ke-on-gay. —Hough, map in Indiana Geol. Rep., 
1883. Ke-ki-on-ga.— Royce in 1st Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1881. Ke-ki-on-go.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. 
A. E., Ind. map, 1899. Miami town. —Gamelin 
(1790) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 93, 1832. 

Kekios. A Squawmish village com¬ 
munity on the right bank of Squaw- 
misht r., w. Brit. Col. 

Qaqio's. —Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. Qe'qios. —Hill- 
Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kekwaiakin ( QEk'wai'akin ). A Squaw¬ 
mish village community on the left bank 
of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout, 
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kekwaii ( Ke-kwod'-i '). A village occu¬ 
pied in ancient times by the Nambe 
people of New Mexico; situated near 
Agawana (q. v.). Distinct from Kegua¬ 
yo. (f. w. h.) 

Kelatl ( QeWU) . The uppermost Cowi- 
chan subtribe on Fraser r., Brit. Col. 
Their town was Asilao, above Yale.— 
Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894. 

Kele. The extinct Pigeon-hawk clan of. 


672 


KELEMANTURUK-KENNEBEC 


t B. A. B. 


the Chua (Snake) phratry of the Hopi. 
Distinct from the Hawk (Kwayo) and 
Chicken-hawk (Massikwayo) clans. 
Ke-le'-nyu-muh.—Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., V, 223, 
1892 (nyu-muh^ people’; usually employed by 
this author to denote phratry). Kele wiiiwu.— 
Fewkesin 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583,1901 (win-wti= 
‘clan’). Ke'-le* wun-wii.—Fewkes in Am. An¬ 
throp., VII, 403, 1894. 

Kelemanturuk. An Utukamiut Eskimo 
village near Icy cape, Alaska.—Eleventh 
Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Keles ( Q&Ies ). A Chilliwack town on 
upper Chilliwack r., Brit. Col.—Boas in 
64th Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894. 

Keliopoma. The name, in their own 
language, of the northernmost branch of 
the Porno, bordering on the coast Yuki 
and the Athapascan Kato, and inhabit¬ 
ing the country from Sherwood to the 
coast near Cleone, Cal., to which place 
they gave its name. They were also 
called Shibalna Porno. 

Chiabel-na-poma.—Tobin in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 
404, 1858. Ku-la Kai Po-mo.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., Ill, 155, 1877. She-bal-ne Pomas.—Wiley 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 119, 1865. Shi-bal'-ni Po'- 
mo.—Powers, op. cit. (Kaito Pomo name: ‘neigh¬ 
bor people ’). 

Kelketos ( QE'lkEtos, ‘ painted ’). A 
Squawmish village community on the e. 
coast of Howe sd., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout 
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kelsemaht (‘rhubarbpeople’). A Noot- 
ka tribe on Clayoquot sd., Vancouver id.; 
pop. 76 in 1904. Their principal village 
is Yahksis. 

Kel-seem-aht.—Can. Ind. Aff., 186, 1884. Kel-sem- 
aht. —Ibid., 357, 1897. K’eltsma'ath.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. Killsmaht.— 
Sproat, Savage Life, 308,1868. Kilsamat.—Mayne, 
Brit. Col., 251,1861. 

Keltakkaua ( KE'ltaqk'aua ). A division 
of the Nuhalk, a Bellacoola tribe of the 
coast of British Columbia.—Boas in 7th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3, 1891. 

Kemanks. A body of Salish of Fraser 
superintendency, Brit. Col. (Can. Ind. 
Aff., 138, 1879), no longer officially re¬ 
ported. 

Kemisak. An Eskimo village on the e. 
coast of Greenland, about lat. 63° 40 / ; 
pop. 90 in 1829.—Graah, Exped. Green¬ 
land, map, 1837. 

Kenabig (Kinabth, ‘snake’). A gens of 
the Chippewa. 

Che-she-gwa.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., v, 45, 1885 (‘rattlesnake’). Ke-na'-big.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877 (‘snake’). Kina- 
bik.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. She-she-gwah.— 
Tanner, Narrative, 175, 1830. She-she-gwun.— 
Ibid.,315 (‘rattlesnake’). 

Kenachananak. A Kuskwogmiut Eski¬ 
mo village on the seashore opposite Nuni- 
vak id., Alaska; pop. 181, in 8 dwellings, 
in 1890. 

Kenachananak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 236, 
1902. Kennachananaghamiut.—Eleventh Census, 
Alaska, 109, 1893. 

Kenai. A Knaiakhotana settlement 
and trading post of 44 people on the e. 
side of Cook inlet, Alaska, at the mouth 
of Kaknu r. The population in 1890 was 
.263 in 30 houses. The Russians erected 


here the redoubt of St Nicholas in 1791, 
and a Russian orthodox mission was es¬ 
tablished about 1900, the Knaiakhotana 
here being devoted members of the Rus¬ 
sian church. A large salmon cannery has 
been in operation for many years. 

Fort Kenai.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 236, 1902. 
Kenai redoute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 
1884. Pavlovskaia.— Russian map (1802) cited by 
Baker, op. cit. St. Nicholas. —Ibid. St. Nicolas.— 
Ibid. St. Nikolas. —Ibid. 

Kenapacomaqua. The principal village 
of the Wea, formerly on the w. bank of 
Eel r., near its mouth, 6 m. above Logans- 
port, Cass co., Ind. From its situation on 
Eel r. ( Anguille in French) it was called 
L’Anguille by the French. It was de¬ 
stroyed by Gen. Wilkinson in 1791. 

(j. M.) 

Kenapacomaqua. —Wilkinson (1791), in Am. State 
Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 134, 1832. Ke-na-pe-com-a- 
qua. —Hough in Indiana Geol. Rep., map, 1851. 
L’Anguille. —Rupp, West. Pa., 264, 1846. 

Kendaia (‘it is an orchard.’—Hewitt). 
A former Seneca settlement situated at 
about the site of Kendaia, Seneca co., 
N. Y. Before its destruction by Gen. 
Sullivan in Sept., 1779, it contained about 
20 houses. (j. m. ) 

Appletown.— Livermore (1779) in N. H. Hi9t. Soc. 
Coll., vi, 326,1850. Canadia.— Hubley (1779) quoted 
by Conover, Kanadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
Candaia. —Norris quoted by Conover, ibid. Can- 
dia. —Machin, map, ibid. Conday. —Livermore, 
op. cit. Kahonta'yo 11 .— Hewitt, inf’n, 1890 (Seneca 
form). Kandaia.— Nukerck (1779) quoted by Con¬ 
over, Kanadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
Kendaes. —Pouchot, map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., x, 694, 1858. Kindais. —Pemberton (1792) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., Il, 176, 1810. Saint 
Coy.— McKendry (1779) quoted by Conover, Kana¬ 
dega and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 

Kendawa ( Ken-dci-wa' , ‘eagle’). A gens 
of the Miami (q.v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168,1877. 

Kenek. A Yurok village on lower 
Klamath r., 5 or 6 m. below the mouth 
of Trinity r., Cal. It plays a prominent 
part in Yurok myths, but does not appear 
to have been important in historic times. 

Kenek. —A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1904 (Yurok name). 
Shwufum. —Ibid. (Karok name.) 

Kenikashika (‘those who became human 
beings by the aid of a turtle’). A Qua- 
paw gens. 

Ke-ni'kaci'na.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229, 
1897. Turtle gens. —Ibid. 

Kenim Lake. A Shuswap village or band 
on Kenim lake, which flows into North 
Thompson r., interior of British Colum¬ 
bia; pop. 87 in 1902, 67 in 1904. 

Kanim Lake.— Can. Ind. Aff., 274, 1902. Kaninim 
Lake. —Ibid. ,271, 1889. Kaninis’Tribe. — Ibid.,190, 
1884. Kenim Lake. —Ibid., pt. II, 72, 1902. 

Kenipsim. A Cowichan tribe in Cow- 
itchin valley, near the s. e. end of Van¬ 
couver id.; pop. 53 in 1904. 

Ka-nip-sum.— Can. Ind. Aff., 308, 1879. Kee-nip- 
saim.— Ibid., 302, 1893. Kee-nip-sim.—Ibid., 231, 
1886. Ke-nip-sim.— Ibid., 190, 1883. Khenipsim.— 
Ibid., pt. ii, 164, 1901. Khenipsin.—Ibid., pt. II, 
69, 1904. Qe'nipsen.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Kennebec (‘at the long water’). A 
former village, probably of the Norridge- 
wock division of the Abnaki, on Kennebec 
r. between Augusta and Winslow, Me. 


BULL. 30] 


KENNEBUNKER-KEOKUK 


673 


Mentioned by Capt. John Smith in 1616 
and visited by Druillettes in 1646. 

Kenebec.—Maurault, Hist. Abenakis, 120, 1866. 
Kenebecka. — Smith (1629), Hist. Va., II, 177, 1819. 
Kenebeke.—Ibid.,183. Kinibeki.—Jes. Rel. (1647), 
Thvvaites ed., xxxi, 189,1898. 

Kennebunker. A word local in the Maine 
lumbering regions, defined (Dialect Notes, 
390, 1895) as a “valise in which clothes 
are put by lumbermen when they go into 
camp for a ‘winter operation.’ ” This 
term, of quite recent origin, has been 
formed, with the English suffix -er, from 
Kennebunk, a river and port in Maine; de¬ 
rived from the Passamaquoddy or a close¬ 
ly related dialect of Algonquian, probably 
signifying ‘at the long water.’ (a.f.c.) 

Kenozhe ( Kinozha n , ‘pickerel’). A 
gens of the Chippewa. Cf. Keinouche. 
Ke-noushay.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., V, 44,1885 (trans. ‘pike’). Ke-no-zha.—Tan¬ 
ner, Narrative, 314, 1830 (‘pickerel’). Ke-no'- 
zhe.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877 (‘pike’). 
Kinoja 11 .—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Kenta (probably from kent'a ’, ‘field’, 
‘meadow.’—Hewitt). A Tuscarora vil¬ 
lage in North Carolina in 1701.—Lawson 
(1714), Carolina, 383, 1860. 

Kentanuska. A Tuscarora village in 
North Carolina in 1701.—Lawson (1714), 
Carolina, 383, 1860. 

Kente ( MnCa\ ‘field’, ‘meadow’). A 
Cayuga village existing about 1670 on 
Quinte bay of L. Ontario, Ontario. 

Kante.—Bruyas (1673) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
792, 1855. Kente.—Frontenac (1673), ibid., 96. 
Kentsia.—Homann Heirs’ map, 1756. Kentsio.— 
Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Quente.—La Honton, New 
Voy., i, 32, 1703. Quintay.—Frontenac (1672), op. 
cit., 93. Quinte.—Doc. of 1698 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 681,1855. 

Kenunimik. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the right bank of the lower Yukon, 
Alaska (Coast Surv. chart, 1898), 15 m. 
above Andreafski. Perhaps the same as 
Ankachak. 

Keokuk ( Kiyokaga , ‘one who moves 
about alert’). A Sauk leader, a member 
of the Fox clan, born on Rock r., Ill., 
about 1780. He was not a chief by birth, 
but rose to the command of his people 
through marked ability, force of charac¬ 
ter, and oratorical power. His mother is 
said to have been half French. At an 
early age he was a member of the Sauk 
council, which he graced, but at first 
played only a subordinate role therein. 
He stepped into prominence later on 
when he was made tribal guest-keeper. 
While holding this office he was supplied 
at tribal expense with all the means of 
rendering hospitality, and played the part 
of a genial host with such pleasing effect 
that his lodge became a center for all 
things social and political. Quick to see 
the possibilities of this office he made use 
of the opportunity to further his own 
ambitions. 

Keokuk was well aware of the fact that 
the rigid social organization of his peo¬ 
ple offered a barrier to the realization of 


his cherished desire, which was to be¬ 
come the foremost man of his tribe. Con¬ 
trary to the manner of men of his train¬ 
ing, environment, and tradition, he had 
no scruples against doing away with a 
practice if thereby he might reap profit 
for himself; and he worked his will against 
custom, not in an open, aggressive way, 
but by veiled, diplomatic methods. He 
was continually involved in intrigue; 
standing always in the background, he 
secretly played one faction against an¬ 
other. In time he became the leading 
councilor in the Sauk assembly, and en¬ 
joyed great popularity among his people. 
But the situation assumed a different as¬ 
pect when the troubled period of the so- 
called Black Hawk war arrived. The 
immediate cause of this conflict grew out 



of an agreement first entered into between 
the Government and a small band of Sauk 
who, under their leader Kw^askwamia, 
were in winter camp near the trading post 
of St Louis. By this compact the Sauk 
were to give up the Rock River country. 
As soon as the agreement became noised 
abroad among all the Sauk there was 
strong opposition, particularly to the form 
in which it had been made. Throughout 
the affair Keokuk assumed so passive an 
attitude that he lost at once both social 
and political prestige. Those of the Sauk 
who favored an appeal to arms then 
turned to a man of the Thunder clan, 
Black-big-chest, known to the whites un¬ 
der the name of Black Hawk (q. v.), who 
became their leader. Just at this critical 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-43 










674 


KEOTUC 


KEREMEN 


fB. A. E. 


eriod the feeble bond of political union 

etween the Sauk and the Foxes was bro¬ 
ken, this result being due largely to in¬ 
ternal dissensions brought on by the in¬ 
trigues of Keokuk, who, with a following 
of unpatriotic Sauk, sought and obtained 
protection from the Foxes under their 
chief, Paweshik. The fighting began be¬ 
fore Black Hawk was ready, and he 
was forced to take the field with but a 
small number of those on whose support 
he had depended. With his depleted 
forces he could not successfully contend 
against the Illinois militia and their Ind¬ 
ian allies. 

Keokuk loomed up again during the 
final negotiations growing out of the war, 
and played so deftly into the hands of 
the Government officials that he was made 
chief of the Sauk. It is said that the an¬ 
nouncement of his elevation to supreme 
pow r er w'as made in open council, and that 
it so aroused the anger and contempt of 
Black Hawk that he whipped off his 
clout and slapped Keokuk across the face 
with it. The act of creating Keokuk chief 
of the Sauk has always been regarded 
with ridicule by both the Sauk and the 
Foxes, for the reason that he was not of 
the ruling clan. But the one great occa¬ 
sion for which both the Sauk and the 
Foxes honor Keokuk was when, in the 
city of Washington, in debate with the 
representatives of the Sioux and other 
tribes before Government officials, he es¬ 
tablished the claim of the Sauk and Foxes 
to the territory comprised in what is now 
the state of Iowa. He based this claim 
primarily on conquest. 

On his death, in 1848, in Kansas, whither 
he had moved three years before, the 
chieftainship, with its unsavory associa¬ 
tions, went to his son, Moses Keokuk 
(Wunagisa*, ‘he leaps up quickly from 
his lair’), who displayed many of the 
mental characteristics of the father. Those 
who knew them both maintain that the 
son was even the superior intellectually, 
and of higher ethics. He w r as fond of 
debate, being always cool, deliberate, and 
clear-headed. In argument he was more 
than a match for any Government officer 
with whom he ever came in contact at 
the agency. He bore an intense hatred 
for the Foxes, which was returned with 
more than full measure. Moses Keokuk 
was acknowledged the purest speaker of 
the Sauk dialect. The Sauk were never 
tired of his eloquence; it was always 
simple, clear, and pleasing. Late in life 
he embraced Christianity and was bap¬ 
tized a Baptist; but he never ceased to 
cherish a sincere regard for the old-time 
life and its fond associations. He suc¬ 
ceeded in turning aside much of the 
odium that had early surrounded his 
office, and though he met with more po¬ 


litical opposition during his whole life, 
yet when he died, at Sauk and Fox 
agency, Okla., in Aug. 1903, his death w r as 
regarded by the Sauk as a tribal calamity. 

In 1883 the remains of the elder Keo¬ 
kuk were removed from Kansas to Keo¬ 
kuk, Iowa, where they were reinterred 
in the city park and a monument erected 
over his grave by the citizens of the town. 
A bronze bust of Keokuk stands in the 
Capitol at Washington. (w. j. ) 

Keotuc (prob. for Kiwattig, ‘he whose 
voice is heard roaming about.’—W. J.). 
A Potawatomi band, probably taking its 
name from the chief, living in Kansas in 
1857.—Baldwin in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 
163, 1858. 

Keowee (according to Wafford, Kuwd- 
hiyl , or, in abbreviated form, Kuwdhi , 
‘mulberry grove place’). The name of 
two or more former Cherokee settlements. 
One, sometimes distinguished as Old Keo¬ 
wee, the principal of the Lower Cherokee 
towns, was on the river of the same name, 
near the present Port George, in Oconee 
co., S. C. Another, distinguished as New 
Keowee, was on the headwaters of 
Twelve-mile cr., in Pickens co., S. C.—- 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 525,1900. 

Keowe.— Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792. New 

Keowee. —Mouzon’s map quoted by Royce in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., 143,1887. 

Kepatawangachik. Given as the name 
of a tribe formerly living near L. St 
John, Quebec, but driven off by the Iro¬ 
quois (Jes. Rel. 1660, 12, 1858). Named 
in connection with Abittibi and Oua- 
kouiechidek (Chisedec). Possibly the 
Papinachois. 

Kepel. A Yurok village on lower Kla¬ 
math r., about 12 m. below the mouth of 
the Trinity, in n. California. It w'as 
the only place in Yurok territory, besides 
Loolego, at which a fish dam was erected 
across the river. 

Akharatipikam.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1904 (Karok 
name). Capel.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
111,138,1853. Cap-pel.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec.sess., 161,1853. Kai-petl.— Gibbs, 
op. cit. 

Kerahocak. A former village of the 
Powhatan confederacy on the n. bank of 
the Rappahannock, in King George co., 
Va.—Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, 
repr. 1819. 

Kerechun( ke-re-tcu n , probably ‘hawk’). 
A subgens of the Waninkikikarachada, 
the Bird gens of the Winnebago.—Dorsey 
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897. 

Keremen. A village or tribe formerly 
in the country between Matagorda bay 
and Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. The 
name seems to have been given Joutel 
in 1687 by the Ebahamo, who were prob¬ 
ably affiliated to the neighboring Karan- 
kawa. They are probably the Aranama 
(q. v.) of the Spanish chroniclers. See 
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 23, 35, 46, 
1891. (a. c. f.) 


BULL. 30] 


KEREMEUS-KESHKUNUWU 


675 


Keremen.—Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
r,137,1846. Korimen.—Jontel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., hi, 288, 1878 (mentioned as distinct from 
Keremen, but probably a duplication). 

Keremeus. A Similkameen band of the 
Okinagan; pop. 55 in 1897, when last 
separately enumerated. 

Kerem-eeos.—Can. Ind. AfT. for 1883, 191. Kere- 
meoos.—Ibid., 1892, 313. Keremeus.—Ibid., 1897, 
364. Keremya'uz.—Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., ii, 174, 1900. 

Keresan Family (adapted from K’eres , 
the aboriginal name). A linguistic fam¬ 
ily of Pueblo Indians including the in¬ 
habitants of several villages on the Rio 
Grande, in n. central New Mexico, be¬ 
tween the Rito de los Frijoles (where, 
before being confined to reservations, 
they joined the Tewa on the n. ) and 
the Rio Jemez, as well as on the latter 
stream from the pueblo of Sia to its mouth. 
The w. division, comprising Acoma and 
Laguna pueblos, are situated westward 
from the Rio Grande, the latter on the 
Rio San Jos£. Like the other Pueblo 
tribes of New Mexico, the Keresan In¬ 
dians maintain that they had their origin 
at the mythical Shipapu and that they 
slowly drifted southward to the Rio 
Grande, taking up their abode in the Rito 
de los Frijoles, or Tyuonyi, and con¬ 
structing there the cliff-dwellings found 
to-day excavated in the friable volcanic 
tufa. Long before the coming of the 
Spaniards they had abandoned the Rito, 
and, moving farther southward, sepa¬ 
rated into a number of autonomous vil¬ 
lage communities. According to Coro¬ 
nado, who visited the “Qu'irix” province 
in 1540, these Indians occupied 7 pueblos; 
40 years later Espejo found 5; while in 
1630 Benavides described the stock as 
numbering 4,000 people, in 7 towns ex¬ 
tending 10 leagues along the Rio Grande. 
See Bandelier (1) in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
i, 114, 1883, (2) ibid., iv, 139etseq., 1892, 
(3) Delight Makers, 1890. 

According to Loew this stock consti¬ 
tutes two dialectic groups, the first or 
Queres group comprising the inhabit¬ 
ants of Santo Domingo, Santa Ana, Sia, 
San Felipe, and Cochiti; the other, the 
Sitsime or Kawaiko group, comprehend¬ 
ing Laguna and Acoma with their outly¬ 
ing villages. 

The Keresan settlements are as follows, 
those marked with an asterisk being ex¬ 
tinct: Acoma, Acomita, Casa Blanca, 
Cieneguilla* Cochiti, Cubero* Cueva 
Pintada*, Encinal, Gipuy* Haatze* Ha- 
satch, Heashkowa*, Huashpatzena*, Ka- 
kanatzatia* Kashkachuti* Katzimo* Ko- 
hasaya* Kowina* Kuapa* Kuchtya* 
Laguna, Moquino*, Paguate, Pueblito, 
Puerto (?)*, Punyistyi, Rito* San Felipe, 
Santa Ana, Santo Domingo, Seemunah, 
Shumasitscha*, Sia, Tapitsiama*, Tipoti*, 
Tsiama, Wapuchuseamma, Washpashu- 
ka*, Yapashi*. The following pueblos, 


now extinct, were perhaps also Keresan: 
Alipoti, Ayqui, Cebolleta, Pelchiu, Pueblo 
del Encierro, San Mateo, Tashkatze, 
Tojagua. (f. w. h. ) 

Bierni'n. —Hodge, field notes, B. A.E., 1895 (Sandia 
name). Cherechos. —Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., 
xvn, 102,1871. Cheres. —Ibid., xvi, 114. Chu-cha- 
cas. —Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
v, 689, 1855 (applied to the language). Chu-cha- 
chas.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 479, 1878 
(after Lane, misprint). Cueres. —Humboldt, Atlas 
Nouv. Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Cuerez.— Simpson 
in Smithson. Rep. 1869, 334, 1871. Drinkers of the 
Dew. —Cushing in Johnson’s Cyclop., iv, 891, 1896 
(given as Zuni traditional name). Gueres. — 
Ogilby, America, 295,1671. Hores. —Onate (1598) 
in Doc. In6d., xvi, 265,1871 (probably identical). 
Ing-we-pi / -ra n -di-vi-he-ma n . —Hodge, field notes, B. 
A. E., 1895 (San Ildefonso Tewa name). Jerez. — 
Loew (1875) in Wheeler Survey Rep., vn, 338, 
1879 (probably identical). Kera. —Hervas, Idea 
dell’ Universo, xvii, 76, 1784. Keran. —Powell in 
Am. Nat., xiv, 604, Aug. 1880. Keras.— Malte- 
Brun, Geog., V, 318, 1826. Keres. —Pike, Expedi¬ 
tions, 220, 1810. Kes-whaw-hay. —Lane (1854) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689, 1855 (applied to 
language). Kweres. —Petitot, Diet. D&n£-Dindji6, 
xvii, 1876. Pabierni'n. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. 
E., 1895 (Isleta name). Qq’ueres. —Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, I, 114, 1883. Quera. —Hervas 
(1784) quoted by Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, 
v, 341,1847. Quera.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa¬ 
pers, I, 114, 1883. Queres.— Benavides, Memorial, 
20, 1630. Queres.— Villagran, Hist. Neuva Mex., 
155, 1610. Queres. —Benavides (1630) quoted by 
Gallatin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxvn, 305, 
1851. Quereses. —Sosa (1591) in Doc. In6d., xv, 248, 
1871. Querez. —Rivera, Diario y Derrot., leg. 784, 
1736. Queris. —Bandelier in Revue d’Ethnog., 
203, 1886. Queros. —Walch, Charte America, 1805. 
Quingas. —Graves (1854) in H. R. Misc. Doc. 38, 33d 
Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1854. Quires. —Espejo (1583) in 
Doc. In6d., xv, 122, 1871. Quirex. —Simpson in 
Smithson. Rep. 1869, map, 1871. Quiria. —Gallatin 
in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, lxxi, 1848. Quirix. — 
Castaneda ( ca . 1565) in Ternaux-Compans, Voy., 
IX, 110, 1838. Quiros.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 163, 
1744. Quivix.—Castaneda (ca. 1565) in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., ix, 182,1838. Xeres. —Rivera, Di¬ 
ario y Derrot., leg. 950, 1736. Zures. —Vetancurt 
(1693) ^Cr6nica, 315, 1871. 

Kernertok. A settlement of East Green¬ 
land Eskimo near Frederiksdal.—Med- 
delelser om Grbnland, xxv, 246, 1902. 

Kern River Shoshoneans. A small Sho- 
shonean group in s. California which dif¬ 
fers so much linguistically from all other 
peoples of this family as to form a major 
division, although numerically insignif¬ 
icant. It includes the Tubatulabal, who 
occupy the valley of Kern r. above the falls, 
and the Bankalachi of upper Deer cr. 

Keroff. Mentioned among a number of 
Upper Creek towns in H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 
24th Cong., 1st sess., 162, 1836. It prob¬ 
ably is a badly mutilated abbreviation of 
the name of a known Creek town, but is 
not identifiable in this form. The settle¬ 
ment appears to have been on the upper 
course of Coosa r. , Ala. 

Kershaw. See Cashciw. 

Kesa ( Q&sa). A Haida town on the w. 
coast of Graham id., Queen Charlotte 
group, Brit. Col. It was occupied by the 
Tadji-lanas before moving to Alaska.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281,1905. 

Keshkunuwu ( Qleckunuwu ‘bluejay 
fort’). A former Tlingit village in the 
Sitka country, Alaska. (J. R. s.) 


676 


KESHL AKCHUIS-—KEWAUGHTOHENEMACH 


[b. a. e. 


Keshlakchuis ( Ke'sh-l&ktchuish ). A for¬ 
mer Modoc settlement on the s. e. side of 
Tule (Rhett) lake, Modoc co., n e. Cal.— 
Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., n, pt. 1, 
xxxii, 1890. 

Keskaechquerem. Mentioned as if a 
former Canarsee village near Maspeth, on 
the w. end of Long id., N. Y., in deed of 
1638.—N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 14,1883. 

Keskistkonk. A former Nochpeem vil¬ 
lage which seems to have been on Hudson 
r., s. of the Highlands, in Putnam co., N. Y. 

Keskistkonek.—Van der Donck (1656) quoted by 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 80,1872. Kis Kight- 
konck.—Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 
303,1881 (used for the Nochpeem tribe). 

Kesmali (Kgs-md-li). A former village 
of the San Luis Obispo Indians of the 
Chumashan family, at Pt Sal, San Luis 
Obispo co., Cal.—Schumacher in Smith- 
son. Rep. 1874, 340,1875. 

Kespoogwit (‘land’s end’). One of the 
two divisions of the territory of the Mic- 
mac as recognized by themselves. Ac¬ 
cording to Rand it includes the districts of 
Eskegawaage, Shubenacadie, and Annap¬ 
olis (q. v.), embracing all of s. and e. 
Nova Scotia. In Frye’s list of 1760, 
Kashpugowitk and Keshpugowitk are 
mentioned as two of 14 Micmac bands or 
villages. These are evidently duplicates, 
as the same chief was over both, and were 
intended for the Kespoogwit division. 
The inhabitants are called Kespoog- 
witunak. See Micmac. (j. m. ) 

Kashpugowitk.—Frye (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., X, 115-116, 1809. Keshpugowitk.— 
Ibid, (mentioned separately, but evidently the 
same). Kespoogwit.—Rand, First Micmac Read¬ 
ing Book, 81,1875. Kespoogwituna'k.—Ibid, (the 
people of Kespoogwit). 

Kestaubuinck. A former Sintsink vil¬ 
lage in Westchester co., N. Y., between 
Singsing cr. and Croton r.; mentioned by 
Van der Donck in 1656.—Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 72, 79, 1872. 

Ket ( Q!et , ‘narrow strait’). A Haida 
town on Burnaby str., Moresby id., Queen 
Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was occu¬ 
pied by a branch of the Hagi-lanas, who 
from their town were called Keda-lanas.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905. 

Ketangheanycke. A village, probably of 
the Abnaki, near the mouth of Kennebec 
r., Me., in 1602-09.—Purchas (1625) 
quoted in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 156,1857. 

Ketchewaundaugenink (‘large lick at.’— 
Hewitt). A former Chippewa village on 
Shiawassee r., on the trail between Detroit 
and Saginaw bay, in lower Michigan, on a 
reservation sold in 1837. ( j. m. ) 

Big Lick.—Detroit treaty (1837) in U. S. Ind. 
Treat., 245,1873. Big salt lick.—Williams (1872) in 
Mich. Pion, Coll., II, 476, 1880. Che-won-der-gon- 
ing.—Ibid., 477. Ke-che-wan-dor-goning.—Ibid., 

476. Kech-e-waun-dau-gu-mink.—Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., Mich, map, 765, 1899. Ketchewaun¬ 
daugenink.—Saginaw treaty (proclaimed 1820) in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 142, 1873. Ketchewaundaug- 
umink.—Detroit treaty, op. cit. Ketchiwawiyan- 
daganing.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905. Keth-e-wan- 
don-gon-ing.—Williams, op. cit., 481. Saline.— 
Ibid., 476 (French name). Wan-dor-gon-ing.— 
Ibid., 477. 


Ketchigumiwisuwugi ( Ke tcigamiwisu - 
wqg\ ‘they go by the name of the sea’). 
A Sauk gens. 

Ka-che-kone-a-we'-so-uk.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 
1877 (trans. ‘sea’). Ke'tcigamiwisuwag'.—Wm. 
Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Ketgohittan (‘people of small-shark 
house’). Given as a subdivision of the 
Tlingit clan Nanyaayi, but in reality 
simply the name of those inhabiting a 
certain house. 

K ’e'tgo hit tan.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 25, 1889. OJA'tgu hit tan.—Swanton, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1904. 

Ketlalsm ( Ke'tlals'm , ‘ nipping grass ’, 
so called because deer come here in spring 
to eat the fresh grass). A Squawmish 
village community on the e. side of 
Howe sd.,' Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Ketlaynup. A body of Salish of Van¬ 
couver id., speaking the Cowichan dialect; 
pop. 24 in 1882.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1882, 
258. 

Ketnas-hadai (K^etnas :had'a'i , ‘sea- 
lion house people’ [?]). Given by Boas 
(Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, ?7,1889) 
as the name of a subdivision of the Yaku- 
lanas, a family of the Raven clan of the 
Haida of s. w. Alaska; but it is in reality 
only a house name belonging to that 
family. There seems to be an error in 
the designation, the word for ‘sea-lion’ 
being qa-i. ( j. r. s. ) 

Ketsilind (KetslWnd, ‘people of the Rio 
Chiquito ruin’). A division of the Jica- 
rilla who claim that their former home 
was s. of Taos pueblo, N. Mex. They are 
possibly of mixed Picuris descent. 

(j. M.) 

Keuchishkeni ( Ke-utchishxe'ni , ‘w T here 
the wolf rock stands ’). A former Modoc 
camping place on Hot cr., near Little 
Klamath lake, n. Cal.—Gatschet in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., n, pt. 1, xxxii, 1890. 

Kevalingamiut. A tribe of Eskimo 
whose country extended from C. Sep- 
pings and C. Krusenstern, Alaska, inland 
to Nunatak r. They were an offshoot of 
the Nunatogmiut, reenforced by outlaws 
from the Kinugumiut and Kaviagmiut. 
The main body of the tribe is now found 
about Pt Hope and farther n., having 
emigrated on account of disease and lack 
of food, and expelled the Tigaramiut from 
their northern hunting grounds. Their 
villages are Kechemudluk, Kivualinak, 
and Ulezara. 

Kevalinye Mutes.—Kelly, Arct. Eskimos, chart, 
1890. Kevalinyes.—Ibid., 13. Kivalinag-miut 
(Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 115,1902. 

Kevilkivashalah. A body of Salish of 
Victoria superintendency, Vancouver id. 
Pop. 31 in 1882, when last separately 
enumerated. 

Kevil-kiva-sha-lah.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1882, 258. 

Kewatsana ( Kewatsdna , ‘no ribs’). An 
extinct division of the Comanche.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1045,1896. 

Kewaughtokenemach. Given as a divi- 


BULL. 30] 


KEWIGOSHKEEM—KHABENAPO 


677 


sion of the Okinagan that lived 30 m. 
above Priests rapids, on Columbia r., 
Wash. 

Ke-waught-chen-unaughs.—Ross, Adventures, 290, 
1849. Ke-waugh-tohen-emachs.—Ibid., 137. 

Kewigoshkeem. A former Chippewa or 
Ottawa village, named after a chief who 
flourished in the latter part of the 18th 
century; situated on Grand r., at or near 
the present Grand Rapids, Mich., on 
land ceded to the United States by the 
treaty of Chicago, Aug. 29, 1821, pro¬ 
claimed Mar. 25, 1832. Under this treaty 
half a section of land near the village was 
granted to Charles and Medart Beaubien, 
sons of Mannabenaqua. 

Ke-wi-go shkeem.—Treaty (proclaimed 1832) in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 154, 1873. Ke-wi-go-sh-kum.— 
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Mich, map, 1899. 
Kewigushkum.—Bennett (1779) in Mich. Pion. 
Coll., ix, 393, 1886 (the chief). 

Keya. The Badger clan of the Tewa 
pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, and 
San Udefonso, N. Mex.—Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896. 

Keyatiwankwi ( K’eyatiwankwi , ‘place 
of upturning or elevation’). The first of 
the mythic settling places of the Zuiii 
after their emergence from the under¬ 
world.—Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 
388, 1896. 

Keyauwee. A small tribe formerly liv¬ 
ing in North Carolina, affiliated with the 
Tutelo, Saponi, and Occaneechi. Nothing 
remains of their language, but they per¬ 
haps belonged to the Siouan family, from 
the fact of their intimate association with 
well known Siouan tribes of the E. In 
1701 Lawson (Carolina, 1714, 87-89, repr. 
1860) found them in a palisaded village 
about 30 m. n. e. of Yadkin r., near the 
present Highpoint, Guilford co., N. C. 
Around the village were large fields of 
corn. At that time they were about 
equal in number to the Saponi and had, 
as chief, Keyauwee Jack, who was by birth 
a Congaree, but had obtained the chief¬ 
taincy by marriage with their “queen.” 
Lawson says most of the men wore mus¬ 
taches or whiskers, an unusual custom 
for Indians. At the time of this travel¬ 
er’s visit the Keyauwee were on the 
oint of joining the Tutelo and Saponi for 
etter protection against their enemies. 
Shortly afterward they, together with 
the Tutelo, Saponi, Occaneechi, and Sha- 
kori, moved down toward the settlements 
about Albemarle sd., the five tribes 
with one or two others not named num¬ 
bering then only about 750 souls. In 
1716 Gov. Spots wood of Virginia pro¬ 
posed to settle the Keyauwee with the 
Eno and Sara at Enotown on the frontier 
of North Carolina, but was prevented 
by the opposition of that colony. They 
moved southward with the Sara, and per¬ 
haps also the Eno, to Pedee r., S. C., some 
time in 1733. On Jefferys’ map of 1761 
their village is marked on the Pedee 
above that of the Sara, about the boun¬ 


dary between the two Carolinas. With 
this notice they disappear from history, 
having probably been absorbed by the 
Catawba. (j. m. ) 

Keawe.—Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., 1,134, map, 1761. 
Keawee.—Bowen, map of the Brit. Am. Planta¬ 
tions, 1760. Keeawawes.—Doc. of 1716 in N. C. 
Rec., 242,1886. Keeowaws.—Ibid. 243. Keeowee.—> 
Vaugondy, map Partie de 1’Amer. Sept., 1755. 
Keiauwees.—Lawson (1701), Carolina, 384, 1860. 
Keomee.—Moll, map of Car., 1720 'misprint). 
Kewawees.—Byrd (1733), Hist. Div. L.ne, n. 22 
1866. Keyauwee.—Lawson (1701), Carolina, 87, 
repr. 1860. Keyawees.—Brickell, Nat. Hist. N. 
Car., 343,1737. 

Keyerhwotket (‘old village’). A vil¬ 
lage of the Hwotsotenne on Bulkley r., 
Brit. Col., lat. 55°. 

Keyar-hwotqat.—Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s, 27, 
1902. ’xeyaahwotqat.—Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can., x, map, 1892. Kyahuntgate.—Tolmie and 
Dawson, Vocabs. B. C., map, 1884. Kyahwilgate.— 
Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can. ,20b, 1881. 

Keyukee. A former Cherokee town; 
locality undetermined.—Doc. of 1799 
quoted by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
144, 1887. 

Kezche. A Tatshiautin village on Tache 
r., Brit. Col., under the Babine and 
Upper Skeena River agency; pop. 24 in 
1904. 

Grand Rapids.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. 2, 70, 1902. 
’Keztce.—Morice, Notes on W. Dt§n6s, 26, 1902. 
Kus-che-o-tin.—Dawson in Rep. Can. Geol. Surv., 
30b, 1881. Kustsheotin.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. B. C., 123b, 1884. 

Keze (‘barbed like a fishhook,’ a deris¬ 
ive name, alluding to their cross disposi¬ 
tion) . A band of the Sisseton Sioux, an 
offshoot of the Kakhmiatonwan.—Dor¬ 
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897. 

Kezonlathut. A Takulli village on Mc¬ 
Leod lake, Brit. Col.; pop. 96 in 1904. 

McLeod’s Lake.— Can. Ind. Aff., 1904, pt. ii, 74,1905. 
Qizonlathut. —Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., x, 
109, 1892. 

Kfwetragottine (‘ mountain people ’). 
A division of the Kawchodinne living s. 
of Ft Good Hope, along Mackenzie r., 
Mackenzie Ter., Can. 

Kfwe-tpa-Gottine.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Es- 
claves, 362,1891. 

Khaamotene. Given, seemingly in error, 
as a subdivision of the Tolowa formerly 
dwelling at the mouth of Smith r., Cal., 
in the village of Khoonkhwuttunne, and 
at the forks in a village called Khosatunne. 

Qa'-a-mo' te'-ne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 236,1890. Smith River Indians.—Ibid. 

Khaap. A body of Ntlakyapamuk un¬ 
der the Kamloops-Okanagan agency, Brit. 
Col.; pop. 23 in 1901, the last time the 
name appears. 

Khaap. —Can. Ind. Aff. 1901, pt. 2, 166. Skaap.— 
Ibid., 1885,196. 

Khabemadolil. A Porno village on up¬ 
per Clear lake, Cal.—Kroeber, MS., Univ. 
Cal., 1903. 

Khabenapo (‘stonevillage’, or ‘stonepeo¬ 
ple’). A Porno division or band on Kel¬ 
sey cr., in Big valley, on the w. side of 
Clear lake, Cal. They numbered 195 in 
1851. 

Ca-ba-na-po.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 136, 1853. Habe-napo.— 
Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 109, 


678 


KHACHTAIS-KHEMNTCHAN 


tB. A. K. 


1853. Ha-bi-na-pa. —McKee, op. cit. Ka-bi-na- 
pek.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 204, 1877. 

Khachtais. A former Siuslaw village on 
Siuslaw r., Oreg. 

K’qatc-^ais'. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
230, 1890. 

Khahitan ( Gha-hita'n , pi. Gha-hita'neo, 
‘ermine people’, from gha-i ‘ermine’, 
hita'neo ‘people’). The Cheyenne name of 
an unidentified Pueblo tribe of the Rio 
Grande, known to the Cheyenne through 
visits and trade intercourse. They for¬ 
merly accompanied Mexican traders in 
their journeys to the camps of the Plains 
tribes, and used Spanish as well as theif 
own language. They formerly cut their 
hair across below the ears, with a short 
side plait wrapped with strings of white 
ermine skin, but have now adopted the 
ordinary hairdress style of the Plains 
tribes. From information of Cheyenne 
who met some of them on a recent visit 
to Taos, N. Mex., it is known that they 
are distinct from Ute, Navaho, Jicarilla, 
or Taos Indians, and live farther s. than 
any of these. They may possibly be the 
Picuris. (j. m.) 

Gha-hi-taneo.—Mooney, MS. Cheyenne notes, B. 
A. E., 1906. Ka-he'-ta-ni-o.—Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862. 

Khaik. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village 
on the Yukon, Alaska. 

Khaigamut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. Khaigamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, map, 1884. 

Khaikuchum. A former Siuslaw village 
on Siuslaw r., Oreg. 

K’qai'-ku-tc’um'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 230,1890. 

Khainanaitetunne. A former village of 
the Tututni, the inhabitants of which were 
exterminated, except two boys, one of 
whom was an old man at Siletz agency, 
Oreg., in 1884. 

Qa'-i-na'-na-i-te' qunne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 236, 1890. 

Khaishuk. A former Yaquina village on 
thex. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 

Kqai'-cuk.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229, 
1890. 

Khaiyukkhai. A former Yaquina vil¬ 
lage on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 
Kqai-yuk'-kqai.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 229, 1890. 

Khaiyumitu. A former Siuslaw village 
on Siuslaw r., Oreg. 

K’qai-yu'-mi-^u.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 230, 1890. 

Khakaiauwa. Said to be a collective 
name for the Porno villages on upper 
Clear lake, Cal.—Kroeber, MS., Univ. 
Cal., 1903. Cf. Khana. 

Khakhaich. A former Siuslaw village 
on Siuslaw r., Oreg. 

Kqa-kqaitc'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
230, 1890. 

Khalakw. A former Siuslaw village on 
Siuslaw r., Oreg. 

Q,a-lak’w'.—Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
230, 1890. 

Khaltso (‘yellow bodies’). A Navaho 
clan, the descendants of two daughters of 
an Apache father. 


7/altso.—Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30, 1897. 
i/altsodine 1 .—Ibid. Qalto.—Matthews in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 103, 1890. Qaltsojhne.—Ibid. 

Khana (Porno: ‘on the water’, or ‘on 
[Clear] lake’). A term which seems to 
have been descriptively applied to the 
Porno of Clear lake, Cal. Bartlett (1854) 
gives a H’hana vocabulary, which is 
Porno, as coming from the upper Sacra¬ 
mento, but obtained it from a stray Porno 
at San Diego. 

H’hana.—Bartlett in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 492, 
1877. Khana.—S. A. Barrett, inf’n, 1906. 

Kharatanumanke. Given as a Mandan 
gens, but evidently merely a band. 

Ho-ra-ta'-mu-make.—Morgan, A*nc. Sot*., 158, 1877. 
Qa-ra-ta' nu-man'-ke.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
241, 1897 (given with a query). Wolf.—Morgan, 
op. cit. 

Khashhlizhni (‘ mud ’). A Navaho 
clan. 

i/asll'zeflne 1 .—Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30, 
1897. ifasli'zni.—Ibid. Qaclij.—Matthews in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 103, 1890. QacHjni.—Ibid. 

Khaskankhatso (‘ much yucca ’). A Nav¬ 
aho clan. 

//askan/zatso.—Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30, 
1897. JJaskan/mtsodlne 1 .—Ibid. Q,acka n qatso.— 
Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ill, 103, 1890. 
Qacka n qatsbfhne.—Ibid. 

Khauweshetawes (‘spread-out irriga¬ 
tion ditch’). A Maricopa rancheria on 
the Rio Gila, s. Ariz.—ten Kate, inf’n, 
1888. 

Khawina (‘on the water’). The name, 
in the Upper Clear Lake dialect, of the 
Lower Clear Lake Porno village at Sul¬ 
phur Bank, Lake co., Cal.—Kroeber, 
MS., Univ. Cal., 1903. 

Khdhasiukdhin (‘dwelling place among 
the yellow flowers’; i. e., ‘sunflower 
place’ [?]). An ancient Osage village on 
Neosho r., Kans. 

Qtfasi u^i 0 .—Dorsey, Osage MS. voeab., B. A.E., 
1883. Qdhasi ukdhi n .—Ibid. 

Kheerghia. A former Tututni village 
on the coast of Oregon, about 25 m. s. of 
the mouth of Pistol r. 

Mun-kqe'-tun.—Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ill, 
236, 1890. Qe-e-rxi'-a.—Ibid. 

Khemnichan (‘mountain-water wood,’ 
from a hill covered with timber that ap¬ 
pears to rise out of the water). A band of 
the Mdewakanton Sioux. According to 
Pike they were living in 1811 in a village 
near the head of L. Pepin, Minn., on the 
site of the present Red Wing, under chief 
Tatankamani (‘Walking Buffalo’); in 
1820 they lived on L. Pepin, under chief 
Red Wing. Long, in 1824, *ound them in 
two small villages, one on Mississippi r., 
the other on Cannon r., aggregating 150 
people in 20 lodges. Shakea was then 
their chief, subordinate to Wabeshaw of 
the Kiyuksa. They were under Wakute 
(‘Shooter’) at the time of the Sioux out¬ 
break in 1862. 

Eambosandata.—Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., I, 263, 
1858 (trans. ‘mountain beside the water’). Ean- 
bosandata.—Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., i, 380, 
1824. Hamine-chan.—Prescott in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, II, 171,1852. He-mini-caij. — Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 215, 1897. Hemnica,—Ibid. He* 


BULL. 30] 


KHEYATAOTONWE-KHOSMININ 


679 


mni'-caq. —Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 73, 1852. 
Ki-mni-can. —Ramsey-in Ind. Aff. Rep., 81, 1850 
(trans. ‘those who live about the tree on the 
mountain near the water’). Qe-mini-tca 1 '.— Dor¬ 
sey, op. cit. Qemnitca. —Ibid. Raymneecha. — 
Neill, Hist. Minn., xliv, 589, 1858 (so designated 
because their village was near a hill, ha; ‘ water,’ 
min; and ‘wood,’ chan). Red Wing’s. —Long, 
Exped. St PetersR., I, 380,1824. ReminicaBand. — 
Smithson. Misc. Coll., XIV, art. 5, 8, 1878. Rem- 
nica.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 84, 1858. Remnichah.— 
Ibid., 327. Shooter.— Ibid., 144, note (trans. of 
Wakute, name of the chief). Talangamanae. — 
Shea, Discov., Ill, 1852. Wahcoota band. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 282, 1854. Wah-koo-tay. —Neill, Hist. 
Minn., 589, 1858 (chief’s name). Wahkuti band. — 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1855, 64, 1856. Wahuteband.— Mc- 
Kusick in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863,314,1864. Wakootay’s 
band. —Pike (1806) quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn., 
289, 1858 (cf. Coues, Pike’s Exped., I, 62, 69, 88, 
1895). Wakuta band.— Gale, Upper Miss., 252,1867. 
Wa-ku-te. —Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858. 
Wakute’s band.— McKusick in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 
316, 1864. Waukouta band. —Warren in Minn. 
Hist. Coll., v, 156,1885. Weakaote.— Long, Exped. 
St Peter’s R., 380, 1824. 

Kheyataotonwe (‘ village back from the 
river’). A Mdewakanton Sioux band 
formerly occupying the country near Har¬ 
riet and Calhoun lakes, Minn., driven, 
according to Neill (Hist. Minn., 590, 
1858), from L. Calhoun by the Chippewa 
and settled in 1858 near Oak Grove, Minn. 
Heyata-otoqwe.— Dorseyinl5th Rep. B. A.E.,215, 
1897. fteyata tonwan. —Riggs, letter to Dorsey, 
Mar.28, 1884. Lake Calhoun band.— Parker, Minn. 
Handbook, 140, 1857. Ma-rpi-wi-ca-xta. —Neill, 
Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858 (name of the chief). 
Q,eyata-oto'>we. —Hakewashte quoted by Dorsey, 
op. cit. Q,eyata-to , *wa n . —Riggs quoted by Dorsey, 
op.cit. Reyataotonwe. — Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., 
i, 263,1872 (‘island people’). Ri-ga-ta-a-ta-wa. — 
Smithson. Misc. Coll., xiv, art. 6, 8, 1878. Sky- 
Man.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858. 

Kheyatawichasha (‘ people back from 
the river’). The Brule Teton Sioux who 
formerly inhabited the sand hills and high 
country on the Nebraska-Dakota border, 
subsequently placed under the Rosebud 
agency, under the name Upper Brules. 
The Indian Report for 1885 gives their 
number (including the Loafer or Wag- 
lughe and the Wazhazha) as 6,918. 

Heyata wicasa. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,218, 
1897. Highland Brule.— Robinson, letter to Dorsey, 
1879. Highland Sicangu. —Ibid. Northern Brule. — 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 178,1875. Qeyata-witcaca. —Dorsey, 
op. cit. Sicangu. —Cleveland, letter to Dorsey, 1884 
(erroneously refers only to the Upper Bruits, the 
Lower Brul6s being called Kutawicasa). Upper 
Brules. —Ibid. Upper Platte Indians.— Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 209, 1866 (includes most, probably all, the 
Upper Bruits). 

Khidhenikashika ( Qid/j e'nikad/^a, ‘ ea¬ 
gle people’). A gens of the Quapaw.— 
Horsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229,1897. 

Khiltat. A Tenankutchin village on 
Tanana r. at the mouth of Nabesna r., 
lat. 63° 40 / , Alaska. 

Khilukh. A former Yaquina village on 
the n. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 

K’qil'-uq. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229, 
1890. 

Khinonascarant (‘at the base of the 
mountain.’—Hewitt). A Huron village 
in Ontario in 1637.—Jes. Rel. for 1637, 
126, 1858. 

Khinukhtunne (‘ people among the small 
undergrowth’). A former village of the 
Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., Oreg. 


K’qi-nuq' qunne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 232, 1890. 

Khioetoa. A former village of the Neu¬ 
trals, apparently situated a short distance 
e. of the present Sandwich, Ontario, Can¬ 
ada. (j. N. B. H.) 

Khioetoa.—Jes. Rel. for 1641, 80, 1858. Kioetoa.— 
Jes. Rel.,in, index, 1858. St. Michel.—Jes. Rel. for 
1641, 80, 1858 (mission name). 

Khitalaitthe. A former Yaquina village 
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 
Kqi'-^a-lai'-t’pe.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
ill, 229, 1890. 

Khitanumanke (‘ eagle ’). Mentioned as 
a Mandan gens, but evidently only a band. 
Ki-ta'-ne-make.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., * 158, 1877. 
Qi-ta' nu-man'-ke.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
241,1897 (given with a query). 

Khlimkwaish (‘ man goes along with the 
current’). A former Alsea village on the 
s. side of Alsea r., Oreg. 

Kqllm-kwaic'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
230,1890. 

Khlokhwaiyutslu (‘deep lake’). A 
former Alsea village on the n. side of 
Alsea r., Oreg. 

Kqlo'-qwai yu-tslu.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, III, 230,1890. 

Khloshlekhwuche. A former village of 
the Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg. 

K’qloc'-le-qwut'-tce.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 234, 1890. 

Khoalek. A Porno village on upper 
Clear lake, Cal.—Kroeber, MS., Univ. 
Cal., 1903. 

Khoghanhlani (‘many huts’). A Nav- 
aho clan. 

//ofjfan/ani.—Matthews, Navaho Legends, 31, 1897. 
Qo-ganlani.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
104, 1890. 

Khogoltlinde. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil¬ 
lage on Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 60 in 
1844. 

Khogoltlinde.—Zagoskin quoted by I’etroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 37,1844. Khogotlinde.—Zagoskin, 
Desc. Russ. Poss. Am., map, 1844. 

Kholkh. A former Yaquina village on 
the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 

K’qolq.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229, 
1890. 

Khomtinin (‘southerners’). A generic 
term applied by all Yokuts tribes to those 
s. of them, especially if of their own 
linguistic family. Cf. Khosminin. 

Khonagani (‘place of walking’). A 
Navaho clan. 

Honaga'ni.—Matthews Navaho Legends, 30, 1897. 
Qonaga‘ni.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, m, 
104, 1890. 

Khoonkhwuttunne. A former village of 
the Tolowa at the mouth of Smith r., 
Cal.; incorrectly given by Horsey as a 
Khaamotene village. 

Qo-on'-qwut-^un'ne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 236, 1890 (Tututni name). Q,u-wun'- 
kqwut.—Ibid. (Naltunne name). 

Khosatunne. A former village of the 
Tolowa on the forks of Smith r., Cal., 
near the Oregon line. 

Q‘o'-sa qun'ne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
236,1890 (Tututni name). Qwa n '-s‘a-a'-tun.—Ibid. 
(Naltunne name). 

Khosminin (‘ northerners ’). A generic 
term applied by all Yokuts tribes to those 
n. of them, whether of their own or of 
alien stock. Cf. Khomtinin. 


680 


KHOTACHI—KHWAKHAMATU 


[b. a. e. 


Josimnin.—Arroyo de la Cuesta, Idiomas Califor- 
nias, 1821, MS. trans., B. A. E. Khosminin.—A. L. 
Kroeber, inf n, 1905. 

Khotachi (‘elk’). An extinct Iowa 
gens, coordinate with the Hotachi gens of 
the Missouri. Its subgentes were Unpe- 
ghakhanye, Unpeghayine, Unpeghathre- 
cheyine, and Homayine. 

Ho'-dash.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Ho'- 
tatci.—Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1879. 
Q,o'-ta-tci.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 238,1897. 

Khotana. A name applied to several 
Athapascan tribes of lower Yukon r., 
Cook’s inlet, and Kovukuk r., Alaska, as 
the lvaiyuhkhotana, Knaiakhotana, Una- 
khotana, andKoyukukhotana; and some¬ 
times to these tribes collectively. The 
name contains the term for ‘people’ in 
their dialects. (J. R. s.) 

Khotltacheche. A former village of the 
Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg. 

Qotl'-ta-tce'-tce.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
111,234,1890. 

Khoughitchate. A village, probably of 
an Athapascan tribe, above the n. mouth 
of Innoko r., w. Alaska.—Zagoskin in 
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Khra (‘ eagle ’). A subgens of the 

Cheghita gens of the Missouri. 

Kha'-a.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877 (Eagle). 
Khu-a nika-shing-ga.—Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 25, 1877. Q,ra.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 246, 1897. 

Khrahune ( Qra' hiin'-e, ‘ ancestral or 
gray eagle’). A subgens of the Che¬ 
ghita gens of the Iowa.—Dorsev in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 238, 1897. 

Khrakreye( Qra'qre'-ye, ‘ spotted eagle’). 
A subgens of the Cheghita gens of the 
Iowa.—Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 238, 
1897. 

Khrapathan (Qra' pa ga”, ‘bald eagle’). 
A subgens of the Cheghita gens of the 
Iowa.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 238, 
1897. 

Khtalutlitunne. A former village of the 
Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg. 

Q,ta'-lut-lF }unne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 234, 1890. 

Khube ( Qube, ‘ mysterious ’). A subgens 
of the Mandhinkagaghe gens of the 
Omaha.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
228, 1897. 

Khudhapasan (‘bald eagle’). A sub¬ 
gens of the Tsishuwashtake gens of the 
Osage. 

Qa n sa n 'u'niqk‘acin'a.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
234,1897 (Sycamore people). Qii^a' pa sa“'.—Ibid. 

Khulhanshtauk. A former Yaquina vil¬ 
lage on Yaquina r., at the site of Elk City, 
Benton co., Oreg. 

Kqul-hanc't-auk.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 229,1890. 

Khuligichakat. A Jugelnute village on 
Shageluk r., Alaska. 

Khuligichagat.—Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. Am., 
map, 1844. Khuligichakat.—Zagoskin quoted by 
Petroffin, 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. 

Xhulikakat. A Kaiyuhkhotana village 
on Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 11 in 1844.— 
Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 37, 1884. 


Khulpuni. A former Cholovone village 
on lower San Joaquin r., Cal. 

Chulpun.—Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 51, 
1821. Guylpunes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 
1861. Hulpunes.—Kotzebue, New Voy., 146, 1830. 
Khoulpouni.—Choris, Voy. Pitt., 5, 1822. 

Khunanilinde. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil¬ 
lage near the headwaters of Kuskokwim 

r. , w. Alaska; pop. 9 in 1880. 

Khounanilinde.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., & 

s. , xxi, map, 1850. Khunanilinde.—Zagoskin as 
quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37,1884. 

Khundjalan ( Qundj-ala / 1 , ‘wear red ce¬ 
dar on their heads’). A subgens of the 
Ponka gens of the Kansa.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 231, 1897. 

Khundtse (Qtimse', ‘red cedar’). A 
subgens of the Panhkawashtake gens of 
the Osage.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
234, 1897. 

Khunechuta. A former Tututni village 
on the n. side of Rogue r., Oreg. 
Qun-e'-tcuqa'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 233, 1890. 

Khuniliikhwut. A former Chetco vil¬ 
lage on the s. side of Chetco cr., Oreg. 
Q’u'-ni-li-P-kqwut.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 236, 1890. 

Khuwaihus. A former Kuitsh village on 
lower Umpqua r., Oreg. 

plti'-ai-am'-ilp kqu-wai'-hu.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 231, 1890. Kqu-wai'-hus.— Ibid. 

Khuy a (‘ white eagle ’). The 10th Kansa 
gens. Its subgentes are Husada and 
Wabinizhupye. 

Eagle.—Dorsey in Am. Nat., 671,1885. Hu-e'-ya.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Q,iiya.— Dorsey, op. 
cit. White Eagle.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
231, 1897. 

Khuyeguzhinga (‘hawk that has a tail 
like a king eagle’). A subgens of the 
Ibache gens of the Kansa. 

Chicken-hawk.—Dorsey in Am. Nat., 674, July 1885. 
Qiiyegu jihga.—Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 
1897. 

Khwaishtunnetunne (‘people of the 
gravel’). A former Tututni village near 
the mouth of a small stream locally 
called Wishtenatin, after the name of the 
settlement, that enters the Pacific in s. w. 
Oregon about 10 in. s. of Pistol r., at a 
place later known as Hustenate, also .from 
the aboriginal village name. The inhab¬ 
itants, who numbered 66 in 1854, claimed 
the country as far as a small trading post 
known as the Whale’s Head, about 27 
m. s. of the mouth of Rogue r. If there 
are any survivors they reside on Siletz 
res., Oreg. 

Khust-e-net.—Schumacher in Bull. G. and G. Surv., 
in, 31, 1877. Khust-e-nete. — Ibid., 33. Qwai'- 
ctun-ne' ijunne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 236, 1890 (‘people among the gravel’: own 
name). Qwin'-ctun-ne'-tun.—Ibid. (Naltunne 
name.) Whash-to-na-ton.—Abbott, MS. Coquille 
census, B. A. E., 1858. Whish-ten-eh-ten.—Gibbs, 
MS. on coast tribes, B. A. E. Whistanatin.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, Vi, 702,1857. Wish-ta-nah-tin.— 
Kautz, MS. Toutouten census, B. A. E., 1855. 
Wishtanatan.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 18, 
1860. Wish-te-na-tin.—Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
495,1854. Wis'-tu-a-a-ti' tene'.—Everette, Tututgne 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans: ‘people by the 
springs’). 

Khwakhamaiu. The Pomo who lived 
about Ft Ross, the early Russian settle- 


BULL. 30] 


KHWESHTUNNE—KIASKUSIS 


681 


ment on the coast in Sonoma co., Cal. 
The origin of the name is not known. 

(s. A. B.) 

Chwachamaju.—Wrangell, Ethnol.Nach., 80, 1839. 
Chwachmaja.—Ludewig, Aborig. Lang., 170, 1858. 
Khwakhamaiu.—S. A. Barrett, inf’n, 1905. North¬ 
erners.—Ibid. Severnovskia.—Ibid. Severnovze.— 
Ibid. Severnovzer.—Ibid. Severnovzi.—Ibid. 

Khweshtunne. A former Mishikhwut- 
metunne village on Coquille r., Oreg., next 
above Coquille city. 

Qwec' }unne.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
232,1890. 

Khwunrghunme. Seemingly the Tolowa 
name of a Yurok village on the coast of 
California, just s. of the mouth of Kla¬ 
math r. 

Kal'-a-qu-ni-me'-ne tun'-ne.— Dorsey, Chetco MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 183, 1884 (Cheteo name). Kal- 
hwun'-un-me'-e-ni te'-ne.—Dorsey, Smith River MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. ftwun-rxun'-me.—Dorsey in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 237, 1890 (Naltunne 
name). 

Kiabaha. A village or tribe, now ex¬ 
tinct, said to have existed between Mata¬ 
gorda bay and Maligne [Colorado] r., 
Tex. The name seems to have been 
given to Joutel in 1687 by the Ebahamo 
Indians, probably closely affiliated to the 
Karankawa, whose domain was in this 
region. A rancheria called Cabras (ap¬ 
parently the same name as, Kiabaha), 
with 26 inhabitants, was mentioned in 
1785 as being near the presidio of Bahia 
and the mission of Espiritu Santo de Zu¬ 
niga (q. v.) on the lower Kio San Antonio 
(Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 659, 1886). 
See Gatschet, Karankawa Ind., 23, 35, 
1891. Cf. Kabaye. (a. c. f.) 

Cabras. — Bancroft, op. cit. Kiabaha.—Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 288, 1878. Kiaboha.— 
Shea, note in Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78,1870. 
Kiahoba.—Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
i, 137, 1846. Kiobobas.—Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. 
Niabaha. Joutel (1687) in French, op. cit., 152. 

Kiaken ( Kiake'n , ‘palisade’ or ‘fenced 
village’). Two Squawmish village com¬ 
munities in British Columbia; one on the 
left bank of Squawmisht r., the other on 
Burrard inlet.—Hill-Tout in Bep. Brit. 
A. A. S., 474, 475, 1900. 

Kiakima ( K’ya/kima , ‘home of the 
eagles’). A former Zuni pueblo at the 
s. w. base of Thunder mtn., 4 m. s. e. of 
Zuni pueblo, w. N. Mex. It was occu¬ 
pied in the 16th and 17th centuries as 
one of the “Seven Cities of Cibola,” and, 
according to Zuni tradition, was the scene 
of the death of the negro Estevanico, \vho 
had been a companion of Cabeza de Yaca, 
and had accompanied Fray Marcos de Niza 
on his journey from Mexico in 1539; but 
historical evidence places that event at Ha- 
wikuh. It was a visita of the mission of 
Halona, probably from 1629,and contained 
about 800 inhabitants, but on the in¬ 
surrection of the Pueblos against Spanish 
authority in 1680, Kiakima was perma¬ 
nently abandoned, the inhabitants fleeing 
to Thunder mtn. for safety. .See Bande- 
lier, cited below; Mindeleff in 8th Rep. 


B. A. E., 85, 1891; Lowery, Span. Settle¬ 
ments in U. S., 1901. (f. w. h.) 

Caquima.—Vetancurt (1693) in Teatro Mex., in, 
320,1871. Caquimay.—Doc. of 1635 quoted by Ban- 
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 165, 1890. Caqui- 
neco.—Ladd, Story of N. Mex.,34, 1891. Coaque- 
ria.—Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 133, 1871. 
Coquimas.—Pike, Exped., 3d map, 1810. Coquimo.— 
Bandelier quoted in The Millstone, ix, 65, Apr. 
1884. Heshota O’aquima.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 
159,1893 (misprint). Ke’ia -ki-me. —Powell, 2d Rep. 
B. A. E., xxvi, 1883. K’ia-ki-ma.—Cushing in The 
Millstone, IX, 55, Apr. 1884. K’ia' ki me.—Ibid., 
225, Dec. 1884. K’iakime.—Cushing, Zuni Folk 
Tales, 65, 1901. Kyakima.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, III, 133,1890. K’ya'-ki-me. — Cushing 
in Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vii, 156, 
1890. O’aquima.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 158, 
1893 (misprint). Qa-quima.—Bandelier in Revue 
d’Ethnog., 201,1886. Quaguina.—Senex, map, 1710. 
Quaquima.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 41, 
1884. Quaquina.—De l’lsle, Carte Mex. et Flo- 
ride, 1703. Quiaquima.—Bandelier in Jour. Am. 
Ethnol. and Archseol., ill, 16, 1892. Q,uia-Q,uima.— 
Ibid., 29. Quiquimo.—Giissefeld, Charte Nord Am., 
1797. 

Kialdagwuns ( KUci'ldagwAm , ‘Sand¬ 
pipers’). A subdivision of the Sagui- 
gitunai, a family belonging to the Eagle 
clan of the Haida. 

Klia'ldagw.vns.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274,1905. 
Kyia/ltkoangas.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes of 
Canada, 23,1898. 

Kialegak. A Yuit Eskimo village near 
Southeast cape, St Lawrence id., Bering 
sea. 

Kahgallegak.—Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886. 
Kgallegak.—Tebenkof (1849) quoted by Baker, 
Geog.Dict. Alaska, 1902. Kialegak.—Russ, chart, 
quoted by Baker, ibid. Kiallegak.—Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Kialinek. A former village of the Ang- 
magsalingmiut on the e. coast of Green¬ 
land, lat. 66° 50', where they hunted the 
narwhal and the bear throughout the 
year. Some of its people are said to 
have emigrated northward.—Meddelelser 
om Gronland, ix, 382, 1889. 

Kiamislia. A former Caddo village at 
the junction of Iviamichi and Red rs., 
in the present Choctaw nation, Okla. It 
contained 20 families in 1818. 

Cayameechee.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
255, 1822 (the river). Kamissi—Thevenot quoted 
by Shea, Discov., 268, 1852 (identical?). Kiam- 
isha.—Trimble (1818) in Morse, op. cit., 259 (the 
river). Kio Michie.—Rubio (1840) in H. R. Doc. 25, 
27th Cong.,2d sess., 14,1841. 

Kianusili ( Kia'nusill , ‘cod people’). 
A family belonging to the Raven clan of 
the Haida. Kidn is the name for the 
common cod. This family group formerly 
lived on the w. coast of Queen Charlotte 
ids., near Hippa id., Brit. Col. (j. r. s.) 

KianosilL—Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Canada, II, 123, 1895. Kia'nusill.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 271, 1905. Kya'nusla.—Boas, 12th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Canada, 22,1898. 

Kiashita. A former pueblo of the Jemez 
in Guadalupe canyon, n. of Jemez pueblo, 
N. Mex. 

Kiashita.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895. 
Q,uia-shi-dshi.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
207, 1892. 

Kiaskusis (‘ small gulls ’ ). A small Cr je 
band residing in 1856 around the fourth 
lake from Lac Qu’Apelle, N. W. Ter., 


682 


KIASUTHA-KICHAI 


[B. a. e. 


Canada. They were formerly numerous, 
but had become reduced to 30 or 40 fam¬ 
ilies owing to persistent Blackfeet raids.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
237,1862. 

Kiasutha (alias Guyasuta, ‘it sets up a 
cross/—Hewitt). A chief of some promi¬ 
nence as an orator in the Ohio region 
about 1760-1790. Although called a Sen¬ 
eca, he probably belonged to the mixed 
band of detached Iroquois in Ohio com¬ 
monly known as Mingo, who sided with 
the French while their kinsmen of the 
New York confederacy acted as allies of 
the English. As a young warrior he ac¬ 
companied Washington and Gist on their 
visit to the French forts on the Allegheny 
in 1753. After Braddock’s defeat in 1755 
he visited Montreal in company with a 
French interpreter and in 1759 was pres¬ 
ent at Croghan’s conference with the In¬ 
dians at Ft Pitt (now Pittsburg). He is 
mentioned also at the Lancaster confer¬ 
ence in 1762, and in 1768 was a leading 
advocate of peace with the English both 
at the treaty of Ft Pitt in May and at 
Bouquet’s conference there six months 
later. Washington visited him while on 
a hunting tour in Ohio in 1770. He is 
noted as at other conferences up to the 
time of the Revolution, and in 1782 is 
mentioned as leading an Indian raid on 
one of the frontier settlements. H is name 
occurs last in 1790, when he sent a written 
message to some friends in Philadelphia. 
See Darlington, Christopher Gist’s Jour¬ 
nal, 1893. 

Kiatagmiut. A division of the Aglemiut 
Eskimo of Alaska, inhabiting the banks 
of Kvichivak r. and Iliamna lake. They 
numbered 214 in 1890. Their villages are 
Chikak, Kakonak, Kaskanak, Kichik, 
Kogiung, Kvichak, and Nogeling. 
Kiatagmiut.—Schanz in 11th Census, Alaska, 95, 
1893. Kiatagmute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
135,1884. Kiatenes.—Lutke, Voyage, I, 181, 1835. 
Kijataigmjuten.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 5, 
1355. Kijataigmiiten.—Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 
121,1839. Kijaten.—Ibid. Kiyataigmeuten.—Rich¬ 
ardson, Arct. Exped., I, 370,1851. Kiyaten.—Ibid. 
Kwichagmut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 19, 
1877. 

Kiatang (‘ shoulder ’). A village of the 
Ita Eskimo on Northumberland id., 
Whale sd., n. Greenland. 

Keate.—Peary, Northward, 113,1898. Keati.—Mrs 
Peary, My Arct. Jour., 84,1893. Kie'teng.—Stein in 
Petermanns Mitt., 198,1902. Kujata.—Ibid. 

Kiatate. A group of ruins in the Sierra 
de los Huicholes, about 10 m. n. w. of 
San Andres Coamiata, in the territory of 
the Huichol, Jalisco, Mexico.—Lumholtz, 
Unknown Mex., ii, 16, map, 1902. 

Kiatsukwa. A former pueblo of the 
Jemez in New Mexico, the exact site of 
the ruins of which is not known. 
Kiatsukwa.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895. 
Quia-tzo-qua.—Bandelierin Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
207,1892. 

Kiawaw. A small tribe, of unknown 
affinity, formerly on Kiawah id., Charles¬ 


ton co., S. C., but long extinct. They 
were regarded as one of the tribes of thb 
Cusabo group. 

Cayawah.—Moll, map, 1715. Cayawash.—Moll, map 
in Humphrey, Acct., 1730. Keawaw.—Mills. Stat. 
S. C., 459,1826. Kiawaw.—Rivers, Hist. S. C., 38, 
1856. Kyewaw.—Deed of 1675 quoted by Mills, op. 
cit., app., 1 , 1826. 

Kiawetnau. The Yokuts name of the 
territory about Porterville, Cal. Given 
by Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 370, 
1877) as the name of a tribe (Ki-a-wet-ni, 
which lacks the locative suffix -au). 

Kichai (from Kitsash, their own name). 
A Caddoan tribe whose language is more 
closely allied to the Pawnee than to the 
other Caddoan groups. In 1701 they 
were met by the French on the upper 
waters of the Red r. of Louisiana and 
had spread southward to upper Trinity 



KICHAI MAN 


r. in Texas. In 1712 a portion of them 
were at war with the Hainai, who dwelt 
lower down the Trinity. They were 
already in possession of horses, as all the 
Kichai warriors were mounted. They 
seem to have been allies of the northern 
and western tribes of the Caddoan con¬ 
federacy and to have intermarried with 
the Kadohadacho. In 1719 La Harpe 
met some of the Kichai on Canadian r., 
in company with other Caddoan tribes, 
on their way toward New Mexico to wage 
war against the Apache. At that time 
they pledged friendship to the French, 
to whom they seem to have remained 
faithful. In common with all the other 
tribes they suffered from the introduction 
of new diseases and from the conflicts in¬ 
cident to the contention of the Spaniards, 
French, and English for control of the 







bull. 303 KTCH AM 


country, and became greatly reduced in 
numbers. In 1772 the main Kichai vil¬ 
lage was e. of Trinity r., not far from Pal¬ 
estine, perhaps a little n. e. At that time 
it was composed of 30 houses, occupied by 
80 warriors, “for the most part young.” 
In 1778 there was another village, “sepa¬ 
rated from the main body of the tribe,” 
farther s. and in nearly a direct line 
from San Pedro to the Tawakoni villages, 
probably on the site of the present Salt 
City. The junta de guerra held in the 
same year estimated the strength of the 
Kichai at 100 fighting men (Bolton, inf’n, 
1906). With several other small Texas 
tribes they were assigned by the United 
States Government to a reservation on 
Brazos r. in 1855, but on the dispersal of 
the Indians by the Texans three years 
later they fled n. and joined the Wichita, 
with whom they have since been associ¬ 
ated, and whom they resemble in their 
agriculture, house-building, and general 
customs. About 50 souls still keep the 
tribal name and language. 

See Penicaut in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
n. s., 73, 120, 1869; La Harpe in Margry, 
Dec., vi, 277-8, 1886; Rep. Com. Ind. Aff., 
1846,1849,1851,1872,1901. (a. c. f.) 

Cachies.—Arbuckle in H. R. Doc. 434, 25th Cong., 
2d sess., 5,1838. Cassia.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., in, 409, 1878. Gits’ajL—Dorsey, Kansa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Guichais.— 
Tex. State Arch., 1792. Guitzeis.—Morfi, MS. His- 
toria, bk. 2, cited by Bolton, infn,1906. Hitchi.— 
Lathamin Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 104,1856 (mis¬ 
print). Hitchies.—Bnrnet (1847) in Schoolcraft, 
ind. Tribes, I, 239, 1851. Kaji.—McCoy, Annual 
Register, no. 4,27,1838. Kecchies.—Alvord in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 18,40th Cong., 3d sess., 6,1869. Kechies.— 
Marcy, Explor. Red r., 93,1854. Kechis.—Latham, 
Essays, 399, 1860. Keechers.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 144, 
1850. Keechi.—Whiting in Rep. Sec. War, 242,1850. 
Keechies.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 894,1846. Keechy.—Sen. 
Ex. Conf. Doc. 13, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 1, 1846. 
Keetsas.—Arbuckle (1845) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 14, 32d 
Cong., 2d sess., 134, 1853. Kekies.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1871, 191, 1872. Kerchi.—Ibid., 263, 1851. Ketch- 
eyes.—Edward, Hist. Texas, 92,1836. Ketchies.— 
Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., n, 265, 1850. 
Keycchies.—Lewis and Clark, Journal, 142, 1840. 
Keyche.—Drake, Bk. Inds., viii, 1848. Keychies.— 
Penicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,n.s.,i, 
73, 1869. Keyes.—Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 70, 
1806. Keyeshees.—Bracken ridge, Views of La., 
87, 1815. Keys.—Lewis and Clark, Journal, 145, 
1840. Kichae.— Bol. Soc. Geogr. Mex., 267, 1870. 
Kichais.—Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3, 76, 
1856. Kiche.—Wallace (1840) in H. R. Doc. 25,27th 
Cong., 2d sess., 5,1841. Kichis.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 14, 
32d Cong., 2d sess., 16, 1853. Ki-^i'-tcac.—Dorsey, 
(Pegiha MS. diet., B A. E., 1878 (Omaha name). 
Kiechee. -Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849,36,1850. Kietsash.— 
Gatschet, Wichita MS., B. A. E. (Wichitaname). 
Kishais.—H. R. Rep. 299, 44th Cong., 1st sess., 1, 
1876. Kitaesches. — Penicaut (1714) in Margry, 
D6c., V, 502,1883. Kitaesechis.—PAnicaut (1714) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La.,n.s.,i, 120,1869. Ki'tchas.— 
Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E. (Tonkawa 
name). Ki'-tchesh.—Gatschet, Caddo and Ya- 
tassi MS., 65, B. A. E. (Caddo name). Kitchies.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 237, 1851. Kitsaoi.— 
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage 
name). Kitsaiches.—Bruy6re (1742) in Margry, 
D6c., vi, 492,1886. Ki'tsash.— Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E.,1095,1896(ownname). Kitsasi.—Grayson, 
Creek MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name). Kits 
de Singes.— Robin, Voyages, HI,5,1807. Kitsoss.— 
Arbuckle in H. R. Doc. 434, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 
5,1838. Ki'tsu.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Pawnee 
and Wichita name). Koechies.— Schoolcraft, Ind. 


-KICHYE 683 

Tribes, i, 518,1851. Kyis.—Brackenridge, Views of 
La.,81,1815. Queyches.—Jefferys,Am.Atlas,map5, 
1776. Quichaais.— Censusofl790inTex.StateArch. 
Quichais.—Ybarbo (1778), letter cited by Bolton, 
inf’n, 1906. Quicheigno.— RipperdA (1774), ibid. 
Quiches.—Anville, Carte des Isles de l’Amerique, 
1731. Quidaho.—La Harpe (1719) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ill, 72,1851. Quidehaio.—Ibid. Quide- 
hais.—La Harpe (1719) in Margry, D£c., vi, 277, 
1886 (probably identical). Quitoeis.—Mezieres 
(1778) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 661, 
1886. Quitres.—Mezieres (1779), letter cited by 
Bolton, inf’n, 1906. Quitreys.—Ibid. Quitseigus.— 
RipperdA (1776), letter, ibid. Quitseings.—Rip¬ 
perdA (1777), letter, ibid.' Quitseis.—Doc. of 1771-2 
quoted by Bolton in Tex. Hist. Quar., ix, 91,1905. 
Quituchiis. —V illa-Senor, Theatro Am., u, 413,1748. 
Quitxix.—Fran, de Jesus Maria (1691), Relacion 
cited by Bolton, inf’n,1906. Quitzaene.—Pimentel, 
Cuadro Descr., ii, 347, 1865 (given as a Comanche 
division). Quizi.—Fran. de Jesus Maria (1691) 
cited by Bolton, inf’n, 1906. 

Kicham (K^tca'm). A Squawmish vil¬ 
lage community on Burrard inlet, Brit. 
Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 
475, 1900. 

Kichesipirini (‘men of the great river,’ 
from kiche ‘great’, sipi ‘river’, irinionek 
‘men.’ By the Huron they were called 
Ehonkeronon; from the place of their 
residence they were often designated Al- 
gonquins of the Island, and Savages of 
the Island). Once an important tribe 
living on Allumette id., in Ottawa r., Que¬ 
bec province. They were considered as 
the typical Algonkin, and in order to 
distinguish them from the other tribes 
included under the term in this restricted 
sense were called “Algonquins of the Is¬ 
land,” a name first applied by Champlain 
(see Algonkin). As Ottawa r. was the line 
of travel between the upper-lake coun¬ 
try and the French settlements, the posi¬ 
tion of the tribe made it at times trouble¬ 
some to traders and voyageurs, although 
as a rule they appear to have been peace¬ 
able. In 1645 they, together with the 
Hurons, made a treaty of peace with the 
Iroquois; but it was of short duration, 
for 5 years later both the Hurons and 
the Kichesipirini fled for safety to more 
distant regions. What became of them 
is not known. It is probable that they 
were consolidated with the Ottawa or 
with some other northwestern Algon- 
quian tribe. (j. m. j. n. b. h. ) 

AlgommequindelTsle.—Champlain (1632),CEuvres, 
v, pt. 2, 193, 1870 (see Algonkin for various forms 
of the word). Ehonkeronons.—Jes. Rel. 1639, 88, 
1858. Hehonqueronon.—Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., 
IV, cap. ‘Nations,’ 1866. Honqueronons.—Sagard 
(1636), ibid., ill, 620. Honquerons.—Ibid., I, 247. 
Kichesipiiriniouek.—Jes. Rel. 1658, 22, 1858. Ki¬ 
chesipirini.—Ibid., 1640, 34, 1858. Kichesipirini- 
wek.—Ibid., 1646, 34, 1858. Nation de P Isle.— 
Ibid., 1633, 34, 1858. Sauvages de P Isle.—Ibid., 
1646, 34, 1858. 

Kichik. A Kiatagmiut village on a lake 
of the same name e. of Iliamna lake, 
Alaska; pop. 91 in 1880.—Tenth Census, 
Alaska, map, 1884. 

Kichye (‘ where there is much ki-ke, ’ 
a lily root used for glue). A small ran- 
cheria of the Tarahumare in the Sierra 
Madre, w. Chihuahua, Mexico.—Lum- 
holtz, inf’n, 1894. 


684 


KICKAPOO 


Kickapoo (from KiiMgapaw a , ‘hestands 
about,’ or ‘he moves about, standing now 
here, now there ’). A tribe of the central 
Algonquian group, forming a division 
with the Sauk and Foxes, with whom 
they have close ethnic and linguistic con¬ 
nection. The relation of this division is 
rather with the Miami, Shawnee, Menom¬ 
inee, and Peoria than with the Chippewa, 
Potawatomi, and Ottawa. 

History .—The people of this tribe, un¬ 
less they are hidden under a name not 
yet known to be synonymous, first ap¬ 
pear in history about 1667-70. At this 





KICKAPOO MAN 


time they were found by Allouez near the 
portage between Fox and Wisconsin rs. 
Yerwyst (Missionary Labors, 1886) sug¬ 
gests Alloa, Columbia co., Wis., as the 
probable locality, about 12 m. s. of the 
mixed village of the Mascouten, Miami, 
and Wea. No tradition of their former 
home or previous wanderings has been 
recorded; but if the name Outitchakouk 
mentioned by Druillettes (Jes. Pel. 1658, 
21, 1858) refers to the Kickapoo, which 
seems probable, the first mention of them 
is carried back a few years, but they were 
then in the same locality. Le Sueur 


[b. a. e. 

(1699) mentions, in his voyage up the 
Mississippi, the river of the Quincapous 
(Kickapoo), above the mouth of the Wis¬ 
consin, which he says was “so called from 
the name of a nation which formerly 
dwelt on its banks.” This probably re¬ 
fers to Kickapoo r., Crawford co., Wis., 
though it empties into the Wisconsin, 
and not into the Mississippi. Rock r., 
Ill., was for a time denominated the 
“River of the Kickapoos,” but this is 
much too far s. to agree with the stream 
mentioned by Le Sueur. A few years 
later a part at least of the tribe appears 
to have moved s. and settled somewhere 
about Milwaukee r. They entered into 
the plot of the Foxes in 1712 to burn the 
fort at Detroit. On the destruction of 
the Illinois confederacy, about 1765, by 
the combined forces of the tribes n. of 
them, the conquered country was parti¬ 
tioned among the victors, the Sauk and 
Foxes moving down to the Rock r. coun¬ 
try, while the Kickapoo went farther s., 
fixing their headquarters for a time at 
Peoria. They appear to have gradually 
extended their range, a portion centering 
about Sangamon r., while another part 
pressed toward the e., establishing them¬ 
selves on the waters of the Wabash, de¬ 
spite the opposition of the Miami and 
Piankashaw. The western band became 
known as the Prairie band, while the 
others were denominated the Vermilion 
band, from their residence on Vermilion 
r., a branch of the Wabash. They played 
a prominent part in the history of this 
region up to the close of the War of 1812, 
aiding Tecumseh in his efforts against the 
United States, while many Kickapoo 
fought with Black Hawk in 1832. In 
1837 Kickapoo warriors to the number 
of 100 were engaged by the United States 
to go, in connection with other western 
Indians, to fight the Seminole of Florida. 
In 1809 they ceded to the United States 
their lands on Wabash and Vermilion 
rs., and in 1819 all their claims to the 
central portion of Illinois. Of this land, 
as stated in the treaty, they “claim a 
large portion by descent from their an¬ 
cestors, and the balance by conquest from 
the Illinois nation, and uninterrupted 
possession for more than half a century.” 
They afterward removed to Missouri and 
thence to Kansas. About the year 1852 a 
large party left the main body, together 
with some Potawatomi, and went to Texas 
and thence to Mexico, where they became 
known as “Mexican Kickapoo.” In 
1863 they were joined by another dissat¬ 
isfied party from th e tribe. The Mexican 
band proved a constant source of annoy¬ 
ance to the border settlements, and efforts 
were made to induce them to return, 
which were so far successful that in 1873 
a number were brought back and settled 







BULL. 30] 


KICKAPOO 


685 


in Indian Ter. Others have come in 
since, but the remainder, constituting at 
present nearly half the tribe, are now set¬ 
tled on a reservation, granted them by 
the Mexican government, in the Santa 
Rosa mts. of e. Chihuahua. 

Customs and Beliefs .—The Ivickapoo 
lived in fixed villages, occupying bark 
houses in the summer and flag-reed 
oval lodges during the winter. They 
raised corn, beans, and squashes, and 
while dwelling on the e. side of the Mis¬ 
sissippi they often wandered out on the 
plains to hunt buffalo. On these hunt¬ 
ing trips they came to know the horse, 
and previous to the Civil war they had 
gone as far as Texas for the sole purpose 
of stealing horses and mules from the 
Comanche. No other Algi nquians of 
the central group were more familiar 
with the Indians of the plains than the 
Kickapoo; and yet, with all this contact, 
their culture has remained essentially the 
same as that of the Sauk and the Foxes. 

Like the Sauk and Foxes they believe 
in a cosmic substance prevailing through¬ 
out all nature, and the objects endowed 
with the mystic property are given special 
reverence. Far in the past they claim to 
have practised the Midewiwin; but to-day 
their most sacred ceremony is the Kiga- 
noivini, the feast dance of the clans. The 
dog is held in special veneration and is 
made an object of sacrifice and offering 
to the manitos. The mythology is rich, 
and is characterized by a mass of beast 
fable. The great cosmic myth centers 
about the death of the younger brother 
of the culture-hero, whose name is 
Wisa ka a . To him they attribute all the 
good things of this world and the hope 
of life in the spirit world, over which the 
younger brother presides. The brothers 
are idealized as youths. 

The gentile system prevailed, and mar¬ 
riage was outside of the gens. The name 
had an intimate connection with the 
gens, and children followed the gens of 
the father. Thegentes to-day are Water, 
Tree, Berry, Thunder, Man, Bear, Elk, 
Turkey, Bald-eagle, Wolf, and Fox. 

Population .—In 1759 the population of 
the Kickapoo was estimated at about 
3,000; in 1817 at 2,000, and in 1825 at 
2,200. Since the last-mentioned date they 
have greatly decreased. In 1875 those in 
Kansas and Indian Ter. together, in¬ 
cluding all of those recently brought from 
Mexico, were officially reported to num¬ 
ber 706, while 100 more were supposed 
to be in Mexico, making a total for the 
tribe of about 800. In 1885 those in 
the United States numbered about 500, 
of whom 235 were in Kansas, while the 
Mexican band in Indian Ter. (including 
some Potawatomi) numbered about 325. 
It is supposed that there were at the same 


time about 200 living in Mexico. Those 
in the United States in 1905 were offi¬ 
cially reported at 432, of whom 247 were 
in Oklahoma and 185 in Kansas. There 
are supposed to be about 400 or more in 
Mexico. Within the last two years there 
has been considerable effort by private 
parties to procure the removal of the 
Oklahoma band also to Mexico. 

The following are known as Kickapoo 
villages: Etnataek (with Sauk and Foxes), 
Kickapougowi, and Neconga. 

(j. m. w. j. ) 

A'-iiya*.—Gatschet, Tonkawe MS., B.A.E., 1884 
(‘deer eaters,’ from a'-u deer, ya'xa ‘to eat’: 
Tonkawa name). Gigabu.—Gatschet, Fox, MS., 
B. A. E., 1882 (Fox name; plural Gigabuhak). 
Gikapu.—Gatschet, ibid. (Fox name). Gokapa- 
tagans.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist, de 
l’Am£r,iv,224,1753(perhapsidentical). Higabu.— 
Dorsey, (pegiha MS. vocab.,B. A.E., 1878 (Omaha 
and Ponca name). Hijja'pu.—Dorsey, Tciwere 
MS. vocab., B.A. E., 1879 (Iowa, Oto, and 
Missouri name). I'-ka-du'.—Dorsey, MS. Osage 
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osagename). Kackapoes.— 
Dalton (1783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 
123, 1809. Kecapos.—Croghan (1759) in Rupp, 
West. Pa., app., 132, 1846. Kecopes.—Croghan, 
(1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 250,1871. 
Ke-ga-boge.—Morgan, Consang. ahd Affin., 288, 
1871. Kehabous.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 79, 1854 (misprint). Kekapos.—Crog¬ 
han (1759) in Rupp, West. Pa., app., 134, 1846. 
Kekapou.—Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ix, 619,1855. Kekaupoag.—Tanner, Narrative, 315, 
1830 (Ottawa name). Kicapoos.—Croghan (1765) 
in Craig, Olden Time, 409, 1846. Kicapous.—John¬ 
son (1772) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 292, 1857. 
Kicapoux.—Doc. of 1748, ibid., x, 150, 1858. 
Kicapus.—Rafinesque, introd. Marshall, Ky., i, 
38, 1824. Kiccapoos.—Croghan (1765) in Monthly 
Am. Jour. Geol., 263, 1831. Kichapacs.—Writer of 
1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., in, 26,1794. 
Kickapoos.—Croghan (1765) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vii, 780,1856. Kickapos.—German Flats conf. 
(1770), ibid., vm, 244, 1857. Kickapous.—Chau- 
vignerie (1736), ibid., ix, 1055, 1855. Kickipoo.— 
Gale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Kicoagoves.— 
Barcia, Ensayo, 238, 1723 (mentioned with Miami 
and Mascoutin). Kicoapous.—Tonti, Rel. de la 
Louisiane, 82, 1720. Kicopoux.—Chauvignerie 
(1736) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 554, 1853. 
Kikabeux.—Marquette, Discov., 322, 1698. Kika- 
bons.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist, de 
l’Amer., ii, 49, 1753. Kikabou.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 100, 
1858 KiKaboua.—Jes. Rel. 1672, lviii, 40, 1899. 
Kikabu.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1882 
(Kansa name). Kikapaus.—Hennepin, Cont. of 
New Discov., map, 1698. Kikapoes.—Vincennes 
treaty (1803) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 383,1873. Kika- 
poos.—Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 351, 1816. Kika- 
pous.—Hennepin, New Discov., 132, 1698. Kika- 
p8s.—Vaudreuil (1719) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
893,1855. Kikapoux.—Frontenac (1682), ibid., 182. 
Kikapouz.—Coxe, Carolana, 18, 1741. Kikapu.— 
Gatschet, Potawatomi MS., B. A. E., 1878 (Potawa¬ 
tomi name; plural Kikapug). Kikapus.—Loskiel, 
Hist. Miss. United Breth., pt. 1, 2, 1794. Kik- 
kapoos.—Barton, New Views, xxxiii, 1798. Kik- 
pouz.—Coxe, Carolana, 50, 1741. Kispapous.— 
Longueuil (1752) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 246, 
1858(misprint). Qnicapous —Tonti, Rel. de la Lou¬ 
isiane, 99, 1720 (misprint). Quicapause.—Lattr6, 
map, 1784. Quicapons.—Esnauts and Rapilly, 
map, 1777 (misprint). Quicapous.—De Bourain 
(1700) in Margry, D6c., VI, 73, 1886. Quinaquois.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. 
Quincapous.— Iberville (1700) in Neill, Minn., 154, 
1858. Ricapous.—Conf. of 1766 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vii. 860, 1856 (misprint). Rickapoos.—Cro¬ 
ghan (1765), ibid, (misprint). Shack-a-po.—H.R. 
Rep. 299, 44th Cong., 1st sess., 1, 1876 (“known 
to us as Kickapoos”). Shake-fca/i-quah.—Marcy, 
Explor. Red R., 273., 1854 (Wichita name). 
Shigapo.—Gatschet, Apache MS.,. B.A.E., 1884. (so 


686 


KICKAPOOS 


KIK AIT 


[b. a. e. 


called by Apache and other southern tribes). 
Shikapu.—Ibid. (Apache name). Sik'-a-pu.—ten 
Kate, Synonymie, 10, 1884 (Comanche name). 
Tekapu.—Gatschet, Wyandot MS., B. A. E., 1881 
(Huron name). Yu n tara'ye-ru'nu.—Ibid. (‘tribe 
living around the lakes’: another Huron name). 

Kickapoos. According to Norton (Polit. 
Americanisms, 60,1890), a secret Repub¬ 
lican political organization in Oklahoma 
(1888); from the name of an Algonquian 
tribe. (a. f. c. ) 

Kickapougowi. A former Kickapoo 
village on the Wabash, in Crawford co., 
Ill., about opposite the mouth of Tur¬ 
man cr. 

Kick-a-pou-go-wi Town.—Hough, map in Ind. 
Geol. Rep., 1883. Kikapouguoi. — Gamelin (1790) 
in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 93,1832. 

Kickenapawling. A former village of 
mixed Delawares and Iroquois, taking its 
name from the chief; situated 5 m. n. of 
the present Stoyestown, Pa., between or at 
the fork of Quemahoning and Stony crs. 
It was abandoned before 1758. 

Keckkeknepolin.—Post (1758) in Rupp, West. Pa., 
app., 103, 1846. Kickenapawling.—Day, Penn., 
182,1843. Kickenapawlings Old Town.—Day, Pa. 
Hist. Coll., 182, 1843. Kickenapawlings Village.— 
Roycein 18th Rep. B. A. E., Pa. map, 1899. 

Kicking Bear. A Sioux medicine-man 
of Cheyenne River agency, S. Dak., who 
acquired considerable notoriety as leader 
of a hostile band and priest of the Ghost- 
dance craze among the Sioux in 1890. 
He organized and led the first dance at 
Sitting Bull’s campon Standing Rock res., 
and was prominent in the later hostilities, 
for which he was afterward held for some 
time as a military prisoner. See Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896. 

Kicking Bird (Tene-angpote). A Kiowa 
chief. He was the grandson of a Crow 
captive who was adopted into the tribe, 
and early distinguished himself by his 
mental gifts. In tribal traditions and 
ceremonial rites he was a thorough adept, 
and as a warrior he won a name, but 
had the sagacity to see the hopelessness 
of the struggle with the whites and used 
all his influence to induce the tribe to 
submit to inevitable conditions. He 
signed the first agreement to accept a res¬ 
ervation on Aug. 15, 1865, at Wichita, and 
the treaty concluded at Medicine Lodge 
on Oct. 21, 1867, definitively fixing the 
Kiowa-Comanche-Apache res. in the pres¬ 
ent Oklahoma. In the resistance to re¬ 
moval to the reservation in 1868 and in the 
subsequent raids into Texas he took no 
part. When the Federal authorities in 
1873 failed to carry out their agreement 
to release the Kiowa chiefs imprisoned in 
Texas, he lost faith in the Government 
and was tempted to join the expeditions 
against the Tonkawa tribe and the white 
buffalo-hunters of Texas in 1874; but when 
Lone Wolf decided to join the hostiles who 
were defying United States troops, Kick¬ 
ing Bird induced two-thirds of the tribe 
to return with him to the agency at Ft 
Sill, &pd was treated thenceforth as the 


head chief of the Kiowa, Lone Wolfs 
offer to surrender and join the friendlies 
being refused. He invited and assisted 
in the establishment of the first school 
among the Kiowa in 1873. At one time 
when his constant advocacy of peace 
brought him into disrepute and the 
charges that he was a woman and a 
coward caused his counsels to be treated 
with contempt, he gathered a band for 
a Texas raid and fought a detachment 
of troops victoriously, regaining his old 
repute for courage and success in war. 
He died suddenly, by poison if the suspi¬ 
cions of his friends were just, on May 5, 
1875, and at the request of his family was 
buried with Christian rites.—Mooney in 
17th Rep., B. A. E., ii, 190, 216, 252,1898. 

Kick in the Belly. Mentioned by Cul¬ 
bertson (Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 1851) 
as a Crow band. 

Kiddekubbut. A Makah summer village 
3 m. from Neah, n. w. Wash. 
Kiddekubbut.—Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 6, 
1870. Tehdakomit.—Gibbs, MS. 248, B. A. E. . 

Kidnelik. A tribe of Central Eskimo 
living on Coronation bay, Canada. 

Copper Eskimo.—Schwatka in Science, 543,1884. 
Kidelik.—Rink, Eskimo Tribes, 33, 1887. Kidne¬ 
lik.—Schwatka in Science, 543, 1884. Qidneliq.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 470, 1888. 

Kientpoos. See Kintpuash. 

Kieqnotank. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, at the present Hampton, Va., 
where Lord De la Warre built his Ft. 
Henry. It was nearly depopulatedin 1722. 
Kiequotank.—Beverley, Virginia, 199,1722. Kiko- 
tan.—Herrman, map (1670), in Maps to Accom¬ 
pany the Rep. of the Comrs. on the Bndry. Line 
bet. Va. and Md., 1873. 

Kigicapigiak (‘ the great establishment,’ 
or ‘ great harbor’). A former Micmac 
village on Cascapediac r., Bonaventure 
co., Quebec.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 59, 
1866. 

Kigiktagmiut (‘island people’). A tribe 
of Eskimo inhabiting the islands of Hud¬ 
son bay off the Labrador coast, between 
lat. 56° and 61°. They wear the skins of 
seals and dogs instead of reindeer skins, 
use the bow and arrow and the spear in¬ 
stead of firearms, and often suffer for want 
of food. 

Ki'giktag'myut. —Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 
180, 1894. Kigukhtagmyut.—Turner in Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., 1887, sec. ii, 99. 

Kiglashka (‘they who tie their own’). 
A division of the Hunkpapa Teton Sioux. 
Kiglacka.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897. 
Kiglaska.—Ibid. 

Kigsitatok. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kihegashugah. See Mohongo. 

Kik. The House clan of the Ala (Horn) 
phratry of the Hopi. 

Kik-wun-wu.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 401, 
1894 ( wun-wii — * clan ’). 

Kikait ( Klkait ). A Kwantlen village 
at Brownsville, opposite New Westmin¬ 
ster, on lower Fraser r., Brit. Col.; pop., 


BULL. 30] 


KIKATS1K 


KILCHIK 


687 


together with the New Westminster vil¬ 
lage, 65 in 1902.—Hill-Tout in Ethnol. 
Surv. Can., 54, 1902. 

Kikatsik ( Ki'-kat-sik). One of the 4 
divisions of the main body of Shasta, oc¬ 
cupying Shasta valley and Klamath val¬ 
ley from Hot Springs to Scott r., n. Cal. 
They were early mentioned, under various 
forms of “Autire” and “Edhowe” (from 
Ahotide’e , the Shasta name of Shasta val¬ 
ley), as occupying 19 to 24 villages of 
about 60 inhabitants each, one of which 
was apparently Wiyahawir. There are 
now only a few survivors. (r. b. d. ) 
Autire.—Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. E'd' 
ohwe.—Ibid. Ho-te-day.—Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep- 
1864,120,1865 (given as their own name). Id-do-a.— 
Ibid, (misapplied to the Iruwaitsu). 0-de- 
eilah.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
III, 171, 1853. 0-de-i-lah.— McKee (1851) in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 221, 1853. 
Yeka.—Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 120, 1865 
(given as proper name of Yreka = ‘ Shasta butte; ’ 
properly Wail'ka). Yrekas. — Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 22, 1860. 

Kikchik. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kikertarsoak (‘great island ’). An Es¬ 
kimo village in Greenland, about lat. 63° 
30 / ; pop. 75 in 1829. Its harbor was 
formerly used by the Dutch in trading 
with the natives. 

Kikkertarsoak. —Graah, Exped. E. Coast Green¬ 
land, map, 1837. 

Kikhkat. A former Ikogmiut Eskimo 
village on the n. bank of Yukon r., near 
Ikogmiut, Alaska.—Zagoskin in Nouv. 
Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 

Kikiallu. A Skagit subtribe formerly 
living on the n. end of Whidbey id. and at 
the mouth of Skagit r., Wash., but now 
on Swinomish res. They participated in 
the treaty of Pt Elliott, Wash., Jan. 22, 
1855. 

Ke-ka-alns.— Fay in Ind. Aff. Rep., 238, 1858. 
Kickuallis. — Starling, ibid., 171, 1852. Kike- 
alans. — Simmons, ibid., 194, 1860. Kikiallis. — 
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1 ,436,1825. Kikiallu. — 
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 180, 1878. Kik-i- 
allus. —U. S. Ind. Treat. (1850), 378,1873. Ki-kia- 
loos. —Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 1877. Kikial- 
tis. —Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 432, 1855. 

Kikiktak. A Kowagmiut Eskimo sum¬ 
mer village at the mouth of Hotham inlet, 
Kotzebue sd., Alaska; pop. 200 in 1880. 

Kee-kik-tag-ameuts. —Hooper, Cruise of Corwin, 
26, 1880. Kikikhtagyut.— Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. 
Poss. in Am., pt. 1, 74, 1847. Kikiktagamute. — 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 4,1884. Kikiktag- 
mut. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 
Kikiktak. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kot¬ 
zebue. —Post-route map, 1903. 

Kikimi. A Pima village on the Gila 
River res., s. Ariz.—Dudley in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1871,58,1872. 

Kiksadi (‘ people of Kiks ’). One of the 
most important divisions of the Tlingit, 
belonging to the Raven phratry. They 
lived principally at Sitka and Wrangell, 
Alaska, but there were also some at Sanya. 
Kaksatis.— Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 46th 
Cong., 2d sess., 31, 1880. Kick-sa-tee.— Kane, 
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Kiks-adi.— Krause, 
Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. Kiksa'di.— Swanton, field 


notes, B. A. E.,1904. Kyiks’ade.—Boas, 5th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Canada, 25, 1889. 

Kiktaguk. An Unaligmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the s. coast of Norton sd., Alaska; 
pop. 20 in 1800, 23 in 1890. 

Ikekik.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, map, 162,1893. 
Ikikiktoik. —Coast Surv. chart, 1898. Kegickto- 
wruk.— Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,map, 1877. 
Kegictowik. —Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Kegiktow'ruk. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
i, 17,1877. Kegokhtowik. —Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 11, 1881. Kiektaguk. —Tebenkof (1849) 
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 239, 1902. 
Kigh-Mioute.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., 
xxi, map, 1850. Kigikhtawik. —Petroff, Rep. on 
Alaska, 54,1881. Kigiktauik. —Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1899. Kikchtaguk. —Holmberg, 
Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855. Kikhtaghouk.— Zagos¬ 
kin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 
Kikhtangouk. —Ibid.,218. Kikiktowrik. —Eleventh 
Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Kikiktowruk. —Kelly, 
Arct. Eskimos, 15,1890. Kiktaguk. —Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kiktak (‘big island’). A Kuskwog- 
miut Eskimo village on an island in Kus- 
kokwim r., Alaska, 25 m. above Bethel; 
pop. 232 in 1880, 119 in 1890. 

Kikikhtagamiut.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164. 
1893. Kikkhlagamute.—Hallock in Nat. Geog- 
Mag., IX, 90, 1898. Kikkhtagamute.—Petroff, 
Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1880. Kiktak.—Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kiktheswemud. A former Delaware (?) 
village near Anderson, Madison co., Ind. 
Marked as Kik-the-swe-mud on Hough’s 
map (Ind. Geol. Rep., 1883). Perhaps 
identical with Buckstown, or with Little 
Munsee Town. 

Kikuikak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village at the mouth of Kuskokwim r., 
Alaska; pop. 9 in 1880. 

Kik-khuigagamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 17, 1884. 

Kikun. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kikwistok. A Nakoaktok village on 
Seymour inlet, Brit. Col. 

Ke-ques-ta.— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 226, 
1887. Kikwistoq. —Ibid. Te'-kwok-stai-e. —Daw¬ 
son in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 65. 

Kil ( Kttl, ‘ sand-spit-point [ town] ’). A 
small Haida town formerly on Shingle 
bay, Skidegate inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., 
Brit. Col. It was occupied by the Lana- 
chaadus, who owned it, and the Gitingid- 
jats, two family groups of very low social 
rank.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Kilatika. A Miami division living with 
the Wea, Piankashaw, and others near 
Ft St Louis, on the upper Illinois, in 1684. 
Kalatekoe. —Membr6 (1682) in Margry, D6c., n, 216, 
1877. Kilataks.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, ii, 
261, 1753. Kilatica. —Franquelin map (1684) in 
Parkman, La Salle, 1883. Kilatika. —La Salle 
(1683) in Margry, D6c., 11,320,1877. Kolatica.— La 
Salle (1682), ibid., 201. 

Kilauutuksh. A former Yaquina village 
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. 
Ki-lau'-u-tukc'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
229, 1890. 

Kilchik (from the native name of L. 
Clark). A Knaiakhotana village on L. 
Clark, Alaska; pop. 91 in 1880. It seems 
to have been consolidated with Nikhkak, 
9 m. below, by 1904. 


688 


KILHERHURSH-KIMESTUNNE 


[b. a. e. 


Keechik. —Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 46, 1884. 
Kichik. —Ibid., map. Kilchikh. —Eleventh Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 94, 1893. 

Kilherhursh. A Tillamook village, 
named after a chief, at the entrance of 
Tillamook bay, Oreg., in 1805. 

Kil-har-hurst's Town.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, vi, 71,1905. Kilherhursh. —Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., ii, 117, 1814. 

Kilherner. A Tillamook village in 1805, 
named after a chief, on Tillamook bay, 
Oreg., at the month of a creek, 2 m. from 
Kilherhursh. 

Kil-har-nar’s town.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, 
Vi, 71,1905. Kilherner.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
II, 117, 1814. 

Kilikunom. A division of the Witu- 
komnom branch of the Yuki of n. Cali¬ 
fornia. (a. L. K. ) 

Kilimantavie (from Ke-lev'-a-tow-tin, 
‘sling.’—Murdoch). A Kunmiut Eskimo 
village on the Arctic coast w. of Wain- 
wright inlet, Alaska; pop. 45 in 1880. 

Kelamantowruk.— U. S. Hydrog. chart 68 quoted 
by Baker, Geog. Dist. Alaska, 239, 1902. Ke-le'v- 
a-tow-tin. —Murdoch quoted by Baker, ibid. Ki- 
lametagag-miut. —Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by 
Baker, ibid. Kilauwitawih. —Murdoch in 9th Rep. 
B. A.E.,44, 1892. Kilimantavie. —Hydrog. charts, 
op. cit. Kilyami®tagvik.— Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. 
Poss. Am., pt. I, 74,1847. Kolumakturook.— Petroff 
in 10thCensus, Alaska , map, 1884. Kolumatourok. — 
Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 59, 1880. Kolumaturok. — 
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Kilinigmiut (‘people of the serrated 
country’). A subtribe of theSuhinimiut 
Eskimo inhabiting the region about C. 
Chidley, n. Labrador. Pop. fewer than40. 
Ki lin'ig niyut. —Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 176, 
1894. 

Kilistinons of the Nipisiriniens. Men¬ 
tioned by the JesuitRel. of 1658 (Thwaites 
ed., xliv, 249, 1899) as one of the 4 divi¬ 
sions of the Cree, so called because they 
traded with the Nipissing. They lived 
between L. Nipigon and Moose r., Can¬ 
ada, though they were not very station¬ 
ary. Their population at the date given 
was estimated at 2,500. 

Kiliuda (perhaps Aleut, from kiliaJc 
‘morning’, uda ‘bay’). A Kaniagmiut 
Eskimo village on the e. coast of Kodiak 
id., Alaska; pop. 36 in 1880, 22 in 1890. 

Kiliuda. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kil¬ 
iuda.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. 

Kiliwi. A Yuman band of a dozen 
people who furnished Gabb a vocabulary 
when he visited them, in Apr. 1867, near 
Santo Tomas mission, 150 m. n. w. of Santa 
Borja, Lower California. The vocabu¬ 
lary is published in Zeitschr. f. Ethnolo- 
gie, 1877. The Kiliwi were reported as 
still existing in 1906. 

Killaxthokle. A Chinookan tribe or vil¬ 
lage, apparently named after its chief, on 
Shoal water bay, Wash., in 1805. Men¬ 
tioned by Lewis and Clark, from In¬ 
dian information, who estimated the 
population at 100 in 8 houses. Dis¬ 
tinct from Calasthocle, who are the 
Quileute. 

Gai.a'qstxoqL. —Boas, inf’n, 1905. Killaxthocles.— 
Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., 1252,1892. Kil- 
laxt-ho-kle’s T. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), 


Vi, 118, 1905. Killaythocles.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 571, 1853. 

Killbuck. See Gelelemend. 

Xillbuck’s Town. A former Delaware 
town on the e. side of Killbuck cr., about 
10 m. s. of Wooster, Wayne co., Ohio; 
occupied as early as 1764 by a chief named 
Killbuck, from whom it received the 
name. (j. m. ) 

Killhag. A sort of trap, defined by 
Bartlett (Diet. Americanisms, 332, 1877) 
as “a wooden trap used by the hunters 
in Maine”; from kilhigan in the Malecite 
dialect of Algonquian, signifying ‘trap’, 
from the radical kilh, ‘to catch or keep 
caught’, and the suffix radical igan, ‘in¬ 
strument.’ (a. f. c. ) 

Killikinnick. See KinnikinnicL 

Killisnoo. A modern settlement of the 
Hutsnuwu on Killisnoo id., near Admi¬ 
ralty id., Alaska. They have been drawn 
there through the establishment of oil 
works by the whites. 

Kanas-nu.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 105, 1885. Ken- 
asnow. —Ibid, (quoted). 

Kilpanlus. A Cowichan tribe in Cow- 
itchin valley, Vancouver id., consisting 
of only 4 people in 1904. 

Kil-pan-hus. —Can. Ind. Aff. for 1883, 190. Kil¬ 
panlus. —Ibid., 1901, pt. 2, 164, 1902. Tilpa'les. — 
Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. Tlip-pah-lis. — Can. Ind. 
Aff. for 1880, 316. Tlip-pat-lis.— Ibid., 1879, 308. 

Kils-haidagai ( K/ils xd'-idAga-i, ‘penin¬ 
sula people’). A branch of the Kagials- 
kegawai, a family group belonging to the 
Raven clan of the Haida. They took 
their name from a point at the outer end 
of the tongue of land on which Skedans 
formerly stood, and where were most of 
their houses.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
269, 1905. 

Kilstlai-djat-takinggalung ( Kt'lsLa-i djat 
HakJt'ngcilAn, ‘chieftainess’ children’). 
A subdivision of the Hlgahetgu-lanas, a 
family of the Raven clan of the Haida.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 1905. 

Kilutsai (Gyilots’a'r, ‘people of the 
river’s arm’). A Tsimshian family and 
town near Metlakahtla, on the n. w. coast 
of British Columbia. 

Gyilots’a'r.— Boas in Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232, 188. 
Kel-ut-sah.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. 
Kill, on, chan. —Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes, 
1854, MS..B. A. E. Killoosa. —Horetzky, Canada 
on Pacific, 212, 1874. Killowitsa.—Brit. Col. map, 
1872. Killutsar.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. 
Kilootsa.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. 
Col., 114b, 1884. Kil-utsai.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq., 
xix, 281, 1897. 

Kim. The Mountain Lion clan of the 
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. 

Kim-t'amin.—Hodge (after Lummis) in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896 (Valnin = ‘people’). 

Kimaksuk. A Kinguamiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Cumberland sd., lat. 65°, Baffin 
land.—McDonald, Discoverv of Hogarth’s 
Sd., 86, 1841. 

Kimestunne (‘ people opposite a cove of 
deep water’). A former village of the 
Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., Oreg. 

Ki-mes' tunne'. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 232,1890. Ku-mas' ^unne'. — Ibid. 


BULL. 30] 


KIMISSING 


KINEGNAK 


689 


Kimissing ( Qimissing). A fall settle¬ 
ment of Talirpingmiut Eskimo, of the 
Okomiut tribe, on the s. side of Cumber¬ 
land sd., Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kimituk. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kimsquit (probably from Ki'm-kuitx , 
applied to the Bellacoola of Deans chan¬ 
nel by the Heiltsuk). Given as the name 
of part of the “Tallion nation” or Bella¬ 
coola. 

Athlankenetis. —Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 
1872. Kemsquits.— Ibid. Ki'mkuitq.— Boas in 7th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3, 1891. Kinisquit. —Can. 
Ind. Aff.,pt. 11,162,1901 (perhapsidentical). Kin- 
isquitt. —Ibid., ‘272, 1889. Kui-much-qui-toch.— 
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. 

Kimns (‘ brow ’ or ‘ edge ’). A village of 
the Ntlakyapamuk on the e. side of Fra¬ 
ser r., between Yale and Siska, Brit. Col. 
Pop. in 1901 (the last time the name ap¬ 
pears) , together with Suk, 74. 

Kamus. —Can. Ind. Aff. for 1886, 230. Kimu's.— 
Teit in Mem. Am. Mas. Nat. Hist., ii, 169,1900. 
Sk’muc. —Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci.,5, 
1899. Sook-kamus. —Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. 2, 
164 (name combined with that of Suk, q. v.). 
Suuk-kamus. —Ibid., 418, 1898. 

Kinaani (‘high-standing house’). A 
Navaho clan, the descendants of several 
women given that tribe by the Asa phra- 
try of the Hopi prior to 1680, when, on 
account of drought, the Asa people (q. v.) 
abandoned Hano pueblo and made their 
home in Canyon de Chelly, n. e. Arizona, 
afterward returning to Tusayan. 
High-House people.— Vandiver in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
159, 1890. Kiaini.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
30, 1891. Kinaa‘ni.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 104, 1890 (‘high-standing house’). 
Ki?ma‘ni.— Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30, 1897. 

Kinagingeeg ( GyinaxangyVek, ‘ people 
of the mosquito place’). A Tsimshian 
town and local group near Metlakahtla, 
n. w. coast of British Columbia. 
Gyinaxangyl'ek. —Boas in Zeitschr. fiir Ethnol., 
232, 1888. Kenchenkieg.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., 
app., 1859. Kinagingeeg. —Dorsey in Am. Antiq., 
xix, 281,1897. Kinahungik.— Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114 b, 1884. Kinkhankuk.— 
Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes, 1854, MS., 
B. A. E. Km-nach-hangik.— Krause, TlinkitInd., 
318, 1885. Kinnakangeck.— Brit. Col.map, 1872. 

Kinak (‘face’). A Kuskwogmiut Es¬ 
kimo village on the n. bank of lower Kus- 
kokwim r., Alaska; pop. 60 in 1880, 257 
in 1890, 209 in 1900. 

Kenaghamiut.— llth Census, Alaska, 108, 1893. 
Kinagamute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 54, 
1884. 

Kinalik. An Eskimo village in s. w. 
Greenland, lat. 60° 34'.—Meddelelser om 
Gronland, xvi, map, 1896. 

Kinapuke (Kin-a-pu'-ke). AformerChu- 
mashan village on San Buenaventura r., 
Ventura co., Cal., near its mouth.—Hen- 
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Kinarbik. An Eskimo village in s. e. 
Greenland, about lat. 62° 50 / ; pop. 14 in 
1829.—Graah, Exped. Greenland, map, 
1837. 


Kinbaskets. A body of Shuswap who 
forced themselves into the Kutenai coun¬ 
try near Windermere, Brit. Col., from n. 
Thompson r., about 50 years ago and 
maintained themselves there with the 
help of the Assiniboin until the whites 
appeared and wars came to an end. Pop. 
41 in 1891, 56 in 1904. 

Kinbaskets.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1902, 253, 1903. Shus¬ 
wap Band. —Ibid. 

Kinbiniyol (Navaho: kin ‘ pueblo house’, 
bi ‘its’, niyol ‘whirlwind’: ‘Whirlwind 
pueblo.’—Matthews). One of the best 
preserved of the pueblo ruins of the Chaco 
canyon group in n. w. New Mexico. It is 
not in the canyon proper, but in the basin 
of an arroyo tributary to it. The ruin 
lies 500 yds. e. of the wash, at the base of 
a low mesa, about 10 m. w. and 5 m. s. of 
Pueblo Bonito. It is rectangular in form, 
having 3 wings extending to the s., one 
at the center and one at each extremity 
of the main building. The exterior di¬ 
mensions of the parallelogram occupied 
by the building are approximately 320 by 
270 ft. The 2 courts formed by the wings 
are 91 by 125 and 76 by 83 ft respectively, 
the former being inclosed by a low wall, 
the latter open. Ten circular kivas are 
built within the walls of the structure, 
the largest being 26 ft in diameter and 
the smallest 15 ft. The largest rectangu¬ 
lar room is 16? by 17 ft, the smallest 7 by 
11 ft. The walls of the ruin stand 30 ft 
above the plain. Of the n. exterior wall 
120 ft are still standing to above the 
second story. Parts of a fourth story wall 
are still in place. Probably half the orig¬ 
inal walls are still standing. The doors 
average 22 by 34 in. in size, the windows 
8 by 12 in. Walls and corners are true 
to the plummet and try-square, an excep¬ 
tional occurrence in aboriginal structures. 
The remains of extensive irrigation works 
exist in close proximity, the most elabor¬ 
ate that have been observed in the San 
Juan drainage. (e. l. h. ) 

Kinchuwhikut (‘on its nose’). A for¬ 
mer large Hupa village, the name refer¬ 
ring to its situation on a point of land on 
the e. bank of Trinity r., Cal., near the 
n. end of the valley. It is prominent in 
Hupa folk-lore. (p. e. g.) 

Kintcimhwikut. —Goddard, Life and Culture of 
the Hupa, 13, 1903. 

Kincolith (‘place of scalps’). A mission 
village on Nass inlet, Brit. Col., founded 
in 1867 and settled by the Niska. Pop. 
267 in 1902, 251 in 1904. 

Kinegnagak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village in w. Alaska; pop. 92 in 1890. 

Kinegnagamiut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. 

Kinegnak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village on C. Newenham, Alaska; pop. 76 
in 1890. This is also the Eskimo name 
for Razboinski, q. v. 

Kinegnagmiut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 99,1893. 
Kniegnagamute.—Ibid., map. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-44 



690 


KINEUWIDISHIANUN-KING PHILIP 


[B. a. e. 


Kineuwidishianun {Kirie'uv wi'dishi'a- 
nun). The Eagle phratry of the Menomi¬ 
nee, consisting of the Bald-eagle, Crow, 
Raven, Red-tail Hawk, Golden-eagle, 
and Fish-hawk gentes.—Hoffman in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 1896. 

Kingaseareang ( Qingaseareang ). A 
spring settlement of Kinguamiut Eskimo 
on an island near the entrance to Nettil- 
ling fjord, Cumberland sd., Baffin land.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kingatok. An Ita Eskimo village on 
Smith sd., n. Greenland.—Kane, Arct. 
Explor., i, 32, 1856. 

Kingegan. The chief village of the Ki- 
nugumiut Eskimo, situated inland from 
C. Prince of Wales, Alaska. The dialect 
here spoken is the same as that used on 
the Diomede ids. Pop. 400 in 1880, 488 
in 1900. 

Ki'hi.—Bogoras, Chukchee, 21,1904 (Yuit name). 
King-a-ghe. —Beechey (1827) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 241, 1902. Kingaghee. —Elev¬ 
enth Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. King-a-khi.— 
Baker, ibid, (quoted). Kingigamute. —Petroff in 
10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. Kinqeqan. —Dali, 
Alaska, map, 1875 (changed to Kingegan in ec 
rata, 628). 

Kingep ( Kiftep , ‘big shields’). The 
largest and most important tribal division 
of the Kiowa.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. 

A. E., 1079,1896. I 

Kingiak. An Aglemiut village on the 

n. side of the mouth of Naknek r., Bristol 
bay, Alaska; pop. 51 in 1890. 

Ft/Suwarof. —Post-route map, 1903. Kenigayat. — 
Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 45, 1880. Kinghiak.— Pe¬ 
troff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. Kiniaak.— 
Post-route map, 1903. Kinuyak.— Eleventh Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 164, 1893. Suworof. —Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kingiktok. An Eskimo village in w. 
Greenland, lat. 72° 57'. 

Kinggigtok.— Meddelelser om Gronland, vm, 
map, 1889. 

Kingmiktuk (Qingmiktuq) . The winter 
settlement of the Ugjulirmiut in King 
William land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1888. 

Kingnaitmiut. One of the 4 branches 
of the Okomiut Eskimo of Baffin land, 
formerly settled at Pagnirtu and Kignait 
fiords, but now having their permanent 
village at Kekerten; pop. 86 in 1883. 
Their summer villages are Kitingujang, 
Kordlubing, Niutang, and Nirdlirn.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 437, 1888. 

Kingnelling. A spring settlement of 
Padlimiut Eskimo at the s. end of Home 
bay, Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. 

B. A. E., map, 1888. 

King Philip. Metacom, second son of 
Massasoit, sachem of the Wampanoag, 
who attained that office himself through 
the death of his father and elder brother 
in 1661-62, and to the English was better 
known as Philip of Pokanoket, or King 
Philip. He was the most remarkable of all 
the Indians of New England. For 9 years 
after his elevation to the chieftaincy, al¬ 
though accused of slotting against the 


colonists, he seems to have devoted his 
energies to observation and preparation 
rather than to overt actions of a warlike 
nature. He even acknowledged himself 
the king’s subject. But war with the Eng¬ 
lish was inevitable, and the struggle called 
King Philip’s war (1675-76) broke out, 
resulting in the practical extermination of 
the Indians after they had inflicted great 
losses upon the whites. The ability of 
King Philip is seen in the plans he made 
before the war began, the confederacy he 
formed, and the havoc he wrought among 
the white settlements. Of 90 towns, 52 
were attacked and 12 were completely de¬ 
stroyed. - The bravery of the Indians was 
in many cases remarkable. Only treach¬ 
ery among the natives in all probability 



KING PHILIP. (AFTER CHURCH, FROM AN OLD ENGRAVING) 


saved the colonists from extinction. In 
the decisive battle, a night attack, at a 
swamp fortress in Rhode Island, Aug. 12, 
1676, the last force of the Indians was 
defeated with great slaughter, King Philip 
himself being among the slain. His body 
was subjected to the indignities usual at 
that time, and his head is said to have 
been exposed at Plymouth for 20 years. 
His wife and little son were sold as slaves 
in the West Indies. Widely divergent 
estimates of King Philip’s character and 
achievements have been entertained by 
different authorities, but he can not but 
be considered a man of marked abilities. 
Weeden (Ind. Money, 12, 1884) says: 
“History has made him ‘King Philip,’ to 











BULL. 30] 


KINGS RIVER INDIANS-KINNAZINDE 


691 


commemorate the heroism of his life and 
death. He almost made himself a king 
by his marvelous energy and statecraft 
put forth among the New England tribes. 
Had the opposing power been a little 
weaker, he might have founded a tem¬ 
porary kingdom on the ashes of the colo¬ 
nies.” King Philip has been the subject 
of several poems, tales, and histories. 
The literature includes: Church, History 
of King Philip’s War, 1836; Apes, Eulogy 
on King Philip, 1836; Freeman, Civiliza¬ 
tion and Barbarism, 1878; Markham, 
Narrative History of King Philip’s War, 
1883. (af.c.) 

Kings River Indians. A collective term 
for Indians on Tule River res., Cal., in 
1885, embracing the tribes formerly on 
and about Kings r., some at least of 
whom were the Choinimni, Wachahet, 
Iticha, Chukaimina, Michahai, Holkoma, 
Tuhukmache, Pohoniche, and Wimilche, 
according to Wessells (Sen. Ex. Doc. 76, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 31,1853). The num¬ 
ber gathered under this name, together 
with the Wikchamni and Kawia, was 135 
in 1884. 

King’s River Indians. —McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 80, 1853. 

K i n g u a (‘ its head ’). A Kinguamiut 
Okomiut summer village at the head of 
Cumberland sd., s. e. Baffin land. 
Kingawa. —Boas in Bull. Am.Mus. Nat. Hist.,xv, 
pt. 1, 126, 1901. Kingoua. —McDonald, Discov. of 
Hogarth’s Sd., 86,1841. Qingua.— Boas in 6th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kinguamiut (* inhabitants of its head ’). 
A subtribe of the Okomiut Eskimo living 
in the villages of Anarnitung, Imigen, and 
Kingaseareang, at the head of Cumber¬ 
land sd., and numbering 60 in 1883. 
Kimaksuk seems to have been a former 
village. 

Kignuamiut. —Boas in Geog. Blatt., Vin, 33, 1885. 
K’inguamiut. —Boas in Petermanns Mitt., no. 80, 
69, 1885. Qinguamiut. —Boas in 6th Rep. B. A.E., 
426, 1888. 

Kinhlitshi (‘red house’ [of stone]). 
A Navaho clan. 

Kinlitci. —Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
103,1890. Kinlitcini.— Ibid. KIn/itsi. —Matthews, 
Navaho Legends, 30,1897. KlnZItsidine*. —Ibid. 

Kinhlizhin (Navaho, ‘ black house’). An 
important pueblo ruin of theChaco canyon 
group of n. w. New Mexico, 6? m. w. and 
2 m. s. of Pueblo Bonito. It is not in 
the canyon, but stands, facing e., on a 
sand hill 200 yds. w. of a dry wash which 
enters the Chaco about 4 m. below. Its 
length was 145 ft, greatest width 50 ft. 
A semicircular wall, 450 ft long, connects 
the n. e. and s. e. corners, inclosing an ir¬ 
regular court. In the wall at a point 285 
ft from the s. e. corner of the building 
was a circular tower, 4 or 5 ft in diame¬ 
ter, which must have been from 20 to 30 
ft high. On the w. side 50 ft of exterior 
wall still stands, 26 ft above the debris 
and 38 ft above ground. The wall is 
36 in. thick at the base, diminishing in 


thickness a few inches at the base of each 
additional story. Portions of a fourth- 
story wall still stand; the original height 
was 5 stories. The masonry, which is of 
dark-brown sandstone, consists of alter¬ 
nating courses of large and small stones. 
There are 3 small windows, 6 by 8 in. 
Four circular kivas, 10 by 16 ft in di¬ 
ameter, are built within the walls, and 
one, 35 ft in diameter, partly within the 
front wall and partly within the court. 
The smaller kivas are built within rec¬ 
tangular rooms, and the space between 
the room and the kiva walls is filled in 
with masonry. An ancient system of ir¬ 
rigation works, consisting of stone dam, 
waste way reservoir, and ditches, is plainly 
traceable. (e. l. h. ) 

Kiniklik. A Chugachigmiut Eskimo 
village on the n. shore of Prince William 
sd., Alaska. 

Kinicklick.—Schrader (1900) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kiniklik.—Baker, ibid. 

Kinipetu (‘wet country’). A central 
Eskimo tribe on the w. coast of Hudson 
bay, extending s. from Chesterfield inlet 
250 m. They hunt deer and muskoxen, 
using the skins for clothing and kaiak 
covers, coming to the coast only in win¬ 
ter when seals are easily taken. 

Agutit.—Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnog. Am., in, 
x, 1876. Kiaknukmiut.—Boas in Bui. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., xv, 6,1901 (own name). Kimnepatoo.— 
Schwatka in Century Mag., xxii, 76,1881. Kini¬ 
petu.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 450, 1888. Kin- 
nepatu.—Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., in, 
96,1885. Kinnipetu.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 
no. 80, 72, 1885. 

Kinkash. A Potawatomi band, so named 
in treaties of 1832 and 1836. Their village 
or reservation, which was sold to the 
United States in 1836, was on Tippecanoe 
r., Kosciusko co., Ind. 

Kin-Kash.—Tippecanoe treaty (1832) in U. S. Ind. 
Treaties, 701,1873. Kin-krash.—Chippewaynaung 
treaty (1836), ibid., 713. 

Kinkletsoi (Navaho: ‘yellow house’). 
A small pueblo ruin about f m. n. w. 
of Pueblo Bonito, on the n. side of the 
arroyo, at the base of the canyon wall, in 
Chaco canyon, n. w. N. Mex. Its ground- 
plan is a perfect parallelogram, with no 
inner court. Its dimensions are 135 by 
100 ft, and originally it probably contained 
4 stories; fragments of the third story walls 
are still standing from 20 to 25 ft above 
the ground. The masonry consists of 
blocks of yellow sandstone, averaging 8 
by 5 bv 3 in., fairly well shaped and laid 
in adobe mortar. The pueblo walls are 
from 18 to 24 in. thick. The remaining 
doorways, all interior, average 27 by 42 in. 
Three circular kivas, 18 to 22 ft in diam¬ 
eter, are built within the walls. It is Ruin 
No. 8 of Jackson (10th Rep. Hayden 
Surv., 1878). (e. l. h.) 

Kinnazinde (probably Kinazhi, or Kini- 
azhi , ‘ little pueblo ’). The Navaho name 
of a small, ancient, circular pueblo near 
Kintyel (q. v.), Ariz.; believed to have 



692 


KINNIKINNICK-KINSHIP 


[b. a. e. 


been occupied by the people of the latter 
place as a summer settlement. See Min- 
deleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., pi. lxvi, 91, 
1891; Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 134, 
1904. 

Kinna-zinde.— Mindeleff, op. cit. Zinni j'in'n e.— 
Cushing quoted by Powell in 4th Rep. B. A. E., 
xxxviii, 1886 (confused with Kintyel). 

Kinnikinnick. An Indian preparation 
of tobacco, sumac leaves, and the inner 
bark of a species of dogwood, used for 
smoking by the Indians and the old set¬ 
tlers and hunters in the W. The prep¬ 
aration varied in different localities and 
with different tribes. Bartlett quotes 
Trumbull as saying: “I have smoked 
half a dozen varieties of kinnikinnick 
in the N. W., all genuine.’ 7 The word, 
which has as variants, kinnik-kinnik, 
k’nickk’neck, kinnikinik, killikinnick, 
etc., is an apocopation of Chippewa kini- 
kinigdn, meaning ‘(what is) mixed by 
hand,’ from the verb kinikinige, ‘hemixes 
by hand’ (any two or more dry objects), 
but, more correctly, ‘he j umbles by hand. ’ 
The name was applied also by the white 
hunters, traders, and settlers to various 
shrubs, etc., the bark or lea ves of which are 
employedinthemixture: Redosier(Co nus 
stolonifera) , bear berry ( Arctostaphylos uva- 
ursi), silky cornel ( Cornussericea) , ground 
dogwood ( C. canadensis), as well as sumac 
and poke leaves, etc. Matthews (Am. 
Anthrop., v, 170, 1903) maintains that 
the ordinary source of kinnikinnick was 
not the red willow, as has often been said, 
but the silky cornel, a species of dogwood, 
bearing, especially in winter, a marked 
resemblance to the red-bark willow. See 
Smoking, Tobacco. (a.f.c. w t .r.g. ) 

Kinship. The foundation of social or¬ 
ganization, and hence of government, the 
tangible form of social organization, was 
originally the bond of real and legal blood 
kinship. The recognition and perpetua¬ 
tion of the ties of blood kinship were the 
first important steps in the permanent 
social organization of society. 

Among the North American Indians 
kinship is primarily the relation subsist¬ 
ing between two or more persons whose 
blood is derived from common ancestors 
through lawful marriage. Persons be¬ 
tween whom kinship subsists are called 
kin or kindred. Kinship may be lineal 
or collateral. By birth through the nat¬ 
ural order of descent kindred are divided 
into generations or categories, which rep¬ 
resent lineally and collaterally relation¬ 
ships or degrees of kinship, which in 
turn are sometimes modified by the age 
and the sex of the persons so affected. 
In noting the degrees of kinship in the 
direct line all systems appear to agree in 
assigning one degree to a generation. Thus 
is developed a complex system of rela¬ 
tionships. The extent and the complex¬ 
ity of the system in any case vary with 


the social organization of the people. 
These degrees of kinship may be called 
relationships, and they define more or 
less clearly the station, rights, and obli¬ 
gations of the several individuals of the 
kinship group specified. The distinction 
between relationship and kinship must 
not be confused, for there are persons 
who are related but w T ho do not belong 
to the same kin. 

In speaking of the entire body of a group 
of kindred it is necessary that reference 
be made to some person, the propositus, 
as the starting point. In general every 
person belongs naturally to two distinct 
families (see Family) or kinship groups, 
namely, that of the father and that of the 
mother. These two groups of kindred, 
which before his birth were entirely dis¬ 
tinct for the purposes of marriage and the 
inheritance of property and certain other 
rights, privileges, and obligations, unite 
in his person and thereafter form only 
subdivisions of his general group of kin¬ 
dred, and both these groups share with 
him the rights, privileges, and obligations 
of kindred. 

There are two radically different meth¬ 
ods of naming these relationships; the 
one is called the classificatory, the other 
the descriptive method. In the descrip¬ 
tive phrase the actual relationship be¬ 
comes a matter of implication—that is, the 
relationship is made specific either by the 
primary terms of relationship or by a 
combination of them. Under the first, 
kindred are never described, but are clas¬ 
sified into categories and the same term 
of relationship is applied to every person 
belonging to the same category. In the 
descriptive system of naming kinship de¬ 
grees there is usually found a number of 
classificatory terms. 

There has been prevalent hitherto 
among many ethnologists the opinion that 
the tracing of descent through the pater¬ 
nal line is in most cases a development 
from the system of tracing descent exclu¬ 
sively through females, and that, there¬ 
fore, the latter system is antecedent and 
more primitive than the former. But it 
is not at all clear that there has been ad¬ 
duced in support of this contention any 
conclusive evidence that it is a fact or 
that either system has been transformed 
from the other; but it is evident that such 
an improbable procedure would have 
caused the disregard and rupture of a vast 
body of tabus—of tabus among the most 
sacred known, namely, the tabus of incest. 

The kinship system in vogue among 
the Klamath Indians of California and 
Oregon is apparently typical of those 
tribes in which, like the Kiowa, both 
the clan and the gentile systems of kin¬ 
ship are wanting. This lack of either sys¬ 
tem, so far as known, is characteristic of 


BULL. 30] 


KINSHIP 


693 


nearly all the tribes of the plains, the Pa¬ 
cific slope, and the N. W. coast. The Kla¬ 
math system recognizes only two degrees 
in ascending above and only two in de¬ 
scending below the propositus in the 
direct line, and four collateral degrees of 
the paternal line, that of father’s brothers, 
that of father’s uncles, and then that of 
father’s sisters and that of father’s aunts; 
and four collateral degrees of the maternal 
line, that of mother’s sisters, that of 
mother’s aunts, that of mother’s brothers, 
and that of mother’s uncles, or eight col¬ 
lateral degrees in.all. Hence in reckon¬ 
ing descent below himself in the direct 
line the offspring of propositus recog¬ 
nizes one degree of kinship below' the 
lowerof the two admitted by his father; 
but in the ascending direct line, the off¬ 
spring of propositus does not recognize as 
a relation the higher of the two admitted 
by his father. So that in this system the 
circle of relationships shifts with the per¬ 
son selected as the starting point of the 
reckoning. The father recognizes rela¬ 
tions w 7 hich his child does not admit, and 
the child recognizes relations which the 
father does not admit. 

Where the blood ties appear to be so 
limited and so disregarded in the social 
organization, the cohesion of the tribe is 
accomplished more or less satisfactorily 
through military, religious, or other so¬ 
cieties. 

In North America those tribes among 
whom the clan system prevailed, with the 
tracing of descent through the female 
line, became the most important peoples 
of modern times. The Five Civilized 
Tribes of Oklahoma and the Iroquois 
peoples are examples of this. 

Among the Omaha a man must not 
marry in his own gens. A law of mem¬ 
bership requires that a child belong to its 
father’s gens. This is descent in the 
male line, but children of white or black 
persons (negroes) belong to the gens of 
the mother, into which they are forbid¬ 
den to marry. Moreover, a stranger can 
not belong to any gens of the tribe be¬ 
cause there is no ceremony of adoption 
into a gens. A man is prohibited from 
marrying a woman of the gens of his fa¬ 
ther, as the women of this gens are his 
grandmothers, aunts, sisters, nieces, 
daughters, or granddaughters. For the 
same reason he can not marry a woman 
of the gens of his father’s mother, but he 
can marry a woman belonging to any 
other gens of his paternal grandmother’s 
phratry, as she would not be of his kin¬ 
dred. 

Consanguineous or blood kinship em¬ 
braces not only the gens of the father, 
but also that of the mother and grand¬ 
mothers, and these kindred with refer¬ 
ence to a man fall into fourteen groups, 


and with reference to a woman into fif¬ 
teen groups. 

Among the Omaha, within the phratry 
in which gentes exist, those who occupy 
the one side of the fire are not regarded 
as full kindred by those occupying the 
other side of the fire, and they are pro¬ 
hibited from intermarrying. But were 
it not for the institution of these gentes 
or quasi-kindred groups within the phra- 
tries, a man would be compelled to 
marry outside of his tribe, for the reason 
that all the women of the tribe would 
otherwise be his kindred through the 
previous intermarriages among the ten 
original “gentes” or phratries. 

The Omaha kinship system may be 
taken as typical of the gentile organiza¬ 
tion, tracing descent through the male 
line. In this system the relationships are 
highly complex and the terms, or rather 
their approximate English equivalents, 
denotive of these relationships are em¬ 
ployed with considerable latitude and in 
quite a different manner from their use in 
English. For example: If the propositus 
be a male or a female, he or she would 
call all men his or her ‘ fathers ’ whom his 
or her father would call ‘brothers’, or 
whom his or her mother would call her 
potential ‘husbands.’ He or she would 
call all women his or her ‘mothers’ 
whom his or her mother would call ‘sis¬ 
ters’, ‘aunts’, or ‘nieces’, or whom his 
or her father would call his potential 
‘ wives. ’ Moreover, he or she would call 
all men ‘brothers’ who are the sons of 
such fathers or mothers, and their sisters 
would be his or her ‘sisters.’ He or she 
would call all men his or her ‘grandfath¬ 
ers ’ who are the fathers or grandfathers 
of his or her fathers or mothers, or whom 
his or her fathers or mothers would call 
their mothers’ ‘brothers.’ He or she 
would also call all women his or her 
‘grandmothers’ who are the real or po¬ 
tential wives of his or her grandfathers, 
or who are the mothers or grandmothers 
of his or her fathers or mothers, or whom 
his or her fathers would call their fathers’ 
‘sisters.’ 

If the propositus be a male he would 
call all males his ‘sons’ who are the sons 
of his brothers or of his potential wives, 
and the sisters of these sons are his 
‘daughters.’ If the propositus be a 
female person she would call all children 
of her sisters her ‘children’, because their 
father is or their fathers are her potential 
or actual husband or husbands; and she 
would call those males her ‘nephews’ 
who are the sons of her brothers, and the 
daughters of her brothers would be her 
‘nieces.’ 

If the propositus be a male, he would 
call his sister’s son his ‘nephew’ and her 
daughter his ‘niece’; but whether male 


694 


KINSHIP 


[B. A. E. 


or female, the propositus would call all 
male and female persons who are the 
children of his sons, daughters, nephews, 
or nieces, ‘grandchildren’; and, in like 
manner, he or she would call all men 
‘ uncles ’ whom his or her mothers would 
call their ‘brothers’, and would call all 
female persons ‘aunts’ who are his or her 
father’s sisters as well as those who are 
the wives of his or her uncles. But the 
father’s sisters’ husbands of a male person 
are his brothers-in-law, because they are 
the actual or potential husbands of his 
sisters; and when the propositus is a 
female person they are her actual or 
potential husbands. 

Any female person whom a man’s own 
wife calls ‘elder sister’ or ‘younger sis¬ 
ter’, her father’s sister, or her brother’s 
daughter is his potential wife. 

Any male person whom a man’s wife 
would call ‘elder brother’ or ‘younger 
brother’ is his brother-in-law; also any 
other male person who is the brother of 
his wife’s niece or of his brother’s wife. 
But his wife’s father’s brother is his grand¬ 
father, not his brother-in-law, although 
his sister is his potential wife. When 
his brother-in-law is the husband of his 
father’s sister or of his own sister, his sis¬ 
ter is his grandchild, and not his poten¬ 
tial wife. A male person is the brother- 
in-law of a man if he be the husband of 
the sister of the other’s father, since that 
man could marry his (the other’s own) 
sister, but his aunt’s husband is not his 
brother-in-law when he is his own uncle 
or his mother’s brother. Any male per¬ 
son is the brother-in-law of the man whose 
sister is his wife. But since his sister’s 
niece’s husband is his sister’s potential 
or actual husband, he is his son-in-law, 
because he is his daughter’s husband. 

A male or female person would call any 
male person his or her ‘son-in-law’ who is 
the husband of his or her daughter, niece, 
or grandchild, and his father is his or her 
son-in-law. When a male person or a 
female person w r ould call the father of his 
or her daughter-in-law his or her ‘ grand¬ 
father,’ her brother is his or her grandson. 

A male or female person would call any 
other female person who is the wife of his 
or her son, nephew, or grandson, his or 
her ‘daughter-in-law’; and the mother 
of his or her son-in-law is so called by 
him or her. 

The father, mother’s brother, or grand¬ 
father of a man’s wife, of his potential 
wife, or of his daughter-in-law (the last 
being the wife of his son, nephew, or 
grandson) is the grandfather (or father- 
in-law) of that man. Any female person 
who is the mother, mother’s sister, or 
grandmother of a man’s wife, of his po¬ 
tential wife, or of his daughter-in-law (a 
wife of his son, nephew, or of his grand¬ 


son) is the grandmother (or mother-in- 
law) of that man. 

By the institution of either the clan 
(q. v.) or the gens system of determining 
and fixing degrees of relationship, kin¬ 
ship through males or through females 
acquired increased importance, because 
under either form of organization it signi¬ 
fied ‘clan kin’ or‘gentile kin’ in contra¬ 
distinction to non-gentile kin. The 
members of either were an organized 
body of consanguinei bearing a common 
clan or gentile name, and w'ere bound 
together by ties of blood and by the fur¬ 
ther bond of mutual rights, privileges, 
and obligations characteristic of the clan 
or the gens. In either case, ‘clan kin’ or 
‘gentile kin ’ became superior to other kin, 
because it invested its members with the 
rights, privileges, and obligations of the 
clan or gens. 

Where a man calls his mother’s sister 
‘ mother’, and she in turn calls him her 
‘son’, although she did not in fact give 
him birth, the relationship must in strict¬ 
ness be defined as a marriage relation¬ 
ship and not as a blood relationship. 
Under the clan or the gentile system of 
relationships kinship was traced equally 
through males and through females, but 
a broad distinction was made between 
the paternal and the maternal kindred, 
and the rights, privileges, and obliga¬ 
tions of the members of the line through 
which descent was traced were far more 
real and extensive than were those of the 
other line. Among North American In¬ 
dians kinship through males was recog¬ 
nized just as constantly as kinship through 
females. There were brothers and sis¬ 
ters, grandfathers and grandmothers, 
grandsons and granddaughters, traced 
through males as well as through females. 
While the mother of a child was readily 
ascertainable, the father was not, but be¬ 
cause of this uncertainty, kinship through 
males was not therefore rejected, and 
probable fathers, probable brothers, and 
probable sons were placed in the category 
of real fathers, real brothers, and real 
sons. 

In every Iroquois community the de¬ 
gree of security and of distinction which 
every member of the community en¬ 
joyed, depended chiefly on the number, 
the wealth, and the power of his kin¬ 
dred, hence the tie uniting the members 
of the kinship group was not lightly or 
arbitrarily broken. 

It appears that where the clan organi¬ 
zation is in vogue the adoption (q. v.) of 
alien persons was customary. 

With descent in the female line a male 
person had in his clan grandfathers and 
grandmothers, mothers, brothers and 
sisters, uncles, rarely nephews and nieces, 
and grandsons and granddaughters, some 


BULL. 30] 


KINSHIP 


695 


lineal and some collateral; at the same 
time, with the exception of uncles, he had 
the same relationships outside of his clan, 
and fathers, aunts, sons and daughters, 
and cousins, in addition. A woman had 
the same relationships in the clan as a 
man, and in addition sons and daugh¬ 
ters; and at the same time she had the 
same relationships outside of her clan as 
had the man. 

In certain communities there are terms 
in use applied to polyandrous and polygy- 
nous marriage relations. For instance, in 
Klamath the term p'tceWp denotes (1) the 
relationship of the two or more wives of a 
man, and (2) the relationship of two or 
more men (who may be brothers) who 
marry sisters or a single woman among 
them. And in the Cree the term n’t’dyim , 
employed by both men and women, signi¬ 
fies ‘my (sexual) partner’; for example, 
a w T ife will apply this term to the cowife of 
the husband or husbands; and the term 
nikusdk is applied by one man to another 
with whom he shares a wife or wives, or 
to wdiom he has loaned his own wife. 
This term is employed also as a term of 
friendship among men. 

The distinction between one’s own 
father and mother and the other persons 
so called was sometimes marked by the 
use of an explanatory adjective, ‘real,’ 
‘true,’ or the like; sometimes by calling 
all the others ‘little fathers’ or ‘little 
mothers.’ 

The following chart, which applies es¬ 
pecially to the Haida, may be taken as 
typical of a two-clan system with female 
descent, self being male: 


known as uncles, aunts, uncles’ chil¬ 
dren, nephews, and nieces, as indicated 
in the above table. 

Where clans did not exist blood rela¬ 
tionship was recognized on both sides as 
far as the connection could be remem¬ 
bered, and marriage with any person 
within this circle was, generally speaking, 
less usual than with one entirely outside, 
though such marriages were not every¬ 
where prohibited, and in some cases 
were actually preferred. There was the 
same custom, however, of extending the 
terms of relationship to groups of indi¬ 
viduals, such as the brothers of one’s 
father, and the sisters of one’s mother. 
Among the Salish tribes of British Co¬ 
lumbia, who appear to have had a special 
fondness for recording genealogies, the 
number of terms of relationship is very 
greatly increased. Thus four or even five 
generations back of that of the parents 
and below that of the children are marked 
by distinct terms, and there are distin¬ 
guishing terms for the first, second, third, 
and youngest child, and for the uncle, 
aunt, etc., according as one’s father, 
mother, or other relative through whom 
the relationship exists is living or dead, 
and different terms for a living and a 
dead wife. There are thus 25 terms of 
relationship among the Lillooet, 28 among 
the Shuswap, and 31 among the Squaw- 
mish. By way of illustration, the kin¬ 
ship system of the last-mentioned tribe 
is subjoined (see Boas in Rep. on N. W. 
Tribes of Can., 136, 1890): 

1. Direct relationship. Haukweyuk , 

great-great-great grandparent or great- 


Clan of Self 


Opposite Clan or Clans 


Mother Uncles 

I (husbands 

p-j-—-j of aunts, 

Elder Self Younger Sisters 
brothers brothers I fl S ln . 

law of self 
Nephews and of 
nieces brothers) 


In paternal succession analogous series 
of terms of relationship develop. 

The persons belonging to one’s own 
clan being accounted blood relations, 
marriage with any of them was not per¬ 
mitted, and where there were many clans 
this prohibition usually extended to the 
father’s clan also. After marriage, terms 
of affinity corresponding to ‘father-in- 
law,’ ‘mother-in-law,’ ‘brother-in-law,’ 
and ‘sister-in-law,’ were applied not 
only to persons who could be so desig¬ 
nated in English, but to all members 
of the same clans of corresponding age 
and sex as well. Where there w r ere but 
two clans the terms of affinity might be 
applied to those who had previously been 


Aunts 

(mother-in-law) 


Fathers (of self, 
brothers, sisters) 


Aunts or uncles’ Male cousins 
children (from whom come 

(from whom come sisters’ husbands) 
wife, brothers’ wives) 


sons and daughters 


great-great grandchild; tsopeyuk , great- 
great-grandparent or great-great-grand¬ 
child; stshamik , great-grandparent or 
great-grandchild; seel, grandfather, grand¬ 
mother, great-uncle, or great-aunt; emats , 
grandchild, grandnephew, or grandniece; 
man, father; chisha , mother; men, child; 
seentl, eldest child; anontatsh, second child; 
menchechit, third child; saut, youngest 
child; kupkuopits, brothers, sisters, and 
cousins together; kuopits, elder brother 
or sister, or father’s or mother’s elder 
brother’s or sister’s child; skak, younger 
brother or sister, or father’s or mother’s 
younger brother’s or sister’s child; snchoitl, 
cousin. 

2. Indirect relationship, (a) When 




696 


KINTECAW-KINTPUASH 


[b. a. e. 


the intermediate relative is alive: sisi, 
father’s or mother’s brother or sister; 
staeatl , brother’s or sister’s child; chemash , 
wife’s or husband’s cousin, brother, or 
sister; or cousin’s brother’s or sister’s wife 
or husband; saak , son-in-law, daughter- 
in-law, father-in-law, or mother-in-law; 
skuewas, any relative of a husband or wife. 
(b) When the intermediate relative is 
dead: uotsaeqoitl , father’s or mother’s 
brother or sister; suinemaitl, brother’s 
or sister’s child; chaiae , wife’s or hus¬ 
band’s cousin, brother, or sister, or 
cousin’s brother’s or sister’s wife or hus¬ 
band; slikoaitl, son-in-law, daughter-in- 
law, father-in-law, or mother-in-law. 

3. Indirect affinity. Skseel, wife’s grand¬ 
father or grandmother, or stepfather’s or 
stepmother’s father or mother; skaman, 
aunt’s husband or stepfather; skechisha, 
uncle’s wife or stepmother; skemen , step¬ 
child; skemats, grandson’s or granddaugh¬ 
ter’s wife or husband; skesaak, wife’s or 
husband’s stepfather or stepmother, or 
stepchild’s husband or wife. 

It will be noted that many of these are 
reciprocal terms, and such were very 
common in Indian kinship systems, used 
between persons of different generations, 
as above, or sometimes between persons 
of opposite sex of the same generation, 
such as husband and wife. Out of 14 
terms in Klamath and Modoc 11 are 
reciprocal. On the other hand, per¬ 
sons of different sexes will often indicate 
the same relative, such as a father or a 
mother, by entirely different terms, and 
different terms are applied to those of a 
person’s ownphratry and to members of 
the opposite one, while the Iroquois use 
the equivalent for ‘brother’ for persons 
inside and outside the tribe indiscrim¬ 
inately. In all tribes, no matter how 
organized, a distinction is made between 
the elder and the younger members of 
the generation of self, at least between 
older and younger members of the same 
sex. 

The terms corresponding to ‘grand¬ 
father ’ and ‘ grandmother, ’ except among 
a few peoples, like the Salish, were ex¬ 
tended to all those of a generation older 
than that of the parents and sometimes 
even to persons of that generation, while 
the term for ‘grandchild’ was applied 
to very young people by old ones quite 
indiscriminately. There were also terms 
to indicate the potential relationship of 
husband and wife, applied by a man to 
his wife’s sisters, his aunt, or his niece, 
not because she was or had been, but be¬ 
cause she might become, his wife, as usu¬ 
ally happens to the wife’s sister after the 
wife’s death. 

Besides the natural import of terms of 
kinship, they were employed metaphor¬ 
ically in a great number of ways, as to 


indicate respect, to avoid the use of a 
man’s personal name, to indicate the clan 
or phratry to which a person belonged, 
or to indicate the possession of special 
privileges. Naturally enough, they often 
took the place of clan or even tribal des¬ 
ignations, a fact which undoubtedly has 
led to serious errors in attempts to trace 
the history of Indian tribes. Again, they 
were applied to animals or supernatural 
beings, and with the Haida this use was 
intended to mark the fact that the being 
in question belonged to such and such a 
phratry or that a representation of it was 
used as a crest in that phratry. As this 
classification of animals by phratries or 
clans is often traced back to the inter¬ 
marriage of a human being and an animal, 
we have an extension of the idea of kin¬ 
ship quite beyond any civilized concep¬ 
tions. See Clan and Gens, Family, Social 
Organization. (j. n. b. h. j. r. s.) 

Kintecaw, Kintecoy, Kinte Kaye, Kin- 
ticka. See Cavtico. 

Kintpuash (‘having the water-brash’— 
Gatschet; also spelled Keintpoos, but 
commonly known as Captain Jack). A 
subchief of the Modoc on the Oregon- 
California border, and leader of the hos¬ 
tile element in the Modoc war of 1872-73. 

The Modoc, a warlike and aggressive 
offshoot from the Klamath tribe of s. e. 
Oregon, occupied the territory immedi¬ 
ately to the s. of the latter, extending 
across the California border and includ¬ 
ing the Lost r. country and the famous 
Lava-bed region. They had been par¬ 
ticularly hostile to the whites up to 1864, 
when, under the head chief Sconchin, 
they made a treaty agreeing to go upon a 
reservation established on Upper Kla¬ 
math lake jointly for them and the Kla¬ 
math tribe. The treaty remained unrati¬ 
fied for several years, and in the mean¬ 
time Jack, with a dissatisfied band num¬ 
bering nearly half the tribe and including 
about 70 fighting men, continued to rove 
about the Lost r. country, committing 
frequent depredations and terrorizing the 
settlers. He claimed as his authority for 
remaining, in spite of the treaty, a per¬ 
mission given by an Indian agent on the 
California side. With some difficulty he 
was finally induced in the spring of 1870 
to go with his band upon the reservation, 
where the rest of the tribe was already 
established under Sconchin. He re¬ 
mained but a short time, however, and 
soon left after killing an Indian doctor, 
who, he said, was responsible for two 
deaths in his own family. He returned 
to Lost r. demanding that a reservation 
be assigned to him there on the ground 
that it was his home country and that it 
was impossible to live on friendly terms 
with the Klamath. One or two confer¬ 
ences were arranged both by the military 


BULL. 30] 


KINTPUASH 


697 


and civil authorities, but without shak¬ 
ing his purpose, and it became evident 
that he was planning for a treacherous 
outbreak at the first opportunity. At a 
final conference, Nov. 27, 1872, he abso¬ 
lutely refused to go on the reservation or 
to discuss the matter longer, and the atti¬ 
tude of the Indians was so threatening 
that an order was sent the military at Ft 
Klamath to put him and his head men 
under arrest. The attempt was made by 
Capt. Jackson with 36 cavalrymen at 
Jack’s camp on Lost r., Oreg., Nov. 29, 
but the Indians resisted, killing or wound¬ 
ing 8 soldiers with a loss to themselves of 
15. The Modoc, led by Jack, fled into 
the impenetrable Lava-beds on the s. 
shore of Rhett (Modoc or Tule) lake, 
just across the California border, killing 
a number of settlers on the way. Those 
under Sconchin remained quietly on the 
reservation. 



KINTPUASH (AFTER Meacham) 

The war was now begun, and volunteer 
companies were organized to assist the 
small body of troops available. A num¬ 
ber of friendly Modoc, Klamath, and 
other Indians also enlisted. The Modoc 
position was so strong with rocks and 
caves and hidden passages that it was 
practically impossible for the troops to 
enter with any prospect of success. On 
Dec. 22, 1872, the Indians attacked a 
wagon train with ammunition supplies 
and a skirmish ensued in which one or 
two were killed on each side. On Jan. 
17, 1873, an attempt was made by Col. 
Greer to storm the Modoc stronghold by 
the entire force of regulars and volunteers, 
numbering nearly 400 men, assisted by a 
howitzer battery, but after fighting all 
day among the rocks against a concealed 
foe the troops were obliged to retire with 
the loss of 9 killed and 30 wounded. 


Soon afterward civil indictments for mur¬ 
der were procured by the settlers against 
8 Modocs concerned in the killing of set¬ 
tlers. Another conference was appointed 
under a regular peace commission, con¬ 
sisting of Gen. E. R. S. Canby, Indian 
superintendent A. B. Meacham, Rev. E. 
Thomas, and Indian agent L. S. Dyar. 
By agreement with Jack, the commission¬ 
ers, together with Frank F. Riddle and 
his Indian wife, Toby (Winema), as inter¬ 
preters, met Jack and several of his men 
near the Modoc camp, Apr. 11, 1873, to 
debate terms of settlement. Hardly had 
the talk begun when, by premeditated 
treachery, Jack gave a signal, and draw¬ 
ing a revolver from his breast shot Gen¬ 
eral Canby dead, while his companions 
attacked the other commissioners, killing 
Mr Thomas and putting 5 bullets into 
Meacham, who fell unconscious. The 
others escaped, pursued by the Indians 
until the latter were driven off by a de¬ 
tachment of troops who came up just in 
time, one of the officers having already 
been killed in the same treacherous 
fashion by another party of the same 
band. 

Active measures were now put into oper¬ 
ation and a company of Warmspring In¬ 
dian scouts from n. Oregon, under Donald 
McKay, was secured to assist the troops 
in penetrating the maze of the Lava-beds. 
With these and the aid of the field guns 
the Modoc were soon compelled to vacate 
their stronghold and take refuge in the 
rocks farther along the lake shore. On 
Apr. 26 a search detachment of about 85 
men, under Lieuts. Thomas and Wright, 
was suddenly attacked by the Indians 
from cover, with the loss of 26 killed, in¬ 
cluding both officers, besides 16 wounded. 
In consequence of this defeat Col. Jeffer¬ 
son C. Davis, in command of the Depart¬ 
ment of the Columbia, restored control 
of operations to Col. Wheaton, who had 
been temporarily superseded by another 
officer. Other minor encounters took 
place, in one of which Jack in person led 
the attack, clad in the uniform which he 
had stripped from Gen. Canby. By this 
time the Indians were tired of fighting, 
and many of Jack’s warriors had deserted 
him, while he, with the rest, had vacated 
the Lava-beds entirely and taken up a 
new position about 20 m. farther s. The 
pursuit was kept up, and on May 22,1873, 
a party of 65 hostiles surrendered, in¬ 
cluding several of the most prominent 
leaders. Others came in later, and on 
June 1 Jack himself, with his whole re¬ 
maining party, surrendered to Capt. Perry 
at a camp some miles e. of Clear lake, 
n. w. Cal. The whole military force then 
opposed to him numbered 985 regulars 
and 71 Indians, while he himself had 
never had more than about 80 warriors, 






KINTYEL—KIOHERO 


tB. A. E. 


698 


who were now reduced to 50, besides 
about 120 women and children. The 
whites had lost 65 killed, soldiers and 
civilians, including two Indian scouts, 
with 63 wounded, several mortally. The 
Modoc prisoners were removed to Ft Kla¬ 
math, where, in July, 6 of the leaders 
were tried by court-martial for the mur¬ 
der of Gen. Canby, Mr Thomas, and the 
settlers, and 4 of them condemned, 
namely, Jack, young Sconchin, Black Jim, 
and Boston Charley, who were hanged 
together Oct. 3, 1873, thus closing what 
Bancroft calls “their brave and stubborn 
fight for their native land and liberty—a 
war in some respects the most remark¬ 
able that ever occurred in the history of 
aboriginal extermination.” The remain¬ 
der of the band were not permitted to 
rejoin their people on Klamath res., but 
were deported to the s. e. corner of Okla¬ 
homa, where a part of them still remain. 
See Modoc. Consult Bancroft, Hist. Ore¬ 
gon, ii, 1888; Commissioner of Ind. Affs. 
Reports for 1872-73; Dunn, Massacres of 
the Mts., 1886; Gatschet in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., ii, 1890. (j. m. ) 

Kintyel (Navaho: Klntytt, or Klntye'li, 
from kin ‘pueblo house’, tyel ‘broad’: 
‘broad house.’—Matthews). An unusu¬ 
ally large, ancient, circular pueblo ruin 
on Leroux wash, about 23 m. n. of Navajo 
station, on the S. F. Pac. R. R., Ariz. 
According to Zuni tradition the village 
was built by the Hleetakwe, during the 
migration of the Bear, Crane, Frog, Deer, 
Yellow-wood, and other Zuni clans. The 
Zuni origin of the pueblo has been borne 
out by archeological study of the ruins. 
See Cushing in 4th Rep. B. A. E., xxxviii, 
1886; Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 91- 
94, 1891; Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 
124, 1904. 

He-sho-ta-pathl-taie.—Cushing quoted by Powell 
in 4th Rep. B. A. E., xxxviii, 1886 (Zuni name). 
K'in’i K’el.—Ibid. Kin-Tiel.—Mindeleff quoted 
in 5th Rep. B. A. E., xxiv, 1887. Pueblo Grande.— 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 91, 1891. 

Kintyel. A ruined pueblo in Chaco 
canyon, n. w. N. Mex. It figures in Nav¬ 
aho legend as in course of erection during 
one of their early migratory movements, 
and later as a ruin. Its builders are not 
known. 

Kintail.—Bickford in Century Mag., xl, 903, Oct. 
1890. Kintyel.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
III, 224, 1890. Klntye'li.—Ibid. 

Kinugumiut. An Eskimo tribe of Alaska, 
inhabiting the region of C. Prince of 
Wales on Kaviak penin. About 1860 they 
overran the country as far as Selawik r.*, 
oppressing other tribes and collecting an¬ 
nual tribute from the Kaviagmiut. They 
now visit the shores of Kotzebue sd. to 
barter with the inland tribes, and are the 
keenest traders among the Eskimo and 
the most vicious, perhaps from longer in 
tercourse with whalemen. Their dialect 
is more guttural than that of the Kaviag¬ 


miut and other tribes of Alaska, resem¬ 
bling that of the Yuit. They numbered 
400 in 1880, 652 in 1890. Their villages 
are: Eidenu, Kingegan, Mitletukeruk, 
Nuk, Pikta, Shishmaref, Sinar, and 
Takchuk. For illustrations of types see 
Eskimo. 

Kinegans.— Kelly, Arct. Eskimo in Alaska, 9, 1890. 
Kingee'ga-mut. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
16, 1877. Kinugmut. —Rep. U. S. Bur. Ed.,Circ. of 
Inf’n No. 2, chart, 1901. Kinugumut. —Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Kinik Mute. —Rep. 
U. S. Bur. Ed., op. cit. Ki'xmi.— Bogoras, Chuk¬ 
chee, 21, 1904 (Yuit name: ‘the inhabitant of 
Kihi,’ i. e., of Prince of Wales id.). 

Kinuhtoiah ( Gyidnadd,'eks , ‘people of 
the rapids’). A former Tsimshian divi¬ 
sion and town near Metlakatla, Brit. Col. 
Gyidnada'eks. —Boas in Zeitsch. fur Ethnol., 232, 
1888. Keen'-ath-toix. —Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 
app., 1859. Kenath tui ex.— Howard, Notes on 
Northern Tribes visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kin- 
nato-iks. —Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. Kinns- 
toucks.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kinuhtoiah.— Tol- 
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. 

Kinyaah (Navaho: Kimia ‘high 
house.’—Matthews). A small ruined 
pueblo about 30 m. s. and 5 m. w. of Pueblo 
Bonito, on the Thoreau road, n. w. New 
Mexico. It is in the Chaco drainage, but 
on an open plain. The ruin is rectangular, 
165 by 90 ft, and without an inclosed court; 
the foundations are true to the cardinal 
points and a perfect parallelogram. Some 
circular depressions indicate the former 
presence of kivas. A small wing 30 ft 
square is at the s. e. corner of the build¬ 
ing. A portion of the w. wall stands 30 ft 
high and partly incloses a large kiva which 
still stands 3 stories high. The material is 
dark-brown laminated sandstone, which 
must have been brought from the moun¬ 
tains 3 m. away. The stones used were 
the largest employed in the construction 
of any of the Chaco canyon group of 
buildings, to which group Kinyaah is 
evidently related by all cultural affinities 
that have been discovered. Some small 
pueblo ruins exist near by, and a large irri¬ 
gation ditch and two reservoirs are dis¬ 
cernible. (e. L. H.) 

Kio. The Pine clan of the pueblo of 
Jemez, N. Mex. A corresponding cian 
existed also at the former related pueblo 
oi Pecos. 

Kiotsaa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896 
( tsad , or tsadsh, — ‘people’). K’otsaa'.— Ibid. 
(Pecos form). 

Kioch’s Tribe. A body of Salish of Wil¬ 
liams Lake agency, Brit Col., numbering 
45 in 1886, the last time the name ap¬ 
pears.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1886, 232. 

Kiohero (‘ where reeds float.’—Hewitt). 
A former Cayuga settlement on the e. 
side of the n. end of Cayuga lake, N. Y. 
It was occupied by descendants of incor¬ 
porated Hurons and other prisoners. In 
1670 the French had there the mission 
of St Etienne. (j. m. ) 

Kiohero.— Jes. Rel. for 1670, 63, 1858. Saint Es- 
tienne.— Jes. Rel. for 1670, 63, 1858. Saint Ste¬ 
phen.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 251, 1853. Thi- 


BULL. 30] 


KI-ON-TWOG-KY—KIOWA 


699 


hero.— Con over, op. cit. Tichero. —Ibid. Tiohero.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1669, 14, 1858. 

Ki-on-twog-ky. See Complanter. 

Kiota. Mentioned in connection with 
the Shasta and several small Athapascan 
tribes of s. Oregon as being hostile to 
white settlers in 1854. They numbered 
only 8 and their name was possibly that 
of their leader.—Ambrose in H. K. Ex. 
Doc. 93, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 90, 1856. 

Kiowa (from Gd'-i-gwu , or Kd'-i-gwu, 
‘principal people,’ their own name). A 
tribe at one time residing about the upper 
Yellowstone and Missouri, but better 



APIATAN (wOODEN LANCE) —KIOWA 


known as centering about the upper Ar¬ 
kansas and Canadian in Colorado and Ok¬ 
lahoma, and constituting, so far as present 
knowledge goes, adistinctlinguisticstock. 
They are noticed in Spanish records as 
early, at least, as 1732. Their oldest tra¬ 
dition, which agrees with the concurrent 
testimony of the Shoshoni and Arapaho, 
locates them about the junction of Jeffer¬ 
son, Madison, and Gallatin forks, at the 
extreme head of Missouri r., in the neigh¬ 
borhood of the present Virginia City, 
Mont. They afterward moved down from 
the mountains and formed an alliance with 
the Crows, with whom they have since 
continued on friendly terms. From here 
they drifted southward along the base of 
the" mountains, driven by the Cheyenne 
and Arapaho, with whom they finally 
made peace about 1840, after which they 
commonly acted in concert with the latter 
tribes. The Sioux claim to have driven 
them out of the Black hills, and in 1805 
they were reported by Lewis and Clark as 


living on the North Platte. According to 
the Kiowa account, when they first 
reached Arkansas r. they found their pas¬ 
sage opposed by the Comanche, who 
claimed all the country to the s. A war 
followed, but peace was finally concluded, 
when the Kiowa crossed over to thes. side 
of the Arkansas and formed a confedera¬ 
tion with the Comanche, which continues 
to the present day. In connection with 
the Comanche they carried on a constant 
war upon the frontier settlements of Mex¬ 
ico and Texas, extending their incursions 
as far s., at least, as Durango. Among all 
the prairie tribes they were noted as the 
most predatory and bloodthirsty, and 
have probably killed more white men in 
proportion to their numbers than any of 
the others. They made their first treaty 
with the Government in 1837, and were 
put on their present reservation jointly 
with the Comanche and Kiowa Apache in 
1868. Their last outbreak was in 1874-75 
in connection with the Comanche, Kiowa 
Apache, and Cheyenne. While probably 



KIOWA WOMAN. (soule, PHOTO. ) 


never very numerous, they have been 
greatly reduced by war and disease. 
Their last terrible blow came in the 
spring of 1892, when measles and fever 
destroyed more than 300 of the three 
confederated tribes. 

The Kiowa do not have the gentile sys¬ 
tem, and there is no restriction as to inter¬ 
marriage among the divisions, of which 
they have six, including the Kiowa 
Apache associated with them, who form 
a component part of the Kiowa camp 
circle. A seventh division, the Kuato, is 












TOO 


KIOWA 


[B. a. e. 


now extinct. The tribal divisions in the 
order of the camp circle, from the en¬ 
trance at the e. southward, are Kata, 
Kogui, Kaigwu, Kingep, Semat (i. e., 
Apache), and Kongtalyui. 

Although brave and warlike, the Kiowa 
are considered inferior in most respects 
to the Comanche. In person they' are 
dark and heavily built, forming a marked 



SLEEPING WOLF AND WIFE—KIOWA 


contrast to the more slender and brighter 
complexioned prairie tribes farther n. 
Their language is full of nasal and chok¬ 
ing sounds and is not well adapted to 
rhythmic composition. Their present 
chief is Gui-piigo, ‘Lone Wolf,’ but 
his title is disputed byApiatan. They 
occupied the same reservation with the 
Comanche and Kiowa Apache, between 
Washita and Redrs., in s. w. Oklahoma; 
but in 1901 their lands were allotted in 
severalty and the remainder opened to set¬ 
tlement. Pop. 1,165 in 1905. Consult 

Mooney, Ghost-dance Religion, 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 1896, and Calendar 
History of the Kiowa, 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
pt. i, 1898. (j. m.) 

Be'shiltcha.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.E., 1078, 
1896 (Kiowa Apache name). Cahiaguas.—Escu- 
dero, Noticias Nuevo Mexico, 87,1849. Cahiguas.— 
Ibid., 83. Cai-a-was.—H.R. Rep. 299,44th Cong.,1st 
sess., 1,1876. Caigua.—Spanish doc. of 1735 cited 
in Rep. Columb. Hist. Expos. Madrid, 323, 1895. 
Caiguaras.—Pimentel, Cuadro Descr., II, 347, 1865 
(given as Comanche division). Caihuas.—Doc. of 
1828 in Bol. Soc. Geog. Mex., 265,1870. Caiwas.— 
Amer. Pioneer, I, 257, 1842. Cargua.—Spanish 
doc. of 1732 cited in Rep. Columb. Hist. Expos. 
Madrid, 323,1895 (for Caigua). Cayanwa.—Lewis, 
Travels, 15, 1809 (for Cayauwa). Cay-au-wa.— 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 100, 1905. Cay- 
au-wah.—Ibid. Caycuas.—Barreiro, Ojeadasobre 
Nuevo Mex., app., 10, 1832. Cayguas.—Villa 
Senor, Teatro Amer., pt. 2, 413, 1748 (common 
Spanish form, written also Cayguas). Cayohuas.— 
Bandelier in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archaeol., 


in, 43, 1892. Cayugas. —Sen. Rep. 18, 31st Cong., 
1st sess., 185, 1850 (for Cayguas). Ciawis. —H. R. 
Rep. 299,44th Cong., 1st sess., 1,1876. Datumpa'ta.— 
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 148, 1898 (Hi- 
datsa name, perhaps a form of Witapahiitu or 
Witapatu). Gahe'wa. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1078,1896 (Wichita and Kichainame). Ga'-i- 
gwu. —Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 148, 1898. 
Gai'wa. —La Flesche cited in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
148, 1898 (Omaha and Ponca name). Guazas.— 
Texas State archives, Nov. 15,1785 (probably mis¬ 
print of Caiguas). Kaiawas. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Ethnol. Soc.,il, 20, 1848. Ka'igwu. —Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1078,1896 (‘principal people’: 
propertribal name). Kaiowan.— Hodge, MS. Pue¬ 
blo notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia name). Kai-o- 
was.— Whipple in Pac. R. R.Rep.,in, pt. 1,31,1856. 
Kaiowe.— Gatschet cited in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 
xxxiv, 1888. Kai-wa.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. 
E.,148,1898 (Comanche name; also Kai-wa, 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1078,1896). Kai-wane'.— Hodge, MS. 
Pueblo notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Picuris name). 
Kawa. —La'Flesche, inf’n. (Omaha name). Ka- 
was.— Sen. Doc. 72, 20th Cong., 2d sess., 104, 1829. 
Kayaguas. —Bent (1846) in H. R. Doe. 76, 30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 11, 1848. Kayaways. —Pike, 
Exped., app., m, 73, 1810. Kayowa. —Gatschet, 
Kaw MS., B. A. E., 1878 (Kansa and Tonkawa 
name). Kayowe'. —Gatschet in Am,Antiquarian, 
IV,281,1881. Kayowu.— Grayson, Creek MS.,B.A. 
E., 1885 (Creekname). Kayuguas. —Bent (1846) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 244, 1851. Ka'yuwa. — 
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa 
name). Keawas. —Porter (1829) in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, ill, 596, 1853. Keaways. —Farnham, 
Travels, 29, 1843. Ki'-a-wa. —Lewis and Clark, 
Discoveries, 37, 1806. Kiawas. —P6nicaut (1719) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., I, 153, 1869. 
Kiaways.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, 
cvii, 1848. Ki-e-wah.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, i, 190, 1904. Kinawas. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 133, 1836 (misprint). Kini- 
was. —Wilkes, U. S. Expl. Exped., IV, 473, 1845 
(misprint). Kiohicans. —Philippeaux, Map of 
Engl. Col., 1781 (possibly the same; this and the 
3 forms following are evidently from the early 
French form Quiouaha, etc.). Kiohuan. —Anville, 
Map of N. A., 1752. Kiohuhahans. —JeiTerys, Am. 
Atlas, map 5, 1776. Kiouahaa. —Gravier (1700) 
quoted by Shea, Early Voy., 149, 1861 (possibly 
identical). Kiovas. —Mollhausen, Jour, to the 



KIOWA MOTHER AND CHILD. (RUSSELL, PHOTO.) 


Pacific, I, 158, 1858 (misprint). Kiowahs.—Davis, 
El Gringo, 17,1857. Kioway.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 240, 
1834 (official geographic form; pron. Kai'-o-wa). 
Kioways.—Brackenridge, Views of La., 80, 1814. 
Kiwaa.—Kendall, Santa F6 Exped., I, 198, 1844 
(given as pronunciation of Caygiia). Ko'mpabi'- 
anta.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 149, 1898 
(‘large tipi flapsname sometimes used by the 
Kiowa). Kompa'go.— Ibid, (abbreviated form of 
Ko'mpabi'anta). Kuyawas.—Sage, Scenes in 
Rocky Mts., 167,1846. Kwu’da.—Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E.,1078,1896 (‘goingout’: old name for 
themselves). Kyaways.—Pike (1807), Exped., 
app. II, 16, 1810. Manrhoat.—La Salle (ca. 1680) in 






BULL. 30] 


KIOWA APACHE 


701 


Margry, D6c., n, 201, 1877 (mentioned with Gat- 
tacka, or Kiowa Apache; believed by Mooney to 
be perhaps the Kiowa). Manrhout.—La Salle (ca. 
1680), ibid., 168. Mayoahc.—Coxe, Carolana, 
map, 1741. Na’la'ni.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
149, 1898 (‘many aliens’: collective Navaho 
name for southern plains tribes, particularly the 
Comanche and Kiowa). Ne-ci'-he-nen-a.—Hav- 
den, Ethnog. and Philol.Mo. Val.,326, 1862. NI'- 
chihine'na.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1078, 
1896 (‘river men’: Arapaho name). Nitchihi.— 
Gatschetin Am. Antiq.,iv, 281,1881. Oways.—Hil¬ 
dreth, Dragoon Campaigns, 162, 1836 (probable 
misprint of Kioways). Quichuan.—LaHarpe(1719) 
in Margry, D£c., vi, 278. 1886 (probably identical: 
c=o). Quiohohouans.—Baudry des Lozieres, Voy. 
a la Le., 244, 1802. Quiouaha.—Joutel (1687) in 
Margry, Dfic., ill, 409, 1878. duiouahan.—Iber¬ 
ville, ibid., iv, 464,1880. Riana.—Kennedy, Texas, 
I, 189, 1841 (misprint). Ryawas.—Morse, Rep. to 
Sec. War, app., 367, 1822 (misprint). Ryuwas.— 
Brackenridge, Views of La., 85, 1814 (misprint). 
Shish-i-nu'-wut-tsit'-a-ni-o. — Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol.Mo. Val., 290, 1862 (improperly given 
as the Cheyenne name and rendered ‘ rattlesnake 
people’: Shi'shlnoatsltii/neo, ‘snake people,’ 



KIOWA MAN AND WIFE (santa Fe RailwayI 


is the Cheyenne name for the Comanche). 
Te'pda'.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 149, 1898 
(‘coming out’: ancient name used to designate 
themselves; may have been substituted for Kwu'- 
‘da). Tepk‘i'nago.—Ibid. (‘people coming out’: an¬ 
other form of Te'pda). Tideing Indians.—Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, 1,190, 1904. Vi'tapatu'i.— 
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 149,1898 (name used 
by the Sutaya Cheyenne). Watahpahata.—Mal- 
lery in 4th Rep. B. A. E., 109, 1886. Wate-pana- 
toes.—Brackenridge, Views of La., 85, 1814 (mis¬ 
print). Watepaneto.—Drake, Bk. of Inds., xii, 
1848 (misprint). Weta-hato.—Lewis, Travels, 15, 
1809(misprint). Wetapahato.—Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., I, 34, map, 1814. We-te-pa-ha'-to.—Lewis 
and Clark, Travels, 36,1806. Wetopahata.—Mallery 
in 4th Rep. B. A. E., 109, 1886. Wettaphato.— 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War., app., 366, 1822. Wi'- 
ta-pa-ha.—Riggs-Dorsey, Dakota-Eng. Diet., 579, 
1890. Witapa'hat.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1078, 1898 (Cheyenne form of Witapaha'tu). 
Wi'tapaha'tu.—Ibid, (‘island butte people’: Da- 
kotaname). Witapa'tu.—Ibid. (Cheyenneform). 
Witap'atu.—Moonev in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 150,1898. 
Wi-tup-a'-tu.—Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 290,1862 (Cheyenne name for Kiowa; incor¬ 
rectly given as their name for the Comanche). 


Kiowa Apache. A small Athapascan 
tribe, associated with the Kiowa from 
the earliest traditional period and form¬ 
ing a component part of the Kiowa tribal 
circle, although preserving its distinct 
language. They call themselves Na-i- 
shah-dina, ‘our people’. In the earliest 
French records of the 17th century, in 
Lewis and Clark’s narrative, and in their 
first treaty in 1837, they are called by va¬ 
rious forms of ‘Gattacka’, the name by 
which they are known to the Pawnee; 
and they are possibly the Kaskaia, ‘ Bad 
Hearts’, of Long in 1820. The Kiowa call 
them by the contemptuous title Semat, 

‘ Thieves’, a recent substitute for the older 
generic term Tagui, applied also to other 
Athapascan tribes. They are commonly 
known as Kiowa Apache, under the mis¬ 
taken impression, arising from the fact of 
their Athapascan affinity, that they are a 
detached band of the Apache of Arizona. 
On the contrary, they have never had any 
political connection with the Apache 
proper, and were probably unaware of 
their existence until about a century ago. 
A few Mescalero Apache from New Mex¬ 
ico are now living with them, and indi¬ 
viduals of the two tribes frequently ex¬ 
change visits, but this friendly intimacy 
is of only 60 or 80 years’ standing. The 
Kiowa Apache did not emigrate from 
the S. W. into the plains country, but 
came with the Kiowa from the n. w. 
plains region, where they lay the scene 
of their oldest traditions. It is probable 
that the Kiowa Apache, like the cognate 
Sarsi, have come down along the e. base 
of the Rocky mts. from the great Atha¬ 
pascan body of the Mackenzie r. basin 
instead of along the chain of the sierras, 
and that, finding themselves too weak to 
stand alone, they took refuge with the 
Kiowa, as the Sarsi have done with the 
Blackfeet. As they are practically a part 
of the Kiowa in everything but language, 
they need no extended separate notice. 
Their authentic history begins nearly 70 
years earlier than that of the Kiowa, they 
being first mentioned under the name 
Gattacka by La Salle in 1681 or 1682, writ¬ 
ing from a post in what is now Illinois. 
He says that the Pana (Pawnee) live more 
than 200 leagues to the w. on one of the 
tributaries of the Mississippi, and are 
“neighbors and allies of the Gattacka 
and Manrhoat, who are s. of their vil¬ 
lage and who sell to them horses which 
they probably steal from the Spaniards 
in New Mexico.” It is therefore plain 
that the Kiowa Apache (and formerly 
also the Kiowa) ranged even at this early 
period in the same general region where 
they were known more than a century 
later, namely, between the Platte and the 
frontier of New Mexico, and that they al¬ 
ready had horses taken from the Spanish 





702 


KIOWA APACHE 


[B. a. e. 


settlements. It appears also thatthey were 
then in friendship with the Pawnee, un¬ 
less, as seems more probable, by Pana 
is meant the Arikara, an offshoot of the 
Pawnee proper and old trading friends of 
the Kiowa and the Kiowa Apache. From 
the fact that they traded horses to other 
tribes, and that La Salle proposed to sup¬ 
ply himself from them or their neighbors, 
it is not impossible that they sometimes 
visited the French post on Peoria lake. 
In 1719 La Harpe speaks of them, under 
the name of Quataquois, as living in con¬ 
nection with the Tawakoni and other 
affiliated tribes in a village on the Cimar¬ 
ron near its junction with the Arkansas, 
in the present Creek Nation, Okla. In 
1805 Lewis and Clark described the 
Kiowa Apache as living between the 



PACER (“PESO”), A KIOWA APACHE CHIEF 


heads of the two forks of Cheyenne r. in 
the Black-hills region of n. e. Wyoming, 
and numbering 300 in 25 tipis. The 
Kiowa then lived on the North Platte, 
and both tribes had the same alliances 
and general customs. They were rich in 
horses, which they sold to the Arikara 
and Mandan. In 1837, in connection 
with the Kiowa and Tawakoni, the Kiowa 
Apache (under the name Kataka) made 
their first treaty with the Government. 
Their subsequent history is that of the 
Kiowa. In 1853 they are mentioned as 
a warlike band ranging the waters of 
Canadian r. in the same great plains oc¬ 
cupied by the Comanche, with whom 
they often joined in raiding expeditions. 
By the treaty of Little Arkansas in 1865 
they were detached at their own request 


from the Kiowa and attached to the Chey¬ 
enne and Arapaho on account of the un¬ 
friendly attitude of the Kiowa toward the 
whites; but the arrangement had no prac¬ 
tical force, and in the treaty of Medicine 
Lodge, in 1867, they were formally re¬ 
united with the Kiowa, although a part of 
them continued to live with the Chey¬ 
enne and Arapaho until after the read¬ 
justment at the close of the outbreak of 
1874-75. In keeping with the general 
conduct of the tribe they remained peace¬ 
able and friendly throughout these 
troubles. In 1891 their population was 
325; together with the Kiowa they suf¬ 
fered terribly in 1892 from an epidemic 
of measles and fever, losing more than 
one-fourth of their number. In 1905 
they numbered only 155. (j. m.) 

Apaches.—Fitzpatrick in Ind. Aff. Rep., 52, 1850. 
Apaches of Arkansas River.—Whitfield in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 255,1855. Apaches of the Plains.—Pope (1854) 
in Pac. R. R. Surv., ii, 17,1855. Bad-hearts.—Long, 
Exped., II, 103, 1823. Cahata.—Lewis and Clark, 
Jour., 28,1840 (misprint). Cancey.—This name in 
its various forms is the Caddo designation for 
the Apache of the plains, including the Kiowa 
Apache; it was usually applied, however, to the 
Lipan (q. v.). Cantajes.—Mota-Padilla, Hist, de 
la Conquista, 382,1742. Cataha.—Lewis, Trav., 15, 
1809. Ca'taka.—Lewis and Clark, Discov., 38,1806. 
Cattako.—Ibid., 23. Cuttako.—Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., 1,710, 1832. Esikwita.—Mooney in 17th 
Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898. Essaqueta.—Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 175,1875. Essequeta.—Mooney in 17th Rep. 
B. A. E., 245, 1898 (sometimes but improperly ap¬ 
plied). Gantsi.—Gatschet, Caddo MS., B. A. E., 
65,1884 (‘liars’: Caddo name). Gataea.—LaSalle 
(1682) in Margry, D6c., II, 168,1877.^ Gataka.—Har¬ 
ris, Coll. Voy., I, map, 685,1705. Gata'ka.—Mooney 
in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898 (Pawnee name). 
Gattacka.—La Salle (1682) in Margry, D£c., ii, 201, 
1877. Gina's.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 
1898 (Wichita name). Gu'ta'k.—La Flesche quoted 
by Mooney, ibid. (Omaha and Ponca name). 
Ha ka.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 101,1905 
(given, with a query, as a Canadian French nick¬ 
name). Kantsi.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
245, 1898 (‘liars’:^ Caddo name for all Apache of 
the plains). K'a-patop.—Ibid, (‘knife-whetters’: 
Kiowa name). Kareses.—McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, m, 81, 1854 (misprint). Kaskaias. — 
Long, Exped., ii, 101, 1823 (‘bad hearts’, possibly 
identical). Kaskaya. — Amer. Pioneer, ii, 189, 
1843. Kaskia.—Drake, Bk. of Inds., viii, 1848. 
Ka-ta-kas.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 527, 1837. Kata^ka.— 
Gatschet, inf’n (Pawnee name). Kattekas.— P6- 
nicaut (1719) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 1 ,153, 
note, 1869. Kiowa Apaches.—Clark, Ind. Sign 
Lang., 33,1885. Kisinahis.—Mooney in 17th Rep. 
B. A. E., 245, 1898 (Kichai name). Matages. — 
Bancroft, N. Mex. States, i, 640, 1886 (misprint). 
Mutsiani-taniu.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
245, 1898 (‘whetstone people’: Cheyenne name). 
Nadeicha.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, D<$c., in, 409, 
1878(possiblyidentical). Nadusha-dena.—Mooney 
in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898 (‘ our people’: own 
name). Na-i-shan-dina.— Mooney, inf’n, 1904. 
Na-ishi Apache.—Gatschet quoted by Powell in 
6th Rep. B. A.E., xxxv, 1888. Nardichia. —Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, D£c., ill, 409, 1878 (possibly 
identical). Natafe.—Garc6s (1775) quoted by 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 350,1864. Natagees.— Mota- 
Padilla, Hist, de la Conquista,516,1742. Natages.— 
Sanchez (1757) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 93,1856. 
Natajees.—Rivera, Diario y Derrotero, leg. 950, 
1736. Nataies.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 595, 
1882. Natale.—18th century doc. quoted by 
Bancroft, ibid., 594. Pacer band of Apaches. — 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 43, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 3, 
1872. Prairie Apaches.—Whitfield in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 298, 1854. Quataquois. —La Harpe .(1719) in 
Margry, D6c., vi, 289, 1886. Quataquon. —Beau- 




BULL. 30] 


KIOWAN FAMILY-K1SHKAKON 


703 


rain, ibid., note. Sadalsomte-k'fago.—Mooney in 
17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898 (‘weasel people’: 
Kiowa name). Semat.—Ibid, (‘thieves’: Kiowa 
name). Ta'gugala.—Hodge, Pueblo MS. notes, 
1895 (Jemez name for Apache tribes, including 
Kiowa Apache). Tagui.—Mooney in 17tli Rep. 
B. A. E., 245,1898 (an old Kiowa name). Tagu- 
kensh.—Hodge quoted by Mooney, ibid. (Pecos 
name for all Apache). Tashin.—Mooney, ibid. 
(Comanche name for all Apache). Tha'ka- 
hine'na.—Mooney, ibid., 245 (‘saw-fiddle men’: 
Arapaho name). Tha'kaitan. — Ibid. (Arapaho 
variant). Yabipais Natage.— Garc6s (1776), Diary, 
452, 1900. Yavipais-Nataje.—Carets (1776) quoted 
by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, pt. 1, 114, 
1890. 

Kiowan Family. A linguistic group first 
identified as a distinct stock by Albert 
Gallatin in 1853, but formally placed in 
the list of families by Powell (7th Rep. 
B. A. E., 84, 1891). The name is from 
Kiowa (q. v.), that of the only tribe in¬ 
cluded in the family. 

=Kiaways.—Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 402, 1853. =Kioway.—Turner in Pac. R. R. 
Rep., in, pt. 3,55,80,1856 (based on the Kioway, or 
Caigua, tribe only); Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. 
Sprache, 432, 433, 1859; Latham, Elem. Comp. 
Philol., 444, 1862 (“more Paduca than aught 
else”). =Kayowe.—Gatschet in Am. Antiq , 280, 
Oct. 1882. 

Kipana. A former pueblo of the Tanos, 
s. of the hamlet of Tejon, lat. 35° 2CK, San¬ 
doval co., N. Mex. It was inhabited in 
1598 when visited by Onate, and prob¬ 
ably as late as 1700. 

Guipana.—Columbus Memorial Vol., 155, 1893 
(misprint). Ki-pa-na.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, in, 125,1890. Ki-pan-na.—Bandelier, ibid., 
IV, 109, 1892. Guipana.—Onate (1598) in Doc. 
In6d., xvi, 114, 1871. 

Kipaya towns (alsocalled “Redtowns,” 
“War towns”). A group of former 
Creek towns, governed by warriors only, 
and so called in contradistinction to the 
T&lua-mikagi, or peace towns. The fol¬ 
lowing were said to belong to this division: 
Kawita, Tukabatchi, Hlaphlako, Atasi, 
Kailaidshi, Chiaha, Osotchi, Hotalihu- 
yana, Alibamu, Eufaula, Hillabi, and 
Kitchopataki. (a. s. g.) 

Ke-pau-yau.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 52, 1848. 
Kipaya towns.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 
121, 1884. Red (towns).—Ibid. 

Kipniak. A Magemiut Eskimo village 
at the mouth of the s. arm of Yukon r., 
Alaska. 

Kip-nai-ak.—Dali quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1902. Kipniaguk.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, map, 1884. Kipniak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1902. Kipnisk.—Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., I, map, 1877. Kramalit.—Rink, Eskimo 
Tribes, 33, 1887. Kripniyukamiut.—Coast Surv. 
chart cited by Baker, op. cit. 

Kirishkitsu. A Wichita subtribe.— 
J. O. Dorsey, inf n, 1881. 

Kirokokhoche ( Ki'-ro-ko'-qo-tce, ‘ red¬ 
dish black bear cub ’). A subgens of the 
Tunanpin gens of the Iowa.—Dorsey in 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 238, 1897. 

Kisakobi (Hopi: ‘ladder-townplace’). 
A former pueblo of the Hopi people of 
Walpi, at the n. w. base of the East mesa 
of Tusayan, n. e. Ariz. It was ap¬ 
parently occupied during the mission pe¬ 
riod (1629-1680), then abandoned and the 
present pueblo of Walpi built. The ruins 


of the Franciscan mission here are called 
Nushaki by the Hopi, probably from the 
Spanish misa, ‘mass,’ and the Hopi hi, 
‘house.’ See Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. 
E., 580,1901, and articles cited below. 
Kisakobi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 21,1891. 
Kisakovi . — Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vn, 395,1894. 
Niicaki.— Ibid. Nushaki.— Fewkes in 17th Rep. 
B. A. E., 678,585,1898. Old Walpi.— Ibid., 586. 

Kishacoquillas. A Shawnee village, 
named after its chief, situated at the 
junction of Kishacoquillas cr. and Juni¬ 
ata r., at the site of Lewiston, Mifflin 
co., Pa. It existed before 1731 and 
was probably abandoned not long af¬ 
ter the death of Kishacoquillas in 
1754. 

Kishakoquilla. —Alden (1834) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 3d s., vi, 152,1837 (in Crawford co.). Kishe- 
quechkela. —Lattr6,Map, 1784(in Huntingdon co.). 

Kishgagass (‘ place of ancestor Ga- 
gass’). A Kitksan division and town on 
Babine r., an e. tributary of the Skeena, 
Brit. Col.; pop. 241 in 1904. 

Kis-ge-gas.— Can. Ind. Aff., 415,1898. Kisgegos.— 
Can. Ind. Aif. 1904, pt. 2, 73, 1905. Kis-go-gas.— 
Ibid., 431, 1896. Kish-ga-gass.— Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., xix, 278, 1897. Kishgahgahs. —Brit. Col. 
map, 1872. Kishke-gas. —Can. Ind. All., 272, 1889. 
Kiskagahs.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. 
Col., 114b, 1884. Kissgarrase.— Horetzky, Canada 
on Pacific, 212, 1874. Kiss-ge-gaas.— Can. Ind. 
Aff., 252,1891. Kit-ka-gas. —Dawson in Geol. Surv. 
Can., 20b, 1879-80. Kitsagas.— Scott in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1869,563,1870. Kits-ge-goos. —Can. Ind. Aff., 
358,1895. Kits-go-gase. —Ibid., 280, 1894. 

Kishi. The Panther clan of the Caddo.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1093,1896. 

Kishkakon (Chippewa: kishki, ‘cut’ 
(past participle); ano, from anowe, ‘tail 
to have,’ especially a bushy tail; hence, 
‘those who have cut tails,’ referring to 
the naturally short tail of the bear.— 
Hewitt). The Bear gens or band of the 
Ottawa, usually found associated with 
two other bands, the Sinago or Black 
Squirrel, and the Keinouche or Pike. In 
1658 the Kishkakon were allied with 
about 500 Christian Tionontati Hurons, 
who occupied contiguous territory, and 
they were neighbors of the Potawatomi, 
who at this time occupied the islands at 
the outlet of Green bay and the mainland 
to the southward along the w. shores of 
L. Michigan. Father Allouezfound these 
three bands occupying a single village at 
La Pointe du Saint Esprit, near the pres¬ 
ent Bayfield, Wis., in 1668. For three 
years the Kishkakon refused to receive 
the gospel announced to them by Father 
Allouez; but in the autumn of 1688 they 
resolved in council to accept the teaching 
of the Christian doctrine. The Kishka¬ 
kon, having been invited to winter near 
the chapel at La Pointe du Saint Esprit, 
left the other bands to draw near the mis¬ 
sion house. Marquette found them di¬ 
vided into five “bourgades.” In 1677 
they were with the Hurons at Macki¬ 
naw, Mich., where in 1736 they had 180 
warriors and about 200 in the vicinity of 
Detroit. They appear to have been more 


704 


KISHKALLEN-KITAHON 


[B. A. E. 


closely affiliated with the Sinago and the 
Keinouche than with the other Ottawa 
bands. For their history and customs, 
see Ottawa. (j. n. b. h.) 

Culs-coupes. —Doc. of 1698 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ix,683,1855. Kescacons. —York (1700), ibid., iv, 
749, 1854. Kihaoneiak.— Jes. Rel. 1672-3, LVII, 
210, 1899. Kichaoueiak. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 

358,1855. Kichkagoneiak. —Jes. Rel. 1648,62, 1858. 
Kichkankoueiak. —Ibid., 1658,22,1858. Kiokakons. — 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist.de l’Am6r.,n, 
64, 1753 (misprint). Kiscacones. —De Bougain¬ 
ville (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 608, 
1858. Kiscacons.— Vaudreuil conf. (1703), ibid., 
IX, 754, 1865. Kiscakons. — Du Chesneau (1681), 
ibid., 161. Kiscakous. —McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 82, 1858. Kishkako. —Kelton, 
Ft Mackinac, 15, 1884. Kiskacoueiak. —Jes. Rel. 
1658, 21, 1858. Kiskakonk.— Ibid., 1670, 87, 1858. 
Kiskakons. —Du Chesneau (1681), op. cit., IX, 164, 
1855. Kiskakoumac. —Jes. Rel. 1667, 17, 1858. 
Kiskakoiins. —Cadillac (1702) in Margry, D6c.,V, 
275, 1883. Kiskokans. —Chauvignerie (1736) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 554, 1853. Queoues 
coupees. —Jes. Rel. 1669,19,1858. Queues coupees. — 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 161, note, 1855 (French 
name). 

Kishkallen. A former Chehalis village 
on the n. shore of Grays harbor, Wash.— 
Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., No. 248. 

Kishkat. A Wichita subtribe.—J. O. 
Dorsey, inf’n, 1881. 

Kishkawbawee ( Kishkabawa, probably 
‘broken by water.’ — W. Jones). A 
former Chippewa village on Flint r., in 
lower Michigan (Saginaw treaty, 1820, in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 141, 1873). The reser¬ 
vation was sold in 1837. 

Kishpachlaots ( Gyispexl&'ots , ‘people of 
the place of the fruit of the cornus’). A 
Tsimshian division and town formerly 
at Metlakatla, Brit. Col. The people 
have now removed to Port Simpson. 
Gpaughettes.—Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes 
visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Gyispaqla'ots.—Boas 
in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 35, 1889. 
Gyispevla'ots.—Boas in Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232, 
1888. Kisch-pach-la-ots.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 
317, 1885. Kishpochalots.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. 
Kishpokalants.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 
1897. Kis-pa-cha-laidy.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 
app., 1859. Kispachlohts.—Gibbs in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., 1 ,143,1877. Kitspukaloats.—Tolmie and 
Dawson,Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kyspyox.— 
Horetzky, Canada on the Pacific, 212,1874. 

Kishpiyeoux (‘ place of ancestor Pi- 
yeoux’). A Kitksan division and town 
at the junction of Kislipiyeux and Skeena 
rs., Brit. Col. According to Boas there 
were two clans there, Raven and Bear. 
Pop. 216 in 1904. 

Gyispayo'kc.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 50, 1895. Kish-pi-yeoux.—Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., Xix, 278, 1897. Kispaioohs.—Tolmie and 
Dawson. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kispiax.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 73,1905. Kish-pi-youx.— 
Jackson, Alaska, 300, 1880. Kispyaths.—Downie 
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi, 253, 1861. Kis- 
pyox.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 
map, 1884. Kitspayucs.—Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1869, 563, 1870. Kits-piouse.—Can. Ind. Aff., 358, 
1895. Kits-pioux.—Ibid., 359, 1897. Kits-piox.— 
Ibid., 415, 1898. Kits-pyonks.—Ibid., 304, 1893. 

Kishqra. The extinct Reindeer (?) clan 
of Cochiti pueblo, N. Mex. 

Kishqra-hanuch.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix,351, 
1896 ( hdnuch = ‘ people’). 

Kiskatomas. See Kiskitomas. 

Kiski. A small division of the Maidu 
formerly residing on lower Sacramento 


r., Cal., probably within the limits of 
Sacramento co. 

Kishey.—Bancroft,Nat. Races, 1,451,1874. Kiski.— 
Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 79,1852-53. 
Kis Kies.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 
Kisky.—Hale, Ethnol. and Philol., vi, 631,1846. 

Kiskiminetas (‘plenty of walnuts.’— 
Hewitt). A former Delaware village on 
thes. side of lower Kiskiminetas cr., near 
its mouth, in Westmoreland co., Pa. Cf. 
Kiskominitoes. 

Gieschgumamto.—Heckewelder in Trans. Am. 
Philos. Soc., n. s., iv, 371,1834 (given as meaning 
‘make day light’, ‘cause it to become daylight’). 
Kishkemanetas.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 20,1776. 
Kishkiminitas.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Pa. 
map, 1899. Kiskaminetas.—Heckewelder, op. cit. 
Kiskemanitas.—Ibid. Kiskemeneco.—Post (1758) 
in Rupp, West Pa., app., 104, 1846. 

Kiskitoftias. A name for the walnut or 
hickory nut, formerly common in New 
Jersey and Long Island. The word has 
been variously spelled kisky tliomas , kis¬ 
katomas, kiskylom, cuscatomin, etc. The Ca¬ 
nadian French name is noyer tendre (‘soft- 
nut’ ), referring to the shell of the nut; and 
J. H. Trumbull suggests connecting the 
word with the Abnaki kouskadamen , 
‘crack with the teeth ’ (given by Rasle), 
cognate with the Chippewa kishkibidon , 

‘ tear with the # teeth,’ the Cree kiskisikatew, 
‘it is cut or gnawed.’ The terms kisky 
thomas and kisky thomnut are folk-ety¬ 
mological corruptions of this Algonquian 
word. (a. f. c. ) 

Kiskominitoes (‘plenty of walnuts.’— 
Hewitt). A former Delaware village on 
the n. bank of Ohio r., in Ohio, between 
Hocking and Scioto rs. The word seems 
to be identical with Kiskemeneco and 
Kiskiminetas (q. v.) in Pennsylvania. 
On Lattre’s map “Kiskowanitas” is lo¬ 
cated on thes. e. side of Maumee r., Ohio. 

Kiskominitoes.—Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. 
Kiskomnitos.—La Tour, map, 1782. . Kiskowani¬ 
tas.— Lattr6, map, 1784. 

Kisky thomas, Kisky thomnut, Kiskytom. 

See Kiskitomas. 

Kispokotha. One of the 5 divisions ex¬ 
isting among the Shawnee, without ref¬ 
erence to their gentes. See Big Jim. 

Big Jim’s Band.—Common official name. Ke-spi- 
co-tha.—W. II. Shawnee in Gulf States Hist. 
Mag., i, 417, 1903. Kickapoo.—McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 111, 1854 (not the Kickapoo). 
Kiscapocoke.—Johnston (1819) in Brinton, Lenape 
Leg., 30, 1885. Kiscopokes.—Drake, Tecumseh, 69, 
1856. Kiskapocoke—Morse, Rep. toSec. War, app., 
97, 1822. Kispogogi.—Gatschet, Shawnee MS., 
B. A. E., 1879. Ki-spo-ko-tha.—W. H. Shawnee, 
op. cit., 415. 

Kisthemuwelgit. An old Niska town 
on the n. side of Nass r., Brit. Col., near 
its mouth, and numbering about 50 in¬ 
habitants. There is some question about 
the correctness of the name. See Kitan- 
gata. 

Kis-themu-welgit.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 279, 
1897. 

Kitahon. A former Niska village on 
Nass r., Brit. Col., a few miles from tide¬ 
water. 

Kit-a-hon.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 
Kitawn.—Horetzky, Canada on the Pacific, 132, 
1874. 


BULL. 30] 


KITAIX-KITCHIG AMI 


705 


Kitaix. A Niska village near the mouth 
of Nass r., Brit. Col.;pop. 28 in 1903, the 
last time it was separately enumerated. 
In 1904 the combined strength of the 
Kitaix and Andeguale people was 80. 
Git'.e'ks. Swanton, field notes, 1900-01. Kit-aix.— 
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 279,1897. Kitax.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 416,1898. Kitlax.—Ibid., 280,1894. Kit- 
tak.—Ibid., 251, 1891. Kit-tek.—Ibid., 360, 1897. 
Kitten.—Ibid., 1903, pt. 2,72,1904. Kit-tex.—Ibid., 
432, 1896. 

Kitak. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kitamat. A northern Kwakiutl tribe 
living on Douglas channel, Brit. Col., and 
speaking the Heiltsuk dialect. They 
are divided into the Beaver, Eagle, Wolf, 
Salmon, Raven, and Killer-whale clans. 
Pop. 279 in 1904. 

Gyit’ama't.—Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 9, 
1889 (Chimmesyan name). Hai-shi-la.—Dawson 
in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 65,1887. Hai- 
shilla.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 
117b, 1884. Hyshalla.—Scouler (1846) in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 233,1848. Ket aMats.—Colyer 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 534, 1870. Kitamah.—Can. 
Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 70, 1905. Kitamaht.—Brit. 
Col. map, 1872. Kitamat.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
op. cit. Kitamatt.—Can. Ind. Aff., 244, 1890. 
Kitimat.—Ibid., pt. 2, 162, 1901. Kit ta maat.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. Kitta- 
marks.—Downie in Mayne, Brit. Col., app., 452, 
1862. Kit-ta-muat.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 
app., 1859 (erroneously included under the Chim¬ 
mesyan Sabassa). Kittimat.—Fleming, Can. Pac. 
R. R. Rep. Prog., 138,1877. Kittumarks.—Horetzky, 
Can. on Pacific, 212,1874. Qaisla'.—Boas, 6th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 52, 1890. Xa-isla'.—Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 328,1897 (own name). 

Kitami ( Kita'mi , ‘porcupine’). Asub- 
phratry or gens of the Menominee.— 
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 
1896. 

Kitangata. A Niska town on Nass r. 
or inlet, Brit. Col.; pop. 30 in 1903, the 
last time the name appears. Probably 
identical with either Lakungida or Kis- 
themuwelgit. 

Kitangata.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. II, 68,1902. Kitan- 
gataa—Ibid., 416,1898. 

Kitanmaiksh. An old town and division 
of the Kitksan just above the junction of 
Skeena and Bulkley rs., Brit. Col. The 
new town is now called Hazelton and has 
become a place of some importance, as it 
stands at the head of navigation on the 
Skeena. Pop. 241 in 1904. 

Get-an-max.—Can. Ind. Aff., 415, 1898. Git-an- 
max.—Ibid.,252, 1891. Git-au-max — Ibid. ,304,1893. 
Gyit’anma'kys.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 50, 1895. Kit-an-maiksh.—Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., xix, 278, 1897. Kitinahs.—Tolmie and 
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. 

Kitchawank (perhaps akin to Chippewa 
KichucMvtink, 1 at the great mountain.’— 
W. Jones). Apparently a band or small 
tribe, or, as Ruttenber designates it, a 
“chieftaincy” of the Wappinger con¬ 
federacy, formerly residing on the e. 
bank of the Hudson in what is now 
Westchester co., N. Y. Their territory 
is believed to have extended from Croton 
r. to Anthony’s Nose.. Their principal 
village, Kitchawank, in 1650, appears 
to have been about the mouth of the Cro- 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-45 


ton, though one authority (N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xm, 14, 1881) locates it at Sleepy 
Hollow. They also had a village at 
Peekskill which they called Sackhoes. 
Their fort, or “castle,” which stood at the 
mouth of Croton r., has been represented 
as one of the most formidable and ancient 
of the Indian fortresses s. of the High¬ 
lands. Its exact situation, according to 
Ruttenber, was at the neck of Teller’s, 
called Senasqua. The Kitchawank were 
a party to the treaty of peace made with 
the Dutch, Aug. 30, 1645. (j. m. c. t. ) 
Kechtawangh.—Stuyvesant (1663) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., XIII, 300, 1881. Kichtawan.—Doc. of 
1664, ibid., 364. Kichtawanc.—Treaty of 1643, 
ibid., 14. Kichtawanghs.—Treaty of 1645, ibid., 
18. Kichtawons.—Treaty of 1643 in Winfield, 
Hudson Co., 45, 1874. Kichtewangh.—Doc. of 1664 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 371, 1881. Kichto- 
wanghs.—Stuyvesant (1663), ibid., 300. Kick- 
tawanc.—Treaty of 1643 in Ruttenber, Tribes Hud¬ 
son R., 78, 1872. Kictawanc.—Records (1643) in 
Winfield, Hudson Co., 42,1874. Kightewangh.— 
Treaty of 1664 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,xm, 375, 
1881. Kightowan.—Records of 1690 in Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 178,1872. Kitchawanc.—Treaty 
of 1643, ibid., 110. Kitchawonck.—Ruttenber, 
ibid., 79. Kitchtawanghs.—Treaty of 1645, ibid., 
118. 

Kitchigami (‘great water/ from Jeitchi 
‘great/ garni ‘water/ the Chippewa name 
for L. Superior). A tribe living in 1669- 
70, about central ors. w. Wisconsin, with 
the Kickapoo and Mascoutens, with which 
tribes they were ethnically and linguis¬ 
tically related. Little has been recorded 
in relation to the Kitchigami, and after a 
few brief notices of them, chiefly by 
Fathers Allouez and Marquette, they 
drop from history, having probably been 
absorbed by the Mascoutens or the Kicka¬ 
poo. The first mention of them is in a 
letter written by Marquette, probably in 
the spring of 1670 (Jes. Rel. 1670,90,1858), 
in which he says: “ The Illinois are thirty 
days’ journey by land from La Pointe, 
the way being very difficult. They are 
southwestward from La Point du Saint 
Esprit. One passes by the nation of the 
Kitchigamis, who compose more than 20 
large lodges, and live in the interior. 
After that the traveler passes through the 
country of the Miamiouek [Miami], and 
traversing great deserts (prairies) he ar¬ 
rives at the country of the Illinois.” It 
appears from his statement that they were 
at this time at war with the Illinois. In 
the same Relation (p. 100) it is stated that 
along Wisconsin r. are numerous other 
nations; that 4 leagues from there “are 
the Kickapoos and the Kitchigamis, who 
speak the same language as the Mas¬ 
coutens.” Tailhan, who is inclined to 
associate them with the Illinois, says the 
above statement is confirmed by the 
inedited relation of P. Beschefer. As 
neither Marquette nor Allouez speaks of 
them when they reach the section in¬ 
dicated, but mention the Kickapoo, Mas- 
couten, and Illinois, and as it appears that 
they had been at war with the Illinois, it 


706 


KITOHIGUMIWININTWUG-KITKADUSSHADE 


B. A. E. 


is probable that the Kitchigami formed 
a part of the Kickapooorthe Mascoutens 
tribe. They are not noted on Marquette’s 
true map, but are located on Thevenot’s 
so-called Marquette map, under the name 
Kithigami, as immediately w. of the Mis¬ 
sissippi, opposite the mouth of Wiscon¬ 
sin r. The fact that they drop so suddenly 
and entirely from history would indicate 
that they became known under some 
other name. (c. t.) 

Ketchegamins.—Perrot (1718-20), M6moire, 221, 
1864. Ketchigamins.—Jes. Rel., index, 1858. Kete- 
higamins.—Ibid., 1670, 90, 1858. Kischigamins.— 
Jes. Rel. 1683, Thwaite’s ed., lxii, 193, 1900. 
Kitchigamich.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 100, 1858. Kitchi- 
gamick.—Shea in Wis. Hist. Coll., nr, 131, 1857. 
Kithigami.—Thevenot quoted by Shea, Discov. 
Miss., 268,1852. 

Kitchigumiwininiwug (‘ men of the great 
lake’). A collective term for those 
Chippewa formerly living on and near 
the shores of Lake Superior, in Michigan, 
Wisconsin, and Minnesota. By the treaty 
of Lapointe in 1854 the bands officially 
recognized as ‘ ‘ Chippewas of Lake Supe¬ 
rior” were declared to be those living at 
Fond du Lac (Minnesota), La Pointe, Lac 
du Flambeau, Lac Court Oreilles (Wis¬ 
consin), Desert lake, L’Anse, Ontonagon, 
Grand Portage, and Bois Forte (Michi¬ 
gan) . Their history, except as regards 
treaty relations with the United States, is 
the same as that of the southern Chippewa 
(see Chippewa) . By the treaty of Fond 
du Lac, Minn., Aug. 2, 1847, they joined 
the Chippewa of the Mississippi in re¬ 
linquishing their claim to a tract of land 
about the mouth of Crow Wing r., Minn. 
By treaty of Lapointe, Wis., Sept. 3, 
1854, they ceded all their lands in upper 
Michigan and n. Wisconsin, the United 
States agreeing to reserve for the use of 
each of said bands a specified tract within 
the ceded area. By act of June 5, 1872, 
the Secretary of the Interior was au¬ 
thorized to remove, with their consent, 
the bands from Lac du Flambeau, Lac 
Court d’Oreilles, and Fond du Lac res. to 
Bad River res., but this removal was not 
carried into effect, the Indians refusing 
permission. By Executive Order of 
Mar. 1, 1873, the reservation in Wiscon¬ 
sin selected for the Lac Court Oreilles 
band was approved. By order of Dec. 

20, 1881, a reservation at Vermillion 
Lake, Minn., was set aside for the Bois 
Forte band. The Executive order of 
June 30, 1883, set apart the Deer Creek 
res., Minn., for the same band. By 
agreements of Oct. 24, Nov. 12, and Nov. 

21, 1889, the Grand Portage, Bois Forte, 
and Fond du Lac bands ceded such of 
their lands at Red Lake, Fond du Lac, 
Bois Forte, and Deer Creek, as were not 
needed for allotment. In 1867 they were 
officially reported to number about 5,560; 
in 1880, 2,813; in 1905, 4,703. 

( j. m. c. t. ) 


Chippewas of Lake Superior.—Lapointe treaty 
(1854) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 223, 1873. Keche- 
gumme-winine-wug.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 84, 
1850. Kech^kame Wenenewak.—Long, Exped. St. 
Peter’s R., II, 153, 1824. Kitchigamiwininiwak.— 
Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A. E., 1882. Kitcigami- 
wininiwag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Kitchisibiwininiwug (‘men of the great 
river,’ from kitchi ‘great’, sibiw ‘river’, 
ininiwug ‘men’). A collective term for 
the Chippewa living on the upper Missis¬ 
sippi, in n. e. Minnesota, s. e. of Leech 
lake. Their principal bands were Misi- 
sagakaniwininiwak at Sandy lake, Kah- 
metahwungaguma at Mille lac, the Rabbit 
Lake band at Rabbit lake, and the Gull 
Lake band at Gull lake. ( j. m. ) 

Ke-che-se-be-win-in-e-wug. — Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. "Soc. Coll., v, 39, 1885. Ke-che-se-be- 
win-o-wing.—Ramsey in Ind. All. Rep., 86, 1850. 
Kitchisibi-wininiwak.—Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A. 
E., 1882. Kitcisibiwininiwag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 
1906. Mississippi bands.—Lapointe treaty (pro¬ 
claimed 1843) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 218, 1873. 

Kitchopataki (kztchu ‘a block of wood to 
pound grain’, patdki ‘spreading out’). A 
former Upper Creek town, n. e. of Hillabi 
town, on a small affluent of upper Talla¬ 
poosa r., Randolph co., Ala. It had 48 
families in 1832. 

Hit h o par tar ga.—Census of 1832 in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, IV, 578, 1854. Kitcho-pataki.—Gat¬ 
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1 ,135, 1884. 

Kitchopataki. A town of the Creek 
Nation on the point at the junction of 
Deep and North forks of Canadian r., 
Okla.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 
185, 1888; 

Kitchu pataki. —Gatschet, ibid. 

Kitegareut (‘ dwellers on reindeer 
mountains’). A tribe of Eskimo e. of 
Mackenzie r. on Anderson r. and at C. 
Bathurst, Can. They are the most east¬ 
erly tribe wearing labrets. Their country 
is known as a source of stone utensils. 

Anderson’s River Esquimaux. — Hind, Labrador, II, 
259,1863. Kitiga'ru.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. 
E., 45, 1892. Kitte-ga-re-ut.—Richardson, Arct. 
Exped.,1,362,1851. Kitte-garroe-oot.—Richardson 
in Franklin, Second Exped., 174, 1828. Kit-te- 
ga'-ru.—Simpson quoted by Murdoch in 9th Rep. 
B. A. E., 48,1892. Kpagmalit.—Petitot quoted by 
Murdoch, ibid. Kpagmaliveit.—Ibid. Kpagmal¬ 
iveit.—Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnog. Am., xi, 
11, 1876 ( =‘the real Kragmalit’). Kpamalit.)— 
Rink, Eskimo Tribes, 33, 1887. Kpavanaptat.— 
Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnog. Am., xi, 11,1876 
(=‘ easterners’). Kpoteyopeut. —Ibid. 

Kithateen. A Chimmesyan division on 
Nass r., Brit. Col.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., 
app., 1850. 

Kithathratts. Given by Downie (Jour. 
Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi, 253, 1861) as a 
Chimmesyan village on the headwaters of 
Skeena r., Brit. Col., in the territory of 
the Kitksan; not identifiable with any 
present Kitksan town. 

Kitingujang. A summer settlement of 
the Kingnaitmiut Eskimo at the head 
of Kingnait fjord, Cumberland sd.—Boas 
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kitkadusshade. According to Krause 
(Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 1885), the name of 
a branch of the Haida. Unidentified. 


BULL. 30] 


KITKAHTA-KITLOPE 


707 


Kitkahta (‘people of the poles’; so 
called from their salmon weirs). A 
Tsimshian division and town on Doug¬ 
las channel, n. w. coast of British Colum¬ 
bia. Although formerly a large town, its 
inhabitants are said by Boas to have been 
subject to the chief of the Kitwilgioks, to 
whom they paid tribute. Pop. 79 in 1904. 

Gyitga'ata. —Boasin 5th Rep. N.W.Tribes Canada, 
9,1889. Hartley Bay. —Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 
70,1905. Kil-cah-ta. —Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 
1859. Kitha-ata. —Can. Ind. Aff., 271,1889. Kitka- 
ata. —Ibid., 432,1896. Kitkada. —Tolmie and Daw¬ 
son, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kitkaet. — 
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. Kitkaht.— Brit. 
Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Kit kahta. —Dorsey in 
Am. Antiq., xix, 280, 1897. Kit-kats. —Scott in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 316,1868. 

Kitkatla (‘ people of the sea ’). A lead¬ 
ing Tsimshian division and town on Por- 
cher id., n. w. coast of British Columbia; 
pop. 225 in 1902, 208 in 1904. 

Gyitqa/tla. —Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 
9, 1889. Keek heat la. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
v, 487,1855. Keet-heat-la.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., 
app., 1859. Keethratlah.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 279, 
1861. Kitatels.— Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 312, 1868. 
Kitcathla. —Mohun in Can. Ind. Aff., 153,1881. Kit- 
chatlah. —Scouler(1846)inJour.Ethnol.Soc.Lond., 
1,233,1848. Kithatla. —Tolmie and Dawson, Vo¬ 
cabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kithkatla. —Can. Ind. 
Aff., 251, 1891. Kitkathla. —Brit. Col. map, Victo¬ 
ria, 1872. Kitkatla. —Can.Ind.Aff.,432,1896. Kit- 
khall-ah. —Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes 
visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kit-khatla. —Dor¬ 
sey in Am. Antiq., xix, 280, 1897. Kitoonitza.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 115b, 1884 
(Kwakiutl name). Kittralchla. —Krause, Tlinkit 
Ind., 318,1885. Sibapa.— Howard, Notes on North¬ 
ern Tribes visited in 1854, MS.,B.A. E. (probably 
the name of the chief, Djebasa). 

Kitkehahki (‘on a hill.’—Grinnell). 
One of the tribes of the Pawnee confed¬ 
eracy (q.v.), sometimes called Republican 
Pawnee, as their villages were at one time 
on Republican r. Their villages were 
always w. of those of the Chaui, or up 
stream, and were spoken of as the up¬ 
per villages. The tribe lived with its 
kindred on Loup r., Nebr., where their 
reservation was established in 1857. In 
1875 they were removed to Oklahoma, 
where they now dwell. In 1892 they 
took their lands in severalty and became 
citizens of the United States. In tribal 
organization, customs, and beliefs the 
Kitkehahki did not differ from their 
congeners. Grinnell (Pawnee Hero Sto¬ 
ries, 241, 1889) mentions three divisions, 
the Great Kitkehahki, Little Kitke¬ 
hahki, and Blackhead Kitkehahki. 

(a. c. f.) 

Kattahawkees.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 213, 1861. Ket-ka- 
kesh.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., II, lxxxv, 1823. 
Kit'-ka.— Morgan, Syst. Consan. and Affin., 286, 
1871. Kitkaha’ki.— Gatschet, MS.,B. A.E. Kitka- 
hoets.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 518, 1878. 
Kit'-ke-hak-i.— Dunbar in Mag. Am. Hist., iv, 246, 
1880. Mitahawiye.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882 (Kansaname). Panea Republicans. — 
Lewis, Travels, 13, 1809. Pania Republican. —Sib¬ 
ley, Hist. Sketches, 62,1806. Panias republicans.— 
Gass, Voy., 417, 1810. Panias Republican.— Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 17, 1806. Panis Republican. — 
Lewis and Clark, Travels, 14,1807. Paunee Repub¬ 
lics.— II. R. Ex. Doc. 117, 19th Cong., 1st sess., 7, 
1826. Pawnee republic. —Pike, Travels, 190, 1811. 
Pawnee Republican.—Irving, Indian Sketches, ii, 


13, 1835. Pawnees republic.—Pike, Exped., 143, 
1810. Republic.—Lewis and Clark, Discov.,18,1806. 
Republican Pawnees.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., 
I, 33, 1814. Republicans.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 95, 1840. 
Republick.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 87, 
1905 (name given by traders). Republiques.—Du 
Lac, Voy. dans les Louisianes, 225, 1805. Ze-ka- 
ka.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., u, lxxxv, 1823. 
Zika hakisi 11 .—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1882 (Kansa name). Zizika aki^isi 11 '.—La Flesche 
quoted by Dorsey in Cont. N. A.JEthnol., vi, 397, 
1892 (Omaha name). Zizika-akisi.—Sanssouci 
quoted, ibid. (Omaha name). 

Kitksan (‘people of Skeena [Ksian] 
river’). One of the three dialectic divi¬ 
sions of the Chimmesvan stock, affiliated 
more closely with the Niska than with the 
Tsimshian proper. The people speaking 
the dialect live along the upper waters of 
Skeena r., Brit. Col. Dorsey enumerates 
the following towns: Kauldaw, Kishga- 
gass, Kishpiyeoux, Kitanmaiksh, Kitwin- 
gach, Kitwinskole, and Kitzegukla. To 
these must be added the modern mis¬ 
sion town of Meamskinisht. A division 
is known as the Glen-Vowell Band. Pop. 

l, 120 in 1904. 

Gyikshan.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
50,1895. Gyitksa'n.—Boas in 5th Rep. N.W. Tribes 
Can., 8,1889. Gyitkshan.—Boas in 10th Rep. ibid., 
50,1895. Kiksan.—J.O. Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 
277, 1897. Kit-ih-shian.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kitksa'n.—Dorsey 
in Am. Antiq., xix, 277, 1897. Kit-ksum.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 359,1897. Kit-ksun.—Can. Ind. Aff., 358, 
1895. 

Kitlakaous (‘ people on the sandy point’). 
A former Niska village on Nass r., Brit. 
Col., near its mouth. It was entirely 
abandoned in 1885. — Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., xix, 279, 1897. 

Kitlakdamix. A division and town of 
the Niska on Nass r., Brit. Col., about 25 

m. from tidewater; pop. 169 in 1898, 126 
in 1904. 

Gyit’laqda'mikc.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 49,1895. Kilawalaks.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. Brit. Col., map, 1884. Kin-a-roa-lax.— 
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Kin-a-wa-lax.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. Kinne- 
woolun.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kitlacdamax.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 69,1905. Kitlach-damak.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 1889. Kitlach-damax.—Ibid., 
416, 1898. Kit-lak-damix.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., 
xix, 280, 1897. Kitlatamox.—Horetzky, Canada 
on Pacific, 128,1874. 

Kitlani ( Gyitla/n , ‘people who paddle 
stern first’). A former Tsimshian division 
and town near Metlakatla, n. w. coast of 
British Columbia; now at Port Simpson. 
Gyitla'n.—Boasin Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232, 1888. 
Ketlane.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Kit- 
lan.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 
1884. Kitlani.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 
1897. Kitlan Kilwilpeyot.—Brit. Col. map of Ind. 
Tribes, Victoria, 1872. Kittlean.—Krause, Tlinkit 
Ind., 318, 1885. 

Kitlope (Tsimshian: ‘people of the 
rocks’). A Kwakiutl tribe living on 
Gardiner channel, Brit. Col.; pop. 84 in 
1901, 71 in 1904. 

Gi'manoitx. — Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 328, 
1897. Gyimanoitq.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 9, 1889. Gyitlo'p.— Ibid. Keimanoeitoh.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 117b, 
1884. Kitloop.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kitlop.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, op. cit. Kit-lope.—Kane, 
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859 (wrongly classed as 
Sabassa). Kittlope.—Can. Ind. Aff., 315, 1892. 


708 


KITRAUAIIKS 


KITUNAHAN 


[B. A. E. 


Xana'ks’iala.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mns. 1895, 328, 
1897 (own name). 

Kitrauaiiks ( Kltrau-ai-iks ). Given by 
Krause (Tlinkit Ind., 318,1885) as a divi¬ 
sion of the Tsimshian on Skeena r., Brit. 
Col., and southward; they are not now 
identifiable. 

Kitsalthlal ( Gyidzaxtla'tl, ‘ people of the 
salmon-berries’). A Tsimshian division 
and town on the coast of British Co¬ 
lumbia, between Nass and Skeena rs., 
probably near Metlakatla. 

Gyidzavtla'tl.—Boas in Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232, 
1888. Kitch-a-clalth.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 
1859. Kitche kla la.—Howard, Notes on Northern 
Tribes visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kits-ach-la- 
al’ch. — Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 317, 1885. Kitsaga- 
tala.—Downie in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi, 253, 
1861. Kitsalthlal.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 114 b, 1884. 

Kitsanaka. Given by Dawson (Queen 
Charlotte Ids., 134, 1880) as the name of 
one of four Haida clans, the word being 
supposed to signify “crow.” As there 
are only two Haida clans, the Raven 
( Hoya) and the Eagle (Got), and the 
word for crow is kldldjida, it is evident 
that Dawson misunderstood his inform¬ 
ant. (j. r. s.) 

Kittamaquindi (properly Kittamaqueink, 

‘ place of the old great beaver. ’—Hewitt). 
The principal village of the Conoy (Pis- 
cataway) in Maryland in 1639. In that 
year the Jesuits established there a mis¬ 
sion, which was removed in 1642 to Po- 
topaco on account of the inroads of the 
Conestoga and their allies. According 
to Brinton the village was at the junction 
of Tinkers cr. with the Piscataway, a 
few miles above the Potomac, in Prince 
George co. (j. m. ) 

Kittamaque-ink.—Brinton, Lenape Leg., 27, 1885 
(proper form). Kittamaquindi.—Writer of 1639in 
White, Relatio Itineris, 63, 1874. Kittamaqundi.— 
White, ibid., 127, note. 

Kittanning (‘on the great stream’, from 
kit , ‘large, superior’; hanne, ‘stream’; 
ing, the locative). An important village 
of mixed Iroquois, Delaware, and Caugh- 
nawaga, formerly about the site of the 
present Kittanning, on Allegheny r., in 
Armstrong co., Pa. It was destroyed by 
the Pennsylvanians in 1756 after a des¬ 
perate fight. It seems to have consisted 
of two or three settlements. The most 
important, called Upper Kittanning, was 
on the e. side of the river. Middle Kit¬ 
tanning was on the w. bank. (j. m.) 
Adigie.—Guy Park conf. (1775) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vm, 557,1857. Adigo.— Johnson Hall conf. 
(1765), ibid., vii, 728, 1865 (perhaps the Iroquois 
name). Atiga.—Beilin, map, 1775. Attigne.— 
C61oron (1749) in Margry, D6c., vi, 685, 1886. 
Attigua.—Beilin, map, 1755 (marked as if distinct 
from Atiga). Attique.— CSloron, op. cit. Cantan- 
yans.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816 (used 
for the inhabitants). Cattanyan.—Smith (1799) 
in Drake,Trag. Wild., 263,1841. Kattaning.—Har¬ 
ris, Tour, map, 1805. Kitanning.—Pa. Gazette 
(1756) quoted in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., iv, 
298, 1834. Kithannink.—Heckewelder in Trans. 
Am. Philos. Soc., n. s., IV, 368, 1834. Kittaning.— 
Johnson Hall conf.,op. cit. Kittanning.—Croghan 
(?), ca. 1756, in Rupp, West. Pa., 116,1846. Kittao- 
pes.—I,attr6, map, 1784. 


Kitteaumut. A village of Christian In¬ 
dians in the s. part of Plymouth co., 
Mass., near Monument Ponds, in 1674, 
perhaps under the dominion of the Wam- 
panoag. See Cotton (1674) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., i, 199,1806. 

Kittizoo. The southernmost division 
and town of the Tsimshian, on the s. side 
of Swindle id., n. w. of Millbanksd., Brit. 
Col. The town is now almost deserted. 
Gyidesdzo'.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
9,1889. Ketyagoos.—Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 
534,1870. Kitestues.—Brit. Col.map, Victoria, 1872. 
Kitistzoo.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 
114b, 1884. Kit-tist-zu.—Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Eth¬ 
nol., i, 143,1877. Kit-tizoo.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., 
xix, 280,1897. Kityagoos.—Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
316, 1868. Whisklaleitoh.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. Brit.'Col., 114b, 1884 (‘people across the 
sea’: Heiltsuk name). 

Kittsawat. A Ntlakyapamuk village 
near Lytton, Brit. Col., with 4 inhabitants 
in 1897 (Can. Ind. Aff. Rep.), the last time 
the name appears. 

Kituhwa ( Kituhwd). A former impor¬ 
tant Cherokee settlement on Tuckasegee 
r., and extending from above the junc¬ 
tion of the Oconaluftee nearly to the 
present Bryson City, Swain co., N. C. 
The name, which appears also as Ket- 
tooah, Kittoa, Kittowa, etc., has lost its 
meaning. The people of this and the 
subordinate settlements on the waters of 
the Tuckasegee were known as Anf-KIt- 
uhwagi, and the name was frequently ex¬ 
tended to include the whole tribe. For 
this reason it was adopted in later times 
as the name of the Cherokee secret or¬ 
ganization, commonly known to the 
whites as the Ketoowah society, pledged 
to the defence of Cherokee autonomy.— 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 525, 1900. 
Kautika.—Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887. Kettooah.— Mooney, op. 
cit. Kittoa.—Ibid. Kittowa.—Doc.of 1755quoted 
by Royce, op. cit., 143. 

Kituitsach-hade. A name given by 
Krause (Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 1885) to a 
supposed branch of the Haida on Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Unidentified. 

Kitunahan Family. A linguistic family 
established by Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 
85, 1891) to include the single Kutenai 
tribe (q. v.). The name is adopted from 
Hale’s term, Kitunaha, applied to the 
tribe. This family has since been found 
to consist of two tribes with slightly differ¬ 
ing dialects, viz., the Upper Kutenai and 
the Lower Kutenai, the former being prop¬ 
erly the Kitona'qa, the latter the AqkoqtP- 
atlqo. Certain other minor differences 
exist between these two sections. The 
following family synonyms are chrono¬ 
logic. (a. f. c.) 

=Kitunaha.—Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 204, 
535, 1846 (between the forks of the Columbia); 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1, c. 10, 
77,1848 (Flatbow); Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas, 
map 17, 1852; Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. 
Lond., 70, 1856; Latham, Opuscula, 338, 1860; 
Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 395,1862 (between 
lat. 62° and 48°, w. of main ridge of Rocky mts.); 


BULL. 30] 


KITUNTO-KITZILAS 


. 709 


Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 170,1877 (on Kootenay 
r. ). =Coutanies.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 204, 
1846 (=Kitunaha). =Kutanis. —Latham, Nat. Hist. 
Man, 316,1850 (Kitunaha). =Kituanaha.— Gallatin 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853 (Coutaria 
or Flatbows, N. of lat. 49°). =Kootanies. —Busch- 
mann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859. 
=Kutani. —Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol.,395,1862 
(or Kitunaha). =Cootanie.— Latham, ibid, (synon¬ 
ymous with Kitunaha). =Kootenai.— Gatschet in 
Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877 (defines area occupied); 
Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 446, 1877; Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, iii,565, 1882. =Kootenuha.— Tol- 
mie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 79-87, 
1884 (vocabulary of Upper Kootenuha). =Flat- 
bow.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 204, 1846 
(=Kitunaha); Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., 
ii, pt. 1,10,77,1848 (after Hale); Buschmann, Spuren 
der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859; Latham, Elem. 
Comp. Philol., 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha); Gatschet 
in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877. =Flachbogen.— Berg- 
haus (1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852. xShush- 
waps. —Keane in Stanford Compend. (Cent, and 
So. Am.), app., 460, 474, 1878 (includes Kootenais 
Flatbows or Skalzi). =Kitunahan. —Powell in 7th 
Rep. B. A. E., 85, 1891. 

Kitunto (Gyit’endd, ‘people of the stock¬ 
aded town’). A Tsimshian division and 
town formerly near the mouth of Skeena 
r., Brit. Col. The people were related to 
the Kishpachlaots. 

Gyit’Enda. —Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 35,1889. Ket-an-dou. —Kane,Wand, in N. A., 
app., 1859. Kitadah.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 
281,1897. Kit, an, doh.— Howard, Notes on North¬ 
ern Tribes visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kitt- 
ando. —Krause, Tlinkit Ind.,318,1885. Kitunto.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. 

Kitwilgioks ( Gyitwulgyd'is , ‘people of 
the camping place’). A Tsimshian di¬ 
vision in the neighborhood of the mouth 
of Skeena r., Brit. Col. Their chief out¬ 
ranked all other Tsimshian chiefs. 
Gyitwulgya'ts.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 35,1889. Kitwilgioks.— Tolmie and Daw¬ 
son, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kit-will- 
coits. —Kane, Wand in N. A., app., 1859. Kitwill 
quoitz.— Howard, Notes on Northern Tribesvisited 
in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kit-wulg-jats. —Krause, 
Tlinkit Ind., 317,1885. 

Kitwilksheba ( GyitwulkseJjd / ). A Tsim¬ 
shian division in the neighborhood of 
Metlakatla and the mouth of Skeena r., 
Brit. Col. In 1884 it was almost extinct. 

Gyitwulkseba'.— Boas in Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232, 
1888. Ket-wilk-ci-pa.— Kane, Wand, in N. A.,app., 
1859. Kitwilksheba. —Tolmie and Dawson. Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kit,will,su,pat. —Howard, 
Notes on Northern Tribes visited in 1854, MS., 
B. A. E. Kit-wulkse-be.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 
1885. 

Kitwingach (‘ people of place of plenty 
of rabbits ’). A division and town of the 
Kitksan on the n. bank of Skeena r., 
Brit. Col., just above the rapids; pop. 154 
in 1904. 

Gyitwung-a'.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 50, 1895. Kilgonwah.—Brit. Col. map, Vic¬ 
toria, 1872. Kitcoonsa.—Downie in Jour. Roy. 
Geog. Soc., xxxi, 253,1861. Kitswingahs.—Scott in 
Ind. All. Rep. 1869, 563, 1870. Kit-wang-agh.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 415, 1898. Kitwangar.—Horetzky, 
Canada on the Pacific, 212, 1874. Kit-win-gach.— 
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 279,1897. Kitwunga.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. 

Kitwinshilk (‘ people of the place of 
lizards’). A Niska town on the middle 
course of Nass r., n. w. British Columbia. 
According to Boas there were four divi¬ 
sions: Laktiaktl, Lakloukst, Gyitsaek, 
and Gyisgahast. The first of these be¬ 


longed to the Wolf clan, the second and 
third to the Eagle clan, and the fourth to 
the Bear clan. Pop. 77 in 1898, 62 in 
1904. 

Gyitwunkse'tlk.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 49, 1895. Ke toon ok sheik. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, V, 487,1855. Kitwanshelt.— Horetzky, 
Canada on the Pacific, 129,1874. Kit-win-shilk.— 
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 280, 1897. Kitwint- 
shieth.— Can. Ind. Aff., 271,1889. Kitwintshilth.— 
Ibid., 416, 1898. 

Kitwinskole (‘ people where the narrows 
pass ’). A Kitksan division and town on 
a w. branch of upper Skeena r., Brit. Col.; 
pop. 67 in' 1904. 

Gyitwuntlko'l.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 49, 1895. Kitswinscolds. —Scott in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1869, 563, 1870. Kitwancole. —Horetzky, 
Canada on the Pacific, 116, 1874. Kit-wan-cool.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 415,1898. Kit-wan Cool. —Ibid., 252, 
1891. Kit-win-skole. —Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 
279, 1897. Kit-wun-kool. —Dawson in Geol. Surv. 
of Can., 20b, 1879-80. 

Kitzeesh ( GyidzVs, ‘ people of the 
salmon weir’). A Tsimshian division 
and town formerly near Metlakatla, Brit. 
Col. According to the Haida, this family 
was descended from a woman of their tribe. 
Gittci's.—Swanton, field notes, 1900-01. Gyid- 
zi's.—Boas in Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 232, 1888. 
Kee-ches.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. 
Kee-chis.—Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. 
Keshase.—Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes 
visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E^ Kitseesh.—Brit. Col. 
map, Victoria, 1872. Klts-nsch.—Krause, Tlinkit 
Ind., 318, 1885. Kitsis.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kitzeesh.—Dorsey 
in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897. 

Kitzegukla (‘people of Zekukla moun¬ 
tain’). A Kitksan division and town on 
upper Skeena r., a short distance below 
Hazelton, Brit. Col. There is an old and 
also a new town of this name. Accord¬ 
ing to Boas there were two clans here, 
Raven and Bear, the people of the latter 
being called specifically Gyisga/hast. 
Pop. of both, 91 in 1904. 

Gyitsigyu'ktla. —Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 50, 1895. Kitseguecla. —Dawson in Geol. 
Surv. Canada, 20b, 1879-80. Kitse-gukla. —Can. 
Ind. Aff., 252, 1891. Kitsenelah.— Brit. Col. map, 
Victoria, 1872. Kit-se-quahla.— Can. Ind. Aff., 
415, 1898. Kit-se-quak-la. —Ibid., 358, 1895. Kit- 
sigeuhle. —Horetzky, Canada on Pacific, 116,1874. 
Kitsiguchs. —Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869,563, 1870. 
Kitsiguhli.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. 
Col., 114b, 1884. Kits-se-quec-la. —Can. Ind Aff., 
304,1893. Kitze-gukla. —Dorsevin Am. Antiq.,xix, 
278, 1897. 

Kitzilas (‘people of the canyon’, i. e., 
of Skeena r.). A Tsimshian division. 
The two towns successively occupied by 
them bore their name. The first, just 
above the canyon of Skeena r., Brit. Col., 
has been abandoned, the people having 
moved, mainly in 1893, to New Kitzilas, 
just below the canyon. Pop. of the latter 
town, 144 in 1902; in 1904, together with 
Port Essington and Kitzimgaylum, 191. 
Gyits’ala'ser.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 9, 1889. Kisalas.—Can. Ind. Aff., 416, 
1898. Kitalaska.—Downie in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., xxxi, 252,1861. Kitchu lass.—Howard, Notes 
on Northern Tribes visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. 
Kitsalas.—Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 563, 1870. 
Kitsalass.—Can. Ind. Aff., 252, 1891. Kitsallas.— 
Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Kit-se-lai-so.— 
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Kitselassir.— 
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. Kitsellase.—Hor- 


710 


KTTZIMG A YL UM-KIV A 


[b. a. e. 


etzky, Canada on Pacific, 212,1874. Kit zilas.— 
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 279,1897. Kit-zilass.— 
Ibid., map. 

Kitzimgaylum (‘people on the upper 
part of the river.’—Boas). A Tsimshian 
division and town on the n. side of Skeena 
r., Brit. Col., below the canyon. These 
people were originally Tongas, of the 
Koluschan stock, who fled from Alaska 
on account of continual wars, and settled 
at this point. In . course of time they 
came to speak the Tsimshian language. 
Pop. 69 in 1902; in 1904, together with 
Port Essington and Kitzilas, 191. 

Gyits’umraTon.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Canada, 9, 35, 1889. Kee-chum-a-kai-lo.—Kane, 
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Kee-chum akarlo.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 487, 1855. Kitchem- 
kalem.—Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 1889. Kitchimkale.— 
Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes visited in 
1854, MS., B. A. E. Kitsumkalem.—Can. Ind. Aff., 
416, 1898. Kitsumkalum.—Horetzky, Canada on 
Pacific, 212, 1874. Kit-zim-gay-lum.—Dorsey in 
Am. Antiq., xix, 279, 1897. 

Kiusta ( KHu'stA , ‘where the trail 
comes out’ ■[?]). A former Haida town 
on the n. w. coast of Moresby id., opposite 
North id., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. 
It was owned by the Stustas. Possibly 
the town given in John Work’s list as 
“Lu-lan-na,” with 20 houses and 296 in¬ 
habitants in 1836-40, included this place 
and the neighboring town of Yaku. The 
old people remember 9 houses as having 
stood here and 8 at Yaku. After the 
population of Kiusta had decreased con¬ 
siderably,the remainder went to Kung, in 
Naden harbor. (j. r. s.) 

Kioo-_sta.—Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 162,1880. 
Kusta Haade.—Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., sec. n, 125,1895. Ky’iu'st’a.—Boas, 12th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 22,1898. 

Kiva. The Hopi name of the sacred 
ceremonial, assembly, and lounging cham¬ 
ber, characteristic of ancient and modern 
Pueblo settle¬ 
ments of Ari¬ 
zona and New 
Mexico and 
the prehis¬ 
toric pueblos 
of Colorado 
and Utah. 

They were 
first described 
by the early 
Spanish ex¬ 
plorers of the 
S. W., who 
des ignated 
them estufas, 
meaning ‘hot 
rooms,’ evi¬ 
dently mistaking their chief use as that 
of sweat-houses. One of the kivas at the 
pueblo of Taos in 1540 is described by 
Castaneda (14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896) as 
containing “12 pillars, 4 of which, in the 
center, were as large as 2 men could reach 
around,” while “some that were seen 
were large enough for a game of ball.” 
The kivas of the Rio Grande villages 


were described as “underground, square 
or round, with fine pillars,” which is 
largely true to-day. The early Spaniards 
also state that “the young men lived in 
the estufas,” that “if a man repudiated 
his woman he has to go to the estufa,” 
and that “it is forbidden for women to 
sleep in the estufas, or to enter these for 
any purpose, except to give their hus¬ 
bands or sons something to eat,” which 
is still the case save in the few instances 
in which kivas are used by women’s re¬ 
ligious societies or where women are wit¬ 
nesses of the ceremonies. “The kivas,” 
says Castaneda, “belong to the men, 



HOPI KIVA, SHONGOPOVI. (v. MindELEFf) 


while the houses belong to the women.” 
Elsewhere he asserts that the kivas be¬ 
long to the whole village, meaning that 
they are not the property of a single in¬ 
dividual or household. 

The oldest form of kiva seems to have 
been circular, and some of these are still 
used in Rio Grande pueblos, as Santo 
Domingo, Santa Clara, and Nambe, al¬ 
though in this section, where Spanish in¬ 
fluence was strongest, the persistence of 
this type might be least expected. At 
Zuni and in the Hopi villages, on the 
other hand, the kivas are rectangular, in 
the latter wholly or partly underground 

and usually 
isolated,in the 
former partly 
subterranean 
and forming 
part of the vil¬ 
lage cluster. 
Originally the 
Zuni kivas 
were in the 
courtyards of 
the villages, 
but, probably 
by reason of 
Spanish re¬ 
strictions, 
their situation 
was later 
hidden among the dwellings, where they 
are today. The number of kivas in a 
pueblo varied with its size and the number 
of the religious organizations using them. 
Oraibi alone has 13 kivas, while some of 
the smaller pueblos contain but one. 
Those of the Hopi, which number 33, are 
rectangular, and are generally so built 
that they'are approximately on a n. and 











BULL. 30] 


KIYEZAKU 


KLAHOSAHT 


711 


s. line, the exceptions probably being due 
to the exigencies of the sites. This latter 
circumstance, however, is not permitted 
to interfere with the subterranean or semi¬ 
subterranean character of the kivas, for 
so persistently is this feature preserved 
that convenience of use is sacrificed for 
sites that admit of partial excavation in 
the rock or the sinking of the chamber 
below the surface of the mesa summit. 
Kivas contain few wall openings, and 
these are very small. The chambers are 
invariably entered by means of a ladder 
to the roof and another through a hatch¬ 
way. The roof is supported by beams 
covered with osiers or boards and adobe 
mortar well tamped; the floors consist 
usually of smooth sandstone slabs; the 
walls, which are sometimes decorated 
with symbolic paintings of directional 
animals in directional colors, are wholly 
or partly surrounded by a solid stone- 
capped adobe bench, and at one end, be¬ 
hind the ladder, is a low platform or 
dais. A shallow fire-pit occupies the cen¬ 
ter of the floor, the hatchway being the 
only means for the passage of the smoke. 
At the end of some kivas, facing the lad¬ 
der, is a small round hole in a stone or slab 
of cottonwood—the sipapu or shipapulima 
(the name varying with the language of 
the tribes)—symbolizing the place of 
origin and the final place of departure of 
the Pueblo peoples and the medium of 
communication with the beings of the 
underworld. When not in use the sipapu 
is kept plugged. Behind this orifice an 
altar, varying with the society and the 
ceremony, is usually erected, and before 
it a dry-painting is sometimes made, and 
numerous symbolic paraphernalia are 
assembled in prescribed order. See A Itar, 
Ceremony, Pueblos, Shrines. 

Consult Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
hi, iv, 1890-92; Cushing in 13th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1896; Dorsey and Yoth in Field 
Columbian Museum Pub., Anthrop. ser., 
hi, vi, 1901-03; various papers by Fewkes 
in the reports of the B. A. E., and in Am. 
Anthrop. and Jour. Am. Folk-lore; 
Hewett in Bull. 32, B. A. E., 1906; Min- 
deleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891; Nordens- 
kiold, Cliff-dwellers of the Mesa Verde, 
1893; Mrs Stevenson in 11th and 23d Reps. 
B. A. E., 1894 and 1905; Winship in 14th 
Rep.B. A.E., 1896. (f. w. h.) 

Kivezaku. A band, apparently of Yuman 
stock, formerly inhabiting the lower Rio 
Colorado vallev in the present Arizona or 
California, and who were “conquered, 
absorbed, or driven out” by the Mohave, 
according to the tradition of the latter. 
Kive-za-ku.— Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, II, 
185, 1889. 

Kivitung. A settlement of Akudmrmiut 
Eskimo on Padli fjord, Baffin land. 

Qivitung.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441, 1888. 


Kivualinak. A Kevalingamiut village 
near Pt Hope, Alaska. 

Kivualinagmut.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. Am., 
pt. I, 74, 1847. 

Kiyahani. An Apache clan or band at 
San Carlos and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881. 
Ki-ya-hanni.—Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
118,1890. Ki-ya-jani.—Ibid., Ill (trans. ‘alkali’). 

Kiyis ( Ki'yis, ‘ dried meat ’). A division 
of thePiegan tribe of the Siksika.—Grin- 
nell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 209,225,1892. 

Kiyuksa (‘breakers,’ so called because 
the members broke the marriage law by 
taking wives within prohibited degrees of 
kinship). A band of the Mdewakan- 
ton Sioux which lived in 1811, according 
to Pike, in a village on upper Iowa r., 
under chief Wabasha (Minn. Hist. Coll., 
n, 17, 1860); in 1820 they were on Missis¬ 
sippi r., above Prairie du Chien (Drake, 
Bk. Inds., bk. vm, 1848). Long, in 1824, 
placed them in two villages, one on Iowar. 
near the Mississippi, the other on L. Pepin. 
Their chief village was Winona, on the site 
of Winona, Minn., in 1858, and the other 
was where Wabasha is now. 

Bounding-Wind.—Neill, Hist. Minn., 144,note,1858 
(English for Tatepsin, the name of the chief). 
Keoxa.—Long, Exped. St. Peter’s R., I, 383, 1824. 
Ki-gu-ksa.—Smithson. Misc. Col., xiv, 7,1878. Ki- 
yu-ksa.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 81,1850. Kiyuk- 
san.—Williamson in Minn. Geol. Rep. for 1884,112. 
La Feuille’s band. —Long in Minn. Hist. Coll., II, 24, 
1860. Ta-te-psin.—Neill. Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858. 
Wabasha’s band.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st 
sess., 64, 1832. Wabashaw band.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
282, 1854. Wabashaw’s sub-band of Mede-wakan- 
t’wans.—Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 81, 1850. 
Wabushaw.—Prescott in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
II, 169, 1852. Wa-ha-shaw’s tribe.—U. S. Ind. 
Treaties (1836), 875, 1873. Wapasha’s band.— 
Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 131, 1852. Wapa- 
shaw.—Neill, Hist. Minn., xliv, 1858 (chief’s 
name). Wapashaw’s village. — Throcmorton 
(1832) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds.,bk. v, 155,1848. 
Wa-pa-shee.—Smithson. Misc. Coll., xiv, art. 6,8, 
1878. Wapatha.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Coll., v., 
156,1885. Wind people.—Dorsey in Am. Natur., 
115, 1884. 

Kiyuksa. A division of the Upper 
Yanktonai Sioux. 

Kee-ark-sar.—Corliss, Lacotah MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
106, 1874. Kee-uke-sah.—Lewis and Clark, Dis- 
cov., 34, 1806; Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 99, 
1905. Ku-ux-aws,—Prescott in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, II, 169, 1852. 

Kiyuksa. A division of the Brule Teton 
Sioux.—Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. 

Kiyuksa. A division of the Oglala Teton 
Sioux. 

Breakers of the custom.—Robinson, letter to Dor¬ 
sey, 1879. Cut Offs.—Brackett in Smithson. Rep. 
‘ 1876, 467, 1877. Ke-ax-as.—Ibid. Kiocsies.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 250,1875. Kiyuksa.—Robinson (1880) 
quoted by Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220,1897. 
Zuzeca kiyaksa.—Cleveland (1884), ibid. ( = ‘bit 
the snake in two ’). Zuzetca-kiyaksa. —Ibid. 

Klahosaht. A Nootka tribe formerly 
living n. of Nootka sd., Vancouver id. 
(Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 1869). Boas was 
unable to learn anything about them, 
but the name seems to occur in Jewitt’s 
Narrative as the designation of a small 
tribe that had been “conquered and in¬ 
corporated into that of Nootka.” 


712 


KLAHUM 


KLAMATUK 


[b. a. f- 


Klahars.— Jewitt, Narr., 74, 1849. Klahosaht.— 
Sproat, Sav. Life, 308,1869. Tlahosath. —Boas, 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31,1890. 

Klahum. An Okinagan village where 
Astor’s old fort stood, at the mouth of 
Okinakane r., Wash.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. 
Rep., i, 413, 1855. 

Klakaamu (KV a-ka-a'-mu ). A former 
Chumashan village on Santa Cruz id., off 
the coast of California, e. of Punta del Di¬ 
ablo.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Klalakamish ( Kla-lci'-ka-mish). An ex¬ 
tinct band of Lummi that resided on the 
e. side of San Juan id., n. w. Wash.— 
Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 39, 1863. 

Klamaskwaltin. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil¬ 
lage on the n. bank of Yukon r., Alaska, 
near the mouth of Kaiyuh r. 

Klamaskwaltin.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 
Klamasqualttin. —Coast Survey cited by Baker, 
ibid. 

Klamath (possibly from m&klaks, the 
Lutuami term for ‘Indians,’ ‘people,’ 



KLAMATH MEDICINE-MAN 


‘community’; lit. ‘the encamped’). A 
Lutuamian tribe in s. w. Oregon. They 
call themselves Eukshikni or Auksni, 
‘ people of the lake,’ referring to the fact 
that their principal seats were on Upper 
Klamath lake. There were also im¬ 
portant settlements on Williamson and 
Sprague rs. The Klamath are a hardy 
people and, unlike the other branch of 
the family, the Modoc, have always lived 
at peace with the whites. In 1864 they 
joined the Modoc in ceding the greater 
part of their territory to the United States 
and settled on Klamath res., where they 
numbered 755 in 1905, including, how¬ 


ever, many former slaves and members 
of other tribes who have become more or 
less assimilated with the Klamath since 
the establishment of the reservation. 
Slavery was a notable institution among 
the Klamath, and previous to the treaty 
of 1864 they accompanied the Modoc 
every year on a raid against the Acho- 
mawi of Pit r., Cal., for the capture of 
women and children whom they retained 
as slaves or bartered with the Chinook at 
The Dalles. The Klamath took no part 
in the Modoc war of 1872-73, and it is 
said that their contemptuous treatment 
of the Modoc was a main cause of the 
dissatisfaction of the latter with their 
homes on' the reservation which led to 
their return to Lost r. and thus to the 
war. The following are the Klamath 
settlements and divisions so far as known: 
Awalokaksaksi, Kohashti, Kulshtgeush, 
Ivuyamskaiks, Nilakshi, Shuyakeksh, 
Yaaga, and Yulalona. See also Kumba- 
tuash. Consult Gatschet, Klamath Inds., 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, 1890. (l. f. ) 

Aigspaluma. —Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., II, 
pt. i, xxxiii, 1890 (‘people of the chipmunks’: 
Sahaptin name for all Indians on Klamath res. 
and vicinity; abbreviated toAigspalo, Aikspalu). 
Alammimakt ish. —Ibid., xxxiv (said to be the 
Achomawi name) . Athlameth.— Ibid. (Calapooya 
name). Auksiwash. —Ibid, (so called in Yreka 
dialect of Shasta). A-uksni. —Ibid. (abbr. of 
E-ukshikni). A'-ushkni. — Ibid., pt. II, 31. Clam- 
aths —Lee and Frost, Oregon, 177,1844. Clamets. — 
Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., Vi, 218,1846. Clam- 
ouths. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., n,map, 
1836. Clamuth. —Johnson and Winter, Rocky Mts., 
47, 1846. Clamuts. —White. Ten Years in Oregon, 
259, 1850. Climath.— Spaulding in H. R. Rep. 830, 
27th Cong., 2d sess., 59, 1842. E-ukshikni.— Gat¬ 
schet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. I, xxxiv, 1890 
(abbr. of the following). E-ukshik-ni mafclaks. — 
Ibid, (own name: ‘people at the lake’). £-uks- 
kni.—Ibid. (abbr. of E-ukshikni). iS-ushkni. — 
Ibid., pt. 11,31. Ilamatt.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th 
Cong., 1st sess. ,7.1848 (misprint of Hale’sTlamatl). 
Kalmaths.— Dyar (1873) in H. R. Rep. 183, 44th 
Cong., 1st sess.,4,1876 (misprint). Klamacs. —Du- 
flot de Mofras, Explor. dans l’Oregon, ii, 335,1844. 
Klamaks. —Ibid., 357. Klamat. —Palmer, Rocky 
Mts., 103, 1852. Klamath Lake Indians. —Steele in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 121, 1865. Klamaths. —Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, June 8,1860. Klamatk. —Gatschet 
misquoted in Congres Internat. des Am6r., iv, 
284, 1881. Klameth.—Stanley in Smithson. Misc. 
Coll.,Ii, 59,1852. Klamets.—Farnham, Trav., 112, 
1843. Klawmuts. —Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848. Makaitserk. —Gatschet, 
op. cit., ii, pt. i, xxxiv, 1890 (so called by western 
Shasta). Muck-alucs. —Powers quoted by Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Races, 1, 351,1882, Muk'-a-luk.— Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 254, 1877. Okshee.— 
Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 121, 1865. Ouk- 
skenah. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 22, 1860. 
Plaikni. —Gatschet, op. cit., ii, pt. I, xxxv, 1890 
(collective name for Klamath, Modoc, and Snakes 
onSprague r.). Sayi.— -Ibid., xxiv (Snake name). 
Tapaadji.— Curtin, Ilmawi MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1889 (Ilmawi name). Thlamalh.— Tolmie and 
Dawson, Comp. Vocab., 11b, 1884. Tlamath.— Rux- 
ton, Adventures, 244, 1848. Tlamatl.— Hale in U. 
S. Expl. Exped., vi, 218,1846. Tlameth.— Thomp¬ 
son in Ind. Aft. Rep., 490, 1854. 

Klamatuk. An old village, probably 
belonging to the Comox, on the e. coast 
of Vancouver id., opposite the s. end of 
Valdes id. 






BULL. 30] 


KLASKINO-KLIKITAT 


713 


Kla-ma-took.—Dawson, Geol. Sury. Can., map, 
1888. 

Klaskino (‘people of the ocean’). A 
Kwakiutl tribe on Klaskino inlet, n. w. 
coast of Vancouver id.; pop. 13 in 1888, 
when last separately enumerated. 
Klarkinos.— Can. Ind. Aff., 145,1879. Klas'-kaino.— 
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. 
II, 65. Klass-kino.—Can. Ind. Aff., 189, 1884. 
L’a'sq'enox.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 829, 
1897. l la'sq!enox u .—Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., v, pt. 2, 354, 1902. Tla'sk’enoq.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 53, 1890. Tlats’e'noq.— 
Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,131,1887 (misprint). 

Klatanars. A band of Cowichan on 
Fraser r., Brit. Col. Pop. 36 in 1886, when 
last enumerated separately. 

Klatanars.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1886, 229. Klata- 
wars.—Ibid, for 1879, 309. 

Klatlawas. An ancient Clallam village 
on Puget sd., Wash. Its inhabitants par¬ 
ticipated in the treaty of Point no Point, 
Jan. 26, 1855. 

Klatlawas.—Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 20, 1863. 
Klat-la-wash.—U.S. Ind.Treat. (1855), 800, 1873. 

Klatwoat. A village on the w. bank of 
Harrison r., near its junction with Fraser 
r., Brit. Col.—Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., 
Victoria, 1872. 

Klawak. The principal tow T n of the 
Henya Tlingit on the w. coast of Prince 
of Wales id., Alaska. It is now inhabited 
largely by Haida. Pop. 261 in 1890, 131 
in 1900. 

Chla-wak-kon.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., Ill, 1885 
(k6n= people). Klawak.—Eleventh Census, Alas¬ 
ka,3,1893. IiAwa'k.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 
1904. Thlewhakh.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 
1855. 

Klchakuk. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village on the e. side of the entrance to 
Kuskokwim bay, Alaska; pop. 18 in 1880, 
49 in 1890. 

Klahangamut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,map, 
1899. Klchakuk.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 
Kl-changamute.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1881. 

Kleaukt ( Kleau'kt, ‘ rocky bar ’). A vil¬ 
lage of the Ntlakyapamuk on Fraser r., 
below North Bend, Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout 
in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899. 

Kleguchek. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village in Alaska, at the mouth of Kusko¬ 
kwim r. on the right bank. 

Kleguchek.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 
Klegutshegamut.—Kilbuck (1898) quoted by Baker, 
ibid. 

Klemiaksac.—A Chinookan village on 
Columbia r., Oreg,, 25 m. below The 
Dalles. 

Kle-miak-sac.—Lee and Frost, Oregon, 176,1844. 

Klikitat (Chinookan: ‘ beyond, ’ with ref¬ 
erence to the Cascade mts .). A Shahaptian 
tribe whose former seat was at the head¬ 
waters of the Cowlitz, Lewis, White Sal¬ 
mon, and Klickitat rs., n. of Columbia r., 
in Klickitat and Skamania cos., Wash. 
Their eastern neighbors were the Yakima, 
who speak a closely related language, 
and on the w. they were met by various 
Salishan and Chinookan tribes. In 1805 
Lewis and Clark reported them as win¬ 
tering on Yakima and Klickitat rs., and 
estimated their number at about 700. 
Between 1820 and 1830 the tribes of Wil¬ 


lamette valley were visited by an epi¬ 
demic of fever and greatly reduced in 
numbers. Taking advantage of their 
weakness, the Klikitat crossed the Colum¬ 
bia and forced their way as far s. as the 
valley of the Umpqua. Their occupancy 
of this territory was temporary, how¬ 
ever, and they were speedily compelled 
to retire to their old seat n. of the Colum¬ 
bia. The Klikitat were always active 
and enterprising traders, and from their 
favorable position became widely known 
as intermediaries between the coast tribes 
and those living e. of the Cascade range. 
They joined in the Yakima treaty at Camp 
Stevens, Wash., June 9, 1855, by which 
they ceded their lands to the United States. 
They are now almost wholly on Yakima 
res., Wash., where they have become so 



KLIKITAT WOMAN. (SHACKELFORD COLL.) 

merged with related tribes that an accu¬ 
rate estimate of their number is impos¬ 
sible. Of the groups still recognized on 
that reservation the Topinish are prob¬ 
ably their nearest relatives (Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 738, 1896) and may 
be regarded as a branch of the Klikitat, 
and the Taitinapam, speaking the same 
tongue, as another minor branch. One 
of the settlements of the Klikitat was 
Wiltkun. (l. f.) 

Awi-adshi.—Gatschet, Molalla MS., B. A. E., 27, 
1877 (Molala name). Chick-atat.—Lee and Frost, 
Oregon, 176, 1844. Chickitats.—Lane in Sen. Ex. 
Doe. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 171, 1850. Chit-ah- 
hut.—Noble in H. R. Ex. Doc., 37, 34th Cong., 3d 
sess., 109, 1857. Chit-at-hut.—Ibid., 111. Click-a- 
hut.—Roble in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857,351,1858. Ciicka- 
tat.—Lee and Frost, Oregon, 99,1844. Ciicketats.— 
Armstrong, Oregon, 106,1857. Clickitats.—Lane in 








714 


KLIKSIWI-KLONDIKE 


[ B. A. E. 


Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. Clikatats. —Stevens in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 66, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 43, 1856. 
Halthwypum.— Coues, Henryand Thompson Jour., 
827,1897. Kanatat.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 
418, 1855. Klachatah.— Nicolay, Oregon, 143,1846. 
Klackatacks.— Wilkes, U. S. Expl. Exped., iv, 325, 
1845. Klackatucks.— Slocum (1835) in H. R. Rep. 
101, 25th Cong., 3d sess., 41, 1839. Klakatacks.— 
Farnham, Trav., 112, 1843. Kleketat. —Scouler 
(1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 231, 1848. 
Klicatat. —Parker, Jour., 238, 1840. Klickataats.— 
Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 173,1859. Klick-a-tacks. — 
Catlin, N. Am. Ind., II, 113, 1866. Klickatates. — 
De Smet, Letters, 231, 1843. Klickatats. —Swan, 
Northwest Coast, 324,1857. Klickitats.— Lyman in 
Oregon Hist. Soc. Quar., I, 170, 1900. Klikalats. — 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., n, 14, 1848. 
Klikatat. —Townsend, Narr., 174,1839. Kliketan. — 
Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 237, 

1848. Kliketat.— Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., 
1,225,1841. Klikitats. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,17,1857. 
Kliquital.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 131, 1872. Klu'ka- 
tat. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 738, 1896. 
Kluk-ha'-tat. —Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884 (Alsea name). Lewis River Band. —Milroyin 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 164, 1881. Luk‘-a-ta+t.— McCaw, 
Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Puyallup 
name). Mahane.— Gatschet, Umpqua MS. vo¬ 
cab., B. A. E., 1887 (Umpqua name). Mi-flauq'- 
tcu-wun'-ti.— Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884 (‘scalpers’: Alsea name). Mun-an'-ne-qu' 
pinne. —Dorsey, Naltunnetunne MS. vocab.,B. A. 
E.,1884 (‘inland people ’: Naltunnetunne name). 
North Dale Indians. —Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc.76, 
30th Cong., 1st sess., 10,1848. Q,wu'lh-hwai-pum. — 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 738, 1896 (‘prairie 
people’: own name). Rea Ratacks. —Slocum in 
Sen. Doc. 24,25th Cong., 2d sess., 15,1838. Roil-roil- 
pam. —Pandosy in Shea, Lib. Am. Ling., vx, 7,1862. 
Shlakatats. —Belcher, Voy., I, 307, 1843. Tlakai'- 
tat. —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Okinagan 
name). Tlakatat. —Halein U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 
569,1846. Tlickitacks.— Stanley in Smithson. Misc. 
Coll., II, 63, 1852. T’likatat. —Gibbs in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., I, 241, 1877. Trile Kalets. —Warre and 
Vavasour (1845) in Martin, Hudson’s Bay Ter., 80, 

1849. Tse 'la'kayat amim. —Gatschet, La'kmiut 
MS., B. A. E., 105 (Kalapuya name). . T;uwa'- 
nxa-ikc. —Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 236,1901 (Clatsop 
name). Vancouvers.— Dart in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
215, 1851. Wahnookt. —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. 
(Cowlitz name). White River Indians. —Shaw in 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 112, 18&7. 
Whulwhaipum.— Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vo- 
cabs. Brit. Col., 78, 1884. Whulwhypum.— Lord, 
Naturalist in Brit. Col., 245, 1866. 

Kliksiwi ( Lix'sVwe 8 , ‘clover root at 
mouth of river.’—Boas). A former Kwa- 
kiutl village at the mouth of Kliksiwi r., 
on the e. side of Vancouver id. All traces 
of it have disappeared. 

Klik-si-wi. —Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 
1887, sec. II, 72. i.ix-si'wes.— Boas,* inf’n, 1905. 

Klimmim. A former Chehalis village 
on the n. shore of Grays harbor, Wash. 

Klimmim. —Gibbs, MS., no! 248, B. A. E. Weh-ta- 
mich. —Ibid. 

Klinkwan (Tlingit: -Linqo&'n , ‘shellfish 
town’; or ‘town where they split yellow 
cedar bark into long strings \ldri\ ’). A 
Haida town, occupied by the Yaku-lanas, 
on Cordova bay, Prince of Wales id., 
Alaska. In John Work’s list (1836-41) 
26 houses and 417 inhabitants are as¬ 
signed to a town called Click-ass. This 
is a camping place near Klinkwan, and 
the Klinkwan people are evidently in¬ 
tended. Petroff gives the population in 
1880-81 as 125, and the census of 1890 
as 19. (j. r. s.) 

Chlen-ko-an hade.— Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 
1885. Kliarakans. —Halleck quoted by Morris, 
Res. of Alaska, 67, 1879. Kliavakans. —Halleck 


quoted by Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 562, 1870. 
Klinkwan. —U. S. Coast Survey, map of Alaska, 
s. E. section. Klinquan. —EleventhCensus, Alaska, 
31,1893. Kliuquan. — Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
32,1884. Tlinkwan Haade.— Harrison in Proc. and 
Trans. Royal Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125,1895. 

Klinquit. One of the bands or tribes 
taking part in the Yakima treaty of 1855 
(U. S. Stat., xn, 951, 1863). They are 
not otherwise identifiable, and should not 
be confounded with the Tlingit. 

Klkohtl ( Kl-k6h’tl ). The Chehalis 
name for an ancient village on the s. 
side of Grays harbor, Wash.—Gibbs, MS. 
no. 248, B. A. E. 

Klochwatone. Mentioned as a Tlingit 
family under the leadership of Anna- 
hootz, residing in and near Sitka, Alaska, 
and consisting of 200 people in about 40 
families. The name is said to mean ‘ war¬ 
riors,’ but in all probability it is a corrup¬ 
tion otiiiSkoa-hil-tdn, ‘ people of the house 
on the point.’ A house of this name 
stood on the point at Sitka, where Bara- 
noff’s fort was afterward built. It be¬ 
longed to the Kiksadi and not to Anna- 
hootz’s people, therefore possibly the 
word is corrupted from Goch-hil-tdn (‘wolf 
house people’), to whom Annahootz be¬ 
longed. (.1. R. S.) 

Klochwatone.— Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 
46th Cong., 1st sess., 31, 1880. Kluckwaton.— Ibid., 
32. Kluckwatone —Ibid. 

Klodesseottine (‘ hay river people ’). A 
division of the Etchareottine on Hayr., 
Mackenzie Ter., Canada. In 1904 there 
were 247 enumerated on the upper and 
115 on the lower river. 

Gens de la riviere au Foin. —Petitot, Diet. D6n6- 
Dindjiti, xx, 1876. Slaves of Lower Hay River. — 
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 82,1905. Slaves of Upper 
Hay River. —Ibid. 

Klogi. A Navaho clan, named front an 
old pueblo. 

Klogi.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
103, 1890. Klogifiine. — Ibid (fine= l people’). 
Klogicfine*. — Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30, 
1897. Klogni.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 279,1884. 

Klokadakaydn (‘arrow reed’). An 
Apache clan or band at San Carlos agency 
and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1875-81. 

Clo-kar-da-ki-ein.— White, Apache Names for Ind. 
Tribes, MS., B. A.E., 1875. Klokadakaydn.— Bourke 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 111, 1890. Klugadu- 
cayn.— Ibid., 112. 

Klokegottine (‘ prairie people ’). A Na- 
hane division living between Mackenzie 
r. and lakes La Martre, Grandin, and 
Tach£, Mackenzie Ter., Canada. 
Klo-kke-Gottine. —Petitot, Autour du lac des Es- 
claves, 362, 1891. Klo-kke-ottine. —Petitot, MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1865. Kl‘o-ke-ottine. — Ibid. 
Thlo-co-chassies. —Campbell quoted by Dawson 
in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 200b, 1889. Tjotoene.— 
Morice, MS. letter, 1890 (Takulli name). Tp>- 
to n -na. —Ibid, (trans. ‘grass people’). 

Klondike (el dorado, a rich strike, a 
fortune). This word, which entered the 
English language of America during the 
Alaskan gold fever of 1898-1900, is the 
name of a tributary of the Yukon in ex¬ 
treme n. w. Canada. Klondike is a cor¬ 
ruption of the name of this stream in one 
of the Athapascan dialects prevailing in 
that region. In the literature of the 


BULL. 30] 


KLOO—KNAIAKHOTANA 


715 


day, ‘Klondiker,’ and even ‘to Klon¬ 
dike/ also occur. Of the name Baker 
(Geog. Diet. Alaska, 244, 1902) says: 
“This [Klondike] river was named 
Deer river by the Western Union Tele¬ 
graph Expedition, in 1867, and so ap¬ 
peared on various maps. Later it was 
called Raindeer and afterwards Reindeer. 
Ogilvie, writing September 6, 1896, from 
Cudahy, says: ‘The river known here 
as the Klondike’; and in a footnote says: 
‘The correct name is Thron Duick.’ 
It has also been called Clondyke and 
Chandik, or Deer.” (a. f. c.) 

Kloo ( Xe-u , ‘southeast,’ the name of a 
town chief). A former Haida town at 
the e. end of Tanoo id., Queen Char¬ 
lotte ids., Brit. Col. It was one of the 
largest towns in the Haida country 
and was occupied by three families, 
the Kona-kegawai, Djiguaahl-lanas, and 
Kadusgo-kegawai, to the first of which 
the town chief belonged. John Work 
(1836-41) assigned 40 houses and 545 in¬ 
habitants to this town; old people still 
remember 26 houses. Although aban¬ 
doned, the houses and poles here are in 
better condition than in most uninhab¬ 
ited Haida villages. ( j. r. s. ) 

Clew.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1894, 280, 1895. Cloo.- 
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 489,1855 (after Work, 
1836-41). Kloo.—Common geographic form. 
Klue.—Poole, Queen Charlotte Ids., passim, 
1872. Klue’s Village.—Dawson, Queen Char¬ 
lotte Ids., 169, 1880 (so called from chief). 
Lav-skik.—Ibid. (Cbimmesyan name; Laxsk- 
iyek =‘those of the Eagle clan’). T’ano.—Boas in 
12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 25, 1898. Tanoo.— 
Dawson, op. cit. (own name; the name of a 
kind of sea grass). Tanu Haade.—Harrison in 
Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 125,1895. Tlu.— 
Ibid. 

Kloo. A temporary settlement on the n. 
side of Cumshewa inlet, occupied by 
Haida from the older town of Kloo for a 
few years before they passed on to Skide- 
gate." (j. r. s.) 

Klothchetunne ( K’ loQ-tcP -itinn6 ). A 
Chastacosta village on or in the vicinity 
of Rogue r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 234, 1890. 

Kltlasen ( Qltld'sEn). A Songish band 
at McNeill bay, s. end of Vancouver id.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 17, 
1890. 

Kluckhaitkwu. A band of Okinagan 
formerly living at the falls of Okinakane 
r., Wash. 

Kluck-hait-kwee.—Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 445, 
1854. Kluckhaitkwu.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep.,i, 
412, 1855. 

Klughuggue. Given as a Huna village 
on Chichagof id., but probably identical 
with the Chliil-chJgu of Krause, which 
he places on the mainland opposite. It 
is perhaps also identical with Tlushashaki- 
an (q. v.). Pop. 108 in 1880. 

Chlul-chagu.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 104, 1885. 
Klughuggue.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 31, 
1884. 

Klukluuk (from Lowti/q, ‘slides,’ ap- 
piled to places where gravel, small stones, 
or sand slides or falls down). A village 


of the Spences Bridge band of theNtlakya- 
pamuk, on Nicola r., 8 m. from Spences 
Bridge, Brit. Col. 

Kluklu'uk.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 
4,1899. LoLowu'q. —Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., II, 173, 1900. 

Klukwan (‘old and celebrated place’). 
The principal Chilkat village on Chil- 
kat r., 20 m. from its mouth. Indian pop. 
in 1890, 320. 

Clokwon.—Willard, Life in Alaska, 78,1884. Klak- 
wan.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 3, 1893. Klok- 
wan.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 100,1885. Kluckquan. 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 31,1884. Lak u '-an.— 
Swanton, field notes, B. A. E, 1904. 

Klumaitumsh. Given by Gibbs (MS., 
B. A. E., ca. 1858) as the Chehalis name 
for an ancient village on the s. side of 
Grays harbor, Wash., but according to 
Boas it is an island near the entrance to 
Grays harbor. Lewis and Clark, in 1805, 
spoke of it as a tribe of about 260 people 
in 12 houses. 

Clamochtomichs.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, 119, 
1814. Clamoctomichs.—Ibid.,474. Clamoctomicks.— 
Domenech, Deserts, i, 441, 1860. Cla-moc-to- 
mick’s.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 118, 
1905. Cla-moi-to-micks,—Ibid., 70. Clamoiton- 
nish._— Lewis and Clark, Reize, ii, 350, 1817. 
LEma'itEmc.—Boas, inf’n, 1905. 

Klutak. An Eskimo village in the 
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 21 in 
1890. 

Klutagmiut.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164,1893. 

Knacto. A former Iroquois, probably 
Seneca, village on the n. bank of Che¬ 
mung r., N. Y.—Pouchot, map (1758) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. 

Knaiakhotana. An Athapascan tribe 
inhabiting Kenai penin., Alaska, the 
basins of Knik and Sushitna rs., and the 
shores of Iliamna and Cook lakes. It is 
the only northern Athapascan tribe occu¬ 
pying any large portion of the seacoast. 
They came in contact with the Russians 
at an early date and were subjugated 
only after much fighting; a permanent 
trading settlement was established in 1792 
by Zaikoff and Lastochkin, and in 1793 
missionaries settled on Cook inlet. In 
the latter year Baranoff brought 30 con¬ 
victs to teach agriculture to the people of 
Kenai penin ; the natives attacked him 
during his explorations, but were re¬ 
pulsed, the Russians losing 11 men. 
Father Juvenati in 1796 attempted to 
suppress polygamy among the natives, 
but was killed while preaching near Ili¬ 
amna lake. Hostilities were resumed 
against Baranoff in 1801. An attempt to 
explore the region n. of Cook inlet was 
made in 1816 by the Russian-American 
Co., and in 1819 they had 4 settlements on 
Cook inlet. In 1838 an epidemic of small¬ 
pox carried off nearly half the native 
population. In 1861 Kenai penin. was 
designated one of the 7 missionary dis¬ 
tricts of the Russian church. The Knaia- 
khotana are taller and darker than 
their Eskimo neighbors, but their cus¬ 
toms differ little from those of the neigh¬ 
boring tribes. Hunting and fishing are 


716 


KNAIAKHOTANA 


[b. a. e. 


the chief occupations, birch-bark canoes 
being used for river journeys in the in¬ 
terior, while for coast voyages bidarkas 
are purchased from the Eskimo. 

The Knaiakhotanaarethe mostcivilized 
of all the northern Athapascan tribes. 
They use dogs mainly for hunting, not 
harnessing them to their sleds even in the 
long journeys they perform in winter 
from one trapping ground to another. 
Occasionally in summer dogs are em¬ 
ployed as pack animals. Their log 
houses are more solidly and warmly built 
than those of the moving Kutchin tribes; 
they are divided into an outer room 
for cooking and rough labor, and an 
inner sleeping apartment, floored and 
ceiled, lighted through a pane of glass or 
ut, and impenetrable to the outer air. 
n some villages the bedroom is used as a 
bathroom, being then heated with red-hot 
stones; but most villages have a bath hut 
or two. In the more primitive villages 
on the Sushitna and Knik rs. is found the 
old communal log house, occupied by 
several families, each having its separate 
sleeping apartment connected with the 
central structure by a hole in the wall. 
Provisions are kept out of the reach of 
dogs in a storehouse built of logs and ele¬ 
vated on posts (11th Census, Alaska, 
167, 1893). 

They bury their dead in wooden boxes, 
in which they put also the property of the 
deceased, and pile stones upon the grave. 
They express grief by smearing their 
faces with black paint, singeing their 
hair, and lacerating their bodies. Most 
of their clothing is made of the skin of 
the mountain goat, which they kill in 
large numbers. Their language is ex¬ 
tremely guttural, compared with that of 
the Eskimo (Dali, Alaska, 430, 1870). 

Richardson (Arct. Exped., i, 406, 
1851) stated that the Knaiakhotana have 
two phratries, one containing 6 and 
the other 5 clans. The clans, according 
to their mythology, are descended from 
two women made by the raven, and are 
as follows: 1, Kachgiya (The Raven); 

2, Tlachtana (Weavers of Grass Nets); 

3, Montochtana (A Corner in the Back 
Part of the Hut); 4, Tschichgi (Color); 

5, Nuchschi (Descended from Heaven); 

6, Kali (Fishermen). 1, Tultschina (Bath¬ 
ers in Cold Water); 2, Katluchtna (Lov¬ 
ers of Glass Beads); 3, Schischlachtana 
(Deceivers Like the Raven); 4, Nuts- 
chichgi; 5, Zaltana (Mountain). Hoff¬ 
man (Aijalu^amut MS., B. A. E., 1882) 
gives the following Chugachigmiut names 
for divisions of the Knaiakhotana: 1, Kan- 
ikaligamut (People Close to the River); 
2, Maltshokamut (Valley People); 3, 
Nanualikmut (People Around the Lake). 
The same authority (Kadiak MS., B. A. 
E., 1882) gives the Kaniagmiut names 


for 5 divisions: 1, Nanualuk (=Nanualik- 
mut); 2, Kuinruk (Sea-hunting People); 
3, Tuiunuk (=Tyonok, Marsh People); 4, 
Knikamut (=Knik, Fire-signal People); 
5, Tigikpuk (People Living at the Base 
of a Volcano). 

The Knaiakhotana villages are Chinila, 
Chuitna, Kasilof, Kasnatchin, Kenai, 
Kilchik, Knakatnuk, Knik, Kultuk, 
Kustatan, Nikhkak, Nikishka, Ninilchik, 
Nitak, Skilak, Skittok, Sushitna, Titu- 
kilsk, Tyonek, Tyonok, and Zdluiat. 

The natives of Cook inlet in 1818 num¬ 
bered 1,471, of whom 723 were males and 
748 females. Baron Wrangell, in 1825, 
gave their population as 1,299, the fe¬ 
males being slightly in excess. In 1839 
Veniaminof made the number 1,628, and 
in 1860 the Holy Synod gave 937, declaring 
that the natives had become Christians. 
At the acquisition of Alaska by the United 
States in 1868, Gen. Halleck and Rev. 
Vincent Colyer erroneously estimated 
the Knaiakhotana at 25,000 (Petroff, Rep. 
on Alaska, 40, 1884). The population in 
1880 consisted of 614 natives, and in 1890 
they numbered 724 (11th Census, Alaska, 
158, 1893). 

Ilyamna people.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
164, 1884. Kaitana.—De Meulen, Kenay MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1870. Kaneskies.—Colyer in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1869, 553, 1870. Kanisky.—Ibid., 575. 
Kankiina.—Staffeief and Petroff, MS. vocab., B. A. 
E.,1885. Kankiinats kogtana.—Ibid. Kenai.—Gal¬ 
latin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853. 
Kenaians.—Terry in Rep. Sec. War, pt. I, 41, 1869. 
Kenaies.—Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., I, 
218, 1841. Kenai-tena.—Dali, Alaska, 430, 1870. 
Kenaitses.—Pinartin Rev. dePhilol. etd’Ethnog., 
no. 2, 1, 1875. Kenaitze.—Ludwig quoted by Dali 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 35, 1877. Kenai'yer.— 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., I, 401, 1851. Kenai- 
yut.— Ibid. (Kaniagmiut name adopted by Rus¬ 
sians). Kenaize.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 116, 
1874. Kenaizen.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 855, 1826. 
Kenajer.—Erman, Archiv, VII, 128,1849. Kenas.— 
Domenech, Deserts N. Am., I, 442,1860. Kenay.— 
Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 160, 1841. 
Kenayern.—Wrangell in Baer and Helmersen, 
Beitrage, 1.103, 1839. Kenayzi.—Humboldt, Essai 
Polit., i, 347,1811. Kiatenses.—Lutke, Voyage, i, 
181, 1835 (probably identical). Kinaetzi.—Prich¬ 
ard, Phys. Hist., v, 441,1847. Kinai.—Vater, Mith- 
ridates, in, 230, 1816. Kinaitsa.—Balbi, Atlas 
Ethnog., 1826. Kinaitze.—Vater, op. cit., 229. 
Kinaitzi.—Balbi, op. cit. Kinaizi.—Vater, op. cit., 
228. Kinajut.—Wrangell in Baer and Helmersen, 
Beitrage, i, 103, 1839 (Kaniagmiut name). Kin- 
nats.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 25, 1884. 
Kinnats-Khotana.—Ibid., 162. Kinnatz-kokhta- 
na.—Ibid., 164. K’nai'-a-kho-ta/na.—Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., I, 35, 1877. Knaina.—Wrangell 
in Baer and Helmersen, Beitrage, I, 103, 1839. 
Knaiokhotana.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 158,1893. 
Koht-ana.—Liziansky, MS. vocab., B. A. E. Ou- 
gagliakmuzi-Kinaia.—Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 1826. 
Taas nei.—Doroschin in Radloff, Worterbuch, 29, 
1874 (Tenankutchin name). Tasne.—Pinart in 
Rev. de Philol. et d’Ethnog., no. 2,6,1875 (Tenan¬ 
kutchin name). Tehanin-Kutchin.—Dali, Alaska, 
430, 1870 (Kaiyuhkhotana name). Tenahna.— 
Holmberg (1855)quoted by Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 
1869,270,1870. Tenaina.—Radloff, WOrterbuch, 29, 
1874 (own name). Thnaina.—Holmberg, Ethnog. 
Skizz., 6,1855. Tinaina.—Hoffman, Kadiak MS., 
B. A. E., 1882. Tinina.—Hoffman, Aijaluvamut 
MS., B. A. E., 1882. Tinnats.—Petroff in 10th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 25, 1884. Tinnats-Khotana.—Ibid., 
162. Tinnatz-Kokhtana.—Ibid., 164 (own name). 
Tnac.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 539, 1878. 


BULL. 30] 


KNAKATNUK-KNIVES 


717 


Tnai.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 85, 1877. 
Tnaina.—Wrangell in Baer and Helmersen, Bei- 
trage, i, 103, 1839 (derived from tnai, ‘man’). 
Tnaina Ttynai.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 116, 1874. 
True Thnaina.—Holmberg quoted by Dali, Alaska, 
430, 1870. 

Knakatnuk. A Knaiakhotana village 
and trading post of 35 natives in 1880 on 
the w. side of Knik bay, at the head of 
Cook inlet, Alaska. 

Knakatnuk.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 
1884. Knik Station.—Post route map, 1903. 

Knatsomita ( Kndts-o-mV-ta , ‘all crazy 
dogs’). A society of the Ikunuhkahtsi, 
or All Comrades, in the Piegan tribe; it 
is composed of men about 40 years of 
age.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
221, 1892. 

K’nick K’neck. See Kinnikinnick. 

Knik (Eskimo: ‘fire,’ a name given by 
the Eskimo of Kodiak because, having 
no seaworthy boats of their own, they 
signaled for other tribes across the bay to 
send aid). A Knaiakhotana settlement of 
several villages on Knik r., at the head 
of Cook inlet, Alaska. The chief village 
had 46 people in 1880 (Petroff, 10th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 29, 1884); in 1900 the pop¬ 
ulation was 160 in 31 houses. This branch 
of the tribe numbers altogether between 
200 and 300, who obtain their subsistence 
by hunting and trapping and by barter¬ 
ing with the Ahtena, who bring fur skins 
over the divide between Knik and Copper 
rs. every winter and stay weeks or months 
with the Knik, who through this trade 
obtain the clothing, utensils, and even 
luxuries of the whites. Their houses are 
built above ground of logs tightly calked 
with moss and covered with bark (11th 
Census, Alaska, 70,1893). They use the 
birch-bark canoe on the inland rivers, 
but purchase skin bidarkas of the Kenai 
or Nikishka people to fish and travel 
along the coast. 

Kinik.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. 
Kinnick.—Petroff, ibid., 39. K’niq'-a-mut.—Hoff¬ 
man, Kadiak MS., B. A. E., 1882. 

Knives. Cutting tools are indispensable 
to primitive men, and the greatest in¬ 
genuity was exercised by the northern 
tribes in their manufacture. Every ma- 



WOMAN’S SLATE KNIFE (uLu); ESKIMO (1-4). (MURDOCH) 


terial capable of taking and retaining an 
edge was utilized—wood, reed, bone, ant¬ 
ler, shell, stone, and metal. Teeth are 
nature’s cutting tools, and the teeth of 
animals (shark, beaver, etc.) were much 
employed by primitive men, as also were 
sharp bits of stone and splinters of wood 
and bone, the natural edges of which 


were artificially sharpened, and natural 
forms were modified to make them more 
effectual. The uses of the knife are in¬ 
numerable; it served in war and was in¬ 



Obsioian Ceremonial 
Blade, 21 in. long; 
California, (holmes) 



Obsidian Knife with Handle of 
Otter skin, 7 1-4 in. long; 
CALIFORNIA, (mason) 


dispensable in every branch of the arts 
of life, in acquiring raw materials, in pre¬ 
paring them for use, and in shaping 
whatever was made. Knives served also 



Jasper Blade, s 3-4 in. 

LONG; CALIFORNIA. 

(wilson) 



FLINT BLADE WITH BEV¬ 
ELED Edge (1-2); Okla¬ 
homa. (holmes) 



Flint Knife with Beveled 
Edge (1-2); Tennessee 


in symbolism and ceremony, and one of 
the most cherished symbols of rank and 
authority was the great stone knife 
chipped with consummate skill from ob- 












718 


KNOTS 


[b. a. e. 



Woman’s Slate Knife (1-4); Eskimo. 
(Muhdoch) 


sidian or flint. According to Culin the 
stone knife is used among the Pueblos as 
a symbol of divinity, especially of the 
war gods, and is widely used in a healing 
ceremony called the “knife ceremony.” 

Differentiation of 
use combined 
with differences 
in material to give 
variety to the 
blade and its haft- 
ing; the so-called 
ulu, or wqman’s 
knife of the Eski¬ 
mo, employed in 
various culinary 
arts, differs from 
the man’s knife, which is used in carving 
wood and for various other purposes 
(Mason); and the bone snow knife of the 
Arctic regions is a species by itself (Nel¬ 
son). The copper knife is distinct from 
the stone 
knife, and 
the latter 
takes a mul¬ 
titude of 
forms, pass- 
i n g from 
the normal 
types in one 
direction into the club or mace, in 
another into the scraper, and in another 
into the dagger; and it blends with the 
arrowhead and the spearhead so fully 
that no definite line can be drawn be¬ 
tween them save when the complete 



Iron Knife with Wooden Handle (1-6); 
Makah 



Knife of Nephrite (1-6) 
Eskimo, (nelson) 



Knife with Bone han¬ 
dle; Brit. Col. 
(smith) 


haft is in evidence. The flaked knife 
blade of flint is straight like a spearhead 
or is curved like a hook or sickle, and it 
is frequently beveled on one or both 
edges. The ceremonial knife is often 
of large size and great beauty. Certain 


Tennessee flint blades, believed to be of 
this class, though very slender, measure 
upward of 2 ft in length, while the 
beautiful red and black obsidian blades 
of California are hardly less noteworthy. 
Speaking of the latter, Powers says: “I 
have seen several which were 15 in. 



CEREMONIAL KNIFE, LENGTH 24 1-2 IN. ; KWAKIUTL. (boas) 




Copper knife or 
Dagger; Haida. 
(niblack) 


or more in length and about in. wide 
in the widest part. Pieces as large as 
these 'are carried lifted in the hands in 
the dance, wrapped with skin or cloth to 
prevent the rough edges from lacerating 
the hands, blit the smaller ones are 
mounted in wooden handles and glued 
fast. The large ones can not be pur¬ 
chased at any price.” See Implements. 

Two or three tribes of In¬ 
dians, various clans, and some 
towns received 
their names from 
the kn if e , as 
Conshac (‘reed 
knife’), a name 
for the Creeks; 
the town of Kusa 
among the Choc- 
taw, and the 
Ntlakvapamuk of 
Thompson r., 

Brit. Col. Slate Knife with 

Consult Boas wooden han- 
(1) in 6th Rep. Z} (IZ 
B. A. E., 1888, doch) 

(2) in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1895, 1897; Fowke 
in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Goddard in 
Pub. Univ. of Cal., Anthrop. ser., i, 1903; 
Holmes in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1901, 1903; 
Mason (1) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1890, 1891; 
(2) ibid., 1897, 1901; (3) ibid., 1886, 
1889; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 

Nelson in 18th 
Rep. B. A.E., 

1899; Niblack 
in Rep. Nat. 

Mus. 1888, 

1890; Powers 
inCont. N. A. 

Ethnol., iii, 

1877; Rau in 
Smithson. 

Cont., xxn, 

1876; Rust and Kroeber in Am. Anthrop., 
vn, 688, 1905; Thruston, Antiq. of Tertn., 
1897; Wilson in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1897, 
1899. (w. h. h.) 

Knots. The Indians, and especially 
the Eskimo, whose difficulties with un¬ 
fasteninglines in a frozen area made them 
ingenious, tied for various purposes many 


1900; 

1892; 



Iron Carving Knives; Eskimo, (mason 

























BULL. 30] 


KNOU-KOASATI 


719 


kinds of knots and splices in bark, stems, 
roots, sinew thongs, strings, and ropes. 
There were knots and turk’s heads in 
the ends of lines for buttons and toggles 
and for fastening work, loops and run¬ 
ning nooses for bowstrings and tent fas¬ 
tenings, knots for attaching one line to 
another or to some object, the knots in 
netting for fish nets and the webbing in 
snowshoes and rackets, knots for attach¬ 
ing burdens and for packing and cinch¬ 
ing, decorative knots in the dress of both 
sexes, and memorial knots used in cal¬ 
endars and for registering accounts and in 
religion. The bight, 
seen on Yuman car¬ 
rying baskets, was 
universal, and the 
single, square, and 
granny knots and 
the half hitch were 
also quite common. 
In 1680 the Pueblo 
Indians communi¬ 
cated the number of 
days before their 
great uprising 
against the Span¬ 
iards by means of a 
knotted string, and 
some of their de¬ 
scendants still keep personal calendars 
by the same means, but in North America 
the quipu was nowhere so highly devel¬ 
oped as it was in Peru. Boas (Bull. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., xv, 1901) illustrates the 
many splices, hitches, loops, and knots of 
the Eskimo; Murdoch (9th Rep. B. A. E., 
1892) has treated the knots used in nets, 
snowshoes,and sinew-backed bows; Dixon 
(Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, 1905) 
shows the knots of the northern Maidu 
of California; and Mason (Smithson. Rep. 
for 1893) gives details of those generally 
used on bows and arrows. (o. t. m.) 

Knoii ( K’nou', ‘ eagle’). A gens of the 
Potawatomi, q. v.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
167, 1877. 

Knowilamowan. A former Chinookan 
village 25 m. from The Dalles, on Colum¬ 
bia r., Oreg. 

Know-il-a-mow-an. —Lee and Frost, Oregon, 176, 
1844. 

Koagaogit ( Koaga'ogit , ‘wide and rush¬ 
ing waters’). A former Haida town on 
the n. shore of Bearskin bay, Skidegate 
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., 
in possession of the Djahui-gitinai. — 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Koakotsalgi ( koa-k6tchi ‘wildcat,’ algi 
‘people’). A clan of the Creeks. 

Koakotsalgi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 
1884. Ku-wa'-ku-che— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 
1877. . , „ 

Koalcha ( Qoa'ltca ). A Squawmish vil¬ 
lage community at Linn cr., Burrard 
inlet, Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. 
A. A. S., 475, 1900. 


Koalekt ( Koa'lEqt ). A Chehalis village 
at the headwaters of a w. tributary of 
Harrison r., in s. w. British Columbia.— 
Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1891. 

Koanalalis ( Koana'lalis ). The ancestor 
of a Nimkish gens after whom the gens 
was sometimes named.—Boas in Peter- 
manns Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887. 

Koapk (Q’oa'px). One of the Talio 
towns of the Bellacoola at the head of 
South Bentinck arm, coast of British Co¬ 
lumbia. 

K.’oa'pQ.—Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3, 
1891. Q’oa'px.—Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
II, 49, 1898. 

Koas. Mentioned as a tribe residing 
with the Hutsnuwu, Chilkat, and others, 
in Sitka, Alaska (Beardslee in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 105, 46th Cong., 1st sess., 31, 1880). 
It possibly refers to the Kuiu, otherwise 
the name is unidentifiable. 

Koasati. An Upper Creek tribe speak¬ 
ing a dialect almost identical with Ali- 
bamu and evidently nothing more than 
a large division of that people. The 
name appears to contain the word for 
‘cane’ or ‘reed,’ and Gatschet has sug¬ 
gested that it may signify ‘ white cane.’ 
During the middle and latter part of the 
18th century the Koasati lived, appa¬ 
rently in one principal village, on the 
right bank of Alabama r., 3 m. below the 
confluence of the Coosa and Tallapoosa, 
where the modern town of Coosada, Ala., 
perpetuates their name; but soon after w. 
Florida was ceded to Great Britain, in 1763, 
“two villages of Koasati” moved over to 
the Tombigbee and settled below the 
mouth of Sukenatcha cr. Romans and 
other writers always mention two settle¬ 
ments here, Sukta-loosa and Occhoy or 
Hychoy, the latter being evidently either 
Koasati or Alibamu. The Witumka Ali- 
bamu moved with them and established 
themselves lower down. Later the Koa¬ 
sati descended the river to a point a few 
miles above the junction of the Tombig¬ 
bee and the Alabama, but, together with 
their Alibamu associates, they soon re¬ 
turned to their ancient seats on the upper 
A labama. A ‘ ‘ Coosawda ’ ’ village existed 
on Tennessee r., near the site of Langston, 
Jackson co., Ala., in the early part of the 
19th century, but it is uncertain whether 
its occupants were true Koasati. In 1799 
Hawkins stated that part of the Koasati 
had recently crossed the Mississippi, and 
Sibley in 1805 informs us that these 
first settled on Bayou Chicot but 4 years 
later moved over to the e. bank of Sabine 
r., 80 m. s. of Natchitoches, La. Thence 
they spread over much of e. Texas as far 
as Trinity r., w 7 hile a portion, or perhaps 
some of those w 7 ho had remained in Ala¬ 
bama, obtained permission fromthe Caddo 
to settle on Red r. Schermerhorn (Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., ii, 26, 1814) states 



Knots of the Central Eskimo. 
(Boas) 


















720 


KOASATI-KOEKSOTENOK 


[B. a. e. 


that in 1812 the Koasati on Sabine r. 
numbered 600, and in 1820 Morse gave 350 
on Bed r., 50 on the Neches, 40 m. above 
its month, and 240 on the Trinity, 40 to 
50 m. above its mouth. Bollaert (1850) 
estimated the number of warriors belong¬ 
ing to the Koasati on the lower Trinity 
as 500, in 2 villages, Colete and Batista. 
In 1870 50 were in Polk co., Tex., and 
100 near Opelousas, La. They were 
honest, industrious, and peaceful, and 
still dressed in the Indian manner. 
Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 1891) says 
that in 1886 there were 4 families of 
Koasati, of about 25 individuals, near the 
town of Shepherd, San Jacinto co., Tex. 
As part of the true Alibamu were in this 
same region it is not improbable that 
some of them have been included in the 
above enumerations. Those of the Koa¬ 
sati who stayed in their original seats 
and subsequently moved to Indian Ter¬ 
ritory also remained near the Alibamu 
for the greater part, although they are 
found in several places in the Creek 
Nation, Okla. Two towns in the Creek 
Nation are named after them. (j. r. s. ) 
Aquas-saw-tee.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 268, 
1851. Coashatay. —Long, Exped. to Rocky Mts., II, 
810, 1823. Coashatta.— Pike, Travels, map of La., 
1811. Coassattis. —Trumbull in Johnson’s Cyclo¬ 
paedia, II, 1156, 1877. Cochatties. —Le Branche 
(1839) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 14, 32d Cong., 2d sess., 27, 
1853. Colchattas. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
509,1878. Conchaques. —Iberville (1702) in Margry, 
D6c., IV, 594, 1880. Conchatas. —Brackenridge, 
Views of La., 82, 1815. Conchatez. —De l’Isle, map 
(ca. 1710) in Winsor, Hist. Am., II, 294-295, 1886. 
Conchati. —d’Anville’s map in Hamilton, Colonial 
Mobile, 158, 1897. Conchattas. —Sibley, Hist. 
Sketches, 81,1806. Conchttas. —Lewis and Clark, 
Journal, 154, 1840. Conshacs. —Romans, Fla., 90, 
1775. Conshaes.— Romans misquoted by Hawkins 
(1799),Sketch, 15,1848. Conshattas.— Brown,West. 
Gaz., 152,1817. Coosadas. —Romans, Fla., 1 ,332,1775. 
Coosadis. —Ibid.,90. Coosauda. —Bartram,Travels, 
461, 1791 (town of Tallapoosa; speak the Stincard 
language). Coo-sau-dee.— Hawkins(1779),Sketch, 
35, 1848. Coosawda.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., II, 104, 
1851. Coosawda’s. —Campbell (1836) in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. Coosaw- 
der. —Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 253, 
1836. Cooshates. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 33, 1850. 
Cooshatties. —Whiteside in Ind. Aff. Rep., 327,1870. 
Coosidas. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 115, 1855. 
Coowarsartdas. —Woodward, Remin., 13, 1859. 

Coowersortda. —Ibid.,36. Coshattas. —Morse, Rep. 
to Sec. War, 257, 1822. Coshattees. —Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, III, 585, 1853. Couchates. —Berquin 
Duvallon, Travels, 97, 1806. Cousatee. —Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, 5,1776 (town on w. bank of Alabama 
r.). Cousoudee.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 163,1837. 
Coussac.— Hutchins, Hist. Narr., 83,1784 (probably 
identical). Coussati.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., i, 676, 
1786. Coussehate. —Milfort, MiSmoire, 265, 1802. 
Cunhates.— Martin, Hist. La., II, 206,1827. Cusha- 
tees. —Maillard, Hist. Texas, 252, 1842. Cush-eh- 
tah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 309,1851. Cussa- 
dies.— Weatherford (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. 
Aff., I, 385, 1832. Cusshetaes. —Coxe, Carolana, 23, 
1741. Cutchates. —Doc. of 1828 in Soc. Geog. Mex., 
267,1870 (live on e. bank of Trinidad [Trinity] r.). 
Cuzadans.— Rafinesque, introd. Marshall, ky., I, 
24, 1824. Koo a sah te.— Adair, Am. Ind., 169,1775. 
Ko-sa-te'ha»-ya. —Dorsey, Biloxi MS. Diet., B.A.E., 
1892 (Biloxi name). Quaasada. —U. S. Ind. Treat. 
(1827), 420, 1837. Qua-saw-das.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 
279, 1846 (on Canadian r., Ind. Ter). Quesadas. — 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.., II, 97, 1836. 
Queseda.— Schenmerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. 
Coll., 2d s., II, 18, 1814. Quezedans.— Rafinesque, 


introd., Marshall, Ky., I, 24,1824. Shati. —Popu¬ 
lar abbreviation of Koasati in Texas. 

Koasati. Two towns of the Creek Na¬ 
tion, both in the s. part of their territory 
near Canadian r., one a few miles w. of 
Eufaula, the other w. of Hilabi, Okla. 

Koassati.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185,1888. 

Koatlna (Q’ oa'ina ). A Bellacoola vil¬ 
lage on a bay of the same name at the s. 
entrance of Bentinck arm, coast of British 
Columbia. 

K oa'tlna.—Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3, 
1891. Q’oa'i.na.—Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., II, 48,1898. 

Kocheyali. A former Yokuts tribe that 
perhaps lived on Kings r., Cal.—A. L. 
Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. See Mariposan 
Family. 

Kochinish-yaka. The Yellow-corn clan 
of the Keresan pueblos of Acoma and 
Laguna, N. Mex. See Yaka. 

Kochinish-yaka-hano 0 * 1 .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., 
ix,349,1896(Lagunaform: ydka=‘C 0 Tn’; hanoch= 
‘people’). K6chinishyaka-hanoq ch .—Ibid. (Acoma 
form). 

Kochkok. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village 
on the right bank of Yukon r., Alaska, 
near the Kuskokwim portage. 

Kochkogamute.—Raymond (1869) quoted by Ba¬ 
ker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kokok. —Baker, 
ibid. 

Kodiak. A town on St Paul's harbor, 
at the e. end of Kodiak id., Alaska, es¬ 
tablished among the Eskimo by the Rus¬ 
sians in 1789 as a center of the fur trade. 
Pop. 288 in 1880, 495 in 1890, 341 in 1900. 

Kadiak.—Bruce, Alaska, map, 1885. Pavlovsky 
gavan.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 75, 1893 (Rus¬ 
sian: ‘Paul’s harbor’; natives still call it Gavan, 
‘the harbor’). Saint Paul.—Petroff, Rep. on 
Alaska, 28, 1884. 

Kodlimarn ( Qodlimam). A summer set¬ 
tlement of the Eskimo of the plateau of 
Nugumiut, on the e. entrance to Frobisher 
bay, Baffin land.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. 
E., map, 1888. 

Koeats. Given as a Ute band or tribe in 
n. central Nevada, but evidently Paviot- 
so.—Powell in H. R. Ex. Doc. 86, 43d 
Cong., 1st sess., 1, 1874. 

Koeentwakah. - See Cornplanter. 
Koekoaainok ( Qoe'goaainox, 1 people 

from the river Koais’). A gens of the 
Tenaktak, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 331, 1897. 

Koe’koi(K’dFkdi). ASquawmishvillage 
community on the w. side of Howesd., 
Brit. Col.—Ilill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. 
S., 474, 1900. 

Koeksotenok (‘people of the other side’). 
A Kwakiutl tribe on Gilford id., Brit. 
Col. The gentes are Naknahula, Memog- 
gyins, Gyigyilkam,andNenelpae. In 1885 
they lived with the Mamalelekala in a 
town called Memkumlis. Kwakwakas 
was probably a former village. Pop. 50 
in 1885, the last time the name appears. 
Kwe'ksot’enoq.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 54, 1890. Kwick-so-te-no. — Can. Ind. Aff., 
189,1884. Kwiksot’enoq. —Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. 
Soc., 227,1887. Kwik'-so-tino. —Dawson in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. II, 74. Qoe'xsdt’enox.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 330,1897. Quick- 


BULL. 30] 


KOETAS-KOIAUM 


721 


sul-i-nut.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 
Qwe'qu sot!e'nox u .—Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., v, pt. 1,156,1902. 

Koetas ( Qloe'tas , ‘ earth-eaters’). A 
family of the Raven clan belonging to the 
Kaigani or Alaskan branch of Haida. 
According to the southern Haida they 
derived their name from the fact that 
in a legendary Haida town whence all 
the Ravens came (see Tadji-lanas) they 
used to live near the trails. The Kai¬ 
gani themselves, however, say that when 
they first settled at Hlgan, on the w. 
coast of Graham id., they were called, 
from the town, Hlun-staa-lanas (£Lm 
sta?a la'nas, ‘ holding-up-the-fin-town- 
people ’). Afterward they began to cook 
and eat a plant called hlkunit ( Wu'nit) 
which grows under the salmon-berry 
bushes. Some of them then joked at 
this, saying, “ We are even eating earth,” 
hence the name Koetas. On the Alaska 
mainland their town was Sukkwan. 
There were 5 subdivisions: Chats-hadai, 
Huadjinaas-hadai, Nakalas-hadai, Hlka- 
onedis, and Naden-hadai. (j. n. s. ) 

K*’oe'tas.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 22, 
1898. Qloe'tas.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 272, 1905. 

Koetenok (Q’ oe'tenox, ‘raven’). A clan 
of the Bellabella, a Kwakiutl tribe.— 
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 328,1897. 

Koga ( Qd'ga ). A small Haida town 
formerly on McKay harbor, Cumshewa 
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., 
which was occupied by a family of the 
same name, of low social rank, who after¬ 
ward moved to Skedans.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 279, 1905. 

Kogahl-lanas ( Qd'gal la'nas , ‘ people of 
the town of Koga’).’ A small division of 
the Kagials-kegawai family group of the 
Haida. They were of low social rank. 
Their town, called Koga, once stood in 
McKay harbor, and they are said to have 
been won in a gambling contest by the 
Kagials-kegawai.—S wanton, Cont. Haida, 
269, 1905. 

Kogals-kun ( Kloga'ls Jcun , ‘sand-spit 
point ’). A former Haida town on Masset 
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., 
occupied by the Aostlan-lnagai.—Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Kogangas ( Qoga'nas, ‘ sea-otters ’). An 
extinct family group belonging to the 
Raven clan of the Haida. Their towns 
stood near the modern town of Skidegate, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. (j. R. s.) 

Koga'ngas.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 24, 1898. Qoga'nas.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
269, 1905. 

Kogiung. A Kiatagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage at the mouth of Kvichak r., Bristol 
bay, Alaska; pop. 29 in 1880, 133 in 1890, 
533 in 1900. 

Koggiung.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 
1884. Kogiung.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kogluk. A Kaviagmiut village at C. 
Nome, Alaska.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 
162, 1893. 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-46 


Koguethagechton. See White-eyes. 

Kogui ( Kogiii } ‘elks’). A tribal divi¬ 
sion of the Kiowa.—Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1079, 1896. 

Kohamutkikatska (Creek: k6ha ‘cane’, 
mtitki ‘ cut off ’, kdtska ‘ broken ’). A for¬ 
mer upper Creek town with 123 families 
in 1832. Location unknown. 
Koho-mats-ka-catch-ka.—Campbell (1836) in H.R. 
Doc. 274,25th Cong., 2d sess., 20,1838. Ko ho mut- 
ki garts kar.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 
1864. Ko-ho-muts-ka-catch-ka.—Crawford (1836) 
in H.R. Ex. Doc. 274, op. cit., 24. Ko-ho-muts-ki- 
gar.— H. R. Ex. Doc.276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 162, 

1836. Kohomutskigartokar.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 
24th Cong., 1st sess., 299, 1836. 

Kohani. A subtribe or band of the 
Karankawa. They are mentioned as late 
as 1824 in connection with the Coaques, 
from which it seems probable that they 
were one of the bands living near Colo¬ 
rado r., Texas. They may be identical 
with the Quevenes of Cabeza de Vaca. 
Cobanes.—Joutel quoted by Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 
1723. Cohannies.—Texas Hist. Ass. Quar., vi, 250, 
1903. Coxanes.—Solis (1768) cited by H. E. Bolton, 
inf n, 1906. Cujanes, Ripperd& (1777), ibid. Cu- 
janos.—Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 
276,1850. Cuyanes.—Bollaert quoted by Gatschet, 
Karankawa Inds., 35, 1891. Kouans.—Joutel, 
Jour. Voy., 90,1719. Quevenes.—Cabeza de Vaca 
(1555), Smith trans., 137,1871 (possibly identical). 
Quianes.—Ripperd4 (1777) cited by H.E.Bolton, 
inf’n, 1906. Quoan.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, 
D6c., Ill, 288, 1878. 

Kohasaya (Ko-ha-say-a). A former 
pueblo of the Sia, n. of the present Sia 
pueblo, N. Mex.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 196, 1892. See Kakan- 
atzatia. 

Kohashti (‘starting place of canoes’). 
A Klamath settlement, of 5 or 6 houses in 
1890, at the N. e. end of Upper Klamath 
lake, Oreg., 3 m. n. of Yaaga; once the 
site of the Klamath Indian agency. 
Kohashti.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ir, 
pt. i, xxx, 1890. Ko-was-ta.—Applegate in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 89,1866. Kuhuashti.—Gatschet, op. cit. 
Skohuashki. —Ibid. 

Kohatsoath. A sept of the Toquart, a 
Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Canada, 32, 1890. 

Kohhokking (‘at the land of pines.’— 
Hewitt). A Delaware village in 1758 near 
“Painted Post,” in Steuben co., N. Y., or 
Elmira, formerly called Painted Post, in 
Chemung co., N. Y. See Alden (1834) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 147, 

1837. 

Kohltiene’s Village. The summer camp 
of a Stikine chief named KaltPn on Sti- 
kine r., Alaska; 28 people were there in 
1880.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32, 
1884. 

Koi. A former Porno village on Lower 
Lake id., Lake co., Cal. The island was 
known to the Indians by the same name. 
See Makhelchel. (s. a. b.) 

Koi (‘panther’). A Chickasaw phratry. 
Koa.—Gibbs quoted by Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, 96,1884. Xoi.—Copeland quoted by Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. 

Koiaum (‘to pick berries 5 ’). A village 


722 


KOIKAHTENOK-KOKOP 


[B. a. X. 


of the Ntlakyapamuk on the e. side of 
Fraser r., 25 m. above Yale, Brit. Col. 

Boston Bar. —Name given by whites. Koia'um. — 
Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 169, 1900. 
Quiyone.— Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872 
(probably identical). 

Koikahtenok ( QoVk'cixtendx, ‘whale peo¬ 
ple’) . A clan of the Wikeno, a Kwakiutl 
tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 
328, 1897. 

Koikoi ( Xoe'xoe, a supernatural being, 
sometimes described as living in ponds; 
used as a mask by the Lillooet, many 
coastSalish, and thesouthern Kwakiutl.— 
Boas). A Squawmish village community 
on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col. 

QoiQoi.— Hill-Tont in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 
Xoe'xoe. —Boas, inf’n, 1905. 

Koinchush (‘wild cat’). A Chickasaw 
clan of the Koi phratry. 

Ko-in-chush.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163,1877. Ko-in- 
tchush.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96, 1884. 

Koinisun ( KoinYsun ). An Ita Eskimo 
settlement on Inglefield gulf, n. Green¬ 
land.—Stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 9, 
map, 1902. 

Koiskana (from koes, or kwo'es , a bush 
the bark of which is used for making 
twine; some say it is a Stuwigh or Atha¬ 
pascan name, but this seems doubtful). 
A village of the Nicola band of Ntlakya¬ 
pamuk near Nicolar., 29 m. above Spences 
Bridge, Brit. Col.; pop. 52 in 1901, the 
last time the name appears. 

Koaskuna/. —Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. 
Can., 4,1899. Koiskana'. —Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., II, 174, 1900. Kuinskanaht. —Can. Ind. 
Aff. for 1892,313. Kwois-kun-a'. —Dawson in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. n, 44. Pitit Creek.— 
Teit, op. cit. (name given by whites). Qais- 
kana', —Teit, op. cit. Quinskanaht. —Can. Ind. 
Aff. for 1898, 419. Quinskanht. —Ibid, for 1901,166. 
Q,uis-kan-aht. —Ibid, for 1886, 232. Quss-kan-aht. — 
Ibid, for 1883, 191. 

Koiyo ( K6i-yo ). A former Chumashan 
village at Canada del Coyote, Ventura 
co., Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Koj ej e wininewug (Kuch Iclilvjlrii riivm g; 
from kuchlchlw , referring to the straits and 
bends of the rivers and lakes on which 
they resided; iriiritwug, ‘people’). A 
division of the Chippewa formerly living 
on Rainv lake and river on the n. bound¬ 
ary of Minnesota and in the adjacent part 
of British America. Cf. Tecamamiouen. 

Algonquins of Rainy Lake. —Lewis and Clark, 
Travels, 55, 1806. Kocheche Wenenewak. —Long, 
Exped. St Peter’s R., ii, 153, 1824. Ko-je-je-win- 
in-e-wug.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
V, 84, 1885. Kotchitchi-wininiwak. — Gatschet, 

Ojibwa MS., B. A. E.,1882. Kutcitciwininiwag, — 
Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Lac la Pluie Indians. — 
Hind, Red River Exped., I, 82, 1860. Rainy-lake 
Indians.— Schoolcraft (1838) in H. R. Doc. 107, 25th 
Cong., 3d sess., 9, 1839. 

Kokaia ( Qo-Qai'd, ‘maggot-fly,’ because 
there are many found there in summer). 
An abandoned Chilliwack village on 
Chilliwack r., s. Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in 
Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 4, 1902. 

Kokaitk. A division of the Bellabella, 
living on n. Millbank sd. 

K’o'kaitq.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
52, 1890. Kok-wai-y-toch.— Kane, Wand, in N. 
Am., app., 1859. Kook-wai-wai-toh. —Tolmie and 


Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 117 b, 1884. Koqueigh- 
tuk. —Brit. Col. map, 1872. Q,’o'qa-itx. —Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895,328, 1897. 

Kokaman. Mentioned by writers be¬ 
tween 1851 and 1855 as a Karok village 
on Klamath r., Humboldt co., Cal. In 
1851 the chief’s name was said to be Pa- 
namonee, but this is probably an error, 
as Panamenik is the Karok village at 
Orleans. 

Coc-co-man.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,32d 
Cong.,spec.sess., 161,1853 (upper Klamath tribe). 
Cock-o-mans.— Ibid., 215 (given as Hupa band). 
Coc-ko-nan.— Ibid., 194 (a Patesick band). Cok-ka- 
mans. —Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1856. 

Kokhittan (‘box-house people’). A 
Tlingit social group, forming a subdivi¬ 
sion of the Kagwantan, q. v. 

Kok hit.tan.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Kukettan.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 113, 1885. Ku- 
kittan.— Ibid. 

Koknas-hadai ( K’dk'-nas:had’a'i, ‘snow- 
owl house people ’). Given by Boas (5th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 27, 1889) as a 
subdivision of the Yaku-lanas, a family of 
the Raven clan of the Alaskan Haida, but 
in reality it is only a house name belong¬ 
ing to that family group. (j. r. s. ) 

Koko. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village on 
the n. bank of the Yukon, Alaska, below' 
Ikogmiut. 

Kochkomut. —Post route map, 1903. Koko. —Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kokoaeuk ( Kokoae'uk •). A village of the 
Matsqui tribe of Cowichan at the s. w. 
point of Sumass lake, near Fraser r., Brit. 
Col.—Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 
1894. 

Kokob. The Burrow r ing-owl clan of the 
Hopi of Oraibi, Arizona. 

Kokob. —Voth in Field Columb. Mus. Pub., no. 55, 
13, 1901. Kokop. —Stephen quoted by Mindeleff 
in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 105,1891 (cf. Kokop , the Fire¬ 
wood clan). 

Kokoheba ( Ko-ko-he'-bd ). The name of 
a village which has come to be applied to 
an almost extinct Mono tribe in Burr val¬ 
ley, with one village over the divide, look¬ 
ing into the valley of Sycamore cr., n. of 
Kings r., Cal.—Merriam in Science, xix, 
916, June 17, 1904. 

Kokoiap ( K’okoiap', 1 place of strawber¬ 
ries ’). A village of the Ntlakyapamuk on 
Fraser r., above Siska, Brit/Col.—Hill- 
Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899. 

Kokolik. A Kukpaurungmiut Eskimo 
village at Pt Lay, Arctic coast, Alaska, 
with 30 inhabitants in 1880. 

Kokomo (‘young grandmother’). A 
Miami village, named after a chief, that 
stood on the site of the present Kokomo, 
Ind. 

Ko-ko-mah village.— Hough, map in Ind. Geol. 

Rep., 1883. 

Kokop. The Firewood phratry of the 
Hopi, comprising the Kokop (Firewood), 
Ishauu (Coyote), Kwewu (Wolf), Sik- 
yataiyo (Yellow Fox), Letaiyo (Gray 
Fox), Zrohona (small mammal, sp.incog. ), 
Masi (Masauuh, a supernatural being), 
Tuvou (Pinon), Hoko (Juniper), Awata 
(Bow/, Sikvachi (small yellow' bird), and 
Tuvuchi (small red bird) clans. Accord- 


BULL. 30] 


KOKOP-KOMACHO 


723 


ing to tradition they came from the Rio 
Grande, building the pueblo of Sikyatki, 
which they occupied until its destruction 
in late prehistoric times. 

Ko'-kop nyu-mu.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 
403,1894 (ny#-m#=‘phratry ’). 

Kokop. The Firewood clan of the Hopi, 
the ancestors of whom came from Jemez 
ueblo, New Mexico. 

okop winwu. —Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 
1900 {unnivti = ‘clan ’). Ko-kop-wiin-wu. —Fewkes 
in Am. Anthrop., vii, 403, 1894. Ku-ga— Bourke, 
Snake Dance, 117,1884 (given doubtfully). 

Kokopki (Hopi: ‘house of the Firewood 
people ’). A large, ancient, ruined pueblo, 
attributed by the Hopi to the Firewood 
clan, originally a Jemez people; situated 
on a low mesa near Maupin’s store, at 
Mormon John’s spring, in Jeditoh valley, 
2j m. e. of Ream’s Canyon school, Tu- 
sayan, n. e. Arizona. See Mindeleff in 
8th Rep. B. A. E., 590, 1898; Hough in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 333 et. seq., 1903. 

Cottonwood ruin.— Hough, op. cit. (name given 
locally by whites). Delcalsacat. —Ibid, (‘wild 
gourd’: Navahoname). Horn House.— Mindeleff, 
op. cit. Kokopki. —Fewkes, inf’n, 1906 (ki = 
‘house’). Kokopnyama. —Hough, op. cit. (“name 
refers to the clans which lived here and is prob¬ 
ably not the ancient designation of the village”). 

Kokoskeeg. An unidentified tribe 
which, according to Tanner (Narrative, 
316, 1830), was known to the Ottawa and 
was so called by them. 

Koksilah. A Cowichan tribe in Cowi- 
tchin valley, e. coast of Vancouver id., 
opposite Admiral id.; pop. 12 in 1904. 

Cokesilah. —Can. Ind. Aff., lxi, 1877. Kokesai- 
lah. —Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. 
Koksilah. —Can. Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 164,1901. Kulku- 
isaila. —Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Koksoagmiut (‘people of Big river’). 
A subtribe of the Sukinimiut Eskimo liv¬ 
ing on Koksoak (Big) r., n. Labrador. 
They numbered fewer than 30 individuals 
in 1893. 

Koakramint.— Boas in Am. Antiq., 40, 1888 (mis¬ 
print) . Koksoagmyut. —Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. 
E., 176, 1894. Koksoak Innuit. —Ibid., 179. Kok¬ 
soak river people. —Ibid. Kouksoarmiut. —Boas in 
6th Rep. B. A. E., 463, 470, 1888. 

Kok'yan. The Spider clan of the Hopi. 
Kohkang. —Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Cere¬ 
mony, 282, 1903. Kohkannamu.— Dorsey and Voth, 
Oraibi Soyal, 9,1901. Ko'-kyan-a— Stephen in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 38, 1891. Kokyan winwu.— Fewkes 
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584,1900. Ko'-kyun-iih wiiii- 
wii. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404,1894. 

Kolelakom ( Qdle'laQdm ). A Squawmish 
village community on Bowen id., Howe 
sd., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit A. 
A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kolmakof. A Moravian mission founded 
in 1885 among the Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
on Kuskokwim r., Alaska, 200 m. from its 
mouth. It is on the site of a Russian 
redoubt and trading post, first established 
in 1832 by Ivan Simonson Lukeen, after 
whom it was named for a time. In 1841 
it was partially destroyed by the Indians 
with fire, whereupon it was rebuilt by 
Alexander Kolmakof and took his name. 
The people are mixed Eskimo and Ath¬ 
apascan. See Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
1902. 


Kolmakof Redoubt.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. Kolmakovsky.—Hallock in Nat. Geog. 
Mag., ix, 86, 1898. 

Kolok. A former Chumashan village 
at the old mill in Carpinteria, e. of Santa 
Barbara, Cal. 

K’-a'-lak.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Koloma. A division of the Nishinam, 
at Coloma, between American r. and the 
s. fork of Yuba r., in Eldorado co., Cai. 
Colomas.—Powers in Overland Mo., xn, 21,1874. 
Ko-lo'-ma.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 
315, 1877. 

Koltsiowotl ( K’oltsVowotl ). A division 
of the Nanaimo on the e. coast of Van¬ 
couver id.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 32, 1889. 

Koluschan Family. A linguistic family 
embracing the Tlingit (q. v. ). The name 
is said by Dali to be derived from Russian 
kalushka , ‘a little trough,’ but by others 
from the Aleut word kaluga, signifying 
‘a dish,’ the allusion being to the concave 
dish-shaped labrets worn by the Tlingit 
women. 

xHaidah. —Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soe., xi, 
219, 1841 (same as his Northern). — Kaloshians.— 
Dali in Proc. Am. A. A. S., 375, 1885 (gives tribes 
and population). =Klen-e-kate.— Kane, Wander¬ 
ings of an Artist, app., 1859 (a census of N. W. 
coast tribes classified by language). =Klen-ee- 
kate.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489,1855. <Ko- 
looch. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Bond., ii, 
31-50, 1846 (tends to merge Kolooch into Esqui¬ 
maux); Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 
163, 1848 (compared with Eskimo language); 
Latham, Opuscula, 259, 276, 1860. =Koloschen.— 
Berghaus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17,1848; ibid., 
1852; Buschmann Spuren der aztek. Sprache 680, 
1859; Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. 
<Koluch. —Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 294, 1850 
(more likely forms a subdivision of Eskimo than 
a separate class; includes Kenay of Cook inlet, 
Atna of Copper r., Koltshani, Ugalents, Sitkans, 
Tungaas, Inkhuluklait, Magimut, Inkalit; Di- 
gothi and Nehanni are classed as a “doubtful 
Koluches”). =Koluschan.— Powell in 7th Rep. 
B. A. E., 85,1891. =Koluschen. —Gallatin in Trans, 
and Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 14, 1836 (islands 
and adjacentcoast from 60° to 55° N. lat.). =Ko- 
luschians. —Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 433, 
1847 (follows Gallatin); Scouler (1846) in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 231, 1848. =Kolush.— 
Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 401,1862 (mere men¬ 
tion of family with short vocabulary). =Kouli- 
schen.— Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq. 
Soc., ii, 306,1836; Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. 
Soc., ii, pt. 1, c, 77,1848 (Koulischen and Sitka lan¬ 
guages); Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 
402,1853 (Sitka, bet. 52° and 59° lat.). x Northern. — 
Scoulerin Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 218,1841 
(includes Koloshes and Tun Ghasse). =Thlin- 
keet.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and 
So. Am., app., 460, 462, 1878 (from Mt St Elias to 
Nass r.; includes Ugalenzes, Yakutats, Chilkats, 
Hoodnids, Hoodsinoos, Takoos, Auks, Kakas, 
Stikines, Eeliknffs, Tungass, Sitkas); Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, ill, 562, 579,1882. =Thlinkets.— Dali in 
Proc. Am. A. A. S., xviii, 268, 269, 1869 (divided 
into Sitka-kwan, Stahkin-kwan, “Yakutats”). 
= Thlinkit. —Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 
14,1884 (vocab. of Skutkwan sept; also map show¬ 
ing distribution of family); Berghaus, Physik. 
Atlas, map 72,1887. =Thlinkithen. —Holmberg in 
Finland Soc., 284,1856, fide Buschmann, 676, 1859. 
—T’linkets.— Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 36, 
1877 (divided into Yftk'utats, Chilkaht'kwan, 
Sitka-kwan, Stakhin'-kwan, Kygah'ni). =Tlin- 
kit.— Dali in Proc. Am..A. A. S., 375, 1885 (enu¬ 
merates tribes and gives population). 

Komacho ( Ko-ma'-cho ). A name ap¬ 
plied by Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
hi, 172, 1877) to the Pomo living in 


724 


KOMAROF-KONGTALYUI 


[b. a. e. 


Rancheria and Anderson valleys, Mendo¬ 
cino co., Cal., and said by him to have 
been derived from the name of their cap¬ 
tain. The people living in these two val¬ 
leys belonged to two different dialectic 
groups and in aboriginal times had no par¬ 
ticular common interests. The connec¬ 
tion of the two is probably entirely sub¬ 
sequent to white settlement, (s. a. b. ) 

Komarof. A Chnagmiut village at the 
n. mouth of Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 13 
in 1880.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
map, 1884. 

Komarof.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 
Komarov Odinotchka. —Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 57, 
1880 ( = ‘ Ivomaroff’s trading post’). 

Komenok (‘wealthy people’). An ex¬ 
tinct sept of the Lekwiltok, a Kwakiutl 
tribe. 

K’o'm’enoq.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
55, 1890. Q,Vm’en6x.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 
1895, 332, 1897. 

Komertkewotche (derived in part from 
Komert, the Pima name of the Sierra Es¬ 
trella). A Pima settlement on the Rio 
Gila., s. Ariz.—ten Kate quoted by Gat- 
schet, MS., B. A. E., xx, 199, 1888. 

Komkonatko (‘head water’, or ‘head 
lake’). An Okinagan village 21 m. 
from the town of Kwilchana on Nicola 
lake, Brit. Col. 

Fish Lake. —Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., II, 
174, 1900 (name given by whites). Komko- 
na'tko.— Ibid. 

Komkutis (Q’o'mqiitis). A Bellacoola 
village on the s. side of Bellacoola r., 
Brit. Col., near its mouth. It was one of 
the eight villages called Nuhalk. 

K-omotEs. —Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3. 
1898. Kougotis.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 147, 1862. 
QVmqutis. —Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
ii, 49, 1898. 

Komkyutis (‘ the rich side ’). A sept of 
the Kwakiutl proper, living at Ft Rupert, 
Brit. Col., and said to count 70 warriors in 
1866. Boas in 1890 called them a gens of 
the AValaskwakiutl; in 1895 a sept of the 
tribe. 

Cum-que-kis.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 
Komiu'tis. —Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 131,1887. 
K-’o'mkyutis.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W.Tribes Can., 
54, 1890. Kum-cutes.— Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., I, 
165, 1866. Kumkewtis. —Brit. Col. map, 1872. Lo'- 
kulli'la.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,131,1887. 
Q,’o'mk utis. —Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 330, 
1897. 

Komkyutis. A gens of the Goasila, q. v. 

Komoyue (‘the rich ones ’). A division 
of the true Kwakiutl living at Ft Rupert, 
near the n. end of Vancouver id. They 
are more often known by the war name 
Kueha (‘slayers ’). The gentes are Gyig- 
yilkam, Haailakyemae, Ilaanatlenok, Ku- 
kwakum, and Yaaihakemae. Pop. 42 in 
1901, 25 in 1904. 

Kueh’a.— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 227,1887 
(‘murderers’). Kue'qa.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 55, 1890. Kue'xa. —Boas in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. for 1895, 330, 1897(war name: ‘the murder¬ 
ers’). Kuicha.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 
131,1887. Kwe-ah-kah.— Can* Ind. Aff., 189, 1884. 
Kwi-ah-kah. —Ibid., 364, 1897. Q’o'moyue. —Boas 
in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 330, 1897. Qua-kars.— 
Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., I, 165, 1866. Queackar.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 143, 1879. Quee ha Qna colt. — 


Work quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 
1855. Ruee-ha-qua-coll. —Work (1836-41) in Kane, 
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859 ( = Kueha + Kwa¬ 
kiutl). 

Komoyue. A gens of the Kueha division 
of the Lekwiltok. They live with the 
Wi weakam at the village of Tatapowis, on 
Hoskyn inlet, Brit. Col. Pop. 32 in 1887, 
the last time they were separately enu- 
m Grated 

Ah-mah-oo. —Can. Ind. Aff. 1887, 309, 1888. K'’o- 
moyue.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 55, 
1890. 0,’6'moyue.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 
331, 1897. 

Komps ( Komps ). ASquawmish village 
community on the right bank of Squaw- 
mislit r., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kona ( Qond) . A former Tlingit town in 
the Sitka country, Alaska. (j. it. s.) 

Kona-kegawai ( Q!d'na qe'gawa-i , ‘ those 
born at Skedans ’). One of the most im¬ 
portant families of the Eagle clan of the 
Haida, part of whom lived at Skedans, 
while the remainder resided at Kloo, 
which was owned by their chief. The 
Kona-kegawai, Djiguaahl-lanas, Stawas- 
haidagai, and Kaiahl-lanas claimed de¬ 
scent from one woman. (j. r. s. ) 

K ’unak e'owai. — Boas in 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 25, 1898. 0,15'na qe'gawa-i.—Swan ton, Cont. 
Haida, 272, 1905. 

Kondiaronk. See Adario. 

Konekonep. An Okinagan band for¬ 
merly living on a creek known to the In¬ 
dians by the same name, in Washington. 

Kone-Konep.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 445, 1854. 
Konekonl’p.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep.,i, 412,1855. 

Konekotay. A division of the Delawares, 
formerly in New Jersey.—De Laet ( ca . 
1633) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., i, 
303, 1841. 

Kongiganak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village near the entrance to Kuskokwim 
bay, Alaska; pop. 175 in 1880. 

Kongiganagamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
16, 1884. Konigunugumut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E.,map, 1899. 

Kongik, A Malemiut Eskimo village on 
Buckland or Konguk r., Seward penin., 
Alaska; pop. 90 in 1880, 54 in 1890. 

Kangoot.— Kelly, A ret. Eskimos, 15,1890. Kengug- 
miut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Kon- 
gigamute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884. 
Kongik.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Konglo ( Kong'-lo ). The Corn clan of 
the Tewa of Hano pueblo, n. e. Ariz. 
They numbered 23 individuals in 1893. 
See Kun. 

Ka'-ai.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891 
(Hopiname). Ko'«-lo.— Ibid. (Tewa name). Ku- 
lo n -to-wa. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop.,vn, 166, 1894. 
Nata' n .— Stephen, op. cit. (Navaho name). 

Kongtalyui ( Kontd'lyui, ‘black boys’; 
sometimes also called Shidiyui, ‘Sindi’s 
children’). A tribal division of the 
Kiowa, now practically extinct, whose 
members were said to be of darker color 
than the rest of the tribe, which, if true, 
might indicate foreign origin. Sindi is 
the great mythic hero of the Kiowa.— 
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1079,1896. 


BULL. 30] 


KONI-KOPAGMIUT 


725 


Koni. A division of the Miwok s. of 
Cosumnes r., in Amador and Eldorado 
cos., Cal. 

Cawnees. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 456, 1874. 
Ka'-ni.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 349, 
1877. Koni.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. 

Konkapot. A Mahican sachem who, in 
1724, joined in the sale of the territory 
comprising the “upper and lower Housa- 
tonic townships”; his captain’s commis¬ 
sion was given him by Gov. Belcher in 
1734, and he succeeded to the chieftaincy 
about 1744. H e embraced Christianity and 
invited the Moravian missionaries to labor 
among his people, the Westenhuck, who 
became known as Stockbridge Indians 
after they wereChristianized and removed 
to the mission, except such as went to join 
the Christian Indians in Pennsylvania. 
The chief, who received the Christian 
name John, and was recognized by the 
authorities at Albany and Boston as the 
head of the Mahican, they having had 
their council fire at Westenhuck, was long 
the patriarch of the Indian community at 
Stockbridge (Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson 
R., 88, 1872). The name survived as a 
family designation among the Stock- 
bridges at least as late as 1864, a Levi 
Konkapot serving in the civil war (Nel¬ 
son, Inds. N. J., 147, 1894). 

Konkau ( Ko'yoang kdui , ‘valleyearth ’). 
A formerly populous division of the 
Maidu, living in Butte co., Cal., in the 
valley of Concow cr., a tributary of the 
w. branch of Feather r. They are now 
on Round Valley res., Mendocino co., 
and numbered 171 in 1905. 

Cancons.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 505,1878. 
Cancow.—Ind. AIT. Rep., 313, 1874. Caw-Caw.— 
Ibid., 1867, 111, 1868. Con-Con’s.—Ibid., 75, 1870. 
Con-Cous.—Ibid., 1867, 121, 1868. Con-Cow.—Ibid., 
1863, 93, 1864. Cou-cows.—Ibid., 1864, 119, 1865. 
Cow-Cow.—Ibid., 130,1868. In’shin.—A.L.Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1903 (modern Yuki name). Kankau.— Cur¬ 
tin, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. Onocows.—Ind. 
AfT. Rep., 12,1865 (misprint). Ooncows.—Ibid., 112. 

Konomihu. A subsidiary tribe of the 
Shasta, living at the forks of Salmon r., 
Siskiyou co., Cal., extending 7 m. up the 
s. fork and 5 m. up the n. fork. Their 
language is very divergent from that of 
the main body of Shasta. (r. b. d. ) 

Konope. A Clatsop village on Columbia 
r., near its mouth, in Clatsop co., Oreg. 
Konapee. — Lyman, Hist. Oregon, I, 171, 1903. 
Kono'pe.—Boas, Chinook Texts, 274,1894. 

Kontareahronon. The Huron name of a 
people mentioned in the 17th century as 
living s. of St Lawrence r., on the author¬ 
ity of Ragueneau’s map. The name evi¬ 
dently designated the inhabitants of the 
Huron village of Contarea (q. v.). See 
Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858. (j. n. b. h.) 

Koo ( Ko'-o , ‘buffalo’). A clan of the 
Tewa pueblo of San Ildefonso, N. Mex. 
Koo-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 
(tdda — ‘people’). 

Kooji (‘wolf’). Given by Dawson 


(Queen Charlotte Ids., 134, 1880) as the 
name of one of the 4 Haida clans. There 
were only 2 clans, however, and the Wolf 
was not one of them. (j. r. s. ) 

Kookotlane ( KdoqbtWne ). A Bella- 
coola division at the town of Nuskelst, 
Bellacoola r., Brit. Col.—Boas in 7th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 3, 1891. 

Kookupvansik ( K6-okdp Vantflk, ‘ medi¬ 
cine paraphernalia’). A former Pima 
village in s. Arizona.—Russell, Pima MS., 
B. A. E., 16,1902. 

Koonahmich. A body of Salish under 
the Victoria superintendency, Brit. Col. 
Pop. 15 in 1882, when last separately 
enumerated. 

Koo-nah-mich.—Can. Ind. AfT., 258, 1882. 

Koontie. See Coonti. 

Kooskoo ( Koos-koo / , ‘crane ’). A gens of 
the Abnaki (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
174, 1877. 

Koossawin (‘hunters’). A term com¬ 
pounded from the Chippewa verb kiyusd- 
wtn , ‘hunting,’ lit. ‘the act of walking 
about’ (Jones), and used by Schoolcraft 
(Ind. Tribes, vi, 582, 1857) to denote the 
hunting tribes. 

Koot. The largest village of the Nuni- 
vagmiut, near C. Etolin, Nunivak id., 
Alaska; pop. 117 in 1890.—Eleventh Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 115, 1893. 

Kootep ( Ko'-o-tep ). A Yurok village on 
lower Klamath r., Cal., near Klamath 
bluffs.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. 

Kootpahl. A former village of the At- 
falati at Forest Grove,Washington co., 
Oreg.—Lyman in Oreg. Hist. Soc. Quar. 
i, 323, 1900. 

Koowahoke ( Koo-wa-ho'-ke , ‘pine re¬ 
gion’). A subdivision of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Kooyah. A root ( Valeriana edulis), also 
known as “tobacco root,” from which a 
bread is made by some of the Indians of 
the Oregon region. The word is from 
one of the Shahaptian or Shoshonean 
dialects. (a. f. c. ) 

Kopaalk. A body of Salish under Fra¬ 
ser superintendency, Brit. Col.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 78,1878. 

Kopagmiut (‘ people of the great river ’). 
An Eskimo tribe at the mouth of Mac¬ 
kenzie r., Canada. According to Dali 
they formerly extended up this river 200 
m., but are now confined to islands at 
the mouth and the Arctic coast w. of Her- 
schel id. 

Anenepit.—Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnol., ill, 11, 
1876 (= ‘Eskimo of the east’: so called by Hudson 
Bay, Labrador, and Greenland Eskimo). Chig- 
lit.—Ibid., 10. Kopag-mut.—Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 10, 1877. Kopang'-meun.—Richardson, 
Polar Regions, 1861. Kukhpagmiut.—Eleventh 
Census, Alaska, 130,1893. Kupunmiun.—Murdoch 
in 9th Rep. B. A. E.,45,1854. Kurvik.—Petitot in 
Bui. Soc. de G6og., 6th s., x, 182,1875. Mackenzie 
River Eskimo.—Richardson, Arct. Search. Exped., 
354, 1851. Tareormeut.—Petitot, Monogr., map, 


726 


ROPANO-ROROVINSRI 


[b. a. e. 


1876. Tapeopmeut.—Ibid., 11 (= ‘those who live 
by the sea’). Tarreor-meut.—Dali in Cont. N.A. 
Ethnol., 1 ,10,1877. Tchiglit.--Petitot, Monogr., 11 
(applied to Mackenzie and Anderson r. tribes). 
Tciglit.—Ibid. 





KOPAGMIUT GIRL. (am. Mus. Nat. Hist.) 


Kopano. A small tribe formerly living 
on or near Copano Bay, s. Texas. There 
is no doubt that it belonged to the 
Karankawan linguistic stock, but it is sel¬ 
dom mentioned. 

Coopanes. —Solis (1768) cited by H. E. Bolton, 
inf’n, 1906. Copanes. —Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602, 
1737. 

Kopeli. The extinct Pink Conch clan 
of the Tewa of Hano pueblo, n. e. Ariz. 
Ko'-pe-li. —Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vil, 166,1894. 
Kopeli-towa. —Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 
1896 ( tdwa = ‘people’). 

Kopiwari ( Ko-pi-iva'-ri ). An ancient 
village once occupied by the Nambe peo¬ 
ple, situated about 5 m. n. of the present 
Nambe pueblo, N. Mex. (f. w. h.) 

Koprino. A Kwakiutl tribe speaking 
the Koskimo subdialect. They lived 
formerly at the entrance of Quatsino sd., 
and were divided into the Koprino and 
Kotlenok clans, but they are now amal¬ 
gamated with the Koskimo proper. Pop. 
14 in 1884, the last time they were sepa¬ 
rately enumerated. 

G a'plenox 11 .— Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
V, pt. 2, 393,1902. G’o'p’enox. — Boas in Rep. Nat. 
Mus. 1895,329,1897. Keope-e-no. —Can.Ind.AfT., 190, 
1883. Keroopinough. —Brit. Col. map. 1872. Kiaw- 
pino.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, 
sec. n, 65. Kopnnos. —Can. Ind. Aff., 145, 1879. 
Kyo'p’enoq. —Boas in 6th Iiep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
53,1890. 

Koprino. A gens of the Koprino, q. v. 
Koquapilt. A Chilliwack town in 
lower Chilliwack valley, Brit. Col.; pop. 
16 in 1904. 

Co-qua-piet.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. I, 268, 1889. Co- 
quopiet.—Ibid., 309, 1879. Coquopilt. — Ibid., 74, 
1878. Koquahpilt. — Ibid., 78. Koquapilt. — Brit. Col. 


map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. Kwaw-kwaw-apiet.— 
Can. Ind. Aff., 413, 1898. Kwawkwawapilt. —Can. 
Ind. Aff., pt. II, 158, 1901. 

Kordlubing. A summer settlement of 
the Kingnaitmiut Eskimo near the head 
of an inlet emptying into Cumberland 
sd. from the n. side. 

Qordlubing.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Koremiut. An Eskimo settlement at 
Narket fjord, lat. 61° 17', e. Greenland.— 
Nansen, First Crossing, i, 306, 1890. 

Kornok. An Eskimo village in w. Green¬ 
land, lat. 64° 30 / .—Nansen, First Cross¬ 
ing, ii, 329, 1890. 

Koroa. A small tribe, perhaps related 
to the Tonika, whose home was on the w. 
bank of the Mississippi below the 
Natchez, on the Yazoo, and in the 
country intervening westward from the 
Mississippi. They were visited early in 
1682 by La Salle, who described their 
cabins as dome-shaped, about 15 ft high, 
formed chiefly of large canes, and with¬ 
out windows (Margry, D6c., i, 558, 
1876). They were considered w r arlike, 
and were cruel and treacherous. In 1705 
a party of them, hired by the French 
priest Foucault to convey him by water to 
the Yazoo, murdered him and two other 
Frenchmen. La Salle observed that their 
language differed from that of the Taensa 
and Natchez, but their customs were the 
same. All afterward moved to and set¬ 
tled on Yazoo r., Miss., where in 1742 
they lived in the same village as the Ya¬ 
zoo. They were then allies of the Chick¬ 
asaw, but were later merged with the 
Choctaw and their identity as a separate 
organization was lost. Allen Wright, 
whose grandfather was of this tribe, in¬ 
formed Gatschet (Creek Migr. Leg., i, 48, 
1884) that the term Koroa, or Coroa, was 
neither Choctaw nor Chickasaw, and that 
the Koroa spoke a language differing en¬ 
tirely from the Choctaw. 

Akoroa.—Marquette, map (1673) in Shea, Discov. 
Miss., 1852. Coiras.—Richebourg (ca. 1716) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., Ill, 246, 1851. Coloa.— 
Iberville (1699) in Margry, D£c., iv, 179, 1880. 
Coroa.—Barcia, Ensayo, 246, 1723. Coroha. —Tonti 
(1684) in Margry, Dc>c., I, 603, 1876. Corois.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, m, 81, 1854. 
Corroas.—Coxe, Carolana, 9,1741. Corrois.— Char¬ 
levoix (1729), New France, VI, 85, 102, 1872. Cor- 
roys.—Le Petit quoted by Kip, Jesuit Missions, 289, 
1866. Couroas.—Jefferys, French Dom., i, 144, 
1761. Courois.—La Harpe (1699) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., iii, 19, 28, 1851. Curois. —Ibid., 32. 
Ikouera.—La Salle (1681) in Margry, Dc*c., II, 189, 
198,1877. Kolwa.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 
48, 1884 (Choctaw name). Koroas.— La Metairie 
(1682) quoted by French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 22, 
1875. Kouera.—Proces verbal (1682) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., I, 47, 1846. Kourouas. —Coxe, Car¬ 
olana, 10, 1741. Kourovas.—Alcedo, Die. Geog., 
V, 394, 1789. Kowronas —Morse, N. Am., 254, 1776 
(perhaps quoting Coxe). Kulua.— Gatschet, 
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 48, 1884 (Choctaw name). 

Korovinski. A former Aleut village on 
Atkaid. at Korovin bay, which the natives 
deserted for Nazan across the island. The 
Russians built a church there in 1826 and 







BULL. 30] 


KOROVINSKI 


KOSKIMO 


727 


made Atka the headquarters of the west¬ 
ern district of the Aleutians.—Petroff in 
10th Census, Alaska, 21, 1884. 

Korovinski. An Aleut village on Koro¬ 
vin id., Alaska; pop. 44 in 1880, 41 in 1890. 
Korovinsky.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 25, 1881. 

Korusi. A tribe of the Patwin division 
of the Copehan family, formerly living at 
Colusa, Colusa co., Cal. It was once com¬ 
paratively populous, as Gen. Bidwell 
states that in 1849 the village of the Korusi 
contained at least 1,000 inhabitants (Pow¬ 
ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 219, 1877). 
They are spoken of as clannish, and fond 
of nursing family feuds. When a Korusi 
woman died, leaving a very young infant, 
her friends shook it to death in a skin or 
blanket. Powers (p. 226) says the Ko¬ 
rusi hold that in the beginning of all 
things there was nothing but the Old 
Turtle swimming about in a limitless 
ocean, but that he dived down and 
brought up earth, with which he created 
the world. 

Colouse.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 518, 
1877. Colusa.—Ibid., 219. Colusi.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Mar. 23,1860. Corusies. —Powers in Over¬ 
land Mo., xin, 543, 1874. Ko-ru-si.—Powers in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 219,1877. 

Koserefski. A former Kaiyuhkhotana 
village, now an Ikogmiut settlement, on 
the left bank of the Yukon, near the 
mouth of Shageluk slough. It is the seat 
of the mission of the Holy Cross. 

Koserefski.—Bruce, Alaska, map, 1885. Kozer- 
evsky. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 165,1893. Kosy- 
rof. —Map form cited by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alas¬ 
ka, 1902. Kozyrof.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. Leather Village.—Dali, Alaska, 220, 
1870. 

Kosetah. Mentioned by Gibbs (School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 171, 1853) as a 
Shasta band of Shasta valley, n. Cal., in 
1851, but it is really a man’s personal 
name. (r. b. d. ) 

Koshkogemut. A subdivision of the 
Chnagmiut Eskimo of Alaska.—Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877. 

Kosipatuwiwagaiyu ( Ko-si'-pa tu-wi'-wa- 
gai-yu , ‘muddy water place’). A Pavi- 
otso tribe formerly dwelling about Carson 


sink, w. .Nev. 

Ko-si'-pa tu-wi'-wa-gai-yu.—Powell, Paviotso MS., 
B. A. E., 1881. Ku'si-pah.—Powers, Inds. W. Nev., 
MS., B. A. E., 1876. 

Koskedi. A Tlingit division at Gaude- 
kan and Yakutat, belonging to the Raven 
phratry. 

Koskle'di.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Kusch-ke-ti.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. 
Kusk-edi.—Ibid. 

Koskimo. An important Kwakiutl tribe 
inhabiting the shores of Quatsino sd., Van¬ 
couver id. The gentes are Gyekolekoa, 
Gyeksem, Gyeksemsanatl, Hekhala- 
nois(?), Kwakukemalenok, Naenshya, 
Tsetsaa, and Wohuamis. Their winter 
village is Hwades; their summer village, 
Maate. Pop. 82 in 1904. 

Kooskimo.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. 
Col., 118b, 1884. Kosimo.—Can. Ind. Aff., 1904, pt. 
2, 71, 1905. Kos-keemoe,—Ibid., 1884, 189, 1885. 


Koskeemos.—Grant in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 293, 
1857. K-osk-e'moq.—Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 53, 1890. Koskiemo.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 251, 
1862. Kos'-ki-mo.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 69. Koskimos.—Can. Ind. 



KOSKIMO MAN. (.AM. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 

Aff., 145,1879. Kos-ki mu.— Ibid., 1894, 279, 1895. 
Koskumos.—Ibid., 113, 1879. Kus-ke-mu.—Kane, 
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 0,6'sqemox.—Boas 
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 329,1897. Qosqimo.—Boas 
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,131,1887. Roskeemo.— 
Powell in Can. Ind. Aff., 130, 1879 (misprint). 



KOSKIMO WOMAN. (AM. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 

Koskimo. A Kwakiutl subdialect spoken 
by the Koprino, Klaskino, Koskimo, and 
Quatsino. 











728 


KOSOTSHE-KOUSE 


fB. A. B. 


Kosotshe. A former village of the Tu- 
tutni, identified by Dorsey with the 
Luckkarsonation of Lewis and Clark, who 
placed them on the Oregon coast s. of the 
Kusan territory, in 1805, and estimated 
their population at 1,200. Fifty years later 
Kautz said their village was on Flores cr., 
Oreg., about lat. 42° 50 / ; Dorsey fixed 
their habitat n. of Rogue r., between Port 
Orford and Sixes cr. 

Kasoatcha.— Kautz,letter toGibbs.B. A. E.,ca.l855. 
Ko-so-a cha.— Gibbs, MS. on Coast tribes, B. A. E. 
3 [ 6 s-o-tce'. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 233, 
1890 (Tututni name). Ku-so-cha-to-ny. —Abbott, 
MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 1858. Ku'-su-me' 
lunne'. —Dorsey, op. cit. (Naltunne-tunne'name). 
Luckasos.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., II, 119, 1814. 
Luckkarso. —Ibid., 474. Lukkarso. —Drake, Bk. of 
Inds., ix, 1848. Port Orford. —Abbott, MS. Coquille 
census, B. A. E., 1858. 

Kostuets ( Kb's Tue'ts, ‘where pine trees 
stand’). A Shoshonean encampment 10 

m. above Yaneks, or Yainax, on Sprague 
r., Klamath res., Oreg.—Gatschet in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 2, 143, 1890. 

Kostun-hana ( Qlb'stAn xd'na; qlo'stAn 
means ‘crab’). A former Haida town, 
in possession of the Kogangas family 
group, a short distance e. of Skidegate, 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. There 
does not appear to be space at this point 
for more than two or three houses.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. 

Kosunats. A Ute division formerly liv¬ 
ing on Uinta res., n. e. Utah, where 
Powell found 76 of them in 1873. They 
now form part of what are known as the 
Uinta Ute. 

Kotasi. A former Maidu village in the 

n. part of Plumas co., Cal., about 3 m. e. 
of Greenville.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Kotil. A Koyukukhotana village at the 
junction of Kateel r. with Koyukuk r., 
Alaska; pop. 65 in 1844. 

Khotilkakat.— Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 37,1884. Khotilkakate. —Zagoskin 
in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. 
Khotylnakat. —Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. Am., 
map, 1844. 

Kotlenok (Q’o'Lendx). A gens of the 
Koprino, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1895, 329, 1897. 

Kotlian. See Katlian. 

Kotlik (‘breeches,’ hence ‘river fork’). 
A village of the Chnagmiut Eskimo on 
Kotlikr.,Alaska; pop.8in 1880,31 in 1890. 

Coatlik.— Schwatka, Mil. Recon. in Alaska, 20, 
1885. Kotlik.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 
1899. Kutlik. —Post route map, 1903. 

Kotlskaim ( Qotlskaim , ‘ serpent pond’). 
A Squawmish village community on Bur- 
rard inlet, Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Brit. A. A. S., 475, 1900. 

Kotsai ( Kotsai ). An extinct division 
of the Comanche.—Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1045, 1896. 

Kotsava (from kozabi, an insect used for 
food). A Mono band formerly living 
about Mono lake and Owens r. and lake, 
e. Cal., numbering 300 in 1870. 

Caso.— Maltby in Ind. Aff. Rep., 94, 1866. Cazaby 


Pah-Utes.— Campbell, ibid., 113, 1870. Kots-a'- 
va.—Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E., 1881. Ko-za'- 
bi-ti-kut-teh.— Powers, Ind. West Nev., MS., B. A. 
E., 1876 (‘worm-eaters’). Owen’s River Indians. — 
Maltby in Ind. Alf. Rep., 94, 1866. 

Kotsoteka ( Kotso-te'kci , ‘buffalo-eaters ’). 
One of the principal divisions of the 
Comanche. 

Buffalo Eater band.— Comanche and Kiowa treaty, 
Sen. Ex. Doc. O, 39th Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1866. 
Buffalo Eaters. —Butler in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th 
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. Buffalo Indians.— Bell in 
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 268, 1869. Cash- 
chevatebka.— Smith in H. R. Ex. Doc. 240, 41st 
Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1870. Cashchokelka Coman- 
ches. —Ibid., 21. Castcheteghka- Coraanches. —Al- 
vord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 35, 

1869. Co-che-ta-cah.— Butler in H. R. Doc. 76,29th 
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. Cochetakers. —McKusker 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 40, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 14, 1869. 
Co-che-te-ka. —Comanche and Kiowa treaty, Sen. 
Ex. Doc. O, 39th Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1866. Cooch- 
chotellica. —Sec. War in Sen. Ex. Doc. 7, 42d Cong., 
3d sess., 1, 1872. Cooch-cho-teth-ca. —Sanders in 

H. R. Ex. Doc. 7, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1871. 
Coocheetakas. —Penney in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 101, 

1870. Cools-on-tick-ara. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 

I , 250,1853. Coschotghta.— Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc, 

18,40th Cong., 3d sess., 6,1869. Cos-tche-tegh-kas.— 
Ibid., 7. Costcheteghta Comanches. —Alvord in H. 
R. Ex. Doc. 210, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 151, 1870. 
Cuchanticas.— Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., ill, 
pt. 3, 121, 1856. Cuechunticas. —Pino, Not. Hist. 
Nuevo-Mex., 83, 1849. Cuhtzuteca. —Pimentel, 

Cuadro Descr., II, 347, 1865. Curtoze-to-gah Co¬ 
manches.— Hazen in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 
3d sess., 31, 1869. Curtz-e-Ticker Comanches. — 
Ibid., 24. E hunticas. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 
1864 (given as Apache). Gu-sho-doj-ka. —Butcher 
and Lyendecher, Comanche MS.vocab., B. A. E., 
1867. Koo-chee-ta-kee. —Neighbors in Ind. Aff. 
Rep.,579,1848. Koo-che-ta-kers. —Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, ii, 128, 1852. Koo-chi-ta-ker. — Neighbors, 
op.cit., 578. Koolsaticara. —Schoolcraft,op. cit., vi. 
687, 1857. Koolsatik-ara.— Ibid., I, 522, 1851, 

Ko+s'-tco-te'-ka. —ten Kate, Synonymie, 9, 1884. 
Ko'stshote'ka. —Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxiii, 299, 1886. Ko'tso-te'ka. —Mooney in 14th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1045, 1896. Ku’htche-te^ka. —Gat¬ 
schet, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E. 

Kotta (‘mescal’ or ‘tobacco’). Given 
by Bourke (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 
1889) as a clan of the Mohave, q. v. 

Kouchnas-hadai ( Qo'utc nas .-had’d'i, 
‘[grizzly-] bear house people’). Given 
by Boas (Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
27, 1889) as a subdivision of the Yaku- 
lanas, a family of the Raven clan of the 
Haida. It is in reality only a house 
name belonging to the family. 

Koukdjuaq (‘big river’). A Talirping- 
miut Eskimo village of the Okomiut tribe 
formerly on L. Nettilling, Baffin land.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888. 

Kounaouons. A tribe or band, probably 
in Canada near the Maine frontier, men¬ 
tioned as allies of the French in 1724. 
K 8 na 8 ons. —Rasle(1724)in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 
s., vin, 246,1819. 

Koungmiut (‘ river people ’). An Eski¬ 
mo tribe on the w. coast of Hudson bay, 
s. of the Kinipetu, in the region of Pt 
Churchill.—Boas in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xv, 6,1901. 

Kouse. A plant ( Peucedanum ambigu- 
um) used by the Indians of the Columbia- 
Oregon region for making bread. Lewis 
and Clark in 1804-06 used the form cous. 
Thornton. (Oreg. and Cal., i, 355, 1849) 


BULL. 301 


KOTJ YAM-KOYUKUKHOTANA 


729 


speaks of “the comsh or biscuit root.” 
The word is derived from kowish, the 
name of this root in the Nez Perc6 and 
closely related dialects of the Shahaptian 
stock. See Roots. (a. f. c. ) 

Kouyam. A village or tribe mentioned 
by Joutel in 1687 as being n. of Maligne 
(Colorado) r., Tex. It is probably the 
tribe called Caba by Manzanet, which 
may have been Coahuiltecan or Karan- 
kawan. See Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 
1891. 

Cavaianes. —Barcia, Ensayo, 271,1723. Kavagan.— 
Joutel (1687), .Jour. Voy., 90, 1719. Kouayan.— 
Shea, note in Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78, 
1870. Kouayon.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., i, 152,1846. Kouyam. —Joutel in Margrv, 
D6c., ill, 288, 1878. 

Kovogzruk. A Kaviagmiut village at 
Port Clarence, Alaska.—Eleventh Census, 
Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Kowagmiut (‘big-river people’). A 
tribe of western Eskimo of Alaska, num¬ 
bering 81 in 1890, dwelling on Kowakr. e. 
of Kotzebue sd. Their chief food besides 
fish and ptarmigan consists of marmots, 
but the number of these is rapidly de¬ 
creasing. Their villages are Kikiktak, 
Kowak, Umokalukta, Unatak, and the 
summer settlement of Sheshalik. By 
some these Eskimo have been included 
in the Nunatogmiut; by others, together 
with the Selawigmiut, in the Malemiut. 
Kooagamutes. —Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 60, 
map, 1884. Koo-og-ameuts.— Cooper, Cruise of Cor¬ 
win, 26, 1880. Kowag'-mut. —Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 12, 1877. Kowan'g-meun.— Simpson 
quoted by Dali, ibid. Ku-ag'mut. —Dali in Proc. 
A. A. A. S., XXXIV, 377,1886. Kuangmiut.— Woolfe 
in 11th Census, Alaska, 130,1894. Kuwu'nmiun. — 
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 44, 1892. 

Kowailchew. A coast Salish tribe said 
by Gibbs (Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 433,1855) to 
live n. of the Semiamo, principally if not 
altogether in Canada. Unless intended 
for theCowichan they are not mentioned 
elsewhere. 

Kowak (? ‘great river’). A Kowagmiut 
village at the mouth of Kowak r., Alaska. 
Koovuk.— Kelly, Arct. Eskimos, 15,1890. Kubok.— 
Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. in Amer., pt. 1,73,1847. 

Kowanga. A former Gabrieleno ran- 
cheria near San Fernando mission, Los 
Angeles co., Cal. Probably identical with 
Okowvinjha, or with Cahuenga, q. v. 

Kowanga.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11, 1860. 
Owongos,— Lawson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 13,1879. 

Kowasayee. A small Shahaptian tribe, 
speaking the Tenino language and for¬ 
merly living on the n. side of Columbia r., 
in Klickitat co., Wash., nearly opposite 
the mouth of the Umatilla. They were 
included in the Yakima treaty of 1855, 
and the survivors are on Yakima res., 
but their number is unknown. 

K'kasawi.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 739,1896. 
Kowasayee.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 266, 1857. Kow- 
wassayee.— U. S. Stat., xu, 951, 1863. Kowwas- 
sayes.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 518,1878. 

Ko wasikka. A village formerly occupied 
by the Eel River Miami until they re¬ 
moved, under the treaty of Feb. 11, 1828, 


to a reserve near the mouth of Eel r. It 
was on Sugar cr., near the present Thorn- 
town, Boone co., Ind., and was commonly 
known as Thorntown. (j. m. ) 

Kow-a-sik-ka.—Hough in Ind. Geol. Rep., map, 
1883. Thorntown.—Common name. Thorntown 
Miamies.—Drake, Ind. Chron., 205,1836. 

Kowina. A prehistoric circular pueblo 
on a low mesa opposite the spring at the 
head of Cebollita valley, about 15 m. w. 
of Acoma and 35 m. s. e. of Grant station 
on the Santa Fe Pac. R. R., Valencia co., 
N. Mex. The pueblo is attributed to the 
Calabash (Tanyi) clan of Acoma and is 
noted for the high class of masonry of its 
remaining walls. (f. w. h. ) 

Ka-uin-a.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,324, 
1892 (Acoma name). Ko-wi-na.—Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895. 

Kowsis. A tribe mentioned as roaming 
in the Tule r. country—territory occupied 
by Yokuts tribes—in s. central California 
in 1869 (Purcell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 
193, 1870), but not further identifiable. 

Koyeti. A Yokuts tribe formerly living 
in s. central California, in the vicinity of 
Tule r. and southward. Mentioned in 
1852 as a friendly tribe on Paint (White) 
cr., and described as possessing unusual 
courage and intelligence. They are en¬ 
tirely extinct. 

Co-ye-te.—Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 32,1857. Co-ye-tie.—Barbour (1852) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 256, 
1853. Ko-ya-ta.—Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 23, 1852. Ko-ya-te.— Bar¬ 
bour (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, 
sess., 122, 1853. Ko-ya-tes.—Barbour in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 232,1851. Koyeti.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906 
(usual name among neighboring Yokuts tribes). 
Ko-ye-to.—Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., 
spec, sess., 255,1853. 

Koyonya. The Turkey clan of the Hopi. 
Koyoiia winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
584, 1900 (mnwM=‘clan’). Ko-yo'-no wiin-wu.— 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 403, 1894 ; 

Koyugmiut ( Koyug'mut). A division of 
the Malemiut Eskimo on Koyuk r., 
Alaska.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 
16, 1877. 

Koyuhow ( Ko-yu-how'). A Paviotso 
band formerly living about McDermit, n. 
Nev.—Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E., 
1881. 

Koyuktolik. A Malemiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Koyuk r., Alaska. 

Khoouchtioulik-mioute.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. 
Voy., 5th s., xxi, map. 1850. Kuyuktolik.— 
Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. 

Koyukuk. A Koyukukhotana village, 
of 150 people in 1880, near the junction 
of Koyukuk and Yukon rs., Alaska.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884. 

Koyukukhotana (‘people of Koyukuk 
river’). A division of the Unakhotana 
inhabiting the basin of Koyukuk r., 
Alaska. Zagoskin in 1843 attempted to 
explore the Koyukuk country, but failed 
on account of the hostility of the natives. 
Lieut. Barnard in 1851 was killed by the 
Koyukukhotana, and Nulato destroyed 
because he sent for their chief. Maj. 
Kennicott also visited their territory, 


730 


KRAYIRAGOTTINE-KUAIIRNANG 


[B. A. B. 


dying at Nulato, May 13, 1866. In the 
following year Dali explored the Koyu- 
kuk. Petroff visited the Koyukukhotana 
in 1880, and Allen made an exploration 
of their country in 1885. The Koyukuk¬ 
hotana were sedentary, but fierce and 
warlike, and hostile toward the Kai- 
yuhkhotana, although the manners, 
customs, and language of the two tribes 
are now similar. Their chief occupation 
is hunting deer and mountain sheep; 
they also act as middlemen in trade be¬ 
tween the Malemiutand the Kaiyuhkho- 
tana. They seem to have no system of 
totems (Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
i, 27, 1877). Zagoskin found 289 living 
in permanent villages in 1843. In 1890 
the population was given as 502: 242 
males and 260 females, while the number 
in permanent villages was 174 in 32 houses. 
The villages are Batza, Bolshoigor, 
Dotle, Hussliakatna, Kakliaklia, Kaltat, 
Kanuti, Kautas, Kotil, Koyukuk, Mento- 
kakat, Nohulchinta, Nok, Notaloten, 
Oonilgachtkhokh, Soonkakat, Tashosh- 
gon, Tlialil, Tok, Zakatlatan, Zogliakten, 
and Zonagogliakten. 

Coyoukons.—Whymper quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., I, 27, 1877. Co-Yukon.—Whymper, 
Alaska, 182, 1868 (= Koyukukhotana and Unak- 
hotana). Intsi-Dindjitch.—Petitot, Diet. Denci- 
Dindji6, xx, 1876 ( = ‘men of iron’). Junnaka- 
chotana.—Holmberg quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., I, 27, 1877. Koyoukon.—Elliott, 
Cond. Aff. Alaska, 29,1874. Koyoukouk-kouttanae.— 
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361, 1891. 
Koyu'-kukh-ota/na.—Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
i, 27,1877 ( = ‘people of Koyukuk r.’). Koyukuns.— 
Ibid, (traders’ name). Koyukunskoi.—Ibid, (used 
by Russian traders). Kukunski.—Raymond in 
Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., Ill, 175,1873. Kuyakinchi.— 
Raymond in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 593, 1870. 
Kuyukantsi.—Worman quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A.Ethnol., 1,27,1877. Kuyukuks.—Raymond in 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 31, 1871. 
Kuyukunski.—Ibid., 32. Yunnakakhotana.—Zag¬ 
oskin quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 
1884. 

Krayiragottine (‘willow people’). A 
division of Etchaottine on Willow r., Mac¬ 
kenzie Ter., Can. 

Kkpayipa-Gottine.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Es¬ 
claves, 319, 1891. 

Kraylongottine (‘people at the end of 
the willows’). A Nahane division living 
between Mackenzie r. and Willow lake, 
Mackenzie Ter., Canada. Their totem 
is the otter. ^ 

Kk r a-lon-Gottine.—Petitot, Grand lac des Ours, 66, 
1893 (‘ people at the end of the willows ’). Kkpay- 
lon-Gottine.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 
362,1891. 

Krentpoos. See Kintpuash. 

Kretan (‘hawk’). A subgens of the 
Cheghita gens of the Missouri tribe. 
re'-ta n .—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,240, 1897. 
‘ul-pa-ki'-a-ko.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 10, 1884 
(Kiowa name: ‘pearls people’). 

Krimerksumalek. An Iglulirmiut Es¬ 
kimo village on the w. coast of Hudson 
bay.—McClintock, Yovage of Fox, 165, 
1881. 

Ksalokul ( Qsd'loqul ). A division of the 
Nanaimo on the e. coast of Vancouver 


id.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
32, 1889. 

Ksapsem ( Qsa'psEm ). A Songish divi¬ 
sion residing at Esquimalt, s. end of Van¬ 
couver id.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 17, 1890. 

Kshiwukshiwu ( K’ciwuk'ciwu ). A for¬ 
mer Chumashan village on Santa Rosa 
id., Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kthae (K'qd'^t). A former Kuitsh vil¬ 
lage on lower Umpqua r., Oreg.—Dorsey 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 321, 1890. 

Kthelutlitunne ( Kc t e'-lUt-lV lunrie' , ‘ peo¬ 
ple at the forks’). A former village of 
the Chastacosta at the junction of Rogue 
r., Oreg., and a southern tributary.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 234, 
1890. 

Kthotaime (K’go-iaV-me). A former 
Takelma village on the s. side of Rogue r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
235, 1890. 

Kthukhwestunne ( K’gu-qwes' qtinne', 
‘good-grass people’). A former village 
of the Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille 
r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 232, 1890. 

Kthukhwuttunne ( K'qu-qwiit' itinnt', 

‘people where good grass is ’). A former 
village of the Tututni on the coast of 
Oregon, n. of Rogue r. — Dorsey in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 233, 1890. 

Kthunataachuntunne (K’ qu-na'-ta-a 
totin' lunne ‘people by a small grassy 
mountain’). A former village of the 
Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
232, 1890. 

Kthutetmetseetuttun. A former village 
of the Tututni on the Pacific coast just n. 
of the mouth of Rogue r., Oreg. 

K’fu-tet-me tse'-e-tut'-tun.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, III, 233, 1890. vwi'-sut-qwut.—Ibid. 
Nu'-tcu-ma'-tun ^un'ne.—Ibid, (‘people in aland 
full of timber’). 

Ktlaeshatlkik (‘people of Lga/ecaLx’). 
A Cathlamet tribe named from a town on a 
creek of the same name, at the site of the 
present town of Cathlamet, Wahkiakum 
co., Wash. 

Guithlia-ishal^i.—Gatschet, field notes, B. A. E. 
KLa'ecai.xix-.—Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 6, 1901. 
Lia'icaLxe.—Boas, inf’n, 1905. 

Ku. The Stone clan of the Tewa pue¬ 
blos of San Ildefonso, N. Mex., and Hano, 
Ariz. That of the latter is extinct. Cf. 
Nang. 

K'u-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 1896 
(San Ildefonso form; tdoa— 1 people’). Ku-towa.— 
Ibid. (Hano form). 

Kua. The Bear clan of the pueblo of 
Taos, N. Mex. 

Kua-taiina.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1899 
(talina= l people ’). 

Kuaiath. A division of the Seshat, a 
Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 32, 1890. 

Kuaiirnang. A winter residence of the 
Akuliarmiut on North bay, Baffin land. 


BULL. 30] 


KUAKAA-KUEHA 


731 


K’uaiirnang.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., no. 80,67, 
1885. Quaiimang.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 421, 
1888. 

Kuakaa. A prehistoric ruined pueblo 
of the Tanos on the s. bank of Arroyo 
Hondo, 5 m. s. of Santa Fe, N. Mex. It 
housed about 800 people. Not to be con¬ 
founded with San Marcos, to which the 
same name was applied. 

Cua-ca.—Bandelier, Gilded Man, 221, 1893. Cua- 
Kaa.—Ibid., 283. Kua-kaa.—Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, iv, 90, 1892. Kua-kay.—Ibid. 

Kuakumchen ( Kua/kumtc^n ). Given as 
a division of the Squawmish, on Howe 
sd., coast of British Columbia.—Boas, 
MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Kuapa. A ruined pueblo in the Canada 
de Cochiti, 12 m. n. w. of Cochiti pueblo, 
N. Mex., by whose inhabitants it was 
formerly occupied and to whom are at¬ 
tributed the execution of the panther 
statues on the neighboring Potrero de los 
Idolos. It was the third place of settle¬ 
ment of the Cochiti after their abandon¬ 
ment of the Potrero de las Vacas, and 
from which they moved to their present 

S neblo. 

ua-pa.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Bui., I, 15,1883. 
Cua-pa.—Lummis in Scribner’s Monthly, 98,1893. 
Kua-pa.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 162, 
1892. 

Kuapooge (‘place of the shell beads 
near the water,’ or ‘mussel pearl place 
on the water’). A prehistoric Tewa 
pueblo which, with Analco, occupied the 
site of the present Santa F6, N. Mex. 
Kuapooge was situated where old Ft 
Marcy was erected on the heights at the 
northern outskirts of the town by United 
States troops in 1847. 

Apoga.— Ritch, New Mexico, 196, 1885. Apoge.— 
Ibid., 151. Cua P’Hoge.—Bandelier, Delight Mak¬ 
ers, 453, 1890 (San Juan name). Cua-P’ho-o-ge.— 
Bandelier, Gilded Man, 284 1893. Cua-po-oge.— 
Ibid., 221. Cua-Po-o-que.—Ladd, Story of N. Mex., 
92, 1891. Kua-p’o-o-ge.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, iv, 90, 1892. Oga P’Hoge.—Bandelier, 
Delight Makers, 453, 1890 (Santa Clara name). 
Og-a-p’o-ge.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
90, 1892. Poga.—Ritch, New Mexico, 196, 1885. 
Poge.—Ibid., 151. Po-o-ge.—Bandelier in Ritch, 
ibid., 201. 

Kuasse. An unidentified village or tribe 
mentioned by Joutel in 1687 as situated n. 
or n. w. of Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. 
This region was controlled mainly by 
Coahuiltecan tribes, but Karankawan and 
Tonkawan Indians also roamed there. 
The name seems to have been given to 
Joutel by Ebahamo Indians, who were 
probably of Karankawan affinity. The 
Kuasse may possibly be identical with the 
Acafes and the Cacafes of Spanish writers 
and the Akasquy of Cavelier’s narrative. 
Kiaffess.—Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
I, 138, 1846 (cf. p. 152). Kiasses.—Shea, note in 
Charlevoix, New France, IV, 78, 1870. Kiasses- 
chancres.—Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723 (combined 
with Chancres; see Lipan). Kuasse.—Joutel in 
Margry, D6c., in, 289,1878. 

Kuato ( Kuato , ‘pulling up from the 
ground, or a hole’). An extinct tribal 
division of the Kiowa, speaking a slightly 
different dialect, who were exterminated 


by the Sioux in battle about the year 1780. 
On this occasion, according to tradition, 
the Kiowa were attacked by an over¬ 
whelming force of Sioux and prepared to 
retreat, but the chief of the Kuato ex¬ 
horted his people not to run, “because; 
if they did, their relatives in the other 
world would not receive them. ’’ So they 
stood their ground and were killed, while 
the others of the tribe escaped. Their 
place in the tribal camp circle is not 
known.—Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1080, 1896. 

Kuaua. A former Tigua pueblo, the 
ruins of which lie n. of the bridge across 
the Rio Grande above Bernalillo, N. Mex. 
According to Bandelier the main build¬ 
ing, which is of adobe, is one of the larg¬ 
est pueblo houses in New Mexico, but 
whether or not the pueblo is historic is 
indeterminable. It is also known by the 
Spanish name Torreon, but should not 
be confounded with the Torreon e. of the 
Rio Grande, in lat. 34° 45'. 

Kua-ua.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 225, 
1892. Torreon.—Ibid. 

Kuaut. A Shuswap village at the head 
of Little Shuswap lake, interior of Brit¬ 
ish Columbia; pop. 83 in 1904. 

Knaut.—Can. Ind. Aif.. supp., 60,1902. Kroaout.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1883, 189. Kualt.—Ibid., 1895, 
361. Kuant.—Ibid., 1898, 419. Ku-a-ut.—Ibid., 
1885, 196. Kwout.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can. for 1891, sec. II, 44, 1892. Little Shuswap — 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 74. Little Shuswap Lake.— 
Ibid., 1882, 259. Little Suswap Lake.—Ibid., 1879, 
309. Sushwap.—Ibid., 1878, 78. 

Kuchaptuvela (‘ash-hill terrace’). A 
Hopi village, now in ruins, on the terrace 
of the East mesa of Tusayan, x. e. Arizona, 
below the present Walpi pueblo. It was 
occupied by the ancestors of the Hopi 
of Walpi evidently at the time of the ar¬ 
rival of the Spaniards in 1540. The oc¬ 
cupants abandoned it in 1629, or shortly 
afterward, and moved to Ivisakobi, far¬ 
ther up the mesa. 

Kuchaptuvela.—Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 578, 
585, 1898. Kwetcap tutwi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. 
B. A. E., 18, 1891. Old Walpi.—Ibid. 

Kuchichi (‘the small ones’). A small 
rancheria of the Tarahumare, not far from 
Norogachic, w. Chihuahua, Mexico.— 
Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Kuchtya. A prehistoric Acoma pueblo 
which, according to tradition, was the 
third village built and occupied during 
the early migration of the tribe.—Hodge 
in Century Mag., lvi, 15, May 1898. 

Kuechic (‘small mountain’). A Tara¬ 
humare rancheria near Gumisachic, which 
is 20 m. n. e. of Norogachic, Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Kueha (‘the murderers’). A division 
of the Lekwiltok living between Bute and 
Loughborough inlets, Brit. Col. They are 
divided into three gentes: Wiweakam, 
Komoyue, and Kueha. Pop. 25 in 1889. 
The Komoyue sept of the true Kwakiutl 
have this name for their war name. 


732 KUGALUK- 

Kue'qa.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
606,1891. Kwe-ah-kah-Saich-kioie-tachs.—Can.Ind. 
Aff. 1889, 227, 1890 ( —Kueha Lekwiltok). Kwi- 
ha.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 119 b, 
1884. Queeakahs.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Q,uee-ha- 
ni-cul-ta.—Work (1836-41) quoted by Kane, Wand. 
inN. A., app., 1859 ( = Kueha Lekwiltok). Q,uie- 
ha Ne cub ta.—Work as quoted by Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 488,1855. 

Kugaluk. A Malemiut Eskimo village 
on Spafarief bay, s. shore of Kotzebue sd., 
Alaska; pop. 12 in 1880. 

Keewalik.—Post-route map, 1903. Kualiug-miut.— 
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 253,1902 (Russian deno¬ 
tation in 1852). Kualyugmut.—Zagoskin, Desc. 
Russ. Foss, in Am., pt. 1, 73, 1847. Kugaluk.—Ba¬ 
ker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kugalukmut.— 
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Kugaluk- 
mute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884. 

Kugaramiut. A subdivision of the Male¬ 
miut Eskimo on the s. shore of Kotzebue 
sd., Alaska.—Woolfe in 11th Census, 
Alaska, 130, 1893. 

Kuhaia. The Bear clans of the Keresan 
pueblos of Laguna, San Felipe, Acoma, 
Sia, and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Bear clan 
of Laguna claims to have come originally 
from Acoma. 

Ko-hai.—Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 19, 1894 
(Sia form). Kohaia-hano ch .—Hodge in Am. An- 
throp., ix, 349, 1896 (Laguna form). Kohai-ha- 
no.—Ibid. (San Felipe form; hdno = ‘ people’; 
Kohai-h&no is the Sia form). Kohaio.—Bande- 
lier, Delight Makers, 253,1890. Ko-ha-yo.—Bande- 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 293, 1890. Kuhaia- 
hanuch.—Hodge, op. cit. (Cochiti form). Kiiwhaia- 
hanoq ch .—Ibid. (Acoma form). 

Kuhinedi (‘ martin people ’). A Tlingit 
division at Klawak, Alaska, belonging to 
the Raven phratry. 

Klu'xinedi.—Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. 
Uech-e-neeti.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 120, 1885. 

Kuhlahi ( Kulalil , ‘beech place,’ from 
kti r la ‘ beech-tree ’). A former Cherokee 
settlement in upper Georgia. (j. m. ) 

Kuhlanapo (from kuhla, ‘yellow water- 
lily’ [Nymphnea polysepala ], ncipo, ‘vil¬ 
lage’). The name of one of the groups of 
people who formerly occupied Big valley 
on the s. shore of Clear lake, Lake co., 
Cal. Theirs was the w. part of the val¬ 
ley, extending from Adobe cr. on the e. 
into the foothills on the w., and their 
territory was definitely separated from 
that of the Khabenapo to the eastward. 
From this name Powell (7th Rep. B. A. 
E., 87, 1891) formed the stock name 
Kulnnapan , which he applied to all of 
the Indians now usually known by the 
name of Porno, and living chiefly in So¬ 
noma, Mendocino, and Lake cos., with a 
small detached area in Colusa and Glenn 
cos. s. A. B 

Ghula'-napo.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. Hula- 
napo.—Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
111,109,1853. Huta-napo.—Ibid., 110 (misprint). 
Kuhlanapo.—S. A. Barrett, inf’n, 1906 (lit. ‘yellow 
water-lilyvillage’). Kulanopo.—LathaminTrans. 
Philol. Soc. Lond., 77,1856. 

Kuhpattikutteh ( Kuh'-pat-ii-kut'-teh, 
‘squirrel-eaters’). A Paviotso band for¬ 
merly living on Quinn r., w. Nev.—Pow¬ 
ers, Inds. W. Nev., MS., B. A. E., 1876. 

Kuilitsh ( Ku'-i-Vdc '). A former Kuitsh 
village on lower Umpqua r., Oreg.—Dor¬ 
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 231,1890. 


KUIWANVA fs. a. B. 

Kuilkluk. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village on the left bank of Ivuskokwim 
r., Alaska; pop. 75 in 1880. Perhaps 
identical with Quieclohchamiut (pop. 
83), or with Quiechochlogamiut (pop. 65) 
in 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Kuilkhlogamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
map, 1884. Kuilkluk.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
253, 1902. Kulj-khlugamute.—Ibid.,17. 

Kuingshtetakten. A Jugelnute Eskimo 
village on Shageluk r., Alaska; pop. 37 in 
1842. 

Khuingetakhten.—Zagoskin, Desc.Russ.Poss. Am., 
map, 1844. Khuingitatekhten.—Zagoskin quoted 
by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. Kuing¬ 
shtetakten.—Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 365, 1900. 

Kuinruk ( Kuin-ruk , ‘ sea-hunter peo¬ 
ple’: Kodiak name). An unidentified 
division of the Knaiakhotana of Cook 
inlet, Alaska.—Hoffman, Kadiak MS., B. 
A. E., 1882. 

Kuishkoshyaka. The extinct Blue-corn 
clan of Acoma pueblo, N. Mex. See 
Yaka. 

KuTshkbshyaka-hanoq ch .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., 
ix,349,1896 ( ydka = ‘corn’, hdnoqch = ‘people’). 

Kuishtitiyaka. The extinct Brown-corn 
clan of Acoma pueblo, N. Mex. See 
Yaka. 

Ku'isht't'yaka-hanoqc' 1 .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., 
ix,349,1896 ( ydka — ‘corn’, hdnoqch = ‘people’). 

Kuitsh. A small Yakonan tribe for¬ 
merly living on lower Umpqua r., w. 
Oreg. A few survivors are on the Siletz 
res. According to Dorsey the former vil¬ 
lages of the Kuitsh were Silela, Misun, 
Takhaiya, Chukhuiyathl, Chukukh, Thu- 
khita, Tsunakthiamittha, Ntsiyamis, 
Khuwaihus, Skakhaus, Chupichnush- 
kuch, Kaiyuwuntsunitthai, Tsiakhaus, 
Paiuiyunitthai, Tsetthim, Wuituthlaa, 
Chitlatamus, Kuilitsh, Tkimeye, Miku- 
litsh, and Ivthae. 

Ci-sta'-qwut-me' pinne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 231,1890 ( = ‘people dwelling on the 
stream called Shista’: Mishikwutmetunnename). 
Ku Itc'.—Ibid., 230 (own name). Lower Umpqua.— 
Ind. AfT. Rep. 1857, 821, 1858. Tu'kwil-ma'-k'I.— 
Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea 
name). Umpkwa.—Bissell, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1881. Umpqua.—Ibid. 

Kuiu. A Tlingit tribe and town on an 
island, also called Kuiu, on the Alaskan 
coast. The town is in Port Beauclerc, 
and according to Petroff, who erroneously 
places it on Prince of Wales id. (unless 
indeed they were then living at Shakan), 
it contained 60 inhabitants in 1880. 
There has been no separate census of them 
since that time. They are said to have in¬ 
termarried considerably with the Haida. 
Their social divisions are Kuyedi and 
Nastedi. (j. r. s.) 

Kouyou.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32, 1884. 
Koyu.—Ibid., map. Kuiu.—Common spelling. 
Kuyut-koe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30, 
1840. 

Kuiukuk. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the s. e. coast of Alaska penin., 
Alaska; pop. 18 in 1880, 62 in 1890. 
Kuyukak.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,28,1884, 
Wrangell bay.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 163,1893. 

Kuiwanva ( Kui-wan'-va ). A tradition- 


BDLL - 3 °1 KUIYAMU- 

ary settlement of the Bear clan of the 
Hopi, about 1 m. n. w. of Oraibi.—Voth, 
Traditions of the Hopi, 23, 1905. 

Kuiyamu. ( Ku-V-ya'-mu ). One of the 
two former populous Chumashan vil¬ 
lages, popularly known as Dos Pueblos, 
w. of Santa Barbara, Cal. (h. w. h.) 

Kukak. A Ivaniagmiut Eskimo village 
onKukakbay, s. e. coast of Alaska penin., 
Alaska; pop. 37 in 1880. 

Kukak.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 28, 1884. 
Toujajak.—Langsdorff, Voy., ii, 235, 1814. 

Kukamukamees. A Kyuquot village on 
Mission id., Kyuquot sd., w. coast of 
Vancouver id.—Can. Ind. Aff.,264,1902. 

Kukan (‘finger-nail’). An ItaEskimo 
settlement near McCormick bay, n. Green¬ 
land.—Heilprin, Peary Relief Exped., 
128, 1893. 

Kukanuwu ( KAqlanuwu / ). An old 
Tlingit town in the Huna country on the 
n. side of Cross sd., Alaskan coast. Dis¬ 
tinct from Hukanuwu. (j. r. s.) 

Kukinishyaka. The Red-corn clan of 
Acoma and Laguna pueblos, N. Mex. 
See Yaka. 

Ku'kanis‘hyaka-hanoq ch .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., 
ix, 349,1896 (Acoma form; ydka = ‘ corn ’, hdnoqeh 
— ‘people’). Ku'kinishyaka-hano ch .—Ibid. (La¬ 
guna form). 

Kukkuiks (Kuk-kuiks / , ‘pigeons’). A 
society of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Com¬ 
rades, in the Piegan tribe; it is made up 
of men who have been to war several 
times.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
221, 1892. 

Kukluktuk. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village on the left bank of Kuskokwim 
r., 30 m. below Kolmakof, Alaska; pop. 
51 in 1880, 20 in 1890. 

Kochlogtogpagamiut.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 
164, 1893. Kokhlokhtokhpagamute.—Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 16, 1884. Kukluktuk.—Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 254, 1902. 

Kukoak ( Quqoa'q). A Songish division 
at McNeill bay, s. end of Vancouver id.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 17, 
1890. 

Kukpaurungmiut. An Eskimo tribe that 
formerly occupied the country between 
Pt Belcher and C. Beaufort, Alaska, now 
much dwindled, having a village called 
Kokolik at Pt Lay with 30 inhabitants in 
1880. In 1900 the tribe numbered 52. 

Kookpovoros.—Kelly, Arctic Eskimos, 13, 1890. 
Koopowro Mutes.—Wells and Kelly in Rep. Bur. 
Ed. 1897, 1242, 1898. Kukpaurungmiut.—11th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 158, 1893. 

Kukuch. The Lizard clan of the Hopi. 
Kokob.—Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 
283, 1903. Kii'-kii-tci.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. 
E., 39,1891. Kiikiitc wiiiwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. 
B. A. E., 583, 1901 {iviriwu= l clan’). Kukuts.— 
Dorsey and Voth, Oraibi Soyal, 13, 1901. Kuku- 
tsi.—Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 89, 1905. 

Kukuchomo (‘footprint mound’). A 
pueblo ruin, consisting of two conical 
mounds, on the Eastmesaof Tusayan, n. e. 
Arizona. It was built and occupied in 
prehistoric time by Hopi clans closely 
related to those of Sikyatki, with whom 
they are supposed to have removed to 


KULCHANA 733 

Awatobi.—Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 
587-588, 1898. 

Kukulek ( Ququ'lEk ). A Songish divi¬ 
sion residing at Cadboro bay. s. end of 
Vancouver id.—Boas in 6th "Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 17, 1890. 

Kukuliak. A Yuit Eskimo village on 
the n. shore of St Lawrence id., Bering 
sea.—Tebenkof (1849) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kukutwom. ( K’ukutwb'm , ‘ waterfall ’). 
A Squawmish village community on the 
e. side of Howe sd., Brit. Col.—Hill- 
Tout in Rep. Brit, A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kukwakum (‘the real Kwakiutl’). A 
gens of the Kwakiutl proper, consisting of 
two septs, the Guetela and the Komoyue. 
K’kwa'kum.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
54, 1890. Kukwa'kum.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1895, 330, 1897. Kwakoom.—Tolmie and Dawson, 
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118 b, 1884. 

Kulahiyi ( Kti'ldhi'yl , or in the lower 
Cherokee dialect, Kurdhi'yl , from Mid'hi, 
a plant used as salad by the Cherokee). 
A former Cherokee town in n. e. Georgia, 
from which Currahee mtn. takes its 
name. (j. m. ) 

Kulaiapto. A former Maidu village be¬ 
tween Mooretown and the village of 
Tsuka, Butte co., Cal.—Dixon in Bull. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Kulaken ( K'u'laqEn ). A Squawmish 
village community on Burrard inlet, 
Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. 
S., 475, 1900. 

Kulanapan Family. Adopted by Powell 
(7th Rep. B. A. E., 87, 1891) as the name 
of a linguistic family in Sonoma, Lake, 
and Mendocino cos., Cal., comprising the 
group of tribes generally known as Porno, 
q. v. See also Kuhlavapo. 
xKula-napo.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
hi, 421, 1853 (the name of one of the Clear Lake 
bands). >Mendocino (?).—Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 77, 1856 (name suggested for Chowe- 
shak, Batemdaikai, Kulanapo, Y ukai, and Khwak- 
lamayu languages): Latham, Opuscula, 343, 1860; 
Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 410,1862 (as above). 
>Pomo.— Powers in Overland Monthly, ix, 498, 
Dec. 1872 (general description of habitat and of 
family); Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 146, 
1877; Powell, ibid., 491 (vocabularies of Gal-li-no- 
m6-ro, Yo-kai'-a, Ba-tem-da-kaii, Chau-i-shek, 
Yu-kai, Ku-la-na-po, H’hana, Venaambakaiia, 
Ka'-bi-na-pek, Chwachamaju); Gatschet in Mag. 
Am. Hist., 16,1877 (gives habitat and enumerates 
tribesof family); Gatschetin Beach, Ind. Miscel., 
436,1877; Keane, in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and 
So. Am., app., 476, 1878 (includes Castel Pomos, 
Ki, Cahto, Choam, Chadela, Matomey Ki, Usal or 
Calamet, Shebalne Pomos, Gallinomeros, Sanels, 
Socoas, Lamas, Comachos). <Pomo.—Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, in, 566, 1882 (includes Ukiah, Galli- 
nomero, Masai lam agoon, Gualala, Matole, Kula¬ 
napo, San61, Yonios, Choweshak, Batemdakaie, 
Chocuyem,01amentke,Kainamare,andChwacha- 
maju; of these, Chocuyem and Olamentke are 
Moquelumnan). =Kulanapan.—Powell in 7th 
Rep. B. A. E„ 87, 1891. 

Kulatsen ( Ku'latsm ). A Squawmish vil¬ 
lage community on the e. side of Howe 
sd., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. 
A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kulchana (‘strangers’: Ahtena name), 
A nomadic Athapascan tribe in Alaska. 


734 


KULKUMISH-KUMAINI 


[E. a. e. 


living about the headwaters of Kusko- 
kwim r., holding little intercourse with 
neighboring peoples. They are now a 
remnant, numbering about 300 (11th 
Census, Alaska, 156, 1893), but were once 
formidable enemies of the Russians. 
Khunanilinde and Tochotno were two of 
their villages known to Zagoskin in 1843. 

Calcharnies.—Allen, Rep., 132,1887. Colcharney.— 
Ibid., note. Colching.—Mahoney in Ind. Aft. Rep. 
1869, 574, 1870. Coltshanie.—Latham in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond.,1,183,1848. Galcani.—Dawy- 
dow in Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29,1874. 
Galtzanen.—Richardson, Arct. Exped., I, 402,1851. 
Galzanen.—Holmberg,Ethnog.Skizz., 7,1855. Gal- 
zani.—Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 
232, 1848. Ghuil-chan.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 164, 1884 (trans. ‘tundra people’)- Golt- 
zane.—Zagoskin quoted by Petroff, ibid., 37. Gol- 
zan.—Latham in Trans.Philol. Soc.Lond.,68,1856. 
Golzanen.—Radloff, op. cit. Kal-chaina.—Dali in 
Proc. Am. A.A.S.,378,1885. Kcaltana.—Daw.vdow 
in Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29,1874. Khuil- 
chan.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, lb2, 1884. 
Khuilchana.—Ibid., map. Koichane.—Ibid., 162. 
Kolchans.—Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 
218,1841. Kolchina.—Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 1869, 
270, 1870 (Russian name). Kolshani.—Latham 
(1845) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 187, 1848. 
Koltchanes.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 62, 1881. 
Koltschane.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 134, 1874. 
Koltschanen.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 7, 1855. 
Koltschaner.—Erman, Archiv, Vii, 128, 1849. Kolt- 
shan.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 68,1856. 
Koltshanen.—Richardson, Arct. Exped., 1,402,1851. 
Koltshanes.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 116, 1874. 
Koltshani.—Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
68, 1856. Koltshany.—Latham (1845) in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 190,1848. Ktzialtana.—Pet¬ 
roff in 10thCensus, Alaska, 162,1884. Kuskokwim.— 
Latham, Essays, 269, 1860. Kuskoquimers.—Ibid., 
270. Ultschna.—Wrangell quoted by Baer and 
Helmerson, Beitriige, I, 110, 1839. TJltz-chna.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 164, 1884 (trans. 
‘slaves ’). 

Kulkumish ( Kulkumic ). A former 
Maidu village near Colfax, Placer co., 
Cal.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xvn, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Kullahan ( Kul-Whan , ‘ stockade ’). The 
site of an old village of the Semiahmoo.— 
Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 37, 1863. 

Kulleets. A Cowichan tribe on Chi- 
menes bay, Vancouver id.; pop. 68 in 
1904. 

Ku-lees.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1879, 308. Ku-leets.— 
Ibid., 1880, 316. Kulleets.—Ibid., 1901, pt. ii, 164. 
Q’ale'ts.—Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Kulomum ( Ku-lo'-mum ). A division of 
Maidu living formerly at Susanville, Las¬ 
sen co., Cal.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., iii, 282, 1877. 

Kuloskap. See Nanabozo. 

Kulsetsiyi ( KMsetsiyl , ‘ honey - locust 
place’; but as kMsetsl , the word for 
honey-locust, is also used for sugar, the 
local name has commonly been rendered 
Sugartown by traders). The name of 
several former settlement places in the old 
Cherokee country. One was on Keowee 
r., near the present Fall cr., in Oconee 
co., S. C.; another was on Sugartown or 
Cullasagee (Kuls6tsi) cr., nearthe present 
Franklin, in Macon co., N. C.; a third 
was on Sugartown cr. near the present 
Morganton, in Fannin co., Ga.—Mooney 
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 525, 1900. 


Culsagee.—Common map form. Kulsage.—Bar- 
tram, Travels, 372, 1792. 

Kulshtgeush (‘badger standing in the 
water ’). A Klamath settlement on Will- 
iamson r., Lake co., s. w. Oreg. 
Kulsam-Tge-us.—Gatschet in Cont. N,- A. Ethnol., 
II, pt. I, xxix, 1890. Kuls-Tge-ush.—Ibid. 

Kulswa ( Kul-swa ‘sun’). A gens of 
the Miami (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168, 1877. 

Kultuk. A Knaiakhotana village, of 17 
natives in 1880, on the e. side of Cook in¬ 
let, Alaska.—Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, 29, 1884. 

Kulukak. A Togiagmiut village on 
Kulukak bay, Alaska; pop. 65 in 1880. 

Kulluk.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. 

Kulul. . A former village of the Kalen- 
daruk division of the Costanoan family, 
connected with San Carlos mission, Cal. 
Culul.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Kulumi. A former small upper Creek 
town on the right bank of lower Talla¬ 
poosa r., in n.. Montgomery co., Ala., w. 
of and contiguous to Fusihatchi. Haw¬ 
kins, in 1799, saw there a conical mound 30 
ft in diameter opposite the town square. 
A part of the inhabitants had settled on 
Likasa cr. Remains of “Old Coolome 
town” were on the opposite side of Talla¬ 
poosa r. at the time of Bartram’s visit in 
1791. After the war of 1813-14 the in¬ 
habitants of Kulumi joined the Seminole 
in a body., ( a. s. g. ) 

Caloumas.—Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799 (errone¬ 
ously on the Chattahoochee). Colemmys.—Cor¬ 
nell (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., 1 ,384, 1832. 
Collamee.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Co- 
lomga.—Lattr6, Carte des Etats-Unis, 1784. Colo- 
miesk.—Robin, Voy., ii, map, 1807. Coolamies.— 
Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,v, 262,1855. 
Coolome.—Bartram, Travels, 394, 395,448,461,1791. 
Coolooma.—Hawkins (1813) in Am. State Pap., 
Ind. Aff., i, 854,1832. Coo-loo-me.—Hawkins (1799), 
Sketch, 25, 33, 52, 1848. Culloumas.—Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., i, 719, 1786. Cullowes.—Gussefeld, Map of 
U. S., 1784 (wrongly placed on Chattahoochee). 
Kulumi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1,136,1884. 

Kulushut ( Ku-lu'-shut , ‘thieving peo¬ 
ple’: Kaniagmiut name). A division of 
the Ahtena on Copper r., Alaska, next 
to the Ikherkhamiut.—Hoffman, MS., 
B. A. E., 1882. 

Kulvagavik. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village on the w. shore of Kuskokwim 
bay, Alaska; pop. 10 in 1880. 
Koolvagavigamute. — Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, map, 1884. Kulvagavik.—Baker, Geog. 
Dist. Alaska, 1902. Kulwoguwigumut.—Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Kumachisi. A former Yokuts (Mari- 
posan) tribe that lived on Tule or Kern 
r., Cal., or on one of the intervening 
streams.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. 

Kumadha ( Kum-ad-ha ). Given by 
Bourke (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 
1889) as a clan of the Mohave, q. v. 

Kumaini. A village of the Awani for¬ 
merly at the lower end of the Great 
Meadow, about a quarter of a mile from 
Yosemite falls, Mariposa co., Cal. 
Coomine.—Powers in Overland Monthly, x, 333, 
1874. Ku-mai'-m.—Powers in Cont. N. A* Ethnol., 
ill, 365, 1877. 


BULL. 30] 


KUMARMIUT-KUNGTSOA 


735 


Kumarmiut. An Angmagsalingmint 
Eskimo village on an island at the mouth 
of Angmagsalik fjord, Greenland, lat. 65° 
45 / ; pop. 28 in 1884.—Meddelelser om 
Grdnland, ix, 379, 1902. 

Kumbatuash. The native name of the 
inhabitants of Kumbat, a rocky tract of 
land s. w. of Tule or Rhett lake, Cal., ex¬ 
tending from the lake shore to the Lava- 
beds. These people are a mixture of 
Klamath Lake and Modoc Indians, and 
are said to have separated from these after 
1830. 

Cum-ba-twas.—Meacham, Wigwam and Warpath, 
577, 1875. Gumbatkni. —Gatschet in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., II, pt. II, 160 1890. Kumbatkni.—Ibid. 
Kumbatuash.—Ibid. Kumbatuashkni.—Ibid. Kum- 
ba.twash.—Ibid., pt. I, xxxiv, 1890. Rock Indians.— 
Meacham, op. cit., 610. 

Kumiyus (K’u'-mi-yus'). A former 
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 230, 
1890. 

Kumkwu ^K^iim-kwii'). A former Sius¬ 
law village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.—Dorsey 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 230, 1890. 

Kumsukwum (K’um'-su-k’iv'fi.m). A 
former Yaquina village on the s. side of 
Yaquina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, nr, 229, 1890. 

Kun. The Corn clans of the Tewa 
pueblos of San Juan and Santa Clara, N. 
Mex. See Konglo. 

Khu n -tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix,349, 1896 
(Santa Clara form; tdoa = 4 people’). Kun-tdoa.— 
Ibid. (San Juan form). 

Kuna-lanas ( Ku'na la'nas , ‘ town people 
of the point ’). An important family of 
the Raven, clan of the Haida. According 
to one story it was so named because its 
people lived on a point in the legendary 
town of Skena (see Tadji-lanas) ; but more 
probably it refers to the point at Naikun 
where these people were at one time 
settled. The Teeskun-lnagai, Hlielung- 
kun-lnagai, Saguikun-lnagai, and Yagun- 
kun-lnagai were subdivisions, (j. r. s.) 
Ku'na lanas.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 1905. 
Kun la'nas.—Boas. 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 
23,1898. Kwun l.ennas.—Harrison in Proc. and 
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, sec. ii, 125,1895. 

Kundji ( Ku'ndji). A legendary Haida 
town on the s. shore of Copper bay, 
Moresby id., Queen Charlotte group, 
Brit. Col. The family living there is said 
to have been the Daiyuahl-lanas. An¬ 
other town of this name formerly stood on 
the w. side of Prevost id., in the Ninstints 
country.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 
1905. 

Kunechin (Qune'tcin). A Seechelt sept 
which formerly lived at the head of 
Queen’s reach, Jervis inlet, Brit. Col. 
The founder of this division is said to 
have come from Jt Rupert.—Hill-Tout in 
Jour. Anthr. Inst., 23, 1904. 

Kuneste (Wailaki: ‘Indian’). The 
southernmost Athapascan group on the 


Pacific coast, consisting of several tribes 
loosely or not at all connected politically, 
but speaking closely related dialects and 
possessing nearly the same culture. They 
occupied the greater part of Eel r. basin, 
including the whole of Van Duzen fork, 
the main Eel to within a few miles of 
Round valley, the s. fork and its tributa¬ 
ries to Long and Cahto valleys, and the 
coast from Bear River range s. to Usal. 
Their neighbors were the Wishosk on the 
n., the Wintun on the w., and on the s. 
the Yuki, whose territory they bisect at 
Cahto, where they penetrate to the Porno 
country. The Kuneste subdivisions are 
Lassik, Wailaki, Sinkyone, Kato, and 
Mattole. (p. e. g.) 

Ken'-es-ti.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 
114, 1877 (own name). Kool.—A. L. Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1903 (Yuki name). Kuneste.—P. E. God¬ 
dard, inf’n, 1904 (Wailaki name). 

Kung (Qati) . A former Haida town, 
owned by the Sakua-lanas, at the mouth 
of Naden harbor, Graham id.. Queen 
Charlotte group, Brit. Col. Possibly this 
is the place referred to by John Work as 
Nigh-tasis (q. v.), where there were said 
to be 15 houses and 280 inhabitants in 
1836-41. Old people remember 12 houses 
there. The inhabitants have all moved 
to Masset. • (j. r. s. ) 

K ang.—Boas, Twelfth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
23, 1898. Nigh-tasis.—Work (1836-41) in Dawson, 
Q. Charlotte Ids., 173 b, 1880. 0,An. —Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Kungaii. The Sweet-corn clan of San 
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Ku n aii-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 
1896 (<dda=‘ people ’). 

Kungfetdi. The Black-corn clan of 
San Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 
Ku n fetdi-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 
1896 ( tdoa = 4 people ’). 

Kungga ( QlA'nga , ‘helpreceived unex¬ 
pectedly’). A former Haida town, oc¬ 
cupied by the Kona-kegawai, on the s. 
shore of Dog id., Queen Charlotte group, 
Brit. Col. The inhabitants moved to 
Kloo.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278, 1905. 

Kungielung (K!u'ngielAn ). A former 
Haida town on the w. side of the en¬ 
trance to Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte 
ids., Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
281, 1905. 

Kungpi. The Red-corn clan of San 
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Ku n pi-tdoa.—Hodg° in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349,1896 
(td6a= l people’). 

Kungtsa. The White-corn clan of San 
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Ku n tsa-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 
1896 {td6a= % people'). 

Kungtsei. The Yellow-corn clan of 
San Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Ku"tsei-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 
1896 (td6a=‘ people ’). 

Kungtsoa. The Blue-corn clan of San 
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Ku"tsoa-td6a.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 
1896 (td6a=‘ people’). 


736 


KUNGUGEMIUT-KUSA 


[B. A. E. 


Kungugemiut. A division of the Male- 
miut Eskimo on Buckland r., Alaska. 
Kangoot Mutes.—Kelly, Arctic Eskimo, chart, 
1890. Kanikgmut.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. 
in Am., pt. I, 73, 1847. Kongigamut.—Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Kongigamute.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884. Kotso- 
khotana.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. in Am., pt. I, 
73, 1847 (Tinneh name). Kungeeg-ameuts.—Hoo¬ 
per, Cruise of Corwin, 26, 1880. Kungugemut.— 
Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 16, 1877. 

Kungya. The Turquoise clans of the 
Tewa pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, 
San Ildefonso, and Tesuque, N. Mex. See 
Kuyanwe. 

Ko n ya-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX, 352,1896 
(Tesuque form; tdoa=‘ people’). Kunya-tdoa.— 
Ibid. (San Juan and Santa Clara form). Ku n ye- 
tdoa.—Ibid. (San Ildefonso form). 

Kungyi. The Antclanof Nambe pueblo, 
N. Mex. 

Ku n yi-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 348,1896 
(tdoa= ‘people’). 

Kunhalas ( Ku'nxalas) . A former Haida 
town or camp just inside of Cumshewa pt., 
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It be¬ 
longed to the Kona-kegawai.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 278, 1905. 

Kunhittan ( Kun-hittan , ‘ people of 

flicker house ’). Given by Krause (Tlin- 
kit Ind., 120, 1885) as a Tlingit division, 
but in reality it is merely a name for the 
inhabitants of a house at Kuiu belonging 
to the Nastedi, q. v. 

Kunipalgi ( k'uno, Wono, ‘skunk’; algi, 
‘people’). A Creek clan. 

Ku'-mu.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Kuni¬ 
palgi.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155,1884. 

Kunjeskie. A Tlingit settlement in 
Alaska; location not given; pop. 150 in 
1835, according to Veniaminoff. 

Koonjeskie.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227, 1875 
(transl. from Veniaminoff). 

Kunkhogliak. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil¬ 
lage on Yukon r., Alaska, containing 11 
people in 1844.—Zagoskin quoted by 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. 

Kunkia ( QlA'nkia ). A former Haida 
town on the N. coast of North id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 281, 1905. 

Kunmiut (‘ river people ’). An Eskimo 
tribe living on Kok r. above Wainwright 
inlet, Alaska. They have been displaced 
by Nunatogmiut immigrants, and in 1890 
had only 3 settlements left, each contain¬ 
ing from 1 to 4 families. One of these 
was Kilimantavie. 

Kilauwitawi'nmiun.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 
44, 1892. Kooagomutes.—Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., 
map, 1886. Koogmute.—Kelly, Arct. Eskimos, 14, 
1890. Kooq Mutes. — Ibid., chart. Kugmiut.— 
Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. Ku'iimiun.— 
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 44, 1892. 

Kunnas-hadai (Kunnas:had'a'i, ‘wTiale- 
house people’). Given by Boas (Fifth 
Report N. W. Tribes Canada, 27, 1889) 
as the name of a subdivision of the Yaku- 
lanas, a family of the Raven clan of the 
Haida, but in reality it is only a house 
name belonging to thatgroup. (.t. r. s. ) 

Kunnesee. See Dragging-canoe. 

Kunniwunneme ( Kun-ni'-wCin-ne'-me ). 
An Oregon tribe e. of the Tillamook (Dor¬ 


sey, Naltunnetunne MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884), identified as in Athapascan terri¬ 
tory, but otherwise unknown. 

Kunnupiyu {K , un-nu'-‘pi-yu'). A for¬ 
mer Yaquina village on the n. side of 
Yaquina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 229, 1890. 

Kunstamish ( Kun-sta-mish ). A village 
of the Guauaenok Kwakiutl on the e. side 
ofClaydonbay,Wellspassage, Brit. Col.— 
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, 
sec. ir, 73. 

Kuosugru {Kuosu'gru). Asummervil- 
lage of the Utkiavinmiut Eskimo, on a 
dry place inland from Pt Barrow, Alas¬ 
ka.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 
1892. 

Kupimithlta ( Ku-dV-miql-W ). A former 
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 230, 
1890. 

Kuping. The Coral clans of the Tewa 
pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, San Il¬ 
defonso, and Tesuque, N. Mex. That of 
Tesuque is extinct. 

Kopi n -tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 
(San Juan form; tdda = ‘people’). Kup£ n -tdoa.— 
Ibid. (San Ildefonso form). Kupi n -tdoa.—Ibid. 
(Tesuque form). Kupi-toda.—Ibid. (Santa Clara 
form; tdda misprinted for td6a). 

Kupkipcock. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy on Pamunkey’r., King Wil¬ 
liam co., Va., in 1608. 

Kaposecocke.—Strachey ( ca. 1612). Virginia, 62, 
1849. Kupkipcock.—Smith (1629) .Virginia, I, map, 
repr. 1819. 

Kuptagok. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Kurni. The Goose clan of the Tigua 
ueblo of Isleta, N. Mex. 

urni-t’ainin.—Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, 350,1896 ( t'alnin = ‘people’). 

Kurts. The Antelope clans of the Kere- 
san pueblos of Laguna, Acoma, Sia, San 
Felipe, and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Ante¬ 
lope clan of Laguna claims to have come 
originally from Zuni and to form a phra- 
try with theTsits (Water) clan, while that 
of Acoma forms a phratrv with the Water 
clan of that pueblo. The Antelope clan 
of Cochiti is extinct. (f. w. h. ) 

Kur'ts-hanoq ch .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 348, 
18% (Acoma form; hdnoqch = ‘people’). Kur'tsi- 
hano rh —Ibid. (Laguna form). Kurtz.—Stevenson 
in 11th Rep. B. A. E.,.19, 1894 (Sia name). Ku'ts- 
hano.—Hodge, op. cit. (Siaform). Ku'ts-hanuch.— 
Ibid. (Cochiti form). Kuuts-hano.—Ibid. (San Fe¬ 
lipe form). 

Kusa (Gatschet suggests kosa , the name 
of a small forest bird resembling a spar¬ 
row, or o'sa, osd, ‘ pokeweed,’ as the origin 
of the word; but if the people of Kusa 
are identical with the Conshac of the 
French, the name would mean ‘cane,’ 
‘reed,’ or ‘reedbrake.’ See Conshac). 
A former town of the Upper Creeks, 
on the high e. bank of Coosa r., 
between Columbiana and Talladega, in 
Talladega co., Ala., between the points 
where Talladega and Tallahatchie , crs. 
join the Coosa, and on the site of the 


BULL. 30] 


KUSAN FAMILY-KUSKUSKI 


737 


present Coosa station. The town was 
once regarded as an important center, a 
sort of capital. The De Soto expedition 
of 1540—41 saw it in its flourishing condi¬ 
tion, but when Bartram passed it, about 
1775, it was mostly in ruins and half de¬ 
serted, a part of its inhabitants evidently 
having joined the Abikudshi, while the 
others went to the nearby Natchez town. 
Up to 1775, according to Adair, Kusa was 
a place of refuge for “those who kill un- 
designedly.” The Upper Creeks were 
frequently called “Coosas,” from the 
name of the town. 

Coca.—Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., II, 141,1850. Cooca.—French, ibid., 2d s., 
11,247,1875. Coosa.—Romans, Fla., 90, 1775. Coo- 
sau.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 41,1848. Coosaw.— 
Martin, N. C., I, 194, 1829. Coosee.—Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., Ala. map, 1899. Coosis.—U. S. Ind. 
Treat. (1797), 68, 1837. Corsas.—Hawkins (1799), 
Sketch, 15, 1848. Cosa—Jefferys, French Dom. 
Am., map, 134, 1761. Cossa.—Vandera (1567) in 
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., I, 18, 1857. Cousas.— 
Mitchell, map (1755), cited in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
x, 219, 1858. Coussa.—Coxe, Carolana. map, 1741. 
Cozas.—Ibid.,25. Curas.—Rafinesque, introd.Mar- 
shall, Ky.,l, 35,1824. Cuzans.—Ibid.,24. Koosah.— 
Adair, Am. Ind., 159,1775. 

Kusan Family. A small linguistic stock 
formerly occupying villages on Coos r. 
and bay, and on lower Coquille r., Oreg. 
(see Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 89, 
1891). The name is from that of the 
tribe, Coos (q. v.) or Kusa, which is said 
to be taken from one of the Rogue River 
dialects in which it means ‘lake,’ ‘la¬ 
goon,’ or ‘inland bay.’ Within historic 
times there have been 4 villages in this 
region in which the Kusan language was 
spoken. It is probable that at an earlier 
period the family extended much farther 
inland along the tributaries of Coos bay, 
but had been gradually forced into the 
contracted area on the coast by the pres¬ 
sure of the Athapascan tribes on the s. 
and e. and the Yakonan on the n. The 
stock is now practically extinct; the few 
survivors, for the greater part of mixed 
blood, are on the Siletz res. in Oreg., 
whither they went after ceding their 
lands by (unconfirmed) treaty of 1855. 
Practically nothing is known of the cus¬ 
toms of this people, but there is no rea¬ 
son to suppose that they differed mark¬ 
edly from their neighbors on the n. The 
social unit was apparently the village, and 
there is no trace of a clan or gentile sys¬ 
tem other than the relationships natu¬ 
rally arising in a locally restricted group. 
It is interesting to note also that the prac¬ 
tice of deforming the head was not cur¬ 
rent among the Kusan, although preva¬ 
lent among the Yakonan, their northern 
neighbors. The Kusan villages known to 
have existed are: Melukitz, n. side of 
Coos bay; Anasitch, s. side of Coos bay; 
Mulluk (speaking a different dialect), n. 
side of Coquille r.; Nasumi, s. side of 
Coquille r. (l. f. ) 


Kuseshyaka. The extinct White-corn 
clan of Acoma pueblo, N. Mex. See 
Yaka.. 

Kuseshyaka-hanoq ch .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., 
ix, 349,1896 ( yaka =‘corn ’,hdnoqch= ‘people’). 

Kushapokla (‘divided people’). One 
of the two Choctaw phratries, consisting 
of 4 clans: Kushiksa, Lawokla, Lulak- 
iksa, and Linoklusha. 

Kashapaokla.-ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 402, 
1885. Kashap-ukla.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 
1,104,1884. Ku-shap'. Ok'-la.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
162, 1877. 

Kushetunne. A former village of the 
Tututni on the n. side of Rogue r., Oreg. 
Cosatomy.—Palmer in Ind. AIT. Rep. 1856 , 219, 
1857. Kas-so-teh-nie.—Gibbs, MS. on coast tribes, 
B. A. E. xuc-ce' }unne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 233, 1890. Kwus-se'-iun.—Dorsev, 
Naltdnne jOnng MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Nal- 
tunnetunne name). 

Kushiksa ( Kush-ik'-sa). The Reed clan 
of the Choctaw, belonging to the Kush- 
apokla or Divided people phratry.—Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 162, 1877. 

Kushletata ( K&c'-le-ta'-ta ). A former 
Chastacosta village on Rogue r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 234, 
1890. 

Xushuh (‘ cottonwood tree ’). A former 
Chitimacha village on L. Mingaluak, 
near Bayou Chene, La. 

Kushu’h namu.—Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. 
Wash., ii, 152,1883 (ndm?t = ‘village’). 

Kusilvak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage and Roman Catholic mission on 
Kusilvak id., at the mouth of Yukon r., 
Alaska. 

Kusilvak.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Kusilvuk.—Bruce, Alaska, 1885. 

Kuskok. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Kuskokwim r., Alaska, near its 
mouth; pop. 24 in 1880, 115 in 1890. 

Kuskogamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
map, 1884. Kuskohkagamiut.—Eleventh Census, 
Alaska, 164, 1893. Kuskok.—Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1902. Kuskokvagamute.—Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 17,1884. Kuskokvagmute.—Petroff, 
Rep. on Alaska, 74, 1881. Kuskokwagamute.— 
Hallock in Nat. Geog. Mag., ix, 88, 1898. 

Kuskokvak. A (former?) Kuskwog¬ 
miut Eskimo village on the w. bank of 
Kuskokwim r., Alaska, near its mouth. 
Kuskokvakh.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Kuskovak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 
Kuskovakh.—Nelson (1879) cited by Baker, ibid. 

Kuskunuk. A Kaialigamut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Hooper bay, Alaska.—Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Kuskuski (seemingly from kushkush- 
ktng, ‘ hog place ’). An important village 
of mixed Delawares and Iroquois, in 1753- 
1770, on Beaver cr., Pa., near Newcastle, 
in Lawrence co. A note in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist, x, 949, says it was at the forks of 
Beaver cr., in Beaver co. Another au¬ 
thority (Darlington, Gist’s Jour., 101, 
1898) says it was on the w. bank of Ma¬ 
honing r., 6 m. above the forks of Beaver 
cr. and just s. of the present Edinburg, 
Lawrence co. An older village of the 
same name had formerly stood on the 
Shenango, at the site of the present New- 


57008°—Bull. 30—12 


47 



738 


KUSKU8SU-KUTAUWA 


[b. a. e. 


castle. In 1758 Kuskuski was composed 
of 4 distinct settlements, having a total 
population of about 1,000 souls, (j. m. ) 
Cacnecacheki.—Vaudreuii (1759) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., X, 949, 1858. Cachekacheki.—Ibid. Cas,- 
cagh,sa,gey.—Clinton (1750), ibid., VI, 549, 1855. 
Coscosky.—Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West. Pa., 
app., 14, 1840. Cuschcushke.—Heckewelder in 
Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., n. s., IV, 395,1834. Cuscus- 
kie.—Croghan (1750) in Rupp, West. Pa., app., 
27, 1846. Cuskcaskking,—Pa. Archives, ill, 525, 
1853. Cuskuskus.—Rupp., op. cit., 138 (pi. form 
used for the inhabitants). Cususkey.—Day, Pa., 62, 
1843. Kaschkaschkung. —Leroy and Leininger 
(1755) in Pa. Mag. Hist, and Biog., xxix, 412, 
1905. Kaskaskunk.—Loskiel, Miss. United Breth., 
pt. 3, 55, 1794. Kaskuskies.—Gist (1753) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., V, 103, 1836. Kishkuske.— 
Hutcnin’smap (1764) in Smith, Bouquet’s Exped., 
1766. Kshkushking.—Post (1758) in Rupp, West. 
Pa., app., 116, 1846 (u omitted). Kushcushkec.— 
Post (1758) in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 5, 39, 1848. 
Kushkushkee.—Post (1758) in Rupp, West. Pa., 
app., 80, 1846. Kushkushking.—Post (1758) in 
Rupp, West. Pa., app., 103, 1846. Kushkuskies.— 
Smith, Bouquet’s Exped., 67,1766. Kuskuschki.— 
Heckewelder in Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., n. s., iv, 
366, 1834. Kuskuskas.—Washington (1753) in 
Rupp, West. Pa., app., 39, 1846. Kuskuskees.— 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 949, note, 1858. Kuskus- 
kies.—Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Kuskuskin.—Alden 
(1834) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 144, 1837. 
Kuskusko Town.—Washington (1753) in Rupp, 
West. Pa., app., 41,1846. Kuskusky.—Peters (1760) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix,258,1871. Mur¬ 
dering town.—Washington (1753) in Rupp, West. 
Pa., app., 48,1846. Murthering Town,—Gist (1753) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., v, 103, 1836. 

Kuskussu ( Xus'-kus-su '). A former Si- 
uslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.—Dorsey 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 230, 1890. 

Kuskwogmiut. An Eskimo tribe in¬ 
habiting the shores of Kuskokwim bay 
and the banks of Kuskokwim r. and its 
tributaries as far as Kolmakof, Alaska. 
They are the most numerous of the tribes 
and the least modified through contact 
with whites. They live in underground 
huts, with frames of driftwood covered 
with sods. They hunt the walrus, the 
beluga, and the hair seal. Sea birds 
provide them with meat and eggs, and 
the feathered skins with clothing. The 
streams and lakes of the interior abound 
in trout, and herds of reindeer feed on the 
tundra. Their fuel is driftwood. They 
drink the foul water of the lagoons, yet 
are healthy and strong. Every male has 
a kaiak. Above tide water they use 
birch-bark canoes. They catch salmon 
and whitefish in wicker weirs, and trap 
foxes and otters. There is little that the 
natives can obtain to sell, and therefore 
they remain in their aboriginal condition. 
They are skillful carvers of ivory and 
wood. The dwellers on the tundra, 
where wild fowl and berries are plenty, 
repair with their kaiaks in the summer 
to trap and dry their winter supply of 
salmon. . Villages on the upper reaches 
are built of wood, and each has its large 
ceremonial house in which masked dances 
take place in winter. Besides the sum¬ 
mer houses roofed with sod there are the 
usual underground winter habitations 
reached by a tunnel. 


The tribe numbered 3,287 in 1899. 
The Kuskw r ogmiut villages are as fol¬ 
lows: Agomekelenanak, Agulakpak, Agu- 
liak, Agumak, Akiachak, Akiak, Ak- 
lut, Akmiut, Anagok, Apahiachak, Apo- 
kak, Atchaluk, Bethel, Chimiak, Chuar- 
litilik, Ekaluktaluk, Etoluk, Igiakchak, 
lliutak, Kahmiut, Kakuiak, Kakuikak, 
Kaltshak, Kaluktuk, Ivamegli, Kanagak, 
Kanak, Kenachananak, Kiktak, Kinak, 
Kinegnagak, Kinegnak, Klchakuk, Kle- 
guchek, Klutak, Kolmakof, Kongiganak, 
Kuilkluk, Kukluktuk, Kulvagavik, Kus- 
kok, Kuskokvak, Kweleluk, Kwik, Kwi- 
kak, Kwilokuk, Kvvinak, Lomavik, 
Mumtrak, Mumtrelek, Nak, Nakolkavik, 
Napai, Napaiskak, Napakiak, Nochak, 
Novoktolak, Okaganak, Oknagak, Oyak, 
Papka, Shevenak, Shiniak, Shokfak, 
Takiketak, Togiaratsorik, Tuklak, Tular- 
ka, Tuluksak, Tunagak, ITgovik, Ukna- 
vik, Ulokak, Vinasale, and Yakchilak. 
Agulmut. —Holm berg quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., I, 18, 1877. Inkaliten.—Wrangell 
quoted by Dali, ibid. Koskoquims. — Elliott, Cond. 
AIT. in Alaska, 29, 1875. Kouskokhantses.—Lutke, 
Voyage, 1 ,181,1835 (seemingly identical). Kusch- 
kukchwak-muten.— Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 127, 
1839. Kushokwagmut. —Nelson in 18th Rep.B. A.E., 
map, 1899. Kusko kuax tana. —Doroschin in Rad- 
loff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29,1874 (Kinai name). 
Kuskokwagmut. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. 
ii, 1899. Kuskokwigmjuten. — Holmberg, Ethnog. 
Skizz., 5, 1855. Kuskokwim.— Nelson in Soc. Roy. 
Beige de Geog., 318, 1901. Kuskokwimer. —Wran¬ 
gell, Ethnog. Nachr., 121, 1839. Kuskokwimjuts.— 
Turner quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
18, 1877. Kuskokwims. —Latham (1845) in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 185, 1848. Kuskokwimtsi.— 
Worman quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
I, 18, 1877. Kuskutchewalc.— Richardson, Arct. 
Exped., I, 364, 1851. Kuskutshewak. —Latham, 
Elem. Comp. Philol., 386, 1862. Kuskwogmuts.— 
Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 267, 1869. 

Kustahekdaan ( KAstaxe'xda-an ). A for¬ 
mer Tlingit town in the Sitka country, 
Alaska. (j. r. s.) 

Kustatan. A Knaiakhotana village, of 
45 natives in 1890, on the w. side of Cook 
inlet, Alaska.—11th Census, Alaska, 163, 
1893. 

Kuta. Said to be a clan of the pueblo 
of Santo Domingo, N. Mex. The name 
refers to either the sagebrush or the sun¬ 
flower.—Bourke, Moquis of Arizona, 13, 
1884. 

Shfpi.— Bourke, ibid. (Kuta or). 

Kutaiimiks ( RuV-ai-lm-iks, ‘ they do not 
laugh’). A division of the Piegan tribe 
of the Siksika, q. v. 

Don’t Laugh.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
225, 1892. Ka-ti'-ya-ye-mix.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
171, 1877 ( =‘never laugh’). Ko-te'-yi-miks. — 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264, 1862 
( = ‘the band thatdonotlaugh’). Kut'-ai-im-iks. — 
Grinnell, op. cit., 209. The People that don’t 
laugh.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 
1851. 

Kutaisotsiman (‘no parfleche’). A divi¬ 
sion of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika. 
Kut-ai-sot'-si-man. —Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. No Parfleche. —Ibid., 225. 

Kutauwa. A former Alsea village on 
theN. side of Alsea r., Oreg., at its mouth. 
Ku-tau'-wa.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
229, 1890. Necketo.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 


BULL. 30] 


KUTAWICHASHA-KUTCHIN 


739 


118,1814. Necketoos.—Ibid., II, 592, 1817. Neekee- 
toos.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 371, 1822. Neeke- 
toos.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 473, 1814. 

Kutawichasha (‘ lowland people ’). One 
of the two chief local divisions of the 
Brule Teton Sioux, formerly inhabiting 
the bottom lands along Missouri r. 
Coutah-wee-cha-cha.—Corliss, Lacotah MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 106, 1874. Kud-witcaca.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897. Ku n ta-witcaca. — Ibid. 
Kunwica'sa. — Iapi Oaye, xil, 12, 1884. Kuta- 
witcaca.—Dorsey, op. cit. Lower Brule.—U. S. 
Stat., xiv, 699, 1868. Lower Brusle.—U. S. Ind. 
Treat., 892, 1873. Lowland Brule.—Dorsey, op. cit. 
Toncas.—Corliss, Lacotah MS.vocab., B. A. E., 106, 
1874. 

Kutchakutchin (‘giant people’). A 
Kutchin tribe in Alaska, inhabiting both 
banks of the Yukon from Birch cr. to 
Porcupine r., including the Ft Yukon dis¬ 
trict. In 1847 McMurray descended Por¬ 
cupine r. to the Yukon and built Ft 



SAVIAH, CHIEF OF THE KUTCHAKUTCHIN. (from Richard 
son, Arctic searching Exped., 1851) 


Yukon at the confluence. In 1860 Robert 
Kennicott wintered at Ft Yukon, and in 
1866 Ketchum explored the country about 
the fort. In May, 1867, Dali and Whym- 
per (Dali, Alaska, 277, 1870) visited Ft 
Yukon, being the first to reach that point 
by way of the river. The Kutchakutchin 
are somewhat nomadic, living principally 
by hunting and trapping the fox, marten, 
wolf, wolverene, deer, lynx, rabbit, 
marmot, and moose. They are traders, 
making little for themselves, but buying 
from the tribes which use Ft Yukon as a 
common trading post. Nakieik, their 
standard of value, consists of strings of 
beads, each string 7 ft long. A string is 
worth one or more beaver skins accord¬ 
ing to the kind of beads, and the whole 
nakieik is valued at 24 pelts. Their 


dwellings, shaped like inverted teacups 
are of sewed deerskins fastened over 
curved poles. The women are said to per¬ 
form most of the drudgery, but the men 
cook. Lacking pottery, their utensils are 
of wood, matting, sheep horns, or birch 
bark; their dishes are wooden troughs; 
and their spoons of wood or horn hold a 
pint. Kettles of woven tamarack roots 
are obtained from the Hankutchin. 
Jones says they are divided into three 
castes or clans: Tchitcheah (Chitsa), 
Tengeratsey (Tangesatsa), and Natsahi 
(Natesa). Formerly a man must marry 
into another clan, but this custom has 
fallen into disuse. Polygamy and slavery 
are practised among them. They for¬ 
merly burned their dead, but now use a 
coffin placed upon a raised platform, a 
feast accompanying the funeral ceremony. 
Richardson (Arct. Exped., i, 386, 1851) 
placed the number of men at 90. They 
have a village at Ft Yukon. Senati, on 
the middle Yukon, was settled by them. 
The Tatsakutchin and Tennuthkutchin, 
offshoots of the main tribe, are extinct. 
Eert-kai-lee. —Parry quoted by Murdoeh in 9th 
Rep. B. A. E., 51, i892. Fort Indians. —Ross, MS. 
noteson Tinne, B. A. E. Ik-kil-lin. —Gilder quoted 
by Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 51, 1892. Itch- 
aii. —11th Census, Alaska, 154,1893. It-kagh-lie.— 
Lyon quoted by Murdoch, op. cit. It-ka-lya- 
ruin. —Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1 ,30, 1877 
(Nuwukmiut Eskimo name). I't-ka-lyi.— Simp¬ 
son quoted by Murdoch, op. cit. Itkpe'lit. —Peti- 
tot, Vocab. Fran^ais-Esquimau, 42, 1876. Itkpe- 
leit.— Ibid., xxiv. Itku'dliii.— Murdoch, op. cit. 
Koo-cha-koo-chin. —Hardisty in Smithson. Rep., 
311,1866. Kot-a-Kutchin.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 
147,1874. Kotch-a-Kutchins. —Whymper, Alaska, 
247,1869. Koushca Kouttchin.— Petitot, Autour du 
lacdesEsclaves,361,1891. KutchaaKuttchin.— Peti¬ 
tot, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1865. Kutcha-kutchi.— 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., i, 386, 1851. Kutch a 
Kutchin. —Kirkby (1862) in Hind, Lab. Penin.,u, 
254,1863. Kutchia-Kuttchin. —Petitot, Diet. Den6- 
Dindji£, xx, 1876 (‘giant people’). Kutsha-Ku- 
tshi. —Latham, Nat. Races, 293, 1854. Low-land¬ 
ers.— Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d Cong., 1st 
sess., 34, i871. Lowland people.— Whymper, Alaska, 
254, 1869. Na-Kotchpo-tschig-Kouttchin. —Petitot, 
Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361,1891 (‘people of 
the river with gigantic banks ’) . O-til'-tin.— Daw¬ 
son in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., ‘202 b, 1887. Youkon 
Louchioux Indians. —Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, 
B. A. E. 

Kutchin (‘people’). A group of Atha¬ 
pascan tribes in Alaska and British 
North America, inhabiting the region 
on the Yukon and its tributaries above 
Nuklukayet, the Peel r. basin, and the 
lower Mackenzie valley. They have 
decreased to half their former numbers 
owing to wars between the tribes and the 
killing of female children. Chiefs and 
medicine-men and those who possess rank 
acquired by property have two or more 
wives. They usually live in large parties, 
each headed by a chief and having one 
or more medicine-men, the latter acquir¬ 
ing an authority to which even the chiefs 
are subject. Their dances and chants are 
rhythmical and their games are more 
manly and rational than those of their 
congeners. They have wrestling bouts 




740 


KUTCHLOK-KUTENAI 


[B. A. H. 


which are begun by little boys, those 
next in strength coming on in turn until 
the strongest or freshest man in the band 
remains the final victor, after which the 



KUTCHIN WOMAN. (am/muS. Nat. Hist.) 


women go through the same progressive 
contest. They are exceedingly hospita¬ 
ble, keeping guests for months, and each 
head of a family takes his turn in feasting 



KUTCHIN MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


the whole band, on which occasion eti¬ 
quette requires him to fast until the guests 
have departed (Hardisty in Smithson. 
Rep. for 1866, 313). The Kutchin tribes 


are Tenankutchin, Natsitkutchin, Ku- 
tchakutchin, Hankutchin, Trotsikku- 
tchin, Tutchonekutchin, Vuntakutchin, 
Tukkuthkutchin, Tatlitkutchin, Nako- 
tchokutchin, and Kwitcbakutchin. 
Dehkewi.—Petitot, Kutchin MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1869 (Kawchodinneh name). Dendjye.—Petitot, 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1865. Di-go-thi-tdinne.— 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., i, 378, 1851 (Kaw¬ 
chodinneh name). Dindjie.— Petitot in Bui. 
Soc. de G6og. Paris, chart, 1875. Dindjie.— 
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361, 1891. 
Dindjie Loucheux.—Ibid., 289. Erkileit.—Ibid., 163 
(Greenland Eskimo name). Irkpeleit.—Ibid. 
Koochin.—Anderson (1858) in Hind, Lab. Penin. 
11,260,1863. Koo-tchin'.—Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 
58,1870. Kuchin.—Ibid. Kutchin.—Richardson, 
Arct. Exped.,214, 1851. Ku-t’qin.—Morice, Notes 
on W. Denes, 15, 1893. Kutshi.—Latham, Nat. 
Races, 293,1854. Kutshin.—Ibid. ,292. Loo-choos.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 27,1852. Loucheux.— 
Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, ii, 83,1824 (Canadian 
French, ‘squint-eyes’). Louchioux.—Ross, MS. 
notes on Tinne, B. A. E. Louchoux.—Ibid. Quar¬ 
relers.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, n, 27, 1852. 
Sharp-eyed Indians.—Richardson in Franklin, 
Second Exped. Polar Sea, 165, 1828. Squint 
Eyes.—Franklin, Journ. Polar Seas, II, 83, 1824. 
Zanker-Indianer.—Buschmann, Spuren der aztek. 
Sprache, 713,1859. 

Kutchlok. A former Aleut village on 
Unalaska, Aleutian ids., Alaska. 

Ikutchlok.—Coxe, Russ. Discov., 160,1787. Kutch¬ 
lok.-Ibid., 158. 

Kutek. A settlement of East Greenland 
Eskimo on the s. e. coast of Greenland, 
lat. 60° 45'.—Meddelelser om Gronland, 
x, 24, 1888. 

Kutenai (corrupted form, possibly by 
way of the language of the Siksika, of 
Kutondqa, one of their names for them¬ 
selves). A people forming a distinct 
linguistic stock, the Kitunahan family 
of Powell, w’ho inhabit parts of s.e. British 
Columbia and n. Montana and Idaho, from 
the lakes near the source of Columbia r. 
to Pend d’Oreille lake. Their legendsand 
traditions indicate that they originally 
dwelt e. of the Rocky mts., probably in 
Montana, whence they were driven west¬ 
ward by the Siksika, their hereditary 
enemies. The two tribes now live on 
amicable terms, and some intermarriage 
has taken place. Before the buffalo dis¬ 
appeared from the plains they often had 
joint hunting expeditions. Recollection 
of the treatment of the Kutenai by the 
Siksika remains, however, in the name 
they give the latter, Sahantla (‘bad 
people’). They entertained also a bad 
opinion of the Assiniboin (Tlutlamaeka, 
‘cut-throats’), and the Cree (Gutskiawe, 
‘liars’). 

The Kutenai language is spoken in two 
slightly differing dialects, Upper and 
Lower Kutenai. A few uncertain points of 
similarity in grammatical structure with 
the Shoshonean tongues seem to exist. 
The language is incorporative both with 
respect to the pronoun and the noun ob¬ 
ject. Prefixes and suffixes abound, the 
prefix ctq(k)- in nouns occurring with 
remarkable frequency. As in the Algon- 











BULL. 30] 


KUTENAI 


741 


quian tongues, the form of a word used 
in composition differs from that which it 
has independently. Reduplication is 
very rare, occurring only in a few nouns, 
some of which are possibly of foreign 
origin. There are a few loan-words from 
Salishan dialects. 

The Upper Kutenai include the follow¬ 
ing subdivisions: Akiskenukinik, Akam- 
nik, Akanekunik, and Akiyenik. 

The Lower Kutenai are more primitive 
and nomadic, less under the influence of 
the Catholic church, and more given to 
gambling. They have long been river and 
lake Indians, and possess peculiar bark 
canoes that resemble some of those used in 
the Amur region in Asia (Mason in Rep. 
Nat. Mus., 1899). Of late years many of 
them have taken to horses and are skillful 
in their management. The Upper Kute¬ 
nai keep nearer the settlements, often 
obtaining a living by serving the settlers 
and miners in various ways. Many of 
them have practically ceased to be canoe- 
men and travel by horse. Both the Up¬ 
per and the Lower Kutenai hunt and fish, 
the latter depending more on fish for 
food. Physically, the Kutenai are well 
developed and rank among the taller 
tribes of British Columbia. Indications of 
race mixture seem to be shown in the form 
of the head. Their general character 
from the time of De Smet has been re¬ 
ported good. Their morality, kindness, 
and hospitality are noteworthy, and more 
than any other Indians of the country 
they have avoided drunkenness and lewd 
intercourse with the whites. Their men¬ 
tal ability is comparatively high, and the 
efforts of the missionaries have been re¬ 
warded with success. They are not ex¬ 
cessively given to emotional instability, 
do not lack a sense of interest, and can 
concentrate attention when necessary. 
Their social system is simple, and no evi¬ 
dence of the existence of totems or secret 
societies has been found. The chieftain¬ 
ship, now more or less elective, was 
probably hereditary, with limitations; 
slavery of war prisoners was formerly 
in vogue; and relatives were responsible 
for the debts of a deceased person. Mar¬ 
riage was originally polygamous; divorced 
women were allowed to marry again, and 
adultery was not severely punished. 
Adoption by marriage or by residence of 
more than a year was common. Women 
could hold certain kinds of property, such 
as tents and utensils. A wergild was cus¬ 
tomary. Religion w r as a sort of sun wor¬ 
ship, and the belief in the ensoulment of 
all things and in reincarnation prevailed. 
The land of the dead was in the sun, from 
which at some time all the departed 
would descend to L. Pend d’Oreille to 
meet the Kutenai then living. In the 


old days the medicine-men were very 
powerful, their influence surviving most 
with the Lower Kutenai, who still paint 
their faces on dance occasions; but tattoo¬ 
ing is rare. Except a sort of reed pipe, a 
bone flute, and the drum, musical instru¬ 
ments were unknown to them; but they 
had gambling, dancing, and medicine 
songs. The Lower Kutenai are still ex¬ 
ceedingly addicted to gambling, their 
favorite being a noisy variety of the wide¬ 
spread guess-stick game. The Kutenai 
were in former days great buffalo hunters. 
Firearms have driven out the bow and 
arrow, save as children’s toys or for kill¬ 
ing birds. Spearing, the basket trap, and 
wicker weirs were much in use by the 
Lower Kutenai. Besides the bark canoe, 
they had dugouts; both skin and rush 
lodges were built; the sweat house was 
universal. Stone hammers were still in 
use in parts of their country in the last 
years of the 19th century. The Lower 
Kutenai are still noted for their water¬ 
tight baskets of split roots. In dress they 
originally resembled the Plains Indians 
rather than those of the coast; but con¬ 
tact with the whites has greatly modified 
their costume. While fond of the white 
man’s tobacco, they have a sort of their 
own made of willow bark. A large part 
of their food supply is now obtained from 
the whites. For food; medicine, and 
economical purposes the Kutenai use a 
large number of the plant products of 
their environment (Chamberlain in Verh. 
d. Berl. Ges. f. Anthr., 551-6, 1895). 
They were gifted also with esthetic appre¬ 
ciation of several plants and flowers. 
The diseases from which the Kutenai 
suffer most are consumption and ophthal¬ 
mic troubles; venereal diseases are rare. 
Interesting maturity ceremonies still sur¬ 
vive in part. The mythology and folk¬ 
lore of the Kutenai consist chiefly of 
cosmic and ethnic myths, animal tales, 
etc. In the animal tales the coyote, as 
an adventurer and deceiver, is the most 
prominent figure, and with him are often 
associated the chicken-hawk, the grizzly 
bear, the fox, the cricket, and the wolf. 
Other creatures which appear in these 
stories are the beaver, buffalo, caribou, 
chipmunk, deer, dog, moose, mountain 
lion, rabbit, squirrel, skunk, duck, eagle, 
grouse, goose, magpie, owl, snowbird, 
tomtit, trout, whale, butterfly, mosquito, 
frog, toad, and turtle. Most of the cos¬ 
mogonic legends seem to belong to the 
n. w. Pacific cycle; many of the coyote 
tales belong to the cycle of the Rocky 
mt. region, others have a Siouan or 
Algonquian aspect in some particulars. 
Their deluge myth is peculiar in several 
respects. A number of tales of giants 
occur, two of the legends, “Seven Heads” 


742 


KUTENAI 


[b. a. e. 


and “Lame Knee,” suggesting Old World 
analogies. The story of the man in the 
moon is probably borrowed from French 
sources. 

While few evidences of their artistic 
ability in the way of pictographs, birch- 
bark drawings, etc., have been reported, 
the Kutenai are no mean draftsmen. 
Some of them possess an idea of map 
making and have a good sense of the 
physical features of the country. Some 
of their drawings of the horse and the 
buffalo are characteristically lifelike and 
quite accurate. The ornamentation of 
their moccasins and other articles, the 
work of the women, is often elaborate, 
one of the motives of their decorative 
art being the Oregon grape. They do 
not seem to have made pottery, nor to 
have indulged in wood carving to a large 
extent. The direct contact of the Kute¬ 
nai with the whites is comparatively re¬ 
cent. Their word for white man, Suy- 
iipi, is identical with the Nez Perce 
Sueapo (Parker, Jour., 381, 1840), and 
is probably borrowed. Otherwise the 
white man is called Nutlu'qene, ‘stran¬ 
ger.’ They have had few serious troub¬ 
les with the whites, and are not now a 
warlike people. As yet the Canadian 
Kutenai are not reservation Indians. The 
United States seems to have made no di¬ 
rect treaty with the tribe for the exting¬ 
uishment of their territorial rights (Royce 
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 856). 

Within the Kutenai area, on the Co¬ 
lumbia lakes, live a colony of Shushwap 
(Salishan) known as Ivinbaskets, num¬ 
bering 56 in 1904. In that year the Ku¬ 
tenai in British territory were reported to 
number 553, as follows: Lower Columbia 
Lake, 80; Lower Kutenai (Flatbow), 172; 
StMary’s (FtSteele), 216; Tobacco Plains, 
61; Arrow Lake (West Kutenai), 24. 
These returns indicate a decrease of about 
150 in 13 years. The United States cen¬ 
sus of 1890 gave the number of Kutenai 
in Idaho and Montana as 400 to 500; in 
1905 those under the Flathead agency, 
Mont., were reported to number 554. 
The Kutenai have given their name to 
Kootenai r., the districts of East, West, 
and North Kootenay, Brit. Col., Kootenai 
lake, Brit. Col., Kootanie pass in the 
Rocky mts., Kootenai co. and the town 
of Kootenai, Idaho, and to other places 
on both sides of the international boun¬ 
dary (Am. Anthrop., iv, 348-350, 1902). 

Consult Boas, First Gen. Rep. on the 
Inds. of Brit. Col. in Rep. B. A. A. S., 1889; 
Chamberlain, Rep. on the KootenajMnds. 
in Rep. B. A. A. S., 1892, also various 
articles by the same author since 1892 
in Am. Anthrop., Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
and Am. Antiq.; Hale in U. S. Expl. Ex- 
ped., vi, 1846; Maclean, Canadian Sav¬ 
age Folk, 1896; Smet (1) Oregon Missions, 


1847, (2) New Indian Sketches, 1863; Tol- 
mie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. 
Col., 1884. (a. f. c.) 

Catanoneaux.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 2d s., ii, 42, 1814 (wrongly applied to 
Piegan; corrupt Indian with French termination). 
Catawahays. —Moore in Ind. Atf. Rep., 292, 1846, 
(misprint). Cat-tan-a-haws. —Lewis and Clark, 
Discov., 57, 1806 (said to be their own name). 
Cattanahaws. —Ibid, (so called by the French). 
Cattanahowes. — Mackenzie, Voy., map, 1801. 
Cautonee. —Harmon, Jour., map, 1820. Cautonies. — 
Ibid., 313. Contamis.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 
457,1851 (probably a misprint). Contenay. —Lane in 
Ind. Aff. Kep., 158, 1850. Contonnes. —Catlin, N. 
Am. Ind., passim, 1844 (said to be French name). 
Cootanais.— Ross, Advent., 213, 1849. Cootanies.— 
Parker, Jour., 307, 1840. Cootneys. —Milroy in H. 
R. Misc. Doc. 122, 43d Cong., 1st sess., 5, 1875. 
Cootomies.— Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 44,1845. Coo- 
tonaikoon.— Henry, MS. vocab., 1808 (so called by 
the Blackfeet). Cootonais. —Cox, Advent., ii, 75, 
1831. Cootonay. —Ibid., 154. Cootounies. —Rob¬ 
ertson, Oregon, 129, 1846. Cotones. —Hind, Red 
River Exped., II, 152, 1860. Cottonois. — Irving, 
Rocky Mts., I, 187, 1837. Counarrha. —Vocabu- 
laire des Kootenays Counarrha on Skalza, 1883, 
cited by Pilling, Proof Sheets, 1885. Coutan- 
ies.— Hale in IT. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 204, 1846. 
Coutaria. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853. 
Coutenay.— Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st 
Cong., 1st sess., 169,1850. Coutnees. —Bonner, Life 
ofBeckwourth,226,1856. Coutonais. —Maximilian, 
Trav., 509, 1843. Coutonois. —Pendleton in H. R. 
Rep. 830, 27th Cong., 2d sess., 21,1842. Coutouns. — 
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 34, 1822. Flatbows. — 
See Lower Kutenai. Kattanahaws. —Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 470, 1878 (applies to Up¬ 
per Kutenai only). Ki'tona'qa. —Chamberlain, 
8th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 6, 1892. Kit-too-nuh'-a. — 
Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 124b, 1884 
(applied to Upper Kutenai). Kituanaba. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 402,1853. Kitunaha. —Hale 
in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 204,535,1846. Kitunana.— 
Stevens, Rep. on N. Pac. R. R., 440, 1854. 

Kitunaxa. —Ibid., 535. Kodenees. —Meek in H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10,1848. Koeete- 
nays. —De Smet, Letters, 170, 1843. Koetenais. — 
Ibid., 183. Koetenay. —Ibid.,203. Koetinays. —De 
Smet quoted in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 36th Cong., 
1st sess., 141, 1860. Koo-tames. —Gibbs in Pac. 
R. R. Rep., I, 417, 1855. Kootanaise. — Mayne, 
Brit. Col., 298, 1862. Kootanay. —Tayloi; in Cal. 
Farmer, Feb. 27,1863. Kootamies. —Stevens in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 460, 1854. Kootanie. —Nicolet, Oregon, 
143,1846. Kootenai. —Brown in Beach, Ind. Misc., 
77,1877. Kootenaies. —Gibbs in Rep. N. Pac. R. R., 
437,1854. Kootenays. —De Smet, Letters, 37, 1843. 
Kootenia.— Emerson, Indian Myths, 404, 1884. 
Kootenuha.— Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 
124b, 1884. Koote-nuha. — Ibid., 5b. Kootones. — 
Henry (1811) quoted by Maclean, Canad. Sav. 
Folk, 138, 1896. Kootoonais. —Stevens in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 461, 1854. Koutaines. —Ibid., 462. Kou- 
tanis.—Duflot de Mofras, Explor., II, 173, 1844. 
Koutonais. —H. R. Rep. 98, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 429, 
1873. Kuspelu. —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Nez 
Perc6 name: ‘ water people’). Kutana'.— Maxi¬ 
milian, Reise,li,511,1841. Kutanas. —Maximilian, 
Trav., 242,1843. Kutani. —Latham, Elem. Comp. 
Philol., 395, 1862. Kutanis. —Latham, Nat. Hist. 
Man, 316, 1850. Kutenae. —Maclean, Canad. Sav. 
Folk, 137, 1896 (Siksika name; sing., Kutenaek- 
wan). Kutenai. —Mason in Rep.Nat. Mus.1899, 529, 
1901. Kutenay.— Brinton, Amer. Pace, 108, 1891. 
Kutneha/. —Maxmilian, Reise, II, 511, 1841. Kut- 
nehas.— Maximilian, Trav., 242, 1843. Kutona. — 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 256, 1862. 
Kutonacha. —Maximilian, Trav., 500, 1843. Kuto- 
na'qa.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 10, 1889. 
Kutonas. —Maximilian, Trav., 245, 1843. Skaisi. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, map, 200, 1853. 
Skalza.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 416, 1855. 
Skalzi.— De Smet Letters, 224, 1843. Skalzy.— 
Ibid., 203. Skelsa-ulk. —Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. 
(Salish name: ‘water people’). Skolsa.— Gibbs 
in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 416, 1855. 


BULL. 30] 


KUTSHAMAKIN-KWAHARI 


743 


Kutshamakin. One of the Massaehuset 
sachems who signed the treaties of 1643 
and 1645. He was properly the sachem 
of the country about Dorchester, Mass., 
part of which he sold to the English. It 
was his people to whom John Eliot first 
preached. Though at first opposed to 
the English, Kutshamakin afterward be¬ 
came Christianized and served them in 
many w r ays, particularly as interpreter. 
To his killing and scalping a Pequot In¬ 
dian in 1636 has been attributed (Drake, 
Inds. of N. A., 116, 1880) the outbreak of 
a horrible war. (a. f. c.) 

Kutshittan (‘bear house people’). 
Given as a subdivision of the Tlingit 
group Nanyaayi (q. v.), but in reality 
it is merely the name of the occupants of 
a certain house. 

Quts hit tan.—Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can¬ 
ada, 25,1889. Xuts! hit tan.—Swanton, field notes, 
B. A. E., 1904. 

Kutshundika (‘ buffalo eaters ’). A band 
of the Bannock. 

Buffalo-Eaters.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 522, 
1853. Kutsh'undika.—Hoffman inProc.Am. Philos. 
Soc., xxxill, 299, 1886. 

Kutshuwitthe {Ku'-pu-wi'-V$). A for¬ 
mer Yaquina village on the s. side of 
Yaquina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 229, 1890. 

Kutssemhaath ( Ku'tssEmhaath). A divi¬ 
sion of the Seshart, a Nootka tribe.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 
32, 1890. 

Kutul. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on 
Yukon r., Alaska, 50 m. above Anvik; 
pop. 16 in 1844. 

Hultulkakut.—Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d 
Cong., 1stsess., 25, 1871. Khutulkakat.—Zagoskin 
quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37,1884; 
Kutul.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kuuanguala. A former pueblo of the 
Pecos tribe, more commonly known as 
Las Ruedas (Span.: ‘the wheels’), situ¬ 
ated a few miles s.e. of Pecos, near Arroyo 
Amarillo, at the present site of the village 
of Rowe, N. Hex. In the opinion of 
Bandelier it is not unlikely that this 
pueblo, together with Seyupaella, was 
occupied at the time of Espejo’s visit in 
1583. 

Ku-uang-ual-a.—Bandelibr in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
iv, 125,1892. Kuuang Ua la.—Ibid., Ill, 128, 1890. 
Pueblo de las Ruedas.—Ibid. 

Kuu-lana {^K!u'u la'na). AHaidatown 
occupied by the Koetas, in Naden harbor, 
Graham id., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Kuyama. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Inez mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal. 

Cuyama.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 
Kuyam.—Ibid. 

Kuyamskaiks ( Kuyam-Ska-iks , ‘craw¬ 
fish trail’). A branch of the Klamath 
settlement of Yaaga, on Williamson r., 
Lake co., Oreg.—Gatschet in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., ii, pt. i, xxix, 1890. 

Kuyanwe. The extinct Turquoise Ear- 
pendant clan of the Tewa pueblo of Hano, 
n. e. Ariz. See Kungya. 


Ku-yan-we.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 166, 
1894. Kuyanwe-to-wa.—Hodge, ibid., ix, 352, 1896 
{td-wa = ‘people’). 

Kuyedi (‘ people of Kuiu ’). A Tlingit 
division On the Alaskan island which bears 
their name. 

Kujeedi.—Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 120, 1885. 

Kuyikanuikpul. An Ikogmiut Eskimo 
village on the right bank of Yukon r., be¬ 
low Koserefski, Alaska. — Raymond 
(1869) quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1902. 

Kuyuidika (‘sucker-eaters’). A Pavi- 
otso band formerly living near the site of 
Wadsworth, on Truckee r., w. Nev. 

Coo-er-ee.—Campbell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 119, 1866. 
Cooyuweeweit.—Powers in Smithson. Rep., 450, 
1876. Ku-yu-i'-di-ka.—Powell, Paviotso MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1881. Wun-a-muc-a’s (the Second) 
band.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 374, 1860. 

Kvichak. An Aglemiut Eskimo village 
on the river of the same name in Alaska; 
pop. 37 in 1890. 

Kivichakh.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 
Kvichak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kvigatluk. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage in the lake district n. w. of Kusko- 
kwim r., Alaska; pop. 30 in 1880. 

Kvigathlogamute.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 
map, 1884. Kvigatluk. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
1902. Kwigathlogamute.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 
54, 1881. Kwigathlogumut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., map, 1899. 

Kvigimpainag. A Jugelnute Eskimo 
village, of 71 persons in 1844, on the e. 
bank of the Yukon, 20 m. from Kvikak, 
Alaska. 

Kvigimpainagmute.—Zagoskin quoted by Petroff 
in 10th Census, Alaska, 37,1884 (the people). 

Kviguk. A Malemiut Eskimo village 
at the mouth of Kviguk r., n. shore of 
Norton bay, Alaska. 

Kvieg-miut.—Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kvieguk-miut.—Ibid. 
Kviguk.—Baker, ibid. Kvigukmut.—Zagoskin, 
Desc. Russ. Poss. Am., pt. i, 72, 1847. 

Kvikak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village 
on Yukon r., 30 m. above Anvik, Alaska; 
formerly a Kaiyukhotana village. 
Kvikak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kvik- 
hagamut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1900. 

Kvinkak. A Malemiut Eskimo village 
on a river of the same name at the upper 
end of Norton sd., Alaska; pop. 20 in 
1880. 

Kvinghak-mioute.—Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 
xxi, map, 1850. Kvinkhakmut.—Zagoskin, Descr. 
Russ. Poss. Am., pt. 1, 72, 1847. Ogowinagak.— 
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Ogowin- 
anagak.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 59,1881. 

Kwachelanokumae. The name of an 
ancestor of a gens of the Mamalelekala, 
a Kwakiutl tribe; also applied to the 
gens itself.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 
pt. 5, 130, 1887. 

Kwae ( Kwa'-e ). A summer village of 
the Tsawatenok at the head of Kingcome 
inlet, Brit. Col.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 73. 

Kwahari (‘ antelopes ’). An important 
division of the Comanche, whose mem¬ 
bers frequented the prairie country and 
Staked plains of Texas, hence the name. 
They w r ere the last to come in after the 
surrender in 1874. (j. m.) 


744 


KWAHLAONAN-KWAKIUTL 


[B. a. E. 


Antelope-eaters. —Robinson, letter to J. O. Dorsey, 
10, 1879. Antelope Skinners.— Leavenworth in 

H. R. Misc. Doc. 139, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1870. 
Kua'hadi.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 
xxill, 300,1886. Kwa'hadi.— Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1045, 1896. Kwahare tetchaxane. —Gat- 
schet, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (‘ante¬ 
lope skinners’). Kwa'hari. —Mooney, op. cit. 
Llaneros.— Mayer, Mexico, n, 123,1853. Noonah.— 
Butlerand Lewis(1846)inH. R.Doc.76,29thCong., 
2d sess., 6,1847 (probably identical). People of the 
Desert. —Ibid. Quaahda. —Sec. War in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 7,42d Cong.,3d sess., 1,1872. Quahada Coman- 
ches.— Battey, Advent., 83, 1876. Quahadas. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1869, 101, 1870. Quahade-Comanches. — 
Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18,40th Cong., 3d sess., 35, 
1869. Quaha-dede-chatz-Kenna — Ibid.,9(acareless 
combination of Kwahari, or Kwahadi, and Ditsa- 
kana). Qua-ha-de-dechutz-Kenna. —Ibid.,6. Qua- 
hades. —Ibid., 10. Q,ua-ho-dahs. —Hazen, ibid., 38. 
Quarrydechocos. —Walkley, ibid., 19. Quor-ra-da- 
chor-koes. —Leavenworth in H. R. Misc. Doc. 139, 
41stCong.,2dsess.,6,1870. Staked Plain Indians.— 
Ibid. Staked Plains Omaions. —Hazen in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 38, 1869. Staked 
Plains Onawas. —Hazen (1868) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
240, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 150, 1870. 

Kwahlaonan ( Kiva-'hldonan). Adivision 
of one of the clans of the pueblo of Taos, 
N. Mex. (f. w. h.) 

Kwahu. The Eagle clan of the Pakab 
(Reed) phratry of the Hopi. 

Kuaja.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Kwa.— 
Votn, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 283, 1903. 
Kwa'-hii.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 
Kwahu winwu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 
1900. Kwa'-hii wiin-wu.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., 
VII, 403,1894. 

Kwaiailk. A body of Salish on the up¬ 
per course of Chehalis r., above the Sat- 
sop and on the Cowlitz, Wash. In 1855, 
according to Gibbs, they numbered 216, 
but were becoming amalgamated with 
the Cowlitz. 

Kwai-ailk —Eells in letter, B. A. E., Feb. 1886 (own 
name). Kwu-teh-ni.— Gibbs inCont.N. A. Ethnol., 

I, 172, 1877 (Kwalhioqua name). Nu-so-lupsh.— 
Ibid, (so called by Sound Indians, referring 
to the rapids of their stream). Stak-ta-mish. — 
Ibid, (‘forestpeople’). Staktomish.— Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, V, 701, 1855. Upper Chihalis.— Gibbs 
in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 435, 1855. Upper Tsihalis. — 
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 172, 1877. 

Kwaiantikwokets (‘on the other side of 
the river’). An isolated Paiute band, 
formerly living in n. w. Arizona, e. of 
Colorado r. Pop. 62 in 1873. They affili¬ 
ated largely with the Navaho. 

Kuraintu-kwakats. —Ingalis in H. R. Ex. Doc. 66, 
42d Cong., 3d sess., 2,1873 (misprint). Kwai-an'- 
ti-twok-ets. —Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873,50,1874. 

Kwaitshi ( Kwa-ai'-tc ’ l). A former Ya- 
quina village on the s. side of Yaquina r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Kwaituki. The ruins of a former village 
of the Hopi, on the w. side of Oraibi 
arroyo, 14 m. above Oraibi, n. e. Ariz.— 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 57,1891. 

Kwakina (‘town of the entrance place’). 
A ruined pueblo of the Zuni, 7 m. s. w. 
of Zuni pueblo, w. N. Mex. It formed 
one of the Seven Cities of Cibola, and 
was possibly the Aquinsa of Onate, in 1598. 
The town is mentioned in Zarate-Sal- 
meron’s relation, ca. 1629, hence must 
have been abandoned subsequently to that 


date and prior to 1680, when but 4 of the 
cities of Cibola remained. Cf. Pinawan. 
Aguinsa. —Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 136, 1889 
(misquoting Onate). Aquinsa, —Onate (1598) in 
Doc. ined. xvi, 133,1871. Cuakyina.— Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Pap., in, 133,1890. Kua-kyi-na.— Ibid., 
v, 171, 1890. Kwa-ki-na.— Cushing in Compte- 
rendu Internal:. Cong. Am6r., vn, 156,1890. Kya- 
kuina.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., iv, 339,1892. 
Quakyina. —Ibid., ill, 133, 1890. Q,uat-china.— 
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth.and Arch.,i, 101,1891. 

Kwakinawan (‘town of the entrance 
place’). A former Zuni pueblo s. s. e. of 
Thunder mt., which lies about 4 m. e. of 
Zuni pueblo, N. Mex. It is distinct from 
Kwakina, although not unlikely it was 
built and for a time inhabited by the peo¬ 
ple formerly occupying the latter village 
after one of the descents of the Zuni from 
their stronghold on Thunder mt. and the 
abandonment of the Seven Cities of 
Cibola. (f. h. c.) 



KWAKIUTL MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


Kwakiutl (according to their own folk- 
etymology the name signifies ‘smoke of 
the world’, but with more probability 
it means ‘beach at the north side of the 
river’). In its original and most re¬ 
stricted sense this term is applied to a 
group of closely related tribes or septs liv¬ 
ing in the neighborhood of Ft Rupert, Brit. 
Col. These septs are the Guetela, Kom- 
kutis, Komoyue, and Walaskwakiutl, and 
their principal village Tsahis, surround¬ 
ing Ft Rupert. Other former towns were 
Kalokwis, Ivliksiwi, Noohtamuh, Tsaite, 
and Whulk, of which the last two were 
summer villages shared with the Nimkish 
during the salmon season. Those who 
encamped at Tsaite belonged to the Ko- 





BULL. 30] 


KWAKOKUTL 


KWALHIOQUA 


745 


moyue sept. In comparatively recent 
times a portion of the Kwakiutl sepa¬ 
rated from the rest and are known as 
Matilpe. These and the Komoyue are 
enumerated separately by the Canadian 
Department of Indian Affairs, thus limit¬ 
ing the term Kwakiutl to the Guetela, 
Komkutis, and Walaskwakiutl. In one 
place it is applied to the Guetela alone. 
The population of the Kwakiutl proper 
in 1904 was 163. 



KWAKIUTL CHIEFTAIN ESS IN CEREMONIAL COSTUME. (boas) 


In more extended senses the term Kwa¬ 
kiutl is applied to one of the two great 
division of theWakashan linguistic stock 
(the other being the Nootka), and to a 
dialect and a subdialect under this. The 
following is a complete classification of 
the Kwakuitl divisions and subdivisions, 
based on the investigations of Boas: 
Haisla dialect —Kitamat and Kitlope. 
Heiltsuk dialect —Bellabella, China Hat, 
Nohuntsitk, Somehulitk, and Wikeno. 
Kwakiutl dialect —Koskimo subdialect — 
Klaskino, Koprino, Koskimo, and Quat- 
sino. Nawiti subdialect —Nakomgilisala 


and Tlatlasikoala. Kwakiutl subdialect — 
Awaitlala, Goasila, Guauaenok, Hahua- 
mis, Koeksotenok, Kwakiutl (including 
Matilpe), Lekwiltok, Mamalelekala, 
Nakoaktok, Nimkish, Tenaktak, Tlauit- 
sis, and Tsawatenok. The Hoyalas were 
an extinct Kwakiutl division the minor 
affinities of which are unknown. 

The total population of the Kwakiutl 
branch of the Wakashan stock in 1904 
was 2,173, and it appears to be steadily 
decreasing. 

Consult Boas, Kwakiutl Inds., Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1895, 1897. For further illus¬ 
trations, see Koskimo. (j. r. s.) 

Coquilths.—Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 239, 1844. Fort 
Rupert Indians.—Scott in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 36th 
Cong., 1st sess., 115, 1860. Kwa'g’uL—Boas in 
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., v, pt. 2,271,1902. Kwa- 
gutl.—Eighty-first Rep. Brit, and For. Bib. Soc., 
380,1885. Kwahkewlth.—Powell in Can. Ind. Aff., 
119, 1880. Kwakiool.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vo- 
cabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. Kwa'-kiutl’.—Gibbs in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 144, 1877. Kwa-kuhl.—Tol¬ 
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. 
Kwat-kewlth.—Sproat in Can. Ind. Aff., 147, 1879. 
Kwaw-kewlth.—Can. Ind. Aff., 270, 1889. Kwaw- 
kwelch.—Ibid., 189,1884. Q,a gutl.—Hall, St. John in 
Qa-gutl, Lond., 1884. Quackeweth.—Can. Ind.Aff., 
316, 1880. Quackewlth.—Can. Ind. Aff., 92, 1876. 
Quackolls.—Grant in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 293, 
1857. Qua-colth.—Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 
1859. Quacos— Galiano,Relacion, 103,1802. Quag- 
heuil.—Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 1 ,233, 
1848. Quahkeulth.—Can. Ind. Aff., 52,1875. Q,ual- 
quilths.—Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., I, 165, 1866. 
Quaquiolts.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 19,1862. 
Quawguults.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 251, 1861. Quo- 
quoulth.—Sproat, Savage Life, 311, 1868. 

Kwakokutl ( Kwdfkok'uL). A gens of the 
Nakoaktok, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 330, 1897. 

Kwakowenok ( Kwa'kowenbx) . A gens of 
the Guauaenok, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas 
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897. 

Kwakukemlaenok (KwdkuqmndV enox). 
A gens of the Koskimo, a Kwakiutl 
tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 329, 
1897. 

Kwakwakas ( Kwa-kwa-kas ). A former 
village on the w. coast of Gilford id., Brit. 
Col., probably belonging to the Koeksot¬ 
enok.—Dawson in Can. Geol. Surv., 
map, 1887. 

Kwaleki ( Kwd-le-ki ). A former Kawia 
village in the San Jacinto mts., s. Cal.— 
Barrows, Coahuilla Ind., 27, 1900. 

Kwalewia ( Qwale'ufia ; named from a 
large bowlder in the stream close by). 
A former village or camp of the Pilalt, a 
Cowichan tribe of lower Chilliwack r., 
Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. 
Can., 48, 1902. 

Kwalhioqua (from Tkulxiyo-goa'ikc 
:kulxi , ‘at a lonely place in the woods’, 
their Chinook name.—Boas). An Atha¬ 
pascan tribe which formerly lived on the 
upper course of Willopah r., w. Wash. 
Gibbs extends their habitat e. into the 
upper Chehalis, but Boas does not be¬ 
lieve they extended e. of the Coast range. 
They have been confounded by Gibbs 







746 


KWALWHUT—KWATANAKYANAAN 


r b. a. e. 


and others with a Chinookan tribe on the 
lower course of the river called Willopah 
(q. v.). The place where they generally 
lived was called Nq!ula/was. The Kwal- 
hioqua and Willopah have ceded their 
land to the United States (Royce in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., pt. 2, 832, 1899). In 1850 
two males and several females survived. 
Hale (Ethnog. and Philol., 204, 1846), 
who estimated them at about 100, said 
that they built no permanent habitations, 
but wandered in the woods, subsisting on 
game, berries, and roots, and were bolder, 
hardier, and more savage than the river 
and coast tribes. 

GiLa'qlulawas.— Boas, letter, 1904 (from name of 
the place where they generally lived, Nq!u- 
la'was). Kivalhioqua. —Buschmann in Konig. 
Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, ill, 646-86,1860. Kwal- 
hiokwas. —Morice in Trans. Can. Inst., iv,13,1893. 
Kwalhioqua.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 204,1846. 
Kwaliokwa.— Latham in Trans. Philol.Soc. Lond., 
70,1856. Ouillequegaws. —Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, 
III, map, 96,1853. Owhillapsh.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol.,i, 164,1877 (applied erroneously; see Wil¬ 
lopah). Owilapsh. —Gatschet, KalapuyaMS., 280, 

B. A. E. (erroneously given as Kalapuva name; see 
Willopah). Qualhioqua. —Keanein Stanford, Com- 
pend., 532,1878. Qualioguas.— Hale, Ethnog. and 
Philol., 198, 1846. Qualquioqua.— Kingsley, Stand. 
Nat. Hist., pt. G, 142, 1885. Quilleoueoquas. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, map, 200,1853. Quil- 
lequaquas. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 214,1851. Quillequeog- 
nas.— Pres. Mess, in Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st 
sess., 5,1852. Quillequeoqua. —Dart in Ex. Doc. 53, 
32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1852. Tilhalumma. —Scouler 
(1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 235, 1848 
(probably this tribe). TkulHiyogoa'ikc. —Boas in 
10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 67, 1895 (Chinook 
name). Tkulxiyogoa'ikc. —Boas, inf’n, 1904. 

Kwalwhut. A rancheria in n. Lower 
California, whose occupants speak the 
Hataam dialect of Diegueno.—Henshaw, 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Kwamk ( Kwdmk ‘). A former Alsea 
village on the s. side of Alsea r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 230, 
1890. 

Kwan. The Agave clan of the Patki 
(Water-house) phratry of the Hopi. 

Kwan wiiiwu. —Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 
1901 (winwii=‘ clan’). Kwan wiin-wu. —Fewkes 
in Am. Anthrop., VII, 402, 1894. 

Kwanaken( Ku'ana'ken, ‘hollowinmoun- 
tain’). A Squawmish village community 
on Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout 
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kwane ( Kwa-ne ). A former village at 

C. Scott, n. end of Vancouver id., proba¬ 
bly occupied by the Nakomgilisala.— 
Dawson in Can. Geol. Surv., map, 1887. 

Kwantlen. An important Cowichan 
tribe between Stave r. and the mouth of 
the s. arm of Fraser r., Brit. Col. Pop. 
125 in 1904. Villages: Kikait, Kwantlen, 
Skaiametl, Skaiets, and Wharnock. Ki¬ 
kait and Skaiametl were the original 
Kwantlen towns before the advent of the 
Hudson’s Bay Company. (.t. r. s.) 
Kaitlen.— Dali, after Gibbs, in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
1 ,241,1877. Koa'antEl. —Boas in Rep. 64th Meeting 
B. A. A. S., 454, 1894. Kuoolt-e. —Wilson in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 329,1866. Kwahnt-len. —Gibbs, 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., no. 281. Kwaitlens. —De 
Smet, Oregon Miss., 68, 1847. Kwa'ntlEn.—Hill- 
Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can., 53, 1902. Kwantlin.— 


Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120 b, 1884. 
Kwantlum.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 243, 1861. Kwant- 
lun.—Ibid., 295. Quaitlin.—Scouler (1846) in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 234, 1848. Q,uant-lums.— 
Fitzhugh in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857,329,1858. Qua'tl.— 
Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 278,1866. 

Kwantlen. The main Kwantlen vil¬ 
lage, situated at Ft Langley, on lower 
Fraser r., Brit. Col.; pop. 39 in 1904. 

Kwa'ntlEn.—Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can., 54, 
1902. Langley.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. II. 72. 1902. 

Kwapahag. Mentioned in a letter sent 
by the Abnaki to the governor of New 
England, in 1721, as one of the divisions of 
their tribe. 

K8apahag.—Abnaki letter (1721) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 2d s., VIII, 262, 1819. 

Kwashkinawan (‘ is-there-no-water 
town’)., A ruined Zuni pueblo not far 
from the Manuelito road, 15 m. n. w. of 
Zuni pueblo, near the Arizona and New 
Mexico boundary. (f. h. c.) 

Kwatami (‘on the gulf’). A subdivi¬ 
sion of the Tututni, formerly living on or 
near Sixes r., Oreg., -but now on Siletz 
res. Parker (Jour., 257, 1840) regarded 
them as a part of the Umpqua. Par¬ 
rish (Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 496, 1855) 
placed them in 3 villages on the Pacific 
coast s. of Coquille r., near the mouth of 
Flores cr., at Sixes r., and at Port Orford. 
In 1854 they were governed by a princi¬ 
pal chief, Hahhultalah, living at Sixes 

r. , and a subchief, Tayonecia, residing 
at Port Orford. This band claimed all the 
country between the coast and the sum¬ 
mit of the Coast range, from the s. boun¬ 
dary of the Nasumi to Humbug mt., 12 m. 

s. of Port Orford. In 1854 (Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 495,1855) the Kwatami consisted of 
53 men, 45 women, 22 boys, and 23 girls; 
total, 143. In 1877 (Ind. Aff. Rep., 300, 
1877) they numbered 72. 

Godamyon.—Framboise (1835) quoted by Gairdner 
in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 256, 1841. Klan- 
tlalas.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,219,1857 (possibly iden¬ 
tical). Kwa'-^a'-me ;unne'.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, iii, 233, 1890 (‘people on the gulf’). 
Kwa-?a'-mi.—Ibid. K'watumati'-tene'.—Everett, 
TututCne MS. vocab., B. A. E., 183, 1882(^peo¬ 
ple by the little creek’). Port Orford Indians 
proper.—Kautz, MS. Census, B. A. E.,1855. Quah- 
tah-mah.—Ibid. Q,uah-to-mah.—Parrish in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1854 , 495, 1855. Quakoumwahs.—Do- 
menech. Deserts N. Am., i, map, I860. Quakou- 
wahs.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 96, map, 
1853. Quatomah.—Hubbard (1856) in Cal. Farmer, 
June 8, 1860. Qua-tou-wah.—Dart (1851) in Ex. 
Doc. 57,32d Cong., 1st sess., 59,1862. Quattamya.— 
Parker, Jour., 257, 1840. Saquaacha.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, vi, 702, 1857. Sequalchin.—Dorsey in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 233,1890 (popularname). 
Sequarchin.—Ibid. Se-queh-cha.—Gibbs, MS. on 
Coast tribes, B. A. E. Shix river.—Abbott in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1854, 482, 1855. Sik'ses-tene'.—Everett, 
Tututene MS. vocab., 183,1882 (‘people by the far 
north country’). Siquitchib.—Gairdner (1835) in 
Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 256. 1841. Six.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 300, 1877. Sixes.—Abbott, MS. Census, 
B. A. E., 1858. Suc-qua-cha-to-ny.—Ibid. Suk-kwe'- 
tce.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ill, 233, 1890 
(Naltunne name). T’e-pP *unng.—Dorsey, Chetco 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (= ‘ northern language ’: 
Chetco name). 

Kwatanakyanaan ( Kwa-td-na ICya-na- 
an , ‘ town of the cave-enclosed spring ’). 
A ruined pueblo of the Zuni, about 40 m. 
s. w. of Zuni pueblo, N. Mex. (f. h. c.) 


BULL. 30] 


KWATCHAMPEDAU-KWIKAK 


747 


Kwatchampedau. (‘petota [a plant] ly¬ 
ing on the ground’). A Maricopa vil¬ 
lage on the Rio Gila, Ariz.—ten Kate, 
inf’n, 1888. 

Kwatsei. The Shell-bead clan of San 
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Kwatsei-tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 
1896 {tdoa=‘ people ’). 

Kwatsi. A Kwakiutl village at Pt Mac¬ 
donald, Knight inlet, Brit. Col., inhabited 
by theTenaktak and Awaitlala; pop. 171 
in 1885. 

Kwa-tsi.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can. for 
1887, sec. II, 65. Qoatse. —Boas in Bui. Am. Geog. 
Soc., 229,1887. 

Kwaustums ( Gwa n yasdEmse , ‘feasting 
place.’—Boas). A winter village of the 
Koeksotenok on Gilford id., Brit. Col.; 
pop. 263 in 1885. 

Gwa'-yasdEmse. —Boas in Mem. Am. Mns. Nat. 
Hist., v, pt. 1, 156, 1902. Kwa-us-tums. —Dawson 
in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 73. 
Qoaiastems. —Boas in Bui. Am. Geog. Soc., 228, 
1887. Qua-ya-stums. —Ibid. 

Kwayo. The Hawk clan of the Pakab 
phratry of the Hopi. 

Kwa'-yo. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A.E., 39, 1891. 
Kwayo winwu. —Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,584, 
1900 (winwti — ‘clan ’ ). Kwa'-yo wiiii-wu. —Fewkes 
in Am. Anthrop., vil, 403, 1894. 

Kwazackmash. Mentioned as one of 
the tribes that participated in the treaty 
of Pt Elliott, Wash., in 1855. Perhaps 
the Suquamish. They numbered 42 in 
1870. 

Kwazackmash. —Ross in Ind. Aff. Rep., 17, 1870. 

Kweakpak. A Magemiut Eskimo village 
in the tundra s. of the Yukon delta, Alas¬ 
ka; pop. 75 in 1890. 

Queakhpaghamiut. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 110, 
1893. 

Kwehtlmamish. A Salisli division on 
upper branches of Snohomish r., Wash., 
now officially included under the Sno¬ 
homish on Tulalip res. Pop. 66 in 1870. 

Kwehtl ma mish. —Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 
179,1877. Kwent-le-ah mish. —NVinans in Ind. Aff. 
Rep.. 17,1870. N'Q,uentl-ma-mish. —U. S. Ind. Treat., 
378,1873. N’Quentlmaymish. —Taylor in Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 4, 40th Cong., spec, sess.,3,1867. N’quutl-ma- 
mish. —Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 458, 1854. Nugh- 
Kwetle-babish. —Mallet, ibid., 198, 1877. Qunkma- 
mish. —Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 436, 1855. 

Kwekweakwet (‘ blue ’). A Shuswap vil¬ 
lage near upper Fraser r., 11 m. above 
Kelley cr., Brit. Col. Probably the town 
of the High Bar band, which numbered 
54 in 1904. 

High Bar. —Can. Ind. Aff., 274,1902. Kwe-kwe-a- 
kwet'. —Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 
44, 1891. 

Kweleluk. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo 
village on a small river in the tundra n. 
of Kuskokwim bay, Alaska; pop. 112 in 
1890. 

Kweleluk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Que- 
lelochamiut.— Eleventh Census. Alaska, 109, 1893. 

Kwengyauinge (Tewa: ‘blue turquoise 
house’). A large pueblo ruin, attributed 
to the Tewa, situated on a conical hill, 
about 150 ft high, overlooking Chama r. 
at a point known as La Puenta, about 3 
m. below Abiquiu, Rio Arriba co., N. 
Mex.—Hewett in Bull. 32, B. A. E., 26, 
1906. 


Kwesh. One of the divisions of the 
Tonkawa. (a. s. g.) 

Kweundlas ( QJwe 8/ AnLas , ‘ muddy 

stream’). A former Haida town on the 
w. coast of Long id., Alaska. Jt appears 
in John Work’s list (1836-41) as Qui- 
a-han-less, with 8 houses and 148 people. 
Petroff gives the number of inhabitants 
in 1880-81 as 62, but the town site is now 
used only for potato patches. It was oc¬ 
cupied by the Yehlnaas-hadai, a branch 
of the Yaku-janas. (j. r. s.) 

Gu-ai-hendlas-hade. —Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 
304,1885. Koianglas.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alas¬ 
ka, 32, 1884. Kwaihantlas Haade. —Harrison in 
Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125,1895. 
Qui a han less.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 
1855 (after Work, 1836-41). Q,!we 8 A'nLas. —Swan- 
ton, Cont. Haida, 282, 1905. 

Kwewu. The Wolf clan of the Hopi. 

Kwe'-wu-iih wiin-wu. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., 
VII, 403, 1894 ivinwli — ' clan’). Kwewu whwu. — 
Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584,1900 (misprint). 

Kwiahok. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village 
at the s. mouth of the Kwikluak pass of 
the Yukon, Alaska. 

Kwee-ahogemut. —Dali, Alaska, 264, 1870. 

Kwichtenem ( Kwi'tctenEm ). A Squaw- 
mish village community on the w. side of 
Howe sd., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Brit, A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kwiengomats ( Kni-en'-go-mats) . A Pai- 
ute band, numbering 18 in 1873, at which 
time they dweltat Indian spring, s. Nev.— 
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874. 

Kwigunts. A Paiute band in s. Utah.— 
Ingalls in PI. R. Ex. Doc. 66, 42d Cong., 
3d sess., 2, 1873. 

Kwik (‘river’). A Kuskwogmiut Es¬ 
kimo village on the right bank of Kus¬ 
kokwim r., Alaska, 10 m. above Bethel; 
pop. 215 in 1880. 

Kooigamute.— Petroff in 10th Census, ‘Alaska, 17, 
1884. Kwegamut.— Kilbuck cited by Baker, Geog. 
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kwigamute.— Petroff, op. cit., 
map. Kwik. —Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Kwik. A Malemiut Eskimo village on 
a stream near the head of Norton sd., 
Alaska; pop. 30 in 1880. 

Kooigamute. — Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1881. 
Kuikli. —Map cited by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 
259,1902. Kvigmut. —Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. in 
Am., pt. 1,72,1847. Kvikh. —Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, I map, 1884. Kviougmioute. —Zagoskin in 
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., XXI, map, 1850. Kwik.— 
Baker, op. cit. Kwikh.— Petroff in 10th Census, 
Alaska, map, 1884. 

Kwik. A Malemiut village on the w. 
side of Bald Head, Norton bay, Alaska. 
Isaacs.— Map cited by Baker, Geog/Diet. Alaska, 
1902. Kwik.— Ibid. 

Kwik. A Nunivagmiut Eskimo village 
onthe s. shore of Nunivak id., Alaska; 
pop. 43 in 1890. 

Kweegamute. —Eleventh Census, Alaska,map, 1893. 
Kwigamiut. —Ibid.,111. Kwik. —Baker,Geog. Diet. 
Alaska, 1902. 

Kwikak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on upper Kuskokwim r., Alaska; 
pop. 314 in 1880. 

Kwigalogamut. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
map, 1899. Kwigalogamute. —Petroff in 10th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 17, 1884. Kwikagamut. —Geol. Surv. 
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902, 
Kwikak. —Baker, ibid. Queekagamut. —Kilbuck 
quoted by Baker, ibid. 


748 


KWIKAK—KWULCHICHICHESHK 


[b. a. e. 


Kwikak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village 
on the coast of the Yukon delta, s. of 
Black r., Alaska. 

Kwikagamiut. —Coast Surv. (1898) quoted by Ba¬ 
ker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kwikak.— Baker, 
ibid. 

Kwikluagmint. One of the two divi¬ 
sions into which Holmberg divided the 
Ikogmiut of the Yukon delta; so named 
because they inhabit Kwikluak slough or 

ass. 

wikhluagemut. —Dali, Alaska, 407, 1870. Kwith- 
luag'emut. —Holmberg quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., 1 ,17, 1877. 

Kwikoaenok ( Kwi'kocienox , ‘those at the 
lower end of the village’). A gens of the 
Guauaenok, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897. 

Kwikooi. A Shuswap village at the 
outlet of Adams lake, at the head of 
Thompson r., interior of British Columbia; 
pop., with Slahaltkam (q. v.), 190 in 1904. 

Adams Lake. —Can. Ind. Aff.,259,1882. Kwl kooi'.— 
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. n, 
44. 

Kwikpagmiut. One of the two divisions 
into which Holmberg divided the Ikog¬ 
miut of the Yukon delta, Alaska; so 
named because they inhabit Kwikpak 
slough or pass. The name has also been 
applied to the Ikogmiut generally. 

Kwikhpag'emut. —Holmberg quoted by Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 17, 1877. Kwikbipagmut. — 
Dali, Alaska, 407, 1870. 

Kwilaishauk ( Kwil-aic'-auk ). A former 
Yaquina village on the s. side of Yaquina 
r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Kwilchana ( Qwtltca'na , sig. doubtful). 
A village of the Nicola band of the Ntla- 
kyapamuk, on Nicola lake, Brit. Col.; 
pop. Ill in 1901, the last time the name 
appears. 

Kinsaatin. —Can. Ind. Aff., 302,1893. Koiltca'na.— 
Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 4,1899. Kui- 
saatin. —Can. Ind. Aff., 313, 1892. Quinshaatin.— 
Ibid., pt. II, 166, 1901. Qwiltca'na. —Teit in Mem. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., II, 174, 1900. 

Kwilokuk. An Eskimo village in the 
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 12 in 
1890. 

Quilochugamiut. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 
1893. 

Kwilsieton. A division of the Chasta 
on Rogue r., Oreg., in 1854, which J. O. 
Dorsey (MS., B. A. E.) thought may be 
identical with the Kushetunne of the 
Tututni. 

Quil-si-eton.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1854), 23, 1873. 

Kwinak. A Kuskw T ogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage and Moravian mission in Alaska, on 
the e. side of Kuskokwim r., at its mouth; 
pop. 83 in 1880, 109 in 1890. 

Kwinak. —Sarichef (1826) quoted by Baker, Geog. 
Dist. Alaska, 1902. Kwygyschpainagmjut. —Holm¬ 
berg, Ethnog. Skizz., 5, 1855. Quinchaha. —Post¬ 
route map, 1903. Quinehaha. —Bruce, Alaska, 
map, 1885. Quinehahamute. —Petroff, Rep. on 
Alaska, 53, 1881. Quinhaghamiut. —Eleventh Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 100, 1893. 

Kwineekcha ( Kwin-eek'-cha , ‘long 
body’). A subclan of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 


Kwingyap. The Oak clan of the Asa 
phratry of the Hopi. 

Kwi'iiobi.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 
Kwin-yap wiin-wu.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 
405, 1894 (wiin-wu= ‘ clan ’). Q u i n g o i.—Bourke, 
Snake Dance, 117,1884. 

Kwisaesekeesto ( Kwis-aese-kees'-to, 
‘deer’). A subclan of the Delawares 
(q.v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Kwitchakutchin (‘people of the 
steppes’). A Kutchin tribe inhabiting 
the country between Mackenzie and An¬ 
derson rs., lat. 68°, British America. 

Kodhell-ven-Kouttchin.—Petitot, Autourdu laedes 
Esclaves, 361,1891 ( = ‘people of the marginof the 
sterile Eskimo lands’). Kutch'-a kutch'in.—Ross, 
MS. notes on Tinne, B.A.E. (= ‘ people in a country 
without mountains’). Kwitcha-Kuttchin.—Pe¬ 
titot, Diet.' D6nd-Dindji6, xx, 1876. Kwitchia- 
Kutchin.—Petitot, in Bui. Soc. de G6og. Paris, 
chart, 1875. 

Kwiumpus (‘bear river people’). A 
Paiute tribe formerly living in the vicinity 
of Beaver, s. tv. Utah; pop. 29 in 1873.— 
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874. 
Cf. Cumumbah. 

Kwohitsauk. See Wovoka. 

Kwolan ( K’wo'lan , ‘ear’). A Squaw- 
mish village community on the right bank 
of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout 
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Kwoneatshatka. An unidentified divi¬ 
sion of the Nootka near the n. end of 
Vancouver id.—Hale in U. S. Expl. 
Exped., vi, 569, 1846. 

Kworatem. A locality and a camp or 
village at the confluence of Klamath and 
Salmon rs., n. w. Cal., on the e. bank of 
the former and the s. bank of the latter. 
The name is not Karok, in whose terri¬ 
tory the place is situated, but from the 
Yurok language spoken farther down 
Klamath r. According to the Yurok cus¬ 
tom, Kworatem, being the name of the 
place nearest the mouth of Salmon r., was 
used for the river itself, though always 
with the addition of a term like urnemeri, 
‘stream.’ The name Quoratem was er¬ 
roneously used by Gibbs for the Karok 
Indians, and was adopted by Powell in 
the adjectival form Quoratean (q. v.) as 
the name of the linguistic family consti¬ 
tuted by the Karok. ( a. l. k. ) 

Cor-a-tem.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess , 163, 1853. Quoratem.—Gibbs 
(1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 151. 1853. 
Quoratems —Ibid. 

Kwotoa. A division of the Maidu at 
Placerville, Eldorado co., Cal. 

Kwo-to'-a.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 315, 
1877. Quotoas.—Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22, 
1874. 

Kwsichichu ( Kwsi'-iti-icu '). A former 
Siuslaw village s. of Eugene City, Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 230, 
1890. 

Kwulaishauik ( Kwid - ai' - cau -Ik). A 
former Yaquina village on the n. side of 
Yaquina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 229, 1890. 

Kwulchichicheshk ( Khrnl - tci'- tci - tceck ). 
A former Yaquina village on the s. side 


BULL. 30] 


KWULHAUUNNICH-KYUQUOT 


749 


of Yaquina r., below Elk City, Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 229, 
1890. ' 

Kwulhauunnicli (Kwul - hauun - rate '). 
A former Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 230, 1890. 

Kwulisit (ICwd-li'-sU). A former Alsea 
village on the s. side of Alsea r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 230, 
1890. 

Kwullaish ( KwM-laic / ). A former Ya¬ 
quina village on the s. side of Yaquina r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 922, 1890. 

Kwullakhtauik (KivuV-laq-Vau'lk ). A 
former Yaquina village on the s. side of 
Yaquina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 229, 1890. 

Kwnltsaiya {KwiU-fsaV-yd). A former 
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.—Dor¬ 
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, nr, 230,1890. 

Kwunnumis (Kwimf -nii-ntis '). A former 
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, nr, 230, 
1890. 

Kwusathlkhuntunne (‘ people who eat 
mussels’). A former village of the Tu- 
tutni. Kautz, in 1855, placed it at the 
mouth of Mussel cr., 5 m. s. of Mt Hum¬ 
bug, Oreg. In 1854 (Ind. Aff. Rep., 495, 
1855) it numbered 27 persons. If any 
survive they live on Siletz res., Oreg. 
Co-soott-hen-te'n.—Kautz, MS. Toutouten Census, 
B. A. PI, 1855. Cosotoul.—Palmer in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 217. 1856. Cosulhentan.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, vi, 702,1857. Cosulhenten.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, June 8, I860. Cosutheuten.—Parrish in 
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 496, 1855. Co-sutt-heu-tun.— 
Ibid., 495. Ko-sul-te-me.—Gibb«, MS. on coast 
tribes, B. A. E. Kwus-a 9 l' qun lunne'.—Dorsey in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, nr, 233,1890. 

Kwuskwemus (Klims'-k’ we -mils'). A 
former Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 230, 1890. 

Kwutichuntthe ( Kwid'-ti-tcun'-V<fi). A 
former Yaquina village on the s. side of 
Yaquina r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890. 

Kyakyali. The Eagle clan of the Zuni 
of New Mexico. 

K‘ya'k‘yali-kwe.—Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 
368,1896 (kwe= l people’). 

Kyalishi-ateuna ( K’yalishi-ateuna, 
1 those of the westernmost’). A phratry 
embracing the Suski (Coyote) and Poye 
(Chaparral-cock) clans of the Zuni of 
New Mexico. (f. h. c.) 

Kyamaisu ( Kya-mai'-m ). A former 
Alsea village at the mouth of Alsea r., 
Oreg., on the n. side.—Dorsey in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890. 

Kyamakyakwe (‘snail-shell houses’). 
A massive ruined pueblo, built of lava 
blocks, situated 47 m. s. s. w. of Zuni, N. 
Mex. According to Zuni tradition this 
settlement, together with Pikyaiawan and 
K vatsutuma, was the northernmost home 
of the Snail people, whose dance is an¬ 


nually performed by members of the 
Black-corn clan of the Zuni, who claim 
descent from the Kyamakyakwe people. 
The towns mentioned formed the north¬ 
ern outposts of the “Kingdom of Mar- 
ata” (see Maty ala), and were conquered 
by the Zuni prior to Coronado’s visit in 
1540, the “Corn captives” being spared 
on account of their ceremonies and their 
advancement in agriculture, (f. h. c.) 

Cha-ma-kia.—Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., 
i, 100, 1891. Kyamakyakwe.—Cushing, inf’n, 1892. 

Kyana. The extinct Water clan of Zuni 
pueblo, N. Mex. 

K‘yana-kwe.—Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368, 
1896 (kwe= t people’). 

Kyatiikya ( K’yatiik’ya , ‘water drops 
come out’). A ruined pueblo at the 
mouth of the canyon opposite the e. end 
of Thunder mt., near Zuni, N. Mex.; so 
named because the water on which its 
inhabitants depended oozed from the can¬ 
yon walls. (f. h. c.)* 

Chat-e-cha.—Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., 
I, 100, 1891. K’yatiik’ya.—Cushing, inf’n, 1892. 

Kyatsutuma ( K’ya-tsu-tu-ma , ‘town of 
the dewdrops’). A former town which, 
with Kyamakyakwe and Pikyaiawan, 
was the northernmost home of the Snail 
people and one of the outposts or strong¬ 
holds of Matyata (q. v.), which were con¬ 
quered by the Zuni in late prehistoric 
times. (f. h. c. ) 

Kyaukuhu ( Kyau'-ku-hu) . A former Ya- 
quina village on the n. side of Yaquina r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Kyawana-tehuatsana (K’ ydwana-tehua- 
tsana, ‘little gateway of Zuni river’). A 
prehistoric Zuni village, now in ruins, 
about 7 m. e. of Zuni pueblo, on a mesa 
above the “gateway,” whence its name. 

Cha-wa-na.—Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., 
I, 100, 1891. Ky-a-wa-na Tehua-tsana.—Ibid., 96. 
K’yawana Tehua-tsana.—Cushing, Zuni FolkTales, 
297, 1901. 

Kyekykyenok (Kek‘k’’enox) . A gens 
of the Awaitlala, a Kwakiutl tribe.—Boas 
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897. 

Kyiahl. The Crow clan of Jemez 
pueblo, N. Mex. A corresponding clan 
existed at the former related pueblo of 
Pecos. 

Kyia‘hl+.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896 
(Pecos name; + = ash, or tsaash, ‘people’). 
Kyialish.—Ibid. (Jemez name). 

Kyunggang. The Hawk clan of San 
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex. 

Kyu n ga n -tdoa.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 
1896 (td6a= t people’). 

Kyunu. The Corn clan of Jemez 
pueblo, N. Mex. A corresponding clan 
existed at the former related pueblo of 
Pecos. 

Kyunu’ + .—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 
(Pecos form; + =ash, or tsaash, ‘people’). Kyu- 
nutsa-ash.—Ibid. (Jemez form). 

Kyuquot. A Nootka tribe on Kyuquot 
sd., w. coast of Vancouver id.; pop. 305 
in 1902, 281 in 1904. Its principal vil¬ 
lages are Aktese and Kukamukamees. 


750 


KYUWATKAL-LABRETS 


[B. a. e. 


Cayoquits.—Armstrong, Oregon, 136, 1857. Cayu- 
quets.— Jewitt, Narr., 77, 1849. Kayo'kath.—Boas 
in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. Kayo- 
kuaht.—Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kycu-cut.—Mayne, 
Brit. Col., 251, 1861. Ky-u-kaht.—Can. Ind. Aff., 
276,1894. Ky-uk ahts.—Ibid., 52,1875. Kyuquot.— 
Swan, MS., B. A. E. Ky-wk-aht.—Can. Ind. Aff., 
188, 1883. Ky-yoh-quaht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 
1868. 

Kyuwatkal ( Kyu'-w&t-Jcal ). A former 
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina 
r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
in, 229, 1890. 

Laalaksentaio. A gens of the true Kwa- 
kiutl, embracing the subdivisions Laal¬ 
aksentaio, Alkunwea, and Hehametawe. 

Laa'laqsEnt’aio. —Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 54, 1890. La'alaxsEnt’aio. —Boas in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1895, 330, 1897. Lalachsent’aio. —Boas 
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131,1887.° 

Labor, Division of. The common im¬ 
pression that the Indian woman was a 
mere slave and drudge for her husband 
is an error due to ignorance of the Indian 
division of labor in accordance with the 
necessities of savage life. Briefly stated, 
it was the man’s business to provide meat 
and skins from the forest and plain and 
to protect the home from enemies, while 
the woman attended to the household 
duties of preparing the food, arranging 
the house interior, and caring for the 
children. The preparation of the food 
implied also the principal work of culti¬ 
vation among the agricultural tribes, with 
the bringing of the wood and water, 
while household work included the mak¬ 
ing of pottery, basketry, and mats. The 
men themselves frequently made their 
own buckskin dress, and almost always 
their ceremonial costume. Among the 
Pueblos the greater part of the buckskin 
clothing, including leggings and mocca¬ 
sins, for both sexes, was made by the 
men. The heavier part of the Pueblo 
weaving also was the work of the men, 
the women confining themselves for the 
greater part to the production of belts 
and other small pieces. Among the 
Navaho, on the other hand, the weaving 
work was about evenly divided. The 
men fashioned their weapons, and the 
articles of more laborious construction, 
as stone hatchets, canoes, fish weirs, etc. 
As tribes were constantly at war one with 
another and the pursuit of game carried 
the hunter into disputed territory, the 
first business of every man was to be a 
warrior, forever on the alert for dan¬ 
ger. This condition left him very little 
leisure for other pursuits excepting dur¬ 
ing the season when his enemies also 
were unable to travel. His wife, recog¬ 
nizing this fact, took up her share of 
the burden cheerfully, and would have 
scorned as effeminate the husband who 
took any other view of the situation. 
Among the more sedentary and agricul¬ 
tural tribes, where the procuring of food 
did not necessitate hostile collision with 
other tribes, the men usually did their 


fair share of the home work, laboring in 
the fields together with the women. In 
general, it may be said that the man as¬ 
sumed the dangerous duty, the woman 
the safer routine work. The frequent 
sacrifice ordeals, intended to win the 
favor of the gods of the tribe, were borne 
almost entirely by the men, the part of 
the women being chiefly that of applaud¬ 
ing spectators. The woman remained 
mistress of the home, and in spite of the 
variety of her duties, the number of 
women’s games furnish testimony that 
she enjoyed her leisure in her own way. 
See Popular fallacies, Women, (j. m. ) 
Labrets. Ornaments worn in holes that 
are pierced through the lips. Cabeza de 
Vaca notes of Indians of the Texas coast: 
“They likewise have thenetherlip bored, 
and within the same they carry a piece of 
thin cane about half a finger thick.” It 
is quite certain that this custom prevailed 
for some distance inland along the Colo¬ 
rado r. of Texas and in neighboring re¬ 
gions, while large labrets were also found 
by Cushing among the remains on the 
w. coast of Florida. Outside of this re¬ 
gion they were almost restricted to an 
area in the N. W., the habitat of the 
Aleut, Haida, Heiltsuk, Tlingit, Tsim- 
shian, and Eskimo tribes, extending 
from Dean inlet to Anderson r. on the 
Arctic coast. They were also adopted 
by some of the western Athapascans. 
Here the lower lip alone was pierced. 
While the southern tribes made a single 
aperture in the middle of the lip, and 
consequently used but one labret, the 
Aleut and Eskimo usually punctured 
a hole below each corner of the mouth 
and inserted two. Moreover, among the 
southern tribes the ornament was worn 
only by women, while Aleut men used 
it occasionally and Eskimo men more 
and more generally, as one proceeded 
northward, until beyond the Yukon the 
use of labrets was confined to males. 
Among the Haida, Heiltsuk, Tlingit, and 
Tsimshian the labret was a mark of high 
birth, superseding in this respect the bead - 
flattening of the tribes living farther s. 
The piercing was consequently done dur¬ 
ing potlatches, a small aperture being 
bored first, which was enlarged from year 
to year until it sometimes became so great 
that the lip proper was reduced to a nar¬ 
row ribbon,' which was liable to break, 
and sometimes did. The labrets were 
made of wood, stone, bone, or abalone 
shell, often inlaid, and present two gen¬ 
eral types, namely, a long piece inserted 
into the lip at one end, or a round or 
oval stud hollowed on each side and 
protruding but slightly from the face. 
George Dixon noted one of this latter 
type that was 31 in. long by 2f in. broad. 
The last labrets used were small plugs of 
silver, and the custom has now been 


BULL. 30] 


751 


LACAME-LA FLESCHE, FRANCIS 


entirely abandoned. On account of the 
use of these ornaments the Tlingit were 
called Kolosch by their northern neigh¬ 
bors and the Russians, whence the name 
Koluschan, adopted for the linguistic 
stock. 

Among the Eskimo and Aleut bone 
labrets predominated, though some very 
precious specimens were of jade. They 
were shaped like buttons or studs, or, in 
the case of some worn by women, like 
sickles. The lips of men were pierced 
only at puberty, and the holes were en¬ 
larged successively by means of plugs, 



LABRETS, WESTERN ESKIMO. (nELSOn) 


which were often strung together after¬ 
ward and preserved. For further illustra¬ 
tion of the use of labrets, see Adornment. 

Consult Dali (1) in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 
1884, (2) in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 1877; 
Dawson, Rep. on Queen Charlotte Ids., 
Geol. Surv. Canada, 1880; Murdoch in 
9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1899. (j. R. s.) 

Lacame. A province visited by Moscoso, 
of De Soto’s expedition, toward the close 
of the year 1542; probably in s. w. Ar¬ 
kansas. 

Lacame.—Biedma (1544) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., ii, 108,1850. Lacane.—Gentl. of Elvas in Hak¬ 
luyt Soc. Pub., ix, 135,1851. 

Lacayamu. Two former Chumashan 
villages, one on Santa Cruz id., the other 
in Ventura co., Cal. 

Lacayamu.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, July 
24,1863. Lucuyumu,—Bancroft, Native Races, i, 
459,1874. 


Lac Court Oreilles. A Chippewa band, 
named from the lake on which they 
lived, at the headwaters of Chippewa r., 
in Sawyer co., Wis. In 1852 they formed 
a part of the Betonukeengainubejig divi¬ 
sion of the Chippewa, and in 1854 were 
assigned a reservation. In 1905 they 
were officially reported to number 1,214, 
to whom lands had been allotted in sev¬ 
eralty. 

Lac Court d’Oreille band.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 254,1877. 
Lac Court Oreille band.—U. S. Stat. L., x, 223, 1854. 
Lac Court Orielles.—La Pointe treaty (1854) in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 224, 1873. Lac Court, OrviHe.— 
Fitch in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 28, 1858. Lac Couter- 
eille.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.,v, 
191,1885. Ottawa lake men.—Ibid., 39. 

Lachalsap. A village of the Hwotso- 
tenne on Bulkley r., Brit. Col.; pop. 157 
in 1904. 

Lachalsap.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. 2, 70, 1902. Lack- 
alsap,—Ibid., 1903, pt. 2, 73,1904. Moricetown.— 
Ibid., 70,1902. 

Lackawanna. A variety of coal. From 
Lackawanna , the name of a tributary of 
the Susquehanna and a county in Penn¬ 
sylvania, which represents lechauwanne in 
theLenape (Delaware) dialect, signifying 
‘ the stream forks ’; from lechau, ‘ fork ’, 
and -hanne, ‘stream,’ ‘river’, (a. f. c. ) 

Lackawaxen ( Lechauweksmk , ‘ the forks 
of the road’). Mentioned by Alcedo 
(Die. Geog., ii, 565, 1787) as a former In¬ 
dian (Delaware?) settlement on the e. 
branch of Delaware r., Pa. The e. branch 
of the Delaware is in New York, and the 
settlement, if ever existing, was probably 
on Lackawaxen cr., a tributary of the 
Delaware in n. e. Pennsylvania. Hecke- 
welder (Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., iv, 359, 
1834) mentions this as the Delaware name 
for two places, one in Wayne co. and the 
other in Northampton co., Pa. 

Lechavaksein.—Alcedo, op. cit. Lechawaxen.— 
Heckewelder, op. cit. 

Lacrosse. See Ball play. 

Ladles. —See Dishes, Gourds , Receptacles. 

Lady Rebecca. See Pocahontas. 

Laenukhuma ( Lae'nuxuma) . Given by 
Boas (Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887) 
as the ancestor of a gens of the Quat- 
sino; also applied to the gens itself. 

La Flesche, Francis. Son of Estamaza, 
or Joseph La Flesche, former head chief 
of the Omaha, born in Thurston co., 
Nebr., Dec. 25, 1857. He attended the 
Presbyterian mission school on the Omaha 
res., where he laid the foundation of his 
later education. In 1878-79 he accom¬ 
panied the Ponca chief Standing Bear on 
his eastern tour and interpreted his pre¬ 
sentation of the wrongs his people had 
suffered in the removal from their home 
in South Dakota. During an investiga¬ 
tion of the Ponca removal by a committee 
of the U. S. Senate he served again as in¬ 
terpreter and attracted the attention of 
the chairman by the impartial manner 
in which he performed his work. In 




752 


LA FLESCHE, SUSETTE-LAGUNA 


[b. a. e. 


1881, when Hon. S. J. Kirkwood, the 
chairman of that committee, became 
Secretary of the Interior, he called Mr 
La Flesche to Washington and gave 
him a position in the Office of Indian 
Affairs, where he remains. In 1893 he 
was graduated from the National Uni¬ 
versity Law School. The memory of the 
tribal life of his childhood stimulated him 
to study his people, for which his father’s 
position gave him unusual advantage. 
His mastery of English has enabled him 
accurately to set forth the results of his 
ethnological investigations, in which he 
is still actively engaged. His published 
writings have appeared in the Journal of 
American Folk-loreandotherscientific pe¬ 
riodicals, in the “Study of Omaha Indian 
Music,” by Alice 0. Fletcher (Peabody 
Museum Pub.), and in popular magazines. 
He is the author also of “The Middle 
Five, ’ ’ a book giving the story of his school 
days. Mr La Flesche has made ethno¬ 
logical collections for the University of 
Berlin, the University of California, the 
Peabody Museum of American Archae¬ 
ology and Ethnology, and other institu¬ 
tions of learning. He is a fellow of the 
American Association for the Advance¬ 
ment of Science, and a member of the 
American Anthropological Association 
and of the Anthropological Society of 
Washington. In 1906 Mr La Flesche 
married Miss Rosa Bourassa, of Chip¬ 
pewa descent. (a. c. F.) 

La Flesche, Susette. See Bright Eyes. 

Lagcay. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Laco.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 18C3. 
Lagcay.—Ibid. 

Lagrimas de San Pedro (Span.: ‘ tears of 
St Peter’). A former group of Alchedoma 
rancherias, on or near the Rio Colorado, 
in California, more than 50 m. below the 
mouth of Bill Williams fork. They were 
visited and so named by Fray Francisco 
Garces in 1776.—Garces, Diary, 427,1900. 

Laguna (Span.: ‘lagoon’, on account of 
a large pond west of the pueblo; aborig¬ 
inal name Ka-waik', an old Kertsan 
word of unknown signification). A Ke- 
resan tribe whose principal pueblo, which 
bears the same popular name, is situated 
on the s. bank of San Jos6 r., Valencia 
co., N. Mex., about 45 m. w. of Albu¬ 
querque. It was formerly the seat of a 
Spanish mission, dating from its estab¬ 
lishment as a pueblo in July, 1699, and 
having Acoma as a visita after 1782. The 
lands of the Lagunas consist of a Spanish 
grant of 125,225 acres, mostly of desert 
land. The Laguna people are composed of 
19 clans, as follows, those marked with an 
asterisk being extinct: Kohaia (Bear), 
Ohshahch (Sun),Chopi (Badger), Tyami 
(Eagle), Skurshka (Water-snake), Sqowi 
(Rattlesnake), Tsushki (Coyote), Yaka 
(Corn; divided into Kochinish-yaka, or 


Yellow-corn, and Kukinish-yaka, or Red- 
corn), Sits (Water),Tsina (Turkey), Kak- 
han (Wolf), Hatsi (Earth)*, Mokaiqch 
(Mountain lion)*, Shawiti (Parrot), Shu- 
wimi (Turquoise), Shiaska (Chaparral- 
cock), Kurtsi (Antelope), Meyo (Lizard), 
Hapai (Oak). Most of the clans consti¬ 
tute phratral groups, as follows: (1) Bear, 
Badger, Coyote, and Wolf; (2) Mountain- 
lion and Oak; (3) Water-snake, Rattle¬ 
snake, Lizard, and Earth; (4) Antelope 
and Water. According to Laguna tradi¬ 
tion, the Bear, Eagle, Water, Turkey, and 
Corn clans, together with some members 
of the Coyote clan, came originally from 
Acoma; the Badger, Parrot, Chaparral- 
cock, and Antelope clans, and some mem¬ 
bers of the Coyote clan, came from Zuni; 
the Sun people originated probably in 
San Felipe; the Water-snake in Sia; the 



JOSE PAISANO—LAGUNA 

Rattlesnake probably in Oraibi; the Wolf 
and Turquoise in Sandia; the Earth clan 
in Jemez; the Mountain-lion and Oak 
people claim to have come from Mt Tay¬ 
lor; the Lizard clan is of unknown origin. 
Laguna therefore is not only the most 
recent of the New Mexican pueblos, but 
its inhabitants are of mixed origin, being 
composed of at least four linguistic stocks— 
Keresan, Tanoan, Shoshonean, and Zu- 
nian. It is said that formerly the people 
were divided into two social groups, or 
phratries, known as Kapaits and Kayo- 
masho, but these are now practically po¬ 
litical parties, one progressive, the other 
conservative. Until 1871 the tribe occu¬ 
pied, except during the summer season, 
the single pueblo of Laguna, but this vil¬ 
lage is gradually becoming depopulated, 







BULL. 30] 


LAGUNA-LA JOY A 


753 


the inhabitants establishing permanent 
residences in the former summer villages 
of Casa Blanca, Cubero, Hasatch, Paguate, 
Encinal, Santa Ana, Paraje, Tsiama, and 
Puertecito. Of these, Paguate is the old¬ 
est and most populous, containing 350 to 
400 inhabitants in 1891. Former villages 
were Shinats and Shunaiki. The Laguna 
people numbered 1,384 in 1905. See 
Keresan Family , Moquino, Pueblos, Rito, 
Shumasitscha., and the villages above 
named. (f. w. h.) 

Bierai.— Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., 1885 (Isleta 
name of pueblo). Bieride. —Ibid. (pi. Biernin; 
Isleta name of people). Ka-hua-i-ko. —Jouven- 
ceau in Cath. Pion., i, no. 9, 13, 1906. Kairai- 
kome.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., vi, 183, 1885. 
Kaiwaika.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 30, 1891 
(Hopi name of pueblo). Kan-Ayko. — Loew in 
Wheeler Surv. Rep., app. LL, 178, 1875 (Laguna 
name of pueblo, n=u). Ka-uay-ko. —Bandelierin 
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 260, 1890 (Laguna name of 
pueblo). Kawahykaka.—Voth, Traditions of the 
Hopi, 11, 1895 (Hopi name). Kawaihkaa.— Ibid., 
143. Kawaik .—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 
(Laguna name of pueblo). Ka-waik'.— ten Kate, 
Synonymie, 7, 1884 (Laguna name of pueblo). 
Ka-waika'. —Ibid. Kawaikama.— Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Santa Ana name of tribe). 
Kawaikame. —ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 230, 1885 
(Laguna name of tribe). Kawaik'-ka-me. —ten 
Kate, Synonymie, 7,1884 (Laguna name of tribe). 
Kawaikome.— Powell in Am. Nat., xiv, 604, Aug. 
1880 (mentioned distinctly from Laguna). Ko- 
iks.— Lummis, Man who Married the Moon, 202, 
1894 (native name of Laguna). Ko-stete.— Loew in 
Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii,339,1879 (given as proper 
name of pueblo). KuhkweaL —Hodge, field 
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Isleta and Sanaia name: see 
Bierai, above). K‘ya-na-thlana-kwe. —Cushing, 
inl’n, 1891 (Zuni name: • people of the great pool 
or pond'). Lagana.— Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. 
Rep., vil,405,1879 (misprint). Lagouna.— Gallatin 
in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., XXVII, 297, 1851. 
Laguna.— MS. of 1702 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, v, 189, 1890; Villa-Senor, Theatro 
Am., pt. 2, 421, 1748. Lagune.— Gatschet in Mag. 
Am. Hist., 263, Apr. 1882. Lagunes.— Simpson in 
Rep. Sec. War, 150,1850. Lagumans.— ten Broeck 
(1852) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 81, 88, 1854. 
La haguna— Domenech, Deserts N. Am., I, 443, 
1860. Layma.— ten Broeck in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 77, 1854 (misprint). Saguna.— Klett in 
Pop. Sci. Monthly, V, 584, 1874 (misprint). San 
Jose de la Laguna —Ward in Ind. All. Rep. 1867, 
213,1868 (mission name). San Josef de La Laguna. — 
Ale'ncaster (1805) in Prince, N. Mex., 37, 1883. 
Seguna.— Pike, Exped., 3d map, 1810 (misprint). 
Sitsime.— Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 263, Apr. 
1882 (Laguna name for themselves). Taguna.— 
Wallace, Land of the Pueblrs, 45,1888 (misprint). 
To-zan'-ne'.—ten Kate, Synonymie, 6, 1884 (-much 
water’: Navaho name). Tozjanne. —ten Kate, 
Reizen in N. A., 231,1885 (Navaho name). Tuzh- 
lani.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Navaho 
name of people). 

Laguna. A Porno band on the w. 
shore of Clear lake, Cal.—Revere, Tour 
of Duty, 120,1849. See Clear Lake Indians. 

Laguna. A Diegueno village in w. San 
Diego co., Cal. (Jackson and Kinney, 
Rep. Miss. Ind., 24, 1883). The name is 
now applied to one of the so-called Campo 
reservations, comprising320acres, mostly 
of desert land, and containing only 5 in¬ 
habitants in 1906 (Kelsey, Rep., 25,1906). 

Lahanna. A name applied by Lewis and 
Clark in 1805 to a body of Indians, said to 
num ber 2,000 in 120 houses, on both sides of 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-48 


Columbia r. about Clarke’s fork. This is 
in the country of the Pend d’Oreilles and 
Senijextee, but Lahanna corresponds to 
no known division. 

Lahama.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 314, 1882 (mis¬ 
quoting Morse). Lahanna. —Lewis and Clark, 
Exped., ii, 475,1814. La-hanna.— Orig. Jour. Lewis 
and Clark, vi, 119, 1905. 

Lahaui ( Ld'qaui ). A village of the 
Nicomen tribe of Cowichan at the mouth 
of Wilson cr., on the s. side of Fraser r., 
Brit. Col.—Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 
454, 1894. 

Lahoocat. Mentioned by Lewis and 
Clark as an old Arikara village, occupied 
in 1797, abandoned about 1800. It was 
situated on an island in Missouri r., below 
the present Cheyenne River agency, S. 
Dak., and when occupied consisted of 17 
lodges arranged in a circle and walled. 
Lahoocat. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, 97, 1814. 
La hoo catt. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 179, 
1904. 

Laidukatuwiwait ( LaV-du-ka-tu-wi- 
wait). A Paviotso band formerly living 
about the sink of the Humboldt, in w. 
Nevada.—Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E., 
1881. 

Laimon. Venegas (Hist. Cal., i, 55, 
1759) states that the Indians of Loreto- 
Concho mission have specific names for 
the tribes of Lower California according 
to the regions occupied by them, as the 
Edu, Eduu, or Edues in the s.; that 
they call themselves Monquis, and those 
n. of Loreto are called Laymones; the 
latter are in fact Cochimi, the Edues vir¬ 
tually Pericui, though both, the Edues 
and the Laymones, contain some tribes of 
the Monquis. Cagnaguetand Kadakaman 
are given as Laimon divisions. 

Lamoines.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860. 
Layamon.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
88,1856. Laymon.— Prichard, Nat. Hist. Man., ii, 
553, 1855. Laymona.— Baegert in Smithson. Rep. 
1864,393,1865. Laymones. —Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 
55, 1759. Limonies. —Taylor in Browne, Res. Pac. 
Slope, app., 54, 1869. • 

Lajas (Span.: ‘stone slabs,’ translation 
of the native name). A Tepehuane 
pueblo, of 900 inhabitants, in the ex¬ 
treme n. part of the territory of Tepic, 
Mexico, about lat. 23°, Ion. 105°. The 
children of the town, who prior to about 
1890 had never seen a white person, are 
now instructed in Spanish and the rudi¬ 
ments of civilization and Christianity. 
Eityam.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, 1,457, 1902 
(native name). Lajas.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
319,1864. San Francisco Lajas. —Ibid, (full Span¬ 
ish name). 

La Joya(Span.: ‘thejewel’). ALuiseno 
village n. of San Luis Rey, in San Diego 
co., Cal., from which 180 Indians are said 
to have been present at the Temecula 
meeting in 1865 (Lovett in Rep. Ind. 
Aff., 124, 1865). The settlement is now 
on Potrero res., 75 m. from Mission Tule 
River agency. 

La Jolla.— Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Mission 
Inds., 29,1883. La Joya.— Hayes (1850) quoted by 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 460,1882. 


754 


LAJUCHU-LAMSIM 


[b. a. e. 


Lajuchu. A former Chumashan village 
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara co., 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. 

Lake Indians. A term used by English 
writers of the 18th century to designate 
the Indians living on the great lakes, es¬ 
pecially the Chippewa and the Ottawa. 

Lakisumne. A village of California 
whose language, according to Pinart, 
showed differences from that of the Cholo- 
vone (Mariposan stock), but was under¬ 
stood by them. If not related to the 
Cholovone, this village was probably 
Moquelumnan. 

Lacquesumne.—Pinart, Cholovone MS., B. A. E., 
1880. Lakisumne.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 450, 
1874. Sakisimme.—Ibid. 

Lakkulzap (‘on the town’). A mod¬ 
ern Chimmesyan town, founded in 1872 
by a Mr Green from Niska, the inhabit¬ 
ants having been drawn from the villages 
of Kitaix and Kitkahta. Pop. 183 in 
1902, 145 in 1904. 

Greenville.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1889, 272 (name 
given by whites). Kach-als-ap.—Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., xix, 281, 1897 (misquoted from Can. 
Ind. Aff.). Lachalsap.—Can. Ind. Aff., 416, 1898. 
Lack-al-sap.—Ibid., 272, 1889. Lak-kul-zap.—Dor¬ 
sey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897. 

Lakloukst (Laqlo'ukst ). A Niska divi¬ 
sion of the Lakskiyek clan, living in the 
town of Kitwinhilk, on Nass r., Brit. 
Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 49, 1895. 

Lakmiut. A Kalapooian tribe formerly 
residing on a river of the same name, a 
western tributary of the Willamette, in 
Oregon. They are now* on Grande Ronde 
res., where they were officially stated to 
number 28 in 1905. They are steadily 
decreasing. The following were Lakmiut 
bands as ascertained by Gatschetin 1877: 
Ampalamuyu, Chantkaip, Chepenafa, 
Mohawk, Tsalakmiut, Tsampiak, Tsan- 
tatawa, and Tsantuisha. 

Alakema'yuk.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E. 
(Atfalati name). Chelukamanches.—Ind.Aff. Rep. 
1864, 503, 1865. Chelukimaukes.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 
221, 1861. Lakmiuk. — Gatschet in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, xii, 213, 1899. Lakmiut—Gatschet, 
Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877 (own name). Luck- 
a-mi-ute.—Pres. Mess., Sen. Ex. Doc. 39,32d Cong., 
1st sess., 2,1852. Luckamuke.—Palmer in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1856, 196, 1857. Luckamutes.—Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 519,1878. Luckiamut.—Smith 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 56,1875. Luckiamute.—Victor in 
Overland Monthly, vii, 346, 1871. Luckimiute.— 
McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 184,1887. Luckimute.— 
Huntington in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 62, 1868. 
Lukemayuk.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877 
(Atfalati name). Sackanoir.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, vi, 701, 1857 (after Lane). Suchamier.— 
Ibid., 689. Suck-a-mier.—Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
161,1850. 

Lakseel (Laqse'el, ‘ on the ocean’). A 
Niska division belonging to the Kanhada 
clan, living in the towns of Andeguale and 
Kitlakdamix on Nass r., Brit. Col.—Boas 
in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 1895. 

Lakskiyek ( LaqskVyek , ‘on the eagle’). 
One of the 4 Chimmesyan clans. Local 
subdivisions bearing the same name are 
found in the Niska towns of Lakkulzap 
and Kitlakdamix, and in the Kitksan town 


of Kitwingach. —Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 49, 50, 1895. 

Laktiaktl (LaqVid'k'tl) . A Niska divi¬ 
sion of the Lakyebo (Wolf) clan, settled in 
the town of Kitwinshilk, on Nass r., Brit. 
Col.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
49, 1895. 

Laktsemelik ( Laqttf Eme'liH , ‘on the 
beaver’). A Niska division of the Lak¬ 
skiyek clan, living in the town of Kitlak¬ 
damix, on Nass r., Brit. Col.—Boas in 10th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 1895. 

Lakungida (perhapsaHaidaname). A 
Niska town near the mouth of Nass r., 
Brit. Col. In 1870 its inhabitants ex¬ 
ceeded 400, but in 1897 it contained not 
more than 50.—Dorsey in Am. Antiq., 
xix, 279, 1897. 

Lakweip (Niska: Laq’uyi'p, ‘on the 
prairie.’—Boas). An isolated Athapas¬ 
can tribe, related to the Tahltan, formerly 
living on Portland canal, Alaska, but hav¬ 
ing quarreled with the Niska are now on 
the headwaters of Stikine r., Brit. Col. 
Their chief village is Gunakhe. 

Lackweips.—Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 563, 1870. 
Laq’uyi'p.—Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
34, 1895. Naqkyina.—Ibid. (Tsetsaut name: ‘on 
the other side’). 

Lakyebo ( Laqkyebd, ‘ on the wolf ’). One 
of the 4 clans into which all the Chimme¬ 
syan are divided. The name is applied 
specifically to various local subdivisions 
as well, there being one such in the Niska 
town of Lakkulzap and another in the 
Kitksan town of Kishpiyeoux.—Boas in 
10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 50, 1895. 

Lalauitlela ( La/lauiLEla , ‘ always cross¬ 
ing the sea’). A gens of the Tlatlasikoala, 
subdivided into the Gyegyote and Hahe- 
kolatl.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895,329, 
1897. 

Lamasconson. One of several tribes or 
bands displaced from their homes in St 
Mary and Charles cos., Md., in 1651, and 
settled on a reservation at the head of 
Wicomico r. (Bozman, Maryland, ii, 421, 
1837). Perhaps a small branch of the 
Conoy. 

Lamochattee. See Weatherford, William. 

La Montagne (Fr.: ‘ the mountain ’). A 
mission village established in 1677 for 
Caughnawaga and other Catholic Iro¬ 
quois on a hill on Montreal id., Quebec. 
They were afterward joined by others, 
many of whom were not Christians. The 
village was temporarily deserted in 1689 on 
account of the Iroquois. In 1696 a part of 
the converts established a new mission vil¬ 
lage at Sault au Recollet, and were joined 
by the others until in 1704 La Montagne 
was finally abandoned. (j. m. ) 

The Mountain.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 309,1865. 

Lamps. See Illumination. 

Lamsim. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18,1861, 


BULL. 30] 


LAMTAMA-LANCES 


755 


Lamtama. A Nez Percd band living on 
White Bird cr., a tributary of Salmon r., 
Idaho, so called from the native name of 
the stream.—Gatschet, MS.,1878, B. A. E. 
Buffalo Indians.— Owen in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 
424, 1860. Lamtama.— Gatschet, MS.,1878, B. A. E. 
White Bird Nez Perces. —Ibid, (so called from the 
name of their chief). 

Lana-chaadus ( La'na tca'adAs). Afam- 
ily of low social rank belonging to the 
Eagle clan of the Haida. Before becom¬ 
ing extinct they occupied, with the Gitin- 
gidjats, a town on Shingle bay, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Some are said 
to have lived with the Kaiiahl-lanas.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274, 1905. 

Lanadagunga ( La'na cla'gAna, ‘ bad 
[or common] village ’). A former Haida 
town, owned by the Saki-kegawai, on 
the coast of Moresby id., s. of Tangle 
cove, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It 
was so called by the people of Hagi, op¬ 
posite, because the Lanadagunga people 
used to talk against them.—Swanton, 
Cont. Haida, 277,1905. 

Lanagahlkehoda ( Lana'ga iqe'xoda, 
* town that the sun does not' shine on ’). 
A Haida town on a small island opposite 
Kaisun, w. coast of Moresby id., Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was so named 
because it faces n. This is a semi-myth¬ 
ical town, said to have been occupied by 
the Kas-lanas.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 
280,1905. 

Lanagukunhlin-hadai {La'na gu qA'n- 
iin xa'da-i , ‘resting-the-breast-on-a-town 
people’). A subdivision of the Chaahl- 
lanas, a family of the Eagle clan of the 
Haida. Lanagukunhlin was the name 
of a chief.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 
1905. 

Lanahawa {La'na xa'wa , ‘swampy vil¬ 
lage’). A former Haida town on the w. 
coast of Graham id., opposite Hippa id., 
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was 
also called Lanaheguns {La'-na xe'-gAns, 
‘ town where there is a noise [of drums] ’) 
and Lanahltungua ( La'-na ItA'ngua, 
‘town where there are plenty of feath¬ 
ers’). It was occupied by the Skwahla- 
das and Nasto-kegawai before they moved 
to Rennell sd., and afterward by the 
Kianusili.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280. 
1905. 

Lanahawa. A former Haida town on the 
w. coast of Burnaby id., Queen Charlotte 
ids., Brit. Col., s. of the Ninstints town 
of Ket.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278. 


1905. 

Lanahilduns {La'na M'ldAns, ‘moving 
village’; also called Chahlolnagai, from 
the name of the inlet on which it was 
situated). A former Haida town on the 
s. w. side of Rennell sd., Graham id., 
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col.; occu¬ 
pied by the Nasto-kegawai or the Skwa- 
hladas family group.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 280, 1905. 


Lanaslnagai ( La'nas Inaga'-i, ‘peoples’ 
town ’). The name of three distinct Haida 
towns on Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. 
One stood on the e. coast of Graham id., 
s. of C. Ball, and was owned by the 
Naikun-kegawai; another belonged to 
the Kuna-lanas and was on the w. side of 
Masset inlet where it broadens out; the 
third, which belonged to the Yagunstlan- 
lnagai, was on Yagun r.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 280, 281, 1905. 

Lanaungsuls (La'na 2 a' ns aIs, ‘town 
[that] hides itself’). A Haida town on 
Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. 
Col., belonging to the Aoyaku-lnagai.— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905. 

Lances. As an implement of the chase 
or of war the lance had a wide distribu¬ 
tion among the ancient and the modern 
tribes of the United States. Though none 
of the objects of chipped stone called 
lance-heads that have been found in num¬ 
bers on widely separated archeological 
sites are attached to shafts, there is reason 
to believe that many of the leaf-shaped 
blades were lance-heads. The only sur¬ 
vivals of the use of the an¬ 
cient lance are found among 
the Hupa of California and 
the western Eskimo, but 
earlier writers have men¬ 
tioned their existence among 
various tribes. Lances for 
the chase were used occa¬ 
sionally in war by the Eski¬ 
mo, but the Plains Indians, 
whenever possible, used two 
distinct varieties for war 
and for hunting, the hunting LANCE HE ad; var¬ 
iance blade being shorter ern Eskimo. 
and heavier. The lance ( MURD0CH ) 
appears to have originated through the 
need of striking animals from some dis¬ 
tance in order to escape personal danger 
and to produce surer results than were 
possible with a stone knife or other im¬ 
plement used at close quarters. The 
efficiency and range of the lance when 
thrown from the hand was increased by 
the throwing stick (q. v.), and the original 
lance or spear developed into a number 
of varieties under the influences of envi¬ 
ronment, the habits of animals, accultu¬ 
ration, etc. The greatest number of 
forms sprang up among the Eskimo, 
whose environment was characterized by 
a great variety and alternation of animal 
life, while in most other regions a simple 
lance was perpetuated. 

The Plains tribes, as a rule, living in a 
region conducive to warfare and aggression 
through its lack of physical boundaries, 
made more use of the lance in war than 
did coast, woodland, desert, or mountain 
tribes. Since the general occupancy of 
the plains appears to have been coincident 
with the introduction of the horse, the 





756 


LAND TENURE 


[B. a. e. 


use of the war lance has been associated 
with that animal, but it is evident that the 
tribes that occupied the plains were ac¬ 
quainted with the lance with a stone head 
as a hunting implement before they en¬ 
tered this vast region. A Kiowa lance in 
the National Museum is headed with a 
part of a sword blade and is reputed to 
have killed 16 persons. 

In accord with the tendency of objects 
designed for especially important usage to 
take on a religious significance, the lance 
has become an accessory of ceremonies 
among the Plains Indians. Elaborately 
decorated sheaths were made for lances, 
varying according to the society or office 
of the owner. At home the lance was 
leaned against the shield tripod, tied hor¬ 
izontally above the tipi door, or fastened 
lengthwise to an upright pole behind the 
tipi. In both earlier and recent times 
offerings of lance-heads were made to 
springs, exquisitely formed specimens 
having been taken from a sulphur spring 
at Afton, Okla. 

Consult Holmes (1) in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1897, (2) in Am. Anthrop., iv, 108- 
129, 1902; Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
988-990, 1896. See Arrowheads , Hunting , 
Spears, War and War discipline, (w. h. ) 

Land tenure. The Indian conceived of 
the earth as mother, and as mother she 
provided food for her children. The 
words in the various languages which 
refer to the land as “ mother ” were used 
only in a sacred or religious sense. In 
this primitive and religious sense land 
was not regarded as property; it was like 
the air, it was something necessary to the 
life of the race, and therefore not to be 
appropriated by any individual or group 
of individuals to the permanent exclusion 
of all others. Other words referring to the 
earth as “soil” to be used and cultivated 
by man, mark a change in the manner of 
living and the growth of the idea of a sec¬ 
ular relation to the earth. Instead of de¬ 
pending on the spontaneous products of 
the land the Indian began to sow seeds 
and to care for the plants. In order to 
do this he had to remain on the soil he 
cultivated. Thus occupancy gradually 
established a claim or right to possess the 
tract from which a tribe or an individual 
derived food. This occupancy was the 
only land tenure recognized by the Indian; 
he never of himself reached the concep¬ 
tion of land as merchantable, this view 
having been forced on his acceptance 
through his relations with the white race. 
Tecumseh claimed that the Northwest 
Territory, occupied by allied tribes, be¬ 
longed to the tribes in common, hence a 
sale of land to the whites by one tribe did 
not convey title unless confirmed by 
other tribes. Furthermore, among most 
of the Algonquian tribes, at least, accord¬ 


ing to Dr William Jones, if land were 
ceded to the whites, the cession could not 
be regarded as absolute, i. e., the whites 
could hold only to a certain depth in the 
earth such as was needful for sustenance. 
Each tribe had its village sites and con¬ 
tiguous hunting or fishing grounds; as 
long as the people lived on these sites 
and regularly went to their hunting 
grounds, they could claim them against 
all intruders. This claim often had to be 
maintained by battling with tribes less 
favorably situated. The struggle over the 
right to hunting grounds was the cause of 
most Indian wars. In some tribes garden 
spots were claimed by clans, each family 
working on its own particular patch. In 
other tribes the favorable localities were 
preempted by individuals regardless of 
clan relations. As long as a person plant¬ 
ed a certain tract the claim was not dis¬ 
puted, but if its cultivation were neg¬ 
lected anyone who chose might take it. 
Among the Zuni, according to Cushing, 
if a man, either before or after marriage, 
takes up a field of unappropriated land, it 
belongs strictly to him, but is spoken of 
as the property of his clan, or on his 
death it may be cultivated by any mem¬ 
ber of that clan, though preferably by 
near relatives, but not by his wife or chil¬ 
dren, who must be of another clan. More¬ 
over, a man cultivating land at one Zuni 
farming settlement of the tribe can not 
give even of his own fields to a tribesman 
belonging to another farming village un¬ 
less that person should be a member of 
his clan; nor can a man living at one vil¬ 
lage take up land at another without the 
consent of the body politic of the latter 
settlement; and no one, whatever his 
rank, can grant land to any member of 
another tribe without consent of the Corn 
and certain other clans. 

During the early settlement of the 
country absolute title was vested in the 
Crown by virtue of discovery or conquest, 
vet the English acknowledged the In¬ 
dian’s right of occupancy, as is shown by 
the purchase of these rights both by Lord 
Baltimore in 1635 and by William Penn 
in 1682, although colonizing under royal 
grants. The Puritans, however, coming 
without royal authority, were necessitated 
to bargain with the Indians. Absolute 
right to the Indian lands was fully stated 
in a proclamation by George III in 1763. 
In 1783 the Colonial Congress forbade 
private purchase or acceptance of lands 
from Indians. On the adoption of the 
Constitution the right of eminent domain 
became vested in the United States, and 
Congress alone had the pow T er to extin¬ 
guish the Indian’s right of occupancy. 
The ordinance of 1787, relative to all ter¬ 
ritory n. w. of the Ohio, made the consent 
of the Indians requisite to the cession of 


HULL. 30] 


LANGUAGES 


757 


their lands. Until the passage of the act 
of Mar. 3,1871, all cession was by treaty, 
the United States negotiating with the 
tribes as with foreign nations; since then 
agreements have been less formal, and a 
recent decision of the U. S. Supreme 
Court makes even the agreement or con¬ 
sent of the Indians unnecessary. The 
tribes living in Arizona, California, Ne¬ 
vada, New Mexico, and Utah came under 
the provisions of the treaty of Guadalupe 
Hidalgo, most of the Pueblos holding their 
lands under Spanish grants. All Indian 
reservations have been established either 
by treaty or by order of the President, but 
in both cases the Indian’s tenure is that of 
occupancy only. “They may not cut 
growing timber, open mines, quarry stone, 
etc., to obtain lumber, coal, building ma¬ 
terial, etc., solely for the purpose of sale or 
speculation. Inshort, whatatenantforlife 
may do upon the lands of a remainder-man 
the Indians may do upon their reserva¬ 
tions, but no more. ” In a few cases reser¬ 
vations have been patented to tribes, as 
those of the Five Civilized Tribes, and a 
limited number of tribes have had their 
lands apportioned and received patents 
for individual holdings, yet no general 
change in the Indian land tenure took 
place until the passage of the severalty act 
in 1887. This act provided for the allot¬ 
ment to each man, woman, and child of 
a certain portion of the tribal land and 
the issuance of a patent by which the 
United States holds the allotment in trust, 
free of taxation and encumbrance, for 25 
years, when the allottee is entitled to a 
patent in fee simple. On the approval 
of their allotments by the Secretary of the 
Interior the Indians become citizens of 
the United States and subject to its laws. 
Seventy-three tribes already hold their 
lands under this tenure. See Govern¬ 
mental policy, Legal status, Reservations, 
Treaties, Social organization. 

Consult Adair, Hist. Am. Indians, 282, 
1775; Bandelier in Archseol. Inst. Papers, 
in, 201, 272, 1890; Cushing in Millstone, 
ix, 55, 1884; Dawson, Queen Charlotte 
Islands, 117, 1878; Fletcher, Indian Edu¬ 
cation and Civilization, 1888; Grinnell in 
Am. Anthrop., ix, no. 1, 1907; Jenks in 
19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900; Powell in 7th 
Rep. B. A. E., 39-41, 1891; Royce, Indian 
Land Cessions, 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1889; 
Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., vin, no. 1, 
1906. (a.c. f.) 

Languages. The American languages 
show considerable variety in phonetics 
and structure. While some are vocalic 
and appear melodious to our ear, others 
contain many consonant sounds to which 
we are unaccustomed and which seem to 
give them a harsh character. Particularly 
frequent are sounds produced by contact 
between the base of the tongue and the 


soft palate, similar to the Scotch ch in 
loch, and a number of explosive Z’s, which 
are produced by pressing the tongue 
against the palate and suddenly expelling 
the air between the teeth. Harshness 
produced by clustering consonants is pe¬ 
culiar to the N. W. coast of America. 
Sonorous vocalic languages are found in 
a large part of the Mississippi basin and 
in California. Peculiar to many Ameri¬ 
can languages is a slurring of terminal 
syllables, which makes the recording of 
grammatical forms difficult. 

Contrary to the prevalent notion, the 
vocabularies are rich and their grammat¬ 
ical structure is systematic and intricate. 
Owing to the wealth of derivatives it is 
difficult to estimate the number of words 
in any American language; but it is cer¬ 
tain that in every one there are a couple 
of thousand of stem words and many 
thousand words, as that term is defined 
in English dictionaries. 

A considerable variety of grammatical 
structure exists, but there are a few com¬ 
mon traits that seem to be characteristic 
of most American languages. The com¬ 
plexity of grammar is often great because 
many ideas expressed by separate words 
in the languages of other continents are 
expressed by grammatical processes in the 
languages of the Indians. The classifica¬ 
tion of words differs somewhat from the 
familiar grouping in Indo-European lan¬ 
guages. The demarcation between noun 
and verb is often indistinct, many ex¬ 
pressions being both denominative and 
predicative. Often the intransitive verb 
and the noun are identical in form, while 
the transitive verb only is truly verbal in 
character. In other languages the tran¬ 
sitive verb is nominal, while the intran¬ 
sitive only is truly verbal. These phe¬ 
nomena are generally accompanied by 
the use of possessive pronouns with the 
nominal and of personal pronouns with 
the verbal class of words. In other cases 
the verbal forms are differentiated from 
the noun, but the close relationship be¬ 
tween the two classes is indicated by the 
similarity of the pronominal forms. The 
intransitive verb generally includes the 
ideas which Indo-European languages 
express by means of adjectives. Inde¬ 
pendent pronouns are often compounds, 
and the pronoun appears in most cases 
subordinated to the verb. 

In the singular are distinguished self 
(or speaker), person addressed, and per¬ 
son spoken of; in the plural, correspond¬ 
ing to our first person, are often distin¬ 
guished the combination of speaker and 
persons addressed, and speaker and per¬ 
sons spoken of, the so-called inclusive 
and exclusive forms. 

The demonstrative pronouns are analo¬ 
gous to the personal pronoun in that they 


758 


LANGUAGES 


[b. a. e. 


are generally developed in three forms, 
indicating respectively the thing near me, 
near thee, near him. Their development 
is sometimes even more exuberant, visi¬ 
bility and invisibility, present and past, 
or location to the right, left, front and 
back of, and above and below the speaker, 
being distinguished. 

The subordination of the pronoun to 
the verb is often carried to extremes. In 
many languages the pronominal subject, 
the object, and the indirect object are in¬ 
corporated in the verb, for which reason 
American languages have often been 
called “incorporatinglanguages.” There 
are, however, numerous languages in 
which this pronominal subordination 
does not occur. In some the process of 
incorporation does not cease with the 
pronoun; but the noun, particularly the 
nominal object, is treated in the same 
manner. Where such incorporation is 
found the development of nominal cases 
is slight, since the incorporation renders 
this unnecessary. 

The occurrence of other classes of words 
depends largely on the development of 
another feature of American languages, 
which is probably common to them all, 
namely, the expression of a great number 
of special ideas by means of either affixes 
or stem modification. On account of the 
exuberance of such elements American 
languages have been called “ polysyn¬ 
thetic. ’ ’ The character of the subordi¬ 
nated elements shows great variations. 
In some languages most of the ideas that 
are subordinated are instrumental (with 
the hand, the foot, or the like; with the 
point or the edge of something, etc.); in 
others they include all kinds of qualify¬ 
ing ideas, such as are generally expressed 
by auxiliary verbs, verbal compounds, 
and adverbs. The Eskimo, for instance, 
by composition of other elements with 
the stem “to see,” may express “he 
only orders him to go and see”; a Chim- 
mesyan composition with the verb to go 
is, “he went with him upward in the 
dark and came against an obstacle. ’ ’ The 
existence of numerous subordinate ele¬ 
ments of this kind has a strong effect in 
determining the series of stem words in 
a language. Whenever this method of 
composition is highly developed many 
special ideas are expressed by stems of 
very general significance, combined with 
qualifying elements. Their occurrence 
is also the cause of the obviousness of In¬ 
dian etymologies. These elements also 
occur sometimes independently, so that 
the process is rather one of coordinate 
composition than of subordination. The 
forms of words that enter composition of 
this kind sometimes undergo considerable 
phonetic modification by losing affixes or 
by other processes. In such cases com¬ 
position apparently is brought about by 


apocope, or decapitation of words; but 
most of these seem to be reducible to regu¬ 
lar processes. In many languages poly¬ 
synthesis is so highly developed that it 
almost entirely suppresses adverbs, prepo¬ 
sitions, and conjunctions. 

The categories of Indo-European lan¬ 
guages do not correspond strictly to those 
of Indian languages. This is true par¬ 
ticularly of the ideas of gender and plu¬ 
rality. Grammatical gender based on 
sex distinction is very rare in America. 
It is based on other qualities, as animate 
and inanimate, or noble and ignoble, and 
often relates only to shape, as round, 
long, or flat. Complete absence of such 
classification is frequent. Plurality is 
seldom clearly developed; it is often 
absent even in the pronoun; its place is 
taken by the ideas of collectivity and dis¬ 
tribution, which are expressed more often 
than plurality. Tense is also weakly de¬ 
veloped in many languages, although 
others have a complex system of tenses. 
Like other adverbial ideas tense is often 
expressed by affixes. Moods and voice of 
the verb are also sometimes undeveloped 
and are expressed by adverbial elements. 

In the use of grammatical processes 
there is great diversity. Suffixes occur 
almost everywhere; prefixes are not quite 
so frequent. Infixes seem to be confined 
to the Siouan languages, although infixa¬ 
tion by metathesis occurs in other lan¬ 
guages also. Reduplication is frequent, 
sometimes extending to triplication; but 
in some groups of languages it does not 
occur at all. Other forms of modification 
of stem also occur. 

Indian languages tend to express ideas 
with much graphic detail in regard to 
localization and form, although other 
determining elements which Indo-Euro¬ 
pean languages require may be absent. 
Those languages are, therefore, not so 
well adapted to generalized statements as 
to lively description. The power to form 
abstract ideas is nevertheless not lacking, 
and the development of abstract thought 
would find in every one of the languages 
a ready means of expression. Yet, since 
the Indian is not given to purely abstract 
speculation, his abstract terms always 
appear in close connection with concrete 
thought; for instance, qualities are often 
expressed by nominal terms, but are 
never used without possessive pronouns. 

According to the types of culture served 
by the languages we find holophrastic 
terms, expressing complex groups of ideas. 
These, however, are not due to a lack of 
power to classify, but are rather expres¬ 
sions of form of culture, single terms 
being intended for those ideas that are of 
prime importance to the people. 

The differentiation of stocks into dia¬ 
lects shows great variation, some stocks 
comprising only one dialect, while others 


BULL. 30] 


LANGUNTENNENK-LANSING MAN 


759 


embrace many that are mutually unin¬ 
telligible. While the Eskimo have re¬ 
tained their language in all its minor 
features for centuries, that of the Salish, 
who are confined to a small area in 
the n. Pacific region, is split up into 
innumerable dialects. The fate of each 
stock is probably due as much to the 
morphological traits of the language itself 
as to the effects of its contact with other 
languages. Wherever abundant redupli¬ 
cation, phonetic changes in the stem, and 
strong phonetic modifications in compo¬ 
sition occur, changes seem to be more 
rapid than where grammatical processes 
are based on simple laws of composition. 
Contact with other languages has had a 
far-reaching effect through assimilation 
of syntactic structure and, to a certain 
extent, of phonetic type. There is, how¬ 
ever, no historical proof of the change of 
any Indian language since the time of the 
discovery comparable with that of the 
language of England between the 10th 
and 13th centuries. 

A few peculiarities of language are worth 
mentioning. As various parts of the pop¬ 
ulation speaking modern English differ 
somewhat in their forms of expression, 
so similar variations are found in Ameri¬ 
can languages. One of the frequent types 
of difference is that between the language 
of men and that of women. This differ¬ 
ence may be one of pronunciation, as 
among some Eskimo tribes, or may con¬ 
sist in the use of different sets of impera¬ 
tive and declarative particles, as among 
the Sioux, or in other differences of vocab¬ 
ulary; or it may be more fundamental, 
due to the foreign origin of the women 
of the tribe. In incantations and in the 
formal speeches of priests and shamans a 
peculiar vocabulary is sometimes used, 
containing many archaic and symbolic 
terms. See Chinook jargon, Linguistic 
families, Sign language. (f. b. ) 

Languntennenk. A village of Moravian 
Delawares founded in 1770 on Beaver r., 
probably near the present Darlington, 
in Beaver co., Pa., by Indians who re¬ 
moved from Lawunkhannek. In 1773 
they abandoned the village and joined 
the other Moravians on the Muskingum, 
in Ohio. The missionaries called itFried- 
ensstadt, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Langundowi-Oteey. —Loskiel (1794) cited by Rupp, 
West. Pa., 47,1846. Languntennenk.— Crantz cited, 
ibid., 47. Languntoueniink.— Zeisberger (1791), 
Diary, II, 234, 1885. Languntoutenuenk. —Crantz, 
Hist, of the Brethren, 594,1780. 

Lansing Man. The name given to a par¬ 
tially dismembered human skeleton found 
in 1902 under 20 ft of undisturbed silt, 
70 ft from the face of the Missouri r. 
bluff, near Lansing, Kans. The remains 
lay partly under a large limestone slab 
imbedded in a mass of talus at the foot of 
a shale and limestone cliff, against which 
the silt was deposited. The position of 


the bones denoted an intentional burial, 
and not the accidental lodgment of a body 
at this point. In the walls of the exca¬ 
vations made in the formation there was 
no indication of slipping, sliding, caving, 
or prolonged surface wash from a higher 
level; no indication of direct wind or 
wave action, except a narrow thin layer 
of dark clay at one part; no distinct 
lamination, stratification, or assortment 
of material; no indication that vegetation 
had ever taken hold; in short, no evi¬ 
dence that the mass of silt was due to any 
other process than a slow, steady accumu¬ 
lation, mainly or 
wholly in quiet 
water. There 
were small 
patches of gravel 
at irregular in¬ 
tervals, many 
snail shells, an¬ 
gular fragments 
of limestone up 
to 3 or 4 in. thick, 
small scraps of 
shale, a few peb¬ 
bles of glacial 
drift origin, and 
a number of 
pieces of char¬ 
coal, some with LANSING SKULL > FR0NTAL VIEW 
fractures and angles not in the least worn. 
These facts point to an upbuilding partly 
by wash, partly by winds, partly by creep 
from the adjacent hills, and partly by 
sediment from the Missouri. It appears 
that this deposit could have accumulated 
within a comparatively short period. 
Even allowing the utmost limit of time 
that can be reasonably claimed, namely, 
that the river has cut its way from the 
top of the silt deposit to its present grade, 
the time necessary for accomplishing this 
will fall very far within the period that 
must have elapsed since the existing to- 



SECTION OF BLUFF SHOWING LOCATION OF SKELETON 
(a, entrance to Tunnel; b , position of Remains) 


pography was created, in part at least by 
streams that could not begin their work 
until after glacial floods had ceased to 
act. The bones themselves do not favor 
the theory of great antiquity for the 
remains. According to Hrdlicka (Am. 
Anthrop., v, 323, 1903) the skull and 
bones are not perceptibly fossilized, and 
are practically identical in their physical 
characters with the crania and bones of 
some of the historic Indians of the general 
region. The cranium has been placed 
for safe-keeping in the U. S. National 











760 


LAPAPU-LAS FLORES 


[b. A. E. 


Museum by its owner, Mr M. C. Long, of 
Kansas City, Mo. 

As the geologists who examined the site 
when the deep trenches cut by the Bureau 
of American Ethnology were open hold 
widely divergent opinions with respect to 
the age of the formation inclosing the re¬ 
mains, some of them considering it true 
loess, further investigation is necessary ere 
the question of antiquity can be finally 
settled. 

Of the geologists referred to, those fa¬ 
voring great antiquity are Upham (Am. 
Antiq., xxiv, 413, 1902, and Am. Geolo¬ 
gist, Sept. 1902, 135); Winchell (Am. Ge¬ 
ologist, Sept. 1902); Williston (Science, 
Aug. 1, 1902), and Erasmus Haworth, 
Professor of Geology, University of Kan¬ 
sas. Those favoring a comparatively re¬ 
cent date are Chamberlin (Jour, of Ge¬ 
ology, x, 745, 1903); Holmes (Smithson. 
Rep., 455, 1902); R. D. Salisbury, Pro¬ 
fessor of Geology, University of Chicago; 
Samuel Calvin, State Geologist of Iowa, 
and Gerard Fowke, w r ho conducted the 
excavations on the site for the Bureau 
of American Ethnology. See Antiquity , 
Archeology. (g. f. ) 

Lapapu. A former Miwok village on 
Tuolumne r., Tuolumne co., Cal. 

La-pap-poos.—Johnson in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
IV, 407, 1854. Lapappu.—Latham in Trans. Philol. 
Soc. Lond., 81, 1856. 

La Piche. A small rancheria, probably 
Luiseno, on Potrero res., 75 m. from Mis¬ 
sion Tule River agency, s. Cal. With La 
Joya the population was officially given 
as 225 in 1903. Cf. Apeche. 

La Posta (Span.; probably here mean¬ 
ing ‘ post station ’). A reservation of 
238.88 acres of unpatented desert land oc¬ 
cupied by 19 so-called Mission Indians, 
situated 170 m. from Mission Tule River 
agency, s. Cal. 

Lappawinze (‘getting provisions’). A 
Delaware chief—one of those who w ? ere 
induced to sign at Philadelphia the treaty 
of 1737, known as the “walking pur¬ 
chase,’’confirmingareputed treaty of 1686, 
which granted to the whites land extend¬ 
ing from Neshaminy cr. as far as a man 
could go in a day and a half. When the 
survey was made under this stipulation 
the governor of Pennsylvania had a road 
built inland and employed a trained run¬ 
ner, a proceeding that the Delawares de¬ 
nounced as a fraud. See Pa. Archives, 
1st ser., i, 541, 1852; Thomson, Enquiry 
into Alienation of Delaware and Shaw- 
anese Inds., 69, 1759. 

La Prairie. The first mission village of 
the Catholic Iroquois, established in 1668 
on the s. bank of the St Lawrence, at La 
Prairie, La Prairie co., Quebec. The first 
occupants were chiefly Oneida with other 
Iroquois, but it soon contained members 
of all the neighboring Iroquoian and Al- 
gonquian tribes. The Mohawk, from 


Caughnawaga, N. Y., finally gained the 
leading position and their language came 
into vogue in the settlement. In 1676 
the Indians removed to Portage r., a few 
miles distant, and built the present Caugh¬ 
nawaga, q. v. 

Laprairie.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 262,1855. La Prairie 
de la Madelaine.—Frontenac (1674) in N.Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 116,1855. Laprairie de la Madelaine.— 
Letter of 1756, ibid., X, 480, 1858. La Prairie de 
la Magdelaine.—La Barre (1683), ibid., IX, 202,1855. 
Saint-Franfois-Xavier-des-Pres.—Jes. Rel., Ill, in¬ 
dex, 1858. St. Francis Xavier des Pres.—Shea, 
Cath. Miss., 268,1855 (mission name). St. Francois 
Xavier a Laprairie de la Magdeleine.—Jes. Rel. 
(1675) quoted by Shea, Cath. Miss., 304,1855. S. 
Xavier des Praiz.—Jes. Rel. 1671, 12, 1858. S. 
Xavier des Prez.—Ibid., 1672, 16, 1858. 

Laptambif. Probably a band of the 
Calapooya proper. In 1877 the name was 
borne by “ Old Ben,” at Grande Ronde 
res., Oreg., who came from Mohawk r., 
Lane co. 



LAPPAWINZE. (mcKENNEY AND Hall) 


Laptambif.—Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 368, 
1877. Long-tongue-buff.—Ross, Adventures, 236, 
1849. 

La Punta (Span.: ‘the point’). A for¬ 
mer Diegueno rancheria near San Diego, 
s. Cal.—Ortega (1775) quoted by Bancroft, 
Hist. Cal., i, 253, 1884. 

Lapwai. A Nez Perce band formerly 
living near the mouth of Lapwai cr., Ida¬ 
ho, now under the Lapwai school super¬ 
intendent. 

Las Flores (Span.: ‘the flowers’). A 
former Luiseno village in n. San Diego co., 
Cal. (Hayes, 1850, quoted by Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, i, 460, 1882). Arguello (H. 
R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 117, 
1857) mentions a Las Flores as a Diegueno 
pueblo in San Diego co., established after 
the secularization act of 1834, which may 
be the same. 








BULL. 30] 


LAS MULAS-LEDYANOPROLIVSKOE 


761 


Las Mulas (Span.: ‘the mules’). A 
rancheria near the presidio of La Bahia 
and the mission of Espfritu Santo de Zu¬ 
niga on the lower Rio San Antonio, Tex., 
in 1785, at which date it had only 5 in¬ 
habitants (Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 
659, 1886), w’ho were probably of Kar- 
ankawan affinity. 

Lassik ( Las'-sik , the name of their last 
chief). A people of the Athapascan 
family formerly occupying a portion of 
main Eel r., Cal., and its e. tributaries, 
Van Duzen, Larrabee, and Dobbin crs., 
together with the headwaters of Mad r. 
They had for neighbors toward the n. the 
Athapascan inhabitants of the valley of 
Mad r. and Redwood cr.; toward the e. 
the Wintun of Southfork of Trinity r.; 
toward the s. the Wailaki, from whom 
they were separated by Kekawaka cr.; 
toward the w. the Sinkine on Southfork 
of Eel r. They occupied their regular 
village sites along the streams only in 
winter. Their houses were conical in 
form, made of the bark of Douglas spruce. 
They had neither sweat lodges nor dance 
houses. The basketry was twined, but 
differed considerably from that of the 
Hupa in its decoration. Beside the meth¬ 
ods employed elsewhere for securing deer 
and elk, the Lassik used to follow a fresh 
track until the animal, unable to feed or 
rest, was overtaken. They intermarried 
with the Wintun, to whom they were 
assimilated in mourning customs, etc. 
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 121, 
1877) gives the impression that the Lassik 
belong with the Wintun in language, but 
this is a mistake. Their dialect resem¬ 
bles the Hupa in its morphology and the 
Wailaki in its phonology. The majority 
of them perished during the first few 

ears of the occupancy of their country 

y white people, a bounty being placed 
on their heads and the traffic in children 
for slaves being profitable and unre¬ 
strained. A few families of them are still 
living in the neighborhood of their former 
homes. (p. e. g.) 

Latcha Hoa. Noted on the West Florida 
map ( ca . 1775) as a Chickasaw settlement 
on Latcha Hoa run, an affluent of Ahoola 
Ihalchubba, a w. tributary of Tombigbee 
r., n. e. Miss. 

Late-Comedu. An unidentified Dakota 
division, mentioned by Gale, Upper Miss., 
252,1867. 

Lathakrezla. A Nataotin village on the 
n. side of Babine lake, Brit. Col. 
Lathakrazla. —Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 
1892,109,1893. Na-tal-kuz.— Dawson in Geol. Surv. 
Can., 26 b, 1881. Ni-to-atz.— Ibid., 27 b. 

Laulewasikaw. See Tenskwatawa. 

Law. See Government. 

Lawilvan. A Kawia village in Cahuilla 
valley, s. Cal.; perhaps identical with 
Alamo Bonito, q. v. 

Alamo. —Barrows, Ethno.-Bot. Coahuilla Ind., 34, 
1900. La-wil-van. —Ibid. Si-vel. —Ibid. 


^ Lawokla. A Choctaw clan of the 
Kushapokla phratry.—Morgan, Anc. 
Soc., 162,1877. 

Lawunkhannek. A village of Moravian 
Delawares established in 1769 on Alle¬ 
gheny r., above Franklin, Venango co., 
Pa. In 1770 the inhabitants removed 
to Languntennenk. It seems probable 
that the village contained also some 
Seneca. (j. m.) 

Lauanakanuck.—Day, Penn., 172,1843. Lawanaka- 
nuck.—Loskiel (1794) quoted by Day, Penn., 644, 
1843. Lawenakanuck.—Ibid., 102-3. Lawunah- 
hannek.—Loskiel (1794) quoted by Rupp West. 
Pa., app., 353, 1846. Lawunakhannek.—Crantz, 
Hist, of the Brethren, 594,1780. Lawunkhannek.— 
Loskiel (1794) quoted by Rupp, op. cit., 46. 

Laycayamn. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24,1863. 

League. See Confederation , Government. 

Lean Bear. An unidentified Dakota 
band formerly living below L. Traverse, 
Minn. (Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 102, 1860); 
apparently named after the chief. 

Leatheriips (native name Sha'teiaro nl/ - 
hia’, ‘Two clouds of equal size.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A Huron (Wyandot) chief of the 
Sandusky tribe of Ohio who, in Aug., 
1795, signed the treaty of Greenville in 
behalf of his people. His honorable 
character and friendship for the whites 
inflamed the jealousy of Tecumseh, who 
ruthlessly ordered him to be killed on 
the plea that he was a wizard, Tecumseh’s 
fanaticism being so overmastering that he 
assigned the execution of Shateiaronhia 
to another Huron chief named Round- 
head. He was apprised of his condemna¬ 
tion by his brother, who was sent to him 
with a piece of bark on which a toma¬ 
hawk was drawn as a token of his death. 
The execution took place near his camp 
on the Scioto, about 14 m. n. of Colum¬ 
bus, in the summer of 1810, there being 
present a number of white men, includ¬ 
ing a justice of the peace, who made an 
effort to save the life of the accused, but 
without success. He was tomahawked 
by a fellow tribesman while kneeling 
beside his grave, after having chanted 
a death song. The Wyandot Club of 
Columbus, Ohio, in 1888, erected a 
granite monument to Shateiaronhia in 
a park surrounded by a stone wall, 
including the spot where he died. See 
Curry in Ohio Archaeol. and Hist. 
Quar., xii, no. 1, 1906; Drake, Life of 
Tecumseh, 1852; Heckewelder, Hist. Ind. 
Nat., 1876; Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, i, 611, 
1898. 

Leatherwood (Leatherwood’s Town). 
A former Cherokee settlement at or near 
the present Leatherwood village in the 
n. part of Franklin co., n. e. Ga. The 
name was probably that of a prominent 
chief or mixed-blood. (j. m. ) 

Ledyanoprolivskoe. Perhaps a town of 
the Tlingit, locality not given, number¬ 
ing 200 in 1835. 


762 


LEEKWINAI-LEGAL STATUS 


[b. a. e. 


Laydanoprodevskie.—Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 
227, 1875 (transliterated from Veniaminoff). Led- 
yanoprolivskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, pt. in, 
29, 1840. 

Leekwinai ( Lee-kwin-ci-V , 1 snapping tur¬ 
tle’). A subclan of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Leelahs. Supposed to be a division of 
the Kalapooian family; not identified.— 
Slocum in H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d 
sess., 42,1839. 

Leeshtelosh {Leesli-te-losh). Probably a 
Kalapooian band, said to have lived near 
the headwaters of Willamette r., Oreg.— 
Hunter, Captivity, 73,1823. 

Legal status. The act of July 22,1790, 
contains the earliest provision relating to 
intercourse with Indians. By it any 
offense against the person or property of 
a peaceable and friendly Indian was made 
punishable in the same manner as if the 
act were committed against a white in¬ 
habitant (U. S. Stat., i, 138). The act of 
May 19, 1796, empowered the President 
to arrest within the limits of any state or 
district an Indian guilty of theft, outrage, 
or murder (ibid., 472). During the next 
20 years the idea that the Indian tribes 
were distinct nations, having their own 
form of government and power to con¬ 
duct their social polity, took form and 
was distinctly stated in treaties. The 
Indians’ right to punish intruding white 
settlers was stipulated in treaties made 
with the Cherokee, Chickasaw, Chip¬ 
pewa, Choctaw, Creeks, Delawares, 
Ottawa, Potawatomi, Shawnee, Hurons, 
and other tribes. The act of Mar. 3, 
1817, provided that the power given to 
the President under the act of May 19, 
1796, “should not be so construed as to 
affect any treaty in force between the 
United States and any Indian nation or 
to extend to any offense committed by 
one Indian against another within any 
Indian boundary.” The courts decided 
that for the United States to assume “to 
exercise a general j urisdiction over Indian 
countries within a state is unconstitu¬ 
tional and of no effect.” The crime of 
murder charged against a white man for 
killing another white man in the Cherokee 
country, within the state of Tennessee, 
it was decided, could not be punished in 
the courts of the United States (U. S. 
v. Bailey, McLean’s C. Cls. Rep., i, 234). 
In the case of the Cherokee Nation v. 
the State of Georgia (5 Peters, 1) the 
court states: “It may well be doubted 
whether those tribes which reside within 
the acknowledged boundaries of the 
United States can with strict accuracy 
be denominated foreign nations. They 
may more correctly, perhaps, be denomi¬ 
nated domestic dependent nations. They 
occupy a territory to which we assert title 
independent of their will, which must 
take effect in point of possession when 


their right of possession ceases; mean¬ 
while they are in a state of pupilage. 
Their relation to the United States re¬ 
sembles that of a ward to his guardian.” 
This confused relation—neither depend¬ 
ence nor independence—led to many dif¬ 
ficulties. From time to time appeals were 
made by the Indian Commissioner for the 
extension of the laws of the land over In¬ 
dian reservations. On Mar. 3, 1885, an 
act was passed extending the law over 
Indians to a limited extent (U. S. Stat. 
L. f xxm, 385): “The right of the In¬ 
dians to the reservation ordinarily oc¬ 
cupied by them is that of occupancy 
alone. They have the right to apply to 
their own use and benefit the entire prod¬ 
ucts of the reservation, whether the re¬ 
sult of their own labor or of natural 
growth, so they do not commit waste. If 
the lands in a state of nature are not in a 
condition for profitable use they may be 
made so; if desired for the purpose of 
agriculture, they may be cleared of their 
timber to such an extent as may be rea¬ 
sonable under the circumstances, and the 
surplus timber taken off by the Indians 
may be sold by them. The 
Indians may also cut dead and fallen tim¬ 
ber and sell the surplus not needed for 
their own use; they may cut growing 
timber for fuel and for use upon the res¬ 
ervation ; they may open mines and quarry 
stone for the purpose of obtaining fuel 
and building material; they may cut hay 
for the use of the live stock, and may sell 
any surplus . . . They may not, 

however, cut growing timber, open mines, 
quarry stone, etc., to obtain lumber, coal, 
building material, etc., solely for the pur¬ 
pose of sale or speculation. In short, 
what a tenant for life may do upon lands 
of a remainder-man the Indians may do on 
their reservations (Instructions, sec. 262, 
1880; U. S. v. Cook, 19 Wallace, 591; 
acts of Mar. 22 and 31, 1882; Rep. Sec. 
Interior, May 19, 1882, 9636; Reg. Ind. 
Dept., sec. 525, 526, 527). 

By their treaty of July 31, 1855, the 
Chippewa of Michigan were permitted to 
receive the title to lands taken up under 
the act of Aug. 4,1854 (U. S. Stat., x, 574) 
without “actual occupancy or residence,” 
in order to dispose of them (ibid., xi, 627). 
An act promulgated in Mar., 1875, per¬ 
mitted Indians to homestead land (ibid., 
xvm, 240). Those Indians who had 
availed themselves of this act were by the 
act of July 4, 1884, to receive from the 
Government a trust patent, to the effect 
that the United States would hold the 
land for 25 years, and at the expiration 
of that period convey it in fee to the In¬ 
dian who had made entry or to his heirs 
“freeof all charge or incumbranee what¬ 
ever” (ibid., xxm, 961). “Indians can 
not preempt public lands and can not re- 


BULL. 30] 


LEGENDS-LELIKIAN 


763 


move disability by declaring their inten¬ 
tion to become citizens . . . Citizen¬ 

ship is not requisite for the ordinary pur¬ 
chase of public lands.It may be 

done by a foreign alien and a fortiori by 
a mere denizen or domestic alien, such as 
the Indians” (Opinions Atty. Gen., vn, 
753). 

The severalty act of Feb. 8, 1887, made 
the allotted Indian subject to all the laws, 
civil and criminal, of the state in which 
he resides, and also conferred upon him 
citizenship. The courts have decided that 
those who come under the provision of 
this act are no longer wards or subject to 
the restrictive control of the Commis¬ 
sioner of Indian Affairs or his agents. 

Members of the following tribes can 
become citizens by treaty stipulation: 
Delaware, Kaskaskia, Kickapoo, Miami, 
Munsee, Ottawa, Peoria, Piankashaw, 
Sioux, Stockbridge, Wea, Winnebago liv¬ 
ing in Minnesota, and the Pueblo Indians 
and other sedentary tribes that come under 
the treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo and the 
Gadsden Purchase. The status of mixed 
bloods, the court has decided, is deter¬ 
mined by that of the father (Ex parte 
Reynold: 5 Dillon, 394). 

The courts of Kansas and Washington 
have held that “an Indian sustaining 
tribal relations is as capable of entering 
into binding contracts as any other alien, ’ ’ 
except that said contract shall not touch 
his lands, annuities, or statute benefits. 
“ The right to contract necessarily draws 
after it the liability to be sued; therefore 
upon contracts of the aforesaid character 
Indians can sue and be sued ” (Washing¬ 
ton Rep., i, 325). The state court has 
jurisdiction of the person and property 
of Indians, except while such Indians or 
property are actually situated on a reserve 
excluded from the jurisdiction of the state 
(Kansas Rep., xn, 28). S ee> Agency system, 
Civilization, Education, Governmental pol¬ 
icy, Land tenure, Office of Indian Affairs, 
Reservations, Treaties. , (a. c. f.) 

Legends. See Mythology. 

Leggings. See Clothing. 

Le Have (named from Cap de la Heve, 
France). A Micmac village in 1760 
near the mouth of Mersey r., about Lu¬ 
nenburg, in Lunenburg co., Nova Scotia. 
Chachippe.— Jes. Rel. (1610-13), I, 163, 1896. La 
Have.—Frye (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., X, 115-116,1809. La Heve.—Doc. of 1746 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 70,1858. Le Have.—Present 
name of adjacent island. Port de la Heve.—Les- 
carbot (1609) quoted by Thwaites, Jes. Rel., i, 
153, note, 1896. 

Lehigh. A variety of coal. From Le¬ 
high, the name of a tributary of the Del¬ 
aware and a county in Pennsylvania, 
which represents lechau in the Lenape 
(Delaware) dialect, signifying ‘fork of 
a river.’ (a. f. c. ) 

Lehu. The Seed-grass clan of the Ala 
(Horn) phratry of the Hopi. 


Le'-hii wiin-wii.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,401 
1894 (wun-wii= i clan’). 

Leimin. A Yuit Eskimo village on the 
Siberian coast between East cape and St 
Lawrence bay.—Krause in Deutsche 
Geog. Blatt., v, 80, map, 1882. 

Leitli (‘the junction’). The village of 
the Tanotenne situated at the confluence 
of Stuart and Fraser rs., Brit. Col. 

Fort George.—Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s, 25,1893. 
leitli.—Ibid, qeit’ii.—Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can. 1892, 109, 1893. 

Lejagadatcah. An unidentified band 
of the Miniconjou Teton Sioux. 
Leja-ga-dat-cah.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 142,1851. 

Lekwiltok. A large Kwakiutl tribe liv¬ 
ing between Knight and Bute inlets, Brit. 
Col. They were divided into five septs: 
Wiwekae, Hahamatses or Walitsum, 
Kueha, Tlaaluis, and Komenok. The 
last is now extinct. The towns are Hu- 
sam, Tsakwalooin, Tsaiiyeuk, and Tatapo- 
wis. Total pop. 218 in 1904. 

Acolta.— Poole, Queen Charlotte Ids., 289, 1872. 
Enclataws.— Can. Ind. Aff., 142,1879. Euclataw.— 
Ibid., 92,1876. Euclitus.— Downie in Mayne, Brit. 
Col., 448, 1861. Laek-que-libla. — Kane, Wand, 
in N. A., app., 1859. Laich-kwil-tacks. — Can. 
Ind. Aff., 142, 1879. Leequeeltoch. — Scouler in 
Jour.Ethnol.Soc. Lond., 1,233,1848. Lekwiida^.— 
Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., v, pt. 2,318, 
1902. Le'kwiltok - . —Boas in 6thRep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 55,1890 (Salish name). Le'kwiltoq. —Boas 
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. Lienkwil- 
tak.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. 2,166. Liew-kwil- 
tah. —Can. Ind. Aff. 1895,362, 1896. Li-kwil-tah.— 
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118 b, 1884. 
Likwiltoh. —Ibid. Neaquiltough.— Brit. Col. map, 
1872. Ne-cul-ta. —Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. 
Saich-kioie-tachs. — Can. Ind. Aff. 1883, 190, 1884. 
Saich-kwil-tach. —Sproat, ibid., 145,1879. Tah-cul- 
tus. —Lord, Natur. in Brit Col., 1,155.1866. Toung- 
letats. —Smet, Oregon Miss., 56, 1847. Ucaltas. — 
Anderson quoted by Gibbs in Hist. Mag., 74, 1863. 
Uchulta.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 19, 1862. 
U-cle-ta.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 74, 1862. TJcle-tah.— 
Ibid.,243. TTcletes. —KeaneinStanford,Compend., 
541, 1878. Uctetahs.— St John, Sea of Mts., ii, 16, 
1877. Uculta.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 
for 1887, sec. it, 74. Ucultas.— Lennard and Bar¬ 
rett, Brit. Col., 36, 1862. Yookilta.—Tolmie and 
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118 b, 1884. Yukletas — 
Grant in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 293, 1857. Yu'- 
kwilta.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,131,1887. 

Lelaka ( Le'lacha ). An ancestor of a 
Nakomgilisala gens who also gave his 
name to the gens.—Boas in Petermanns 
Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. 

Lelek (LeIe'Jc). ASongish band resid¬ 
ing at Codboro bay, s. end of Vancouver 
id.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
17, 1890. 

Lelengtu. The Flute clan of the Lengya 
(Flute) phratry of the Hopi. 

Lelentu winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
583, 1901 clan’). Lenbaki.—Stephen in 

8th Rep. B. A. E., 18, 1891. 

Lelewagyila ( Le'lEwagila ‘the heaven 
makers’: mythical name of the raven). 
A gens of the Tsawatenok, a Kwakiutl 
tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 
1897. 

Lelewayou ( Le-le-wa / -you, ‘birds’ cry’). 
A subclan of the Delawares (q. v.).—Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Lelikian. A former Nishinam village in 
the valley of Bear r., n. Cal. 



764 


LELIOTU—LES NOIKE INDIANS 


[b. a. E. 


Laylekeean.—Powers in Overland Mo., xn, 22,1874. 
Le'-li-ki-an.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 
316, 1877. 

Leliotu. The Tiny Ant ( sp. incog.) clan 
of the Ala (Horn) phratry of the Hopi. 
Le-li-o-tu wun-wii.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 
401 1894 (wit«-wu=‘ clan ’). 

Lema. One of the more important of 
the old villages of the Porno; situated in 
Knight’s valley, about 4 m. n. w. of Hop- 
land, Mendocino co., Cal. (s. a. b.) 
La-ma.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 172, 
1777. Lema.—S. A. Barrett, inf’n, 1906. 

Lemaltcha (Le-mal-tcha). A former 
Lummi village on Waldron id., Wash. 
(Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 39, 1863). 
The name is the same as Lilmalche, q. v. 

Lemitas. Mentioned by Villa-Senor 
(Theatro Am., pt. 2, 412, 1748) as a wild 
tribe hostile to the people of New Mexico. 
Possibly the local name of an Apache 
band or of its chief. 

Lenahuon. One of the tribes formerly 
occupying “the country from Buena 
Vista and Carises lakes and Kern r. to the 
Sierra Nevada and Coast range,” Cal. 
(Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853). By treaty 
of June 10, i851, these tribes reserved a 
tract between Tejon pass and Kern r., 
and ceded the remainder of their lands 
to the United States. Kroeber suggests 
that the name is perhaps intended for 
Sanahuon, Spanish orthography of San- 
akhwin, a Yokuts and perhaps other 
Indian corruption of San Joaquin or a 
similar Spanish geographical term. 
Lenahuon.—Barbour, op. cit. Senahuow.—Royce 
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. 

Lenape stone. A perforated tablet of 
shale, of the form usually classed as gor¬ 
gets, found by Bernard Hansel 1 while 
plowing on his father’s farm half a mile 
e. of Doylestown, Bucks co., Pa. A large 
fragment of the stone was found on the 
surface of the ground in the spring of 
1872; and a second, the smaller piece, 
was picked up in 1881. The length is 
nearly 4£ in., and the width varies from 
1£ to If in The surface on both sides 
has been smoothed, and on one side are 
carved in outline the figure of an ele¬ 
phant or mammoth, two rude human 
forms, the sun, and a number of uniden¬ 
tified objects. On the other are outline 
figures of a turtle, fishes, a bird, a pipe, 
etc. There are two round perforations in 
the tablet, about a third of its length from 
the ends. The specimen may possibly 
be genuine Indian workmanship, but the 
carving is apparently modern and exe¬ 
cuted after the stone had been broken. 
For further notice consult Mercer, The 
Lenape Stone, or the Indian and the 
Mammoth, 1885. See Gorgets , Perjorated 
Tablets. (c. t. ) 

Lengya. The Flute phratry of the Hopi, 
consisting of the Flute (Lelengtu), Blue- 
flute (Shakwalengya), Drab-flute (Masi- 


lengya), and Mountain-sheep (Pangwa) 
clans, and probably others. They claim 
to have come from a region in s. Arizona 
called Palatkwabi and from Little Col¬ 
orado r., and after their arrival in Tusa- 
yan joined the Ala (Horn) phratry, form¬ 
ing the Ala-Lengya group.—Fewkes in 
19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 587, 190L 

Lenya.—Fewkes, ibid. 

Lengyanobi (‘high place of the Flute 
clans’). The legendary home of the 
Lengya (Flute) clans of the Hopi, now a 
large ruin on a mesa about 30 m. n. e. of 
Walpi, n. e. Ariz. The village is said to 
have been abandoned just before the ar¬ 
rival of the Spaniards (1540), its inhabit¬ 
ants becoming amalgamated with the 
Hopi. The people of Lengyanobi at that 
time belonged to two consolidated phra- 
tries, the Ala (Horn) and the Lengya 
(Flute), of which the latter built the vil¬ 
lage. (j. w. F.) 

Lentes. Said to have been a former 
pueblo of the Tigua, but more likely a 
village established for the benefit of Geni- 
zaros (q. v.), on the w. bank of the Rio 
Grande near Los Lunas, N. Mex. By 
1850 the natives had become completely 
“Mexicanized.” 

Lentes. — Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 143, 1850. 
Lentis.—Calhoun in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 
633, 1853. Leunis.—Schoolcraft, ibid., I, 519, 1851. 
Leutis.—Ibid. Los Lentes.—Lane (1854), ibid., v, 
689, 1855. 

Lesamaiti. A former village of the 
Awani about one-fifth of a mile from 
Notomidula, in Yosemite valley, Mari- 

E osa co., Cal. 

aysamite.—Powers in Overland Mo., x,333,1874. 
Le-sam'-ai-ti.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
365,1877. 

Leschi. A Nisqualli chief, prominent 
in the war which involved all the tribes 
of Washington and adjacent regions in 
1855-58, and commonly known as the 
Yakima war. While Kamaiakan (q. v.) 
headed the Yakima and their confeder¬ 
ates e. of the mountains, Leschi took 
command w. of the Cascades, particular¬ 
ly about Puget sd. His most notable 
exploit was an attack on the new town 
of Seattle, Jan. 29, 1856, at the head of 
about 1,000 warriors of several tribes. 
The assailants were driven off by means 
of a naval battery upon a vessel in the 
harbor. On the collapse of the outbreak 
Leschi fled to the Yakima, who, having 
already submitted, refused him shelter 
except as a slave. A reward was offered 
for his capture, and being thus outlawed, 
he was at last treacherously seized by 
two of his own men in Nov., 1856, anil 
delivered to the civil authorities, by 
whom, after a long legal contest, he was 
condemned and hanged, Feb. 19, 1857. 
See Bancroft, Hist. Wash., 1890. (j. m.) 

Lea Noire Indians. Mentioned by Say 
(Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., n, lxxxiv, 
1823) as a people known to the Hidatsa, 


BULL. 30] 


LETAIYO-LILLOOET 


765 


who applied to them the name At-te- 
shu-pe-sha-loh-pan-ga, which Matthews 
states is probably an attempt to give the 
Hidatsa word for Black-lodge people. 

Letaiyo. The Gray-fox clan of the 
Kokop (Firewood) phratry of the Hopi. 

Letaiyo winwu.—Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
584, 1900 {wifiwu = ‘clan’). Le-tai-yo wiin-wu.— 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vir, 403,1894. 

Leash ( Le'-ush ). A former Modoc set¬ 
tlement on the n. side of Tule (Rhett) 
lake, s. w. Oreg.—Gatschet in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., n, pt. i, xxxii, 1890. 

Lewistown. A village of Shawnee and 
Seneca, taking its name from the Shaw¬ 
nee chief Captain Lewis, formerly near the 
site of the present Lewistown, Logan co., 
Ohio, on lands granted to them by treaty 
of Sept. 29,1817, but sold under the pro¬ 
visions of the Lewistown treaty of J uly 
20,1831. See Howe, Hist. Coll. Oh o, ii, 
102, 1896; Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
686, 732, 1899. (j. m.) 

Leyva. Located on various early maps 
apparently as a settlement of New Mex¬ 
ico, but in reality designed to indicate a 
point supposed to have been reached by 
Francisco Leyva Bonilla on an unauthor¬ 
ized expedition, about 1594-96, to the 
Quivira region, by whose inhabitants he 
and his party were killed. See Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 108, 1889; D’Anville, 
map Am. Sept., 1746; Squier in Am. Re¬ 
view, ii, 520, 1848. 

Leyza.—Giissefeld, Charte America, 1797 (mis¬ 
print). 

Lgalaiguhl-lanas (Vgala'-igul la'nas). 
A former subdivision * of the Gitins of 
Skidegate, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., 
a family of the Eagle clan of the Haida. 
It has long been extinct. The name may 
mean ‘people of the town of Lgalai.’— 
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274, 1905. 

Liam. A former Chumashan village in 
Ventura co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
July 24, 1863. 

Liaywas. An unidentified tribe which 
participated in the Yakima treaty of 
1855, and was placed on Yakima res., 
Wash. It may have been a division of 
the Yakima. (l. f. ) 

Li-ay-was.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), II, 524,1903. 
Siaywas.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 110, 1874. 

Libantone. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Lichtenau (Ger.: ‘pastures of light’). 
A village of Moravian Delawares on the 
e. side of the Muskingum, 3 m. below 
Coshocton, Coshocton co., Ohio, estab¬ 
lished in 1776. Some time afterward it 
was abandoned by the Moravians on ac¬ 
count of the hostilities of the Hurons and 
other warlike tribes, and reoccupied, un¬ 
der the name of Indaochaie, by hostile 
Indians, until destroyed by the Americans 
in 1781. See Missions. (j. m.) 


Indaochaie .—Butterfield, W ashington-Ir vine Corr., 
52,1882. Lichtenau.— Loskiel, Hist. Miss. United 
Breth., pt. 3,110,1794; Heckewelder in Trans. Am. 
Philos. Soc., n. s., iv. 390,1834. 

Lichtenfels (Ger.: ‘rocks of light’). 
A Moravian mission station in w. Green¬ 
land.—Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, map, 
1767. 

Lick Town. A Shawnee (?) village, in 
1776-82, on upper Scioto r., Ohio, proba¬ 
bly near Circleville. The true name was 
probably Piqua or Chillicothe. (j. m.) 
Lick Town.— Hutchins, map in Smith, Bouquet’s 
Exped.,1766. Salt Lick Town. —Smith, ibid., 67 
(not Salt Lick Town on Mahoning cr.). 

Lidlipa. A former Nishinam village in 
the valley of Bear r., n. Cal. 

Lidlepa.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22, 1874. 
Lid'-li-pa.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 316, 
1877. 

Liebigstag. An Ahtena village on the 
left bank of Copper r., Alaska, lat. 61° 
57', Ion. 145° 45 / ; named from its chief. 

Liebigstag’s village.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 120, 
1887. 

Liesnoi (Russian: ‘woody’). A Kani- 
agmiut village on Wood id., near Kodiak, 
Alaska.; pop. 157 in 1880, 120 in 1890. 

Lesnoi. — Eleventh Census, Alaska, 75, 1893. 
Lesnova. —Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 
1884. Tanignagmjut. —Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 
map, 1855. 

Liggige. A village connected with Con¬ 
cho, or Loreto, 2 leagues n. of that mission, 
which was situated opposite the island of 
Carmen, lat. 26°, Lower California (Picolo 
in Stocklein, Neue Welt-Bott, no. 72, 
35, 1726). Not to be confounded with 
Liguf, about 14 leagues farther s. 

Lightning stick. See Bull-roarer. 

Lignite. See Jet. 

Likatuit. A division of the Olamentke, 
occupying a part of Marin co., Cal. Their 
last great chief was Marin (q. v.), accord¬ 
ing to Powers, and they were among the 
Indians under San Rafael mission. 
Lecatuit.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 453, 1874. Li- 
kat'-u-it.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 195, 
1877. 

Lilibeque. A Chumashan village on one 
of the Santa Barbara ids., Cal., probably 
Santa Rosa, in 1542. 

Lilibique.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542), in Smith, Colec. 
Doc. Fla., 186, 1857. Lillibique.— Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 17,1863. 

Lillooet (‘wild onion’). One of the 4 
principal Salish tribes in the interior of 
British Columbia, situated on Fraser r. 
around the mouths of Cayoosh cr. and 
Bridge r., on Seton and Anderson lakes, 
and southward from them to Harrison 
lake. Pop. 978 in 1904. Bands: Anderson 
Lake, Bridge River, Cayoosh Creek (2), 
Douglas, Enias, Fountain, Kanlax, Lil¬ 
looet (2), Mission, Niciat, Pemberton 
Meadows, and Schloss. It is sometimes 
divided into the Lower Lillooet, including 
the Douglas and Pemberton Meadows 
bands, and the Upper Lillooet, including 
all the rest. Consult Teit, Lillooet In¬ 
dians, in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., iii, 
pt. 5, 1906, (j. R. s.) 


766 


LILLOOET-LINGUISTIC FAMILIES 


[b. a. e. 


Chin Nation.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 173,1855. 
Lillooet.—Can, Ind. Aff. Rep. 1889, 115, 1890. 
Lilowat.—Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1,268,1877. 
Loquilt Indians.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 299, 1862. 
Sclavthamuk.—Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 



s 


> 


LILLOOET MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 

1872. Sta'-tlum-ooh.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can., sec. II, 5,1891. Stetlum.—Survey map, Hydr. 
Office, U. S. N.,1882. Stlat-limuh.—Mackay quoted 
by Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. 



LILLOOET WOMAN. (am. MuS. NAT. HiST.) 


ii, 5. Stla'tliumH.—Boas in 5th_Rep. N. \V. Tribes 
Can., 10, 1889 (own name). Stla'tliumQ.—Boas in 
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 80, 1890. Stla'tlumQ.— 
Boas as quoted by Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can. for 1891, sec. n, 5. 


Lillooet. A band and town of Upper 
Lillooet on Fraser r., where it is joined 
by Cavoosh cr. The Canadian Reports 
on Indian Affairs give two divisions of the 
Lillooet band, of which one numbered 57 
and the other 6 in 1904. 

Lillooet.—Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., pt. II, 72, 1902. 
SEtL. —Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., II, 172, 
1900 (native name of the village of Lillooet). 

Lilmalche ( Lemaftlca ). One of the two 
Cowichan tribes on Thetis id., off the s. e. 
coast of Vancouver id.; pop. 19 in 1904. 
Given as a band of the Penelakut (q. v.) 
by the Canadian Indian Office. 

Lema'Mca — Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. Lilmalche.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. II, 164. Ll-mache.—Ibid., 
1897,362,1898. Ll-mal-che.—Ibid., 1898, 417. Llmal- 
ches.—Ibid.,T883, 190. 

Lilshiknom. A branch of the Yuki who 
lived on the w. bank of Eel r., a short 
distance below the junction of Middle fork 
and South Eel r., n. Cal. (a. l. k. ) 

Lincoln Island. An island in Penobscot 
r., Me., near Lincoln, 37 m. abo veOldtown, 
occupied by about 30 Penobscot Indians. 

Lincoln.—So called by the whites. Madnaguk.— 
Gatschet, Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penob¬ 
scot name). 

Linguistic families. The linguistic di¬ 
versity of the Indians is perhaps the most 
remarkable feature of American ethnolo¬ 
gy. While certain general features, such, 
for example, as incorporation, use of verb 
and pronoun, employment of generic par¬ 
ticles, use of nongrammatical genders, 
etc., usually occur, most of the languages 
of the New World exhibit analogies jus¬ 
tifying their classification, on psychic 
grounds at least, as a single family of 
speech; nevertheless, the comparison of 
their vocabularies leads to the recognition 
of the existence of a large number of lin¬ 
guistic families or stocks having lexically 
no resemblance to or connection with each 
other. Boas (Science, xxm, 644,1906) is 
of the opinion, however, that, considering 
the enormous differences in the psycho¬ 
logical bases of morphology in American 
Indian languages, such psychic unity in 
one family of speech can hardly be predi¬ 
cated with confidence. Also, it may be 
that the Paleo-Asiatic languages of Siberia 
may perhaps belong with the American 
tongues. This linguistic diversity was per¬ 
ceived and commented on by some of the 
early Spanish historians and other writers 
on American subjects, such as Hervas, 
Barton, and Adelung; but the “founder 
of systematic philology relating to the 
North American Indians ” (in the words 
of Powell) was Albert Gallatin, whose 
Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the 
United States East of the Rocky Moun¬ 
tains and in the British and Russian Pos¬ 
sessions in North America was published 
in 1836 in the Transactions and Collections 
of the American Antiquarian Society (Ar- 
chseologia Americana, n), of Worcester, 
Mass. The progress of research and of 
linguistic cartography since Gallatin’s 











BULL. 30] 


LINGUISTIC FAMILIES 


767 


time is sketched in Powell’s epoch-mark¬ 
ing article, “Indian linguistic families” 
(7th Rep. B. A. E., 1-142,1891), with ac¬ 
companying map, embodying the au¬ 
thor’s own researches and those of the 
experts of the Bureau. Taking vocabu¬ 
lary and dictionary as the factors of dis¬ 
crimination, Powell recognized, n. of the 
Mexican boundary, the following 58 
“distinct linguistic families” or stocks: 
Adaizan (since determined to be a part 
of the Caddoan), Algonquian, Athapas¬ 
can, Attacapan, Beothukan, Caddoan, 
Chimakuan, Chimarikan, Chimmesyan, 
Chinookan, Chitimachan, Chumashan, 
Coahuiltecan, Copehan, Costanoan, Eski¬ 
mauan, Esselenian, Iroquoian, Kalapoo- 
ian, Karankawan, Keresan, Kiowan, Kit- 
unahan, Koluschan, Kulanapan, Kusan, 
Lutuamian, Mariposan, Moquelumnan, 
Muskhogean, Natchesan, Palaihnihan 
(since consolidated with Shastan), Piman, 
Pujuiian, Quoratean, Salinan, Salishan, 
Sastean (Shastan), Shahaptian, Shosho- 
nean, Siouan, Skittagetan, Takilman, 
Tanoan, Timuquanan, Tonikan, Tonka- 
wan, Uchean, Waiilatpuan, Wakashan, 
Washoan, Weitspekan, Wishoskan, Yako- 
nan, Yanan, Yukian, Yuman, Zunian. 
This is the working list for students of 
American languages, and, with minor 
variations, will remain the authoritative 
document on the classification of Ameri¬ 
can linguistic stocks. (See Kroeber in 
Am. Anthrop, vir, 570-93, 1905, where 
modifiations are proposed.) A revised 
edition of the map, containing the results 
of the latest investigations, appears in 
this Handbook. 

A marked feature of the distribution 
of Indian linguistic families n. of Mex¬ 
ico is the presence or former exist¬ 
ence in what are now the states of Cali¬ 
fornia and Oregon of more than one-third 
of the total number, while some other 
stocks (Algonquian, Athapascan, Siouan, 
Shoshonean, Eskimauan) have a very 
wide distribution. The Pacific coast con¬ 
trasts with the Atlantic by reason of the 
multiplicity of its linguistic families as com¬ 
pared with the few on the eastern littoral. 
The distribution of the Eskimauan family 
along the whole Arctic coast from New¬ 
foundland to Bering sea, and beyond it 
in a portion of Asia, is remarkable. The 
Uchean and the extinct Beothuk of New¬ 
foundland are really the only small fam¬ 
ilies of the Atlantic slope. The Catawba 
and related tribes in the Carolinas prove 
the earlier possession of that, country by 
the primitive Siouan, whose migrations 
were generally westward. TheTuscarora 
and related tribes of Virginia and south¬ 
ward show the wanderings of the Iro¬ 
quois, as do the Navaho and Apache 
those of the Athapascans. 


In 1896 McGee (The Smithson. Inst., 
1846-96, 377, 1897) estimated the num¬ 
ber of tribes belonging to the various 
linguistic families as follows: Algonquian 
36, Athapascan 53, Attacapan 2, Beothu¬ 
kan 1, Caddoan 9, Chimakuan 2, Chi¬ 
marikan 2, Chimmesyan (Tsimshian) 8, 
Chinookan 11, Chitimachan 1, Chuma¬ 
shan 6, Coahuiltecan 22, Copehan 22, 
Costanoan 5, Eskimauan 70, Esselenian 
1, Iroquoian 13, Kalapooian 8, Karanka¬ 
wan 1, Keresan 17, Kiowan 1, Kitunahan 
4, Koluschan 12, Kulanapan 30, Kusan 4, 
Lutuamian 4, Mariposan 24, Moquelum¬ 
nan 35, Muskhogean 9, Nahuatlan ?, Na¬ 
tchesan 2, Palaihnihan 8, Piman 7, Puju- 
nan 26, Quoratean 3, Salinan 2, Salishan 
64, Sastean 1, Serian 3, Shahaptian 7, 
Shoshonean 12, Siouan 68, Skitttagetan 
(Haida) 17, Takilman 1, Tanoan 14, Timu¬ 
quanan 60, Tonikan 3, Tonka wan 1, 
Uchean 1, Waiilatpuan 2, Wakashan 
(Kwakiutl-Nootka) 37, Washoan 1, Weit¬ 
spekan 6, Wishoskan 3, Yakonan 4, Ya¬ 
nan 1, Yukian 5, Yuman 9, Zunian 1. 
Of this large number of tribes, some are 
of little importance, while others may be 
local divisions and not tribes in the proper 
sense of the term. This is true, for exam¬ 
ple, of two at least of the divisions of the 
Kitunahan family, and of not a few of the 
Algonquian “tribes.” Some families, it 
will be seen, consist of but a single tribe: 
Beothukan, Chitimachan, Esselenian, 
Karankawan, Kiowan, Takilman, Tonka- 
wan, Uchean, Washoan, Yanan, Zunian; 
but of these a few (such as Zunian and Kio¬ 
wan) are very important. The amount 
of linguistic variation serving as an index 
of tribal division varies considerably, and 
in many cases, especially with the older 
writers, the delimitations are very imper¬ 
fect. Researches now in progress will 
doubtless elucidate some of these points. 

Besides the classification noted above, 
based on vocabulary, certain others are 
possible which take into consideration 
grammatical peculiarities, etc., common 
to several linguistic families. Thus, 
groups may be distinguished within the 
56 families of speech, embracing two or 
more of them which seem to be gram¬ 
matically or syntactically related, or in 
both these respects, while in nowise re¬ 
sembling each other in lexical content. 
From considerations of this sort Boas finds 
resemblances between several of the n. w. 
Pacific coast families. Grammatically, 
the Koluschan (Tlingit) and Skittagetan 
(Haida) and the Athapascan seem to be 
distantly related, and some lexical coin¬ 
cidences have been noted. The occurrence 
of pronominal gender in the Salishan and 
Chimakuan stocks is thought by Boas to 
be of great importance as suggesting rela¬ 
tionship between these two families. The 


768 


LINOKXUSHA—LIPAN 


[B. A. E. 


Wakashan (Kwakiutl-Nootka), Salishan, 
and Chimakuan stocks all possess suffix- 
nouns and inflected adverbs, similarities 
pointing, perhaps, to a common source 
(Mem. Internat. Cong. Anthrop., 339-346, 
1894). The languages of California have 
recently been carefully studied by Dixon 
andKroeber (Am. Anthrop., v, 1-26,1903; 
vn, 213-17,1905; vm, no. 4,1906), and the 
former has determined, as Gatschet had 
suspected, that the Sastean and Palaihni- 
han (Achomawi) constitute one stock, to 
which the Bureau of American Ethnology 
applies the name Shastan. A similar coal¬ 
escence of the Costanoan and Moquelum- 
nan stocks is also suggested. Taking other 
than lexical elements into consideration, 
the languages of California (exclusive of 
theYuman and Yanan) may be arranged 
in three groups: Southwestern, or Chu- 
mash type; northwestern, or Yurok type; 
central, or Maidu type—the last being by 
far the most numerous. This systemati¬ 
zation for California rests on pronominal 
incorporation, syntactical cases, etc. 

Morphological peculiarities, possessed in 
common, according to some authorities, 
indicate a relationship between Piman, 
Nahuatlan (Mexican), and Shoshonean. 
The Kitunahan of n. Idaho and s. e. 
British Columbia has some structural 
characteristics resembling those of the 
Shoshonean, particularly the method of 
object-noun incorporation. Gatschet, in 
1891 (Karank. Inds., 1891), suggested the 
probability of some relationship between 
the Karankawan, Pakawa (Coahuilte- 
can), and Tonkawan. It is nearly certain 
also, as supposed by Brinton, that Natchez 
is a Muskhogean dialect. The now ex¬ 
tinct Beothukan of Newfoundland has 
been suspected of having been a mixed and 
much distorted dialect of one or other of 
the great linguistic families of the region 
adjacent. Brinton (Amer. Race, 68,1891) 
was of opinion that “the general mor¬ 
phology seems somewhat more akin to 
Eskimo than to Algonkin examples.” 

The amount of material extant in the 
languages of the various stocks, as well 
as the literature about them, is in nowise 
uniform. Some, like the Beothukan, 
Esselenian, and Karankawan, are utterly 
extinct, and but small vocabularies of 
them have been preserved. Of others, 
who still survive in limited or de¬ 
creasing numbers, like the Chimakuan, 
Chimarikan, Chitimachan, Chumashan, 
Coahuiltecan, Costanoan, Kalapooian, 
Mariposan, Moquelumnan, Natchesan, 
Pujunan, Salinan, Shastan, Takilman, 
Washoan, Weitspekan, Yakonan, and 
Yukian, the vocabularies and texts col¬ 
lected are not very extensive or conclu¬ 
sive. The Algonquian, Athapascan, Es- 
kimauan, Iroquoian, Muskhogean, Salish¬ 
an, Skittagetan, Koluschan, and Siouan 


families are represented by many gram¬ 
mars, dictionaries, and native texts, both 
published and in manuscript. The ex¬ 
tent and value of these materials may 
be seen from the bibliographies of the 
late J. C. Pilling, of the Algonquian, 
Athapascan, Chinookan, Eskimauan, Iro¬ 
quoian, Muskhogean, Salishan, Siouan, 
and Wakashan stocks, published as bul¬ 
letins by the Bureau of American Eth¬ 
nology. (a. f. c.) 

Linoklusha ( Lin-ok-lu'-sha, ‘crayfish’). 
A clan of the Kushapokla phratry of the 
Choctaw.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 162, 1877. 

Lintchanre (‘flat sides of dogs’). A 
clan or division of the Thlingchadinne 
living n. and e. of the n. arm of Great 
Slave lake, in Mackenzie Ter., Canada. 

Klin-tchanpe.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 
363,1891. Klin-tchonpeh.—Ibid., 303. Lin-tchanr'e.— 
Petitot in Bui. Soc. de G6og. Paris, chart, 1875. 

* Lin-tchanpe.—Petitot, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1865. 
L’in-tchanpe.—Petitot, Diet. D6n£-Dindji6, xx, 
1876. Plats-cotes-de-chien du fort Rae.—Ibid. 

Lintja. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal. 

Lintja.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 
Luijta.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874 (mis¬ 
quoted from Taylor). 

Lions Creek. The local name for a for¬ 
mer band of Salish under Fraser super¬ 
intendency, Brit. Col. 

Leon’s Creek.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 78. Lion’s 
Creek.—Ibid., 1879, 138. 

Lipajenne. A subdivision of the Lipan. 
Lipajen-ne.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,1864. Lip- 
anjen-ne.—Escudero, Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 
212, 1834. 

Lipan (adapted from Jpa-vUde , appar¬ 
ently a personal name; n’de=‘ people’). 
An Apache tribe, designating themselves 
Ndizhan (‘ours,’ ‘our kind’), which at 
various periods of the 18th and 19th cen¬ 
turies roamed from the lower Rio Grande 
in New Mexico and Mexico eastward 
through Texas to the Gulf coast, gaining 
a livelihood by depredations against other 
tribes and especially against the white 
settlements of Texas and Mexico. The 
name has probably been employed to 
include other Apache groups of the south¬ 
ern plains, such as the Mescaleros and 
the Kiowa Apache. The Franciscan mis¬ 
sion of San Sabd (q. v.) was established 
among the Lipan in Texas in 1757, but it 
was soon destroyed by their enemies, the 
Comanche and Wichita. In 1761-62 the 
missions of San Lorenzo and Candelaria 
werealso founded, but these meta like fate 
in 1767. In 1805 the Lipan were reported 
to be divided into 3 bands, numbering 
300, 350, and 100 men, respectively; this 
apparently gave rise to their subdivision 
by Orozco y Berra in 1864 into the Lipa¬ 
jenne, Lipanes de Arriba, and Lipanes 
de Abajo. In 1839, under chief Castro, 
they sided with the Texans against the 
Comanche (Schoolcraft, Thirty Years, 
642, 1851); they were always friends with 
their congeners, the Mescaleros, and with 


BULL. 30] 


LIPANES DE ABAJO-LITTLE CROW 


769 


the Tonkawa after 1855, but were ene¬ 
mies of the Jicarillas and the Ute. Be¬ 
tween 1845 and 1856 they suffered se¬ 
verely in the Texan wars, the design of 
which was the extermination of the 
Indians within the Texas border. Most 
of them were driven into Coahuila, 
Mexico, where they resided in the Santa 
Rosa mts. with Kickapoo and other 
refugee Indians from the United States, 
until the 19 survivors were taken to n. w. 
Chihuahua, in Oct., 1903, whence they 
were brought to the United States about 
the beginning of 1905 and placed on the 
Mescalero res., N. Mex., where they now 
(1905) number about 25 and are making 
more rapid progress toward civilization 
than their Indian neighbors. In addition 
there are one or two Lipan numbered 
with the 54 Tonkawa under the Ponca, 
Pawnee, and Oto agency, Oakland res., 
Okla., and a few with the Kiowa Apache 
in the same territory, making the total 
population about 35. The Lipan resem¬ 
ble the other Apache in all important 
characteristics. They were often knoym 
under the designation Cancy, Chanze, 
etc., the French form of the Caddo col¬ 
lective name ( Ka'ntsi) for the eastern 
Apache tribes. (f. w. h.) 

Apaches Lipanes.—MS., 1791-92, in Tex. State ar¬ 
chives. A-tagui.—Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 
1897 (‘timber Apache’: Kiowa name, used also 
for Mescaleros). Canceres.—Escudero, Not. Nu¬ 
evo M£x., 84, 1849. Cancers.—Lewis, Trav., 195, 
1809. Cances.—Sibley (1805), Hist. Sketches, 74, 
1806 (Caddo name: ‘deceivers’). Cancey.—Fr. 
Doc. of 1719 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, nr, 178,1890. Canchy.—Bienville (1700) in 
Margry, Dec., IV, 442, 1880. Cancy.—La Harpe 
(1719), ibid., VI, 277, 285, 1886. Canecis.—Jefferys, 
Am, Atlas, map 8, 1776. Caneeci.—Anville, map 
N. Am., 1752. Canees.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
v, 571,1855. Canessy.—Iberville (1700) in Margry, 
D6c., IV, 874, 188§. Cannecis.—Baudry des Lo- 
zi£res, Voy. La., 242, 1802. Cannecy.—La Harpe 
(1719) in Margry, Dec., VI, 262, 1880. Cannensis.— 
French, Hist. Coll. La., ir, 11, 1875. Cannessi.— 
Carte des Poss. Angloises, 1777. Cantey.—Joutel 
(1687) in Margry, D<5c., Ill, 409, 1878. Chancre.— 
Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 288, 1878. 
Chanzes.—Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
i, 138, 846. Concee.—Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 110, 
1806. Gipanes.—Hamilton, Mex. Handbk., 48, 
1883. Hu-ta'-ci—ten Kate, Synonymie, 9, 1884 
(‘forest Apache’: Comanche name). Huxul.— 
Gatschet, Tonkawe MS., B. A. E. (Tonkawa 
name). Ipa-nde.—Arricivita (1792) quoted by 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, ill, 181, 1890. 
Ipandi.—Ibid., 180. K‘an'-dzi.—ten Kate, Syno- 
nvmie, 10, 1884 (Caddo name). Kantsi'.—Gat¬ 
schet, Caddo and Yatassi MS., B. A. E., 65. 
Kareses.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 
79, 1858 (probably identical). Lanecy.—VValche, 
Charte von Ani., 1805 (misprint). Lapan.— 
Niles’ Register, lxxi, 119, 1846. Lapanas.—Bol- 
laert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 276, 1850. 
Lapane.—Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Lapanne.— 
Ibid., viii. Lee Panis.—Pike, Trav., 337, 1811. 
Lee Pawnees.—Pike, Exped., app., pt. 3, 29, 1810. 
Lepan.— Sen. Ex. Conf. Doc. 13, 29th Cong., 2d 
sess., 1, 1846. Le Panis.—Pike, Exped., app., 
pt. 3, 9, 1810. Lipaines.—Alegre, Hist. Comp, 
jdsus, i, 336, 1841. Lipane.—MS. in Tex. State 
arch., no. 155, 1792. Lipanes Llaneros.—Doc. oi 
1828 in Bol. Soc. Geog. Mex., 264, 1870. Lipanis.— 
Drake, Bk. Inds., ix, 1848. Lipanos.—Escudero, 
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 244,1834. Lipau.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 176,1875 (misprint). Lipaw.—Hoffman 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-49 


in Bui. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, 3d s., vi, 206, 
1883 (misprint). Lippans.— Butler and Lewis 
(1846) in IT. R. Doc. 76,29th Cong., 2d sess., 4,1847 
Na'-izha'n.— Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 1897 
(own name: * ours ’, * our kind ’ -f dina . • people : 
cf. Kiowa Apache). Navone. —Gatschet, Coman- 
cheMS., B. A. E., 1884(Comanchename) Nipan.— 
Ibid. (Comanche pron. of Lipan) Ocanes. —Uhde, 
Lander, 121, 1861 (probably identical). Pawnee.— 
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2ds.,u, 29 
1814 (mistake). Seepans. —Lane (1854) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689, 1855. SniTni. —Mooney, 
field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (‘summer people' (?); 
former Mescalero name). Siapanes.— Uhde, Lan¬ 
der, 121,1861. Sinapans.— Iberville (1699) in Mar¬ 
gry, D6c., iv, 316,1880. Sipan.— Latham in Trans. 
Philol. Soc.Lond., 102,1856. Sypanes. —Robin Voy. 
Louisiane, in, 15, 1807 Tu-tsan-nde. —Mooney, 
field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (‘great water people’; 
Mescalero name). tfx u1 -— 1 Gatschet, Tonkawe 
MS., B. A. E. (Tonkawa name fora spiral shell; 
applied to the Lipan on account of their coiled 
hair). Yabipais Lipan.— Garc6s (1776), Diary, 404, 
1900. Yavipai-Lipanes. —Garc6s (1776) cited by 
Bandelier in Aren. Inst. Papers, hi, 114, 1890. 

Lipanes de Abajo (Span.: ‘lower Li- 

E ans’). A former branch of the Lipan. 

ipanes de Abajo. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,1864. 
Lipanes del Sur. —Doc. of i828 in Bol. Soc. Geog. 
Mex., 504,1869. 

Lipanes de Arriba (Span.: ‘upper Li- 

E ans’). A former branch of the Lipan. 

ipanes de Arriba. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,1864. 
Lipanes del Norte. —Doc. of 1828 in Bol. Soc. Geog. 
Mex., 504, 1869. 

Lipillanes. Mentioned as a division of 
the Llaneros. See Gohlkcthin, Guhlkainde , 
Kwahari. 

Lipallanes.— Escudero, Not. de Chihuahua, 226, 
1834. Lipillanes.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. 
Lipiyanes. —Escudero, Not. de Sonora y Sinaloa, 
68,1849. 

Lipook. A former Chumashan village 
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 
1860. 

Lisahuato. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar¬ 
bara co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Lisichi. A former Chumashan village 
in Ventura co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, July 24, 1863. 

Lisuchu. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara Cal. (Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863). Perhaps iden¬ 
tical with the preceding. 

Lithenca. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with San Juan 
Bautista mission, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Nov. 25, 1860. 

Littefutchi. A former Upper Creek 
town at the head of Canoe cr., in St Clair 
co., Ala. It was burned bv Col. Dyer, 
Oct. 29, 1813. 

Littafatchee.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Ala. 
map, 1899. Littafutchee.— Flint, Ind. Wars, 175, 
1833. Littefutchee.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., II, 294, 
1851. Olitifar.— Juan de la Vandera (1579) in 
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 1 ,18,1857. 

Little Abraham. See Abraham. 

Little Carpenter. See Attakullaculla. 
Little Crow ( Chetan wakan mani, ‘ the 
sacred pigeon-hawk which comes walk¬ 
ing’). A chief of the Kaposia division 
of the Mdewakanton Sioux, which, under 
his father Little Crow, as under his grand- 



770 


LITTLE FORKS-LITTLE RAVEN 


[B. A. E. 


father Little Thunder, had its headquar¬ 
ters at Kaposia (Kapozha), a village on 
the w. bank of the Mississippi, 10 or 12 m. 
below the mouth of Minnesota r. In 
1846, while intoxicated, he was shot and 
wounded by his brother; this caused him 
to try to discourage drinking among his 
followers, and probably induced him the 
same year to ask of the Indian agent at 
Ft Snelling a missionary to reside at his 
village, as a result of which Rev. Thomas 
S. Williamson was sent. Although Little 
Crow was a signer (under the name of 
Ta-oya-te-duta, ‘His people are red’) of 
the treaty of Mendota, Minn., Aug. 5, 
1851, by which the Dakota ceded most of 
their Minnesota lands to the United 
States, he used the treaty as a means of 
creating dissatisfaction and ultimately in 
bringing on the disastrous outbreak of 
1862. In this outbreak, during which 
more than a thousand settlers were killed, 
Little Crow was the recognized leader. 
Subsequent to the cession of 1851 several 
bands, including the Kaposia, were re¬ 
moved to a large reservation on the upper 
Minnesota, where they dwelt peacefully, 
professing genuine friendship for the 
white settlers, until they rose suddenly 
on Aug. 18, 1862, and spreading them¬ 
selves along the frontier for more than 
200 m., killed white men, women, and 
children without mercy. Little Crow led 
the fierce though unsuccessful attack on 
Ft Ridgely, Minn., Aug. 20-22, 1862, in 



LITTLE CROW THE ELDER. (mcKENNEY AND Hall) 


which he was slightly wounded. After 
the defeat of the hostiles at Wood lake, 
Sept. 23,1862, by Gen. Sibley, Little Crow 
with 200 or 300 followers fled to the pro¬ 
tection of his kindred on the plains far¬ 


ther w. He was killed by a settler named 
Lampson, July 3, 1863, at a place n. of 
Hutchinson, McLeod co., Minn. He was 
probably nearly 60 years of age at the 
time of his death. Little Crow had had 



LITTLE CROW THE YOUNGER 


6 wives and 22 children. Consult Minn. 
Hist.Soc. Coll., iii,1880; iv, 1876; Bryant 
and Murch, History of the Great Massacre 
by the Sioux Indians in 1862; Indian Af¬ 
fairs Report for 1863; Neill, Hist. Minn., 
1858. (c.t.) 

Little Forks. A Chippewa res. formerly 
on Tittibawassee r., in lower Michigan, 
sold in 1837. 

Little Munsee Town. A former Munsee 
village a few miles e. of Anderson, Madi¬ 
son co., Ind., on land sold in 1818 (Royce 
in 1st Rep. B. A. E., map, 1881). It may 
be identical with Kiktheswemud. 

Little Osage Village. A former Osage 
village on Osage res., Okla., on the w. 
bank of Neosho r.—McCoy (1837) in Sen. 
Doc. 120, 25th Cong., 2d sess., map, 952, 
1838. 

Little Raven ( Hosa , ‘Young Crow’). 
An Arapaho chief. He was first signer, 
for the Southern Arapaho, of the treaty 
of Fort Wise, Colo., Feb. 18, 1861. At a 
later period he took part with the allied 
Arapaho and Cheyenne in the war along 
the Kansas border, but joined in the 
treaty of Medicine Lodge, Kans., in 1867, 
by which these tribes agreed to go on a 
reservation, after which treaty all his 
effort was consistently directed toward 
keeping his people at peace with the 
Government and leading them to civili- 









BULL. 30] 


LITTLE ROCK BAND-LIWAITO 


771 


zation. Through his influence the body 
of the Arapaho remained at peace with 
the whites when their allies, the Cheyenne 
and Kiowa, went on the warpath in 
1874-75. Little Raven died at Canton¬ 
ment, Okla., in the winter of 1889, after 
having maintained for 20 years a reputa¬ 
tion as the leader of the progressive ele¬ 
ment. He was succeeded by Nawat, 
‘Left-hand’. ^ (j. M .) 

Little Rock Band. Mentioned by Parker 
(Minn. Handbk., 141, 1857) as a Sisseton 
division. Not identified. 

Little Rock Village. A Potawatomi vil¬ 
lage in n. e. Illinois in 1832 (Camp Tip¬ 
pecanoe treaty (1832) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 
698, 1873); situated on the n. bank of 
Kankakee r., about the boundary of 
Kankakee and Will cos. 

Little Thunder. A Brule Sioux chief 
during the middle of the 19th century. 
He was present at the Grattan massacre 
near Ft Laramie in 1854, and assumed 
command when chief Singing Bear was 
killed; he also took part in the battle of 
Ash Hollow, Nebr., with Gen. Harney, in 
1855, and continued chief until his death 
some years later. Physically Little Thun¬ 
der was a giant, fully six feet six inches 
tall and large in proportion, and is spoken 
of as of superior intelligence. 

Little Turtle (Michikinikiva ). A chief 
of the Miami tribe, born at his village on 
Eel r., Ind., in 1752. His father was 
a Miami chief and his mother a Mahican; 
hence, according to the Indian rule, he 
was a Mahican and received no advan¬ 
tage from his father’s rank—that is, he 
was not chief by descent. However, his 
talents having attracted the notice of his 
countrymen, he was made chief of the 
Miami while a comparatively young man. 
Little Turtle was the principal leader of 
the Indian forces that defeated Gen. 
Harmaron Miami r. in Oct. 1790, and Gen. 
St Clair, at St. Marys, Nov. 4, 1791, and 
he and Bluejacket were among the fore¬ 
most leaders of the Indians in their con¬ 
flict with Gen. Wayne’s army in 1795, al¬ 
though he had urged the Indians to make 
peace with this “chief who never sleeps.” 
After their defeat by the whites he joined 
in the treaty at Greenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 
1795, remarking, as he signed it, “I am 
the last to sign it, and I will be the last to 
break it.” Faithful to this promise he 
remained passive and counseled peace on 
the part of his people until his death at 
Ft Wayne, July 14,1812. Early in 1797, 
accompanied by Capt. Wells, his brother- 
in-law, he visited President Washington 
at Philadelphia, where he met Count Vol- 
ney and Gen. Kosciusko, the latter pre¬ 
senting him with his own pair of elegantly 
mounted pistols. Although Tecumseh 
endeavored to draw him away from his 
peaceful relations with the whites, his 


efforts were in vain. Llitte Turtle’s In¬ 
dian name as signed to different treaties 
varies as follows: Greenville, Aug. 3,1795, 
Meshekunnoghquoh; Ft Wayne, June 7, 
1803, Meseekunnoghquoh; Vincennes, 
Aug. 21, 1805, Mashekakahquoh; Ft 
Wayne, Sept. 30,1809, Meshekenoghqua. 
Consult Drake, Inds. N. Am., 1880; Brice, 
Hist. Fort Wayne, 1868; Appleton’s 
Cyclop. Am. Biog., in, 1894. (c. t.) 

Little Turtle’s Village. A former Miami 
village on Eel r., Ind., about 20 m. n. w. 
of Ft Wayne; named after the celebrated 
chief, Little Turtle, who was born there 
in 1752 and made it his home. It was 
in existence as late as 1812, the year of 
Little Turtle’s death. 

. "7 " • : 





LITTLE TURTLE. (FROM A PAINTING BY STUART IN 1797, SINCE 
Destroyed) 


Lituya. A name given by Niblack to a 
Tlingit division living about Lituya bay, 
s. e. Alaska. They are properly a part 
of the Huna, q. v. 

Lituya.—Niblack, Coast Ind. of Alaska, chart I, 
1889. Ltuiskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, n, pt. nr, 
29, 1840 (a town with 200 pop.). Shltuja.—Holm- 
berg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855. 

Livangebra. A former rancheria, pre¬ 
sumably Costanoan, connected with Do¬ 
lores mission, San Francisco, Cal. 

Livangebra.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 
1861. Livangelva.—Ibid, (mentioned as distinct, 
though seemingly identical). Luianeglua.—Ibid, 
(also mentioned as distinct). 

Liwaito ( Wintun: = liwai, ‘ waving ’). 
A former village of the Patwin subfamily 
of the Wintun, on the site of the present 
town of Winters, Yolo co., Cal. The 
Wintun applied the name also to Putah 
cr. (s. A. B.) 

Lewytos.—Powers in Overland Mo., xm, 542, 
1874. Liguaytoy.—Bancroft, Hist. Cal., IV, 71,1886. 




772 


LIYAM-LOGAN 


[B. A. E. 


Li-wai'-to.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 218, 
1877. 

Liyam {Li'-y&m). A former Chuma- 
shan village on Santa Cruz id., Cal.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1884. 

Llagas (Span.: ‘wounds’). A former 
group of Cocopa rancherias on the w. side 
of the Rio Colorado, just below tidewater, 
about lat. 32°, in n. e. Lower California. 
Visited and so named by Fray Francisco 
Garces, Sept. 17, 1771, which is given as 
the day of the wounds or sores of St Fran¬ 
cis Assisi.—Garces (1775), Diary, 188, 
1900. 

Llaneros (Span.: ‘ plainsmen ’). A term 
indefinitely applied to the former wild 
tribes of the Staked plains of w. Texas 
and e. New Mexico, including the Kwa- 
hari Comanche (q. v.) and parts of the 
Jicarillas and the Mescaleros. See Gohl- 
kahin , Guhlkainde. 

Llano. A Papago village in s. Arizona; 
pop. 70 in 1858. 

Del Llano. —Bailey in Ind. AfT. Rep., 208, 1858. 

Lochchiocha. A former Seminole town 
60 m. e. of Apalachicola, and near Ok- 
loknee, Fla.; Okoskaamathla was chief in 
1823.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th 
Cong., 1st sess., 26, 1826. 

Locobo. A Costanoan village situated in 
1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz mission, 
Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5,1860. 

Locust Necktown. A village in Mary¬ 
land, occupied in 1792 by that band of the 
Nanticoke known as Wiwash, q. v. 

Locust Neck. —Mt Johnson eonf. (1755) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 983, 1855. Locust Necktown. — 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 53, 1836. 

Lodges. See Earth lodge , Grass lodge , 
Habitations. 

Lodges without horses. A former Crow 
band.—Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 
1850, 144, 1851. 

Lofka. A former Kaiyuhkhotana set¬ 
tlement on the w. bank of Yukon r., 
Alaska. The place probably consisted of 
only a single hut occupied by an Indian 
named Lofka, at which the earliest 
American travelers on the Yukon used to 
spend the night. 

Lofka’s barrabora. —Dali, Alaska, 211, 1870. 

Logan. A synonym of pokeloken , in 
use in Maine, and probably a corruption 
of that word. (a. f. c.) 

Logan, John (?) (native name Tah-gah- 
jute , lit. ‘ his eyelashes stick out or above,’ 
as if looking through or over something, 
and so could well mean ‘spying.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A noted Indian chief, born at 
Shamokin, Pa., about 1725. His father, 
called by the English Shikellamy and by 
the Moravians Shikellemus, according to 
Crantz (Hist, of the Brethren, 269, 1780), 
was a white man, taken prisoner in Can¬ 
ada and reared among the Indians, and 
was later made chief of all or a part of 
the Indians residing at Shamokin. He is 


usually spoken of as a Cayuga chief, while 
others call him a Mingo, the common 
term in the colonial period for those 
Iroquois living beyond their proper 
boundaries. Bartram says that he was 
a Frenchman born in Montreal, but as 
a prisoner w r as adopted by the Oneida. 
The same authority further states that 
his son (presumably Tah-gah-jute) took 
the name Logan from his friend James 
Logan, who was secretary and for a 
time acting governor of Pennsylvania. 
He lived a number .of years near Reeds- 
ville, Pa., supporting himself and family 
by hunting and the sale of dressed skins. 
Later, about 1770, he removed to the Ohio 
and was living at the mouth of Beaver 
cr. when visited by Heckewelder in 
1772; and in 1774, about the time of the 
Dunmore war, he resided at Old Chilli- 
cothe, now Westfall, on the w. bank of 
Sciota r., Pickaway co., Ohio. In 1774 a 
number of Indians, including some of 
Logan’s relatives, were brutally massacred 
at the mouth of Yellow cr. by settlers on 
the Ohio, in retaliation, it was claimed, 
for the murder of white emigrants, and 
for a time Michael Cresap was sup¬ 
posed to be the leader in this massacre. 
There has been much controversy as to 
the facts in this case. A careful study of 
the evidence given by Jefferson in the 
appendix to his Notes on Virginia, by J. 
J. Jacob in his Biographical Sketch of 
the Life of Michael Cresap, and by Brantz 
Mayer in his Tah-gah-jute, leads to the 
conclusion that the massacre of the In¬ 
dians was by Greathouse and a party of 
white settlers, and that Cresap was not 
present; that Logan’s sister, and possibly 
some other relative, were killed; that his 
wife was not murdered, and that he had 
no children. It seems evident, however, 
that Logan was brought in some way to 
believe that Cresap led the attack. For 
several months Logan made war on the 
border settlements, perpetrating fearful 
barbarities upon men, women, and chil¬ 
dren. In the celebrated speech attributed 
to him he boasts of these murders. This 
supposed speech was probably only a 
memorandum written down from his 
statement and afterward read before the 
treaty meeting at Chillicothe, at which 
Logan was not present. His intemperate 
habits, begun about the time of his removal 
to the Ohio, grew upon him, and after the 
return of peace compelled him to forbear 
the use of the tomahawk he became an 
abandoned sot. On his return from a 
trip to Detroit in 1780 he was killed by 
his nephew, apparently in a quarrel. 
His wife, who was a Shawnee woman, sur¬ 
vived him, but no children resulted from 
their union. A monument to Logan 
stands in Fort Hill cemetery, Auburn, 
N. Y. (c. t.) 


BULL. 30] 


LOGSTOWN-LONE WOLF 


773 


Consult Doddridge, Settlement and In¬ 
dian Wars, 1821; Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, 
ii, 402, 1896; Jacob, Sketch of Cresap, 
1866; Jefferson, Notes on Va., 1802, 1804; 
Kercheval, Hist, of the Valley of Va., 
1833; Loudon, Narratives, n, 1811; May¬ 
er, Tah-gah-jute or Logan, 1867; Steven¬ 
son in W. Va. Hist. Mag., m, 144, 1903. 

Logstown. An important village for¬ 
merly on the right bank of Ohio r., about 
18 m. below Pittsburg, in Allegheny co., 
Pa. It was originally settled by Shawnee 
and Delawares prior to 1748, and in the 
following year was reported by C61oron 
to contain 40 cabins occupied by Iroquois, 
Shawnee, “Loups” (Delaware, Munsee, 
and Mahican), as well as Iroquois from 
Sault St Louis and Lake of Two Moun¬ 
tains, with some Nipissing, Abnaki, and 
Ottawa. Father Bonnecamps, of the 
same expedition, estimated the number 
of cabins at 80, and savs “we called it 
Chiningue, from its vicinity to a river of 
that name” (Mag. Am. Hist., H, 142, 
1878); but it should not be confounded 
with the Shenango some distance n., on 
Beaver cr. Croghan in 1765 (Thwaites, 
Early West. Trav., i, 127, 1904) speaks of 
Logstown as an old settlement of the 
Shawnee. It was abandoned about 1750 
and reoccupied by a mixed population of 
Mingo (chiefly Seneca), Mahican, Otta¬ 
wa, and others in the English interest. 
About this time a new village was built 
with the aid of the French on a hill over¬ 
looking the old site. Logstown was an 
important trading rendezvous, one of 
Croghan’s trading houses being estab¬ 
lished there; it was also the home of 
Half-King (Scruniyatha or Monakatua- 
tha) in 1753-54 (although it is stated that 
his dwelling was situated a few miles 
away), and was a customary stopping 
place of colonial officers and emissa¬ 
ries, as Weiser, Gist, Croghan, C61oron, 
and Washington, the latter remaining 
here five days while on his way to Ve¬ 
nango and Le Boeuf in 1753, and again 
making it a resting place while on his 
way to Kanawha r. in 1770. Logstown 
was also the scene of the treaty between 
the Virginia commissioners and the In¬ 
dians of this section in 1752. According 
to the author of Western Navigation (76, 
1814), and Cuming (Western Tour, 80, 
1810), there was also a settlement known 
as Logstown on the opposite side of the 
Ohio. It was abandoned by the Indians 
in 1758, immediately after the capture of 
Ft Du Quesne. In addition to the au¬ 
thorities cited, see Darlington, Christo¬ 
pher Gist’s Journals, 1893; Pa. Col. Bee., 
v, 348 et seq., 1851. (c. t.) 

Chiningue. —C61oron (1749) in Mag. Am. Hist., n, 
143, 1878. Chinnigne.—Thwaites, Early West. 
Trav., i, 24, note, 1904. Lockstown.— Narr. of Ma¬ 
rie Le Rovand Barbara Leininger (1759) transl. in 
. and Biog., xxix,no. 116,412, 1905. 
-Dinwiddie Papers (1751), I, 6, 1883. 


Pa. Mag. Hist 

Loggs Town.- 


Logg’s-Town. —Hamilton (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., VI, 531,1855. Loggs-town.— Bouquet (1764), 
Exped., 45, 1868. Logs Town,— Croghan (1748) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 267,1856. Log’s Town. — 
French officer (1749), ibid., iv, 533,1855. Shenan¬ 
go.— Thwaites, op. cit. 

Lohastahni ( Lo-hds-tdh‘-ni ). A former 
Chumashan village in Ventura co., Cal. 
—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Lohim. A small Shoshonean band liv¬ 
ing on Willow cr., a s. affluent of the 
Columbia, in s. Oregon, and probably 
belonging to the Mono-Paviotso group. 
They have never made a treaty with the 
Government and are generally spoken of 
as renegades belonging to the Umatilla 
res. (Mooney). In 1870 their number 
was reported as 114, but the name has 
not appeared in recent official reports. 
Ross mistook them for Nez Perc£s. 
Lo-hlm.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 743, 1896. 
Low-him.— Ross, Fur Hunters, 1,186,1855. Willow 
Creek Indians. —Mooney, op cit. 

Lojos. A former Chumashan village in 
Ventura co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
July 24, 1863. 

Loka (‘ reeds ’ [ phragmites ]). A Navaho 
clan. 

Loka.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 104, 
1890. Lokar/ine. —Ibid, {tine — ‘people’). Loka- 
dine‘. —Matthews, Navaho Legends, 31,1897 {dine— 

‘ people ’). 

Loko. A tribe, probably Paviotso, for¬ 
merly living on or near Carson r., w. Nev.— 
Holeman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 152,1852. 

Loksachumpa. A former Seminole town 
at the head of St Johns r., Fla. Lokpoka 
Takoosa Hajo was chief in 1823.—H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 1st sess., 
27, 1826. 

Lolanko (the Sinkine name of Bull cr.). 
A part of the Sinkine dwelling on Bull 
and Salmon crs., tributaries of the s. fork 
of Eel r., Humboldt co., Cal. 

Flonk'-o.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 113, 
1877 (so called by whites). Loloncooks. —Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, I, 447,1874. Lo-lon'-kuk. — Powers, op. 
cit. Loolanko. —A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903 (Bull cr.). 

Lolsel (lol ‘ tobacco’, sel ‘ people ’) . The 
name applied to the Wintun living in and 
about Long valley, e. of Clear lake, Lake 
co., Cal. Their territory extended w. to 
the summit of the mountain range just e. 
of Clear lake and was there contiguous 
to Pomo territory. (s. a. b. ) 

Lold'-la.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 219, 
1877. Loldlas.—Powers in Overland Mo., xin, 542, 
1874. Lol'-sel.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 
219,1877. 

Lomavik. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on the left bank of Kuskokwim r., 
Alaska; pop. 81 in 1880, 53 in 1900. 

Lomavigamute.— Nelson (1879) quoted by Baker, 
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 269, 1902. Lomavik. —Baker, 
ibid. Lomawigamute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 
53,1881. 

Lompoc. A former Chumashan village 
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara 
co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 
1861. 

Lone Wolf ( Gtixpa'go ). A Kiowa chief, 
one of the 9 signers of the treaty of Medi¬ 
cine Lodge, Kans., in 1867, by which the 


774 


LONGE-LORETTE 


[b. a. h. 


Kiowa first agreed to be placed on a res¬ 
ervation. In 1872 he headed a delegation 
to Washington. The killing of his son 
by the Texans in 1873 embittered him 
against the whites, and in the outbreak 
of the following year he was the recog¬ 
nized leader of the hostile part of the 
tribe. On the surrender in the spring of 
1875 he, with a number of others, was 
sent to military confinement at Ft Ma¬ 
rion, Fla., where they remained 3 years. 
He died in 1879, shortly after his return, 
and was succeeded by his adopted son, of 
the same name, who still retains author¬ 
ity in the tribe. (j. m. ) 



LONE WOLF 


Longe. An abbreviation in common 
use among English-speaking people of 
the region of the great lakes, particu¬ 
larly the n. shore of L. Ontario, for mas- 
kalonge , a variant of maskinonge (q. v.). 
The form lunge represents another vari¬ 
ant, muskelunge. The name is applied 
also to the Great Lake trout ( Salvelinus 
namaycush). S ee^Mackinavj. (a. f. c. ) 
Long Island (Am&ye'tt-glXnahi'ta, from 
&m&ye‘tt ‘island’, gtin&hi'ta ‘long’). A 
former Cherokee town at the Long id. 
in Tennessee r., on the Tennessee-Georgia 
line. It was settled in 1782 by Chero¬ 
kee who espoused the British cause in 
the Revolutionary war, and was known 
as one of the Chickamauga towns. It 
was destroyed in the fall of 1794. See 
Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1887; 
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508, 526, 
1900. (j. m. ) 

Long Lake. A former Chippewa village 
on Long lake, in Bayfield co., n. Wis.— 
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
v, 191, 1885. 


Long Lake. A Chippewa band on 
Long lake, n. of L. Superior, between 
Nipegon lake and Pic r., Ontario; pop. 
311 in 1884, 341 in 1904. 

Long Sioux. The chief of one of the 
Dakota bands not brought into Ft Peck 
agency, Mont., in 1872 (H. R. Ex. Doc. 
96, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 5, 1873). It had 
28 tipis. Not identified. 

Long Tail. In 1854 a Shawnee chief of 
this name ruled a band at “ Long Tail’s 
settlement” in Johnson co., Kans.— 
Washington treaty (1854) in U. S. Ind. 
Treat., 795, 1873. 

Longushharkarto (Long-ush-har-kar'-to, 
‘brush log’). A sub-clan of the Dela¬ 
wares (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 
1877. 

Lookout Mountain Town (adapted from 
the Cherokee A'tali da'ndaka'niha, ‘moun¬ 
tains looking at each other’). A former 
Cherokee town at or near the present 
Trenton, Dade co., n. w. Ga. It was 
settled in 1782 by Cherokee who espoused 
the British cause in the Revolutionary 
war, and was known as one of the Chicka¬ 
mauga towns. It was destroyed in the 
fall of 1794. (j. m. ) 

A't&li da'ndaka'niha.—Mooney, inf’n, 1906 (full 
Cherokee name). Danda' ganu'. —Mooney in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 514, 1900 (‘Two looking at each 
other’: Cherokee name). Lookout Mountain.— 
Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. 
E., 144, 1887. Lookout Mt. Town.—Royce in 5th 
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1887. Ottilletaraconohah.— 
Ballew (1789) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 
56, 1832. 

Loolego ( Lo-o-le-go ). A Yurok village 
on lower Klamath r., Cal., 2 m. above the 
fork with the Trinity. A fish dam was 
regularly built here.—A. L. Kroeber, 
inf’n, 1904. 

Lopotatimni. A division of the Miwok 
formerly living in Eldorado or Sacramento 
co., Cal. 

Lapototot.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, 1 ,450,1874. Lopo- 
talimnes.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, 
123, 1848. Lopotatimnes.—Hale in U. S. Expl. Ex- 
ped., VI, 630, 1846. Lopstatimnes.—Bancroft, op. 
cit. (misquoted from Hale). Sapototot.—Ibid. 

Loquasquscit. A former Wampanoag 
“plantation” near Pawtucket r., Provi¬ 
dence co. (?), R. I. It was sold in 1646. 
Loquasquscit.—Deed of 1646 in R. I. Col. Rec., 1 ,33, 
1856. Loqusquscit.—Ibid. ,32. Loqusqusitt.—Ibid. 

Lorenzo. A former Diegueno village 
n. e. of San Diego, Cal.—Hayes (1850) 
quoted by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 458, 
1882. 

Loreto. A village, probably of the Tu- 
bare, on the n. bank of the s. fork of Rio 
del Fuerte, lat. 26° 45', Ion, 107° 30', s. w. 
Chihuahua, Mexico. 

Loreto. A Varohio village and the seat 
of a Spanish mission, situated n. of Chini- 
pas valley, lat. 27° 48', Ion. 108° 30', n. 
Sinaloa, Mexico. 

Nuestra Senora de Loreto de Voragios.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 324, 1864. Sinoyeca.—Ibid, (native 
name). 

Lorette. A Huron village situated 8 m. 
n. w. of Quebec, Canada. The present 
village, properly distinguished as Jeune 





fetJLL. So] 


los Angeles—louchEux 


775 


Lorette, is some miles distant from An- 
cienne Lorette, the old village, w. of and 
nearer to Quebec, which was abandoned 
for the present location after 1721. The 
inhabitants are a remnant of the Hurons 
(q. v.) who fled from their country on ac¬ 
count of the Iroquois about 1650. After 
stopping on Orleans id. they removed in 
1693 to Ancienne Lorette. In 1884 they 
numbered 289; in 1904, 455. See Huron , 
Missions. (j. M .) 

Lorett.— German Flats conf. (1770) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VIII, 229, 1857. Loretta.— Jefferys, Fr. 
Dom., pt. 1, map, 1761. Lorette.—Clinton (1745) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 276, 1855. Loretto.— 
Doc. of 1693, ibid., ix, 557, 1855. Pematnawiak.— 
Gatschet, Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobscot 
name). 

Los Angeles. A former rancheria, in¬ 
habited apparently by both Pima Alta and 
Seri, on the w. bank of Rio Horcasitas, 
central Sonora, Mexico. It dates from 
early Spanish times, but is probably not 
now known by this name. 

Angeles.—Kino,’map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue 
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Los Angeles.—Doc. of 1730 
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 513, 1884. 

Los Luceros (Span.: ‘the morning 
stars’). A small settlement situated at 
the site of the ancient pueblo of Pioge, 
on the e. bank of the Rio Grande, near 
Plaza del Alcalde, Rio Arriba co., N.Mex. 
Mentioned by Gatschet in 1879 as a pueblo 
of the Tewa Indians, whereas it is a Mex¬ 
ican village, although it may have con¬ 
tained at that time a few Tewa from San 
Juan pueblo, about 3 m. s. 

Los Leuceuros.—Yarrow in Ann. Rep. Wheeler 
Surv., app. LL, 143, 1875. Los Luceros.—Gatschet 
in Wheeler Surv. Rep., Archseol., vn, 417, 1879. 

Lost Ten Tribes of Israel. The belief, 
for which no positive authority seems to 
exist, has long been current that in 721 
b. c., Sargon, king of Assyria, the succes¬ 
sor of Shalmaneser, carried off into cap¬ 
tivity ten of the twelve tribes of Israel. 
Other deportations are attributed to Tig- 
lath-Pileser and Shalmaneser. Not all 
the people were deported; nor were those 
who were, actually lost. Still, the as¬ 
sumption that they were lost has given 
rise to absurd theories, according to which 
these missing tribes have been discovered 
in every quarter of the globe. The most 
popular theories are one which identifies 
them with the Anglo-Saxons and another 
which sees their descendants in the 
American Indians. Father Duran in 1585 
was one of the first to state explicitly that 
“these natives are of the ten tribes of 
Israel that Shalmaneser, king of the As¬ 
syrians, made prisoners and carried to 
Assyria.” The latest variants of the 
theory may be met with in the present- 
day newspapers. Antonio de Montezinos, 
a Marano (secret Jew), while journeying 
in South America in 1641 claimed that he 
met savages who followed Jewish prac¬ 
tices. This story he repeated in Holland, 
in 1644, to Manasseh ben Israel, who 
printed it in his work, Hope of Israel. 


From it Thomas Thorowgood, in 1652, 
published Digitus Dei, in which he sought 
to prove that the Indians were the Jews 
“lost in the world for the space of near 
2,000 years.” From this work many sub¬ 
sequent writers obtained their chief argu¬ 
ments. This theory, however, found 
opponents even in the 17th century. 
Among these were William Wood, author 
of the curious New England’s Prospect 
(16341; L’Estrange in Americans no Jews 
(1652); Hubbard in History of New Eng¬ 
land ( ca . 1680). The identification of the 
American aborigines with the “lost ten 
tribes” was based on alleged identities 
in religions, practices, customs and habits, 
traditions, and languages. Adair’s His¬ 
tory of the American Indians, published 
in 1775, was based on this theory. An 
enthusiastic successor of Adair was Dr 
Elias Boudinot, whose work, A Star in 
the West; or, a Humble Attempt to Dis¬ 
cover the Long Lost Ten Tribes of Israel, 
Preparatory to Their Return to Their 
Beloved City, Jerusalem, was published 
at Trenton, N. J., in 1816. Lord Kings- 
borough’s magnificent Antiquities of 
Mexico (9 vols., 1830-48) represents a 
fortune spent in efforts to sustain this 
theory. To-day the idea crops out 
occasionally in pseudo-scientific works, 
missionary literature, etc., while the 
friendly interest which the Mormon 
church has always taken in the Indians 
is said to be due to this belief. Certain 
identities and resemblances in customs, 
ideas, institutions, etc., of the American 
Indians and the ancient Jews are pointed 
out by Mallery in his Israelite and In¬ 
dian: A Parallel in Planes of Culture 
(Proc. A. A. A. S., xxxvm, 287-331,1889), 
though the address contains many mis¬ 
conceptions. It may be remarked that 
the Jews and the Indians haveno physical 
characteristics in common, the two races 
belonging to entirely distinct types. See 
Popular fallacies. 

In addition to the above works consult 
Neubauer in Jewish Quarterly Review, i, 
1889; Jacobs in Jewish Encyclopedia, 
xii, 249-53, 1906. (a. f. c.) 

Lotlemaga ( Po'lEmaga , ‘ ghost-face wo¬ 
man.’—Boas). The ancestor of a gens of 
the Nakomgilisala, also applied to the 
gens itself. 

Lo'tlemaq.—Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 
1887. 

Loucheux (Fr.: ‘ squinters’). The Ku- 
tchin speaking the dialect of the Tukkuth- 
kutchin. This language, which resembles 
more nearly the Chipewyan than the 
intervening Etatchogottine and Kawcho- 
gottine dialects, is spoken by the Tatlit- 
kutchin, Vuntakutchin, Kutchakutchin, 
Natsitkutchin, and Trotsikkutchin (Har- 
disty in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 311, 1872). 
The term was extended by the Hud¬ 
son’s Bay Co. men to include all the 


776 


LOVE SONGS-LOWER KUTENAI 


[b. a. e. 


Kutchin, though the Tukkuthkutchin, or 
they and the Tatlitkutchin together, con¬ 
stituted the Loucheux proper. 

The Loucheux of Alaska are reported 
by Hardisty to have been divided into 
three castes, Chitsah, Tangeesatsah, and 
Natsingh, names which seem to signify 
‘fair/ ‘partly swarthy,’ and ‘swarthy,’ 
respectively. Those of the first caste 
lived principally on fish, and those of the 
last mentioned by hunting. They occu¬ 
pied different districts, and marriage be¬ 
tween two individuals of the same caste 
was almost prohibited. Petitot gives the 
names of these bands as Etchian-Kp4t, 
‘ men of the left,’ Natts£in-Kp£t, ‘men of 
the right,’ and Tsendjidhaettset-Kp6t, 
‘men of the middle.’ As the children 
belonged to the mother’s clan, but lived 
usually with that of the father, these peo¬ 
ple are said to have exchanged countries 
slowly in successive generations. The 
three clans or castes are now represented 
by the Chitsa, Tangesatsa, and Natesa. 
According to Strachan Jones (Smithson. 
Rep., op. cit., 326), this system of castes 
of successive rank prevailed generally 
among the Kutchin. For the synonymy, 
see Kutchin. 

Love songs. See Music and Musical in¬ 
struments. 

Lowako (‘northern (?) people’). A peo¬ 
ple mentioned in the Walam Olum record 
of the Delawares (Brinton, Lenape Leg., 
206,1885). Rafinesque says the name re¬ 
fers to the Eskimo, but Brinton says it may 
mean any northern people. 

Lowako. —Walum Olum (1833) in Brinton, Lenape 
Leg'., 206,1885. Lowaniwi. —Ibid.,182. Lowanuski.— 
Ibid., 198. Lowushkis. —Rafinesque (1833) quoted 
by Brinton, ibid., 232. 

Lower Chehalis. A collective term for 
the Salish tribes on lower Chehalis r. and 
affluents, as well as those about Grays 
harbor and the n. end of Shoalwater 
bay, Wash. It included the Satsop, We- 
natchi, Whiskah, Humptulip, and other 
small tribes. According to Ford (Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1857, 341,1858) the term is prop¬ 
erly restricted to the Grays Harbor In¬ 
dians, and Gibbs confines it to those 
about the n. end of Shoalwater bay. See 
A tsmitl. 

Artsmilsh.— Swan quoted by Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., pi. lxxxviii, 1896. Salt-water band.— 
Simmons in Ind. Aff. Rep.,233,1858. 

Lower Chinook. Chinookan tribes of the 
lower Columbia r., strictly the Chinook 
proper and the Clatsop, who speak one 
language, while all the other tribes (Up¬ 
per Chinook) present marked dialectic 
differences. Most writers include all the 
tribes from the mouth of the Columbia to 
Willamette r. under the term. 

Ahei'pudin. —Gatschet, Kalapuya MS., B. A. E. 
(Atfalati name). Bas-Tchinouks. —Duflot de Mo¬ 
iras, Explor. de l’Oregon, ir, 335, 1844. Lower 
Chinook.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., VI, 215, 
1846. Txaix-wa'txsh.—Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. 
(Clackama name). 


Lower Creeks. The name formerly ap¬ 
plied to that part of the Creek confed¬ 
eracy centering on the lower Chatta¬ 
hoochee and its tributaries, in South 
Carolina and Alabama, as distinguished 
from the Upper Creeks on the Coosa and 
Tallapoosa. They included Muscogee, 
Hitchiti, and Yuchi. In the 18th century 
the terms Coweta (Kawita) and Apala- 
chucla (Apalachicola) were often used to 
designate the Lower Creeks. Bartram 
and other authors use the term Seminole 
as an equivalent, but the Seminole were 
an offshobt of the Lower Creeks and 
owed no allegiance to the confederacy. 
According to Rivers the Lower Creeks 
had 10 villages with 2,406 people in 1715, 
but by 1733 they had lost 2 of their 10 
towns, according to the statement of a 
Kawita chief to Oglethorpe at the Savan¬ 
nah council. The chief did not give the 
names of the 2 lost towns, but the 8 re¬ 
maining ones were Apalachicola, Chiaha, 
Hitchiti, Kasihta, Kawita, Oconee, Oso- 
tchi, and Eufaula. In 1764 (Smith, Bou¬ 
quet’s Exped., 1766) the Lower Creeks 
numbered 1,180 men, representing a total 
population of about 4,100. In 1813, ac¬ 
cording to Hawkins (Am. St. Papers, Ind. 
Aff., i, 842, 1832), they had 14 towns on 
Flint and Chattahoochee rs., but in the 
same year (ibid., 851) these had in¬ 
creased to 16. The Lower Creeks were 
frequently called Ucheesee, or Ochesee 
(Ochisi), from the town of that name. 
According to Barton they called the 
Upper Creeks “uncles,” and by them 
were called ‘ ‘ cousins. ’ ’ For a list of their 
towns, see Creeks. (a. s. g.) 

Basses Rivieres.— Gatschet, inf’n (French name 
for Lower*Creeks). Lower Creeks.—Smith, Bou¬ 
quet’s Exped. 71, 1766. Masko'ki Hatchata.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 237, 1884 (Creek 
name). Ochesees.— Rivers, Hist. S. C., 94, 1874. 
TTchesees. —Gussefeld, Charte der 13 Ver. Staaten, 
1784. 

Lower Delaware Town. A former Dela¬ 
ware village on the extreme headwaters 
of Mohican r., 5 or 6 m. directly n. of the 
site of the city of Ashland, in Ashland 
co., Ohio.—Royce in I8th Rep. B. A. E., 
Ohio map, 1899. 

Lower Kutenai. A division of the Ku- 
tenai living on Kootenai lake and r., and 
in the neighboring plains of Idaho and 
British Columbia. From the time of 
their earliest contact with the whites 
they have been called Flatbows, for what 
reason is not known, but they are now 
generally called Lower Kootenay. They 
numbered 172 in British Columbia in 1904, 
and 79 from Idaho were connected with 
the Flathead agency, Montana. 

Akoklako —Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 
124b, 1884 (corruption of Aqkdqtld'tlqd). Aku- 
ch&klactas.— Wilson in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
304,1866 (corruption of Aqkdqtld'tlqd). Aqkoqtla'- 
tlqo.— Chamberlain in 8th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 
6, 1892. Aquqenu'kqS. —Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 10, 1889. Aquqtla'tlqo.—Boas, ibid. 



BULL. 30] 


LOWER QUARTER INDIANS-LUISEfo 


777 


Arc Plattes. —Mayne, Brit. Col., 298, 1862. Arcs- 
a-plats. —De Smet, Oreg. Miss., 112, 1847. Arcs- 
Plats.— Duflotde Moiras, Expl., ii, 335,1844. Arcs- 
plattes.— Anderson quoted by Gibbs in Hist. Mag., 
80, 1863. Flachbogen. —Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, 
map 17, 1852. Flat Bow.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1902, 
pt. 2,74. Flat-bows. —Hale in U.S.Expl, Exped., vi, 
204,1846 (said to be a translation of Aqkoqtlatl, the 
Kutenai name of Kootenai r., but this is doubt¬ 
ful) . Indians of the Lower Kootenay. —Chamber- 
lain, op. cit., 6. Kertani.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. 
Hist., VI, 140,1883. Lake Indians. —Henrv (1811) 
quoted by Maclean, Canad. Sav. Folk, 138, 1896. 
Lower Kootanais.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 298, 1862. 
Lower Kootanie.— Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vo- 
cabs., 124b, 1884. Lower Kootenay. —Boas, op. 
cit., 10. Lower Kootenays. —Chamberlain, op. 
cit., 6. 

Lower Quarter Indians. A tribe or divi¬ 
sion in 1700, living 10 m. from Neuse r. 
and 40 m. from Adshusheer town, prob¬ 
ably about the site of Raleigh, N. C.— 
Lawson (1714), Hist. Car., 98, 1860. 

Lower Sauratown. A Cheraw village in 
1760, situated on the s. bank of Dan r., 
N. Car., near the Virginia border.— 
Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the East, Bui. 
B. A. E., 59, 1894. 

Lower Thompson Indians. The popular 
name for the Ntlakyapamuk living on 
Fraser r., between Siska and Yale, Brit. 
Col. 

Canon Indians. —Teitin Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 
II, 168, 1900. Lower Thompson Indians. —Ibid. 
Lower Thompsons. —Ibid. Uta'mqt. —Boas, inf’n, 
1906 (own name). Uta'mqtamux. —Teit, op. cit. 
(‘people below’ : own name). 

Lowertown. A name applied at differ¬ 
ent periods to two distinct Shawnee 
villages in Ohio. The one commonly so 
called was originally on the Ohio, just 
below the mouth of the Scioto, until it 
was carried off by a flood, when it was 
rebuilt on the opposite side of the Scioto, 
about the site of Portsmouth, Scioto co. 
It was here in 1750-54, but before 1766 
the inhabitants removed upstream to 
Chillicothe, in Ross co., which was fre¬ 
quently known as Lowertown, or Lower 
Shawnee Town, to distinguish it from 
Lick Town, 25 m. above. See Chillicothe , 
Scioto. (j. m.) 

Lower Shawnee Town.— Common names used by 
early writers. Lowertown. —Common name used 
by early writers. Shawnoah Basse Ville.—Esnauts 
and Rapilly, map, 1777. 

Lowrey, George. A cousin of Sequoya 
and second chief of the Eastern Cherokee 
under John Ross, commonly known as 
Major Lowrey. His native name was 
Agi'll (‘He is rising’), possibly a con¬ 
traction of an old personal name, Agin'- 
agi'll (‘Rising-fawn’). He joined Ross 
in steadily opposing all attempts to force 
his people to move from their eastern 
lands, and later, after this had been 
accomplished, he was chief of council of 
the Eastern Cherokee at the meeting held 
in 1839 to fuse the eastern and western 
divisions into the present Cherokee Na¬ 
tion. See Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
115, 135, 1900. 

Lowrey, John. A Cherokee chief, com¬ 
monly known as Colonel Lowrey. He 


commanded the friendly Cherokee who 
helped Gen. Andrew Jackson in the war 
against the Creeks in 1813-14, and with 
Col. Gideon Morgan and 400 Cherokee 
surrounded and captured the town of 
Hillabi, Ala., Nov. 18, 1813. The two 
were conspicuous also in the battle of 
Horseshoe Bend, Mar. 27,1814, for which 
they were commended. Lowrey was one 
of the signers of the treaties made at Wash¬ 
ington, June 7, 1806, and Mar. 22, 1816. 
See Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 90, 
1900. 

Lowwalta. A former Seminole vil¬ 
lage, probably e. of Appalachee bay, Fla., 
as the map of Bartram (Travels, i, 1799) 
notes a Noowalta r. emptying into the 
bay. It was settled by Creeks from Coosa 

r. , who followed their prophets McQueen 
and Francis after the war of 1813-14.— 
Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 306, 
1822. 

Loyola. See Etsowish Semmegee-itshin. 

Lu (‘mud,’ ‘clay’). A former Atta- 
capa village on L. Prien (Cyprien), in 
Calcasieu parish, La. 

Lo.— Gatschet, Attacapa MS., B. A. E., 45. 1885. 
Lu.— Ibid. 

Luchasmi. A Costanoan village situated 
in 1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz mis¬ 
sion, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 
5, 1860. 

Luckton. A tribe, comprising 200 peo¬ 
ple, residing in 1806 on the Oregon coast 

s. of the Tillamook. 

Luck-tons.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 117, 
1905. Lukton.— Amer. Pioneer, 189, 1843. 

Lugups. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Barbara, Cal. (Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 24,1863); perhaps the same 
as Luupch, q. v. 

Luidneg. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. 18,1861. 

Luiseno. The southernmost Shoshone- 
an division in California, which received 
its name from San Luis Rey, the most im¬ 
portant Spanish mission in the territory 
of these people. They form one 1 inguistic 
group with the Aguas Calientes, Juanenos, 
and Kawia. They extended along the 
coast from between San Onofre and Las 
Animas crs., far enoughs, to include Aguas 
Hedionda, San Marcos, Escondido, and 
Valley Center. Inland they extended n. 
beyond San Jacinto r., and intoTemescal 
cr.; but they were cut off from the San 
Jacinto divide by the Dieguenos, Aguas 
Calientes, Kawia, and Serranos. The 
former inhabitants of San Clemente id. 
also are said to have been Luisenos, and 
the same was possibly the case with those 
of San Nicolas id. Their population was 
given in 1856 (Ind. Aff. Rep., 243) as be¬ 
tween 2,500 and 2,800; in 1870, as 1,299; 
in 1885, as 1,142. Most of them were sub¬ 
sequently placed on small reservations 


778 


LUKAIASfA-LTJTUAMIAN FAMILY 


[b. a. e. 


included under the Mission Tule River 
agency, and no separate tribal count has 
been made. Their villages, past and pres¬ 
ent, are Ahuanga, Apeche, Bruno’s Vil¬ 
lage, La Joya, Las Flores, Pala, Pauma, 
Pedro’s Village (?), Potrero, Rincon, Sa- 
boba, San Luis Rey (mission), Santa 
Margarita (?), Temecula, and Wahoma. 
Taylor (Cal. Farmer, May 11, 1860) gives 
the following list of villages in the neigh¬ 
borhood of San Luis Rey mission, some of 
which may be identical with those here 
recorded: Cenyowpreskel, Ehutewa,Ene- 
kelkawa, Hamechuwa, Hatawa, Hepow- 
woo, Itaywiy, Itukemuk, Milkwanen, 
Mokaskel, and Mootaeyuhew. 

Ghecham.—A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1905 (from Ghech, 
native name of San Luis Rey mission, and some¬ 
times appears to be applied to themselves). 
Kechi.—Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 413, 
1879. Kechis.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 108,1855. Khe- 
cham.—Kroeber, inf’n, 1905 (alternative for Ghe¬ 
cham). San Louis Indians.—Winder in H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 124,1857. San Luis- 
enians.—Couts quoted by Henley in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1856,240,1857. San Luiseiios.—Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, I, 460,1882. San Luisienos.—Ibid. San Luis 
Rey [tribe] .—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 682, 1872. 

Lukaiasta. A former village of the Ka- 
lindaruk division of the Costanoan fam¬ 
ily, connected with San Carlos mission, 
Cal. 

Lucayasta.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Lukfa (‘clay,’ ‘loam’). A former vil¬ 
lage of the Opatukla or “Eastern party” 
of the Choctaw, on the headwaters of a 
branch of Sukinatcha cr., in Kemper co., 
Miss. 

Lookfa.—W. Florida map ca. 1775. Lukfa.—Hal¬ 
bert in Pub. Miss. Hist. Soc., vi, 424, 1902. 

Lulakiksa. A Choctaw clan of the 
Kushapokla phratry. 

Lulak.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 162, 1877. Lu-lak 
Ik'-sa.—Ibid. 

Lulanna. A Haida town referred to 
by Work in 1836-41. It is perhaps in¬ 
tended for Yaku, opposite Graham id., 
Queen Charlotte ids., Alaska, or it may 
have been that town and Kiusta consid¬ 
ered as one. Its population was estimated 
by Work at 296 in 20 houses. 

Lu lan na.—Work in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 
489, 1855. Su-lan-na.—Kane, Wand. N. A., app., 
1859 (misprint from Work). 

Lululongturkwi (Hopi: ‘ plumed-serpent 
mound.’—Fewkes). A ruined pueblo, of 
medium size, situated across the Jeditoh 
valley from Kokopki, in the Hopi coun¬ 
try, n. e. Arizona. It was possibly one 
of a group of pueblos built and occupied 
by the Kawaika people. See Hough in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 336, pi. 82, 1903. 

Lululongtuqui.—Hough, ibid., pi. 82. Lululongtur- 
qui.—Ibid., 336. 

Lummi. A Salish tribe on and inland 
from Bellingham bay, n. w. Wash. They 
are said to have lived formerly on part 
of a group of islands e. of Vancouver id., 
to which they still occasionally resorted 
in 1863. According to Gibbs their lan¬ 
guage is almost unintelligible to the Nook- 
sak, their northern neighbors. Boas 


classes it with the Songish dialect. The 
Lummi are now under the jurisdiction of 
the Tulalip school superintendent, Wash¬ 
ington, and numbered 412 in 1905. Their 
former villages were Hutatchl, Lemal- 
tcha, Stashum, and Tomwhiksen. The 
Klalakamish, of Orcas id., were a former 
band. 

Ha-lum-mi. —Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, vi, 1863 
(name given them by some other (Salish?) tribes). 
Hookluhmic.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 521,1851. 
lummas. —Fitzhugh (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 75, 1857. Lummi. — Gibbs in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 433, 1855. Lummie.— Stevens 
(1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 46, 
1857. Lummi-neuk-sack. —Shaw in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1859,398,1860 (two tribal names connected through 
error). Nooh-lum-mi. —Tolmie (1844) in Pac. R. 
R. Rep., I, 434, 1855. Nooklulumic.— Lane (1849) 
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 62, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 173,1850. 
Nooklulumu. —Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1850. 
Nooklummie.— Bauer in Am. Quar. Reg., in, 389, 
1849. Nookluolamic. —Thornton (1849) in School¬ 
craft,Ind. Tribes, vi, 701,1857. Noot-hum. —Starling 
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 170,1852. Noot-hum-mic. —Ibid., 
171. Nugh-lemmy. —Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 
1877. Nuh-lum-mi. —Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
i, 180, 1877 (proposed as a collective name for 
Samish, Lummi, and Nuksak). Nukhlesh. —Gibbs, 
Clallam and Lummi, vi, 1863 (so called by Skagit). 
Nukh'-lum-mi. —Ibid (own name). Qtlumi. —Boas 
in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 1889. 

Lunge. See Longe, Maskinonge. 

Lunikashinga (‘ thunder-being people’). 
A Kansa gens. 

Leda n unikaci n ga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 232, 
1897 (‘gray hawk people’). Lo-ne'-ka-she-ga. — 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Loo nika-shing-ga.— 
Stubbs. KawMS. vocab., B. A. E., 25, 1877. Lu.— 
Dorsey in Am. Natur., 671, 1885 (‘thunder’). Lu 
nikaci n ga. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 232,1897” 
Thunder.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. 

Lupies. Mentioned in connection with 
some mythical as well as existent tribes 
of the plains in the 17th century (Vetan- 
curt, 1693, Teatro Am., in, 303, repr. 
1871). Possibly the Pawnee Loups. 

Lushapa. A former Choctaw town, evi¬ 
dently in Neshoba co., Miss., and possibly 
on Lussalaka cr., a small tributary of 
Kentarky cr.—Halbert in Pub. Miss. Hist. 
Soc., vi, 430, 1902. 

Lushapa.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775. Lusth- 
hapa.— West Florida map, ca. 1775. 

Lutchapoga (Creek: lutcha ‘terrapin’, 
poka ‘gathering place’: ‘terrapin pen’). 
A former Upper Creek town, of which 
Atchinaalgi was a branch or colony, prob¬ 
ably on or near Tallapoosa r., Ala. 
Lockoportay.— Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 
279, 1836. Loo-chau po-gau.— Hawkins (1799), 
Sketch, 47, 1848. Luchepoga. —Tanner, map, 1827. 
Lu chi paga.— Parsons in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
IV, 578,1854. Luchipoga.— Campbell (1836) in H. R. 
Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. Luchipo- 
gatown.— Garrett (1837) in H. R. Doc. 452, 25th 
Cong., 2d sess., 58,1838. Lutchapoga. —Gatschet 
Creek Migr. Leg., I, 138, 1884. 

Lutchopoga. A township in the Creek 
Nation, on middle Arkansas r., Okla. 

Lutuamian Family. A linguistic family 
consisting of two branches, the Klamath 
and the Modoc (q. v.), residing in s. w. 
Oregon e. of the Cascade range and along 
the California border. Their former 
boundary extended from the Cascades to 
the headwaters of Pit and McCloud rs., 


BULL. 30] 


LUUPCH-McGILLIVRAY, ALEXANDER 779 


thence e. to Goose lake, thence n. to 
lat. 44°, and thence w. to the Cascades. 
The more permanent settlements of the 
family were on the shores of Klamath 
lakes, Tule lake, and Lost r., the remain¬ 
der of the territory which they claimed 
being hunting ground. In 1864 both 
divisions of the family entered into a 
treaty with the United States whereby 
they ceded the greater part of their lands 
to the Government and were placed on 
Klamath res. in Oregon. It was an at¬ 
tempt on the part of the Modoc to return 
to their former seat on the California 
frontier that brought about the Modoc 
war of 1872-73 (see Kintpuash). The cli¬ 
mate and productions of their country 
were most favorable, edible roots and 
berries were plentiful, and the region 
abounded in game and fish. As a conse¬ 
quence the tribes were fairly sedentary and 
seem to have made no extensive migra¬ 
tions. They were not particularly warlike, 
though the Modoc had frequent struggles 
with the tribes to the s., and after the 
coming of the whites resisted the aggres¬ 
sions of the latter with persistence and 
fierceness. 

Slavery seems to have been an insti¬ 
tution of long standing, and the Modoc, 
assisted by the Klamath, made annual 
raids on the Indians of Pit r. for the 
capture of slaves, whom they either re¬ 
tained for themselves or bartered with 
the Chinook of Columbia r. The habita¬ 
tions were formerly of logs, covered with 
mud and circular in shape, a type of 
building which is still occasionally seen 
on the reservation. The women were 
noted as expert basket weavers. No trace 
of a clan or gentile system has been dis¬ 
covered among them. The family organ¬ 
ization is a loose one and inheritance is in 
the male line. The language spoken by 
the two divisions of the Lutuamian family 
is ordinarily called Klamath, and while 
there are dialectic differences between the 
speech of the Klamath proper and the 
Modoc, they are so slight that they may 
be disregarded. The Lutuamian lan¬ 
guage is apparently entirely independent, 
though further study may disclose rela¬ 
tionship with the Shahaptian. (l. f. ) 
Clamets. —Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 218,569, 
1846 (alternative of Lutuami). Klamath.— Gat- 
schetin Mag. Am. Hist., 164,1877 (used for family). 
Lutnami. —Irving, Astoria, map, 1849. Lutuami. — 
Hale, op. cit., 199, 204. Lutuanis. —Domenech, 
Deserts of N. A., 1,442,1860. Lutumani. —Latham, 
Opuscula, 341,1860 (misprint). Luturim. —Gallatin 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 402,1853 (misprint). 
Matlaks. — Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., II, pt. I, 
xxxiii, 1890 (collective name for Klamath and Mo¬ 
doc). Sutuami. —Medill in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,30th 
Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1848 (misquoted from Hale). 
Tlamatl.— Hale, op. cit., 218, 569 (alternative of 
Lutuami). 

Luupch. A former Chumashan village 
in Ventura co., Cal.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, July 24, 1863. Cf. Lugups. 


Luuptc. —Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B.A.E., 1884. 

Lynx. See Peshkewah. 

Lytton band. One of 4 subdivisions of 
the Upper Thompson Indians, in the 
interior of British Columbia. In 1904 
they numbered 463, under the Kamloops- 
Okanagan agency. 

Lkamtci'nEmux.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., ii, 170,1900(‘peopleof Lkamtci'n [Lytton]’). 
Lytton band.— Ibid. NLak a'pamux.— Ibid, (gen¬ 
erally used for all the Ntlakyapamuk). N Lak- apa- 
mux’o'e. —Ibid, (the Nlak - a'pamux proper). 

Maak (‘loon’). A gens of the Pota- 
watomi (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 
1877. Cf. Mong. 

Maakoath (Maa'koath) . A sept of the 
Toquart, a Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890. 

Maam ( Ma'-am). Apparently a gentile 
organization among the Pima, belonging 
to the Suwuki-ohimal, or Red Ants, 
phratral group.—Russell, Pima MS., 
B. A. E., 313, 1903. 

Maamtagyila. A gens of the Kwakiutl, 
found in two septs, the Guetela and the 
Matilpe. 

Maa'mtagila. —Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 330, 
1897. Mataki'la. —Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 
131,1887. 

Maangreet ( Md-an'-greet, 1 big feet ’). A 
subclan of the Delawares (q. v.).—Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Maate ( Ma-ate ). A summer village of 
the Koskimo on the s. side of Quatsino 
sd., Vancouver id.—Dawson in Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 69. 

Maawi. The extinct Antelope clan of 
the Zuni of New Mexico. 

Maawi-kwe. —Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368, 
1896 {kwe—' people’). 

Macamo. A former Chumashan village 
on San Lucas id., Cal.; so named by Ca- 
brillo in 1542.—Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, 
Colec. Doc. Fla., 181, 1857. 

Macaque. See Mocuck. 

Macariz. A former Yamasi (?) town a 
mile n. of St Augustine, Fla., existing in 
1680 and with others destroyed by Col. 
Palmer in 1727. 

Macarisqui.— Fairbanks, Hist. Fla., 189,1858. Mas- 
carasi. —Barcia, Ensayo, 240, 1723. 

Maccarib. The old and original form 
from a cognate of which has been derived 
the Algonquian word caribou. Josselyn 
(N. Eng. Rar., 1672, 55, repr. 1865) wrote 
of “the Maccarib, Caribo, or Pohano, a 
kind of Deer, as big as a Stag. ’ ’ Maccarib 
corresponds to the Passamaquody mega¬ 
lip. See Caribou. (a. f. c.) 

Maccoa. The name of a chief and of a 
small tribe living on the s. coast of South 
Carolina, in the vicinity of St Helena id., 
where they were visited by Ribault in 
1562. They possibly belonged to the 
Cusabo group, long since extinct. 

Maccoa.— Laudonni^re (1562)in French, Hist. Coll. 
La.,n.s.,205, 1869. Maccou. —Ibid.,209. 

McGillivray, Alexander. A mixed-blood 
Creek chief who acquired considerable 
note during the latter half of the 18th cen- 


780 McGILLIVRAY 

tury by his ability and the affection in 
which he was held by his mother’s peo¬ 
ple. Capt. Marchand, in command of the 
French Ft Toulouse, Ala., in 1722, mar¬ 
ried a Creek woman of the strong Hutali 
or Wind clan, from which it was custom¬ 
ary to select the chief. One of the chil¬ 
dren of this marriage was Sehoy, cele¬ 
brated for her beauty. In 1735 Lachlan 
McGillivray, a Scotch youth of wealthy 
family, landed in Carolina, made his way 
to the Creek country, married Sehoy, and 
established his residence at Little Talasi, 
on the e. bank of Coosa r., above We- 
tumpka, Elmore co., Ala. After acquir¬ 
ing a fortune and rearing a family he 
abandoned the latter, and in 1782 re¬ 
turned to his native country. One of his 
children was Alexander, born about 1739; 
he was educated at Charleston under care 
of Farquhar McGillivray, a relative. At 
the age of 17 he was placed in a count- 
ting house in Savannah, but after a short 
time returned to his home, where his 
superior talents began to manifest them¬ 
selves, and he was soon at the head of 
the Creek tribe. Later his authority ex¬ 
tended also over the Seminole and the 
Chickamauga groups, enabling him, it is 
said, to muster 10,000 warriors. McGil¬ 
livray is first heard of in his new role as 
“ presiding at a grand national council at 
the town of Coweta, upon the Chatta- 
hoochie, where the adventurous Leclerc 
Milfort was introduced to him” (Pickett, 
Hist. Ala., 345, 1896). Through the ad¬ 
vances made by the British authorities, 
the influence of Col. Tait, who was sta¬ 
tioned on the Coosa, and the conferring 
on him of the title and pay of colonel, 
McGillivray heartily and actively es¬ 
poused the British cause during the Rev¬ 
olution. His father had left him prop¬ 
erty on the Savannah and in other parts 
of Georgia, which, in retaliation for his 
abandonment of the cause of the colonists, 
was confiscated by the Georgia authori¬ 
ties. This action greatly embittered him 
against the Americans and led to a long 
war against the western settlers, his at¬ 
tacks being directed for a time against 
the people of e. Tennessee and Cumber¬ 
land valley, whence he was successively 
beaten back by Gen. James Robertson.. 
The treaty of peace in 1783 left McGilli¬ 
vray without cause or party. Proposals 
from the Spanish authorities of Florida 
through his business partner, Wm. Pan¬ 
ton, another Scotch ad venturer and trader, 
induced him to visit Pensacola in 1784, 
where, as their “emperor,” he entered 
into an agreement with Spain in the name 
of the Creeks and the Seminoles. The 
United States made repeated overtures to 
McGillivray for peace, but he persist¬ 
ently refused to listen to them until in¬ 
vited to New York in 1790 for a personal 


ALEXANDER E». a. e. 

conference with Washington. His jour¬ 
ney from Little Talasi, through Guilford, 
Richmond, Fredericksburg, and Phila¬ 
delphia, was like a triumphal march, and 
the prospective occasion for such display 
was a strong inducement for the shrewd 
chief to accept the invitation. According 
to Pickett (p. 406) there was, in addition 
to the public treaty, a secret treaty be¬ 
tween McGillivray and Washington 
which provided “that after two years 
from date the commerce of the Creek 
nation should be carried on through the 
ports of the United States, and, in the 
meantime, through the present channels; 
that the* chiefs of the Okfuskees, Tooka- 
batchas Tallases, Cowetas, Cussetas, and 
the Seminole nation should be paid an¬ 
nually by the United States $100 each, 
and be furnished with handsome medals; 
that Alexander McGillivray should be 
constituted agent of the United States 
with the rank of brigadier-general and 
the pay of $1,200 per annum; that the 
United States should feed, clothe, and 
educate Creek youth at the North, not 
exceeding four at one time.” The pub¬ 
lic treaty was signed Aug. 7, 1790, and a 
week later McGillivray took the oath of 
allegiance to the United States. Never¬ 
theless he was not diverted from his im 
trigue with Spain, for shortly after taking 
the oath he was appointed by that power 
superintendent-general of the Creek na¬ 
tion with a salary of $2,000 a year, which 
was increased in 1792 to $3,500. 

The versatile character of McGillivray 
was perhaps due in part to the fact that 
there flowed in his veins the blood of 
four different nationalities. It has been 
said that he possessed “the polished 
urbanity of the Frenchman, the duplicity 
of the Spaniard, the cool sagacity of the 
Scotchman, and the subtlety and inveter¬ 
ate hate of the Indian.” Gen. James 
Robertson, who knew him well and 
despised the Spaniards, designated the lat¬ 
ter ‘ ‘ devils ’ ’ and pronounced McGillivray 
as the biggest devil among them—“half 
Spaniard, half Frenchman, half Scotch¬ 
man, and altogether Creek scoundrel.” 
That Alexander McGillivray was a man 
of remarkable ability is evident from the 
consummate skill with which he main¬ 
tained his control and influence over the 
Creeks, and from his success in keeping 
both the United States and Spain paying 
for his influence at the same time. In 1792 
he was at once the superintendent-general 
of the Creek nation on behalf of Spain, the 
agent of the United States, the mercantile 
partner of Panton, and “emperor” of 
the Creek and Seminole nations. As 
opulence was estimated in his day and * 
territory, he was a wealthy man, having 
received $100,000 for the property con¬ 
fiscated by the Georgia authorities, while 


BULL. 30] 


MACHAPUNGA-MACINTOSH, CHILLY 781 


the annual importations by him and Pan¬ 
ton were estimated in value at £40,000 
(Am. St. Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 458, 1832). 
Besides two or three plantations, he 
owned, at the time of his death, 60 ne¬ 
groes, 300 head of cattle, and a large stock 
of horses. In personal appearance 
McGillivray is described as having been 
six feet in height, sparely built, and re¬ 
markably erect; his forehead was bold 
and lofty; his fingers long and tapering, 
and he wielded a pen with the greatest 
rapidity; his face was handsome and 
indicative of thought and sagacity; un¬ 
less interested in conversation he was 
inclined to be taciturn, but was polite 
and respectful. While a British col¬ 
onel he dressed in the uniform of his 
rank; when in the Spanish service he 
wore the military garb of that country; 
and after Washington appointed him 
brigadier-general he sometimes donned 
the uniform of the American army, but 
never when Spaniards were present. His 
usual costume was a mixture of Indian 
and American garments. McGillivray 
always traveled with two servants, one a 
half-blood, the other a negro. Although 
ambitious, fond of display and power, 
crafty, unscrupulous in accomplishing his 
purpose, and treacherous in affairs of 
state, the charge that he was bloodthirsty 
and fiendish in disposition is not sus¬ 
tained. He had at least two wives, one 
of whom w r as a daughter of Joseph Cur- 
nell. Another wife, the mother of his 
son Alexander and two daughters, died 
shortly before or soon after her husband’s 
death, Feb. 17, 1793, at Pensacola, Fla. 
He was buried with Masonic honors in 
the garden of William Panton, his 
partner. (c. t.) 

Machapunga (‘ bad dust’; from matchi 
‘bad’, pungo ‘dust’ (Heckewelder), or 
perhaps ‘ much dust,’ from massa 1 great’, 
in allusion to the sandy soil of the dis¬ 
trict). An Algonquian tribe formerly liv¬ 
ing in Hyde co., n. e. N. C. In 1701 they 
numbered only about 30 warriors, or per¬ 
haps 100 souls, and lived in a single vil¬ 
lage called Mattamuskeet. They took 
part in the Tuscarora w r ar of 1711-12 and 
at its conclusion the remnant, together 
with the Coree, were settled on a tract on 
Mattamuskeet lake, where the two tribes 
occupied one village. (j. m.) 

Machapunga.— Lawson (1714), Hist. Car., 383, repr. 
1860. Matchapangos.—Martin, N. C., I, 263, 1829. 
Matchapongos.— Ibid., 260. Matchapungos—Ibid., 
244. Matchepungo. — Letter of 1713 in N. C. Col. 
Rec., II, 29,1886. 

Machapunga. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in Northampton co.,Va. It 
was nearly extinct in 1722. 

Matchapunko.—Hermann, map (1670), in Rep. on 
Line between Va. and Md., 1873. 

Machapunga. A village on Potomac r. 
about 1612. 

Matchopongo.—Strachey (ca. 1612), Va.,98, 1849. 


Macharienkonck. A Minisink village 
formerly in the bend of Delaware r., in 
Pike co., Pa., opposite Port Jervis.—Van 
der Donck (1656) quoted by Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 96,1872. 

Machawa. A former Timucua town in 
n.w. Florida, 24 m. e. of Ayavallafort, now 
Iola, on a river called Wicassa. 

Machaba.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., map, 1761. 
Machaha.— Ibid., map, 135. Machalla. —Roberts, 
Fla., 15,1763. Machua. —French, Hist. Coll. La.,2d 
s., 255, note, 1875. 

Machemni. A division of the Miwok 
who lived between Cosumnes and Moke- 
lumne rs., in Eldorado and Amador cos., 
Cal. 

Matchemnes.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 630, 
1846. Omatchamne. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450, 
1874. Omochumnies.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 
8,1860. Omutchamne.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450, 
1874. Omutchumnes. —Hale, op. cit. 

Machemoodus (properly Matche-md- 
dos£, ‘there is a bad noise.’—Trumbull). 
A tract on the e. bank of Connecticut r., 
now included in East Haddam tp., Mid¬ 
dlesex co., Conn., formerly the residence 
of a “ numerous tribe,” who were inde¬ 
pendent and famous for conjuring. The 
Indians sold the tract in 1662. For an 
account of the “Moodus noises” see 
Trumbull, Hist. Conn., ii, 91, 92, 1818; 
Barber, Hist. Coll., 525, 1839. (j. m.) 

Machamadoset. —Doc. of 1674 cited by Trumbull, 
Ind. Name! Conn., 18. 1881. Machamoodus. —Doc. 
of 1691, ibid. Mache Moodus. —Kendall, Travels, 
i, 100,1809. Machmadouset. —Doc. of 1671 cited by 
Trumbull, op. cit. Matche Moodus.— Kendall, op. 
Cit. Matchi Moodus. —Ibid. Matchit Moodus.— 
Doc. cited by Trumbull,, op. cit. 

Macheno. An ancient village, probably 
Timuquanan, in w. central Florida, lat. 
29° 3CK.— Bartram, Voy., i, map, 1799. 

Macheto. A former village of the Awani 
at the foot of Indian canyon, Yosemite 
valley, Mariposa co., Cal. 

Machay to.— Powers in Overland Mo., x, 333,1874. 
Ma-che'-to.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 
365, 1877. 

Machias (‘ bad little place,’ referring to 
the current in Machias r.; from matche 
‘bad’, sis the diminutive). A village of 
the Passamaquoddy on Machias r., Me. 
Mechias.—Treaty rep. (1726) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
HI, 390,1853. 

Machonee. An Ottawa village, com¬ 
monly called “ Machonee’s village,” from 
the name of the resident chief, formerly 
near the mouth of Au Yaseau r., which 
flows into L. St Clair, in lower Michigan, 
on land ceded to the United States by 
treaty of May 9, 1836. The chief, whose 
name is also spelled Machonee, Maconce, 
and Makonee, was drowned, while intoxi¬ 
cated, about the year 1825 (Mich. Pion. 
Coll., v, 464, 1884). (j.m.) 

Machonce’s village.— Detroit treaty (1807) in U. S. 
Ind. Treat., 194,1873 (misprint?). Machonee’s vil¬ 
lage.— Detroit treaty (1807) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. Aff., I, 747,1832. 

Macintosh, Chilly. A Creek chief. After 
his brother William was slain by Menewa 
for having betrayed theCreeks by “selling 
the graves of their ancestors,” he became 


782 


MACINTOSH, WILLIAM-MACKINAW 


[B. a. e. 


the head of the minority party that ac¬ 
quiesced in the proposed emigration to 
Indian Ter. As such he frequently 
visited Washington to treat with officials 
regarding the transfer of lands and ac¬ 
quitted himself as a capable man of busi¬ 
ness.—Stanley, Portraits Am. Inds., 13, 
1852. 

Macintosh, William. A mixed-blood 
Creek, son of a Scotch trader and an 
Indian woman. The United States, in 
consideration of the relinquishment by 
Georgia of the Mississippi territories, en¬ 
gaged in 1802 to extinguish the Indian 
titles to lands within the borders of the 
state as early as could be peaceably done 
on reasonable terms. A cession was pro¬ 
cured in 1805 by which millions of acres 
of Creek lands were transferred to Georgia. 
The people of the state constantly clam- 



WILLIAM MACINTOSH. (mcKENNEY AND Hall) 


ored for the fulfilment by the Govern¬ 
ment of its compact, and the Creeks, 
alarmed at the prospective wholesale 
alienation of their ancient domain, on 
the motion of Macintosh made a law 
in general council in 1811 forbidding the 
sale of any of the remaining land under 
penalty of death. Macintosh, who by 
his talents and address had risen to be 
chief of the Lower Creeks, led the Creek 
allies of the Americans in the war of 1812 
with the rank of major and took the chief 
part in the massacre of 200 of the hostile 
Creeks, who were surprised at Atasi on 
Nov. 29, 1813. He was prominent also 
in the final battle with the hostiles, Mar. 
27, 1814, when, at Horseshoe Bend, Ala., 
nearly a thousand warriors were exter¬ 
minated. A large part of the territory of 


the conquered tribe was confiscated and 
opened to white settlement. In 1818 more 
lands were acquired by treaty, and in 1821 
the fifth treaty was negotiated by Georgian 
citizens acting on behalf of the United 
States, with Macintosh, who was in the 
pay of the whites, and a dozen other 
chiefs controlled by him, while 36 chiefs 
present refused to sign and made clear to 
the commissioners the irregularity of a 
cession arranged with a party represent¬ 
ing only a tenth of the nation, which to 
be legal must have the consent of the 
entire nation assembled in council. After 
an attempt made by Macintosh to con¬ 
vey more land in 1823 the law punishing 
with death any Creek who offered to 
cede more land was reenacted in 1824, 
when 15,000,000 acres had already been 
transferred and 10,000,000 acres remained 
in possession of the Creeks, who had so 
advanced in education and agriculture 
that they valued their lands far more 
highly than before. In the beginning of 
1825 Georgian commissioners, working 
upon the avarice of Macintosh, induced 
him and his followers to set their names 
to a treaty ceding what remained of the 
Creek domain. Although Secretary John 
C. Calhoun had declared that he would 
not recognize a treaty in which the chiefs 
of the Creek nation did not acquiesce, 
President Monroe laid it before the Senate, 
and after the accession of President 
Adams it was approved. The Creeks did 
not rise in rebellion, as was expected, but, 
in accordance with the tribal law already 
mentioned, formal sentence of death was 
passed on Macintosh, and was executed 
on May 1, 1825, by a party of warriors 
sent for that purpose, who surrounded 
his house and shot him and a companion 
as they tried to escape. Macintosh was a 
signer of the treaties of Washington, Nov. 
4, 1805; Ft Jackson, Ala., Aug. 9, 1814; 
Creek Agency, Ga., Jan. 22, 1818; In¬ 
dian Springs, Ga., Jan. 8, 1821, and Feb. 
12,1825. (j. m.) 

Mackinaw. (1) A sort of bateau or large 
flatboat formerly much used by traders 
and others; also called Mackinaw boat. 
(2) A heavy blanket, also known as 
Mackinaw blanket, formerly an im¬ 
portant item of western trade. (3) A 
coarse straw hat. (4) A species of lake 
trout (Salvelinus namaycush), also termed 
Mackinac trout. The word which has 
assumed all these meanings is the place 
name Mackinac, applied to the famous 
trading post between L. Huron and 
L. Michigan. Mackinaw, representing 
the Canadian French Mackinac, is iden¬ 
tical with makindk, the word for ‘ turtle ’ 
in Chippewa and closely related dialects 
of Algonquian; said also to be a reduction 
of Michilimackinac (q. v.), a corruption 
of an earlier mitchi makinak, signifying 




BULL. 30] 


MACOCANICO-MA GIC 


783 


‘big turtle’ in Chippewa. According to 
Dr William Jones the Chippewa of Min¬ 
nesota claim the word to be a shortened 
form of mishlnlma klnunk, ‘place of the 
big wounded or big lame person.’ This, 
however, may be an instance of folk ety¬ 
mology. (a. f. c.) 

Macocanico (‘great house’). A village 
on the w. bank of Patuxent r., in St 
Marys co., Md., in 1608. 

Macocanaco.—Bozman, Maryland, i, 141, 1837. 
Maco comaco.—Tooker, Algonq. Series, vm, 49, 
1901 (misquoting Smith). Mococanico.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Macock gourd. See Maycock. 

Macocks (perhaps from mahcawq, 
‘pumpkin.’—Brinton. See Maycock). A 
village located on Smith’s map of 1608 
(Smith, Va., i, repr. 1819) some distance 
n. of Chikohoki, which, according to 
Brinton, was near the present Wilming¬ 
ton, Del. This would make Macocks a 
Delaware village in s. e. Pennsylvania, 
and Brinton thinks it may have been 
the village of the Okahoki (q. v.), a band 
of the Delawares, formerly in Delaware 
co., Pa. (j. m.) 

Macocqwer. See Maycock. 

Macombo. A Papago village, probably 
in Pima co., Ariz., with 57 people in 
1865.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865. 

Macousin. A Potawatomi village, 
named after the resident chief, on the w. 
bank of St Joseph r., Berrien co., s. w. 
Mich., in 1828. 

Macousin’s Village.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
Mich, map, 1899. Macousin Village.—U. S. Ind. 
Treat. (1828), 676, 1873. 

Macoyahui. A settlement in Sonora, 
Mexico, formerly one of the principal 
villages of the Mayo. In 1900 it con¬ 
tained 182 Mayo in a total population of 
972. 

McQueen’s Village. A former Seminole 
village on the e. side of Tampa bay, w. 
Fla.—Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 
306, 1822. 

Macsinum. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Mactati. A former Diegueno rancheria 
near San Diego, s. Cal. 

Mactati.—Ortega (1775) quoted by Bancroft, Hist. 
Cal., I, 254, 1884. Magtate.—Ibid. San Miguel.— 
Ibid. 

Madawehsoos ( Ma-da'-weh-soos , ‘porcu¬ 
pine’). A gens of the Abnaki (q. v.).— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. 

Madokawando. A Penobscot chief, born 
in Maine about 1630, and adopted as a 
son by Assaminasqua, a Kennebec chief. 
Ilis tribe was at peace with the English 
colonists until made their enemy by dep¬ 
redations upon his lands, when hostilities 
began, and, uniting with the French, war 
was waged against the English settle¬ 
ments. In 1691 he attacked York, Me., 
killed 77 of the inhabitants, and laid the 
place in ashes. This was but one of his 


many raids, in which he was generally 
aided by the French. His death occurred 
in 1698. It is stated that, although a de¬ 
termined foe, Madokawando’s treatment 
of prisoners was humane. The wife, or 
perhaps more correctly the principal 
wife, of the notorious Baron Castine, was 
a daughter of Madokawando. (c. t. ) 

Magaehnak. An ‘ ‘ Indian cornfield ’ ’ or 
settlement in 1678, 6 m. from Sudbury, 
Middlesex co., Mass., probably belong¬ 
ing to the Praying Indians of the Massa- 
chuset confederacy. Mentioned by Salis¬ 
bury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xm, 520, 1881. 

Magayuteshni (‘eats no geese ’). A band 
of the Mdewakanton Sioux. 

Grey-Iron. —Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858 
(trans. of Mazarota, the chief’s name). Ma-ga- 
yu-tesh-ni. Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., I, 263,1872. 
Maga-yute-sni.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 215, 
1897. Maxa-yute-cni.— Ibid. Ma-za-ro-ta.—Neill, 
Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858. 

Magdalena. A former Spanish mission 
among the Indians of Lower California; 
consolidated with the mission of San 
Ignacio Kadakaman and abandoned prior 
to 1740. Distinct from Santa Maria Mag¬ 
dalena in the n.—A lcedo, Die. Geog., iii, 
19, 1783; Taylor in Browne’s Res. Pac. 
Slope, app., 50,1869. 

Magemiut (‘ mink people ’). An Eskimo 
tribe in habiting the lake country of Alaska 
from C. Romanof almost to the Yukon. 
They differ from the Kuskwogmiut chiefly 
in dialect. They are vigorous and strong, 
finding in the waters of the tundra plenty 
of blackfish to nourish them at all sea¬ 
sons. In winter they kill many hair seal 
on the floes, on which they venture with 
their sleds, carrying canoes on which the 
sleds are transported in turn when it is 
necessary to take to the water. They 
build good houses of driftwood and the 
bones of whales killed by the whaling 
fleet, and the carcasses floating ashore 
have long supplied them with food. The 
tribe numbered 2,147 in 1890. The fol¬ 
lowing are Magemiut villages: Anovok, 
Chalit, Chifukluk, Gilak, Igiak, Kashu- 
nuk, Kipniak, Kweakpak, Nanvogalok- 
lak, Nunochok, Tefaknak, and Tiengak. 
Ikvagmutes. —Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d 
Cong., 1st sess., 28, 1871. Inkaliten. —Wrangell 
quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 18, 1877. 
Lower Kvichpaks. —Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 
42d Cong., 1st sess., 28, 1871. Magagmjuten.— 
Holmberg, Etlinog. Skizz., 5,1885. Magamutes.— 
Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 593, 1870. Mage- 
mutes.— Dali in Proc. A. A. A. S., 267, 1869. 
Magimut.— Wrangell quoted by Dali in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., I, 18, 1877. Magimiiten.— Wrangell, 
Ethnog. Nachr., 122, 1839. Magmiut.— Worman 
quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 18,1877. 
Magmjuten.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 5, 1855. 
Magmutes.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 291, 1874. 
Magmutis.— Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 
183, 1848. Mayimeuten.— Richardson, Arct. Ex- 
ped., 370, 1851 (from Wrangell). Nunivak peo¬ 
ple.— Worman quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., i, 18,1877. 

Magic. There are authentic accounts 
from various Qt>§erYSrs in many parts of. 


784 


MAGIO 


[B. A. E. 


the New World, from the earliest histor¬ 
ical period to the present time, that the 
Indians practised so-called magic arts, or 
sorcery. The earlier writers marveled 
at these arts, and evidently wished their 
readers to marvel. They often attributed 
the power of the Indians to Satan. Father 
Acosta, in the 16th century, spoke in awe 
of the Mexican magicians flying through 
the air, assuming any form they pleased 
and having telepathic knowledge of 
events occurring at distant places, and 
the same may be said in a general way 
of the Eskimo. The Rev. Peter Jones 
wrote in the first decade of the 19th cen¬ 
tury: “I have sometimes been inclined 



to think that, if witchcraft still exists in 
the world, it is to be found among the 
aborigines of America.” His personal 
experience was among the Chippewa. 
The Nipissing were called Jongleurs by 
the French on account of the expert¬ 
ness in magic of their medicine men. 
Some writers of the present day marvel 
as much as did their predecessors; but 
instead of attributing the phenomena to 
Satan, seek the cause in spirits or some¬ 
thing equally occult. The feats of Indian 
magicians, as a rule, may be easily ex¬ 
plained as sleight-of-hand tricks, and their 


prophecy and telepathy as the results of 
collusion. Their tricks are deceptions, 
very ingenious when it is considered how 
rude their tools and appliances are, but 
not to be compared with the acts of civ¬ 
ilized conjurers who make claim to no 
superhuman aid. 

Distinct from such tricks of illusion and 
deceit, there is evidence that the Indians 
were and still are versed in hypnotism, 
or, better, “suggestion.” Carver(1776- 
78) speaks of it among the Sioux, and 
J. E. Fletcher observed it among the 
Menominee about the middle of the last 
century. Mooney describes and pictures 
the condition among modern Indians 
(see Ghost dance). 

Sleight-of-hand was not only much em¬ 
ployed in the treatment of disease, but was 
used on many other occasions. A very 
common trick among Indian charlatans 
was to pretend to suck foreign bodies, such 
as stones, out of the persons of their pa¬ 
tients. Records of this are found among 
many tribes, from the lowest in culture to 
the highest, even among the Aztecs. Of 
course such trickery was not without some 
therapeutic efficacy, for it, like many 
other proceedings of the shamans, was 
designed to cure disease by influence on 
the imagination. A Hidatsa residing in 
Dakota in 1865 was known by the name 
Cherry-in-the-mouth because he had a 
trick of producing from his mouth, at any 
season, what seemed to be fresh wild cher¬ 
ries. He had found some way of preserv¬ 
ing cherries, perhaps in whisky, and it was 
easy for him to hide them in his mouth 
before intending to play the trick; but 
many of the Indians considered it won¬ 
derful magic. 

The most astonishing tricks of the In¬ 
dians were displayed in their fire cere¬ 
monies and in handling hot substances, 
accounts of which performances pertain 
t6 various tribes. It is said that Chip¬ 
pewa sorcerers could handle with impu¬ 
nity red-hot stones and burning brands, 
and could bathe the hands in boiling water 
orsyrup; such magicians were called “fire- 
dealers” and “fire-handlers.” There 
are authentic accounts from various parts 
of the world of fire-dancers and fire-walks 
among barbarous races, and extraordinary 
fire acts are performed also among widely 
separated Indian tribes. Among the An¬ 
kara of what is now North Dakota, in the 
autumn of 1865, when a large fire in the 
center of the medicine lodge had died 
down until it became a bed of glowing 
embers, and the light in the lodge was dim, 
the performers ran with apparently bare 
feet among the hot coals and threw these 
around in the lodge with their bare hands, 
causing the spectators to flee. Among 
the Navaho performers, naked except for 
breechcloth and moccasins, and having 




BULL. 30] 


MAGNUS-MAGUIAQUI 


785 


their bodies daubed with a white infu¬ 
sorial clay, run at high speed around a 
fire, holding in their hands great fagots of 
flaming cedar bark which they apply to 
the bare backs of those in front of them 
and to their own persons. Their wild 
race around the fire is continued until the 
fagots are nearly all consumed, but they 
are never injured by the flame. This 
immunity may be accounted fbr by sup¬ 
posing that the cedar bark does not make 
a very hot fire, and that the clay coating 
protects the body. Menominee shamans 
are said to handle fire, as also are the 
female sorcerers of Honduras. 

Indians know well how to handle ven¬ 
omous serpents with impunity. If they 
can not avoid being bitten, as they usu¬ 
ally can, they seem to be able to* avert 
the fatal consequences of the bite. The 
wonderful acts performed in the Snake 
dance (q. v.) of the Hopi have often been 
described. 

A trick of Navaho dancers, in the cere¬ 
mony of the Mountain chant, is to pre¬ 
tend to thrust an arrow far down the 
throat. In this feat an arrow with a tele¬ 
scopic shaft is used; the point is held be¬ 
tween the teeth; the hollow part of the 
handle, covered with plumes, is forced 
down toward the lips, and thus the arrow 
appears to be swallowed. There is an 
account of an arrow of similar construc¬ 
tion used early in the 18th century by 
Indians of Canada who pretended a man 
was wounded by it and healed instantly. 
The Navaho also pretend to swallow 
sticks, which their neighbors of the 
pueblo of Zuni actually do in sacred rites, 
occasionally rupturing the esophagus in 
the ordeal of forcing a stick into the stom¬ 
ach. Special societies which practise mag¬ 
ic, having for th eir chief object rain making 
and the cure of disease, exist among the 
southwestern tribes. Swallowing sticks, 
arrows, etc., eating and walking on fire, 
and trampling on cactus are performed 
by members of the same fraternity. 

Magicians are usually men; but among 
the aborigines of the Mosquito coast in 
Central America they are often women, 
who are called suJcias , and are said to ex¬ 
ercise great power. According to Hewitt 
Iroquois women are reported tradition¬ 
ally to have been magicians. 

A trick of the juggler among many 
tribes of the n. was to cause himself to 
be bound hand and foot and then, with¬ 
out visible assistance or effort on his part, 
to release himself from the bonds. Civ¬ 
ilized conjurers who perform a similar 
trick are hidden in a cabinet and claim 
supernatural aid; but some Indian jug¬ 
glers performed this feat under observa¬ 
tion. It was common for Indian magi¬ 
cians to pretend they could bring rain, 
but the trick consisted simply of keeping 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-50 


up ceremonies until rain fell, the last cere¬ 
mony being the one credited with suc¬ 
cess. Catlin describes this among the 
Mandan in 1832, and the practice is still 
common among the Pueblo tribes of the 
arid region. The rain maker was a spe¬ 
cial functionary among the Menominee. 

To cause a large plant to grow to ma¬ 
turity in a few moments and out of season 
is another Indian trick. The Navaho 
plant the root stalk of a yucca in the 
ground in the middle of winter and appar¬ 
ently cause it to grow, blossom, and bear 
fruit in a few moments. This is done by 
the use of artificial flowers and fruit car¬ 
ried under the blankets of the perform¬ 
ers; the dimness of the firelight and the 
motion of the surrounding dancers hide 
from the spectators the operations of the 
shaman when he exchanges one artificial 
object for another. In this way the Hopi 
grow beans, and the Zuni corn, the latter 
using a large cooking pot to cover the 
growing plant. See Dramatic representa¬ 
tion , Medicine and Medicine-men , Orenda. 

Consult the works of H. H. Bancroft, 
Carver, Catlin, Fewkes, Fletcher, Hoff¬ 
man, Peter Jones, Lummis, Matthews, 
Mooney, M. C. Stevenson, and others, in 
the Bibliography. (w. m. ) 

Magnus. A woman chief of the Nar- 
raganset, sister of Ninigret, one of the six 
sachems of their country in 1675 (Drake, 
Abor. Races, 248,1880). She was killed 
by the English after her capture in a 
swamp fight near Warwick, R. I., in 1676. 
She was also known as Matantuck, of 
which Magnus is probably a corruption, 
andasQuaiapen,01d Queen, etc. Her hus¬ 
band was a son of Canonicus. ( a. f. c. ) 
Magtok. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 

Maguaga. A Huron village on Ma- 
guagacr., Mich., 14 m. s. w. of Detroit, on 
a tract reserved for the use of the Indians 
by act of Feb. 28, 1809, and ceded to the 
United States by treaty of St Marys, O., 
Sept. 20, 1818. 

Magaugo.— Drake, Bk. Inds., v, 125, 1848. Ma¬ 
guaga.— Brown, W. Gaz., 164, 1§17. Maguago.— 
Drake, Ind.Chron., 196, 1836. Maguagua.— Royce 
in 18th Rep. B.A.E., Mich, map, 1899. Maguawgo.— 
Doc. of 1809 in Am. St. Pap., Ind.Aff., I, 796,1832. 
Maugaugon.— Miami Rapids treaty (1819) in U. S. 
Ind. Treaties, 201, 1873. Menquagon.— Wyandot 

S etition (1812) in Am. State Papers, op. cit., 795. 
tonguagon. —Howe, Hist.Coll.,262,1851. 

Maguhleloo (‘ caribou ’). A gens of the 
Abnaki, q. v. 

Magalibo.— J. D. Prince, inf’n, 1905 (modern St 
Francis Abnaki form). Ma-guh-le-loo'.— Morgan, 
Anc.Soc., 174,1877. 

Maguiaqui. A division of the Yarohio, 
in s. Sonora, Mexico, on the w. bank of 
Rio Mayo, n. of Alamos, lat. 27° 25', Ion. 
109° 2(K. They occupied a village of the 
same name, and some of them lived with 
the Chinipas at San Andres Chinipas.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58,324,1864. 


786 


M AGUINA-M AHIC AN 


[b. a. e. 


Maguina. A pueblo in w. Chihuahua, 
Mexico, probably between lat. 28° and 
29°. As it is on the border land of the 
Nevome and Tarahumare and not far from 
the main habitat of the Tepehuane, it 
doubtless contains or contained a mixed 
population. The village has therefore 
been assigned by various writers to one or 
another of those tribes. Orozco y Berra’s 
map includes the village in Nevome 
country. 

San Juan B[autista]. Maguina. —Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 324,1864. 

Magunkaquog (originally Magwonkko- 
muk , ‘ place of the gift,’ or ‘granted place’ 
(Eliot), possibly afterward changed by 
the Indians to the present form, meaning 
‘ place of great trees. ’—Trumbull). A vil¬ 
lage of Christian Indians in Nipmuc terri¬ 
tory, at Hopkinton,Middlesex co., Mass., 
in 1674. On the name, see Trumbull and 
Tooker, cited below. Cf. Mangunckakuck. 

Magoncog.— Livingston (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., XIII, 528,1881. Magooonkkomuk. —Eliot(1669) 
quoted by Tooker, Algonq. Ser., x, 26,1901. Ma- 
guncog.— Rawson (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiii, 521, 1881. Magunkahquog. —Trumbull, Ind. 
Names Conn., 18, 1881. Magunkakook. —Tooker, 
Algonq. Ser., x, 27, 1901. Magunkaquog. —Goo- 
kin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., i, 188, 
1806. Magunkoag. —Gookin (1677) in Trans. Am. 
Antiq. Soc., II, 443, 1836. Magunkog. —Ibid., 470. 
Majunkaquog.— Eliot quoted by Tooker, Algonq. 
Ser., X, 25, 1901. Makunkokoag.— Gookin (1677) in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 435, 1836. Mogkun- 
kakauke. —Tooker, op. cit., 27. Moogunkawg. — 
Stone (1767) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 82, 
1809. 

Magwa ( Ma-gwa ‘loon’). A gens of 
the Shawnee (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168,1877. 

Maha (‘caterpillar ’). Given by Bourke 
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, n, 181, 1889) as a 
clan of the Mohave, q. v. 

Mahackemo. The principal chief of a 
small band on Norwalk r., s. w. Conn., 
which sold lands in 1640 and 1641. See 
Norwalk. 

Mahackemo.— De Forest, Inds. of Conn., 177, 1851. 
Mahackeno.— De Forest as quoted by Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 82,1872. 

Mahahal. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage on San Cayetano ranch, Ventura co., 
Cal.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Mahala mats. A California name of 
Ceanothus prostratus , also known as 
squaw’s carpet. Mahala , more often mo- 
hale, is often used as synonymous with 
“squaw” in California by the whites. 
If not from Spanish mujer, ‘woman,’ it 
is from Yokuts muk’ela, having the same 
meaning. (a. f. c. a. l. k.) 

Maharolukti ( Ma-har-o-luk'-ti, ‘ brave ’). 
A subclan of the Delawares (q. v.).—Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Mahaskahod. A hunting village of the 
Manahoac in 1608, on Rappahannock r., 
Va., at the limit of the Powhatan con¬ 
federacy, probably near Fredericksburg. 
Mahaskahod.—Smith (1629), Va., I, map, repr. 
1819. Mohaskahod.— Simons in Smith, ibid., 186. 

Mahcoah. The principal village of the 


Toquart(q.v.) on Village passage, Barclay 
sd., w. coast of Vancouver id.—Can. Ind. 
Aff., 263, 1902. 

Mahewala. A village formerly on the 
lower Mississippi, destroyed about the 
close of 1681 or early in 1682; perhaps 
a settlement of the Tangibao, q. v. 

Mahehoualaima.—La Salle (1682) in Margry, D6c., 
11,198,1877. Maheouala.—Ibid., 190. Maheoula — 
La Metairie (1682) quoted by French, Hist. Coll. 
La., II, 23, 1875. 

Mahican (‘wolf ’). AnAlgonquian tribe 
that occupied both banks of upper Hud¬ 
son r., in New York, extending n. almost 
to L. Champlain. To the Dutch they were 
known as River Indians, while the French 
grouped them and the closely connected 
Munsee and Delawares under the name 
of Loups (‘wolves’). The same tribes 
were called Akochakanen (‘ stammerers ’) 
by the Iroquois. On the w. bank they 
joined the Munsee at Catskill cr., and on 
the e. bank they joined the Wappinger 
near Poughkeepsie. They extended e. 
into Massachusetts and held the upper 
part of Housatonic valley. Their council 
fire was at Schodac, on an island near 
Albany, and it is probable that they had 
40 villages within their territory. The 
name, in a variety of forms, has been ap¬ 
plied to all the Indians from Hudson r. to 
Narragansett bay, but in practical use has 
been limited to two bodies, one on lower 
Connecticut r., Conn., known dialectically 
as Mohegan (q. v.), the other, on Hud¬ 
son r., known as Mahican. They were 
engaged in a war with the Mohawk, their 
nearest neighbors on the w., when the 
Dutch appeared on the scene, which 
lasted until 1673. In 1664 the inroads of 
the Mohawk compelled them to remove 
their council fire from Schodac to West- 
enhuck, the modern Stockbridge, Mass. 
As the settlements crowded upon them 
the Mahican sold their territory piece¬ 
meal, and about 1730 a large body of 
them emigrated to Susquehanna r. and 
settled near Wyoming, Pa., in the vicin¬ 
ity of the Delawares and Munsee, with 
whom they afterward removed to the 
Ohio region, finally losing their identity. 
A previous emigration had formed the 
main body of the mixed tribe of the 
Scaticook. As early as 1721 a band of 
Mahican found their way to Indiana, 
where they had a village on Kankakee r. 
In 1736 those living in Housatonic val¬ 
ley were gathered into a mission at Stock- 
bridge, Mass., where they maintained a 
separate existence under the name of 
Stockbridge Indians. These are the only 
Mahican who have preserved their iden¬ 
tity. Tn 1756 a large body of Mahican 
and Wappinger removed from the Hud¬ 
son to the e. branch of the Susquehanna, 
settling, with the Nanticoke and others, 
under Iroquois protection at Chenango, 
Chugnut, and Owego, in Broome and Ti- 


BULL. 30] 


MAHICAN 


787 


ogacos., N.Y. They probably later found 
their way to their kindred in the W. A 
few Mahican remained about their ancient 
homes on the Hudson for some years af¬ 
ter the Revolution, but finally disap¬ 
peared unnoticed. If any remain they 
are included among the Stockbridge. 

According to Ruttenber the Mahican 
confederacy comprised at least 5 divisions 
or subtribes—the Mahican proper, Wie- 
kagjoc, Mechkentowoon,AVawyachtonoc, 
and Westenhuck (Stockbridges). It is 
impossible to estimate their population, 
as the different bands were always con¬ 
founded or included with neighboring 
tribes, of whom they afterward became 
an integral part. 

According to Ruttenber’s account the 
government of the Mahican was a democ¬ 
racy, but his statement that the office of 
chief sachem was hereditary by the line¬ 
age of the wife of the sachem, which ap¬ 
pears to be correct, does not indicate a 
real democracy. His statement in regard 
to the duties of the sachem and other offi¬ 
cers is as follows: “The sachem was as¬ 
sisted by counselors, and also by one hero, 
one owl, and one runner; the rest of the 
nation were called young men or war¬ 
riors. The sachem, or more properly 
king, remained at all times with his tribe 
and consulted their welfare; he had 
charge of the mnoti, or bag of peace, 
which contained the belts and strings 
used to establish peace and friendship 
with different nations, and concluded all 
treaties on behalf of his people. The 
counselors were elected, and were called 
chiefs. Their business was to consult 
with their sachem in promoting the peace 
and happiness of their people. The title 
of hero was gotten only by courage and 
prudence in war. When a war-alliance 
was asked, or cause for war existed with 
another tribe, the sachem and the coun¬ 
selors consulted, and if they concluded to 
take up the hatchet, the matter was put 
in the hands of the heroes for execution. 
When peace was proposed, the heroes put 
the negotiations in the hands of the sa¬ 
chem and counselors. The office of owl 
was also one of merit. He must have a 
strong memory, and must be a good 
speaker. His business was to sit beside 
his sachem, and proclaim his orders to 
the people with a loud voice; and also to 
get up every morning as soon as day¬ 
light and arouse the people, and order 
them to their daily duties. The business 
of runner was to carry messages, and to 
convene councils. ’ ’ 

The Mahican were generally well built. 
As fighting men they were perfidious, ac¬ 
complishing their designs by treachery, 
using stratagem to deceive their enemies, 
and making their most hazardous attacks 
under cover of darkness. The women 


ornamented themselves more than the 
men. “All wear around the waist a 
girdle made of the fin of the whale or of 
sewant.” The men originally wore a 
breechcloth made of skins, but after the 
Dutch came those who could obtain it 
wore “between their legs a lap of duffels 
cloth half an ell broad and nine quarters 
long,” which they girded around their 
waists and drew up in a fold “with a 
flap of each end hanging down in front 
and rear. ’ ’ In addition to this they had 
mantles of feathers, and at a later period 
decked themselves with “plaid duffels 
cloth” in the form of a sash, which was 
worn over the right shoulder, drawn in 
a knot around the body, with the ends 
extending down below the knees. When 
the young men wished to look especially 
attractive they wore “a band about their 
heads, manufactured and braided, of 
scarlet deer hair, interwoven with soft 
shining red hair.” According to Van der 
Donck, the women wore a cloth around 
their bodies fastened by a girdle which 
extended below the knees, but next to 
the body, under this coat, they used a 
dressed deerskin coat, girt around the 
waist. The lower body of this skirt they 
ornamented with strips tastefully deco¬ 
rated with wampum which was fre¬ 
quently worth from 100 to 300 guilders 
($40 to $120). They bound their hair 
behind in a club, about a hand long, in 
the form of a beaver’s tail, over which 
they drew a square wampum-ornamented 
cap; and when they desired to be fine 
they drew around the forehead a band 
also ornamented with wampum, which 
was fastened behind in a knot. Around 
their necks they hung various ornaments; 
they also wore bracelets, curiously wrought 
and interwoven with wampum. Polyg¬ 
amy was practised to some extent, though 
mostly by chiefs. Maidens were allowed 
to signify their desire to enter matrimo¬ 
nial life, upon which a marriage would be 
formally arranged; widows and widowers 
were left to their own inclinations. In 
addition to the usual manifestations of 
grief at the death of a relative or friend, 
they cut off their hair and burned it on the 
grave. Their dead, according to Rutten¬ 
ber, were usually interred in a sitting 
posture. It was usual to place by the 
side of the body a pot, kettle, platter, 
spoon, and provisions; wood was then 
placed around the body, and the whole 
was covered with earth and stones, out¬ 
side of which pickets were erected, so 
that the tomb resembled a little house. 
Their houses were of the communal sort 
and differed usually only in length; they 
were formed by long, slender, hickory sap¬ 
lings set in the ground in a straight line 
in two rows. The poles were then bent 
toward each other in the form of an arch 


788 


MAHICAN 


[b. a. e. 


and secured together, giving the appear¬ 
ance of a garden arbor; the sides and roof 
were then lathed with split poles, and 
over this bark was lapped and fastened 
by withes to the lathing. A smoke-hole 
was left in the roof, and a single door¬ 
way was provided. These houses rarely 
exceeded 20 ft in width, but they were 
sometimes 180 ft long. Their so-called 
castles were strong, firm structures, and 
were situated usually on a steep, high, 
flat-topped hill, near a stream. The top 
of the hill was inclosed with a strong 
stockade, having large logs for a founda¬ 
tion, on both sides of which oak posts, 
forming a palisade, were set in the 
ground, the upper ends being crossed 
and joined together. Inside the walls of 
such inclosures they not infrequently had 
20 or 30 houses. Besides their strong¬ 
holds they had villages and towns which 
were inclosed or stockaded and which 
usually had woodland on one side and 
corn land on the other. Their religious 
beliefs were substantially the same as 
those of the New England Indians. 

Barton gives the Mahican 3 clans: 
Mucliquauh (bear), Mechchaooh (wolf), 
Toonpaooh (turtle). According to Mor¬ 
gan they had originally the same clans 
as the Delawares and Munsee—the Wolf, 
Turtle, and Turkey; but these ultimately 
developed into pliratries, subdivided into 
clans as follows: The Tooksetuk (wolf) 
pliratry into the Nehjao (wolf), Makwa 
(bear), Ndeyao (dog), and Wapakwe 
(opossum) clans; the Tonebao (turtle) 
phratry into the Gakpomute (little tur¬ 
tle), —-(mud turtle), Tonebao (great 

turtle), and Wesawmaun (yellow eel) 

clans; -, the Turkey phratry into 

the Naahmao (turkey), Galiko (crane), 
and-(chicken) clans. 

The villages of the Mahican, so far as 
their names have been recorded, were 
Aepjin, Kaunaumeek (Stockbridge), Ma- 
ringoman’s Castle, Monemius, Potic, 
Scaticook (3 villages in Dutchess and 
Rensselaer cos., N. Y., and Litchfield co., 
Conn.), Schodac, Wiatiac, Wiltmeet, 
Winooskeek, and Wyantenuc. 

(j. m. c. T.) 

Agotsaganes.— Clark quoted by Brinton, Lenape 
Leg., 255, 1885 (‘stutterers,’ ‘those who speak a 
strange tongue’: Mohawk name). Agotsagen- 
ens.— Jogues ( ca. 1640) quoted by Shea, Miss. 
Val., 165, 1852. Agozhagauta. —Ettwein (1848) 
quoted by Brinton, op. cit., 14. Akochakanen’.— 
Hewitt, inf’n, 1906 (Iroquois name). Aquatsa- 
gane. —Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Aquatza- 
gane. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 532, 1853. 
Atsayongky. —De Laet (1633) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., 1,315,1841. Canoe Indians —Gale, Upper 
Miss., 169,1867 (so called by whites). Hikanagi.— 
Gatschet, Shawnee MS., B. A. E. (Shawnee name). 
‘Loo’s.— Coffen (1754) in N Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,vi,836, 
1855. Loups. —French doc. of 1665, ibid., ix, 38, 
1855. Machicans.— Hendricksen (1616), ibid., I, 
14, 1856. Machingans. —Jefferys, French Dorns., 
pt. 1, 136, 1761. Mahakanders.— Markham (1691) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 809, 1853. Maha- 
kans.— Hazard, Coll. Am. State Papers, 1 ,520,1792. 


Mahckanders.—Dongan (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Co]. 
Hist., 111,439,1853 (misprint). Mahegan.—Vaillant 
(1688), ibid., 521. Maheingans.—Iberville (1699) in 
Margry, D6c., iv, 342,1880. Mahekanders.—Living¬ 
ston (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 481, 1853. 
Mahhekaneew.—Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 268, 1816. 
Mahicanders.—Doc. of 1646 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
1,184,1856. Mahicanni.—Barton,New Views, xxxi, 
1797. Mahicans.—Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., 1,1856. Mahiccanni.—Heckewelder quoted 
by Thompson, Long. Id., I, 76, 1843. Mahiccans.— 
Barton, New Views, xxxix, 1797. Mahiccon.— 
Thomson (ca. 1785) quoted by Barton, ibid., 
xxxii. Mahicon.—Barton, ibid., xi, 1798. Mahi- 
gan.—Vaillant (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 
522, 1853. Mahiganathicoit.—Champlain (1619), 
Voy., II, 142, 1830. Mahiganaticois.—Champlain 
(1627), CEuvres, v, pt. 2, 135, 1870. Mahigan- 
Aticois.—Ibid., 209. Mahigane.—La Salle (1681) in 
Margry, D6c.,. II, 148, 1877. Mahiggins.—Clobery 
(1633) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 78, 1856. M&- 
hik'.—Hewitt, inf’n, 1886 (Tuscarora name). 
Mahikan.—Doc. of 1644 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 
151, 1856. Mahikanders.—Doc. of 1651, ibid., 542. 
Mahikkanders.—Romer (1700), ibid., iv, 799, 1854. 
Mahillendras.—Dongan (1688), ibid., ill, 533, 1853 
(misprint?). Mahinganak.—Jes. Rel. for 1646. 3, 
1858. Mahinganiois.—Jes. Rel. for 1652,26,1858. Ma- 
hingans.—Jes. Rel. for 1646, 3,1858. Mahingaus.— 
Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 39, 1851 (misprint). 
Mahycander.— Doc. of 1660 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., XIII, 165,1881. Maicanders.—Doc. (ca. 1643), 
ibid., i, 196, 1856. Maikans.—Wassenaar (ca. 
1626) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 58, 
1872. Maikens.—Wassenaar (1632) quoted by Rut¬ 
tenber, ibid. Makicander.—Nicolls (1678) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., XIII, 516, 1881. Makihander.— 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 99, 1816. Maki- 
manes.—Mapof 1616 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 1,1856. 
Makingans.—Jefferys, French Doms., pt. I, 11, 
1761. Malukander.—Glen (1699) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., iv, 558, 1854 (misprint). Manhikani.— 
De Laet (1633) quoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, 
sec. 3, 390, 1816. Manhikans.—Vater, ibid. Man- 
hingans.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 57, 1872. 
Manikans.—De Laet (ca. 1633) quoted by Jones, 
Ind. Bull., 6, 1867. Mankikani.—De Laet quoted 
by Barton, New Views, xxxi, 1797. Mauraigans.— 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, in, 126,1753. Mauray- 
gans.—Writer of 1691 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 

513.1855. Mayekanders.— DeVries (1655)quoted by 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 105, 1872. Maygana- 
thicoise.— Champlain (ca. 1619) in Shea, Miss. 
Val., 165,1852. Maykanders.— Doc. of 1650 in N.Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., I, 412, 1856. Mehihammers.— New 
York conf. (1753), ibid., vi, 782, 1855. Mhfkana. — 
Gatschet, Shawnee MS., B. A. E., 1880 (Shawnee 
form). Miheconders.— Canajoharie conf. (1759) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 393, 1856. Mihicanders.— 
FtJohnsonconf.(1756),ibid.,50. Moheakanneews— 
Morse, Mod. Geog., I, 54, 1814. Moheakenunks.— 
Clark, Onondaga, I, 18, 1849. Moheakounuck.— 
Doc. of 1774 quoted by Ruttenber. Tribes Hudson 
R., 269, 1872. Moheakunnuks. —Morse, Rep. to 
Sec. War., 76, 1822. Mohecan.— Dawson in Drake, 
Bk. Inds., v, 77,1848. Moheckons.— Peters (1761) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 440,1871. Mohe- 
connock.— Doc. of 1791 quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, v, 668, 1855. Mo-heegan.— Stiles (1756) 
quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg., 35,1885. Mohe- 
kin.— Letter of 1771 quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes 
Hudson R., 194, 1872. Mo-he-kun-e-uk.— Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 113, 1877. Mo-he'-kun-ne-uk— Morgan, 
Consang.and Affin.,289,1870. Mohekunnuks.— Mor¬ 
gan, League Iroq.,45,1851. Mohekunuh.— Belknap 
and Morse in Mass.Hist. Soc.Coll., lsts., v, 12,1816. 
Mohicander.— Johnson (ca. 1756) quoted by Rut¬ 
tenber, Tribes Hudson R., 231,1872. Mohicands.— 
Lovelace (1669) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 439, 
1881. Mohican™.— Doc. of 1676, ibid., XIV, 718,1883. 
Mohicans — Michaelius (1628), ibid., ii, 769, 1858. 
Mohiccons— Hutchins (1768) quoted by Jefferson, 
Notes, 142, 1825. Mohickan.— Doc. of 1.755 quoted 
by Rupp, Northampton Co., 88, 1845. Mohickan- 
ders— Johnson (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 

136.1856. Mohicken —Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 4ths., ix, 378, 1871. Mohickons. —Weiser 
(1748) quoted by Rupp, West. Penn., app., 16, 
1846. Mohigon.— Yong (1634) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 





BULL. 30] 


MAHKTOSIS 


MAICOBA 


789 


Coll., 4th s., ix, 129, 1871. Mohikan. —Bouquet 
(1761), ibid., 431. Mohikander.— Ft Johnson 
conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 152, 
1856. Mohikonders.— Johnson (1756), ibid., 118. 
Mohikons.— Hutchins map in Smith, Bouquet’s 
Exped., 1766. Mohingans.— McKenney and Hall, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 79,1854. Mohingaus. —Ibid. Mo- 
hocanders.— Salisbury (1678)inN.Y. Doc.Col. Hist., 
xiii,520,1881. Mohogans. —Owaneco’sRep.(1700), 
ibid., iv, 614,1854. Mohokanders. —Deed quoted by 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 88, 1872. Mohuc- 
cons.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. Mo- 
huccories.— I bid. Morahicanders.— Louwrensen 
(1658) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 90,1881. Morai- 
gane.—La Sa.le (1681) in Margry, D6c., ii, 148,1877. 
Moraiguns.— Doc. of 1759 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
982,1858. Moraingans.— Vaudreuil (1757), ibid., 
579. Morargans.— Vaudreuil (1760), ibid., 1091. 
Mourigan.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 99, 1816. 
Muckhekanies. —Ibid., 127. Muhekannew.— Vater, 
Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 391, 1816. Muhheakunneuw. — 
Holmes (1804) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., ix, 
100,1804. Muhheakunnuk. —Ibid. Muhheconnuck. — 
Pickering (1791) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., 1 ,169, 
1832. Muhheeckanew. —Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson 
R., 41, 1872. Muh-hee-kun-eew.— Stockbridge let¬ 
ter, H. R. Misc. Doc. 69,32d Cong., 1st sess., 1, 1852. 
Muhhekaneew.— Ed wards (1788) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., X, 84, 1823. Muhhekaneok.— Ibid. (pi. 
of Muhhekaneew). Muhhekanew. —Edwards 
(1801) quoted by Kendall, Trav., n, 305, 1809. 
Muhhekaniew. —Schoolcraft quoted by Rutten¬ 
ber, Tribes Hudson R., 51,1872. Muhhekanneuk.— 
Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 27,1885. Muhhekanok.— 
Hopkins quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson 
R., 320, 1872. Muhhekenow. —Clinton quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Trav., 29, 1821. Muhhekunneau.— 
Daggett (1821) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 
s., ix, xli, 1822. Muhhekunneyuk.— Holmes 
(1804), ibid., 1st s., ix, 100, 1804 (plural). Muhke- 
kaneew. —Drake, Bk. Inds., II, 87, 1848. Mukick- 
ans. —Weiser (1748) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 605, 1854. Mukkekaneaw. —Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 99, 1816. Nhikana. —Gatschet, 
Shawnee MS., B. A. E., 1880 (Shawnee name). 
Orunges. —Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, III, 554,1853. Ouiagies. —McKen¬ 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79,1854. Ourages. — 
Macauley, N. Y., II, 162, 1829. Ouragies. —Colden 
(1727), Five Nations, 95,1747. Poh-he-gan.— Stiles 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 76, 1804. 
River Indians. —Early Dutch name. Tumewand.— 
Rafinesque, Am. Nations, 1,138,1836. Uragees. — 
Colden (1727), Five Nations, 102,1747. 

Mahktosis. The principal village of the 
Ahousaht (q. v.), on Matilda cr., Clayo- 
quot sd., w. coast of, Vancouver id.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., 264, 1902. 

Mahoa. Probably the same as Maxua, 
the chief of the Maamtagyila, a Kwakiutl 
gens, but applied by Galiano (Relacion, 
103, 1802), in the Spanish form Majoa, 
to his village or to the gens itself. 

Mahohivas ( Mdliohlvds , ‘red shield’). 
A warrior society of the Cheyenne (q. v.); 
also sometimes known as Hotoa-niitqiu, 
‘Buffalo-bull warriors.’ (j. m.) 

Red Shield.— Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. Pub., 
no. 99, 15, 1905. 

Mahoning (‘at the salt-lick.’— II ecke- 
welder). A Delaware village in 1764 on 
the w. bank of Mahoning r., perhaps 
between Warren and Youngstown, Trum¬ 
bull co., Ohio. . (J. m.) 

Mahoning. —Hutchins’ map (1764) in Smith, Bou¬ 
quet’s Exped., 1766. Mahonink.— Heckewelder in 
Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., n. s., iv, 365,1834 (correct 
form). Mahony Town. —Ibid., 390. 

Mahow. AChumashan village placed by 
Taylor at Jose Carrillo’s rancho, Ventura 
co., Cal. Perhaps the site was the Las 


Posas rancho, as stated by Ventura Indi¬ 
ans in 1884. 

Ma-hau.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884 (name from Indian in 1884). Ma¬ 
how.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,1860 (name 
from 1856). 

Mahoyum ( Md-ho-yum, ‘ red tipi ’). The 
name of a special heraldic tipi belonging 
to the Cheyenne, erroneously given by 
Clark (Cheyenne MS.) as the name of a 
band. (j. m. ) 

Miayuma. —Clark quoted by Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1026, 1896. 

Mahsolamo. Given as the name of a 
body of Salish on the s. side of Chemanis 
lake, near the e. coast of Vancouver id.— 
Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. 

Mahtoiowa (‘the bear that whirls, 
‘Whirling Bear’). A Brule Teton Sioux 
chief. While the B rules, Oglala, and Min- 
iconjou Sioux were camped near Ft Lara¬ 
mie, Wyo., in 1854, having come to receive 
the annual presents from the Government, 
an ox belonging to some Mormon emi¬ 
grants was killed by the Indians. Accord¬ 
ing to the most reliable information, ob¬ 
tained by Grinnell from Wm. Rowland, 
who was at Ft Laramie during the trouble, 
the commandant demanded the surrender 
of the offender, and Mahtoiowa, in re¬ 
sponse, pointed out the tipi of the guilty 
Indian, informing Lieut. Grattan that he 
might arrest him; but Grattan insisted 
that Mahtoiowa should bring the man out 
and deliver him. When the chief de¬ 
clined to do so, Grattan ordered his men 
to fire a howitzer at the lodge in the mid¬ 
dle of the village. A shell killed an In¬ 
dian, and 17 of the 18 soldiers were at 
once shot down with arrows, the single 
survivor escaping by the aid of an Indian 
friend. The Sioux besieged Ft Laramie 
until it was relieved. Mahtoiowa was 
killed in an action before the fort, and the 
war, which was the beginning of Sioux 
hostilities, was carried on by Little 
Thunder. 

Mahusquecbikoken. A former village, 
under Iroquois rule, situated on Alle¬ 
gheny r., Pa., about 20 m. above Venan¬ 
go, and inhabited chiefly by Seneca and 
Munsee Delawares; it was destroyed by 
Brodliead in 1779. This village, together 
with Buc-kaloon and Connevvango, formed 
a settlement 8 m. in length along Alle¬ 
gheny r., the 3 villages together contain¬ 
ing about 35 large houses (Brodhead 
(1779) in Jour. Mil. Exped. of Maj. Gen. 
Sullivan, 308, 1887). (j. n. b. h.) 

Maicoba. A settlement of the Nevome 
and the seat of a mission established in 
1676; situated on or near the upper Rio 
Yaqui, in e. Sonora, Mexico. In 1678 
the population numbered 153. The town 
now consists of a mixed population of 
whites, Pima, Yaqui, and a few Mayo, 
numbering in all 199 in 1900. 


790 


MAI DU—MAIZE 


[b. a. e. 


Maicoba.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 351, 1864. S. 
Francisco Borja Maicoba. —Zapata (1678) in Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., hi, 345, 1857. 

Maidu (‘man’, ‘Indian’). A tribe for¬ 
merly dwelling in Sacramento valley and 
the adjacent Sierra Nevada in California. 
This single tribe constitutes the entire 
Pujunan linguistic family of Powell, all 
the divisions of which called themselves 
Maidu, and distinguished themselves one 
from another by their local names only. 
The Maidu proper, comprising the divi¬ 
sions n. of Bear r. valley, were formerly 
considered a different stock from the 
Nishinam,who are now recognized as the 
southern branch of the family. The names 
of the Maidu villages and of the inhab¬ 
itants were usually local place names. It 



OLD MAIDU MAN! (UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA) 


may be doubted if, in the following list of 
the divisional and village names, the for¬ 
mer have a greater value than the latter 
or were in fact anything more than the 
larger villages w T ith perhaps outlying set¬ 
tlements of a more or less temporary 
character. Divisions: Cohes, Cushna, 
Hoitda, Honkut, Kiski, Konkau, Kulo- 
mum, Molma, Nimsewi, Pakamali, Tsak- 
tomo, Tsamak, Tsulumsewi, Tummeli, 
Ustoma, Willi, Yumagatok, and Yunu. 
Villages: Bamom, Bauka, Bayu, Ben- 
komkomi, Botoko, Eskini, Hembem, 
Hoako, Holiolto, Hokomo, Hopnomkoyo, 
Indak, Kalkalva, Kotasi, Kulaiapto, 
Kulkumish, Michopdo, Mimal, Molma, 
Nakankoyo, Oidoingkoyo, Okpam, Ola, 
Ololopa, Onchoma, Opok, Otaki, Paki, 


Panpakan, Pitsokut, Pulakatu, Sekumne, 
Sesum, Silongkoyo, Siwim Pakan, Sunusi, 
Tadoiko, Taikus, Taisida, Tasikoyo, 
Tchikimisi, Tishum, Tomcha, Totoma, 
Tsam Bahenom, Tsekankan, Tsuka, 
Wokodot, Yalisumni, Yamako, Yauko, 
Yiikulme, Yodok, Yotammoto, Yumam, 
and Yupu. Consult Dixon in Bui. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, pt. 3, 1905. See 
Pujunan Family. 

Mai'-deh.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 282, 
1877. Mai'-du.—Ibid. Meidoos.—Powers in Over¬ 
land Mo., xn,21,1874. Midu.—Merriara in Science, 
n. s., xix, 914, June 15, 1904 (pron v Mi-doo). Wa- 
wah.—Powers, Inds. West Nevada, 14,1876 (‘stran¬ 
gers’: Paiute name for all Sacramento r. tribes). 

Mailam-ateuna (‘ those of the lower¬ 
most’). A Zuni phratry consisting of 
the Takya (Toad) and Chitola (Rattle¬ 
snake) clans. (f. h. c.) 

Maitheshkizh (‘Coyote pass,’ referring 
to the pueblo of Jemez). A Navaho 
clan, descended from a captive Jemez girl 
and now affiliated with the Tsedzhinkini. 
Mai^eckij.—Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 
104, 1890. Mai^eckijni.—Ibid. Maideskl'c.—Mat¬ 
thews, Navaho Legends, 30,1897. Maideski'mi.— 
Ibid. 

Maitho (‘Coyote spring’). A Navaho 
clan. 

Mai$o —Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, III, 103, 
1890. Maifo^ine.—Ibid. MaPo‘.—Matthews, Na¬ 
vaho Legends, 30, 1897. MaPo'dine 1 .—Ibid. 

Maize (from the Arawak marise, 
changed to may si and makiz in the An¬ 
tilles). This giant cereal, known in the 
United States and Canada as ‘Indian 
corn,’ or simply ‘corn,’ and to botanists 
as' Zea mays Linn., was the great food 
plant of those American Indians who 
sought the aid of cultivation in obtaining 
food. It is now generally supposed to 
have been derived from native grasses— 
the Euchloena mexicana of s. Mexico 
and E. luxurians of Guatemala, the latter 
approximating most nearly the cultivated 
corn. These are the only known species 
of North American endogens from which 
the numerous varieties now in use could 
have been developed. Harsh berger says 
linguistic evidence shows that maize was 
introduced into the United States from 
the tribes of Mexico and from the Carib 
of the West Indies, but the time of this 
introduction can only be conjectured. 
That it was long before the appearance 
of Europeans, however, is evident, not 
only from its early and widespread culti¬ 
vation by tribes of the area now embraced 
in the United States, but from the fact 
that indications of its cultivation are 
found in mounds and in the ancient 
pueblo ruins and cliff dwellings, while 
corroborative evidence is found in the 
fact that several varieties of maize had 
already been developed at the time of 
discovery, four being mentioned as in use 
among the Indians of Virginia (Beverley, 
Hist. Virginia, 125-128, 1722). Jacques 
Cartier, the first European to enter the St 





BULL. 30] 


MAJALAYGHUA-MAKAH 


791 


Lawrence, observed large fields of grow¬ 
ing maize at Hochelaga (now Montreal) 
in 1534, and Champlain in 1604 found it in 
cultivation at almost every point visited 
from Nova Scotia to upper Ottawa r. 
The supplies of maize obtained from the 
Indians by the New England and Vir¬ 
ginia colonists are well known. Henne¬ 
pin, Marquette, Joliet, LaSalle, and other 
early French explorers of the Mississippi 
valley found all the tribes they visited, 
from the Minnesota r. to the Gulf, and 
even into Texas, cultivating maize; and 
the same was true of the tribes between 
n. w. Mexico and the plains of Kansas 
when visited by Coronado in 1540-42. 
Even the Mandan and Arikara on the 
upper Missouri had their maize patches 
when first seen by the whites. How far 
northward on the Pacific slope the culti¬ 
vation of maize had extended at the time 
of the discovery is not known. Evidence 
that it or anything else was cultivated in 
California w. of the Rio Colorado valley 
is still lacking. Brinton (Am. Race, 50, 
1891) expresses the opinion that maize 
‘ ‘ was cultivated both north and south to 
the geographical extent of its productive 
culture.” Such at least appears to have 
been true in regard to its extent north¬ 
ward on the Atlantic slope, except in the 
region of the upper Mississippi and the 
Red r. of the North. 

The ease with which maize can be cul¬ 
tivated and conserved, and its bountiful 
yield, caused its rapid extension among 
the Indians after it first came into use. 
With the exception of better tillage the 
method of cultivation is much the same 
to-day among civilized men as among the 
natives. Thomas Hariot, who visited 
Virginia in 1586, says the Indians put 
four grains in a hill “with care that they 
touch not one another.” The extent to 
which the cereal was cultivated in pre¬ 
historic times by the Indians may be 
inferred from these facts and from the 
observations of early explorers. It seems 
evident from the history of the expedi¬ 
tions of De Soto and Coronado (1540-42) 
that the Indians of the Gulf states and of 
the Pueblo region relied chiefly on maize 
for food. It is also probable that a moiety 
of the food supply of the Indians of Vir¬ 
ginia and the Carolinas, and of the Iro¬ 
quois and Huron tribes, was from the 
cultivation of corn. Du Pratz says the 
Indians “from the sea [Gulf] as far as 
the Illinois” make maize their principal 
subsistence. The amount of corn of the 
Iroquois destroyed by Denonville in 1687 
has been estimated at more than a million 
bushels (Charlevoix, Hist. Nouv. France, 
ir, 355,1744), but this estimate is probably 
excessive. According to Tonti (French,. 
Hist. Coll. La., i, 70,1846), who took part 
in the expedition, the army was engaged 


seven days in cutting up the corn of four 
villages. Thaumer de la Source (Shea, 
Early Voy. Miss., 81, 1861) says, “the 
Tounicas [Tonika] live entirely on In¬ 
dian corn.” Gen. Wayne, writing in 
1794 of the Indian settlements, asserts 
that “the margins of these beautiful riv¬ 
ers, the Miamis of the Lake and the Au 
Glaize, appear like one continued village 
for a number of miles, both above and 
below this place, Grand Glaize, nor have 
I ever before beheld such immense fields 
of corn in any part of America from 
Canada to Florida” (Manypenny, Ind. 
AVards, 84, 1880). From the Indians are 
derived ash-cake, hoe-cake, succotash, 
samp, hominy, the hominy mortar, etc., 
and even the cribs elevated on posts are 
patterned after those of the Indians of 
the Southern states. Corn was used in 
various ways by the natives in their cere¬ 
monies, and among some tribes the time 
of planting, ripening, and harvesting was 
made the occasion for festivities. See 
Agriculture , Food. 

Consult Carr, Mounds of the Mississippi 
Historically Considered, 1883; Cushing, 
Zuni Breadstuffs; Harshberger, Maize: a 
Botanical and Economic Study, 1893; 
Payne, Hist. New World, i, 1892; Stick- 
ney in Parkman Club Pub., no. 13, 1897; 
Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 614-622, 
1894. (c. t.) 

Maj alayghua. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Los Prietos, adjacent to Santa 
Barbara, Cal. 

Inajalayehua.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 459, 1874 
(misquoted from Taylor). Majalayghua.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 

Makache (‘owl’). An Oto gens. 
Ma-ka'-tce.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240,1897. 
Ma'-kotch.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. 

Makah (‘capepeople’). The southern¬ 
most tribe of the Wakashan stock, the 
only one within the United States. 
They belong to the Nootka branch. 
According to Swan the Makah claimed 
the territory between Flattery rocks, 15 
m. s., and Hoko r., 15 m. e. of C. Flat¬ 
tery, Wash., also Tatoosh id., near the 
cape. Their winter towns were Baada, 
Neah, Ozette, Tzues, and Waatch; their 
summer villages, Ahchawat, Kiddekub- 
but, and Tatooche. Gibbs (MS., B. A. E.) 
mentions another, called Kehsidatsoos. 
They now have two reservations, Makah 
and Ozette, Wash., on which, in 1905, 
there were respectively 399 and 36, a 
total of 435 for the tribe. In 1806 they 
were estimated by Lewis and Clark to 
number 2,000. By treaty of Neah bay, 
AVash., Jan. 31, 1855, the Makah ceded 
all their lands at the mouth of the Strait 
of Juan de Fuca except the immediate 
area including C. Flattery. This reser¬ 
vation was enlarged by Executive order 
of Oct. 26,1872, superseded by Executive 
order of Jan. 2,1873, and in turn revoked 


792 


MAKAK—MAKOUA 


[B. A. £. 


by Executive order of Oct. 12 of the 
same year, by which the Makah res. was 
definitely defined. The Ozette res. was 
established by order of Apr. 12, 1893. 
Ba-qao.— McCaw, Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1885 (Puyallup name)- Cape Flattery. —Lane in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 162,1850. Classet.— Farnham.Trav., 
n, 310, 1843 (Nootka name: ‘outsiders’). Clat- 
set.— Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 231, 1844. Clossets.— 
Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 171, 1852. Flattery. — 
Ibid., 170. Klaizarts.— Armstrong, Oregon, 136, 
1857. Kla-iz-zarts.— Jewitt, Narr., 75, 1849. Klas- 
set. —Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 1,1870. Kwe- 
net-che-chat.— Ibid, (own name: ‘cape people’). 
Kwe-net-sat’h. —Ibid. (Salish name). Macau.— 
Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1850. Ma caw. —Star¬ 
ling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 170,1852. Maccaws. —Hanna 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857,337,1858. Mackahs. -Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, Aug. 1,1862. Makahs. —Gibbs, Clal¬ 
lam and Lummi, v, 1863. Makans. —Stevens in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 448, 1854. Makas. —Simmons in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 335, 1857. Makaw. —Lane in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 52,31st Cong., 1stsess., 173,1850. Makha. — 
U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 461,1873. Mak-kah.— Swan 
in Smithson. Cont.,xvi, 1,1870. Mi-caws. —Jones 
(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,34th Cong., 3d sess., 7, 
1857. Quenait chechat. —Swan, inf’n, Feb. 1886. 
Que-nait'-sath. —Swan,N.W. Coast, 211,1857. Quine- 
chart. —Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1806), Vi, 70, 
1905. Q,uin-na-chart. — Ibid., IV, 169,1905. Quinne- 
chant. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., u, 120, 1814. 
Quinnechart. —Ibid., 474. Tatouche. —Nicolet, Ore¬ 
gon, 143,1846. Tla'asath. —Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 31, 1890 (‘outside people’: Nootka 
name). Yacaws.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 
689,1857. 

Makak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village 
on the right bank of the Yukon below 
Anvik, Alaska; pop. 121 in 1880, 50 in 
1890. 

Akka.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 226,1902. Ma 
kagamute. —Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d 
Cong., 1st sess., 25, 1871. Makag'mut. —Dali in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 17, 1877. Makeymut.— Nel¬ 
son in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Makey- 
mute. —Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 57, 1881. Makki. — 
Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 
1850. Manki. —Raymond, op. cit., 31 (so called 
by whites). 

Makak. See Mocuck. 

Makan (‘medicine’). A Ponca gens, 
in two subgentes: Peal Ponka and Gray 
Ponka. 

Ma^a n . —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897. 
Noh'-ga. .—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155,1877. xe-sinde- 
it‘aji. —Dorsey, op. cit. (‘does not touch buffalo 
tails’). 

Makataimeshekiakia. See Black Hawk. 

Makatananamaki. See Black Thunder. 

Makatapi (‘black men.’—Hewitt). A 
name given in the Walam Olum of the 
Delawares as that of a tribe encountered 
by them during their migrations.—Brin- 
ton, Lenape Leg., 190,1885. 

Makawichia ( Ma-ka-wi-chia' , ‘place of 
many doves ’). A Tarahumare rancheria 
near Palanquo, Chihuahua, Mexico.— 
Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Makay. An unidentified village for¬ 
merly on Pamlico r., N. C., marked on 
the map of the Homann heirs, 1756. 

Makhelchel. A name applied by Pow¬ 
ers to the people of the vicinity of Lower 
lake, one of the southern arms of Clear 
lake, Lake co., Cal. The name was used 
particularly to designate the people of 
Lower Lake id., who were supposed by 
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 214, 


1877) to belong to the Copehan (Wintun) 
linguistic stock, but who have been found 
to belong to the Kulanapan (Pomo) 
stock. The people inhabiting this island 
called the island and the village itself 
Koi. (s. A. B.) 

Hesley. —Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 214, 
1877(from hosch'-la, ‘island’, in the Makhelchel 
dialect; applied by the whites both to the island 
and its original inhabitants). Hessler. — Ibid. 
Kelsey.— Ibid. Kessler. —Ibid. Makh'-el-chel.— 
Ibid. 

Makhenikashika ( Maqe-nikaci'ya , ‘up¬ 
per world people’). A Quapaw gens; 
probably identical with the Wakantaeni- 
kashika.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
230, 1897. 

Makhpiya-luta. See Red Cloud. 

Makhpiyamaza (‘ iron cloud ’). A band 
of the Matantonwan division of the 
Mdewakanton Sioux, named from its 
chief. It numbered 153 in 1836 and 123 
in 1859, at which latter date they resided 
on the w. bank of the Mississippi, above 
the mouth of St Croix, at the site of the 
present Hastings, Minn. 

Iron-Cloud.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858. 
Iron Cloud’s Village. —Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
Minn, map, 1899. Marcpeeah Mahzah. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 612,1853. Ma-rpi-ya-ma-za. — 
Neill, op. cit. 

Makhpiyawichashta (‘cloud man’). A 
village of the Mdewakanton Sioux in 
Minnesota in 1836, numbering 157; named 
from the chief. 

Cloud Man’s band.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 100, 1860. 
Marc pee wee Chastah. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 612, 1853. Sky-Man.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, 
note, 1858. 

Maklykaut. An Eskimo missionary 
station on Disko bay, w. Greenland. 
Maklykout.— Crantz, Hist. Greenland, I, map, 1767. 

Makokos. See Maycock. 

Makoma. A name used, evidently ow¬ 
ing to some confusion on the part of early 
writers, for the Indians who formerly 
lived in the vicinity of Clear lake and the 
mountains of Napa and Mendocino cos., 
Cal., but they are said by Wrangell (Eth- 
nog. Nachr., 80, 1839) to have dwelt 
northward of Ft Ross in Russian r. val¬ 
ley. The term undoubtedly comes from 
Maiydkma, the name of a prominent 
Yukian Wappo village near Calistoga, 
Napa co. (s. a. b. ) 

Maiyakma. —S. A. Barrett, inf’n, 1906 (correct 
name). Mayacmas. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, 1,451, 
1874. Mayacomas. —Ibid., 363. Mipacmas. — Ibid., 
362. Myacmas.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 22, 
1860. Myacomaps.— Ibid., June 7, 1861. 

Makomitek. An Algonquian tribe or 
band mentioned in 1671 as residing in the 
vicinity of Green bay, Wis. Tailhan 
identifies them with the Makoukuwe, 
which is doubtful. 

Makamitek. —Sieur de St Lusson (1671) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 803, 1855. Makomiteks. —Prise 
de Possession (1671) in Tailhan, Perrot Mem., 293, 
1864. 

Makoua (‘bear’). A tribe or band living 
near the village of St Michel, in central 
Wisconsin, in 1673; probably a division or 
gens of the Foxes. 


BOLL. 30] 


MAKOUKUWE-MALECITE 


793 


Makou.— Lapham, Inds. ofWis.,4,1870. MaKoua.— 
Jes. Rel. (1672), lviii, 40,1899. 

Makoukuwe. A band or gens, probably 
of the Foxes, found living near Green 
bay, Wis., in 1673. 

MaKoucoue.— Jes. Rel. (1673), lviii, 40, 1899. Ma- 
koueoue —Jes. Rel. quoted by Shea in Wis. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., Ill, 131,1857. Makoukoue.— MS. Jes. Rel. 
of 1673 quoted by Tailhan, Perrot M6m.,293,1864. 
Makoukoueks. —Ibid. 

Maktlaiath. ( Md'ktl’aiath). A sept of the 
Seshart, a Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890. 

Makushin. An Aleut village on Maku¬ 
shin bay, Unalaska id., Alaska. Pop. 35 
in 1834, according to Veniaminoff; 49 in 

1874, according to Shiesnekov; 62 in 1880; 
51 in 1890. 

Makooshenskoi.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 

1875. Makooshin. —Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., 
map, 1886. Makuschinskoje. —Holmberg, Ethnog. 
Skizz., map, 142, 1855. Makushin. —Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 23, 1884. Makushinsk. —Coxe, 
Russ. Discov., 163, 1787. Makushinskoe. —Veni- 
aminoff, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840. Makuski.— Coxe, 
Russ. Discov., 158, 1787. 

Makwa (‘ bear ’). According to Morgan, 
one of the 11 clans of the Mahican. 
According to Barton it is one of the 3 
divisions of the Mahican, corresponding 
to Morgan’s phratries. Morgan gives the 
wolf, turtle, and turkey; Barton gives the 
wolf, turtle, and bear, and puts the bear 
first. (j. m.) 

Ma'-kwa. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. Much- 
quanh. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 523, 1878 
(misprint). Much-quauh. —Barton, New Views, 
xxxix, 1798. Muk-wah. —Warren in Minn. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., v, 44,1885. 

Makwa (‘bear’). A gens of the Chip¬ 


pewa, q. v. 

Ma-kwa'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. Muk- 
kwaw.— Tanner, Narrative, 314,1830. Muk-wah.— 
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 91,1850. 

Makwisuchigi (‘they who go by the 
name of the bear’). The “royal” (rul¬ 
ing) gens of the Foxes. (w. j. ) 

Ma-kwis-so-jik. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877. 
Ma‘kwisutcigi.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Malahue. A former Chumashan village 
in Ventura co., Cal., at the Rancho de 
Maligo. 

Hu-ma-li-wu.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. Malahu. —Taylor in Cal. Far¬ 
mer, July 24,1863. 

Malaka. A tribe of the Patwin division 
of the Copehan family that formerly lived 
in Lagoon valley, Solano co., Cal. 

Malaccas. —Powers in Overland Mo., xiii, 542,1874. 
Ma-lak'-ka.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 


mIO| lOl#• 

Malakut ( Ma'lexah) . A Salish tribe on 
Saanich inlet, s. e. end of Vancouver id., 
speaking the Cowichan dialect; pop. 14 
in 1901, 10 in 1904. 

Mal-a-hut.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1889, 270, 1890. Mala- 
kut.— Ibid., 1901, pt, II, 164. Ma'leqa«.— Boas, 
MS., B. A. E., 1887. 

Malashaganay. A name of the sheeps- 
head or fresh-water drum (Haplodinotus 
grunniens). Through Canadian French 
malashigane or malashigane , from inana- 
shigan in the Chippewa-Nipissing dialects 
of the Algonquian stock, signifying ‘ ugly 
ashigan. ’ The ashigan is the black bass 
of American English. (a. f. c. ) 


Male (Ma'le). A village of the Mus- 
queam, a Cowichan tribe, situated n. of Sea 
id., in the delta of Fraser r., Brit. Col. 
According to Hill-Tout it was claimed by 
the Squawmish. 

Made. —Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 54, 1894. 
Ma'-li.— Ibid., 473, 1900. 

Malecite. Various explanations of this 
name have been given. According to 
Chamberlain it is from their Micmac 
name Malisit, ‘broken talkers’; Tanner 
gives the form as Mahnesheets, mean¬ 
ing ‘slow tongues’; Baraga derives it 
through the Cree from mayisit or malisit , 

‘ the disfigured or ugly foot ’; Lacombe 
(Diet. Cris, 707) agrees with Baraga and 
gives the etymology as mayi or mal, ‘ de¬ 
formed,’ and sit, ‘foot.’ Maurault’s ex¬ 
planation is radically different from all, 
as he says it is from Maroudit or Malouidit, 

‘ those who are of Saint Malo.’ Vetromile 
says it “comes from malike, which in old 
Abnakiand also in Delaware means witch¬ 
craft,” but adds, “hence the French 
name Micmac is a substitute for Mare- 
schite ,” as he writes the name. Accord¬ 
ing to Chamberlain the name they apply 
to themselves is Wulastuk-wiuk, ‘ dwellers 
on the beautiful river,’ or, as given by 
Maurault, Ouarastegouiaks, ‘those of the 
river whose bed contains sparkling ob¬ 
jects.’ 

The Malecite belong to the Abnaki 
group of the Algonquian stock. Maurault 
makes a distinction between the Male¬ 
cite and the Etchimin, but adds that 
“the remnants of this tribe and the Etchi- 
mins are called at the present day Male- 
cites.” Their closest linguistic affinity 
is with the Passamaquoddy, the language 
of the two being almost identical, and is 
closely allied to the New England dia¬ 
lects, but more distant from that of the 
Micmac. 

Although the New Brunswick coast was 
visited by or soon after the middle of the 
16th century, and St John r. located on 
maps as early as 1558, making it quite 
probable that the people of this tribe had 
come in contact with the whites at that 
early date, the earliest recorded notice of 
them is in Champlain’s narrative of his 
voyage of 1604. He found the country 
along the banks of the St John in the 
possession of Indians named “Les Etche- 
mons,” by whom his party was received 
with hospitality and rejoicing, and says 
they were the “first Christians” who 
had been seen by these savages, which 
may have been true of the particular 
party he met, but doubtful in the broader 
sense. That these were Malecite there 
is no reasonable doubt. ‘ * When we were 
seated,” says Champlain, “they began to 
smoke, as was their custom, before making 
any discourse. They made us presents of 
game and venison. All that day and the 
night following they continued to sing, 


794 


MALEMIDT—MALH0K9HE 


[b. a. k. 


dance, and feast until day reappeared. 
They were clothed in beaver skins.” 

Early in the 17th century Ft La Tour 
was built on St John r., which became 
the rallying point of the tribe, who there 
learned the use of firearms, and first ob¬ 
tained cooking vessels of metal and the 
tools and instruments of civilized life. 
The few French settlers on this river in¬ 
termarried with the Indians, thus forming 
a close alliance, which caused them to 
become enemies of the New England set¬ 
tlers, between whom and the French 
there was almost constant warfare. After 
the English came into possession of the 
country there were repeated disputes be¬ 
tween them and the Maleeite in regard 
to lands until 1776. Afterward lands 
were assigned them. In 1856, according 
to Schoolcraft, “the Tobique river, and 
the small tract at Madawaska, Meductic 
Point, and Kingsclear, with their small 
rocky islands near St John, containing 15 
acres,” constituted all the lands held or 
claimed by them in the country which 
was formerly their own. In 1884 they 
numbered 767, of whom 584 were in New 
Brunswick and the others in Quebec 
province. According to the report of 
Canadian Indian Affairs for 1904 their 
number was 805, of whom 103 were in 
Quebec province and 702 in New Bruns¬ 
wick. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Amalecites.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 1052, 1855. Amalicites. — Clinton 
(1749), ibid., VI, 540, 1855. Amalingans. — Shea, 
Cath. Miss., 144,1855. Amalistes. —Am. Pioneer, I, 
257, 1842. Amelestes.— Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 
156,1824. Amelicks.— Smith (1785) in Schoolcraft. 
Ind. Tribes, 111 , 553,1853. Amelingas. — Vetromile, 
Abnakis, 50, 1866. Amelistes. —Hutchins(1764) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 553,1853. Amelistis. — 
Imlay, West Terr., 293, 1797. Amenecis. —Writer 
of 1757 in Lettres Edifiantes, i, 698, 1838. Amili- 
cites.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 522, 1878. 
Canoemen.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 
II, 31, 1836. Echemins.— Am. Pioneer, I, 408,1842. 
Estechemains.— Champlain (1603), CEuvres, II, 49, 
1870. Estechemines. —Barton (probably from De 
Laet, {1633), New Views, xxxvii, 1797. Esteche- 
mins. —Champlain, CEuvres, ii, 8, 1870. Etche- 
mins. —La Galissonidre (1750) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., x, 227, 1858. Etchemons. —Champlain (ca. 
1604) in Schoolcraf t, Ind. Tribes, v, 674,1855. Etch- 
imins. —Ibid.,22 (said to be derived from tchinem, 
‘men’). Etchmins.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 79, 1854. Etechemies. —Bob6 (1723) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 913, 1855. Etechemin. —Jes. 
Rel. 1611, 5,1858. Etechemines. —Vater.Mith., pt. 3, 
sec. 3, 389, 1816. Etecheminii. —Du Creux map 
(1660), fide Vetromile, Abnakis, 21,1866. Eteche- 
neus.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 79, 
1854. Etemankiaks.— Maurault, Histoire des Abe- 
nakis, 5,1866 (‘those of the country of theskins for 
rackets’). Eteminquois. —Jes. Rel. 1611, 8, 1858. 
Etichimenes. —Lords of Trade (1721) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., v, 592,1855. Etschimins. —Vetromile, Ab¬ 
nakis, 130, 1866. Kiukusweskitchimi-uk. —Cham¬ 
berlain, Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882 ( = ‘muskrat 
Indians’; one of the names applied to them by 
the Micmac, on account of their hunting the musk¬ 
rat). Mahnesheet. —James in Tanner, Narrative, 
333, 1830. Malacite.— French trans. in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VI, 564, 1855. Malecetes.— Dawson, 
Inds. of Canada, 2, 1877. Malechites.— Baraga, 
Eng.-Otch. Diet.,299,1878. Malecites.— Vaudreuil 
(1722) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 912,1855. Male¬ 
sit.—Chamberlain, Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882. 
Malicetes.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 


79, 1854. Malicites.—Begon (1715) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ix, 932, 1855. Malisit.—Chamberlain, 
Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Micmac name; pi., 
Malisitchik). Maneus.—Chauvignerie (1736) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 1052, 1855. Marachite.— 
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Marashites— Wood 
(1769) quoted by Hawkins, Missions, 361, 1845. 
Marechites.—Macauley, N. Y., II, 162,1829. Mare- 
schites.—Vetromile, Abnakis, 23,1866 (old French 
name). Marisizis.—Cadillac (1692) inN.Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ix, 548, 1855. Melecites.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, v, 38, 1855. Melicite.—Chamberlain, 
Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882. Melisceet.— Brinton, 
Lenape Legends, 11, 1885. Milicetes.—Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 522,1878. Milicite.—School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 674,1856. Mouskouasoaks.— 
Rouillard, Nonas GCographiques, 11, 1906 (‘water- 
rats’: Abnaki name). 8arasteg8iaks.—Mau¬ 
rault, Histoire des Akenakis, 6, 1866 (includes 
Norridgewock in part). St. John’s (tribe).— 
Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 
123, 1824. St. John’s river [Indians].—Gyles (1726) 
in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., Iir, 357, 1853. Ulastekwi.— 
Gatschet, Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penob¬ 
scot name; pi. Ulastekwiak). Wu'lastuk'-wiuk.— 
Chamberlain,Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882 (=‘dwell- 
ers on the beautiful river’; name used by them¬ 
selves. Boyd (Ind. Local Names, 1885) gives the 
Indian name of the river as Looshtook, ‘long 
river’). 

Malemiut. An Eskimo tribe occupying 
the coast of Norton sd., n. of Shaktolik 
and the neck of Kaviak penin., Alaska. 
They have established permanent or sum¬ 
mer settlements at points on Kotzebue 
sd., where they have become mixed with 
tribes of Kaviak penin. and the islands 
that visit their villages for barter and so¬ 
cial enjoyment. Those of pure blood pre¬ 
sent the squat type of the Arctic Eskimo, 
with scant hair, broad flat noses, and high 
cheek bones with a thick covering of 
flesh. The tribe numbered 630 in 1900. 
Once more numerous and powerful, its 
villages now lie scattered among those of 
the Unaligmiut and Kavigmiut. Subdi¬ 
visions are the Attenmiut, Inglutalige- 
miut, Koyugmiut, Kugaramiut, Kungu- 
gemiut, Shaktoligmiut, and Tapkach- 
miut. Their villages are Akchadak, At- 
ten, Chamisso, Kongik, Koyuktolik, Ivu- 
galuk, Kviguk, Kvinkak, Kwik (2), Na- 
paklulik,Nubviakchugaluk,Nuklit, Shak¬ 
tolik, Taapkuk, Ulukuk, and Ungalik. 
Mahlemoot.—Elliott, Our Arctic Prov., 444, 1886. 
Mahlemutes.—Dali in Proc. Am. A. A. S., 266, 
1869 (between Kotzebue sd. and Norton bay). 
Mahlemuts.—Dali in Proc.Cal. Acad.Sci.,iv,35,1873. 
Malegmjuti.—Erman quoted by Dali in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., 17, 1877. Maleigmjuten.—Holm- 
berg, Ethnog. Skizz., 6, 1855. Maleimioute.—Za¬ 
goskin in Nouv. Ann.Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 
1850. Malemukes.—Whymper in Jour. Hoy. Geog. 
Soc., 220, 1868. Malemut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. 
B. A. E., passim, 1899. Malemutes.—Whymper, 
Trav. in Alaska, 143, 318, 1868. Maliegmut.—- 
Holmberg quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., I, 16, 1877. Malimiut.—Wrangell quoted 
by Dali, ibid. Malimuten.—Wrangell, Ethnog. 
Nachr., 122, 1839. Malimyut.—Turner in 11th 
Rep. B. A. E., 178, 1894. Malmiut.—Tikhmenief 
quoted by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, 16, 1877. 
Mamelute.—Whymper in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. 
Lond.,Vll, 167,1869. Tschuagmuti.—Erman quoted 
by Dali in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16,1877. 

Malhokshe ( Mal-hok-ce ). AformerChu- 
mashan village in the interior of Ventura 
co., Cal., at a place called Cuesta de la 
Mojonera.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 


bull. 30] MALIACONES- 

Maliacones. An unidentified tribe men¬ 
tioned by Cabeza de Vaca as living near 
the Avavares, in Texas, in 1528-34, and 
speaking a different tongue. Possibly 
they are identical with the Meraeouman 
of Joutel and the Manico of Manzanet. 

Maliacones.— Cabeza de Vaca, Rel., Smith trans., 
125,137, 1871. Malicans.— Harris, Vov. and Trav., 
n, 276, 1705. Maliconas. —Herrera, Hist. Gen., v, 
95,1726. Malicones.— Cabeza de Vaca (1542) quo¬ 
ted by Barcia, Ensayo, 13, 1723. Maticones.— 
Harris, Voy. and Trav., 803,1705. 

Malica. A village n. of the mouth of 
St Johns r., Fla., in 1564. De Dry’s map 
locates it inland, s. of the mouth. 

Malica. —Laudonnidre in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
N. s., 331, 1869. Mallica.—Martin, N. C., I, 87, 1829. 

Malico. A former Chumashan village 
near Somo hills, Ventura co., Cal.—Tay¬ 
lor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. 

Malika ( Ma-li-ka ). Given by Bourke 
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, n, 181, 1889) as a 
clan of the Mohave, q. v. 

Malito ( Ma-li-'td ). A former Chuma¬ 
shan village in Ventura co., Cal., in a lo¬ 
cality called Punta del Pozito.—Hen- 
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Malki. A Kawia village on the Potrero 
res., in Cahuilla valley, e. of Banning, s. 
Cal. 

Mai -ki.—Barrows, Ethno.-Bot. Coahuilla Ind., 33, 
1900. Potrero. —Ibid. 

Mallin. A Costanoan village situated 
in 1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz mis¬ 
sion, Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 
5, 1860. 

Mallopeme. One of the tribes of w. 
Texas, some at least of whose people 
were neophytes of the mission of San 
Jose y San Miguel de Aguayo.—MS. in 
Texas State archives, Nov., 1790. 

Malockese. Mentioned by Blue Jacket 
as a tribe or band at a conference held at 
Greenville, Ohio, in 1807. Possibly the 
Mequachake division of the Shawnee, al¬ 
though apparently distinct.—Drake, Te- 
cumseh, 94, 1852. (j. m.) 

Malssum (‘wolf’). A gens of the Ab- 
naki, q. y. 

Mals'-sum. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. Mol- 
sem — J. D. Prince, inf’n, 1905 (modern St Fran¬ 
cis Abnaki form). 

Maltshokamut ( Mal-tsho'-qa-mut, ‘ valley 
people’: Chugachigmiut name). An un¬ 
identified division of the Knaiakhotana 
of Cook inlet, Alaska.—Hoffman., MS., 
B. A. E., 1882. 

Malnksilak (Maluksilaq). A settlement 
of the Aivilirmiut Eskimo on Lyons inlet, 
Hudson bay, Canada.—Boas in 6th Kep. 
B. A. E., 476, 1886. 

Malulowoni ( Mal-u-lo-wd'-ni). A former 
Chumashan village in the interior of Ven¬ 
tura co., Cal., at a place called Cuesta 
Santa Rosa. — Henshaw, Buenaventura 
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Malvaitac. A former village, presuma¬ 
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores 


-MAMORACHIC 795 

mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Mamakume ( Ma'-mak'ume ). A village 
of the Matsqui tribe of Cowichan on the 
s. side of Fraser r., Brit. Col., opposite 
Matsqui reserve.—Boas in 64th Rep. Brit. 
A. A. S., 454, 1894. 

Mamalelekala. A Kwakiutl tribe on 
Village id., Brit. Col. According to Boas 
they were divided into fourgentes: Tem- 
tltemtlels, Wewamaskem, Walas, and 
Mamalelekam. Their only town is 
Memkumlis, which they occupy jointly 
with the Koeksotenok. The population 
was estimated at about 2,000 in 1836-41; 
in 1904 it numbered 111. 

Mah-ma-lil-le-kulla. —Sproat in Can. Ind. AfL, 145, 
1879. Mah-ma-lil-le-kullah.— Can. Ind. AfT. 1884, 
189,1885. Mahmatilleculaats. —Brit. Col. map, 1872. 
Mamaieilakitish. —Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. Mamaleilakulla.— Ibid. 
Ma'malelek-ala.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 54, 1890. Ma'maleleqala. —Boas in Peter- 
manns Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887. Mama-lil-a-cula.— 
Mayne, Brit. Col., 249, 1862. Ma-ma-lil-li-kuila.— 
Can. Ind. Aff. 1894, 279, 1895. Ma'-me-li-li-a-ka.— 
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. n, 65. 
Mam-il-i-li-a-ka.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. 
Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. Mar-ma-li-la-cal-la. —Kane, 
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. 

Mamalelekam. A gens of the Mamale- 
lekala. 

Ma'leleqala.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt.5,130, 
1887. Ma'malelekam. —Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Can., 54, 1890. Ma'maleleqala. —Boas in 
Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 330, 1897. 

Mamalty. Mentioned in the narrative 
of Marie Le Roy and Barbara Leininger 
(Pa. Mag. Hist, and Biog., xxix, 412, 
1905) as a (Delaware?) village in w. Penn¬ 
sylvania or e. Ohio in 1759. 

Mamanahunt. A village of the Powha¬ 
tan confederacy in 1608, on Chickahominy 
r., Charles City co., Va.—Smith (1629), 
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mamanassy. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, at the junction of Pa- 
munkey and Mattapony rs., in King and 
Queen co., Va.—Smith (1629), Virginia, 
i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mamekoting. A chieftaincy of the Mun- 
see, formerly living in Mamakating val¬ 
ley, w. of the Shawangunk mts. in Ulster 
co. (?), N. Y. It was one of the 5 Esopus 
tribes.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 95, 
1872. 

Mameoya (‘fish-eaters’). A (former?) 
division of the Kainah tribe of the 
Siksika, q. v. 

Fish Eaters.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. for 
1850,144, 1851. Ma-me-o'-ya.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
171, 1877. Mum-i'-o-yiks.— Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo; Val., 264,1862. 

Mamikininiwug (‘ lowland people ’). A 
subdivision of the Paskwawininiwug, or 
Plains Cree. 

Mamikiwinimwag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Ma- 
mikiymiwok —Lacombe, Die. Langue Cris, x, 1874. 

Mamorachic. A Tarahumare settlement 
in Chihuahua, Mexico; definite locality 
unknown.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 322, 
1864. 


796 maMtum- 

Mamtum. Given as the name of a body 
of Indians on Cowitchin lake, s. end of 
Vancouver id. (Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., 
Victoria, 1872). Perhaps the Quamichan 
or the Comiakin of Cowitchin valley. 

Mamun-gitunai ( Ma'm A n git A na'-i , ‘GP- 
tuns of Mamun r.’). The most im¬ 
portant division of the Gituns, a family 
of the Eagle clan of the Haida, living at 
Masset, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. 
They derived their name from that of a 
small stream which falls into Masset inlet 
near its head, where they used to camp. 
A subdivision in the town of Yaku 
was called Ao-gitunai.—Swanton, Cont. 
Haida, 275, 1905. 

Manabush, Manabozo. See Nanabozo. 

Manahoac (Algonquian: ‘they are very 
merry.’—Tooker). A confederacy or 

roup of small tribes or bands, possibly 
iouan, in n. Virginia, in 1608, occupying 
the country from the falls of the rivers to 
the mountains and from the Potomac to 
North Anna r. They were at war with the 
Powhatan and Iroquois, and in alliance 
with the Monacan, but spoke a language 
different from any of their neighbors. 
Among their tribes Smith mentions the 
Manahoac, Tanxnitania, Shackaconia, 
Ontponea, Tegninateo, Whonkenti, Steg- 
araki, and Hassinunga, and says there 
were others. Jefferson confounded them 
with the Tuscarora. Mahaskahod is the 
only one of their villages of which the 
name has been preserved. Others may 
have borne the names of the tribes of the 
confederacy. The Mahocks mentioned 
by Lederer in 1669 seem to be identical 
with them. See Mooney, Siouan Tribes 
of the East, 18, 1894. 

Manahoac. A tribe or band of the 
Manahoac group. According to Jefferson 
they lived on Rappahannock r. in Stafford 
and Spottsylvania cos., Va. 

Mahoc.— Lederer, Discov., 2, 1672 (possibly identi¬ 
cal, although given as distinct). Mahocks.— 
Lederer (1669) as quoted by Hawks, N. C., ii, 44, 
1858. Managog.— Lederer, Discov., 2, 1672 (mis¬ 
print). Manahoacks.— Loudon, Selec. Int. Nar.,n, 
235,1808. Manahoacs.— Jefferson, Notes on Va., 
134,1794. Manahoaks.— Am. Pioneer, II, 189, 1843. 
Manahocks.— Simons in Smith, Va , i, 188, 1819. 
Manahokes.— Smith, Va., I, 74, 1819. Mannahan- 
nocks.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6,151,1883. 
Mannahoacks. —Strachey, Va., 37, 1849. Manna- 
hoags.— Domenech, Deserts N. Am., i, 442, 1860. 
Mannahoaks.— Strachey, Va., 104, 1849. Manna- 
hocks. —Ibid.,41. Mannahokes. —Smith, Va., 1,120, 
1819. Monahoacs.— Jefferson quoted by Bozman, 
Md., i, 113, 1837. 

Manam. A tribe that formerly lived 
on the road from Coahuila to the Texas 
country; possibly the people elsewhere 
referred to as Mazames, and probably be¬ 
longing to the Coahuiltecan linguistic 
stock.—Manzanet, MS. (1690), cited by 
H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 1906. 

Manamoyik. A former Nauset village 
near Chatham, Barnstable co., Mass. 


-MANDAN [b. a. a. 

In 1685 it contained 115 Indians over 12 
years of age. In 1762 the population had 
become reduced to fewer than 30 under 
the chief Quasson and were known as the 
Quasson tribe. (j. m. ) 

Manamoiak. —Bradford ( ca . 1650) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 4th s., ill, 97,1856. Manamoick. —Drake, 
Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 15, 1848. Manamoyck.— Wins¬ 
low (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vm, 249, 
1802. Manamoyet.— Hinckley (1685), ibid., 4th s., 
v, 133, 1861. Manamoyik.— Bourne (1674), ibid., 
1st s., I, 197, 1806. Mannamoyk.— Gookin (1674), 
ibid., 148. Maramoick. —Mourt (1622), ibid., 2d s., 
IX, 53, 1822. Monamoy.— Treat (1687), ibid.,4ths., 
v, 186,1861. Monamoyik.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk, 2, 
118,1848. Monimoy.— Rawson and Danforth (1698) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 133,1809. Mono- 
moy.— Freeman (1685), ibid., 4th s., V, 132, 1861. 
Monymoyk.— Stiles (1762?), ibid., lsts., X, 114, 1809. 
Quasson. —Stiles (1762), ibid. 

Mananosay. See Maninose. 

Manato (Ma-na-to\ ‘snake’). A gens of 
the Shawnee (q.v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168, 1877. 

Manchaug (meaning unknown). A vil¬ 
lage of Christian Indians, in 1674, in 
Nipmuc territory, near the present Ox¬ 
ford, Worcester co., Mass. 

Manchage. —Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., I, 189, 1806. Manchauge.— Gookin (1677) in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 467,1836. Mauchage. — 
Gookin in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ll, 59, 1830 
(misprint). Mauchaug.— Barber, Hist. Coll., 593, 
1839 (misprint?). Monuhchogok.— Eliot quoted by 
Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 21,1881. 

Manckatawangum. A former Iroquois 
town near the site of Barton, Bradford 
co., Pa., about 10 m. below Tioga. 

Fitzgerald’s Farm.— Lieutenant Beatty’s Journal 
(1779) in Jour. Mil. Exped. Maj. Gen. Sullivan, 
25, 1887. Mackatowando.— Campfield (1779), ibid., 
55. Macktowanuck. —Major Norris’Journal (1779), 
ibid., 230. Manckatawangum.— Note to Beatty’s 
Journal, ibid.,25(misprint). Mauckatawangum.— 
Lieutenant Jenkin’s Journal (1779), ibid., 171. 
Mohontowonga. —Map cited, ibid., 25. 

Mandan. A Siouan tribe of the north¬ 
west. The name, according to Maxi¬ 
milian, originally given by the Sioux is 
believed by Matthews to be a corruption 
of the Dakota Mawalani. Previous to 
1830 they called themselves simply 
Numakiki, ‘people’ (Matthews). Max¬ 
imilian says “if they wish to particu¬ 
larize their descent they add the name 
of the village whence they came origi¬ 
nally.” Hayden gives Miah'tanes, ‘peo¬ 
ple on the bank,’ as the name they apply 
to themselves, and draws from this the 
inference that “they must have resided 
on the banks of the Missouri at a very 
remote period.” According to Morgan 
(Syst. Consang. and Affin., 285), the na¬ 
tive name of the. tribe is Metootahiik, 
‘ South villagers. ’ Their relations, so far as 
known historically and traditionally, have 
been most intimate with the Hidatsa; yet, 
judged by the linguistictest, their position 
must be nearer the Winnebago. Mat¬ 
thews appears to consider the Hidatsa and 
Mandan descendants from the same im¬ 
mediate stem. Their traditions regarding 
their early history are scant and almost 


BULL. 30] 


MANDAN 


797 


entirely mythological. All that can be 
gathered from them is the indication that 
at some time they lived in a more easterly 
locality in the vicinity of a lake. This 
tradition, often repeated bv subsequent 
authors, is given by Lewis and Clark, as 
follows: “The whole nation resided inone 
large village underground near a subterra¬ 
neous lake; a grapevine extended its roots 
dow T n to their habitation and gave them a 
view of the light; some of the most adven¬ 
turous climbed up the vine and were de¬ 
lighted with the sight of the earth, which 
they found covered with buffalo and rich 



MANDAN 

w r ith every kind of fruits; returning with 
the grapes they had gathered, their coun¬ 
trymen were so pleased with the taste of 
them that the whole nation resolved to 
leave their dull residence for the charms 
of the upper region; men, women, and 
children ascended by means of the vine; 
but when about half the nation had 
reached the surface of the earth, a cor¬ 
pulent woman who was clambering up 
the vine broke it with her weight, and 
closed upon herself and the rest of the 
nation the light of the sun. Those who 
were left on earth made a village below, 


where we saw the nine villages; and 
when the Mandan die they expect to 
return to the original seats of their fore¬ 
fathers, the good reaching the ancient 
village by means of the lake, which the 
burden of the sins of the wicked will not 
enable them to cross.” Maximilian says: 
“They affirm that they descended origi¬ 
nally from the more eastern nations, near 
the seacoast.” Their linguistic relation 
to the Winnebago and the fact that their 
movements in their historic era have been 
westward up the Missouri correspond 
with their tradition of a more easterly 
origin, and would seemingly locate them 
in the vicinity of the upper lakes. 
It is possible that the tradition which 
has long prevailed in the region of 
n. w. Wisconsin regarding the so-called 
“ground-house Indians” who once lived 
in that section and dwelt in circular earth 
lodges, partly underground, applies to 
the people of this tribe, although other 
tribesof this general region formerly lived 
in houses of this character. Assuming 
that the Mandan formerly resided in the 
vicinity of the upper Mississippi, it is prob¬ 
able that they moved down this stream for 
some distance before passing to the Mis¬ 
souri. The fact that when first encount¬ 
ered by the whites they relied to some ex¬ 
tent on agriculture as a means of subsist¬ 
ence would seem to justify the conclusion 
that they were at some time in the past 
in a section where agriculture was prac¬ 
tised. It is possible, as Morgan con¬ 
tends, that they learned agriculture from 
the Hidatsa, but the reverse has more 
often been maintained. Gatlin’s theory 
that they formerly lived in Ohio and built 
mounds, and moved thence to the N. W. 
is without any basis. The traditions re- 
gardingtheir migrations, as given by Maxi¬ 
milian, commence with their arrival at the 
Missouri. The point where this stream 
was first reached was at the mouth of 
White r., S. Dak. From this point they 
moved up the Missouri to Moreau r., 
where they came in contact with the Chey¬ 
enne, and where also the formation of 
“bands or unions” began. Thence they 
continued up the Missouri to Heart r., N. 
Dak., where they were residing at the 
time of the first known visit of the whites, 
but it is probable that trappers and trad¬ 
ers visited them earlier. 

The first recorded visit to the Mandan 
was that by the Sieur de la Verendrye in 
1738. About 1750 they were settled near 
the mouth of Heart r. in 9 villages, 2 on the 
e. and 7 on the w. side. Remains of these 
villages were found by Lewis and Clark 
in 1804. Having suffered severely from 
smallpox and the attacks of the Assiniboin 
and Dakota, the inhabitants of the two 
eastern villages consolidated and moved 
up the Missouri to a point opposite the 








798 


MANDAN 


[B. A. B.' 


Arikara. The same causes soon reduced 
the other villages to 5, whose inhabitants 
subsequently joined those in the Arikara 
country, forming 2 villages, which in 1776 
were likewise merged. Thus the whole 
tribe was reduced to 2 villages, Metuta- 
hanke and Ruptari, situated about 4 m. 
below the mouth of Knife r., on opposite 
sides of the Missouri. These two villages 
were visited by Lewis and Clark in 1804. 
In 1837 they were almost destroyed by 
smallpox, only 31 souls out of 1,600, ac¬ 
cording to one account, being left, al¬ 
though other and probably more reliable 
accounts make the number of survivors 
from 125 to 145. After that time they oc¬ 
cupied a single village. In 1845, when 
the Hidatsa removed from Knife r., some 
of the Mandan went with them, and others 
followed at intervals. According to Mat¬ 
thews, some moved up to the village at 
Ft Berthold as late as 1858. By treaty at 
the Mandan village, July 30, 1825, they 
entered into peaceable relations with the 
United States. They participated in the 
Ft Laramie (Wyo.) treaty of Sept. 17, 
1851, by which the boundaries of the 
tribes of the N. VV. were defined, and in 
the unratified treaty of Ft Berthold, Dak., 
July 27, 1866. By Executive order of 
Apr. 12, 1870, a large reservation was set 
apart for the Mandan, Hidatsa, and Ari¬ 
kara Indians in North Dakota and Mon¬ 
tana, along Missouri and Little Missouri 
rs., which included the Mandan village, 
then situated on the left bank of the 
Missouri in lat. 47° 34', Ion. 101° 48'. 
By agreement at Ft Berthold agency, Dec. 
14, 1866, the Mandan, Arikara, and Hi¬ 
datsa ceded that portion of their reserva¬ 
tion n. of lat. 48°, and e. of a n. and s. 
line 6 m. w. of the most westerly point of 
the big bend of Missouri r., s. of lat. 48°. 
Provision was also made for allotment in 
severalty of the remaining portion. 

According to Maximilian the Mandan 
were vigorous, well made, rather above 
medium stature, many of them being ro¬ 
bust, broad-shouldered, and muscular. 
Their noses, not so long and arched as 
those of the Sioux, were sometimes aqui¬ 
line or slightly curved, sometimes quite 
straight, never broad; nor had they such 
high cheek bones as the Sioux. Some of 
the women were robust and rather tall, 
though usually they were short and broad- 
shouldered. The men paid the greatest 
attention to their headdress. They some¬ 
times wore at the back of the head a long, 
stiff ornament made of small sticks en¬ 
twined with wire, fastened to the hair and 
reaching down to the shoulders, which 
was covered with porcupine quills dyed 
of various colors in neat patterns. At the 
upper end of this ornament an eagle feather 
was fastened horizontally, the quill end 
of which was covered with red cloth and 


the tip ornamented with a bunch of horse¬ 
hair dyed yellow. These ornaments varied 
and were symbolic. Tattooing was prac¬ 
tised to a limited extent, mostly on the 
left breast and arm, with black parallel 
stripes and a few other figures. 

The Mandan villages were assemblages 
of circular clay-covered log huts placed 
close together without regard to order. 
Anciently these were surrounded with 
palisades of strong posts. The huts w r ere 
slightly vaulted and were provided with 
a sort of portico. In the center of the 
roof was a square opening for the exit 
of the smoke, over which was a circular 
screen made of twigs. The interior w r as 
spacious. Four strong pillars near the 
middle, with several crossbeams, sup¬ 
ported the roof. The dwelling was cov¬ 
ered outside with matting made of osiers, 
over which was laid hay or grass, and 
then a covering of earth. “The beds 
stand against the wall of the hut; they 
consist of a large square case made of 
parchment or skins, with a square en¬ 
trance, and are large enough to hold sev¬ 
eral persons, who lie very conveniently 
and warm on skins and blankets.” They 
cultivated maize, beans, gourds, and the 
sunflower, and manufactured earthen¬ 
ware, the clay being tempered with flint 
or granite reduced to powder by the action 
of fire. Polygamy w r as common among 
them. Their beliefs and ceremonies were 
similar to those of the Plains tribes gen¬ 
erally. The Mandan have always been 
friendly to the United States, and since 
1866 a number of the men have been en¬ 
listed as scouts. 

In Lewis and Clark’s time the Mandan 
were estimated to number 1,250, and in 
1837 1,600 souls, but about the latter date 
they were reduced by smallpox to be¬ 
tween 125 and 150. In 1850 the number 
given w r as 150; in 1852 it had apparently 
increased to 385; in 1871, to 450; in 1877 
the number given w r as 420; it was 410 
in 1885, and 249 in 1905. 

There were, according to Morgan (Anc. 
Soc., 158, 1877), the following divisions, 
which seem to have corresponded with 
their villages before consolidation: (1) 
Horatamumake (Kharatanumanke), (2) 
Matonumake (Matonumanke), (3) See- 
pooshka (Sipushkanumanke), (4) Tana- 
tsuka (Tanetsukanumanke), (5) Kitane- 
make (Khitanumanke), (6) Estapa 
(Histapenumanke), and (7) Meteahke. 

In addition to the works cited, seeCatlin 
(1) North American Indians, 1841, (2) 
O-kee-pa, 1867; Coues, Lewis and Clark 
Exped., 1893; Orig. Jour. LewisandClark, 
1904-05; Dorsey (1) A Study of Siouan 
Cults, 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894,(2) Siouan 
Sociology, 15th Rep. B. A. E.,1897; Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; 
McGee in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Mat- 


BULL. 30] 


MANDHINKAGAGHE-MANGAS COLORADAS 


799 


thews, Hidatsa Inds., 1877; Will and Spin- 
den, The Mandans, 1906. (j. o. d. c. T.) 

A-rach-bo-cu. — Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., n, 
lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name). As-a-ka-shi.— Hav- 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,402,1862 (Crow 
name). How-mox-tox-sow-es.— Henry, Blackfoot 
MS. vocab., 1808 (Hidatsaname). Huatanis.— Ra- 
finesquein Marshall, Hist. Ky.,i,28,1824. Kanit'.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 357, 1862 
(Ari kara name). Kwowahtewug.— Tanner, Narr 
316,1830 (Ottawa name). Les Mandals.— Maximil¬ 
ian, Trav., 334, 1843 (so called by the French Ca¬ 
nadians). Madan.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark 
(1804), I, 202, 1904. Mahna-Narra. —Maximilian, 
Trav., 335,1843 (‘the sulky’: so called because they 
left the rest of their nation and went higher up 
Missouri r.). Mandams.— U.S.Stat., xiv, 493,1868. 
Mandan.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 6,1806. Man- 
dane.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i, 256, 
1904. Mandanes.— Du Lac, Voy. dans les Louisi- 
anes, 262, 1805. Mandani.— Capellini, Trav., 226, 
1867. Mandarine.— Gass, Voy., 80, 1810. Mandan- 
nes.— Du Lac, Voy. dans les* Louisianes, 225, 1805. 
Mandan’s.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 70, 1814. 
Mandaus.— Sen. Misc. Doc. 53, 45th Cong., 3d sess., 
85, 1879 (misprint). Mandens.— Orig. Jour. Lewis 
and Clark (1804), I, 188,1904. Mandians. —Janson, 
Stranger in Am., 233, 1807. Mandins.— Orig. Jour. 
Lewis and Clark (1804), I, 201, 1904. Mandon.— 
Mass. Hist. Coll., 1st s., ill, 24, 1794. Mand 3 .— 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), i, 203, 1904. 
Mantanes. —Verendrye (1738) in Margry, D£c., vi, 
590, 1886. Manton. —Neill, Hist. Minn., 173, 1858. 
Maij-wa'-ta-nip. — Cook, Yankton MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 184, 1882 (Yankton name). Maudaus.— 
Mitchell (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 686, 
1855 (misprint). Mawadc n ^in.— Dorsey, (pegiha 
MS., B. A. E., 1880 (Omaha and Ponca name). 
Ma-wa'-ta-daq.— Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 137, 
1852 (Santee name). Mawatani.— Iapi Oaye, xm, 
no.9, 33, Sept. 1884 (Yankton name). Ma-wa'-taij- 
na. —Riggs, Dak. Gram.and Diet., 137,1852 (Yank¬ 
ton name). Maw-dan.— Sibley (1804) in Am. St. 
Pap., Ind. AfL, I, 710, 1832. Meandans. —Gale, 
Upper Miss., 182, 1867. Me-too'-ta-hak. —Morgan, 
Consang. and Affin., 285, 1871 (own name: sig. 
‘south villagers’). Metutahanke.— Matthews, 
Ethnog. Hidatsa, 14, 1877 (own name since 1837, 
after their old village). Mi-afi'-ta-nes.— Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 426, 1862 (‘people 
on the bank’). Mo-no'-ni-o. —Ibid., 290 (Chey¬ 
enne name). Nohar-taney. —Corliss, Lacotah MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 106, 1874 (Teton name). Numa- 
kaki. —Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 14,1877(‘men’, 
‘people’: own name prior to 1837). Numakshi.— 
Maximilian, Trav., 364, 1843. Numangkake. — 
Ibid., 335. Nuweta.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 
14,1877 (‘ourselves’: used sometimes in speaking 
of themselves and the Hidatsa together). U-ka'- 
she.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 
1862 (‘earth houses’: Crow name). Us-suc-car- 
shay.— Crow MS. vocab., B. A. E. (Crow name). 
Wahtani.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 520, 
1878 (see Mawatani, above). 

Mandhinkagaghe (‘earth makers’). An 
Omaha gens on the Inshtasanda side of the 
camp circle. The subgentes given are Ine- 
wakhubeadhin, Khube, Minghasanweta- 
zhi, Mikasi, and Ninibatan. 

Earth-lodge. —Dorsey in Bui. Philos. Soc. Wash. 
130, 1880. Madhinka-gaghe.— Dorsey, Omaha MS., 
B. A. E., 1878. Ma n ‘f5inka-gaxe. —Dorsey in 3d Rep. 
B. A. E., 219, 1885. Mikasi-unikaci n ga.— Dorsey, 
Omaha MS., op. cit. (‘ prairie-wolf people’). Mon- 
eka goh-ha. —Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., 1 ,327,1823. 
O-non-e'-ka-ga-ha'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155, 1877 
(‘many seasons’). Prairie-Wolf people. —Dorsey, 
Omaha MS., B. A. E., 1878. Wolf People.— Dorsey 
in Bui. Philos. Soc. Wash., 130, 1880. 

Manexit (contr.of mdianikslt, ‘at the lit¬ 
tle meeting-house’; lit. ‘at the assem¬ 
bling (or gathering) little wigwam ’■— 
Gerard). A village of Christian In¬ 
dians in 1674, in Nipmuc territory, near 
the present Thompson, Windham co., 


Conn. It was about 6 m. n. of Quan- 
tisset. (j. m. ) 

Maanexit,—Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., i, 190, 1806. Mananexit.—Trumbull, Ind. 
Names Conn., 28,1881. Manexit.—Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., VI, 205,1800. Mayaneexit.—Trumbull, 
op. cit. Mayanexit.—Ibid. Myanexit.—Ibid. Wa- 
nexit.—Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.3,88,1848. 

Mangachqua ( Mang-ach-qua ). A Pota- 
watomi village on Peble (?) r., in s. Michi¬ 
gan, on a tract sold in 1827.—Potawatomi 
treaty (1827) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 675, 
1873. 

Mangas Coloradas (Span: ‘ red sleeves’). 
A Mimbreno Apache chief. He pledged 
friendship to the Americans when Gen. 
S. W. Kearny took possession of New 
Mexico in 1846. The chief stronghold of 
the Mimbrenos at that, time was at the 
Santa Rita copper mines, s. w. N. Mex., 
where they had killed the miners in 1837 
to avenge a massacre committed by white 
trappers who invited a number of Mim¬ 
brenos to a feast and murdered them to 
obtain the bounty of $100 offered by the 
state of Chihuahua for every Apache 
scalp. When the boundary commission 
made its headquarters at Santa Rita 
trouble arose over the taking from the 
Mimbreno Apache of some Mexican cap¬ 
tives and over the murder of an Indian 
by a Mexican whom the Americans re¬ 
fused to hang on the spot. The Mim¬ 
brenos retaliated by stealing some horses 
and mules belonging to the commission, 
and when the commissioners went on to 
survey another section of the boundary the 
Indians conceived that they had driven 
them away. In consequence of in¬ 
dignities received at the hands of miners 
at the Pinos Altos gold mines, by whom 
he was bound and whipped, Mangas 
Coloradas collected a large band of Apache 
and became the scourge of the white set¬ 
tlements for years. He formed an alliance' 
with Cochise to resist the Californian vol¬ 
unteers who reoccupied the country when 
it was abandoned by troops at the begin¬ 
ning of the Civil war, and was wounded in 
an engagement at Apache pass, s. e. 
Ariz., that grew out of a misunderstand¬ 
ing regarding a theft of cattle. His men 
took him to Janos, in Chihuahua, and 
left him in the care of a surgeon with a 
warning that the town would be destroyed 
in case he were not cured. According h> 
one account, soon after his recovery he 
was taken prisoner in Jan., 1863, by the 
Californians and was killed while at¬ 
tempting to escape, goaded, it is said, with 
a red-hot bayonet (Dunn, Massacres of 
Mts., 365, 374, 382,1886), while Bell (New 
Tracks, n, 24, 1869) states that in 1862 he 
was induced to enter FtMcLane, N. Mex., 
on the plea of making a treaty and receiv¬ 
ing presents. The soldiers imprisoned 
him in a hut, and at night a sentry shot 
him under the pretext that he feared the 
Indian would escape. Consult also Ban- 


800 


MANGE-MANITO 


[b. a. e. 


croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 1889; Bartlett. 
Pers. Narr., i-ii, 1854. 

Mange. A Pima rancheria on the Rio 
Gila, s. Ariz., visited and named by Kino 
(after Juan Mateo Mange) about 1697.— 
Bernal quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 356, 1889/ 

Mangoraca. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, on the n. bank of the 
Rappahannock, in Richmond co., Va.— 
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mangunckaknck (‘place of great trees.’— 
Trumbull). A village in 1638, occupied 
by conquered Pequot subject to the Mo- 
hegan. It seems to have been on Thames 
r. below Mohegan, New London co., 
Conn.—Williams (1638) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 4th s., vi, 251, 1863. Cf. 
Magunkaquog. 

Manhasset ( manahaset , ‘at the small 
island. ’ —Gerard; referring to Shelter id.). 
A sma'l tribe or band, belonging to the 
Montauk group, formerly living on Shelter 
id., at the e. end of Long Island, N. Y. 
Their chief, according to some authorities, 
lived at Sachem’s Neck on Shelter id., but 
according to Tooker either at Cockles Har¬ 
bor or Menantic cr. For the application 
of the name to Shelter id., see Tooker, 
Algonq., Ser., vn, 1901. (j. m.) 

Manhanset.— Wood in Macauley, N. Y., ii, 252, 
1829. Manhasset.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., II, 145, 
1888. Manhassett.— Deed (1648) in Thompson, 
Long Id., 181, 1839. Mohansick.— Writer ca. 1650 
in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 74, 1848 (probably the 
Manhasset, or perhaps the Montauk). Monhau- 
set.—Trumbull, Conn. { I, 146, 1818. 

Manhattan (‘an island formed by the 
tide.’—J. D. Prince). A tribe of the Wap- 
pinger confederacy that occupied Man¬ 
hattan id. and the e. bank of Hudson r. 
and shore of Long Island sd., in West¬ 
chester co., N. Y. Early Dutch writers 
applied the name also to people of neigh¬ 
boring Wappinger tribes. The Manhat¬ 
tan had their principal village, Nap- 
peckamack, where Yonkers now stands, 
and their territory stretched to Bronx r. 
From their fort, Nipiniehsen, on the n. 
bank of Spuyten Duyvil cr., they sallied 
out in two canoes to attack Hendrik 
Hudson when he returned down the river 
in 1609. Manhattan id. contained sev¬ 
eral villages which they used only for 
hunting and fishing. One was Sapoliani- 
kan. The island was bought from them 
by Peter Minuit on May 6, 1626, for 60 
guilders’ worth of trinkets (Martha J. 
Lamb, Hist. City of N. Y., i, 53, 1877). 
Their other lands were disposed of by 
later sales. See Ruttenber, Ind. Tribes 
Hudson R., 77, 1872; Ruttenber, Ind. 
Geog. Names, 1906; Prince in Am. Anthr., 
xi, 643,1909. • (j. m.) 

Mahatons.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816. 
Manathanes.—De Laet, Nov. Orbis, 72,1633.—Ma- 
nathe.—La Honton, New Voy., I, 47, 1703. Mana- 
thens.— La Salle (1681) in Margry, Dfec., ii, 148,1877. 
Manhates.—Dutch map (1616) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., I, 1856. Manhatesen.—De Rasiferes (1628) in 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 77,1872. Manhat- 


tae.— De Laet, Nov. Orbis, 72, 1633. Manhattan- 
ese.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 23,1852. Manhat- 
tes.— Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1856. 
Manhattons.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816. 
Monatons.— Ruttenber,Tribes Hudson R.,362,1872. 
Monatuns.— Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Proc., 
96,1844. Rechgawawanc. —Treaty of 1643 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 14,1881 (so called after their 
chief). Rechkawick. — N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 
147, 1881. Rechkawyck. —Treaty of 1660, ibid. 
Reckawancks.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 106, 
1872. Reckawawanc. —Treaty (1643) quoted by 
Ruttenber, ibid., 110. Reckewackes. —Breeden 
Raedt (ca. 1635), ibid., 78. Reckgawawanc. —Doc. 
of 1643 quoted by Winfield, Hudson Co., 42, 1874. 
Reweghnoncks. —Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiii, 303,1881. 

Manhazitanman ( Man'hazVtaMna n , ‘vil¬ 
lage on a yellow cliff’). A former Kansa 
village on Kansas r., near Lawrence, 
Kans.—Dorsey, Kansas MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882. 

Manhazulin ( Ma n/ haziUin, ‘ village at the 
yellow bank’). A former Kansa village 
on Kansas r., one of those occupied before 
the removal to Council Grove, Kans., in 
1846.—Dorsey, Kansas MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882. 

Manhazulintanman (‘ village where they 
dwelt at a yellow cliff ’). One of the last 
villages of the Kansa, on Kansas r., Kans. 
Ma^hazuli 11 ta n 'ma n .—Dorsey, Kansas MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1882. Mi n 'qudje-i n ' ts’e.—Ibid. ( = ‘where 
Minkhudjein died’). 

Manhukdhintanwan ( 3fani{uqti n/ -ta^wa v ■, 
‘dwelling place at a cliff village’). An 
ancient Osage village on a branch of 
Neosho r., Kans.—Dorsey, Osage MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 

Manico. A tribe mentioned by Manzanet 
(MS., 1690, cited by H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 
1906) as living on the road from Coahuila 
to the Texas country. Perhaps identical 
with the Maliacones of Cabeza de Vaca 
and the Meracouman of Joutel. 

Maninose. A name used in Maryland 
for the soft-shell clam {Mya arenaria ), 
called mananosay in more northerly 
parts of the Atlantic coast. Dr L. M. 
Yale, of New York (inf’n, 1903), states 
that the local name at Lewes, Del., is 
mullinose. The word appears also as man- 
nynose. The word is derived from one of 
the southern Algonquian dialects, Virgin¬ 
ian or Delaware; probably the latter. 
The derivation seems to be from the radi¬ 
cal man-, ‘to gather.’ (a. f. c.) 

Manistee. Mentioned as if an Ottawa 
village in Michigan in 1836, of which 
Keway Gooshcum (Kewigushkum) was 
then chief (U. S. Ind. Treaties, 656, 1837). 
Kewigushkum is earlier mentioned as an 
Ottawa chief of L’Arbre Croche (Waga- 
nakisi),in which vicinity, on Little Trav¬ 
erse bay, Manistee may have been. 

Maniti ( Mani-ti , ‘those who camp away 
from the village’). A Sisseton band; an 
offshoot of the Kakhmiaton wan.—Dorsey 
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897. 

Manito. The mysterious and unknown 
potencies and powers ol life and of the 
universe. As taken over from Algon- 


BULL. 30] 


MANITSUK-MANSO 


801 


quian into the vocabulary of the white 
man, it has signified spirit, good, bad, 
or indifferent; Indian god or devil, de¬ 
mon, guardian spirit, genius loci, fetish, 
etc. The spelling manitou indicates 
French influence, the earlier writers in 
English using manitto, manetto, manitoa, 
etc. Cuoq says that the Nipissing manito 
was formerly pronounced manitou. Some 
writers use manito, or good manito, for 
Good or Great Spirit, and evil manito 
for the devil. It is declared by some 
that the signification of such terms as 
Kitchi manito, Great Spirit, has been 
modified by missionary influence. The 
form manito of English literature comes 
from one of the e. Algonquian dialects, 
the Massachuset manitto , he is a god, the 
Narraganset (Williams, 1643) manit, god, 
or the Delaware manitto. The form 
manitou comes with French intermedia¬ 
tion from the central dialects, the Chip¬ 
pewa, and Nipissing or Cree manito 
(Trumbull in Old and New, i, 337, 1870). 
The term has given rise to many place 
names in Canada and the United States. 
For a discussion of manito from the Indian 
point of view, consult Jones in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, xvm, 183-190, 1905. See My¬ 
thology, Orenda, Religion. (a. f. c.) 

Manitsuk. An Eskimo village on the 
s. e. coast of Greenland, about lat. 62° 
30'; pop. 8 in 1829. 

Maneetsuk.— Graah, Exped. Greenland, map, 1837. 

Mankato (properly Ma-ka'-to , ‘blue 
earth’). A former band and village of 
the Mdewakanton Sioux, probably at or 
near the site of the present Mankato, at 
the mouth of Blue Earth r., Faribault co., 
Minn., named from a chief known as Old 
Mankato. A later Mdewakanton chief 
who bore the name Mankato, the son of 
Good Road, was a member of the delega¬ 
tion who signed the Washington treaty of 
June 18, 1858, in which his name appears 
as “Makawto (Blue Earth),” and he is 
referred to also in the Indian Affairs 
Report for 1860, in connection with his 
band, as under the Lower Sioux Agency, 
Minn. He took an active part in the 
Sioux outbreak of 1862, and was one of 
the leaders in the second attack, in Aug. 
1862, on Ft Ridgely, Minn., in which, it 
is said, about 800 Sioux and Winnebago 
were engaged. He participated also in 
the fight at Birch Coolie, Minn., on Sept. 
3 of the same year, and was killed by a 
cannon ball at the battle of Wood (or 
Battle) lake, Sept. 23. (c. t.) 

Blue Earth band.— Gale, Upper Miss., 261, 1867. 
Makato’s band. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 68, 1860. 

Mankoke (‘owl ’). An Iowa gens, now 
extinct. 

Ma'-kotch. —Morgan Anc. Soc , 156, 1877. Man'- 
ko-ke. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239, 1897. 

Manny nose. See Maninose. 

Manomet. A village of Christian Indians 
in 1674 near the present Monument, Sand¬ 
wich township, Barnstable co., Mass. It 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-51 


may have belonged to the Nauset or to 
the Wampanoag. In 1685 it contained 
110 Indians over 12 years of age. 
Manamet.—Doc. in Smith (1622), Va., ii, 235, repr. 
1819. Manamete.—Bradford ( ca . 1650) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.. Ill, 234, 1856. Mananiet.— 
Bourne (1674), ibid., 1st s., I, 198, 1806. Manna- 
mett.—Hinckley (1685), ibid., 4th s., v, 133, 1861. 
Mannamit.—Bourne (1674), ibid., 1st s., I, 198, 
1806. Manomet.—Winslow (1623), ibid., VIII, 252, 
1802. Manumit.—Freeman (1792), ibid., I, 231, 
1806. Monomete.—Doc. in Smith (1622), Va.,ll, 233, 
repr. 1819. Monument.—Freeman (1792) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1sts., 1,231,1806. Monumet—Davis, 
ibid., viii, 122,1802. 

Manosaht (‘ houses-on-spit people ’). A 
Nootka tribe formerly dwelling at Hes- 
quiat pt., between Nootka and Clayoquot 
sds., w. coast of Vancouver id. In 1883, 
the last time their name appears, they 
numbered 18. 

Manna-wousut.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 251,1862. Man- 
oh-ah-sahts.—Can.Ind. Aff.,52,1875. Ma'noosath.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31,1890. Mano¬ 
saht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 308,1868. Manosit.—Swan, 
MS., B. A. E. Mau-os-aht.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1883,188, 
1884. 

Manos de Perro (Span.: ‘dog-feet,’ lit. 
‘ dog hands ’). One of the tribes formerly 
living near the lower Rio Grande in Texas; 
mentioned by Garcia (Manual, title, 1760) 
among those speaking the Coahuiltecan 
language, for which his Manual was pre¬ 
pared. 

Manos Prietas (Span.: ‘dark hands’). 
A former tribe of n. e. Mexico or s. 
Texas, probably Coahuiltecan, although 
farther inland than the best determined 
Coahuiltecan tribes. They were found 
in the neighborhood of the Rio Grande 
and in 1677 were gathered into the mis¬ 
sion of Santa Rosa de Nadadores. 

Manos Prietas.—Fernando del Bosque (1675) in 
Nat. Geog. Mag., XIV, 340, 1903. Manosprietas.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 302,1864. 

Manshkaenikashika (‘ crawfish people ’). 
A Quapaw gens. 

Hah'jfa tan^a.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 230, 
1897 (‘large Han'ka’). Ma n cka' e'nikaci'^a.—Ibid. 

Manso (Span.: ‘ mild ’). A former semi- 
sedentary tribe on the Mexican frontier, 
near El Paso, Tex., who, before the com¬ 
ing of the Spaniards, had changed their 
former solid mode of building for habita¬ 
tions constructed of reeds and wood. 
Their mode of government and system of 
kinship were found to be the same as those 
of the Pueblos proper—the Tigua, Piros, 
and Tewa—from whom their rites and 
traditions clearly prove them to have 
come. They are divided into at least 
four clans—Blue, White, Yellow, and 
Red corn—and there are also traces of 
two Water clans. This system of clan¬ 
ship, however, is doubtful, since it bears 
close resemblance to that of the Tigua, 
with whom the Mansos have extensively 
intermarried. 

According to Bandelier it is certain that 
the Mansos formerly lived on the lower 
Rio Grande in New Mexico, about Mesilla 
valley, in the vicinity of the present Las 
Cruces, and were settled at El Paso in 1659 


802 


MANTA-MANUELITO 


[b. a. e. 


by Fray Garcia de San Francisco, who 
founded among them the mission of Nues- 
tra Senora de Guadalupe de los Mansos, 
the church edifice being dedicated in 
1668. At this date the mission is reported 
by Yetancurt (Teatro Mex., hi, 309,1871) 
to have contained upward of 1,000 parish¬ 
ioners. About their idiom nothing is 
known. They have the same officers as 
the Pueblos, and, although reduced to a 
dozen families, maintain their organiza¬ 
tion and some of their rites and dances, 
which are very similar to those of the 
northern Pueblo peoples, whom the 
Mansos recognize as their relatives. They 
are now associated with the Tigua and 
Piros in the same town. 

The term “manso” has also been ap¬ 
plied by the Spaniards in a general sense 
to designate any subjugated Indians. 
(See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 50, 
1884; Arch. Inst. Papers, hi, 86,165-68, 
248, 1890; iv, 348-49,1892.) 

Gorretas.—Zarate-Salmeron ( ca . 1629) in Land of 
Sunshine, 183, Feb. 1900 (Span.: ‘little caps’); 
Benavides, Memorial, 9, 1630. Gorrites.—Linscho- 
ten, Descr. de l’Am^rique, map 1, 1638. Lanos.— 
Perea (1629) quoted by Yetancurt, Teatro Mex., 
in,300,308,1871 (orMansos). Maises.—Linschoten, 
Descr. de l’Am&rique, map 1, 1638. Mansa.— 
Benavides, Memorial, 9, 1630. Manses.—Sanson, 
L’AmcMque, 27, map, 1657. Mansos.—Benavides, 
Memorial, 9, 1630. Manxo.—Onate (1598) in Doc. 
In6d, xvi, 243,1871 (“sus primeraspalabrasfueron 
manxo , manxo, micos, micos, por decir mansos y 
amigos ”). Xptianos Manssos. —Doc. of 1684 quoted 
by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 89, 1890 
(i. e., ‘Christian Mansos’). 

Manta (Brinton believed this to be a cor¬ 
ruption of Monthee, the dialectic form of 
Munsee among the Mahican and Indians 
of e. New Jersey). Formerly an impor¬ 
tant division of the New Jersey Dela¬ 
wares, living on the e. bank of Delaware 
r. about Salem cr. According to Brinton 
they extended up the river to the vicinity 
of Burlington, as well as some distance 
inland, but early writers locate other 
bands in that region. Under the name 
of Manteses they were estimated in 1648 
at 100 warriors. About the beginning of 
the 18th century they incorporated them¬ 
selves with the Unami and Unalachtigo 
Delawares. They have frequently been 
confounded with the latter division, and 
Chikohoki (q. v.) has also been used as 
synonymous with Manta, but Brinton 
thinks they were a southern branch of 
the Munsee. (j. m. ) 

Frog Indians.—Proud, Pa., II, 294,1798. Mandes.— 
Ibid., 295. Mantaas.—Herrman, map (1670) in 
Maps to Accompany the Rep. of the Comrs. on 
the Bndry. Line bet. Va. and Md., 1873 (refers to 
the river). Mantaes.—Hudde (1662) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., xii, 370,1877 (“ Mantaeshoeck”). Man- 
taesy.—De Laet (1633) iqN. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll.,2ds., 
1,315,1841. Mantas.—Doc. of 1656in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist.-, I, 598, 1856. Mantaws.—Macauley, N. Y., ii, 
293, 1829. Mantes.— Boudinot, Star in the West) 
127, 1816. Manteses.—Evelin (ca. 1648) in Proud, 
Pa., i, 113,1797. Mantos.—Brinton, Lenape Leg., 
44, 1885. Maritises.—Sanford, U. S., cxfvi, 1819 
(misprint). Salem Indians.—Proud, Pa., II 295 
1798. ’ 


Mantouek. A tribe, possibly the Mde- 
wakanton Sioux or its Matantonwan divi¬ 
sion, known to the French missionaries; 
placed by the Jesuit Relation of 1640 n. of 
a small lake w. of Sault Ste Marie, and by 
the Relation of 1658 with the Nadoue- 
chiouek (Nadowessioux, Dakota), the two 
having 40 towns 10 days’ travel n. w. of 
the mission St Michael of the Potawatomi. 

Mantoughquemec. A village of the 
Powhatan confederacy, in 1608, on Nan- 
semond r., Nansemond co., Va.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mantuenikashika (‘ those who made or 
adopted the grizzly bear as their mark or 
means of identification as a people.’—La 
Flesche). A Quapaw gens. 

Grizzly-bear (?) gens.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
229, 1897. Ma"tu' e'nikaci'^a.—Ibid. 

Manuelito. A Navaho chief. AVhen 
Gov. Merriwether conferred with the 
Navaho in 1855 about putting an end to 



MANUELITO 


murders and robberies committed by 
members of this tribe, the head chief 
avowed that he could not command the 
obedience of his people, and resigned. 
The chiefs present at the council there¬ 
upon elected Manuelito to fill the place. 
The lawless element did not cease their 
depredations, and the obligation to sur¬ 
render evil doers was no greater than it 
had been because the Senate neglected to 
confirm the treaty signed at the con- 







BULL. 30] 


MANUFACTURES-MAPLE SUGAR 


803 


ference. When Col. D. G. Miles started 
out to punish the Navaho in 1859 he de¬ 
stroyed the houses and shot the horses 
and cattle belonging to Manuelito’s band. 
When the Navaho finally applied them¬ 
selves thoroughly to peaceful and pro¬ 
ductive pursuits, their old war chief was 
chosen to take command of the native 
police force that was organized in 1872. 
He died in 1893. See Dunn, Massacres of 
Mts., 1886; Matthews, Navaho Leg., 11, 
1897. 

Manufactures. See Arts and Industries; 
Implements, Tools, and Utensils; Invention , 
and the articles thereunder cited. 

Manumaig ( Myanamak , ‘catfish’). A 
gens of the Chippewa, q. v. 

Cat Fish.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166,1877. Man-um- 
aig.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44,1885. 
Myanamak.—Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906. 

Many Horses. A Piegan Siksika chief, 
sometimes mentioned as ‘ Dog ’ and also 
as ‘ Sits in the Middle ’; born about the 
close of the 18th century. He was noted 
not only for his warlike character but 
for the large number of horses he ac¬ 
quired; hence his name. According to 
the account given by the Indians to Grin- 
nell (Story of the Indian, 236, 1895), he 
commenced to gatherand to breed horses 
immediately after the Piegan first came 
into possession of them from the Kutenai 
(1804-06), and also made war on the 
Shoshoni for the purpose of taking horses 
from them. His herd became so exten¬ 
sive that they numbered more than all 
the others belonging to the tribe and re¬ 
quired a large number of herders to take 
care of them. Many Horses was a signer 
of the first treaty of his tribe with the 
whites, on the upper Missouri, Oct. 17, 
1855, which he signed as “Little Dog.” 
He was killed in 1867 at the battle of 
Cypress Hill between the Piegan and the 
allied Crows and Hidatsa, at which time 
he was an old man. (c. t. ) 

Manyikakhthi ( Ma-nyi'-ka-qqi', ‘ coy¬ 

ote’). A subgens of the Michirache or 
Wolf gens of the Iowa.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 238, 1897. 

Manyinka (‘earth lodge’). A Kansa 
gens, the 1st on the Ishtunga side of the 
tribal circle. Its subgentes are Manyinka- 
tanga and Manyinkazhinga. 

Earth.—Morgan, Anc. Soc,, 156,1877. Manyinka.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 230, 1897. Ma n yiiika- 
gaxe.—Dorsey in Am. Natur., 671, 1885 (‘earth- 
lodge makers’). Mo-e'-ka-ne-ka'-she-ga.—Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Moi-ka nika-shing-ka_.— 
Stubbs, Kansa MS. vocab., 25, 1877. Ujange 
wakixe.—Dorsey, Kansa MS., B. A. E., 1882 (‘road 

m fl.kftrs * j 

Manyinkainihkasliina ( Ma n yin'ka i'niy- 
k { dci n/ a, ‘earth people’). A social divi¬ 
sion of the Osage.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 235, 1897. 

Manyinkatanga (Manyinka tanga, ‘large 
earth ’). A subgens of the Manyinka gens 
of the Kansa.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 230, 1897. 


Manyinkatuhuudje (Manyifi'ka tu'hu 
udje ‘lower part of the blue earth’). 
A former Kansa village at the mouth of 
Big Blue r., Kans.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1882. 

Manyinkazhinga ( Manyinka jinga, ‘ small 
earth’). A subgens of the Manyinka 
gens of the Kansa.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. 
B. A. E., 230, 1897. 

Manzanita (Span.: ‘little apple’, but 
referring here to Arctostaphyla manza¬ 
nita). A reservation of 640 acres of un¬ 
patented desert land occupied by 59 so- 
called Mission Indians, situated 170 m. 
from Mission Tule River agency, s. Cal.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902; Kelsey, Rep., 
25, 1906. 

Manzano (Span.: ‘apple tree’). A small 
New Mexican village 6 m. n. w. of the 
ruins of Quarai and about 25 m. e. of the 
Rio Grande, at which is an old apple 
orchard that probably dates from the 
mission period prior to 1676. Whether 
the orchard pertained to the neighboring 
mission of Quarai, or whether the former 
Tigua settlement adjacent to Manzano had 
an independent mission, is not known. 
A remnant of the Tigua now living near 
El Paso claim to have come from this and 
neighboring pueblos of the Salinas coun¬ 
try. The aboriginal name of the pueblo 
near Manzano is unknown. The present 
white village dates from 1829. Consult 
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 259 
et seq., 1892. See Pueblos, Tanoan, Tigua. 

Mansano.— Abert quoted in Trans. Am. Ethnol. 
Soc., II, xciv, 1848. Manzana.— Pac. R. R. Rep., Ill, 
pt. 4, 98, 1856. Manzanas. —Parke, map N. Mex., 
1851. Manzano. —Edwards, Campaign, map, 1847. 

Maon. An unidentified tribe on upper 
Cumberland r., at the beginning of the 
18th century; perhaps the Cherokee, or 
possibly the Shawnee.—Tonti ( ca. 1700) 
in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 82,1846. 

Maple sugar. In some of the Eastern 
states and parts of Canada the production 
of maple sugar and sirup is one of the 
thriving industries of the country. The 
census statistics of 1900 show that during 
the year 1899 there were made in the 
United States 11,928,770 pounds of maple 
sugar and 2,056,611 gallons of sirup. 
The total values of the sugar and sirup 
for 1899 were respectively $1,074,260 and 
$1,562,451. The production of maple 
sirup seems to have increased somewhat, 
while that of maple sugar appears to have 
declined. This industry is undoubtedly 
of American Indian origin. The earliest 
extended notice of maple sugar is “An 
Accountof a sortof Sugarmadeof the Juice 
of the Maple in Canada,” published in the 
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal 
Society for 1684-85, where it is stated that 
“the savages have practiced this art 
longer than any now living among them 
can remember.” In the Philosophical 
Transactions for 1720-21 is printed an ac- 


804 


MAQKUANANI-MARAMEG 


[b. a. e. 


count of sugar-making in New England 
by a Mr Dudley. The Indian origin of 
maple sugar is indicated also by notices in 
Joutel; Lafiteau, who states directly that 
“the French make it better than tl\e 
Indian women, from whom they have 
learned how to make it”; Bossu, who 
gives similar details about French sugar¬ 
making in the Illinois country; and other 
early writers. In various parts of the 
country the term “Indian sugar” 
(Canad. Settlers’ Guide, 66, 1860) has 
been in use, affording further proof of the 
origin of the art of making maple sugar 
among the aborigines. Some of the In¬ 
dian names of the trees from which the 
sap is obtained afford additional evidence, 
while maple sap and sugar appear in the 
myths and legends of the Menominee, 
Chippewa, and other tribes. The tech¬ 
nique of maple-sugar making also reveals 
its Indian origin, not merely in the uten¬ 
sils employed, but also in such devices as 
straining through hemlock boughs, cool¬ 
ing on the snow, etc. For maple sugar 
cooled on the snow the Canadian- 
French dialect has a special term, tire , 
besides a large number of special words, 
like sucrerie, ‘ maple-sugar bush ’; toque, 

‘ sugar snowball ’; trempette , ‘ maple-sugar 
sop’, etc. The English vocabulary of 
maple-sugar terms is not so numerous. 
Humbo (q. v.), a New Hampshire term for 
‘maple sirup,’ is said to be of Indian 
origin. The details of the evidence of the 
Indian origin of this valuable food product 
will be found in H. W. Henshaw, “Indian 
Origin of Maple Sugar,” Am. Anthrop., 
hi, 341-351,1890, and Chamberlain, “The 
Maple amongst the Algonkian Tribes,” 
ibid., iv, 39-43, 1891, and “Maple Sugar 
and the Indians,” ibid., 381-383. See 
also Loskiel, Hist. Miss. United Breth., 
179,1794. (a.f.c.) 

Maqkuanani ( Ma'qkuana'ni , ‘ red-tail 
hawk’). A subphratry or gens of the 
Menominee.—Hoffman in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 1896. 

Maquanago. A former village, probably 
of the Potawatomi, near Waukesha, s. e. 
Wis., on lands ceded to the United States 
in 1833.—Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 
Wis. map, 1899. 

Maquantequat. A tribe or band at war 
with Maryland in 1639 (Bozman, Md., n, 
164, 1837). The commission to Nicholas 
Hervey, from which Bozman obtained his 
information, does not give the locality of 
these Indians, but indicates that they re¬ 
sided in the territory of the colony. In 
the Archives (Proc. Council, 1636-67, 
363,1885), “Indians of Maquamticough” 
are mentioned; these are undoubtedly 
the same, but the locality has not been 
identified further than that it was on the 
Eastern shore. It is possible they were 
not Algonquian, 


Mancantequuts. — Md. Archives, Proc. Council 
1636-67,87,1886. Maquamticough. —Ibid., 36. Ma¬ 
quantequat. —Bozman, Md., n, 164, 1837. 

Maquinanoa. A Chumashan village be¬ 
tween Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal., 
in 1542. 

Maquinanoa. —Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Colec. 
Doc. Fla., 183, 1857. Maquin, Nanoa.— Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17,1863 (mistaken for two vil¬ 
lages). 

Maquinna. A chief of the Mooachaht, 
a Nootka tribe, who attained notoriety as 
the chief who captured the brig Boston , 
in Mar., 1803, and massacred all of her 
crew except the blacksmith, John 
Jewitt, and a sailmaker named Thomp¬ 
son. After being held in captivity until 
July, 1805, they were liberated by Capt. 
Hill of the brig Lydia, also of Boston. 
The story of the captivity of these two 
men was afterward extracted from Jewitt 
by Roland Alsop of Middletown, Conn., 
and published in America and Europe. 
A point near the entrance of Nootka sd. 
is now called Maquinna pt. See Narra¬ 
tive of the Adventures and Sufferings of 
John R. Jewitt, in'various editions from 
1815 to 1869. (j. r. s.) 

Maracock. See Maypop. 

Marameg (from Man-um-aig, Chippewa 
for ‘catfish.’—Verwyst). Evidently a 
band or division of the Chippewa, which 
seems to have been, at the dawn of the 
history of the upper lake region, in the 
process of disintegration. The first notice 
of them is that given by Dablon in the Jes¬ 
uit Relation of 1670, at which time they 
resided on L. Superior, apparently along 
the e. half of the n. shore. They were 
then in close union with the Sauteurs, or 
Chippewa of Sault Ste Marie. Dablon, 
speaking of the Chippewa of the Sault, 
says: “These are united with three other 
nations, who are more than 550 persons, 
to whom they granted like rights of their 
native country. . . . These are the 

Noquets who are spread along the s. side 
of L. Superior, where they are the orig¬ 
inals; and the Outchibous with the Mara¬ 
meg of the n. side of the same lake, which 
they regard as their proper country.” 
Here the Chippewa of the n. side of the 
lake are distinguished from those of Sault 
Ste Marie to the same extent as are the 
Marameg and Noquet. The Chippewa 
settlement at the Sault, where the fishing 
was excellent, seems to have drawn 
thither the other divisions, as this gave 
them strength and control of the food 
supply. The early notices of the Mara¬ 
meg and Noquet appear to indicate that 
these two tribes became absorbed by the 
Chippewa and their tribal or subtribal 
distinction lost, but there are reasons 
(see Noquet and Menominee) for believing 
that these two peoples were identical. 
Tailhan, in his notes on Perrot’s M6moire, 
assumes without question that the two 
tribes were incorporated with the Chip- 


BULL. 30] 


MARAMOYDOS 


MARICOPA 


805 


pewa of the Sault, who were distinguished 
by the name Pahouitigouchirini. The 
Marameg are mentioned under the name 
Malamechs in the Proces-verbal of the 
Prise de Possession in 1671 as present at 
the conference on that occasion. Accord¬ 
ing to Shea they are mentioned in the MS. 
Jesuit Relation of 1672-73 as being near 
the Mascoutin, who were then on Fox 
r., Wis. If, as supposed, the people of 
this tribe are those referred to by La 
Chesnaye (Margry, vi, 6) under the name 
“Malanas ou gens de la Barbue,” they 
must have resided in 1697, in part at least, 
at Shaugavvaumikong (the present Bay- 
field, Wis.), on the s. shore of L. Su¬ 
perior. The attempt to identify them 
with the “Miamis of Maramek” men¬ 
tioned in a document of 1695 (N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., ix, 619) as residing on Mara- 
mec (Kalamazoo) r., in Michigan, is cer¬ 
tainly erroneous. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Gens de la Barbue. —La Chesnaye (1697) in Mar¬ 
gry, D6c., vi, 6, 1886. Malamechs.— Prise de Pos¬ 
session (1671), ibid., I, 97, 1875. Malanas.— La 
Chesnaye, op. cit. Marameg. —Jes. Rel. 1669-70, 
Thwaites ed., liv, 133, 1899. 

Maramoydos. A former Diegueno ran- 
cheria near San Diego, s. Cal.—Ortega 
(1775) quoted by Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i, 
254, 1884. 

Maraton. A Chowanoc village in 1585 
on the e. bank of Chowan r. , in Chowan 
co., N. C. 

Maraton.— Smith (1629), Va., I, map, repr. 1819. 
Mavaton. —Martin, N. C.,I, 13,1829. Waratan.— 
Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist., i, 1856. 

Marble. The various forms of the car¬ 
bonates of lime and magnesia, classed as 
marbles, were used to some extent by 
the Indian tribes for carvings, utensils, 
and ornaments. They include many va¬ 
rieties of ordinary marbles such as are 
used for building, as well as the cave 
forms known as stalactite, deposited as 
pendent masses by dripping water, and 
stalagmite, which is deposited by the 
same agency upon the floor. Travertine 
formed by rivers and springs is of nearly 
identical character. These deposits fre¬ 
quently present handsome translucent and 
banded effects. The purer, less highly 
colored varieties are sometimes called 
alabaster (see Gypsum), and the compact, 
beautifully marked forms are known as 
onyx. See Mines and Quarries. 

(w. H. H.) 

Maria. A Micmac settlement in Maria 
township, Bonaventure co., Quebec, con¬ 
taining 80 Indians in 1884, 93 in 1904. 

Mariames. A tribe mentioned by Ca- 
beza de Vaca as living, in 1528-34, “be¬ 
hind” the Quevenes, probably in the 
vicinity of Matagorda bay, Texas. The 
people subsisted mainly on roots and 
seem never to have enjoyed plenty ex¬ 
cept in the season of the prickly pears. 
They ground the bones of fish, mixed 
the dust with water, and used the paste 


as food. They are said to have killed 
their female infants to prevent their fall¬ 
ing into the hands of their enemies, and 
also, because of their continued warfare, 
to avoid the temptation of marrying 
within their tribe. The region where 
the Mariames lived was within the later 
domain of the Karankawan tribes, which 
are now extinct (see Gatschet, Karan- 
kawa Inds., 46, 1891). Manzanet (1670) 
mentions a tribe called the Muruam, 
probably identical with this, and Orozco 
Berra (Geog., 303, 1864) mentions the 
ahuames as a former tribe of n. e. Mexico 
or s. Texas, which was gathered into the 
mission of San Juan Bautista, Coahuila, 
in 1699. These also may be identical. 

(a. c. F. ) 

Mahuames.— Orozco y Berra, op. cit. (identical?). 
Mariames. —Cabeza de Vaca (1542), Bandelier 
trans., 82,1905. Marianes. —Cabeza de Vaca, Narr., 
Smith trans., 58,1851. Marians. —Harris, Voy. and 
Trav., i, 802,1705. Mariarves. —Cabeza de Vaca, 
Narr., Smith trans., 93,1871. Muruam.— Manzanet 
(1690), MS., cited by H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 1906(iden- 
tical?). 

Marian. The Christian Hurons, so 
called by their pagan brethren on account 
of their frequent repetition of the name 
of Mary.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 183, 1855. 

Maricopa. An important Yuman tribe 
which since early in the 19th century has 
lived with and below the Pima and 
from about lat. 35° to the mouth of Rio 

WM , n 1 ■ I 



MARICOPA MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


Gila, s. Ariz. In 1775, according to Gar- 
c6s, their rancherias extended about 40 
m. along the Gila from about the mouth 
of the Hassayampa to the Aguas Cali- 
entes, although Garc6s adds that ‘ ‘ some 
of them are found farther downriver.” 
They call themselves Pipatsje , ‘people,’ 




806 


MARICOPA 


[B. a. e. 


Maricopa being their Pima name. 
Emory states that they have moved grad¬ 
ually from the Gulf of California to their 
present location in juxtaposition with the 
Pima, Carson having found them, as late 
as 1826, at the mouth of the Gila. They 
joined the Pima, whose language they do 
not understand, for mutual protection 



MARICOPA WOMAN. (am. Mus. Nat. Hist.) 


against their kindred, but enemies, tne 
Yuma, and the two have ever since lived 
peaceably together. In 1775 the Mari¬ 
copa and the Yuma were at war, and as 
late as 1857 the latter, with some Mohave 
and Yavapai, attacked the Maricopa near 
Maricopa Wells, s. Ariz., but with the 
aid of the Pima the Maricopa routed the 
Yuma and their allies, 90 of the 93 Yuma 
warriors being killed. After this disaster 
the Yuma never ventured so far up the 
Gila. Heintzelman states, probably cor¬ 
rectly, that the Maricopa are a branch of 
the Cuchan (Yuma proper), from whom 
they separated on the occasion of an elec¬ 
tion of chiefs (H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 1857). Like the Pima, the Mari¬ 
copa are agriculturists, and in habits and 
customs are generally similar to them. 
Venegas (Hist. Cal., n, 182,185,192,1759) 
states that about 6,000 Pima and Coco- 
maricopa lived on Gila r. in 1742, and that 
they extended also to the Salado and the 
Verde; they are also said to have had 
some rancherias on the w. side of Colo¬ 
rado r., in a valley 36 leagues long. 
Garc4s estimated the population at 3,000 
in 1775. There were only 350 under the 
Pima school superintendent, Arizona, in 
1905. 

By act of Feb. 28, 1859, a reservation 
was set apart for the Maricopa and the 


Pima on Gila r., Ariz.; this was enlarged 
by Executive order of Aug. 31, 1876; re¬ 
voked and other lands set apart by Execu¬ 
tive order of June 14, 1879; enlarged by 
Executive orders of May 5, 1882, and 
Nov. 15,1883. No treaty was ever made 
with them. 

The following rancherias and other set¬ 
tlements at different periods are judged, 
from their situation, to have belonged to 
the Maricopa tribe: Aicatum, Amoque, 
Aopomue, Aqui, Aquimundurech, Aritu- 
toc, Atiahigui, Aycate, Baguiburisac, Ca- 
borh, Caborica, Cant, Choutikwuchik, 
Coat, Cocoigui, Cohate, Comarchdut, Cua- 
buridurch, Cudurimuitac, Dueztumac, 
Gohate, Guias, Hinama, Hiyayulge, 



MARICOPA YOUNG MAN AND WOMAN 


Hueso Parado (in part), Khauwesheta- 
wes, Kwatchampedau, Norchean, Nosca- 
ric, Oitac, Ojiataibues, Pipiaca, Pitaya, 
Rinconada, Sacaton, San Bernardino, San 
Geronimo, San Martin, San Rafael, San¬ 
tiago, Sasabac, Shobotarcham, Sibagoida, 
Sibrepue, Sicoroidag, Soenadut, Stucabi- 
tic, Sudac, Sudacsasaba, Tadeo Vaqui, 








BULL. 30] 


MARIN-MARIPOSAN FAMILY 


807 


Tahapit, Toa, Toaedut, Tota, Tuburch, 
Tuburh, Tubutavia, Tucavi, Tucsani, Tuc- 
sasic, Tuesapit, Tumac, Tuquisan, Tuto- 
magoidag, Uparch, Upasoitac, Uitorrum, 
Urchaoztac, and Yayahaye. (f. w. h. ) 

A tchihwa'.— Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., n, 123, 1877 
(Yavapai name). A'wp-pa-pa.— Grossman, Pima 
and Papago vocab., B. A. E., 1871 (Pima name). 
Cocamaricopa.— Kino (ca. 1699) in D#c. Hist. Mex., 
4th s., I, 349, 1856. Cocomarecopper. —Pattie, Pers. 
Narr., 92,1833. Cocomari. —Carver, Travels, map, 
1778. Cocomaricopas. —D’Anville, map Am. Sept., 
1746. Cocomarisepas. —Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la 
Conquista, 361, 1742. Cocomiracopas. —Hughes, 
Doniphan’s Exped., 220-1,1848. Cokomaricopas.— 
D’Anville, map N. A. (Bolton’s ed.), 1752. Co- 
maniopa. —Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 405, 
1748. Comaricopas. —Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1763), 24, 
103,1863. Coro Marikopa.— Eastman, map (1853) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 24-25, 1854. Mapico- 

£ as. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 520, 1878. 

taracopa.— Cooke in Emory, Recon., 561, 1848. 
Marecopas.— Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 57, 1850. 
Maricopa.— Emory, Recon., 89,1848. Miracopas.— 
Hughes, Doniphan’s Exped., 221, 1848. Miroco- 
pas.— Ibid. Oohpap.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 
160,1885 (Oopdpor;Pima name for). Oopap.— Ibid. 
Oopas.— Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1763), 24,1863. Opas.— 
Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 297, 301, 1759. Ozaras.— 
Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), Rel., in Land of Sun¬ 
shine, 106, Jan. 1900 (probably identical). Ozar- 
rar. — Bandelier (after Salmeron) in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, ill, 110, 1890. Fi-pas. —A.Hrdlicka, inf’n, 
1905 (own name). Pipatsje. —ten Kate, Reizen in 
N. A., 160,1885 (‘people ’: own name). Si-ke-na.— 
White, MS. Hist. Apaches, 1875, B. A.E. (Apache 
name for Pima, Papago, and Maricopa: ‘living 
in sand houses,’ from Apache sai ‘sand,’ ki ‘house’; 
pronounced Sai'kine). Ta’hba.— Gatschet, 
Yuma-Spr., 86, 1886 (Yavapai name). Tchihoga- 
sat. —Ibid. (Havasupai name). Widshi itikapa. — 
Ibid., 371,1886 (Tonto name; also applied to Pima 
and Papago). 

Marin. A chief of the Licatiut, appar¬ 
ently a band or village of the Gallinomero, 
about the present San Rafael, Marin co., 
Cal., in the early part of the 19th century. 
The Spanish accounts relating to him are 
conflicting. According to the most defi¬ 
nite authority he was defeated and cap¬ 
tured in battle with Spanish troops in 1815 
or 1816 and carried to San Francisco, but 
escaped and resumed hostilities from his 
refuge place on the Marin ids. He was 
retaken in 1824, and accepting his fate, 
retired to San Rafael mission, where he 
died in 1834, or, according to other ac¬ 
counts, as late as 1848. The county takes 
its name from him. See Bancroft, Hist. 
Cal., ii, vii, 1886-1890. 

Maringoman’s Castle. A palisaded vil¬ 
lage, so named after a Waoranec chief 
who occupied it in 1635, formerly on Mur¬ 
derer’s cr., at Bloominggrove, Orange co., 
N. Y.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 94, 
1872. 

Mariposan Family (adapted from Span. 
mariposa, ‘butterfly,’ the name of a coun¬ 
ty in California). The name applied by 
Powell to a linguistic stock of Indians, 
generally known as Yokuts, in San Joa¬ 
quin valley, Cal. Their territory ex¬ 
tended from the lower Sierra Nevada to 
the Coast range, and from mounts Pinos 
and Tehachapi to Fresno and Chowchilla 
rs. A separate body dwelt in the n., in 


a narrow strip of territory along the San 
Joaquin, between Tuolumne and Cala¬ 
veras rs., about the site of Stockton. 
These were the Cholovone. The Coco- 
noon, said to have been Mariposan, occu¬ 
pied an area within the limits of Moque- 
lumnan territory. 

Physically the southern members of 
this family, from Kaweah and Tule rs. 
and from Tejon, are very similar to the 
Yuman tribes of s. California. They are 
fairly tall (169 cm.) and rather short¬ 
headed (cephalic index 82 to 83). Their 
superficial appearance is rather similar to 
that of the tribes of central California. 
They are not infrequently fat (Boas in 
Proc. A. A. A. S., xliv, 261-9,1896). 

Their houses, especially those in the 
plains, were generally made of tules, and 
were often erected in rows, a village of 
the tribes about Tulare lake consisting of 
a row of such houses united into one. 
These long communal houses had an en¬ 
trance and a fireplace for each family. 
Earth-covered sweat-houses were also 
built. Their implements and utensils 
were generally rude; the working of wood 
seems to have been confined to a few 
objects, such as bows and pipes, true 
wood carving not being practised. Their 
bows were of two types, one used for war 
and one for the hunt. Some of the tribes 
made a very crude and undecorated pot¬ 
tery similar to that of their Shoshonean 
neighbors of the mountains, which is the 
only occurrence of pottery in central Cali¬ 
fornia, and the art is probably a recent 
acquisition. The women were proficient 
basket makers, their product being pre¬ 
dominantly of the coiled type. Shapes 
with a flat top and restricted opening are 
characteristic of this region and of the 
Shoshoneans immediately to the e. 

The social organization of the tribes 
was very simple, with no trace of totem- 
ism or of any gentile system. Prohibi¬ 
tion of marriage extended only to actually 
known blood relationships, entirely irre¬ 
spective of groups. Chieftainship tended 
to be hereditary in the male line. The 
groups, or tribes, had more solidarity 
than elsewhere in California, as is shown 
by the occurrence of well-recognized 
names for the tribes. Hostilities were 
occasionally carried on between groups or 
with Shoshonean tribes, but in general 
the tribes were peaceful and friendly, 
even with their neighbors speaking alien 
languages. An initiation ceremony for 
young men consisted of a period of prepa¬ 
ration followed by an intoxication pro¬ 
duced by a decoction of jimson weed. A 
puberty ceremony for girls w r as not prac¬ 
tised. The tabus and restrictions applied 
chiefly to childbirth and death. Death 
was followed by singing, dancing, and 
wailing. The body was buried or burned, 


808 


MARMASECE-MARRIAGE 


[b. a. b. 


the practice varying with the different 
tribes; the property of the deceased was 
destroyed, his house burned, and his 
name tabued. There was an elaborate 
annua?, mourning ceremony for the dead 
of the year, which took place about a 
large fire in which much property was 
consumed. This ceremony, which has 
been described as the Dance of the Dead, 
was followed by dancing of a festive char¬ 
acter. 

The Mariposan Indians w T ere encoun¬ 
tered by the Spaniards soon after their set¬ 
tlement in California, and with the other 
tribes of San Joaquin valley were gener¬ 
ally known as Tularenos, etc., from the 
name of the lakes and of San Joaquin r., 
which during the Mission period bore the 
name Rio de los Tulares. No very con¬ 
siderable portion of the group seems to 
have come under the control of the Fran¬ 
ciscan missionaries, but there was some 
intercourse and trade between the con¬ 
verted Indians of the coast regions and 
the Mariposan tribes of the interior. The 
Cholovone, Ohukchansi, Tachi, Telamni, 
and other tribes were, however, at least 
in part, settled at San Antonio, San Juan 
Bautista, and other missions. 

On the sudden overrunning of their 
country by the w’hites after the discov¬ 
ery of gold in California, the Indians of 
this family were either friendly or unable 
to make an effectual resistance. The 
Kaweah river tribes seem to have been 
the most hostile to the Americans, but 
no general Indian war took place in their 
territory, and treaties were made with 
all the tribes in 1851, by which they 
ceded the greater part of their territory 
(Roycein 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1900). 
Many of the northern tribes were soon 
gathered on the Fresno River res., near 
Madera, and the southern tribes at Tejon; 
but the former w r as abandoned in 1859 and 
the latter in 1864. The Indians at Tejon 
were removed to Tule r., where, after an¬ 
other removal, the present Tule River 
res. w T as set apart for them in 1873 and 
occupied in 1876. The Indians of this 
reservation, mostly from Tejon and from 
Tule and Kaweah rs., numbered 154 
in 1905. North of Tule r. the remaining 
Indians of this stock now live in and near 
their old homes; their numbers have 
greatly decreased and are not accurately 
known, while the Cholovone seem to be 
extinct. 

About 40 tribes, each of about the nu¬ 
merical size of a village community, but 
possessing a distinct dialect, constituted 
the Yokuts or Mariposan family. About 
half of these are now extinct. These 
tribes, according to information furnished 
by Dr A. L. Kroeber, were the Cholovone, 
or, more correctly, Chulamni, about Stock- 
ton; the Chaushila, Chukchansi, Talinehi 


(properly Dalinchi), Heuchi, Toltichi, 
Pitkachi, Iloyima, Tumna (Dumna), and 
Kechayi, on San Joaquin r. and n. to 
Chowchilla r.; the Kassovo (Gashowu), 
on Dry cr.; the Choinimni, Michahai, 
Chukaimina, Iticha (Aiticha), Toikhichi, 
Wechikhit, Nutunutu, Wimilchi, Apiachi, 
and perhaps the Kochiyali, on Kings r.; 
the Tachi, Chunut, and Wowol, on Tulare 
lake, and the Tulamni and a tribe remem¬ 
bered only as Khomtinin (‘southerners’) 
on the smaller lakes to the s.; the Kawia 
(Gawia), Yokol or Yokod, Wikchamni, 
Wolasi, Telamni, and Choinok, on 
Kaweah r.; and the Yaudanchi, Bokni- 
nuwad, Kumachisi, Koyeti, Paleuyami, 
Truhohayi, and Yauelmani, on the 
streams from Tule r. to Kern r. 

Names given as if of Yokuts tribes, 
but which may be place names or may 
refer to Shoshonean or other groups, 
are Carise, Caruana, Chebontes, Chet.ic- 
newash, Holeclame, Holmiuk, Lena- 
huon, Nonous, Sohonut, and Tatagua; 
also, entirely unidentifiable, Amonce, 
Kowsis, Nopthrinthres, Oponoche, and 
Ptolme. 

Mariposa. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 
84, 1856. Mariposan. —Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 
90, 1891. Noaches.— Cortez (1799) in Pae. R. R. 
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 120, 1856. Noche. —Garc£s (1776), 
Diary, 279 et seq., 1900. Nochi. —Font (1777), map, 
in Garc6s, ibid. Yocut.— Bancroft, Native Races, 
i, 457, 1874. Yo'kuts. —Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., m, 369. 1877. 

Marmasece. Reported by some old 
Lummi as an extinct tribe on Puget 
sd., Wash., in about the habitat of their 
own people, by whom they may have 
been exterminated. They are also said 
to have killed three white men before 
the occupancy of the country by the 
Hudson’s Bay Co. or the arrival of the 
first ships. 

Mar-ma-sece. —Fitzhugh in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857,327, 
1858. 

Marracou. A tow n and tribe, probably 
Timuquanan, situated, in 1564, 40 leagues 
s. of the mouth of the St Johns r., Fla.— 
Laudonniere (1564) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., n. s., 279, 1869. 

Marriage. Except that marital unions 
depend everywhere on economic con¬ 
siderations, there is such diversity in the 
marriage customs of the natives of North 
America that no general description will 
apply beyond a single great cultural 
group. 

The Eskimo, except those tribes of 
Alaska that have been led to imitate the 
institutions of neighboring tribes of alien 
stocks, have no clan organization. Ac¬ 
cordingly the choice of a mate is barred 
only by specified degrees of kinship. In¬ 
terest and convenience govern the selec¬ 
tion. The youth looks for a competent 
housewife, the girl for a skilled hunter. 
There is no wedding ceremony. The man 
obtains the parents’ consent, presents his 


BULL. 30] 


MARRIAGE 


809 


wife with garments, and the marriage is 
completed. Frequently there are child 
betrothals, but these are not considered 
binding. Monogamy is prevalent, as the 
support of several wives is possible only 
for the expert hunter. Divorce is as in¬ 
formal as marriage; either party may 
leave the other on the slightest pretext, 
and may remarry. The husband may 
discard a shrewish or miserly wife, and 
the wife may abandon her husband if he 
maltreats her or fails to provide enough 
food. In such cases the children generally 
remain with the mother. 

On the N. W. coast marriage between 
members of the same clan is strictly for¬ 
bidden. The negotiations are usually 
carried on by the parents. The Kwakiutl 
purchases with his wife the rank and 
privileges of her family, to be surrendered 
later by her father to the children with 
interest, depending on the number of off¬ 
spring. When the debt is paid the father 
has redeemed his daughter, and the 
marriage is annulled unless the husband 
renews his payment. Among the other 
tribes of the group an actual sale of the 
girl is rare. The Tlingit, Tsimshian, 
coast Salish, and Bellacoola send gifts to 
the girl’s parents; but presents of nearly 
equal or even superior value are returned. 
Monogamy predominates. In case of sep¬ 
aration Salish parents divide their chil¬ 
dren according to special agreement. 
Among the Tlingit, Haida, Tsimshian, 
and Heiltsuk the children always belong 
to the mother. If a husband expels his 
wife from caprice he must return her 
dowry; if she has been unfaithful he 
keeps the dowry and may demand his 
wedding gifts. 

On the lower Pacific coast the clan 
system disappears. The regulations of 
the Indians of California vary consider¬ 
ably. Some tribes have real purchase 
of women; others ratify the marriage 
merely by an exchange of gifts. Polyg¬ 
amy is rare. Divorce is easily accom¬ 
plished at the husband’s wish, and where 
wives are bought the purchase money is 
refunded. Among the Hupa the husband 
can claim only half of his payment if he 
keeps the children. Wintun men seldom 
expel their wives, but slink avyay from 
home, leaving their families behind. 

The Pueblos, representing a much 
higher stage of culture, show very differ¬ 
ent marriage conditions. The clan organ¬ 
ization is developed, there is no purchase, 
and the marriage is arranged by the par¬ 
ents or independently by the young cou¬ 
ple. The Zufii lover, after bringing ac¬ 
ceptable gifts, is adopted as a son by the 
father of his betrothed, and married life 
begins in her home. She is thus mistress 
of the situation; the children are hers, and 
she can order the husband from the house 
should occasion arise. 


Of the Plains Indians some had the 
gentile system, while others lacked it com¬ 
pletely. They seem to have practised 
polygamy more commonly, the younger 
sisters of a first wife being potential wives 
of the husband. Among the Pawnee and 
the Siksika the essential feature of the 
marriage ceremony was the presentation 
of gifts to the girl’s parents. In case of 
elopement the subsequent presentation 
of gifts legitimized the marriage and re¬ 
moved the disgrace which would other¬ 
wise attach to the girl and her family 
(Grinnell). The men had absolute power 
oyer their wives, and separation and 
divorce were common. The Hidatsa, 
Kiowa, and Omaha had no purchase. The 
women had a higher social position, and 
the wishes of the girls were consulted. 
Wives could leave cruel husbands. Each 
consort could remarry and the children 
were left in the custody of their mother 
or their paternal grandmother. Separa¬ 
tion was never accompanied by any 
ceremony. 

East of the Mississippi the clan and gen¬ 
tile systems were most highly developed. 
The rules against marriage within the clan 
or gens were strictly enforced. Descent of 
name and property was in the female line 
among the Iroquoian, Muskhogean, and 
s. e. Algonquian tribes, but in the male 
line among the Algonquians of the n. 
and w. Among some tribes, such as the 
Creeks, female descent did not prevent 
the subjection of women. As a rule, 
however, women had clearly defined 
rights. Gifts took the place of purchase. 
Courtship was practically alike in all the 
Atlantic tribes of the Algonquian stock; 
though the young men sometimes man¬ 
aged the matter themselves, the parents 
generally arranged the match. A Dela¬ 
ware mother would bring some game 
killed by her son to the girl’s relatives 
and receive an appropriate gift in return. 
If the marriage was agreed upon, presents 
of this kind were continued for a long 
time. A Delaware husband could put 
away his wife at pleasure, especially if she 
had no children, and a woman could leave 
her husband. The Hurons and the Iro¬ 
quois had a perfect matriarchate, which 
limited freedom of choice. Proposals 
made to the girl’s mother were submitted 
by her to the women’s council, whose 
decision was final among the Hurons. 
Iroquois unions were arranged by the 
mothers without the consent or knowledge 
of the couple. Polygamy was permissi¬ 
ble for a Huron, but forbidden to the 
Iroquois. Divorce was discreditable, but 
could easily be effected. The children 
went with the mother. 

Monogamy is thus found to be the 
prevalent form of marriage throughout 
the continent. The economic factor is 
everywhere potent, but an actual pur- 


810 


MARRISKINTOM-MASCOUTENS 


[b. a. e. 


chase is not common. The marriage bond 
is loose, and may, with few exceptions, 
be dissolved by the wife as well as by the 
husband. The cnildren generally stay 
with their mother, and always do in tribes 
having maternal clans. See Adoption, 
Captives , Child life, Clan and Gens , Gov¬ 
ernment, Kinship, Women. 

Consult Crantz, History of Greenland, 
1767; Boas, Central Eskimo, 1888; Nel¬ 
son, Eskimo about Bering Strait, 1899; 
Krause, Tlinkit-Indianer, 1885; Boas, 
Reps, on N. W. Tribes of Can. to Brit. 
A. A. S., 1889-98; Powers, Tribes of Cali¬ 
fornia, 1877; J. O. Dorsey, (1) Omaha 
Sociology, 1884; (2) Siouan Sociology, 
1897; Farrand, Basis of American His¬ 
tory, 1904; Goddard in Univ. Cal. Pub., 
Am. Archseol. and Ethnol., i, no. 1, 
1903; Mooney, Calendar Hist. Kiowa, 
1900; Grinnell, (1) Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
1892, (2) Pawnee Hero Stories, 1889; 
Cushing, Adventures in Zuni, Century 
Mag., 1883; Powell, Wyandot Govern¬ 
ment, 1881; Morgan, League of the Iro¬ 
quois, 1851; Heckewelder, Hist. Man¬ 
ners and Customs Indian Nations, 1876; 
Voth in Am. Anthrop., n, no. 2, 1900; 
Owen, Musquakie Folk-lore, 1904; Dixon 
in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat, Hist., xvii, pt. 3, 
1905; Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xviii, pt. 1, 1902; Holm, Descr. 
New Sweden, 1834. (r. h. l. l. f.) 

Marriskintom. A village marked on 
Esnauts and Rajiilly’s map of 1777 on the 
e. side of lower Scioto r. in Ohio. It 
may have belonged to the Shawnee or to 
the Delawares, and is distinct from Mus¬ 
kingum. (j. m. ) 

Martha’s Vineyard Indians. Martha’s 
Vineyard id., off the s. coast of Massachu¬ 
setts, was called by the Indians Nope, 
or Capawac. These may have been the 
names of tribes on the island and the 
smaller islands adjacent. The Indians 
thereon were subject to the Wampanoag 
and were very numerous at the period of 
the first settlement, but their dialect dif¬ 
fered from those on the mainland. They 
seem not to have suffered by the great 
pestilence of 1617. In 1642 they were 
estimated at 1,500. The Mayhews car¬ 
ried on active missionary work among 
them and succeeded in bringing nearly 
all of them under church regulations and 
secured their friendship in King Philip’s 
war. In 1698 they were reduced to 
about 1,000, in 7 villages: Nashanekam- 
muck, Ohkonkemme, Seconchqut, Gay 
Head, Sanchecantacket or Edgartown, 
Nunnepoag, and Chaubaqueduck. In 
1764 there were only 313 remaining, and 
about this time they began to inter¬ 
marry with negroes, and the mixed race 
increased so that in 1807 there were about 
360, of whom only about 40 were of pure 
blood. At that time they lived in 5 vil¬ 


lages on or near the main island, the 
majority being at Gay Head. Soon 
thereafter they ceased to have any sepa¬ 
rate enumeration as Indians. (j. m.) 
Vineyard Indians. —Alden (1797) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., V, 56, 1816. 

Martinez. A small village on Torres 
res., under the Mission agency, s. Cal.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 170, 1904. 

Martoughquaunk. A village of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on Matta- 
pony r., in Caroline co., Va.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Marychkenwikingh (from Men’achkha- 
wik-ink, ‘ at his fenced or fortified house,’ 
referring, no doubt, to its being the resi¬ 
dence of the sachems.—Tooker). A vil¬ 
lage formerly on the site of Red Hook, 
in what is now the twelfth ward of Brook¬ 
lyn, Long Island, N. Y., in Canarsee 
territory. 

Marechhawieck.— Treaty of 1645 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., XIII, 18, 1881. Marechkawick. —Doc. of 1643 
quoted by Tooker, Algonq. Ser., ii, 10, 1901. 
Marechkawieck. —Doc. of 1644 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., XIV, 56, 1883. Marychkenwikingh. —Deed of 
1637, ibid., 5. Merechkawick.— Doc. of 1645 cited 
by Tooker, op. cit. Merrakwick. —Doc. of 1648 
cited by Tooker, ibid. 

Marysiche. A small Opata settlement 
in Sonora, Mexico.—Hrdlicka in Am. 
Anthrop., vi, 72, 1904. 

Masacauvi. A small Opata settlement 
in Sonora, Mexico.—Hrdlicka in Am. 
Anthrop., vi, 72, 1904. 

Masac’s Village. A former Potawatomi 
village on the w. bank of Tippecanoe r., 
in the n. e. part of Fulton co., Ind., on a 
reservation sold in 1836. The name is 
also written Mosack. (j. m. ) 

Masamacush. A name of Hood’s 
salmon ( Salmo hoodii), found in the 
fresh-water lakes of the Atlantic slope of 
Canada (Rep. U. S. Com. Fish., 1872-73, 
p. 159): from masamegos or masamekus, 
a name of the salmon-trout in the Chip¬ 
pewa and Cree dialects of Algonquian. 
The word signifies, ‘like a trout,’ from 
namekus, ‘trout,’ and the prefix mas-, 
which has somewhat the force of the 
English suffix -ish. (a. f. c.) 

Mascalonge. See Maskinonge. 

Maschal. A Chumashan village given in 
Cabrillo’s Narrative as on San Lucas id., 
Cal., in 1542; located on Santa Cruz id. 
by Taylor in 1863 and by San Buenaven¬ 
tura Indians in 1884. 

Maschal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. 
Mas-teal.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. Maxul. —Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) , in 
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 181,1857. 

Mascoming. A Weapomeioc village, in 
1585, on the north shore of Albemarle sd., 
in Chowan co., N. C., adjoining the ter¬ 
ritory of the Chowanoc. (j. m. ) 

Mascoming. —Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, repr. 
1819. Muscamunge.— Lane (1586), ibid., I, 87. 

Mascoutens (‘little prairie people,’ from 
muskuta (Fox) or mashcod£ (Chippewa), 

‘ prairie’; ens, diminutiveending. By the 
Hurons they were called Assistaeronon, 


BULL. SO] 


mascoutens 


811 


‘Fire people,’ and by the French ‘Nation 
du Feu.’ These last names seem to have 
arisen from a mistranslation of the Algon- 
quian term. In the Chippewa dialect 
‘ fire ’ is ishkote, and might easily be substi¬ 
tuted for mashkode, ‘prairie’). A term 
used by some early writers in a collective 
and indefinite sense to designate the Algon- 
quian tribes living on the prairies of Wis¬ 
consin and Illinois; La Salle even includes 
some bands of Sioux under the name. The 
name ( Mashkotens ) is at present applied 
by the Potawatomi to that part of the 
tribe officially known as the “Prairie 
band” and formerly residing on the 
prairies of n. Illinois. The modern 
Foxes use the term MuskutJwa to 
designate themselves, the Wea, Pianka- 
shaw, Peoria, and Kaskaskia, on account 
of their former residence on the prairies 
of Illinois and Indiana. Gallatin was not 
inclined to consider them a distinct tribe, 
and Schoolcraft was of the opinion that 
they, together with the Kickapoo, were 
parts of one tribe. It is asserted by the 
Jesuit Allouez that the Kickapoo and 
Kitchigami spoke the same Algonquian 
dialect as the Mascoutens. Gallatin says 
the Sauk, Foxes, and Kickapoo “speak 
precisely the same language. ’ ’ Their close 
association with the Kickapoo would indi¬ 
cate an ethnic relation. According to an 
Ottawa tradition recorded by Schoolcraft 
there was at an early day a ti;ibe known 
as Assegun (q. v.), or Bone Indians, re¬ 
siding in the vicinity of Michilimackinac. 
These, after a severe contest, were driven 
by the Ottawa into the southern peninsula 
of Michigan as far as Grand r. During this 
war on the eastern shore of L. Michigan 
the Ottawa and Chippewa, who had con¬ 
federated with them, became involved in 
a quarrel with a people known as Mush- 
kodainsug (or Mascoutens). From this 
period, according to the tradition, the 
Assegun and Mascoutens were confeder¬ 
ates, and were driven still farther south¬ 
ward in the peninsula, after which they 
are lost to the tradition, except that it 
attributes to them the well known ‘‘gar¬ 
den beds” of southwestern Michigan. 
Although this tradition stands to a large 
extent alone, it is possibly not wholly un¬ 
supported. The chief items which seem 
to accord with it are the close relations 
betweentheMascoutensandtheSauk,who 
are known to have resided at an early 
period in the lower Michigan peninsula, 
whence they passed into Wisconsin, where 
the two tribes were found closely asso¬ 
ciated; and the statement by Denonville 
(N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 378) that Cham¬ 
plain, in 1612, found (heard of) the peo¬ 
ple of this tribe residing at Sakinan, or 
Saginaw bay. To the same locality have 
the Sauk been traced. Although the evi¬ 
dence is not entirely satisfactory, it is 


probable that this tribe entered Wisconsin 
from southern Michigan, passing around 
the southern end of L. Michigan. 

The first mention of the Mascoutens is 
by Champlain, in 1616, under the name 
Asistagueroiion (CEuvres, iv, 58, 1870); 
on his map (v, 1384) he locates them, 
under the name Assistagueronons, beyond 
and s. of L. Huron, L. Michigan being 
unknown to him. He says the Ottawa 
were then at war with them. Sagard 
(1636) places them nine or ten days 
journey w. of the s. end of Georgian bay 
(Hist, du Canada, 194,1866). According 
to the Jesuit Relation for 1640 they were 
then at war with the Neuters, who were 
allies of the Ottawa. The first actual con¬ 
tact of the French with the Mascoutens of 
which there is any record was the visit 
of Perrot to their village near Fox r. Wis., 
previous to 1669. Winsor (Cartier to 
Frontenac, 152) says Nicolet visited their 
village in 1634. That he passed up Fox r., 
probably to the portage, is doubtless true, 
but that he visited the Mascoutens is not 
positively known, as it is stated in the 
Jesuit Relation for 1646 that up to that 
time they had seen no European, and 
that the name of God had not reached 
them. They were visited in 1670 by 
Allouez and in 1673 by Marquette, both 
finding them in their village near the port¬ 
age between Fox and Wisconsin rs., living 
in close relation with the Miami and the 
Kickapoo. After the visit by Marquette 
they are mentioned by Hennepin, who 
places them in 1680 on L. Winnebago; 
though Membre at the same date locates 
at least a part of the tribe and some of 
the Foxes on Milwaukee r. Marest, 
writing in 1712, says that a short time 
previous thereto they had formed a set¬ 
tlement on the Ohio at the mouth of the 
Wabash, or more likely at Old Fort 
Massac, whose occupants had suffered 
greatly from contagious disorders. In 
the same year the upper Mascoutens and 
the Kickapoo joined the Foxes against 
the French. In the same year the Pot¬ 
awatomi and other northern tribes made 
a combined attack on the Mascoutens 
and Foxes at the siege of Detroit, killing 
and taking prisoners together nearly a 
thousand of both sexes. In 1718 the Mas- 
coutensand Kickapoo were living together 
in a single village on Rock r., Ill., and 
were estimated together at 200 men. In 
1736 the Mascoutens are mentioned as 
numbering 60 warriors, living with the 
Kickapoo on Fox r., Wis., and having the 
wolf and deer totems. These are among 
the existing gentes of the Sauk and Foxes. 
They are last mentioned as living in Wis¬ 
consin in the list of tribes furnished to 
James Buchanan (Sketches N. A. Inds., i, 
139) by Heckewelder, which relates to 
the period between 1770 and 1780. The 


812 


MASEWUK-MA8HPEE 


[b. a. e. 


last definite notice of them is in Dodge’s 
list of 1779, which refers to those on the 
Wabash in connection with the Pianka- 
shaw and Vermilions (Kickapoo). After 
this the Mascoutens disappear from his¬ 
tory, the northern group having probably 
been absorbed by the Sauk and Fox con¬ 
federacy, and the southern group by the 
Kickapoo. 

Notwithstanding some commendatory 
expressions by one or two of the early mis¬ 
sionaries, the Mascoutens, like the Kicka¬ 
poo, bore a reputation for treachery and 
deceit, but, like the Foxes, appear to have 
been warlike and restless. According to 
the missionaries, they worshiped the sun 
and thunder, but were not much given to 
religious rites and ceremonies, and did 
not honor as large a variety of minor deities 
as many other tribes; but such early state¬ 
ments regarding any tribe must be taken 
with allowance. Their petitions to their 
deities were usually accompanied by a 
gift of powdered tobacco. 

The missions established among the 
Mascoutens were St Francis Xavier and 
St James. (j m. c. t. ) 

Asistagueronon. —Champlain (1616), (Euvres, v, 1st 
pt., 275,1870. Asistagueroiion.— Ibid. (1616), IV, 58, 
1870. Assestagueronons. —Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes, 
IV, 206,1854. AssistaEctaeronnons. —Jes. Rel. 1670, 
99,1858. Assistaeronons. —Jes.Rel. 1670-1 quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 244,1854. Assistague- 
ronon. —Sagard (1636), Hist. Can., I, 194, 1864; 
Champlain (1632), (Euvres, v, map, 1870. Assis- 
taqueronons. —Champlain ( ca. 1630) as quoted by 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 244, 1854. Athistae- 
ronnon. —Jes. Rel. 1646, 77,1858. Atsistaehronons. — 
Jes. Rel. 1641, 72, 1858. Atsistagherronnons.— Jes. 
Rel. 1658, 22, 1858. Atsistaheroron.— Champlain, 
(Euvres, iv, 58, note, 1870. Atsistarhonon. —Sagard 
(1632), Can., iv, Huron Diet., 1866 (Huron name). 
Attistae. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 244, 1854 
(quoted from Ragueneau’s map in Jes. Rel., 1639- 
40). Attistaehronon.— Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858. 
Attistaeronons. —Jes. Rel. 1640 quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 244, 1854. Fire indians. — 
Drake, Bk. Inds., ix, 1848. Fire Nation. —School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 206, 1854. Gens de Feu. — 
Champlain (1616), (Euvres,iv,58,1870. Little Prai¬ 
rie Indians. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 307,1851. 
Machkoutench.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 99, 1858. Machkou- 
tenck.— Ibid., 97. Machkouteng.— Ibid., 100. Ha- 
coutens. —Vaugondy, Map of Am., 1778. Macou- 
tins.— Doc. of 1668 in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 
125, 1875. Makoiiten.— Hervas (ca. 1785) in Vater, 
Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816. Makoutensak.— Jes. 
Rel. 1658, 21,1868. Makskouteng. —Ibid., 1670, 94, 
1858. Mascautins. —Chauvignerie (1736) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 554, 1853. Masooaties. — 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 99,1816. Mascontans.— 
Morse, N. Am., 256, 1776. Mascontenec. —Browne 
in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 115, 1877. Mascontens. — 
Coxe, Carolana, 17, 1741. Mascontins. —Le Sueur 
(1692-3) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 419, 1885. 
Mascontires. —McKenneyand Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 
115, 1854. Mascordins. —Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., I, 
139,1824. Mascotens.— Gale, Upper Miss., 43,1867. 
Mascotins. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 307, 1851. 
Mascouetechs. —Perrot (ca. 1721), M6moire, 127, 
1864. Mascoutens. —LaSalle(1679)inMargry,D6c., 
i, 463,1875. Mascoutins. —Prisede Possession (1671) 
in N. Y.Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 803,1855. Mascoutons. — 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. Mashkou- 
tens.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 299, 1878. Mas- 
koutechs. —Bacquevillede la Potherie, Hist. Am., 
II, 49, 1753. Maskoutecks. —Ibid., 98. Maskou- 
teins. —Frontenac (1672) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ix, 92, 1855. Maskoutenek. —La Famine Council 
(1684), ibid., 238. Maskoutens. —La Salle (1682) in 
Margry, D6c., II, 215, 249, 258, 1877. Mask8tens.— 


Marquette map (ca. 1678) in Shea, Miss. Val., 
1852. Maskoutins.— Du Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 161, 1855. Maskuticks.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, III, 79, 1854. 
Mathkoutench. —Jes. Rel. 1671, 25, 1858. Mauscou- 
tens.— Iberville (1702) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
i, 341, 1872. Meadow Indians.— Howe, Hist. Coll., 
118,1851. Mecontins.— Le Sueur (ca. 1690) in Shea, 
Early Voy., 92, 1861. Mecoutins. —Neill, Hist. 
Minn., 154, 1858. Messcothins. —Boudinot, Star 
in the West, 127, 1816. Miscothins. —Hutchins 
(1778) in Jefferson, Notes, 144, 1825. Miscotins.— 
Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am. Jour. Geol., 272, 
1831. Moshkos.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 
336, 1872 (same?). Mosquitans. —Hough, map in 
Ind. Geol. Rep., 1883. Mosquitos. —Domenech, 
Deserts, I, 442, 1860. Motarctins, —St Cosme 
(1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 50, 1861. Muscoten. — 
Gale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Muscoutans. —Hil¬ 
dreth, Pioneer Hist., 129, 1848. Mushkodains.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 307, 1851. Mush-ko- 
dains-ug.— Ibid. (Ottawa name). Muskantins. — 
Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 (French name). 
Musketoons.— Writer of 1778 in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, hi, 561, 1853 (collective term for Wea, 
Piankashaw, etc.). Muskoghe. —Maximilian, 
Travels, 81, 1843 (incorrectly so called). Musko- 
tanje.— Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 (Ottawa 
name). Muskoutings. —Rasle (ca. 1723) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vm, 251,1819. Muskulthe. — 
Dalton (1783), ibid., 1st s., x, 123, 1809. Mus- 
kutawa. —Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. E., 1882. 

( = ‘prairie people’: Fox name, used collectively 
for themselves and the Wea, Piankashaw, Pe¬ 
oria, and Kaskaskia). Musquetens. —Conf. of 1766 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 860, 1856. Musqui- 
tans.— Writer of 1812 in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
ill, 554, 1853. Musquitoes.— Knox (1792) in Am. 
State Papers, Ind. Aff., 1,319,1832. Musquitons. — 
Hutchins (1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 
714, 1857. Nation du Feu. —Jes. Rel. 1641, 72,1858. 
Nation of Fire. —Jefferys, French Dorns., pt. 1, 48, 
1761. Odistastagheks. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 
99, 1816. 

Masewuk. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. 

Mashawauk ( Meshawagi , ‘elks’, for 
Meshavjtsuchlgi, ‘they who go by the 
name of the elk.’—W. J.). A gens of the 
Sauk and Foxes. See Sauk. 

Ma-sha-wa-uk'. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877. 
Meshawisutcig'. —Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Mashekakahquoh. See Little Turtle. 

Mashematak ( Ma-she'-md-tak, ‘ big 
tree’). A gens of the Sauk and Foxes.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877. See Sauk. 

Masherosqueck. A village on or near 
the coast of Maine in 1616, probably be¬ 
longing to the Abnaki.—Smith (1616) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3ds., vi, 107,1837. 

Mashik. An Aleut village at Port Mol- 
ler, Alaskapenin., Alaska; pop. 40 in 1880, 
76 in 1890. 

Mashik. —Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 45, 1881. Me- 
shik.— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893. 

Mashpee (from massa-pee or missi-pi, 
‘great pool.’—Kendall). A former settle¬ 
ment on a reservation on the coast of 
Marshpee tp., Barnstable co., Mass. The 
reservation was established in 1660 for 
the Christian Indians of the vicinity, 
known as South Sea Indians, but it was 
afterward recruited from all s. e. Massa¬ 
chusetts, and even from Long Island. In 
1698 they numbered about 285, and their 
population generally varied from 300 to 
400 up to the 19th century. They inter¬ 
married with negroes and afterward with 


BULL. 30] 


MA8I-MASKEGON 


813 


Hessians; in 1792 the mixed-bloods formed 
two-thirds of the whole body, and the 
negro element was then increasing, while 
the Indians were decreasing. In 1832 the 
mixed race numbered 315. (j. m. ) 

Marshpaug.— Cotton (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1sts., 1,204,1806. Marshpee.— Coffin (1761) in 
Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., iv, 271, 1856. Mashpah.— 
Rawson and Danforth (1698) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., x, 133, 1809. Mashpee.— Bourne 
(1674), ibid., 1 ,197, 1806. Mashpege.— Eliot (1673), 
ibid., x, 124, 1809. Mashpey —Hinckley (1685), 
ibid., 4fh s., v, 133, 1861. Masphis. —Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., Ill, 458,1788. Massapee. —Hawley (1762) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 113-14, 1809. Old 
Colony Indians.— Eliot quoted by Davis (1819), 
ibid., 2d s., IX, xxv, 1822. Southern Indians.— 
Ibid. South Sea Indians. —Freeman (1802), ibid.. 
1st 8., viii, 127,1802. 

Masi. The Masauu (Death-god) clan 
of the Hopi of Arizona. 

Masauwuu. —Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 93, 1905 
(trans. ‘ skeleton ’): Masi wihwu. —Fewkes in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 (winvrCL=‘ clan’). Ma-si 
wiin-wu.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 1894. 
Massauwu.— Dorsey and Voth, Oraibi Soyal, 13, 
1901 (trans. ‘skeleton’).. 

Masiaca. A settlement of the Mayo, 
apparently on the Rio Mayo, under the 
municipality of Promontorios, in the dis¬ 
trict of Alamos, s. w. Sonora, Mexico. 
The total population was 364 in 1900. See 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 608, 1864; Censo 
del Estado de Sonora, 1901. 

Masikota ( MasV'kotd , sing. MasV'kot , ap¬ 
parently from a rootdenoting ‘shriveled,’ 
‘drawn up ’). A principal division of the 
Cheyenne, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Grasshoppers.—Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. 
Pub. no. 103, 62,1905. Mah slhk' ku ta.— Grinnell, 
Social Org. Cheyennes, 143,1905. Ma sih kuh ta.— 
Ibid., 136. Matsi'shkota.— Clark quoted by Mooney 
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1026, 1896. 

Masilengya. The Drab Flute clan of 
the Hopi of Arizona. 

Macilehya wihwu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
583,1901 {winwii=' clan’). Ma-si'-len-ya wun-wii. — 
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 401, 1894. 

Masipa (‘coyote’). Given by Bourke 
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, n, 181, 1889) as a 
gens of the Mohave who are said to 
have been originally a band of the Mari¬ 
copa. 

Maskasinik. A division of the Ottawa, 
mentioned in the Jesuit Relation for 
1657-58 with the Nikikouek, the Miche- 
saking (Missisauga), and others, as nations 
long known to the French in Canada. 
There is no other known reference to 
them. They may possibly be the same 
as the Achiligouan. (j. n. b. h.) 

Maskeg. See Muskeg. 

Maskegon ( Muskigdk , ‘they of the 
marshes or swamps.’—W. J.). An Algon- 
quian tribe so closely related to the Cree 
that they have appropriately been called 
a subtribe. According to Warren the 
Maskegon, with the Cree and the Monsoni, 
form the northern division of the Chip¬ 
pewa group, from which they separated 
about eight generations before 1850. The 
traders knew them as Swampy Crees. 
From the time the Maskegon became 
knowm as a distinct tribe until they were 


placed on reserves by the Canadian gov 
ernment they were scattered over the 
swampy region stretching from L. Win¬ 
nipeg and L. of the Woods to Hudson 
bay, including the basins of Nelson, Hays, 
and Severn rs., and extending s. to the 
watershed of L. Superior. They do not 
appear to be mentioned in the Jesuit 
Relations or to have been known to the 
early missionaries as a distinct people, 
though the name “Masquikoukiaks ” in 
the Proces-verbal of the Prise de Posses¬ 
sion of 1671 (Perrot, Mem., 293, 1864) 
may refer to the Maskegon. Tailhan, 
in his notes to Perrot, gives as doubtful 
equivalents “Mikikoueks ou Nikikou-* 
eks,” the Otter Nation (see Amikwa), 
a conclusion with which Yerwyst (Mis¬ 
sionary Labors) agrees. Nevertheless 
their association with the “Christinos” 
(Cree), “ Assinipouals” (Assiniboin),and 
“all of those inhabiting the countries of 
the north and near the sea” (Hudson 
bay), would seem to justify identifying 
them with the Maskegon. If so, this is 
their first appearance in history. 

Their gentes probably differ* but little 
from those of the Chippewa. Tanner 
says that the Pezhew (Besheu) or Wild¬ 
cat gens is common among them. No 
reliable estimate can be formed of their 
numbers, as they have generally had no 
distinct official recognition. In 1889 
there were 1,254 Maskegon living with 
Chippew’a on reservations in Manitoba at 
Birch, Black, Fisher, Berens, and Poplar 
rs., Norway House, and Cross lake. The 
Cumberland, Shoal lake, Moose lake, 
Chemewawin, and Grand Rapids bands 
of Saskatchewan, numbering 605 in 1903, 
consisted of Maskegon, and they formed 
the majority of the Pas band, numbering 
118, and part of the John Smith, James 
Smith, and Cumberland bands of Duck 
Lake agency, numbering 356. There were 
also some under the Manitowpah agency 
and many among the 1,075 Indians of St 
Peter’s res. in Manitoba. (j. m. ) 

Big-Heads.— DonnellyinCan. Ind. Aff. for 1883, pt. 
1,10,1884 (but see Tdtes de Boule). Coast Crees.— 
Back, Arct. Land Exped., app., 194, 1836. Cree of 
the lowlands.— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287, 

1871. Mashkegonhyrinis.— Bacqueville de la Po- 
therie, Hist. Am., i, 168,1753. Mashkegons.— Bel- 
court ( ca . 1850) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 227, 

1872. Mashkegous. —Petitot in Can. Rec. Sci., I, 
48, 1884. Mas-ka-gau.— Kane, Wanderings of an 
Artist, 105, 1859. Maskego.— Writer of 1786 in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., in, 24, 1794. Mas- 
kegonehirinis. —Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. 
Am., I, 177, 1753. Maskegons.— Henry, Trav., 26, 
1809. Maskegous.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. 
Soc., 649, 1883. Maskegowuk.— Hutchins (1770) 
quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 37,1851. 
Maskigoes.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 36, 1852. 
Maskigonehirinis. —Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 25 ; 1744. 
Masquikoukiaks. —Prise de Possession (1671) in Per¬ 
rot, M6moire, 293, 1864. Masquikoukioeks. —Prise 
de Possession (1671) in Margry, D6c., i, 97, 1875. 
Meskigouk.— Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., n, 151, 
1824. Mis-Keegoes.— Ross, Fur Hunters, II, 220, 
1855. Miskogonhirinis.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 23, 
1744. Muscagoes.— Harmon^ Jqut., 84,, 1820. Mus- 


814 


MASKINONGE-MASKS 


[B. a. e. 


conogees.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 2d s., II, 11, 1814. Muscononges.—Pike, 
Exped., app. to pt. 1, 64, 1810. Mushkeags. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 33,1857. Muskagoes. — 
Hnrmon (1801) quoted by Jones, Ojebway Inds., 
166, 1861. Mus-ka-go-wuk.— Morgan, Consang. 
and Affin., 287,1871. Muskeegoo— Jones, Ojebway 
Inds., 178, 1861. Muskeg.— Hind, Red R. Exped., 
I, 112, 1860. Muskeggouck. —West, Jour., 19, 1824. 
Muskegoag. —Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (Ottawa 
name). Muskegoe. —Ibid., 45. Muskegons. —Gal¬ 
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 24,1836. Mus- 
kego Ojibways.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., v, 378, 1885. Muskegoo. —Can. Ind. Aff. 
(common form). Muskigos. —Maximilian, Tray., 
ii, 28, 1841. Musk-keeg-oes. —Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 45, 1885. Mustegans. — 
Hind, Labrador Penin., ii, 16, 1863. Omashke- 
kok. —Belcourt (ca. 1850)mMinn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 
227-8,1872. Omush-ke-goag. —Warren (1852), ibid., 
,v, 33, 1885. Omushke-goes. —Ibid., 85. People of 
the Lowlands. —Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287, 
1871. Savannas. —Chauvignerie (1736)inN. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 1054, 1855. Savanois.— Charlevoix, 
Nouv. Fr., i, 277, 1744. Swampee. —Reid in Jour. 
Anthrop. Inst, ofG. Br., vil, 107,1874. Swampies. — 
M’Lean, Hudson Bay, II, 19, 1849. Swamp In¬ 
dians.—West, Jour., 19, 1824. Swampy Creek 
Indians.— Hind, Labrador Penin., I, 8, 1863 (for 
Swampy Cree Indians). Swampy Crees, —Frank¬ 
lin, Journ. to Polar Sea, 38,1824. Swampy Krees. — 
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 1878. 

Swampys.— Hind, Labrador Penin., I, 323, 1863. 
Waub-ose.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll.,V, 86, 1885 (‘rabbit’; Chippewa name, refer¬ 
ring to their peaceful character; applied also to 
the Tugwaundugahwininewug). 

Maskinonge. A species of pike ( Esox 
estor) found in the great lakes and the 
waters of the adjacent regions. The word 
is variously spelled maskinonge, mas- 
calonge, muskelunge, muskellunge, etc., 
and abbreviated into lunge or longe. As 
one of the earlier forms of this word, mas- 
quinongy, and the Canadian French mas- 
quinonge and maskinonge, indicate, the 
terminal e was once sounded. The origin 
of the word is seen in mashkinonge or 
maskinonge, which in the Chippewa and 
Nipissing dialects of Algonquian is applied 
to this fish; although, as the etymology 
suggests, it might also be used of other 
species. According to Cuoq (Lex. 
Algonq., 194, 1886), mashkinonje is de¬ 
rived from mash, ‘big,’ and kinonje , ‘fish.’ 
This is perhaps better than the etymology 
of Lacombe and Baraga, which makes the 
first component to be mdshk or mdsk, 
‘ugly.’ The folk-etymological masque 
allonge of Canadian French has been ab¬ 
surdly perpetuated in the pseudo-Latin 
mascalongus of ichthyologists. ( a. f. c. ) 

Masks. Throughout North America 
masks were worn in ceremonies, usually 
religious or quasi-religious, but sometimes 
purely social in character. Sometimes 
the priests alone were masked, some¬ 
times only those who took part, and 
again the entire company. In all cases 
the mask served to intensify the idea of 
the actual presence of the mythic animal 
or supernatural person. The simplest 
form of mask was one prepared from the 
head of an animal, as the buffalo, deer, 
or elk. These realistic masks did not 
stand for the actual buffalo, deer, or elk, 


but for the generic type, and the man 
within it was for the time endowed with 
or possessed of its essence or distinctive 
quality where the belief obtained that 
the mask enabled the wearer to identify 
himself for the time being with the super¬ 
natural being represented. A ceremony 
of purification took place when the mask 
was removed (Culin). Among the 
Eskimo the belief prevailed “that in 

early days all 
animated beings 
had a dual exist¬ 
ence, becoming 
at will either like 
man or the ani¬ 
mal form they 
now wear; if an 
animal wished to 
assume its hu¬ 
man form the 
forearm, wing, 
or other limb 
was raised and 
pushed up the 
muzzle or beak as if it were a mask, and 
the creature became manlike in form and 
features. This idea is still held, and it is 
believed that many animals now possess 
this power. The manlike form thus ap¬ 
pearing is called the inua, and is sup posed 
to represent the thinking part of the 
creature, and at death becomes its shade.” 
Many of the masks of the N. and the 
Pacific coast are made with double faces 



KWAKIUTL COMPOUND MASK. (boas) 


to illustrate this belief. ‘ ‘ This is done by 
having the muzzle of the animal fitted 
over and concealing the face of the inua 
below, the outer mask being held in place 
by pegs so arranged that it can be re¬ 
moved quickly at a certain time in the 
ceremony, thus symbolizing the trans¬ 
formation.” Sometimes the head of a 
bird or animal towered above the face 
mask; for instance, one of the sand-hill 
crane was 30 inches long, the head and 



western Eskimo mask. (Murdoch) 



BULL. 30] 


815 


mason’s ruins 


beak, with teeth projected at right angles, 
about 24 inches; the head was hollowed 
out to admit a small lamp which shone 
through the holes representing the eyes; 
below the slender neck, on the breast, 
was a human face. The shaman who 
fashioned this mask stated that once when 
he was alone on the tundra he saw a sand¬ 
hill crane standing and looking at him. 
As he approached, the feathers on the 
breast of the bird parted, revealing the 
face of the bird’s inua. In certain cere¬ 
monies women wore masks upon the fin¬ 
ger of one hand. “The mask festival 
was held as a thanksgiving to the shades 
and powers of earth, air, and water for 
giving the hunters success.” (Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899.) 

In the N., on the Pacific coast, in the 
S. W., among some of the tribes of the 
plains, and among probably all the east¬ 
ern tribes, including the ancient pile 
dwellers of Florida, masks made of wood, 
basketry, pottery, or hide were carved, 
painted, and orna¬ 
mented with shell, 
bark fiber, hair, or 
feathers. They might 
be either male or fe¬ 
male. The colors 
used and the designs 
carved or painted 
were always sym¬ 
bolic, and varied with 
the mythology of the 
tribe. Frequently the 
mask w r as provided 
with an interiordevice 
by which the eyes or 
- the mouth could be 
opened or closed, and 
sometimes the differ- TL1NCIT MASK - 

ent parts of the mask KHaMK> 

were so hinged as to give the.wearer power 
to change its aspect to represent the move¬ 
ment of the myth that was being cere¬ 
monially exemplified. With the sacred 
masks there were prescribed methods for 
consecration, handling, etc.; for instance, 
among the Hopi they were put on or off 
only with the left hand. This tribe, ac¬ 
cording to Fewkes, also observed rites of 
bodily purification before painting the 
masks. Some of the latter were a simple 
face covering, sometimes concealing only 
the forehead; to others was attached a 
helmet, symbolically painted. The Hopi 
made their masks of leather, cloth, or 
basketry, and adorned them with ap¬ 
pendages of wood, bark, hair, woven 
fabrics, feathers, herbs, and bits of gourd 
which were taken off at the close of the 
ceremony and deposited in some sacred 
place or shrine. The mask was not al¬ 
ways worn; in one instance it was car¬ 
ried on a pole by a hidden man. Altars 
were formed by masks set in a row, and 


sacred meal was sprinkled upon them. 
The mask of the plumed serpent was 
spoken of as “ quiet ”; it could never be 
used for any purpose other than to repre¬ 
sent this mythical creature; nor could it 
be repainted or adapted to any other pur¬ 
pose, as was sometimes done with other 
masks. Masks were sometimes spoken 
of as kachinas, as many of them repre¬ 
sented these ancestral and mythical be¬ 
ings, and the youth who put on such a 
mask was temporarily transformed into 
the kachina represented. Paint rubbed 
from a sacred mask was regarded as effi¬ 
cacious in prayer, and men sometimes 
invoked their masks, thanking them for 
services rendered. Some of the Hopi 
masks are very old; others are made new 
yearly. Certain masks belong to certain 
clans and are in their keeping. No child 
not initiated is allowed to look upon a 
kachina with its mask removed, and cer¬ 
tain masks must never be touched by 
pregnant women. Among the Hopi also 
a mask was placed over the face of the 
dead; in some instances it w r as a mere 
covering without form, in others it was 
made more nearly to fit the face. ‘ ‘A thin 
wad of cotton, in which is punched holes 
for the eyes, is laid upon the face . . . 
and is called a rain-cloud, or prayer to 
the dead to bring the rain.’’ (Fewkes in 
15th Rep. B. A.E., 1897.) 

Young people sometimes indulged in 
festivities and made queer masks with 
which to disguise themselves; for ex¬ 
ample, masks of bladder or rawhide 
representing the head of the Thunder- 
bird were made by the boys of the poorer 
classes among some of the Siouan tribes 
when the thunder was first heard in the 
spring. Covering their heads and faces 
with the masks, the boys proceeded to 
their uncles’ tents and, imitating the 
sound of thunder, struck the doorflaps 
with sticks. Then with much merriment 
at the expense of the boys the uncles in¬ 
vited them in and gave them presents of 
leggings, moccasins, or blankets. On the 
N. W. coast masks were occasionally made 
as toys for the amusement of children. 
But generally the mask was a serious rep¬ 
resentation of tribal beliefs, and all over 
the country the fundamental idea em¬ 
bodied in it seems to have been that 
herein described. 

In addition to the authorities cited, 
consult Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895; 
Dali in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 1884; Dorsey 
and Voth in Field Columb. Mus. Pub. 
nos. 55, 66,1901,1902; Matthews in Mem. 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, 1902; Nelson in 
18th Rep. B. A., E., 1899. (a. c. f. ) 

Mason’s Ruins. A small ruined house 
group, so named by Lumholtz (Unknown 
Mex., i, 48, 1902) from a Mexican mem¬ 
ber of his expedition; situated on the end 













816 


MASPETH-MASSACHUSET 


[B. A. B. 


of a ridge near Rio Bavispe, n. w. Chi¬ 
huahua, Mex. The walls, which stand 
3 to 5 ft high, consist of felsite blocks 
averaging 6 by 12 in., laid in gypsifer¬ 
ous clay mortar and coated with white 
plaster. The structure is ascribed to the 
Opata. 

Maspeth. A small Algonquian tribe 
or band, a branch of the Rockaway, 
formerly living in a village about the 
site of the present Maspeth, between 
Brooklyn and Flushing, Long Island, 
N. Y. The name occurs as early as 1638. 
Ruttenber speaks of Mespath as a con¬ 
siderable Canarsee village, attacked by 
the Dutch in 1644. (j. m.) 

Maspeth.— Thompson, Long Id., 410, 1839 (tribe). 
Mespacht.— Tienhoven (1650) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., 1,426,1856. Mespadt.— Ruyven (1666), ibid., 
n, 473,1858. Mespaetches. —Doc. of 1638 quoted by 
Flint, Early Long Id., 162, 1896 (“Mespaetches 
Swamp’’). Mespat. —Council of war (1673) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., II, 591, 1858. Mespath.— 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 114,1872 (village). 
Mespath’s Kill.— Council of 1673 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ii, 661, 1858. Mespat Kil.— Ibid., 586. Mes- 
pats-kil.— Stuyvesant (1663), ibid., 448. Metsepe.— 
Flint, op. cit., 162 (given as Indian form). 

Masque allonge, Masquinong6, Masqui- 
nongy. See Maskinonge. 

Massachuset ( Massa-adchu-es-et , ‘at or 
about the great hill ’; from massa ‘ great’, 
wadchu ‘hill or mountain’, es ‘small’, et 
the locative.—Trumbull. In composition 
wadchu becomes adchu and adds ash for 
the plural. The name refers to the Blue 
Hills of Milton. Williams substitutes 
euk for et in forming the tribal designa¬ 
tion, and uses the other as the local 
form. Cotton in 1708 translated the 
word ‘a hill in the form of an arrow¬ 
head ’). An important Algonquian tribe 
that occupied the country about Massa¬ 
chusetts bay in e. Massachusetts, the 
territory claimed extending along the 
coast from Plymouth northward to Salem 
and possibly to the Merrimac, including 
the entire basin of Neponset and Charles 
rs. The group should perhaps be de¬ 
scribed as a confederacy rather than as a 
tribe, as it appears to have included sev¬ 
eral minor bodies. Johnson described 
the group as formerly having “three 
kingdoms or sagamoreships having under 
them seven dukedoms or petty saga¬ 
mores. ’ ’ They seem to have held an im¬ 
portant place among the tribes of s. New 
England prior to the coming of the whites, 
their strength being,estimated as high as 
3,000 warriors, although it is more likely 
that the total population did not exceed 
that number. Capt. John Smith (1614) 
mentions 11 of their villages on the coast 
and says they had more than 20. In 
consequence of war with the Tarratine 
and the pestilence of 1617 in which they 
suffered more than any other tribe, the 
English colonists who arrived a few years 
later found them reduced to a mere rem¬ 
nant and most of the villages mentioned 


by Smith depopulated. In 1631 they 
numbered only about 500, and 2 years 
later were still further reduced by 
smallpox, which carried off their chief, 
Chickatabot. Soon thereafter they were 
gathered, with other converts, into the 
villages of the “Praying Indians,” chiefly 
at Natick, Nonantum, and Ponkapog, and 
ceased to have a separate tribal existence. 
As they played no important role in the 
struggles between the settlers and natives, 
the chief interest that attaches to them is 
the fact that they owned and occupied the 
site of Boston and its suburbs and the im¬ 
mediately surrounding territory when the 
whites first settled there. In 1621, when 
Standish and his crew from Plymouth 
visited this region, they found thelndians 
but few, unsettled, and fearful, moving 
from place to place to avoid the attacks 
of their enemies the Tarratine. 

Although the Algonquian Indians of 
Massachusetts, Connecticut, and Rhode 
Island, taken as a whole, formed a some¬ 
what homogeneous group, yet there were 
linguistic differences which seem to justify 
De Forest (Indians Conn., 1853) in doubt¬ 
ing Gookin’s statement that the languages 
were so much alike that the people of the 
different tribes could easily understand 
one another. The Massachuset were more 
closely allied to the Narraganset than to 
any other of the surrounding tribes whose 
languages are known, the people of the 
two being able to understand each other 
without difficulty. For their customs, 
beliefs, etc., see Algonquian Family. 

Following are the villages of the Massa¬ 
chuset Indians so far as known, some of 
them being more or less conjectural: 
Conohasset, Cowate, Magaehnak, Massa¬ 
chuset, Mishawum, ' Mystic (Middlesex 
co.), Nahapassumkeck, Nasnocomacack, 
Natick, Naumkeag (Essex co.), Neponset, 
Nonantum, Patuxet, Pequimmit, Poca- 
pawmet, Punkapog, Sagoquas, Saugus, 
Seccasaw, Titicut, Topeent, Tot ant, 
Totheet, Wessagusset, Winnisimmet, 
and Wonasquam. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Macachusetts.— Writer ca. 1690 in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 3d s., i, 212, 1825. Macetuchets. — Underhill 
(1640), ibid., 4th s., vn, 180, 1865. Macetusetes. — 
Underhill (1639), ibid., 178. Mantachusets. — 
Writer ca. 1648 in Proud, Pa., i, 115, 1797. Masa- 
thulets. —Higgeson (1630) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., i, 123, 1806. Masetusets. — Underhill, 
(1647), ibid., 4th s., vn, 181, 1865. Masichew- 
setts. —Hooke (1637), ibid., 195. Massachewset. — 
Smith (1616),ibid., 3d s., VI, 119,1837. Massachi- 
sans.— Gorges (1658) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., n, 62, 
1847. Massachuselts. —Dee in Smith (1629),Vir¬ 
ginia, ii, 263, repr. 1819 (misprint). Massachu- 
sets. —Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 
VI, 119, 1837. Massachuseuks. — Mourt (1622), 
ibid., 1st s., vin, 241, 1802. Massachusiack. —Josse- 
lyn (1675), ibid., 3d s., ill, 343, 1833. Massachus- 
sets.— Dermer (1620), ibid., 4th s., m, 97, 1856. 
Massachusuks.— Morton, New Eng. Memorial, 305, 
1855. Massadzosek.— Jesuit Rel., in, index, 1858. 
Massajosets.— Maurault, Abenakis, in, 1866. Mas- 
sathusets.— Allyn (1666) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
3d , X, 63, 1849. Massatuchets, — Doc. of 1636 
ibid., iii,129, 1833. Massatusitts.— Records (1662) 


BULL. 30] 


MASSACHUSET-MASSET 


817 


in R. I. Col. Rec., I, 473, 1856. Massechuset.— 
Brewster (1635) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., hi, 
338, 1856. Massetusets.—Cleeve (1646), ibid., 
vii, 371, 1865. Masstachusit.—Dermer (1619) in 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 20, 1848. Matachuses.— 
Tinker (1639) in Mass Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., 
VII, 220, 1865. Matachusets.—Doc. of 1665 in R. I. 
Col. Rec., II, 128, 1857. Matathusetts.—Weare 
(1690) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 138,1824. Matha- 
tusets.—Clark (1652) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th 
s., II, 22, 1854. Mathatusitts.—Records (1662) in 
R. I. Col. Rec., i, 468,1856. Mathesusetes.—God¬ 
frey (1647) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., 
vii, 378, 1865. Mattachucetts.—Robinson (1632), 
ibid., 94, note. Mattachusetts.—Downing (1630), 
ibid., VI, 37, 1863. Mattachussetts. — Pelham 
(1648), ibid., vii, 140, 1865. Mattacusets.— 

Whitfield (1651), ibid., 3d s., iv, 118, 1834. 
Mattathusetts.—Weare (1690) in N. H. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., I, 138, 1824. Mattatusetts.—Nowell (1645) 
in R. I. Col. Rec., I, 133, 1866. Massachusetts.— 
Maverick (1666) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., 
vii, 312,1865. Messachusiack.—Gorges patent (ca. 
1623), ibid., 3d s., VI, 75, 1837. Messathusett. — 
Shurt (1638), ibid., 4th s., VI, 571-2, 1863. Mess- 
thusett.— Ibid. Passonagesit.—Morton (ca. 1625) 
in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.2, 43,1848 (mentioned as 
the village over which Chickatabot was sachem). 

Massachuset. One of the villages of the 
tribe of the same name in 1614, according 
to Capt. John Smith; probably the chief 
settlement of the tribe, which then held 
their territory about Massachusetts bay, 
Mass. In 1617 that portion of the coast 
extending northward into Maine was rav¬ 
aged by a pestilence, so that the tribe was 
almost extinct before the arrival of the 
Puritans in 1620. 

Massachuset.—Smith (1629), Hist. Va., II, 183, repr. 
1819. 

Massapequa (‘great pond/ from massa, 
‘great/ and peag or pequa, _ ‘pond.’ 
It occurs frequently in dialectic forms 
in New England and on Long Island). 
An Algonquian tribe formerly on the 
s. coast of Long Island, N. Y., about 
Seaford and Babylon, extending from 
Ft Neck e. to Islip. Their chief village, 
which was probably of the same name as 
the tribe, appears to have been at Ft 
Neck. “Under constant fear of attack 
from their more warlike neighbors, the 
Indians at each end of the island had 
built at Ft Neck and at Ft Pond, or 
Konkhongauk, a place of refuge capable 
of holding 500 men” (Flint, Early Long 
Island, 1896). The stronghold of the 
Massapequa was destroyed in 1653 by 
Capt. Underhill in the only great In- 
• dian battle fought on Long Island. The 
women and children took refuge on 
Squaw id. during the battle. Until 
lately the remains of a quadrangular 
structure, its sides 90 feet in length, 
marked the place where the fort stood. 
Tackapousha, the Massapequa sachem, 
was a thorn in the flesh of the settlers in 
his vicinity, it being impossible to satisfy 
his demands. The records show that 
both the English and the Dutch were 
obliged to pay tribute to him time and 
again. He was one of the most turbulent 
characters known to the aboriginal his¬ 
tory of Long Island. (J- m. c. t. ) 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-52 


Marospinc.— Doc. of 1644 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiv, 56, 1883. Marossepinck.— Deed of 1639, ibid., 
15. Marsapeag.— Doc. of 1669, ibid., 621. Marsa- 

S eague. —Wood in Macauley, N. Y., n, 252, 1829. 
farsapege. —Doc. of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiv, 416, 1883. Marsapequas. —Ruttenber, Tribes 
Hudson R., 73,1872. Marsepain.— Doc. of 1655 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 58,1881. Marsepeack.— 
Stuyvesant (1660), ibid., xiv, 460, 1883. Marse- 
peagues. —Note, ibid., xm, 341,1881. Marsepeake. — 
Doc. of 1675, ibid., XIV, 705, 1883. Marsepeqau. — 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 155,1872 (misprint?). 
Marsepin.— Stuyvesant (1660) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 474, 1883. Marsepinck.— Doc. of 1656, 
ibid., 369. Marsepingh.— Treaty of 1660, ibid., xm, 
147,1881. Marsepyn.— Doc. of 1660, ibid., 184. Mar- 
sey.— Addam (1653) in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 79, 
1848 (same?). Masapequa.— Thompson, Long Is¬ 
land, 68, 1839. Masepeage.— Deed of 1643 in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 530, 1883. Mashapeag.— Doc. 
of 1683, ibid., 774. Masha-Peage.— Andros (1675), 
ibid., 706. Mashpeage.— Doc. of 1675, ibid., 696. 
Massapeags.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 164,1829. Mas- 
sapege.— Deed (1657) in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson 
R., 344, 1872. Massapequa. —Thompson, Long 
Island, 67, 1839. Massepeake. —Doc. of 1675 in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 705, 1883. Mersapeage. — 
Doc. of 1657, ibid., 416. Mersapege.— Treaty of 
1656 in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 125,1872. 

Massassauga. A western species of rat¬ 
tlesnake ( Sistrurus catenatus). This rep¬ 
tile is more properly termed Mississauga 
and derives its appellation from the place 
and ethnic name Missisauga (Chamber- 
lain, Lang. of Mississagas, 59,1892), from 
the Chippewa misi, ‘ great, ’ and sdg or sank, 
‘river mouth.’ (a. f. c.) 

Massassoit (‘ great chief ’; proper name, 
Woosamequin [Wasamegin, Osamekin, 
etc.], ‘Yellow Feather’). A principal 
chief of the Wampanoag of the region 
about Bristol, R. I., who was introduced 
by Samoset to the Puritans at Plymouth 
in 1621. He was preeminently the friend 
of the English. Drake (Aborig. Races, 
81, 1880) says of him: “He was a chief 
renowned more in peace than war, and 
was, as long as he lived, a friend to the 
English, notwithstanding they commit¬ 
ted repeated usurpations upon his lands 
and liberties.” He had met other Eng¬ 
lish voyagers before the advent of the 
Puritans. While ill in 1623 he was well 
treated by the English. In 1632 he had 
a brief dispute with the Narraganset un¬ 
der Canonicus, and in 1649 he sold the site 
of Duxbury to the English. His death 
took place in 1662. Of his sons, one, 
Metacomet, became famous as King 
Philip (q. v.), the leading spirit in a long 
struggle against the English, (a. f. c. ) 
Massawoteck. A village of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank 
of Rappahannock r., King George co., 
Va. (j. m.) 

Massawoteck.— Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, 
repr. 1819. Massawteck.— Simons, ibid., 1,185. 

Masset. A Haida town on the e. side 
of Masset inlet, near its mouth, Queen 
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Its name in the 
Masset dialect is Ataiwas (We 7 was, 
‘white slope’, which in the Skidegate 
dialect appears as Qatgai'xi was). Accord¬ 
ing to the inhabitants the sea formerly 


818 


MASSI-MATANAKONS 


[b. a. e. 


came in over the ground now occupied 
by houses, but the latter were then situ¬ 
ated on higher ground just back of the 
present site. At that time, too, there was 
an independent town around a hill called 
Edjao (H'djao), which stands at the east¬ 
ern end. Until lately the band holding 
possession was the Skidaokao. Accord¬ 
ing to John Work’s estimate, made be¬ 
tween 1836 and 1841, there were 160 
houses and 2,473 people at Masset, but 
this enumeration must have included all 
the neighboring towns, and probably n um¬ 
bered the smokehouses. The number of 
houses, enumerated by old people, in the 
two towns, Masset proper and Edjao (27 
and 6 respectively) would indicate a total 
population of about 528, 432 in the former 
and 96 in the latter. Adding to these 
figures the estimated numbers in the two 
neighboring towns of Yan and Kayung, 
the grand total would be 1,056, or less 
than half of Work’s figure. It is prob¬ 
able, however, that the population had 
decreased between Work’s time and that 
which the old men now recall. Accord¬ 
ing to the Canadian Report of Indian 
Affairs for 1904 there were 356 people at 
Masset; these include the remnant of all 
the families that lived once between 
Chawagis r. and Hippa id. A few people 
have moved to the neighboring town 
of Kayung. A mission of the Anglican 
Church is maintained at Masset, the oldest 
on the Queen Charlotte ids., and all the 
Indians are nominal Christians. 

(j. R. s.) 

e Ate'was. —Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905 (na¬ 
tive name). G‘at’aiwa's.— Boas, Twelfth Report 
N. W. Tribes Canada, 23,1898. Gatgaxiwas. —Ibid. 
(Skidegate dialect). Maasets.— Scouler (1846) in 
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 233,1848. Masseets.— 
Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xi, 219, 1841. 
Massets. —Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 281, 1844. Mas- 
sett.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2,69,1905. Massetta. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855 (after 
Work, 1836-41). Massettes. —Scouler in Jour. Roy. 
Geog. Soc., XI, 219, 1841. Mass hade.— Krause, 
Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 1885. Mossette. —Kane, 
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859 (after Work, 1836-41). 
IJt-te-was.— Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 183,1880. 

Massi. A former town on the e. bank 
of Tallapoosa r., Ala. (Bartram, Voy, i, 
map, 1799). Not identified, but probably 
Creek. 

Massikwayo. The Chicken-hawk clan 
of thePakab (Reed) phratry of theHopi. 
Mas-si' kwa'-yo.—Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 
1891. 

Massinacac. A tribe of the Monacan 
confederacy, formerly living in Cumber¬ 
land and Buckingham cos., Va. Strachey 
speaks of their village as the farthest 
town of the Monacan. 

Massinacack.— Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, repr. 
1819. Massinacacs.— Jefferson, Notes, 179, 1801. 
Massinnacacks.— Strachey (1612), Va., 102, 1849. 

Massomuck. An Indian location in 
1700, mentioned as if near the Waba- 
uasset country, in s. Massachusetts 
Doc. of 1700 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 
615, 1854). Probably identical with Ma- 


shamoquet (Massamugget, Mashamugget, 
Mashamugket, Machi-mucket, Moshamo- 
quett), given by Trumbull (Ind. Names 
Conn., 25, 1881) as the name of a tract 
and a small tributary of Quinebaug r. at 
Pomfret, n. e. Conn., and rendered by 
him ‘at the great fishing place.’ 

Mastohpatakiks (Ma-stoh/-pa-ta-Jaks, ‘ra¬ 
ven bearers’). A society of the Ikunuh- 
kahtsi, or All Comrades, in the Piegan 
tribe of the Siksika.—Grinnell, Blackfoot 
Lodge Tales, 221, 1892. 

Masut. A former northern Pomo village 
on Forsythe cr., one of the headwaters of 
Russian r., about 3 m. n. w. of the present 
Calpella, Mendocino co., Cal. (s. a. b. ) 
Masu-ta-kaya. —Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, III, 112, 1853. Ma-su-ta-kea.— Ibid. 

Mata. A former rancheria, probably of 
the Soba, n. of Caborca, which is on the 
Rio de la Asuncion, between Quitobac 
and Aribaiba, n. w. Sonora, Mexico. The 
place was visited by Anza and Font in 
1776. 

Santa Malta.—Hardy, Travels, 422, 1829 (same?). 

S. Juan de Mata. —Anza and Font (1776) quoted by 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. M., 393, 1889. 

Matachic. A Tarahumare settlement 
on the headwaters of the Rio Yaqui, lat. 
28° 45', Ion. 107° 30', w. Chihuahua, 
Mexico.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 
1864. 

Mataguay. A former Diegueno ran¬ 
cheria on upper San Luis Rey r., San 
Diego co., Cal.; later on Agua Caliente 
No. 1 res., occupied by Warner’s ranch. 
By decision of the U. S. Supreme Court 
the Indians were dispossessed of their 
lands, and by act of May 27,1902, an addi¬ 
tional tract was purchased at Pala, and 
the Mataguay people, who numbered 11 
in 1903, were removed thereto in that 
year. 

Mataguay.— Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 

24, 1883. Matahuay.— Hayes (1850) cited by Ban¬ 
croft, Nat. Rac., I, 458,1882. Matajuiai.— H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76,34Cong., 3dsess., 133,1857. Mootaeyuhew.— 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11, 1860. 

Mataitaikeok ( Ma-tdi-tai-ke-6k , ‘many 
eagles’). A former Cree band, named 
from their chief, who was known to the 
French as Le Sonnant. In 1856 they 
roamed and hunted in the country along 
the “Montagnes des Bois,” and traded • 
with the fur companies on Red r. of the 
North and on the Missouri near the 
mouth of the Yellowstone. They num¬ 
bered about 300 lodges.—Hayden, 
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 237, 1862. 

Matamo. A Dieguefio rancheria near 
San Diego, s. Cal.; probably the same as 
Matmork la Puerta, represented in the 
treaty of 1852 at Santa Isabel. 

Matamo.— Ortega (1775) cited by Bancroft, Hist. 
Cal. I, 253, 1884. Matmork la Puerta.— H. R. Ex. 
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 132, 1857. 

Matanakons. Mentioned by De Laet 
about 1633 (N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., 
i, 303, 1841) as a Delaware tribe formerly 
in New Jersey. The name may have some 


BULL. 30] 


MAT ANTON WAN-MATCHEBENASHSHEWISH 


819 


connection with Manta (q. v.) or with 
Matiniconk, the Indian name of an island 
in Delaware r. Cf. Matinecoc. (j. m.) 

Matantonwan (said to mean ‘village of 
the great lake which empties into a small 
one,’ and therefore probably from mdo-te } 

‘ the outlet of a lake’). One of the two 
early primary divisions of the Mdewakan- 
ton Sioux (Neill, Hist. Minn., 144,1858). 
They seem to have been a distinct tribe 
when visited by Perrot in 1689. They are 
mentioned as residing at the mouth of 
Minnesota r. in 1685. To this division 
belonged in 1858 the Khemnichan, Ka- 
pozha, Maghayuteshni, Makhpiyamaza, 
Kheyataotonwe, and Tintaotonwe bands. 
All these are now on Santee res., Nebr. 
Mah-tah-ton.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 34, 1806. 
Mantantans.— Perrot (1689), quoted by Neill, Hist. 
Minn., 144, 1868. Mantantons.— La Harpe quoted 
by Neill, Hist. Minn., 170, 1858. Mantanton 
Scioux. —Le Sueur (1700) quoted by Neill, ibid., 
166. Mantantous.— Prise de Possession (1689) in 
Margry, D6c., v, 34, 1883. Mantautous. —Perrot, 
M6m., 304, 1864 (misprint). Matabantowaher.— 
Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 55, 1826. Mententons.— 
P6nicaut (1700) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, pt. 2, 
6, 1864. Mentonton. —P6nicaut (1700) in Margrv, 
D6c., v, 414, 1883. 

Matantuck. See Magnus. 

Matanza (Span.: ‘ massacre ’). A name 
frequently appearing on early Spanish 
maps, and on maps derived therefrom, 
apparently as settlements, but in reality 
to mark the locality or supposed locality 
where a massacre had taken place. A 
Matanza appears on maps of the Quivira 
region, in which Francisco Leyva Bonilla 
and his companions were killed by the 
natives about 1594-96; and another on 
the e. coast of Florida, below St Augustine, 
where the Huguenot colonists were mas¬ 
sacred by the Spaniards in 1565. 

Matapan (probably from the Nahuatl 
matlalli , atl, and pan , which suggests ‘in 
the blue water.’—Buelna). A subdivision 
of the Tehueco that inhabited a village of 
the same name on the lower Rio Fuerte, 
in n. w. Sinaloa, Mex.—Orozco y Berra, 
Geog., 58, 1864. 

Matape. A Eudeve settlement, which 
evidently contained also some Coguinachi 
Opata, inlat. 29°, Ion. 110°, central Sonora, 
Mexico. Identified by Bandelier with 
the Vacapa or Vacupa of Marcos de Niga 
(1539). The mission of San Jose de Ma¬ 
tape was established there in 1629; it 
had 482 inhabitants in 1678 and but 35 in 
1730. According to Davila (Sonora His- 
torico, 317, 1894) it was a Coguinachi 
pueblo. Not to be confounded with Ba- 
capa, a Papago settlement. 

Bacapa.— Coues, Garc6s Diary, n, 481,1900. Mata- 
pa. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 123, 1890. 
Matape. —Sonora Materiales (1730) quoted by 
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 513,1884. San Jose de 
Matape.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex.,4th s., 
in, 353,1857. S. Jose Matape.— Bancroft, No. Mex. 
States, i, 246, 1884. Vacapa.— Marcos de Ni?a 
(1539) in Ternaux-Compans. Voy., ix, 259, 1838. 
Vacupa. —Niga (1539) in Hakluyt, Voy., hi, 439, 
1600. 


Matapeake. Mentioned as a tribe that 
once occupied Kent id., Queen Anne co., 
Md. (Davis, Daystar of American Free¬ 
dom, 45, 1855). They lived at one time 
near Indian Spring, and at another on 
Matapax Neck. 

Matarango. A tribe living w. of Dar¬ 
win, s. e. Cal.; probably an offshoot of 
the Panamint, as they speak a similar 
language. (h. w. h.) 

Matatoba. A tribe or band of the Da¬ 
kota, probably the Mantanton wan divi¬ 
sion of the Mdewakanton. 

Matatoba.— Pachot (1722) in Margry, D6c., vi,518, 
1886. Sioux of the Prairies. —Ibid/(distinct from 
the Teton). 

Mataughquamend. A village on the n. 
bank of the Potomac, in 1608, in Charles 
co., Md., probably near Matta woman cr.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Matawachkarini (‘people of the shal¬ 
lows.’—Hewitt). A small tribe or band 
living in 1640 on middle Ottawa r., but 
found in 1672 in the vicinity of the s. end 
of Hudson bay, near the Monsoni. They 
were doubtless one of the bands, known 
to the French as Algonkin, which were 
broken and dispersed by the Iroquois 
invasion about 1660. See Mattawan. 

Madaouaskairini.— Champlain, CEuvres, in, 302, 
1870. Mataouachkariniens. —Jes. Rel. 1643,61, 1858. 
Mataouakirinouek. —Ibid., 1672, 54, 1858. Mat- 
aouchkairini. — Ibid, III, index, 1858. Mataouch- 
kairinik.— Ibid., 1658, 22, 1858. Mataouchkairini- 
ouek. —Ibid., 1646,34,1858. Mataouchkairiniwek. — 
Ibid., 1646,145,1858. Mataouchkarini.— Ibid., 1640, 
34,1858. Matawachka'xrini.— Ibid., Ill, index, 1858. 
Matawachwarini. — Ibid. Matou-ouescarini. — 
Champlain (1613), CEuvres, in, 302,1870. 

Matawoma. A former village, probably 
of the Delawares, on Juniata r., Mifflin 
co., Pa., near the present McVeytown.— 
Royceinl8th Rep. B.A.E., Pa. map, 1899. 

Matchasaung. A former Iroquois village 
on the left bank of the e. branch of Sus¬ 
quehanna r., about 13 m. above W yoming, 
Pa.—Doc. Hist. N.Y., n, 715,1851. 

Matchcoat. During the era of trade 
with the Indians almost throughout the 
Algonquian seaboard certain garments 
supplied in traffic were called by the 
English “ matchcoats, ” a corruption of 
a name belonging to one of the cloaks or 
mantles of the natives. The Algonquian 
word from which it was derived is repre¬ 
sented by Chippewa matshigotk , Delaware 
wachgotey, ‘petticoat.’ (a. f. c.) 

Matchcouchtin. A Nanticoke village in 
1707, probably in Pennsylvania.—Evans 
(1707) in Day, Penn., 391, 1843. 

Matcheattochousie. A Nanticoke vil¬ 
lage in 1707, probably in Pennsylvania.— 
Evans (1707) in Day, Penn., 391, 1843. 

Matchebenashshewish (‘ill-looking bird,’ 
or ‘ ill-natured bird.’—Hewitt). A Pota- 
watomi village, called after a chief of this 
name, formerly on Kalamazoo r., probably 
in Jackson co., Mich. The reservation 
was sold in 1827. Thename isalso written 
Matchebenarhshewish. (j. m.) 


820 


MATCHED ASH-MATLATEN 


[b. a. h. 


Matchedash. A name formerly used to 
designate those Missisauga living at 
Matohedash bay, Ontario. 

Matchedach.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 1056, 1855. Matchedash.— Henry, 
Travels, 35,179,1809. Matchitashk.— Ibid. Mate- 
chitache. —Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IX, 889, 1855. 

Matchinkoa. A village containing 600 
families of Illinois, Miami, and others, 
situated 30 leagues from Ft Crevecoeur, 
near Peoria, Ill., in 1682 (La Salle in 
Margry, D4c., ii, 201, 1877). The word 
may be connected with Chinko (q. v.). 

Matchopick (‘bad bay or inlet.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A village of the Powhatan confed¬ 
eracy, in 1608, on the n. bank of the 
Rappahannock, in Richmond co., Va. 
Cf. Matchotic. 

Machopeake.— Purchas, Pilgrimes, IV, 1716,1625-26. 
Matchopeak. —Simons in Smith (1629), Virginia, 
i, 185, repr. 1819. Matchopick.— Smith, ibid., map. 

Matchotic (‘bad inlet.’—Hewitt). A 

group of tribes of the Powhatan confed¬ 
eracy occupying the country between 
Potomac and Rappahannock rs. down to 
about the middle of Richmond co., Va., 
comprising the Tauxenent, Potomac, 
Cuttatawomen, Pissasec, and Onawman- 
ient. They numbered perhaps 400 war¬ 
riors in 1608, but 60 years later, accord¬ 
ing to Jefferson, had become reduced to 
60 warriors. See Appomattoc. (j. m. ) 
Appamatox. —Jefferson, Notes, table, 138, 1801. 
Appamatricx.— Herrman, map (1670) in Rep. on 
Line between Va. and Md., 1873. Matchoatickes.— 
Archives Md., Proc. Council, 1G36-67, 281, 1885. 
Matchotics.— Jefferson, op. cit. Matox.— Ibid. 

Matchotic. A former village on the s. 
bank of Potomac r. in Northumberland 
co., Va., a short distance below Nominy 
inlet. 

Mattschotick. —Herrman, map (1670) in Rep. on 
Line between Va. and Md. 

Matchotic. A former village on Macho- 
doc cr., King George co., Va. 

Upper Matchodic. —Jefferson, Notes, 138, 1801. 
Upper Mattschotick. —Herrman, map (1670) in Rep. 
on Line between Va. and Md. 

Matchut. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on Pamunkey r., 
New Kent co., Va. 

Matchot.— Smith (1629), Virginia, n, 15, repr. 1819. 
Matchut. —Ibid., I, map. 

Mategarele (mcilega ‘juniper’, reU 
‘below’: ‘belowthe junipers’). A Tara- 
humare rancheria near Palanquo, Chi¬ 
huahua, Mexico.—Lumholtz, inf’n, 1894. 

Mathews, Mary. See Bosomworth , Mary. 

Mathiaca. A Timuquanan tribe and 
village on the w. side of upper St Johns 
r., Fla., in the 16th century. 

Mathiaca.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., II, map, 1521. 
Mathiaqua. —Laudonni6re (1565) quoted by Shipp, 
De Soto and Fla., 525, 1881. Matthiaqua.— Fair¬ 
banks, Hist. Fla., 105,1871. 

Mathomauk. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the w. bank of 
James r., in Isle cf Wight co., Va.— 
Smith (1629) Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mathne. A tribe that traded in 1652 
with Indians on Patuxent r., Md. There 
is no means of determining its location 


(Bozman, Maryland, ii, 467,1837). Pos¬ 
sibly the Mantua, Monthees, or Munsees, 
or perhaps the Manta division of the 
Delawares. (j. m. ) 

Mathwa ( M’-ath-wa , ‘owl’). A gens of 
the Shawnee (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168, 1877. 

Matiliha. A large Chumashan village, 
said by Indians to have been on Buena¬ 
ventura r., Ventura co., Cal. A village 
of this name is mentioned in mission 
archives as having been situated near 
Santa Ines mission. 

Ma'-ti-la-ha.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo- 
cab., B. A. E., 1884. Matiliha.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Oct. -18, 1861. Matilija.— Ibid., July 24, 
1863. 

Matilpe (‘head of the Maamtagyila’). 
A Kwakiutl sept which has recently 
branched off from the rest of the true 
Kwakiutl. The gentes are Maamtagyila, 
Gyeksem. and Haailakyemae. The prin¬ 
cipal winter village is Etsekin. Pop. 55 
in 1904. 

Mah-tee-cetp.—Can. Ind. Aff., 189,1884. Mahtilpi.— 
Ibid., pt. 2,166,1901. Mahtulth-pe.—Sproat in Can. 
Ind. Aff., 145,1879. Mar-til-par.—Kane, Wand, in 
N. Am., app., 1859. Matelpa.—Tolmie and Daw¬ 
son, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. Matelth- 
pahs.—Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Ma-tilhpl.— 
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. 
ii, 65. Ma'tilpe.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes 
Can., 54, 1890. Ma'tilpis.—Boas in Petermanns 
Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887. Mat-ul-pai.—Tolmie and 
Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. 
Mur til par.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1855. 

Matinecoc. An Algonquian tribe which 
formerly inhabited the n. w. coast of Long 
Island, N. Y., from Newtown, Queens co., 
to Smitlitown, Suffolk co. They had vil¬ 
lages at Flushing, Glen Cove, Cold Spring, 
Huntington, and Cow Harbor, but even 
before the intrusion of the whites they 
had become greatly reduced, probably 
through wars with tne Iroquois, to whom 
they paid tribute. In 1650 Secretary Van 
Tienhoven reported but 50 families left of 
this once important tribe. Ruttenber in¬ 
cludes them in his Montauk group, which 
is«about equivalent to Metoac (q. v.); but 
the interrelationship of the tribes in the 
western part of Long Island has not been 
definitely determined. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Mantinacocks. — Macauley, N. Y., II, 164-65, 1829. 
Mantinecocks.—Clark, Onondaga, i, 18, 1849. 
Mantinicocks.—Macauley, N. Y., ii, 292, 1829. 
Martinne houck.—Van Tienhoven (1650) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist, I, 366, 1856. Matinecoc.—Wood in 
Macauley, Long Id., n, 253, 1829. Matinecocke.— 
Terry (1670) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 639,1883. 
Matinecogh.—Doc. of 1656, ibid., 369. Matine- 
congh.—Ibid. Matinicock.—Doc. of 1666, ibid., 689. 
Matiniconck.—Nicolls (1669), ibid., 621. Matinne- 
konck.—Doc. of 1644, ibid., 56. Matinnicock.— 
Nicolls (1666), ibid., 587. Matninicongh.—Nicolls 
(1664), ibid., 557. Mattinacock.—Houldsworth 
(1663), ibid., 530. Mattinnekonck.—Van Tien¬ 
hoven (1655), ibid., 314. 

Matironn. One of the Diegueno ran- 
cherias represented in the treaty of 1852 
at Santa Isabel, s. Cal.—H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 133, 1857. 

Matlaten ( Mat-la-ten ). A summer vil¬ 
lage of the Wiweakam between Bute and 
Loughborough inlets, Brit. Col.; pop. 125 


BULL. 30] 


MATOAKS—MATTAKE8ET 


821 


in 1885.—Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 
230, 1887. 

Matoaks. See Pocahontas. 

Matomkin. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, still existing in 1722, about 
Metomkin inlet in Accomack co., Va. 
Not long before this time it had much de¬ 
creased in population owing to an epi¬ 
demic of smallpox. 

Matampken. — Herrman map (1670) in Maps to 
Accompany the Rep. of the Comr’s on the 
B’nd’ry Bet. Va. and Md., 1873 (Great and Little 
Matampken marked). Matomkin. —Beverley,Vir¬ 
ginia, 199, 1722. 

Matonumanke (‘bear’). A Mandan 
band. 

Bear.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 158,1877. Mato-Mihte.— 
Maximilian, Trav., 335, 1843. Ma-to'-no-make.— 
Morgan, op. cit. Mato-Numangkake. —Maximil¬ 
ian, op. cit. Ma-to' nu-man'-ke.— Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 241, 1897. 

Matora. An unidentified tribe placed 
by Marquette (Shea, Discov. Miss. Val., 
268, 1852), on his map of 1673, w. of the 
Mississippi, about the w. border of Ar¬ 
kansas. 

Matsaki (‘salt city,’ because the Zuni 
Goddess of Salt is said to have made a 
white lake there). A ruined pueblo of 
the Zuni near the n. w. base of Thunder 
mt., 3 m. e. of Zuni pueblo, Valencia co., 
N. Mex. It was the Macaque of Casta¬ 
neda’s narrative of Coronado’s expedition 
in 1540-42, hence formed one of the Seven 
Cities of Cibola. It was occupied until 
the beginning of the Pueblo revolt of Aug., 
1680, when it was permanently aban¬ 
doned, the inhabitants fleeing with the 
other Zuni to the summit of the adjacent 
Thunder mtn., there remaining for several 
years. During the mission period Matsaki 
was a visita of Halona. See Mindeleff in 
8th Rep. B. A. E., 86,1891, and the writers 
cited below. (f. w. h. ) 

Ma 9 aque.—Castaneda (1596) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
517, 1896. Mafaqui.— Bandelier in Mag. West. 
Hist., 669, Sept. 1886. Macaqui. —Onate (1598) in 
Doc. In<5d., xvi, 133, 1871. Macaquia. —Bande¬ 
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 337, 1892 (mis¬ 
quoting Onate, op. cit.). Masaguia.— De l’lsle, 
Atlas Nouveau, map 60, 1733. Masaquia.— De 
l’lsle, Carte Mexique et Floride, 1703. Masiki. — 
Peetin Am. Antiq., XVII, 352, 1895. Ma-tsa-ki.— 
Cushing in Century Mag., 38, 1883 (Zuni name). 
Mat-sa-ki. —Cushing in Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884 
(Zuni name). Matsuki.— ten Kate, Reizen in 
N. A., 290,1885 (misquoting early Spanish form). 
Matza-ki. —Bandelier in Mag. West. Hist., 669, 
Sept. 1886. Ma-tza Ki.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. 
Papers, ill, 133, 1890. Ma-tza-qui.— Bandelier in 
Revue d’Ethnographie, 201, 1886. Matzaqui. — 
Ibid., 208. Mazaquia.— Vetancurt (1693), Teatro 
Mex., ill, 320, 1871. Mazquia.— Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 173, 1889 (misquoting Vetancurt). 
Mazuqui.— Bandelier quoted by Cushing in Mill¬ 
stone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884. Mozaqui.— Cushing in 
Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vn, 156,1890. 
Muzaque.— Castaneda (1596) in Ternaux-Com- 
pans, Voy., ix, 163, 1838. Muzaqui.— Cushing in 
Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vu, 156, 1890 
(misquoting Castaneda). Salt City. —Cushing, 
Zuni Folk Tales, I, 32,1901. 

Matsnikth ( M&ts-nW /). A former vil¬ 
lage of the Siuslaw on Siuslaw r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 230, 
1890. 


Matsqui (Md'ggui). A Cowichan tribe 
on Fraser r. and Sumass lake, Brit. Col. 
Their villages are Mamakume and Koko- 
aeuk. Pop. 44 in 1904. 

Ma'fQui.— Boas in 64th Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 
1894. Maisqui.— Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 
1872. Mamskey.— Custer quoted by Gatschet, 
notes, B. A. E. Matsqui.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901, 
pt. n, 158. 

Mattabesec (from massa-sepues-et , ‘at a 
[relatively] great rivulet or brook.’— 
Trumbull). An important Algonquian 
tribe of Connecticut, formerly occupying 
both banks of Connecticut r. from Weth¬ 
ersfield to Middletown or to the coast and 
extending westward indefinitely. The 
Wongunk, Pyquaug, and Montowese In¬ 
dians were a part of this tribe. According 
to Ruttenber they were a part of the Wap- 
pinger, and perhaps occupied the original 
territory from which colonies went out to 
overrun the country as far as Hudson r. 
The same author says their jurisdiction 
extended over all s. w. Connecticut, in¬ 
cluding the Mahackemo, Uncowa, Pau- 
gusset, Quinnipiac, Montowese, Sukiaug, 
and Tunxis. ( j. m. ) 

Matabesec.— Kendall, Trav., I, 92, 1809. Matabe- 
zeke.— Doc. of 1646 cited by Trumbull, Ind. Names 
Conn., 26, 1881. Matebeseck. —Writer (ca. 1642) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., in, 161, 1833. Mato- 
wepesack.— Uncas deed (1665) cited by Trumbull, 
Ina. Names Conn., 26,1881. Mattabeeset.— Stiles 
(1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 105, 1809. 
Mattabeseck.— Record (1646) quoted by Trumbull, 
Conn., i, 510,1818. Mattabesett.— Ind. deed (1673) 
cited by Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 26, 1881. 
Mattabesicke.— Haynes (1643) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., VI, 355,1863. Mattapeaset. — Doc. of 1657 
cited by Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 26,1881. 
Mattebeseck.— Hoyt, Antiq. Res., 54, 1824. Se- 
queen.— Doc. of 1633 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., II, 
140,1858 (title of chief). Sequins.— De Laet (1640) 
in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., I, 295, 1841. Se- 
qvins.— Dutch map (1616) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
1,1856. 

Mattabesec. The principal village of the 
Mattabesec, the residence of Sowlieag, 
their head chief. It occupied the site of 
Middletown, Conn. 

Mattabesett.— Field, Middlesex Co., 34, 1819. 

Mattacock. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank of 
York r., in Gloucester co., Va.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mattacunt. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the s. side of 
Potomac r., in King George co., Va.— 
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mattakeset. A village in e. Massachu¬ 
setts, about the site of Yarmouth, Barn¬ 
stable co. It is said to have been subject 
to the Wampanoag, but was in Nauset 
territory. It is mentioned in 1621, and 
in 1685 was still in existence, with a popu¬ 
lation of 70 Indians exceeding 12 years of 
age. (j. m.) 

Matakees.— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., 1, 148,1806. Matakeeset.— Arnold and Mor¬ 
ton (1683), ibid., 4th s., V, 86, 1861. Matakeesit.— 
Barber, Hist. Coll., 517, 1839. Mattacheese.— Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., Ill, 15, 1794. Mattacheeset.— 
Ibid. Mattacheest.— Ibid. Mattachiest.— Mourt 
(1622) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2,16,1848. 
Mattachist.— Dee in Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 233, 


822 


MATTAKESET-MATTOLE 


fB. A. E. 


repr. 1819. Mattakeese.—Hinckley (1685) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., V, 133,1861. Mattakeeset.— 
Humphreys (1815), ibid., 2d s., iv, 92,1816. Mat- 
takesit.—Rawson and Danforth (1698), ibid., 1st 
s., x, 129-C?:, 1809. 

Mattakeset. A former village situated 
about the site of Duxbury, Plymouth co., 
Mass. It was probably subject to the 
Wampanoag. In 1685 it had 40 inhabit¬ 
ants exceeding 12 years of age. (j. m. ) 
Namatakeeset.—Hinckley (1685) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., V, 133, 1861. > 

Mattamuskeet. A village of the Macha- 
punga, the only one belonging to the tribe 
in 1700-01, and containing then, accord¬ 
ing to Lawson, 30 warriors. Probably 
situated on the lake of the same name in 
Hyde co., N. C. 

Marimiskeet.—Lawson (1714), Hist. Car.,383,repr. 
1860. Masammaskete.—Col. Rec. N. C. (1713), II, 
32,1886. Matamaskite.—Ibid.,29. Matamuskeet.— 
Ibid., 31. Mattamuskeets.—Ibid., 45. Mattecum- 
ska.—Col. Rec. N. C. (1713), II, 2, 1886. Matte- 
musket.—Ibid., 168. 

Mattanock. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the w. side of 
Nansemond r., near its mouth, in Nanse- 
mond co., Ya.—Smith (1629), Virginia, 
i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mattapanient (probably of the same 
meaning as Mattapony, q. v.). An Al- 
gonquian tribe or band that formerly 
lived on Patuxent r., Md , probably in 
St Marys co. Their principal village, 
of the same name, may have been at 
Mattapony cr. A Catholic mission was 
established there in 1636. In 1651 they, 
with others, were removed to a tract on 
Wicomico r. They were possibly but a 
band or division of the Conoy (q. v.), 
and are to be distinguished from the 
Mattapony of Virginia, sometimes written 
Mattapanient. (j. m.) 

Matapaman.—Map, ca. 1640 or 1650, in Maps to 
Accompany the Rept. of the Comr’s on the 
Bnd’y bet. Va. and Md., 1873. Matpanient.— 
Bozman, Md., I, 141, 1837. Mattapanient.—Stra- 
chey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 39,1849. Mattapanians.— 
Bozman, Md., II, 421,1837. Mattapanient.—Smith 
(1629), Virginia, I, 118, repr., 1819. Mattapany.— 
Herrman, Map (1670), in Maps to Accompany 
the Rept. of the Comr’s on the Bnd’y bet. Va. 
and Md., 1873. Mattpament.—Smith (1629), Vir¬ 
ginia, I, map, repr. 1819. Metapawnien.—White 
(1639), Relatio Itineris, 63, 1874. 

Mattapoiset (a form of Mattabesec, q. v.). 
A village, in 1622, near the present Matta- 

S oisett, Plymouth co., Mass. 

atapoisett.—Deed of 1664 in Drake, Bk. Inds., 
bk., 3,14,1848. Mattapoiset.—Watts (1734) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., x, 31, 1823. Mattapuist.— 
Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, 856,1705. Mattapuyst.— 
Mourt (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s.,viii, 
258,1802. 

Mattapony. The proper form of this 
name, both in Virginia and Maryland, 
appears to be Mattapanient, although 
both that and Mattapament occur on 
Capt. John Smith’s map and in his text, 
the latter being probably a misprint. 
Heckewelder’s attempted interpretation 
of ‘bad bread’, or ‘ no bread at all ’, based 
on the theory that it contains the word 
pona, ‘pone’, ‘bread’, is evidently with¬ 
out value. The Mattapony is a small tribe 


of the Powhatan confederacy (q. v.) living 
in 1608, according to Smith, on Mattapony 
r., Va., and having 30 men, or a total of 
perhaps a little more than 100. On 
Smith’s map the town “Mattapanient” 
appears to be located in the upper part 
of the present James City co., near the 
mouth of Chickahominy r. In 1781, ac¬ 
cording to Jefferson (Notes on Va., 1825), 
they still numbered 15 or 20, largely of 
negro blood, on a small reservation on 
the river of their name. These figures, 
however, are probably too low, as the 
name is still preserved by about 45 per¬ 
sons of mixed blood on a small state 
reservation on the s. side of Mattapony 
r., in King William co. These survivors 
are closely related to the Pamunkey, 
whose reservation is only 10 m. distant. 
See Mattapanient. (j. m. ) 

Mattapament.—Smith, Hist. Va. (1624), Arber ed., 
347, 1884. Mattapanient.—Ibid., map. Mattapo- 
mens—Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816. Mat- 
tapoments.—Macauley, N, Y.,II, 168, 1829. Matta- 
ponies.—Jefferson (1781), Notes, 130,1825. 

Mattawamkeag (‘a bar of gravel divides 
the river in two. ’—Vetromile). A princi¬ 
pal Penobscot village formerly on Penob¬ 
scot r., about Mattawamkeag point, 
Penobscot co., Me. 

Madawamkee. — Gyles (1736) in Drake, Trag. 
Wild., 78, 1841. Mattawamkeag.— Godfrey in Me. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., vn, 4,1876. Mattawankeag. —Ve¬ 
tromile, Abnakis, 52-53,1866. Metta8akik. —Mau- 
rault, Abenakis, v, 1866. Montawanekeag. —Conf. 
(1786) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vii, 10,1876. 

Mattawan (‘river of shallows.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A popular name for the Algonquian 
Indians living on Mattawan r., a branch 
of upper Ottawa r., Ontario. They are 
probably a part of the Nipissing or of the 
Temiscaming, q. v. Cf. Matawachkarini. 

(j. M.) 

Mataoiiiriou. —Jes. Rel. 1672, 46, 1858. Mataovan.— 
La Hontan (1703), New Voy., map, 1735. Mata- 
wang. —Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905 (correct form). 
Matawin— McLean, Hudson Bay, I, 87, 1849. 

Mattawottis. A former Diegueno ran- 
cheria under the mission of San Miguel de 
la Frontera, n. Lower California.—Taylor 
in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860. 

Mattinacook. A band of the Penobscot 
who, in 1876, occupied Mattinacook id. 
in Penobscot r., near Lincoln, Penobscot 
co., Me. 

Mattanawcook. — Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., VII, 103, 
note, 1876. 

Mattituck ( Matuh'tugk , ‘place without 
wood’, or ‘badly wooded.’—Trumbull). 
A Corchaug village, about 1640, on the 
site of the present Mattituck, Suffolk co., 
Long Island, N. Y. (j. m.) 

Mattatock.—Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 27,1881 
(early form). Mattatuck. —Records (1649) in 
Thompson, Long Id., i, 378, 1843. Mattetuck.— 
Thompson, ibid., 392. 

Mattole (Wishosk name). An Athapas¬ 
can tribe whose principal settlements 
were along Bear and Mattole rs., Cal. 
They resisted the white race more vigor¬ 
ously than the natives of this region 
generally did and suffered practical exter- 


BULL. 30] 


MATTOWACCA 


MAYAJUACA 


823 


urination in return. They were gathered 
on a reservation near C. Mendocino for 
a time, and some of them were afterward 
taken to Hupa Valley res. A few still 
live in their old territory. They differ 
somewhat from their Athapascan neigh¬ 
bors in language and culture; they burn 
the dead; the men tattoo a distinctive 
mark on the forehead, but in other respects 
they are similar to the Hupa. (p. e. g. ) 
Matole. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, hi, 643,1874. Mat- 
toal.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., m, 107,1877. 
Mattole.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864,119,1865. Tul'bush.— 
Powers,op.cit.,124 (‘foreigners’: Wailakiname). 

Mattowacca. A name of the hickory 
shad ( Clupea mediocris ), found from New¬ 
foundland to Florida; probably from one 
of the southeastern dialects of the Al- 
gonquian stock. (a. f. c.) 

Matyata (or Mak’yana, contracted from 
M&k’yanawin, ‘country of the salt lake.’— 
Cushing). Described by Fray Marcos de 
Niza in 1539, under the name Marata, as 
a province s. e. of Cibola (Hakluyt, Voy., 
in, 440), although Coronado, in the fol¬ 
lowing year, asserted that ‘ ‘ the kingdom 
of Marata is not to be found, neither have 
the Indians any knowledge thereof.” 
Bandelier and Cushing identify Marata 
with Matyata, or Makyata, “the name 
given by the Zuni to a cluster of now 
ruined pueblos which they declare to 
have been occupied by a branch of their 
own people. After long dissensions and 
even warfare with the inhabitants of the 
Zuni basin, those of Matyata w T ere com¬ 
pelled to submit, and to join the former 
in their settlements. The group of ruins 
called Matyata or Makyata lies s. e. of 
Zuni on the trail leading to Acoma; and 
the condition of the ruins (described by 
Alvarado in 1540) shows that their aban¬ 
donment is more recent than that of other 
ancient pueblos in that region.’ ’ Accord¬ 
ing to Cushing descendants of the former 
inhabitants of Matyata are to-day resi¬ 
dents of Zuni. Consult Bandelier in 
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 120, 1890; v, 174, 
1890; and for Alvarado’s description of 
these supposed ruins see Winship in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896. See Kyama- 
kyakwe, Kyatsutuma, Pikyaaiwan. 

Ar-che-o-tek-o-pa.—Fewkesin Jour. Am. Eth. and 
Arch., I, 100, 1891. Ma'-k’ya-na.—Cushing, inf’n, 
1891 (or Ma'-k’ya-na-win: ‘country of the salt 
lake’). Ma-kya-ta. —Cushing quoted by Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, ill, 120,1890 (Ma-tya-ta, or). 
Marata.—Marcos de Niza (1539) in Hakluyt, Voy., 
hi, 440, 1600. Marta.—Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la 
Conquista, 169, 1742 (Marata, or). Ma-tya-ta.— 
Cushing quoted by Bandelier, op. cit. (or Ma- 
kya-ta). Ma-tyata.—Bandelier in Revue d Eth- 
riographie, 206, 1886. 

Maugna. A former Gabriele norancheria 
in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a locality later 
called Rancho Felis.—Ried (1852) quoted 
by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 

Maukekose (probably for Makons , ‘bear 
cub,’ or ‘little bear.’—W. J.). A former 
Potawatomi village, commonly known as 
Mau-ke*kose’s village, from the name of 


its chief, near the head of Wolf cr., in Mar¬ 
shall co., Ind., on a reservation sold under 
the provisions of the treaty of Dec. 10,1834. 
The name is also written Muckkose and 
Muck-Rose. (j. m.) 

Mauls. See Hammers. 

Maumee Towns. A common name for a 
group of villages formerly at the head of 
Maumee r., near Ft Wayne, Allen co., Ind. 
When destroyed by the whites in 1790 
there were 7 villages, all within a few 
miles of each other, on the Maumee or its 
branches. Two of these were Miami, 
three Delaware, and two Shawnee. Omee 
was the principal one, and together they 
contained about225 h ouses. See Kekionga. 

Maumee towns.— So called from their situation on 
Maumee r. Omee towns. —Harmar (1790) in Rupp, 
West. Pa., app., 225, 1846 (commonly so called; 
Omee is the French Au Mi, contracted from Au 
Miami; Omee is given by Harmar as the name of 
the principal village, on the site of Kekionga, 
while he puts “Kegaiogue” on the opposite bank 
of St Joseph r.). 

Maushantuxet (‘at or in the little place 
of much wood,’ or ‘smaller wooded tract 
of land,’ in contradistinction to Mashan- 
tucket, or Mashantackuck, the name of a 
tract on the w. side of Thames r., in Mont- 
ville.—Trumbull). A Pequot settlement 
in 1762, at the site of the present Ledyard, 
New London co., Conn. 

Mashantucket.— Early records quoted by Trum¬ 
bull, Ind. Names Conn., 26, 1881 (an occasional 
form). Maushantuxet.— Stiles (1761) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 102, 1809. Musshuntucksett- — 
Stiles quoted by Trumbull, op. cit. 

Maushapogue (probably ‘great pond,’ 
from massa , ‘great’, pog or peag, ‘pond’; 
or massa-pe-auk, ‘great-water land’; cf. 
Mashpee and Massapequa). A village, 
probably belonging to the Nairraganset, 
in Providence co., R. I., in 1637. 

Mashapauge. —Williams (166i) in R. I. Col. Rec., 
I, 18, 1856. Mashapawog. —Doc. of 1640, ibid., 28. 
Maushapogue. —Deed of 1637, ibid., 18. 

Mauthaepi (Wood Cree: malhipi , ‘bad 
water.’—Gerard). A Montagnais tribe 
in 1863 on the reservation at Manicoua- 
gan, on St Lawrence r., Quebec.—Hind, 
Lab. Penin., ii, 124, 1863. 

Mawakhota (‘ skin smeared with whitish 
earth’). A band of the Two-kettle 
Sioux. 

Ma-waHota.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220,1897. 
Ma-waqota. —Ibid. 

Mawsootoh (Maw-soo-t oh' , ‘bringing 
along ’). A subclan of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Mayaca. A Timucuan district and 
village, about 1565, on the e. coast of n. 
Florida. De Bry locates it e. of upper 
St Johns r.; Bartram, e. of L. George. 
Macoiya.— Fairbanks, Hist. Fla., 139, 1871. Ma- 
coya.— Barcia, Ensayo, 129, 1723. Maquarqua.— 
Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 517,1881. Masarquam.— 
Barcia, Ensayo, 51, 1723. Mayaca.— Fontaneda 
(1576), Memoir, Smith trans., 21,1854. Mayaco. — 
Bartram, Voy., I, map, 1799. Mayarca.— De Bry, 
Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. Mayarqua.— Laudon- 
ni$re (1564), L’Hist. Notable, 108,1853, 

Mayajuaca. A former Timuquanan vil¬ 
lage on the e. coast of Florida, n. of the 
Ais country. 


824 


MAYARA 


MAYEYE 


[b. a. e. 


Mayaguaci .—Fontaneda (1675) in Doc. In6d., v, 
544, 1866. Mayajuaca.— Fontaneda in Ternaux- 
Compans,Voy.,xx,26,1841. Nayajuaca.— Ibid., 35. 

Mayara. A Timucuan chief, said to 
have been “rich in gold and silver,” and 
also the name of his town on lower St 
Johns r., Fla., in the 16th century. 

Maiera.— De Bry, Brev.Nar., II, map, 1591. May¬ 
ara.— Laudonniere (1564) in French, Hist. Coll. 
La., 242, 1869. Mayrra.— Laudonniere,Hist. No¬ 
table, 88,1853. 

May cock. A sort of squash or pumpkin. 
According to Scheie de Vere (American¬ 
isms, 60,1871) it is still found in Virginia. 
Trumbull (Sci. Pap. Asa Gray, j, 336,1889) 
cites as early forms macocks (Smith, 
1606-08), macock gourd (Strachey, 1610), 
macokos (Strachey), and macocqwer 
(L’Ecluse, 1591-1605). Beverley (Hist. 
Va., 124, 1705) identifies the maycock 
with the squash of New England. Smith 
(Arbered., 359, 1884) describes macocks 
as “a fruit like unto a muske mellon, 
butt lesse and worse.” The word is de¬ 
rived from a form of mahawk, ‘gourd’, 
in the Virginian dialect of Algonquian, 
cognate with the Delaware machgachk , 
‘pumpkin.’ See Macocks. (a. f. c.) 

Mayes, Joel Bryan. A prominent 
mixed-blood of the Cherokee tribe and 
twice principal chief of the nation. He 
was born Oct. 2, 1833, in the old Chero¬ 
kee Nation, near the present Cartersville, 
Ga. His father, Samuel Mayes, was a 
white man from Tennessee, while his 
mother, Nancy Adair, was of mixed 
blood, the daughter of Walter Adair, a 
leading tribal officer, and granddaughter 
of John, one of the Adair brothers, 
traders among the Cherokee before the 
Revolution. The boy removed with the 
rest of his tribe in 1838 to Indian Ter., 
where he afterward was graduated from 
the male seminary at Tahlequah. and 
after a short experience at teaching 
school, engaged in stockraising until the 
outbreak of the Civil war in 1861, when 
he enlisted as a private in the First Con¬ 
federate Indian Brigade, coming out at 
the close of the war as quartermaster. 
He returned to his home on Grand r. 
and resumed his former occupation, but 
was soon after made successively clerk 
of the district court, circuit judge (for 
two terms of 10 years in all), asso¬ 
ciate justice, and chief justice of the 
Cherokee supreme court. In 1887 he 
was elected principal chief of the Cher¬ 
okee Nation, succeeding D. W. Bushy- 
head, and was reelected in 1891, but 
died in office at Tahlequah, Dec. 14 of 
that year, being succeeded by Col. C. J. 
Harris. Chief Mayes was of fine phy¬ 
sique, kindly disposition, and engaging 
personality. He was three times mar¬ 
ried, his last wife having been Miss Mary 
Vann, of a family distinguished in Chero¬ 
kee history. (j. M.) 


Mayeye. A former Tonkawan tribe 
which, in the first half of the 18th cen¬ 
tury, lived near San Xavier r., Tex., ap¬ 
parently either modern San Gabriel or 
Little r. Joutel in 1687 (Margry, Dec., 
hi, 288, 1878) heard of the Meghey n. of 
Colorado r., somewhere nfear where the 
Spaniards later actually found the May- 
eye. Rivera (Diario, leg. 2062, 1736) in 
1727 met them at springs called Puente- 
zitas, 15 leagues w. of the junction of the 
two arms of the Brazos and 35 leagues 
from the Colorado. In 1738 they were 
mentioned with the Deadoses (q. v.) of 
the same locality (Orobio y Basterra, let¬ 
ter of Apr. 26, Archivo General, MS.). 
About 1744 Fray Mariano Francisco de 
los Dolores visited a rancheria of May- 
eyes, Yojuanes, Deadoses, Bidais, and 
others near San Xavier r. (Arricivita, 
Chronica, pt. 2, 322,1792). In 1740 it had 
been planned to take this and the Sana 
(Zana) tribes to San Antonio (Description, 
1740, Mem. Nueva Espana, xxvm, 203, 
MS.), where a few of the Sanas and Er- 
vipiames had already been gathered. As 
a result of the efforts of Father Dolores, 4 
chiefs of the “Yojuanes, Deadoses, Mai- 
eyes, and Rancheria Grande” went to 
San Antonio to ask for a mission (Des¬ 
patch of the Viceroy, Mar. 26,1751, Lamar 
Papers, MS.), and about 1747 the San 
Xavier group of missions was founded for 
them. When the site was abandoned, 
“notwithstanding the tenacity with 
which the May eyes especially had always 
clung to the district of San Xavier,” some 
of them were moved to the Guadalupe, 
where an abortive attempt was made to 
reestablish them (Arricivita, op. cit., 
337). Some of the Mayeye who had been 
baptized at San Xavier entered San An¬ 
tonio de Valero mission at San Antonio, 
and were living there as late as 1769 (MS. 
Burial records). The Mayeye and their 
relations were bitter enemies of the 
Apache, and in the middle of the 18th 
century, when the Comanche forced the 
Apache southward, theMayeyeand other 
Tonkawans were apparently pushed to 
the s. e. , where they mingled with the Ka- 
rankawan tribes. In 1772 Mezidres (In¬ 
forme, July 4, 1772, MS.) said the Mayeye 
wandered with the Tonkawa and Yojuane 
between the Trinity and the Brazos; and 
in the same year Bonilla, quoting Me- 
zieres, associated them with the same 
tribes, all of whom, though in alliance 
with the Wichita and their congeners, 
were despised by the latter as vagabonds. 
Such has been the usual attitude of other 
tribes toward the Tonkawa ever since. 
While Bucareli existed on the Trinity, 
from 1774 to 1779, the Mayeye visited it. 
In 1778 Mezieres (Carta, Mar. 18, MS.) 
reported 20 families of Coco and Mayeye 
apostates opposite Culebra id., in the 


BULL. 30] 


MAYI-MAYO 


825 


Karankawa country. In 1779 the Spanish 
government feared an alliance of Mayeye, 
Coco, Karankawa, and Arkokisa (Croix 
to Cabello, Dec. 4, MS.). The Mayeye 
were included in the census of 1790, and 
were in the jurisdiction of Nacogdoches. 
Sibley, in 1805, says the “Mayes” were 
then living on San Gabriel cr., near the 
mouth of the Guadalupe, on St Bernard 
bay, Tex., and numbered about 200 men; 
they were hostile to the Spaniards, but 
professed friendship for the French; 
they were surrounded by tribes speak¬ 
ing languages different from their own 
and were adept in the sign language. 
The last trace of the tribe was found by 
Gatschet in 1884 (Karankawa Inds., 36, 
1891), when he met an old Indian who 
had known this people in his early days 
on the Texas coast, and who stated that 
they spoke a dialect of the Tonkawa. 

(a. c. f. h. e. b.) 

Macheyes. —Mezteres (1772) quoted by Bonilla in 
Tex. Hist. Ass’n Quar., viii, 66, 1905. Maghai.— 
Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 1 ,137,1846. 
Maheyes.— Mezi£res (1772), op. cit. Maieces.— Oro- 
bio y Basterra (1738), op. cit. Maieyes.— Span. 
Doc., Mar. 6,1768, in Bexar archives. Malleyes.— 
Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602,1736. Mayeces.— Barrios, 
Informe, MS., 1771. Mayees.— Brackenridge, 
Views La. ,87,1814. Mayes. —Sibley. Hist.Sketches, 
72, 1806. Mayeyes. —Census of 1790 quoted by 
Gatschet, Karan¬ 
kawa Inds., 35, 1891. 

M e g h ay .—Joutel 
cited by Shea, note 
in Charlevoix, New 
France, IV, 78,1870. 

Me ghey.—Joutel 
(1687) in Margry. 

D£c., ill, 288, 1878. 

Meghty. —Joutel 
(1687) in French, 

Hist. Coll. La., i, 152, 

1846. Meihites.— 

Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 

1723. Meye.— Gat¬ 
schet, op. cit., 36,1891 
(Tonkawa name). 

Miyi. —Ibid. Mule- 
yes. —Morfi, Mem. 

Hist. Tex., ca. 1782. 

Mayi. An im¬ 
portant Porno vil¬ 
lage on upper 
Clear lake, Cal.— 

A. L. Kroeber, 

Univ. Cal. MS., 

1903. 

Mayndeshkish (‘Coyote pass’). An 
Apache clan or band at San Carlos agency 
and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881 (Bourke in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 112, 1890). The 
corresponding clan of the Navaho isMai- 
theshkizh. 

Mayne Island. The local name for a 
body of Sanetch on the s. e. coast of Van¬ 
couver id.; pop. 28 in 1904.—Can. Ind. 
Aff. for 1902 and 1904. 

Mayo (‘terminus’, because the Mayo 
r. was the dividing line between them 
and their enemies.—Ribas).. One of the 
principal tribes of the Cahita group of 
the Piman stock, residing on the Rio 


Mayo, Sinaloa, Mexico. Their language 
differs only dialectically from that of the 
Yaqui and the Tehueco. The first notice 
of the tribe is probably that in the “Se- 



MAYO MEN. (AM. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


gunda Relacion Anonima” of the jour¬ 
ney of Nuno de Guzman, about 1530 (in 
Icazbalceta, Coleccion de Documentos, 
ii, 300, 1866), where it is stated that 
after passing over 
the Rio de Tam- 
achola (Fuerte) 
and traveling 30 
leagues (north¬ 
ward) they came 
to a river called 
Mayo on which 
lived a people of 
the same name. 
Ribas (p. 237) de¬ 
clares that in his 
day it was the 
most populous of 
all the tribes of 
Sinaloa, estimat¬ 
ing their number 
at 30,000, some 
8,000 or 10,000 of 
whom were war¬ 
riors. He did not 
consider them so 
warlike as the surrounding tribes, but 
in their customs, dwellings, and other 
respects the Mayo resembled them. 
Hardy (Travels in Mexico, 424, 1829) 
states that at the time of his visit there 
were 10 towns on the Rio Mayo, with an 
estimated population of 10,000. Accord¬ 
ing to Davila (Sonora, 315, 1894) their 
industries were reduced to the cultivation 
of the soil, the raising of sheep and do¬ 
mestic birds, and the manufacture of 
woolen shawls. He says the Mayo 
ueblos are larger than those of the Yaqui, 
ut the number of people of the latter is 
now greater than that of the former. The 



MAYO GIRLS. (am. MU8. NAT. HIST.) 









826 


MAYPOP-MDEWAKANTON 


[B. a. e. 


Mayo settlements, so far as known, are 
Baca, Batacosa, Camoa, Conicari, Cui- 
rimpo, Echojoa, Huatabampo, Maco- 
yahui, Masiaca, Navojoa, San Pedro, 
Santa Cruz de Mayo, Tepahue, Tesia, 
and Toro. S ee Cahita. (f. w. h. ) 

Mago. —ten Kate in Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de 
Paris, 375, 1883 (misprint). Maya.— Ribas, Hist. 
Triumphos, 237, 1645. Mayo. —Rel. Anonima 

(1530), op. cit. 

Maypop. The fruit of the passion-flower 
( Passiflorci incarnata) . Capt. John Smith 
(Va., 123, repr. 1819) and Strachey 
(Trav. Va., 72) speak of this fruit as mara¬ 
cock and state that the* Indians cultivated 
it before the coming of the whites. 
Trumbull (Sci. Pap. Asa Gray, 342,1889) 
considers that maracock is the Brazilian 
Tupi mburucuia, related to the Carib 
merecoya (Breton, 1665), the fruit of a 
vine, the name and the thing having both 
come from South America. Maypop 
would thus ultimately represent, through 
maracock, this Tupi loan-word. ( a. f. c. ) 

Maysonec. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank of the 
Chickahominy, in New Kent co., Va.— 
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mazakutemani (‘shoots the gun [iron] 
as he walks’). A chief of the Sisseton 
Sioux, born at Lac-qui-Parle, Minn., in 
1806; died near Sisseton, S. Dak., in 
1887. In his early manhood he followed 
strictly the customs of his tribe; in 1850 
he was a member of the Sisseton and 
Wahpeton delegation to Washington, and 
a signer of the Traverse des Sioux treaty 
of July 23, 1851. About 1855 he became 
a convert to Christianity and thencefor¬ 
ward was an ardent supporter of the 
missionary work of Rev. Stephen R. 
Riggs. It was in the spring of 1857, 
when the massacre at Spirit Lake, Iowa, 
by Inkpaduta’s band occurred, that 
Mazakutemani particularly manifested 
his friendship for the whites by fol¬ 
lowing the murderous band and rescu¬ 
ing Miss Gardner, the only surviving 
white captive. Again, in 1862, on re¬ 
ceiving word of the Sioux outbreak, he 
employed every effort to stay the mas¬ 
sacre and to rescue the white captives, 
going boldly into the hostile camps and 
using his oratorical powers to accomplish 
his purpose. The final escape of the 
captives from death on this occasion was 
due largely to Mazakutemani’s efforts 
and his cooperation with Gen. Sibley. 
He was the chief speaker for the Sisseton 
in their tribal deliberations as well as in 
their treaty negotiations with the United 
States commissioners. In addition to the 
treaty of Traverse des Sioux he signed 
the treaties of Washington, June 19,1858; 
Sisseton agency, Dak., Sept. 20,1872, and 
Lac Traverse agency, Dak., May 2, 1873. 
Consult S. R. Riggs (1) in Minn. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., hi, 82, 90,1880; (2) Mary and 


I, 141, 1880; Heard, Hist. Sioux War, 
156,1863; Robinson in Monthly S. Dako¬ 
tan, in, 208, 1900. (c. t.) 

Mazapes. A former tribe of n. e. Mex¬ 
ico or s. Texas, probably Coahuiltecan, 
drawn from Nuevo Leon and gathered 
into the mission of San Antonio Galindo 
Moctezuma, in Coahuila. Cf. Mahuames. 
Mazames.—Archivo General, xxxi, fol. 208, 
ouoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 306.1864 (prob¬ 
ably identical). Mazapes. —Orozco y Berra, ibid., 
302. 

Mazapeta (‘ iron fire ’). A chief of a vil¬ 
lage of 627 Yankton and Sisseton Sioux on 
Big Stone lake, Minn., in 1836.. He was 
probably chief of the Yankton in the vil¬ 
lage, while The Grail was chief of the 
Sisseton. 

Mahzahpatah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, HI, 612, 
1853. 

Mazpegnaka (‘piece of metal in the 
hair’). A band of the Sans Arcs 
Sioux.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
219,1897. 

Mdeiyedan (French: 1 Lac qti parle ,’ 
‘Speaking lake’). A band of the Wah¬ 
peton Sioux whose habitat was around 
Lac qui Parle, Minn. In 1836 (School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 612, 1853) the band 
numbered 530 under Little Chief. 

Lac qui Parle band. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 102, 
1860. Lacquiparle Indians. —Sibley (1852) in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 29, pt. 2, 32d Cong., 2d sess., 9, 1853. 
Upper Wahpaton.— Sibley (1873) in Minn. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., in, 250,1880. 

Mdewakanton (‘mystery lake village,’ 
from mde ‘ lake ’, wakan * sacred mystery ’, 
otonwe ‘village’). One of the subtribes 
composing the Santee division of the Da¬ 
kota, the other 3 being the Sisseton, Wah¬ 
peton, and Wahpekute. A. L. Riggs con¬ 
tends that the Mdewakanton are the only 
Dakota entitled to the namelsanyati (‘San¬ 
tee ’), given them from their old home on 
Mflle Lac, Minn., called by them Isan- 
tamde, ‘ knife lake. ’ In every respect this 
tribe appears to be most intimately re¬ 
lated to the Wahpeton. Wahpekute, and 
Sisseton. It is possible that the Mdewa¬ 
kanton formed the original stem from 
which the other 3 subtribes w T ere devel¬ 
oped. It is probable that the Nadowes- 
sioux mentioned by early missionaries and 
explorers were in most cases the people of 
this tribe and the tribes associated with 
them then living in the region of Mille 
Lac and the headwaters of the Mississippi. 
Dr Williamson, who spent years among 
these Indians, fixes the home of this tribe 
(who by tradition had once lived on Lake 
of the Woods and n. of the great lakes and 
had migrated toward the s. w.) at MilleLac, 
the source of Rum r., which is apparently 
the ancient location of the Issati of Henne¬ 
pin. This identifies the Issati w ith the 
Mdew r akanton and sustains the conclusion 
of Riggs. After the Mdewakanton came 
to the Mississippi they appear to have 
scattered themselves along that river in 


bull. 801 


MDEWAKANTON 


827 


several villages extending from Sauk Rap¬ 
ids to the mouth of Wisconsin r. and up 
the Minnesota 35 m. According to Neill 
(Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 262, 1872) this split¬ 
ting into bands was due to the influence 
of French traders. This author asserts 
that the people of this division were still 
residing at Mille Lac at the time Le Sueur 
built his post near the mouth of Blue 
Earth r. in 1700, and that their change of 
location to the region of lower Min¬ 
nesota r. was due to the establishment of 
trading posts in that section. This would 
indicate a later removal to that locality 
than Williamson supposed. Rev. G. H. 
Pond, as quoted by Neill, says: “When 
to this we add the fact that traders 
taught them to plant corn, which actu¬ 
ally took the place of wild rice, nothing 
was wanting to bring the Mdewakantons 
south to the Minnesota r. Accordingly 
tradition tells us that this division of the 
Dakotas no sooner became acquainted 
with traders, and the advantage of the 
trade, than they erected their teepees 
around the log hut of the white man and 
hunted in the direction of the Minnesota 
r., returning in the ‘rice-gathering moon ’ 
(September) to the rice swamps nearest 
their friends.” In Le Sueur’s list of the 
eastern Dakota tribes the name Issati is 
dropped and that of Mdewakanton, un¬ 
der the form Mendeouacantons, is used, 
evidently for the first time. The whites 
came into more intimate relation with 
this tribe than with any other of the 
Dakota group, but the history—which is 
not of general interest except in so far as 
it relates to the outbreak of 1862, in 
which some of them took an active part— 
is chiefly that of the different bands and 
not of the tribe as a whole. After their 
defeat by the United States, they and 
the Winnebago were removed to Crow 
Creek res., Dakota Ter. Subsequently 
the Mdewakanton and Wahpekute were 
transferred to the Santee res. in Nebraska. 
Ultimately lands were assigned them in 
severalty, the reservation was abolished, 
and the Indians became citizens of the 
United States. In general customs and 
beliefs they resemble the other divisions 
of the eastern Sioux. (See Dakota.) 

The tribe joined in the following treaties 
with the United States: Prairie du Chien, 
Wis., July 15, 1830, by which they and 
other eastern Sioux tribes ceded a strip 
20 m. wide from the Mississippi to Des 
Moines r., la. Convention at St Peters, 
Minn., Nov. 30, 1836, with the upper 
Mdewakanton, agreeing on certain stipu¬ 
lations regarding the treaty of July 15, 
1830. Treaty of Washington, Sept. 29, 
1837, by which they ceded to the United 
States all their interest in lands e. of the 
Mississippi. Treaty of Mendota, Minn., 
Aug. 5, 1851, by which they ceded all 


their lands in Iowa and Minnesota, re¬ 
taining as a reservation a tract 10 m. wide 
on each side of Minnesota r. Treaty of 
Washington, June 19, 1858, by which 
they sold that part of their reservation n. 
of Minnesota r., retaining the portion 
s. of the river, which they agreed to take 
in severalty. By act of Mar. 3, 1863, the 
President was authorized to set apart for 
them a reserve beyond the limits of any 
state and remove them thereto, their re¬ 
serve in Minnesota to be sold for their 
benefit. The new reserve was established 
by Executive order, July 1, 1863, on 
Crow cr., S. Dak. See Reservations. 

Lewis and Clark (1804) estimated them 
at 300 fighting men or 1,200 souls; Long 
in 1822 (Exped. St Peter’s R., 380,1824) 
estimated the various bands as follows: 



MDEWAKANTON 


Keoxa (Kiyuksa), 400; Eanbosandata 
(Khemnichan), 100; Kapozha, 300; Oa- 
noska (Ohanhanska), 200; Tetankatane 
(Tintaotonwe), 150; Taoapa, 300; Wea- 
kaote (Khemnichan), 50. According to 
the Census of 1890 there were 869 Mde¬ 
wakanton and Wahpekute on Santee 
reservation, Nebr., and 292 at Flandreau, 
S. Dak. The report for 1905 mentions 
as not under an agent 150 at Birch 
Cooiey and 779 elsewhere in Minne¬ 
sota. The recognized divisions are as 
follows: (1) Kiyuksa, (2) Ohanhanska, 
(3) Tacanhpisapa, (4) Anoginajin, (5) 
Tintaotonwe, and (6) Oyateshicha, be¬ 
longing to the Wakpaatonwedan divi¬ 
sion, which seems to have constituted the 
whole tribe in early times, and (7) Khem¬ 
nichan, (8) Kapozha, (9) Magayuteshni, 
(10) Mahpiyamaza, (11) Mahpiyawich- 





MEAMSKINISHT-MEASUREMENTS 


[B. a. n. 


828 


asta, (12) Kheyataotonwe, and (13) 
Taoapa, constituting the Matantonwan 
division, which early French writers 
spoke of as a powerful tribe associated 
with but not a part of the Mdewakan- 
ton. The following subdivisions have 
not been identified: Town band Indians, 
Mankato, Nasiampaa, Star band, and 
Upper Medawakanton. 

See Dorsey, Siouan Sociology, 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Long, Exped. St 
Peter’s R., 1824; Ind. Aff. Rep., 1847; 
Ramsey in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 1872; 
Neill, Hist. Minn., 1858. (j. o. d. c. t.) 

Gens de Lac. —Pike, Exped., 93, 1810. Gens De 
Lai. —Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
2d s., II, 40, 1814 (misprint). Gens du Lac. —Long, 
Exped. St. Peter’s R., I, 380,1824. Mad-a-wakan- 
toan.— Sweetser (1853) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d 
Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1854. Madawakanton. —Many- 
penny in H. R. Rep. 138, 33d Cong., 1st sess., 10, 
1854. Manchokatous. —Prise de Possession (1689) 
in Margry, D6c., V, 34, 1883. Mandawakantons. — 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 853,1847. Mandawakanton Sioux. — 
Ibid. Mandeouacantons. —Le Sueur (1700) in Mar- 
gry, D6c., VI, 81, 1886. Mawtawbauntowahs. — 
Carver, Trav., 60, 1778. Mdawakontons. —Minn. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 86, 1880. Mdawakontonwans. — 
Ibid., 84. M’day-wah-kaun-twan Dakotas. —Ram¬ 
sey, ibid., I, 45, 1872. M’day-wah-kauntwaun 
Sioux. —Sibley, ibid., 47. M’daywakantons. —Ibid., 
ill, 250,1880. M’daywawkawntwawns. —Neill, Hist. 
Minn., 144, note, 1858. Mdeiyedan. —Ashley, let¬ 
ter to Dorsey, Jan. 1886. Mde-wahantonwan, — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1,248, 1851. M’dewakan- 
ton.— Nicollet, Rep. on Upper Miss. R., map, 1843. 
Mde-wa-kan-ton-wan.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, 
note, 1858. Mdewakaq top wan.— Riggs, Dakota 
Gram, and Diet., vii, 1852. M’de-wakan-towwans. 
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 78, 1850. M’de- 
wakant’wan. —Ibid. Md-Wakans. —Peet in Am. 
Antiq., VIU, 304, 1886. Mdwakantonwans.— Riggs 
in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 126, 1880. Medaqua- 
kantoan.— Ramsey (1853) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d 
Cong., 1st sess., 324, 1854. Medawah-Kanton. — 
Maximilian, Trav., 507,1843. Med-a-wakan-toan. — 
Sweetser in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d Cong., 1st sess., 
2, 1854. Medawakantons. —Ind.Aff. Rep., 494, 1839. 
Med-a-wa-kanton Sioux. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 495, 1838. 
Medawakantwan. —Parker, Minn. Handbk., 140, 
1857. Me-da-we-con-tong. —U. S. Ind. Treat., 368, 
1826. Medaykantoans. —Ramsey in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
61, 33d Cong., 1st sess., 337, 1854. Med-ay-wah- 
kawn-t’waron. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 
78, 1850. Medaywakanstoan. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 18, 
1851. Med-ay-wa-kan-toan. — U. S. Stat., X, 56, 
1853. Medaywokant’wans. —Pike quoted by Neill, 
Hist. Minn., 288, 1858. Me-de-wah-kan-toan. — 
Sweetser in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d Cong., 1st sess., 
321, 1854. Medewakantoans. —Sweetser in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 29,32d Cong., 2d sess., 14,1853. Medewa- 
kantons.— Neill in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 260, 
1872. Mede-wakan-t’wans. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1849, 72,1850. Mediwanktons. —Keane in Stan¬ 
ford, Compend., 521, 1878. Medwakantonwan.— 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., ill, 190, 1880. Menchoka- 
tonx.— Perrot (1689) quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn., 
144, 1858. Menchokatouches. — Perrot (1689) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., II, pt. 2, 31, note, 1864. 
Mencouacantons. —Relation of P6nicaut (17001 in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 6, 1880. Mendawahkan- 
ton.— Prescott (1847) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
II, 168, 1852. Men-da-wa-kan-ton. —Prescott, ibid., 
170. Mendeouacanton. —Le Sueur (1700) inMargry, 
D6c., VI, 86, 1886. Mendeouacantous. —La Harpe 
(1700) in Shea, Early Voy., 104,1861. Mendewacan- 
tongs. —Schoolcraft, Trav., 307, 1821. Mende 
Wahkan toan. —Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., I, 378, 
1824. Mende-Wakan-Toann. —Maximilian, Trav., 
149, 1843. Mendouca-ton, —La Harpe (1700) in 
French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 27, 1851. Mendu- 
wakanton. —Huebschmann in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, VI, 707,1857. MenowaKautong. —Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 127, 1816. Menowa Kontong.— 


Farnham, Trav., 32, 1843. Midewakantonwans.— 
Domenech, Deserts N. Am., II, 26, 1860. Min'-da- 
war'-car-ton. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 30, 1806. 
Minokantongs.— Schoolcraft, Trav., 308, 1821. 
Minowakanton. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 145, 
1814. Minowa Kantong.— Brown, West. Gaz., 208, 
1817. Minoway-Kantong.— Schermerhorn (1812) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., II, 40, 1814. Minoway 
Kautong.— Ibid, (misprint). Minow Kantong.— 
Schoolcraft, Trav., 286,1821. Mundaywahkanton.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, I, 303, 1854. 
Munday Wawkantons. —Snellitig, Tales of N. W., 
231,1830. O-man-ee.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 
141,1852. O-maum-ee.— Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., v, 162, 1885. People of the Lake.— Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., 145, 1814. Siou Mendeouacanton.— 
Le Sueur (1700) in Margry, D6c., VI, 80,1886. Sioux 
Mindawarcarton. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 28, 
1806. Sioux of the River. —Seymour, Sketches of 
Minn., 133/850. Siouxs of the Lakes. —U. S. Ind. 
Treaties (1815), 869, 1873. Win-de-wer-rean-toon.— 
Arrowsmith, map. N. Am. (1795), 1814. 

Meamskinisht (‘porcupine-foot grove’). 
A Tsimshian mission village founded 
in 1889 and settled by the Kitksan. In 
1897 the population was about 50 —Dor¬ 
sey in Am. Antiq., xix, 280, 1897 

Measurements. Among civilized people, 
previous to the introduction of the metric 
system, linear measurements were de¬ 
rived mostly, if not exclusively, from the 
human body, and although in later cen- 
uries these measurements became stand¬ 
ardized, it is not long since they were all 
determined directly from the human 
frame. It is still common, even for white 
men, in the absence of a graduated rule, 
to compute the inch by the transverse 
dimension of the terminal joint of the 
thumb, and for women to estimate a yard 
by stretching cloth from the nose to the 
tips of the lingers—the arm being ex¬ 
tended and thrown strongly backward— 
or to estimate an eighth of a yard by the 
length of the middle finger. The use of 
the span as a standard of lineal measure 
is also still quite common. Within the 
last 30 years it has been a custom for 
traders to sell cloth to Indians by 
the natural yard or by the brace, and 
although this measure on a trader of small 
stature might be much less than 3 feet, 
the Indians preferred it to the yardstick. 
Below is given a list of what may be called 
natural measures which are known to 
have been employed by Indians. Some 
of the larger measures have been in 
general use among many tribes, while 
some of the smaller ones have been used 
by the Navaho and Pueblo shamans in 
making sacrificial and other sacred o bjects 
and in executing their dry-paintings. 
Some are also employed by Pueblo women 
in making and decorating their pottery. 

Linear measures. —1. One finger width: 
the greatest width of the terminal joint 
of the little finger in the palmar aspect. 
2. Two finger widths: the greatest width 
of the terminal joints of the first and sec¬ 
ond fingers held closely together, taken 
in the palmar aspect. 3. Three finger 
widths: the greatest width of the terminal 


BULL. 30] 


MECADACUT-MEDALS 


829 


joints of the first, second, and third fin¬ 
gers, taken as above. 4. Four finger 
widths: the width of the terminal joints 
of all four fingers of one hand, taken un¬ 
der the same conditions. 5. The joint: 
the length of a single digital phalanx, 
usually the middle phalanx of the little 
finger. 6. The palm: the width of the 
open palm, including the adducted thumb. 
7. The finger stretch: from the tip of the 
first to the tip of the fourth finger, both 
fingers being extended. 8. The span: 
the same as our span, i. e., from the tip 
of the thumb to the tip of the index fin¬ 
ger, both stretched as far apart as pos¬ 
sible. 9. The great span: from the tip of 
the thumb to the tip of the little finger, 
all the digits being extended, while 
the thumb and little finger are strongly 
adducted. 10. The cubit: from the point 
of the elbow to the tip of the extended 
middle finger, the arm being bent. 11. 
The short cubit: from the point of the 
elbow to the tip of the extended little 
finger. 12. The natural yard: from the 
middle of the chest to the end of the 
middle finger, the arm being outstretched 
laterally at right angles with the body; 
this on a tall Indian equals 3 feet or more; 
among some tribes the measure is taken 
from the mouth to the tip of the middle 
finger. 13. The natural fathom, or brace: 
measured laterally on the outstretched 
arms, across the chest, from the tip of one 
middle finger to the tip of the other; this 
is twice the natural yard, or about 6 feet. 
The stature of white men usually equals 
or exceeds this measure, while among 
Indians the contrary is the rule—the arm 
of the Indian being usually proportion¬ 
ally longer than the arm of the white. 
This standard was commonly adopted by 
Indian traders of the N. in former days. 
They called it “brace,” a word taken 
from the old French. There seems to be 
no evidence that the foot was ever em¬ 
ployed by the Indians as a standard of 
linear measure, as it was among the 
European races; but the pace was em¬ 
ployed in determining distances on the 
surface of the earth. 

Circular measures. —1. The grasp: an 
approximate circle formed by the thumb 
and index finger of one hand. 2. The 
finger circle: the fingers of both hands 
held so as to inclose a nearly circular 
space, the tips of the index fingers and 
the tips ot the thumbs just touching. 3. 
The contracted finger circle: like the 
finger circle but diminished by making 
the first and second joints of one index 
finger overlap those of the other. 4. The 
arm circle: the arms held in front as if 
embracing the trunk of a tree, the tips of 
the middle fingers just meeting. 

Scales and weights were not known on 
the western continent previous to the dis¬ 


covery. There is no record of standards 
of dry or liquid measure, but it is prob¬ 
able that vessels of uniform size may have 
been used as such. See Exchange, and 
the references thereunder. (w. m. ) 

Mecadacut. An Indian village on the 
coast of Maine, between Penobscot and 
Kennebec rs., in Abnaki territory, in 
1616. 

Macadacut. —Smith (1629), Virginia, II, 183, repr. 
1819. Mecadacut. —Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 3d s., 111,22,1833. Mecaddacut.— Smith (1629), 
Virginia, li, 192, repr. 1819. 

Mecastria. Mentioned by Onate (Doc. 
Ined., xvi, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of the 
Jemez in New Mexico in 1598. It can 
not be identified with the present native 
name of any of the ruined settlements in 
the vicinity of Jemez. In another list by 
Onate (ibid., 102), Quiamera and Ffa 
are mentioned. A comparison of the lists 
shows the names to be greatly confused, 
the mera (of Quiamera) and fia making a 
contorted form of “Mecastria.” 

Mechemeton. A division of the Sisseton 
Sioux, perhaps the Miakechakesa. 

Machemeton. —Carte des Poss. Angl., 1777. Meche¬ 
meton.— Del’ Isle, map (1703) in Neill, Hist. Minn., 
164,1858. Mechemiton.— Anville, map of N. Am., 
1752. 

Mechgachkamic. A former village, per¬ 
haps belonging to the Unami Delawares, 
probably near Hackensack, N. J. 
Mechgachkamic. —Doc. of 1649 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., x hi , 25,1881. Mochgeychkonk. —Doc. of 1655, 
ibid., 48 (identical?). 

Mechkentowoon. A tribe of the Mahi- 
can confederacy formerly living, accord¬ 
ing to Ruttenber, on the w. bank of Hud¬ 
son r. above Catskill cr., N. Y. De Laet 
and early maps place them lower down 
the stream. (j. m.) 

Machkentiwomi.-r-De Laet, Nov. Orb., 72, 1633. 
Mechkentiwoom. —Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., i, 1856. Mechkentowoon. —Wassenaar (ca. 
1630) in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 71, 1872. 
Wechkentowoons.— Ruttenber, ibid.,86 (misprint). 

Mecopen. An Algonquian village, in 
1585, s. of Albemarle sd., near the mouth 
of Roanoke r., N. C. 

Mecopen.— Smith (1629), Virginia, I, map, repr. 
1819. Moquopen.— Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., I, 1856. 

Medals. From time immemorial loyalty 
has been rewarded by the conferring of 
land and titles of nobility, by the per¬ 
sonal thanks of the sovereign, the pre¬ 
sentation of medals, and the bestowal of 
knightly orders the insignia of which 
were hung on the breast of the recipient. 
With the Indian chief it was the same. 
At first he was supplied with copies of his 
own weapons, and then with the white 
man’s implements of war when he had be¬ 
come accustomed to their use. Brass 
tomahawks especially were presented to 
the Indians. Tecumseh carried such a 
tomahawk in his belt when he was killed 
at the battle of the Thames, in Canada, 
and his chief warrior, John Naudee, 


830 


MEDALS 


[b. a. e. 


removed it and the silver belt buckle from 
the body. There were also presented to 
the Indian chiefs silver hat-bands, chased 
and engraved with the royal arms; silver 
gorgets to be worn suspended from the 
neck and having the royal arms and em¬ 
blems of peace engraved upon them; and 
silver belt buckles, many of which ex¬ 
ceeded 3 in. in diameter. The potency 
of the medal was soon appreciated as a 
means of retaining the Indian’s allegi¬ 
ance, in which it played a most important 
part. While gratifying the vanity of the 
recipient, it appealed to him as an em¬ 
blem of fealty or of chieftainship, and 
in time had a place in the legends of the 
tribe. 

The earlier medals issued for presenta¬ 
tion to the Indians of North America 
have become extremely rare from various 
causes, chief among which was the change 
of government under which the Indian 
may have been living, as each govern¬ 
ment was extremely zealous in searching 
out all medals conferred by a previous 
one and substituting medals of its own. 
Anothercause has been that within recent 
years Indians took their medals to the 
nearest silversmith to have them con¬ 
verted into gorgets and amulets. After 
the Revolution the United States replaced 
the English medals with its own, which 
led to the establishment of a regular series 
of Indian peace medals. Many of the 
medals presented to the North American 
Indians were not dated, and in many 
instances were struck for other purposes. 

Spanish Medals. —Early Spanish mis¬ 
sionaries also presented medals to the 
Indians; these are often found in graves 


CATHOLIC MEDAL FROM A MOUND IN ALEXANDER CO., ILL. 

in those portions of the United States 
once occupied by the Spanish. Several of 
these medals were found at the old Cay¬ 
uga mission in New York, established 
in 1657 for the Huron refugees among 
the Iroquois and discontinued 30 years 
later. “The medals are of a religious 
character, and are supposed to have been 
given, in recognition of religious zeal or 


other service, by the early Catholic mis¬ 
sionaries” (Betts, p. 32). One of these 
medals is as follows: 

1682. Obverse, the Virgin Mary, standing on a 
crescent and clouds, surrounded by a rayed glory, 
in field 1682; legend, Nuestra Senora de Guada¬ 
lupe Ora Pro Nobis, Mexico. Reverse, bust of San 
Francisco de Assisi in dress of a monk, a halo 
above: legend, Francisco Ora Pro Nobis. Brass 
and silver; size, by 1£ in. 

In 1864 there was found at Prairie du 
Chien, Wis., in an Indian grave, a silver 
medal, now in possession of the Wiscon¬ 
sin Historical Society, “supposed to have 
been given to Huisconsin, a Sauk and Fox 
chief” (Betts, p. 239). This was one of 
the regular “service medals” awarded by 
Spain to members of her army. 

Obverse, bust of king to left; legend, Carolus 
III Rey de Espaha e de las Indias. Reverse, within 
a cactus wreath, Por Merito. Silver; size, 2£ in., 
with loop. 

French Canadian Medals. —The earli¬ 
est record of peace medals in connection 
with the Canadian Indians is found in 
Canada Correspondence General, vol. iv, 
in which mention is made of “a Caugh- 
nawaga chief, November 27, 1670, who 
holds preciously a medal presented to him 
by the king.” Leroux (p. 14) includes a 
medal caused to be struck by Cardinal 
Richelieu in 1631 for presentation to Cana¬ 
dian I ndians. A large medal was issued in 
France in commemoration of the reign¬ 
ing family; this example proved so ac¬ 
ceptable to the Indians that a series of 
six, varying slightly in design and in size 
from 1 T 3 ff to 3 ^ in., was issued for presenta¬ 
tion to them. Very few of the originals 
are now known to exist, but many re¬ 
strikes have been made from the dies in 
the Mus5e Monetaire at Paris. 

1693. Obverse, head of the king to right, lau- 
reated; legend, Ludovicus Magnus Rex Christian- 
issimus. Reverse, four busts in field; legend. 
Felicitas Domus Augustx. Seren Dolph, Lud. D, 
Burg. Phid D. Card. D. Bitur. M. D. C. X. C.III. 

After the death of the Dolphin, in 1712, 
the reverse type was changed, two figures 
replacing the four busts of Louis, the 
Dauphin, and his two sons. Of this medal 
only restrikes are now known. 

171-. Obverse, bust of king to right; legend, 
Ludovicus XIII1, D. G. FR. NAV. REX. Re¬ 
verse, two Roman warriors; legend, HONOR ET 
VIRTUS. Silver; bronze, size, 2| in. 

In the succeeding reign a smaller medal 
of similar design was issued, bearing on 
the obverse the head of the king to the 
right, draped and laureated; legend, 
Louis XV Rex Chrislianissirnus. A copy 
of this medal has been found with the 
legend erased and George III stamped in 
its place (McLachlan, p. 9). Silver; 
bronze; size, 2 in. 

The General De Levi medal of 1658, 
and that of the first Intendant-General of 
Canada, Jean Varin, of 1683, though in¬ 
cluded by Leroux (p. 15) among the 




BULL. 30] 


MEDALS 


881 


peace medals, are excluded by Betts and 
other writers. Leroux (p. 17) figures 
the French Oswego medal of 1758 as be¬ 
longing to the peace medal series. “As 
medals were freely distributed about 
this time, some of them may have been 
placed in Indian hands” (Beauchamp, 
p. 64). 

1758. Obverse, head of king to left, nude and 
hair flowing; legend, Ludovicus XV Orbis Im- 
perator; in exergue, 1758. Reverse, in field four 
forts; legend, Wesel, Oswego, Port Mahon; in ex¬ 
ergue, Expung. Sti. Davidis Arce et Solo Equata. 
Silver; brass; size, in. 

British Medals. —The earliest medals 
presented to American Indians by the 
English colonists are those known as the 
Pamunkey series. By Act 38, Laws of 
Virginia, in the 14th year of King Charles 
II, March, 1661 (see Hening’s Statutes, 
ii, 185), there were caused to be made, 
possibly in the colony, “silver and plated 
plaques to be worn by the Indians when 
visiting the English settlements.” They 
were plain on the reverse, in order to 
permit the engraving of the names of the 
chiefs of the Indian towns. 


1670. Obverse, bust of king to right; legend in 
outer circle, Charles II, King of England, Scotland, 
France, Ireland and Virginia; the center of the 
shield a slightly convex disk bearing the legend, 
the royal arms, and in one corner a tobacco plant. 
Encircled by ribbon of the Garter, below the disk 
in an oval surface, is the inscription: The Queen 
of Pamaunkee; above the disk a crown. Reverse, 
plain, with 5 rings attached for suspension. Sil¬ 
ver; copper; oval; size, 4 by 6 in. 

1670. Obverse, same as last; legend, Ye King of 

-. Reverse, a tobacco plant; legend, Piomock. 

Silver; copper; oval; size, 4 by 6 in. 


In a proposal made by Robert Hunter, 
captain-general, etc., to the chief of the 
Five Nations, at Albany, Aug. 16, 1710, 
during the reign of Queen Anne, it is re¬ 
corded: “ Your brothers who have been 
in England and have seen the great Queen 
and her court, have no doubt informed 
you how vain and groundless the French 
boasting has been all along. Her Majesty 
has sent you as pledges of her protection 
a medal for each nation, with her royal 
effigies on one side and the last gained 
battle on the other. She has sent you 
her picture, in silver, twenty to each 
nation, to be given to the chief warriors, 
to be worn about their necks, as a token 
that they should always be in readiness 
to fight under her banner against the 
common enemy.” This was probably the 
silver medal struck in 1709 in commemo¬ 
ration of the battle and capture of Tour- 
nay by the British. 


1710. Obverse, bust of Queen Anne to left, hair 
bound in pearls, lovelock on the right shoulder; 
in gown, and mantle on the right shoulder, leg¬ 
end, ANNA D. G. MAG. BRI. ET H1B. REG.; 
below, J. C. [John Crocker] Reverse, Pallas 
seated, to right, resting her left hand upon a 
Gorgian shield and holding in her right hand 
a spear, murally crowned, near her a pile of 


arms and flags, a town in the distance; legend, 
Turnace Expurgato; in exergue, M.D.C.C.IX. 
Gold; silver; size, l&in. 

A series of six medals was issued dur¬ 
ing the reigns of George I and George II, 
of similar design, in brass and copper; 
sizes, 1? to lg in. “The medals were not 
dated, and it is known that the later 
Georges used the same design” (Beau¬ 
champ, p. 27). 

1714. Obverse, bust of king to right, laureated, 
with flowing hair, in armor, draped; legend, 
George King of Great Britain. Reverse, an In¬ 
dian at right drawing his bow on a deer, stand¬ 
ing at left on a hill, sun above, to right above 
tree one star, to left above Indian three stars. 
Brass; size, If in., with loop for suspension. 

1753. Obverse, bust of king to left, laureated; 
legend, Georgius II, D. G. MAG. BRI. FRA. 
ET HIB. REX. F. D. Reverse, the royal arms, 
within the Garter, surmounted by a crown and a 
lion;upon ribbon, below, DIEU ET MON DROIT. 
Silver, cast and chased; size, 1| in., with loop and 
ring. 

The last was one of 30 medals brought 
from England in 1753 by Sir Danvers 
Osborne, governor of New York, for pre¬ 
sentation to friendly Indians of the Six 
Nations. The medals were provided with 
broad scarlet ribbons (Hist. Mag., Sept. 
1865, p. 85; Betts, p. 177). 

In July, 1721, the governor of Penn¬ 
sylvania presented to the Seneca chief, 
Ghosont, a gold coronation medal of 
George I, charging him “to deliver this 
piece into the hands of the first man or 
greatest chief of the Five Nations, whom 
you call Kannygoodt, to be laid up and 
kept as a token of friendship between 
them” (Hawkins, ii, 426). 

1721. Obverse, bust of king to right, laureated, 
hair long, and in scale armor, lion’s head on 
breast and mantle; legend, Georgius. D. G. MAG. 
BRI. FR. ET HIB. REX.; on truncation, E. Han¬ 
nibal, Reverse, the king seated, to right, be¬ 
neath a canopy of state, is being crowned by 
Britannia, who rests her hand upon a shield; in 
exergue, INA UG URA T U, Oct. MDCCX1III. 

The following medal seems to have 
been a trader’s token or store card, possi¬ 
bly given to the Indians to gain their 
good will: 

1757. Obverse, a trader buying skins from an 
Indian; legend, The Red Man Came to Elton 
Daily. Reverse, a deer lying beneath a tree; leg¬ 
end, Skins bought at Eltons; -in exergue, 1757 
(Am. Jour. Nuinismat., vii, 90). Copper, size, 
If in. 

The first Indian peace medal manufac¬ 
tured in America is thought to have been 
the following. It was presented by The 
Friendly Association for the Regaining 
and Preserving Peace With the Indians 
by Pacific Means, a society composed 
largely of Quakers. The dies were en¬ 
graved by Edward Duffield, a watch and 
clock maker of Philadelphia, and the 
medals were struck by Joseph Richard¬ 
son, a member of the society. Many 
restrikes have been issued. 

1757. Obverse, bust of the king to right, hair long 
and laureated: legend, Georgius II Dei Gratia. 


832 


MEDALS 


[B. A. E. 


Reverse, Indian and white man seated, a council 
fire between them; whiteman offers calumet and 
Indian extends hand for it; above Indian a rayed 
sun, back of whiteman a tree; legend, Let us Look 
to the Most High who Blessed our Fathers with Peace; 
in exergue, 1757. Silver; copper; pewter; size, 
1| in. 


INDIAN PEACE MEDAL OF 1757 

On the capture of Montreal by Sir Jef¬ 
frey Amherst, Sept. 8, 1760, an interesting 
series of medals, known as the conquest 
medals, was issued. McLachlan says they 
“were evidently made in America, and 
presented to the Iroquois and Onondagas, 
and other chiefs who assisted in the cam¬ 
paign. ’ ’ To each of the 23 chiefs, though 
they did but little lighting, was presented 
a medal by Sir William Johnson, who, in 
his diary, under date of July 21, 1761, 
says: “ I then delivered the medals sent 
me by the General for those who went 
with us to Canada last year, being twenty- 
three in number.” Beauchamp (p. 61) 
says: “In 1761 Johnson had similar 
medals for theOneidas, but none of them 
have been found.” 

1760. Obverse, view of a town, with bastions, on 
a river front, five church spires, island in river; in 
foreground, to left, a bastion with flag of St George; 
in exergue, in an incused oval, D. C. F.; this side 
is cast and chased. Reverse, in field engraved, 
Montreal , remainder plain for insertion of name 
and tribe of the recipient. Silver; size, in. 
Pewter; size, If in. 

Beauchamp(p. 66)says: “Twomedals, 
relating to the capture of Montreal and 
conquest of Canada, seem more likely to 
have been given by Johnson to the In¬ 
dians in 1761. As the two medals have 
Indian symbols, and one Amherst’s name, 
and that of Montreal, they seem to suit 
every way Johnson’s lavish distribution 
of medals at Otsego, when sent by his 
leader.” 

1761. Obverse, a laureated nude figure, typify¬ 
ing the St Lawrence, to right, reclining, right 
arm resting on the prow of a galley, paddle in 
left hand, a beaver climbing up his left leg; - 
in background a standard inscribed Amherst 
within a wreath of laurel, surmounted by a lion. 
In exergue, a shield with fleur-de-lis; above, a 
tomahawk, bow, and quiver; legend, Conquest of 
Canada. Reverse, a female figure, to right, seated 
beneath a pine tree; an eagle with extended 
wings standing on a rock; before the female a 
shield of France, with club and tomahawk; 
legend, Montreal Taken , MDCCLX; in exergue, 
Soc. Promoting Arts and, Commerce. Silver; size, 
If iu. 

1761. Obverse, head of King George, to right, 
nude, with flowing hair, laureated; legend, 
George II. King. Reverse, female figure seated 
beneath a pine tree, to left, weeping, typical of 


Canada; behind her a beaver climbing up a bank; 
legend, Canada Subdued; in exergue, MDCCLX.; 
below, S. P. A. C. Silver; bronze; size, If in. 

To commemorate the marriage of 
George III and Queen Charlotte a small 
special medal was struck, in 1761, for 
general distribution to insure the alle¬ 
giance of the savages in the newly ac¬ 
quired province (McLachlan, p. 13). 

1761. Obverse, bust of king and queen facing 
each other; above, a curtain with cords and tas¬ 
sels falling midway between the heads. Reverse, 
the royal arms, with ribbon of the Garter, and 
motto on ribbon below, Dieu et Mon Droit. Sil¬ 
ver; size, If in., pierced for suspension. 

The following series of medals is sup¬ 
posed to have been struck for presenta¬ 
tion to Indian chiefs in Canada at the 
close of the French and Indian wars. 
There were five in the series, differing in 
size and varying slightly in design; they 
were formed of two shells joined together; 
one of lead and others of pewter, with 
tracings of gilding, have been found. 

1762. Obverse, youthful bust of king, to right, 
in armor, wearing ribbon of the Garter, hair in 
double curl over ear; legend, Dei Gratia. Re¬ 
verse, the royal arms encircled by the ribbon of 
the Garter, surmounted by a crown, supported by 
the lion and the unicorn ; legend, Horn Soit qui 
Mai y Pense; on a ribbon below the motto, Dieu 
et Mon Droit. Silver; size, If by 3} in. 

In 1763 Pontiac rebelled against British 
rule, and the Government entered into 
treaty with the remaining friendly chiefs. 
A council was held at Niagara in 1764, 
at which time the series of three medals 
known as the “ Pontiac conspiracy 
medals” was presented to the chiefs and 
and principal warriors. 

1764. Obverse, bust of king, to left, in armor 
and in very high relief, long hair tied with rib¬ 
bon, laureated; legend, Georgius III. D.A.M. 
BRI. FRA. ET IIIB. REX. F. D. Reverse, an 
officer and an Indian seated on a rustic bench in 
foreground; on the banks of a river, to right, 
three houses on a rocky point; at junction of 
river with ocean, two ships under full sail. The 
Indian holds in his left hand a calumet, with his 
right grasps the hand of the officer; at left of 
Indian, in the background, a tree, at right a 
mountain range; legend, Happy While United; in 
exergue, 1764. In field, stamped in two small in¬ 
cused circles, D. C. F. and N York. Silver; size, 
3ft by 3f in.; loop, a calumet and an eagle’s 
wing. 

In 1765 a treaty was made with the 
British and Pontiac, and his chiefs were 
presented by Sir William Johnson, at 
Oswego, with the medals known as “the 
lion and wolf medals.” A large number 
of these were distributed, and two reverse 
dies have been found. The design repre¬ 
sents the expulsion of France from Can¬ 
ada (see Parkman, Pontiac Conspiracy,- 
chap, xxxi; Betts, p. 238; Leroux, p. 156; 
McLachlan, p. 13). 

1765. Obverse, bust of king to right, in armor, 
wearing the ribbon of the Garter; legend, Geor¬ 
gius III Dei Gratia. Reverse, to left, the British 
lion reposing under a tree; to right, a snarling 
wolf; behind lion, a church and two houses; be¬ 
hind wolf, trees and bushes. Silver; size, 2| in. 





BULL. 30 ] 


MEDALS 


833 


A large body of Indians assembled in 
general council at Montreal, Aug. 17, 
1778, representing the Sioux, Sauk, 
Foxes, Menominee, Winnebago, Ottawa, 
Potawatomi, and Chippewa. It is gen¬ 
erally supposed that at this time the 
presentation of the medals took place, in 
consideration of the assistance rendered 
the British in the campaigns of Kentucky 
and Illinois and during the War of the 
Revolution. Gen. Haldimand, com¬ 
mander in chief of the British forces in 
Canada, also gave a certificate with each 
medal (see Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896; Betts, p. 284-286). 

1778. Obverse, bust of king to right, wearing 
ribbon of the Garter. Reverse, the royal arms, 
surrounded by ribbon of the Garter aiid motto, 
surmounted by a crown, supported by the lion 
and the unicorn; at bottom ribbon, with motto, 
Dieu et Mon Droit; shield of pretense crowned. 
Silver; size, 2f in., with loop for suspension. 

The following medals were presented, 
until about the time of the war of 1812, 
to Indian chiefs for meritorious service, 
and continued in use possibly until re¬ 
placed by those of 1814 (Leroux, p. 157): 

1775. Obverse, bust of the king, to left, with 
hair curled, wearing ribbon of the Garter; legend, 
Georgius III Dei Gratia. Reverse, the royal arms 
with supporters; surmounted by crown and rib¬ 
bon of the Garter; below, ribbon with motto, 
Dieu et Mon Droit. Silver; size, 2* in., with loop 
for suspension. 

1794. Obverse, bust of king to right, in armor, 
wearing ribbon of the Garter, hair long, cloak 
over shoulders; two laurel branches from bottom 
of medal to height of shoulders of bust; legend, 
Georgius III Dei Gratia; in exergue, 1794. Re¬ 
verse, on plain field, the royal arms with sup¬ 
porters, surmounted by helmet and crest, encir¬ 
cled by ribbon of the Garter, and below ribbon 
and motto. Silver; size, 11 in. 

At the close of the war of 1812, the 
Government, desirous of marking its ap¬ 
preciation of the services rendered by its 
Indian allies, besides making other pres¬ 
ents and grants of land, caused the fol¬ 
lowing medal, in three sizes, to be struck 
in silver for presentation to the chiefs and 
principal warriors (Leroux, p. 158): 

1814. Obverse, bust with older head of king to 
right, laureated, draped in an ermine mantle, 
secured in front with a large bow of ribbon, 
wearing the collar and jewel of StGeorge; legend, 
Georgius III Dei Gratia Britanniarum Rex F. I).; 
under bust, T. Wyon, Jun. S. Reverse, the royal 
arms of Great Britain with shield of pretense of 
Hanover, surmounted by a crown and crested 
helmet, all encircled by ribbon of the Garter and 
supporters, below a ribbon with motto, Dieu et 
Mon Droit; above ribbon, a rose, thistle, and 
shamrock; behind helmet on both sides, a display 
of acanthus leaves; in exergue, 18U. Silver; 
size, 2$ to m in. 

The following medal, in three sizes, 
was struck in 1840 for participants in the 
early treaties of the Queen’s reign. It is 
possible that it may have been presented 
also to the Indians of Lower Canada who 
took no part in the abortive uprising of 
1837 (McLachlan, p. 36; Leroux, p. 161): 

1840. Obverse, bust of Queen, to right, crowned; 
legend, Victoria Dei Gratia Britanniarum Regina 


F. D.; under neck W. Wyon, R. A. Reverse, 
arms of Great Britain, surmounted by crown and 
crested helmet, encircled by ribbon of the Garter, 
supported by the lion and the unicorn; below, 
ribbon with motto, Dieu et Mon Droit, the rose 
and thistle; in exergue, 18U0. Silver; sizes, 2g to 
4& in. 

The medal known as the Ashburton 
treaty medal was given through Lord 
Ashburton, in 1842, tc the Micmac and 
other eastern Indians for services asguards 
and hunters, and assistance in laying out 
the boundary between the United States 
and Canada. 

1842. Obverse, bust of queen in an inner den- 
tilated circle, garland of roses around psyche 
knot; under bust, B. Wyon; no legend. Reverse, 
arms of Great Britain in an inner circle, sur¬ 
mounted by a crowned and crested helmet, encir¬ 
cled by the ribbon of the Garter; legend, Victoria 
Dei Gratia Britanniarum Regina Fid. Def. Rib¬ 
bon in lower field backed by the rose and thistle 
(Betts, p. 159). Silver; size, 2 T 9 g in. 

In 1848 the Peninsular War medal was 
issued, to be given to any officer, non¬ 
commissioned officer, or soldier who had 
participated in any battle or siege from 
1793 to 1814. In general orders, dated 
Horse Guards, June 1,1847, were included 
the battles of Chateaugay, Oct. 26, 1813, 
and of Chrystlers Farm, Nov. 11, 1813, 
covering the invasion of Canada by the 
American army in 1813. “The medal 
was also conferred upon the Indians, the 
name of the battles engraved on clasps, 
and the name of the recipient on the 
edge of the medal, with title of warrior” 
(Leroux, p. 177). 

1848. Obverse, bust of the queen to right, crown¬ 
ed; legend, Victoria Regina; below bust, 18J78, and 
W. Wyon, R. A. Reverse, figure of the queen in 
royal robes, standing on a dais, crowning with a 
wreath of laurel the Duke of Wellington, who is 
kneeling before her; by side of dais a crouching 
lion; in exergue, 1703-181A. Silver; size, 2£ in., 
with loop for suspension. 

The Prince of Wales on his visit to 
Canada in 1860 was received by Indians 
in full ceremonial dress. Each chief was 
presented with a large silver medal, while 
the warriors received smaller medals. 
This medal is known as the Prince of 
Wales medal. 

I860. Obverse, head of queen to right, undrap¬ 
ed and crowned; legend, Victoria D. G. ReginaF. D. 
In lower right-hand field, the three feathers and 
motto; lower left-hand field, 1860. Reverse, the 
royal arms surmounted by a helmet, crown, and 
lion, with ribbon of the Garter, and on the ribbon 
below, Dieuet Mon Droit; at back, roses, sham¬ 
rock, and thistle; in exergue, 1860. Silver; size, 
2 in., with loop for suspension. 

In 1860, when the Government had ac¬ 
quired the lands of the Hudson’s Bay 
Company’s territory and after the extinc¬ 
tion of the Indian iand titles, the follow¬ 
ing medal was presented to the Indians 
under Treaty No. 1. In the Report of 
the Commissioners it is stated: “In ad¬ 
dition each Indian received a dress, a flag, 
and a medal as marks of distinction.” 
These medals at first were not struck for 
this occasion. 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-53 



834 


MEDALS 


[B. A. K. 


I 


1860. Obverse, head of the queen to right, 
crowned; legend. Victoria Regina; under bust, J. 
S. and B. Wyon , S C. Reverse, two branches of 
oak, center held plain for the engraving of name 
and tribe of recipient. Silver; size, 3 T 3 8 in. 

The very large Confederation medal of 
1867, with an extra rim soldered on it, 
was used in 1872 for Treaty No. 2. It 
was presented to the Indians subsequent 
to the acquisition of the Hudson’s Bay 
Company’s territory, at which time the In 
dian titles were extinguished. ‘‘ Twenty- 
five were prepared, but found so cum¬ 
bersome no more were used” (Leroux, 
p. 219). 

1872. Obverse, bust of queen to right, within 
an inner circle having milled edge ground, with 
veil and necklace; legend, Dominion of Canada; 
below, Chief's Medal, 1872; below bust, S. Wyon. 
Reverse, in inner circle Britannia seated with 
lion and four female hgures, representing the 
four original provinces of the Canadian confed¬ 
eration; legend, Juvenatus et Patrius Viqor Canada 
Instaurata, 1867; in outer circle, Indians of the 
North West Territories. Silver; bronze; size, 3f in. 

The following 
medal was 
struck especially 
to replace the 
large and inar¬ 
tistic medal last 
described, and 
was intended for 
presentation at 
future treaties; 

1873. Obverse, 
head of queen to 
right, crowned with 
veil and necklace, 
draped;legend, Vic¬ 
toria I). G. Britt. 

REG. F. D.; below 
bust, J. S. Wyon. 

Reverse, a general 
officer in full uni¬ 
form, to right, 
grasping the hand of an Indian chief who wears 
a feather headdress and leggings; pipe of peace 
at feet of figures; in background, at back of In¬ 
dian, several wigwams; back of officer, a half sun 

above horizon; legend, Indian Treaty No. -, on 

lower edge, 187-. Silver; size, 3 in., Avith loop for 
suspension. 

A series of three medals was struck by 
the Hudson’s Bay Company for presenta¬ 
tion to the Indians of the great North¬ 
west for faithful services. These were 
engraved by G. H. Kuchler of the Bir¬ 
mingham mint, 1790 to 1805. 

1793. Obverse, bust of king to left, long hair and 
draped; legend, Georgius III D. G. Britanniarum 
Rex Fidei. Def.; under bust, G. H. K. Reverse, 
arms of the Hudson’s Bay Company; argent, a 
cross gules, four beavers proper, to the left, sur¬ 
mounted by a helmet and crest, a fox supported 
by two stags; motto on ribbon, Pro Pelle Culem 
(Leroux, p. 59). Silver; sizes, 1}§ by 3 in. 

Medals of the United States. —The 
earliest known Indian medal struck 
within the United States is that of 1780, 
as follows: 

1780. Obverse, arms of Virginia; legend, Rebel¬ 
lion to Tyrants is Obedience to God. Reverse, an 
officer and an Indian seated under a tree, the In¬ 


dian holding a calumet in his hand; in the back¬ 
ground, a sea on which are three ships, in the 
m idd le-ground, a rocky point and a house; legend, 
Happy While United. Silver; pewter; size, 25 in.; 
loop, a calumet and an eagle’s wing. 

The pewter medal presented by the 
Government to the Indians represented 
at the Ft Harmar treaty in Ohio, in 1789, 
bears on the obverse the bust of Wash¬ 
ington with full face, and on the reverse 
the clasped hands and crossed calumet 
and tomahawk, with the date 1789, and 
legend, Friendship, the Pipe of Peace. The 
tribes present at the treaty were the Ot¬ 
tawa, Delawares, Hurons, Sauk, Pota- 
watomi, and Chippewa. 

Of the early United States medals pos¬ 
sibly the most interesting is that known 
as the Red Jacket medal, presented to 
this celebrated Seneca by Washington at 
Philadelphia in 1792. This was one of 
several similar medals, one of which is 
dated 1793. Of it Loubat says: “The 

medals were 
made at the 
United States 
Mint when Dr 
Rittenhousewas 
director, 1792- 
1795.” See Red 
Jacket. 

1792. Obverse, 
Washington in uni¬ 
form, bareheaded, 
facing to the right, 
presenting a pipe to 
an Indian chief, 
who is smoking it; 
the Indian is stand¬ 
ing, and has a 
large medal sus¬ 
pended from his 
neck. On the left 
is a pine tree, at 
its foot a toma¬ 
hawk; in the background, a farmer plow¬ 
ing; in exergue, George Washington Presi¬ 
dent 1792 —all engraved. Reverse, arms and 
crest of the United States on the breast of 
the eagle, in the right talon of which is 
an olive branch, in the left a sheaf of arrows, 
in its beak a ribbon with the motto E Plu- 
ribus Unum; above, a glorv breaking through 
the clouds and surrounded by 13 stars. Size, 
6$ by 4J in. 

In the Greenville treaty of 1795, be¬ 
tween the United States and representa¬ 
tives of the Hurons, Delawares, Ottawa, 
Chippewa, Potawatomi, Sauk, and other 
tribes, a part of the function, as usual, 
involved the presentation of peace medals. 
The medal in this case was a facsimile of 
the oval Red Jacket medal, in silver, en¬ 
graved and chased, with a change in the 
date to 1795. Size, 4 by 6 in. As there 
were many signers, a considerable num¬ 
ber of these medals must have been dis¬ 
tributed. 

During the second administration of 
Washington, in 1796, there was issued a 
series of four medals, in silver and bronze, 
called “the Season medals,” whichSnow- 




RED JACKET” MEDAL, DATED 1793 




BULL. 30 ] 


MEDALS 


835 


den (p. 95) states were Indian peace 
medals. These are as follows: 

1796. No. 1. Obverse,a shepherd with staff in left 
hand, and a cow, two sheep, and a lamb in fore¬ 
ground; in background, a hill, tree, and farm¬ 
house with open door, in which two persons are 
seen; on base, C. II. Kuchler, F; in exergue, U. S. A. 
Reverse, legend in five parallel lines, Second 
Presidency of George Washington MDCCXCVI, 
within a wreath of olive branches; in bow, the 
letter K. Size, 1J in. 

No. 2. Obverse, interior of a room; in back¬ 
ground, a woman; in foreground, a woman spin¬ 
ning, at left a child guarding a cradle, on right 
an open fireplace; on base, C. H. K. F.; in ex¬ 
ergue, U. S. A. Reverse, same as No. 1. 

No. 3. Obverse, in foreground, farmer sowing; 
in background, a farmhouse and a man plowing; 
on base, Kuchler; in exergue, U. S. A. Reverse, 
same as No. 1. 

No. 4. Obverse, bust of Washington in uniform, 
to left, in a wreath of laurel; legend, In War 
Enemies. Reverse, bust of Franklin, to left, in 
wreath of laurel; legend, In Peace Friends. Tin; 
size, | in. 


for the obverse of the Adams medal. 
The reverse used was that of the smaller 
Jefferson medal; a few were struck in soft 
metal, which are now exceedingly rare. 

Obverse, bust of president to right, clothed, hair 
in curls and cue; legend, John Adams, Pres. U. S. 
A.; on truncation, Leonard. Reverse, two hands 
clasped, on cuff of one three stripes and as many 
buttons with displayed eagle; the other wrist has 
a bracelet with spread-eagle; legend, Peace and 
Friendship, and crossed calumet and tomahawk. 

The medal of Adams now used is prac¬ 
tically the same, except the arrangement 
of the face, and the legend, John Adams, 
President of the United States; in exergue, 
A. D. 1797; in truncation, Furst. Re¬ 
verse, the same as last. Bronze; size, 2 in. 

The Jefferson medal is as follows: 

Obverse, bust of president to right; legend, Th. 
Jefferson, President of the U. S. A. D. 1801. Re¬ 
verse, same as last. Silver and bronze; sizes, 4 
in., 2| in., 2 in. 



a medal of the third 
seen no representa- 


“Of the medals taken along and of 
which use was made by the explorers 
[Lewis and Clark] there were three sizes, 
or grades, one, the largest and preferred 
one, ‘ a medal with the likeness of the 

President of the _ 

United States’; 
the second, ‘a 
medal represent¬ 
ing some domes¬ 
tic animals’; the 
third, ‘medals 
with the impres¬ 
sion of a farmer 
sowing grain’. I 
have found in 
‘The Northwest 
Coast,’ by James 
G. Swan, a cut of 
class, but 1 hav< 
tion of the second class. The third class 
medal was made of pewter. These med¬ 
als were given to chiefs only” (Wheeler, 
Trail of Lewis and Clark, 139-140). 

The following were struck especially for 
presentation to Indian chiefs, and had 
their inception, Apr. 20, 1786, when Rep¬ 
resentative McKean moved ‘‘that the 
Board of the Treasury ascertain the num¬ 
ber and value of the medals received bv 
the Commission appointed to treat with 
the Indians, from the said Indians, and 
have an equal number with the arms of 
the United States, made in silver and re¬ 
turned to the chiefs, from whom they 
were received.’ ’ The result was the final 
adoption of a series of medals, each bear¬ 
ing on the obverse the bust of a Presi¬ 
dent, and on the reverse a symbol of 
peace. This series began with the ad¬ 
ministration of President Jefferson. The 
John Adams medal was made many years 
after his administration, and though not 
so considered at first, it is now regarded 
as included in the series. At the time of 
the first issue, however, a die was made 


THE JEFFERSON MEDAL OF 1801 


The medals that followed were the same 
in design, metal, and size, with the names 
of the respective Presidents, until the ad¬ 
ministration of Millard Fillmore, in 1850, 
when the reverse was entirely changed, 

as follows: 

An Indian in war 
dress and a pioneer 
in foreground, the 
latter leaning on a 
plow; to right a hill, 
incenterbackground 
a river and a sailing 
boat; to left two cows 
beyond a farmhouse; 
American flag back 
f the figures; legend, 
Labor, Virtue, Honor; 
in exergue, J. Wilson, 
F. Silver and bronze; 
size, 3 in. 

During the next two administrations 
this type was retained, but in 1862, dur¬ 
ing the administration of Abraham Lin¬ 
coln, another change in the reverse was 
made: 

In field, an Indian plowing, children playing at 
ball, a hill and a log cabin and a church; a river 
with boats and ships in background; in an outer 
circle, following curve of medal, an Indian scalp¬ 
ing another; below, an Indian woman weeping, 
a quiver of arrows with bow and calumet. Silver 
and bronze; size, 2 \ in. 

The reverse was again changed during 
the administration of Andrew Johnson, 
as follows: 

Figure of America clasping the hand of an 
Indian in war dress, before a monument sur¬ 
mounted by a bust of George Washington; at feet 
of Indian are the attributes of savage life; at feet 
of America those of civilization. Silver and 
bronze; size, 2| in. 

The medal issued during the adminis¬ 
tration of President Grant was entirely 
different: 

Obverse, bust of president within a wreath of 
laurel; legend, United Stales of America, Liberty, 
Justice and Equality; below', Let us have peace, a 
calumet and a branch of laurel. Reverse, a globe 
resting on implements of industry with the Bible 
above and rays behind it; legend, On earth peace, 
good will toward men. 


836 


MEDFIELD-MEDICINE AND MEDICINE-MEN 


Lb. a. e. 


In 1877, during the administration of 
President Hayes, change was made to an 
oval medal: 

Obverse, bust of president to right, nude; leg¬ 
end, Rutherford B. Hayes, President of the United 
States, 1877. Reverse, figure of a pioneer with ax 
in left hand and pointing with right to a cabin 
in right background, before which a woman is 
seated with a child in her lap; in middle back¬ 
ground, a man plowing, a mountain beyond, fig¬ 
ure of an Indian in full war dress facing pioneer, 
to right a tree, above in rays Peace; in exergue, 
crossed calumet and tomahawk within wreath. 
Silver; bronze; size, 2f by 3| in. 

No change was made in size or type 
until the administration of Benjamin 
Harrison, when the old r< und form of 
medal was resumed: 

Obverse, bust of president to right, draped; 
legend, Benjamin Harrison, President of the United 
States, 1889. Reverse, two hands clasped, crossed 
calumet and tomahawk; legend, Peace and 
Friendship. Sizes, 3 in., in., 2 in. 

This medal was continued to the ad¬ 
ministration of President Roosevelt. 

The issuance of peace medals was not 
confined to the governments, as the vari¬ 
ous fur companies also presented to In¬ 
dian chiefs medals of various kinds and 
in various metals, as, for example, the 
medals of the Hudson’s Bay Company 
from 1790 to 1805, above described. The 
Chouteau Fur Company, of St Louis, 
caused to be given by its agents in the 
N. W. the following: 

Obverse, bust of Pierre Chouteau, to left, 
clothed; legend, Pierre Chouteau, Jr., & Co., Up¬ 
per Missouri Outfit. Reverse, in field, crossed 
tomahawk and calumet, and clasped hands; 
legend, Peace and Friendship, 181,8. Silver; size, 
3$ in. 

Consult Beauchamp, Metallic Orna¬ 
ments of the New York Indians, 1903; 
Betts, American Colonial History Illus¬ 
trated by Contemporaneous Medals, 1894; 
Carr, Dress and Ornaments of Certain 
American Indians, 1897; Carter, Medals of 
the British Army, 1861; Catalogue du 
Mus6e Monetaire, 1833; Clark, Onondaga, 
1849; Fisher, American Medals of the Rev¬ 
olution, in Mass. Hist. Soc.Coll., 3d s., vi; 
Halsey, Old New York Frontier, 1901; 
Hawkins, Medallic Illustrations of British 
History; Hayden, Silver and Copper 
Medals, in Proc. Wyo. Hist, and Geol. 
Soc., ii, pt. 2, 1886; Irwin, War Medals, 
1899; Leroux, Medaillier du Canada, 
1888; McLachlan in Canadian. Antiq. 
and Numismat. Jour., 3d s., ii, 1899; 
Wheeler, Trail of Lewis and Clark, 1900; 
Miner, Historyof Wyoming Valley, 1845; 
O’Callaghan, Documentary History of the 
State of New York, 1856-87; Penhallow, 
History of the Wars of New England, 
1824; Pinkerton, Medallic History of 
England, 1790; Snowden, MedalsofWash¬ 
ington in the U. S. Mint, 1861. 

(p. e. b. ) 

Medfield. In 1677 there was a settle¬ 
ment of Christian Indians (perhaps 


Nipmuc) at this place, in Norfolk co., 
Mass.—Gookin (1677) in Drake, Bk. Inds., 
bk. 2, 115, 1848. 

Medicine and Medicine-men. Med¬ 
icine is an agent or influence employed 
to prevent, alleviate, or cure some patho¬ 
logical condition or its symptoms. The 
scope of such agents among the Indians 
was extensive, ranging, as among other 
primitive peoples, from magic, prayer, 
force of suggestion, and a multitude of 
symbolic and empirical means, to actual 
and more rationally used remedies. 
Where the Indians are in contact with 
whites- the old methods of combating 
physical ills are slowly giving way to the 
curative agencies of civilization. The 
white man in turn has adopted from 
the Indians a number of valuable medic¬ 
inal plants, such as cinchona, jalapa, hy- 
drastis, etc. 

In general the tribes show many sim¬ 
ilarities in regard to medicine, but the 
actual agents employed differ with the 
tribes and localities, as well as with in¬ 
dividual healers. Magic, prayers, songs, 
exhortation, suggestion, ceremonies, 
fetishes, and certain specifics and me¬ 
chanical processes are employed only by 
the medicine-men or medicine-women; 
other specific remedies or procedures are 
proprietary, generally among a few old 
women in the tribe; while many vegetal 
remedies and simple manipulations are 
of common knowledge in a given locality. 

The employment of magic consists in 
opposing a supposed malign influence, 
such as that of a sorcerer, spirits of the 
dead, mythic animals, etc., by the super¬ 
natural power of the healer’s fetishes and 
other means. Prayers are addressed to 
benevolent deities and spirits, invoking 
their aid. Healing songs, consisting of 
prayers or exhortations, are sung. Ha¬ 
rangues are directed to evil spirits sup¬ 
posed to cause the sickness, and often are 
accentuated by noises to frighten such 
spirits away. Suggestion is exercised in 
many ways directly and indirectly. Cur¬ 
ative ceremonies usually combine all or 
most of the agencies mentioned. Some of 
them, such as Matthews describes among 
the Navaho, are very elaborate, prolong¬ 
ed, and costly. The fetishes used are pe¬ 
culiarly shaped stones or wooden objects, 
lightning-riven wood, feathers, claws, 
hair, figurines of mythic animals, repre¬ 
sentations of the sun, of lightning, etc., 
and are supposed to embody a mysteri¬ 
ous pow T er capable of preventing disease 
or of counteracting its effects. Mechan¬ 
ical means of curing consist of rubbing, 
pressure with the hands or feet, or with 
a sash or cord (as in labor or in painful 
affections of the chest), bonesetting, cut¬ 
ting, cauterizing, scarifying, cupping (by 


BULL. 301 


MEDICINE AND MEDICINE-MEN 


837 


sucking), blood-letting, poulticing, clys- 
mata, sweat bath, sucking of snake poison 
or abscesses, counter irritation, tooth pull¬ 
ing, bandaging, etc. Dieting and total 
abstinence from food were forms of treat¬ 
ment in vogue in various localities. Veg¬ 
etal medicines were, and in some tribes 
still are, numerous. Some of these are 
employed by reason of a real or fancied 
resemblance to the part affected, or as 
fetishes, because of a supposed mythical 
antagonism to the cause of the sickness. 
Thus, a plant with a worm-like stem may 
be given as a vermifuge; one that has 
many hair-like processes is used among 
the Hopi to cure baldness. Among the 
Apache the sacred tule pollen known as 
ha-dn-tin is given or applied because of its 
supposed supernatural beneficial effect. 
Other plants are employed as remedies 
simply for traditional reasons, without 
any formulated opinion as to their modes 
of action. Finally, all the tribes are 
familiar with and employ cathartics and 
emetics; in some cases also diaphoretics, 
diuretics, cough medicines, etc. Every 
tribe has also knowledge of some of the 
poisonous plants in its neighborhood and 
their antidotes. 

The parts of plants used as medicines 
are most often roots, occasionally twigs, 
leaves, or bark, but rarely flowers or 
seeds. They are used either fresh or dry, 
and most commonly in the form of a de¬ 
coction. Of this a considerable quantity, 
as much as a cupful, is administered at a 
time, usually in the morning. Only ex¬ 
ceptionally is the dose repeated. Gener¬ 
ally only a single plant is used, but 
among some Indians as many as four 
plants are combined in a single medicine; 
some of the Opata mix indiscriminately a 
large number of substances. The pro¬ 
prietary medicines are sold at a high 
price. Some of these plants, so far as 
they are known, possess real medicinal 
value, but many are quite useless for the 
purpose for which they are prescribed. 
There is a prevalent belief that the Indians 
are acquainted with valuable specifics for 
venereal diseases, snake bites, etc., but 
how far this belief may be true has not yet 
been shown. 

Animal and mineral substances are also 
occasionally used as remedies. Among 
Southwestern tribes the bite of a snake 
is often treated by applying to the wound 
a portion of the ventral surface of the 
body of the same snake. The Papago use 
crickets as medicine; the Tarahumare, 
lizards; the Apache, spiders’ eggs. 
Among the Navaho and others red ocher 
combined with fat is used externally to 
prevent sunburn. The red, barren clay 
from beneath a campfire is used by White 
Mountain Apache women to induce ste¬ 


rility; the Hopi blow charcoal, ashes, or 
other products of fire on an inflamed sur¬ 
face to counteract the supposed fire which 
causes the ailment. Antiseptics are un¬ 
known, but some of the cleansing agents 
or healing powders employed probably 
serve as such, though undesignedly on 
the part of the Indians. 

The exact manner of therapeutic action 
is as absolutely unknown to the Indian as 
it is to the ignorant white man. Among 
some tribes the term for medicine signi¬ 
fies “mystery,” but among others a dis¬ 
tinction is made between thaumaturgic 
practices and actual medicines. Occa¬ 
sionally the term “medicine” is extended 
to a higher class of greatly prized fetishes 
that are supposed to be imbued w r ith 
mysterious protective power over an indi¬ 
vidual or even over a tribe (see Orenda). 
Such objects form the principal contents 
of the so-called medicine-bags. 

In many localities there was prepared 
on special occasions a tribal “medicine.” 
The Iroquois used such a remedy for heal¬ 
ing wounds, and the Hopi still prepare 
one on the occasion of their Snake dance. 
Among the tribes who prepare tiswin , or 
tesvino, particularly the Apache, parts of 
a number of bitter, aromatic, and even 
poisonous plants, especially a species of 
datura, are added to the liquid to make 
it “stronger”; these are termed medi¬ 
cines. 

The causation and the nature of disease 
being to the Indian in large part myste¬ 
ries, he assigned them to supernatural 
agencies. In general, every illness that 
could not plainly be connected with a 
visible influence was regarded as the 
effect of an introduction into the body, 
by malevolent or offended supernatural 
beings or through sorcery practised by 
an enemy, of noxious objects capable of 
producing and continuing pain or other 
symptoms, or of absorbing the patient’s 
vitality. These beliefs, and the more 
rational ones concerning many minor in¬ 
dispositions and injuries, led to the de¬ 
velopment of separate forms of treatment, 
and varieties of healers. 

In every Indian tribe there were, and 
in some tribes still are, a number of men, 
and perhaps also a number of women, 
who were regarded as the possessors of 
supernatural powers that enabled them 
to recognize, antagonize, or cure disease; 
and there were others who were better 
acquainted with actual remedies than the 
average. These two classes were the 
‘ ‘ physicians. ’ ’ They were oftentimes dis¬ 
tinguished in designation and differed in 
influence over the people as well as in 
responsibilities. Among the Dakota one 
was called wakan witshasha, ‘mystery 
man ’, the other pejihuta witshasha , ‘ grass- 


838 


MEDICINE AND MEDICINE-MEN 


[b. a. e. 


root man ’; among the Navaho one is 
khathali, ‘singer’, ‘chanter’, the other 
izPelini, ‘maker of medicines’; among the 
Apache one is taiyin, ‘wonderful,’ the 
other simply izi, ‘ medicine. ’ 

The mystery man, or thaumaturgist, 
was believed to have obtained from the 
deities, usually through dreams, but 
sometimes before birth, powers of rec¬ 
ognizing and removing the mysterious 
causes of disease. He was “given” 
appropriate songs or prayers, and be¬ 
came possessed of one or more power¬ 
ful fetishes. He announced or exhibited 
these attributes, and after convincing his 
tribesmen that he possessed the proper 
requirements, was accepted as a healer. 
In some tribes he was called to treat all 
diseases, in others his functions were 
specialized, and his treatment was re¬ 
garded as efficacious in only a certain line 
of affections. He was feared as well as 
respected. In numerous instances the 
medicine-man combined the functions of 
a shaman or priest with those of a healer, 
and thus exercised a great influence 
among his people. All priests were be¬ 
lieved to possess some healing pow T ers. 
Among most of the populous tribes the 
medicine-men of this class were asso¬ 
ciated in guilds or societies, and on spe¬ 
cial occasions performed great healing or 
“life (vitality) giving” ceremonies, 
which abounded in songs, prayers, ritual, 
and drama, and extended over a period 
of a few hours to nine days. 

The ordinary procedure of the medi¬ 
cine-man was about as follows: He in¬ 
quired into the symptoms, dreams, and 
transgressions of tabus of the patient, 
whom he examined, and then pro¬ 
nounced his opinion as to the nature 
(generally mythical) of the ailment. He 
then prayed, exhorted, or sang, the last, 
perhaps, to the accompaniment of a rat¬ 
tle; made passes with his hand, some¬ 
times moistened with saliva, over the 
part affected; and finally placed his 
mouth over the most painful spot and 
sucked hard to extract the immediate prin¬ 
ciple of the illness. This result he appar¬ 
ently accomplished, often by means of 
sleight-of-hand, producing the offending 
cause in the shape of a thorn, pebble, hair, 
or other object, which w T as then thrown 
away or destroyed; finally he administered 
a mysterious powder or other tangible 
“medicine,” and perhaps left also a pro¬ 
tective fetish. There were many varia¬ 
tions of this method, according to the re¬ 
quirements of the case, and the medicine¬ 
man never failed to exercise as much 
mental influence as possible over his pa¬ 
tient. For these services the healer was 
usually well compensated. If the case 
would not yield to the simpler treatment, 


a healing ceremony might be resorted to. 
If all means failed, particularly in the 
case of internal diseases or of adolescents 
or younger adults, the medicine-man 
often suggested a witch or wizard as the 
cause, and the designation of some one 
as the culprit frequently placed his life 
in jeopardy. If the medicine-man lost 
several patients in succession, he himself 
might be suspected either of having 
been deprived of his supernatural power 
or of having become a sorcerer, the pen¬ 
alty for which was usually death. 

These shaman healers as a rule were 
shrewd and experienced men; some were 
sincere, noble characters, worthy of re¬ 
spect; others were charlatans to a greater 
or less degree. They are still to be found 
among the less civilized tribes, but are 
diminishing in number and losing their 
influence. Medicine-women of this class 
were found among the Apache and some 
other tribes. 

The most accomplished of the medi¬ 
cine-men practised also a primitive sur¬ 
gery, and aided, by external manipula¬ 
tion and otherwise, in difficult labor. 
The highest surgical achievement, un¬ 
doubtedly practised in part at least as 
a curative method, was trephining. This 
operation was of common occurrence and 
is still practised in Peru, where it reached 
its highest development among American 
tribes. Trephining was also known in 
quite recent times among the Tarahumare 
of Chihuahua, but has never been found 
north of Mexico. 

The other class of medicine men and 
women corresponds closely to the herb¬ 
alists and the old-fashioned rural mid¬ 
wives among white people. The women 
predominated. They formed no socie¬ 
ties, -were not so highly respected or so 
much feared as those of the other class, 
were not so well compensated, and had 
less responsibility. In general they used 
much more common sense in their prac¬ 
tice, were acquainted with the beneficial 
effects of sweating, poulticing, moxa, 
scarification, various manipulations, and 
numerous vegetal remedies, such as pur¬ 
gatives, emetics, etc. Some of these 
medicine-women were frequently sum¬ 
moned in cases of childbirth, ana some¬ 
times were of material assistance. 

Besides these two chief classes of heal¬ 
ers there existed among some tribes large 
medicine societies, composed principally 
of patients cured of serious ailments. 
This was particularly the case among the 
Pueblos. At Zuni there still exist sev¬ 
eral such societies, whose members in¬ 
clude the greater part of the tribe and 
whose organization and functions are com¬ 
plex. The ordinary members are not 
actual healers, but are believed to be more 


bull. 30] MEDILDING-MEKADEWAGAMITIGWEYAWININIWAK 839 


competent to assist in the particular line 
of diseases which are the specialty of 
their society and therefore may be called 
by the actual medicine-men for assist¬ 
ance. They participate also in the cere¬ 
monies of their own society. See Anat¬ 
omy , Artificial Head Deformation , Health 
and Disease , Physiology. 

For writings on the subject consult 
Hrdlicka, Physiological and Medical Ob¬ 
servations, Bull. 34, B. A. E., 1908 (in 
press). (a. h.) 

Medilding (‘ place of boats ’). A Hupa 
village, the most important of the south¬ 
ern division of this people, on the e. side 
of Trinity r., Cal., 2 m. from the s. end of 
Hupa valley. (p. e. g.) 

Ipupukhmam. —Goddard, inf’n, 1903 (Karok name). 
Kahtetl. —Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., 1852 (Yurok name). 
Ka-la-tih. —Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 
1855. Ka-tah-te.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1853. Matilden.— 
Spalding in Ind. Aff. Rep., 82, 1870. Matilton.— 
Goddard, Life and Culture of the Hupa, 12,1903. 
Medildiii.— Ibid. Mi-til'-ti.— Powers in Cont. N. 
A. Ethnol., Ill, 73,1877. Olleppauh’l-kah-tehtT. — 
Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 139,1853. 

Medoctec. A former Malecite village 
on St John r., New Brunswick, about 
10 m. below the present Woodstock. In 
1721 the name occurs as that of an Abna- 
ki tribe. (j. m. ) 

Madocteg.—St Maurice (1760) in N. Y. Doc. Col, 
Hist., x, 1064, 1858. Medocktack.— Gyles (1736) in 
Drake, Trag. Wild., 78, 1841. Medoctec.—Writer of 
1723 in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vn, 5, 1876. Me- 
docteck.—Memoir of 1724 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
940, 1855. Medoctek.—Vaudreuil (1721), ibid., 
904. Medoctet.—Beauharnois (1745), ibid., x, 13, 
1858. Medocthek.—Iberville (1701), ibid., ix,733, 
1855 (the river). Medoktek.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 
143,1855. Medostec.—Lotter, map, ca. 1770. 

Medvednaia (Russ.: ‘bearish’, from 
medved, ‘bear’). A Yukonikhotana 
settlement on the s. side of Yukon r., 
Alaska; pop. 15 in 1880.—Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, 12, 1884. 

Meecombe. An Abnaki village on lower 
Penobscot r., Me., in 1602-09.—Purchas 
(1625) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 156,1857. 

Meeshawn. A former Nauset village 
near Truro, Barnstable co., Mass. In 
1698 it contained about 50 inhabitants. 

Meeshawn.—Bourne (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., I, 196, 1806. Meshawn.—Freeman, 
ibid., 1st s.,vm, 160,1802. 

Meetkeni. A former Tolowa village on 
the s. fork of Smith r., Cal. 

Me'-et-ke'-ni.—Dorsey, Smith River MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1884 (Khaamotene name). Me'-rxet-ke.— 
Dorsey, Chetco MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1884 (Chetco 
name). 

Meggeckessou. Mentioned as if a Dela¬ 
ware village in 1659. The editor of the 
New York Colonial Documents locates 
it at Trenton Falls, N. J., on Delaware r. 

Mecheckesiouw.—Hudde (1662) in N.Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xn, 370,1877. Meggeckesjouw.—Beeckman 
(1663),ibid.,446. Meggeckessou. —Beeckman(1659), 
ibid., 255. . 

Mehashunga ( Me-ha-shun'-ga , duck ). 
A Kansa gens.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 
1877. 


Meherrin. An Iroquoian tribe formerly 
residing on the river of the same name on 
the Virginia-North Carolina border. Jef¬ 
ferson confounded them with the Tutelo. 
According to official colonial documents 
they were a remnant of the Conestoga or 
Susquehanna of upper Maryland, dis¬ 
persed by the Iroquois about 1675, but 
this also is incorrect, as they are found 
noted under the name “ Menheyricks ” 
in the census of Virginia Indians in 1669, 
at which time they numbered 50 bow¬ 
men, or approximately 180 souls (Neill, 
Virginia, Carolorum, 326, 1886). It is 
possible that the influx of refugee Cones¬ 
toga a few years later may have so over¬ 
whelmed the remnant of the original tribe 
as to give rise to the impression that they 
were all of Conestoga blood. They were 
commonly regarded as under the juris¬ 
diction of Virginia, although their terri¬ 
tory was claimed also by Carolina. They 
were closely cognate with the Nottoway, 
q. v. (j. m.) 

Maharim. —Newnam (1722) in Humphreys, Acct., 
140,1730. Maherin.— Doc. of 1705 in N. C. Col. Rec., 
I, 615, 1886. Maherine.— Doc. of 1703, ibid., 570. 
Mahering.— Boundary Com’rs (1728), ibid., II, 748. 
Maherrin.— Council of 1726, ibid., 640. Maher- 
ring.— Lawson (1710), Hist. Car., 383,1860. Maher- 
ron. — Council of 1726 in N. C. Col. Rec., II, 640, 
1886. Meherine.— Council of 1724, ibid., 525. 
Meherins.— Doc. of 1712, ibid., I, 891. Meheron.— 
Doc. of 1721, ibid., ii, 426. Meherries.— School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 36,1855. Meherrin.— Council 
of 1726 in N. C.Col. Rec., ii, 643,1886. Meherring.— 
Doc. of 1715, ibid., 204. Meherrins. —Pollock 
(1712), ibid., I, 884. Meherron.— Hyde (1711), 
ibid., 751. Menchaerink.— Lederer (German, 1670) 
in Hawks, N. C., II, 52, 1858. Menderink.— Ogilby 
map (1671), ibid, (misprint after Lederer’s 
map). Mendoerink.— Lederer, map (1670), ibid. 
(German form misprinted). Mendwrink. —Led¬ 
erer (1670), Discov., map, repr. 1902. Menher- 
ring.— Doc. of 1722 in N. C. Col. Rec., II, 475, 1886. 
Menheyricks.— Census of 1669 quoted by Neill, 
Va. Carolorum, 326, 1886. Meterries. —Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 522, 1878 (misprint). 

Mehkoa (‘squirrel’). A gens of the 
Abnaki, q. v. 

Meh-ko-a'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. 

Mi'kowa. —J. D. Prince, inf’n, 1905 (modem St 
Francis Abnaki form). 

Meipontsky. A former tribe of pied¬ 
mont Virginia, probably of Siouan stock, 
incorporated about 1700 with the Chris- 
tanna Indians. See Mooney, Siouan 
Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. 

Meipontsky. —Albany conf. (1722) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., v, 673, 1855. Meipoutsky.— Byrd, Hist. 
Div. Line, ii, 257,1866. 

Mejia. A hacienda 5 leagues below 
Isleta, N. Mex., on the Rio Grande, in 
1692. At this date it probably contained 
a few Piros, or perhaps some Tigua from 
Isleta.—Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis, 
Span. Conq. N. Mex., 351,1869; Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 200, 1889. 

Mekadewagamitigweyawininiwak ( Ma k- 
adawagami tigweya-idlniniwug, ‘ people _ of 
the black water river.’—W. J.). A Chip¬ 
pewa band formerly living on Black r., 
s. e. Mich. 



840 


MERE W E-MENENQU EN 


[ B. A. E. 


Black-River band.—Washington treaty (1836) in 
U. S. Ind.Treat., 227,1873. Ma kadawagami'tigweya- 
wininiwag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Mekadewaga- 
mitigweya-wininiwak.—Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., 
B. A. E., 1882. Wakazoo.—Smith in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
53, 1851. 

Mekewe. A former Chumashan village 
near Santa Ines, Santa Barbara eo., Cal. — 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. 

Mekichuntun (Me'-ki-tcfrn'-tllri). A 
former village of the Chastacosta on 
Rogue r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, iii, 234, 1890 (given as a gens). 

Mekumtk ( Me'-ktimtk, ‘long tree moss’). 
A former Alsea village, the highest on the 
n. side of Alsea r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. 
Am. Folk-lore, in, 230, 1890. 

Melejo. A Diegueno rancheria near San 
Diego, s. Cal.; probably identical with 
“Mileotonac, San Felipe,” which was 
represented in the treaty of Santa Isabel 
in 1852. 

Melejo.—Ortega (1775) quoted by Bancroft, Nat. 
Races, 1,253,1884. Mielo-to-nac, San Felipe.—H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess. 132, 1857. 

Meletecunk. Given as the name of a 
Delaware tribe formerly on the coast of 
New Jersey. Proud in 1798 applies this 
name to Metedeconk r. in Ocean co. 

Meletecunk.— Macauley, N.Y.,11,293,1829. Moeroah- 
kongy.—De Laet (ca. 1633) in N.Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
2d s., I, 315, 1841. 

Melona. A Timucuan village on the s. 
bank of lower St Johns r., Fla., in the 16th 
century.—De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 
1591. 

Melozikakat. A Yukonikhotana village 
of 30 inhabitants, on Melozikakat r., a 
n. affluent of the Yukon, Alaska.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884. 

Melukitz. A Kusan village or tribe on 
the n. side of Coos bay, coast of Oregon. 
Probably the village most often referred 
to by writers.—Milhau, Coos bay MS. 
vocab., B. A. E.; also MS. letter to Gibbs, 
B. A. E. 

Melungeon. See Oroatan Indians. 

Memkumlis (‘ islands in front ’). A vil¬ 
lage of the Mamalelekala and Koeksote- 
nok, on Village ids., at the mouth of Knight 
inlet, Brit. Col.; pop. 215 in 1885. 
Mem-koom-lish.—Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 
for 1887, sec. IJ, 65. Memkumlis.—Boas in Bull. 
Am. Geog. Soc., 227,1887. 

Memoggyins ( Me'mogg'ins , ‘having sal¬ 
mon traps’). A gens of the Koeksotenok, 
aKwakiutl tribe.—Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
for 1895, 330. 

Memramcook (same as amlamJcook, ‘va¬ 
riegated’). Mentioned by Rand (First 
Reading Book in Micmac, 81,1875) as one 
of the 7 districts of the Micmac country. 
Memruncook.—Alcedo, Die. Geog., ill, 147, 1788. 

Menapucunt. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on Pamunkey r., 
King William co., Va.—Smith (1629), 
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819. 

Menaskunt. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank of 
Rappahannock r., Richmond co., Va.— 


Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 
1819. 

Menatonon. A chief, in 1585-86, of the 
Chowanoc (q. v.), an Algonquian tribe 
formerly living in n. e. North Carolina, 
but now extinct. He was prominent 
during the time that Ralph Layne was in 
charge of the party sent out by Sir Walter 
Raleigh to establish a colony, and was 
one of the chiefs from whom Layne ob¬ 
tained most of his information regarding 
the country visited, Menatonon being 
made a prisoner a few days for the pur¬ 
pose. This knowledge of the new coun¬ 
try is included in the report sent to 
Raleigh. According to Layne (Hakluyt, 
Voy., hi, 312, 1810), Menatonon was 
lame, but for a savage was very grave 
and wise, and well acquainted not only 
with his own territory but with the sur¬ 
rounding regions and their productions. 
It is probable that he died soon after 
Layne’s visit, as John White, who was 
in the country two years later, mentions 
his wife and child as belonging to Croatan, 
but says nothing of him. (c. T.) 

Menawzhetaunaung. An Ottawa village, 
about 1818, on an island in the Lake of 
the Woods, on the s. boundary of Mani¬ 
toba, Canada. (j. m.) 

Me-nau-zhe-tau-naung. —Tanner, Narr., 202, 1830. 
Me-nau-zhe-taw-naun. —Ibid., 198. Me-naw-zhe-tau- 
naung. —Ibid., 236. 

Menchu. Apparently a former Cochimi 
rancheria in Lower California, not far 
from Concho bay, on the gulf coast.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex. 4th s., v, 66, 1857. 

Mendica. A tribe, met by Cabeza de 
Vaca during the earlier part of his stay 
in Texas (1527-34), that lived “in the 
rear,” i. e., inland. Nothing further is 
known of it. The country mentioned was 
probably occupied by Karankawan tribes, 
which are now extinct. See Cabeza de 
Vaca, Smith trans., 84, 1851; Gatschet, 
Karankawa Inds., 46, 1891. . (a. c. f.) 

Menemesseg. A rendezvous of Nipmuc, 
Narraganset, and other hostile Indians 
in 1676, during King Philip’s war, near 
New Braintree, Worcester co., Mass. 
Meminimisset.—Fiske (1775) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., 1,258,1806. Menemesseg.—Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., lsts., VI, 205,1800. Menumesse.—Gookin 
(1677) in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 487,1836. Mim- 
inimisset.—Hutchinson in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., I, 259, 1806. Mominimisset.—Whitney in 
Barber, Hist. Coll., 559,1839. 

Menenquen. An unidentified tribe or 
band represented at the mission of San 
Antonio de Valero, Texas, between 1740 
and 1750. They allied in their gentile 
state with the Caguas (Cavas?) and Si- 
james, who were related to the Emets 
and Sanas. There is some indication that 
they were from the middle or lower Guad¬ 
alupe country. Some words of their 
language are preserved (Manzanet, 1690, 
in Texas Hist. Ass’n Quar., ii, 309, 1899; 


BOLL. 30] 


MENESOUH ATOB A-MEN ITEGOW 


841 


MS. Baptismal records of Mission Valero, 
partidas 564, 571,869). See Meracouman. 

(h. e. b.) 

Menanque.—Baptismal records cited, partida 869. 
Menanquen.—Ibid., 571. Menaquen.— Ibid., 577. 
Merguan.—Ibid., 448 (identical?). Merhuan.— 
Ibid., 455 (identical?). 

Menesouhatoba. A Dakota tribe or 
division, probably the Mdewakanton. 
Menesouhatoba.—Pachot (1722) in Margry, D6c., 
VI, 518, 1886. Scioux des Lacs.—Ibid. 

Menewa (‘great warrior’). A half-breed 
Creek, second chief of the Lower Creek 
towns on Tallapoosa r., Ala.; born about 
1765. He was noted for trickery and dar¬ 
ing in early life, when he was known as Ho- 
thlepoya (‘crazy war hunter’) and annu¬ 
ally crossed the Cumberland to rob the 
white settlers in Tennessee of their horses. 
A murder committed in his neighborhood 
was charged to his band, and the people 
of Georgia burned one of their towns 
in revenge. It was suspected that Mac¬ 
intosh had instigated the murder for 
the very purpose of stirring up trouble 
between the whites and his rival. When 
Tecumseh came to form a league against 
the white people, Menewa, foreseeing that 
Macintosh with American aid and support 
would attack him in any event, readily 
joined in the conspiracy. He began the 
Creek war and was the war chief of his 
people, the head chief of the tribe being a 
medicine-man. Relying on a prophecy 
of the latter, Menew r a made a wrong dis¬ 
position of his men at the battle of the 
Horseshoe Bend, Gen. Jackson quickly 
discerning the vulnerable point in the In¬ 
dian defenses. Menewa slew the false 
prophet with his own hand before dashing 
at the head of his warriors from the breast¬ 
works, already breached by the American 
cannon, into the midst of the Tennes¬ 
seans, who were advancing to the as 
sault. Of 900 warriors 830 were killed, 
and all the survivors, save one, were 
wounded. Menewa, left for dead on 
the field, revived in the night and, 
with other survivors, reached the hidden 
camp in the swamps where the women 
and children were waiting. The men on 
their recovery made their submission in¬ 
dividually. Menewa’s village was de¬ 
stroyed and his wealth in horses and 
cattle, peltry, and trade goods had dis¬ 
appeared. After his wounds were healed 
he reassumed authority over the rem¬ 
nant of his band and was in later years 
the leader of the party in the Creek 
Nation which opposed further cession of 
land to the whites and made resistance to 
their encroachments. Macintosh coun¬ 
seled acquiescence in the proposal to de¬ 
port the whole tribe beyond the Mississip¬ 
pi, and when for this he was condemned 
as a traitor, Menewa was reluctantly per¬ 
suaded to execute the death sentence. 


In 1826 he went with a delegation to 
Washington to protest against the treaty 
by which Macintosh and his confederates, 
representing about one-tenth of the na¬ 
tion, had at Indian Spring, Jan. 8,1821, 
presumed to cede to the United States the 
fertile Creek country. He proposed, in 
ceding the Creek country to the Govern¬ 
ment for white settlement, to reserve 
some of the land to be allotted in sever¬ 
alty to such of the nation as chose 
to remain on their native soil rather 
than to emigrate to a strange region. 
Through his advocacy the Government 
was induced to parcel some of the land 
among the Creeks who were desirous and 
capable of subsisting by agriculture, to be 
held in fee simple after a probationary 
term of five years. An arbitrary method 
of allotment deprived Menewa of his own 
farm and, as the one that he drew was un¬ 
desirable, he sold it and bought other land 
in Alabama. When some of the Creeks 
became involved in the Seminole war of 
1836, he led his braves against the hostiles. 
In consideration of his services he ob¬ 
tained permission to remain in his native 
land, but nevertheless was transported 
with his people beyond the Mississippi. 

(f. H.) 

Mengakonkia. A division of the Miami, 
living in 1682 in central Illinois with the 
Piankashaw and others. 

Mangakekias. —Shea in Wis. Hist. Soc.Coll., ill, 134, 
1857. Mangakekis. —Bacqueville de la Potherie, 
II, 261, 1753. Mangakokis. —Ibid., 335. Manga- 
KonKia.— Jes. Rel. 1674, LVIII, 40, 1899. Megan- 
cockia.— La Salle (1682) in Margry, D£c., ii, 201, 
1877. 

Menhaden. A fish of the herring fam¬ 
ily ( Alosa menhaden ), known also as bony- 
fish, mossbunker, hardhead, pauhagen, 
etc., found in the Atlantic coast waters 
from Maine to Maryland. The name is 
derived from the Narraganset dialect of 
Algonquian. Roger Williams (1643) calls 
munnawhaiteaug a “fish like a herring,” 
the w’ord being really plural and signify¬ 
ing, according to Trumbull (Natick Diet., 
69,1903), ‘they manure.’ The reference 
is to the Indian custom of using these fish 
as manure for cornfields, which practice 
the aborigines of New England transmit¬ 
ted to the European colonists. Menhaden 
is thus a corruption of the Narraganset 
term for this fish, munnawhat, ‘ the ferti¬ 
lizer.’ See Pogy. (a. f. c.) 

Meniolagomeka. A former Delaware 
or Munsee village on Aquanshicola cr., 
Carbon co., Pa. In 1754 the inhabi¬ 
tants, orpartof them, joined the Moravian 
converts at New Gnadenhuetten in the 
same county. (j. m. ) 

Meniolagamika.— Heckewelder in Trans. Am. 
Philos. Soc., n. s., IV, 359,1834. Meniolagomekah. — 
Loskiel, Hist. Miss. United Breth., pt. 2,26,1794. 

Menitegow (prob. for Mini tlgunk, ‘on 
the island in the river.’—W. J.). A 


842 


MENOMINEE 


[b. a. e. 


former Chippewa village on the e. bank 
of Saginaw r., in lower Michigan.—Sagi¬ 
naw treaty (1820) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 
142, 1873. 

Menominee ( memo , by change from mino, 
‘good’, ‘beneficent’; min,a. ‘grain’,‘seed’, 
the Chippewa name of the w r ild rice.— 
Hewitt. Full name Menominiwok inini- 
wok, the latter term signifying ‘ they are 
men’). An Algonquian tribe, the mem¬ 
bers of which, according to Dr William 
Jones, claim to understand Sauk, Fox, 
and Kickapoo far more easily than they 
do Chippewa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi, 
hence it is possible that their linguistic 
relation is near to the former group of 
Algonquians. Grignon (Wis. Hist. Soc. 



AMISKQUEW—MENOMINEE MAN. (mcKENNEY AND Hall) 


Coll., hi, 265, 1857) speaks of the 
Noquet as a part of the Menominee, 
and states that “the earliest locality 
of the Menominee, at the first visits of 
the whites, was at Bay de Noque and Me¬ 
nominee r., and those at Bay de Noque 
w T ere called by the early French Des 
Noques or Des Noquia.” (See Noquet.) 
The Jesuit Relation for 1671 includes the 
Menominee among the tribes driven from 
their country—that is, “the lands of the 
south next to Michilimackinac,” which 
is the locality where the Noquet lived 
when they first became known to the 
French. It is generally believed that the 
Noquet, w T ho disappeared from history at 
a comparatively early date, were closely 
related to the Chippewa and were incor¬ 
porated into their tribes; nevertheless, 
the name Menominee must have been 


adopted after the latter reached their his¬ 
toric seat; it is possible they were pre¬ 
viously known as Noquet. Charlevoix 
(Jour. Voy., n, 61, 1761) says: “I have 
been assured that they had the same 
original and nearly the same languages 
with the Noquet and the Indians at the 
Falls.” 

The people of this tribe, so far as known, 
were first encountered by the whites when 
Nicolet visited them, probably in 1634, at 
the mouth of Menominee r., Wis.-Mich. 
In 1671, and henceforward until about 
1852, their home was on or in the vicinity 
of Menominee r., not far from where they 
were found by Nicolet, their settlements 
extending at times to Fox r. They have 
generally been at peace wfith the whites. 
A succinct account of them, as well as a 
full description of their manners, customs, 
arts, and beliefs, by Dr W. J. Hoffman, 
appears in the 14th Rep. Bureau of Eth¬ 
nology, 1896. In their treaty with the 
United States, Feb. 8, 1831, they claimed 
as their possession the land from the 
mouth of Green bay to the mouth of Mil¬ 
waukee r., and on the west side of the 
bay from the height of land between 
it and L. Superior to the headwaters of 
Menominee and Fox rs., which claim w T as 
granted. They now reside on a reserva¬ 
tion near the head of Wolf r., Wis. 

Major Pike described the men of the 
tribe as “straight and W’ell made, about 
the middle size; their complexions gen¬ 
erally fair for savages, their teeth good, 
their eyes large and rather languishing; 
they have a mild but independent ex¬ 
pression of countenance that charms at 
first sight. ’ ’ Although comparatively in¬ 
dolent, they are described as generally 
honest, theft being less common than 
among many other tribes. Drunkenness 
was their most serious fault, but even this 
did not prevail to the same extent as 
among some other Indians. Their beliefs 
and rituals are substantially the same 
as those of the Chippewa. They have 
usually been peaceful in character, sel¬ 
dom coming in contact with the Sioux, 
but bitter enemies of the neighboring 
Algonquian tribes. They formerly dis¬ 
posed of their dead by inclosing the 
bodies in long pieces of birchbark, or 
in slats of wood, and burying them in 
shallow graves. In order to protect the 
body from wild beasts, three logs were 
placed over the grave, tw r o directly on 
the grave, and the third on these, all 
being secured by stakes driven on each 
side. Tree burial was occasionally prac¬ 
tised. 

The Menominee—as their name indi¬ 
cates—subsisted in part on wild rice 
(Zizania aquatica)', in fact it is spoken of 
by early writers as their chief vegetal 
food. Although making such constant 








BULL. 30] 


MENOMINEE 


848 


use of it from the earliest notices we have 
of them, and aware that it could be 
readily grown by sowing in proper ground, 
Jenks (19th Rep. B. A. E., 1021, 1901), 
who gives a full account of the Meno¬ 
minee method of gathering, preserving, 
and using the wild rice, states that they 
absolutely refuse to sow it—evidently 
owing to their common unwillingness to 
“ wound their mother, the earth.” 

Chauvignerie gives their principal to¬ 
tems as the Large-tailed Bear, the Stag, 
and the Kilou (a sort of eagle). Neill 
(Hist. Minn., 1858) classes the Menom¬ 
inee, evidently on French authority, 
as Folles Avoines of the Chat and Orig- 
nal or Wild Moose and Elk. Hoffman 
gives the modern totems as follows: 

I. The Qwa'sse wi'dishFanun, or Bear 
phratry, consisting of the following to¬ 
tems and subphratries: Owa'sse (Bear), 
Miqka'no (Mud-turtle), Kita/mi (Porcu¬ 
pine), with the Nama/nu (Beaver) and 
O'sass (Muskrat). 

II. TheKinS / u v wPdishPanun, or Eagle 
phratry, consisting of the following to¬ 
tems: Pinashfiu (Bald Eagle), Kaka'k 
(Crow), Ina/qt&k (Raven), Ma'qkuana'ni 
(Red-tail Hawk), Hinana/shiu v (Golden 
Eagle), Pe'nikFkonau (Fish-hawk). 

III. The Ota/tshia wPdishPanun, or 
Crane phratry, consisting of the following 
totems: Ota/tshia (Crane), Shakshak'eu 
(Great Heron), Os'se (“Old Squaw” 
Duck), O'kawa'siku (Coot). 

IV. The MoqwaPo wPdishPanun, or 
Wolf phratry, consisting of the follow¬ 
ing totems: MoqwaPo (Wolf), “Hana” 
[ana/m] (Dog), Apaq'ssos (Deer). 

V. The Mons wPdishPanun, or Moose 
phratry, with the following totems: Mo n s 
(Moose), Oma'skos (Elk), WabjPshiu 
(Marten), Wu/tshik (Fisher). 

The earlier statements of Menominee 
population are unreliable. Most of the 
estimates in the nineteenth century vary 
from 1,300 to 2,500, but those probably 
most conservative range from 1,600 to 
1,900. Their present population is about 
1,600, of whom 1,370 are under the Green 
Bay school superintendency, Wis. Their 
villages (missions) were St Francis and 
St Michael. 

The Menominee have entered into the 
following treaties with the United States: 
(1) Treaty of peace at St Louis, Mo., 
Mar. 30, 1817; (2) Treaty of Prairie du 
Chien, Wis., Aug. 19, 1825, with the 
Menominee and other Indians, fixing 
boundary lines between the several 
tribes; (3) Treaty of Butte des Morts, 
Wis., Aug. 11, 1827, defining boundary 
lines between the Menominee, Chippewa, 
and Winnebago; (4) Treaty of Washing¬ 
ton, Feb. 8, 1831, defining boundary 
lines and ceding lands to the United 
States, a portion of the latter to be for the 


use of certain New York Indians; (5) 
Treaty of Washington, Feb. 17, 1831, 
modifying the treaty of Feb. 8, 1831, in 
regard to the lands ceded for the use of the 
New York Indians; (6) Treaty of Wash¬ 
ington, Oct. 27, 1832, in which certain 
modifications are made in regard to the 
lands ceded for the use of the New York 
Indians (Stockbridges and Munsee), and 
to certain boundary lines; (7) Articles of 
agreement made at Cedar Point, Wis., 
Sept. 3, 1836, ceding certain lands to the 
United States; (8) Treaty of Lake Pow- 
aw-hay-kon-nay, Oct. 18, 1848, ceding all 
their lands in Wisconsin, the United 
States to give them certain lands which 
had been ceded by the Chippewa; (9) 
Treaty at the Falls of Wolf r., May 12, 
1854, by which they ceded the reserve 
set apart by treaty of Oct. 18, 1848, and 
were assigned a reserve on Wolf r., Wis.; 
(10) Treaty of Keshena, Wis., Feb. 11, 
1856, ceding two townships of their re¬ 
serve for the use of the Stockbridges and 
the Munsee. (j. m. . c. t. ) 

Addle-Heads.— Jefferys, French Dom.,pt. 1,48,1761 
(given as the meaning of Folles Avoines). 
Falsavins.— Doc. of 1764 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
vii, 641, 1856. Felles avoins.— Lords of Trade 
(1721), ibid., v, 622,1855. Folleavoine. —Vaudreuil 
(1720) in Margry, D<§c., VI, 511, 1886. Folle Avoi¬ 
nes.— Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
889, 1855. Folles Avoines. —Cadillac (1695) in 
Margry, D6c., v, 121,1883. Fols Avoin. —PikC, Ex¬ 
pedition, 13, 1810. Fols Avoines. —Brown, West. 
Gaz.,265, 1817. Folsavoins. —Johnson (1763) inN. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Vii, 583, 1856. Fols-avoise.— 
Schermerhorn(1812)in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2ds., 
ii, 10,1814. Folsovoins. —Harrison (1814) in Drake, 
Tecumseh, 162, 1852. Fulawin. —Dalton (1783) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 123, 1809. Fulso- 
wines.— Edwards, Hist. Ill., 39,1870. Les Folles.— 
Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voyage, i, 174,1847. Les 
Fols.— Ann. de la Prop, de la Foi, iv, 537, 1830. 
Macomile. —LaChesnaye(1697) in Margry, D6c., VI, 
6, 1886 (misprint?). Mahnomoneeg.— Tanner, Nar¬ 
rative, 315, 1830 (Ottawa name). Mahnomonie.— 
James in Tanner, ibid., 326. Malhoming.— Bac- 
queville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., ii, 90, 1753. 
Malhominis. —Ibid. Malhomins. —Ibid., IV, 206, 
1753. Malhominy. —Cadillac (1695) in Margry, 
D6c.,V, 121, 1883. Malhommes. —Jefferys, French 
Dom., pt. 1,48,1761. Malhommis. —Perrot (ca.1720), 
Memoirs, 127,1864. Malomenis. —Frontenac (1682) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 182, 1855. Malomi- 
mis— Lahontan, New Voy., I, 231, 1703. Malomi- 
nes. —Beilin,map, 1755. Malominese. —Bluejacket 
(1807) in Drake, Tecumseh, 94,1852. Malominis — 
Lahontan, New Voy., I, 104,1703. Malouin. —Sa- 
gard (1636), Hist. Can., II, 424,1864. Malouminek.— 
Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858. Maloumines. —Warren 
(1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 33,1885 (French 
form). Mandmanee. —Kane, Wanderings of an 
Artist, 29,1859. Manomines.— Henry, Travels, 107, 
1809. Manominik.— Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A. 
E., 1882 (Chippewa name). Maroumine.— Jes. Rel. 
1640, 35, 1858. Mathomenis.— Bacqueville de la 
Potherie, Hist. Am., ii, 71, 1753. Mathominis.— 
Ibid., 81. Melhominys. —Croghan (1759) in Proud, 
Pa., II, 296, 1798. Melomelinoia.— La Salle (1680) 
in Margry, Dec., ii, 201, 1877 (in central Illinois; 
apparently identical). Melominees.— Perkins and 
Peck, Annals of the West, 713, 1850. Memo- 
nomier.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 406, 1816. 
Menamenies. —Rupp, West. Pa., 346, 1846. Men- 
nominies.— Goldthwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., x, 121, 1809. Menomenes.— Pike 
(1806) in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, hi, 562, 1853. 
Me-no-me-ne-uk'.— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 
288, 1871. Menomenies.— Brown, West. Gaz., 265, 
1817. Menominees.— Treaty of 1825 in U. S. Ind. 


844 


MENOMINEE-MEPAYAYA 


[b. a. 3. 


Treaties, 376, 1837. Menominies. -Treaty of 1826, 
ibid., 155. Menominny.— Featherstonhaugh, Ca¬ 
noe Vovage, il, 25,1847. Menomoee. —Gale, Upper 
Miss., map, 1867. Menomonees.— Edwards (1788) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., x, 86,1823. Menom- 
onei.— McKenney in Ind. AfT. Rep., 90,1825. Me- 
nomones. —Long, Exped. St Peters R., i, 171,1824. 
Menomonies. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 100, 
1816. Menomonys. —Lapham, Inds. of Wis., map, 
1870. Menonomees.— La Pointe treaty (1842) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 494,1885. Menonomies.— 
Howe, Hist. Coll., 436,1851. Meynomenys.— John¬ 
son (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., yn, 583, 1856. 
Meynomineys. —Johnson (1764), ibid.,648. Minea- 
mies.— Trader (1778)in Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes,in, 
560, 1853. Miniamis— Keane in Stanford, Com- 
pend., 522, 1878. Minominees.— Jones, Ojebway 
Inds., 39, 1861. Minominies.— Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 33, 1885. Minomonees.— 
Edwards (17881 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., 
IX, 92, 1804. Minoniones. —Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 107, 1816. Minoomenee.— Jones, Ojebway 

Inds., 178, 1861. Monis.— Perrin du Lac, Voy. 
Deux Louisianes, 232, 1805 (probably identical; 
mentioned with Puans [Winnebago] and Oyoa 
[Iowa]). Monomeni. —Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. E., 
1882 (Fox name; pi. Monomenihak). Mono- 
mins.— Henry, Travels, 107, 1809. Monomonees. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 145, 1855. Monomu- 
nies. —Lindsay (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 
538, 1855. Moon calves. —Jefferys, French Dom.. 
pt. i, 48, 1861 (given as the meaning of Folles 
Avoines). Mynomamies. —Imlay, West. Ter., 292, 
1797. Mynomanies.— Hutchins (1778) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 714, 1857. Mynonamies. — 
Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am. Jour. Geol., 272, 
1831. Nation de la folle avoine. —Jes. Rel. 1671, 25, 
1858. Nation of the Wild-Oats.— Marquette ( ca. 
1673), Discov., 319, 1698. Omanomineu. —Kelton, Ft 
Mackinac, 149, 1884 (own name, pronounced 
O-man-o-me-na-oo). Omanomini. —Ibid. (Chippe¬ 
wa name). O-mun-o-min-eeg. —Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 33,1885. Oumalominis. — 
Prise de Possession (1671) in Margry, D£c., I, 97, 
1876. Oumaloiiminek. —Jes. Rel. 1670, 94, 1858. 
Oumaloumines. —Jes. Rel. 1671, 25, 1858. Ouma- 
louminetz. —Jes. Rel. 1670, 100, 1858. Oumaomin- 
iecs.— Du Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IX, 161, 1855. Ounabonims. —Prise de Possession 
(1671), ibid., 803 (misprint). Rice Indians. — 
Franchfere, Narr., 145, 1854. Walhominies. —Mc¬ 
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ill, 79, 1854 (mis¬ 
print). White Indians.— Long, Exped. St Peters 
R., i, 175, 1824. Wild Rice.— Document of 1701 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 722, 1855. Wild Rice 
Eaters.— Lapham, Inds. Wis., 15, 1870 (given as 
the meaning of Menominee). Wild Rice Men. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 145, 1855. 

Menominee. A Potawatomi village, 
taking its name from the resident chief, 
formerly situated on the n. side of Twin 
lakes, near the site of Plymouth, Marshall 
co., Ind., on a reservation sold in 1836. 
The name is also written Menomonee. 

, (J. M.) 

Menoqnet (possibly for Mtno hvat, ‘good 
ice,’ or Mindkwtit, ‘banked cloud,’ or 
Mendkwalw *, ‘fair weather.’—W. J.). A 
Potawatomi village, commonly called 
“Menoquet’s village” from the name of 
a chief, formerly situated near the present 
Monoquet, Kosciusko co., Ind., on a res¬ 
ervation sold in 1836. The name is 
spelled also Menoequet, Menoga (In¬ 
diana Geol. Rep., map, 1883), Minoquet, 
and Monoquet. 

Menoquet’s Village. A Chippewa vil¬ 
lage, so called after its chief, formerly on 
Cass r., lower Michigan, on a reservation 
sold in 1837. 


Menostamenton. An unidentified divi¬ 
sion of the Sioux. 

Manostamenton. —Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5,1/76. 
Menostamenton. —De l’lsle, map of La., in Neill, 
Hist. Minn., 164, 1858. 

Mento. A name used by French writers 
of the 17th and 18th centuries to desig¬ 
nate a people in the vicinity of Arkan¬ 
sas r. and the southern plains. Marquette 
heard of them during his descent of the 
Mississippi in 1673, and located them on 
his map as w. of that river; Douay (1687) 
placed them near Red r. of Louisiana; 
Tonti (1690) states that they were in the 
vicinity of the Quapaw, and De 1’Isle’s 
map (1703) puts them on middle Arkansas 
r. La Harpe (1719) says they were 7 
days’ journey s. w. of the Osage. Beau- 
rain about that time visited the people 
and gives the names of the 9 “nations” 
which, he says, formed one continuous 
village lying in a beautiful situation, the 
houses joining one another from e. to 
w. on the border of a s. w. branch of Ar¬ 
kansas r. The “nations” mentioned in¬ 
clude the Tonkawa, Wichita, Comanche, 
Adai, Caddo, Waco, etc. The Mento 
were enemies of the Spaniards and the 
Apache tribes. (a. c. f. ) 

Manton.— Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c., IV, 599, 
1886. Ma"'-}u-we. —Dorsey, Kansa MS., B. A. E., 
1882 (Kansa name). Matora.—Marquette, map 
(1673) in Shea, Discov., 268, 1852. Matoua. —Shea, 
ibid. Mauton.— Tonti (ca. 1690) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., I, 83, 1846. Mento. —La Harpe (1719) in 
Margry, D6c., vi, 315, 1886. Mentons. —Jefferys, 
Am. Atlas, map 5,1776. Mentous. —Hennepin, New 
Discov., pt. II, 43, 1698. Mintou.— Coxe, Carolana, 
11, map, 1741. 

Mentokakat. A Koyukukhotana vil¬ 
lage on the left bank of the Yukon, Alaska, 
20 m. above the mouth of Melozi r.; pop. 
46 in 1844; 20 in 1880. 

Mentokakat.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 
1884. Minkhotliatno.—Zagoskin quoted by Petroff, 
ibid., 37. Montekakat.—U. S. Land Off. map of 
Alaska, 1898. 

Menunkatuc (prob. from muno n qutteau, 
‘that which fertilizes or manures land,’ 
hence ‘menhaden country.’—Trumbull). 
A village, under a sachem squaw, form¬ 
erly at Guilford, New Haven co., Conn., 
on a tract sold in 1639. (j. m.) 

Manuncatuck.—Doc. of 1641 cited by Trumbull, 
Ind. Names Conn.. 29,1881. Menuncatuk.—Drake, 
Ind. Chron., 157,1836. Menunkatuck.—Ruggles in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., IV, 182, 1795. Menun- 
ketuck.—Trumbull, op.cit. Menunquatucke.—Ibid. 
Monunkatuck.—Ibid. Munnucketucke.—Ibid. Mu- 
nunketucke. —Ibid. 

Meochkonck. A former Minisink vil¬ 
lage probably situated about upper Dela¬ 
ware r. ins. e. New York.—VanderDonck 
(1656) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hud¬ 
son R., 96, 1872. 

Mepayaya. A tribe mentioned in the 
manuscript relation of Francisco de Jesus 
Marfa, in 1691, in his list of the Texias 
(i. e., the group of customary allies, in¬ 
cluding the Hasinai), as s. w. of the 
Nabedache country of Texas. This may 


BULL. 30] 


MEQUACHAKE-MESCAL 


845 


be the Payaya tribe, who were in the 
vicinity of San Antonio. (h. e. b.) 

Mequachake (‘red earth.’—Hewitt). 
One of the 5 general divisions of the 
Shawnee, whose villages on the head¬ 
waters of Mad r., Logan co., Ohio, were 
destroyed by United States troops in 
1791. See Spitotha. (j. m.) 

Machachac.— Drake, Tecumseh, 50, 1852. Machi- 
chac. —Ibid., 71. Mackacheck. —Howe, Hist. Coll., 
150, 1851. Mackacheek.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. 
E., Ohio map, 1899. Magueok. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., 
in, 22,1788 (probably identical). Makostrake.— 
McKeiiney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, hi, 111, 1854. 
Maquichees.— Stone, Life of Brant, II, 43, 1864. Me- 
nekut’thegi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS., 1879. Me- 
quachake.— Johnston (1819) in Brinton, Lenape 
Leg., 29, 1885. 

Meracouman. A tribe or village men¬ 
tioned by Joutel as being on or near the 
route taken when going with La Salle in 
1687 from Ft St Louis on Matagorda bay 
to Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. If the 
list of so-called tribes given by the Eba- 
hamo Indians and recorded by Joutel 
followed the geographic order of his line 
of march, the Meracouman must have 
dwelt near the Colorado r. of Texas. 
Joutel remarks that when the Indians 
approached or bathed in the current of 
the river, the horses always fled. Gat¬ 
schet states that the custom of the Karan- 
kawa Indians of anointing their skin with 
shark’s oil caused horses and cattle to run 
from the disagreeable odor to the distance 
of two or three miles. As Karankawan 
tribes are said to have dwelt in the 
vicinity of Colorado r., it is possible that 
the Meracouman may have belonged to 
that stock (see Gatschet, Karankawa 
Inds., 1891). Perhaps they are the Ma- 
liacones of Cabeza de Vaca or the Manico 
of Manzanet. In 1739 there were neo¬ 
phytes of the Merguan, orMerhuan, tribe 
at San Antonio de Valero mission (Bap¬ 
tismal records, partidas 448, 455, MS., 
cited by H. E. Bolton, inf’n, 1906). 
They were with others who appear to 
have come from near Guadalupe r., and 
they may be identical with the Meracou¬ 
man, as well as with the Menenquen 
(q. v.). (a. c. f. h. e. b. ) 

Meracouman.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hi-st. Coll. 
La., I, 137, 1846. Meraquaman. —Joutel (1687) in 
Margry, D6c., Ill, 288, 1878. Muracumanes.—Bar- 
cia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. 

Merced (Span.: ‘grace’, ‘mercy’). A 
group of Cajuenche rancherias, situated, 
in 1775, in n. e. Lower California, w. of 
the Rio Colorado, and 4 leagues s. w. of 
Santa Olalla, a Yuma rancheria. These 
settlements contained about 300 natives 
when visited by Father Garces in 1775 
and were provided with abundant corn, 
melons, calabashes, and beans, but with 
little wheat. See Garces, Diary (1775), 
172-173, 1900. 

Merced. A Pima rancheria, visited by 
Father Kino in 1700, and placed on maps 


of Kino (1701) and Venegas (1759) n. e. 
of San Rafael, in what is now s. Arizona. 
La Merced.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., I, 300, map, 1759. 
Merced.—Kino map (1701) in Bancroft, Ariz. and 
N. Mex., 360, 1889. 

Merced. Mentioned as a tribe appar¬ 
ently inhabiting the Merced r. region, 
California. Probably Moquelumnan. 
Mercedes.—Barbour et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 60,1853. 

Mer, Gens de la (French: ‘peopleof the 
sea,’ or Gens de la Mer du Nord, ‘people 
of the sea of the north’). A collective 
term applied by the early Jesuits to the 
Algonquian tribes about Hudson bay, 
Canada. (j. m. ) 

Gens de la Mer du Nord.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 1858. 
Gens de Mer.—Ibid., 1643, 3,1858. 

Merip. A Yurok village on Klamath r., 
Cal., about 10 m. below the mouth of the 
Trinity. (a. l. k.) 

Merkitsok. An Eskimo winter habita¬ 
tion near Bute bay, s. w. Greenland.— 
Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 8, 1767. 

Merric. A small Algonquian tribe or 
division formerly inhabiting the s. coast 
of Queens co., Long Island, N. Y., from 
Rockaway to South Oyster bay. Their 
name survives in the hamlet of Merricks, 
which is on the site of their principal 
village. (j. m.) 

Marricoke.—Doc. of 1675 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xiv, 705, 1883. Meracock.—Treaty of 1656 in Rut- 
tenber, Tribes of Hudson River, 125,1872. Meri- 
cock.—Doc. of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 
416, 1883. Mericoke.—Thompson, Long Id., 344, 
1839. Merikoke.—Wood in Macauley, N. Y., ii, 
252, 1829. Meroke.—Thompson, Long Id., 67, 1839. 
Merriack.—Deed of 1643 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
XIV, 530, 1883. Merric.—Thompson, Long Id., 67, 
1839. Merricocke.—Doc. of 1675 in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 705, 1883. 

Mershom. A former Chumashan vil¬ 
lage at Canada de los Sauces, w. of San 
Buenaventura, Ventura co., Cal. 

Mer-com.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884 (c=sh). 

Mesa Chiquita (Span.: ‘small mesa’ or 
table-land). A Diegueno village in w. 
San Diego co., Cal.—Jackson and Kinney, 
Rep. Miss. Inds., 24, 1883. 

Mesa del Nayarit. A pueblo of the 
Cora in the Sierra de Nayarit, on the 
upper waters of the Rio de Jesus Marfa, 
in the n. part of the Territory of Tepic, 
lat. 23° 25', Mexico.—Lumholtz, Un¬ 
known Mex., i, 500, 1902. 

Mesa Grande (Span.: ‘large mesa’ or 
table-land). A small Diegueno village 
in w. San Diego co., Cal., with 103 in¬ 
habitants in 1880. The name is now ap¬ 
plied to a reservation of 120 acres of 
patented, largely desert land, 75 m. from 
Mission Tule River agency. See Jackson 
and Kinney, Rep. Mission Inds., 24,1883; 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902. 

Mescal (Aztec: mexcalli , l metl [ma¬ 
guey] liquor’). The fleshy leaf bases 
and trunk of various species of agave. 
It was roasted in pit ovens and became 
a sweet and nutritious food among the 


846 


MESCALEROS-MESCALES 


[B. a. e. 


Indians of the states on both sides of the 
Mexican boundary. Mescal pits are usu¬ 
ally circular depressions in the ground, 6 
to 20 ft in circumference, sloping evenly to 
the center, a foot to 3 ft in depth, and 
lined with coarse gravel. A fire was built 
in the pit, raked out after the stones had 
become hot, and the mescal plants put in 
and covered with grass. After two days’ 
steaming the pile was opened and the 
mescal was ready for consumption. 

The product must not be confounded 
with the distilled spirit known in Mexico 
under the same name, nor with the peyote 
cactus. Mescal is a valuable food re¬ 
source among the Apache (a division of 
whom, the Mescaleros, is named from 
their custom of eating mescal), as well 
as among the Mohave, Yuma, Ute, 
Paiute, and practically every tribe of the 
region producing the agave. An exten¬ 
sive commerce in this sweet was carried 
on with outlying tribes, as the Hopi and 
other Pueblos. So far as known mescal 
was not fermented by the Indians to 
produce an intoxicating drink before the 
coming of the Spaniards. The food value 
of mescal is regarded as of such import¬ 
ance that the entire population of Pre¬ 
sidio del Norte (El Paso), on the failure 
of their crops half a century ago, sub¬ 
sisted for six months on roasted agave 
(Bartlett, Pers. Narr., ii, 291, 1854). 
See Peyote. (w. h.) 

Mescaleros (Span.: ‘mescal people,’ 
from their custom of eating mescal). An 
Apache tribe which formed a part of the 
Faraones and Vaqueros of different pe¬ 
riods of the Spanish history of the S. W. 
Their principal range was between the 
Rio Grande and the Pecos in New Mex¬ 
ico, but it extended also into the Staked 
plains and southward into Coahuila, 
Mexico. They were never regarded as 
so warlike as the Apache of Arizona, 
otherwise they were generally similar. 
Mooney (field notes, B. A. E., 1897) re¬ 
cords the following divisions: Nataina, 
Tuetinini, Tsihlinainde, Guhlkainde, and 
Tahuunde. These bands intermarry, and 
each had its chief and subchief. The 
Guhlkainde are apparently identical with 
the “Cuelcajenne” of Orozco y Berra and 
others, who classed them as a division of 
the Llaneros; the “Natages” are prob¬ 
ably the same as the Nataina rather than 
the Lipan or the Kiowa Apache, while 
the Tsihlinainde seem to be identifiable 
with the “ Chilpaines.” In addition 
Orozco y Berra gives the Lipillanes as a 
Llanero division. 

The Mescaleros are now on a reserva¬ 
tion of 474,240 acres in s. New Mexico, 
set apart for them in 1873. Population 
460 in 1905, including about a score of 
Lipan, q. v, (f. w. h. ) 


Ahuatcha.—Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., i, 413, 1883 (Mo¬ 
have name). Apaches des 7 Rivieres.—Baudry des 
Lozi6res, Voy. Louisiane, map, 1802 (named 
from Seven rivers in s. E. N. Mex.). Apaches 
Llaneros.—Bonnycastle, Span. Am., 68, 1819. 

Apaches Mescaleros.—Ibid. Apaches of Seven 
Rivers.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5 (1763), 1776. 
Apachos Mescaleros.—Morse, Am. Univ. Geog., I, 
685, 1819. Chi-she'.—Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 
1895 (Keresan name). Ebikuita.—Gatschet, Creek 
Migr. Leg., i, 28, 1884 (here given as a syno¬ 
nym of Cherokee). Escequatas.—Neighbors in 
H. R. Doc. 100, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 5, 1847. Esi- 
kwita.—Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898 
(Kiowa name). Es-ree-que-tees.—Butler and 
Lewis Jin H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6, 

1847. Es-se-kwlt'-ta.— ten Kate,Synonymie,9,1884 
(Comanche name: trans., ‘gray buttocks’, but 
really signifying ‘gray dung’). Essekwitta.— ten 
Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 376,1885. Esse-qua-ties. — 
Butler and Lewis in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 
2d sess., 7, 1847. Euquatops. —Schoolcraft (after 
Neighbors), Ind. Tribes, I, 518,1851 (probably mis¬ 
print of Esequatops=Esikwita). Ho-tashin.— 
Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (Comanche 
name: apparently a corrupted Mescalero word). 
Inatahin.— Ibid, (‘mescal people’: Lipan name). 
Mamakans Apeches. —Warden, Account U. S. A., 
ill, 562, 1819 (probably identical). Mascaleros. — 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 207,1855. Masceleros. — 
Ibid. Mescaleres. —Robin, Voy. 4 la Louisiane, 
ill, 15, 1807. Mescalero Apaches. —Bell in Jour. 
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., I, 240, 1869. Mescaleros. — 
Tex. State Arch., doc. 503,1791. Mescalers. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 218, 1861. Mescallaros. —Haines, Am. 
Indian, 134, 1888. Mescalos. —Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. Mescaloro Apaches. —Meri¬ 
wether in Sen. Ex. Doc. 69, 34th Cong., 1st seas., 
15, 1856. Mescaluros. —Box, Advent., 320, 1869. 
Mescateras. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 439, 1853 (misprint). 
Mescolero. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 288, 1858. Mez- 
caleros. —Gregg, Comm. Prairies, I, 290, 1844. 
Miscaleros. —Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 58, 1870. 
Moscalara.— Parker, Unexplored Texas, 221, 1856. 
Mu-ca-la-moes. —Butler and Lewis in H. R. Doc. 
76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 7, 1847. Musaleros. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 257, 1853. Mus-ca-lar-oes. —Butler and 
Lewis in H. R. Doc. 76, 29tli Cong.,2d sess., 6,1847. 
Muscaleros. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 203, 1855. 
Muscallaros.— Pattie, Pers. Narr., 117, 1833. Mus- 
ka-le-ras. —Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 518, 1851. 
Mus-ka-leros. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 28, 1850. Mus- 
keleras.— Neighbors in H. R. Doc. 100, 29th Cong., 
2d sess., 5, 1847. Muskeleros. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 674, 

1848. Nashkali dinne. —Gatschet, notes, 1886 (Nav- 
aho name). Natahe'. —Mooney, field notes, B. 
A v E., 1897 (‘mescal people’: Lipan name). 
Natahi'n. —Ibid. (Jicarilla name). Na-ta'-ne. — 
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Picuris name). 
Ndatahe'.— Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 1897 
(Lipan name). Pa-ha-sa-be'. —ten Kate, Synon- 
ymie, 8, 1884 (Tesuque name). Sacramantenos. — 
Hamilton, Mex. Handbk., 48, 1883. Sacramento 
Apaches. —Parke, Map New Mex., 1851 (doubtless 
identical although located as distinct). Saline 
Apaches.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis, Span. 
Conq. N. Mex., 364, 1869. Sejen-ne. —Escudero, 
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 212, 1834 (native 
name). Tashi.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 376, 
1885. Tixitiwa huponun. —Gatschet, notes, 1885 
(Isleta name). Tsi'-se'. —Hodge, field notes, B. 
A. E., 1895(San Ildefonso Tewa name, cf. Chi-she', 
above). 

Mescales. A former tribe or tribes in 
n. e. Mexico and s. Texas. The one 
oftenest referred to lived not far from the 
junction of the Salado with the Rio 
Grande, and Mescales are mentioned at 
the neighboring mission of San Juan 
Bautista, founded in 1699. These spoke 
a Coahuiltecan dialect. De Leon, in 1689, 
mentions them in connection with the 
Hapes, Jumenes, and Xiabu. (h. e. b. ) 

Mescale.—De Leon (1689) in Tex. Hist. Ass’n 
Quar., vni, 205, 1905. Mescate.—Manzanet, ibid. 


BULL. 301 


MESEEKUNNOGHQUOH-METAL-WORK 


847 


Meseekunnoghquoh. See Little Turtle. 

Mesheka ( Me-she'-kd, ‘ mud turtle ’). A 
gens of the Chippewa, q. v.—Morgan, 
Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. 

Meshekenoghqua. See Little Turtle. 

Mesheketeno. A Potawatomi village 
which took its name from the resident 
chief, situated on Kankakee r., a short 
distance above the present Kankakee, n. 
e. Illinois, in 1833.—Camp Tippecanoe 
treaty (1834) in U. S. Ind. Treaties, 698, 
1873. 

Meshekunnoghquoh. See Little Turtle. 

Meshingomesia. A former Miami village, 
commonly called after a chief of this 
name, situated on a reservation on the 
n. e. side of Mississinewa r., in Liberty 
tp., Wabash co., Ind. The reserve was 
originally established for Meshingomesia’s 
father, Metosinia, or Matosinia, in 1838, 
and its inhabitants were known as Mesh¬ 
ingomesia’s band. In 1872 the land was 
divided among the surviving occupants 
and patented to them, being the last land 
held as an Indian reservation in Indiana. 

(.T. M. ) 

Me-shing-go-me-sia. —Royce in 1st Rep. B. A. E., 
262, 1881. Me-shing-go-me-zia.— Treaty of 1840 in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 510, 1873. Me-shin-gi me-yia. — 
Hough, map in Indiana Geol. Rep., 1883. Shingle- 
masy.—Common local form. 

Meshkemau. An Ottawa village, com¬ 
monly called “Meshkemau’s village/’ 
from the name of its chief, formerly ex¬ 
isting on Maumee bay, Lucas co., Ohio, 
on land sold in 1833. The name is also 
written Meskemau and Mishkemau. 

Meshtshe ( Mec'-tdt , ‘ village at the mouth 
of a small creek ’). A former Mishikhwut- 
metunne village on upper Coquille r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 232, 1890. 

Mesitas (Span.: ‘little mesas’ or table¬ 
lands). An ancient settlement of the 
Tepecano, the ruins of which are situated 
e. of the Rio de Bolanos, about 3 m. s. e. 
of Mezquitic, in Jalisco, Mexico.—Hrd- 
licka in Am. Anthrop., v, 389, 409, 1903. 

Meskwadare (for Mlskwadasi, ‘small 
water-turtle.’—W. J.). A gens of the 
Chippewa, q. v. 

Me-skwa-da'-re. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. 
Miskwadas’.— Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Mesquawbuck (‘red rock place.’—Hew¬ 
itt). A former Potawatomi village, com¬ 
monly known as “Mesquawbuck’s vil¬ 
lage,” from a chief of this name, near the 
present Oswego, Kosciusko co., Ind., on 
a reservation sold in 1836. The name is 
spelled also Mesquabuck and Musqua- 
buck. (j- m. ) 

Mesquite (adapted from Aztec for 
Prosopis julijlora). A village of the cen¬ 
tral Papago, probably in Pima co., s. Ariz.; 
said to have 500 inhabitants in 1863 and 
70 families in 1865. 

Mesquit.— Poston in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863, 385,1864. 
Mesquite.—Browne, Apache Country, 291, 1869. 
Misquito.—Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208,1858. Mus- 


quito.—Ibid., 135,1865. Raiz del Mesquite.—Orozco 
y Berra, Geog., 348, 1864 (sig. ‘Mesquite root’ 
probably identical). 

Mesquites. A tribe represented in the 
18th century at the San Antonio missions, 
Texas. They are mentioned as early as 
1716, by Espinosa, who met one Indian 
of this tribe w. of Arroyo Hondo (Diario, 
1716, MS.); he also met others near the 
Brazos with the Tonkawan Indians of 
Rancherfa Grande. In 1727 Rivera men¬ 
tions them at San Antonio with the 
Pay ay as and Aguastayas (Diario, leg. 
1994, 1736). There are proofs that in 
their gentile state they intermarried with 
the Ervipiames and Muruames (Baptis¬ 
mal Rec. of Valero, partidas 194, 418), 
and also with the Payayas (ibid., partida 
90). The first baptism of one of this 
tribe recorded at San Antonio de Valero 
is dated Nov. 8, 1720. In 1734 one per¬ 
son at a residencia in San Antonio acted 
as interpreter for Xarame, Payaya, Sia- 
guan, Aguastaya, and Mesquite witnesses 
(Residencia de Bustillos y Zevallos, 
Bexar archives, 1730-36); but too much 
must not be inferred from this circum¬ 
stance. In 1768 Solis reported Mesquites 
at San Jose mission, with Pampopas, 
Aguastallas, Pastias, and Xarames (Dia¬ 
rio, Mem. Nueva Espana, xxvn, 270), 
and in 1793 Revillagigedo implied that 
this tribe constituted a part of the few 
neophytes still at this mission (Carta, 
Die., 27, 1793). A tribe called Mesquites 
lived in 1757 across the Rio Grande at 
Villa de Santander. These were divided 
into 4 bands, consisting of 150 families 
(Tiendo de Cuervo, Re vista, Archivo 
General, MS.). ( h. e. b. ) 

Mesquita.— Baptismal records cited abes e, partida 
310. Mesquites.— Solis (1767) quoted by H. E. Bol¬ 
ton, inf’n, 1906. Mesquittes. —Residencia, cited 
above, 1734. Mezquites.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 1994, 
1736. 

Messiah legends. See Ghost dance. 

Mestethltun ( MZs-i&gV-ttin). A former 
village of the Tolowa, on the coast near 
Crescent, Cal.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, hi, 236,1890. 

Mestizo. See Metis, Mixed-bloods. 

Meta. A Yurok village on Klamath r., 
Cal., 4 or 5 m. above Klamath bluffs. 
Me'h-teh.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 
138, 1853. Meta.— A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. 
Mi-ta.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 44,1877. 

Metacom, Metacomet. See King Philip. 

Metal-work. Before the arrival of the 
whites, the tribes n. of Mexico had made 
considerable progress in the arts of metal¬ 
lurgy, dealing almost exclusively with 
copper (q. v.). The other metals utilized 
were gold, silver, iron, and galena (lead 
ore). Galena was known only in the 
form of ore, and the same is true of iron 
(hematite, pyrites, etc.), except where 
chance bits of meteoric iron came into 
the hands of the native artisan. Copper 
alone was mined (see Mines and Quarries). 


848 


METAL-WORK 


[B. a. e. 


The four metals, copper, gold, silver, and 
iron (meteoric), were shaped mainly by 
cold-hammering and grinding, but heat 
no doubt was employed to facilitate the 
hammering processes and in annealing. 
It is believed that copper was sometimes 
swedged, or in sheet form pressed into 
molds. But the remarkable repousse fig¬ 
ures representing elaborately costumed 



REPOUSSE FIGURE IN SHEET-COPPER, FROM A GEORGIA 
MOUND. (THOMAS) 


and winged personages in sheet metal, 
found in mounds in Georgia (Thomas), 
and other more highly conventionalized 
figures from Florida" mounds (Moore), 
give evidence of a degree of skill seem¬ 
ingly outof keeping with what is known of 
the general accomplishments of the north¬ 
ern tribes. Cushing, however, has demon¬ 
strated that repousse work of like char- 



COPPER EAR ORNAMENT, WITH COPY BY WILLOUGHBY, 
USING ONLY STONE TOOLS} 1*2. (wiLLOUGHBy) 


acter can be accomplished by simple 
methods—the employment of pressure 
with a bone or an antler point, the sheet 
being placed upon a yielding surface, as 
of buckskin; but some of this w r ork, es¬ 
pecially the Georgia specimens, shows a 
degree of precision in execution appar¬ 
ently beyond the reach of the methods 
thus suggested. 

Examples of overlaying or plating with 
thin sheets of copper, found by Moore in 


the mounds of Florida and Alabama, and 
by Putnam, Moorehead, Mills, and others 
in the mounds of Ohio, are hardly less re¬ 
markable; but that these are well within 
the range of workmen of intelligence em¬ 
ploying only stone tools has been amply 
proved by Willoughby. The thin sheets 
of copper are readily produced by ham¬ 
mering with stone tools with the aid of 
annealing processes and the skilful use 
of rivets (Moore). It can hardly be 
doubted that copper, gold, and silver 
were sometimes melted by aboriginal 
metal-workers n. of Mexico, and that 



METHOD OF INDENTING AND CUTTING COPPER PLATES. 
(cushing) 

bits of native copper were freed from the 
matrix of rock by this means. There 
seems to be no satisfactory record, how¬ 
ever, of casting the forms of objects even 
in the rough, and there is no proof that 
ores of any kind were reduced by means 
of heat. It is a remarkable fact that 
up to the present time no prehistoric 
crucible, mold, pattern, or metal¬ 
working tool of any kind whatsoever 
has been identified. No metal-worker’s 
shop or furnace has been located, al¬ 
though caches of implements and of the 
blank forms of implements more or less 
worked have been found in various places, 


















BULL. 30] 


METAMAPO 


METATE 


849 


suggesting manufacture in numbers by 
specialists in the art. The use of artificial 
alloys was unknown, the specimens of 
gold-silver^ and gold-copper alloys ob¬ 
tained in Florida being of exotic origin. 
Stories of the hardening of copper by 
these or other American tribes, other¬ 
wise than by mere hammering, are all 
without a shadow of foundation. A 
few of the tribes, notably the Navaho 
and some of the Pueblos of Arizona and 
New Mexico, and the Haida, Tlingit, and 
others in the far Northwest, are skilful 
metal-workers, although the art as prac¬ 
tised by the Navaho and described by 
Matthews, while primitive in character, 
was adopted from the Spaniards. The 
Haida, Tlingit, and other tribes of Brit¬ 
ish Columbia and Alaska have probably 
retained the aboriginal methods in part 
at least. Niblack (Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 
p. 320) speaks of this work as follows: 
“The tools with which the Indian arti¬ 
san works out the surprisingly well- 
finished metal ornaments and implements 
of this region are few in number. For 
bracelet making the silversmith has a 
hammer, several cold chisels, and an 
etching tool which is merely a sharpened 
steel point or edge. Improvised iron 
anvils replace the stone implements of 
this kind doubtlessly used in former days. 
Copper is beaten into the required shapes. 
Steel tools now used are very deftly tem¬ 
pered and sharpened by the native artisan, 
who retains the primitive form of his im¬ 
plement or tool, and merely substitutes 
the steel for the former stone blade or 
head. The ingenuity which the Indians 
show in adapting iron and steel to their 
own uses is but one of the many evidences 
of their cleverness and intelligence.” 
See Copper, Gold , Iron, Silver. 

The working of metals by primitive 
methods are treated more or less fully 
in the following works: Cushing in Am. 
Anthrop., vii, 1894; Foster,Prehist. Races, 
1878; Fowke, Archaeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; 
Holmes in Am. Anthrop., iii, 1901; 
Hoy in Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., iv, 1878; 
McGuire in Am. Anthrop., v, no. 1, 
1903; Matthews in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 
1883; Moore (1) in Am. Anthrop., v, no. 
1,1903, (2) in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 
1894-1903; Moorehead in Am. Anthrop., 
v, no. 1,1903; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 
1888, 1890; Packard in Smithson. Rep. 
1892, 1893; Putnam in Ann. Reps. Pea¬ 
body Mus. ; Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-vi, 
1851-57; Squier and Davis, Ancient Mon¬ 
uments, 1848; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. 
E., 1894; Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., 
v, no. 1, 1903. (w. h. h.) 

Metamapo. A Calusa village on the 
s. w. coast of Florida, about 1570.— 
Fontaneda Memoir ( ca . 1575), Smith 
trans., 19, 1854. 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-54 


Metate (Aztec: metlatl). The name com¬ 
monly given ^ to the somewhat flat stones 
on which maize, acorns, seeds, chile, and 
other foods are ground by crushing and 
rubbing with a hand-stone called a mul- 
ler, or mano (Spanish ‘hand’). With 
tribes depending largely on such mate¬ 
rials for food, mealing stones of one kind 
or another are an important factor in 
their domestic economy. The metates 
of middle America are often elaborate in 
shape, many of them being carved to 
represent animal forms, the upper sur¬ 
face, or back, serving for the grinding 
plate. In New Mexico and Arizona the 
slabs, although carefully shaped, are 
usually with¬ 
out legs or 
other projec¬ 
tions; often 
they are 

trough- , . 

shaped, and M "" E u! “ " u, “" u,,s (, " ) 
the muller used is an oblong flattish stone 
of subrectangular outline. The modern 
Pueblo Indians combine two or more of 
the mealing plates in a 
group bedded side by 
side in clay and sepa- 
rated and surrounded 

Oblong Muller; New Mexico by StOlie slabs, adobe, 

t 1 ' 5 ) or boards to retain 

the meal. The surfaces of the metates, 
as well as of the mullers, are of 
different textures, grading from coarse 
lava to fine sandstone, and corn crushed 
on the coarser stone is passed to the 
others in succession for further refine¬ 
ment until the product is almost as 
fine as wheat flour. The processes for 
pulverizing and for pulping are practi¬ 
cally the same, the grain or other sub¬ 
stance being treated dry in one case and 



Set of Graded Metates; Hopi (mindeleff) 


moist in the other. The Mexican type 
of metate does not extend northward 
much beyond the limits of the Pueblo 
region, although similar flattish stones 
were and are used for grinding in many 
parts of the country. The typical grind¬ 
ing plate grades through many inter¬ 
mediate forms into the typical mortar, 
and the mano or muller similarly passes 
from the typical flattish form into the 










850 


METATE RUIN-METLAKATLA 


[B. a. e. 


discoidal and cylindrical pestle. Many of 
these hand-stones serve equally well for 
rubbing, rolling, and pounding. See Mor¬ 
tars, Mullers, Notched plates, Pestles. 


Discoidal Muller; Cali- Pestle-Muller ; II- 

FORNIA (1-3) LINOIS (1-4) 

Consult Cushing in Millstone, ix, x, 
1884-1885; Fewkes (1) in 17th Rep. B. 
A. E., 1898, (2) 22d Rep. B. A. E., 1903; 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891; 
James Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 
1883; M. C. Stevenson in 23d Rep. B. A. E., 
1904. (w. h. 11.) 

Metate ruin. A prehistoric pueblo ruin 
in the Petrified Forest, across the wash 
from the “petrified bridge,” near the 
Navaho-Apache co. boundary, Arizona; 
locally so called on account of the numer¬ 
ous stone milling troughs, or metates, set 
on edge in circular or linear form and 
scattered over the surface. The builders 
of the pueblo are unknown. The pottery, 
gray-brown and black in color, is coarse 
in texture and decorated with rude in¬ 
cision and by indented coiling.—Hough 
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 318, 1903. 

Metates. A former Opata pueblo at the 
e. base of the Sierra de Teras, about 12 m. 
w. of Baseraca, e. Sonora, Mexico. Pos¬ 
sibly identical with Teras, Guepacomatzi, 
or Toapara, which pueblos are mentioned 
in early documents as being in that vi¬ 
cinity.—Bandolier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
iv, 524 et seq., 1892. 

Metea (prob. for Metawa, ‘he sulks.’— 
W. J.). A Potawatomi chief, distin¬ 
guished in his tribe as a warrior and an 
orator. When the Potawatomi were sub¬ 
sidized by the British at the beginning of 
the War of 1812 he was one of the leaders 
of the party that massacred the families 
of the garrison and citizens of Chicago as 
they were retreating to Detroit. He led 
the band that harassed the troops who 
marched in the fall of 1812 to the relief of 
Ft Wayne and was shot in the arm by Gen. 
W. H. Harrison. At a council held at Chi¬ 
cago in 1821 he impressed the whites by 
his eloquence and reasoning powers, and 
also when the treaty of the Wabash was 
concluded in 1826. He advocated the 
education of Indian youth and sentseveral 
from his tribe to the Choctaw academy in 
Kentucky. He died in a drunken de¬ 
bauch at Ft Wayne, in 1827, after having 
conducted difficult negotiations with dig¬ 
nity and skill in a conference with com¬ 
missioners of the Government.—Mc- 
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 59-64, 
1858. See Muskwawasepeotan. 


Meteahke. A Mandan band. 

High Village.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 158, 1877. 
Me-te-ah'-ke. —Ibid. 

Metewemesick (‘ place of black earth ’). 
A former Nipmuc (?) settlement on Quine- 
baug r., near Sturbridge, Mass.—Roger 
Williams (1643) quoted by Tooker, Al- 
gonquian Series, vm, 33, 1901. 

Methow ( Met'-how). A Salishan tribe of 
e. Washington, formerly living about 
Methow r. and Chelan lake, now chiefly 
gathered on the Colville res. Their num¬ 
ber is not officially reported. 

Battle-le-mule-emauch.— Ross, Adventures, 290, 
1847. Lahtohs.— Van Valkenburgh in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 235; 1865 (perhaps a misprint for Methows). 
Meat who. —Ross, op. cit. Meshons. —Mooney in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 734, 1896. Met-cow-we. —Orig. 
Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 321,1905. Metcowwee. — 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., ir, 252, 1814. Meteow- 
wee.— Ibid., II, 318, 1817. Methau.— Ind. AIT. Rep., 
253,1877. Methews. —H. R. Doc. 102, 43d Cong., 1st 
sess., 1, 1874. Methoms. —Shanks, et al. (1873), 
ibid., 4. Methow.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 302, 1877. Mi- 
taui. —Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pi. lxxxviii, 
1896. Mithouies.— Winans in Ind. Aff. Rep., 23, 
1870. 

Methy. Theburbot ( Lota maculosa ), the 
loche of the Canadian French, a fish 
common in the waters of n. w. Canada. 
The word is taken from the name of this 
fish in the Wood Cree dialect of Algon- 
quian, the Cree proper term being mihyey , 
according to Lacombe. L. Methy in Atha¬ 
basca is named from this fish; also a lake 
in Labrador. ' (a. f. c.) 

Meti. A former raneheria of gentile 
(probably Diegueiio) Indians near San 
Diego, s. Cal.—Ortega (1775) quoted by 
Bancroft, Hist. Cal., 1 , 253, 1884. 

Metis (‘mixed,’ from French metis, a 
derivative of Latin miscere, ‘to mix’), 
or metif. A term used by the French- 
speaking population of the N. W. to 
designate persons of mixed white and 
Indian blood. Among the Spanish¬ 
speaking population of the S. W. the 
word mestizo, of the same derivation, is 
used, but is applied more especially to 
those of half-white and half-Indian blood. 
The term mustee, a corruption of mestizo, 
was formerly in use in the Gulf states. 
In the W. the term “half-breed” is loosely 
applied to all persons of mixed white 
and Indian blood, without regard to the 
proportion of each. See Mixed-bloods. 

(j. M.) 

Mai tiffs.— Brevel/de Sibley (1805) in Am. State Pa¬ 
pers, Ind. Aff. ,1,730,1832. Mestigos. —Williams,Vt., 
1 ,494,1809 (misprint). Mestizo. —Correct Spanish 
form; feminine mestizo,. Metis.— Correct French 
form. Mustees.— Report of 1741 in Carroll, Hist. 
Coll. S. C., II, 353,1836. Musteses.— Bermuda Royal 
Gazette, July 13, 1875, fide Jour. Anthrop. Inst., v, 
491, 1876 (used in Bermuda for descendants of In¬ 
dian slaves brought from the U. S.). Wissakode- 
winini.—Baraga, Otchipwe-Eng. Diet., 421, 1880 
(Chippewa name: ‘half-burnt wood man’: from 
wissdkode, ‘burnt trees’, referring to their mixed 
light and dark complexion; pi. Wissdkodewinini- 
wog. He gives aiabitdwisid as the literal word 
for ‘half-breed’). 

Metlakatla. A Tsimshian town 15 m. s. 
of Port Simpson, Brit. Col. Anciently 






BULL. 30] 


METOAC-METUTAHANKE 


851 


there were many towns in this neighbor¬ 
hood, and while the mission station of the 
Church of England (established in 1857 
at a Tsimshian village of the same 
name) was conducted by Rev. Wm. Dun¬ 
can, Metlakatla was a flourishing place. 
Trouble arising over the conduct of his 
work, Duncan moved in 1887 to Port Ches¬ 
ter, or New Metlakatla, on Annette id., 
Alaska, and most of the Indians followed 
him. The old town, which contained 198 
inhabitants in 1906, is now the site of an 
Indian school of the Church of England. 
New Metlakatla, including whites and In¬ 
dians, numbered 823 in 1890 and 465 in 
1900. See Missions. (j. r. s.) 

Metlah Catlah.—Horetzky, Canada on Pac., 148, 
1874. Metlahcatlah.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vo- 
cabs. Brit.Col.,map,1884. Metlahkatlah.—Heming 
in Can. Pacific R. R. Rep. Prog., iii, 1877. Met- 
lakahtla.—Whymper, Alaska, 69, 1869. Metlakat¬ 
la.—Can. Ind. Aff., pt. II, 68, 1902. Metlakatla.— 
Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 123b, 1880. 

' M.etoa,c(meteau-hok , the periwinkle, from 
the columella of which beads were made. — 
Gerard). A collective term embracing 
the Indians of Long Island, N. Y., who 
seem to have been divided into the follow¬ 
ing tribes, subtribes, or bands: Canarsee, 
Corchaug, Manhasset, Massapequa, Ma- 
tinecoc, Merric, Montauk, Nesaquake, 
Patchoag, Rockaway, Secatoag, Setauket, 
and Shinnecock. There were besides 
these some minor bands or villages which 
have received special designations. They 
were closely connected linguistically and 
politically, and were probably derived 
from the same immediate ethnic stem. 
Ruttenber classes them as branches of the 
Mahican. The Montauk, who formed the 
leading tribe in the eastern part of the 
island, are often confounded with the 
Metoac, and in some instances the Can¬ 
arsee of the western part have also been 
confounded with them. The eastern 
tribes were at one time subject to the 
Pequot and afterward to the Narraganset, 
while the Iroquois claimed dominion over 
the western tribes. They were numerous 
at the first settlement of the island, but 
rapidly wasted away from epidemics and 
wars with other Indians and with the 
Dutch, disposing of their lands piece by 
piece to the whites. About 1788 a large 
part of the survivors joined the Brother- 
ton Indians in Oneida co., N. Y. The 
rest, represented chiefly by the Montauk 
and Shinnecock, have dwindled to 
perhaps a dozen individuals of mixed 
blood. The Indians of Long Island were 
a seafaring people, mild in temperament, 
diligent in the pursuits determined by 
their environment, skilled in the manage¬ 
ment of the canoe, seine, and spear, and 
dexterous in the making of seawan or 
wampum (Flint). The chieftaincies were 
hereditary by lineal descent, including 
females when there was no male repre¬ 
sentative. 


The Metoac villages were Canarsee, 
Cotsjewaminck, Cutchogue (Corchaug), 
Jameco, Keskaechquerem (?), Marych- 
kenwikingh, Maspeth (Canarsee), Matti- 
tuck (Corchaug), Merric, Mirrachtau- 
hacky,Mochgonnekonck, Montauk, Nach- 
aquatuck, Nesaquake, Ouheywichkingli, 
Patchoag, Rechquaakie, Setauket, Sichtey- 
hacky, Wawepex(Matinecock). (j. m. ) 

La Porcelaine.—Vaudreuil (1724) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IX, 937,1855. Long Island Indians.—Common 
early English name. Malowwacks.—Hall, N. W. 
States, 34, 1849 (misprint form and wrongly 
located). Matauwakes.—Thompson, Long Id., 53, 
1839. Matowacks.—Pa tent of 1664 in N.Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., n, 296,1858(“Matowacks orLonglsland”). 
Mattouwacky.—De Laet (ca . 1633) in N. Y. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 2d s., I, 296, 1841. Mattowax.—Shea, 
Cath. Miss., 16, 1855. Matuwacks.—Yates and 
Moulton in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 75, 
1872. Mertowacks.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 
127, 1816. Metoacs.—Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. 
Soc. Proc., II, 85, 1844. Metouwacks.—Winfield, 
Hudson Co., 9, 1874. Metowacks.—Brodhead in 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 75, 1872. Milo- 
wacks.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816 (mis¬ 
print). Sewan-akies.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
vi, 147,1857 (‘Shell land bands,’ from sewayi, ‘ the 
wampum shell,’ and aukie, ‘land ’). 

Metocaum. A village, probably of the 
Chowanoc, situated on Chowan r., in the 
present Bertie co., N. C., in 1585. 
Metackwem.—Lane (1586) in Hakluyt, Voy., in, 
312, 1810. Metocaum.—Smith (1629), Va., I, map, 
repr. 1819. Metocunent.—Dutch map (1621) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. 

Metouscepriniouek (prob. for Metusdne- 
niwugi, lit. ‘men who walk with bare 
[feet] ’; it is not the idiom for that phrase, 
however, but a term referring to people 
in general.—W. J.). A term apparently 
applied by Bacqueville de la Potherie 
(Hist. Am., ii, 103,1753) to the Foxes, Illi¬ 
nois, Kickapoo, Miami, etc., collectively. 

Metsmetskop (‘low, miserable, stink¬ 
ing’). A name applied by Natchez of 
the upper class to those of the lowest 
social grade. This was composed princi¬ 
pally of people of the same blood but also 
included some small alien tribes. Cf. 
Stinkards. (j. R. s.) 

Miche-Miche-Quipy — Du Pratz, Hist. La., II, 393, 
1758. Miche Michequipi.—Bossu (1751), Travels 
La., 65, 1771 (sig. ‘stinking fellow’). Puants.— 
Ibid., 394 (applied also to the Winnebago). Stin- 
cards.—Latham, Essays, 408, 1860. Stinkards.— 
P6nicaut (1704) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 
94, 1869. 

Metstoasath ( MEtstd'asath ). A sept of 
the Toquart, a Nootka tribe. —Boas in 6th 
Rep. N. W. Tribes of Canada, 31, 1890. 

Metukatoak. A Kaviagmiut village at 
Port Clarence, Alaska.—Eleventh Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 162,1893. 

Metutahanke (‘lower village’). One of 
two Mandan villages in 1804; situated on 
Missouri r., about 4 m. below Knife r., 
N. Dak. It was almost exterminated by 
smallpox in 1837. 

Matoolonha,—Thwaites, Orig. Jour. Lewis and 
Clark, vii, index, 1905. Matootonha.—Lewis and 
Clark, Exped., 1,120,1814. Ma-too-ton'-ka.—Lewis 
and Clark, Discov.,24, 1806. Metutahanke.—Mat¬ 
thews, Ethnog. and Thilol. Hidatsa, 14, 1877. 
Mih-tutta-hang-kusch.—Maximilian as quoted by 
Matthews, op. cit. Mih-Tutta-Hang-Kush.— Maxi- 


852 


MEXAM—MIAMI 


[b. a. e. 


milian, Trav., 335, 1843. Mitutahankish.—Mat¬ 
thews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 14, 1877. 
Mitutahankuc.—Dorsey in Am. Natur., 829, Oct. 
1882. 

Mexam. See Mriksah. 

Meyascosic. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. side of 
James r., in Charles City co., Va.—Smith 
(1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Meyemma. Mentioned by Gibbs 
(Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 139, 1853) 
as a Hupa village in Hupa valley, Cal., in 
1851. Not identified. The name is per¬ 
haps of Yurok origin. 

Meyo. The Lizard clan of the pueblo 
of Laguna, N. Mex. Although Laguna 
was not founded until 1699, the origin of 
the clan is unknown to the natives. It 
forms a phratry with the Skurshka 
(Water-snake), Sqowi (Rattlesnake), and 
Hatsi (Earth) clans, which came from 
Sia, Oraibi (probably), and Jemez, re¬ 
spectively. (f. w. h. ) 

Meyo-hano ch .— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 
1896 ( hdnoch =‘ people ’). 

Mezquital (Span: ‘ mesquite grove ’). A 
former pueblo of the Tepehuane on the 
upper waters of Rio de San Pedro, s. 
Durango, Mexico, and the seat of a Span¬ 
ish mission. It is now a Mexican town. 
S. Francisco del Mezquital.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 
318, 1864. 

Mgezewa (for Me'gezi, ‘bald eagle’). 
A gens of the Potawatomi, q. v. 

Megezi.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. M'-ge-ze'-wa.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 1877. 

Miacomit. A village formerly on Nan¬ 
tucket id., off the s coast of Massachu¬ 
setts.—Writer of 1807 in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., hi, 26,1846. 

Miahwahpitsiks ( Mi-ah- wah'-plt-slks, 
‘seldom lonesome’). A division of the 
Piegan tribe of the Siksika. 

Mi-ah-wah'-pit-siks. — Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge 
Tales, 209, 1892. Seldom Lonesome.—Ibid., 225. 

Miakechakesa. One of the two divi¬ 
sions of the Sisseton Sioux. Their 
habitat in 1824 was the region of Blue 
Earth and Cottonwood rs., Minn., ex¬ 
tending westward to the Coteau des 
Prairies. Unlike the Kahra, they had no 
fixed villages, no mud or bark cabins. 
They hunted on Blue Earth r. in winter, 
and during tho summer pursued the buf¬ 
falo as far as Missouri r. They numbered 
about 1,000. 

Lower Sissetons.—Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 250, 
1880. Mi-ah-kee-jack-sah.—Lewis and Clark, Dis- 
cov., 34, 1806. Mia Kechakesa.—Long, Exped. St 
Peter’s R., I, 378, 1824. South Sussetons.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 495, 1839. 

Miami (?Chippewa: Omaumeg, ‘people 
who live on the peninsula’). An Algon- 
quian tribe, usually designated by early 
English writers as Twightwees (twa n h 
twa n h, the cry of a crane.—Hewitt), from 
their own name, the earliest recorded 
notice of which is from information fur¬ 
nished in 1658 by Gabriel Druillettes 
(Jes. Rel. 1658, 21,1858), who called them 
the Oumamik, then living 60 leagues from 


St Michel, the first village of the Pota¬ 
watomi mentioned by him; it was there¬ 
fore at or about the mouth of Green 
bay, Wis. Tailhan (Perrot, M^moire) 
says that they withdrew into the Missis¬ 
sippi valley, 60 leagues from the bay, 
and were established there from 1657 to 
1676, although Bacqueville de la Pothe- 
rie asserts that, with the Mascoutens, the 
Kickapoo, and part of the Illinois, they 
came to settle at that place about 1667. 
The first*, time the French came into 
actual contact with the Miami was when 
Perrot visited them about 1668. His 
second visit was in 1670, when they were 
living at the headwaters of Fox r., Wis. 
In 1671 a part at least of the tribe were 
living with the Mascoutens in a palisaded 



LUM-KI-KUM-MIAMI 


village in this locality (Jes. Rel. 1671, 45, 
1858). Soon after this the Miami parted 
from the Mascoutens and formed new set¬ 
tlements at the s. end of L. Michigan and 
on Kalamazoo r., Mich. The settlements 
at the s. end of the lake w r ere at Chicago 
and on St Joseph r., where missions 
were established late in the 17th century, 
although the former is mentioned as a 
Wea village at the time of Marquette’s 
visit, and Wea were found there in 
1701 by De Courtemarche. It is likely 
that these Wea were the Miami men¬ 
tioned by Allouez and others as being 
united with the Mascoutens in Wisconsin. 
The chief village of the Miami on St 
Joseph r. was, according to Zenobius 
(Le Clercq, ii, 133), about 15 leagues 
inland, in lat. 41°. The extent of territory 
occupied by this tribe a few years later 
compels the conclusion that the Miami 





BULL. 30] 


MIAMI 


853 


in Wisconsin, when the whites first heard 
of them, formed but a part of the tribe, 
and that other bodies were already in 
n. e. Illinois and n. Indiana. As the 
Miami and their allies were found later 
on the Wabash in Indiana and in n. w. 
Ohio, in which latter territory they gave 
their name to three rivers, it would seem 
that they had moved s. e. from the local¬ 
ities where first known within historic 
times. Little Turtle, their famous chief, 
said: ‘‘My fathers kindled the first fire at 
Detroit; thence they extended their lines 
to the headwaters of the Scioto; thence 
to its mouth; thence down the Ohio to 
the mouth of the Wabash, and thence to 
Chicago over L. Michigan.” When Vin¬ 
cennes was sent by Gov. Vaudreville in 
1705 on a mission to the Miami they were 
found occupying principally the territory 
n. w. of the upper Wabash. There was a 
Miami village at Detroit in 1703, but their 
chief settlement was still on St Joseph r. 
In 1711 the Miami and the Wea had three 
villages on the St Joseph, Maumee, and 
Wabash. Kekionga, at the head of the 
Maumee, became the chief seat of the 
Miami proper, while Ouiatenon, on the 
Wabash, was the headquarters of the Wea 
branch. By the encroachments of the 
Potawatomi, Kickapoo, and other north¬ 
ern tribes the Miami were driven from St 
Joseph r. and the country n. w. of the 
Wabash. They sentout colonies to theE. 
and formed settlements on Miami r. in 
Ohio, and perhaps as far e. as the Scioto. 
This country they held until the peace of 
1763, when they retired to Indiana, and 
the abandoned country was occupied by 
the Shawnee. They took a prominent 
part in all the Indian wars in Ohio valley 
until the close of the war of 1812. Soon 
afterward they began to sell their lands, 
and by 1827 had disposed of most of their 
holdings in Indiana and had agreed to re¬ 
move to Kansas, whence they went later 
to Indian Ter., where the remnant still 
resides. In all treaty negotiations they 
were considered as original owners of the 
Wabash country and all of w. Ohio, 
while the other tribes in that region were 
regarded as tenants or intruders on their 
lands. A considerable part of the tribe, 
commonly known as Meshingomesia’s 
band, continued to reside on a reserva¬ 
tion in Wabash co., Ind., until 1872, when 
the land was divided among the surviv¬ 
ors, then numbering about 300. 

The Miami men were described in 1718 
as “of medium height, well built, heads 
rather round than oblong, countenances 
agreeable rather than sedate or morose, 
swift on foot, and excessively fond of 
racing.” The women were generally 
well clad in deerskins, while the men 
used scarcely any covering and were tat¬ 
tooed all over the body. They were hard¬ 


working, and raised a species of maize 
unlike that of the Indians of Detroit, 
described as “white, of the same size 
as the other, the skin much finer, and 
the meal much whiter.” According to 
the early French explorers the Miami 
were distinguished for polite manners, 
mild, affable, and sedate character, and 
their respect for and perfect obedience to 
their chiefs, who had greater authority 
than those of other Algonquian and 
n. w. tribes. They usually spoke slowly. 
They were land travelers rather than 
canoemen. According to Hennepin, 
when they saw a herd of buffalo they 
gathered in great numbers and set fire to 
the grass about the animals, leaving open 
a passage where they posted themselves 
with their bows and arrows; the buffalo, 
seeking to escape the fire, were compelled 
to pass the Indians, who killed large num¬ 
bers of them. The women spun thread 
of buffalo hair, with which they made 
bags to carry the meat, toasted or some¬ 
times dried in the sun. Their cabins 
were covered with rush mats. Accord¬ 
ing to Perrot, the village which he vis¬ 
ited was situated on a hill and sur¬ 
rounded by a palisade. On the other 
hand, Zenobius says that La Salle, who 
visited the villages on St Joseph r., 
taught them how to defend themselves 
with palisades, and even made them 
erect a kind of fort with intrenchments. 
Infidelity of the wife, as among many 
other Indians, was punished by clipping 
the nose. According to early explorers, 
they Avorshiped the sun and thunder, 
but did not honor a host of minor 
deities, like the Huron and the Ottawa. 
Three forms of burial appear to have 
been practised by the division of the 
tribe living about Ft Wayne: (1) The 
ordinary ground burial in a shallow grave 
prepared to receive the body in a recum¬ 
bent position. (2) Surface burial in a 
hollow log; these have been found in 
heavy forests; sometimes a tree was split 
and the haWes hollowed out to receive 
the body, when it was either closed with 
withes or fastened to the ground with 
crossed stakes; sometimes a hollow tree 
was used, the ends being closed. (3) Sur¬ 
face burial wherein the body was cover¬ 
ed with a small pen of logs, laid as in a 
log cabin, the courses meeting at the top 
in a single log. 

The French authors commonly divided 
the Miami into six bands: Piankashaw, 
Wea, Atchatchakangouen, Kilatika, Men- 
gakonkia, and Pepicokia. Of these the 
first two have come to be recognized as 
distinct tribes; the other names are no 
longer known. The Pepicokia, men¬ 
tioned in 1796 with the Wea and Pianka¬ 
shaw, may have been absorbed by the 
latter. Several treaties were made with 


854 


MIAMI 


[b. a. fi. 


a band known as Eel Rivers, formerly liv¬ 
ing near Thorntown, Boone co., Ind., but 
they afterward joined the main body on 
the Wabash. 

According to Morgan (Anc. Soc., 168, 
1877) the Miami have lOgentes: (1) Mow- 
ha wa (wolf), (2) Mongwa(loon), (3) Ken- 
da wa (eagle), (4) Ahpakosea (buzzard), 

(5) Kanozawa (Kanwasowau, panther), 

(6) Pilawa (turkey), (7) Ahseponna (rac¬ 
coon), (8) Monnato (snow), (9) Kulswa 
(sun), (10) Water. Chauvignerie,in 1737, 
said that the Miami had two principal to¬ 
tems—the elk and crane—while some of 
them had the bear. The French writers 
call the Atchatchakangouen (Crane) the 
leading division. At a great conference 
on the Maumee in Ohio in 1793 the 
Miami signed with the t urtle totem. None 
of these totems occurs in Morgan’s list. 

it is impossible to give a satisfactory 
estimate of the numbers of the Miami 
at any one time, on account of confusion 
with the Wea and Piankashaw, who 
probably never exceeded 1,500. An esti¬ 
mate in 1764 gives them 1,750; another 
in the following year places their num¬ 
ber at 1,250. In 1825 the population of 
the Miami, Eel Rivers, and Wea was 
given as 1,400, of whom 327 were Wea. 
Since their removal to the W. they have 
rapidly decreased. Only 57 Miami were 
officially known in Indian Ter. in 1885, 
while the Wea and Piankashaw were 
confederated with the remnant of the 
Illinois under the name of Peoria, the 
whole body numbering but 149; these in¬ 
creased to 191 in 1903. The total number 
of Miami in 1905 in Indian Ter. was 124; 
in Indiana, in 1900, there were 243; the 
latter, however, are greatly mixed with 
white blood. Including individuals scat¬ 
tered among other tribes, the whole num¬ 
ber is probably 400. 

The Miami joined' in or made treaties 
with the United States as follows: (1) 
Greenville, (>., with Gen. Anthony 
Wayne, Aug. 3, 1795, defining the boun¬ 
dary between the United States and tribes 
w. of Ohio r. and ceding certain tracts of 
land; (2) Ft Wayne, Ind., June 7, 1803, 
with various tribes, defining boundaries 
and ceding certain lands; (3) Grouseland, 
Ind., Aug., 21, 1805, ceding certain lands 
in Indiana and defining boundaries; (4) 
Ft Wayne, Ind., Sept. 30, 1809, in which 
the Miami, Eel River tribes, and Dela¬ 
wares ceded certain lands in Indiana, and 
the relations between the Delawares and 
Miami regarding certain territory are de¬ 
fined; (5) Treaty of peace at Greenville, 
O., July 22, 1814, between the United 
States, the Wyandot, Delawares, Shaw¬ 
nee, Seneca, and the Miami, including the 
Eel River and Wea tribes; (6) Peace 
treaty of Spring Wells, Mich., Sept. 8, 
1815, by the Miami and other tribes; (7) 


St Mary’s, O., Oct. 6,1818, by which the 
Miami ceded certain lands in Indiana; 
(8) Treaty of the Wabash, Ind., Oct. 23, 
1826, by which the Miami ceded all their 
lands in Indiana, n. and w. of Wabash 
and Miami rs.; (9) Wyandot village, Ind., 
Feb. 11, 1828, by which the Eel River 
Miami ceded all claim to the reservation 
at their village on Sugar Tree cr., Ind.; 
(10) Forks of Wabash, Ind., Oct. 23, 1834, 
by which the Miami ceded several tracts 
in Indiana; (11) Forks of the Wabash, 
Ind., Nov. 6, 1838, by which the Miami 
ceded most of their remaining lands in 
Indiana, and the United States agreed to 
furnish them a reservation w. of the Mis¬ 
sissippi; (12) Forks of the Wabash, Ind., 
Nov. 28, 1840, by which the Miami ceded 
their remaining lands in Indiana and 
agreed to remove to the country assigned 
them w. of the Mississippi; (13) Wash¬ 
ington, June 5,1854, by which they ceded 
a tract assigned by amended treaty of Nov. 
28, 1840, excepting 70,000 a. retained as a 
reserve; (14) Washington, Feb. 23, 1867, 
with Seneca and others, in which it is 
stipulated that the Miami may become 
confederated with the Peoria and others 
if they so desire. 

Among the Miami villages were Chi¬ 
cago, Cliippekawkay, Choppatee’s village, 
Kekionga, Kenapacomaqua, Kokomo, 
Kowasikka, Little Turtle’s village, Me- 
shingomesia, Missinquimeschan (Pianka¬ 
shaw, Mississinewa, Neconga (?), Osage, 
Papakeecha, Piankashaw (Piankashaw), 
Pickawillanee, White Raccoon’s village, 
Seek’s village, St Francis Xavier (mis¬ 
sion, with others), Thorntown (Eel River 
Miami). (j. m. c. t.) 

Allianies.—Beckwith in Indiana Geol. Rep., 43, 
1883 (misprint). Maiama.—Janson, Stranger in 
Am., 192, 1807. Mamiwis.—Ratinesque, Am. Na¬ 
tions, i, 157, 1836. Maumee.—Washington (1790) 
in Am. St. Papers, Ind. Ail., 1 ,143,1832. Maumes.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 39, 1855. Maumies — 
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 33,1885. 
Mawmee.—Imlav, West Ter., 364,1797. Me-a-me-a- 
ga.—Morgan, Consang. and Affin.,287,1871. Mea 
mes.— La Barre (1683) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 
202, 1855. Meamis.—Ibid. Memilounioue.—Jes. 
Rel. 1672, lviii, 40, 1899. Memis.—Le Barre 
(1683), op. cit.. 208. Mencamis.—Boudinot,Star in 
the West, 127, 1816 (misprint). Metousceprin- 
ioueks.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., 
ii, 103, 1753 (‘Walkers’, ‘well on their feet’; 
so called because they traveled much on foot, 
and not in canoes). Miamee.—Jones, Ojeb- 
way Inds., 178, 1861. Miames.—Lewis and Clark, 
Travels, 12, 1806. Miami.—Gatschet, Potawatomi 
MS., B. A. E., 1878 (Potawatomi name; plural, 
Miamik). Miamiha.—Coxe, Carolana, 49, 1741. 
Miamioiiek.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 90,1858. Miamis.—Du 
Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 153, 
1855. Mineamies.—Trader of 1778 in Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 561, 1853. Miramis.—De Bougain¬ 
ville (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 608, 1858 
(misprint). Miyamis.— Jeflferys, French Dorns., 
pt. 1, map, 1761. Myamicks.—Lamberville 
(1686) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., hi, 489, 1853. 
Myamis.—MembrO (ca. 1680) in Shea, Miss. Val., 
152, 1852. Naked Indians.—Doc. of 1728 in Min. of 
Prov. Conn, of Pa., Ill, 312,1840. Nation . . . dela 
Grue.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., iv, 
55, 1753. Omameeg.—Warren (1852) in Schoolcraft, 


BULL. 30] 


MIAMI RIVER-MICA 


B55 


[nd.Tribes,v,39,1855 (Chippewaname). 0-maum- 
eeg.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 
33,1885 (Chippewa name). Omianicks.—Lamber- 
ville (1686) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 489, 1853. 
Omie.—Writer of 1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 
s., in, 26, 1794. Ouimiamies.—N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., in, 489, note, 1853. Oumamens.—Neill in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 413,1885. Oumami.—Jes. 
Rel. 1670, 94, 1858. Oumamik.—Ibid., 1658, 21, 
1858. Oumanies.—Lahontan, New Voy., I, map, 
1735. Oumeami.—La Famine council (1684) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 238, 1855. Oumiamies.— 
Bechefer (1682), ibid., 170. Pk£wi-leni.—Gat- 
schet, Shawnee MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee 
name; plural, Pkiwi-lenigi, ‘dust or ashes 
people’ ). Quitways.—Doc. of 1747 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vi, 391, 1855 (=Twightwees? They do 
not appear to have been the Quatoghees or Hur- 
ons, as thought by the editor;. Qwikties.—Col- 
den (1727), Hist. Five Nations, 69,1747 (misprint 
for Twiktwies). Sa n shkia-a-runu. — Gatschet, 
Wyandot MS., B. A. E., 1881 (Huron name, 
meaning ‘people dressing finely, fantastically’, 
i. e., ‘dandy people’). Tawatawas.— Brinton, 
Lenape Legends, 146,1885 (from the Algonquian 
tawa, ‘naked’; henceTwightwees). Tawatawee.— 
Doc. of 1759, ibid., 232. Tawixtawes.—Goldman in 
West. Reserve Hist. Soc., Tract no. 6, 1, July 1871. 
Tawixti.—Giissefeld, map, 1797 (used for Picka- 
willanee village, q. v. According to Harris, Tour, 
137, 1805, the name occurs on Hutchins’ map, 
ca. 1764. It is another form of Twightwee). 
Tawixtwi.—La Tour, map, 1784 (used for Picka- 
willanee village, q.v.). Tewicktowes.—Harrison 
(1814) in Drake, Tecumseh, 159, 1852. Titwa.— 
Doc. (ca. 1700) in Min. of Prov. Coun. of Pa., I, 
411, 1838. Tooweehtoowees.—Edwards (1751) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 147, 1809. Tuih- 
tuihronoons.—Colden (1727), Five Nations, 61,1747 
(Iroquois name). Twechtweys.—Doc. of 1728 in 
Min. of Prov. Coun. of Pa., ill, 312,1840. Tweegh- 
twees.—Albany conf. (1754) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., VI, 873, 1855. Twghtwees.—Domenech, Des¬ 
erts, I, 444, 1860. Twichtwees.—Loskiel (1794) in 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 336,1872. Twich- 
twichs.—Dongan (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
ill, 439, 1853. Twichtwicks.—Livingston (1687), 
ibid., ill,443,1853. Twichtwighs.—Schuyler (1702), 
ibid., iv, 979,1854. Twichwiches.—Bleeker (1701), 
ibid., 918. Twicktwicks.—Albany conf. (1726), 
ibid., v, 791,1855. Twicktwigs.—Doc. of 1688, ibid., 
ill, 565, 1853. Twictwees.—Crepy, map, ca. 1755. 
Twictwicts.—Bellomont (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., IV, 834, 1854. Twight.—Lattr6, map, 1784 
(error for Twightwees; the ‘Miamis’ are also 
given as distinct). Twightees.—Hamilton (1750) 
in N. Y.Doc.Col.Hist.,vi,593,1855. Twighteeys.— 
Johnson (1753), ibid., 779. Twighties.—Johnson 
(1763), ibid., vn, 572, 1856. Twightwees.—Weiser 
(1748) in Rupp, West. Pa.,app., 14, 1846. Twight- 
wicks.—Jamison (1697) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
iv, 294, 1854. Twightwies.—Lahontan (1703) in 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 5, 6, 1848. Twightwighs.— 
Doc. of 1687 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 431 1853. 
Twightwis Roanu.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 27, 1744. 
Twigtees.—Martin, N. C., II, 62, 1829. Twigth- 
twees.—Dwight and Partridge in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., v, 121, 1816. Twig-Twee.—Lindesay 
(1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 706, 1855. 
Twigtwees.—Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West. Pa., 
app., 15, 1846. Twigtwicks.—Cornbury (1708) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., V, 65, 1855. Twigtwies.— 
Lindesay (1749), ibid., vi, 538, 1855. Twigtwig.— 
Cortland (1687), ibid., ill, 434, 1853. Twiswicks,— 
Dongan (1687), ibid., 476. Twitchwees.—Hamilton 
(1749), ibid., vi, 531,1855. Twithuays.—Conf. of 
1793 in Am. State Pap., Ind. AfL, i, 477, 1832. 
Xwxtwiheno 11 ’.—Hewitt, Onondaga MS., B. A. E., 
1888 (Onondaganame). Utamis.—Barcia, Ensayo, 
289, 1723 (misprint from Lahontan). Wa-ya-ta- 
no'-ke.—Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287, 1871. 
Wemiamik.—Squier in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 34, 
1877 (= ‘ Beaver children ’). 

Miami River. A Seminole settlement, 
with 63 inhabitants in 1880, about 10 m. 
n. of the site of Ft Dallas, not far from 
Biscayne bay, on Little Miami r., Dade 


co., Fla.—MacCauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
478, 1887. 

Miantonomo. A noted chief of the Nar- 
raganset, nephew of Canonicus. In 1632 
he visited Boston and was received 
by the governor. He was more than 
once suspected of disloyalty to the Eng¬ 
lish, but managed to clear himself when 
summoned to Boston in 1636. He helped 
the English against the Pequot the next 
year and warred against the Mohegan. In 
1638 he signed the tripartite agreement 
between the English of Connecticut, the 
Narraganset, and the Mohegan. He is said 
to have been impressed by the preaching 
of Roger Williams in 1643. During 
the years 1640-42 he was suspected of 
treachery to the English, but again made 
satisfactory explanations. In 1643 war 
broke out between the Mohegan and the 
Narraganset, and in a battle in which 
the latter wei'e defeated Miantonomo was 
taken prisoner. He was delivered to the 
English at Hartford, was tried at Boston 
in September, 1643, by the Court of 
Commissioners of the United Colonies 
of New England, who, after referring the 
matter to the convocation of the clergy, 
which condemned him, sentenced him 
to death at the hands of Uncas. This 
sentence was barbarously executed by 
Wawequa, the brother of Uncas, in the 
presence of the latter. For this disgrace¬ 
ful proceeding the English authorities 
were to blame, as otherwise Uncas would 
never have taken his prisoner’s life. 
De Forest (Hist. Inds. of Conn., 
198, 1852) takes a rather high view of 
the character of Miantonomo, whom he 
characterizes as “respected and loved by 
everyone who was not fearful of his 
power.” Theological bias against Roger 
Williams and his Indian friends played 
some part in the matter of his treatment 
by the commissioners. He was buried 
where he fell, and the spot, on which a 
monument was erected in 1841, has 
since been known as Sachem’s Plains. 
Miantonomo is praised in Durfee’s poem, 
“What cheer.” Nanantenoo was a son 
of Miantonomo. (a. f. c.) 

Miawkinaiyiks (‘big topknots ’). A di¬ 
vision of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika. 
Big Topknots.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
209, 1892. Mi-aw'-kin-ai-yiks.—Ibid., 225. 

Mica. This durable and showy min¬ 
eral was in very general use by the In¬ 
dian tribes e. of the great plains, the 
translucent variety known as muscovite 
being most highly prized. It was mined 
at many points in the Appalachian high¬ 
land, from Georgia to St Lawrence r. 
(see Mines and Quarries). It occurs also 
in South Dakota, but it is not probable 
that the mound-building tribes obtained 
it from this source. From the Eastern 
highland it passed, by trade or other- 


856 


MIOAC0OPS1BA—MICHIGAMEA 


tB. A. 13. 


wise, to remote parts: to Florida in the 
s. and to the upper Mississippi valley in 
the n. w. The crystals were often of 
large size, measuring 2 ft or more in 
diameter. The sheets into which they 
were readily divided were much prized 
for mirrors, and were also cut into a 
great variety of shapes for personal orna¬ 
ments, and possibly also for ceremonial 
use. Sheets of mica were used also for 
burial with the dead and as sacrificial 
offerings. Squier and Davis give an 
account of the discovery of 14 human 
skeletons that were carefully covered 
with mica plates, estimated at 15 or 20 
bushels, some of the plates being from 
8 to 10 in. long and from 4 to 5 in. wide, 
and all from \ to 1 in. in thickness. At¬ 
water describes the discovery of many 
thick sheets, one of which measured 36 
in. long by 18 in. wide. With a skeleton 
in the Grave Creek mound, near Wheel¬ 
ing, W. Va., 150 disks of sheet mica, meas¬ 
uring from 1£ to 2 in. in diameter and hav¬ 
ing each 1 or 2 perforations, were found. 
From the Turner mounds in Hamilton 
co., Ohio, several ornamental figures of 
sheet mica were obtained; one of them is 
a grotesque human figure, others are 
animal forms, including a serpent (Put¬ 
nam). Mica occurs on many sacrificial 
altars of the mound-builders, who no 
doubt regarded it as of special signifi¬ 
cance. 

Consult Atwater, Antiq. of Ohio, 1820; 
Putnam in Peabody Mus. Reps.; Rau in 
Smithson. Rep. 1872, 1873; Squier and 
Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 1848; Moore- 
head in The Antiquarian, i, 1897. 

(w. H. H.) 

Micacuopsiba. An unidentified Dakota 
division formerly roaming on the upper 
St Peter’s (Minnesota) r., Minn., in 1804. 
Cut bank.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 133, 
1904. Mi ca cu op si ba. —Ibid. 

Michacondibi ( mitcha ‘large’, indibe or 
gindibe ‘head’: ‘big head’ (Baraga), 
possibly referring to the T6tes de Boule). 
An Algonquian (?) tribe or band, probably 
a part of the Cree or of the Maskegon, 
formerly on a river of the same name 
(Albany r.?) entering the s. end of Hud¬ 
son bay from the s. w. Lahontan placed 
them about the headwaters of Ottawa r. 
Machakandibi.—Lahontan, New Voy., I, 231,1703. 
Machandibi.—Lahontan (1703), New Voy., map, 
1735. Machantiby. —La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, 
D6c., VI, 6, 1886. Michacondibis.—Bacqueville de 
laPotherie, Hist. Am., n, 49, 1753. 

Michahai. A Yokuts (Mariposan) tribe 
near Squaw valley, in the Kings r. drain¬ 
age, s. central Cal. 

Michaha.—Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 
34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. Michahai.—A. L. 
Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. 

Michibousa. Mentioned by Tonti 
(French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 82, 1846) in 
connection with and apparently as one of 
the tribes of the Illinois confederacy in 


1681. The name is perhaps an erroneous 
designation for some well-known tribe or 
band. 

Michigamea (Algonquian: ‘greatwater,’ 
from michi 1 great,’ ‘much,’ guma ‘water’. 
Baraga gives the correct form of ‘Michi¬ 
gan’ as Mishigamaw , ‘ the big lake’, while 
Dr Win. Jones says that the Chippewa 
of the n. shore of L. Superior refer to L. 
Michigan by the name Mishawtguma, 
‘big, wide, or expansive waste,’ on ac¬ 
count of the few or no islands). A 
tribe of the Illinois confederacy, first vis¬ 
ited by Marquette when he descended 
the Mississippi in 1673. Their village was 
situated at that time on the w. side of the 
Mississippi and near a lake bearing the 
samenameas the tribe, probably Big lake, 
between the St Francis and Mississippi 
rs., Ark. This tribe was the most south¬ 
erly of the confederacy, and its extreme 
southern situation has led some authors to 
the conclusion that the people were not 
Algonquian, but this is an evident error. 
It must have been shortly previous to the 
time that the first knowledge of the tribes 
of this general region was obtained that a 
group or division of the Illinois confeder¬ 
acy, including the Cahokia, Tamaroa, and 
possibly the Michigamea, pushed south¬ 
ward to escape the attacks of the Sioux and 
the Foxes. It is therefore probable that at 
this period the Michigamea moved on into 
s. Illinois, and thence passed over into s. e. 
Missouri. The intimate relation of the an¬ 
cient remains of these two sections would 
seem to confirm this opinion. About the 
end of the 17th century they were driven 
out by the Quapaw or Chickasaw, crossing 
over into Illinois and joining the Kaskas- 
kia. According to Chauvignerie their 
totem was the crane. He attributed to 
them 250 warriors, which is evidently an 
exaggeration, as he estimated the whole 
Illinois confederacy at only 508 warriors. 
It is probable that the Michigamea were 
only a remnant at the time they joined 
the Kaskaskia. They w T ere never promi¬ 
nent in Indian affairs. In 1803 Gen. 
W. H. Harrison supposed that there was 
but one man of the tribe left alive, but as 
late as 1818 the names of 3 Michigamea 
appear as signers of a treaty with the 
Illinois. (j. m. c. t.) 

Machegamea.—Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., ill, 
465, 1878. Machigama.—French, Hist. Coll. La., 
1 , 82 , 1846. Machigamea.—Joutel (1687), op. cit., 
460. Matchagamia.—Coxe, Carolana, 11, 1741. 
Matsigamea.—Hennepin, New Discov., 169, 1698. 
Medsigamea.—Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c., 
iv, 601, 1880. Meosigamia.—Neill, Minn., 173, 1858. 
Mesigameas.—Proces Verbal (1682) in French, 
Hist. Coll. La., II, 25,1875. Metchagamis.—Lattr6, 
map, 1784. Metchigamea.—Marquette, map (1673) 
in Shea, Miss. Val., 268,1852. Metchis.—Writer in 
Smith, Bouquet’s Exped., 65, 1766. Metehiga- 
mis.—La Tour, map, 1782 (misprint). Metesi- 
gamias.—Le Sueur (ca. 1700) in Shea, Early Voy., 
92, 1861. Metsigameas.—Proces Verbal (1682) in 
French,Hist.Coll.La., II, 21,1875. Michiagamias.— 


kl’LL. SO] 


MTCHIKINIKWA—MICHILIMACKINAC 


857 


Shea, Rel. M. Miss., 36,1861. Michigamea.—Mar¬ 
quette (ca. 1673), Discov., 344,1698. Michigamias.— 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. Michi- 
gamis.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt.6,151,1883. 
Michigania.—Nourse (1820) in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, II, 588, 1852. Michiganians.—Harrison 
(1814) in Drake,Tecumseh, 160,1852. Michigans.— 
Sanford, U. S., clii, 1819. Michigourras.—Martin, 
La., I, 262, 1827. Mitchigamas.—Hutchins (1778) 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 714, 1857. Mitchi- 
gamea.—Marquette (ca. 1673), Discov., 346, 1698. 
Mitchigamias.—Jefferys, Fr. Do ms., pt. 1,165,1761. 

Michikinikwa. See Little Turtle. 

Michilimackinac ( Mlshlnlma * klnung, 

1 place of the big wounded person,’ or 
‘place of the big lame person.’—W. 
J). A name applied at various times to 
Mackinac id. in Mackinac co., Mich.; 
to the village on this island; to the village 
and fort at Pt St Ignace on the opposite 
mainland, and at an early period to a con¬ 
siderable extent of territory in the upper 
part of the lower peninsula of Michigan. 
It is derived from the name of a supposed 
extinct Algonquian tribe, the Mishini- 
maki or Mishinimakinagog. 

According to Indian tradition and the 
Jesuit Relations, the Mishinimaki for¬ 
merly had their headquarters at Mackinac 
id. and occupied all the adjacent territory 
in Michigan. They are said to have been 
at one time numerous and to have had 30 
villages, but in retaliation for an invasion 
of the Mohawk country they were de¬ 
stroyed by the Iroquois. This must have 
occurred previous to the occupancy of the 
country by the Chippewa on their first 
appearance in this region. A few were 
still there in 1671, but in Charlevoix’s 
time (1744) none of them remained. 
When the Chippewa appeared in this 
section they made Michilimackinac id. 
one of their chief centers, and it retained 
its importance for a long period. In 1761 
their village was said to contain 100 war¬ 
riors. In 1827 the Catholic part of the 
inhabitants, to the number of 150, sepa¬ 
rated from the others and formed a new 
village near the old one. When the 
Hurons were driven w. by the Iroquois 
they settled on Mackinac id., where they 
built a village some time after 1650. Soon 
thereafter they removed to the Noquet 
ids. in Green bay, but returned about 
1670 and settled in a new village on the 
adjacent mainland, where the Jesuits had 
just established the mission of St Ignace. 
After this the Hurons settled near the 
mission; the fugitive Ottawa also settled 
in a village on the island where Nouvel 
established the mission of St Francis Bor¬ 
gia among them in 1677, and when the 
Hurons removed to Detroit, about 1702, 
the Ottawa and Chippewa continued to 
live at Michilimackinac. (j. m. c. t. ) 
Machilimachinack.—Watts (1763) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th 8 ., IX, 483, 1871. Machillimakina.—Bou¬ 
quet (1760), ibid., 345. Mackanaw.—Drake, Bk. 
Inds., bk. 5, 134, 1848. Mackelimakanac.—Camp¬ 
bell (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 358, 


1871. Mackilemackinac. —Ibid., 383. Mackinac. — 
Jefferson(1808) inAm. St. Pap.,Ind.Aff.,1,746,1832. 
Mackinaw. —Hall, N. W. States, 131, 1849. Macki- 
nang.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 165, 1878 (Chip¬ 
pewa form, abbreviated). Massillimacinac. — 
Map of 1755 in Howe, Hist. Coll., 35, 1851. Mesh 
e ne mah ke noong. —Jones, Ojebway Inds.,45,1861 
(Chippewa name). Mesilimakinac. —Hennepin, 
New Discov.,map,1698. Michelimakina. —Writerof 
1756 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 482, 1858. Mich- 
ellimakinac. —Campbell (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., IX, 417, 1871. Michihimaquinac. —Ho- 
mann Heirs Map U. S., 1784 (misprint). Michi- 
lemackinah. —Campbell (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., IX, 426, 1871. Michilimackinac. — 
Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 533, 
1856. Michilimacquina. — Doc. of 1691, ibid., IX, 
511, 1855. Michilimakenac. —Albany conf. (1726), 
ibid., V, 791, 1855. Michilimakina. —Vaudreuil 
(1710), ibid., IX, 843, 1855. Michilimakinac. — 
Du Chesneau (1681), ibid., 153. Michilimaki- 
nais.— Jefferys, French Dorns., pt. 1, 19-20,1761 
(tribe). Michilimakinong.— Marquette (ca. 1673) 
in Kelton, Annals Ft Mackinac, 121, 1884. Mich- 
ilimaquina. —Denonville (1686) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., Ill, 461, 1853. Michilimicanack. —Bradstreet 
(ca. 1765), ibid., vil, 690, 1856. Michilimickinac. — 
Peters (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,4th s., ix,319, 
1871. Michillemackinack. —Amherst (1760), ibid., 
348. Michillemakinack. —Malartic (1758) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., X, 853, 1858. Michillimacinac. — 
Johnstown conf. (1774), ibid., vm, 506, 1857. 
Michillimackinacks. —Lords of Trade (1721), ibid., 
v, 622, 1855 (used as synonymous with Ottawas). 
Michillimakenac. —Bouquet (1761) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 4th s., IX, 392, 1871. Michillimakinak. — 
Cadillac (1703) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 407, 
1885. Michillimaquina. —Denonville (1687) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 336, 1855. Michillmiacki- 
nock.— Domenech, Deserts, II, 452, 1860. Michi 
Mackina.— Brown, West. Gaz., 161, 1817 (Indian 
form). Michimmakina. —M’Lean, Hudson Bay, I, 
51, 1849. Michinimackinac. —Henry, Travels, 107, 
1809(Chippewaform). Michlimakinak.— Montreal 
conf. (1700) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 709, 1855. 
Micilimaquinay. —Joutel (ca. 1690) in Kelton, 
Annals Ft Mackinac, 121, 1884. Mlcinimaki- 
nunk. —Wm. Jones, inf’n., 1905 (proper form). 
Mikinac. —La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, D6c., vi, 
6, 1886 (same?; mentioned with Ojibwas, Ottawa 
Sinagos, etc., as then at Shaugawaumikong on L. 
Superior). Miscelemackena. —Croghan (1764) in 
N. Y. DOC. Col. Hist., VII, 603, 1856. Misclimaki- 
nack. —Colden (1727), ibid., ill, 489, note, 1863. 
Mishinimaki. —Kelton, Annals Ft Mackinac, 9, 10, 
1884 (tribe). Mishinimakina. —Ibid., 151 (correct 
Indian name). Mishinimakinago. —Baraga,Otchip- 
we-Eng. Diet., 248,1880 (Chippewa name of the 
mythic(?) tribe, whence comes Michilimackinac; 
the plural takes*?). Mishini-makinak. —Kelton, An¬ 
nals FtMackinac, 135,1884. Mishinimakinang. —Ba¬ 
raga, Eng.-Otch.Diet., 165,1878 (Chippewaform). 
Mishinimakinank. —Gatsehet, Ojibwa MS., B.A.E. 
1882. Misilimakenak. —Burnet (1723) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., V, 684, 1855. Misillimakinac. — 
Vaudreuil conf. (1703), ibid., ix, 751,1855. Mis- 
limakinac.— Memoir of 1687, ibid., 319. Missele- 
machinack. —Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., IX, 377, 1871. Misselemakinach. — 
Ibid. Misselemaknach. —Ibid.,372. Missilikinac. — 
Hennepin, New Discov., 308, 1698. Missilimachi- 
nac,— Hennepin (1683) in Harris, Voy. and Trav., 
II, 918,1705. Missilimackinak. —De la Barre (1687) 
in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 418,1885. Missilimak- 
enak.— Colden (ca. 1723) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
V, 687, 1855. Missilimakinac. —Jes. Rel. 1671, 37, 
1858. Missilimakinak. —Cadillac (1694) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 587, 1855. Missilimaquina.— 
Denonville (1687), ibid., m, 466, 1853. Missilina- 
okinak.— Hennepin, New Discov., 316, 1698. Mis- 
silinianac. —Mt Johnson conf. (1755) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., VI, 975, 1855. Missillimackinac.— John¬ 
son (1763), ibid., vil, 573, 1856. Missillimakina.— 
Denonville (1686), ibid., ix, 287, 1855. Missilmak- 
ina.— Denonville (1687), ibid., 325. Mitchinimack- 
enucks. —Lindsey (1749), ibid., vi, 538, 1855 (here 
intended for the Ottawa). Monsiemakenack.— 
Albany conf. (1723),ibid., V, 693,1855. St.Francis 


858 


MICHIPICOTEN—MICMAC 


Lb. a. e. 


Borgia.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 370,1855 (Ottawa mis¬ 
sion on Mackinaw id. in 1677). Teijaondoraghi.— 
Albany conf. (1726) in N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist., v, 
791, 1855 (Iroquois name). 

Michipicoten ( MishWigwadunk , ‘place 
of bold promontories,’ or ‘region of big 
places.’—W. J.). The designation of 
the Algonquian Indians living on Michi¬ 
picoten r., Ontario, n. of L. Superior, 
and extending into Ruperts Land. In 
Canada they are officially classed as 
“Michipicoten and Big Heads,” consist¬ 
ing of two bands belonging to different 
tribes. Thesmaller band consists of Chip¬ 
pewa and are settled on a reservation 
known as Gros Cap, on the w. side of the 
river, near its mouth; the other band be¬ 
longs to the Maskegon and resides mainly 
near the Hudson’s Bay Co.’s post on 
Brunswick lake, on the n. side of the 
dividing ridge. The two bands together 
numbered 283 in 1884, and 358 in 1906. 
See Tetes de Boule. (j. m. ) 

Michirache. An Iowa phratry. Its 
gentes are Shuntanthka, Shuntanthewe, 
Shuntankhoche, and Manyikakhthi. 
Me-je'-ra-ja.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156,1877. Mi»tci- 
ratce.—Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1879. 
Mi-tci'-ra-tce.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.E., 238, 
1897. Wolf.—Morgan, op. cit. 

Michiyu ( Mitc-hi-yu ). A former Chu- 
mashan village between Pt Conception 
and Santa Barbara, Cal., at the place now 
called San Onofre.—Henshaw, Buenaven¬ 
tura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Michopdo. A former Maidu village near 
Chico, at the edge of the foothills, about 
5 m. s. of the junction of Little and Big 
Butte crs., in Butte co.,Cal.; pop. 90 in 
1850. (r. b. d. ) 

Ma-chuck-nas.—Johnston (1850) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 45, 1853. Ma-chuc-na.— 
Day (1850), ibid., 39. Michoapdos.—Powers in 
Overland Mo., xii,420, 1874. Mich-op'-do.—Powers 
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 282, 1877. Michopdo.— 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, pi. 
xxxviii, 1905. Mitshopda.—Curtin, MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1885. Wachuknas.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, vi, 710,1857. 

Mickkesawbee. A former Potawatomi 
village at the site of the present Cold- 
water, Mich., on a reservation sold in 1827. 
Mickesawbe.—Treaty of 1827 in U. S. Ind. Treat., 
675,1873. Mick-ke-saw-be.—Chicago treaty (1821), 
ibid., 152. 

Micksucksealton. Said by Lewis and 
Clark to be a tribe of the Tushepaw (q.v.) 
living on Clarke r. above the falls, and 
numbering 300, in 25 lodges, in 1805. 

Micksicksealtom.—Clark and Voorhis (18051 in 
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vr, 114, 1905. Mick- 
suck-seal-tom.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, map, 
1814. Micksucksealton.—Ibid., II, 475, 1814. Mik- 
suksealton.—Drake, Bk. Inds., ix, 1848. 

Micmac ( Migmcik, ‘ allies ’; Nigmak, 1 our 
allies.’—Hewitt). The French called 
them Souriquois. An important Algon¬ 
quian tribe that occupied Nova Scotia, 
Cape Breton and Prince Edward ids., the 
n. part of New Brunswick, and probably 
points in s. and w. Newfoundland. 
While their neighbors the Abnaki have 
close linguistic relations with the Algon¬ 


quian tribes of thegreat lakes, the Micmac 
seem to have almost as distant a relation 
to the group as the Algonquians of the 
plains (W. Jones). If Schoolcraft’s sup¬ 
position be correct, the Micmac must 
have been among the first Indians of the 
n. e. coast encountered by Europeans, as 
he thinks they were visited by Sebastian 
Cabot in 1497, and that the 3 natives he 
took to England were of this tribe. 
Kohl believes that those captured by 
Cortereal in 1501 and taken to Europe 
were Micmac. Most of the early voy¬ 
agers to this region speak of the great 
numbers of Indians on the n. coast of 
Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, and 
of their fierce and warlike character. 
They early became friends of the French, 
a friendship which was lasting and which 
the English—after the treaty of Utrecht 
in 1713, by which Acadia was ceded to 
them—found impossible to have trans¬ 
ferred to themselves for nearly half a 
century. Their hostility to the English 
prevented for a long time any serious 
attempts at establishing British settle¬ 
ments on the n. coasts of Nova Scotia and 
New Brunswick, for although a treaty of 
peace was concluded with them in 1760, 
it was not until 1779 that disputes and 
difficulties with the Micmac ceased. In 
the early wars on the New England fron¬ 
tier the Cape Sable Micmac were especially 
noted. 

The missionary Biard, who, in his Rela¬ 
tion of 1616, gives a somewhat full account 
of the habits and characteristics of the 
Micmac and adjacent tribes, speaks in 
perhaps rather too favorable terms of 
them. He says: “You could not dis¬ 
tinguish the young men from the girls, 
except in their way of wearing their belts. 
For the women are girdled both above 
and below the stomach and are less nude 
than the men. . . . Their clothes are 

trimmed with leather lace, which the 
women curry on the side that is not hairy. 
They often curry both sides of elk skin, 
like our buff skin, then variegate it very 
prettily with paint put on in a lace pattern, 
and make gowns of it; from the same 
leather they make their shoes and strings. 
The men do not wear trousers . . . 

they wear only a cloth to cover their naked¬ 
ness.” Their dwellings were usually the 
ordinary conical wigwams covered with 
bark, skins, or matting. Biard says that 
‘ ‘ in summer the shape of their houses is 
changed; for they are broad and long 
that they may have more air.” There 
is an evident attempt to show these 
summer bowers in the map of Jacomo di 
Gastaldi, made about 1550, given in 
vol. hi of some of the editions of Ramusio. 
Their government was similar to that of 
the New England Indians; polygamy was 
not common, though practised to some 


BULL. 30] 


MICOMA—MIGICHIHILINIOU 


859 


extent by the chiefs; they were expert 
canoemen, and drew much of their sub¬ 
sistence from the waters. Cultivation of 
the soil was very limited, if practised at 
all by them, when first encountered by 
the whites. Biard says they did not till 
the soil in his day. 

According to Rand (Micmac First Read¬ 
ing Book, 1875), they divided their coun¬ 
try, which they called Megumage, into 7 
districts, the head-chief living in the 
Cape Breton district. The other six were 
Pictou, Memramcook, Restigouche, Es- 
kegawaage, Shubenacadie, and Annapo¬ 
lis. The first three of these formed a 
group known as Siguniktawak; the other 
three another group known as Kes- 
poogwit. In 1760theMicmacbandsorvil¬ 
lages were given as Le Have, Miramichi, 
Tabogimkik, Pohomoosh, Gediak (She- 
diac), Pictou, Kashpugowitk (Kespoog- 
wit), Chignecto, Isle of St Johns, 
Nalkitgoniash, Cape Breton, Minas, Chi- 
gabennakadik (Shubenacadie), Keshpu- 
gowitk (Kespoogwit, duplicated), and 
Rishebouctou (Richibucto). The Gas- 
pesians are a band of Micmac differing 
somewhat in dialect from the rest of the 
tribe. 

In 1611 Biard estimated the Micmac at 
3,000 to 3, 500. In 1760 they were re¬ 
ported at nearly 3,000, but had been lately 
much wasted by sickness. In 1766 they 
were again estimated at 3,500; in 1880 
they were officially reported at 3,892, and 
in 1884 at 4,037. Of these, 2,197 were in 
Nova Scotia, 933 in New Brunswick, 615 
in Quebec, and 292 on Prince Edward id. 
In 1904, according to the Report of Cana¬ 
dian Indian Affairs, they numbered 3,861, 
of whom 579 were in Quebec province, 992 
in New Brunswick, 1,998 in Nova Scotia, 
and 292 on Prince Edward id. The num¬ 
ber in Newfoundland is not known. 

The Micmac villages are as follows: 
Antigonishe (?), Beaubassin (mission), 
Boat Harbor, Chignecto, Eskusone, Indian 
Village, Isle of St Johns, Kespoogwit, 
Kigicapigiak, Le Have, Maria, Minas, 
Miramichi, Nalkitgoniash, Nipigiguit, 
Pictou, Pohomoosh, Restigouche, Richi¬ 
bucto, Rocky Point, Shediac, Shubenac¬ 
adie, and Tabogimkik. (j. m. c. t. ) 
Acadcan. —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lend., 59, 
1856 (misprint). Acadian Indians. —Jefferys, 
French Dorns., pt. 1, 66, 1761 (Dawson in Hind, 
Lab. Penin., n, 44, 1863, says Acadia is a Micmac 
word used in composition to denote the local 
abundance of objects referred to). Bark Indians. — 
Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 156, 1824. Kincke- 
moeks. —Rasle (1724) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
2d s., viii, 248, 1819 (misreading of MS. or mis¬ 
print). Matu-es'-wi skitchi-nu-uk. —Chamberlain, 
Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Malecite name, mean¬ 
ing ‘porcupine Indians’; so called on account of 
their using porcupine quills in ornamentation). 
Mechimacks. —Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816. 
Megum. —Rand, Micmac First Reading Book, 81, 
1875(a Micmacsocallshimself). Megumawaach,— 
Rand, Eng.-Micmac Diet., 169,1888. Michmacs.— 
Trader in Smith, Bouquet’s Exped., 69, 1766. 
Mickemac.— Lahontan (1703) quoted by Richard¬ 


son, Arctic Exped., II, 38, 1851. Mickmacks.— 
Longueuil (1726) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 956, 
1855. Mickmaks.—Quotation in Drake, Bk. Inds., 
bk. 3, 137,1848. Micmacks.—Longueuil (1726) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 956, 1855. Micmaks.— 
Begon (1725), ibid., 943. MicMacs.—Potter in Me. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., IV, 192, 1856. Micmacs.—Doc. of 
1696 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 643, 1855. Miggaa- 
macks.—Rouillard, Noms G6ographiques,63,1906. 
Mikemak.—Lahontan, New Voy., 1,223,1703 (given 
also by Gatschet, Penobscot MS., 1887, as their 
Penobscot name, ‘Mikemak’; singular, Mikgma). 
Mikmacs.—Vaudreuil (1757) inN. Y. Doc.Col. Hist., 
x, 658,1858. Mikmak.—Cocquard (1757), ibid.,529. 
Mukmacks.—Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., I, 139, 1824. 
Shannok.—Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 409, 
1885. Shanung.—Gatschet, quoting Latham, ibid. 
Shawnuk.—Gatschet, ibid. Shonack.—Lloyd, 
quoting Payton, in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, 29, 
1875 (‘bad indians’: Beothuk name). Soricoi.— 
DuCreux map of Canada (1660) cited by Vetro- 
mile, Abnakis, 21,1866(Latin form). Sorriquois.— 
Vetromile in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 210, 1859. 
Souricois.—Champlain (1603), (Euvres, n, 58, 1870. 
Sourikois.—Jes. Rel. 1652, 26, 1858. Sourikwosi- 
orum.—De Laet (1633) quoted by Tanner, Narr., 
329,1830. Souriquois.—Jes. Rel. 1611,8,1858. Souri- 
quosii.—De Laet (1633) quoted by Barton, New 
Views, xxxv, 1798. Sourriquois.—Vetromile in 
Me. Hist. Soc.Coll.,Vi, 208,1859. Suriquois.—Lords 
of Trade (1721) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 592,1855. 

Micoma. A Chumashan village between 
Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal., in 1542.— 
Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in Smith, Colec. 
Doc. Fla., 183, 1857. 

Miconope. See Mikanopy. 

Middle Creeks. A term used by some 
English writers to designate the Creeks 
on lower Tallapoosa r., Ala., Spanish and 
French writers sometimes using the name 
Talipuce, or Talepuse. ( a. s. g. ) 

Middle-settlement Indians. The Chero¬ 
kee formerly living in upper Georgia and 
w. North Carolina, as distinguished from 
those in South Carolina and Tennessee.— 
Imlay, W. Ter., 363, 1797. 

Middle Town. A former Seneca village, 
3 m. above the site of Chemung, N. Y., 
destroyed by Sullivan in 1779.—Jones 
(1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., viii, 785, 
1857. 

Miduuski. An Ahtena village on the e. 
bank of Copper r., Alaska, below the 
mouth of Tonsina cr. 

Miemissouks. Given as the name of a 
tribe somewhere between Bellingham bay 
and Fraser r., in Washington or British 
Columbia. Probably Salishan, otherwise 
unidentifiable. 

Mie-mis-souks.—Starling in Ind. AfT. Rep., 170, 
1852. Misonk.—Ibid., 171. 

Mienikashika (‘ those who became hu¬ 
man beings by means of the sun’). A 
Quapaw gens. 

Mi e'nikaci'iia.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.E., 229, 
1897. Sun gens.—Ibid. 

Migichihiliniou (Migizhv^lntwug, ‘peo¬ 
ple of the Eagle clan’; or perhaps MlgM- 
vtiritrttwug, ‘people with wampum’, or 
‘people with the cowrie shells.’—W. 
J.). Given by Dobbs as the name of a 
band of (Algonquian?) Indians residing 
on the “Lake of Eagles,” between L. 
Winnipeg and Lake of the Woods—prob¬ 
ably Eagle lake, some distance n. e. of 
Lake of the Woods. He thinks they were 


860 


MIGUIHUI—MIKASUKI 


tB. A. E. 


related to the Assiniboin, “because of the 
great affinity of their language. ’ ’ As this 
statement is in contradiction to his sub¬ 
sequent assertion, known from other evi¬ 
dence to be correct, that the Assiniboin 
dwelt w. of L. Winnipeg, it may be in¬ 
ferred that these “Eagle-men” belong to 
the Chippewa, who have among their 
gentes one named Omegeeze , “Bald 
Eagle.” (j. m. c. t. ) 

Eagle ey’d Indians.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 24, 1744. 
Eagle Eyed Indians.—Ibid., map. Migichihilini- 
ous.—Ibid., 24. 

Miguihui. A Chumashan village, one 
of the two popularly known as Dos Pue¬ 
blos, in Santa Barbara co., Cal.; also a 
village in Ventura co. 

Migiu.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1884. Miguigui.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
July 24,1868 (Ventura co). Miguihui.—Ibid., Apr. 
24, 1863. 

Mihtukmechakick. A name, signifying 
‘tree eaters,’ which, according to Roger 
Williams’ Key (Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., hi, 209, 1794), referred to “a peo¬ 
ple so called (living between three or 
four hundred m. w. into the land) from 
their eating mih-tuck-quash, ‘trees.’ They 
are men-eaters; they set no corn, but live 
on the bark of chestnut and walnut and 
other fine trees. They dry and eat this 
bark with the fat of beasts and sometimes 
of men. This people are the terrour of 
the neighboring natives. ’ ’ The name Ad¬ 
irondack (q. v.), applied by the Iroquois 
to certain Algonquian tribes of Canada, 
signifies ‘they eat trees’, (j. m. c. t. ) 

Miitsr. The Humming-bird clan of 
San Felipe pueblo, N. Mex., of which there 
were only one or two survivors in 1895. 
Miitsr-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351,1896 
(Mno=‘ people’). 

Mikakhenikashika (‘ those who made or 
adopted the stars as their mark or means 
of identity as a people. ’—La Flesc.he). A 
Quapaw gens. 

Mika'q'e ni'kaci'^a.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.E., 
229,1897. Star gens.—Ibid. 

Mikanopy (‘ head chief ’). A Seminole 
chief. On May 9, 1832, a treaty was 
signed purporting to cede the country of 
the Seminole to the United States in ex¬ 
change for lands w. of the Mississippi. 
The Seminole had already relinquished 
their desirable lands near the coast and 
retired to the pine barrens and swamps 
of the interior. Mikanopy, the heredi¬ 
tary chief, who possessed large herds of 
cattle and horses and a hundred negro 
slaves, stood by young Osceola and the 
majority of the tribe in the determination 
to remain. Neither of them signed the 
agreement to emigrate given on behalf of 
the tribe by certain pretended chiefs on 
Apr. 23, 1835. In the summer of that 
year the Indians made preparations to 
resist if the Government attempted to 
remove them. When the agent notified 
them on Dec. 1 to deliver their horses 


and cattle and assemble for the long 
journey they sent their women and 
children into the interior, while the 
warriors were seen going about in armed 
parties. The white people had con¬ 
temned the Seminole as a degenerate 
tribe, enervated through long contact 
with the whites. Although Mikanopy, 
w r ho was advanced in years, was the 
direct successor of King Payne, the chief 
who united the tribe, the agent said he 
would no longer recognize him as a chief 
when he absented himself from the 
council where the treaty was signed. 
When the w 7 hites saw that the Seminole 
intended to fight, they abandoned their 
plantations on the border, which the 
Indians sacked and burned. Troops w r ere 



MIKANOPY. (MCKENNEY AND HALL ) 


then ordered to the Seminole country, 
and a seven-years’ war began. In the 
massacre of Dade’s command, Dec. 28, 
1836, it is said that Mikanopy shot the 
commander with his own hand. He took 
no further active part in the hostilities. 
He was short and gross in person, indo¬ 
lent, and self-indulgent in his habits, 
having none of the qualities of a leader.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ii, 271, 
1858. 

Mikasi (‘coyote and wolf people’). A . 
subgens of the Mandhinkagaghe gens of 
the Omaha. 

Mikasi. —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228,1897. 

Mikasuki. A former Seminole town in 
Leon co., Fla., on the w. shore of Micco- 
sukee lake, on or near the site of the 
present Miccosukee. The name has been 




BULL. 30] 


MIKAUNIKASHINGA-MILITAKY SOCIETIES 


861 


applied also to the inhabitants as a divi¬ 
sion of the Seminole. They spoke the 
Hitchiti dialect, and, as appears from the 
title of B. Smith’s vocabulary of their 
language, were partly or wholly emigrants 
from the Sawokli towns on lower Chatta¬ 
hoochee r., Ala. The former town ap¬ 
pears to have been one of the ‘red’ or 
‘ bloody ’ towns, for at the beginning of 
the Seminole troubles of 1817 its inhab¬ 
itants stood at the head of the hostile 
element and figured conspicuously as 
“Red Sticks,” or “Batons Rouges,” hav¬ 
ing painted high poles, the color denoting 
war and blood. At this time they had 
300 houses, which were burned by Gen. 
Jackson. There were then several vil¬ 
lages near the lake, known also as Mika- 
suki towns, which were occupied almost 
wholly by negroes. In the Seminole war 
of 1835-42 the people of this town became 
noted for their courage, dash, and au¬ 
dacity. (a. s. g. c. t. ) 

Baton Rouge.—Drake, Abor. Itac-e.s of N. Am., bk. 
4, 404, 1880. Mackasookos.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1797), 
69, 1837. Mecosukee.—Hitchcock (1836) in Drake, 
Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 93, 1848. Mekasousky.—P6niere 
in Morse, Iiep. toSec. War,311,1822. Micasukee.— 
Knox (1791) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 127, 
1832. Micasukeys.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 
1822. Micasukies.—Jesup (1837) in H. R. Doc. 78, 
25th Cong., 2d sess., 81, 1838. Micasukys.—Galt 
(1837) in H. R. Doc. 78, 25th Cong, 2d sess., 104, 
1838. Miccasooky.—Hawkins (1813) in Am. State 
Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 852, 1832. Miccosaukie.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II, 335, 1852. Mic-co 
sooc-e.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 25, 1848. Micka- 
sauky.—Drake, Bk. Inds, bk. 4, 125, 1848. Micka 
Sukees.—Duval (1849) in Senate Ex. Doc. 49, 31st 
Cong., 1st sess., 144, 1850. Mickasukians.—Belton 
(1836) in Drake, Bk. Ind., bk. 4,77,1848. Mikasau- 
kies.—Ibid., ix. Mikasuki.—Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., I, 76, 1884. Mikasuky.—Drake, Ind. Chron., 
200,1836. Mikkesoeke.—ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 
462, 1885 (Mikasaukies, or). Red-stick.—l’6niere 
in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822. 

Mikaunikashinga (‘ raccoon people ’). A 
subgens of the Ibache gens of the Kansa. 
Coon.—Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A.E., 25, 1877. 
Me-ka'.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156,1877. Mika nika- 
shing-ga.—Stubbs, op. cit. Mika qla jinga.— 
Dorseyin 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231,1897 (‘ small lean 
raccoon’). Mika unikaci n ga.—Ibid. Raccoon.— 
Morgan, op. cit. 

Mikechuse. A former hostile tribe liv¬ 
ing n. and e. of San Joaquin r.,Cal.,among 
the foothills of the Sierra Nevada on the 
headwaters of Tuolumne, Merced, and 
Mariposa rs. Probably Moquelumnan. 
See Barbour, et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 61, 1853. 

Mikinakwadshiwininiwak (Mi kindki- 
wadshlwininiwug, ‘ people of the Turtle 
mtn.’—W. J.). A Chippewa band living 
in the Turtle mtn. region, North Dakota, 
adjoining the Canadian line. In 1905 
they were under the jurisdiction of the 
Fort Totten School, and numbered 211 
full-bloods and 1,996 mixed-bloods. 

Mi'kinakiwadciwininiwag.—Wm. Jones,inf’n, 1906 
(correct form). Mikinakwadshi-wininiwak.—Gat¬ 
schet, Ojibwa MS.. B. A. E., 1882. Montagnese.— 
De Smet, Missions, 109, 1844. Turtle Mountain 
Chippewa.—Common name. 


Mikissioua (MZgesi'wisowa, ‘he goes by 
the name of the bald eagle.’—W. J.). A 
gens of both the Sauk and the Foxes, q. v. 
Cf. Pamissouk. 

Megesiwisow a .—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906 (correct 
form). Miiiissioua.—Jes. Rel. 1672-73, Lvm, 40, 
1899. Mikissoua.—Lapham, Inds. Wis., 15, 1870. 

Miko. See Mingo. 

Mikonoh (Mtkinak, ‘snapping turtle’). 
A gens of the Chippewa, q. v. 

Mi'kina'k.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Mik-o-noh'.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166,1877. 

Mikonotunne (‘ people among the white- 
clover roots ’). A former Tututni village 
on the n. side of Rogue r., Oreg., 14 m. 
from its mouth. Parrish (Ind. Aff. Rep. 

1854, 496, 1855) stated that the village 
was about 7 m. above the Tututni and 
that the inhabitants claimed about 12 m. 
of Rogue r., extending as far as the terri¬ 
tory of the Chastacosta. In 1854 they 
were connected with Pt Orford agency 
and numbered 124; in 1884 J. O. Dorsey 
found the survivors on Siletz res., Oreg., 
numbering 41 persons. 

Macanoota.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 505, 1865. Maca- 
nootna.—Newcomb, ibid., 162, 1861. Macanooto- 
onys.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. 
Macanotens.—Palmer in Ind Aff. Rep. 1856, 219, 
1857. Mac-en-noot-e-ways.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 470, 
1865. Mac-en-oot-en-ays.—Victor in Overland 
Monthly, vil, 347, 1871. Mac-en-o-tin.—Kautz, 
MS. Toutouten census, B. A. E., 1855. Mackan- 
ootenay’s Town.—Harper’s Mag., xm, 525, 1856. 
Mackanotin.—Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 496, 

1855. Mack-en-oot-en-ay.—Huntington in Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1867, 62, 1868. Mac-not-na.—Dorsey, Siletz 
Agency MS. census roll, 1884. Mac-o-no-tin.— 
Kautz, MS. Toutouten census, B. A. E., 1855. 
Mak-in-o-ten.—Gibbs, MS., B. A. E. Maknooten- 
nay.—Everette, Tutu MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883. 
Mak-nu'- tene'.—Ibid. (= ‘ people by the land along 
the river’). Maquelnoteer.*—Taylor in Cal. Farm¬ 
er, June 8, 1860. Maquelnoten.—Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, VI, 702,1857. Mec-a-no-to-ny.—Abbott, 
MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 1858. Me-ka-ne- 
ten.—Schumacher in Bull. U. S. Geog. and Geol. 
Surv., ill, 31, 1877. Mi'-ko-no' qunne'.—Dorsey in 
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 233,1890 (Tututni name). 
Mi'-kwun-nu'qunne'.—Ibid. (Naltunetunne name). 

Mikulitsh ( Mi-ku-htc / ). A former vil¬ 
lage of the Kuitsh at the mouth of Win¬ 
chester bay, Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. 
Folk-lore, iii, 231, 1890. 

Milakitekwa. Classed by Gibbs as a 
band of Okinagan, though more nearly 
connected with the Colville, formerly re¬ 
siding on the w. fork of Okinakane r., 
Wash. 

Mil-a-ket-kun.—Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 445,1854. 
Milakitekwa.—Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 412, 
1855. 

Milijaes. A former tribe of n. e. Mexico 
or s. Texas, probably Coahuiltecan, gath¬ 
ered into the mission of San Bernardo de 
la Candela.—Orozco y Berra, Geog., 302, 
1864. 

Military Societies. Although the vari¬ 
ous tribes were in a state of chronic war¬ 
fare one with another, little is known of 
their system of military' organization, 
with the exception, perhaps, of those of 
the Plains and the Pueblo regions. There 
is abundant evidence, however, that the 
military code was as carefully developed 


862 


MILITARY SOCIETIES 


[b. a. h. 


as the social system among most of the 
tribes n. of Mexico. The exceptions 
were the Eskimo and the thinly scattered 
bands of the extreme n., the California 
tribes, and the various bands w. of the 
Rocky mts. commonly grouped as Paiute. 
East of the Mississippi, where the clan 
system was dominant, the chief mili¬ 
tary functions of leadership, declaration, 
and perhaps conclusion of war, seem to 
have been hereditary in certain clans, as 
the Bear clan of the Mohawk and Chip¬ 
pewa, and the Wolf or Munsee division 
of the Delawares. It is probable that if 
their history were known it would be 
found that most of the distinguished 
Indian leaders in the colonial and other 
early Indian wars were actually the 
chiefs of the war clans or military socie¬ 
ties of their respective tribes. If we can 
trust the Huguenot narratives, the ancien t 
tribes of n. Florida and the adjacent re¬ 
gion had a military system and marching 
order almost as exact as that of a modern 
civilized nation, the various grades of 
rank being distinguished by specific titles. 
Something similar seems to have pre¬ 
vailed among the Creeks, where, besides 
war and peace clans, there were war and 
peace towns, the war or “red” towns 
being the assembly points for all war 
ceremonies, including the war dance, 
scalp dance, and torture of prisoners. 
The “Red Stick” band of the Seminole, 
noted in the Florida wars as the most 
hostile portion of the tribe, seem to have 
constituted in themselves a war society. 
Among the confederated Sauk and Foxes, 
according to McKenney and Hall, nearly 
all the men of the two tribes were organ¬ 
ized into two war societies which con¬ 
tested against each other in all races or 
friendly athletic games and were distin¬ 
guished by different cut of hair, costume, 
and dances. With the more peaceful 
and sedentary Pueblo tribes, as the Zuni 
and Hopi, military matters were regu¬ 
lated by a priesthood, as the “Priesthood 
of the Bow” of the Zuni, which formed 
a close corporation with initiation rites 
and secret ceremonies. 

Throughout the plains from n. to s. 
there existed a military organization so 
similar among the various tribes as to 
suggest a common origin, although with 
patriotic pride each tribe claimed it as its 
own. Maximilian was inclined to ascribe 
its origin to the Crows, perhaps on the 
ground of their well-known ceremonial 
temperament, but it is probably much 
older than their traditional separation 
from the Hidatsa. In each tribe the 
organization consisted of from 4 to 12 
societies of varying rank and prominence, 
ranging from boys or untried warriors up 
to old men who had earned retirement 
by long years of service on the warpath 


and thenceforth confined themselves to 
the supervision of the tribal ceremonies. 
The name of each society had reference 
to some mystic animal protector or to 
some costume, duty, or peculiarity con¬ 
nected with the membership. Thus, 
among the Kiowa there were 6 warrior 
societies, known respectively as Rabbits, 
Young Mountain Sheep, Horse Caps, 
Black Legs, Skunkberry People (alias 
Crazy Horses), and Chief Dogs. The 
Rabbit society consisted of boys of about 
10 to 12 years of age, who were trained in 
their future duties by certain old men, and 
who had a dance in which the step was 
intended to imitate the jumping motion 
of a rabbit. The next four societies 
named were all of about equal rank, 
varying only according to the merit or 
reputation of the officers at any particu¬ 
lar time; but the K'oitsenko or * Chief 
Dogs’ were limited to 10 picked and 
tried warriors of surpassing courage, each 
of whom, at his investiture with the 
sacred sash of the order, took a solemn 
obligation never, while wearing it, to 
turn his face from the enemy in battle 
except at the urgent appeal of the whole 
war party. It was the duty of the leader, 
who wore a black sash passing around 
his neck and hanging dowrn to the ground, 
to dismount and anchor himself in the 
front of the charge by driving his lance 
through the end of the sash into the 
earth, there to exhort the warriors with¬ 
out moving from his station unless, 
should the battle be lost, they released 
him by pulling out the lance". Should 
they forget or be prevented in the hurry 
of flight, he must die at his post. In 
consequence of the great danger thus 
involved, the K'oitsen scarf was worn 
only when it was the deliberate intention 
to fight a pitched and decisive battle. 

Each society had its own dance, songs, 
ceremonial costume, and insignia, besides 
special tabus and obligations. The cere¬ 
monial dance of one society in each tribe 
was usually characterized by some species 
of clown play, most frequently taking the 
form of speech and action the reverse of 
what the spectators were expecting. The 
organization among the Arapaho, Chey¬ 
enne, Sioux, and other tribes was essen¬ 
tially the same as among the Kiowa. At 
all tribal assemblies, ceremonial hunts, 
and on great war expeditions, the various 
societies took charge of the routine details 
and acted both as performers and as 
police. Among the Cheyenne the Ho- 
tdmitaneo, or Dog Men society (“Dog 
Soldiers”), acquired such prominence in 
the frontier wars by virtue of superior 
number and the bravery of their leader¬ 
ship that the name has frequently been 
used by writers to designate the w r hole 
organization. 


BULL. 30] 


MILKWANEN 


MIMBRENOS 


863 


Consult Clark, Ind. Sign Lang., article 
“ Soldier” and tribal articles, 1885; Cush¬ 
ing in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 1883; De Bry, 
Brev. Narr., 1591; G. A. Dorsey in Field 
Columb. Mus. Pub., Anthrop. ser., ix, 
no. 1, 1905; J. O. Dorsey in Am. Nat., 
xix, no. 7, 1885; Gatschet, Creek Migr. 
Leg., i, ii, 1884-88; Grinnell, Blackfoot 
Lodge Tales, 1892; Maximilian, Travels, 
1843; Mooney (1) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 
1896; (2) in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 1898. 

(j. M.) 

Milkwanen. A Luiseno village formerly 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rev 
mission, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860. 

Milky Wash ruin. A prehistoric pueblo 
ruin extending f of a mile along the edge 
of Milky hollow, about 9 m. e. of the 
Petrified Forest, Apache co., Ariz. Much 
of the ruin has disappeared over the bluff. 
The houses were small and rudely con¬ 
structed; the pottery is coarse and undec¬ 
orated, and red, gray, and black in color; 
stone implements show excellent work¬ 
manship. A feature of the ruin is its 
stove-like fire altars. See Hough in Rep. 
Nat. Mus. 1901, 319-20, 1903. 

Milky Hollow Ruin.—Hough, ibid., pi. 53. 

Milluch. The Chehalis name of a vil¬ 
lage on the s. side of Grays harbor, 
Wash.—Gibbs, MS. no. 248, B. A. E. 

Milly. The handsome young daughter 
of Hillis Hadjo (q. v.), a Seminole chief. 
When, in Dec. 1817, a party of Seminole 
captured an American named McKrim- 
mon and carried him to Mikasuki, Hillis 
Hadjo, who resided in that town, ordered 
him to be burnt to death. The stake was 
set, McKrimmon with his head shaved 
was bound to it, and wood was piled about 
him. When the Indians finished their 
dance and were about to kindle the fire, 
Milly rushed to her father and upon her 
knees begged that he would spare the 
prisoner’s life; but it was not until she 
evinced a determination to perish with 
him that her plea was granted. McKrim¬ 
mon was subsequently sold to the Span¬ 
iards and thus obtained his liberty. After 
Hillis Hadjo’s death, Milly, who with her 
father’s family was captured by American 
troops, received an offer of marriage from 
McKrimmon, but refused to accept it un¬ 
til she was satisfied that the offer was 
prompted by motives other than his obli¬ 
gation to her for saving his life. See 
McKennevand Hall, Ind. Tribes, hi, 193, 
1838; Drake, Inds., 403, 1880. 

Milpais. A Papago village with 250 
inhabitants in 1869 (Browne, Apache 
Country, 291, 1869). Probably intended 
for Mcilpais (Span.: ‘bad land’, locally 
referring specifically to spread-out lava), 
or for Milpas (‘cultivated patches’). 

Milpillas. Two Tepehuane pueblos, one 
known as Milpillas Grandes (Span, ‘great 


little-cultivated-patches’), the other as 
Milpillas Chiquitas, both situated in s. w. 
Durango, Mexico. The inhabitants of 
both villages are now much mixed with 
whites and Aztecs. 

Milpillas. —Orozco y Berra, Geog., 281,1864. Santa 
Maria Milpillas.—Ibid., 319. 

Milwaukee (‘fine land’, from milo or 
mino ‘good’, aid ‘land.’—Baraga. Cf. 
Kelton, cited below). A former village 
with a mixed population of Mascoutens, 
Foxes, and Potawatomi, situated on Mil- 
Avaukee r., Wis., at or near the site of 
the present Milwaukee, in 1699. See St 
Cosme, cited below, and Warren, Hist. 
Ojibways, 32, 1885. Cf. Miskouakimina. 

Meliwarik.—St Cosme (1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 
50, 1861. Melleki.—Old map ( ca. 1699), followed 
in map in Lapham, Inds. Wis., 1870. Melleoki.— 
Shea, Early Voy., 50, 186L (early map form). 
Melloki.—Ibid. Melwarck.—St Cosme (1699) 
quoted by Latham, op. cit., 5. Melwarik.—Ibid. 
Milwaukie.—Dick (1827) in H. R. Doc. 66, 33 
Cong., 2d sess., 15, 1855 (refers to tribe). Mine- 
wagi.—Kelton, Annals Ft Mackinac, 175, 1895 
(given as correct aboriginal form, meaning • there 
is a good point,’ or ‘there is a point where 
huckleberries grow’). 

Mimal. A former Maidu village on the 
vv. bank of Feather r., just below Yuba 
city, Sutter co., Cal. (r. b. d. ) 

Mimai.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, 
pi. xxxviii, 1905 (misprint). Mimal.—Bancroft, 
Nat. Races, i, 450,1882, Wl-ma.— Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., in, 282, 1877. 

Mimbrenos (Span.: ‘people of the wil¬ 
low's’). A branch of the Apache w'ho 
took their popular name from the Mim- 
bres mts., s. w. N. Mex., but who roamed 
over the country from the e. side of the 
Rio Grande in N. Mex. to San Francisco 
r. in Arizona, a favorite haunt being near 
Lake Guzman, w. of El Paso, in Chihua¬ 
hua. Between 1854 and 1869 their num¬ 
ber w r as estimated at 400 to 750, under 
Mangas Coloradas (q. v.). In habits they 
were similar to the other Apache, gaining 
a livelihood by raiding settlements in 
New Mexico, Arizona, and Mexico. They 
made peace w ith the Mexicans from time 
to time and before 1870 were supplied 
with rations by the military post at Janos, 
Chihuahua. They were sometimes called 
Coppermine Apache on account of their 
occupancy of the territory in which the 
Santa Rita mines ins. w. N. Mex. are situ¬ 
ated. In 1875 a part of them joined the 
Mescaleros and a part were under the Hot 
Springs (Chiricahua) agency, N. Mex. 
They are now divided betw r een the Mes- 
calero res., N. Mex., and Ft Apache 
agency, Ariz., but their number is not 
separately reported. ( f. av. h. ) 

Apaches Mimbrenos.—Humboldt, Atlas Nouv 
Esp., carte 1,1811. Coppermine Apaches.—Bartlett, 
Pers. Narr., i. 323, 1854. Iccujen-ne.—Orozco y 
Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Mangus Colorado’s band.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 206, 1858 (=Mangas Coloradas’ 
band). Membrenos.—Mill, Hist. Mex., 185, 1824. 
MiembreApaches.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 175,1875. Miem- 
brenos.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 380, 1854. Miembres.— 
Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 52, 1869. Mienbre.— 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. Mimbrenas.—BrOAvne, 
Apache Country, 290, 1869, Mimbreno.—Bonny- 


864 


MINA-MINES AND QUARRIES 


[B. a. e. 


castle, Spanish Am., 68, 1819. Mimbrereiios.— 
Barreiro, Ojeada sobre Nuevo-M6xico, app., 3, 
1832. Mimbres.—Anza (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 
4th s., II, 114,1856 Mimbres Apaches.—Cremony, 
Life among Apaches, 33,1868. Mimvre.—Ind. Aif. 
Rep. 1859, 336, 1860. Yecujen-ne.—Escudero, Not. 
Estad. de Chihuahua, 212,1834 (own name). 

Mina. The extinct Salt clans of Sia and 
San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex. 

Mina-hano.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352,1896 
(Mno=‘people’). 

Minas. A Micmac village or band in 
Nova Scotia in 1760.—Frye (1760) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 115,1809. 

Minatti. A village, probably Seminole, 
formerly at the source of Peace cr., w. 
central Florida, probably in the present 
Polk co. (H. R. Doc. 78, 25th Cong., 2d 
sess., map, 768-9, 1838). The name evi¬ 
dently bears no relation to the present 
Manatee in Manatee co. 

Minemaung. A Potawatomi village, 
called after a chief of this name, near the 
present Grantpark, Kankakee co., n. e. 
Illinois, on land ceded in 1832.—Camp 
Tippecanoe treaty (1832) in U. S. Ind. 
Treaties, 698, 1873. 

Mines and Quarries. The term mining 
is usually applied to operations connected 
with the procuring of metals from the 
earth, while the term quarrying is ap¬ 
plied to the procuring of stone. The 
former term sometimes refers also to the 
obtaining of minerals occurring in minute 
quantities, as turquoise, or of substances, 
as clay, salt, and ocher, not usually re¬ 
moved in solid or bulky bodies, especially 
where deep excavations or tunneling are 
required. Gold, silver, and copper were 
used by many of the more progressive 
American tribes before the discovery; 
but copper was the only metal extensively 
used n. of Mexico. The smelting of ores 
was probably imperfectly understood, 
even by the most advanced tribes, and 
iron, except in meteoric form or in the 
ore, was unknown. Their most impor¬ 
tant mines of copper (q. v.) with which 
we are acquainted were in n. Michigan 
penin. and on Isle Royale in L. Superior. 
Here the native metal occurs in masses 
and bits distributed in more or less 
compact bodies of eruptive rock. The 
mining operations consisted in removing 
the superficial earth and debris and in 
breaking up the rock with stone sledges 
and by the application of heat, thus 
freeing the masses of metal, some of 
which were of large size. One specimen, 
partially removed from its bed by the 
aborigines and then abandoned, weighed 
nearly 3 tons. “It was 16£ feet below 
the surface, and under it were poles, as 
if it had been entirely detached, but it 
had not been much displaced’’ (Win¬ 
ched in Pop. Sci. Monthly, Sept. 1881). 
Another very large mass encountered in 
the shaft of the Minnesota mine on Onto¬ 
nagon r., Mich., which had been partially 


removed by the native miners, is referred 
to by MacLean: “The excavation [an¬ 
cient] reached a depth of 26 ft., which 
was filled up with clay and a matted mass 
of moldering vegetable matter. At a 
depth of 18 ft., among a mass of leaves, 
sticks, and water, Mr Knapp discovered 
a detached mass of copper weighing 6 
tons. This mass had been raised about 

5 ft. along the foot of the lode on timbers 
by means of wedges and was left upon a 
cobwork of logs. These logs were from 

6 to 8 in. in diameter, the ends of which 
plainly showed the marks of a cutting 
tool. The upper surface and edges of the 
mass of copper were beaten and pounded 
smooth, showing that the irregular pro¬ 
truding pieces had been broken off. Near 
it were found other masses. On the walls 
of the shaft were marks of fire. Besides 
charcoal there was found a stone sledge 
weighing 36 pounds and a copper maul 
weighing 25 pounds. Stone mauls, ashes, 
and charcoal have been found in all these 
mines” (MacLean, Mound Builders, 76- 
77, 1904). The excavations were gener¬ 
ally not deep, being merely pits, but 
tunneling was occasionally resorted to 
(Gillman). In McCargole’s cove, on 
Isle Royale, nearly a square mile of the 
surface has been worked over, the pits 
connecting with one another over a large 
part of the area. Countless broken and 
unbroken stone sledges, mostly roundish 
bowlders of hard stone brought from the 
lake shore many miles away, are scattered 
over the surface and mixed with the 
debris. As indicated by the presence of 
rough grooves and notches, these imple¬ 
ments were generally hafted for use. A 
remnant of a withe handle was preserved 
in one instance, and a wooden shovel, a 
wooden basin, a wooden ladder, and a 
piece of knotted rawhide string are among 
the relics obtained from the ancient pits 
by modern miners. 

In glacial times extensive surfaces of 
the copper-bearing rocks were swept by 
the under surfaces of the great ice sheets, 
and thus many masses and bits of the 
metal, more or less scarred and battered, 
were carried southward over Michigan, 
Wisconsin, and Minnesota, and even 
farther s. These masses, deposited with 
the rocky debris of moraines, were col¬ 
lected and utilized by the natives. The 
masses of copper, when obtained, were 
probably in the main carried away to 
distant settlements to be worked into 
implements, utensils, and ornaments. 
The distribution of the product was very 
wide, extending over the entire country 
e. of the great plains. Cinnabar, ocher, 
salt, alum, and clay were mined in many 
sections of the country, Indians some¬ 
times going long distances in quest of 
these materials. Coal was and is ob- 



BULL. 30] 


MINES AND QUARRIES 


865 


tained from exposures in the bluffs, by the 
Hopi Indians, and there is historical tes¬ 
timony that it was thus procured for 
pottery-burning in former times. Iron 
oxides were extensively mined by some 
tribes, as is illustrated in an iron mine re¬ 
cently opened in Franklin co., Mo., where 
deep, sinuous galleries had been exca¬ 
vated in the ore body for the purpose of 
obtaining the red and yellow oxides for 
paint (Holmes). 



Section of Paint Mine in a Bed of'Iron Ore; Missouri. Depth 
OF EXCAVATIONS ABOUT 20 FT. (holmes) 


The quarrying of stone for the manu¬ 
facture of implements, utensils, and orna¬ 
ments was one of the great industries of 
the native tribes. Ancient excavations, 
surrounded by the debris of implement¬ 
making, are of common occurrence in the 
United States. Flint (q. v.) and other 
varieties of stone sufficiently brittle to 
be shaped by the fracture processes were 
especially sought, but soapstone, mica, 
and turquoise were also quarried. The 
flinty rocks include chert (usually called 
flint), novaculite, quartz, quartzite, jas¬ 
per, argillite, rhyolite, and obsidian 
(q. v.). The best known flint quarries 
are those on Flint Ridge, Licking co., 
Ohio; at Mill Creek, Union co., 111., and 
in the vicinity of Hot Springs, Ark. 
Many others have been located, and 
doubtless still others remain undiscov¬ 
ered in the forests and mountains. 

At Flint Ridge extensive beds of richly 
colored flint of excellent quality occur, 
forming the summit of the flattish ridge. 
The ancient pittings cover hundreds of 
acres, and in numerous cases are still 
open to a depth of from 10 to 20 ft. 
About the pits are ridges and heaps of 
debris and many shop sites where the 
implement forms were roughed out, and 
masses of fractured flint and flakage, as 
well as countless hammerstones used in 
the shaping operations (see Stone-work). 
The flint body was first uncovered, prob¬ 
ably with the aid of stone, antler, and 
wooden tools, and then broken up with 
heavy stone hammers, aided by the ap¬ 
plication of heat. Similar quarries occur 
in Coshocton co., as well as in other parts 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-55 


of Ohio, and in West Virginia, Indiana, 
Kentucky, and Tennessee. The quarries 
in Arkansas are perhaps even more ex¬ 
tensive than those in Ohio, the stone in 
the best known examples being a fine¬ 
grained variety of chert known as novacu¬ 
lite (q. v.), which occurs in beds of great 
thickness and undetermined extent. The 
phenomena of the quarries correspond, 
closely with those of Flint Ridge 
(Holmes). Similar quarries of chert are 
found at many points in Missouri and 
Indian Territory (Holmes). The great 
group of quarries found in the vicinity 
of Mill Creek, Ill., presents superfi¬ 
cial indications corresponding closely 
with those of the Ohio and Arkansas 
quarries, but the stone obtained was a 
gray flint, which occurs in the form of 
nodular and lenticular masses, mostly of 
irregular outline. These concretions 
were well suited to the manufacture of 
the large flaked implements—spades, 
hoes, knives, and spearheads—found dis¬ 
tributed over a vast area in the middle 
Mississippi valley. The original pittings, 
excavated in the compact deposits of 
calcareous clay and sand in which the 
nodules are embedded, often reached a 
depth of 25 ft or more. A rude stone 
pick was used in excavating, and stone 
as well as antler hammers were employed 
in the flaking work (Phillips). See Flint. 
Quarries of quartzite (q. v.) occur in 
Wyoming (Dorsey); of argillite (q. v.) 
in Bucks co., Pa. (Mercer); of jasper 
(q. v.) in the same county (Mercer); and 
of rhyolite (q.v. )in Adams co. (Holmes). 
Differing in type from the preceding are 
the extensive quarries on Piney branch 
of Rock cr., in the suburbs of Washing¬ 
ton, D. C. Here quartzite bowlders were 
quarried from the Cretaceous bluffs for 
the manufacture of flaked implements 
(Holmes). See Quartzite. 



SECTION OF FhJ-EO-UP BOWLDER QUARRY; D. C. HEIGHT OF 
QUARRY FACE ABOUT 10 FT. (hOlMEs) 


Steatite (q. v.), called also soapstone, 
was quarried at many points along the 
Atlantic slope of the Appalachian high¬ 
land from Georgia to New York, also in 
















866 


MINES AND QUARRIES 


[ B. A. E. 


the New England states, and in the far 
West, especially in California. This stone 
was easily carved, and, because it is not 



Wall of Soapstone Quarry showing Stumps left in Removing 
Lumps of the Rock; California, (holmes) 


readily fractured by heat, was much 
used by the Indians for cooking vessels 
and for tobacco pipes. The masses of 
this rock were 
uncovered, and 
lumps large 
enough to be 
shaped into pots 
were cut out 
with the aid of 
well - sharpened 
picks and chis¬ 
els of stone 
(Holmes, Mc¬ 
Guire, Schu¬ 
macher, Rey¬ 
nolds, Angell). 

Mica (q. v.) 
was quarried in 
many places in 
Virginia a n d 
North Carolina, 
the pittings be- 
i n g numerous 
and large. The 
sheets of this 
material were 
used by the 
natives for mir¬ 
rors and for the 
manufacture of ornaments. Building stone 
was required in great quantities in the 
building of pueblos and cliff-dwellings in 
the arid region, but surface rock was so 
readily available that deep quarrying was 
not necessary. Catlinite (q. v.), a red- 
clay stone, was extensively quarried for 
the manufacture of tobacco pipes and or¬ 
naments. The quarries are situated in 
Pipestone co., Minn., and are still worked 
to some extent by the neighboring Siouan 
tribes. The industry is not regarded as 
a very ancient one, although the manu¬ 


factured articles are widely distributed 
(Catlin, Holmes). I 

Turquoise (q. v.) is found in several of 
the Western states, but so far as known 
was mined extensively at only two points, 
Los Cerrillos, near Santa F6, N. Mex. 
(Blake, Silliman), and at Turquoise mtn., 
Cochise co., Ariz. These mines were op¬ 
erated by the natives before the arrival of 
the Spanish, as is indicated by the pit- 
tings and rude stone mining tools found 
associated with them. The mines were 
operated also by the Spaniards, and in 
more recent years in a desultory way by 
the present inhabitants of the region. 
The mines at Los Cerrillos seem to have 
been extensively worked by the abo¬ 
rigines. Blake, who examined the site 
about 1855, says: “On reaching the lo¬ 
cality I was struck with astonishment at 
the extent of the excavation. It is an 
immense pit with precipitous sides of an¬ 
gular rock, projecting in crags, which 
sustain a growth of pines and shrubs in 
the fissures. On one side the rocks tower 
into a precipice and overhang so as to 
form a cave; 
at another place 
the side is low 
and formed of 
thebroken rocks 
which were re¬ 
moved. From 
the top of the 
cliff the excava¬ 
tion appears to 
be 200 ft in 
depth and 300 or 
more in width. 
The bottom is 
funnel-shaped 
and formed by 
the sloping 
banks of the de- 
brisof fragments 
of the sides. On 
this debris, at 
the bottom of 
the pit, pine 
trees over a 
hundred years 
old are now 
growing, and the 
bank of refuse rock is similarly cov¬ 
ered with trees. This great excavation 
is made in the solid rocks, and tens 
of thousands of tons of rock have been 
broken out. This is not the only open¬ 
ing; there are several pits in the vicinity 
more limited in extent, some of them 
being apparently much more recent” 
(Blake in Am. Jour. Sci., 2d s., xxv, 227, 
1858). Silliman (Eng. and Min. Jour., 
xxxir, 169, 1881) speaks of finding in 
these mines “numerous stone hammers, 
some to be held in the hand and others 
















BULL. 30] 


MINESETPERI-MINGO 


867 


swung as sledges, fashioned with wedge- 
shaped edges and a groove for a handle. 
A hammer weighing over 20 pounds was 
found while I was at the Cerrillos, to 
which the withe was still attached, with 
its oak handle; the same scrub-oak which 
is found growing abundantly on the hill¬ 
sides, now quite well preserved after at 
least two centuries of entombment in this 
perfectly dry rock. The stone used for 
these hammers is the hard and tough 
hornblende andesite, or propylite, which 
forms the Cerro de Oro and other Cerrillos 
hills. With these rude tools, and without 
iron and steel, using fire in place of explo¬ 
sives, these patient old workers managed 
to break down and remove the incredible 
masses of these tufaceous rocks which 
form the mounds already described.” 

Among the various works which may 
be consulted on the native copper mines 
are: Foster and Whitney inH. R. Ex. Doc. 
69, 31st Cong., lstsess., 1850; Gillman in 
Smithson. Rep. 1873, 1874; Holmes in 
Am. Anthrop., n. s., in, 1901; McLean, 
Mound Builders, 1879; Packard in Am. 
Antiq., xv, no. 2, 1893; Whittlesey in 
Smithson. Cont., xm, 1862; Winchell in 
Pop. Sci. Mo., Sept. 1881. Quarries of 
brittle varieties of stone are described by 
Dorsey in Pub. 51, Field Columbian Mus., 
1900; Smith (Fowke) in Nat. Mus. Rep. 
1884,1885; Holmes (1) in Bull. 21, B. A. E., 
1894, (2)in 15thRep. B. A. E., 1897; Mercer 
(1) in Am. Anthrop., vii, 1894, (2) in Proc. 
A. A. A. S., xlii, 1894, (3) in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., xxxtv, 396, 1895; Phillips 
in Am. Anthrop., n. s., n, 37, 1900. Soap¬ 
stone quarries are described by Angell in 
Am. Nat., xii, 1878; Holmes in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1897; McGuire in Trans. 
Anthrop. Soc. Wash., ii, 1883; Schu¬ 
macher in 11th Rep. Peabody Mus., 1878. 
Pipestone quarries by Catlin, N. Am. 
Inds., i, 1866; Holmes in Proc. A. A. A.S., 
xli, 1892. Turquoise by Blake (1) in Am. 
Jour. Sci., 2d s., xxv, 1858, (2) in Am. 
Antiq., xxi, 1899; Kunz, Gems and Pre¬ 
cious Stones, 1890; Silliman in Eng. and 
Min. Jour., xxxn, 1881. (w. h. h.) 

Minesetperi (‘ those who defecate under 
the bank.’—H. L. Scott). A division of 
the Crows, more commonly known as 
River Crows, who separated from the 
Mountain Crows about 1859 and settled 
on Missouri r. 

Mine-set-peri.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 
144, 1851. Minesupe'rik. —Col. H. L. Scott, inf’n, 
1906 (proper form, with meaning above given). 
Minneh-sup-pay-deh. —Anon. MS. Crow vocab., B. 
A. E. River Crows.— Pease in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 
420, 1872. Sap-suckers.— Culbertson, op. cit. 

Mingan (Ma'ingun, ‘wolf’). A Mon- 
tagnais (Algonquian) village near the 
mouth of Mingan r., on the n. shore of 
the Gulf of St Lawrence, Quebec. It is 
the general rendezvous for all the Indians 


for several hundred miles around. The 
name occurs in the grant of the seigniory 
in 1661, and a mission was probably estab¬ 
lished there soon after (Hind, Lab. Penin., 
i, 43-44, 1863). The village numbered 
178 inhabitants in 1884, and 241 in 1906. 

(j. M.) 

Ma'ingan.— Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Minghasanwetazhi ( Mi n xa-sa n -wet ( ajt, 
‘touches not swans’). A subgens of the 
Mandinkagaghe gens of the Omaha.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897. 

Minghaska ( Mi n xa'ska, ‘swan’). A gen¬ 
tile subdivision of the Osage.—Dorsey in 
15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897. 

Minghaskainihkashina ( Mi n xa/ ska i'nig- 
h‘dci n/ a, ‘ swan people’). A subgens of 
the Minkin gens of the Osage.—Dorsey 
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 233, 1897. 

Mingko. The ‘Royal’ clan of the Ish- 
paneephratry of the Chickasaw, so called 
because it was the chief or ruling clan. 
Ming-ko— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Mingo.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 96, 1884. 

Mingo. The Choctaw and Chickasaw 
equivalent of the Muskogee miko, ‘chief’, 
both words being of frequent use by 
historians and travelers in the Gulf states 
during the colonial period. (a. f. c. ) 

Mingo (Algonquian: Mingvoe, ‘stealthy, 
treacherous’). A name applied in vari¬ 
ous forms by the Delawares and affiliated 
tribes to the Iroquois and cognate tribes, 
and more particularly used during the 
late colonial period by the Americans to 
designate a detached band of Iroquois 
who had left the villages of the main 
body before 1750 and formed new settle¬ 
ments in Pennsylvania, on upper Ohio r.. 
in the neighborhood of the Shawnee, 
Delawares, and neighboring tribes. From 
that period their relations were more in¬ 
timate with the western tribes than with 
the Iroquois, and they were frequently 
hostile to the whites while the parent 
body was at peace. They gradually 
moved down the Ohio, and just previous 
to the Revolution were living in the 
vicinity of Steubenville, Ohio. In 1766. 
their settlement, known as Mingo town, 
contained 60 families, and was the only 
Indian settlement on the Ohio from Pitts¬ 
burg to Louisville (Hutchins, Descrip., 
1778). From the Ohio they crossed over 
to the headwaters of Scioto and Sandusky 
rs., where they began to be known as the 
Senecas of Sandusky, either because the 
majority were Seneca or because all the 
western Iroquois were supposed to be 
Seneca. They were called Seneca in 
their first relations with the Government, 
and that name thus became their official 
designation, generally with a descriptive 
addition to indicate their habitat. About 
1800 they were joined by a part of the 
Cayuga, who had sold their lands in New 
York. In Ohio one part formed a con- 


868 


MINICONJOU 


[B. A. B. 


nection with the Shawnee at Lewistown, 
while the rest had their village on San¬ 
dusky r. The mixed band at Lewistown 
became known as the Mixed Senecas and 
Shawnees, to distinguish them from the 
others, who were still called Senecas of 
Sandusky. In 1831 both bands sold their 
lands in Ohio and removed to a tract in 
Kansas, on Neosho r., whence they re¬ 
moved in 1867 to Indian Territory, where 
they now are, the two bands being united 
and having no connection with the 
Shawnee. In 1831 the Sandusky band 
numbered 251, but by 1885 the entire 
body had become reduced to 239. In 1905 
they numbered 366. 

On Herman’s map of 1670 is a notice of 
a tribe called the Black Mincquas living 
beyond the mountains on the large Black 
Mincqua r., probably the Ohio r. For¬ 
merly, by means of a branch of this river 
which approached a branch of the Sus¬ 
quehanna above the Conestoga fort (prob¬ 
ably the Juniata r.), “those Black Minc¬ 
quas came over and as far as Delaware to 
trade, but the Sassquahana and Sinnicus 
Indians [Conestoga and Seneca] went 
over and destroyed that very great Na¬ 
tion.” This statement and the location 
make it probable that the Black Mincquas 
were the Erie, q. v. (j. m. ) 

Five Nations of the Sciota Plains.—Bouquet (1764), 
quoted by Rupp, W. Penn., app., 144,1846. Mine- 
oes.—Cowley "(1775) in Arch, of Md., 94, 1892 
(misprint). Mingo.—See Iroquois. Neosho-Sene- 
cas.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 591, 1854. San¬ 
dusky Senecas.—Lang and Taylor, Rep., 26, 1843. 
Senecas of Ohio.—Ft Stanwix treaty (1768) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., viil, 111, 1857. Senecas of San¬ 
dusky.—Seneca Agency treaty (18b2) in U. S. Ind. 
Treaties, 559,1837. Senecas of Sandusky and Stony 
creek.—Greenville treaty (1814) in Am. St. Papers, 
Ind. Aff., 1,826,1832. Senecas of the Glaize.—Mau¬ 
mee council (1793), ibid., 357. Six Nations living 
at Sandusky.—Greenville treaty (1795) quoted by 
Harris, Tour, 250, 1805. 

Miniconjou (‘those who plant beside 
the stream’). A division of the Teton 
Sioux. Their closest affinity is with the 
Oglala, Brule, and Hunkpapa Teton. As 
the whites did not come into actual con¬ 
tact with the Teton tribes until recent 
times, there is no evidence as to their an¬ 
tiquity as distinct organizations. The 
first mention of the Miniconjou, unless 
under some unidentified name, is by Lewis 
and Clark (1804). These authors (Ex¬ 
pedition, i, 61, 1814) speak of them as 
“Tetons Minnakenozzo, a nation inhab¬ 
iting both sides of the Missouri above the 
Cheyenne r., and containing about 250 
men.” This indicates a population of 
perhaps 800, probably much below their 
actual number. Their history since they 
became known to the whites consists, 
like that of the other Sioux, of little else 
than war with and raids upon other 
tribes and depredations on the whites. 
They are frequently alluded to in official 
and other reports as among the most 


unruly and troublesome of the Teton 
tribes. Haydensays: “Thisband,though 
peaceable when ruled by good chiefs, has 
always been very wild and independent, 
seldom visiting the trading posts, either 
on the Platte or on the Missouri, and 
having no intercourse with white men 
except with a few traders during the 
winter season.” They were estimated in 
1850 by Culbertson (Smithson. Rep. for 
1850,142) at 270 lodges, or between 2,100 
and 2,200 people. At this time, and 
until brought upon reservations, they 
roamed over the Black hills and head¬ 
waters of Cheyenne r., being usually 
found 'from Cherry cr. on the Cheyenne 
to Grand r. Gen. Warren (1856) esti¬ 
mated them at 200 lodges and 1,600 souls. 
The Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1863 gives 1,280 as 
the population. They are now located 
with other Sioux bands on Cheyenne 
River res., S. Dak., but are not separately 
enumerated. 

The divisions given by Lewis and Clark 
areasfollows: (1) Minnakineazzo (Mini¬ 
conjou), (2) Wanneewackataonelar, (3) 
Tarcoehparh. Culbertson (Smithson. 
Rep. 1850, 142, 1851), mentions four: (1) 
River that Flies, (2) Those that Eat no 
Dogs, (3) Shell-earring band, (4) Lejaga- 
datcah. Swift (1884), from information 
received from Indian sources, gives the 
following divisions (15th Rep. B. A. E., 
220, 1897): (1) Unkcheyuta, (2) Glag- 
lahecha, (3) Shungkayuteshni (Thosethat 
Eat no Dogs), (4) Nighetanka, (5) Wak- 
pokinyan, (6) Inyanhaoin (Shell-earring 
band), (7) Shikshichela, (8) Wagle- 
zaoin, (9) Wannawegha (probably the 
W annee wackataonelar). 

The Miniconjou were participants in 
the peace treaty of Ft Sully, S. Dak., Oct. 
10, 1865, and in the treaty of Ft Laramie, 
Wyo., Apr. 29, 1868, by which they and 
other Sioux tribes were pledged to cease 
hostilities and the United States agreed 
to set apart for them a reservation. 

(j. o. d. c. T.) 

Mee-ne-cow-e-gee.—Catlin,N. Am. Inds.,1,211,1844. 
Memacanjo.—Clark quoted by Coues, Lewis and 
ClarkExped.,1,101, note, 1893(trans. ‘makefence 
on the river’). Men-i-cou-zha.—Hoffman in H. R. 
Doc. 36, 33d Cong., 2d sess., 3, 1855. Minecogue.— 
Ind. All. Rep.,285,1854. Minecosias.—Sage, Scenes 
in Rocky Mts.,58,1846. Minecougan.—Vaughan in 
H.R.Doc. 36,33d Cong.,2d sess.,6,1855. Mi-ne-kaq'- 
zus.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 374, 
1862. Mini-con-gsha.—Culbertson in Smithson. 
Rep. 1850,142,1851. Mini-Conjou.—Smithson. Misc. 
Coll., xiv, art. 5, 6,1878. Minicoughas.—Hoffman 
in H. R. Doc. 36, 33d Cong., 2d sess., 4, 1855. 
Minicoujons.—Winship in H. R. Rep. 63,33d Cong., 
2 d sess., 6, 1855. Mini-kan-jous.—Warren (1855), 
Neb. and Ariz.,48,1875. Minikan oju.—Cleveland, 
letter to J. O. Dorsey, 1884. Minikanyes.—Warren, 
Dacota Country, 16, 1855. Minikanye wozupi.— 
Riggs, Dakota Gram, and Diet., xvi, 1852 (trans. 
‘those who plant by the water’). Min-i-kaq'-zu.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 376, 1862. 
Minikiniad-za.—Brackenridge, Views of La., 78, 
1814. Minikomioos.—Smet, Letters, 37. note, 1843. 
Minikonga.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 5, 494,1855. 


BULL. SO] 


MININTHK ASHIN A-MINNEHAHA 


869 


Minikongshas. —Keane in Stanford, Compend.,522, 
1878. Minikooju.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 
220,1897 (own name). Minnake-nozzo.— Coyner, 
Lost Trappers, 70,1847. Min na-kine-az-zo. —Lewis 
and Clark, Discov., 34, 1806. Minnecarguis. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1856, 68, 1857. Minnecaushas. —Ind.Aff. 
Rep., 301,1854. Minnecogoux. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 
120, 1860. Minnecojous. —Corliss, Lacotah MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 107,1874. Minnecongew. —Boiler, 
Among Inds. in Far W., 29,1868. Minnecongou. — 
Gale, Upper Miss., 226, 1867. Minneconjon. —U. S. 
Ind. Treat. (1866), 890, 1873. Minneconjos. — 
Sen. Ex. Doc. 94, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 11, 1856. 
Minneconjoux. — Stanley in Poole, Among the 
Sioux, app., 232, 1881. Minnecoujos. —Harney in 
Sen.Ex.Doc.94,34thCong.,lstsess.,l, 1856. Minne- 
coujou. —Brackett in Smithson. Rep. for 1876, 466. 
Minne Coujoux Sioux. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1855, 79,1856. 
Minne-Cousha. —Bordeau in H. R. Rep. 63, 33d 
Cong., 2d sess., 13, 1855. Minnecowzues. —Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 295,1854. Min-ne-kaij'-zu. —Hayden, Ethnog. 
and Philol. Mo. Val., 371,1862. Minnekonjo. —Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 247,1877. Minnicongew. —Parkman, Ore¬ 
gon Trail, 126, 1883. Minnikan-jous. —Warren 
(1855), Neb. and Ariz., 48,1875. Minnikanye Woz- 
hipu. —Burton, City of Sts., 119,1861 (trans. ‘those 
who plant by the water’). Monecoshe Sioux. — 
Ind. Aff.Rep. 1864,228,1865. Teton-Menna-Kanozo. — 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., I, map, 1814. Te-ton- 
min-na-kine-az'-zo. —Lewis and Clark, Discov., 30, 
1806. Tetons Mennakenozzo. —Long, Exped. St 
Peter’s R., I, 381, 1824. Tetons Minnakenozzo. — 
LewisandClark,Exped.,1,61,1814. Tetons Minna- 
kineazzo. —Lewis, Trav., 171, 1809. Tetons Minne- 
kincazzo. —Farnham, Trav., 32, 1843. Winnaken- 
ozzo. —Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 87,1850 (misprint). 

Mininihkashina ( MiH'niq k‘dci n a, ‘sun 
people ’). A subgens of the Minkin gens 
of the Osage.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 233, 1897. 

Minisha (‘red water’). An Oglala 
band under Eagle-that-Sails, in 1862. Cf. 
Itazipcho. 

Min-i-sha'. —Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
376, 1862. Red water band.— Culbertson in Smith- 
son. Rep. 1850, 142, 1851. 

Minishinakato. A band of the Assini- 
boin. 

Gens du Lac.—Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. 
Val., 387, 1862. Min'-i-shi-nak'-a-to. —Ibid. 

Minisink (‘the place of the Minsi.’— 
Heckewelder). The leading division of 
the Munsee (q. v.), with whom they are 
often confounded. They lived on the 
headwaters of Delaware r., in the s. w. 
part of Ulster and Orange cos., N. Y., and 
the adjacent parts of New Jersey and 
Pennsylvania. Their principal village, 
which"bore the same name, was the coun¬ 
cil place of the Munsee, and seems to 
have been in Sussex co., N. J., near the 
point where the state line crosses Dela¬ 
ware r. They are said to have had three 
villages in 1663. The Munsee who 
moved w. with the Delawares were 
mainly of this division. (j. m.) 

Manessings. —Kregier (1663) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xni, 339, 1881. Manissing. —Ibid., 325. 
Mannissing. —Ibid. Menesikns. —Croghan (1759) 
in Proud, Pa., ii, 297,1798. Menessinghs.— Doc. of 
1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 276, 1881. 
Menisink. —Doc. of 1755 in Rupp, Northampton, 
etc., Cos., 88, 1845. Menissinck. —Doc. of 1663 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., XIII, 289,1881. Menissing.— 
Beeckman (1660). ibid., XII, 315, 1877. Menis- 
singes.— Conference of 1660. ibid., xm, 167, 1881. 
Menissins. —Beeckman (1663), ibid., XII, 438,1877. 
Mennisink. —Doc. (1756) in Rupp, Northampton, 
etc., Cos., 106, 1845. Menmssinck.— Schuyler 


(1694) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 99, 1854. Mini- 
sincks.— Swartwout (1662), ibid., xm, 229, 1881. 
Minising. —Mandrillon, Spectateur Am6ricain, 
map, 1785. Minisinks. —Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 127, 1816. Minissens.— La Salle (1681) in 
Margry, D6c., II, 148,1877 (probably intended for 
Munsee). Minissingh. —Beeckman (1660) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., xil, 306,1877. Minissinks. —Beeck¬ 
man (1663), ibid., 438. Minisuk.— McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes,in, 80,1858. Minnessinck. —Van 
der Donck (1656) in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 
96,1872. Minnisink.— Canajoharie conf. (1759) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vu, 382, 1856 (location). 
Minnissincks.— Schuyler (1694), ibid., IV, 99, 1854. 
Minnissinke. —New York conf. (1681), ibid., xm, 
551, 1881. Minusing. —Proud, Pa., II, 320, 1798. 
Monnesick.— Addam (1653) in Drake, Bk. Inds., 
bk. 2, 79, 1848. 

Miniskuyakichun (‘wears salt’). A 
band of the Brule Teton Sioux. 

Miniskuya ki^up. —Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 
15th Rep. B. A. E.,219,1897. Miniskuya-kitc’u n . — 
Ibid. 

Minkekhanye ( Mi n -qe/ qa^'-ye, ‘ big rac¬ 
coon’). A subgens of the Ruche, the 
Pigeon gens of the Iowa.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 239, 1897. 

Minkeyine (Mi n ke / yin'-e , ‘young rac¬ 
coon’). A subgens of the Ruche, the 
Pigeon gens of the Iowa.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 239, 1897. 

Minkin (Min k’i n , ‘sun-carrier’). The 
3d gens on the Tsishu side of the Osage 
tribal circle; also the 8th Kansa gens.— 
Dorsey in 1.5th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 233, 
1897. 

Minnehaha. The heroine in Henry 
Wadsworth Longfellow’s Song of Hiawa¬ 
tha. Her father, home, and nationality 
are given in the lines— 

At the doorway of his wigwam 
Sat the Ancient Arrow-maker, 

In the land of the Dacotahs, 

Making arrow heads of jasper, 

Arrow heads of chalcedony. 

At his side, in all her beauty, 

v Sat the lovely Minnehaha, 

Sat his daughter, Laughing Water. 

Minnehaha of the song is the poet’s 
own creation. Some of the elements of her 
creation, such as nationality and name, 
were suggested from a book called Life 
and Legends of the Sioux, by Mrs Mary 
Eastman (N. Y.,1849). The book con¬ 
tains some observations on life of the 
Sioux, together with a miscellaneous 
assortment of sentiment and romance. 
The scene of the events related in the 
narratives is on the Mississippi with the 
center in and around Ft Snelling. This 
lay on the borderland bet ween the Sioux 
and the Chippewa, who at the time were 
constantly at war with each other. So 
when the Algonkin hero is told by his 
grandmother that the time has come for 
him to marry, and he replies and makes 
known his selection in the words that— 

In the land of the Dacotahs 
Lives the Arrow-maker’s daughter, 

we have the following dialogue which 
may be taken as an embodiment of the 


870 


MIN NEP AT A-MISHIKH W U TMET U N N E 


[b. a. e. 


underlying motive in the poet’s mind in 
the creation of his Minnehaha: 


Bring not to my lodge a stranger 
From the land of the Dacotahs! 

.Very fierce are the Dacotahs, 

Often is there war between us, 

There are feuds yet unforgotten, 
Wounds that ache and still may open! 


For that reason, if no other, 

Would I wed the fair Dacotah, 
That our tribes might be united, 
That old feuds might be forgotten, 
And old wounds be healed forever! 


The name Minnehaha is first met with 
in Mrs Eastman’s book. In the intro¬ 
duction of that work she makes the state¬ 
ment that between Ft Snelling and the 
Falls of St Anthony “are the Little Falls 
40 ft. in height on a stream that empties 
into the Mississippi. The Indians call 
them Minnehaha, or ‘Laughing Waters.’ ” 
This is plainly the source of the heroine’s 
name. The word Minnehaha is taken 
from the Teton dialect of the Dakota 
language. It is a compound, the first 
part of which is mini and means water. 
Mini occupies initial place in composition, 
as, minito blue water, minisapa black water, 
miniyaya water-cask. The rendering of 
Minnehaha as ‘Laughing Water’ is ex¬ 
plained as follows: The verb to laugh is 
ilia (h=German ch); to laugh at, ihalia; 
and the noun laughter is Uaha. Hence, 
Minnehaha is literally ‘ water laughter.’ 
The more reasonable definition of Minne¬ 
haha is to be sought from such a source 
as that given in the Dakota-English Dic¬ 
tionary of Stephen Return Riggs, accord¬ 
ing to whom Ualia as a noun in compounds 
denotes ‘cascade,’ ‘cataract’; hence mini- 
halia would signify ‘ waterfall. ’ (w. .t. ) 

Minnepata [‘falling water’). A divi¬ 
sion of the Hidatsa. 

Minipata.— Matthews, inf’n, 1885. Min-ne-pa'-ta.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. Water.— Ibid. 

Minnetarees of Knife River. An uni¬ 
dentified Hidatsa division, mentioned by 
Lewis and Clark (Exped., i, 330, 1814). 
Possibly theAmahami. 

Mipshuntik {Mi'-p’cun-tlk). A former 
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina 
r., on the site of Toledo, Benton co., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
hi, 229, 1890. 

Miqkano (‘ mud-turtle ’). A subphratry 
or gens of the Menominee.—Hoffman in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42,1896. 

Miramichi. A former Micmac village 
on the right bank of Miramichi r., New 
Brunswick, where it flows into the 
Gulf of St Lawrence. The French had 
a mission there in the 17th century, and 
in 1760 there was a Micmac village or 
band of that name. (j. m.) 

Merimichi.— Frye (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1 st s., x, 115,1809. Merrimichi.— Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., ill, 100, 1794. Miramichi.— Beauhar- 
nois (1745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 5, 1858. 


Mirimichy.—Stiles (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., x, 116, 1809. Mizamichis.—Shea, Miss. Val., 
86, 1852 (misprint). 

Miscanaka. The site of San Buenaven¬ 
tura mission, Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
July 24, 1863). Said by Indians in 1884 
to be the name of a former Chumahsan 
village at the site of the present school- 
house in that town. (h. w. h.) 

Miscanaka. —Taylor, op. cit. Mitc-ka'-na-kau.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884 ( tc=ch ). 

Miseekwigweelis. A division of the 
Skagit tribe, now on Swinomish res., 
Wash. They participated with other 
tribes in the treaty of Pt Elliott, Wash., 
Jan. 22,1855, by which they ceded lands 
to the United States and agreed to settle 
on a reservation. 

Bes-he-kwe-guelts.—Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 
1877. Mee-see-qua-guilch.—U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 
378, 1873. Miseekwigweelis.—Gibbs in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., 1,180,1877. Mis-kai-whu.—Gibbs in Pac. 
R. R. Rep., I, 436, 1855. 

Misesopano. A Chumashan village w. 
of Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven¬ 
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542; placed by 
Taylor on the Rafael Gonzales farm. 

Misesopano.—Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. 
Fla., 181, 1857. Mississipone.—Taylor in Cal. 
Farmer, Apr. 17,1863. Pona.—Ibid. 

Mishawum (probably from mishaum- 
mut, ‘a great spring’—S. D. in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., x, 174, 1823; 
Jones (Ind. Bui., 1867) translates it ‘large 
peninsula’). A Massachuset village for¬ 
merly at Charlestown, near Boston, Mass. 
It was commonly known as Sagamore 
John’s town, from the name of a resident 
chief. The English settled there in 
1628. (j. m. ) 

Misham.—Drake, Ind. Chron., 155, 1836. Misha¬ 
wum.—Pemberton in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll. 1st s., 
ill, 241,1794. Sagamore John’s Town.—Early Eng¬ 
lish writers. 

Mishcup. One of the New England 
names of the porgy ( Sparus argyrops). 
Roger Williams (1643) gives mishcup- 
pauog , the plural form, as the word for 
bream in the Narraganset dialect of Algon- 
quian. Mishcup , the singular, is derived 
from mishe, ‘great’, and kuppi, ‘close 
together,’ referring to the scales of the 
fish. From mischcuppaiiog have been 
derived scuppaug and scup; also porgy 
or paugee. (a. f. c.) 

Mishikhwutmetunne (‘people who dwell 
on the stream called Mishi’). An Atha¬ 
pascan tribe formerly occupying villages 
on upper Coquille r., Oreg. In 1861 they 
numbered 55 men, 75 women, and 95 
children (Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1861). In 
1884 the survivors were on Siletz res. 
Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 232, 
1890) in that year obtained the following 
list of their villages (which he calls gentes) 
as they formerly existed on Coquille 
r. from the Kusan country to the head of 
the stream, although not necessarily at 
one period: Chockrelatan, Chuntshataa- 


BULL. 30] 


MISHIKINAKWA-MISHUMASH 


871 


tunne, Duldulthawaiame, Enitunne, II- 
sethlthawaiame, Katomemetunne, Khi- 
nukhtunne, Khweshtunne, Kimestunne, 
Kthukhwestunne, Kthunataachuntunne, 
Meshtshe, Nakhituntunne, Nakhocha- 
tunne, Natarghiliitunne, Natsushltatunne, 
Nilestunne, Rghoyinestunne, Sathlrekh- 
tun, Sekhuslituntunne, Sunsunnestunne, 
Sushltakhotthatunne, Thlkwantiya- 
tunne, Thltsharghiliitunne, Thltsusme- 
tunne, Thlulchikhwutmetunne, Ti- 
methltunne, Tkhlunkhastunne, Tsa- 
targhekhetunne, Tthinatlitunne, Tulwut- 
metunne, Tuskhlustunne, and Tustatunk- 
huushi. 

Coquell. —Ind. Aft'. Rep., 263, 1884. Coquill.— 
Newcomb in Ind. Aft. Rep., 162, 1861. Coquilla. — 
Ibid., 221. Coquille. —Abbott, MS. Coquille vocab., 
B. A. E., 1858. De-d’a tene. —Eyerette, Tutu MS. 
vocab., B. A. E. v 1883 ( = ‘people by the northern 
water’). Ithale teni. —Gatschet, Umpqua MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1877 (Umpqua name). Ki- 
guel. —Robertson, Oregon, 129, 1846. Kukwil'.— 
Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea 
name). Ku-kwIP qunne. —Dorsey, Chetco MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chetco name). Ku-kwll'-tun 
lunne. —Dorsey, Naltftnne-tftnnS MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1884 (Naltunne name). Mi-ci'-kqwut-me' 
tunne. —Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 232,1890. 
Mi-c£-qwut.— Dorsey, Chastacosta MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1884. Upper Coquille.— Dorsey in Am. 
Antiq., VII, 41, 1885. 

Mishikinakwa. See Little Turtle. 

Mishongnovi (Mi-shong'-no-vi, from mish- 
oniniptuovi, 1 at the place of the other which 
remains erect, ’ referring to two irregular 
sandstone pillars, one of which has fallen. 
A. M. Stephen). A pueblo of the Hopi 
in n. e. Arizona, on the Middle mesa 
of Tusayan. The original pueblo, which 
stood w. of the present Mishongnovi and 
formed one of the villages of the an¬ 
cient province of Tusayan, was aban¬ 
doned about 1680 and the present town 
built. Mishongnovi was a visita of the 
mission of Shongopovi during the mis¬ 
sion period (1629-80) and bore the name 
of San Buenaventura. Pop. 221 in 1870; 
241 in 1877; 289 in 1882; 242 in 1891. See 
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 26, 66-70, 
1891; Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 582, 
1898; Dorsey and Votli in Field Columb. 
Mus. Pub. no. 66, 1902. (f. w. h.) 

Buenaventura.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis, 
Span. Conq. N. Mex., 368,1869. Macanabi. —Senex, 
map, 1710. Maconabi.— De l’Isle, Carte Mex. et Flo- 
ride, 1703. Majanam.— Onate (1598) in Doc. In6d., 
xvi, 207,1871. Manzana.— Schoolcraft,Ind. Tribes, 
1,519,1851. Masagnebe. —Garc6s (1776), Diary, 394, 
1900(Yavapaiform). Masagneve.— Garc6s(1775-6) 
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 137, 1889. 
Masanais. —Arrowsmith, mapN. A., 1795, ed. 1814. 
Masaqueve. —Garc6s (1775-6) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 395, 1889 (Yavapai form). 
Ma-shong'-ni-vi. —Powell,4th Rep. B. A.E.,xl,1886. 
Mashoniniptuovi. —Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 
26, 1891. Mas-sang-na-vay. —Irvine in Ind. Aft. 
Rep., 160, 1877. Mausand.— Calhoun quoted by 
Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Mee- 
shom-o-neer. —French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 175, note, 
1875. Me-shong-a-na-we.— Crothers in Ind. Aft. 
Rep., 324, 1872. Meshongnavi. —Mason quoted by 
Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14,1893. Me-shung- 
a-na-we.— Palmer in Ind. Aft. Rep., 133, 1870. 
Me-shung-ne-vi. — Shipley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
310, 1891. Michonguave, —Moffet in Overland 


Monthly, 243, Sept. 1889. Micongnivi. —Ind Aff. 
Rep., lxxx, 1886. Mi-con'-in-o-vi. —Fewkes in Am. 
Anthrop., V, 225,1892. Mi-con-o-vi. —Ibid, 13. Mi- 
shan-qu-na-vi. —Ward (1861) quoted by Donaldson, 
Moqui Pueblolnds.,14,1893. Mi-shong-i-niv. —Pow¬ 
ell, ibid, (misquoted). Mi-shong'-i-ni-vi. —Pow¬ 
ell in Scribner’s Mag., 196, 202, Dec. 1875. Mi- 
shong-in-ovi. —Stephen quoted by Donaldson, 
Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Mishongnavi. — 
Donaldson, ibid., 4. Mishongop-avi. —Bandelier 
in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 135, 1890. Mi-shon- 
na-vi. —Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., pi. p. 62, 
1893. Monsonabi. —Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis, 
Span. Conq. N. Mex., 367, 1869. Monsonavi. — 
Davis, El Gringo, 115, 1857. Mooshahneh. —Ives, 
Colorado R., 124, 1861. Mooshanave. —Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 10, 1863. Moo-sha-neh.— Ives, 
ColoradoR.,map, 1861. Mooshongaenayvee. —East¬ 
man, map in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 24-25, 
1854. Mooshongeenayvee. —Eastman misquoted by 
Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Moo- 
song'-na-ve.— Jackson quoted by Barber in Am. 
Nat., 730, Dec. 1877. Mosanais. —Humboldt, Atlas 
Nouv.-Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Mosanis. —Pike, 
Expeditions, 3d map, 1810. Mosasnabi. —Morfi 
(1782) quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, 
m, 135, 1890. * Mosasnave. —Escudero, Not. de 
Chihuahua, 231, 1834. Moshanganabi. —Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863. Moshongnave. —ten 
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 245, 1885. Mossonganabi. — 
Dominguez and Escalante (1776) in Doc. Hist. 
Mex., 2d s., i,548,1854. Moszasnavi. —Cortez (1799) 
quoted in Pac. R. R. Rep., pt. 3, 121, 1856. Mow- 
shai-i-na.—Domenech, Deserts N. A., I, 185, 1860. 
Moxainabe. —Vetancurt (1693),TeatroMex., hi, 321, 
1871. Moxainabi. —Vetancurt misquoted by Ban¬ 
croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 173, 1889. Moxainavi. — 
Bancroft, ibid., 349. Moxionavi.— Vargas (1692) 
quoted, ibid., 201. Moxonaui. —Alcedo, Die. 
Geog.,ilI, 260,1788. Moxonavi.— Villa-Senor,Thea- 
troAm., pt.2,425,1748. Mu-shai-e-now-a. —Pac. R. R. 
Rep., hi, pt. 3, 13,1856 (Zunyname). Mu-shai-i- 
na. —Ibid, (ownname). Mushanganevi.— Gatschet 
in Mag. Am. Hist., 206, 1882. Mushangene-vi. — 
Loew in Pop. Sci. Monthly, v, 352,1874. Mu-shang- 
newy. —Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 90, 1884. Mush- 
anguewy.— Bourke misquoted by _ Donaldson, 
Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Musha-ni. —Barber 
in Am. Nat., 730, 1877. Mushaugnevy.— Bourke in 
Proc. Am . Antiq. Soc., I, 244,1881. S. Buen. de Mos- 
saquavi. —Vargas (1692) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. 
and N. Mex., 201, 1889. Tse-itso-kit'.— Stephen, 
MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Navaho name: ‘Great rocky 
dune’). Tset-so-kit.— Eaton in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, iv, 220, 1854 (Navaho name). 

Mishpapsna ( Mic-pdp'-snd) . A former 
Chumashan village at the arroyo near 
Carpinteria, Santa Barbara co., Cal.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B. A. E., 1884. 

Mishtapalwa (Mic-ta-paV-wa ). A former 
Chumashan village at La Matanza, near 
San Buenaventura, Ventura co., Cal.— 
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., 
B.A.E.,1984. 

Mishtapawa ( Mic-ta-pu-wa ). One of the 
former Chumashan villages near Santa 
Ines mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal.— 
Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab., B. A. E., 
1884. 

Mishtawayawininiwak. The Chippewa 
name for that part of the tribe living in 
Canada. 

Mictawayang.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905 ( c=sh ). 
Mishtawaya-wininiwak. —A. S. Gatschet, Ojibwa 
MS., B. A. E., 1882 {wininiwak=‘ people’). 

Mishumash ( Mic-hu'-mac, native name 
of Santa Cruz id. and the islanders). A 
village of the Santa Cruz islanders of Cali¬ 
fornia, who belonged to the Chumashan 


872 


MISINAGUA—MISSION 


[B. A. E. 


family.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Misinagua. A Chumashan village w. 
of Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven¬ 
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542. Placed 
bv Taylor near San Marcos. 

Misinagua.—Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. 
Fla., 181,1857. Misinajua.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 17,1863. 

Misisagaikaniwininiwak ( Mtshlsagai- 
ganluftninivyug, 1 people of the big lake.’— 
W. J.). A Chippewa band, taking its 
popular name from its residence on Mille 
Lac, e. Minn. They were included 
among the ‘ ‘ Chippe waof the Mississippi ’ ’ 
in the treaty of Washington, Feb. 22, 
1855, by which a reserve was assigned to 
them in Crow Wing co., Minn. There 
are now (1905) 1,249 Mille Lac Chippewa 
under the White Earth agency in the 
same state. See Sagawamick. 

Mille Lac band.—Treaty of 1863 in U. S. Inch Treat., 
215, 1873. Mishisagaiganiwininiwag.—Wm. Jones, 
inf’n, 1906. Misisagaikani-wininiwak.—Gatschet, 
Ojibwa MS., B. A. E., 1882. 

Misketoiitok ( Mis-ke-toi'-i-tok) . A for¬ 
mer Hupa village on or near Trinity r., 
Cal.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., hi, 
73, 1877. 

Miskouaha. One of the 4 divisions of 
the Nipissing at the Lake of the Two 
Mountains, Quebec, in 1736. Their to¬ 
tem was blood, for which reason they 
were also called Gens du Sang. 

Gens du Sang.—Chauvignerie (17361 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IX, 1053, 1855. Mikouachakhi.—Jes. 
Rel. 1643, 38, 1858 (same?). Miskouaha.—Chau¬ 
vignerie, op. cit. Miskuakes.—Chauvignerie as 
quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 554, 1853. 

Miskouakimina (prob. for Meskwdkiwi- 
naw e , 1 red-earth town, ’ i. e., ‘ Fox town.’— 
W. J.). Marked on La Tour’s map of 
1784 as if a Fox village near the site of 
Milwaukee, Wis., on the w. shore of L. 
Michigan. The Sauk are marked on the 
same map as in the adjacent region. 

Miskut. A former Hupa village on the 
e. bank of Trinity r., Cal., about | m. be¬ 
low Takimilding. (p. e. g. ) 

Agaraits.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 
139,1853. A-gar-it-is.—McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 
32d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1853. Eh-grertsh.— 
Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., 1852. Hergerits.—Goddard, 
inf’n, 1903 (Yurok name). Miscolts.—Keane in 
Stanford, Compend., 522,1878. Miscott.—Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 82, 1870. Mis'-kut.—Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., ill, 73,1877. Miskut.—Goddard, Life and 
Culture of the Hupa, 13,1903. O-gahrit-tis.—Meyer, 
Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855. 

Miskwagamiwisagaigan (‘ red - water 
lake’, from miskwa ‘red’, garni ‘fluid, 
water ’, saga-igan ‘ lake ’). A Chippewa 
band living about Red lake and Red 
Lake r., n. Minn., and numbering 1,353 
under the Leech Lake agency in 1905. 
By treaty at the Old crossing of Red Lake 
r., Minn., Apr. 12, 1864, this band and 
the Pembina ceded all their lands in 
Minnesota. 

Chippewa of Red Lake.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1905, 516, 
1906 (official name). Chippeways of Red Lake.— 
Lewis, Travels, 178, 1809. Misku-Gami-Saga-igan- 
anishinabeg.—Gatschet, op. cit. (‘Red fluid lake 


Indians’). Miskwa-gamiwi-saga-igan. —Gatschet, 
Ojibwa MS., B. A. E., 1882. Miskwagamiwisaga-i-- 
gan.— Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905. Miskwi-ka Mewe 
slgigan Wenenewak. —Long, Exped. St Peter’s R., 
II, 153, 1824. 

Mismatuk ( Mls-ma'-tuk ). A former 
Chumashan village in the mountains near 
Santa Barbara, Cal., in a locality now 
called Arroyo Burro.—Henshaw, Santa 
Barbara MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Mispu ( Mis'-pu ). A former Chumashan 
village near the light-house at Santa 
Barbara, Cal., in a locality now called 
El Castillo Viejo.—Henshaw, Buena¬ 
ventura MS. vocab., B. A. PI, 1884. 

Misshawa ( Mishawa , ‘elk’). A gens of 
the Potawatomi, q. v. 

Micawa.-«-Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905 (c=s/t). Mis- 
sha'-wa.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 1877. 

Missiassik (on the etymology of the 
name, see McAleer, Study in the Ety¬ 
mology of Missisquoi, 1906). An Algon- 
quian tribe or body of Indians belonging 
to the Abnaki group, formerly living on 
Missisquoi r. in n. Vermont. Whether 
they formed a distinct tribe or a de¬ 
tached portion of some known Aknaki 
tribe is uncertain. If the latter, which 
seems probable, as the name “Wander¬ 
ers” was sometimes applied to them, it is 
possible they were related to the Sokoki 
or to the Pequawket. They had a large 
village at the mouth of Missisquoi r., 
in Franklin co., on L. Champlain, but 
abandoned it about 1730 on account of 
the ravages of an epidemic, and removed 
to St Francis, Quebec. They subse¬ 
quently sold their claims in Vermont to 
the “Seven Nations of Canada.” Chau¬ 
vignerie in 1736 gives 180 as the number 
of their warriors, indicating a popula¬ 
tion of 800. They seem to have been on 
peaceable terms with the Iroquois. 

(j. m. c. t. ) 

Masiassuck.—Douglass, Summary, I, 185, 1755. 
Massassuk.—La Tour, map, 1784. Messiasica.— 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816 (possibly 
the Missisauga). Michiskoui. — Chauvignerie 
(1736) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, III, 553, 1853. 
Misiskoui.—Beauharnois (1744) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., ix, 1110,1855 (village). Missiassik.—Vater, 
Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 390, 1816. Missiscoui.—De 
Bougainville (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 
607, 1858. Missiskouy.—Doc. of 1746, ibid., 32. 
Wanderers.—Chauvignerie, op. cit. (given as syn¬ 
onymous with Michiskoui). 

Missinquimeschan. A former Pianka- 
shaw (?) village near the site of Wash¬ 
ington, Daviess co., Ind.—Hough, map 
in Ind. Geol. Rep., 1883. Cf. Meshin- 
gornesia. 

Mission. One of the three bodies of 
Seaton Lake Lillooet on the w. side of 
Seaton lake, under the Williams Lake 
agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 73in 1906.—Can. 
Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 77, 1906. 

Mission (Burrard Inlet). The name 
given by the Canadian Dept, of Indian 
Affairs to one of six divisions of Squaw- 
mish under the Fraser River agency, 
Brit. Col.; pop. 213 in 1906. 


BULL. 30] 


MISSION INDIANS OF CALIFORNIA 


873 


Mission Indians of California. The first 
settlements in California were not made 
until more than a century after the ear¬ 
liest colonization of the peninsula of 



VICTORIANO, MISSION INDIAN (lUISENo), CALIFORNIA 


Lower California. The mission of San 
Diego, founded in 1769, was the first per¬ 
manent white settlement within the limits 
of the present state; it was followed by 
20 other Franciscan missions, founded at 
intervals until the year 1823 in the re¬ 
gion between San Diego and San Fran¬ 
cisco bay and just n. of the latter. With 
very few exceptions the Indians of this 
territory were brought under the influ¬ 
ence of the missionaries with compara¬ 
tively little difficulty, and more by per¬ 
suasion than by the use of force. There 
is scarcely a record of any resistance or 
rebellion on the part of the natives re¬ 
sulting in the loss of life of even a single 
Spaniard at any of the missions except at 
San Diego, where there occurred an insig¬ 
nificant outbreak a few years after the 
foundation. 

The influence of the missions was proba¬ 
bly greater temporally than spiritually. 
The Indians were taught and compelled 
to work at agricultural pursuits and to 
some extent even at trades. Discipline, 
while not severe, was rigid; refusal to 
work was met by deprivation of food, 
and absence from church or tardiness 
there, by corpora2 punishments andcon- 
finement. Consequently the Indians, 
while often displaying much personal af¬ 
fection for the missionaries themselves, 
were always inclined to be recalcitrant 


toward the system, which amounted to 
little else than beneficent servitude. 
There were many attempts at escape from 
the missions. Generally these were fruit¬ 
less, both on account of the presence of a 
few soldiers at each mission and through 
the aid given these by other Indians 
more under the fathers’ influence. The 
Indians at each mission lived at and 
about it, often in houses of native type 
and construction, but were dependent for 
most of their food directly on the authori¬ 
ties. They consisted of the tribes of the 
region in which the mission was founded 
and of more distant tribes, generally from 
the interior. In some cases these were 
easily induced to settle at the mission and 
to subject themselves to its discipline and 
routine, the neophytes afterward acting 
as agents to bring in their wilder brethren. 

The number of Indians at each mission 
varied from a few hundred to two or three 
thousand. There were thus in many cases 
settlements of considerable size; they pos¬ 
sessed large herds of cattle and sheep 
and controlled many square miles of land. 
Theoretically this wealth was all the prop¬ 
erty of the Indians, held in trust for them 
by the Franciscan fathers. In 1834 the 
Mexican government, against the protests 
of the missionaries, secularized the mis¬ 
sions. By this step the property of the 
missions was divided among the Indians, 
and they were freed from the restraint and 



WIFE OF VICTORIANO, MISSION INDIAN (lUISENo), CALIFORNIA 


authority of their former masters. In a 
very few years, as might have been ex¬ 
pected and as was predicted by the fath¬ 
ers, the Indians had been either deprived 






874 


MISSION VALLEY-MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


of their lands and property or had squan¬ 
dered them, and were living in a hope¬ 
less condition. Their numbers decreased 
rapidly, so that to-day in the region be¬ 
tween San Francisco and Santa Barbara 
there are probably fewer than 50 Indians. 
In s. California the decrease has been 
less rapid, and there are still about 3,000 
of what are known as Mission Indians; 
these are, however, all of Shoshonean 
or Yuman stock. The decrease of popu¬ 
lation began even during the mission 
period, and it is probable that the 
deaths exceeded the births at the missions 
from the first, though during the earlier 
years the population was maintained or 
even increased by accessions from uncon¬ 
verted tribes. At the time of seculariza¬ 
tion, in 1834, the population of many 
missions was less than a decade earlier. 
The total number of baptisms during the 
65 years of mission activity was about 
90,000, and the population in the terri¬ 
tory subject to mission influence may be 
estimated as having been at any one time 
from 35,000 to 45,000. At this propor¬ 
tion the population of the entire state, 
before settlement by the whites, would 
have been at least 100,000, and was prob¬ 
ably much greater. See California , In¬ 
dians of , with accompanying map, also 
Missions; Population. (a. l. k. ) 

Mission Valley. The local name of a 
band of Salish of Fraser superintendency, 
Brit. Col.—Can. Ind. Aff. 1878, 79, 1879. 

Missions. From the very discovery of 
America the spiritual welfare of the na¬ 
tive tribes was a subject of concern to the 
various colonizing nations, particularly 
Spain and France, with whom the Chris¬ 
tianization and civilization of the Indians 
were made a regular part of the govern¬ 
mental scheme, and the missionary was 
frequently the pioneer explorer and dip¬ 
lomatic ambassador. In the English 
colonization, on the other hand, the work 
was usually left to the zeal of the indi¬ 
vidual philanthropist or of voluntary 
organizations. 

First in chronologic order, historic im¬ 
portance, number of establishments, and 
population come the Catholic missions, 
conducted in the earlier period chiefly by 
.Jesuits among the French and by Fran¬ 
ciscans among the Spanish colonies. The 
earliest mission establishments within the 
present United States were those begun 
by the Spanish Franciscan Fathers, Pa¬ 
dilla, Juan de la Cruz, and Descalona of 
the Coronado expedition, among the 
Quivira (Wichita), Pecos, and Tigua in 
1542. Three years later the work was 
begun among the Texas tribes by Father 
Olmos. A century thereafter the first 
Protestant missions (Congregational) were 
founded by Mayhew and Eliot in Massa¬ 
chusetts. From that period the work 


w r as carried on both N. and S. until almost 
every denomination w*as represented, in¬ 
cluding Orthodox Russian in Alaska and 
the Mormons in Utah. 

The Southern States. —All of this re¬ 
gion, and even as far n. as Virginia, was 
loosely designated as Florida in the earlier 
period, and was entirely within the sphere 
of Spanish influence until about the end 
of the seventeenth century. The begin¬ 
ning of definite mission work in the Gulf 
territory w r as made in 1544 when the 
Catholic Franciscan Father Andres de 
Olmos, a veteran in the Mexican field, 
struck northward into the Texas wilder¬ 
ness, and after getting about him a consid¬ 
erable body of converts led them back into 
Tamaulipas, where, under the name of 
Olives, they were organized into a regular 
mission town. In 1549 the Dominican 
Father Luis Cancer with several compan¬ 
ions attempted a beginning on the w. coast 
of Florida, but w r as murdered by the In¬ 
dians almost as soon as his feet touched 
the land. In 1565 St Augustine (San 
Agustin) w r as founded and the w r ork of 
Christianizing the natives was actively 
taken up, first by the Jesuits, but later, 
probably in 1573, by the Franciscans, 
w ho continued with it to the end. Within 
tw enty years they had established a chain 
of flourishing missions along the coast 
from St Augustine to St Helena, in South 
Carolina, besides several others on the 
w. Florida coast. In 1597 a portion of 
the Guale tribe (possibly the Yamasi) on 
the lower Georgia coast, under the leader¬ 
ship of a rival claimant for the chieftain¬ 
ship, attacked the neighboring missions 
and killed several of the missionaries 
before the friendly Indians could gather 
to the rescue. In consequence of this 
blow the work languished for several 
years, when it was taken up with greater 
zeal than before and the field extended 
to the interior tribes. By the year 1615 
there were 20 missions, with about 40 
Franciscan workers, established in Florida 
and the dependent coast region. The 
most noted of these missionaries is Father 
Francisco Pareja, author of a grammar 
and several devotional works in the Ti- 
mucua language, the first books ever 
printed in any Indian language of the 
United States and the basis for the estab¬ 
lishment of the Timucuan linguistic 
family. In the year 1655 the Christian 
Indian population of n. Florida and the 
Georgia coast was estimated at 26,000. 
The most successful result was obtained 
among the Timucua in the neighborhood 
of St Augustine and the Apalachee around 
the bay of that name. In 1687 the Ya¬ 
masi attacked and destroyed the mission 
of Santa Catalina on the Georgia coast, 
and to escape pursuit fled to the English 
colony of Carolina. The traveler Dick- 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


875 


enson has left a pleasant picture of the 
prosperous condition of the mission towns 
and their Indian population as he found 
them in 1699, which contrasts strongly 
with the barbarous condition of the 
heathen tribes farther s., among whom 
he had been a prisoner. 

The English colony of Carolina had 
been founded in 1663, with a charter 
which was soon after extended southward 
to lat. 29°, thus including almost the 
whole area of Spanish occupancy and 
mission labor. The steadily-growing hos¬ 
tility between the two nations culmi¬ 
nated in the winter of 1703-4, when Gov. 
Moore, of Carolina, with a small force of 
white men and a thousand or more well- 
armed warriors of Creek, Catawba, and 
other savage allies invaded the Apalachee 
country, destroyed one mission town af¬ 
ter another, with their churches, fields, 
and orange groves, killed hundreds of 
their people, and carried away 1,400 
prisoners to be sold as slaves. Antici¬ 
pating the danger, the Apalachee had 
applied to the governor at St Augustine 
for guns with which to defend themselves, 
but had been refused, in accordance with 
the Spanish rule which forbade the is¬ 
suing of firearms to Indians. The result 
was the destruction of the tribe and the 
reversion of the country to a wilderness 
condition, as Bartram found it 70 years 
later. In 1706 a second expedition visited 
a similar fate upon the Timucua, and the 
ruin of the Florida missions was complete. 
Some effort was made a few years later 
by an Apalachee chief to gather the rem¬ 
nant of his people into a new mission 
settlement near Pensacola, but with only 
temporary result. 

In the meantime the French had ef¬ 
fected lodgment at Biloxi, Miss. (1699), 
Mobile, New Orleans, and along the Mis¬ 
sissippi, and the work of evangelizing the 
wild tribes was taken up at once by secu¬ 
lar priests from the Seminary of Foreign 
Missions in Quebec. Stations were es¬ 
tablished among the Tunica, Natchez, 
and Choctaw of Mississippi, the Taensa, 
Huma, and Ceni (Caddo) of Louisiana, 
but with slight result. Among the 
Natchez particularly, whose elaborately 
organized native ritual included human 
sacrifice, not a single convert rewarded 
several years of labor. In 1725 several 
Jesuits arrived at New Orleans and took 
up their work in what was already an 
abandoned field, extending their effort 
to the Alibamu, in the present state of 
Alabama. On Sunday, Nov. 28,1729, the 
Natchez war began with the massacre of 
the French garrison while at prayer, the 
first victim being the Jesuit Du Poisson, 
the priest at the altar. The “Louisiana 
Mission,” as it was called, had never 
flourished, and the events and after con¬ 


sequences of this war demoralized it until 
it came to an end with the expulsion of 
the Jesuits by royal decree in 1764. 

The advance of the French along the 
Mississippi and the Gulf coast aroused 
the Spanish authorities to the importance 
of Texas, and shortly after the failure of 
La Salle’s expedition 8 Spanish presidio 
missions were established in that terri¬ 
tory. Each station was in charge of two 
or three Franciscan missionaries, with 
several families of civilized Indians from 
Mexico, a full equipment of stock and im¬ 
plements for farmers, and a small guard 
of soldiers. Plans were drawn for the 
colonization of the Indians around the 
missions, their instruction in religion, 
farming, and simple trades and home 
life, and in the Spanish language. Through 
a variety of misfortunes the first attempt 
proved a failure and the work was aban¬ 
doned until 1717 (or earlier, according to 
La Harpe), when it was resumed—still 
under the Franciscans—among the various 
subtribes of the Caddo, Tonkawa, Carri- 
zos, and others. The most important cen¬ 
ter was at San Antonio, where there was a 
group of 4 missions, includingSan Antonio 
dePadua,the famous Alamo. Themission 
of San Sabd was established among the Li- 
pan in 1757, but was destroyed soon after 
by the liosti le Comanche. A more success¬ 
ful foundation was begun in 1791 among 
the now extinct Karankawa. At their 
highest estate, probably about the year 
1760, the Indian population attached to 
the various Tjexas missions numbered 
about 15,000. In this year Father Bar- 
tolom<3 Garcia published a religious man¬ 
ual for the use of the converts at San 
Antonio mission, which remains almost 
the only linguistic monument of the Co- 
ahuiltecan stock. The missions contin¬ 
ued to flourish until 1812, when they were 
suppressed by the Spanish Government 
and the Indians scattered, some rejoining 
the wild tribes, while others were ab¬ 
sorbed into the Mexican population. 

In 1735 the Moravians under Spangen- 
berg started a school among the Yama- 
craw Creeks a few miles above Savannah, 
Ga., which continued until 1739, when, 
on refusal of the Moravians to take up 
arms against the Spaniards, they were 
forced to leave the colony. This seems 
to be the only attempt at mission work 
in either Georgia or South Carolina from 
the withdrawal of the Spaniards until the 
Moravian establishment at Spring Place, 
Ga., in 1801. 

The great Cherokee tribe held the moun¬ 
tain region of both Carolinas, Georgia, 
Alabama, and Tennessee, and for our 
purpose their territory may be treated as 
a whole. Dismissing as doubtful Bris- 
tock’s account, quoted by Shea, of a 
Cherokee mission in 1643, the earliest 


876 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


missionary work among them appears to 
have been that of the mysterious Chris¬ 
tian Priber, supposed, though not proven, 
to have been a French Jesuit , who estab¬ 
lished his headquarters among them at 
Tellico, e. Tenn., in 1736, and proceeded 
to organize them into a regular civilized 
form of government. After 5 years of 
successful progress he was seized by the 
South Carolina authorities, who regarded 
him as a French political emissary, and 
died while in prison. In 1801 the Mora¬ 
vians Steiner and Byhan began the Cher¬ 
okee mission of Spring Place, n. w. Ga., 
and in 1821 the same denomination es¬ 
tablished another at Oothcaloga, in the 
same vicinity. Both of these existed 
until the missions were broken up by the 
State of Georgia in 1843. In 1804 Rev. 
Gideon Blackburn, for the Presbyterians, 
established a Cherokee mission school in 
e. Tennessee, which did good work for 
several years until compelled to suspend 
for lack of funds. In 1817 the American 
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Mis¬ 
sions, under joint Congregational and 
Presbyterian management, established its 
first station in the tribe at Brainerd, not 
far from the present Chattanooga, Tenn., 
followed within a few years by several 
others, all of which were in flourishing 
condition when broken up in the Re¬ 
moval controversy in 1834. Among the 
most noted of these missionaries was 
Rev. S. A. Worcester, one of the princi¬ 
pals in the founding of the ‘Cherokee 
Phoenix’ in 1828, the author of a large 
number of religious and other transla¬ 
tions into Cherokee and the steadfast 
friend of the Indians in the controversy 
with the State of Georgia. He ministered 
to the tribe from his ordination in 1825 
until his death in 1859, first in the old 
nation and afterward at Dwight, Ark., 
and Park Hill, near Tahlequah, Ind. 
T. Of an earlier period was Rev. Dan¬ 
iel S. Buttrick, 1817-47, who, however, 
never mastered the language sufficiently 
to preach without an interpreter. A na¬ 
tive convert of the same period, David 
Brown, completed a manuscript transla¬ 
tion of the New Testament into the new 
Cherokee syllabary in 1825. 

In 1820 the American Board, through 
Rev. Mr Chapman, established Dwight 
mission for the Arkansas Cherokee, on 
Illinois cr., about 5 m. above its junction 
with the Arkansas, near the present Dar- 
danelle, Ark. Under Rev. Cephas Wash¬ 
burn it grew to be perhaps the most im¬ 
portant mission station in the S. W. until 
the removal of the tribe to Indian Ter., 
about 1839. From this station some atten¬ 
tion also was given to the Osage. Of these 
missions of the American Board, Morse 
says officially in 1822: “ They have been 
models, according to which other societies 


have since made their establishments.” 
As was then customary, they were largely 
aided by Government appropriation. On 
the consolidation of the whole Cherokee 
nation in Indian Ter. the missionaries 
followed, and new stations were estab¬ 
lished which, with some interruptions, 
remained in operation until the outbreak 
of the Civil war. 

In 1820 a Baptist mission was established 
at Valley town, near the present Murphy, 
w. N. Car., in charge of Rev. Thomas Po¬ 
sey, and in 1821 another of the same de¬ 
nomination at Coosawatee, Ga. A few years 
later the Valley town mission was placed 
in charge of Rev. Evan Jones, who con¬ 
tinued with it until the removal of the 
tribe to the W. He edited for some time 
a journal called the ‘Cherokee Messen¬ 
ger,’ in the native language and syllabary, 
and also made a translation of the New 
Testament. The mission work was re¬ 
sumed in the new country and continued 
with a large measure of success down to 
the modern period. Among the promi¬ 
nent native workers may be named Rev. 
Jesse Bushyhead. 

After many years of neglect the Musk- 
hogean tribes again came in for attention. 
In 1818 the Congregational-Presbyterian 
American Board, through Rev. Cyrus 
Kingsbury, established the first station 
among the Choctaw at Eliot, on Yala- 
busha r. in n. Miss. Three years later 
it was placed in charge of Rev. Cyrus 
Byington, the noted Choctaw philolo¬ 
gist, who continued in the work there 
and in the Indian Ter., for nearly half a 
century, until his death in 1868. The 
Eliot mission in its time was one of the 
most important in the southern country. 
In 1820 a second Choctaw mission, called 
Mayhew, was begun, and became the 
residence of Rev. Alfred Wright, also 
known for his linguistic work. On the 
removal of the tribe to Indian Ter., about 
1830, it became necessary to abandon 
these stations and establish others in the 
new country beyond the Mississippi. 
Among the most noted was Whee- 
lock, organized by Rev. Alfred Wright 
in 1832. Others were Stockbridge, Ben¬ 
nington, Mt Pleasant, and Spencer Acad¬ 
emy. The American Board alsoextended 
its effort to the immigrant Creeks, estab¬ 
lishing in their nation, under the super¬ 
vision of Rev. R. M. Lough ridge, Kowetah 
(Kawita) mission in 1843, and Tulla- 
hassee shortly after, with Oak Ridge, 
among the removed Seminole, a few 
years later. Most of these continued 
until the outbreak of the Civil war, and 
were reorganized after the war was over. 
The school at Cornwall, Conn., was also 
conducted as an auxiliary to the mission 
work of the earlier period (see New Eng¬ 
land ) . Among the Presbyterian workers 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


877 


who have rendered distinguished service 
to Muskhogean philology in the way of 
religious, educational, and dictionary 
translation may be noted the names of 
Byington, Williams, Alfred and Allen 
Wright, for the Choctaw, with Fleming, 
Loughridge, Ramsay, Winslett, Mrs Rob¬ 
ertson, and the Perrymans (Indian) for 
the Creeks. 

The Baptists began work in the Indian 
Ter. about 1832, and three years later 
had 4 missionaries at as many stations 
among the Choctaw, all salaried as 
teachers by the United States, “so that 
these stations were all sustained without 
cost to the funds which benevolence pro¬ 
vided for many purposes ’ ’ (McCoy). In 
1839 they were in charge of Revs. Smed- 
ley, Potts, Hatch, and Dr Allen, respect¬ 
ively. Missions were established about 
the same time among the Creeks, the 
most noted laborers in the latter field 
being Rev. H. F. Buckner, from 1849 
until his death in 1882, compiler of a 
Muskogee grammar and other works in 
the language, with Rev. John Davis and 
Rev. James Perryman, native ministers 
w r ho had received their education at the 
Union (Presbyterian) mission among the 
Osage (see Interior States). As auxiliary 
to the work of this denomination, for the 
special purpose of training native work¬ 
ers, the American Baptist Board in 1819 
established at Great Crossings, in Ken¬ 
tucky, a higher school, known as the 
Choctaw Academy, sometimes as John¬ 
son’s Academy. Although intended for 
promising youth of every tribe, its pupils 
came chiefly from the Choctaw and the 
Creeks until its discontinuance about 
1843, in consequence of the Indian prefer¬ 
ence for home schools. 

Work was begun by the Methodists 
among the Creeks in Indian Ter. about 
1835, but was shortly afterward discon¬ 
tinued in consequence of difficulties with 
the tribe, and was not resumed until some 
years later. 

M iddle Atlantic States. The earliest 
mission establishment within this territory 
was that founded by a company of 8 Span¬ 
ish Jesuits and lay brothers with a num¬ 
ber of educated Indian boys, under Father 
Juan Bautista Segura, at “Axacan,” in 
Virginia, in 1570. The exact location is 
uncertain, but it seems to have been on or 
near the lower James or Pamunkey r. It 
was of brief existence. Hardly had the 
bark chapel been erected when the party 
was attacked by the Indians, led by a 
treacherous native interpreter, and the 
entire company massacred, with the ex¬ 
ception of a single boy. The massacre 
was avenged by Menendez two years later, 
but the mission effort was not renewed. 

The next undertaking was that of the 
English Jesuits who accompanied the 


Maryland colony in 1633. The work was 
chiefly among the Conoy and Patuxent of 
Maryland, with incidental attention to the 
Virginia tribes. Several stations were es¬ 
tablished and their work, with the excep¬ 
tion of a short period of warfare in 1639, 
was very successful, the principal chiefs 
being numbered among the converts, until 
the proscription of the Catholic religion by 
the Cromwell party in 1649. The leader 
of the Maryland mission was Father An¬ 
drew White, author of the oft-quoted 
“Relatio” and of a grammar and diction¬ 
ary of the Piscataway (?) language. 

The New York mission began in 1642, 
among the Mohawk, with the ministra¬ 
tion of the heroic Jesuit captive, Father 
Isaac Jogues, who met a cruel death at 
the hands of the same savages 4 years 
later. During a temporary peace between 
the French and the Iroquois in 1653 a 
regular post and mission church were 
built at Onondaga, the capital of the con¬ 
federacy, by permission of the league. 
The Oneida, Cayuga, and Seneca invited 
and received missionaries. Much of their 
welcome was undoubtedly due to the 
presence in the Iroquois villages of 
large numbers of incorporated Chris¬ 
tian captives from the destroyed Huron 
nation. The truce lasted but a short time, 
however, and before the summer of 1658 
the missionaries had withdrawn and the 
war was again on. In 1666 peace was re¬ 
newed and within a short time missions 
were again founded among all the tribes. 
In 1669 a few Christian Iroquois, sojourn¬ 
ing at the Huron mission of Lorette, 
near Quebec, Canada, withdrew and 
formed a new mission settlement near 
Montreal, at a place on the St Lawrence 
known as La Prairie, or under its mis¬ 
sion name, St Francois Xavier des Pres, 
the precursor of the later St Francois 
Xavier du Sault and the modern Caugh- 
nawaga. The new town soon became the 
rallying point for all the Christian Iro¬ 
quois, who removed to it in large num¬ 
bers from all the tribes of the confed¬ 
eracy, particularly from the Mohawk 
towns. There also gathered the Huron 
and other Christian captives from among 
the Iroquois, as also many converts from 
all the various eastern Algonquian tribes 
in the French alliance. To this period 
belongs the noted Jesuit scholar, Etienne 
de Carheil, who, arriving in 1666, de¬ 
voted the remaining 60 years of his life 
to work among the Cayuga, Hurons, and 
Ottawa, mastering all three languages, 
and leaving behind him a manuscript 
dictionary of Huron radices in Latin and 
French. 

In 1668 also a considerable body of 
Christian Cayuga and other Iroquois, to¬ 
gether with some adopted Hurons, crossed 
Lake Ontario from Now York and set- 


878 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


tied on the n. shore in the neighborhood 
of Quinte bay. At their request Sulpician 
priests were sent to minister to them, but 
within a few years the immigrant Indians 
had either returned to their original 
country or scattered among the other 
Canadian missions. In 1676 the Catholic 
Iroquois mission town of The Mountain 
was founded by the Sulpician fathers 
on the island of Montreal, with a well- 
organized industrial school in charge 
of the Congregation sisters. In conse¬ 
quence of these removals from the Iro¬ 
quois country and the breaking out of a 
new war with the Five Tribes in 1687, 
the Jesuit missions in New York were 
brought to a close. In the seven years’ 
war that followed, Christian Iroquois of 
the missions and heathen Iroquois of the 
Five Nations fought against each other as 
allies of French or English, respectively. 
The Mountain was abandoned in 1704, 
and the mission transferred to a new site 
at the Sault au Recollet, n. of Montreal. 
In 1720 this w r as again removed to the 
Lake of Tw o Mountains (Oka, or Canasa- 
daga) on the same island of Montreal, 
w y here the Iroquois were joined by the 
Nipissing and Algonkin, of the former Sul¬ 
pician mission tow n of Isle aux Tourtes. 
Among the noted workers identified with 
it, all of the scholarly Sulpician order, 
may be named Revs. Deper6t, Giien, 
Mathevet, 1746-81; De Terlaye, 1754-77; 
Guichart, Dufresne, and Jean Andre Cuoq, 
1843-90. Several of these gave attention 
also to the Algonkin connected with the 
same mission, and to the Iroquois of St 
Regis and other stations. All of them 
were fluent masters of the Iroquois lan¬ 
guage, and have left important contribu¬ 
tions to , philology, particularly Cuoq, 
whose “Etudos philologiques” and Iro¬ 
quois dictionary remain our standard au¬ 
thorities. 

All effort among the villages of the 
confederacy was finally abandoned, in 
consequence of the mutual hostility of 
France and England. In 1748 the Sul¬ 
pician Father Francois Picquet founded 
the new mission settlement of Presenta¬ 
tion on the St Lawrence at Oswegatchie, 
the present Ogdensburg, N. Y., which 
w ithin three years had a prosperous pop¬ 
ulation of nearly 400 families, drawn 
chiefly from the Onondaga and Cayuga 
tribes. About 1756 the still existing mis¬ 
sion town of St Francis Regis (St Regis), 
on the s. side of the St Lawrence where 
the Canada-New York boundary inter¬ 
sects it, was founded under Jesuit aus¬ 
pices by Iroquois emigrants from Caugh- 
nawaga mission. The Oswegatchie set¬ 
tlement declined after the Revolution un¬ 
til its abandonment in 1807. Caughna- 
waga, St Regis, and Lake of Tw t o Moun¬ 
tains still exist as Catholic Iroquois mis¬ 


sion towns, the two first named being the 
largest Indian settlements n. of Mexico. 

About the year 1755 the first mission in 
w. Pennsylvania was established among 
the Delawares at Sawcunk, on Beaver 
r., by the Jesuit Virot, but was soon 
discontinued, probably on account of the 
breaking out of the French and Indian 
war. 

Philology owes much to the labor of 
these missionaries, particularly to the 
earlier Jesuit, Jacques Bruy as, and the 
later secular priest, Father Joseph Mar- 
coux (St Regis and Caughnaw^aga, 1813, 
until his death in 1855), whose monu- 
mentablroquois grammar and dictionary 
is the fruit of forty years’ residence with 
the tribe. Of Father Bruyas, connected 
with the Sault Ste Louis (Caughnaw aga) 
and other Iroquois missions from 1667 un¬ 
til his death in 1712, during a part of which 
period he was superior of all the Canadian 
missions, it w r as said that he w as a master 
of the Mohaw r k language, speaking it as 
fluently as his native French, his diction¬ 
ary of Mohawk root words being still a 
standard. Father Antoine Rinfret, 1796- 
1814, has left a body of more than 2,000 
quarto pages of manuscript sermons in the 
Mohawk language; while Rev. Nicolas 
Burtin, of Caughnawaga (1855- ), is an 
even more voluminous author. 

The Lutheran minister, John Campa- 
nius Holm (commonly know r n as Campa- 
nius), chaplain of the Swedish colony in 
Delaware in 1643-48, gave much attention 
to missionary work among the neighbor¬ 
ing Indians and translated a catechism 
into the Delaware language. This seems 
to have been the only missionary work 
in the Atlantic states by that denomina¬ 
tion. 

Under the encouragement of the Eng¬ 
lish colonial government the Episcopa¬ 
lians, constituting the established Church 
of England, undertook work among the 
Iroquois tribesof New York as early as the 
beginning of the 18th century. In 1700 a 
Dutch Calvinist minister at Schenectady, 
Rev. Bernardus Freeman, who had already 
given sufficient attention to the Mohawk 
to acquire the language, was employed to 
prepare some Gospel and ritual transla¬ 
tions, which formed the basis of the first 
booklet in the language, published in Bos¬ 
ton in 1707. In 1712 the English Society 
for the Propagation of the Gospel sent out 
Rev. William Andrews, who, with the as¬ 
sistance of a Dutch interpreter, Lawrence 
Claesse, and of Rev. Bernardus Freeman, 
translated and published a great part of 
the liturgy and some parts of the Bible 
3 years later. The work grew and ex¬ 
tended to other tribes of the Iroquois con¬ 
federacy, being especially fostered at a 
later period by Sir William Johnson, su¬ 
perintendent for Indian affairs, w’ho had 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


879 


published at his own expense, in 1769, a 
new edition of the Episcopalian liturgy in 
the Mohawk language, the joint work of 
several missionaries, principal of whom 
was Rev. Henry Barclay. From this time 
until 1777 the principal worker in the 
tribe was Rev. John Stuart, who trans¬ 
lated the New Testament into Iroquois. 
On the removal of the Mohawk and 
others of the Iroquois to Canada, in con¬ 
sequence of the Revolutionary war, a new 
edition was prepared by Daniel Claus, 
official interpreter, and published under 
the auspices of the Canadian provincial 
government. In 1787 a new translation 
of the Book of Common Prayer, prepared 
by the noted chief, Joseph Brant (see 
Theyandanega), who had been a pupil of 
Wheel ock’s school, in Connecticut, was 
published at the expense of the English 
Government. In 1816 another edition 
appeared, prepared by the Rev. Eleazer 
Williams, a mixed-blood Caughnawaga, 
sometimes claimed as the “Lost Dau¬ 
phin.” Mr Williams labored chiefly 
among the Oneida in New York. He was 
succeeded, about 1821, by Solomon Davis, 
who followed thetribe in the emigration to 
Wisconsin. The latter was the author of 
several religious books in the Oneida dia¬ 
lect, including another edition of the Book 
of Common Prayer, published in 1837. 
In 1822 the Society for the Propagation 
of the Gospel, already noted, definitely 
transferred its operations to the Iroquois 
res., on Grand r., Ontario, where it still 
continues, its principal establishment be¬ 
ing the Mohawk Institute, near Brant¬ 
ford. For this later period the most dis¬ 
tinguished name is that of Rev. Abraham 
Nelles, chief missionary to the Six Nations 
of Canada for more than 50 years, almost 
up to his death in 1884. He was also the 
author of a translation of the Common 
Prayer, in which he was aided by an 
educated native, Aaron Hill. (See also 
Canada , East.) 

Of less historic importance was the 
Munsee mission of Crossweeksung, near 
the present Freehold, N. J., conducted 
by Rev. David Brainerd for the Society 
for the Propagation of the Gospel, in 
1746-47. 

In Virginia a school for the education 
of Indians was established in connection 
with William and Mary College, Wil¬ 
liamsburg, about 1697, chiefly through 
the effort of Mr Robert Boyle, and some 
Indians were still under instruction there 
as late as 1760. Some earlier plans to the 
same end had been frustrated by the out¬ 
break of the Indian war of 1622 (Stith). 
Under Gov. Spotswood a school w T as es¬ 
tablished among the Saponi about 1712, 
but had only a brief existence. Both of 
these may be considered as under Epis¬ 
copalian auspices. 


In 1766, the Congregational minister 
Rev. Samuel Kirkland began among the 
Oneida of New York the work which he 
conducted with success for a period of 
nearly 40 years. The Stockbridge and 
Brotherton missions in New York and 
Wisconsin by the same denomination are 
properly a continuation of New England 
history, and are so treated in this article. 
To a later period belongs the Congrega¬ 
tional mission among the Seneca of New 
York, maintained by Rev. Asher Wright 
from his first appointment in 1831 until 
his death in 1875. A fluent master of 
Seneca, he was the author of a number 
of religious and educational works in the 
language, besides for some years publish¬ 
ing a journal of miscellany in the same 
dialect. 

The Friends , or Quakers, in Pennsylva¬ 
nia and New Jersey, from their first com¬ 
ing among the Indians, had uniformly 
cultivated kindly relations with them, 
and had taken every opportunity to en¬ 
force the teachings of Christianity by 
word and example, but seem not to have 
engaged in any regular mission work or 
established any mission schools in either 
of these colonies. 

As early as 1791 the noted Seneca 
chief, Cornplanter, impressed by the ef¬ 
forts of the Quakers to bring about a 
friendly feeling between the two races, 
requested the Philadelphia yearly meet¬ 
ing to take charge of three boys of his 
tribe for education, one of theip being 
his own son. In 1796 the meeting be¬ 
gan regular work among the Iroquois 
in New York by establishing three 
workers among the Oneida and the 
Tuscarora. These teachers gave first at¬ 
tention to the building of a mill and a 
blacksmith shop, the introduction of farm 
tools, and the instruction of the Indians 
in their use. The women were instructed 
in household duties, including spinning 
and weaving. A school was also com¬ 
menced, and the work progressed until 
1799, when, in consequence of the sus¬ 
picions of the Indians as to the ultimate 
purpose, the Quakers withdrew, leaving 
all their working plant behind. In 1798, 
on invitation of the Seneca, they estab¬ 
lished a similar working mission on the 
Allegany res., and later at Cattaraugus and 
Tunesassah, with the good result that in 
a few years most of the bark cabins had 
given place to log houses, and drunken¬ 
ness was almost unknown. They re¬ 
mained undisturbed through the war of 
1812, at one time forestalling a smallpox 
epidemic by the vaccination of about 1,000 
Indians, but were soon afterward called 
on to champion the cause of their wards 
against the efforts at removal to the W. 
In the meantime the New York meeting, 
about 1807, had started schools among the 


880 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


Stockbridge and Brotherton tribes from 
New England, then living in the Oneida 
country. Owing to the drinking habits 
of the Indians, but little result was accom¬ 
plished. The removal of the Oneida and 
Stockbridges, about 1822, and the subse¬ 
quent disturbed condition of the tribes 
brought about, first, the curtailment of 
the work, and afterward its abandonment, 
about 1843. 

In 1740 the Moravian missionary, Chris¬ 
tian Rauch, began a mission among the 
Mahican at Shecomeco, near the present 
Pine Plains, Dutchess co., N. Y., which 
attained a considerable measure of success 
until the hostility of the colonial govern¬ 
ment, instigated by the jealousy of those 
who had traded on the vices of the In¬ 
dians, compelled its abandonment about 
5 years later. During its continuance 
the work had been extended, in 1742, to 
the Scaticook, a mixed band of Mahican 
and remnant tribes settled just across the 
line, about the present Kent, Conn. Here 
a flourishing church was soon built up, 
with every prospect of a prosperous fu¬ 
ture, when the blow came. Some of the 
converts followed their teachers to the 
W.; the rest, left without help, relapsed 
into barbarism. The Shecomeco colony 
removed to Pennsylvania, where, after a 
a brief stay at Bethlehem, the Moravian 
central station, a new mission, including 
both Mahican and Delawares, was estab¬ 
lished in 1746 at Gnadenhuetten, on Ma¬ 
honing r., near its junction with the Le¬ 
high. A chief agent in the arrangements 
was the noted philanthropist, Count Zin- 
zendorf. Gnadenhuetten grew rapidly, 
soon having a Christian Indian congrega¬ 
tion of 500. Missions were founded at 
Shamokin and other villages in e. Penn¬ 
sylvania, which were attended also by 
Shawnee and Nanticoke, besides one in 
charge of Rev. David Zeisberger among 
the Onondaga, in New York. The mis¬ 
sionaries, as a rule, if not always, served 
without salary and supported themselves 
by their own labors. All went well until 
the beginning of the French and Indian 
war, when, on Nov. 24, 1755, Gnaden¬ 
huetten was attacked by the hostile sav¬ 
ages, the missionaries and their families 
massacred, and the mission destroyed. 
The converts were scattered, butafter some 
period of wandering were again gathered 
into a new mission at Nain, near Bethle¬ 
hem, Pa. On the breaking out of Pontiac’s 
war in 1763 an order was issued by the 
Pennsylvania government for the convey¬ 
ance of the converts to Philadelphia. 
This was accordingly done, and they 
were detained there" under guard, but 
attended by their missionary, Bernhard 
Grube, until the close of the war, suffer¬ 
ing every hardship and in constant dan¬ 
ger of massacre by the excited borderers. 


On the conclusion of peace they estab¬ 
lished themselves on the Susquehanna at 
a new town, which was named Friedens- 
huetten, near the Delaware village of 
Wyalusing. In 1770 they again removed 
to Friedensstadt, on Beaver cr., in w. 
Pennsylvania, under charge of Zeis¬ 
berger, and two years later made another 
removal to the Muskingum r., in Ohio, 
by permission of the western Delawares. 
By the labor of the missionaries, David 
Zeisberger, Bishop John Ettwein, Johan¬ 
nes Roth, and the noted John Hecke- 
welder, who accompanied them to the 
W., the villages of Schoenbrunn and 
Gnadenhuetten were established in the 
midst of the wild tribes within the pres¬ 
ent limits of Tuscarawas co., the first- 
named being occupied chiefly by Dela¬ 
wares, the other by Mahican. The 
Freidensstadt settlement was now aban¬ 
doned. In 1776 a third village, Lichte- 
nau (afterward Salem), was founded, 
and the Moravian work reached its high¬ 
est point of prosperity, the whole convert 
population including about 500 souls. 
Then came the Revolution, by which the 
missions were utterly demoralized until 
the culminating tragedy of Gnadenhuet¬ 
ten, Mar. 8, 1782, when nearly 100 Chris¬ 
tian Indians, after having been bound 
together in pairs, were barbarously mas¬ 
sacred by a party of Virginia borderers. 
Once more the missionaries, Zeisberger 
and Heckewelder, gathered their scat¬ 
tered flock, and after another period of 
wandering, settled in 1787 at New Salem, 
at the mouth of Huron r., L. Erie, n. 
Ohio. A part of them settled, by in¬ 
vitation of the British Government, at 
Fairfield, or Moraviantown, on Thames 
r., Ontario, in 1790, under the leadership 
of Rev. Christian Dencke, while the rest 
were reestablished in 1798 on lands 
granted by the United States at their 
former towns on the Muskingum. Here 
Zeisberger died in 1808, after more than 
60 years of faithful ministry without sal¬ 
ary. He is known to philologists as the 
author of a grammar and dictionary of 
the Onondaga, besides several smaller 
works in the Delaware language. 

The mission, by this time known as 
Goshen, was much disturbed by the War 
of 1812, and the subsequent settlement of 
the country by the whites so far demor¬ 
alized it that in 1823 those then in charge 
brought it to a close, a small part of the 
Indians removing to the W., constituting 
the present Munsee Christians in Kansas, 
while the remainder joined their brethren 
in Ontario, Canada. The latter, whose 
own settlement also had been broken up 
by the events of the same war, had been 
gathered a few years before into a new 
town called New Fairfield, by Rev. Mr 
Dencke, already mentioned, who had also 


BULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


881 


done work among the Chippewa. Dencke 
died in retirement in 1839, after more than 
40 years of missionary service, leaving as 
his monument a manuscript dictionary of 
the Delaware language and minor printed 
works, including one in Chippewa. The 
Moravian mission at New Fairfield was 
kept up for a number of years after his 
death, but was at last discontinued, and 
both the “Moravians” and the “Mun- 
sees” of the Thames are now credited 
officially either to the Methodist or to the 
Episcopal (Anglican) church (see Canada , 
East). 

The Munsee who had removed with the 
Delawares to Kansas were followed a few 
years later by Moravian workers from 
Canada, who, before 1840, had a success¬ 
ful mission among them, which continued 
until the diminishing band ceased to be 
of importance. Among the workers of 
this later period may be named Rev. 
Abraham Luckenbach, “the last of the 
Moravian Lenapists,” who ministered to 
his flock during a 6 years’ sojourn in 
Indiana, and later in Canada, from 1800 
to his death in 1854, and was the author 
of several religious works in the language. 
Dencke, founder of the Thames r. colony, 
w T as also the author of a considerable 
manuscript religious work in the language 
and probably also of a grammar and dic¬ 
tionary. 

Another Moravian missionary, Rev. 
John C. Pyrlseus, labored among the Mo¬ 
hawk from 1744 to 1751, and has left sev¬ 
eral manuscript grammatic and devotional 
works in that and the cognate dialects, as 
also in Mahican and Delaware. For sev¬ 
eral years he acted as instructor in lan¬ 
guages to the candidates for the mission 
service. Rev. Johannes Roth, who ac¬ 
companied the removal to Ohio in 1772, 
before that time had devoted a number 
of years to the work in Pennsylvania, 
and is the author of a unique and impor¬ 
tant religious treatise in the Unami dia¬ 
lect of the Delaware. 

A remarkable testimony to the value of 
the simple life consistently followed by 
the Moravians is afforded in the age at¬ 
tained by many of their missionaries in 
spite of all the privations of the wilder¬ 
ness, and almost without impairment of 
their mental faculties, viz: Pyrlaeus, 72 
years; Heckewelder, 80; Ettwein, 82; 
Zeisberger, 87, and Grube, 92. 

New England. —The earliest New Eng¬ 
land mission was attempted by the French 
Jesuit Father Peter Biard among the 
Abnaki on Mt Desert id., Maine, in 1613, 
in connection with a French post, but 
both were destroyed by an English fleet 
almost before the buildings were com¬ 
pleted. In the next 70 years other 
Jesuits, chief among whom was Father 
Gabriel Druillettes (1646-57), spent much 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-56 


time in the Abnaki villages and drew off 
so many converts to the A Igonkin mis¬ 
sion of Sillery (see Canada , East ) as to 
make it practically an Abnaki mission. 
In 1683 the mission of St Francis de Sales 
(q. v.) was founded at the Falls of the 
Chaudiere, Quebec, and two years later 
Sillery was finally abandoned for the 
new site. Among those gathered at St 
Francis were many refugees from the 
southern New England tribes, driven out 
by King Philip’s war, the Pennacook and 
southern Abnaki being especially numer¬ 
ous. In 1700 the mission was removed 
to its present location, and during the 
colonial period continued to be recruited 
by refugees from the New England tribes. 
About 1685 missions were established 
among the Penobscot and the Passama- 
quoddy, and in 1695 the celebrated Jesuit 
Father Sebastian Rale (Rasle, Rasies) 
began at the Abnaki mission at Norridge- 
wock on the Kennebec (the present In¬ 
dian Old Point, Me.) the work which is 
so inseparably connected with his name. 
He was not, however, the founder of the 
mission, as the church was already built 
and nearly the whole tribe Christian. In 
1705 the church and village were burned 
by the New Englanders, but rebuilt by the 
Indians. In 1713 a small band removed 
to the St Lawrence and settled at Becan- 
cour, Quebec, where their descendants 
still remain. In 1722 the mission was 
again attacked and pillaged by a force of 
more than 200 men, but the alarm was 
iven in time and the village was found 
eserted. As a part of the plunder the 
raiders carried off the manuscript Abnaki 
dictionary to which Rale had devoted 
nearly 30 years of study, and which ranks 
as one of the great monuments of our 
aboriginal languages. On Aug. 23, 1724, 
a third attack was made by the New 
England men, with a party of Mohawk 
allies, and the congregation scattered after 
a defense in which seven chiefs fell, the 
missionary was kil led, scalped, and hacked 
to pieces, and the church plundered and 
burned. Rale was then 66 years of age. 
His dictionary, preserved at Harvard 
University, was published in 1833, and 
in the same year a monument was erected 
on the spot where he met his death. 
The mission site remained desolate, a 
large part of the Indians joining their 
kindred at St Francis. The minor sta¬ 
tions on the Penobscot and St John con¬ 
tinued for a time, but steadily declined 
under the constant colonial warfare. In 
1759 the Canadian Abnaki mission of St 
Francis, then a large and flourishing vil¬ 
lage, was attacked by a New England 
force under Col. Rogers and destroyed, 
200 Indians being killed. It was after¬ 
ward rebuilt, the present site being best 
known as Pierreville, Quebec. The Ab- 


882 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


naki missions in Maine were restored 
after the Revolution and are still con¬ 
tinued by Jesuit priests among the Penob¬ 
scot and the Passamaquoddy. 

Among other names distinguished in 
the Abnaki mission the first place must 
be given to the Jesuits Aubery and 
Lesueur. Father Aubery, after 10 years’ 
work among the Indians of Nova Scotia, 
went in 1709 to St Francis, where he re¬ 
mained until his death in 1755. He ac¬ 
quired a fluent use of the language, in 
which he wrote much. Most of his 
manuscripts were destroyed in the burn¬ 
ing of the mission in 1759, but many are 
still preserved in the mission archives, 
including an Abnaki dictionary of nearly 
600 pages. Father Lesueur labored first 
at Sillery and then at Becancour from 
1715, with a few interruptions, until 
1753, leaving as his monument a manu¬ 
script ‘Dictionnairede Racines’ (Abnaki) 
of 900 pages, now also preserved in the 
mission archives. To the later period 
belong Rev. Ciquard, who ministered 
from 1792 to 1815 on the Penobscot, the 
St John, and at St Francis; Father Ro- 
magne, with the Penobscot and the Pas¬ 
samaquoddy from 1804 to 1825; Rev. 
Demilier, a Franciscan, who labored with 
marked success to the same tribes from 
1833 to 1843, and the Jesuit Father Eu¬ 
gene Vetromile in the same field from 
about 1855 to about 1880. Each one of 
these has made some contribution to the 
literature of the language, the last-named 
being also the author of a history of the 
Abnaki and of two volumes of travels 
in Europe and the Orient. 

The beginning of Protestant work among 
the Indians of s. New England may fairly 
be credited to Roger Williams, who, on 
being driven from his home and min¬ 
istry in Massachusetts for his advocacy 
of religious toleration in 1635, took refuge 
among the Wampanoagand Narraganset, 
among whom he speedily acquired 
such influence that he was able to 
hold them from alliance with the hostiles 
in the Pequot war. In 1643 Thomas 
Mayhew, jr {Congregational ), son of 
the grantee of Marthas Vineyard, Mass., 
having learned the language of the tribe 
on the island, began among them the 
work which was continued in the same 
family for four generations, with such suc¬ 
cess that throughout the terror of King 
Philip’s war in 1675-76 the Christian In¬ 
dians on the island remained quiet and 
friendly, although outnumbering the 
whites by 10 to 1. Thomas Mayhew, the 
younger, was lost at sea in 1657, while on 
a missionary voyage to England. The 
work was then taken up by his father, of 
the same name, and the native convert 
Hiacoomes. It was continued from about 
1673 by John Mayhew, son of the first- 


named, until his death in 1689, and then 
by Experience Mayhew, grandson of 
Thomas the elder, nearly to the time of 
his death in 1758. Each one of these 
learned and worked in the Indian lan¬ 
guage, in which Thomas, jr, and Expe¬ 
rience prepared some small devotional 
works. The last of the name was assisted 
also for years by Rev. Josiah Torrey, in 
charge of a white congregation on the 
island. In 1720 the Indians of Marthas 
Vineyard numbered about 800 of an esti¬ 
mated 1,500 on the first settlement in 
1642. They had several churches and 
schools, so that most of those old enough 
could read in either their own or the Eng¬ 
lish language. The last native preacher 
to use the Indian language was Zachariah 
Howwoswe (or Hossweit), who died in 
1821. 

As far back as 1651 a building had been 
authorized at Harvard College for the ac¬ 
commodation of Indian pupils, but only 
one Indian (Caleb Cheeshateaumuck) is 
on record as having finished the course, 
and he died soon afterward of consump¬ 
tion. 

The most noted mission work of this 
section, however, was that begun by the 
noted Rev. John Eliot (Congregational) 
among a remnant of the Massachuset 
tribe at Nonantum, now Newton, near 
Boston, Mass., in the fall of 1646. He 
was then about 42 years of age and had 
prepared himself for the task by three 
years of study of the language. The work 
was extended to other villages, and the 
reports of his and Mayhew’s success led 
to the formation in 1649 of the English 
“Corporation for the Propagation of the 
Gospel among the Indians in New Eng¬ 
land” for the furtherance of the mission. 
As early as 1644 the Massachusetts gov¬ 
ernment had made provision looking to 
the instruction of the neighboring tribes 
in Christianity, Eliot himself being the 
pioneer. In 1650 a community of Chris¬ 
tian Indians, under a regular form of gov¬ 
ernment, was established at Natick, 18 
m. s. w. of Boston, and became the head¬ 
quarters of the mission work. In 1674 
the “Praying Indians,” directly under 
the care of Eliot and his coadjutor, Sam¬ 
uel Danforth, in the Massachusetts Bay 
jurisdiction, numbered 14 principal vil¬ 
lages with a total population exceeding 
1,000, among the Massachuset, Pawtuck¬ 
et, Nipmuc, and other tribes of e. Mas¬ 
sachusetts, each village being organized 
on a religious and industrial basis. The 
Christian Indians of Plymouth colony, 
in s. e. Massachusetts, including also 
Nantucket, Marthas Vineyard, etc., un¬ 
der Revs. John Cotton and Richard 
Bourne, were estimated at nearly 2,500 
more. Most of the converts however 
were drawn from broken and subject 


BULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


883 


tribes. The powerful Wampanoag, Nar- 
raganset, and Mohegan rejected all mis¬ 
sionary advances, and King Philip scorn¬ 
fully told Eliot that he cared no more for 
his gospel than for a button upon his coat. 
Most of Eliot’s work fell to the ground 
with the breaking out of King Philip’s 
war in the following year. The colonists 
refused to believe in the friendship of the 
converts, and made such threats against 
them that many of the Indians joined the 
hostiles and afterw T ard fled with them to 
Canada and New York. The “praying 
towns” were broken up, and the Indians 
who remained were gathered up and held 
as prisoners on an island in Boston har¬ 
bor until the return of peace, suffering 
much hardship in the meantime, so that 
the close of the war found the two races 
so embittered against each other that for 
some time it was impossible to accom¬ 
plish successful results. Of the 14 pray¬ 
ing towns in 1674 there were left only 4 
in 1684. Eliot remained at his post until 
his death in 1690, in his 86th year, leav¬ 
ing behind him as his most permanent 
monument his great translation of the 
Bible into the Natick (Massachuset) lan¬ 
guage, besides a grammar and several 
minor works in the language (see Bible 
translations, Eliot Bible ). Daniel Gookin, 
whose father had been official Indian 
superintendent, was Eliot’s coadjutor in 
the later mission period. Eight years af¬ 
ter Eliot’s death the Indian church at 
Natick had but 10 members, and in 1716 
it became extinct, as did the language 
itself a generation later. 

Among Eliot’s co-workers orsuccesssors 
in the same region the best known were 
Samuel Danforth, sr, from 1650 until his 
death in 1674; Rev. John Cotton, who 
preached to the Indians of both Natick 
and Plymouth from 1669 to 1697, being 
“ eminently skilled in the Indian lan¬ 
guage ’ ’; his son, Josiah Cotton, who con¬ 
tinued his father’s work in the Plymouth 
jurisdiction for nearly 40 years; Samuel 
Treat, who worked among the Nauset 
Indians of the Cape Cod region from 1675 
until his death in 1717, and translated the 
Confession of Faith into the language; 
Grindal Rawson, about 1687 to his death 
in 1715, the translator of ‘ Spiritual Milk ’; 
and Samuel Danforth the younger, who 
labored in e. Massachusetts from 1698 to 
his death in 1727, and was the author of 
several religious tracts in the native lan¬ 
guage. These and others were commis¬ 
sioned and salaried by the society organ¬ 
ized in 1649. 

About 1651 Rev. Abraham Pierson, 
under the auspices of the same society, 
began preaching to the Quinnipiac Indians 
about Branford, w. Connecticut, and con¬ 
tinued until his removal about 1669, when 
the work was undertaken by a successor, 


but with little result to either, the Indians 
showing “a perverse contempt,” not¬ 
withstanding presents made to encourage 
their attendance at the services. A few 
years later Rev. James Fitch was com¬ 
missioned to work among the Mohegan, 
and succeeded in gathering a small con¬ 
gregation, but found his efforts strongly 
opposed by Uncas and the other chiefs. 
The mission probably came to an end 
with King Philip’s w r ar. Efforts were 
continued at intervals among the tribal 
remnants of s. New England during the 
next century, partly through the society 
founded in 1649 and partly by colonial 
appropriation, but with little encouraging 
result, in consequence of the rapid de¬ 
crease and demoralization of the Indians, 
the only notable convert being Samson 
Occom (q. v.). The English society with¬ 
drew support about 1760. A last attempt 
was made among the Mohegan by Miss 
Sarah L. Huntington in 1827, and con¬ 
tinued for several years, chiefly by aid of 
governmental appropriation (De Forest). 

In 1734 a Congregationalist mission was 
begun among the Mahican in western 
Massachusetts by Rev. John Sergeant, 
under the auspices of the Society for the 
Propagation of the Gospel in Foreign 
Parts. By hard study and constant asso¬ 
ciation he was soon able to preach to 
them in their own language, into which 
he translated several simple devotional 
works. In 1736 the converts were gath¬ 
ered into a regular mission town, which 
was named Stockbridge, from which cen¬ 
tral point the w r ork was extended into 
Connecticut and New York, and even as 
far as the Delaware r. In 1743 Rev. 
David Brainerd, w r ho had been working 
also among the Mahican at the village of 
Kaunaumeek, across the New York line, 
brought his congregation to consolidate 
with that of Stockbridge. Mr Sergeant 
died in 1749, and after a succession of 
briefer pastorates the work was taken up, 
in 1775, by his son, Rev. John Sergeant, 
jr, who continued with it until the end 
of his life. The westward advance of 
white settlement and the demoralizing 
influence of two wars accomplished the 
same result here as elsewhere, and in 
1785 the diminishing Stockbridge tribe 
removed to New Stockbridge, N. Y., 
on lands given by the Oneida. Their 
leader in this removal was the edu¬ 
cated Indian minister Samson Occom. 
Mr Sergeant himself followed in the next 
year. The mission was at that time sup¬ 
ported by the joint effort of American 
and Scotch societies, including the cor¬ 
poration of Harvard College. In 1795 
the settlement consisted of about 60 fam¬ 
ilies, mostly improvident, unacquainted 
with the English language, and “in their 
dress and manners uncivilized” (Abo- 


884 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


rigines Com., 1844). Besides preaching 
to them in their own language, Mr Ser¬ 
geant prepared for their use several small 
religious works in the native tongue. In 
1821, with their chief, Solomon Aupau- 
mut, they removed again (their mis¬ 
sionary being unable to accompany them 
on account of old age), this time to the 
neighborhood of Green Bay, Wis., where 
about 520 “Stockbridge and Munsee,” of 
mixed blood, still keep the name. Among 
the later missionaries the most distin¬ 
guished is Rev. Jeremiah Slingerland, an 
educated member of the tribe, who 
served, from 1849, for more than 30 years. 
Merged with them are all who remain of 
the Brotherton band of New York, made 
up from tribal remnants of Connecticut, 
Rhode Island, and Long Island—Mohe- 
gan, Pequot, Narraganset, and Montauk— 
gathered into a settlement also in the 
Oneida country by the same Occom in 
1786. These in 1795 were reported as 
numbering about 39 families, all Chris¬ 
tian, and fairly civilized. Among the 
names connected with the Stockbridge 
mission is that of Rev. Jonathan Edwards, 
jr, author of a short treatise on the 
Mahican (‘ ‘ Muhhekaneew ’ ’) language 
(1788), and of John Quinney and Capt. 
Hendrick Aupaumut, native assistants 
and translators under the elder Sergeant. 
For the Scaticook mission see Moravians — 
New York. 

In addition to the regular mission 
establishments some educational work for 
the Indians was carried on in accord 
with a declared purpose at Harvard Col¬ 
lege, Cambridge, Mass., as already noted; 
at Moore’s charity school for Indians, 
founded by Rev. Eleazer Wheelock at 
Lebanon, Conn., in 1754, and transferred 
in 1769 to Hanover, N. H., under the 
name of Dartmouth College, and the For¬ 
eign Mission School at Cornwall, Conn., 
by the American Board of Commissioners 
for Foreign Missions, beginning in 1817. 
The net result was small. (See Educa¬ 
tion. ) 

The Interior States. —The whole inte¬ 
rior region of the United States, stretching 
from the English seaboard colonies to the 
main divide of the Rocky mts., was in¬ 
cluded under the French rule in the two 
provinces of Canada and Louisiana, and 
with one or two exceptions the mission 
work was in charge of French Jesuits from 
the first occupancy up into the American 
period. The very first mission worker, 
however, within this great region was the 
heroic Spanish Franciscan, Father Juan 
de Padilla, who gave up his life for souls 
on the Kansas prairies, as narrated else¬ 
where, nearly as early as 1542 (see New 
Mexico, Arizona, and California). The 
first mission west of the Huron country was 
established in 1660, probably on Kewee¬ 


naw bay, Mich., by the veteran Huron 
missionary, the Jesuit Rene Menard, in 
response to repeated requests of visiting 
Chippewa and Ottawa. In the next year, 
while attempting to reach a colony of 
fugitive Hurons who had called him from 
Green Bay, he was lost in the forestand is 
believed to have been murdered by the In¬ 
dians. In 1665 Father Claude Allouez 
established the mission of Sainct Esprit 
on the s. shore of L. Superior, at La Pointe 
Chegoimegon (Shaugwaumikong), now 
Bayfield, Wis. Besides working here 
among the Ottawa and Huron refugees 
from the older missions destroyed by the 
Iroquoi§, he visited all the other tribes of 
the upper lake region from the Miami and 
the Illinois to the Sioux. Within the next 
few years other missions were established 
at Sault Ste Marie (Sainte Marie), Mack¬ 
inaw (St Ignace), Green Bay (St Fran¬ 
cois Xavier), and among the Foxes (St 
Marc) and Mascoutens (St Jacques), the 
two last named being about the southern 
Wisconsin line. Among other workers of 
this period were Dablon, Druillettes, and 
the noted discoverer, Marquette. The 
mission of St Joseph on the river of that 
name, near the present South Bend, Ind., 
was established by Allouez among the 
Potawatomi in 1688. It continued, with 
interruptions, until the removal of the 
tribe to the W. in 1839-41, when the mis¬ 
sionaries accompanied the Indians and re¬ 
established the work in the new field. To 
this later period, in Indiana, belong the 
names of Fathers R£ze, Badin, Desseille, 
and Petit. The mission at Lapointe was 
abandoned in 1671 on account of the hos¬ 
tility of the Sioux, but most of the others 
continued, with some interruptions, down 
to the temporary expulsion of the Jesuits 
in 1764. A mission begun among the 
Sioux in 1728 was brought to a close soon 
after in consequence of the war with the 
Foxes. 

The first regular mission among the 
Illinois (Immaculate Conception) was 
founded by Marquette in 1674 near the 
present Rockfort, Ill., where at that time 
8 confederate tribes were camped in a 
great village of 350 communal houses. It 
was known later as the Kaskaskia mission. 
Other missions were established also 
among the Peoria, on Peoria lake and at 
Cahokia, opposite St Louis, with such 
result that by 1725 the entire Illinois 
nation was civilized and Christian. 
Besides Marquette, the most prominent 
of the Illinois missionaries were Rale, 
noted elsewhere in connection with the 
Abnaki mission, and Father James 
Gravier, who arrived in 1693 and died 12 
ears later of wounds received from 
ostile Indians, leaving as his monument 
the great manuscript Peoria dictionary of 
22,000 words. Despite apparent success, 


BULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


885 


the final result in Illinois was the same as 
elsewhere. The Natchez and Chickasaw 
wars interrupted the mission work for 
some years, and gave opportunity for 
invasion by hostile northern tribes. The 
dissipations consequent upon the prox¬ 
imity of garrison posts completed the 
demoralization, and by 1750 the former 
powerful Illinois nation was reduced to 
some 1,000 souls, with apparently but one 
mission. The Indiana missions at St 
Joseph (Potawatomi and Miami), Vin¬ 
cennes (? Piankashaw), and on the 
Wabash (Miami) continued to flourish 
until the decree of expulsion, when the 
mission property was confiscated by the 
French government, although the Jesuits 
generally chose to remain as secular 
priests until their death. Their successors 
continued to minister to Indians as well 
as to whites until the disruption and 
removal of the tribes to the W., between 
1820 and 1840, when the work was taken 
up in their new homes by missionaries 
already on the ground. The majority of 
the Indians of Michigan and Wisconsin 
remained in their old homes at missions 
in those states, kept in existence either 
as regular establishments or as visiting 
stations served by secular priests. The 
most distinguished of these later mission¬ 
aries was the noted author and philolo¬ 
gist, Bishop Frederick Baraga, of the 
imperial house of Hapsburg, who, after 
having voluntarily forfeited his estates to 
devote his life to the Indians, came to 
America in 1830, and for 36 years there¬ 
after until his death labored with success, 
first among the Ottawa at Arbre Croche 
in lower Michigan, and afterward at St 
Joseph, Green Bay, Lapointe, and other 
stations along the upper lakes, more par¬ 
ticularly at the Chippewa village of 
L’Anse, on Keweenaw bay, which he 
converted into a prosperous Christian 
settlement. Even when past 60 years of 
age, this scion of Austrian nobility slept 
upon the ground and sometimes walked 
40 m. a day on snowshoes to minister to 
his Indians. Besides numerous devo¬ 
tional works in Ottawa and Chippewa, as 
well as other volumes in German and 
Slavonic, he is the author of the great 
Grammar and Dictionary of the Chip¬ 
pewa Language, which after half a cen¬ 
tury still remains the standard authority, 
having passed through three editions. 

In 1818 was begun, near Pembina, on 
Red r., just inside the IJ. S. boundary, 
the Chippewa mission, afterward known 
as Assumption, which became the cen¬ 
tral station for work among the Chippewa 
of Minnesota and the Mandan and others 
of the upper Missouri. The most noted 
name in this connection is that of Rev. 
G. A. Bel court, author of a dictionary of 
the Chippewa language, second in im¬ 


portance only to that of Baraga. In 1837 
Father Augustin Ravoux established a 
mission among the Santee Sioux at Fari¬ 
bault’s trading post in e. Minnesota, learn¬ 
ing the language and ministering to the 
eastern bands for a number of years. In 
1843 (or 1844) he published a devotional 
work in that dialect, which has passed 
through two editions. The first regular 
mission station among the Menominee of 
Wisconsin was established in 1844, and 
among the Winnebago, then at Long 
Prairie, Minn., in 1850. For 20 years 
earlier missionary work had been done 
among them, notably by Father Samuel 
Mazzuchelli, whose Winnebago Prayer 
Book, published in 1833, is mentioned*by 
Pilling as “the first publication, so far as 
I know, of a text in any of the dialects in 
the Siouan family.” In the farther W. 
work was carried on among all of the im¬ 
migrant, and the principal of the native, 
tribes, the chief laborers again being the 
Jesuits, whose order had been restored to 
full privilege in 1814. As the whole coun¬ 
try was now explored and organized on a 
permanent governmental basis, and the 
Indian day was rapidly waning, these 
later missions have not the same historic 
interest that attaches to those of the co¬ 
lonial period, and may be passed over 
with briefer notice. Chief among them 
were the Potawatomi missions of St Stan¬ 
islaus and St Mary, in Kansas, founded 
in 1836 by the Belgian Jesuits Von Quick- 
enborne, Hoecken, Peter J. de Smet, and 
others, working together, and the Osage 
mission of St Francis Hieronymo, founded 
about 1847 by Fathers Shoenmaker and 
Bax. The girls of these two mission 
schools were in charge respectively of the 
Sisters of the Sacred Heart and the Sisters 
of Loretto. Temporary missions were 
also established in 1836 and 1847 respec¬ 
tively among the Kickapoo and the 
Miami. 

The remote Flatheads in the moun¬ 
tains at the head of Missouri r. had heard 
of Christianity and had been taught the 
rudimentary doctrines by some adopted 
Caughnawaga Indians, and in 1831 they 
sent a delegation all the long and danger¬ 
ous way to St Louis to ask of Indian 
Superintendent Clark that missionaries 
be sent among them. To do this was not 
possible at the time, but with persevering 
desire other delegations were sent on the 
same errand, some of the envoys dying 
on the road and others being murdered 
by the Sioux, until the request met re¬ 
sponse. In 1834 the Methodist missionary, 
Jason Lee, with several assistants, accom¬ 
panied a trading expedition across the 
mountains, but, changing his original pur- 
ose, passed by without visiting the Flat- 
eads and established himself in the 
vicinity of the trading post of Ft Van- 


886 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


couver, nearly opposite the mouth of the 
Willamette, in Washington. Another 
embassy from the Flatheads, in 1839, was 
successful, and in the next year the noted 
Belgian Jesuit, Peter John de Smet, priest, 
explorer, and author, was on the ground, 
1,600 Indians of the confederated tribes 
being gathered to await his coming. In 
1841 he founded the mission of St Mary 
on Bitter-root r., w. Mont., making it a 
starting point for other missions farther to 
the w., to be noted elsewhere. On ac¬ 
count of the hostility of the Blackfeet the 
mission was abandoned in 1850, to be suc¬ 
ceeded by that of St Ignatius on Flathead 
lake, within the present Flathead reserva¬ 
tion, which still exists in successful opera¬ 
tion, practically all of the confederated 
tribes of the reservation having been 
Christian for half a century. The principal 
co-workers in the Flathead mission were 
the Jesuits Canestrelli, Giorda, Mengarini, 
Point, and Ravalli. The first three of 
these have made important contributions 
to philology, chief among which are the 
Salish Grammar of Mengarini, 1861, and 
the Kalispel Dictionary, 1877, of Giorda, 
of whom it is said that he preached in 
six Indian languages. 

Next in chronologic order in the cen¬ 
tral region, after the Catholics, come the 
Moravians. Their work among the Dela¬ 
wares and associated tribes in Ohio, and 
later in Ontario and Kansas, was a con¬ 
tinuation of that begun among the same 
people in New York and Pennsylvania 
as early as 1740, and has been already 
noted. 

After them came the Friends, or, as 
more commonly known, the Quakers. 
In all their missionary effort they seem 
to have given first place to the practical 
things of civilization, holding the doc¬ 
trinal teaching somewhat in reserve until 
the Indians had learned from experience 
to value the advice of the teacher. In 
accord also with the Quaker principle, 
their method was essentially democratic, 
strict regard being given to the wishes of 
the Indians as expressed through their 
chiefs, their opinions being frequently in¬ 
vited, with a view to educating them to 
a point of self-government. In 1804 the 
Maryland yearly meeting, after long 
councils with the Indians, established an 
industrial farm on upper Wabash r. in 
Indiana, where several families from the 
neighboring Miami, Shawnee, and others 
soon gathered for instruction in farming. 
For several years it flourished with in¬ 
creasingusefulness, until forced to discon¬ 
tinue by an opposition led by the Shawnee 
prophet (see Tenskwatawa ). The work 
was transferred to the main Shawnee set¬ 
tlement at Wapakoneta, Ohio, where, in 
1812, a saw mill and grist mill were built, 
tools distributed, and a farm colony was 


successfully inaugurated. The war com¬ 
pelled a suspension until 1815, when work 
was resumed. In 1822 a boarding school 
was opened, and both farm and school 
continued, with some interruptions, until 
the final removal of the tribe to the W. in 
1832-33. The teachers followed, and by 
1837 the Shawnee mission was reestab¬ 
lished on the reservation in Kansas, 
about 9 m. w. from the present Kansas 
City. It was represented as flourishing 
in 1843, being then perhaps the most 
important among the immigrant tribes, 
but suffered the inevitable result on the 
later removal of the Shawnee to the 
present Oklahoma. The work was con¬ 
ducted Under the joint auspices of the 
Indiana, Ohio, and Maryland yearly 
meetings, aided in the earlier years by 
liberal contributions from members of 
the society in England and Ireland. The 
most noted of the teachers were Isaac 
Harvey and his son, Henry Harvey, 
whose work covers the period from 1819 
to 1842. During the period of the ‘ ‘ peace 
policy” administration of Indian affairs, 
for a term of about a dozen years begin¬ 
ning in 1870, considerable work was done 
by laborers of the same denomination 
among the Caddo, Kiowa, Cheyenne, 
and other tribes of Oklahoma, but with¬ 
out any regular mission or school estab¬ 
lishment. The best known of these 
workers was Thomas C. Battey, author 
of ‘A Quaker among the Indians,’ who 
conducted a camp school among the 
Kiowa in 1873. 

The Presbyterians, who now stand second 
in the number of their mission establish¬ 
ments in the United States, began their 
labors in the Central states about the 
same time as the Friends, with a mission 
farm among the Wyandot on Sandusky r. 
in Ohio, in charge of Rev. Joseph Badger. 
It continued until 1810, when it was aban¬ 
doned in consequence of the opposition 
of the traders and the conservative party 
led by the Shawnee prophet. Morse’s 
report on the condition of the tribes in 
1822 makes no mention of any Presby¬ 
terian mission work at that time excep¬ 
ting among the Cherokee, (see Southern 
States ). A few years later the Rev. Isaac 
Van Tassel, under authority from the 
American Board, was in charge of a mis¬ 
sion among the Ottawa, at Maumee, Ohio. 
He compiled an elementary reading book, 
printed in 1829, the first publication in 
the Ottawa language. 

In 1827, under the auspices of the 
American Board of Commissioners for 
Foreign Missions, a Congregational mission 
was begun among the Chippewa on Macki¬ 
naw id., upper Michigan, by Rev. J. D. 
Stevens and wife, who with others after¬ 
ward extended their labors into n. Wis¬ 
consin, and later were transferred to the 


BULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


887 


Sioux mission. In 1829 Rev. Frederick 
Ayer joined the Mackinaw station, and, 
after two years’ study of the language, 
opened among the Chippewa at Sandy 
Lake, Minn., in 1831, what is said to have 
been the first school in Minnesota. He 
is the author of a small text-book in the 
language. Other stations were estab¬ 
lished soon after among the same tribe, 
at Lapointe, Wis., Pokegama lake, and 
Leech lake, Minn., but seem to have been 
discontinued about 1845. The Mackinaw 
mission had already been abandoned. 
Rev. Peter Dougherty, under the direct 
auspices of the Presbyterian mission 
board, labored among the Chippewa and 
the Ottawa at Grand Traverse bay, lower 
Michigan, in 1843-47-f- and is the author 
of several text-books and small religious 
works in the language of the former tribe. 

In 1834 two volunteer workers, Mr 
Samuel W. Pond and his brother Gid¬ 
eon, took up their residence in a village 
of the Santee Sioux on L. Calhoun, 
near the present St Paul, Minn. They 
afterward became regularly ordained 
missionaries under the American Board, 
continuing in the w T ork for 18 years. In 
the same year Rev. Thomas S. William¬ 
son, “the father of the Dakota mission,” 
made a reconnoissance of the field for 
the same Board, and on his favorable 
report two mission stations were estab¬ 
lished in 1835—one at L. Harriet, near 
St Paul, under Rev. J. D. Stevens, for¬ 
merly of the Mackinaw mission, the 
other under Williamson himself at Lac- 
qui-parle, high up on Minnesota r. With 
Mr Williamson then or later were his 
wife, his daughter, and his two sons, all 
of whom became efficient partners in the 
work. In 1837 Rev. Stephen R. Riggs, 
with his w r ife, Mary, and his son, Alfred 
L.—all known in mission annals—joined 
the station at Lac-qui-parle. In the next 
10 or 12 years, as the good will of the 
Indians was gradually won and the work¬ 
ing force increased, other stations were 
established, all among the Santee Sioux 
in Minnesota. Among these was the one 
started by Rev. John F. Aiton, in 1848, 
at Redwing, where Revs. Francis Denton 
and Daniel Gavan, for the Evangelical 
Missionary Society of Lucerne, had estab¬ 
lished the “Swiss mission” in 1837, these 
two missionaries now combining forces 
with the American workers. In 1852, in 
consequence of a cession of Indian land, 
the eastern station, then at Kaposia, was 
removed by Williamson to Yellow Medi¬ 
cine on the upper Minnesota, and two 
years later, in consequence of the burn¬ 
ing of the Lac-qui-parle station, that mis¬ 
sion also was removed to Hazelwood, in 
the same neighborhood. 

The work continued with varying suc¬ 
cess until interrupted by the Sioux out¬ 


break in the summer of 1862, when the 
missions were abandoned and the mis¬ 
sionaries sought safety within the older 
settlements. Throughout the troubles 
the Christian Sioux generally remained 
friendly and did good service in behalf 
of the endangered settlers. As a result 
of the outbreak the Santee Sioux were 
removed to Niobrara, n. e. Nebr., where 
they now reside. The missionaries fol¬ 
lowed, and in 1866 the “Niobrara 
mission” was organized, the work being 
extended to other neighboring bands of 
Sioux, and the principal workers being 
Revs. John P. Williamson and Alfred L. 
Riggs, sons of the earlier missionaries. 
Nearly all the earlier Presbyterian work 
among the Sioux, as among the Chero¬ 
kee, was conducted through the Ameri¬ 
can Board of Commissioners for Foreign 
Missions. 

To the Congregational missionaries we 
owe most of our knowledge of the Sioux 
language, their work being almost en¬ 
tirely in the Santee or eastern dialect. 
Stevens, the Pond brothers, all of the 
Williamsons, and Stephen and Alfred 
Riggs have all made important contribu¬ 
tions, ranging from school text-books and 
small devotional works up to diction¬ 
aries, besides adapting the Roman alpha¬ 
bet to the peculiarities of the language 
with such success that the Sioux have 
become a literary people, the majority of 
the men being able to read and write in 
their own language. It is impossible to 
estimate the effect this acquisition has 
had in stimulating the self-respect and 
ambition of the tribe. Among the most 
important of these philologic productions 
are Riggs’ Grammar and Dictionary of 
the Dakota Language, published by the 
Smithsonian Institution in 1852, with a 
later revision by Dorsey, and Riggs and 
Williamson’s Dakota Bible, published in 
1880, being then, in Pilling’s opinion, 
with two exceptions, the only complete 
Bible translation in any Indian language 
since Eliot’s Bible in 1663. In much of 
the earlier linguistic work the mission¬ 
aries had the efficient cooperation of 
Joseph Renville, an educated half-blood. 
As an adjunct to the educational work, a 
monthly journal was conducted for about 
2 years by Rev. G. H. Pond, chiefly 
in the native language, under the title of 
‘The Dakota Friend,’ while its modern 
successor, ‘Iapi Oaye’ (‘The Word 
Carrier’), has been conducted under 
the auspices of the Niobrara mission 
since 1871. 

In 1821 two Presbyterian missions were 
established among the Osage by the 
United Foreign Missionary Society. One 
of these, Harmony, was near the junction 
of the Marais des Cygnes with the Osage 
r., not far from the present Rich Hill, 


888 


MISSIONS 


[B. A. E. 


Mo.; the other, Union, was on the w. 
bank of Neosho r., about midway between 
the present Muskogee and Ft Gibson, 
Okla. Both were established upon an 
extensive scale, with boarding schools 
and a full corps of workers; but in conse¬ 
quence of differences with the agent and 
an opposition instigated by the traders, 
the Osage field was abandoned after about 
15 years of discouraging effort (McCoy). 
One of these workers, Rev. William B. 
Montgomery, compiled an Osage reading 
book, published in 1834. Among others 
connected with the mission were the 
Revs. Chapman, Pixley, Newton, Sprague, 
Palmer, Vaill, Belcher, and Requa. The 
missions conducted by the same denomi¬ 
nation among the removed Southern tri bes 
in Oklahoma are noted in connection 
with the Southern states. 

In 1834 two Presbyterian workers, Rev. 
John Dunbar and Mr Samuel Allis, began 
work among the Pawnee of Nebraska 
under the auspices of the American Board, 
and later were joined by Dr Satterlee. 
After some time spent in getting ac¬ 
quainted with the people and the lan¬ 
guage, a permanent station was selected 
on Plum cr., a small tributary of Loup r., 
in 1838, by consent of the Pawmee, who 
in the meantime had also acknowledged 
the authority of the Government. Cir¬ 
cumstances delayed the work until 1844, 
when a considerable mission and a Gov¬ 
ernment station were begun, and a num¬ 
ber of families from the different bands 
took up their residence adjacent thereto. 
In consequence, however, of the repeated 
destructive inroads of the Sioux, the 
ancient enemies of the Pawnee, the mis¬ 
sion effort was abandoned in 1847 and 
the tribe returned to its former wild life. 

About the year 1835 work was begun 
by the Presbyterian Board of Foreign 
Missions among the Iowa and Sauk, then 
residing on Missouri r. in e. Nebraska. 
Attention was given also to some others, 
of the removed tribes, and about 10 years 
later a mission -was established among the 
Omaha and the Oto at Bellevue, near the 
present Omaha, Nebr., where, in 1850, 
Rev. Edw ard McKenney compiled a small 
Omaha primer, the first publication in 
that language. Both missions continued 
down to the modern period, despite the 
shifting fortunes of the tribes. Other 
prominent workers were Rev. Samuel 
Irvin, who gave 30 years of his life, be¬ 
ginning in 1837, to the first tribes named; 
and Rev. William Hamilton, who, begin¬ 
ning also in 1837, with the same tribes, 
was transferred to the Bellevue mission 
in 1853, rounding out a long life with a 
record of half a century spent in the serv¬ 
ice. Working in collaboration these two 
produced several religious and linguistic 
works in the Iowa language, published 


by the Mission press from 1843 to 1850, 
besides a collection of Omaha hymns and 
some manuscript translations by Mr Ham¬ 
ilton alone at a later period. 

The pioneer Methodist mission work in 
the central region appears to have been 
inaugurated by a volunteer negro minis¬ 
ter, Rev. Mr Stewart, who in 1816 began 
preaching among the Wyandot, about 
Sandusky, in Ohio, and continued with 
such success that 3 years later a regular 
mission -was established under Rev. James 
B. Finley. This is the only work by that 
denomination noted in Morse’s Report of 
1822. In 1835, with liberal aid from the 
Government, as was then customary, the 
Southern' branch established a mission 
about 12 m. from the present Kansas City, 
in Kansas, among the immigrant Shaw¬ 
nee. In 1839 it was in charge of Rev. 
Thomas Johnson, and 3 years later w T as 
reported in flourishing condition, with 
boarding school and industrial farm. In 
1855 both this mission and another, estab¬ 
lished by the Northern branch, w 7 ere in 
operation. Smaller missions w r ere estab¬ 
lished between 1835 and 1840 among the 
Kickapoo (Rev. Berryman in charge in 
1839), Kansa (Rev. W. Johnson in charge 
in 1839), Delaw r ares, Potawatomi, and 
united Peoria and Kaskaskia, all but 
the last-named being in Kansas. A small 
volume in the Shawmee language and an¬ 
other in the Kansa were prepared and 
printed for their use by Mr Lykins, of 
the Shawnee Baptist mission. The work 
just outlined, with some work among the 
immigrant Southern tribes (see Southern 
States ), seems to be the sum of Methodist 
mission labors outside of the Chippewa 
territory until a recent period. In 1837 
a mission was started by Rev. Alfred 
Brunson among the Santee Sioux at 
Kaposia, or Little Crowd’s village, a few 
miles below the present St Paul, Minn., 
which existed until 1841, when, on the 
demand of the Indians, it was discon¬ 
tinued. 

In 1823 the Wesleyan Methodist Society 
of England began work among the Chip¬ 
pewa and related bands in Ontario (see 
Canada , East), and some 20 years later 
the American Methodists began work in 
the same tribe along the s. shore of L. 
Superior in upper Michigan. In 1843 
Rev. J. H. Pitezel took charge of the 
work, with headquarters at Sault Ste 
Marie as the principal station. Another 
station was established at Keweenaw pt. 
about the same time by Rev. John Clark. 
Others were established later at Sandy 
lake and Mille Lac, Minn., also among 
the Chippewa, and all of these were in 
successful operation in 1852. 

The earliest Baptist worker in the cen¬ 
tral region was Rev. Isaac McCoy, after¬ 
ward for nearly 30years thegeneral agent 


BULL. 301 


MISSIONS 


889 


in the Indian mission work of that de¬ 
nomination. In 1818 he began preaching 
among the Wea in Indiana, and in 1820 
organized at Ft Wayne, Ind., a small 
school for the children of the neighboring 
tribes, then in the lowest state of demor¬ 
alization from wars, removals, drunken¬ 
ness, and the increasing pressure of a hos¬ 
tile white population. His earliest asso¬ 
ciate was Mr Johnston Lykins, then a 
boy of 19, but later distinguished as a 
voluminous translator and author of a 
system of Indian orthography. Two 
years later this-school was discontinued, 
and by treaty arrangement with the Gov¬ 
ernment, which assumed a large part of 
the expense, two regular missions were 
established, viz: Carey (1822) for the 
Potawatomi, on St Joseph r. near the 
present South Bend, lnd., and Thomas 
(1823) among the Ottawa, on Grand r., 
Mich. Mr Lykins took charge among 
the Ottawa, to whom he was soon able to 
preach in their own language, while Mr 
McCoy continued with the Potawatomi. 
In consequence of the inauguration of 
the Government plan for the removal of 
the Indians to the W., both missions 
were abolished in 1830, the work being 
resumed among the Indians in their new 
homes in Kansas. A small mission estab¬ 
lished among the Chippewa at Sauit Ste 
Marie, Mich., under Rev. A. Bingham 
about 1824, continued a successful exist¬ 
ence in charge of its founder for about 25 
years. 

In 1831, while the removal of the In¬ 
dians was still in progress, the Shawnee 
Mission was established under Mr 
Lykins about 10 m. s. w. from the pres¬ 
ent Kansas City, among the Shawnee. 
In the fall of 1833 Rev. Jotham Meeker, 
one of the former assistants in the E., 
arrived with a printing press and types, 
with which it was proposed to print for 
distribution among the various neighbor¬ 
ing tribes educational and devotional 
works in their own languages according 
to a new phonetic system devised by Mr 
Meeker. The work of translating and 
printing was actively taken up, the first 
issue being a Delaware primer in 1834, 
believed to be the first book printed 
in Kansas. Within the next few years 
small volumes by various missionary 
workers were printed in the Shawnee, 
Delaware, Potawatomi, Ottawa, Wea, 
Kansa, Osage, Iowa, Oto, Creek, and Choc¬ 
taw languages, besides a small journal in 
the Shawnee language. Not alone the 
Baptists, but also Methodists and Presby¬ 
terians working in the same field, availed 
themselves of the services of the Shaw¬ 
nee mission press. In the meantime other 
missions were established among the 
Delawares (Mr Ira D. Blanchard, 1833), 
Oto (Rev. Moses Merrill, 1833), Iowa 


(1834?), Ottawa (Rev. Jotham Meeker, 
1837), and Potawatomi (Mr Robert 
Simerwell, 1837), besides stations among 
the removed southern tribes of Indian 
Ter. (See Southern States .) All of these 
first-named were within what is now 
Kansas excepting the Oto mission known 
as Bellevue, which was at the mouth of 
Platte r., near the present Omaha, Nebr. 
At this station Mr Merrill, who had pre¬ 
viously worked among the Chippewa, 
made such study of the language that 
within 3 years he was able to preach to 
the Indians without an interpreter, be¬ 
sides compiling a book of hymns and one 
or two other small works in Oto. He 
died in 1840. The various missions re¬ 
mained in successful operation until about 
1855, when, in consequence of the dis¬ 
turbed condition of affairs in Kansas, they 
were discontinued. All of the tribes 
have since been removed to Indian Ter. 

The Episcopalians appear to have done 
no work in the interior until about 1830, 
when they had a station in the vicinity 
of Sauit Ste Marie, Mich., among the 
Chippewa. In 1852 a mission was estab¬ 
lished among the Chippewa of Gull lake, 
Minn., by Rev. J. L. Breck, and in 1856 
at Leech lake by the same worker. In 
1860, through the efforts of Bishop H. B. 
Whipple, a mission was established 
among the Santee Sioux at the lower 
Sioux agency, Redwood, Minn., in charge 
of Rev. Samuel D. Hinman. The work 
was interrupted by the outbreak of 1862, 
but on the final transfer of the Indians to 
Niobrara, Nebr., in 1866, was resumed by 
Mr Hinman, who had kept in close touch 
with them during the period of disturb¬ 
ance. A large mission house, known as 
St Mary’s, was erected, which later be¬ 
came the central station for the work of 
this denomination among the Sioux and 
neighboring tribes. In 1870 St Paul’s mis¬ 
sion was established at the Yankton Sioux 
agency, S. Dak., by Rev. Joseph W. Cook, 
and in 1872 work was begun at the Lower 
Brul6 Sioux agency, S. Dak., by Rev. W. 
J. Cleveland, and extended later to the 
Upper Brule and Oglala Sioux of Rose¬ 
bud and Pine Ridge agencies, S. Dak. 
In the meantime Rev. J. Owen Dorsey 
had begun to labor among the Ponca, 
also in South Dakota, in 1871. The work 
is still being actively carried on in the 
same field. All of the Sioux mission¬ 
aries named have rendered valuable serv¬ 
ice to philology in the preparation of 
hymnals, prayer books, etc., in the native 
language, together with a small mission 
journal ‘Anpao’ (‘The Daybreak’), is¬ 
sued for a number of years in the Yankton 
Sioux dialect. The ethnologic researches 
of Mr Dorsey place him in the front rank 
of investigators, chief among his many 
contributions being his great monograph 


890 


MISSIONS 


[B. A. E. 


upon the Dhegiha (Omaha and Ponca) 
language, published under direction of 
the Bureau of American Ethnology, in 
whose service he spent the last years of 
his life. In connection with the Epis¬ 
copal mission may be noted the lace¬ 
making industry for Indian women insti¬ 
tuted by Miss Sibyl Carter, chiefly among 
the Chippewa. 

In 1847 the Lutherans , under the aus¬ 
pices of the Evangelical Lutheran Mis¬ 
sionary Society of Dresden, Germany, 
began work among the Chippewa in 
lower Michigan, principally in the pres¬ 
ent Saginaw and Gratiot cos. The first 
mission school was opened in that year 
at Frankenmuth, on Cass r., by Rev. A. 
Craemer. In 1847 he was joined by Rev. 
Edward Baierlein, who, a year or two 
later, established a second station at 
Bethany, on Pine r., in Gratiot co. Here 
Mr Baierlein compiled a small volume of 
reading lessons and Scripture stories, pub¬ 
lished in 1852. In the next year he was 
recalled and we hear no more of the mis¬ 
sion, which was probably discontinued 
soon after. 

In 1846 the first Mormon emigrants 
crossed the plains from Illinois and, after 
a long and toilsome journey, settled at 
Great Salt lake, Utah, where they have 
since transformed the desert into a garden 
and built up a religious commonwealth 
which now exercises a dominant influence 
over large portions of the Mountain states. 
Their religious tradition regards the In¬ 
dians as the descendants of the so-called 
Lost Ten Tribes of Israel (q. v.), and 
while no statistics are available it is 
known that their unsalaried missionaries 
from the first have given special attention 
to the Indian tribes, with the result that 
many among the Ute, Shoshoni, Paiute, 
and others at least nominally belong to 
that denomination. In 1905-6 their mis¬ 
sionary effort was extended to the Chey¬ 
enne and other tribes of Oklahoma. 

One of the most recent mission enter¬ 
prises undertaken in the middle W. is 
that of the Mennonites , a small but influ¬ 
ential denomination of German origin, 
professing the principles of peace and 
nonresistance common to the Moravians 
and the Quakers. After a short pre¬ 
liminary sojourn in 1877, regular work 
was begun among the Arapaho at Dar¬ 
lington, Okla., by Rev. Samuel D. Haury 
in 1880, the enterprise being aided by 
the active cooperation of the Government 
and local Indian agent. In 1883 another 
station was opened at Cantonment, about 
70 m. n. w., among the Cheyenne, by Mr 
Haury, while Rev. H. R. Voth took 
charge of the work at Darlington and 
continued with it until transferred to a 
new field of duty in Arizona about 10 
years later. Two other stations were 


afterward established among the same 
tribes, and provision was made for the 
industrial training of Indian boys in 
schools and private homes in Kansas. In 
1890 the Cantonment mission received an 
important accession in the arrival of Rev. 
Rudolph Petter and wife from Switzer¬ 
land, who at once devoted themselves to 
a systematic study of the Cheyenne lan¬ 
guage in the tipi camps. The schools at 
both principal stations were in flourish¬ 
ing condition until the withdrawal of Gov¬ 
ernment aid compelled their discontinu¬ 
ance in 1902. The Cantonment mission 
is still kept up, the Cheyenne work being 
in charge of Mr Petter and his wife, as¬ 
sisted by Miss Bertha Kinsinger, while 
Rev. John A. Funk ministers to the 
Arapaho. There is also a small station 
among the Cheyenne at Hammon, in 
charge of Rev. H. J. Kliewer, and an¬ 
other among the Northern Cheyenne at 
Busby, Mont., in charge of Rev. and Mrs 
Gustav Linscheid since its establishment 
in 1904. To Mr Petter we are indebted for 
our principal knowledge of the Cheyenne 
language, into which he has translated 
some parts of the Bible, a number of 
hymns, and the 4 Pilgrim’s Progress,’ be¬ 
sides being the author of a reading book 
and an extended manuscript grammar 
and dictionary. 

The Columbia Region. —Through the 
influence of Catholic Caughnawaga and 
of some of the employes of the Hudson’s 
Bay Co., many individuals among the 
tribes of the Columbia r., particularly 
Flatheads and Nez Perc6s, had adopted 
the principles and ceremonials of the 
Christian religion as early as 1820, lead¬ 
ing later to the request for missionaries, 
as already noted. The first mission of 
the Columbia region was established in 
1834 by a party under Rev. Jason Lee, for 
the Methodists, on the e. side of the Willa¬ 
mette at French Prairie, about the pres¬ 
ent Oregon City, Oreg. In 1840 it was 
removed to Chemeketa, 10 m. farther up 
the river. Other stations were established 
later at The Dalles of the Columbia, 
Oreg., by Revs. Lee and Perkins, in 1838; 
near Pt Adams, at the mouth of the 
Columbia, Oreg., by Rev. J. H. Frost, in 
1841; and at Ft Nisqually on Puget sd., 
Wash., by Rev. J. P. Richmond in 1842. 
The tribes most directly concerned at the 
four stations, respectively, were the Ka- 
lapuya, Wasco, Clatsop, and Nisqualli, 
all in process of swift decline. For vari¬ 
ous reasons no success attended the pro¬ 
ject. The children in the schools sick¬ 
ened and died; one missionary after an¬ 
other resigned and went home; and Lee, 
as superintendent in charge, so far neg¬ 
lected his duties that in 1844 he was de¬ 
posed and the church board, after in¬ 
vestigation, ordered the discontinuance 


BULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


891 


of the work, which had already cost a 
quarter of a million dollars. The Dalles 
station was bought by the Presbyterians, 
who now entered the same field (see Ban¬ 
croft, Hist. Oreg., i, 1886). 

In the fall of 1836 the Presbyterians , 
under the leadership of Rev. Marcus 
Whitman, established their first mission 
in the Columbia region at Waiilatpu, now 
Whitman, on Walla walla r., s. e. Wash., 
in territory claimed by the Cayuse tribe. 
The site had been selected by an advance 
agent, Rev. Samuel Parker, a few months 
earlier. Rev. H. H. Spalding, of the same 
party, about the same time, established a 
mission among the Nez Perces at Lapwai, 
on Clearwater r., a few miles above the 
present Lewiston, Idaho. Early in 1839 
a second station was begun among the 
Nez Pereas at Kamiah, higher up the 
Clearwater, but was discontinued in 1841. 
Revs. E. Walker and C. C. Eells estab¬ 
lished themselves at Chemakane, n. e. 
Wash., on a lower branch of Spokane r., 
among the Spokan. 

The Spokane, whose chief had been ed¬ 
ucated among the whites, proved friendly, 
but from the very beginning the Cayuse 
and a considerable portion of the Nez 
Perces maintained an insulting and hos¬ 
tile attitude, the Cayuse particularly 
claiming that the missionaries were in¬ 
truders upon their lands and were in 
league with the immigrants to dispossess 
the Indians entirely. In consequence the 
Kamiah station was soon abandoned. At 
Waiilatpu, the main station, Whitman 
was more than once in danger of personal 
assault, the irritation of the Indians con¬ 
stantly growing as the flood of immigrants 
increased. In consequence of the contin¬ 
ued opposition of the Cayuse and the Nez 
Perces, the mission board in 1842 ordered 
the abandonment of all the stations but 
Chemakane. Whitman then crossed the 
mountains to New York to intercede for 
his mission, with some degree of success, 
returning the next year to find his wife a 
refugee at one of the lower settlements, in 
consequence of the burning of a part of 
the mission property by the Cayuse, who 
were restrained from open war only by 
the attitude of the Government agent 
and the Hudson’s Bay Co.’s officers. 
In the summer of 1847 the Cayuse and 
neighboring tribes were wasted by an 
epidemic of measles and fever communi¬ 
cated by passing immigrant trains, all of 
which made Waiilatpu a stopping point. 
Two hundred of the Cayuse died within 
a few weeks, while of the Nez Perces the 
principal chief and 60 of his men fell vic¬ 
tims. A rumor spread among the Cayuse 
that Whitman had brought back the dis¬ 
ease poison from the E. and unloosed it for 
their destruction. The danger became so 
imminent that, actuated partly also by 


the opposition of the mission board, he 
decided to abandon Waiilatpu and remove 
to the former Methodist station at The 
Dalles, which he had already bought for 
his own denomination. At the same time 
he began negotiations with the Catholics 
for their purchase of Waiilatpu. Before 
the removal could be made, however, the 
blow fell. On Nov. 29, 1849, the Cayuse 
attacked Waiilatpu mission, killed Dr and 
Mrs Whitman and 7 others and plundered 
the mission property. Within a few 
days thereafter, before the Indians dis¬ 
persed to their camps, 4 others of the mis¬ 
sion force were killed, making 13 mur¬ 
dered, besides 2 children who died of 
neglect, or 15 persons in all. The rest, 
chiefly women, were carried off as pris¬ 
oners and subjected to abuse until rescued 
by the effort of the Hudson’s Bay Co., 
a month later. The Catholic Father 
Brouillet, who was on his way from be¬ 
low to confer with Whitman about the 
sale of the mission property, was one of 
the first to learn of the massacre, and 
hastening forward was allowed to bury 
the dead and then found opportunity to 
send warning to the Lapwai mission in 
time for Spalding and his party to make 
their escape, some of them being shel¬ 
tered by friendly Nez Perces, although 
the mission buildings were plundered by 
the hostiles. The Spokan chief, Garry, 
remained faithful and gave the people at 
Chemakane mission a bodyguard for their 
protection until the danger was past. As 
a resultof the Indian war which followed 
the Presbyterian missions in the Colum¬ 
bia region were abandoned. During the 
brief period that the station at Kamiah 
had continued, the missionary Rev. Asa 
Smith had “reduced the Nez Perc6 dia¬ 
lect to grammatical rules.” In 1839 the 
Lapwai mission received a small printing 
outfit with which Spalding and his assist¬ 
ants printed small primers, hymns, and 
portions of scripture in the language of 
the tribe by the aid of native interpreters. 
A Spokane primer of 1842, the joint work 
of Walker and Eells, is said to have been 
the third book printed in the Columbia 
r. region. 

As we have seen, the first Christian 
teaching among the tribes of the Colum¬ 
bia region had come from the Catholic 
employees of the Hudson’s Bay Co., 
through whose efforts many of the Nez 
Perces, Flatheads, and others had volun¬ 
tarily adopted the Christian forms as early 
as 1820, and some years later sent dele¬ 
gates to St Louis to make requests for 
missionaries, to which the Methodists 
were first to respond. In 1838 Fathers 
Francis Blanchet and Modeste Demers 
arrived at Ft Vancouver, Wash., on the 
Columbia, from Montreal, to minister par¬ 
ticularly to the French employees of the 


892 


MISSIONS 


[B. a. e. 


Hudson’s Bay Co., having visited the vari¬ 
ous tribes farther up along the river en 
route. In the next year St Francis 
Xavier mission was established by Blan- 
chet on the Cowlitz, in w. Washington, 
and St Paul mission at the French settle¬ 
ment on the lower Willamet, at Cham- 
poeg, Oreg., while Father J. B. Bolduc, 
afterward the pioneer missionary on 
Vancouver id., began preaching to the 
tribes on Puget sd. In 1841 the Jesuit 
de Smet had founded the mission of St 
Mary among the Flatheads in w. Montana 
(see Interior States), while a companion 
Jesuit, Father Nicholas Point, established 
the Sacred Heart mission among the Cceur 
d’Alenes in Idaho. 

In 1844 de Smet brought out from 
Europe a number of Jesuits and several 
sisters of the order of Notre Dame. Regu¬ 
lar schools were started and the tribes on 
both sides of the river as far up as the 
present Canadian boundary were included 
within the scope of the work. In the 
meantime Blanchet had been made arch¬ 
bishop of the Columbia territory and had 
brought out from Quebec 21 additional 
recruits—Jesuits, secular priests, and sis¬ 
ters—with which reinforcements 6 other 
missions were founded in rapid succes¬ 
sion, viz: St Ignatius, St Francis Borgia, 
and St Francis Regis, in Washington, 
among the Upper Pend d’Oreilles, Lower 
Pend d’Oreilles, and Colvilles, respec¬ 
tively, with 3 others across the line in 
British Columbia. Of these the first- 
named was the principal station, in charge 
of the Jesuit Fathers De Vos and Accolti. 
In the summer of 1847 Father N. C. 
Pandosy and 3 others, the first Oblate 
fathers in this region, established a mis¬ 
sion at Ahtanam among the Yakima in 
e. Washington; Father Pascal Ricard, 
Oblate, founded St Joseph on the Sound 
near the present Olympia; and in October 
of the same year, after some negotiation 
for the purchase of the Presbyterian 
establishment under Whitman at Waii- 
latpu, Father John Brouillet arrived to 
start a mission among the Cayuse. 
Hardly had he reached the nearest 
camp, however, when the news came 
of the terrible Whitman massacre, and 
Brouillet was just in time to bury the 
dead and send warning to the outlying 
stations, as already detailed. The project 
of a mission among the Cayuse was in 
consequence abandoned. In the next 
year the secular Fathers Rousseau and 
Mespl6e founded a station among the 
Wasco, at The Dalles of Columbia r., 
Oreg. Work was attempted among the 
degenerate Chinook in 1851, but with 
little result. Father E. C. Chirouse, best 
known for his later successful work at 
Tulalip school, began his labors among 
the tribes of Puget sd. and the lower 


Columbia about the same period. With 
the exception of the Wasco and Chinook, 
these missions, or their successors, are 
still in existence, numbering among their 
adherents the majority of the Christian 
Indians of Washington and s. Idaho. 
At the Tulalip school ‘The Youth’s Com¬ 
panion,’ a small journal in the Indian 
language, set up and printed by the In¬ 
dian boys, was begun in 1881 and con¬ 
ducted for some years. Father Louis 
Saintonge, for some years with the Yaki¬ 
ma and Tulalip missions, is the author of 
several important linguistic contributions 
to the Chinook jargon and the Yakima 
language. Father Pandosy also is the 
author of a brief ‘ Grammar and Diction¬ 
ary ’ of the Yakima. 

New Mexico and Arizona. —As all of 
this region was colonized from Spain, the 
entire mission work until a very recent 
period was conducted by the Catholics 
and through priests of the Franciscan 
order. The earliest exploration of the 
territory w. of the Rio Grande was made 
by the Franciscan friar, Marcos de Niza, 
in 1539, and it was through his repre¬ 
sentations that the famous exploration of 
Coronado was undertaken a year later. 
Five Franciscans accompanied the army, 
and on the return of the expedition in 
1542 three of these volunteered to remain 
behind for the conversion of the savages. 
Fray Luis de Escalona, or Descalona, 
chose Cicuye (Pecos) for his labors. 
Fray Juan de Padilla, with a few com¬ 
panions and a herd of sheep and mules, 
pushed on to distant Quivira, some¬ 
where on the plains of Kansas. Fray 
Juan de la Cruz stayed at Tiguex, Coro¬ 
nado’s winter quarters, properly Puaray 
on the Rio Grande, near the present Ber¬ 
nalillo, N. Mex. On arriving at Pecos 
Fray Luis sent back the message that 
while the tribe was friendly the medicine¬ 
men were hostile and would probably 
cause his death. So it apparently proved, 
for nothing more was ever heard of his 
fate or of that of Fray Juan de la Cruz at 
Tiguex. Of Fray Juan de Padilla it was 
learned years afterward that he had been 
killed by the Quivira people for attempt¬ 
ing to carry his ministrations to another 
tribe with which they were at war. 

In 1580 three other Franciscans, Rod¬ 
riguez, Santa Marfa, and Lopez, crossed 
the Rio Grande with a small escort and 
attempted to establish a mission at the 
Same town of Tiguex, by that time known 
as Puaray, but were killed by the Indians 
within a few months of their arrival. 

In 1598 Juan deOnate with a strong party 
of 100 men, besides women and children, 
and 7,000 cattle, entered the country from 
Mexico and within a few months had 
received the submission of all the Pueblo 
tribes as far as the remote Hopi of Ari- 


SULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


893 


zona, organizing a regular colonization 
and governmental administration and 
dividing the region into 7 mission dis¬ 
tricts in charge of a force of Franciscan 
friars. In 1617 the Pueblo missions 
counted 11 churches, with 14,000 “con¬ 
verts.” In 1621 there were more than 
16,000 converts, served by 27 priests in 
chargeof Father Alonso Benavides, whose 
Memorial is our principal source of infor¬ 
mation for this period. Another distin¬ 
guished name of this epoch is that of 
Father Geronimo de Zarate Salmeron, 
missionary, philologist, and historian. 
In 1630 there were some 50 priests serv¬ 
ing more than 60,000 Christianized In¬ 
dians in 90 pueblos, with 25 principal 
mission centers and churches. To this 
period belong the mission ruins at Ab6 
and Tabira, or “Gran Quivira” (one of 
which may be the San Isidro of the lost 
Jumano tribe), which were abandoned in 
consequence of Apache invasions about 
1675. The entire Pueblo population to¬ 
day numbers barely 10,000 souls in 25 
villages. 

About this time we begin to observe 
the first signs of revolt, due partly to the 
exactions of the Spanish military author¬ 
ities, but more, apparently, to the at¬ 
tachment of the Indians, particularly the 
medicine-men, to their own native cere¬ 
monies and religion. About the year 
1650 the wild tribes, known collectively 
as Apache, began the series of destruc¬ 
tive raids which continued down almost 
to the present century. Increasing fric¬ 
tion between the missionaries and the 
military administration prevented any 
united effort to meet the emergency. 
Missionaries were killed in outlying dis¬ 
tricts and several pueblos were wiped out 
by the wild tribes, until in 1675, after the 
murder of several missionaries and civil¬ 
ians and the execution or other punish¬ 
ment of the principals concerned, the 
Pueblo chiefs, led by Pop6 (q. v.) of San 
Juan, sent to the governor a message de¬ 
claring that they would kill all the Span¬ 
iards and flee to the mountains before 
they would permit their medicine-men to 
be harmed. Conditions rapidly grew 
worse, untit it was evident that a general 
conspiracy was on foot and an appeal was 
sent to Mexico by the governor for re¬ 
inforcements. Before help could arrive, 
however, the storm broke, on August 10, 
1680, the historic Pueblo revolt, organ¬ 
ized and led by Pop6. 

Says Bancroft (Hist. Ariz. and N. Mex., 
1889): “It was the plan of the New Mexi¬ 
cans to utterly exterminate the Spaniards; 
and in the massacre none were spared— 
neither soldier, priest, or settler, personal 
friend or foe, young or old, man or 
woman—except that a few beautiful 
women and girls were kept as captives.” 


Those in the S. were warned in time to 
escape, but those in the N., E., and W. per¬ 
ished to the number of over 400 persons, 
including 21 missionaries (see list, ibid., 
p. 179). Santa Fe itself, with a Spanish 
population of 1,000, after a battle lasting 
all day, was besieged nearly a week by 
3,000 Indians, who were finally driven 
off by Gov. Otermin in a desperate sortie 
in which the Indians lost 350 killed. 
The result was the entire evacuation of 
New Mexico by the Spaniards until its 
reconquest by Vargas in 1692-94, when 
most of the missions were reestablished. 
The Pueblo spirit was not crushed, how¬ 
ever, and in the summer of 1696 there 
was another outbreak by five tribes, re¬ 
sulting in the death of five missionaries, 
besides other Spaniards. The rising was 
soon subdued, except among the Hopi, 
who deferred submission until 1700, but 
only one of their seven or eight towns, 
Awatobi, would consent to receive mis¬ 
sionaries again. For the favor thus 
shown to Christians the other Hopi com¬ 
bined forces and utterly destroyed Awa¬ 
tobi and killed many of its people before 
the close of the year. The Hopi did not 
again become a mission tribe, but in 1742 
more than 440 Tigua, who had fled to the 
Hopi at the time of the great revolt, were 
brought back and distributed among the 
missions of the Rio Grande until they 
could be resettled in a new town of their 
own. (See Sandia .) 

In 1733 Father Mirabal established a 
mission among the wild Jicarilla, on 
Trampas r., a few leagues from Taos, N. 
Mex. In 1746 and 1749 attempts were 
made to gather a part of the Navaho into 2 
new missions established in the neighbor¬ 
hood of Laguna, but the undertaking was 
a failure. In the latter year the number 
of Christian Indians in New Mexico, in¬ 
cluding the vicinity of El Paso, was re¬ 
ported to be about 13,000. By this time 
the territory had been organized as a 
bishopric, and with the increase of the 
Spanish population the relative impor¬ 
tance of the mission work declined. In 
1780-81 an epidemic of smallpox carried 
off so many of the Christian Indians that 
by order of the governor the survivors 
were the next year concentrated into 20 
missions, the other stations being discon¬ 
tinued. As the Indians assimilated with 
the Spanish population the missions 
gradually took on the character of ordi¬ 
nary church establishments, the Francis¬ 
cans being: superseded by secular priests. 
The majority of the Pueblo Indians of 
to-day, excepting those of Hopi and Zuni, 
are at least nominal Christians. 

In the more recent historic period work 
has also been conducted at several pue¬ 
blos by various Protestant denominations. 
In 1854 a Baptist minister, Rev. Samuel 


894 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


Gorman, began a mission at Laguna, N. 
Mex., which was kept up for several 
years. In 1894 Rev. C. P. Coe, of the 
same denomination, began a similar work 
for the Hopi of Arizona. The Mennonites, 
represented by Rev. H. R. Voth, had be¬ 
gun a year earlier at Oraibi a successful 
work among the Hopi, which is still car¬ 
ried on, being now in charge of Revs. 
Jacob Epp and John B. Frey. 

About the year 1876 the Presbyterians , 
through Rev. John Menaul, established a 
mission at Laguna, the undertaking being 
afterward extended to Jemez and Zuni, 
N. Mex., besides an industrial school 
opened at Albuquerque in 1881. By 
means of a printing press operated at La¬ 
guna, with the aid of Indian pupils, sev¬ 
eral small devotional and reading books 
have been published by Menaul and Ber- 
covitz, connected with the mission, which 
still continues. 

With the exception of those among the 
Hopi, before the great revolt, the only 
missions in Arizona before the transfer of 
the territory to the United States were 
two in number, viz.: San Xavier del Bac 
and San Miguel de Guevavi, established 
under Jesuit auspices on the upper waters 
of Santa Cruz r., among a subtribe of the 
Pima, about 1732. 

The Pima missions were a northern ex¬ 
tension of the Jesuit mission foundation 
of northern Sonora, Mexico. The noted 
German Jesuit explorer, Father Eusebio 
Kino (properly Kiihne), made several 
missionary expeditions into s. Arizona be¬ 
tween 1692 and his death in 1710, but so 
far as known no regular stations were es¬ 
tablished until long after his death, the 
first priests in charge in 1732 being two 
other Germans, Father Felipe Segesser, 
at Bac, and Father Juan Grashoffer, at 
Guevavi. Besides the main establish¬ 
ment, several other Indian villages were 
designated as ‘visitas,’ or visiting sta¬ 
tions. The Pima mission never flour¬ 
ished. In 1750 the tribes revolted and 
the missions were plundered, most of the 
missionaries escaping, and by the time 
peace was restored the contest had begun 
against the Jesuits, which resulted in the 
expulsion of the order from Spanish ter¬ 
ritory in 1767. Their place was at once 
filled by the Franciscans, but the work 
languished and steadily declined under 
the attacks from the wild tribes. About 
the year 1780 Guevavi was abandoned in 
consequence of Apache raids, and Tuma- 
cacori, in the same general region, was 
made mission headquarters. The work 
came to an end by decree of the revolu¬ 
tionary government in 1828, shortly after 
the transfer of authority from Spain to 
Mexico. 

California.— As in other parts of Span¬ 
ish America, the Catholics were the sole 


mission workers in California until within 
a very recent period. The most noted of 
all the Spanish missions were the Fran¬ 
ciscan missions of California, whose story 
is so closely interwoven with the history 
and romance of the Pacific coast, and 
whose ruins still stand as the most pic¬ 
turesque landmarks of the region. Their 
story has been told so often that we need 
not here go into details. The first one 
was established in 1769 at San Diego, 
near the s. boundary, by Father Junfpero 
Serra (to whose memory a monument 
was erected at Monterey in 1891), who ad¬ 
vanced slowly along the coast and passed 
the work on to his successors, until in 1828 
there was a chain of 21 prosperous mis¬ 
sions extending northward to beyond 
San Francisco bay. The full list, in the 
order of their establishment, with the 
names of the founders or superiors in 
charge of the California mission district 
at the time, is as follows: 1, San Diego de 
Alcala (Serra, 1769); 2, San Carlos Bor- 
romeo de Monterey, alias Carmel (Serra, 
1770); 3, San Antonio de Padua (Serra, 
1771, July); 4, San Gabriel Arcangel 
(Serra, 1771, Sept.); 5, San Luis Obispo 
de Tolosa (Serra, 1772); 6, San Francisco 
de Asis, alias Dolores (Serra, 1776, Oct.); 
7, San Juan Capistrano (Serra, 1776, 
Nov.); 8, Santa Clara (Serra, 1777); 9, 
San Buenaventura (Serra, 1782); 10, Santa 
Barbara (Palou, 1786); 11, La Purfsima 
Concepcion (Palou, 1787); 12, Santa 

Cruz (Palou, 1791, Sept.); 13, Nuestra 
Senora de la Soledad (Palou, 1791, Oct.); 

14, San Jose (Lasuen, 1797, June 11); 

15, San Juan Bautista (Lasuen, 1797, June 
24); 16, San Miguel (Lasuen, 1797, July); 
17, San Fernando Rey (Lasuen, 1797, 
Sept.); 18, San Luis Rey de Francia (Peyri, 
1798); 19, Santa Ines (Tapis, 1804); 20, 
San Rafael (Payeras, 1817); 21, San Fran¬ 
cisco Solano, alias San Solano or Sonoma 
(Sonoma, 1823); 22, La Purfsima Concep¬ 
cion, on lower Colorado r. (Garces, 
1780); 23, San Pedro y San Pablo de 
Bicuner, on lower Colorado r., possibly in 
Lower California (Garces, 1780). 

Among the many devoted workers 
connected with the California missions 
during the 65 years of their existence the 
most prominent, after Serra, are Fathers 
Crespi, Palou, and Peyri, the last-named 
being the founder, and for a number of 
years the superior, of San Luis Rey, 
which shared with San Diego the honor 
of being the largest and most important 
of the series. In 1810 the neophyte 
population of San Diego was 1,611, while 
that of San Luis Rey was 1,519. 

The mission buildings, constructed en¬ 
tirely by Indian labor under supervision 
of the fathers, were imposing structures 
of brick and stone, some of which even in 
their roofless condition have defied the 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


895 


decay of 70 years. Around each mission, 
except in the extreme n., were groves of 
palms, bananas, oranges, olives, and figs, 
together with extensive vineyards, while 
more than 400,000 cattle ranged the pas¬ 
tures. Workshops, schoolrooms, store¬ 
rooms, chapels, dormitories, and hospitals 
were all provided for, and in addition to 
religious instruction and ordinary school 
studies, weaving, pottery-making, carpen¬ 
try, and every other most useful trade 
and occupation were taught to the neo¬ 
phytes, besides the violin and other in¬ 
struments to those who displayed apti¬ 
tude in music. There were fixed hours 
for prayers and work, with three hours 
of rest at noon, and dancing and other 
amusements after supper and the angelus, 
which was one hour before sunset. The 
diet consisted of an abundance of fresh 
beef, mutton, wheat and corn bread, and 
beans, from their own herds and planta¬ 
tions. From the sale of the surplus were 
bought clothing, tobacco, and trinkets 
for the Indians, and the necessary church 
supplies. At seasonable intervals there 
were outing excursions to allow the neo¬ 
phytes to visit their wilder relatives in 
the hills. The missionaries taught by 
ractical example at the plow, the brick- 
iln, and in the vineyard. Duflot de Mo- 
fras, who made an official tour of the mis¬ 
sions on behalf of the French govern¬ 
ment shortly before their utter ruin, says: 
“Necessity makes the missionaries indus¬ 
trious. One is struck with astonishment 
at seeing that with such small resources, 
generally without any European work¬ 
men, and with the aid of savage popula¬ 
tions whose intelligence was of the lowest 
order and who were often hostile, besides 
the vast agricultural culture, they have 
been able to execute such extensive 
works of architecture and mechanical 
structures, such as mills, machinery, and 
workshops, besides bridges, roads, and 
canals for irrigation. The construction 
of almost all these missions required that 
timber, often cut upon steep mountains, 
should be brought 25 to 30 miles, and 
that the Indians should be taught how to 
make lime, cut stone, and mould bricks. 
This fact can not be mistaken—it was 
not merely by proselytism that the old 
missionaries succeeded in attracting the 
Indians. In the work of their conver¬ 
sion, if religion was the end, material 
comfort was the means. The mission¬ 
aries had re-solved the great problem of 
making labor attractive.’’ 

The Indians themselves, of many tribes 
and dialects, were for the most part un- 
warlike and tractable, but without native 
energy, and probably, in their original 
condition, lower in the scale of civiliza¬ 
tion and morality than any others within 
the limits of the United States. Infanti¬ 


cide prevailed to such a degree that even 
the most earnest efforts of the mission¬ 
aries were unable to stamp it out, the fact 
showing how little the new teaching 
really affected the deeper instinct of the 
savage. Although there were frequent 
raids by the wild tribes, there was little 
serious opposition to mission discipline, 
which was supported when necessary by 
military assistance from the nearest gar¬ 
rison. Despite regular life, abundance of 
food, and proper clothing according to the 
season, the Indian withered away under 
the restrictions of civilization supple¬ 
mented by epidemic diseases introduced 
by the military garrisons or the seal hunt¬ 
ers along the coast. The death rate was 
so enormous in spite of apparent material 
advancement that it is probable that the 
former factor alone would have brought 
about the extinction of the missions with¬ 
in a few generations. 

But all this prosperity at last excited 
the cupidity of the recently established 
revolutionary government of Mexico, and 
in 1833-34 decrees were passed to “secu¬ 
larize” the missions and to expel the 
missionaries, who, as Spaniards, were 
hated by the revolutionists. The mission 
funds and vast herds were confiscated, 
the lands were distributed to eager polit¬ 
ical adventurers, and minor vandals com¬ 
pleted the work of destruction by taking 
even the tiles from the roofs and digging 
up the vines and fruit trees in the gar¬ 
dens. Some abortive provision was made 
for the Indians, of which in their help¬ 
lessness they were unable to avail them¬ 
selves, and in a few years, left without 
their protectors, they had again scattered 
to the mountains and swamps or sunk 
into the lowest degradation in the new 
mining towns. In 1834, when the blow 
came, the California missions had 30,650 
Indians, with 424,000 cattle, 62,500 
horses and mules; 321,900 sheep, goats, 
and hogs; and produced 122,500 bushels 
of wheat and corn. In 1842 there re¬ 
mained only 4,450 Indians, 28,220 cattle, 
and the rest in proportion. To-day, ac¬ 
cording to official report, there remain of 
the old Mission Indians only 2,855, whose 
condition is a subject of constant seri¬ 
ous concern to philanthropists. 

Two other California missions have a 
briefer history. In 1780 the military 
commander of the Sonora district deter¬ 
mined to establish among the warlike 
Yuma two garrison posts with colony and 
mission attachments, despite the protests 
of the missionaries concerned, who fore¬ 
saw that the combination would be dis¬ 
astrous to their own part of the work. 
Two sites were selected, however, in the 
tail of the year on the w. bank of the Col¬ 
orado—tfieone, La Purfsima Concepcion, 
occupying the site of old Ft Yuma, the 


896 


MISSIONS 


[B. A. H. 


other, San Pedro y Pablo de Bicuner, being 
8 or 10 m. lower down, possibly just across 
the present Mexican border. Purfsima 
mission was placed in charge of Father 
Francisco Garces, the explorer, with 
Father Juan Barreneche as his assistant, 
while the other was given over to Fathers 
Diaz and Moreno. The event was as pre¬ 
dicted. Within a year the Yuma were 
roused to hostility by the methods and 
broken promises of the military com¬ 
mander. In July, 1781, both settlements 
were attacked almost simultaneously, the 
buildings plundered and burned, the 
commander and every man of the small 
garrison killed after a desperate resistance, 
the four missionaries and nearly all the 
men of the colonies also butchered, and 
the women and several others carried off 
as captives. A subsequent expedition 
rescued the captives and buried the dead, 
but the Yuma remained unsubdued and 
the colony undertaking was not renewed. 
(See California, Indians of; Mission In¬ 
dians of California.) 

Alaska. —Alaska was discovered by the 
Russians in 1741 and remained a possession 
of Russia until transferred to the United 
States in 1867. In 1794 regular missionary 
work was begun among the Aleut on Ko¬ 
diak id. by monks of the Greek Catholic 
(Russian orthodox) church, under the 
Archimandrite Joassaf, with marked suc¬ 
cess among the islanders, but with smaller 
result among the more warlike tribes of 
the mainland. Within a few years the 
savage Aleut were transformed to civilized 
Christians, many of whom were able to 
read, write, and speak the Russian lan¬ 
guage. Among the pioneer workers were 
Fathers Juvenal, murdered in 1796 by the 
Eskimo for his opposition to polygamy, 
and the distinguished John Veniaminof, 
1823 to about 1840, the historian and phi¬ 
lologist of the Alaskan tribes, and author 
of a number of religious and educational 
works in the Aleut and Tlingit languages, 
including an Aleut grammar and a brief 
dictionary. Fathers Jacob Netzvietoff 
and Elias Tishnoff also have made several 
translations into the Aleut language. 
About the time of the transfer to the 
United States the Christian natives num¬ 
bered 12,000, served by 27 priests and 
deacons, with several schools, including 
a seminary at Sitka. Chapels had been 
established in every important settlement 
from Prince William id. to the outermost 
of the Aleutian ids., a distance of 1,800 m., 
besides other stations on the Yukon, Kus- 
kokwim, and Nushagak rs., and regular 
churches at Sitka, Killisnoo, and Juneau. 
In 1902 the Greek church had 18 minis¬ 
ters at work in Alaska. (See Russian in¬ 
fluence. ) 

The first Protestant missions after the 
transfer to the United States were begun by 


the Presbyterians in 1877, under the super¬ 
vision of Rev. Sheldon Jackson and Mrs 
A. R. McFarland, with headquarters at Ft 
Wrangell, where a school had already 
been organized by some Christian Indians 
from the Methodist station at Ft Simp¬ 
son, Brit. Col. Within the next 18 years 
some 15 stations had been established 
among the Indians of the s. coast and 
islands, besides two among the Eskimo, 
at Pt Barrow and on St Lawrence id. 
Among the earliest workers, besides those 
already named, were Rev. J. G. Brady, 
Rev. E. S. Willard, and Mr Walter Stiles. 
The principal schools were at Sitka (1878) 
and Juneau (1886). At Pt Barrow a herd 
of imported reindeer added to the means 
of subsistence. The majority of these 
missions are still in successful operation. 

The next upon the ground were the 
Catholics, who made their first establish¬ 
ment at Wrangell in 1878, following with 
others at Sitka, Juneau, and Skagway. In 
1886-87 they entered the Yukon region, 
with missions at Nulato on the Yukon, 
St Ignatius on the Kuskokwim, St Mary’s 
(Akularak), St Michael, Nome, Kusilvak 
id., Nelson id., Holy Cross (Koserefsky), 
and others, the largest schools being those 
at Koserefsky and Nulato. With the ex¬ 
ception of Nulato all were in Eskimo ter¬ 
ritory. In 1903 the work was in charge 
of 12 Jesuits and lay brothers, assisted by 
11 sisters of St Anne. The Innuit gram¬ 
mar and dictionary of Father Francis 
Barnum (1901) ranks as one of the most 
important contributions to Eskimo phil¬ 
ology. 

In 1884 the Moravians, pioneer workers 
among the eastern Eskimo, sent a com¬ 
mission to look over the ground in Alaska, 
and as a result a mission was established 
at Kevinak among the Eskimo of Kus¬ 
kokwim r. in the next year by Revs. W. H. 
Weinland and J. H. Kilbuck, with their 
wives. In the same year other stations 
were established at Kolmakof, on the 
upper Kuskokwim, for Eskimo and In¬ 
dians together, and farther s., at Carmel, 
on Nushagak r. In 1903 there were 5 
mission stations in Eskimo territory, in 
charge of 13 white workers, having 21 
native assistants, with Rev. Adolf Stecker 
as superintendent. The reindeer herd 
numbered nearly 400. 

In 1886 the Episcopalians began work 
with a school at St Michael, on the coast 
(Eskimo), which was removed next year 
to Anvik, on the Yukon, in charge of 
Rev. and Mrs Octavius Parker and Rev. 
J. H. Chapman. In 1890 a mission 
school was started at Pt Hope (Eskimo), 
under Dr J. B. Driggs, and about the 
same time another among the Tanana 
Indians in the middle Yukon valley, by 
Rev. and Mrs T. H. Canham. In 1903 
the Episcopalians in Alaska, white and 


BULL. 30 ] 


MISSIONS 


897 


native, counted 13 churches, a boarding 
school, and 7 day schools, with a total 
working force of 31. 

The Baptists also began work in 1886 
on Kodiak id., under Mr W. E. Roscoe. 
In 1893 a large orphanage was erected 
on Wood id., opposite Kodiak, by the 
Woman’s Home Mission Society, its 
sphere of influence now including a great 
part of the Alaska peninsula westward 
from Mt St Elias. 

The Methodists , beginning also in 1886, 
have now several stations in s. e. Alaska, 
together with the flourishing Jesse Lee 
Industrial Home, under the auspices of 
the Methodist Woman’s Home Mission 
Society, on Unalaska id. 

In 1887 the Swedish Evangelical Union 
of Sweden, through Revs. Axel Karlson 
and Adolf Lydell, respectively, estab¬ 
lished stations at Unalaklik on Bering 
sea (Eskimo) and at Yakutat, on the s. 
coast among the Tlingit. In 1900, in 
consequence of an epidemic, an orphanage 
was founded on Golofnin bay. The civ¬ 
ilizing and Christianizing influence of 
the Swedish mission is manifest over a 
large area. 

In 1887 the Kansas Yearly Meeting of 
Friends began work on Douglas id., near 
Juneau, through Messrs E. W. Weesner 
and W. H. Bangham, chiefly for the 
white population. In 1892 a school was 
opened among the Kake Indians of Kuiu 
and Kupreanof ids., under the auspices 
of the Oregon meeting, and in 1897 
another mission, under the auspices of 
the California meeting, was established 
among the Eskimo in Kotzebue sd. Here 
also is now a large reindeer herd. 

In 1890 the Congregationalists, under 
auspices of the American Missionary As¬ 
sociation, established the Eskimo mission 
school of Wales, at C. Prince of Wales, on 
Bering str., under Messrs W. T. Lopp 
and H. R. Thornton, the latter of whom 
was afterward assassinated by some re¬ 
bellious pupils. In 1902 the school was 
in prosperous condition, with more than 
a hundred pupils and a herd of about 
1,200 reindeer. 

In 1900 the Lutherans, under the aus¬ 
pices of the Norwegian Evangelical 
Church, established an orphanage at the 
Teller reindeer station, Port Clarence, 
Bering str., under Rev. T. L. Brevig, as¬ 
sisted by Mr A. Hovick, the missionaries 
having charge also of the Government 
reindeer herds at the place. It was at 
Teller station that Rev. Sheldon Jackson, 
in 1892, inaugurated the experiment of 
introducing Siberian reindeer to supple¬ 
ment the rapidly diminishing food supply 
of the natives, as the whale had been 
practically exterminated from the Alaska 
coast. The experiment has proved a 
complete success, the original imported 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-57 


herd of 53 animals having increased to 
more than 15,000, with promise of solv¬ 
ing the problem of subsistence for the 
Eskimo as effectually as was done by the 
sheep introduced by the old Franciscans 
among the Pueblos and through them the 
Navaho. 

For Metlakatla, see Canada, West. 

Present Conditions. —It may be said 
that at present practically every tribe 
officially recognized within the United 
States is under the missionary influence 
of some religious denomination, workers 
of several denominations frequently la¬ 
boring in the same tribe. The complete 
withdrawal of Government aid to denom¬ 
inational schools some years ago for a 
time seriously crippled the work and 
obliged some of the smaller bodies to 
abandon the mission field entirely. The 
larger religious bodies have met the diffi¬ 
culty by special provision, notably in the 
case of the Catholics, by means of aid 
afforded by the Preservation Society, the 
Marquette League, and by the liberality 
of Mother Katharine Drexel, founder 
of the Order of the Blessed Sacrament, 
for Indian and Negro mission work. The 
Catholic work is organized under super¬ 
vision of the Bureau of Catholic Indian 
Missions, established in 1874, with head¬ 
quarters at Washington. The report for 
1904 shows a total of 178 Indian churches 
and chapels served by 152 priests; 71 
boarding and 26 day schools, with 109 
teaching priests, 384 sisters, and 138 other 
religious or secular teachers and school 
assistants. The principal orders engaged 
are the Jesuits, Franciscans, and Bene¬ 
dictines, and the sisters of the orders of 
St Francis, St Anne, St Benedict, St Jo¬ 
seph, Mercy, and Blessed Sacrament. 

Of the other leading denominations en¬ 
gaged in Indian mission work within the 
United States proper, according to the 
official Report of the Board of Indian 
Commissioners for 1903, the Presbyterians 
come first, with 101 churches, 69 ordained 
missionaries and a proportionate force 
of other workers, and 32 schools. Next 
the Methodists, with 40 ordained mission¬ 
aries, but with only one school; Episco¬ 
palians, 14 missions, 28 ordained mis¬ 
sionaries, and 17 schools; Baptists, 14 
missions, 15 ordained missionaries, and 4 
schools—exclusive of the Southern Bap¬ 
tists, not reported; Congregationalists 
(American Missionary Association), 10 
missions, 12 ordained missionaries, and 5 
schools; Friends, 10 missions, 15ordained 
missionaries, and 1 school; Mennonites, 5 
missions, 6 ordained missionaries, but no 
school; Moravians, 3 missions, 3 ordained 
missionaries, and no school. Statistics 
for any other denominations, including 
the Mormons, are not given. The mis¬ 
sionary work of each denomination re- 



898 


MISSIONS 


[B. a. e. 


ported is in charge of a central organiza¬ 
tion. 

Canada, East; Newfoundland, etc.— 
Canada, being originally a French posses¬ 
sion, the mission work for a century and 
a half was almost entirely with the Cath¬ 
olics. Port Royal, now Annapolis, Nova 
Scotia, was founded in 1605, and the res¬ 
ident priest, Father Fleche, divided his 
attention between the French settlers and 
the neighboring Micmac. In 1611 the 
Jesuits, Fathers Peter Biard and Ene- 
mond Masse, arrived from France, but 
finding work among the Micmac made 
difficult by the opposition of the govern¬ 
or, they went to the Abnaki, among 
whom they established a mission on Mt 
Desert id., Maine, in 1613. The mission 
was destroyed in its very beginning by 
the English Captain Argali (see New 
England). In 1619 work was resumed 
among the Micmac and the Malecite of 
Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and lower 
Quebec under the R6collet Franciscans 
and continued for at least half a century. 
The most distinguished of these Recol¬ 
lets was Father Chrestien Le Clercq, who, 
while stationed at the Micmac mission of 
Gaspe, at the mouth of the St Lawrence, 
from 1655 to about 1665, mastered the 
language and devised for it a system of 
hieroglyphic writing which is still in use 
in the tribe. Another of the same order 
is said to have been the first to compile a 
dictionary of a Canadian language, but 
the work is now lost. The eastern mis¬ 
sions continued, under varying auspices 
and fortunes, until the taking of Louis- 
burg, Nova Scotia, by the English in 1745, 
when all the missionaries in Nova Scotia 
and New Brunswick were either deported 
or compelled to seek other refuge. In 
theirabsence the Abbe Maillard,of Nova 
Scotia, ministered for some years to the 
Micmac and the Malecite, at first in secret 
and then openly after the peace of 1760. 
To him we owe a Micmac grammar and 
a treatise on the customs of the Indians. 
It w T as not until within the last centu¬ 
ry, when international and sectarian jeal¬ 
ousies had largely passed away, that the 
work was resumed, continuing without 
interruption to the present time. 

Work was begun in 1615 by the Re¬ 
collets among the roving Montagnais 
and Algonkin of the Saguenay, Ottawa, 
and lower St Lawrence region. The 
pioneers were Fathers Dolbeau, Jamet, 
and Du Plessis, together with Father Le 
Caron in the Huron field. In 1636 Dol¬ 
beau had extended his ministrations to 
the outlying bands of the remote Eskimo 
of Labrador. The principal missions were 
established at Tadousac (Montagnais), 
the great trading resort at the mouth of 
the Saguenay; Gasp6 (Montagnais and 
Micmac) and Three Rivers (Montagnais 


and Algonkin), all in Quebec province; 
Miscou, N. B., for the Micmac, and on 
Georgian bay for the Hurons. In 1625 
the Recollets called the Jesuits to their 
aid, and a few years later withdrew' en¬ 
tirely, leaving the work to be continued 
by the latter order. In 1637 the Jesuit 
mission of St Joseph was founded by Le 
Jeune at Sillery, near Quebec, and soon 
became the most important colony of the 
christianized Montagnais and Algonkin. 
In 1646, at the request of the Abnaki, 
Father Gabriel Druillettes was sent to 
that tribe. In consequence of the later 
New England wars, large numbers of the 
Abnaki and other more southerly tribes 
took refuge in the Canadian missions (see 
New England). 

In 1641 Fathers Charles Raymbault and 
Isaac Jogues, among the Ottaw'a bands 
on the headwaters of the river of that 
name, accompanied a party to the far W. 
and discovered the great L. Superior, 
planting a cross and preaching in the 
camps about the present Sault Ste Marie, 
Mich. In the next year a regular mis¬ 
sion was established among the Nipissing, 
on the n. shore of the lake of the same 
name. Other missions followed, con¬ 
tinuing until the dispersion of the Algon¬ 
kin tribes by the Iroquois in 1650. Most 
of the fugitives fled westward, roving 
along the shores of L. Superior w'ithout 
missionary attention until visited by 
the Jesuit Allouez in 1667. Other names 
connected with this early Algonkin mis¬ 
sion were those of Pijart, Garreau, and 
the pioneer explorer Rene Menard. In 
1657 the first Sulpicians arrived at Quebec 
from France, and soon afterw r ard began 
work among the neighboring tribes, but 
with principal attention to the Iroquois 
colonies on both shores of L. Ontario, at 
Quinte and Oswegatchie (see New York). 
To this period belongs the w'onderful ca¬ 
noe voyage of discovery by the two Sul¬ 
picians, Galinee and Dollier de Casson, 
in 1669-70, from Montreal up through the 
great lakes to Mackinaw, where they w r ere 
welcomed by the Jesuits Dablon and 
Marquette, and then home, by way of 
French r., Nipissing, and the Ottaw'a. No 
less important was the discovery of an 
overland route from the St Lawrence to 
Hudson bay in 1671-72 by the Sieur St 
Simon, accompanied by the Jesuit Charles 
Albanel. Ascending the Saguenay from 
Tadousac they crossed the divide, and 
after 10 months of toilsome travel finally 
reached the bay near the mouth of Ru¬ 
pert r., where Albanel, the first missionary 
to penetrate this remote region, spent 
some time preaching and baptizing among 
the wandering Maskegon along the shore. 
In 1720 a number of the christianized 
Iroquois, with fragments of the Algonkin 
bands, after years of shifting about, w r ere 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


899 


gathered into a new mission settlement 
at Oka, or Lake of the Two Mountains 
(Lac des Deux Montagnes), also known 
under its Iroquois name of Canasadaga, 
on the n. bank of the St Lawrence, above 
the island of Montreal. It still exists as 
one of the principal Indian settlements. 

Among the earlier missionaries in this 
region who have made important con¬ 
tributions to Algonquian philology may 
be noted: Father Louis Andre, Jesuit, 
who spent more than 40 years with the 
Montagnais and the Algonkin, from 1669, 
leaving behind him a manuscript diction¬ 
ary of the Algonkin, besides a great 
body of other material; Father Antonio 
Silvy, Jesuit, of the same period, author 
of a manuscript Montagnais dictionary; 
Father Pierre Laure, Jesuit, with the 
Montagnais, 1720-38, author of a manu¬ 
script Montagnais grammar and diction¬ 
ary, and other works; Father Jean Mathe- 
vet, Sulpician, at Oka, 1746 to 1781, the 
author of an Abnaki dictionary; Father 
Vincent Guichart, ministering to Algon¬ 
kin and Iroquois at Oka from 1754 until 
his death in 1793, master of both lan¬ 
guages and author of a manuscript Algon¬ 
kin grammar; the Abb4 Thavenet, Sul¬ 
pician, at Oka, from about 1793 to 1815, 
author of an Algonkin grammar and 
dictionary and other miscellany, still 
in manuscript; Father J. B. La Brosse, 
Jesuit, with the Montagnais and Malecite, 
1754 to his death in 1782, author of a 
number of religious and teaching works 
in the Montagnais language. Among the 
most distinguished laborers within the 
last century in the Montagnais, Algonkin, 
and Maskegon territories, stretching from 
the St Lawrence to Hudson bay, may be 
named Fathers Durocher( 1829-73), Garin 
(1845-57), Laverlochere (1845-51), Lebret 
(1861-69), Gueguen (1864-88+), and 
Prevost (1873-88+), all of the Oblate 
order, and each the author of some im¬ 
portant contribution to American philol¬ 
ogy. Rev. Charles Guay has given atten¬ 
tion to the language among the Micmac 
of New Brunswick. In recent years the 
most prominent name is that of Father 
J. A. Cuoq, Sulpician, already noted, 
missionary at Oka for more than half a 
century, beginning in 1847, master of the 
Mohawk and Algonkin languages, and 
author of a dictionary of each, besides 
numerous other important linguistic 
works. 

According to the official Canadian In¬ 
dian Report for 1906 the Catholic Indians 
of the five eastern provinces numbered 
18,064, including all those of Prince 
Edward id., Nova Scotia, and New Bruns¬ 
wick, nearly all those of Quebec, and 
two-fifths of the Christian Indians of 
Ontario. Every settlement of impor¬ 
tance had a church, school, or visiting 


priest, the standard for industry being 
fair, for temperance good, and for honesty 
and general morality exceptionally high. 

The noted Huron missions hold a place 
by themselves. The beginning was made 
by the Recollet, Joseph le Caron, who 
accompanied Champlain on his visit to 
the Huron country in 1615. The tribe 
at that time occupied the shores of Geor¬ 
gian bay, Ontario, and with other incor¬ 
porated bands may have numbered 10,000 
souls or more (some estimates are much 
higher), in from 15 to 30 towns or villages, 
several of which were strongly palisaded. 
They were probably then of strength 
equal to that of their hereditary enemies 
and final destroyers, the Iroquois of New 
York. In more or less close alliance with 
the Hurons were the cognate Tionontati 
and Neutrals, farther to the s. and s. w., 
in the peninsula between L. Erie and L. 
Huron. Le Caron* spent the winter with 
the Hurons and Tionontati, established 
the mission of St Gabriel, made a brief 
dictionary of the language, and returned 
to the French settlements in the spring. 
The work was continued for some years 
by other Recollets, Gabriel Sagard, au¬ 
thor of a Huron dictionary and a history 
of the Recollet missions, and Nicholas 
Viel, who was murdered by an Indian 
about 1624. In 1625 the Jesuits arrived 
in Canada to assist the Recollets, and the 
next year the heroic Jean de Brebeuf and 
another Jesuit, with Father Joseph Dal- 
lion, Recollet, reached St Gabriel. The 
Neutrals also were now visited, but with¬ 
out successful result. The work was 
brought to a temporary close by the 
English occupancy of Canada in 1629. 

In 1634, after the restoration of French 
control, the work was resumed, this time 
by the Jesuits alone, with Brebeuf as 
superior, assisted then or later by Fathers 
Daniel, Gamier, Jogues, and others of 
less note. The mission church of Im¬ 
maculate Conception was built in 1637 at 
Ossossani, one of the principal towns; 
St Joseph was established at Teanan- 
stayae, the capital, in the next year; the 
principal war chief of the tribe was bap¬ 
tized, and Christianity began to take root, 
in spite of the suspicions engendered by 
two wasting epidemic visitations, for 
which the missionaries were held respon¬ 
sible and solemnly condemned to death, 
until the current of opposition was turned 
by Br4beuf’s courageous bearing. In 
1639 there were 4 established missions 
with 13 priests working in the Huron 
country and visiting in the neighboring 
tribes. St Marys, on Wye r., had been 
made the general headquarters. A visi¬ 
tation of smallpox again spread terror 
through the tribe and for a time rendered 
the position of the missionaries unsafe. 
In consequence of these successive epi- 


900 


MISSIONS 


[B. a. e. 


demies within a few years several towns 
had been depopulated and the tribe so 
much weakened as to leave it an easy 
prey for the invading Iroquois, whose 
inroads now became more constant and 
serious than before. 

In 1641 the Iroquois invaded the Huron 
country in force, killed many, and car¬ 
ried off many others to captivity. In 
1648, after a temporary truce, they re¬ 
sumed the war of extermination, with 
perhaps 2,000 warriors well armed with 
guns obtained from the Dutch, while the 
Hurons had only bows. On July 4 Tea- 
nanstayae, or St Joseph, on the site of 
the present Barrie, was attacked and de¬ 
stroyed, the missionary, Father Anthony 
Daniel, killed with several hundred of his 
flock, and about 700 others were carried 
off as captives. The whole country was 
ravaged throughout the fall and winter, 
and one town after another destroyed or 
abandoned. On Mar. 16, 1649, a thou¬ 
sand warriors attacked St Ignatius town 
and massacred practically the whole 
population, after which they proceeded 
at once to the neighboring town of St 
Louis, where the burning and massacre 
were repeated, and two missionaries, 
Brebeuf and Father Gabriel Lalemant, 
killed after hours of the most horrible 
tortures. An attack on St Marys, where 
Father Ragueneau was stationed, was re¬ 
pulsed, after which the Iroquois retired. 

This was the deathblow to the Huron 
nation. Fifteen towns were abandoned 
and the people scattered in every direc¬ 
tion. Two whole town populations sub¬ 
mitted to the conquerors and removed in 
a body to the Seneca country. Others 
fled to the Tionontati, who were now in 
turn invaded by the Iroquois and com¬ 
pelled, by burning and massacre, with 
the killing of Fathers Gamier and Cha- 
banel, to abandon their country and flee 
with the rest. Others took refuge on the 
islands of L. Huron. Some joined the 
Neutrals, who soon after met the same 
fate. 

For the next 50 years the history of 
the confederated Huron and Tionontati 
remnants is a mere record of flight from 
pursuing enemies—the Iroquois in the E. 
and the Sioux in the W. A considerable 
body which sought the protection of the 
French, after several removals was finally 
settled by Father M. J. Chaumonot in 
1693 at (New) Lorette, near Quebec, 
where their descendants still reside (see 
Hurons; Lorette). To Chaumonot we owe 
a standard grammar and dictionary of 
the Huron language, only the first of 
which is yet published. In the mean¬ 
time, in 1656-57, two-thirds of this band 
had bodily removed to the Iroquois coun¬ 
try to escape destruction. 


The other fugitives, composed largely or 
principally of Tionontati, fled successively 
to Manitoulin id. in L. Huron; Macki¬ 
naw; the Noquet ids. in Green bay, Wis.; 
westward to the Mississippi; back to 
Green bay, where they were visited by 
the Jesuit Menard in 1660; to Chegoi- 
megon, near the present Bayfield, Wis., 
on the shore of L. Superior, where the 
Jesuit Allouez ministered to them for 
several years; back, in 1670, to Macki¬ 
naw, whence another party joined the 
Iroquois, and finally down to Detroit, 
Mich., when that post was founded in 
1702. In 1751 a part of these, under 
Father .de la Richard, settled at San¬ 
dusky, Ohio. From this period the 
Wyandot, as they now began to be called, 
took their place as the leading tribe of the 
Ohio region and the privileged lighters 
of the confederate council fire. Their 
last Jesuit missionary, Father Peter 
Potier, died in 1781, after which they 
were served by occasional visiting priests 
and later by the Presbyterians and the 
Methodists, until about the period of 
their removal to Kansas in 1842 (see In¬ 
terior States). 

The work of the Episcopalians (Angli¬ 
can Church) among the Iroquois of New 
York, beginning about 1700 and continu¬ 
ing in Canada after the removal of a large 
part of the confederacy from the United 
States, has already been noted (see Mid¬ 
dle Atlantic—New York). In 1763 Rev. 
Thomas Wood of Nova Scotia, having 
become acquainted with the Abbe Mail- 
lard and obtained the use of his Micmac 
manuscript, applied himself to the study 
of the language, dividing his ministra¬ 
tions thenceforth between the Indians 
and the whites until his death in 1778. He 
preached in the native tongue, in which 
he produced several religious translations. 
This seems to have been the only work 
recorded for this denomination in this 
part of the Dominion, and in the official 
Canadian Indian Report for 1906 no In¬ 
dians are enumerated under this heading 
in the provinces of Nova Scotia, New 
Brunswick, or Prince Edward id. In 
Quebec province the same report gives 
this denomination 119 Indians, including 
60 Abnaki at St Francis and 48 Montagn- 
ais at Lake St John. 

In Ontario province, besides the work 
already noted among the Iroquois, active 
and successful missionary effort has been 
carried on by the Episcopalians among 
the various Chippewa bands and others 
since about 1830. One of the principal 
stations is that at Garden River, opposite 
Sault Ste Marie, begun in 1835 by Rev. 
Mr McMurray, who was succeeded a few 
years later by Rev. F. A. O’Meara, after¬ 
ward stationed on Manitoulin id., and 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


901 


later at Port Hope on L. Ontario. Be¬ 
sides building up a flourishing school, 
Mr O’Meara found time to translate into 
the native language the Book of Common 
Prayer, considerable portions of both the 
Old and the New Testament, and a vol¬ 
ume of hymns, the last in cooperation 
with the Rev. Peter Jacobs. He died 
about 1870. Of the more recent period 
the most noted worker is Rev. E. F. Wil¬ 
son, who began his labors under the 
auspices of the Church Mission Society 
in 1868. To his efforts the Indians owe 
the Shingwauk and Wawanosh homes at 
Sault Ste Marie, Ontario, where some 60 
or 80 children are cared for, educated, 
and taught the rudiments of trades and 
simple industries. A school journal, 
set up and printed by the Indian boys, 
has also been conducted at intervals, 
under various titles, for nearly 30 years. 
Mr Wilson is the author of a number of 
Indian writings, of which the most im¬ 
portant is probably a ‘Manual of the 
Ojibway Language,’ for the use of mis¬ 
sion workers. 

In 1835 a mission was established also 
on Thames r., among the Munsee, a rem¬ 
nant of those Delaware refugees from the 
United States who for so many years of 
the colonial period had been the object of 
Moravian care (see Middle Atlantic States ). 
One of the pioneer workers, Rev. Mr 
Flood, translated the church liturgy into 
the language of the tribe. 

Of 17,498 Christian Indians officially 
reported in 1906 in Ontario province, 
5,253, or not quite one-third, are credited 
to the Episcopal or Anglican church, in¬ 
cluding—Iroquois in various bands, 3,073; 
“Chippewasof the Thames,” 593; “Ojib- 
bewas of L. Superior,” 554; “Chippewas 
and Saulteaux of Treaty No. 3” (Mani¬ 
toba border), 709; “ Munsees of the 
Thames” (originally Moravian converts 
from the United States; see Middle Atlantic 
States), 154; “Ojibbewas and Ottawas of 
Manitoulin and Cockburn ids.,” 169; 
Potawatomi of Walpole id., 79; and one 
or two smaller groups. 

The work among the Eskimo of the 
Labrador coast—officially a part of New¬ 
foundland—is conducted by the Mora¬ 
vians. In 1752 a reconnoitering mission¬ 
ary party landed near the present Hope- 
dale, but was attacked by the natives, 
who killed Brother J. C. Ehrhardt and 5 
sailors, whereupon the survivors returned 
home and the attempt for a time was 
abandoned. One or two other exploring 
trips were made for the same purpose, 
and in 1769 permission to establish mis¬ 
sions on the Labrador coast was formally 
asked by the Moravians and granted by 
the British government. In 1771 the 
first mission was begun at Nain, appar¬ 


ently by Brother Jens Haven. It is now 
the chief settlement on the Labrador 
coast. In 1776 Okak was established by 
Brother Paul Lavritz, followed by Hope- 
dale in 1782, and Hebron in 1830. To these 
have more recently been added Zoar and 
Ramah. The efforts of the missionaries 
have been most successful, the wander¬ 
ing Eskimo having been gathered into 
permanent settlements, in each of which 
are a church, store, mission residence, and 
workshops, with dwelling houses on the 
model of the native iglu. Besides receiv¬ 
ing religious instruction, the natives are 
taught the simple mechanical arts, but to 
guard against their innate improvidence, 
the missionaries have found it necessary 
to introduce the communal system, by tak¬ 
ing charge of all food supplies to distribute 
at their own discretion. All the missions 
are still in flourishing operation, having 
now under their influence about 1,200 of 
the estimated 1,500 Eskimo along a coast 
of about 500 m. in length. The total 
number of mission workers is about 30 
(see Hind, Labrador Peninsula.) 

To these Moravian workers we owe a 
voluminous body of Eskimo literature— 
grammars, dictionaries, scriptural trans¬ 
lations, hymns, and miscellaneous pub¬ 
lications. Among the prominent names 
are those of Bourquin, about 1880, author 
of a grammar and a Bible history; Burg- 
hard t, gospel translations, 1813; Erd¬ 
mann, missionary from 1834 to 1872, a 
dictionary and other works; Freitag, a 
manuscript grammar, 1839; and Kohl- 
meister, St John’s Gospel, 1810. The 
majority of these Moravian publications 
were issued anonymously. 

In 1820 the Wesleyan Methodists, through 
Rev. Alvin Torry, began work among the 
immigrant Iroquois of the Ontario reser¬ 
vations, which was carried on with not¬ 
able success for a long term of years by 
Rev. William Case. In 1823 Mr Case ex¬ 
tended his labors to the Missisauga, a band 
of the Chippewa n. of L. Ontario. The 
most important immediate result was the 
conversion of Peter Jones (Kahkewakuo- 
naby), a half-breed, who was afterward 
ordained, and became the principal mis¬ 
sionary among his people and the more 
remote Chippewa bands until his death 
in 1856. He is known as the author of a 
collection of hymns in his native language 
and also a small ‘ History of the Ojeb- 
way Indians.’ Another noted mission¬ 
ary convert of this period was Shaw un- 
dais, or John Sunday. Another native 
worker of a somewhat later period was 
Rev. Henry Steinhauer, Chippewa, after¬ 
ward known as a missionary to the Cree. 
Still another pioneer laborer in the same 
region was Rev. James Evans, afterward 
also missionary to the Cree and inventor 


902 


MISSIONS 


[ B. A. E. 


of a Cree syllabary. Contemporary with 
the transfer of Evans and Steinhauer to 
the Cree in 1840, Rev. George Barnley was 
sent to establish a mission at Moose Fac¬ 
tory, James bay, which, however, was 
soon after abandoned. Beginning in 1851 
Rev. G. M. McDougall established Meth¬ 
odist mission stations among the Chip¬ 
pewa along the n. shore of L. Superior, 
at Garden River and elsewhere, but after¬ 
ward transferred his operations also to 
Cree territory. In 1861-62 Rev. Thomas 
Hurlburt, already a veteran worker, and 
considered the most competent Chippewa 
linguist in the Methodist mission, con¬ 
ducted a monthly journal, ‘ Petaubun,’ in 
the language, at the Sarnia station. 

According to the official Canadian In¬ 
dian Report for 1906, the Methodist In¬ 
dians of e. Canada numbered 4,557 in On¬ 
tario and 505 in Quebec, a total of 5,062, 
none being reported for the other eastern 
provinces. Those in Ontario included 
nearly all of the “ Chippewas of the 
Thames,” “ Mississaguas,” and “Iro¬ 
quois and Algonquins of Watha,” all of 
the 348 “Moravians of the Thames,’’ and 
a considerable percentage of the “ Six 
Nations” on Grand r. Those in Quebec 
province are chiefly Iroquois of the Oka, 
St Regis, and Caughnawaga settlements. 

Of other denominations, the same offi¬ 
cial report enumerates 1,020 Baptists in 
Ontario, almost entirely among the Six 
Nations on Grand r., with 99 Congrega- 
tionalists, 17 Presbyterians , and a total of 
370 of all other denominations not pre¬ 
viously noted. In the other eastern prov¬ 
inces—Quebec, New Brunswick, Nova 
Scotia, and Prince Edward id.—there is 
no representation. 

The work of Rev. Silas T. Rand among 
the Micmac of Nova Scotia stands in a 
class by itself. Educated in a Baptist 
seminary, he became a minister, but 
afterward left that denomination to be¬ 
come an independent worker. His at¬ 
tention having been drawn to the neg¬ 
lected condition of the Indians, he began 
the study of the Micmac language, and 
in 1849 succeeded in organizing a mis¬ 
sionary society for their special instruc¬ 
tion. Under its auspices until its disso¬ 
lution in 1865, and from that time until 
his death in 1889, he gave his whole 
effort to the teaching of the Micmac and 
to the study of their language and tradi¬ 
tions. He is the author of a Micmac dic¬ 
tionary and of a collection of tribal myths 
as well as of numerous minor works, re¬ 
ligious and miscellaneous. 

Canada, Central (Manitoba, Assini- 
boia, Saskatchewan, Alberta, s. Kee- 
watin).—In the great plains region 
stretching from Hudson bay southwest- 
ward to the Rocky mts., the former bat¬ 


tle ground of Cree, Assiniboin, and Black- 
feet, the Catholics were again the pio¬ 
neers, antedating all others by a full cen¬ 
tury. According to Bryce, “the first 
heralds of the cross” within this area 
were the French Jesuits accompanying 
Verendrye, who in the years 1731-1742 
explored the whole territory from Mack¬ 
inaw to the upper Missouri and the Sas¬ 
katchewan, establishing trading posts 
and making alliances with the Indian 
tribes for the French government. 
Among these missionaries the principal 
were Fathers Nicholas Gonnor, who had 
labored among the Sioux as early as 1727; 
Charles • Mesaiger, and Jean Aulneau, 
killed by the same tribe in 1736. No at¬ 
tempt was made during this period to 
form permanent mission settlements. 

Then follows a long hiatus until after 
the establishment of the Red River col¬ 
ony in the early part of the 19th century 
by Lord Selkirk, who in 1818 brought 
out from eastern Canada Fathers Severe 
Dumoulin and Joseph Provencher, to 
minister both to the colonists and to the 
Indian and mixed-blood population of 
the Winnipeg country. In 1822 Father 
Provencher was made bishop, with ju¬ 
risdiction over all of Ruperts land and 
the Northwest territories, and carried on 
the work of systematic mission organiza¬ 
tion throughout the whole vast region 
until his death in 1853, w r hen the noted- 
Oblate missionary, Father Alexandre 
Tache, who had come out in 1845, suc¬ 
ceeded to the dignity, in which he con¬ 
tinued for many years. 

The Catholic work in this central re^ 
gion has been carried on chiefly by the 
Oblates, assisted by the Gray Nuns. The 
first permanent mission was St Boniface, 
established at the site of the present Win¬ 
nipeg by Provencher and Dumoulin in 
1816. St Paul mission on the Assiniboin 
later became the headquarters of the noted 
Father George Belcourt, w T ho gave most 
of his attention to the Saulteux (Chip¬ 
pewa of Saskatchewan region), and who 
from 1831 to 1849 covered in his work a 
territory stretching over a thousand miles 
from e. to w. For his services in pre¬ 
venting a serious uprising in 1833 he was 
pensioned both by the Government and 
by the Hudson’s Bay Co. He is the au¬ 
thor of a grammatic treatise and of a 
manuscript dictionary of the Saulteur 
(Chippewa) language, as well as of some 
minor Indian writings. 

In the Cree field the most distinguished 
names are those of Fathers Albert La- 
combe (1848-90), Alexandre Tach4 
(1845-90), Jean B. Thibault (ca. 1855- 
70), Valentin V4greville (1852-90), and 
Emile Petitot (1862-82), all of the Ob¬ 
late order, and each, besides his religious 


BOLL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


903 


work, the author of important contribu¬ 
tions to philology. To Father Lacombe, 
who founded two missions among the 
Cree of the upper North Saskatchewan 
and spent also much time with the 
Blackfeet, we owe, besides several reli¬ 
gious and text-book translations, a manu¬ 
script Blackfoot dictionary and a monu¬ 
mental grammar and dictionary of the 
Cree language. Father Vegreville la¬ 
bored among Cree, Assiniboin, and the 
remote northern Chipewyan, founded five 
missions, and composed a manuscript 
grammar, dictionary, and monograph of 
the Cree language. Father Petitot’s 
earlier work among the Cree has been 
overshadowed by his later great w T ork 
among the remote Athapascans and Es¬ 
kimo, which will be noted hereafter. 
Among the Blackfeet the most promi¬ 
nent name is that of Father Emile Legal, 
Oblate (1881-90), author of several lin¬ 
guistic and ethnologic studies of the tribe, 
all in manuscript. 

Episcopalian work in the central region 
may properly be said to have begun with 
the arrival of Rev. John West, who was 
sent out by the Church Missionary So¬ 
ciety of England in 1820 as chaplain to 
the Hudson’s Bay Co’s establishment 
of Ft Garry (Winnipeg), on Redr. In 
the three years of his ministrations, be¬ 
sides giving attention to the white resi¬ 
dents, he made missionary journeys 
among the Cree and others for a distance 
of 500 m. to the w. . He was followed by 
Rev. David Jones in 1823, by Rev. Wm. 
Cochrane in 1825, Rev. A. Cowley in 
1841, and Rev. R. James in 1846, by 
whom, together, the tribes farther to the 
n. were visited and brought within mis¬ 
sion influence. In 1840 a Cree mission 
at The Pas, on the lower Saskatchewan, 
was organized by Henry Budd, a native 
convert, and in 1846 other stations were 
established among the same tribe at Lac 
la Ronge and Lac la Crosse, by James 
Settee and James Beardy respectively, 
also native converts. In 1838 a large 
bequest for Indian missions within Ru¬ 
pert’s Land, as the territory was then 
known, had been made by Mr James 
Leith, an officer of the Hudson’s Bay Co., 
and generously increased soon after by 
the company itself. With the assist¬ 
ance and the active effort of four mis¬ 
sionary societies of the church, the work 
grew so that in 1849 the territory was 
erected into a bishopric, and on the 
transfer of jurisdiction from the Hudson’s 
Bay Co., to the Canadian government 
in 1870 there were 15 Episcopal mis¬ 
sionaries laboring at the various stations 
in the regions stretching from Hudson 
bay to the upper Saskatchewan, the most 
important being those at York Factory 


(Keewatin), Cumberland, and Carlton 
(Saskatchewan). 

Among the most noted of those in the 
Cree country may be mentioned in chron¬ 
ologic order, Rev. Archdeacon James 
Hunter and his wife (1844-55), joint or 
separate authors of a number of transla¬ 
tions, including the Book of Common 
Prayer, hymns, gospel extracts, etc., and a 
valuable treatise on the Cree language; 
Bishop John Horden (1851-90), of Moose 
Factory, York Factory, and Ft Churchill 
stations, self-taught printer and binder, 
master of the language, and author of a 
number of gospels, prayer, and hymn 
translations; Bishop William Bompas 
(1865-90), best known for his work among 
the more northern Athapascan tribes; 
Rev. W. W. Kirkby (1852-79), author of 
a Cree ‘Manual of Prayer and Praise,’ 
but also best known for his Athapascan 
work; Rev. John Mackay, author of sev¬ 
eral religious translations and of a manu¬ 
script grammar; and Rev. E. A. Watkins, 
author of a standard dictionary. Among 
the Blackfeet, Rev. J. W. Tims, who be¬ 
gan his work in 1883, is a recognized 
authority on the language, of which he 
has published a grammar and dictionary 
and a gospel translation. 

Methodist (Wesleyan) effort in the Cree 
and adjacent territories began in 1840. 
In that year Rev. James Evans and his 
Indian assistant, Rev. Henry Steinhauer, 
both already noted in connection with 
previous work in Ontario, were selected for 
the western mission, and set out together 
for Norway House, a Hudson’s Bay Co’s 
post at the n. end of L. Winnipeg. 
Evans went on without stop to his des¬ 
tination, but Steinhauer halted at Lac 
la Pluie (now Rainy Lake) to act as inter¬ 
preter to Rev. William Mason, who had 
just reached that spot, having been sent 
out under the same auspices, the Wes¬ 
leyan Missionary Society of England, by 
arrangement with the Canadian body. 
The joint control continued until 1855, 
when the Canadian Methodists assumed 
full charge. Mr Evans had been ap¬ 
pointed superintendent of Methodist work 
for the whole region, and after establish¬ 
ing Rossville mission, near Norway House, 
as his central station, spent the next six 
years until his health failed, in travers¬ 
ing the long distances, founding several 
missions, mastering the Cree language, 
and devising for it a syllabary, which has 
ever since been in successful use for all 
literary purposes in the tribe. His first 
printing in the syllabary was done upon 
a press of his own making, with types 
cast from the sheet-lead lining of tea 
boxes and cut into final shape with a 
jackknife. In this primitive fashion he 
printed many copies of the syllabary for 


904 


MISSIONS 


[B. a. e. 


distribution among the wandering bands, 
besides hymn collections and scripture 
translations. “By means of this sylla¬ 
bary a clever Indian can memorize in. an 
hour or two all the characters, and in two 
or three days read the Bible or any other 
book in his own language” (MacLean). 
In later years, the credit for this invention 
was unsuccessfully claimed by some for 
Rev. William Mason. Rossville for years 
continued to be the principal and most 
prosperous of all the Methodist missions 
in the central region. 

Rev. William Mason remained at Rainy 
Lake until that station was temporarily 
discontinued in 1844; he was then sent to 
Rossville (Norway House), where he was 
stationed until 1854, when the mission 
was abandoned by the Wesleyans. He 
then attached himself to the Episcopal 
church, with which he had formerly been 
connected, and was ordained in the same 
year, laboring thereafter at York Factory 
on Hudson bay until his final return to 
England in 1870, with the exception of 4 
years spent in that country supervising 
the publication of his great Bible trans¬ 
lation in the Cree language, printed in 
1861. This, with several other Scripture 
and hymn translations, excepting a Gos¬ 
pel of St John, was issued under the 
auspices of the Episcopal Church Mis¬ 
sionary Society. In his earlier linguistic 
(Methodist) work he was aided by Rev. 
Mr Steinhauer and John Sinclair, a half- 
breed, but in all his later work, espe¬ 
cially in the Bible translation, he had the 
constant assistance of his wife, the edu¬ 
cated half-breed daughter of a Hudson’s 
Bay Co. officer. Rev. Mr Steinhauer, 
after some years with Mr Mason, joined 
Mr Evans at Norway House as teacher 
and interpreter. He afterward filled 
stations at Oxford House (Jackson bay), 
York Factory, Lac la Biche, White 
Fish Lake, Victoria, and other remote 
points, for a term of more than 40 years, 
making a record as ‘ ‘ one of the most de¬ 
voted and successful of our native Indian 
missionaries” (Young). Among later 
Methodist workers w r ith the Cree may be 
mentioned Rev. John McDougall, one of 
the founders of Victoria station, Alberta, 
in 1862, and Rev. Ervin Glass, about 1880, 
author of several primary instruction 
books and charts in the syllabary. 

At the same time (1840) that Evans 
and Mason were sent to the Cree, Rev. 
Robert T. Rundle was sent, by the same 
authority, to make acquaintance with 
the more remote Blackfeet and Assiniboin 
(“Stonies”) of the upper Saskatchewan 
region. Visiting stations were selected 
where frequent services were conducted 
by Rundle, by Rev. Thomas Woolsey, 
who came out in 1855, and by others, but 
no regular mission was established until 


begun by Rev. George M. McDougall at 
Edmonton, Alberta, in 1871. In 1873 he 
founded another mission on Bow r., Al¬ 
berta, among the Stonies (western Assini¬ 
boin), and continued to divide attention 
between the two tribes until his accidental 
death 2 years later. Other stations were 
established later at Ft MacLeod and Mor- 
ley, in the same territory. The most d istin- 
guished worker of this denomination 
among the Blackfeet is Rev. John Mac- 
Lean (1880-89), author of a manuscript 
grammar and dictionary of the language, 
several minor linguistic papers, ‘The 
Indians: Their Manners and Customs’ 
(1889), and ‘Canadian Savage Folk’ 
(1896). ' 

Presbyterian mission work was inaugu¬ 
rated in 1865 by the Rev. James Nisbet, 
among the Cree, at Prince Albert mission 
on the Saskatchewan. No data are at 
hand as to the w r ork of the denomination 
in this region, but it is credited in the 
official report with nearly a thousand 
Indian communicants, chiefly among the 
Sioux and the Assiniboin, many of the 
latter being immigrants from the United 
States. 

According to the Canadian Indian Re¬ 
port for 1906, the Indians of Manitoba, 
Saskatchewan, Alberta, and the North¬ 
west Territories, classified under treaties 
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, designated as Chip¬ 
pewa, Cree, Saulteaux, Sioux, Assiniboin, 
Blackfeet, Bloods, Piegan, Sarcee, Stonies, 
and Chipewwan, are credited as follows: 
Catholic, 5,633; Anglican (Episcopal), 
4,789; Methodist, 3,199; Presbyterian, 
1,073; Baptist, 83; all other denomina¬ 
tions, 80; pagan, 5,324. Some 3,308 re¬ 
mote northern Cree, under Treaty No. 8, 
and 165 non-treaty Indians are not in¬ 
cluded in the estimate. 

Canada, British Columbia (including 
Vancouver id. and Metlakatla).—The 
earliest missionary entrance into British 
Columbia was made by the Catholics in 
1839. In 1838 the secular priests Demers 
and Blanchet (afterward archbishop) 
had arrived at Fort Vancouver, Washing¬ 
ton, as already noted (see Columbia Re¬ 
gion) , to minister to the employees of the 
Hudson’s Bay Co. In the next year an 
Indian mission was organized at Cowlitz, 
with visiting stations along the shores of 
Puget sd., and Father Demers made a tour 
of the upper Columbia as far as the Okin- 
agan in British Columbia, preaching, bap¬ 
tizing, and giving instruction by means of a 
pictograph device of Father Blanchet’s in¬ 
vention, known as the ‘ ‘ Catholic ladder. ’ ’ 
Copies of this “ladder” were carried by 
visiting Indians to the more remote tribes 
and prepared the way for later effort. A 
second journey over the same route was 
made by Father Demers in the next year, 
and in 1841 he preached for the first time 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


905 


to a great gathering of the tribes on lower 
Fraser r. In the following year, 1842, by 
arrangement with the local Hudson’s Bay 
Co. officers, he accompanied the annual 
supply caravan on its return from Ft 
Vancouver, on the Columbia, to the re¬ 
mote northern posts. On this trip, as¬ 
cending the Columbia and passing over 
to the Fraser, he visited successively the 
Okinagan, Kamloops, Shuswap, and 
Takulli or Carriers, before arriving at 
their destination at Ft St James on Stuart 
lake. Return was made in the following 
spring, and on descending the Fraser he 
found that the Shuswap had already 
erected a chapel. 

In the meantime de Smet and the Jes¬ 
uits had arrived (see Columbia Region and 
Interior Slates — Flatheads ) in the Colum¬ 
bia region, and between 1841 and 1844 
had established a chain of missions 
throughout the territory, including three 
in British Columbia, among the Kute- 
nai, Shusw y ap, and Okinagan. De Smet 
himself extended his visitations to the 
headwaters of the Athabasca, while in 
1845-47 Father John Nobili, laboring 
among the upper tribes, penetrated to the 
Babines on the lake of that name. The 
most remote point visited was among the 
Carriers, at Stuart Lake. In 1843 the first 
Hudson Bay post had been established on 
Vancouver id. at Camosun, now Victoria, 
and the beginning of missionary work 
among the Songish and the Co wichan was 
made by the secular priest, Father John 
Bolduc, already well known among the 
Sound tribes, who had for this reason 
been bi ought over by the officers in 
charge to assist in winning the good will 
of their Indian neighbors. 

Owing to difficulty of communication 
and pressing need in other fields, it was 
found necessary to abandon the British Co- 
lumbia missions, except for an occasional 
visiting priest, until the work was regu¬ 
larly taken up by the Oblates about 1860. 
Before 1865 they had regular establish¬ 
ments at New Westminster, St Marys, 
and Okinagan, besides others on Vancou¬ 
ver id., and in that year founded St Joseph 
mission near Williams lake, on the upper 
Fraser, under Rev. J. M. McGuckin, first 
missionary to the Tsilkotin tribe. Within 
the next few years he extended his mini~- 
trations to the remoter Sekani and Skeena. 
In 1873 the Stuart Lake mission w r as estab¬ 
lished by Fathers Lejacq and Blanchet, 
and in 1885 was placed in charge of Father 
A. G. Morice, Oblate, the distinguished 
ethnologist and author, who had already 
mastered the Tsilkotin language in three 
years’ labor in the tribe. Aside from his 
missionary labor proper, which still con¬ 
tinues, he is perhaps best known as the 
inventor of the Dene syllabary, by means 
of w r hich nearly all the Canadian Indians 


of the great Athapascan stock are now 
able to read and write in their own lan¬ 
guage. His other works include a Tsil¬ 
kotin dictionary, a Carrier grammar, nu¬ 
merous religious and miscellaneous trans¬ 
lations, an Indian journal, scientific 
papers, ‘Notes on the Western Denes’ 
(1893), and a ‘History of the Northern 
Interior of British Columbia’ (1904). 
Father J. M. Le Jeune, of the same order, 
stationed among the Thompson River 
and Shuswap Indians since 1880, is also 
noted as the inventor of a successful 
shorthand system, by means of which 
those and other cognate tribes are now 
able to read in their own languages. He 
is also the author of a number of religious 
and text books in the same languages and 
editor of a weekly Indian journal, the 
‘Kamloops Wawa,’ all of which are 
printed on a copying press in his own 
stenographic characters. Another dis¬ 
tinguished veteran of the same order is 
Bishop Paul Durieu, since 1854 until his 
recent death, laboring successively among 
the tribes of Washington, Vancouver id. 
(Ft Rupert, in Kwakiutl territory), and 
Fraser r. 

Episcopal work began in 1857 with the 
remarkable and successful missionary 
enterprise undertaken by Mr William 
Duncan among the Tsimshian at Metla- 
katla, first in British Columbia and later 
in Alaska. The Tsimshian at that time 
were among the fiercest and most de¬ 
graded savages of the N. W. coast, 
slavery, human sacrifice, and cannibal¬ 
ism being features of their tribal system, 
to which they were rapidly adding all 
the vices introduced by the most de¬ 
praved white men from the coasting ves¬ 
sels. Moved by reports of their miser¬ 
able condition Mr Duncan voluntarily 
resigned a remunerative position in Eng¬ 
land to offer himself as a worker in their 
behalf under the auspices of the London 
Church Missionary Society. He arrived 
at Ft Simpson, n. coast of British Colum¬ 
bia, in Oct. 1857, and after some months 
spent in learning the language and mak¬ 
ing acquaintance with the tribe, then 
numbering 2,300, opened his first school 
in June, 1858. By courage and devotion 
through danger and difficulty he built 
up a civilized Christian body, which in 
1860 he colonized to the number of about 
340 in a regular town established at Met- 
lakatla, an abandoned village site 16 m. 
s. of Ft Simpson. By systematic im¬ 
provement of every industrial oppor¬ 
tunity for years the town had grown to a 
prosperous, self-supporting community of 
1,000 persons, when, by reason of dif¬ 
ficulties with the local bishop, upheld 
by the colonial government. Mr Duncan 
and his Indians were compelled, in 1887, 
to abandon their town and improvements 


906 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


and seek asylum under United States 
protection in Alaska, where they formed 
a new settlement, known as New Metla- 
katla, on Annette id., 60 m. n. of their 
former home. The island, which is 
about 40 m. long by 3 m. wide, has been 
reserved by Congress for their use, and 
the work of improvement and education 
is now progressing as before the removal, 
the present population being about 500. 

The first Episcopal bishop for British 
Columbia and Vancouver id. was ap¬ 
pointed in 1859. In 1861 theRev. John B. 
Good, sent out also by the London 
society, arrived at Esquimalt, near Vic¬ 
toria, Vancouver id., to preach alike to 
whites and Indians. At a later period 
his work was transferred to the Indians 
of Thompson and lower Fraser rs., with 
headquarters at St Paul’s mission, Ly tton. 
He has translated a large part of the 
liturgy into the Thompson River (Ntlak- 
yapamuk) language, besides being the 
author of a grammatic sketch and other 
papers. In 1865 Kincolith mission was 
established among the Niska branch of 
the Tsimshian, on Nass r., by Rev. R. A. 
Doolan, and some years later another one 
higher up on the same stream. Kitwin- 
gach station, on Skeena r., was estab¬ 
lished about the same time. In 1871 
Rev. Charles M. Tate took up his resi¬ 
dence with the Nanaimo on Vancouver 
id., laboring afterward with the Tsim¬ 
shian, Bellabella, and Fraser r. tribes. 
In 1876 Rev. W. H. Collison began work 
among the Haida at Masset, on the n. 
end of the Queen Charlotte ids., and in 
1878 Rev. A. J. Hall arrived among the 
Kwakiutl at Ft Rupert, Vancouver id. 
Other stations in the meantime had been 
established throughout the s. part of the 
province, chiefly under the auspices of 
the London Church Missionary Society. 

The first Methodist (Wesleyan) work 
for the Indians of British Columbia was 
begun in 1863 at Nanaimo, Vancouver 
id., by Rev. Thomas Crosby, who at once 
applied himself to the study of the lan¬ 
guage with such success that he was soon 
able to preach in it. In 1874 he trans¬ 
ferred his labor to the Tsimshian at Port 
Simpson, on the border of Alaska, who 
had already been predisposed to Chris¬ 
tianity by the work at Metlakatla and by 
visiting Indians from the S. Other sta¬ 
tions were established on Nass r. (1877) 
and at Kitamat in the Bellabella tribe. 
Statistics show that the Methodist work 
has been particularly successful along the 
N. W. coast and in portions of Vancouver. 

There is no record of Presbyterian mis¬ 
sion work, but some 400 Indians are offi¬ 
cially credited to that denomination along 
the w. coast of Vancouver id. 

According to the Canadian Indian Re¬ 
port for 1906 the Christian Indians of 


British Columbia are classified as follows: 
Catholic, 11,270; Episcopal (Anglican), 
4,364; Methodist, 3,285; Presbyterian, 
427; all other, 147. 

Canada, Northwest (Athabasca, Mac¬ 
kenzie, Yukon, North Keewatin, Frank¬ 
lin). —The earliest missionaries of the great 
Canadian Northwest, of which Mackenzie 
r. is the central artery, were the Catholic 
priests of the Oblate order. The pioneer 
may have been a Father Grollier, men¬ 
tioned as the “first martyr of apostle- 
ship” in the Mackenzie district and bur¬ 
ied at Ft Good Hope, almost under the 
Arctic circle. In 1846 Father Alexandre 
Tach6, afterward the distinguished arch¬ 
bishop of Red River, arrived at Lac lie h 
la Crosse, a Cree station, at the head of 
Churchill r., Athabasca, and a few 
months later crossed over the divide to 
the Chipewyan tribe on Athabasca r. 
Here he established St Raphael mission, 
and for the next 7 years, with the excep¬ 
tion of a visit to Europe, divided his time 
between the two tribes. In 1847 or 1848 
Father Henry Faraud, afterward vicar of 
the Mackenzie district, arrived among the 
Chipewyan of Great Slave lake, with 
whom and their congeners he continued 
for 18 years. To him we owe a Bible 
abridgment in the Chipewyan language. 
In 1852 arrived Father Valentin Vegr£- 
ville, for more than 40 years missionary 
to Cree, Assiniboin, and Chipewyan, all 
of which languages he spoke fluently; 
founder of the Chipewyan mission of §t 
Peter, on Caribou lake, Athabasca, 
besides several others farther s.; and 
author of a manuscript grammar and 
dictionary of the Cree language, another 
of the Chipewyan language, and other 
ethnologic and religious papers in manu¬ 
script. In 1867 Father Laurent Legoff ar¬ 
rived at Caribou Lake mission, where he 
was still stationed in 1892. He is best 
known as the author of a grammar of the 
Montagnais, or Chipewyan language, 
published in 1889. 

By far the most noted of all the Oblate 
missionaries of the great Northwest is 
Father Emile Petitot, acknowledged by 
competent Canadian authority as “our 
greatest scientific writer on the Indians 
and Eskimos” (MacLean). In 20 years of 
labor, beginning in 1862, he covered the 
whole territory from Winnipeg to the Arc¬ 
tic ocean, frequently making journeys of 
six weeks’ length on snowshoes. He was 
the first missionary to visit Great Bear 
lake (1866), and the first missionary to the 
Eskimo of theN. W., having visited them 
in 1865 at the mouth of the Anderson, in 
1868 at the mouth of the Mackenzie, and 
twice later at the mouth of Peel r. In 
1870 he crossed over into Alaska, and in 
1878, compelled by illness, he returned 
to the S., making the journey of some 


HULL. 30] 


MISSIONS 


907 


1,200 m. to Athabasca lake on foot, and 
thence by canoe and portages to Winni¬ 
peg. Besides writing some papers relating 
to the Cree, he is the author of numerous 
ethnological and philosophical works, 
dealing with the Chipewyan, Slave, Hare, 
Dog-rib, Kutchin, and Eskimo tribes and 
territory, chief among which are his 
Dene-Dindjie dictionary (1876) and his 
‘Traditions Indiennes’ (1886). 

Throughout the Mackenzie region the 
Catholics have now established regular 
missions or visiting stations at every prin¬ 
cipal gathering point, among the most 
important being a mission at Ft Provi¬ 
dence, beyond Great Slave lake, and a 
school, orphanage, and hospital conducted 
since 1875 by the Sisters of Charity at 
Ft Chipewyan on Athabasca lake. 

Episcopal effort in the Canadian North¬ 
west dates from 1858, in which year Arch¬ 
deacon James Hunter, already mentioned 
in connection with the Cree mission, 
made a reconnoitering visit to Mackenzie 
r., as aresultof which Rev. W. W. Kirkby, 
then on parish duty on Red r., was next 
year appointed to that field and at once 
took up his headquarters at the remote 
post of Ft Simpson, at the junction of 
Liard and Mackenzie rs., 62° n., where, 
with the assistance of the Hudson’s Bay 
Co’s officers, he built a church and school. 
In 1862, after several years’ study of the 
language, he descended the Mackenzie 
nearly to its mouth and crossed over the 
divide to the Yukon, just within the 
limits of Alaska, preaching to the Kutchin 
and making some study of the language, 
after which he returned to Ft Simpson. 
In 1869 he was appointed to the station 
at York Factory, on Hudson bay, where 
he remained until his retirement in 1878, 
after 26 years of efficient service in Mani¬ 
toba and the Northwest. He is the au¬ 
thor of a number of religious translations 
in the Chipewyan and Slav6 languages. 

The work begun on the Yukon by 
Kirkby was given over to Rev. (Arch¬ 
deacon) Robert McDonald, who estab¬ 
lished his headquarters at St Matthew’s 
mission on Peel r., Mackenzie district, 
“one mile within the Arctic circle.” 
Here he devoted himself with remarkable 
industry and success to a study of the lan- 
uage of the Takudh Kutchin, into which 
e has translated, besides several minor 
works, the Book of Common Prayer 
(1885) ,asmall collection of Hymns (1889), 
and the complete Bible in 1898, all ac¬ 
cording to a syllabic system of his own 
device, by means of which the Indians 
were enabled to read in a few weeks. In 
1865 Rev. Wm. C. Bom pas, afterward 
bishop of Athabasca and later of Mac¬ 
kenzie r., arrived from England. In the 
next 25 years he labored among the Chip¬ 
ewyan, Dog-ribs, Beavers, Slave, and Ta¬ 


kudh tribes of the remote Northwest, and 
gave some attention also to the distant 
Eskimo. Pie is the author of a primer in 
each of these languages, as well as in Cree 
and Eskimo, together with a number of 
gospel and other religious translations. 
Another notable name is that of Rev. Al¬ 
fred Garrioch, who began work in the 
Beaver tribe on Peace r., Athabasca, in 
1876, after a year’s preliminary study at 
Ft Simpson. He is the founderof Unjaga. 
mission at Ft Vermilion, and author of 
several devotional works and of a consid¬ 
erable vocabulary in the Beaver language. 
To a somewhat later period belong Rev. 
W. D. Reeve and Rev. Spendlove, in the 
Slave lake region. Among the principal 
stations are Ft Chipewyan on Athabasca 
lake, Ft Simpson on the middle Macken¬ 
zie, and Fts Macpherson and Lapierre in 
the neighborhood of the Mackenzie’s 
mouth. Work has also been done among 
the Eskimo of Hudson bay, chiefly by 
Rev. Edmund Peck, who has devised a 
syllabary for the language, in which he 
has published several devotional transla¬ 
tions, beginning in 1878. The greater 
portion of the Episcopal work in the Cana¬ 
dian Northwest has been under the aus¬ 
pices of the Church Missionary Society of 
London. 

Greenland. —Greenland was first colo¬ 
nized from Iceland in 985 by Scandinav¬ 
ians, who became Christian about a. d. 
1000. The aboriginal inhabitants were the 
Eskimo, with whom in the succeeding cen¬ 
turies the colonists had frequent hostile 
encounters, but there is no record of any 
attempt at missionary work. Some time 
shortly before the year 1500 the colony 
became extinct, there being considerable 
evidence that it was finally overwhelmed 
by the Eskimo savages. In 1721 the Norse 
Lutheran minister, Rev. Hans Egede, un¬ 
der the auspices of the government of 
Denmark, landed with his family and a 
few other companions upon the s. end of 
the island, in the belief that some de¬ 
scendants of the lost colony might yet be 
in existence. Pending no white inhabit¬ 
ants, he turned his attention to the evan¬ 
gelization of the native Plskimo, and thus 
became the founder both of the Green¬ 
land mission and of the modern Green¬ 
land settlement. A mission station which 
was named Godthaab was established on 
Baal r. on the w. coast, about 64° n., and 
became the center of operations, while 
Egede was made bishop and superintend¬ 
ent of missions. After some years of 
hardship and discouragement the home 
government was about to withdraw its 
support, and it seemed as if the mission 
would have to be abandoned, when, in 
1733, the Moravians volunteered their aid. 
In the spring of that year three Moravian 
missionaries, Christian David, and Mat- 


908 


MISSIONS 


[b. a. e. 


thew and Christian Stach, arrived from 
Denmark to cooperate with Egede, with 
such good result that the principal work 
finally passed over to that denomination, 
by which it has since been continued. 
Egede in 1736 returned to Denmark to 
establish at Copenhagen a special train¬ 
ing seminary for the work. He died in 
1758, leaving the succession in office to 
his son, Rev. Paul Egede. The elder 
Egede was the author of a ‘ Description 
of Greenland/ which has been translated 
into several languages, besides several 
scriptural works in Eskimo. His son, 
Paul, accompanied his father on the first 
trip in 1721, learned the language, and in 
1734 began the missionary work which he 
continued to his death in 1789, having 
been made bishop 10 years earlier. He 
is the author of a standard Danish-Latin- 
Eskimo grammar and dictionary, besides 
a number of religious works in the lan¬ 
guage and a journal of the Greenland mis¬ 
sions from 1721 to within a year of his 
death. Still another of the same family, 
Rev. Peter Egede, nephew of the first mis¬ 
sionary, was the author of a translation 
of Psalms. 

With the settlement of the country 
from Denmark and the organization of 
regular parishes the Lutheran missions 
took on new life, special attention being 
given to the more northern regions. 
Godthaab remained the principal station, 
and several others were established, of 
which the most important to-day are 
Nugsoak on Disko bay, w. coast, and 
Angmagsalik, about 66° n., on the e. 
coast, the northernmost inhabited spot in 
that direction. The friendly cooperation 
between the two denominations seems 
never to have been interrupted, the min¬ 
isters in many cases sharing their labors 
and results in common. 

The Moravian work prospered. New 
Herrnhut, the first and most northerly 
mission, was established in 1733; Licht- 
enfels was founded 80 m. farther s. in 
1758; 300 m. farther s. Lichtenau was 
founded in 1774; then came Frederiksdal 
in 1824, Umanak in 1861, and Igdlorpait 
in 1864. In 1881 the mission force num¬ 
bered 19 and the native membership 
1,545. Since 1801 the whole Eskimo 
population properly resident within the 
Moravian mission area has been Chris¬ 
tian, but others have since moved in from 
the outlying territory. The work of civ¬ 
ilization is nearly as complete for the 
whole e. coast. 

As the result of the literary labors of 
nearly two centuries of missionary stu¬ 
dents, together with a few educated na¬ 
tives, the Eskimo literature of Greenland 
is exceptionally voluminous, covering the 
whole range of linguistics, Bible trans¬ 
lations, hymn books, and other religious 


works, school text-books, stories, and 
miscellanies, besides a journal published 
at the Godthaab station from 1861 to 
1885. With so much material it is pos¬ 
sible only to mention the names of the 
principal workers in this field. For de¬ 
tails the reader is referred to Pilling’s 
‘ Bibliography of the Eskimo Language.’ 
In the Lutheran mission the most promi¬ 
nent names are Egede, father and son, 
Fabricius (1768-73); Janssen (period of 
1850); Kjer (period of 1820); the Klein- 
schmidts, father and son (1793-1840); 
Kragh (1818-28); Steenholdt (period of 
1850); Sternberg (1840-53); Thorhallesen 
(1776-89); Wandall (1834-40), and Wolf 
(1803-11). In the Moravian list are found 
Beck (died 1777); Beyer (period of 1750); 
Brodersen (period of 1790); Konigseer 
(period of 1780); Muller (period of 1840); 
together with Cranz, author of the ‘ His¬ 
tory of Greenland and the Moravian 
Mission/ first published in 1765. 

In the four centuries of American his¬ 
tory there is no more inspiring chapter of 
heroism, self-sacrifice, and devotion to 
high ideals than that afforded by the In¬ 
dian missions. Some of the missionaries 
were of noble blood and had renounced 
titles and estates to engage in the work; 
most of them were of finished scholar¬ 
ship and refined habit, and nearly all 
were of such exceptional ability as to 
have commanded attention in any com¬ 
munity and to have possessed themselves 
of wealth and reputation, had they so 
chosen; yet they deliberately faced pov¬ 
erty and sufferings, exile and oblivion, 
ingratitude, torture, and death itself in 
the hope that some portion of a darkened 
world might be made better through 
their effort. To the student who knows 
what infinite forms of cruelty, brutish¬ 
ness, and filthiness belonged to savagery, 
from Florida to Alaska, it is beyond ques¬ 
tion that, in spite of sectarian limitations 
and the shortcomings of individuals, the 
missionaries have fought a good fight. 
Where they have failed to accomplish 
large results the reason lies in the irre¬ 
pressible selfishness of the white man or 
in the innate incompetence and unworthi¬ 
ness of the people for whom they labored. 

Consult: Aborigines Committee, Con¬ 
duct of Friends, 1844; Bancroft, Histories, 
Alaska, British Columbia, California, Ore¬ 
gon, Washington, etc., 1886-90; Barnum, 
Innuit Language, 1901; Bressani, Rela¬ 
tion, 1653, repr. 1852; Brinton, Lenape, 
1885; California, Missions of, U. S. Sup. 
Ct., 1859; Bryce, Hudson’s Bay Co., 1900; 
Catholic Bureau of Indian Missions, Re¬ 
ports; Clark, Indian Sign Language, 1885; 
Coues, On the Trail of a Spanish Pioneer, 
1900; Cranz, History of the Brethren, 
1780; DeForest, Indians of Connecticut, 


BULL. 30] 


MISSIONS MISSISA UG A 


909 


1851; Duflot de Mofras, Expl. de l’Ore- 
gon, 1844; Dunbar, Pawnee Indians, 1880;* 
Eells, Ten Years, 1886; Engelhardt, Fran¬ 
ciscans, 1897; Fletcher, Indian Education 
and Civilization, 1888; Gookin, Christian 
Indians, Archseologia Americana, 1836; 
Harris, Early Missions, 1893; Harvey, 
Shawnee Indians, 1855; Heckewelder, 
United Brethren, 1820; Hind, Labrador, 
1863; Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, n, 1896; 
Jackson (1) Alaska, 1880, (2) Facts About 
Alaska, 1903; Jesuit Delations, Thwaites 
ed., 1896-1901; Jones, Ojebway Inds., 
1861; Krehbiel, Mennonites, 1898; Los- 
kiel, United Brethren, 1794; Lossing, Mo¬ 
ravian Missions, American Hist. Record, 
1872; MacLean, Canadian Savage Folk, 
1896; McCoy, Baptist Indian Missions, 
1840; McDougall, George Millard McDou- 
gall the Pioneer, 1888; Minnesota Hist. 
Soc. Coll., i, 1872; Mooney, Myths of 
Cherokee, 1900; Morice, Northern British 
Columbia, 1904; Morse, Report, 1822; 
Palfrey, New England, i, 1866; Parkman, 
(1) Jesuits, 1867, (2) Pioneers, 1883; Pill¬ 
ing, Indian Bibliographies (Bulletins of 
Bur. Am. Eth.), 1887-91; Pitezel, Lights 
and Shades, 1857; Riggs, Tah-koo Wah- 
kan, 1869; Rink, Tales and Traditions 
of Eskimo, 1875; Ronan, Flathead Indians, 
1890; Ryerson, Hudson’s Bay, 1855, 
Shea, Catholic Missions, 1855; de Smet, 
Oregon Missions, 1847; Stefansson in Am. 
Anthrop., vm, 1906; Sutherland,Summer 
in Prairie Land, 1881; Thompson, Mora¬ 
vian Missions, 1890; Tucker, Rainbow in 
the North, 1851; Wellcome, Metlakahtla, 
1887; Whipple, Lights and Shadows, 1899. 

( J . M.) 

Missisauga (Chippewa: misi, ‘large,’ 
sdg or sauk, ‘outlet (of a river or bay)’ = 
‘large outlet,’ referring to the mouth of 
Missisauga r.—Hewitt). Although this 
Algonquian tribe is a division or subtribe 
of the Chippewa, having originally formed 
an integral part of the latter, it has long 
been generally treated as distinct. When 
first encountered by the French, in 
1634, the Missisauga lived about the 
mouth of the river of the same name, 
along the n. shore of L. Huron, and on 
the adjacent Manitoulin id. Although so 
closely allied to the Chippewa, they do 
not appear to have been disposed to fol¬ 
low that tribe in its progress westward, 
as there is no evidence that they were 
ever found in early times so far w. as 
Sault Ste Marie, but appear to have clung 
to their old haunts about L. Huron 
and Georgian bay. Early in the 18th 
century, influenced by a desire to trade 
with the whites, they began to drift to¬ 
ward the s. e. into the region formerly 
occupied by the Hurons, between L. Hu¬ 
ron and L. Erie. Although they had de¬ 
stroyed a village of the Iroquois near Ft 
Frontenac about 1705, they tried in 1708 to 


gain a passage through the country of the 
latter, to trade their peltries with the 
English. At this time a part or band was 
settled on L. St Clair. About 1720 the 
French established a station at the w. 
end of L. Ontario for the purpose of 
stimulating trade with the Missisauga. 
Near the close of the first half of the 
century (1746-50), having joined the Iro¬ 
quois in the war against the French, the 
Missisauga were compelled by the latter, 
who were aided by the Ottawa, to 
abandon their country, a portion at 
least settling near the Seneca e. of L. 
Erie. Others, however, appear to have 
remained in the vicinity of their early 
home, as a delegate from a Missisauga 
town “on the north side of L. Ontario” 
came to the conference at Mt Johnson, 
N. Y., in June, 1755. As it is also stated 
that they “belong to the Chippewyse 
confederacy, which chiefly dwell about 
the L. Missilianac,” it is probable that 
“north side of L. Ontario” refers to 
the shores of L. Huron. Being friendly 
with the Iroquois at this time, they were 
allowed to occupy a number of places in 
the country from which the Hurons had 
been driven. This is inferred in part 
from Chauvignerie’s report of 1736, which 
locates partsof the tribe atdifferent points 
on Missisauga r., Maniskoulin (Manitou¬ 
lin?) id., L. St Clair, Kente, Toronto r., 
Matchitaen, and the w. end of L. On¬ 
tario. The land on which the Iroquois 
are now settled at Grand r., Ontario, was 
bought from them. For the purpose of 
sealing their alliance with the Iroquois 
they were admitted as the seventh tribe 
of the Iroquois league in 1746, at which 
date they were described as living in five 
villages near Detroit. It is therefore 
probable that those who went to live with 
the Seneca first came to the vicinity of 
Detroit and moved thence to w. New 
York. The alliance with the Iroquois 
lasted only until the outbreak of the 
French and Indian war a few years later. 

According to Jones (Hist. Ojebways), 
as soon as a Missisaugadied he was laid out 
on the ground, arrayed in his best clothes, 
and wrapped in skins or blankets. A grave 
about 3 ft deep was dug and the corpse 
interred with the head toward the w. 
By his side were placed his hunting and 
war implements. Thegrave was then cov¬ 
ered, and above it poles or sticks were 
placed lengthwise to the height of about 
2 ft, over which birch-bark or mats were 
thrown to keep out the rain. Immedi¬ 
ately after the decease of an Indian, the 
near relatives went into mourning by 
blackening their faces with charcoal and 
putting on the most ragged and filthy 
clothing they possessed. A year was the 
usual time of mourning for a husband, 
wife, father or mother. 


910 


MISSISAUGA-MISS1SSINEWA 


[B. A. E. 


As the Missisauga are so frequently 
confounded with the Chippewa and other 
neighboring tribes who are closely con¬ 
nected, it is difficult to make a separate 
estimate of their numbers. In 1736 they 
were reported to number 1,300, about 250 
being on Manitoulin id. and Missisauga r., 
and the rest in the peninsula of Ontario; 
in 1778 they were estimated at 1,250, liv¬ 
ing chiefly on the n. side of L. Erie, and 
in 1884 the number was given as 744. The 
population was officially reported in 1906 
as 810, of whom 185 were at Mud Lake, 87 
at Rice Lake, 35 at Scugog, 240 at Alnwick, 
and 263 at New Credit, Ontario. The 
New Credit settlement forms a township 
by itself and the Indian inhabitants have 
often won prizes against white compet¬ 
itors at the agricultural fairs. The New 
Credit Indians (who left the Old Credit 
settlement in 1847) are the most advanced 
of the Missisauga and represent one of the 
most successful attempts of any American 
Indian group to assimilate the culture of 
the whites. The Alnwick res. dates from 
1830, Mud Lake from 1829, Scugog 
from 1842. Beldom, Chibaouinani, and 
Grape Island were former settlements. 
See Credit Indians , Matchedash , Sandy 
Hill. 

Consult Chamberlain (1) Language of 
the Mississagas of Skugog, 1892, and bib- 
lography therein; (2) Notes on the His¬ 
tory, Customs and Beliefs of the Missis- 
sagua Indians, Jour. Am. Folk lore, I, 
150, 1888. (j. m. c. t.) 

Achsisaghecks.—Colden (1727) note in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., iv, 737,1854. Achsissaghecs.—Colden in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 517, 1853. Aghsiesa- 
gichrone.—Doc. of 1723 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 
695, 1855. Aoechisacronon.—Jes. Rel. 1649, 27, 1858 
(Huron name). Assisagh.—Livingston (1701) in 
N. Y. Doe.Col. Hist., IV, 899,1854. Assisagigroone.— 
Livingston (1700), ibid., 737. Awechisaehronon.— 
Jes. Rel., in, index, 1858. Ishisagek Roanu.— 
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 27,1744 (Iroquois name). Ma- 
se-sau-gee.—Jones, Ojebwaylnds., 164,1861 (proper 
form). Massasagues.—Macauley, N. Y., ii, 249,1829. 
Massasaugas.—Morgan, League Iroq., 91, 1851. 
Massasoiga.—Chapin (1792) in Am. State Papers, 
Ind. AfL, i, 242,1832. Massesagues.—Niles (ca. 1761) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 541,1861. Massi- 
nagues.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. 
Mesasagah.—Lindesay (1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist.,vi,706,1855. Messagnes.—Drake, Ind.Chron., 
180,1836. Messagues.—Shirley (1755) inN. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vi, 1027, 1855. Messasagas.—Ft John¬ 
son coni. (1757), ibid., VII, 259, 1856. Messasa- 
gies.—Perkins and Peck, Annals of the West, 423, 
1850. Messasagoes.—Procter (1791) in Am. State Pa¬ 
pers, Ind. AIL, i, 158, 1832. Messasagues.—Writer 
of 1756in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., vn, 123,1801. 
Messasaugues.—Lincoln (1793), ibid., 3ds., v, 156, 
1836. Messassagas.—Albany conf. (1746) in N. Y. 
Doc.Col. Hist.,vi,322,1855. Messassagnes.—Drake, 
Bk. Inds., ix, 1848. Messassagues.—Homann 

Heirs map, 1756. Messesagas.— Lindesay (1751) in 
N. \. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 729,1855. Messesagnes.— 
Drake,Bk.Inds., bk.5,4,1848. Messesago.—Procter 
(1791) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Ail., i, 163,1832. 
Messesagues.—Colden (1727), Five Nations, app., 
17 -ir 7 ' Messess agues.— Carver, Travels, map, 
1/78. Messessaques.—Goldthwait (1766) in Mass 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 122,1809. Messinagues.— 
Boudinot Star in the West, 107, 1816. Messisa- 
gas.— Ibid., 100. Messisages.—Albany conf. (1746) 


inN. Y. Doc.Col.Hist.,VI,321,1855. Messisagues.— 
Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3,406,1816. Messisaugas.— 
Edwards (1788) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 
92, 1804. Messisaugers.—Barton, New Views, 

xxxiii, 1798. Messissagas.—Albany conf. (1746) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 322, 1855. Messissau- 
ga.—Petition of 1837 in Jones, Ojebway Inds., 265, 
1861. Messissauger.—Adelung and Vater, Mithri- 
dates, ill, pt. 3, 343, 1816. Michesaking.—Jes. Rel. 
1658, 22, 1858. Miehisagnek.—Ibid., 1648, 62, 1858. 
Misisaga’s.—Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., vn, 526, 1856. Misisagey.— Claus (1777), 
ibid., vm, 719, 1857. Misitagues.—Lahontan, New 
Voy., i, map, 1735. Missada.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 
31, 1744. Missages.—German Flats conf. (1770) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vm, 229, 1857. Missasagas.— 
Lindesay (1749), ibid., vi, 538,1855. Missasago.— 
Harris, Tour, 205,1805. Missasague.—Durant (1721) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 589,1855. Missassago.— 
Rupp, West Pa., 280,1846. Missassugas.—Johnson 
(1764) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 661,1856. Mis- 
saugees.—Trader (1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
iii, 560, 1853. Missequeks.—Clinton (1745) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 281,1855. Missesagas.—Ft John¬ 
son conf. (1757), ibid., vii, 259,1856. Missesagoes.— 
Procter (1791) in Am. State Papers,Ind. AfL, 1 ,163, 
1832. Missesagues.—Doc. of 1747 in. N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., vi, 391, 1855. Missesaques.—Clinton 
(1749), ibid., 484. Missiagos.—Johnson (1760), 
ibid., vn, 434, 1856. Missinasagues.—Boudinot, 
Star in the West, 127, 1816. Missiosagaes.— 
Quotation in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 
29, 1872. Missiquecks.—Clinton (1745) in N. 

Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 276, 1855. Missisa- 
gaes.—Mt Johnson conf. (1755), ibid., 975. Missi- 
sages.—Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Missisagis.— 
Doc. of 1764 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 641,1856. 
Missisagos.—Canajoharie conf. (1759), ibid., 384. 
Missisagues.—Lahontan, New Voy., I, 230, 1703. 
Missisaguez.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. 
Am., iv, 224,1753. Missisaguys.—Charlevoix,Voy., 
ii, 40, 1761. Missisak.— Jes. Rel. 1672, 33, 1858. 
Missisakis.—Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. 
Am., ii. 48, 1753. Missisaque.—Clinton (1749) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 484, 1855. Missisa- 
quees.—Colden (1751), ibid., 742. Missisaugas.— 
Jones, Ojebway Inds., 208, 1861. Missisauges.— 
Carver, Travels, 171,1778. Mississaga.—Mt John¬ 
son conf. (1755) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 976, 
1855. Mississagets.—Aigremont (1708), ibid., ix, 
819,1855. Mississageyes.—Mt Johnson conf. (1755), 
ibid., vi, 983, 1855. Mississagez.—Bacqueville de 
la Potherie, Hist. Am., iv, 245,1753. Mississagies.— 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 143, 1855. Mississa- 
guas.—Official form in Can. Ind. AfL Mississa- 
gue.—Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 1858. Mississaguras.— 
Beauchamp in Am. Antiq., iv, 329, 1882. Mis- 
sissakis.—Du Chesneau (1681) in Margry, D£c., 
ii, 267, 1877. Mississaques.—Clinton (1749) in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 486, 1855. Mississaugers.— 
Macauley, N. Y., ii, 250, 1829. Mississauges.— 
Carver, Travels, 19, 1778. Mississaugies.—Keane 
in Stanford, Compend., 522,1878. Mississaugues.— 
Chauvignerie (1736) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in, 555, 1853. Mississguas.—Macdonald in Can. 
Ind. AfL 1883, xiii, 1884 (misprint!. Missita- 
gues.—Lahontan, New Voy., I, 215, 1703. Mus- 
sisakies.—McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 
79, 1854. Nation de Bois.—Sagard (1636), Can., I, 
190, 1866. Naywaunaukau-raunuh.—Macauley, N. 
Y., ii, 180,1829 (the name here seems to refer to 
the Missisauga). Nua'ka’hn.—Gatschet, Tusca- 
rora MS., 1885 (Tuscarora name). Oumisagai.— 
Jes. Rel. 1640,34,1858. Poils leue.—Sagard (1636), 
Can., i, 192, 1866. Sisaghroana.—Post (1758) in 
Proud, Pa., Ii, app., 113, 1798 (same?). Sissisa- 
guez.—Jefferys, French Dom., pt. I, 17, 1761. 
Tisagechroann.—Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West Pa., 
app.,16, 1846. Twakanhahors.—Macauley, N. Y., 
II, 250, 1829. Wisagechroanu.—Weiser (1748) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 605, 1854. Zisagech- 
roann.—Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West Pa., app., 22, 
1846. Zisagechrohne.—Zeisberger MS. (German, 
1750) in Conover, Kan. and Geneva MS., B. A. E. 
Mississauga. See Massassauga. 
Mississinewa. A former important Mi¬ 
ami village on the e side of the river of the 
same name, at its junction with the 


BULL. 30] 


MISSISSIPPI TABLET-MISSOURI 


911 


Wabash, in Miami co., Ind. It was 
burned by the Americans in 1812, but 
was rebuilt. The reservation was sold in 
1834. (j m.) 

Massasinaway.—Stickney (1812) in Am. State Pa¬ 
pers. Ind. Aft'., I, 810, 1832. Mississinaway.—Har¬ 
rison (1814) in Drake, Tecumseli, 159,1856. Mis¬ 
sissinewa.—Mississinewa treaty (1826) in U. S. 
Ind. Treat., 496,1873. Mississinewa Town.—Royce 
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Indiana map, 1899. 

Mississippi tablet. See Notched plates. 

Missogkonnog. Probably a former vil¬ 
lage or band of the Nipmuc in central 
Massachusetts. In 1671 the colony of Ply¬ 
mouth raised a force against the “ Missog¬ 
konnog Indians.”—Eliot (1671) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi, 201, 1800. 

Missouri (‘great muddy,’ referring to 
Missouri r.). A tribe of the Chi were group 
of the Siouan family. Their name for 
themselves is Niutachi. According to 
Gale the early form of the word Missouri 
is Algonquian, of the Illinois dialect. The 
most closely allied tribes are the Iowa and 
theOto. A ccordingto tradition, after hav¬ 
ing parted from the Winnebago at Green 
bay, the Iowa, Missouri, and Oto moved 
westward to Iowa r., where the. Iowa 
stopped. The rest continued westward, 
reaching the Missouri at the mouth of 
Grand r. Here, on account of some dis¬ 
pute, the Oto withdrew and moved farther 
up Missouri r. Marquette’s autograph 
map of 1673, which is perhaps the earliest 
authentic notice of the tribe, locates the 
8emess8rit on Missouri r., apparently as 
far n. as the Platte. Joutel (1687) ap¬ 
pears to have been the first writer to use 
the name Missouri in this form. It is 
stated that Tonti met the tribe a day and 
half’s journey from the village of the 
Tamaroa, which was on the Mississippi, 
6 leagues below Illinois r. About the 
beginning of the 18th century the French 
found them on the left bank of the 
Missouri, near the mouth of Grand r., 
and built a fort on an island near them. 
They continued to dwell in this locality 
until about 1800. According to Bourg- 
mont (Margry, D4c., vi, 393, 1886) their 
village in 1723 was 30 leagues below Kan¬ 
sas r. and 60 leagues below the prin¬ 
cipal Kansa village. About 1798 they 
were conquered and dispersed by the 
Sauk and Fox tribes and their allies. 
Five or six lodges joined the Osage, two 
or three took refuge with the Kansa, and 
some amalgamated with the Oto, but they 
soon recovered, as in 1805 Lewis and 
Clark found them in villages s. of Platte 
r., having abandoned their settlements on 
Grand r. some time previously on ac¬ 
count of smallpox. They were visited 
again by an epidemic in 1823. Although 
their number was estimated in 1702 at 
200 families and in 1805 by Lewis and 
Clark at 300 souls, in 1829, when they 
were found with the Oto, they numbered 


only 80. Having been unfortunate in a 
war with the Osage, part of them joined 
the Iowa, and the others went to the Oto 
previous to the migration of the latter to 
Big Platte r. In 1842 their village stood on 
thes. bank of Platte r., Nebr. They accom¬ 
panied the Oto when that tribe removed 
in 1882 to Indian Territory. There were 
only 40 individuals of the tribe remain¬ 
ing in 1885. They are now officially 
classed with the Oto, together number¬ 
ing 368 in 1905 underthe Oto school super¬ 
intendent in Oklahoma. The gentes, as 
given by Dorsey (15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 



GEORGE BATES—MISSOURI 


1897), were Tunanpin (Black bear), Ho- 
tachi (Elk), and Cheghita (Eagle) or 
Wakanta (Thunder-bird). 

The Missouri joined in the following 
treaties with the United States: (1) Peace 
treaty of June 24, 1817; (2) Ft Atkinson, 
la., Sept. 26, 1825, regulating trade and 
relations with the United States; (3) 
Prairie du Chien, Wis., July 15, 1830, 
ceding lands in Iowa and Missouri; (4) 
Oto village, Nebr., Sept. 21, 1833, ceding 
certain lands; (5) Bellevue, upper Mis¬ 
souri r., Oct. 15, 1836, ceding certain 
lands; (6) Washington, Mar. 15, 1854, 
ceding lands, with certain reservation; 
(7) Nebraska City, Nebr., Dec. 9, 1854, 
changing boundary of reservation. 

Morgan (Beach, Ind. Miscel., 220, 1877) 
used the term Missouri Indians to in- 







912 


MISTASSIN-MITROFANIA 


[ B. A. E. 


elude the Ponca, Omaha, Kansa, Qua- 
paw, Iowa, Oto, and Missouri. These are 
the Southern tribes of Hale (Am. Antiq., 
v, 112,1883), and theDhegihaand Chi were 
groupsofJ. O. Dorsey, (j. o. d. c.t.) 

Emissourita.—Tonti (1684) in Margry, D6c., I, 595, 
1876. Massorites.—Coxe, Carolana ,16,1741. Mas- 
sorittes.—Bacquevillede laPotherie, Hist. Am., ii, 
map, 1753. Massourites.—Hennepin, New Discov., 
map, 1698. Messorites.—Ibid., 150. Messourites.— 
Coxe, Carolana, 19,1741. Misouris.—Imlay, W. Ter. 
N. Am., 294, 1797. Missiouris.—Harris, Voy. and 
Trav., II, map, 1705. Missoori.—Jefferys, Am. 
Atlas, map, 1776. Missounta.—French, Hist. Col. 
La., i, 82,1846. Missouria.—Irving, Ind. Sk., I, 96, 
1835. Missourians.—Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., pt. 
I, 139, 1761. Missouriens.—Gass, Voy., 27, 1810. 
Missouries.—Lewis, Trav., 13, 1809. Missouris.— 
Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c.,m, 432, 1878. Mis- 
sourita.—Margry, D£c., I, 611, 1876. Missourite.— 
Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., pt. 1 , 137,1761. Missoury. — 
La Harpe (1720) in Margry, D6c., Vi, 293, 1886. 
Missourys.—Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map, 5, 1776. 
Missuri.—D’Anville, Amer. Septen. map, 1756. 
Missurier.—Giissefeld, Charte von Nord America, 
1797. Missuris.—Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., pt. I, 
map, 134, 1761. Missurys.—Croghan (1759) quoted 
by Rupp, W. Pa., 146, note, 1846. Misuris.— 
Barcia, Ensayo, 298, 1723. Musscovi.—Morse, 
N. Am., map, 1776 (misprint).* Ne-o-ge-he.— 
Long Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 339, 1823. Neojehe.— 
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 127, 1836. 
Ne-o-ta-cha.—Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., I, 339, 
1823. Ne-u-cha-ta.—Hamilton in Trans. Neb. Hist. 
Soc., i, 48, 1885. Ne-u-tach.—Ibid., 47. Neu-ta- 
che.—Maximilian, Trav., 507, 1843 (trans., ‘those 
that arrive at the mouth’). New'-dar-cha.— 
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 15.1806. Ne-yu-ta-ca.— 
Hamilton in Trans. Neb. Hist. Soc., i, 47, 1885. 
Nicudje.—Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 
(Kansa name). Ni-u'-t’a-tci.—Dorsey in 15th 
Rep. B. A. E., 240,1897 (own name,/c=cA). Ni-ut’- 
ati'.—Dorsey, (pegiha MS. Diet., B. A. E., 1878 
(Omaha and Ponca name). Ouemessourit.— 
Gale, Upper Miss., 209, 1867 (transliterated from 
Marquette). 8emess8rit.—Marquette, map (1673) 
in Shea, Discov., 268, 1852. Ou-missouri.—Theve- 
not quoted by Shea, Discov., 268,1852. Wapuq^a.— 
Dorsey, inf’n, 1883(Osage name.) Wa-ju'-qd0a.— 
Dorsey, Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Qua- 
paw name). Wemessouret.—Marquette translit¬ 
erated by Shea, Discov., 268,1852. 

Mistassin (from mista-assini, ‘a great 
stone,’ referring to a huge isolated rock in 
L. Mistassini, which the Indians regarded 
with veneration). An Algonquian tribe 
that lived on L. Mistassini, Quebec. They 
were divided by early writers into the 
Great and the Little Mistassin, the 
former living near the lake, the latter 
farther s. in the mountains. They first 
became known to the French about 1640, 
but were not visited by missionaries until 
some years later. They were attacked by 
the Iroquois in 1665, and in 1672 their 
country was formally taken possession of 
by the French with their consent. Al¬ 
though spoken of by Hind in 1863 as rov¬ 
ing in bands with Montagnais and Nas- 
capee over the interior of Labrador, it 
appears that in 1858 a portion of the tribe 
was on the lower St Lawrence. 

Very little has been recorded in regard 
to their habits or characteristics. It is 
recorded that when attacked by the Iro¬ 
quois in 1665 they had a wooden fort, 
which they defended successfully and 
with great bravery. Their only myth 


mentioned is that in regard to the great 
rock in the lake, which they believed to 
be a manito. (j. m. c. t.) 

Matassins.—Charlevoix (1721), Journal, i, letter 
xi, 276, 1761. Mattassins.—Barton, New Views, 
app., 12,1798. Misiassins (Petits).—La Tour, map, ‘ 
1779 (misprint; the Grands Mistassins are cor¬ 
rectly named). Misstassins.—Report of 1858 in 
Hind, Lab. Penin.,1,12,1863. Mistapnis.—McKen- 
ney and Hall. Ind. Tribes, ill, 81, 1854. Mistasin- 
iouek—Jes. Rel. 1643, 38, 1858. Mistasirenois.— 
Memoirof 1706 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 791,1855. 
Mistasirinins.—Jes. Rel. 1672, 55, 1858. Mistas¬ 
sini.—Hind, Lab. Penin., I, 8,1863. Mistassinni.— 
Ibid., 272. Mistassins.—Beilin, map, 1755 (Grands 
and Petits Mistassins). Mistassirinins.—Jes. Rel. 
1672, 44, 1858. Mistissinnys.—Walch, map, 1805. 
Mitchitamou.—Jes. Rel. 1640, 34, 1858. Mustas- 
sins.—Jes. Rel. 1676-7, LX, 244, 1900. 

Mistaughchewaugh. A former Chuma- 
shan village at San Marcos, 25 m. from 
Santa Barbara, Cal.—Father Timeno 
(1856) quoted by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 4, 1860. 

Misun ( MV-sUn ). A former Kuitsh vil¬ 
lage on lower Umpqua r., Oreg.—Dorsey 
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, nr, 231, 1890. 

Mitaldejama. A former village, pre¬ 
sumably Costanoan, connected with San 
Juan Bautista mission Cal.—Engelhardt, 
Franciscans in Cal., 398, 1897. 

Mitcheroka (‘knife’). A division of the 
Hidatsa. 

Ma-etsi-daka.—Matthews, inf’n, 1885 (=*small 
knives’). Mit-che-ro'-ka.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 
1877. 

Mithlausmintthai (Mi-qla'-iis-mln-V<;a ¥). 

A former Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., 
Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, 
m, 230, 1890. 

Mitiling. See Kalopaling. 

Mitline. A former village, presumably 
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis¬ 
sion, San Francisco, Cal. 

Matalans.—Humboldt, Kingdom of New Spain, 
ii, 345, 1811. Mitline. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Oct. 18, 1861. 

Mitlmetlelch ( MYtlmetle'ltc) . A Squaw- 
mish village community on Passage id., 
Howe sd., Brit. Col.—Hill-Tout in Rep. 
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900. 

Mitomkai Porno. A name, usually ren¬ 
dered Mtom'-kai (from mato ‘big’, kai 
‘valley’), applied to the inhabitants of 
Willits or Little Lake valley, Mendocino 
co., Cal. In the form Tomki it has been 
used by the whites to designate a creek e. 
of the range of mountains bordering Little 
Lake valley on the e. Most of the Mi¬ 
tomkai Porno, locally known as Little 
Lakes, are now on Round Valley res., 
numbering, with the “Redwoods,” 114 
in 1905. (s. a. b.) 

Betumki.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 146, 1853. Bitomkhai.—A. L. 
Kroeber, Univ. Cal. MS., 1903 (Upper Clear Lake 
form of name). Little Lakes.—Official form in 
Indian Affairs Reports. Mi-toam' Kai Po-mo.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 155, 1877. 

Mitrofania. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Mitrofania id., s. of Chignik bay, 
Alaska; pop. 22 in 1880, 49 in 1890.— 
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 28, 1884. 


BULL. 30] 


MITSUKWIC-MIXED-BLOODS 


913 


Mitsukwic. A former Nisqualli village 
“at the salmon trap on Squalli [Nisqualli] 
r.,” Washington.—Gibbs, MS. No. 248, 
B.A.E. 

Mittaubscut. A village of about 20 
houses in 1676, situated on Pawtuxetr., 
7 or 8 m. above its mouth, in Provi¬ 
dence or Kent co., R. I. It probably be¬ 
longed to the Narraganset, but its chief 
disputed their claim.—Williams (1676) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., i, 71, 1825. 

Mittsulstik {Mit-ts'uV-sVlk). A former 
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina 
r., Oreg., at the site of the present New¬ 
port.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 
229, 1890. 

Mitutia. A village of the Cholovone, 
a division of the Yokuts, situated e. of 
lower San Joaquin r., Cal.—Pinart, Chol¬ 
ovone MS., B. A. E., 1880. 

Miwok (‘man’). One of the two di¬ 
visions of the Moquelumnan family in 
central California, the other being the 
Olamentke. With a small exception in 
the w., the Miwok occupied territory 
bounded on the n. by Cosumnes r., on 
the e. by the ridge of the Sierra Nevada, 
on the s. by Fresno cr., and on the w. by 
San Joaquin r. The exception on the 
w. is a narrow strip of land on the e. 
bank of the San Joaquin, occupied by 
Yokuts Indians, beginning at the Tuol¬ 
umne and extending northward to a 
point not far from the place where the 
San Joaquin bends to the w. The Miwok 
are said by Powers to be the largest “na¬ 
tion ” in California, and a man of any of 
their tribes or settlements may travel from 
the Cosumnes to the Fresno and make 
himself understood without difficulty, so 
uniform is their language. See Moquel¬ 
umnan. (j. c.) 

Meewa.— PowersinOverland Monthly, x, 323,1873- 
Meewie.— Ibid. Meewoc.— Ibid. Mewahs.— Ind 
Aff. Rep. 1856,244,1857. Miook.— Kingsley, Stand¬ 
ard Nat. Hist., vi, 175,1885. Mi'-wa.— Powers in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., m,347,1877. Mi'-wi.— Ibid. 
Mi'-wok. — Ibid. Muwa. — Merriam in Science, 
N. s., XIX, 914, June 17, 1904. 

Mixam, Mixanno. See Mriksah. 

Mixed-bloods. To gauge accurately the 
amount of Indian blood in the veins of 
the white population of the American 
continent and to determine to what ex¬ 
tent the surviving aborigines have in 
them the blood of their conquerors and 
supplanters is impossible in the absence 
of scientific data. But there is reason to 
believe that intermixture has been much 
more common than is generally assumed. 
The Eskimo of Greenland and the Danish 
traders and colonists have intermarried 
from the first, so that in the territory im¬ 
mediately under European supervision 
hardly any pure natives remain. The 
marriages (of Danish fathers and Eskimo 
mothers) have been very fertile and the 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-58 


children are in many respects an im¬ 
provement on the aboriginal stock, in the 
matter of personal beauty in particular. 
According to Packard (Beach, Ind. Miscel., 
69, 1877) the last full-blood Eskimo on 
Belle Isle str., Labrador, was in 1859 the 
wife of an Englishman at Salmon bay. 
The Labrador intermixture has been 
largely with fishermen from Newfound¬ 
land of English descent. 

Some of the Algonquian tribes of Can¬ 
ada mingled considerably with the Euro¬ 
peans during the French period, both in 
the E. and toward the interior. In 
recent years certain French-Canadian 
writers have unsuccessfully sought to 
minimize this intermixture. In the Illi- 
nois-Missouri region these alliances were 
favored by the missionaries from the 
beginning of the 18th century. As early 
as 1693 a member of the La Salle expedi¬ 
tion married the daughter of the chief of 
the Kaskaskia. Few French families in 
that part of the country are free from 
Indian blood. The establishment of 
trading posts at Detroit, Mackinaw, Du¬ 
luth, etc., aided the fusion of races. The 
spread of the activities of the Hudson’s 
Bay Company gave rise in the Canadian 
Northwest to a population of mixed- 
bloods of considerable historic impor¬ 
tance, the offspring of Indian mothers and 
Scotch, French, and English fathers. 
Manitoba, at the time of its admission 
intothedominion, had somel0,000 mixed- 
bloods, one of whom, John Norquay, 
afterward became premier of the Provin¬ 
cial government. Some of the employees 
of the fur companies who had taken 
Indian wives saw their descendants flour¬ 
ish in Montreal and other urban centers. 
The tribes that have furnished the most 
mixed-bloods are the Cree and Chippewa, 
and next the Sioux, of n. w. Canada; the 
Chippewa, Ottawa, and related tribes of 
the great lakes; and about Green bay, 
the Menominee. Toward the Mississippi 
and beyond it were a few Dakota and 
Blackfoot mixed-bloods. Harvard (Rep. 
Smithson. Inst., 1879) estimated the total 
number in 1879 at 40,000. Of these about 
22,000 were in United States territory and 
18,000 in Canada. Of 15,000 persons of 
Canadian-French descent in Michigan few 
were probably free from Indian blood. 
Some of the "French mixed-bloods wan¬ 
dered as far as the Pacific, establishing 
settlements of their own kind beyond the 
Rocky mts. The first wife of the noted eth¬ 
nologist Schoolcraft was the daughter of 
an Irish gentleman by a Chippewa moth¬ 
er, another of whose daughters married 
an Episcopal clergyman, and a third a 
French-Canadian lumberer. Although 
some of the English colonies endeavored 
to promote the intermarriage of the two 




914 MIXED BLOODS-MIXED SENECAS AND SHAWNEES Lb. a. e. 


races, the only notable case in Virginia 
is that of Pocahontas (q. v.) and John 
Rolfe. The Athapascan and other tribes 
of the extreme N. W. have intermixed 
but little with the whites, though there 
are Russian mixed-bloods in Alaska. In 
British Columbia and the adjoining parts 
of the United States are to be found some 
mixed-bloods, the result of intermarriage 
of French traders and employees with 
native women. Some intermixture of 
captive white blood exists among the 
Apache, Comanche, Kiowa, and other 
raiding tribes along the Mexican and 
Texas border, the children seeming to 
inherit superior industry. The Pueblos, 
with the notable exception of the Lagunas, 
have not at all favored intermarriage 
with Europeans. The modern Siouan 
tribes have intermarried to some extent 
with white Americans, as some of them 
did in early days with the French of 
Canada. The Five Civilized Tribes of 
Oklahoma—Cherokee, Choctaw, Chicka¬ 
saw, Creeks, and Seminole—have a large 
element of white blood, some through 
so-called squaw-men, some dating back 
to British and French traders before the 
Revolution. In the Cherokee Nation 
especially nearly all the leading men for 
a century have been more of white than 
of Indian blood, the noted John Ross 
himself being only one-eighth Indian. 
Mooney (19th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1900) 
considers that much of the advance in 
civilization made by the Cherokee has 
been “due to the intermarriage among 
them of white men, chiefly traders of 
the ante-Revolutionary period, with a 
few Americans from the back settle¬ 
ments.” Most of this white blood was of 
good Irish, Scotch, American, and Ger¬ 
man stock. Under the former laws of the 
Cherokee Nation anyone who could prove 
the smallest proportion of Cherokee blood 
was rated as Cherokee, including many 
of one-sixteenth, one-thirty-second, or less 
of Indian blood. In 1905 the Cherokee 
Nation numbered 36,782 citizens. Of 
these, about 7,000 were adopted whites, 
negroes, and Indians of other tribes, while 
of the rest probably not one-fourth are 
of even approximately pure Indian blood. 
Some of the smaller tribes removed from 
the E., as the Wyandot (Hurons) and 
Kaskaskia, have not now a single full- 
blood, and in some tribes, notably the 
Cherokee and Osage, the jealousies from 
this cause have led to the formation of 
rival full-blood and mixed-blood fac¬ 
tions. During the Spanish domination 
in the s. e, Atlantic region intermix¬ 
ture perhaps took place, but not much; in 
Texas, however, intermarriage of whites 
and Indians was common. The peoples 
of Iroquoian stock have a large admix¬ 
ture of white blood, French and English, 


both from captives taken during the wars 
of the 17th and 18th centuries and by the 
process of adoption, much favored by 
them. Such intermixture contains more 
of the combination of white mother and 
Indian father than is generally the case. 
Some English-Iroquois intermixture is 
still in process in Ontario. The Iroquois 
of St Regis, Caughnawaga, and other 
agencies can hardly boast an Indian of 
pure blood. According to the Almanach 
Iroquois for 1900, the blood of Eunice 
Williams, captured at Deerfield, Mass., in 
1704, and adopted and married within 
the tribe, flows in the veins of 125 de¬ 
scendants at Caughnawaga; Silas Rice, 
captured at Marlboro, Mass., in 1703, has 
1,350 descendants; Jacob Hill and John 
Stacey, captured near Albany in 1755, 
have, respectively, 1,100 and 400 descen¬ 
dants. Similar cases are found among 
the New York Iroquois. Dr Boas (Pop. 
Sci. Mo., xlv, 1894) has made an 
anthropometric study of the mixed- 
bloods, covering a large amount of data, 
especially concerning the Sioux and the 
eastern Chippewa. The total numbers 
investigated were 647 men and 408 
women. As compared with the Indian, 
the mixed-blood, so far as investigations 
have shown, is taller, men exhibiting 
greater divergence than women. 

A large proportion of negro blood ex¬ 
ists in many tribes, particularly in those 
formerly residing in the Gulf states, and 
among the remnants scattered along the 
Atlantic coast from Massachusetts south¬ 
ward. The Five Civilized Tribes of Okla¬ 
homa, having been slaveholders and sur¬ 
rounded by Southern influences, generally 
sided with the South in the Civil war. On 
being again received into friendly rela¬ 
tions with the Government they were 
compelled by treaty to free their slaves 
and admit them to equal Indian citi¬ 
zenship. In 1905 there were 20,619 
of these adopted negro citizens in these 
five tribes, besides all degrees of admix¬ 
ture in such proportions that the census 
takers are frequently unable to discrimi¬ 
nate. The Cherokee as a body have re¬ 
fused to intermarry with their negro citi¬ 
zens, but among the Creeks and the Semi¬ 
nole intermarriage has been very great. 
The Pamunkey, Chickahominy, Marsh- 
pee, Narraganset, and Gay Head rem¬ 
nants have much negro blood, and con¬ 
versely there is no doubt that many of 
the broken coast tribes have been com- 
letely absorbed into the negro race, 
ee Croatan Indians, Metis, Popular fal¬ 
lacies. (a. f. c. j. m. ) 

Mixed Senecas and Shawnees. The for¬ 
mer official designation of the mixed 
band of Mingo (Seneca) and Shawnee 
who removed from Lewistown, Ohio, to 
the W. about 1833 (seeMingo). By treaty 


BULL. 30] 


MIXED SHOSHONES-MOAPARIATS 


915 


of 1867 the union was dissolved, the Sen¬ 
eca joining the band known as ‘ ‘ Seneca of 
Sandusky,” and the Shawnee becoming a 
distinct body under the name of “East¬ 
ern Shawnee.” Both tribes were as¬ 
signed reservations in the present Okla¬ 
homa, where they still reside, numbering 
101 and 366 respectively in 1905. ( j. m. ) 

Mixed Shoshones. Mixed bands of Ban¬ 
nock and Tukuarika.—U. S. Stat., xvm, 
158, 1875. 

M’ketashshekakah ( Ma kaiawimeshika- 
' ka 0, ‘big black chest,’ referring to the 
pigeonhawk.—W. J.) The Thunder gens 
of the Potawatomi, Sauk, and Foxes, q. v. 
Makatawimeshikaka®. — Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 
M-ke-tash'-she-ka-kah'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 
1877. 

M’ko ( Ma/'kwa , ‘bear’). A gens of the 
Potawatomi, q. v. 

Ma''kwa.-Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. M'-ko' —Mor¬ 
gan, Anc. Soc., 167,1877. 

M’kwa ( Ma/'kwa , ‘bear'). A gens of 
the Shawnee, q. v. 

Ma' kwa.-Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. M’ kwa.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc.. 168,1877 

Moache. A division of the Ute, for¬ 
merly roaming over s. Colorado and n. 
New Mexico. In 1871 they were re¬ 
ported to number 645; in 1903 the com¬ 
bined Capote, Moache, and Wiminuche 
on Southern Ute res. numbered 955. 
The name “Taos Utes” was formerly ap¬ 
plied to those Ute who temporarily en¬ 
camped in considerable numbers about 
Taos pueblo, N. Mex. As these were 
doubtless largely Moache, their synonyms 
are included here, although the Capote, 
Tabeguache, and Wiminuche were evi¬ 
dently also a part of them. See Ute. 

The Moache joined with other Ute 
bands in the treaty of Washington, Mar. 
2, 1868, affirming the treaty of Oct. 7, 
1863, with the Tabeguache and defining 
the boundaries of their reservation. 
Maquache Utes.— Taylor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 40th 
Cong., spec, sess., 10. 1867. Maquahache. —Dole in 
Ind Aft Rep 1864, 18, 1865. Maquoche Utahs.— 
Davis, ibid , 135,1866. Menaches. —Graves, ibid., 
386,1854. Moguachis —Villa-Senor, Theatro Am., 
pt 2, 413, 1748. Mohuache —Merriwether in Ind. 
Aff. Rep. 1855, 186, 1856. Mohuache Utahs —Meri¬ 
wether in Sen. Ex. Doc. 69, 34th Cong., 1st sess , 
15, 1856. Mohuache Utes— Bancroft, Ariz. and N. 
Mex., 665, 1889. Mohuhaches— Bell, New Tracks 
in N. Am., I, 108, 1869. Moquaches.— Archuleta 
in Ind Aff Rep., 142, 1866. Mouuache Utes — 
Colyer, ibid . 1871,191, 1872. Muache.— Ute treaty 
(1868) in U. S. Ind. Treaties, Kappler ed., ii, 990, 
1904. Muahuaches.— Carson in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 
342,1860. Muares.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,1864 
(probably identical, although given as part of 
Faraon Apache). Taos.— Wilson (1849) in Cal. 
Mess, and Corresp., 185, 1850. Taos Indians.— 
Cummings in Ind. Aff. Rep., 160. 1866 (identified 
with Moache). Taos Yutas.— Farnham, Trav. 
Californias, 371, 1844. Tao Yutas.— Farnham 
misquoted by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 465, 
1882. Tash-Yuta— Burton, City of Saints, 578, 
1861. 

Moah {Mdhwtiwa, ‘wolf’). A gens of 
the Potawatomi, q. v. 

Mahwaw».-Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Mo-ah'.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 1877. 


Moanahonga (‘great walker’). An 
Iowa warrior, known to the whites as Big 
Neck, and called also by his people 
Winaugusconey (‘Man not afraid to 
travel ’), because he was wont to take 
long trips alone, relying on his own 
prowess and prodigious strength. While 
he was of lowly birth he was exceedingly 
ambitious and contended for the honors 
and dignity for which his courage and 
address fitted him, but which his fellow 
tribesmen were loth to accord, wherefore 
he built a lodge apart from the rest and 
collected about him a band of admirers 
over whom he exercised the authority of 
chief. Gen. Clark induced him and Ma¬ 
li askah to go to Washington in 1824 and 
there sign a treaty that purported to con¬ 
vey to the United States for an annual 
payment of $500 for 10 years the title of 
all the lands of the Iowa lying within the 
borders of Missouri. He did not under¬ 
stand the treaty, and after white settlers 
had taken possession of a considerable 
part of the Indian lands he set out in 
1829 to visit St Louis for the purpose of 
making complaint to Gen. Clark. A 
party of whites encountered his company 
of 60 men, made them all intoxicated, and 
decamped with their horses, blankets, 
and provisions. When they recovered 
from their stupor one of them shot a hog 
to satisfy their hunger. This provoked 
the anger of the settlers, 60 of whom rode 
up and commanded the Indians to leave 
the country. Moanahonga then with¬ 
drew his camp about 15 m. beyond the 
state boundary, as he supposed. When 
the white party followed him he went out 
to meet them with his pipe in his mouth 
in sign of peace. As he extended his 
hand in greeting the borderers fired, 
killing his brother at his side, and an 
infant. The Indians flew to their arms 
and, inspired anew by the call for ven¬ 
geance of Moanahonga’s sister, who was 
shot in the second volley, they drove the 
whites from the field, although these ex¬ 
ceeded their fighting men two to one. 
The man who shot his sister Moanahonga 
burned at the stake. The U. S. troops 
were ordered out, and obtaining hostages 
from the Iowa returned to their barracks. 
Moanahonga and several others of his 
band were arrested and tried on a charge 
of murder, but were acquitted. He culti¬ 
vated friendly relations with the whites af¬ 
ter this, but always went with blackened 
face in sign of mourning, because, as he 
said, he had sold the bones of his ances¬ 
tors. About 5 years afterward he fell in 
combat with a Sioux chief. See McKen- 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i, 177-183, 
1858. 

Moapariats (Mo-a-pa-rV-ats , ‘ mosquito 
creek people’). A band of Paiute for¬ 
merly living in or near Moapa valley, 


916 


MOBILE 


MOCCASIN 


[b. a. e. 


a. e. Nev., and numbering 64 in 1873.— 
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874. 

Mobile (meaning doubtful). A Musk- 
hogean tribe whose early home was prob¬ 
ably Mauvila, or Mavilla, supposed to 
have been at or near Choctaw Bluff on 
Alabama r., Clark co., Ala,, where De 
Soto, in 1540, met with fierce opposition 
on the part of the natives and engaged in 
the most obstinate contest of the expedi¬ 
tion. The town was then under the con¬ 
trol of Tascalusa (q. v.) probably an Ali- 
bamu chief. If, as is probable, theMobil- 
ian tribe took part in this contest, they 
must later have moved farther s., as they 
were found on Mobile bay when the 
French began to plant a colony at that 
point about the year 1700. Wishing pro¬ 
tection from their enemies, they obtained 
permission from the French, about 1708, 
to settle near Ft Louis, where space was 
allotted them and the Tohome for this 
purpose. Little is known of the history 
of the tribe. In 1708 a large body of 
Alibamu, Cherokee, Abihka, and Ca¬ 
tawba warriors descended Mobile r. for 
the purpose of attacking the French and 
their Indian allies, but for some unknown 
reason contented themselves with de¬ 
stroying a few huts of the Mobilians. 
The latter, who were always friendly to 
the French, appear to have been chris¬ 
tianized soon after the French settled 
there. In 1741 Coxe wrote that the chief 
city of the once great province of Tasca- 
luza, “Mouvilla, which the English call 
Maubela, and the French Mobile, is yet 
in being, tho’ far short of its former 
grandeur.” At this date the Mobilians 
and Tohome together numbered 350 fam¬ 
ilies. Mention is made in the Mobile 
church registers of individual members 
of the tribe as late as 1761, after which 
they are lost to history as a tribe. For 
subsistence they relied almost wholly on 
agriculture. Clay images of men and 
women and also of animals, supposed to 
be objects of worship by this people, were 
found by the French. 

The so-called Mobilian trade language 
was a corrupted Choctaw jargon used for 
the purposes of intertribal communica¬ 
tion among all the tribes from Florida 
to Louisiana, extending northward on the 
Mississippi to about the junction of the 
Ohio. It was also known as the Chicka¬ 
saw trade language. (a. s. g. c. t. ) 
Mabile.— Ranjel quoted by Halbert in Trans. Ala. 
Hist. Soc., iii,68, 1899. Manilla. —Harris, Voy. and 
Trav., i, 808, 1705 (misprint). Maouila.— La* Salle 
(ea. 1682) in Margry, D6c., II, 197,1877. Maubela.— 
Coxe. Carolana, 25,1741. Maubila. —French, Hist. 
Coll. La., ii, 247, 1875. Maubile. —Ibid., hi, 192, 
1851. Maubileans. —Ibid., 170. Maubilians. —Char¬ 
levoix, Nouv. France, ii, 273,1761. Mauvila.— Gar- 
cilasso de la Vega (1540), Fla., 146, 1723. Mauvil- 
ians.— French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 192,1852. Mauvil- 
iens.— Charlevoix, Nouv. France, ii, 308, 1761. 
Mavila.— Biedma (1544) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
ii, 102,1850. Mavilians.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 


II, 34, 1852. Mavilla.— Gentleman of Elvas (1557) 
in French, Hist.Coll. La., ii, 156,1850. Mobeluns.— 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816 (or Mouville). 
Mobilas.— Barcia, Ensayo, 313, 1723. Mobile.— P<5- 
nicaut (1699) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., I, 
43, 1869. Mobileans.— La Harpe, ibid., Ill, 20, 34, 
1851. Mobilians.— Jeffervs, French Dom. Am., I, 
165, 1761. Mobiliens.— PCmicaut (1702) in Margry, 
D£c., v, 425, 1883. Mouvill.— Le Page du Pratz, 
Hist. La., Eng. ed., 309, 1774. Mouvilla.— Coxe, 
Carolana, 24,1741. Mouville.— Boudinot, Star in the 
West, 127, 1816 (or Mobeluns). Movila.— Barcia, 
Ensavo. 335, 1723. Movill.— Barton, New Views, 
Ixix, 1798. Mowill.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 
i, 162, 1761. 

Mocama (‘on the coast’). A former 
Timucua district and dialect, probably 
about the present St Augustine, Fla. 

Mocama.— Pareja (ca. 1614) quoted by Gatschet in 
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvi, 627,1877. Moscama.— 
Brinton, Floridian Penin., 135, 1859. 

Moccasin. The soft skin shoe of the 
North American Indians and its imita¬ 
tions on the part of the whites. The word, 
spelled formerly also moccctson , is derived 
from one of the eastern Algonquian dia¬ 
lects: Powhatan (Strachey, 1612), mock- 
asin, mawhcasun; Massachuset(Eliot,ante 
1660), mohfcisson , mohkussin; Narraganset 
(Williams, 1643), mocussin; Micmac, 
m’cusun; Chippewa, makisin. Itcameinto 
English through Powhatan in all proba¬ 
bility, as well as through Massachuset. 
The latter dialect has also mokus or mokis , 
of which the longer word seems to be a 
derivative. Hewitt suggests that it is 
cognate with makak, 'small case or box’ 

(see Mocuck) . After the moccasin have 
been named moccasin-fish (Maryland 
sunfish), moccasin-flower or moccasin- 
plant (lady’s-slipper, known also as In¬ 
dian’s shoe), moccasin-snake or water- 
moccasin ( Ancislrodon jnscivorus) , the up¬ 
land moccasin (A. atrofuscus). In some 
parts of the South the term ‘moccasined’ 
is in colloquial use in the sense of intoxi¬ 
cated. (a. f. c.) 

With the exception of the sandal- 
wearing Indians living in the states along 
the Mexican boundary, moccasins were 
almost universally worn. The tribes of 
s. e. Texas were known to the southern 
Plains Indians as “Barefoot Indians,” 
because they generally went without foot¬ 
covering, only occasionally wearing san¬ 
dals. The Pacific coast Indians also as 
a rule went barefoot, and among most 
tribes women did not customarily wear 
moccasins. There are two general types 
of moccasins—those with a rawhide sole 
sewed to a leather upper, and those with 
sole and upper consisting of one piece of 
soft leather with a seam at the instep and 
heel. The former belongs to the Eastern 
or timber tribes, the latter to the Western 
or plains Indians. The Eskimo have soled 
footwear. The chief causes influencing 
this distribution are the presence or ab¬ 
sence of animals furnish ing thick rawhide, 
the character of trails and travel, and tribal 
usages. The boot or legging moccasin, 


BULL. 30] 


MOCHGONNEKONCK-MOCTOBI 


917 


worn from Alaska to Arizona and New 
Mexico, is still commonly a part of the 
woman’s costume, and among most of the 
Pueblos the legging portion is a white- 
tanned deerskin to which the moccasin is 
attached, the skin being wrapped neatly 
and methodically around the calf of the 
leg and secured by means of a cord. Dif¬ 
ferences in cut, color, decoration, toe- 
piece, inset-tongue, vamp, heel-fringe, 
ankle-flaps, etc., show tribal and envi¬ 
ronmental characters and afford means of 
identification. Among the Plains tribes 
the decoration of moccasins presents a 
wide range of symbolism, and since this 
part of the costume has been less modified 
by contact with whites than other gar¬ 
ments, it affords valuable material for the 
study of symbolic art. 

The materials used in making mocca¬ 
sins are tanned skins of the larger mam¬ 
mals, rawhide for soles, and sinew for 
sewing. Dyes, pigments, quills, beads, 
cloth, buttons, and fur are applied to the 
moccasin as decoration. Many tribes 
make moccasins to be specially worn in 
ceremonies, and a number of tribes also 
employ their footwear in a guessing game 
known as the “moccasin game.” 

Great ingenuity was often displayed in 
cutting moccasins from a single piece of 
dressed hide, the most complicated pat¬ 
tern being found among the Klamath. 
The northern Athapascan pattern has a 
T-shaped seam at the toe and heel, while 
in the Nez Perce type the seam is along 
one side of the foot from the great toe to 
the heel. In the moccasin of the Plains 
Indians the upper is in one piece and is 
sewed to a rawhide sole. 

Consult Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xvii, pt. 3, 1905; Gerard in Am. An- 
throp., ix, no. 1, 1907, Goddard in Univ. 
of Cal. Pub., Am. Archaeol. and Ethnol., 
i, 1903; Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. 
Hist., xviii, pt. 1, 1904; Mason (1) in 
Smithson. Rep. 1886, pt. 1,205-238, 1889, 
(2) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1894, 239-593, 
1896; Morgan, League Iroquois, ii, 1904; 
Shufeldt in Proc. Nat. Mus. 1888, 59-66, 
1889; Stephen in Proc. Nat. Mus. 1888, 
131-136, 1889; Willoughby in Am. An- 
throp., ix, no. 1, 1907; Wissler in Trans. 
13th Internat. Cong. Am., 1905. (w.h.) 

Mochgonnekonck. A village on Long 
Island, N. Y., in 1643, probably near the 
present Manhasset.—Doc. of 1643 in N. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 60, 1883. 

Mochicaui (mochic ‘tortoise', cahui 
‘ hill ’: ‘ hill of the tortoise,’ in allusion to 
the shapeof a hill in the vicinity of theset- 
tlement.—Buelna). The principal settle¬ 
ment of the Zuaque, who speak or spoke 
the Tehueco and Vacoregue dialects of 
Cahita; situated on the e. bank of Rio 
Fuerte, about lat. 26° 10', n. w. Sinaloa, 
Mexico. The settlement is now civilized. 


Mochicahuy.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 332, 1864. 
Mochicaui.— Ribas(1645) in Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 
608, 1882. Mochicohuy. —Ibid., map. Motschica- 
huz.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue Welt- 
Bott, 1726. 

Mochilagua. An Opata pueblo visited 
by Coronado in 1540; situated in the val¬ 
ley of the Rio Sonora, n.w. Mexico, doubt¬ 
less in the vicinity of Arizpe. Possibly 
identical with one of the villages later 
known by another name. 

Mochila.— Castaneda ( ca . 1565) in Ternaux-Com- 
pans, Voy., ix, 158,1838(misprint). Mochilagua.— 
Castaneda in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 515,1896. 

Mocho (El Mocho, Span.: ‘thecropped, 
shorn, mutilated’, so called because he 
had lost an ear in a fight). An Apache, 
celebrated in manuscript narratives per¬ 
taining to Texas in the 18th century. He 
was captured by theTonkawa, but because 
of his eloquence and prowess was elevated 
to the chiefship of that tribe on the death 
of its leader during an epidemic in 1777 
or 1778. With the Spaniards El Mocho 
had a bad reputation. When he became 
chief the governor connived to get rid of 
him, to effect which Mezieres bribed his 
rivals to allure him to the highway lead¬ 
ing to Natchitoches, under the promise 
of presents when he should arrive there, 
and murder him, but this plot failed, and 
Mezieres and the governor were obliged 
to conciliate him. Finally, in 1784, at the 
instigation of the government, he was 
killed. (h. e. b. ) 

Mochopa. An Opata pueblo of Sonora, 
Mexico, and the seat of a Spanish mission 
founded between 1678 and 1730, at which 
latter date the population had become 
reduced to 24. It was abandoned be¬ 
tween 1764 and 1800, owing to Apache 
depredations. 

Machopo — Davila, Sonora Historico, 317, 1894. 
Mochop — Hamilton, Mexican Handbook, 47,1883. 
Mochopa.— OrozcoyBerra,Geog.,343, 1864. S. Ig¬ 
nacio Mochopa.— Sonora matenales (1730) quoted 
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884. 

Mocock. See Mocuck. 

Moctobi. A small tribe formerly resid¬ 
ing in s. Mississippi. They are men¬ 
tioned by Iberville, in 1699, as living at 
that time on Pascagoula r., near the Gulf 
coast, associated with the Biloxi and 
Paskagula, each tribe having its own vil¬ 
lage (Margry, Dec.,iv, 195, 1880). Sau- 
vole, who was at Ft Biloxi in 1699-1700, 
speaks of the “villages of the Pascobou- 
las, Biloxi, and Moctobi, which together 
contain not more than 20 cabins. ’ ’ Noth¬ 
ing is known respecting their language, 
nor has anything more been ascertained 
in regard to their history, but from their 
intimate relations with the Biloxi it is 
probable they belonged to the same 
(Siouan) linguistic stock. The name 
Moctobi appears to have disappeared 
lrom Indian memory and tradition, as 
repeated inquiry among the Choctaw 
and Caddo has failed to elicit any knowl¬ 
edge of such a tribe. What seems to be a 


918 


MOCUCK—MODOC 


[b. a. E. 


justifiable supposition, in the absence of 
further knowledge, is that the three or four 
small bands were the remnants of a larger 
tribe or of tribes which, while making their 
way southward, had been reduced by war, 
pestilence, or other calamity, and had 
been compelled to consolidate and take 
refuge under the Choctaw. Consult 
Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. 
B. A. E., 1894. See Capinans. 

Moctobi.— Sauvole (1700) in Margry, D6c., iv, 451. 
1880. Moctoby. —Iberville (1699),ibid., 195. Moelo- 
bites. —Gayarr6, La., 66, 1851. Mouloubis. —Iber¬ 
ville (1699) in French, Hist. Coll. La., II, 99, 1875. 

Mocuck. Defined by Bartlett (Diet, 
of Americanisms, 399, 1877) as “a term 
applied to the box of birch bark in 
which sugar is kept by the Chippewa 
Indians.’’ In the forms makak, mocock, 
mocuck , mowkowk, mukuk , the word is 
known to the literature of the settlement 
of Canada and the W. in the early years 
of the 19th century, and is now in use 
among the English-speaking people of 
the maple-sugar region about the great 
lakes, and among the Canadian French 
as macaque. A trader in Minnesota in 
1820 (cited by Jenks in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
1103, 1900) speaks of “ a mocock of sugar, 
weighing about 40 pounds.” The word 
is derived from makak, which in the 
Chippewa and closely related Algonquian 
dialects signifies a bag, box, or other like 
receptacle of birch-bark. (a. f. c.) 

Modoc (from Moatokni, ‘southerners’). 
A Lutuamian tribe, forming the southern 
division of that stock, in s. w. Oregon. The 
Modoc language is practically the same 
as the Klamath, the dialectic differences 
being extremely slight. This linguistic 
identity would indicate that the local 
separation of the two tribes must have 
been comparatively recent and has never 
been complete. The former habitat of 
the Modoc included Little Klamath lake, 
Modoc lake, Tule lake, Lost River valley, 
and Clear lake, and extended at times as 
far e. as Goose lake. The most impor¬ 
tant bands of the tribe were at Little Kla¬ 
math lake, Tule lake, and in the valley 
of Lost r. Frequent conflicts with white 
immigrants, in which both sides were 
guilty of many atrocities, have given the 
tribe an unfortunate reputation. In 1864 
the Modoc joined the Klamath in ceding 
their territory to the United States and re¬ 
moved to Klamath res. They seem never 
to have been contented, however, and 
made persistent efforts to return and 
occupy their former lands on Lost r. 
and its vicinity. In 1870 a prominent 
chief named Kintpuash (q. v.),commonly 
known to history as Captain Jack, led 
the more turbulent portion of the tribe 
back to the California border and ob¬ 
stinately refused to return to the res¬ 
ervation. The first attempt to bring 
back the runaways by force brought on 
the Modoc war of 1872-73. After some 


struggles Kintpuash and his band re¬ 
treated to the lava-beds on the California 
frontier, and from Jan. to Apr., ,1873, 



CHIKCHIKAM LUPATKUELATKO (“sCAR-FACED CHARLEY”)— 
MODOC 


successfully resisted the attempts of the 
troops to dislodge them. The progress 
of the war had been slow until April of 



WINEMA (TOBY RIDDLE) —MODOC 


that year, when two of the peace commis¬ 
sioners, who had been sent to treat with 
the renegades, were treacherously assas¬ 
sinated. In this act Kintpuash played 





BULL. 30] 


MOENKAPI-MOHAVE 


919 


the chief part. The campaign was then 
pushed with vigor, the Modoc were finally 
dispersed and captured, and Kintpuash 
and 5 other leaders were hanged at Ft 
Klamath in Oct., 1873. The tribe was 
then divided, a part being sent to Indian 
Ter. and placed on the Quapaw res., where 
they had diminished to 56 by 1905. The 
remainder are on Klamath res., where 
they are apparently thriving, and num¬ 
bered 223 in 1905. 

The following were the Modoc settle¬ 
ments so far as known: Agawesh, Chaka- 
wech, Kalelk, Kawa, Keshlakchuish, 
Keuchishkeni, Kumbatuash, Leush, Na- 
koshkeni, Nushaltkagakni, Pashka, 
Plaikni, Shapashkeni, Sputuishkeni, Stu- 
ikishkeni, Waisha, Wachamshwash, Wel- 
washkeni, Wukakeni, Yaneks, and Yula- 
lona. (l. f.) 

Aigspaluma.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., II, 
pt. i.xxxiii, 1890 (Sahaptin name for all Indians on 
Klamath res.and vicinity) . La-la-cas.— Meacham, 
Wigwam and War-path, 291,1875 (original name). 
Lutmawi. —Gatschet, op. cit., xxxiv (name given 
by a part of the Pit River Indians). Lutuam. — 
Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 1,165,1877. Lutuami. — 
Curtin, Ilmawi MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1889 (Ilmawi 
name). Madoc,-Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867,71,1868. Ma"'- 
;a.—Dorsey,KwapaMS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Qua¬ 
paw name), Moadoc. —Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864,11,1865. 
Moahtockna. —TaylorinCal. Farmer, June22,1860. 
Moatakish. —Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, 
pt. ii, 216, 1890 (variation of Mo'dokish). Moatok- 
gish. —Ibid. Moatokni. —Ibid, (own name). Mo- 
danks. —Wright (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th 
Cong., 3d sess., 28, 1857. Modoc.— Palmer in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 471, 1854. Mo-docks.— Ibid., 470. Mo- 
does.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 22, 1860 (mis¬ 
print). Modok.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 
hi, 252,1877. Mo'dokish.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., II, pt. II, 216,1890. Mo'dokni.— Ibid, (own 
name). Modook. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 221,1861. Mowa- 
tak. —Gatschet in Cont* N. A. Ethnol., n, pt. I, 
xxxiv, 1890 (Sahaptin name). Mu'atokni.— Ibid., 
pt. 2, 216. Plaikni.— Ibid., pt. 1, xxxv (collective 
for Modoc, Klamath, and Snakes on Sprague r.). 
Pxanai.— Ibid. (Yreka Shasta name). Saidoka.— 
Ibid. (Shoshoni name). 

Moenkapi (‘place of the running 
water’). A small settlement about 40 
m. n. w. of Oraibi, n. e. Ariz., occupied 
during the farming season by the Hopi. 
The present village, which consists of two 
irregular rows of one-story houses, was 
built over the remains of an older settle¬ 
ment—apparently the Rancheria de los 
Gandules seen by Ofiate in 1604. Moen¬ 
kapi is said to have been founded within 
the memory of some of the Mormon pio- 
eers at the neighboring town of Tuba 
City, named after an old Oraibi chief. 
It was the headquarters of a large milling 
enterprise of the Mormons a number of 
years ago. (f. w. h.) 

Concabe. —Garc6s (1775-76) quoted by Bancroft, 
Ariz. and N. Mex., 137,395,1889. Moencapi.— Coues, 
Garc6s Diary, 393,1900. Moen-kopi.— Mindeleff in 
8th Rep. B. A. E., 14,1891. Moqui concave.— Ibid. 
Moyencopi.— Bourke, Moquis of Arizona, 229,1884. 
Muabe.— Ibid. Muenkapi.— Voth, Trad, of the 
Hopi, 22, 1905 (correct Hopi form). Munqui-con- 
cabe. —Garc6s (1776), Diary, 393, 1900. Muqui con¬ 
cabe.— Ibid., 394-395 (Yavapai form). Rancheria 
de los Gandules.— Ofiate (1604) in Doc. In6d., XVI, 
276, 1871 (apparently identical). 


Mogg. An Abnaki chief. He had long 
been sachem of the Nor ridge wock and had 
been converted to Christianity by PSre 
Rale when the English settlers in Maine, 
in order to make good their title to terri¬ 
tory which the Abnaki declared they had 
not parted with, began a series of attacks 
in 1722. Col. Westbrook in the first ex¬ 
pedition found the village deserted and 
burned it. In 1724 the English surprised 
the Indians. The killing of R&le and 
many of the Indians, the desecration of 
the church, etc., left a blot on the honor 
of the colonists (Drake, Bk. Inds., 312, 
1880). In the fight fell Mogg and other 
noted warriors. Whittier’s poem “Mogg 
Megone” recounts the story. See Mis¬ 
sions. ( A. F. C. ) 

Mogollon (from the mesa and mountains 
of the same name in New Mexico and 
Arizona, which in turn were named in 
honor of Juan Ignacio Flores Mogollon, 
governor of New Mexico in 1712-15). A 
subdivision of the Apache that formerly 
ranged over the Mogollon mesa and mts. 
in w. New- Mexico and e. Arizona (Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 380, 1854). They were asso¬ 
ciated with theMimbrenosatthe Southern 
Apache agency, N. Mex., in 1868, and at 
Hot Springs agency in 1875, and are now 
under the Ft Apache and San Carlos res., 
Ariz. They are no longer officially recog¬ 
nized as Mogollones, and their number is 
not separately reported. (f. w. h. ) 
Be-ga'-kol-kizjn.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 5,1884. 
Mogall.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, *12, 1868. Mogal- 
lones.— Browne, Apache Country, 290, 1869. Mo- 
gogones.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 380,1854. Mogoll.— Ibid., 
1867, 193, 1868. Mogollon.— Ibid., 1857, 289, 1858. 
Mogollone.— Ibid., 1858, 206. Mogoyones.— Ibid., 
1856, 181, 1857. 

Mohanet. An Indian settlement of the 
colony of Pennsylvania, on the e. branch 
of the Susquehanna, probably Iroquois.— 
Alcedo, Die. Geog., hi, 225, 1788. 

Moharala ( Mo-har-d'-la, ‘ big bird’). A 
subdivision or clan of the Delawares.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Mohave (from hamok ‘ three ’, avi ‘moun¬ 
tain’). The most populous and war¬ 
like of the Yuman tribes. Since known 
to history they appear to have lived 
on both sides of the Rio Colorado, 
though chiefly on the e. side, between 
the Needles (whence their name is de¬ 
rived) and the entrance to Black canyon. 
Ives, in 1857, found only a few scattered 
families in Cottonwood valley, the bulk 
of their number being below Hardyville. 
In recent times a body of Chemehuevi 
have held the river between them and 
their kinsmen the Yuma. The Mohave 
are strong, athletic, and well developed, 
their women attractive; in fact, Ives 
characterized them as fine a people phy¬ 
sically as any he had ever seen. They 
are famed for the artistic painting of their 
bodies. Tattooing was universal, but 


920 


MOHAVE 


[B. A. £. 


confined to small areas on the skin. 
According to Kroeber (Am. Anthrop.,rv, 
284, 1902) their art in recent times con¬ 
sists chiefly of crude painted decorations 



MOHAVE MAN. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


on their pottery. Though a river tribe, 
the Mohave made no canoes, but when 
necessary had recourse to rafts, or balsas, 
made of bundles of reeds. They had no 
large settlements, their dwellings being 
scattered. These were four-sided and 
low, with four supporting posts at the 
center. The walls, which were only 2 
or 3 ft high, and the almost flat roof were 
formed of brush covered with sand. 
Their granaries were upright cylindrical 
structures with flat roofs. The Mo¬ 
have hunted but little, their chief reli¬ 
ance for food being on the cultivated 
products of the soil, as corn, pumpkins, 
melons, beans, and a small amount of 
wheat, to which they added mesquite 
beans, mescrew, pinon nuts, and fish to 
a limited extent. They did not practise 
irrigation, but relied on the inundation 
of the bottom lands to supply the needed 
moisture, hence when there was no over¬ 
flow their crops failed. Articles of skin 
and bone were very little used, materials 
such as the inner bark of the willow, 
vegetable fiber, etc., taking their place. 
Pottery was manufactured. Baskets were 
in common use, but were obtained from 
other tribes. 

According to Kroeber, ‘ ‘ there is no full 
gentile system, but something closely akin 
to it, which may be called either an in¬ 
cipient or a decadent clan system. Cer¬ 
tain men, and all their ancestors and 


descendants in the male line, have only 
one name for all their female relatives. 
Thus, if the female name hereditary in 
my family be Maha, my father’s sister, 
my own sisters, my daughters (no matter 
how great their number), and my son’s 
daughters, will all be called Maha. There 
are about twenty such women’s names, 
or virtual gentes, among the Mohave. 
None of these names seems to have any 
signification. But according to the myths 
of the tribe, certain numbers of men 
originally had, or were given, such names 
as Sun, Moon, Tobacco, Fire, Cloud, Coy¬ 
ote, Deer, Wind, Beaver, Owl, and others, 
which correspond exactly to totemic clan 
names; then these men were instructed 
by Mastamho, the chief mythological 
being, to call all their daughters and 
female descendants in the male line by 
certain names, corresponding to these 
clan names. Thus the male ancestors of 
all the women who at present bear the 
name Hipa, are believed to have been 
originally named Coyote. It is also said 
that all those with one name formerly 
lived in one area, and were all considered 
related. This, however, is not the case 
now, nor does it seem to have been so 
within recent historic times.” Bourke 
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, n, 181, 1889) has 
recorded some of these names, called by 
him gentes, and the totemic name to 
which each corresponds, as follows: Hual- 
ga (Moon), O-cha (Rain-cloud), Ma-ha 
(Caterpillar), Nol-cha (Sun), Hipa (Coy- 



MOHAVE WOMAN. (AM. MUS. NAT. HIST.) 


ote), Va-had-ha (Tobacco), Shul-ya 
(Beaver), Kot-ta (Mescal or Tobacco), 
Ti-hil-ya (Mescal), Vi-ma-ga Ta green 
plant, not identified), Ku-mad-ha (Oca- 









BULL. 30] 


MOHAVE-MOHAWK 


921 


tilla or Iron Cactus),Ma-li-ka (unknown), 
Mus (Mesquite), Ma-si-pa (Coyote). 

The tribal organization was loose, 
though, as a whole, the Mohave remained 
quite distinct from other tribes. The 
chieftainship was hereditary in the male 
line. Their dead were cremated. The 
population of the tribe in 1775-76 was con¬ 
servatively estimated by Garces (Diary, 
443, 1900) at 3,000, and by Leroux, about 
1834 (Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., in, 1856), 
to be 4,000; but the latter is probably 
an overestimate. Their number in 1905 
was officially given as 1,589, of whom 508 
were under the Colorado River school 
superintendent, 856 under the Ft Mohave 



MOHAVE FAMILY GROUP 


school superintendent, 50 under the San 
Carlos agency, and about 175 at Camp 
McDowell, on the Rio Verde. Those 
at the latter two points, however, are 
apparently Yavapai, commonly known 
as Apache Mohave. 

No treaty was made with the Mohave 
respecting their original territory, the 
United States assuming title thereto. By 
act of Mar. 3, 1865, supplemented by Ex¬ 
ecutive orders of Nov. 22, 1873, Nov. 16, 
1874, and May 15, 1876, the present Col¬ 
orado River res., Ariz., occupied by Mo¬ 
have, Chemehuevi, and Kawia, was 
established. 

Pasion, San Pedro, and Santa Isabel 
have been mentioned as rancherias of the 
Mohave. (h. w. h. f. w. h.) 


Amacabos. —Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629), Relation, 
in Land of Sunshine, 105, Jan. 1900. Amacava.— 
Ibid., 48, Dec. 1899. A-mac-ha-ves. —Whipple in 
Pac. R. R. Rep., ill, pt. 3. 16, map, 1856. Ama- 
guaguas.— Dunot de Mofras, Voyages, I, 338, 
1844. Amahuayas. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 
21,1862. Amajabas. —Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 
545, 1889. Amajavas. —Bancroft, Hist. Cal., ii, 332, 
1885. A-moc-ha-ve. —Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., 
in, pt. 3, 102, 1856 (own name). Amohah. —Zeit- 
schrift f. Ethnologie, 378, 1877 (after 18th cen¬ 
tury source). Amojaves. —Cremony, Life Among 
the Apaches, 148, 1868. Amo*ami. —Hoffman in 
Bull. Essex Inst., xvil,33,1885. Amoxawi.— Ibid. 
Amu-chaba. —Smith (1827) in Zeitschr. f. Ethnol¬ 
ogie, 378, 1877. Dil-z hay'. —White, Apache Names 
of Ind. Tribes, MS., B. A. E., 1, n. d. (‘Red soil 
with red ants’: Apache name). Hamockhaves. — 
Ind Aff. Rep. 1857, 302, 1858. Hamoekhave.— ten 
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 130, 1885. Hamokaba. — 
Corbusier, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. Hamokavi. — 
Thomas, Yuma MS. vocab., B.A.E.,1868. Ham- 
oke-avi. —Ibid. Hamukahava. —Ibid, liar- dil- 
zhay. —White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes. 
MS., B. A. E., 1, n. d. (‘Red soil with red ants’: 
Apache name). Hatilshe. —White in Zeitschr. f. 
Ethnologie, 370,1877 (Apache name for Mohave, 
Yuma, and Tonto). Hukwats.— Ibid, (‘weav¬ 
ers’: Ute and Paiute name). I-at.— Simpson, 
Exped. Great Basin, 474, 1859 (‘elegant fellows’: 
Paiute name). Jamajabas. —Font, MS. Diary, 56, 
Dec. 7, 1775 (or Soyopas). Jamajabs. —Garc6s 
(1775-76), Diary, passim, 1900. Jamajas. —Kern 
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, IV, 38,1854. Jamalas.— 
Hinton, Handbook to Arizona, 28, 1878. Mac-ha¬ 
ves. —Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3,16, map, 
1856. Mac-ha-vis. —Ibid., pt. 1, 110. Macjave.— 
Froebel, Seven Years’ Travels, 511, 1859. Ma ha 
os.— Whipple, Exped. from San Diego, 17, 1851. 
Majabos. —Soc. Geogr. Mex., 504, 1869. Majave. — 
Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 128, 1884. 
Mohahve.— Brenchley, Journ. to Great Salt Lake, 
II, 441, 1841. Mohave. —Ibid. Mohavi. —Bartlett, 
Pers. Narr., II, 178, 1854. Mohawa. —Pattie, Pers. 
Narr., 93,1833. Mohawe.— Mollhausen, Journ. to 
Pacific, i, 46, 1858. Mojaoes. —Bourke, Moquis of 
Ariz., 118, 1884. Mojaris. —Ind. Aff. Rep., 109,1866. 
Mojaur. —Ibid., 94. Mojave. —Brenchley, Journ. 
to Great Salt Lake, II, 441,1841. Mokhabas.— Cor¬ 
busier in Am. Antiq., vm, 276, 1886 (Mohaves, 
or). Molxaves.— Burton (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 116, 1857. Moyave.— 
Haines, Am. Indian, 153, 1888. Naks'-at. —ten 
Kate, Synonymie, 4, 1884 (Pima and Papago 
name). Soyopas. —Font, MS. Diary, 56, Dee. 7, 
1775 (Jamajabas, or). Tamajabs.— Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 298, 1853 (misprint of Garc5s’ 

‘ Jamajabs’). Tamasabes.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11,1860 (misprint from Garc6s). Tamasabs.— 
Forbes, Hist. Cal., 162, 1839. Tzi-na-ma-a.—Bourke 
in Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, n, 185,1889 (own name 
“ before they came to the Colorado river”). Wah 
muk a-hah'-ve.—Ewing in Great Divide, 204, Dec. 
1892 (trans.‘ dwelling near the water’). Wamak- 
a'va.—Cushing,inf’n (Havasupai name). Wibu'- 
kapa.—Gatschet, inf’n (Yavapai name). Wili 
idahapa.—White in Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 371, 1877 
(Tulkepaya name). Yamagas.—Mayer, Mexico, 
II, 38,1853. Yamajab.—Garc6s (1776) misquoted by 
Bancroft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 395,1889. Yamaya.— 
Pike, Expeditions, 3d map, 1810. 

Mohawk (cognate with the Narraganset 
Mohowauuck, ‘they eat (animate) things,’ 
hence ‘man-eaters’). The most easterly 
tribe of the Iroquois confederation. They 
called themselves Kaniengehaga, ‘people 
of the place of the flint.’ 

In the federal council and in other 
intertribal assemblies the Mohawk sit 
with the tribal phratry, which is form¬ 
ally called the “Three Elder Brothers” 
and of which the other members are the 
Seneca and the Onondaga. Like the 
Oneida, the Mohawk have only 3 clans, 














§22 


MOHAWK 


[b. a. e. 


namely, the Bear, the Wolf, and the 
Turtle. The tribe is represented in the 
federal council by 9 chiefs of the rank of 
roianer (see Chiefs), being 3 from every 
clan. These chiefships were known by 
specific names, which were conferred with 
the office. These official titles are Tek- 
arihoken, Haienhwatha, and Satekarih- 
wate, of the first group; Orenrebkowa, 
Deionhehkon, and Sharenhowanen, of 
the second group; and Dehennakarine, 
Rastawenserontha, and Shoskoharowa- 
nen, of the third group. The first two 
groups or clans formed an intratribal 
phratry, while the last, or Bear clan 
group, was the other phratry. The people 
at all times assembled by phratries, and 
each phratry occupied a side of the coun¬ 
cil fire opposite that occupied by the other 
phratry. The second title in the forego¬ 
ing list has been Anglicized into Hiawatha 
(q. v.).. 

From the Jesuit Relation for 1660 it is 
learned that theMohawk, during a period 
of 60 years, had been many times both at 
the top and the bottom of the ladder 
of success; that, being insolent and war¬ 
like, they had attacked the Abnaki and 
their congeners at the e. , the Conestoga 
at the s., the Hurons at the w. and n., 
and the Algonquian tribes at the n. ; that 
at the close of the 16th century the Al- 
gonkin had so reduced them that there 
appeared to be none left, but that the re¬ 
mainder increased so rapidly that in a 
few years they in turn had overthrown 
the Algonkin. This success did not last 
long. The Conestoga waged war against 
them so vigorously for 10 years that for 
the second time the Mohawk w T ere over¬ 
thrown so completely that they appeared 
to be extinct. About this time (?1614) 
the Dutch arrived in their country, and, 
being attracted by their beaver skins, 
they furnished the Mohawk and their 
congeners with firearms, in order that 
the pelts might be obtained in greater 
abundance. The purpose of the Dutch 
was admirably served, but the possession 
of firearms by the Mohawk and their con¬ 
federates rendered it easy for them to 
conquer their adversaries, whom they 
routed and filled with terror not alone 
by the deadly effect but even by the 
mere sound of these weapons, which 
hitherto had been unknown. Thence¬ 
forth the Mohawk and their confederates 
became formidable adversaries and were 
victorious most everywhere, so that by 
1660 the conquests of the Iroquois con¬ 
federates, although they were not numer¬ 
ous, extended over nearly 500 leagues of 
territory. The Mohawk at that time num¬ 
bered not more than 500 warriors and 
dwelt in 4 or 5 wretched villages. 

The accounts of Mohawk migrations 
previous to the historical period are 


largely conjectural. Some writers do not 
clearly differentiate between the Mohawk 
and the Huron tribes at the n. and w. 
and from their own confederates as a 
whole. Besides fragmentary and un¬ 
trustworthy traditions little that is defi¬ 
nite is known regarding the migratory 
movements of the Mohawk. 

In 1603, Champlain, while atTadousac, 
heard of the Mohawk and their country. 
On July 30, 1609, he encountered on the 
lake to which he gave his own name a 
party of nearly 200 Iroquois warriors, 
under 3 chiefs. * In a skirmish in which 
he shot two of the chiefs dead and 
wounded the third, he defeated this 
party, which was most probably largely 
Mohawk. Dismayed by the firearms of 
the Frenchman, whom they now met for 
the first time, the Indians fled. The 
Iroquois of this party wore arrow-proof 
armor and had both stone and iron 
hatchets, the latter having been obtained 
in trade. The fact that in Capt. Hen¬ 
drickson’s report to the States General, 
Aug. 18, 1616, he says that he had 
“ bought from the inhabitants, the Min- 
quaes [Conestoga], 3 persons, being peo¬ 
ple belonging to this company,” who 
were “employed in the service of the 
Mohawks and Machicans,” giving, he 
says, for them, in exchange, “kettles, 
beads, and merchandise,” shows how 
extensively the inland trade was carried 
on between the Dutch and the Mohawk. 
The latter were at war with the Mohe¬ 
gan and other New England tribes with 
only intermittent periods of peace. In 
1623 a Mohegan fort stood opposite Cas¬ 
tle id. in the Hudson and was “built 
against their enemies, the Maquaes, a 
powerful people.” In 1626 the Dutch 
commander of Ft Orange (Albany), and 
6 of his men, joined the Mohegan in an 
expedition to invade the Mohawk coun¬ 
try. They were met a league from the 
fort by a party of Mohawk armed only 
with bows and arrows, and were defeated, 
the Dutch commander and 3 of his men 
being killed, and of whom one, probably 
the commander, was cooked and eaten 
by the Mohawk. This intermittent war¬ 
fare continued until the Mohegan were 
finally forced to withdraw from the upper 
waters of the Hudson. They did not 
however relinquish their territorial rights 
to their native adversaries, and so in 1630 
they began to sell their lands to the 
Dutch. The deed to the Manor of Rens- 
salaerwyck, which extended w. of the 
river two days’ journey, and was mainly 
on the e. side of the river, was dated in 
the year named. In 1637 Kilian Van 
Renssalaer bought more land on the e. 
side. Subsequently the Mohegan became 
the. friends and allies of the Mohawk, 
their former adversaries. 


BULL. 36] 


MOHAWK 


923 


In 1641 Ahatsistari, a noted Huron 
chief, with only 50 companions, attacked 
and defeated 300 Iroquois, largely Mo¬ 
hawk, taking some prisoners. In the pre¬ 
ceding summer he had attacked on L. 
Ontario a number of large canoes manned 
by Iroquois, probably chiefly Mohawk, 
and defeated them, after sinking several 
canoes and killing a number of their crews. 
In 1642, 11 Huron canoes were attacked 
on Ottawa r. by Mohawk and Oneida 
warriors about 100 m. above Montreal. 
In the same year the Mohawk captured 
Father Isaac Jogues, two French com¬ 
panions, and some Huron allies. They 
took the Frenchmen to their villages, 
where they caused them to undergo the 
most cruel tortures. Jogues, by the aid of 
the Dutch, escaped in the following year; 
but in 1646 he went to the Mohawk to 
attempt to convert them and to confirm 
the peace which had been made with them. 
On May 16, 1646, Father Jogues went to 
the Mohawk as an envoy and returned to 
Three Rivers in July in good health. In 
September he again started for the Mo¬ 
hawk country to establish a mission there; 
but, owing to the prevalence of an epidem¬ 
ic among the Mohawk, and to the failure 
of their crops, they accused Father Jogues 
of “having concealed certain charms in 
a small coffer, which he had left with his 
host as a pledge of his return,” which 
caused them thus to be afflicted. So 
upon his arrival in their village for the 
third time, he and his companion, a 
young Frenchman, were seized, stripped, 
and threatened with death. Father 
Jogues had been adopted by the Wolf 
clan of the Mohawk, hence this clan, 
with that of the Turtle, which with the 
Wolf formed a phratry or brotherhood, 
tried to save the lives of the Frenchmen. 
But the Bear clan, which formed a phra¬ 
try by itself, and being only cousins to 
the others, of one of which Father Jogues 
was a member, had determined on his 
death as a sorcerer. On Oct. 17, 1646, 
the unfortunates were told that they 
would be killed, but not burned, the 
next day. On the evening of the 18th 
Father Jogues was invited to a supper in 
a Bear lodge. Having accepted the in¬ 
vitation, he went there, and while enter¬ 
ing the lodge a man concealed behind 
the door struck him down with an ax. 
He was beheaded, his head elevated on the 
palisade, and his body thrown into the 
river. The next morning Jogues’ com¬ 
panion suffered a similar fate. Father 
Jogues left an account of a Mohawk 
sacrifice to the god Aireskoi (i. e., Are- 
gwl n s'gwa\ ‘ the Master or God of War’). 
While speaking of the cruelties exercised 
by the Mohawk toward their prisoners, 
and specifically toward 3 women, he said: 
“One of them (a thing not hitherto done) 


was burned all over her body, and after¬ 
wards thrown into a huge pyre.” And 
that “at every burn which they caused, 
by applying lighted torches to her body, 
an old man, in a loud voice, exclaimed, 
‘Daimon, Aireskoi, we offer thee this 
victim, whom we burn for thee, that thou 
mayest be filled with her flesh and ren¬ 
der us ever anew victorious over our ene¬ 
mies.’ Her body was cut up, sent to the 
various villages, and devoured.” Mega- 
polensis (1644), a contemporary of Father 
Jogues, says that when the Mohawk were 
unfortunate in war they would kill, cut 
up, and roast a bear, and then make an 
offering of it to this war god with the ac¬ 
companying prayer: “Oh, great and 
mighty Aireskuoni, we know that we have 
offended against thee, inasmuch as we 
have not killed and eaten our captive 
enemies—forgive us this. We promise 
that we will kill and eat all the captives 
we shall hereafter take as certainly as we 
have killed and now eat this bear.” He 
adds: “Finally, they roast their prison¬ 
ers dead before a slow fire for some days 
and then eat them up. The common 
people eat the arms, buttocks, and trunk, 
but the chiefs eat the head and the 
heart.” 

The Jesuit Relation for 1646 says that, 
properly speaking, the French had at 
that time peace with only the Mohawk, 
who were their near neighbors and who 
gave them the most trouble, and that 
the Mohegan (Mahingans or Mahinga- 
nak), who had had firm alliances with 
the Algonkin allies of the French, were 
then already conquered by the Mohawk, 
with whom they formed a defensive 
and offensive alliance; that during this 
year some Sokoki (Assok8ekik) murdered 
some Algonkin, whereupon the latter de¬ 
termined, under a misapprehension, to 
massacre some Mohawk, who were then 
among them and the French. But, for¬ 
tunately, it was discovered from the tes¬ 
timony of two wounded persons, who 
had escaped, that the murderers spoke a 
language quite different from that of the 
Iroquois tongues, and suspicion was at 
once removed from the Mohawk, who 
then hunted freely in the immediate vi¬ 
cinity of the Algonkin n. of the St Law¬ 
rence, where these hitherto implacable 
enemies frequently met on the best of 
terms. At this time the Mohawk refused 
Sokoki ambassadors a new compact to 
wage war on the Algonkin. 

The introduction of firearms by the 
Dutch among the Mohawk, who were 
among the first of their region to procure 
them, marked an important era in their 
history, for it enabled them and the cog¬ 
nate Iroquois tribes to subjugate the Del¬ 
awares and Munsee, and thus to begin a 
career of conquest that carried their war 


924 


MOHAWK 


[B. a. e. 


parties to the Mississippi and to the shores 
of Hudson bay. The Mohawk villages 
were in the valley of Mohawk r., N. Y., 
from the vicinity of Schenectady nearly to 
Utica, and their territory extended n. to 
the St Lawrence and s. to the watershed 
of Schoharie cr. and the e. branch of the 
Susquehanna. On the e. their territories 
adjoined those of the Mahican, who held 
Hudson r. From their position on the e. 
frontier of the Iroquois confederation the 
Mohawk were among the most prominent 
of thelroquoian tribes in the early Indian 
wars and in official negotiations with the 
colonies, so that their name was fre¬ 
quently used by the tribes of New England 
and by the whites as a synonym for the 
confederation. Owing to their position 
they also suffered much more than their 
confederates in some of the Indian and 
French wars. Their 7 villages of 1644 
were reduced to 5 in 1677. At the begin¬ 
ning of the Revolution the Mohawk took 
the side of the British, and at its conclu¬ 
sion the larger portion of them, under 
Brant and Johnson, removed to Canada, 
where they have since resided on lands 
granted to them by the British govern¬ 
ment. In 1777 the Oneida expelled the 
remainder of the tribe and burned their 
villages. 

In 1650 the Mohawk had an estimated 
population of 5,000, which was probably 
more than their actual number; for 10 
years later they were estimated at only 
2,500. Thenceforward they underwent 
a rapid decline, caused by their wars 
with the Mahican, Conestoga, and other 
tribes, and with the French, and also by 
the removal of a large part of the tribe to 
Caughnawaga and other mission villages. 
The later estimates of their population 
have been: 1,500 in 1677 (an alleged de¬ 
crease of 3,500 in 27 years), 400 in 1736 
(an alleged decrease of 1,100 in 36 years), 
500 in 1741, 800 in 1765, 500 in 1778, 1,500 
in 1783, and about 1,200 in 1851. These 
estimates are evidently little better than 
vague guesses. In 1884 they were on 
three reservations in Ontario: 965 at the 
Bay of Quinte near the e. end of L. On¬ 
tario, the settlement at Gibson, and the 
reserve of the Six Nations on Grand r. 
Besides these there are a few individuals 
scattered among the different Iroquois 
tribes in the United States. In 1906 the 
Bay of Quinte settlement contained 1,320; 
there were 140 (including ‘ ‘ Algonquins ’ ’) 
at Watha, the former Gibson band which 
was removed earlier from Oka; and the 
Six Nations included an indeterminate 
number. 

The Mohawk participated in the follow¬ 
ing treaties with the United States: Ft 
Stanwix, N. Y., Oct. 22, 1784, being a 
treaty of peace between the United States 
and the Six Nations and defining their 


boundaries; supplemented by treaty of 
Ft Harmar, O., Jan. 9, 1789. Konon- 
daigua (Canandaigua), N. Y., Nov. 11, 
1794, establishing peace relations with the 
Six Nations and agreeing to certain reser¬ 
vations and boundaries. Albany, N. Y., 
Mar. 29,1797, by which the United States 
sanctioned the cession by the Mohawk to 
New York of all their lands therein. 

The following w T ere Mohaw T k villages: 
Canajoharie, Canastigaone, Canienga, 
Caughnawaga, Chuchtononeda, Kanag- 
aro Kowogoconnughariegugharie, Nowa- 
daga, Ohnowalagantles, Ohsarakas, One- 
kagoncka, Onoalagona, Osguage, Osquake, 
Saratoga, Schaunactada (Schenectady), 
Schoharie, Teatontaloga, and Tewanon- 
dadon. (j. n. b. h.) 

Agnechronons. —Jes. Rel. for 1652, 35, 1858. Ag- 
nee.— Jes. Rel. for 1642, 83, 1858. Agneehronon. — 
Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858. Agneronons. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1643, 63, 1858. Agmc. —Homann Heirs’ 
map, 1756 (misprint). Agniehronnons. —Jes. 
Rel. for 1664, 34, 1858. Agniehroron— Jes. Rel. 
for 1637, 119, 1858. Agnierhonon.— Jes. Rel. for 

1639, 70, 1858. Agnieronnons. —Jes. Rel. for 1656, 
2, 1858. Agmeronons.— Dollier and Gallin£e 

(1669) in Margry, D6c., I, 141, 1875. Agnierrho- 
nons. —Jes. Rel. for 1635,34, 1858. Agniers.— Hen¬ 
nepin, New Discov.,101,1698. Agniez.— Frontenac 
(1673) in Margry, D£c., I, 213, 1875. Agnizez.— 
Vaillant (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist,, hi, 527, 
1853. Aguierhonon.— Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., 
iv, 1866 (Huron name) Amohak— Gatschet, 
Penobscot MB., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobscot name). 
A'muhak.— Gatschet, Caughnawaga MS., B. A. E., 
1882 (Caughnawaga name). Anaguas.— Le Beau, 
Avantures, ii, 2, 1738. Amaka-haka.— Gatschet, 
Caughnawaga MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Caughnawaga 
name). Anie.— Bacqueville de Ja Potherie, Hist, 
de l’Am. Sept., hi, 27,1753. Aniez — Del'Isle, map 
(1718), quoted in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 577. 1855. 
Anniegue.— Jes. Rel. for 1665, 21, 1858. Anmehron- 
nons.— Jes. Rel. for 1653, 5, 1858. Anniengehron- 
nons. —Jes. Rel. for 1657, 53, 1858. Annienhron- 
nons —Ibid.,36. Annieronnons.— Ibid., 15. Annie- 
ronons. —Jes. Rel. for 1656, 11, 1858. Anmerron- 
nons. —Jes. Rel. for 1646, 3, 1858. Annies —Tracy 
(1667) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 152, 1853. An- 
niez.— Frontenac (1673)in Margry, D6c., 1 ,203,1875. 
Aquieeronons. —Jes. Rel. for 1641, 37, 1858. Aqui- 
ers.— Charlevoix, Jour., I, 270, 1761 (misprint). 
Auniers.— Chauvignerie (1736), quoted by School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 555,1853. Aunies — McKen- 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, hi, 80,1854. Canaon- 
euska. —Montreal conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., x, 500, 1858. Caniengas.— Hale quoted in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 42, 1885. Canniungaes. — 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 262, note, 1855. Canun- 
gas. —Mallery in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 352,1877. 
Cauneeyenkees.— Edwards (1751) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 143, 1809. Cayingahaugas. — 
Macauley, N. Y., II, 174, 1829. Conninggahaugh- 
gaugh.— Ibid., 185. Da-ga-e-6-ga.— Morgan, League 
Iroq., 97,1851 (name used in the Iroquois coun¬ 
cils). Gagnieguez. —Hennepin, New Discov., 92, 
1698. Ganeagaonhoh.— Mallery in Proc. A. A. A. 
S., xxvi, 352, 1877. Ga-ne-a'-ga-o-no'. — Morgan, 
League Iroq., 523, 1851 (Seneca name). Ga-ne- 
ga-ha'-ga. —Ibid.,523(Mohawkform). Ganieguero- 
nons. —Courcelles (1670) in Margry, D6c., i, 
178, 1875. Gani-inge-haga. —Pyrlaeus (ea. 1750) 
quoted by Gatschet in Am. Antiq., iv, 75, 
1882. Ganingehage.— Barclay (1769) quoted by 
Shea, Cath. Miss., 208,1855. Ganniag8ari.— Bruyas 
quoted in Hist. Mag., II, 153,1858. Ganniagwari. — 
Shea, note in Charlevoix, New Fr., ii, 145, 1872. 
Ganniegehaga.— Bruyas quoted by Shea, Cath. 
Miss., 208, 1855. Ganniegeronon. —Ibid. Gannie- 
gez. —Hennepin,NewDiscov.,28,1698. Ganniegue. — 
Shea, Cath. Miss.,258,1855. Ganniekez. —Hennepin 
(1683) quoted by Le Beau, Avantures, ii, 2, 1738. 
Ganningehage.— Barclay (1769) quoted in Hist. 



BULL. 30] 


MOHAWK 


925 


Mag., II, 153,1858. Guagenigronnons. —Doc. of 1706 
in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 786, 1855. Hatinieye- 
runu.— Gatschet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E., 1883 
(Tuscarora name). Ignerhonons. —Champlain, 

CEuv., 111,220,1870. Ignierhonons. —Sagard (1636), 
Can., I, 170, 1866. Iroquois d’enbas.— Jes. Rel. for 
1656, 7,1858 (French name). Iroquois inferieurs.— 
Jes. Rel. for 1656, 2,1858. Kajingahaga. —Megapo- 
lensis (1644) quoted in Hist. Mag., II, 153, 1858. 
Kanawa. —Gatschet, Shawnee MS,, B. A. E., 1879 
(Shawneename,from Kanaw&gi). Kanieke-haka. 
Gatschet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E. (‘flint tribe’: 
Tuscarora name). Kanienge-ono n .— Gatschet, Sen- 
eca MS.. B. A. E. (Seneca name). Kayingehaga.— 
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 35, 1872. Kwe- 
dech'.— Rand, Micmac Diet., 172, J888, (Micmac 
name). Maaquas. —Jogues (1643) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., xill, 577, 1881. Mackwaes. —De Laet 
(1625) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., I, 299, 
1841. Mackwasii. —De Laet, Nov. Orb., 73, 1633. 
Mackwes. —De Laet (1633) quoted in Jones, 
Ind. Bull., 6, 1867. Macqs. —Maryland treaty 
(1682) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ill, 323, 1853. 
Macquaas. —Doc. of 1660, ibid., xm, 183,1881. Mac- 
quaaus.— Penhallow(1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc.Coll., 
I, 41, 1824 Macquas.— Rawson (1678) in N. Y. 

Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 521, 1881. Macquaus.— Pen- 
hallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 41. 
1824. Macques. —Rawson (1678) in N.Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xm,522,1881. Macquess. —Maryland treaty 
(1682), ibid., Ill, 326, 1853. Macquis. —Ibid., 325. 
Macquiss — Ibid , 321. Maechibaeys. —Michaelius 
(1628), ibid., II, 769, 1858. Mahacks. — Schuyler 
(1699), ibid., IV, 563, 1864. Mahacqs. —Meadows 
(1698), ibid., 395. Mahakas. —Megapolensis 
(1644) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll , 2d s., iii, pt. 1, 
153, 1857. Mahakes. —Andros (1680) in Me. Hist. 
Soc.Coll., V, 42, 1857. Mahakinbaas. —Hazard in 
Am. State Pap., I, 520, 1792. Mahakinbas. —Mega¬ 
polensis (1644) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., in, 
pt. 1, 153, 1857. Mahakobaas. —Ibid. Mahaks. — 
Wharton (1673) quoted in Hist. Mag., 2d s., I, 300, 
1867. Mahakuaas.— Hist. Mag . 1st s., II, 153, 1858. 
Mahakuase.— Megapolensis (1644) quoted inN. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., I, 496, 1856. Mahakuasse. —Mega¬ 
polensis (1644) quoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 
3, 330,1816. Mahakwa. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 208, 
1855 Mahaukes. —Doc. of 1666 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., in, 118, 1853. Mahogs.— Church (1716) 
quoted by Drake, Ind. Wars, 115,1825. Makquas. — 
Denonville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., m, 
518, 1853. Makwaes.— Wassenaar (1632) quoted 
by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R , 58,1872. Ma- 
qaise.— Bleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IV, 919, 1854. Maqas.— Doc. of 1676, ibid., xm, 
500, 1881. Maquaas. —Map of 1614, ibid., I, 1856. 
Maquaes. — Doc. of 1651, ibid., xiii,28, 1881. Ma- 
quaese. —Bellomont (1698), ibid., IV, 347, 1854. 
Maquais. —Nicolls (1616), ibid., Ill, 117, 1853. 
Maquaise. —Bleeker (1701), ibid., IV, 920, 1854. 
Maquas.— De Laet (1625) quoted by Ruttenber, 
Tribes Hudson R., 34, 1872 Maquasas.— Doc. of 
1655 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xii, 98, 1877. Ma- 
quase.— Doc. of 1678, ibid., XIII, 528, 1881. Ma- 
quases. —Lovelace (1669), ibid., xm, 439. 1881. 
Maquash— Romer (1700), ibid., IV, 800, 1854. Ma- 
quass.— Talcott (1678), ibid., xm, 517, 1881. Ma- 
quasse. —Doc. of 1687, ibid., Ill, 432, 1853. Ma- 
quees.— Bradstreet (1680) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
3d s., Viil, 334, 1843. Maques.— Clobery (1633) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 78, 1856. Maquese.— Liv- 
ingston (1710), ibid., V, 227. 1855. Maqueses.— 
Gardner (1662), ibid., xm, 227, 1881. Maquess.— 
Harmetsen (1687),ibid. ,iii,437, 1853. Maquesyes.— 
Lovelace (1669), ibid., xm, 439, 1881. Maquez — 
Graham (1698), ibid. ,IV, 430,1854. Maquis.— Davis 
(ca. 1691) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 1 ,108,1825. 
Maquoas. — Doc. of 1697 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 
75, 1855. Maquois. — Jes. Rel. for 1647, 34, 1858 
(Dutch form). Mauguawogs. —Mallery in Proc. 
A. A. A. S., XXVI, 352, 1877. Mauhauks— Doc. of 
1666in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Ill, 118,1853. Mauk- 
quogges. —Warner (1644) in R. I. Col. Rec., I. 140, 
1856. Mauquaoys.— Eliot (1680) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 1st s., m, 180, 1794. Mauquas.— Salis¬ 
bury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 519, 
1881. Mauquauogs. —Williams (ca. 1638) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., VI, 238,1863. Mauquaw.— 
Williams (1648), ibid., 3d s., IX, 272, 1846. Mau- 


quawogs. —Williams (1637), ibid., 4th s., vi, 201, 
1863. Mauquawos. —Williams(1650),ibid.,284. Mau- 
ques.— And ros (1675) in N. Y. Doc. Col. H ist., x 11 ,520, 
1877. Mawhakes.— Rec. of 1644 quoted by Drake, 
Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 90, 1848. Mawhauogs. —Williams 
(1637) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll-., 4th s., vi, 207,1863. 
Mawhawkes.— Haynes (1648) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., vi, 358, 1863. Mawques.— Hubbard 
(1680), ibid., 2ds.,vi,629,1815. Meguak.— Gatschet, 
Penobscot MS., 1887 (Penobscot name). Megual. — 
Ibid. Megue. —Ibid. Megwe. —Ibid. Mequa. —Ve- 
tromile in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 215, 1859 (Ab- 
naki name). Moacks.— Vaillant (1688) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., in, 528,1853. Moak— Doc. of 1746, 
ibid., x, 54,1858. Moawk. —Doc. of 1758, ibid., 679. 
Mockways.— Wadsworth (1694) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., I, 102, 1852. Mocquages. —Sanford, 
1657), ibid., 2ds., vil, 81, 1818. Mocquayes. —San- 
ord (1657) in R. I. Col. Rec., I, 362, 1856. Mo- 
haakx — Clarkson (1694) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
IV, 93, 1854. Mohacks. —Colve (1673), ibid., xm, 
478,1881. Mohacqs. —Meadows (1698), ibid., iv, 
393, 1854. Mohacques.— Doc. of 1698, ibid., 337. 
Mohacs —Miller (1696), ibid., 183. Mohaes. —Pou- 
chot, map (1758), ibid., x, 694, 1858. Mohaggs. — 
Livingston (1691), ibid., ill, 781, 1863. Mohags.— 
Livingstone (1702), ibid., IV, 988,1854. Mohaks.— 
Wessells (1692), ibid., ill, 817, 1853. Mohaq c .— 
Doc. of 1695, ibid., iv, 120, 1854. Mohaqs. —Wes¬ 
sells (1693), ibid., 59. Mohaques. —Winthrop 

(1666), ibid., hi, 137, 1854. Mohaucks. —Mason 
(1684) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., II, 200, 1827. Mo- 
haugs —Quanapaug (1675) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll , 1st s., Vi, 206,1800. Mohaukes. —Doc. of 1666 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Ill, 118,1853. Mohauks. — 
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ill, 
154,1833. Mohawcks.— Owaneco’srep. (1700)inN. 
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV, 614,1854. Mohawkes. —Doc. 
ca. 1642 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3ds.,m, 162,1833. 
Mohawks. —Hendricksen (1616) in N. Y. Doc. Col, 
Hist., I, 14, 1856. Mohawques. —Schuyler (1691), 
ibid., ill, 801, 1853. Mohaws.— Conf. of 1774 in 
Rupp, W. Penn., app., 223, 1846. Mohegs.— Don- 
gan (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 521, 1853. 
Mohoakk.— Schnectady treaty (1672), ibid., xm, 
464, 1881. Mohoakx. —Ibid., 465. Mohocks. —Vin¬ 
cent (1638) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 29, 
1837. Mohocs.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 
1816. Mohoges. —Schuyler (1694) in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., IV, 82, 1854. Mohoggs.— Livingston 
(1711), ibid., V,272,1855. Mohogs. —Hogkins(1685) 
in N, H. Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 221, 1824. Mohokes. — 
Gardner (1662) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 226, 
1881. Mohoks. —Ibid., 225. Mohoukes. —Harmet¬ 
sen (1687), ibid., Ill, 436,1853. Mohowaugsuck. — 
Williams (1643) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., lsts., in, 
209,1794. Mohowawogs. —Williams (ca. 1638), ibid., 
4th s , VI, 239, 1863. Mohowks. —Burnet (1720) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col, Hist., v, 578, 1855. Mohox. — 
Vaillant (1688), ibid., HI, 527, 1853. Mohucks. — 
Doc. Of 1676 quoted by Drake, Ind. Chron., 88, 1836. 
Mokaus. —Alcedo, Die. Geog., iv, 604, 1788. Mo- 
kawkes .—Doc. ca. 1684 i n N. H. H ist. Soc. Co 11., i, 220, 
1824. Moohags.— Church (1716) quoted by Drake, 
Ind. Wars, 50, 1825. Moquaes. —Wessells (1698) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 372, 1854. Moquakues. — 
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s.. 
Ill, 154, 1833. Moquas.— Andros (1678) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., in, 271, 1853. Moquase. —Talcott 
(1678), ibid., xm, 517, 1881. Moquauks.— Win¬ 
throp (1645) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vi, 
460, 1815. Moquawes. —Hubbard (1680), ibid., V, 
33. Moqui.— Doc. of 1690, ibid., 3d s., i, 210,1825. 
Mosquaugsett. —Baily (1669) in R. I. Col. Rec., 11, 
274,1857. Mouhaks.— Gardiner (1652) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., 4th s., vil, 62, 1865. Mowacks.— Treaty 
of 1644, ibid., Ill, 430, 1856. Mowakes.— Winthrop 
(1637), ibid., 358. Mowaks. —Bradford (ca. 1650), 
ibid., 431. Mowhakes. —Ibid., 861. Mowhaks. — 
Bradford (1640), ibid., vi, 159,1863. Mowhakues.— 
Gardener (1660), ibid., 3d s., in, 152, 1833. Mow- 
haugs.— Williams (1637), ibid., IX, 301, 1846. 
Mowhauks. —Mason (1643), ibid., 4th s., vn, 411, 
1865. Mowhauogs. —Williams (1637), ibid., 3d s., 
ix, 300, 1846. Mowhawkes. —Haynes (1643),ibid., 
I, 230, 1825. Mowhawks. —Clinton ^1743) in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 250, 1855. Mowhoake.— Pat¬ 
rick (1637) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vn, 
323, 1865. Mowhoks,—Gardner (1662) in N. Y. 



926 


MOHAWK-MOHEGAN 


[b. a. e. 


Doc. Col. Hist., XIII, 225, 1881. Mowquakes — 
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 
in, 152, 1833. Oyanders— Shea, Cath. Miss., 214, 
1855 (probably a Dutch form of Agniers). Sank- 
hicani.— Heckewelder quoted by Gallatin in 
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., n, 46, 1836 (Delaware 
name: ‘flint users’). Teakawreahogeh. —Mac- 
auley, N. Y., II, 174, 1829. Tehawrehogeh.— Ibid., 
185. Tehur-lehogugh. —Ibid. Tekau-terigtego-nes. 
—Ibid., 174. Tgarihoge.— Pyrlseus MS. (ca. 1750) 
quoted in Am. Antiq., IV, 75, 1882. Yanieye- 
rono.— Gatschet, Wyandot MS., B. A. E., 1881 
(Huron name: ‘bearpeople’). 

Mohawk. One of the Lakmiut bands 
of the Kalapooian stock, on Mohawk r., 
an e. tributary of the Willamette, just n. 
of Eugene City, Oreg.—U. S. Ind. Treat. 
(1855), 19,1873; Sanders in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1863, 88, 1864. 

Mohegan (from mdingan , ‘wolf.’— 
Trumbull). An Algonquian tribe whose 
chief seat appears originally to have been 
on Thames r., Conn., in the n. part of 
New London co. They claimed as their 

roper country all the territory watered 

y the Thames and its branches n. to 
within 8 or 10 m. of the Massachusetts 
line, and by conquest a considerable 
area extending n. and e. into Massachu¬ 
setts and Rhode Island, occupied by the 
Wabaquasset and Nipmuc. On the w. 
their dominion extended along the coast 
to East r., near Guilford, Conn. After 
the destruction of the Pequot in 1637 
the Mohegan laid claim to their country 
and that of the western Nehantic in the 
s. part of New London co. The tribes 
w. of them on Connecticut r., whom they 
sometimes claimed as subjects, were gen¬ 
erally hostile to them, as were also the 
Narraganset on their e. border. 

The Mohegan seem to have been the 
eastern branch of that group of closely 
connected tribes that spread from the vi¬ 
cinity of Narragansett bay to the farther 
side of the Hudson (see Mahican ), but 
since known to the whites the eastern and 
western bodies have had no political con¬ 
nection. At the first settlement of New 
England the Mohegan and Pequot formed 
but one tribe, under the rule of Sassacus, 
afterward known as the Pequot chief. 
Uncas, a subordinate chief connected by 
marriage with the family of Sassacus, re¬ 
belled against him and assumed a distinct 
authority as the leader of a small band on 
the Thames, near Norwich, who were 
afterward known in history as Mohegan. 
On the fall of Sassacus in 1637 the greater 
part of the survivors of his tribe fell 
under the dominion of the Mohegan 
chief, who thus obtained control of the 
territory of the two tribes with all their 
tributary bands. As the English favored 
his pretensions he also set up a claim 
to extensive adjoining territories in the 
possession of rival chiefs. He strength¬ 
ened his position by an alliance with the 
English against all other tribes, and after 
the destruction of the Indian power in s. 


New England, by the death of King 
Philip in 1676, the Mohegan were the 
only important tribe remaining s. of the 
Abnaki. As the white settlements ex¬ 
tended the Mohegan sold most of their 
lands and confined themselves to a res¬ 
ervation on Thames r., in New London 
co., Conn. Their village, also called Mo¬ 
hegan, was on the site of the present 
town of that name on the vv. bank of the 
river. Their ancient village seems to 
have been farther up, about the mouth 
of the Yantic. Besides the village at 
Mohegan, the villages of Groton and 
Stonington, occupied mainly by the rem¬ 
nant of the Pequot, were considered to 
belong to the Mohegan. They rapidly 
dwindled away when surrounded by the 
whites. Many joined the Scaticook, but 
in 1788 a still larger number, under the 
leadership of Occom, joined the Brother- 
ton Indians in New York, where they 
formed the majority of the new settle¬ 
ment. The rest^f the tribe continue to 
reside in the vicinity of Mohegan or Nor¬ 
wich, Conn., but are now reduced to 
about 100 individuals of mixed blood, 
only one of whom, an old woman, re¬ 
tained the language in 1904. They still 
keep up a September festival, which ap¬ 
pears to be a survival of the Green Corn 
dance of the Eastern tribes. For inter¬ 
esting notes on this remnant, see Prince 
and Speck in Am. Anthrop., 1903 and 
1904. 

In 1643 the Mohegan were estimated to 
number from 2,000 to 2,500, but this in¬ 
cluded the Pequot living with them, and 
probably other subordinate tribes. In 
1705 they numbered 750, and in 1774 
were reported at 206. Soon after they 
lost a considerable number by removal 
to New York, and in 1804 only 84 were 
left, who were reduced to 69 five years 
later. They were reported to number 
300 in 1825, and about 350 in 1832, but 
the increased numbers are probably due 
to the enumeration of negroes and mixed- 
bloods living with them, together with 
recruits from the Narraganset and others 
in the vicinity. The Mohegan villages 
were Groton, Mohegan, Showtucket, and 
Wabaquasset. For further information 
and synonyms, see Mahican. (j. m.) 
Manheken.— Brewster (1651) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4ths.,'VII, 71,1865. Manhigan-euck. — Tooker, 
Algonq. Ser., v, 23, 1901 (English form of tribal 
name). Mawchiggin.— Johnson (1654) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vil, 47, 1818. Mawhick- 
on.— Easton treaty (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
VII, 294, 1856. Mawhiggins.— Johnson (1654) in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., IV, 28,1816. Mogekin.— 
Hopkins (1646), ibid., 4th s., vi, 334,1863. Mogian- 
eucks. —Williams (1637), ibid., 210. Mohagin.— 
Adams (1738), ibid., i, 35,1852 (Connecticut village). 
Moheag.— Mather (ca. 1640) in Drake, Bk. Inds., 
bk. 2,86,1848. Moheagan.— Horsmanden (1744) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 256,1855. Moheaganders.— 
Trumbull, Conn., I, 350,1818. Moheages—Mason 
(ca. 1670) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2ds., vm, 146, 
1819. Moheagues. — Peters (ca. 1644) in Drake, Bk. 


BULL. 30] 


MOHEMENCHO-MOHONGO 


927 


Inds., bk. 2, 69, 1848. Moheegins.— Patrick (1637) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vii, 325,1865. Mo- 
heegs.— Wainwright (1735) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
iv, 123,1856. Moheek.— Fitch (1674) in Mass. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., lsts., i, 208,1806 (village in Connecti¬ 
cut). Moheganicks.— Pynchon (1645), ibid,, 4th s., 
VI, 374,1863. Mohegans. —Haynes (1643), ibid., 357 
(used by Hubbard in 1680 for the New York tribe). 
Mohegen.— Coddington (1640), ibid., 318 (Connec¬ 
ticut village). Moheges.— Stiles (ca. 1770), ibid., 
1st s., x', 101, 1809. Mohegin.— Leete (1659), ibid., 
4th s., vii, 543, 1865. Mohegs. —Hyde (1760) in 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2,66,1848. Moheken.— Brew¬ 
ster (1656) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vii, 76, 
1865. Mohigan.— Mass. Records (1642) in Drake, 
Bk. Inds., bk. 2,63,1848. Mohiganeucks. —Williams 
(1637) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., i, 163, 1825. 
Mohiganie.— Williams (1637), ibid., 4th s., VI, 207, 
1863. Mohigens.— Vincent (1638), ibid., 3d s., vi, 
35, 1837 (used by Harris in 1805 for the New York 
tribe). Mohiggans. —N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., 
1,72,1841. Mohiggen. —Cushman (1622) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.,iii, 122,1856 (Connecticut, 
or; may mean Monhegan id.). Mohiggeners. — 
Underhill (1638), ibid., 3d s., vi, 15,1837. Mohig- 
hens. —Vincent (1638), ibid.,39. Mohigin.— Steph¬ 
ens (1675), ibid., x, 117,1849 (Connecticutvillage). 
Mohigoners. —Higginson (1637), ibid., 4th s., VII, 
396, 1865. Mohogin.— Writer of 1676 quoted by 
Drake, Ind. Chron.,116, 1836. Monahegan. —Win- 
throp (1638) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.2,87, 
1848. Monahiganeucks. —Williams (1637) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., VI, 215, 1863. Monahiga- 
nick.— Ibid., 215 (Connecticut village). Mona- 
higgan. —Williams (1638) quoted by Trumbull, 
Ind. Names Conn., 31,1881 (Connecticut village). 
Monahigganie. —Williams (1638) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., VI, 231, 1863. Monahiggannick. —Wil¬ 
liams (1639), ibid., 260. Monahiggens. —Williams 
(1638), ibid., 3d s., I, 167, 1825. Monahiggon. — 
Williams (1637), ibid., 4th s., vi, 215, 1863. Mona- 
higon. —Williams (1638), ibid., 224. Monhagin. — 
Adams (1738), ibid., I, 35, 1852. Monheagan. — 
Mason (1648), ibid., vii, 416, 1865. Monheags. — 
Ibid., 413. Monhegans. —Williams (1670), ibid., 
1st s., 1,277,1806. Monhege. —Mason (1643), ibid., 
4th s., Vii, 411, 1865. Monhegen.— Treaty (1645), 
ibid., hi, 437,1856. Monhiggin.— Williams (1637), 
ibid., vi, 220, 1863. Monhiggons. —Williams (1675), 
ibid.,302. Monhiggs.— Bradford (ca. 1650), ibid., 
ill, 361, 1856. Monohegens.— Eliot (1650), ibid., 
3d s., IV, 139, 1834. Morahtkans. —Opdyck (1640) 
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., II, 141,1858. Morhicans. — 
Map of 1616, ibid., I, 1856. Mowheganneak. —Ma¬ 
son (1648) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vii,413, 
1865. Muhhekaneuk.— Trumbull, Ind. Names 
Conn., 31, 1881 (English form of tribal name). 
Munhegan.— Pynchon (1643) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., VI, 373, 1863. Munhicke.— Brewster 
(1636), ibid., vii, 67, 1865 (Connecticut village). 
Nanhegans. —Sanford (1657) in R. I. Col. Rec., I, 
362,1856. River Heads.— Am. Pioneer, II, 191, 1843 
(misprint, probably for “River Inds ”). River 
Indians.— See under this title. Sea-side People. — 
Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 289, 1871. Unkus 
Indians. —Salisbury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
xill, 526, 1881. Upland Indians. —Church (1716) in 
Drake Ind. Wars, 67, 1825. Vpland Indianes.— 
Brewster (1656) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., 
vii, 75,1865. 

Mohemencho. A tribe of the Monacan 
confederacy, formerly living on the upper 
waters of James r., Va. Jefferson locates 
them in Powhatan co., on the s. side of 
the river, a few miles above Richmond, 
but Strachey seems to place them higher 
up, in the mountains. (j. m.) 

Mohemenchoes.— Jefferson, Notes, 179, 1801. Mohe- 
menehoes.— Macauley, N. Y., II, 178, 1829 (mis¬ 
print). Mohemonsoes. —Boudinot, Star ill the West, 
127 1816. Mowhemcho.— Smith, Va., i, map, 1819. 
Mowhemenchouch — Pots, ibid., 196. Mowhemen- 
chuges. —Strachey (ca. 1612), Va., 102, 1849. Mo- 
whemenchughes. —Smith, op. cit., 134. Mowhem- 
incke.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Va., 131, 1849. 


Moheton. An unclassified tribe living 
in 1671 in the mountains of s. w. Virginia, 
or the adjacent part of West Virginia, on 
the upper waters of a river flowing n. w.— 
perhaps New r. They had removed a 
short time previously from the head¬ 
waters of the Roanoke, in the mountains 
farther to the e. They were friends and 
neighbors of the Tutelo, and were possi¬ 
bly a cognate tribe, 6r they may have 
been Shawnee. (j. m. ) 

Mohetan.—Batts (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
in, 197, 1853 (cf. Bushnell in Am. Anthrop., ix, 
no. 1,1907). Mohetons.—Ibid., 196. 

Mohickon John’s Town. A village, prob¬ 
ably occupied by a band of Mahican under 
a chief known as Mohickon John, for¬ 
merly on the upper waters of Mohican r., 
probably on Jerome fork, in the present 
Ashland co., Ohio. It is probably the 
Mohicken Village mentioned by Croghan 
in 1760. (j. m.) 

Mohican Johnstown.—Howe, Hist.Coll. Ohio, ii, 832, 
1896. Mohicken Village.—Croghan (1760) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 378, 1871. Mohickon 
John’s Town.—Hutchins map in Smith, Bouquet’s 
Exped., 1766. Ville de Jean.—La Tour, map, 1784 
(“Mohickon ou Ville de Jean”). 

Mohock. From the reputation of the 
Mohawk, an Iroquoian people of central 
New York and parts of Canada, their 
name was used by the colonists in the 
sense of ‘fierce fellow,’ then ‘ruffian,’ or 
‘tough’ in modern parlance. The word 
was specially applied to one of the many 
bands of ruffians who infested the streets 
of London at the beginning of the 18th 
century. As it appears in English litera¬ 
ture it is spelled Mohock. Gay, the poet 
and dramatist (1688-1732), asks— 

Who has not heard the Scowrer’s midnight fame? 
Who has not trembled at the Mohock’s name? 

(A. F. C.) 

Mohominge. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy near the falls of James r., at 
Richmond, Va., about 1610 (Strachey, 
ca. 1612, Va., 25, 1849). It is not marked 
on Capt. John Smith’s map. 

Mohongo (or Myhangah). The wife of 
Kihegashugah, an Osage chief. These 
two, with four other members of the tribe, 
sailed from New Orleans in 1827, and on 
July 27 arrived at Havre, France, under 
the care of David Delaunay, a Frenchman 
who had lived 25 years in St Louis, and 
who is said to have been a colonel in the 
service of the UnitedStates. Thelndians 
later went to Paris, and, as at Havre, were 
the objects of marked attention, being 
showered with gifts, entertained by peo¬ 
ple of prominence, and received at court 
by Charles X. The desire of Kihega¬ 
shugah to visit France was inspired by a 
journey to that country by his grand¬ 
father in the time of Louis XIV. Kihe¬ 
gashugah and two others of the party 
died of smallpox on shipboard while re¬ 
turning to America. It is said that the 
expense of their return was borne by La- 



928 


MOHONK INDIAN CONFERENCES 


[B. a. e. 


fayette. Landing at Norfolk, Ya., the sur¬ 
vivors of the party proceeded to Wash¬ 
ington, where the accompanying portrait 
of Mohongo, from Kenney and Hall, was 
painted. See Six Indiens rouges de la 
tribu Osages (with portraits), 1827; His- 
toire de la tribu Osages, par P. V., 1827; 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i, 29, 
1858; Fletcher in Am. Anthrop., n, 395, 
1900. 



MOHONGO (MCKENNEY AND Hall) 


Mohonk Indian Conferences. A series of 
annual meetings of friends of the Indians 
intended to facilitate intelligent discus¬ 
sion and conscientious agitation for desir¬ 
able reforms. In these conferences a 
novel and effective way of forming and 
disseminating sound public opinion has 
been devised and for a score of years suc¬ 
cessfully employed, and through their in¬ 
strumentality public speakers and those 
who write for the press have been kept 
in touch with the experts who know the 
facts. The Mohonk conferences, in their 
inception and their maintenance, are the 
idea and the work of Albert K. Smiley, 
member of the U. S. Board of Indian 
Commissioners, formerly professor of nat¬ 
ural science at Haverford College, later 
in charge of the Friends’ Boarding School 
at Providence, R. I. Having purchased 
the picturesque hotel overlooking beau¬ 
tiful L. Mohonk, in the Catskill range, 
w. of lower Hudson r., N. Y., Mr Smiley 
made it a resort for people of education", 
high principle, and philanthropic inter¬ 
ests. Led by the wish to promote reform 
in the management of Indian affairs, he 
conceived the idea of inviting each year, 


as his personal guests for the greater part 
of a week in October, the people who 
knew most about Indian life, education, 
and mission work, and the relations of 
the Government to the Indians. Besides 
these experts in Indian affairs, were in¬ 
vited from 100 to 250 other people, lead¬ 
ers in shaping public opinion, such as ed¬ 
itors of the secular and religious press, 
writers for reviews, clergymen of all de¬ 
nominations, presidents of universities 
and colleges, leading men and women 
teaching in public schools, lawyers and 
judges, Senators and Representatives in 
Congress, members of the Cabinet and 
heads of Departments, expert ethnolo¬ 
gists, and, preeminently, such workers 
from the field as Indian agents of charac¬ 
ter and intelligence, teachers of Indian 
schools, army officers with a personal 
knowledge of Indians, and philanthropic 
people who had studied the Indians on 
the reservations. These meetings Mr 
Smiley, as a member of the Board of 
Indian Commissioners, called “Confer¬ 
ences with the Board,” and until 1902 a 
member of the Board presided—Gen. 
Clinton B. Fisk, from 1883 until his death 
in 1890; Dr Merrill E. Gates, former pres¬ 
ident of Amherst College, chairman (now 
secretary) of the Board, from 1890 to 
1902; in 1903, Hon. John D. Long, ex- 
Secretary of the Navy, and in 1904, Hon. 
Charles J. Bonaparte, present Secretary 
of the Navy. The proceedings of the 
conference for the first 20 years were 
printed as an appendix in the Annual 
Reports of the Board of Indian Commis¬ 
sioners. 

During the four days of the meeting, in 
the mornings a three or four hours’ ses¬ 
sion and in the evenings two to three 
hours have been given to addresses, pa¬ 
pers, reports, and the freest discussion, in 
which the widest differences of opinion 
have been welcomed and carefully con¬ 
sidered and discussed. Sympathetic at¬ 
tention to views the most divergent has 
resulted in such conservatively sound ut¬ 
terances in the annual Mohonk platform 
as have generally commanded the support 
of the great body of the best friends of the 
Indians. In the afternoon, in drives and 
walks about the lake and through the 
forest, congenial groups of interested 
friends often continued the discussions of 
the morning sessions, shaped resolutions, 
and devised plans for aiding reform. 

At its first meeting in 1883 the con¬ 
ference reported in favor of larger appro¬ 
priations for Indian education and more 
school buildings; the extension of laws 
relating to crime, marriage, and inheri¬ 
tance so as to cover Indians on reserva¬ 
tions then “lawless”; more of religious 
education for Indians; the gradual with¬ 
drawal of rations from the able-bodied 




BULL. 30] 


MOHOTLATH 


MOKASKEL 


929 


Indians because rations pauperized them; 
the inexpediency of leasing Indian graz¬ 
ing lands, and the need of greater care 
in selecting men of character as Indian 
agents. Still more progressive policies 
have been advocated in subsequent years. 
The conference early declared for land in 
severalty, with inalienable homesteads 
for Indian families; for educating Indians 
industrially as well as intellectually for 
citizenship, to be conferred as rapidly as 
practicable; and for uniform insistance 
upon monogamy, the sacredness of mar¬ 
riage, and the preservation at each 
agency of family records of marriages 
and relationships. The abolition of the 
system of appointing Indian agents as a 
reward for partisan service with little 
regard to fitness, was urgently advocated. 
The advantages of the “outing system,” 
by which Indian children of school age 
were placed in carefully chosen homes of 
white people, to attend school with white 
children, and learn to work on white 
men’s farms, were discussed and demon¬ 
strated. The breaking up of the tribal 
system in Indian Territory was advocated 
several years before the Commission to 
the Five Civilized Tribes (q. v.) was ap¬ 
pointed ; and the conference has advocated 
the division of the great tribal trust funds 
into individual holdings, each Indian to 
have control of his own share of that 
money as soon as he shows himself able 
to begin to use it wisely. The develop¬ 
ment of native Indian industries, wher¬ 
ever practicable, has been intelligently 
favored. Sympathetic appreciation of all 
that is fine, artistically suggestive, and 
worthy of development in the nature, in¬ 
stitutions, and arts of the Indian, has 
been marked and constant, (m. e. g.) 

Mohotlath {Md-hotVath ). A sept of the 
Opitchesaht, a Nootka tribe.—Boas in 
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 32, 1890. 

Moicaqui. A former rancheria, proba¬ 
bly of the Nevome, in Sonora, Mexico, 
visited by Father Kino in 1694.—Doc. 
Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 253, 1856. 

Moingwena. The name (the etymology 
of which is doubtful) of a small tribe of 
the Illinois confederacy, closely affiliated 
with the Peoria. The name was applied 
also to the village in which they resided. 
The first recorded notice of the tribe is by 
Marquette in the account of his descent 
of the Mississippi with Joliet in 1673, 
when he found them residing in the vi¬ 
cinity of the Peoria village on the w. side 
of the Mississippi near the mouth of a 
river supposed to have been the Des 
Moines. Franquelin’s map of 1688 gives 
the name of the river as “Moingana,” 
and marks the Indian village of “Moin- 
goana ’ ’ on it. When Marquette returned 
from the S. in 1674, he passed up Illinois 
r. and found the Peoria in the vicinity of 

57008°—Bull. 30—12-59 


L. Peoria, the tribe having removed hither 
after his descent the previous year. He 
does not mention the Moingwena in this 
connection, but from the fact thatGravier 
found them with the Peoria in this local¬ 
ity in 1700, it is presumed that they 
migrated thither with the latter tribe. 
As no mention is made of them after this 
time they probably were incorporated 
with the Peoria, thus losing their tribal 
distinction. (j. m. c. t.) 

Moeng8ena.— Joliet, maps in Coues, Pike’s Exped., 
i, 13, 1895. Moingoana. —La Salle (1681) in Mar- 
gry, D6c., II, 134,1877. Moingona. —P6nicaut (1700), 
ibid., v, 411,1883. Moingwenas. —Shea, Cath. Miss., 
404, 1855. Moins.— Nuttall, Journal, 251, 1821. 
Mouingoueiia. — Gravier (1701) in Jes. Rel., lxv, 
101,1900. 

Moiseyu ( Motseyu , a word of uncertain 
origin, sometimes rendered as a Cheyenne 
name meaning ‘many flies’ or ‘flintpeo¬ 
ple’, but probably of foreign derivation). 
An Algonquian tribe which, according to 
the tradition of the Cheyenne, adjoined 
them on the n. e. in their old home in 
Minnesota, and started with them on 
their westward migration about the year 
1700, but turned back before reaching the 
Missouri r. It is said that some of their 
descendants are still with the Cheyenne. 
They are possibly identical with the Mon- 
soni. (j. m. ) 

Arrow Men.—Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. Pub. 
103,_pl. xix, 1905. Mo wis si yu.—Grinnell, Social 
Org. Cheyennes, 136,1905. 

Moisie. A summer village of Montagn- 
ais and Nascapee at the mouth of Moisie 
r., on the n. shore of the Gulf of St 
Lawrence, Quebec (Hind, Lab. Penin., i, 
290, 1863). In 1906 the Montagnais and 
Nascapee at Moisie and Seven Islands 
numbered 376. 

Moiya. Given by Gibbs (Schoolcraft, 
Ind. Tribes, in, 112, 1853) as the name 
of a Pomo village in the vicinity of Hop- 
land, Mendocino co., Cal. 

Mojualuna. A former Taos village in 
the mountains above the present Taos 
pueblo, N. Mex. 

Mojual-ua. —Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
32, 1892. Mojua-lu-na. —Ibid. 

Mokaich. The Mountain Lion clan of 
the Keresan pueblos of Laguna, Sia, San 
Felipe, and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Moun¬ 
tain Lion clan of Laguna went to that vil¬ 
lage from the Rio Grande, dwelling first 
at Mt Taylor, or Mt San Mateo. With the 
Hapai (Oak) clan it formed a phratry, but 
it is probably now extinct. The clans 
of this name at Sia and San Felipe are 
quite extinct. (f. w. h. ) 

Mohkach-hanuch.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 
351, 1896 (Cochiti name; hdnuch = ‘people’). 
Mokaich-hano.— Ibid. (Sia and San Felipe form). 
Mokaiqch-hano ch . —Ibid. (Laguna form). Mo'- 
kaitc. —Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 19, 1894 
(Sia form; tc=ch). Mo-katsh. —Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, ill, 293, 1890. Mokatsh hanutsh.— 
Bandelier, Delight Makers, 464, 1890 (hanutsh => 
‘people’). 

Mokaskel. A former Luiseno village 
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey 


930 


MOKELUMNE-MONACAN 


[b. a. e. 


mission, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 11, 1860. 

Mokelumne. A division of the Miwok 
in the country between Cosumne and 
Mokelumne rs., in Eldorado, Amador, 
and Sacramento cos., Cal. See Moquel- 
umnan Family. 

Locklomnee.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 450, 1874. 
Mokelemnes. —Duflot de Mofras, Expl., ii, 383, 
1844. Mo-kel-um-ne.—Fremont, Geog. Memoir, 16, 
1848. Moquelumnes.—Bancroft, Hist. Cal., iv, 73, 
1886. Mukeemnes.—Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 450, 
1874. Mukelemnes.—Ibid. Muthelemnes.—Hale 
in U. S. Expl. Exped., Vi, 630,1846. Socklumnes.— 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450,1874 (identical?). 

Mokete. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, in 1608, on Warrasqueoc cr., 
Isle of Wight co., Ya.—Smith (1629), 
Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mokohoko ( Mokohoko^ , ‘he who floats vis¬ 
ible near the surface of the water’). A 
chief of the band of Sauk that took t he lead 
in supporting Black Hawk (q. v.) in the 
Black Hawk war. He w T as of the Sturgeon 
clan, the ruling clan of the Sauk, and was 
a bitter enemy of Keokuk (q. v.). The 
band still retains its identity. It refused 
to leave Kansas when the rest of the tribe 
went to Indian Ter., and had to be re¬ 
moved thither by the military. It is now 
known as the Black Hawk band, and its 
members are the most conservative of all 
the Sauk. (w. j.) 

Mokumiks (‘ red round robes’). A band 
of the Piegan division of the Siksika. 
Mo-kum'-iks.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
210, 1892. Red Round Robes.—Ibid., 225. 

Molala. A Waiilatpuan tribe forming 
the western division of that family. Lit¬ 
tle is known of their history. When first 
met with they resided in the Cascade 
range between Mts Hood and Scott and 
on the w. slope, in Washington and Ore¬ 
gon. The Cay use have a tradition that 
the Molala formerly dwelt with them 
s. of Columbia r. and became separated 
and driven westward in their wars with 
hostile tribes. Their dialect, while re¬ 
lated, is quite distinct from that of the 
Cayuse, and the separation probably took 
place in remote times. The name Molala 
is derived from that of a creek in Willa¬ 
mette valley, Oreg., s. of Oregon City. 
A band of these Indians drove out the 
original inhabitants and occupied their 
land. Subsequently the name was ex¬ 
tended to all the bands. The present 
status of the tribe is not certain. In 1849 
it was estimated to number 100; in 1877 
Gatschet found several families living on 
the Grande Ronde res., Oreg., and in 1881 
there were said to be about 20 individuals 
living in the mountains w. of Klamath 
lake. Those on the Grande Ronde res. are 
not officially enumerated, butare regarded 
as absorbed by the other tribes with whom 
they live. With regard to the rest noth¬ 
ing is known. It is probable, however, 
that there are a few scattered survivors. 
The Molala joined with other bands of 


Willamette valley in the treaty of Day- 
ton, Oreg., Jan. 22, 1855, and by treaty 
at the same place, Dec. 21, 1855, they 
ceded their lands and agreed to remove 
to a reservation. Chakankni, Chimbuiha, 
and Mukanti are said to have been Molala 
bands or settlements. (l. f. ) 

Amole'lish.— Gatschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 31, 
1877 (Calapooya name). Kuikni.—Gatschet in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., II, pt. 2,157, 1890 (Klamath 
name). Lati-u.—Gatschet, Molala MS., B. A. E. 
(own name). La'tiwe.—Ibid. Malala.—Sen. Ex. 
Doc. 48, 34tli Cong., 3d sess., 10, 1857. Molala.— 
Treaty of 1854 in U. S. Stat., x. 675,1854. Molalal- 
las.—Treaty of Dayton (1855) in U. S. Stat., 
xii, 981, 1863. Molale.—Gatscnet, Umpqua MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1877. Molalla.—Hedges in H. R. 
Ex. Doc.37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 130, 1857. Mo- 
lallah.—White, Ten Years in Oregon, 266, 1850. 
Molallalas.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 267, 1857. Molal- 
lales.—Hedges in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 
3d sess., 130, 1857. Molalle.—Armstrong, Oregon, 

114.1857. Molallie.—McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
269, 1889. Mo-lay-less.—Lyman in Oregon Hist. 
Soc. Quar., I, 323, 1900. Moleaaleys.—Meek in 
H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10, 
1848. Molealleg.—Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 632, 1853. Mole Alley.—Lane in Sen. 
Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 171, 1850. Mole- 
allies.—Browne (1857) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 38, 35th 
Cong., 1st sess., 7,1858. Molel.—Treaty of Dayton 
(1855) in U. S. Stat., xii, 981,1863. Molele.—Hale 
in U. S. Expl. Exped., Vi, 214, 1846. Molelie.— 
McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 203, 1888. Molell.— 
Hedges in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 

130.1857. Mollallas.—White in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
203, 1844. Moolal-le.—Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st 
sess., 2,1852. Moolalles.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 
in,200,map, 1853. Mooleilis.—Tolmieand Dawson, 
Comp. Vocabs., 11,1884. Morlal-les.—Lea in Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 8, 1851. Straight Molale.—Gatschet in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 2, 157,1890 (name for 
those on Grande Ronde res.) Wrole Alley.— 
Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. Ya'-ide'sta.— 
Gatschet, UmpquaMS. vocab., B. A.E., 1877 (Ump¬ 
qua name). 

Molma. A Maidu village near Auburn, 
Placer co., Cal.—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. 
Nat. Hist., xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905. 

Momi ( Mo'mi, ‘a people who eat no small 
birds which have been killed by larger 
ones ’). A subgens of the Missouri gens 
Cheghita, formerly a distinct people.— 
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897. 

Momobi ( Mo'-mo-bi , a species of lizard). 
A clan of the Lizard (Earth or Sand) 
phratry of the Hopi.—Stephen in 8th 
Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 

Monacan (possibly from an Algonquian 
word signifying a digging stick or spade). 
A tribe and confederacy of Virginia in the 
17th century. The confederacy occupied 
the upper waters of James r. above the 
falls at Richmond. Their chief village 
was Rasawek. They were allies of the 
Manahoac and enemies of the Powhatan, 
and spoke a language different from 
that^of either. They were finally incor¬ 
porated with other remnants under the 
names of Saponi and Tutelo (q. v.). The 
confederacy was composed of the Monacan 
proper, Massinacac, Mohemencho, Mona- 
hassano, Monasiccapano, and some other 
tribes. 

The Monacan proper had a chief settle¬ 
ment, known to the whites as Monacan- 
town, on James r. about 20 m. above the 


BULL. 30] 


MONACK-MONGWA 


931 


falls at Richmond. In 1669 they still had 
30 bowmen, or perhaps about 100 souls. 
Thirty years later, the Indian population 
having died out or emigrated, a Hugue¬ 
not colony took possession of the site. 
Consult Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the 
East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. (j. m.) 

Manacans.—Smith, Va.,i, 136,1819. Manachees.— 
Neill, Va. Carolorum, 325, 1886. Manakan,—Doc. 
of 1701 in Va. Hist. Coll., n. s., v, 42, 1886. Mana- 
kins.—Stith (1747) quoted by Burk, Va., I, 128, 
1804. Manikin.—Doc. of 1700 in Va. Hist. Coll., 
op. cit., 48. Mannacans.—Strachey (ca. 1612), Va., 
41, 1849. Mannachin.—Doc. of 1701 in Va. Hist. 
Coll., op. cit., 45. Mannakin.—Lawson (1714), 
Hist. Carolina, 187, 1860. Manskin.—Herrman, 
map (1670) in Rep. Bound. Com., 1873 (erroneously 
located on Pamunkey r.). Manycan.—Doc. of 
1700 in Va. Hist. Coll., op. cit., 51. Monacans.— 
Smith, Va.,I, 116,1819. Monachans.—Yong(1634) 
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., IX, 112, 1871. 
Monakins.—Lederer, Discov., 9, 1672. Monanacah 
Rahowacah.—Archer (1607) in Smith, Works, 
Arber ed., xlvi, 1884. Monanacans.—Ibid., 1. 
Monocans.—Strachey, op. cit., 27. 

Monack. See Moonack. 

Monahassano (a name of uncertain ety¬ 
mology, but most probably connected 
with Yesd n , the name which the Tutelo 
applied to themselves). A tribe of the 
Monacan confederacy, formerly living on 
the s. side of James r., near the moun¬ 
tains, in Bedford and Buckingham cos., 
Va. Lederer describes them as tall and 
warlike, and says their totem was three 
arrows. In 1671 they were 25 m. from the 
Saponi, on Staunton r. They seem to 
have been next in importance to the 
Monacan in the confederacy. See Tutelo. 
Consult Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the 
East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. (j. m.) 

Flanakaskies.—Batts (1671) quoted by Fernow, 
Ohio Val., 221, 1890 (misprint). Hanahaskies.— 
Batts (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 197, 1853. 
Hanohaskies.—Batts, ibid., 194. Monahasanugh.— 
Smith (ca. 1629), Va., I, map, 1819. Monahassan- 
oes.—Jefferson, Notes, 134, 1794. Monahassan- 
ughes.—Strachey (ca. 1612),Va., 102,1849. Nahys- 
sans.—Lederer, Discov.,9,1672. Nobissan.—Ibid., 
map (misprint). Yesah.—Hale in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., xxi, 11, 1883-4 (own name: see Tu¬ 
telo). Yesa n .—Hale, MS.,B. A.E.,1877. Yesang.— 
Hale in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., op. cit. 

Monakatuatha. See Half King. 

Monanauk. A village, possibly Conoy, 
on the Potomac in 1608, about Breton 
bay, or Clements branch, St Marys co., 
Md. 

Monashackotoog. A tribe which, with 
the Wunnashowatuckoog, lived w. of 
Boston, Mass., in 1637. They were 
friends of the Pequot and enemies of the 
Narraganset.—Williams (1637) in Mass. 
Hist, Soc. Coll., 4th s., vi, 194, 1863. 

Monasiccapano. A tribe of the Monacan 
confederacy, formerly living in Louisa 
and Fluvanna cos., Va., between the 
James and the headwaters of the Pamun¬ 
key. The derivation of the name is un¬ 
known, but it may have some connection 
with Saponi. See Mooney, Siouan Tribes 
of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. (j. m.) 

Massicapanoes.—Macauley, N. Y., II, 178,1829. Mo- 
nasiccapanoes.—Jefferson, Notes, 134, 1794. Mo- 
nasiceapanoes.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 


1816. Monasickapanoughs.—Smith (ca. 1629), Va., 
I, 134, 1819. Monasukapanough.—Ibid., map. 

Monax. See Moonack. 

Moncachtape (‘killer of pain and fa¬ 
tigue’). A Yazoo Indian, noted chiefly 
on account of his real or supposed trav¬ 
els and his knowledge of various Indian 
languages. Le Page du Pratz, during his 
residence in Louisiana about the middle 
of the 18th century, met Moncachtape 
and obtained from him an account of his 
wanderings, accordingto which (DuPratz, 
Hist, La., hi, 89-128, 1758), after the loss 
of his wife and children, he had devoted 
much of his time to traveling. One of 
his journeys was to the N. E., in which 
he passed up the Ohio, visited the Shaw¬ 
nee and Iroquois, and wintered among 
the Abnaki; thence he went up the St 
Lawrence and returned to his home by 
way of the Mississippi. His second 
trip was to the N. W. coast by the 
route subsequently traveled by Lewis 
and Clark. He mentions the Tamaroa, 
Ivansa, and Amikwa, a fid although he 
alludes to numerous tribes seen during his 
passage down Columbia r., he mentions 
no tribal names. He finally reached the 
Pacific coast, where, in addition to In¬ 
dians, he met with bearded white men, 
who “came from sun-setting,in search of 
a yellow stinking wood which dyes a 
fine yellow color.” With other Indians 
he ambushed and killed 11 of these 
strangers, 2 of whom bore firearms. These 
whites are described as small, but having 
large heads and long hair in the middle 
of the crown and wrapped in a great 
many folds of stuff, while their clothes 
were soft and of several colors. This 
story, so far as it relates to the western 
trip, is very doubtful on its face, and the 
names of tribes which it gives extend 
only as far as DuPratz’ own knowl¬ 
edge of them; yet Quatrefages (Human 
Species, 205, 1895) accepts the story as 
credible, and that Moncachtape under¬ 
stood a number of languages is clearly 
proven. See also Clarke, Pion. Days in 
Oreg., 1905. (c. t. ) 

Monemius. A village of the Mahican 
tribe, known as Monemius’ Castle from 
the name of the resident chief, situated in 
the 17th century on Haver id., in Hudson 
r., near Cohoes falls, Albany co., N. Y. 

(J. M. ) 

Moenemines Castle.—Deed of 1630 in N. Y. Doc. 
Col. Hist., XIV, 1,1883. Moeneminnes Castle.—Pat¬ 
ent of 1630, ibid., I, 44, 1856. Monemiu’s castle.— 
Rnttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 85, 1872. 

Mong ( Mang , ‘loon’). A gens of the 
Chippewa (q. v.). Cf. Maak. 

Mahng.—Tanner, Narrative, 314, 1830. Mang.— 
Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Mank.—Gatschet, Ojibwa 
MS., B. A. E., 1882. Mong.—Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44,1885. 

Mongwa {Mon-gwa', ‘loon’). A gens of 
the Miami (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168, 1877. 


932 


[B. a. e. 


MONK’S MOUND-MONSONI 


Monk’s Mound. See Cahokia Mound. 

Monnato ( Mon-na'-to , ‘snow’). A gens 
of the Miami (q.v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 
168, 1877. 

Mono. A general term applied to the 
Shoshonean tribes of s. e. California by 
their neighbors on the w. The origin 
and meaning of the name are obscure, its 
identity with the Spanish mono, ‘monkey,’ 
and its similarity, at least in certain dia¬ 
lects, to the Yokuts word for ‘ fly ’ ( monai , 
etc.), are probably only coincidences. 
For subdivisions, see Mono-Paviotso. 
Honachees.—Bunnell quoted by Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Ethnol., Ill, 350,1877. Manache.—Purcell in 
Ind. Aff. Rep., 87, 1870. Moan'-au-zi.—Powers in 
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., nr, 320, 1877 (Nishinam 
name). Monache.—Belknap in Ind. Aff. Rep., 17, 
1876 (“the usual form of the name as heard among 
the southern Yokuts; cf. the Maidu (Nishinam) 
name, preceding”—A. L. K.). Mona'-chi.—Pow¬ 
ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 350,1877. Monas.— 
Johnston in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 
22, 1852. Monoes.—Johnston in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
251, 1851. Mono Pi-Utes.— Campbell in Ind. Aff. 
Rep., 119, 1866. Monos.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
May 8, 1863. Noo-tah-ah.—Wessels (1853) in H. R. 
Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 31,1857. Nutaa.— 
A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1905 (Chukchansi name; de¬ 
notes that they are e. or upstream). Nut'-ha.— 
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 396, 1877. 

Mono-Paviotso. One of the th ree great di- 
alecticgroups into which theShoshoneans 
of the great plateau are distinguished. 
It includes the Mono of s. e. California, 
the Paviotso, or “Paiute,” of w. Nevada, 
and the “Snakes” and Saidyuka of e. 
Oregon. Part of the Bannock may be 
related to these, but the eastern Bannock 
have affinities with the Ute. 

The bands which seem to have formed 
the social unit of these people were each 
under one chief, and several of these are 
said to have been united into confedera¬ 
cies, such as the ‘ ‘ Paviotso confederacy,” 
but it is doubtful whether the relations 
existing between the constituent parts 
should properly be so termed. 

The bands or divisions mentioned within 
the area occupied by this group are the 
following: Agaivanuna, Genega’s band, 
Hadsapoke’s band, Holkoma, Hoone- 
booey, Intimbich, Itsaatiaga, Kaidatoia- 
bie, Kaivanungavidukw, Koeats, Koko- 
heba, Kosipatuwiwagaiyu, Kotsava, Ko- 
yuhow, Kuhpattikutteh, Kuyuidika, 
Laidukatuwiwait, Lohim, Loko, Naha- 
ego, Nim, Nogaie, Odukeo’s band, Olan- 
che, Oualuck’s band, Pagantso, Pagwiho, 
Pamitoy, Pavuwiwuyuai, Petenegowat, 
Petodseka, Piattuiabbe, Poatsituhtikuteh, 
Poskesa, San Joaquins’ band, Sawaga- 
tiva, Shobarboobeer, Sunananahogwa, 
Temoksee, Togwingani, Tohaktivi, Toi- 
wait, Tonawitsowa, Tonoyiet’s band, To- 
quimas, To Repe’s band, Tosarke’s band, 
Tsapakah, Tubianwapu, Tupustikutteh, 
Tuziyammos, Wahi’s band, Wahtatkin, 
Walpapi, Warartika, Watsequeorda’s 
band, Winnemucca’s band, Woksachi, 
Yahuskin, and Yammostuwiwagaiya. 


Numaltachi, given as a village on 
Tuolomne r., Cal., may in reality be 
another band. 

From figures given in the report of the 
Indian office for 1903 it would appear 
that the total number in this division is 
in the neighborhood of 5,400. 

Monongahela. A variety of whisky. 
Says Bartlett (Diet, of Americanisms, 401, 
1877): “Ariverof Pennsylvania, so called, 
gave its name to the rye whisky of which 
large quantities were produced in its 
neighborhood, and indeed to American 
whisky in general, as distinguished from 
Usquebaugh and Inishowen, the Scotch 
and Irish .sorts.” The name is of Algon- 
quian origin, but its etymology is un¬ 
certain. (a. f. c.) 

Monsoni ( Mongsoaeythinyuwok , ‘moose 
people.’—Frankiin). An Algonquian 

tribe in British America, often classed as 
a part of the Cree, to whom they are 
closely related, although they seem to be 
almost as closely related to the northern 
Chippewa. The first notice of them is in 
the Jesuit Relation for 1671. In that of 
1672 they are located on the shore of 
James bay, about the mouth of Moose r., 
which, according to Richardson, received 
its name from them. They are referred 
to under the name Aumonssoniks in the 
Proces verbal of the Prise de possession 
(1671), but were not represented at the 
ceremony, though Charlevoix asserts the 
contrary. Although Dobbs (1744) speaks 
of them as the Moose River Indians, he 
locates a village or band on the w. bank 
of Rainy r., near Rainy lake, and others 
on the n. shore of this lake. Some con¬ 
fusion has arisen in regard to the habitat 
and linguistic connection of the tribe from 
the fact that the geographic designation 
“Mosonee” is frequently used to include 
all that portion of Keewatin and adjacent 
territory stretching along Hudson bay 
from Moose r. northward to Nelson r., a 
region occupied chiefly by the Maskegon. 
The usual and most permanent home of 
the Monsoni, however, has been the re¬ 
gion of Moose r. According to Chauvign- 
erie their totem was the moose. There 
is no separate enumeration of them in 
the recent Canadian official reports. See 
Mousonee. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Aumonssoniks.—Prise de possession (1671) in Per- 
rot, M6m., 293, 1864. Aumossomiks.—Verwyst, 
Missionary Labors, 232,1886. Aumoussonnites.— 
Prise de possession (1671) in Margry, D<5e., 1,97,1875. 
Creesof Moose Factory.—Franklin, Journ. to Polar 
Sea, I, 96,1824. Gens de marais. —Bacqueville de la 
Potherie, Hist. Am. Sept., I, 174, 1753. Mongsoa 
Eithynyook.—Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., 
II, 24, 1836. Mongsoa-eythinyoowuc. — Franklin, 
Journ. to Polar Sea, I, 96, 1824. Monsaunis.— 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am. Sept., i, 174, 
1753. Monsonics.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
523, 1878. Monsonies.—Franklin, Journ. to Polar 
Sea, 56, 1824. Monsonis.—Chauvignerie (1736) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 1054,1855. Monsounic.— 
Jes. Rel. 1671, 30,1858. Monzoni.—Lahontan, New 
Voy., I, 231,1703. Moose-deer Indians.—Franklin, 


BULL. 30) 


MONSWIDISHIANUN-MONTAGNAIS 


933 


Journ. to Polar Sea, I, 96, 1824. Moose Indians.— 
Horden, Bk. of Common Prayer in Language of 
Moose Indians, title-page, 1859. Moose River In¬ 
dians.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 13, 1744. Morisons.— 
Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, hi, 556, 1853 (misprint). Mousonis.—Mc- 
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1858. Na¬ 
tion of the Marshes —Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 24,1744. 
Ou-Monssonis.—Tailhan, note to Perrot, Mem., 293, 
1864. Wamussonewug.—Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830 
(Ottawa name). 

Monswidishianun ( Md n s wVdishi'anum ). 
The Moose phratry of the Menominee, 
also a subphratry or gens thereof.—Hoff¬ 
man in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. 1, 42, 1896. 

Montagnais (French ‘mountaineers’, 
from the mountainous character of their 
country). A group of closely related Al- 
gonquian tribes in Canada, extending 
from about St Maurice r. almost to the 
Atlantic, and from the St Lawrence to the 
watershed of Hudson bay. The tribes of 
the group speak several well-marked dia¬ 
lects. They are the Astouregamigoukh, 
Attikiriniouetch, Bersiamite, Chisedec, 
Escoumains, Espamichkon, Kakouchaki, 
Mauthsepi, Miskouaha, Mouchaoua- 
ouastiirinioek, Nascapee, Nekoubaniste, 
Otaguottouemin, Oukesestigouek, Ou- 
mamiwek, Papinachois, Tadousac, and 
Weperigweia. Their linguistic relation 
appears to be closer with the Cree of 
Athabasca lake, or Ayabaskawininiwug, 
than with any other branch of the Algon- 
quian family. Champlain met them at 
the mouth of the Saguenay in 1603, 
where they and other Indians were cele¬ 
brating with bloody rites the capture of 
Iroquois prisoners. Six years later he 
united with them the Hurons and Algon- 
kin in an expedition against the Iroquois. 
In the first Jesuit Relation, written by 
Biard (1611-16), they are spoken of as 
friends of the French. From that time 
their name has a place in Canadian his¬ 
tory, though they exerted no decided in¬ 
fluence on the settlement and growth of 
the colony. The first missionary work 
among them was begun in 1615, and mis¬ 
sions were subsequently established on 
the upper Saguenay and at L. St John. 
These were continued, though with occa¬ 
sional and long interruptions, until 1776. 
The Montagnais fought the Micmac, and 
often the Eskimo, but their chief and 
inveterate foes were the Iroquois, who 
drove them for a time from the banks of 
the St Lawrence and from their strong¬ 
holds about the upper Saguenay, com¬ 
pelling them to seek safety at more 
distant points. After peace was estab¬ 
lished between the French and the Iro¬ 
quois they returned to their usual haunts. 
Lack of proper food, epidemics, and con¬ 
tact with civilization are reducing their 
numbers. Turner (,11th Rep. B. A. E., 
1894) says they roam over the areas s. of 
Hamilton inlet as far as the Gulf of St 
Lawrence. Their western limits are im¬ 


perfectly known. They trade at all the 
stations along the accessible coast, many of 
them at Rigolet and Northwest r. Sagard, 
in 1632, described them as Indians of the 
lowest type in Canada. Though they 
have occasionally fought with! bravery, 
they are comparatively timid. They have 
always been more less nomadic and, 
although accepting the teachings of the 
missionaries, seem incapable of resigning 
the freedom of the forest for life in vil¬ 
lages, nor can they be induced to cultivate 
the soil as a means of support. Mr 
Chisholm describes them as honest, hos¬ 
pitable, and benevolent, but very super¬ 
stitious. Those who were induced to set¬ 
tle on the lower St Lawrence appear to 
be subject to sickness, which is thinning 
their numbers. All who have not been 
brought directly under religious influence 
are licentious. Conjuring was much prac¬ 
tised by their medicine-men. Some of 
the early missionaries speak highly of 
their religious susceptibility. They bury 
their dead in the earth, digging a hole 3 
ft deep and occasionally lining it with 
wood. The corpse is usually laid on its 
side, though it is sometimes placed in a 
sitting position. Above the grave is built 
a little birch-bark hut and through a win¬ 
dow the relatives thrust bits of tobacco, 
venison, and other morsels. No reliable 
estimate can be given of their former num¬ 
bers, but it is known that they have 
greatly decreased from sickness and star¬ 
vation consequent on the destruction of 
game. In 1812 they were supposed to 
number about 1,500; in 1857 they \vere 
estimated at 1,100, and in 1884 they were 
officially reported at 1,395, living at 
Betsiamits, (Bersimis), Escoumains, 
Godbout, Grand Romaine, Lake St John, 
and Mingan, in Quebec. In 1906 they, 
together with the Nascapee, numbered, 
according to the Canadian official report, 
2,183, distributed as follows: Bersimis, 
499; Escoumains, 43; Natashquan, 76; 
Godbout, 40; Grand Romaine, 176; Lake 
St John, 551; Mingan, 241; St Augustine, 
181; Seven Islands and Moisie, 376. 
Consult Chamberlain in Ann. Archaeol. 
Rep. Ontario 1905, 122, 1906. 

The bands and villages of the Mon¬ 
tagnais are: Appeelatat, Assuapmushan, 
Attikamegue, Bonne Esp6rance, Chicou¬ 
timi, Esquimaux Point, Godbout, lie 
Percee (mission), Itamameou (mission), 
Islets de Jeremie (mission), Kapimina- 
kouetiik, Mauthsepi, Mingan, Moisie, 
Mushkoniatawee, Musquarro, Nabisippi, 
Natashquan, Pashasheebo, Piekouagami, 
Romaine, and St Augustine, (j. m. c. t. ) 
Algonkin Inferieures— Hind, Lab. Penin., II, 10, 
1863. Algonquins Inferieurs.—Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 
1858. Bergbewohner.—Walch, map of Am., 1805 
(German: ‘Mountaineers’). Chauhagueronon.— 
Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., iv, 1866 (Huron name). 
Ghauoironon.—Ibid. Kebiks.—Schoolcraft Ind. 


934 


MONTAGNAIS-MONT AUK 


[B. a. e. 


Tribes, v, 40, 1855 (on account of their warning 
cry of “Kebik!” when approaching in canoes 
the rapids of the St Lawrence near Quebec). 
Lower Algonkins. —Jefferys, Fr. Doms., pt. 1, 46, 
1761. Montagnais. —Jes. Rel. 1611, 8, 1858. Mon- 
tagnaits.— Jes. Rel. 1633, 3, 1858. Montagnards.— 
Jes. Rel. 1632, 5, 1858. Montagnars.— Champlain 
(1609), (Euvres, III, 194, 1870. Montagnes.— 
Champlain (1603),ibid., II, 9,1870. Montagnets.— 
Jes. Rel. 1611, 15, 1858. Montagnez— Champlain 
(1603), (Euvres, II, 8,1870. Montagnois.— Lahon- 
tan, New Voy., 1,207,1703. Montagrets.— Me. Hist. 
Soc. Coll., I, 288, 1865 (misprint). Montagues.— 
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, HI, 81, 1854 
(misprint). Montaignairs. —Champlain (1615), 
(Euvres, IV, 22, 1870. Montaigners.— Champlain 
(1618),ibid., 113. Montaignes.— Champlain (1603), 
ibid., II, 49,1870. Montaignets.— Ibid. (1609), V, pt. 
1, 144. Montainiers.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, V, 
40,1855. Montanaro.— Hervas (ca. 1785) quoted by 
Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816. Montaniak.— 
Gatschet, Penobscot MS., 1887 (Penobscot name). 
Mountaineers. —Mass.Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., VI, 16, 
1800. Mountain Indians.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. 
Hist., pt. 6, 149, 1885. Mountaneers.— Lahontan, 
New Voy., 1,230,1703. Mountanees.— Vater, Mith., 
pt. 3, sec. 3, 344, 1816. Neconbavistes.— Lattre, 
map, 1784 (misprint). Ne-e-no-il-no. —Hind, Lab. 
Penin., H, 10, 1863 (‘perfect people’, one of the 
names used by themselves). Nehiroirini.— Kings¬ 
ley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 149, 1885. Nekouban- 
istes. —Beilin, map, 1755. Neloubanistes. —Esnauts 
and Rapilly, map, 1777 (misprint). Sheshata- 
poosh. —Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, 
ciii, 1848. Sheshatapooshshoish. —Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., VI, 16, 1800. Shoudamunk.— Peyton 
quoted by Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, 29,1875 
(‘good Indians’: Beothuk name). Skatapusho- 
ish.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 1878. 
Sketapushoish. —Mass. Hi$t. Soc. Coll., 1st s., VI, 16, 
1800. Tshe-tsi-uetin-euerno. —Hind, Lab. Penin., 
ii, 101, 863 (‘people of the north-northeast’: name 
used by themselves). Uskwawgomees. —Tanner, 
Narr., 316, 1830. TJssagene'wi. —Gatschet, Penob¬ 
scot MS., 1887 (‘people of the outlet’ [Hewitt]: 
Penobscot name). TJssaghenick. —Vetromile, 
Abnakis, 50,1866 (Etchimin name). 

Montagnais. An Athapascan group, 
comprising the Chipewyan, Athabasca, 
Etheneldeli, and Tatsanottine tribes, 
which, though now living on the plains 
and in the valleys of British North Amer¬ 
ica, migrated from the Rocky mts.— 
Petitot, Diet. Dene-Dindjie, xx, 1876. 
For synonymy, see Chipewyan. 

Montagnkrd. An ethnic and geographic 
Athapascan group comprising the Tsat- 
tine, Sarsi, Sekani, and Nahane tribes liv¬ 
ing in the Rocky mts. of British North 
America. The name was also formerly 
applied to the eastern Algonquian people 
now known as Montagnais. 

Montagnardes.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,pt. 6, 
143, 1885. Montagnards. — Petitot, Diet. Dene- 
Dindjie, xx, 1876. Mountaineers. —Morgan in N. 
Am. Rev., 58,1870. 

Montauk (meaning uncertain). A term 
that has been used in different senses, 
sometimes limited to the particular band 
or tribe known by this name, but in a 
broader sense including most of the 
tribes of Long Island, excepting those 
about the w. end. It is occasionally used 
incorrectly as equivalent to Metoac, q. v. 

The Indians of Long Island were closely 
related to the Indians of Massachusetts 
and Connecticut. Tooker (Cockenoe-de- 
Long Island, 1896) says that the dialect of 
the Montauk was more nearly related to 


the Natick of Massachusetts than was the 
Narraganset. 

The Montauk, in the limited sense, 
formerly occupied Easthampton tp., Suf¬ 
folk co., at the e. end of Long Island, 
and controlled all the other tribes of the 
island, except those near the w. end. 
That these so-called tribes were but parts 
of one group or tribe, or the loosely 
connected elements of what had been 
an organized body, seems apparent. 
Ruttenber, speaking of the Montauk 
in the limited sense, says: “This chief¬ 
taincy was acknowledged both by the 
Indians and the Europeans as the ruling 
family of the island. They were indeed 
the head of the tribe of Montauk, the 
other divisions named being simply clans 



LAST KING OF THE MONTAUK 


DAVID PHARAOH 


or groups, as in the case of other tribes. 

. . . Wyandance, their sachem, was 

also the grand sachem of Paumanacke, 
or Sewanhackey, as the island was called. 
Nearly all the deeds for lands were con¬ 
firmed by him. His younger brothers, 
Nowedonah and Poygratasuck [Poggata- 
cut], were respectively sachems of the 
Shinecock and the Manhasset.” The 
Rockaway and Cannarsee at the w. end 
were probably not included. It is doubt¬ 
ful whether he is correct in including 
the west-end Indians in the confederacy. 
The principal Montauk village, which 
probably bore the name of the tribe, 
was about Ft Pond, near Montauk pt. 
The Pequot made them and their sub¬ 
ordinates tributary, and on the destruc¬ 
tion of that tribe in 1637, the Narra¬ 
ganset began a series of attacks which 
finally, about 1659, forced the Montauk, 





BULL. 30] 


MONTEREY INDIANS-MONTEZUMA CASTLE 


935 


who had lost the greater part of their num¬ 
ber by pestilence, to retire for protection 
to the whites at Easthampton. Since 1641 
they had been tributary to New England. 
When first known they were numerous, 
and even after the pestilence of 1658-59, 
were estimated at about 500. Then began 
a rapid decline, and a century later only 
162 remained, most of whom joined the 
Brotherton Indians of New York, about 
1788, so that in 1829 only about 30 were 
left on Long Island, and 40 years later 
these had dwindled to half a dozen indi¬ 
viduals, who, with a few Shinnecock, 
were the last representatives of the Long 
Island tribes. They preserved a form of 
tribal organization into the 19th century 
and retained their hereditary chiefs until 
the death of their last “king,” David 
Pharaoh, about 1875. A few mixed- 
bloods are still officially recognized by 
the state of New York as constituting a 
tribe under Wyandanch Pharaoh, son of 
David. (j. m. ) 

Mantacut.—Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 3d s., Ill, 154,1833. Mantaoke.— Deed of 1657 
in Thompson, Long Id., 344, 1839. Mantauket.— 
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., hi, 
156, 1833. Meantacut.—Ibid., 153. Meantaukett.— 
Doc. of 1671 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 648, 
1883. Meanticut.—Gardener (1660) as quoted by 
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 63, 1848. Melotaukes.— 
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,1816 (misprint). 
Menataukett.—Lovelace (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. 
Hist., xiv, 652, 1883. Mentakett.—Deed (1661) in 
Thompson, Long Id., i, 299,1843 (place). Men- 
toake.—Deed of 1657, ibid., 344, 1839. Meontas- 
kett.—Baily (1669) in R. I. Col. Rec., II, 276, 1857. 
Meontawket.—Clarke (1669), ibid., 285. Meun- 
tacut. —Indian deed of 1648 cited by W. W. Tooker, 
inf’n, 1906. Mirrachtauhacky.—Doc. of 1645 in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 60,1883 (said by Tooker, 
Algong. Ser., n, 15, 1901, to be a Dutch form of 
Montauk). Montacut.—James (ca. 1654) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., VII, 482, 1865. Montake.— 
Doc. of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 416,1883. 
Montaks.—Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 339, 1816. 
Montank.—Smithson. Miscel. Coll., xiv, art. 6, 25, 
1878 (misprint). Montauckett.—Doc.of 1675in N. Y. 
Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 700,1883. Montaug.—Latham 
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,59,1856. Montauk.— 
Deed of 1666 in Thompson, Long Id., i, 312,1843. 
Montaukett.—Deed (ca. 1655), ibid., 183, 1839. 
Montaukut.—Doc. of 1675 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
XIV, 699, 1883. Montauque.—Doc. of 1669, ibid., 
618. Montoake.—Doc. of 1657, ibid., 416. Mon- 
tocks.—Tryon (1774), ibid., vill, 451, 1857. Mon- 
tok. — Johnson (1777), ibid., 714. Montucks.— 
Devotion (ca. 1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
1st s., X, 106, 1809. Mountacutt.—Deed of 1648 in 
Thompson, Long Id., 1,294,1843. Muntake.—Doc. 
of 1677 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 729, 1883. 
Muntauckett.—Doc. of 1675, ibid., 696. Muntau- 
kett.—Doc. of 1668, ibid., 606. 

Monterey Indians. The Costanoan In¬ 
dians of Monterey co., Cal., numbering 
more than 100 in 1856. A vocabulary 
taken by Taylor (Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 
1860) at that time is Rumsen. There are 
probably also remnants of the Esselen 
and other divisions of the Mutsun in the 
region of Monterey. 

Montezuma, Carlos. An educated full- 
blood Apache, known among his people 
in childhood as Wasajah (‘Beckoning’), 
born about 1866 in the neighborhood of 
the Four Peaks of the Mazatzal mts., pres¬ 


ent s. e. Arizona. In Oct., 1871, he was 
taken captive, with 16 or 18 other chil¬ 
dren including his two sisters, in a mid¬ 
night raid by the Pima on his band, 
during the absence of the men on a mis¬ 
sion of peace, while encamped in the 
Superstition mts., 40 or 50 m. w. of Globe. 
In this raid 30 or more of the Apache 
were killed. The captives were taken 
by the Pima to their rancherias on the 
Gila, whence, after a week’s detention, 
Wasajah was taken to Adamsville, below 
Florence, and sold to Mr C. Gentile, a 
native of Italy, who was then prospecting 
in Arizona. Some months after the raid 
Wasajah’s mother, who had escaped, was 
informed by an Indian runner that her 
boy had been seen at Camp Date Creek. 
Determined to recover her child, she ap¬ 
plied to the agent for permission to leave 
the reservation, and being refused de¬ 
parted without leave. Her body was 
found later in a rugged pass in the moun¬ 
tains, where she had been shot by a 
native scout. Wasajah was taken by Mr. 
Gentile to Chicago and was called by him 
Carlos Montezuma—Carlos, from his own 
name, Montezuma, from the so-called 
Casa Montezuma (q. v.), near the Pima 
villages. He entered the public schools 
of Chicago in 1872, remaining until 1875, 
from which time until 1884 his education 
was continued in the public schools of 
Galesburg, Ill., Brooklyn, N. Y., and 
Urbana, Ill., and in the University of 
Illinois at the last-named place. In 1884 
he entered the Chicago Medical School, 
from which he was graduated in 1889, 
receiving in the same year an appoint¬ 
ment as physician in the U. S. Indian 
School at Stevenson, N. Dak. From 1890 
until 1896 Dr Montezuma has served as 
physician successively at the Western 
Shoshone agency in Nevada, the Colville 
agency in Washington, and at the Car¬ 
lisle Indian School. In the latter year 
he resigned from the service of the Indian 
department and settled in Chicago, where 
he is now engaged in the practice of his 
profession, in teaching in the College of 
Physicians and Surgeons and in the Post¬ 
graduate Medical School, and in arous¬ 
ing interest in his people through his 
writings. 

Montezuma Castle. A prehistoric cliff¬ 
dwelling on the right bank of Beaver cr., 
a tributary of Rio Verde, 3 m. from old 
Camp Verde, central Arizona; popularly 
so-called because supposed to have been 
once occupied by the Aztecs, whereas 
there is no ground whatever for the belief 
that any Southwestern pueblo or cliff- 
village is of Mexican origin. The build¬ 
ing is constructed in a natural recess 
in the side of a limestone cliff, the base 
of which is 348 ft from the edge of the 
stream and about 40 ft above it. The 


936 


MONTEZUMA WELL-MONTOUR 


[b. a. e. 


building, which is accessible only by 
means of ladders, consists of 5 stories, and 
in the same cliff are several cave-dwell¬ 
ings. The foundation of .Montezuma 
Castle rests on cedar timbers laid longi¬ 
tudinally on flat stones on the ledge. 
The front wall is about 2 ft thick at the 
bottom and 13 in. at the top, and leans 
slightly toward the cliff. The first story 
consists of two small living rooms and a 
storeroom. The second floor, access to 
which is gained through a small opening 
in the ceiling of the first story, is more 
extensive, consisting of 4 apartments, 
bounded behind by the most massive 
wall of masonry in the entire structure, 
and resting on a 
ledge even with 
the floor of the 
second story. It 
is 28 ft in height, 
rising to the fifth 
story, around the 
front of which it 
forms a battle¬ 
ment 4J ft high. 

It leans slightly 
toward the cliff, 
and is strongly 
but not symmet¬ 
rically curved 
inward. The 
chord of the arc 
described by the 
top of the wall 
measures 43 ft, 
and the greatest 
distance from 
chord to circum- 
ference 8 ft. 

The third floor 
comprises the 
most extensive 
tier of rooms in 
the structure, 
extending across 
the entire alcove 
in the cliff in 
which the house 
is built. There 
are 8 of these 
rooms, in addition to 2 porches. The 
fourth floor consists of 3 rooms, neatly 
constructed, through the ceiling of one 
of which access is gained to the fifth 
or uppermost floor, which consists of a 
long porch or gallery having a battle¬ 
ment in front and an elevated backward 
extension on the right, with 2 rooms 
filling the corresponding space on the 
left. These 2 rooms are roofed by the 
rocky arch of the cliff, and are loftier 
than the lower chambers. Montezuma 
Castle, or Casa Montezuma, shows evi¬ 
dence of long occupancy in prehistoric 
times. Some of the rooms are smoothly 
plastered and smoke-blackened; the plas¬ 


tering bears finger-marks and impressions 
of the thumb and hand. The rooms are 
ceiled with willows laid horizontally 
across rafters of ash and black alder; 
upon this is a thick layer of reeds placed 
transversely, and the whole plastered on 
top with mortar, forming a floor to the 
chamber above. The ends of the rafters 
exhibit hacking with stone implements. 
The building, which threatened to col¬ 
lapse, was repaired by the Arizona An¬ 
tiquarian Association about 1895, and in 
1906 it was declared a national monu¬ 
ment by proclamation of the President of 
the United States. Its origin is unknown. 
See Mearns in Pop. Sci. Month., Oct. 1890 
(from whose de¬ 
scription the 
above details 
are extracted); 
Hewett in Am. 
Anthrop., v i, 
637, 1904; Land 
of Sunshine, Los 
Angeles, x, 44, 
1898. 

Montezuma 
Well. A large 
depression in the 
form of a “tank” 
or well in the 
summit of a low 
mesa on Beaver 
cr., about 9 m. 
n. of old Camp 
Verde, Ariz., in 
which are the 
w r el 1-preserved 
remains of sev¬ 
eral cliff-dwell¬ 
ings. 

M o n t o chtana 

(‘a corner in the 
back part of the 
hut’). A Knai- 
akhotana clan 
of Cook inlet, 
Alaska. — Rich¬ 
ardson, A r c t. 
Exped., i, 407, 
1851. 

Montour. About 1665 a French noble¬ 
man named Montour settled in Can¬ 
ada, where, by an Indian woman, 
probably a Huron, he became the 
father of a son and two daughters. 
This son of Montour grew up among 
those Indians, who were at that time 
in alliance with the French. In 1685, 
while in the French service, he was 
wounded in a fight with two Mohawk 
warriors on L. Champlain. Subsequently 
he deserted the French cause to live with 
the “upper nations” of Indians. Through 
him, in 1708, Lord Cornbury succeeded 
in persuading 12 of these western tribes, 
including the Miami and the Hurons, to 



MONTEZUMA CASTLE. (mearns) 




BULL. 30] 


MONTOUR 


937 


trade at Albany. For this work, in alien¬ 
ating the upper nations from the French 
trade and cause, he was killed in 1709 by 
order of the Marquis de Vaudreuil, gov¬ 
ernor of Canada, who boasted that, had 
Montour been taken alive, he would have 
had him hanged. One of the two daugh¬ 
ters of the French nobleman, while 
living on the Susquehanna and the Ohio, 
became a noted interpreter and friend of 
the English, and was known as Madam 
Montour. Her sister appears to have 
married a Miami Indian. 

Authorities regarding the Montours are 
not always consistent and are sometimes 
not reconcilable as to statements of ma¬ 
terial facts. Madam Montour appears to 
have been born in Canada previous to the 
year 1684. When about 10 years of age 
she was captured by some Iroquois war¬ 
riors and adopted, probably by the Seneca, 
for at maturity she married a Seneca 
named Roland Montour, by whom she 
had 4, if not 5, children, namely, Andrew, 
Henry, Robert, Lewis, and Margaret, the 
last becoming the wife of Katarioniecha, 
who lived in the neighborhood of Sha- 
mokin, Pa. Roland had a brother called 
“Stuttering John” and a sister variously 
known as Catherine, Kate, Catrina, and 
Catreen. After the death of Roland, 
Madam Montour married the noted 
Oneida chief named Carondowanen, or 
“Big Tree,” who later took the name 
Robert Hunter in honor of the royal gov¬ 
ernor of the province of New York. 
About 1729 her husband, Robert, was 
killed in battle with the Catawba, against 
whom he was waging war. Madam Mon¬ 
tour first appeared as an official interpre¬ 
ter at a conference at Albany in August, 
1711, between the delegates of the Five 
Nations and Gov. Hunter of New York. 
This was probably the occasion on 
which her husband adopted the name 
Robert Hunter. The wanton murder of 
her brother Andrew by Vaudreuil was 
bitterly resented by Madam Montour, 
and she employed her great influence 
among the Indians with such telling 
effect against the interests of the French 
that the French governor sought to per¬ 
suade her to remove to Canada by the 
offer of great compensation and valuable 
emoluments. His efforts were unsuc¬ 
cessful. Finally, in 1719, he sent her 
sister to attempt to prevail on her to for¬ 
sake the people of her adoption and the 
English cause, whereupon the Commis¬ 
sioners of Indian Affairs, learning of the 
overtures of the French governor, appre¬ 
ciating the value of her services to the 
province, and fearing the effect of her 
possible disaffection, invited her to Al¬ 
bany. It was then discovered that for a 
year she had not received her stipulated 
pay, so it was agreed by the commission¬ 


ers that she should thereafter receive a 
“man’s pay,” and she was satisfied. 
Madam Montour acted also as interpreter 
in 1727 in Philadelphia at a conference 
between Lieut. Gov. Gordon and his 
council on the one hand and the several 
chiefs and delegates of the Six Nations, 
the “Conestogas, Gangawese, and the 
Susquehanna Indians,” on the other. 
It is claimed that Madam Montour was a 
lady in manner and education, was very 
attractive in mind .and body, and that at 
times she was entertained by ladies of 
the best society of Philadelphia; but as 
her sister was married to a Miami war¬ 
rior, and she herself was twice married 
to Indians of the Five Nations, it is prob¬ 
able that her refinement and education 
were not so marked as claimed, and that 
the ladies of Philadelphia treated her 
only with considerate kindness, and noth¬ 
ing more. Nevertheless, from the testi¬ 
mony of those who saw and knew her, 
but contrary to the statement of Lord 
Cornbury, who knew her brother, it 
seems almost certain that she was a 
French-Canadian without any admixture 
of Indian blood in her veins, and that for 
some unaccountable reason she preferred 
the life and dress of her adopted people. 

Whatever Roland’s attitude was toward 
the proprietary government, that of his 
wife was always uniformly friendly, and 
after her second marriage it was even 
more cordial. Such was the loyalty of 
the family of Madam Montour that at 
least two of her sons, Henry and Andrew, 
received large grants of ‘ ‘ donation lands ’ ’ 
from the government; that of the former 
lay on the Chillisquaque, and that of the 
latter on the Loyalsock, where Mon- 
toursville, Pa., is now situated. 

Witham Marshe refers to Madam Mon¬ 
tour as the “celebrated Mrs Montour, a 
French lady,” who, having “lived so 
long among the Six Nations, is become 
almost an Indian.” Referring to her 
visits to Philadelphia, he says, “ being a 
white woman,” she was there “very much 
caressed by the gentlewomen of that 
city, with whom she used to stay for some 
time.” Marshe, who visited her house, 
saw two of her daughters, who were the 
wives of war chiefs, and a lad 5 years old, 
the son of one of the daughters, who was 
“ one of the finest featured and limbed 
children mine eyes ever saw, . . . his 
cheeks were ruddy, mixed with a deli¬ 
cate white, had eyes and hair of an hazel 
colour.” In 1734 Madam Montour re¬ 
sided at the village of Ostonwackin, on 
the Susquehanna, at the mouth of Loyal- 
sock cr., on the site of the present 
Montoursville, Lycoming co., Pa. It 
was sometimes called Frenchtown. In 
1737 Conrad Weiser, while on his way 
to Onondaga, lodged here with Madam 


938 


MONTOUR 


[b. a. e. 


Montour, who, he states, was “a French 
woman by birth, of a good family, but 
now in mode of life a complete Indian.” 
In 1744, at the great treaty of Lancaster 
between the Six Nations and the prov¬ 
inces of Virginia, Maryland, and Penn¬ 
sylvania, Madam Montour was present 
with two of her daughters, on which oc¬ 
casion she related to Marshe the story of 
her life. He represented her as genteel, 
of polished address, and as having been 
attractive in her prime; he also learned 
that her two sons-in-law and her only 
son were then absent, at war with the 
Catawba. In 1745 Madam Montour was 
living on an island in the Susquehanna, 
at Shamokin, having left Ostonwackin 
permanently. Prior to 1754 she became 
blind, but she was still vigorous enough 
to make a horseback trip from Logstown, 
on the Ohio, to Venango, a distance of 
60 m., in two days, her son Andrew, on 
foot, leading the horse all the way. 

When Count Zinzendorf visited Sha¬ 
mokin in 1742 he was welcomed by 
Madam Montour and her son Andrew. 
Seeing the Count and hearing that he 
came to preach the gospel, the truths of 
which she had almost forgotten, she 
burst into tears. It was learned that she 
believed that Bethlehem, the birthplace 
of Christ, was situated in France, and 
that it was Englishmen who crucified 
him—a silly perversion of the truth that 
originated with French religious teachers. 

In view of the fact that there is no 
record of a governor of Canada named 
Montour, the belief that she was the 
daughter of such a personage seems 
groundless, notwithstanding her own 
statement to this effect to Marshe. 
Equally doubtful is the assertion that she 
was alive during the American Revolu¬ 
tion, a statement possibly arising from 
the fact that she was confounded with 
her reputed granddaughter, Catherine of 
Catherine’s Town, situated near the head 
of Seneca lake and destroyed by Sulli¬ 
van’s army in 1779. Being more than 
60 years of age in 1744, it is not probable 
that she could have been an active par¬ 
ticipant in the Wyoming massacre, 34 
years later, and there is no authentic 
evidence connecting Madam Montour 
with the shedding of blood, white or 
Indian. 

Esther Montour, justly infamous as 
the “fiend of Wyoming,” a daughter of 
French Margaret, hence a granddaughter 
of Madam Montour and a sister of 
French Catherine and Mary, and the 
wife of Eghohowin, a ruling chief of the 
Munsee, was living in 1772 at Sheshequin, 
6 m. below Tioga Point; but in this 
year she removed 6 m. above, to a 
place where she founded a new settle¬ 
ment, later known as Queen Esther’s 


Town, which was destroyed by Col. 
Hartley in 1778. Thence she removed, 
probably to Chemung. It is known that 
there were Montours at the battle of 
Wyoming, for “Stuttering John” and 
Roland admitted it some years afterward. 
John and Catrina were always relentless 
enemies of the English colonies. That 
John, Roland, Esther, and Catherine and 
Mary were half-breeds is quite probable. 
But Esther’s bloody work at Wyoming, 
July 3,1778, has made her name execra¬ 
ted wherever known. Toward the end of 
June of the year named the Tory Colonel, 
John Butler, with about 400 British and 
Tories and about 700 Indians, chiefly 
Seneca, under Sagaiengwaraton, de¬ 
scended the Susquehanna on his way to 
attack the settlements in Wyoming val¬ 
ley, Pa. To defend the valley against 
this force there were 40 or 50 men under 
Capt. Detrick Hewitt, and the militia— 
about 400 men and boys, the residue of 
the three companies that had been en¬ 
listed in the Continental army. Col. 
Zebulon Butler, happening to be in the 
valley, took command of the little army, 
aided by Maj. Garret, Col. Dennison, and 
Lieut. Col. Dorrance. 

The 400 undisciplined militia were soon 
outflanked and broken in the ensuing 
battle. After the enemy had gained the 
rear, an officer said to Hewitt: “See! the 
enemy has gained the rear in force. 

Shall we retreat?” “I’ll be d-d if I 

do,” was Hewitt’s reply, and, like the 
other officers killed in action, he fell at 
the head of his men. The battle was 
lost. Then followed a most dreadful 
slaughter of the brave but overpowered 
soldiers of Wyoming. Without mercy 
and with the most fearful tortures, they 
were ruthlessly butchered, chiefly in the 
flight, and after having surrendered them¬ 
selves prisoners of war. Placed around 
a huge rock and held by stout Indians, 
16 men were killed one by one by the 
knife or tomahawk in the hands of 
“Queen Esther.” In a similar circle 9 
others were killed in the same brutal 
manner. From these two circles alone 
only one, a strong man named Hammond, 
escaped by almost superhuman effort. 
This slaughter, which made 150 widows 
and 600 orphans in the valley, gave Esther 
her bloody title. 

Catherine Montour, a noted character 
in the colonial history of Pennsylvania, 
and who gave the name of Catherine’s 
Town to Sheoquaga, was another daugh¬ 
ter of French Margaret, hence a grand¬ 
daughter of Madam Montour. She be¬ 
came the wife of Telelemut, a noted 
Seneca chief, named Thomas Hudson by 
the English, by whom she had a son 
named Amochol (‘Canoe’), or Andrew, 
and two daughters. The statement that 


BULL. 301 


MONTOWESE 


939 


Catherine was an educated and refined 
woman and was admitted into good 
society in Philadelphia is, under the cir¬ 
cumstances, most improbable. On Sept. 
3, 1779, Sullivan’s army destroyed 

Catherine’s Town. Catherine, with sev¬ 
eral friends, lived in 1791 “over the lake 
not far from Niagara. ’ ’ Her son Amochol 
joined the Moravian church and was 
living at New Salem, or Petquotting, in 
1788. John and Roland Montour w T ere 
her brothers, the latter being the son-in- 
law of Sagaiengwaraton, a leading Seneca 
chief. Both Roland and John were 
famous war chiefs in the border warfare 
against the English colonies. 

Mary Montour, a sister of Catherine, 
Esther, and Andrew, was the wife of 
John Cook, another noted Seneca chief 
named Kanaghragait, sometimes also 
called “ White Mingo,” who lived on the 
Allegheny and the Ohio, and died in 1790 
at Ft Wayne. From Zeisberger’s Diary 
(ii, 149, 1885) the curious information is. 
obtained that Mary was a “ Mohawk In¬ 
dian woman,” and that Mohawk was 
“ her mother tongue.” It is also stated 
that when a child Mary was baptized in 
Philadelphia by a Catholic priest. In 
1791, on the removal of the Moravian 
mission from New Salem to Canada, 
among the new converts who accompa¬ 
nied the congregation was Mary, “a sis¬ 
ter of the former Andrew Montour,” and 
“a living polyglot of the tongues of the 
West, speaking the English, French, 
Mohawk, Wyandot [Huron], Ottawa, 
Chippewa, Shawnese, and Delaware 
languages.” 

Andrew Montour, whose Indian name 
was Sdttelihu, the son of Madam Montour 
by her first husband, was for many years 
in the employ of the proprietary govern¬ 
ment of Pennsylvania as an assistant 
interpreter. In 1745 he accompanied 
Weiser and Shikellimy, the viceroy of 
the Six Nations on the Susquehanna, 
on a mission to Onondaga, the federal 
capital of the confederation. In 1748 
Andrew was presented to the council of 
the proprietary government by Weiser as 
a person especially qualified to act as an 
interpreter or messenger. At this time 
he was prominent among the Delawares. 
Hitherto Weiser and Andrew were held 
asunder by jealousy, because of Andrew’s 
efforts to secure the position of interpre¬ 
ter for Virginia in her negotiations with 
the Six Nations. But Weiser now needed 
Andrew to secure to the proprietary gov¬ 
ernment the alliance of the Ohio Indians, 
and so sunk all personal differences. In 
introducing him to the council Weiser 
stated that he had employed Andrew fre¬ 
quently on matters of great moment and 
importance, and that he had found him 
“faithful, knowing, and prudent.” At 


this time Andrew was fully remunerated 
for what he had already done for Weiser. 
Deputies from the Miami were expected 
at Philadelphia, but instead they went to 
Lancaster. Andrew Montour was the 
interpreter for the western- Indians and 
Weiser for the Six Nations. Scaroyady, 
a noted Oneida chief, living on the Ohio, 
and exercising for the Six Nations juris¬ 
diction over the western tribes similar to 
that exercised by Shikellimy over those 
in Pennsylvania, was to have been the 
speaker on this occasion, but he was in¬ 
capacitated by a fall, and so Andrew was 
chosen speaker for the western Indians. 
He enjoyed remarkable influence and 
power over the Ohio tribes, and by his 
work at the various conferences of the 
colonies with them came into enviable 
prominence in the province. His grow¬ 
ing power and influence, about 1750, at¬ 
tained such weight that the management 
of Indian affairs by Pennsylvania was 
seriously embarrassed. In 1752 Gov. 
Hamilton commissioned him to go and 
reside on Cumberland cr., over the Blue 
hills, on unpurchased lands, to prevent 
others from settling or trading there. In 
the following year the French authorities 
set a price of $500 on his head. In 1755 
he was still on his grant, living 10 m. 
n. w. of Carlisle, Pa., and was captain, 
later major, of a company of Indians in 
the English service. In 1762 he was 
the King’s interpreter to the united 
nations. Andrew served as an inter¬ 
preter for the Delawares at Shamokin, 
where Conrad Weiser held a conference 
with the several tribes in that region for 
the purpose of bringing about peace be¬ 
tween the southern confederation of In¬ 
dians and the Six Nations and their allies. 
He also served as interpreter to the gover¬ 
nor of Virginia at several important trea¬ 
ties. After receiving his grants from the 
government he was regarded as a man of ' 
great wealth, but in his public acts he 
found other means of swelling his fortune. 

Consult Bliss, Zeisberger’s Diary, i-ii, 
1885; Darlington, Gist’s Journals, 1893; 
Freeze in Pa. Mag., hi, 1879; Marshe in 
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vn, 1801; 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 65,1855; Walton, 
Conrad Weiser, 1900. (j. n. b. h.) 

Montowese (‘little god,’ diminutive 
from manito, ‘spirit.’—Trumbull). Ap¬ 
plied by Ruttenber (Tribes Hudson R., 82, 
1872), to Indians on Connecticutr. s. w. of 
Middletown, Middlesex co., Conn., though 
De Forest (Hist. Inds. Conn., 55, 1853), 
his authority, does not give the name 
as that of a tribe, but says: “Southwest 
of the principal seat of the Wangunks 
[Middletown] a large extent of country 
was held by a son of Sowheag [chief of 
the Mattabesec, q. v.] named Monto¬ 
wese.” This area probably lay partly in 


940 


MONTS PELES-MOQTAVHAITANIU 


[b. A. E. 


Middlesex, but chiefly in New Haven co. 
This chief, in 1638, sold a tract n. of the 
site of New Haven comprising a large 
portion of that county. As his father was 
chief of theMattabesec, his band probably 
belonged to that tribe. (j. m. c. t.) 

Mantoweeze.—Davenport (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., VII, 518, 1865. 

Monts Pel^s. A tribe, called from the 
nature of their country the Nation des 
Monts Peles (‘ nation of the bare moun¬ 
tains’ ), living in the n. e. part of Quebec 
province in 1661. Hind (Lab. Penin., ii, 
1863) thinks they may have been a part 
of the Nascapee. 

Mont-Peles.—Keane in Stanford, Compend., 523, 
1878. Nation des Monts pelez.—Jes. Rel. 1661, 29, 

1858. 

Mooachaht (‘ deer people ’). A tribe on 
the n. side of Nootka sd., Vancouver id. 
This is the tribe to which the term Nootka 
was applied by the discoverers of Van¬ 
couver id. Pop. 153 in 1906. Their prin¬ 
cipal village is Yuquot. The noted Ma- 
quinna (q. v.) was chief of this tribe in 
1803. 

Bo-wat-chat.—Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 56, 
1870. Bowatshat.—Swan, MS., B. A. E. Moa- 
chet.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 251, 1862. Mo'atcath.— 
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. 
Mooach aht.—Can. Ind. Aff., 188, 1883. Mooacht- 
aht.—Ibid., 357,1897. Moo-cha-ahts.—Ibid.,52,1875. 
Moouchaht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 1868. Mou- 
chatha.—Swan, MS., B. A. E. Mowaches.—Arm¬ 
strong, Oregon, 136, 1857. Mo-watch-its.—Jewitt, 
Narr., 36, 1849. Mowatshat.—Swan, MS., B. A. E. 
Mowitchat.—Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 56, 
1870. Nootka.—Schedule of Reserves, Can. Ind. 
Aff., Suppl. to Ann. Rep., 82, 1902. 

Moodyville Saw Mills. The local name 
for a body of Salish of Fraser River 
agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 86 in 1889. 

Moodyville Saw Mills.—Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 1889, 
268, 1890. Moonyville Saw Mills.—Can. Ind. Aff. 
Rep. 1886, 229, 1887. 

Mooharmowikarnu (Moo - har -mo-wi- 
kar'-nu ). A subdivision of the Dela¬ 
wares (q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 
1877. 

Mookwungwahoki (Moo - kwung - wa- ho / - 
ki). A subdivision of the Delawares (q. 
v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Moonack. A Maryland-Virginia name 
of the ground-hog (Arctomysmonax) ; also, 
by transference, the name of a mythic ani¬ 
mal feared by many Southern negroes. 
The word occurs very early. Glover, in 
his account of Virginia (Philos. Trans. 
Roy.Soc.,xi, 630,1676), speaks of monacks. 
John Burroughs (Winter Sunshine, 25, 
1876), says: “In Virginia they call wood¬ 
chucks ‘ moonacks Lewis and Clark 
(Orig. Jour., ii, iv, 1905) use the forms 
moonax and moonox. It is probable that 
the monax in the scientific name of this ani¬ 
mal is a Linnean latinization of its aborig¬ 
inal appellation. The Virginian moonack , 
or monack, is cognate with the Delaware 
monachgeu (German form), the Passa- 
maquoddy monimquess, the Micmac rriun- 
umkwech, etc. The word signifies ‘the 
digger,’ 7rom the Algonquian radical 


muna, or mona, ‘to dig’; seen also in 
the Chippewa monaike, ‘he scratches 
up’; in Cree, monahikew. The Sauk, Fox, 
and Kickapoo language has monana% 
‘little digger’, for wmodchuck, according 
to Dr William Jones. (a. f. c.). 

Moonhartarne ( Moon-har-tar-ne, ‘ dig¬ 
ging’). A subdivision of the Delawares 
(q. v. ).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Moors. See Croatan Indians. 

Moose. The.common name of a species 
of large deer ( Cervus alces) found in 
Maine and parts of Canada and formerly 
over most of n. e. North America. An 
identical term for this animal occurs in 
many Algonquian dialects: Virginian, 
moos; Narraganset and Massachuset, 
moos; Delaware, mos; Passamaquoddy, 
mus; Abnaki, monz; Chippewa, mo n s; 
Cree, monswa. All these words signify 
‘ he strips or eats off, 7 in reference to the 
animal’s habit of eating the young bark 
and twigs of trees. The word came into 
English from one of the New England 
dialects. Derivative words and expres¬ 
sions are: Moose bird (Canada jay); moose 
call, moose horn, or moose trumpet (a 
bark trumpet used to imitate notes of 
this animal); moose elm (slippery elm); 
moose fly (a large brown fly common in 
Maine); moosewood (applied variously to 
the striped maple, Acer pennsylvanica) ; 
the leather wood ( Dirca palustris ), and 
the hobblebush ( Viburnum lantanoides ); 
moose yard (the home and browsing- 
place of the moose in winter), (a. f. c.) 

Moosehead Lake Indians. The common 
name of a band of Penobscot living on 
Moosehead lake, Me.—Vetromile, Abna- 
kis, 22, 1866. 

Moosemise. A name current in parts of 
New England, Vermont in particular, for 
the false wintergreen ( Pyrola americana). 
The name seems to have been transferred 
from another plant, since in Chippewa 
and Nipissing mo n somish, signifying 
‘moose shrub,’ designates the hobble- 
bush ( Viburnum lantanoides), called in 
Canadian French bois d’orignal. The 
word, which is written moosemize also, 
is derived from some Algonquian dialect 
of the Chippewa group or a closely related 
one of the E. (a."f. c. ) 

Mooshkaooze (‘ heron ’). A gens of the 
Chippewa, q. v. 

Moosh-ka-oo-ze'.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. 
Moshka'u’sig.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. 

Mooskwasuh (‘muskrat’). A gens of 
the Abnaki, q. v. 

Moos-kwa-suh'.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877. 
Mcskwas.—J. D. Prince, inf’n, 1905 (modern St 
Francis Abnaki form). 

Mootaeyuhew. A Luiseno village for¬ 
merly in the neighborhood of San Luis 
Rey mission, s. Cal.—Taylor in Cal. Far¬ 
mer, May 11, 1860. 

Moqtavhaitaniu ( Moqta'vhita/niu , ‘black 
men,’ i. e. Ute; sing. Moqta'vhaita'n). 


BULL. 30] 


MOQUATS-MOQUELUMNAN FAMILY 


941 


A band of the Cheyenne, possibly of 
mixed Ute descent. (j. m. ) 

Mohk tahwa tan in. —Grinnell, Social Org. Chey¬ 
ennes, 136,1905 (misprint in \oviu). Ute.— Dorsey 
in Field Columb. Mus. Pub. no. 103, 62, 1905. 

Moquats ( Mo'-quats) . A band of Paiute 
formerly living near Kingston mt., s. e. 
Cal.—Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 51, 
1874. 

Moquelumnan Family (adapted from 
Moquelumne, a corruption of the Miwok 
Wakalumitoh , the name of a river in 
Calaveras co., Cal.). A linguistic family, 
established by Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 
92,1891), consisting of three divisions, the 
Miwok, the so-called Olamentke, and the 
Northern or Lake County Moquelumnan. 
The territory originally occupied was in 
three sections, one lying between 
Cosumnes and Fresno rs.; another in 
Marin, Sonoma, and Napa cos., the terri¬ 
tory extending along the coast from the 
Golden Gate to Salmon cr., n. of Bodega 
bay and e. as far as the vicinity of Sonoma; 
and the third a comparatively small area 
in the s. end of Lake co., extending from 
Mt St Helena northward to the e. ex¬ 
tremity of Clear lake (see Kfoeber in 
Am. Anthrop., vm, no. 4, 1906). The 
Miwok division, which constituted the 
great body of the family, was described as 
late as 1876 as the largest Indian group of 
California, both in population and in ex¬ 
tent of territory. 

Their houses were very rude, those of 
the Miwok having been simply frame¬ 
works of poles and brush, which in winter 
were covered with earth. In the moun¬ 
tains cone-shaped summer lodges of 
puncheons were made. Acorns, which 
formed their principal food, were gathered 
in large quantities when the harvest was 
abundant and stored for winter use in 
granaries raised above the ground. It 
has been asserted that the Miwok ate 
every variety of living creature indigenous 
to their territory except the skunk. They 
were especially fond of jackrabbits, the 
skins of which were rudely woven into 
robes. From lack of cedar they pur¬ 
chased bows and sometimes arrows from 
the mountain Indians, the medium of bar¬ 
ter being shell money. 

With the Miwok, chiefship was hered¬ 
itary when the successor was of command¬ 
ing influence, but this was seldom the 
case. As with most of the tribes of Cali¬ 
fornia, marriage among the Miwok tribes 
was practically by purchase, but in return 
for the presents given by the groom the 
father of the bride gave the new couple 
various substantial articles, and gifts of 
food were often continued by the parents 
for years after the marriage. The father, 
in old age, was ill treated, however, being 
little else than a slave to his daughter and 
her husband. When twins were born one 
of the children was killed. Shamanistic 


rites were performed by both men and 
women, and scarification and suction were 
the principal remedial agents. California 
balm of gilead (Picea grandis), and plas¬ 
ters of hot ashes and moist earth were also 
used in certain cases. Payment for treat¬ 
ment was made by the patient, and in 
case of non-recovery the life of the practi¬ 
tioner was demanded. The acorn dance, 
as well as a number of other ceremonies, 
principally for feasting or amusement, 
were formerly celebrated by the Miwok. 
They had no puberty dance, nor did they 
hold a dance for the dead, but an annual 
mourning and sometimes a special mourn¬ 
ing were observed. All the possessions 
of the dead were burned with them, their 
names were never afterward mentioned, 
and those who bore the same name 
changed it for others. Formerly widows 
generally covered their faces with pitch 
and the younger women singed their hair 
short as signs of widowhood. Cremation 
generally prevailed among the Miwok 
tribes, but was never universal. 

Comparatively few of the natives of the 
Miwok division of this stock survive, and 
these are scattered in the mountains, so 
that no accurate census has been taken. 
Six individuals of the so-called Olamentke 
division lived on Tomales bay in 1888. 

The Moquelumnan tribes or rancherias 
that have been recognized are as follows: 

Miwok. —Awani, Chowchilla, Chumi- 
dok, Chumtiya, Chumuch, Chumwit, 
Hittoya, Howeches, Koni, Lopotatimni, 
Machemni, Mokelumne, Newichumni, 
Nuchu, Olowitok, Pohonichi, Sakaia- 
kumne, Servushamne, Talatui, Tamuleko, 
Tumidok, Tumun, Walakumni, and Yu- 
loni. 

Olamentke. —Bolinas, Chokuyem, Gui- 
men, Jukiusme, Likatuit, Nicassias, 
Numpali, Olumpali, Sonoma, Tamal, Tu- 
lares, Tumalehnias, Utchium. 

Tribes or rancherias not classified are: 
Apangasi, Aplache, Chupumni, Cosumni, 
Cotoplanemis, Hokokwito, Keeches, 
Kumaini, Lapapu, Lesamaiti, Macheto, 
Merced, Mikechuses, Nelcelchumnee, 
Noketrotra, Notomidula, Numaltachi(?), 
Nutrecho, Okechumne, Pahkanu, Peta¬ 
luma, Potawackati, Potoyanti, Sakaya, 
Seantre,Siyante, Succaah,Suscols,Threse, 
Tiposies, Wahaka, and Wiskala. 

(h. w. h. a. l. k.) 

=Meewoc.— Powers in Overland Month., 322, 
Apr. 1873 (general account of family with allu¬ 
sions to language); Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 
159, 1877 (gives habitat and bands of family); 
Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 433, 1877. 

= Mi-wok.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,m, 346, 
1877 (nearly as above). ^Moquelumnan.—Powell 
in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 92, 1891. > Moquelumne.— 
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 81, 1856 
(includes Hale’s Talatui, Tuolumne from School¬ 
craft, Mumaltachi, Mullateco, Apangasi, La- 
pappu, Siyante or Typoxi, Hawhaw’s band of 
Aplaches/San Rafael vocabulary, Tshokoyem 
vocabulary, Cocouyem and Yonkiousme Pater¬ 
nosters, Olamentke of Kostromitonov, Pater- 


942 


MOQUINO-MORAVIANS 


[B. a. e. 


nosters for Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee 
de los Tulares of Mofras, Paternoster of the 
Langue Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco); 
Latham, Opuscula, 347,1860; Latham, Elem. Comp. 
Philol., 414,1862 (same as above). >Mutsun.— 
Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 535, 1877 
(vocabs. of Mi'-wok, Tuolumne, Costano, Tcho- 
ko-yem, Mutsun, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz, Chum- 
te'-ya, Kaw6ya, San Raphael Mission, Talatui, 
Olamentke); Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157, 
1877 (gives habitat and members of family); 
Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 430, 1877. 

X Runsiens.— Keane in Stanford,Compend., Cent, 
and So. Am., app., 476, 1878 (includes Olhones, 
Eslenes, Santa Cruz, San Miguel, Lopillamillos, 
Mipacmacs, Kulanapos, Yolos, Suisunes, Tal- 
luches, Chowclas, Waches, Talches, Poo wells). 
< Tcho-ko-yem. —Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 421, 1853 (mentioned as a band and 
dialect). 

Moquino (said to have been named from 
a Mexican family that occupied the site). 
Formerly a small pueblo inhabited dur¬ 
ing the summer season by the Laguna 
Indians, but now entirely Mexicanized. 
Situated on Paguate r., Valencia co., N. 
Mex., about 9 m. n. of Laguna. 

Mogino. —Powell in Am. Nat., xiv, 604, Aug. 1880. 
Moguino. —Loew (1875) in Wheeler Survey Rep., 
vii, 345,1879. Moquino.— Emory, Recon., 133,1848. 

Moquoso. A former tribe and village 
in w. Florida. The map of De Dry (1591) 
places it w. of the headwaters of St 
Johns r.; according to the Gentleman of 
Elvas it lay 2 leagues from the gulf and 2 
days’ journey from Bahia de Espfritu 
Santo, which is thought to be Tampa bay. 
Mocopo.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723. Mocosa. — 
Mercator map (1569) cited in Maine Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 2d s., i,392,1869. Mocoso.— Drake, Tragedies, 
15,1841. Mocosson. —De Bry, Brev. Narr., ii, map, 
1591. Mogoso.— Fontaneda (1575) in Ternaux- 
Compans, Voy., xx, 24, 1841. Mogozo. —Ibid., 21. 
Moquoso. —Laudonni^re (1564) in French, Hist. 
Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. Mucopo. —Garcilasso de 
la Vega, Fla., 28, 1723. 

Moqwaio (‘ wolf ’). A phratry and also 
a subphratry or gens of the Menominee. 
Ma'hwaw 4 . —Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Moqwaio. — 
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. 1, 42,1896. 

Mora. A raneheria near the presidio 
of La Bahia and the mission of Espfritu 
Santo de Zuniga on the lower Rio San 
Antonio, Tex., in 1785, at which date it 
had 26 inhabitants (Bancroft, No. Mex¬ 
ican States, i, 659, 1886). The people 
were probably of Karankawan affinity. 

Moratiggon. The village where Samo- 
set lived in 1621. It was distant “one 
day from Plymouth by water with great 
wind, and five days by land.” Probably 
in s. Maine, in Abnaki or Pennacook 
territory. 

Moratiggon.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, 853. 1705. 
Morattiggon. —Mourt (1621) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 1st s., VIII, 226, 1802. 

Moratoc. A tribe described in 1586 as 
living 160 m. up Roanoke r., perhaps 
near the s. Virginia line. A map of that 
period places their village on the n. side 
of the river, which then bore their name. 
They are said to have been an important 
tribe which refused to hold intercourse 
with the English. 

Moratico.— Simons in Smith (1629), Va., I, 176, 
repr. 1819. Moratocks. —Lane (1586), ibid., 87. 
Moratoks. —Ibid. Moratuck. —Smith (1629), ibid., 
map. 


Moraughtacund. A tribe of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy, formerly living on 
the n. bank of the Rappahannock, in 
Lancaster and Richmond cos., Va. In 
1608 they numbered about 300. Their 
principal village, of the same name, was 
near the mouth of Moratico r. in Rich¬ 
mond co. (j. M.) 

Moranghtaouna. —Smith (1629), Va., I, map, 
repr. 1819 (the village; evidently a misprint 
for Moraughtacund). Morattico. —Purchas, Pil- 
grimes, iv, 1713, 1626. Moraughtacud. —Ibid., 
1715. Moraughtacunds. —Strachev ( ca. 1612), Va., 
37, 1849. 

Moravians. Mahican, Munsee, and Del¬ 
awares who followed the teachings of 
the Moravian brethren and were by 
them gathered into villages apart from 
their tribes. The majority were Munsee. 
In 1740 the Moravian missionaries began 
their work at the Mahican village of 
Shekomeko in New York. Meeting with 
many obstacles there, they removed with 
their converts in 1746 to Pennsylvania, 
where they built the new mission village 
of Friedenshuetten on the Susquehanna. 
Here they were more successful and were 
largely recruited from the Munsee and 
Delawares, almost all of the former tribe 
not absorbed by the Delawares finally 
joining them. They made another set¬ 
tlement at Wyalusing, but on the ad¬ 
vance of the white population removed to 
Beaver r. in w. Pennsylvania, where they 
built the village of Friedensstadt. They 
remained here about a year, and in 1773 
removed to Muskingum r. in Ohio, in 
the neighborhood of the others of their 
tribes, and occupied the three villages of 
Gnadenh uetten, Salem, and Sclioen brunn. 
In 1781, during the border troubles of the 
Revolution, the llurons removed them 
to the region of the Sandusky and Scioto, 
in x. Ohio, either to prevent their giving 
information to the colonists or to protect 
them from the hostility of the frontiers¬ 
men. The next spring a party of about 
140 were allowed to return to their 
abandoned villages to gather their corn, 
when they were treacherously attacked 
by a party of border ruffians and the 
greater part massacred in the most cold¬ 
blooded manner, after which their vil¬ 
lages were burned. The remaining Mo¬ 
ravians moved to Canada in 1791, under 
the leadership of Zeisberger, and built the 
village of Fairfield on Thames r. This vil¬ 
lage was burned by the Americans in the 
War of 1812, in consequence of which the 
Indians removed and rebuilt on the oppo¬ 
site sideof the river, in Orfordtp., Kentco., 
Ontario. The number in 1884 was 275, 
but had increased to 348 in 1906. There 
were until recently a few in Franklin co., 
Kans. S ee Missions. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Big Beavers.—Rupp, W. Pa., 47, 1846 (“Christian 
Indians or Big Beavers,” because of their resi¬ 
dence about 1770 on (Big) Beaver or. in w. Pa.). 
Christian Indians.—Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 
495, 1855 (frequently used as synonymous with 



BULL. 30] 


MOREAH 


MORTARS 


943 






Munsee, but properly refers only to those of the 
tribe under Moravian teachers). Moravins. —Can. 
Ind. Aff., pt. 2, 65, 1906 (misprint). 

Morbah. ( Mor-bah ). The Parrot clan of 
the Pecos people of N. Mex.—Hewett in 
Am. Anthrop., vi.,439, 1904. 

Morbanas. A former tribe, probably 
Coahuiltecan, met in 1693 on the road 
from Coahuila to mission San Francisco, 
Texas.—Salinas (1693) in Dictamen Fis¬ 
cal, Nov. 30,1716, MS. cited by H. E. Bol¬ 
ton, inf’n, 1906. 

Morongo. A reservation of 38,600 acres 
of fair land, unpatented, in Riverside co., 
s. Cal., occupied by 286 Mission Indians 
under Mission Tule River agency.—Ind. 
Aff. Rep., 175, 1902; ibid., 192, 1905; Kel¬ 
sey, Rep., 32, 1906. 

Mortars. Utensils employed by Indian 
tribes for the trituration of food and other 
substances. The Southwestern or Mexi¬ 
can type of grinding stone is known as a 
metate, and its operation consists in plac¬ 
ing the substance to be treated, dry or 
moist, on the sloping upper surface of 
the slab and crushing and rubbing it with 
a flattish hand-stone until it is reduced to 
the required consistency or degree of 
fineness (see Metates , Mullers). This form 
of the uteasil passes with many variations 
in size and shape into the typical mortar, 
a more or less deep receptacle in which 
the substance is 
pulverized if 
dry, or reduced 
to pulp if moist, 
by crushing 
with a pestle, 
which may be 
cylindrical, dis- 
coidal, globular, 
or bell-shaped. 

Mortars are 
made of stone, 
wood, bone 
(whale verte¬ 
brae), or impro¬ 
vised of rawhide 
or other sub¬ 
stances depend¬ 
ing on the region 
and the materi¬ 
als nearest at 
hand. The more primitive stone forms 
are bowlders or other suitable pieces hol- 


ished, the stone in some cases, as in s. 
California, being obtained by quarrying 
from the rock in place. California fur- 




VOKUTS WOMEN GRINDING SEED. (.Santa Fe Railroad) 


a b 

SIMPLE FORMS OF STONE MORTARS. a CALIFORNIA h-8); 
b , Rhode Island (i-8) 

)wed out on the upper surface suffi- 
ientlv to hold the material to be reduced, 
rhile'the more highly specialized forms 
re tastefully shaped and carefully fin¬ 


GLOBULAR STONE MORTARS FROM AURIFEROUS GRAVELS, 
CALIFORNIA. (holmes) 

nishes the greatest variety of these uten¬ 
sils. In one district globular concretions 
were used: a seg¬ 
ment of the shell 
was broken away 
and the softer in¬ 
terior removed, 
thus affording a 
deep symmetrical 
receptacle. In 
other localities cy- 
lindrical forms Alaskan mortar with sculptured 

. . . .. ornament; 1-12. 

were worked out ot 

lava or sandstone. In others still, the 
under surface was conical, so as to be 

conveniently set 
in the ground. 
Ordinary mor¬ 
tars when in use 
are usually set 
in the ground 
to give them 
greater stabil¬ 
ity. The re¬ 
markable and 
handsome sand- 
stone vessels 
and soapstone 
pots of s. Cali¬ 
fornia are not 
here classed as 
mortars. Occa¬ 
sionally the 
smaller mortars 
were e m b e 1 - 
lished with 
engraved lines or sculptured to rep¬ 
resent animal forms. Alaskan mortars, 
especially those of the Haida, are superior 
in this respect. An artistic mortar of 
this class, illustrated by Niblack, was 
used for pulverizing tobacco, and this is a 
type in very general use among the North¬ 
western tribes at the present time. 

Perhaps the most remarkable mortars 
are those occurring frequently in the 
acorn-producing districts of the Pacific 
slope, where exposures of massive rock in 
place have worked in them groups of 
mortars, the conical receptacles number¬ 
ing, in several observed cases, nearly a 









944 


MORTARS 


[B. A. E. 


hundred. Some of the Western tribes set 
a conical basket, after removing its bottom, 
within the rim of the mortar bowl to 
serve as a hopper for retaining the meal. 



GROUP OF MORTARS IN GRANITE SURFACE, CALIFORNIA 
(holmes) 


Primitive forms of this utensil are the 
rawhide mortars used by the Plains tribes 
for pounding pemmican, the piece of 


rawhide being 
forced into a de- 
pression in the 
ground, forming a 
basin. Again, the 
hide was placed be¬ 
neath the stone or 
wooden mortar to 
catch the particles 
that fell over. The 
rough basket - like 
receptacle of sticks 
set in the ground by 
of lower Colorado r 
rudest known form c 



STONE MORTAR WITH BASKET 

Hopper; California 


the Yuman tribes 
. is probably the 
if this utensil. In 



HUPA MORTAR WITH BASKET HOPPERS. (mason) 


size stone mortars vary from that of the 
tiny paint cup found among the toilet 
articles of the warrior to the substan¬ 
tial basin holding several 
gallons. The larger ones, 
especially those exca- 
v a t e d in rock masses, 
were probably often 
used for “stone-boiling.” 

(See Food.) 

The substances pulverized in mortars 
were the various minerals used for paint, 
potsherds and shells for tempering clay, 
etc., medicinal and ceremonial substances 



SMALL PAINT MORTAR, 
HUPA; 1-7 (MASON) 


of many kinds, including tobacco, and a 
wide range of food products, as maize, 
seeds, nuts, berries, roots, bark, dried 
meats, fish, grasshop¬ 
pers, etc. A note¬ 
worthy group of paint 
mortars or plates, the 
use of which has here¬ 
tofore been regarded 
as problematical, are 
described under the 
heading Notched plates. 

The wooden mortar 
was usually made of a 
short section of a log, 
hollowed out at one 
end and in some cases 
sharpened at the other 
for setting in the 
ground; but the recep¬ 
tacles were sometimes 
made in the side of a 
log or were cut out as in- 
dividual utensils in basin or trough shape. 
The wooden mortar was in much more gen¬ 
eral use in districts where suitable stone 
was notavailable, as in Florida, inportions 
of the Mississippi valley, and on lower 
Colorado r. Among the remarkable 





WOODEN MORTAR, CHIPPEWAJ 1-16. (Hoffman) 

archeologic finds made by Cushing at Key 
Marco, Fla., are a number of small cup¬ 
like mortars with mallet-shaped pestles, 
handsomely formed and carefully fin¬ 
ished. 



ancient wooden mor- wooden mortar, Iroquois 

tar, Florida; i-4. (lafitau) 

(cushing) 


Speaking of the Indians of Carolina, 
Lawson says: “The savage men never 
beat their corn to make bread, but that is 
the women’s work, especially the girls, of 
whom you shall see four beating with 
long great pestles in a narrow wooden 
mortar; and everyone keeps her stroke so 
exactly that ’tis worthy of admiration.” 











BULL. 301 


MORTUARY CUSTOMS 


945 


Mortars are referred to bv numerous 
writers, including Abbott (1) in Surveys 
West of 100th Merid., vn, 1879, (2) Prim. 
Indus., 1881; Cushing in Proc. Am. 
Philos. Soc., xxxv, 153, 1896; Fowke, 
Archreol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; Hoffman in 
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Holmes in Nat. 
Mus. Rep. 1902, 1903; Jones, Antiq. So. 
Inds., 1873; Lawson (1701), Hist. Car., 
repr. 1860; MacCauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 
1887; Meredith in Moorehead’s Prehist. 
Impls., 1900; Morgan, League of Iroquois, 
1904; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 
1890; Nordenskiold, Cliff Dwellers of 
the Mesa Verde, 1893; Powers in Cont. 
N. A. Etlinol., hi, 1877; Rau in Smith- 
son. Cont., xxn, 1876; Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, i, 1851; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn., 
1897; Yates in Moorehead’s Prehist. 
Impls., 1900. (w. h. h. ) 

Mortuary customs. Yarrow (1st Rep. 
B. A. E., 1881) classifies Indian modes 
of burial as follows: 

(1) Inhumation, (2) Embalmment, (3) 
Deposition in urns, (4) Surface burial, 
(5) Cremation, (6) Aerial sepulture, (7) 
Aquatic burial. As the second relates to 
the preparation of the body, and the 
third, fourth, sixth, and seventh refer 
chiefly to the receptacles or the place of 
deposit, the disposal of the dead by the 
Indians may be classed under the heads 
Burial and Cremation. 

The usual mode of burial among North 
American Indians has been by inhuma¬ 
tion, or interment in pits, graves, or holes 
in the ground, in stone cists, in mounds, 
beneath or in cabins, wigwams, houses, 
or lodges, or in caves. As illustrations it 
may be stated that the Mohawk formerly 
made a large round hole in which the 
body was placed in a squatting posture, 
after which it was covered with timber 
and earth. Some of the Carolina tribes 
first placed the corpse in a cane hurdle 
and deposited it in an outhouse for a day; 
then it was taken out and wrapped in 
rush or cane matting, placed in a reed cof¬ 
fin, and deposited in a grave. Remains 
of this kind of wrapping have been found 
in some of the southern mounds, and in 
one case in a rock shelter. The bottom of 
the grave was sometimes covered with 
bark, on which the body was laid, and 
logs or slabs placed over it to prevent the 
earth from falling on the remains. An 
ancient form of burial in Tennessee, s. Illi¬ 
nois, at points on Delaware r., and among 
ancient pueblo d wellers in n. New Mexico, 
was in box-shape cists of rough stone slabs. 
Sepulchers of this kind have been found 
in mounds and cemeteries. In some in¬ 
stances they were placed in the same 
general direction, but in excavations made 
by the Bureau of American Ethnology it 
was found that these cists, as w T ell as the 
uninclosed bodies in mounds, were gen¬ 


erally placed without regard to uniform¬ 
ity of direction. When uniformity did 
occur, it was generally an indication of 



STONE GRAVE, SHOWING ORDINARY CONSTRUCTION 


a comparatively modern interment. The 
Creeks and the Seminole of Florida gener¬ 
ally buried in a circular pit about 4 ft 
deep; the corpse, 
with a blanket or 
cloth wrapped about 
it, being placed in a 
sitting posture, the 
legs bent under and 
tied together. The 
sitting position in 
ancient burials has 
often been errone¬ 
ously inferred from 
the bones occurring 
in a heap. It ap¬ 
pears to have been a 
custom in the N. W., 
as well as in the 

E. and S.E., to re- stone grave, top view; Illinois. 

move the flesh by {thomas) 

previous burial or otherwise, and 

then to bundle the bones and bury 
them, sometimes in communal pits. It 
was usual in 
grave burials to 
place the body 
in a horizontal 
position on its 
back, although 
the custom of 
placing on the 
side, often with 
the knees drawn 
up, was also 
practised; burial 
face downward, 




Stone Grave with Offset Arch; 
Iowa, (thomas) 



Archeo Stone grave; Ohio, 
(thomas) 


however, was rare. In addition to those 
mentioned, modes of burials in mounds va¬ 
ried. Sometimes a single body and some¬ 
times several were 
placed in a wooden 
vault of upright 
timbers or of logs 
laid horizontally to 
form a pen. Dome¬ 
shaped stone vaults 
occur over a single 
sitting skeleton. 

Not infrequently the body was laid 
on the ground, slightly covered with 
earth, and over this a layer of plastic clay 



Burial under Heap of Stones; 
Hudson bay Eskimo, (turner) 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-60 











946 


MORTUARY CUSTOMS 


[b. a. e. 


was spread on which was built a fire, 
forming an earthen shield over the corpse 
before additional earth was added. Cav¬ 
erns, fissures in rocks, rock shelters, etc., 
were frequently used as depositories for 
the dead. According to Yarrow, a cave 
near the House mts., Utah, in which the 
Gosiute Indians were in the habit of de¬ 
positing their dead, was quite filled with 
human remains in 1872. 

Embalmment and mummification were 
practised to a limited extent; the former 
chiefly in Virginia, the Carolinas, and 



MUMMY FROM AN ALASKAN CAVE. (dall) 


Florida, and the latter in Alaska. Of the 
modes of disposing of the dead, included 
by Yarrow under “aerial sepulture,” the 
following are examples: Burial in lodges, 
observed among the 
Sioux; these appear to 
have been exceptional 
and were merely an 
abandonment of the 
dead during an epi¬ 
demic; a few cases of 
burial in lodges, how¬ 
ever, have been ob¬ 
served in Alabama. Urn!)ur,al Alabama mound; 
Burial beneath the 
floor of the house and then at once 
burning the house "were practised to some 
extent in e. Arkansas. Scaffold and 
tree burial was practised in Wiscon¬ 
sin, Minnesota, the Dakotas, Montana, 



.» WW, 

DAKOTA SCAFFOLD BURIAL. (yarrow) 


etc., by the Chippewa, Sioux, Siksika, 
Mandan, Grosventres, Arapaho, and other 
Indians. The burial mounds of Wiscon¬ 
sin indicate this mode of disposing of the 
dead in former times, as the skeletons 
were buried after the removal of the 
flesh, and the bones frequently indicate 
long exposure to the air. The Eskimo of 


the w. coast of Alaska sometimes placed 
the dead on a platform 2 or 3 ft above 
ground and built over it a double roofing, 
or tent, of driftwood. It was also the 
custom among the Indians of the Lake 



DAKOTA TREE BURIAL. (yarrow) 


region to have at certain periods what 
may be termed communal burials, in 
which the bodies or skeletons of a dis¬ 
trict were removed from their temporary 



DAKOTA SCAFFOLD BURIAL. (yarrow) 


burial places and deposited with much 
ceremony in a single large pit (see Bre- 
beuf in Jes. Rel. for 1636,128-139, 1858). 

On theN.W. coast, n. of Columbia r., the 
dead were usually placed in little cabin- 











BULL. 30] 


MORZHOVOI-MOSAIC 


947 


shaped mortuary houses, or box-shaped 
wooden receptacles raised on posts, on the 
ground, or occasionally in trees, and some¬ 
times in caves, though cremation, except of 



BURIAL HOUSES, NORTHWEST COAST TRIBES. (yarrow) 


the shamans, was formerly common in this 
section. The bodies of shamans were 
placed in small rectangular houses built 
up of poles; the bones of children were 
sometimes suspended in baskets. Another 
method of disposing of the dead is that 
known as canoe burial, the bodies being 
deposited in canoes which were placed 
on posts or in the forks of trees. This 



CANOE BURIAL, CHINOOK. (swan) 


method was practised by the Clallam, 
Twana, and other tribes of the N.W. 
coast. Cremation was formerly practised 
by a number of tribes of the Pacific slope. 
The ancient inhabitants of s. Arizona 
practised cremation in addition to house 
burial, the ashes of the cremated dead be¬ 
ing placed in urns; but among the modern 
Pueblos, especially those most affected by 
Spanish missionaries, burials are made in 
cemeteries in the villages. 

The ceremonies attending and following 
burial were various. The use of fire was 
common, and it was also a very general 
custom to place food, articles especially 
prized by or of interest to the dead, 
and sometimes articles having a symbolic 
signification, in or near the grave. Scari¬ 
fying the body, cutting the hair, and 
blackening the lace by the mourners were 
common customs, as, in some tribes, were 
feasts and dancing at a death or funeral. 
As a rule the bereaved relatives observed 
some kind of mourning for a certain 
period, as cutting the hair, discarding or¬ 
naments and neglecting the personal ap¬ 
pearance, carrying a bundle representing 
the husband (among the Chippewa, etc.), 
or the bones of the dead husband (among 
some northern Athapascan tribes), and 
wailing night and morning in solitary 
places. It was a custom among some 


tribes to change the name of the family 
of the deceased, and to drop the name of 
the dead in whatever connection. 

Consult Bancroft, Native Races, 1874; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, 
pt. hi, 1905; Farrand, Basis of Am. 
Hist., 1904; Holm, Descr. New Sweden, 
1834; Jesuit Relations, Th waites ed., 
i-lxxii, 1896-1901; Kroeber in Bull. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., xvm, pt. i, 1902; Owen, 
Musquakie Folk-lore, 1904; and the vari¬ 
ous reports of the B. A. E., especially 
the 1st Report, containing Yarrow’s Mor¬ 
tuary Costoms of the N. A. Indians, and 
authorities therein cited. See Mourning, 
Religion , Urn Burial. (c. t.) 

Morzhovoi (Russian: ‘walrus’). An 
Aleut village at the end of Alaska penin., 
Alaska, formerly at the head of Morzho¬ 
voi bay, now on the n. shore, on Traders 
cove, which opens into Isanotski bay. 
Pop. 45in 1833 (accordingto Yeniaminof), 
68 in 1890. 

Morshevoi.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,19,1884. 
Morshewskoie.—Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 
142,1855. Morzaivskoi.—Elliott, Cona.Aff. Alaska, 
225, 1875. Morzhevskoe.—Veniaminof, Zapiski.n, 
203,1840. Morzovoi.—Post route map, 1903. New 
Morzhovoi.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 
Old Morzhovoi.—Ibid. Protasso.—Petroff in 10th 
Census, Alaska, map, 1884 (strictly the name of the 
Greek church here). Protassof.—Ibid., 23. Pro- 
tassov.—Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 25,1881. 

Mosaic. An art carried to high perfec¬ 
tion among the more cultured aborigines 
of Mexico, where superb work was done, 
several examples of which enrich Euro¬ 
pean museums. The art was but little 
in vogue n. of Mexico. Hopi women of 
to-day wear pendants made of small 
square or oblong wooden tablets upon 
which rude turquoise mosaics are set in 
black pinon gum. These are very inferior, 
however, to specimens recovered from 
ancient ruins in the Gila and Little Colo¬ 
rado valleys in Arizona, and in Chaco 
canyon, N. Mex., which consist of gor¬ 
gets, ear pendants, and other objects, 
some of which are well preserved while 
others are represented only by the foun¬ 
dation form surrounded by clusters of 
settings loosened by decay of the matrix. 
Turquoise was the favorite material, but 
bits of shell and various bright-colored 
stones were also employed. The foun¬ 
dation form was of shell, wood, bone, and 
jet and other stone, and the matrix of gum 
or asphaltum. Although the work is 
neatly executed, the forms are simple and 
the designs not elaborate. One of the best 
examples, from the Little Colorado drain¬ 
age in Arizona, is a pendant rudely repre¬ 
senting a frog, the foundation of which is 
a bivalve shell, the matrix of pitch, and 
the settings of turquoise are arranged in 
lines conforming neatly to the shape of 
the creature, a bit of red jasper being set 
in the center of the back (Fewkes). Un¬ 
fortunately the head of the frog has dis- 




948 


MOSHAICH 


MOTAHTOSIKS 


[b. a. e. 





Ancient mosaic Frog, Arizona; 
1-z. (fewkes) 


integrated. Among the specimens of in¬ 
laying obtained by the Hyde Expedition 
of the American Museum of Natural 
History, from Pu¬ 
eblo Bonito ruin, 

N. Mex., are a jet 
or lignite frog 
with turquoise 
eyes and neck¬ 
band, a scraper¬ 
like implement of 
deer b o n e with 
encircling orna¬ 
mental bands in 
turquoise and jet, 
and a small bird 
of hematite taste¬ 
fully set with tur¬ 
quoise and shell 

(Pepper) ... . , 

The ancient graves of s. California have 
yielded a number of specimens of rude 
mosaic work in which bits of abalone 
shell are set in 
asphaltum as 
incrustations 
for handles of 
knives and for 
other objects 
(Abbott). In¬ 
laying in other 
sections of the 
country con¬ 
sists chiefly of 
the insertion of 
bits of shell, 
bone, or stone 
separately in 
rows or in 
simple figures 
in the margins of utensils, implements, 
masks, etc. (Niblack, Rust). 

Consult Abbott in Surv. West of 100th 
Merid., vn, 1879; Fewkes (1) in Am. 
Anthrop., ix, no. 11,1896, (2) in Smithson. 
Rep. 1896,1898, (3) in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 
1903; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; 
Niblack in Rep. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1888, 
1890; Pepper in Am. Anthrop., n. s., vn, 
no. 2, 1905; Rust in Am. Anthrop., n. s., 
vm, no. 4, 1906. (w. h. h.) 

Moshaich. The native name of the ex¬ 
tinct Buffalo clans of Acoma and Sia pue¬ 
blos, N. Mex. 

Moshaich-hanoqch.—Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 
349, 1896^( Acoma form; hdnoqch= ‘ people ’). Mu- 
Bha'ch-hano.—Ibid. (Sia form). 


INCRUSTED OBJECTS FROM PUEBLO 

Bonito, new Mexico; i-4. (pepper) 


Moshoquen. A village or band appar¬ 
ently on or near the s. coast of Maine in 
1616, and probably connected with the 
Abnaki confederacy. Mentioned by 
Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
3d s., vi, 107, 1837. (j. m.) 

Moshulitubbee. See Mushalatubhee. 

Mosilian. A division of the New Jersey 
Delawares formerly on the e. bank of 


Delaware r. about the present Trenton. 
In 1648 they were estimated at 200. 

Masselans.—Sanford,U.S.,cxlvi, 1819. Mosilian.— 
Evelin (1648) in Proud, Pa., I, 113,1797. 

Mosookees. Mentioned only by Mc- 
Kenney and Hall (Ind. Tribes, iii, 82, 
1854) in a list of tribes; unidentified, but 
possibly the Muskwaki (Foxes), or the 
Maskoki or Muskogee (Creeks). 

Mosopelea. A problematic tribe, first 
noted on Marquette’s map, where “Mon- 
soupelea,” or “Monsouperea,” is marked 
as an Indian village on the e. bank of 
the Mississippi some distance below the 
mouth of the Ohio. In 1682 La Salle 
found a Mosopelea chief with 5 cabins of 
his people living with the Taensa, by 
whom they had been adopted after the 
destruction of their former village by 
some unknown enemy. 

Mansoleas. —Barcia, Ensayo, 261, 1723. Mansope- 
la.—Douay in Shea, Discovery, 222, 224 (note), 
268, 1852. Mansopelea.—Hennepin, Cont. of New 
Discov., 48a, 1698. Mausalea.—McKenney and 
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81,1858 (possibly identical). 
Medchipouria.—Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c., 
IV, 601,1880(same?). Monsopela.—Coxe,Carolana, 
map, 1741. Mons8pelea.—Marquette’s map in 
Shea, Discov., 1852. Monsoupelea.—Thevenot, 
ibid., 268. Mosopelea.— Allouez (1680) in Margry, 
D6c., n, 95,1877. Mosopelleas.—Tonti (1683), ibid., 
i, 610,1876. Mosopolca.—Hennepin, Cont. of New 
Discov., 310, 1698. Mosopolea.—LaSalle (1682) in 
Margry, D6c., ii, 237, 1877. 

Mosquito Indians. A tribe named from 
its habitat on Mosquito lagoon, e. coast 
of Florida, n. of C. Canaveral and behind 
the sand bar that forms the coast line. 
During the Seminole war of 1835-42 they 
became notorious for their ferocity. The 
Timucua remnant settled in this region 
in 1706, and the Mosquito Indians may 
have been their descendants or a mixture 
of them and Seminole. See Bartram, 
Travels, 142, note, 1791; Roberts, Florida, 
23,1763; J. F. D. Smyth,Tour, ii, 21,1784. 

Moss-bag. Some of the Athapascan 
and Cree Indians of extreme n. w. Can¬ 
ada never use cradles for their infants, 
but employ instead a “moss-bag,” made 
of leather or skin, lined in winter with 
hare skins. A layer of moss is put in, 
and upon this is placed the babe, naked 
and properly secured. ‘ ‘ This machine, ’ * 
says Bernard Ross (Smithson. Rep. 1866, 
304), “is an excellent adjunct to the rear¬ 
ing of children up to a certain age, and 
has become almost, if not universally, 
adopted in the families of the Hudson’s 
Bay Company’s employees.” Consult 
also Milton and Cheadle,* N. W. Passage, 
3d ed., 85, 1865. (a. f. c.) 

Motahtosiks ( Mo-tah'-tos-iks, ‘ many med- 
icines’). A band of the Siksika.—Grin- 
nell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 208, 1892. 

Motahtosiks. A band of the Piegan. 
Coniurers.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171, 1877. Many 
Medicines.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225, 
1892. Mo-tah'-tos-iks.—Ibid., 209. Mo-ta'-to-sis.— 
Morgan, Anc. Soc. 171, 1878. Mo-ta'-tots.—Hay¬ 
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264,1862. 











bull. 30] MOTA’s VILLAGE-MOUNDS AND MOUND-BUILDERS 949 


Mota’s Village. A former Potawatomi 
village, so called from the chief, just n. 
of Tippecanoe r., near Atwood, Kosciusko 
co., Ind. The reservation was sold in 
1834. 

Motepori. A village of the Opata in 
1726, on the Rio Sonora, lat. 30°, n. cen¬ 
tral Sonora, Mexico (Bandelier in Arch. 
Inst. Papers, hi, 71, 1890). The place 
is now civilized. 

Motsai (possibly from pa-motsan, ‘a loop 
in a stream’). A Comanche division, 
nearly exterminated in a battle with the 
Mexicans about 1845. 

Moochas.—Hazen in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 
3d sess., 17, 1869. Motsai'.—Mooney in 14th Rep. 
B. A. E., 1045,1896. Mut-sha.—Butcher and Lyen- 
decher, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E., "1867 
(trans., ‘ big noses ’). 

Motwainaiks (‘all chiefs’). A band of 
the Piegan division of the Siksika. 

All Chiefs.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225, 
1892. Mo-twai'-naiks.—Ibid.,209. 

Mouanast. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy in 1608, situated on the n. 
bank of Rappahannock r., in King George 
co., Va.—Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 
1819. 

Mouchaouaouastiirinioek. A Montagn- 
aislribe of Canada in the 17th century.— 
Jes. Rel. 1643, 38, 1858. 

Mouisa. An unidentified tribe or vil¬ 
lage which according to Douay was found 
by Tonti in 1682 on or near the lower 
Mississippi. Cf. Mosopelea. 

Mouisa.—Le Clercq, First Estab. of the Faith, n, 
277, 1882; Shea, Discov. Miss., 226,1852. Mousas.— 
Barcia, Ensayo, 261,1723. 

Mounds and Mound-builders. The term 
mounds has been used in America in two 
different senses as regards the scope in¬ 
tended. By a number of writers it has 
been applied in a broad sense to include not 
only the tumuli proper but also various 
other kinds of ancient monuments. In 
the more limited sense it refers only to 
the tumuli, or true mounds, whether of 
earth or stone. Following the usual 
custom the term is here used in the 
broader sense, and hence includes the true 
mounds, inclosures, walls, embankments, 
refuse heaps, and other fixed structures. 

Although the tumuli are of various 
forms they may be classed, with few ex¬ 
ceptions, as conical tumuli, elongate or 
wall-like mounds, pyramidal, and effigy 
or imitative mounds. The conical tumuli 
are artificial hillocks, not mere accumu¬ 
lations of debris. The form, except 
where worn down by the plow, is usually 
that of a low, broad, round-topped cone 
varying in size from a scarcely percepti¬ 
ble swell in the ground to elevations of 80 
or even 100 ft, and from 6 to 300 ft in diam¬ 
eter. Most of the burial mounds are of 
this type. The elongate or wall-like 
mounds are earthworks having the ap¬ 
pearance of walls, usually from 150 to 
300 ft in length, though some are only 50 


ft, while others extend to 900 ft. They 
seem to be confined exclusively to the 
effigy-mound region. 

The typical form of the pyramidal 
mounds is a truncated quadrangular 
pyramid; some, 
however, are circu¬ 
lar and a few are 
irregularly pentag¬ 
onal, but are distin¬ 
guished by the fiat 
top. Some have ter¬ 
races extending 
outward from one 
or two sides, and 
others a ramp or 
roadway leading up to the level surface. 
The sharp outlines showing the true form 
have been more or less obliterated in 
most instances. 

The so-called effigy mounds are those 
representing animal forms, and with a few 
notable exceptions are confined to Wis¬ 
consin and the immediately adjoining 



Platform Mound, Missouri; iso 

FT. LONG, 25 FT. HIGH. (THOMAs) 



SERPENT MOUND, OHIO. LENGTH OF WORK, 500 FT. 


states. The exceptions are two in Ohio, 
including the noted Serpent mound, and 
two bird mounds in Georgia. They vary 
in length from 50 to 500 ft, and in height 
from a few inches to 4 or 5 ft. 

The conical mounds are sometimes com¬ 
posed of earth and stones intermingled, 
and in a few cases are wholly of stones; 



CONICAL MOUNDS, MISSISSIPPI; HEIGHT 30 FT. (Thomas) 


they are also, as a rule, depositories of 
the dead, but burials also occur in the 
pyramidal mounds, although the flat- 
topped structures were usually the sites 
for buildings, as temples, council houses, 
and chiefs’ dwellings. Burials were 
rarely made in the wall-like or the effigy 
mounds. As a rule no special order pre- 





950 


MOUNDS AND MOUND-BUILDERS 


[b. a. e. 


vailed in the arrangement of mounds in 
groups, but some exceptions occur, as, in 
the effigy-mound region, the small conical 
mounds are sometimes arranged in regu¬ 
lar lines, somewhat evenly spaced and 
occasionally connected by low embank¬ 
ments; and in Calhoun co., Ill., and n. e. 
Minnesota they were frequently built 
in rows. Although a few mounds have 
been observed on the Pacific slope, n. 
of Mexico, they are limited chiefly to 
the Mississippi basin and the Gulf states, 
the areas of greatest abundance being 
along the banks of the Mississippi from 
La Crosse, Wis., to Natchez, Miss., the ceiv 
tral and s. sections of Ohio and the adjoin¬ 
ing portion of Indiana, and s. Wisconsin. 
The e. side of Florida is well dotted with 
shell-heaps. 

Inclosures include some of the most 
important and interesting monuments 
of the United States. In form they are 
circular, square, ob¬ 
long, octagonal, or 
irregular. Those 
which approach 
regularity in figure 
are either circular, 
square, or octag¬ 
onal, and with few 
exceptions are 
found in Ohio and M0UND WITH M0AT AND ENClRC - 
the adjoining por- DIAM 100 FT (thomas) 
tions of Indiana, 

Kentucky, and West Virginia. These 
works vary in size from an area of 
less than an acre to that of more 




OBLONG INCLOSURE WITH MOAT; WEST VIRGINIA; LENGTH 287 FT. 

(thomas) 


than 100 acres. Some are exceedingly 
interesting because of the near approach 
they make to true geometrical figures. 
The diameters of the circle in one or two 


instances vary less than 10 ft in 1,000 ft, 
and the corners of the square in one or 
two other examples vary less than one 
degree from 90°. 

In s. e. Missouri and in one or two 
other sections the inclosures have scat¬ 
tered through them small earthen circles 
marking the sites of circular dwellings. 
There are indications that some at least 
of the Ohio inclosures contained similar 
circles which were obliterated by cultiva¬ 
tion. 

Another important class of ancient 
monuments are the refuse or shell heaps 
found along tidewater and at a few 
points on the banks of inland streams 
and lakes, and the mound-like heaps 
which cover the ruined pueblo dwell¬ 
ings of the S. W. Many hundreds of the 
mounds and many of the refuse heaps 
have been opened and their contents ex¬ 
amined. Although one or two artifacts, 
especially certain copper plates with 
stamped figures, have been discovered 
which are difficult to account for, the 
contents otherwise present nothing incon¬ 
sistent with the conclusion that they are 
the works of the Indians who inhabited 
these regions prior to the advent of the 
whites. It has been contended that many 
of the artifacts found in the mounds indi¬ 
cate a higher degree of culture than that 
reached by the later Indians of the mound 
area. After excluding those derived from 
the whites or otherwise introduced, this 
is found to be a mistake, as it appears 
from the evidence that the historic In¬ 
dians could and did make articles similar 
in type and equal in finish to those of the 
mounds. Some of the articles found show 
contact with Europeans, and hence indi¬ 
cate that the mounds in which they were 
discovered are comparatively modern. 
Notwithstanding these facts and many 
others tending to the same conclusion, it 
was maintained by the majority of writ¬ 
ers on American archeology, until very 
recently, that the builders of the mounds 
of the Mississippi basin and the Gulf states 
were a specific people of higher culture 
than the Indians found inhabiting this re¬ 
gion ; that they were overrun by incoming 
Indian hordes and finally became extinct, 
leaving the monuments as the only evi¬ 
dence of their former existence. Other 
writers suppose that they were Mexicans 
(Aztec) who were driven s. into Mexico, 
while others concluded that they were 
driven into the Gulf states and were the 
ancestors of the tribes inhabiting that 
section. The more careful exploration 
of the mounds in recent years, and the 
more thorough study of the data bearing 
on the subject, have shown these opinions 
to be erroneous. The articles found in the 
mounds and the character of the various 
monuments indicate a culture stage much 








bull. 30] 


MOUNTAIN CROWS—MOURNING 


951 


the same as that of the more advanced 
tribes found inhabiting this region at the 
advent of the whites. Moreover, Euro¬ 
pean articles found in mounds, and the 
statements by early chroniclers, as those of 
De Soto’s expedition, prove beyond ques¬ 
tion that some of these structures were 
erected by the Indians in post-Columbian 
times. The conclusion, reached chiefly 
through the investigations of the Bureau 
of American Ethnology, and now gener¬ 
ally accepted, is that the mound builders 
were the ancestors of the Indians found 
inhabiting the same region by the first 
European explorers. The dearth of 
mounds east of the Allegheny mts., n. of 
Tennessee and North Carolina, seems to 
mark the mountain range along this stretch 
as a prehistoric boundary line. This 
would seem to indicate that the mound 
builders did not enter their territory from 
the Atlantic coast n. of North Carolina. 
The few ancient structures in New York 
are now con¬ 
ceded to be Iro- 
quoian, but the 
particular tribes 
or groups to 
which the other 
mounds are at¬ 
tributable can 
not always be 
stated with cer¬ 
tainty. It is 
known that some 
of the tribes in- 
habiting the 
Gulf states when 
De Soto passed 
through their 
territory in 
1540-41, as the 
Yuchi, Creeks, Chickasaw, and Natchez, 
were still using and probably construct¬ 
ing mounds, and that the Quapaw of 
Arkansas were also using them. There 
is likewise documentary evidence that the 
“Texas” tribe still used mounds at the 
end of the 17th century, when a chief’s 
house is described as being built on one 
(Bolton, inf’n, 1906). There is also suffi¬ 
cient evidence to justify the conclusion 
that the Cherokee and Shawnee were 
mound builders. No definite conclusion 
as to what Indians built the Ohio works 
has yet been reached, though it is be¬ 
lieved that they were in part due to the 
Cherokee who once inhabited eastern 
Ohio. According to Miss Fletcher, the 
Winnebago build miniature mounds 
in the lodge during certain ceremo¬ 
nies. 

The period during which mound build¬ 
ing n. of Mexico lasted can not be de¬ 
termined with certainty. That many 
of the mounds were built a century or 
two before the appearance of the whites 


is known from the fact that when first 
observed they were covered with a heavy 
forest growth. Nothing, however, has 
been found in them to indicate great an¬ 
tiquity, and the present tendency among 
archeologists is to assign them to the 
period subsequent to the beginning of the 
Christian era. 

For the literature of the mounds con¬ 
sult the bibliography under Archeology; 
see also Thomas, (1) Catalogue Prehist. 
Works E. of Rocky Mts., Bull. B. A. E., 
1891, (2)| in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 1894, and 
authorities therein cited. See also An¬ 
tiquity , Archeology, Cahokia Mound , Ele¬ 
phant Mound, Etowah Mound, Fort Ancient, 
Fortifications , Grave Creek Mound, Newark 
Works, Popular fallacies, Serpent Mound, 
Shell-heaps. (c. t. ) 

Mountain Crows. A name applied to the 
Crows who hunted and roamed in the 
mountains away from upper Missouri r. 
They separated from the River Crows 
about 1859. 

Essapookoon.— Hen¬ 
ry, MS. vocab., B. 
A. E., 1808 (Siha- 
sapaname). Moun¬ 
tain Crows. —Pease 
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 
1871, 420, 1872. 
Skois’chint.— 
Giorda, Kalis- 
pelm Diet., pt. 2, 
81, 1879 (Kalispelm 
name). 

Mountain Lake. 

Officially men¬ 
tioned as a body 
of 800 Indians 
under the East- 
ern Oregon 
(Dalles) agency 
in 1861. The 
name dropped 
out of use after 1862, and they have not been 
identified. See Ind. Aff. Rep., 220, 1861; 
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 1863. 

Mountain Snakes. A name used by 
Ross (Fur Hunters, i, 250, 1855) for some 
of the northern Shoshoni; otherwise un¬ 
identified. 

Mount Pleasant. A former Yuchi town 
in s. e. Georgia, on Savannah r., probably 
in Screven co., near the mouth of Brier cr. 

Mourning. Mourning customs vary in 
different tribes, but there are certain 
modes of expressing sorrow that are com¬ 
mon to all parts of the country, and in¬ 
deed to all parts of the world, as wailing, 
discarding personal ornaments, wearing 
disordered garments, putting clay on the 
head and sometimes on the joints of the 
arms and legs, and the sacrifice of prop¬ 
erty. Other practices are widespread, as 
shedding one’s blood by gashing the arms 
or legs, cutting off joints of the fingers, 
unbraiding the hair, cutting off locks 
and throwing them on the dead or into 
the grave, and blackening the face or 



BIRDSEYE VIEW OF CAHOKIA MOUND, ILLINOIS. GREATEST LENGTH, ABOUT 
1,000 FT. 









952 


MOURNING 


[B. a. e. 


body. These signs of mourning are gen¬ 
erally made immediately at the death, and 
are renewed at the burial and again when 
the mourning feast takes place. 

In some tribes it is customary when 
anyone dies for a priest or other respected 
person to stand outside the dwelling in 
which the deceased lies and, with hand 
uplifted, proclaim in a loud voice to the 
spirits of the kindred that their kinsman 
has started on his way to join them; 
meanwhile swift runners speed through 
the tribe, spreading the news of the death 
among the living. 

More or less ceremony usually attends 
the preparation of the body for burial. 
Among the Hopi wailing takes place dur¬ 
ing the washing of the body. In some 
tribes the characteristic tribal moccasin 
must be put on the feet of the dead by a 
member of a certain clan, in order that 
the kindred may be safely reached. In 
others the face must be ceremonially 
painted for the journey and the best 
clothing put on, so that the dead may go 
forth properly attired and honored. Per¬ 
sonal belongings are placed with the 
corpse. On the N. W. coast, after the 
body has been arrayed it is propped up 
at the rear of the house and surrounded 
by the property, and the relatives and 
mourners pass by the remains in token of 
respect. The conventional sign of mourn¬ 
ing among the Salish, according to Hill- 
Tout, is the severing of the hair of the 
surviving relatives, who dispose of it in 
various ways according to the tribe—by 
burning it to prevent its falling into the 
hands of a sorcerer; by burying it where 
vegetation is dense, thus insuring long 
life and strength; by putting it away for 
final burial at their own death; by cast¬ 
ing it into running water, and by fastening 
it to the branches on the eastern side of a 
red-fir tree. Among the Hopi wailing is 
confined to the day of the death and to 
anniversaries of that event. When a 
number die from an epidemic a date is 
officially fixed for the mourning anniver¬ 
sary, and this is kept even when it inter¬ 
cepts a festival or other rite. Professional 
mourners are employed among the Zuni, 
Hopi, Mohave, and neighboring tribes. 
The observance of the anniversary of a 
death is common. Among some tribes it 
is observed with great ceremony; in all 
cases the guests are served with food, and 
gifts are made to them in honor of the 
dead. There are differences observed in 
mourning for a man or a woman and for 
an adult or a child. Among the Dakota 
the widow passed around the circle of the 
tribe, each circuit standing for a promise 
to remain single during a year. The gen¬ 
eral sign of widowhood is loosening the 
hair and cutting it short in a line with the 
ears. It was the wife’s duty to light a 


fire for four nights on her husband’s 
grave and w r atch that it did not die out 
before dawn. She had to wail at sunrise 
and sunset, eat little, and remain more or 
less secluded. The length of her seclusion 
varied in different tribes from a few weeks 
or months to two years. At the expira¬ 
tion of the period relatives of her former 
husband brought her gifts and bade her 
return to her former pleasures. She was 
then free to marry again. In some tribes 
wives, slaves, or horses and dogs were 
formerlv slain at the death of a man, for 
it was tfie general belief that relations of 
all kinds which were maintained on earth 
would continue in the dwelling place of 
spirits. 

It was usual for the tribe to abstain 
from festivities when a death occurred in 
the community. The various societies 
omitted their meetings, and general si¬ 
lence was observed. In some tribes all 
the people wailed at sunrise and sunset. 
Where these general observances of sor¬ 
row were the custom, the mourners were 
visited by the leading men a few days af¬ 
ter death, when the pipew r as offered, and 
after smoking, the family of the deceased 
gave a feast, a signal for the tribe to re¬ 
sume its wonted pleasures. 

The black paint that was put upon 
men, women, and children of some tribes 
as a sign of mourning might not be washed 
off, but must be worn until it disappeared 
by some other means. The announcement 
of the mourning feast was generally made 
in a formal way at the close of the burial 
ceremony. Among most of the Plains 
tribes black paint was a sign of victory 
and mourners refrained entirely from 
paint or other adornment. 

The customs of mourning seem to have 
a twofold aspect—one relating to the spirit 
of the deceased, the other to the surviv¬ 
ing relatives and friends. This dual 
character is clearly revealed in a custom 
that obtained among the Omaha and cog¬ 
nate tribes: On the death of a man or a 
woman who was respected in the com¬ 
munity, the young men, friends of the 
deceased, met at a short distance from 
the lodge of the dead and made two inci¬ 
sions in their left arms so as to leave a 
loop of skin. Through this loop was 
passed a small willow twig, with leaves 
left on one end; then, with their blood 
dripping upon the willow leaves, holding 
a willow stem in each hand, they walked 
in single file to the lodge, and, standing 
abreast in a long line, they sang there the 
tribal song to the dead, beating the wil¬ 
low stems together to the rhythm of the 
song. At the sound of the music, a near 
relative came forth from the lodge and, 
beginning at one end of the line, pulled 
out the blood-stained twigs from the left 
arm of each singer, and laid a hand on 


BULL. 30] 


MOUS-MRIKSAH 


953 


hi.s head in token of thanks for the sym¬ 
pathy shown. The song continued until 
the last twig was thrown to the ground. 
The music of the song was in strange con¬ 
trast to the bloody spectacle. It was a 
blithe major melody with no words, but 
only breathing vocables to float the voice. 
According to the Indian explanation the 
song was addressed to the spirit, bid¬ 
ding it go gladly on its way; the blood 
shed was the tribute of sorrow—grief for 
the loss of a friend and sympathy for the 
mourners. The same idea underlies the 
Omaha custom of ceasing the loud wail at 
the close of the burial ceremonies lest the 
sound make it harder for the spirit who 
must go to leave behind its earthly kin¬ 
dred. See Mortuary customs, (a. c. f.) 

Mous ( Mo n s , ‘moose’). A gens of the 
Chippewa, q. v. 

Mons.—Gatschet, Chippewa MS., B. A. E., 1882. 
Mo n s.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Moons.—Tanner, 
Narrative, 314, 1830. Mous.—Warren (1852) in 
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 45,1885. 

Mousonee ( Mo n sone, ‘ moose ’). A phra- 
try of the Chippewa (q. v.). The Mous 
(Moose) gens is one of its leading gentes, 
as is also the Waubishashe (Marten). 
Warren calls the phratry the Waubishashe 

roup. (j. m. ) 

ens de Orignal.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 33, 1744 
(same?). Monsone.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., v, 44, 1885 (misprint?). Mo n sone.—Wm. 
Jones, inf’n, 1906. Monsoni.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 
33, 1744 (same?). Mosonique.—Ibid, (same?) 
Mous-o-neeg.—Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
v, 50, 1885.. 

Movas. A former Nevome pueblo and 
the seat of the mission of Santa Marfa, 
founded in 1622; situated on one of the 
s. tributaries of the Rio Yaqui, lat. 28° 
HK, Ion. 109° 10', Sonora, Mexico; 
pop. 308 in 1678, and 90 in 1730. Its 
inhabitants, known as Mova, or Moba, 
from the name of their settlement, prob¬ 
ably spoke a dialect differing slightly 
from Nevome proper. (f. w. h. ) 

Concepcion Mobas.—Sonora Materiales (1730) 
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, I, 514,1884. 
Mobas.—Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., 
in, 361,1857. Movas.—Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1762), 
124, 1863. Santa Marfa Mobas.—Zapata, op. cit., 
360. 

Movwiats ( Mo-vwi'-ats) . A Paiute band 
formerly living in s. e. Nevada; pop. 57 
in 1873. 

Mo-vwi'-ats.—Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 
1874.—Mowi'ats.—Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. Rep., 
Vli, 410, 1879. 

Mowhawa ( Mahwaw a , ‘wolf.’) A gens 
of the Miami, q. v. 

Ma ,( h waw a . —W m. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Mo- 
wha'-wa.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877. 

Mowhawissouk ( Mdhwawlsoivug , ‘they 
go by the name of the wolf.’—W. J.). 
A gens of the Sauk and Foxes. See Sauk. 

Ma'hwawisowag.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. Mo- 
wha-wis'-so-uk.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877. 

Mowkowk. See Mocuck. 

Moxus. A chief of the Abnaki, called 
also Agamagus, the first signer of the 
treaty of 1699, and seemingly the successor 
of Madokawando (Drake, Inds. of N. Am., 


294, 1880). He signed also the treaty 
with Gov. Dudley in 1702, but a year 
afterward unsuccessfully besieged the 
English fort at Casco, Me. He treated 
with the English in 1713, and again in 
1717. It was he who in 1689 captured 
Pemaquid from the English, (a. f. c.) 

Moyawance. A tribe living in 1608 on 
the n. bank of the Potomac, about Prince 
George co., Md. Their principal village, 
of the same name, was about Broad cr. 
They numbered about 400, but their 
name drops from history at an early date. 
They were probably a division of the 
later Conoy. 

Moyaoncs.—Smith (1629), Va., II, 86, repr. 1819. 
Moyaonees.— Bozman, Md., I, 119, 1837. Moya- 
ones.—Simons in Smith (1629), Va., I, 177, repr. 
1819. Moyaons.—Ibid., map. Moyawance.—Ibid., 
118. Moyoones. —Strachey (ca. 1612), Va., 38,1849. 
Moyowahcos.—Macauley, N. Y., II, 168, 1829. 
Moyowance.—Bozman, Md., I, 139, 1837. 

Moytoy. A Cherokee chief of Tellico, 
Tenn., who became the so-called “em¬ 
peror” of the seven chief Cherokee 
towns. Sir Alexander Cuming, desirous 
of enlisting the Cherokee in the British 
interest, decided to place in control a 
chief of his own selection. Moytoy was 
chosen, the Indians were induced to ac¬ 
cept him, giving him the title of em¬ 
peror; and, to carry out the program, all 
the Indians, including their new sover¬ 
eign, pledged themselves on bended knees 
to be the faithful subjects of King George. 
On the next day, April 4, 1730, “the 
crown was brought from Great Tennessee, 
which, with five eagle-tails and four scalps 
of their enemies, Moytoy presented to Sir 
Alexander, empowering him to lay the 
same at His Majesty’s feet.” Neverthe¬ 
less, Moytoy afterward became a bitter 
enemy of the whites, several of whom he 
killed without provocation at Sitico, 
Tenn. See Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 
pt. 1,1900. 

Mozeemlek. A problematic people who, 
according to Lahontan, dwelt somewhere 
in the region of w. Dakota or Wyoming, 
in 1700. They wore beards, were 
clothed like the whites, had copper axes, 
and lived on a river which emptied into 
a large salt lake. 

Moseem-lek.—Vaugondy, map, 1778. Mozam- 
leeks. —Featherstonhaugh,Canoe Voy., i, 280,1847. 
Mozeemleek.—Lahontan, New Voy., I, 125, 1703. 
Mozeemlek.—Ibid., 119. Mozeenlek.—Barcia, En¬ 
sayo, 297, 1723. Mozemleks.—Harris, Voy. and 
Trav., II, 920, 1705. 

Mriksah. The eldest son of Canonicus, 
the celebrated Narraganset chief; known 
also as Mexam, Mixam, Mixanno, and 
Meika. After the death of his father in 
1647 he was made chief sachem of the 
tribe. He married a sister of Ninigret, 
who was the noted Quaiapen, called also 
Old Queen, Sunk Squaw, and Magnus 
(q. v.). Mriksah was one of the sachems 
to whom the English commissioners at 
Boston sent interrogations regarding their 


954 


MSEPASB—MUGWUMP 


tB. A. fi. 


connection with the Dutch of New York. 
He was in close relations with Ninigret 
in his movements. (c. t. ) 

Msepase (MtsfdpZsM, ‘big lynx.’— 
W. J.). A gens of the Shawnee, q. v. 

Meshipeshi.—Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. M’-se'-pa- 
se.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168,1877. Panther.—Ibid. 

Muanbissek. Mentioned in a letter sent 
by the Abnaki to the governor of New 
England in 1721 as one of the divisions of 
their tribe. Not identified. 

Muayu. The Yaudanchi name of a 
village site on Tule r., Cal.; also known 
as Chesheshim. It is not the name of a 
tribe, as stated by Powers. 

Chesheshim.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1903. Mai- 
ai'-u.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ill, 370, 
1877. Muayu.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1906. 

Muchalat. A Nootka tribe on Mucha- 
lat arm of Nootka sd., w. coast of Van¬ 
couver id.; pop. 62 in 1906. Their prin¬ 
cipal village is Cheshish. 

Match-clats.—Mayne, Brit. Col., 251,1862. Match- 
itl-aht. —Can. Ind. Aff. 1884,186,1885. Michalits. — 
Armstrong, Oregon, 136, 1857. Mich-la-its.—Jew- 
itt, Narr., 36, 1849. Mo'tclath.—Boas in 6th Rep. 
N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. Muchalaht—Brit. 
Col. map, 1872. Muchlaht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 
1868. 

Muckawis. A name of the whippoor¬ 
will. Wordsworth has the “melancholy 
muckauis” in his poem The Excursion. 
Carver (Travels, 468, 1778) writes, “the 
whipperwill, or, as it is termed by the 
Indians, the muckawiss.” This onoma¬ 
topoeic word is probably of Algonquian 
origin. It occurs as muckkowheesce in 
Stiles’ Pequot vocabulary of 1762 (Trum¬ 
bull, Natick Diet., Bull. 25, B. A. E., 
1903). (a. f. c.) 

Muertos (Span.: El Pueblo de los Muer- 
tos, ‘the village of the dead’). A group 
of prehistoric ruined pueblos 9 m. s. e. of 
Tempe, in the Salt Biver valley, Ariz.— 
Cushing in Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. 
Am., vn, 162, 1892. 

Los Muertans.—Cushing, ibid., 168 (referring to 
the former inhabitants). 

Mugg. An Arosaguntacook chief in 
the latter half of the 17th century, con¬ 
spicuous in the war beginning in 1675, 
into which he was drawn by the ill-treat¬ 
ment he received from the English. With 
about 100 warriors he made an assault, 
Oct. 12, 1676, on Black Point, now Scar- 
boro, Me., where the settlers had gathered 
for protection. While the officer in charge 
of the garrison was parleying with Mugg, 
the whites managed to escape, only a few 
of the officers’ servants falling into the 
hands of the Indians when the fort was 
captured; these were kindly treated. 
Mugg became embittered toward the Eng¬ 
lish when on coming in behalf of his own 
and other Indians to treat for peace he 
was seized and taken a prisoner to Boston, 
although soon released. He was killed 
at Black Point, May, 16, 1677, the place 
he captured the preceding year. (c. t. ) 

Mugu. A former populous Chumashan 
village, stated by Indians to have been 


on the seacoast near Pt Mugu, Ventura 
co., Cal., and placed by Taylor on Guad- 
alasca ranch, near the point. 

Mugu.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in Smith, Colec. 
Doc. Fla., 181, 1857; Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 
24, 1863. Mu-wu.—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. 
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. 

Mugulasha. A former tribe, related to 
the Choctaw, living on the w. bank of 
the Mississippi, 64 leagues from the sea, 
in a village with the Bayogoula, whose 
language they spoke. They are said vari¬ 
ously to have been the tribe called Quini- 
pissa by La Salle and Tonti, and encoun¬ 
tered by them some distance lower down 
the river, or to have received the rem¬ 
nants of that tribe reduced by disease. 
At all events their chief was chief over 
the Quinipissa when La Salle and Tonti 
encountered them. In January or Feb¬ 
ruary, 1700, the Bayogoula attacked the 
Mugulasha and killed nearly all of them. 
The name has a generic signification, 

‘ opposite people ’— Imuklasha in Choc¬ 
taw—and was applied to other tribes, as 
Muklassa among the Creeks and West 
Imongolasha on Chickasawhay r., and it 
is sometimes difficult to distinguish the 
various bodies one from another. Among 
the Choctaw it usually refers to people 
of the opposite phratry from that to which 
the speaker belongs. See Imongalasha, 
Muklassa. (a. s. g. j. r. s.) 

Moglushah town.—H. R. Doc. 15, 27thCong., 2d 
sess., 5, 1841. Mogolushas.—Ind. Aff. Rep., 877, 
1847. Mogoulachas.—Sauvole (1699) in Margry, 
D6c., IV, 453, 455, 1880. Mongontatchas. —McKen- 
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81,1858. Mongou- 
lacha.—La Harpe (1723) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 
in, 17, 1851. Mongoulatches.—Drake, Bk. Inds., 
ix, 1848. Mougolaches.—Coxe, Carolana, 7,1741. 
Mougoulachas.—Iberville (1699) in Margry, D6c., 
IV, 113, 119,124,1880. 

Mugwump. Norton (Political Ameri¬ 
canisms, 74, 1890) defines this word as 
“an Independent Republican; one who 
sets himself up to be better than his fel¬ 
lows; a Pharisee.’’ Since then the term 
has come to mean an Independent, who, 
feeling he can no longer support the policy 
of his party, leaves it temporarily or joins 
the opposite party as a protest. The 
term was applied to the Independent Re¬ 
publicans who bolted the nomination of 
Blaine in 1884, and it at once gained popu¬ 
lar favor. The earlier history of the term 
is doubtful, though it seems to have been 
for some time previous in local use in 
parts of New England to designate a per¬ 
son who makes great pretensions but 
whose character, ability, or resources are 
not equal to them. The word is derived 
from the Massachuset dialect of Algon¬ 
quian, being, as Trumbull pointed out, 
the word mukquomp, by which Eliot 
in his translation of the Bible (Gen., 
xxxvi, 40-43; Matt, vi, 21, etc.) renders 
such terms as duke, lord, chief, captain, 
leader, great man. The components of 
the word are moqki ‘great’, -omp ‘man.’ 
In newspaper and political writings mug- 


BULL. 30] 


MUHHOWEKAKEN—MULSHINTIK 


955 


wump has given rise to mugwumpery, 
mugwumpian, mugwumpism. (a. f. c. ) 
Muhhowekaken (Muh-ho-we-ka'-ken, ‘old 
shin’). A subdivision of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Muhkarmhukse ( Muh-karm-huk-se , ‘red 
face’). A subdivision of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Muhkrentharne ( Muh-krent-har'-ne, ‘root 
digger’). A subdivision of the Delawares 
(q. v.).—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877. 

Muingpe. A former village, presum¬ 
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores 
mission, San Francisco, Cal.—Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. 

Muinyawu. The Porcupine clan of the 
Hopi, q. v. 

Mii-i-nyan wiin-wii. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., 
VII, 405. 1894. Muiyawu wiiiwu. —Fewkes in 19th 
Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900. Miin-ya'u-wu. —Stephen 
in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. 

Muiva. A Sobaipuri rancheria in 1697, 
about which date it was visited by Father 
Kino. Situated on the Rio San Pedro, 
probably near the mouth of Arivaipa cr., 
s. Ariz. 

Muihibay. —De l’lsle, map Am., 1703. Muiva.— 
Kino (1697) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., I, 280, 1856. 

Mukanti. A band or village of the 
Molala formerly on the w. slope of the 
Cascade mts., Oreg. It is not definitely 
located. (a. s. g. ) 

Mukchiath. A sept of the Toquart, a 
Nootka tribe.—Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. 
Tribes Canada, 32, 1890. 

Mukh (m&kh, ‘beaver’). A gens of the 
fotawatomi (q. v.). 

Ami'k. —Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906 (Chippewa form). 
Muk.—Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167,1877.—Mtikh.—J. P. 
Dunn, inf’n, 1907 (Potawatomi form). 

Muklasalgi ( Muxldsalgi , ‘people of Muk- 
lassa town’). An extinct Creek clan.— 
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 156, 1884. 

Muklassa. Formerly a small Upper 
Creek town, a mile below Sawanogi and 
on the same side of Tallapoosa r., in 
Montgomery co., Ala. Its inhabitants 
were of the Alibamu tribe or division. 
Cf. Mugulasha. 

Amooklasah Town. —Adair, Am. Ind., 277, 1775. 
Mackalassy.— Robin, Voy., II, map, 1807. Moa 
dassa.— Bartram, Trav., I, map, 1799. Mocalasa.— 
Alcedo, Die. Geog., Ill, 220, 1788. Mooklausa. — 
Pickett, Hist. Ala., II, 267, 1851. Mooklausan.— 
Hawkins (1813) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 
854, 1832 (misprint). Mook-lau-sau.— Hawkins 
(1799), Sketch, 35, 1848. Mucclasse.— Bartram, 
Travels, 446, 1791. Muckeleses. —Swan (1791) in 
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262,1855. 

Mukugnuk. A former Aleut village on 
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id. 
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited. 
Mukuk. See Mocuck. 

Mulamchapa (‘long pond by the trees’). 
A former Nishinam village in the valley 
of Bear r., n. of Sacramento, Cal. 

Moolamchapa.— Powers in Overland Mo., xn, 22, 
1874.— Mu-lam'-cha-pa.— Powers in Cont. N. A. 
Ethnol., Ill, 316,1877. 

Mulatos. One of the tribes of w. Texas, 
some of whose people were baptized at 


the mission of San Jos6 y San Miguel de 
Aguayo in 1784-85, together with people of 
other tribes called Gincape, Salaphueme, 
and Tanaicapeme (MS. Baptismal records, 
1784-85, partidos 901-926). (h. e. b.) 

Mulatto Girls’ Town. A former Semi¬ 
nole town s. of Cuscowilla lake, probably 
in Alachua co., n. Fla.—Bell in Morse, 
Rep. to Sec. War, 307, 1822. 

Mulchatna. A settlement of 180 Eskimo 
on Mulchatna r., a branch of Nushagak r., 
Alaska. 

Malchatna. — Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 48, 1881. 
Molchatna. —Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 
1884. Mulchatna.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. 

Mullers. Flattish stones employed by 
the native tribes for crushing and pulver¬ 
izing food substances on a metate (q. v.) or 
other flat surface; sometimes called mano, 
the Spanish for ‘hand.’ They were in very 
general use, especially among the agri¬ 
cultural tribes, and in both form and use 
grade imperceptibly into the pestle. They 
may be merely natural bowlders of shape 
suited to the purpose, or they may have 
been modified by use into artificial form 
or designedly shaped by pecking and 
grinding according to the fancy of the 
owner. In the Pueblo country mullers 
are usually oblong slabs of lava or other 
suitable stone, flat on the undersurface 
and slightly convex in outline and supe¬ 
rior surface, and of a size to be conven¬ 
iently held in the hand. In some sections, 
as in the Pacific states and in the Missis¬ 
sippi valley, they are frequently flattish 
or cheese-shaped cylinders or disks, 
smooth on the underside and somewhat 
roughened above. They are sometimes 
pitted on one or both surfaces, indicating 
a secondary use, perhaps for cracking nuts. 
Others show battering, as if subjected to 
rough usage as hammers. The term 
muller is properly applied only to grind¬ 
ers having a flat undersurface and shaped 
to be held under the hand; the pestle 
has a flat or rounded undersurface and 
is shaped to be held in the hand in an 
upright position. See Metates , Mortars , 
Pestles , and consult the authorities there¬ 
under cited. (W. H. H. ) 

Mullinose. See Maninose. 

Mulluk. A former Kusan village or 
tribe on the n. side of the mouth of Co- 
quille r., on the coast of Oregon. It was 
on the site of the present town of Ran¬ 
dolph. (l. f.) 

Coquille.— Abbott, MS. Coquille Census, B. A. E., 
1858. Delmash.— Huntington in Ind. AfT. Rep. 
1867,62,1868. Delwashes.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 470,1865. 
Lower Coquille. —Dorsey, MftllUk MS. vocab., B. 
A.E., 1884. Mul'luk, —Ibid, (native name). Ntul- 
muc'-ci.— Dorsey, Tutu MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 
(so called by Tututni, etc.). Tal-hush-to-ny.— 
Abbott, MS. Coquille Census, B. A. E., }858. 

Mulshintik (MuV-dn-ttk) . A former 
Yaquina village on the s. side of Yaquina 
r., Oreg.—Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk¬ 
lore, in, 229, 1890. 


956 


MULTNOMAH-MUNOMINIK A8HEENHUG 


[b. a. e. 


Multnomah ( Ne'mainomax , ‘down 
river’). A Chinookan tribe or division 
formerly living on the upper end of Sau- 
vies id., Multnomah co., Oreg. In 1806 
they were estimated at 800, but by 1835, 
according to Parker, they were extinct as 
a tribe. The term is also used in a broader 
sense to include all the tribes living on 
or near lower Willamette r., Oreg. See 
Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 472, 1814. 

Maltnabah.—Franchfere, Narr., Ill, 1854. Mathla- 
nobes.—Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., x, 115, 1821. 
Mathlanobs.—Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 368, 1822. 
Moltnomas.—Ross, Advent., 87, 1849. Mulkno- 
mans.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), in, 
198,1905. Multinoma.—Palmer, Jour, of Trav., 87, 
1847. Mult-no-mah.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark 
(1806), IV, 219, 1905. Multnomia.—Bond in H. R. 
Rep. 830, 27th Cong., 2d sess., 63,1842. Ne'maLno- 
max.—Boas, inf’n, 1905. 

Mumitupio ( MumA'-tup-i-o , ‘fish peo¬ 
ple’). The Blackfoot name of an uni¬ 
dentified tribe.—Hayden, Ethnog. and 
Philol. Mo. Val., 264, 1862. 

Mummachog. See Mummychog. 

Mummapacune. A tribe of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy, which, according to 
Strachey, lived on York r., Va., about 
1612, and numbered about 350. Men¬ 
tioned as distinct from the Mattapony in 
the same neighborhood.—Strachey ( ca. 
1616), Va., 62, 1849. 

Mummychog. The barred killifish (Fun- 
dulus pisculentus) ; also spelled mumma¬ 
chog. This word, in use in certain regions 
of the n. Atlantic coast of the United 
States, is corrupted from moamitieaug in 
the Narraganset dialect of Algonquian, 
which Roger Williams (1643) defined as 
“a little sort of fish, half as big as sprats, 
plentiful in winter. ’ ’ According to Trum¬ 
bull (Natick Diet., 298, 1903) the fish 
originally designated by this name was the 
smelt, whence the name was transferred 
to the killifish. The Narraganset word, 
a plural, signifies ‘they go gathered to¬ 
gether.’ The word is sometimes abbre¬ 
viated to mummy. (a. f. c.) 

Mumtrak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil¬ 
lage on Good News bay, Alaska. Pop. 
162 in 1880, and the same in 1890. 
Mumtrahamiut.—Eleventh Census, Alaska, 99, 
1893. Mumtrahamut.—Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A.E., 
map, 1889. Mumtrahamute.—Petroff in 10th Cen¬ 
sus, Alaska, 17,1884 Mumtrekhlagamute.—Petroff, 
Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1881. Mumtrelega.—Baker, 
Geog. Diet. A laska, 96,1902. 

Mumtrelek (‘ smoke-house ’). A Kusk¬ 
wogmiut Eskimo village on the w. bank 
of lower Kuskokwim r., Alaska. Pop. 
41 (and of the station 29) in 1880, 33 in 
1890. 

Mumtrekhiagamiut. — Eleventh Census, Alaska, 
104,1893. 

Munceytown. A Munsee village in On¬ 
tario, n. w. of Brantford, on or near 
Thames r. 

A»'ti-ha n ‘.—J. N. B. Hewitt, inf’n, 1887 (Tusca- 
roraname). Munceytown.—Common name. 

Munchinye ( MiXn-tci'-nye , ‘short black 
bear’). A subgens of the Tunanpin gens 


of the Iowa.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. 
E., 238, 1897. 

Mundua ( Mondawd , ‘one that keeps 
calling or sounding [through the night] ’; 
a word used for the whippoorwill by the 
Chippewa about Rat portage, Lake of the 
the Woods.—W. J.). A tribe, or supposed 
tribe, which the Chippewa claim to have 
exterminated at an early period, with the 
exception of a remnant incorporated into 
their tribe and whose descendants con¬ 
stitute the Wabezhaze or Marten gens. 
The statements in regard to them, if 
identified with the Mantouekof the Jesuit 
writers, are at variance, and may relate 
to two different groups. The Mantoue 
of the Jesuit Relation of 1640 are located 
apparently on the upper peninsula of 
Michigan, not far w. of Sault Ste Marie, a 
little n. of the Noquet. In the Relation 
of 1658 they appear to be placed farther 
w. and associated with the Sioux. In 
the Relation of 1671 apparently the same 
people appear to be situated under the 
name Nantoue, near Fox r. and in the 
vicinity of the Miami band, which once 
resided in this region with or near the 
Mascoutens. In the tradition given by 
Warren the scene of the conflict between 
the Chippewa and this people is indefi¬ 
nite, but the period assigned appears to 
antedate the entrance of the people into 
Wisconsin, and thus Schoolcraft inter¬ 
prets it. The tradition, notwithstanding 
Warren’s assertion that it can be con¬ 
sidered history, is so exaggerated and 
indefinite as to date and locality as to 
render doubtful the propriety of identi¬ 
fying the Mundua of the tradition with 
the Mantouek of the Jesuit writers. More¬ 
over, Warren’s tradition in regard to the 
Marten gens can not be reconciled with 
the tradition regarding the Mundua and 
with what is stated by the Jesuit Rela¬ 
tions in regard to the Mantouek. It has 
been suggested that Amikwa, Noquet, 
and Mundua or Mantouek, respectively 
Beaver, Bear, and Whippoorwill gentes, 
are all names for one and the same 
people. See Amikwa, Noquet. (j. m. c. t. ) 

Mantoue.—Jes. Rel. 1640, 34, 1858. Mantouecks. — 
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., II, 81, 1753. 
Mantouek.—Jes. Rel. 1658,21,1858. Mantoueouec.— 
Map of 1671 (?) in Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., nr, 131, 
1856. Meendua.—Ramsay in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83, 
1850. Mun-dua.—Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist 
Soc. Coll., V, 50, 1885. Mundwa.—Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, V, 39, 1855. Nantoiie'.—Jes. Rel. 1671, 42. 
1858. 

Munnawhatteaug. See Menhaden. 

Munominikasheenhug (‘ rice-makers ’). 
A Chippewa division living on St Croix r., 
Wis. They had villages at upper St 
Croix, Yellow, and Rice lakes, and on 
Snake r., and others named Namakagon 
and Pokegama. They were incorporated 
with the Betonukeengainubejig. (j. m.) 
Foille avoine Chippeways.—Schoolcraft, Trav., 321, 
1821. Fols Avoin Sauteaux.— Pike, Trav., 130,1811. 


BULL. 30] 


MUNSEE 


957 


Fols-avoin-Sauters.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., II, 12, 1814. Fols-avoise.— 
Ibid., 13. la Fallorine.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 
28, 1806 (misprint). La Follovoine. —Ibid., 30. 
Manominikaciyag.— Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1905 
(proper form). Mun-o-min-ik-a-sheenh-ug. —War¬ 
ren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 38, 1885. 
Mun o-min-ik-a-she-ug,— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 
86,1850. Rice Makers. —Ibid. St Croix Indians. — 
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 335, 
1885. 

Munsee ( Min-asin-ink , ‘at the place 
where stones are gathered together.’— 
Hewitt). One of the three principal di¬ 
visions of the Delawares, the others being 
the Unami and Unalachtigo, f?om whom 
their dialect differed so much that they 
have frequently been regarded as a dis¬ 
tinct tribe. According to Morgan they 
have the same three gentes as the Dela¬ 
wares proper, viz, Wolf ( Tookseat), Turtle 
(Pokekooungo) , and Turkey ( Pullaook ). 
Brinton says these were totemic designa¬ 
tions for the three geographic divisions 
of the Delawares and had no reference to 
gentes (see Delaware). However this 
may be, the Wolf has commonly been 
regarded as the totem of the Munsee, 
who have frequently been called the 
Wolf tribe of the Delawares. 

The Munsee originally occupied the 
headwaters of Delaware r. in New 
York, New Jersey, and Pennsylvania, 
extending s. to Lehigh r., and also 
held the w. bank of the Hudson from 
the Catskill mts. nearly to the New 
Jersey line. They had the Mahican and 
Wappinger on the n. and e., and the 
Delawares on the s. and s. e., and were 
regarded as the protecting barrier between 
the latter tribe and the Iroquois. Their 
council village was Minisink, probably in 
Sussex co., N. J. According to Rutten- 
ber they were divided into the Minisink, 
Waoranee, Warranawonkong, Mameko- 
ting, Wawarsink, and Catskill. The Mini¬ 
sink formed the principal division of the 
Munsee, and the two names have often 
been confounded. The bands along the 
Hudson were prominent in the early his¬ 
tory of New York, but as white settle¬ 
ments increased most of them joined their 
relatives on the Delaware. In 1756 those 
remaining in New York were placed upon 
lands in Schoharie co. and were incor¬ 
porated with the Mohawk. By a fraud¬ 
ulent treaty, known as the “Walking 
Purchase,” the main body of the Munsee 
was forced to remove from the Delaware 
about the year 1740, and settled at Wy- 
alusing on the Susquehanna on lands as¬ 
signed them by the Iroquois. Soon after 
this they removed to Allegheny r., Pa., 
where some of them had settled as early 
as 1724. The Moravian missionaries had 
already begun their work among them 
(see Missions; Moravians ), and a consider¬ 
able number under their teaching drew 
off from the tribe and became a separate 


organization. The others moved w. with 
the Delawares into Indiana, where most of 
them were incorporated with that tribe, 
while others joined the Chippewa, Shaw¬ 
nee, and other tribes, so that the Munsee 
practically ceased to exist as an organized 
body. Many removed to Canada and set¬ 
tled near their relatives, the Moravian 
Indians. 

On account of the connection of the 
Munsee with other tribes, it is impossible 
to estimate their numbers at any period. 
In 1765 those on the Susquehanna were 
about 750. In 1843 those in the United 
States were chiefly with the Delawares in 
Kansas, and numbered about 200, while 
others were with the Shawnee and Stock- 
bridges, besides those in Canada. In 
1885 the only Munsee officially recognized 
in the United States were living with a 
band of Chippewa in Franklin co., Kans., 
both together numbering only 72. The 
two bands were united in 1859, and oth¬ 
ers are incorporated with the Cherokee 
in Indian Ter., having joined them 
about 1868. These Munsee were more 
commonly known in recent years as 
“Christians.” In Canada the band of 
Munsee settled with the Chippewa on 
Thames r., in Caradoc tp., Middlesex 
co., Ontario, numbered 119 in 1886, 
while the Moravians, who are main¬ 
ly Munsee, living near them in Oxford 
township, Kent co., numbered 275 in 

1884. According to the Canadian Ind. Aff. 
Rep. for 1906, the Moravians of the 
Thames numbered 348 persons, and the 
“Munsees of the Thames” numbered 
118. There are also a few with the 
Stockbridges at Green Bay agency, Wis. 

The Munsee have been parties to the 
following treaties with the United States: 
Treaty of Fort Industry, O., July 4, 1805, 
with the Ottawa, Wyandot, and other 
tribes. Appendix to the Menominee 
treaty with the United States at Green 
Bay, Wis., Oct. 27, 1832, by the Stock- 
bridges, Munsee, Brothertons, and others. 
Treaty of Stockbridge, Wis., Sept. 3,1839, 
by Stockbridges and Munsee. Treaty of 
Stockbridge, Wis., Feb. 5, 1856, amend¬ 
ing treaty of Sept. 3, 1839. Treaty at 
Sac and Fox agency, Ivans., July 16, 
1859, in connection with certain Chip¬ 
pewa. (j. m. ) 

Humenthi. —Gatschet, Shawnee MS.. B. A. E. 1882 
(Shawnee name; pi. Humenthigi, from mlnethi , 
‘island’). Mantuas.—Authority of 1840quoted by 
Jones, Ojebway Inds., 121, 1861. Mincees.—Win¬ 
field, Hudson Co., 8,1874. Minci.—Morgan, League 
Iroq., map, 1851. Minissi.—Barton, New Views, 
app., 2,1798. Minseys.—Heekewelder in Trans. 
Am. Philos. Soc., n. s., iv, 368,1834. Minsimini.— 
Walam Olum (1833) in Brinton Lenape Leg., 214, 

1885. Minsis.—Stuyvesant (1660) quoted by Rut- 
ten ber, Tribes Hudson R., 140, 1872. Moncey.— 
Writer of 1842 in Day, Penn., 640,1843. Monsays.— 
Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am. Jour. Geol., 271, 
1831. Monsees.—Barton, New Views, xxvii, 1797. 
Monseys.—Ft Johnson Conference (1756) in N. Y. 


958 


MUOC-MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS 


[b. a. b. 


Doc. Col. Hist,, VII, 178, 1856. Monsi.—Vater, 
Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 367, 1816. Monsies.—German 
Flats Conference (1770) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 
viii 243 1857. Monsys.—Loskiel, Hist. Mission 
United Breth., pt. 3, 119, 1794. Monthees.—Aupa- 
umut (1791) in Brinton, Lenape Leg., 45, 1885. 
Montheys.—Brinton, Lenape Leg., 36,1885. Mun- 
ceys.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 495,1856. Mun¬ 
cies.—Writer of 1782 in Butterfield, Washington- 
Irvine Corr., 377, 1882. Muncy.—Rupp, West. Pa 
178, 1846. Munsays.—Hutchins (1778) in School¬ 
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 714,1857. Munsees.—Trader 
(1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, hi, 561, l»o3. 
Mun-see-wuk.—Morgan, Consang. and Afnn.,289, 
1871. Munses.—Croghan (1765) in Rupp, West 
Pa,, app., 173, 1846. Munsey.— Easton Con¬ 

ference (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn, 285, 
1856. Munseyis.— Vater., Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 367, 
1816. Munsi.—Barton, New Views, X, -1798. Mun- 
sies.—Croghan (1768) in Rupp, West. Pa., 
app., 181, 1846. Munsy.—Smith, Boquet Exped., 
89, 1766. Nunseys.—Delaware treaty (1765) in 
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Vli, 741, 1856 (misprint). 
Ptuksit.—Brinton, Lenape Leg., 39,1885 (‘ Round 
foot’, referring to the Wolf; the totemic designa¬ 
tion of the Munsee). Took'-seat.— Morgan, Anc. 
Soc., 172, 1878 (‘Wolf’, one of the three Dela¬ 
ware gentes; according to Brinton these divi¬ 
sions are not gentes). Wemintheew. —Aupaumut 
(1791) in Brinton, Lenape Leg., 20,1885 (Mahican 
name). Wolf tribe of the Delawares.—The Mun¬ 
see have frequently been so called. 

Muoc. A Chumashan village on one of 
the Santa Barbara ids., Cal., probably 
Santa Rosa, in 1542. 

Muoc.—Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. 
Fla., 186, 1857. Muoe.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, 
Apr. 17, 1863. 

Mupu. A populous Chumashan village 
stated by Indians to have been at Santa 
Paula, Ventura co., Cal. Mupu arroyo 
drains into the Saticoy. See Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. (h. w. h.) 

Murek. A Yurok village on Klamath r., 
Cal., 12 or 13 m. below the mouth of the 
Trinity. 

Moor-i-ohs.—McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., 
spec, sess., 194,1853. Moo-ris.—Ibid., 162. Morai- 
uh.—Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 138, 
1853. Morias.—McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d 
Cong., spec, sess., 193,1853. Mo-ri-ohs.—Ibid., 161. 
Mrh. —Powers in Overland Monthly, viii. 530,1872. 
Murek.—A. L. Kroeber, inf’n, 1905. Mur-iohs.— 
Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855. 

Muruam. A former Texas tribe, numer¬ 
ous members of which were baptized dur¬ 
ing the first half of the 18th century at the 
San Antonio missions. One individual by 
this name was baptized in 1707 at Mission 
San Francisco Solano, on the Rio Grande. 
At San Antonio their baptism was first 
recorded under ‘ ‘ Baptisms of the Hyer- 
bipiamos ” (Ervipiames)with those of the 
Ervipiames destined for Mission San 
Xavier de Naxera, called the “Hyerbipi- 
amo suburb” (1721-26). The records 
show that in their gentile state the Mu¬ 
ruam intermarried with these Ervipiames, 
who were Tonkawan, and who came from 
Rancherfa Grande (q. v.). This points to 
the conclusion that the Muruam were 
Tonkawan. A difficulty is raised, how¬ 
ever, by the fact that at the Ervipiame 
suburb were also numerous Ticmamares, 
some of which tribe had been baptized at 
San Francisco Solano mission and were 
apparently natives of that region (Records 


of Mission San Antonio de Valero, MS.). 
After 1726 the Muruam neophytes were 
incorporated under Mission Valero (ibid.). 
Their name is most frequently found in 
the baptismal books of this mission be¬ 
fore the year 1730, but members of the 
tribe were still living there as late as 1775. 
Compare Mariames , who may have been 

identical. (h. e. b. ) 

Moroame.—Baptismal Records, op. cit. Moru- 
ames.—Ibid. Muruam.—Ibid. Muruami.—Ibid. 

Murzibusi. The Bean clan of the Yoki 
(Rain) phratry of the Hopi. See Patki. 

Mu'r-zi-bu-si.—Stephen in 8th Rep : B. A. E., 39, 
1891. T. 

Mus (‘mesquite’). Given by Bourke 
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 1889) as a 
clan (properly gens) of the Mohave, q. v. 

Musalakun." A name, originally that of 
a captain or chief of one of the villages in 
the vicinity of Cloverdale, Cal., applied 
to all the Pomo living along Russian r. 
from Preston southward to the vicinity of 
Geyserville. (s. a. b. ) 

Maj-su-ta-ki-as.—McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.4, 
32aCong., spec, sess., 144,1853. Masalla Magoons.— 
Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 449, 1874. Mi-sal'-la Ma- 
gun'.—Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 183, 
1877. Mu-sal-la-kun'.—Ibid. 

Muscongus. A village on the coast of 
Maine in 1616, probably belonging to the 
Abnaki. It seems to have been near 
Muscongus id., in Lincoln co. 

Muskoncus.—Smith (1624) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., 
v, 155, 1857. Nusconcus.—Smith (1616) in Mass. 
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 107, 1837. Nuscoucus.— 
Smith (1629), Va., II, 183, repr. 1819. Nuskoncus.— 
Ibid., 173. Nuskoucus.—Ibid., 192. 

Muscupiabit (‘pinon place’). Men¬ 
tioned by Rev. J. Cavalleria (Hist. San 
Bernardino Val., 39, 1902) as a village 
(probably Serrano) at a place now called 
Muscupiabe, near San Bernardino, s. Cal. 

Musgrove, Mary. See Bosomworth. 

Mushalatubbee. A Choctaw chief, born 
in the last half of the 18th century. He 
was present at Washington, D. C., in 
Dec., 1824, as one of the Choctaw dele¬ 
gation, where he met and became ac¬ 
quainted with Lafayette on his last visit 
to the United States. He led his war¬ 
riors against the Creeks in connection 
with Jackson in 1812. He signed as lead¬ 
ing chief the treaty of Choctaw 7 Trading 
House, Miss., Oct. 24, 1816; of Treaty 
Ground, Miss., Oct. 18, 1820; of Wash¬ 
ington, D. C., Jan. 20, 1825; and of Danc¬ 
ing Rabbit Creek, Miss., Sept. 27, 1830. 
He died of smallpox at the agency in 
Arkansas, Sept. 30, 1838. His name was 
later applied to a district in Indian Ter. 

Mushkoniatawee. A Montagnais vil¬ 
lage on the s. coast of Labrador.—Stearns, 
Labrador, 271, 1884. 

Music and Musical instruments. Indian 
music is coextensive with tribal life, for 
every public ceremony, as well as each 
important act in the career of an indi¬ 
vidual, has its accompaniment of song. 
The music of each ceremony has its pe- 


BULL. 30] 


MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS 


959 


culiar rhythm, so also have the classes of 
songs which pertain to individual acts: 
fasting and prayer, setting of traps, hunt¬ 
ing, courtship, playing of games, facing 
and defying death. An Indian can deter¬ 
mine at once the class of a strange song 
by the rhythm of the music, but not by 
that of the drumbeat, for the latter is not 
infrequently played in time differing from 
that of the song. In structure the Indian 
song follows the outline of the form w hich 
obtains in our own music—a short, me¬ 
lodic phrase built on related tones which 
we denominate chord lines, repeated with 
more or less variation, grouped into 
clauses, and correlated into periods. The 
compass of songs varies from 1 to 3 
octaves. 

Some songs have no words, but the ab¬ 
sence of the latter does not impair the 
definite meaning; vocables are used, and 
when once set to a melody they are never 
changed. Occasionally both words and 
vocables are employed in the same song. 
Plural singing is generally in unison on 
the plains and elsewhere, the women 
using a high, reedy, falsetto tone an octave 
above the male singers. Among the Cher¬ 
okee and other Southern tribes, however, 
“round” singing was common. Men 
and women having clear resonant voices 
and good musical intonation compose the 
choirs which lead the singing in cere¬ 
monies, and are paid for their services. 
Frequently two or three hundred per¬ 
sons join in a choral, and the carrying of 
the melody in octaves by soprano, tenor, 
and bass voices, produces harmonic 
effects. 

Songs are the property of clans, socie¬ 
ties, and individuals. Clans and societies 
have special officers to insure the exact 
transmission and rendition of their songs, 
which members alone have the right to 
sing, and-a penalty is exacted from the 
member who makes a mistake in sing¬ 
ing. The privilege to sing individual 
songs must sometimes be purchased from 
the owner. Women composed and sang 
the lullaby and the spinning and grinding 
songs. Among the Pueblos men joined in 
singing the latter and beat time on the 
floor as the women worked at the metates. 
Other songs composed by women were 
those sung to encourage the warrior as he 
went forth from the camp, and those sung 
to send to him, by the w r ill of the singers, 
strength and power to endure the hard¬ 
ships of the battle. 

On the n. Pacific coast, and among other 
tribes as well, musical contests were held, 
when singers from one tribe or band 
would contend with those from another 
tribe or band as to which could remem¬ 
ber the greatest number or accurately 
repeat a new song after hearing it given 
for the first time. Among all the tribes 


accurate singing was considered a desir¬ 
able accomplishment. 

Among the Baffinland Eskimo 
grudges are settled by the opponents 
meeting by appointment and singing 
sarcastic songs at each other. The one 
who creates the most laughter is regarded 
as the victor. The Danish writers call 
these controversial songs “nith songs.” 

In ceremonial songs, which are formal 
appeals to the supernatural, accuracy in 
rendering is essential, as otherwise “the 
path would not be straight”; the appeals 
could not reach their proper destina¬ 
tion and evil consequences would follow. 
Consequently, when an error in singing 
occurs, the singers stop at once, and either 
the song or the whole ceremony is begun 
again; or, as in some tribes, a rite of con¬ 
trition is performed, after which the cere¬ 
mony may proceed. Official prompters 
keep strict watch during a ceremony in 
order to forestall such accidents. 



MUSICIANS, PEYOTE CEREMONY; KIOWA 


The steps of ceremonial dancers follow 
the rhythm of the drum, which frequently 
differs from the rhythm of the song. The 
drum may be beaten in 2/4 time and the 
song be in 3/4 time, or the beat be in 5/8 
time against a melody in 3/4, or the song 
may be sung to a rapid tremolo beating of 
the drum. The beat governs the bodily 
movements; the song voices the emotion 
of the appeal. The native belief which 
regards breath as the symbol of life is in 
part extended to song; the invisible voice 
is supposed to be able to reach the invis¬ 
ible power that permeates nature and 
animates all natural forms. The Indian 
sings with all his force, being intent on 
expressing the fervor of his emotion and 
having no conception of an objective pre¬ 
sentation of music. The straining of the 
voice injures its tone quality, stress shar¬ 
pens a note, sentiment flattens it, and 
continued portemento blurs the outline of 
the melody, which is often further con¬ 
fused by voice pulsations, making a 






MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS 


[b. a. e. 


960 


rhythm within a rhythm, another com¬ 
plication being added when the drum is 
beaten to a measure different from that 



CHIPPEWA DRUMS. (jenks) 


of the song; so that one may hear three 
rhythms, two of them contesting, some¬ 
times with syncopation, yet resulting in a 
well - built whole. 
It has always been 
difficult for a lis¬ 
tener of another 
race to catch an In¬ 
dian song, as the 
melody is often 
“hidden by over¬ 
powering noise.” 
When, however, 
this difficulty has 
been overcome, 
these untrammeled 
expressions of emo¬ 
tions present a rich 
field in which to 
observe the growth 
of musical form and the beginning of 
musical thinking. They form an impor¬ 
tant chapter in the development of music. 
Apart from this historic value, these songs 



Kwakiutl Rattles; i-s. (boas) 




Turtle-shell Rattle; 
Iroquois (i-s) 


Hupa Rattle; i-a 
( mason ) 


offer to the composer a wealth of melodic 
and rhythmic movements, and that pecu¬ 
liar inspiration which heretofore has been 


obtained solely from the folk songs of 
Europe. 

Musical Instruments .—Drums vary in 
size and structure, and certain ceremonies 
have their peculiar type. On the N. W. 
coast a plank or box 
serves as a drum. Whis¬ 
tles of bone, wood, or 
pottery, some producing 
two or more tones, are 
employed in some cere¬ 
monies; they symbolize 
the cry of birds or ani¬ 
mals, or the voices of 
spirits. Pandean pipes, 
which occur in South 
America, were unknown 
in the northern conti¬ 
nent until recent times. In the S. W., 
notched sticks are rasped together or on 
gourds, bones, or baskets, to accentuate 




notched Stick 

AND DEER 

Scapula used 

FOR RATTLE; 
H O P I ; 1 - 12 . 

(stevenson) 



Omaha Flute, 
(j. O. Dorsey) 


Kwakiutl 
Wh istle; 
1-8. (boas) 



rhythm. The flageolet is widely distrib¬ 
uted and is played by young men dur¬ 
ing courtship; it also accompanies the 
songs of certain Pueblo 
ceremonies. Rattles (q. 
v.) were universal. The 
intoning of rituals, incan¬ 
tations, and speeches can 
hardly be regarded as of 
musical character. The 
musical bow is used by 
the Maidu of California 
and by the Tepehuane, 

Cora, and Huichol tribes 
of the 'Piman stock in 
Mexico. Among the 
Maidu this bow plays an 
important part in reli¬ 
gion and much sorcery is 
connected with it. 

For further information consult Baker, 
Ueber die Musik des Nordamerikani- 
schen Wilden, 1882; Boas (1) in 6th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1888, (2) in Rep. Nat. 



Bone Whistles; Hupa; 
i- 5 . (powers) 



































BULL. 30] 


MUSKEG-MUSKHOGEAN FAMILY 


961 


Mus. 1895; Brown in Am. Anthrop., vih, 
no. 4,1906; Cringan, Iroquoia Folk-songs, 
Archseol. Rep. Provin. Mus., Toronto, 
1902; Curtis, Songs of Ancient America, 
1905; Cushing in Millstone, x, Jan. 1885; 
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, 
pt. 3, 1905; Farrand, Basis of American 
History, 1904; Fillmore in Am. Anthrop., 
n. s., i, 1899; Fletcher (1) in Pub. Peabody 
Mus., i, no. v, (2) Indian Story and Song, 
1900; Hoffman in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 1891; 
Hough in Am. Anthrop., xi, no. 5, 1897; 
Hrdlicka, ibid., n. s., vn, no. 3, 1905, and 

viii, no. 1, 1906; Lumholtz, Unknown 
Mexico, i,475,1902; Matthews, (l)Navaho 
Legends, 1897, (2) Night Chant, Memoirs 
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Anthrop. ser., v, 
1902; Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; 
Sammelbiinde der InternationalenMusik- 
gesellschaft; Stumpfin Vierteljahrsschrift 
fur Musikwissenschaft; Voth in Field Co- 
lumb. Mus. Pub., Anthrop. ser., in, vi, 
1901, 1903; Wallaschek, Primitive Music, 
1893; Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., n. s., 

ix, no. 1, 1907. (a. c. f.) 

Muskeg (Chippewa, muskig; Kickapoo, 

maskyag i , ‘grassy bog.’—W. J.). Low, 
wet land; a quagmire, marsh, swamp, 
the equivalent of savane in Canadian 
French. A w r ord much used in parts of 
Ontario, the Canadian Northwest, and 
the adjoining regions of the United States; 
spelled also maskeg. In the N. W. muskeg 
is the usual form. (a. f. c.) 

Muskelunge. See Maskinonge. 

Muskhogean Family. An important 
linguistic stock, comprising the Creeks, 
Choctaw, Chickasaw, Seminole, and 
other tribes. The name is an adjectival 
form of Muskogee , properly Maskoki (pi. 
Maskokalgi or Muscogulgee). Its deriva¬ 
tion has been attributed to an Algonquian 
term signifying ‘ swamp ’ or ‘ open marshy 
land’ (see Muskeg), but this is almost cer¬ 
tainly incorrect. The Muskhogean tribes 
were confined chiefly to the Gulf states e. 
of the Mississippi, occupying almost all 
of Mississippi and Alabama, and parts 
of Tennessee, Georgia, Florida, and South 
Carolina. According to a tradition held 
in common by most of their tribes, they 
had reached their historic seats from some 
starting point w. of the Mississippi, usually 
placed, when localized at all, somewhere 
on the upper Red r. The greater part of 
the tribes of the stock are now on reserva¬ 
tions in Oklahoma. 

Through one or another of its tribes 
the stock early came into notice. Panfilo 
de Narvaez met the Apalachee of w. Flor¬ 
ida in 1528, and in 1540-41 De Soto 
passed e. and w. through the whole ex¬ 
tent of the Muskhogean territory. Mis¬ 
sion effort was begun among them by the 
Spanish Franciscans at a very early 
period, with such success that before the 
year 1700, besides several missions in 


lower Georgia, the whole Apalachee tribe, 
an important single body, was civilized 
and Christianized, and settled in 7 large 
and well-built towns (see Missions. ) The 
establishment of the French at Mobile, 
Biloxi, and other points about 1699-1705 
brought them into contact with the Choc¬ 
taw and other western branches of the 
stock. The powerful Creek confederacy 
had its most intimate contact with the 
English of Carolina and Georgia, although 
a French fort was long established in the 
territory of the A1 ibamu. The Chickasaw 
also were allies of the English, while the 
Choctaw were uncertain friends of the 
French. The devotion of the Apalachee 
to the Spaniards resulted in the destruc¬ 
tion of the former as a people at the 
hands of the English and their Indian 
allies in the first years of the 18th cen¬ 
tury. The tide of white settlement, both 
English and French, gradually pressed 
the Muskhogean tribes back from the 
shores of the Atlantic and the Gulf, some 
bands recrossing to the w. of the Missis¬ 
sippi as early as 1765. The terrible Creek 
war in 1813-14 and the long drawn-out 
Seminole war 20 years later closed the 
struggle to maintain themselves in their 
old territories, and before the year 1840 
the last of the Muskhogean tribes had 
been removed to their present location in 
Oklahoma, with the exception of a few 
hundred Seminole in Florida, a larger 
number of Choctaw in Mississippi, Ala¬ 
bama, and Louisiana, and a small forgot¬ 
ten Creek remnant in e. Texas. (See the 
several tribal articles.) 

There existed between the tribes marked 
dissimilarities as to both physical and 
cultural characteristics. For instance, 
the Choctaw were rather thickset and 
heavy, while those farther e., as the 
Creeks, were taller but well-knit. All 
the tribes were agricultural and sed¬ 
entary, occupying villages of substan¬ 
tially built houses. The towns near the 
tribal frontiers were usually palisaded, 
while those more remote from invasion 
were left unprotected. All were brave, 
but the Choctaw claimed to fight only in 
self-defense, while the Creeks, and more 
particularly the Chickasaw, were ag¬ 
gressive. The Creeks were properly a 
confederacy, with the Muskogee as the 
dominant partner, and including also in 
later years the alien Yuchi, the Natchez, 
and a part of the Shawnee. The Choctaw 
also formed a loose confederacy, including 
among others several broken tribes of 
alien stock. 

In their government the Muskhogean 
tribes appear to have made progress cor¬ 
responding to their somewhat advanced 
culture in other respects. In the Creek 
government, which is better known than 
that of the other tribes of the family, the 


57008°—Bull. 30—12-61 



962 


MUSKHOGEAN FAMILY 


[b. a. e. 


unit of the political as well as of the 
social structure was the clan, as in many 
Indian tribes, marriage being forbidden 
within the clan, and the children be¬ 
longed to the clan of the mother. Each 
town had its independent government, 
its council being a miniature of that of 
the confederacy; the town and its out¬ 
lying settlements, if it had any, thus rep¬ 
resented an autonomy such as is usually 
implied by the term “tribe.” Every 
considerable town was provided with a 
“public square,” formed of 4 buildings of 
equal size facing the cardinal points, and 
each divided into 3 apartments. The 
structure on the e. side was allotted to 
the chief councilors, probably of the 
administrative side of the government; 
that on the s. side belonged to the war¬ 
rior chiefs; that on the sr. to the inferior 
chiefs, while that on the w. was used for 
the paraphernalia belonging to the cere¬ 
mony of the black drink, war physic, etc. 
The general policy of the confederacy 
was guided by a council, composed of 
representatives from each town, who met 
annually, or as occasion required, at a 
time and place fixed by the chief, or head 
mico. The confederacy itself was a polit¬ 
ical organization founded on blood rela¬ 
tionship, real or fictitious; its chief object 
was mutual defense, and the power wield¬ 
ed by its council was purely advisory. 
The liberty within the bond that held the 
organization together was shown by the 
fact that parts of the confederacy, and even 
separate towns, might and actually did 
engage in war without reference to the 
wishes of the confederacy. The towns, 
especially those of the Creeks, were di¬ 
vided into two classes, the White or Peace 
towns, whose function pertained to the 
civil government, and the Red or War 
towns, whose officers assumed manage¬ 
ment of military affairs. 

The square in the center of the town 
was devoted to the transaction of all pub¬ 
lic business and to public ceremonies. 
In it was situated the sweat house, the 
uses of which were more religious than 
medicinal in character; and here was the 
chunkey yard, devoted to the game from 
which it takes its popular name, and to the 
busk (q. v.), or so-called Green-corn dance. 
Such games, though not strictly of reli¬ 
gious significance, were affairs of public 
interest, and were attended by rites and 
ceremonies of a religious nature. In 
these squares strangers who had no rela¬ 
tives in the town—i. e., who possessed no 
clan rights—were permitted to encamp 
as the guests of the town. 

The settlement of disputes and the 
punishment of crimes were left pri¬ 
marily to the members of the clans con¬ 
cerned; secondly, to the council of the 
town or tribe involved. The busk was 


an important institution among the 
Muskhogean people, and had its analogue 
among most, if not all, other American 
tribes; it was chiefly in the nature of an 
offering of first fruits, and its celebration, 
which occupied several days, was an oc¬ 
casion for dancing and ceremony; new 
fire was kindled by a priest, and from 
it were made all the fires in the town; 
all offenses, save that of murder, were 
forgiven at this festival, and a new year 
began. Artificial deformation of the head 
seems to have been practised to some ex¬ 
tent by all the tribes, but prevailed as a 
general custom among the Choctaw, 
who for this reason were sometimes 
called “Flatheads.” 

The Muskhogean population at the 
time of first contact with Europeans has 
been estimated at 50,000. By the census 
of 1890 the number of pure-bloods be¬ 
longing to the family in Indian Ter. was 
as follows: Choctaw, 9,996; Chickasaw, 
3,464; Creek, 9,291; Seminole, 2,539; be¬ 
sides perhaps 1,000 more in Florida, Mis¬ 
sissippi, Louisiana, and Texas. In 1905 
their numbers were: Choctaw by blood, 
17,160; by intermarriage, 1,467; freedmen, 
5,254; in Mississippi, 1,235. Chickasaw by 
blood, 5,474; by intermarriage, 598; freed¬ 
men, 4,695. Creeks by blood, 10,185; 
freedmen, 5,738. Seminole by blood, 
2,099; freedmen, 950; in Florida (1900), 
358. 

The recognized languages of the stock, 
so far as known, each with dialectic vari¬ 
ants, are as follows: 

1. Muskogee (including almost half of 
the Creek confederacy, and its offshoot, 
the Seminole). 

2. Hitchiti (including a large part of 
the Lower Creeks, the Mikasuki band of 
the Seminole, and perhaps the ancient 
Apalachee tribe). 

3. Koasati (including the Alibamu, 
Wetumpka, and Koasati towns of the 
Creek confederacy). 

4. Choctaw (including the Choctaw, 
Chickasaw, and the following small 
tribes: Acolapissa, Bayogoula, Chakchi- 
uma, Chatot, Chula, Huma, Ibitoupa, 
Mobile, Mugalasha, Naniba, Ofogoula, 
Tangipahoa, Taposa, and Tohome). 

To the above the Natchez (q. v.) should 
probably be added as a fifth division, 
though it differs more from the other dia¬ 
lects than any of these differ from one 
another. The ancient Yamasi of the 
Georgia-South Carolina coast may have 
constituted a separate group, or may have 
been a dialect of the Hitchiti. TheYama- 
craw were renegades from the Lower Creek 
towns and in the main were probably 
Hitchiti. (h. w. h. j. m.) 

>Chahtahs. —Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 
403, 1847 (or, Choktahs or Flatheads). =Chahta- 
Muskoki.— Trumbull in Johnson’s Cyclopaedia, 
n, 1156,1877. >Chahtas.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. 


BULL. 30] 


MUSKINGUM-MUSWASIPI 


963 


Antiq. Soc., II, 100, 306, 1836. =Chata-Muskoki.— 
Hale in Am. Antiq., 108, Apr. 1883. >Choctah.— 
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 337, 1850 (includes 
Choctahs, Muscogulges, Muskohges); Latham in 
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856; Latham, 
Opuscula, 366,1860. >Chocta-Muskhog. —Gallatin 
in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, pt. 1, xcix, 77, 
1848. > Choctaw Muskhogee. —Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., n, 119, 1836. >Coshattas.— 
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (not classi¬ 
fied). >Flat-heads. —Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man¬ 
kind, v, 403, 1847. >Humas,— Latham, Nat. 
Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (e. of Mississippi above New 
Orleans). =Maskoki.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 
I, 50,1884. >Mobilian.— Bancroft, Hist. U. S., 249, 
1840. >Muscogee. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 
app., 460,1878. >Muskhogee.— Gallatin in Trans. 
Am. Antiq. Soc., II, 94, 1836. Muskhogies. —Berg- 
haus (1845), Physik. Atlas, map 17,1848. >Tschah- 
tas. —Ibid.; ibid., 1852. 

Muskingum (‘moose eye or face.’— 
Hewitt). A Delaware (?) village marked 
on old maps as on the w. bank of Mus¬ 
kingum r., Ohio. 

Muskingom. —La Tour, map, 1779. Muskingum.— 
Giissefeld, map, 1784. Muskingun. —Alcedo, Die. 
Geog., Ill, 274, 1788. Muskinkum. —Esnauts and 
Rapilly, map, 1777. 

Muskwawasepeotan (‘the town of the 
old redwood creek’). A Potawatomi 
village formerly near Cedarville, Allen co., 
n. e. Ind., on land sold in 1828, and com¬ 
monly known as Metea’s Village from 
the name of its chief. (j. m.) 

Metea’s Village.— Mississinewa treaty (1826) in 
U. S. Ind. Treat., 670,1873. Muskwawasepeotan. — 
Long cited by McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 
ii, 61, 1849. 

Muskwoikakenut ( Mus-kwoi-kd-ke-nut , 
‘ He shoots bears with arrows’). A Cree 
band, so called after its chief, living in 
1856 in the vicinity of Ft de Prairie, 
Northwest Ter., Canada.—Hayden, Eth- 
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 237, 1862. 

Muskwoikauepawit ( Mus-kwoi-kau-e-pd- 
wit, ‘ Standing bear’). A Cree band, so 
called after its chief, living in 1856 about 
Ft de Prairie, Northwest Ter., Canada.— 
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 
237, 1862. 

Musme ( Mtis-me'). A former village of 
the Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg.— 
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 234, 
1890. 

Muspa. A Calusa village on the s. w. 
coast of Florida about 1570 (Fontaneda), 
probably about the mouth of Caloosa- 
hatchee r. The people of Muspa were 
among the last of the Calusa to retain 
their name and territory. C. Romano is 
marked on old English maps as Punta de 
Muspa and the coast strip extending thence 
northward to the entrance of Caloosaha- 
tchee r. is marked on some Spanish maps 
as La Muspa (B. Smith). The Muspa 
Indians, according to Brinton (Flor. 
Penin., 114, 1859), occupied the shore 
and islands of Boca Grande, the main 
entrance of Charlotte harbor, until 
toward the close of the 18th century, 
when they were driven to the keys by 
the Seminole; but according to Douglas 
(Am. Antiq., vn, 281, 1885) they were 
still in the vicinity of Pine id., in Char¬ 


lotte harbor, as late as 1835. There is 
even reason to believe that they took 
part in some of the raiding in the Semi¬ 
nole war as late as 1840. ( j. m. ) 

Muspa.—Fontaneda (ca. 1575), Memoir, Smith 
trans., 19, 1854. 

Musquarro. A former Montagnais ren¬ 
dezvous and mission station on the n. 
shore of the Gulf of St Lawrence, opposite 
Anticosti id. The Indians deserted it in 
recent years for Romaine. 

Mashquaro.—McLean, Hudson Bay, ii, 63, 1849. 
Maskouaro.—Hind, Lab. Penin., II, 180,1863. Mas- 
quarro.—Ibid., 26. Musquahanos.—Can. Ind. Aff. 
1880, 313, 1881 (applied to the band there; mis¬ 
print?). Musquarro.—Hind, Lab. Penin., ii, 133, 
1863. 

Musquash. A name for the muskrat 
( Fiber zibethicus) , used in Canada and n. 
and w. parts of the United States. In 
early writings on Virginia the forms 
mussascus and rmisquassus (Capt. John 
Smith, 1616), muscassus (Hakluyt, 1609), 
and others, occur. Cognate words in 
other Algonquian dialects are the Abnaki 
muskwessu, and the Chippewa miskwasi , 
signifying ‘it is red,’ which was therefore 
the original signification of the Virginian 
name whereof Smith’s word is a corrup¬ 
tion, and referred to the reddish color of 
the animal. See Mooskwasuh. ( a. f. c. ) 

Musqueam. A Cowichan tribe occupy¬ 
ing the n. part of the Fraser delta, Brit. 
Col.; pop. 98 in 1906. Male is their vil¬ 
lage. 

Miskwiam.—Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs., Brit. 
Col., 119 b, 1884. Misqueam.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 
1880, 316, 1881. Musqueam.—Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 158. 
Musqueeam.—Ibid., 1877, Li. Musqueom.—Ibid., 
1902, 72. 0,mE' {skoyim.— Boas in 64th Rep. Brit. 

A. A. S., 454, 1894. (Jmuski'Em.—Hill-Tout in 
Ethnol. Surv. Can., 54,1902. 

Mussauco. A former village, probably 
near Hartford, Conn. Its chief, Arrha- 
mamet, was conquered by Uncas, the 
Mohegan chief, about 1654.—Trumbull, 
Conn., i, 129, 1818. 

Mussundummo (‘water snake.’—Tan¬ 
ner, Narr., 314, 1830). Given as one 
of the totems among the Ottawa and 
Chippewa. It may be an Ottawa totem, 
as it is not mentioned by Morgan or 
Warren. 

Mustak. A former village of the Kalin- 
daruk division of the Costanoan family, 
connected with San Carlos mission, Cal. 
Mustac.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. 

Mustoo. A name given by Dawson to a 
supposed town on Hippa id., Queen Char¬ 
lotte ids., Brit. Col., but in reality the 
word is a corruption of Nasto, the Haida 
name for Hippa id., on which there were 
several towns. See Atanus, Gatga-inans, 
Sulu-stins. (j. r. s.) 

Muswasipi (cognate with Chippewa 
Moswa-sibl , ‘moose river.’—W. J.). The 
name of one of the divisions of the 
Upeshipow, an Algonquian tribe of Lab¬ 
rador, living in 1770 on Moose r., Ruperts 
Land, Brit. Am.—Richardson, Arctic 
Exped., ii, 38, 1851. 


964 


MUTCHUT—MYTHOLOGY 


[b. a. e. 


Mutchut. A village of the Powhatan 
confederacy, situated in 1608 on the n. 
bank of Mattapony r., in King and Queen 
co.,Va.—Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 
1819. 

Mutistul. An important Yukian Wappo 
village in Knight’s valley, Sonoma co., 
Cal. (8. A. B.) 

Mutistals.— Stearns in Am. Naturalist, xvi, 208, 
1882. Mu-tistul. - Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. 
Tribes, in, 110,1853. 

Mutsiks ( Mtit'-slks, 4 braves ’). A society 
of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Comrades, in 
the Piegan tribe; it consists of tried war¬ 
riors.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 
221, 1892. 

Mutsun. A Costanoan village near San 
Juan Bautista mission, San Benito co., 
Cal. The name was used for a group and 
dialect of the Costanoan family. The 
Mutsun dialect being better known than 
others allied to it, owing to a grammar 
and a phrasebook written by Arroyo de la 
Cuestain 1815 (Shea, Lib. Am. Ling., i, n, 
1861), the name came to be used for the 
linguistic family of which it formed part 
and which was held to extend northward 
beyond the Golden Gate and southward 
beyond Monterey, and from the sea to 
the crest of the" sierras. Gatschet and 
Powell used it in this sense in 1877. Sub¬ 
sequently Powell divided the Mutsun 
family, establishing the Moquelumnan 
family (q. v.) e. of San Joaquin r. and the 
Costanoan family (q. v.) w. thereof. 
Motssum. —Engelhardt, Franciscans in Cal., 398, 
1897. Mutseen.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Nov 23, 
1860. Mutsunes. —Ibid., Feb. 22. Mutzun.— Simeon, 
Diet. Nahuatl, xviii, 1885. Mutzunes— Taylor in 
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,1860. Nuthesum.— Ibid. 

Muttamussinsack. A village of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy in 1608, on the n. bank 
of the Rappahannock, in Caroline co., 
Va.—Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Mututicachi. A former pueblo, appar¬ 
ently of the Teguima division of the 
Opata, on the upper Rio Sonora, Sonora, 
Mexico. It is said to have been aban¬ 
doned on the establishment of the mission 
of Suamca in 1730. According to the 
RudoEnsavo (ca. 1762) it was a Pima set¬ 
tlement, but this is doubtless an error. 
The present hamlet of Mututicachi con¬ 
tained 27 persons in 1900. 

Motuticatzi.— Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1762), 160, 1863. 
Mututicachi.— Bandelierin Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 
483, 1892. 

Muutzizti (from Cora muuti, ‘head’). 
A subdivision of the Cora proper, inhab¬ 
iting the central part of the Nayarit mts., 
Jalisco, Mexico. 

Muutzicat.— Ortega, Vocab. en Lengua Castellana 
y Cora, 1732, 7, 1888 (sing. form). Muutzizti.— 
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59,1864. 

Muvinabore. Mentioned by Pimentel 
(Lenguas, n, 347, 1865) as a division of 
the Comanche, but no such division is 
recognized in the tribe. 

Muyi (Mu'yi). The Mole clan of the 
Hopi of Arizona.—Voth, Traditions of 
the Hopi, 37, 40, 1906. 


Mwawa (Ma^hwaw®, ‘wolf’). A gens 
of the Shawnee, q. v. 

Ma'"hwaw a . —Wm. Jones, inf’n, 1906. M'-wa-wa.— 
Morgan, Anc Soc., 168, 1877. 

Myeengun ( Ma'vngtin, ‘wolf’). Agens 
of the Chippewa, q. v. 

Mah-een-gun. —Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., v. 44, 1885. Ma'ingan— Gatschet, Ojibwa 
MS., B. A. E., 1882. Ma i ngan.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 
1906. My-een'-gun. —Morgan, Anc. Soc.. 166,1877. 

Myghtuckpassu. A village of the Pow¬ 
hatan confederacy in 1608, on the s. bank 
of Mattapony r., King William co., Va.— 
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. 

Myhangah. See Mohongo. 

Mystic (from missi-tuk , ‘great tidal 
river.’—Trumbull). The name of at 
least two. former villages in New Eng¬ 
land, one on the river of the same name 
at Medford, Middlesex co., Mass., w r hich 
was occupied in 1649 and was in the Mas- 
sachuset country. The other was a Pe- 
quot village on the w. side of Mystic r., 
not far from the present Mystic, New 
London co., Conn. It was burned by the 
English in 1637. (J. m. ) 

Mestecke.— Brewster (1657) in Mass. Hist. Soc. 
Coll., 4th s., VII, 82, 1865. Mestick.— Eliot (1649), 
ibid., 3d s., iv, 88, 1834. Mistick.— Dudley (ca. 
1630), ibid., 1st s., vm, 39, 1802. Mystick.— Pike 
(1698) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., in, 49, 1870. 

Mythology. The mythology of the 
North American Indians embraces the 
vast and complex body of their opinions 
regarding the genesis, the functions, the 
history, and the destiny not only of 
themselves but also of every subjective 
and of every objective phenomenon, 
principle, or thing of their past or present 
environment which in any marked man¬ 
ner had affected their welfare. 

Among savage tribal men a myth is 
primarily and essentially an account of the 
genesis, the functions, the history, and 
the destiny of a humanized fictitious male 
or female personage or being who is a 
personification of some body, principle, 
or phenomenon of nature, or of a faculty 
or function of the mind, and who per¬ 
forms his or her functions by imputed 
inherent orenda (q. v.), or magic power, 
and by whose being and activities the 
inchoate reasoning of such men sought to 
explain the existence and the operations 
of the bodies and the principles of nature. 
Such a being or personage might and did 
personify a rock, a tree, a river, a plant, 
the earth, the night, the storm, the sum¬ 
mer, the winter, a star, a dream, a 
thought, an action or a series of actions, 
or the ancient or prototype of an animal 
or a bird. Later, such a being, always 
humanized in form and mind, may, by 
his assumed absolute and mysterious con¬ 
trol of the thing or phenomenon person¬ 
ified, become a hero or a god to men, 
through his relations with them—rela¬ 
tions which are in fact the action and 
interaction of men with the things of 
their environments. A mythology is 


BULL. 30] 


MYTHOLOGY 


965 


composed of a body of such myths and 
fragments thereof. But of course no 
myth that has come down to the present 
time is simple. Myths and parts of 
myths have necessarily been employed to 
define and explain other myths or other 
and new phenomena, and the way from 
the first to the last is long and often 
broken. Vestigial myths, myths whose 
meaning or symbolism has from any 
cause whatsoever become obscured or 
entirely lost, constitute a great part of 
folklore, and such myths are also called 
folktales. 

A study of the lexic derivation of the 
terms “myth” and “mythology” will not 
lead to a satisfactory definition and inter¬ 
pretation of what is denoted by either 
term, for the genesis of the things so 
named was not understood when they re¬ 
ceived these appellations. In its broadest 
sense, mythos in Greek denoted whatever 
was uttered by the mouth of man—a say¬ 
ing, a legend, a story of something as un¬ 
derstood by the narrator, a word. But in 
Attic Greek it denoted also any prehis¬ 
toric story of the Greeks, and these were 
chiefly stories of gods and heroes, w T hich 
were, though this fact was unknown to the 
Greeks themselves, phenomena of nature. 
And when the term received this specific 
meaning it fell into discredit, because the 
origin and true character of myths not be¬ 
ing understood, these prehistoric stories 
by the advance in knowledge came into 
disrepute among the Greeks themselves, 
and after the rise of Christianity they were 
condemned as the wicked fables of a false 
religion. Hence, in popular usage, and 
quite apart from the study of mythology, 
the term “myth” denotes what is in fact 
nonexistent—a nothing with a name, a 
story wdthoutabasisof fact—“a nonentity 
of which an entity is affirmed, a nothing 
which is said to be something. ’ ’ Besides 
mythos in Greek, logos , signifying ‘word,’ 
was employed, originally with approxi¬ 
mately the same meaning in ordinary 
speech at the time of Homer, who some¬ 
times used them interchangeably. But, 
strictly speaking, there was a difference 
from the beginning which, by the need for 
precision in diction, finally led to a wide 
divergence in the signification of the two 
terms. Logos , derived from legein , ‘to 
gather,’ was seldom used by Homer to de¬ 
note ‘a saying, a speaking, or a significa¬ 
tion,’ but to denote usually ‘a gathering,’ 
or, strictly, ‘a telling, casting up or count¬ 
ing.’ In time this term came to mean 
not only the inward constitution but the 
outward form of thought, and finally to 
denote exact thinking or reason—not only 
the reason in man, but the reason in the 
universe—the Divine Logos, the Volition 
of God, the Son of God, God Himself. It 
is so employed in the opening lines of the 


first chapter of the Gospel of St John. 
Such is a brief outline of the uses of the 
two terms which in their primal significa¬ 
tion formed the term “mythology,” from 
which but little can be gathered as to 
what constitutes a myth. 

Up to a certain point there is substan¬ 
tial agreement among students in the use 
of the term myth. But this means but 
little. To the question, What is the 
nature and origin of a myth? wholly dif¬ 
ferent replies, perplexing in number, are 
given, and for this reason the study of 
mythology, of a definite body of myths, 
has not yet become a science. By careful 
study of adequate materials a clue to the 
meaning and significance of myths may 
be found in the apprehension—vague in 
the beginning, increasingly definite as the 
study progresses—that all these things, 
these tales, these gods, although so di¬ 
verse, arise from one simple though com¬ 
mon basis or motive. 

Every body, element, or phenomenon 
of nature, whether subjective or objective, 
has its myth or story to account for its 
origin, history, and manner of action. 
Portions of these myths, especially those 
concerning the most striking objects of 
an environment, are woven together by 
some master mind into a cycle of myths, 
and a myth of the beginnings, a genesis, 
or creation, story is thus developed. The 
horns and the cloven feet of the deer, the 
stripes of the chipmunk’s back, the tail 
of the beaver, the flat nose of the otter, 
the rattles of the snake, the tides of rivers, 
the earthquake, the meteor, the aurora 
borealis; in short, every phenomenon 
that fixed the attention required and re¬ 
ceived an explanation which, being con¬ 
ventional, satisfied the commonsense of 
the community, and which later, owing to 
its imputation of apparently impossible 
attributes to fictitious personages to ac¬ 
count for the operations of nature, be¬ 
came, by the growing knowledge of man, 
a myth. 

A myth is of interest from three view¬ 
points, namely, (1) as a literary product 
embodying a wondrous story of things 
and personages; (2) for the character of 
the matter it contains as expressive of 
human thought and the interpretation of 
human experience, and (3) for the pur¬ 
pose of comparison with the myths of 
alien or of cognate peoples and for the 
data it contains relating to the customs, 
arts, and archeology of the people among 
whom it exists. 

With the available data, it is as yet 
impossible to define with satisfactory 
clearness all the objective realities of the 
personal agencies or men-beings of the 
American Indian myths. In Indian 
thought these personages are constantly 
associated in function, and sometimes 


966 


MYTHOLOGY 


[b. a, e. 


they exercise derivative powers or are 
joined in mysterious kinship groups, al¬ 
ways combining the symbolism of per¬ 
sonified objective phenomena with im¬ 
puted life, mind, and volition, and with 
the exercise of attributed orenda, or magic 
power, of diverse function and potency. 
Moreover, the size and the muscular power 
of the objective reality personified have 
little, if any, relation to the strength of 
the orenda exercised by the man-being. 

To explain in part the multiform 
phenomena of different and successive 
environments, the philosophic ancestors 
of the Indians of to-day subconsciously 
imputed mind and immortal life to every 
object and phenomenon in nature, and 
to nearly every faculty and affection of 
the human mind and body. Concomi¬ 
tantly with this endowment of lifeless 
things with life and mind was the addi¬ 
tional endowment with orenda, which 
differed in strength and function with 
the individual. These dogmas underlie 
the mythology and religion of all the 
Indians, as they supplied to the latter’s 
inchoate reasoning satisfactory explana¬ 
tions of the phenomena of nature—life 
and death, dreams and disease, floral and 
faunal growth and reproduction, light 
and darkness, cold and heat, winter and 
summer, rain and snow, frost and ice, 
wind and storm. The term “animism” 
has been applied by some to this doctrine 
of the possession of immortal life and mind 
by lifeless and mindless things, but with 
an insufficient definition of the objective 
for which it stands. The uses and defini¬ 
tions of this term are now so numerous 
and contradictory that the critical student 
can not afford to employ it without an 
exact objective definition. Primarily, 
animism, or the imputation of life to life¬ 
less things, was selected to express what 
was considered the sole essential charac¬ 
teristic basis of the complex institutions 
called mythology and religion. But if 
the ascription of life to lifeless things is 
animism, then it becomes of fundamental 
importance to know exactly what kind 
of life is thus ascribed. If there is one 
difference between things which should 
be carefully distinguished, it is that be¬ 
tween the alleged ghosts of dead human 
beings and those other alleged spiritual 
beings which never have been real hu¬ 
man beings—the animal and the primal 
spirits. Does animism denote theascrip 
tion of only one or of all these three classes 
of spirits? Definite explanation is here 
lacking. So, as a key to the satisfactory 
interpretation of what constitutes mythol¬ 
ogy and religion, animism as heretofore 
defined has failed to meet the criticism of 
such scholars as Spencer, Max Muller, 
and Brinton, and so has fallen into that 
long category of equivocal words of which 


fetishism, shamanism, solarism, ancestor- 
worship, personification, and totemism 
are other members. Every one of these 
terms, as commonly employed, denotes 
some important phase or element in re¬ 
ligion or mythology which, variously de¬ 
fined by different students, does not, how¬ 
ever, form the characteristic basis of 
mythology and religion. 

The great apostle of ancestor-worship, 
Lippert, makes animism a mere sub¬ 
division of the worship of ancestral spirits, 
or ghosts. But Gruppe, adding to the 
confusion of ideas, makes animism synony¬ 
mous with fetishism, and describes a fetish 
as the tenement of a disembodied human 
spirit or ghost, and erroneously holds 
that fetishism is the result of a widely 
prevalent belief in the power of the hum'an 
ghost to take possession of any object 
whatsoever, to leave its ordinary dwell¬ 
ing, the remains of the human body, to 
enter some other object, such as the sky, 
the sun, the moon, the earth, a star, or 
what not. Even the chief gods of Greece, 
Rome, and India are by some regarded 
as fetishes developed through the exalta¬ 
tion of ancestral ghosts to this state. 
Their cult is regarded as a development 
of fetishism, which is an outgrowth of 
animism, which is, in turn, a development 
of ancestor-worship. To add to this array 
of conflicting definitions, Max Muller de¬ 
clares that fetishism is really the “very last 
stage in the downward course of religion.” 
Gruppe further holds that when a sky 
fetish or a star fetish becomes a totem, 
then the idea of “sons of heaven,” or 
“children of the sun,” is developed in 
the human mind, and sO, according to 
this doctrine, every religion, ancient and 
modern, may be explained by animism, 
fetishism, and totemism. Moved by this 
array of conflicting definitions, Max Mul¬ 
ler declares that, to secure clear thinking 
and sober reasoning, these three terms 
should be entirely discarded, or, if used, 
then let animism be defined as a belief in 
and worship of ancestral spirits, whence 
arises in the mind the simplest and most 
primitive ideas of immortality; let fetish¬ 
ism be defined as a worship of chance 
objects having miraculous powers; and, 
finally, let totemism be defined as the 
custom of choosing some emblem as the 
family or tribal mark to which worship 
is paid and which is regarded as the 
human or superhuman ancestor. Muller 
has failed to grasp the facts clearly, for 
no one of these excludes the others. 

Stahl (1737), adopting and developing 
into modern scientific form the classical 
theory of the identity of life and soul, 
employed the term “animism” to desig¬ 
nate this doctine. 

Tylor (1871), adopting the term 
4 4 animism ’ ’ from Stahl, defines it as “ the 


BULL. 30] 


MYTHOLOGY 


967 


belief in spiritual beings,” and as “the 
deep-lying doctrine of spiritual beings, 
which embodies the very essence of 
spiritualistic as opposed to materialistic 
philosophy”; and, finally, he says, 
“animism is, in fact, the groundwork of 
the philosophy of religion, from that of 
savages up to that of civilized men.” 
He further makes the belief in spiritual 
beings “the minimum definition of 
religion.” Hence, with Tylor, animism 
is broadly synonymous with religion. 

But, strict definition shows that a belief 
in spiritual beings, as such, did not, does 
not, and can not form the sole material 
out of which primitive thought has 
developed its gods and deities. To this 
extent, therefore, animism does not fur¬ 
nish the key to an accurate and valid 
explanation of mythology and religion. 

Brinton (1896) denies that there is any 
special religious activity taking the form 
of what Tylor calls “animism,” and 
declares that the belief that inanimate 
objects possess souls or spirits is common 
to all religions and many philosophies, 
and that it is not a trait characteristic of 
primitive faiths, but merely a secondary 
phenomenon of the religious sentiment. 
Further, he insists that “the acceptance 
of the doctrine of ‘ animism ’ as a sufficient 
explanation of early cults has led to the 
neglect, in English-speaking lands, of 
their profounder analysis.” 

So far as is definitely known, no sup¬ 
port is found in the mythologies of North 
America for the doctrine of ancestor- 
worship. This doctrine seeks to show 
that savage men had evolved real gods 
from the shades of their own dead chiefs 
and great men. It is more than doubt¬ 
ful that such a thing has ever been done 
by man. Competent data and trained 
experience with the Indians of North 
America show that the dominant ideas 
of early savage thought precluded such a 
thing. One of the most fundamental and 
characteristic beliefs of savage thought is 
the utter helplessness of man unaided by 
the magic power of some favoring being 
against the bodies and elements of his 
environment. The deities, the masters 
and controllers—the gods of later times— 
differed greatly in strength of body and 
in the potency of the magic power exer¬ 
cised by them, in knowledge and in 
astuteness of mind; but each in his own 
sphere and jurisdiction was generally 
supreme and incomprehensible. Human 
shades, or ghosts, did not or could not 
attain to these godlike gifts. To change, 
transform, create by metamorphosis, or 
to govern, some body or element in 
nature, is at once the prerogative and 
the function of a master—a controller— 
humanly speaking, a god. 


The attribution of power to do things 
magically, that is, to perform a func¬ 
tion in a mysterious and incomprehen¬ 
sible manner, was the fundamental pos¬ 
tulate of savage mind to account for the 
ability of the gods, the fictitious person¬ 
ages of its mythology, to perform the 
acts which are in fact the operations of 
the forces of nature. To define one such 
man-being or personage, the explanation, 
to be satisfactory, must be more than the 
mere statement of the imputation of life, 
mind, and the human form and attri¬ 
butes to an objective thing. There must 
also be stated the fact of the concomitant 
possession along with these of orenda , 
or magic power, differing from individual 
to individual in efficacy, function, and 
scope of action. 

While linguistics may greatly aid in 
comprehending myths, it is nevertheless 
not always safe for determining the sub¬ 
stance of the thought, the concept; and 
the student must eschew the habit of giv¬ 
ing only an etymology rather than a defi¬ 
nition of the things having the names of 
the mythic persons, which may be 
the subject of investigation. Etymology- 
may aid, but without corroborative testi¬ 
mony it may mislead. 

Many are the causes which bring about 
the decline and disintegration of a myth 
or a cycle of myths of a definite people. 
The migration or violent disruption of the 
people, the attrition or the superposition 
of diverse alien cultures, or the change or 
reformation of the religion of the people 
based on a recasting of opinions and like 
causes, all tend to the decline and dis¬ 
memberment and the final loss of a myth 
or a mythology. 

All tribes of common blood and speech 
are bound together by a common my¬ 
thology and by a religion founded on 
the teachings of that mythology. These 
doctrines deal with a vast body of all 
kinds of knowledge, arts, institutions, 
and customs. It is the creed of such a 
people that all their knowledge and wis¬ 
dom, all their rites and ceremonies, and 
all that they possess and all that they 
are socially and politically, have come to 
them through direct revelation from their 
gods, through the beneficence of the rul¬ 
ers of the bodies and elements of their 
environment. 

The social and political bonds of every 
known tribe are founded essentially on 
real or fictitious blood kinship, and the 
religious bonds that hold a people to its 
gods are founded on faith in the truth of 
the teachings of their myths. No stronger 
bonds than these are known to savage 
men. The disruption of these, by what¬ 
ever cause, results in the destruction of 
the people. 


968 


MYTHOLOGY 


[b. a. e. 


The constant struggle of man with his 
physical environment to secure welfare 
'was a warfare against elements ever defi¬ 
nitely and vividly personified and hu¬ 
manized by him, thus unconsciously 
making his surroundings quite unreal, 
though felt to be real; and his struggle 
with his environment was a ceaseless 
strife with animals and plants and trees 
in like manner ever mythically personi¬ 
fied and humanized by him ; and, finally, 
his tireless struggle with other men for 
supremacy and welfare was therefore 
typical, not only fundamentally and prac¬ 
tically, but also mythically and ideally; 
and so this never-ceasing struggle was an 
abiding, all-pervading, all-transforming 
theme of his thoughts, and an ever-im¬ 
pending, ever-absorbing business of his 
life, suffered and impelled by his cease¬ 
less yearning for welfare. 

An environment would have been re¬ 
garded by savage men very differently 
from what it would be by the cultured 
mind of to-day. To the former the 
bodies and elements composing it were 
regarded as beings, indeed as man-beings, 
and the operations of nature were ascribed 
to the action of the diverse magic powers, 
or orendas, exercised by these beings 
rather than to the forces of nature; so 
that the action and interaction of the 
bodies and elemental principles of nature 
were regarded as the result of the working 
of numberless beings through their oren¬ 
das. Among most known tribes in North 
America the earth is regarded as a 
humanized being in person and form, 
every particle of whose body is living 
substance and potent with the quick¬ 
ening power of life, which is bestowed 
on all who feed upon her. They that 
feed upon her are the plants and the 
trees, who are indeed beings living and 
having a being because they receive life 
substance from the earth, hence they are 
like the primal beings endowed with mind 
and volition, to whom prayer (q. v.) may 
be offered, since they rule and dispose in 
their several jurisdictions unless they are 
overcome by some more powerful orenda. 
Now, a prayer is psychologically the ex¬ 
pression of the fact that the petitioner in 
need is unable to secure what is required 
for the welfare, or in distress to prevent 
what will result in the ill-fare, of himself 
or his kind. The substance of the prayer 
merely tells in what direction or in what 
respect this inability exists. In turn, the 
animals and men live on the products of 
the trees and plants, by which means they 
renew life and gain the quickening power 
of life, indirectly from the earth-mother, 
and thus by a metaphor they are said to 
have come up out of the earth. As the 
giver of life, the earth is regarded affec¬ 
tionately and is called Mother, but as the 


taker of life and thedevourer of their dead 
bodies, she is regarded as wicked and a 
cannibal. 

In the science of opinions mythology 
is found to be a fruitful field in which to 
gather data regarding the origin and 
growth of human concepts relating to 
man and the world around him. A study 
of the birth and evolution of the concepts 
of the human mind indicates clearly that 
the beginnings of conventional forms and 
ideas and their variations along the lines 
of their development are almost never 
quite so simple, or rather quite so direct, 
as they may seem—are seldom, even in 
the beginning, the direct product of the 
environmental resource and exigency act¬ 
ing together so immediately and so ex¬ 
clusively of mental agency as students are 
apt to assume. As a rule they are rather 
the product of these things—these factors 
and conditions of environment acting 
very indirectly and sometimes very 
subtly and complexly—through the con¬ 
dition of mind wrought by long-continued 
life and experience therein, or, again, act¬ 
ing through the state of mind borne 
over from one environment to another. 
It is the part of wisdom to be more cau¬ 
tious in deriving ideas and concepts, arts, 
or even technic forms of a people too in¬ 
stantly, too directly, from the environ¬ 
ing natural objects or elements they may 
simulate or resemble. The motive, if 
not for the choice, at least for the persist¬ 
ency, of a given mode of a concept in re¬ 
lation to any objective factor is always a 
psychic reason, not a mere first-hand in¬ 
fluence of environment or of accident in 
the popular sense of this term. This dis¬ 
position of the “mere accident” or 
“chance” hypothesis of origins dispels 
many perplexities in the formation of ex¬ 
act judgment concerning comparative 
data, in the identifications of cognate 
forms and concepts among widely sepa¬ 
rated peoples; for instance, in the drawing 
of sound inferences particularly regard¬ 
ing their common or generic, specific or 
exceptional, origin and growth, as shown 
by the data in question. 

As it is evident that independent proc¬ 
esses and diverse factors combined can 
not be alike in every particular in widely 
separated parts of the world, there is 
found a means for determining, through 
minute differences in similarity, rather 
than through general similarities alone, 
howsoever striking they may appear, 
whether such forms are related, whether 
or not they havea common genesiswhence 
they have inherited aught in common. 
Hence caution makes it incumbent on 
students to beware of the alluring fallacy 
lurking in the frequently repeated epigram 
that “human nature is everywhere the 
same. ’ ’ The nature of men differs widely 


BULL. 30] 


MYTHOLOGY 


969 


from differences of origin, from differ¬ 
ences of history, from differences of edu¬ 
cation, and from differences of environ¬ 
ment. Hence, to produce the same human 
nature everywhere, these factors must 
everywhere be the same. The environ¬ 
ments of no two peoples are ever precisely 
the same, and so the two differ in their 
character, in their activities, and in their 
beliefs. 

To the primitive inchoate thought of 
the North American Indian all the bodies 
and elements of his subjective and object¬ 
ive environment were humanized be¬ 
ings—man-beings, or beings that were 
persons, that were man in form and at¬ 
tributes and endowed with immortal life 
(not souls in the modern acceptation of 
this term), with omniscience, and with 
potent magic power in their several juris¬ 
dictions. These beings were formed in 
the image of man, because man was the 
highest type of being known to himself 
and because of his subjective method of 
thought, which imputed to outside things, 
objective realities, his own form and at¬ 
tributes. He could conceive of nature in 
no other way. They sometimes, however, 
had the power of instant change or trans¬ 
migration into any desired object through 
the exercise of peculiar magic power. 

The world of the savage was indeed 
of small extent, being confined by his 
boundless ignorance to the countries bor¬ 
dering on his own, a little, if any, beyond 
his horizon. Beyond this, he knew noth¬ 
ing of the world, nothing of its extent or 
structure. This fact is important and 
easily verified, and this knowledge aids 
in fully appreciating the teachings of 
the philosophy of savage men. Around 
and through this limited region traveled 
the sun, the moon, the stars, the winds, 
the meteors and the fire dragons of the 
night, and the fitful auroral cherubim of 
the north. All these were to him man- 
beings. All trees and plants—the sturdy 
oak, the tall pine, and the wild parsnip— 
were such beings rooted to the earth by 
the mighty spell of some potent wizard, 
and so, unlike the deer, they do not ordi¬ 
narily travel from place to place. In like 
manner, hills and mountains and the 
waters of the earth may sometimes be 
thus spellbound by the potency of some 
enchantment. Earthquakes are some¬ 
times caused by mountains which, held in 
pitiless thralldom by the orenda of some 
mighty sorcerer, struggle in agony to be 
freed. And even the least of these are 
reputed to be potent in the exercise of 
magic power. But rivers run and rills 
and brooks leap and bound over the land, 
yet even these in the ripeness of time 
may be gripped to silence by the mighty 
magic power of the god of winter. 


Among all peoples in all times and in 
all planes of culture there were persons 
whose opinions were orthodox, and there 
were also persons whose opinions were 
heterodox, and were therefore a constant 
protest against the common opinions, the 
commonsense of the community; these 
were the agnostics of the ages, the prophets 
of change and reformation. 

Every ethnic body of myths of the 
North American Indians forms a circum¬ 
stantial narration of the origin of the 
world of the myth-makers and of all 
things and creatures therein. From these 
narratives it is learned that a world, 
earlier than the present, situated usually 
above the visible sky, existed from the 
beginning of time, in which dwelt the 
first or prototypal personages who, hav¬ 
ing the form and the attributes of man, 
are herein called man-beings. Each of 
these man-beings possessed a magic pow¬ 
er peculiar to himself or herself, by which 
he or she was later enabled to perform his 
or her functions after the metamorphosis 
of all things. The life and manner of liv¬ 
ing of the Indians to-day is patterned after 
that of these man-beings in their first 
estate. They were the prototypes of the 
things which are now on this earth. 

This elder world is introduced in a 
state of peace and harmony. In the ripe¬ 
ness of time, unrest and discord arose 
among these first beings, because the 
minds of all, except a very small number, 
becoming abnormal, were changed, and 
the former state of tranquillity was soon 
succeeded by a complete metamorphosis 
of all things and beings, or was followed 
by commotion, collision, and strife. The 
transformed things, the prototypes, were 
banished from the sky-land to this world, 
whereupon it acquired its present appear¬ 
ance and became peopled by all that is 
upon it—man, animals, trees, and plants, 
who formerly were man-beings. In some 
cosmologies man is brought upon the 
scene later and in a peculiar manner. 
Each man-being became transformed into 
whathisor her attributes required, what 
his primal and unchangeable nature de¬ 
manded, and then he or she became in 
body what he had been, in a disguised 
body, before the transformation. • But 
those man-beings whose minds did not 
change by becoming abnormal, remained 
therein the skyland—separate, peculiar, 
and immortal. Indeed they are but 
shadowy figures passing into the shoreless 
sea of oblivion. 

Among the tribes of North American 
Indians there is a striking similarity in 
their cycles of genesis myths, in that 
they treat of several regions or worlds. 
Sometimes around and above the mid¬ 
world, the habitat of the myth, are placed 


970 


MYTHOLOGY 


[B. A. E. 


a group of worlds—one at the east, one 
at the south, one at the west, one at the 
north, one above, and one below—which, 
with the midworld, number seven in all. 
Even each of the principal colors is as¬ 
signed to its appropriate world (see Color 
symbolism). Hence, to the primitive mind, 
the cosmos (if the term be allowed here) 
was a universe of man-beings whose activ¬ 
ities constituted the operations of nature. 
To it nothing was what it is to scientific 
thought. Indeed, it was a world wholly 
artificial and fanciful. It was the product 
of the fancy of savage and inchoate 
thinking, of the commonsense of savage 
thought. 

So far as is definitely known, the vari¬ 
ous systems of mythology in North Amer¬ 
ica differ much in detail one from an¬ 
other, superficially giving them the as¬ 
pect of fundamental difference of origin 
and growth; but a careful study of them 
discloses the fact that they accord with 
all great bodies of mythology in a prin¬ 
ciple which underlies all, namely, the 
principle of change, transmigration, or 
metamorphosis of things, through the 
exercise of orenda , or magic power, from 
one state, condition, or form, to another. 
By this means things have become what 
they now are. Strictly, then, creation of 
something from nothing has no place in 
them. In these mythologies, purporting to 
be philosophies, of course, no knowledge 
of the real changes which have affected 
the environing world is to be sought; but 
it is equally true that in them are em¬ 
bedded, like rare fossils and precious 
gems, many most important facts regard¬ 
ing the history of the human mind. 

For a definite people in a definite plane 
of culture, the myths and the concomi¬ 
tant beliefs resting on them, of their 
neighbors, are not usually true, since the 
personages and the events narrated in 
them have an aspect and an expression 
quite different from their own, although 
they may in the last analysis express 
fundamentally identical things—may in 
fact spring from identical motives. 

Among the Iroquois and the eastern 
Algonquian tribes, the Thunder people, 
human in form and mind and usually 
four in number, are most important and 
staunch friends of man. But in the Lake 
region, the N. W. coast to Alaska, and in 
the northern drainage of the Mississippi 
and Missouri valleys, this conception is 
replaced by that of the Thunderbird. 

Among the Algonquian and the Iro- 
quoian tribes the myths regarding the 
so-called fire-dragon are at once striking 
and important. Now, the fire-dragon is 
in fact the personification of the meteor. 
Flying through the air among the stars, 
the larger meteors appear against some 


midnight sky like fiery reptiles sheathed 
in lambent flames. It is believed of them 
that they fly from one lake or deep river 
to another, in the bottom of which they 
are bound by enchantment to dwell, for 
should they be permitted to remain on 
the land they would set the world on fire. 
The Iroquois applied their name for the 
fire-dragon, ‘light-thrower,’ to the lion 
when first seen, thus indicating their con¬ 
ception of thefierceness of the fire-dragon. 
The Ottawa and Chippewa missibizi, or 
missibizhu, literally ‘great lynx,’ is their 
name for this mythic being. The horned 
serpent does not belong here, but the 
misnamed.tigers of the Peoria and other 
Algonquian tribes do. Among the Iro¬ 
quois it was the deeds of the fire-dragon 
that hastened the occasion for the meta¬ 
morphosis of the primal beings. 

As early as 1868 Brinton called atten¬ 
tion to the curious circumstance that in 
the mythology of those Eskimo who had 
had no contact with European travelers, 
there were no changes or transformations 
of the world affecting the aspect and 
character of the earth. In this state¬ 
ment he is followed by Boas (1904), who 
also claims that the animal myth proper 
did not belong originally to Eskimo my¬ 
thology, although there are now in this 
mythology some animal myths and weird 
tales and accounts regarding monsters and 
vampire ghosts and the thaumaturgic 
deeds of shamans and wizards. This is 
in strong contrast with the content of the 
mythologies of the Indian tribes that have 
been studied. 

In its general aspects the mythology of 
the North American Indians has been in¬ 
structively and profitably discussed by 
several American anthropologists, who 
have greatly advanced the study and 
knowledge of the subject. Among these 
are Powell, Brinton, Boas, Curtin, 
Fletcher, Matthews, Cushing, Fewkes, 
and Dixon. 

Powell treated the subject from the 
philosophicandevolutional pointof view, 
and sought to establish successive stages 
in the development of the mythologic 
thought or concept, making them imputa¬ 
tion, personification, and reification; and 
the product he divided into four stages 
from the character of the dominant gods 
ineach, namely, (1 ) hecastotheism, wherein 
everything has life, personality, volition, 
and design, and the wondrous attributes 
of man; (2) zodtheism , wherein life is not 
attributed indiscriminately to lifeless 
things, the attributes of man are imputed 
to the animals and no line of demarca¬ 
tion is drawn between man and beast, 
and all facts and phenomena of nature 
are explained in the mythic history of 
these zoomorphic gods; (3) physitheism, 


BULL. 30] 


MYTHOLOGY 


971 


wherein a wide difference is recognized 
between man and the animals, the powers 
and phenomena of nature are personified, 
and the gods are anthropomorphic; and 
(4) psychotheism , wherein mental attri¬ 
butes and moral and social characteristics 
with which are associated the powers of 
nature are personified and deified, and 
there arise gods of war, of love, of rev¬ 
elry, plenty, and fortune. This last stage, 
by processes of mental integration, passes 
into monotheism on the one hand and 
into pantheism on the other. It is found 
that these four stages are not thus succes¬ 
sive, but that they may and do overlap, 
and that it is best perhaps to call them 
phases rather than stages of growth, in 
that they may exist side by side. 

Brinton learnedly calls attention to the 
distinctively native American character 
of the large body of myths and tales 
rehearsed among the American aborig¬ 
ines. His studies include also much 
etymological analysis of mythic and 
legendary names, which is unfortunately 
largely inaccurate, analysis being appar¬ 
ently made to accord with a preconceived 
idea of what it should disclose. This 
vitiates a large part of his otherwise 
excellent identifications of the objective 
realities of the agents found in the my¬ 
thology. He also treats in his instructive 
style the various cults of the demiurge, 
or the culture-hero or hero-god; but it 
must be borne in mind that here the 
so-called hero-god is not solely or even 
chiefly such in character. In discussing 
the hero-myths of the n. w. Pacific coast 
tribes, Boas points out the fact that the 
culture-hero of that area was not always 
prompted by altruistic motives in “giv¬ 
ing the world its present shape and man 
his arts.” The hero is credited with 
failures as well as with successes, and 
in character is an “egotist pure and 
simple.” On the other hand, Boas finds 
in the life and character of the Algon- 
quian Nanabozho (q. v.) altruistic motives 
dominant. This tendency to displace the 
egotistic motives of the primitive trans¬ 
former with preeminently altruistic ones 
is strongly marked in the character of the 
Iroquoian Tharonhiawagon (q. v.), a par¬ 
allel if not a cognate conception with that 
of the Alonquian Nanabozho. As show¬ 
ing a transitional stage on the way to al¬ 
truism, Boas states that the transformer 
among the Kwakiutl brings about the 
changes for the benefit of a friend and not 
for himself. While there are some Algon- 
quian myths in which Nanabozho appears 
as a trickster and teller of falsehoods, 
among the Iroquois the trickster and buf¬ 
foon has been developed alongside that 
of the demiurge, and is sometimes reputed 
to be the brother of Death. The mink, 


the wolverene, tne bluejay, the raven- 
and the coyote are represented as trick, 
sters in the myths of many of the tribes 
of the Pacific slope and the N. W. coast. 

Matthews, in “The Night Chant, a 
Ceremony of the Navaho” (Mem. Am. 
Mus. Nat. Hist., v, 1902), introduces an 
interesting account of the striking sym¬ 
bolism and mythic philosophy of this 
remarkable people. 

Miss Fletcher, in her many excellent 
and instructive writings on the customs 
and symbolism of the Indians whom she 
has studied, has placed the study of my¬ 
thology on a scientific basis. In her 
“Hako: A Pawnee Ceremony” (22d 
Rep. B. A. E., 1903), Miss Fletcher treats 
in masterful manner this interesting 
series of rites, which, with marked sym¬ 
pathy and the skill of ripe experience, 
she analyzes and interprets in such wise 
that the delicately veiled symbolism and 
mythic conceptions are clearly brought to 
view. 

In the Zuni record of the genesis of the 
worlds, as recorded by Cushing (13th 
Rep. B. A. E., 1896), Awonawilona, the 
Maker and Container of all, alone and un¬ 
perplexed awaiting fate, existed before the 
beginning of time in the darkness which 
knew no beginning. Then he conceived 
within himself, and projecting his think¬ 
ing into the void of night, around him 
evolved fogs of increase—mists potent with 
growth. Then, in like manner, the All¬ 
container took upon himself the form and 
person of the Sun, the Father of men, who 
thus came to be, and by whose light and 
brightening the cloud mists became thick¬ 
ened into water, and thus was made the 
world-holding sea. Then from “his sub¬ 
stance of flesh outdrawn from the surface 
of his person,” he made the seed of two 
worlds, fecundating therewith the sea. 
By the heat of his rays there was formed 
thereon green scums, which increasing 
apace became “The Four-fold Containing 
Mother-earth” and the “All-covering 
Father-sky.” Then from the consorting 
together of these twain on the great 
world-waters, terrestrial life was gener¬ 
ated, and therefrom sprang all beings of 
earth—men and the creatures, from the 
“Four-fold womb of the World.” Then 
the Earth-mother repulsed the Sky- 
father, and growing heavy sank into the 
embrace of the waters of the sea, and 
thus she separated from the Sky-father, 
leaving him in the embrace of the waters 
above. Moreover, the Earth-mother 
and the Sky-father, like all surpassing 
beings, were changeable, metamorphic, 
even like smoke in the wind, were 
“ transmutable at thought, manifesting 
themselves in any form at will, as 
dancers may by mask-making.” Then 


972 


MYTHOLOGY 


[b. a. e. 


from the nethermost of the four caves 
(wombs) of the world, the seed of men 
and the creatures took form and grew; 
even as within eggs in warm places worms 
quickly form and appear, and, growing, 
soon burst their shells and emerge, as may 
happen, birds, tadpoles, or serpents; so 
men and all creatures grew manifoldly 
and multiplied in many kinds. Thus did 
the lowermost world cave become over¬ 
filled with living things, full of unfinished 
creatures, crawling like reptiles one over 
another in black darkness, thickly crowd¬ 
ing together and treading one on another, 
one spittingon another and doing other in¬ 
decency, in such manner that the murmur- 
ings and the lamentations became loud, 
and many amidst the growing confusion 
sought to escape, growing wiser and more 
manlike. Then Poshaiyankya, the fore¬ 
most and wisest of men, arising from the 
nethermost sea, came among men and the 
living things, and, pitying them, obtained 
egress from that first world cave through 
such a dark and narrow path that some 
seeing somewhat, crowding after, could 
not follow him, so eager mightily did they 
strive one with another. Alone then did 
Poshaiyankya come from one cave to 
another into this world, then, island-like, 
lying amidst the world waters, vast, wet, 
and unstable. He sought and found the 
Sun-father and besought him to deliver 
the men and the creatures from that neth¬ 
ermost world. 

Speaking of the Maidu myths, Dixon 
(Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvn, pt. 3, 
1905) says that from present knowledge 
of them, the facts of most interest are the 
large measure of system and sequence 
found in the mythology of the stock; 
the prominence given to the “creation 
episode” and to the events connected 
with it; the strongly contrasted charac¬ 
ters of the “Creator” and the Coyote; 
the apparent absence of a myth of migra¬ 
tion, and the diversity shown within the 
stock; that “beginning with the cre¬ 
ation, a rather systematic chain of events 
leads up to the appearance of the ances¬ 
tors of the present Indians, with whose 
coming the mythic cycle came to a close. 
This mythic era seems to fall into a 
number of periods, with each of which 
a group or set of myths has to deal.” 
During the first era occurs the coming of 
KodoyanpS (Earth-namer) and Coyote, 
the “discovery” of this world by them, 


and the preparation of it for the “first 
people”; next, the “creation” of the 
first people and the making and plant¬ 
ing of the germs of human beings, the 
Indians (in the form of small wooden 
figures), who were to follow; third, the 
long period in which the first people were 
engaged in violence and conflict, and were 
finally transformed into the various ani¬ 
mals in the present world. During this 
period Earth - maker (or Earth-namer) 
sought to destroy Coyote, whose evil 
ways and desires antagonized his own. 
In this struggle Earth-namer was assisted 
by the Conqueror, who destroyed many 
monsters and evil beings who later 
would have endangered the life of men 
who should come on the scene. In the 
final period comes the last struggle, 
wherein Earth-maker strives in vain with 
Coyote, his defeat and flight to the East 
synchronously with the coming of the 
human race, the Indians, who sprang up 
from the places where the original pairs 
had long before been buried as small 
wooden figures. Dixon further says: 
“Nor is the creation here merely an epi¬ 
sode—a re-creation after a deluge brought 
on by one cause or another—as it is in 
some mythologies. Here the creation is 
a real beginning; beyond it, behind it, 
there is nothing. In the beginning was 
only the great sea, calm and unlimited, 
to which, down from the clear sky, the 
Creator came, or on which he and Coyote 
were floating in a canoe. Of the origin 
or previous place of abode of either Crea¬ 
tor or Coyote, the Maidu knew nothing.” 
But Dixon adds that the Achomawi, 
northern neighbors of the Maidu, push 
this history much farther back, saying 
that at first there were but the shoreless 
sea and the clear sky; that a tiny cloud 
appeared in the sky, which, gradually 
increasing in size, finally attained large 
proportions, then condensed until it be¬ 
came the Silver-Gray Fox, the Creator; 
that immediately there arose a fog which 
in turn condensed until it became Coyote. 
See Calumet, Fetish, Orenda, Religion. 

The bibliography of the mythology of 
the Indians n. of Mexico is very exten¬ 
sive. For an excellent summary of the 
literature of the subject, consult Cham¬ 
berlain in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xvm, 111, 
1905, and the continuous Record of Ameri¬ 
can Folk-lore published in the same 
magazine. (j. n. b. h.) 


o 


BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 


BULLETIN 30 



|pr»r»! ! 'V 


ooTirt-' 


Ciivlf 


— A-i--.‘Jt# 


Churrhill 


jaM* s 


r«TR* 








w t s C 


>• KErc 


^ LINGUISTIC FAMILIES 


..IN I) I, 


AMERICAN INDIANS 


North ok Mexico 
by 

J.WPowell. 




TEC AN 


arawaka 


Salhllo 


ClLtUiCJL* 


!l!copAi: 


N.E. SIBERIA 


Marti!** g “*0 


'inDAIi.GOr 


Oaxac 


ALEUTIAN ISLANDS 


IS>° »'« •“»* 


loo 


^OO STATUTE MILES 








































































































































































































































































I 





















































































































































- 
























-» 






































































































































































. 


































































































































































































. 




























































i 












































* 


























































































